Digital Ricoeur - JStor

Ricoeur appearing with Search Term: sin

Book Results: 5473

Journal Results: 2050

CHAPTER 3 Civic Education on Stage: from: Exploring Jesuit Distinctiveness
Author(s) Rzegocka Jolanta
Abstract: The Jesuit order and its theater have played a vital part in the history of Europe and its cultural heritage.¹ Ever since the founding of the Society in 1540, the Jesuits have been active preachers, distinguished theologians and disputants, and have served as confessors and tutors to sovereigns and members of royal families across Christendom.² However, it is the order’s emphasis on education and the Jesuits’ role as teachers that put the activities of the Society at the heart of the present chapter. Jesuit colleges modeled after their prominent school, the Collegium Romanum (1551), offered a combination of high-quality teaching

1 Problems of Interpretation: from: The Political Style of Conspiracy
Abstract: Conspiracy, the secret cooperation for the achievement of some base design, has been a frequently recurring topic of political discussions since ancient times. But it has been the turbulent history of the United States that has provided the most fertile ground for conspiracy discourse. From the time of the Revolution to the present day, conspiracy discourse—that is, linguistic and symbolic practices and artifacts revolving around themes, claims, or accusations of conspiracy—has pervaded diverse forums and genres of American political discourse. For many critics and commentators, the ubiquity of conspiracy theories in American history and the increasing appeal of

5 Lessons of the Slave Power Conspiracy: from: The Political Style of Conspiracy
Abstract: It is unfortunate that at a juncture in history when conspiracy theories of various sorts increasingly populate the diverse locales of public spheres around the world, the study of conspiracy discourse continues to be hobbled, rather than enabled, by the legacy of the paranoid style. Too many scholars studying conspiracy still conceive of conspiracy discourse as uniformly deranged and dangerous. While a number of scholars have attempted to move beyond the oversimplifications and pejorative assumptions of the paranoid style in their engagements with mainstream conspiracy texts, few have brought to the issue Hofstadterʹs critical sensitivity and concern with discursive form.¹

Chapter Three Countersymbols and Confederacy from: Superchurch
Abstract: Fundamentalism has its roots in revivalism, but the Fundamentalist movement of the twentieth century has emerged as a radical reformulation of revivalist idealism. When Charles Finney addressed listeners and readers in his 1835 Lectures on Revivals of Religion, he warned of individual enemies that the revival church would have to confront and overcome in order to establish Christ’s kingdom on earth. He warned of “professors of religion” who would dismiss and speak against the work of revival. He warned often of a personal devil who conspired to keep sinners out of heaven. When he spoke against institutions and systems, however,

Chapter Six The Limits of Accommodation from: Superchurch
Abstract: Driving north toward Willow Creek Community Church, one passes out of the city—stores and strip malls fading into well-maintained industrial parks and suburban neighborhoods. Willow Creek does not stand out from its surroundings. Despite the acres of asphalt parking lots, the church building—a complex of interconnected additions—feels secluded, set apart in a “natural” environment, with well-maintained lawns and trees and a beautiful pond. Except for the line of cars pulling in on a Sunday morning, it resembles all the other business and industrial parks in the area, set well back from the street, shielded from the outside

3 Representing Target Populations from: Invoking the Invisible Hand
Abstract: Social policies ineluctably invoke target populations—people who, in the case of Social Security, would contribute to and benefit from an insurance or investment system. Whether supporting or opposing a policy proposal, debate participants address various qualities of a target population. Policymakers may assert that future retirees harbor hopes and dreams for their retirement, while retirees may expect policies to help them realize their visions. Beyond aspirations, potential beneficiaries may exhibit stated and unstated needs. Workers certainly do not plan to suffer a serious on-the-job injury or premature death, but they may need to protect their families against a tragic

Book Title: Mourning Animals-Rituals and Practices Surrounding Animal Death
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Kalof Linda
Abstract: We live more intimately with nonhuman animals than ever before in history. The change in the way we cohabitate with animals can be seen in the way we treat them when they die. There is an almost infinite variety of ways to help us cope with the loss of our nonhuman friends-from burial, cremation, and taxidermy; to wearing or displaying the remains (ashes, fur, or other parts) of our deceased animals in jewelry, tattoos, or other artwork; to counselors who specialize in helping people mourn pets; to classes for veterinarians; to tips to help the surviving animals who are grieving their animal friends; to pet psychics and memorial websites. But the reality is that these practices, and related beliefs about animal souls or animal afterlife, generally only extend, with very few exceptions, to certain kinds of animals-pets. Most animals, in most cultures, are not mourned, and the question of an animal afterlife is not contemplated at all. Mourning Animalsinvestigates how we mourn animal deaths, which animals are grievable, and what the implications are for all animals.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt1c6v89n

Mourning the Sacrifice: from: Mourning Animals
Author(s) MORRIS JAMES
Abstract: The remains of animals, fragments of bone and horn, are often the most common finds recovered from archaeological excavations. The potential of using this material to examine questions of past economics and environment has long been recognized and is viewed by many archaeologists as the primary purpose of animal remains. In part this is due to the paradigm in which zooarchaeology developed and a consequence of practitioners’ concentration on taphonomy and quantification.¹ But the complex intertwined relationships between humans and animals have long been recognized, a good example being Lévi-Strauss’s oft quoted “natural species are chosen, not because they are

The Issue of Animals’ Souls within the Anglican Debate in the Eighteenth to Nineteenth Centuries from: Mourning Animals
Author(s) MASSARO ALMA
Abstract: The debate on animal souls and the problem of theodicy with respect to animal suffering, a discussion that has been a feature of European thought since the seventeenth century, became the perfect pillar for those philosophies that were born in the wake of scientific discoveries and that aimed to assert the unreasonableness of Christianity. Such philosophies questioned how a good and almighty God could let innocent animals undergo all the evils they endure daily. One solution was to deny to animals feelings and reason; for instance, Descartes’s theory of the animal-machine suggested that animals were unable to feel pleasure and

Freeze-Drying Fido: from: Mourning Animals
Author(s) COLVIN CHRISTINA M.
Abstract: Two forms of taxidermy predominate in the popular imagination: the type specimen in the natural history museum and the severed-head–style hunting trophy. In the case of the museum specimen, taxidermic animals stand in for their species; single animals serve as representatives of whole populations. In the tradition of the “Father of Modern Taxidermy” Carl Akeley, the aesthetic of the museum specimen minimizes differences between individuals (such as bullet wounds and other surface blemishes) to maximize an animal’s emblematic power; according to Donna Haraway, such taxidermy makes “nature true to type.”¹ In the case of hunting trophies, taxidermic animals represent

Claire: from: Mourning Animals
Author(s) SCHLOSSER JULIA
Abstract: Claire came to live with me in 2009. I made the decision to euthanize her on July 5, 2011, because she suffered from osteomyelitis, a painful bone infection. I’ve lived with animals since I was four. In my adult life, I have loved, nursed, and mourned the loss of beloved animal companions. But when I reflect on Claire’s life, I am haunted by questions that I never had to ask when those other animals died. Would she have rather I left her where I met her, living in a cardboard box in a windowless bathroom? Or would she have made

Britain at War: from: Mourning Animals
Author(s) KEAN HILDA
Abstract: In recent decades when contested invasions of Afghanistan and Iraq have resulted in human and nonhuman animal combatant and civilian war dead—and massive demonstrations against such adventures—the British remain obsessed with commemorating the Second World War. The 1939–45 war has remained as a “good” war in public memory. Despite—or perhaps because of—the passing of the years new memorials have been erected to discrete groups of humans previously not specifically commemorated. These include one to firefighters near St. Paul’s Cathedral (which they helped to ensure was not destroyed by fire), one to women in the site

You’re My Sanctuary: from: Mourning Animals
Author(s) PALLOTTA NICOLE R.
Abstract: The societal acceptance of companion animals as legitimate objects of grief has become more widespread alongside other cultural trends that have elevated the status of dogs and cats in society, including the rising number of homes that include one or more companion animals and the shifting definition of those companion animals as family members. These trends have led to

Keeping Ghosts Close: from: Mourning Animals
Author(s) GRUEN LORI
Abstract: When the gentle turkey called Dante began to flail and flap in the grip of a heart attack, VINE Sanctuary’s recently hired bird caregiver Danielle Salino flung herself over him, using her own body to buffer him and others from the frantic spasms of his powerful wings. She whispered to him until the spasms subsided then remained draped over his body.

Tradition and Agency in Humanistic Rhetoric from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: I intend to approach the issue of tradition indirectly by first considering some problems connected with rhetorical agency. This strategy might seem awkward, if not actually dangerous, since it entangles two equally complex and disputed concepts. Nevertheless, I hope to show that, within the humanistic strand of rhetoric, these concepts are linked in a way that is not now recognized but has an important bearing on our understanding of both. Specifically, I argue that the humanistic approach entails a productively ambiguous notion of agency that positions the orator both as an individual who leads an audience and as a member

The Topics of Argumentative Invention in Latin Rhetorical Theory from Cicero to Boethius from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: Rhetorical arguments generally deal with confused notions, with ideas and concepts that do not admit of a single, unequivocal meaning.¹ Consequently, rhetorical argumentation normally does not begin with fixed axioms in the manner of demonstrative reasoning. Instead rhetoricians must draw their starting points from accepted beliefs and values relative to the audience and the subject of discourse. When these beliefs and values are considered at a high level of generality, they become “commonplaces” or “common topics” for argumentation: the attempt to render a systematic account of such topics therefore has been a major concern of rhetorical theory from antiquity to

Topical Invention and Metaphoric Interaction from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: In the course of his analysis of traditional principles of rhetoric, Kenneth Burke makes the curious remark that “the Aristotelian topics shift so imperceptibly between ideas and images that you wonder how the two realms could ever come to be at odds.”¹ The remark is curious, perhaps even subversive, since it associates two domains that both ancient and modern theorists generally have kept apart. In classical rhetoric, of course, images belong to the office of style and function to ornament the language of oratory. Topics, on the other hand, refer to matters of thought and to the office of invention.

Up from Theory: from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: When I first began to study rhetoric, some forty or so years ago, the terms “substance” and “theory” occupied privileged positions in disciplinary consciousness. “Substance” referred to content or subject matter, and in this pre-postdisciplinary scheme of things, scholars were supposed to work within bounded and clearly differentiated domains of inquiry. A discipline, that is, needed to have a proper subject, and since scholarship demanded rationally refined, systematically organized abstract principles that stood above and apart from particulars, the study of an academic subject required the use of “theory.” In the quasi discipline then known as speech ( requiescat in pace),

In Search of Ariadne’s Thread: from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: My assignment was to review the articles on rhetorical theory that appeared in the speech communication journals during the years 1976 and 1977. Although the editor provided a list of the relevant journals, I was left to my own devices in selecting the articles that fell under the heading of rhetorical theory. I approached this task with profound reservations, since, as we all know through bitter experience, rhetorical theory is virtually impossible to define. Thus, I was afraid that I would either have to report on everything in the journals or appear to be arbitrary.

Textual Criticism: from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: At the moment of his fatal heart attack last November, Jerry Mohrmann was engaged in his normal academic business. He was writing rhetorical criticism. More specifically, he was completing a close analysis of a short but important speech text—John Calhoun’s oration “On the Reception of the Abolition Petitions.” This study had a specific and seemingly narrow focus, but it arose from a number of complex, general issues and incorporated many of Jerry’s characteristic interests. Thus, to recall the history of this project allows us to learn much not only about the man but also about the vocation he pursued.

Things Made by Words: from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: This essay is in part an effort to influence the continuing debate about textual criticism and critical rhetoric and in part an exercise in self-criticism. Since I am a principal in the debate, I cannot pretend to assume a neutral or disinterested position, but my present concern is not polemic, or at least not explicitly polemic. Instead, following and extending a point made by Dilip Gaonkar,¹ I want to frame the debate in terms that differ from the prevailing conception and in fact differ from the way I have thought about it in the past. Gaonkar argues—quite rightly, I

Lincoln at Cooper Union: from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Author(s) Mohrmann G. P.
Abstract: The last issue of this journal included our critique of Lincoln’s Cooper Union Address, and we assume that the neo-classical origins of the analysis were apparent, even though methodological concerns were slighted. A more elaborate statement on methodology appeared in an earlier version, but the editors cautioned that the single article did not offer sufficient scope for both an explication of the rationale and its application. Accepting their advice, we deleted most of the theoretical material, but having offered the critique, we want to explore further its theoretical bases.

Instrumental and Constitutive Rhetoric in Martin Luther King Jr.’s “Letter from Birmingham Jail” from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Author(s) Utley Ebony A.
Abstract: Almost thirty years ago, in an essay devoted to the Autobiography of Malcolm X, Thomas Benson commented that rhetoric is, among other things, a way of constituting the self within a scene composed of “exigencies, constraints, others and the self,” and it is also a resource for “exercising control over self, others, and by extension the scene.”¹ Thus, Benson assigns rhetoric a dual function. It is simultaneously generative and instrumental, since it helps to constitute the identity of self, other, and scene, while it also pulls these identities within the orbit of situated interests. Moreover, once this duality is acknowledged,

[PART 5. Introduction] from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: Teaching rhetoric, like rhetorical criticism, was one of Leff’s living arts. In the course of his varied career, he taught at Indiana University, the University of California at Davis, and the University of Wisconsin, and he chaired the Departments of Communication at both Northwestern University and the University of Memphis. He mentored countless undergraduate and graduate students at those institutions; he was also an active presence in the lives of students beyond his own university. Leff worked to build an infrastructure for rhetoric’s future that could unite students and teachers of rhetoric across the country, even the world. Scarcely a

Teaching Public Speaking as Composition from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: This article is intended as a call for reform, but I must begin by confessing some uncertainty about what it is that I am attempting to reform. The fact is that I do not have a secure understanding about the state of the art as it is now practiced in teaching public speech. I have not made a survey of the methods now used in classroom instruction, nor undertaken a systematic study of the textbooks, and I have not reviewed the current scholarly literature. What I have to say is based upon personal experience and depends on anecdotes, hunches, and

What Is Rhetoric? from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: I need to begin on two rather different notes—conventionally but sincerely with some words of gratitude and then somewhat unconventionally (and perhaps a bit less sincerely) with an apology. First, I want to express thanks to Tony Blair and his colleagues for their invitation to visit here and their kind hospitality over the past several days. It is real pleasure to meet and talk with members of the Centre for Research in Reasoning, Argumentation and Rhetoric and to make another pilgrimage to this mecca for the study of informal logic. The apology concerns the subject of the lecture and

Book Title: To Become an American-Immigrants and Americanization Campaigns of the Early Twentieth Century
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Hahner Leslie A.
Abstract: Pledging allegiance, singing the "Star-Spangled Banner," wearing a flag pin-these are all markers of modern patriotism, emblems that announce the devotion of American citizens. Most of these nationalistic performances were formulized during the early twentieth century and driven to new heights by the panic surrounding national identity during World War I. In To Become an AmericanLeslie A. Hahner argues that, in part, the Americanization movement engendered the transformation of patriotism during this period. Americanization was a massive campaign designed to fashion immigrants into perfect Americans-those who were loyal in word, deed, and heart. The larger outcome of this widespread movement was a dramatic shift in the nation's understanding of Americanism. Employing a rhetorical lens to analyze the visual and aesthetic practices of Americanization, Hahner contends that Americanization not only tutored students in the practices of citizenship but also created a normative visual metric that modified how Americans would come to understand, interpret, and judge their own patriotism and that of others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt1tqx76n

Introduction from: To Become an American
Abstract: In 1916, President Woodrow Wilson declared Flag Day an official nationwide day of celebration. As United States involvement in the First World War loomed, the holiday became a spectacular affair showcasing American history, the dedication of the citizenry, and the nation’s preparedness for international conflict. The event was concurrently deemed Preparedness Day, a moniker emphasizing home-front readiness. Over 150 cities took up Wilson’s call, organizing parades, pageants, and other commemorations. The revelry followed the Lincoln Highway (a route that spanned from New York to San Francisco, somewhat following today’s I-80). Towns on this course arranged festivities, including lectures on American

CHAPTER THREE The American Lifestyle through Housing Reform from: To Become an American
Abstract: In a 1917 issue of the journal Housing Betterment,the editors reprinted a section of Governor Martin Brumbaugh’s annual message to Pennsylvanians. At one moment in the address, Governor Brumbaugh proposed a statewide housing code to preserve the health of the populace. As the governor affirmed the responsibilities of the state toward residents, he hailed proper living conditions as requisite to the production of stronger citizens. In particular, he heavily promoted these standards for the populace of ethnic neighborhoods, stating, “We are not Americanizing our new-coming immigrants if we allow them to live in what is often termed the ‘black

CHAPTER FOUR Displaying Americanization in Public Celebration from: To Become an American
Abstract: In Philadelphia on May 10, 1915, President Woodrow Wilson addressed a group of four thousand newly naturalized citizens. While Wilson delivered the address mere days after the sinking of the Lusitania,he did not reference the attack by German U-boats, the nearly twelve hundred dead. Wilson asserted that the day’s celebration of naturalization emphasized the rebirth of the American spirit and the need for loyalty. Noting the promise of immigration for the United States, Wilson said,

Girard and Hindu Sacrifice, from: Mimetic Theory and World Religions
Author(s) Sheth Noel
Abstract: In dealing with René Girard’s ideas about Hindu sacrifi ce, I concentrate on his book Sacrifice¹ since it mostly deals with Vedic, that is, early Hindu, sacrifice.² My article is divided into three parts.³

Tawhid: from: Mimetic Theory and World Religions
Author(s) Ericksen Adam
Abstract: In the epilogue of his book Battling to the EndRené Girard articulates his growing anxiety concerning the West and Islam since September 11, 2001. He states that “We are witnessing a new stage in the escalation to extremes.”¹ Asan escalation of mimetic rivalry, both Islam and the West are responsible for their participation in the current global crisis of violence. Indeed, Girard claims in the same book, “When violence is involved, wrongs are always shared.”² But it might seem as though violence is endemic to Islam in a way that it is not to the West. Girard invokes Islamic

CHAPTER 1 Intellectual Expulsion from: Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Abstract: If the subject desires to be something more, it is because there is a model, anotherwho seems to personify thisbeingof which the subject feels deprived. The best metaphor for expressing this triple relation of disciple-model-object is the triangle. Indeed, according to Girard, the preliminary stage of every subjective behavior moves via a “third element,” an object, which will

Transition: from: Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Author(s) Ell Theodore
Abstract: Since 1961, Girard’s production has grown without interruption, to at least the same degree as his fame. Without doubt, the fascination with Girard’s thought derives from the fact that he has constructed a true “speculative cathedral,” a theory that proposes to explain everything from myths to rituals, Greek tragedies to modern novels, holocausts of historical magnitude to everyday customs. At first glance, it would seem that Girard has changed little or nothing of his speculative construction since then, but if we look closely, there are noticeable problems and corrections that threaten the very foundations of mimetic theory. Indeed, recent criticism

Mimetic Theory’s Post-Kantian Legacy from: Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Abstract: In the last few years, religion has increasingly become a subject of dispute. Two positions seem to be the most popular. On the one hand, outspoken atheists reject religion in the name of reason and science. On the other hand, we witness an increase in scholarship sympathetic with conservative Christian movements. In this chapter, I will use the term “new atheists” to refer to the former approach, and the term “new theists” to refer to the latter approach.

Hermeneutic Mimetic Theory from: Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Abstract: In everyday language, the term “paradox” is used to refer to any claim or argument that contrasts with what is usually considered obvious. In a more specific and philosophical sense, a paradox is a claim or an argument that develops from apparently true premises and leads to a seemingly absurd (self-contradictory or logically unacceptable) conclusion. The term is also sometimes used in the context of religion to refer to a form of fideism professing a religious belief even when, or precisely because, that belief defies reason (as paradigmatically expressed by Tertullian’s Credo quia absurdum). And then there is at least

INTRODUCTION. from: Intimate Domain
Abstract: Oprah Winfrey, icon of popular culture, pens a monthly column titled “What I Know For Sure.” Less bold than Oprah, who has been espousing sureties for years, I am certain of few things. However, beyond a doubt, I know that our early life experiences shape our lives in profound ways. My conviction has been tutored by psychoanalytic theory, which offers a compelling account of the lasting impact on us of our early experiences, especially within the family.

CHAPTER 4 The House of Labdacus: from: Intimate Domain
Abstract: Sophocles’s three Theban plays— Antigone, Oedipus the King, Oedipus at Colonus—are not formally a trilogy. Sophocles wrote the plays across the span of his career andAntigone, whose dramatic action comes late in the chronology of Oedipus’s family, was likely written and performed a decade beforeOedipus the Kingand over three decades beforeOedipus at Colonus.¹ As a consequence, the plays that comprise the Theban cycle are most often understood to share a familial narrative drawn from myths rather than a single artistic frame of reference. InOedipus the King, Oedipus fulfills an oracle when he kills his

CHAPTER 5 Trauma and the Theban Cycle from: Intimate Domain
Abstract: How can intimacy become a subject for critical reflection?¹ Intimacy is typically understood to focus on emotions of love and supportive family bonds. But if family life is the beginning point for reflection on intimacy, it is not the only terrain we can explore in an effort to understand it. Helpfully, Julia Kristeva both broadens and narrows the field for critical reflection on intimacy. She broadens it when she links intimacy to art, religion, and psychoanalysis and cites the unique capacity of these forms of cultural expression to protect the singularity of human life.² Kristeva narrows the context for critical

PRELUDE. from: Intimate Domain
Abstract: The father is dead. On this point, Julia Kristeva and René Girard agree. What then can be said any longer of the paternal function? What legacy of the father persists in ongoing economies of sacrifice? And, if the father is not actually dead but only missing in action within the family romance, site of our earliest mimetic rivalries, what role, if any, could a father play in an intimate domain characterized by positive, nonconflictual mimesis? May a father yet live within intimate spaces? Endeavoring to answer these questions, I turn to literature, for Girard and Kristeva agree that literature is

CHAPTER 7 Not a Country for Old Men: from: Intimate Domain
Abstract: T he Old Man and the Wolvesbegins with a tale called “The Invasion.” After crossing a frozen river and a windswept plain, wolves from the north now lurk on the edges of Santa Varvara seeking their prey. These “gray-coated, sharp-nosed carnivores, slinking singly or in packs through houses and gardens,” wear people’s faces and utter human speech.¹ Yet only the Old Man can see or hear them and smell their musky odor. Only he observes the marks their claws have made on the land and on the throats of “animals, birds, even women,”² and only he attributes increasing numbers of

CHAPTER 8 To Glimpse a World without Wolves: from: Intimate Domain
Abstract: Kristeva names the concluding section of The Old Man and the Wolves“Capriccio.” “Capriccio” focuses on multiple metamorphoses. Replicating and augmenting the transferential setting of the detective story, these changes radicalize its questions: What is the ultimate source of the contagion that has transformed Santa Varvara into a city of wolves? Can infected individuals be cured, or will they always be wolves? “Capriccio” investigates the possibility ofreversible metamorphoses:Can those who have been contaminated by the wolves grasp their humanity again and break free of mimesis-driven scapegoating? Addressing this question are Stephanie, by means of her diary, and Kristeva,

[II Introduction] from: Post-Realism
Abstract: Critics of realism often point to its impersonality. Realist doctrine presumes an objective world that operates according to natural laws; its first lesson is to look for those constraints on action that will thwart one’s intentions; it culminates in rational analysis. Yet this impersonal model can not be quite right, for it is difficult to think of realism without thinking of realists. Realism is not only a set of precepts but also the personae of Kissinger, Kennan, Niebuhr, Morgenthau, and others. It is both a tradition of political thought and a genealogy of thinkers, each of whom has affected its

Reinhold Niebuhr and the Rhetoric of Christian Realism from: Post-Realism
Author(s) Aune James Arnt
Abstract: It is very difficult for an academic audience at the end of the twentieth century to imagine a time when the college preaching circuit was a way for theologians to influence large numbers of students and make a good income, or a time when listening to preaching was at least an occasional experience even for secular intellectuals. Religion remains an important legitimating device for the Republican Party and for what remains of the civil rights movement among African Americans, but religious symbols and themes—the sin of national pride, the tension between the civitas deiandcivitas terrena—have been

The Meaning of Security from: Post-Realism
Author(s) Chilton Paul A.
Abstract: “And, you all know, security is mortals’ chiefest enemy.” These are the words of Hecate to the three Witches in Macbeth.A modern reader may experience momentary difficulty in constructing a meaning for them, sincesecurityhas come to be regarded in twentieth-century anglophone culture as one of the chiefest goods. Hecate’s words are thus paradoxical, unless one is a critic of the security culture itself. Shakespeare and his contemporaries, however, although they had begun to use the word also in something like its modern sense, knew a different meaning based on the word's Latin etymology.Securityderives fromse

Nationalism and Realist Discourses of International Relations from: Post-Realism
Author(s) Lapid Yosef
Abstract: In the post-Cold War era, nationalism has finally come to be recognized as probably the most explosive political force of our century. However, this belated recognition—forced upon us by dramatic historical events such as the implosion of the Soviet Union, the reunification of Germany, and the violent disintegration of Yugoslavia—in no way eliminates the need to reexamine the reasons behind the sustained failure of most Western social sciences to generate serious theoretical interest in a foremost historical phenomenon.² For the neglect-of-nationalism-problem has resulted in “the most striking example of a general failure among experts to anticipate social developments.”³

A Reinterpretation of Realism: from: Post-Realism
Author(s) Derian James Der
Abstract: Realism. Historical, social, philosophical, political, economic, artistic, cinematic, literary, legal realism. Machiavellian, Hobbesian, Rousseauian, Hegelian, Weberian, Kissingerian realism. Optimist, pessimist, fatalist realism. Naive, vulgar, magical realism. Technical, practical, empirical realism. Classical and scientific realism. Structural, structurationist, poststructuralist realism. Minimalist, maximalist, fundamentalist, potentialist realism. Positivist, post-positivist, liberal, neoliberal institutionalist, radical, radical interpretivist realism. Critical, nuclear, epistemic realism. Sur-, super-, photo-, anti-, neo-, post-realism. And now at your local malls and supermarket check-outs, hyper-realism.

CHAPTER 2 The Creation and the Fall from: The Genesis of Desire
Abstract: I would like to propose the hypothesis that the text of Genesis and the idea of “original sin” interpret through metaphor the birth of psychological man, that is, of humanity, of the couple, and of desire. In connection with this, I also propose to show that this birth of psychological man, like that of social man, is brought about by purely mimetic mechanisms.

Book Title: Christianity and the Mass Media in America-Toward a Democratic Accommodation
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Schultze Quentin J.
Abstract: The mass media and religious groups in America regularly argue about news bias, sex and violence on television, movie censorship, advertiser boycotts, broadcast and film content rating systems, government regulation of the media, the role of mass evangelism in a democracy, and many other issues. In the United States the major disputes between religion and the media usually have involved Christian churches or parachurch ministries, on the one hand, and the so-called secular media, on the other. Often the Christian Right locks horns with supposedly liberal Eastern media elite and Hollywood entertainment companies. When a major Protestant denomination calls for an economic boycott of Disney, the resulting news reports suggest business as usual in the tensions between faith groups and media empires.Schultze demonstrates how religion and the media in America have borrowed each other's rhetoric. In the process, they have also helped to keep each other honest, pointing out respective foibles and pretensions. Christian media have offered the public as well as religious tribes some of the best media criticism- better than most of the media criticism produced by mainstream media themselves. Meanwhile, mainstream media have rightly taken particular churches to task for misdeeds as well as offered some surprisingly good depictions of religious life.The tension between Christian groups and the media in America ultimately is a good thing that can serve the interest of democratic life. As Alexis de Tocqueville discovered in the 1830s, American Christianity can foster the "habits of the heart" that ward off the antisocial acids of radical individualism. And, as John Dewey argued a century later, the media offer some of our best hopes for maintaining a public life in the face of the religious tribalism that can erode democracy from within. Mainstream media and Christianity will always be at odds in a democracy. That is exactly the way it should be for the good of each one.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt7zt6fv

Receiving René Girard into the Académie Française from: For René Girard
Author(s) Serres Michel
Abstract: How does that barking come in here? And where does it come from? In the récitof Théramène, do we know the meaning of those runaway horses dragging the torn and quartered cadaver of Hippolyte along the beach? Who are these serpents hissing about our heads?

Literature, Myth, and Prophecy: from: For René Girard
Author(s) Goodhart Sandor
Abstract: Will these years since World War II prove to have been a turning point? Will historians look back upon this moment and observe that the wartime violence—the Holocaust, Hiroshima and Nagasaki, the day-to-day combat of the war itself (as well as the violence that followed it in Biafra, in Rwanda, and in the killing fields of Pol Pot)—was so great, so horrific, that we finally devised a way to end it? Or will this period that has seemed so momentous to us—to those of us born after the war—turn out to be but a lull in

Dispatch from the Girardian Boundary from: For René Girard
Author(s) Mabee Charles
Abstract: René Girard is another in the increasingly long list of modern thinkers who remind us that the world we live in is not quite what it appears to be. The list of these venerable hermeneuticians of suspicion is by now quite long, exceeding by several orders of magnitude what might be termed “the Big Three” of Nietzsche, Marx, and Freud (should Darwin and Feuerbach have been left off the original list?). More contemporary members of the club might include by common agreement such iconoclasts as Foucault, Derrida, Rorty, Ellul, Kuhn, Deleuze, Lyotard, Feyerabend, and Dawkins, among others. And why exactly

The Mimeticist Turn: from: For René Girard
Author(s) Carter Chris Allen
Abstract: I still remember the day I began to appreciate the work of René Girard. It was a summer morning in 1979, and I was doing research in the Bizzell Memorial Library at the University of Oklahoma. I was drafting a dissertation on Kenneth Burke and was in the habit of checking any book that came into my hands to see if there were any references to Burke. I chanced across Girard’s latest publication, To Double Business Bound.¹ Flipping through the text, I discovered this passage:

“The Key of Knowledge”: from: For René Girard
Author(s) Fornari Giuseppe
Abstract: To explain my intellectual and personal debt to René Girard is not easy for me, at least not at this particular moment in my career, a moment when I am increasingly developing my own ideas with the aim of broadening and strengthening the extraordinary discoveries made by Girard. It seems to me, moreover, preposterous to list all Girard’s important ideas as a thinker. Many others have done that, and this is not the proper place for that kind of narrative.

Mimetic Theory and Christian Theology in the Twenty-first Century from: For René Girard
Author(s) Hardin Michael E.
Abstract: In 1944, from his prison cell at Tegel, Dietrich Bonhoeffer wondered whether Christianity had in fact outlived its usefulness as a religion.¹ His sentiments have been echoed in the subsequent half-century since, particularly with the rise of the postmodern climate. It would not be difficult to multiply logarithmically these critiques of Christianity. That there has been an expulsion of things Christian from the academy there is no doubt; more notably, it is paralleled in the expulsion of Jesus from the Christian churches.

CHAPTER TWO The Paradox of a Republican Revolution Using Executions as Pedagogy, 1768–1784 from: Executing Democracy
Abstract: Historians have long recognized a paradox within the American Revolution: while the leaders of the uprising marshaled the revolutionary rhetoric of liberty and equality to discredit a (supposedly) tyrannical king and to rally the masses to the cause of independence, they maintained a vision of political leadership that was more aristocratic than republican. As Henry Steele Commager and Richard B. Morris note, the Revolution’s leaders were “elitist, prosperous, and essentially conservative”; Gordon Wood echoes this argument, noting that the new nation’s leaders were “habituated . . . to monarchical hierarchy and desirous of stability and continuity.” Nonetheless, the masses could

CHAPTER FOUR Enlightenment, Republicanism, and Executions, 1785–1800 from: Executing Democracy
Abstract: Thus expressing a

CHAPTER 1 Phenomenology of Everyday Life: from: Nosotros
Abstract: This book is a study of epistemology, which I define as what people know in their daily lives. Becker and Laing are used as starting points for a general depiction of Hispano thought, which includes the study of how language develops an understanding of the world of everyday life. Language usage is the vehicle for understanding how people name events, interactions, attitudes, and values. Understanding how words are used to construct the edifice of everyday life is best accomplished by using concepts from phenomenology.

CHAPTER 3 Mortification, an Interactional Perspective: from: Nosotros
Abstract: Yo tengo mortificaciones; tu tienes mortificaciones; todos tenemos mortificaciones!We all have minor and major troubles that beset us. This chapter discusses a single concept,mortificación,but the method of examination can be used to clarify other terms relating to people’s well-being. What is taken up in these pages is the intentionality of consciousness of the emotion calledmortificación,the experience of being mortified. The consciousness of mortification is experienced in the consciousness of body and in social interaction, what the phenomenologists call intersubjectivity. What is presented in these pages is not new, since it is well known in the

CHAPTER 11 Seeking Light after the Great Night: from: Nosotros
Abstract: The Tinieblas, from the Latin tenebrae,is the last ceremony before Easter Sunday conducted by theLa Cofradía de Nuestro Padre Jesús Nazareno(also known asLos Hermanos Penitentes) [the Penitent Brotherhood]).* Tinieblas is conducted on Holy Thursday or on Good Friday and always after sunset in darkenedmoradas(lay chapels) in northern New Mexico and southern Colorado.† The termtinieblas(darkness and death) provides a contrast between light and darkness, sin and death, perdition and eternal life. This contrast can be subsumed underel ciclo de vida y muerte(the cycle of life and death) in New Mexico (Medina

4 TRUITT IN TOKYO (1964–1967) from: Memory Work
Abstract: Truitt had breakthroughs in Tokyo, but they were hard won. Despite the professional recognition that Truitt achieved while she lived in Japan from 1964 to 1967, it was a time of deep isolation, sadness, and frustration with her studio practice. At the turn of the 1970s, Truitt looked back on the sculptures she made in Japan and found them “simply intelligent,” “lifeless,” and inconsistent with the conceptual thrust of her work since First — and in December 1971, she had the majority of these Japanese works destroyed, nineteen sculptures in all.¹ Yet, despite this iconoclasm, after Truitt returned to the United

TWO Thalassology alla Turca: from: The Red Sea
Abstract: AS A MODERN FIELD OF study, Ottoman historiography is unusual, primarily because of its ambivalent relation to that hegemon of hyper-reality, Europe—finding and placing itself both within and without. For much of its existence, the Ottoman Empire was dominated (demographically, economically, politically, ideologically) by its provinces in regions considered now geographically as part of Europe. This is something Ottoman authors oft en remarked upon when discussing the divisions of European geography, which the Well-Protected Domains straddled.

FOUR The Scientific Invention of the Red Sea from: The Red Sea
Abstract: Clearly printed, easily accessible, and widely reproduced, the Sailing Directions for the Red Seahas been heralded since its

FIVE Thalassomania: from: The Red Sea
Abstract: FROM THE POINT OF VIEW of modern geography, the world appears clear and simple. This is somewhat paradoxical, since one of the special qualities of modernity is deemed to be complexity (complex societies, complex personality, complex logic, and so forth). But with the advent of modern geography, every schoolchild should know that the world is divided into a set number of landmasses and seas: there are seven continents, just as there are five oceans, and a set number of seas, all made up of salt water, some completely bounded, others almost so.

FOUR Pleasure and Valuation from: The Thought of Music
Abstract: The title The Thought of Musicmight seem to indicate a primarily conceptual orientation, something that has been strongly evident in the preceding chapters. Chapter 1 concerned itself with conceptual questions directly by focusing on ideas, and the succeeding two chapters continued that concern by focusing on language, which, insofar as it makes sense—and it doesn’t always—is permeated with conceptuality. But music is obviously also a sensory medium. Music thinks in feelings, and thinking about music and with music must take account of that. The sensory force of music—sensory knowledge, sensory memory—is also obviously a force

SIX Virtuosity, Reading, Authorship: from: The Thought of Music
Abstract: In 1840 Josef Danhauser painted a famous picture of Liszt at the piano that now hangs in the Alte Nationalgalerie Berlin. Liszt’s audience consists primarily of famous composers (Paganini, Rossini) and authors (Sand, Hugo, de Musset); he also has a silent auditor in a large bust of Beethoven that sits in the window at the upper right. The bust is prominent enough to suggest that it is Beethoven’s music that Liszt is playing, a suggestion that also makes good historical sense. If so, the picture is also a puzzle. The mingling of composers and authors in the scene makes an

Book Title: Symposium of the Whole-A Range of Discourse Toward an Ethnopoetics
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Rothenberg Diane
Abstract: Symposium of the Wholetraces a discourse on poetry and culture that has profoundly influenced the art of our time, with precedents going back two centuries and more. Beginning with a reassertion of the complexity of poetry among peoples long labeled "primitive" and "savage," many recent poets have sought to base a new poetics over the fullest range of human cultures. The attempt to define an ethnopoetics has been significantly connected with the most experimental and future-directed side of Romantic and modern poetry, both in the Western world and, increasingly, outside it. As a visionary poetics and as a politics, this complex redefinition of cultural and intellectual values has involved a rarely acknowledged collaboration between poets and scholars, who together have challenged the narrow view of literature that has excluded so many traditions.In this gathering, the Rothenbergs follow the idea of an ethnopoetics from predecessors such as Vico, Blake, Thoreau, and Tzara to more recent essays and manifestos by poets and social thinkers such as Olson, Eliade, Snyder, Turner, and Baraka. The themes range widely, from the divergence of oral and written cultures to the shaman as proto-poet and the reemergence of suppressed and rejected forms and images: the goddess, the trickster, and the "human universe." The book's three ethnographic sections demonstrate how various poetries are structured and composed, how they reflect meaning and worldview, and how they are performed in cultures where all art may be thought of as art-in-motion.Among the poetries discussed are the language of magic; West African drum language and poetry; the Huichol Indian language of reversals; chance operations in African divination poetry; picture-writings and action-writings from Australia and Africa; and American Indian sacred-clown dramas and traditional trickster narratives. The cumulative effect is a new reading of the poetic past and present-in the editors' words, "a changed paradigm of what poetry was or now could come to be."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1bmzkq4

From The Chinese Written Character as a Medium for Poetry from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) FENOLLOSA ERNEST
Abstract: Fenollosaʹs long essay, written circa 1908, is the outstanding instance of the impact on contemporary practice not simply of another poetry but of the inherent poetics of another language—its written as well as spoken form. Ezra Pound, who had translated Japanese Noh plays with Fenollosa, arranged for the essayʹs posthumous publication, writing in introduction: ʺIn his search through unknown art, Fenollosa, coming upon unknown motives and principles unrecognized in the West, was already led into many modes of thought since fruitful in ʹnewʹ Western painting and poetry…. The later movements in art have corroborated his theories.ʺ In spite of

A Note on Negro Poetry/Oceanian Art from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) TZARA TRISTAN
Abstract: As an avant-garde extremist and co-founder of the Dada movement—Zurich 1916 in the midst of World War I—Tzara called for ʺa great negative work of destructionʺ against the European nation-state as a ʺstate of madness, the aggressive complete madness of a world left in the hands of bandits who vandalize and destroy the centuries.ʺ But the constructive side of the work included a project to recoup the model of a primal art and poetry, toward which he assembled, using numerous scholarly sources, a first anthology of tribal/oral poems from a fiercely modernist perspective—poèmes nègres, never published in

Guruwari Designs from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) MUNN NANCY
Abstract: Munnʹs instance of a traditional tie between oral and visual language is from the Walbiri of northwestern Australia. The visual side (hand and eye) of ethnopoetics has generally been ignored in favor of the oral side (mouth and ear). Fundamental relations between writing/drawing and speaking/singing, although clear enough within such cultures as the Walbiri, have received little real attention from without. A series of propositions in this regard has come from the French philosopher, Jacques Derrida, whose elevation of other-than-alphabetic forms of writing should simultaneously help establish the equality of oral modes of poetry. Of the universality of his grammatology

The Written Face from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) BARTHES ROLAND
Abstract: The Japanese theatrical face is not painted (powdered), it is written. This unforeseen movement occurs: though painting and writing have the same original instrument, the brush, it is not painting, however, which seduces writing with its decorative style, its sprawling, caressing touch, its representative space (as no doubt would have happened with us in the West, for whom the civilized future of a function is always its esthetic ennoblement); on the contrary, it is the act of writing-which subjugates

First Person Voice in Ainu Epic from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) PHILIPPI DONALD L.
Abstract: The device presented here—of a projective first person narration on a possibly shamanistic base—points to a linkage of the male and female singers with other ʺnon-human entitiesʺ in what Philippi calls ʺa form of inter-species communication in which gods or humans speak of experiences to members of their own or other species.ʺ In saying this, he reveals a traditional way not only of knowing but of experiencing and projecting a total natural environment—as Gary Snyder describes it in his ʺforewordʺ to these songs: ʺThe life of mountains and rivers flowed from their group experience, through speech and

Songs and the Song from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) LORD ALBERT B.
Abstract: The distinction made by Lord and his predecessor, Milman Parry, is between poems ʺmemorized,ʺ in a transcriptional writing system, and poems ʺremembered,ʺ in an oral or word-of-mouth tradition. The latter are never absolutely fixed as text or reference (ʺthe oral poem even in the mouth of the same singer is ever in a state of changeʺ [Parry 1932: 14]) and are finally inseparable from their performance (i.e., the idea here presented, that performance = composition). In focusing on surviving European oral epics, Lord and Parry put great stress on the use of traditional ʺtagsʺ and ʺepithetsʺ (formulas) that the epic

An American Indian Model of the Universe from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) WHORF BENJAMIN LEE
Abstract: The ways in which the structure of a language may shape the reality of its speakers are nowhere more elegantly set down than in Whorfʹs studies of Hopi and other American Indian languages. ʺWe dissect nature along lines laid down by our native language,ʺ he writes of the differences in linguistic pattern from language to language—and the consequences (= ʺthought worldsʺ) arising therefrom. Or, summarizing the enterprise shared with linguists such as Edward Sapir (the so-called Sapir-Whorf hypothesis):

The Return of the Symbol from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ELIADE MIRCEA
Abstract: The surprising popularity of psychoanalysis has made the fortunes of certain key-words: image, symbol and symbolism have now become current coin. At the same time, systematic research devoted to the mechanisms of “primitive mentality” has revealed the importance of symbolism in archaic thinking and also the fundamental part it plays in the life of any and every primitive society. The obsolescence of “scientism” in philosophy, the revival of interest in religion since the first world war, many poetic developments and, above all, the researches of

The Aesthetics of the Sounding of the Text from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) LANSING J. STEPHEN
Abstract: Whatʹs ʺmissingʺ from Artaudʹs spontaneous take on Balinese theater (see above, p. 235) is the awareness of a self-conscious body of discourse, an indigenous and fully formulated Balinese poetics, behind the work observed. This poetics—following from what Stephen Lansing, on a Southeast Asian model, calls ʺthe aesthetics of the ʹsounding of the textʹ ʺ—illuminates not only Balinese performance per se but the nature of performance art in general. Such an ʺillumination in generalʺ is, of course, what weʹve always posited for forms of Western discourse—the assumption, for example, that Aristotleʹs equally localized, Athenian Poetics is the basis,

From “Shamanistic Theater: Origins and Evolution” from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) KIRBY ERNEST THEODORE
Abstract: The relation of shamans and their works to art, dance, music, poetry, performance—and, above all, to vision and healing—traces back to the Dancing Sorcerers of Europeʹs paleolithic caves. ʺRain kings, magic protectors, chiefs, artisans and ambassadors,ʺ the shamans, now rediscovered, have become the prototypical ʺculture heroes … of all the European artsʺ (La Barre 1970: 422). Weston La Barre stresses the shamanʹs ʺsecret magic, musicʺ through ʺthe harpsinging shaman Apollo … leader of the muses,ʺ but the shaman has also emerged as a kind of protopoet—ʺvery much,ʺ writes Peter Furst, ʺRadinʹs own PRIMITIVE MAN AS PHILOSOPHER.ʺ (See

A Review of “Ethnopoetics” from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) TURNER VICTOR
Abstract: Victor Turner has been a major and highly influential anthropologist since the late 1950s. His contributions to symbolic anthropology and to a unified theory of performance include concepts of liminality andcommunitas,social drama, reflexivity, and symbolic process, applicable to a wide range of human cultures but developed from particular situations such as that of the Ndembu of eastern Africa. In the present article, he reviews the proceedings of ʺthe first international symposium on ethnopoeticsʺ as gathered by Michel Benamou and Jerome Rothenberg in a special issue ofAlcheringa(Benamou 1976). Principal works:The Forest of Symbols, The Ritual Process,

Book Title: A Dream Denied-Incarceration, Recidivism, and Young Minority Men in America
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Soyer Michaela
Abstract: Young minority men are often portrayed in popular media as victims of poverty and discrimination. A Dream Denieddelves deeper, investigating the social and cultural implications of the "American dream" narrative for young minority men in the juvenile justice systems in Boston and Chicago. This book connects young male offenders' cycles of desistance and recidivism with normative assumptions about success and failure in American society, exposing a tragic disconnect between structural reality and juvenile justice policy. This book challenges us to reconsider how American society relates to its most vulnerable members, how it responds to their personal failures, and how it promises them a better future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1cg4n9v

2 Two Cities, Two Systems, Similar Problems: from: A Dream Denied
Abstract: In the fall of 2009, when I visited the Cook County Juvenile Temporary Detention Center (JTDC) in Chicago for the first time, I was not sure what to expect. I had read about the abuse, overcrowding, and unsanitary conditions that led to an ACLU lawsuit filed against the center in the late 1990s. Would I see teenagers living in filth under deplorable circumstances, or had conditions truly improved since Earl Dunlap, a widely respected juvenile justice reformer, took over the JTDC as transitional administrator in 2007?

6 The Uncertainty of Freedom: from: A Dream Denied
Abstract: Lucas’s situation was complicated. I met him at the Eliot Detention Center, where he was being held for armed robbery. He was released fairly quickly and spent most of the year and a half during which we met regularly on the outside. While he was on juvenile probation, one of his associates pressed charges against him. His former friend claimed that Lucas had threatened him and his pregnant girlfriend. New accusations followed, and the whole case became an increasingly confusing he said–she said scenario. Lucas insisted vehemently that the allegations were unfounded. The details were far too complex to

7 “I know how to control myself”: from: A Dream Denied
Abstract: When I moved to Boston to set up my second field site, our daughter was almost a year old and my husband had recently started an academic appointment at Wellesley College. Wellesley offered faculty housing, and we decided to settle right on the picturesque campus in a place within walking distance of his office. According to the 2010 census, the median income in Wellesley, Massachusetts, was $155,000. Eighty-five percent of the population was white, 9.8 percent Asian, 3.6 percent Latino, and 2 percent black. I always thought of Wellesley’s city center as a quintessential New England town: manicured lawns, white

Coda: from: Listening for the Secret
Abstract: Was it all just a ʺsunshine daydreamʺ? The world at large kept on with its usual business of ʺwar, kidnappings, crimes,ʺ as Bill Graham had said when introducing the band (above, Introduction), while the Grateful Dead played on, listening for secrets and searching for sounds as Robert M. Petersenʹs lyrics for ʺUnbroken Chainʺ describe, or Bob Weir proclaiming the ʺsunshine daydreamʺ of ʺSugar Magnolia.ʺ Maybe it was just a daydream—but if so, then it was one that lasted for an unusually long stretch of time. And apparently that daydream was real enough to create believers in that promise of

california—the nervous camel from: i never knew what time it was
Abstract: the reason i was asked to talk here is obviously that im not a native californian so i must have a clearer view of california coming from three thousand miles away and theres a certain justice in supposing this because its very hard for fish to get a clear view of water while if youre a land dweller and come into the water you experience it somewhat more sharply than if youd always lived there

i never knew what time it was from: i never knew what time it was
Abstract: you probably wonder why i gave this title to a piece since im generally known for not knowing precisely what im going to talk about my titling has often been accomplished by other people calling my talk something ahead of time and i say that sounds interesting maybe ill talk about it but this time i knew i was going to share a program with eleanor and its very rare for me to be on a program with eleanor who i know very well ive watched her perform so many times but one of the things i know best about

time on my hands from: i never knew what time it was
Abstract: in fact the whole idea of coming and talking at ten in the morning was already committed to an engagement with time since i was coming from san diego to talk at ten in the morning and ten in the morning is quite early to make a trip up to mcbean parkway when youre coming from san diego it used to be faster to come to mcbean parkway and then it was slower to get to mcbean parkway and then it got

Book Title: Alef, Mem, Tau-Kabbalistic Musings on Time, Truth, and Death
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Wolfson Elliot R.
Abstract: This highly original, provocative, and poetic work explores the nexus of time, truth, and death in the symbolic world of medieval kabbalah. Demonstrating that the historical and theoretical relationship between kabbalah and western philosophy is far more intimate and extensive than any previous scholar has ever suggested, Elliot R. Wolfson draws an extraordinary range of thinkers such as Frederic Jameson, Martin Heidegger, Franz Rosenzweig, William Blake, Julia Kristeva, Friedrich Schelling, and a host of kabbalistic figures into deep conversation with one another. Alef, Mem, Taualso discusses Islamic mysticism and Buddhist thought in relation to the Jewish esoteric tradition as it opens the possibility of a temporal triumph of temporality and the conquering of time through time. The framework for Wolfson's examination is the rabbinic teaching that the wordemet,"truth," comprises the first, middle, and last letters of the Hebrew alphabet,alef, mem,andtau,which serve, in turn, as semiotic signposts for the three tenses of time-past, present, and future. By heeding the letters ofemetwe discern the truth of time manifestly concealed in the time of truth, the beginning that cannot begin if it is to be the beginning, the middle that re/marks the place of origin and destiny, and the end that is the figuration of the impossible disclosing the impossibility of figuration, the finitude of death that facilitates the possibility of rebirth. The time of death does not mark the death of time, but time immortal, the moment of truth that bestows on the truth of the moment an endless beginning of a beginningless end, the truth of death encountered incessantly in retracing steps of time yet to be taken-between, before, beyond.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pn5mn

1 THINKING TIME / HERMENEUTIC SUPPOSITIONS from: Alef, Mem, Tau
Abstract: In my time, many a time, I have heard myself and others speak of a lifetime. This compound dis/plays the juxtaposition of life and time so elemental to our way of being in the world: what most impresses our thinking about the life-that-is-passing is the passing-that-is-life, a passing that lies at the root of our rootlessness. We are perpetually cast in the mold of temporal beings, always, it seems, being in time for the time being. Time flies, runs, flees, passes too quickly, too slowly, and yet at the end of day—invariably the beginning of night—the question persists:

4 WITHIN MEM / RETURNING FORWARD from: Alef, Mem, Tau
Abstract: The letter memsignifies repetition of difference, re/marking the beginning, for the beginning, we recall, is branded bybeit, the letter duplicitous in its singularity:

CONCLUSION from: Alef, Mem, Tau
Abstract: The precise turn of thought charted in this book opens the possibility of a temporal triumph of temporality, the conquering of time through time.¹ In an effort to pave the way to this possibility, I have explored the nexus of time, truth, and death as it emerges hermeneutically from the symbolic world of medieval kabbalah. I have not adhered to the familiar methodology adopted by scholars of Jewish mysticism, focusing on a particular historical period or individual personality; I have organized my thoughts instead around the letters alef, mem, andtau, the consonants of the wordemet, “truth,” which stand

CANTO I Ritual and Story from: Lectura Dantis
Author(s) Ross Charles
Abstract: The Purgatorioopens with a solemn exordium, rich in anticipation and tension, that develops in three stages (1–12). First we are given the graceful but exultant image, dear to the mannerist tradition, of the “waters” and the “little vessel” that will “course” even as it “lifts her sail.” Next, the first-person narrator dramatically (“and what I sing”) offers the firm, clear definition of the theme. Finally, there is an invocation to the Muses recalling, like some mysterious legend, a famous episode in Ovid’sMetamorphoses.

CANTO X The Art of God from: Lectura Dantis
Author(s) Ross Charles
Abstract: Canto X begins the great cycle of penitence and education that characterizes Purgatory proper. The souls in Purgatory follow the order of the seven mortal sins as defined by Christian doctrine. They traverse the seven circles of the mountain, pausing in each circle, for a time, according to their inclination toward each sin that has remained in them after their life on earth. They are not punished for any specific crimes they may have committed, as happens in Dante’s Hell. Instead, at each stage of Purgatory, penitence regularly consists of a meditation and a contrapasso(a punishment suited to the

CANTO XI Gone with the Wind from: Lectura Dantis
Author(s) OLDCORN ANTHONY
Abstract: Sandwiched between two descriptive cantos, in which there are remarkably few lines of actual dialogue and in which the foregrounded speech is the increasingly complex virtual (or visual) discourse (“speech made visible,” X , 94) evoked by the attitudes of the figures in relief (in the most complex of these trompe l’oeil—or is it trompe l’oreille?—dialogues, the sculpted stances of the emperor Trajan and the supplicant widow are read as an extended exchange in which each of the two participants speaks no less than three times), Canto XI, the second of the three cantos dedicated to the sin

CANTO XII Eyes Down from: Lectura Dantis
Author(s) KELEMEN JÁNOS
Abstract: In terms of its narrative, Canto XII is tightly connected to the previous three cantos, which describe the entry of the poet and his leader into the genuine Purgatory, along with their experiences in the first circle. We cannot even locate a dividing line between Cantos XI and XII (from the perspective of the narrative, at least); the borderline appears instead to be within the new canto, since the episode of the previous canto is yet to be completed. The poet is still accompanied by Oderisi da Gubbio, the miniaturist punished for his pride, with his back bent almost to

CANTO XIV The Rhetoric of Envy from: Lectura Dantis
Author(s) VERDICCHIO MASSIMO
Abstract: In the previous canto, Dante and Virgil have arrived at the Second Terrace, where the envious are punished. In Canto XIV, they meet two souls, Guido del Duca and Rinieri da Calboli, who denounce the sin of envy. However, the actual invective against envy will spill over and conclude in the following canto (XV).

CANTO XXI Greeting Statius from: Lectura Dantis
Author(s) SMARR JANET LEVARIE
Abstract: Canto XXI is in many ways a canto of thresholds and surprises or, as William Stephany has emphasized, of conversions. These threshold crossings involve both poetic and religious issues, nor can the two ever be far apart for Dante. The canto, which introduces a major classical poet and discusses the influence of Virgil’s poetry, is also the first in which we meet a soul fully cleansed of sin and ready to ascend to Paradise. Beginning with the appearance of Statius and ending with his recognition of Virgil, this canto offers the last concentration on classical poetry before the series of

CANTO XXIII Reading Literary and Ethical Choices from: Lectura Dantis
Author(s) RUSSELL RINALDINA
Abstract: Soon after Dante and his two guides enter the terrace of the gluttons (Cantos XXII–XXIV), they come across a tree laden with appetizing fruit and sprinkled with fresh water, a tree whose branches widen as they reach higher into the sky. Later on, just before the travelers exit from the terrace, they will encounter another such tree. The gluttons run around this cornice and purge themselves of their sin by suffering the pangs of hunger and thirst, made sharper by the sight of fruit and water. The moral meaning of the trees, that is, the equation of gluttony to

CANTO XXV Statius’s Marvelous Connection of Things from: Lectura Dantis
Author(s) MARTINEZ RONALD
Abstract: Canto XXV of the Purgatorio,largely taken for granted in the late fourteenth century and during the Renaissance, had, in the modern period, become a kind of curiosity: a part of the poem thought of as bound to outdated cosmologies and esthetics. But since the pathfinding studies of Bruno Nardi, the canto has begun to receive wider and more sympathetic attention. Beyond its illumination of doctrinal and intellectual issues of critical importance to Dante’s cultural milieu—which, as Vittorio Russo has shown, mirror the passage of intellectual vigor from Parisian Scholasticism to the bourgeois, “scientific” culture of Bologna, Florence, and

CANTO XXVI The Fires of Lust and Poetry from: Lectura Dantis
Author(s) SHAW PRUE
Abstract: No canto of the Comedyhas compelled the imagination of twentieth-century English-speaking poets more powerfully than Canto XXVI of thePurgatorio.When T.S. Eliot added his famous dedication to the second English edition ofThe Waste Land,echoing line 117 (“miglior fabbro”) of our canto and making it an obligatory point of reference for any literate English reader, he not only paid his friend and fellow poet Ezra Pound an exquisite compliment, he also completed what, in hindsight, seems a necessary trajectory. The closing line of Canto XXVI (“Poi s’ascose nel foco che li affina”; “Then, in the fire that

CANTO XXVIII Watching Matilda from: Lectura Dantis
Author(s) KIRKHAM VICTORIA
Abstract: Certified fit to travel alone by Virgil at the close of Canto XXVII, Dante strolls eagerly into the Garden of Eden. This shady forest atop Mount Purgatory is the setting for his meeting with a stunningly beautiful maiden who appears all alone, laughing and singing, on the other side of a two-pronged rivulet. As she gathers flowers to weave a garland, she reminds him of Persephone; her glance recalls Venus, luminescent with love for Adonis. Dante, longing to step across the narrow stream, compares himself to Leander grounded on the shore of the Hellespont by storm-swollen breakers, just where once

CANTO XXXI Dante’s Repentance from: Lectura Dantis
Author(s) Ross Charles
Abstract: However much Canto XXXI forms a solid continuation of the one preceding it, only here does Dante render a full account of himself, even if his confession is directed at Beatrice, who draws it out after she turns directly toward him. It has been preceded by her condemnation of his past behavior that she mediates by addressing the angels around her chariot, as Dante listens from across the stream of Lethe (XXX, 103), and by her ironic, sarcastic comments (XXX, 55–57 and 73–75), with which she nonetheless implicates herself.

CHAPTER 4 “The Shortcomings of Timetables”: from: The Cosmic Time of Empire
Abstract: In chapter 3 I described how Bram Stoker’s Draculaenlisted global standard time both at the level of plot, with Mina Harker’s and the Count’s competing mastery of timetables, and also as a principle of narrative structure, with discrepant time lines from various media synchronized into a uniform typewritten narrative. For Stoker standard time served a double function: it preserved England’s ontological purity by excising the temporally untranslatable, and it provided a model for a total narrative, able to assimilate various classes, nations, and dialects (spoken by the multinational vampire hunters) as well as various media. Modernist texts attack standard

1 MADNESS AND THE POLITICALLY REAL: from: Postcolonial Disorders
Author(s) Aretxaga Begoña
Abstract: When I was invited to take part in this seminar I was happy to have an opportunity to discuss some of my current work with former colleagues and friends. I have been increasingly preoccupied with the problem of madness as it plays and as it is displayed in the theater of politics. This is for me the beginning of a dialogue about this issue that one could broadly call “politics and madness.” In this sense what I am speaking about today is more the beginning of a formulation than a crafted thesis.

5 LABORATORY OF INTERVENTION: from: Postcolonial Disorders
Author(s) Pandolfi Mariella
Abstract: Since the end of the colonial era, many of the territories where anthropologists have worked have been witness to an increasingly visible “humanitarian presence.” The massive army of volunteer workers, international experts, local staff, and soldiers associated with humanitarian intervention has had a remarkable impact on local cultural landscapes. Despite the increasing proliferation of these zones of humanitarian and military intervention, anthropologists are only beginning to examine the theoretical and practical consequences of these new forms of intervention. Intervention studies present a perilous but necessary challenge to the anthropological community. They force us to consider both new sites of intervention

7 OF MAIDS AND PROSTITUTES: from: Postcolonial Disorders
Author(s) Lindquist Johan
Abstract: Do an Internet search using the keywords “maids” and “Singapore” and a number of employment agencies with names like Maidpower and Noble Maids will appear.¹ Noble Maids, for instance, offers packages from S$488 (Singapore dollars) for an “Indonesian transfer maid.” A Christian Indonesian maid will cost you a few hundred dollars more, about the same as a Filipino maid with unlimited replacements within two years. For Indonesian maids there is a free replacement period if she is medically unfit or if you find her unsuitable, but only for the first thirty days. Optional additions to package deals include up to

2 Language from: Interpreting Music
Abstract: For the past twenty years, musicology has increasingly merged the study of Western “classical” music with cultural history on one hand and critical-philosophical thought on the other. This development is no longer news, but it is still noteworthy. The field has expanded to take in a wide variety of topics and methods formerly considered peripheral or illegitimate. It has rescinded the exemption from social utility formerly used to separate classical music from popular music and culture, and it has broken both with the nineteenth-century metaphysics of music as a vessel of transcendence and the twentieth century’s reduction of that metaphysics

8 Deconstruction from: Interpreting Music
Abstract: “How,” asks the title of a well-known essay by Rose Subotnik, “Could Chopin’s A Major Prelude Be Deconstructed”?¹ Just how to take this question depends a great deal on how one inflects it, apart from certain ambiguities (we will not escape them) that bedevil the casual use of the terms deconstructanddeconstruction. The opening wordscouldsuggest either a scandalized “Howcouldyou!” or a keen “How could [that is, how might] you?” the one marking a sense of dangerous innovation still in the air at the time the essay was written, the other sensing an exciting opportunity to

13 Modern from: Interpreting Music
Abstract: Both modernity and its artistic offshoot, modernism, famously involve skepticism and confusion, widespread unintelligibility and the negation of meaning. A few iconic names make the point nicely: Schoenberg. Joyce. Eliot. Picasso. Time may long since have blunted their radical edge, but the memory remains sharp. How, then, does either modernism or modernity fit, except as a tragic or celebratory passage away from bygone clarities and promises, in a historically sensitive theory of interpretation? Is a hermeneutics of the modern and the modernist possible?

[PART TWO Introduction] from: Reason to Believe
Abstract: The question of whether people can decide to believe not only affects our understanding of Evangelicalism and empowerment in Latin America; it runs through the center of contemporary sociological research on culture and religion. In the past twenty-five years approaches that portray people as strategic actors who consciously choose their meanings have reinvigorated the sociology of culture and religion after the decline of the modernization and secularization theories of the 1950s and 1960s. However, these approaches are increasingly being criticized as reductionist, incoherent, or incomplete by scholars who recommend a return to emphases on religion and culture as autonomous symbolic

CHAPTER 6 The Social Structure of Conversion from: Reason to Believe
Abstract: Gabriel has suffered from epileptic seizures for most of his life. When he was a boy he worked for seven years in a shoe-repair factory. In his context it was a decent job that provided resources for his poor family; and his cousin would fill in for him when his health made it impossible to work. However, at fifteen he was in one of Caracas’s nightmarish bus accidents—in this case the bus plunged into the Guaire River that runs along most of the main highway. The injuries he suffered made his seizures more frequent and eventually obliged him to

CHAPTER 7 Two Lives, Five Years Later from: Reason to Believe
Abstract: Chapter 6 provided a relational analysis of Evangelical conversion based on a comparable sample of Evangelical and non-Evangelical men. The relatively large size of this sample allowed me to render the variety of relational situations that facilitate or prevent Evangelical conversion. Here I want to look more deeply into these issues by focusing on two cases: Augusto and Ugeth. Each was in my original sample: Augusto was one of my non-Evangelical respondents; Ugeth was one of my Evangelical informants from the first days of my research. I reinterviewed each two more times, five and six years after our original interview.

CHAPTER 8 Toward a Relational Pragmatic Theory of Cultural Agency from: Reason to Believe
Abstract: My analysis suggests that the distinctions social scientists make between empowerment and moral order, self-interest and morality, calculation and contemplation need to be rethought. Among Evangelical men in Caracas, religion does not begin with disinterest. It begins with dis-ease that is consciously and rationally addressed through religious practice. And this pragmatic quality does nothing to challenge its viability or its sincerity. The smiles and tears, courage and fear are all real. It would be a mistake to regard this as unique to Latin American Evangelicalism. I suspect any close review of empirical research on contemporary religious and cultural practices around

Book Title: Between One and One Another- Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Jackson Michael
Abstract: Michael Jackson extends his path-breaking work in existential anthropology by focusing on the interplay between two modes of human existence: that of participating in other peoples’ lives and that of turning inward to one’s self. Grounding his discussion in the subtle shifts between being acted upon and taking action, Jackson shows how the historical complexities and particularities found in human interactions reveal the dilemmas, conflicts, cares, and concerns that shape all of our lives. Through portraits of individuals encountered in the course of his travels, including friends and family, and anthropological fieldwork pursued over many years in such places as Sierra Leone and Australia, Jackson explores variations on this theme. As he describes the ways we address and negotiate the vexed relationships between “I” and “we”—the one and the many—he is also led to consider the place of thought in human life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pnphx

CHAPTER 1 Preamble from: Between One and One Another
Abstract: In the late 1930s, Gregory Bateson and Margaret Mead did pioneering ethnographic fieldwork in a Balinese village, using still and movie cameras to capture some of the “intangible aspects” of Balinese culture and everyday life, including trance, eating, gesture, mourning, family interactions, children’s play, art, and shadow-play puppets. In her introductory essay to their 1942 monograph, Mead speaks of a Balinese passion for being part of a noisy, festive crowd. Whether a marketplace, temple court, theatrical event, elaborate carving, or close-packed array of offerings on an altar, “the crowd preference is seen everywhere in Balinese life.¹ Women are said to

CHAPTER 9 Objects in Mirror Are Closer Than They Appear from: Between One and One Another
Abstract: In 1999 the anthropologist Galina Lindquist returned to Moscow after ten years away. She walked around the city as a revenant, finding it familiar yet utterly strange. This was not only because she had changed; Russia itself was no longer the country she had known during the years of perestroika. The late 1980s had been a time of jubilant expectation; the despised Soviet sistemahad collapsed, you could buy books in subway kiosks that only recently you could have been sent to the Gulag for possessing, and you were ostensibly free. Ten years later, this mood of abundant possibility had

CHAPTER 10 I Am an Other from: Between One and One Another
Abstract: Thornton Wilder’s masterpiece, The Bridge of San Luis Rey, begins with a tragedy that seems to defy explanation. A rope bridge gives way as a group of travellers are crossing a deep canyon, and they are thrown to their deaths. A Franciscan priest who witnesses the accident is both stunned and mystified. “The bridge seemed to be among the things that last forever; it was unthinkable that it should break.”¹ Brother Juniper doubts that a benevolent God would allow this fate to befall innocent people. There must surely be some reason for their deaths. “Why did this happen to those

CHAPTER 13 On the Work and Writing of Ethnography from: Between One and One Another
Abstract: Having explored several variations on the theme of human existence as a continual interplay between the hypothetical poles of being-in-oneself and being-with-others, it is only appropriate that I should consider in this closing chapter the methodological ramifications of this theme in the work and writing of ethnography.

2 The Experiential Basis of Subjectivity: from: Subjectivity
Author(s) FITZ-HENRY ERIN
Abstract: For years, the study of subjectivity has been dominated by theories of the self that interrogate cultural representations and performance. These studies have a certain richness in helping us understand how societies change because they are able to deal with collective transformations through major cultural meanings and practices. But they usually leave the intimate subjectivity of individuals unanalyzed, like a black box, or bring to it a decidedly sectarian view, such as Freudian psychoanalysis, which has long been overworked and overreached as an explanatory framework. However, anthropology has downplayed, at least since W. H. R. Rivers, the importance of theories

[PART II Introduction] from: Subjectivity
Abstract: In ″Hamlet in Purgatory,″ literary scholar Stephen Greenblatt challenges Freud′s privileging of Oedipus as the modern representative of psychological interiority. Greenblatt maintains that Shakespeare′s Hamlet is the one who does this work (chapter 5 in this volume). ″Remember me″ is the haunting demand of the dead father to Prince Hamlet. Following Goethe′s lead in seeing the prince as more of a neurotic than a hero, Greenblatt tests Jacques Lacan′s idea that the subject is the doing of the phantasm (1979) by actually traversing Hamlet′s ghost in history, so to speak. ″Something have you heard of Hamlet′s transformation: so I call

8 The Subject of Mental Illness: from: Subjectivity
Author(s) GOOD MARY-JO DELVECCHIO
Abstract: Near noon on a hot, sunny day in August 1997, Subandi and I [BG[ went to visit a woman we will call Yani, a thirty-six-year-old Javanese woman who was participating in our study of mental illness in the old city of Yogyakarta in central Java.¹ We had first met her for an interview two months earlier and were returning for a follow-up interview. We walked down a narrow alleyway that wanders through one of Yogya′s poor kampungs, a crowded neighborhood that spills downward to one of the rivers running through the town, passing women, children and young people sitting in

9 The ″Other″ of Culture in Psychosis: from: Subjectivity
Author(s) CORIN ELLEN
Abstract: When asked to speak about their first psychotic experience, patients interviewed in Québec could hardly find the words to describe what had happened to them: ″I was confused, I was losing memory, I was like in confusion.″ ″I was completely down, I couldn′t speak anymore, I was out of touch with reality, I was totally confused.″ ″Ah! It′s more than just sickness of the soul; it′s a huge rent. It′s … yes … it′s hell″ (Rodriguez, Corin, and Guay 2000). Narratives collected in southern India illustrate the depth of the alteration of patients′ experiences: ″I was frightened and did not

10 Hoarders and Scrappers: from: Subjectivity
Author(s) LOVELL ANNE M.
Abstract: As anthropologists rush to salvage culture in the wake of an increasingly biologized and globally homogenized psychiatry, they are focusing anew on phenomenology and the subjective experience of people afflicted with the anomalous states, feelings, and cognition of madness. But recent studies suggest that, in the Western settings in which psychiatry evolved, the cultural, macrosocial, and microsocial underpinnings of severe psychiatric conditions cannot so easily be separated from psychiatric knowledge. The comparative method of cross-cultural research, useful in uncovering the cultural dimension of psychiatric conditions outside the realm of biomedicine and Western psychiatry, is less helpful for recognizing the work

[PART IV Introduction] from: Subjectivity
Abstract: Science and technology are integral to the definition of reality and to the restructuring of power relations and bodily experience. In The Human Condition, Hannah Arendt argues that in the course of the twentieth century, political action has increasingly focused on the control of natural life and on the fabrication of automatons.¹ Thehomo fabergave way to thehomo laborans—that is, people became ever more involved in mass production and were most concerned with physiological existence. Scientific practices have been central to this transformation. Arendt argues that the experimental process that came to define the natural sciences—″the

CHAPTER ONE The Language of the Gods Enters the World from: The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: The transformation of the social life of Sanskrit around the beginning of the Common Era constitutes one of the most momentous events in the history of culture and power in Asia. It is also one of the least discussed and as a result, unsurprisingly, the least understood.

CHAPTER FIVE The Map of Sanskrit Knowledge and the Discourse on the Ways of Literature from: The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: When the scholar Hemacandra completed his grammar and presented it to King Jayasiṃha Siddharāja of Gujarat, the king had the book copied and distributed throughout the world—a world that was vast yet delimited in its vastness and completely named and known. The fact that a cosmopolitan grammar should have escaped its local confines in Aṇahilapāṭaka and circulated as far north as Nepal and as far south as Cōḻa country is in itself hardly surprising. After all, Sanskrit, like Prakrit and Apabhramsha (which are also analyzed in Hemacandra’s grammar), was no language of Place and was quite capable of traveling

CHAPTER THIRTEEN Actually Existing Theory and Its Discontents from: The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: If the passing of the so-called master narratives that have shaped modern ways of knowing the world—accounts based on belief in the progress of scientific reason, for example, or human emancipation—is partly a result of discontent with their apparent claims to a monopoly on truth or their rigid laws of developmentalism, there is no little irony in the fact that they are being replaced, in some instances, by what might be called cultural naturalism as the explanatory model of change in the history of culture and power. To be sure, theories linking cultural change and biological evolution have

Introduction from: Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: This is, perhaps, an “undisciplined” book, informed as it is by my multidisciplinary grounding and interests in film and media studies, cultural studies, and—an oddity in the United States—existential philosophy. Nonetheless, however undisciplined, the essays brought together in Carnal Thoughtsare not unruly. Indeed, whatever their specific subject matter and inflection, they share a single overarching theme and emerge from a single—albeit quite open—method.

6 The Scene of the Screen: from: Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: What happens when our expressivetechnologies also becomeperceptivetechnologies—expressing and extending us in ways we never thought possible, radically transforming not merely our comprehension of the world but also our apprehension of ourselves? Elaine Scarry writes that “we make things so that they will in turn remake us, revising the interior of embodied consciousness.”¹ Certainly, those particularly expressive technologies that are entailed in the practices of writing and the fine arts do, indeed, “remake” us as we use them—but how much more powerful a revision of our embodied consciousness occurs with the inauguration of perceptive technologies such

9 A Leg to Stand On: from: Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: Let me begin again with the fact that I have a prosthetic left leg—and thus a certain investment in and curiosity about the ways in which “the prosthetic” has been embraced and recreated by contemporary scholars trying to make sense (and theory) out of our increasingly technologized lives. When I put my leg on in the morning, knowing that I am the one who will give it literal—if exhaustible—vitality even as it gives me literal support, I don’t find it nearly as seductive a matter—or generalized an idea—as do some of my academic colleagues. And

Book Title: After the Massacre-Commemoration and Consolation in Ha My and My Lai
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Faust Drew
Abstract: Though a generation has passed since the massacre of civilians at My Lai, the legacy of this tragedy continues to reverberate throughout Vietnam and the rest of the world. This engrossing study considers how Vietnamese villagers in My Lai and Ha My-a village where South Korean troops committed an equally appalling, though less well-known, massacre of unarmed civilians-assimilate the catastrophe of these mass deaths into their everyday ritual life. Based on a detailed study of local history and moral practices, After the Massacrefocuses on the particular context of domestic life in which the Vietnamese villagers interact with their ancestors on one hand and the ghosts of tragic death on the other. Heonik Kwon explains what intimate ritual actions can tell us about the history of mass violence and the global bipolar politics that caused it. He highlights the aesthetics of Vietnamese commemorative rituals and the morality of their practical actions to liberate the spirits from their grievous history of death. The author brings these important practices into a critical dialogue with dominant sociological theories of death and symbolic transformation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pnztv

Introduction from: Jewish Identities
Abstract: In “Jewish Music and a Jew’s Music,” the penultimate chapter of his path-breaking book Arnold Schoenberg: The Composer as Jew, Alexander Ringer campaigns for Jewish music that goes “beyond more or less obvious affinities with liturgical or folk-tunes, not to speak of mere textual reference or the parochial effusions of composing chauvinists.” Where this “beyond” leads composers Ringer is all too ready to declare. In the spirit of his protagonist, Arnold Schoenberg, Ringer denies the significance of the “what” (material) and elevates the “how” (treatment) in the creation of a uniquely Jewish music. Following Russian music theorist Boris Asafiev (1884

Chapter 7 Torsos and Abstractions: from: Jewish Identities
Abstract: Schoenberg left behind several drafts of his stage set for the second part of act 1 of his 1927 play The Biblical Way. On graph paper he worked out the exact dimensions of the stadium and the bleachers and made pastel and watercolor pictures of the administrative building and the stadium. The bleachers surrounding the stadium are seen from the audience’s perspective as a semicircle, on two pictures closing almost into a full circle. Nature behind the stadium appears either as bucolic green hills or as towering snow-covered peaks. In either case, nature is obviously separated from humans, who gather

Chapter 9 A Taste for “the Things of Heaven”: from: Jewish Identities
Abstract: Among Schoenberg’s papers is an obituary of French painter, illustrator, and writer Adolphe Willette (1857–1926) from the Berliner Tageblattwith the composer’s notes in the margin. “I am rising higher and higher,” Willette was reported to have said on his deathbed with an expression of profound happiness. “Now I am ascending straight up, always up, continuously without stopping, quick as an arrow—straight to Paradise.”¹ Willette had a peaceful exit from the world, strikingly dissimilar from the violent departure of Richard Gerstl, whose death remained an open wound for Schoenberg, his one-time friend and disciple.² Willette’s death, in contrast,

Book Title: A Usable Past-Essays in European Cultural History
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): BOUWSMA WILLIAM J.
Abstract: The essays assembled here represent forty years of reflection about the European cultural past by an eminent historian. The volume concentrates on the Renaissance and Reformation, while providing a lens through which to view problems of perennial interest. A Usable Pastis a book of unusual scope, touching on such topics as political thought and historiography, metaphysical and practical conceptions of order, the relevance of Renaissance humanism to Protestant thought, the secularization of European culture, the contributions of particular professional groups to European civilization, and the teaching of history. The essays inA Usable Pastare unified by a set of common concerns. William Bouwsma has always resisted the pretensions to science that have shaped much recent historical scholarship and made the work of historians increasingly specialized and inaccessible to lay readers. Following Friedrich Nietzsche, he argues that since history is a kind of public utility, historical research should contribute to the self-understanding of society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pp5kk

1 The Two Faces of Humanism: from: A Usable Past
Abstract: Recent emphasis, stemming primarily from the work of P. O. Kristeller, on the central importance of rhetoric for Renaissance humanism, has enabled us to understand the underlying unity of a singularly complex movement; and it has proved singularly fruitful for Renaissance scholarship. At the same time, since this approach depends on the identification of a kind of lowest common denominator for humanism, it may also have the unintended effect of reducing our perception of its rich variety and thus of limiting our grasp of its historical significance. I should like, accordingly, to begin with Kristeller’s fundamental insight, but then to

5 Lawyers and Early Modern Culture from: A Usable Past
Abstract: Although European historians have increasingly recognized the impact of large-scale change or significant events on human culture, they have paid little attention to the importance of the less dramatic aspects of social experience for shaping the attitudes of men. The result has been, for most of us, a schism between social and intellectual history that has impoverished both. As Frederic C. Lane has reminded us, the routine tasks of daily life are likely to impress those engaged in them with a profound sense of what the world and especially men are like and to produce patterns of expectation and systems

10 Venice, Spain, and the Papacy: from: A Usable Past
Abstract: Although Paolo Sarpi is one of the great figures of the seventeenth century, not only of Italy, but of all Europe, and although many historians, Italian and non-Italian, have studied his career and thought, he remains an enigma and a subject of controversy. It is true that we have good editions of his most important writings and an increasing body of information concerning his life and surroundings. Yet there is still no satisfactory general work on Sarpi, nor is there any generally accepted interpretation of his personality, his thought, and his purposes.

14 The Waning of the Middle Ages Revisited from: A Usable Past
Abstract: We have come a long way since Bury informed us so firmly that history is a science, no more and no less. Historiography has now become so various and eclectic that it is often difficult to see it as the expression of any specific discipline; historians today seem to be united only by some common concern with the past and by a common allegiance, at least in principle, to respect for evidence, the exercise of critical intelligence, and openness of mind. They differ, on the whole amicably, about the questions they ask; and in answering these questions they draw freely

18 Socrates and the Confusion of the Humanities from: A Usable Past
Abstract: The impression that the humanities are now in special trouble—perhaps even, as we sometimes say, in a “crisis”—is widespread among teachers in the traditional humanistic disciplines, and it is doubtless true that we have immediate grounds for concern. After a period of remarkable expansion and exuberance in higher education, when there were students enough for us all, enrollments are declining; and students, worried about the future, seem to be drifting into programs better designed to prepare them for jobs than anything we have to offer. This essay is directed, however, not to this immediately distressing situation, but to

INTRODUCTION from: The Maternal Factor
Abstract: Much work is being done today on the evolution of morality. Anthropologists, psychologists, evolution scientists, and philosophers are looking for the roots of altruism, empathy, solidarity, and cooperation.¹ Surprisingly, in seeking these roots, scholars rarely look at female experience. It may well be that one wide and increasingly influential approach to moral life—care ethics—can be traced to maternal instinct.

EIGHT War and Violence from: The Maternal Factor
Abstract: Perhaps the saddest evolutionary legacy still oppressing us is the male tendency toward aggression and violence. Many feminist thinkers have insisted that virtually all gender differences in temperament and behavior are products of culture and socialization, but evidence to the contrary has been accumulating. One need not be an essentialist to believe that many differences anchored in our evolutionary past are innate in the sense that they are heavily influenced by biology. When I reject essentialism, I reject the idea that female and male human beings were createdwith essential features by God and that these natures should not or

Book Title: Gadamer’s Repercussions-Reconsidering Philosophical Hermeneutics
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Krajewski Bruce
Abstract: Certainly one of the key German philosophers of the twentieth century, Hans-Georg Gadamer also influenced the study of literature, art, music, sacred and legal texts, and medicine. Indeed, while much attention has been focused on Gadamer's writings about ancient Greek and modern German philosophy, the relevance of his work for other disciplines is only now beginning to be properly considered and understood. In an effort to address this slant, this volume brings together many prominent scholars to assess, re-evaluate, and question Hans-Georg Gadamer's works, as well as his place in intellectual history. The book includes a recent essay by Gadamer on "the task of hermeneutics," as well as essays by distinguished contributors including Jürgen Habermas, Richard Rorty, Gerald Bruns, Georgia Warnke, and many others. The contributors situate Gadamer's views in surprising ways and show that his writings speak to a range of contemporary debates—from constitutional questions to issues of modern art. A controversial final section attempts to uncover and clarify Gadamer's history in relation to National Socialism. More an investigation and questioning than a celebration of this venerable and profoundly influential philosopher, this collection will become a catalyst for any future rethinking of philosophical hermeneutics, as well as a significant starting place for rereading and reviewing Hans-Georg Gadamer.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pp75p

Chapter 8 Gadamer’s Philosophy of Dialogue and Its Relation to the Postmodernism of Nietzsche, Heidegger, Derrida, and Strauss from: Gadamer’s Repercussions
Author(s) BEINER RONALD
Abstract: The reflections that follow are a response to Catherine Zuckert’s interesting and provocative book, Postmodern Platos.¹ The premise of the book is that there is a widely perceived crisis in the status and identity of Western philosophy, and leading thinkers since Nietzsche have felt obliged to return to the origins of philosophy in Plato in order to clarify what philosophy means and what it might continue to mean in the light of this crisis. In addition to Nietzsche, Zuckert examines four other thinkers—Heidegger, Hans-Georg Gadamer, Leo Strauss, and Jacques Derrida—who share the conviction that Plato must be confronted

ONE Up in Smoke: from: A Problem of Presence
Abstract: IN OCTOBER 1999 I INTERVIEWED Gaylord Kambarami, general secretary of the Bible Society of Zimbabwe (BSZ), an ecumenical organization that traces its roots to the British and Foreign Bible Society, established in 1804. Many churches operating in Zimbabwe, including several independent churches, support the BSZ. Kambarami estimates that since 1980 the BSZ has distributed over three million copies of Scripture, or about one Bible for every four Zimbabweans alive today. Based on these figures alone and discounting distribution by individual churches (to say nothing of copies handed down from one generation to the next), there should be at least one

SIX Singing and the Metaphysics of Sound: from: A Problem of Presence
Abstract: SINCE SHONIWA-JOHANE’S DESCENT FROM the Marimba hill, singing has been central to the makeup of apostolic Christianity. Johane’s position as a prophet was marked by music well before the articulation of a distinct Friday or Saturday message. It was the singing, in fact, as much as what Johane said, that often got the nascent apostolics into trouble. In a report to the chief native commissioner in Salisbury, the native commissioner at Goromonzi wrote that in the last months of 1934 “singing, shouting and dancing could be heard nightly” from the summit of a hill in the Chindamora Reserve. Local missionaries

Introduction: from: Imaginary Communities
Abstract: Taking up the critical project Raymond Williams announced in the early 1960s of reinterpreting and extending the ideas and values of the past “in terms of a still changing society and my own experience of it,” this book examines some important dimensions of the changing relationship between space and community during the “long revolution” of Western modernity.¹ In addition to contributing to a reconsideration of modernity in terms of its “spatial histories,” this book also does a number of other things: most important, it looks at the origins and subsequent adventures of the singularly modern construct of the nation-state; it

FOUR The Hyperbolic Vegetarian: from: Being There
Author(s) Ghassem-Fachandi Parvis
Abstract: In this essay, I explicate how the affect of disgust relates to violence by focusing on a case study of an upwardly mobile

TEN Afterthoughts: from: Being There
Author(s) Borneman John
Abstract: As we reflect back on the essays assembled in this volume, it appears that each deals with a particular defining moment of thinking about and practicing anthropology. They do not aim to define a subdiscipline in anthropology or formulate an encompassing theoretical orientation regarding substantive issues. As a group, the authors differ in ethnicity, gender, and nationality, and in their respective stages of professional development. Though they all live near and work in U.S. and Canadian universities, their research spans societies that vary widely in geographical location, language, and sociopolitical situation: Canadian Inuit, European, Arab, African, Indian, and Russian societies.

1 Historicizing Ottoman Egypt: from: Gatekeepers of the Arab Past
Abstract: At the close of the nineteenth century, Egypt was a place marked by rapid intellectual, political, economic, and cultural changes. It was an extremely dynamic era. None of the changes that occurred in the period can be explained by a single ideology (nationalism, Pan-Islamism, constitutionalism) or a fixed set of abstract intellectual agendas (positivism, Darwinism, Spenserism), and it is very important to acknowledge the diversity of thought that is to be found in the thinking of this period. If dynamism was a sign of the era, it necessarily meant that intellectual horizons were wide open for the absorption, modification and

6 Partisan Historiography: from: Gatekeepers of the Arab Past
Abstract: After the outbreak of World War II and increasingly throughout the 1940s, Egyptian public life was radicalized. Parliamentary politics was viewed as detached from the country’s real problems, and politicians appeared as self-serving and corrupt. Successive governments rose and fell, and the existing political order began to lose both credibility and respect. Thus, the largest opposition group, the Muslim Brotherhood, openly challenged the state by murdering Prime Minister Maḥmūd Fahmī al-Nuqrāshī. The government responded in the same fashion and eliminated the brotherhood’s leader, Ḥasan al-Bannā. On a number of occasions the state brutally suppressed the communists. The popular anti-British struggle

9 Authoritarian Pluralism: from: Gatekeepers of the Arab Past
Abstract: Immediately after Anwar Sadat’s accession to power in November 1970, the seemingly united front of Nasserism began to collapse. In less than a decade the authoritarian populism and socialist dogmatism of the previous era were replaced by a political system of authoritarian pluralism. Expanded and bureaucratically perfected by President Husni Mubarak since 1981, this new political system has had a paradoxical quality: For the liberalization of the political and cultural arenas and the diversification and privatization of the media and the economy did not undermine authoritarianism but only strengthened it. The puzzling irony of this counterintuitive sociopolitical system would probably

Introduction from: Little India
Abstract: In February 1999, two months after I had left Mauritius, having concluded my main dissertation fieldwork, riots erupted on the island for the first time since 1968. The popular singer Kaya had died under suspicious circumstances in police custody, where he had been held on drug charges. Kaya was a member of the Creole ethnic community of Mauritius, most of whom trace their ancestry to African and Malagasy slaves. After the news of Kaya’s death in the central police headquarters of Port Louis became known, protesters took to the streets in suburbs of the capital, attacking police stations and other

CHAPTER 1 Creole Island or Little India? from: Little India
Abstract: Reflecting on the spread of nationalism in the colonial world, Partha Chatterjee, in The Nation and Its Fragments: Colonial and Postcolonial Histories, asks whether the worldwide spread of the nation form has condemned postcolonial societies to follow “derivative” models of political organization and identification. Engaging with Benedict Anderson’s thesis of the modularity of nationalism (Anderson 1991, 4, 87), Chatterjee suggests that postcolonial nationhood does indeed stand in a quasi-dialogic relationship with European models of nationality, yet it nevertheless exhibits irreducible difference from them, since it is crucially shaped by the conditions of the colonial encounter (Chatterjee 1993). Since ethnolinguistic nationalism

CHAPTER 3 Social Semiotics of Language: from: Little India
Abstract: Hindu Mauritians make use of a wide repertoire of registers and styles of language in order to construct and inhabit interactional stances and claim ethnic and diasporic identities, which raises the issue of performance and its role in establishing social relationships and distinctions.¹ Building on John Austin’s theory of performance, Judith Butler (1990) has conceptualized social identities as created and reproduced through acts of performance, which in turn depend on the citationality of conventional signs recognized by others. Focusing on these qualities of performance, in this chapter I explore the multiple ways in which Hindu Mauritians both construct and align

CHAPTER 5 Performing Purity: from: Little India
Abstract: Hindu activists in religious organizations and state and para-state bodies, some of whom are also involved in the network of Hindu nationalist organizations that operate in both India and Mauritius, are concerned about the rapid language shift from Bhojpuri to Mauritian Creole among Hindu Mauritians. Interpreting the decreasing use of Bhojpuri as a threat to the reproduction of Hindu difference in Mauritius, and making use of their close connections to state institutions, they are trying to reverse the shift to Creole by arranging for the use of Bhojpuri on national television and radio. As I will discuss below, the use

THREE Concerning Violence: from: Cannibal Talk
Abstract: The change in Maori practice is probably the most controversial part of my argument. I present my thesis hesitantly because no one seems to have a clear knowledge of precontact or “traditional” Maori anthropophagy. In fact this phrasing might be a misnomer because New Zealand consisted of a multiplicity of Maori communities, such that, forms of anthropophagy, wherever they existed, would have shown local variations. Conventional ethnography simply constructs an ideal type of Maori cannibalism from a variety of statements—interviews with older men, myths, missionary and magistrate accounts, and even that of eyewitnesses. These sources of information are treated

FIVE The Later Fate of Heads: from: Cannibal Talk
Abstract: For the moment let me bracket “this cannibal business of selling the heads of dead idolators” that Melville’s Ishmael speaks about and shift instead to the significance of that queer trade of Queequeg trying to sell his many heads even though the “market’s overstocked.”¹ I will do so by continuing my earlier treatise on decapitated heads with an incident recorded by Samuel Marsden, the coordinator of the Protestant missions in New Zealand on behalf of the Church Missionary Society. Marsden was a “Evangelical Anglican” well educated at Cambridge and strongly influenced by popular Wesleyanism and other Calvinist movements of the

SEVEN Narratives of the Self: from: Cannibal Talk
Abstract: Historical ignorance compels us to leave aside Lockerby and Thomas Smith and move on to Peter Dillon who on September 6, 1813, presented an eyewitness description of a cannibal feast that has not been surpassed in its detail before or since. Dillon was a well-known sea captain, trader, and self-designated explorer living in Sydney. Virtually every writer on Fiji mentions with approbation his account as truly authentic, and I considered it so too when I first read about it in J.W. Davidson’s well-known biography of Dillon.¹ It required several months of hard work at the National Library of Australia examining

I The Divine Homer and the Background of Neoplatonic Allegory from: Homer the Theologian
Abstract: Our concern here will be to examine one among several traditions of the interpretation of Homer in antiquity: that characterized by the claims that Homer was a divine sage with revealed knowledge of the fate of souls and of the structure of reality, and that the IliadandOdysseyare mystical allegories yielding information of this sort if properly read. It will be necessary to omit from discussion the larger part of the history of the interpretation of Homer in antiquity¹ in order to look specifically at the tradition closing that history and looking forward to the Middle Ages and

IV The Interaction of Allegorical Interpretation and Deliberate Allegory from: Homer the Theologian
Abstract: The emergence of allegorical writing on a large scale and the mystical allegorical interpretation of non-epic literature are both developments rooted in the period of the authors we have been discussing. Neither of these developments is well understood, and if neither has found its historian, it is doubtless because the evidence is sparse, difficult to interpret, and often difficult to date. My comments will be limited to a sampling of texts providing evidence that the tradition of allegorical reading we have been examining was, in fact, crucially important in generating patterns of thought about literature and responses to literature that

VI The Transmission of the Neoplatonists’ Homer to the Latin Middle Ages from: Homer the Theologian
Abstract: Up to this point, with the exception of a brief discussion of Prudentius, this study has been concerned exclusively with Greek literature and thought. In fact, much of what has been discussed has been of Italian origin, from the archaic Pythagoreanism of southern Italy to the teachings of Plotinus and Porphyry in Rome. Virtually all the material examined, however, has been Greek in language and tradition. Traces of the Platonized Homer can be found in Latin authors as early as Apuleius,¹ a contemporary of Numenius, but there is no single work in Latin that explores at length the conception of

Book Title: Tales of the Neighborhood-Jewish Narrative Dialogues in Late Antiquity
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Hasan-Rokem Galit
Abstract: In this lively and intellectually engaging book, Galit Hasan-Rokem shows that religion is shaped not only in the halls of theological disputation and institutions of divine study, but also in ordinary events of everyday life. Common aspects of human relations offer a major source for the symbols of religious texts and rituals of late antique Judaism as well as its partner in narrative dialogues, early Christianity, Hasan-Rokem argues. Focusing on the "neighborhood" of the Galilee that is the birthplace of many major religious and cultural developments, this book brings to life the riddles, parables, and folktales passed down in Rabbinic stories from the first half of the first millennium of the Common Era.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pppfc

TWO Peeping through a Hole: from: Tales of the Neighborhood
Abstract: The Babylonian Talmud, where this tale appears, is the greatest single document of Rabbinic literature of Late Antiquity. Edited between the late fifth and the late sixth centuries, it is devised as a running commentary and elaboration of the Mishnah, which was edited in

THREE Building the Gate, or Neighbors Make Good Fences from: Tales of the Neighborhood
Abstract: Rabbi Shim’on Ben [Bar] Yohai said: “Peace is the greatest blessing as it contains all the other blessings.” [As it is written] “The Lord will give strength unto his people: the Lord will bless his people with peace.” (Psalms 29:11)

CHAPTER 1 Introduction: from: Reconfiguring Modernity
Abstract: When blues legend Howlin’ Wolf sings, “Nature cause me to mess up my life,” we know how he feels.¹ Caught by the inevitable, yet never entirely blameless, a person trapped by “nature”—“bad-ass nature” in this case—will surely sing the blues. And yet, despite our instinctive respect for nature’s power, we rarely define what we mean by the term. Nature may mean a person’s individual nature, as it seems to for Howlin’ Wolf, or human nature in general. Alternatively, it may mean physical nature, the concrete world external to ourselves, or it may mean the nature of circumstances, the

CHAPTER 2 The Topographical Imagination of Tokugawa Politics from: Reconfiguring Modernity
Abstract: The sheer number of words for nature in Tokugawa texts dramatizes the concept’s many facets and renders vocabulary an obvious starting point for discussing nature’s multivalence. Despite this abundance of terms, Maruyama Masao’s critique of nature in early modern Japanese political thought relies almost exclusively on one word, shizen(自黑). That word, however, did not become standard until the 1890s. Indeed, before the 1890s,shizenappears to have been rather uncommon; certainly it was not a preoccupation in Confucian studies. As historian Hino Tatsuo comments, “In the nine classics [of Confucianism], you cannot find one example of the use of

1 Varieties, Taxonomies, and Definitions from: Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Anderson Allan
Abstract: Th is chapter is about defining Pentecostalism/s, in view of the fact that definitions are often static and prone to generate confusion. It seeks to give some clarity to the discussion of ways in which Pentecostalism can be described and analyzed, and it tries to offer direction through the maze of different shifting forms of Pentecostalism/s. In addition, it outlines some of the ways in which this movement can be identified by using the family resemblance analogy. It looks at the parameters by which we make categories, offers a flexible and overlapping taxonomy, and examines how various scholars have approached

3 The Cultural Turn from: Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Bergunder Michael
Abstract: “Cultural studies” and similar designations mark a diverse field of related theoretical approaches, sometimes labeled “cultural turn,” that have deeply influenced the humanities and social sciences in the past three decades.¹ In general, studies on Pentecostal and Charismatic movements have not taken up these approaches in their research design, despite notable exceptions² and occasional reference in anthropological studies,³ as well as in reflections by Pentecostal and Charismatic theologians themselves.⁴ Nevertheless, it is worth taking a closer look at these approaches, because some of the pressing issues in the current research on Pentecostalism are reflected therein.

8 Anthropology of Religion from: Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Robbins Joel
Abstract: Mark Noll, discussing the early-twentieth-century emergence of Pentecostalism, refers to it as a development that “as is now well known, has had world historical significance.”¹ It is fair to say that Noll is right on both counts: Pentecostalism has changed and is changing the global landscape in world historical ways, and more and more people are coming to know that it is doing so. In reference to the first point, about global influence, it is hard today to dispute the claim that Pentecostalism, broadly understood throughout this chapter to include both Pentecostal and Charismatic groups, has been and continues to

9 Sociology of Religion from: Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Hunt Stephen
Abstract: The dominance of the “hard” secularization thesis in mainstream sociology clearly had implications for the subdiscipline of sociology of religion. In short, if the decline of religion was relentless, then so was the status of that specialism which sought to comprehend it as a sociocultural manifestation. In an increasingly religiousless world, the

11 Pneumatologies in Systematic Theology from: Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Kärkkäinen Veli-Matti
Abstract: The aim of this chapter is to look at the state of Pentecostal theology. Surveying the literature available, I was reminded of the important piece written by the leading Pentecostal systematician Frank Macchia in the revised edition of the New International Dictionary of Pentecostal and Charismatic Movements,titled “Theology, Pentecostal.”¹ That article gives a succinct, balanced, and informative description of the main systematic contributions to developing Pentecostal theology. It discusses both the question of methodology and the main loci of Pentecostal theologies. Consequently, I came to the conclusion that attempting something similar but in a more modest way, focusing on

12 Missiology and the Interreligious Encounter from: Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Richie Tony
Abstract: Pentecostals have always been heavily involved in missions and hold missionaries in high esteem as extraordinary heroes of the faith.¹ But they have traditionally not given as much thought to the topic of theology of religions, or interreligious dialogue and encounter, as to other theological loci.² Why this is the case may be related in part to the fact that academic Pentecostalism is but a recent arrival to the theological scene, with its first generation of professionally trained theologians—as opposed to historians or biblical scholars—emerging only since the early 1990s.³ Yet Pentecostal scholars can no longer avoid giving

Book Title: Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinema- Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Morgan Daniel
Abstract: With Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinema, Daniel Morgan makes a significant contribution to scholarship on Jean-Luc Godard, especially his films and videos since the late 1980s, some of the most notoriously difficult works in contemporary cinema. Through detailed analyses of extended sequences, technical innovations, and formal experiments, Morgan provides an original interpretation of a series of several internally related films-Soigne ta droite(Keep Your Right Up, 1987),Nouvelle vague(New Wave, 1990), andAllemagne 90 neuf zéro(Germany 90 Nine Zero, 1991)-and the monumental late video work,Histoire(s) du cinéma(1988-1998). Taking up a range of topics, including the role of nature and natural beauty, the relation between history and cinema, and the interactions between film and video, the book provides a distinctive account of the cinematic and intellectual ambitions of Godard's late work. At the same time,Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinemaprovides a new direction for the fields of film and philosophy by drawing on the idealist and romantic tradition of philosophical aesthetics, which rarely finds an articulation within film studies. In using the tradition of aesthetics to illuminate Godard's late films and videos, Morgan shows that these works transform the basic terms and categories of aesthetics in and for the cinema.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppvj2

INTRODUCTION from: Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinema
Abstract: This is a book about Jean-Luc Godard’s late work, in particular the films and videos he has made since the late 1980s. It is also a book about the place of aesthetics in cinema, and about the persistence of modernism, political radicalism, and late nineteenth-century artistic and philosophical concerns into the end of the twentieth century. Last, it is a book about how all these things go together, about the way Godard’s films and videos make use of this inheritance and in so doing transform it in and for the cinema.

1 The Work of Aesthetics from: Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinema
Abstract: If my argument is for the importance of aesthetics within Godard’s films and videos since the late 1980s, two kinds of questions quickly arise. First, if I am taking a tradition of philosophical aesthetics to be not only an interpretive framework but also explicitly present within these works, what evidence is there in the films and videos? Where does this concern manifest itself? Second, if aesthetics is as prominent as I am claiming, why have critics by and large failed to bring it up, much less discuss it as a central orientation?

4 Cinema without Photography from: Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinema
Abstract: At the very beginning of the book, I described a scene from Allemagne 90 neuf zérothat takes place in the Alte Nationalgalerie in Berlin. It starts with a shot of a woman in the act of taking a photograph; a 180-degree cut over her shoulder shows that she is photographing Gustave Courbet’s paintingThe Wave(see figure 1). As she presses the shutter, Lemmy Caution says in voice-over, “Bonjour, Monsieur Courbet,” and Godard cuts to a black-and-white film clip of a large wave rising up from the bottom of the frame and tossing a small ship. When I discussed

6 Cinema after the End of Cinema (Again) from: Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinema
Abstract: The closing moments of Histoire(s) du cinémahave the feel of an elegy, of being at the end of something: the single rose, the solitary figure of Bacon’sStudy for a Portrait of Van Gogh, and the past tense of the final words (“I was that man”). In case we weren’t sure to whom the sequence was referring, Godard includes a black-and-white photograph of his own face, weaving it in and out of the other images before slowly resolving on it. This final sequence suggests an end both to cinema itself and to Godard’s career—and, more than anything else,

Book Title: Fighting Words-Religion, Violence, and the Interpretation of Sacred Texts
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Renard John
Abstract: One of the critical issues in interreligious relations today is the connection, both actual and perceived, between sacred sources and the justification of violent acts as divinely mandated. Fighting Wordsmakes solid text-based scholarship accessible to the general public, beginning with the premise that a balanced approach to religious pluralism in our world must build on a measured, well-informed response to the increasingly publicized and sensationalized association of terrorism and large-scale violence with religion. In his introduction, Renard provides background on the major scriptures of seven religious traditions-Jewish, Christian (including both the Old and New Testaments), Islamic, Baha'i, Zoroastrian, Hindu, and Sikh. Eight chapters then explore the interpretation of select facets of these scriptures, focusing on those texts so often claimed, both historically and more recently, as inspiration and justification for every kind of violence, from individual assassination to mass murder. With its nuanced consideration of a complex topic, this book is not merely about the religious sanctioning of violence but also about diverse ways of reading sacred textual sources.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppx1q

9 Words as Weapons: from: Fighting Words
Author(s) Singh Pashaura
Abstract: The last two decades of the twentieth century witnessed a popular representation of Sikhs in the Indian media as bloodthirsty avengers rather than as bloodied victims. The principal reason for this stereotype was the rise of Sikh nationalism in the early 1980s. Akali Dal (army of the immortal), the main political party of the Sikhs in the Punjab, was demanding increased autonomy for all the states of India. During that period, relations with the Indian government became increasingly strained as a result. In an apparent attempt to sow dissension in the ranks of the Akali Dal, the Congress government encouraged

Book Title: Rifle Reports-A Story of Indonesian Independence
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Steedly Mary Margaret
Abstract: On August 17, 1945, Indonesia proclaimed its independence from Dutch colonial rule. Five years later, the Republic of Indonesia was recognized as a unified, sovereign state. The period in between was a time of aspiration, mobilization, and violence, in which nationalists fought to expel the Dutch while also trying to come to grips with the meaning of "independence." Rifle Reportsis an ethnographic history of this extraordinary time as it was experienced on the outskirts of the nation among Karo Batak villagers in the rural highlands of North Sumatra. Based on extensive interviews and conversations with Karo veterans,Rifle Reportsinterweaves personal and family memories, songs and stories, memoirs and local histories, photographs and monuments, to trace the variously tangled and perhaps incompletely understood ways that Karo women and men contributed to the founding of the Indonesian nation. The routes they followed are divergent, difficult, sometimes wavering, and rarely obvious, but they are clearly marked with the signs of gender. This innovative historical study of nationalism and decolonization is an anthropological exploration of the gendering of wartime experience, as well as an inquiry into the work of storytelling as memory practice and ethnographic genre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt2jcbst

CHAPTER 3 Imagining Independence from: Rifle Reports
Abstract: Word of Indonesia’s independence reached the Karo highlands even before it was officially announced in Medan. According to Sektor III historian A. R. Surbakti, the news was carried by Selamat Ginting and his friends when they came to collect the buried guns of Juma Pali. In an exuberant rush of movement and emotion, Surbakti’s (1978:34) account draws the reader into the action as their 1938 Ford coupé convertible speeds back toward the city, loaded now with the disinterred Japanese guns: “Their spirits seethed with joy, as if no power on earth could oppose them.” When a policeman stops the car

Book Title: The Fate of Place-A Philosophical History
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Casey Edward S.
Abstract: In this imaginative and comprehensive study, Edward Casey, one of the most incisive interpreters of the Continental philosophical tradition, offers a philosophical history of the evolving conceptualizations of place and space in Western thought. Not merely a presentation of the ideas of other philosophers, The Fate of Placeis acutely sensitive to silences, absences, and missed opportunities in the complex history of philosophical approaches to space and place. A central theme is the increasing neglect of place in favor of space from the seventh century A.D. onward, amounting to the virtual exclusion of place by the end of the eighteenth century. Casey begins with mythological and religious creation stories and the theories of Plato and Aristotle and then explores the heritage of Neoplatonic, medieval, and Renaissance speculations about space. He presents an impressive history of the birth of modern spatial conceptions in the writings of Newton, Descartes, Leibniz, and Kant and delineates the evolution of twentieth-century phenomenological approaches in the work of Husserl, Merleau-Ponty, Bachelard, and Heidegger. In the book's final section, Casey explores the postmodern theories of Foucault, Derrida, Tschumi, Deleuze and Guattari, and Irigaray.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt2jcbw8

3 Place as Container: from: The Fate of Place
Abstract: That place was a continuing cynosure of ancient Greek thought is abundantly evident in Aristotle’s treatment of the topic: for Aristotle, wheresomething is constitutes a basic metaphysical category.¹ Except for the extraordinary cases of the Unmoved Mover and the heavens(ouranos)taken as a single whole, every perishable sublunar substance (including the earth as a whole) is placebound, having its own “proper place” as well as existing in the “common place” provided by the heavens.² Thanks to this stress on the importance of place for each particular “changeable body”—that is, changeable with respect to motion or size—the

Interlude from: The Fate of Place
Abstract: In Part I we witnessed a development—or, more in keeping with Aristotle's thinking, an “envelopment”—of remarkable scope. The scope is impressive not just in terms of time (a period of approximately two thousand years) but also in terms of theme: all the way from muthostologos.Yet Plato’sTimaeuscombines both of these latter extremes in a single text: hence its position in the middle of Part I, flanked on one side by imaginative mythicoreligious accounts of creation and on the other side by Aristotle’s sober descriptions. Nevertheless, this progression in time and theme is no simple

6 Modern Space as Absolute: from: The Fate of Place
Abstract: To turn to the seventeenth century is to plunge into a turbulent world in which alchemy vied with physics, theology with philosophy, politics with religion, nations with each other, individuals with their anguished souls. No single treatment can do justice to this multifarious period of human history. We can, however, pick our way through it by attending to an assortment of figures who occupied themselves expressly with questions of place and space: Gassendi, Newton, Descartes, Locke, and Leibniz. Each of these thinkers—with the exception of Locke—was also a prominent scientist, and this double identity is no accident. To

9 Modern Space as Site and Point: from: The Fate of Place
Abstract: Leibniz displayed a special alertness to the metaphor of organism—its dynamical aspects, its animating force, its inherent vitalism. Far from being something merely mechanistic, the organic body of the monad—which we have seen to be intimately tied to place—is a “living being” or “divine machine.”¹ Since every monad is in effect a world filled with monads at increasingly minuscule levels, organicity extends to everything in the end: “There is a world of creatures, living beings, animals, entelechies, souls, in the smallest particle of matter.”² Hence every bit of matter can be compared to a pond filled with

Transition from: The Fate of Place
Abstract: Where have all the places gone? In the long wide wake of Aristotle, the answer has become increasingly evident: submerged in space. Aristotle’s ingenious effort to “bury space in bodies”—to foreclose it in the tightly fitting places tailored for physical bodies as their most intimately containing surface structures—was foredoomed. The yawning emptiness of the void, the “gap” (chaos)lampooned by Aristophanes and first examined systematically by Atomists, proved irresistible to Aristotle’s successors, beginning with Strato in the third century B.C. Eight hundred years later, Philoponus launched outright attack on place’s putative power, above all the idea that the

10 By Way of Body: from: The Fate of Place
Abstract: The most effective way to appreciate the importance of place again is not to approach it as a total phenomenon, to compare its virtues en bloc to those of space in a single systematic treatment. Such a totalizing treatment would lead to nothing but vacant generalities. What is needed is a new and quite particular way intoplace, a means of reconnecting with it in its very idiosyncrasy. Given the crushing monolith of space in the modern era, the best return to place through what Freud calls a “narrow defile”¹—not, however, the defile dream (which is what Freud had

11 Proceeding to Place by Indirection: from: The Fate of Place
Abstract: What, on Freud’s view, dreams provide for an understanding of the unconscious mind—a via regia,a “royal road”—the body has provided for place, which by the end of the nineteenth century had come to be as repressed the libidinal contents of the unconscious mind. Nevertheless, promising productive as bodily inroads into place have shown themselves to be, they not exhaust the modes of effective reentry to the place-world. In this chapter we shall consider the contributions of someone who neglected the role of body in implacement but who managed to find other means of access to place as

4 Transformative Transgressions: from: Controlling Contested Places
Abstract: John Chrysostom strongly tied religious identity to Antioch’s physical places, and this is true also of the distinction that he made between the rural space around the city and the urban space within its walls. Although scholars have demonstrated that geographical boundaries are often more permeable than rhetorical descriptions of them allow,¹ boundaries nevertheless ideologically separate places from one another, distinguishing one side from the other in ways that accumulate cultural significance.² It should, therefore, come as no surprise when rhetorical descriptions of mass boundary crossings depict them as transforming the places on either side, as those who are seen

5 Mapping a Textured Landscape: from: Controlling Contested Places
Abstract: Beyond church buildings and synagogues, Antioch’s urban and rural landscape was populated by a variety of smaller places of religious ritual, from a host of temples of all sizes to a growing number of Christian martyr shrines scattered across the landscape. Also, Christian ascetics increasingly settled in the surrounding region, their live bodies drawing pilgrims to them in ways similar to the relics of earlier saints.¹ Like Libanius’s classrooms, the locations of Babylas’s relics, churches, and synagogues, these temples, shrines, and saints (living and dead) also shaped topography and identity within Antioch’s territorium,particularly through the ways in which Libanius,

6 Elsewhere in the Empire from: Controlling Contested Places
Abstract: The investigation of fourth-century Antioch has revealed that the manipulation, and particularly the narrative construction, of topography played a significant role in shaping the increasing visibility of Christianity in urban and rural contexts, as well as in establishing the type of Christianity that became most prominent. The transference of relics, especially the final transfers of Babylas and the saints buried in the floor of the martyrion at the Romanesian Gate, granted more authority to Bishop Meletius’s community in Antioch, while diminishing the authority of the temple of Apollo and of local homoian Christians. John Chrysostom’s numerous rhetorical efforts further shaped

4 Toward a Phenomenology of Evil from: Women and Evil
Abstract: so far we have seen that evil became associated early with disobeying father and his representatives. The roots of that association stretch back into antiquity when early human beings felt contaminated by preexisting evil. Ricoeur began his study of the symbolism of evil with an analysis of defilement. Already two things have happened that must now set aside. First, evil is firmly associated with sin, guilt, impurity, and fault; there has been a move beyond pure terror to ethical terror. Second, thought already focuses on the symbol rather than the experience. “By beginning with a symbolism already there,” Ricoeur observes,

Book Title: Explorations and Encounters in French- Publisher: University of Adelaide Press
Author(s): MROWA-HOPKINS COLETTE
Abstract: The essays selected for inclusion in Explorations and Encounters in French bring together many of the current research strands in French Studies today, tapping into current pedagogical trends, analysing contemporary events in France, examining the Franco-Australian past, while reviewing teaching practice and the culture of teaching.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.20851/j.ctt1sq5wjr

Explorations and Encounters: from: Explorations and Encounters in French
Author(s) MROWA-HOPKINS COLETTE
Abstract: The theme of exploration requires little explanation in terms of its relevance to the constant strivings of human life and, by extension, to the activities of learning and scholarship; indeed, with its corollary of the journey, it underlines, as do writings since time immemorial, including many a school motto, the intimate relationship between seeking and discovering; striving and finding; quest and knowledge. The title of this volume — Explorations and Encounters in French— can therefore be seen as self-evident, announcing as it does its essentially investigative nature and its position within a field of study. However, if the title

2 Student Engagement through Historical Narratives from: Whose History?
Abstract: As the teaching of History in Australia undergoes substantial changes through the implementation of the national History curriculum, undergraduate student teachers and teachers in classrooms are being required to re-think their teaching/learning strategies for the teaching of History. With the developments in SOSE/HSIE since the 1970s, curricula researchers have found that during the last few decades the teaching of History has drifted almost into oblivion in many Australian schools. More recently, with the implementation of the National History curriculum undergraduate teachers and teachers in classrooms have been asked to re-engage with the subject (Rodwell, 2010). In this chapter, I argue

3 Pedagogical Dimensions of Historical Novels and Historical Literacy from: Whose History?
Abstract: As many teachers and educators seriously question the role of textbooks in the History lesson, teachers and educators are looking increasingly to alternative and more engaging teaching/learning strategies (Villano, 2005). Recognising the significant pedagogical advantages of using historical fiction in their classrooms, some teachers have long used historical fiction as a central teaching/learning strategy in the History classroom. Now, however, student teachers and teachers are advantaged — and consequently, should be reassured — by an emerging amount of research showing how the teaching of historical literacy through historical novels can be achieved. There is, I argue, ample evidence of the many pedagogical

5 The Increase of History as a Subject for Novels: from: Whose History?
Abstract: History teachers have available to them a rising tide of popularity in the reading of historical novels. There is no sign of this popularity waning. As this chapter will demonstrate, the historical novel continues to develop as a literary genre as increasing numbers of authors are attracted to it.

6 ‘The plot against the plot’: from: Whose History?
Abstract: When teachers or academics recommend a particular historical novel as a teaching/learning strategy for an undergraduate unit or classroom activity, they enter into a very problematic and contested domain. But most teachers or academics would agree that the first consideration should be meeting their students at their point of need. It is likely that many students will have been exposed to, or will have read, historical novels generally and/or Australian historical novels. Some may be aware of the changes that have come over the historical novel, and the Australian historical novel specifically, since the onset of the postmodernist and postcolonial

7 Counterfactual Histories and the Nature of History from: Whose History?
Abstract: Consider this historical account: the setting is the Cocos Islands in the Indian Ocean; the date is 7 November 1914; the author is Stuart Macintyre, the Ernest Scott Professor of History at the University of Melbourne, and, since 2002 a Laureate Professor of the University of Melbourne. He writes:

Conclusion from: Whose History?
Abstract: Historical novels currently enjoy huge popularity amongst the readership of the Australian public, as does children’s historical fiction through the writings of such fine authors as Jackie French. While some commentators may lament this rising tide of popularity for historical fiction, with the onset

10 Accumulating Algeria: from: Framing French Culture
Author(s) Hubbell Amy L.
Abstract: Upon losing their homeland at the end of the Algerian War of Independence in 1962, the community of Pieds-Noirs, or former French citizens of Algeria, set out to protect their fragile memories through literature, photography and film. Every year the communities gather together in France to commemorate their exodus, and each reunion is guided by images of colonial Algeria. As the ageing Pieds-Noirs assemble, so do fragments of their past: school photos endlessly emerge from Pieds-Noirs seeking to identify lost or forgotten classmates, and iconic Algerian monuments reappear in slide presentations, films, photodocumentaries, paintings and websites. The Pieds-Noirs are eager

1.1 Objectivity and Impartiality: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Daston Lorraine
Abstract: For over a century, the relationships between the humanities and the sciences have been largely defined by opposition: Geistes- versusNaturwissenschaften, ideographic versus nomothetic, interpretative versus explanatory, past- versus future-oriented. These oppositions were hammered out in theFestredenof Dilthey, Windelband, Helmholtz, and other leading lights of bellwether German universities and reflected the rising prestige and power of the natural sciences in the final quarter of the nineteenth century. Since then, the history and philosophy of science in most European traditions has been dominated by inquiries into the natural sciences: a comparable history of the humanities is just beginning to

2.2 Soviet Orientalism and Subaltern Linguistics: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Leezenberg Michiel
Abstract: One of the attractions of the park surrounding the Villa Borghese in Rome is a group of statues of national poets. Included among them are such obvious examples as the Persian Abulqasim Firdowsi, author of the ShahnâmehorBook of Kings; the Georgian Shota Rustaveli, who wroteThe Man in the Panther Skin(Vepkhistqaosani); and the Montenegran Petar Njegos, writer ofThe Mountain Wreath(Gorski Vijenac). More surprising, however, is the presence of a statue, unveiled in 2012, of the ‘Azerbaijani poet’ Nizami Genjewi. Nizami composed all of his poems in Persian, but now he is claimed as the national

2.3 Root and Recursive Patterns in the Czuczor-Fogarasi Dictionary of the Hungarian Language from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Marácz László
Abstract: The first academic Hungarian dictionary A magyar nyelv szótára(The Dictionary of the Hungarian Language) was a monumental work compiled by two members of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences: Gergely Czuczor (1800-1866) and János Fogarasi (1801-1878) that was published in six volumes between 1862 and 1874 [Figs. 2 and 3]. Rather than just being a list of Hungarian words, Czuczor-Fogarasi’s monolingual dictionary (hereafter, the CzF Dictionary) must be considered a linguistic achievement. It contains 110,784 entries and is structured according to the agglutinative nature of the Hungarian language since it distinguishes roots and suffixes while also referring to interconnections within

3.5 The Peculiar Maturation of the History of Science from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Karstens Bart
Abstract: This paper takes as its topic how the history of science, as a separate field of study, came into being in the early twentieth century and how it developed thereafter. The first signs of the institutionalization of the field as an academic discipline were the first international conference on the history of science held adjacent to the World Exhibition in Paris in 1900, the start of the journal Isisin 1912, and the founding of the History of Science Society in 1924. This journal and the society still occupy a prominent position in the field today. The period also saw

4.1 Quellenforschung from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Most Glenn W.
Abstract: A century ago, one of the most important modes of research in the professional study of Greco-Roman antiquity as well as in a number of other fields was a recently developed specialty called by its admirers (back then it had no opponents) ‘ Quellenforschung’. By decomposing the compilatory handbooks produced by the erudition of late antiquity into their various sources and establishing the relations of dependence among them, the adepts of this method sought to trace back reports about a variety of aspects of the ancient world – primarily philosophy and history, but also religion, law, sculpture, and other matters –

6.3 The Recognition of Cave Art in the Iberian Peninsula and the Making of Prehistoric Archeology, 1878-1929 from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Lanzarote-Guiral José María
Abstract: In May 1921, the Exhibition of Spanish Prehistoric Art(Exposicion de arte prehistorico español) opened its doors in Madrid. Hosted by the National Library and inaugurated by King Alphonse XIII, the exhibition presented prehistoric cave art as the first chapter of the Spanish art tradition, placing the peninsula at the cultural origins of Western civilization. This exhibition was conceived of to showcase the work undertaken by Spanish scholars in this field since 1902, when cave art was recognized as such by the international scientific community. Moreover, the organizers did not miss the chance to highlight that it was ‘foreign’ prehistorians,

7.1 Between Sciences and Humanities: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Semi Maria
Abstract: The sciences and the humanities have a long tradition of cultural crossings and reciprocal influences; this interwoven history, however, has been first somehow minimized and downplayed during the nineteenth century, and then simply slipped into a far corner of our memories – feeding on contemporary hyperspecialization and high disciplinary boundaries – until recent scholarly work evidenced how our narrow contemporary perspective was compromising a thorough understanding of the modern era. Positivism and the professionalization of academic disciplines brought about a very critical attitude toward the intellectual syncretism of the foregoing centuries. This had several consequences as, as well described by

8.1 The Making of Oriental Studies: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Naumann Katja
Abstract: While some disciplines of the humanities struggle with a seemingly waning attention, both within academia as well as at the interface with politics and society, the opposite is the case for the fields falling under the rubric of regional studies or Oriental studies. There are increasing efforts to come to terms with its past, including its intellectual shape, its institutional position, and its political baggage. Likewise, new visions of Oriental studies are drafted that better suit the needs of our time. Although much ink has been spilled over the challenges of the latter attempt, less has been done on the

8.2 The Emergence of East Asian Art History in the 1920s: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Orell Julia
Abstract: Late-nineteenth- and early-twentieth-century Europe saw an increasing interest in non-European art from Africa, Pre-Columbian America, Asia, the Pacific Islands and elsewhere. Private collectors and museums eagerly collected, exhibited, and published such works, often in competition with each other in the context of colonization.¹ In addition to museums and collectors, artists developed a great interest in non-European art and artifacts since at least the mid-nineteenth century, ranging from Japanese woodcut prints to African masks, often summarized under the problematic category of primitivism. The academic discipline of art history, however, was slow in responding to the broadening range of images and objects

8.3 Cross-Cultural Epistemology: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Johansson Perry
Abstract: European sinology since Matteo Ricci (1552-1610), founder of the Jesuit mission in China, was occupied with interpreting the Chinese classics, unpacking the learned worldview of the elite that adhered to them.¹ However, the Swedish explorer Sven Hedin’s late-nineteenth-century rediscovery of ancient hidden cities buried along the Silk Road unleashed a new wave of sinology [Fig. 25]. The magnificent collections of Silk Road material that Paul Pelliot, Aurel Stein, and Albert Grunwedel then plundered provided European scholars with previously unknown source material that the Chinese themselves could not easily consult. Hedin’s find sparked a modern direction in sinology and inspired Western

10.1 Making the Humanities Scientific: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Ierna Carlo
Abstract: During the nineteenth century we witness an extraordinary progress and increasing specialization in the natural sciences as well as the growth and professionalization of universities in Germany.¹ At the same time, after the deaths of Goethe and Hegel, the epoch of Romanticism and German Idealism had come to an end.² While the sciences diversified and emancipated from their philosophical past, philosophy itself fragmented into competing schools and currents,³ and in many respects, precipitated into an existential crisis.⁴ For a long time in the mainstream historiography of philosophy the nineteenth century was considered to harbor only epigones or predecessors.⁵ However, there

11.2 Discovering Sexuality: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Tobin Robert Deam
Abstract: Today, the study of sexuality brings together scholars from a wide variety of disciplines – history, politics, literature, religion, the arts, psychology, anthropology, medicine, and biology. At its best, this interdisciplinary work promotes critical self-reflection on disciplinary assumptions about sexuality and the data used to test those assumptions: Is there such a thing as a fixed sexuality and how would one prove its existence? Such questions have arisen ever since the emergence of the concept of ‘sexuality’ at the end of the eighteenth century. At the beginning of the nineteenth century, theorists regarded humanistic and literary sources as high quality

12.2 Critique and Theory in the History of the Modern Humanities from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Jay Paul
Abstract: The first issue has to do with whether or not theory since

Epilogue from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Pickstone John V.
Abstract: But why should I presume that I have something to contribute to the ‘history of the humanities’, especially since this category has rarely

2 Historical Consciousness, Development, and Hermeneutics from: In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: Doctrinal development may be an inevitable, even essential element of the theological task as it has been practiced for nearly two millennia, but explicit theoretical reflection on the nature of this phenomenon is a relatively recent feature in Christian thought. The history of evangelical attention to the problem of development is much shorter, because, as we shall see, Roman Catholic theologians began addressing the issue much earlier than their Protestant and evangelical counterparts. The study of general hermeneutics or hermeneutical theory, a discipline concerned with understanding the relationship between interpreters and texts (i.e., written texts or any other complex aggregate

4 Doctrinal Development in the Normative Theological Hermeneutics of Kevin J. Vanhoozer from: In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: Kevin J. Vanhoozer, one of the most creative and constructive evangelical theologians currently working, is best known for his work in theological prolegomena and the theological interpretation of Scripture.¹ Questions about the relationship between the Bible and systematic theology initially directed his work to hermeneutics, and interdisciplinary engagement with hermeneutical and literary theory has been a staple in his research ever since.² Much like Thiselton before him, Vanhoozer has endeavored to utilize the insights of non-theological resources like contemporary hermeneutical theory in biblical interpretation and Christian theology. However, in contrast to Thiselton’s descriptive approach, Vanhoozer’s approach to theological hermeneutics is

6 Religious Language, Reality, and Doctrinal Development from: In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: Evangelicals, eponymously named for their fervor for evangelor gospel, are concerned about truth, particularly the truth content of the good news of Jesus Christ. We are committed to the universal proclamation of the gospel because we operate with the conviction that God has entrusted Christian believers with the only “message of reconciliation” (2 Cor. 5:19) and that it is our duty as “ambassadors for Christ” to implore every man, woman, and child to be reconciled to God (2 Cor. 5:20). We likewise operate with the deeply held conviction that the proclamation that “Christ died for our sins in accordance

7 Development and Continuity from: In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: The most critical issue for any model of doctrinal development is the question of doctrinal continuity. Can doctrines develop, grow, orprogresswithout compromising their fidelity to “the faith once delivered unto the saints” (Jude 3)? Can there be maintained identity between New Testament teachings and later doctrinal formulations that utilize very different conceptual frameworks? Most importantly, if doctrines do in fact develop over time through expansion, contextualization, and critical correction, how can the faith communities that develop and reformulate doctrines claim to be part of the same broad Christian tradition?

Book Title: The Mission of Demythologizing-Rudolf Bultmann's Dialectical Theology
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Congdon David W.
Abstract: Since 1941, Rudolf Bultmann’s program of demythologizing has been the subject of constant debate, widely held to indicate Bultmann’s departure from the dialectical theology he once shared with Karl Barth. In the 1950s, Barth referred to their relationship as that of a whale and an elephant: incapable of meaningful communication. This study proposes a contrary reading of demythologizing as the hermeneutical fulfillment of dialectical theology on the basis of a reinterpretation of Barth’s theological project. As such, the volume argues that dialectical theology is fundamentally governed by a missionary logic. Bultmann’s hermeneutical theology extends this dialectical, missionary theology into the field of interpretation. Contrary to many critics, the message of God’s saving work in Christ, and not modern science, funds Bultmann’s hermeneutical program. Like Barth’s own revolution, Bultmann’s program addresses a false relation between gospel and culture. Negatively, demythologizing is a program of deconstantinizing, opposing the objectifying conflation of kerygma and culture that he calls “myth.” Positively, demythologizing is a form of intercultural hermeneutics, composed of preunderstanding and self-understanding. Demythologizing is therefore a missionary hermeneutic of intercultural translation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt12878n5

1 The Problem: from: The Mission of Demythologizing
Abstract: On March 2, 1964, Karl Barth met a group of theology students from Tubingen at the Bruderholz Restaurant for a lengthy conversation. The group consisted of forty Protestants and five Catholics. Their recorded conversation ranged across a wide spectrum of theological topics, including the meaning of Christ’s resurrection, the doctrine of analogy, the distinction between “noetic” and “ontic,” recent developments in Roman Catholicism, and the history of dialectical theology and the Confessing Church. At one point an unknown student raised the topic of Eberhard Jungel’s recent interpretation of Barth’s analogia fidei.³ The student wished to know whether Jungel’s understanding accorded

6 Toward a Dialectical Intercultural Hermeneutic from: The Mission of Demythologizing
Abstract: The key to a new perspective on demythologizing comes from the burgeoning field of intercultural hermeneutics. The work in this field is the result of an interdisciplinary (and increasingly also interreligious) dialogue among scholars in the areas of missiology, cultural anthropology, and biblical studies. The issues and questions raised by scholars

1 Writing Basically from: Writing Theologically
Author(s) Newton Richard
Abstract: Writing has played a pivotal role in the formation and spread of the Christian witness. In the prologue to the Gospel of John, we find an illuminating image of this relationship. “In the beginning was the Word, and the Word was with God, and the Word was God.”¹ The evangelist likens Christ to “the Word” (Greek ho logos, think “logic”), the very expression of reason, present since before creation and enlightening the world ever since. The apostle Paul tells the Corinthians that Jesus’ passion and resurrection happened “in accordance with the scriptures.”² These “scriptures” (Greektas graphas, imagine “graphics”) or,

2 Writing Persuasively from: Writing Theologically
Author(s) Garber David G.
Abstract: Everywhere we turn, we hear the voices of people arguing. If we flip on the news, we see talking heads barking sound bites at one another. When we scroll through our social media feeds, we find friends or family from one camp or the other regurgitating certain political, social, or religious one-liners. Arguing is cultural. Arguing is entertainment. Arguing can even be fun for certain types of people. But making an argument is also countercultural. Taking into consideration opposing viewpoints and thinking through all the implications of your perspective is an arduous process. If we are going to be mindful

Book Title: Power and Politics in the Book of Judges-Men and Women of Valor
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Yoder John C.
Abstract: Power and Politics in the Book of Judges studies political culture and behavior in premonarchic Israel, focusing on the protagonists in the book of Judges. Although the sixth-century BCE Deuteronomistic editor portrayed them as moral champions and called them “judges,” the original bardic storytellers and the men and women of valor themselves were preoccupied with the problem of gaining and maintaining political power. These “mighty ones” were ambitious, at times ruthless; they might be labeled chiefs, strongmen, or even warlords in today’s world. John C. Yoder considers the variety of strategies the men and women of valor used to gain and consolidate their power, including the use of violence, the redistribution of patronage, and the control of the labor and reproductive capacity of subordinates. They relied heavily, however, on other strategies that did not deplete their wealth or require the constant exercise of force: mobilizing and dispensing indigenous knowledge, cultivating a reputation for reliability and honor, and positioning themselves as skillful mediators between the realms of earth and heaven, using their association with YHWH to advance their political, economic, or military agenda.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt12878ws

3 Power and Trust from: Power and Politics in the Book of Judges
Abstract: Politics is an always uncertain and often dangerous enterprise, but wielding power as a big person in a patron-client setting is especially precarious. Every step in the career of such an individual is marked with peril. Seeking, gaining, exercising, maintaining, and even relinquishing power are all fraught with risk. As noted in the previous two chapters, the use of force and the distribution of spoils are common strategies leaders turn to as they seek to enforce compliance or purchase loyalty. Not as well recognized are the less violent, less hazardous, and less costly approaches used by leaders. The present chapter

5 Power and Wealth from: Power and Politics in the Book of Judges
Abstract: When the messenger of Yhwh first encountered Gideon, he addressed him saying, “Yhwh is with you, mighty and prosperous warrior” (Judg. 6:12).¹ Besides exercising great power, Gideon and the other central characters in the book of Judges accumulated and managed substantial wealth. As heads or members of prominent houses they owned fields and herds, administered revenue-generating shrines, were proprietors of thrashing floors, retained servants and slaves, possessed many wives, had numerous sons and daughters, engaged the services of professional diviners, hired mercenaries, gained access to town treasuries, redistributed the spoils of battle, rode on donkeys instead of walked, and were

1 The Fragile Soul and Spiritual Duct Tape from: Sin Boldly!
Abstract: Why, you may ask, is the author of this book talking about a Heidelberg landlord? I thought this was a book about justification-by-faith and bold sinning! Well, it is. One of the traditional problems with the doctrine of justification-by-faith is that is has been tucked away for centuries in a theological

4 Justice and Our Moral Universe from: Sin Boldly!
Abstract: Like the outer shell of a Kosta Boda bowl, the outer shell of the soul’s world is the moral universe. The moral universe is structured according to the principles of justice. We invoke these principles of justice—such as goodness, rightness, fairness, caring, loyalty, authority, and sanctity, when engaging in self-justification. However, we rarely stop to analyze our worldview, which includes our moral universe. We take it for granted, even though without it our very souls would disintegrate into emptiness.

6 Consciousness and Conscience from: Sin Boldly!
Abstract: Should we scrap all this traditional stuff about sin and grace? Does the inner psyche require it, or can we dispense with it? Might we be spiritually healthier without the dialectic between sin

8 Ethics for Bold Sinners from: Sin Boldly!
Abstract: This shocking reversal is what we Christians think God is addressing to us in the life, teachings, and death of Jesus of Nazareth. Rather than identify with the powerful Romans or the learned Pharisees, Jesus identified with the outcasts, the lepers, the blind, the deaf, the poor, and especially with those called “sinners” in the four Gospels. His parables pounded away at an important

13 The Joint Declaration on the Doctrine of Justification from: Sin Boldly!
Abstract: Luther’s insight and conviction led to a theological eruption that resulted in a religious lava flow. For five centuries, it flowed down the medieval mountainside, increasing in speed until it crashed into the ecclesial hierarchy and hardened into the Protestant Reformation of the sixteenth century. The medieval edifice underwent a torrent of change as new rivulets divided the mountain; these divisions came to include the Lutherans, the Reformed, the Anglicans, and the radicals (or Anabaptists). Eventually these groups fractured further, giving rise to the Quakers, Methodists, deists, and revivalists. To change metaphors, like Humpty Dumpty falling to pieces, Western Christendom

CHAPTER THREE What Happens in Lycidas? from: Lyric Apocalypse: Milton, Marvell, and the Nature of Events
Abstract: Can we conceive of the apocalypse as something other than an ultimate compensation for defeat, loss, or weakness, as an event valuable and desirable for reasons other than the promised triumph of the godly? This is a particularly pressing question for a poem that promises (and, in its 1645 version, celebrates) the fall of its enemies and a future world of new pastures, all in the process of commemorating a friend’s death. Lycidas, instead of responding to loss with mourning, consolation, or revolution, imagines this temporal event as essentially apocalyptic, an immanently and immediately apprehensible revelation. Especially in its later,

Book Title: To Make the Hands Impure: Art, Ethical Adventure, the Difficult and the Holy- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): NEWTON ADAM ZACHARY
Abstract: How can cradling, handling, or rubbing a text be said, ethically, to have made something happen? What, as readers or interpreters, may come off in our hands in as we maculate or mark the books we read? For Adam Zachary Newton, reading is anembodied practice wherein "ethics" becomes a matter of tact in the doubled sense of touch and regard. With the image of the book lying in the hands of its readers as insistent refrain, To Make the Hands Impure cuts a provocative cross-disciplinary swath through classical Jewish texts, modern Jewish philosophy, film and performance, literature, translation, and the material text. Newton explores the ethics of reading through a range of texts, from the Talmud and Midrash to Conrad's Nostromo and Pascal's Le Memorial, from works by Henry Darger and Martin Scorsese to the National September 11 Memorial and a synagogue in Havana, Cuba. In separate chapters, he conducts masterly treatments of Emmanuel Levinas, Mikhail Bakhtin, and Stanley Cavell by emphasizing their performances as readers a trebled orientation to Talmud, novel, and theater/film. To Make the Hands Impure stages the encounter of literary experience and scriptural traditions he difficult and the holy through an ambitious, singular, and innovative approach marked in equal measure by erudition and imaginative daring.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287fz7

INTRODUCTION: from: To Make the Hands Impure: Art, Ethical Adventure, the Difficult and the Holy
Abstract: In the now-severely reduced Jewish population on the island of Cuba (a high estimate of 1500 persons out of eleven million total), it was not uncommon for the quorum of ten required for public prayer in the small Orthodox synagogue of Havana to consist of “ ocho hombres, la Torah, y Dios,” with the Torah scroll—and God—standing in for the missing men.¹ In Havana’s Conservative Sinagoga Bet Shalom (also known as “El Patronato”), the situation used to be even starker: “For more than 30 years, the daily minyan usually consisted of seven elderly men and three Torah scrolls placed

CHAPTER 3 Blaise Pascal, Henry Darger, and the Book in Hand from: To Make the Hands Impure: Art, Ethical Adventure, the Difficult and the Holy
Abstract: Late at night on November 23–24, 1654, in his chambers on the rue des Francs-Bourgeois Saint-Michel, Blaise Pascal experienced something momentous. A spiritual ecstasy, a dream-vision, a psychotic episode, a premonition of his own mortality: one or all these things, Pascal’s Nuit de feumarked his so-called “second conversion,” which was to be dramatic and lasting for his association with the Jansenists of Port Royal. Materially, it impressed itself upon him threefold. First, he transcribed the experience in a single page of fervent and ciphered prose; an elliptical fusion of his own rapturous sentiments and scriptural allusions from the

Book Title: Figures of a Changing World: Metaphor and the Emergence of Modern Culture- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): BERGER HARRY
Abstract: Figures of a Changing World offers a dramatic new account of cultural change, an account based on the distinction between two familiar rhetorical figures, metonymy and metaphor. The book treats metonymy as the basic organizing trope of traditional culture and metaphor as the basic organizing trope of modern culture. On the one hand, metonymies present themselves as analogies that articulate or reaffirm preexisting states of affairs. They are guarantors of facticity, a term that can be translated or defined as fact-like-ness. On the other hand, metaphors challenge the similarity they claim to establish, in order to feature departures from preexisting states of affairs. On the basis of this distinction, the author argues that metaphor and metonymy can be used as instruments both for the large-scale interpretation of tensions in cultural change and for the micro-interpretation of tensions within particular texts. In addressing the functioning of the two terms, the author draws upon and critiques the work of Friedrich Nietzsche, Roman Jakobson, Christian Metz, Paul Ricoeur, Umberto Eco, Edmund Leach, and Paul de Man.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287gfz

THREE Making Metaphors, Seeing Metonymies from: Figures of a Changing World: Metaphor and the Emergence of Modern Culture
Abstract: My way of formulating the contrast between metaphor and metonymy is indebted to various linguistic, structuralist, and semiotic discussions for some, but not all, of its elements. I have selectively synthesized certain aspects that characteristically emerge in those discussions and rejected others, so as to shift the emphasis of the distinction toward my focus on the problematics of culture change. Ever since Roman Jakobson placed the opposition between metaphor and metonymy at the foundations of language use, the terms have been subject to continuous definitional torquing and distension.¹ And although the privileged status of these tropes has been accepted or

SEVEN Frost and Roses: from: Figures of a Changing World: Metaphor and the Emergence of Modern Culture
Abstract: This is an adventure in conspicuous redundancy: ten lines with a single rhyme and with the same end word in six of those lines. The first line alludes to and varies Gertrude Stein’s mischievous tautology, substituting

“Et Iterum de Deo”: from: The Trace of God: Derrida and Religion
Author(s) DE VRIES HENT
Abstract: Instead of demonstrating what is wrong with these alternative interpretations of Derrida’s projects—I have neither a gift nor much patience for polemics—I would like to give a few examples of what this apparent laboriousness and tediousness, as well as indecisiveness, looks like. I will do so, basing myself

Book Title: Myth and Scripture-Contemporary Perspectives on Religion, Language, and Imagination
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Callender Dexter E.
Abstract: In this collection scholars suggest that using "myth" creates a framework within which to set biblical writings in both cultural and literary comparative contexts. Reading biblical accounts alongside the religious narratives of other ancient civilizations reveals what is commonplace and shared among them. The fruit of such work widens and enriches our understanding of the nature and character of biblical texts, and the results provide fresh evidence for how biblical writings became "scripture."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287n15

Moses’ Death from: Myth and Scripture
Author(s) Ackerman Susan
Abstract: In the opening lines of his article “The Rod of Aaron and the Sin of Moses,” William H. C. Propp provocatively quotes the comment of S. D. Luzzato: “Moses our Teacher committed one sin, but the exegetes have loaded upon him thirteen sins and more, since each of them has invented a new sin” (Propp 1988, 19). Luzzato’s quote here refers to the many scholarly attempts to interpret Num 20:1–13, the story in which Moses, with Aaron at his side, draws water from a rock to provide drink for the thirsting Israelites, yet brings forth that water in such

Myth and Social Realia in Ancient Israel: from: Myth and Scripture
Author(s) Page Hugh R.
Abstract: In this paper I will assess the strengths, weaknesses, and implications of the use of early Hebrew poems as a control group for the testing of single theories and methodological paradigms aimed at the reconstruction of myth, folklore, and social reality in ancient Israel. Here I build on the work done within the Albright-Cross-Freedman tradition on Gen 49; Exod 15; Num 23–24; Deut 32, 33; Judg 5; 1 Sam 2; 2 Sam 1, 22, 23; and Pss 18, 29, 68, 72, and 78 (see, e.g., Cross and Freedman 1952, 1997; Geller 1979; Cross 1973; Freedman 1980). Holding in abeyance

Recast, Reclaim, Reject: from: Myth and Scripture
Author(s) Kraftchick Steven J.
Abstract: These are not the first set of conversations devoted to this tension nor the first convened under the auspices of the AAR/SBL.² It is likely not to be the last either, since the questions surrounding myth—its definition, its forms, how to study it in comparison to other myths and literature—as well as claims for its truth, are

“According to the Scriptures”: from: Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Rodríguez Rafael
Abstract: The shifting significance of Abraham Lincoln in American memory since his assassination in 1865 (see Schwartz 2000, 2008) is analogous to the varying—and so variable—interpretations of Jesus’ suffering throughout the last two millennia. The present essay surveys how the author of Luke-Acts employs traditions from the Psalms to provide an appropriate interpretation of Jesus’ crucifixion. First, we will briefly survey Barry Schwartz’s model of social memory as “keying,” in which the past is matched to the present. Second, we will examine the function of quotations, allusions, and/or echoes of the Psalms within the speeches of Acts that help

The “Dispositive Effect” in Film Narrative from: Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Ortel Philippe
Abstract: Like the idea of structure, the notion of the “dispositif” does not pertain to a single level of analysis: it applies to specific objects, such as the mechanism of a watch, but also to large ensembles, as in Foucault’s work, where it came to substitute for the episteme in the late 1970s. By contrast to the episteme, focused too narrowly on the utterances produced by a society, Foucault’s dispositifrefers more widely to the totality of discourses, social practices, technical inventions, architectural creations instituting, at a given time, the partition between the true and the false in the domain of

Between Paradoxical Spectacles and Technical Dispositives from: Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Guido Laurent
Abstract: When trying to grasp the complex relationships between dance and moving images, during the emergence of the cinematic medium, one can hardly avoid noticing the necessity of investigate, once again, the films dedicated to the famous number of “serpentine” dance developed and started in 1892 by music-hall performer Loïe Fuller. The phenomenal craze created by this original stage spectacle ended up imposing it as one of the motifs characterizing artistic expression at the turn of the twentieth century. Countless variations have attested to this, at least until the First World War, in areas as diverse as sculpture, painting, architecture, furniture,

Dispositive and Cinepoetry, around Foucault’s Death and the Labyrinth from: Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Wall-Romana Christophe
Abstract: This 1946 text implicitly refers to the famous umbrella of The Songs of Maldoror, which reads: “as beautiful as the random encounter between an umbrella and a sewing machine upon a dissecting table.”² Yet Ponge, dismissing the fantastic element, extracts a domestic

Book Title: Documenting Ourselves-Film, Video, and Culture
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Sherman Sharon R.
Abstract: What happens when we turn the camera on ourselves? This question has long plagued documentary filmmakers concerned with issues of reflexivity, subject participation, and self-consciousness. Documenting Ourselvesincludes interviews with filmmakers Les Blank, Pat Ferrero, Jorge Preloran, Bill Ferris, and others, who discuss the ways their own productions and subjects have influenced them. Sharon Sherman examines the history of documentary films and discusses current theiroeis and techniques of folklore and fieldwork.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130hnq5

5 Projecting the Self: from: Documenting Ourselves
Abstract: Film is always a construction. Film “truth,” whether it be cinéma vérité, kinopravda, or observational cinema, is a misnomer because film is never objective. Even the placing of the camera for a film consisting of a single “take” (uninterrupted shot) is a manipulation. The camera reflects the filmmaker’s view.¹ Most filmmakers believe, however, that their manipulation creates a “greater truth,” what Flaherty’s wife, Frances, called “that high moment of seeing, that flash of penetration into the heart of the matter” (Jacobs 1979:8). The film’s structure is the mark of the filmmaker’s truth and the truth he or she discerns in

6 Structure Shifts and Style: from: Documenting Ourselves
Abstract: Effective folklore films provide a sense of involvement in the event for the audience by following the actual structure of the processes of narrating, singing, ceremony, dancing, playing, and similar events and conveying them as holistically as possible through myriad styles. How one chooses to present folklore shifts as a result of one’s growth as a filmmaker at the same time as one’s attitudes about film and technique shift. A look at my own work quickly reminds me how filmmakers change not only what they choose to shoot but how they do so. Filmmakers are not the only ones who

Book Title: New Strangers in Paradise-The Immigrant Experience and Contemporary American Fiction
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Muller Gilbert H.
Abstract: Muller focuses on the literature of Holocaust survivors, Chicanos, Latinos, African Caribbeans, and Asian Americans. In the quest for a new identity, each of these groups seeks the American dream and rewrites the story of what it means to be an American. New Strangers in Paradiseexplores the psychology of uprooted peoples and the relations of culture and power, addressing issues of race and ethnicity, multiculturalism and pluralism, and national and international conflicts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130hqk2

Book Title: The Unfolding God of Jung and Milton- Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): DRISCOLL JAMES P.
Abstract: God and Satan of Paradise Lostare seen as the ego and the shadow of a single unfolding personality whoseanimais the Holy Spirit and Milton's muse. Samson carries the Yahweh archetype examined by Jung inAnswer to Job, and Messiah and Satan inParadise Regainedembody the hostile brothers archetype.Anima, animusand the individuation drive underlie the psychodynamics of Adam and Eve's fall.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130hsq3

3 Decisive Identity from: The Unfolding God of Jung and Milton
Abstract: In his epics Milton attempts to portray decisive identity. By “decisive identity” I mean a conscious guiding of individuation wherein identity and character are created through moral decisions. Decisive identity does not imply creating what we initially are. Rather, it involves consciously deciding what we become, which requires a troublesome but indispensable element, freedom. Milton develops themes, character, and plot by showing the origins and consequences of identity-forming decisions. These decisions are the foci of moral judgment and meaning. In Paradise LostandParadise Regainedthe crucial decisions are those by Adam and Eve causing man’s fall and those by

Book Title: The Shriek of Silence-A Phenomenology of the Holocaust Novel
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): PATTERSON DAVID
Abstract: The novelists of the Holocaust, in witnessing through their words, regain their voices and in so doing are reborn. By probing the depths of their struggle, Patterson's study draws us too toward a higher understanding, perhaps even our own rebirth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130j86j

3 The Death of the Father from: The Shriek of Silence
Abstract: The line of Jewish ancestry is matrilineal, since it is from the body of the mother that the human being is born into life. The mouth of the father, however, transmits the word that sustains life—transmits it from mouth to mouth, not from mouth to ear. When handed down through tales, the word “belongs as much to the listener as to the teller,” Elie Wiesel has written. “You listen to a tale and all of a sudden it is no longer the same tale” ( Beggar107). The telling of the tale becomes part of the tale itself; or, as

5 The Splitting of the Self from: The Shriek of Silence
Abstract: “The shattering of the ‘I,’” Aharon Appelfeld has written, “is one of the deepest wounds” caused by the Shoah ( Essays99). The pen that descends to the page is a scalpel that cuts into the soul, incising a wound to heal this wound. In the words of Edmond Jabès, “the book is a moment of the wound, or eternity” (28). The self bled of word, father, and child splits, and the task with which the book confronts its author is to split again and thus become other to himself in an utterance of the splitting of the self. Bakhtin insists

Book Title: Passage to the Center-Imagination and the Sacred in the Poetry of Seamus Heaney
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Tobin Daniel
Abstract: Nobel Laureate Seamus Heaney, author of nine collections of poetry and three volumes of influential essays, is regarded by many as the greatest Irish poet since Yeats. Passage to the Centeris the most comprehensive critical treatment to date on Heaney's poetry and the first to study Heaney's body of work up toSeeing ThingsandThe Spirit Level. It is also the first to examine the poems from the perspective of religion, one of Heaney's guiding preoccupations. According to Tobin, the growth of Heaney's poetry may be charted through the recurrent figure of "the center," a key image in the relationship that evolved over time between the poet and his inherited place, an evolution that involved the continual re-evaluation and re-vision of imaginative boundaries. In a way that previous studies have not, Tobin's work examines Heaney's poetry in the context of modernist and postmodernist concerns about the desacralizing of civilization and provides a challenging engagement with the work of a living master.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130jbjp

1 Senses of Place: from: Passage to the Center
Abstract: In “Place, Pastness, Poems,” Seamus Heaney quotes this passage from T.S. Eliot’s “Little Gidding” to support his view that in lieu of a cultural center the literary tradition is what links “the private experience of a poet to the usual life of the age.”¹ For Heaney, tradition allows the regional poet to affirm the centrality of local experience to his own being, but with the hope of making that experience accessible to readers from wholly different walks of life. Ideally, by raising private experience to the level of cultural expression, Heaney would have tradition transform personal memory into cultural memory.

3 A Poetry of Geographical Imagination: from: Passage to the Center
Abstract: “What is the source of our first suffering? It lies in the fact that we hesitated to speak. It was born in the moment when we accumulated silent things within us.” Kept as a reminder in Heaney’s poetry notebook, Gaston Bachelard’s warning could stand as the motto for Heaney’s early work.¹ In Death of a Naturalist,the silent things given speech through the poet’s art derive primarily from his personal history, from the rhythms of the yard experienced in childhood. Not surprisingly, Narcissus is the book’s presiding deity, in whose image Heaney “rhymes to see himself.” With Heaney’s second book,

5 Door into the Light: from: Passage to the Center
Abstract: In “Tradition and the Individual Talent,” Eliot calls the auditory imagination a feeling for language that unites the most primitive and civilized minds.¹ Heaney’s Northseeks a similar union by exposing both minds to the light of consciousness. As part of this process of exposure, Ulster’s pattern of violence forces him to confront the tragic origins of culture. However, raised as it is inNorthto a vision of malevolent transcendence, tragedy is finally unthinkable. Were it not for the innate rage for order of tragedy, the potency of disorder would consume all meaning—even tragic meaning. Tragedy therefore promises

Book Title: Poetry Of Discovery-The Spanish Generation of 1956-1971
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): DEBICKI ANDREW P.
Abstract: Although each of these poets has developed an individual style, their work has certain common characteristics: use of the everyday language and images of contemporary Spain, development of language codes and intertextual references, and, most strikingly, metaphoric transformations and surprising reversals of the reader's expectations. Through such means these poets clearly invite their readers to join them in journeys of poetic discovery.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130jd70

6 JOSÉ ANGEL VALENTE: from: Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: Author of both poetic and critical works of major importance, José Angel Valente has articulated with precision the poetics and the attitude to art which underlie the works of his generation. In his essays Valente constantly stresses the goal of poetry in seizing and coming to know reality. Opposing the notion (so prevalent in the immediate post-Civil War period) that poets should communicate previously existent philosophic and social outlooks, Valente defends their role in discovering, through language, realities which would otherwise remain unexplored. This attitude is most evident in his frequently cited essay “Conocimiento y communicación”: “Todo poema es, pues,

8 CARLOS SAHAGÚN: from: Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: Carlos Sahagún’s poetry calls less attention to itself than that of most other Spanish writers of the 1960s. We do not find in it the novel use of colloquial expressions that characterizes Angel González and Gloria Fuertes, nor the surprising changes and reappraisals typical of José Angel Valente, nor the alternation of linguistic codes used by Claudio Rodríguez. The language of Sahagún’s verse seems ordinary but never blatantly colloquial; his works often consist of easy-to-understand evocations of past experiences, expressed in a low key.¹ They contain many visual images and make use of some metaphors, but these tend to be

Book Title: Whistling in the Dark-Memory and Culture in Wartime London
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Freedman Jean R.
Abstract: Jean Freedman interviewed more than fifty people who remember London during the war, focusing on under-represented groups, including women, Jews, and working-class citizens. In addition she examined original propaganda, secret government documents, wartime diaries, and postwar memoirs. Of particular significance to Freedman were the contemporary music, theater, film, speeches, and radio drama used by the British government to shape public opinion and impart political messages. Such bits of everyday life are mentioned in virtually every civilian's experience of wartime London but their interpretations of them often clashed with their government's intentions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130jmtp

2 London Can Take It: from: Whistling in the Dark
Abstract: In 1939 London was the largest city in the world, the world’s busiest port, and the home of more than eight million people. Greater London consisted of many urban boroughs and two administratively designated “cities”: the ancient city of London, consisting of one square mile and home to its financial district, and the adjacent city of Westminster, where most government business was enacted. Around the core of these two cities the boroughs spread in concentric circles for miles, each with its own personality and self-contained neighborhoods. Financially and commercially London was one of the most powerful cities on earth, though

1 Addressing the Postmodern Person from: God--The World's Future
Abstract: Painted at the intersection of the longitudinal and transverse axes of the central nave ceiling in the little chapel at Wies in southern Germany is Jesus sitting on a rainbow. Below him, is the judgment seat. It is empty. Above and to the left, two angels are pointing to the empty cross, the cross upon which the judge himself made the sacrifice that frees the accused captives. The rainbow recalls the covenant sign given by God to Noah, revealing divine sadness at the sight of human destruction and promising a life forever secure from the ravages of deluge. Jesus is

Introduction to Part Three from: God--The World's Future
Abstract: Jesus Christ brings the forgiveness of sin and a proleptic foretaste of new creation. Attention is directed toward the conflict between the new creation and the old because this conflict resulted in the crucifixion of Jesus and led to the resurrection to new life on Easter. On the basis of this Easter victory, Jesus becomes the Christ, the bringer of the new aeon in his role as the final wisdom, the final prophet, the

11 Eschatology from: God--The World's Future
Abstract: Salvation is already present to us in faith. It is present in faith, but not in experience—at least not in uninterrupted, continual, plenary, uncontradictable experience. Faith is under continual attack by temptation from within and suffering from without, due to the warfare between the two aeons, due to the conflict between the present and the future. Beatitudinal living is living between the times: we both have and await the blessings that Christ has wrought. We live out of the power of salvation that dwells within our hearts while yet awaiting salvation to come in its fullness. We express the

14 Proleptic Ethics from: God--The World's Future
Abstract: The spirituality that accompanies a proleptic understanding of the Christian faith is what I call the life of beatitude. The name comes from the structure of Jesus’ Beatitudes in Matthew 5:1-12, where the blessings of the future kingdom of God are mysteriously present now in anticipation. Those who are poor in spirit, or who mourn, or who are meek are blessed in some enigmatic way, says Jesus, because these dispositions somehow anticipate the salvation that God has promised will come. Those who hunger and thirst after justice, show mercy, and make peace already participate even if unknowingly in the wholeness

Foreword from: The Creative Word
Author(s) Erickson Amy
Abstract: In August of 1997, I was actively second-guessing my decision to leave Vail, Colorado, to start the Master of Divinity program at Columbia Theological Seminary. My sister-in-law, Denise, a pastor in the Presbyterian Church (USA), trying to be encouraging, predicted that because I loved literature, I would surely love the Old Testament. Perhaps I was in a particularly skeptical mood, but her analogy struck me as untenable. It made as much sense as if she had said, “You love Colorado, and so surely you will love Georgia.” I couldn’t see the connection. I loved medieval tales of Arthur, Beowulf, eighteenth-century

1 Canon and the Educational Repertoire from: The Creative Word
Abstract: Every community that wants to last beyond a single generation must concern itself with education. Education has to do with the maintenance of a community through the generations. This maintenance must assure enough continuity of vision, value, and perception so that the community sustains its self-identity. At the same time, such maintenance must assure enough freedom and novelty so that the community can survive in and be pertinent to new circumstances.¹ Thus, education must attend to processes of both continuity and discontinuity in order to avoid fossilizing into irrelevance on the one hand, and relativizing into disappearance on the other

Book Title: Metaphor and the Ancient Novel- Publisher: Barkhuis
Author(s): Frangoulidis Stavros
Abstract: This thematic fourth Supplementum to Ancient Narrative, entitled Metaphor and the Ancient Novel, is a collection of revised versions of papers originally read at the Second Rethymnon International Conference on the Ancient Novel (RICAN 2) under the same title, held at the University of Crete, Rethymnon, on May 19-20, 2003.Though research into metaphor has reached staggering proportions over the past twenty-five years, this is the first volume dedicated entirely to the subject of metaphor in relation to the ancient novel. Not every contributor takes into account theoretical discussions of metaphor, but the usefulness of every single paper lies in the fact that they explore actual texts while sometimes theorists tend to work out of context.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wwxsr

Introduction from: Metaphor and the Ancient Novel
Author(s) Frangoulidis Stavros
Abstract: Though research into metaphor has reached staggering proportions over the past twenty-five years, this is the first volume dedicated entirely to the subject of metaphor in relation to the ancient novel. Not every contributor takes into account theoretical discussions of metaphor, but the usefulness of every single paper lies

Sweet and Dangerous? from: Metaphor and the Ancient Novel
Author(s) Graverini Luca
Abstract: In recent years, there has certainly been no dearth of studies about the prologue to Apuleius’ Metamorphoses.¹ However, the single six-word phrase I am going to deal with,Met. 1.1.1auresque tuas benivolas lepido susurro permulceam(‘I would like… to caress your ears into approval with a pretty whisper’),² does not seem to have excited the curiosity of many other researchers. Some critics have already pointed out the relevance of the image ofpermulcere aures, ‘stroking the ears’, in the novel; Paula James, in particular, states that the prologue speaker’s promise to stroke the ears of his readers with a

Metaphor and the riddle of representation in the Historia Apollonii regis Tyri from: Metaphor and the Ancient Novel
Author(s) Laird Andrew
Abstract: Aristotle says that metaphor is ‘the application of a word that belongs to another thing: either from genus to species, species to genus, species to species, or by analogy’.¹ Studies of metaphors in specific texts – such as those considered in the present volume – are, on the whole, served well by the sort of definition Aristotle offers. But that Aristotelian definition, in presupposing that proper names belong to their objects, raises some awkward questions about naming and essence. And those questions become more threatening if the metaphors to be considered are found in fiction. Ken Dowden’s chapter raises the

Book Title: Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: Every other is truly other, but no other is wholly other.This is the claim that Aspects of Alterity defends. Taking up the question of otherness that so fascinates contemporary continental philosophy, this book asks what it means for something or someone to be other than the self. Levinas and those influenced by him point out that the philosophical tradition of the West has generally favored the self at the expense of the other. Such a self-centered perspective never encounters the other qua other, however. In response, postmodern thought insists on the absolute otherness of the other, epitomized by the deconstructive claim every other is wholly other.But absolute otherness generates problems and aporias of its own. This has led some thinkers to reevaluate the notion of relative otherness in light of the postmodern critique, arguing for a chiastic account that does justice to both the alterity and the similitude of the other. These latter two positions-absolute otherness and a rehabilitated account of relative otherness-are the main contenders in the contemporary debate.The philosophies of Emmanuel Levinas and Gabriel Marcel provide the point of embarkation for coming to understand the two positions on this question. Levinas and Marcel were contemporaries whose philosophies exhibit remarkably similar concern for the other but nevertheless remain fundamentally incompatible. Thus, these two thinkers provide a striking illustration of both the proximity of and the unbridgeable gap between two accounts of otherness.Aspects of Alterity delves into this debate, first in order understand the issues at stake in these two positions and second to determine which description better accounts for the experience of encountering the other.After a thorough assessment and critique of otherness in Levinas's and Marcel's work, including a discussion of the relationship of ethical alterity to theological assumptions, Aspects of Alterity traces the transmission and development of these two conceptions of otherness. Levinas's version of otherness can be seen in the work of Jacques Derrida and John D. Caputo, while Marcel's understanding of otherness influences the work of Paul Ricoeur and Richard Kearney.Ultimately, Aspects of Alterity makes a case for a hermeneutic account of otherness. Otherness itself is not absolute, but is a chiasm of alterity and similitude. Properly articulated, such an account is capable of addressing the legitimate ethical and epistemological concerns that lead thinkers to construe otherness in absolute terms, but without the absolute aporiasthat accompany such a characterization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzvd0

7 The Nature of Otherness from: Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate
Abstract: The title of this work promises more than a confrontation between the philosophies of Emmanuel Levinas and Gabriel Marcel, and the time has come to make good on that promise. The comparison of Levinas and Marcel has, to be sure, been interesting in terms of addressing the perplexing incompatibility of two philosophers who are in many ways quite similar. Moreover, tracing the development of these divergent accounts of otherness to the theological soil in which they are rooted is significant both in terms of understanding Levinas and Marcel, and in terms of a broader grasp of the way in which

3 The Rasa of Love Incarnate from: Tastes of the Divine: Hindu and Christian Theologies of Emotion
Abstract: The followers of the medieval bhaktisaint Caitanya, known as the Gauḍīya Vaiṣṇavas, cultivate love for Kṛṣṇa by contemplating scenes from his life. Among the favorite scenes for contemplation are the five chapters of the Bhāgavata Purāṇa that narrate the story of therāsa līlā, the dance Kṛṣṇa performs with his belovedgopīs. In this celebrated passage, Kṛṣṇa calls the cowmaidens to him with the sound of his flute. They abruptly leave home in the middle of their activities (getting dressed, applying makeup, milking cows, nursing babies) to go to him. After enjoying themselves with him for a while, the

Book Title: Material Spirit: Religion and Literature Intranscendent- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): GOOD CARL
Abstract: The essays in this collection examine philosophical, religious, and literary or artistic texts using methodologies and insights that have grown out of reflection on literature and art. In them, them phrase "material spirit" becomes a point of departure for considering the continuing spectral effects of religious texts and concerns in ways that do not simply call for, or assume, new orrenewed forms of religiosity. The writers in this collection seek to examine religion beyond traditional notions of transcendence: Their topics range from early Christian religious practices to global climate change. Some of the essays explore religious themes or tones in literary texts, for example, works by Wordsworth, Hopkins, Proust, Woolf, and Teresa of Avila. Others approach in a literarycritical mood philosophical or para-philosophical writers such as Bataille, Husserl, Derrida, and Benjamin. Still others treat writers of a more explicitly religious orientation, such as Augustine, Rosenzweig, or Bernard of Clairvaux.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzvp4

“Come forth into the light of things”: from: Material Spirit: Religion and Literature Intranscendent
Author(s) RIGBY KATE
Abstract: The figure of light, along with the darkness that is implicitly or explicitly always summoned as its opposite, has played a central and hitherto under-researched role in the history of Euro-Western dualism, the discursive structures and social ramifications of which have been the target of numerous cultural critiques (variously, and in various conjunctions, deconstructive, feminist, postcolonial, antiracist, queer, ecophilosophical, and zoocritical) since the 1970s.¹ Emerging from its mythic association with a series of solar deities and their kingly representatives on earth in the ancient agrarian civilizations of the Mediterranean region, and set to work metaphysically within classical Greek and patristic

The Angel and the Storm: from: Material Spirit: Religion and Literature Intranscendent
Author(s) COHEN TOM
Abstract: It is bad timingfor the global economic system to enter a self-feeding black hole—at least from the perspective of “climate change.” The economic implosions of the credit collapse have, essentially, foreclosed any geopolitical will to address the gathering indicators of ecocatastrophic logics, had that ever been plausible. The interplay between the economic and ecological, the “eco-eco” disaster, tends to occlude the exponential curves of issues that lie outside the screen—collapsing marine life, mass extinction events, “peak” everything (oil, humans, water …), projections of “population culling,” and so on. The Ponzi scheme of hypermodernity extending the depletion of

Introduction: from: The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) McGUINNESS MARGARET M.
Abstract: Margaret McGuinness was a graduate student at Union Theological Seminary (New York) when Father James J. Hennesey’s A History of the Roman Catholic Community in the United Stateswas published in 1981, even as James Fisher was studying American cultural history down the New Jersey Turnpike at Rutgers. Although other scholars, including Notre Dame’s Philip Gleason and Jay Dolan, were also writing about American Catholicism at this time, McGuinness’s church history classes were paying very little attention to their work, focusing primarily on the U.S. Protestant experience. Hennesey’s book convinced her that American Catholicism was a vital part of the

1 “The Story Is What Saves Us”: from: The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) CAMPBELL DEBRA
Abstract: Autobiographical works such as Augustine’s Confessionsare the very foundation of Catholic Studies.¹ Even a cursory look at the footnotes in the comprehensive histories of American Catholicism published since the 1950s reveals how deeply our understanding of the evolution of Catholic life in North America is grounded inlife-writings, an elastic term for personal narratives presented in a variety of genres and formats, from travel narratives and traditional memoirs to autobiographical fiction and specialized hybrids (conversion and departure narratives, “Why I am a Catholic” books, and so on). Life-writings are pervasive and various, yet they are frequently neglected as a

5 Catholic Studies and Religious Studies: from: The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) TAVES ANN
Abstract: Although most of the chairs and programs established in Catholic Studies in recent years have been established in Catholic colleges and universities, an increasing number are appearing in non-Catholic institutions both private and public. Some of the latter have been established as interdisciplinary chairs or programs without any special relationship to religious studies; others, such as the new chairs at Hofstra and UC Santa Barbara, are located in departments of religious studies alongside endowed chairs in other religious traditions, such as Tibetan Buddhist Studies, Sikh Studies, and Jewish Studies. At UCSB, where the Department of Religious Studies has been organized

8 Catholic Studies in the Spirit of “Do Whatever He Tells You” from: The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) CADEGAN UNA M.
Abstract: During a celebration of the University of Dayton’s sesquicentennial in the year 2000, the singer-songwriter alumnus who headed the university’s Center for Social Concern performed a song he had written for the occasion, “Do Whatever He Tells You.” At the reception after the celebration, a colleague still fairly new to the university, personally nonreligious but with an evident affinity for the university’s mission and commitments, commented that he thought the song was a little odd—hadn’t something like “do whatever he tells you” been written over the gates of Soviet labor camps? My first response to the remark, phrased more

11 Visual Literacy and Catholic Studies from: The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) OSBORNE CATHERINE R.
Abstract: To adore a picture is one thing, but to learn through the story of a picture what is to be adored is another. For what writing presents to readers, this a picture presents to the unlearned who behold, since in it even

6 The Reason of the Gift from: Givenness and God: Questions of Jean-Luc Marion
Author(s) de Warren Nicolas
Abstract: We give without account. We give without accounting, in every sense of the word. First, because we give without ceasing. We give in the same way we breathe, every moment, in every circumstance, from morning until evening. Not a single day passes without our having given, in one form or another, something to someone, even if we rarely, if ever, “give everything.”¹ Also, we give without keeping account,without measure, because giving implies that one gives at a loss, or at least without taking into account either one’s time or one’s efforts: one simply does not keep account of what

7 The Gift: from: Givenness and God: Questions of Jean-Luc Marion
Author(s) O’Leary Joseph S.
Abstract: Theologians ruminate among inherited concepts and images, seeking to clarify their history and judge it critically. To establish a perspective in which even a single such concept can be brought into question or deconstructed is no easy matter. To bring the entire tradition into perspective and retrieve it in a well-founded way, as Heidegger aimed to retrieve the tradition of Western metaphysics, is a prodigious task. Recently, a larger context for that task has emerged as Christians have learned that their entire tradition is only one fiber in the texture of the human religious quest. The old closures of identity

2 SEXUAL DESIRES: from: Veiled Desires: Intimate Portrayals of Nuns in Postwar Anglo-American Film
Abstract: Michael Powell and Emeric Pressburger’s 1947 film Black Narcissusdramatized the vocational crises of five Anglican sisters who struggle to establish a missionary foothold in the Himalayas, and the tragedy that unfolds when the neurotic Sister Ruth disintegrates under the strain, forsakes her vows, and runs amok. The shocking finale ofBlack Narcissusand the over-the-top performance of Kathleen Byron as the deranged Sister Ruth have left a powerful impression on film viewers.¹ That said, they have diverted attention from an important feature of the film: its examination of the psychosexual pressures of the religious life, an examination, which, I

3 SUBJECTIVE DESIRES: from: Veiled Desires: Intimate Portrayals of Nuns in Postwar Anglo-American Film
Abstract: When Audrey Hepburn appeared on-screen in 1959, looking immaculate in a black-and-white habit, the nun was still a figure veiled in mystique. This mystique derived its power from the traditional religious view that she “binds herself to a state of perfection, which requires a striving toward holiness that is … life-long” (Donovan and Wusinich 2008: 39). InThe Nun’s Story, film director Fred Zinnemann showed his respect for the heroic entrants, endurance runners, and dropouts in the arduous spiritual marathon to become perfect as “your heavenly Father is perfect” (Matt. 5:48). He appreciated the ancient beauty of this ideal and

6 SPIRITUAL DESIRES: from: Veiled Desires: Intimate Portrayals of Nuns in Postwar Anglo-American Film
Abstract: In the five previous chapters, I have explored the range and complexity of the desires that nuns unveil on-screen and shown how these subvert one view of religious life voiced by Sister Luke, that “a nun is not a person who wishes or desires.” While traditional nuns regard the selfless surrender to God in agape as their supreme purpose, they paradoxically allude to the desires associated with eros when they acknowledge that “this letting go” of the self can awaken “the deepest yearnings of the human heart” (Donovan and Wusinich 2009: 28). Indeed, they draw attention to a phenomenon that

Introduction from: The Phenomenology of Prayer
Abstract: How could there be a vibrant religious life without the practice of prayer? In both theistic and nontheistic traditions, religious followers are generally counseled to steadfast prayer—to pray “without ceasing.” Without prayer, religious sensibility would likely atrophy and perhaps die. Yet what makes prayer so essential to a life of faith?

7 Irigaray’s Between East and West: from: The Phenomenology of Prayer
Author(s) KEARNS CLEO MCNELLY
Abstract: In Between East and West, her recent reflections on the encounter between her yoga practice and her work in Western philosophy, Luce Irigaray notes that breathing and speaking are, for most people, inverse operations, using the body, the diaphragm, and the lungs in almost opposite ways.¹ The result is a split, an alienation, between the verbal and the organic rather than a mutual enrichment of the two. Irigaray goes on to warn that “a religion centered on speech, without the insistence on breathing and the silence that makes it possible, risks supporting a non-respect for life” (51). As she develops

10 “Too Deep for Words”: from: The Phenomenology of Prayer
Author(s) PUTT B. KEITH
Abstract: Those who interpret deconstruction as another species of nihilism believe that Jacques Derrida preys—specifically, that he preys upon texts like some hermeneutical savage, some rough beast slouching toward the arid desert of relativism, dragging behind him the Holy, the Beautiful, and the Good, in order to drop them rudely into the abyss of epistemological meaninglessness and ontological simulacra.¹ Such interpreters of Derrida would certainly never assume that he would have any sensitivity for religion, or theology, or piety; consequently, they would most definitely never hear “Derrida preys” as “Derrida prays.” Yet such a nihilistic misinterpretation of deconstruction egregiously misreads

11 Plus de Secret: from: The Phenomenology of Prayer
Author(s) TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: St. Augustine begins his Confessionswith a prayer, a prayer that questions how and why we pray: “How shall I call upon my God, my God and Lord?”¹ Much has been said about the epistemological issues raised by prayer, which questions what can be known of God, and of the implications of confessing to an omniscient God who knows of our guilt and our remorse before the confession is given voice.² However, in addition to these individual questions of knowledge, guilt, expiation, and forgiveness, Augustine also questions the collective significance of his confession-cum-prayer and asks, near the end of the

15 Prayer and Incarnation: from: The Phenomenology of Prayer
Author(s) MCCULLOUGH LISSA
Abstract: In the opening chapters of Confessions,the question Augustine broaches before all others is whether we must first beg for help from God to know who God is, or must first know who God is in order to beg for help. Is prayer, then, essentially “begging,” and is “begging” the surest avenue to the divine? Or is begging simply the final resort left to us when all other presumed resources have revealed their finitude and exhaustibility, exposing the naked truth of crucifixion? Is God precisely the crucified one who is there when nothing—absolutely nothing—else is, unveiled in the

17 Proslogion from: The Phenomenology of Prayer
Author(s) GOODCHILD PHILIP
Abstract: Up now, slight man! Flee, for a little while, thy occupations; hide thyself, for a time, from thy disturbing thoughts. Cast aside, now, thy burdensome cares, and put away thy toilsome business. Yield room for some little time to God; and rest for a little time in him. Enter the inner chamber of thy mind; shut out all thoughts save that of God, and such as can aid thee in seeking him; close thy door and seek him. Speak now, my whole heart! Speak now to God, saying, I seek thy face; thy face, Lord,

Taking the Wager of/on Love: from: Gazing Through a Prism Darkly: Reflections on Merold Westphal's Hermeneutical Epistemology
Author(s) OLTHUIS JAMES H.
Abstract: In her prologue to i love to you,¹ Luce Irigaray tells of the “miracle” (7) that happened when a debate with a man surprisingly turned into a “meeting with the other, the different” in the between, in “mutual respect.” “We were two: a man and a woman speaking in accordance with our identity, our conscience, our cultural heritage, and even our sensibility” (9). Since that time, more than ever, Irigaray has been an avid “political militant for the impossible, which is not to say a utopian.” Rather, in Derridean fashion, she wants “what is yet to be as the only

Hospitality—Under Compassion and Violence from: The Conditions of Hospitality: Ethics, Politics, and Aesthetics on the Threshold of the Possible
Author(s) DUFOURMANTELLE ANNE
Abstract: Hospitality has become the gateway to hell. I am aware that this might sound hyperbolic—I do, however, mean it seriously. One could picture Cerberus, in the antique representations of hell, guarding the entry to the netherworld, or Horus, in Egyptian mythology, weighing the good and bad actions as they are presented to him by those newly arrived, as figures of radical hospitality, since they are the ones that separate the living from the dead. In the face of today’s political rules, hospitality is not an invitation for a better life—at most, it offers a shelter—but a fully

ONE Exegesis and Ethnology from: Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography
Abstract: Beaune is one of France’s most famous and important wine centers. The small city in Burgundy is also the birthplace of two important scientists: in 1746 the mathematician Gaspard Monge, and in 1830 the physiologist Étienne-Jules Marey. Unsurprisingly for this region of the world, wine is one of the connecting links between Monge and Marey. Both scientists came from families of winegrowers and wine merchants—the two families had actually joined forces for a time in the late eighteenth century. And even the scientific work of these two sons of Beaune was associated: although their subjects could not have been

EIGHT The Coming Parliament from: Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography
Abstract: The last project that the American architect Louis Kahn worked on was a parliament building complex. It had been in planning since the early 1960s. While he was building the institute in La Jolla, California, for Jonas Salk, where a few years later Latour would conduct his ethnological studies for Laboratory Life, Kahn was already working on the plans for the National Assembly in Dhaka, the capital of today’s Bangladesh. Together with his student Muzharul Islam the architect advanced this mammoth project until his unexpected death from a heart attack in 1974. The Jatiyo Sangsad Bhaban, the National Assembly Building,

Exploring New Questions for Theological Anthropology from: Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Van Stichel Ellen
Abstract: What does it mean to be human? In today’s context, this fundamental question lies at the heart of many debates in the Church and the world. Unseen cultural, political, and scientific developments provoke new challenges that can no longer be tackled from traditional perspectives on the human being.¹ The familiar concepts theologians use to make sense of Christian beliefs about the human being have lost much of their purchase. Humanity is said to be created in God’s image and likeness, marked by sin but, through God’s grace, saved to a new life in Christ. But what do we mean by

CHAPTER 7 The Gifted Self: from: Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Horner Robyn
Abstract: Vatican II remains a powerful and enduring symbol for many because it represents, above all, the preparedness of the Church to dialogue with all that is “genuinely human.” There can be few higher or more hope-filled expressions of engagement with the world than Gaudium et Spes. Nevertheless, in the same moment that, in this document and others, Vatican II was opening the windows of the Church to dialogue, it opened onto a modern world that was already passing—if, in fact, it had ever really been. As Lieven Boeve maintains, the correlative theology (that is, theology in dialogue with modernity)

CHAPTER 8 Difference, Body, and Race from: Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Gonzalez Michelle A.
Abstract: The nature of humanity, our relationship with each other, and our relationship with the sacred is the starting point for reflections on theological anthropology. For centuries Christians have wrestled with defining what makes us particular in light of our humanity yet at the same time interconnected with God’s creation. Musings on this subject range from abstract philosophical speculation, to dialogue with the natural sciences, to a serious consideration of the diversity and complexity of the embodied human condition. Within systematic theology, the study of what it means to be human, created in the image and likeness of God, falls under

Turtles All The Way Down?: from: Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Kirchhoffer David G.
Abstract: In this book various scholars explore the new challenges for theological anthropology. They make clear that the developments of the past fifty years in various fields of endeavor should be seen as an invitation, if not indeed as an urgent injunction, “to open our eyes to new ways of being human” (Julie Clague).¹ At the same time, we need to heed the postmodern warning regarding the dangers of engaging in what Henri-Jérôme Gagey called a “giant discourse,” whereby, in our attempt to unite languages into a single coherent understanding of the human person, we end up building a tower of

6 Allegory as Metonymy: from: Structures of Appearing: Allegory and the Work of Literature
Abstract: In the land of Homer’s Phaiakians, a stranger listens passionately to a rhapsode who sings of the adventures of Odysseus. The crowd gathered in the agorais entranced, but no one so much as the stranger, who draws his cloak over his head and remains concealed as he weeps,

1 Overcoming Onto-theology from: Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: Not long ago I participated in a conference on biblical hermeneutics. It asked about the relation between trust and suspicion for Christians reading the Bible. The keynote addresses by Walter Brueggemann and Phyllis Trible were brilliant. But for me the highlight of the conference was the workshop led by Ched Myers, whose radical reading of the gospel of Mark is one of the finest pieces of biblical interpretation I have ever read.² To be more precise, the highlight was the moment in the middle of the workshop when he had us sing.

4 Appropriating Postmodernism from: Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: It would no doubt be going too far to call this zealous preacher a postmodernist. But he certainly was persistent in expressing his

5 Christian Philosophers and the Copernican Revolution from: Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: Should Christian philosophers be favorably or unfavorably disposed toward Kantian idealism? I want to suggest that they should be favorably disposed, that there are important affinities between Kantian idealism and Christian theism—important resources in the former for expressing themes essential to the latter.

7 Positive Postmodernism As Radical Hermeneutics from: Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: Hermeneutics is the form in which epistemology lives on. In one sense epistemology is dead. As the attempt to provide human knowledge with solid foundations, to prove that it can transcend the limitations of its perspectives and be adequate to the reality it intends, it is widely perceived to have failed. As the extravagant claims for clarity, certainty, and completeness necessary for EpistemeorWissenschafthave proved chimerical even for the paradigms of mathematics and mathematical physics, the notion that epistemology is a bad habit that needs to be broken has increasingly carried the day. But as an investigation into

11 Derrida As Natural Law Theorist from: Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: Postmodern philosophy in general and Derridian deconstruction in particular are rightly perceived as the most sustained critique of metaphysics since logical positivism. Since it is within the natural law traditions, ancient, medieval, and modern, that ethics is most unabashedly metaphysical, the title of this essay will appear to many as simply oxymoronic.

Book Title: Language, Eros, Being: Kabbalistic Hermeneutics and Poetic Imagination- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): WOLFSON ELLIOT R.
Abstract: This long-awaited, magisterial study-an unparalleled blend of philosophy, poetry, and philology-draws on theories of sexuality, phenomenology, comparative religion, philological writings on Kabbalah, Russian formalism, Wittgenstein, Rosenzweig, William Blake, and the very physics of the time-space continuum to establish what will surely be a highwater mark in work on Kabbalah. Not only a study of texts, Language, Eros, Being is perhaps the fullest confrontation of the body in Jewish studies, if not in religious studies as a whole.Elliot R. Wolfson explores the complex gender symbolism that permeates Kabbalistic literature. Focusing on the nexus of asceticism and eroticism, he seeks to define the role of symbolic and poetically charged language in the erotically configured visionary imagination of the medieval Kabbalists. He demonstrates that the traditional Kabbalistic view of gender was a monolithic and androcentric one, in which the feminine was conceived as being derived from the masculine. He does not shrink from the negative implications of this doctrine, but seeks to make an honest acknowledgment of it as the first step toward the redemption of an ancient wisdom.Comparisons with other mystical traditions-including those in Christianity, Buddhism, and Islam-are a remarkable feature throughout the book. They will make it important well beyond Jewish studies, indeed, a must for historians of comparative religion, in particular of comparative mysticism.Praise for Elliot R. Wolfson:Through a Speculum That Shines is an important and provocative contribution to the study of Jewish mysticism by one of the major scholars now working in this field.-Speculum
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x01nw

CHAPTER ONE Showing the Saying: from: Language, Eros, Being: Kabbalistic Hermeneutics and Poetic Imagination
Abstract: In this book I set out once again to expose the veil of poetic imagination woven within the fabric of the Jewish esoteric tradition, demarcated generically by scholar and adept as “kabbalah.” The semantic range of the term encompasses practice and theory, in Western philosophical jargon, or, in rabbinic locution, maʿasehandtalmud, a way of doing and a way of thinking. To speak of one is not to exclude the other, a perspective that has been enhanced by a critique of the so-called Scholemian school for focusing more on the speculative dimensions of kabbalah to the detriment of the

Epilogue from: Language, Eros, Being: Kabbalistic Hermeneutics and Poetic Imagination
Abstract: The sway of thought, like the trajectory of time at once circular and linear, seems always to lead one back to where one has not been, retracing steps yet to be imprinted. In this book, I have once again labored long in the orchard of kabbalistic texts to articulate philosophically the poetic imagination and hermeneutic orientation of the medieval Jewish esoteric lore. In great measure, my effort herein, reflective of my scholarly project since I began graduate school in 1980, has been impelled by a keen sense that kabbalah—not to speak of the spiritual comportment of Judaism more generally—

CHAPTER 10 Derrida’s Politics of Autoimmunity from: For Derrida
Abstract: This chapter was first drafted for a conference at the University of Florida in Gainesville, held from October 9 to October 11, 2006. Some of the first part of the chapter is “time sensitive,” as one says. It describes the political situation in the United States as it was in the fall of 2006. A lot of water has flowed over the dam since then. Some interpolations added since then bring the chapter up to date at least to the time of the interpolations.

CHAPTER 12 Absolute Mourning: from: For Derrida
Abstract: In the previous chapter I asserted that Derrida’s Le toucher, Jean-Luc Nancyis an extremely odd or exceptional work of mourning. It mourns someone who is not yet dead, since Nancy survived his heart transplant operation to persist in what might be called a posthumous life. This has lasted down to the day I am writing this. For this I rejoice. Nancy has survived Derrida’s death to write more about Derrida. As I showed, he is having the last word about matters on which they did not quite agree, now that Derrida cannot answer back.

INTRODUCTION: from: Crediting God: Sovereignty and Religion in the Age of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Vatter Miguel
Abstract: The rise of religious fundamentalism in the closing decades of the twentieth century continues to have enormous repercussions not only for politics, but also for the disciplines of the human sciences, philosophy, and theology. The sociology of religion, perhaps the paradigmatic achievement of the discipline of sociology, has been dealing with the effects of the crisis of its theories of secularization. The so-called deprivatization of religion has forced on the table the old-age question of the relation between God and society, or faith and the constitution of community, with the added complication that the community at stake nowadays is a

CHAPTER 2 A New Form of Religious Consciousness? from: Crediting God: Sovereignty and Religion in the Age of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Filali-Ansary Abdou
Abstract: Scholars of Muslim intellectual movements have described two predominant “moments” since the late nineteenth century. The first is widely seen as the reformist moment, and the second the moment of fundamentalism. Scholars in both Muslim and non-Muslim societies have been engaged in intense discussions about the relationship between these moments, debating whether the transition from the first to the second represents continuity or rupture.¹

CHAPTER 12 Drawing—the Single Trait: from: Crediting God: Sovereignty and Religion in the Age of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Weber Samuel
Abstract: Politics, in its theory and even more in its practice, has always tended to subordinate the singular to the general, generally by equating it with the particular, which, qua “part,” already implies its dependency upon and subservience to a “whole.” At the same time—a “time” that is first of all that of Western “modernity,” here defined as the period ushered in by the Reformation, the ensuing Wars of Religion and the Treaty of Westphalia (1648) and extending until today, “postmodernism” notwithstanding—theoreticians of “liberal democracy” have sought to legitimate the institution in which the Whole materializes itself politically—either

6 The Limits of Phenomenology from: Rethinking God as Gift: Marion, Derrida, and the Limits of Phenomenology
Abstract: Étant donnérepresents an extraordinary achievement, situating Marion among the foremost thinkers of his generation. Its massive scope, high degree of coherent systematization, and striking and often singular readings of important players in the history of phenomenology mean that it has a significant place in contemporary philosophy. Because of that place, however, we are obliged to enter into debate with Marion concerning the legitimacy of those readings, particularly bearing in mind the questions about God, the gift, and phenomenology that motivate this inquiry.

Book Title: Regard for the Other: Autothanatography in Rousseau, De Quincey, Baudelaire, and Wilde- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Burt E. S.
Abstract: Although much has been written on autobiography, the same cannot be said of autothanatography, the writing of one's death. This study starts from the deconstructive premise that autobiography is aporetic, not or not only a matter of a subject strategizing with language to produce an exemplary identity but a matter also of its responding to an exorbitant call to write its death. The I-dominated representations of particular others and of the privileged other to whom a work is addressed, must therefore be set against an alterity plaguing the I from within or shadowing it from without. This alterity makes itself known in writing as the potential of the text to carry messages that remain secret to the confessing subject. Anticipation of the potential for the confessional text to say what Augustine calls the secret I do not know,the secret of death, engages the autothanatographical subject in a dynamic, inventive, and open-ended process of identification. The subject presented in these texts is not one that has already evolved an interior life that it seeks to reveal to others, but one that speaks to us as still in process. Through its exorbitant response, it gives intimations of an interiority and an ethical existence to come. Baudelaire emerges as a central figure for this understanding of autobiography as autothanatography through his critique of the narcissism of a certain Rousseau, his translation of De Quincey's confessions, with their vertiginously ungrounded subject-in-construction, his artistic practice of self-conscious, thorough-going doubleness, and his service to Wilde as model for an aporetic secrecy. The author discusses the interruption of narrative that must be central to the writing of one's death and addresses the I's dealings with the aporias of such structuring principles as secrecy, Levinasian hospitality, or interiorization as translation. The book makes a strong intervention in the debate over one of the most-read genres of our time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x02w0

INTRODUCTION. from: Regard for the Other: Autothanatography in Rousseau, De Quincey, Baudelaire, and Wilde
Abstract: In the numerous studies that have been devoted to autobiography in the past 30 years, surprisingly few take on directly the question of the other. The reason for the surprise is simple enough: One can hardly envision the self without the other against which it is defined or an autobiography that does not involve the other both in its narrative and as the one to whom the “I’’ addresses itself in its act of confessing. In representing itself, the I must not only represent the others encountered in life, but must also address that representation to another. What is more,

CHAPTER 1 Developments in Character: from: Regard for the Other: Autothanatography in Rousseau, De Quincey, Baudelaire, and Wilde
Abstract: “Reading” is a term that, through overuse, can easily become confused with interpretation. In fact, there is a crucial difference: Reading involves the undoing of interpretative figures; because it is not an operation opposed to the understanding but rather a precondition for it, it allows us to question whether the synthetic moves of the understanding can close off a text. It leads away from meaning to such problems as the text’s constitution and meaning generation. Unlike interpretation, which implies a development over the course of a narrative toward a single figure reconciling all its diverse moments, reading states the logic

CHAPTER 2 Regard for the Other: from: Regard for the Other: Autothanatography in Rousseau, De Quincey, Baudelaire, and Wilde
Abstract: One difference between shame and embarrassment in Rousseau can be stated quite simply. Shame is a passion productive of discourse. The confessing done under its aegis seems marvelously able to serve as an action of which to be ashamed, and so to provoke more confession. Embarrassment, on the other hand, is tonguetied, an anacoluthon in the grammar of feelings. Where, under influence of timidity, Rousseau manages to blurt something out nonetheless, the effect is not to end the silence but most often to prolong it, rendering the hapless speaker even more incapable of timely speech. The blurted phrase is less

CHAPTER 4 Hospitality in Autobiography: from: Regard for the Other: Autothanatography in Rousseau, De Quincey, Baudelaire, and Wilde
Abstract: Certainly, the notion of Levinasian self-writing is, at first blush, unpromising. In

Book Title: Human Rights, Inc.: The World Novel, Narrative Form, and International Law- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): SLAUGHTER JOSEPH R.
Abstract: In this timely study of the historical, ideological, and formal interdependencies of the novel and human rights, Joseph Slaughter demonstrates that the twentieth-century rise of world literatureand international human rights law are related phenomena. Slaughter argues that international law shares with the modern novel a particular conception of the human individual. The Bildungsroman, the novel of coming of age, fills out this image, offering a conceptual vocabulary, a humanist social vision, and a narrative grammar for what the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and early literary theorists both call the free and full development of the human personality. Revising our received understanding of the relationship between law and literature, Slaughter suggests that this narrative form has acted as a cultural surrogate for the weak executive authority of international law, naturalizing the assumptions and conditions that make human rights appear commonsensical. As a kind of novelistic correlative to human rights law, the Bildungsroman has thus been doing some of the sociocultural work of enforcement that the law cannot do for itself. This analysis of the cultural work of law and of the social work of literature challenges traditional Eurocentric histories of both international law and the dissemination of the novel. Taking his point of departure in Goethe's Wilhelm Meister, Slaughter focuses on recent postcolonial versions of the coming-of-age story to show how the promise of human rights becomes legible in narrative and how the novel and the law are complicit in contemporary projects of globalization: in colonialism, neoimperalism, humanitarianism, and the spread of multinational consumer capitalism.Slaughter raises important practical and ethical questions that we must confront in advocating for human rights and reading world literature-imperatives that, today more than ever, are intertwined.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x031j

CHAPTER 2 Becoming Plots: from: Human Rights, Inc.: The World Novel, Narrative Form, and International Law
Abstract: In her first major speech as United Nations High Commissioner for Human Rights in 1997, Ireland’s former president Mary Robinson admonished the international body for having abandoned its historical mission of “realising human rights”: “Somewhere along the way many in the United Nations have lost the plot and allowed their work to answer to other imperatives.”¹ Recalling the purposes for which the UN incorporated itself in 1945, Robinson insisted that “almost by definition and certainly according to its Charter, the United Nations exists to promote human rights.” Indeed, the Charter’s preamble rehearses the organization’s statement of purpose, enumerating the common

Book Title: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): WYSCHOGROD EDITH
Abstract: Exploring the risks, ambiguities, and unstable conceptual worlds of contemporary thought, Crossover Queries brings together the wide-ranging writings, across twenty years, of one of our most important philosophers.Ranging from twentieth-century European philosophy-the thought of Heidegger, Foucault, Derrida, Levinas, Janicaud, and others-to novels and artworks, music and dance, from traditional Jewish thought to Jain andBuddhist metaphysics, Wyschogrod's work opens radically new vistas while remaining mindful that the philosopher stands within and is responsible to a philosophical legacy conditioned by the negative.Rather than point to a Hegelian dialectic of overcoming negation or to a postmetaphysical exhaustion, Wyschogrod treats negative moments as opening novel spaces for thought. She probes both the desire for God and an ethics grounded in the interests of the other person, seeing these as moments both of crossing over and of negation. Alert to the catastrophes that have marked our times, she exposes the underlying logical structures of nihilatory forces that have been exerted to exterminate whole peoples. Analyzing the negationsof biological research and cultural images of mechanized and robotic bodies, she shows how they contest the body as lived in ordinary experience.Crossover Queries brings together important essays on a remarkable range of topics by one of our most insightful cultural critics. Commenting on philosophical and theological issues that have shaped the recent past as well as scientific and technological questions that will preoccupy us in the near future, Wyschogrod consistently alerts us to the urgency of problems whose importance few recognize. To avoid the challenge these essays pose is to avoid responsibility for a future that appears to be increasingly fragile.-Mark C. Taylor, Columbia University
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0385

3 Postmodern Saintliness: from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: What must saintliness be if we are to think of it as postmodern? Does the term postmodernismnot refer to a dizzying array of ever-shifting significations attributable to aesthetic styles and cultural practices? I shall focus upon postmodernism as a revolt against modes of rationality that make foundational claims, that is, as an attack upon what Jean-François Lyotard calls “grand narratives,” by which he means comprehensive epistemological schema, as well as all-encompassing theories of emancipation. In preference to the logics of modernity in their idealist and empiricist expressions, postmodern thinkers embrace what I should like to call an epistemic erotics,

4 Levinas and Hillel’s Questions from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: “Philosophy is in crisis,” says the postmodern thinker. “Yet,” she continues, “we are forced to comport ourselves within its ambit, forced to dance its dance, to use its concepts and to unsay them even before they are said.” But what is meant by “philosophy,” and how are we to unsay it if we have at our disposal only itsnotions? Can philosophy provide its own critique without lapsing into self-referentiality? Is there an exteriority, an outside of philosophy that speaks otherwise than philosophically, that can call into question philosophy’s hierarchy of constructs? And if there is, what boots it if

10 Empathy and Sympathy as Tactile Encounter from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: Empathy and sympathy are feeling-acts that open unique modes of access to other persons. While they differ from one another in object and intentional structure, both bring other persons into proximity to the experiencing subject. This “bringing near” suggests that empathy and sympathy are misunderstood if they are interpreted as mental acts whose objects yield their meanings only when they are taken as traversing an intervening space, as originating at a remove from the act of apprehension. Sight and hearing are the paradigmatic senses for grasping objects that are given as coming from elsewhere. Visual objects are apprehended as coming

14 The Warring Logics of Genocide from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: The very mention of genocide usually elicits a shudder, a frissonof horror, of psychological revulsion and moral outrage. Images of mass annihilation, of the dead and dying that the term evokes are especially troubling, since genocidal killing, now endemic to the world of postmodernity, is envisioned as a slaughter of innocents. It is understood that those earmarked for destruction are selected on the basis of criteria that lie outside the standard rules of conduct in war, even if genocidal events occur in the context of what is designated conventionally as war. Genocidal killing is often justified by its perpetrators

28 Time and Nonbeing in Derrida and Quine from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: Contemporary philosophers may be divided into two classes: those who believe in normative epistemological discourse governed by canons of objectivity and rationality continuous with those of science, and those who think of cognitive discourse as one among many claimants to meaning. Richard Rorty argues that, if there is “no common commensurating ground between them, all we can do is be hermeneutic about the opposition.”¹ In this interpretation, it is futile to try to breach the distinctive discursive modes and ontological claims separating the work of Quine and Derrida. Quine belongs in the systematic cognitive camp, since he thinks the criteria

29 The Logic of Artifactual Existents: from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: Scientific thinking as a model for human inquiry has fallen under criticism, often by those who number themselves among its most ardent admirers. In the case of John Dewey, the romance with science comes to an inconclusive end, since he has no quarrel with the explanatory force of scientific concepts or with the power of science as an organon of theoretical constructs that express the underlying regularities of phenomena. Instead, it is the lackluster record of science in addressing the multi-layered world in which we live—one to which Dewey attributes purpose and passion—that leads him to seek a

8 God Without Being (God) from: Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: How can we think about God, especially in light of psychoanalytic theory from Freud to Lacan? Postmodern theology is currently assessing notions of God liberated from the constraints of being, stimulated by the work of Jean-Luc Marion. Does Lacan’s thought provide resources to think differently about some of these important discussions inspired by Marion concerning God without being?

“God,” Gods, God from: Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) PEPERZAK ADRIAAN T.
Abstract: Gedanken sind frei. Thoughts are free. Thinking is autonomous. Philosophers are free because they are able to receive, accept or refuse, distance, display, suspend, or focus on all that exists or has been thought. But philosophy is never first (except,perhaps, in a quite abstract sense of being first), because, before beginning to practice it, philosophers have already been educated, formed, accustomed to a particular language and culture, become part of an ongoing history, and set on a certain path.

The Name of God in Levinas’s Philosophy from: Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) GIBBS ROBERT
Abstract: Levinas testifies to one of philosophy’s primary vocations. A vocation, because philosophy is called. Like all responsibilities, philosophy’s is a response to a call it does not initiate. Philosophy is not like a God who is self-causing. But what is theambivalencethat is in question? Given my title, one can hardly be surprised that the ambivalence concerns God—concerns the way God can appear in thought, can appear by being named.¹

Hearing the Voices of the Dead: from: Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) CAPUTO JOHN D.
Abstract: In response to a question put to Jacques Derrida by Elizabeth Clark, one of America’s leading historians of early Christianity, about the relevance of deconstruction for history, Derrida said what we would expect him to say, that historians must constantly question their assumptions about history and stay open to other concepts of history and of historiography, and that is where deconstruction can help. But the first thing he said was unexpected: “I dream of being a historian.” He expressed his feeling that, in a way, ever since Of Grammatology, “I was just doing history.” That was not a bit of

Memory and Violence, or Genealogies of Remembering from: Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) KELBER WERNER H.
Abstract: Three interrelated features may be said to characterize the work of Edith Wyschogrod. There is first an interdisciplinary drive to rise above institutionally sanctioned boundaries and to retrieve intellectual categories from their disciplinary captivity so as to reconfigure them in novel contexts. It is this desire and the ability to bring widely differing genres, discourses and traditionally separate intellectual orbits into productive coalitions that have increasingly distinguished her writings. This linking of philosophy and theology, psychoanalysis and science, literary criticism and linguistics, architecture and the arts, media studies and above all, ethics, is carried off with a high degree of

An Exercise in Upbuilding from: Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) WYSCHOGROD EDITH
Abstract: In this extraordinary collection of essays, I encounter myself in a Kierkegaardian sense as “the single individual,” the one by whom the work itself “wishes to be received as if it had arisen in [the] heart” of the self whom it addresses. I read each essay as a discourse in upbuilding, as Kierkegaard understood the term, so that the writer whose name is affixed to the essay is one who generously accepts responsibility for its every word. Neither a sermon nor a treatise that is designed to increase abstract knowledge, the discourse that is upbuilding drives the addressee between alternatives

New Creations: from: Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) JANTZEN GRACE
Abstract: The Genesis story in the Hebrew Bible, with its account of a beautiful garden forfeited by a descent into sin and violence, is often taken as the paradigmatic narrative of creation for Christianity. It is not the only biblical account of creation. The prophet Isaiah, for example, describes a vision of a new creation, made by God to transform the present world of trouble, destruction and pain. He declares the proclamation of God:

The Shulammite’s Song: from: Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: The Song of Songs offers no single, stable perspective from which to view the amorous scenes unveiled on its pages. Most readers of the Song from antiquity to the present have, however, been inclined to identify with the female figure traditionally known as the Shulammite. But who is the Shulammite, and who, for that matter, is her beloved? The sustained ambiguities of identity and fluid reversals of erotic roles have made this text fertile ground for conceiving and reconceiving the mysteries of desire, in particular, the mysteries of divine desire—despite (or perhaps because of) the fact that God is

Afterword: from: Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) KELLER CATHERINE
Abstract: So many loves. A time of depletion after excess. Afterward—is it the lull of exhaustion or satisfaction, disappointment or fulfillment, detumescence or engorgement? Or some uneasy incompletion? The seduction has been attempted, we may be falling in love or out, getting up or going down, ascending, descending or just turning, oh, God. An afterword comes too late, or too soon; the double entendres are dissipating, the flesh has confessed, the closet is open, the book is closing, and still we may not have figured it out. “It” almost came, is still to come, may have come and gone already.

3 Heidegger’s Figures from: Sounding/Silence: Martin Heidegger at the Limits of Poetics
Abstract: Given the prominence Heidegger accords to poetry throughout a Gesamtausgabethat now extends to 102 volumes, his discussions of figurative language are, at first glance, most conspicuous for their scarcity. Metaphor in particular is dismissed over four lapidary and categorical pronouncements. If this might be taken to demonstrate that Heidegger was simply uninterested in questions of metaphor, and of figurative language more generally,¹ one should nevertheless note that these pronouncements lie at the crux of his attempts both to think thealetheiccapacity of artworks, and to “undergo an experience with language” (OL 57/159). It is in this respect unsurprising

4 Reading Heidegger Reading from: Sounding/Silence: Martin Heidegger at the Limits of Poetics
Abstract: Ever since Max Kommerell described an essay of Heidegger’s on Hölderlin’s “Andenken” as “a productive train-wreck” ( ein productives Eisenbahn-Unglück),¹ Heidegger’s readings of poetry have been subject to a critical skepticism bordering at times on outrage. To an extent this is unsurprising and even, one feels—in the light of his contempt for “the history of literature and aesthetics” (EHP 21/7)—solicited. Yet the surfeit of commentary on Heidegger as a “train-wreck” exegete risks occluding the other term in Kommerell’s oxymoron, or the possibility that the two are interlinked: that as the reading is, as it were, derailed, it opens on

3 Jacques Derrida and “Religion Without Religion” from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Jacques Derrida’s writings are extensive and few of them have any direct bearing on the subject of religion. Yet, especially since the publication of Kevin Hart’s The Trespass of the Sign,¹ Hent de Vries’sPhilosophy and the Turn to Religion,² and John D. Caputo’sThe Prayers and Tears of Jacques Derrida,³ as well as Derrida’s repeated participation in the popularReligion and Postmodernismconferences at Villanova University (also initiated and hosted by Caputo),⁴ some of Derrida’s writing has exercised great influence on the growing conversation that seeks to conduct discussion about religion in a postmodern environment. The interpretation of Derrida

7 Jean-Louis Chrétien: from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Jean-Louis Chrétien’s writings are a powerful example of the character of what I have called a new type of apologetics. In no way does he ever engage in anything like proofs for God’s existence, evidence for the validity of religious experience, or any consideration of the rational coherence of an idea of the divine. And yet his work is imbued and overflows with Christian imagery and references to Christian sources. Even when he is not addressing explicitly religious themes, his poetic language has the flavor and tonality of Christian mysticism. Chrétien (born in 1952) is one of the youngest of

11 Merold Westphal: from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Merold Westphal, recently retired as Distinguished Professor of Philosophy at Fordham University, is one of the most significant figures to have appropriated French thought about the divine and religious experience for an American audience, focusing especially on the dimensions of faith. Most of his works circle around the coherence and viability of Christian faith, seeking to show that postmodernity and faith are not as incompatible as they might seem. Deeply influenced by the work of Søren Kierkegaard to whom several of his writings are devoted, he has continually sought to translate postmodern philosophy for a Christian audience. He shows that

CHAPTER 2 Morrow’s Ants: from: Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Smith Mick
Abstract: In 1975 Edward Hyams, novelist, gardener, broadcaster, anarchist, and a long-time advocate of the need for agriculturally sustainable societies, wrote a political novel, Morrow’s Ants.¹ It tells the story of billionaire businessman Graham Morrow’s attempt to build a futuristic city modeled on his intensive study of ant colonies.² The Hive, a massive, largely underground, complex powered by tidal and nuclear energy, will house and feed two hundred thousand people in an entirely self-sustaining manner. But this development, as his opponent (the embittered revolutionary Evans), suggests, comes with a price—the loss of individual liberty, freedom, and creativity. It is “designed

CHAPTER 8 Bodily Moods and Unhomely Environments: from: Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Trigg Dylan
Abstract: Shortly after his coach was nearly thrown into the Seine while crossing the Neuilly-sur- SeineBridge in 1654, the French philosopher Blaise Pascal became convinced that an abyss had formed on his left-hand side. Quite apart from the logical improbability that such an abyss was real, this near miss of the Seine had set in a place a reality of Pascal’s own, and one that was entirely independent of the objective properties of the world. Such was the extent of his anxiety that for a while Pascal would require a chair beside him to feel reassurance that he was not on

CHAPTER 13 The Betweenness of Monuments from: Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Donohoe Janet
Abstract: Often when we think about the environment, we think about natural places and the negative impact of the human being upon those places. We think of global warming, melting ice caps, mountain topping, extinction of animals, and other threats to nature. With the increasing public and social emphasis on environmentalism, we are encouraged to think of our impact on the natural environment by recycling more, using water less, and reducing our environmental footprint. The environment we are supposed to be concerned with and thinking about is “out there” beyond the perimeters of our cities where we only go for a

1. Introduction from: Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Bosco Mark
Abstract: The above sentiments of the Second Vatican Council’s Pastoral Constitution on the Church in the Modern Worldcapture a transitional moment in the Catholic Church’s attitude in its relationship with modernity. This shift is seen most remarkably in the language of the Council, what Jesuit historian John W. O’Malley notes is a change from “the rhetoric of reproach” so prevalent in documents from previous church councils to an embrace of the “rhetoric of affirmation and invitation.” The rhetorical change in attitude that permeates the Council documents was matched by a new formulation of the Church’s consciousness of itself since the

3. The Passionateness of Being: from: Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Byrne Patrick H.
Abstract: It is daunting to be asked to communicate why Bernard Lonergan is such an important thinker. The magnitude of his achievement is great, and I owe a great personal debt for all that I have learned from him. Over the course of his life, Lonergan wrote extensively and profoundly about an amazing range of topics—painting and music; economics and politics; epistemology, metaphysics, and ethics; quantum mechanics and relativity theory; statistics and evolution; sexuality and marriage; logic, ordinary language, and symbolic meaning; religion and feelings; common sense; the theory of history; sin, grace, and the theology of the Christian doctrines

4. Lonergan and the Key to Philosophy from: Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Murray Elizabeth A.
Abstract: Bernard Lonergan is counted among the major Catholic thinkers of the twentieth century. His contribution to philosophy with his major work, Insight, and to theology with his crowning achievement,Method in Theology, has been widely recognized at international conferences and is evidenced by a growing body of scholarly publications. Some consider Lonergan to be primarily a philosopher; more consider him to be a theologian. There is also growing interest in his economic manuscripts, the fruit of his life-long avocation. Yet, he himself once remarked: “Fortunately, I don’t think I come under any single label.”²

8. Murray on Loving One’s Enemies from: Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Hooper Leon
Abstract: John Courtney Murray never wrote much about loving one’s enemies, though he did have a clearly identifiable enemies list. Many on that list he adopted from his ecclesial tradition, and some he developed on his own or, at least, gave them his own spin. In what follows I discuss four such enemies and then spell out how Murray—in using and abusing, rejecting and developing his tradition—gave a new social nuance to the usually personalistic understandings of the command to love one’s enemies.

10. On Reading Rahner in a New Century from: Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) O’Donovan Leo J.
Abstract: Having studied with Karl Rahner at the height of his influence, and after teaching and writing about him for many years now, I have come to feel increasingly indebted to him not only as a theologian of stature, but as a pastor of my soul. Difficult as it is to say something meaningful about an author whose bibliography famously includes more than four thousand titles, in this essay I want especially to explain why I think him a vital companion for us all in the coming years of a troubled world. I shall first offer a brief overview of his

12. Karl Rahner: from: Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Griener George E.
Abstract: Karl Rahner is one of the most influential Roman Catholic theologians of the twentieth century. The international impact of Rahner’s project, surprising even to some of his close colleagues, irritating to some of his critics, is a phenomenon not yet fully explained by the criteria of academic theology. It also needs to be explored as a historical-cultural event.

Book Title: Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Anderson Judith H.
Abstract: The title Translating Investments, a manifold pun, refers to metaphor and clothing, authority and interest, and trading and finance. Translation, Latin translatio, is historically a name for metaphor, and investment, etymologically a reference to clothing, participates both in the complex symbolism of early modern dress and in the cloth trade of the period. In this original and wide-ranging book, Judith Anderson studies the functioning of metaphor as a constructive force within language, religious doctrine and politics, literature, rhetoric, and economics during the reigns of the Tudors and early Stuarts. Invoking a provocative metaphorical concept from Andy Clark's version of cognitive science, she construes metaphor itself as a form of scaffolding fundamental to human culture. A more traditional and controversial conception of such scaffolding is known as sublation-Hegel's Aufhebung, or raising,as the philosophers Jacques Derrida and Paul Ricoeur have understood this term. Metaphor is the agent of raising, or sublation, and sublation is inseparable from the productive life of metaphor, as distinct in its death in code or clich. At the same time, metaphor embodies the sense both of partial loss and of continuity, or preservation, also conveyed by the term Aufhebung. Anderson's study is simultaneously critical and historical. History and the theory are shown to be mutually enlightening, as are a wide variety of early modern texts and their specific cultural contexts. From beginning to end, this study touches the present, engaging questions about language, rhetoric, and reading within post-structuralism and neo-cognitivism. It highlights connections between intellectual problems active in our own culture and those evident in the earlier texts, controversies, and crises Anderson analyzes. In this way, the study is bifocal, like metaphor itself. While Anderson's overarching concern is with metaphor as a creative exchange, a source of code-breaking conceptual power, each of her chapters focuses on a different but related issue and cultural sector. Foci include the basic conditions of linguistic meaning in the early modern period, instantiated by Shakespeare's plays and related to modern theories of metaphor; the role of metaphor in the words of eucharistic institution under Archbishop Cranmer; the play of metaphor and metonymy in the writings of Luther, Zwingli, and Calvin and in John Donne's Devotions; the manipulation of these two tropes in the politics of the controversy over ecclesiastical vestments and in its treatment by John Foxe; the abuse of figuration in the house of Edmund Spenser's Busirane, where catachresis, an extreme form of metaphor, is the trope du jour; the conception of metaphor in the Roman rhetorics and their legacy in the sixteenth century; and the concept of exchange in the economic writing of Gerrard de Malynes, merchant and metaphorist in the reigns of Elizabeth and James. What emerges at the end of this book is a heightened critical sense of the dynamic of metaphor in cultural history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x05b5

1. Renaissance Metaphor and the Dynamic of Cultural Change: from: Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England
Abstract: This book studies the functioning of metaphor in Tudor and early Stuart culture. Accordingly, its chapters treat a range of disciplines, including language, religion, rhetoric, politics, literature, and economics. Also and inevitably, it touches the present, raising questions about the position of language and rhetoric within post-structuralism and neo-cognitivism and doing so in a way that highlights the connection between intellectual problems active in our own culture and those manifested in the sixteenth- and seventeenth-century texts, controversies, and crises that I discuss. Translating Investmentsis thus conceived as simultaneously a critical and a historical study.

4. Donne’s Tropic Awareness: from: Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England
Abstract: To ask in what ways and to what extent John Donne might have been aware of the dazzling tropes he used would seem a question whose answer is self-evident. Historically, however, this is a real question, and one bearing on faith and ideology. To take an obvious instance, the correspondences invoked so often in Donne’s writing are to us metaphoric fiction, but as extensions of a single, celestial power, hence valid and real parallels, they presumably meant more for Donne and his immediate audience, even in their more skeptical moments. They assume the familiar centered universe organized hierarchically from low

5. Vesting Significance and Authority: from: Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England
Abstract: That a particular outfit or a more general style of clothing should make a ‘‘statement’’ is a familiar enough idea in the twenty-first century. It assumes that clothing, like language, participates in a system of signs, and that plain clothing, such as chinos or blue jeans, can be every bit as much a statement as can a dark suit, a pink dress, or a tuxedo. But when we take clothing to be making a ‘‘statement,’’ rhetorically we are using a metaphor, or possibly a metonymy, or both. Only figuratively does clothing speak and whether it speaks metonymically or metaphorically depends

The Hermeneutics of Revelation from: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Marion Jean-Luc
Abstract: Rk: They are many similarities between your work, Jean-Luc, and mine: Both of us owe a great deal of our philosophical formation to the phenomenologies of Husserl and Heidegger; we have both engaged ourselves in close dialogue with Levinas, Ricœur, and Derrida. Given these evident similarities, it would be more fruitful and interesting, it seems to me, if we take a look here into some of the differencesin our respective positions in regards to the phenomenology of God. One question that I would like to put to you, Jean-Luc, and which, in fact, I have put in a more

The Philosophy of Art and Politics from: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Marcuse Herbert
Abstract: Hm: It seems to have become quite evident that the advanced industrial countries have long since reached the stage of wealth and productivity which Marx projected for the construction of a socialist society. Consequently, a quantitative increase in material productivity is now seen to be insufficient in itself, and a qualitative change in

Book Title: God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Garfitt Toby
Abstract: Gathering in one place a cohesive selection of articles that deepen our sense of the vitality and controversy within the Catholic renewal of the mid-twentieth century, God's Mirror offers historical analysis of French Catholic intellectuals. This volume highlights the work of writers, thinkers and creative artists who have not always drawn the attention given to such luminaries as Maritain, Mounier, and Marcel. Organized around the typologies of renewal and engagement, editors Katherine Davies and Toby Garfitt provide a revisionist and interdisciplinary reading of the narrative of twentieth-century French Catholicism. Renewal and engagement are both manifestations of how the Catholic intellectual reflects and takes position on the relationship between the Church, personal faith and the world, and on the increasingly problematic relationship between intellectuals and the Magisterium. A majority of the writings are based on extensive research into published texts, with some occasional archival references, and they give critical insights into the tensions that characterized the theological and political concerns of their subjects.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x05fq

5 Charles Du Bos’s Catholicism and His Politics of Sincerity in Interwar France from: God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century
Author(s) Davies Katherine
Abstract: Taking his cue from François Mauriac, literary critic Albert Thibaudet contemplated the currency of sincerity in a 1929 article for the Nouvelle revue française. While stressing the polysemic nature of sincerity—its meaning slips and slides depending on the vocation and philosophical disposition of the subject—Thibaudet’s commentary was indicative of the imaginative space it occupied in French intellectual life.² As a hinge for literary debate, the notion of “sincerity toward oneself” crystallized in no small part around the figure of André Gide. His sincerity lay in the cultivation and celebration of the conflicting dimensions of the self, the total

6 From Mystique to Théologique: from: God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century
Author(s) Schloesser Stephen
Abstract: Consult any concert program, review, or advertising for the music of Olivier Messiaen: very likely some variation of the word “mystic” will appear as an identifier or modifier. Partly, this is simply modernity’s lack of an appropriate category. One of the most recent examples is a book review that appeared in 2010 in the Journal of the British Institute of Organ Studies: “The title [Messiaen the Theologian] is perhaps (deliberately?) provocative: as the contributors demonstrate, Messiaen was profoundly influenced by certain theological traditions. Yet it is slightly implausible to ascribe to a composer the didactic, essentially word-based role of ‘theologian’;

8 “Into the Catacombs of the Past”: from: God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century
Author(s) Moore Brenna
Abstract: In her memoirs, Traversée en solitaire(Solo Crossing), French Catholic medievalist Marie-Madeleine Davy (1903–99; her name is also spelled Marie-Magdeleine) recalls a remarkable afternoon in Paris in December 1943. Trained under Étienne Gilson, Davy had been hired as a lecturer in religion at the École des hautes études, and she had prepared to teach on the likeness (semblance) between the soul and God among the Cistercian monks of the twelfth century. About ten minutes into her presentation, three German officers walked into the auditorium, stood by the door, and stared at her. “I felt pale. My jaw tightened. All

10 Louis Massignon: from: God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century
Author(s) O’Mahony Anthony
Abstract: Louis Massignon (1883–1962) was a singular figure in the French Catholic intellectual world between the First and Second World Wars up until Vatican II.¹ His place in the French Catholic milieu defies easy categorization: soldier-diplomat, leading scholar of Islam and the Muslim World, politically engaged, a religious activist, and latterly ordained a Catholic priest in the Melkite Catholic Church in 1950.² Massignon was considered by some of his contemporaries to be a unique mediating voice in France’s relations with the Arab world.³

“ALL THAT YOU SAY, I WILL DO”: from: Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Davis Ellen F.
Abstract: The first words of Ruth: “In the days when the judges were judging, there was a famine in the land.” “The days when the judges were judging”—if you have read the seventh book of the Bible, then you know that it was a time of political chaos, with Philistine enemies pressing hard on Israel’s flank, and the “national leadership” (if you can call it that) worse than a bad joke. Yes, early on there was Deborah, a great judge, but things deteriorated pretty steadily after that. By the end of the period of the book of Judges, when our

RUTH AMID THE GENTILES from: Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Hawkins Peter S.
Abstract: The voice I hear this passing night was heard

RUTH SPEAKS IN YIDDISH: from: Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Hellerstein Kathryn
Abstract: Erich Auerbach famously characterized the direct discourse of the Hebrew Bible as serving “to indicate thoughts which remain unexpressed,” in contrast to speech in Homer’s Odyssey, which serves “to manifest, to externalize thoughts.”¹ However, when the first speech occurs in the book of Ruth 1:8, Naomi, pausing on the road home back toward Bethlehem, in the land of Judah, addresses her widowed Moabite daughters-in-law in what seems to me a forthright way that makes her thoughts and feelings utterly explicit: “Go, return each of you to her mother’s house; the Lord deal kindly with you as ye have dealt with

TRANSLATING EROS from: Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Bloch Chana
Abstract: “Kiss me, make me drunk with your kisses! Your sweet loving / is better than wine.”¹ The great love poem that begins with these words does not follow the conventional romantic plot: boy meets girl, boy and girl get acquainted, boy proposes marriage. That the two are already intimate is clear from the very first words of the Song of Songs. Love, not marriage, is what they propose, and the woman, who is called the Shulamite, does most of the proposing. She, in fact, is the one who issues that first urgent invitation. If she declares that his loving is

UNRESOLVED AND UNRESOLVABLE: from: Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Brettler Marc
Abstract: The statement that best encapsulates the problems of the Song of Songs is the simile attributed to Sa’adiya Gaon, the head of the Babylonian Jewish community in the tenth century: “It is like a lock whose key is lost or a diamond too expensive to purchase.”¹ The double simile is odd, since we typically discard locks whose keys we have lost, and certainly do not consider them to be fine diamonds. Yet, it is a perfect description of the Song: Its magnificence is well recognized, yet it refuses to be unlocked (though many have claimed to have found its missing

THE FEMALE VOICE: from: Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Fassler Margot
Abstract: Hildegard of Bingen was deeply engaged with Scripture, and one of the ways to understand her thought is by tracing her treatment of particular figures from the Bible or especially important passages from favored sections of the text. How did she organize her commentaries—written, visual, and sonic? How did she take the common coin of theological understanding and turn it into a practiced, embodied knowing within communal action? These are the questions addressed here, and they are grappled with by focusing primarily upon this theologian/composer/poet’s treatment of the Song of Songs.¹ Hildegard knew the book as a source of

HONEY AND MILK UNDERNEATH YOUR TONGUE: from: Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Osherow Jacqueline
Abstract: When I think now of my introduction to the Song of Songs—at Jewish summer camp, at fifteen, when they were looking for volunteers to chant it—I can’t decide whether to emphasize that it was a fluke or one of those moments in life for which we Ashkenazic Jewish reserve the untranslatable Yiddish word beshert, which means a host of untranslatable Yiddish things, including, as I’m using it here: “profoundly and irrevocably predestined.” Perhaps I will reveal a bit too much about myself if I tell you that, for me, they are precisely the same thing—the fluke and

INTRODUCTION from: Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) HEFT JAMES L.
Abstract: Nearly a decade ago, the first volume of Marianist Award lectures appeared in print.¹ In the preface to that volume, I explained how the University of Dayton, founded by the Marianists (Society of Mary) in 1850, had been giving since 1950 an annual award to a leading Mariologist. Some years after the Second Vatican Council, during a period when many Marian practices fell into desuetude, so did the granting of this annual award. However, the commitment of the university to the support and continued development of its Marian Library remained firm. For example, the leaders of the university and of

CHAPTER 2 The Poor and the Third Millennium from: Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) GUTIÉRREZ GUSTAVO
Abstract: Father Jim Heft has already announced the subject of this afternoon’s lecture. I still have some difficulties expressing myself in English,

CHAPTER 3 Forms of Divine Disclosure from: Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) TRACY DAVID
Abstract: A part of our difficulty in addressing the issues of contemporary theology is the failure to consider how the three great separations of modern Western culture have damaged our ability to reflect on modern theology itself.

CHAPTER 4 Memoirs and Meaning from: Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) CONWAY JILL KER
Abstract: My Christian faith has certainly led me to my interest in the moral and spiritual dimensions of the journey in time we all make, and since my intellectual bent is literary, I have focused my attention

CHAPTER 6 Catholicism and Human Rights from: Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) GLENDON MARY ANN
Abstract: I am deeply honored to have been chosen for this year’s Marianist Award. And I was delighted when Father Heft told me I could give this lecture on any aspect of my work, so long as I included a discussion of how my faith has affected my scholarship and how my scholarship has affected my faith. At the time, that sounded like an easy assignment, since it was the experience of representing the Holy See at a United Nations conference that led to the book I have just completed—a history of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights of 1948,

CHAPTER 10 The Faith of a Theologian from: Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) DULLES AVERY CARDINAL
Abstract: In the letter inviting me to accept the Marianist Award for the year 2004, your president, Dr. Curran, suggested that I might take the occasion to speak of the relationship of faith to my own scholarly work. The proposal immediately captured my fancy since faith and theology have been, so to speak, the two poles of my existence. The subject, besides, has considerable importance for our time and place, because many of the difficulties we experience in Church and society are due to the impoverishment of faith or to theology that is not in harmony with faith.

Introduction: from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) de Vries Hent
Abstract: What has happened to “religion” in its present and increasingly public manifestation, propelled by global media, economic markets, and foreign policies as much as by resistance to them? How should we understand the worldwide tendencies toward the simultaneous homogenization andpluralization of our social and cultural practices, that is to say, of our individual and shared forms and ways of life? To answer these questions, we must interrogate a complex and shifting semantic, axiological, and imaginative archive, whose historical origins and modern disseminations have pragmatic ramifications for burning contemporary issues of the political (le politique) and politics (la politique), of

The Gods of Politics in Early Greek Cities from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Lloyd Janet
Abstract: I have decided to speak of “the gods” rather than “religion,” and of the “political domain [ le politique]” to identify the specific domain that has been recognized as such (astō politikōn) ever since Aristotle. As for the earliest Greek cities, they constitute the area of my present fieldwork.

Politics and Finitude: from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Pranger M. B.
Abstract: If, generally speaking, readers’ and writers’ attitudes toward the autobiographical genre can be characterized as naïve in that they take for granted the sincerity of the author, it is even harder for historians to be professionally effective without taking their products to be authentic reflections of time. There is a sense, however, in which histories of the state, histories of the church, and, indeed, histories of great institutions at large are so many contradictions in terms, at least if state and church are taken—as they are bound to be—to be bodies whose temporal existence transcends the moment, to

The Scandal of Religion: from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Szabari Antónia
Abstract: Although Luther is generally viewed as the creator of a homogeneous, modern German vernacular, after even a cursory sampling of passages in his immense oeuvre, one is struck by how artificial, hybrid, and strange his language is. Luther mixes Latin and German, biblical references and vernacular idioms, and blessings and curses. This mixing of registers was not entirely unprecedented in the sixteenth century—for example, the French author Rabelais did the same—but its effect on public speech was. Trained in the liberal arts and in the canonical literature of the Church, and being a particularly astute reader and translator

Levinas, Spinoza, and the Theologico-Political Meaning of Scripture from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) de Vries Hent
Abstract: At intervals of about ten years, Levinas devoted articles to Spinoza.¹ At first glance, these readings stand out for their critical, indeed, polemical tone. In his 1955 “The Case of Spinoza” Levinas accepts Jacob Gordin’s summary verdict: “Spinoza was guilty of betrayal [ il existe une trahison de Spinoza]¹ (108 / 155–56). Indeed, in this text we find an even more startling hypothesis, that, by “proposing that Spinoza’s trial be reopened,” Israel’s founding father, David Ben-Gurion, was, Levinas surmises, “seeking to question—more effectively than the missionaries installed in Israel—the great certainty of our history; which ultimately, for Mr.

Bush’s God Talk from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Lincoln Bruce
Abstract: Most discussions of George W. Bush’s religious faith draw heavily on his campaign autobiography, A Charge to Keep: My Journey to the White House(1999), which puts religion at the beginning, middle, and end of the story.¹ Deliberately vague in its chronology, the book describes a man who drifted until middle age, when Billy Graham “planted a mustard seed” in his soul and helped turn his life around.² Modifying the conventions of conversion narratives, the book acknowledges Bush’s youthful indiscretions but downplays the nature and severity of his sins. It does not single out one decisive, born-again moment, but describes

Subjects of Tolerance: from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Brown Wendy
Abstract: In recent years, culture has become a cardinal object of tolerance and intolerance. This is not only because liberal democratic societies have become increasingly multicultural as a consequence of late-modern population flows and the affirmation of cultural difference over assimilation. It is also because political conflict has become, in Mahmood Mamdani’s phrase, “culturalized”: “It is no longer the market (capitalism), nor the state (democracy), but culture (modernity) that is said to be the dividing line between those in favor of a peaceful, civic existence and those inclined to terror.”¹ Mamdani credits Samuel Huntington and Bernard Lewis with conceptually catapulting culture

Religion, Liberal Democracy, and Citizenship from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Mouffe Chantal
Abstract: Contrary to what many liberals had predicted, instead of becoming obsolete thanks to the development of “post conventional identities” and the increasing role of rationality in human behavior, religious forms of identification currently play a growing role in many societies. Yet the question of what should be the place of the church in a liberal democracy is a burning issue in several of the new Eastern European democracies. It seems, therefore, that the old controversy about the relationship between religion and politics, far from being on the wane, is again on the agenda.

Rogue Democracy and the Hidden God from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Weber Samuel
Abstract: “America will have been my subject”—it is almost in passing, and yet with considerable emphasis, that Jacques Derrida makes this announcement early on in a lecture that was to become the major portion of Rogues(Voyous).¹ And yet the passing remark could hardly have been more significant. America—in particular, the United States—always held a special importance for Derrida’s work.² It was in American universities that Derridean “deconstruction” first began to establish its international reputation, and it was also in the United States that the backlash against deconstruction first emerged and then crystallized in connection with the revelations

The Figure of the Abducted Woman: from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Das Veena
Abstract: Writing in 1994, Gyanendra Pandey, the well-known historian of the subaltern, took the neglect of the Partition in the social sciences and in Indian public culture to be a symptom of a deep malaise.¹ Historical writing in India, he argued, was singularly uninterested in the popular construction of Partition, the trauma it produced, and the sharp division between Hindus, Muslims, and Sikhs it left behind. He attributed this blindness to the fact that the historian’s craft has never been particularly comfortable with such matters as “the horror of Partition, the anguish and sorrow, pain and brutality of the ‘riots’ of

Come On, Humans, One More Effort if You Want to Be Post-Christians! from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Woods Fronza
Abstract: In the spring of 2003, the news came from the diocese of Helsingoer—Hamlet’s country, quite appropriately—that Thorkild Grosboell, a theologian and minister in the Lutheran Church of Denmark, was an atheist. The pastor later retracted, but the fact remains: he had publicly stated that he believed neither in God the creator of the world, nor in the resurrection of Christ, nor in the eternal life of the soul. Mr. Grosboell is my post-Christian hero. I sincerely hope that history will remember his name as that of a pioneer in a new kind of enlightenment. To see the existence

Book Title: Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): BIGGER CHARLES P.
Abstract: Plato's chora as developed in the Timaeus is a creative matrix in which things arise and stand out in response to the lure of the Good. Chora is paired with the Good, its polar opposite; both are beyond beingand the metaphors hitherto thought to disclose the transcendent. They underlie Plato's distinction of a procreative gap between being and becoming. The chiasmus between the Good and chora makes possible their mutual participation in one another. This gap makes possible both phenomenological and cosmological interpretations of Plato. Metaphor is restricted to beings as they appear in this gap through the crossing of metaphor's terms, terms that dwell with, rather than subulate, one another. Hermeneutically, through its iswe can see something being engendered or determined by that crossing.Bigger's larger goal is to align the primacy of the Good in Plato and Christian Neoplatonism with the creator God of Genesis and the God of love in the New Testament.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x06ms

4 To Feel and to Know from: Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: Thanks to Whitehead’s rather elliptical mention of the consequent nature of God and recent discussions in quantum mechanics, the Holy Spirit now may have a relevancy it has not enjoyed since Joachim of Fiore, Hegel, or Karl Rahner. The way beyond being is dual; there is first the rather uranian Good ( agathon) beyond being (Rep.,509B) which is the cause of knowing and being, and then, in the late dialogueTimaeus,its chthonic supplement, the procreative receptacle that gives beings place. Though neither is on the surface a promising subject for further discourse, we will find the chthonic aspect to

5 Deictic Metaphor from: Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: Plato’s metaphors tend toward the transcendent, but now the matrix must have its due. Deictic images seek out the factical uniqueness that condemns us to live in both truth and untruth, in openness and in concealment. How can this be if, as it is said, Plato is unable to accommodate the todi ti,the individual? But does Aristotle do better? His solution hinges on the distinction between sensing the individual and, except inphronesis,knowing it as universal, and that gets us nowhere. Can Plato be rescued? Perhaps. The way to the individual is the way of love, but in

13 Otherwise than Metaphor from: Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: Thanks to the gifts of the instant that is beyond beings, beings can enter into the rubrics of metaphor, hermeneutics, and participation, all of which share a reflexive structure. In perception, the paradigm case of participation, a form is engendered when the “subject” crosses over and interprets what is actively received. This resembles both the crossings of hermeneutics and metaphor.¹ We must now go beyond these in approaching the Good, though the beyond is always under an ontological pall.

Book Title: Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Heft James L.
Abstract: From the beginning, the Abrahamic faiths-Judaism, Christianity, and Islam-have stressed the importance of transmitting religious identity from one generation to the next. Today, that sustaining mission has never been more challenged. Will young people have a faith to guide them? How can faith traditions anchor religious attachments in this secular, skeptical culture?The fruit of a historic gathering of scholars and religious leaders across three faiths and many disciplines, this important book reports on the religious lives of young people in today's world. It's also a unique inventory of creative and thoughtful responses from churches, synagogues, and mosques working to keep religion a significant force in those lives.The essays are grouped thematically. Opening the book, Melchor Sanchez de Toca and Nancy Ammerman explore fundamental issues that have an impact on religion-from the cultural effects of global consumerism and personal technology to pluralism and individualism. In Part Two, leading investigators present three leading studies of religiosity among young people and college students in the United States, illuminating the gap between personal values and organized religion-and the emergence of new, different forms of spirituality and faith. How religious institutions deal with these challenges forms the heart of the book-in portraits of best practicesdeveloped to revitalize traditional institutions, from a synagogue in New York City and a Muslim youth camp in California to the famed French Catholic community of the late Brother John of Taiz. Finally, Jack Miles and Diane Winston weave the findings into a broader perspective of the future of religious belief, practice, and feeling in a changing world.Filled with real-world wisdom, Passing the Faith will be an essential resource for anyone seeking to understand what religions must, and can, do to inspire a vigorous faith in the next generation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x06n9

Is Moralistic Therapeutic Deism the New Religion of American Youth? from: Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Author(s) Smith Christian
Abstract: All human communities face the general challenge of social reproduction—that is, socializing subsequent generations to carry on community identities and practices. Meeting this challenge successfully requires effective practices of socialization, identity formation, role modeling, intergenerational transference of authority, and so on. Many other factors, however, typically play into the success or breakdown of social reproduction, including competing institutional demands and changing social environmental conditions that make passing on a collective way of life over time more or less difficult. Religious communities are only one among many types of human communities that face this general challenge of reproducing themselves in

Congregations That Get It: from: Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Author(s) Loskota Brie
Abstract: Organized religion in the United States is on the threshold of a seismic shift. Today, religious and community leaders are witnessing a crisis in the transmission of religious memory, practice, and tradition to the next generation. In major urban centers across the United States, there is a generalized perception that individuals in their twenties and early thirties constitute a “black hole” in congregational life. Members of the young-adult population are simply missing from most churches, synagogues, and mosques. Religious and community leaders are given to lamenting about the throngs of young people who are “spiritual but not religious” as a

Current Expressions of American Jewish Identity: from: Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Author(s) Schwadel Philip
Abstract: This chapter explores the characteristics of 114 American teenagers’ Jewish identities using data from the National Study of Youth and Religion (NSYR).¹ The NSYR includes a telephone survey of a nationally representative sample of 3,290 adolescents aged 13 to 17. Jewish teenagers were over-sampled, resulting in a total of 3,370 teenage participants. Of the NSYR teens surveyed, 141 have at least one Jewish parent and 114 of them identify as Jewish. The NSYR also includes in-depth face-to-face interviews with a total of 267 U.S. teens: 23 who have at least one Jewish parent and 18 who identify as Jewish. The

A Spiritual Crossroads of Europe: from: Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Abstract: I stand before you today with a mixture of gratitude and apprehension. Gratitude, because the organizers of this conference saw fit to include the Taizé Community in their program, ostensibly as a “model that retain[s] religious traditions in non-reductive ways while at the same time bridging in an open and dialogical way the ever-increasing religious pluralism of the contemporary world.” It is quite something to be considered, even remotely, such a model. So on behalf of my community I thank the organizers for this show of confidence in the life we have been attempting to live for the past sixty-plus

Second-Generation Muslim Immigrants in Detroit Mosques: from: Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Author(s) Bagby Ihsan
Abstract: Muslim immigrants started arriving in America in large numbers after the 1965 liberalization of immigration law. They achieved economic success, raised families, and established mosques as a commitment to retaining their faith and passing on that faith to their children.¹ Now, after four decades, the children of these immigrants are maturing—a significant portion of them are in high school and college and some are starting their own families. Using data and interviews from a study of Detroit mosques,² this paper looks at second-generation mosque-goers and addresses three issues: 1) the second generation’s sense of belonging to the mosque; 2)

1 First Philosophy from: Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: The title of Vladimir Jankélévitch’s first major work is Philosophie première. Traditionally, a first philosophy provides the cornerstone on which the rest of a thinker’s philosophy is constructed either upward in the architectonics of systematic structures or outward in concentric circles extending from the initial pulse of inspiration at the epicenter. Jankélévitch is fond of citing Henri Bergson, who wrote that a philosopher of value has said only one thing and the rest of his life and work is dedicated to that single point.¹ Or more poignantly, Jankélévitch’s philosophy follows Bergson’s insight that there is “something simple, infinitely simple, so

Introduction from: The Architecture of Concepts: The Historical Formation of Human Rights
Abstract: This book has three distinct aims. First, it seeks to contribute to our understanding of concepts. Such a contribution is doubtless fraught with difficulty since even a cursory inspection of the very wide range of disciplines and even more disparate discursive locales in which the word conceptis used leads to the conclusion that we do not seem to have a very clear sense of what concepts are, or might be. Once one begins, say, to compare how literary or social studies work with the term, or attempts to find a common thread in how philosophy, across its various subdisciplines

CHAPTER 2 “… the Fundamental Rights and Liberties of Mankind …”: from: The Architecture of Concepts: The Historical Formation of Human Rights
Abstract: It is, by now, almost a commonplace to state that “human rights” were invented in the eighteenth century.¹ Although it is not immediately clear what it might mean to say that a concept was “invented” at a particular moment in time (or over a particular stretch of time, say the eighteenth century), I shall leave this hanging since I want to begin with a more simple-minded examination of the validity of this statement.² If one searches the database of eighteenth-century printed materials in English (ECCO) for use of the term human rights, one finds that the century was almost entirely

CHAPTER 5 The Futures of Human Rights from: The Architecture of Concepts: The Historical Formation of Human Rights
Abstract: Throughout this book I have been primarily engaged in an effort to think conceptuality in ways that might significantly enhance our understanding how the world comes to seem to us as it does. No doubt this is an ambitious objective, and it would perhaps be hubristic to assume that it could deliver on its ambition all at once or in just one book. Throughout I have kept firmly in view what I thought to be, before I started, a single concept, or conceptual network. It turns out that the story about rights during the Anglophone eighteenth century is rather more

Enabling God from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: The title of this essay—“Enabling God”—can be read both ways. God enabling us, us enabling God. As such, it affirms the freedom that characterizes our relationship to the divine as a mutual act of giving. So doing, it challenges traditional concepts of God as omnipotence. The notion of an all-powerful, autonomous, and self-sufficient deity has a long history ranging from the self-thinking-thought of Aristotelian ontology to the self-subsisting-act ( ipsum esse subsistens) or self-causing-cause (ens causa sui) of medieval scholasticism and modern rationalism (Spinoza, Leibniz). It is a powerful lineage pertaining to a powerful concept of a powerful God.

Hermeneutics and the God of Promise from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) WESTPHAL MEROLD
Abstract: In The God Who May Be, Richard Kearney has given us a gift whose power to provoke thought is out of proportion to its small size. Its opening sentences read as follows: “God neither is nor is not but may be. That is my thesis in this volume. What I mean by this is that God, who is traditionally thought of as act or actuality, might better be rethought as possibility. To this end I am proposing here a new hermeneutics of religion which explores and evaluates two rival ways of interpreting the divine—theeschatologicaland theonto-theological.”¹

Is the Possible Doing Justice to God? from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) JANICAUD DOMINIQUE
Abstract: I hope He will forgive me nevertheless, for speaking ofHim in this chapter, taking into account the fact that this is a reply to a friend of mine whom I like and sincerely admire. Long before Heidegger asked, “How does the deity

Quis ergo Amo cum Deum Meum Amo? from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: Continental philosophy, since the work of Emmanuel Levinas, has been marked by a particular concern with otherness. Although this concern is expressed in a variety of ways—the Infinite, the Other, the impossible, and so on—each of these expressions orients itself around the absolute incommensurability of the other ( autre) with the self:

Divinity and Alterity from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) MURCHADHA FELIX Ó
Abstract: Divinity and alterity have haunted phenomenology since its beginnings. At phenomenology’s margins Rudolf Otto described God as the “wholly other.”¹ This otherness of God and the divinity of otherness came into sharp relief in Husserl’s transcendental phenomenology, where God’s transcendence is bracketed as much as the alterity of the other in the reduction of intentional consciousness.² This is a move replicated in Heidegger’s “reduction,” to use the vocabulary of Marion which is employed in this volume by Kearney and Manoussakis, where the question of God depends on the analytic of Dasein.³ Arguably in both Husserl and the early Heidegger the

Questions to and from a Tradition in Disarray from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) O’LEARY JOSEPH S.
Abstract: “Of all points of faith, the being of a God is, to my own apprehension, encompassed with most difficulty, and borne in upon our minds with most power” (Newman, Apologia, chap. 5). The biblical idea of God as Judge and Redeemer is borne in on our minds by moral experience, our sense of sin and desire of forgiveness, and also by religious experience. But the old sturdy confidence in the reality of God as creator of heaven and earth, attested by cosmic order and the very movement of the rational mind, has been depleted. If God cannot be spoken of

Theopoetics of the Possible from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) PUTT B. KEITH
Abstract: Theology is a cartography (that is, an attempt to create maps, to mark out, to graph, or to plot a course or courses) that will lead to a place, a topos, where divine revelation may occur and knowledge of God may be discovered. At these various places (topoi) and through its various topics, theology concerns the “way,” the right way, the proper way,theway, or one of many ways that can lead individuals to know something about God. Yet, as Gregory so honestly affirms, the journey to such knowledge, the progressing along various chosen ways to God, always occurs

Is God Diminished If We Abscond? from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) HEDERMAN MARK PATRICK
Abstract: Throughout his trilogy Philosophy at the Limit, Richard Kearney leads us “on the sinuous paths through postmodernity and beyond.” Calling on the messenger god, Hermes, he pioneers a new way of interpreting three of the defining contours of our third-millennial profile: strangers, gods, and monsters, three different names for our experience of alterity and otherness. The three volumes, if you take them not in chronological order but in order of accessibility, could be said to follow a technique similar to that used by Kierkegaard. The latter’s Journal of a Seducerwas a best-selling page-turner available even in railway stations. It

Prosopon and Icon: from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) MANOUSSAKIS JOHN PANTELEIMON
Abstract: Aristotle, in distinguishing between actuality (ἐνέργεια) and possibility (δύναμις), undertook two crucial steps that have haunted the history of Western metaphysics ever since: he gave a qualitative priority to actuality over potency, and then he identified the former with pure essence. Possibility, for Aristotle, is a mode that denotes transition and corruption, and thus imperfection. However, the risk that he acknowledges and fears most is that potency is ambiguous and undecidable. In his words, “the possible could be both a being and a non-being … it could equally be both things and neither” (1050b10, 1051a1). It is this coincidentia oppositorum

Hermeneutics of Revelation from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: Kearney: There are many similarities between your work, Jean-Luc, and mine: we both owe a great deal of our philosophical formation to the phenomenologies of Husserl and Heidegger; we have both engaged ourselves in close dialogue with Levinas, Ricoeur, and Derrida. Given these evident similarities, it would be more fruitful and interesting, it seems to me, if we take a look here into some of the differencesin our respective positions in regard to the phenomenology of God. One question that I would like to put to you, Jean Luc, and which, in fact, I have put in a more

God: from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) Sheppard Christian
Abstract: Sheppard: Before discussing this new book, The God Who May Be: A Hermeneutics of Religion(Indiana University Press, 2001), please comment on Richard Kearney’s work up until this point.

Reflecting God from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) McFAGUE SALLIE
Abstract: Kearney’s hermeneutics of religion might be called a “covenantal process view without the metaphysics” or, perhaps more accurately, with only intimations of metaphysics. The ontological claim is there—God is coming, will come, can come—but only if we help God come, only if we do our part by witnessing to love and justice in the world. The relations between God and human beings are built on invitation and response, on the possibilities the divine offers us and our acceptance of these possibilities as our life vocation. “If we are waiting for God, God is waiting for us” (“Re-Imagining God,”

ONE JOSIAH ROYCE: from: The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) McDermott John J.
Abstract: I am pleased to be here as the president of the fledgling Josiah Royce Society. The feathers of this bird are new to flight, but I am confident that they shall lift off erelong, especially since this society features the presence of several of us who have a long history of professional society initiations.

FOUR ON FOUR ORIGINATORS OF TRANSATLANTIC PHENOMENOLOGY: from: The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) Bell Jason
Abstract: The forthcoming first publication in Husserliana-Dokumenteof the 1914 dissertation by Winthrop Bell on the relevance of Josiah Royce’s theory of knowledge to Edmund Husserl’s phenomenology, a thesis directed by Husserl, calls our attention to a surprising network of historical relations that connect not only Royce and Husserl, but which further connect the golden ages of American philosophy at Harvard and of German phenomenology at Göttingen. We will here consider four principal figures in this transatlantic exchange of ideas, listed here in their order of arrival as scholars at Göttingen: Josiah Royce (1855–1916),¹ Edmund

ELEVEN JOSIAH ROYCE AND THE REDEMPTION OF AMERICAN INDIVIDUALISM from: The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) Mullin Richard P.
Abstract: The specter of centrifugal forces, which threaten to tear our country apart, has haunted us throughout our history. Josiah Royce stands out as one of our most perceptive critics and the creator of a philosophy that could heal the dangerous tendency toward fragmentation and disintegration. Royce’s work lies before us as a national treasure, but mostly a buried treasure. His situation reminds one of a remark that novelist Walker Percy made about Charles Sanders Peirce: “Most people have never heard of him, but they will.”¹ Josiah Royce’s Philosophy of Loyalty remains little known outside of specialized American philosophy, and even

CHAPTER ONE Narrative Life Span, in the Wake: from: Committing the Future to Memory: History, Experience, Trauma
Abstract: His disquiet, Derrida goes on to explain in the lines that follow, is grounded in what is said to link storytelling to memory: “And since I love nothing better than remembering

CHAPTER TWO Memory in Theory: from: Committing the Future to Memory: History, Experience, Trauma
Abstract: As we saw in Chapter 1, one of the achievements of Arendt’s and Benjamin’s critiques of history is to have drawn attention to the ways in which modern history effectively eliminates the dimension of human experience from its discursive structure. The question remains, though, as to how to situate the concept of experience with respect to this devaluation, especially given that one of the single most important innovations of modern philosophy was to have grounded knowledge in experience itself. In short: If modern history all but eliminates experience from its discourse, it is no less the case that the modern

4 Prayer: from: Divine Enticement: Theological Seductions
Abstract: Ethical speaking is a strange, intercut mode of address and listening. As some of the peculiarities of the sign are made vivid in thinking of sacraments as divine signs, so too the strangeness of speaking is especially evident when it calls upon an infinite addressee. In considering the peculiarity of prayer as an address from finite to infinite, I have followed Nancy, for whom “The singular address to a singular God—my god!—is prayer in general.”¹ The singular address links prayer to love, with an echo of Augustine’s “what then do I love when I love my God?”² But

Introduction: from: Technologies of Life and Death: From Cloning to Capital Punishment
Abstract: With advances in technoscience, it becomes increasingly difficult to distinguish nature from culture, the grown from the made. Geneticists can enhance the DNA of almost any living creature, including human beings. Cloning is a reality, no longer just the stuff of science fiction. New genetic engineering and organ transplantation technologies raise legal questions about the ownership of one’s own DNA and one’s own body. Who has the right to reproduce certain DNA, particularly if some DNA (disease resistant) is more desirable than other DNA (disease prone)? In laboratories, we can reproduce most things living and dead. Technologies of reproduction of

TWO Artificial Insemination: from: Technologies of Life and Death: From Cloning to Capital Punishment
Abstract: In an age when a child could have as few as one or as many as three genetic parents, maternity and paternity have become tricky business. For example, only one “parent” is necessary for cloning, while current experiments make it possible to combine nuclear DNA from one woman, mitochondrial DNA from another woman, and DNA from a man’s sperm, which makes three genetic parents. Add the contributions from a gestational carrier, who could be a third woman, and the child has four parents to whom he or she is biologically indebted, if not also genetically related; and then add still

SIX Deadly Devices: from: Technologies of Life and Death: From Cloning to Capital Punishment
Abstract: Can animals be sentenced to death? Can they be assassinated, or become victims of genocide? Certainly in our common parlance, these dubious rights are reserved for man; murder, assassination, genocide, and the death penalty are proper to man alone. Even in death, we insist upon separating ourselves from the animals. Yet our practices suggest otherwise. Animals are regularly killed for “crimes” committed against humans. For example, recently in Switzerland a swan was killed for trying to drown a swimmer by sitting on him; and dogs are regularly “put down” if they are considered dangerous. Unlike humans, however, usually animals are

Book Title: Reading Descartes Otherwise: Blind, Mad, Dreamy, and Bad- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Lee Kyoo
Abstract: Focusing on the first four images of the Other mobilized in Descartes' Meditations--namely, the blind, the mad, the dreamy, and the bad--Reading Descartes Otherwise casts light on what have heretofore been the phenomenological shadows of "Cartesian rationality." In doing so, it discovers dynamic signs of spectral alterity lodged both at the core and on the edges of modern Cartesian subjectivity. Calling for a Copernican reorientation of the very notion "Cartesianism," the book's series of close, creatively critical readings of Descartes' signature images brings the dramatic forces, moments, and scenes of the cogito into our own contemporary moment. The author patiently unravels the knotted skeins of ambiguity that have been spun within philosophical modernity out of such cliches as "Descartes, the abstract modern subject" and "Descartes, the father of modern philosophy"--a figure who is at once everywhere and nowhere. In the process, she revitalizes and reframes the legacy of Cartesian modernity, in a way more mindful of its proto-phenomenological traces.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0b2f

PREAMBLE I If Descartes Remains Overread and Underexplored … from: Reading Descartes Otherwise: Blind, Mad, Dreamy, and Bad
Abstract: Reading, or otherwise sitting on, the work of René Descartes (March 31, 1596–February 11, 1650) with the quiet plea sure I see in a g(r)azing cow, I have been savoring, and saving somewhere, this nagging thought: His philosophy—his “Cartesianism,” his “rationalism,” his “methodological” doubt, his theoretical “self-centeredness,” his historicized him-ness—seems to remain overread and underexplored. I have been sensing that something else is going on, too, in those usual pages, in that familiar picture. And here, I am inviting you, my readers, to read with

Book Title: Thinking Through the Imagination: Aesthetics in Human Cognition- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Jones Jude
Abstract: Use your imagination! The demand is as important as it is confusing. What is the imagination? What is its value? Where does it come from? And where is it going in a time when even the obscene seems overdone and passe? This book takes up these questions and argues for the centrality of imagination in human cognition. It traces the development of the imagination in Kant's critical philosophy (particularly the Critique of Aesthetic Judgment) and claims that the insights of Kantian aesthetic theory, especially concerning the nature of creativity, common sense, and genius, influenced the development of nineteenth-century American philosophy. The book identifies the central role of the imagination in the philosophy of Peirce, a role often overlooked in analytic treatments of his thought. The final chapters pursue the observation made by Kant and Peirce that imaginative genius is a type of natural gift (ingenium) and must in some way be continuous with the creative force of nature. It makes this final turn by way of contemporary studies of metaphor, embodied cognition, and cognitive neuroscience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0b4g

NAZISM AND US from: Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics
Abstract: 1933–2003. Is it legitimate to turn once again to the question of Nazism seventy years after it took power? The answer, I believe, can only be yes: not just because forgetting Nazism would represent an unbearable offense for its victims but also because, despite an ever increasing body of literature, something about Nazism remains in the dark, something that touches us. What might it be? What links us invisibly to what we point to as the most tragic political catastrophe of our time, and perhaps of all time? My own sense is that this thing that both troubles and

TOTALITARIANISM OR BIOPOLITICS: from: Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics
Abstract: Toward a philosophical interpretation of the twentieth century. How should we understand this expression? What meaning should we assign it? We might suggest two different answers to these questions, which are in some ways even contradictory. The first is the classic answer, associated with the great twentieth-century philosophical tradition of Husserl, Heidegger, and Sartre, to mention a few of the most well-known names. This answer calls for a reading of contemporary historical events through an interpretative lens that philosophy itself provides and singles out as the only one capable of grasping its essence. Whether such an interpretive lens is identified

Book Title: Cathedrals of Bone: The Role of the Body in Contemporary Catholic Literature- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Waldmeir John C.
Abstract: The metaphor of the Church as a bodyhas shaped Catholic thinking since the Second Vatican Council. Its influence on theological inquiries into Catholic nature and practice is well-known; less obvious is the way it has shaped a generation of Catholic imaginative writers. Cathedrals of Bone is the first full-length study of a cohort of Catholic authors whose art takes seriously the themes of the Council: from novelists such as Mary Gordon, Ron Hansen, Louise Erdrich, and J. F. Powers, to poets such as Annie Dillard, Mary Karr, Lucia Perillo, and Anne Carson, to the Pulitzer Prize-winning playwright John Patrick Shanley. Motivated by the inspirational yet thoroughly incarnational rhetoric of Vatican II, each of these writers encourages readers to think about the human body as a site-perhaps the most important site-of interaction between God and human beings. Although they represent the body in different ways, these late-twentieth-century Catholic artists share a sense of its inherent value. Moreover, they use ideas and terminology from the rich tradition of Catholic sacramentality, especially as it was articulated in the documents of Vatican II, to describe that value. In this way they challenge the Church to take its own tradition seriously and to reconsider its relationship to a relatively recent apologetics that has emphasized a narrow view of human reason and a rigid sense of orthodoxy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0bn7

4. Clothing Bodies/Making Priests: from: Cathedrals of Bone: The Role of the Body in Contemporary Catholic Literature
Abstract: There is a scene in J. F. Powers’ 1988 novel, Wheat That Springeth Green, in which the protagonist, Father Joe Hackett, is watching television in one of his favorite positions: reclined in a Barcalounger with drink in hand. His attention is evenly divided between what he sees on the screen and what he is hearing from his new curate, Father Bill Schmidt, who is trying to hold a conversation with him about fundraising. When the sudden appearance of a commercial for breakfast cereal captures Father Hackett’s eye, he sits up and studies the action in the ad. He then remarks

1 Strangers at the Edge of Hospitality from: Phenomenologies of the Stranger: Between Hostility and Hospitality
Author(s) CASEY EDWARD S.
Abstract: Strangers at the edge? Where else would they be? The edge is their place—or equally their non-place, since the edge is no place to be: no place to be comfortable, to be identified, to have the status of a citizen or homeowner. Yet, paradoxically, the edge is also where strangers are received: it is where hospitality happens. It is the non-place where the opening of hospitable place (a place called home, country, people) emerges and where, deepened and prolonged, such place comes to stay: to last as the reliable scene and setting of hospitality. There is no hospitality in

5 The Hospitality of Listening: from: Phenomenologies of the Stranger: Between Hostility and Hospitality
Author(s) MACKENDRICK KARMEN
Abstract: Among the most promising-seeming possibilities for an ethics linked to theology—always a risky proposition—is that of regarding the world as sacramental. A sacramental sensibility seems, potentially at least, a way to a valuing of some aspects of the world, but not a way particularly welcoming of the strange or the stranger. But fundamental to such a sensibility, I want to argue here, is a discipline of attention, of a carefully open listening, and such an attentiveness in fact requires that we listen to what we do not already understand, what sounds in our ears and appears to our

11 The Uncanny Strangeness of Maternal Election: from: Phenomenologies of the Stranger: Between Hostility and Hospitality
Author(s) OLIVER KELLY
Abstract: In his essay “The Uncanny,” Sigmund Freud describes the uncanny as what is concealed and frightening in the familiar and agreeable or vice versa.¹ He moves from discussing animated dolls, the Sandman’s fear of losing his eyes as castration anxiety, doubles and mirrors, fear of death, dear of the dark, to the mother’s body. In general, he attributes uncanny sensations to castration anxiety (whether from seeing the mother’s “castrated sex” or as symbolically represented by pecked out eyes) and the return, or repetition, of repressed childhood fears or desires.² Specifically, he links the uncanny to the reanimation of that which

SIX PRAGMATIC IMAGINATION from: The Human Eros: Eco-ontology and the Aesthetics of Existence
Abstract: Pragmatism originated as a movement that sought to clarify meaning in terms of action. We recall the phrasing of Peirce’s famous maxim: “Consider what effects, that might conceivably have practical bearings, we conceive the object of our conception to have. Then, our conception of these effects is the whole of our conception of the object.”¹ The effort to clarify this maxim might be said to constitute the subsequent history of pragmatism. Whereas there was a tendency in pragmatism to interpret consequentialism in a positivistic sense, it was systematically avoided by its main developers, Peirce, James, Mead, and Dewey, because they

NINE ʺLOVE CALLS US TO THINGS OF THIS WORLDʺ: from: The Human Eros: Eco-ontology and the Aesthetics of Existence
Abstract: One of the most fascinating and totally unproductive exchanges between two major American philosophers commenced with Santayana’s review of Dewey’s Experience and Natureand Dewey’s rather testy rejoinder, “Half-Hearted Naturalism.” Santayana’s review was perversely insightful, highlighting in Dewey’s metaphysics just about everything Santayana detested about America: pragmatism, metaphysics, idealism, romanticism, optimism, the busy foolishness of industrial democracy, naivete. Dewey’s outlook was irredeemably “boyish” and “near-sighted,” focusing on the human foreground rather than upon nature, which herself had no foreground or background. Dewey’s “naturalism” was tainted with the loathsome bacillus of idealism; it lacked a discipline of spirit in which nature’s

FOURTEEN BEAUTY AND THE LABYRINTH OF EVIL: from: The Human Eros: Eco-ontology and the Aesthetics of Existence
Abstract: Among the thinkers of the past century who offer themselves to the future for its reflection, Santayana must stand out as a singular figure, one whose thought is dedicated to the overarching possibility of the spiritual life undertaken without religious faith or metaphysical dogma. Among the throngs that fill the philosophical bestiary of the twentieth century, Santayana may be the one genuine contemplative of note. The majority of doctrines dominant in the century have been directed either toward the goal of action (Marxism, pragmatism, existentialism) or the problem of knowledge, truth, and meaning (pragmaticism, positivism, analytic philosophy, phenomenology). Genuinely contemplative

SIXTEEN EROS AND SPIRIT: from: The Human Eros: Eco-ontology and the Aesthetics of Existence
Abstract: “Philosophy and Civilization” is one of Dewey’s most important—and most neglected—essays. It is unsettling to anyone who wants to think of Dewey primarily as a “pragmatist,” since Dewey says the aim of philosophy should be to deal with the meaning of culture and not “inquiry” or “truth.” He says, “Meaning is wider in scope as well as more precious in value than is truthm and philosophy is occupied with meaning rather than with truth” (LW, 3:4). Truths are one kind of meaning, but they are only an “island” lying in “the ocean of meanings to which truth and

CHAPTER TWO Annoying Bagatelles: from: Malicious Objects, Anger Management, and the Question of Modern Literature
Abstract: I therefore often wished, like one of my predecessors, to get me a leather jerkin made, and to accustom myself to write in the dark, so as to be able to fix down at once all such unpremeditated effusions. So frequently had it happened, that, after composing a little piece in my head, I could not recall it, that I would now hurry to the desk, and, at one standing, write off the poem from

CHAPTER FOUR Igniting Anger: from: Malicious Objects, Anger Management, and the Question of Modern Literature
Abstract: Heimito von Doderer’s 1962 novel The Merowingians or The Total Family (Die Merowinger oder die totale Familie)begins with a scene in the clinical practice of the psychiatrist Professor Dr. Horn. The patient, Dr. Bachmeyer, describes his ailment: “Rage, Professor. I suffer heavy attacks of rage that are terribly strenuous for me and extremely exhaust me.”¹ Dr. Bachmeyer experiences rage as an exhausting disease that disrupts his psychological as well as physiological health and for this reason seeks treatment in Dr. Horn’s “Neurological and Psychiatrical Clinic” (13). Rage constitutes a pathological deviance from the norm that requires clinical treatment, since

Introduction from: Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Statler Matthew
Abstract: Styles of Pietyexplores questions of value in light of the problem of nihilism articulated in Nietzsche’s pronouncement of the death of God. With the accomplishment of a thoroughly rationalized world, the categories that had promised to give meaning to experience proved untenable. The problem of the irrational appeared to be immanent to reason rather than merely an aberration from its proper functions, the aspirations of philosophy appeared to be inherently contradictory, and its ideals seemed to harbor coercive deceptions and tyrannies. Nevertheless, philosophers since Nietzsche have continued to pursue questions of value; indeed, they have found new avenues to

3 Suffering Faith in Philosophy from: Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Buckner S. Clark
Abstract: Since the publication of Heidegger’s Being and Time, with its appeal to explicitly religious categories, phenomenology and post-phenomenological thought has repeatedly demonstrated a distinctly religious dimension. In the United States, this religious dimension to phenomenology recently has been celebrated by leading scholars such as John Caputo and Edith Wyschogrod, while, in Germany, it has been recognized by defenders and critics of phenomenology alike since the 1920s. And in France virtually every leading post-phenomenological thinker, from Paul Ricoeur and Jean-Luc Marion to Emmanuel Levinas and Jacques Derrida, has taken up and explored this dimension to phenomenology. In the work of these

5 Morality without God from: Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Scott Charles E.
Abstract: I would like to address the issues of this discussion by presenting three options. One is clearly theistic, one figures a loss of faith, and one arises outside of a sense of divine presence or of loss of divine presence. I use the word addressin order to indicate that I do not have a final judgment to make regarding the advantages of one option over the others, although I find myself oriented by the third. My purposes are broadly descriptive and intended to indicate three kinds of attitude, three affective awarenesses, each exclusive of the other two and each

14 Laughing, Praying, Weeping before God: from: Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Caputo John D.
Abstract: I work my way through things by writing. So, whenever I read what others have written about my work, whenever what I have written is read back to me by others—never, of course, without a gloss—it is as if the inert pages of books and journals have come to life and begun to talk back to me (and sometimes even to bite back). It is as if something that is structurally private, written in solitude, my most secret thoughts, meant only for me and God—like Augustine confessing to God in writing, “ cur confitemur deo scienti,” (Why do

CHAPTER 4 Transformation: from: The Tears of Sovereignty: Perspectives of Power in Renaissance Drama
Abstract: Calderón de la Barca’s Life Is a Dream(La vida es Sueño) (1635) has been described as the “ultimate work of theatrical theology.”¹ Considered one of the most philosophically complex works of the early modern period,Life Is a Dreamnot only raises theological and political questions of power, but it also poses epistemological and ontological challenges to thought, particularly in relation to the increasingly sophisticated representational capacities of baroque theater. Like Suárez, in Jean-François Courtine’s account, and against a long-standing tradition that views the Jesuit playwright as a bastion of Spanish conservatism, Calderón, too, could be viewed as a

Book Title: Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Mieszkowski Jan
Abstract: This book is a major new study of the doctrines of productivity and interest in Romanticism and classical political economy. The author argues that the widespread contemporary embrace of cultural historicism and the rejection of nineteenth-century conceptions of agency have hindered our study of aesthetics and politics. Focusing on the difficulty of coordinating paradigms of intellectual and material labor, Mieszkowski shows that the relationship between the imagination and practical reason is crucial to debates about language and ideology.From the Romantics to Poe and Kafka, writers who explore Kant's claim that poetry sets the imagination freediscover that the representational and performative powers of language cannot be explained as the products of a self-governing dynamic, whether formal or material. A discourse that neither reflects nor prescribes the values of its society, literature proves to be a uniquely autonomous praxis because it undermines our reliance on the concept of interest as the foundation of self-expression or self-determination. Far from compromising its political significance, this turns literature into the condition of possibility of freedom. For Smith, Bentham, and Marx, the limits of self-rule as a model of agency prompt a similar rethinking of the relationship between language and politics. Their conception of a linguistic labor that informs material praxis is incompatible with the liberal ideal of individualism. In the final analysis, their work invites us to think about social conflicts not as clashes between competing interests, but as a struggle to distinguish human from linguistic imperatives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0d6g

ONE The Art of Interest from: Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser
Abstract: Throughout his oeuvre, Kant focuses on the uncertain relations between universal principles and singular events that threaten to confound the elaboration of a comprehensive model of the mind. One of the central concepts in his account of the (dis)equilibrium of the self is interest, a term that appears at crucial moments in the three Critiques, but whose very ubiquity has tended to divert attention from its importance. “All my reason’s interest (speculative as well as practical),” explains Kant in theCritique of Pure Reason, “is united in the following three questions: What can I know? What ought I to do?

FOUR Economics Beyond Interest from: Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser
Abstract: The last fifteen years have seen an explosion of interest in Adam Smith. In addition to the fact that the success of capitalism is often celebrated in his name, his oeuvre is increasingly heralded as the key to understanding the relations between politics, aesthetics, and economics in the eighteenth century. As research on Smith has moved beyond The Wealth of NationsandThe Theory of Moral Sentimentsto include his writings on jurisprudence, belles lettres, and even astronomy, it is often suggested that his work is a unique example of an interdisciplinary thought attentive to the demands of both metaphysics

FIVE Ideology, Obviously from: Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser
Abstract: What Paul Ricoeur called the “hermeneutics of suspicion” has become the sine qua non of literary and cultural studies. Whether one thinks in terms of an unconscious, a superstructure, or a subtext, the analysis of intellectual and social phenomena begins from the assumption that things may not be what they seem, even where our most tangible intuitions and deeply held beliefs are concerned. From a methodological perspective, this has led to the emergence of what we might call “an archaeology of the presupposition.” An argument demonstrates its rigor by rendering its own aims and procedures as explicit and transparent as

Book Title: Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Anderson Judith H.
Abstract: Judith H. Anderson conceives the intertext as a relation between or among texts that encompasses both Kristevan intertextuality and traditional relationships of influence, imitation, allusion, and citation. Like the Internet, the intertext is a state, or place, of potential expressed in ways ranging from deliberate emulation to linguistic free play. Relatedly, the intertext is also a convenient fiction that enables examination of individual agency and sociocultural determinism. Anderson's intertext is allegorical because Spenser's Faerie Queene is pivotal to her study and because allegory, understood as continued or moving metaphor, encapsulates, even as it magnifies, the process of signification. Her title signals the variousness of an intertext extending from Chaucer through Shakespeare to Milton and the breadth of allegory itself. Literary allegory, in Anderson's view, is at once a mimetic form and a psychic one-a process thinking that combines mind with matter, emblem with narrative, abstraction with history. Anderson's first section focuses on relations between Chaucer's Canterbury Tales and Spenser's The Faerie Queene, including the role of the narrator, the nature of the textual source, the dynamics of influence, and the bearing of allegorical narrative on lyric vision. The second centers on agency and cultural influence in a variety of Spenserian and medieval texts. Allegorical form, a recurrent concern throughout, becomes the pressing issue of section three. This section treats plays and poems of Shakespeare and Milton and includes two intertextually relevant essays on Spenser.How Paradise Lost or Shakespeare's plays participate in allegorical form is controversial. Spenser's experiments with allegory revise its form, and this intervention is largely what Shakespeare and Milton find in his poetry and develop. Anderson's book, the result of decades of teaching and writing about allegory, especially Spenserian allegory, will reorient thinking about fundamental critical issues and the landmark texts in which they play themselves out.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0d91

1. Chaucer’s and Spenser’s Reflexive Narrators from: Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton
Abstract: Reports of the “death of the author” in the closing decades of the twentieth century nowadays appear to have been greatly exaggerated. His (sometimes her) presumed demise, to be sure, was strategically useful, not merely in renewing the formalist critique of the intentional fallacy, but also in laying to rest the naive assumption of a unified, autonomous self essentially apart from history and in full control of the unconscious. Arguably, however, it was also misleading and even dangerous, since it tended to trivialize agency, accountability, and any responsibility to history that really matters. In its stead, I have preferred to

9. Chaucer’s Parliament of Fowls and Refractions of a Veiled Venus in The Faerie Queene from: Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton
Abstract: The lack of weight most criticism has accorded the relationship between The Faerie Queeneand Chaucer’sParliament of Fowlsis surprising: for Spenser, Chaucer was a poet of love, an acknowledged poetic model who “well couth … wayle hys woes,” and theParliamentis Chaucer’s formative consideration of the various kinds of love.¹ Recurrently, from the initial canto of Book I through the Mutability Cantos,The Faerie Queenerecalls Chaucer’s poem. TheParliamentis a text that bears unmistakably, crucially, and complexly on the Spenserian conception of eros and on the broader question of the Renaissance poet’s use of the

11. Better a mischief than an inconvenience: from: Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton
Abstract: This saying, whose glossing

13. Venus and Adonis: from: Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton
Abstract: In Shakespeare’s Venus and Adonis, the switch from Venus as manhandler to Venus as the pathetic—some would say tragic—mourner over the body of dead Adonis has always been problematical. Although passion and grief are twinned conditions of want(ing), the shift in this poem from an aggressive, comic mode to a helpless, pathetic one proves larger than life and challenges credible mimesis and, otherwise put, human credibility. Or perhaps I should say balanced human credibility, since Venus’ behavior makes sense as an obsessive fixation transferred from hunger to loss. Yes, Venus is a goddess and a figure of myth

18. “Real or Allegoric” in Herbert and Milton: from: Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton
Abstract: In the fourth Book of Paradise Regained, Satan tempts the Son with the intellectual splendors of ancient Greece, and these having been rejected, asks him in scornful frustration, “What dost thou in this World?”: what connects you to history and humanity? Satan adds that his reading of heaven portends a kingdom for the Son, “but what Kingdom, / Real or Allegoric I discern not.” With an irony approaching sarcasm, he goes on to say that he fails to see when the Son’s kingdom will ever be at hand, since it is “eternal sure, as without end, / Without beginning.”¹ By

Introduction from: Written Voices, Spoken Signs
Author(s) KAHANE AHUVIA
Abstract: At the heart of Parry’s original thesis was the notion of “formula,”² a term that has since been modified, extended, reapplied, reused, and rejected.³ Although disagreement among scholars

CHAPTER 2 Writing the Emperor’s Clothes On: from: Written Voices, Spoken Signs
Author(s) BÄUML FRANZ H.
Abstract: I shall propose the hypothesis that the development of literacy in the Middle Ages went hand in hand with the growing belief in the existence of “facts” as independent entities. Moreover, I shall maintain that this notion of “facts” is dependent on literacy and cannot arise in an oral culture, and I shall argue this using examples from medieval sources. Though I do not necessarily subscribe to a theory of two different “mentalities,” one “oral” and one “literate,” I do contend that the tools with which one thinks affect one’s thinking, that the way in which one thinks has its

CHAPTER 4 The Inland Ship: from: Written Voices, Spoken Signs
Abstract: The time seems to be passing when the Parry-Lord theory that Homer’s epics were composed in oral performances was thought to be incompatible with the high artistic quality of our Iliadand Odyssey. Recent studies of oral formulaic language, as represented elsewhere in this volume, have shown it to be capable of many subtly expressive effects and structural patternings.¹ But if we are approaching a time when it will make little difference whether the Homeric poems were composed orally or not (Martin 1989: 1), another, and older, question becomes more pressing: how could such large-scale poems as the Homeric epics

CHAPTER 5 Hexameter Progression and the Homeric Hero’s Solitary State from: Written Voices, Spoken Signs
Author(s) KAHANE AHUVIA
Abstract: The poetry of Homer as we have it today is a highly textualizedverbal artifact. In other words, we come into immediate contact with theIliadandOdysseyas fixed sets of graphic symbols that are independent of any particular performance event, rather than as time-bound sequences of sounds that are unique to their performance context. Many aspects of thistextare indeed unchanging regardless of whether we speak out, or hear the poems, or read them silently. At the same time, we are increasingly aware of what we might call thenontextualaspects of Homer, that is, of the

CHAPTER 6 Similes and Performance from: Written Voices, Spoken Signs
Author(s) MARTIN RICHARD P.
Abstract: The linguist Michel Bréal, better known as a semanticist than Homerist, had been a teacher of Antoine Meillet, the great comparatist who succeeded him in the chair in comparative grammar of the Collège de France.¹ Bréal’s little book Pour mieux connaître Homèreis actually cited once by Meillet’s student Milman Parry inL’Épithète traditionnelle,to the effect that the fixed epithet provides not only a rest to the singer but also a pause for the audience.² It is not his view on the formula, however, that seems to me an appropriate introduction to this paper, but rather Bréal’s remarks on

Book Title: Drawing New Color Lines-Transnational Asian American Graphic Narratives
Publisher: Hong Kong University Press, HKU
Author(s): Chiu Monica
Abstract: The global circulation of comics, manga, and other such visual mediums between North America and Asia produces transnational meanings no longer rooted in a separation between “Asian” and “American.” Drawing New Color Lines explores the culture, production, and history of contemporary graphic narratives that depict Asian Americans and Asians. It examines how Japanese manga and Asian popular culture have influenced Asian American comics; how these comics and Asian American graphic narratives depict the “look” of race; and how these various representations are interpreted in nations not of their production. By focusing on what graphic narratives mean for audiences in North America and those in Asia, the collection discusses how Western theories about the ways in which graphic narratives might successfully overturn derogatory caricatures are themselves based on contested assumptions; and illustrates that the so-called odorless images featured in Japanese manga might nevertheless elicit interpretations about race in transnational contexts. With contributions from experts based in North America and Asia, Drawing New Color Lines will be of interest to scholars in a variety of disciplines, including Asian American studies, cultural and literary studies, comics and visual studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0mh1

3 The Model Minority between Medical School and Nintendo: from: Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Dong Lan
Abstract: At the beginning of the new millennium, Soo-Young Chin, Peter X. Feng, and Josephine Lee discussed the increasing visibility of Asian American culture both inside and outside academia and consequently the growing complexity required to understand and assess Asian American cultural production. They raised key questions about what characterizes Asian American cultural production and how we understand, experience, and analyze Asian American culture (270). As Chin, Feng, and Lee have broadly defined it, the term “cultural production” refers to “processes by which certain subjects (Asian Americans and others) produce material objects, actions, and interactions; it pertains to the interpretation of

6 “Maybe It’s Time for a Little History Lesson Here”: from: Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Ford Stacilee
Abstract: Over the past several years many undergraduate students have come to rely more readily on various graphic narrative-type representations of history. The “cartoonification” of multiple interpretations of the past has become a way for them to distill large amounts of information into “chewable bites” as well as to help them remember facts and ideas that they might forget without a visual reminder of meanings. Texts ranging from America: A Cartoon History,Addicted to War: Why the U.S. Can’t Kick Militarism, andUnderstanding Postfeminism(and a host of general histories focusing on various events and time periods) are used not only

11 The “Japaneseness” of OEL Manga: from: Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Acosta Angela Moreno
Abstract: Japanese manga¹ have been well received outside of Japan, especially among young people, some of whom aspire to be manga artists using “manga style” in their comics. In North America, these comics are called “OEL” (original English language) manga. Many OEL manga artists voice a fascination with “Japan,” which, upon closer inspection, is mostly equated with manga conventions of graphic storytelling. This refers, first and foremost, to the deployment of a highly codified mode of expression which favors a shared “visual language”¹ over idiosyncratic style and narration. It also entails an enormous variety of page layouts, the inclusion of speed

Book Title: Unsung Voices: Opera and Musical Narrative in the Nineteenth Century- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Abbate Carolyn
Abstract: Who "speaks" to us in The Sorcerer's Apprentice,in Wagner's operas, in a Mahler symphony? In asking this question, Carolyn Abbate opens nineteenth-century operas and instrumental works to new interpretations as she explores the voices projected by music. The nineteenth-century metaphor of music that "sings" is thus reanimated in a new context, and Abbate proposes interpretive strategies that "de-center" music criticism, that seek the polyphony and dialogism of music, and that celebrate musical gestures often marginalized by conventional music analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0rk0

Chapter Two WHAT THE SORCERER SAID from: Unsung Voices: Opera and Musical Narrative in the Nineteenth Century
Abstract: Paul Dukas’s symphonic scherzo L’apprenti sorcier(The Sorcerer’s Apprentice, 1893) is an eventful work—so lively, in fact, that it rattles the cage constructed of assumptions about musical narration. I shall argue thatThe Sorcerer’s Apprenticeallows a single instance of narrating. As a way into an interpretation of that sound, however, we should remember another moment, a strange passage at the midpoint of the piece, at which its entire musical progress comes to a full stop. There is a silence, and the piece begins to regenerate itself, by repeating again and again, far too many times, first a note,

Chapter Four MAHLER’S DEAFNESS: from: Unsung Voices: Opera and Musical Narrative in the Nineteenth Century
Abstract: In opera, the characters pacing the stage often suffer from deafness; they do not hearthe music that is the ambient fluid of their music-drowned world. This is one of the genre’s most fundamental illusions: we see before us something whose fantastic aspect is obvious, since the scenes we witness pass to music. At the same time, however, opera stages recognizably human situations, and these possess an inherent “realism” that demands a special and complex understanding of the music we hear. We must generally assume, in short, that this music is not produced by or within the stage-world, but emanates

Chapter Five WOTAN’S MONOLOGUE AND THE MORALITY OF MUSICAL NARRATION from: Unsung Voices: Opera and Musical Narrative in the Nineteenth Century
Abstract: Human narrators come in many forms. Some are completely reliable: most epic narrators speak with detachment, and thus with authority. They elicit trust. But human narrators may also be revealed as immoral by giving tongue to lies, by speaking themselves buffoons, unreliable, or dubious. Then their stories will ring false, for while we may notknowthat the story is a lie, something about its presentation betrays its teller. When narration is allied to music, sensing truth demands doubly acute ears. Strauss’s Clytaemnestra says, “was die wahrheit ist, das dringt kein mensch heraus” [“what is true, what is untrue, no

Chapter Six BRÜNNHILDE WALKS BY NIGHT from: Unsung Voices: Opera and Musical Narrative in the Nineteenth Century
Abstract: Laughter first: legend tells us that Brünnhilde laughed in exultation upon witnessing (or, in some versions, upon hearing of) the death of Siegfried. Brünnhilde’s laughter recurs in most of the sources for her story; in the three versions of the Eddie Sigurd poems, one source ( Sigurdarkviða in forna, theOld Lay of Sigurd) tells how Brünnhilde “triumphs” at the news of Sigurd’s [Siegfried’s] death; another (Sigurdarkviða in skamma, theShort Lay of Sigurd) tells how she “laughed when she hears Gutrune’s shrill laments”; the GermanThidreks saga

Book Title: Edgar Allen Poe: A Phenomenological View- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): HALLIBURTON DAVID
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1373

Book Title: Karl Jaspers: An Introduction to His Philosophy- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): WALLRAFF CHARLES FREDERIC
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x16m7

chapter seven How Ought We to Live? from: Karl Jaspers: An Introduction to His Philosophy
Abstract: Whatever else we may know, there is no knowing how to live. Useful as science may be in connection with means, it offers little help with our choice of ends. The laws and customs of each nation provide a framework within which men can accomplish their purposes, but this framework is always subject to correction in the name of some higher principle, be it civil rights, the demands of conscience, the divine law, or what not. Advisers are generally available, but those capable of choosing wise advisers have little use for advice, while those who need advice have no way

Book Title: Dostoevsky and the Novel- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Holquist Michael
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x17k6

Chapter 1 The Problem: from: Dostoevsky and the Novel
Abstract: Russia is always being discovered, or at least since the sixteenth century, when disputes arose in Europe as to whether von Herberstein or Sir Richard Chancellor could claim the honor of what Hakluyt was to call “the strange and wonderful discovery of Russia.” For Milton in the seventeenth century and Voltaire in the eighteenth, Russia was still resistant to symmetrical English or French models of time and space, linear history, and binary (occident/orient) geography. One of the reasons Westerners still find it difficult to classify Russia is that the Russians themselves have never been quite sure where and when they

Book Title: New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wilson David Henry
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x18wb

Fiction—The Filter of History: from: New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) ISER WOLFGANG
Abstract: In the “General Preface” to the Waverley Novels,Scott reflects on his own situation as narrator. He tries to clarify his intentions, which—unlike those of earlier novelists—are no longer concerned with expounding moral norms. Instead, he takes as his guide his own personal development, as he seeks to explain the curious innovation of history as the subject of fiction. His starting point, he says, is as follows: “I had nourished the ambitious desire of composing a tale of chivalry, which was to be in the style of theCastle of Otranto, with plenty of Border characters and supernatural

Chance as Motivation for the Unexplained in Historical Writing: from: New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) KOSELLECK REINHART
Abstract: The main difficulty in discussing chance in historiography is the fact that this subject has its own history, which as yet is unwritten. It is certainly impossible to discuss the role of chance in any given situation without first taking into account the whole terminology of the historian concerned. One needs to ask what is the opposite term that will exclude chance, or what is the overall term that makes it relative. Raymond Aron, for instance, begins his introduction to the philosophy of history with the antithesis, based on Cournot, between “ ordre” and “hasard”; he concludes: “Le fait historique est,

On the Importance of the Theory of the Unconscious for a Theory of No Longer Fine Art from: New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) MARQUARD ODO
Abstract: 1. The following is an obituary to the living: Art, says Hegel in his lecture on esthetics, is “nach der Seite ihrer hochsten Bestimmung fur uns ein Vergangenes” (on the side of its highest definition something past for us).¹ Perhaps Hegel was right; if so, then the time is ripe—indeed, overripe—for acceptance of the thesis that art and its theory, known since 1750 as “esthetics,” from now on has no place in philosophy. “Nach der Seite ihrer hochsten Bestimmung,” esthetics are a thing of the past. Undoubtedly—even from an unHegelian point of view—Hegel was right: for

Patterns of Communication in Joyce’s Ulysses from: New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) ISER WOLFGANG
Abstract: Joyce called his novel Ulyssesafter Homer’s hero, though the latter never appears in the book. Instead Joyce deals with eighteen different aspects of a single day in Dublin, mainly following the involvement of two characters—Leopold Bloom and Stephen Dedalus—in events that take place between early morning and late at night. What, then, is the connection between theOdysseyand June 16th, 1904? Most answers to this question try to join these two poles of the novel through the “tried and tested” ideas of the recurrence of archetypes, or the analogy between the ideal and the real.¹ In

Book Title: Interpreting Modern Philosophy- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): COLLINS JAMES DANIEL
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1c90

I The Historical Turn in Contemporary Philosophy from: Interpreting Modern Philosophy
Abstract: In every creative field, but perhaps especially in philosophy, we tend to use the term “contemporary” not only in a eulogistic way but also as expressing our relief at escaping the burden of the past. The term often conveys the sense of crossing a territorial border and cutting off a bridge behind ourselves, a bridge that would have permitted the great dead philosophers to count for too much in our present inquiries. We sometimes feel that their presence would be overbearing and would inhibit our own efforts at innovation and argument. Not a historical sense of perspective but a liberation

III The Art of Historical Questioning from: Interpreting Modern Philosophy
Abstract: Anyone working in a historical discipline experiences within himself, at certain times, a sympathetic reverberation of Stephen Dedalus’s cry that history is a nightmare from which he must awake. This feeling of suffocation steals over the philosopher when he attends to the long tradition of texts and studies in his field. Then, the history of philosophy seems to be an externally imposed and pressing structure, controlled entirely by lines of investigation laid out in the far distant past and extending into one’s present activity only in order to cramp and discourage the creative mind. This is indeed a nightmarish view

Book Title: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Banta Martha
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1dm4

INTRODUCTION from: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: This book examines the still-continuing debate over the nature of winning and losing in the American context—what it feels like for an American to succeed or to fail in a country which is often defined in terms of its own success or failure as an idea and as an experience. There is little chance of coming to a triumphant halt before the definitive answer to such issues. The many arguments given breathing space here will not settle matters; rather, they will serve to complicate, not to simplify, and to extend the debate past the last page, not to cut

CHAPTER 2 The Sum Total of Possibility from: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: We turn from William James’s halo that eradiates and enriches—and confusingly complicates—objects by extending them far beyond their original compact, utilitarian, readily comprehensible core. Now to hear from Josiah Royce, contemporary and philosophical adversary of James. In his 1897 work, The Conception of God, Royce set down his position as neo-absolutist and idealist (the stance James rebuked with friendly lack of rancor when he told Royce, “Damn the Absolute!” and smiled as he said it, the two men facing one another, astraddle a fence in a famous photograph). Listen to Royce’s actual words before his phrases and James’s

CHAPTER 5 America as the Woman Who Waits from: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: We have learned our lessons of cynicism well in the American school for success; our teachers have been good ones. The business of America is “well-being” (Tocqueville).Money-grabbing and getting ahead is the characteristic trait of the American (Frances Trollope). A man realizes he is a failure the day he sees he is incapable of commanding five dollars on the job market(Henry Adams).Although warned that America is not thePays de Cocagneand its streets not paved with wheaten loaves(Franklin),men still devour the ground out from under their own feet(just about everyone).

CHAPTER 6 America as Wonder from: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: It is with a start, the heart’s lurch of sudden discovery, that the three young men in Faulkner’s stories cited in the last chaper first gaze upon the females who are to shape their imaginative life. Although he has known her since childhood, Ikkemotubbe still has the experience of suddenlyseeing Herman Basket’s sister. The young lieutenant, flung by battle down the street of Jefferson, glances quickly across at the jail and just as suddenly glimpses the lodestar that will pull him back through the currents of war. Labove feels the cold touch of fate as he looks up to

CHAPTER 11 “Presence” and “Pittsburgh” from: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: If it is difficult enough to succeed; it is even more difficult to know what success is and what it means, truly, to fail. Yet however much the writers to whom we are listening realized that the worlds of words they create are unlike the object-hard universe they live in, they continued to attempt to define “winning” and “losing” as active terms in the immediate reality.

CHAPTER 13 In The Nick and Out of It from: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: Henry James grew up (as he put it in Small Boy,p. 4g), knowing there were three kinds of adult you could become in America: the tipsy, the businessman, or Daniel Webster. Henry and William—the two of their family most put on the line—had lost all business sense (at least in the way of

CHAPTER 14 Fate, Will, and the Illusion of Freedom from: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: Henry Adams would not rest until he went back behind all events to learn their purpose. In their day Emerson and Thoreau had less urgency to know why since they believed that through strong character and will men could

CHAPTER 16 Bottom Being from: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: The man of character cannot fail at anything he does since he has chosen to fulfill his natural birthright of joy. “I am Defeatedall the time,” Emerson assures himself in his journal of 1842, “yet to Victory I am born” (VIII, 228). Life is a battle that mankind is meant to win, Thoreau writes on March 21, 1853. “Despair and postponement are cowardice and defeat. Men were born to succeed, not to fail.” Of course, various moods may run through the same man, as Thoreau notes on November 4, 1851. He may contain “dark and muddy pools,” but higher

CHAPTER 18 Guilt, Shame, and Laughter from: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: In Hawthorne’s The Marble FaunHilda trembles at the threat she feels when it is suggested that original sin might be the useful means to a higher joy. She is frightened to have it said that we may need to murder before we can move on to a finer destiny. Particularly frightening to Hilda, and to us, is the hint that it is God’s will that we commit our sins. Shamed over our required dependence upon God and guilty over what He demands us to do, we may need to defy God altogether, as Frederick J. Hoffman argues inThe

CHAPTER 20 Eyeless in Hate; Killing in Style from: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: To keep for a while to questions of strain and relaxation: melodramas are built upon tensions, broken only when evil is destroyed and virtue is released from enslavement. The life of humor, however relaxed in many of its manners, also undergoes its tensions before it can fully succeed. The only guaranteed way out of strain of whatever kind is to run from it. Escape suggests an end to failure, since it tries to avoid those conditions wherein failure may be encountered. American writing provides a fine array of materials for manuals on escape-techniques: escape into nature, into emotional detachment and

CHAPTER 21 Some Versions of Melodrama from: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: In a world where justice appears to be the most one can ask for, there is no room for forgiveness and much space for the particular cruelties practiced in the name of the war against wickedness. Significantly, those who stress justice often turn it most harshly upon themselves. According to Paul Ricoeur in The Symbolism of Evil,to trace the history of men’s reactions to sin helps us to distinguish the stages through which mankind has moved in its reactions to the world. In the earliest stage, the force that punished the guilty lay outside men. Once conscience became consciousness,

CHAPTER 28 Going Up and Coming Down from: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: Edgar Allan Poe’s Eurekaof 1848 fulfilled the dearest wishes of its author’s gothic soul by cleansing the universe of all matter (that basic fact of human failure) through the return to the purity of the primal Thought. The result is an apocalypse with a happy ending—for the Poe-narrator at least, if not for the rest of us—since consciousness ends where it began: with itself alone, and all because God’s plan has been carried through without a flaw.

Book Title: Value and Values-Economics and Justice in an Age of Global Interdependence
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Hershock Peter D.
Abstract: The most pressing issues of the twenty-first century-climate change and persistent hunger in a world of food surpluses, to name only two-are not problems that can be solved from within individual disciplines, nation-states, or cultural perspectives. They are predicaments that can only be resolved by generating sustained and globally robust coordination across value systems. The scale of the problems and necessity for coordinated global solutions signal a world historical transit as momentous as the Industrial Revolution: a transition from the predominance of technical knowledge to that of ethical deliberation. This volume brings together leading thinkers from around the world to deliberate on how best to correlate worth (value) with what is worthwhile (values), pairing human prosperity with personal, environmental, and spiritual flourishing in a world of differing visions of what constitutes a moral life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1k8c

3 Triple Negation: from: Value and Values
Author(s) McRae James
Abstract: Environmental security is a branch of environmental studies that explores how national security issues are affected by ecosystem sustainability and the demands placed on the natural world by human populations. The pursuit of consumer interests can often place stress on the environment, which can lead to a collapse of both ecosystems and economies, which in turn promotes political instability. For this reason, the fields of environmental ethics, business ethics, and international relations are ultimately intertwined. This essay draws from the philosophical anthropology of Watsuji Tetsurō’s Fūdoto explain why human culture, economics, and the politics of warfare are so intimately

7 Filial Piety and the Traditional Chinese Rural Community: from: Value and Values
Author(s) Di Xu
Abstract: Developments in science, medicine, technology, and national economies have rapidly resulted in aging societies in both developed and developing countries around the world. The increasingly large number of elderly people has caused various problems to the political and economic systems of societies, including family structure, ethical relationships, lifestyles, and values, as well as to the emotional state of their members. Neither the spontaneous capitalistic market nor a state welfare system can easily resolve these issues. In a modern market economy ruled by the logic of capital and profit, elderly people, who, usually unemployed, are considered mere consumers, thus present a

11 Economies of Scarcity and Acquisition, Economies of Gift and Thanksgiving: from: Value and Values
Author(s) Stikkers Kenneth W.
Abstract: Contemporary cultural anthropologists largely consider the debate over “human nature” a red herring. Humans have no simple, single “nature” but from infancy exhibit complex,

21 Economic Growth, Human Well-Being, and the Environment from: Value and Values
Author(s) Kelbessa Workineh
Abstract: The cleavage between developed and developing countries in contemporary discourse is misleading. In today’s world, the older, modern terms of “North and South,” “West and East,” “First World and Third World,” “developed and underdeveloped,” seem intrinsically obsolete. The current context of increasing differentiation between countries encapsulated under these terms, the virtual disappearance of the so-called Second World, and problematic modernist connotations of such terms make their use questionable. The limitations notwithstanding, I will use them interchangeably throughout this chapter for lack of better terms. Their continued use, it has been argued, encourages a rethinking of patterns of inequality and power

25 What Is the Value of Poverty? from: Value and Values
Author(s) Bein Steve
Abstract: Dōgen and Aristotle appear to stand in diametrical opposition to each other on the value of poverty. Dōgen repeatedly admonishes monks and nuns to be poor and advises laypeople that even they would be better off if they gave up all their worldly possessions. Aristotle, on the other hand, famously describes poverty as “the parent of revolution and crime.”¹ This marked divergence is noteworthy not because we should expect Dōgen and Aristotle to march in lockstep together but because Aristotelian philosophy and Buddhist philosophy both advocate finding a middle path between extremes. Thus, it is surprising to find two thinkers

Book Title: Gender and Nation in Meiji Japan-Modernity, Loss, and the Doing of History
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Karlin Jason G.
Abstract: Gender and Nation in Meiji Japan is a historical analysis of the discourses of nostalgia in late nineteenth- and early twentieth-century Japan. Through an analysis of the experience of rapid social change in Japan’s modernization, it argues that fads (ryūkō) and the desires they express are central to understanding Japanese modernity, conceptions of gender, and discourses of nationalism. In doing so, the author uncovers the myth of eternal return that lurks below the surface of Japanese history as an expression of the desire to find meaning amid the chaos and alienation of modern times. The Meiji period (1868–1912) was one of rapid change that hastened the process of forgetting: The state’s aggressive program of modernization required the repression of history and memory. However, repression merely produced new forms of desire seeking a return to the past, with the result that competing or alternative conceptions of the nation haunted the history of modern Japan. Rooted in the belief that the nation was a natural and organic entity that predated the rational, modern state, such conceptions often were responses to modernity that envisioned the nation in opposition to the modern state. What these visions of the nation shared was the ironic desire to overcome the modern condition by seeking the timeless past. While the condition of their repression was often linked to the modernizing policies of the Meiji state, the means for imagining the nation in opposition to the state required the construction of new symbols that claimed the authority of history and appealed to a rearticulated tradition. Through the idiom of gender and nation, new reified representations of continuity, timelessness, and history were fashioned to compensate for the unmooring of inherited practices from the shared locales of everyday life. This book examines the intellectual, social, and cultural factors that contributed to the rapid spread of Western tastes and styles, along with the backlash against Westernization that was expressed as a longing for the past. By focusing on the expressions of these desires in popular culture and media texts, it reveals how the conflation of mother, countryside, everyday life, and history structured representations to naturalize ideologies of gender and nationalism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1k9w

CHAPTER 4 The Lure of the Modern: from: Gender and Nation in Meiji Japan
Abstract: As new social practices were introduced into Japan during the early Meiji period, they disseminated unevenly from the cities to the countryside. While Western fashions were adopted initially among the elite, who had ties to the government and who were concerned about promoting Japan’s image as a civilized nation, they soon spread to members of the middle class, who embraced Westernization as a means of social mobility and distinction. The high cost of Western fashions limited their widespread appeal, but by the Taisho period (1912–1926) and the introduction of uniformed clothing in various work professions, Western fashion became increasingly

CONCLUSION from: Gender and Nation in Meiji Japan
Abstract: I began this book by considering how the Meiji Restoration had nurtured the sentiment that the revolution was incomplete. The calls to action that adhered around the notion of the “incomplete Restoration” in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries were (re)productive of the myth of the Meiji Restoration. For both the state and its critics, revolutionary action was legitimized by invoking the Restoration: the state pursued the modernization of all aspects of social life, denouncing customs and practices incompatible with its ideology of progress as backward and barbarous, while its opponents condemned the state for its decadence and superficiality arising from

Book Title: The Worlds of Carol Shields- Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Staines David
Abstract: "Carol was a very fine writer and a remarkable human being, a wonderful person whose work I closely followed for more than 20 years. I interviewed her frequently over those years, with virtually every work she produced -novel, radio drama, play, book of stories. So I had a good sense of the span of her work and also her evolution as a stylist. But the key reason I wanted to make a book focusing on her life and work is that we were friends."-Eleanor Wachtel
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1mr3

Departures, Arrivals: from: The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Ramon Alex
Abstract: The reductive classification of Carol Shields as a “domestic” novelist continues to obscure the extent to which travel is a central and recurrent aspect of her fiction. Although several critics—most notably Stephen Henighan in his contentious chapter “‘They Can’t Be about Things Here’: The Reshaping of the Canadian Novel” in When Words Deny the World(2002) and Gillian Roberts in her incisive article “Sameness and Difference: Border Crossings inThe Stone DiariesandLarry’s Party” (2006)—have explored Shields’s fiction in relation to issues of Canada/ US border crossing and cultural exchange, Shields’s work still tends to be associated

Narrative Pragmatism: from: The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Heath Tim
Abstract: Carol Shields makes Unlessinto a work that undeniably invites interpretation under the banner of postmodernism, yet to take the book up as merely postmodern risks opening it into an unavailing exercise that will not adequately unfold its meaning. Meaning, in particular the meaning of goodness and of all the intuitive “little chips of grammar,” as well as the enigmatic title ofUnless,matters greatly because Shields enters the realm of ethics with her inquiry into goodness, with her use of the woman who self-immolates, and with her suggestively allegorical feminist dialogue between Reta Winters and Danielle Westerman, respective avatars

Cool Empathy in the Short Fiction of Carol Shields from: The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Rose Marilyn
Abstract: In reviewing Carol Shields’s short story collection Various Miracles(1985),New York Timesbook reviewer Josh Rubins refers to her “serious whimsy,” a “fragile amalgam that . . . is sometimes surprisingly powerful as well as highly engaging. (11)” He notes the way that some of Shields’s “tiny fictions” have “sizable impact” and observes that her stories are somehow “disarming,” and pull “the reader inside her reckless imagination before the usual resistances can take shape.” He concedes that not all of her stories are equally successful: some are merely droll or seem to strain for effect. The best, however, exhibit

The “Perfect Gift” and the “True Gift”: from: The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Reimer Elizabeth
Abstract: Mothers, daughters, and gift giving: in two mirroring stories written by Carol Shields and Joyce Carol Oates we are invited to penetrate some of the mysteries of these expressive transactions. The titles themselves suggest a dialogue between the two writers: Oates’s “The Scarf” was published in 2001, one year after Carol Shields’s “A Scarf” appeared in Dressing Up for the Carnival.Oates reviewed Shields’s collection of stories but it is not known whether her story responds directly to Shields’s or whether the stories germinated independently. Nevertheless, they form a dialogue with each other even as they highlight the importance of

Prepositional Domesticity from: The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) van Herk Aritha
Abstract: Carol Shields claimed once, in my hearing, that she wasn’t a very good cook. I registered the comment’s wry self-deprecation, and immediately knew that she had performed one of those marvellously ironic sleights of hand that made her very talent both inconspicuous and adroit. She was not about to broadcast her abilities with boeuf en daube,how she had perfected exactly the dish that Mrs. Ramsey presides over in Virginia Woolf’sTo the Lighthouse:the “beef, the bay leaf, and the wine” (Woolf 80) combining into the “exquisite scent of olives and oil and juice” (Woolf 100) rising from the

The Voices of Carol Shields from: The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Clark Joan
Abstract: Carol Shields and I met thirty-six years ago when we were flying to Japan where our husbands were attending a Geotechnical Engineering Conference. An hour out of Vancouver, Don Shields suggested he and I change seats, and Carol and I talked pretty well non-stop across the Pacific. We began by talking about our work: at the time Carol had published two novels, two books of poetry, and short stories; I had published two children’s novels, poetry, and short stories. From there we moved onto other writers and their books, discussing those we admired, those we dismissed in the reckless way

Book Title: Playful Identities-The Ludification of Digital Media Cultures
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Raessens Joost
Abstract: In Playful Identities, eighteen scholars examine the increasing role of digital media technologies in identity construction through play. Going beyond computer games, this interdisciplinary collection argues that present-day play and games are not only appropriate metaphors for capturing postmodern human identities, but are in fact the means by which people create their identity. From discussions of World of Warcraft and Foursquare to digital cartographies, the combined essays form a groundbreaking volume that features the most recent insights in play and game studies, media research, and identity studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14brqd4

1. Homo ludens 2.0: from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Raessens Joost
Abstract: A playful specter is haunting the world. Since the 1960s, when the use of the word “ludic” became popular in both Europe and the US to designate playful behavior and artifacts, playfulness has become increasingly a mainstream characteristic of modern and postmodern culture. In the first decade of the 21st century we can even speak of the global “ludification of culture” (Raessens 2006; 2014). Perhaps the first thing that comes to mind in this context is the immense popularity of computer games, which, as far as global sales are concerned, have already outstripped Hollywood movies. In the US, 8- to

4. Playful computer interaction from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Cermak-Sassenrath Daniel
Abstract: For a long time the computer was a tool for experts, inaccessible and also prohibitively expensive for private users. This changed in the mid-1980s. The increasingly widespread use of the computer and the growing experience of its users have since led to a new kind of interaction. In many cases the computer is no longer seen as a machine with which well-planned, methodical, or repetitive tasks are conducted. The interaction¹ with it is now perceived as an open-ended process characterized by creative, explorative, goal-oriented, and challenging activities. Connected with this process is self-directed learning, experimental tinkering around, and the self-gambling

6. Breaking reality: from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Glas René
Abstract: These song lyric lines accompanied a badge I earned in February 2010 while using Foursquareon my mobile phone. This location-based social network service, created by Dennis Crowley and Naveen Selvadurai and launched in 2009, offers its users the opportunity to check in at real-world venues, earning rewards (like badges) in the process. The badge I was rewarded, appropriately called “I’m on a Boat!”, is the reward for the first time you actually check in on a boat in real life.

10. Digital cartographies as playful practices from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Lammes Sybille
Abstract: My neighbor recently looked up a Google Street View image of his tattoo parlor in Amsterdam. He noticed that his bicycle was parked in front of his shop, so he gathered that the specially equipped cars that made the panoramic photographs were traversing the city on one of his working days. Becoming intrigued he returned to the map and looked up the school of his children, whom he always picks up after school on his non-working days. On the Google Street View image a crowd of parents were gathering outside the school building. So he figured that the picture must

11. Ludic identities and the magic circle from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Calleja Gordon
Abstract: Johan Huizinga’s work has received renewed attention with the emergence and expansion of Game Studies. An important aspect of Huizinga’s explication of play is its bounded nature. Like other cultural artefacts Huizinga describes in Homo ludens(1955), the act of game playing requires the crossing of a boundary that marks the game from the ordinary world. The crossing of this boundary into game-space implies a shift in the players’ identity that takes them from their everyday, “ordinary” selves, into their ludic selves. Suits has described this as the “lusory attitude” (1978, 52); a disposition one enters into when interacting with

12. Play (for) time from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Crogan Patrick
Abstract: Through their deployment of interactivity, virtualization, and simulation, video games are prime examples of the contemporary form of what philosopher of technology Bernard Stiegler has termed the “industrial temporal object” (2009, 241). This is his term for mass produced media works designed to provide experiences that unfold over time through the user’s provision of his/her conscious attention. From the phonograph’s replaying of musical performances, to editing together film shots and the compilation of longer sequences of experience in television scheduling, to the design of systems for user-configured perceptions in newer media forms, industrial temporal objects have played an increasingly significant

13. Playful identity politics: from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Raessens Joost
Abstract: Contemporary computer games are increasingly being used both to entertain people as well as to “educate, train, and inform” them (Michael and Chen 2006). Refugee games belong to this so-called genre of “serious games”: these games frame refugee issues by letting the player taste life as a refugee. Refugee games have the potential to convince players of the veracity of a certain point of view or the necessity of a behavioral change. But they also help non-profit organizations (such as the United Nations and Free Press Unlimited) and commercial enterprises (such as Reebok, the music channel MTV, Microsoft, and Konami)

19. Afterplay from: Playful Identities
Author(s) de Mul Jos
Abstract: In the introductory chapter of this volume we proclaimed a global “ludification of culture” and have argued that playful technologies, which have been embraced worldwide with great enthusiasm in the past decades, have profoundly affected our identities. We have demonstrated how our narrative identity, as part and parcel of a centuries-old book culture, has in the past decades been complemented, and even partly replaced by, more playful types of identities. The subsequent chapters in this volume have analyzed and interpreted Homo ludens 2.0by focusing on the different dimensions of our new state of play from a variety of disciplinary

Book Title: Muscially Sublime: Indeterminacy, Infinity, Irresolvability- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Wurth Kiene Brillenburg
Abstract: Musically Sublime rewrites musically the history and philosophy of the sublime. Music enables us to reconsider the traditional course of sublime feeling on a track from pain to pleasure. Resisting the notion that there is a single format for sublime feeling, Wurth shows how, from the mid eighteenth century onward, sublime feeling is, instead, constantly rearticulated in a complex interaction with musicality. Wurth takes as her point of departure Immanuel Kant's Critique of Judgment and Jean-Francois Lyotard's aesthetic writings of the 1980s and 1990s. Kant framed the sublime narratively as an epic of self-transcendence. By contrast, Lyotard sought to substitute open immanence for Kantian transcendence, yet he failed to deconstruct the Kantian epic. The book performs this deconstruction by juxtaposing eighteenth- and nineteenth-century conceptions of the infinite, Sehnsucht, the divided self, and unconscious drives with contemporary readings of instrumental music. Critically assessing Edmund Burke, James Usher, E.T.A. Hoffmann, Novalis, Friedrich Holderlin, Arthur Schopenhauer, Richard Wagner, and Friedrich Nietzsche, this book re-presents the sublime as a feeling that defers resolution and hangs suspended between pain and pleasure. Musically Sublime rewrites the mathematical sublime as differance, while it redresses the dynamical sublime as trauma: unending, undetermined, unresolved. Whereas most musicological studies in this area have focused on traces of the Kantian sublime in Handel, Haydn, and Beethoven, this book calls on the nineteenth-century theorist Arthur Seidl to analyze the sublime of, rather than in, music. It does so by invoking Seidl's concept of formwidrigkeit ("form-contrariness") in juxtaposition with Romantic piano music, (post)modernist musical minimalisms, and Lyotard's postmodern sublime. It presents a sublime of matter, rather than form-performative rather than representational. In doing so, Musically Sublime shows that the binary distinction Lyotard posits between the postmodern and romantic sublime is finally untenable.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14brzjk

Introduction from: Muscially Sublime: Indeterminacy, Infinity, Irresolvability
Abstract: Imagine the wide lawn of the Champs de Mars during the Reign of Terror in late eighteenth-century France.¹ Thousands of people are packed together to participate “universally” in one of the many festivals celebrating the cause of freedom. They sing, they shout, they merge into a massive voice. The sound of this voice alone is staggering and uncannily irresistible. It grows louder as more join in, caught by the thrill of the moment or scared to openly disengage from an agitation that seems to enforce the participation of all. This voice then takes on a life of its own. It

Coda: from: Muscially Sublime: Indeterminacy, Infinity, Irresolvability
Abstract: Years ago, I was hitching with a friend on a Buginese fishing boat from Sulawesi to the island of Lembata in eastern Indonesia. One late afternoon, when the sun was at its lowest, we had spotted a whale rising up from the waters within yards before us—so close and unexpected as to almost become unreal. Dolphins regularly accompanied our boat, and the sea stretched out with nothing in sight save some deserted islands scattered here and there. It was exactly one year before the great flood devastated eastern Flores, wiping away several islands in the Flores Sea. Now, however,

Book Title: The Reinvention of Religious Music: Olivier Messiaen's Breakthrough Toward the Beyond- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): van Maas Sander
Abstract: Present-day music studies conspicuously evade the question of religion in contemporary music. Although many composers address the issue in their work, as yet there have been few attempts to think through the structure of religious music as we hear it. On the basis of a careful analysis of Olivier Messiaen's work, this book argues for a renewal of our thinking about religious music. Addressing his notion of a hyper-religiousmusic of sounds and colors, it aims to show that Messiaen has broken new ground. His reinvention of religious music makes us again aware of the fact that religious music, if taken in its proper radical sense, belongs to the foremost of musical adventures.The work of Olivier Messiaen is well known for its inclusion of religious themes and gestures. These alone, however, do not seem enough to account for the religious status of the work. Arguing for a breakthrough toward the beyondon the basis of the synaesthetic experience of music, Messiaen invites a confrontation with contemporary theologians and post-secular thinkers. How to account for a religious breakthrough that is produced by a work of art?Starting from an analysis of his 1960s oratorio La Transfiguration de Notre-Seigneur Jsus-Christ, this book arranges a moderated dialogue between Messiaen and the music theology of Hans Urs von Balthasar, the phenomenology of revelation of Jean-Luc Marion, the rethinking of religion and technics in Jacques Derrida and Bernard Stiegler, and the Augustinian ruminations of Sren Kierkegaard and Jean-Franois Lyotard. Ultimately, this confrontation underscores the challenging yet deeply affirmative nature of Messiaen's music.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14brzn4

6. The Circumcision of the Ear from: The Reinvention of Religious Music: Olivier Messiaen's Breakthrough Toward the Beyond
Abstract: Messiaen’s discourse on éblouissementand the possibility of a breakthrough toward the beyond is surprisingly radical. This is not only because the composer calls attention to the actual possibility of religious music—and in a certain sense hyperreligious music, for Messiaen places it above religious music—in an age when, to all appearances, this possibility had definitively turned into its opposite, but also because of his surprising move of connecting the domain of religious experience directly to the coordinates of the musical artifact. In this way, he suggests that a religious experience can be evoked by musical-technical means, countering the

A Faith That Is Nothing at All from: Dis-Enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity
Author(s) Bergo Bettina
Abstract: Among his singular characteristics, Gérard Granel presents a singularity more singular than others: that of being one of the very rare contemporary philosophers, if not the only one, to have affirmed, for a time, his belonging to the Catholic confession and Church—this while practicing a philosophy clearly tied, on the one hand, to Heidegger and, on the other, to Marx. Broadly speaking, we could say that he is one of the few, if not the only one, to have held together without confusion a religious faith and his engagement in philosophy (no “Christian philosophy,” here, to the contrary!). He

“Prayer Demythified” from: Dis-Enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity
Author(s) Smith Michael B.
Abstract: Who can require of the present time a prayer, and of us, the godless who live this time as our own? It’s not surprising it should be a poet who dares to do so, or dares at least to ask what such a prayer, if there is such a thing, could be.

Book Title: Missing Link-The Evolution of Metaphor and the Metaphor of Evolution
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): DONALDSON JEFFERY
Abstract: We look for missing links in the sciences and humanities, but the essential missing link - metaphor - is always in front of us. In Missing Link, Jeffery Donaldson unites literary criticism and evolutionary and cognitive science to show how metaphor has been with us since the beginning of time as a seed in the nature of things. With examples from centuries of poets, critics, philosophers, and scientists, he details how metaphor is a chemistry, an exchange of energies forming and dissolving, and an openness in the spaces between things. He considers the ways in which DNA learns how to liken things that have been, how mutation makes errors and then tries them on, and how evolution is hypothesis - nature's way of "thinking more." The mind is a matrix of relations: neural synapses cascade into ever-changing pathways and patterns. Metaphor is the substance of things hoped for, the evidence of things not seen. It is the unbroken thread between matter and spirit. Whether offering analysis of a turn of phrase or chemical reaction, Missing Link presents a vision of literature that is also a vision of the cosmos, and vice versa. It enters the debate between evolution and religion, and challenges scientists, literary theorists, and religious advocates to rethink the relations between their disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bs0fz

2 “Peyne and Wo”: from: Missing Link
Abstract: Metaphor is often seen as lower fruit on the language tree. We have a pretty confident sense of its use and place among our core language tools. When it comes to using words for getting at truths, metaphor is the handy gadget for special uses. It is like the angled ratchet attachment that helps you get at fasteners in hard-to-reach places: too delicate and unwieldy for those tough, straight-forward bolts that we spend most of our time wrestling with. This attitude is strongest among disciplines in which language is a necessary but sometimes frustrating instrument of communication, and where any

3 Chemistry: from: Missing Link
Abstract: “In our beginning is our end” ( Complete, 177). T.S. Eliot’s Alpha-and-Omega shell game is sometimes used as a first salvo in long arguments; it makes my case succinctly, so I’m pressing it into service again. Whatever end we human beings currently represent as evolved metaphoric thinkers is already present and active in whatever beginning the Big Bang represents for our universe. The launching of the metaphoric initiative and the launching of the universe are one and the same event. They consist of the same fabric, a material condition and a pattern of behaviour, a content and a form, as one.

7 Metaphor and Cognition from: Missing Link
Abstract: We’re at the half-way point in this book. If we were pilots on a trans-Atlantic flight crossing the gap between two continents, we’d be somewhere around the Point of No Return. No land in sight on either horizon. We would be crossing an important line and yet, if we looked out on the ocean, we would see no line at all. I consider in my argument two distinct and related contexts for the evolution of the metaphoric initiative. We have been thinking about how it has been at work inandasthe material world from its outset. The reality

14 “Til the Ductile Anchor Hold”: from: Missing Link
Abstract: In one sense, it appears that we have been moving to the heart of a concentric circle, from all-encompassing nature to culture,

“DERECHO O BARBARIE”. from: Conflicto armado interno, derechos humanos e impunidad
Author(s) Inda Andrés García
Abstract: A lo largo de la historia, la reflexión sobre la guerra ha ido íntimamente vinculada, por no decir totalmente unida, a la reflexión sobre el derecho. Y viceversa. No en vano, desde un principio, el derecho encontraba precisamente su sentido y justificación como una forma de acotar la violencia en los límites de su uso legítimo; de imponer la fuerza de la razón sobre la razón de lafuerza; de expulsar la guerra del orden de la razón práctica. En los últimos años, sin embargo, hemos asistido a un proceso de relegitimación y normalización de la lógica de la guerra como

A PROPÓSITO DE LA CONTINUIDAD POSURIBISTA: from: Seguridad democrática
Author(s) Moncayo C. Víctor Manuel
Abstract: Su victoria se edificó sobre un discurso de defensa de la obra uribista, aunque retocado por una nueva retórica llamada de “unidad nacional”, que le ha permitido incluir en la coalición, además de las agrupaciones que ya estaban alineadas con el régimen político autoritario, al tradicional partido liberal, decaído y sin fuerza,

Capítulo III POLÍTICAS DE SEGURIDAD, ESTRATEGIAS DE CONTROL SOCIAL Y MOVIMIENTOS DE RESISTENCIA EN LA HISTORIA DE COLOMBIA from: Seguridad democrática
Abstract: La política de Seguridad democráticade los dos gobiernos del presidente Uribe Vélez, por la manera como se implementó, por el hondo impacto que produjo en la población colombiana y en la opinión pública internacional, pudo dar la impresión al observador desinformado de ser algo completamente insólito y original en la historia colombiana. No obstante, al hacer una atenta revisión de lo ocurrido en los casi doscientos años de vida republicana, encontraremos que en otros momentos de nuestra historia las clases dominantes han acudido a estrategias de seguridad similares en su afán de mantener sus privilegios económicos, de sostener un

Book Title: Investigaciones fenomenológicas- Publisher: Siglo del Hombre Editores
Author(s): Vásquez Guillermo Hoyos
Abstract: En esta obra se pretende dilucidar si la fenomenología ayuda a dar todavía razón de una concepción amplia de los saberes, no restringida por las ciencias empírico-analíticas, ni por su metodología. No bastaría, entonces, con criticar al positivismo en sus diversas formas, sino que sería necesario mostrar cómo la fenomenología puede hoy abrirnos a, y abrir las humanidades y las ciencias sociales en ese diálogo de saberes que pudiera responder a las preguntas de Kant con respecto al hombre: lo que podemos conocer, lo que debemos hacer y lo que nos es permitido esperar.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bs5gw

2. FENOMENOLOGÍA COMO EPISTEMOLOGÍA. from: Investigaciones fenomenológicas
Abstract: En la actual discusión filosófica en Latinoamérica, al menos en ciertos círculos universitarios, parece que la fenomenología no solo no tuviera nada que aportar al problema de la filosofía, sino que incluso su pensamiento perjudicara la “cosa misma” de la filosofía. Esto puede ser explicable en su superficie como reacción al pensamiento de años inmediatamente anteriores, muy influenciado por la fenomenología de Husserl, por Scheler, por Heidegger; era un pensamiento filosófico, se dice, cuya vinculación con la política aparecía más bien accidentalmente y no siempre en forma correcta. Un cambio de signo en la intervención política de la filosofía tendría

6. EL FILÓSOFO: from: Investigaciones fenomenológicas
Abstract: Ante todo hay que aclarar que para Husserl el término Funktionärno significa lo que en el lenguaje ordinario se entiende por un funcionario. Normalmente se habla de funcionarios del Estado, o de otras instituciones—la Universidad, la Iglesia, el ejército, las organizaciones deportivas, etc.— para designar a aquellas personas que sin pensar por sí mismas y sin asumir críticamente su responsabilidad,

13. FENOMENOLOGÍA Y MULTICULTURALISMO from: Investigaciones fenomenológicas
Abstract: No es necesario ser demasiado optimistas para reconocer que en este final de siglo estamos aprendiendo a valorar el sentido fundamental del multiculturalismo.³ Estas expresiones no solo son comprendidas hoy por el público, sino que muchos ven en ellas un reclamo razonable,⁴ semejante al de las comunidades discriminadas social y económicamente en muchos países, al de los inmigrantes perseguidos, al de minorías no solo étnicas, sino religiosas o culturales, toleradas pero no reconocidas políticamente. Este es uno de los temas centrales del multiculturalismo: el autorreconocimiento en íntima relación con el reconocimiento político por parte de la sociedad civil.

1. JUSTICIA Y PAZ EN TIEMPOS DE IMPUNIDAD Y GUERRA from: La gestión del testimonio y la administración de las victimas
Abstract: La Ley 975 de 2005, conocida como Ley de Justicia y Paz, proveyó un marco jurídico para los procesos de reinserción y desmovilización de los grupos paramilitares de Colombia y al mismo tiempo terminó por enmarcar la creación de escenarios transicionales y por definir sus reglas de juego. Originalmente esta ley fue propuesta por el Gobierno con el ánimo de otorgar beneficios jurídicos a los paramilitares a cambio de la dejación de armas; sin embargo, como resultado de los rechazos y las presiones de diferentes sectores sociales que pusieron en evidencia la manera como los contenidos de la ley favorecían

1 Transitional Justice and the Ethics of Anger from: Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: Are the strongly vindictive desires expressed in the first quote above by the witness to a massacre of civilians in Sarajevo fundamentally undesirable or unjustified? Would it have been more commendable if he had rather expressed a desire to see justice done in order to prevent such atrocities from happening again? Or should one at least hope that he has since then been able to transform vindictiveness to a more compassionate attitude to the perpetrators of the heinous crime: hating their acts, but forgiving the agents? What is the moral significance of the experience and expression of anger in the

2 Commissioning Anger from: Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: Scholars arguing the case for forgiveness or restorative justice have often expressed high praise for the Truth and Reconciliation Commission (TRC) of South Africa and the chairmanship of Desmond Tutu. Those arguing on Christian grounds are particularly praiseful, and the excerpt above from Paul Ricoeur’s 2004 book, Memory, History, Forgettingcan easily be supplemented with others stressing the nearly miraculous nature of the institution and its moral voice. For example, according to Mark R. Amstutz the TRC provides a unique context in which to explore “the quest for reconciliation through the miracle of forgiveness” (2006:182). Indeed, Amstutz declares his agreement

6 Layers and Remainders from: Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: When we want to determine whether resentment is justified, we commonly try to find out what it is about and to assess whether a wrong or an injury that is worth becoming angry about has occurred. Trying to understand and judge the anger and resentment of victims and survivors in the aftermath of mass atrocities is a complex undertaking, in part because it seems that one has to keep in focus several “layers” or a history, rather than a single event, of compounded violations. In the case of the victims and survivors appearing before the HRV Committee of the TRC,

7 Contextualizing ʺRessentimentsʺ from: Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: Three decades before the TRC in South Africa initiated its proceedings, Jean Améry struggled to gainsay contemporary assumptions that victims opposing forgiveness and pleas to forget or “move on” had to be possessed by hatred, the lust for revenge, or a subjective and pathological inability to get on with life. Yet, differences between postapartheid South Africa and postwar Germany abound, and leaping from one context to the other can be a precarious exercise. World War II and the crimes of the Holocaust cannot be equated with the human rights violations of the apartheid regime.¹ Neither can the situation of a

11 Guilt and Responsibility from: Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: At an earlier point in the essay, Améry accepts the obligation to clarify his ressentiments“for those against whom they are directed” (1999:67). But against whomareAméry’sressentimentsdirected, and are the implicit expectations and notions of guilt and responsibility themselves morally justifiable? Reading through the essay, one is presented with an international collection of resented individuals and groups: a SS-man Wajs from Belgium, a South German businessman, the philosopher Gabriel Marcel, the publicist André Neher, SS-men, Kapos, German bystanders, “former fellows in battle,” and even “the world, which forgives and forgets.” In addition, he mentions several individuals for

Book Title: Intention Interpretation- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): ISEMINGER GARY
Abstract: "...an excellent and comprehensive discussion of a debate that was initiated in this century in William Wimsatt's and Monroe C. Beardsley's influential article 'The Intentional Fallacy.'...this is a splendidly conceived and very useful collection of essays. Readers will want to take issue with the arguments of individual authors, but this is to be expected in a volume at the cutting edge of a fertile philosophical controversy." --David Novitz, The Philosophical Quarterly "What is the connection, if any, between the author's intentions in (while) writing a work of literature and the truth (acceptability, validity) of interpretive statements about it?" With this question, Gary Isminger introduces a literary debate that has been waged for the past four decades and is addressed by philosophers and literary theorists in Intention and Interpretation. Thirteen essays discuss the role of appeals to the author's intention in interpreting works of literature. A well-known argument by E.D. Hirsch serves as the basic text, in which he defends the appeal to the author's intention against Wimsatt and Beardsley's claim that such an appeal involved "the intentional fallacy." The essays, mostly commissioned by the editor, explore the presuppositions and consequences of arguing for the importance of the author's intentions in the way Hirsch does. Connections emerge between this issue and many fundamental issues in metaphysics and the philosophy of mind as well as in aesthetics. The (old) "New Criticism" and current Post-Structuralism tend to agree in disenfranchising the author, and many people now are disinclined even to consider the alternative. Hirsch demurs, and arguments like his deserve the careful attention, both from critics and sympathizers, that they receive here. Literary scholars and philosophers who are sympathetic to Continental as well as to Anglo-American styles of philosophy are among the contributors. "This is a timely book appearing as it does when postmodernist views of the death of the author are disappearing quickly from the scene. As a collection it exemplifies the best work that is being done on this problem at the moment, and it will no doubt inspire further debate." --The Journal of Aesthetics and Art Criticism "[T]his volume contains important articles illuminating the central debate over the role and relevance of authorial intentions in literary interoperation." --British Journal of Aesthetics
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bs87q

9 Intention and Interpretation: from: Intention Interpretation
Author(s) KRAUSZ MICHAEL
Abstract: In the preface, Gary Iseminger asks us, “What is the connection, if any, between the author’s intentions in (while) writing a work of literature and the truth (acceptability, validity) of interpretive statements about it?”¹ Before discussing E. D. Hirsch’s and Joseph Margolis’s treatment of some aspects of this question. I first raise some questions about the question itself.

12 Allusions and Intentions from: Intention Interpretation
Author(s) HERMERÉN GöRAN
Abstract: Under what conditions shall we say that a literary text or a work of art contains an allusion to another text or artwork or that a particular allusion succeeds or is understood? These are the main questions I discuss in this essay. Before proposing an analysis of allusions, however, in a more informal and intuitive way I discuss allusions and some related notions and call attention to some demarcation problems, which I hope pave the way for the subsequent discussions.

Book Title: Italian Irish Filmmakers- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Lourdeaux Lee
Abstract: "This penetrating study examines how these filmmakers confronted their cultural heritage and used it as a counterpoint to their depiction of mainstream America." --American Cinematographer In this unique film history, Lee Lourdeaux traces the impact of Irish and Italian cultures on four major American directors and their work. Defining the core values and tensions within each culture, and especially focusing on the influence of American Catholicism, he presents John Ford, Frank Capra, Francis Coppola, and Martin Scorsese as ethnic Americans and film artists. Lourdeaux shows each filmmaker on set with writers and actors, learning to bypass stereotypes in order to develop a shrewd reciprocal assimilation between his ethnic background and Anglo America. Beginning with D. W. Griffith's depiction of Irish and Italian immigrants, the author discusses Hollywood's stereotypical portrayals of ethnic priests, cops, politicians, and gangsters, as well as their surface acculturation in the movies of the 1920s. By the decade's end, John Ford was using all-American stories to embody the basic myths and tensions of Irish-American life. In his later westerns and foreign films, he tried to understand both Irish political strife and the key figures of Irish liturgy. Frank Capra pitted Italian family values against the Anglo success ethic, turning out social comedies about oppressed little people. Several decades later, Martin Scorsese and Francis Coppola were highly critical of their religio-ethnic heritage, though they gradually discovered that to outline its weaknesses, like the blind pursuit of success, was to fashion a critical mirror of mainstream America. Lourdeaux discusses a number of recent films by Coppola and by Scorsese that have not yet been analyzed in any book. And, in the chapter on Scorsese, a personal interview with the director reveals how his ethnic childhood shaped his work in film. Examining the conflicts within American culture, Lourdeaux shows how the filmmakers themselves had to confront the self-destructive aspects of their ethnic background, not only to accommodate WASP audiences but to better understand their own heritage. He also observes that ethnicity is a strong draw at the box office, as in The Godfather, because it creates a sense of the Other who can both be admired and at the same time ridiculed. Illustrated with scenes of the movies discussed, this fascinating film history tells how four of America's most famous filmmakers assimilated their ethnic backgrounds on set and on screen. "Mr. Lourdeaux walks a tricky path in analyzing the films of each [director]: avoiding the trap of excessively detailing their lives and many films, while steering clear of ethnic stereotyping. Those interested in ethnic influences on outstanding persons or in the production of films by four of the best will find the book enjoyable." --The Baltimore Sun "This is an invaluable book because it arouses critical awareness of the ethnicity underlying many Hollywood movies that might otherwise appear merely to represent American archetypes." --Journal of American Studies "A valuable addition to the literature on ethnic identity in film. The insights Lourdeaux offers into major figures like Griffith, Ford, Capra, Coppola, and Scorsese contribute significantly to our understanding of their films." --Virginia Wright Wexman, University of Illinois at Chicago "For a number of years now, church historians have been giving us an account of American Catholicism that is much richer and more varied than the older institutional accounts of the Catholic Church ever let on. In this comprehensive and insightful study, Lee Lourdeaux shows us how much the ethnic movies of directors like Ford and Capra, Coppola and Scorsese have to teach us as well about Irish- and Italian-Catholic mores and instincts." --John B. Breslin, S.J., Director "A wonderfully sensitive, intelligent study of the complex issue of how the Catholic imagination works in the creative personalities of those raised in the Catholic heritage." --Andrew M. Greeley
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bsx1s

Book Title: Hegemony-The New Shape Of Global Power
Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Agnew John
Abstract: Hegemonytells the story of the drive to create consumer capitalism abroad through political pressure and the promise of goods for mass consumption. In contrast to the recent literature on America as empire, it explains that the primary goal of the foreign and economic policies of the United States is a world which increasingly reflects the American way of doing business, not the formation or management of an empire. Contextualizing both the Iraq war and recent plant closings in the U.S., noted author John Agnew shows how American hegemony has created a world in which power is no longer only shaped territorially. He argues in a sobering conclusion that we are consequently entering a new era of global power, one in which the world the US has made no longer works to its singular advantage.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bsxmk

1 Introduction from: Hegemony
Abstract: Words matter. Currently, there is much talk and writing about empireorAmerican empire—words used to describe the dominant force in world politics today.¹ I want to challenge this creeping consensus by proposing a different word to describe the current state of affairs. This wordhegemonyis often confused with empire and frequently appears with such ancillary words asimperial, imperialist,and so on, as if they all meant the same thing. Of course, they can be made to mean the same thing. But what if the consensus is fundamentally mistaken about what is actually unique about the current

6 Globalizing American Hegemony from: Hegemony
Abstract: “Globalization” is one of the premier buzz words of the early twenty-first century. In its most general usage it refers to the idea of a world increasingly stretched, shrunk, connected, interwoven, integrated, interdependent, or less territorially divided economically and culturally among national states. It is most frequently seen as an economic-technological process of time-space compression, as a social modernization of increased cultural homogeneity previously national in character scaled up to the world as a whole, or as shorthand for the practices of economic liberalism spontaneously adopted by governments the world over.¹ I do not want to deny the truth in

Book Title: The Roots Of Thinking- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Sheets-Johnstone Maxine
Abstract: "A significant contribution to the study of early humans, this book is a philosophical anthropology.... it makes genuinely novel, and highly persuasive, claims within the field itself." --David Depew In this ground-breaking interdisciplinary study about conceptual origins, Maxine Sheets-Johnstone shows that there is an indissoluble bond between hominid thinking and hominid evolution, a bond cemented by the living body. Her thesis is concretely illustrated in eight paleoanthropological case studies ranging from tool-using/tool-making to counting, sexuality, representation, language, death, and cave art. In each case, evidence is brought forward that shows how thinking is modeled on the body-specifically, how concepts are generated by animate form and the tactile-kinesthetic experience. Later chapters critically examine key theoretical and methodological issues posed by the thesis, Sheets-Johnstone demonstrates in detail how and why a corporeal turn in philosophy and the human sciences can yield insights no less extraordinary than those produced by the linguistic turn. In confronting the currently popular doctrine of cultural relativism and the classic Western metaphysical dualism of mind and body, she shows how pan-cultural invariants of human bodily life have been discounted and how the body itself has not been given its due. By a precise exposition of how a full-scale hermeneutics and a genetic phenomenology may be carried out with respect to conceptual origins, she shows how methodological issues are successfully resolved. "Ranging across the humanities and sciences, this thoroughly original book challenges both traditional metaphysics and contemporary cultural relativism. In their place, it persuasively develops a phenomenonological, tactile-kinesthetic account of the origins of thinking. This philosophical anthropology could not be more timely. It replaces the 'linguistic turn' with a promising new 'corporeal turn.'" --John J. Stuhr, University of Oregon "This work takes a much-needed stand in the inter-disciplinary field of philosophical anthropology. Sheets-Johnstone is well-read in the history of philosophy and in contemporary anthropology. The point of view she offers is inventive, insightful, well-established, and fruitful." --Thomas M. Alexander, Southern Illinois University at Carbondale
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bt5v1

5 Corporeal Representation from: The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: To place early hominid sexual signaling behavior in the broader context of communication, and in fact in the broader context of an evolutionary semantics, necessitates first of all an examination of similarities—and thus ultimately continuities—in primate sexual signaling behaviors. It furthermore requires an extensive critical analysis of the privileging of human language since preferential treatment of the latter precludes not only an unbiased investigation of the root of the similarities (and continuities) but acknowledgment and analyses of the body which is the dynamic locus of communicative acts. In the course of meeting both requirements, this chapter will show

7 Hominid Bipedality and Sexual Selection Theory from: The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: Eberhard’s evidence for sexual selection through female choice of male genitalia¹ accords closely with Darwin’s original and preeminent concern with morphological aspects of sexual selection. Given the ambient Victorian culture of his time, it is not surprising that Darwin himself did not remark openly and directly upon male primate genitalia.² His cryptic and oblique references to “naked parts … oddly situated,” to “a part confined to the male sex,” or to “large surfaces at the posterior end of the body,”³ all belie his usual descriptive precision and clarity. Eberhard’s thesis that male genitalia function as “ ’internal Courtship’ devices,”⁴ that

10 The Thesis and Its Opposition: from: The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: Ludwig Wittgenstein’s question and sardonic remark on thinking quoted at the beginning of the first chapter underscores the fact that by current Western standards, thinking remains a more inaccessible mystery than either consciousness or intelligence, and this in spite of its immediate accessibility and ostensive prevalence throughout all human societies at the very least.¹ It is not surprising, then, that the origin and genealogy of thinking is not a prominent concern in philosophy or the human sciences, or that the relationship between the evolution of hominid thinking and hominid evolution has never been seriously examined. Yet in some respects the

12 The Case for a Philosophical Anthropology from: The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: Philosophical anthropology. The label conjures up a hybrid few have heard of, and for many of those, a hybrid of questionable viability. Indeed, the words sound a flat thud in the ears of most philosophers and a rude intrusion in the ears of most anthropologists, who hardly want anything to do with it. Some would in fact question the very existence of such an animal since the cross-disciplinary marriage necessary to its birth is believed never to have been consummated—at least to the satisfaction of both parties.

2 How Old Is Harry Stottlemeier? from: Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Lipman Matthew
Abstract: Likewise with Harry Stottlemeier. In 1992, it has been twenty-three years since Harry Stottlemeier’s Discoverywas written. Does that make Harry twenty-three? Or, since one might guess his age in the book to be

12 A Guided Tour of the Logic in Harry Stottlemeier’s Discovery from: Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Splitter Laurance J.
Abstract: LOGIC FORMS the backbone of the Harrysyllabus, although it is by no means the only philosophical theme that arises there. However, the logical discoveries—exemplified by the persistence and single-mindedness of the central character, Harry—constitute a recurring theme that weaves its way through the overall story, and thereby into the thought and talk of the classroom community of inquiry. For it is logic that holds our thinking together—the rules and principles of logic provide criteria for distinguishing better thinking from worse. It is logic in language that makes reasoning possible.

20 A Second Look at Harry from: Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Oscanyan Frederick S.
Abstract: HARRYHAS HARDLY changed since 1975. There have been some minor stylistic improvements, and a few passages have been rewritten, most notably the neat application of Harry’s discovery toward the end of Chapter One and the discussion with Mr. Portos about differences between animals and human beings in Chapter Seven. But on the whole the book is the same now as earlier. Its educational context, however, is almost unrecognizably different. In 1975, no other novel yet existed;Lisawas still just a gleam in Mat Lipman’s eye. Since then, although the National Forum for Philosophical Reasoning in the Schools died

Book Title: The Strange Music of Social Life-A Dialogue on Dialogic Sociology
Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Goetting Ann
Abstract: Nine important sociologists and musicians respond-often vigorously-to the conversation Bell initiates by raising pivotal questions. The Strange Music of Social Lifeconcludes with Bell's reply to those responses and offers new insight into sociology and music sociology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14btb53

7 Response to Michael Bell: from: The Strange Music of Social Life
Author(s) CRANE DIANA
Abstract: Michael Bell’s proposal for a “dialogic sociology” (this volume) is a response to what he perceives to be an obsession in the discipline with “total explanation,” which means that the sociological researcher attempts to develop a comprehensive understanding of a phenomenon using a conceptual apparatus that emphasizes causality, predictability, objectivity, and neutrality. He argues that sociologists are so preoccupied with discovering whether their preconceptions about social life are correct that they do not attempt to understand the social conditions in which people behave in ways that sociologists do not expect.

11 If You Have All the Answers, You Don’t Have All the Questions from: The Strange Music of Social Life
Author(s) BELL MICHAEL M.
Abstract: If you have all the answers, you don’t have all the questions.I serve on the board of a nonprofit group, and this little aphorism came to me during a recent meeting. We were discussing the aftermath of an effort by the group that did not turn out as we had expected. Our emotions were mixed. A disheartened mood washed around with the exhilaration of what we had attempted. The world had critiqued us, yes, but we had critiqued the world. We had spoken and had heard back more than the mere resound of our intervention. No echo. No mimicry.

8 War Crimes, Remedies, and Retaliation (Dirty Warfare) from: A Moral Military
Abstract: The concept of a war crime is at the center of military ethics. What is a war crime, who is responsible for it, and what reprisals are justified against it? The business of this chapter is to respond directly to these questions. In addition, due to the events of the past few decades, we must pay new attention to the term terrorism. How is terrorism related to war crimes? After considering the general idea of a war crime, we will define terrorism.

11 Nuclear Devices and Low-intensity Conflicts from: A Moral Military
Abstract: When we consult the existing manuals on the question, we find a strange situation. They include only extremely brief references to the most powerful weapons of all and only oblique comments on their usability. In its July 1956 edition, FM 27-10 has a single sentence in the paragraph on atomic weapons that states that these weapons

PRÓLOGO from: Fábrica de resistencias y recuperación social
Abstract: Este libro trata de las acciones de diversos grupos de trabajadoras y trabajadores argentinos que lograron darse una salida ante situaciones de profunda desesperación provocadas por el cierre, abandono o quiebra de las empresas donde habían trabajado durante años. En un país en el que los capitales se fugaron y distintos grupos profundamente conmocionados por ello se fueron encontrando y pudieron debatir y cuestionar temas fundantes –como la política monetaria o la regionalización del Estado-nación federal, entre tantos otros– estos trabajadores formularon una serie de prácticas mediante las cuales lograron salvaguardar sus fuentes de trabajo y reiniciar la producción sin

I. UN ENFOQUE RELACIONAL DE LA FORMA SOCIO-PRODUCTIVA “FÁBRICA RECUPERADA” from: Fábrica de resistencias y recuperación social
Abstract: A mediados del año 2000 un grupo de trabajadores metalúrgicos de una fábrica ubicada en la Municipalidad de Avellaneda, al sur de la capital de la República Argentina, se reunió debajo de un puente aledaño para buscar una solución colectiva a los despidos causados por una quiebra fraudulenta. Sin capital y sin capitalistas, lograron poner en marcha la producción y, luego de algunos años, alcanzaron una importante consolidación económica que les permitió comprar las maquinarias para trabajar. Las prácticas desarrolladas abarcaron desde la ocupación de la planta hasta la negociación para obtener la primera ley de expropiación de la Provincia

II. CONDICIONES DE POSIBILIDAD DE LOS PROCESOS DE RECUPERACIÓN FABRIL from: Fábrica de resistencias y recuperación social
Abstract: La ocupación de fábricas ha sido una estrategia utilizada por los trabajadores en distintos momentos de la historia argentina. Para analizar la emergencia de los actuales procesos de recuperación fabril es necesario, en primer lugar, reconstruir las condiciones históricas que hicieron posible dichas prácticas, es decir, ubicar el horizonte en el que adquieren significación y singularidad. Historizar el fenómeno social estudiado es un ejercicio fundamental para desnaturalizarlo y temporalizarlo. Ello no significa concebir las acciones como el efecto mecánico de causas externas que vienen dadas de una vez y para siempre, sino más bien considerar que las prácticas de los

III. EL NACIMIENTO DE LA COMUNIDAD from: Fábrica de resistencias y recuperación social
Abstract: Las fábricas que fueron ocupadas y puestas a producir constituyen respuestas emblemáticas de innovación social. En un contexto en el que mercado y Estado dejaron de garantizar la reproducción social y abandonaron ciertos ámbitos de la producción, se propagaron y diseminaron por medio de redes de cooperación hasta constituir una forma reconocida como “ fábrica recuperada”, modalidad que, junto a otras, se erigió como una alternativa ante situaciones de desempleo y desintegración social.

3. EN NOMBRE DE LA SIMILITUD from: África
Abstract: “Yo miento, yo hablo” es el comienzo de un artículo de Michel Foucault sobre “La pensée du dehors”, en una edición de Critique.² Para aprehender la singularidad de un espacio imaginario contempo ráneo, el de la ficción, y pensar esta ficción por sí misma, en vez de reclamar el relacionarla con una verdad absoluta, o pensar sobre la verdad de acuerdo con las expectativas de hipótesis paradigmáticas, el filósofo francés invoca el bueno y antiguo argumento de Epimé nides sobre el mentiroso. Enfrentando una alegoría –el “éxodo” de África como es representado en los cincuenta años que nos separan del

¿Qué se dice cuando se dice filosofía latinoamericana? from: Liberación, Interculturalidad e Historia de las idea. Estudios sobre el pensamiento filosófico en América Latina
Author(s) Herceg José Santos
Abstract: Alejandro Korn escribía, a principios del siglo XX, respecto de la Filosofía en Argentina algo que creo puede aplicarse a muchos de los que comienzan a leer un artículo como este: “Me imagino –decía Korn– la sonrisa del lector (…). ¿Desde cuándo tenemos Filosofía argentina? ¿Acaso tenemos filósofos?” (1993:29). Reacción irónica que con toda probabilidad será la de una parte importante de los que se topen con este texto. La Filosofía latinoamericana, sin embargo, para sorpresa de muchos, constituye desde hace tiempo un tema de investigación. A la fecha, tiene a su haber, tanto considerando los textos originales de los

Filosofía para la liberación y violencia from: Liberación, Interculturalidad e Historia de las idea. Estudios sobre el pensamiento filosófico en América Latina
Author(s) Guldberg Horacio Cerutti
Abstract: Hemos elegido una estrategia que nos ha parecido apropiada para enfrentar el tema que hoy nos convoca. No es mera ocurrencia, sino disposición a alimentarnos del venero de vías fecundas que se esparcen generosamente en toda la amplitud de la obra del maestro peruano Francisco Miró Quesada. Nos proponemos partir de ciertas sugerencias invalorables, las cuales adquieren, a veces, la apariencia desafiante de insistencias obsesivas en su obra, y trataremos de avanzar a partir de allí, estribando, por así decirlo, en ellas. Y esto a pesar de –o alentados por– la crítica tajante y sin concesiones que efectúa, a propósito

El estatuto de la universalidad en la Filosofía latinoamericana: from: Liberación, Interculturalidad e Historia de las idea. Estudios sobre el pensamiento filosófico en América Latina
Author(s) Casalla Mario
Abstract: Si se quiere plantear la cuestión de una Filosofía latinoamericanamás allá del clásico estudio de la “historia de las ideas filosóficas” en América Latina; o de la aplicación de una metodología supuestamente universal, a un tema específicamente americano; o de la interrogación preliminar acerca de su “existencia o inexistencia” –operaciones harto frecuentes y repetidas cada vez con menos productividad– es necesario encarar de raíz el tema de launiversalidad, de la Filosofía (y enla Filosofía). No por cierto para negarla, sino parasituarla. Esto es precisamente lo que aquí –sumariamente– intentaremos.

La Filosofía de la Liberación ¿como un historicismo de la alteridad? from: Liberación, Interculturalidad e Historia de las idea. Estudios sobre el pensamiento filosófico en América Latina
Author(s) Saénz Mario
Abstract: El gobierno no ha sido establecido para el bienestar de este o ese gremio, sino para el bien del estado en su totalidad. El gobierno no es el (…)

De los Estudios Culturales a los sujetos históricos from: Liberación, Interculturalidad e Historia de las idea. Estudios sobre el pensamiento filosófico en América Latina
Author(s) Picotti Dina
Abstract: Desde hace, por lo menos una década, venimos hablando de “Filosofía intercultural” en América Latina, como un planteo de mayor acierto y alcance al interior del permanente intento de pensar desde la propia experiencia histórico-cultural, perseguido de un modo u otro a través de toda nuestra historia²; pero no sólo se verifica en este continente, sino en reuniones filosóficas internacionales que se han venido haciendo, hasta incluso constituirse, en los años 90 en Alemania, una sociedad de Filosofía intercultural. En tales encuentros y en los escritos surgidos de los mismos, se fueron discutiendo los más diversos aspectos: la naturaleza de

Prólogo from: 1912-2012 El siglo de los comunistas chilenos
Abstract: El año 2012 el Partido Comunista Chileno celebró 100 años de vida. Pocos partidos políticos en el mundo actual y menos en América Latina pueden demostrar tanta longevidad. Fundado en 1912 por Luis Emilio Recabarren como Partido Obrero Socialista, cambió de nombre en 1922 al adherir a la Tercera Internacional, pasando a llamarse Partido Comunista de Chile. A diferencia de la casi totalidad de los partidos socialistas de la época, no se trató de una escisión por la izquierda de la antigua agrupación, sino de la incorporación del partido en su conjunto a la citada Internacional. A lo largo de

La prensa obrera chilena: from: 1912-2012 El siglo de los comunistas chilenos
Author(s) Flores Jorge Rojas
Abstract: La prensa de origen popular se desarrolló en Chile a partir de la segunda mitad del siglo XIX. El periodismo propiamente sindical, una de sus variantes, surgió a fines de esa centuria, cuando los sectores obreros comenzaron a abrirse paso en el escenario social, en el que habían predominado los trabajadores independientes o artesanos. Esta prensa proletaria surgió en forma preferente para canalizar las demandas laborales y organizar la vida sindical, además de divulgar las propuestas políticas que circulaban por entonces.

El PCCh y su Visión de lo Militar y las Fuerzas Armadas: from: 1912-2012 El siglo de los comunistas chilenos
Author(s) Gallardo José Luis Díaz
Abstract: Como se describirá en este trabajo, el Partido Comunista de Chile (PCCh) es un claro continuador del Partido Obrero Socialista (POS), al menos doctrinariamente. Orgánicamente, sus quiebres no se producen en 1922, sino que recién se inician en 1926 y no concluyen antes del término de la dictadura ibañista (1931). En las primeras décadas del siglo XX tiene una fuerte presencia en el movimiento obrero a través de la Federación Obrera de Chile, FOCh. Contó desde el inicio con representación parlamentaria: dos diputados, Luis Emilio Recabarren (por Antofagasta) y Luis Víctor Cruz (por Santiago). Contaba con solo 5.000 militantes en

La Voz del Campo, La Política Agraria del Partido Comunista durante el Frente Popular, 1936-1940 from: 1912-2012 El siglo de los comunistas chilenos
Author(s) Arriaza Nicolás Acevedo
Abstract: Las palabras de Volodia Teitelboim, sobre cómo era percibida la vida campesina en los años ’30, grafican, de alguna forma, el diagnóstico que los partidos de izquierda hacían del mundo del trabajador agrario: limitado e impenetrable. ¿Cuál sería el rol de éstos en la

“Los destructores del Partido”: from: 1912-2012 El siglo de los comunistas chilenos
Author(s) Tapia Manuel Loyola
Abstract: En 1958, en momentos en que el Partido Comunista de Chile (PCCh) recobraba su legalidad¹, su órgano de difusión teóricopolítica, la Revista Principios, dedicó un número expresamente para abordar las nuevas tareas de la organización. Como parte de los fundamentos que debían animar la nueva fase de la actuación partidaria, se recurrió a dejar en claro que la etapa que se abría no podía sino ser expresión de un signo primordial de su trayectoria: su “indestructibilidad”, no obstante el cúmulo de acciones que desde fuera y desde dentro de la organización se habían ejecutado en los últimos diez años en

El Partido Comunista y las representaciones de la crisis del carbón: from: 1912-2012 El siglo de los comunistas chilenos
Author(s) Barahona Cristina Moyano
Abstract: La transición a la democracia en Chile generó un conjunto de nuevas expectativas en distintos actores sociales. Tras 17 años de dictadura, se esperaba un proceso de democratización creciente, sin embargo, el nuevo gobierno asumió restringido por un conjunto de normas heredadas de la dictadura, así como también, con un conjunto de nuevas imágenes y conceptos que se habían construido durante la experiencia dictatorial, en el que se redefinieron componentes claves de la cultura política y que caracterizarán al menos los tres primeros gobiernos concertacionistas en forma consecutiva. En ese proceso de redefinición, se juegan la significación de los actores

4. Saliendo de “el refugio de las masas”: from: Religión, Política y Cultura en América Latina. Nuevas miradas
Author(s) Fediakova Eugenia
Abstract: En Chile, durante el año 2009, fue ampliamente celebrado el primer centenario desde la formación del fenómeno pentecostal en el país. Esta fecha coincidió con los 50 años que pasaron desde la publicación de uno de los libros más clásicos e influyentes en los estudios sobre el evangelicalismo²⁸ y pentecostalismo en el país, “El refugio de las masas. Estudio sociológico del protestantismo chileno” de Christian Lalive D´Epinay. Ambos aniversarios crean un excelente contexto para no solamente volver a leer el trabajo del sociólogo suizo, sino que también para indagar, ¿qué ha pasado con el movimiento evangélico chileno durante estos últimos

13. Comunidad Nueva Israel: from: Religión, Política y Cultura en América Latina. Nuevas miradas
Author(s) Guigou Nicolás
Abstract: Las indagaciones sobre la dimensión religiosa en cualquier cultura, llaman necesariamente a la temporalidad y a la memoria. Y allí, Mnemosina, la propia diosa de la Memoria y madre de las musas, huyendo a cualquier reduccionismo historicista y a los oportunismos intelectuales que tratan de adorarla (y peor, rescatarla). Pero Mnemosina es sabia: no levanta su velo para los mirones. Así, las cercanas novatadas (en el tiempo y en el espacio) para aproximarse al estudio de las religiones, deben dejarla de lado. Para Mnemosina el desconocimiento es un corte profundo, inadmisible. Porque la diosa invoca tradiciones (sean inventadas o no),

Introduction from: Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) Madigan Edward
Abstract: The years between 1912 and 1923 were arguably the most transformative in modern Irish history. Beginning with the mass signing of the Ulster Covenant and ending with a bloody civil conflict in the nascent Free State, this long decade of war, revolution and rapid social change gave birth to contemporary Ireland, North and South. Many of us hold different, even conflicting, views on the real significance of this violent but fascinating period, and we are unlikely to reach a consensus on episodes as contentious as the Easter Rising, the Battle of the Somme or the War of Independence. We can

1 Violence and War in Europe and Ireland, 1911–14 from: Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) Mulligan William
Abstract: Both Irish and European politics were riven with conflict between 1911 and 1914. For all the difference of scale between them, they were connected both by the nature of the tensions involved and also by the potential impact of the Irish crisis on the United Kingdom as one of the leading great powers. At the international level there were wars between Italy and the Ottoman Empire in 1911 and 1912, and two wars in the Balkans in 1912 and 1913. In addition, the great powers consolidated their alliances, gave increasing weight to narrowly defined conceptions of military security, and embarked

3 Parallel Lives, Poles Apart: from: Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) Ward Stuart
Abstract: As for individuals, so, too, for whole communities the business

5 1916 and Irish Republicanism: from: Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) McGarry Fearghal
Abstract: By exploring the question of what republicanism meant to the rebels of 1916, before the Rising became burdened by the weight of its own myth, this chapter seeks to identify some connections between the history of an event and its commemoration. It emphasises how unpredictable the Rising’s success in creating popular support for republicanism was, and argues that this contingent outcome was largely a product of its wartime context. Although the Rising is now synonymous with republicanism, its ideological significance was less apparent at the time: many rebels fought for Irish freedom rather than a republic. The implications of this

10 Somme Memories from: Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) Adamson Ian
Abstract: William Sloan was born in Newtownards, Co. Down, in 1897. He was the only son of Anthony and Lizzie Sloan, who lived in Roseneath Cottage, Main Street, Conlig, Co. Down, near my father’s shop at the corner of Tower Road; this leads past Clandeboye Golf Club to Helen’s Tower. The couple were married on 24 August 1896 in Ballygilbert Presbyterian Church. Anthony worked as a general labourer, and his two nieces, Martha and Isabella, eventually became my two grannies. Anthony and Lizzie had two children, William and Lillah, to whom my grannies were therefore cousins. Shortly after the outbreak of

13 Irish Varieties of Great War Commemoration from: Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) Jeffery Keith
Abstract: The First World War has been, and is, ‘remembered’ and commemorated in Ireland in an extraordinary range of ways. Over recent years, moreover, the intensity of this commemoration appears to have increased, as the events themselves have receded. This is especially true in independent Ireland, where commemoration has ebbed and flowed since the end of the war itself, but where now engagement with the war and its commemoration has become especially striking and prevalent. And over the coming years, during which the centenary of the First World War will be marked, this trend is likely to be further intensified. It

1 Introduction from: Meaning and Context in the Thanksgiving Hymns
Abstract: It can be tempting for a Dead Sea Scrolls scholar working on ancient texts on the basis of damaged manuscripts to complain about the missing parts and think it is they that prevent her from fully understanding a text. It is tempting to surmise things about the contents of a missing line, thinking it might be the clue to wonderful new insights, and it is frustrating not to know for sure. One is aware that something is missing and cautious not to ignore this.

5 Merging of Traditions in a Classical Hybrid: from: Meaning and Context in the Thanksgiving Hymns
Abstract: As long as teacher or leader hymns have been recognized among the Hodayot, there has been no doubt about the place of 1QHa XII 6– XIII 6 within the category. The composition has phrasings close to some of the passages on the teacher of Righteousness in the Habakkuk commentary, so it could easily be imagined that the speaker of this composition was the Teacher himself. Nonetheless, it cannot be denied that the composition is a composite. Tanzer has suggested that “the material adapted from the Hymns of the Community … extends from 4:29 [XII 30] to the end of the

Chapter Two A Contemporary Response to Increasing Mele Performance Contexts from: Huihui
Author(s) Silva Kalena
Abstract: Linguists estimate that there are more than six thousand languages spoken in the world today and, alarmingly, that 60 percent are at risk of extinction with the passing of their last speakers (Hinton 2001; Nettle and Romaine 2000). Of the estimated 300 North American indigenous languages spoken when the explorer Christopher Columbus arrived in 1492, some 210 survive; of the 210, about 175 are in the United States (Krauss 1996). Young, fluent speakers of a language are key to its continuing vitality among future generations. Of the 175 surviving indigenous languages in the United States, only about 20 have speakers

Chapter Eight let’s pull in our nets from: Huihui
Author(s) Anderson Jean
Abstract: fishermen who set out the billowing nets we are also the encircled ature. The net is in position it will close around us if we don’t watch out if we sink our minds into dominant western ideas if we cut off our originalities in a dominant universal monoculture.

Chapter Fourteen “I Lina‘la‘ Tataotao Ta‘lo”: from: Huihui
Author(s) Perez Craig Santos
Abstract: My family migrated from Guåhan (Guam) to California in 1995, when I was a sophomore in high school. One of the reasons my parents decided to move was so that I could be better prepared to succeed in a “mainland” university. While I was excited about continuing my education, I had no idea how my family could afford college. After expressing this concern to my new high school counselor, he suggested I attend the Army recruiter’s presentation during the time when college recruiters visited our campus.

Chapter Sixteen All Things Depending: from: Huihui
Author(s) Osorio Jonathan Kay Kamakawiwo‘ole
Abstract: Author’s Note: In February 2011, I was honored to give the Distinguished Lecture for the Association for Social Anthropology in Oceania’s annual meeting, held in Honolulu. I opened with a mele inoa, a song that I had composed the week before for the infant daughter of a close friend who is himself a musician and descendant of some of the most respected and important Hawaiian composers of the last century. I had several reasons for singing that song for the lecture. In par tic u lar, I wanted to stress the importance of relying on our own language for commemorating

Chapter Twenty-one Ka Li‘u o ka Pa‘akai (Well Seasoned with Salt): from: Huihui
Author(s) HO‘OMANAWANUI KU‘UALOHA
Abstract: Kanaka ‘Ōiwi (Native Hawaiian¹) oral tradition, traditional literature, and literary production have long been studied and regarded as highly poetic.² Less often examined, however, are the literary devices and rhetorical strategies within Kanaka Maoli verbal and written expression. Meiwi mo‘okalaleo, or Kanaka Maoli oral, literary, and rhetorical devices, form the foundation of Kanaka Maoli aesthetics, or what is considered beautiful, pleasing, and desirable in the performance or reading of mo‘olelo (story, history). The skillful use of meiwi both creates and enhances the ‘ono (flavor) of Hawaiian verbal and literary arts. Thus, the reference to pa‘akai (sea salt), a mainstay cultural

Book Title: Joy and Human Flourishing-Essays on Theology, Culture, and the Good Life
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Volf Miroslav
Abstract: Joy is crucial to human life and central to God’s relationship to the world, yet it is remarkably absent from contemporary theology and, increasingly, from our own lives! This collection, the result of a series of consultations hosted by the Yale Center of Faith and Culture, remedies this situation by considering the import of joy on human flourishing. These essays—written by experts in systematic and pastoral theology, Christian ethics, and biblical studies—demonstrate the promise of joy to throw open new theological possibilities and cast fresh light on all dimensions of human life. With contributions from Jurgen Moltmann, N. T. Wright, Marianne Meye Thompson, Mary Clark Moschella, Charles Mathewes, and Miroslav Volf, this volume puts joy at the heart of Christian faith and life, exploring joy’s biblical, dogmatic, ecclesiological, and ethical dimensions in concert with close attention to the shifting tides of culture. Convinced of the need to offer to the world a compelling Christian vision of the good life, the authors treat the connections between joy and themes of creation, theodicy, politics, suffering, pastoral practice, eschatology, and more, driven by the conviction that vital relationship with the living God is integral to our fullest flourishing as human creatures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j2mp

2 Reflections on Joy in the Bible from: Joy and Human Flourishing
Author(s) Thompson Marianne Meye
Abstract: In studying the topic of joy in the Scriptures, several methodological challenges immediately present themselves. Perhaps the most pressing of them concerns the proper entry point for such a study. The most direct way into the topic would seem to be through a word or words for “joy.” But which word or words? Should the net be cast broadly to include any and all passages in which one finds the ideas of joy, gladness, blessedness, celebration, and the like, or somewhat more narrowly, focusing perhaps on passages that include particular words?¹ Should we identify key words in the Hebrew or

5 Calling and Compassion: from: Joy and Human Flourishing
Author(s) Moschella Mary Clark
Abstract: The field of pastoral theology and care has been conceptualized as a form of religious response to human suffering. It is said that our research begins “at the point where human suffering evokes or calls for a religious response and sometimes at the point where a religious response is given and/or experienced.”¹ In light of this widely shared understanding, it is not surprising that, with a few important exceptions,² joy is as understudied in this field as it is in the other theological disciplines represented in this volume. Given the power and pull of experiences of suffering that call forth

9 The Communicative Context from: Foundational Theology
Abstract: In the previous chapter, we provided a heuristic anticipation of certain positions in relation to the church, its nature and mission. In this chapter, we move from those more abstract considerations to the present and more concrete context of the church’s mission and communication, in a world of growing secularism on the one hand, and increasing exposure to religious pluralism on the other, while still drawing on the foundations developed in the first part of our work. Let us begin then with an ending: Ite missa est. These words express the dismissal declared at the end of the Roman Catholic

7 The Lost Sheep (Q/Luke 15:1–7) and the Parables in Q from: Puzzling the Parables of Jesus
Abstract: The Q document has always played an important role in historical Jesus research.¹ A majority of scholars would assume that the Q document may be considered to be the oldest document of the Jesus tradition, which is still available by means of the so called “double tradition” of Matthew and Luke. As stated in chapter 3, there is broad consensus in scholarship identifying Jesus as the teller of parables. Therefore, it is surprising that no monograph on the parables in Q has ever been published.² This is in part related to the as-yet-unanswered question of the textual form of Q

8 The Mustard Seed (Mark 4:30–32) and the Parables in Mark from: Puzzling the Parables of Jesus
Abstract: It was the Evangelist Mark’s privilege to give the first explicit classification of Jesus’ sayings and discourse as “parables.” He identified Jesus’ discourse generally as parabolic: “He began to teach them many things in parables… he did not speak to them except inparables” (Mark 4:2, 34: καὶ ἐδίδασκεν αὐτοὺς ἐν παραβολαῖς πολλά … χωρὶς δὲ παραβολῆς οὐκ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς). According to Mark, Jesus taught a great deal—or even as a matter of principle—using parables, and all of the evangelists, including John, as well as modern Jesus scholars agree with this opinion.¹

10 The Good Samaritan (Luke 10:30–35) and the Parables in Luke from: Puzzling the Parables of Jesus
Abstract: Some of the Lukan parables portray a surprising level of complexity of stylistic elements and characterization. For instance, two marked introductions for

3 Abba Says, “Drop the G” from: The Homebrewed Christianity Guide to Jesus
Abstract: We met at the Coffee Cartel, my local shop, and, after giving a brief apology up front, she was all business. “Look, I don’t

2 The Ethics of the Doctrine of God in Church Dogmatics II/2 from: Citizenship in Heaven and on Earth
Abstract: “Judgment andgrace, condemnationandbeatification—these are always the implications of this event, of God’s command in its revelation. It encounters me thus, killing me and making me alive.”¹ As the ethics lectures highlighted especially the aspect of judgment in discussing God’s command, the notion that moral obligation is constituted by the gospel did not attain full force—on the contrary. Even to the extent that the gospel rather than the law ultimately determined the sinner’s status before God, Barth drew attention to this relationcoram Deorather than to the moral reality of an ethos, of actions and

3 The Ethics of the Doctrine of Creation in Church Dogmatics III/4 from: Citizenship in Heaven and on Earth
Abstract: The discussion of CDII/2, chapter 8 detected a significant contradiction between ethical actualism on the one hand and the priority of the gospel over the law or the doctrine of election on the other. The ensuing volumes ofCDIII deal with the doctrine of creation. The subvolume discussing the ethical aspects of the doctrine of creation,CDIII/4, discusses those ethical questions that arise with regard to God’s work as Creator. In part, Barth explicitly retains the actualistic concept of ethics, especially at the beginning. Yet at the same time, he engages in the discussion of empirical phenomena,

5 Perspectives: from: Citizenship in Heaven and on Earth
Abstract: After discussing Barth’s the ethical dimension of Barth’s works from RomI toCDIV, the task of this chapter is to look back, recall some of the main results, and feed them into a constructive effort to learn from Barth’s ethical reflections for today’s Christian ethics.

Introduction from: The Executed God
Abstract: I will begin by acknowledging the ways some traditional theologians have spoken of Jesus’ death as disclosing a “crucified God” and will then suggest the difference it makes to speak of an “executed God.” In Baldwin’s terms, this concept of an executed God, I suggest, can help make us “larger,

[Part II. Introduction] from: The Executed God
Abstract: Howard Thurman, in Jesus and the Disinherited, writes of a Christianity born as a “technique of the oppressed” in imperial Rome.¹ Part Two traces that technique’s appearing today as a “counter-theatric to state terror” in Lockdown America. Crucial to this technique is what Thurman points to as the “vital content” of the concept of love for the enemy. This can seem ludicrous. What force might any such concept of love have today given the opposition we face from Lockdown America, sustained by its histories of indigenous genocide, institution of chattel slavery, and by its global domination of Latin American, African,

5. Building Peoples’ Movements - 1: from: The Executed God
Abstract: With this chapter, we come, now, to stand on the precipice of action, as we begin the first of two chapters interpreting the way of the cross as “building peoples’ movements.” A book does not create action; it might, though, create spaces where we open ourselves toward it. In a book, perhaps, we can measure ourselves and the needs of our era—exposing, feeling, and thinking through the injuries and pain created by structural violence, “fingering its jagged grain,” as Ralph Ellison is oft-quoted to have said of the blues’ musical impulse.¹ That impulse will be needed if we are

6. Building Peoples’ Movements - 2: from: The Executed God
Abstract: Building people’s movements amid and against Lockdown America also includes organizing against the U.S. death penalty, which at the federal and state levels assigns death as penalty for over 60 crimes.¹ Opposing it is surely no more important than the demilitarizing of policing in the U.S. or decarcerating the nation, which I have discussed in the previous chapter. Nevertheless, work against the death penalty is no mere add-on, some “extra-issue” to be raised. Instead, it is intrinsic, or ought to be, to our work against the carceral violence encountered in U.S. policing practice and mass incarceration, as well as in

3 On a Road Not Taken: from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Plaxco Kellen
Abstract: Late-modern questions and concerns lead Paul’s readers to suppose that Paul’s opposition of “wisdom” to “folly” is the lens for focusing Paul’s meaning.¹ Just so, the best reading of Paul’s First Letter to the Corinthians is the reading that best interprets that opposition’s dissonance as the center of Paul’s thought.² It is not as though Paul does not oppose cruciform folly to worldly wisdom. Any exegete must acknowledge Paul’s playful polarities of wisdom and folly, power and weakness, and so on. But it is not a foregone conclusion that this opposition forms the core of Paul’s theology in 1 Corinthians

4 Maximus the Confessor on the Foolishness of God and the Play of the Word from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Louth Andrew
Abstract: I have to begin by confessing that when asked to present something on St. Maximus the Confessor, I chose the title because I was very familiar with one passage in St. Maximus that relates the theme of the foolishness of God to the play of Wisdom, or strictly the Word—because I had included the passage in the works I had translated in a book on the Confessor—and rather imagined that I would find several parallel passages, if I looked, and could build up something on that basis.¹ It didn’t quite work out like that: Maximus quite rarely refers

9 The Wisdom in God’s Foolishness: from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Hay Andrew R.
Abstract: The significance of Karl Barth’s exposition of 1 Corinthians in The Resurrection of the Dead(Die Auferstehung der Toten; hereafterAT)¹ cannot be overlooked. The lectures comprisingATwere given in the summer semester of 1923, alongside those onDie Theologie der reformierten Bekenntnisschriften(The Theology of the Reformed Confessions).² As usual, however, Barth overextended himself for the series on the Reformed confessions, and found himself short of time in his 1 Corinthians lectures. But Barth still considered that what he had discovered over the hurried course of the lectures merited broader distribution, and they were published the year after

11 On Justification and Beyond—An Attempt from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Wüthrich Matthias D.
Abstract: It is hardly surprising that Walser’s clarion call has fallen on sympathetic ears among theologians.⁴ I want to take Walser’s literary intuition as a starting point for thinking about “justification.” My thinking is guided by a question that does not concern Walser much but that is crucial in theological terms: the question regarding the status of justification’s doctrinal articulation

13 Witnessing to the Cross, Forgetting Human Sin: from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Theissen Henning
Abstract: Words are not the same thing as concepts. While concepts make things accessible to reason and thought, words make them accessible to speech ( parole). In ordinary language there may not be much need to differentiate neatly between the two, especially since speech and thought are closely interrelated, perhaps even closer than language (langue) and thought. But, at least in part, their interrelatedness is due to their common opposition to what in ordinary language is called reality. Speech and thought are among the most important devices of the human soul for conceptualizing reality. It may be naïve to identify reality with

17 “To Know Nothing Except Jesus Christ, and Him Crucified”: from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) van Driel Edwin Chr.
Abstract: “Supralapsarian Christology” is an account of the divine motives for the incarnation on which the incarnation is not contingent upon sin. Proponents of supralapsarian Christology do not deny that God deals with the sin problem through the incarnate Christ, but they hold that there are deeper and more important reasons for the incarnation than reconciliation and redemption. In this christological model the goal of creation is a love relationship with human beings, and in this relationship God comes as close to God’s creatures as God can—in becoming human. Hence, the name “supra-lapsarian”—in the ordering of divine intentions, even

Book Title: Resisting history-Religious transcendence and the invention of the unconscious
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Hayward Rhodri
Abstract: How can historians make sense of visions, hauntings and demonic possession? Do miraculous events have any place in a world governed by cause and effect? In Resisting history, Rhodri Hayward examines the cumulative attempts of theologians, historians and psychologists to create a consistent and rational narrative capable of containing the inexplicable. This lucid and provocative account argues that the psychological theories we routinely use to make sense of supernatural experience were born out of struggles between popular mystics and conservative authorities. Hayward’s lively analysis of the Victorian disciplines of Christology, psychology and psychical research reveals how our modern concept of the subconscious was developed as a tool for policing religious inspiration. He concludes his argument with a vivid study of the Welsh Revival of 1904-5, in which the attempt of thousands of converts to cast off their everyday identity was diffused and defeated using the language of the new psychology. By revealing the politics inherent in such language, Hayward raises questions about its deployment in the work of today’s historians. Written in a clear and accessible style, Resisting history provides a fresh and entertaining perspective for anyone interested in questioning the concepts that underlie historical writing and psychological thought today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j66d

1 ‘Acceptable words’ from: Acceptable words
Abstract: The first wonder of poetry lies in the immediate effects of language. How words are drawn from the myriad, their particular sounds heard and then associated by rhythm, and sometimes their visual appearance, constitutes the primary pleasure and amazement of verse. However great the repayments of re-reading and research might be, the experience of sensing the extraordinary in this dimension of language persists. It is the quality which led Milton in his pamphlet Of Educationto identify poetry as ‘more simple sensuous and passionate’ than logic and rhetoric, not to exalt it above the philosophical arts but to insist upon

11 Afterword: from: Acceptable words
Abstract: In this closing passage of ‘Discourse: For Stanley Rosen’¹ I want to dwell on the penultimate line: ‘its bleak littoral swept by bursts of sunlight’. The littoral has held a powerful place in Geoffrey Hill’s poetic imagination right from the beginning. The seashore and tracts between water and land appear recurrently in For the Unfallen. In ‘Genesis’ the speaker sees ‘The osprey plunge with triggered claw, / Feathering blood along the shore’. It is bleak too in ‘Requiem for the Plantaganet Kings’ where ‘the sea / Across daubed rock evacuates its dead.’ In ‘The Guardians’ the old ‘wade the disturbed

The new aestheticism: from: The new aestheticism
Author(s) Malpas Simon
Abstract: The very notion of the ‘aesthetic’ could be said to have fallen victim to the success of recent developments within literary theory. Undergraduates now pause before rehearsing complacent aesthetic verities concerning truth, meaning and value, verities that used to pass at one time for literary criticism. The rise of critical theory in disciplines across the humanities during the 1980s and 1990s has all but swept aesthetics from the map – and, some would argue, rightly so. Critical theory, of whatever variety, presented a fundamental challenge to the image of the old-style academic aesthete sitting in his (and it was always

1 Aesthetic education and the demise of experience from: The new aestheticism
Author(s) Docherty Thomas
Abstract: In 1913, Walter Benjamin was a central figure alongside his teacher, Gustav Wyneken, in the ‘German Youth Movement’, agitating for substantial reforms in the German educational system and, beyond that, in German society. He placed one of his first serious publications, an essay entitled ‘Experience’, in Der Anfang, the magazine of the movement, as a contribution to the debates. In this essay, he points out that a society’s elders have a bad habit of legitimising their views through recourse to their ‘experience’(Erfahrung), their amassing of ‘felt life’, as we might call it, which is axiomatically greater than that amassed

4 What comes after art? from: The new aestheticism
Author(s) Bowie Andrew
Abstract: Kafka’s last completed story has become something of an allegory of contemporary theoretical approaches in the humanities. In ‘Josefine, the singer, or the mouse people’, the narrator, a mouse, ponders the phenomenon of Josefine, a mouse who sings. The problem with Josefine is that she actually seems to make the same kind of noise as all the other mice, but she makes a performance of it, claiming that what she does is very special. She is able, moreover, to make a career out of being a ‘singer’, despite the doubts voiced by some of her audience. Kafka’s story plays with

6 The Alexandrian aesthetic from: The new aestheticism
Author(s) Caygill Howard
Abstract: Still the most unreal of the unreal cities, Alexandria remains emblematic of the modern aesthetic, with its most significant monument dispersed between the Embankment in London and Central Park, New York.² The exile of the monumental fabric of the city to the capitals of modernity testifies to Alexandria’s condition as a figure for diaspora as well as emphasising the fascination that the city continues to hold for modernity and modernism. As the home of diaspora, Alexandria has been celebrated since antiquity for its equivocal hospitality for cultural differences whether linguistic, religious, scholarly or sexual.³ The city famed for both its

7 Defending poetry, or, is there an early modern aesthetic? from: The new aestheticism
Author(s) Robson Mark
Abstract: This question appears within the space occupied by what has become known in certain literary-critical circles as the early modernperiod, broadly defined as 1500–1700.¹ Formulation of the idea of the early modern can be taken as an exemplary moment in the permeation of a ‘new’ historicism through literary studies since the early 1980s, most obviously through the twin historicisms of cultural materialism and cultural poetics (or ‘new historicism’).² The periodising titleearly modernis part of a

10 Melancholy as form: from: The new aestheticism
Author(s) Bernstein Jay
Abstract: We can date the end of the novel precisely: the last novel ever written was Flaubert’s Sentimental Education, published in 1869. It is sometimes said that Flaubert’s work inaugurates the waning of theBildungsromanand the inauguration of the novel of disillusionment. But that says too little. Can there be aromanwithout theBildung?The unifying biographical form of the classical novel, paralleling the ambitions and trajectory of secularising modernity, chartered the formation, education, quest and achievement of identity and worldliness of its bourgeois heroes and heroines. What was previously narrative and adventure becomes in Flaubert a stutter, every

Book Title: Douglas Coupland- Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Tate Andrew
Abstract: This book is the first full-length study of Douglas Coupland, one of the twenty-first century’s most innovative and influential novelists. The study explores the prolific first decade and a half of Coupland’s career, from Generation X: Tales for an Accelerated Culture (1991) to JPod (2006), a period in which he published ten novels and four significant volumes of non-fiction. Emerging in the last decade of the twentieth century - amidst the absurd contradictions of instantaneous global communication and acute poverty - Coupland’s novels, short stories, essays and visual art have intervened in specifically contemporary debates regarding authenticity, artifice and art. This book explores Coupland’s response, in ground-breaking novels such as Microserfs, Girlfriend in a Coma and Miss Wyoming, to some of the most pressing issues of our times. Designed for students, researchers and general readers alike, the study is structured around thematically focused chapters that consider Coupland’s engagement with narrative, consumer culture, space, religion and ideas of the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j7p4

Series editors’ foreword from: Douglas Coupland
Author(s) Monteith Sharon
Abstract: This innovative series reflects the breadth and diversity of writing over the last thirty years, and provides critical evaluations of established, emerging and critically neglected writers – mixing the canonical with the unexpected. It explores notions of the contemporary and analyses current and developing modes of representation with a focus on individual writers and their work. The series seeks to reflect both the growing body of academic research in the field, and the increasing prevalence of contemporary American and Canadian fiction on programmes of study in institutions of higher education around the world.囎Central to the series is a concern that each

2 ‘Denarration’ or getting a life: from: Douglas Coupland
Abstract: How might a novelist represent contemporary, globalized reality if that world and its citizens have become plotless? The phenomenon of ‘denarration’ described in Coupland’s ‘Brentwood Notebook’ (1994) – a collage-report of a single day in this blandly affluent LA suburb, a putative ‘secular nirvana’ – thematizes the author’s ongoing concern with the failure of old stories to adequately explain, or render meaningful, the complexities of living in a new era ( PD,p. 148). This embryonic trend named by a writer from Canada’s west coast, much of whose early work focuses on the odd textures of 1990s Californian experience, echoes observations made twenty

1 Marlow: from: Conrad's Marlow
Abstract: He has often been seen as Conrad’s autobiographical alter ego, since his narratives are based on Conrad’s own experiences in the ill-fated Palestine(‘Youth’) or in the Congo (‘Heart of Darkness’). At the same time, Conrad and Marlow differ fundamentally in their ethnic background (Marlow is an Englishman, without Slavic origins) and their marital status (Marlow never marries, and becomes increasingly misogynist).¹

5 A note on postmodern cultural theory from: The structure of modern cultural theory
Abstract: Much has been made in this book of the idea of modern cultural theory being ultimately ethical in its aims and outlook. Or at least, our principles of reading in relation to Adorno, Bourdieu and Foucault have been, in effect, ethico-critical ones; emphasising that these thinkers are best read not simply in ‘positive’ or epistemic terms but as contributing to a kind of ethically minded reconfiguration of ourselves as critical beings, something that has been shorthanded in terms of the ethics of autonomy.

CONCLUSION from: Aesthetics and subjectivity
Abstract: The difficulties involved in giving an account of the contemporary significance of the ‘aesthetic tradition’ from Kant to Nietzsche become apparent when one considers phenomena such as the following.¹ It might, for example, seem surprising that many of the thinkers who enthusiastically pursue a post-Nietzschean undermining of the illusions and repressions they associate with ‘Western metaphysics’ still have a considerable investment in art and in philosophical reflection on art. A radically anti-metaphysical view of art is in some respects more congruent with the idea that art itself is now something whose very existence has been put in doubt by various

4 The good, the bad and the ambiguous from: Britain and Africa Under Blair
Abstract: I discussed two ways of expressing and realising the idea of good in Chapter 3 – the transcendental and transformative – both of which have found expression in the imagination of Africa and Britain’s relationships and role there. Historically, these have been expressed directly in relation to religion. Wilberforce and Buxton explicitly tried to recapture a religious idea of the good and relate it to the British state: the ‘happy state of a truly Christian nation’ (Wilberforce, 1958: 119). Chamberlain and Lugard, neither of them religious men, made explicit references to the idea that a replacement for dwindling religious feeling

6 Idealisation in Africa from: Britain and Africa Under Blair
Abstract: I have suggested that being close to the good seems to mean extending out into a far away place where it is possible to draw an idealised picture of yourself. From Britain, the work in Africa looks very clearly good, along the lines I have drawn – it is disinterested, grand, unifying and differentiating. But if the work in Africa is to have lasting currency in these terms – if it is to continue to enable self-idealisation – there must be something about the way Britain engages in Africa that allows this idea to persist, and the ideal to remain

Spenser and Shakespeare: from: Shakespeare and Spenser
Author(s) Reid Robert L.
Abstract: Long ago Arthur Kirsch warned me not to compare Spenser and Shakespeare—‘apples and oranges’— their world-views not fluidly complementary but mutually exclusive. The fictions, genres, and aesthetic modalities of these preeminent English Renaissance poets exemplify distinct conceptions of human nature. Though many scholars still assume a single Renaissance psychology, one that privileges Aristotelian empiricism and Aristotelian structuring of faculties (often with the express goal of explaining Shakespeare’s plays), we must cast the net elsewhere to reap the allegory of The Faerie Queene, for only a Christianized Platonic psychology that subordinates Aristotelian features can make sense of the three-part hierarchic

The Equinoctial Boar: from: Shakespeare and Spenser
Author(s) Prescott Anne Lake
Abstract: Juxtaposing Spenser’s movingly fertile Garden of Adonis ( Faerie QueeneIII.vi) and Shakespeare’s seriocomicVenus and Adonisis an old exercise, and to note that both texts evoke, revise, or reject traditional mytho graphical readings of the Venus and Adonis story is likewise hardly new. In this essay I do, however, have two suggestions for further thought on these texts, Shakespeare’sRichard III, and the boar of winter.

The Seven Deadly Sins and Shakespeare’s Jacobean Tragedies from: Shakespeare and Spenser
Author(s) Horton Ronald
Abstract: This essay will consider the ubiquitous concept of the seven deadly sins as a track for Shakespeare’s featured motivating vices in the tragedies following Hamlet.It will refer to Spenser’s account of them in the FaerieQueene,Book I, canto 4, as a natural source for Shakespeare. The evidence is abundant that Shakespeare was well acquainted with the 1590 edition ofThe Faerie Queene,¹ and it seems beyond question that Spenser’s memorable tableau of the seven sins would have remained etched in his mind.

3 Against historicism from: Time and world politics
Abstract: THIS chapter examines accounts of political time that are premised on the critique of philosophy of history and historicism. We will begin by looking briefly at two thinkers at the end of the nineteenth century who offered alternatives to the conflation of kairosandchronosin historicist and scientific accounts of time, Nietzsche and Bergson. This then sets the scene for exploring ways in which the assumptions and implications of historicism, in particular Marxist versions of historicism, have been challenged by the following thinkers: Arendt, Benjamin, Derrida and Deleuze. The arguments of these thinkers differ, but they all involve rejecting

4 Prophecies and predictions from: Time and world politics
Abstract: IN the previous two chapters we have been exploring philosophical accounts of political time. In this and subsequent chapters we examine readings of contemporary world politics and the different ways in which they rely on and reproduce configurations of the relation between chronosandkairosin their accounts of the world-political present. In this chapter our focus is on interpretations of the nature and direction of world politics after the Cold War, including the popular ‘end of history’ and ‘clash of civilisations’ narratives offered by Fukuyama and Huntington, and responses from the social science of International Relations during the 1990s.

2 Motherhood and the classical tradition from: Mothers and meaning on the early modern English stage
Abstract: In the second half of the sixteenth century, a renewed interest in classical drama stimulated the development of new options for dramatising motherhood. Figures such as Medea, Agave and Jocasta offered novel, if alarming, models for mothers in dramatic narratives and extended the range of potential meanings that the mother figure could offer. This range was well suited to the political drama that developed as a response to anxieties about the Elizabethan succession. Classical narratives, which so often detailed the collapse of royal families and the wreck of dynasties, offered useful models for persuading the queen of the need for

1 Narrative identity and the challenge of literary global politics: from: Contemporary Violence
Abstract: Some – if not all – contemporary wars are conducted for a multiplicity of reasons by an increasingly diverse set of actors. One corollary of this may be a reading of a broader spectrum of political violence which is neither exclusively political nor military, but is in part shaped by cultural and social forces captured in narrative. Even if narrative approaches have a long provenance in other disciplines, they have only recently touched the shores of IR. And yet, an approach which addresses accounts of narrative identity does much to capture the social, cultural and ontological assumptions which inform our

3 Regional politics, trans-local identity and history from: Contemporary Violence
Abstract: This chapter introduces some background themes which influence the networks, groups and affiliations, and latterly distinctive armed resistance movements, in the Balkans and the Caucasus in the mid-1990s. In both cases the armed resistance movements emerged against the backdrop of the disintegration of the USSR and Socialist Yugoslavia, but the provenance of each movement needs to be located in a broader frame of late nineteenth- and twentieth-century history. The armed resistance movements became involved in low-level conflicts in Kosovo and Chechnya, and more generally in the neighbouring regions and environs. A number of revolts and insurrections were repeated in the

6 Criminality and war from: Contemporary Violence
Abstract: So far this book has focused on a range of issues related to narrative and interpretive IR, as ways into analysing contemporary violence. In doing so, attention has been drawn to different levels of analysis, the role of history in the Caucasus and Balkans, and different social, cultural and local forms of identification. In both Kosovo and Chechnya we see contract soldiers, special police units and federal army units fighting against armed resistance movements. The armed resistance movements were, however, made up of a multiplicity of groups and networks, and this, alongside the role of NATO, the UN and other

Book Title: The arc and the machine-Narrative and new media
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Bassett Caroline
Abstract: The Arc and the machine is a timely and original defence of narrative in an age of information. Stressing interpretation and experience alongside affect and sensation it convincingly argues that narrative is key to contemporary forms of cultural production and to the practice of contemporary life. Re-appraising the prospects for narrative in the digital age, it insists on the centrality of narrative to informational culture and provokes a critical re-appraisal of how innovations in information technology as a material cultural form can be understood and assessed. The book offers a careful exploration of narrative theory, a sophisticated critique of techno-cultural writing, and a series of tightly focused case studies. All of which point the way to a restoration of a critical - rather than celebratory approaches - to new media. The scope and range of this book is broad, its argumentation careful and exacting, and its conclusions exciting.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jg5r

Book Title: Rhetoric and the Writing of History, 400-1500- Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Kempshall Matthew
Abstract: This book provides an analytical overview of the vast range of historiography which was produced in western Europe over a thousand-year period between c.400 and c.1500. Concentrating on the general principles of classical rhetoric central to the language of this writing, alongside the more familiar traditions of ancient history, biblical exegesis and patristic theology, this survey introduces the conceptual sophistication and semantic rigour with which medieval authors could approach their narratives of past and present events, and the diversity of ends to which this history could then be put. By providing a close reading of some of the historians who put these linguistic principles and strategies into practice (from Augustine and Orosius through Otto of Freising and William of Malmesbury to Machiavelli and Guicciardini), it traces and questions some of the key methodological changes that characterise the function and purpose of the western historiographical tradition in this formative period of its development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jhjx

1 HISTORY AND HISTORIOGRAPHY from: Rhetoric and the Writing of History, 400-1500
Abstract: The writing of history in the Middle Ages cannot be reduced to one single formula or definition. Instead, it straddled a huge variety of genres, covering – and often combining – world chronicles, annals, histories of communities, deeds of individuals, hagiographies, biographies, autobiographies and epic poems.¹ Medieval historiography therefore does not correspond to any fixed genre, in terms of either its form or its style – it could be written in prose, in verse or sometimes as both; it could be sung as a chanson de geste; it could be sculpted or painted or presented in tableaux; in the case of the ‘estorie’

4 VERISIMILITUDE AND TRUTH from: Rhetoric and the Writing of History, 400-1500
Abstract: In setting out the principles by which arguments could be found in order to construct a narrative of people and of events, classical manuals of rhetoric gave central importance to the criterion of verisimilitude. Quintilian may have disagreed with those who thought that the soleconcern of the orator was verisimilitude,¹ but otherwise medieval authors were presented with a very clear agenda: truth requires the art of rhetoric in order to make it plausible or convincing, in order to give it the appearance or simili tude of truth. This may involve composing or making things up (fingere) and the resulting

5 HISTORIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY from: Rhetoric and the Writing of History, 400-1500
Abstract: The influence of classical rhetoric on the writing of history in the Middle Ages centred on the relationship between the depiction of character (attributes of person) and the description of deeds (attributes of events), on the invention of arguments (causation, testimony and proof), and on the construction of a brief, lucid and, above all, verisimilar narrative. This does not mean, of course, that all the principles involved in each one of these areas were applied either simultaneously or consistently across the broad range of writings which the single term historiacould comprise and across the conventional periodisation of a thousand

1 Louise L. Lambrichs: from: Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) BEST VICTORIA
Abstract: The novels of Louise Lambrichs are brilliant but troubling psychological dramas focusing on the traumas that inhabit the family romance: incest, sterility, the death of those we love and the terrible legacy of mourning. Bringing together themes of loss and recompense, Lambrichs’s novels trace with in fi nite delicacy the reactions of those who suffer and seek obsessively for comfort and understanding. But equally they perform a subtle and often chilling evocation of the secrets, lies and crimes that bind a family together and create a pattern of behaviour that can motivate or cripple subsequent generations. Louise Lambrichs’s oeuvre comprises

3 The female vampire: from: Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) ROBSON KATHRYN
Abstract: Julia Kristeva opens her text, Soleil noir: dépression et mélancolie, with the claim that ‘Ecrire sur la mélancolie n’aurait de sens, pour ceux que la mélancolie ravage, que si l’écrit même venait de la mélancolie’ (‘For those who are racked by melancholia, writing about it would have meaning only if writing sprang out of that very melancholia’).¹ This chapter explores the possibility of writing ‘de la mélancolie’ through focusing on the work of Chantal Chawaf, whose writing may be described as ‘melancholicautofiction’, melancholic autobiographical fiction. We know from interviews and publicity notices accompanying Chawaf’s texts that she was born

14 The subversion of the gaze: from: Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) MAJUMDAR MARGARET A.
Abstract: Of mixed Franco-Algerian parentage, Leïla Sebbar spans a variety of genres in her writing, including short stories, journalism, essays, children’s writing and contributions to collaborative works, including collections of visual material. She also has a number of major novels to her credit. In its thematic content, Sebbar’s work straddles the Mediterranean, focusing attention on the dynamics between the generations. She is not engaged in any mission of nostalgia for lost youth, however. Her writing is resolutely orientated towards the youth of today. This focus is evident not only in her characters, but also in the young audience that she targets.

Book Title: Jonathan Lethem- Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Peacock James
Abstract: Jonathan Lethem is the first full-length study dedicated to the work of an exciting, genre-busting contemporary writer with an increasingly high profile in American literature. Examining all of Lethem’s novels, as well as a number of his short fictions, essays and critical works, this study shows how the author’s prolific output, his restlessness and his desire always to be subverting literary forms and genres, are consistent with his interest in subcultural identities. The human need to break off into small groupings, subcultures or miniature utopias is mirrored in the critical tendency to enforce generic boundaries. To break down the boundaries between genres, then, is partly to make a nonsense of critical distinctions between 'high' and 'low' literature, and partly to reflect the wider need to recognise difference, to appreciate that other people, no matter how outlandish and alien they may appear, share similar desires, experiences and problems. With this in mind, James Peacock argues that Lethem’s experiments with genre are not merely games or elaborate literary jokes, but ethical necessities, particularly when viewed in the light of the losses and traumas that shadow all of his writing. Jonathan Lethem, therefore, makes an important contribution not just to Lethem studies, but also to debates about genre and its position in postmodern or 'post-postmodern' literature. It will be of interest to all scholars and students of contemporary American writing, as well as those interested in genre fiction and literature’s relationship with subcultures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jht2

Series editorsʹ foreword from: Jonathan Lethem
Author(s) Monteith Sharon
Abstract: This innovative series reflects the breadth and diversity of writing over the last thirty years, and provides critical evaluations of established, emerging and critically neglected writers - mixing the canonical with the unexpected. It explores notions of the contemporary and analyses current and developing modes of representation with a focus on individual writers and their work. The series seeks to reflect both the growing body of academic research in the field, and the increasing prevalence of contemporary American and Canadian fiction on programmes of study in institutions of higher education around the world. Central to the series is a concern

7 ʹHiding in plain sightʹ: from: Jonathan Lethem
Abstract: In Chapter 4 it was noted that a feature of the novel in all its abundance is the misleading opportunity it appears to afford for interpretive success. ‘Come and get me’, it seems to say (it is no coincidence that Frank Kermode dubs reading for the obvious primary sense ‘carnal’ (Kermode, 1979: 9)), before closing the door and taking refuge in its own secrets. That so many scholars are still analysing Henry James stories is testament to the texts’ continued determination to deceive and to keep their secrets. If we do not make allowances for this, Kermode implies, if we

Conclusion from: Jonathan Lethem
Abstract: Anyone who has read ‘Five Fucks’, ‘Sleepy People’ (both 1996) or This Shape We’re Inmight find it surprising that Lethem claims to be an ‘extremely traditional writer’ (Personal Interview, 2009). He is ‘so devoted to the traditional means’ of ‘scenes and characters and dialogue and paragraph and plot’ and although he sometimes makes ‘intertextual jokes’, he believes there is nothing in his work to ‘threaten anyone short of the mandarins who just don’t want the Fantastic Four ever to be mentioned inside a novel’ (Personal Interview, 2009). Citing as a specific example the insertion of the ‘Liner Note’ into

4 St. Thomas Aquinas from: Christian Theologies of Scripture
Author(s) Candler Peter M.
Abstract: St. Thomas Aquinas (c. 1225–1274) was born in the castle of Roccasecca, near Naples, Italy. His parents were of noble lineage and were kin to the emperors Henry VI and Frederick II. As a young boy, he was sent to the care of the monks at the Benedictine monastery at Monte Cassino, where he displayed an unusual precocity in intellectual and spiritual matters, not to mention a mastery of the liberal arts. Around 1236 he began study in the University of Naples, where he became acquainted with the nascent Order of Preachers. Despite the attempts of his aristocratic family

6 Martin Luther from: Christian Theologies of Scripture
Author(s) Mattox Mickey L.
Abstract: Born in Eisleben, Germany, Martin Luther (1483–1546) was baptized on the feast day of St. Martin of Tours, for whom he was named. From 1501 to 1505, Luther attended the University of Erfurt, where he earned bachelor’s and master’s degrees. At his father’s urging, he embarked on the study of law but soon left and joined the mendicant order of Augustinian Hermits. He took final vows shortly afterward, and in 1507 he was ordained a priest. Luther was intellectually gifted, but a keen awareness of his own sinfulness left him frequently melancholy and fearful of God’s wrath. His superior,

8 Scripture and Theology in Early Modern Catholicism from: Christian Theologies of Scripture
Author(s) Prudlo Donald S.
Abstract: The Counter-Reformation is a period in the history of the Roman Catholic Church during which the Church dealt with issues arising from the emergence of Protestantism. Though Catholic reform predated Martin Luther, nonetheless the challenges that he and other reformers presented led the Church to make serious and sustained changes. The focus of the Counter-Reformation was the Council of Trent (1545–63), an event that left few areas of Catholic life untouched. The Council issued broad dogmatic decrees on the sacraments, the scriptures, justification, and Church government, in addition to passing many ordinances on internal Church reform. The thorough reforms

16 Scripture in the African-American Christian Tradition from: Christian Theologies of Scripture
Author(s) Murphy Stephen W.
Abstract: At St. John Baptist, a small African-American Baptist Church outside of Columbia, South Carolina, Pastor Roosevelt Robinson gathers the church elders in his office before each service to pray aloud for God’s blessing. One fall morning in 2002, Deacon Willie Simmons started off the prayers of the elders with the type of emotional appeal to God that would have evoked a vigorous or enthusiastic response from any black congregation:

10 Jesus’s Baptism from: Jesus the Central Jew
Abstract: In the view of New Testament scholars, the baptism of Jesus by John is most probably historical, if only for the simple reason that it is inconceivable that the early Christian church would have invented such an embarrassing story about Jesus going through a “sacrament” of repentance for the remission of sins. Although the Fourth Gospel all but ignores the episode, the three Synoptics more or less reluctantly report it. It is even presented as an important event, marked by a theophany declaring Jesus the Son of God. Historically, we may imagine that Jesus at that point was seized by

Introducción from: Desarrollo y eficacia organizacional
Abstract: Vivimos en una sociedad en transformación y los modelos de gestión pública y privada desarrollados en el periodo industrial resultan insuficientes –y a veces incluso contraproducentes– para lograr la flexibilidad y rapidez que son necesarias en una economía de servicios que opera a escala global. Estos cambios son mucho más profundos que la mera implementación de tecnologías informáticas o la aplicación de algún nuevo modelo de mercadeo, por mencionar un par de ejemplos de las muchas innovaciones existentes. Si buscamos la modernización del Estado, la implementación de gestión por proyectos en una empresa o la efectividad de una organización sin

CAPÍTULO 3 El diagnóstico organizacional from: Desarrollo y eficacia organizacional
Abstract: “El conocimiento clínico todavía es, primero que nada, la interpretación de lo que le está pasando a un paciente y cómo esta se adecua a las interpretaciones disponibles. Este conocimiento todavía se denomina una opinión; la habilidad para llegar a esta opinión se llama capacidad de razonamiento” (Montgomery, 2005, pág. 16). Esta cita de Montgomery se refiere al diagnóstico médico; sin embargo, lo que dice también puede utilizarse para describir el proceso de diagnóstico organizacional, ya que, al igual que en el caso de las personas, los sistemas organizacionales son diferentes unos de otros y las intervenciones se deciden buscando

Anexo capítulo 7: from: Desarrollo y eficacia organizacional
Abstract: En muchas ocasiones los clientes piden entrenamiento o formación de equipos para grupos de trabajo en los que cada sujeto actúa en un solo rol y en los que no se requiere generar nuevas estrategias, sino que mejorar la comunicación. En estos casos es más conveniente realizar un entrenamiento en negociación, tema al que se dedicará este anexo.

CAPÍTULO 8 Cultura organizacional from: Desarrollo y eficacia organizacional
Abstract: Si recordamos los modelos de diagnóstico organizacional revisados en el capítulo 3, observaremos que la idea de cultura aparece por primera vez en el modelo de Hax y Majluf (1993), originado en la segunda mitad de los 80. Esto no es casual, ya la idea de cultura organizacional se hace popular con el inicio del cambio social post fordista y debido a la necesidad de intervenir no sólo en las creencias o percepciones, como era el foco de los estudios de clima organizacional, sino que identificar los valores y estructuras cognitivas que facilitan o dificultan el desarrollo de las capacidades

CAPÍTULO V IGUAL PROTECCIÓN DE LOS DERECHOS from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: Aunque relacionada y complementaria de la isonomía enla ley, esta especie de igualdad es distinta de aquella, pues se refiere a la interpretación y aplicación, uniforme o sin diferencias arbitrarias, por los órganos estatales y los particulares del ordenamiento jurídico vigente en casos o situaciones concretas, especialmente cuando son semejantes, más todavía en el extremo de ser idénticas. Trátase de una novedad de la Carta Política en vigor, aún no suficientemente desarrollada por la doctrina, menos todavía en la jurisprudencia.

CAPÍTULO VII INVIOLABILIDAD DEL HOGAR Y DE LAS COMUNICACIONES PRIVADAS from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: Ambos son atributos inalienables de la persona, indicativos de su proyección desde lo íntimo hacia la comunidad y de la incidencia de esta en la autonomía del sujeto. Como tales, trátase de derechos inalienables, pero susceptibles de ser adecuadamente o no ejercidos, característica que justifica regularlos para que se encuadren en la legitimidad que los justifica por principio. Sólo la ley puede restringir su goce, aunque siempre respetando la esencia libertaria que hemos destacado. Esta potestad normativa se halla, sin embargo, sujeta al control de supremacía por el Tribunal Constitucional y al homónimo político de los medios de comunicación. Reabramos

CAPÍTULO VIII LIBERTAD DE CONCIENCIA Y DE CULTOS from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: La Constitución asegura a todas las personas la libertad de conciencia, la manifestación de todas las creencias y el ejercicio libre de todos los cultos. Trátase de tres derechos relacionados pero distintos, siendo el primero de ellos tan vinculado al fuero interno del individuo que pudo quedar ubicado antes en la numeración del artículo 19 del Código Político. Los problemas que se sufren en la actualidad están vinculados a la penetración, por medios externos, en la conciencia de la persona para manipularla sin ninguna consideración ética. Esos problemas se observan también, desde el extremo opuesto, cuando se invoca tal libertad

CAPÍTULO IX LIBERTAD PERSONAL Y SEGURIDAD INDIVIDUAL from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: Trátase de un derecho público subjetivo esencial para el ejercicio de otra serie de atributos inalienables de la persona. Su relevancia se capta al tener presente que, sin libertad física o ambulatoria efectivamente garantizada, el ejercicio de numerosos derechos fundamentales del individuo, como tal y asociado, queda impedido o suprimido. Por ejemplo, eso sucede con el derecho de reunión o de manifestación en sus más diversas especies, o bien, a propósito de múltiples manifestaciones de la libertad de expresión o del derecho de asociación y la libertad de trabajo que presuponen la homónima de desplazamiento.

CAPÍTULO XIII DERECHO A LA EDUCACIÓN from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: Para el Estado es obligatorio promover la educación parvularia y garantizar el acceso gratuito y el financiamiento fiscal al segundo nivel de transición, sin que éste constituya requisito para el ingreso a la educación básica 486.

CAPÍTULO XV LIBERTAD DE EXPRESIÓN from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: La libertad de emitir opinión y la de informar, sin censura previa, en cualquier forma y por cualquier medio, sin perjuicio de responder de los delitos y abusos que se cometan en el ejercicio de estas libertades, en conformidad a la ley, la que deberá ser de quórum calificado.

CAPÍTULO XVI DERECHO DE REUNIÓN from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: El derecho a reunirse pacíficamente sin permiso previo y sin armas. Las reuniones en las plazas, calles y demás lugares de uso público, se regirán por las disposiciones generales de policía.

CAPÍTULO XVII DERECHO DE PETICIÓN from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: 329. Coordinaciones. Trátase de un derecho de ejercicio amplio en cuanto puede serlo ante cualquier autoridad, sin excepción alguna. No obstante, la doctrina ha realzado la importancia de este derecho en relación con los tribunales de justicia, en el sentido de que el derecho de acceder a ellos, a través de la acción procesal respectiva, sería una manifestación

CAPÍTULO XVIII DERECHO DE ASOCIACIÓN from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: El derecho de asociarse sin permiso previo.

CAPÍTULO XIX LIBERTAD DE TRABAJO from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: Se prohíbe cualquiera discriminación que no se base en la capacidad o idoneidad personal, sin perjuicio de que la ley pueda exigir la nacionalidad chilena o límites de edad para determinados casos.

CAPÍTULO XX IGUALDAD ANTE LOS CARGOS PÚBLICOS from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: La admisión a todas las funciones y empleos públicos, sin otros requisitos que los que impongan la Constitución y las leyes.

CAPÍTULO XXII DERECHO DE SINDICARSE from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: La ley contemplará los mecanismos que aseguren la autonomía de estas organizaciones. Las organizaciones sindicales no podrán intervenir en actividades político partidistas.

CAPÍTULO XXV DERECHO A DESARROLLAR ACTIVIDADES EMPRESARIALES from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: El Estado y sus organismos podrán desarrollar actividades empresariales o participar en ellas sólo si una ley de quórum calificado los autoriza. En tal caso, esas actividades estarán sometidas a la legislación común aplicable a los particulares, sin perjuicio de las excepciones que por motivos justificados establezca la ley, la que deberá ser, asimismo, de

CAPÍTULO XXVI AMPARO ECONÓMICO from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: La acción podrá intentarse dentro de seis meses contados desde que se hubiere producido la infracción, sin más formalidades ni procedimiento que el establecido para el recurso de amparo, ante la Corte de Apelaciones respectiva, la que conocerá de

CAPÍTULO XXVIII LIBRE APROPIABILIDAD DE BIENES from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: La libertad para adquirir el dominio de toda clase de bienes, excepto aquellos que la naturaleza ha hecho comunes a todos los hombres o que deban pertenecer a la Nación toda y la ley lo declare así. Lo anterior es sin perjuicio de lo prescrito en otros preceptos de esta Constitución.

CAPÍTULO XXIX DERECHO DE PROPIEDAD from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: 470. Introducción. El artículo 19 Nº 24 de la Carta Fundamental es una disposición extensa, tanto que puede afirmarse que no hay otra más larga en su texto, salvo el artículo 93. Esa longitud es paralela a la complejidad del estatuto que asegura. Una y otra característica se explican y justifican, sin embargo, por la constitucionalización del dominio, ya que la propiedad es de aquellas instituciones que sufrió hondos y frecuentes cambios en los períodos de transición, como ocurrió en Chile en 1925, 1967, 1971 y 1980. Se pretende, por consiguiente, infundir en la Carta Fundamental estabilidad al ordenamiento jurídico de

CAPÍTULO XXX PROPIEDAD ARTÍSTICA,INTELECTUAL E INDUSTRIAL from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: 549. Introducción. Trátase, según la Constitución, de tres especies de propiedad, lo cual conceptualmente es discutible. La importancia de ellas es creciente, debido a que, en la Sociedad Civil de nuestro tiempo, la cultura y las bellas artes, la ciencia y la técnica, las sistematizaciones novedosas en las humanidades y las ciencias sociales se han masificado y globalizado. Más todavía, nuestra sociedad, con desarrollo en nivel aún relativo, se ha convertido en otra de mayor complejidad en los seis aspectos mencionados. La gran propiedad ya no es la propiedad inmueble, sino que el dominio intelectual y, más que nada, el de

CAPÍTULO XXXI DERECHO A LA SEGURIDAD JURÍDICA from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: La seguridad jurídica, llamada también certeza legítima, ha sido entendida como finalidad u objetivo del Derecho, en un nivel de importancia semejante a la justicia y al bien común822. Otros autores, sin embargo, consideran que dicha seguridad es un estado o situación de la comunidad que goza de ella, de modo que el orden, en general, y el orden público especialmente, por un lado, y la certeza legítima o seguridad jurídica, de otro, serían conceptos asociados, inseparables y complementarios823.

CUARTA PARTE DEBERES CONSTITUCIONALES from: Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: Necesario es puntualizar, sin embargo, que en sus artículos 22 y 23 la Carta Fundamental reúne sólo determinados deberes y no al conjunto completo de

IV. LA MODERNIDAD Y SU CRISIS COMO HORIZONTE TEMPORAL EN LA OBRA DE JOSÉ MEDINA ECHAVARRÍA from: José Medina Echavarría y la sociología como ciencia social concreta (1939-1980)
Abstract: El concepto de modernidad corresponde a uno de los muchos criterios de ordenación cronológica y de interpretación presentes en el pensamiento histórico permeándolo de un profundo contenido dinámico y a veces evolutivo. Es un concepto de época que permite la formación de un sentido histórico y a la vez puede considerarse como una herramienta metodológica de investigación, pues delimita temáticas y objetos de investigación (Zima, 2004). Medina no habló propiamente del concepto modernidad; sin embargo, el orden de las preocupaciones, los referentes intelectuales y las ideas orientadoras del futuro son claramente identificables con este concepto. Debido a que esta categoría

CONCLUSIONES from: José Medina Echavarría y la sociología como ciencia social concreta (1939-1980)
Abstract: La interpretación propuesta en este libro supuso dejar de lado factores que pueden resultar claves en una historia de la sociología centrada en el papel de las elites intelectuales, sus querellas y pasiones, sus filias y fobias, sus redes, las intenciones y los resultados de la acción, como es propio de las biografías intelectuales o de textos como las memorias personales. Estos son, sin duda, invaluables fuentes de registro del pasado, cuyo sello distintivo es el recuerdo de los individuos. Sin embargo, esta perspectiva de análisis resultó incompatible con el objetivo trazado en la investigación, centrada en proponer una interpretación

BOLÍVAR EN COLOMBIA: from: Entre el olvido y el recuerdo
Author(s) Melo Jorge Orlando
Abstract: La figura histórica de Simón Bolívar se elaboró de manera muy diferente en los tres países que hicieron parte de Colombia. El caso venezolano ha sido estudiado en forma exhaustiva por Germán Carrera Damas, Elías Pino Iturrieta y otros. Había, sin duda, una urgencia peculiar, pues desde la segunda mitad del siglo XIX la figura de Bolívar y sus ideas políticas y sociales se usaron con frecuencia en diversos proyectos políticos. El caso de Ecuador, cuyos gobernantes fueron los únicos que respaldaron al Libertador en 1830, cuando la Nueva Granada y Venezuela le daban la espalda, fue analizado, breve, pero

¿DEPARTAMENTO DEL SUR, DE NARIÑO, DE LA INMACULADA CONCEPCIÓN DE MARÍA O DE AGUALONGO? from: Entre el olvido y el recuerdo
Author(s) Hoyos María Teresa Álvarez
Abstract: En 1904, a raíz de la secesión de la Provincia de Panamá del territorio colombiano para constituirse en República independiente, internacionalmente reconocida, los poderes ejecutivo y legislativo colombianos se vieron obligados a tomar medidas de urgencia ante las tendencias que amenazaban deslegitimar todavía más al Estado centralista. Las invocaciones a la grandeza de la patria no habían llevado al país a ninguna movilización popular, mientras los deseos separatistas proliferaban. Son documentables estos deseos en regiones que venían exigiendo, desde décadas atrás, la reforma del régimen político-administrativo, mayor participación en la vida pública “nacional” y reconocimiento de sus singularidades culturales, como

EXCULPACIÓN Y EXALTACIÓN DE MIGUEL ANTONIO CARO from: Entre el olvido y el recuerdo
Author(s) Rincón Carlos
Abstract: Un dogma acerca de Miguel Antonio Caro, cuya vigencia se extendió hasta finales del siglo XX, selló la memoria cultural de los colombianos. Sus formulaciones básicas fueron acuñadas en un lapso muy corto, entre 1917 y 1923, dentro de una ofensiva reinvidicadora que, sin haber transcurrido siquiera una década desde su fallecimiento, buscó exculpar a Caro de sus graves yerros políticos y consagrarlo como ancestro fundacional. No sólo se trató de exaltar la significación de sus actividades de traductor y comentarista autodidacta de Virgilio, apologista, gramático, periodista y poeta.

UNA VEZ MÁS: from: Conmemoraciones y crisis
Author(s) Parra Lisímaco
Abstract: Desde hace algunos años se ha vuelto usual abordar la Ilustración con gentilicio, como cuando se dice “Ilustración francesa”, “escocesa” o “alemana”. Debemos tal uso a los historiadores, e indiscutiblemente este tiene sus ventajas. En efecto, al remitirnos a condiciones tan específicas, tales denominaciones nos obligan a precisar los múltiples matices que configuran ese complejo movimiento histórico que se resume en el concepto —valga la redundancia, genérico— de Ilustración. Por definición, el concepto prescinde de la singularidad del individuo, pero el interés del historiador consiste precisamente en reivindicar tal individualidad, sacándola a la luz.

DIOS, MONARQUÍA, SOBERANÍA E INDEPENDENCIA EN LAS CONSTITUCIONES PROVINCIALES DURANTE LA PRIMERA REPÚBLICA from: Conmemoraciones y crisis
Author(s) A. Jorge Tomás Uribe
Abstract: Como se sabe, la red de los ilustrados no solo incluía Santafé y otras figuras de España o de su imperio del resto del mundo, sino otras localidades del virreinato.

LA HISTORIA AL OÍDO: from: Conmemoraciones y crisis
Author(s) Figueroa Cristina Lleras
Abstract: Los radioteatros históricos que se realizaron ente 1940 y 1970 en Bogotá emitidos por la Radiodifusora Nacional (hoy Radio Nacional de Colombia) constituyeron una forma privilegiada de difusión de la historia a mediados del siglo XX. Su popularidad —en cuanto a su empleo, pues no tenemos cifras que confirmen el índice de sintonía ni el segmento de sus radioescuchas— se debe a que presentaban una “verdad” histórica cuya veracidad se apoyaba en hechos registrados en documentos y publicaciones y “todos los elementos que teníamos a nuestro alcance: música, efectos de sonido, entonación dramática de las voces, sincronización y balance entre

EL MESTIZO QUE DESAPARECE: from: Conmemoraciones y crisis
Author(s) Rappaport Joanne
Abstract: “Mestizo” es tal vez una de las categorías etnoraciales más complejas que encontramos en la documentación colonial latinoamericana. Otros términos, tales como “indio” y “español”, funcionaban en la Colonia como colectividades cuyos miembros gozaban de ciertos derechos y obligaciones. Pero los miembros de las categorías intermedias, tales como los mestizos, aparecen en, y luego desaparecen del, registro documental. No pertenecen a un grupo, sino que son asignados, dependiendo del contexto, a una u otra categoría. Es decir, “mestizo” es una categoría colonial, pero no es un grupo. Y la categoría en sí era heterogénea. En la época colonial, existía una

POPULISMO, ESTADO AUTORITARIO Y DEMOCRACIA RADICAL EN AMÉRICA LATINA from: El eterno retorno del populismo en América Latina y el Caribe
Author(s) Quintana Óscar Mejía
Abstract: La dinámica política reciente en algunos países de América Latina advierte el resurgimiento de formas autoritarias de Estado, que algunas teorías interpretan como populismo, no solo por el tipo de políticas implementado sino también por las restricciones impuestas a aquellos sectores ciudadanos que encarnan discursos alternativos a los lineamientos dominantes o hegemónicos. Frente a ello, resulta imprescindible emprender la búsqueda de marcos de interpretación teórica alternativos desde donde comprender y enfrentar estas nuevas expresiones de autoritarismo. El presente trabajo sostendrá que la promoción de una democracia radical en sus diversas formas constituye una respuesta efectiva que merece ser considerada en

AUTONOMÍA PERSONAL Y CIUDADANÍA DEMOCRÁTICA. from: El eterno retorno del populismo en América Latina y el Caribe
Author(s) Barreto Luz Marina
Abstract: El propósito de este trabajo es explorar las condiciones de tipo ético y antropológico que volverían plausibles y podrían, inversamente, entorpecer la creación de una institucionalidad pública democrática conforme a los ideales de la “teoría del discurso” de Jürgen Habermas o los lineamientos de la política deliberativa. Nos hacemos esta pregunta no precisamente desde una preferencia afectiva por el modelo habermasiano, sino desde la convicción de que el modelo de una institucionalidad política deliberativa, compartido con muchos filósofos políticos y teóricos de la ética empeñados en un mejoramiento de las condiciones políticas en las sociedades pluralistas de Occidente (en Europa

1 Making or Shaking the State: from: Cairo Contested
Author(s) Adham Khaled
Abstract: More than two decades have elapsed since Abdel Halim Ibrahim Abdel Halim, a contemporary Egyptian architect, released this emphatic manifesto. He did so shortly after entering an architectural competition for the Cultural Park for Children in Cairo, a project sponsored by the Egyptian Ministry of Culture. The politicized tone of Abdel Halim’s manifesto raised, and still would raise, eyebrows among Egyptian architects and critics.

4 The Siege of Imbaba, Egypt’s Internal ‘Other,’ and the Criminalization of Politics from: Cairo Contested
Author(s) Singerman Diane
Abstract: A negative, pejorative characterization of informal housing areas, manatiq al‘ashwayi’at, became a common refrain in Egyptian public discourse in the 1990s. These unplanned, lower-income, and poorly serviced areas came to be defined as a deviant phenomenon and, by association, the residents of those areas as deviants. Yet, estimates suggest that between 4.7 and 7 million Cairenes lived in informal housing areas in this decade.¹ What drives the labeling of a third or half of the residents of Cairo as deviants? This chapter examines how and why such a large share of Cairo’s residents have been deviantized and stigmatized. An answer

6 Cairo’s City Government: from: Cairo Contested
Author(s) Néfissa Sarah Ben
Abstract: In January 2004, fourteen people were killed when an apartment building in the middle-class, residential suburb of Madinat Nasr burned down. Among the dead were twelve firefighters and police officers, who were trying to extinguish the fire. The fire started in the basement, which contained flammable items, such as aerosol pumps and plastic utensils, used by a business that was leasing first-floor space from the landlord. Since the building’s construction in 1981, the landlord had added seven extra floors without government authorization. Deadly fires are frequent in Cairo, and, as this case shows, they do not only occur in poor

10 Banished by the Quake: from: Cairo Contested
Author(s) Florin Bénédicte
Abstract: On 12 October 1992, a major earthquake ( zilzal) at 5.9 on the Richter scale, with its epicenter in Fayyum, southwest of Cairo, struck and officially caused 561 deaths and wounded 9,922 in Greater Cairo. In addition to the human casualties, 211 mosques crumbled and 1,087 schools and 5,004 buildings fell—damage that was exacerbated by extensive aftershocks (Blin 1993, 399; El Kadi 1993). The earthquake damaged 64 percent of all dwellings and 66 percent of all housing in the governorate of Cairo; the historic districts in the western part of the governorate were the hardest hit (Kamel 1994, 216). According

13 Land Disputes, the Informal City, and Environmental Discourse in Cairo from: Cairo Contested
Author(s) Bell Jennifer
Abstract: In the summer of 2000, an unexpected environmental protest took place in Giza City, on the west bank of the Nile in Greater Cairo. A group of several hundred residents of an informal area in the Pyramids district called ‘Amr ibn al-‘As converged in front of downtown government offices, holding placards that said, “No to fear, No to sewage, No to pollution” (“Saying No” 2000). Expressing outrage over a problem that afflicts informal areas as their population density increases, the residents’ signs alluded to the sewage that had submerged their dense neighborhood streets over the previous eight months. Having tried

14 Market Spaces: from: Cairo Contested
Author(s) Gertel Jörg
Abstract: On 25 March 1992, a new ultra-modern wholesale market for fruit, vegetables, and fish was officially inaugurated by Egyptian President Hosni Mubarak in al-‘Ubur, in the vicinity of Cairo’s international airport. Although the official opening had already been delayed for two years after the market’s completion, the new site was still missing an important element: merchants. In contrast, the old open-air wholesale market in downtown Cairo, in the quarter of Rod al-Farag, continued to operate as it had during half a century, much to the chagrin of the Egyptian government and some international experts.

Book Title: Tropical Apocalypse-Haiti and the Caribbean End Times
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Munro Martin
Abstract: In Tropical Apocalypse,Martin Munro argues that since the earliest days of European colonization, Caribbean-and especially Haitian-history has been shaped by apocalyptic events so that the region has, in effect, been living for centuries in an end time without end. By engaging with the contemporary apocalyptic turn in Caribbean studies and lived reality, he not only provides important historical contextualization for a general understanding of apocalypse in the region but also offers an account of the state of Haitian society and culture in the decades before the 2010 earthquake. Inherently interdisciplinary, his work ranges widely through Caribbean and Haitian thought, historiography, political discourse, literature, film, religion, and ecocriticism in its exploration of whether culture in these various forms can shape the future of a country.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt15r3x8s

4 Religion, Nature, and the Apocalypse from: Tropical Apocalypse
Abstract: In Failles,Yanick Lahens’s first book published after the earthquake of 2010, the author writes of seeing her husband after he returns from town on the evening of January 12, announcing that he has seen the apocalypse. This statement makes Lahens think immediately of her use of the same word in her last novel,La couleur de l’aube. She had hesitated, she says, before using the word, striking it out three times before finally writing: “The Apocalypse has already taken place many times on this island” (27). The word had remained with her well after the publication of the novel,

2 The Marsh of Modernity from: Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Palsson Gisli
Abstract: Nature is unruly, continually causing problems through flooded rivers and perfect storms and, of course, receding glaciers and global warming. In the modernist language of mainstream ecology, things spin out of control, beyond steady states and tipping points. While some of these events may be less surprising than they used to be, they often pose spectacular problems for human society and, as a result, demand close attention and concerted action. Wetlands have repeatedly provided apt examples, refusing to “behave”. Representing a substantial part of the earth’s land surface (about 6%), wetlands occur practically everywhere, on every continent (except Antarctica), in

7 What Future for the Life-History Approach to Prehistoric Monuments in the Landscape? from: Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Holtorf Cornelius
Abstract: Although things are not living beings, in a metaphorical sense they can be considered to have lives. Things are made; they often do something; and over time many things move from place to place. Their meanings and functions change in different contexts. As time goes by things age and eventually they end up at a final resting place where they gradually disintegrate. Things can reach very different ages, from a few minutes to many millennia, but once dead only very few are brought back, for example as antiques or collectables, and given additional meanings in a new life. Accounts of

15 Fatal Attraction from: Landscape Biographies
Author(s) van der Laarse Rob
Abstract: Landscape and heritage form a strong couple in European culture. Since the Renaissance landscapes have been perceived as ‘art’ and valuated by scenic qualities, represented in painting and reproduced through design and architecture. This connoisseurship is still a basic assumption of heritage conservation and tourism, working under the fetish of authenticity by singling out aesthetic styles and iconic periods. Although recent biographical approaches to historical landscapes have opposed this reductionism by stressing long-term development, the landscape/mindscape nexus can – in my view – not be grasped by the prevailing metaphor of an archaeological layering of time. Alternatively, a more dynamic

18 Biographies of Landscape: Rebala Heritage Reserve, Estonia from: Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Sooväli-Sepping Helen
Abstract: Heritage protection in Estonia is slowly following the steps of a European paradigmatic shift from focusing solely on the conservation and protection of localised, material objects towards conservation and protection of the environment in its widest sense of the word. Moreover, public debates about what is heritage and who is in charge of heritage management have emerged among different social groups. These discussions accord with the theoretical considerations about the role of heritage in society. Heritage experts Jan Kolen and Mathijs Witte (2006), among others, argue that cultural heritage is not only related to buildings and sites, but also to

4 Post-Holocaust Book Restitutions: from: Post-Holocaust France and the Jews, 1945-1955
Author(s) LEFF LISA MOSES
Abstract: Recent studies about Jews in postwar France have shown that, for the most part, the newly reestablished republican state treated Jewish citizens in much the same way that they had been treated in the Third Republic, and indeed, in all French regimes since Napoleon. That is, Jews were not singled out for special treatment but were rather considered citizens indistinguishable from their fellow Frenchmen. For Jews, this reestablishment of republicanism was a “liberation” indeed, since it signaled an end to the anti-Semitic persecution of the war years. Yet it also brought with it a certain forgetting, making it difficult for

7 Jewish Children’s Homes in Post-Holocaust France: from: Post-Holocaust France and the Jews, 1945-1955
Author(s) CAIRNS LUCILLE
Abstract: This chapter will examine the experience of young Jewish girls who, having survived the Shoah as hidden children ( enfants cachés) sheltered by French opponents of the collaborationist Vichy regime, found themselves orphaned at Liberation and placed in Jewish children’s homes. Their particular vulnerability, and correspondingly the special duty of care toward them expected of state and community assistance organs, betoken a much bigger ethical picture than their apparently very spatially singular and temporally limited situation might at first suggest. It is an ethical picture that, albeit in inflected form, globally permeates various different geopolitical configurations today.

8 Post-Holocaust French Writing: from: Post-Holocaust France and the Jews, 1945-1955
Author(s) CHAOUAT BRUNO
Abstract: Unsurprisingly, a period of latency, albeit a relatively short one, was needed before these works could appear.¹ Before turning to this corpus of texts published two years after the war, therefore, it is relevant to recall that in the early to mid-1940s,

11 René Cassin and the Alliance Israélite Universelle: from: Post-Holocaust France and the Jews, 1945-1955
Author(s) WINTER JAY
Abstract: This chapter contextualizes the claim that French Jews emerged from World War II with a sense of disenchantment with the republican tradition by presenting the opposite case, that of a man whose republican commitment was unshakable and indeed deepened by the war and the Shoah. René Cassin, jurist, international statesman, and one of the authors of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, never lost his faith in the republican project at home and abroad. From 1940 on, he worked to revitalize that tradition, not to discard or refashion it.¹

ACCIÓN, ÉTICA, POLÍTICA. from: Acción, ética, política
Abstract: El historiador Eric J. Hobsbawm ha mostrado que los siglos de la historia humana no empiezan exactamente el año 1 de una nueva centena.¹ Más que “periodos cronológicos” los siglos están jalonados por acontecimientos o procesos que establecen configuraciones históricas singulares con un tiempo propio diferente al del calendario. El siglo XIX, por ejemplo, “un siglo largo”, comenzó con el estallido de la Revolución francesa en 1789 y terminó con el comienzo de la Primera Guerra Mundial en 1913. El siglo XX, “un siglo corto”, comienza con la Primera Guerra Mundial y la Revolución rusa (que se produce como consecuencia

CLAUDE LEFORT Y EL REDESCUBRIMIENTO DE LO POLÍTICO from: Acción, ética, política
Abstract: Claude Lefort es un filósofo francés contemporáneo nacido en 1924 y muerto en octubre de 2010, cuya principal preocupación intelectual fue, desde el comienzo de su carrera en los años cuarenta, el desciframiento de la singularidad de nuestro tiempo a través del redescubrimiento de lo político. Siendo un joven de 25 años hizo parte, con cornelius castoriadis y otros filósofos menos conocidos en nuestro medio, del grupo que fundó la revista Socialisme et barbarieen 1949, en la cual se publicaron artículos de crítica al régimen soviético, que si bien no recibieron la acogida merecida en el momento de su

KANT Y MAQUIAVELO: from: Acción, ética, política
Abstract: Difícil es llevar a cabo una apreciación justa y cierta sobre la obra de Maquiavelo. Si la primera condición de un espíritu analítico es conquistar un lugar por encima de la veneración o el repudio, de la apología o la denuncia, en pocos casos se puede ejercitar con mayor dificultad esta condición como en El Príncipede Maquiavelo, objeto del escarnio más despiadado o de la más loca aprobación; o en la imagen de su autor, símbolo del demonio, personaje malvado de innumerables comedias, principio del mal, sinónimo de hipocresía, falsedad, ambición y venganza, pero también considerado como un profundo

HACIA UN CAMPO CONCEPTUAL Y NARRATIVO DE LA PEDAGOGÍA EN COLOMBIA. from: Paradigmas y conceptos en educación y pedagogía
Author(s) Vélez Óscar Saldarriaga
Abstract: ¿Existe, funciona, un campo conceptual de la pedagogía? ¿En Colombia? ¿Es legítimo, viable, o incluso útil, hablar de ello como profesores e intelectuales, pero también como ciudadanos? Los primeros resultados del proyecto Paradigmas y conceptos en educación y pedagogía, realizado por el Grupo Historia de la Práctica Pedagógica (ghpp), en asocio con el Grupo de Investigación sobre Formación y Antropología Pedagógica e Histórica (formaph), de la Universidad de Antioquia, ofrecen unas respuestas no solo paradójicas, sino contradictorias. Contestar estas “simples” preguntas ha terminado por ser mucho más complejo que decidir entre un sí o un no, asunto ya de por

SUJETO Y SUBJETIVIDAD EN LAS CIENCIAS DE LA EDUCACIÓN EN COLOMBIA. from: Paradigmas y conceptos en educación y pedagogía
Author(s) Quiceno Humberto
Abstract: Partimos del concepto campo conceptual de la pedagogía(ccp), que define Alberto Echeverri en su tesis de doctorado (2010: 40). Luego, Echeverri construyó un nuevo concepto, elcampo conceptual y narrativo de la pedagogía(ccnp) (Echeverri, 2010).³ A esos dos conceptos le agregamos la categoría “educación” para construir un nuevo concepto, que se llamaríacampo conceptual y narrativo de la educación y la pedagogía(ccnep). ¿Por qué introducir la educación en el campo? Porque la forma histórica del campo, entre 1970 y 2000, en Colombia, muestra que la pedagogía no puede dejar de ser pensada sin la educación. Sin embargo,

DESPLAZAMIENTOS Y EFECTOS EN LA FORMACIÓN DE UN CAMPO CONCEPTUAL Y NARRATIVO DE LA PEDAGOGÍA EN COLOMBIA (1989-2010) from: Paradigmas y conceptos en educación y pedagogía
Author(s) Sánchez Jesús Alberto Echeverri
Abstract: El presente artículo se inscribe en las corrientes investigativas que desde la década de 1960 buscan definir teórica y conceptualmente la pedagogía en Colombia, sin dejar, naturalmente, de tener en cuenta sus incidencias prácticas y políticas. Me refiero a los trabajos epistemológicos e históricos de la profesora Olga Lucía Zuluaga y su grupo de investigación, quienes desde 1975 hasta la fecha vienen trabajando en esta dirección. La otra corriente que se enmarca en esta perspectiva es la del profesor Mario Díaz Villa, quien realizó un minucioso estudio de la producción educativa y pedagógica en Colombia entre 1970 y 1990, partiendo

PEDAGOGÍA, EDUCACIÓN, MARGINALIDAD Y CRISIS EN COLOMBIA (1978-1990) from: Paradigmas y conceptos en educación y pedagogía
Author(s) de los Ríos Alexander Yarza
Abstract: En efecto, todavía estamos bregando con el impacto de largo alcance que la crisis económica y financiera global ha provocado no sólo en los sistemas bancarios del mundo entero, sino en todos los sectores del desarrollo humano, incluido el de la educación. Nos hallamos en una encrucijada. O bien continuamos como si no hubiera ocurrido nada y corremos el riesgo de arruinar los progresos

EL LUGAR DEL PERDÓN EN LA JUSTICIA EN CONTEXTOS DE TRANSICIÓN POLÍTICA from: Después de la violencia memoria y justicia
Author(s) Mauleon Xabier Etxeberria
Abstract: Las situaciones de transición política son, por definición, situaciones de excepción. En concordancia con ello, parece necesario que también sea de excepción la justicia con la que se afrontan los crímenes de la etapa de la que se pretende salir. En la práctica, esto tiende a traducirse en que se proponga una justicia imperfecta en su propio diseño, para el cual se ofrecen modelos diversos. y es relativamente común que de un modo u otro se pretenda implicar en ellos al perdón, con frecuencia con signi-ficados equívocos que acaban siendo engañosos—sin que esto signifique que deban ser contundentemente unívocos

LA CUADRATURA DEL CÍRCULO: from: Después de la violencia memoria y justicia
Author(s) Villa Hernando Valencia
Abstract: La solución política negociada del conflicto armado interno en Colombia, como resultado eventual de las conversaciones de paz que se celebran desde el 15 de noviembre de 2012 en La Habana, entre el Gobierno del presidente Juan Manuel Santos y las Fuerzas Armadas Revolucionarias de Colombia (FARC), equivaldría a la cuadratura del círculo porque supondría establecer un armisticio justo y duradero entre una república oligárquica y una guerrilla comunista que libran una guerra civil no solo vergon zosa sino también vergonzante, cuyas principales consecuencias, tras cincuenta años de legitimidades en pugna y de hostilidades en descomposición, son un empate militar

Book Title: The Secret Life of Stories-From Don Quixote to Harry Potter, How Understanding Intellectual Disability Transforms the Way We Read
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Bérubé Michael
Abstract: In The Secret Life of Stories, Michael Bérubé tells a dramatically different tale, in a compelling account of how an understanding of intellectual disability can transform our understanding of narrative. Instead of focusing on characters with disabilities, he shows how ideas about intellectual disability inform an astonishingly wide array of narrative strategies, providing a new and startling way of thinking through questions of time, self-reflexivity, and motive in the experience of reading. Interweaving his own stories with readings of such texts as Faulkner'sThe Sound and the Fury, Haddon'sThe Curious Incident of the Dog in the Night-Time, Kingston'sThe Woman Warrior, and Philip K. Dick'sMartian Time-Slip, Bérubé puts his theory into practice, stretching the purview of the study of literature and the role of disability studies within it. Armed only with the tools of close reading, Bérubé demonstrates the immensely generative possibilities in the ways disability is deployed within fiction, finding in them powerful meditations on what it means to be a social being, a sentient creature with an awareness of mortality and causality-and sentience itself. Persuasive and witty, Michael Bérubé engages Harry Potter fans and scholars of literature alike. For all readers,The Secret Life of Storieswill fundamentally change the way we think about the way we read.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt15zc6mw

CHAPTER THREE Self-Awareness from: The Secret Life of Stories
Abstract: Literary texts have any number of ways of marking their awareness of themselves as literary texts. Some are cloying; some are trivial; some are merely cute. Some involve explicitly metafictional engagements with the fictionality of fiction, as in the closing passage of Beckett’s Molloy, echoing and complicating the opening passage of the novella’s second section: “Then I went back into the house and wrote, It is midnight. The rain is beating on the windows. It was not midnight. It was not raining” (176). Some involve more subtle, implicit meditations on the degree of readerly self-consciousness necessary for reading, as in

Conclusion: from: The Secret Life of Stories
Abstract: I was discussing chapters 2 and 3 of Lisa Zunshine’s Why We Read Fiction. I was doing so for two reasons: one, to establish her unfortunate reliance on Simon Baron-Cohen, right down to her acceptance of his description of autism as the “most severe of all childhoodpsychiatric conditions” (qtd. at 7; emphasis added), a phrase that would not have looked at all out

CHAPTER 5 A Christian Intellectual and the Moral Life from: A Godly Humanism
Abstract: It is commonplace to note that, since the years of the Second Vatican Council, our world has changed culturally, morally, politically, ecclesiastically. At the close of the Council, there was not a single country outside the totalitarian world in which abortion on demand was licit. The great ideological battles of the time took place between the still vigorous Communist world and the Western democracies. Soviet premier Khrushchev threatened in 1956 that the economic machine of the Soviet Union would “bury” the West—and many Western intellectuals continued to believe that the Marxist-Leninist organization of the state offered the best hope

Book Title: Restoring the Right Relationship- Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): O’Brien Mark A
Abstract: A leading biblical scholar, Hans Heinrich Schmid, believes that righteousness, or the right order of the world, is 'the fundamental problem of our human existence'. It is a key theme in the Hebrew Bible/Old Testament's theology of creation and salvation, along with associated themes such as justice, steadfast love/loyalty, truth/ fidelity, compassion/mercy, sin and disorder/chaos. A number of studies of righteousness have been undertaken but most have tended to focus on Israel's call to be righteous, as voiced in particular in the Prophetic Books and the Psalter. In contrast, this book focuses on divine righteousness as the basis for all other notions of righteousness, as this is outlined in the foundational teaching or revelation of the Hebrew Bible/Old Testament— namely, the Torah or Pentateuch. It then undertakes a study of how righteousness in the Prophetic Books, the Psalter and the Book of Job relates to this foundational teaching.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t86h

1 In the Books of Joshua and Judges from: Restoring the Right Relationship
Abstract: The terms ‘righteous’ and ‘righteousness’ do not occur in the book of Joshua and, after reading its stories of the conquest, one could be forgiven for concluding ‘with good reason’. To a modern reader the divine command to utterly destroy another nation smacks of ‘ ethnic cleansing’ or genocide. Nevertheless, if one takes the literary and theological context of the larger Hebrew Bible/Old Testament into account, as well as its ANE context, some appreciation can be gained of the presence of such stories and their contribution to the theology of divine righteousness.

3 In the Books of Kings from: Restoring the Right Relationship
Abstract: 1 Kings 2:1–4 assures Solomon of blessing and prosperity as long as he remains loyal to God ‘as it is

THEOLOGICAL REFLECTION from: Experiencing Scripture
Abstract: i. They speak eloquently of God: of the inner being and benevolence of God, desirous of peace and justice, longing for blessing for all the families of the earth.

Book Title: The Church in China- Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): Rule Paul
Abstract: China has been a challenge to Christianity since the beginning of modern times, and it remains so today. Here is a great civilisation comprising a quarter of humankind, yet largely untouched by Christian values and beliefs. Any theological evaluation of the state of world Christianity that does not take China into account is impoverished and radically incomplete.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t8f4

Introduction from: The Church in China
Author(s) Rule Paul
Abstract: China has been a challenge to Christianity since the beginning of modern times and it remains so today. Here is a great civilisation comprising a quarter of humankind, yet largely untouched by Christian values and beliefs. Any theological evaluation of the state of world Christianity that does not take China into account is impoverished and radically incomplete.

Chapter Four The Fifth Encounter Between Christianity and China: from: The Church in China
Author(s) Heyndrickx Jeroom
Abstract: Historically the four encounters which have taken place between Christianity and Chinese culture, present a dramatic history! Today Christians in China still suffer the negative consequences of the failures of the past. However, in the past twenty-five years, the Chinese people have shown an increasing interest in Christianity, in ways nev er before experienced. Will this fifth encounter between Christianity and modern China succeed? While we can only speculate, it is very clear after so many failures, that the encounter will not succeed if the church turns back on the road of confrontation. Only by persevering in dialogue

Chapter Five Athens or Beijing? from: The Church in China
Author(s) Rule Paul
Abstract: In the notorious Regensburg address in September 2006 in which Pope Benedict made his remarks about Islam, misrepresented and misinterpreted in the media, he made some further comments which deserve, but have not received, more attention. He attacked the ‘dehellenization’ of theology and defended ‘the thesis

Chapter Six Buddhism and the Religious Awakening of China from: The Church in China
Author(s) Vermander Benoît
Abstract: This is not surprising; from the very beginning of Buddhist expansion in China, the monastic community constitutes the axis around which rotate the devotional practices, the beliefs and the institutional continuity of Buddhism. A liturgical place, the temple acts as a collective intercessor for the community

Pastor Dietrich Bonhoeffer and Professor Gerhard Ritter: from: The Bonhoeffer Legacy
Author(s) Moses John A
Abstract: Dietrich Bonhoeffer (1906–1945) is today acknowledged world-wide as arguably the most significant German theologian since Martin Luther, and this is due to the stand he took against the palpable evil of National Socialism and his consequent martyrdom under the dictatorship of, Adolf Hitler, 1933–1945. Gerhard Ritter (1888–1967), the doyen of modern German historians during his later life, was also a most devout Lutheran and had been imprisoned by the Nazis in the last months of the Second World War for his part in conspiring against the regime. He is now remembered by a remnant of scholars interested

‘Self-Other’ or ‘Other-Self-Other’? from: The Bonhoeffer Legacy
Author(s) Lovat Terrence
Abstract: The article focuses on the understanding of vulnerability that is found in the thought of Dietrich Bonhoeffer and Emmanuel Levinas. For Bonhoeffer, vulnerability is best understood as a form of ‘vulnerable discipleship’, that is, a choosing to be vulnerable for the other which aligns with his understanding of costly grace. For Levinas, vulnerability is primarily concerned with the vulnerability of the other person and, later in his thought, the vulnerability of the subject who is responsible for the other person. In exploring the grounds for possible conversation between these two thinkers, we argue that Levinas has potential to offer a

Conclusion from: Between the 'Mysticism of Politics' and the 'Politics of Mysticism'
Abstract: This has been a study of the mystical-political dialectic as it has emerged in theological reflection and through historical practice within the modern Roman Catholic period. I have suggested that such a reflection is necessitated by the universal call to holiness articulated at the Second Vatican Council. This proposes the secularity as a significant locus for the pursuit of the spiritual life. In this context a negotiation between ‘the mystical’ and ‘the political’ and the attempt to live a particular integration between them will only increasingly become apparent. It is, perhaps, the spiritual challenge of the legacy of Vatican II.

Book Title: God's Word and the Church's Council-Vaticann II and Divine Revelation
Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): Monaghan Christopher
Abstract: The publication of the Vatican II document on Divine Revelation (Dei Verbum) was an exciting and challenging moment for the Church. While honouring the tradition, it also marked a quite dramatic development in the Church’s attitude to modern critical analysis of the Bible and encouraged study and reflection on it by all members of the Church. The golden jubilee of its publication is a timely moment for a book such as this. It contains essays on various aspects of Dei Verbum by authors from around the world. They write from the perspective of their respective disciplines of biblical studies, patristics, theology, liturgy, philosophy, and communications media. They situate the document within the Jewish-Christian tradition, assess its reception since Vatican II, and its implications for the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t8zw

12 Dei Verbum and the Philosophy of Hans-Georg Gadamer from: God's Word and the Church's Council
Author(s) Owens John F
Abstract: The relation between Dei Verbum (DV) and the philosophy of Hans-Georg Gadamer can be discerned in a contrast that is drawn in a key paragraph in whichDVaddresses the question of interpretation. The paragraph begins by endorsing use of the historical-critical method, recommending attention to what the authors of the sacred texts originally meant, the literary forms they used, customary patterns of expression which prevailed at the time of composition, and so on. But the Council fathers add a qualifying paragraph, insisting that the scholarly enterprise should keep in mind ‘the content and unity of the whole of Scripture’,

Chapter Eight Innovation, Undecidability and Patience from: In-Between God
Abstract: Innovation derives from the Latin innovare, meaning to renew or alter; essentially to bring in or introduce something new. Hence we may speak of novel practices and/or doctrines. It is a controversial feature of the life of the Christian church. Innovation is almost endemic to Christianity. The very nature of the gospel suggests that notions of surprise and novelty belong to the life of discipleship because they first inhere in the very character and action of God. The great surprising act of God in the incarnation and resurrection of the Messiah sets the pattern for the emergence of novelty at

Chapter Ten Discipleship and Divine Simplicity: from: In-Between God
Abstract: Few words seem to offer so many complexities as does simplicitas.² In the biblical tradition simplicity (haplous) is associated with singleness and undividedness of heart for God, and personal integrity and straight forwardness in all relationships as befits those of the Kingdom of God. This evangelicalsimplicitasis linked to that humility, poverty and childlike innocence in which Jesus rejoices: ‘I thank you, Father, Lord of heaven and earth, for you have hidden these things from the wise and understanding and revealed them to babes’ (nepiois; Matthew 11:25, compare Luke 10:21). The ethical, moral and religious dimensions of this evangelical

Chapter Thirteen Unfinished Emmaus Journey: from: In-Between God
Abstract: We live in a pressured, fractious and often violent world. We are all too familiar with the effects of disintegration in our personal lives and in wider society. As a result we seek peace and integration but it often remains a puzzle to us why such things seem so elusive or beyond our capabilities. We wonder whether we lack the patience and strength to craft a way forward, to remain on task and see something through to its conclusion. We are too aware at times that we lack the resilience required for the pursuit of peace and harmony; and for

Thou Shalt not Covet the Environment’s Water from: Water
Author(s) Paton David C
Abstract: The Murray-Darling Basin stretches from southern Queensland across most of New South Wales and into Victoria and South Australia, and has been described as Australia’s food bowl. By the last decade of the twentieth century, eighty per cent of the most profitable farm enterprises within Australia were within the Basin. Economic wealth and productivity grew from the ability to extract water from the rivers of the basin for irrigation. The growth in irrigation during the second half of the twentieth century largely went on without careful consideration of the quantities of water available and little appreciation of the variability in

Rising Sea, Drifting Bones, Dispersing Homes from: Water
Author(s) Havea Jione
Abstract: This chapter engages some of the trials with which the rising sea gifts islanders in Oceania, and beyond.¹ Whether climate change or global warming causes the sea to rise, and rise, perpetuated by human action or not, is beyond the focus of this chapter. My concern is with an existential predicament: the sea is rising on the shores of Oceania and this pushes islanders (1) to rethink our beliefs and understandings, (2) to grieve at the unearthing of the remains of ancestors from beach-front graves, and (3) to relocate our understandings of homes and gathering sites because they are no

Abraham, Isaac and the Problem of Water from: Water
Author(s) Deutschmann Barbara
Abstract: Various assumptions are made by this writer as she takes up the task of pursuing the water traditions of the book of Genesis. The most important is that these ancient pericopes are all worthy of scrutiny in their own right and not just as passing places on the way to some bigger theme.¹ A respectful engagement with the texts of these ancient stories reveals much about the artistry of the writers and the earthiness of the God who gave rise to them.

To Hear what Water is Saying to the Churches from: Water
Author(s) Daly-Denton Margaret M
Abstract: In recent years, as more and more Christian traditions retrieve the ancient practice of baptism by immersion, there has been increasing scope for artists to create baptismal pools that give visual expression to the rich symbolism that Christianity has traditionally attached to water. The new baptismal fonts at Salisbury Cathedral and the Cathedral of Our Lady of the Angels in Los Angeles, both dramatically located at the entry point to the liturgical space and both featuring the flow of ‘living’ water, are particularly inspiring examples. Reflecting on this development, the liturgist Gordon Lathrop expresses the hope that the sight of

Sexual Abuse and Luke’s Story of Jesus from: Child Sexual Abuse, Society, and the Future of the Church
Author(s) Trainor Michael
Abstract: On March 13 2013 Argentinian Jorge Mario Bergoglio was elected as Bishop of Rome. As Pope Francis and leader of Roman Catholic Church he will face enormous challenges. One of the most pressing is the scandal of sexual abuse that has affected almost every corner of the Catholic world. Here in Australia, the issue is no less serious. In November 2012, the Prime Minister, Julia Gillard, announced that a Royal Commission would be established to investigate institutional responses to allegations of child sexual abuse. The focus of the Commission would not be solely on one particular institution such as the

Ellen Whiteʹs Use of Scripture from: Hermeneutics, Intertextuality and the Contemporary Meaning of Scripture
Author(s) Paulien Jon
Abstract: Seventh-day Adventist interpreters share a deep appreciation of the writings of Ellen G White. Her comments on the Bible stimulate much productive insight into the treatment of various Bible passages in light of the ultimate ‘big picture;’ the cosmic perspective often known as the ‘Great Controversy’. She also offers many creative insights into the details of various texts and helpful summaries of the backgrounds to biblical books and their narratives. Her devotional insights, generated in passing, are inspiring and often exhilarating.

The Influence of Ellen White Towards an Adventist Understanding of Inspiration from: Hermeneutics, Intertextuality and the Contemporary Meaning of Scripture
Author(s) Bradford Graeme S
Abstract: 1. They can resist and ignore the material and go on with business as usual. This option would cost them many honest members who will feel the Church has betrayed them.

Historicism in the Twenty-First Century from: Hermeneutics, Intertextuality and the Contemporary Meaning of Scripture
Author(s) Worley Donna
Abstract: Adventism at the beginning of the twenty-first century is being challenged by an increasing diversity in apocalyptic prophetic interpretation.¹ For over a hundred years there was little variation in the standard Adventist interpretation of Daniel and Revelation, but that started changing around fifty years ago.²

Book Title: Opening the Bible-Selected Writings of Antony Campbell SJ
Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): Campbell Antony
Abstract: "When Tony Campbell, aged 75, asked the Council of Jesuit Theological College for Emeritus status and retirement from JTC, both were granted most graciously, along with a testimonial document which said in part: ‘His teaching has combined evocation and provocation in the best sense of those terms. He has mentored research students with scholarly exactitude and personal care. He has published books of the highest scholarly quality, of engaging readability, and of passionate conviction.’ When we at ATF were considering asking him for a volume of Collected Works or Selected Writings, we were well aware that ‘published books of the highest scholarly quality’ were likely to be found on the shelves of libraries and of specialised academics, but not with students and others generally interested. There may be a dozen or more of Tony’s books on the list from Amazon.com booksellers, along with another two or three that are not listed there. But most are heavy-duty specialist works, not easily accessible even to the educated public. We were equally well aware that there was a surprising number of essays and articles scattered in journals and proceedings of conferences that were, because of the scattering, often just as inaccessible. We thought that a collection of these in a single volume would be of great value to those interested. In the Introduction to this volume, Father Campbell has gone into some detail about the contents. Suffice for us to say that Job and the issues associated with suffering concern us all, that the interplay of history and narrative is a constant in the understanding of much biblical text, and that the nature of the Bible and its role in our lives is a major concern for most thinking Christians. While Father Campbell’s focus is on the Older Testament, pondering what he looks at throws light on much of the Newer Testament as well. The writings Tony Campbell has pulled together in this single volume address significant issues within the readable length of an article or a talk. Addressed originally to thinking people, we at ATF believe they are likely to be of interest to a wide audience."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t9t9

Introduction from: Opening the Bible
Abstract: The beauty of a volume like this for someone like myself, whether collected essays or selected writings, is to see the struggle unfolding over a lifetime with fundamental issues of Christian faith and issues of the Older Testament, driven by the pressure of the biblical text.¹ Perhaps the younger me is best characterised by the reaction of the assembled students of the United Faculty of Theology to my selfdescription as a ‘simple Bible Christian’, a statement that was greeted with a wave of spontaneous laughter. Apparently students were not convinced; but I was sincere. I certainly held to the Bible

The Book of Job: from: Opening the Bible
Abstract: The first question is asked by the Accuser (the satan; ha-satan): ‘Does Job fear God for nothing?’ (1:9). The same favourable answer is given twice: ‘In all this Job did not sin’ (1:22; 2:10). The text involved is not coextensive with the prose; the issue is ended with 2:10, but the prose continues to 2:13. The

Martin Noth and the Deuteronomistic History from: Opening the Bible
Abstract: My topic is ‘Noth and the Deuteronomistic History,’ and my instructions from my handlers were to stay close to Noth, which I am happy to do. In a short paper, it would be unwise to do anything else. Fifty years ago, in the middle of the bleak horror of World War II, Martin Noth presented the Deuteronomistic History to the world of biblical scholarship.¹ It met with wide but not total acceptance; it has been with us ever since. An architectural metaphor will help to structure discussion, so I invite you to think of it as ‘the house that Noth

St Ignatius Loyola and God’s Unconditional Love from: Opening the Bible
Abstract: How can we say God loves us? What does it mean to use that language? The fine tissue of the life of spirit needs constant attention and regular revising of its language to express what is sometimes so faintly felt, so easily swamped, and yet is at the core of human life. We need words that move us, words of wonder, words of wisdom. It can happen, though, that what sounds right at one moment may have implications that in the long term are not right. Love is one of those words that touches deeply. The need has been in

Reflections Around Frank Gil’s Have Life Abundantly: from: Opening the Bible
Abstract: The ultimate question for many may be: Have Life Abundantly—How? A burning question for some in today’s increasingly secular world is certainly whether to believe in God and what sort of a Church, if any, is helpful to sustain that belief. Earlier this year (2014) ATF Press published a book by Frank Gil, Have Life Abundantly: Grass Roots First. According to the back cover, Frank Gil was a pseudonym for a widely-published priest; we can treat him as simply Frank Gil. What is of interest for today’s ‘burning question’ is that Frank Gil abandons the idea of proving God’s

13. ENTRE UNA REALIDAD PLURILINGÜE Y UN ANHELO DE NACIÓN. from: Historia sociolingüística de México
Author(s) Villavicencio Frida
Abstract: Considerar la sociolingüística como el estudio de las necesidades comunicativas de los hablantes implica conocer las condiciones sociales en las que dicha comunicación se produce y las repercusiones que estas condiciones tienen en la producción y las actitudes lingüísticas de las personas que interactúan en un contexto específico. Los fenómenos sociolingüísticos a los que dan lugar las necesidades comunicativas son complejos y dinámicos, por ello fenómenos como el cambio, variación, contacto, bilingüismo, diglosia y desplazamiento o muerte de lenguas sólo pueden entenderse a cabalidad si se atiende tanto sincrónica como diacrónicamente al contexto en el que estos fenómenos se producen.

20. EL PAPEL DE LOS MODELOS CULTURALES: from: Historia sociolingüística de México
Author(s) de Alba José G. Moreno
Abstract: Hoy se habla y se escribe mucho sobre la influencia del inglés en el español. Conviene sin embargo tener en cuenta que en el Diccionario de la Lengua Española, de la Real Academia, drae, publicado en 2001, hay 2261 artículos en los que se menciona, normalmente como etimología, el francés o el provenzal¹, y sólo 819 en los que de alguna forma se explica, por el inglés², el origen de una voz española. No pocas veces resulta difícil establecer si determinada voz procede del francés, del provenzal o, incluso, del catalán. El ingreso de galicismos en la lengua española es

Book Title: Redemptive Hope: From the Age of Enlightenment to the Age of Obama- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Campbell Timothy C.
Abstract: This is a book about the need for redemptive narratives to ward off despair and the dangers these same narratives create by raising expectations that are seldom fulfilled. The quasi-messianic expectations produced by the election of President Barack Obama in 2008, and their diminution, were stark reminders of an ongoing struggle between ideals and political realities. Redemptive Hope begins by tracing the tension between theistic thinkers, for whom hope is transcendental, and intellectuals, who have striven to link hopes for redemption to our intersubjective interactions with other human beings. Lerner argues that a vibrant democracy must draw on the best of both religious thought and secular liberal political philosophy. By bringing Richard Rorty's pragmatism into conversation with early-twentieth-century Jewish thinkers, including Martin Buber and Ernst Bloch, Lerner begins the work of building bridges, while insisting on holding crucial differences in dialectical tension. Only such a dialogue, he argues, can prepare the foundations for modes of redemptive thought fit for the twenty-first century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1657v0t

INTRODUCTION from: Redemptive Hope: From the Age of Enlightenment to the Age of Obama
Abstract: This is a book about our need for redemptive narratives to ward off despair and the dangers these same narratives create by raising expectations that are seldom fulfilled. The story of the rise of secular redemptive hope narratives from the age of Enlightenment to the early part of the twenty-first century has been a story of the struggle between heightened expectations and postutopian despair.¹ The quasi-messianic expectations produced by the election of President Obama in 2008—followed by the diminution of these expectations—was a stark reminder that redemptive hope is seldom satisfactorily fulfilled. Although what led to the dashing

4 RICHARD RORTY’S SOCIAL HOPE AND POSTMETAPHYSICAL REDEMPTION from: Redemptive Hope: From the Age of Enlightenment to the Age of Obama
Abstract: At the turn of the twenty-first century, Richard Rorty put forward his vision for a new form of social hope, “the hope that life will eventually be freer, less cruel, more leisured, richer in goods and experiences, not just for our descendants but for everybody’s descendants.”¹ The first step toward this neopragmatic future requires a change in priorities in which “everybody thinks that it is human solidarity, rather than knowledge of something not merely human, that really matters.”² This utopian task of “replacing certainty with hope” requires establishing a different kind of solidarity based on increasing individual happiness rather than

CONCLUSION: from: Redemptive Hope: From the Age of Enlightenment to the Age of Obama
Abstract: Theodore Gericault’s Romantic era painting Le Radeau de la Méduse(1816) shows a group of castaways desperately clinging to a raft in the midst of chaotic seas. The contrast between some castaways in a state of deep despair and other castaways frantically trying to hail what might be a passing ship in the far distance is a fitting image for the combination of despair and hope within Rorty’s appeal to “human beings clinging together against the dark.”¹

Book Title: Pasados y presentes de la violencia en Colombia-Estudios sobre las comisiones de investigación (19582011)
Publisher: Pontificia Universidad Javeriana
Author(s): MARÍN JEFFERSON JARAMILLO
Abstract: El lector que se adentre en el libro Pasados y presentes de violencia en Colombia. Estudio de las comisiones de investigación, 19582011, saldrá de él con la sensación de haber hecho una travesía problemática e inspiradora. Los múltiples y sucesivos pasados de la violencia, aprehendidos por sucesivas comisiones de diferente mandato, perspectiva y composición, no solo interpelan nuestro presente sino que en estos tiempos sirven como referente para la construcción de futuro inmediato de Colombia, acicateado por un contexto de diálogos de paz. Las iniciativas de verdad y de memoria en el país no volverán a ser miradas, ni valoradas, ni juzgadas de la misma manera después de este balance, pues, en los sucesivos planos del juego de espejos en el que el autor nos ha invitado a reflejarnos, ha logrado adentrarse, con honestidad y rigor, en los nudos de las legítimas controversias que alimentan los ejercicios académicopolíticos que son las comisiones de investigación sobre nuestras violencias.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt169zsd4

Book Title: La muerte-Siete visiones, una realidad
Publisher: Pontificia Universidad Javeriana
Author(s): Posse Eugenia Villa
Abstract: Los seres humanos sabemos que vamos a morir. ¿Fortunio o desgracia? Sin duda, algunas personas quisieran vivir sin pensar en esta condición. Más aún, la sociedad actual expele la muerte y, en consecuencia, ha cifrado una conspiración para silenciarla. Por tal razón, el libro que tiene en sus manos aventura una múltiple respuesta a la pregunta “¿Qué es la muerte?". Hemos recogido aquí las voces de algunas disciplinas —literatura, antropología, sociología, psicología, medicina, filosofía y teología—para las cuales resulta insoslayable esta pregunta. Su lenguaje sereno y claro, aunque académico, quiere satisfacer a aquel lector que siente inquietud respecto al tema. Los tonos narrativo, descriptivo, analítico, metafórico y hermenéutico que se encuentran en sus siete capítulos reconocen la riqueza que encierra el problema de la muerte y exploran su significado como realidad existencial, símbolo, memoria, complejidad o sacramento. Así como la muerte posee un valor educativo porque nos enseña que nuestro sentido no está en el tener y que el amor es lo único que queda después de la muerte, así también esta obra tiene una pretensión educativa: que el lector se haga más amigo de la muerte, aunque permanezca el miedo hacia ella.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt169zsfn

Introducción from: La muerte
Author(s) Rueda José Luis Meza
Abstract: Los seres humanos sabemos que vamos a morir y, aunque compartamos en un alto porcentaje nuestro genoma con otros seres vivos, estos últimos ignoran que son mortales. ¿Fortunio o desgracia? Sin duda, algunas personas quisieran vivir sin pensar en esta condición, ni vivir ninguna situación que se las recuerde. E. Duque afirma que la sociedad actual expele la muerte y, en consecuencia, ha cifrado una conspiración para silenciarla. Queremos esconder la realidad de la muerte para distraernos en una vida llena de cosas superfluas y banales. Adicionalmente, cada vez más existe un rechazo fragante al duelo, llegando incluso a su

CAPÍTULO 7 Morir la muerte, vivir la vida: from: La muerte
Author(s) Rueda José Luis Meza
Abstract: Es conocido por muchos que la teología, en cuanto intellectus fidei, quiere dar razón de nuestra esperanza. Si resultara que el lector se confiesa creyente y, de forma específica, su fe es cristiana, un capítulo como este tendría sentido porque encontrará en él algunos elementos –tal vez valiosos– para darle significado a la muerte. Dentro de este cometido, nuestro capítulo tiene tres grandes partes. En la primera, queremos hacer una aproximación a la manera como el hombre contemporáneo está pensando y sintiendo la muerte. En la segunda, hemos querido traer a colación algunos desarrollos de la teología cristiana muy propios

Book Title: Mal y sufrimiento humano-Un acercamiento filosófico a un problema clásico
Publisher: Pontificia Universidad Javeriana
Author(s): Suárez Luis Fernando Cardona
Abstract: El dolor es, ante todo, una posibilidad de develar lo íntimo, pero también lo externo. A través del sufrimiento es posible acceder a información sobre el mundo que nosotros mismos no descubriríamos de otro modo. No darle la cara al sufrimiento, buscar justificarlo, manipularlo o, en el peor de los casos, ignorarlo es un trabajo vano que nos aísla de lo que somos, y desfigura las posibilidades sinceras de nuestra existencia. No afrontar el sufrimiento es no aceptar el mundo. Este libro busca, ante todo, mostrar la pertinencia filosófica de la problemática general del Mal, con preguntas sobre su origen, naturaleza y responsabilidad. Examina además el camino de la consolación; reflexiona la posibilidad real del Mal de un modo dialéctico, y analiza la necesidad de pensar de un modo ontológico nuestro presente histórico. Para abordar esta problemática general del Mal, se debe esclarecer el rol fundamental del sufrimiento humano y orientar las consideraciones filosóficas de este en la evolución del despliegue histórico del nihilismo occidental.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt169zsm7

II ESTRUCTURA Y ORGANIZACIÓN from: Pensar sistémico
Abstract: El concepto de relación ha sido transformado por la sistémica en su objeto de observación por excelencia; ha incorporado unos elementos de reflexión nuevos al acto de pensar. Del estudio de la “relación” se han derivado otros matices cuya naturaleza impone nuevas formas de reflexionar. Así, el concepto de conexión, pauta, vínculo, patrón u otros sinónimos encierran en su significado algún sentido de carácter relacional, han permitido que la atención de la sistémica se centrara en cómo las relaciones no se dan en el orden del aislamiento y, por lo tanto, son la esencia misma de totalidades que se organizan

III UN SILENCIOSO CAMINO (DEL OBJETO AL SISTEMA) from: Pensar sistémico
Abstract: Históricamente, el conocimiento en Occidente ha estado ligado a la concep ción de la ciencia clásica, cuya piedra de toque angular es la objetividad. Desde esta pers pectiva, un observador mira un mundo plagado de objetos desplegados a lo largo y ancho del universo, sin aparente conexión entre ellos y de manera aislada. Todo este universo está sometido a una serie de reglas y leyes que pueden generalizarse en gran medida merced a su naturaleza objetivamente universal.¹

VII LA IDEA DEL CONTEXTO from: Pensar sistémico
Abstract: El concepto de contexto, a pesar de ser muy utilizado en múltiples situaciones, no ha sido lo suficientemente desarrollado y no existen explicaciones someras y detalladas del concepto, sin embargo, es una palabra de uso común que se utiliza permanentemente en muchos ámbitos. Se trata de una palabra comodín cuya naturaleza se adapta a una multiplicidad de referenciaciones y, por ello, en muchos campos del conocimiento se recurre a ella. Desde una perspectiva sistémica, la idea de contexto adquiere una importancia fundamental en la medida en que para un sistema las interacciones e interrelaciones conectan los fenómenos y, como con

Book Title: Geografías de la memoria-Posiciones de las víctimas en Colombia en el periodo de justicia transicional (20052010)
Publisher: Pontificia Universidad Javeriana
Author(s): Arango Óscar Fernando Acevedo
Abstract: Este libro busca cuestionar la idea de que existe un único campo de la memoria, un campo dicotómico, reducido al forcejeo entre memorias “oficiales y no oficiales", entre organizaciones agonistas que le disputan la versión histórica y los olvidos a la memoria gubernativa. También busca mostrar cómo el campo de las memorias de las víctimas es enriquecido por otras posiciones, entre ellas, no solo las subalternas de los sin voz, sino las sub/alternas, que construyen un afuera de la disputa por el poder central, lo cual genera y deriva en poderes y prácticas culturales alternos. También señala cómo a estas memorias se suman las memorias reservadas, en reserva, a la espera de un momento específico para hacerse un lugar en el campo plural de las memorias. El libro inicia con un capítulo autobiográfico en clave de memoria sub/alterna, realiza una revisión conceptual de la concepción tradicional de la memoria y culmina con la exposición de estas categorías teóricas que ilustran otras posiciones y alternativas en el campo de la memoria. Aquí, no toda memoria que se sitúa aparentemente en una posición tiene garantías de permanecer en ella para siempre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt169zszd

IV MEMORIAS SUB/ALTERNAS Y RESERVADAS: from: Geografías de la memoria
Abstract: Sub/alternas es la noción con la que hemos abierto el sentido a las memorias sometidas, locales y periféricas, que no despliegan una posición agonista frente a las memorias oficiales y gubernativas (aunque a veces su discurso pareciera insinuarlo); memorias que están o no a la espera de ser escuchadas o reconocidas más allá de su localidad, a la expectativa o no de ser un día sujetos de la historia.

Book Title: Los hermanos Alexander y Wilhelm von Humboldt en Colombia-Huellas históricas de la cooperación científica entre dos continentes
Publisher: Pontificia Universidad Javeriana
Author(s): Barajas Angélica Hernández
Abstract: Este libro sigue las huellas de los dos hermanos Alexander y Wilhelm von Humboldt en la Nueva Granada y actual Colombia, para mostrar los caminos históricos de cooperación e intercambio científico entre Alemania y Colombia. Desde el famoso viaje de Alexander von Humboldt a América y su encuentro con José Celestino Mutis y otros reconocidos investigadores del Nuevo Mundo en Santa Fe de Bogotá en el año 1801, la cooperación científica entre Alemania y Colombia se ha desarrollado en un amplio panorama de encuentros, relaciones, correspondencias e intercambios. Por otro lado, es menos conocida la influencia del hermano Wilhelm von Humboldt en la academia de Latinoamérica. No obstante, a pesar de que Wilhelm von Humboldt nunca visitó el Nuevo Continente, el discurso de este importante reformador del sistema de educación en Prusia tuvo un importante eco en una buena parte del pensamiento académico que se ha gestado desde la Nueva Granada hasta nuestros días. Seguir las huellas de estos dos hermanos, recorriendo los caminos que han tomado sus ideas y pensamientos en el contexto latinoamericano, es el propósito de los ensayos que se unen en este libro. Con esto se busca evidenciar no solo el impacto del pensamiento humboldtiano en Colombia como un ejemplo significativo en la historia de la ciencia entre Europa y Latinoamérica, sino también indagar por la actualidad de las propuestas humboldtianas para la ciencia y la cooperación académica de nuestro presente.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt169zt3z

La investigación botánica en el viaje de Alexander von Humboldt y Aimé Bonpland from: Los hermanos Alexander y Wilhelm von Humboldt en Colombia
Author(s) Piedrahíta Santiago Díaz
Abstract: El continente americano no sería el mismo luego de darse a la luz los resultados del viaje realizado por Alexander von Humboldt y Aimé Bonpland. La publicación de las observaciones, conclusiones y resultados obtenidos durante ese largo recorrido por las regiones equinocciales cambió la visión europea del continente, y, sin duda, en el campo en el cual ese cambio fue más notorio fue en el del conocimiento de la flora tropical. Aunque sobre las plantas americanas existían algunos estudios, estos eran fragmentarios y trataban muy pocas especies. Con excepción de la realizada en Perú y Chile, por Ruiz y Pavón

Las ocho láminas de Humboldt sobre Colombia en Vistas de las cordilleras y monumentos de los pueblos indígenas de América (1810) from: Los hermanos Alexander y Wilhelm von Humboldt en Colombia
Author(s) Ángel Marta Herrera
Abstract: Hace un par de años recibí una amable invitación para estudiar las láminas relativas al actual territorio de Colombia que habían sido publicadas en el libro de Vistas de las cordilleras y monumentos de los pueblos indígenas de América(1810).¹ La idea de analizar láminas publicadas en la obra de Humboldt me entusiasmó, por lo que sin muchas dilaciones acepté la invitación. Lo señalado explica algunos elementos que delimitan el tratamiento del tema: primero, que el territorio considerado en este artículo es el de la actual Colombia y no el del virreinato de la Nueva Granada. En efecto, cuando Humboldt

Aportes teórico-conceptuales sobre formabilidad/educabilidad (Bildsamkeit) en el contexto educativo colombiano: from: Los hermanos Alexander y Wilhelm von Humboldt en Colombia
Author(s) Peña Andrés Klaus Runge
Abstract: Los términos alemanes Bildung(formación) yBildsamkeit(formabilidad) son ese tipo de expresiones que muestran las particularidades e idiosincrasias de una sociedad (cultura) y que hacen quedar a todo traductor como untradutore traidore(traductor traidor). Aparecido el segundo con los trabajos pedagógicos de Herbart (Umriss) y el primero en el marco de las reflexiones místico-religiosas acerca de la doctrina de laImago dei¹ –como las del maestro Eckhart–, secularizado y antropologizado durante la Ilustración y el neohumanismo² alemanes,³ son conceptos que hasta el día de hoy gozan todavía de una gran vitalidad en el contexto teutónico, y no

POINT OF DEPARTURE from: Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: Whosoever destroys one man is counted by Scripture as though he had destroyed the whole world. This is also true of Cain who killed Abel, his brother, as it is written in the Scripture: The voice of thy brother’s blood crieth unto Me(Genesis 4.10). Though he may shed the blood (dm) of only a single person, the text uses the plural:dmym(“bloods”). This teaches us that the blood of Abel’s children, and his children’s children, and all the descendants destined to come forth from him until the end of time—all of them stood crying out before the

WHEN KILLING IS LAWFUL AND JUST from: Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: No matter how often it sings the praises of peace, the Bible abounds with massacres and wars carried out against the enemies of Israel in the name of God. The cultural semantics of monotheistic religions are notoriously characterized by a crude and ferocious vocabulary of violence.¹ The episode of the golden calf may serve as an example. There an infuriated Moses shouts: “This is the message of Yahweh, the God of Israel: ‘Gird on your sword, every man of you and quarter the camp from gate to gate killing one his brother, another his friend, another his neighbor.’”² As for

IN THE BEGINNING from: Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: The problem of the double beginning of the human race is one of the many problems for interpretation posed by the account of Genesis. Born not of woman but created by God on the sixth day, Adam and Eve live in the Garden of Eden in a state that knows no sorrow, no toil, and, above all, no death. Already freed from the human condition of being born an infant, Edenic humanity is also missing the fundamental characteristic recognized as human by nearly all cultures: mortality. As in ancient Greece, in the prehistoric time before Pandora’s box was opened, there

THE SEX OF CAIN from: Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: And if Cain had been a woman? The hypothesis is obviously absurd, and it is so for more than one reason. Even though Eve has an important role in the Edenic scene of sin that establishes humanity as a mortal species, the homicidal and fratricidal act that initiates human history provides for no woman. Something analogous happens to Pandora, the first woman according to Hesiod, from whose belly is born death in addition to other ills for the human race: the lineage that then descends from her is exclusively male, often brothers or those united in the warrior brotherhoods, whose

Un acto metodológico básico de la investigación social: from: Observar, escuchar y comprender
Author(s) Peón Fortino Vela
Abstract: La actividad científica en las ciencias sociales no sólo se enfrenta a las dificultades y complejidades que su labor impone, sino también cuando se trata de elegir métodos y técnicas apropiados para abordar, interpretar y explicar la realidad social. Aun cuando las cuestiones referentes al método son conflictivas y cubren un espectro de temas que van desde las relaciones entre sujeto y objeto, en un plano más general y abstracto involucran hasta el fin mismo de la ciencia; es claro que la adopción de un método particular condiciona con mucho las técnicas de recolección y el análisis de la información

Biografía: from: Observar, escuchar y comprender
Author(s) García Ramón R. Reséndiz
Abstract: Ello no implica, como a menudo se ha hecho, abjurar de lo cuantitativo, sino reconocer que son modalidades diferentes de abordar

Para que el sujeto tenga la palabra: from: Observar, escuchar y comprender
Author(s) Margel Geyser
Abstract: Cuando un científico social define un problema de investigación y construye esa realidad social que lo contiene, trabaja como el artesano que ha decidido poner sus manos a la obra volcando su creatividad, sus conocimientos y sus deseos en la producción de un nuevo objeto, sea éste una artesanía en el caso del maestro o un conocimiento sistemático sobre algo que es de su preocupación en el caso del investigador. Esta producción no es unilateral, no sólo se produce “conocimiento” o “artesanía”, sino que tanto el artesano como el investigador se hacen y se rehacen a sí mismos al combinar

Innovación metodológica en una época de ruptura. from: Observar, escuchar y comprender
Author(s) Plascencia Jorge Ramírez
Abstract: En las décadas precedentes, principalmente entre los años sesenta y ochenta, emergió un caudal de argumentos desde los más diversos ámbitos del quehacer intelectual que ponían en tela de juicio características centrales del pensamiento occidental. Lo novedoso de esta plétora de argumentos no consistió tanto en su tono decididamente polémico, ni quizá en la diversidad de aspectos que sometió a examen, sino en su eficacia para motivar la reflexión y, en algunos casos, el replanteamiento de valores tenidos por inalterables.

Introducción from: El helicoide de la investigación
Author(s) Zaremberg Gisela
Abstract: Un esquema que podría admitir esta lectura es el que proporciona Mario Bunge (1979: 26).¹ El problema de investigación no surge en el vacío sino que adquiere sentido en el cuerpo de conocimientos disponible. Planteada la pregunta, la hipótesis se puede conceptuar

Los procesos de subjetivación de las víctimas del conflicto armado en Colombia, o de cómo nace una pregunta de investigación from: El helicoide de la investigación
Author(s) Barón Mariana Delgado
Abstract: Colombia ha padecido un conflicto armado interno por más de cuarenta años, caracterizado por el enfrentamiento y la lucha por el control territorial entre las fuerzas insurgentes —principalmente las Fuerzas Armadas Revolucionarias de Colombia (FARC)—, grupos paramilitares congregados en las Autodefensas Unidas de Colombia (AUC), y el Estado, representado en sus fuerzas armadas. En los últimos años, el conflicto se ha agudizado debido a la crisis del desplazamiento forzado que ha despojado de sus tierras aproximadamente a cuatro millones de campesinos¹pero también por la sistemática persecución de líderes y defensores de derechos humanos,² el constante crecimiento del universo de

Selección intencionada de observaciones y explicación nomotética from: El helicoide de la investigación
Author(s) Santiago Orlando Espinosa
Abstract: Una primera etapa de la lógica de investigación científica es transitar del tema al problema de investigación para lograr un diseño metodológico coherente. Para decirlo con sencillez: se tiene un tema de investigacióncuando se cuenta con un bosquejo o idea difusa acerca de un fenómeno observado, el cual se convierte enun problema de investigaciónúnicamente cuando la pregunta formulada no es una interrogante arbitraria, sino un cuestionamiento teóricamente localizado. Aunque esto parece una obviedad y un aprendizaje “natural” en la maduración del investigador, no es un tránsito exento de problemas, como se verá enseguida.

Rutas, desafíos y limitaciones teórico-metodológicas en la investigación acerca de las comisiones de estudio sobre la violencia en Colombia from: El helicoide de la investigación
Author(s) Marín Jefferson Jaramillo
Abstract: Desde la segunda mitad del siglo XX, Colombia es testigo de tres grandes manifestaciones de violencia que han tenido gran impacto para este país no sólo por las dimensiones históricas del fenómeno involucrado, sino también por la magnitud de sus secuelas en la población.¹ La primera de estas manifestaciones es representada casi siempre de manera simple y llana como la violenciay refiere a un enfrentamiento entre las dos subculturas políticas de más tradición en el país, liberales y conservadores, el cual ocurrió entre 1946 y 1965 y que dejó como saldo más de 170 000 víctimas, especialmente campesinos, en

Capítulo 4 La intensificación del debate público from: Tramitando el pasado
Abstract: Los gobernantes civiles que iniciaron el camino de la recuperación democrática estaban más preocupados por la estabilidad —ante la real o supuesta amenaza militar— que por saldar cuentas. De la etapa anterior quedó, no obstante, un recuento de los graves asuntos de derechos humanos sin resolver lo que dio lugar a una relación de atrocidades que, si bien a menudo denunciadas en el exterior, no habían podido ventilarse mayormente en los propios países durante los gobiernos autoritarios. Las revelaciones públicas de militares participantes o conocedores de los acontecimientos en cuestión, tuvieron un efecto removedor del pasado que se pretendía ocultar.

Book Title: Políticas literarias-Poder y acumulación en la literatura y el cine latinoamericanos
Publisher: Facultad Latinoamerica de Ciencias Sociales, sede México
Author(s): Bartra Roger
Abstract: Esta obra analiza las posibles relaciones entre la crítica de Walter Benjamin y la experiencia cultural del capitalismo en América Latina; la hipótesis de que, vista desde la perspectiva de la producción cultural, la experiencia histórica latinoamericana del capitalismo ha estado sobredeterminada por lo político; y que la violencia constituyente que define la “acumulación originaria" no sólo precede al capitalismo, sino que lo acompaña siempre como su condición de existencia y reproducción. Este libro reúne nuevas lecturas contextuales, es decir, sociales, de una parte fundamental del archivo cultural latinoamericano.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16f8ct7

Introducción from: Políticas literarias
Abstract: Los ensayos incluidos en este volumen han sido escritos a lo largo de los últimos veinte años: los que forman parte de la primera sección son reflexiones sobre la obra de Walter Benjamin; los de la segunda, son interpretaciones de textos ya canónicos de la literatura latinoamericana y, finalmente, los de la tercera, versan sobre aspectos de la cultura visual (cine y televisión) más o menos contemporánea —aunque cabe decir que el tiempo presente que se experimenta como contemporáneo parece desvanecerse y, por eso, “pasar” con más y más velocidad (creo, sin embargo, que las obras analizadas: Cronos(1992) de

2. Mariátegui, Benjamin, Chaplin: from: Políticas literarias
Abstract: En 1928, el mismo año en que se estrenó la primera película con banda sonora producida en Hollywood, se estrenó también El circode Charles Chaplin. Para entonces, Chaplin no era solamente una figura clave del entretenimiento fordista de masas y la imaginación internacional popular, sino también se le consideraba comoauteur, famoso por imponer su control total sobre los contenidos audiovisuales y dramaticos de su obra. Su terca resistencia al sonido sincronizado, por ejemplo, era un uso deliberado del anacronismo tecnológico, tanto como poderoso principio de composición como forma de resistencia al proceso de hollywoodizacion verbal —el sonido mecánico

11. Cronos y la economía política del vampirismo: from: Políticas literarias
Author(s) Jáuregui Carlos A.
Abstract: Los fantasmas del pasado ( revenants) ocupan un lugar destacado en las historias culturales de México. Pienso inmediatamente en el Día de Muertos, cuando los difuntos vuelven a cenar con su familia, así como en la invocación redentora de los héroes del pasado indígena en el discurso de la rebelión zapatista en Chiapas: “A través de nuestra voz hablarán los muertos, nuestros muertos, tan solos y olvidados, tan muertos y sin embargo tan vivos en nuestra voz y en nuestros pasos” (Clarke y Clifton, 1994: 78). Pero acaso la más extraordinaria narrativa derevenantses la novelaPedro Páramo(1955) de

13. La elasticidad de la demanda: from: Políticas literarias
Author(s) Salgado Óscar
Abstract: La serie de televisión The Wire(HBO, 2002-2008), creada por David Simon y Edward Burns, abre con una muerte, y desde allí se expande a lo largo de cinco temporadas y sesenta horas de televisión. Narra la vida actual de una ciudad posindustrial neoliberalizada, desde la perspectiva de las sangrientas esquinas callejeras de Baltimore Oeste, en Estados Unidos.¹The Wirees la continuación de la anterior serie de televisión creada por Simon y Burns,The Corner(La Esquina) (HBO, 2000), una reconstrucción casi antropológica de vidas reales, dirigida por Charles S. Dutton. De hecho, en muchos sentidos combina y desarrolla

Presentación from: Política y sociedad en México
Author(s) Vázquez Daniel
Abstract: En los capítulos del presente libro, el lector encontrará una diversidad de enfoques, intereses y propuestas, muchos de los cuales reconocen antecedentes no sólo diferentes, sino también contrapuestos.

Book Title: Los derechos humanos en las ciencias sociales-Una perspectiva multidisciplinaria
Publisher: Facultad Latinoamerica de Ciencias Sociales, sede México
Author(s): Vázquez Daniel
Abstract: Análisis de la problemática de los derechos humanos no sólo desde las visiones jurídica y legal tradicionales, sino a través del uso de herramientas teóricas y metodológicas multidisciplinarias; así como de sus agendas social, política, internacionalista, antropológica y económica. La originalidad de la obra consiste en dilucidar la perspectiva específica de las disciplinas sociales cuando abordan el tema de los derechos humanos, cuestión que se concreta desde tres ámbitos: la importancia de los derechos humanos como objeto de estudio; los debates teóricos propios de las ciencias sociales a propósito de los derechos humanos, y la agenda temática que se desprende de estos enfoques.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16f8dq5

5 Literature, Song, and the Colonies (1900–1920) from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Ruscio Alain
Abstract: Colonial writing both could have and should have been the ancestor of the current trend of “surprising traveler” novels. However, it is not. Today, colonial literature has been all but forgotten, and even when it is evoked, it is to reaffirm its negative status. In terms of its literary qualities, the genre rarely produced texts rich enough to leave a mark on French literature. Never mind a masterpiece. There was never a French Kipling—at least not according to traditional doxa on the subject. The theme of colonization all too often produced literary works of a didactic and ideologically heavy-handed

8 Dying: from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Deroo Éric
Abstract: On July 14, 1913, during the patriotic High Mass that the Longchamp military parade had become, the president of the Republic, Raymond Poincaré, awarded the Legion of Honor to the first regiment of Senegalese tirailleurs (First RTS ). The act was significant, as this is the highest honor that can be bestowed upon a unit. It recognized the contributions of black soldiers in all colonial operations since 1854, from sub-Saharan Africa to Madagascar up to the most recent campaigns in Morocco. In another gesture of symbolic recognition, which was widely covered in the press, the president presented a French flag

11 To Civilize: from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Blanchard Pascal
Abstract: The Other is a recurring anthropological figure in every field of social science. On the one hand, because figures of exteriority are the mirrors through which the substance and borders of collective identities are formed, transformed, firmed up, and reaffirmed.¹ The Other is endowed with “characteristics” that vary with the times, but that always fall between two poles: stigmatization and desire. On the other hand, figures of the Other play an invaluable part since they are the motors of all forms of social mobilization and are called upon and instrumentalized to inaugurate or consolidate networks of sociability, to structure or

12 Selling the Colonial Economic Myth (1900–1940) from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Coquery-Vidrovitch Catherine
Abstract: In 1815, at the end of the Napoleonic Wars, France found itself with a colorful assortment of colonies: a few islands in the West Indies, Réunion in the Indian Ocean, islands in the Pacific, and two outposts on the coast of Senegal. Throughout the nineteenth century, France positioned itself in order to reconstruct its empire. Competing with Great Britain, it set its sights on the African continent. The relatively early conquest of Algeria (1830) led to a razzia-style war, which in the short term had economically catastrophic results. In contrast, business preceded conquest in sub-Saharan Africa, which, for its part,

16 National Unity: from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Blanchard Pascal
Abstract: The ambiance surrounding the 1931 exposition in the French capital was quite strange, to say the least. The context in metropolitan France had been changing over the prior two years. Between 1929 and 1931, the number of colonial newspapers went from seventy to seventy-seven, the news media became colonial in the space of a few months, and Radio-Paris began proposing regular conferences on the Empire. The French media had a new infatuation, and was preparing the French populace for an event controlled by political parties that also, directly and indirectly, had an influence on major periodicals. But what exactly was

17 Colonizing, Educating, Guiding: from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Vergès Françoise
Abstract: It is easy to mock colonial propaganda from today’s perspective. For us, who are accustomed to integrationist discourse, who have been taught to reject racial rhetoric, it seems easy to reject the system of signs—the images, the modes of representation, the discourse—from the colonial Empire. Only those nostalgic for the colonial past—those whom we openly ridicule and stigmatize—persist in using terms from a dated lexicon, in which nostalgia and resentment, regret and rancor come together. However, one would have to be blind to think that colonial discourse had not deeply penetrated French society and culture. As

19 Influence: from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Forsdick Charles
Abstract: The 1930s mark the apogee of the French Empire, and the euphoria accompanying the International Colonial Exposition of 1931 is perhaps the most obvious sign of the public’s obsession with the colonial enterprise. The propaganda generated by the Agence Générale des Colonies gives us a sense of the kind of pro-colonial discourse in circulation, focusing on France’s civilizing mission, as well as the commercial and political greatness bestowed on France by its Empire. However, such ideas can also be found in the editorial pages of newspapers, as well as in pamphlets, films, and books (both fiction and “scientific” works), all

24 The Colonial Economy: from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Blanchard Pascal
Abstract: Over the course of the Second World War, the Empire became increasingly perceived in the popular imagination as an extension of the national territory. Inextricably bound to an affirmation of imperial culture,this notion was legitimized in and through the colonial space, which for its part was seen as indispensable to the nation’s future. During this period, propagandist rhetoric argued for the creation of a “French-colonial economic block,” and subsequently for policies suited to this ambition.¹ The economic-strategic dialectic was an outcome of prewar nationalism and the idea of a self-sustaining imperial government that, with the Vichy government, was thought

34 The Illusion of Decolonization (1956–2006) from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Dozon Jean-Pierre
Abstract: For the most part, the facts are known. Far from constituting a rupture, the independence of the vast majority of sub-S aharan French territories to arise with the emergence of the Fifth Republic (including the mandated territories of Togo and Cameroon, which went to France after the First World War), was instead the beginning of a new relationship, a new history between France and the African continent. Officially, this has been referred to as “decolonization,” or a major historical moment of rupture and emancipation that is strongly associated with the France of the imposing General de Gaulle. This, in spite

42 From Colonial History to the Banlieues (1961–2006) from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Vidal Dominique
Abstract: The expression “A leopard can’t change its spots” comes to mind while thinking of the social unrest that took place in France’s banlieueshousing projects during the autumn of 2005 when Prime Minister Dominique de Villepin resorted to a 1955 law in order to impose a curfew. Did he not realize that this same legislation led to the massacre of between two and three hundred perfectly peaceful Algerian protesters in the greater Paris area on the night of October 17, 1961, and then to the assassination of nineteen Kanak militants in the Ouvéa cave in New Caledonia on May 5,

45 Postcolonial Cinema, Song, and Literature: from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Ruscio Alain
Abstract: In 1962, a young, slightly chubby pied-noir,still quite clumsy in front of the cameras, sang for the first time on French television: “I have left my country / I have left my home / My life, my sad life / Drags on without reason.” This was of course Enrico Macias. France had just exited—at last—a cycle of wars that had started in May 1940, and was entering a new era with this ballad from overseas. At the apex of the Empire, then during the wars of decolonization, artists—movie directors, artists, writers, singers—had often linked their

46 Ethnic Tourism: from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Bancel Nicolas
Abstract: Does ethnic tourism lend itself to postcolonial analysis? One must attempt to understand the construction of the gaze on “exoticism” in order to verify the hypothesis of a symbolic inheritance from the colonial era. With this in mind, my analysis relies on the discourse and images found in the brochures of twelve tour operators specializing in the sale of “ethnic” destinations in order to determine which essential arguments these businesses rely upon to capture the attention of future clients. My initial hypothesis is that this discourse and these images answer to the expectations and desires of the clients and therefore

Book Title: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Robbins Jeffrey W.
Abstract: What is the future of Continental philosophy of religion? These forward-looking essays address the new thinkers and movements that have gained prominence since the generation of Derrida, Deleuze, Foucault, and Levinas and how they will reshape Continental philosophy of religion in the years to come. They look at the ways concepts such as liberation, sovereignty, and post-colonialism have engaged this new generation with political theology and the new pathways of thought that have opened in the wake of speculative realism and recent findings in neuroscience and evolutionary psychology. Readers will discover new directions in this challenging and important area of philosophical inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gh8cm

Introduction: from: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Robbins Jeffrey W.
Abstract: The future has always figured prominently in Continental philosophy of religion. Indeed, we might even say that the (relatively short) history of Continental philosophy of religion has been defined by the future. So by way of introduction, our task will be to chart the concept of the future that has animated, inspired, and propelled this burgeoning discourse, which, by our reckoning, has both come into its own and reached a turning point, if not a terminal point or a fork in the road. Put otherwise, by posing the question of the future of Continental philosophy of religion, we are posing

1 Is Continental Philosophy of Religion Dead? from: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Caputo John D.
Abstract: Jacques Derrida is dead. Now they are all dead—all the soixant-huitaires.¹ So, is it over? Is Continental philosophy—and by extension, Continental philosophy of religion—as we know it dead? For a younger generation of philosophers, the so-called theological turn is the last straw. If the religious turn is where Continental philosophy ends up, supplying a final place for religion to hide before the “singularity” arrives,² then Continental philosophy is dead. If it is not, the first order of business is to kill it off. What good is Nietzsche’s death of God, if we still have to deal with

3 On Faith, the Maternal, and Postmodernism from: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Mooney Edward F.
Abstract: We know our futures from our adopted pasts. The Ur-text for Continental philosophy of religion is penned by the elusive Johannes de Silentio, sometime freelancer in the employ of Søren Kierkegaard, in 1843 in the Danish market town, Copenhagen. Surprisingly, the first really intelligiblefigure of faith inFear and Tremblingis not the grotesque, or shall we say, monstrous father who binds Isaac at God’s command, but an unassuming mother weaning her child. De Silentio announces that his approach will employ resources both “dialectical” and “lyrical,” both philosophical and poetic. In the event, however, even these rival measures do

6 Between Deconstruction and Speculation: from: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Moody Katharine Sarah
Abstract: When Radical Orthodoxy asserts that “ only transcendence. . . ‘suspends’” the material in the sense of “upholding [its] relative worth over-against the void,” both John D. Caputo and Slavoj Žižek suspect that matter is not what ultimately matters for John Milbank.¹ Within what Caputo calls “the soft Gnosticism” of “strong” theologies such as Radical Orthodoxy, the spirit isinthe fleshbut not ofthe flesh. Desiring to escape materiality and reach union with God, Milbank’s is a theology ofin-carnation rather than ofcarnality,and Caputo identifies this tendency in Milbank’s materialism, which operates within an economy of

13 The Future of Derrida: from: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Malabou Catherine
Abstract: The title of my chapter, “The Future of Derrida,” was John D. Caputo’s idea. In suggesting such a title, a beautiful one indeed, Caputo has made clear that, for him, my intellectual journey—starting with Hegel, going on with Heidegger, and then turning, in a move that might have appeared as a rupture, toward neurology and neuroplasticity—was not an estrangement from deconstruction but on the contrary a way of bringing it forward in trying to adapt it to the political as well as scientific and philosophical realities of the twenty-first century. Caputo knows that everything I have written since

16 Plasticity in the Contemporary Islamic Subject from: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Thibdeau John
Abstract: I do not begin from the premise that religion, as a set of beliefs, thoughts, or symbols, is an independently individuated entity of its own. By this I mean that religion is individuated as a phenomenon through human behavior and thought. This is intended to imply that the study of religions must think about religions as arising through, or possibly existing in, human behaviors. In this sense, religion does not exist independently of a human subject with causal or agentive powers in the world. Seeing religion as something in-itself fails to capture this aspect of it and consequently fails to

18 Prolegomenon to Thinking the Reject for the Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion from: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Goh Irving
Abstract: In seeking to outline a future of Continental philosophy of religion, as is the objective of this volume, perhaps we first need to trace the trajectory of the future of Continental philosophy itself. It could be said that the latter endeavor had already been put in place by Jean-Luc Nancy sometime in 1986, when he posed the question of qui vient après le sujet,or “who comes after the subject,” a question coming in the wake of the dissolution, or the putting to death, of thesubjectby Continental philosophy since the late 1960s. What Nancy’s question implies is that

3 Thinking about Class and Status in Morocco from: Encountering Morocco
Author(s) McMURRAY DAVID A.
Abstract: A barber worked directly across the street from the front door of our apartment in the late 1980s in Nador, a gritty boomtown in the Berber north that was exploding with the repatriated wealth of emigrants away in Europe as well as the revenues from goods smuggled in from Spain and hash smuggled out of Morocco.¹ The barber’s shop was decorated with posters of stylish men, all of them models advertising various hair care products. He had hired another barber—a poorer man, judging by his attire—to help out during busy times, such as early evening hours and Fridays.

7 A Distant Episode: from: Encountering Morocco
Author(s) NEWCOMB RACHEL
Abstract: It was a bright June day in Fes, with perfect blue skies, just before the heat of summer would lie on the Ville Nouvelle¹ like an unquiet conscience. Today my Moroccan mother-in-law, Jamila, had been promising to take me to the tomb of Sidi Bou Ghalib in the medina. For weeks I had been interviewing medical doctors, herbalists, midwives, and women about reproduction, but this would be my first visit to the tomb of a saint known for his baraka(the spiritual power a dead person once possessed) and his abilities to heal those who could not have children. My

8 Shortcomings of a Reflexive Tool Kit; or, Memoir of an Undutiful Daughter from: Encountering Morocco
Author(s) BARGACH JAMILA
Abstract: Bougainvilleas of multiple colors—burgundy, yellow, rose, and white—draped the walls of what seemed to be a timeless corner villa and separated it from the small streets paved with a puzzle, hard bricks that made a funny buzzing sound when cars drove on them. Past imposing metal doors, a tiny cemented walkway led up the stairs to the inside of this art-deco villa where there was practically no garden, except for the branches of the bougainvilleas shooting outside. This was the main headquarters of the nongovernmental organization (NGO) Solidarité Féminine, SolFem for short. The villa had been built around

INTRODUCTION from: Visual Culture in the Modern Middle East
Author(s) HAUGBOLLE SUNE
Abstract: From television and computer screens to billboards and magazines, images speak to modern human beings, shaping our social imaginaries and our visual cultures.¹ The term “visual culture” describes the mechanisms that produce and recycle visual material in various public cultures. Moreover, since the late 1980s it has come to designate a new interdisciplinary field of study, departing from the traditional methods of art historical inquiry to incorporate theoretical insights from literature, anthropology, sociology, cultural theory, gender studies, film, and media studies in order to examine a wider range of visual materials. Largely a disciplinary offshoot of cultural studies, which gained

CHAPTER 4 “You Will (Not) Be Able to Take Your Eyes off it!”: from: Visual Culture in the Modern Middle East
Author(s) KUBALA PATRICIA
Abstract: At the beginning of 2005, Rotana—a major album production company and multi-channel satellite television network in the Middle East owned by Saudi Prince al-Walid bin Talal—added a new channel, Rotana Cinema, to its bevy of channels for music videos, entertainment programs, concerts, and religious programming (added in 2006). The Rotana channels began to run advertisements for the new cinema channel featuring one of the company’s most famous and controversial music video stars, the voluptuous Lebanese pop singer Hayfa Wahbi. Set to the music of one of Hayfa’s latest hits, “Hayat Qalbi” (Life of My Heart), the ad juxtaposed

CHAPTER 6 The New Happy Child in Islamic Picture Books in Turkey from: Visual Culture in the Modern Middle East
Author(s) AZAK UMUT
Abstract: As elsewhere, Islamism in Turkey has been a political and cultural project that challenges the dominant dichotomies of traditional/modern, public/private, and Islamic/non-Islamic.¹ Studies of the cultural transformation and the emergence of new subjectivities brought by Islamism demonstrate the high significance of “visibility” to the Islamist project,² which has altered the public sphere to emphasize the “Islamic” difference—often through dress codes for women. According to Nilüfer Göle, since 1990 Islamism has experienced a second phase, in which its cultural program has become more apparent. The movement’s first phase was characterized by militant and revolutionary politics. In this second phase of

CHAPTER 13 Saudi-Islamist Rhetorics about Visual Culture from: Visual Culture in the Modern Middle East
Author(s) KRAIDY MARWAN
Abstract: In The Transparent Society, the Italian philosopher Gianni Vattimo writes that in late modernity “reality … cannot be understood as the objectives given lying beneath, or beyond, the images we receive of it from our media,” concluding that “reality is rather the result of the intersection … of a multiplicity of images, interpretations and reconstructions circulated by the media in competition with one another and without any ‘central’ coordination.”¹ Vattimo’s vision of social reality as a constellation of colliding and intersecting images is relevant to contemporary Arab societies that, since the early 1990s, have been bombarded by a plethora of

TWO Art and the Artist from: Degrees of Givenness
Abstract: Marion has written fairly extensively on art, although this topic has not been discussed much in the secondary literature on his work.¹ One of his early works, The Crossing of the Visible,is an extended reflection on the status of the image in art and contemporary culture. In his later writings, the work of art occupies a central place as the second type of saturated phenomenon, saturated according to quality. A “mediocre” Dutch painting and the practice of anamorphosis employed in painting is an element of the discussion of the given phenomenon in general in Being Given, and the chapter

Conclusion from: Degrees of Givenness
Abstract: In this book I have examined Marion’s proposal of saturated phenomena and argued that Marion focuses too exclusively on their absolute excess and almost complete lack of context. I have suggested, instead, that phenomena are given in degrees of saturation and not only in the two or three degrees Marion indicates, poverty and saturation, but instead in a whole variety and range of degrees. Phenomena are more or less saturated in many different ways, fitting not along a narrow spectrum, but occupying a wide field of diversity of appearance or givenness. Focusing entirely on absolute and total givenness, excessive saturation,

Foreword from: Law and the Public Sphere in Africa
Author(s) Diagne Souleymane Bachir
Abstract: When The Economist, on the cover of its 13 May 2000 issue, labeled Africa “The Hopeless Continent,” the magazine was certainly not betting on the seeds of change that had been appearing since the early 1990s on that continent, in spite of the wars and their attendant woes. When, a decade later, on the cover of its 3 December issue, the same magazine saluted a “Rising Africa,” those seeds had started to produce palpable results. Among the reasons that led the continent from “hopeless” to “rising” were peace and democratization, which brought about political stability and rule of law. Of

Introduction from: Law and the Public Sphere in Africa
Abstract: Palabreis original in its capacity to combine the code and the network, usually with success. Employing the one without ceasing to

1 The Public Space of Palabre from: Law and the Public Sphere in Africa
Abstract: The palabreis not held just anywhere, and since choosing a place is the object of a miniaturepalabrein its own right, the space of palabre becomes highly symbolic. The space ofpalabremarks the transformation of extension in space. By virtue of its continuity, extension presents a “substance which, once informed and transformed by humans, becomes space, i.e., form, suited for

2 A Political Paradigm from: Law and the Public Sphere in Africa
Abstract: If conflict cannot be eliminated, how can we live together with it? How should we contemplate a form of consensus that does not revert to the demand for unanimity found in so many totalitarian regimes? How to make consensus and pluralism cohabit in a single public space? As an uninterrupted dialogue, palabreembodies dissensus in a peaceful social space. It establishes the limits between the tolerable and intolerable, allowing one to evaluate and strengthen the connections between them.

3 Convergent Suspicions from: Law and the Public Sphere in Africa
Abstract: Palabreexorcises, channels, and sometimes authorizes the use of social violence. Its function is to stage public confrontation, a spectacle in which the self grapples with its other. And yet, there are institutions in Africa competing equally withpalabrein the project of reducing alterity. These include traditional powers, colonization, singleparties, and the false pluralism of present-day regimes.

Rationalities and Legal Processes in Africa from: Law and the Public Sphere in Africa
Author(s) Burrell Jean
Abstract: 1. Whether it is a collision or a harmonious synthesis, the encounter consists of a rather fragilebalance, since two realities (cultures, or forms of rationality) in contact will never be arithmetically proportionate; asymmetry is a necessary part of the encounter with the other, as Emmanuel Lévinas would say. Hence that fragility, which is indeed the expression of the encounter as a place and moment of instability and thus reversibility.

Introduction from: Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Buben Adam
Abstract: This has always been one of my favorite spots. Often, as I stood here on a quiet evening, the sea intoning its song with deep but calm solemnity, my eye catching not a single sail on the vast surface, and only the sea framed the sky and the sky the sea, while on the other hand the busy hum of

2. To Die and Yet Not Die: from: Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Podmore Simon D.
Abstract: Confessing in this journal entry from 1848 that, without dying willingly, death would have prevailed over him, Kierkegaard discloses how a life of suffering has prevented death from laying its claim to one who was already dead. Kierkegaard’s appropriation of the Latin aphorism further expresses an integral spiritual dialectic at the heart of Lutheran

3. Christian Hate: from: Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Buben Adam
Abstract: Should Søren Kierkegaard be listed among Christian apologists such as Anselm, Thomas Aquinas, or even Blaise Pascal? Focusing on his connections to Pascal, twentieth-century scholars Denzil G. M. Patrick and José Raimundo Maia Neto claim that Kierkegaard is, in fact, engaged in the same sort of project.¹ Kierkegaard himself seems to lend support to these claims when he states, “I have never broken with Christianity … from the time it was possible to speak of the application of my powers, I had firmly resolved to employ everything to defend it, or in any case to present it in its true

7. The Intimate Agency of Death from: Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Mooney Edward F.
Abstract: Midway through his fluid meditations in Moby Dick,Melville presents us with a particularly hair-raising incident. A fourteenth-century British commander has conquered a French town and demands his fair tribute in victory. He asks for six citizens to step forward to be hanged. The mayor and five others advance with halters around their necks. This fright snaps us alert—not just to cruelty, but to our mortality. And within a page, Melville assures us that a philosopher, sitting by the fire contemplating death, can be as aware, afraid, and deeply cognizant of death as anyone mounting a gallows. We all

12. Derrida, Judge William, and Death from: Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Duckles Ian
Abstract: In this chapter, I attempt to take seriously Derrida’s reading of Kierkegaard’s Fear and TremblinginThe Gift of Death.¹ In particular, I focus on Derrida’s claim that all universalizing ethical systems involve an evasion of responsibility for one’s actions. As Derrida sees it, this has important connections with mortality, since (following Heidegger)² it is through developing the correct attitude toward my own mortality—and consequently my singularity as this particular individual—that I am able to lead an authentic life. In effect, I take Derrida to be suggesting that pursuing ethical considerations is an attempt to avoid confronting one’s

2 Toward a Cultural Phenomenology of Body-World Relations from: Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Csordas Thomas J.
Abstract: For years in my seminar on embodiment I have begun by juxtaposing the work of Merleau-Ponty, Bourdieu, and Foucault, based on the intuition that the work of these three thinkers taken together established the intellectual topology of embodiment as an “indeterminate methodological field defined by perceptual experience and mode of presence and engagement in the world” (Csordas 1994: 12). Writing against the grain of the occasional antipathy toward phenomenology articu lated by both Bourdieu and Foucault, I suggest that taken together their work helps to outline the structure of this methodological field for cultural phenomenology by defining complementary aspects of

8 Being-in-the-Covenant: from: Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Timmer Jaap
Abstract: Biblical prophecy makes a major contribution to discourses and practices of nation and destiny in Solomon Islands. After discussing its broader context, this article investigates the power of Old Testament prophecies through analysis of the 2010 Queen’s Birthday speech of Solomon Islands’ governor-general, Sir Frank Kabui, entitled “Our connection with the Throne of England” (Kabui 2010), given to an audience of national and international officials in Honiara, the capital of Solomon Islands. Kabui, a To’abaita speaker from North Malaita, focuses on a British-Israelite theory that claims that Jacob’s pillar stone is kept in Scotland because the kings and queens of

10 Writing Affect, Love, and Desire into Ethnography from: Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Wynn L. L.
Abstract: The matter-of-fact irritation that Hammond expresses toward talking about “the sexual problem” is an apt analogy for contemporary anthropology’s approach to love. Sex, of course, has figured in anthropology’s public image ever since the earliest years of the discipline, with Margaret Mead’s Coming of Age in Samoa(1928), or Malinowski’s more explicitThe Sexual Life of Savages(1929), replete with descriptions of exotic sexual positions. And in recent years, “desire” has become an increasingly popular catchphrase in anthropological writing (e.g., Rofel 2007). Yet for all the attention anthropologists pay to sex and desire,lovewas, until quite recently, curiously rare

Afterword from: Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Jackson Michael
Abstract: At the time that I wrote my introduction to Things as They Arein 1994, very few anthropologists drew methodically on phenomenology in their work, although many explored and exemplified, in their approaches to ethnographic research and writing, key phenomenological themes, such as embodiment, lived experience, inter subjectivity, the sensorium, space and place, and critical events. Today, as the present volume attests, a significant number of anthropologists are not only engaging creatively with phenomenology, but subjecting the philo sophical insights of Husserl, Heidegger, Merleau-Ponty, Arendt, Derrida, Levinas, and Sartre to empirical tests in a variety of contemporary settings, thereby revising,

Book Title: The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity-Toward a Wider Suffrage
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): LLEWELYN JOHN
Abstract: Focusing on the idea of universal suffrage, John Llewelyn accepts the challenge of Derrida's later thought to renew his focus on the ethical, political, and religious dimensions of what makes us uniquely human. Llewelyn builds this concern on issues of representation, language, meaning, and logic with reflections on the phenomenological figures who informed Derrida's concept of deconstruction. By entering into dialogue with these philosophical traditions, Llewelyn demonstrates the range and depth of his own original thinking. The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity is a rich and passionate, playful and perceptive work of philosophical analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gz7jj

TWELVE Where to Cut: from: The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity
Abstract: Referring in The Animal That Therefore I Am to The Middle Voice of Ecological Conscience, Derrida says that he wishes to recommend the latter book especially because, sharing the author’s concern, he will perhaps proceed a little differently.¹ My concern in that book and particularly in chapter 8 of this one is to raise consciousness. It is to raise consciousness, where it seems to me to need raising, to conscience, and to raise conscience, where it seems to me to need raising, to responsibility. By responsibility I mean ethical responsibility in a sense I take to be the sense proposed

THIRTEEN Passover from: The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity
Abstract: Ce sacré pas du repas, this blessèd and blastedpastovernessof therepast, was something that made Derrida and me smile. The occasion was the colloquium “Victor Cousin, the Ideologists, and their Relations with Scottish Philosophy” that took place at the International Study Center of Sèvres in 1982 under the direction of Derrida on the French side, of myself on the Scottish side, and of Pierre Alexandre, who, as then co-director of the Center and formerly director of the French Institute in Scotland, was well placed to coordinate our energies. Professor Henri Gouhier honored us with his presence and his

FOURTEEN The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity from: The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity
Abstract: A passing bell sounds in the word “rigor” used in the phrase borrowed from Derrida in the title of this book to perform a double service. On the one hand the title refers to the rigor mortisthreatened by the rigidly rigorous pure science of representation that Husserl and the young Wittgenstein both sought as an ideal and feared as an instigator of crisis. On the other hand the title refers to a deepening of crisis, to what may be described as a hyperCritical crisis because it is a crisis provoked by a responsibility, spelled out in the second part

2 ‘Reality’ effects in computer animation from: A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Manovich Lev
Abstract: Giotto’s miracle lay in being able to produce for the first time on a flat surface three-dimensional forms, which the French could achieve only in sculpture. For the first time since antiquity a painter

4 The Quay brothers’ The Epic of Gilgamesh and the ‘metaphysics of obscenity’ from: A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Weiner Steve
Abstract: The puppet animators Stephen and Timothy Quay, with producer Keith Griffiths, form the Atelier Koninck. Their first film, Nocturna Artificialia(1979), a single-puppet film andEin Brudermord,a two-puppet film based on Kafka, were both heavily atmospheric.The Atelier then made a paper-puppet satire on Stravinsky and a film about the Flemish playwright De Ghelderode. Then followed three art documentaries, for which the Quays made puppet-animated inserts, on Punch and Judy, Janacek and Jan Svankmajer.Songs of the Chief of the Officers of Hunar Louse or This Unnameable Little Broom(1985) (calledGilgameshfor short), a film in which a moronic

5 Narrative strategies for resistance and protest in Eastern European animation from: A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Moritz William
Abstract: Soviet Russia’s domination of Eastern European countries for over 40years (from the fall of the ‘Iron Curtain’ around 1947 until the ‘Glasnost’ of about 1990) brought mixed blessings for animation. On the one hand, Soviet policy favoured cinema as an essential, powerful popular art form and maintained busy animation studios not only for each country but also for distinct ethnic groups; animators were often tenured civil servants with guaranteed full-time employment making not only theatrical cartoons but also public service and educational animation, children’s films of folk culture and titles and special effects for features. On the other hand, soviet

8 Clay animation comes out of the inkwell: from: A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Frierson Michael
Abstract: Clay animated films were produced in the United States as early as 1908 when Edison Manufacturing released a trick film entitled The Sculptor’s Welsh Rarebit Dream.In 1916, clay animation became something of a fad, as an East Coast artist named Helena Smith Dayton and a West Coast animator named Hopkins produced clay animated films on a wide range of subjects. Hopkins in particular was quite prolific, producing over 50 clay animated segments for the weeklyUniversal Screen Magazine.But by the 1920s, cartoon animation using either cels or slash system was firmly established as the dominant mode of animation

10 Norman McLaren and Jules Engel: from: A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Moritz William
Abstract: Of all the great names in animation, Norman McLaren has, paradoxically, suffered most from a kind of critical neglect. Everyone acknowledges his genius, but few discuss it. Numerous books and articles chronicle his life and describe his works, usually stressing the inventiveness of his filmic but rarely do they analyse his aesthetic qualities and achievements.¹

13 Animatophilia, cultural production and corporate interests: from: A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Langer Mark
Abstract: One of the best-publicised events related to animation and video during 1992 was the conflict between Nickelodeon and filmmaker John Kricfalusi over the cablecast animation series The Ren & Stimpy Show. Critics have hailed Kricfalusi as ‘a man of genius’ and the series as ‘the best animated cartoon come along since the glory days of the 1940s’.¹ Nickelodeon owned the rights to the programme and characters devised by Kricfalusi. Despite the acclaim for the filmmaker and the series, Nickelodeon transferred production from Kricfalusi’s Spumco studio to a new Games Productions studio,which used many former Spumco staff. Nickelodeon maintained that they

15 Body consciousness in the films of Jan Svankmajer from: A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Wells Paul
Abstract: The work of Jan Svankmajer, celebrated Czechoslovakian animator and avant-garde filmmaker, demonstrates an ongoing pre-occupation with the codes and conditions of bodily function and identity. His fictions are characterised by the recognition of transience in the body and the place of the body as a defining instrument in socio-cultural mechanisms and indeed, as a socio-cultural mechanism. Svankmajer uses the unique vocabulary of animation in expressing these principles and essentially re-defines the conditions by which the body might be represented and re-defined aesthetically and politically.

Book Title: Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): DAHL ESPEN
Abstract: The American philosopher Stanley Cavell (b. 1926) is a secular Jew who by his own admission is obsessed with Christ, yet his outlook on religion in general is ambiguous. Probing the secular and the sacred in Cavell's thought, Espen Dahl explains that Cavell, while often parting ways with Christianity, cannot dismiss it either. Focusing on Cavell's work as a whole, but especially on his recent engagement with Continental philosophy, Dahl brings out important themes in Cavell's philosophy and his conversation with theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gz98c

INTRODUCTION from: Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: “Why are the most unlikely people, including myself, suddenly talking about God?” Terry Eagleton asks, referring to the return of religion among intellectuals, in affirmation as well as criticism of it.¹ Stanley Cavell also has quite a bit to say about God, as attested by the very existence of this book. But since religion is notably not one of the topics on which Cavell’s fame as a thinker rests, it seems reasonable to count Cavell among the “unlikely people” Eagleton has in mind. Nonetheless, such a characteristic would be misleading. Cavell has not “suddenly” or recently started “talking about God”;

THREE Acknowledging God from: Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: Having presented Cavell’s openness toward the problem of religion, I now proceed to more theologically charged territory in order to explore some possibilities offered by Cavell’s philosophy. In doing so, I focus on one of Cavell’s signature concepts, namely acknowledgment. Although acknowledgment has a wide application in Cavell’s thinking—including our relation to the world, others, different modernist artistic media, and our own conditions as speaking animals—it was initially developed in response to the skeptical problem of other minds. Since the problem of other minds has remained at the center of Cavell’s concerns, and since this problem highlights features

FIVE The Tragic Dimension of the Ordinary from: Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: Following the Augustinian tradition, original sin is something that we are responsible for and hence guilty of, yet in another sense it is a destiny that befalls us. At stake is hence a fine balance between necessity and freedom, between personal guilt and delivery to destructive structures. Accordingly, acknowledging sin takes a personal sense of the I, confessing or revealing itself as the originator of deeds and speech, while acknowledging that this I is indebted—for better and for worse—to the inheritance of and continuous participation in a form of life that bestows coherence to those deeds and utterances.

SIX The Other and Violence from: Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: Whereas the previous chapter elaborated what might be thought of as a destiny to which we must be answerable, I now turn to another, more active face of skepticism or sin, namely violence. What is the connection between violence and my relation to the other? How can the motives behind violence be understood, and how is it entangled with religion? Levinas’s understanding of how violence is bound up with the face of the other provides a rich phenomenological account, one that I believe can be supplemented with Cavell’s subtle understanding of its motivation.

Introduction from: Gadamer
Abstract: The name hans-georg gadamer is intimately bound up with philosophical hermeneutics. Like only a few other contemporary currents, hermeneutics has exerted a widespread influence that goes well beyond the limits of philosophy and that has a depth and range difficult to evaluate. From aesthetics to literary criticism, from theology to jurisprudence, from sociology to psychiatry, there is almost no area of the “humanities” without a hermeneutic substratum. Not even epistemology has remained neutral. Assessing the widely differentiated, international effects of hermeneutics within philosophy is still more difficult. Gadamer was not only a witness of, but also an interlocutor for, the

3 Lingering in Art from: Gadamer
Abstract: It may seem surprising—and Gadamer himself admits this in retrospect—that Truth and Method,despite the title’s promise of a close examination of truth, begins with an extensive discussion of art (GR195/GW8373). However, art in particular plays a key role in philosophical hermeneutics, and this is because a new experience of truth can be achieved only from art; thus the need arises to free aesthetics from the quarrel with modern science. The modern scientific demand for objectivity forces aesthetic experience to understand itself merely subjectively, as if we were dealing with a form of subjectivity that is

6 An Ethics Close to Life from: Gadamer
Abstract: To understand means to apply; understanding is always put into practice and thus becomes a form of action in itself, in the world, and with others. It should come as no surprise that hermeneutics, as it recuperates the theoretical as well as practical value it has had since antiquity, develops in proximity to practical philosophy.Gadamer emphasizes this point in his 1972 essay, “Hermeneutics as Practical Philosophy” (RAS88–112/VZW78–109). Here theethicaldimension of hermeneutics becomes clearer: it does not lie in understanding as such, and even less in the alleged task or duty of understanding, but rather in

Introduction from: Nietzsche and Phenomenology
Author(s) Daigle Christine
Abstract: Putting Nietzscheandphenomenologytogether in the same sentence might be startling to some, even unpalatable to others. Nietzsche’s writing style along with his rejection of theSpirit of Gravity¹ would seem to oppose the very goal of the phenomenological project as well as its foundational and scientific ambition. To Nietzsche scholars, his philosophy would be irreducible to any kind of philosophical school or movement and would need to be treated on its own if one wants to respect the claim for singularity conveyed by his philosophy. To would-be phenomenologists, the socalled nihilistic enterprise led by Nietzsche should not be

1 Husserl and Nietzsche from: Nietzsche and Phenomenology
Author(s) Boehm Rudolf
Abstract: Philosophers’ lives do not seem exempt from this rule. In the end, philosophers are able to reach such a point of view—which is essential for them to see anything at all—only when they “engage,” when they “take a position.”³ Nevertheless a philosopher’s point of view—as little as any other—does not essentially concern itself with what is uncovered by her gaze, since, although indispensable

7 Nietzsche’s Performative Phenomenology: from: Nietzsche and Phenomenology
Author(s) Babich Babette
Abstract: Like the manifold significations of Being, phenomenology can be and has been articulated in several ways. To say this is also to underscore that when we choose for one expression of phenomenology, even, say, the most canonic expression, such as Husserl’s, we also tend to choose againstother approaches. This can go so far as to exclude the late in favor of the early Husserl; in other instances this may include favoring analytic readings and opposing classically continental readings of Husserl’s phenomenology and can entail excluding Heidegger’s or Sartre’s or Merleau-Ponty’s or Günther Anders’ or others’ approaches to phenomenology.¹ To

8 Of the Vision and the Riddle: from: Nietzsche and Phenomenology
Author(s) Boublil Élodie
Abstract: The chapter titled “Of the Vision and the Riddle” in Thus Spoke Zarathustrapresents theNietzscheantest of the Eternal Return. This invitation conveys the premises of the reevaluation to come, since it reverses the traditional connotations associated with riddles, on the one hand, and those related to vision, on the other hand. From the beginning, seeing does not help solve the riddle—as would have been the case within the context of prophetic revelation¹—but it leads to the riddle’s preservation and concealment so that seeing could turn the riddle into the questionpar excellencethat would test the

11 Nietzsche and Merleau-Ponty: from: Nietzsche and Phenomenology
Author(s) Johnson Galen A.
Abstract: It has been little remarked that Nietzsche’s Birth of Tragedy¹ made Raphael’s magnificent painting of the transfiguration of Christ the “monogram” of Nietzsche’s account of the origin of tragedy and his philosophy of art. Moreover, since that work introduces us to the figure of Dionysus, who plays an increasingly definitive role for Nietzsche’s entire philosophy as it unfolds in the later writings, we can add more emphatically that Raphael’sTransfiguration, as ironic as it may seem, is the monogram of the philosophy of the death of God. The goal of this paper will be to show how this is the

12 The Philosophy of the Morning: from: Nietzsche and Phenomenology
Author(s) Ansell-Pearson Keith
Abstract: I think it is difficult for any commentator to declare with total conviction that he has got Nietzsche right in terms of identifying him with a single or specific philosophical movement or doctrine. My view is that naturalism, existentialism, phenomenology, and poststructuralism can all, with a degree of plausibility, claim themselves heirs to his thinking.¹ Nietzsche is a thinker whose texts open up “possibilities,” and all these modes of thought can be found prefigured and at work in the text I focus on in this paper, Dawn.² Having said this, however, it is remarkable the extent to which this text

13 Appearance and Values: from: Nietzsche and Phenomenology
Author(s) Hatab Lawrence J.
Abstract: For Heidegger, Nietzsche represents the culmination of Western metaphysics and nihilism, particularly with his thinking on will to power and eternal recurrence. Presumably Nietzsche remains within the orbit of metaphysics by simply reversing metaphysical binaries (e.g., becoming over being, appearance over truth).²

SIXTEEN Toward a Visionary Politics: from: Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith
Author(s) NISSIM-SABAT MARILYN
Abstract: We need, and our society needs, to create a vision of our human future and to actualize that vision in practice. I believe that just such a vision can emerge from a synthesis of feminist, philosophical, and spiritual resources. While the project of constituting such a vision is implicit in the work of writers and activists in a variety of fields, I hope in this paper to make a contribution by making the project of synthesis explicit and discussing some of its theoretical and concrete ramifications. The following remarks explain how I came to embark on this project.

Book Title: Material Feminisms- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Hekman Susan
Abstract: Harnessing the energy of provocative theories generated by recent understandings of the human body, the natural world, and the material world, Material Feminisms presents an entirely new way for feminists to conceive of the question of materiality. In lively and timely essays, an international group of feminist thinkers challenges the assumptions and norms that have previously defined studies about the body. These wide-ranging essays grapple with topics such as the material reality of race, the significance of sexual difference, the impact of disability experience, and the complex interaction between nature and culture in traumatic events such as Hurricane Katrina. By insisting on the importance of materiality, this volume breaks new ground in philosophy, feminist theory, cultural studies, science studies, and other fields where the body and nature collide.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gzgqh

11 HOW REAL IS RACE? from: Material Feminisms
Author(s) Hames-García Michael
Abstract: A quick read of Ward Connolly’s Racial Privacy Initiative (which would have eliminated California’s use of race as a means of classification) reveals much about the contradictions in public discourse about race. Among other things, it explicitly provided for the retention of racial profiling on the part of the police while freeing police departments from having to keep track of the race of the people they arrested or detained. The ballot measure, promoted using liberal, antiracist rhetoric, would have frustrated all attempts to demonstrate discriminatory patterns of surveillance, arrest, or harassment by police. Race clearly matters, and yet throughout its

12 FROM RACE/SEX/ETC. TO GLUCOSE, FEEDING TUBE, AND MOURNING: from: Material Feminisms
Author(s) Bost Suzanne
Abstract: When Gloria Anzaldúa and Cherríe Moraga first collaborated on This Bridge Called My Back: Writings by Radical Women of Colorat the end of the 1970s, their primary concern was addressing the simultaneous oppressions experienced by women of color along the axes of race, class, sex, and sexuality. As they challenged the masculinist subject of Chicano nationalism, these writers turned to coalition building and editorial collaboration to locate themselves at the intersection of multiple sociopolitical identifications. Collections likeBridgeshifted feminist criticism toward a greater sensitivity to the ways in which feminist identity politics traverse racial and sexual differences. One

4 The Incurved Self from: A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: The purpose of this chapter is to work out two related claims regarding how to think about the fallen self, i.e., the self in sin. First, following on the relational ontology we sketched in the previous chapter, we need to think about sin relationally rather than in terms of substance and accidents. Second, in order to understand sin, we need recourse to figurative discourse. Taking Ricoeur as a point of departure, in the first section we will see why reflection on sin and evil requires a hermeneutics of figurative discourse. Sin and evil cannot be explained, but must be described.

7 The Capable Human Being as a Penultimate Good from: A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: In chapter 6 we saw that the cruciform self is not a punctual self. In this chapter I demonstrate the sense in which the cruciform self is a capable self, since capability is one of the central themes of philosophical anthropology. On Ricoeur’s definition, capability is a power or potentiality that the self is able to exercise—most basically, “the power to cause something to happen.”¹ So our question is this: What place do human agency and the power to act have in the life of faith? What does the word of the cross mean for our understanding of the

9 Reflexivity, Intentionality, and Self-Understanding from: A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: In chapter 7 we saw how the category of the penultimate allows for a critical affirmation of human capability. This chapter employs a similar strategy regarding self-reflexivity and self-understanding, showing that the for-itself has a proper penultimate status in the life of faith and that the cruciform self is a self-interpreting animal. It is necessary to make this argument given our interpretation of sin as incurvature, which might seem to reinforce the Romantic-idealist interpretation of the fall as a felix culpa, a condition for the possibility of self-consciousness. Moreover, Bonhoeffer’s claim that the intentionality of faith is anactus directus

10 Religion within the Limits of the Penultimate? from: A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: We have seen how the cruciform self fits and conflicts with a number of themes of philosophical anthropology, such that we can understand the sense in which the cruciform self is also a homo capax, a responsible self, and a self-reflexive, self-interpreting animal. In this final chapter we will see whether we should think of the cruciform self as ahomo religiosus. Once again we will bring Ricoeur and Bonhoeffer into dialogue. Religion, and the sacred, is a significant aspect of Ricoeur’s philosophical anthropology, since he argues that religion plays a pivotal role in the convergence of human capability and

TWO THE INSISTENCE OF GOD from: The Insistence of God
Abstract: Allow me to put my cards on the table right at the outset. My criterion of truth is how well we have learned to deal with the fear of one small word, “perhaps.” That, I would say, is a general problem for us all. No one gets a pass. But in this book I am singling out theology and calling for a new species of theologians, theologians of the future. That means I measure theology by the extent to which it avoids the pitfalls of a too-comforting piety—of pious prayers and pious theology portrayed on gilded postcards. I avoid

THREE INSISTENCE AND HOSPITALITY: from: The Insistence of God
Abstract: The name of God is the name of trouble. The insistence of God means that God calls for a response or, since God is not somebody who “does” things like call, it means that the calling takes place in the middle voice, in and under the name of God. God calls in the middle voice. The call is perfectly figured in an unexpected and insistent knocking on our door. A disturbing visitation in the night is an uncertainty in which all the sting of “perhaps” is perfectly concentrated, in which the dynamics of “perhaps” and a theology of insistence is

SIX IS THERE AN EVENT IN HEGEL? from: The Insistence of God
Abstract: Let there be no mistake. I am following Hegel where he did not quite mean to lead, marching to a drum he did not quite beat, taking up a cause he did not quite advocate. I am proposing, as Heidegger would have said, to “repeat” Hegel, to repeat not what Hegel actually said, which has already been said by Hegel, but to repeat the possible in Hegel, remaining loyal to the possibilities Hegel opened up for us by being faithfully disloyal to Hegel. To repeat Hegel in a productive way is, of course, to repeat Hegel’s own prodigious ability to

ELEVEN A NIHILISM OF GRACE: from: The Insistence of God
Abstract: I return now to the hard hypothesis, that life is a passing feature of the universe, an interim phenomenon, not an ultimate or permanent part of the cosmic furnishings. An ineluctable fate lies in store for us—terrestrial, solar, galactic, and universal death in entropic disintegration, that point when there is no chiasm or poetics, no life or religion. What then of God, perhaps?

SIX Nature and Artifice from: What Is Fiction For?
Abstract: Part 1 proposed a new theoretical basis for the ancient idea that in major creative literature the manipulation of language in the context of a poem or fictional narrative can suffice to throw light on something worth calling real. Its central pillar is an account of meaning derived from a new reading of Wittgenstein that departs radically from the traditional account, entrenched for many centuries in Western philosophy, of how language connects with reality. According to that traditional account, to bestow meaning upon a noun is automatically to connect it to reality, since to bestow meaning on a noun is,

NINE The Limits of Authorial License in Our Mutual Friend from: What Is Fiction For?
Abstract: To expose the intimate connections between intellectual confidence and selective blindness, it is often sufficient to confront current certainties with the exploded convictions of a vanished age. In this Pickwickian sense, G. K. Chesterton’s 1911 essay on Our Mutual Friendremains a useful companion to the novel.¹ Chesterton is as convinced that literature is “referential,” that its prime business is to represent reality, as we are that it is not. He celebrates Dickens for many things, but always, and centrally, for the accuracy of his descriptions of manners: “The particular kind of chaos that is created by the hospitality of

Epilogue: from: What Is Fiction For?
Abstract: Part of my purpose in this book, as set out in chapter 1, has been to defend academic literary studies as a cornerstone of the humanities. That can hardly be done unless it can be shown that some works of literature are more worth studying than others, because they are better as literaturethan others. Why, otherwise, spend time and energy discussing Shakespeare or Sterne with students; why allocate the funds to support the departments, the journals, and the postgraduate research that constitute the essential infrastructure of such teaching if those students’ time might as well be spent in the

1 The Question of a Latin American Philosophy and Its Identity: from: Latin American Philosophy from Identity to Radical Exteriority
Abstract: Philosophy and Western culture have been synonymous at least since Hegel’s philosophy of history. Even when philosophy has been ignored, degraded, reappropriated, or put into question and even when philosophers have sought to “destroy” it, philosophy has been taken as a given inseparable from Western culture and born of it. Practically speaking, no one from the West or educated under the Western tradition, no matter how critical of it, would put into question the existence of European, French, German, or Italian philosophy. In Latin America the situation is different: The question that animates the very arising into existence and the

4 Delimitations . . . of Dussel’s Philosophy of Liberation and Beyond from: Latin American Philosophy from Identity to Radical Exteriority
Abstract: Throughout our discussions so far one pressing issue becomes evident as the driving concern behind Latin American thought: the concern with engaging concrete, living Latin American existence. As Dussel points out, it is ultimately life that calls for thought’s liberation. In this chapter I discuss some of the main critiques of Dussel’s thought, all of which are driven by this same concern. As we will see, these critical approaches will raise the question of how to engage the concrete and diverse singularities that compose the general fields Dussel has strategically outlined. What is put in question is the way thought

5 Beyond the Domination of the “Coloniality of Power and Knowledge”: from: Latin American Philosophy from Identity to Radical Exteriority
Abstract: In the previous chapters we have seen a constant attentiveness in Latin American thinkers toward thinking in light of their concrete situation. This situated thought finds a profound opening in Enrique Dussel’s insight concerning Latin American thought as arising out of a radical exteriority beyond the possible control, determination, and manipulation of Western European and North American thought and culture. We also saw that such experience is pre-rational, inasmuch as it ultimately refers us to a sensibility found at the heart of the disposition that differentiates us as human, namely the encounter of other humans in a proximity sustained by

1 The Limits of the Humanities from: Levinas and the Crisis of Humanism
Abstract: In his book The Last Professors: The Corporate University and the Fate of the Humanities,Frank Donoghue, an English professor at The Ohio State University, traces the roots of the corporate model of education back to the turn of the twentieth century, the rise of industrialization, and the increased power attained by those with wealth. It was not long before the newly moneyed were exerting power and influence over university education, while simultaneously expressing their suspicion of the very education they were funding. As Donoghue’s analysis shows, education that did not aim to produce anything—that is, humanities education—was

2 Solitary Men from: Levinas and the Crisis of Humanism
Abstract: “No one is more self-sufficient than Rousseau,” Levinas proclaims in his 1935 book, On Escape,a statement that could be easily dismissed as a passing swipe at the eighteenth-century thinker.¹ No doubt, Levinas would have ambivalent feelings about Rousseau, whose philosophy is often cited as influential in the French Revolution and the development of the French Republic. Yet, Levinas’s stab at Rousseau’s emphasis on self-sufficiency is not simply a throwaway line; self-sufficiency lies at the heart of a humanism that would develop out of modernity and to which Levinas offers a sustained response. In short, “self-sufficiency” sums up everything that

1 From Ecological Postmodernism to Material Ecocriticism: from: Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Oppermann Serpil
Abstract: The conception of physical reality within the framework of ecological postmodern thought and the nature of the material world described by quantum theory have recently been given new life by the emergence of the new materialist paradigm. The radical revisions of our ideas about the description of physical entities, chemical and biological processes, and their ethical, political, and cultural implications represented in recent discourses of feminist science studies, posthumanism, and the environmental humanities have also occasioned considerable interest among ecocritics, leading to the emergence of material ecocriticism. Proposing that we can read the world as matter endowed with stories, material

2 Limits of Agency: from: Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Bergthaller Hannes
Abstract: If one had to choose an epigraph for the new materialisms, one could do worse than settle for the closing lines of The Order of Things.The new materialist thought takes as a given the “crumbling” of the conceptual foundations of modern humanism that Foucault anticipated; its intellectual project is a redescription of the world that dissolves the singular figure of the human subject, distinguished by unique properties (soul, reason, mind, free will, or intentionality), into the dense web of material relations in which all beings are enmeshed. This move cuts two ways. On the one hand, the new materialists

7 When It Rains: from: Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Duckert Lowell
Abstract: Responding to his country’s record rainfalls in the beginning of the twenty-first century, British journalist Brian Cathcart seems to bring more of it. Rainmakes a dreary forecast: “It is only when things go wrong that our dim consciousness of scientific meteorology rises to the surface” (66). French sociologist of science Bruno Latour would diagnose this tendency as “blackboxing.” Focusing only on the success of a scientific or technological apparatus paradoxically renders “the joint production of actors and artifacts entirely opaque” (Hope 183).¹ When a meteorology machine runs smoothly, it produces factual climates that we can reasonably predict and accurately

TEN Global Ethics from: Ideas to Live For
Abstract: Global ethics refers to a diverse field of intellectual inquiry devoted to establishing norms, procedures, and practices for addressing issues of conduct, collaboration, and conflict in the global sphere. Such issues can be of consequence to individuals, communities, states, transnational organizations, or any combination thereof. What makes them global is their sphere of reference and resonance. Do they register on scales of import or signifi-cance and consequence that require interpretation within a global as opposed to a national, transnational, regional, or local frame?

Introduction from: The Cruelest of All Mothers: Marie de l'Incarnation, Motherhood, and Christian Tradition
Abstract: “I received your letter,” wrote Marie de l’Incarnation to her son, Claude, “and everything that was in your packet when I was no longer expecting it.” It was the summer of 1647 and nearly a decade since Marie had left her cloister in Tours, France, to found the first Ursuline convent in the New World. The Quebec in which Marie had settled in 1639 was still, eight years later, underdeveloped, poorly organized, and thinly populated—a struggling outpost pitifully vulnerable to Iroquois attacks. Marie’s mind was not, however, on the state of colonial affairs at this particular moment in the

3 Explanation: from: The Cruelest of All Mothers: Marie de l'Incarnation, Motherhood, and Christian Tradition
Abstract: When I was in graduate school, I was assigned to read the bestseller Expecting Adam, Martha Beck’s memoir about bearing and raising a son with Down syndrome. Beck’s story, as she tells it, is one of “two driven Harvard academics” who find meaning and miracles in the experience of parenting their special-needs child. Fundamentally a narrative of resistance to a coldly rational and achievement-oriented Harvard culture,Expecting Adamis the story of parents who, in “allow[ing] their baby to be born … [were] themselves … born, infants in a new world where magic is commonplace, Harvard professors are the slow

5 Motherhood Refigured: from: The Cruelest of All Mothers: Marie de l'Incarnation, Motherhood, and Christian Tradition
Abstract: To his critics, Bourdieu’s understanding of human agency (upon which I have relied to loosely structure my explanation of the abandonment) amounts to nothing more than a sophisticated version of social determinism.¹ Although Bourdieu’s intention had been to articulate a way of thinking about why people do what they do that transcended the reductive binaries of domination and resistance, his critics have consistently accused him of proposing a model of agency that condemns human actors to the reproduction of their own histories. And it is easy to see upon what logical grounds such accusations rest. For Bourdieu, after all, social

Book Title: The Beautiful, The True and the Good- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): Wood Robert E.
Abstract: "Among the foremost Catholic philosophers of his generation. He has utilized the fullness of the Catholic intellectual tradition to brilliantly take the measure of modern philosophical thought . . . This volume is an expression of Robert Wood's singular philosophical outlook." -Jude Dougherty, dean emeritus, school of philosophy, The Catholic University of America
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16ptn39

1 Reflections on Heraclitus from: The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: The work of Heraclitus, unlike the work of Plato or Aristotle, has come down to us only in fragments preserved in various ancient sources that cited his work. As Charles Kahn has pointed out, every age has “projected its own meaning and its own preoccupations onto the text of Heraclitus.”¹ His fragments have had a peculiar attraction in modern times. Hegel said that there was not a single fragment (or “proposition”) that had not found a place in his System.² Nietzsche drew deeply from them. He claimed that “what he (Heraclitus) saw, the teaching of law in becomingand of

14 Monasticism, Eternity, and the Heart: from: The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: There is a sense in which Hegel summed up the philosophic tradition. And he did so by focusing attention upon the eternal encompassment present in life itself. Nietzsche carried on that movement “to install eternity in time.” In both cases, the enemy was monasticism, whose focus on eternity beyond this life led to a genuine contempt for this life. Dostoevsky was sensitive to both sides in this encounter: ancient monasticism and the Hegel-Nietzsche attack on it. In his Brothers Karamazov, he realized a kind ofAufhebungof the antinomies in the figures of Fr. Zosima and his protégé, Alyosha Karamazov.

15 The Free Spirit: from: The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: One hears in Hegel that freedom is the recognition of necessity;¹ one reads in Nietzsche that the free spirit is characterized by amor fatias the will to the Eternal Recurrence of the Same.² It seems that we have identical, if paradoxical, claims. Both of them find affinities in Spinoza, for whom everything follows with rigid necessity, and the free man is one who is privileged by the working of necessity to recognize that fact by rising above the appetites that cloud the mind.³ Awareness of belonging to the Whole and accepting the necessity of fate link Nietzsche to Spinoza

20 Buber’s Use of Oriental Themes from: The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: In the East and in the West today, religious and philosophical traditions seem to be in a rapid state of decay brought about by the geometrical increase in the It-World of scientific and technical mastery that emerged out of the West since the time of the Renaissance. If such an It-World seemed overpowering in 1923 when Buber’s classic I and Thouappeared, it has moved light-years beyond since then in its industrial-scientific component and in the social regimentation connected therewith.¹

Book Title: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2-Aspects of Historicity in the Fourth Gospel
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Thatcher Tom
Abstract: This groundbreaking volume draws together an international group of leading biblical scholars to consider one of the most controversial religious topics in the modern era: Is the Gospel of John-the most theological and distinctive among the four canonical Gospels-historical or not? If not, why does John alone among the Gospels claim eyewitness connections to Jesus? If so, why is so much of John's material unique to John? Using various methodologies and addressing key historical issues in John, these essays advance the critical inquiry into Gospel historiography and John's place within it, leading to an impressive consensus and convergences along the way. The contributors are Paul N. Anderson; Mark Appold; Richard Bauckham; Helen K. Bond; Richard A. Burridge; James H. Charlesworth; Jaime Clark-Soles; Mary Coloe; R. Alan Culpepper; Craig A. Evans; Sean Freyne; Jeffrey Paul Garcia; Brian D. Johnson; Peter J. Judge; Felix Just, S.J.; Craig S. Keener; Edward W. Klink III; Craig R. Koester; Michael Labahn; Mark A. Matson; James F. McGrath; Susan Miller; Gail R. O'Day; Bas van Os; Tom Thatcher; Derek M. H. Tovey; Urban C. von Wahlde; and Ben Witherington III.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16ptndz

“We Beheld His Glory!” (John 1:14) from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Keener Craig S.
Abstract: Most scholars today concur that the Fourth Gospel includes both history and theology. Even many patristic interpreters, who often harmonized John with the Synoptics (hence apparently stressing history), recognized John as a “spiritual” Gospel, emphasizing its interpretive aspects. The Gospel clearly interprets theologically the eyewitness claim that apparently stands behind it (cf. 21:24); perhaps most conspicuously, in the Fourth Gospel as a whole the eyewitness claim of water and blood from Jesus’ side (19:34–35) is made to climax a motif of water running through the narrative (1:26, 33; 2:7 – 9; 3:5, 23; 4:10, 13 – 14; 5:2; 7:37 – 39; 9:7;

The Symbology of the Serpent in the Gospel of John from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Charlesworth James H.
Abstract: Such a study is warranted, since over the last decade

Introduction to Part 2: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Anderson Paul N.
Abstract: John 5–12 covers the middle section of Jesus’ ministry, including three trips to Jerusalem (John 5; 7; 12), intense debates between Jesus and the religious leaders in Jerusalem (John 5; 7–10), the feeding of the five thousand and related events (John 6—the sea crossing, debates as to the meaning of the feeding, and the confession of Peter), the healing of a lame man by the Pool of Bethesda (John 5), the healing of a blind man and his washing in the Pool of Siloam (John 9), the raising of Lazarus from the dead (John 11), the anointing

Jesus and the Galilean ‘Am Ha’arets: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Freyne Sean
Abstract: In discussing the historical plausibility or otherwise of episodes or speeches in the Fourth Gospel, a number of important interpretative decisions have to be taken. These methodological issues cannot be discussed in detail in this essay. My own opinion, as stated in my study of Galilee and the Gospels, is as follows: “The fact that Galilee enters the ironic patterns that the author (John) seeks to develop, shows just how important the memories associated with the region were to Christian self-understanding, even when there is no concern to develop a realistic narrative of that setting” (Freyne 1988, 131–32). In

On Not Unbinding the Lazarus Story: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Tovey Derek M. H.
Abstract: The story of the raising of Lazarus must be one of the most problematic in the Fourth

Aspects of Historicity in John 5–12: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Anderson Paul N.
Abstract: In responding to the eight essays in part 2 of this volume, I am impressed at the variety of approaches to aspects of historicity in the Gospel of John. Employing religious-anthropological, archaeological, contextual, and historical-critical studies, these essays cover the middle section of the Fourth Gospel, which includes three of Jesus’ four trips to Jerusalem and rising opposition from the Judean religious leaders. The one miracle narrated in all four canonical Gospels—the feeding of the five thousand—and its attending features makes John 6 the premier locus of Gospel-comparison analysis, yet the Lazarus story of John 11 has captured

Imitating Jesus: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Burridge Richard A.
Abstract: From earliest days, John has been viewed as the “spiritual gospel” (πνευματικὸν εὐαγγέλιον), while the “external facts” (actually, “the bodily things” (τὰ σωματικὰ) were preserved in the Synoptics (a saying originally attributed to Clement of Alexandria by Eusebius, Hist. eccl.6.14.7). Thus John has been seen as relatively late and Hellenistic, and primarily theological, while the Synoptics were seen as earlier and more Jewish, and therefore, according to this argument, more historical. Not surprisingly, then, John has been neglected in the various quests for the historical Jesus. Nowhere is this contrast more obvious than with regard to the ethical teaching

The Historical Plausibility of John’s Passion Dating from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Matson Mark A.
Abstract: The question of the historical value of material in the Fourth Gospel rests on two concerns that always lurk behind the discussions in the SBL group focusing on John, Jesus, and history. The first is the foundational question of how we evaluate the Gospels, or really any ancient writing, for “historical” material. That is, we must deal with the always-contentious issue of the criteria we use to determine Gospel materials’ historical value.¹ The second question is how we account for the stark differences between John and the Synoptics.² One cannot venture far into any consideration of John’s historical value without

See My Hands and My Feet: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Garcia Jeffrey Paul
Abstract: But Thomas, who was called the Twin, one of the twelve, was not with them when Jesus came. So the other disciples told him, “We have seen the Lord.” But he said to them, “Unless I see the mark of the nailsin his hands, and put my finger in the mark of thenailsand my hand in his side, I will not believe.” A week later his disciples were again

Peter’s Rehabilitation (John 21:15–19) and the Adoption of Sinners: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Labahn Michael
Abstract: John 21 may seem to be a surprising point of departure for a discussion about John and the historical Jesus.¹ Historical-critical scholarship, though challenged by conservative exegesis and/or by scholars using linguistic and narrative methods (e.g., Thyen 2005), still interprets John 21 as a later addition to the Gospel (e.g., Schnelle 2007a, 523–24). The judgment that John 21 has a secondary character is evident even in the more text-centered approaches of Francis Moloney (1998b, 545–47, 562–65) and Manfred Lang (1999, 294–95 n. 918).² So why take that chapter as a point of departure for raising the

Book Title: Speak Thus-Christian Language in Church and World
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Hovey Craig R.
Abstract: In its various forms, speech is absolutely integral to the Christian mission. The gospel is a message, news that must be passed on if it is to be known by others. Nevertheless, the reality of God cannot be exhausted by Christian knowledge and Christian knowledge cannot be exhausted by our words. All the while, the philosophy of modernity has left Christianity an impoverished inheritance within which to think these things. In Speak Thus, Craig Hovey explores the possibilities and limits of Christian speaking. At times ethical, epistemological, and metaphysical, these essays go to the heart of what it means to be the church today. In practice, the Christian life often has a linguistic shape that surprisingly implicates and reveals the commitments of people like those who care for the sick or those who respond as peacemakers in the face of violence. Because learning to speak one way as opposed to another is a skill that must be learned, Christian speakers are also guides who bear witness to the importance of churches for passing on a felicity with Christian ways of speaking. Through constructive engagements with interlocutors like Ludwig Wittgenstein, George Lindbeck, Jeffrey Stout, Stanley Hauerwas, John Howard Yoder, Thomas Aquinas, and the theology of Radical Orthodoxy, Hovey offers a challenging vision of the church'able to speak with a confidence that only comes from a deep attentiveness to its own limitations while able to speak prophetically in a world weary of words.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16wdm5z

CHAPTER 2 On Hauerwas and Yoder from: Speak Thus
Abstract: Stanley Hauerwas has claimed that “Everything John Howard Yoder believes, I think is true.”¹ Indeed, this is also a common assumption regarding the two theologians since Hauerwas is better known and also makes plain his indebtedness to Yoder in nearly every essay and book. However, Craig Carter recently wrote that “The biggest problem in Yoder interpretation arises with regard to Stanley Hauerwas.”² This is because many readers come to Yoder by way of Hauerwas and, as a consequence, impose an interpretive grid whereby the differences between the two are overlooked.

CHAPTER 3 Democracy Beyond Democracy from: Speak Thus
Abstract: A number of contemporary ethical debates appear to have foreclosed on some crucial questions: Is there any possibility for moral discourse, given pluralism? Are the available modes of discourse—such as democracy—true vehicles for conversation or just disguised ways of conceding to one or more groups? Princeton University professor of religion Jeffrey Stout, in refusing to accept the finality of the answers given to these and related questions, has produced a book important by any reckoning. Democracy and Traditionwill significantly advance the discussion about liberalism and democracy, particularly among those who are weary of these notions. At its

CHAPTER 5 Story and Eucharist from: Speak Thus
Abstract: The thought and practice of sixteenth-century Anabaptism seem peculiar to many moderns precisely because modernity has no conceptual framework capable of correctly understanding the movement. Recent philosophical trends within postmodernity, however, provide fresh models for reassessing Anabaptism in terms more attuned to Anabaptism’s unique character. Some working within the Anglo-American strains of postmodernity have addressed and advanced post-Enlightenment thought in a remarkably successful manner, especially in regard to theology.¹ In this idiom, George Lindbeck is prominent among recent scholars using postmodern philosophy to help us imagine new ways of thinking about theology, particularly regarding the nature of religion, doctrine, and

4 Robert Burton, perfect happiness and the visio dei from: The Renaissance of emotion
Author(s) Lund Mary Ann
Abstract: Happiness is in short supply in The Anatomy of Melancholy. At the beginning of the main body of his book, Robert Burton (1577–1640) reminds us that, before the Fall, humankind was ‘pure, divine, perfect, happy’ (vol. 1, p. 121). All this was lost with the advent of sin. A state of permanent discontent took its place, which, in the broadest sense of the word, is what constitutes melancholy:

10 The affective scripts of early modern execution and murder from: The Renaissance of emotion
Author(s) Bain Frederika
Abstract: A brief anecdote appears in the Mémoiresof the valet of Louis XVI: on being informed of his coming execution, the monarch requested the account of the death of Charles I in Hume’sHistory of England(1754–61), which he read over for days leading up to the event. ‘Louis would appear to be using Hume’s narrative’, the historian Donald Siebert suggests in recounting the story, ‘as a script for his own imminent tragic performance.’¹ Apparently the effort was successful, as his affect and mien at the guillotine were praised for their grace and regal quality. Louis’s study of Hume’s

The Influence of Catholic Social Teaching on the Democratic Practice of Corporate Social Responsibility: from: Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Yudianti Francisca Ninik
Abstract: Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) is driven by the idea that businesses are part of society and therefore ought to contribute positively to social conditions and goals. Some of these conditions and goals include the democratic principles of respect for human rights, the rule of law, and transparent decision-making. CSR proponents argue that businesses should be held accountable not only for their economic impact on society but also for the other non-economic consequences of their activities on society and the natural environment.¹ There is growing pressure on businesses to respect human rights and the rule of law wherever they operate, to

[Introduction] from: Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Abstract: Of the four countries represented in this book, Peru is the most predominantly Catholic. What this means is that Peru represents some of the most established, yet complex, sets of relationships between democracy, culture, and Catholicism surveyed in this book. The Church’s presence is seen and felt on all social and political levels. This means that the Catholic Church has, at one time or another, stood alongside opposing forces in Peru’s continuing process of social and political democratization. The themes that run throughout the chapters in this section are the themes of power and authority: Who has it? Who should

The Relationship of Patronage and Legitimacy between the Catholic Church and the Peruvian State from: Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Beltrán María Soledad Escalante
Abstract: The goal of this chapter is to offer a brief overview of the relationship between the Roman Catholic Church and the Peruvian state in the modern era. This will include a discussion of church-state relations prior to the Second Vatican Council of the Roman Catholic Church (1962–1965) and an analysis of two key periods during and after the Council: 1958–1977 and 1978–1980. This complex history is discussed using the interpretive lenses of “legitimacy” and “patronage.”

The Catholic Church, Indigenous Rights, and the Environment in the Peruvian Amazon Region from: Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Espinosa Oscar A.
Abstract: This chapter examines the public declarations of the Amazonian bishops in defense of indigenous rights and the environment. These declarations evolved in a new historical context in Peru marked by two opposing forces: the aggressive expansion of large enterprises in the

“First Be Reconciled”: from: Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) O’Neill William R.
Abstract: So wrote Dorothy Day, founder of the Catholic Worker Movement, in December 1945. But seeing “these least” remains a hard grace for a society so given to incarcerating its own. As Robert Bolt reminds us in his play, A Man for All Seasons, our perceptions invariably betray our “moral squints,” our tacit beliefs or prejudices.¹ This chapter first considers the ethical implications of mass incarceration in the United States from the prevailing “moral squint” of retributive justice. It then explores an alternative view from the rich, yet contested perspective of restorative justice in deliberative democracy. The chapter concludes by assessing

1 Introduction from: Keeping the Feast
Abstract: Metaphors and sacrifices have in common that they both turn one thing into something else. But what does it mean when all this alchemical power is combined in metaphorsofsacrifice? Paul’s metaphors have the power to turn bodies into temples, communities into fields. Sacrifices turn farm animals into smoke that reaches God in heaven, a pleasing odor for the divine. Metaphors drawn from the sacrificial system turn crucifixion into glory, shame into honor, death into life. This study of sacrificial metaphors in Philippians and 1 Corinthians is a revised version of my dissertation, presented at Southern Methodist University in

INTRODUCTION from: Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Wolf Mark J. P.
Abstract: With the enormous growth of the World Wide Web in the last two decades, the rise of mobile platforms and casual games, and an increasing number of game creation programs, the entrance requirements to the global video game industry are lower than ever. Small video game companies are appearing all around the world, each hoping for a hit that will bring it international attention and fame, both of which can grow much faster due to the Internet. With this rise in game production, many more countries have their own video game industries and their own national histories of video games,

ARAB WORLD from: Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Kasmiya Radwan
Abstract: [ Editor’s note: Originally, in the early planning stages of this book, Radwan Kasmiya, game designer and cofounder of the company Falafel Games (established in 2011 with Vince Ghossoub), had planned to write a chapter on video games in the Arab World; however, due to the political instability of his native Syria and the resulting upheavals that followed, he and his family were forced to flee as refugees, a harsh reminder that the relative peace and tranquility necessary for academic research to occur is still not something enjoyed by all. I had asked Radwan to write this essay since he had

CHINA from: Video Games Around the World
Abstract: Video games have become an increasingly popular activity in everyday life, especially with the strong growth of online games, which are now the cause of a worldwide mania. In 2010, the revenue of the global game market was USD $52 billion, and it is expected to increase to USD $70 billion in 2017 (DFC Intelligence 2012). A research report from Gartner also foresees that the global gaming industry will even exceed USD $74 billion in 2011 and possibly reach USD $112 billion by 2015 (McCall and van der Meulen 2011).

COLOMBIA from: Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Parra Luis
Abstract: The history of video games in Colombia begins in the 1980s and 1990s, when a group of enthusiastic young people, motivated by classics like the Mario Bros. franchise, started programming short game experiences, recreating games like Tejo, a traditional sport in Colombia. Later on, they would write games using Symbian and Java for the mobile game market. Colombians have had access to the latest games and consoles almost as they appeared in the US market, giving the young enthusiasts the right motivation and role models to push their efforts. These young developers later became the pioneers of an entertainment industry

CZECH REPUBLIC from: Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Vacek Patrik
Abstract: Though relatively small in geographic terms and population, the Czech Republic has, since the 1990s, played an increasingly important role within the video game industry of the territory known as Central and Eastern Europe. Czech game designers have not only produced commercially successful mainstream titles and received considerable critical acclaim, but they have also been instrumental in creative efforts ranging from mobile phone games to underground or independent titles to modifications of well-known game products.

IRELAND from: Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Mellamphy Deborah
Abstract: Although video game play has long been an important part of popular culture in Ireland, video games were never treated seriously by the Irish government or Irish society in the past, which is demonstrated by the enormous lack of information on the early history of video games in the country; the Irish government and media never recognized the potential until recently when global video game companies began to develop operations in Ireland. It is surprising that Atari established a manufacturing base in rural Tipperary in 1978, employing just over 200 people in their plant, manufacturing Atari arcade cabinets, which were

ITALY from: Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Gandolfi Enrico
Abstract: In the history of digital entertainment, in the past as well as the present, Italy usually appears in terms of characters and settings: from Super Mario to Ezio Auditore passing through the mafia’s topoi, the stereotypes and the artistic patrimony of this

MEXICO from: Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Quesnel Jacinto
Abstract: In this chapter we will explore the history of video games in Mexico. Given the lack of previously published information, this will be an exploration of the word-of-mouth side of this story. We will explore the retail industry, game journalism, and game development; there is little to no written record of Mexico’s video game history, so this chapter is based on interviews with a few key players in the industry. There is still a lot missing in this tale; sadly, some key players couldn’t be found or did not agree to be interviewed by the authors. This small piece is

THE NETHERLANDS from: Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Raessens Joost
Abstract: Gaming is a hot topic in the Netherlands. Dutch consumers make up the most active online gaming market in Europe. The Dutch games industry is a young and dynamic sector that has a lot of potential. While there is a clear focus on entertainment gaming worldwide, strikingly, the Dutch industry shows an almost fifty-fifty split between entertainment and serious gaming. In the varied Dutch market, small independent (indie) developers, innovative serious (or applied) gaming developers, and developers of entertainment games are all represented.¹ Digital distribution of games is a big focus of Dutch businesses, and a large number of companies

PERU from: Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Nakasone Arturo
Abstract: The adoption and expansion of video games in Peru has been relatively slow, mainly due to the hard economic situation the country was going through during much of the 1980s and the first half of the 1990s. Video game history in Peru basically starts with the introduction of arcade machines during the beginning of the 1980s. At that time, a small number of businesses appeared, ranging from medium-sized arcade game centers, which deployed tens of machines, to small stores that had just a handful of them. The majority of arcade machines was provided by Japanese manufacturers such as Namco, Konami,

SOUTH KOREA from: Video Games Around the World
Abstract: This chapter introduces the developmental history of South Korea’s video game industry. It first traces the political and social factors that led to the birth of Asia’s online game industry. It then examines the history of video gaming in South Korea since the 1970s, highlighting the types of video games and processes of production and consumption that developed during particular stages of the industry’s growth. This provides an opportunity to document foreign game imports and analyze their influence on South Korea’s domestic industry, particularly the country’s development as a cultural exporter between 2002 and 2012. The indigenous video game culture

INTRODUCTION: from: Mind in Architecture
Author(s) Robinson Sarah
Abstract: Rain draws sap from creosote leaves, releasing their astringent odor into the air. Rain washes hard earth; sinks into the saguaro’s radial roots—uncreasing the crinoline folds of its skin. Rain enervates the landscape; turns cactus needles into hairs that stand on end, antennae tuned to capture water. The raindrops beat on my metal roof like a drum. From below, veils of canvas draw the line thinly between outside and in. The south-facing wall arches against my back like the cupped palm of a giant hand, exhaling its stored heat into the length of my spine. The wind outside howls.

5 TENDING TO THE WORLD from: Mind in Architecture
Author(s) McGilchrist Iain
Abstract: Many scientists assume that describing something at the brain level reveals the ultimate truth about its nature. However, as Wittgenstein, among others, observed, nothing can ever be reducedto anything: it is what it is. People got terribly excited when neuroscientists found a brain circuit that “lit up” when you fell in love; perhaps you remember the splash it made in the papers. We were invited to think that this brain activity told us something about the business of falling in love, just as describing spiritual experience at the brain level seems to have explained that experience away. Of course

1 Toward a Multimodal Discourse on Opera from: Reconfiguring Myth and Narrative in Contemporary Opera
Abstract: “We see shredded strips of blood-red ribbon hanging on his face. Groping, with a blank stare, [Oedipus] stumbles under the scaffolding and ramps that compose the somber stage set, until he is walking knee-deep in a pool of dark water, surrounded by ghostly figures. The chanting of the chorus has come to an end. We watch the water dripping from above, then hear the sound of cleansing pouring rain. The king’s almost primitive self-sacrifice has made him human; Thebes’s plague is brought to an end” (Rothstein 1993). Edward Rothstein’s review of Julie Taymor’s filmic production of Stravinsky’s Oedipus Rex(1993)

5 Scripture—Instrument of Life from: Luther and Liberation
Abstract: Although it is advisable to avoid generalizations, there is no doubt that the relationship of the Catholic Church with the Bible has changed significantly since Vatican II. In previous Catholic practice the Bible was an almost

8 The Reign of God in Church and State from: Luther and Liberation
Abstract: Certainly, it is a particularly pressing issue in our Latin American historical moment and context, when in many countries, after secular independence, domination and oppression, sharpened by the struggle for survival, attempts to dignify life through reducing poverty and social inequality are tested. Never should the church distance itself or exercise neutrality in social and political questions, even less when it unveils real possibilities of building

14 Luther—Defender of the Jews or Anti-Semite? from: Luther and Liberation
Abstract: A good hermeneutic understands the effort toward objectivity but not the pretense of neutrality.¹ The subject “Luther and the Jews”² is an illustrative example. The study is to be done in the context of the oppressive weight of the history of the persecution of the Jews and in the full consciousness of Jewish suffering. Without losing sight of this frame of reference, one has the duty to seek to expose and evaluate the question as objectively as possible.³

15 What Did Luther Want, in the End? from: Luther and Liberation
Abstract: Luther seems to have many faces—in part, for external reasons. He lived in a turbulent time of profound transformations in all sectors: in culture, economy, social and political order, religion, and in morality. Luther never had the privilege or the misfortune of being able to reflect with an inner or outer distance on the historical process in upheaval. Not only was he forced to think, speak, and act in the middle of events; the facts themselves, so to speak, rained down on him, while others barreled him over. Generally, however, he retained a peculiar and surprising freedom of belief

16 Matthew 25:31–46 from: Luther and Liberation
Abstract: The great social encyclicals of the Catholic Church almost invariably cite it, particularly verse 40.¹ Vatican Council II also invokes it when it exhorts us to become “to make ourselves the neighbor of every person . . . and of actively helping him.”² The IECLB also refers to this parable when, from it, the church introduces its social position confessing “our failure.”

3 Acrobatic Stylistics, Agonistic Vision from: Divination’s Grasp
Abstract: In Tswapong wisdom divination, the aesthetically pleasing way from the surface of things, including the divinatory lots, to their inner significance passes through poetry. The genre to which this poetry belongs is rich and widely found across Africa and, very prominently, in southern Africa—the oral poetry of praises, maboko, singular,leboko,derived from the verbboka“honour by giving titles to a person in poems, sing the praises of” (Schapera 1965, 1, citing Brown 1931, 26); and the praise-poet is calledmmoki.¹ It is eulogy—a poetry that glorifies things, from trees, crops, rivers, hills to many scenic features

6 Cosmic and Personal Understandings: from: Divination’s Grasp
Abstract: Accounts of collaboration between diviners, of how they hear a séance together or cooperate and not merely compete, are rare in our literature. Instead, conventional wisdom reflects the diviners’ awareness of rivalry, heightened by their clients’ own “jockeying” and “shopping” for a self-interested outcome in the “politics of divination.” Clients do go back and forth from one diviner to another, including Christians using the Bible or with inspiration from the Holy Spirit (Werbner 2011a, chapter 5). Clients turn to distant diviners, not merely for a special occasion or a crisis, but sometimes routinely to one local diviner one day, and

8 The Cross-Over: from: Divination’s Grasp
Abstract: In this chapter, I explore the second archive, that of hooved divination, in its actual re-creations. First, as a source for one whole poem, this archive appears in the diviner’s presentation of personal significance and his own identity. Second, there is a charismatic crossover, encompassing diverse modes along with classic wisdom divination. In the city, some diviners originally from Moremi village, have very recently combined wisdom divination with exotic forms, including Christian spiritual practices. Young prophets in Gaborone’s Apostolic churches, who reform received Christianity, are also engaging, somewhat uneasily, with legacies from divination, (see Werbner 2008, 2011a, 2011b). But at

3 THE EVIL OF INSECURITY IN SOUTH SUDAN: from: Evil in Africa
Author(s) JOK JOK MADUT
Abstract: When South Sudan finally gained independence in July 2011, after long and bitter wars with North Sudan, the event came to mark such a hopeful moment for the millions of its citizens who expected the advent of new era of peace, security, and prosperity. But while it has only been a year since independence and all of these aspirations might still be realized in the future, the new country has now quickly found itself confronted with really daunting challenges, which have since began to dampen the popular celebrated sense of freedom. The most critical of these challenges was insecurity, especially

10 HAUNTED BY ABSENT OTHERS: from: Evil in Africa
Author(s) TROVALLA ULRIKA
Abstract: In comparison with other cities in Nigeria, Jos has often been depicted as relatively peaceful, a place where all of the country’s different religious and ethnic groups live together in harmony. In this vein, the violence that broke out in the city of Jos on Friday, September 7, 2001, and which came to be known as “the crisis,” threw a once-familiar city into disarray and confusion. It came to be viewed as a turning point—a start of a cycle of escalating violence that to date has brought with it repeatedly renewed violent hostilities. On that Friday, a cleansing from

17 SORCERY AFTER SOCIALISM: from: Evil in Africa
Author(s) GREEN MAIA
Abstract: In his introduction to the Anthropology of Evil, published some thirty years ago, David Parkin calls for an approach to the social manifestation of evil that extends beyond a narrow focus on witchcraft. If evil is perceived more broadly, as a range of actions that are associated with causing human harm, the categorization can include diverse instantiations of the phenomenon. Moreover, as a classification that is inherently relational, involving the imputation of responsibility to someone or something, the analysis of evil takes us into concerns with wider issues of cosmology and ontology. What is the universe of human and extra

1 CONCEPTOS BÁSICOS DE PSICOLOGÍA ANALÍTICA JUNGUIANA from: Psicoplástica
Abstract: DURANTE SU VIDA, Jung penetró en muchos temas relacionados con la psiquis y escribió acerca de ellos para un público experto, lo que sin duda complejiza su lectura para quienes no pertenecen necesariamente a su campo de estudio. Esto hace que muchos de los conceptos establecidos por Jung sean poco comprendidos e incluso deformados.

2 QUÉ ES LA PSICOPLÁSTICA from: Psicoplástica
Abstract: EN ESTE CAPÍTULO definiré psicoplásticaen forma muy sintética, considerando para ello, en primer término, algo básico, pero no menor, como es la composición del término mismo. En primera instancia, parece obvio que la palabrapsicoplásticano considera en su estructura el concepto de arte pues su definición – como explico en la introducción–considera a laplástica en su sentido más amplio. Esta definición da pie para considerar, dentro de lo que el concepto define, variadas técnicas y recursos que nos permiten la construcción de imágenes, base esencial de la psicoplástica, y no necesariamente la producción de obras artísticas que,

4 APLICANDO LA PSICOPLÁSTICA from: Psicoplástica
Abstract: LO QUE SEÑALARÉ en este capítulo, a modo de indicaciones a seguir, ha sido concebido para ser aplicado a distintos grupos de personas en la modalidad de taller⁵. La aplicación individual también es posible, sin embargo, en este último caso hay un menoscabo importante en la relación con el otro, cuyo aporte es significativo al momento de comparar resultados y descubrir cada uno su imaginario personal. Esta instancia sin duda contribuye de manera considerable al proceso de individuación.

Book Title: Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad-Perspectivas antropológico-éticas
Publisher: Ediciones UC
Author(s): Covarrubias Andrés
Abstract: Este libro se inspira en los debates y controversias en los que suelen enfrentarse dos posiciones. Unos dicen que hay que tomar a las personas como realmente son, con sus virtudes y defectos, y no como idealmente deberían ser, según determinadas concepciones éticas o religiosas. Otros responden que una vida sin ideales no es digna del ser humano, y que por lo tanto hay que esforzarse por realizar una vida plena y luchar contra todo aquello que nos aleja de ella. Por lo tanto, las reflexiones que contiene se orientan preferentemente por las siguientes preguntas: ¿es efectivo que el reconocimiento de la realidad imperfecta de los seres humanos debiera llevarnos a aceptar que las normas que regeulan la sociedad sean más permisivas o moralmente indiferentes? O, por el contrario, ¿el énfasis en los ideales debe llevarnos a desconocer las condiciones concretas y cambiantes en las que se desenvuelven las personas y las limitaciones que muchas veces solo pueden ser superadas por individuos excepcionales? ¿Hay que optar entre la resignación y el elitismo moral, o existe otra posibilidad que tome en cuenta al ser humano tal como efectivamente es y al mismo tiempo le permita orientar su vida hacia la plenitud?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt17t77bj

¿Somos libres? from: Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad
Author(s) Seifert Josef
Abstract: ¿Pero realmente somos libres? ¿No será una prerrogativa de Dios el ser señor del ser y el no-ser de algo por causa de una simple palabra interna o mandato, sin que la persona esté determinada a semejante mandato por cualquier causa

Verdaderas y falsas libertades from: Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad
Author(s) Carrasco Alejandra
Abstract: El hombre es un ser con proyectos, vive en el tiempo, está siempre volcado hacia el futuro. La matriz temporal del vivir humano, y el que el hombre no sea un suceso cumplido sino que tenga que “ir haciéndose”, implica que la vida necesariamente tenga que ver con fines. El hombre está siempre abierto a posibilidades, vive siempre un poco más allá de sí mismo, pendiente de metas por alcanzar, de fines que lo vayan completando. Y este avanzar, o esta consecución de fines, se realiza por medio de las acciones. La intención de la acción es el fin que

La ley como modelo antropológico de libertad from: Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad
Author(s) de Undurraga Francisco
Abstract: En El pensamiento salvaje,¹ Lévi-Strauss se refiere a la operación en conjunto de la etnología y de las ciencias exactas y naturales, en dos etapas que integran, primero, un proceso de “disolución” y luego, un mecanismo de reintegración de la “cultura en la naturaleza, y finalmente, de la vida en el conjunto de sus operaciones físico-químicas” (294). La “disolución” de que nos habla Lévi-Strauss no implica en absoluto, aclara el autor, una destrucción, sino la desarticulación en partículas. La “disolución” faculta, podemos discurrir: 1) el estudio pormenorizado de los componentes del fenómeno; 2) la interrelación de dichas partículas con otras,

Notas sobre la individualidad de la persona como fuente de su dignidad from: Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad
Author(s) Crespo Mariano
Abstract: En el conocido texto de Metafísica de las costumbres, Kant se refiere a la dignidad de las personas humanas en los siguientes términos: “el hombre, considerado como persona […] está situado por encima de todoprecio,porque como tal […] no puede valorarse sólo como medio para fines ajenos, incluso para sus propios fines, sino como fin en sí mismo. Es decir, posee unadignidad[…], gracias a la cual infunderespetohacia él a todos los demás seres racionales del mundo, puede medirse con cualquier otro y valorarse en pie de igualdad”¹.

La pre-concepción de una posible salvación desde las experiencias de la muerte y de la culpa. from: Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad
Author(s) Lambert César
Abstract: La tesis que vamos a exponer se centra en la idea de que las experiencias humanas de la culpa y de la muerte del prójimo contienen una comprensión implícita de una posible salvación. “Pre-comprensión” o “comprensión implícita” son términos que no aluden a actos concretos de entender esto o aquello, sino a estructuras propias de la existencia humana como tal. Desde esta óptica entroncan con la noción de comprensión, tal como la propone Martin Heidegger en Ser y tiempo.

Identidad personal y racionalidad práctica en la época de la biopolítica from: Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad
Author(s) Frías Rodrigo
Abstract: Según uno de los diagnósticos más penetrantes acerca de la época actual– y que debemos a Heidegger–, la nuestra sería aquella en la que la totalidad de lo real, y con ello la vida, se incorpora, definitiva y radicalmente, a la lógica de la racionalidad calculante; es decir, aquella época en la que la voluntad de poder que opera en la esencia de la técnica se orientaría al sometimiento de lo ente a la lógica de la disponibilidad¹. Para el autor de este diagnóstico, sin embargo, este moderno fenómeno del imperar de la esencia de la técnica tiene ante

Derechos humanos universales y ciudadanía cosmopolita from: Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad
Author(s) de Zan Julio
Abstract: La cuestión de los derechos humanos fue un tema central de la filosofía política y jurídica en los años 80. Pero en el final de siglo y comienzos de los 2000 ha quedado relegado, en parte, en el ámbito teórico de la filosofía y de la ciencia jurídica y política como un tema agotado, o teóricamente ya no más problemático. Este es el estado de situación que E. Rabosi y R. Rorty han denominado de naturalización de los derechos humanos. En la realidad, sin embargo, son todavía las situaciones de violación de estos derechos las que parecen naturalizadas en la

Reconocimiento y exigencia de humanidad from: Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad
Author(s) de la Maza Luis Mariano
Abstract: En su libro Tras la virtud, Alasdair MacIntyre afirma que Immanuel Kant ha llevado la reflexión ética de la Ilustración a un callejón sin salida, al no haber entregado una justificación suficiente de la conexión entre la formulación general del imperativo categórico como capacidad de universalización de la máxima y la tercera formulación del imperativo categórico de laFundamentación de la metafísica de las costumbres, que establece que hay que tratar siempre la humanidad propia y de los demás como un fin y nunca como un mero medio. Según MacIntyre, Kant no es capaz de dar una buena razón para

La vida en el lenguaje y la apuesta por una racionalidad ecuménica en la hermenéutica filosófica de Gadamer from: Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad
Author(s) Monteagudo Cecilia
Abstract: Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad, es el título que enmarca a este coloquio y son también los tópicos a los que la hermenéutica filosófica de Hans-Georg Gadamer dedicó una especial atención. La insistencia en su obra tardía en el carácter dialógico del lenguaje como la “verdadera dimensión de la realidad”¹ y sus recurrentes referencias a la crisis mundial y al destino de la humanidad, son, sin duda, muestras fehacientes de lo dicho. Sin embargo, consideramos, que cuando Gadamer advierte, en 1960, que su obra principalVerdad y método² gira fundamentalmente en torno al fenómeno de la comprensión “como algo

5 Wales and Africa: from: A Tolerant Nation?
Author(s) JONES IVOR WYNNE
Abstract: When missionaries left Britain in the nineteenth century it was normal for church and chapel congregations to sing the missionary hymn, ‘From Greenland’s Icy Mountains’ to speed them on their way. The following lines emphasized the size of the field open for conversion: ‘From India’s coral strand / Where Afric’s sunny fountains / Roll down their golden sand.’² They were written at Wrexham in 1819 by the Reverend Reginald Herber at the behest of his father-in-law Dean Shipley of St Asaph, and while the words stress the immensity of the world and – hence the task of the missionary –

8 Changing the Archive: from: A Tolerant Nation?
Author(s) WEEDON CHRIS
Abstract: Recent years have seen the rise of widespread interest in cultural and collective memory and their relation to history, power, voice, identity and representation. This interest is shared by family, local and academic history, museums and community projects and increasingly groups that perceive themselves as marginal to mainstream national and public history. The authors of this chapter have over twenty-five years of experience working with people’s history and community memories. These are areas that we will argue are particularly important in multi-ethnic societies like Wales where they are tied to issues of roots, identity and belonging.

12 ‘This is the place we are calling home’: from: A Tolerant Nation?
Author(s) PAYSON ALIDA
Abstract: The 1999 Immigration and Asylum Act, following closely on devolution, ‘marked not only a sea-change for British asylum policy but also … for Wales’ and for people seeking sanctuary here.¹ The Act, one in a series of Acts from 1993 to 2009 to redraft asylum policy, is understood principally to have transformed the number and diversity of sanctuary seekers in Wales. For the first time, as part of a policy of ‘no-choice dispersal’, the United Kingdom Government ordered asylum applicants receiving housing support to move to housing sites across Britain, including to Cardiff, Newport, Swansea and Wrexham.² While Wales has

1 Past / Future from: Time
Author(s) ELIAS AMY J.
Abstract: Much theoretical ink has been spilled about the “presentism” of post-WWII globalized societies and the loss of history that accompanies it. This presentism has been attributed to a traumatized Western collective consciousness confronting WWII as an “event” unprecedented in its history; to the time of the Spectacle that reduces the past to advertising slogans and depoliticized images of material desire; to finance capitalism’s acceleration of time and eradication of spatial distance as it creates a technologized world economy; or to the speed of “real time” technology that makes impossible both deliberation and historical depth. It seems that we may be

5 Anticipation / Unexpected from: Time
Author(s) CURRIE MARK
Abstract: “Anticipation” and “unexpected” provide us with headings under which to organize and think about the valences of keywords that have taken hold recently in humanities discourses. I am thinking about words such as these: invention, inventiveness, advent, arrivant, event, eruption, irruption, emergence, singularity, unforeseeability, unpredictability, uncertainty, the untimely, and the messianic. Most of these terms have straightforward denotations in everyday life, yet at the same time they have specialized contexts in philosophy and theory. We know, for example, what an event is, and yet we recognize that “we” and “us” also designate specialist communities in sentences such as these: “Indeed

11 Labor / Leisure from: Time
Author(s) ANABLE AUBREY
Abstract: In 1930, the economist John Maynard Keynes predicted that by 2030 the wealth created by new technologies would bring about an era of universal leisure.¹ We can safely say that Keynes’s prediction was way off the mark.² In the West, the postwar transformations of work—from the computerization of factories and offices to the outsourcing of manufacturing jobs to the global south—have changed the labor landscape dramatically since 1930. Still, labor, not leisure, structures the vast majority of people’s time. Labor—a word that names both the kind of remunerated work that we do and also how that work

14 Analepsis / Prolepsis from: Time
Author(s) PHELAN JAMES
Abstract: Analepsis and prolepsis are rough synonyms for flashback and flashforward. They were proposed by Gérard Genette as part of his theoretical and interpretive analysis of Marcel Proust’s À la recherche du temps perdu, but they have since proved to be extremely valuable for thinking about the nature of narrative.¹ Observers of the “narrative turn,” the burgeoning interest across multiple disciplines in the explanatory power of stories, often explain its emergence by noting that narrative is, in the emphatic words of H. Porter Abbott, “the principal way in which our species organizes its understanding of time.”² Paul Ricoeur makes a similar

18 Batch / Interactive from: Time
Author(s) MONTFORT NICK
Abstract: “Batch” and “interactive” are modes in which computer systems operate, the latter being a mode that is much more common and visible in the late twentieth and early twenty-first centuries, the former having dominated mainframe computing, beginning in the late 1950s. In early, archetypal batch processing, programs were written out, punched cards were prepared on keypunch machines, the deck was brought in and—when the computer could accommodate the job—the program was run. A tiny error would mean that the programmer would have to come back the next day and try again with the corrected program. Interactive computing, which

19 Transmission / Influence from: Time
Author(s) HAIDU RACHEL
Abstract: The time of artistic influence is pastin a manner that reveals the schisms and anxieties of academia itself. On the one hand, “influence” is a term that has been out of fashion for more than forty years in humanistic disciplines touched by theory; on the other hand, it persists as a principle of thought, abandoned but still lurking, something we might wish to unthink but instead find ourselves actively repressing. We might repudiate, disavow, or just ignore it, but influence is still part of our consciousness, often part of the way we define what we study as objects in

20 Silence / Beat from: Time
Author(s) MILLER PAUL D.
Abstract: Over the course of twenty-five centuries, Pythagoras has been a phantom made of fragments drifting over the ages. The fabric or the texture of his being has been made of unattributed remarks, ambiguous observations, specious fabrications, and false citations that later proved to be remarkably coherent but, amusingly enough, were never traced back to him or his original followers. Anything related to what he may or may not have said or done depends heavily on imaginative interpretation. But it’s that kind of speculation that makes Pythagoras such an enticing subject for the modern writer.

Book Title: Critical Trauma Studies-Understanding Violence, Conflict and Memory in Everyday Life
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Wertheimer Eric
Abstract: Trauma is a universal human experience. While each person responds differently to trauma, its presence in our lives nonetheless marks a continual thread through human history and prehistory. In Critical Trauma Studies, a diverse group of writers, activists, and scholars of sociology, anthropology, literature, and cultural studies reflects on the study of trauma and how multidisciplinary approaches lend richness and a sense of deeper understanding to this burgeoning field of inquiry. The original essays within this collection cover topics such as female suicide bombers from the Chechen Republic, singing prisoners in Iranian prison camps, sexual assault and survivor advocacy, and families facing the devastation of Hurricane Katrina. As it proceeds,Critical Trauma Studiesnever loses sight of the way those who study trauma as an academic field, and those who experience, narrate, and remediate trauma as a personal and embodied event, inform one another. Theoretically adventurous and deeply particular, this book aims to advance trauma studies as a discipline that transcends intellectual boundaries, to be mapped but also to be unmoored from conceptual and practical imperatives. Remaining embedded in lived experiences and material realities,Critical Trauma Studiesframes the field as both richly unbounded and yet clearly defined, historical, and evidence-based.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt180414n

4 Naming Sexual Trauma: from: Critical Trauma Studies
Author(s) FAHS BREANNE
Abstract: The question of naming—that is, the deployment of language to describe and create meaning around our experiences—remains as fraught with power, culture, and conflict as any in critical trauma studies. Choosing to put words to violent and frankly unspeakable experiences is a task often undertaken under duress, and this is particularly so within the complicated terrain of sexualizedviolence (Brison 2003). When considering the power of a name to shape experience, I recall a recent experience I had watchingThe Girl with the Dragon Tattoo(2010), the much-acclaimed film based on Stieg Larsson’s (2008) bestseller. It is about

9 “No Other Tale to Tell”: from: Critical Trauma Studies
Author(s) WICKS AMANDA
Abstract: As a temporal disruption, trauma dislocates individuals from the integrated, narrative context of personal memory and collective history.¹ Thrust into the role of survivor, trauma victims often fail to understand and navigate their new position, since trauma initially exists as an absence in the mind.² Following the initial failure to remember, trauma comes to be situated on the margins of consciousness—implicit memory and dreams—as the brain takes on the work of comprehension and meaning making that cannot yet be faced when cognizant.³ Those who emerge into trauma’s afterfind themselves confronting endless repetitions of their experience, an experience

12 Answering the Call: from: Critical Trauma Studies
Author(s) JACKSON DEBRA
Abstract: After years of struggle with their disconnection, in 1999 I found a touchpoint between my activism and academic life.¹ I had been a Crisis Center volunteer for two years when I was introduced to the concept of witnessing trauma at the Feminist Visions of the Future symposium at Purdue University. Feminist philosopher Kelly Oliver’s presentation on witnessing ethics resonated with my experiences of answering crisis calls and advocating on behalf of rape survivors. I was immediately struck by the fact that the central skills of crisis intervention enacted the process of valuing experiential truth over empirical truth and the double

Book Title: Music, Analysis, Experience-New Perspectives in Musical Semiotics
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): Reybrouck Mark
Abstract: Transdisciplinary and intermedial analysis of the experience of music Nowadays musical semiotics no longer ignores the fundamental challenges raised by cognitive sciences, ethology, or linguistics. Creation, action and experience play an increasing role in how we understand music, a sounding structure impinging upon our body, our mind, and the world we live in. Not discarding music as a closed system, an integral experience of music demands a transdisciplinary dialogue with other domains as well. Music, Analysis, Experience brings together contributions by semioticians, performers, and scholars from cognitive sciences, philosophy, and cultural studies, and deals with these fundamental questionings. Transdisciplinary and intermedial approaches to music meet musicologically oriented contributions to classical music, pop music, South American song, opera, narratology, and philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt180r0s2

[Part One. Introduction] from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Abstract: This part reflects on the nature of music. It broadens its definition as a mere description in terms of a sounding structure by comparing it to language and speech. By stressing their roles in action and performance, both music and language in action establish social bonds that afford listeners and performers the feeling of a genuine and shared experience. The figure of the performer who acts as a mediator between music and audience is a crucial element in understanding the mutual relationship between theoretical approaches to music and its possible, actual performances. Ethnomusicology, popular music studies, new musicology and (post-)semiotics,

[Part Four. Introduction] from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Abstract: Intermedial and transdisciplinary investigations are of the utmost importance in contemporary research on theoretical musicology. The next four contributions are illustrative of these developments. They deal with the analysis of medialproperties in terms of perception and analyze the borders between media and possibilities of “intermedial” referencing. This is especially true for musical performance and movie productions, which need a theoretical framework for a complex analysis that takes into account elements from the fields of the visual, advertising and web semiotics. The broadening of the field and scope of musicology by including music, pop culture, gender issues, rhetoric, advertisement and

The Perception of Art Songs Through Image: from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) de Pádua Mônica Pedrosa
Abstract: Thus, in this paper, I present a proposal of a transdisciplinary methodology for studying Art Song, which consists in the integrated study of music and literature, using image as the transversal concept that pervades both disciplines. This proposal can be considered transdisciplinary inasmuch as it articulates analytic tools of

“What Kind of Genre Do You Think We Are?” from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Marino Gabriele
Abstract: While single genre histories have been quite explored (e.g., Charlton, 1994; Borthwick & Moy, 2004; F. Fabbri, 2008), the notion of musical genreis not very much studied in itself, as a theoretical entity (cf. F. Fabbri, 1982, 2012; Hamm, 1994; Moore, 2001; Marx, 2008). This is not that surprising, as it is a crucial notion (possibly, the highest level of abstraction we can deal with as we talk about music), but, at the same time, a very ambiguous one.¹

[Part Five. Introduction] from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Abstract: The interaction between analysis and extramusical interpretation brings together five contributions by Pawłowska, Martinelli, Liddle, Hatten, and Thumpston, which explore aspects of musical experience and interpretation by transcending a mere acoustic description of the sound. They all combine theoretical groundings with musical analyses, proposing a type of hermeneutics that relies on the concepts of musical topic, musical allusions and anthropomorphic conceptions of music in terms of musical agency and narrativity.

The Embodiment of Yearning: from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Thumpston Rebecca
Abstract: The closing line of Alfred, Lord Tennyson’s dramatic monologue Ulyssesis among the most famous statements of striving in English poetry (1972, p. 646). The poem ends with a heroic statement about moving forward, yet the enduring sense of the prose is one of loss. The poem speaks of Ulysses’ spirit yearning and his goal “To sail beyond the sunset, and the baths/Of all the western stars” (p. 646) until he dies. A beautiful meditation on age, Tennyson’s words are tinged with sadness built on the knowledge that the things for which we yearn are often not achieved: “We are

Book Title: Mestizaje and Globalization-Transformations of Identity and Power
Publisher: University of Arizona Press
Author(s): YOUNG PHILIP D.
Abstract: The Spanish word mestizajedoes not easily translate into English. Its meaning and significance have been debated for centuries since colonization by European powers began. Its simplest definition is "mixing." As long as the term has been employed, norms and ideas about racial and cultural relations in the Americas have been imagined, imposed, questioned, rejected, and given new meaning.Mestizaje and Globalizationpresents perspectives on the underlying transformation of identity and power associated with the term during times of great change in the Americas. The volume offers a comprehensive and empirically diverse collection of insights concerning mestizaje's complex relationship with indigeneity, the politics of ethnic identity, transnational social movements, the aesthetic of cultural production, development policies, and capitalist globalization, with particular attention to cases in Latin America and the United States.Beyond the narrow and often inadequate meaning of mestizaje as biological and racial mixing, the concept deserves an innovative theoretical consideration due to its multidimensional, multifaceted character and its resilience as an ideological construct. The contributors argue that historical analyses of mestizaje do not sufficiently understand contemporary ways that racism, ethnic discrimination, and social injustice intermingle with current discourse and practice of cultural recognition and multiculturalism in the Americas.Mestizaje and Globalizationcontributes to an emerging multidisciplinary effort to explore how identities are imposed, negotiated, and reconstructed. The chapter authors clearly set forth the issues and obstacles that Indigenous peoples and subjugated minorities face, as well as the strategies they have employed to gain empowerment in the face of globalization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183gxvs

CHAPTER ONE The Revolutionary Encounter from: Mestizaje and Globalization
Author(s) WIRTH REX
Abstract: People have been living in the Valley of Mexico for a very long time. The cities of the valley have ranked among the top ten in population in the world since the time of the Roman Empire. Today, Mexico City is one the largest cities in the world. This is a phenomenal comeback because only five hundred years ago the valley suffered catastrophic depopulation as a result of the Spanish Conquest.

CHAPTER TWO Mestizaje in Colonial Mexican Art from: Mestizaje and Globalization
Author(s) WICKSTROM STEFANIE
Abstract: Addressing ambivalence in established categories of colonial art in Mexico, this chapter proposes a “mestizo” category to characterize works of visual art elaborated during the Viceroyalty of New Spain, mainly in the sixteenth century. Those works of interest here are devotional paintings, sculptures, and the doors and façades of a number of architectural complexes, which integrate aesthetic and iconographic elements common to Western European art and pre-Columbian art of Mesoamerica. I address the connection between mestizajeand culture in art, although mestizaje in Mexico often refers to race.

CHAPTER FOUR Born Indigenous, Growing Up Mestizos: from: Mestizaje and Globalization
Author(s) ARREDONDO MARIELLA I.
Abstract: The city of Arequipa, Peru’s second largest, has experienced rapid growth due to migration from surrounding rural highland areas. In the past thirty years, Arequipa has seen its population increase by over four hundred thousand inhabitants. Recent population shifts are changing the perception long-time Arequipeños have of their city. Throughout Peru’s republican history, the city has long been represented, from within and without, as a place of diverse racial and ethnic mixing, and it has been characterized as possessing a strong regionalist and unique mestizo culture. Mestizo refers to racial/ethnic/cultural mixing as a category of identity which can refer both

CHAPTER ELEVEN Women’s Roles and Responses to Globalization in Ngäbe Communities from: Mestizaje and Globalization
Author(s) YOUNG PHILIP D.
Abstract: In this chapter, I discuss four major variables that have contributed to significant changes in the roles of Ngäbe women and their relationships to men since the 1960s: religion, wage labor, education, and development projects. Given my research experience and my relationships with Ngäbe people, here I examine and understand women’s roles in their relationships with men as they have changed in contexts related to globalization.¹ In 1964, I observed that women seemed to be passive observers of male decision-making in the public arena. Less than fifty years later, in 2011, Silvia Carrera, a forty-two-year-old single mother, was elected as

CHAPTER TWELVE Politicizing Ethnicity: from: Mestizaje and Globalization
Author(s) WICKSTROM STEFANIE
Abstract: The theme of the emergence of ethnicity in Latin America and its crystallization into organized pluriethnic platforms that empower political actors at the national and international levels has been gaining prominence in the social sciences in recent decades. Without doubt spurred by the visibility that Indigenous movements have achieved in settings such as southeastern Mexico, post-war Guatemala, and Ecuador during the Indigenous “uprisings” of the 1990s, and with the ascendency of Evo Morales to the presidency of Bolivia, the research agendas of anthropologists, sociologists, and political scientists have focused attention on trying to explain the “resurgence” of the “Indian question.”

2 The Shopping Mall as the Paradigmatic Figure of Neocolonial Discourse: from: Religion Without Redemption
Abstract: In social reality, the processes of fetishisation and de-fetishisation (resistance and struggle) are composed of multiple discourses that legitimise, strengthen and configure them with the break from domination. The constitution of social reality is constantly being transformed, due to conflict, tensions and shifts between power(s) and counter-power(s). However, after more than five centuries of imperial, colonial and capitalist domination and exploitation, we observe that the political asymmetry, economic inequality and ethno-racial injustice have become more acute in peripheral societies. Is it possible that the ‘structural sin’ – to borrow a term from the theologists of liberation – continues to take its toll

4 The Gun Powder of the Dwarf: from: Religion Without Redemption
Abstract: The twenty-first century heralded serious environmental damage, a significant increase in poverty and the highest levels of social exclusion that radically put into question the very paradigm of civilisation. In the light of current events that have arisen over recent years (‘preventative’ wars, treacherous massacres against civilian populations and the institutionalisation of the ‘State of Exception’ among others), it is important to ask ourselves about the role and contribution of philosophy and theology in the development of alternative projects and in counterposing the hegemonic narrative. Our purpose is to analyse, from political philosophy, the principal tenets of Slavoj Žižek, Enrique

3 Four Founding Fathers from: A History of Anthropology
Abstract: The peaceful conditions that had prevailed in the West since the Napoleonic Wars, the steady advance of democracy and culture, the growing colonial empires, the dynamic economy and the scientific breakthroughs, had done their part to make ideologies of unilinear progress seem plausible, if not inevitable. A mere glance at the world seemed sufficient to confirm evolutionism in this age, which is called Victorian, after the long-lived British monarch. As Keith Hart puts it:

5 Forms of Change from: A History of Anthropology
Abstract: The guns are silent, the bombers grounded. Millions of refugees pick their way through Germany’s ruined cities, across the scorched earth of Russia, Poland, Belarus and the Ukraine. France and Britain have been deeply shaken; their great empires will soon be only a memory. By contrast, the American economy is just settling down into superpower gear, wheeling out an ever-increasing plenitude of pink Cadillacs, TV sets, film stars and nuclear weaponry. To the East of Europe, the Soviet Union will compete successfully with ‘the free world’ in the production of military hardware, while the production of Cadillacs (pink or otherwise)

7 Questioning Authority from: A History of Anthropology
Abstract: The Cuban missile crisis, the Berlin Wall, the civil rights movement, the Prague spring; hippies in Haight-Ashbury, student riots in Paris; the Beatles, the Moon landing, Kennedy’s assassination, the Vietnam War – all this is emblematic of the ‘Sixties’, as the time is known in the West. But the radical political climate to which these events contributed did not come to bloom before the end of the decade, and belongs, strictly speaking, to the ten years following1968. Certainly this was true in academia, where students shout their slogans but tenured professors remain as the years go by. Anthropologists, always

Book Title: Small Places, Large Issues-An Introduction to Social and Cultural Anthropology (Fourth Edition)
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Eriksen Thomas Hylland
Abstract: This concise introduction to social and cultural anthropology has become a modern classic, revealing the rich global variation in social life and culture. The text provides a clear overview of anthropology, focusing on central topics such as kinship, ethnicity, ritual and political systems, offering a wealth of examples that demonstrate the enormous scope of anthropology and the importance of a comparative perspective. Unlike other texts on the subject, Small Places, Large Issues incorporates the anthropology of complex modern societies. Using reviews of key monographs to illustrate his argument, Eriksen's lucid and accessible text remains an established introductory text in anthropology. This new, fourth edition is updated throughout and increases the emphasis on the interdependence of human worlds. There is a new discussion of the new influence cultural studies and natural science on anthropology. Effortless bridging the perceived gap between "classic" and "contemporary" anthropology, Small Places, Large Issues is as essential to anthropology undergraduates as ever.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183p184

9 Gender and Age from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: In all societies, there are differences in power between persons. There is not a single society where all adults have exactly the same influence over every decision, where everyone has exactly the same rights and duties. Social differentiation and inequality are, in other words, universal phenomena. The European ideas of the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries about the ‘original primitive society’, where all humans supposedly had the same rank and were political equals, was completely devastated when the first professional ethnographers returned from the field. Even among very small groups, and even among peoples with very simple technology, differences in rank

11 Politics and Power from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: Politics is linked with power; both the power that people exert over each other, and the ways in which society wields power over people by imposing institutionalised constraints on their agency – constraints ranging from property taxes and traffic rules to torture and genocide. However, politics also has to do with the prevention of lawlessness and insecurity; that is, it concerns law and order, the implementation of the rights of persons, conflict resolution and social integration.

12 Exchange and Consumption from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: Just as the anthropological study of politics is markedly different from the discipline of political science, economic anthropology distinguishes itself in important ways from the economic sciences. Anthropologists have always – at least since Boas and Malinowski – wished to call attention to the ways in which the economy is an integrated part of a social and cultural totality, and to reveal that economic systems and actions can only be fully understood if we look into their interrelationships with other aspects of culture and society. Just as politics ought to be seen as part of a wider system which includes

16 Complexity and Change from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: Some of the previous chapters have examined different forms of political organisation, world-views and systems of economic production and distribution. It has been noted for decades that the ethnographic present, the tense conventionally used when anthropologists talk about different societies, is increasingly, and more and more rapidly, becoming a past tense. In Australia, 250 languages were spoken in the late eighteenth century. At the outset of the twenty-first century, there were about 30 still regularly spoken, and few of them seemed likely to survive for another generation in Australia. Virtually all inhabitants of the world live in states which define

18 Nationalism and Minorities from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: Scarcely anyone who has used the methods of ethnography to identify and describe ideologies anywhere in the world since the 1960s can have avoided encountering expressions of nationalist ideology. The growth of nationalism and nation-building has been, and still is, an important, spectacular and highly consequential dimension of the worldwide processes of change connected with colonialism and decolonisation. Nationalism is a kind of ideology which exists almost everywhere in the world, although it assumes very different forms and varies in significance. This does not mean that all the citizens of any state know about, or for that matter support, nationalist

19 Anthropology and the Paradoxes of Globalisation from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: An anecdote is told about a tribe of transhumant camel nomads in North Africa, whose annual migration had taken place in March since the dawn of time. Recently their migration was several months delayed. The reason was that they did not want to miss the final episodes of Dallas.

Epilogue: from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: The single most important human insight to be gained from this way of studying and comparing societies is perhaps the realisation that everything could have been different in our own society – that the way we live

Book Title: Border Watch-Cultures of Immigration, Detention and Control
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Mitchell Jon P.
Abstract: Questions over immigration and asylum face almost all Western countries. Should only economically useful immigrants be allowed? What should be done with unwanted or 'illegal' immigrants? In this bold and original intervention, Alexandra Hall shows that immigration detention centres offer a window onto society's broader attitudes towards immigrants. Despite periodic media scandals, remarkably little has been written about the everyday workings of the grassroots immigration system, or about the people charged with enacting immigration policy at local levels. Detention, particularly, is a hidden side of border politics, despite its growing international importance as a tool of control and security. This book fills the gap admirably, analysing the everyday encounters between officers and immigrants in detention to explore broad social trends and theoretical concerns. This highly topical book provides rare insights into the treatment of the 'other' and will be essential for policy makers and students studying anthropology and sociology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183p2n9

1 Introduction: from: Border Watch
Abstract: Locksdon immigration removal centre accommodates men who have been detained under UK immigration law. The centre is a cluster of buildings set behind an imposing perimeter wall topped with razor wire. For Locksdon officers, staff and visitors, entry to the establishment is through a small door in the wall that leads into the gate area. For people who find themselves detained at Locksdon, entry is in the back of an escort contractor’s van, often at the end of a long and exhausting journey. Inside the centre walls, detainees getting out of the escort van, like staff coming through the gate

6 Ethics and Encounters from: Border Watch
Abstract: One crisp morning in autumn 2002, I am in a classroom in the Locksdon education department. An Algerian student has written a story about a prisoner in a war camp in the English class. He describes his protagonist feeling like a shipwrecked vessel dashed upon rocks, alone. I ask him how long he has been at Locksdon, and he replies bitterly that he has been detained for many months ‘for nothing …’ At that moment, Susan, Locksdon’s diversity officer, enters with an announcement: she is organising a ‘Festival of Faiths’ at Locksdon. She tells the detainees that it will be

7 Conclusion from: Border Watch
Abstract: On 8 April 2009, news broke that the UK police and security agencies had foiled a major planned terrorist bomb plot and had arrested twelve men in Manchester under the UK Terrorism Act 2000. The men, all but one of them Pakistani, had been under surveillance since their arrival in Britain on student visas. One of the arrested men was released shortly after, but the remaining eleven men were held for two weeks under the Terrorism Act as the police investigated the plot and the men’s alleged terrorist activities. By 22 April, however, Operation Pathway was causing controversy when it

Book Title: Anthropology's World-Life in a Twenty-first-century Discipline
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Hannerz Ulf
Abstract: In this masterly, state of the art work, Ulf Hannerz maps the contemporary social world of anthropologists and its relation to the wider world in which they carry out their work. Raising fundamental questions such as 'What is anthropology really about?', 'How does the public understand, or misunderstand, anthropology?' and 'What and where do anthropologists study now, and for whom do they write?' Hannerz invites anthropologists to think again about where their discipline is going. Full of insights and practical advice from Hannerz's long experience at the top of the discipline, this book is essential for all anthropologists who want their craft to survive and develop in a volatile world, and contribute to new understandings of its ever-changing diversity and interconnections.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183p30z

3 Diversity Is Our Business from: Anthropology's World
Abstract: Almost since the beginnings of anthropology as an organized endeavor, its practitioners—some of them at least—seem to have had a morbid tendency to dwell on the likelihood of its impending demise. In Argonauts of the Western Pacific(1922), perhaps the earliest field-based ethnography still reasonably widely read, Bronislaw Malinowski started his foreword by proposing that his discipline was “in the sadly ludicrous, not to say tragic, position, that at the very moment when it begins to put its workshop in order, to forge its proper tools, to start ready for work on its appointed task, the material of

6 Flat World and the Tower of Babel: from: Anthropology's World
Abstract: Here and there in these pages, I have found a point of departure, seriously or a little mockingly, among what I think of as the “global scenario writers”—those academics and journalists who have appeared especially since the end of the Cold War to pronounce on

8 And Next, Briefly: from: Anthropology's World
Abstract: Again, my own dwelling in anthropology’s world has extended over close to 50 years, since the early 1960s. Given that an active life of learning and practicing in a scholarly field may extend from someone’s early twenties to the age of retirement (whatever that may turn out to be), and possibly beyond, I would hope that some of you who have read this book

Book Title: White Identities-A Critical Sociological Approach
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): GARNER STEVE
Abstract: The study of white ethnicities is becoming increasingly important in the social sciences. This book provides a critical introduction to the topic. Whiteness has traditionally been seen as "ethnically transparent" - the marker against which other ethnicities are measured. This analysis is clearly incorrect, but only recently have many race and ethnicity scholars moved away from focusing on ethnic minorities and instead oriented their studies around the construction of white identities. Simon Clarke and Steve Garner's book is designed to guide students as they explore how white identities are forged using both sociological and psycho-social ideas. Including an excellent survey of the existing literature and original research from the UK, this book will be an invaluable guide for sociology students taking modules in race and ethnicity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183p383

2 WHITENESS STUDIES IN THE CONTEXT OF THE USA from: White Identities
Abstract: ‘Whiteness studies’ in the USA is a broad, nebulous and multidisciplinary field whose development has provoked a good deal of debate, since the early 1990s, on issues such as epistemology, reinterpretations of American history, and the ways in which dominant identities are constructed. In this chapter we provide an outline of the key areas of debate and the principal ways in which whiteness has been conceptualised.

3 EMPIRICAL RESEARCH INTO WHITE RACIALISED IDENTITIES IN BRITAIN from: White Identities
Abstract: The intellectual project of using whiteness as a tool of analysis is not one that has taken root in the UK. However, there are a number of empirical studies that investigate the racialisation of white identities. This bears some comparison to the themes thrown up by the plethora of American work in the loose multidisciplinary field labelled ‘whiteness studies’. Indeed, that corpus is far advanced: Winddance Twine and Gallagher (2008: 5) label the empirical studies of localised whiteness as it intersects with class, nation and gender, as the ‘third wave’ of whiteness studies. This scholarly movement has been blamed for

7 MEDIA REPRESENTATIONS: from: White Identities
Abstract: In this chapter we address the issue of asylum and asylum seekers in contemporary Britain. In it we argue that there is a worrying trend towards the conflation of asylum issues with terrorism. Using examples from the media and politics we argue that there is a new politics of fear emerging, which more than ever concentrates on difference and the demonisation of the Other. This politics uses emotional and psychological methods to play on our social fears and anxieties around community. This goes hand-in-hand with a mainstreaming of anti-immigration policy as a political value: a process that has drawn Left

8 WHITENESS, HOME AND COMMUNITY from: White Identities
Abstract: The idea of community has always been central to the construction of group and individual identity. It has been the site of moral panics about the disintegration of traditional community and values as well as concerns around racism and segregation (see chapter 5). The notion of community is of central importance in contemporary policy and political thinking. So, for example, as Anna Marie Smith (1992) argues in the 1980s and early 1990s new right Thatcherite policy concentrated on creating a hegemonic project that aimed at defining social space through the construction of outsider figures. Smith argues that the construction of

9 RESEARCHING WHITENESS: from: White Identities
Abstract: Psycho-social studies is an emerging tradition that very much focuses on emotion and affect to illuminate some of the core issues in the social sciences. Issues such as identity construction, dilemmas in public service sectors and the experience of rapid social change. It recognises that the split between individual and society, sociology and psychology is now unhelpful if we are to understand social and psychological phenomena. It therefore seeks to research beneath the surface using both psychoanalytic and sociological ideas using innovative new methodologies including the use of free association, biographical life history interviews and the development of psychoanalytic fieldwork.

Book Title: Blaming the Victim-How Global Journalism Fails Those in Poverty
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Lugo-Ocando Jairo
Abstract: Poverty, it seems, is a constant in today's news, usually the result of famine, exclusion or conflict. In Blaming the Victim, Jairo Lugo-Ocando sets out to deconstruct and reconsider the variety of ways in which the global news media misrepresent and decontextualise the causes and consequences of poverty worldwide. The result is that the fundamental determinant of poverty - inequality - is removed from their accounts. The books asks many biting questions. When - and how - does poverty become newsworthy? How does ideology come into play when determining the ways in which 'poverty' is constructed in newsrooms - and how do the resulting narratives frame the issue? And why do so many journalists and news editors tend to obscure the structural causes of poverty? In analysing the processes of news production and presentation around the world, Lugo-Ocando reveals that the news-makers' agendas are often as problematic as the geopolitics they seek to represent. This groundbreaking study reframes the ways in which we can think and write about the enduring global injustice of poverty.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183p3tc

1 The Subjectivity of Poverty from: Blaming the Victim
Abstract: Poverty is arguably the most important single issue in the global news agenda, but at the same time one of the most neglected ones. According to the United Nations’ report Rethinking Poverty.Report on the World Social Situation 2010, ‘global levels of poverty have changed very little over the past two decades’ (2009: 31), while most experts doubt that more than a handful of countries will achieve the targets set in the Millennium Development Goals (Elliot 2011: 43). Despite this, most of the mainstream news media in the West either ignore the subject altogether or seem wedded to the positivist

5 Visual Journalism and Global Poverty from: Blaming the Victim
Author(s) Eldridge Scott
Abstract: Kevin Carter’s photograph of a starving child in Sudan, with a vulture lurking in the background, is one of the most iconic visual depictions of poverty ever made. Published in the New York Timesin 1993, Carter received the Pulitzer Prize for this photo only months before he committed suicide at the age of 33. The image has become a ubiquitous signifier of famine, that has informed other portrayals of poverty ever since. This particular photo has become referential because certain images, whether stereotypical or unique, carry an ability to express emotions and knowledge (Hariman and Lucaites 2007: 10) in

5 The Global Theorist from: Fredrik Barth
Abstract: The idea for the project on entrepreneurship came to Barth after a Wenner-Gren symposium on economic anthropology, to which Raymond Firth had invited him. The Wenner-Gren Foundation for Anthropological Research was founded by the Swedish businessman Axel Wenner-Gren (who is, incidentally, often described as an entrepreneur) in 1941, then under the name of the Viking Foundation. Between 1958 and 1980, more than 80 conferences and workshops within all branches of anthropology, including biological anthropology, were organised at Burg Wartenstein castle in Austria. Barth was invited to several of these symposia, and he mentions that it had been suggested, tongue in

7 Baktaman Vibrations from: Fredrik Barth
Abstract: In 1968, more than ten years had passed since Barth had carried out long-term fieldwork. He had been aboard a fishing boat and studied economic spheres in Darfur, but had not carried out a larger ethnographic work of the kind that produces monographs, anecdotes for methodology seminars and cases for theoretical articles since the Basseri.

9 Turbulent Times from: Fredrik Barth
Abstract: Before Barth went to Bergen in 1961, he envisioned the possibility of taking the professorship at the Ethnographic Museum when Gjessing retired, and

10 Cultural Complexity from: Fredrik Barth
Abstract: It was during a visit to Swat in 1977 that Barth suggested that Wali Miangul Jahanzeb should write his autobiography. The waliwas born in 1908 and was visibly ageing. He was the lastwaliof Swat, since the valley was by now, formally at least, an integral part of the Pakistani republic.

Book Title: Mexico in Verse-A History of Music, Rhyme, and Power
Publisher: University of Arizona Press
Author(s): BEEZLEY WILLIAM H.
Abstract: The history of Mexico is spoken in the voice of ordinary people. In rhymed verse and mariachi song, in letters of romance and whispered words in the cantina, the heart and soul of a nation is revealed in all its intimacy and authenticity. Mexico in Verse, edited by Stephen Neufeld and Michael Matthews, examines Mexican history through its poetry and music, the spoken and the written word.Focusing on modern Mexico, from 1840 to the 1980s, this volume examines the cultural venues in which people articulated their understanding of the social, political, and economic change they witnessed taking place during times of tremendous upheaval, such as the Mexican-American War, the Porfiriato, and the Mexican Revolution. The words of diverse peoples-people of the street, of the field, of the cantinas-reveal the development of the modern nation. Neufeld and Matthews have chosen sources so far unexplored by Mexicanist scholars in order to investigate the ways that individuals interpreted-whether resisting or reinforcing-official narratives about formative historical moments.The contributors offer new research that reveals how different social groups interpreted and understood the Mexican experience. The collected essays cover a wide range of topics: military life, railroad accidents, religious upheaval, children's literature, alcohol consumption, and the 1985 earthquake. Each chapter provides a translated song or poem that encourages readers to participate in the interpretive practice of historical research and cultural scholarship. In this regard,Mexico in Verseserves both as a volume of collected essays and as a classroom-ready primary document reader.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183p8n6

Foreword from: Mexico in Verse
Author(s) Beezley William H.
Abstract: Blaring sounds have accompanied life in Mexico since the Spanish arrived in 1521. The clamor of church bells, merchant squares, military drums, and encouraging shouts of mule drivers and coachmen have become increasingly shrill in later centuries with political and advertising loudspeakers mounted on VWs, screaming radios, and deafening traffic jams, with drivers who understand the green light as “Honk your horn!” This teeth-clenching stridency has captured the attention of residents and visitors, and been described by authors, journalists, and foreign travelers who emphasize dissonance as symptomatic of the multiethnic society and crushing traffic.

Introduction: from: Mexico in Verse
Abstract: Songs and wordplay represent an everyday part of the Mexican experience. Innumerable soundscapes fill the street. The chimes of vendors, the cacophony of traffic, the susurration of conversations, they surround you. Most striking, music of all kinds let you know precisely where you stand. The whistling codes of chilangosturn slang phrases into tune, the brass trios mark the end of the day with clarion calls, the wandering singers haunt every cantina, and the matched mariachis serenade tourists. All of these present a profound facet of how we remember, experience, and know Mexico.¹ This quintessential element of identity,mexicanidad(Mexican-ness),

CHAPTER ONE Sister at War: from: Mexico in Verse
Author(s) Conway Christopher
Abstract: One of the most promising areas of future research into literature and national identity in early republican Mexico is the literature of the U.S.-Mexican War of 1846–1848. Mexican literary responses to the United States’ invasion of its territory, and to Mexico’s continued defeats on the battlefield, constitute an invaluable archive for examining the emergence of Mexican nationalism. Indeed, during the war and its aftermath, Mexican writers recognized the value of national unity as they never had before, because they saw their defeat on the battlefield as a function of their political disunity. “A nation is nothing but a large

CHAPTER FOUR “I’m Going to Write You a Letter”: from: Mexico in Verse
Author(s) French William
Abstract: The preceding stanza of popular lyrical poetry serves as a brief introduction to some of the interrelated themes taken up in this chapter as well as to the source used to do so, a form of nonnarrative verse known as the copla. In contrast to its much better-known relation, the corrido—a narrative form that tells a story about an event or occurrence by means of a series of stanzas that are related to each other, and in which the story emerges out of the entire piece that forms a single coherent entity unto itself—the copla is comprised of

CHAPTER SIX El Niño Proletario: from: Mexico in Verse
Author(s) Albarrán Elena Jackson
Abstract: With this stark imagery, radical poet Jesús Sansón Flores closed the introductory remarks to his volume El niño proletario: poemas clasistas(The Proletarian Child: Classist Poems). A young, self-designated “revolutionary poet” from the state of Michoacán, Sansón Flores had published widely since the 1920s on social and political issues, garnering a reputation as an ardent defender of the oppressed classes. A book of children’s poetry hardly stood to launch him into international literary fame. Little more than a cardboard-bound pamphlet of fifteen simple didactic verses for children, this collection nevertheless captured the essence of Sansón Flores’s Marxist social critique at

CHAPTER SEVEN “That Mariachi Band and That Tequila”: from: Mexico in Verse
Author(s) Toxqui Áurea
Abstract: From the late 1930s to the 1950s, Mexican cinema experienced its greatest era, known as the Golden Age. Many factors made possible the development of a truly national cinema at the time. For experts focusing on economics and politics, World War II was a catalyst. For those highlighting cultural and social reasons, the people involved in the movie industry were responsible for this blossoming. However, for the common Mexican and Latin American aficionado, the music, songs, and performers were the key element of the films produced. Many melodramas and comedy movies used popular music to emphasize their drama and romance,

Conclusion from: Mexico in Verse
Abstract: Lyrics have given voice to the Mexican experience even since the earliest eras of the conquest and colony. In 1604, Bernardo de Balbuena’s voluminous poetic work Grandeza mexicanatold the Empire of the land’s riches and wealth. New Spain represented a utopian potential:

2 Consociation and Communitas: from: Community, Cosmopolitanism and the Problem of Human Commonality
Abstract: In the previous chapter (‘Community as good to think with’), I noted that some of the most influential theorists of community – Anthony Cohen, Benedict Anderson, Victor Turner – have located this sense of connection in oppositional or extraordinary circumstances rather than within more mundane, quotidian relations. In other words, the theorization of community has often tended to disembed this concept from day-to-day sociality. In earlier work (Amit, 2002a), I argued that one version of this tendency towards disembedding has involved an increasing analytical focus on community as an idea, that is, a symbol or categorical referent rather than a

11 Nigel Rapport Responds to Vered Amit from: Community, Cosmopolitanism and the Problem of Human Commonality
Author(s) Rapport Nigel
Abstract: 1. Relations of ‘community’ can be understood to involve a variety of kinds of sociation. ‘Community’ in use indicates no single kind of relationship. Indeed, there is no one thing in common between all the different usages of and claims for ‘community’.

1 Catholicism and French Society: from: Catholicism and Crisis in Modern France
Abstract: “The Nation,” says Jacques Maritain, “is one of the most important, perhaps the most complex and complete community engendered by civilized life.”² For certain purposes a modern nation, this lofty example of human development, can usefully be considered as one single entity. But often national activities can best be understood if some of the constituent elements of the nation are examined first. This is particularly true in the case of France, where the fabric of historical evolution is rich with the multicolored threads of divergent groups and ideologies.

3 The Ecclesiastical Nucleus from: Catholicism and Crisis in Modern France
Abstract: Because this cosmological image must be considered in a political sense, it is greatly complicated and thereby loses much of its orderliness. In the first place, the ecclesiastical nucleus of French Catholicism has no single, unified political behavior pattern. Secondly, political activity seems to increase as one moves

4 Catholic Action: from: Catholicism and Crisis in Modern France
Abstract: Catholic Action comprises all laymen’s groups which are formally mandated by the Hierarchy to aid it in its apostolic function. Not all Catholic groups are in Catholic Action, since not all of them receive the formal mandate. Catholic Action groups are all organized on national and diocese levels, following the Hierarchy which controls them, while other Catholic groups may have quite different organizational bases. These differences plus divergent political perspectives justify treating Catholic Action in a chapter by itself.

8 The School Question and Specialized Catholic Institutions from: Catholicism and Crisis in Modern France
Abstract: The relationship between public and private schools in France during the past century has been a persistent political dilemma of great complexity. Whether fighting for the legal existence of Church schools or pressing for state aid, the Church has been involved in this question as in no other political matter. The place which the school question occupies for the Church Hierarchy, the Catholic press, and Catholic Action groups has already been noted: it is the one political question on which all Catholic groups can take sides.

Book Title: Cities of Affluence and Anger-A Literary Geography of Modern Englishness
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): KALLINEY PETER J.
Abstract: Providing a compact literary history of the twentieth century in England, Cities of Affluence and Anger studies the problematic terms of national identity during England's transition from an imperial power to its integration in the global cultural marketplace. While the countryside had been the dominant symbol of Englishness throughout the previous century, modern literature began to turn more and more to the city to redraw the boundaries of a contemporary cultural polity. The urban class system, paradoxically, still functioned as a marker of wealth, status, and hierarchy throughout this long period of self-examination, but it also became a way to project a common culture and mitigate other forms of difference. Local class politics were transformed in such a way that enabled the English to reframe a highly provisional national unity in the context of imperial disintegration, postcolonial immigration, and, later, globalization.Kalliney plots the decline of the country-house novel through an analysis of Forster's Howards End and Waugh's Brideshead Revisited, each ruthless in its sabotage of the trope of bucolic harmony. The traditionally pastoral focus of English fiction gives way to a high-modernist urban narrative, exemplified by Woolf's Mrs. Dalloway, and, later, to realists such as Osborne and Sillitoe, through whose work Kalliney explores postwar urban expansion and the cultural politics of the welfare state. Offering fresh new readings of Lessing's The Golden Notebook and Rushdie's The Satanic Verses, the author considers the postwar appropriation of domesticity, the emergence of postcolonial literature, and the renovation of travel narratives in the context of globalization. Kalliney suggests that it is largely one city--London--through which national identity has been reframed. How and why this transition came about is a process that Cities of Affluence and Anger depicts with exceptional insight and originality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183q3bk

2. BROKEN FENCES: from: Cities of Affluence and Anger
Abstract: A cursory survey of nineteenth-century fiction indicates that few English writers were willing to represent the urban class system as a site of national cohesion. Read selectively, the novels of Charles Dickens, Elizabeth Gaskell, William Makepeace Thackeray, and Thomas Hardy, for instance, imply that the cultural and political differences arising from the class system and industrialism may ultimately threaten the long-term stability of the nation. In Sybil; or, The Two Nations(1845), to take the most pointed example, Benjamin Disraeli describes a society in which the rich and poor form two distinct cultural and political entities, “between whom there is

3. STRANGERS IN THE PARK: from: Cities of Affluence and Anger
Abstract: In an essay on Oxford Street, the longtime center of London’s gaudy, cut-price shopping district, Virginia Woolf casually remarks that “the charm of modern London is that it is not built to last; it is built to pass.” Woolf surprisingly chooses Oxford Street, rather than one of London’s innumerable historic sites, as an emblem of the capital precisely because it foregrounds the transitory qualities of modern urban life. London’s historic houses and monuments, bestowed on the city by aristocratic patrons, “required the illusion of permanence.” By contrast, Woolf delights in the ephemerality of the city’s tacky, cacophonous, ostentatious retail industry

5. THE ELUSIVE ENGLISHMAN: from: Cities of Affluence and Anger
Abstract: The ability to imagine Englishness as a repository of class affect is not the exclusive property of writers born and bred in England itself. In Pursuit of the English(1960), Doris Lessing’s autobiographical account of her first years in London, is obsessed with the location, meaning, and function of English culture, finding its essence in the convoluted folds of a class society. After living in the metropole for two years, the semifictional narrator, Doris, complains that she has yet to stumble upon any genuine, bonafide Englishmen. “I don’t think I’ve met any,” she moans to a friend, explaining, “London is

Letter from Prison as Hidden Transcript: from: The People beside Paul
Author(s) Standhartinger Angela
Abstract: In recent years, reconstructions of the Christ-community in Philippi have been much improved by research focusing on the letter’s local and sociohistorical context.¹ With the help of archaeological, numismatic, and epigraphic data and studies on the political, cultural, and social impact of Roman imperialism to the provinces of Roman east, we have learned a lot about the local environments of the Colonia Iulia Augusta Philippensis. But not at least because archaeological and historical data remain ambiguous and open to different interpretations, it still remains difficult to identify those everyday Philippians to whom Paul wrote and their specific socialcultural contexts in

Book Title: The Hidden God-Luther, Philosophy, and Political Theology
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): MJAALAND MARIUS TIMMANN
Abstract: In this phenomenological reading of Luther, Marius Timmann Mjaaland shows that theological discourse is never philosophically neutral and always politically loaded. Raising questions concerning the conditions of modern philosophy, religion, and political ideas, Marius Timmann Mjaaland follows a dark thread of thought back to its origin in Martin Luther. Thorough analyses of the genealogy of secularization, the political role of the apocalypse, the topology of the self, and the destruction of metaphysics demonstrate the continuous relevance of this highly subtle thinker.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt189ttzv

TWO Philosophy: from: The Hidden God
Abstract: The destruction of metaphysics is a favored topic in twentieth-century philosophy, in terms of a positivist critique, an overcoming, an Abbau,a rejection, or a deconstruction of traditional metaphysical notions and concepts. But where and when does this discussion of a general destruction of metaphysics start? I argue that theHeidelberg Disputationplays a key role here.¹ In this short disputation, Luther presents forty theses giving a principal justification of his position, twenty-eight of them theological and the other twelve philosophical. In the explanation to thesis 21, he argues that the cross is a good thing, since itdestructs(destruuntur;

FOUR The Quest for Immorality from: The Hidden God
Abstract: Right from the beginning, there was a remarkable moral tenor in Luther’s criticism of the church authorities.¹ From 1517 onward he criticized the church for operating with double standards and undermining the prayers of penitence.² He accused the responsible authorities of organizing the confession of sins economically through the production and sale of indulgences. Hence, the moral emphasis of his criticism is striking when he attacks the praxis of exploiting poor people and their fear of Hell to the benefit of the church, the pope, and the clergy. His attacks on immorality within the church have contributed considerably to the

FIVE The Quest for Destruction from: The Hidden God
Abstract: Luther and philosophy is a topic that requires careful consideration, since there is a certain discrepancy between Luther’s rhetoric and his actual involvement in philosophical issues. His many more or less uncouth comments on philosophers as sophists, mad, or impious, of reason as a whore, and so forth, should be treated with a grain of salt and ascribed to his image as a barbarian and simple spokesman of the truth from the northern provinces of the Roman Empire. This is an image ascribed to him by his opponents and enemies and exploited in lampoons and caricatures, but it is also

THIRTEEN The Power of Interpretation: from: The Hidden God
Abstract: A new debate on political theology has emerged since the turn of the millennium, due to a general shift in the understanding of the relationship between religion and secularity in modern societies. After José Casanova’s Public Religions in the Modern World(1994) and Habermas’s speech on faith and knowledge (2001), where he coined the term “post-secular society,” there have been a number of controversies on the issue, including debates on this specific term.¹ Hans Joas has pointed out that the term is misguiding, since there has never been such a thing as asecularsociety, not even in the modern

CAPÍTULO V HACIA LA FORMULACIÓN DE POLÍTICAS LOCALES DE DESARROLLO URBANO SUSTENTABLE CONCEBIDAS A PARTIR DE LA CONSTRUCCIÓN SOCIAL DEL TERRITORIO from: El Desarrollo Territorial Integrado
Abstract: Para Latinoamérica es claro que de lo que se trata es de “sustentar”, sinónimo de “alimentar”, “cuidar” y, en alguna medida, “hacer crecer” en el sentido de “madurar”; para Europa el asunto pasa por la idea de “sostener”, “preservar”, en última

CAPÍTULO IX DE LA CIUDAD A LA REGIÓN: from: El Desarrollo Territorial Integrado
Abstract: Hasta aquí hemos llevado a cabo una reflexión que ha puesto de manifiesto la necesidad, no sólo de re-conceptualizar nuestra relación con el mundo, a partir de la manera como concebimos y construimos el lugar, entendido como espacio habitado, sino de proponer y aplicar nuevas estrategias de planificación capaces de ordenar el territorio en función de sus lógicas internas pero, sobre todo, en atención a la indispensable relación que éste debe guardar con las múltiples escalas con las cuales se encuentra tan afectado como comprometido.

X. COMENTARIOS FINALES from: El Desarrollo Territorial Integrado
Abstract: La Globalización es, sin duda, el más grande fenómeno del mundo actual y, por lo mismo, su mayor reto. Las fuertes contradicciones que le son inherentes, particularmente en lo que se refiere al permanente juego de inclusiones y exclusiones que realiza su carácter selectivo y manipulador, hacen necesario entender tanto el origen del mismo y su proceso histórico, como sus presupuestos teóricos y filosóficos, con el fin de construir un marco de pensamiento desde donde abordarla y/o enfrentarla; marco que supone la “capitalización” de la memoria histórico-cultural de los diferentes actores involucrados en sus distintos contextos a fin de establecer

1 Introduction: from: Interrogating Cultural Studies
Abstract: Few, if any, entire academic fields have attracted more consistently febrile attention than cultural studies. It has always received criticism, invective, vituperation; often angry, often confused and confusing (mis)representations of what it is, what it does, and why it goes about things the ways it does. It has also, of course, had its fair share of celebration, (over)indulgent congratulation and flattery. These two types of reaction entail each other: if cultural studies has often announced itself as being somehow messianic or at least deeply consequential – ‘radical’, ‘revolutionary’, ‘emancipatory’, and so on – then it is surely inevitable that those

[Part Three: Introduction] from: Interrogating Cultural Studies
Abstract: In this part we find strong arguments forcultural studies: compelling accounts of its successes, achievements and political force. The two interviews comprising it are very different in terms of tone and apparent positioning, but surprisingly aligned nevertheless. Adrian Rifkin in a sense ‘universalises’ the singular position he finds himself in – so he speaks, apparently, only of himself and his own work, but in such a way as to cast important illumination on what you might call the universal intellectual or academic condition. On the other hand, Griselda Pollock provides an account of cultural studies’ importance in general.

7 Inventing Recollection from: Interrogating Cultural Studies
Author(s) Rifkin Adrian
Abstract: In terms of the possible ways of thinking about that, one of the best ways I can think of starting would be completely autobiographical: it would be to give you an image of myself lying in my bath in my house in Southsea, Hampshire, just after the middle of the 1970s, reading essays by students, who were either on the historical studies course at Portsmouth Polytechnic, or who were doing a mixture of historical studies and cultural studies; and being struck by, and thinking about, some of the key words they were using in their essays, which were the kinds

9 Friends and Enemies: from: Interrogating Cultural Studies
Author(s) Gilbert Jeremy
Abstract: What is cultural studies for, and what is it against? There can be, of course, no single answer to this question. There is a habit amongst commentators, especially those who, being located outside the UK, are understandably removed from the political contexts which produced British cultural studies, of deploying the term ‘cultural studies’ as an adjective, using it to describe certain determinate political positions as well as certain specifiable methodologies. Such references to ‘cultural studies’ positions or approaches effectively conflate cultural studies – an interdisciplinary field of enquiry – with the political tradition which has informed its dominant strand in

11 Cultural Studies, in Theory from: Interrogating Cultural Studies
Author(s) Mowitt John
Abstract: I should begin by emphasising that the concept of position is one that has interested me for quite some time. I have written about it both in relation to Fanon and the critique of Eurocentrism, and also in relation to trauma studies. For this reason I fear that I may, almost without thinking, make more of this question, its terms, than might otherwise be necessary. Let’s hope that this helps to answer rather than avoid the question.

12 The Subject Position of Cultural Studies: from: Interrogating Cultural Studies
Author(s) Valentine Jeremy
Abstract: These questions insist on answers in the first person singular and there’s a lot of virement between them. So I will try to answer all the questions but not necessarily in the right order and the right place to make allowances for a fair bit of grammatical and conceptual drift.

1 The Erotic Novel and Censorship in Twentieth-Century France from: Forbidden Fictions
Abstract: French culture has long been perceived by the English-speaking reader as somehow more ‘erotic’ than Anglo-Saxon culture. This impression is partly due to the large numbers of pornographic publications which have been imported from Paris since the sixteenth century, first into England and later into the United States, but also to the peculiarly French association of pornography and subversion, hence the fascination that the genre has held for well-known and highly regarded writers from Rabelais to Robbe-Grillet. The choice of modern French (as opposed to any other nation’s) pornography as object of study is, therefore, justified by the unique existence

1 Changing Transatlantic Contexts and Contours: from: Ireland Beyond Boundaries
Author(s) Mahony Christina Hunt
Abstract: The special relationship that exists between Ireland and the United States has been the subject of much rhetoric, especially since the founding of the Irish state. This link is rehearsed at appropriate intervals, usually at times of political or emotional significance, such as President John F. Kennedy’s 1963 visit to Ireland or the signing of the Good Friday Agreement in 1998. The perception in Ireland of Irish political clout in America has always been somewhat distorted, however, and cannot compare with the special relationship between the US and Britain. Irish clout is also asserted in the social and cultural realm,

6 The Intellectual and the State: from: Ireland Beyond Boundaries
Author(s) McCarthy Conor
Abstract: This chapter concerns critical authority, and the ways that critical authority has developed and changed in Irish criticism since the 1980s. The term authorityis used here to refer to the position of the critic in his or her text regarding the work he or she is analysing; to the discursive location of the critic; to the critic’s institutional location; and finally the relationship of all of these to the final source of authority in modern society, the state (Said, 1984). The case I wish to argue is that the political and economic condition of Ireland in the period in

7 Forty Shades of Grey?: from: Ireland Beyond Boundaries
Author(s) Daly Mary E.
Abstract: Historians place considerable value on the perspective given by the passing of time, so there are obvious difficulties in trying to assess major developments in the writing of modern Irish history over the past 15 to 20 years. But having entered this caveat, there are some trends that can be identified, including a significant expansion in the number of books and articles; greater diversity in research topics; increased specialisation and the concomitant emergence of historiographical debates that are accessible only to experts in particular fields; an end to the belief that it is possible to arrive at an objective –

9 ‘A Decent Girl Well Worth Helping’: from: Ireland Beyond Boundaries
Author(s) Ryan Louise
Abstract: In the autumn of 2003 I was invited to a conference in a British university during which there was a lively discussion about Irish Studies. I found it thought-provoking but also a little frustrating. I concluded that the primary reason for my frustration was the lack of clarity and agreement about what constituted Irish Studies. The subject that was being discussed and critiqued did not reflect my experiences of teaching and researching in an Irish Studies Centre and, as I listened, I became increasingly aware of just how capacious a concept Irish Studies is. Perhaps that is one of its

10 Beating the Bounds: from: Ireland Beyond Boundaries
Author(s) Pettitt Lance
Abstract: This chapter considers two questions about the relations between the past and the present. Firstly, how might we set out to write a cultural history of Ireland’s media? Secondly, sensing that we are on the cusp of change, having recently crossed the threshold into a new century, what precisely are the difficulties in defining and analysing the nature of an Irish mediascape? The study of media institutions, texts and audiences in and about Ireland is a relatively new sub-field that has emerged piecemeal from diverse disciplinary origins, a second-generation of scholarship within what has come to be called Irish Studies.

Book Title: Locating Cultural Creativity- Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Liep John
Abstract: The contributors to this volume reexamine the interconnectedness of culture and creativity in an increasingly hybrid world. They argue that while many of the old certainties about high culture and artistic canons may now be disintegrating, culture and creativity themselves are still very much a reflection of social processes involving power and the control of resources. Case studies include youth subcultures in Europe; experimental theatre derived from the Brazilian candomblé dance; the role of memory in mythology among the Pukapukan of Polynesia; the evolution of football and polo in Argentina; gender relations in Algerian raï music; the notion of authenticity in artistic movements in Zanzibar; traditional and modern practices of the Lio in Indonesia; and kula exchange and social movements in the Trobriand Islands in the Pacific.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18fs9q6

INTRODUCTION from: Locating Cultural Creativity
Author(s) Liep John
Abstract: May 1995 was the fiftieth anniversary of the liberation of Denmark from German occupation during the Second World War. The Ministry of Culture had set aside generous funds for celebratory manifestations. By far the most costly and provocative project to be approved was a gigantic installation by a young artist who proposed illuminating the entire western coastline of Denmark with a single laser beam relayed from hill to hill. This performance on the midnight of peace was to continue along the German coast and thus demonstrate friendly cooperation across the border. The artist herself explained the installation as a re-creation

1 CREATIVE ARGUMENTS OF IMAGES IN CULTURE, AND THE CHARNEL HOUSE OF CONVENTIONALITY from: Locating Cultural Creativity
Author(s) Fernandez James W.
Abstract: Wittgenstein, conversing on aesthetics, shows understanding of the compensatory – perhaps revitalizing – interest moderns take in ‘creativity’ (Wittgenstein 1966:8 quoted in Lurie 1991). For him as for Spengler and for Vico before

3 THE IRON CAGE OF CREATIVITY: from: Locating Cultural Creativity
Author(s) Friedman Jonathan
Abstract: Creativity has become something of a slogan among latter-day Birmingham cultural sociologists and their more seasoned allies, the cultural studies crowd. There has been a clear move from the study of working-class culture to the aesthetics of everyday life. While Birmingham certainly flirted with abstract structural Marxism, their interests lay more in the direction of the concrete, since they, unlike many Marxist sociologists, were trying to gain a purchase on reality in the street, so to speak – although one may have reservations about the nature of their ethnography, which, except for some of the research reports, was explicitly focused

6 THE CONSTRUCTION OF AUTHENTICITY: from: Locating Cultural Creativity
Author(s) Lindner Rolf
Abstract: The traditional dilemma of anthropology as an account of the culturally different is contained in the postulate of authenticity which, explicitly or implicitly, underlies it. In this context the word ‘postulate’ should be taken quite literally: a moral demand is made of the group being investigated, that it keep as far away as possible from worldly influence, whether of an economic, social or cultural nature. Renato Rosaldo (1989) has drawn attention to the fact that for anthropologists, if they adhere to the classic norms, the groups possessing the most ‘culture’ are those that are in themselves coherent and homogeneous, and

CHAPTER 2 Alexander Veselovsky’s Historical Poetics vs. Cultural Poetics: from: Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) SOMOFF VICTORIA
Abstract: In a lecture entitled “From the Introduction to Historical Poetics,” Alexander Veselovsky makes an unusually casual reference, with no precise attribution, to a certain “erudite German [who] has dedicated a special monograph to a single poetic formula, tracing it from popular song to new manifestations in refined literature: Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär!There are many formulas like this.”¹ Here the word “formula” stands for any preexisting pattern of verbal expression, from apparently dead meta phors of everyday language (e.g.,the sun rises) to artistic topoi, motifs, and plots. Once created, formulas carry on and endure, albeit in a multitude

Book Title: Practicing the City: Early Modern London on Stage- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Levine Nina
Abstract: In late-sixteenth-century London, the commercial theaters undertook a novel experiment, fueling a fashion for plays that trafficked in the contemporary urban scene. But beyond the stage's representing the everyday activities of the expanding metropolis, its unprecedented urban turn introduced a new dimension into theatrical experience, opening up a reflexive space within which an increasingly diverse population might begin to "practice" the city. In this, the London stage began to operate as a medium as well as a model for urban understanding. Practicing the City traces a range of local engagements, onstage and off, in which the city's population came to practice new forms of urban sociability and belonging. With this practice, Levine suggests, city residents became more self-conscious about their place within the expanding metropolis and, in the process, began to experiment in new forms of collective association. Reading an array of materials, from Shakespeare and Middleton to plague bills and French-language manuals, Levine explores urban practices that push against the exclusions of civic tradition and look instead to the more fluid relations playing out in the disruptive encounters of urban plurality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18kr6ft

4. The Place of the Present: from: Practicing the City: Early Modern London on Stage
Abstract: London city comedies catered to the moment and to an increasingly consumerist public—“fit for the times and the termers,” Thomas Middleton quipped to readers of The Roaring Girl(1611), slyly retailing his own as well as the city’s investments in the contemporary scene.¹ Famous for the notoriety of its title character,The Roaring Girlpushes these investments far beyond those of the other plays in this study. Not only do Middleton and Dekker track the close encounters of London’s population across a vividly drawn cityscape, but they take the novel step of impersonating a recognizable local figure on stage,

8 Writing Métissage in New Caledonian Non-Kanak Literatures: from: The Literatures of the French Pacific
Abstract: In the nineteenth-century novels set in New Caledonia, métissage, as the process and outcome of racial mixing, was most particularly associated with women characters, and largely characterized by sexual permissiveness and biological degeneration. The earliest written literature in New Caledonia was, for the most part, produced by Metropolitan French people passing through. Louise Michel, considered in Chapters 1 and 2, spent eight years in the country’s penitentiary system, leaving New Caledonia after the general amnesty to rejoin her ailing mother in France. Jacques and Marie Nervat came to the colony a decade later, where they lived from 1898 to 1902.

Book Title: Memory, Narrative and the Great War-Rifleman Patrick MacGill and the Construction of Wartime Experience
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): Taylor David
Abstract: Memory, Narrative and the Great War provides a detailed examination of the varied and complex war writings of a relatively marginal figure, Patrick MacGill, within a general framework of our current pre-occupation with blood, mud and suffering. In particular, it seeks to explain how his interpretation of war shifted from the heroic wartime autobiographical trilogy, with its emphasis on 'the romance of the rifleman' to the pessimistic and guilt-ridden interpretations in his post-war novel, Fear!, and play, Suspense. Through an exploration of the way in which war-time experiences were remembered (and re-remembered) and retold in strikingly different narratives, and using insights from cognitive psychology, it is argued that there is no contradiction between these two seemingly opposing views. Instead it is argued that, given the present orientation and problem-solving nature of both memory and narrative, the different interpretations are both 'true' in the sense that they throw light on the ongoing way in which MacGill came to terms with his experiences of war. This in turn has implications for broader interpretations of the Great War, which has increasingly be seen in terms of futile suffering, not least because of the eloquent testimony of ex-Great War soldiers, reflecting on their experiences many years after the event. Without suggesting that such testimony is invalid, it is argued that this is one view but not the only view of the war. Rather wartime memory and narrative is more akin to an ever-changing kaleidoscope, in which pieces of memory take on different (but equally valid) shapes as they are shaken with the passing of time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18mbc8p

CHAPTER 3 Sources: from: Memory, Narrative and the Great War
Abstract: The volume of material relating to the soldiers’ experience of the Great War is truly astounding. It has grown dramatically in the last few decades and shows little sign of diminishing. Indeed, with the centenary of the outbreak of the war only two years away (at the time of writing), there is every likelihood that there will be a further upsurge, not least from those interested in family history for whom ‘grandfather’s war’ (and increasingly ‘great-grandfather’s war’) remains a matter of central interest. It would be hypocritical to bemoan such a wealth of material but, putting aside the practical problems

CHAPTER 5 Writing the War from the Home Front from: Memory, Narrative and the Great War
Abstract: MacGill returned to England in September 1915 and spent time ‘all dressed in blighty blue’ in the first Birmingham War Hospital at Ruberry Hill.¹ In the following month he contributed to The Timesfund-raising publicationRed Cross Story Bookand by February 1916 he was fit enough to appear in London Irish Rifles uniform at fund-raising evenings in London during which his wife read from his ‘Story of Loos’, which was to become a central part ofThe Great Push.His commitment to the war was reflected inThe Red Horizonwhich opened simply:

CONCLUSION: from: Memory, Narrative and the Great War
Abstract: At the time of writing the centenary of the outbreak of the Great War is rapidly approaching. Notwithstanding the often tumultuous events of the twentieth century, the war still enjoys a unique status as a watershed in modern British history, and interest in it shows no sign of abating. On the contrary, not least as a result of the continuing growth in family history, interest in grandfather’s war and great-grandfather’s war ensures that it lives on in contemporary society. And yet the Great War has become a part of history in the sense that the passing of the last men

Book Title: Leaving the North-Migration and Memory, Northern Ireland 1921–2011
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): Trew Johanne Devlin
Abstract: Leaving the North is the first book that provides a comprehensive survey of Northern Ireland migration since 1921. Based largely on the personal memories of emigrants who left Northern Ireland from the 1920s to the 2000s, approximately half of whom eventually returned, the book traces their multigenerational experiences of leaving Northern Ireland and adapting to life abroad, with some later returning to a society still mired in conflict. Contextualised by a review of the statistical and policy record, the emigrants’ stories reveal that contrary to its well-worn image as an inward-looking place – 'such narrow ground' – Northern Ireland has a rather dynamic migration history, demonstrating that its people have long been looking outward as well as inward, well connected with the wider world. But how many departed and where did they go? And what of the Northern Ireland Diaspora? How has the view of the ‘troubled’ homeland from abroad, especially among expatriates, contributed to progress along the road to peace? In addressing these questions, the book treats the relationship between migration, sectarianism and conflict, immigration and racism, repatriation and the Peace Process, with particular attention to the experience of Northern Ireland migrants in the two principal receiving societies – Britain and Canada. With the emigration of young people once again on the increase due to the economic downturn, it is perhaps timely to learn from the experiences of the people who have been ‘leaving the North’ over many decades; not only to acknowledge their departure but in the hope that we might better understand the challenges and opportunities that migration and Diaspora can present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18mbcf8

Chapter 1 History, Memory, Migration from: Leaving the North
Abstract: ‘Whose diaspora, whose migration, whose identity?’ (Mac Einrí and Lambkin, 2002) remain uncomfortable questions in post-partition Ireland. For although the concept of diaspora has proliferated in academic discourses of migration and identity since the 1990s, most often its application in the Irish context as a ‘victim’ diaspora (Cohen, 1997) has referred principally to the large number of famine emigrants, mostly Catholics and successive chain migrations of that group, primarily to the United States from 1845 to 1870.² The migration of Protestants from Ireland has tended to be set apart in an often partisan and somewhat marginalised literature on the Scotch-Irish

Chapter 4 ‘Are you Catholic or Protestant?’ from: Leaving the North
Abstract: David was born in Belfast in 1940 to a father from County Cork and a mother from Dublin. His father, an elderly man when David was born, had in a previous marriage already reared a family; working in the insurance business for many years in Dublin, Liverpool and Twickenham, London before settling in Belfast during the 1930s. He was also a Baptist lay preacher, a Freemason and held strong Unionist beliefs. David’s mother was raised in the Church of Ireland in which he himself was confirmed. In his childhood home, David remembered the photograph of King George VI on the

Chapter 5 ‘Doubly invisible’: from: Leaving the North
Abstract: February 2010. I receive a lovely card from Aimie, an elderly informant from Belfast who has lived in England since 1946. She writes, ‘I am losing my sight. No more lovely books and poetry … I will never be able to go home again but have happy memories … these memories help to sustain us at sad times.’ My own vision blurs with tears for Aimie is a woman who loves literature, poetry especially, and reading has been the only way over the past few years that she has been able to ‘travel’ home. Her words bring me back to

Chapter 6 ‘A very tolerant country’: from: Leaving the North
Abstract: June 2007. I am in a taxi hurtling through the streets of Toronto en route to Pearson International Airport to catch a flight to London. My driver, an Iranian immigrant who has lived in Toronto since 1988 appears delighted to discover that I am genuinely interested in his country when I mention having recently read two books about Iran.¹ We stop at a red light and from under the journey log sheet on his clipboard he pulls out a folded Iranian newspaper, holds it over the steering wheel and begins reading aloud, translating from Farsi, moving his finger under the

Introduction from: South African performance and archives of memory
Abstract: For decades theatre in South Africa had a specific role: to ‘protest’ injustices, to break silences, to provoke debate on issues in spaces that could facilitate discussion, often actually during performances. This theatre was about lived experiences that were often officially denied. As Fugard suggests, play-makers like himself sought ‘to witness as truthfully as [they] could, the nameless and destitute (desperate) of this one little corner of the world’ (1983: 172). This witnessing extended beyond telling one’s own stories, to the dramatisation of those of wider communities. These plays were not about the past; they explored present realities, while rehearsing

1 The Truth and Reconciliation Commission’s reconfiguring of the past: from: South African performance and archives of memory
Abstract: This chapter begins with the moment of rupture: with the release of Mandela in 1990 and the negotiations for full democracy in South Africa to be achieved by 1994, followed by a period of transition, characterised publicly to a large extent by the Truth and Reconciliation Commission (TRC), which sat from 1994–98. It will look at the role the TRC has played, both as live event and as an archive produced from oral testimonies, in the construction of a ‘new’ South Africa. In analysing the archive, I explore its function, how it has been performed and constructed, the various

5 INCOMMENSURABILITY: from: The Trouble with Community
Abstract: There are at least two potential pitfalls in this project, pitfalls of hoary longevity: the attempt to move from ‘is’ to ‘ought’, from science to morality; and the attempt to move to morality from moralities. At the least, much wisdom would lead one to suspect that an account of a relationship between science and morality which is clearer and firmer than the ambiguous and uneasy one which Gellner finds presently to characterize liberal society would have to take the form of a continuing negotiation of plural and partial compromises rather than anything more singular or statutory. It would be an

7 THE IRONIZATION OF LIBERAL DEMOCRACY from: The Trouble with Community
Abstract: Besides its literary meaning, of certain figures of speech (antiphrasis, litotes, meiosis)where there is an inconsistency or contradiction between what is said and what is meant or apparent, irony can be understood as compassing a certain cognitive detachment, recognizing a certain displacement; indeed, it paves a royal road to appreciating displacement as an infinite regress. Irony may be defined

CHAPTER 7 Neo-Liberalism and the Defence of the ‘Universal’ from: Pierre Bourdieu
Abstract: In DistinctionBourdieu had been concerned to trace the shift to a more individualistic, cosmopolitan, business-oriented culture in the lifestyles and tastes of France’s bourgeoisie and petty bourgeoisie. This shift in the ‘social field’ as a whole, epitomised by the rise of the ‘progressive fractions’ of France’s bourgeoisie, had also manifested itself in a series of homologous shifts in a range of other fields or sub-fields. Thus, the rise of the ‘new bourgeoisie’ and their allies, the ‘new petty bourgeoisie’, was mirrored in the political field in the rise of ‘reconverted conservatism’ as the new dominant ideology, in the educational

Conclusion from: Pierre Bourdieu
Abstract: Arriving at a final assessment of the value of Bourdieu’s immense and varied output is no easy task. By placing his work in the interrelated contexts of the intellectual field out of which it emerged and the social and cultural changes it has analysed, this study has sought to emphasise the immense perceptiveness with which Bourdieu has traced the dynamic of these changes in postwar France. Indeed, he has often shown considerable prescience, anticipating the future development of socio-cultural phenomena or crystallising a more general or vaguely perceived sense of malaise. This was particularly true of the works on French

CHAPTER 1 Definition and Conceptual History of Truth Commissions: from: Truth Commissions
Abstract: Few ideas have gained as much international attention in such a short time span as the concept of the truth commission. Successful and failed initiatives to set up ad hoc panels called “truth commissions” to investigate patterns of human rights violations abound. In addition, in some countries single incidents of violence have led to calls for a commission when the facts about the event remained in the dark for decades. Two examples that come to mind are the 1985 siege and fire in Colombia’s Palace of Justice¹ and the 1994 bombing of the Israeli-Argentine Mutual Association in Buenos Aires.² Perhaps

CHAPTER 4 Truth Commission Impact: from: Truth Commissions
Abstract: In what ways do truth commissions influence policy, human rights accountability, and social norms? The transitional justice literature suggests various mechanisms through which truth commissions are expected to achieve a set of moral and political objectives in peace-building and democratization contexts. However, only a handful of studies have explored the commission andpost-commission processes to assess claims of truth commission impact. In this chapter I explain whether or not, and the specific ways in which, truth commissionsin facttransform the lessons from history into policy, human rights accountability, and changes in shared social norms. In short, this chapter is

7 The Effect of Cultural Setting: from: Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Sihombing Batara
Abstract: In this essay I focus on the effect of the combination of cultural setting, context, and personal experiences, using an intercultural exchange between two quite different reading communities. The Indonesian Metanoia group from Maumere, Flores, consisting of prisoners, read the story of the rape of Tamar together with the German partner group BibelWeltWeit (Bible World Wide). I analyze the extent to which this encounter transformed readers of both groups, looking at whether the exchange enabled the participants to become more aware of the importance of semantic conventions when dealing with issues of sexual abuse and whether this would aid in

8 Reading the Text—Reading the Others—Reading Ourselves (A Dialogue between Germany and Indonesia) from: Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Kessler Rainer
Abstract: During the process of reading 2 Sam 13:1–22 with German and Indonesian partner groups, it became clear that the German group did more than just read the text and the response of the partner group: they indeed read the others, and only by discussing this point did they begin toread themselves.

15 The Biblical Text as a Heterotopic Intercultural Site: from: Bible and Transformation
Author(s) West Gerald
Abstract: I have used Michel Foucault’s notion of “heterotopia” in an earlier essay to argue that space is an important component in enabling the poor and oppressed to forge an articulated response to domination (West 2009). There I argued that the question of whether the subaltern canspeak (Spivak 1988) should be recast as a question that takes space seriously: “Wherecan the subaltern speak?” For, as James Scott so eloquently argues, subordinate classes are less constrained at the level of thought and ideology than they are at the level of political action and struggle “since they can in secluded settings

20 Looking beyond Secularism and Communism: from: Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Kindelan Ricardo González
Abstract: Our essay is focused on the most important aspects of change occasioned by the exchange between these two partner groups as they read together John 20, using the method of intercultural Bible reading. It is necessary to include some background information, such as a description of the social and religious context in eastern Cuba, as well as some details about

22 The Complex Role of Views on the Bible in Intercultural Encounters (A Dialogue among Cuba, Colombia, Ghana, and the Netherlands) from: Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Snoek Hans
Abstract: In the past fifteen years a small miracle has happened: dozens of reading groups, thousands of miles apart, have read the same Bible text and corresponded with one another about it. This gives the impression that the Bible is a universal book that, despite differences in cultures and beliefs, can stimulate readers to look at a text differently. Although the success of the project of intercultural Bible reading has been surprising, it would be too simple to state that the exchanges have always led to transformation. Sometimes the distance between groups was too great, which showed up in traces of

27 Sharing Memories, Overcoming Solitude: from: Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Hoyos José Vicente Vergara
Abstract: In this essay I take a brief tour of contextual situations in which Latin American people live in the face of impunity; I also cover some interpretations of the biblical text, taking as a starting point the life of believing communities in our continent. It brings together the sincere and supportive interaction between those who share the same reality of pain, suffering, and the need to make claims so that impunity does not reign, but justice. I deal with three aspects: the impunity in Latin America, the struggle for justice, and the transformation toward an attitude of solidarity.

2 “GERM WARS: DIRTY HANDS, DRINKING LIPS, AND DIXIE CUPS” from: The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive
Author(s) Sattar Atia
Abstract: The conflict between germs and cups first came to my attention in a laboratory at the Indiana Medical History Museum, where I stumbled across an illustration by Hoosier cartoonist Gaar Williams (1880–1935) entitled Meet Me at the Town Pump. Signed, a Typhoid Germ(figure 2.1). In this drawing, a typhoid germ appears as an amphibious creature with webbed hands and feet, sitting at the edge of a wooden tub filled with water. In his right hand is the common dipper or public drinking cup of the day, a single metal can for everyone in the town, attached by chain

[BOX II Introduction] from: The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive
Abstract: Tinkerers or pundits, visionaries or eccentrics, oddballs sometimes make their own archives. Surprisingly, the archives of some of history’s most anomalous figures are rarely themselves anomalous but instead come to appear exemplary because their organizing figures have emerged in some way from the pack. Oddball personae collect followings; their followers, in turn, are often the ones left in charge of collecting the oddballs’ life’s work, their leavings. The Kinsey archives, no less than the papers of the Marquis de Sade or the drawings of Adolf Wölfli, may now be managed by professional librarians, but they were once gathered and conserved

5 “THE MADNESS OF SLAVOJ ŽIŽEK” from: The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive
Author(s) Allen Dennis
Abstract: There are literally thousands of clips of Slavoj Žižek available on the Internet, but perhaps the most entertaining one is a YouTube excerpt from Astra Taylor’s succinctly entitled 2005 documentary, Žižek!Posted as “Philosophy from a Bed View (by Žižek),” the clip seems singularly apt for our purposes if only because, in the process of defining the project of philosophy, Žižek touches on one of the key questions that this collection of essays is intended to address: What is the relation between reason and unreason? Sliding across a series of binaries, Žižek articulates the difference between “true” philosophers and “madmen”

[BOX III Introduction] from: The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive
Abstract: All archives promise – and ineluctably fail – to offer a bulwark against the passage of time. In their task of making up for lost memory – that is, for the loss of ways of thinking, as well as for the passing of successive eras – archives carry out their functions incompletely. Archives mark what has been lost in their preservation of remnants that remain incomplete in what we imagine to be their testimony to a much fuller moment. Can we think of archives as time machines that bring us into direct contact with the documents and relics of a forgotten age? Or do

9 “THERE IS AS YET INSUFFICIENT DATA FOR A MEANINGFUL ANSWER: INHUMANISM AT THE LITERARY LIMIT” from: The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive
Author(s) Jaffe Aaron
Abstract: Among its other merits, Vilém Flusser’s strange treatise on Vampyroteuthis infernalisis a fable about information at the literary limit. Comparing “the vampire squid from hell” andHomo sapiens sapiens,Flusser proposes a fantastic convergence that links the odd existence of a tentacled life-form, complexly equipped for probing the deep ocean, to the inhuman consequences of our emerging system of new media. Humans increasingly approximate the strategies of invertebrate life, he writes: “As our interest in objects began to wane, we created media that have enabled us to rape human brains, forcing them to store immaterial information. We have built

Prologue from: Medium, Messenger, Transmission
Abstract: How can the meaning of media be thought about in such a way that we acquire an understanding of our relationship to both the world and to ourselves? How can a concept of the medium be developed that encompasses our experiences using media? How can we determine what media ‘are’ in a way that embraces both generally accepted (voice, writing) and newer forms of media (computer, Internet)? How can media be conceptualized in a way that enables not only a reformulation of traditional philosophical questions but also a new conception of philosophy? Assuming first of all that one media concept

Methodological Considerations from: Medium, Messenger, Transmission
Abstract: The debate over media that was first articulated in the 1960s and continues to flourish today is confusing, multivocal and heterogeneous: there is no consensus in the phenomenal domain, the methodological approach or even the very concept of media. Nevertheless, through the multitude of heterogeneous voices – at least in the cultural studies camp – it is possible to perceive a certain vocal range that could be called the ‘bon ton of the media debate’. This ‘bon ton’

Epilogue from: Medium, Messenger, Transmission
Abstract: This discussion is (almost) at an end; all that remains is a conclusion, and I want to open this conclusion by raising a concluding and very fundamental question: What is the use of a study that proposes to rehabilitate the model of the messenger and transmission? Surely it is intended to develop a more interesting – if also slightly outmoded – approach to media theory, but isn’t the risk of misunderstandings too high a price to pay for this mediatheoretical perspective given the obvious heteronomy of the messenger figure and his apparently dependent transmission activity? This risk is further exacerbated

PENSAR SOBRE LA NARRACIÓN: from: Las narrativas y su impacto en el desarrollo lingüístico infantil.
Author(s) Zimmermann Karina Hess
Abstract: En los últimos años ha surgido un interés cada vez mayor por incursionar en el desarrollo lingüístico que se da a partir de los años escolares. Gracias a diversas investigaciones se ha mostrado que este no termina cuando los niños ingresan a la escuela, sino que continúa durante los años escolares e incluso muy entrada la adolescencia (Barriga Villanueva 2002, Nippold 1998, 2000, 2004). Durante esta etapa el niño debe aprender a emplear diversas funciones del lenguaje, así como estilos y organizaciones discursivas más diversos que involucran, a su vez, un vocabulario y una estructuración sintáctica más complejos. Por otro

EL DESARROLLO DE LA NARRACIÓN MÁS ALLÁ DE LA PRIMERA INFANCIA from: Las narrativas y su impacto en el desarrollo lingüístico infantil.
Author(s) Tolchinsky Liliana
Abstract: Antes de los 5 años de edad los niños se han apropiado de la estructura de frase propia de su lengua, saben cómo agrupar palabras para formar oraciones simples y complejas y cómo moverlas para formar preguntas, voz pasiva y negaciones. No hay duda, sin embargo, que los niños en edad escolar, los adolescentes y los adultos hablan y escriben de manera bastante diferente a como lo hacen los preescolares ¿Qué es lo que cambia? ¿Qué aspectos del desarrollo lingüístico requieren de un largo camino evolutivo? Estas preguntas son las que intentamos responder quienes exploramos los así llamados “desarrollos tardíos

HABÍA UNA VEZ UN NIÑO QUE TENÍA SU SAPO EN UN FRASCO: from: Las narrativas y su impacto en el desarrollo lingüístico infantil.
Author(s) Aguilar César Antonio
Abstract: Quizá uno de los aspectos que resulta una “Verdad de Perogrullo” sobre los estudios lingüísticos, es la manera en que ocupamos nuestra lengua como un recurso para construir narraciones. Podemos decir que llevar a efecto esta acción nos resulta tan familiar que nadie la tomaría en cuenta como algo “sobresaliente”, sino más bien tenderíamos a considerar que justo esta tarea de narrar situaciones, impresiones, sensaciones y emociones es “un hecho natural” para cualquier idioma.

ORIENTACIÓN TEMPORAL EN LAS NARRATIVAS PERSONALES ESCRITAS DE LOS NIÑOS JORNALEROS MIGRANTES from: Las narrativas y su impacto en el desarrollo lingüístico infantil.
Author(s) del Río Lugo Norma
Abstract: La aceleración, las rupturas con el tiempo lineal mediante el avance tecnológico, que comprimen el tiempo y espacio para pasar del “aquí y el ahora” al “ahora en todos los lugares” definen la globalización, (Beriain 1997) como también lo hacen, las circulaciones y flujos de información, de bienes, pero sobre todo, de desplazamientos de fuerza laboral sin distingos de edad o género. Estos flujos humanos sistemáticos, crean verdaderos territorios circulatorios¹ y dislocan la organización social tradicional, las formas, ritmos y rendimiento del trabajo familiar, para ser incorporados a las nuevas formas de producción intensiva, de “flexibilidad laboral”, reguladas según políticas

“ESPAÑOL, WHERE ARE YOU?” from: Las narrativas y su impacto en el desarrollo lingüístico infantil.
Author(s) Parra María Luisa
Abstract: En la actualidad, una de las áreas de mayor auge en la investigación sobre el desarrollo infantil es, sin duda, el bilingüismo. En una época de migraciones masivas y constitución de sociedades multiculturales como la que hoy vivimos es imperioso plantearse preguntas sobre el proceso de adquisición y desarrollo de la(s) lengua(s), oral y escrita, en contextos multilingües, si se quieren entender y resolver los enormes retos educativos que la población infantil inmigrante impone a los sistemas escolares de los países que la acoge. Un ejemplo que ilustra con claridad estos retos es la población infantil hispana en los Estados

NARRAR EN DOS MUNDOS. LA NARRATIVA ORAL: from: Las narrativas y su impacto en el desarrollo lingüístico infantil.
Author(s) Siri Rossana Podestá
Abstract: En México las narraciones no occidentales que circulan en el territorio son incalculables y su valor radica en que son parte de la idiosincrasia indoamericana que ha trasgredido la barrera del olvido, del castigo, del descrédito de las creencias de la sociedad dominante sobre los pueblos indios. Son parte del bagaje que forma la praxis de resistencia para seguir luchando por conservar sus cosmovisiones. Los niños son el mejor termómetro de la vitalidad de estas culturas, porque si reparamos en lo que ellos conocen, sabremos qué tanto persiste este mundo, para otros “mágico, increíble, salvaje”. La gran pregunta es ¿cómo

LA REFERENCIA A LOS PARTICIPANTES EN NARRACIONES DE NIÑOS CON DISLEXIA Y NIÑOS SIN DISLEXIA from: Las narrativas y su impacto en el desarrollo lingüístico infantil.
Author(s) López Paula Gómez
Abstract: Es bien sabido que no hay un acuerdo general sobre la definición de dislexia, sin embargo, en sus diversas concepciones pueden encontrarse características comunes. En este trabajo, entendemos la dislexia como una dificultad en el proceso de aprendizaje de la lectura y la escritura (Monfort 2004, p. 348; Nieto 1995, p. 19). Se trata de un problema en la expresión de la comunicación escrita que se manifiesta en el empobrecimiento de las funciones lectoras (Bravo 1997, p. 37). Este problema abarca también el nivel textual. Por ejemplo, se han registrado problemas en los textos narrativos escritos por niños hispanohablantes con

Book Title: La historia intelectual como historia literaria (coedición)- Publisher: El Colegio de México
Author(s): Schmidt-Welle Friedhelm
Abstract: El presente libro reúne una serie de artículos que se ocupan de la historia intelectual en Hispanoamérica desde la independencia hasta fines del siglo XX. El volumen tiene un marcado enfoque en la historia intelectual de Argentina y México. Partimos de la idea de que la historia intelectual en Hispanoamérica no se puede escribir sin tomar en cuenta tanto el rol que los escritores juegan en ella como también la función de sus textos estrictamente literarios o ficcionales. En otras palabras: añadimos a la historia intelectual hispanoamericana la perspectiva de reescribirla como historia literaria.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19631g7

ENTRE AMÉRICA Y EUROPA: DOS FORMAS DE ENTENDER AMÉRICA LATINA from: La historia intelectual como historia literaria (coedición)
Author(s) Zeiter Katja Carrillo
Abstract: Cuando en 1924 y 1925 Rojas y Vasconcelos publican los dos textos que a continuación se analizarán, tanto la sociedad argentina como la mexicana se vieron confrontadas con situaciones políticas marcadas por cambios que no sólo afectaron los respectivos sistemas políticos, sino también la vida intelectual. La Argentina había vivido una reforma universitaria dando paso a la participación de los estudiantes. Al mismo tiempo, en México, como consecuencia de la Revolución mexicana, entraron nuevos actores en la esfera universitaria, académica y educativa.

Book Title: Timing Canada-The Shifting Politics of Time in Canadian Literary Culture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Huebener Paul
Abstract: From punch clocks to prison sentences, from immigration waiting periods to controversial time-zone boundaries, from Indigenous grave markers that count time in centuries rather than years, to the fact that free time is shrinking faster for women than for men - time shapes the fabric of Canadian society every day, but in ways that are not always visible or logical. In Timing Canada, Paul Huebener draws from cultural history, time-use surveys, political statements, literature, and visual art to craft a detailed understanding of how time operates as a form of power in Canada. Time enables everything we do - as Margaret Atwood writes, "without it we can't live." However, time also disempowers us, divides us, and escapes our control. Huebener transforms our understanding of temporal power and possibility by using examples from Canadian and Indigenous authors - including Jeannette Armstrong, Joseph Boyden, Dionne Brand, Timothy Findley, Lucy Maud Montgomery, Gabrielle Roy, and many others - who witness, question, dismantle, and reconstruct the functioning of time in their works. As the first comprehensive study of the cultural politics of time in Canada, Timing Canada develops foundational principles of critical time studies and everyday temporal literacy, and demonstrates how time functions broadly as a tool of power, privilege, and imagination within a multicultural and multi-temporal nation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1970584

2 Negotiating Subjective Time in a Social World from: Timing Canada
Abstract: Margaret Atwood’s short story “Hack Wednesday” begins by juxtaposing personal and social concerns. The first paragraph introduces Marcia, who is dreaming about her conflicted desire to have another child, while the second paragraph begins, “Downstairs the news is on. Something extra has happened, she can tell by the announcer’s tone of voice, by the heightened energy. A disaster of some kind; that always peps them up. She isn’t sure she’s ready for it.”³ Marcia’s uneasy task of deciding which concerns, the personal or the social, deserve the more prominent place in her mind goes on to form the crux of

3 Reading Time and Social Relations Critically from: Timing Canada
Abstract: “Over the millennia,” writes Christopher Dewdney, “our penchant for technology and abstract thought has helped us to construct an empire of time, a chronological culture within which our lives are scheduled and measured out.”³ While Dewdney’s reference to “our” chronological culture appears to reflect a singular social entity, his use of the phrase “empire of time” also hints at the unequal and divisive nature of normative temporality; like all empires, an empire of time inevitably contains deeply entrenched biases and power divisions. I have discussed some of the ways in which human culture colonizes time, and in particular the ways

Book Title: Our Bodies Are Selves- Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Barreto Susan
Abstract: Our Bodies Are Selves is a look at what it means to be human in a world where medical technology and emerging ethical insight force us to rethink the boundaries of humanity/spirit and man/machine. This book gives us a fresh look at how our expanding biological views of ourselves and our shared evolutionary history shows us a picture that may not always illumine who and where we are as Christians. Offering up Christian theological views of embodiment, the authors give everyday examples of lives of love, faith, and bodily realities that offer the potential to create new definitions of what it means to be a faith community in an increasingly technological age of medicine.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt197059n

1 A New Paradigm: from: Our Bodies Are Selves
Author(s) Pederson Ann Milliken
Abstract: We are exploring a change in how we think and how we relate to our world as we learn to live as embodied persons, engaging our bodies, listening to them, and listening as well to our Christian traditions of faith. We are on a journey: one that begins with the body, traverses several landscapes, and returns to where we started, our bodies now understood in new ways that point to the paradigm shift we seek. We are persuaded that on this journey of accessing our bodies, we are companions along the journey of God’s incarnation in the world.

2 Getting Around: from: Our Bodies Are Selves
Author(s) Hefner Philip
Abstract: For me, it’s all about mobility.¹ Since, until very recently, I was so favored as to be virtually without pain, it’s the challenge of getting around. “Disabled” or “handicapped” are abstractions that take shape for me in what politically correct jargon might call “mobility-challenged.” This is my personal story, not a treatise on disability; I try to avoid generalizations. Not that generalizations shouldn’t be made, but since it is individuals who are struck with infirmity and each one has a distinctive story, abstractions must always be held accountable according to their impact on actual persons. If my story has broader

3 Personal Narrative: from: Our Bodies Are Selves
Author(s) Pederson Ann Milliken
Abstract: Memories can be like paintings in a gallery that we can stroll through, gazing at them and then pausing to examine the details. Or memories can come and go, unexpectedly; they interrupt us in the middle of our story. Suddenly, scenes send us reeling into our past. I can feel those memories in my body when I think about why my knees bother me now almost forty years later from carrying forty-five pound packs up trails in the mountains. Or the tenderness I sense in my hands whenever I try to practice the piano but can’t because of too many

11 The Body of Christ from: Our Bodies Are Selves
Author(s) Pederson Ann Milliken
Abstract: I’ve always wanted to be a part of the body of Christ, but the body of Christ has not always wanted me in it. I grew up in the Lutheran church: attending Sunday school, singing in the choir, and going to camp in the summer. In junior high school, when someone asked me what I wanted to do when I grew up, I could answer: I want to be a pastor. The church, however, did not always inspire my love of the church. In confirmation, our pastor told us to sit in every other seat and we were rarely allowed

Book Title: Studi su Max Weber-1980-2002
Publisher: Quodlibet
Author(s): Bianco Adele
Abstract: Le questioni affrontate nei saggi raccolti in questo volume definiscono il vasto raggio degli interessi teorici di Max Weber e la fitta rete di influenze e rapporti della sua opera con quella di eminenti filosofi quali Rickert, Scheler, Lukács, Heidegger, Gadamer e Ricoeur. Il fulcro comune alle tematiche trattate può considerarsi il processo di razionalizzazione quale caratteristica identitaria, secondo Weber, della cultura occidentale e forza motrice della modernità. Esso trova il suo radicamento nell’antichità, ovvero nel passaggio dalla religiosità magica alla religiosità etica con cui si è avviato il processo di disincanto del mondo. Al tramonto di qualsiasi forma di assolutizzazione e alla parallela relativizzazione della razionalità si riallaccia uno dei primi temi weberiani discussi nel volume: il politeismo dei valori. Accanto ad esso emergono la teoria dei tipi ideali e la riforma dell’ermeneutica. La costruzione idealtipica, centro nevralgico della metodologia di Weber, è la via da lui tentata di contemperare in un’ardua sintesi intuizione e logica, interpretazione e spiegazione causale. L’attribuzione di una base ermeneutica al metodo della ricerca sociale significa inoltre sottrarre il processo di comprensione e il Verstehen al loro ancoraggio, di ispirazione diltheyana, «nell’immedesimazione simpatetica dell’esperienza vissuta» rendendoli strumento di procedimenti conoscitivi non più basati su soggettivismo e individualismo, ma la cui valenza oggettiva è verificata e garantita dall’intersoggettività.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19dzd84

4 Bodies, Books, and Buildings: from: Chora 7
Author(s) Emmons Paul
Abstract: THE FRONTISPIECE IS AN encounter between reader and book, inhabitant and building, as well as self and other. With the increasing use of personal devices and impresas in the Renaissance, close relationships were reinforced among clothing, books, and buildings.² The word frontispiecewas used in Renaissance England to triply name the human forehead, the illustrated title page of a book, and the pedimented front of a building. Deriving from the Latinfrontispicium,it means literally “looking at the forehead.” In Latin,frōnsis the forehead andspecereis “to look,” later corrupted into English as “piece.”³Frontispicium,as looking at

6 Adrien Auzout and the Origins of the Paris Observatory from: Chora 7
Author(s) Jelaco Ron
Abstract: CLAUDE PERRAULT’S authorship of the east façade of the Louvre has been debated since its earliest years.¹ Curiously, none of that doubt has ever spread to his association with the Paris Observatory, even though the two projects shared nearly every other aspect of their milieu.² Only historian Albert Laprade has ever questioned Perrault’s role as the observatory’s architect, dismissing him by lampooning his woeful architectural skills.³ Subsequent biographers not only have disregarded Laprade and his critique but have declared that Perrault’s design role was inevitable.⁴

8 Silence and Communal Ritual in an Athonian Coenobitic Monastery from: Chora 7
Author(s) Kakalis Christos
Abstract: THIS ESSAY STUDIES conditions of silence in the Gregoriou monastery at Mount Athos, a mountainous peninsula in northeastern Greece, a unesco World Heritage Site since 1988, and one of the most important contemporary pilgrimage sites. My fieldwork there in 2010–12, supported by secondary sources, notes how the community faces challenges to preserve the silence that is needed for its ascetic meditation.¹ The entire monastery is not silent at all times. Rituals performed by the eighty monks sometimes occur in the open spaces, temporarily breaking the silence with planned religious messages. Meanwhile, visitors often intrude on the monastery’s religious atmosphere.

9 The Language of the Street: from: Chora 7
Author(s) Nelson Robert
Abstract: THERE IS MUCH CONTENTION over the design and regulation of streets: what kind of buildings and businesses are allowed along them, how many vehicles and what type, how much their spaces afford cultural capital and create friendly pedestrian precincts, and what rights a citizen has to the space and even the sunlight.¹ There are also fervent environmental debates about the regulation of urban density, as sprawling automotive cities consume great amounts of fossil fuel. These debates consider what kinds of amenity or conservation should rise to priority, and therefore what kinds of streets a community will accept.²

14 The Architecture of Anselm Kiefer: from: Chora 7
Author(s) Wischer Stephen
Abstract: BECAUSE ART AND ARCHITECTURE SINCE the eighteenth century typically have been understood as specialized and separate, elucidating relationships between the German artist Anselm Kiefer’s creation at La Ribaute and modern architectural practice may seem precarious. Yet, having recently visited Kiefer’s former home and studio, I will argue that his integration of painting, sculpture, photography, bookmaking, and construction at La Ribaute pursues the fundamental task of architecture. Kiefer’s creations rely on a poetic form of making that disregards conventional art historical categories and reveals significant connections with architectural origins. It should not be surprising that an artist who is so concerned

Book Title: Performance and Personhood in Caribbean Literature-From Alexis to the Digital Age
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Murray-Román Jeannine
Abstract: Focusing on the literary representation of performance practices in anglophone, francophone, and hispanophone Caribbean literature, Jeannine Murray-Román shows how a shared regional aesthetic emerges from the descriptions of music, dance, and oral storytelling events. Because the historical circumstances that led to the development of performance traditions supersede the geopolitical and linguistic divisions of colonialism, the literary uses of these traditions resonate across the linguistic boundaries of the region. The author thus identifies the aesthetic that emerges from the act of writing about live arts and moving bodies as a practice that is grounded in the historically, geographically, and culturally specific features of the Caribbean itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19jchc5

3 From Spectator to Participant: from: Performance and Personhood in Caribbean Literature
Abstract: As we have seen in Chamoiseau’s and James’s novels, observing how witnesses of a performance event are impacted by it is an important tool for writers to describe the significance of performance. Two reasons this strategy works particularly well for Caribbean representations of social performance are that first, audience members form the circle with their bodies, presence, and attention; and second, any audience member is a potential participant, to return to Marlene NourbeSe Philip’s encapsulation, “you crossing from looking to dancing and back again to looking” (152). This chapter focuses on the role of audience members in creating the dance

Coda from: Performance and Personhood in Caribbean Literature
Abstract: Performance and Personhood in Caribbean Literatureis about Fanon’sdamnésand how social performance can function as a site for rehearsing self-possession. The texts examined here underscore the socioeconomic conditions and philosophical grounds that have led to their protagonists’ exclusion from the body politic. They also highlight the interruptions to those conditions in the moments to which I have turned our attention, the ekphrastic descriptions of performance events that break from the plots of the texts in order to inform them. In the breaks, they depict the spaces where the distended time of performance both ruptures and extends the present

Book Title: Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"-Text, Image, Reception
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Huot Sylvia
Abstract: The Romance of the Rosehas been a controversial text since it was written in the thirteenth century. There is evidence for radically different readings as as early as the first half of the fourteenth century. The text provided inspiration for both courtly and didactic poets. Some read it as a celebration of human love; others as an erudite philosophical work; still others as a satirical representation of social and sexual follies. On one hand it was praised as an edifying treatise, on the other condemned as lascivious and misogynistic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19jcj20

Introduction: from: Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) Huot Sylvia
Abstract: The Romance of the Roseis generally recognized as the single most significant work in the Old French literary tradition. Written between 1225 and 1275, theRose’s success among medieval readers was extraordinary: well over two hundred manuscripts are extant, dating from a period of nearly three hundred years. Its influence was pervasive in late-medieval works both in and outside France. By the close of the fourteenth century, it had been translated into Italian, into Dutch, and into English. It was one of the only medieval vernacular texts to be cited and glossed in learnèd monastic treatises. Furthermore, its influence

13. Feminine Rhetoric and the Politics of Subjectivity: from: Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) Patterson Lee
Abstract: If the Middle Ages is a culture of the book, then for vernacular writers its central text is the Roman de la Rose: to trace theRoman’sinfluence is virtually to write the history of late-medieval poetry. And of no writer is this more true than Geoffrey Chaucer. When about 1385 Eustache Deschamps praised Chaucer as a “grant translateur,” he was referring, we may surmise, to more than the Chaucerian authorship of an EnglishRomaunt of the Rose(although whether the one that survives is Chaucer’s is less certain).¹ For in saying that it was Chaucer who first “planted the

3 Postwar Fascinations from: Heidegger in France
Abstract: It is not surprising that Liberation was not solely political, but cultural as well, and that the Sartre bomb was not the only one to explode at the time of an intense intellectual turmoil, amidst a joyous confusion. Sartre himself noted and deplored that existentialism, transformed into a fashion, became a word that “has been so stretched and has taken on so broad a meaning, that it no longer means anything at all.”¹ Existentialism had almost become a slogan, whose meaning was no longer clear. “At St. Germain des Prés, the language of that time was taking shape and so

7 Dissemination or Reconstruction? from: Heidegger in France
Abstract: The years that led from the events of 1968 to the death of the Master in 1976 cannot be characterized in one way. On the contrary, the French reception of Heidegger split up into different, if not contradictory, camps. The appropriation of his thinking became dogmatic in each camp, each closing in upon itself; marginalizations, and indeed, excommunications, proliferated. In acknowledging this dissemination, we are not forgetting what this allusion to the title of Jacques Derrida’s book (which appeared in 1972) connotes:¹ threads become woven with more specialized research and with Heidegger’s most difficult, ambitious, and inapparent themes; one should

9 The Letter and the Spirit from: Heidegger in France
Abstract: Following a sixty-year delay after the original publication of Sein und Zeit, two complete French translations ofSein und Zeitfinally appeared in 1985 and 1986. How could this not be surprising? As far as the delay itself is concerned, it was rooted in (but not completely justified by) a series of coincidences. We have seen that Corbin’s volume was the only thing available at that time; later, the war and Liberation were not conducive to long-drawn-out work; the Louvain pair of de Waehlens and Boehm translated the first forty-four paragraphs incredibly slowly and finally published them with Gallimard in

12 At the Crossroads from: Heidegger in France
Abstract: Our story having reached its chronological end, that is to say, the end of the twentieth century, it would be possible and tempting to draw some lessons and already reach some conclusions. It seemed to us, however, that the work would be incomplete and would leave the reader particularly frustrated if we were not able to stop and cast a careful glance at the landscape we have crossed after this long journey. A philosophical accounting? This is indeed what we should attempt, not without being aware of the limits of the word “accounting,” since we will never manage to establish

Éliane Escoubas: from: Heidegger in France
Author(s) Escoubas Éliane
Abstract: After passing the Agrégation, my first class at the Toulouse Lycée for young women in the fall of 1963 was an introduction to philosophy course devoted to What Is Called Thinking?

Jean-Luc Nancy: from: Heidegger in France
Author(s) Nancy Jean-Luc
Abstract: My moorings are straightforward enough. I knew nothing about Heidegger until, perhaps, 1961. I’d never heard of him before; I was a khâgnestudent in Toulouse, then at Louis-le-Grand, and Lakanal. None of the teachers mentioned him. The year at Lakanal I met François Warin, since he lived in Sceaux.

2 Christina Stead: from: Contemporary Australian Literature
Abstract: In the early 1970s, when Les Murray wrote Poems Against Economics, it was axiomatic that he was writing them against leftist economics.¹ To be economic then was to speak of the left. The right was irrelevant, so much so that inThe Liberal Imagination, Lionel Trilling could write that the “sole intellectual tradition” of the United States was of the left.² A generation later, any Australian poet writingPoems Against Economicswould have been assumed to be opposing neoliberalism and by extension the right. Murray’s positioning of poetry against economics was part of his early aesthetics, which privileged literary language,

5 The Ludicrous Pageant: from: Contemporary Australian Literature
Abstract: If globalisation can lead to hype and inequality in literary reception, as shown in the previous chapter, the two earlier chapters, on Stead and Harrower, have shown that there can be no return to the deadlocked reassurances of late modernity. One cannot, in other words, simply lament the free market and indulge in a nostalgic wish for the era of the welfare state; that era, even if it was better than Stead and Harrower unsparingly show it to be, is gone forever. Instead, I am proposing that, rather than any sort of polemical antidote to neoliberalism, the solution to the

5 Friedrich Schleiermacher from: Lex Crucis
Abstract: At mid-morning on November 21, 1797, the group of friends gathered outside the studious young hospital chaplain’s door. Bade to enter, they swarmed in, bearing with them food and gifts to fete their host’s birthday. Friedrich Daniel Ernst Schleiermacher was turning twenty-nine. Almost thirty, they teasingly chided him, and he had not yet published a book. Within a year, Schleiermacher set about to meet their challenge. The upshot, On Religion: Speeches To Its Cultured Despisers,¹ made an immediate splash, launching Schleiermacher into the public spotlight in the Prussian capital. In the long term, it initiated a new epoch in Western

Book Title: Ways of the Word-Learning to Preach for Your Time and Place
Publisher: Augsburg Fortres
Author(s): Powery Luke A.
Abstract: Preaching, and the discipline of preaching, is at a crossroads. The changing realities of church and theological education, the diversity of our classrooms, and our increasingly complex community contexts leave us in search of tools to help train a rising generation of preachers for a future whose contours are far from clear. In Ways of the Word, a dynamic team of master preachers, Sally A. Brown and Luke A. Powery, speaks with one voice their belief that preaching is a witness to the ongoing work of God in the world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19qgg2f

Introduction from: Ways of the Word
Author(s) Powery Luke A.
Abstract: Every book has its backstory. It can be difficult to pinpoint where that backstory begins; but it is safe to say that this one began in an e-mail exchange. Picture two preacher-homileticians hammering on their computer keyboards in offices some 150 yards apart on an East Coast seminary campus: “We could do this—a new textbook” // “right—tapping into our traditions, Baptist-Pentecostal/Reformed—and crossing race and gender too” // “for changing classroom demographic?” // “right!” //”Spirit-driven” // “yes” // “you serious?” // “of course.”

1 The Spirit-Animated Event of Preaching from: Ways of the Word
Author(s) Powery Luke A.
Abstract: Preaching is risky business. It is risky because, frankly, its divine aims are impossible to achieve, humanly speaking. There is no set of rules any of us can follow, no book we can read (this one included), that guarantees that when you step up to a pulpit and open your mouth, the words that reach listeners will be a word that is God’s own. We can speak with consummate rhetorical skill of things theological, but only God’s animating Spirit makes our preaching a life-transforming, world-changing message.

4 Preaching as an Act of Worship from: Ways of the Word
Author(s) Brown Sally A.
Abstract: As any naturalist would tell us, if we want to understand how a living creature normally functions, we need to observe it in its natural habitat. Something similar is true of preaching. There are undoubtedly people whose lives have been transformed by a sermon they picked up on the car radio while driving across Texas or stumbled upon while searching the Internet for a long-lost friend. But a stand-alone sermon, like a single shot from a film, is lifted out of its native setting. In this chapter we consider preaching in relation to its natural context, Christian worship.

6 Interpreting Scripture for Preaching from: Ways of the Word
Author(s) Brown Sally A.
Abstract: Scripture has been the indispensable, authorizing source of Christian sermons since Christianity’s beginnings. The sermons of Peter, Stephen, and Paul in Acts all draw on Old Testament texts. The book of Hebrews, thought by some to be a collection of early Christian sermons, draws on material across the Old Testament, especially the Psalms. This chapter provides you with a disciplined, prayerful, and scholarly process for engaging Scripture. Exegetical work (close grammatical, historical, and theological study of a text) is supported in this method by meditative Scripture reading using the centuriesold process called lectio divina(“divine reading”).

10 Preaching and Christian Formation from: Ways of the Word
Author(s) Brown Sally A.
Abstract: Signs point to businesses and human-service enterprises throughout the four levels of the complex. There is a daycare center here for children, a community center with programs for grade-school age kids and senior adults, a couple of cafés,

6 Overcoming Ethical Abstraction: from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) de Graaff Guido
Abstract: It appears there is little scope for establishing the true nature and extent of Bonhoeffer’s influence on Hauerwas since there are few places where the latter explicitly engages with the former. In Hauerwas’s recent memoir, Hannah’s Child(2010), Bonhoeffer is barely mentioned; Karl Barth and John Howard Yoder, by contrast, are credited several times for shaping his thinking.¹ Indeed, Bonhoeffer’s name does not appear even once in Hauerwas’s seminal workThe Peaceable Kingdom(1983)—not even in the section entitled “On What I Owe to Whom” at the beginning of the book.²

10 God, Christ, and Church in the DDR—Wolf Krötke as an Interpreter of Bonhoeffer’s Theology from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Ziegler Philip G.
Abstract: Bonhoeffer lived out much of his theological existence in eastern Germany. He was a man of wide international and ecumenical vision. Yet, between his birth in Breslau (now Wroclaw, Poland) in 1906 and his terminal imprisonment in Berlin in 1943–45, the better part of Bonheoffer’s life and work had its centre of gravity in the historic Prussian city of Berlin and the eastern German provinces of Silesia, Brandenburg, and Pomerania. It was at the behest of the Old Prussian Union Council of Brethren that he led the illegal Confessing Church seminary at Zingst/Finkenwalde and subsequent collective pastorates in “the

12 Dietrich Bonhoeffer and Gerhard Ebeling: from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Frick Peter
Abstract: Dietrich Bonhoeffer met Gerhard Ebeling, a fellow Berliner, for the first time at the underground Finkenwalde Seminary of the Confessing Church during the fourth theological course in the winter of 1936–37. It took Bonhoeffer very little time to realize that Ebeling was an exceptionally gifted theological thinker; it is fair to say that Bonhoeffer discovered the theological genius in Ebeling. On his own initiative, Bonhoeffer wrote to Martin Albertz, superintendent of the Confessing Church responsible for theological education, to recommend Ebeling for further theological education, stating: “I consider him to be an extraordinarily gifted and capable scholar and theologian…

INTRODUCCIÓN. from: José Gaos en México:
Abstract: Literatura e historia con frecuencia se entrecruzan, dibujando constelaciones asombrosas. Así también la biografía de J.M. Coetzee ofrece valiosas lecciones a quien decida incursionar en este género. Novelas, ensayos, cuadernos de apuntes y entrevistas sostenidas con personas allegadas constituyeron las fuentes con que el autor, un estudioso inglés, reconstruyó la vida de quien recibiera el Premio Nobel de las Letras hace más de una década. En tanto etapa de gestación y crisol de su trayectoria posterior, un momento en particular —aquel que dividió juventud y edad madura— fue el periodo elegido como objeto de estudio. Las dudas, sin embargo, surgen

3 EL HIJO DE SATURNO from: José Gaos en México:
Abstract: Buen aprendiz es quien sabe extraer enseñanzas de las experiencias, no sólo de las propias sino también de las ajenas. En ese proceso de transmisión se va entretejiendo el flujo de las generaciones que, al apropiarse el pasado, le confieren un sentido útil para la vida, tal como preconizaba Nietzsche.¹ Desde esa perspectiva fue inmejorable la disposición con que José Gaos se entregó al aprendizaje y asimiló las lecciones que le ofrecían, generosos, maestros pretéritos y contemporáneos. Con el fin de asegurar que su estancia en ultramar fuera a la vez provechosa y placentera, este ávido alumno elaboró un “Decálogo

10 EL SILENCIO DE LOS LIBROS from: José Gaos en México:
Abstract: En la palabra escrita se cifra una obsesión que desde antiguo acompaña al hombre: la voluntad de dejar, tras de sí, un rastro indeleble de su paso por el mundo. Para nosotros, amanuenses de la trascendencia, la historia ha inventado inmensos cementerios de papel, sobre cuyas lápidas se inscribe una segunda muerte, la de la letra que perece al descomponerse la carne. Existe una forma, sin embargo, de escapar a aquellas fosas profundas. La clave se encuentra en lo que Hugo Hiriart, siguiendo a Fernando Pessoa, identificó como el “arte de perdurar”. “El artista —señala— apuesta a la perduración aunque

11 LA LENGUA ABSUELTA from: José Gaos en México:
Abstract: “¡Pobre traductor!”, exclamaba Eugenio Ímaz en un artículo publicado en 1950. No tanto las estrecheces materiales, cuanto la eterna insatisfacción con su trabajo, constituía la auténtica miseria de aquellos nobles mediadores entre idiomas y culturas. Un leve desliz, alguna variante léxica o cierta omisión en los matices bastaban para que el oprobio cayera sobre cientos de páginas traducidas con esmero y precisión. ¿Cómo encontrar en cada caso el equivalente certero, siendo que las lenguas se intersectan sin corresponderse del todo? ¿Cómo evitar los yerros y las inexactitudes, cuando el régimen editorial moderno exige trasvasar a toda prisa un grueso volumen

14 LA EDUCACIÓN SENTIMENTAL from: José Gaos en México:
Abstract: “Toda vida —escribió José Ortega y Gasset— es secreto y jeroglífico. De aquí que la biografía sea siempre albur de la intuición. No hay método seguro para acertar con la clave arcana de una existencia ajena.”¹ No le faltaba razón. En la pregunta por el Otro radica el motor de nuestros pasos, el impulso que nos arroja al mundo y, por lo tanto, la fuente de todo conocimiento. Pero la pregunta queda sin respuesta, dado que en el espejo de la alteridad encontramos, una y otra vez, nuestro mismo reflejo. Hay algunos hombres, sin embargo, que permiten penetrar lo insondable,

EPÍLOGO. from: José Gaos en México:
Abstract: No siempre se tiene la fortuna de morir como se vive. Los accidentes, la enfermedad o una decisión equivocada son capaces de distorsionar una existencia y, por el contrario, no se ha probado que al rufián esté vedado expirar en pacífico sueño. Pero además de no regirse por principios justicieros, la muerte puede ser tiránica, no sólo en el sentido evidente de que a nadie perdona, sino en que tiende a disolver matices y a igualar el pasado. Como el pecador que se arrepiente al momento de exhalar el último suspiro, anulando en un gesto cualquier tropiezo previo, en algunos

Foreword from: Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: The title of this work comes from a closing line in Heidegger’s Being and Time. He is speaking of the future of phenomenology as a promise of things to come—a sentiment already anticipated in an opening claim of the book: “In phenomenology possibility stands higher than actuality.”¹ For Heidegger this spelled a revolutionary reversal of the old metaphysical paradigm of being as presence, substance, and act and a radical openness to new kinds of questioning.

Book Title: The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Jones Jude
Abstract: The Varieties of Transcendence traces American pragmatist thought on religion and its relevance for theorizing religion today. The volume establishes pragmatist concepts of religious individualization as powerful alternatives to the more common secularization discourse. In stressing the importance of Josiah Royce's work, it emphasizes religious individualism's compatibility with community. At the same time, by covering all of the major classical pragmatist theories of religion, it shows their kinship and common focus on the interrelation between the challenges of contingency and the semiotic significance of transcendence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19rm9gf

INSOMNIA ON A MORAL HOLIDAY: from: The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion
Author(s) Pihlström Sami
Abstract: This chapter will examine the relation between religion and morality from a pragmatist point of view, focusing on the fundamental importance of a certain kind of attitude toward the reality of evil and suffering based on Jamesian pragmatism. My discussion differs from many other treatments of pragmatist philosophy of religion and moral philosophy due to what might be called its “via negativa” methodology. I am not trying to positively characterize, or to interpret James’s characterizations of, such notions as the “good life,” the “goods,” or “fruits” of religious life and religious experiences—even though I do regard (Jamesian) pragmatism as

EXPRESSIVE THEISM: from: The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion
Author(s) Polke Christian
Abstract: Personalism, like pragmatism, is a new name for same old ways of thinking.”¹ It was no mere accident when Albert C. Knudson, upcoming dean of the Boston Divinity School, opened his 1927 major work, The Philosophy of Personalism, with the famous subtitle of William James’s Lowell lectures on pragmatism. Using the phrase from the perhaps best-known American philosopher of his day rather gave him the audience he wanted for presenting his own program of philosophical personalism. Of course, Knudson only represented one version of personalism, but James was also just one member of the pragmatist family. What both had in

A BRIEF HISTORY OF THEOSEMIOTIC: from: The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion
Author(s) Raposa Michael L.
Abstract: “Theosemiotic” is a word that I coined more than twenty years ago to serve as a label for Charles Peirce’s distinctive worldview (in which he perceived the world as “God’s great poem”), as well as to identify his philosophical method for addressing religious questions or understanding religious beliefs and experiences.¹ I use the word now, more generally, to identify an ongoing, constructive project in philosophical theology. That project is deeply rooted in the history of ideas, Peirce’s thought and also that of others, and such historical considerations are the focus of my attention here.

AVOIDING THE DICHOTOMY OF “EITHER THE INDIVIDUAL OR THE COLLECTIVITY”: from: The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion
Author(s) Nagl Ludwig
Abstract: When studied carefully, Royce’s mature thought—in general, as well as in the field of his philosophy of religion—has the potential to stimulate interest in ideas that, in a narrowly professionalized discourse, tend to be out of sight today. By learning from James’s explorations of religious experience, and by critically reassessing and redimensioning James’s pragmatism in a “Peirceanized” manner,¹ Royce develops a community-oriented, postdialectically dialectical,² semiotically informed, “reflective” theory of interpretation. This theory is of relevance not only to contemporary philosophical discourse in general but to any attempt to rethink (in the age of progressive individualization and commodification) the

Chapter 3 The Cartographic Turn and American Literary Studies: from: Turns of Event
Author(s) BRÜCKNER MARTIN
Abstract: A survey of literary studies reveals a relatively sudden and now widespread fascination with all things cartographic. According to the MLA International Bibliography, published essay and book titles using the word “map” and its variants increased exponentially over the past forty years. Before 1990, a total of 503 titles used the terms “map” or “mapping.” After 1990, the enthusiasm for using “ map” as the defining label grew by a factor of three (Figure 3.1). Between 2001 and 2010 the search term “map*” identified over 1,400 titles in books, essays, collections, and dissertations. A fifth of these titles—281 to

Chapter 4 Twists and Turns from: Turns of Event
Author(s) CASTIGLIA CHRISTOPHER
Abstract: It is possible that the reason so many “turns” can be claiming to change the field is, ironically, because they are not really changing much at all, but instead shifting the same methodologies and attitudes from one object (or “ideology”) to another. One sign that this might be the case is the increasing number of critics wondering about the contemporary viability of “critique,” shorthand for the righteous digging around in a text for hidden displacements of the social struggles that evade all but the politically savvy and serious critic. Critiques of critique might lead us to wonder whether what we

Chapter 7 The Caribbean Turn in C19 American Literary Studies from: Turns of Event
Author(s) GOUDIE SEAN X.
Abstract: The year 1992 was the quincentennial anniversary of the moment when Columbus’s ill-fated voyage to the Indies took an unplanned West Indian turn. The anniversary of the year when the Caribbean became the original site in the hemisphere of Native American genocide, of the enslavement of captured Africans and their descendants, and of European colonialism and settlement coincides with, and bears an indirect relation to, what this essay argues was a Caribbean turn in nineteenth-century American literary and cultural studies. While no single anniversary or critic or event, we shall see, is responsible for generating such a turn, this chapter’s

Book Title: Local Church, Global Church- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): YOUNG JULIA G.
Abstract: This important volume investigates the many forms of Catholic activism in Latin America between the 1890s and 1962 (from the publication of the papal encyclical Rerum Novarum to the years just prior to the Second Vatican Council). It argues that this period saw a variety of lay and clerical responses to the social changes wrought by industrialization, political upheavals and mass movements, and increasing secularization. Spurred by these local developments as well as by initiatives from the Vatican, and galvanized by national projects of secular state-building, Catholic activists across Latin America developed new ways of organizing in order to effect social and political change within their communities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19rmckz

CHAPTER 8 Catholic Campuses, Secularizing Struggles: from: Local Church, Global Church
Author(s) Snider Colin M.
Abstract: When university students in Brazil’s Catholic University Youth (Juventude Universitária Católica, or JUC) movement tried to define their mission in 1956, they proclaimed that, while social issues were important, the organization’s focus would continue to be “evangelization,” even while also addressing social inequalities. These efforts at evangelization alongside social reform among university youth in Brazil in the late 1950s and early 1960s preceded similar official changes in the Catholic Church with Vatican II (1962–1965) and the Bishops’ Conference in Medellín in 1968. By the end of 1966, Catholic activism faced a very different context. The church abolished the JUC

CHAPTER 9 The Antigonish Movement of Canada and Latin America: from: Local Church, Global Church
Author(s) LeGrand Catherine C.
Abstract: Throughout Latin America during the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, Catholics drew inspiration from political and social movements, as well as philosophical inquiries, from the rest of the Catholic world. Latin American Catholic activists sought to implement these foreign practices while, at the same time, adapting them and improvising changes that would make more sense in the local context. One of the most successful examples of this transnational interchange and adaptation occurred between Latin American Catholic activists and a little known but highly influential social movement in the Catholic Scots-Irish region of eastern Nova Scotia.

FINAL REFLECTIONS from: Local Church, Global Church
Author(s) Young Julia G.
Abstract: A flawed teleology exists in the historiography of Catholic activism in Latin America. In this narrative the Catholic Church before the Second Vatican Council was conservative, preservationist, concerned with its institutional interests as opposed to the plight of the poor, and fundamentally antimodern. It was a church in captivity, chained by its own elite-centered interests, ignorant of its call to shepherd the People of God. The history of the church, in essence, was progressing from captivity to liberation: the Second Vatican Council and its Latin American interpretation, the Conference of Latin American Bishops at Medellín in 1968 was the turning

Book Title: Husserl's Missing Technologies- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): IHDE DON
Abstract: Husserl's Missing Technologies looks at the early-twentieth-century "classical" phenomenology of Edmund Husserl, both in the light of the philosophy of science of his time, and retrospectively at his philosophy from a contemporary "postphenomenology." Of central interest are his infrequent comments upon technologies and especially scientific instruments such as the telescope and microscope. Together with his analysis of Husserl, Don Ihde ventures through the recent history of technologies of science, reading and writing, and science praxis, calling for modifications to phenomenology by converging it with pragmatism. This fruitful hybridization emphasizes human-technology interrelationships, the role of embodiment and bodily skills, and the inherent multistability of technologies. In a radical argument, Ihde contends that philosophies, in the same way that various technologies contain an ever-shortening obsolescence, ought to have contingent use-lives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19x3jd4

1 Where Are Husserl’s Technologies? from: Husserl's Missing Technologies
Abstract: In what sense are technologies missing from Husserl? In a first, very ordinary sense, they are mostly missing from his writings. He infrequently refers to what today we would call technologies, and in this sense one has to conclude that they do not

2 Husserl’s Galileo Needed a Telescope! from: Husserl's Missing Technologies
Abstract: This chapter is a look at Husserl’s explicit philosophy of science in the light of contemporary analyses of science in practice. The Crisis,published in 1936, was his last major publication on this topic. Yet it takes very little imagination to realize that since 1936, epochal changes have occurred in both the sciences and the interpretations of science, including philosophy of science.

5 Dewey and Husserl: from: Husserl's Missing Technologies
Abstract: Phenomenology as a twentieth-century philosophy has since its classical beginnings been portrayed as a subjective philosophy and frequently claimed to be antiscience. I argue that both characterizations are false or distortions of phenomenology, and so a modification of classical phenomenology is needed, and that is postphenomenology. This chapter follows that trajectory in a somewhat different way. The late twentieth century began to see two science paradigm shifts in the Kuhnian sense. The first was a revival and renewal of interest in consciousness and the other, often closely related, in animal studies. Here I interweave these two contemporary movements to a

Al di là di Schmitt: from: Vita, politica, contingenza
Author(s) Berlanga José Luis Villacañas
Abstract: Parlare di antropologia politica significa parlare di Schmitt, cioè dell’importante differenza amico/nemico, e riflettere su questa distinzione e sulle sue caratteristiche. Prima di tutto, dobbiamo chiederci se questa differenza può riguardare solo l’individuo nella sua singolarità o se può trascenderlo acquisendo una dimensione condivisa e comune. In realtà, ci riferiamo a un passaggio che Schmitt non spiega bene. Come si evidenzia nell’ Antropologia Collinsdi Kant, l’esistenza umana è l’individualità assoluta¹. La differenza amico/nemicopubbliconon riguarda soltanto il soggetto in sé, ma anche la forma esistenziale di un gruppo, di un potere avallato da un popolo, qualcosa di cui è

Che vita è? from: Vita, politica, contingenza
Author(s) D’Andrea Dimitri
Abstract: La politica al servizio della vita è un fenomeno esclusivamente moderno¹ ed è anche il luogo in cui la modernità mostra, meglio che altrove, le sue caratteristiche costitutive e la sua traiettoria evolutiva. La modernità debutta con la trasformazione del cosmoinmondo, con l’avvento dell’immagine nominalistica del mondo come totalità priva di senso fatta di enti singolari e con l’individuazione dellaconservazione della vitacome unico terreno possibile – comune in quanto neutro e indifferente ai fini – per la costruzione della convivenza pacifica in società. Fino a tutto il Novecento, questa immagine del mondo (Wetlbild) ha convissuto in

Alle radici dell’unità politica: from: Vita, politica, contingenza
Author(s) Segreto Viviana
Abstract: Una dissolvenza che consente alle differenze, ormai sfumate, di rischiarare una comunità in cui identificare la propria uguaglianza, in cui il singolo è con i molti; perde sé per guadagnare il diritto di stare insieme agli altri, e lo fa nella forma dell’esercizio di

Pollyanna postumana desidera morire. from: Vita, politica, contingenza
Author(s) Bernini Lorenzo
Abstract: La governamentalità biopolitica neoliberale assembla operatività incoerenti che vincolano gli umani uno all’altro con la forza di un doppio legame¹, quasi il patto sociale fosse stato stretto da una moltitudine di schizofrenici. Nei celebri corsi al Collège de Francedegli anni 1977-1979 a essa dedicati², Foucault sosteneva che tale tecnologia di potere consista di procedure al tempo stesso totalizzanti (biopolitiche) e individualizzanti (disciplinari). Non dissimilmente dal pastorato della Chiesa cattolica di cui è erede, la biopolitica agisce infattiomnes et singulatim³: assicura sopravvivenza, sicurezza e benessere all’intera popolazione prendendosi cura in modo differenziale di ogni singolo umano vivente che la

Il fallimento del neoliberalismo e la rifeudalizzazione from: Vita, politica, contingenza
Author(s) De Carolis Massimo
Abstract: Vorrei provare a esporre, in queste pagine, le linee generali di un progetto di ricerca che ha l’obiettivo di inscrivere la recente parabola del neoliberalismo in una cornice più ampia: quella della crisi complessiva della civiltà moderna, le cui prime registrazioni e diagnosi, in filosofia, risalgono ormai a più di un secolo fa. Dal momento che il progetto ruota essenzialmente intorno a tre ipotesi, vorrei per prima cosa presentarle tutte brevemente, in rapida successione, per passare in un secondo momento ad analizzarne ciascuna singolarmente, in modo un po’ più dettagliato.

Book Title: Formas de hispanidad- Publisher: Editorial Universidad del Rosario
Author(s): OCHOA PAULINE
Abstract: En este libro el lector encontrará estudios con enfoques desde la ciencia política la teoría política la historia la filosofía la sociología la economía los estudios literarios y culturales entre otras perspectivas académicas. Los aportes de cada aproximación teórica y disciplinar están orientados al logro de una meta común: la de reconstruir y reinterpretar la tradición histórica hispánica desmantelando prejuicios ideológicamente provocados con el fin de comprender los fenómenos políticos que la caracterizan. Por las mismas razones este libro se sitúa en el debate sobre las formas de escritura de la historia que no es sólo un debate de teoría de la historia sino también de filosofía de lo histórico. El libro presenta siete temas claves: el mundo sefardí las filosofías políticas hispánicas los lenguajes políticos hispánicos la construcción de las naciones hispánicas las cuestiones de identidad hispánica las formas de la hispanidad en la literatura y el arte y finalmente la educación y la cultura en el mundo hispánico.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b18wz3

Unamuno: from: Formas de hispanidad
Author(s) Ribas Pedro
Abstract: Aunque Unamuno expresó en varias ocasiones su deseo y hasta su proyecto de viajar a América, nunca llegó a cumplir este propósito. En 1905 escribe al argentino Manuel Ugarte: “Cada día me interesa más América y me vuelvo más hacia ella. Y ha sido para mí una salvación. Porque he de decírselo a usted sin rebozo; no me considero como escritor nacional y hace tiempo que escribo puesto el ánimo en los pueblos todos de lengua castellana y aun en los demás. Así he hecho mi‘Quijote’”.¹ Ya el año anterior había escrito a su amigo Pedro Jiménez Ilundain y

Miguel Antonio Caro y el Hispanismo from: Formas de hispanidad
Author(s) Sánchez Antolín
Abstract: ¿Qué es “hispanismo”? Si nos atenemos a una primera aproximación o a una definición convencional del término, podríamos entender por tal la afirmación de un modo singular de pensar, de vivir y de expresarse, común a España y a América.¹ De ahí el término, casi sinónimo, de “hispanoamericanismo” por parte de numerosos autores (sobre todo americanos), para expresar la significación trasatlántica del hispanismo. Tampoco es casual que tanto un término como el otro empezaran a consolidarse semánticamente tras la emancipación de las últimas colonias en 1898, en el horizonte de una doble circunstancia. Por una parte, el fin del colonialismo

La hispanidad en Colombia en el siglo XIX. from: Formas de hispanidad
Author(s) Padilla Iván Vicente
Abstract: Ya sea para negarla o para afirmarla, como elemento esencial de la civilización neogranadina, la hispanidad desempeñó un papel importante en el siglo XIX colombiano. Su presencia en la subjetividad de los neogranadinos de la época fue tal que llegó a dividirlos y, sobre todo, los llevó a tomar posiciones radicales frente al legado español. La hispanidad se convirtió en elemento de debates, no sólo cuando se trataba de consolidar la nueva república, sino también a la hora de pensar el carácter nacional. El movimiento libertario exigió un cambio en el régimen político y de manera obvia condujo a una

Un cuerpo político virtuoso: from: Formas de hispanidad
Author(s) Cabrera Marta
Abstract: Thomas Hobbes hacía, en la manera típica de los siglos XVII y XVIII, una detallada correspondencia entre las partes y funciones del cuerpo humano y las partes y funciones del cuerpo político, en los siguientes términos: “[…] gracias al arte se crea ese gran Leviatánque llamamos larepúblicaoEstado(en latíncivitas) que no es sino un hombre artificial”.¹ En otras palabras, el cuerpo político se podía constituir mediante un acto creativo y sería, en consecuencia, un cuerpo coherente, unitario. Este proceso necesariamente incluiría la incorporación/exclusión de otros cuerpos y su resultado final sería la producción de un

La ciencia española. from: Formas de hispanidad
Author(s) Restrepo Mauricio
Abstract: Hacia finales del siglo XIX, la caída del imperio español como potencia colonial ultramarina motivó álgidos debates intelectuales sobre las posibles razones históricas y culturales de su derrota.¹ Artículos de prensa, cartas publicadas, revistas académicas y numerosos libros fueron la arena y el teatro donde se afirmaba y replicaba sobre las culpas de España. Debates que, sin ser los primeros, han dejado también su rastro en algunas ideas autocríticas, y en muchos casos negativas, sobre la cultura hispana.

Capítulo 1 “No estamos con brujería ni hechicería Señor…” from: Fumando mañas.
Abstract: Arriba de la antigua terminal de Las Palmeras, colina que un día fue el último montoncito de casas por el lado occidental de la incontenible ciudad de Medellín, siguió de repente expandiéndose la ciudad: concreto sobre verde y en el medio, recovecos de callejones y mirones, espantos y ladrones. La policía pasa por estas calles accidentadas pero la ley la administran otros. Y las cuadras descuadradas nos ponen no en las avenidas sino en esquinas, extraviados. Por aquí las esquinas son iguales en todos lados, fumaderos de marihuana cada diez cuadras y una plaza cerquita, para el abastecimiento de los

Capítulo 2 Metodologizando mi etnografía from: Fumando mañas.
Abstract: La distinción de la antropología con respecto a la sociología no radica en esa naturaleza “abierta” —dispuesta al diálogo— de la antropología cualitativa frente al cuantitativismo “cerrado” de la sociología, sino en la naturaleza de los sujetos del estudio antropológico —u objetos diría la sociología— y de las fuentes disponibles para estudiarlas. El modelo en ambos casos, se basa en el conocimiento científico, en las pretensiones de objetividad y de generalización a partir de las cuales abordan sus investigaciones.

Capítulo 3 Etnografiar mi metodología from: Fumando mañas.
Abstract: El objetivo del viaje no son climas o paisajes, mercancías o instrumentos, sino aquellas esferas de las acciones y de las motivaciones, de los significados y las explicaciones, donde se supone no la igualdad estática como los antropólogos decimonónicos, sino la comparabilidad y la comunicabilidad que traspasó, incluso, la diferencia cultural más grande. Por esto su adaptación tiene que aspirar a convertirse en interlocutor de aquellos en cuya realidad

Capítulo 1 Cualidad de agencia y potencial de acción en un espacio social caracterizado por la marginalidad from: Fumando mañas.
Abstract: Fundada en el último cuarto del siglo XVII, Medellín se hizo capital del departamento de Antioquia en 1826 (Botero, 1996), pero casi 100 años después, en 1910, ya atraía por su prosperidad económica a muchos campesinos que abandonaron las áreas rurales del departamento por el atractivo centro industrial y comercial en que se constituía “la bella villa”. Entre 1912 y 1918, cerca de 14.000 personas llegaron a Medellín, que para entonces contaba con menos de 70.000 habitantes (Salazar y Jaramillo, 1992). La ciudad se convirtió en un vibrante foco de actividad comercial e industrial, pero la violencia que abarcó desde

Capítulo 1 Al principio Dios creó el cielo y la tierra from: Fumando mañas.
Abstract: H: mi apá nunca fue violento conmigo, sino que mi amá me hacía dar pelas de él. El cuchito salía todos días a la tres de la mañana a coger el bus

La muerte lenta de la democracia en Venezuela from: Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Bejarano Ana María
Abstract: A diferencia de muchos de sus vecinos, que sucumbieron a la oleada de autoritarismo que azotó a América Latina en los años sesenta y setenta, Venezuela se ufanaba de haber mantenido una tradición de estabilidad democrática que duró más de tres décadas. En 1978, al comenzar la tercera ola democratizadora en América Latina, Venezuela (junto con Colombia y Costa Rica) era una de las pocas democracias que había logrado sobrevivir en la región. A finales de los ochenta, sin embargo, empezó a presentar preocupantes síntomas de erosión y decadencia. Luego de ser aclamada como un caso excepcional de desarrollo político

Diez años después: from: Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Arcos Hugo Eduardo Ramírez
Abstract: No es el primer mandatario latinoamericano que ha tenido todo un halo de seguidores incondicionales, sin embargo, han sido pocos los que han podido mantenerse después de someterse a varios procesos electorales y un golpe de Estado restituido por

Reflexiones acerca de los primeros diez años de revolución, socialismo e independencia en Venezuela from: Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) González Germán Puentes
Abstract: Las sociedades diseñan formas de organización y convivencia en función de los problemas que genera su interacción y las soluciones que avizoran. Diez años de mandato del presidente Hugo Rafael Chávez Frías en la República Bolivariana de Venezuela, constituyen un hecho histórico que llama la atención de quienes lo padecen o lo disfrutan y, también, de los estudiosos de la ciencia política y de la administración pública. El caso Chávez, quiérase o no, es un fenómeno político en el ámbito de su propio país, en Latinoamérica y, sin exagerar, en el mundo entero.

Discurso, poder e historia en el pensamiento de Hugo Chávez (1998-2009) from: Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Quiñonez Yessica
Abstract: En este estudio se plantea el análisis del discurso por medio de la expresión política que adquiere. Ello conlleva, en primer lugar, a entender el discurso como una interacción social y no solo como un mecanismo de expresión de ideas, es decir, que los actos del habla —escritos, impresos, audiovisuales, entre otros— no consisten solamente en estructuras de sonidos e imágenes, en formas abstractas de oraciones o complejas estructuras de sentido global o local, sino que es necesario describirlos como acciones sociales que llevan a cabo los usuarios del lenguaje cuando se comunican entre sí, en situaciones sociales y dentro

La estructura aglutinante del poder revolucionario en la Venezuela de Hugo Chávez from: Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) R. Vicente Torrijos
Abstract: Pero eso sería un error ya que, conceptual y materialmente, la estructura simbólica y física del poder conforma una unidad activa y actuante ( una estructura aglutinante en construcción permanente) que sintetiza el origen, la evolución e, incluso, el

La revolución de Chávez: from: Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Sierra Marina
Abstract: Algunas personas aseguran que nada es fortuito, sino que todo es resultado de una serie de eventos encadenados. Parece que esto fue lo que ocurrió para que Hugo Chávez Frías llegara al poder, hace diez años en Venezuela, el país hermano y nuestro socio comercial más importante después de Estados Unidos. Venezuela, antes de Chávez era, en lo político y económico, muy similar a

Avances y retrocesos en la concepción del agua en Venezuela y la gobernanza de las cuencas binacionales from: Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) León Pauline Ochoa
Abstract: La última década ha sido sinónimo de una gran paradoja en la concepción del agua dulce en Venezuela. Siendo un factor de integración social en el ámbito interno, el agua ha actuado como un elemento divisorio en sus relaciones exteriores con Colombia, a pesar de la situación de extrema interdependencia hídrica que une a ambos países. Avances y retrocesos caracterizan así la evolución de la gestión hídrica nacional y binacional por parte del Gobierno venezolano.

Entre el sistema electoral y la coyuntura política en Venezuela from: Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Henao Javier Andrés Flórez
Abstract: El dos de febrero de 2009 el presidente de Venezuela, Hugo Chávez Frías, cumplió diez años de vigencia en el Palacio de Miraflores, celebración que prácticamente empató con la posibilidad que ahora tiene de permanecer en el poder indefinidamente, gracias a la aprobación del referéndum realizado el 15 de febrero de 2009. Al día de hoy, Hugo Chávez se autoproclama como presidente-candidato y se entiende, entonces, que sus actos de gobierno, son también actos de campaña, lo que sin duda pone en desventaja a sus posibles rivales. Parece ser que estos diez años son tan solo el comienzo de la

Diez años de desigualdades de género en el ejercicio de los derechos políticos from: Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Brandler Natalia
Abstract: Ana es una mujer jovial que destila energía. Ataviada de franela y gorra roja, que la identifica como militante del Partido Socialista Unido de Venezuela (PSUV), ha llegado puntual al taller de empoderamiento para mujeres al que fue convocada, después de un trayecto de dos horas en autobús desde su humilde residencia en el municipio Eulalia Buróz, en la región de Barlovento. A su municipio han llegado algunos programas del INAMUJER,¹ y gracias a ellos y al Punto de Encuentro² que opera en su zona, ahora se interesa por los problemas de las mujeres, sin las cuales “no habría revolución

Book Title: Horror and Its Aftermath-Reconsidering Theology and Human Experience
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress
Author(s): Stamper Sally
Abstract: Theological anthropology often brings psychology to bear on the contingent nature of human existence in relationship to God. In this volume, Sally Stamper articulates one modern trajectory of theological recourse to psychology (comprising Schleiermacher, Nietzsche, and Tillich) as the ground on which she brings clinical psychoanalytic theory and early childhood studies into conversation with fundamental questions about the relationship of God to human suffering and its remediation. She develops her argument from the assertions that human experience evolves within an awareness of human vulnerability to profound suffering and that insight into consequent human anxiety is a powerful resource for soteriology, eschatology, and theological anthropology. Stamper narrates this “normative anxiety" by integrating object relations theories of early childhood development and critical readings of literary texts for young children. She gestures toward a new eschatological vision that poses the radical otherness of a transcendent God as key to divine remediation of human suffering, in the process building on Marilyn McCord Adams’s soteriological response to human horror-participation and on Jonathan Lear’s assertion of radical hope in response to catastrophic collapse of cultural resources for making meaning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b3t6sv

1 Camel, Lion, Child: from: Horror and Its Aftermath
Abstract: One of the most haunting theological questions, for believers and theologians alike, asks how we can account for a loving, omniscient, and omnipotent divine creator, given the evil and concomitant suffering that are contingencies of human existence. The broad form of the problem is reflected in a host of specific observations: What kind of God commands a faithful follower to sacrifice his son? How can just people reconcile their proclamation of a just and merciful God with the God who hardens Pharaoh’s heart, ultimately to the point of imposing the death of all firstborns as one of the plagues used

9 Radicalizing Modernity from: Radical Theology
Abstract: I find the article on ‘H.’ rather amusing, since I am just beginning to crawl. Other than as a list of motifs that have been, so to speak, pulled together, the matter would be hard to present. Regarding content, all one could say is that my work aims at radicalizing ancient ontology while at

10 Phenomenology and Theology from: Radical Theology
Abstract: In the very first semester of Heidegger’s five years of teaching in Marburg, in 1923, he participated in Bultmann’s seminar on the ethics of Paul. What began as a working relationship soon led to friendship. When Heidegger left for Freiburg in 1928, the two agreed to address each other using the informal Durather than the formalSie. Despite all the reciprocal fruitfulness of their relationship, the theologian clearly was and remained a theologian while the philosopher was and remained a philosopher. Bultmann did not understand philosophy simply as the handmaiden of theology, nor did Heidegger attempt to subsume theology

4 Resurrection, Life in Divine Plenitude: from: Into the Far Country
Abstract: At the heart of modernity lies a diremption between the rational and the historical, the universal and the particular. Reason confidently calls into doubt the historical enterprise, and so the possibility of a historical ground for truth. The unavailability of the historical, near or far, to the rational subject calls into radical doubt narrative forms that give shape to human life. So it is that G. E. Lessing can axiomatically declare that, “ contingent truths of history can never become the proof of necessary truths of reason.”¹ The historical cannot form a point of departure, for the historical remains in flux,

Book Title: Theology in the Flesh-How Embodiment and Culture Shape the Way We Think about Truth, Morality, and God
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress
Author(s): Sanders John
Abstract: Metaphors and other mental tools are used to reason (not just speak) about God, salvation, truth, and morality. Figurative language structures our theological and moral reasoning in powerful ways. This book uses an approach known as cognitive linguistics to explore the incredibly rich ways our conceptual tools, derived from embodied life and culture, shape the way we understand Christian teachings and practices. The cognitive revolution has generated amazing insights into how human minds make sense of the world. This book applies these insights to the ways Christians think about topics such as God, justice, sin, and salvation. It shows that Christians often share a set of very general ideas but disagree on what the Bible means or the moral stances we should take. It explains why Christians often develop a number of appropriate but sometimes incompatible ways to understand the Bible and various doctrines. It assists Christians in understanding those with whom they disagree. Hopefully, simply better understanding how and why people think the way they do will foster better dialogue and greater humility.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b3t7k7

7 Christian Doctrines from: Theology in the Flesh
Abstract: Thinking about theological topics such as sin and salvation makes use of the ordinary embodied cognitive processes we use every day. There is not a particular area of the brain or specific pattern of brain activity associated with religious experiences. Rather, as Brown and Strawn suggest: “there are a multitude of forms of body and brain activity that can mediate and embody religious experiences and the sense of the presence of God, but any particular brain-body event is experienced as religious or not based on the person’s expectations and ways of understanding their subjective experiences.”¹ The way we understand theology

9 Conceiving God from: Theology in the Flesh
Abstract: Do we have to think of God using human categories? If we do, which characteristics should be attributed to God? Is God more like a person or more like a force, such as gravity? Can we escape anthropomorphism? Is all of our thinking about God metaphorical or is any of it literal? This chapter examines these questions from a cognitive linguistics approach and argues that humans have to use anthropogenic (human originating) and species-specific concepts for God. The real debate is about which concepts various religious communities believe are appropriate for God. The concept of God is a graded category

10 Conclusion from: Theology in the Flesh
Abstract: Human embodiment and culture deeply shape the way we think about topics such as sin, salvation, divine judgment, and the nature of truth. The particular kind of body humans have helps produce ways of thinking about the world that are specific to the human species. The concepts available for humans to understand our experience are deeply dependent upon the particular sort of body we have. We use these mental structures to reason about and understand all of our experiences, including religious ones. Whether we think about God, morality, salvation, or truth, our concepts are anthropogenic.

Book Title: The Mutual Cultivation of Self and Things-A Contemporary Chinese Philosophy of the Meaning of Being
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Meyers Chad Austin
Abstract: Yang Guorong is one of the most prominent Chinese philosophers working today and is best known for using the full range of Chinese philosophical resources in connection with the thought of Kant, Hegel, Marx, and Heidegger. In The Mutual Cultivation of Self and Things, Yang grapples with the philosophical problem of how the complexly interwoven nature of things and being relates to human nature, values, affairs, and facts, and ultimately creates a world of meaning. Yang outlines how humans might live more fully integrated lives on philosophical, religious, cultural, aesthetic, and material planes. This first English translation introduces current, influential work from China to readers worldwide.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b7x4qv

Le petit homme en avance sur l’Histoire: from: Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Scaiola Anna Maria
Abstract: L’affirmation, que nous mentionnons en exergue, fermement énoncée par Aragon¹, se réfère à La Semaine sainte, paru en 1958. Le genre accrédité auquel appartiendrait ce roman de six cent pages est désavoué en tant que fiction déclarée, en tant qu’art du mensonge reposant sur un usage désinvolte de l’Histoire, ou encore en tant que récit ou conte, où se mêlent en un dosage variable la narration, avec ses différents dispositifs, et la reconstruction documentaire des faits, garante de la véridicité historiographique. Le roman historique révèle un régime fictif, tout en revendiquant le respect de la vraisemblance du cadre spatio-temporel et

Je et les autres. from: Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Cordiner Valerio
Abstract: Attendu que l’homme est constitutivement Zωόν πολιτικόν, animal social qui se singularise et s’épanouit en tant qu’espèce dans la seule dimension collective, son développement biologique ne s’accomplit que dans et par le “Nous”, sujet pluriel dont les contours se retracent en principe par rapport à une extériorité – “Ils”, “Eux” – qui, de la nature adverse des origines au capital exploiteur de l’âge moderne, est toujours conçue en termes d’antagonisme. L’arrêt de cette marche communautaire en avant semble être le but poursuivi par des maîtres penseurs fort à la mode qui – bien avant la déroute de 1989 – ont prôné de concert et

Paroles ouvrières, entre mémoire et témoignage from: Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Bertoni Annalisa
Abstract: Il s’agit, en effet, d’une « famille » ancienne et très honorable : la parution en 1982 de Sortie d’usinede François Bon et deL’Excès-l’usinede Leslie Kaplan semble marquer l’origine même du « retour au réel »² de la littérature française. Tout en étant voués à saisir le vif de l’expérience dans le présent, ces récits,

Solitudes, similitudes: from: Nuove solitudini
Author(s) Viart Dominique
Abstract: Orphelins des grandes illusions collectives et des “méta-récits” qui les sous-tendaient, héritiers d’une littérature aux personnages falots disséminés aux pages de Bove, de Beckett ou de Perec, les écrivains contemporains s’essaient à de nouveaux traitements de la solitude. L’heure n’est plus ni à l’hypostase du créateur romantique ou maudit, ni au resserrement esthétique du roman célibataire¹, ni à la dénonciation de l’anonymat du personnage dans les métropoles tentaculaires, mais à une interrogation plus complexe de la singularité de « l’homme quelconque »² au sein de communautés défaites³.

Seuls, les choeurs solitaires de Laurent Mauvignier from: Nuove solitudini
Author(s) Capone Carine
Abstract: Le thème de la solitude est décliné par Laurent Mauvignier depuis son premier roman au titre sans équivoque: Loin d’eux¹. Chaque fois la solitude du sujet s’éprouve dans la confrontation au groupe, à la communauté. Cette figure contemporaine de celui qui est dans « la foule solitaire »², ce thème du « singulier quelconque » cher à Giorgio Agamben³, cette interrogation autour de « l’êtreavec » qui préoccupe Jean-Luc Nancy⁴, on la retrouve en littérature. Dominique Rabaté s’emploie, en 2003 dans la revue « Modernités , à dresser la figure littéraire du solitaire à travers les âges. Du solitaire contemporain

L’œuvre d’Yves Ravey. from: Nuove solitudini
Author(s) Vray Jean-Bernard
Abstract: L’oeuvre d’Yves Ravey, qu’inaugure la publication de La table des singes¹, se poursuit avec neuf autres romans publiés aux éditions de Minuit, depuisBureau des illettrésjusqu’au plus récentEnlèvement avec rançon². Ravey écrit aussi pour le théâtre. Trois de ces textes seulement sont publiés. « Sans tapage », écrivait Jean-Claude Lebrun en 2005, « une oeuvre prend consistance, qui mériterait la reconnaissance d’un plus vaste public »³. La reconnaissance du public, de la critique, des universitaires s’est élargie depuis 2005, mais la remarque reste à l’ordre du jour.

Art(s) et écriture(s) en prose: from: Le bal des arts
Author(s) Rolla Chiara
Abstract: « Peut-on encore parler du roman français au singulier aujourd’hui? Une recherche attentive sur les esthétiques principales ou singulières du roman dit de l’extrême contemporain permet de constater qu’aucune école ou aucun groupe ne domine l’univers romanesque, et qu’aucun mouvement n’impose profondément sa marque sur la scène littéraire. Cela ne signifie pas pour autant qu’il ne reste que des oeuvres disparates et qu’il soit impossible d’organiser une cohérence en arrêtant des corpus »¹. L’idée de créer une base de données répertoriant les textes en prose qui révèlent une contamination intertextuelle et/ou intermédiale de formes artistiques a pris sa source dans

Images et Histoire: from: Le bal des arts
Author(s) Py Jean-François
Abstract: Le récit de Pierre Michon est comme un assemblage de figures, une juxtaposition: celles des Onze² du tableau éponyme, mais aussi celle de la province orléanaise dans les décennies précédant la Révolution, des limousins-esclaves, du paysage embrumé sur le canal creusé par ces derniers, de Tiepolo à Würzburg, etc., qui toutes jouent dialectiquement entre elles, parfois avec des contradictions proprement insondables. Et qui jouent avec le tableau lui-même, figure emblématiquement ambiguë. J’emprunte ici le concept de figure dans l’acception que lui confère Dominique Viart:

Disegnare i sentimenti: from: Il ritorno dei sentimenti
Author(s) Rota Valerio
Abstract: Il romanzo grafico è indubbiamente un dominio delle letterature disegnate¹ che dedica ampio spazio ai sentimenti. I toni intimisti, le ambientazioni suburbane, la predilezione per le narrazioni e le interazioni di gente comune che lo hanno contraddistinto sin dalle sue origini (basti pensare al carattere delle tante opere di Will Eisner, passando per Mausdi Art Spiegelman, fino ad arrivare ai più recenti lavori di Craig Thompson, Chester Brown, Daniel Clowes ed altri) costituiscono un terreno fertile per una “messa in scena delle passioni”.

Book Title: Grand Hotel Abyss-Desire, Recognition and the Restoration of the Subject
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): Safatle Vladimir
Abstract: Long-expected translation of the Portuguese academic bestseller Grande Hotel Abismo. In the last two decades recognition - arguably one of the most central notions of the dialectical tradition since Hegel - has once again become a crucial philosophical theme. Nevertheless, the new theories of recognition fail to provide room for reflection on transformation processes in politics and morality. This book aims to recover the disruptive nature of the dialectical tradition by means of a severe critique of the dominance of an anthropology of the individual identity in contemporary theories of recognition. This critique implies a thorough rethinking of basic concepts such as desire, negativity, will and drive, with Hegel, Lacan and Adorno being our main guides. The Marxist philosopher György Lukács said that the Frankfurt School (Horkheimer, Adorno, etc.) left us with nothing but negativity towards the state of the world. Their work failed to open up a concrete possibility of practical engagement in this world. All too eager to describe the impasses of reason, the Frankfurt philosphers remained trapped in a metaphorical Grand Hotel Abyss (Grand Hotel Abgrund). It was as living and being guardian of lettered civilization in a beautiful and melancholy grand hotel, of which the balconies face a gaping abyss. But perhaps in this way Lukács gave – and no doubt without realizing it himself – a perfect definition of contemporary philosophy, namely to confront chaos, to peer into what appears to a certain rationality as an abyss and to feel good about it. Touching Hegelian dialectics, critical theory and psychoanalysis, Grand Hotel Abyss gives a new meaning to the notion of negativity as the first essential step for rethinking political and moral engagement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b9x1k5

Chapter III Not all things are destined for transience from: Grand Hotel Abyss
Abstract: Let us dwell for a moment on the suggestive closing lines of the preceding chapter: the transformation of individualities into political subjects implies their having the ability to convert subjective gestures into manifestations of a trans-individual multiplicity of desires. Were that to be the case, political subjects could conceivable attain a historical density of such great proportions within social struggles that they would in effect become modes for the actualization of a past never entirely gone, and, subsequently, points of contact for experiences scattered throughout time. This is unequivocally grasped by Walter Benjamin, as evidenced in the following statement: History

PRÓLOGO A LA TERCERA EDICIÓN from: Derecho Constitucional chileno I
Author(s) Egaña José Luis Cea
Abstract: Los objetivos y desarrollo de la obra son los de la primera edición, inalterados en la segunda de ellas. He introducido, sin embargo, bibliografía adicional, jurisprudencia complementaria, cuadros estadísticos actualizados y, especialmente, planteamientos de nuevos problemas y la respuesta del autor a ellos.

CAPÍTULO II CARACTERÍSTICAS from: Derecho Constitucional chileno I
Abstract: Debe ser destacado, sin embargo, que el estudio del tema es relevante al menos por las razones siguientes: primero, porque permite adquirir una visión sistemática o de conjunto de la Ley Suprema, facilitando la comprensión de sus partes y la tarea de interpretarlas en su contexto; y segundo, en atención a que lleva a tomar una posición razonada acerca de las reformas en debate y de otras que puedan estimarse también pertinentes.

CAPÍTULO IV MODIFICACIONES PENDIENTES from: Derecho Constitucional chileno I
Abstract: Nuestro país atraviesa un cambio de época, expresión denotativa de la amplitud y profundidad de las transformaciones que van ocurriendo. Pensamos, sin embargo, que no todos esos cambios responden a demandas legítimas de la ciudadanía, sino que a impulsos sostenidos, con base ideológica o de otra naturaleza, por redes sociales, grupos de individualismo extremo, afanes populistas o manipulaciones de la opinión pública con eco en ciertos medios de comunicación. Entre los rasgos prominentes del cambio de época se menciona, en primer lugar, a la Constitución misma, unos para reemplazarla, otros con el objeto de continuar reformándola, sin sustituirla por completo.

CAPÍTULO VI CONTEXTO HISTÓRICO Y FUTURO from: Derecho Constitucional chileno I
Abstract: Nos hemos detenido varias veces en el tema y ahora queremos sistematizar las ideas. Lo hacemos fundados en las únicas dos fuentes reconocidas como fidedignas, aunque el rasgo común a ellas yace en la generalidad, imprecisión, finitud o ambigüedad de los planteamientos en asuntos cruciales 251. Las ocasionales entrevistas de prensa a gobernantes, políticos y académicos mantienen el secretismo y no disipan dudas en punto al método o procedimiento, quedándose en que será participativo, institucional y democrático, sin descartar la asamblea constituyente; y a propósito del contenido de la nueva Ley Suprema, solo hallamos puntualización a nivel de criterios globales, v.

CAPÍTULO VII ESTADO DE DERECHO from: Derecho Constitucional chileno I
Abstract: El Estado de Derecho es aquella Nación-Estado o Estado-Sociedad en que impera un sistema jurídico justo, cuya aplicación es objetiva e impersonal, igualmente vinculante para gobernantes y gobernados y en el que, por lo mismo, ninguna arbitrariedad queda ni puede resultar sin sanción. En él, el poder o soberanía se hallan sometidos al Derecho y este es expresivo del humanismo.

CAPÍTULO X PLURALISMO LIMITADO from: Derecho Constitucional chileno I
Abstract: Ese concepto y el de democracia protegida sintetizan los objetivos que se perseguía lograr con el antiguo artículo 8° de la Constitución. Aunque ya fue suprimido –y en su lugar consagrada la base institucional de la probidad, transparencia y publicidad–, dicho precepto merece algunos comentarios, hechos con intención histórica y, además, clarificatoria de las normas hoy insertadas en el artículo 19° Nº 15° incisos 6° y siguientes de la Carta Fundamental.

Book Title: Jesús de Nazaret en la percepción de un psicólogo- Publisher: Ediciones UC
Author(s): VALDIVIESO LUIS BRAVO
Abstract: Los textos evangélicos nos muestran que en el Jesús histórico, hay “un misterio en su personalidad". La psicología nos ha confirmado este enigma porque la lectura de su vida plantea muchas interrogantes y abre un amplio espacio que motiva a conocer de verdad ya no quién era sino cómo era Jesús de Nazaret. Este libro aborda el tema de la fe en Jesucristo y la percepción de su personalidad desde el punto de vista de un psicólogo del siglo XXI, tema que ha sido analizado durante siglos por la teología y la filosofía. La presente obra constituye un trabajo profundo, vanguardista e iluminador sobre el carácter de Jesucristo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bhkqj9

3 Algunos componentes del sentido psicológico de la fe from: Jesús de Nazaret en la percepción de un psicólogo
Abstract: “La fe, entonces, es un ‘principio moral’ en el sentido de que [cita a Newman] ‘se encuentra en la mente, no tanto basada en hechos, sino en probabilidades’

Book Title: Moments of Silence-Authenticity in the Cultural Expressions of the Iran-Iraq War, 1980-1988
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Vatanabadi Shouleh
Abstract: The Iran-Iraq War was the longest conventional war of the 20th century. The memory of it may have faded in the wake of more recent wars in the region, but the harrowing facts remain: over one million soldiers and civilians dead, millions more permanently displaced and disabled, and an entire generation marked by prosthetic implants and teenage martyrdom. These same facts have been instrumentalized by agendas both foreign and domestic, but also aestheticized, defamiliarized, readdressed and reconciled by artists, writers, and filmmakers across an array of identities: linguistic (Arabic, Persian, Kurdish), religious (Shiite, Sunni, atheist), and political (Iranian, Iraqi, internationalist). Official discourses have unsurprisingly tried to dominate the process of production and distribution of war narratives. In doing so, they have ignored and silenced other voices.Centering on novels, films, memoirs, and poster art that gave aesthetic expression to the Iran-Iraq War, the essays gathered in this volume present multiple perspectives on the war's most complex and underrepresented narratives. These scholars do not naively claim to represent an authenticity lacking in official discourses of the war, but rather, they call into question the notion of authenticity itself. Finding, deciding upon, and creating a language that can convey any sort of truth at all-collective, national, or private-is the major preoccupation of the texts and critiques in this diverse collection.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bj4sc8

2 Lost Homelands, Imaginary Returns: from: Moments of Silence
Author(s) SHOHAT ELLA
Abstract: When I first contemplated my participation in the “Moments of Silence” conference, I wondered to what extent the question of the Arab Jew / Middle Eastern Jew merits a discussion in the context of the Iran-Iraq War. After all, the war took place in an era when the majority of Jews had already departed from both countries, and it would seem of little relevance to their displaced lives. Yet, apart from the war’s direct impact on the lives of some Jews, a number of texts have engaged the war, addressing it from within the authors’ exilic geographies where the war

4 War Veterans Turned Writers of War Narratives from: Moments of Silence
Author(s) GHANOONPARVAR M. R.
Abstract: Writers of fiction often rely on their imagination in their work, and professional writers are able to recreate scenes, events, and incidents of actual or imagined wars by imagining them. In contrast, some of those who experience war first hand, especially as combat soldiers, write about those experiences using the format of memoirs, and on occasion in the form of novels and short stories. The creative process for these veterans who have become writers of fiction is the reverse to that of what I have called professional writers. They fictionalize the actual traumatic events they have experienced.

11 Editing (Virayesh) as a Movement of Resistance during the Iran-Iraq War from: Moments of Silence
Author(s) FARAHZAD FARZANEH
Abstract: The role of language in shaping collective and national identities is of prime importance in socio-linguistic studies. The issue gains special significance in the case of Iran. There are at least three reasons for this. The first is that Iran has historically been in constant contact with the foreignthrough political as well as economic, literary, and cultural interactions. The second is that it accommodates a variety of ethnic groups, minority languages, and dialects still spoken in different parts of the country. And the third is that, since its conversion to Islam, Iran was exposed to Arabic, both as the

Book Title: Nowhere in the Middle Ages- Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): LOCHRIE KARMA
Abstract: Drawing on a range of contemporary scholarship on utopianism and a broad premodern archive, Lochrie charts variant utopian strains in medieval literature and philosophy that diverge from More's work and at the same time plot uncanny connections with it. Examining works such as Macrobius's fifth-century Commentary on the Dream of Scipio,Mandeville's Travels, and William Langland'sPiers Plowman, she finds evidence of a number of utopian drives, including the rejection of European centrality, a desire for more egalitarian politics, and a rethinking of the division between animals and humans.Nowhere in the Middle Agesinsists on the relevance and transformative potential of medieval utopias for More's work and positions the sixteenth-century text as one alternative in a broader historical phenomenon of utopian thinking. Tracing medieval utopianisms forward in literary history to reveal their influences on early modern and modern literature and philosophy, Lochrie demonstrates that looking backward, we might extend future horizons of utopian thinking.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzkpm

Introduction. from: Nowhere in the Middle Ages
Abstract: In 2004 Lee Edelman published his controversial critique of the “reproductive futurism” that drives American politics, in his view. The title of his book, No Future, embraced a mantra of queer resistance to this futurism figured in the Child, and with it, all its attendant linear histories, narratives, and presentsustaining effects. The title of my introduction cites Edelman’s book not by way of advocating a rejection of the past, as one might expect of such a citation, but rather, of marking the problem this book seeks to remedy. Utopianism as we have come to know and theorize it since Thomas

Book Title: Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Shank Reuben
Abstract: In France today, philosophy--phenomenology in particular--finds itself in a paradoxical relation to theology. Some debate a "theological turn." Others disavow theological arguments as if such arguments would tarnish their philosophical integrity, while nevertheless carrying out theology in other venues. In Crossing the Rubicon, Emmanuel Falque seeks to end this face-off. Convinced that "the more one theologizes, the better one philosophizes," he proposes a counterblow by theology against phenomenology. Instead of another philosophy of "the threshold" or "the leap"--and through a retrospective and forward-looking examination of his own method--he argues that an encounter between the two disciplines will reveal their mutual fruitfulness and their true distinctive borders. Falque shows that he has made the crossing between philosophy and theology and back again with audacity and perhaps a little recklessness, knowing full well that no one thinks without exposing himself to risk.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzm0r

Opening from: Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: Leibniz’s term monad, found in hisDiscourse on Metaphysics, is suffi-ciently well-known that it should give us no reason to pause. It is far more important to compose a philosophical plea capable of justifying an enterprise begun years ago. To begin, I will meditate on the Rubicon, a river(flumen )or small coastal waterway of Emilie-Romagna in northern Italy that once knew a singular destiny. To risk the crossing of this boundary was to violate the Roman Senate’s laws. Nevertheless, a now well-known general decided to cross fully armed. With all his legions, he passed the boundary that separated

1 Is Hermeneutics Fundamental? from: Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: In this crossing of the Rubicon, the trumpets first sound in homage to Ricoeur. Yet I will conclude with an accepted and even affirmed gap between his hermeneutics and the approach advanced here. Any tribute to a master must refl ect his greatness as well as his limitations, at least in the context of a legacy to be both received and transformed. Of course, one could proceed with pure and simple repetition. Ricoeur’s concept of distanciation, however, may be productive at this juncture, prompting the declaration that the times have changed and that one must orient oneself anew. After all,the

2 For a Hermeneutic of the Body and the Voice from: Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: Hic intelligenda est vox Verbi quod ibi caro Dei—“the voice of the Word must be understood at present as the flesh of God was understood then.”¹ Th is single formula from Hugh of Saint-Victor is sufficient to illuminate the Catholic hermeneutic of the body and the voice as introduced so far. The reminder is certainly appropriate. A “Catholic” hermeneutic should not be opposed to a “Jewish” hermeneutic or to a “Protestant” hermeneutic in a confessional struggle, which fortunately today is by and large left behind. Catholic theology lives in an ecumenism of good taste; it regularly recognizes its debt

4 Kerygma and Decision from: Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: In Chapter 3, I claimed there is no confessing faith outside of an original philosophical faith. A common ground of believingalways precedes thedecidedact of believing. To recognize oneself as “believing otherwise” is then not to disregard faith or to condemn the so-called unbeliever. This position is neither a kind of ostracism nor a kind of conformism, nor does it aim to relativize. On the contrary, it arises from a real resolution. Believingtheologicallyin God rests on first believingphilosophicallyin the world or in others—whether via a Cartesian act of negation, a Husserlian suspension of

6 Finally Theology from: Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: “Finally theology.” A theologian should utter this phrase—not a philosopher. One could fear that the great crossing fi nally had no other goal than to push us across the ford, as if the crossing of the Rubicon signified only the time of an Iliad without an Odyssey. Yet my principal thesis is that the two-way journey, there and back again with a definite return, is necessary to give each riverbank its specificity. I am first of all a philosopher and want to remain one. I am all the more committed to remaining a philosopher after having engaged in a

Epilogue: from: Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: Primum vivere deinde philosophari—“first live and then philosophize.” This famous saying of the ancients reminds us what is at stake in the act of writing and thinking. We do not first write and then live afterward or “on the side,” as it were. Rather,we live and then we write.The first imperative is not to know how to write but to learn to live; otherwise we run the risk of having nothing to say. The particularity of the philosopher is that he participates in the incarnate. No error is greater than his confusing himself for an abstraction, whereby

Book Title: Walter Benjamin and Theology- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): SYMONS STÉPHANE
Abstract: In the Arcades Project, Walter Benjamin writes that his work is "related to theology as blotting pad is related to ink. It is saturated with it." For a thinker so decisive to critical literary, cultural, political, and aesthetic writings over the past half-century, Benjamin's relationship to theological matters has been less observed than it should, even despite a variety of attempts over the last four decades to illuminate the theological elements latent within his eclectic and occasional writings. Such attempts, though undeniably crucial to comprehending his thought, remain in need of deepened systematic analysis. In bringing together some of the most renowned experts from both sides of the Atlantic, Walter Benjamin and Theology seeks to establish a new site from which to address both the issue of Benjamin's relationship with theology and all the crucial aspects that Benjamin himself grappled with when addressing the field and operations of theological inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzm39

Completion Instead of Revelation: from: Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) FENVES PETER
Abstract: This essay is concerned with the act of the Messiah. According to a brief sketch that Walter Benjamin read to Theodor and Gretel Adorno in the winter of 1937–1938 and that has since acquired the title of “Theological-Political Fragment,” there is a single messianic act, the description of which requires three separate terms. Two of these terms can be easily translated into English, for they belong to a long tradition of theological speculation that encompasses a broad group of languages, including German and English. But the word through which Benjamin identifies theact of the messiah—namely,vollenden—cannot

Walter Benjamin—A Modern Marcionite? from: Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) TAUBES JACOB
Abstract: “The Devil is in the details.” This aperçuof Aby Warburg applies not only to philology and history, but to philosophical and theological reflection as well. Gershom Scholem, a highly speculative mind, invoked Aby Warburg’s words when he made his bold, imposing descent into the deep strata of Jewish history of religion, where he brought dark, dialectically fascinating, albeit profoundly demonic, forms of the Jewish spirit to light. A student once proposed that Scholem’s “historical-rational” apparatus could be the bridge over which searching secular students could enter onto the path to the “nonrational” content of Jewish mysticism and its demonic

On Vanishing and Fulfillment from: Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) FRIEDLANDER ELI
Abstract: In various places in Benjamin’s writing the divine is identified in the total passing away and disappearance of the phenomenal. Probably the most famous case for such annihilative characterization of the divine occurs in the essay “Critique of Violence.” Yet, the account of divine violence in that essay, with its intimation of active destruction, tempts one to construe the moment of disappearance in terms of catastrophic effects wrought by God on the physical world, on the model of a force that makes visible changes in reality. This problematic figuration of the catastrophic in Benjamin’s vision of history might hide a

Book Title: Moving Images-From Edison to the Webcam
Publisher: John Libbey Publishing
Author(s): Widding Astrid Söderbergh
Abstract: Contributors include: William Boddy, Carlos Bustamante, Warren Buckland, Valeria Camporesi, Bent Fausing, Oliver Gaycken, Alison Griffiths, Christopher Hales, Jan Holmberg, Solveig Jülich, Frank Kessler, Jay Moman, Sheila C. Murphy, Pelle Snickars, Paul C. Spehr, Björn Thuresson, and Åke Walldius.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzn7v

‘We Partake, as it Were, of His Life’: from: Moving Images
Author(s) Griffiths Alison
Abstract: In her speech as outgoing president of the American Anthropological Association in 1960, pioneering visual anthropologist Margaret Mead urged her colleagues to make greater use of the technologies of the still camera, audio tape recorder and motion picture camera. According to some observers, the reaction among Mead’s professional audience was decidedly mixed. Her appeals were greeted with ‘restless stirrings and angry murmurs … as these notebook-oriented scholars expressed their irritation at this revolutionary suggestion.’¹ In some respects, it is hardly surprising that Mead’s colleagues balked at the idea of using tape recorders and motion picture cameras in the field; beyond

Submerged Landscapes of the Postmodern Body: from: Moving Images
Author(s) Moman Jay
Abstract: In the 1990s it seems that no anthology of cultural theory is complete without a contribution to the increasingly pervasive discourses on the body. Emerging theories attempt to manage Arthur and Marilouise Kroker’s ‘crisis of the body’ by sketching out a map to navigate a world marked by genetic testing, retinal and thumbprint identification, cybersex, and other technological and increasingly digital bodily formations.¹ As I aim to show, this is a map written both aboutanduponthe body in order to regulate the myriad technological systems which dis-/configure it.

Space and Character Representation in Interactive Narratives from: Moving Images
Author(s) Thuresson Björn
Abstract: – How does an interactive narrative (I’m deliberately using the term ‘narrative’ instead of ‘fiction’) work and function?¹ What does it look like? How do you construct it?

Visual Diaries: from: Moving Images
Author(s) Walldius Åke
Abstract: Abroad spectrum of digital techniques is revitalising formal innovation as the technology of moving images enters its second century of development. Established narrational forms are being revised according to new expressive opportunities. The screen writers of Hollywood movies and computer games apply new technology to let us experience new exotic vistas and new zones of intimate personal virtuality.

Book Title: Early Cinema and the "National"- Publisher: John Libbey Publishing
Author(s): King Rob
Abstract: While many studies have been written on national cinemas, Early Cinema and the "National" is the first anthology to focus on the concept of national film culture from a wide methodological spectrum of interests, including not only visual and narrative forms, but also international geopolitics, exhibition and marketing practices, and pressing linkages to national imageries. The essays in this richly illustrated, landmark anthology are devoted to reconsidering the nation as a framing category for writing cinema history. Many of the 34 contributors show that concepts of a national identity played a role in establishing the parameters of cinema's early development, from technological change to discourses of stardom, from emerging genres to intertitling practices. Yet, as others attest, national meanings could often become knotty in other contexts, when concepts of nationhood were contested in relation to colonial/imperial histories and regional configurations. Early Cinema and the "National" takes stock of a formative moment in cinema history, tracing the beginnings of the process whereby nations learned to imagine themselves through moving images.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzncx

Introduction from: Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) King Rob
Abstract: The nationand thenationalhave long circulated as useful, supposedly definitive categories in cinema history. One can find them in early film manufacturer catalogues such as the 1896 Lumière sales catalogue of films shot in distant parts of the globe and organized according to country of origin. Or in early trade press attempts “to classify the film product of the world”, such asNew York Dramatic Mirror’s 1908 compilation of the “distinguishing characteristics” or “infallible ear marks” of films produced by different countries.¹ Or in early histories of the cinema’s aesthetic development, such as Léon Moussinac’sNaissance du cinéma

2 Nationalizing attractions from: Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Auerbach Jonathan
Abstract: Like most of us, I manage to wear more than one academic hat, having been trained in literary analysis, which I continue to pursue, along with my research in early cinema for the past decade or so, with American studies serving as something like a bridge between these two very different modes of representation, the verbal and the visual. Given the pressure to be “interdisciplinary” (whatever that means, exactly), I tried at first to combine these two interests, but have since learned the hard way that it is sometimes best to keep your hats separate. Attempting to import key operational

8 Early cinema and “the Polish question” from: Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Skaff Sheila
Abstract: The failure of the first local filmmakers to earn broad recognition for their achievements fulfilled the expectations of the inhabitants of the Polish nation – a stateless entity in parts of the Kingdom of Prussia, Russian Empire, and Austro-Hungarian Empire comprising ethnically, religiously, and linguistically diverse populations committed to the restoration of eighteenth century borders – perfectly. In no other aspect of Polish national culture was fatalism more widespread, more profound, or more advantageous for foreign entrepreneurs. In Warsaw, this fatalism was manifest in initial praise, and eventual dismissal, of the first short films to document the daily routines and weekend pleasures

9 Our Navy and patriotic entertainment in Brighton at the start of the Boer War from: Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Gray Frank
Abstract: Britain, as an imperial power, dominated the world at the end of nineteenth century. Jan Morris described it succinctly as, “the largest empire in the history of the world, comprising nearly a quarter of the landmass of the earth, and a quarter of its population”.¹ Its role as a global superpower was to assert its political and economic authority, especially in Africa and Asia. The so-called Pax Britannica (British peace) was a product of this status. It was expressed profoundly in 1900 by the fact that Britain and its global interests were defended by its navy – the largest navy in

14 Fights of Nations and national fights from: Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Mayer David
Abstract: My subject, a brief film shot for American Mutoscope & Biograph (AM&B) by Billy Bitzer, initially attracted me because four of the six episodes are cleverly choreographed variety stage acts – i.e. theatrical vaudeville sketches – restaged for the camera. Each sketch is undeniably abridged, but not otherwise altered: filmed straight-on in what appear to be single takes, the camera set-ups and lighting (or exposures) sometimes differ for different episodes. As a theater historian aware of how many scraps of the Victorian theater – narratives, genres, staging, effects – can be recovered from early film, I scour these films for evidential remnants, and Fights

17 The cinema arrives in Italy: from: Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Welle John P.
Abstract: I n Early Cinema in Russia and Its Cultural Reception, Yuri Tsivian reconstructs the response to early cinema of an educated Russian public. In describing the methodology he adopts for analysing written traces of early cinema, he writes:

20 The Norwegian municipal cinema system and the development of a national cinema from: Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Iversen Gunnar
Abstract: Cinema was from the outset a matter of transnational co-operation. Ideas of national identity and national policies regulating the film business, however, shaped several aspects of film production, distribution, and exhibition. Most obviously, national film production involved strategies of opposition to, and resistance against,

25 “A purely American product”: from: Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) King Rob
Abstract: In February 1915, Jeff Davis, the self-styled “King of the Hobos”, took the stage of New York’s Hammerstein’s theater to give audiences a tramp’s perspective on their nation’s history. America, Davis explained, was a nation founded on the tramp spirit. “He said Christopher Columbus was the first hobo ‘gink’ – since Queen Isabella had to ‘ stake him’ for the trip over.” Yet, while Davis admired Columbus as a hobo prototype, he was less enthusiastic about others who had followed the explorer’s trans-Atlantic journey: he ended his act by calling for immigration restriction, the better to give the American-born a shot

26 The “Chinese” conjurer: from: Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Solomon Matthew
Abstract: One of the main roles in the ballet Parade, the historic collaboration that brought Jean Cocteau, Pablo Picasso, and Erik Satie together with Serge Diaghilev’s Ballets Russes, is the “Chinese” Conjurer. Set outside of a fairground show, this 1917 one-actballet réalistefeatures a series of performers whose feats are meant to draw paying spectators inside. The ballet’s eponymous “parade” began with a dance choreographed and performed by Léonide Massine that consisted of a series of leaps and an elaborate pantomime of several conjuring tricks: drawing an egg from his sleeve, swallowing it, and producing it from his toe, then

28 European melodramas and World War I: from: Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Andrin Muriel
Abstract: The present essay is an attempt to set the bases for a theory of trans-national identity based on philosopher Paul Ricoeur’s discussion of mimesisin his seminal three-volume collection of essays,Time and Narrative.¹ Having re-read Ricoeur on several occasions, we have come to the conclusion that his discussion of the dichotomynarrated time/historical time, which draws on Aristotle, quite surprisingly fits the contents and style of several European films from the early 1910s.

Chapter 1 France and Exceptionalism from: The French Exception
Author(s) Hewlett Nick
Abstract: Anyone with more than a passing scholarly interest in things French will have encountered the notion that France is different from other countries.¹ We might disagree about the usefulness of this idea, we might think it is inaccurate or even trivial, but we have all been exposed to the view that important aspects of French society, French politics, French thought, French language and French culture are strikingly unique. From newspaper articles to the most serious historiography of the French Revolution, via an almost endless array of journal articles, textbooks, journalistic potboilers, and now websites, we find arguments and approaches whose

Chapter 5 Does it Make Sense to Treat the Front National as a ‘French Exception’? from: The French Exception
Author(s) Godin Emmanuel
Abstract: What is exceptional about the French extreme right today? Pascal Perrineau (1997: 10–11) suggests that what distinguishes the Front National (FN) from previous French extreme-right parties or movements is the strength and longevity of its electoral success. From boulangismein the late nineteenth century to the rise of the Leagues in the interwar period, from the Poujadist wave of the 1950s to the defence of French Algeria in the mid-1960s, the French extreme right’s electoral success had always been as intense as it was ephemeral. Conversely, since its first successes in local and European elections in the early 1980s,

Chapter 7 French Industrial Relations – Still Exceptional? from: The French Exception
Author(s) Parsons Nick
Abstract: In the 1990s, there was much debate among observers of the ‘normalisation’ of French industrial relations (Freyssinet 1993; Ruysseveldt and Visser 1996; Goetschy 1998). Broadly, the argument is that there has been a shift from an under-institutionalised system in which state intervention was needed to mediate a more or less naked class conflict between capital and labour to one based upon regular decentralised compromise bargaining between ‘social partners’. From this perspective, the system of labour regulation in France – the ‘rules of the game’ by which wages and working conditions are established – is coming to resemble more closely that of other

Chapter 12 Cultural exception(s) in French Cinema from: The French Exception
Author(s) Rollet Brigitte
Abstract: There are few areas in which the idea of a possible French exception has asserted itself to such an extent as in the field of culture, and it is actually hardly surprising that the term ‘cultural exception’ has come to be associated with France, or a certain idea of France. The issue came to the forefront during the 1993 round of GATT (General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade) negotiations, when France insisted on removing cultural products from the negotiations, on the grounds that ‘culture is not just another commodity’. In so doing, the French representatives may have compounded France’s bad

Chapter 13 Sport and Politics: from: The French Exception
Author(s) Mignon Patrick
Abstract: In France, sport is characterised by strong intervention by both the state and local authorities. It is one of the manifestations of the famous French exception, which is embedded in a historic continuity that begins in the years following the war of 1870 and continues through the Popular Front, the Vichy regime and the Republics since 1947. What began as material and financial support has come to define sport as the state’s field of competence. The reasons for this intervention are no different from those of other countries which, depending on the period, may be concern for the physical and

CHAPTER 11 Authenticity and Authority: from: Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness
Author(s) Métraux Alexandre
Abstract: This essay arose from reflections on the question of, and then occasional irritation over, the particular language embedded in popular conceptions of the Shoah. We will first delineate the question, and briefly elaborate on it. In subsequent sections, that is, in the exposition of the theme (circumscribed by the posing of the question), various aspects of the Shoah’s representation by authors, and its understanding in turn by listeners and readers, will be considered. As a next step, the narratives of Primo Levi, understood here as exemplary, will allow us to describe different models of reception, and to more easily conceptually

Book Title: Sartre Against Stalinism- Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Birchall Ian H.
Abstract: Most critics of the political evolution of Jean-Paul Sartre have laid emphasis on his allegedly sympathetic and uncritical attitude to Stalinist Communism due, to a large extent, to their equation of Marxism with Stalinism. It is true that Sartre was guilty of many serious misjudgements with regard to the USSR and the French Communist Party. But his relationship with the Marxist Left was much more complex and co tradictory than most accounts admit. This book offers a political defence of Sartre and shows how, from a relatively apolitical stance in the 1930s, Sartre became increasingly involved in the politics of the Left; though he always distrusted Stalinism, he was sometimes driven to ally himself with it because of the force of its argument.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1btbwzh

Chapter 1 Introduction: from: Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: Anyone proposing to write yet another book about Jean-Paul Sartre must do so with a certain sense of guilt. Given the huge number of books and articles that already exist, what justification can there be for adding to them? Moreover, any writer on Sartre lives with the melancholy awareness that Sartre himself insisted that he had never learnt anything from any of the books written about him.¹ Yet such is the richness and complexity of Sartre’s work that there are still things that have not been said – as well, unfortunately, as some that have been said all too often,

Chapter 3 The Threat of Fascism from: Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: In the short term Sartre was little affected by the experience of Nazi Berlin. But this may be less surprising than it seems. Most of the European left was confused and disoriented by Hitler’s victory. The Comintern, having allowed Hitler to take power by refusing to build a

Chapter 7 The Spectre of Trotsky from: Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: After completing ‘Matérialisme et révolution’, Sartre’s quest continued. Philosophically and politically dissatisfied with the PCF, he wished to establish a revolutionary alternative. Yet Naville’s anti-Stalinist materialism was clearly not what he was looking for. In this context a major influence was his fellow-editor of Les Temps modernes, Maurice Merleau-Ponty, who was usually the author of editorial statements signed ‘T.M’., to which Sartre gave his consent,¹ apparently recognising that Merleau-Ponty was more politically sophisticated than he was. Merleau-Ponty was not a Trotskyist, but he had had a number of friends and contacts in the Trotskyist movement since before the war.²

Chapter 8 The RDR from: Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: In 1948 the Cold War intensified, leading to the Communist takeover in Czechoslovakia and the Berlin blockade; the outbreak of a new European war seemed increasingly probable. In France it was a year of bitter industrial struggle. Sartre had little hope of cooperation with the PCF,

Chapter 10 Reorientation from: Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: He was, moreover, increasingly isolated. In the RDR he had been working with people like Rousset, Rosenthal, Altman and Chauvin, who had considerably more political experience than himself.

Chapter 15 The Battle over Algeria from: Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: The war for Algerian independence (1954–62) was bloody and protracted, fought ruthlessly on both sides, but with the defenders of French rule lapsing into the worst savageries of torture and mass repression. Like the Vietnam War for the United States a decade later, it tore through the very fabric of French society, and destroyed the fragile institutions of the Fourth Republic, bringing de Gaulle to power in 1958. Sartre again found himself in a triangular relation with the PCF and the anti-Stalinist left. Above all, the war led to a profound and lasting radicalisation of Sartre’s position.

Chapter 17 May to December from: Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: The events of 1968, often ignorantly dismissed as no more than a year of ‘student revolt’, undermined the political certainties that had endured since 1945. In Vietnam, the world’s strongest power was proved vulnerable in face of a national liberation struggle. The Russian invasion of Czechoslovakia marked a definitive end to Moscow’s hegemony over the world’s Communist Parties. In France a general strike of over nine million workers, the biggest general strike in human history, showed that the power of the working class could not be ignored; an anti-Stalinist left that had been confined to the margins of political life

Book Title: Critical Junctions-Anthropology and History beyond the Cultural Turn
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Tak Herman
Abstract: This volume focuses on the conjunction of two disciplines where both the analytic promises as well as the difficulties involved in the meeting of humanist and social science approaches soon became obvious. Anthropologists and historians have come together here in order to recapture, elaborate, and criticize pre-Cultural Turn and non-Cultural Turn modes of analysing structures of experience, feeling, subjectivity and action in human societies and to highlight the still unexploited possibilities developed among others in the work of scholars such as Norbert Elias, Max Gluckman, Eric Wolf, E.P. Thompson and Raymond Williams.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1btbxqc

Introduction: from: Critical Junctions
Author(s) Tak Herman
Abstract: This collection of studies and essays seeks to address the pitfalls of, and the alternatives to, what has become known as the “cultural turn” (or the “historic turn”) in the social and human sciences. The cultural turn has been a multifarious and pretty pervasive phenomenon in Western universities and modes of social knowledge since the early 1980s, when, in Bill Sewell’s phrasing, a “kind of academic culture mania has set in” (Sewell 1999: 36). It embraced parts of anthropology, sociology, social theory, gender studies, literary studies, various branches of history, and science studies and laid the philosophical groundwork for the

Chapter One Microhistorical Anthropology: from: Critical Junctions
Author(s) Handelman Don
Abstract: The relationship between anthropology and history is one of inequality. This is no less so for the relationship between anthropology and microhistory. History, one of the noble disciplines in the “history” of Western thought, has as an emblem the muse, Clio. Anthropology has anyone who at times is everyone, at times someone, so often nameless and unvoiced. In their relationship, anthropology is the junior partner, a Johnny-come-lately to the professional telling of pastness within intellectual worlds whose denizens believe in the existence and importance of the time-depths of history, probably since these also are perceived as the sources of knowledge.

Chapter Five “Bare Legs Like Ice”: from: Critical Junctions
Author(s) Kalb Don
Abstract: Few serious social researchers would deny the inescapability of pondering the conundrum of class—a conundrum because, while steadily contested, politically compromised, and conceptually inflated, the unsettling suspicion keeps surfacing that class involves inequality, power, culture, exploitation, accumulation, struggle and action, being in history and the making of history, being in place and the making of space, all in the same moment. Class, power, time, and space together form a huge program that has haunted social inquiry since Marx. Disciplined social science, on the other hand, has been a recurrent escape from its embrace, and understandably so, since it is

Chapter Six Prefiguring NAFTA: from: Critical Junctions
Author(s) Musante Patricia
Abstract: Eric Wolf ’s emphasis on interconnected, global processes in Europe and the People Without History(1982) provides a model for bringing the concerns of history, geography, and anthropology together to study the political economy of globalization, both past and present. To his list of “thingified” concepts I would add the local or thecommunitywhich have been, and continue to be, reified within anthropological discourse and practice. The boundaries of the local or the community—however broadly they may be defined or imagined—are often taken as a given, and hence naturalized. This tendency continues even as anthropologists increasingly broaden

Chapter Seven Historical Anthropology through Local-Level Research from: Critical Junctions
Author(s) Gulliver P. H.
Abstract: It is a common assumption today that two paradigms typify the growing nexus between history and anthropology. One paradigm, which typifies history, is “a movement away from social history … and towards a new cultural history” (Kalb, Marks, and Tak 1996: 7). In its concern with epochs, mentalities, and collective representations, it uses anthropology as a repository of concepts, methods, and empirical data that historians can raid. The other paradigm, which typifies historical anthropology, is the one through which anthropologists operate in order to do history, using a central method of local-level research¹ and exploring issues related to “autonomy, deviance,

Book Title: Recollections of France-Memories, Identities and Heritage in Contemporary France
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Picard Jeanine
Abstract: Since the 1980s, France has experienced a vigorous revival of interest in its past and cultural heritage. This has been expressed as part of a movement of remembering through museums and festivals as well as via elaborate commemorations, most notably those held to celebrate the bi-centenary of the Revolution in 1989 and can be interpreted as part of a re-examinaton of what it means to be French in the context of ongoing Europeanization. This study brings together scholars from multidisciplinary backgrounds and engages them in debate with professionals from France, who are working in the fields of museology, heritage and cultural production. Addressing subjects such as war and memory, gastronomy and regional identity, maritime culture and urban societies, they throw fresh light on the process by which France has been conceptualized and packaged as a cultural object.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1btbxwz

1 RECONSTRUCTING THE PAST: from: Recollections of France
Author(s) Jenkins Brian
Abstract: These narratives have since lost some of their persuasive power. They are now

3 WAR MUSEUMS IN FRANCE from: Recollections of France
Author(s) Joly Marie-Hélène
Abstract: The museum is just one element of commemorative public policies and the way war is remembered. In fact, there are many other vehicles for memorialising war besides museums, ranging from social care for war veterans and the management of military cemeteries, to the politics of commemoration (the choice of Remembrance Days, the organisation of commemorative ceremonies) and the erection of physical memorials (wall plaques and tablets; war memorials and large commemorative monuments) as well as the naming of streets. Given all this activity, museums form only a very small part of the way in which memories of war are perpetuated.

4 PUBLIC HISTORY AND THE ‘HISTORIAL’ PROJECT, 1986–1998 from: Recollections of France
Author(s) Winter Jay
Abstract: My subject is public history, history outside the academy, linking historians to the broad population interested – sometimes passionately interested – in historical inquiry. Public history is defined by this extension of the domain within which the scholar operates. The audience for historical literature defines the discipline as much as the professional credentials of the practitioner. Public history is thus an attempt to flee from the increasing specialisation and decreasing readership of professional academic work, both in journals and in monograph form. It is also a recognition that historical scholarship is intrinsically tied to concepts of educating the public, and

9 CULINARY HERITAGE AND PRODUITS DE TERROIR IN FRANCE: from: Recollections of France
Author(s) Demossier Marion
Abstract: The decision taken in 1984 to produce a compilation of the culinary heritage of France, defined as a cultural and economic inventory of traditional and regional food and cuisine,¹ reflects more than just a mere interest in the past. The creation of such an inventory illustrates the various social and economic transformations experienced by French society in recent decades. The crisis in French agriculture and the consequent restructuring of local identities have provided two of the principal driving forces behind these changes. In this context, culinary heritage can be represented as the point at which political, economic and social spheres

12 FAST FORWARD TO THE FUTURE? from: Recollections of France
Author(s) Milner Susan
Abstract: The task of defining urban identities seems to be more necessary than ever at a time of massive socio-economic upheaval and residential mobility, and as the relationship between the local, national (itself undergoing redefinition) and international is changing. There are important political, economic and social reasons for defining specific urban identities. The political reasons relate to successive urban regeneration initiatives since the early 1980s as well as decentralisation laws dating from the same period. Economic regeneration has a marked regional and local aspect, particularly since decentralisation, as mayors compete for business location and state funding on the basis of local

Chapter 2 Identity and Selfhood as a Problématique from: Identities
Author(s) Wagner Peter
Abstract: Many formalised discourses of the human sciences—such as law, liberal political philosophy and neo-classical economics—work with a notion of the singular human being as a unit that is characterised by its indivisibility, for those reasons also called the individual. An additional assumption about the guiding orientation or behaviour of these units then needs to be introduced to arrive at ways of conceptualising stable collectivities. In the discourses mentioned above, this assumption is basically one of rationality, with specific variations. In liberal political theory, their capacity for rationality leads the individuals to enter into a social contract for their

Chapter 6 Constructions of Cultural Identity and Problems of Translation from: Identities
Author(s) Shimada Shingo
Abstract: The revival of interest in cultural identity, now a key issue in world politics and likely to remain so for some time, is an outcome of the end of the so-called Cold War. The Cold War order that had defined world politics and had assumed economic and political bipolarity is no longer dominant. ‘Culture’ has been rediscovered in an effort to explain obvious differences between states (Huntington, 1993). However, in view of the seemingly endless conflicts in many parts of the world it is increasingly doubtful whether we can justly understand and interpret conflicting realities on the basis of our

Chapter 7 The Performance of Hysteria from: Identities
Author(s) Bronfen Elisabeth
Abstract: ‘ Je est un autre’ (‘I is an other’) wrote Arthur Rimbaud in 1871, at a time when this statement may still have been understood as a provocation. Ever since the dawn of the postmodern era, however, we are constantly offered new theoretical arguments to persuade us of the plurality and the frailness of the I. It is commonplace nowadays to talk of the individual as a representational construct that is conditioned, manufactured and manipulated by language, images and society, a construct that can even be artificially portrayed. The subject, so the argument runs, emerges precisely because it issubjectedto

Chapter 11 Identity as Progress – The Longevity of Nationalism from: Identities
Author(s) Geulen Christian
Abstract: It has become almost obligatory in recent work on the history of nationalism to insist that this very history has not and, for the time being, will not come to an end. History continues in the conflicts in Eastern Europe, in the Western revival of the nation as an acknowledged cultural category, and also in the ethnic con-flicts of postcolonial societies. Such observations presuppose that nationalism exists as such and that it possesses one single history, despite all evident differences. In contradistinction to phenomena such as Imperialism, Communism or National Socialism, which appear to be fixed in time and space,

Chapter 2 The Gulag as a Metaphor: from: French Intellectuals Against the Left
Abstract: According to most analyses, The Gulag Archipelagowas a decisive, revelatory text in the transformation of French intellectual politics in the 1970s.¹ For example, in his synthesisPolitical Traditions in Modern FranceSudhir Hazareesingh, a historian of French intellectual politics in the 1970s, writes, “long after the rest of the Western world had seen through the pompous veneer of Soviet-style socialism, French intellectuals remained fascinated by the Leninist experience. Their awakening was brought about by the publication of Aleksandr Solzhenitsyn’sGulag Archipelagoin 1974.”² Pierre Grémion, another influential historian of this period, finds thatThe Gulag Archipelagowas a revelatory

Chapter 2 Beyond Vodou and Anthroposophy in the Dominican-Haitian Borderlands from: Beyond Rationalism
Author(s) Brendbekken Marit
Abstract: This essay¹ concerns the paradoxes emerging in the dynamic space of hybridisation between vodou magic² and the occult science of anthroposophy. These lived imaginaries and registers of interpretation are engaged within counter-modernising environmental discourses and practices in the Dominican-Haitian borderlands. Here NGO-affiliated European anthroposophists, orientated by the work of Rudolf Steiner,³ are organising a biodynamic programme in co-operation with marginalised Dominican and Haitian borderlands peasants who live the consequences of radical deforestation. These peasants have for long been subjugated to the often violent dictates of post-colonial ruling élites, and their world of vodou spirits is itself the creation of ‘resistant

Chapter 4 Sorcery, Modernity and the Constitutive Imaginary: from: Beyond Rationalism
Author(s) Kapferer Bruce
Abstract: The cosmologies implicated in sorcery practice are human-centric. Within them, human beings are at the heart of processes that are integral in the formation of their psychical, social and political universes. Sorcery fetishises human agency, often one which it magically enhances, as the key mediating factor affecting the course or direction of human life-chances. The fabulous character of so much sorcery practice, its transgressive and unbounded dimensions, a rich symbolism that appears to press towards and beyond the limits of the human imagination, is surely connected to the overpowering and totalising impetus that sorcery recognises in human agency and capacities.

Chapter 10 Strange Fruit: from: Beyond Rationalism
Author(s) Feldman Allen
Abstract: At no other time more than in the present day has individual, social and institutional memory come under such concerted pressure, critique and exposure as a fragile foundation for truth and facticity. This current reluctance to authenticate social memory is intimately tied to well-known postmodernist depredations, which profoundly disenchanted the authority of tradition and authenticity, and emptied core institutionalised myths of their temporal and semantic continuity. As institutionalised memory fails to provide overarching master narratives that can win cultural consent, it has also become increasingly disjunctive with previously unnarratable history and experience. Consider the synchronic fictions of recent ethno-histories, the

Book Title: Identity and Networks-Gender and Ethnicity in a Cross-Cultural Context
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Webber Jonathan
Abstract: Contrary to the negative assessments of the social order that have become prevalent in the media since 9/11, this wide-ranging collection of essays, mostly by social anthropologists, focuses instead on the enormous social creativity being invested as collective identities are reconfigured. Using fieldwork findings drawn from Africa, Asia, and Europe, special emphasis is placed on the reformulation of ethnic and gender relationships and identities in the cultural, social, political, and religious realms of public life. Under what circumstances does trust arise, paving the way for friendship, collegiality, knowledge creation, national unity, or emergence of leadership? How is social life constructed as a collective endeavour? Does the means towards sociability become its end? And what can be said about the agency and collegiality of women? The inspiration for examining these conundrums is the work and persona of Shirley Ardener, to whom the volume is dedicated.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1btc01f

6 Towards an Ethnography of Colleagueship from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Callan Hilary
Abstract: In this short essay I focus on two issues relating to colleagueship and anthropology. First, I look at a case drawn from my own occupational experience and recent analytical work, where it seems to me that colleagueship is germane to an understanding of institution building and the negotiation of identities in a particular environment. Secondly, using the same material, I consider the ‘colleague relationship’ as a context and a tool for ethnography. The designation of this relationship is, inevitably, imprecise, but perhaps no more so than others that have been much discussed as a basis for the production of anthropological

7 Thinking the Unheard, Writing the Unwritten: from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Jingjun Shui
Abstract: At the core of my last years of research – indeed, all-pervasive in its implications – is the ongoing dialogue with my Chinese–Hui research collaborator, co-author and friend, Shui Jingjun. One of the prompters of this enduring conversation, begun over nine years ago, was my correspondence with Shirley Ardener, then not known to me in person. It was about 1994, when conducting fieldwork in Henan Province, in the interior of China, that I wrote to Shirley about the relevance of issues addressed in Perceiving Women¹ to problems arising from my own crosscultural and collaborative research. And I wrote of the

13 Can You Call This Fieldwork? from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Sciama Lidia D.
Abstract: Reflexive anthropology, anthropology ‘at home’ or ‘half-way home’, and the recognition of the researcher’s as well as her informants’ subjectivity have dominated much of anthropology since the 1970s. All are intimately bound with feminist critiques of ethnographic approaches and have been guiding principles in research conducted within the framework of Oxford’s Centre for Cross-Cultural Research on Women (E. Ardener 1975; S. Ardener 1975; Ardener and Burman 1995). To reach a closer understanding of women’s lives, it proved essential to focus on the contacts and active interactions of women in the societies we studied. Indeed, one of the questions we posed

Gendering Oxford: from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Waldren Jacqueline
Abstract: Since the early 1970s, Shirley Ardener has applied her intellect, creativity and enthusiasm to the development of women’s studies at the University of Oxford and further afield. Her contribution to social anthropology and women’s studies is revealed in the chapters of this book and in her innumerable publications. She recognised the similarity between the ‘consciousness-raising’ proposed by Western feminist movements and the social anthropological techniques of ‘isolating from their context statements which though trivial in themselves carry assumptions with wider significance’ (Ardener 1978: 45, n. 9). The category ‘women’ was problematised in different contexts; individual cultural models of women –

Going the Extra Mile from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Burman Sandra
Abstract: Invited to reminisce about Shirley in a page, I find it difficult to select from some forty years of memories since we first met. It is also difficult to convey briefly her many notable qualities, such as her originality of thought and quiet zest for life that make her such excellent company. But in the end I realise that an underlying feature of all my many recollections of Shirley is her empathy with those she encounters. Although she is a very private person, her concern for people who work with her has led to a greater intermingling of her personal

Shirley Ardener: from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Heinonen Paula
Abstract: My relationship with Shirley and Edwin Ardener began in 1977 when I came to Oxford as a Human Sciences undergraduate. My first glimpse of Shirley was in the quad at St John’s College when one of my friends pointed her out as one of our anthropology tutors. I blinked and she was gone. For the next few months, the same thing happened. She either flew or zoomed past me on her bike or on foot. Nothing has changed, since I found it hard to keep up with her when we eventually carried out fieldwork together on body piercing in 2003.

Book Title: Critical White Studies- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Stefancic Jean
Abstract: No longer content with accepting whiteness as the norm, critical scholars have turned their attention to whiteness itself. In Critical White Studies: Looking Behind the Mirror, numerous thinkers, including Toni Morrison, Eric Foner, Peggy McIntosh, Andrew Hacker, Ruth Frankenberg, John Howard Griffin, David Roediger, Kathleen Heal Cleaver, Noel Ignatiev, Cherrie Moraga, and Reginald Horsman, attack such questions as:*How was whiteness invented, and why?*How has the category whiteness changed over time?*Why did some immigrant groups, such as the Irish and Jews, start out as nonwhite and later became white?*Can some individual people be both white and nonwhite at different times, and what does it mean to "pass for white"?*At what point does pride in being white cross the line into white power or white supremacy?*What can whites concerned over racial inequity or white privilege do about it?Science and pseudoscience are presented side by side to demonstrate how our views on whiteness often reflect preconception, not fact. For example, most scientists hold that race is not a valid scientific category -- genetic differences between races are insignificant compared to those within them. Yet, the "one drop" rule, whereby those with any nonwhite heritage are classified as nonwhite, persists even today. As the bell curve controversy shows, race concepts die hard, especially when power and prestige lie behind them.A sweeping portrait of the emerging field of whiteness studies,Critical White Studiespresents, for the first time, the best work from sociology, law, history, cultural studies, and literature. Delgado and Stefancic expressly offer critical white studies as the next step in critical race theory. In focusing on whiteness, not only do they ask nonwhites to investigate more closely for what it means for others to be white, but also they invite whites to examine themselves more searchingly and to "look behind the mirror."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bw1kc5

1 The End of the Great White Male from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) GRAHAM JOHN R.
Abstract: Five centuries ago, the foundations of the world were shaken. So-called immutable truths toppled forever as man was replaced by the sun as the center of our universe. Equally wrenching is the current shattering of white males’ world view, in which they long have seen themselves as the central characters on society’s stage. All around are the effects of a revolution that is both painfully distressing and totally confusing to what well may become known as the last of the great white males.

3 The Skin We’re In from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) WILLS CHRISTOPHER
Abstract: Proponents of this idea, such as Leonard Jeffries, chairman of the Department of Black Studies at the City College of New York, have based their conclusions on the single scientific

15 Transparently White Subjective Decisionmaking: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) FLAGG BARBARA J.
Abstract: Goodson, Badwin & Indiff is a major accounting firm employing more than five hundred persons nationwide. Among its twenty black accountants is Yvonne Taylor, who at the time this story begins was thirty-one years old and poised to become the first black regional supervisor in the firm’s history. Yvonne attended Princeton University and received an M.B.A. from the Kellogg Graduate School of Management at Northwestern University. While employed at Goodson, she was highly successful in attracting new clients, especially from the black business community. In all other respects her performance at the firm was regarded as exemplary.

17 Imposition from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) STEFANCIC JEAN
Abstract: Society generally deploys terms of impositionat key moments in the history of a reform effort, such as blacks’ struggle for equal opportunity, or women’s campaign for reproductive rights. Before reaching that point, society tolerates or even supports the new movement. We march, link arms, and sing with the newcomers, identifying with their struggle. At some point, however, reaction sets in. We decide the group has gone far enough. At first, justice seemed to be on their side. But now we see them as imposing, taking the offensive, asking for concessions they do not deserve. Now they are the aggressors,

20 The Quest for Freedom in the Post-Brown South: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) DOUGLAS DAVISON M.
Abstract: In their response to the civil rights movement of the 1960s, moderate southern communities differed from their recalcitrant counterparts in at least one significant aspect. These communities understood that white self-interest demanded a certain degree of accommodation to integration demands. Thus, in many moderate southern cities, white elites, especially business leaders, played critical roles in facilitating limited racial integration as a means of preserving a strong business environment. At the same time, this need to appear racially moderate provided the black community with an important opportunity to challenge racial segregation that activists successfully exploited in many southern communities.

24 The Invention of Race: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) OAKES JAMES
Abstract: When Winthrop Jordan’s White Over Blackwas published in 1968, big reviews came out right away, followed by big prizes. Everyone noticed; everyone raved. Yet for all its monumental proportions, the book cast a curiously slender historiographical shadow. Jordan’s work did not become the centerpiece of a long and fruitful scholarly debate. It sits on our shelves, the proverbial book we read in graduate school. It was Jordan’s singular misfortune to produce a history of racial attitudes at the same time that Americans were beginning to look beyond racism to the political and economic sources of social inequality. The “real”

28 Images of the Outsider in American Law and Culture from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) STEFANCIC JEAN
Abstract: Several museums have featured displays of racial memorabilia from the past.¹ Each of these collections depicts a shocking parade of Sambos, mammies, coons, uncles—bestial or happy-go-lucky, watermelon-eating African-Americans. They show advertising logos and household commodities in the shape of blacks with grotesquely exaggerated facial features. They include minstrel shows and film clips depicting blacks as so incompetent, shuffling, and dim-witted that it is hard to see how they survived to adulthood. Other images depict primitive, terrifying, larger-than-life black men in threatening garb and postures, often with apparent designs on white women.

29 Back to the Future with The Bell Curve: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) JONES JACQUELINE
Abstract: According to Richard Herrnstein and Charles Murray, we live in an age and a country untainted by history, an age that springs full blown from g, or the “general intelligence” of the citizens who live here, now. In presenting their rigidly deterministic view that IQ is the major force shaping social structure in the United States today, the authors of The Bell Curveexude a smug complacency about late-twentieth-century American society: they argue that, judging from current housing and job patterns, people are pretty much where they should be—members of the so-called cognitive elite are ensconced in the wealthiest

31 White Law and Lawyers: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) HALEWOOD PETER
Abstract: Much has been written on surrogate motherhood as an application of biotechnology which challenges conventional understandings of equality and the family. Surrogacy also challenges conventional notions of embodiment. Indeed, the law has responded to surrogacy by bracketing off the surrogate mother’s embodiment—her factual experience of pregnancy—from the legal facts relevant to deciding disputes over custody arising from surrogacy arrangements. For example, even where the so-called surrogate is pregnant with her own fertilized ovum, she is defined not as the “biological” mother but as the “surrogate” mother, thus denying the biological and experiential fact that she is the mother.

33 Mexican-Americans and Whiteness from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) MARTINEZ GEORGE A.
Abstract: During slavery, the racial divide between black and white became a line of protection from the threat of commodification: whiteness protected one against being an object of property. Even after slavery ended, the status of being white continued to be a valuable asset, carrying with it a set of assumptions, privileges and benefits. Given this, it is hardly surprising that minorities have often sought to “pass” as white—i.e., present themselves as white persons. They did so because they thought that becoming white insured greater economic, political and social security. Becoming white, they thought, meant gaining access to a panoply

37 Identity Notes, Part One: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) DAVIS ADRIENNE D.
Abstract: “What parts do the invention and development of whiteness play in the construction of what is loosely described as ‘American’”?¹ And how does binarismaffect law and legal study? [“Binarism” refers to the socially constructed, dualistic black/white paradigm of race, which is dominant in Western culture today. Ed.] The paradigmappearsinternally neutral, as though blacks and whites were equally situated within it. Yet the cases discussed below suggest that a primary motivation in the crafting of the American racial architecture may not have been a pure desire to have a taxonomy for classifying races, but to define and protect

41 Los Olvidados: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) PEREA JUAN F.
Abstract: According to its English conquerors, America was always meant to belong to white Englishmen. In 1788, John Jay, writing in the Federalist Number 2, declared: “Providence has been pleased to give this one connected country to one united people—a people descended from the same ancestors, speaking the same language, professing the same religion, attached to the same principles of government, very similar in their manners and customs….”¹ Although Jay’s statement was wrong—early American society was remarkably diverse—his wish that America be a homogeneous, white, English-speaking Anglo society was widely shared by the Framers of the Constitution and

44 Residential Segregation and White Privilege from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) MAHONEY MARTHA R.
Abstract: Racial segregation was systematically promoted during the 1930s, 1940s, and 1950s by federal programs like the Home Owners Loan Corporation (HOLC), which made loans to homeowners, and the Federal Housing Authority (FHA), which insured private-sector loans.¹ These programs refused to

46 The Other Pleasures: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) EVERETT ANNA
Abstract: Even with the phenomenal influence of cultural studies and of cognitive and feminist theories, there remains a conspicuous absence of theorizing about the narrative function of race quarace in contemporary films. I contend thatScenes from the Class Struggle in Beverly Hills(1988),The Player(1992),Cool Runnings(1993),Blue Chips(1994),The Nightmare before Christmas(1993), andThe Perfect Woman(1993) all, in varying degrees, devise narrative situations that rely on race to authorize their speaking the unspeakable, performing the prohibited, defiling the sacred, and generally transgressing most sanctioned codes of social conduct. These films deploy racialized archetypal

47 White Privilege and Male Privilege: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) McINTOSH PEGGY
Abstract: Thinking through unacknowledged male privilege as a phenomenon with a life of its own, I realized that since hierarchies in our society are interlocking, there was most likely a phenomenon of

50 The GI Bill: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) SACKS KAREN BRODKIN
Abstract: The GI Bill of Rights, as the 1944 Serviceman’s Readjustment Act was known, was arguably the most massive affirmative action program in U.S. history. It was created to develop needed labor-force skills, and to provide those who had them with a life-style that reflected their value to the economy. The GI benefits ultimately extended to sixteen million GIs (veterans of the Korean War as well) included priority in jobs—that is, preferential hiring, but no one objected to it then—financial support during the job search; small loans for starting up businesses; and, most important, low-interest home loans and educational

58 The First Word in Whiteness: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) ROEDIGER DAVID
Abstract: A character in Chester Himes’ 1945 novel, If He Hollers Let Him Go, has a “funny thought.” He begins to “wonder when white people started to get white—or rather, when they started losing it.” The narrower question of when new immigrants “started to get white” and of what they lost in doing it has received passionate and varied treatment within African-American thought. That treatment provides the best points of entry to the question of white identity among new immigrants to date.

60 Others, and the WASP World They Aspired To from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) BROOKHISER RICHARD
Abstract: In its brief history, America has experienced the greatest population transfer the Western world has known since the fall of Rome, with happier results.

62 The Economic Payoff of Attending an Ivy-League Institution from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) FRANK ROBERT H.
Abstract: Look at the legal profession. Lawyers who deal with mergers and business acquisitions, for example, receive just a small percentage of the money that changes hands in the transactions that they negotiate, but their fees can amount to millions of dollars in multibillion-dollar deals. Not surprisingly many bright and ambitious young people ask themselves, “How can I get a job as a Wall Street

76 Notes of a White Black Woman from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) SCALES-TRENT JUDY
Abstract: In general, discussions about race center on the state of relations between black Americans and white Americans. They focus on who will control the resources: freedom, jobs, schools, housing, medical care. In some of this debate, black people call

79 What Is Race, Anyway? from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) OLSON TOD
Abstract: In the winter of 1993, the small town of Wedowee, Alabama, became a flashpoint of racial tension. The white principal of Randolph County High School had gathered the student body together to find out how many students planned to attend the prom with dates “outside their race.” When several students raised their hands, he canceled the event. “How would that look at a prom, a bunch of mixed couples?” he scolded. From the stunned audience, a single voice responded. Junior-class president Revonda Bowen, daughter of a white father and an African-American mother, asked, “Who am I supposed to take to

80 The Misleading Abstractions of Social Scientists from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) KAGAN JEROME
Abstract: Five-month-old infants who stare at surprising events for a long time, 5-year-old children with large vocabularies, and 50-year-old adults who invent new computer programs are all described as intelligent. The use of the same adjective implies that the same process is operating in all three situations. But we have no good evidence to support the idea that the psychological processes that produce an attentive infant are the same as those that produce a creative computer programmer. Moreover, a small number of psychologists—including J. P. Guilford, Howard Gardner, and Robert Sternberg—have argued persuasively against the usefulness of the notion

83 Bell Curve Liberals: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) WOOLDRIDGE ADRIAN
Abstract: Opposition to the use of IQ testing goes back as far as testing itself. Its practitioners have been accused of misusing science to justify capitalist exploitation; allowing their obsession with classification to blind them to the huge variety of human abilities; encouraging soulless teaching; and, worst of all, inflaming racial prejudices and justifying racial inequalities. To this school of thinking, The Bell Curvewas a godsend. Charles Murray and Richard J. Herrnstein succeeded in effectively linking IQ testing firmly in people’s minds with spectacularly unpopular arguments: that different racial groups have different IQ averages; that America is calcifying into rigid

92 Hatelines: from: Critical White Studies
Abstract: White pride, white pride, white pride. It’s great to be white! White man, fight back! First, the good news. Nigger Ron Brown and a gaggle of chief executive officers from American big business died in a beautiful plane crash. The greedy big business CEO’s were in Bosnia to help theireconomy, not ours. There will be no tears shed at Klan headquarters over the well-deserved death of a bunch of greedy, scumbag internationalists and businessmen.

106 White Women, Race Matters: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) FRANKENBERG RUTH
Abstract: Fundamentally a relational category, whiteness doeshave content inasmuch as it generates norms, ways of understanding history, ways of thinking about self and other, and even ways of thinking about the notion of culture itself. We need to look more closely at the content of the normative and attempt to analyze both its history and its consequences. One step in this direction is antiracist writers’ increasing use of the terms Euro-American or European American alongside African American, Asian American, Native American, Latino, and Chicano. Using “European American” to describe white Americans has the advantage that it parallels and in a

109 What Should White Women Do? from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) MAHONEY MARTHA R.
Abstract: Focusing solely on the sexual exploitation of women hides both racist oppression and the strength, struggles, and multiple interests of women of color. The experience of being a woman of color cannot be understood in any way that sees only what is done to women generally. White people will think racially as whites without thinking “about race,” because we tend to equate “race” with “non-white.” We will not understand that we are thinking racially when we are not thinking about people of color. This aspect of our experience as white women will shape what we do, but it will be

111 A Civil Rights Agenda for the Year 2000: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) ANSLEY FRANCES LEE
Abstract: I am not an African-American, and I will not be speaking from the perspective of the African-American community, although I am firmly convinced that my own well-being is intimately bound up with the well-being of that community. I am a European-American, a female, someone who has counted myself a part of legal and social struggles for justice—for people of color, for women of all races, and for individuals from all races and both genders whose economic resources consist only of their increasingly uncertain ability to sell their labor to others. I have less to say to and about the

114 White Out from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) WILKINS ROGER
Abstract: I live on a street in Washington, D.C., where the Speaker of the House, senators, congressmen, and a couple of Supreme Court justices also live. A few blocks away are two large public-housing projects. The Safeway where we all shop may be the most racially and economically integrated supermarket in America. Public servants with big titles shop alongside people who buy their staples with food stamps. And a couple of times a year there are street murders a half-mile away.

El dolor transfigurado from: El mito de la filosofía
Abstract: De forma paralela, la medicina bioenergética y la homeopática, para citar solo dos, han inventado remedios alternativos que buscan paliar el dolor, paulatinamente y a mediano plazo, de acuerdo con una metodología no reactiva, como sucede con los fármacos químicos y sin tener la potencia devastadora de estos.

1 LA REPARACIÓN DESDE LA PERSPECTIVA DE LÍDERES DE ORGANIZACIONES SOCIALES DE VÍCTIMAS DEL CONFLICTO ARMADO INTERNO COLOMBIANO from: Los derechos humanos
Author(s) González Fabián D. Buelvas
Abstract: Escenarios como estos han convertido a integrantes de la sociedad civil no combatiente en víctimas del conflicto en diversas regiones del país durante las últimas décadas. Ante la atrocidad experimen tada, no se puede definir un único patrón de comportamiento de las víctimas; sin embargo, teniendo en cuenta la importancia de su participación en el proceso de justicia transicional que se está im plementando en Colombia a partir de la vigencia de la Ley 1448 de 2011 resulta social y políticamente relevante visibilizar ideas y emociones que actualmente circulan en torno a luchas sociales por el cumplimiento y materialización del

6 DERECHO SIN ESTADO: from: Los derechos humanos
Author(s) Erazo Juan Pablo Sarmiento
Abstract: El sistema jurídico moderno que se ha extendido en la mayoría de países de América Latina parecería partir de dos pilares fundamen tales: la existencia de un derecho singular o propio de cada nación, que se expide en el ejercicio de la soberanía, personificada por el Es tado; el segundo pilar conduce o se alimenta del monismo jurídico,⁷ corriente de pensamiento que considera que en el territorio donde domina jurídica y políticamente el Estado hay un solo derecho, en la medida en que existe un solo Estado, y este tiene el monopolio en la producción del derecho.

INICIACIONES FREUDIANAS from: El individuo en la cultura y la historia
Abstract: El comienzo de su estancia no fue muy feliz. La ciudad lo perturba, los parisinos lo asustan, siente vergüenza de su francés, que no habla bien, y está escandalizado por el costo de vida. La beca que se ha ganado es insuficiente para cubrir sus gastos

FREUD Y LA HISTORIA DEL MONOTEÍSMO from: El individuo en la cultura y la historia
Abstract: Pocos meses después de la llegada de Adolfo Hitler al poder, en enero de 1933, en la aún lejana Viena, el grupo de psicoanalistas judíos seguidores de Sigmund Freud, sintió pánico y muchos de ellos empezaron a abandonar la ciudad y el país, temerosos de que vendrían peores días.

INTRODUCCIÓN from: El individuo en la cultura y la historia
Author(s) de Castro Correa Alberto Mario
Abstract: Si bien es cierto que Freud ha sido y continúa siendo criticado hoy día en muchos sentidos y aspectos diferentes, también es cierto que la genialidad de sus aportes ha influido en un sinfín de posturas que van desde aquellos que lo toman como la base y fundamento de sus orientaciones teóricas, hasta aquellos que partiendo de sus postulados tratan de complementar, contextualizar o redefinir sus aportes. Todas ellas tienen en común el interés por clarificar la forma en que el ser humano se orienta a lo largo de la vida a partir de la relación de éste mismo con

II DIÁLOGO Y EXÉGESIS from: En el principio era la etica. Ensayo de interpretacion del pensamiento de estanislao zuleta
Abstract: El segundo gran escollo con que nos encontramos en el proyecto de elaborar una interpretación del pensamiento de Estanislao Zuleta proviene del hecho de constatar que, sin desconocer la complejidad de su trabajo, la exégesis de autores, textos y teorías era el campo específico y prioritario en que este se desenvolvía. La mayor parte de sus elaboraciones son resultado de la lectura minuciosa y rigurosa, aprobadora y crítica, de los grandes autores. Sus ideas tienden casi siempre a apoyarse en referencias. Son muy escasos los textos construidos al margen del comentario a un gran escritor. de esta forma, el estudio

CAPÍTULO VII. EL SENTIDO DEL CAPITAL Y LA LÓGICA DE LA HISTORIA from: Economía para el ser humano
Abstract: En este sentido, hay unas propiedades y unos parámetros fijos e inamovibles que se hallan conectados con todas las formas de capital. Por una parte, es abstracto y universal; mientras que, por la otra, no lo podemos imaginar sin una referencia a un tiempo y a un lugar determinados, aunque

CAPÍTULO VIII. LA VISIÓN: from: Economía para el ser humano
Abstract: Crisis y excesos, especulación y comportamientos cínicos, falta de escrúpulos y explotación, seguirán formando parte de la historia humana y de la vida económica, sin importar lo que tenga que ver con el sistema. Porque las leyes no pueden prever todas las formas de mal comportamiento, ni todos los abusos podrán ser descubiertos. Decisiones erróneas con resultados trágicos, malos entendidos y otras fallas estarán siempre presentes en el orden del día.

Introduction: from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) VENEMA HENRY ISAAC
Abstract: One of the cruelties of death is to alter profoundly the meaning of a literary work in progress. Not only does the work no longer involve a continuation since it is finished in every sense of the word,

Asserting Personal Capacities and Pleading for Mutual Recognition from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RICOEUR PAUL
Abstract: The prize with which I have been honored by the John W. Kluge Center at the Library of Congress, and for which I extend my sincere thanks, is motivated by the humanism attributed to my life’s work by these generous benefactors. The reflections that follow are devoted to examining some of the bases of this humanism.

Remembering Paul Ricoeur from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) PELLAUER DAVID
Abstract: It is almost eighteen months now since Ricoeur’s death. I believe he would have agreed that as the work of mourning progresses, the balance shifts between what at first is an almost overwhelming sense of grief and an accompanying sense of

The Golden Rule and Forgiveness from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) FIASSE GAËLLE
Abstract: As is well known, Ricoeur seeks to counter the egological tendencies of philosophies of the subject. With the emphasis he puts on the role of the other, in ethics he belongs to the group of thinkers concerned with otherness within the sphere of ethical thought. But at the same time, he also takes into consideration the excessive weight that this other places on the self. Raising doubts about Emmanuel Levinas’s philosophy, while maintaining his admiration of the latter’s hyperboles, Ricoeur wishes to underline the definitive aspect of receptivity when encountering the other.¹ There is no “you” without an “I” who

The Place of Remembrance: from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) BARASH JEFFREY ANDREW
Abstract: The theme of collective memory, conceived as a source of social cohesion, has come to assume a unique importance in the heterogeneous context of our contemporary societies. The public function of collective memory, in the form of commemorations or museums, as in the evocation of traumatic memories shared by entire social groups, has become a topic of lively debate in a large number of theoretical areas, ranging from cognitive science to sociology, political theory, history, and other disciplines of social inquiry. It is the singular achievement of the recent work of Paul Ricoeur, Memory, History, Forgetting,to take a wide

Book Title: Religion: Beyond a Concept- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): de VRIES HENT
Abstract: What do we talk about when we talk about religion? Is it an array of empirical facts about historical human civilizations? Or is religion what is in essence unpredictable-perhaps the very emergence of the new? In what ways are the legacies of religion-its powers, words, things, and gestures-reconfiguring themselves as the elementary forms of life in the twenty-first century?Given the Latin roots of the word religion and its historical Christian uses, what sense, if any, does it make to talk about religionin other traditions? Where might we look for common elements that would enable us to do so? Has religion as an overarching concept lost all its currency, or does it ineluctably return-sometimes in unexpected ways-the moment we attempt to do without it? This book explores the difficulties and double binds that arise when we ask What is religion? Offering a marvelously rich and diverse array of perspectives, it begins the task of rethinking religionand religious studiesin a contemporary world. Opening essays on the question What is religion?are followed by clusters exploring the relationships among religion, theology, and philosophy and the links between religion, politics, and law. Pedagogy is the focus of the following section. Religion is then examined in particular contexts, from classical times to the present Pentacostal revival, leading into an especially rich set of essays on religion, materiality, and mediatization. The final section grapples with the ever-changing forms that religionis taking, such as spirituality movements and responses to the ecological crisis.Featuring the work of leading scholars from a wide array of disciplines, traditions, and cultures, Religion: Beyond a Concept will help set the agenda for religious studies for years to come. It is the first of five volumes in a collection entitled The Future of the Religious Past, the fruit of a major international research initiative funded by the Netherlands Organization for Scientific Research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5chhf

Introduction: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) de Vries Hent
Abstract: “Religion” may—or may not—be here to stay. As a “concept” (but which or whose, exactly?), from one perspective it might seem to be losing its received reference (the transcendent, the world beyond, and the life hereafter) and its shared relevance (a unified view of the cosmos and all beings in it; a doctrine of the origin, purpose, and end of all things; an alert, enlightened, or redeemed sense of self; a practice and way of life), if it has not done so already. Yet from another perspective, it continues to claim a prominent role in attempts to understand

Public Religions Revisited from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Casanova José
Abstract: It has now been over a decade since the publication of Public Religions in the Modern World, and it can be asserted with some confidence that the thesis first presented there—that we were witnessing a process of “deprivatization” of religion as a relatively global trend—has been amply confirmed.¹ The most important contribution of the book, in my view, however, was not the relatively prescient empirical observation of such a new global trend but the analytical-theoretical and normative challenge to the liberal theory of privatization, namely, the claim that the thesis of the privatization of religion in the modern

Provincializing God? from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Lambek Michael
Abstract: My title exhibits great hubris: in the literal sense, first of all; then toward theologians and members of established religions; then also perhaps toward the many nonanthropologists in this interdisciplinary audience. But more immediately, it exhibits hubris toward Dipesh Chakrabarty, the title of whose magnificent work Provincializing Europe, I have appropriated and transformed.¹ Here are some of the objects intended by the “provincializing” of my title: first, the conceptualization of God as singular, unitary, and supreme, and, even though we can never know His mystery, as someone on the order of a human person, most likely a senior male, a

Metaphysics and Phenomenology: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Marion Jean-Luc
Abstract: The question of God certainly does not begin with metaphysics. But it seems—or at least it managed to appear—that, since metaphysics was coming to an end, being completed, and disappearing, the question of God was also coming to a close. Throughout the past century, everything happened as if the question of God would have to make common cause, whether positively or negatively, with the destiny of metaphysics. Everything also happened as if, in order to keep the question of God open so as to permit a “rational worship” of him (Rom. 12:1), it was absolutely necessary to stick

What No One Else Can Do in My Place: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Smith Michael B.
Abstract: EMMANUEL LEVINAS: Well, you don’t claim the name philosopherthe way you do a profession. To hear someone say “I’m a philosopher” or “I’m a poet” always shocks me. It’s not my style. In the wordphilosophythere is already the impossibility of possessing wisdom; it already implies taking a step back before the word of the wise man. The philosopher is a person who loves wisdom. It is the beginning of an interest in certain questions, certain books.

Nature as Religious Force in Eriugena and Emerson from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Otten Willemien
Abstract: From its earliest beginnings, Christianity has had trouble finding a proper role for nature. While the ancient concept of naturacontained strong overtones of a mythological kind, linking natural generation not only with demiurgic guidance, as in Plato’sTimaeus, but also with sexual desire, as in Plato’sSymposium, in the later Neoplatonism of Proclus and others such mythological aspects were muted as philosophically stratified forms of organic emanation. The cosmos should above all present traits of rational adornment, it seemed, as the order of nature could only survive by repressing its more animal-like instinctual impulses. On a microcosmic scale, human

Inheriting the Wound: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Szafraniec Asja
Abstract: The question of the function of this commitment is especially urgent, since Cavell,

Secularization: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Bremmer Jan N.
Abstract: In his fascinating but not always easy to follow study “What Might an Anthropology of Secularism Look Like?” Talal Asad embarks on an important quest, namely, to determine the nature of the secular. He takes it that the secular is “a concept that brings together certain behaviors, knowledges, and sensibilities in modern life.” Moreover, he stresses that “the secular is neither singular in origin nor stable in its historical identity, although it works through a series of particular oppositions.” In fact, Asad takes the view “that ‘the religious’ and the ‘secular’ are not essentially fixed categories.” He also assumes “that

“Religion” in Public Debates: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Drees Willem B.
Abstract: A question central to this volume is “What is religion?” In this essay I want to focus on a related question, namely: “Who is to say what religion is?” That is, who defines what is to be considered as fitting the concept “religion”? I also think it useful to consider a related question: “What purposes are served by using the concept in a particular way?” I’ll discuss this in two steps. The first section will deal with the question “What is religion?” as an academic question. However, I hope to make clear that the academic question, as a quest for

The Field of Religion and Ecology: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Watling Tony
Abstract: This essay is concerned with “religion and ecology,” or religious environmentalism. It analyzes how religious traditions are used to understand and interact with the environment and environmental issues, suggesting ways of relating to these that are different from and possibly less destructive and ecologically harmful than those of the modern secular worldview. It argues that religious traditions may thereby be gaining new private and public relevance, while perhaps also being changed in the process, becoming more environmentally friendly and ecumenical. The article ethnographically and qualitatively analyzes a “field of religion and ecology” comprising ecologically minded academics and representatives of various

Neutralizing Religion; or, What Is the Opposite of “Faith-based”? from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Sullivan Winnifred Fallers
Abstract: The Center for Studies in Criminal Justice at the University of Chicago Law School held a two-day conference in May 2001 entitled “Faith-Based Initiatives and Urban Policy.”¹ The principal focus of the conference was the then relatively new use of private “faith-based” social service agencies in addressing the needs of the urban poor. Could churches replace or supplement government agencies by delivering social services in a more effective manner? Speakers and participants were largely expert in sociology or criminal justice. None were in religious studies, however loosely defined. From time to time, the question would surface as to exactly what

Is Liberalism a Religion? from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Warner Michael
Abstract: I have no interest in answering the question of my title. For most people the obvious answer would be “no.” For Stanley Fish, among others, the answer is “yes.” Dissatisfied with the terms on both sides, I wish to analyze the question itself and the conditions under which it has come to seem meaningful. The point is not to single out Fish, since his basic claim is one that has wide currency, especially in conservative legal circles and among Christian critics of secular law, from Michael McConell and Stephen Carter to Stanley Hauerwas. Nor is it to defend liberal secularism.

Intimate Exteriorities: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) van Maas Sander
Abstract: It is not a rare phenomenon today to find a concert hall—that bourgeois temple of the cult of Art—filled with religious music. This may not seem surprising, since soon after its invention in the eighteenth century the concert hall became a location for the performance of religious repertoires. The times have changed, however, and the position of religion today can hardly be compared with the one it occupied centuries ago. The presence of religion in classical music performances today is mostly historical in character, such as, for instance, when Handel’s oratorios are played, or Mozart’s Requiem.

Death in the Image: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Alexandrova Alena
Abstract: A number of group and solo exhibitions offer evidence that both curators and visual artists are increasingly interested in the controversial issue of religion and its role in the contemporary art scene.¹ Artworks that deal with or refer to religious themes and motifs constitute a very heterogeneous group. They have in common the fact that they do not function in religious contexts and cannot be described as “religious art.” Instead, these artworks are aboutreligion and its practices, concepts, ideas, and images in the sense that they thematize its continued cultural relevance. Curators and artists interested in religious themes are

Religion and the Time of Creation: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Carlson Thomas A.
Abstract: The question of “religion” today often seems most urgent wherever the “human” in its “life” or “nature” appears to grow unstable conceptually and/or to fall under threat existentially. Such instability and threat come into play very notably in the context of recent scientific and technological developments where any number of categories long operative in conceptions of the human—intelligence and agency, birth and death, natural life, and so on—prove increasingly difficult to delimit because open to various forms of manipulation, simulation, or transformation. In reading the daily newspaper in the United States, for example, one quickly gets the sense

Book Title: Death's Following: Mediocrity, Dirtiness, Adulthood, Literature- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): LIMON JOHN
Abstract: Almost all twentieth-century philosophy stresses the immanence of death in human life-as drive (Freud), as the context of Being (Heidegger), as the essence of our defining ethics (Levinas), or as language (de Man, Blanchot). In Death's Following, John Limon makes use of literary analysis (of Sebald, Bernhard, and Stoppard), cultural analysis, and autobiography to argue that death is best conceived as always transcendentally beyond ourselves, neither immanent nor imminent. Adapting Kierkegaard's variations on the theme of Abraham's near-sacrifice of Isaac while refocusing the emphasis onto Isaac, Limon argues that death should be imagined as if hiding at the end of an inexplicable journey to Moriah. The point is not to evade or ignore death but to conceive it more truly, repulsively, and pervasively in its camouflage: for example, in jokes, in logical puzzles, in bowdlerized folk songs. The first of Limon's two key concepts is adulthood: the prolonged anti-ritual for experiencing the full distance on the look of death. His second is dirtiness, as theorized in a Jewish joke, a logical exemplum, and T. S. Eliot's "Ash Wednesday": In each case, unseen dirt on foreheads suggests the invisibility of inferred death. Not recognizing death immediately or admitting its immanence and imminence is for Heidegger the defining characteristic of the "they," humanity in its inauthentic social escapism. But Limon vouches throughout for the mediocrity of the "they" in its dirty and ludicrous adulthood. Mediocrity is the privileged position for previewing death, in Limon's opinion: practice for being forgotten. In refusing the call of twentieth-century philosophy to face death courageously, Limon urges the ethical and aesthetic value of mediocre anti-heroism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5chjz

CHAPTER FOUR Following Sebald from: Death's Following: Mediocrity, Dirtiness, Adulthood, Literature
Abstract: The friend to whom I am indebted for leading me to W. G. Sebald—I had mentioned that I was musing on the subject of how we know we shall die—told me that he proposed to write an essay on him. When I wondered what the essay would argue, he said that it would not have an argument. I myself was determined to write on Sebald free of the foreknowledge of my topic or point. The most powerful motive of these blind intentions is that one senses, in Sebald’s vicinity, a confirmation of the dignity of writing, even conceivably

CHAPTER FIVE Tickling the Corpse: from: Death's Following: Mediocrity, Dirtiness, Adulthood, Literature
Abstract: 1.2 The first paradigm is Albrecht Dürer’s St. Jerome(1521), in which a ferocious St. Jerome glares down to his left, his vision passing behind and beyond the skull on his desk, which he points to and softly touches with his left index finger. Among the things that Jerome is not looking at is the crucifix behind him and over his right arm. Nevertheless, it would seem to be in his mind’s eye or, more exactly,

CHAPTER SEVEN Too Late, My Brothers from: Death's Following: Mediocrity, Dirtiness, Adulthood, Literature
Abstract: The wrong place to begin this chapter is with an account of daydreaming through a Daniel Barenboim recital at Symphony Hall in Boston. Perhaps because Barenboim’s playing was routine that evening, I found myself recollecting a concert there forty years prior: the Limeliters, a folk group popular at the dispersal of the fifties and the gathering of the sixties, had been performing. I could, at the Barenboim concert, only vaguely recall roly-poly Glenn Yarbrough, an Irish tenor whose lovely voice sounded to me enough like falsetto to be embarrassing at the time. A more vivid memory was Alex Hassilev, somehow

Book Title: Irony on Occasion: From Schlegel and Kierkegaard to Derrida and de Man- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Newmark Kevin
Abstract: What is it about irony--as an object of serious philosophical reflection and a literary technique of considerable elasticity--that makes it an occasion for endless critical debate? This book responds to this question by focusing on several key moments in German Romanticism and its afterlife in twentieth-century French thought and writing. It includes chapters on Friedrich Schlegel, Soren Kierkegaard, Friedrich Nietzsche, Thomas Mann, Jean Paulhan, Maurice Blanchot, Jacques Derrida, and Paul de Man. A coda traces the way unresolved tensions inherited from Romanticism resurface in a novelist like J. M. Coetzee. But this book is neither a historical nor a thematic study of irony. To the degree that irony initiates a deflection of meaning, it also entails a divergence from historical and thematic models of understanding. The book therefore aims to respect irony's digressive force by allowing it to emerge from questions that sometimes have little or nothing to do with the ostensible topic of irony. For if irony is the possibility that whatever is being said does not coincide fully with whatever is being meant, then there is no guarantee that the most legitimate approach to the problem would proceed directly to those places where "irony" is named, described, or presumed to reside. Rather than providing a history of irony, then, this book examines particular occasions of ironic disruption. It thus offers an alternative model for conceiving of historical occurrences and their potential for acquiring meaning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5cht3

SEVEN Death in Venice: from: Irony on Occasion: From Schlegel and Kierkegaard to Derrida and de Man
Abstract: It would certainly be ironic, as they say, if it turned out that one of the most celebrated theorists and practitioners of irony in the twentieth century had actually misconstrued what makes irony into such an unruly and troublesome factor within the discourses of literature and philosophy alike. Such may indeed be the case for Thomas Mann, whose critical essays and literary fictions are regularly cited whenever romantic and postromantic irony becomes a topic for serious consideration. For if, in the case of Socrates, Kierkegaard wondered just how serious the Greek thinker could be about irony, since while rightfully maintaining

NINE On Parole: from: Irony on Occasion: From Schlegel and Kierkegaard to Derrida and de Man
Abstract: Nothing could be simpler, or so it might seem, than to know what it means to take someone at their word. But when that someone is a writer, and that writer is named Maurice Blanchot, then the question of his giving us his word, or of our taking him at his word, can become a source of genuine anguish, if not outright despair. “Reading is anguish,” Blanchot wrote, “and this is because any text, however important, or amusing, or interesting it may be (and all the more so that it gives that impression), is empty—at bottom it does not

TEN “What Is Happening Today in Deconstruction” from: Irony on Occasion: From Schlegel and Kierkegaard to Derrida and de Man
Abstract: In all likelihood, bibliographies will one day reveal that none of the proper names, movements, currents, or themes comprising the many strands of French thought in the twentieth century solicited more or more varied attempts at description and definition than deconstruction. No doubt, it also produced the most frustration, since it is increasingly clear that in every case such attempts at description and definition fail to achieve their goal in satisfactory fashion. The failure is built in to the extent that, even in French, the very worddéconstructionalready belongs to more than just one language, thus making any effort

Introduction: from: Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: The essays collected in this volume all address, in one way or another, the theme of carnal hermeneutics—that is to say, the surplus of meaning arising from our carnal embodiment, its role in our experience and understanding, and its engagement with the wider world. The voices represented here are diverse, each contributing to the view that the work of Hermes goes all the way down, from the event horizon of consciousness to the most sensible embodied experiences of our world.

2 Mind the Gap: from: Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: Why “carnal” hermeneutics? Don’t we already talk enough about the body? After all, the body has, since the dawn of philosophy, been a topic of concern in one form or another. Plato talks about embodiment in the RepublicandPhilebus. Aristotle takes up the subject inDe Anima, theNicomachean Ethics, De Partibus Animalium, and other works. Augustine, Aquinas, Descartes, and others all write about the body; it has hardly been ignored. And don’t we already have enough flavors of hermeneutics? The latter half of the twentieth century was dominated by hermeneutics: Heidegger, Gadamer, and Ricoeur; the radicalization of these

14 Biodiversity and the Diacritics of Life from: Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) TOADVINE TED
Abstract: Contestation over the line between life and death is perhaps the defining problem of contemporary philosophy no less than of today’s politics. From chemical weapons to drones to climate change, we confront negotiations over what counts as life as well as over the right, or the authority, to end it, if not also the responsibility to preserve it. The stakes are real in these efforts to mark off a singular line between life and death, the living and the nonliving, what will live and what will die, what is living within us and what is not. Yet as Derrida reminds

18 Original Breath from: Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) MACKENDRICK KARMEN
Abstract: It is not clear that this marks a very promising start for a carnal hermeneutics. If we could somehow take a text by itself, out of its context and history, it might. But, of course, this story of Genesis enters into the long history of the Abrahamic faiths. There it encounters in subsequent millennia an insistence on a God who is beyond and outside all time and place. That already makes speaking very strange, and it becomes stranger still with the insistence that creation must be ex nihilo, that before this speaking creator there is

Deconstruction or Destruction? from: Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) DE KESEL MARC
Abstract: Nancy’s Noli me tangere:On the Raising of the Bodyfocuses on Christ’s enigmatic words to Mary Magdalene at the moment when she is the first to meet Him after His resurrection:mē mou haptou(Greek),noli me tangere(Latin); “Do not touch me” (John 20:17). According to Nancy, this sentence reveals the entire self-deconstructive truth operating at the heart of Christianity:

God Passing By: from: Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) KATE LAURENS ten
Abstract: The central characteristic of monotheism may be, not the exclusive acknowledgement of a single God, but something that Jan Assmann recently named the “Mosaic distinction.”¹ This distinction is twofold. According to Assmann, it primarily designates the discordant difference between true and false religion, and between a true and a false God.² Assmann demonstrates how this distinction turned the natural and obvious presence of religion itself into a problem. Religion had to interrogate its truth instead of simply coinciding with it—“being” its own truth—and in this way its presence was no longer guaranteed, nor was that of its God:

Thinking Alterity—In One or Two? from: Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) van PEPERSTRATEN FRANS
Abstract: Nancy discusses both kinds of alterity in Dis-enclosure. He refers to the first, for example, in discussing the complex relations between Judaism, Christianity, Islam, and Greek philosophy and to the second when he remarks, in the “Opening”: “Christianity designates nothing other . . . than

“My God, my God, why hast Thou forsaken me?” from: Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) van ROODEN AUKJE
Abstract: A thesis only marginally stressed in Dis-enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity, though revealing one of its essential structures, is that a deconstruction of Christianity should be understood as a form of demythologization. Or, as Nancy has it, Christianity “understands itself in a way that is less and less religious in the sense in which religion implies a mythology (a narrative, a representation of divine actions and persons)” (D37/57). The seemingly strange statement that the Christian religion increasingly understands itself “in a way that is less and less religious,” is a reformulation of Nancy’s central thesis that Christianity is a

Ontology of Creation: from: Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) Blackmore Christine
Abstract: The idea of creation lies at the core of the four domains in which Jean-Luc Nancy’s thinking is most influential today: thinking about the world (one would traditionally refer to this as ontology); thinking about art and, in particular, the image (i.e., “aesthetics”); thinking about the sacred and religion; and thinking about politics. In this essay, I will explore the common dynamic that draws them together, since I believe a grasp of this dynamic is crucial for understanding Nancy’s thinking and the radical challenges it poses.

“it / is true” from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) HART KEVIN
Abstract: Phenomenology, as properly practiced, is a response to what is given rather than a single procedure that can be perfected. Responses can take various forms—essays, treatises, paintings, conversations, narratives, plays, and poems—each of which has constraints that, whether respected or transgressed, inflect phenomenological observation in different ways. Literature certainly gives us a range of examples for understanding phenomenology. When reading Italo Calvino’s Invisible Cities(1972) we see exactly what “free phantasy” is, and when watchingOthellowe grasp theeidosof jealousy far better than in reading a paper about that obsessive state in a psychology journal.¹ Yet

The Poor Phenomenon: from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) STEINBOCK ANTHONY J.
Abstract: According to Marion, there are four main modes of saturated givenness, what he calls the event, the idol, the flesh, the icon, and, encompassing all of them, revelation.¹ The phenomenological status of the saturated phenomena is relatively clear in Marion’s work, and it has been the topic of many investigations. What remains extremely ambiguous, however,

INTRODUCTION: from: Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism
Author(s) Hanegraaff Wouter J.
Abstract: In recent years, the academic study of Western esotericism has been developing rapidly from a somewhat obscure specialty pursued by a few dedicated researchers into a burgeoning professional fi eld of scholarly activity and international organization. Once a domain restricted to the relatively secluded circles of specialists and hence hidden from the sight of most academic and non-academic readers, it is now becoming an increasingly popular topic of public and critical discussion in the context of journals, monographs, conferences, and scholarly organizations.¹ The book you now hold in your hands is the fruit, one of many, of this growing branch

PASCHAL BEVERLY RANDOLPH AND SEXUAL MAGIC from: Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism
Author(s) Deveney John Patrick
Abstract: By the mid-nineteenth century, magic (and the occult generally) in the West were in parlous straits, paralleling those described in the surprising recent bestseller by Susanna Clarke, Jonathan Strange & Mr. Norrell.¹ The novel is set in a fair approximation of early nineteenth-century England and depicts a world in which magic was venerated, indeed diligently studied, but in an antiquarian fashion only, with no thought of—and indeed a horror of—practical application of the trove of abstruse knowledge. Magic before the arrival of the mysterious Mr. Norrell is a bit of flotsam only, the debris of a once-great synthesis

THE THEORY AND PRACTICE OF SEXUAL MAGIC, EXEMPLIFIED BY FOUR MAGICAL GROUPS IN THE EARLY TWENTIETH CENTURY from: Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism
Author(s) Hakl Hans Thomas
Abstract: For obvious reasons, sexual magic is a subject that evokes controversy and curiosity. Surprisingly, however, there exists—with the laudable exception of two works on the Hermetic Brotherhood of Luxor and on Paschal Beverly Randolph¹—practically no critical scholarly literature that studies it as a historical phenomenon and, as a result, the information available to a wider public tends to be sensationalist, secondhand, and mostly unreliable. In this chapter we will present a factual presentation of the theories and practices of four of the most important groups and orders devoted to sexual magic in the twentieth century, based upon direct

Book Title: Dietrich Bonhoeffer and the Ethical Self-Christology, Ethics, and Formation
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress
Author(s): Elliston Clark J.
Abstract: Dietrich Bonhoeffer’s work has persistently challenged Christian consciousness due to both his death at the hands of the Nazis and his provocative prison musings about Christian faithfulness in late modernity. Although understandable given the popularity of both narrative trajectories, such selective focus obscures the depth and fecundity of his overall corpus. Bonhoeffer’s early work, and particularly his Christocentric anthropology, grounds his later expressed commitments to responsibility and faithfulness in a “world come of age." While much debate accompanies claims regarding the continuity of Bonhoeffer’s thought, there are central motifs which pervade his work from his doctoral dissertation to the prison writings. This book suggests that a concern for otherness permeates all of Bonhoeffer’s work. Furthermore, Clark Elliston articulates, drawing on Bonhoeffer, a Christian self-defined by its orientation towards otherness. Taking Bonhoeffer as both the origin and point of return, the text engages Emmanuel Levinas and Simone Weil as dialogue partners who likewise stress the role of the other for self-understanding, albeit in diverse ways. By reading Bonhoeffer “through" their voices, one enhances Bonhoeffer’s already fertile understanding of responsibility.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c84fqp

2 Bonhoeffer and the Responsibly Oriented Self from: Dietrich Bonhoeffer and the Ethical Self
Abstract: Although Bonhoeffer only implicitly frames his ethical insights in terms of orientation, his work exhibits an abiding concern for the self–other relation, particularly through his account of human “being for others.” Moreover, this concern for a responsible relation to the other constitutes a theme within most of his main writings. Focusing on and parsing this understanding of human being as structured toward others will guide staged conversations with Emmanuel Levinas and Simone Weil. The first section of the chapter explores Bonhoeffer’s concept of the “self” as the person who exists in the world. This section begins with the human person

4 Performing Revelation from: Insights from Performance Criticism
Abstract: The book of Revelation has long captivated the imagination with vivid images, colors, sounds, and drama.¹ It has moved artists to create paintings, music, and sculpture. People have used it to speculate on the timing of cosmic events and to identify enemies of God. For better and, sometimes, for worse, the book of Revelation has been performed for many audiences and has influenced culture, power relationships, andidentitysince its first performances in first-century Asia Minor, what we now call western Turkey.

1 Ascension Scholarship from: Ascent into Heaven in Luke-Acts
Author(s) Zwiep Arie W.
Abstract: In this contribution, I will review recent biblical scholarship on the Lukan ascension narratives, outline points of agreement and areas of ongoing debate, and briefly outline a possible agenda for future research.¹ I roughly take the work of Mikeal Parsons² and myself³ as termini a quo. First, I will map some recent developments in textual criticism and their potential repercussions on the reconstruction of the initial text (Ausgangstext) of the ascension narratives. Second, since the study of Parsons, narrative criticism and literary approaches have become increasingly popular in Lukan studies, including the study of the ascension narratives. What are the

3 “For David Did Not Ascend into Heaven …” (Acts 2:34a) from: Ascent into Heaven in Luke-Acts
Author(s) Jipp Joshua W.
Abstract: One of the surprising aspects of Luke’s narration of Jesus’s ascent into heaven in Acts 1:9–11 is the brevity with which Luke describes this event. While there are some similarities with 2 Kings 2:7–12, the account of Elijah’s heavenly rapture is unable to fully explain the meaning of Jesus’s ascent into heaven in Acts.¹ Whereas Elijah’s heavenly location is no longer mentioned again after 2 Kings 2 and exerts no influence on the rest of the narrative, Jesus’s location in heaven continues to exert enormous influence on the rest of Acts.² The importance of Jesus’s location in heaven

5 Benefactor and Paradigm from: Ascent into Heaven in Luke-Acts
Author(s) Wallace James Buchanan
Abstract: Whatever may have been the intentions of the author of Luke-Acts when composing the story of the ascension into heaven of Jesus Christ, and whatever may have been the antecedents foremost in his mind, the quotations above from the church fathers Justin Martyr and Tertullian provide sufficient warrant for exploring Greco-Roman ascension traditions as essential contexts for understanding the ascension of Jesus Christ in Luke-Acts. The first generations of readers would immediately have detected a similarity between Jesus Christ’s ascension into heaven and the countless tales of ascension into heaven told in Greek and Roman traditions.³ While Justin will go

Book Title: On the Anarchy of Poetry and Philosophy-A Guide for the Unruly
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): BRUNS GERALD L.
Abstract: Marcel Duchamp once asked whether it is possible to make something that is not a work of art. This question returns over and over in modernist culture, where there are no longer any authoritative criteria for what can be identified (or excluded) as a work of art. As William Carlos Williams says, A poem can be made of anything,even newspaper clippings.At this point, art turns into philosophy, all art is now conceptual art, and the manifesto becomes the distinctive genre of modernism. This book takes seriously this transformation of art into philosophy, focusing upon the systematic interest that so many European philosophers take in modernism. Among the philosophers Gerald Bruns discusses are Theodor W. Adorno, Maurice Blanchot, Arthur Danto, Stanley Cavell, Hans-Georg Gadamer, Michel Foucault, Gilles Deleuze and Felix Guattari, Jacques Derrida, Jean-Franois Lyotard, Jean-Luc Nancy, Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe, and Emmanuel Levinas.As Bruns demonstrates, the difficulty of much modern and contemporary poetry can be summarized in the idea that a poem is made of words, not of any of the things that we use words to produce: meanings, concepts, propositions, narratives, or expressions of feeling. Many modernist poets have argued that in poetry language is no longer a form of mediation but a reality to be explored and experienced in its own right. But what sort of experience, philosophically, might this be? The problem of the materiality or hermetic character of poetic language inevitably leads to questions of how philosophy itself is to be written and what sort of communitydefines the work of art-or, for that matter, the work of philosophy.In this provocative study, Bruns answers that the culture of modernism is a kind of anarchist community, where the work of art is apt to be as much an event or experience-or, indeed, an alternative form of life-as a formal object. In modern writing, philosophy and poetry fold into one another. In this book, Bruns helps us to see how.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c84gmm

6 The Senses of Augustine: from: On the Anarchy of Poetry and Philosophy
Abstract: The Pagan. At the time of his death in 1998 the French philosopher Jean-François Lyotard had begun writing what was to have been a substantial work on Augustine’sConfessions. In the event he has left us only fragments—notes, paragraphs,envois, sketches, and two lectures stitched together to form a kind of monograph called “La Confession d’Augustin”:theconfession, referring, as we shall see, to Augustine’s confession of his love for God. Like all of Lyotard’s productions, this posthumous assembly leaves us guessing as to what kind of writing it is supposed to be. In fact Lyotard was never much

Book Title: Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): McGrath Brian
Abstract: Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism takes its title and point of departure from Walter Benjamin's concept of the historical constellation, which puts both "contemporary" and "romanticism" in play as period designations and critical paradigms. Featuring fascinating and diverse contributions by an international roster of distinguished scholars working in and out of romanticism--from deconstruction to new historicism, from queer theory to postcolonial studies, from visual culture to biopolitics--this volume makes good on a central tenet of Benjamin's conception of history: These critics "grasp the constellation" into which our "own era has formed with a definite earlier one." Each of these essays approaches romanticism as a decisive and unexpired thought experiment that makes demands on and poses questions for our own time: What is the unlived of a contemporary romanticism? What has romanticism's singular untimeliness bequeathed to futurity? What is romanticism's contemporary "redemption value" for painting and politics, philosophy and film?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c99996

Goya’s Scarcity from: Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) Clark David L.
Abstract: Recent discussions of the Francisco Jose de Goya y Lucientes’s series or, better, assemblageof influential prints that came posthumously to be known asThe Disasters of War(c. 1810–1820; published 1863) locate the artist’s unsparing vision of wartime degradation in a necropolitical context in which proliferating sovereign power fuses indistinctly with the unrestrained destruction of others and otherness.² The genesis of the assemblage lies in the singular circumstances in which Spain found itself in 1808. As Gonzalo Anes describes it:

The Tone of Praise from: Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) de Bolla Peter
Abstract: This essay is prompted by a set of remarks the American philosopher Stanley Cavell makes in the introduction to his 2005 collection of essays titled Philosophy the Day after Tomorrow. As my title indicates, I shall be mostly concerned to think with what is, at least to me, the extremely fecund and surprising notion that praise and its voiced or sounded manifestations might constitute an acknowledgment not only that the world is but also that its being is open. In the first section I take some time to explore the ways in which Cavell introduces—even stumbles across—and then

Endymion: from: Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) Jarvis Simon
Abstract: Trying to interpret Keats’s Endymionis not unlike finding yourself (supposingyou, for the moment, to be, for example, a brain-sick shepherd-prince wandering somewhere in early nineteenth-century Arcady or Hampstead) catching sight of a butterfly on whose wings there appears to be inscribed some sort of singular text. You wish to decipher the text; you follow the butterfly through paths, glens, clefts, woods, and so on, until it alights, say, on a fountain near

The Pastoral Stain: from: Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) Jacobus Mary
Abstract: Adorno—whose account of the lyric owes much to its German Romantic origins—offers a point of entry into the convergence of past and present in a series of pastoral works by the twentieth-century American artist Cy Twombly.² A resident in Rome since the late 1950s, Twombly is best known for his scribbled, written-on canvases and a poetic lexicon that includes Greek bucolic poetry, English Romanticism, and the modernist European lyric. In 1976, he painted and drew a series of pastoral works on paper: Untitled (Thyrsis’ Lament for Daphnis)(1976),Idilli(inscribed with the words, “I am Thyrsis of Aetna

The Walter Scott Experience: from: Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) Goode Mike
Abstract: In July 1869, Jefferson Davis, the former president of the Confederate States of America, traveled to Scotland on a tour of sites associated with Walter Scott and Scottish history. Davis’s ambitious itinerary took in Edinburgh, Abbotsford (Scott’s estate), Dryburgh Abbey (the site of Scott’s tomb), the Trossachs (including Rob Roy’s grave), Glasgow, Oban, the Isle of Mull, Fort William, and, finally, Inverness and Culloden. Davis had been an ardent reader of Scott since his boyhood, and much of the tour amounted to a pilgrimage to honor the most beloved author among the planter class in the antebellum American South.¹ But

Willing Suspension of Disbelief, Here, Now from: Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) Spivak Gayatri Chakravorty
Abstract: Two pieces of practical advice. Like Aristotle in the Poetics, Coleridge is giving advice on how to sell poetry. And Marx cautions against basing all analysis on people’s sense of things; rather one should investigate what worldly factors produce that sense. One is talking about producing a certain willingness in the readership. The other is saying that willingness is produced by material conditions bigger than the personal will. For Coleridge, the determinant is spiritual. For Marx, social. Let us call this these remote presuppositions of my argument.

Book Title: Memory-Histories, Theories, Debates
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): SCHWARZ BILL
Abstract: Memory has never been closer to us, yet never more difficult to understand. In the more than thirty specially commissioned essays that make up this book, leading scholars survey the histories, the theories, and the faultlines that compose the field of memory research.The volume reconstructs the work of the great philosophical and literary figures of the last two centuries who recast the concept of memory and brought it into the forefront of the modernist and postmodernist imagination-among them, Bergson, Halbwachs, Freud, Proust, Benjamin, Adorno, Derrida, and Deleuze. Drawing on recent advances in the sciences and in the humanities, the contributors address thequestion of how memory works, highlighting transactions between the interiority of subjective memory and the larger fields of public or collective memory.The public, political life of memory is an increasingly urgent issue in the societies we now inhabit, while the category of memory itself seems to become ever more capacious.Asking how we might think about the politics of memory, the closing chapters explore anumber of defining instances in which the troubled phenomenon of memory has entered and reshaped our very conception of what makes and drives the domain of politics. These include issues of slavery, the Soviet experience, the Holocaust, feminism and recovered memory, and memory in post-apartheid South Africa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c999bq

2. The Reformation of Memory in Early Modern Europe from: Memory
Author(s) Sherlock Peter
Abstract: Europe witnessed a revolution in memory during the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries. By the eighteenth century, the ancient “arts of memory” were archaic. The explosive power of print had made it possible both to archive and to multiply knowledge cheaply and efficiently in books. Oral testimony was increasingly displaced by written records. New bureaucratic structures designed to record information on evergreater numbers of individuals abounded. Scientific discoveries forced a reappraisal of the very nature of the universe, including time as well as space. Most potently of all, social memory was hotly contested as polemicists sought to shape and legitimize the

7. Proust: from: Memory
Author(s) Wood Michael
Abstract: “And no one will ever know, not even oneself, the melody that had been pursuing one with its elusive and delectable rhythm.”² Underneath these words, probably written in 1909 and certainly part of a draft of what was to become À la recherche du temps perdu, Proust wrote “Finish there.”³ The melody is a missing memory; and memory itself, in Proust, repeatedly appears as a melody. The analogy helps us, I believe, to bring together the more obvious and the more elusive elements of Proust’s view of this subject, so central to his thought and writing, and especially to understand

18. Telling Stories: from: Memory
Author(s) Freeman Mark
Abstract: Ever since the pioneering work of Sir Frederic Bartlett, it has become commonplace to assume that the process of remembering the personal past is a reconstructive one mediated by a host of significant factors, ranging from prevailing conventions of remembering all the way to the inevitable impact of present experience on the rendering of the past.¹ The recognition of this simple and seemingly indisputable fact has become something of a double-edged sword in the conceptualization of memory. On the one hand, it has vastly expanded the field of memory studies: memory, far from being the mere videotape-like replica of the

20. A Long War: from: Memory
Author(s) Hamilton Paula
Abstract: One of the most difficult theoretical issues confronting the study of memory has been the conceptual problem of group memory and how memories carried by individuals become part of a larger social dynamic. While there has been much debate about descriptive, adjectival terms such as “collective,” “cultural,” “popular,” and “social” memory, terms that are often invoked with noticeable imprecision, less consideration has been given to questions of what social relations make memory public or how we understand the very “publicness” of memory. When we think of thepublic, orapublic, it isout there, encompassing the notion of being

25. Soviet Memories: from: Memory
Author(s) Merridale Catherine
Abstract: Citizens of the former Soviet Union, the men and women who grew up under Communism, share many extraordinary experiences of hardship, violence, and trauma. They have also spent the greater part of their lives interpreting and discussing their experience in a language almost entirely shaped by ideology. These aspects of their mental world lend special resonance to the work of collecting and analyzing their memories. In their case, too, the controversial term “collective memory” has real meaning. The Soviet state was very largely sealed from outside influences for several decades beginning in the 1930s. Official discourse was carefully shaped and

Afterword from: Memory
Author(s) Passerini Luisa
Abstract: The present state of memory studies requires a particular attention to the transmission of what has been accumulated in this field since the 1970s. That was a decade in which many of the energies that had been employed in direct political activism during the previous decade were translated into cultural terms, opening up new areas of research, in which memory was central. I am thinking of the role memory has played over the past four decades in the constitution of cultural history and cultural studies in general, and more specifically of gender studies, cinema and literary studies, area studies, age

1 From Controversy to Debate from: Phenomenology Wide Open: After the French Debate
Abstract: On the one hand, while remaining the target of harsh methodological criticism,¹ phenomenological research has experienced a veritable proliferation which can only encourage the interested scholar to inquire about the various forms of this surprising vitality and to question the reasons for it.

4 Articulations/Disarticulations from: Phenomenology Wide Open: After the French Debate
Abstract: Having noted and analyzed the main aporias and the non-negligible misunderstandings which flow from the will to institute (or to reinstate) phenomenology as first philosophy, it is now time to adopt a more positive point of view by addressing the inevitable question: “Is the phenomenological project amendable?”

5 Toward a “Minimalist” Phenomenology: from: Phenomenology Wide Open: After the French Debate
Abstract: By setting itself up as first philosophy, claiming that it alone occupies the position of a “real” philosophy to come, a certain kind of phenomenology seems to us to have overestimated its capacities. Its presumption consists in seeking to reinstitute the ancient, royal privilege of philosophy over the particular sciences, in speculating excessively upon its very own “possible,” and even in engaging in a tactic of hyperbole in order to win the attention and recognition of the vast majority of nonpositivist philosophers. Whether this is a deliberate plan, a genuine faith in the mission of philosophy, or an illusion sincerely

CHAPTER 3 Finding the Zumbah: from: Provocations to Reading: J. Hillis Miller and the Democracy to Come
Author(s) Odom Glenn
Abstract: J. Hillis Miller begins Speech Acts in Literaturewith a promise to show the problematic nature of speech acts in and as literature.¹ Miller’s promise has the authorization that comes, as he says “by being ‘appointed,’ by being given ‘tenure,’ by having [his] seminar description approved beforehand” (4). My critique of his work carries with it none of Miller’s authority. I am perhaps, to cite Miller’s citation of J. L. Austin, “Some Low Type” (or perhaps I should say “‘some low type,’” since this is my citation of Miller’s citation of Austin, a graduate student attempting to claim authority (ibid.).

CHAPTER 5 Hillis’s Charity from: Provocations to Reading: J. Hillis Miller and the Democracy to Come
Author(s) Williams Jennifer H.
Abstract: J. Hillis Miller has loved well as a writer, critic, and theorist. For Hillis, one cannot read well without love—reading is a matter of love because one must submit oneself to an uncontrollable performative force that arises when one attends to a radical recognition of difference in the text. Miller’s long career teaches us that love is the primary obligation that binds the critic to his or her work because instead of covering over a multitude of sins and acting as a blinding or obfuscating force, love requires the critic to respond to the absolute differences and particularities of

1 Reason, Faith, and the Rediscovery of Sensibility from: The Heart Has Its Reasons
Abstract: Is there something wrong with the modern mind? Does it suffer from a chronic disease? Can one detect symptoms of a potential malaise? There are a few solitary thinkers who, in a bold and curious manner, claim to have diagnosed what they see as a latent and threatening illness: the modern mind has lost its balance, it has become disproportioned and it even shows signs of a fatal disintegration. One such critical voice narrates the following etiology:

EIGHT MACHIAVELLIAN RHETORIC IN PARADISE LOST from: Machiavellian Rhetoric
Abstract: BETTER than any other single figure, Satan in Paradise Lostexemplifies the intersection of rhetoric, theology, the Machiavel, and the republican that we have been exploring in this book.¹ Perhaps the most famous nondramatic Machiavel of the Renaissance, Satan is a skillful orator and casuist, who uses rhetorical force and fraud to wheedle and coerce his fellow fallen angels. Not surprisingly, the topics of Machiavellism—the relation ofvirtùor virtue to success, means to ends, persuasion to coercion, force to consent—appear regularly in his speeches. What is surprising, or truly diabolical, however, is the way Satan attributes the

Introduction: from: Empire of Chance
Abstract: the increasingly loud thunder of the cannon is followed by the howling of bullets, which attracts the attention of the inexperienced. Bullets begin to strike the ground close to us, before and behind. We run toward the hill where the commanding officer is positioned with his large retinue. Here the impact of the cannonballs and the explosion of shells become so frequent that the seriousness of life shatters the adolescent fantasy. Suddenly a friend falls to

2 State of War 1800: from: Empire of Chance
Abstract: In 1812 the Russian emperor summoned Carl von Clausewitz to a war council. A report about unforeseen enemy movements had just come in, and its effect on their military plans needed to be gauged. The three members of the council gathered around a map lying on the table and began discussing the different scenarios:

3 Modus Operandi: from: Empire of Chance
Abstract: In the collection of Napoleonic bon mots that Balzac collected and published in 1838, the French emperor at one point states, “War is above all a matter of tact.”¹ The pithy formulation compresses a whole discourse in philosophy, military theory, pedagogy, and literature into a single concept. What for Napoleon, or at least for Balzac’s Napoleon, is presented as a self-evident truth in need of no further explanation was the subject of a more detailed analysis in various fields that attempted to develop a kind of knowledge that could guide action. Clausewitz instituted probability as a conceptual paradigm for the

4 Exercising Judgment: from: Empire of Chance
Abstract: The interest in operational knowledge was not limited to the fields of philosophy, military theory, and literature. As the logical extension of the attempts to delineate its basic features the question arose: How does one acquire operational knowledge, and, conversely, how does one teach it? Practical knowledge entered the curriculum of educational theory. Military pedagogy, however, differed from the contemporary developments in educational theory during the second half of the eighteenth century in that it was specifically tailored to the state of war. This created a fundamental problem, for how does one train a recruit without exposing him to the

Book Title: A Practice of Anthropology-The Thought and Influence of Marshall Sahlins
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): KELLY JOHN D.
Abstract: Marshall Sahlins (b. 1930) is an American anthropologist who played a major role in the development of anthropological theory in the second half of the twentieth century. Over a sixty-year career, he and his colleagues synthesized trends in evolutionary, Marxist, and ecological anthropology, moving them into mainstream thought. Sahlins is considered a critic of reductive theories of human nature, an exponent of culture as a key concept in anthropology, and a politically engaged intellectual opposed to militarism and imperialism. This collection brings together some of the world’s most distinguished anthropologists to explore and advance Sahlins’s legacy. All of the essays are based on original research, most dealing with cultural change - a major theme of Sahlins’s research, especially in the contexts of Fijian and Hawaiian societies. Like Sahlins’s practice of anthropology, these essays display a rigorous, humanistic study of cultural forms, refusing to accept comfort over accuracy, not shirking from the moral implications of their analyses. Contributors include the late Greg Dening, one of the most eminent historians of the Pacific, Martha Kaplan, Patrick Kirch, Webb Keane, Jonathan Friedman, and Joel Robbins, with a preface by the late Claude Levi-Strauss. A unique volume that will complement the many books and articles by Sahlins himself, A Practice of Anthropology is an exciting new addition to the history of anthropological study.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c99c4k

Introduction: from: A Practice of Anthropology
Author(s) KELLY JOHN D.
Abstract: It is time to add Marshall Sahlins to the short list of great anthropologists, time to celebrate his contributions to the discipline, and time to discuss the far–reaching impact of his works. Sahlins has proved a more difficult (and diffdent) subject for celebratory synthesis than many of his peers. The works of Eric Wolf (Abbink and Vermeulen 1992), Louis Dumont (Heesterman 1985), and others have received the attention they deserve, and the paeans for Clifford Geertz began even before his unfortunate passing in 2006 (Ortner 1999, Shweder and Good 2005). The most important anthropologist of the period afted the

1 How Long Is a Longue Durée? from: A Practice of Anthropology
Author(s) ROBBINS JOEL
Abstract: The drawing together of history and anthropology has been one of the major stories in the development of anthropological thought over the last forty years. It is a story in which Marshall Sahlins has played a central role, and the making of a marriage between these two disciplines has clearly been close to his heart: the words “history” or “historical” have appeared in the titles of five of his books since 1981. To the conjunction of history and anthropology he has done so much to effect, Sahlins has brought a robust notion of cultural structures, and he has shown how

2 Monarchical Visions: from: A Practice of Anthropology
Author(s) LINNEKIN JOCELYN
Abstract: On 18 August 1885 the Samoan high chief Malietoa Laupepa wrote a letter to Queen Victoria (Figure 2.1).¹ Addressing her as “Tupu Tamaitai,” the “Lady King” of Great Britain and Ireland, Laupepa endeavoured to clarify Samoan political custom for her. He would have her know that, according to the customary beliefs of Samoa from the earliest times, he– Malietoa Laupepa – was the “real King” (Tupu) of Samoa. Laupepa’s letter to Victoria was but one of many appeals by would-be Samoan kings to foreign powers and powerful resident foreigners. During the protracted “kingship dispute” of the late nineteenth century, Samoan chiefly

3 Slow Time: from: A Practice of Anthropology
Author(s) KEANE WEBB
Abstract: In its origins, anthropology was a response not only to the colonial encounter with difference, but also to the discovery of deep time (Shryock and Smail 2011, Trautmann 1992). One of the most dangerous consequences of the convergence of global reach and deep time, of course, was to conflate the two, equating others with ancients. Disciplinary self-critique eventually made it obvious that such an equation was hopelessly naive if not outright vicious, or worse. In response, many cultural anthropologists came to confine their claims to the particularity of local knowledge (Geertz 1983). Others moved toward an increasingly narrow focus on

6 Chassé–croisé: from: A Practice of Anthropology
Author(s) CUNHA MANUELA CARNEIRO DA
Abstract: Sahlins has repeatedly made the case for the indigenization of Western cosmologies and for the reconfiguration of Western happenings into Indigenous events. Around a single happening, different events take place for different people, simultaneous yet

Book Title: Freud's Moses- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Yerushalmi Yosef Hayim
Abstract: In Freud's Mosesa distinguished historian of the Jews brings a new perspective to this puzzling work. Yosef Hayim Yerushalmi argues that while attempts to psychoanalyze Freud's text may be potentially fruitful, they must be preceded by a genuine effort to understand what Freud consciously wanted to convey to his readers. Using both historical and philological analysis, Yerushalmi offers new insights into Freud's intentions in writingMoses and Monotheism.He presents the work as Freud's psychoanalytic history of the Jews, Judaism, and the Jewish psyche-his attempt, under the shadow of Nazism, to discover what has made the Jews what they are. In the process Yerushalmi's eloquent and sensitive exploration of Freud's last work provides a reappraisal of Freud's feelings toward anti-Semitism and the gentile world, his ambivalence about psychoanalysis as a "Jewish" science, his relationship to his father, and above all a new appreciation of the depth and intensity of Freud's identity as a "godless Jew."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cc2kmd

2 Sigmund Freud, Jewish Historian from: Freud's Moses
Abstract: That Freud should have turned to history to solve his Jewish riddles comes as no surprise. Historicism of one kind or another has been a dominant characteristic of modern Jewish thought since the early nineteenth century, while the “historical” bent of psychoanalysis itself is, theoretically and therapeutically, part of its very essence.

CHAPTER SIX John Muir: from: The Idea of Wilderness
Abstract: Posterity has treated John Muir well, for the richness of his intellectual and institutional legacy continues to grow. In two decades, and especially in the ten years since the Muir archives were opened, the traditional view that he merely reiterated the tired truths of transcendentalism has been abandoned. A case can be made that he stands intellectually with Henry David Thoreau and Aldo Leopold as a thinker whose work yet exerts major influence on contemporary American ideas of wilderness. In instrumental terms, Muir is the father of the American conservation (now preservation) movement; his influence is most visibly manifest in

CHAPTER EIGHT The Idea of Wilderness in the Poetry of Robinson Jeffers and Gary Snyder from: The Idea of Wilderness
Abstract: This chapter focuses on the idea of wilderness in the poetry of Robinson Jeffers and Gary Snyder, consequently ignoring other writers and poets whose work also reflects that concept. The selection of Jeffers and Snyder delimits an otherwise impossibly large field, and there is some reason to think that the choice is sound since “ecological consciousness seems most vibrant in the poetic mode. The poetic voices of Jeffers and Snyder, so rare in modern poetry but frequently found in primal people’s oral tradition, are a virtual cascade of celebration of Nature/God and being.”¹ We have already argued that Modernism—or,

CHAPTER NINE Contemporary Wilderness Philosophy: from: The Idea of Wilderness
Abstract: Contemporary ideas of wilderness are implicit Within activities as diverse as the legislative and judicial decisionmaking processes, policy implementation, and philosophical speculation. Ideally, some distinct idea might cut across this array of subjects and unite them along a continuum, much as the principles of liberal democracy unite diverse elements of the body politic. As Samuel Hays observes, environmentally oriented inquiry has not led “to a single system of thought such as social theorists might prefer, and it would be difficult to reduce its varied strands to a single pattern” ¹ Typically, however, those concerned with the idea of wilderness offer

CHAPTER THREE The Sacred Jungle 2: from: Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: It is but twenty-five years since Walter Benjamin’s writings began to be published in full. Whatever the merit of this extraordinary man of letters, whom it has now become fashionable to invoke, his interest in both Marxist thought and Jewish mysticism has made him a war zone subject to incursions by competing factions. Is he a religious thinker, or is he a social thinker inspired primarily by Marxism? Though the terms of the debate seem naive, they suggest that religious and political modes of thought are enemy brothers disputing the same territory. After Marx and Freud, there is a tendency

CHAPTER SIX Purification and Danger 2: from: Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: A strange thought comes to Errlerson on reading Carlyle’s Sartor Resartus. It is an uncleanly book, a rag-bag philosophy, conceived (Carlyle jokes) among the Old Clothes shops of London, though rising to transcendental flights of fancy. “There is a part of ethics,” writes Emerson, “... which possesses all attraction to me; to wit, the compensations of the Universe, the equality and the coexistence of action and reaction, that all prayers are granted, that every debt is paid. And the skill witll which the great All maketh clean work as it goes along, leaves no rag, consumes its smoke.”¹

CHAPTER EIGHT Literary Commentary as Literature from: Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: The school of Derrida confronts us with a substantial problem. What are the proper relations between the “critical” and “creative” activities, or between “primary” and “secondary” texts? In 1923, writing his own essay on “The Function of Criticism,” T. S. Eliot accused Matthew Arnold of distinguishing too bluntly between critical and creative. “He overlooks the capital importance of criticism in the work of creation itself.” Eliot’s perception was, of course, partially based on the literary work of French writers since Flaubert and Baudelaire, including Mallarmé, Laforgue, and Valéry. But Eliot is wary lest his charge against Arnold, and in favor

The Recognition Scene of Criticism from: Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: Wallace Martin’s response to “Literary Criticism and Its Discontents” is anything but naive. Its most sophisticated device is to posit my invention of a “naive reader” and to suggest that I would place the New Critics and their heirs in that category. But when I see the movement of criticism after Arnold as exhibiting an anti-self-consciousness principle or being so worried about a hypertrophy of the critical spirit that that spirit is acknowledged only by refusing it seminal or creative force, I am not alleging naivete but “organized innocence,” or the privileged assignment of some given, intuitive (in that sense

Criticism, Indeterminacy, Irony from: Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: “Indeterminacy” is a word with bad vibes. It evokes a picture of the critic as Hamlet, “sicklied o’er with the pale cast of thought.” It is often said to involve an attack on the communicative or edifying function of literature. A pseudoscientific or anti-humanist bias is ascribed to critics when they do not replace words by meanings quickly enough. We like to consume our literature. We like to think of critics as service stations that keep readers fueled for their more important business, refreshing them and speeding them on.

A Short History of Practical Criticism from: Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: What at present preoccupies scholars and students in the literary humanities is clear: the lack of interaction between their profession and the mainstream of society. Though this is a recurrent problem, I. A. Richards had thought to find a secure place for literary studies by denying the existence of a “phantom aesthetic state” and basing the critic’s work on two pillars. “The two pillars upon which a theory of criticism must rest are an account of value and an account of communication” ( Principles of Literary Criticism, 1924). Having established these principles, an eminently “practical criticism” became possible; the bookPractical

6 “The Play between the Spaces”: from: Wallace Stevens among Others
Abstract: Thanks to Wallace Stevens, our focus in the last chapter on the “irrational element” in poetry by means of its speculative relationship to Freudian and post-Freudian psychoanalysis from the 1950s and onward perhaps requires us to explore further Stevens’s own specific debt to the psychoanalytic enterprise itself. I therefore designate psychoanalysis as an “other,” and here a terminal context among others in this study, all the while exercising some caution, as in the last chapter when the subject was broached in relation to Schuyler by means of (and with respect to) Deleuze. This hesitation in Stevens’s case arises because commentators

3 The Psychological Approach from: Twentieth Century Theories of Art
Abstract: It has been said that with the possible exception of Einstein no one has had more influence than Freud on the 20th century. It is not surprising, therefore, that Freudian approaches to art have been popular. Since a general acquaintance with Freudian theory can be assumed only a very brief introduction will be given.

4 The Sociological Approach from: Twentieth Century Theories of Art
Abstract: Any approach to art is sociological which solves the familiar problems of description, interpretation and evaluation by setting the artwork in the context of the society in which it was produced. Nowadays sociological approaches tend either to be committed to or influenced by Marxist views. I use the plural deliberately since there is not a single commonly accepted Marxist approach to a theory of art and art criticism.

6 Existentialism and Phenomenology from: Twentieth Century Theories of Art
Abstract: Contemporary existentialism is typically a combination of two backgrounds, classical 19th century existentialis1l1 and phenomenological techniques. Though existentialist themes are to be found in Greek thought and in the Bible, the two most influential modem proponents are Kierkegaard (1813-1855) and Nietzsche (1844-1900). In Kierkegaard basic themes include: emphasis on the individual in his concrete particularity as contrasted with the individual conceived as part of a system; general antipathy to systems and rules; emphasis on commitment and choice as essential for real existence: emphasis on freedom as realized in the choices by the individual who in choosing makes himself; despair/dread in

7 Poststructuralism from: Twentieth Century Theories of Art
Abstract: It is not clear where semiotics/structuralism ended and poststructuralism began. Indeed it is not clear whether we are dealing with a new movement or new developments in semiotics/structuralism. But it is certain that since the mid-sixties a number of French writers, while still drawing on Saussure, have developed this tradition in novel ways: in Roland Barthes’ writing the shift is evident between Elements of SemiologyandS/Z. Though there are similarities amongst poststructuralists there are also very distinctive differences. Consequently it seems more profitable to describe the theorists who have been most influential than to attempt an encompassing definition. Since

Book Title: Archaeology and Memory- Publisher: Oxbow Books
Author(s): Borić Dušan
Abstract: Memory can be both a horrifying trauma and an empowering resource. From the Ancient Greeks to Nietzsche and Derrida, the dilemma about the relationship between history and memory has filled many pages, with one important question singled out: is the writing of history to memory a remedy or a poison? Recently, a growing interest in and preoccupation with the issue of memory, remembering and forgetting has resulted in a proliferation of published works, in various disciplines, that have memory as their focus. This trend, to which the present volume contributes, has started to occupy the dominant discourses of disciplines such as sociology, philosophy, history, anthropology and archaeology, and has also disseminated into the wider public discourse of society and culture today. Such a condition may perhaps echo the phenomenon of a melancholic experience at the turn of the millennium. Archaeology and Memory seeks to examine the diversity of mnemonic systems and their significance in different past contexts as well as the epistemological and ontological importance of archaeological practice and narratives in constituting the human historical condition. The twelve substantial contributions in this volume cover a diverse set of regional examples and focus on a range of prehistoric and classical case studies in Eurasian regional contexts as well as on the predicaments of memory in examples of the archaeologies of 'contemporary past'. From the Mesolithic and Neolithic burial chambers to the trenches of World War I and the role of materiality in international criminal courts, a number of contributors examine how people in the past have thought about their own pasts, while others reflect on our own present-day sensibilities in dealing with the material testimonies of recent history. Both kinds of papers offer wider theoretical reflections on materiality, archaeological methodologies and the ethical responsibilities of archaeological narration about the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cd0pmc

2. The diversity and duration of memory from: Archaeology and Memory
Author(s) Whittle Alasdair
Abstract: Does it matter where archaeologists get their theories from? We are often told that our own world and culture are bad guides to what went on in the past, and the desire to avoid ethnocentrism is obvious and understandable. This has, however, regrettable consequences, since it can lead to the creation of very general, if not rather abstract theory. Current interest in agency is a good case in point. John Barrett has presented some of the most important discussions of this central topic. An earlier study was centred on the case study of developments in the area around Avebury during

4. Forgetting and remembering the digital experience and digital data from: Archaeology and Memory
Author(s) Tringham Ruth
Abstract: This paper grew out of a conversation about memories; about remembering my first Mac; what a sharp memory and a powerful event it was; and how all the memories of using computers and their peripherals in the field since then explode in its wake with ever increasing complexity and speed until the digital media engulf and revolutionise our field experience and we can hardly remember a time when experience in the field was entirely non-digital.

6. Constructing the warrior: from: Archaeology and Memory
Author(s) Hanks Bryan
Abstract: There has been an increasing interest in exploring the social aspects of late prehistoric warriors in Eurasia. While some scholars have focused more on the ranking and prestige connected with political authority ( e.g. Earle 1987; Kristiansen 1998; Kristiansen and Larsson 2005; Shennan 1986) others have emphasised the fluid nature of identity and ethnicity and the wide range of variability in their material expressions. Such approaches have shifted towards theoretical archaeologies, which explore the nuances of the socially constructed body, object materiality, and the significance of funerary rites and monuments as loci for the construction and negotiation of individual and community

12. Memory, melancholy and materiality from: Archaeology and Memory
Author(s) Buchli Victor
Abstract: Memory requires a certain degree of iterability both material and discursive in order to sustain it. It is this iterability that presences the absence of a loved one, the nation, home, or ones subjectivity or sexuality. From Foucault we know the importance of the iterative structures both materially and discursively that sustains subjectivities through various disciplines, such as the trained sinews of the soldiers body that remind him that he is no longer a peasant but a well trained disciplined soldier. However, when this iterability fails, both materially and discursively then there is a crisis of being.

1 Professor John Gwynne Evans, 1941–2005 aka ‘Snails’ Evans – an appreciation from: Land and People
Author(s) Allen Michael J.
Abstract: John ‘snails’ Evans, developed a whole new sub-discipline of palaeo-environmental enquiry for archaeology, advancing both the understanding of past landscapes and human activity, and that of palaeo-molluscan ecology. He was an influential figure both as an environmental archaeologist and prehistorian, and as an old-fashioned field naturalist. Although others before him (Zeuner, Dimbleby) had set the course, it was John who almost single-handedly developed the discipline of environmental archaeology and, in 1970, was appointed as lecturer of environmental archaeology at Cardiff, the first post of its kind outside London. He became a Reader in 1982, a Professor in 1994 and retired

2 Culture and Environment; mind the gap from: Land and People
Author(s) O’Connor Terry
Abstract: The landscape around us is the very substance of archaeology. In it are the traces of past human activity that we seek to understand, many of those traces having originated in the response of earlier peoples to the landscape around them. That earlier landscape in turn bore the traces of yet earlier peoples’ ways of shaping and using the land. Successive generations of people living in a locality understand and respond to its particular characteristics in distinctive ways, thereby altering the content and appearance of that landscape for the future, whilst also responding to the landscape features and qualities that

4 Experimental Archaeology: from: Land and People
Author(s) Bell Martin
Abstract: Experimental archaeology may be defined as the creation of activities and contexts in which ideas about the past can be thought through in practical terms and tested. For instance: how were artefacts made and buildings constructed; what residues are left of particular activities; and what is the capability of a boat? Experiments often mean that some parameters are controlled in order to make precise observations about others, such as the effects of time. The main syntheses of the subject were written 30 years ago or more (Coles 1973; 1979), even then it was a diverse field encompassing many distinct specialisms.

13 Beaker Settlement in the Western Isles from: Land and People
Author(s) Sharples Niall
Abstract: In this paper I wish to follow up some conversations I had with John Evans about the distinctive characteristics of Beaker settlement in the Outer Hebrides. In the early stages of his career John had a particular interest in the machair landscapes of northern Britain and he worked with his students on the important Neolithic and Early Bronze Age settlements of Northton, Harris; Udal, North Uist; Rosinish, Benbecula and Skara Brae and Knap of Howar in Orkney (Evans 1979). The results from the work at Northton were particularly important and provided a signifi cant contribution to a seminal paper on

[Part 4 Introduction] from: Land and People
Abstract: John was famous for his contribution to the discipline of the study of land snails in archaeology. He studied shells, using their ecologies to help with understanding landscape, vegetation patterns, land-use and people. He worked with marine molluscs and discussed their exploitation as well as analysing assemblages from Wales with Vivian Evans. In all cases John was keenly aware of the ecology of the species under examination which was required for the first stage of interpretation – but then those data and interpretations were applied to archaeology; the interpretations were made valid and appropriate to the understanding of human communities, economies

18 As We Were Saying: from: Land and People
Author(s) Whittle Alasdair
Abstract: John Evans hated formality; anything that involved suits, ties or agendas made him unhappy. This unease extended, I believe, to grand or over-abstract theorising. He was much more comfortable in informal settings; field trips, especially with a small group, or the task of cross-examining a section during excavation, were his forte. There he could bring to bear, in particular situations, his extraordinarily wide frame of reference. Looking back on his last two books,Land and ArchaeologyandEnvironmental Archaeology and the Social Order(Evans 1999; 2003), and especially the latter, one might be tempted to see a superficially anecdotal style,

20 The Social Face of Threshing Floors from: Land and People
Author(s) Paschali Aikaterini K.
Abstract: At Tholaria, a village at the far north-eastern corner of the island, I asked a man to explain the process to me. They need animals to do the threshing – about 4 horses turning around and pressing the crop to come out – special precautions are needed

6. Miracles from: Atheism for Beginners
Abstract: If asked to name the two favourite saints of Catholic Italy, one’s first candidate would be predictable enough. It is Giovanni Francesco di Bernardone (c. 1181-1226), otherwise known as St Francis of Assisi, founder of the Franciscan order and one of the most venerated of all religious figures, probably second only to Jesus himself within the Christian tradition. The double-tiered Basilica of Assisi, built over the crypt housing the saint’s body, was completed just twenty-seven years after St Francis’ death. Designed by one of his disciples, Brother Elia Bombardone, it is one of the great buildings of the world, and

Book Title: Principalities and Powers-Revising John Howard Yoder’s Sociological Theology
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Pitts Jamie
Abstract: The present book is an attempt to grapple with Yoder’s critics in order to decide how to move forward with a revised “Yoderian" theology. Pitts suggests how that revision should be accomplished by first providing an overview of the current state of Yoder scholarship and this book’s place within it; then proposing an argument that Yoder’s theology can profitably read as a “sociological theology" that exhibits reductive tendencies, but which can be revised to be non-reductive; and finally offering an outline and justification of the proposed method of revision, which involves putting Yoder’s theology of the principalities and powers into conversation with the reflexive sociology of Pierre Bourdieu.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cg4k49

3 Revising Yoderʹs Theology of Violence from: Principalities and Powers
Abstract: The social and spiritual context of human beings suggests that the refusal of grace, as much as its acceptance, is not just an inner or individual phenomenon. Yoder’s sociological theology unsurprisingly casts sin in broad structural and cosmic terms. The powers are fallen, meaning, the created social structures are now badly malformed. God’s intended peaceful order has been disrupted and violence is the norm. As a Christian pacifist, Yoder was concerned to expose how violence is implicated in the everyday language and practices of Christians. Some critics argue that he was so focused on violence that he lost sight of

5 Revising Yoderʹs Ecclesial Politics from: Principalities and Powers
Abstract: Alongside his christocentric pacifism, Yoder is perhaps best known for posing the church as an alternative political body to the nation state. In imitation of the politics of Jesus, Christian communities are to share goods, welcome the excluded, and practice reconciliation, servant leadership, and the priesthood of believers.¹ When it does these things, the church becomes “a proclamation of the lordship of Christ to the powers from whose dominion the church has begun to be liberated.”² Through faithfulness to its master, not compromise, the church fulfills its call “to contribute to the creation of structures more worthy of human society.”³

6 Revising Yoderʹs Theology of Christian Particularity from: Principalities and Powers
Abstract: At the center of John Howard Yoder’s theology of the principalities and powers is the conviction that Jesus Christ was crucified and then raised from the dead and made lord of the cosmos. Christ’s lordship is universal, knowing no bounds and hindered by no opposing powers. Hence, even in their continuing rebellion, the powers are instruments of divine order. This instrumentalization of the powers denies them their autonomy, and is part of their redemptive subordination. The church participates in the redemption of the powers through intense relating to the triune God, relating that is especially empowered by the present Holy

Book Title: In the Fellowship of His Suffering-A Theological Interpretation of Mental Illness — A Focus on "Schizophrenia"
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Swinton John
Abstract: Schizophrenia is often considered one of the most destructive forms of mental illness. Elahe Hessamfar’s personal experience with her daughter’s illness has led her to ask some pressing and significant questions about the cause and nature of schizophrenia and the Church’s role in its treatment. With a candid and revealing look at the history of mental illness, In the Fellowship of His Suffering describes schizophrenia as a variation of human expression. Hessamfar uses a deeply theological rather than pathological approach to interpret the schizophrenic experience and the effect it has on both the patients and their families. Effectively drawing on the Bible as a source of knowledge for understanding mental illness, she offers a reflective yet innovative view of whether the Church could or should intervene in such encounters and what such an intervention might look like. Hessamfar’s comprehensive work will provoke powerful responses from anyone interested in the prominent social issue of mental illness. Her portrayal of the raging debate between treating “insanity" either pastorally or medically will enthral readers, be they Christians, medical students or those in the field of psychiatry and social sciences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cg4kgg

one Is Satan Evil? from: Facing the Fiend
Abstract: Understanding Satan as a character requires the introduction of a contextin which the character operates. Our search for Satan’s dwelling place takes us to different areas of definition and interpretation, but the most fundamental question at this point is the relationship between Satan and evil. The question of whether the character of Satan is evil or not cannot be answered readily, since the problem is twofold: like any character, Satan has many layers and describing him as evil is an over-simplification. At the same time, the abstract concept of evil depends on contextual circumstances. The best approach seems the

three Satan in Story and Myth from: Facing the Fiend
Abstract: Satan is part of the myth of evil and if we assume that the story is one way to approach the reality of evil, we need to examine the myth in more detail. From a secular viewpoint, any metaphysical approach to the question of evil does not work. The responsibilities for all human actions lay, since Kant, in the agent’s will and accordingly, so does the decision to commit an evil deed. Nevertheless, despite all efforts to explain human behavior with psychology, sociology, biology, and psychoanalysis, there seems to be an explanatory gap when it comes to actions that hurt

5 Love Is All and God Is Love: from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Hickman Louise
Abstract: Universalism was a doctrine not widely espoused in seventeenth-century England. That hell is eternal was orthodox belief¹ and any suggestion to the contrary was viewed with grave suspicion as a “detestable and damnable” doctrine of the Arminians;² an opinion believed to give rise to ethical anarchy and antinomianism. If hell is finite, what sort of deterrent is it against misbehaving in this life? What use is Christ’s death if God can cancel the debt of human sin by will alone? Despite general denigration, however, arguments that God’s salvation has universal scope gradually gathered momentum throughout the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries.

8 Salvation in Community: from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Rae Murray
Abstract: The theology of Friedrich Schloiermacher arose from the atempt to consider in relation to one another the New Testament witness to Jesus Christ and the contents of human consciousness. For Schleiermacher, the New Testament and human consciousness provided jointly authoritative testimony to the being of God, but Schleiermacher was well aware of the predilections of his age, particularly the growing skepticism about biblical authority and the increased confidence in the deliberations of the rational mind. G. E. Lessing (1729–1781), who represented well the intellectual climate in which Schleiermacher wrote contended that the testimony of the New Testament “no longer

14 The Totality of Condemnation Fell on Christ: from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Goddard Andrew
Abstract: The French Reformed lay theologian Jacques Ellul is probably better known for his original and insightful work in social analysis and critique rather than in theology, and yet his wrestling with issues of hell and universal salvation offer some original insights for contemporary theology. In one sense the focus on his sociological works is not surprising given his area of academic expertise. His original degree was in law and, from the end of the Second World War until his retirement in 1980, he served as the Professor of the History and Sociology of Institutions in the Law Faculty of Bordeaux

15 In the End, God . . . : from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Hart Trevor
Abstract: John Robinson is best remembered nowadays as an agent provocateurin ecclesial and theological terms. The self-confessed “radical”¹ became a household name more or less overnight in the early 1960s due to two particular acts of self-conscious provocation. First he appeared at the Old Bailey to defend Penguin Books against charges of obscenity in connection with their publication of an unexpurgated text ofLady Chatterley’s Lover.² Then, just as the dust was settling and the press pack losing interest, Robinson published his own “sensational” paperback,Honest to God—a popular work designed to introduce the “man on the Clapham omnibus”

16 Christ’s Descent into Hell: from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Oakes Edward T.
Abstract: The many controversies provoked by Christian theology can be usefully, if roughly, divided into two genera: those controversies raised by outsiders who reject Christian doctrines entirely (like the existence of God or the resurrection of Jesus), and those that arise inside the precincts of the Christian theology (like the relationship between justification and works, or the atonement for sin won by Jesus on the cross). Inside that latter genus, no controversy has been more heated recently than the question of universal salvation.

17 Hell and the God of Love: from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Hall Lindsey
Abstract: John Hick is probably best known for his work on the relationship between Christianity and the other world religions. He is a philosopher of religion who, over the course of a lifetime spent in academia, has constantly revised and developed his beliefs. Hick has ended up, theologically speaking, a very long way from where he started off. As a young man, he had a conversion experience which he described as an increasing awareness of the presence of God.¹ This was the beginning of a long spiritual journey which quickly moved from the “conservative evangelical” world to more liberal expressions of

18 The Annihilation of Hell and the Perfection of Freedom: from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Ansell Nik
Abstract: “[T]he theology of the cross,” writes Moltmann in his early work The Crucified God, “is the true Christian universalism. There is no distinction here, and there cannot be any more distinctions. All are sinners without distinction, and all will be made righteous without any merit on their part by his grace which has come to pass in Christ Jesus (Rom 3:24).” Christ’s atonement for our sins is truly unlimited. That “God’s Son has died for all,” says Moltmann, “must undermine, remove, and destroy the things which mark men out as elect and non-elect.”²

Introduction from: After Imperialism
Author(s) Pao David W.
Abstract: This collection of essays arises from a commitment to the belief that evangelicalism continues to provide the historical assets and intellectual (hermeneutical and theological) tools for the global church. Evangelicalism possesses assets with explanatory power able to address significant theological and cultural issues arising out of the churches in the global south. We believe evangelical approaches to contextualization and biblical studies can produce valuable fruit. One such issue is that of identity. In May 2008 over a dozen evangelical scholars, Chinese and Western, from the United States, Hong Kong, and Taiwan, came together to address issues of Christian and evangelical

3 Overcoming Missions Guilt: from: After Imperialism
Author(s) Cook Richard R.
Abstract: The Protestant missionary movement had a profound impact on China, but also left an unintended legacy in the West. Western missions guilt is an unanticipated backlash from the missionary movement, which still reverberates today. Did the missionary movement draw the missionaries inexorably into the imperial project and, thus, the sins of the West? Popular culture in America has castigated the missions movement for decades, and missions in America has seemed to be in a defensive mode. Although missions, particularly North American evangelical missions, continued to expand—with an estimated more than 110,000 American and Canadian long-term Protestant missionaries serving today—

4 Chinese Evangelicals and Social Concerns: from: After Imperialism
Author(s) Yao Kevin Xiyi
Abstract: Social concern and involvement is undoubtedly one of the major indicators of the changing ethos of the evangelical movement in the twentieth century. Take the example of North America, where the evangelical movement has been influential not only in the Protestant church but society as a whole. From evangelicals’ balanced approach to soul-saving and social services, to the “Great Reversal” completed during the fundamentalist-modernist controversy of the 1920s and 1930s, to the re-emergence of the sense of social responsibility among evangelicals since the 1970s, the rise of American evangelicals’ social consciousness and commitment is quite dramatic. Nevertheless, American evangelicals’ experience

6 “Holy War” and the Universal God: from: After Imperialism
Author(s) Longman Tremper
Abstract: The “divine warrior” with its background in “holy war” is one of the most stirring themes in the Old Testament, but also one of the most difficult for a modern Christian to understand and appreciate. The battle of Jericho, for instance, is a magnificent display of divine power as the walls of this powerful Canaanite city-state come tumbling down so that the Israelites can defeat it without even raising a single siege ramp. On the other hand, if, as I believe we can safely presume, Joshua followed the requirements of ḥierem(Deut 20:16–18) on this occasion, this victory would

Book Title: An Introduction to the New Testament-2nd Edition
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Robbins C. Michael
Abstract: This second edition of An introduction to the New Testament provides readers with pertinent material and a helpful framework that will guide them in their understanding of the New Testament texts. Many new and diverse cultural, historical, social-scientific, sociorhetorical, narrative, textual, and contextual studies have been examined since the publication of the first edition, which was in print for twenty years. The authors retain the original tripartite arrangement on 1) The world of the New Testament, 2) Interpreting the New Testament, and 3) Jesus and early Christianity. An appropriate book for anyone who seeks to better understand what is involved in the exegesis of New Testaments texts today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cg4mm1

1 The Greco-Roman Context of the New Testament from: An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: Understanding the historical context is crucial for the serious study of any important document, person, or event. Using a modern example, no earnest interpreter of the U.S. Constitution can ignore the importance of eighteenth-century mercantilism and the prevalent teaching of social contract and popular sovereignty. Historical context is crucial for understanding. We will return to this same analogy in chapter 5.

3 The Language of the New Testament from: An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: In what language was the NT originally written? Almost all of the NT authors were Jews, but not a single book was written in Hebrew or Aramaic (a related Semitic language).¹ All of the NT books were written when Rome ruled the Mediterranean world, but none were written in Latin. Therefore we must turn to the one language prevalent during that period: ancient Greek. We have over five thousand manuscript copies of the NT written in Greek from the mid-second to the twelfth centuries. The earliest versions of the NT were in Syriac, Coptic, and Latin (as early as the

2 Cuius Regio, Eius Religio: from: Dealing with Dictators
Abstract: Historians have taken for granted that the Cold War originated at least partly in the fatal discord between the Soviet Union and the United States over the future of Eastern Europe. Scholars also tend to have narrowed the debate to the timing of and motivations behind the introduction of Stalinist regimes in Eastern Europe, generally focusing on whether the Sovietization of Eastern Europe was the predetermined result of Soviet foreign policy or a reaction to American assertiveness. This chapter will suggest that American policies had little or no influence on the course of events in Hungary. There is no evidence

4 1956: from: Dealing with Dictators
Abstract: On October 23, 1956, Hungary exploded. Although it is hard to pinpoint why one country remains docile under tyrannical rule while another revolts, historians have dedicated years of research to identifying the specific factors that led to the only armed uprising against Soviet rule. Because virtually all segments of Hungarian society had suffered various forms of repression, unrest was not confined to the capital city. Centrally engineered “circular social mobility” failed to satisfy even the social groups whose aspirations the regime had privileged.¹ Grievances included foreign military occupation, state terror that sometimes exceeded even the limits of Soviet tolerance, serious

6 The Dilemmas of External Transformation from: Dealing with Dictators
Abstract: American observers noticed that the communist regimes in Eastern Europe were becoming increasingly autonomous. They were beginning to assert that their national interests were not always identical with the Soviets’. Signs that they were heading toward more independence from Moscow made the European status quo acceptable to the United States, if not necessarily desirable. Some went as far as to argue that the Soviet occupation had produced an unprecedented stability in a former cockpit of continental hostilities. Soviet hegemony thus seemed preferable to an unchecked flow of unbridled nationalism. And while nationalism might have been part of the antidote to

7 “The Status Quo Is Not So Bad”: from: Dealing with Dictators
Abstract: It is hard to disagree with historian Geraint Hughes’ assessment that “throughout the late 1960s, Britain and other Western powers were above all concerned that the status quo in Europe should be upheld.”¹ The European status quo would be sanctioned by an unlikely candidate. Richard Nixon had been known for his uncompromising anticommunist stance, but as president he espoused an unabashed realism. He and Henry Kissinger formed a tandem that would redefine American Cold War politics and treat the division of Europe as if it were permanent. Stability was to prevail at the expense of the independence of old nation-states.

9 “Love Toward Kádár”: from: Dealing with Dictators
Abstract: Even though the United States had finally accepted the division of the continent on a permanent basis – and was not particularly secretive about having done so – the years of détente were coming to an end. Each side was accusing the other of violating the terms of the SALT I treaty. The Soviet Union may have been exploiting loopholes in the agreement to build superiority in the field of strategic nuclear missiles.¹ In fact, confidence between the two superpowers or indeed the two military alliances had never really taken hold. Security, as Churchill once put it, remained the “sturdy

6 “It Ain’t Necessarily So”: from: Preaching and the Personal
Author(s) BRIDGEMAN VALERIE
Abstract: In 1935, the musical “Porgy and Bess” made headlines because it was the first all African American cast to take to Broadway stages. Written by George and Ira Gershwin, it pushed American publics to see African American life. It was, to be sure, stereotypical in a lot of ways. When “Sportin’ Life,” a drug dealer, questions devotion of churchgoing listeners, he sings, “De things dat yo’ liable to read in de Bible, it ain’t necessarily so.” His words are heretical and scandalous. What he does in the song, and what people in marginalized communities continue to do, is to suggest

Book Title: Reading Scripture with the Saints- Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Fowl Stephen E.
Abstract: Reading Scripture with the Saints is a small museum. On its pages hang portraits of Christianity’s “masters of the sacred page": Gregory of Nyssa, Augustine of Hippo, Benedict of Nursia, Maximus Confessor, Thomas Aquinas, Martin Luther and Charles Wesley. Other, surprising figures also appear, such as Shakespeare, Washington and Lincoln. How did these figures from history interpret Scripture? What might their diverse approaches teach today’s readers of the Old and New Testaments? What is missing in contemporary biblical interpretation that an awareness of the history of exegesis might complete? Join C. Clifton Black as he traverses the Bible, Church History, systematic theology, Elizabethan drama and American politics. Reading Scripture with the Saints retrieves pre-modern insights for a post-modern world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgdw89

FOREWORD from: Reading Scripture with the Saints
Author(s) Fowl Stephen E.
Abstract: One of the very first tasks I took up as a newly minted PhD was a review of Clifton Black’s The Disciples According to Mark: Markan Redaction in Current Debate. I do not recall why I was asked to review the book or why I even agreed to do it, since I am not a specialist in Mark. The book was an absolute delight to read. Even though the material was quite technical, Black had a graceful writing style that made the material accessible without oversimplifying and distorting it. The book is a gentle but devastating criticism of the attempts

3 SERVING THE FOOD OF FULL–GROWN ADULTS from: Reading Scripture with the Saints
Abstract: If remembered at all, Augustine of Hippo (354–430) is associated with original sin, predestination, and other ideas consigned by many to a theological flea market. I shall not play the apologist for Augustine’s thought, even less attempt his rehabilitation among present-day skeptics.¹ Though astonishingly prolific, he enjoyed no ivory tower. His pivotal masterpieces— Confessions, The Trinity, The City of God, to name but three—were written on his career’s margins, from 396 until his death, as a diligent bishop in Hippo Regius, a scruffy African harbor-town. In those days a bishop was not the diocesan administrator that some modern

8 “NOT OF AN AGE, BUT FOR ALL TIME” from: Reading Scripture with the Saints
Abstract: In the slender space of twenty years not one but two corpora exploded the course of English language and literature. Two centuries separate Goethe (1749–1832) from Luther’s Bible (1534). Pushkin (1799–1837) consolidated Russia’s vernacular a century after East Slavic’s push and pull between Church Slavonic and Peter the Great (1672–1725). From 1590 to 1611 England witnessed the emergence of bothShakespearean poetryandthe King James Bible. The world has never been the same since. The Bard of Avon is now regarded as the preeminent dramatist on the world’s stage; no book has been published more often,

3 The Mythos of Modernity from: Returning to Reality
Abstract: In one of Shakespeare’s famous plays there is a scene in which some of Hamlet’s former schoolfellows flatter him about his breadth of mind. Hamlet’s response shows that he is well aware of the dark political subtext to this flattery, but his response also demonstrates precisely the kind of conceptual expansiveness he ironically denies. Refusing the compliment that Denmark is “too narrow for [his] mind” Hamlet says, “O God, I could be bounded in a nutshell and count myself a king of infinite space.”¹

Book Title: Grace for the Injured Self-The Healing Approach of Heinz Kohut
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Randall Robert L.
Abstract: Grace for the Injured Self shows the reader how the 'self psychology' developed by Heinz Kohut can be an influential theory for pastoral care. The late Kohut affirmed that religion is not only an expression of the self, but can also sustain the self in the alliance between faith and grace, with self psychology and empathy. Cooper and Randall articulately explore Kohut's psychoanalytic perspective of 'self psychology', orientated towards pastoral care for parishioners. The authors ascertain how the human condition is affected by 'self injury', and the relationship between this and the traditional notions of sin. Two interviews with Kohut, never before published in the UK, give the reader unique insights into the psychoanalyst who many regard as the most important figure in psychology since Sigmund Freud.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgdwgd

6 First Interview with Heinz Kohut from: Grace for the Injured Self
Author(s) Kohut Heinz
Abstract: Kohut: I don’t think that I could honestly say that religion is one of my foremost preoccupations. It’s really not. But since I’m interested in human beings andtheirpreoccupations, in what makes them tick, what’s important to them, and what’s on their minds, obviously religion is a powerful force in life. It has been an essential aspect of human existence as long as there has been any knowledge of human activity at all. So, naturally I’m interested in it as a student

Book Title: The Scarlet Woman and the Red Hand-Evangelical Apocalyptic Belief in the Northern Ireland Troubles
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Searle Joshua T.
Abstract: This book provides a comprehensive description of how evangelicals in Northern Ireland interpreted the "Troubles" (1966-2007) in the light of how they read the Bible. The rich and diverse landscape of Northern Irish evangelicalism during the "Troubles" is ideally suited to this study of both the light and dark sides of apocalyptic eschatology. Searle demonstrates how the notion of apocalypse shaped evangelical and fundamentalist interpretations of the turbulent events that characterized this dark yet fascinating period in the history of Northern Ireland. The book uses this case study to offer a timely reflection on some of the most pressing issues in contemporary negotiations between culture and religion. Given the current resurgence of religious fundamentalism in the wake of 9/11, together with popular conceptions of a "clash of civilizations" and the so-called War on Terror, this book is not only an engaging academic study; it also resonates with some of the defining cultural issues of our time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgdx0n

Conclusion from: The Scarlet Woman and the Red Hand
Abstract: As we approach the final stage of our study, it is appropriate to recapitulate the basic aim of the whole project. The task was to consider the ways in which apocalyptic-eschatological language contributed to the formation of evangelical worldviews during the Troubles. Through its comprehensive exploration of this issue, this study has traversed some of the most salient and pressing issues not only of millennial studies and the historiography of the Troubles but also of contemporary hermeneutics and critical theory. Underlying the various strands of the argument has been a unifying intention to initiate a mutually enriching conversation among a

Book Title: Why Resurrection?-An Introduction to the Belief in the Afterlife in Judaism and Christianity
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Blanco Carlos
Abstract: Few questions exert such a great fascination on human conscience as those related to the meaning of life, history, and death. The belief in the resurrection of the dead constitutes an answer to a real challenge: What is the meaning of life and history in the midst of a world in which evil, injustice, and ultimately death exist? Resurrection is an instrument serving a broader, more encompassing reality: the Kingdom of God. Such a utopian Kingdom gathers the final response to the problem of theodicy and to the enigma of history. This book seeks to understand the idea of resurrection not only as a theological but also as a philosophical category (as expression of the collective aspirations of humanity), combining historical, theological, and philosophical analyses in dialogue with some of the principal streams of contemporary Western thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgdxgw

Book Title: The Atheist's Primer- Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Palmer Michael
Abstract: In The Atheist's Primer, a prominent philosopher, Dr Michael Palmer, reinstates the importance of philosophy in the debate about God's existence. The 'new atheism' of Richard Dawkins and others has been driven by largely Darwinian objections to God's existence, limiting the debate to within a principally scientific framework. This has obscured the philosophical tradition of atheism, in which the main intellectual landmarks in atheism's history are to be found. With an analysis of atheistic thought from the Ancient Greeks to the present day, Palmer explains and comments on the philosophical arguments warranting atheism, discussing issues such as evil, morality, miracles, and the motivations for belief. The emphasis placed on materialism and the limitations of our knowledge might seem disheartening to some; but Palmer concludes on a positive note, arguing – alongside Nietzsche, Marx and Freud and many others – that happiness and personal fulfilment are to be found in the very materialism that religious belief rejects. Michael Palmer first addressed these issues in his student-oriented edition, The Atheist's Creed, of which The Atheist's Primer is a revised abridgement for the general reader. Palmer has now stripped out the primary texts and expanded his commentaries into fluent and concise analyses of the arguments. Free of philosophical jargon and assumptions of prior knowledge, this is an important introduction to a major cultural debate.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgdxp0

Introduction from: The Atheist's Primer
Author(s) Palmer Michael
Abstract: Atheism is currently enjoying the limelight, both in academic circles and in the popular press. The so-called ‘new atheists’ are in vogue, and books like Richard Dawkins’ The God Delusion(2006), Daniel Dennett’sBreaking the Spell(2006), Sam Harris’The End of Faith(2004) and hisLetter to a Christian Nation(2006) and the two volumes published in 2007 by the late Christopher Hitchens –God is not Greatand his wide-ranging anthologyThe Portable Atheist– have caught the public imagination. Unsurprisingly, believers have not been slow to enter the lists. Alister McGrath has countered with hisThe Twilight

7 The Motivations of Belief from: The Atheist's Primer
Abstract: In the evening I went very unwillingly to a society in Aldersgate Street, where one was reading Luther’s preface to the Epistle to the Romans. About a quarter before nine, while he was describing the change which God works in the heart through faith in Christ, I felt my heart strangely warmed. I felt I did trust in Christ, Christ alone, for salvation; and an assurance was given me that he had taken away my sins, even mine, and saved me from the law of

Book Title: Lyrical Theology of Charles Wesley - Expanded Edition-A Reader
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Kimbrough S.T.
Abstract: One of the difficulties in studying the theology of Wesleyan hymns and sacred poems is that it is couched in a literary and liturgical art form that does not fit into the usual intellectual paths defined over the last two centuries for the study of theology, which tends to be a prose endeavour. Charles Wesley composed a number of thematic collections of hymns, such as those based on the Christian year, e.g., Hymns for the Nativity of our Lord, Hymns for our Lord’s Resurrection, Hymns for Ascension-Day, Hymns for Whitsunday, but his lyrics on a plethora of theological themes, such as sanctification, perfection, holiness, etc., are scattered throughout his over 9,000 hymns and poems from a writing and publishing career that spanned almost fifty years. One of the primary purposes of this volume is to bring together a collection of hymns and sacred poems representative of Charles Wesley’s theological thinking. The texts are organized within a theological outline in order to make the study of his theological ideas and concepts more readily accessible, though many of them could be placed in diverse theological categories. This is a welcome addition to Wesleyan scholarship and a book that all those who sing Wesley's hymns will be interested in.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgdz67

2 Lyrical Theology: from: Lyrical Theology of Charles Wesley - Expanded Edition
Abstract: In the years since the appearance of that article, I have written about this subject in the previous chapter using the phrase lyrical theology

Book Title: Storied Revelations-Parables, Imagination and George MacDonald’s Christian Fiction
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Peterson Eugene H.
Abstract: George MacDonald, the Victorian poet and theologian, observed that his was a culture saturated with Christian jargon but often void of a profound understanding of the gospel for its own time and culture. The language of Scripture no longer penetrated people’s hearts, thoughts, and attitudes; it no longer transformed people’s lives. MacDonald, called to be a pastor, turned to story and more specifically the "parabolic" as a means of spiritual awakening. He created fictive worlds in which the language of Jesus would find a new home and regain its revelatory power for his particular Victorian audience. 'Storied Revelations' explores the interface between the Bible and George MacDonald’s fiction. The way Jesus uses language in the parables sheds light on our understanding of MacDonald’s careful use of language in his fiction. Further still, many of MacDonald’s stories are infused with the language of the Bible, often in rather surprising ways.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgdztj

Foreword from: Storied Revelations
Author(s) Peterson Eugene H.
Abstract: This is a most timely book. Timely, because the lives of Americans are increasingly distracted, and diverted—hijacked by the computer into cyberspace where it is possible to live without relationships, without grounding, without connection, without commitments, without ritual, without worship. A great number of wise and insightful observers for several decades now have been calling our attention to the resulting cultural, political, and spiritual poverty.

1 George MacDonald: from: Storied Revelations
Abstract: MacDonald is primarily a theological thinker and writer. This seems surprising to many as he is mostly known today for his fiction and fairytales and his influence on the famous Inklings, especially C. S. Lewis and J. R. R. Tolkien. This book explores MacDonald’s theological rationale for writing Christian fiction, arguing that it is precisely in his less overt theological works of fiction that one finds some of his most profound thinking on the lived dimension of Christian faith. When MacDonald has been considered as a serious theologian (as is the case in two of the most recent important works

2 Patterns of Subversion and Promise: from: Storied Revelations
Abstract: Jesus was a master of using parables to shape the imagination and consequently the lives of his followers and foes alike. While Jesus’ parables are in some ways quite different from George MacDonald’s Christian fiction, there are significant ways in which MacDonald’s works resemble and imitate the way Jesus taught in and through parable. MacDonald’s fiction, especially PhantastesandLilith, are complex literary creations, and while I shall argue in this book that parabolic patterns reminiscent of the parables of Jesus are an important way by which one can understand these works, it is by no means the only or

3 Patterns of Subversion and Promise: from: Storied Revelations
Abstract: As you know, ‘Heinrich Von Ofterdingen’ wh. I am reading is a very Macdonaldy book—indeed Novalis is perhaps the greatest single influence on Macdonald—full of ‘holiness’, gloriously German-romantic (i.e. a delicious mingling of earthy homeliness and magic, also of a sort of spiritual

Conclusion from: Storied Revelations
Abstract: We have suggested in the beginning of this book that George MacDonald is primarily a theological thinker and writer. What sort of a theologian is MacDonald? His pastoral concern was for his audience to come to know God in personal and transformative ways. His focus was on the lived dimension of the Christian faith. The way he sought to minister to his Christian audience was through story. While MacDonald employed a wide range of literary styles, the “parabolic” is a dimension of his writing that has received surprisingly little attention.

1 The Real Third Way from: The Crisis of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Milbank John
Abstract: A common view about Christianity and politics is that Christians divide up over politics in much the same way as other people. But this is only superficially true and only true of Christians who have thought about politics superficially and in disconnection from their faith. For if one examines the writings of Christian thinkers who have thought long, hard, and theologically about politics, then the consistency of their emphases ever since the dawn of the Industrial Age is extremely striking.

2 A Tale of a Duck-Billed Platypus Called Benedict and His Gold and Red Crayons from: The Crisis of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Rowland Tracey
Abstract: Caritas in Veritateis the most recent in a long list of papal interventions in the territory of social justice, and for most commentators there was nothing surprising in the document apart from its extraordinary length and the way in which it sought to offer a comprehensive overview of the whole tradition rather than isolating a couple of issues and focusing upon them. It was as if Benedict XVI reviewed the tradition, made an executive summary of what he regards as its most significant elements, and gave his papal stamp of approval to them, at the same time as enriching

3 “We Communists of the Old School” from: The Crisis of Global Capitalism
Author(s) McCarraher Eugene
Abstract: Thomas Carlyle once famously dubbed economics “the dismal science,” but Ruskin went his friend one better by denying that economics is a science at all. (That whatever it is, is still dismal, went without saying.) With a fine contempt that we’ve lost in our deference to the clerisy of the business schools, Ruskin declared his utter indifference astrology, witchcraft, and other such popular creeds,” Ruskin mused in Unto This Last, “political economy has a plausible idea at the root of it”: that human beings are motivated by self-interest. True, he conceded, but also trite and misleading, for men and women

4 Beyond the Culture of Cutthroat Competition from: The Crisis of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Zwick Louise
Abstract: Pope Benedict XVI’s social encyclical, Caritas in Veritate, took the economic world by surprise.¹ While readers on both the right and the left were waiting for more statements about capitalism and socialism, they found instead a challenge to Catholics and other people of good will toward a profoundly new way of understanding business enterprise. The Pope did not approve the status quo, but in what he called the socialmagisterium, addressed the global dimension of the social question understanding of what has been happening in the contemporary international economic scene. Benedict recognizes the disconnect between the Word of the Gospel

6 The Paradoxical Nature of the Good from: The Crisis of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Pabst Adrian
Abstract: A cross different academic disciplines, we are witnessing a fundamental and perhaps paradigmatic shift away from individuality towards relationality. Both natural sciences and humanities are seeing the emergence of different relational models that attempt to theorize the widespread recognition that reality cannot be reduced to self-generating, individual beings and that the outcome of interactions between various entities is more than the sum of parts (whether these be more atomistic or more collectivist). For instance, in particle physics it has been suggested that there are “things” such as quarks (subatomic particles) which cannot be measured individually because they are confined by

1 Discerning the Spirits of Modernity and Postmodernity from: Radical Embodiment
Abstract: I count myself among those scholars of religion (and other disciplines) who believe that we live in the midst of a major shift in Western culture—that we are moving from the modern age into a postmodern age. “Postmodern” has gained supremacy over the alternative terms “postcritical” and “postliberal.” Michael Polanyi’s “postcritical” stands as probably the best single word for conveying the substance of the shift from modernity as I construe it in this chapter. The term, as I understand it, does not suggest the impossibility or undesirability of appropriate critical reflection, but rather modernity’s failure to recognize the limits

2 Postmodernism(s) and Tradition from: Radical Embodiment
Abstract: “Without tradition our lives would be as shaky as . . . as a fiddler on the roof.” So intones Tevye in a (bodily) metaphor from Fiddler on the Roof.¹ As the play suggests, the role of tradition came under increasing threat in the modern period. Indeed, the dominant modern picture of human rationality, and by extension of human life, has been deracinate and discarnate—without roots in tradition or in the human body. I will argue that tradition and the body are—and should be acknowledged as—thoroughly interconnected. And I will attempt to reclaim the cruciality of tradition

5 Radical Embodiment in Light of the Science and Religion Dialogue from: Radical Embodiment
Abstract: In creating humankind God sculpted “the earth being,” according to the etymology of “Adam,” the Hebrew word for “humanity” used in Genesis 2. The portrait of humankind painted by the scriptures of Judaism, Christianity, and Islam regards the human person as a psycho-somatic unity. Scientific evidence increasingly points to the truth that human beings are fundamentally embodied in nature, contrary to the Greek-influenced mind-body dualism that has reigned for most of Western theological and philosophical history. In this chapter I will highlight the significance of our embodiment relative to evolutionary biology and to the nature of consciousness in light of

1 The Reconciling God from: Drinking from the Wells of New Creation
Abstract: Much of the focus of studies and teaching on reconciliation, especially for Protestants, has been on the cross of Jesus Christ and the individual’s restored relationship with God.² It is his sacrificial death that cleanses us from sin and creates the way for a new relationship with God the Father. Acknowledging the centrality of Jesus as the good news of who God is and what God has done is a vital emphasis. Both Barth and Bonhoeffer endeavored to correct theology that was losing this center and becoming more anthropocentric than theocentric. They discovered that a message focused more on human

Foreword from: The Gift of the Other
Author(s) Bouma-Prediger Steven
Abstract: Few today would doubt the claim that violence seems pervasive in contemporary society. Whether reading the local newspaper or the global online news, whether watching the latest film or listening to the newest music, violence of one sort or another seems omnipresent. The violence of our late-modern age, furthermore, seems embedded in competing claims about boundaries and identities and what some philosophers call our relationship to “The Other.” Some people cheerily claim that boundaries are (or soon will be) no more, since modern technologies are shrinking the walls and distances that separate us. Such shrinkage will, these optimists argue, render

A tête à tête. from: The Gift of the Other
Abstract: A few chapters after recounting the relationship between YHWH and Abraham, the Genesis narrative introduces us to Abraham’s grandson, Jacob. From the very beginning of the narrative, in the recounting of Jacob’s inter-uterine grappling with his twin brother, the reader is made aware of the struggle which will characterize Jacob’s life. Having stolen the birthright and father’s blessing from his brother Esau, and forced to flee for his life to his Uncle Laban, as Jacob’s life progresses it takes on a regular pattern. Despite receiving the blessing of the LORD (28: 10–20), for Jacob, unlike Abraham, this experience of

7 Performing a Different Script: from: The Gift of the Other
Abstract: In contrast to our post-structuralist philosophers who have a strong aversion to the idea of community, we have contended that it is only incommunionwith Christ, and thus in communitywithothers that the self finds its true identity. While it is God’s desire that all of creation should be brought into the joy of the Divine embrace, humanity, in its “sinful” desire forcommunionwithoutotherness, construes the Other not as one to delight in, but rather as one to be feared, struggled against, vanquished. This hostility towards both the human Other and the Wholly Other however however

Conclusion: from: The Gift of the Other
Abstract: Building relationships with the stranger has become increasingly difficult in an age where the dual discourses of the “war on terror” and “the market” hold sway. The influence of these pervasive discourses means Others come to be conceived as threats. The stranger is either to be explicitly feared—a potential “terrorist” coming to “destroy civilization” and our place in it—or, is simply another abstract commodity, at best, to be “tolerated,” or at worst, competing for limited resources, one to be struggled against.

Book Title: Life in the Spirit-A Post-Constantinian and Trinitarian Account of the Christian Life
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): snavely Andréa D.
Abstract: Christians are united in saying that the Christian life is a life in the Spirit. But the unity breaks down when explaining how the Christian life is a life in the Spirit. Life in the Spirit is the first book to engage the post-Constantinian critique of the church with the field of Spirit Christology. Building upon the work of post-Constantinians John Howard Yoder and Stanley Hauerwas and upon the Trinitarian Spirit-Christology of Leopoldo Sánchez, this account provides a framework for seeing one’s Christian life as one transformed by the Spirit. Snavely rejects the characterisation of life in the Spirit as bringing sinners to faith, and instead proposes that as Jesus lived as the Son of the Father in the Spirit, the Spirit also makes other sons of the father in the image of Jesus. This Trinitarian interpretation shows the Christian life as being one of total trust in God with one’s own life, and after death living in Jesus’ resurrected life in the Spirit. Snavely’s account calls for a reimagining of the church and the Christian life in terms of ecclesial structure, Christian discipleship and the Christian view of marriage. Life in the Spirit will not only help Christians to have a better understanding of the place of vocation in the world as witnesses to the lordship of Jesus Christ, but it will also promote unity in the body of Christ based on the actual unity that all his adopted sons and daughters already have by belonging to Jesus Christ’s life in the Spirit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf0pd

Foreword from: Life in the Spirit
Author(s) Okamoto Joel P.
Abstract: Christians are united when saying thatthe Christian life is a life in the Spirit. But the unity breaks down when explaininghowthe Christian life is a life in the Spirit. A stereotype of one extreme comes from my own Lutheran tradition. It can leave the impression that the Spirit’s work in the Christian life consists entirely in bringing sinners to faith, doing nothing to transform believers and bring them to new life. This can happen when Lutherans explain good works by quoting Isaiah—“as filthy rags”—and when they regard the righteousness God conveys in justification as a

Book Title: An Unexpected Light-Theology and Witness in the Poetry and Thought of Charles Williams, Micheal O'Siadhail and Geoffrey Hill
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Mahan David C.
Abstract: A growing number of professional theologians today seek to push theological inquiry beyond the relative seclusion of academic specialization into a broader marketplace of public ideas, and to recast the theological task as an integrative discipline, wholly engaged with the issues and sensibilities of the age. Accordingly, such scholars seek to draw upon and engage the insights and practices of a variety of cultural resources, including those of the arts, in their theological projects. Arguing that poetry can be a form of theological discourse, Mahan shows how poetry offers rich theological resources and instruction for the Christian church. In drawing attention to the peculiar advantages it affords, this book addresses one of the greatest challenges facing the church today: the difficulty of effectively communicating the Christian gospel with increasingly disaffected late-modern people.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf0tg

2 “From the Exposition of Grace to the Place of Images”: from: An Unexpected Light
Abstract: Taliessin walked through the hither angels,

3 Poetry as Remembrance: from: An Unexpected Light
Abstract: The difference in landscapes we find between the Arthurian poetry of Charles Williams and the “Poems in Witness to the Holocaust”of Micheal O’Siadhail’sThe Gossamer Wallmarks the distinct set of challenges these two poets undertook to address in their verse. Although in each sequence we find a portrayal of history as a “failed landscape,” for Williams that feature of his cycle designated a clear counterpoint within a larger vision of glory, and one which is made to harmonize with that emergent vision by the logic of the Incarnation—as the summing up and reconciling ofall thingsin

5 Conclusion from: An Unexpected Light
Abstract: We might apply MacKinnon’s salient phrase to all manner of discourse, insofar as it captures a common ambition (if not always a result) to make recognizable the object(s) being contemplated or the subject being conveyed. In the discourses of Christian theology the endeavors to clarify, to confirm, to compel attention and to persuade, may all be said to involve the pursuit of such capacities. Because theologies of the Christian faith inherently look towards a public horizon—comprising a holding forthas well as aholding together—the aim to make Christ and Christian beliefs recognizable seems specially urgent as the

6 A View to Judgment from: In the Eyes of God
Abstract: We have seen that God’s sight can incur many different connotations, from receiving aesthetic pleasure, transferring authority, judgment of sin, acknowledgment of righteousness, and active commitment to a covenant. In this narrative, we find sight expressing irony as well as discrediting the builders of the tower, again demonstrating the context-sensitivity of the metaphor.

8 A Second Look at Sodom from: In the Eyes of God
Abstract: In our previous chapter, we found divine sight to be informed by the primary themes of status and blessing. It thus functioned as both an affirmation of Hagar’s worth as well as motivation for her to return to the conduits of God’s covenantal blessing, Abram and Sarai. The story of Babel laid emphasis on God’s vantage point in looking at the city and the tower, and thus commented on the project as well as its future ramifications. In our next text, Gen 18 and 19, we find a narrative in which the act of “seeing” plays both a structural and

9 The Mountain with a View from: In the Eyes of God
Abstract: In our last chapter, we found God’s sight acting in both a performative manner and by proxy. It performed actions through the use of sight, such as witnessing, confronting, and extending mercy. This accords with Stern’s context-based approach to metaphor, which expects to find differing meanings within each individual instantiation of a particular metaphor like divine “sight.” Furthermore, it demonstrates a distinct overlap in divine and human abilities. Although the modus operandimight be different, God is still using sight in a manner that humans use it.

6. So what? from: The Joshua Delusion?
Abstract: The sort of reading of Joshua that I am proposing is perhaps something of a double-edged sword for many Christians – something that I feel myself. On the one hand, in our contemporary context in which genocide and religiously motivated violence are, sadly, all too familiar, with the Old Testament being something of an embarrassing ‘no go area’ for many Christians owing to its apparent collusion with genocide, a reading like the one proposed here might provide a renewed way of engaging wholeheartedly with our more difficult yet nonetheless cherished texts. But on the other hand, a reading like the

Book Title: Groundless Gods-The Theological Prospects of Post-Metaphysical Thought
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Hall Eric E.
Abstract: Groundless Gods: The Theological Prospects of Post-Metaphysical Thought' deals with possible interpretations of an emerging interest in contemporary theology: postmetaphysical theology. This book attempts to openly come to grips, not only with what metaphysics and postmetaphysics imply, but also with what it could mean to do or not do theology from the standpoint of the nonmetaphysician. The book asks, for instance, whether this world has any singular definition, and whether God is some being standing apart from the world or an experience within the world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf0zj

Metaphysics, Its Critique, and Post-Metaphysical Theology: from: Groundless Gods
Author(s) HALL ERIC E.
Abstract: Metaphysics has recently made a comeback. It is not at all clear whether this is good news, bad news, or something in between. One reason for this uncertainty lies in the still open question of what returns with metaphysics: what commitments, presuppositions, worldviews, and actions? No doubt, some might hold that this description is already misleading since metaphysics has never been absent, only confusedly and ruinously neglected metaphysics has acted as avia absconditafrom which we have taken but a short hiatus. Others might react with deep concern, fearing that all achievements of past battles against this “totalizing” power

1 Theology without Metaphysics? from: Groundless Gods
Author(s) HART KEVIN
Abstract: The modern quest for a Christian theology without metaphysics properly begins with Albrecht ritschl who sought to separate theology from scholasticism, on the one hand, and the speculative philosophical theology practiced by Hegel, on the other.² Of course, one finds a good deal of theology since then, including Karl Barth’s, that wishes to limit or eliminate metaphysical adventure. Barth himself thought that a theologian could travel through philosophy as a gypsy passes through a foreign land, being in conversation with its people but not accepting their assumptions about life.³ He knew that he had no choice but to use certain

5 Simone Weil—A Postmetaphysical Thinker? from: Groundless Gods
Author(s) HEINSOHN NINA
Abstract: “What sort of concept is that of the supernatural?“¹, Peter Winch asks at the beginning of the final chapter in Simone Weil.The Just Balance, and he continues: “Are we then in the region of metaphysics?”² This question directly leads to one of the most important controversies in contemporary thinking about Weil: “Within the last few years, increasingly the question of how to interpret Weil [. . .] has been at the forefront of Weil scholarship.”3 It may be articulated as follows: should we regard Simone Weil as ametaphysicalthinker or is this category specificallyinadequateto circumscribe her

2 The Centrality of Contextual Theology for Christian Existence Today from: Contextual Theology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Haire James
Abstract: Contextual theology is increasingly central for Christian existence throughout the world. It is central because Christianity is growing in the Global South, that is, in the world of contextual theologies, or theologiae in locoas they were first called. It is central because these contextual theologies of the Global South are lived out in communities’ lives but not always recognized for what they are. It is central because often in the Global North, and in the Global South, too, these contextual theologies are regarded as of little significance for Christian existence throughout the world, including in their own places. Asia

5 Context, Controversy, and Contradiction in Contemporary Theological Education: from: Contextual Theology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Paa Jenny Te
Abstract: We gathered to reflect upon and to give thanks for the myriad precious blessings she has brought to each one of our lives.

Book Title: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference-Intercivilizational Engagement
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Chung Paul S.
Abstract: In response to the religious and spiritual transition experienced in our modern world, Chung creates a postcolonial framework for inter-religious exchange, focussing on issues of interpretation, moral deliberation and ethical praxis. He investigates the relationship between hermeneutical theory and ethics and produces a new theory for intercivilizational dialogue, studying theological-philosophical theory of interpretation, ethics, the experience of cultural hybridity and inter-civilisational alliance, set within multiple horizons and diverse contexts
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf16n

Foreword from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Author(s) Berthrong John
Abstract: In Paul S. Chung’s fascinating study of inter civilizational hermeneutics, we get caves and butterflies, Plato and Zhuangzi, Mencius/Mengzi and Aquinas, Zhu Xi and Wang Yangming, Gadamer, Ricouer, David Tracy, Edward Said, and a host of other classical and modern scholars in search of a new and refreshing global hermeneutical theory and project. It is a truly international and encompassing tour of the history of hermeneutics both in the West and East Asia. What is particularly refreshing is that this is a comparison of diverse hermeneutical traditions or as the Neo-Confucians would say, the art of reading through the multi-colored

Introduction from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: An engagement with the themes of the hermeneutical self and the ethical difference is undertaken in a comparative religious framework. In the aftermath of colonialism it implies an attempt to overcome the Western tradition of individual consciousness from Descartes to Husserl. In this tradition the thinking subject (knowledge of the self) takes on an ever-increasing importance in the theory of knowledge. In this philosophical development, the thinking subject has been prioritized, while sidestepping human life embedded within socio-historical locations and ethical practices. To improve on this shortcoming, I undertake a comparative religious-ethical study concerning interpretation and ethical self in dialogue

3. Phemenology and Hermeneutics from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: Dilthey in his later years came to appreciate Husserl’s (1859–1938) teachings, which avoid psychological reasoning and articulate the importance of the idea of evidence and a methodological procedure in cognitive analyses. Husserl’s Logical Investigations, published in two volumes in 1900 /1901, created phenomenology, including a new insight into hermeneutical theory. Husserl takes issue with Dilthey’s notion of worldview associated with historicism, because he believes that Dilthey depends on knowledge of historical relativity, causing the absolute validity of any particular life-interpretation, religion, or philosophy to disappear. The formation of a historical consciousness destroys “the belief in the universal validity” undertaken

7. Intercivilizational Encounters: from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: The doctrine of the mean occupies an important academic position in theories on ethics and the conduct of life in both Western and Eastern civilization. In the previous chapter we discussed the place of the mean within Aristotelian theory of interpretation and virtue ethics. This chapter addresses the nature and moral orientation of Confucianism in regard to Aristotle’s ethics and Greek ethos. The Confucian notion of appropriateness can be compared with Greek notion of prudence. A Confucian hermeneutics of sincerity is to be reconstructed in examining the universal dimension of the mean within the context of Great Learning. Here care

8. Thomas Aquinas: from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: In the previous chapter we examined Confucian ethics of the mean, appropriateness, and its hermeneutical implications for sincerity and selfcare, in view of Aristotle’s notion of the mean, the Greek notion of ethos, and care of self. A study of Thomas’s theological virtue ethics in this chapter is to be undertaken in view of Aristotle. The concluding reflection is a critical appreciation of Thomas’s perspective on the relationship between God and human being in a hierarchical and analogical manner. Analogy as theological language is imbued with Thomist virtue ethics in a spiritualistic and hierarchical manner. Thomas’s theology and virtue ethics

12. Neo-Aristotelian Ethics and Neo-Kantian Framework from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: In the work of Aristotle, the central question is: “How should I live? or “How should one live?” Practical questions are invested with teleological significance. The question “what ought I to do?” or “what is right for me?” is subordinate to the question “what is the good life?” Aristotle speaks of the good and happy life in this regard. He views the ethos of the individual as embedded in the poliscomprising the citizen body. Practical reason assumes the role of judgment illuminating the historical life-horizon of an ethos.¹ In the turn toward an ethics of the good, practical reason

17. Concluding Reflection: from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: This chapter is a narrative on dialectics of Enlightenment and ethical self in a comparative, religious and intercivilizational quest, driven by an interest in addressing the hermeneutical self and the ethical difference. A narrative on dialectics of enlightenment and ethical self includes a reflection of what I have pursued in construal of postcolonial theory and its ethical strategy through global-critical and comparative study.

Epilogue: from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: In this Epilogue, I shall present a postcolonial hermeneutics in terms of proposing archeology and social biography as a postcolonial epistemology. This new perspective articulates the important task of archeological endeavor in rewriting and re-reading the history of the innocent victim as excluded and silenced. History is not deconstructed in the name of binary oppositions, but to remember, in our current socio-biographical solidarity, those who are fragile and vulnerable, existing in the interstitial zone. To begin with archeological hermeneutics, it is important to consider a hermeneutics of analogical imagination and its dimension of suspicion and living discourse in an intercivilizational

1 Religious Pluralism and John Hick from: Christian Theology and Religious Pluralism
Abstract: More than any other time in the history of Western civilization, we are living today in a period of increasing religious plurality. it is becoming more common for persons living in many of the urban and suburban cities in the United States and around the world to have neighbors and acquaintances that are Jews, Muslims, Hindus, or Buddhists. In addition to familiar church buildings, it is now commonplace to find synagogues, mosques, and temples in many cities and even rural areas. The estimated Muslim population in the united States is now five million and growing.¹ Already by September of 2000,

4 An Evaluation of Hick’s Historical Arguments from: Christian Theology and Religious Pluralism
Abstract: In the previous chapter, I have given a detailed survey of Hick’s negative descriptions of the traditional Christian understanding of Jesus of Nazareth as God incarnate, who became a man to die for sins, and who founded the church to proclaim this. I have also described hick’s own metaphorical Christology, proposed as an alternative model more appropriate for a pluralistic age. The purpose of this chapter and the next is to engage in a critical evaluation of these ideas. Specifically, in this present chapter, I shall evaluate what i have previously characterized as hick’s “historical argument” against the church’s incarnation

Conclusion from: Christian Theology and Religious Pluralism
Abstract: As I stated at the beginning of the study, my purpose in writing this book was to examine John hick’s theology of religious pluralism with special regard to his rejection of the traditional Christian understanding that Jesus of Nazareth is “God incarnate, who came to die for the sins of the world and who formed the church to proclaim this.”¹ Hick’s negation of such a central tenet of orthodox Christianity is essential to his project of establishing religious equality among major religions, because, in hick’s own words, “if he [Jesus] was indeed god incarnate, Christianity is the only religion founded

Introduction: from: Sacramental Presence after Heidegger
Abstract: The Heideggerean cry to “overcome” metaphysics understood as “onto-theology” continues to reverberate throughout the continental world and beyond. Ever since Martin Heidegger’s resurrection of the Seinsfrageand his subsequent turn to time and language as the horizon of Being, philosophers and theologians courageous—or perhaps naïve—enough to grapple with the Heideggerean corpus have been struggling to come to grips with the implications of Heidegger’s claims. According to many commentators, this is a task that in the Catholic world has only just begun.

3 Atonement, History, and Meaning from: Jesus and the Cross
Abstract: Why should the theologian care about what Jesus of Nazareth thought of his impending death? The question becomes more potent if we phrase is slightly differently: Would it actually make any difference to the Christian faith if its doctrine of the atonement had no basis in the intention of Jesus and was merely a symbolic invention of the early church? An uncritical reaction to this type of question is to answer with an indignant affirmation, since there is more than a little audacity in the suggestion that Jesus’ intention is irrelevant to the Christian proclamation of salvation. However, does the

Foreword from: The Scandal of Sacramentality
Author(s) Loades Ann
Abstract: Theologians writing on the long, prodigal, and contentious tradition of reflection on the “sacrament” of the Eucharist are in for some surprises as they read this book! Artists of many kinds resist having their insights regarded as merely “illustrative” of what theologians supposedly already “know.” Some writers have been gripped by the “scandal” (1 Cor 1: 23) of the Eucharist, of the relation of language to flesh, the profane to the sacred, the erotic and destabilising “grace” of its mystery. For Dr. Hancock to have included Graham Greene’s Monsignor Quixotewas perhaps predictable, but not so the other half a

Introduction from: The Scandal of Sacramentality
Abstract: This book is an interdisciplinary inquiry into the nature of sacrament and into the relationship between the Eucharist—the ritual partaking of the body and blood of Christ in the symbols of bread and wine—as the sacrament par excellence, and sacramental themes or “traces” of sacramentality that appear in contemporary fictional narratives. In a “post-Christian” (or at the very least “post-ecclesial”) age characterized by waning participation in traditional Christian practices,² a surprising persistence and relevance of sacramental themes and eucharistic allusions may be observed within contemporary literature and the creative arts more broadly. One wonders, then—apart from the

4 Fracturing: from: The Scandal of Sacramentality
Abstract: In Part One, the skandalonof sacramentality was established as a two-fold scandal of language and the body. Beginning with language, this raises a hermeneutical problem: how to determine meaning, significance, from speech or text. But theskandalonof the body is also a hermeneutical problem: how to “read” the body, especially the present absence of Christ’s “displaced” body, which overextends its bounds and incorporates all bodies. In both cases, we encounter a plurisignificance that is unsettling. It seems there is no possibility of singular or univocal meaning. However, it is here that the eruptive truth of sacramentality arises, which

1 Introduction: from: Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) GUNNER GÖRAN
Abstract: Lutheran tradition has been of immense importance not just within the churches in quite a lot of countries worldwide but also for society and culture in general. Ideas within Reformation theology have in various ways influenced education, health care, attitudes to work, economy, and politics. This impact of Lutheran tradition has been based on particular theological positions that have been developed in different ways. Some of these positions are the doctrine of justification by grace alone, the idea that the Bible has a particular role as a source for theological reflection, the doctrine of original sin, the idea of a

5 Healing as an Image for the Atonement: from: Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) PETERSON CHERYL M.
Abstract: In Western theology, the doctrine of the atonement has been dominated by forensic language and the image of the courtroom. Forensic language has been particularly important to a Lutheran understanding of justification: where, by grace through faith, sinners are “declared righteous” on account of Christ. Such language has been criticized, however, for not doing justice to a fuller New Testament understanding of salvation which includes the forgiveness of sins, healing, reconciliation, restoration, and wholeness, and which is experienced communally as well as individually. By so strongly emphasizing forensic imagery in both the doctrine of justification and the atonement, Lutheranism is

8 Lutheran Spiritual Theology in a Post-Christian Society from: Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) JOHANNESSON KARIN
Abstract: Many scholars studying how religious faith develops around the world today emphasize one important transition. Linda Woodhead and Paul Heelas, following the philosopher Charles Taylor, characterize this ongoing transformation as a spiritual revolution.¹ It reveals itself, inter alia, as a growing interest in a multifaceted variety of activities associated with various religious traditions that have one important thing in common. They have traditionally been conceptualized as spiritual training since they have been assumed to contribute to a more flourishing relationship with God or a deeper contact with a spiritual reality. Yoga, pilgrimages, and meditation are examples of such undertakings.

10 Physicality as a New Model for Lutheran Ethics in a Multicultural Global Community from: Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) PERRY RICHARD J.
Abstract: In this chapter I explore the practice of physicality by some African and European American elders within the Lutheran communion. My claim is that this practice establishes a new model for Lutheran ethics in a multicultural global community. Physicality I define as “the act of intentionally placing one’s body into public spaces as a means of expressing concerns for justice in the world.”¹ At the core of physicality is God’s justifying grace. These elders carried their bodies, anchored by their faith in a justifying God, from the sanctuary of their churches to the streets where God was also active with

15 “Satis est” (CA 7): from: Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) THEIßEN HENNING
Abstract: This chapter provides a rereading of the ecclesiological key article of the Augsburg Confession, preceded by some reflections on why present-day theologians still consider the confessional writings from the Reformation period to be meaningful for their work in the early twenty-first century. In doing so, they seem to subscribe to a historicalview of the Reformation as a model for interpreting the present. This is what may at first sight seem odd in thedoctrinalapproach I will be following in these pages, since that view is somewhat in danger of overestimating the normative role of the confessional writings (norma

Book Title: Reading Daniel as a Text in Theological Hermeneutics- Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Hebbard Aaron B.
Abstract: Reading Daniel as a Text in Theological Hermeneutics sets out to read the book of Daniel as a narrative textbook in the field of theological hermeneutics. Employing such disciplines as historical criticism, literary criticism, narrative theology, and hermeneutics, this work seeks to maintain an interdisciplinary outlook on the book of Daniel. Two inherently linked perspectives are utilized in this reading of Daniel. First is the perception that the character of Daniel is the paradigm of the good theological hermeneut; theology and hermeneutics are inseparable and converge in the character of Daniel. Readers must recognize in Daniel certain qualities, attitudes, abilities, and convictions well worth emulating. Essentially, readers must aspire to become a Daniel. Second is the standpoint that the book of Daniel on the whole should be read as a hermeneutics textbook. Readers are led through a series of theories and exercises meant to be instilled into their theological, intellectual, and practical lives. Attention to readers is a constant endeavor throughout this thesis. The concern is fundamentally upon contemporary readers and their communities, yet with sensible consideration given to the historical readerly community with which contemporary readers find continuity. Greater concentration is placed on what the book of Daniel means for contemporary readers than on what the book of Daniel meant in its historical setting. In the end, readers are left with difficult challenges, a sobering awareness of the volatility of the business of hermeneutics, and serious implications for readers to implement both theologically and hermeneutically.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf34k

1 A Hermeneutic Reading of Daniel from: Reading Daniel as a Text in Theological Hermeneutics
Abstract: Our reading of Daniel Bis consciously hermeneutical, both in theory and practice as the very literature itself demands. Theoretically we read DanielBas a literary construct intended to teach the reader how to go about doing the business of interpretation. We come to these conclusions by means of praxis, by actually doing the business of interpretation. Such a relation between theory and practice becomes indicative of the mysterious points of entry and exit of our hermeneutical circle.

3 The Introduction to Danielic Hermeneutics from: Reading Daniel as a Text in Theological Hermeneutics
Abstract: At last we have come to a point when we engage in a close reading of the text of Daniel B. This task becomes challenging for several reasons; primarily, since we are viewing the whole corpus of DanielBas an exercise in hermeneutics, the entire narrative must receive comment. Therefore, we must consider the entire book but with a specific agenda, which limits our perspective to only those matters that directly pertain to DanielBas a textbook in hermeneutics, thus distinguishing it from a normative commentary format. The first issue that we must address is the debate that is ongoing in

1 A Brief Sketch of Newbigin’s Life and Work from: Grasping Truth and Reality
Abstract: Each generation since the modern missionary movement began in the eighteenth century has produced a few great missionary statesmen, persons whose thought and work were a major influence on the global missionary enterprise during their particular era and who have influenced subsequent missionary thinking as well. At the end of the twentieth century this honor, it would seem, fell upon Lesslie Newbigin, long time missionary to India and global ecumenical leader.

3 Grasping Truth and Reality: from: Grasping Truth and Reality
Abstract: Throughout his career, Newbigin wrote on such theological topics as the doctrine of God, the Trinity, the doctrine of creation, Christology, sin and salvation, the church, and so forth. George Hunsberger observes:

4 Humanity’s Need for Salvation and the Call for Radical Conversion from: Grasping Truth and Reality
Abstract: Newbigin’s view of humanity is one that acknowledges human sinfulness while maintaining the value and worth of human persons as God’s creation. His methodology is to discuss Christian doctrine in dialogue with the Enlightenment and post-modern thinking. The Enlightenment sought to free humanity from the ‘ dogma’ of original sin because they believed that “the most dangerous and destructive of all the dogmas which have perverted human reason is the dogma of original sin.”¹ Enlightenment thinkers saw the significance of the doctrine of original sin as central to the whole Christian ‘system.’ If humanity is not, in fact, sinful, then

8 Putting Newbigin in Perspective from: Grasping Truth and Reality
Abstract: Accolades praising Newbigin’s contribution to the church have already been mentioned. There are, however, some further contributions that become apparent as one does an exposition of his theological and missiological thinking. There are also some challenges to his thinking that need to be addressed. Newbigin is not the first to confront Western culture as a missionary in the Twentieth Century. Francis Schaeffer, for example, began to discern the real issues of Western culture in the middle of the last century. While he believed them to be theological in origin, he saw them manifested in philosophy, art, and literature. Schaeffer’s attitude

Book Title: The Fate of Saul's Progeny in the Reign of David- Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Longman Tremper
Abstract: Cephas Tushima provides a thorough analysis of the fate of Saul's heirs, focussing on whether their tragedies were due to continuing divine retribution, coincidence, or Davidic orchestration. He concludes that David was unjust and calculating in his dealings with the Saulides and, like other Near Eastern usurpers, perpetrated heinous injustices against the vanquished house of Saul. Traditionally readers saw Saul as evil and David as a hero; but more recently scholars have written about Saul as a tragic character and David as a villain, turning the book of Samuel into deeply contested interpretive territory. Tushima provides analysis of the critical literature surrounding this contentious issue and contributes his own study that will prove important to the continuing debate. He assesses David's character by analysing how he treats the surviving children of his predecessor, drawing upon the provisions for justice in the covenant community in the book of Deuteronomy. He demonstrates a connection between Samuel and the Torah through themes and motifs, and develops theological conclusions from them on such issues as the impact of human conduct on the environment, marriage, monarchy and Zion theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf3qc

1 Introduction from: The Fate of Saul's Progeny in the Reign of David
Abstract: The threefold divine promise to Abraham (of blessing, progeny, and land) remained of vital importance to israelite life (both at the national and individual levels) through the centuries.¹ Progeny is the evidence of yahweh’s blessings (cf. gen 15: 1–2). one way this blessedness manifests is in the care children provided for their aged parents. Besides, children also saw to the proper burial of their parents. A fitting burial meant ultimately “being gathered” to the ancestral tomb so that the family continued to be together even after death.² More importantly, children served as security for the family and ensured the

4 The Contest for the Succession to the Throne of Saul (2 Samuel 2–4) from: The Fate of Saul's Progeny in the Reign of David
Abstract: In chapter 3, I outlined the methodology of the present study, namely, narrative criticism. In discussing the narrative critical method, I pointed out the centrality of the final form of the text in its analysis, not the text’s prehistory. Additionally, I noted the historary¹ nature of biblical narrative, which ontologically arises from the ground of history, existentially inhabits a literary sphere, and teleologically drives towards a theological goal; and I also noted how all of these trajectories have to be kept in tension for a proper explication of the world of the biblical narrative text. I also explored the various

Book Title: Onslaught against Innocence- Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): LaCocque André
Abstract: While in Genesis 2-11 the Yahwist confronts the issue of evil through a sequence of stories on the progressive deterioration of the divine-human relationship, in Genesis 4 he describes the initial slaughter of one human being by another as fratricidal. This book provides a close reading of J's story by using literary criticism and psychological criticism, and shows that the biblical author has more than an "archaeological" design. His characters - including God, Adam, Eve, Cain, and Abel, plus minor character - are paradigmatic, as they allow J to proceed with a fine analytical feel for the nature of evil as performed by "homo" as "homini lupus." No imaginative "mimesis" of evil has ever been recounted with such an economy of means and such depth of psychological insight.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf49n

Chapter Four The Psychological Dimension from: Onslaught against Innocence
Abstract: For the first time in the Bible, blood is mentioned, as well as its virtue of epitomizing life that belongs to God (4:10; see 9:4–6). Let us start with a philological note: although the singular “blood” ( dam) may only at times refer to blood shed by violence (see Num 35:33), the pluraldamim, as we have it here in Gen 4: 10, is more specifically blood spilled or blood-guilt (see Num 35:27; Exod 22:1). The expression “man of blood” (‘iš damim) designates a murderer (see 2 Sam 16:7, 8; Ps 5:7) and “city of blood” (‘iš damim) designates a

4 Desire, Transcendence, and Static Eternity from: Desire, Dialectic and Otherness
Abstract: We are marked off as other to finite external things in their fixed particularity, since the original power of our being makes us dialectical selves capable of immanent self-differentiation. Our sense of our own difference is inseparable from the fullness of our opening out to being other than ourselves. We must now explore that otherness, not in terms of the difference between the self and external things, but in terms of what transcends the self in its finiteness. This exploration will take up the rest of the book, but my main purpose in this chapter is to look at an

5 Desire, Knowing, and Otherness from: Desire, Dialectic and Otherness
Abstract: We must now develop in fuller detail the notion of a two-way mediation between desire and otherness. I propose to do this by focusing on the desire to know. This focus is determined by a number of considerations. First, the centrality of reflection on knowledge in philosophy hardly needs to be restated. Focusing on knowledge will allow a certain clarity with respect to the possible relations between self and otherness as explicitly defined by different traditional positions like idealism and realism. Second, our primary stress throughout on human desire, as the thread linking the episodes of our itinerary, does not

7 Desire, Otherness, and Infinitude from: Desire, Dialectic and Otherness
Abstract: The desire to know is capable of unreserved openness to otherness. It is openness to what is given. But what is given, we now see, cannot be restricted to the contracted concreteness of the particular thing. Thus the four degrees of concreteness previously discussed are modes of appearance of the thing, progressively more complex presentations of its otherness; correlatively, the four modes of identification are increasingly ample acknowledgments of its inherent richness. As the immanent self-articulation of the thing becomes more concretely communicable, so the matching openness of a human being moves from the immediate, through the dialectically self-mediated, to

1 Grace and Favor in the Old Testament: from: Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond
Abstract: The basic meaning of the root ḥnnis “grace,” which is one of two primary translations for its cognate nounḥēn. The noun is first a term of beauty. It denotes an aesthetically pleasing presentation or aspect of someone or something, and is properly the quality someone or something possesses. The response to this projection of beauty is alsoḥēn, “favor.” The derived sense is used in Hebrew primarily for the pleasing impression made upon one individual by another. It is possible to showḥēnto the beloved ruins of Jerusalem (Ps 102: 14–15[Eng 13– 14]), but this usage

6 Yahweh Comes to Be King on Earth (Deut 33:2–5) from: Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond
Abstract: Deuteronomy, before reporting the death of Moses in a final chapter (34), has included a Blessing of Moses (33), one of two old poems in a second supplement to the book (31–34), the other being the Song of Moses (32: 1– 43). The Song of Moses is a strident rebuke of Israel for chasing after other gods. With a concluding blessing on the twelve tribes (excluding Simeon), the book of Deuteronomy can now end on a calming note before Moses dies and Joshua replaces him as israel’s leader. The book of Genesis similarly ends with a Blessing of Jacob

9 The Confessions of Jeremiah from: Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond
Abstract: In Jeremiah we are accustomed to speak of the prophet’s confessions, so named because of their likeness to the Confessionsof Saint Augustine. These are a singular legacy of Jeremiah, for in them the prophet is not so much speaking Yahweh’s word with power and passion, although some of this is definitely to be found in them, but rather telling us how he feels about what is going on, and what impact his preaching is having on him personally. We see in these confessions the other side of Jeremiah’s role as mediator and divine messenger, which is to bring concerns

13 Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond from: Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond
Abstract: That Christian theology be assertive—strongly and aggressively assertive—should occasion no surprise, since Christian preaching from earliest times has 1) centered on gospel proclamation ( kerygmain acts 2: 14–

Book Title: Hope and the Longing for Utopia-Futures and Illusions in Theology and Narrative
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Boscaljon Daniel
Abstract: At present the battle over who defines our future is being waged most publicly by secular and religious fundamentalists. 'Hope and the Longing for Utopia' offers an alternative position, disclosing a conceptual path toward potential worlds that resist a limited view of human potential and the gift of religion. In addition to outlining the value of embracing unknown potentialities, these twelve interdisciplinary essays explore why it has become crucial that we commit to hoping for values that resist traditional ideological commitments. Contextualized by contemporary writing on utopia, and drawing from a wealth of times and cultures ranging from Calvin’s Geneva to early twentieth-century Japanese children’s stories to Hollywood cinema, these essays cumulatively disclose the fundamental importance of resisting tantalizing certainties while considering the importance of the unknown and unknowable. Beginning with a set of four essays outlining the importance of hope and utopia as diagnostic concepts, and following with four concrete examples, the collection ends with a set of essays that provide theological speculations on the need to embrace finitude and limitations in a world increasingly enframed by secularizing impulses. Overall, this book discloses how hope and utopia illuminate ways to think past simplified wishes for the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf5h7

Introduction: from: Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) Boscaljon Daniel
Abstract: With the blessings of technology, we have infused the twenty-first-century world with matters of the moment: we have acquired a taste for what occurs now and no longer have the patience to suffer our dreams to come to fruition. Marketers create a craving for consumption, convenience, and certainty: they frame digital technologies as tools whose use is restricted to temporarily satiating such demands. eliminating the arduous temporal gap that more ephemeral goods demand, our world provides a series of superficial goods whose certain attainment encourages us to sacrifice the search for that which would provide more authentic fulfillment. Because distractions

8 Reframed Hope: from: Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) Hamner Everett
Abstract: In True Religion, graham Ward argues that “the end [of religion] does not signal the falling into disuse or the oblivion of the religious. Rather, it signals exactly the opposite: the extension and hype of the religious as the ultimate vision of the excessive and the transgressive.”¹ As he observed over a decade ago, early twenty-first- century society is less the product of religion’s disappearance than its immersion in spectacle. foreshadowing much contemporary scholarship, Ward found religion not just in traditional institutional settings, but “in commercial business, gothic and sci-fi fantasy, in health clubs, themed bars and architectural design, of

2 The Ontological Horizon: from: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: In his “Intellectual Autobiography,” with a visible uneasiness, Ricoeur attempts to explain the absence of the promised “Poetics of the Will” from his anthropological project. He goes on to say, however, that

5 The Unfolding of God’s Story: from: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: It was Gadamer who suggested that Hegel may become more important for hermeneutics than Schleiermacher.¹ This may come as a surprise for those who know Hegel as the author of the absolute system, the “conceptual” Hegel, the philosopher who thought he could think God’s thoughts “before the creation of nature and of finite mind.”² As it is well known, immediately after his death, Hegel’s disciples divided among themselves, and the division has continued ever since, as nobody has succeeded in showing convincingly how Hegel’s system works in actual fact.

6 Trinitarian Description between Metaphysics and Hermeneutics from: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: For since, in the wisdom of God, the world did not know god through wisdom, it pleased God through the folly of what we preach to save those who believe. For Jews demand signs and Greeks seek wisdom, but we preach Christ crucified, a stumbling block to Jews and folly to Gentiles, but to those who are called, both Jews and Greeks, Christ the power of God and the wisdom of God. For the foolishness of God is wiser than men, and the weakness of God is stronger than men.

7 Epiphanies of Presence: from: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: Theological discourse, whether implicitly or explicitly, is in search of some kind of justification. It was because of its contamination by various intellectual heresies, old and new, that often this justificatory practice rather than letting the discourse flow beyond itself, tended to lead it into the fortress of a regulatory concept, practice or institution or a contingent or illusory foundation. But as history so often witnesses, it is precisely when discourse guards itself most securely that it must face the most formidable objection because it loses its ecstatic character, ceasing thus to reflect the overriding feature of its source.

3 Error in the Garden: from: Biblical Knowing
Abstract: It must be admitted at the outset: Pursuing an abstract idea like knowledge in the Edenic account of the Fall is audacious. A prominent Christian philosopher once warned me that any attempt to derive a philosophical view fromthe Scriptures is a fundamentally asinine attempt. Before we attempt this particular asinine feat from the error in the Garden, let us first consider a direct implication of knowing in the Fall which happened on the top of a mountain: The Transfiguration of Jesus.

8 Analytic Theology and Biblical Scholarship from: Biblical Knowing
Abstract: In the prior chapter, we were hesitant about appropriating any of the analytic epistemologies surveyed because they appeared incapable of addressing the broad sense of knowing required to do theology. However, there is a burgeoning group of philosophers and theologians who are advocating that theology might benefit from being more like analytic philosophy, at least, more like the analytic method. This most recent effort to encourage Christian theologians toward the analytic method was captured by the anthology Analytic Theology. Yet the question seemingly absent in the philosophy of religion and among analytic theologians has been: What do the sacred texts

8 The Doubtful Gain of Penitence: from: Spiritual Complaint
Author(s) Tiemeyer Lena-Sofia
Abstract: When should we lament¹ and intercede and when should we turn to God in penitence or stand before God’s awesomeness in stunned silence? Is it possible to know which approach to take when we draw near to God in supplication? Does it depend on the quality of the sin, the size of the punishment, or on our own feelings of guilt or innocence? Moreover, are lament and intercession always open possibilities or are there times when these kinds of responses are inappropriate?

11 Learning to Lament in Aotearoa from: Spiritual Complaint
Author(s) Mackenzie Alistair
Abstract: Since the mid-1960s there have been an increasing number of studies of rituals surrounding

13 Public Lament from: Spiritual Complaint
Author(s) Taylor Steve
Abstract: There has been a surge of scholarship around lament in recent times. Although the initial impetus for this resurgence can be found in the works of both Westermann and Brueggemann, the focus on lament has moved beyond the boundaries of biblical studies and has taken on a particular urgency in light of global events since the turn of the millennium.¹ The first decade of the twenty-first century has seen tragedies which have touched the consciousness of people worldwide. Headline examples include the attack on the world trade centre in 2001, the wars in Afghanistan and Iraq, terrorist bombings in Bali

CHAPTER 1 John Wesley’s Imaging of Covenant Theology from: From Faith to Faith
Abstract: When John Wesley compiled and published A Collection of Hymns, for the Use of the People Called Methodistsin 1780, he saw to it that the hymns were “not carelessly jumbled together, but carefully ranged under proper heads, according to the experience of real Christians.”¹ A glance at the table of contents is revealing. Wesley traces “the experience of real Christians” from start to finish—from before their first setting foot on the way of salvation to mourning under conviction of sin to groaning for and experiencing “full Redemption.”² Paul Ricouer describes such a portrayal as emplotment: “the capacity to

CHAPTER 3 John Wesley’s Amendment of Covenant Theology from: From Faith to Faith
Abstract: What we know of John Wesley’s covenant theology comes by way of the minutes of Conferences, the letters borne of controversy, counsel, and reflection, and the sermons, extracts, and journal entries comprising the Wesley corpus. These chronicle his encounter with the covenant theology instilled in the theological understanding of his companions, converts, and antagonists. One indicator of its status as the common currency of theological discourse is Wesley’s confidence that his use of its technical terminology would be understood by his audience. And yet, as the opening paragraph of his sermon “The Righteousness of Faith” clearly demonstrates, he recognized that

CHAPTER 6 John Wesley’s Covenant Theology in Context: from: From Faith to Faith
Abstract: It is increasingly apparent that while there was a strong consensus on many aspects of the theological core of covenant theology and general agreement among Calvinists and Arminians alike on the shape of its superstructure (the covenants of works and of grace), the details were subject to nuancing. And the nuancing was soteriologically critical, as evidenced in the long-running conversations Wesley joined in progress as he sought to stake out the theological foundations of a Methodist morphology of conversion. His regard for the authority of Scripture, his commitment to preserve the Reformation doctrine of justification by faith along with his

6 Connecting the Dots: from: Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Campbell Douglas A.
Abstract: The journey to a solution from the problems I outlined in chapter 3 can begin usefully by considering just one concern— Judaism—in relation to a limited text—Galatians 2:15–16.² This consideration can illustrate both why the presence of a fundamentally Arian type of western contractualism in Paul is so problematic, however unnoticed, and what the basic strategy for resolving it is that Deliveranceis proposing. In what follows, largely for the sake of convenience, I will call the problematic approach “forwardness.”³ in Galatians 2:15–16 Paul states, Ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί· [16] εἰδότες δὲ

11 Rereading Romans 1–3 Apocalyptically: from: Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Wilson Brittany E.
Abstract: In my response to Douglas Campbell’s essay “Rereading Romans 1–3,” I want to begin by way of disclaimer. Overall, I am very sympathetic to Campbell’s reading of Paul. Like Campbell, I read Paul apocalyptically, and I agree that Romans 5–8 lies at the heart of Paul’s apocalyptic soteriology.² Moreover, I also reject what Campbell calls a “prospective” reading of Paul, or what he elsewhere terms “Arianism,” foundationalism, contractualism, and justification discourse. Such readings lead, inter alia, to an individualistic view of salvation in which the gospel is not freely given, but necessitated because of human sinfulness. I applaud

14 Campbell’s Faith: from: Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Tilling Chris
Abstract: I have regularly lamented the fact that the hardback version of Deliverancewas published using endnotes (rather than footnotes), and this has no doubt meant that even those who have read the whole book may not have mustered the willpower to

Introduction from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: Soon after completing my PhD thesis I wrote a book on theological method, Spirit-Word-Community: Theological Hermeneutics in Trinitarian Perspective.¹ I was motivated in this direction in part because the theological academy was caught up, around the turn of the millennium, on questions related to method,² and in part because my own graduate training under a philosophical theologian alerted me to the importance of providing methodological argumentation in a time when theological claims were no longer being received merely because they were asserted. Both trends were reactions to the post-Enlightenment world that had been emerging with increasing clarity across the last

CHAPTER 6 Radically Orthodox, Reformed, and Pentecostal: from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: As “the most heavyweight theological movement twentieth-century Christianity in England has produced” ( Theology), Radical Orthodoxy has gained increasing attention and momentum in the North American theological academy. Its most recent spokesperson, James K. A. Smith, has attempted to extend the Radical Orthodoxy vision in dialogue with the Dutch Reformed tradition.¹ Clearly, the central features of “Reformed” Radical Orthodoxy empower a kind of prophetic engagement with the cultural, political, economic, and ideological domains of modern Western society. At another level, however, the globalizing features of our late modern world context mean that the dominant pagan deities are not just secularism, nihilism,

CHAPTER 9 Tibetan Buddhism Going Global? from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: There is a growing awareness of Tibetan Buddhism as one viable representative of the Buddhist tradition in global context.¹ In this chapter, I want to add to the case for viewing Tibetan Buddhism as a global Buddhist tradition by focusing on its contemporary encounter with science. More specifically, I suggest that the recent Tibetan Buddhist dialogue with the sciences provides one avenue to understand the dynamic character of this tradition as an emerging global presence.

CHAPTER 10 The True Believers? from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: In the last twenty-plus years, Francis X. Clooney, SJ, has emerged as perhaps one of the most important theologians in our contemporary global Christian context through his work on reading Hindu and Christian texts side by side. Yet despite his remarkable output, Clooney’s work has received little attention from evangelical thinkers or theologians. I would urge, however, that evangelicals neglect interacting with Clooney’s work to their loss; rather, Clooney’s project is important precisely because of his concerns about maintaining confessional integrity as a Christian theologian (in his case as a lifelong Roman Catholic priest) while crossing over into and taking

1 Introduction: from: Mothers on the Margin?
Abstract: This thesis grew out of an initial observation. Within the first few verses of Matthew’s patrilineal genealogy that opens his Gospel, four women are referred to: Tamar, Rahab, Ruth, and “she of Uriah.” Why, I wondered, did Matthew choose to include four Old Testament women in the annotations of his genealogy and why these particular four women? This question is not a new one and in part my work is a response to a long-held, traditional view that has collectively labeled these woman as sinners or sexually scandalous. Other explanations have also sought for one denominator common to all four

5 Ruth from: Mothers on the Margin?
Abstract: Surprisingly, the character of Ruth has much in common with both Tamar and Rahab.¹ Tamar and Rahab are foreigners, outsiders, and as such might be expected to pose a threat to Israel. Similarly Ruth is a Moabite woman and Moabite women had a reputation in Israel’s history; it was sexual relations with the women of Moab that had led Israel astray

6 “She of Uriah” from: Mothers on the Margin?
Abstract: The shock of the reference to the fact that Solomon’s mother did not “belong” to David but to Uriah is compounded by the knowledge that technically this is “incorrect” since Bathsheba was David’s wife by the time she conceived and bore Solomon. Clearly, Matthew

8 Tamar, Rahab, and Ruth: from: Mothers on the Margin?
Abstract: Part 1 has established that the first three named women of Matthew’s Gospel are characterized within their Hebrew narratives not in terms of their sinfulness or scandalous sexual activity but by their virtues of righteousness, faith, and loyalty. This short chapter will argue that righteousness, faith, and loyalty are three central aspects of the Matthean Jesus’ teaching in relation to discipleship. It is therefore significant that these themes first appear in the stories of Tamar (righteousness), Rahab (faith and loyalty), and Ruth (loyalty). The naming of Tamar, Rahab, and Ruth in the genealogy highlights and anticipates the importance of these

9 Others on the Margin in Matthew’s Gospel from: Mothers on the Margin?
Abstract: New Testament scholar Duling, using the work of others in the social sciences, defines four different concepts of marginality, which he then applies to antiquity particularly in relation to Matthew’s Gospel. The first and most commonly recognized form of marginality is structural marginality. Structural marginality refers “to structural inequities in the social system: some persons are in the center and some are on the periphery.” Duling refers to this as involuntary marginality. Such individuals aren’t able to participate in normative social statuses, their roles and duties. As a result they can’t access the material and nonmaterial resources available to those

Book Title: God's Wounds-Hermeneutic of the Christian Symbol of the Divine Suffering, Volume 2. Evil and Divine Suffering
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Pool Jeff B.
Abstract: This book constitutes the second volume of a three-volume study of Christian testimonies to divine suffering: God's Wounds: Hermeneutic of the Christian Symbol of Divine Suffering, vol. 2, Evil and Divine Suffering. The larger study focuses its inquiry into the testimonies to divine suffering themselves, seeking to allow the voices that attest to divine suffering to speak freely, then to discover and elucidate the internal logic or rationality of this family of testimonies, rather than defending these attestations against the dominant claims of classical Christian theism that have historically sought to eliminate such language altogether from Christian discourse about the nature and life of God. This second volume of studies proceeds on the basis of the presuppositions of this symbol, those implicit attestations that provide the conditions of possibility for divine suffering-that which constitutes divine vulnerability with respect to creation-as identified and examined in the first volume of this project: an understanding of God through the primary metaphor of love (God is love); and an understanding of the human as created in the image of God, with a life (though finite) analogous to the divine life-the imago Dei as love. The second volume then investigates the first two divine wounds or modes of divine suffering to which the larger family of testimonies to divine suffering normally attest: (1) divine grief, suffering because of betrayal by the beloved human or human sin; and (2) divine self-sacrifice, suffering for the beloved human in its bondage to sin or misery, to establish the possibility of redemption and reconciliation. Each divine wound, thus, constitutes a response to a creaturely occasion. The suffering in each divine wound also occurs in two stages: a passive stage and an active stage. In divine grief, God suffers because of human sin, betrayal of the divine lover by the beloved human: divine sorrow as the passive stage of divine grief; and divine anguish as the active stage of divine grief. In divine self-sacrifice, God suffers in response to the misery or bondage of the beloved human's infidelity: divine travail (focused on the divine incarnation in Jesus of Nazareth) as the active stage of divine self-sacrifice; and divine agony (focused on divine suffering in the crucifixion of Jesus of Nazareth) as the passive stage of divine self-sacrifice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf8fn

1 Human Cupiditas: from: God's Wounds
Abstract: Human life as cupiditas, human sin as the occasion for the first divine wound or divine grief, exhibits several formal characteristics. By no means do I pretend, with my identification of these formal characteristics, exhaustively to analyze this occasion for divine suffering. I only examine here the broad contours of the factors that structure the beloved human’s infidelity, those structural characteristics of human sin that figure most prominently as features of the occasion for the first divine wound. Most generally, according to the Christian symbol of divine suffering, the creaturely occasion for the first divine wound exhibits six formal characteristics:

2 Human Cupiditas: from: God's Wounds
Abstract: Human life as cupiditas, or human sin as the creaturely occasion for divine grief, also exhibits several material characteristics. The disruption among, and the re-ordering of, both the dimensions of human love and the sequentiality of the subjects in the love-relationships determine the material characteristics of sin. When the human lives ascupiditas, or when the human falsely actualizes theimitatio Dei, then the human disorders both the dimensions and the subjects of its love. As I stated in the first volume of this study, the sequentiality of human love refers to the order among the subjects of love, while

Introduction to Division Two: from: God's Wounds
Abstract: Human sin, the false or inauthentic actualization of human life as love, human life as cupiditas, or the beloved human’s betrayal or rejection of the divine lover, occasions the first divine wound, according to the Christian symbol of divine suffering. Of course, although prominent theologies from the European reformations of the sixteenth century tended to found themselves on theologies of the cross, even those theologies refused to attribute any actual form of suffering to the divine nature: this refusal, of course, extended to divine grief as well.¹ Nonetheless, by radical and intentional contrast, Christian testimonies to divine suffering consistently, and

3 Divine Sorrow: from: God's Wounds
Abstract: This chapter identifies and examines the formal characteristics that structure divine sorrow.¹ Several questions immediately arise concerning the interaction among the characteristics of this symbol’s two presuppositions² with reference to the characteristics of human sin in division one of the present volume of studies. (1) What is the relationship between divine vulnerability and this passive stage of divine grief? (2) To which operation or role of the Christian God does the symbol of divine sorrow refer? (3) Toward which subjects does divine sorrow direct itself or with which subjects does God concern the divine self in God’s sorrow? (4) What

Introduction to Division Four: from: God's Wounds
Abstract: In Christian attestations to divine self-sacrifice, the predicament of the beloved human occasions this second mode of divine suffering as well. Strictly considered, however, both the beloved human’s infidelity (human sin) and the misery of the beloved human’s infidelity (the consequences of human sin) comprise the occasion for divine selfsacrifice. Neither sin nor its consequences ever appear isolated from one another, cannot even occur apart from one another. For this reason, previously, I examined as one formal characteristic of human sin the indissoluble bond between sin and its consequences. Nevertheless, the Christian symbol of divine suffering distinguishes these two aspects

7 Misery of Human Cupiditas: from: God's Wounds
Abstract: The formal characteristics of human misery certainly include those initial consequences of human infidelity to God that I briefly described in chapter 1: guilt ( culpa), self-enslavement to selfdeification or life against God (servum arbitrium), and sinful social fatedness or subjugation to a world of sin (peccatum originale). For the purposes of this chapter, however, first, I will more fully develop from chapter 1 only my interpretation of the second consequence, since it forms the taproot from which the other formal characteristics of human misery grow. Nonetheless, the second formal characteristic of human misery, human self-destruction, also stems from the central

8 Misery of Human Cupiditas: from: God's Wounds
Abstract: Just as the formal characteristics of human misery depended upon and extended the formal characteristics of human sin from chapter 1, so too the material characteristics of human misery depend upon and extend the basic quality of the material characteristics of the beloved human’s infidelity that I analyzed in chapter 2. The inescapability and conflicts that constitute the misery of human infidelity, however, intensify the disruption and re-ordering of human life as cupiditas, both in the dimensions of human love and in the sequentiality of subjects within the relationships of love. In the exposition that follows, I will not repeat

4 Eros and the Desirous Body from: Facing the Other
Abstract: A pressing contemporary problem is that of the relationship between erosand desire in the body. How does the dialogue between John Paul II and Levinas shed light on this problem? First, the problems oferos, desire, and sexual ethics are described in relation to the place of the body in these two theorists. Next, the sexual person will be studied as a realm of concrete problems for the body; and finally the problem of the body will be explored in light of Jean-Luc Marion’s thought, who crosses the boundaries between philosophy and theology. Marion owes a significant debt to

Introduction from: Contextual Theology
Abstract: Hopes that the future of theology lies among the new “contextual” theologies of the “new Christianity” abound. Could these theologies replace the theologies of the Atlantic cultures with their roots in ancient theology and doctrine? For some this hope has given carte blanche to any theology from the global South that calls into question traditional “Western” theology. For others the emergence of non-Western Christian thinking is insignificant for it seems to have little to add to the theological debate. I believe these claims to be misleading and disingenuous. The theologies of the “new Christianity” cannot be easily pigeonholed in anti-traditional

1 The Church Looks to the Future: from: Contextual Theology
Abstract: The history of Christianity has exhibited surprising and dramatic turning points during the last century. A century ago, commentators declared that the twentieth century would be the most hopeful and promising of any period in history. William Temple, the Archbishop of Canterbury, declared early in the century at his installation as Archbishop of Canterbury that Christianity was a worldwide reality.¹ He and others speculated about this new turn of events and prophesied great and exciting changes. At the beginning of the century John Mott wrote a classic of the times. The title says it in a nutshell: The Evangelization of

CHAPTER THREE Barth’s Social Ethics: from: Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: In the last chapter, we saw how Barth, in his early writings, responded theologically and practically to the events around him during 1910s and 1920s. Reversing the dominant structure of modern ethics, which attempts to secure human freedom by separating humanity from God, Barth saw clearly that human freedom depends upon God’s freedom to act in relatio. Thus, his task, in these early writings, was not to simply contrast God’s action and our action as the way to preserve human autonomy, but instead attempts to demonstrate how divine agency establishes, rather than negates, human agency. This theme more fully emerges

CHAPTER FOUR Social Theory and Postmodernity from: Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: The last two chapters have demonstrated the fact that the church, as a witnessing community, cannot rise above and live outside its surrounding society and culture. In his 1924 essay “Church and Culture,” for example, Barth writes that the church cannot give witness without conversing with the “actual political and economic standards of its own age. Throughout its own course, the Church swims along in the stream of culture” ( TC: 351). This does not imply, of course, that the church ought to accommodate itself to its surrounding culture, only that the church cannot “free itself even partially” from society and

CHAPTER TEN Witness and Christian Responsibility from: Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: In this last section of the book, we carry through in practice what was developed in theory, namely that Christian ethics is “responsible witness of the Word of God” serving both “God and men” ( CDIV/3: 609). In each movement, there is a corresponding dialectic of God’s initiating action and human response. In chapters 7–8, we saw how the Yes of moral knowledge of the good, human agency, and moral judgment is followed by the No against the nothingness of sin, death, evil, and the powers. We are now able to discuss further how God’s reconciling Yes provides the

CHAPTER TWELVE Economic Witness: from: Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: This chapter follows the same pattern at the last chapter, but the focus shifts from political to economic witness. In so doing, we look at CDIV/2, where Jesus Christ embodies love and overcomes the sin of sloth, leading to “upbuilding” of the Christian community. Although the sins of pride and falsehood could equally apply to the power of mammon, this chapter correlates the sin of sloth with structural power of mammon. So, in dialectical fashion, sloth is juxtaposed with love, and mammon is juxtaposed with justice. Just as political witness leads to the practice of peace in the civil

Foreword from: Gift and the Unity of Being
Author(s) Milbank John
Abstract: This synthesis pivots round the concept of “gift.” This is no arbitrary, idiosyncratic choice on Fr. López’s part, because today, to a remarkable degree, much academic and practical thinking is converging round this theme. Ever since Marcel Mauss, anthropologists, sociologists, and historians have come more and more to realize that human society as such

II. Concrete Singularity from: Gift and the Unity of Being
Abstract: The engagement of the whole of ourselves with the whole of reality, and with the center of both, who is God, calls us to recognize the positivity of all that is. With all its dramatic tensions, originary experience reveals that being itself is good quagiven, that it is good to exist with others, and that the task for life is given with our destiny. It also reveals how every concrete singular is thus bound together in a complex, manifold unity in which each is fully itself.¹ The preceding chapter’s anthropological reflection now opens up into a path to see

III. Reception and Reciprocity from: Gift and the Unity of Being
Abstract: The response of wonder before God’s communication of esse deepens when we become aware that God gives the human person, along with the capacity to stand on his own, the capacity to act out of his own being ( autexousia).¹ When God gives, he gives because he wants to share his giving. In fact, it would not be a real giving if God did not allow the concrete singular being to participate in his capacity to give, in his own freedom. The divine creating act goes so far that Aquinas claims that the human person is the cause of himself.² Gregory

VI. Gift’s Unifying Memory from: Gift and the Unity of Being
Abstract: Our attempt to understand the unity of being in terms of gift so far has brought to light the primal character of gift. Gift is a primal, a principle, inasmuch as it is a permanent source. The positivity of concrete singular beings suggested by originary experience rests on the permanent, personal principle of originating and ordering, a Father whose face we are invited to see in his beloved, Incarnate Son. Gift is also a primal because it indicates “first-ness.” According to this second sense of “primal,” being’s primordial unity is an ever-new beginning. Each concrete singular being is created; it

Envoi from: Gift and the Unity of Being
Abstract: Contemplating the mystery of birth and our own originary experience invited us to acknowledge that the nature and unity of the singular being is gift, given to itself in order to recognize and adhere to the mystery of God, the agapicgiver. The existence of the concrete singular reflects at every level— from the dual unity of its being to its action— its constitutive being-gift. Failing to heed the call to affirm himself and the world as gift by gratuitously recognizing that God is everything, the created singular human being attempted to grasp at a greater delight by conceiving himself

3 Interpreting Genesis: from: Allegorizing History
Abstract: The preceding chapter showed that Bede did not figurally exegete events in the English Church’s history, despite frequent opportunities to do so. I will argue in this chapter that Bede’s commentary on Genesis and how he reads the creation of time, history, and the world displays a theological and philosophical ambiguity that factors into how Bede conceives of God’s action or providential caring for history and humanity. Using In genesimas my point of departure, I am following Charles Jones who describes Bede’s commentary as “God’s Word on Nature and Grace.”¹ In order to highlight what I think are Bede’s

Conclusion from: Allegorizing History
Abstract: For the sake of clarification, and since my argument has ventured across disciplines and time periods, I want to reiterate and summarize my argument and what it has accomplished. Chapter 1 set the stage in two ways for my argument. First, by tracing the fault lines in contemporary Bedan scholarship regarding his Ecclesiastical HistoryI put my own argument within a specific contemporary conversation. Second, I teased out implicit historiographical, philosophical, and theological issues within that scholarly conversation germane to my point regarding the ability to understand Bede’s sense of history in light of the differences between modern approaches (e.g.

3 Bonhoeffer’s Theology and Economic Humanism: from: Being Human, Becoming Human
Author(s) Frick Peter
Abstract: The aim of this essay is to examine Bonhoeffer’s theology vis-à-vis economics. Admittedly, at first glance, this may appear as a rather farfetched idea, since Bonhoeffer was neither trained nor known as an economist and has left us no systematic treatment of his thought on that subject. Yet, there is the curious fact that Bonhoeffer’s entire adult life unfolded within an inexorable economic downward spiral. The height of that spiral was for Bonhoeffer in all probability the granting of his doctoral degree in theology in 1927. The bourgeois élan of the Bonhoeffer family, embedded as it was in intellectual elitism

5 Community Turned Inside Out: from: Being Human, Becoming Human
Author(s) Nielsen Kirsten Busch
Abstract: The backbone of Dietrich Bonhoeffer’s theology is Christology. If one sees Bonhoeffer’s writings as the attempt to unfold, in a contemporary context, the meaning of believing and confessing the lordship of Jesus Christ, undoubtedly one has a good grasp of the core intention of his theology.

6 The Narrow Path: from: Being Human, Becoming Human
Author(s) Harvey Barry
Abstract: Dietrich Bonhoeffer concludes the preface to Discipleshipwith a comment which, though in its immediate setting refers to the decision of the Confessing Church to resist incorporation into the Reich Church, sets the appropriate context for assessing the contribution of his theology to the question of sociality: “Today it seems so difficult to walk with certainty the narrow path of the church’s decision and yet remain wide open to Christ’s love for all people, and in God’s patience, mercy and loving-kindness (Titus 3:4) for the weak and godless. Still, both must remain together, or else we will follow merely human

10 Responding to Human Reality: from: Being Human, Becoming Human
Author(s) Nissen Ulrik Becker
Abstract: A central motif in the ethics of the Danish theologian and philosopher K. E. Løgstrup is the mutual trust between persons encountering each other, giving rise to an ethical demand that is universal. Løgstrup has a phenomenological starting point, describing an ontological structure according to which human beings are delivered over into each other’s hands, thereby raising an ethical demand. In every encounter with another human being there is an ethical demand requiring care for the other.² For Løgstrup this is a universal demand and therefore not something unique to the Christian tradition. Therefore, Løgstrup also argues that there is

Introduction from: Reading Scripture to Hear God
Abstract: In the past several decades, the theological interpretation of Scripture has emerged as an identifiable discipline within systematic theology.¹ The theological interpretation of Scripture emerged as an attempt to bridge the ugly ditch between biblical studies and systematic theology which has been dug since the Enlightenment. In response to this modernist divorce between theological disciplines, the theological interpretation of Scripture attempts to explain how Scripture functions as the “soul of sacred theology,” by articulating how Scripture operates as a locus of God’s ongoing self-communicative action, and why scriptural reading must be primarily an activity performed by the church and for

Book Title: Making Memory-Jewish and Christian Explorations in Monument, Narrative, and Liturgy
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Vincent Alana M.
Abstract: The twentieth century has been called a "century of horror". Proof of that, designation can be found in the vast and ever-increasing volume of scholarly work on violence, trauma, memory, and history across diverse academic disciplines. This book demonstrates not only the ways in which the wars of the twentieth century have altered theological engagement and religious practice, but also the degree to which religious ways of thinking have shaped the way we construct historical narratives. Drawing on diverse sources - from the Hebrew Bible to Commonwealth war graves, from Greek tragedy to post-Holocaust theology - Alana M. Vincent probes the intersections between past and present, memory and identity, religion and nationality. The result is a book that defies categorization and offers no easy answers, but instead pursues an agenda of theological realism, holding out continued hope for the restoration of the world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgfbg4

Introduction from: Religion and Violence
Abstract: In social and cultural milieus across the globe, religion and violence are often linked dramatically by the actions of violent religious agents, and intellectually by academics, commentators, and authors who seek to understand these actions.¹ The link between violent struggle and the Koran has become commonplace in Western media since the events of September 11, 2001. More broadly, diverse groups and individuals across the religious spectrum have been involved in violent actions: so-called Christian groups blow up abortion clinics for the purpose of killing health professionals involved with acts of abortion; Jewish fundamentalist groups defend militarily their perceived religious right

2 A Selective Literature Review from: Religion and Violence
Abstract: In terms of a cultural anthropology, René Girard has extensively explored the roots of violence and its relationship to religion, though it is difficult to pinpoint his writings as belonging to any one body of literature since he covers

5 A Dialectical Engagement with Cosmic War: from: Religion and Violence
Abstract: In the previous chapter, I argued the importance of a dialectical engagement with the idea of cosmoswithin the symbol of cosmic war. We saw that the designation ofcosmicwar that linked violence, divine will, and warfare within a cosmologically oriented mindset was imprecise, especially when dealing with religious groups who demonstrate that their cultures have achieved, if only partially, an anthropological breakthrough. A better, more nuanced understanding of the religious agent’s horizon would be to categorize it in terms of a grace–sin dialectic but that carries the danger of cosmic dualism, and consequently a lack of appreciation

10 Conclusions from: Religion and Violence
Abstract: My aim in this book has been to explore the link between religion and violence, which I have done through four key symbols employed by commentators and academics convinced that religion often promotes violence. These symbols were: cosmic war, martyrdom, demonization, and warrior empowerment. I engaged dialectically with each of these symbols, using the insights of Bernard Lonergan, and through that engagement, I addressed a number of questions: What are the truthful and mistaken assertions made by authors through the lenses of these symbols around the link between religion and violence? Are there better categories to understand religiously motivated violence?

3 Hypothetical Structure of the Christian Symbol of Divine Suffering from: God's Wounds
Abstract: On the basis of my previous preparatory steps, this chapter supplies a third, briefer, and final orientation for interaction with the Christian symbol of divine suffering. In one sense, this chapter initiates that interaction, since it provides a hypothetical overview of the symbol’s structure. In another sense, however, this chapter retains its orienting character, in that it does not yet fullybegin to interpret actual Christian attestations to divine suffering. Rather, in this chapter, I offer an overview of the symbol’s structure as a hypothesis that I will demonstrate throughout all three volumes of this work. The present chapter serves,

5 Divine Lover: from: God's Wounds
Abstract: I now shift from considering God’s being and activity, as methodologically abstracted from one another, to discussing divine love’s actualization in God’s creative activity.1 Previously, I have surveyed characteristics and dimensions of God’s being as love through attestations to divine activity in the history of Jesus the Nazarene. The present chapter examines the character of God’s creative activity, as determined by the divine being, in order to disclose the meaning of the first presupposition for the Christian symbol of divine suffering as well as to illumine the basis upon which to analyze this symbol’s second presupposition. Thus, I proceed in

8 Capitalism and World-Systems Analysis from: Church and Ethical Responsibility in the Midst of World Economy
Abstract: We have examined the development and expansion of capitalism in terms of a critical study of Marx’s idea and theory of monopoly capital and late capitalism. However, those committed to economic study from the standpoint of the world-system take issue with monopoly capitalism as a rational and progressive system which retains big business organized in giant corporations as its prime mover. Smaller business was treated as a part of the environment around the operation of big business.¹ A state under monopoly capitalism has a responsibility to insure that prices and profit margins in the deviant industries are brought within the

Book Title: Vatican II-Expériences canadiennes – Canadian experiences
Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): Routhier Gilles
Abstract: The Second Vatican Council (1961-1965) was one of the most significant religious events of the twentieth-century. In Canada, it was part of a moment of unprecedented cultural and societal change, causing Canadian Catholics to reexamine the church's place and mission in the world. For four years, Canadian Catholic bishops met with their peers from around the globe to reflect on and debate the pressing issues facing the church. This bilingual volume explores the interpretation and reception of Vatican II in Canada, looking at many issues including the role of the media, the reactions of other Christians, the contributions of Canadian participants, the council's impact on religious practice and its contribution to the growth of inter-religious dialogue.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ch77hx

Reporting the Revolution: from: Vatican II
Author(s) Cuplinskas Indre
Abstract: Half a year after the closing of the Second Vatican Council, on April 19, 1966, the board of advisors of the weekly newspaper the Western Catholic Reportermet in the chancery office boardroom of the Archdiocese of Edmonton. The secretary recorded the following discussion:

“Hold onto Your Hats”: from: Vatican II
Author(s) Hayes Alan L.
Abstract: The Second Ecumenical Council of the Vatican had a profound impact on Canadian Anglicans in two general ways: it changed their ecumenical landscape forever, and it helped guide farreaching changes in their denominational identity. As for the change in ecumenical landscape, Vatican II led Anglicans and Roman Catholics in Canada to cordial and close relationships with surprising speed. Within ten years of the opening session of Vatican II, the Canadian arms of the two communions were co-operating in such ventures as dialogue groups, local collaborations of various kinds, the Toronto School of Theology, and inter-church coalitions for social justice. As

Inspiration after Dei Verbum from: Vatican II
Author(s) Spatafora Andrea
Abstract: The fiftieth anniversary of the calling of the Second Vatican Council by Pope John XXIII is an appropriate occasion to assess its impact on the Church and on its theology. This article will examine the developments in the Church’s doctrine of inspiration since the council and will focus principally on the contribution of a Canadian exegete, Walter Vogels.¹ The study will begin with an overview of the origins and development of the concept of inspired Scripture up to Vatican II, followed by a brief presentation of the Dogmatic Constitution on Divine Revelation, Dei Verbum’s treatment of inspiration, and a brief

Experimenting Creatively with Being Church in the Modern World: from: Vatican II
Author(s) Baltutis Peter E.
Abstract: Promulgated on the last day of the Second Vatican Council, December 7, 1965, “The Pastoral Constitution on the Church in the Modern World”² articulated the council fathers’ desire that religion should not only affect a Catholic’s private life but it should also influence their cultural, social, and political engagement with the world. Beginning with the principle that all human beings have an herent dignity since they were created in the image of God,³ Gaudium et Spes(the constitution’s Latin title) argued that humans can only attain their full potential by participating in community.⁴ In promoting the common good of the

The Spiritual Journey of Alice Trudeau, MO, in the Postconciliar Context from: Vatican II
Author(s) Bruno-Jofré Rosa
Abstract: Alice Trudeau entered the Missionary Oblate Sisters of the Sacred Heart and Mary Immaculate in Saint-Boniface, Manitoba, in 1953 when the congregation’s spirituality and culture still had to come to terms with late modernity.¹ The sisters had started to experience an increasing contradiction between their own culture, their own universe, and the world around them, even at the religious level. The journey of Alice Trudeau as a religious was largely defined by her early years as a daughter in a large Franco-Manitoban Catholic family, her personal experience as an orphan, her losses, her experience with Catholic Action, and the drastic

Book Title: Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts-Sources, Methods and Interdisciplinarity - Sources, méthodes et interdisciplinarité
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Perrier Sylvie
Abstract: Questions of methodology and the use of sources are fundamental to all academic disciplines. In recent years, this topic has become far more challenging as scholars are increasingly adopting an interdisciplinary approach to achieve richer and deeper analyses, particularly in the humanities and social sciences. Building New Bridges / Bâtir de nouveaux ponts is a collection of scholarly papers that deals with the first principles of source identification and their effective utilization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ch77q1

Introduction from: Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Perrier Sylvie
Abstract: Interdisciplinarity, a term scarcely known as recently as a decade ago, today seems all the rage within academe. Cutting edge research is now often perceived as synonymous with interdisciplinarity. Bringing together scholars from different disciplines, often for team-based research, projects are now being tackled by experts from a variety of perspectives and, as often claimed, at a depth beyond the capacity of a single researcher. Melding older, often traditional, disciplinary-based approaches and utilizing sources in novel ways, interdisciplinarity has supposedly taken scholarship to a higher level, yielding fresher, more nuanced, and ultimately more sophisticated analyses.

4 Re-disciplining the Body from: Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Helps Lisa
Abstract: Despite the “veritable flood of books, conferences, and panels on body history, or bodies in history,” why, historian Kathleen Canning asks, has the body remained a largely “unexplicated and undertheorised historical concept.”¹ I would add that this lack of historicaltheorization is particularly surprising in light of the veritable torrent of literature on the body over the last fifteen years in areas as diverse as geography, philosophy, anthropology, cultural studies, and biology, to name only a few. In addressing this disparate body of work, medieval historian Caroline Bynum has argued that “despite the enthusiasm for the topic, discussions of the

7 Rigueur et sensibilite dans un parcours historien from: Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Watelet Hubert
Abstract: L’expose comprend deux parties. La premiere traite d’exigences de rigueur dans une these sur la revolution industrielle dans un bassin houiller beige. Concue dans les annees 1950-1970, elle s’inscrit dans le contexte des belles theses franfaises d’histoire economique regionale de l’epoque. Cependant c’est aussi une etude de business history, qui relevait plutol d’historiens britanniques ou de Harvard. A cet egard, elle se differencie de l’historiographie francaise. Le titre du livre signale cette originalite en annon? ant la specificite de la region etudiee et l’approfondissement d'une entreprise¹. La recherche ful pensee Ires tot selon les theses d'Elal encore en cours en

10 Revisiting Quantitative Methods in Immigration History: from: Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Kukushkin Vadim
Abstract: In the last two decades, quantitative methods of analyzing historical sources seem to have lost much of their appeal in Canadian and American immigration historiography, reflecting a trend common to social historians in general. Historians on both sides of the border have largely abandoned analyzing international population movements from a macrohistorical perspective in favour of studying local immigrant neighbourhoods through the prism of ethnicity/race, class, and gender.¹ Influenced by the postmodernist critique of historical objectivity and the knowability of the past, academic scholars are becoming increasingly sceptical of seeing population statistics and other serial datasets as windows on past reality.

14 Documents in Bronze and Stone: from: Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Vance Jonathan F.
Abstract: In 1925, in passing its verdict in the competition to design Winnipeg’s civic war memorial, the judging panel declared for the winner with the following words: “The sentiment is simply and directly expressed in a manner about which no doubt can be felt and no questions need to be asked.”¹ For these judges, the winning design was not open to interpretation; it had one meaning and one meaning only, and that meaning would endure for all time.

20 Evidence of What? from: Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Gaffield Chad
Abstract: Surprisingly and in repeatedly unexpected ways, historians have continued to debate in recent decades the central question of their craft: how can the past be described and explained? At each stage of the debate, the answers to this question have reflected and contributed to larger epistemological discussions across the disciplines. The following discussion examines selected aspects of the twists and turns of recent historical debate by using the example of research on census enumerations. From the time of the “new social history” of the 1960s and 1970s to the cultural history of the 1980s and 1990s, scholars have focused on

VIII Mentoring: from: The Helping Relationship
Author(s) Ste-Marie Lorraine
Abstract: Mentoring is generally understood as a relationship between two people aimed at enabling a wide range of learning, experimentation, and development. Although mentoring is becoming increasingly recognized as a significant aspect of both personal and professional development today, the mentoring-type relationship has existed in all of human history. This is well exemplified in the characters of Mentor and his mentee, Telemachus, in the ancient Greek story of The Odyssey(Daloz, 1999, p. 17). In the past 25 years, there has been an increase in the use of formal mentoring programs in the workplace as well as in academic and professional

X The Pastorate as Helping Relationship from: The Helping Relationship
Author(s) Morrison Bradley T.
Abstract: Spiritual care is rapidly replacing pastoral care in institutional settings. While the assumptions of spiritual counselling may be a better fit for hospitals, nursing homes, and counselling centres, the pastoral paradigm remains the better fit for congregational care. This chapter argues that the pastoral paradigm provides a productive framework for addressing developments in the field of pastoral care and congregational ministry. The chapter correlates the psychotherapy outcome research of the common factors model with features of the pastoral paradigm to identify the ways in which the pastoral paradigm leverages the relational and communal dimensions of congregational life. The pastorate is

Book Title: Multiculturalism and Integration-Canadian and Irish Experiences
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Conrick Maeve
Abstract: Multicultural and multilingual diversity in contemporary Ireland are fairly recent phenomena, whereas Canada's policies and practices addressing cultural and linguistic diversity are several decades old. This basic difference has influenced their laws, language policies, education systems, cultural creations, and national identities as they have worked to accommodate multiculturalism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ch782p

Introduction: from: Multiculturalism and Integration
Author(s) REGAN VERA
Abstract: The thirteen essays collected in Multiculturalism and Integration: Canadian and Irish Experiencesoffer new insights into issues of diversity, integration and identity that are important in all multicultural societies. The essays were developed from contributions to the 2008 fourteenth biennial international conference of the Association for Canadian Studies in Ireland. The issues raised are of central concern in many international contexts, where societies are coming to grips with accommodating cultural diversity within a civic identity. Multicultural and multilingual diversity are relatively recent phenomena in contemporary Ireland, whereas Canada’s policies and practices addressing cultural and linguistic diversity are several decades old

Chapter IV The Linguistic Impact of Target-Language Contact on the Speech of Irish and Canadian Learners of French L2 from: Multiculturalism and Integration
Author(s) LEMÉE ISABELLE
Abstract: The aims of the present study are to investigate the social aspects of French language acquisition by both Irish and Canadian learners, but also to illuminate some differences and similarities surrounding the acquisition of French in the study abroad and immersion learning contexts. Finally, I would like to identify precisely how native speaker contact may be an important missing link in the immersion learner’s acquisition of French.

Ethno-cinémato-graphie ou la fonctionnalisation de l’autre au cinéma from: Enjeux interculturels des médias
Author(s) Ochsner Beate
Abstract: Le questionnement principal du présent ouvrage porte sur la fonction globalisante, interculturelle et parfois violente de la représentation médiatique de l’autre, plus exactement d’un autre « distant », qui « s’avère être une capture, une invention, une construction, sinon une “fabrication” de toutes pièces »¹. Cet autre, principalement conçu comme le représentant d’une autre culture, est censé venir d’un dehors, d’une autre ethnie, d’une autre partie du monde. Dans notre contribution, nous nous permettons de déplacer légèrement la question et d’attirer l’attention sur un « autre » autre, plus proche : l’autre de soi-même (ou soi-même comme l’autre), ainsi que

Cinéma et intertemporalité : from: Enjeux interculturels des médias
Author(s) Habib André
Abstract: Les écarts culturels ont longtemps été – et sont toujours – maintenus par le pouvoir de domination médiatique d’une culture sur une autre : celle qui a le pouvoir technique de représenter et d’imposer sa représentation de l’Autre fixe ses attributs, ses traits ainsi que son caractère, et sa « singularité » ne repose que sur ce qui le distingue de celui qui l’observe. Les « sujets exotiques » qui apparaissent dans les relations de voyages, les gravures, les photographies ou les vues cinématographiques ont, bien souvent, été envisagés et traités comme s’ils appartenaient à un passé immémorial, hors de

Texte et image : from: Enjeux interculturels des médias
Author(s) Araujo Ana Lucia
Abstract: Bien avant l’arrivée de la photographie, du cinéma, de la télévision, de la vidéo et de l’Internet, la gravure imprimée était le seul média capable de rendre compte des réalités exotiques par le moyen de l’image. Depuis le xvi esiècle, c’est à travers la gravure, produite très souvent par des dessinateurs et des graveurs qui n’étaient jamais allés en Amérique du Sud, que le public européen entrait en contact avec cet « Autre » à la fois sauvage, guerrier et cannibale. Le lecteur pouvait ainsi voir avec ses propres yeux combien les populations amérindiennes sud-américaines entretenaient des rapports violents et

5 Intuitionism and Little Theory from: Red, White, and Blue
Abstract: The preceding chapters have explained the important role that grand theory plays in the liberal tradition. They have also suggested that grand theory cannot be made coherent today because of the erosion of the republican tradition. So far, though, we have considered only one theory at a time. Perhaps the theories could be combined so that their strengths reinforce each other and the strengths of one cancel the weaknesses of another. Unfortunately that strategy will not work. In discussing each grand theory I made two general kinds of arguments. First I developed an internal critique of the theory. That critique

8 The Constitution of Religion from: Red, White, and Blue
Abstract: The constitutional law of religion is “in significant disarray.”¹ States may subsidize the purchase of books by students at religious schools, but they may not subsidize the purchase of globes.² States may engage in ritualistic invocation of religious norms, but they may not attempt to inculcate the norms that give sense to the rituals.³ Exempting from the Social Security system those who oppose participation for reasons based on religious belief threatens the integrity of the tax structure,⁴ but exempting the same people from the education system does not substantially affect itsintegrity.⁵ Forms of aid to nonpublic schools that are

Afterword to the Paperback Edition from: Red, White, and Blue
Abstract: Undoubtedly Red, White, and Bluewould be a different book if I wrote it today.¹ Some of the topics I discussed would now be classified as falling within the domain of constitutional history rather than in that of constitutional law. Other topics of interest today were not on my radar screen in the 1980s. And, of course, there have been developments within some of the approaches to constitutional interpretation that I did discuss—most notably, originalism. Fully updatingRed, White, and Bluewould mean writing an entirely new book, and I would not be interested in using a book written

Postcolonial Pedagogy and the Impossibility of Teaching: from: Home-Work
Author(s) SUGARS CYNTHIA
Abstract: In his account of the early years of the academic study and teaching of Canadian literature, Desmond Pacey provides a telling and amusing anecdote about colonial attitudes and Canadian literature in 1952.¹ Founded by A.S.P. Woodhouse at the University of Toronto, the inaugural gathering of ACUTE (Association for Canadian University Teachers of English) was to include a session on Canadian literature, the first conference session ever to be devoted to the subject. Woodhouse had begrudgingly agreed to include

The Culture of Celebrity and National Pedagogy from: Home-Work
Author(s) KAMBOURELI SMARO
Abstract: I’m on pat bay highway, Wednesday morning, the twentieth anniversary of the Charter of Rights and Freedoms, driving home after dropping a friend at the Swartz Bay ferry terminal. Naturally, I'm listening to CBC. Mary Walsh is hosting the most recent “do” about Canadian literature. “The Battle of the Books,” an ad in the Globe and Mailcalls it, a literary competition imaged as warfare in keeping with the times. The panel, consisting of the novelists Leon Rooke and Nalo Hopkinson; lead singer of the Barenaked Ladies, Steven Page; actor Megan Follows; and the former prime minister Kim Campbell, is

Culture and the Global State: from: Home-Work
Author(s) HJARTARSON PAUL
Abstract: This book brings into critical relation two fields of study, postcolonialism and pedagogy, and proposes to examine the Canadian literatures within that context. While I welcome the foregrounding of pedagogical concerns, configuring the topic as Postcolonialism and Pedagogyraises three significant issues for me. In raising these issues, my desire is not to call into question either the topic itself or postcolonialism as a critique but to underscore the incredible change sweeping through the discipline of English—indeed, through the humanities and social sciences generally—the fluidity of the situation at present, and the confused nature of the debates those

From Praxis to Practice: from: Home-Work
Author(s) HAUN BEVERLEY
Abstract: This paper is divided into two parts. It begins by reviewing current postcolonial pedagogical theory, both focusing on its interests and identifying its omissions in relation to public education in Canada. It ends with an appendix of practical suggestions for implementing a postcolonial pedagogical supplement designed to transform teachers’ and students’ understanding, public memory, and reading of curricular texts.

“Outsiders” and “Insiders”: from: Home-Work
Author(s) KRUK LAURIE
Abstract: Is native literature also Canadian literature? Or is that a “simple” question, posed at the “Postcolonialism and Pedagogy” symposium, May 2002?¹ In 1999, I, the resident Canadianist at my small undergraduate institution, was asked to put together a new course in Native Literature in English, to be cross-listed with our developing Native Studies program. I had incorporated Native-authored literature within my Canadian survey, by the addition of a token text—either Tomson Highway’s The Rez SistersorDry Lips Oughta Move to Kapuskasing, perennial favourites—but this new program initiative meant putting the “insider” into the “outsider” position. My institution

Chapitre 3 FORMES DE L’ORALITÉ from: De l'écrit à l'écran
Abstract: Y a-t-il une spécificité du récit africain : littéraire et, par suite, filmique? Réponse : oui. Le récit africain est principalement travaillé par les formes de l’oralité¹. Cela entraîne, évidemment, des aspects singuliers dans la problématique plus générale de l’inscription littéraire à l’écran. Il s’agira donc de repérer les paramètres principaux de cette oralité afin de déterminer les caractéristiques d’un apport africain, car il faut avant tout noter avec Manthia Diawara que

Chapitre 9 MARGINALITÉ ET FONCTIONNALITÉ from: De l'écrit à l'écran
Abstract: Le système d’un film, c’est entre autres choses une utilisation singulière, propre à ce film, des ressources offertes par le langage cinématographique, mais c’est aussi bien une vision du monde, une certaine thématique, un ensemble de configurations obsessionnellesqui ne sont pas moins propres à ce film, et qui pourtant ne sont pas inséparables du fait cinématographique [...] (1971 : 70; je souligne.)

Book Title: Rephrasing Heidegger-A Companion to 'Being and Time'
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): SEMBERA RICHARO
Abstract: Rephrasing Heideggerincludes a unique glossary of technical terms which recur frequently throughoutBeing and Timewhose translation is problematic or uncertain. It also includes a German-English lexicon which catalogues the translations of Heidegger's terms in the most important English translations of Being and Time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpcvp

McLuhan, Media, and Hybridity: from: At the Speed of Light There is Only Illumination
Author(s) AJAYAKUMAR P. P.
Abstract: Marshall mcluhan’s theory of “hybrid energy” adopts, almost self-evidently, a hybrid structure. Although he develops and refines this concept in association with his revelations regarding various forms of media, he also links this concept with larger cultural experiences. Connecting the interplay of media with civilians, relating society to the human psyche, and juxtaposing fission and fusion, McLuhan crosses the boundaries of diverse disciplines and concepts to reveal the interaction among them. When he observes that “everybody notices how coal and steel and cars affect the arrangements of daily existence,” he seems to assert not only the interrelationship between apparently unconnected

Making Sense of McLuhan Space from: At the Speed of Light There is Only Illumination
Author(s) GOW GORDON A.
Abstract: Metaphor is a polestar in the work of Marshall McLuhan: everything revolves around it. His journey through media, culture, and mind was guided largely by means of metaphor, since his thoughts on technology, his method, and his mode of presentation were all intimately oriented toward it in some form or another. Yet the contemporary study of metaphor in McLuhan’s work is made difficult precisely because it is so pervasive. This paper is an initial attempt to chart some of the contours of a persistent formof metaphor in McLuhan’s work—namely, that of space. Spatial metaphor, as I will demonstrate,

What McLuhan Got Wrong about the Global Village and Some Things He Didn’t Foresee from: At the Speed of Light There is Only Illumination
Author(s) FAWCETT BRIAN
Abstract: In may 2000, I accepted an invitation from the University of Ottawa to investigate Marshall McLuhan’s mistakes and over-sights at a commemorative conference. I was invited, at least in part, because in the realm of McLuhan studies I have become “the troll”—as one critic put it years ago—who lives under the bridge that leads to the information superhighway, the metaphor for the street system of the “Global Village.” I confess to liking this role, which has been evolving since my book Cambodia: A Book for People Who Find Television Too Slow(1986) portrayed Marshall McLuhan variously—on the

Book Title: Is There a Canadian Philosophy?-Reflections on the Canadian Identity
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): HARRIS INGRID
Abstract: Is There a Canadian Philosophy?addresses the themes of community, culture, national identity, and universal human rights, taking the Canadian example as its focus. The authors argue that nations compelled to cope with increasing demands for group recognition may do so in a broadly liberal spirit and without succumbing to the dangers associated with an illiberal, adversarial multiculturalism. They identify and describe a Canadian civic philosophy and attempt to show how thismodus operandiof Canadian public life is capable of reconciling questions of collective identity and recognition with a commitment to individual rights and related principles of liberal democracy. They further argue that this philosophy can serve as a model for nations around the world faced with internal complexities and growing demands for recognition from populations more diverse than at any previous time in their histories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpd3s

CHAPTER 2 NATIONALISM AND THE POLITICS OF IDENTITY from: Is There a Canadian Philosophy?
Author(s) Fairfield Paul
Abstract: While not an altogether new phenomenon, political argumentation in recent times has increasingly opted for a discourse of collective identity over traditional liberal discourses of utility, the common good, and individual rights. Considerations of collective identity—whether articulated along national, ethnic, linguistic, gender, or other lines—and demands for recognition are increasingly displacing vocabularies of universality, neutrality, and, perhaps most of all, individuality.¹ Political disputes between proponents of individual freedoms and collective interests, or between the requirements of universality and particularity, are in themselves nothing new. What is new is the manner and extent to which the vocabulary of identity,

CHAPTER 3 THE BEARERS OF RIGHTS: from: Is There a Canadian Philosophy?
Author(s) Fairfield Paul
Abstract: It is an old Canadian political impulse to seek reconciliation between apparent opposites both at the levels of political philosophy and practice. Perhaps a legacy of the historic agreement that brought together in a single nation cultures as diverse as the English, the French, and an assortment of aboriginal peoples, the practice of seeking political consensus through compromise—sometimes at the expense of principle—has long been the norm in Canadian political culture. Conciliation, accommodation, and rapprochementare commonly touted as characteristically Canadian virtues, at least in this nation, and not without some claim to truth. This pragmatic turn of

CHAPTER 4 DEMOCRACY IN CANADA: from: Is There a Canadian Philosophy?
Author(s) Harris Ingrid
Abstract: For the most part, these are not new issues. Most have been debated ever since the “non-founded founding”

CHAPTER 5 RIGHTS, SOVEREIGNTY, AND THE NATION-STATE from: Is There a Canadian Philosophy?
Author(s) Harris Ingrid
Abstract: The sign at the side of the road reads, “Attention: You are now leaving Ontario. From here on you will be subject to the laws of the Nisga’a (or Mohawk, Cree, Inuit, etc.) nation.” The prospect of encountering such a sign frightens the daylights out of some people. After all, ethnocultural conflicts have been an increasing source of political violence around the world. Will permitting sovereignty for First Nations decrease or increase the possibility of violence? For some Canadians, it is the only measure that promises to do justice to the history of our dealings with them—the only move

4 Information and Literature beyond the “Digital Divide” from: Modernité en transit - Modernity in Transit
Author(s) Stockhammer Robert
Abstract: Rereading Jean-François Lyotard’s La condition postmoderne: rapport sur le savoir(1979), twenty-five years after its publication, is a process of discovery, since the book’s reception has more or less reduced it to one slogan, ironically formulated by Frank Schulze-Engler (2002) as “the master narrative about the end of master narratives” (p. 79). But what the slogan implies is quite different from what is found in the book itself, namely a diagnosis that even“la nostalgie du récit perdu est elle-même perdue pour la plupart des gens. On peut dire aujourd’hui”, Lyotard continues,“que ce travail de deuil a été accompli.

7 Exploring Post/Modern Urban Space: from: Modernité en transit - Modernity in Transit
Author(s) Löbbermann Dorothea
Abstract: Ever since the 1980s, the problem of urban homelessness has occupied not only activists and social critics, but also the cultural imagination, reviving, in a way, a topic that has been prevalent in North American literature since the 19 thcentury (on the history of homelessness in 19th- and early 20th-century American literature and culture, see Giamo, 1989; Kusmer, 2001; Allen, 2004). In recent literature, homeless characters have started to move from the margin to the centre of urban representation (see for instance, the work of Paul Auster [Moon Palace, 1989;In the Country of Last Things, 1987], Samuel R. Delany

11 What Do We Have in Common? from: Modernité en transit - Modernity in Transit
Author(s) Bonacker Thorsten
Abstract: Twenty-five years ago Jean-François Lyotard (1984) published his famous report on the state of knowledge in developed societies, calling those societies “postmodern”. With this he described that “the state of our culture following the transformations which, since the end of the nineteenth century, have altered the game rules for science, literature, and the arts” (p. xxiii). This report was the opener for two discussions, one on a theory of the transformation of modern to postmodern societies and the other on the status of social theory. In this respect, The Postmodern Conditionwas a report on processes of social change as

Introduction: from: Philosophical Theory and the Universal Declaration of Human Rights
Author(s) Sweet William
Abstract: In his famous lecture “The Rights of Man,”¹ the French philosopher Jacques Maritain draws attention to a remarkable event which occurred shortly after the end of the Second World War. Despite the diversity of interests, histories, cultures, politics, and ideologies, nations from every part of the planet were able to agree on a list of universal human rights. And for the more than fifty years since, the United Nations Universal Declaration of Human Rights (UDHR) of 1948 and the rights it enumerates have played a central role in calls for justice, equality, and the respect of human dignity throughout the

Six HUMAN RIGHTS: from: Philosophical Theory and the Universal Declaration of Human Rights
Author(s) Faghfoury Mostafa
Abstract: There are, at least, two general ways of viewing humanity. On one account, humanity is a single entity which encompasses the whole human species: past, present, and future. On this account, whether humanity is created by God or has evolved, each person has a single origin, lives with others, forms communities, thinks and reasons, and aims for a common good.

Seven THE UNIVERSAL DECLARATION OF HUMAN RIGHTS, MARITAIN, AND THE UNIVERSALITY OF HUMAN RIGHTS from: Philosophical Theory and the Universal Declaration of Human Rights
Author(s) Munro Bradley R.
Abstract: The Universal Declaration of Human Rights (UDHR) was proclaimed by the General Assembly of the United Nations on 10 December 1948. That the Universal Declaration could be proclaimed by a body representative of most of the world’s states is a remarkable achievement and worthy of celebration in this so-called postmodern world. Indeed, most of the states that since joined the General Assembly have also endorsed the UDHR. Truly remarkable about this tremendous achievement is the UDHR embracing a whole series of principles and value statements that define what constitutes human dignity. The world has an exceedingly rich array of cultures,

Eight THE UNIVERSAL DECLARATION OF HUMAN RIGHTS IN THE SUPREME COURT OF CANADA from: Philosophical Theory and the Universal Declaration of Human Rights
Author(s) Iwanicki Jack
Abstract: The Universal Declaration of Human Rights (UDHR), passed by the General Assembly fifty years ago, is an international document of immense importance. That importance could be developed and examined along a number of dimensions to gain an over all appreciation of its significance. I suggest considering it along the political, moral, educational, and legal dimensions. My plan for this chapter is to discuss briefly the first three dimensions, but then concentrate on the legal. More specifically, I plan to examine in detail cases that have come before the Supreme Court of Canada since the Canadian Charter of Rights and Freedoms

Nine HUMAN RIGHTS AND THE SURVIVAL IMPERATIVE: from: Philosophical Theory and the Universal Declaration of Human Rights
Author(s) Lancaster Philip
Abstract: We can understand the enthusiasm of the drafters of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights (United Nations General Assembly resolution 217A of 10 December 1948) by considering the historical context of their deliberations. After two cataclysmic global wars, the psychological urge to peace may have overwhelmed philosophical reservations that might have prolonged debate indefinitely.¹ Some may even have been blind to the weakness of the Kantian logic that I believe is clearly evident in the preamble or may have found their own reasons to support it.² The diplomatic bargaining involved in composing a declaration to which all could agree is,

Book Title: Robertson Davies-A Mingling of Contrarieties
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Morra Linda M.
Abstract: This collection of essays on the writing of Robertson Davies addresses the basic problems in reading his work by looking at the topics of doubling, disguise, irony, paradox, and dwelling in "gaps" or spaces "in between." The essays present new insights on a broad range of topics in Davies' oeuvre and represent one of the first major discussions devoted to Davies' work since his death in 1995.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpdzq

Introduction: from: Robertson Davies
Author(s) LA BOSSIÈRE CAMILLE R.
Abstract: Once upon a time, in 1949, Robertson Davies revisited the time of his youth to recall of his first reading in Aldous Huxley that it lifted him into “the sunshine world of high comedy” and cast over his life “a summer glory... which no conceivable winter could dispel” (Enthusiasms 230). The book was Antic Hay (1923), taken up at the suggestion of a lad of his own age who aspired to priesthood in the Church of England. “Enthralled” by the “wonderfully amusing people,” “easy scholarship,” and “witty pedantry” he met with in that novel, the teenaged Davies immediately “knew that

The Concert of His Life: from: Robertson Davies
Author(s) PETERMAN MICHAEL
Abstract: It is the spring of 1985 and Robertson Davies is writing to his old friend Gordon Roper about an exhausting publicity trip he has just undergone to promote What’s Bred in the Bone. He writes from Windover, his well-appointed rural retreat in the Caledon Hills north of Toronto, where above his desk hangs Yousuf Karsh’s photographic portrait of Carl Jung. Having complained to Roper about how shabbily he had been treated while giving readings at New York University and the National Library of Canada, he launches into an amusing story about his experiences at the National Library prior to his

Undermining Comedy: from: Robertson Davies
Author(s) CREELMAN DAVID
Abstract: Robertson Davies’ Salterton Trilogy has long played a poor second cousin to the more accomplished and widely studied Deptford novels. But if the first trilogy has garnered less attention than his subsequent fiction, the critics who have examined Tempest-Tost(1951),Leaven of Malice(1954), andA Mixture of Frailties(1958) have spoken with a perhaps surprisingly unified voice. Since Elspeth Buitenhuis explored the transformations of The Salterton Trilogy’s main protagonists, commentators have agreed that, in his early novels, Davies develops increasingly careful explorations of the individual’s emerging identity. John Mills summarises a commonality of critical opinion when he asserts that

Langue et lieu de l’écriture from: Vision-Division
Author(s) Klein-Lataud Christine
Abstract: Nous savons être, tour à tour, mille personnes différentes et nous appelons tout cela « moi ». Nous employons le même vocable pour évoquer le moi ami, parent, lecteur, promeneur, le moi songeur, admiratif devant un retable ancien, le moi citoyen, indigné à la lecture du journal du soir, le moi voisin, musicien, dormeur, rêveur, le moi buveur, rieur,

Stratégies de spatialisation et effets d’identification ou de distanciation dans Cantique des plaines from: Vision-Division
Author(s) Sing Pamela V.
Abstract: Cantique des plaines, selon Nancy Huston, est un ouvrage où l’on se retrouve face à ses racines, plus précisément à l’enfance, cette « période séparée et distincte [au] caractère totalement singulier » (Huston, 1999 : 19) et révélatrice du « vrai moi » (Huston et Sebbar, 1986 : 60). En l’occurrence, le moi de la langue première, l’anglais, creuset d’« émotions si turbulentes » (ibid. : 139) dont l’auteure avait jusqu’alors évité de se servir pour ses textes de fiction. Car l’on sait, d’après sa biographie, que la langue et le pays maternels rappellent irrévocablement le départ de la mère

Book Title: Husserl and the Sciences-Selected Perspectives
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): FEIST RICHARD
Abstract: Edmund Husserl (1859-1938) is one of the previous century's most important thinkers. Often regarded as the "Father of phenomenology," this collection of essays reveals that he is indeed much more than that. The breadth of Husserl's thought is considerable and much remains unexplored. An underlying theme of this volume is that Husserl is constantly returning to origins, revising his thought in the light of new knowledge offered by the sciences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpfgz

INTRODUCTION from: Husserl and the Sciences
Author(s) Feist Richard
Abstract: The founder of the phenomenological movement, Edmund Husserl (1859-1938), lived through a dynamic time for the sciences.¹ Not only were there major developments in mathematics and physics, but some of the greatest practitioners of these disciplines were pursuing foundational questions with an unprecedented depth and rigour. Although Husserl did not directly contribute to these developments, it is not correct to say that he simply sat on the sidelines. He personally knew and corresponded with several of the finest scientific and mathematical minds of the time. It is, therefore, not surprising that the relationship between Husserl’s philosophy and the sciences is

CHAPTER SEVEN HUSSERL AND WEYL: from: Husserl and the Sciences
Author(s) Feist Richard
Abstract: In the early years of the twentieth century, Edmund Husserl and Hermann Weyl exchanged a number of letters on the foundations of mathematics and science.¹ On 10 April 1918, Husserl writes that reading Weyl’s The Continuumwas a meaningful event since he himself had been on a “similar path” for many years.² The following comment of Husserl’s offers some idea as to what he meant by this similar path.

CHAPTER NINE FROM THE LIFEWORLD TO THE EXACT SCIENCES AND BACK from: Husserl and the Sciences
Author(s) Kerszberg Pierre
Abstract: Ever since the rise of the modern exact sciences, it has become more and more clear that the scientific mind is not bound by an exhaustive understanding of its own doings. The fact is that, while discovering the inner structure or the nexus of relations pertaining to an object, science ignores the paths that led to this structure or these relations; but these paths lie precisely at the basis of the ontological ground of the object. Husserl reflected on this legacy of the scientific revolution when he argued that “it is not always natural science that speaks when natural scientists

Blank Spaces in the History of Translation from: Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) SANTOYO JULIO-CÉSAR
Abstract: “Ladies and gentlemen,” he began, “the privilege of addressing you today is very welcome to me, not merely for the honour of it, which is great, not for the pleasures of travel, which are many, when it is Winnipeg and the University of Manitoba 1 that

Literalness and Legal Translation: from: Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) LAVIGNE CLAIRE-HÉLÈNE
Abstract: Of the many articles that have been written over the years on the subject of legal translation, only a few address the history of legal translation.¹ This lack of interest is surprising since legal translation predates even Bible translation. For example, it is generally accepted that “the oldest known recorded evidence of legal translation is the Egyptian-Hittite Peace Treaty of 1271 BC” (Sarcevic 1997, 23). It would be both impossible and futile to try to pinpoint the reasons for this lack of interest. One of its consequences, however, is that many false or misleading statements have been made about legal

Ideologies in the History of Translation: from: Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) GAGNON CHANTAL
Abstract: In Canadian history, many sociopolitical conflicts have arisen from the coexistence of two different peoples in a single land. For instance, one can think of Canada’s Conscription Crisis in 1942, its October Crisis in 1970, or its failure to conclude the Meech Lake Accord in 1990.¹ Rival nationalism is often called upon to explain these conflict situations between French and English Canadians. According to sociologists Bourque and Duchastel (1996, 315), until 1960 two nationalisms clashed with one another: that of the French community, based on the French-Canadian “race” and the Roman Catholic faith, and that of the English community, based

Glosas croniquenses: from: Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) FOSSA LYDIA
Abstract: Glosas croniquensesis a project that exhibits a distinct postcolonial approach, in that it considers texts as discourses and criticizes those accepted as foundational by conventional historians and anthropologists. Native languages and Spanish, as they appear in those discourses, have been studied as languages in contact by Solano (1991, 1993) and Rivarola (1990), as well as by Rosenblat (1977) and Alvar (1970) among others. These scholars deal with ever-changing Royal linguistic policies, the emergence of Spanish dialects in the Andes, the impossibility of expressing Catholic dogma in native languages, and the influences co-existing languages had on each other. A fresh

6 Les figures du vieillissement des femmes en gérontologie from: Du corps des femmes
Author(s) KÉRISIT MICHÈLE
Abstract: L’augmentation sensible du nombre de personnes âgées dans les sociétés occidentales et l’arrivée sans cesse redoutée de la classe d’âge de l’après-guerre (les baby boomers) au seuil « fatidique » des 50 ans ont donné récemment à la gérontologie un essor sans précédent. La gérontologie, comme champ de connaissances sur le vieillissement, ne peut cependant encore se prévaloir du statut de « discipline » au même titre que la sociologie ou la psychologie (Katz, 1997). Enseignée sous forme de « certificat » ou de spécialisation, elle n’a pas encore atteint une unité théorique (Marshall, 1996), sinon dans l’objet qu’elle a

Book Title: Philosophical Apprenticeships-Contemporary Continental Philosophy in Canada
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Robinson Jason
Abstract: Philosophical Apprenticeshipsgathers fresh and innovative essays written by the next generation of Canada's philosophers on the work of prominent Canadian philosophers currently researching topics in continental philosophy. The authors--doctoral students studying at Canadian universities--have studied with, worked with, or been deeply influenced by these philosophers. Their essays present, discuss, and develop the work of their mentors, addressing issues such as time, art, politics, hermeneutics, and phenomenology. The result is a volume that introduces the reader to the work of current Canadian philosophers and to that of their successors, who will soon be making their own contributions to Canadian continental philosophy.Includes articles by Gabriel Malenfant on Bettina Bergo, Saulius Geniusas on Gary Madison, John Marshall on Samuel Mallin, François Doyon on Claude Piché, Stephanie Zubcic on Jennifer Bates, Alexandra Morrison on Graeme Nicholson, Scott Marratto on John Russon, and Jill Gilbert on John Burbridge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpgcw

Chapter 2 Faire sens du sensé ou Bergo et la sortie de soi par l’arrivée de l’autre from: Philosophical Apprenticeships
Author(s) Malenfant Gabriel
Abstract: Si l’autre brusque ma pensée, s’il interrompt l’idée que je me fais–interruption de l’activité même de toute création de concept–, c’est qu’il brise la tâche incessante que l’intentionnalité prend à bras le corps, soit celle de la connaissance. Néanmoins, l’épistémie faite du monde par un épicentre subjectif semblait, jusqu’à Lévinas, englober l’autre (dans le cartésianisme ou par l’intersubjectivité husserlienne, notamment). Après tout, l’autre est justement du monde et, à ce titre, il peut être, comme la pierre, objet pour un sujet. Mais la plupart, sinon la totalité, des raisonnements religieux et éthiques des traditions confessionnelles et philosophiques ont

Chapter 3 Madison and Hermeneutic Intentionality: from: Philosophical Apprenticeships
Author(s) Geniusas Saulius
Abstract: The following remarks on the concept of intentionality will follow the path traversed by Gary Madison, the person who introduced me to phenomenology. By inquiring into intentionality I aim to account for at least some of the central features of Madison’s phenomenological hermeneutics. I share Madison’s conviction that the fruitful future of phenomenology and hermeneutics to a large degree depends upon the continuing dialogue between them. My aim here is to explore some reasons that will help in substantiating this claim. My interpretation, besides addressing Madison’s published texts, will also focus on a number of conference presentations, lectures, seminars, and,

The Collected Works of Northrop Frye: from: Northrop Frye
Author(s) Lee Alvin
Abstract: The initial idea of a collected edition of Frye’s writings and speeches first surfaced on 2 May 1991, a little more than three months after Frye’s death. James Carscallen, a colleague and former student of Frye, made the suggestion in a conversation with Eva Kushner, President of Victoria University, who then asked him to put the case for such an undertaking in the form of a letter to her. Later that day Carscallen did so, in a two-page single-spaced letter in which he recognized something of the complexity of what he was proposing and the large body of Frye’s productions,

“Pity the Northrop Frye Scholar”? from: Northrop Frye
Author(s) Denham Robert
Abstract: I have a relatively clear memory of my first encounter with Anatomy of Criticism. Browsing the shelves of the University of Chicago bookstore in the early 1960s, I picked up a copy of the book, not because anyone had recommended it but because it looked interesting. I had decided by then that I would be doing my degree in the history and theory of criticism, and leafing through this book made me think it worth looking into, though I did not actually read it until a couple of years later. That was after I was jerked out of my graduate

Northrop Frye and the Chart of Symbolism from: Northrop Frye
Author(s) Ayre John
Abstract: As they prepared the Anatomy of Criticismfor publication in the fall of 1955, Princeton University Press’s senior editor Benjamin Houston and Northrop Frye knew they might be in for a rough ride. Douglas Bush, the press’s major reader for the book, had given his blessing for its publication but groused about its excessive schematism. Schematism with its tables and geometric diagrams, either implied or manifest, never seems to have found a happy place in English studies. The only geometric model that has ever fully established itself is Freytag’s Pyramid, which illustrates narrative resolution. Avoidance of such constructions in English

Reframing Frye: from: Northrop Frye
Author(s) Sinding Michael
Abstract: Opinion is divided on Northrop Frye’s relation to ruling schools of thought in literary and cultural scholarship—that is, cultural studies and new historicism. Some in these schools have drawn deeply on Frye’s literary thought while condemning a perceived anti-historical, formalist, and religious bias (e.g., Jameson—see White, “Frye’s” and “Ideology” for other critics). Others (Hamilton, Salusinszky, Adamson, Wang) have strongly argued Frye’s importance as both contributor and challenger to these schools. Hayden White calls him the “greatest natural cultural historian of our time” (“Frye’s” 28). However, such contextualizations, even when favourable, risk leaving Frye obscured in the shadow of

« LA PERSISTANCE DE LA MÉMOIRE »: from: Problématiques identitaires et discours de l'exil dans les littératures francophones
Author(s) Gyssels Kathleen
Abstract: Dans cette étude, je relirai Black-Label(1956) de Léon Damas, poème écrit pendant son exil à Paris dans les années 50, à l’intersection de deux arts jumeaux, la poésie et la peinture. De même que certains poèmes de Langston Hughes, proche ami de Damas, ont été illustrés par le dessinateur Jacob Lawrence, de mêmeBlack-Labelévoque pour moi des toiles surréalistes. DansBlack-Label, recueil qui présente l’indicible de la question raciale, à un moment où Sam Selvon publie pareillementThe Lonely Londoners¹qui comporte des analogies frappantes, où George Lamming résume« the unspeakability of race »dansThe Pleasures

YING CHEN: from: Problématiques identitaires et discours de l'exil dans les littératures francophones
Author(s) de Diego Rosa
Abstract: La littérature québécoise est loin d’avoir une couleur homogène². est à l’image de sa société qui, ayant connu une profonde transformation sur le plan démographique, se dirige de plus plus vers un cosmopolitisme interculturel³. D’une manière générale, le Canada a suivi depuis trente ans une politique d’immigration culturelle et de multiculturalisme, axée sur la protection des cultures d’origine et la lutte contre la discrimination, afin de préserver les différentes singularités ethniques se sont installées surtout dans des milieux urbains comme Montréal ou Québec. Une des conséquences de ces transformations que, comme c’est le cas dans d’autres littératures francophones, l’écriture dans

NANCY HUSTON OU LE « THÉÂTRE DE L’EXIL » from: Problématiques identitaires et discours de l'exil dans les littératures francophones
Author(s) Daniélou Catherine
Abstract: L’exil de Nancy Huston, « qui aurait dû être provisoire » , fut un exil joyeusement choisi » , explique-t-elle dans un article des Temps modernesintitulé « La rassurante étrangeté¹ » (DR, 201). Choisi volontairement et avec bonheur, l’exil représente pour elle une quête qui est, de même que l’histoire de sa vie, « non pas d’identité,mais d’intensité» (DR, 200, souligné par l’auteure), dit-elle. Elle poursuit en mettant l’accent sur le nouveau point de vue que lui a offert sa situation privilégiée d’exilée volontaire Paris, bien éloignée d’une situation d’assimilée : « Pourtant, je suis étrangère que des

Introduction from: Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Melchin Kenneth R.
Abstract: Technological changes have had a dramatic impact upon the financing, organization and delivery of health care services in Canada. Professionals and health care decision makers now wrestle with increasingly complex sets of challenges that must involve various types of professionals in programs of care. The result is that administrators, nurses, physicians, social workers and other professionals have had diverse roles to play in programs of care and, consequently, have insisted that their voices be heard in the decision-making process alongside the voices of patients and their families. Needless to say, the ensuing discussions have become difficult because the diverse professional

Chapter 2 The Nurse as Moral Agent from: Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Flaherty Tim
Abstract: This chapter considers the profession of nursing as it is exercised in the field of pediatric chronic illness. We begin with a general sociohistorical sketch from which we observe the emergence of indicators that form the dimensions of the “implicit ethics” of three ideal types of nurses. This is followed by an illustration of how each of the ideal types addresses the four ethical themes of concern in this study: autonomy, economics, location of care and decision making. The chapter concludes with a synthesis that presents the nurse as moral agent and with concluding statements. In order to provide the

Chapter 3 The Physician as Moral Agent from: Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Flaherty Tim
Abstract: We present here a parallel to the chapter on nursing, keeping in mind that there will not be the repetition of much of the historical and social data that provide the context for our discussion. This chapter considers the physician and the exercise of this profession in the field of pediatric chronic illness. A brief historical sketch provides the background from which to observe the emergence of the indicators and the implicit ethicsof three ideal types of physicians. This is followed by illustrations of how each of the ideal types addresses the ethical themes of autonomy, location of care,

Chapter 5 Synthesis of Part 1 from: Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Flaherty Tim
Abstract: The objective of this part of the study was to use the tools of ideal type, a “portrait,” to provide the background to examine both the ways in which conflicts of values are lived and the ways in which ethical decisions are made in long-term care units of pediatric hospitals. The most fruitful result of this documentary research has come as insightsinto the professional interaction of physicians, nurses and social workers. This interaction is considered on both intraprofessional and interprofessional levels.

INTRODUCTION Celebrating Success — Célébrons nos réussites from: Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Kirby Sandra
Abstract: The main purpose of this book is to recognize advances made by feminists in Canada. Increasing international corporate power, withdrawal of state services, and régressive législation impoverish women and ravage thé quality of their everyday lives. Women hâve reason to be demoralized. Recognizing this challenging and unfortunate situation, this text establishes as its mandate something différent. Specifîcally, it is a review of women's successes intended to hearten thé Womens Movement and to show that thé potential for feminist change still exists.

Girl Guides of Canada: from: Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Whitney Patricia
Abstract: If woman came from Adams rib, as thé Bible claims, so thé Girl Guides came forth from thé Boy Scouts. The analogy is apt, given thé “Muscular Christianity” that imbues thé foundations of both thé Guides and thé Scouts. This particular form of Christian practice saw Victorian men living "by Gods blessing ‘a strong, daring, sporting wild man-of-thewoods’ life” while preaching “a healthful and manly Christianity, one which does not exalt thé féminine virtues to thé exclusion of thé masculine,” as thé Révérend Charles Kingsley wrote in His Letters and Memories of His Life(1877) (Houghton 1964, 204). The Boy

Alternatives to Hierarchy in Feminist Organizational Design: from: Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Laiken Marilyn E.
Abstract: Beyond management practices, which include issues of power and particular difficulty with thé rôle of executive director (Martin 1990; Ristock 1991), there seem to be many other obstacles to thé effective functioning of such organizations. Issues of class, gender, and ethnicity challenge increasingly multi-cultural and mixed économie workforces: “The attempt to replace

[PART V Introduction] from: Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Abstract: Feminist researchers Baukje Miedema and Nancy Clark describe thé lives of working-class women who choose to mother other peuples children. This paper leads to an interesting examination of thé family, with an exploration of mothering, childhood, and family relations. The New Brunswick foster mothers interviewed in this article must often use their own runds to meet thé needs of thé children in their care since state support is insufficient. Child care, including thé nurturing donc by thèse women, has little status in society. While thèse social relations oppress foster mothers and thé children they care for, thé authors report that

Conclusion The Faces of Feminist Change—Les multiples visages du changement féministe from: Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Kirby Sandra
Abstract: In thé preceding chapter, we hâve analyzed what constitutes success in making feminist change. Our analysis has shown that, although some authors emphasize certain thèmes more than others, each authors work contributes in some way to our understanding of ail thé identified thèmes. In other words, there is a shared understanding of how feminism is defined across many Canadian constituencies. At thé same time, thé constituencies represented in this book vary by bodily condition/disability/ability, geographical location, class, race, âge, and ethnicity. Thus, while there is a shared sensé of what feminism is, it is not surprising to find that feminist

CONCLUSION from: Myth, Symbol, and Colonial Encounter
Abstract: I began this inquiry by noting that one or another form of alienation appears to have been the experience of all Acadia’s peoples. The bulk of this work has concerned itself with a search for the historical roots of alienation, but it may not have constituted a historical analysis in any familiar sense of the term, since it has consciously focussed upon human religiosity as that which gives meaning to history. History, like religion, is very much a product of the scholar’s own historical context as well as of the scholar’s purpose for writing. In that sense, this historical work

CHAPTER FIVE INGARDEN’S ANALYSES OF OTHER SORTS OF ARTWORKS from: Roman Ingarden's Ontology and Aesthetics
Abstract: As we have seen, Ingarden’s primary philosophical concern lay not in aesthetics per se but in ontology. He undertook his extensive analyses of art in order not to gather material for the construction of a general ‘theory of art’ but rather to elucidate and, to some extent, ground his position with regard to the idealism/realism debate. Seen in this light, it is not at all surprising that his analyses of the different sorts of art do not yield a single conception of ‘the nature of art’,¹ which had been the goal of most traditional philosophy of art and aesthetic theory

CHAPTER SIX INGARDEN AND CONTEMPORARY AESTHETICS from: Roman Ingarden's Ontology and Aesthetics
Abstract: As I shall be explaining in Sections B and C below, Ingarden’s analyses of the ontology of art provide both a strong foundation and a powerful tool that could be employed in current research in aesthetics and theory of art.¹ The operative expression here, however, is ‘could be’, for Ingarden’s work has exerted surprisingly little influence on the contemporary scene.² Zhang Jin-Yan, speaking of the influence of Ingarden’s analyses of the literary work on contemporary literary criticism, accurately sums up the situation regarding his influence in general:

CHAPTER THREE INTERACTION WITH THE THOUGHT OF TEILHARD DE CHARDIN from: A Theology for the Earth
Abstract: Introduction Two early essays of Thomas Berry, “Creative Evolution” and “The Christian Process” suggest a reason for his initial interest in Teilhard. Berry, like Teilhard, raised questions about the increasing split he perceived between religion (Christianity, in particular) and the world of the twentieth century. They both attributed the increase in secularization and the growing sense of human alienation from religion to a ghettoized Christianity, whose efforts to meet the needs of the modern world had, to date, been minimal.¹

CHAPTER SEVEN A THEOLOGICAL ANALYSIS OF BERRY’S PROPOSAL from: A Theology for the Earth
Abstract: Introduction If theology is, as Lonergan described it, a mediation “between a cultural matrix and the significance and role of a religion in that matrix”¹ then there are two major questions that arise in considering Berry’s contribution to Christian theology: (1) The methodological question: How is Berry’s “new story” situated in terms of mediating between Christianity and culture? In Lonergan’s terms, this is to ask whether methodologically the “new story” belongs to cosmopolis, sincecosmopolisis the symbolic name for the mediation of authentic meanings and values to aid progress or to meet decline. (2) The content question: If the

CHAPITRE HUITIÈME LA RÉALITÉ EXISTANTE EST CHANCELANTE ET BRISÉE from: Pluralisme et délibération
Author(s) Vernes Paule-Monique
Abstract: La confrontation actuelle entre l’universel, le singulier et les agrégats ou les totalités partielles menace-t-elle dans ces conditions ce qui faisait la

Book Title: God and the Grounding of Morality- Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): NIELSEN KAI
Abstract: These essays make a single central claim: that human beings can still make sense of their lives and still have a humane morality, even if their worldview is utterly secular and even if they have lost the last vestige of belief in God. "Even in a self-consciously Godless world life can be fully meaningful," Nielsen contends.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cn6sv1

CHAPTER 9 On Sticking With Secular Morality from: God and the Grounding of Morality
Abstract: Before I begin a response to Donald Evans’s thoughtful and generous elucidations and probing of my own views as well as his own transformations of them, I want, by way of a prolegomenon to the very idea of conceptualizing things in terms of “Religion and Irreligion,” to make some remarks, some of which may have something of an embarrassing autobiographical tone. I utter them both because I want to put my cards on the table and in the belief that they may be generally useful.

Writer Writing, Ongoing Verb from: Future Indicative
Author(s) SCHELLENBERG BETTY A.
Abstract: Kroetsch and I are in similar positions, in that we’re both academics and we’re both writers, and so we have the problem that in recent years we’ve heard the terminology of theory used, and we’ve read it, and we’ve heard our students using it, and we’ve had to learn it

Importing Difference: from: Future Indicative
Author(s) NEUMAN SHIRLEY
Abstract: Leaving Regent’s Park, Peter Walsh blames Clarissa Dalloway for “what she had reduced him to—a whimpering, snivelling old ass. But women, he thought, shutting his pocket-knife, don’t know what passion is” (Woolf 1964, 89). At this moment, when his knife cuts so decisively through the question of women and passion and refolds within its sheath, a voice singing at the entrance to Regent’s Park Tube Station interrupts Peter’s anger. It sings “weakly,” and “shrilly,” a “voice of no age or sex” and “with an absence of all human meaning” (90). But, as the narrator’s consciousness displaces Peter Walsh’s, the

APRES L’EDIT DE FONTAINEBLEAU: from: Europe et traduction
Author(s) Lautel Alain
Abstract: « La persécution religieuse chassa de France pasteurs, professeurs, écrivains (et) les obligea de se réfugier à Londres [...]. Un des effets les moins attendus de la Révocation de l’Edit de Nantes pourvoir l’Angleterre de toute une tribu d’intermédiaires, qui hâtèrent singulièrement la diffusion de ses oeuvres et l’extension de son pouvoir : à la veille de son renouveau, elle eut à sa disposition des hérauts qui allaient annoncer sa gloire au monde civilisé.

TRADUIRE L’EUROPE EN FRANCE ENTRE 1810 ET 1840 from: Europe et traduction
Author(s) D’hulst Lieven
Abstract: Comment l’Europe fiit-elle perçue par la France au cours de la première moitié du XIX esiècle ? Vaste question, question séduisante aussi, qui exprime presque spontanément notre élan vers les synthèses élégantes et commodes. La poser, c’est peut-être aussi lui donner une légitimité et un contenu historiques : serait-ce la conscience de notre jeune citoyenneté européenne qui nous incite à l’effort de rétrospection destiné à reconstituer la généalogie du cheminement européen ayant pour terme la situation d’aujourd’hui, sinon la prospective de demain ? Scruter le passé, ce serait alors indirectement, sinon prudemment, un moyen de nous familiariser avec la nouvelle

ERNST JÜNGER, SUR LES FALAISES DE MARBRE - QUELQUES REFLEXIONS SUR LA TRADUCTION FRANÇAISE D’UN CHEF-D’ŒUVRE DE LA LITTERATURE ALLEMANDE from: Europe et traduction
Author(s) Gallagher John D.
Abstract: En 1939, juste avant le début de la seconde guerre mondiale, l’écrivain allemand Ernst Jtinger fit paraître un roman allégorique intitulé Auf den Marmorklippen.Ce récit hautement original, qui marque un sommet dans l’art de Jiinger, fut interprété aussitôt comme une critique acerbe de l’hitlérisme. L’action se déroule dans un pays mythique où s’affrontent le Bien et le Mal, le Mal étant représenté en l’occurrence sous les traits du sombre et sinistre grand Forestier.

LA RECHERCHE TRADUCTOLOGIQUE EN ESPAGNE UNE TENTATIVE DE BILAN PROVISOIRE 1985-1995 from: Europe et traduction
Author(s) Dominguez Fernando Navarro
Abstract: Sur les études de traduction et sa recherche en Espagne nous avons plusieurs aperçus de Julio-César Santoyo (1989 et 1991), Emilio Lorenzo (1989 et 1990) et Miguel-Angel Vega (1994). C’est surtout le premier qui donne un aperçu assez clair de l’état actuel de la recherche. Santoyo (1991:14) affirme que le point de départ de ces études dans notre pays commence à la fin des années soixante-dix. Jusqu’à cette date et au début des années 80, la recherche n’a pas été à la hauteur de celle de nos voisins car, comme souligne Santoyo (p. 19) dans l’article cité: « Ni aqui

The Passion of Jesus and the Gospel of John: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Thatcher Tom
Abstract: The Fourth Gospel’s account of the final events of Jesus’s life, including the causes and circumstances of his death, offers both special promise and special problems as a source for reconstructing his career. The Johannine passion narrative is promisingsimply because this material enjoys substantial parallels with other canonical and early noncanonical Christian documents. Unlike most of the Johannine signs and sayings, the causes and events of Jesus’s trials and death are recorded, or at least alluded to, in all three synoptic Gospels, the Johannine and Pauline Epistles, a variety of noncanonical Christian texts (most significantly the Gospel of Peter),

The Works of Jesus in John: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Anderson Paul N.
Abstract: The works of Jesus are described in a number of ways in the canonical Gospels. Some of them are common to John and the Synoptics, while others are only in the Synoptics or only in John. John’s riddles include the fact that many of the Synoptic features of Jesus’s works are missing from John: Jesus’s baptism, his temptation in the wilderness, calling twelve disciples, exorcisms, healing lepers and women, dining with sinners, tax collectors, and Pharisees, sending out disciples on service trips, ministering in Nazareth, feeding the four thousand, the transfiguration on the mount, and making a long and momentous

The Signs in the Gospel of John from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Schnelle Udo
Abstract: The Johannine miracle stories are of decisive importance for the interpretation of Johannine Christology, because, according to John 10:41, the working of signs is the distinguishing feature of Jesus as Messiah. Moreover, the miraculous signs are extremely important for an understanding that the Gospel as a whole, since πcιεϊν σημεϊα (“doing signs”) marks the beginning (2:11), the turning point (12:37), and the end (20:30) of Jesus’s activity in the Gospel of John. Only John tells his readers how they are to understand the miracles/signs: “Now Jesus did many other signs in the presence of the disciples, which are not written

John, Jesus, and Virtuoso Religion from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Ling Tim
Abstract: In November 2009, somewhere over the Atlantic Ocean on a flight to Dallas International Airport, I found myself having a conversation with a fellow passenger. She was returning home from Northern Sudan, where she had been working for an aid organization. She told me about the profound restrictions on the freedom of women to participate in any form of public life that for her characterized life in Sudan. She also, without noting the irony, told me about her work, which involved leading project teams and advocacy, including liaising with local political leaders. Her experience was both real and exceptional. We

Jesus Sayings in the Johannine Discourses: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Culpepper R. Alan
Abstract: The Gospel of John poses unique and formidable problems for those interested in identifying traditional sayings of Jesus. The Jesus Seminar, for example, found only one authentic saying of Jesus in the Gospel of John (John 4:44—the dishonored hometown prophet; see Funk, Hoover, and the Jesus Seminar 1993, 412). The difficulty in using traditional criteria for identifying Jesus sayings in John was aptly stated by Norman Perrin.

From the “Kingdom of God” to “Eternal Life”: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Frey Jörg
Abstract: It is the aim of the John, Jesus and History Project to reinvestigate the historical value of the Fourth Gospel and to question the allegedly critical consensus by which Johannine interpretation has been “dehistoricized” while the quest for the historical Jesus has been “de-johannified” (Anderson 2006b, 43– 100; 2007a, 3). A new search for elements of historical value in John appears warranted in view of the history of research, at least since the beginning of the twentieth century. Back then, the so-called “critical consensus” in Johannine studies was established, with the effect that John was excluded from the quest for

Book Title: Políticas culturales:-Acumulación, desarrollo y crítica cultural
Publisher: Facultad Latinoamericana de Ciencias Sociales, sede México
Author(s): Kraniauskas John
Abstract: Mediadas por su interés en los estudios subalternistas, John Kraniauskas aborda en este volumen cuestiones de la crítica cultural rearticulando una idea básica: el concepto sin intuición es vacío, y la intuición sin concepto es ciega. Así, el autor sugiere que la crítica ideológica sin la cultural es vacía, y que ésta sin aquélla es ciega, y entra en diálogo con conceptos clave como “estudios culturales", “hibridez", “transculturación", “imperio", “desarrollo" o “subalternidad"; y con autores también clave como Stuart Hall, Néstor García Canclini, Homi Bhabha, Ángel Rama, Antonio Negri, Louis Althusser y Ernesto Laclau. El propósito de Kraniauskas es mostrar que si se piensa la transculturación sin tomar en cuenta la disyunción subalterna es arriesgarse a la ceguera política; y que pensar la subalternidad sin incluir la coyuntura transcultural se vaciaría a ésta de su contenido histórico. Se trata de discutir y analizar las políticas explícitas e implícitas de las teorías o conceptos. De esclarecer la política de la teoría en la teoría. Este volumen acompaña las interpretaciones literarias y fílmicas de Políticas literarias: poder y acumulación la literatura y el cine latinoamericanos (Flacso Méxcio, 2012).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d10hbn

6. El (pos) marxismo político: from: Políticas culturales:
Abstract: On populist reason (La razón populista),¹ publicada en 2005, revela un hecho fundamental del programa de investigación de Ernesto Laclau ante el cual muchos, entre éstos los editores del compendio crítico reciente,Laclau:A critical reader(Critchley y Marchart, 2004), siguen demostrando una notable ceguera: a saber, que el populismo, como concepto y como experiencia histórica, constituye el centro de gravedad de su obra. Los aportes de Laclau a la reconfiguración del concepto gramsciano de hegemonía y su propia versión de la democracia radical (en coautoría con Chantal Mouffe) no pueden concebirse sin su experiencia histórica del populismo en Argentina

CHAPTER THREE Theology and the Metaphysics of Creation from: Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) DEWAN LAWRENCE
Abstract: In proposing to speak about the importance

CHAPTER FOUR The Concept of Nature: from: Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) KOTERSKI JOSEPH
Abstract: There are numerous ways in which philosophy can be of service to theological education. There is something invaluable, for instance, in the art of making distinctions, and among the many ways of acquiring such facility, this skill is especially promoted by training in logic, philosophy of nature, and metaphysics. It is not just a matter of avoiding arbitrary distinctions without a basis in real differences but of devising distinctions that make their cuts between diverse natural kinds. Crucial to the theoretical justification for this activity is the notion that things have real natures that can be discovered by human inquiry.

CHAPTER ELEVEN Aquinas on the Procession of the Holy Spirit from: Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) BOYLE JOHN
Abstract: This habit of prescribing more of what has caused the problem is a mark of our age. Philosophers, aware that something has gone wrong in their discipline, do not see the need for a 180-degree turn. What are considered radical solutions, merely plunge us deeper into nihilism and relativism. In short, the culture and its philosophy have grown worse since 1879, and the remedy Leo XIII proposed remains the only cure. The human mind must again be

CHAPTER SIXTEEN Charles De Koninck and Aquinas’s Doctrine of the Common Good from: Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) PRAEM O
Abstract: Charles De Koninck taught Prof. McInerny at the University of Laval in Quebec in the mid-1950s, and (as those of us who knew him can attest) McInerny considered himself a disciple of De Koninck. In later years, McInerny would express ever-increasing gratitude to De Koninck for the formation he received in Thomistic thought, and was even responsible for editing and publishing the works of his former teacher as an expression of his gratitude.

APPETITE FOR DISRUPTION from: Vampires and Zombies
Author(s) SIMONSEN RASMUS R.
Abstract: Warm Bodies, Zombieland, World War Z, The Walking Dead, Pride and Prejudice and Zombies: The living dead seem to have infested every corner of popular culture. Zombies have definitely enjoyed a resurgence in recent years—something that appeared unlikely even a decade ago—and the termrenaissance(rebirth) seems entirely appropriate in this regard (see McGlotten and VanGundy 2013, 101). Be that as it may, I hesitate to call what we are witnessing now a zombie renaissance for the simple fact that, in most cases, what passes for a zombie in contemporary cinema is nothing more than a prop in

REVAMPING DRACULA ON THE MEXICAN SILVER SCREEN from: Vampires and Zombies
Author(s) SERRANO CARMEN
Abstract: Cinematic representations of the monstrous and the supernatural are an inextricable part of film history, and the vampire is among its international stars. The Devil’s Manor(1896), by French film pioneer Georges Méliès, is considered one of the first films to play with the vampire theme. In it, a bat-like creature flies into a Gothic castle and then is transformed into a sinister cloaked figure (see Abbott 2004, 12). In 1922 director F. W. Murnau made the critically acclaimed German expressionist filmNosferatu, which presents one of the most frightening versions of the aristocratic vampire as described in Bram Stoker’s

3 Comparative Theology and the Postmodern God of “Perhaps”: from: Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Kiblinger Kristin Beise
Abstract: This essay responds to Elaine Padilla and Jon Paul Sydnor by considering their arguments in light of the view of God developed by John D. Caputo. Caputo’s view of God was chosen because it represents new, promising directions for conceiving God in our times and has important implications for comparative theology.

6 “Only Goodness Matters”: from: Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Farley Wendy
Abstract: Rory Block, the great blues singer, poses the question of evil in her wonderful song, “Faithless World.”¹ In her characteristic way, she evokes the poignancy of suffering, leaving the question of meaning visceral and open. She identifies us as “travelers” in this place of “many wonders” and “tears.” Her hard road has taught her that suffering is not punishment but rather a task given to the “enlightened,” a “lesson to be learned,” which each individual must learn for themselves. This “faithless world” is as, Jeffery Long puts it, a kind of moral gymnasium; it is a place of suffering against

14 Sleeper, Awake: from: Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Betcher Sharon V.
Abstract: In her novel A Tale for the Time Being, author and Zen Buddhist priest Ruth Ozeki sets before the reader—in the figure of a young Japanese girl, raised by her grand mother, a Buddhist nun—the question of how we live as “a time being,” as a floating speck of stardust in cosmic vastness: “Our human body appears and disappears moment by moment . . . , and this ceaseless arising and passing away is what we experience as time and being . . . In even a fraction of a second, we have the opportunity to . .

2 The Staging of the Last Supper from: The Wedding Feast of the Lamb
Abstract: Ever since Vatican II, public discussions of the eucharist (not to mention library shelves devoted to the topic) have been dominated, quite appropriately, by reflections on the eucharist either as a meal (a “repast”) or an “action of grace” ( eu-charis): the food that gives us strength; the sharing with fellow guests; the one who presides, and so on. A curtain has been drawn, however, over the meaning of what is to be eaten—probably because the significance of transubstantiation, something inherited from medieval categories, is not simple to explain. If the eucharistic Passover is certainlybread broken for a new

LA IMPORTANCIA DE SER FILÓSOFO: from: Los empeños de una casa
Author(s) Pie Aurelia Valero
Abstract: La causalidad es siempre múltiple y compleja, con frecuencia también inasible, y, sin embargo, hay sucesos singulares capaces de cambiar un orden y un sistema. La presencia de Juan David García Bacca en nuestro país tuvo el potencial de transformar el sentido y la orientación de la práctica filosófica, si bien la brevedad de su estancia supuso que parte de su influjo permaneciera sólo en latencia. Aunque únicamente durante cinco años se extendió su residencia, ese período bastó para reconocerlo como una persona “admirable” y como un “hombre estupendo”, y no pasó largo tiempo antes de celebrarse su figura como

LA PLUMA Y EL PLUMERO. from: Los empeños de una casa
Author(s) de Pablo Hammeken Luis
Abstract: Es mucho lo que se puede decir sobre Adolfo Salazar y Roiz de Palacios (1890-1958) porque también es mucho, y muy variado, lo que hizo a lo largo de su vida. Fue, entre otras cosas, compositor, poeta, musicólogo autodidacta, historiador del arte, promotor de la cultura, extraordinario docente, exquisito conversador, gastrónomo, enólogo y bon-vivant, buen amigo y generoso consejero de algunos de los más grandes artistas e intelectuales de su época y, sin lugar a dudas, el crítico musical de habla hispana más influyente del siglo xx. Se trata de un verdadero virtuoso de la pluma: el mero volumen de

JOSÉ GIRAL (1879-1962) Y EL COLEGIO DE MÉXICO from: Los empeños de una casa
Author(s) Sarmiento Francisco Javier Puerto
Abstract: José Giral había sido Ministro de Marina en dos ocasiones (1931, 1936); Presidente del Gobierno que se opuso al golpe del General Franco (1936) y Ministro de Estado con Negrín como Presidente del Gobierno (1937). Abandonó España el 5 de febrero de 1939 para acompañar al Presidente Manuel Azaña al exilio francés y, tras la caída de Cataluña (10 de febrero de 1939), no volvió al territorio español, sino que unió su suerte a la de Azaña.

Foreword from: Beyond Bali
Author(s) Herzfeld Michael
Abstract: What happens when a minority group in a fraught, conflict-ridden colony finds itself a distrusted entity within the new nation-state, its sacrifices in the cause of national independence swept aside by suspicions that its members are not loyal to the emergent realities of majority rule? What happens when its members intermarry with the hated colonizers, or flee to the colonizers’ European land in search of work? What do terms like heritage and history mean to them, against the background drumbeat of an increasingly fierce nationalism?

Book Title: Analogies of Transcendence- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): FIELDS STEPHEN M.
Abstract: The problem of nature and grace lies at the heart of Christian theology. No dimension of divine revelation can be addressed without implicitly drawing reference to this issue.Analogies of Transcendence focuses on the central role that the analogies of being and faith play in developing a solution to the problem. These link God, as self-manifesting transcendence, to the human person as both fallen and justified, and to the material cosmos. Although the proposed solution draws on the work of Maréchal, de Lubac, Balthasar, and Rahner, it criticizes their approach for its underdeveloped analogies that diminish nature in grace's engagement with it. In redressing this weakness, Fr. Fields adapts its solution to the intellectual struggle of our time. This volume examines the origins and structure of modernity, which, it asserts, has not been superseded and is therefore critical of'‘postmodernism,' as well as of some ambiguous legacies of Thomism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d8hbbv

Chapter 1 MODERN ESTRANGEMENT from: Analogies of Transcendence
Abstract: The contemporary philosopher of culture Louis Dupré argues that the passing of the Baroque lost for the West its last great harmony between nature and grace. The Baroque achieved this harmony through a dynamic understanding of the human person in its intrinsic relation to its transcendent source. In this understanding, human creativity is appreciated not only because it follows its own rules and standards but precisely because, in the complexity of these rules and standards, it symbolizes the divine.¹ Baroque culture is thus essentially representational.² In the plastic arts, for instance, Roman and Bavarian churches are filled with forms and

AFTERWORD from: Analogies of Transcendence
Abstract: If this modest work has achieved its purpose, it has indicated the need, within the human person’s single graced end, for a robust concept of nature. Although weakened, it can be rebuilt, we have argued, by developing a better understanding of the complex analogies that constitute its relation with its partner. We have also argued that the sacramental model constituted by these analogies can address modernity. Moreover, in the essay’s last part, we have shown how this model can deepen insights into several of Christianity’s perennial problems: the doctrine of God, God’s relation with the world, and the relation of

Book Title: Body or the Soul?-Religion and Culture in a Quebec Parish, 1736-1901
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): ABBOTT FRANK A.
Abstract: There are many analyses of Tractarianism – a nineteenth-century form of Anglicanism that emphasized its Catholic origins – but how did people in the colonies react to the High Church movement? Beating against the Wind, a study in nineteenth-century vernacular spirituality, emphasizes the power of faith on a shifting frontier in a transatlantic world. Focusing on people living along the Newfoundland and Labrador coast, Calvin Hollett presents a nuanced perspective on popular resistance to the colonial emissary Bishop Edward Feild and his spiritual regimen of order, silence, and solemnity. Whether by outright opposing Bishop Feild, or by simply ignoring his wishes and views, or by brokering a hybrid style of Gothic architecture, the people of Newfoundland and Labrador demonstrated their independence in the face of an attempt at hierarchical ascendency upon the arrival of Tractarianism in British North America. Instead, they continued to practise evangelical Anglicanism and participate in Methodist revivals, and thereby negotiated a popular Protestantism, one often infused with the spirituality of other seafarers from Nova Scotia and New England. Exploring the interaction between popular spirituality and religious authority, Beating against the Wind challenges the traditional claim of Feild’s success in bringing Tractarianism to the colony while exploring the resistance to Feild’s initiatives and the reasons for his disappointments.There are many analyses of Tractarianism – a nineteenth-century form of Anglicanism that emphasized its Catholic origins – but how did people in the colonies react to the High Church movement? Beating against the Wind, a study in nineteenth-century vernacular spirituality, emphasizes the power of faith on a shifting frontier in a transatlantic world. Focusing on people living along the Newfoundland and Labrador coast, Calvin Hollett presents a nuanced perspective on popular resistance to the colonial emissary Bishop Edward Feild and his spiritual regimen of order, silence, and solemnity. Whether by outright opposing Bishop Feild, or by simply ignoring his wishes and views, or by brokering a hybrid style of Gothic architecture, the people of Newfoundland and Labrador demonstrated their independence in the face of an attempt at hierarchical ascendency upon the arrival of Tractarianism in British North America. Instead, they continued to practise evangelical Anglicanism and participate in Methodist revivals, and thereby negotiated a popular Protestantism, one often infused with the spirituality of other seafarers from Nova Scotia and New England. Exploring the interaction between popular spirituality and religious authority, Beating against the Wind challenges the traditional claim of Feild’s success in bringing Tractarianism to the colony while exploring the resistance to Feild’s initiatives and the reasons for his disappointments.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d9892h

5 Jacques Derrida: from: The Event
Abstract: Derrida is evidently a Blanchotian philosopher. While continuing to affirm Heidegger’s influence, he radicalizes, through Levinas, the thought of differencein order to methodologically establish the condition for a “science of the singular.” Here, the thinking of the event and its challenge to modern existence must first of all takes the shape of a concrete and dramaticperformanceof writing: to write in the limits and in the margins of thinking so that the making of the work itself testifies to the subversive powers at play when the grounds of thinking come under question. Indeed, Heidegger and Blanchot can be

6 Gilles Deleuze: from: The Event
Abstract: The return to the ontological questions of philosophy and their renewal is Gilles Deleuze’s most pressing project. It is his philosophical priority to refuse any transcendent ideas or transcendental conditions; instead, he tends to examine the vital forces of an immanent structure. Using the term “plane of immanence,” Deleuze suggests that thinking relates to the surface of a concrete reality that it absolutely does not transcend. Thinking does not merely depend on real experience: like a pre-Socratic sage of nature, Deleuze claims that the force of thinking, its astonishment and creativity, consists of the material movement of Being, as if

Book Title: Ethos and Narrative Interpretation-The Negotiation of Values in Fiction
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): Herman David
Abstract: Ethos and Narrative Interpretationexamines the fruitfulness of the concept of ethos for the theory and analysis of literary narrative. The notion of ethos refers to the broadly persuasive effects of the image one may have of a speaker's psychology, world view, and emotional or ethical stance. How and why do readers attribute an ethos (of, for example, sincerity, reliability, authority, or irony) to literary characters, narrators, and even to authors? Are there particular conditions under which it is more appropriate for interpreters to attribute an ethos to authors, rather than to narrators? In the answer Liesbeth Korthals Altes proposes to such questions, ethos attributions are deeply implicated in the process of interpreting and evaluating narrative texts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d9nm18

2 Ethos as a Social Construction: from: Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: Who or what determines the credit granted to Houellebecq’s work and to himself, as a writer? Is it appropriate to ask about the sincerity or authority of his novel’s denunciation of the rotten state of Western culture? What clues would we have to answer this question, or does trust come before the clues? What is the role in such an ethos attribution of clues derived from an author’s public image? Drawing on a combination of approaches and models, this chapter engages with the social fabrication of meaning and the literary value of narratives and with the role of authorial ethos

[PART 2. Introduction] from: Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: The controversy surrounding frey’s A Million Little Pieces, sparked by his passing off as factually correct and honest a memoir that rather creatively invented its truth, raises some central questions. What might the consequences be of framing a work as fiction, or rather as (to some extent) factual, and of experiencing our reading of such a novel as a communication with a fictional character, or rather with a narrator, or even an author? In what respect would our ethos attribution change? What made readers expect Frey to be authentic and truthful in his narration of his character’s tribulations? Can and

3 Narratology between Hermeneutics and Cognitive Science from: Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: As has been amply observed, the current proliferation of narratologies did not exactly increase disciplinary consensus on terms and procedures. Concepts that involve ethos attribution, such as those of the implied author or the (un)reliability of narrators, play a central role in rhetorical, ethical, and other forms of critically engaged narratologies, yet there is not much agreement about even these core concepts. This should not come as a surprise, since such concepts bring into the open fundamental divergences of opinion and uncertainties about what narratology is or should be.¹ The appeal to cognitive sciences has not really solved this problem,

EDITORS’ INTRODUCTION from: Anthropologists and Their Traditions across National Borders
Author(s) GLEACH FREDERIC W.
Abstract: We begin by apologizing to our readers for the recent hiatus in publication of our ostensibly annual publication. Histories of Anthropology Annualbegan in the University of Nebraska book division and moved to the journals category aft er it had established reasonable visibility among anthropologists and historians. We discovered, however, that our readers are more inclined to buy single volumes than to subscribe. Thus we are returning to the book division. This has required rethinking and rescheduling, especially to accommodate the peer review process now in place through the Press in addition to the editors’ review. We are confidant that

1 “China to the Anthropologist”: from: Anthropologists and Their Traditions across National Borders
Author(s) KENDALL LAUREL
Abstract: “I shall place the ethnography and archaeology of this country on an entirely new and solid basis, that I shall conquer China to the anthropologist. China no longer the exclusive domain of travelers and sinologues, both narrow-minded and one-sided in their standpoints and researches, China to all who have anthropological interests” (Laufer to Boas, 12 August 1903, 1903-13, DAA, AMNH). Thus did Berthold Laufer address his mentor, Franz Boas, the founding father of American anthropology, with a euphoric vision of future anthropological researches in China. A century later, Laufer has been eulogized as the premier Sinologist of his generation, best

Introduction from: Artifacts and Illuminations
Author(s) MAHER SUSAN N.
Abstract: Acknowledged as one of the most important twentieth-century American nature writers, Loren Eiseley was a widely admired practitioner of creative nonfiction, a genre that, in part due to his example, has flourished in recent decades. Contemporary nature writers regularly cite Eiseley as an inspiration and model. General readers, as well, appreciate Eiseley’s eloquent, complex, and informative essays; devoted readers have helped keep Eiseley continuously in print since his books first began appearing more than a half century ago. Clearly, Eiseley is a writer who matters.

5 Anthropomorphizing the Essay: from: Artifacts and Illuminations
Author(s) BOARDMAN KATHLEEN
Abstract: “Anthropomorphizing: the charge of my critics.” With these abrupt words, Loren Eiseley began a one-paragraph notebook entry defending his representations of animals and animal-human relationships from the attacks of real and imagined detractors. On the day of the entry — January 22, 1970 — Eiseley was in the midst of a productive late-career period:The Unexpected Universehad recently been published,The Invisible Pyramidwas about to appear, and no doubt Eiseley was in the process of assembling and revising the essays — most of them previously published — that would composeThe Night Country. In addition, he was drafting

6 “The Borders between Us”: from: Artifacts and Illuminations
Author(s) LYNCH TOM
Abstract: Loren Eiseley’s literary reputation today rests almost exclusively on the significance of his nonfiction nature essays, which deservedly stand as influential exemplars of creative nonfiction science and nature writing. However, in his early years as an undergraduate at the University of Nebraska, Eiseley had the reputation as an important and promising poet, and he published poetry in a range of literary journals. Most notably, his work appeared in the earliest editions of Prairie Schooner, whose editorial staff he joined in 1927, the year after it began publication. And, not limited to his own school’s journal, he published in a variety

14 From the American Great Plains to the Steppes of Russia: from: Artifacts and Illuminations
Author(s) BRESCHINSKY DIMITRI N.
Abstract: Loren Eiseley was born in Lincoln, Nebraska, under the open skies of the Great Plains, and except for a brief business trip to England in 1951, never left the American mainland (see Christianson, Fox298). Had he traveled to the steppes of southern Russia, he would probably not have felt out of place, recognizing in the gently rolling hills of the countryside the flat, treeless terrain of his childhood. The difference between the Plains and the steppes is to a large extent linguistic.

5 Negotiating Public and Private Spaces from: Writing at the Limit
Abstract: Contemporary media novels show us that authors are eager to understand what makes the traditional written novel distinctive among storytelling forms. Their eagerness is heightened by the lack of any consensus about what the novel shoulddo today: what is its role within American public life? As I noted in chapter 3, writing, and thus the novel, is especially good at representing the absent, the potential, or the unrealized. By focusing on the absent, writers are able to discuss the community in which the story circulates. More broadly, contemporary media novels point to those elements of the story that are

Conclusion from: Contemporary Comics Storytelling
Abstract: In Contemporary Comics Storytelling, each of the constituents of the title is salient. In the introduction I focused more on the “contemporary” aspect of this book, mapping its place in a time of rising cultural prestige for comics and an era that begins to renegotiate postmodernism. Comics likeFables,Tom Strong, and100 Bulletsare literature, not so much because cultural gatekeepers are finally paying attention to them, but because their complex narrative strategies allow to them to participate in and reflect on the contemporary cultural debate. This book has endeavored to analyze the narrative strategies of the three series,

Book Title: Herta Müller-Politics and Aesthetics
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska Paperback
Author(s): Glajar Valentina
Abstract: Herta Müller: Politics and Aestheticsexplores Müller's writings from different literary, cultural, and historical perspectives. Part 1 features Müller's Nobel lecture, five new collage poems, and an interview with Ernest Wichner, a German-Romanian author who has traveled with her and sheds light on her writing. Parts 2 and 3, featuring essays by scholars from across Europe and the United States, address the political and poetical aspects of Müller's texts. Contributors discuss life under the Romanian Communist dictatorship while also stressing key elements of Müller's poetics, which promises both self-conscious formal experimentation and political intervention.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ddr8pv

4 Interview with Ernest Wichner from: Herta Müller
Author(s) Brandt Bettina
Abstract: Ernest Wichner (b. 1952, Guttenbrunn, Romania) is a founding member of the Aktionsgruppe Banat. Wichner left Romania in 1975 and has been living in Berlin ever since. He is a writer, translator, and editor, and he has served as the director of the Literaturhaus (Literary Institute, Berlin) since 2003. In 2004, Wichner accompanied Herta Müller and the poet Oskar Pastior on a research trip to the Ukraine, where they visited the remainders of a campsite to which Pastior had been deported in 1945 and where he worked as a forced laborer until 1949. The interview was conducted in German via

3 Translating Time: from: Born in the Blood
Author(s) Koyiyumptewa Stewart B.
Abstract: This chapter takes as its focus the question of how Hopi feelings, experiences, and knowledge of the past are, or can be, translated. Our motivation for this chapter grew out of our work together and conversations about the first author’s own (non-Pueblo) experiences at ancient sites compared to how the second author perceives the role of the past in his own life and more broadly in Hopi society. From our exchanges we have to come to believe that addressing the ways in which these two disparate affinities for the material past—and ultimately closing the gap between non-Pueblo and Pueblo

6 Performative Translation and Oral Curation: from: Born in the Blood
Author(s) Ridington Robin
Abstract: In 1999, as Amber Ridington was preparing to enter the ma program in folk studies at Western Kentucky University, her father, anthropologist Robin Ridington, recorded a French folktale told by Sammy Acko, a talented Dane-z̲aa storyteller (for the full text of this story see appendix A). The Dane-z̲aa, also known as the Beaver Indians (or Dunne-za in earlier publications), are subarctic hunting-and-gathering people who live in the Peace River region of northeastern British Columbia, Canada, close to the town of Fort St. John, where Amber was born. For almost fifty years, since Robin began his fieldwork in the area, the

10 Translating Algonquian Oral Texts from: Born in the Blood
Author(s) MacKenzie Marguerite
Abstract: In this chapter we discuss a number of issues pertinent to the translation of Canadian Aboriginal oral literature, specifically that of the Algonquian peoples of the Quebec-Labrador peninsula (eastern Canada). Our discussion focuses on a collection of “oral texts” (the Innu-Naskapi collection) with which we have been involved as translators since 1985 (MacKenzie) and 1996 (Brittain).¹ Working collaboratively with native speakers of the Aboriginal language, we have now published English translations of several stories from this collection (e.g., MacKenzie 2004; Brittain and Mac-Kenzie et al. 2004, 2005). The Innu-Naskapi collection was recorded on cassette tape in 1967 and 1968. It

11 Translating the Boundary between Life and Death in O’odham Devil Songs from: Born in the Blood
Author(s) Lopez David I.
Abstract: I do not think it a stretch to say that translating Native verbal arts occupies an unseen boundary with its comings and goings between what is actually said, what is interpreted, then invented out of those words, and the written text that is presented as a faithful rendition of what was originally stated or sung. And while translation is of course reliant upon getting the words straight, I think the heart of translation is centrally about re-expressing the rhythms and movements expressed by those words. As we are all very much aware, words have the ability to move us. And

17 Translating Context and Situation: from: Born in the Blood
Author(s) Clements William M.
Abstract: One of the earliest references to singing among North American Natives appears in a chronicle of Hernando de Soto’s exploratory expedition of La Florida, during which he and his Spanish cohorts ventured as far west as the Mississippi River after passing through much of what is now the southeastern United States. Soto’s party made their journey between 1539 and 1543. Inevitably, they would have encountered verbal art in the form of oratory as a component of diplomatic courtesies from the Indians they encountered, and they also experienced their singing. As reported by the chronicler Garcilaso de la Vega—known as

Book Title: Phantom Past, Indigenous Presence-Native Ghosts in North American Culture and History
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska Paperback
Author(s): Thrush Coll
Abstract: The imagined ghosts of Native Americans have been an important element of colonial fantasy in North America ever since European settlements were established in the seventeenth century. Native burial grounds and Native ghosts have long played a role in both regional and local folklore and in the national literature of the United States and Canada, as settlers struggled to create a new identity for themselves that melded their European heritage with their new, North American frontier surroundings. In this interdisciplinary volume, Colleen E. Boyd and Coll Thrush bring together scholars from a variety of fields to discuss this North American fascination with "the phantom Native American."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1df4h07

Introduction: from: Phantom Past, Indigenous Presence
Author(s) THRUSH COLL
Abstract: It is a story that is familiar to most modern North Americans. When unexplained, sinister, or violent things happen in the landscapes and communities we inhabit, one explanation seems to satisfy us more than many others. Whether accounting for the haunted house down the dirt lane, the spectral woods behind the subdivision, or the seemingly cursed stretch of highway up the canyon, one kind of story in particular helps us make sense of these places: Didn’t you know? It was built on an Indian burial ground. It is the stuff of countless local legends told around campfires and at teenage

3 Hauntings as Histories: from: Phantom Past, Indigenous Presence
Author(s) THRUSH COLL
Abstract: Another way to frame this question is to ask whether places—physical locations and the multiple human histories embedded in them—have distinct identities and are capable of agency. Can a single place be home to a certain kind of history, persistent and cohesive, even across boundaries of time and cultural regime? Can the nonhuman, in the form of organisms, climate, or other entities, define the shape of a place and even its meaning? Can remnants of past societies—ruins, ecological footprints, artifacts—“speak” in active ways for the histories they represent? And can we include

7 Land, Idolatry, and Justice in Romans from: Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) KEESMAAT SYLVIA C.
Abstract: In a world where the destruction of land and water is the single most threatening issue for human life, it is astounding that biblical scholars still fail to grapple with the depth of biblical concern—including that of paul—with the destruction of arable land and flowing water. By focusing the discussion on such global issues as the melting of the polar ice caps, the warming of the atmosphere, and rising sea levels (which were, of course, not even remotely in the imagination of the biblical writers), it becomes easy to sidestep the biblical call to repent of our lives

8 A New Translation of Philippians 2:5 and Its Significance for Paul’s Theology and Spirituality from: Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) GORMAN MICHAEL J.
Abstract: Philippians 2:5 remains an exegetical and translational conundrum, yet it is a “crux interpretum.”¹ The bridge between a key exhortation in the letter (Phil 1:27—2:4) and its poetic, theological foundation (Phil 2:6–11), phil 2:5, needs to be interpreted well in order to understand the nature of the connection between exhortation and foundation. Furthermore, since the great significance of phil 2:6–11—in multiple respects is universally acknowledged, we will gain the highest degree of clarity about it only if we properly explicate 2:5.

13 What Makes New Testament Theology “Theology”? from: Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) MORGAN ROBERT
Abstract: The question presupposes what the phrase itself implies: that “New Testament theology” is or should be in some sense “theology.” What that contention might mean depends not only on the contested phrase “New Testament theology,” but, prior to that, on how “theology” itself is understood, whether (to condense the range of non-disparaging dictionary meanings) in the strong sense of articulating and perhaps advocating a religious stance by expressing its belief and practice in a rational way, or in the secondary sense of philosophical, historical, and related scholarship describing and analyzing the commitments of others. Both senses imply an adjective indicating

15 The Use of the Old Testament in the Work and Preaching of F.W. Robertson of Brighton from: Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) ROGERSON JOHN W.
Abstract: Frederick William Robertson— F.W. Robertson of Brighton—died on 15 august 1853 at the age of thirty-seven. he did not live to witness, or take part in, the controversies that were provoked by the publication of Essays and Reviewsin 1860 and the first volume of J. W. Colenso’sThe Pentateuch and Joshuain the following year. Two “broad” churchmen, F.D. Maurice and Charles Kingsley, whose names are often linked with that of Robertson, were distressed by these publications. Kingsley responded by publishing, in 1863, a small volume entitledThe Gospel of the Pentateuch, in the preface to which he

CHAPTER 5 The Contours of Cotton Capitalism: from: Slavery's Capitalism
Author(s) ROTHMAN JOSHUA D.
Abstract: As a young man, Jesse Mabry showed an enterprising spirit but little tendency toward extravagance. Born in South Carolina in 1791 or 1792, by 1810 Mabry had married a woman named Nancy and the couple had established an independent household in Union County, situated in the northwestern Piedmont section of the state. They did not own much and likely brought in some income by selling cloth that Nancy wove herself, but they amassed wealth slowly and steadily over time. Sometime around 1820, they left South Carolina to pursue new economic opportunities in Mississippi, and by 1830 Jesse Mabry had become

CHAPTER 9 “No country but their counting-houses”: from: Slavery's Capitalism
Author(s) CHAMBERS STEPHEN
Abstract: Cuban slavery impacted early American capitalism through Russia. In the early nineteenth century, as the U.S.–West Indies trade increasingly centered on the Spanish colony of Cuba, a small nexus of elite Americans—particularly New Englanders—became owners of Cuban plantations.¹ Intensive American participation in the Cuban slave regime both reinforces and complicates scholars’ recognition of slavery as a national rather than sectional bedrock of U.S. state formation. When convenient or profitable, the character of U.S. slavery was also transnational.² At the very moment of the continued expansion of the North American plantation frontier and the formation of the U.S.

CHAPTER 10 The Coastwise Slave Trade and a Mercantile Community of Interest from: Slavery's Capitalism
Author(s) SCHERMERHORN CALVIN
Abstract: What is a slave ship? Such vessels are among the most emblematic features of slavery’s Atlantic history. Transatlantic slaving vessels were floating dungeons whose names evoke a “way of death,” illustrated by the iconic Brooks, theZongmassacre, and theAmistaduprising. That “vast machine” was a race-making technology, a site of demonic cruelty, and an instrument of violence. Yet the slave ship looks different when viewed in its coastal U.S. configuration. Like their transatlantic and riverine counter parts, U.S. coastal slave ships were “floating engines of capitalism,” but in the 1810s and 1820s most ships plying the domestic saltwater

CHAPTER 12 Capitalism, Slavery, and the New Epoch: from: Slavery's Capitalism
Author(s) SHANKMAN ANDREW
Abstract: Looking back at the collapse of Napoleon’s dream to forge a “universal empire,” the Philadelphia printer, political economist, and staunch Jeffersonian Mathew Carey had no doubt that the end of Bonaparte had ushered in “a new epoch.”¹ In this new epoch a British-dominated peace would end ready access to foreign markets, produce disastrous quantities of unmarketable agricultural surpluses, and place enormous, possibly unendurable, strains on republican institutions. Beginning during the frightening period of 1814–1815, between Napoleon’s first and second exiles, Carey began to pull together his concerns regarding potential national disintegration and the limitations of republican institutions and political

Book Title: The Grecanici of Southern Italy-Governance, Violence, and Minority Politics
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Pipyrou Stavroula
Abstract: The Grecanici are a Greek linguistic minority in the Calabria region of Italy, remnants of a population that has resided there since late antiquity. Their language represents a holdover from the Middle Ages, at least, and possibly even to the Greek colonies of the classical period. For decades the Grecanici passionately fought to be recognized by the Italian state as an official linguistic minority, finally achieving this goal in 1999. Violence, corruption, and mismanagement are inextricable parts of the social fabric, but Grecanici have crafted the means to invert hegemonic culture and participate in the power games of minority politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dfnrzt

Chapter 7 An Invitation to Dance from: The Grecanici of Southern Italy
Abstract: As we have seen, Grecanici governance is based on elaborate contexts of relatedness, a collapsing spatiotemporal arena encompassing the living and the dead, affective items such as religious relics and icons, divine entities, and associationism. This matrix may also be captured in the persona of ’Ndrangheta. The profile of ’Ndrangheta as oscillating between earthly joys and heavenly possessions allows for a theorization of power as continually reestablished and circulated between humans and nonhumans.

INTRODUCTION: from: Useful Fictions
Abstract: Here are some of the questions that this book will try to answer: Why do stories with sad endings make us cry? Why do we like scary movies but not scary situations in real life? How is it that we can think of a fictional character as a “friend” whose triumphs thrill us and whose misfortunes cause us pain? Why will we continue to watch a movie or television show that we don’t really like just to see how it turns out? Why can a single summer blockbuster movie earn more than a billion dollars in worldwide box-office receipts and

1 Scheherazade’s Stories and Pangloss’s Nose from: Useful Fictions
Abstract: We begin this study—as so many previous studies of storytelling have begun—with perhaps the most impressive collection of stories in human history: The Book of One Thousand and One Nights, often called, simply,The Arabian Nights. Though this collection contains hundreds of individual stories, all of the stories are placed within the context of a single frame tale: the story of Scheherazade and Shahryar. This famous tale begins three years after the great Sultan Shahryar vowed to avenge his wife’s infidelity by marrying a new woman each night and executing her the following morning. Determined to put a

4 Information Anxiety from: Useful Fictions
Abstract: The turning point of Robinson Crusoeoccurs precisely halfway into the narrative when Crusoe, after fifteen years of presuming himself the only inhabitant of his island, discovers a single footprint on a sandy beach.¹ Before this incident,Robinson Crusoetells the story of a solitary individual and his relationship with nature, God, and himself. Afterward, it becomes a political novel full of battles, colonial aspirations, social contracts, and an expanding cast of characters—including cannibals, excannibals, mutineers, Spaniards, and English sailors. For the two years after Crusoe discovers the footprint—an interval of time that requires a mere ten pages

1 Exclusion as Violence from: Violence in Francophone African and Caribbean Women's Literature
Abstract: Critical studies of African and Caribbean women writing remain scarce.¹ The reasons for this absence are twofold. First, at the beginning of the formation of African literary studies in the mid-twentieth century, there were relatively few women writers in Africa and the Caribbean. This was mainly due to the external violence of colonialism, which privileged the schooling of the male. It was also attributable to internal violence originating from precolonial and postcolonial patriarchal conceptions that prevented women in traditional and contemporary societies from expressing themselves or acquiring the same educational level as men. Maryse Conde writes, for example, that “comme

4 Sites of Violence from: Violence in Francophone African and Caribbean Women's Literature
Abstract: Calixthe Beyala and Gisèle Pineau explore further the concept of “geographies of pain” by depicting intimate space, language, and the body as sites of pain, exile, and resistance to violence.¹ In the tradition of women’s literature, the two writers turn their attention to internal sources of violence and, through their characters, condemn those who still focus solely on the external factors of violence. They ask questions such as: How can women successfully re-territorialize their violated bodies within the intimate spaces from which they have been exiled? How can they overcome linguistic limitations in expressing pain? Beyala sees linguistic violence as

5 War and Political Violence from: Violence in Francophone African and Caribbean Women's Literature
Abstract: In this chapter, I examine how women writers redefine war in their writing about political violence. The term warnormally refers to a “hostile contention by means of armed forces, carried on between nations, states, or rulers, or between parties in the same nation or state; the employment of armed forces against a foreign power, or against an opposing party in the state” (Oxford English Dictionary Online). This definition needs to be expanded to include several consequences of war with a disproportionate impact upon women, such as sexual violence; the destruction of family and the loss of husbands, sons, and

Book Title: Views from the Margins-Creating Identities in Modern France
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): Curtis Sarah A.
Abstract: This collection of essays offers examples drawn from an imperial history of France that show the power of the periphery to shape diverse and dynamic modern French identities at its center. Each essay explains French identity as a fluid process rather than a category into which French citizens (and immigrants) are expected to fit. In using a core/periphery framework to explore identity creation, Views from the Marginsbreaks new ground in bringing together diverse historical topics from politics, religion, regionalism, consumerism, nationalism, and gendered aspects of civic and legal engagement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dgn3mw

4 Exorcising Algeria: from: Views from the Margins
Author(s) WHITFIELD LEE
Abstract: In William Cohen’s study of modernization in five provincial cities in nineteenth-century France, he found that city dwellers often were drawn into the intense battles between local and national interests as the urban facade yielded to unprecedented change. Citizens inevitably went along with their civic leaders’ advice for renewal and rejected counsel that was nationally based. As Cohen writes, “To be sure, cities were not insular. Their inhabitants increasingly were swept up in the national ideologies and movements. Yet municipal leaders were able to forge and maintain a sense of unity that lent the regional city significance.”¹ In this light

Book Title: The Rhizomatic West-Representing the American West in a Transnational, Global, Media Age
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): Tatum Stephen
Abstract: Using Gilles Deleuze and Félix Guattari's concept of the rhizome, Neil Campbell shows how the West (or west-ness) continually breaks away from a mainstream notion of American "rootedness" and renews and transforms itself in various cultural forms. A region long traversed by various transient peoples (from tribes and conquerors to immigrants, traders, and trappers), the West reflects a mythic quest for settlement, permanence, and synthesis-even notions of a national or global identity-at odds with its rootless history, culture, and nature. Crossing the concept of "roots" with "routes," this book shows how notions of the West-in representations ranging from literature and film to photography, music, and architectural theory-give expression to ideas about identity, nationhood, and belonging in a world increasingly defined by movement across time and borders. The Rhizomatic Westoffers a new vision of the American West as a hybrid, performative space, a staging place for myriad intersecting and constantly changing identities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dgn4wh

2. FEASTS OF WIRE from: The Rhizomatic West
Abstract: To examine one specific type of critical regionalism I wish to turn to José David Saldívar’s Border Matters: Remapping American Cultural Studies(1997), a work influenced by the theoretical syncretism of Stuart Hall’s and Paul Gilroy’s British cultural studies and seeking to present “the U.S.-Mexico border zone as a paradigm of crossings, intercultural exchanges, circulations, resistances, and negotiations as well as of militarised ‘low-intensity’ conflict.” Saldívar argues that the border represents “a model for a new kind of U.S. cultural studies … that challenges the homogeneity of U.S. nationalism and popular culture,” with the nation “re-imagined … as a site

4. “THE ‘WESTERN’ IN QUOTES” from: The Rhizomatic West
Abstract: As I discussed in the previous chapter, Sergio Leone’s films were seen by some as the death knell of the Western and by others as its regenerative force, breathing new life into a tired, mythic formula and seeing the genre as the site for cultural critique and counterhegemonic practice. The established generic grid of the Western proved elastic and porous enough for new filmmakers looking to utilize its broad expectations and codes for different purposes, building on the promising works of directors such as Nicholas Ray, Sam Peckinpah, and Robert Altman. Often these innovations came from outside the Hollywood mainstream,

Book Title: Transatlantic Voices-Interpretations of Native North American Literatures
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): PULITANO ELVIRA
Abstract: Blending western critical approaches-from cultural studies to postcolonialism and trauma theory-with indigenous epistemological perspectives, the contributors to Transatlantic Voicesadvocate "the inescapable hybridity and intermixture of ideas" proposed by Paul Gilroy in his study of black diasporic identity. Native North American writers forcefully suggest that the study of American ethnicities in the twenty-first century can no longer be confined to the borders of the United States. Given the increasing transnational aspect of American studies, a collection such asTransatlantic Voices, presenting scholars from countries as diverse as Germany, France, Bulgaria, Switzerland, Italy, the United Kingdom, and Finland, offers a timely contribution to such border crossing in scholarship and writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1djmc5d

4 American Indian Novels of the 1930s: from: Transatlantic Voices
Author(s) PRAMPOLINI GAETANO
Abstract: John Joseph Mathews’s Sundownand D’Arcy McNickle’sThe Surroundedwere published in 1934 and 1936, respectively, and were favorably if not widely noticed but — not unlike many other valuable books that appeared during the Depression years — very soon afterward sank into oblivion, to resurface only in the late 1970s, in the wake of the interest aroused by the novels of a younger generation of American Indian writers. Yet, since their reissue, they do not seem to have reached a very large readership beyond the one ensured by their adoption as textbooks in Native American Studies university programs, nor

8 Anamnesiac Mappings: from: Transatlantic Voices
Author(s) TILLETT REBECCA
Abstract: Generating some notable critical hostility upon its publication in 1991,¹ Leslie Marmon Silko’s contentious novel Almanac of the Deadhas since been hailed as “a radical, stunning manifesto” that offers a graphic, brutal, and highly political analysis of America and the Americas at the turn of the twenty-first century.² Confronting the willful amnesia that pervades contemporary U.S. society regarding the history of settlement and of subsequent Anglo-Indian relations, Silko offers an anamnesiac consideration of the trauma of contact and a celebration of the significance of memory in the face of cultural assimilation and of the power of remembrance to heal

12 Double Translation: from: Transatlantic Voices
Author(s) HASELSTEIN ULLA
Abstract: In a well-known essay William Bevis put forward a theory of Native American literature by juxtaposing Western and Native American plot structures. “American whites,” he observed, “keep leaving home” in search of better opportunities “in a newer land” (581). These (gendered) stories typically portray an individual striving for success, trying to stand up to the test of unforeseen hardships and conflicts by keeping true to himself. The existential pathos of living in a hostile world is only slightly modified by the hero’s ability to build relationships with others; as Bevis notes, romantic love typically serves as an antidote to isolation,

14 Oklahoma International: from: Transatlantic Voices
Author(s) LEE A. ROBERT
Abstract: Issish ibakana, a Choctaw phrase Jim Barnes himself glosses as “mixedblood from Oklahoma” in his fine-grained prose and verse autobiographyOn Native Ground: Memoirs and Impressions(169), offers a point of departure. For if he has dwelt fondly upon his American family plait of Native, Welsh, and English origins, at the same time, and likely not a little in consequence, it has been accompanied by the insistence on not being bound to any single categorization. To his often self-acknowledged consternation this includes Native American writer. Rather, with Native America but one realm of lineage — however wholly and without doubt

INTRODUCCIÓN from: Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Author(s) Orrego Cristóbal
Abstract: No se trata de exposiciones acabadas de cada tema, sino de la exposición de algunos conceptos filosóficos fundamentales tal como han cristalizado tras siglos y siglos de enseñanza en la tradición filosófica, especialmente

2. JURISTA VS. LEGULEYO from: Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: Este capítulo es una interpelación muy concreta dirigida a los estudiantes de derecho. La alternativa que propone, sin embargo, puede adaptarse a cualquier profesión. El estudiante de derecho debería plantearse la cuestión de si va a aprender el derecho con cierto nivel de profundidad o va a memorizar un montón de leyes, que se pueden aplicar relativamente bien sin estudiar cinco años. Por lo tanto, tiene que optar entre estudiar derecho con mentalidad filosófica o con mentalidad meramente pragmática; si estudiar derecho con la actitud del que busca la verdad y la justicia o con la actitud del que quiere

4. AUT, AUT VS. ET, ET from: Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: He propuesto, en los capítulos anteriores, una serie de opciones. O filósofo consciente o persona inconsciente, que repite las ideas de otro; o jurista profundo, que va a las causas de las cosas y a los principios, o simple leguleyo que se aprende de memoria algunas leyes y tramita papeles sin saber su porqué. O ser un Sócrates, con voluntad de verdad, o un Calicles, un sofista escéptico, con voluntad de poder y éxito. Son opciones radicales: aut, aut. Mas ahora me permito un paréntesis para introducir matices en las opciones que veremos después.

8. TÚ Y NOSOTROS: from: Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: Con cierta frecuencia me han formulado, con no poco desconcierto, la siguiente pregunta: “¿Por qué ha habido un ataque tan sistemático a la familia como institución, en la historia de los últimos dos siglos, aunque en forma acelerada en la segunda mitad del siglo XX?”. No se trata de un desprecio a las familias concretas –nada más apreciado en todas partes–, sino a la familia como institución, con sus características esenciales: el matrimonio monógamo, indisoluble, fecundo; los hijos, nacidos bajo el amparo del matrimonio entre su padre y su madre; la vinculación de la institución familiar con la política

9. LA CÁRCEL DE LA MENTE: from: Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: La opción entre el idealismoy elrealismofilosófico es de las más radicales. La mayoría de la gente adopta una posición en este punto, casi sin darse cuenta, en medio de la confrontación cultural entre las distintas filosofías. Quizás nos conviene comenzar con un reconocimiento de la ambigüedad de las palabras: “idealismo” y “realismo” significan demasiadas cosas distintas. A veces decimos de uno que esidealistaporque persigue metas nobles,idealesde bien, de belleza, de justicia, de paz, de caridad, que nunca se pueden realizar del todo, a los cuales podemos acercarnos, no obstante su dificultad y su

12. LA LÓGICA FORMAL from: Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: A veces decimos que “Pedro es muy lógico”, o que “Juan es poco lógico”. Nos referimos así a la lógica espontánea, más o menos rigurosa en cada persona, ese orden interior que la razón sigue en su proceso de conocimiento de la verdad. Sobre esa lógica espontánea se edifica la lógica considerada como arte, es decir, como un saber práctico, que se puede definir como “el arte que dirige los actos de la razón para proceder en el conocimiento de la verdad ordenadamente, con facilidad y sin error”.106

13. LA ANALOGÍA: from: Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: Muchos debates se entrampan por falta de rigor o de flexibilidad mental respecto de los conceptos que se usan, y no por graves problemas de argumentación o de razonamiento. En materia jurídica, por ejemplo, hay un debate acerca si la ley injusta es ley o no es ley, porque un famoso adagio, muy antiguo, dice: Lex injusta non lex(“la ley injusta no es ley”). San Agustín lo formula así: “Desterrada la justicia, ¿qué son los reinos sino grandes piraterías? Y las mismas piraterías, ¿qué son sino pequeños reinos?”.109Detrás de estos modos de decir hay pensamientos muy profundos, que

18. FALACIAS O SOFISMAS from: Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: Una falacia, sofisma o paralogismo (nombre más técnico) es un argumento que parece válido y verdadero, pero que, en realidad, es inválido y oculta un error. Es un truco típico del sofista, quien quiere convertir la peor razón en la mejor, sin que el auditorio se dé cuenta. Hay, por tanto, dos elementos fundamentales en la falacia: una apariencia de verdad y de validez lógica y un error lógico al servicio de una falsedad de fondo. El estudio de los sofismas aborda precisamente esos errores ocultos.

20. LA NOCIÓN METAFÍSICA DE NATURALEZA from: Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: El capítulo precedente versó sobre la correspondencia entre physis, logos y polis. No es difícil sentirse identificado con algunas de esas posiciones, porque están en el ambiente intelectual que nos rodea. La idea de naturaleza como simple materia sin valor, disponible para cualquier cosa, a la que corresponde ellogos calculantey unapolisordenada fundamentalmente a la producción, a la riqueza, al progreso en un sentido solo técnico, seduce nuestra voluntad de dominación y de autonomía moral respecto de la naturaleza. La naturaleza concebida como uncaos informe, a la que corresponde una noción irracional dellogos, unaantilógica

30. LA UNIDAD DE LA PERSONA HUMANA: from: Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: La visión clásica y cristiana del ser humano, vista desde la perspectiva filosófica, incluye solo aquellos rasgos que podría comprender una persona –en principio– con su razón humana natural, sin el auxilio de la fe cristiana. Sin embargo, desde un punto de vista histórico no se puede negar que los trazos más profundos de esa imagen del hombre fueron incorporados a la tradición filosófica perenne por influjo del cristianismo. Pensemos, por ejemplo, en una ideología actual, el liberalismo político democrático, que se edifica sobre la base de que todos los ciudadanos tienen igual dignidad y libertad, y, según pretenden deducir

31. LOS GRADOS DE VIDA Y LAS FUNCIONES VITALES from: Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: El problema ético-jurídico de la llamada “muerte cerebral”, como criterio para determinar si una persona está efectivamente muerta, constituye un debate de actualidad con la única consecuencia práctica –importante, desde luego– de que, al paciente declarado muerto, se le pueden extraer sin escrúpulos los órganos para trasplantarlos. La cuestión es: ¿está realmente muerto o está vivo? ¿Por qué hay tanto debate? Porque la apariencia externa es que está vivo; sin embargo, hay un diagnóstico que, apoyándose en el cese irreversible de las funciones encefálicas, afirma que, en realidad, está muerto. La muerte en sí no se puede observar sensiblemente, porque

37. DIOS, DIOSES Y HOMBRES from: Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: La teología natural estudia, desde una perspectiva solo racional, el problema del origen y el sentido último del universo en que nos encontramos. Por lo tanto, la teología natural es una parte de la filosofía que se distingue de la teología de la fe. Como nosotros vivimos en una época cristiana –o post cristiana, más o menos, según los lugares–, estamos muy acostumbrados a oír la expresión “teología” sin apellido para referirse al estudio racional de las cuestiones que se saben por fe, por una revelación sobrenatural. La Universidad ofrece cursos de este tipo de teología de la fe,

Introducción from: El hombre
Abstract: El más hermoso y verdadero horizonte no es ése que contemplamos en una dorada o purpúrea puesta de sol. No podemos percibirlo con los ojos de nuestro cuerpo, sino sólo con un sensorio interior. Los griegos lo sabían bien cuando resumían el mayor anhelo de la humana sabiduría en aquel “conócete a ti mismo”. Es en lo profundo del alma –de su lógos, como diría Heráclito¹– donde puede adivinarse el Sol que reverberó en las nubes de nuestro ingenio o en los polvos de los cuerpos a la hora del amanecer que fue para esta tierra la creación del ser

Creating the Urban Beauty: from: Writing and Materiality in China
Author(s) Yeh Catherine Vance
Abstract: During the late nineteenth century, a visual revolution began in the Chinese print industry. Spearheaded by Shanghai and its publishing houses and aided in part by new, foreign printing technologies such as copper engraving, lithography, and photography, new forms of visual publication started to have an impact on the marketplace.¹ As Western material culture in the form of imported goods made inroads into the daily life of Shanghai residents, new types of illustrated publications—magazines, urban and entertainment guides, and later newspapers—increasingly catered to this urban readership rather than to the traditional literati elite. At the center of this

Tope and Topos: from: Writing and Materiality in China
Author(s) Wang Eugene Y.
Abstract: A site is often a toposin that it both marks a locus and serves as a topic. It is a common place that can be traversed or inhabited by a public and a rhetorical commonplace familiar to both its author and his audience.¹ Although there is no exact equivalent in Chinese to the Greek wordtoposthat conveniently collapses the dual senses oflocus and topic, the notion ofji績 (site, trace, vestige) comes close. Ajiis a site that emphasizes “vestiges” and “traces.” It is a peculiar spatial-temporal construct. Spatially, a landmark, such as a tower, a

CONCLUSION: from: Public Memory in Early China
Abstract: Like a Western obituary, the Jing Yun stele begins by offering the names of the deceased—personal, courtesy, and surname—his office, and then the date of his death, the last given as a particular day in the summer of 103 ce, the precision of which is rather surprising given that this stele was erected seventy years later.¹ Unlike a Western obituary (and unlike most other Han stelae), it then provides us with hardly any other personal information about Jing Yun such as his education, his service history, his age at death, and his surviving relatives. Here the Western obituary

Part I An Imaginary Yardstick for Ritual Performance from: Ancestral Memory in Early China
Abstract: Alongside the hundreds of definitions for religion in modern scholarship, there are almost as many explanations for ritual. That is, not only is there no consensus as to what religion is, but there is just as little agreement as to what constitutes the practice of it. Among the structuralist, functionalist, phenomenologist and psychoanalytical approaches to ritual, the relatively recent discussions on “performance theory” have been most promising in terms of usefulness, likening ritual to a kind of interactive theater that highlights 1.) ritual’s experiential side, 2.) its framing techniques and 3.) the seemingly complete microcosm it endeavors to offer. In

Part III A Spectrum of Interpretations on Afterlife Existence from: Ancestral Memory in Early China
Abstract: In a Songs canonhymn entitled “Fullness” (“Na” 那), the filial descendant offers up a musical invitation to the spirits using drums, pipes and bells—invitational music that “lets us realize our thoughts” (sui wo si cheng綏我思成).¹ In another hymn entitled “Illustrious ancestors” (“Liezu” 烈祖), alcoholic offerings bring the spirits down to us and again “allow us to realize our thoughts” (lai wo si cheng賚我思成).² By channeling the mind, music invited the spirits. According to the influential commentary by the Eastern Han exegete Zheng Xuan, the pacified mind first endured several days of pre-sacrificial meditations and abstentions

Part IV The Context of Early Chinese Performative Thinking from: Ancestral Memory in Early China
Abstract: When discussing texts that closely intertwine memory and spirits, Part III used the phrase “performative thinking” for thinking that, in and of itself, directly impacts the environment outside the thinker. As already noted, I adapted this notion from J. D. Austin’s “performative utterances,” utterances that, by Austin’s own definition, do not merely report about or stimulate an act but are the very execution of the act itself, such as when someone pledges “I do” in a marriage ceremony or is pronounced “Guilty!” at a trial.¹ The celebratory wedding or the courtroom drama are highly ritualized institutions in modern society, and

Part V The Symbolic Language of Fading Memories from: Ancestral Memory in Early China
Abstract: Because cultures express ideas using more than just written words, textoriented historians can have great difficulty in understanding and communicating the “meaning” of some of the most basic components of experiences past. Past experiences are often measured in difficult-to-articulate symbols rather than words, and Lakoff and Johnson argue that humans tend to rely more upon such symbols when a particular idea cannot be clearly defined by experience in any direct fashion. They write that “we tend to structure the less concrete and inherently vaguer concepts (like those for the emotions) in terms of more concrete concepts, which are more clearly

Book Title: Lydia Ginzburg's Prose-Reality in Search of Literature
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Van Buskirk Emily
Abstract: This full account of Ginzburg's writing career in many genres and emotional registers enables us not only to rethink the experience of Soviet intellectuals, but to arrive at a new understanding of writing and witnessing during a horrific century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dr36q1

CHAPTER 1 Writing the Self after the Crisis of Individualism: from: Lydia Ginzburg's Prose
Abstract: In a New Year’s reflection at the beginning of 1932, Lydia Ginzburg wrote a startling self-description: “My sense of myself is that I’m a piece that’s been torn, with its threads still hanging, from the fabric of social reality, which I’ve succeeded in bringing up close to my eyes, a scrap of reality that’s just handy enough for close observation.”¹ In sensing that she’s a random piece of a whole, she signals her departure from the usual posture of autobiographical subjects, who present themselves in their narratives as uniquely deserving of the reader’s attention.² And instead of making a neat

CHAPTER 3 Marginality in the Mainstream, Lesbian Love in the Third Person from: Lydia Ginzburg's Prose
Abstract: In 1925, Ginzburg wrote, for the desk drawer, a critique of André Gide’s famous defense of homosexuality, Corydon: quatre dialogues socratiques.The focus of her attack is not so much his overall purpose, but rather one of his main arguments: the claim that homosexuality is an irreproachable way of being since it is “natural,” and present throughout the animal kingdom. With obvious sarcasm, Ginzburg counters that “in essence, all good things are not natural: art is not natural, [. . .] using a fork or a napkin is not natural, [. . .] the steam engine and electric generators are

CHAPTER 4 Passing Characters from: Lydia Ginzburg's Prose
Abstract: In her book On Psychological Prose, first published in 1971, Ginzburg articulates the realm in which life and literature dynamically interact as we model our personalities: in daily life, people understand themselves and others through “creative constructs,” carrying out the aesthetic work of “selection, correlation, and symbolic interpretation of psychic elements.” The processes through which we compose and project our self-images resemble the creative acts authors perform when designing literary characters or lyric personae. Not only are these processes similar, they are symbiotic, since a personality “shapes itself, both internally and externally, by means of images, many of which have

Book Title: The Postmodern Bible-The Bible and Culture Collective
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Wuellner Wilhelm
Abstract: The burgeoning use of modern literary theory and cultural criticism in recent biblical studies has led to stimulating-but often bewildering-new readings of the Bible. This book, argued from a perspective shaped by postmodernism, is at once an accessible guide to and an engagement with various methods, theories, and critical practices transforming biblical scholarship today.Written by a collective of cutting-edge scholars-with each page the work of multiple hands- The Postmodern Bibledeliberately breaks with the individualist model of authorship that has traditionally dominated scholarship in the humanities and is itself an illustration of the postmodern transformation of biblical studies for which it argues.The book introduces, illustrates, and critiques seven prominent strategies of reading. Several of these interpretive strategies-rhetorical criticism, structuralism and narratology, reader-response criticism, and feminist criticism-have been instrumental in the transformation of biblical studies up to now. Many-feminist and womanist criticism, ideological criticism, poststructuralism, and psychoanalytic criticism-hold promise for the continued transformation of these studies in the future. Focusing on readings from both the Hebrew Bible and the New Testament, this volume illuminates the current multidisciplinary debates emerging from postmodernism by exposing the still highly contested epistemological, political, and ethical positions in the field of biblical studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dr3804

Introduction from: The Postmodern Bible
Abstract: We begin with a truism: the Bible has exerted more cultural influence on the West than any other single document. Understanding that influence in late twentieth-century Western culture presents a major challenge to biblical scholarship. Yet the dominant methodologies of historical criticism have been both the very foundation of modern biblical interpretation and the major obstacle to making sense of the Bible’s ongoing formative influence over culture and society. Historical criticism brackets out the contemporary milieu and excludes any examination of the ongoing formative effects of the Bible. By embracing scientific method as the key in the search for historical

2 Structuralist and Narratological Criticism from: The Postmodern Bible
Abstract: Along with reader-response criticism, structuralist and narratological criticism has offered biblical interpreters a crucial entryway into literary theory and the reading of the Bible. The theoretical models and language associated with structuralism and narratology, however, are quite distinct. Readers unfamiliar with these approaches may find the technical terminology complex and confusing. For this reason we concentrate our discussion on five key terms: structuralism, formalism, semiotics, narratology, andpoetics. Their interrelations will be dealt with along the way. Suffice it to say here, by way of explaining the chapter title, that formalism and semiotics will be taken up in relation to

3 Poststructuralist Criticism from: The Postmodern Bible
Abstract: At that time structuralism was dominant. “Deconstruction” seemed to be going in the same direction since the word signified a certain attention to structures .… To deconstruct was also a structuralist gesture .… But it was also an

6 Feminist and Womanist Criticism from: The Postmodern Bible
Abstract: We begin with several feminist and womanist readings of a single biblical text, Hosea 1

8 Wordsworth at the Limits of Romantic Hermeneutics from: Hermeneutics Ancient and Modern
Abstract: In this chapter I want to try to gloss the above passage, with its reference to something that looks very much like the Stanislavsky method of getting into character, where one loses oneself in the construction of someone else. Imagine a theory of poetry as acting, in which the distinction between being and acting loses its ontological force. As it happens, glossing this passage will mean situating Wordsworth within the history of interpretation, by which I mean the history that concerns itself with the question of understanding. What is it that happens when something, or someone, makes sense, or maybe

9 On the Tragedy of Hermeneutical Experience from: Hermeneutics Ancient and Modern
Abstract: Hermeneutics is made up of a family of questions about what happens in the understanding of anything, not just of texts but of how things are. This is different from the usual question about how to make understanding happen, how to produceit the way you produce a meaning or a statement where one is missing. For hermeneutics, understanding is not (or not just) of meanings; rather, meaning is, metaphorically, the light that a text sheds on the subject (Sache) that we seek to understand. Think ofSachenot as an object of thought or as the product or goal

Book Title: Local Knowledge, Global Stage- Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): GLEACH FREDERIC W.
Abstract: The Histories of Anthropology Annual presents localized perspectives on the discipline's history within a global context, with a goal of increasing awareness and use of historical approaches in teaching, learning, and conducting anthropology.This tenth volume of the series, Local Knowledge, Global Stage, examines worldwide historical trends of anthropology ranging from the assertion that all British anthropology is a study of the Old Testament to the discovery of the untranslated shorthand notes of pioneering anthropologist Franz Boas. Other topics include archival research into the study of Vancouver Island's indigenous languages, explorations of the Christian notion of virgin births in Edward Tylor'sThe Legend of Perseus, and the Canadian government's implementation of European-model farms as a way to undermine Native culture. In addition to Boas and Tylor, the essays explore the research and personalities of Susan Golla, Edwin Sydney Hartland, and others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dxg7dv

8 Genealogies of Knowledge in the Alberni Valley: from: Local Knowledge, Global Stage
Author(s) GREEN DENISE NICOLE
Abstract: Asking for help is important. I learned this over the five years I spent in Nuu-chah-nulth First Nations’ haahuulthii(traditional territory) as an anthropology PhD student: I witnessed networks of relatives work together to celebrate important moments in their interwoven lives throughn’uushitl(potlatching) andtl’itscuu(feasting).¹ Asking for help demonstrates an understanding that most cultural “business” is larger than the individual.² One must reach out to find the appropriate resource. This is how I eventually found myself, in the fall of 2013, immersed in the archive of Dr. Susan Golla. Someone asked me for help.

CHAPTER ONE Introduction from: In a Different Place
Abstract: This book is, first of all, a book about a pilgrimage site, the Church of the Madonna of the Annunciation ( Evangelístria) on the Aegean island of Tinos, Greece, where I have been conducting research since 1986.¹ My account, however, is more than a simple ethnographic description. Indeed, in the context of contemporary anthropology, one would be hard put to maintain that any ethnographic description is ever really simple—or that any ethnography can be simply description. Acknowledging this, I seek here to experiment with several types of what might be termed “ethnographic exploration” in order to pursue the aims I

CHAPTER FOUR Observing Pilgrimage: from: In a Different Place
Abstract: On the evening of August 12, 1986, at around eight o’clock, I left my apartment on Tinos accompanied by a visitor, my partner and companion Ray, who had come to visit me for six weeks.¹ It was Ray’s last evening on the island and we had planned a nice dinner at our favorite restaurant. Since it was still a little early to eat (by Greek standards), we thought we would first take a stroll along the waterfront and perhaps sit at a sidewalk cafe and watch the passing crowds.

Book Title: Firewalking and Religious Healing-The Anastenaria of Greece and the American Firewalking Movement
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Danforth Loring M.
Abstract: "If the Saint calls you, if you have an open road, then you don't feel the fire as if it were your enemy," says one of the participants in the Anastenaria. This compelling work evokes and contrasts two forms of firewalking and religious healing: first, the Anastenaria, a northern Greek ritual in which people who are possessed by Saint Constantine dance dramatically over red-hot coals, and, second, American firewalking, one of the more spectacular activities of New Age psychology. Loring Danforth not only analyzes these rituals in light of the most recent work in medical and symbolic anthropology but also describes in detail the lives of individual firewalkers, involving the reader personally in their experiences: he views ritual therapy as a process of transformation and empowerment through which people are metaphorically moved from a state of illness to a state of health. Danforth shows that the Anastenaria and the songs accompanying it allow people to express and resolve conflict-laden family relationships that may lead to certain kinds of illnesses. He also demonstrates how women use the ritual to gain a sense of power and control over their lives without actually challenging the ideology of male dominance that pervades Greek culture. Comparing the Anastenaria with American firewalking, Danforth includes a gripping account of his own participation in a firewalk in rural Maine. Finally he examines the place of anthropology in a postmodern world in which the boundaries between cultures are becoming increasingly blurred.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dxg8pg

Introduction from: Firewalking and Religious Healing
Abstract: In the postmodern world of the late twentieth century it has become increasingly difficult to sustain the notion that even the most “exotic” people anthropologists write about—from the Trobriand Islanders to the Yanomamo—live in totally alien, isolated, and self-contained cultures. Our world has grown smaller; its societies and cultures, unique and diverse though they are, are now woven together in a complex web of interconnections and mutual influences that forms a thoroughly interdependent “world system.” In response to the many serious challenges posed by such a world, anthropology today, like other disciplines in the humanities and the social

III The Anastenaria from: Firewalking and Religious Healing
Abstract: The village of Ayia Eleni is located fifteen kilometers south of Serres, an important commercial center in the eastern part of Greek Macedonia with approximately forty thousand inhabitants. The Strymonas River flows nearby on its eighty-kilometer journey from the Bulgarian border to the Aegean Sea. It is the water of the Strymonas distributed through an elaborate irrigation network that is largely responsible for the high standard of living that the people of Ayia Eleni and the other villages of the Serres basin have come to enjoy.

VI The Celebration of Community in a Changing World from: Firewalking and Religious Healing
Abstract: The Anastenaria not only plays an important part in the personal lives of individual Anastenarides, it also plays a central role in the collective life of the village of Ayia Eleni and the community of Kostilides as a whole. The Anastenaria has been a powerful symbol for the shared identity of the Kostilides ever since their arrival as refugees in Greek Macedonia. It epitomizes all that it means to be a Kostilis in a society that is experiencing the homogenizing effects of mass media, a national educational system, and rapid modernization and urbanization. In addition, the festival of Saints Constantine

VIII The American Firewalking Movement from: Firewalking and Religious Healing
Abstract: Firewalking is certainly one of the most dramatic activities that take place at the many classes, seminars, and workshops attended by the increasing number of Americans who hope to bring about a “New Age” of peace, unity, and higher consciousness through personal growth and spiritual transformation. By the 1980s a wide range of belief systems, social causes, and healing practices, whose origins lay in the counterculture of the 1960s, had come together under the general rubric of New Age phenomena. The women’s movement, the environmental movement, and the peace movement; health food, renewable resources, and appropriate technology; parapsychology, astrology, and

CHAPITRE 8 LE MÉTARÉCIT ENVIRONNEMENTAL: from: Changement et grands projets
Author(s) JALENQUES-VIGOUROUX BÉATRICE
Abstract: À quel point la pensée écologique est-elle porteuse de changements ? Comment ceux-ci se dessinent-ils ? L’intérêt du concept de métarécit environnemental réside dans le fait de parvenir à penser ce changement en s’interrogeant sur le sens de ce changement, ce qui est rendu possible dans le cadre conceptuel spécifique de la narratologie. Nous présenterons ici quelques aspects d’une étude des discours émanant de diverses organisations travaillant sur de grands projets, et nous tenterons de montrer comment ils participent à la construction cohérente d’un métarécit. Nous examinerons alors un grand projet en particulier concernant la réhabilitation énergétique de logements sociaux¹

CHAPITRE 18 PROTECTING WOMEN AND CHILDREN FROM VIOLENCE from: Responsabilités et violences envers les femmes
Author(s) Hagemann-White Carol
Abstract: Violence against women was neither recognized as a significant problem, nor was it studied empirically, until women’s political action in the 1970s and 1980s. In particular, the success of grassroots feminist activism in creating hotlines, shelters, and counseling centres for women made men’s violence visible as a widespread social problem and a structural element in gender relations. Thus, in much of Western Europe, addressing violence against women began by creating places of safety and support for victims.

Book Title: Vers une approche géopoétique-Lectures de Kenneth White, de Victor Segalen et de J.-M. G. Le Clézio
Publisher: Presses de l'Université du Québec
Author(s): BOUVET RACHEL
Abstract: Toute perspective de lecture est liée à un ancrage géographique. Chaque lecteur est habité par des paysages. Pour Rachel Bouvet, ce paysage est celui de l’océan tel qu’on peut l’observer le long des côtes bretonnes, cette force gigantesque, sublime, mais aussi porteuse d’une douceur infinie. Les auteurs Kenneth White, Victor Segalen et J.-M. G. Le Clézio partagent eux aussi cet ancrage breton : White vogue principalement entre les Côtes-d’Armor et l’Écosse, Segalen naviguait surtout entre le Finistère Nord et le Pacifique, Le Clézio voyage entre le Finistère Sud et le Nouveau-Mexique en passant par l’océan Indien et la Méditerranée. Consciente de son attachement breton, provoquant chez elle une sensibilité accrue aux paysages maritimes et désertiques, le désir de la géopoétique et un questionnement sur l’altérité, Rachel Bouvet réfléchit à la dimension géographique de l’acte de lecture. Par son analyse des œuvres de Kenneth White, de Victor Segalen et de J.-M. G. Le Clézio, elle montre que la géopoétique peut donner lieu à une approche singulière des textes littéraires. Faisant souvent appel à la géographie, aussi bien à la géographie physique qu’à la géographie humaine, avec les questions de paysage, de carte, de territoire, d’archipel, de frontière, elle illustre de quelle manière une interprétation basée sur les principes essentiels de la géopoétique peut se déployer.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1f1176j

2 Les mises en scène du patrimoine culturel: from: La trace et le rhizome - Les mises en scène du patrimoine culturel
Abstract: En 1768, un riche gisement de kaolin est découvert à Saint-Yrieix-la-Perche, près de Limoges. Turgot, alors intendant du Limousin, obtient que ce kaolin ne soit pas, comme initialement prévu, acheminé à Paris pour alimenter la Manufacture Royale de Sèvres, mais directement exploité sur place, tant il en perçoit l’intérêt pour le territoire concerné. À ce moment-là, tous les royaumes d’Europe, suivant l’exemple de la Saxe (à Meissen), recherchent dans leur sol cette substance argileuse blanche qui permet de produire une céramique analogue à l’ancestrale porcelaine chinoise. En 1771, Turgot confie à un faïencier le soin de réaliser la première cuisson,

4 De la trace au rhizome from: La trace et le rhizome - Les mises en scène du patrimoine culturel
Abstract: Dans les années 1980, la ville colombienne de Medellin est tristement reconnue comme l’une des villes les plus criminogenes du monde, du fait du commerce de la drogue et des conflits d’une extrême violence qui l’accompagnaient. Dans cette agglomération de près de trois millions d’habitants, la moyenne quotidienne d’assassinats y est d’environ trente, et chacun de ses habitants sait en quittant son domicile le matin qu’il peut disparaître, quelle que soit l’heure, le lieu et la raison. Ainsi cette grande ville située entre deux chaînes de la cordillère des Andes à deux mille mètres d’altitude dans un environnement physique superbe

NAVIGATIONS MÉDITERRANÉENNES DANS LÉON L’AFRICAIN ET LE PÉRIPLE DE BALDASSARE from: Amin Maalouf: une oeuvre à revisiter
Author(s) Bouvet Rachel
Abstract: Le bassin méditerranéen joue un rôle crucial dans l’œuvre d’Amin Maalouf. Tout lecteur familier de ses romans, de ses essais ou de ses autres productions s’en aperçoit rapidement. Il suffit de penser à l’importance du Liban dans Le rocher de Tanios, Les désorientésetOrigines, à l’exploration des rapports entre l’Occident et le Proche-Orient depuisLes croisades vues par les Arabesjusqu’auDérèglement du mondeen passant parLes identités meurtrières, aux tribulations d’Ossyane dansLes échelles du Levant, etc.¹. Ce qui est moins évident, c’est la place qu’y occupe la Méditerranée, cette mer « du milieu des terres »,

LÉON L’AFRICAIN: from: Amin Maalouf: une oeuvre à revisiter
Author(s) Broche Laurent
Abstract: Parmi les romans historiques d’Amin Maalouf, Léon l’Africainoffre une singularité remarquable : c’est le seul récit où un individu attesté raconte sa vie à la première personne. Bien d’autres figures importantes de ses romans renvoient à des personnages historiques. Ainsi, Omar Khayyam, le poète, mathématicien, astronome, et Hassan-Ibn al-Sabbâh, « le Vieux de la Montagne » de la secte des Assassins, que met en scèneSamarcande, ont vécu au XIesiècle. Mais ni l’un ni l’autre ne racontent leur histoire. C’est Benjamin O. Lesage – Américain d’origine française ayant perdu lors du naufrage duTitanicl’exemplaire original et unique

LES PROPHÉTIES D’AMIN MAALOUF from: Amin Maalouf: une oeuvre à revisiter
Author(s) Mangerel Caroline
Abstract: Dans Le premier siècle après Béatrice¹ (1992), Amin Maalouf dessine la vision d’un futur relativement proche où l’humanité dépérit par manque de filles et de femmes après la découverte d’une poudre qui augmente les chances d’un couple de concevoir un garçon. Cette « substance » multiplie la tendance déjà présente, notamment en Chine et en Inde, à privilégier les naissances mâles. Les femmes deviendront une denrée rare, une précieuse monnaie d’échange internationale dans un monde dont le déséquilibre grandissant force une guerre perpétuelle et qui voit une grande partie de sa population s’entretuer ou dépérir. C’est le narrateur, un spécialiste

DE LA FRANCOPHONIE LITTÉRAIRE À LA POÉTIQUE DE L’INTERCULTUREL: from: Amin Maalouf: une oeuvre à revisiter
Author(s) Bikoko Isidore Pentecôte
Abstract: Le parcours du manuscrit de Samarcande¹ est le symbole des migrations de savoirs orientaux dans le monde ; qu’il s’agisse de la culture ou du génie littéraire, on y découvre, dans un intervalle de neuf siècles, une histoire tapie dans l’oubli, au fond de l’Atlantique². C’est le regard a-temporel des univers singuliers qui finissent par se croiser, au gré des voyages d’hommes, mais de langues et de cultures aussi. C’est, en d’autres termes, une quête de l’ouverture, aussi visible et lisible dansLéon l’Africain³ que dansSamarcande. Bien plus, au carrefour de ces deux romans marqués du sceau de l’ouverture

Book Title: Des couvents en héritage / Religious Houses: A Legacy- Publisher: Presses de l'Université du Québec
Author(s): DROUIN MARTIN
Abstract: À l’heure de la désaffection des traditions religieuses historiques, les couvents, les monastères et les abbayes qui émaillent les paysages de nos villes et de nos campagnes sont menacés de déshérence : les communautés qui les ont bâtis, habités et qui en ont assuré la survie n’ont plus les moyens d’assumer leur charge patrimoniale. En même temps que s’impose l’affection citoyenne pour ces vastes ensembles et leurs jardins, ceux-ci sont de plus en plus convoités à des fins de développement. Que faire de cet héritage riche et lourd ? Cet ouvrage collectif regroupe des contributions qui apportent des pistes de réflexion sur les problèmes de la sécularisation, de la réaffectation ou de la gouvernance d’anciens ensembles conventuels. Il vise également à nourrir la discussion sur les implications financières, juridiques, urbanistiques et mémorielles du changement de vocation des couvents et de leur mise en valeur. In this time of abandonment of historical religious traditions, the convents, monasteries, and abbeys that punctuate our rural and urban landscapes are in danger of becoming escheated properties. The communities who built them, lived in them, and have thus far ensured their survival can no longer bear the burden of their heritage value. These magnificent properties and their gardens are increasingly the objects of society’s affection, and yet at the same time are more and more coveted by real estate developers. What is to be done with such a rich and weighty legacy? This collective publication brings together contributions that provide ways of thinking about the issues of secularization, adaptive reuse, or the governance of former religious buildings. It also intends to contribute to the debate on the financial, legal, urbanistic, and memorial implications of the new destinies of convents and their redevelopment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1f117q9

4. The Mexican Experience in Adaptive Reuse of Religious Houses from: Des couvents en héritage / Religious Houses: A Legacy
Author(s) Santín Ana Lozano
Abstract: Mexico has a long tradition of reusing religious buildings. Every colonial city is full of beautiful examples of Neo-Hispanic churches and convents, which stand as a result of the needs of a deeply religious society and a sign of the unlimited power and influence of the Church during that period. At the time of Independence, religious corporations owned most of the territorial wealth in the country and, years later, when progressive ideas arrived, this led to confrontations between political and religious forces. The endeavours of the Liberal Government to abolish the tutelage of the Church over the nation culminated in

9 Giambattista Basile’s The Tale of Tales in the Hands of the Brothers Grimm from: New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) Maggi Armando
Abstract: Rewriting is a fundamental aspect of the Western tradition of literary fairy tales. A literary fairy tale is a text composed by a writer in a particular cultural context. These tales are “literary” because they result from a specific author’s poetics. Composing fairy tales in the twentieth and twenty-first centuries often means appropriating and retelling a handful of tales that have acquired the status of classics. Alert readers of this literary genre must be able to appreciate and dissect a given tale in the light of its models. The phenomenon of rewriting becomes particularly meaningful when it pertains to key

10 Teaching Hans Christian Andersen’s Tales: from: New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) François Cyrille
Abstract: As one of the most famous fairy-tale writers and one of the most translated authors in the world, Andersen should be given a prime place in a teaching unit on fairy tales. At the same time, as he was a Danish writer, both the language and the cultural context make it difficult for non-Danish -speaking instructors to grasp the many dimensions of his work. This chapter gives advice and suggests activities that can be used to work on Andersen’s tales in an academic setting, focusing on a comparative analysis of translations to approach the particular language in which they were

12 Binary Outlaws: from: New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) Duggan Anne E.
Abstract: Within the domain of fairy-tale studies, queer theory has yet to receive the critical attention that it deserves, particularly given the centrality of sexuality in fairy tales.¹ This situation increasingly is changing, evident in the work of Kay Turner and Pauline Greenhill, among others.² Approaching fairy-tale texts and films from the perspective of queer theory can help students understand the ways in which fairy-tale plots can subvert what is often—and problematically—taken for granted in classical tales: the heteronormative plot, upheld by a specific configuration of gender roles. As Turner has argued, “Even if many tales hurtle headlong toward

Book Title: Residuos de la violencia-Producción cultural colombiana, 1990-2010
Publisher: Editorial Universidad del Rosario
Author(s): Castro Andrea Fanta
Abstract: Esta obra analiza los productos culturales contemporáneos del choque entre la globalización y la violencia a través de la literatura, del cine, de la arquitectura y de la escultura. Específicamente estudia las subjetividades que derivan de este contexto: los cuerpos residuales, es decir, remanentes de la generalizada violencia social, política, y económica inherentes a las sociedades consumo. El análisis está centrado específicamente en los textos La virgen de los sicarios de Fernando Vallejo, Rosario Tijeras de Jorge Franco y en sus adaptaciones cinematográficas. También examina las novelas Satanás y Scorpio City de Mario Mendoza, Perder es cuestión de método y Vida feliz de un joven llamado Esteban de Santiago Gamboa, El olvido que seremos de Héctor Abad Faciolince y Todo pasa pronto de Juan David Correa. A través del trabajo plástico de Doris Salcedo el texto examina como los cuerpos residuales están presentes como ausencia en la escultura contemporánea y esto, en última instancia, señala su condición marginal. Además, explora transformaciones urbanas recientes en Bogotá, particularmente en estructuras arquitectónicas como el Palacio de Justicia y el Parque Tercer Milenio. En este corpus diverso se analiza el contexto político e histórico en el cual los cuerpos residuales devienen parte del proceso de reciclaje de desechos. Este trabajo propone una lectura de la producción cultural reciente totalmente novedosa tanto en su forma como en el contenido, en tanto que rompe con las visiones tradicionales y propone una nueva comprensión no solo de la violencia sino de las prácticas culturales contemporáneas colombianas.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1f5g2tx

Introducción from: Residuos de la violencia
Abstract: el desecho material cuantitativo que produce la concentración material y urbana, no es sino un síntoma del desecho cualitativo humano y estructural […] Lo peor no es que estemos rodeados por desechos y sumergidos en ellos; lo peor es que nosotros mismos nos hayamos transformado en desechos, es decir, en una sustancia residual que estorba y de la

Capítulo 1 Cuerpos residuales: from: Residuos de la violencia
Abstract: Uno de los momentos históricos clave del siglo xx en Colombia es el asesinato del candidato presidencial Jorge Eliécer Gaitán el 9 de abril de 1948 —crimen que se cometió a plena luz del día y en el corazón de la capital—. Testigos oculares agarraron al asesino, lo lincharon y, ya sin vida, su cuerpo fue colgado en los alrededores del palacio presidencial. Gaitán se encontraba en plena campaña presidencial durante la ix Conferencia Panamericana y se perfilaba como el ganador de las elecciones de 1950. Aunque Gaitán se adhirió al Partido Liberal, no pertenecía a la oligarquía dominante,

Capítulo 3 Historia, imagen y tiempo from: Residuos de la violencia
Abstract: Estas citas provienen de dos narraciones colombianas publicadas en un intervalo de seis años: Vida feliz de un joven llamado Esteban(2000) de Santiago Gamboa y El olvido que seremos (2006) de Héctor Abad Faciolince.¹ Ambas aluden a dos asesinatos políticos producto de la violencia estatal que han quedado impunes. El primero de ellos se refiere al de Jorge Eliécer Gaitán el 9 de abril de 1948 en la ciudad de Bogotá y el segundo, al de Héctor Abad Gómez el 25 de agosto de 1987 en la ciudad de Medellín. Juan Roa Sierra, según testigos oculares, fue quien asesinó

A propósito de reformar y sustituir la Constitución Nacional. from: De la constitución de 1991 a la realidad
Author(s) Segura Juan Manuel Charria
Abstract: El tema de reformar y sustituir la Constitución es de gran interés para los demócratas y sobre él se han producido serios estudios, pronunciamientos y debates por parte de académicos, tratadistas, juristas, políticos, funcionarios, periodistas de opinión y otros grupos de la sociedad en los últimos cuatro años. La posibilidad de institucionalizar una segunda reelección inmediata fue considerada por sus graves consecuencias para la institucionalidad colombiana y no solo en el ámbito nacional sino también en la instancia internacional.

La Constitución de 1991 y el sistema de partidos: from: De la constitución de 1991 a la realidad
Author(s) Basset Yann
Abstract: Como el Frente Nacional al cual buscaba poner fin, la Constitución de 1991 tiene una doble naturaleza de Constitución política y de acuerdo de paz.¹ En ambos casos, se trataba en el espíritu de sus promotores no solo de organizar los poderes de un Estado democrático, sino también de superar una época de violencia en una perspectiva de inclusión política. Los mecanismos imaginados en ambas oportunidades fueron distintos, e incluso aparentemente opuestos. El Frente Nacional pretendió construir un sistema de bipartidismo cerrado, pero incluyente en la medida en que se trataba de lograr que los dos partidos concurrieran conjuntamente al

La “Constitución exterior” y la constitucionalización de la política exterior colombiana from: De la constitución de 1991 a la realidad
Author(s) Molano-Roja Andrés
Abstract: Durante las últimas décadas, y en el marco del llamado “nuevo constitucionalismo”, se ha venido produciendo una paulatina y cada vez más extendida “constitucionalización” del derecho, lo cual ha tenido un profundo impacto no solo en la lógica que rige el funcionamiento de los sistemas jurídicos, sino también en el desarrollo mismo del proceso político.

La fuerza persuasiva del derecho comparado como método de interpretación. from: De la constitución de 1991 a la realidad
Author(s) Paz Martha C.
Abstract: En decantada jurisprudencia de veinticinco años, la Corte Constitucional colombiana ha recurrido con frecuencia a diversas fuentes del derecho para articular el sentido de sus providencias. Una fuente creciente es el derecho comparado y la jurisprudencia extranjera, métodos que enriquecen la hermenéutica constitucional, enmarcándose dentro de los conocidos diálogos o conversaciones entre cortes y que asumen, por un lado, que la labor interpretativa va más allá de aplicar soluciones a un caso específico y, por otro, que la evolución del discurso de los derechos no es un tema de ámbitos nacionales, sino de un verdadero discurso universal. Pretende este artículo¹

Desarrollo territorial en la Constitución de 1991. from: De la constitución de 1991 a la realidad
Author(s) Quintero Juana Marina Hofman
Abstract: En el presente capítulo demostraremos que la Constitución de 1991 abre las puertas para la construcción de la autonomía y desarrollo de las entidades territoriales en Colombia, a través del fortalecimiento de los departamentos y los municipios da la vía libre para la creación de nuevas entidades territoriales como las regiones, las provincias y las entidades territoriales indígenas. Sin embargo, la Carta Política del 91 dejó sin definir los principios constitutivos de las nuevas entidades territoriales, toda vez que encargó a los formadores de las leyes de establecer la manera en que tales conformaciones territoriales podrán ser realidad, así como

Book Title: La nación expuesta-Cultura visual y procesos de formación de la nación en América Latina
Publisher: Editorial Universidad del Rosario
Author(s): Schuster Sven
Abstract: Esta obra reúne once ensayos originales acerca de la función de las imágenes en los procesos de formación de la nación en América Latina, incluyendo contribuciones de especialistas de Europa, Estados Unidos, América Latina e Israel. Inspirados por el reciente “giro pictorial" en las ciencias sociales, estos textos no sólo transcienden los límites nacionales, sino también los disciplinares, combinando acercamientos de la historia, la literatura, los estudios culturales y las ciencias políticas. En general, los autores indagan sobre la función que han desempeñado las imágenes de lo propio y de lo ajeno –como parte de discursos nacionalistas– dentro de exposiciones y museos, en la prensa, en el arte, en la fotografía, en el cine, así como en forma de monumentos y estatuas, es decir en su función de “imágenes públicas".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1f5g31h

El 9 de abril en la memoria visual de Colombia: from: La nación expuesta
Author(s) Schuster Sven
Abstract: En 2012, la fecha del 9 de abril, hasta entonces conocida como el día del Bogotazo, fue oficialmente rebautizada como Día Nacional de la Memoria y de la Solidaridad con las Víctimas. De esta manera, el Estado colombiano cumplió su “deber de memoria”, estipulado en el artículo 142 de la Ley 1448 de 2011. 1 Esta decisión fue motivada por el deseo de ampliar el sentido de la conmemoración de los sucesos sangrientos del 9 de abril de 1948 en Bogotá y hacer de los hechos un elemento central de una nueva narración nacional. Así, el asesinato de Jorge Eliécer

Monumentos como alegorías de la nación entre el Imperio y la Primera República de Brasil from: La nación expuesta
Author(s) Wink Georg
Abstract: En los estudios sobre la formación de la nación, se considera el fin del siglo XIX como el auge de difusión de representaciones alegóricas nacionales. Entre ellas cumplen un papel destacado los monumentos cívicos que didácticamente “narran” la nación. Para eso dependen de códigos de interpretación que no son evidentes, sino construidos por medio de discursos que acompañan la génesis de los monumentos y los festejos organizados en torno a ellos. En el caso del Brasil, llama la atención que la producción de monumentos es tardía y casi vacilante en comparación con Hispanoamérica. Los pocos monumentos inaugurados en esta época

“Um gigante cheio de bonomia”: from: La nación expuesta
Author(s) Preuss Ori
Abstract: En una de las interpretaciones más clásicas del Brasil, Sérgio Buarque de Holanda señala la estrecha relación triangular entre el ejercicio de las relaciones internacionales, el uso o no de la violencia y la construcción de la imagen nacional,¹ ubicando su origen en un tiempo y un espacio específicos: la frontera sur del imperio de Brasil durante la segunda mitad del siglo XIX. Siguiendo el sentido indicado por Holanda, sin estar de acuerdo con todas sus afirmaciones, dirigimos nuestra atención hacia las relaciones entre Brasil y sus vecinos meridionales en un periodo posterior, el de la primera república oligárquica (1889-1930).

The Aristotelian Topos: from: Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Miller Carolyn R.
Abstract: Although the topoi have routinely been thought of as instruments of decorum serving a managerial function in rhetoric, Richard McKeon noted that they can also be understood as sources of novelty, as having a generative function.¹ To establish what the Aristotelian topos can contribute to contemporary interests in generative rhetoric, this essay examines the conceptual contexts from which Aristotle drew his use of the term and the framework from which he drew his thinking about invention. Sources examined include his earlier works, the PhysicsandOn Coming-to-Be and Passing-Away, as well as aspects of prephilosophical Greek thought that constitutes what

KNOWING IS SEEING: from: Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Huber Lynn R.
Abstract: As we saw in chapter 1,¹ since the earliest centuries of the church, interpreters have acknowledged the imagistic or metaphorical nature of the book of Revelation, although they disagree about what this characterization means. This suggests that bringing the insights of metaphor theory to bear on Revelation would be an appropriate and fruitful endeavor, especially contemporary theories of metaphor that emphasize the cognitive nature of this phenomenon. This is not to suggest that scholars have ignored discussions about metaphor in their work on Revelation; rather, there has been little systematic analysis of the metaphorical language in the text. Scholars who

Clothes Make the (Wo)Man from: Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Jeal Roy R.
Abstract: Thinking about perceptions of body as they are used in the Bible leads, inevitably, to reflecting on clothing and the idea of clothing. Clothing is a powerful image throughout biblical literature and in human society generally.¹ At the most obvious level, clothing covers and conceals the body, protecting it from exposure to the elements and the view of other persons. But the significance of clothing extends much further since garments not only cover and conceal, but also function to display the body in particular ways and with many meanings. The ways in which bodies are clothed have far-reaching and sometimes

Book Title: Citizen Subject-Foundations for Philosophical Anthropology
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Miller Steven
Abstract: What can the universals of political philosophy offer to those who experience the living paradox of an inegalitarian construction of egalitarian citizenship? Citizen Subject is the summation of +ëtienne BalibarGÇÖs career-long project to think the necessary and necessarily antagonistic relation between the categories of citizen and subject. In this magnum opus, the question of modernity is framed anew with special attention to the self-enunciation of the subject (in Descartes, Locke, Rousseau, and Derrida), the constitution of the community as GÇ£weGÇ¥ (in Hegel, Marx, and Tolstoy), and the aporia of the judgment of self and others (in Foucualt, Freud, Kelsen, and Blanchot)._x000D_ After the GÇ£humanist controversyGÇ¥ that preoccupied twentieth-century philosophy, Citizen Subject proposes foundations for philosophical anthropology today, in terms of two contrary movements: the becoming-citizen of the subject and the becoming-subject of the citizen. The citizen-subject who is constituted in the claim to a GÇ£right to have rightsGÇ¥ (Arendt) cannot exist without an underside that contests and defies it. HeGÇöor she, because Balibar is concerned throughout this volume with questions of sexual differenceGÇöfigures not only the social relation but also the discontent or the uneasiness at the heart of this relation. The human can be instituted only if it betrays itself by upholding GÇ£anthropological differencesGÇ¥ that impose normality and identity as conditions of belonging to the community._x000D_ The violence of GÇ£civilGÇ¥ bourgeois universality, Balibar argues, is greater (and less legitimate, therefore less stable) than that of theological or cosmological universality. Right is thus founded on insubordination, and emancipation derives its force from otherness._x000D_ Ultimately, Citizen Subject offers a revolutionary rewriting of the dialectic of universality and differences in the bourgeois epoch, revealing in the relationship between the common and the universal a political gap at the heart of the universal itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1f89tnz

ONE “Ego sum, ego existo”: from: Citizen Subject
Abstract: Mister President, you have imposed Draconian limits upon me. As a result, I must cut to the chase. The abstract that you might have received is not, as you no doubt grasp, a summary of my talk: not only because I hadn’t yet given my text a definitive form but also because what I have to say, since it remains highly open to discussion, is very difficult to summarize. Rather than drawing conclusions, my goal today is merely to arrive at questions; and I would consider myself a very happy man if, to some extent, you were to concur that

FIVE Ich, das Wir, und Wir, das Ich ist: from: Citizen Subject
Abstract: The present talk—and I offer my thanks to Pierre Macherey for the invitation to speak to his working group, which afforded me an opportunity to write it—should fit, not too arbitrarily, I hope, into this year’s program devoted to exploring an discussing the category of “modernity.” That said, my intention is not to contribute directly to this discussion, even if the problems of philosophy and history that I elaborate are generally considered relevant to our prevailing ideas of a “modern moment” and our manner of situating ourselves in relation to it. About these ideas, I will restrict myself

SIX The Messianic Moment in Marx from: Citizen Subject
Abstract: In the present essay, I would like to reexamine and, if possible, elucidate a question that often recurs in interpretations of Marx: What is the relationship between his concept of politics and religious (or theological) discourse? In view of the comparison that this issue of the Revue Germanique Internationalewould like to draw, but also because of the strategic importance that, I believe, must be conferred upon this comparison, I will focus mainly upon a single text: the article, entitled “Zur Kritik der Hegelschen Rechtsphilosophie. Einleitung,” that Marx published in theDeutsch-Französische Jahrbücherin March 1844. For the first aa

SEVEN Zur Sache Selbst: from: Citizen Subject
Abstract: Certain great commentators on Hegel’s Phenomenology of Spirit(Kojève, Marcuse, Luk á cs), in part inspired by Marxism and Existentialism, built their interpretations around the statement that defines spiritual “substance” (Substanz) as a “work” (Werk) resulting fromthe activity of all and each (das Tun aller und jeder).¹ Sartre should also be included, since one section of theCritique of Dialectical Reasoncomprises an explicit allusion to the “animal regime of spirit” and could be read as a gigantic attempt, in permanent altercation with Hegel, to reformulate the dialectic of “action in common” as the collectivized (and thus aa a

EIGHT Men, Armies, Peoples: from: Citizen Subject
Abstract: This chapter reprises several elements from a course taught at the University of California, Irvine, entitled “Politics as War, War as Politics” (January–March 2006). In this course, I opened to discussion the claim, frequent in contemporary discourse, that the “new wars,” which have broken out since the end of the Cold War and collapse of the world divided into “blocks” determined at the end of World War Two, would be essentially “non-Clausewitzian”—in that their protagonists are no longer solely territorial nation-states, operating by means of regular armies, or that they present an essential dissymmetry, or that they make

Introduction: from: Taking Hold of the Real
Abstract: “We live”, writes Dietrich Bonhoeffer, “in the time before the last things and believe in the last things, is that not so?”¹ We live, in other words, in medias res, in the middle of things. There is nothing novel in this observation, for this has been a perennial fact of human existence since our first parents were cast out of the garden. What is unprecedented, and what I attempt to account for in this book in constructive conversation with Bonhoeffer, is the distinctive character of the middle here and now. Prior to the sixteenth century there existed a recognizable consensus

8 Polyphonic Worldliness from: Taking Hold of the Real
Abstract: In J. R. R. Tolkien’s creation saga, “Ainulindalë,” Ilúvatar sings the world into existence, setting forth for the Ainur, the first offspring of the creator’s song, the leitmotif to which the angelic beings were to add their voices. “Of the theme that I have declared to you,” Ilúvatar said to the divine ensemble, “I will now that ye make in harmony together a Great Music. And since I have kindled you with the Flame Imperishable, ye shall show forth your powers in adorning this theme, each with his own thoughts and devices, if he will. But I will sit and

INTRODUCTION: from: Alternative Modernities in French Travel Writing
Abstract: Long before the age of the megalopolis, movement has defined cities. As complex constellations of people, objects and signs, cities are spaces where social, political and historical relations undergo constant negotiation and where the realities and representations of urban life are in persistent and dynamic states of becoming. This is to say that each person’s experience of the city organizes an intricately shifting site for the production and exchange of meaning. Simply walking through the streets – choosing a particular path to follow, avoiding certain others – involves many acts of interpretation and mediation, ways of practising urban space that

Chapter Three REVEALING AND RECONSTRUCTING LONDON from: Alternative Modernities in French Travel Writing
Abstract: As we have seen in the previous chapter, in constant tension with the representations of space of London’s orderly West End and tourist attractions are spaces of urban disorder, social ‘dysfunction’, and poverty that continually threaten to depose the institutional and ideological clarity of the figured city. For the French travellers examined in this chapter, spaces of disorder perform in correspondence and contrast with the monumentality of more official sites. Disorder is a trope that provides a key to analysing these travellers’ strategies for making meaning for London during the interwar period – in the case of Jacques Dyssord (1880–

Chapter Four WANDERING GEOMETRY: from: Alternative Modernities in French Travel Writing
Abstract: The imaginative geographies of twentieth-century New York, a time when the city was considered by many to be the capital of the world (perhaps the last), provide the impetus for discussion in this chapter. While imperialist Europe may have dominated the nineteenth-century’s imagination of civilization, in the wake of two world wars, the twentieth century witnessed the dislocation of a geopolitics dominated by European imperialist expansion, and the establishment of a new global political order increasingly dominated by the capitalist market economy and American foreign policy. This shift of power within the West was also fundamental for the establishment of

Chapter 9 BOURDIEU’S USE AND RECEPTION: from: The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Méndez María-Luisa
Abstract: In an article entitled ‘On the Cunning of Imperialist Reason’, Pierre Bourdieu and Loïc Wacquant (1999) refer to theorization as ‘the power to universalize particularisms linked to a singular historical tradition by causing them to be misrecognized as such’ (Bourdieu and Wacquant 1999, 41). In other words, theorization is understood as a form of neutralization of the historical context. In this, as in other pieces, Bourdieu showed reluctance to extract concepts – understood as structured structures – from the contexts of their production, or from their structuring structures (Robbins 1994). This, he thought, was a way of imposing (Western) sociological

CHAPTER ONE A Virginian Praises “Yankee Hospitality”: from: The Southern Hospitality Myth
Abstract: In the early years of the sectional crisis between the northern and southern states, a southerner could still praise the hospitality of northerners and even suggest that “Yankee hospitality,” though admittedly diff erent, was possibly more sincere and meaningful than the hospitality of the South. Lucian Minor’s “Letters from New England” were published in the first volume of the Southern Literary Messenger, appearing in five installments between November 1834 and April 1835. His second letter opens with the following extended comparison between “Yankee hospitality” and “good old Virginia hospitality”:

CHAPTER FIVE Reconstructing Southern Hospitality in the Postbellum World: from: The Southern Hospitality Myth
Abstract: In a sermon delivered at St. Mary’s Church of Keyport, New Jersey, on January 27, 1867, the Reverend Telfair Hodgson, a Confederate veteran, made an emotional appeal to the northern congregation about charitable aid for his fellow southerners. Hodgson’s “A Sermon in Behalf of Southern Sufferers” paints a dire picture of the South in the two years since the war had ended, with floods, droughts, and impending famines adding to the grim reality of an already devastated economy and a defunct social system. With this picture in mind, Hodgson reminds his audience of the Christian imperative of hospitality by citing

The Futurity of Miscegenation: from: New Perspectives on James Weldon Johnson's "The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man"
Author(s) PAULIN DIANA
Abstract: Although both Hopkins’s Of One Blood(1902–3) and Johnson’sThe Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man(1912) are now considered canonical African American literary texts, they have been examined most extensively in terms of their contributions to African American literary representation, including their excavations of the undocumented past and their complex depictions of self-discovery, interiority, passing, and racial hybridity.¹ Interdisciplinary scholarship has added to current understandings of the interactivity of these texts with diverse forms of African American, black diasporic, and transnational cultural production, like Susan Gillman’s work on Hopkins and the occult and Siobhan Somerville’s queer readings of both

The Autobiography as Ars Poetica: from: New Perspectives on James Weldon Johnson's "The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man"
Author(s) GLASER BEN
Abstract: In a survey of 1935’ s black literature for Opportunitymagazine, Alain Locke develops a criterion for black poetry that may seem surprising: not James Weldon Johnson’s famous call for “symbols from within” comparable to the achievement of Synge and Yeats, not a call for native rhythms and folk forms, and not Langston Hughes’s turn to the “eternal tomtom beating in the Negro soul—the tom-tom of revolt against weariness in a white world.”¹ Rather, Locke sought “ the full flavor of tragic or comic irony as applied to Negro experience” that he had found in the “sturdy, incisive verse”

INTRODUCTION from: Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Castro-Klarén Sara
Abstract: The central idea for this volume on the seminal Royal Commentaries of the IncasandGeneral History of Peru(1609) by Inca Garcilaso de la Vega (1539–1616) is to bring together, in a single volume in English, key essays authored by some of the most distinguished students of Inca Garcilaso’s work. Thus far, most of the book-length scholarship on Inca Garcilaso’s work has been published in Spanish, with the notable exception of John Grier Varner’sEl Inca: The Life and Times of Garcilaso de la Vega(1968) and Margarita Zamora’sLanguage, Authority, and Indigenous History in the Comentarios reales

3 THE DISSEMINATION AND READING OF THE ROYAL COMMENTARIES IN THE PERUVIAN VICEROYALTY from: Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Pérez Pedro M. Guibovich
Abstract: Read, glossed, cited, and paraphrased, Inca Garcilaso de la Vega’s Royal Commentaries(1609) have enjoyed enormous acclaim from readers since their first appearance at the beginning of the seventeenth century.¹ The existence of numerous translations into most modern languages proves their success in Europe. Several factors explain this fact: the socioethnic background of the author, the literary quality of the work, the nature of the sources consulted for its composition, and the fact that until late into the nineteenth century it would remain the only published text solely dedicated to the topic of Incan history. The purpose of this chapter

7 WRITING THE HISTORY OF AN ANDEAN GHOST from: Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Martínez Francisco A. Ortega
Abstract: Garcilaso de la Vega’s The Royal Commentaries(1609) has enjoyed an everwider appeal since the early seventeenth century.¹ Such rising popularity has taken place despite fundamental changes in readers’ criteria of evaluation and appreciation of this work. Up to the late nineteenth century, Garcilaso’s account had been taken as the most accomplished historical depiction of the Inca, but the discovery of new written and archeological sources and the emergence of modern historiography source criticism led historians and anthropologists to challenge its truthfulness. As a result, Garcilaso’shistorylost credibility. At the same time, thenarrativewas hailed as possessing the

8 INCA GARCILASO AND TRANSLATION from: Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Scharm Heike
Abstract: Historian Carmen Bernand expressed her alarm following the emphatic declaration of Cusco writer Luis Nieto during the presentation of his 2007 novel, Asesinato en la gran ciudad del Cuzco. “I detest Inca Garcilaso!” Nieto said, because he is an “emblem of a mestizaje that only exists discursively” (in La república, February 21, 2007; Bernand, 96–99). As with almost all national definitions of Inca Garcilaso de la Vega, we may say that Nieto is both right and wrong. That is, Nieto has translated poorly, in both the literal and figurative senses. He should have said: “I hate the Peruvian state,

Book Title: Indebted-Capitalism and Religion in the Writings of S. Y. Agnon
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Sagiv Yonatan
Abstract: This is the first book to examine the oeuvre of Shmuel Yosef Agnon, 1966 Nobel laureate in literature, through a reading that combines perspectives from economic theory, semiotics, psychoanalysis, narrative theory, and Jewish and religious studies. Sagiv outlines the vital role economy plays in the construction of religion, subjectivity, language, and thought in Agnon's work, and, accordingly, explores his literary use of images of debt, money, and economy to examine how these themes illuminate other focal points in the canonical author's work, excavating the economic infrastructure of discourses that are commonly considered to reside beyond the economic sphere.Sagiv's analysis of Agnon's work, renowned for its paradoxical articulation of the impact of modernity on traditional Jewish society, exposes an overarching distrust regarding the sustainability of any economic structure. The concrete and symbolic economies surveyed in this project are prone to cyclical crises. Under what Sagiv terms Agnon's "law of permanent debt," the stability and profitability of economies are always temporary. Agnon's literary economy, transgressing traditional closures, together with his profound irony, make it impossible to determine if these economic crises are indeed the product of the break with tradition or, alternatively, if this theodicy is but a fantasy, marking permanent debt as the inherent economic infrastructure of human existence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g2kmnj

A MONETARY PRELUDE: from: Indebted
Abstract: Money was the rising star at the turn of the nineteenth century in Europe. Heralded by many contemporary economists as the symbol of economic rationality and the facilitator of a stable social order, money was considered one of the greatest institutional advances of humankind.¹ Yet in spite of such warm praises, money also gained a rather dubious reputation. Rumor had it that money was indeed something unimportant, at times even suspicious, a neutral “veil” that only obscures the “real” economic basis of society, namely, the good old practice of barter, the direct exchange of good and services.²

CHAPTER 2 TALKING THROUGH MONEY from: Indebted
Abstract: The first-person narrator of Agnon’s short story “And We Shall Not Fail” (“ולא ניכשל”), published in 1937, begins his tale with a warning. A person should never change the customary liturgy (נוסח) of his or her ancestors. This warning is immediately followed by a religious explanation: ever since biblical times, the twelve ancient tribes produced twelve different sets of prayers, each delivered to twelve heavenly gates. As a result, a person who changes the prayers of his ancestors “confuses” the gates. The narrator explains that recent generations have already been punished for confusing the prayers, hence creating chaos and altercations

CHAPTER 3 CAN’T BUY ME LOVE from: Indebted
Abstract: “In common sense as well as in scholarship,” writes Eva Illouz, “romantic love stands above the realm of commodity exchange and even against the social order.”¹ Indeed, Illouz’s research on love in capitalist culture begins by expanding on this common divide; whereas the concept of “romantic love” is predicated on the private sphere, irrationality, selflessness, and singularity, the capitalist market is associated with the public sphere, rationality, self-interest, and interchangeability. However, working against this division, Illouz shows how the very modern construction of romantic love is paradoxically shaped by the forces of the capitalist market itself. In a similar vein,

CHAPTER 4 THE INCOMPLETE TEXT AND THE INDEBTED AUTHOR from: Indebted
Abstract: In the previous chapter, my reading of Agnon’s A Simple Storyended with emphasis on the closing dialogue between Hirshl and Mina. While it is true that, in the narrator’s words, “Hirshl and Mina’s story is over,” the novel itself does not conclude with their dialogue. In fact, instead of granting the reader a sense of closure, the novel ends with the narrator’s statement that Bluma’s story isnotover. The narrator also promises the reader that “everything that happened to Bluma Nakht would fill another book.”¹ This promise, however, was never fulfilled. Subsequently, it only adds to the reader’s

Book Title: Transcendence and the Concrete-Selected Writings
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Moore Ian Alexander
Abstract: Jean Wahl (1888GÇô1974), once considered by the likes of Georges Bataille, Gilles Deleuze, Emmanuel Levinas, and Gabriel Marcel to be among the greatest French philosophers, has today nearly been forgotten outside France. Yet his influence on French philosophical thought can hardly be overestimated. Levinas wrote that GÇ£during over a half century of teaching and research, [Wahl] was the life force of the academic, extra-academic, and even, to a degree anti-academic philosophy necessary to a great culture.GÇ¥ And Deleuze, for his part, commented that GÇ£Apart from Sartre, who remained caught none the less in the trap of the verb to be, the most important philosopher in France was Jean Wahl.GÇ¥_x000D_ Besides engaging with the likes of Bataille, Bergson, Deleuze, Derrida, Levinas, Maritain, and Sartre, Wahl also played a significant role, in some cases almost singlehandedly, in introducing French philosophy to movements like existentialism, and American pragmatism and literature, and thinkers like Hegel, Kierkegaard, Nietzsche, Jaspers, and Heidegger. Yet Wahl was also an original philosopher and poet in his own right. This volume of selections from WahlGÇÖs philosophical writings makes a selection of his most important work available to the English-speaking philosophical community for the first time._x000D_ Jean Wahl was Professor of Philosophy at the Sorbonne from 1936 to 1967, save during World War II, which he spent in the United States, having escaped from the Drancy internment camp. His books to appear in English include The Pluralist Philosophies of England and America (Open Court, 1925), The Philosopher's Way (Oxford UP, 1948), A Short History of Existentialism (Philosophical Library, 1949), and Philosophies of Existence (Schocken, 1969).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g2kn1q

6 The Problem of Choice: from: Transcendence and the Concrete
Author(s) Davidson Scott
Abstract: One of the reasons Alexandre Koyré, Henri-Charles Puech, and Albert Spaier founded the journal Recherches Philosophiquesin 1931 was because, at the time, more established journals like theRevue de Métaphysique et de Moralewere reluctant to publish articles characteristic of what Jean Wahl aptly named, in the lead article of the inaugural issue ofRecherches Philosophiques, the turn “toward the concrete.” It accordingly gave aspiring philosophers the opportunity to discuss and advance movements such as phenomenology and the philosophy of existence.¹ While Wahl did publish extensively inRecherches Philosophiques(see Chapters 2 and 5 in this volume), he was

8 Nietzsche and the Death of God: from: Transcendence and the Concrete
Author(s) Schrift Alan D.
Abstract: In 1936, Georges Bataille (1897–1962) and others organized a group of avant-garde intellectuals under the name Acéphale. Included among the members of this group were Pierre Klossowski (1905–2001), Georges Ambrosino (1912–84), Roger Caillois (1913–78), Jules Monnerot (1874–1942), and Jean Wahl. While the activities of this group were, to a large extent, secret, its public face was the journal of the same name: Acéphale.¹ Under Bataille’s leadership, the journal published four issues between June 1936 and June 1939. A fifth issue, titled “La folie de Nietz sche” (Nietz sche’s madness) was prepared but never published.² After

2 Why Plato Now? from: The Quest for Meaning
Abstract: In the Seventh Letter, Plato tells us that, as a young man, he had political ambitions and that the situation of Athens seemed to favor them. A revolution had just put an end to the democracy; the aristocracy of the Thirty had gained absolute power and some of Plato’s relatives, who participated in the new government, invited him to join their political efforts. Plato had high hopes: the new regime would transform the formerly unjustpolisinto a community based on justice and internal peace. However, his hopes were cruelly dashed when the rulers committed crimes that were as scandalous

7 Bonaventure’s Contribution to the Twentieth-Century Debate on Apophatic Theology from: The Quest for Meaning
Abstract: God has died, at least in science and philosophy. He is agonizing in religious study, perhaps even in some divinity schools. Atheism and a careful sequestration of God from current business are the two main forms in which academia deals with the long history of religion, which, notwithstanding academic reservations, goes on. For scholarship, faith, God, and religion have become curiosa. The theoretical intention has separated itself from religious commitments; it abhors edifying language and has forgotten or rejected the long history of its association with contemplation. Curiositasis the word Bonaventure would use to characterize the study of religion

11 Hegel and Modern Culture from: The Quest for Meaning
Abstract: Although we may agree that we are living through a decisive crisis in our culture, we are not all of the same opinion about the meaning of this crisis. Are we in agony? Are we just passing through one of the many difficult passages that punctuate Western history? What from our past is strong enough to be worthy of survival and what future possibilities are open to us?

8 Ineffable Knowledge and Gender from: Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Anderson Pamela Sue
Abstract: Who does Continentalphilosophy of religion? The received view is that Anglo-American philosophers dophilosophy of religion.Yet increasingly, contemporary philosophers and some theologians would reply “Jacques Derrida” to this opening question. What makes Derrida’s philosophy Continental? What topic in philosophy of religion does Derrida consider? I hope to give some indirect answers to these questions. Instead of looking di rectly at Derrida, I choose to focus my attention on the nature of an exchange at the interface of what have been labeled “Continental” and “analytic” philosophies. I will focus on an example that makes a similar distinction, but uses

13 Gilles Deleuze and the Sublime Fold of Religion from: Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Crockett Clayton
Abstract: In many ways, the possibilities for contemporary philosophical and theological thinking have been determined by Kant. Whether explicitly or implicitly, religion has been thought consistently either within, along, or beyond the limits legislated by classical modern reason. At the same time, its status has remained problematic, because it was left out of the fundamental sources of human knowledge according to Kant’s critique. Although he essentially appended religion onto morality, since that time, religion has flirted with and been skirted by scientific theoretical knowledge, ethics, and aesthetics. In his Theology of Culture,Paul Tillich has eloquently described this dilemma, and his

5 Point of View from: How John Works
Author(s) Resseguie James L.
Abstract: Point of view “signifies the way a story gets told.”¹ It elaborates the relationship between the storyteller and the story and the reception of the story by developing the way the author or narrator presents the reader with the characters, dialogue, actions, setting, and events of the story.² It is a multifaceted concept that biblical critics avoid—perhaps because it seems confusing or even irrelevant to the text’s meaning—yet nothing could be more important to the study of a biblical narrative text than the way the story gets told and the mode or modes by which the reader receives

13 Closure from: How John Works
Author(s) Moloney Francis J.
Abstract: Tracing howJohn draws his narrative to closure is fraught with challenges, due to the unresolved debate concerningwherehis story ended. For many scholars and commentators, the words of the narrator to the audience in 20:30–31 mark the end of the original Johannine Gospel.¹ Increasingly, however, interpreters regard 21:1–25 as part of the original gospel. Most contemporary literary critics insist on the importance of interpreting a narrative in the form that it has come down to us over almost two thousand years. They regard the final chapter as an integral part of the story that must be

2 Books 1–4: from: The Gift of Love
Abstract: Arising from christological roots and “designed to preserve faith in Christ, the Son of God, and to direct the Christian hope toward full salvation in the divine fellowship,”¹ the doctrine of the Trinity was forged by the blows struck in the heat of contentious intellectual and ecclesiastical negotiations about the language with which we might talk about, and more importantly address, God. Speculation about the nature of the God and the Nicene priority placed on the same substance of the Father, Son, and Spirit has its historical roots in practical and polemical formulations intended to respond to threats against both

Foreword from: Acting for Others
Author(s) Hinlicky Paul R.
Abstract: Michaela Kušnieriková, in this welcome study, takes her place in the rising generation of theologians theorizing Christianity after Christendom. She does this work, fittingly enough, from the religious crossroads of Europe: between East and West, to be sure, but also the battle site of the Wars of Religion between North and South that so devastated and discredited the church. Kušnieriková grew up in the spiritually vacated place where all the subsequent bloody contests between the would-be ideological replacements of religion exchanged totalitarianisms.

Introduction. from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Robb John
Abstract: One of the most amazing objects in any European museum is a painted clay statue on display in Nicosia which shows a woman with a baby emerging upside down from her vagina. It is probably the only representation in all of European prehistory which shows a woman actually giving birth — a mind-boggling fact when one considers, as Mark Twain remarked, that being born is one of the few universal human experiences. And this thought-provoking find is not alone. From the golden face masks of Mycenae to the unparalleled youths and processing women in the Akrotiri frescoes — so unlike anything in

11 The Performative Body and Social Identity in the Room of the Fresco at Mycenae from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Chapin Anne P.
Abstract: Excavations undertaken in 1968–9 revealed an exceptional fresco in situin the southeast corner of Room 31, a shrine known as the “Room of the Fresco” in the Cult Center at Mycenae (Fig. 11.1). The fresco preserves parts of three female figures, each painted with distinctive costume and attributes: above is the “Sword Bearer,” cloaked and holding a sword pointed tip down; and a “Spear Bearer,” who wears a flounced skirt and grasps a spear or staff (tip up, but missing). The third figure, the “Adorant”, stands on a lower level and raises objects of uncertain identity in votive

12 “It’s War, not a Dance”: from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Mikrakis Manolis
Abstract: After the epochal collapse of state-level societies at the end of the Bronze Age, most of the eastern Mediterranean experienced new forms of statehood for which new social identities were essential. The old system’s failure to prevent disaster would have discredited earlier ideologies defining personal achievement and social status through reference to the supernatural (for the Aegean, see Mikrakis 2013, 229–30, with references). Practices revolving around the human body, the handiest tool for survival in periods of hardship such as in the so-called Dark Age that followed the collapse, would have increased sharply, causing tensions and conflicts.

14 Turning into Stone: from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Pilavaki Stella
Abstract: Little is known about the social organisation and culture of the indigenous tribes that had lived since prehistory in Aegean Thrace. I quote a passage of Herodotus, which constitutes a rare incidence among the sporadic references to the Thracians in the Greek literature that gives a glimpse into the values according to which these societies were structured: “To be tattooed is a sign of noble birth; to bear no such marks is for the baser sort. The idler is most honoured, the tiller of the soil most contemned; he is held in highest honour who lives by war and foray”

15 Lithics and Identity at the Middle Palaeolithic site of Lakonis Cave I, Southern Peloponnese, Greece from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Panagopoulou Eleni
Abstract: Recent developments in the study of Palaeolithic society have emphasised the need to adopt a more comprehensive approach to the interpretation of human behaviour by taking into consideration various scales of analysis, encompassing both time and space. These scales of analysis can include individuals interacting for only a few hours in the course of a brief encounter, to larger groups and for longer periods, in the context of complex social networks within extended spatial units (Gamble 1999, 67–8). The study of individuals in particular, has generally been regarded as beyond the resolution of the Palaeolithic record (Clark 1992, 107),

19 Grasping Identity: from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Lorentz Kirsi O.
Abstract: Archaeologists have attempted to study identity through several different avenues and varied archaeological remains (see e.g.Insoll 2007), including employing data derived from analyses of human remains. More recently, some bioarchaeologists have begun to attempt social interpretations of the physical anthropological and palaeopathological data they produce (Agarwal and Glencross 2011; Gowland and Knüsel 2006), focusing on identity issues. Grasping for identity through archaeological human remains is a challenging endeavour as, for example, papers in the edited volume by Gowland and Knüsel illustrate (2006, see specifically Le Hurayet al.2006; Montgomery and Evans 2006). Only some differential practices relating to

22 Secondary Burials and the Construction of Group Identities in Crete between the Second Half of the 4th and 2nd Millennia BC from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Todaro Simona
Abstract: Secondary mortuary practices entail the primary inhumation of the individual and the subsequent manipulation of its skeletal remains with actions of disarticulation, collection and relocation of selected bones from one location to another. It is, therefore, not easily identifiable in communal tombs, i.e.in those funerary structures that were used for successive multiple burials that required the partial or total relocation of the previous inhumations in order to allow the re-use of the burial ground. It is therefore hardly surprising that secondary mortuary practices have only recently been recognised in the communal tombs of the central and western Mediterranean from

Haunting Silence: from: Psychoanalytic Mediations between Marxist and Postcolonial Readings of the Bible
Author(s) Liew Tat-siong Benny
Abstract: The ending of mark’s story of Jesus is “one of the most widely-known problems in New Testament studies, involving both text-critical and exegetical issues” (Hurtado 2009, 427). My teacher in graduate studies, Mary Ann Tolbert, has argued that the seemingly disappointing and tragic ending—with the women disciples leaving the empty tomb in fear and in silence after they were told to tell Jesus’s male disciples the good news of Jesus’s resurrection and a future reunion with them in Galilee in 16:7– 8¹—is Mark’s rhetorical ploy to put the ball on the court of markan listeners and readers, since

Response: from: Psychoanalytic Mediations between Marxist and Postcolonial Readings of the Bible
Author(s) Jennings Theodore W.
Abstract: Psychoanalysis may be viewed (following suggestions by Paul Ricoeur [1970] in Freud and Philosophy) as a hermeneutics, specifically as a hermeneutics of desire. it traces or tracks the imprint of desire first in the dream and then in a variety of behavioral symptoms (jokes, slips of the tongue, as well as bodily symptoms). This hermeneutics is, however, never simple since desire is constitutionally conflicted, divided, deflected, and disguised. Thus desire is never only or primarily what it seems. it is constitutionally enigmatic. it is this that necessitates something like a science of desire, an analytics of desire.

1 Weimar-Era Montage: from: The Chatter of the Visible
Abstract: The terms montageandcollagehave become synonymous with the radical experimentation that altered the status and physiognomy of art in early twentieth-century Europe. They encompass a wide array of practices premised on quoting, combining, and juxtaposing materials that straddle the bounds of old and new media—from literature and stage drama to painting, sculpture, photography, film, and radio. Common to these practices is the exuberant transgression of the canons of normative aesthetics, coupled with an often belligerent contempt for the institutions of academic art and an optimistic willingness to draw inspiration from the world of consumer culture, advertisement, and

2 The Narrative Restitution of Experience: from: The Chatter of the Visible
Abstract: Montage holds a distinctive place in Benjamin’s discourse. The term comes up with remarkable insistence in his writings, which probe the rich meanings the concept assumed in contemporary discourses bent on outlining the realignment of literature, drama, and the visual arts following the rise of new media and mass-cultural forms. In surveying the term’s semantic range and occasional vagueness, one can easily receive the impression that it functions like a useful conceptual prop in Benjamin’s texts, its role subordinated to what invariably appear to be more pressing concerns—the need for an alternative thinking on history in the face of

6 Abstraction and Montage in the Work of Kurt Schwitters from: The Chatter of the Visible
Abstract: Perhaps no other artist has offered as comprehensive and layered an exploration of montage as Kurt Schwitters, whose imaginative engagement with strategies of disarticulation and assemblage over four decades casts a long shadow on the art of the twentieth century.¹ Working in a variety of media, Schwitters pushed the bounds of montage with a single-mindedness that is only matched by the doggedness with which he interrogated the enabling conditions of his artistic practice. Yet precisely his reflection on montage as a fundamental aesthetic principle has presented a formidable stumbling block for Schwitters scholars ever since the rediscovery of his oeuvre

Book Title: The Muses on Their Lunch Hour- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Garber Marjorie
Abstract: As a break from their ordained labors, what might the Muses today do on their lunch hour? This collection of witty, shrewd, and imaginative essays addresses interdisciplinary topics that range widely from Shakespeare, to psychoanalysis, to the practice of higher education today. With the ease born of deep knowledge, Marjorie Garber moves from comical journalistic quirks (GÇ£Fig LeavesGÇ¥) to the curious return of myth and ritual in the theories of evolutionary psychologists (GÇ£Ovid, Now and ThenGÇ¥)._x000D_ Two themes emerge consistently in GarberGÇÖs latest exploration of symptoms of culture. The first is that to predict the GÇ£next big thingGÇ¥ in literary studies we should look back at ideas and practices set aside by a previous generation of critics. In the past several decades we have seen the reemergence ofGÇöfor exampleGÇötextual editing, biography, character criticism, aesthetics, and philology as GÇ£hotGÇ¥ new areas for critical intervention. The second theme expands on this observation, making the case for GÇ£cultural forgettingGÇ¥ as the way the arts and humanities renew themselves, both within fields and across them. Although she is never represented in traditional paintings or poetry, a missing MuseGÇöwe can call her AmnesiaGÇöturns out to be a key figure for the creation of theory and criticism in the arts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gn6bb4

CHAPTER 5 Baggage Screening from: The Muses on Their Lunch Hour
Abstract: In this increasingly visual moment, contemporary art often plays a dual role, as both “object” and critical interpretation. An exhibition at the Freud Museum effectively demonstrated why, and how, this double focus can illuminate both the present and the past.

CHAPTER 6 Identity Theft from: The Muses on Their Lunch Hour
Abstract: How might the teaching of psychoanalysis and, in particular, the teaching of psychoanalytic interpretations of Shakespeare be made more visible and effective in American colleges and universities? On this point it is tempting simply to paraphrase Lacan and say that there is no academic relation. A nominal adjective like “Freudian” can—and does—cover a multitude of (largely inaccurate) sins, but “Kleinian” and “Kohutian” are not part of the undergraduate vocabulary, nor, so far as I can tell, are names like Winnicott, Bion, Bowlby, or Kernberg.

CHAPTER 8 Occupy Shakespeare from: The Muses on Their Lunch Hour
Abstract: In 2011, the American Dialect Society voted to make “occupy” the 2011 Word of the Year, defeating contenders such as “tebowing,” “99%,” and the acronym FOMO, for “fear of missing out” (anxiety over being inundated by the information on social media). The chair of the Dialect Society’s New Words Committee was quick to acknowledge that “occupy” was, in fact, “a very old word,” but noted that “over the course of just a few months it took on another life and moved in new and unexpected directions.”³ When a column on this topic appeared in The Guardian, written by an after-dinner

CHAPTER 9 Shakespeare 451 from: The Muses on Their Lunch Hour
Abstract: Despite the best efforts of humanities deans and English department chairs, and the resourceful invention by instructors of new courses designed to attract undergraduates to the humanities and the arts, today’s college students are more and more choosing the STEM fields (science, technology, engineering, and math) for reasons both practical and intellectual. English and history used to be among the largest undergraduate majors; now the preferred fields are often computer science, economics, and finance. It is not just that students

CHAPTER FOUR Violence, Mourning and Singular Testimony from: Assia Djebar
Abstract: During the 1990s Djebar’s work becomes increasingly, immediately politically engaged. While Loin de Médinereturns to the early days of Islam in order to denounce the misuse of the past by resurgent Islamists at the end of the 1980s, Djebar’s next group of texts focuses overtly and pointedly on the present. As the political climate in Algeria becomes steadily more fraught, reflections on femininity and genealogy are superseded by a direct engagement with current confrontations and losses, and Djebar’s horror at the upsurge of Islamist terrorism leads her to interrogate more pointedly the contemporary disintegration of her native land. Bearing

Book Title: Science Fiction Double Feature-The Science Fiction Film as Cult Text
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): DUCHOVNAY GERALD
Abstract: Critical discussion of cult cinema has often noted its tendency to straddle or ignore boundaries, to pull together different sets of conventions, narrative formulas, or character types for the almost surreal pleasure to be found in their sudden juxtapositions or narrative combination. With its own boundary-blurring nature—as both science and fiction, reality and fantasy—science fiction has played a key role in such cinematic cult formation. This volume examines that largely unexplored relationship, looking at how the sf film’s own double nature neatly matches up with a persistent double vision common to the cult film. It does so by bringing together an international array of scholars to address key questions about the intersections of sf and cult cinema: how different genre elements, directors, and stars contribute to cult formation; what role fan activities, including “con" participation, play in cult development; and how the occulted or “bad" sf cult film works. The volume pursues these questions by addressing a variety of such sf cult works, including Robot Monster (1953), Zardoz (1974), A Boy and His Dog (1975), Tetsuo: The Iron Man (1989), Space Truckers (1996), Ghost in the Shell 2 (2004), and Iron Sky (2012). What these essays afford is a revealing vision of both the sf aspects of much cult film activity and the cultish aspects of the whole sf genre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gn6btc

1. From “Multiverse” to “Abramsverse”: from: Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Hills Matt
Abstract: When theorizing how a cinematic cult status develops, we should bear in mind that there may be more than one kind of media cult, and also more than one way for audiences to meaningfully approach films and franchises as cults. Prior research has emphasized different typesof cult texts, whether by distinguishing “the midnight movie from the classical cult film” (Telotte, “Beyond” 10), “residual” from “emergent” audience valorizations (see my own “Realising the Cult Blockbuster”), or transgressive cult movies from “cult blockbusters” (Mathijs and Sexton 214). Some writers have explicitly identified branches of cult movies: “One … branch of cult

3. “It’s Alive!”: from: Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Abbott Stacey
Abstract: The 1970s represent one of the great transitional periods for Hollywood, producing an increasingly independent and confrontational approach to cinema in terms of both narrative content and aesthetic display. Film-makers sought to break violently with film-making conventions by reimaging genre tropes through a more visceral and realistic style, challenging audiences with graphic, nihilistic, and often brutal imagery. Thus, John Carpenter, director of The Thing(1982), confesses that he “wanted something savage to happen. I don’t believe I could do that now. I don’t believe they’d let me do that,” while David Cronenberg explains that he “wanted to blow other people’s

7. Iron Sky’s War Bonds: from: Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Tryon Chuck
Abstract: In February 2012, after six years of planning, fundraising, and production, the sf film Iron Skypremiered at the Berlin Film Festival. AlthoughIron Skyfeatured a provocative plot—one in which Nazis who had been hiding on the dark side of the moon return to earth in the year 2018—along with a couple of familiar international stars, including German actor Udo Kier, and a soundtrack by the Slovenian avant-garde band Laibach, the film was discussed most frequently because of its unusual production history, which involved the contributions of thousands of fans and followers who donated time and money

8. Transnational Interactions: from: Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Tatsumi Takayuki
Abstract: In 2009, several friends recommended that I see District 9, a new film produced by Peter Jackson and directed by the hitherto unknown Neill Blomkamp. They knew that since I was something of a missionary for cyberpunk and avant-pop texts, I would appreciate this film, an unlikely export from South Africa that had quickly attracted a cult following. They were right. Blomkamp’s ideas and shocking images immediately reminded me of Shinya Tsukamoto’s cyberpunk Tetsuo films (Tetsuo: The Iron Man, 1988, andTetsuo II: Body Hammer, 1992) which had inspired me to write my first book,Full Metal Apache(2006). However,

9. A Donut for Tom Paris: from: Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Lamerichs Nicolle
Abstract: Decades ago, fans were usually adults who had the economic and social liberty of going to conventions or clubs. Recently, the discourse on fandom has become entwined with that on new media audiences, who are not only portrayed as younger, but also seen as especially exemplary of fandom in terms of their online activity. As a result of the increase in online participatory culture, criticism has followed suit, often focusing more on the “online” than the “offline” dimensions of fandom. However, concerts, conventions, movie theaters, and fan clubs remain relevant sites where media fandom is performed today, and these venues

13. “Lack of Respect, Wrong Attitude, Failure to Obey Authority”: from: Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Latham Rob
Abstract: Stanley Kubrick’s 1968 film 2001: A Space Odysseywas acause célèbrewithin the sf genre, dividing Old Guard fans, who deplored the film-maker’s purported contempt for reason and scientific inquiry, from younger fans aligned with contemporary counterculture, who embraced its trippy imagery, its fusion of science and mysticism, and its tone of apocalyptic transcendence. At the time of its release,2001became a kind of litmus test of fan sentiment towards the New Wave movement, a rising sf avant-garde that sought to remake a genre traditionally inclined towards technocratic scientism and conservative narrative style into a more experimental, counterculturally

Book Title: Patrick Modiano-Second Edition
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): KAWAKAMI AKANE
Abstract: Conceived as a second edition to Kawakami's acclaimed A Self-Conscious Art, which was the first full-length study in English of Patrick Modiano’s work, this book has been comprehensively updated with two new chapters, notably discussing the author's recent work and his Nobel Prize win. Kawakami shows how by parodying precursors such as Proust or the nouveau romanciers, Modiano's narratives are built around a profound lack of faith in the ability of writing to retrieve the past through memory, and this failure is acknowledged in the discreet playfulness that characterises his novels. This welcome update on the work of one of the most successful modern French novelists will be essential reading for scholars working on contemporary French writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gn6dst

Introduction from: Patrick Modiano
Abstract: The announcement that Modiano had won the 2014 Nobel Prize for Literature came, it seems, as a surprise to many. ‘Patrick Modiano plutôt que Philip Roth, ou Haruki Murakami. Les académiciens suédois qui attribuent le prix Nobel de littérature ne détestent pas étonner le monde. Mais si la surprise est de taille, elle est aussi excellente’.¹ His French readers were surprised, then delighted; a popular writer since the publication of his very first novels, Modiano has been a steadfast bestseller in his native country for well over forty years. Readers, critics and journalists were united in their delight that the

Book Title: At the Limits of Memory-Legacies of Slavery in the Francophone World
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): Hodgson Kate
Abstract: Recent years have seen a growing body of literature dedicated to memories of slavery in the Anglophone world, yet little has been done to approach this subject from Francophone perspectives. This collection responds to the urgent need to contribute to current research on slavery and memory studies by focusing specifically on the Francophone world. Featuring the scholarship of leading academics in France, Britain, the United States and Canada, the collection reflects upon contemporary commemorative practices that relate to the history of slavery and the slave trade, and questions how they function in relationship to other, less memorialized histories of exploitation, such as indentured and forced labour. The volume is set against the context of France’s growing body of memory legislation, as well as its close cultural and political connections to its former empire, all of which make it an influential player in how slavery continues to be memorialized and conceptualized in the public sphere. Contributors retrace and redraw the narrative map of slavery and its legacies in the Francophone world through a comparative understanding of how these different, but interconnected forms of labour exploitation have been remembered and/or forgotten from European, West African, Indian Ocean and Caribbean perspectives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gpcb4p

Representing the Slave Past: from: At the Limits of Memory
Author(s) Chivallon Christine
Abstract: This chapter is concerned with the development of new patrimonial and museographical practices relating to transatlantic slavery in France and its far-flung overseas departments in the Caribbean.² From the outset, it is worth recalling that these departments consist of micro-societies that were born out of slavery and whose historical trajectory has yet to find its rightful place within that of the French nation. What follows may therefore appear surprising since the proposed analysis chimes a dissonant note amid the increasing clamour for action at a museal level for the creation of places to collect, remember and honour the memory of

Multiple Memories: from: At the Limits of Memory
Author(s) Ravi Srilata
Abstract: The history of Mauritius, an island with no indigenous populations, is the history of sequential colonialisms and successive immigrations. The Portuguese are credited with the discovery of Mauritius in the early sixteenth century, but they showed little interest in colonizing the island. The Dutch came later, but were unsuccessful in their efforts to found a colony. After their withdrawal in 1710, French colonists, adventurers and merchants transformed the island into a prosperous and flourishing sugarcane-producing colony with the help of slaves who came mainly from Madagascar and East Africa (Addison and Hazareesingh, 1999: 25). General Decaen’s capitulation in 1810 transformed

Speaking of Slavery: from: At the Limits of Memory
Author(s) Omuku Sotonye
Abstract: The institution of slavery and the practice of slave trading in Africa have been the subject of increasing debate over the past few decades, with historians and anthropologists considering the relationship between domestic slavery and the trans-Saharan and transatlantic slave trades, as well as the impact of these external trades on the traffic of slaves within Africa. Forced migration patterns across the Atlantic form the majority of the commemorative discourses on slavery in West Africa. Conversely, domestic slavery, which not only pre-dated and co-existed with the transatlantic and trans-Saharan trades, but has also outlived both, is often relegated to the

From Forgetting to Remembrance: from: At the Limits of Memory
Author(s) Dali Inès Mrad
Abstract: At least since the modern period, Morocco and the Regencies of Algiers, Tunis and Tripoli were among the regions directly implicated in the enslavement and displacement of sub-Saharan African peoples, and were used either as platforms for their transit towards Europe or as territories seeking domestic and agricultural labour. In the case of Tunisia, slaves were brought overland as part of trans-Saharan business and trade, but they could also be transported by sea, the trans-Mediterranean trade completing the trans-Saharan trade. Domestic slavery concerned large urban areas, as well as the rural world, but there remained some specificities relating to certain

Cartographies of Memory, Politics of Emancipation from: At the Limits of Memory
Author(s) Vergès Françoise
Abstract: Since the 1960s in Martinique, French Guiana, Guadeloupe and Réunion, and since 1998 in metropolitan France, memories of the slave trade and colonial slavery have mobilized associations, artists and scholars. After a long period of marginalization in French history and culture, colonial slavery has become a point of reference for the women, children and men who identify with those who were enslaved in the French colonies. It has been used to question the French national narrative and its pervasive inequalities, to explore the role and place of racial thinking in the making of French society and culture, and to analyse

1 Patterns of Cognitive Dissonance from: Strange Narrators in Contemporary Fiction
Abstract: How does it feel to dig up your father’s grave if you know his corpse won’t be there? We have already met Oskar Schell, the nine-year-old narrator of Jonathan Safran Foer’s Extremely Loud and Incredibly Close(2005). Oskar’s father died during the September 11 attacks on the World Trade Center; since his body was never found, the family had to bury an empty coffin. Still, at the end of his long—and largely unsuccessful—peregrinations through New York in the hope of finding out more about his dead father, Oskar makes one last attempt at achieving closure: in what he

4 A Strange Mood from: Strange Narrators in Contemporary Fiction
Abstract: I stressed in the prologue that defamiliarization is far from being a purely cognitive process of belief change, since it is always accompanied by an emotional “feel,” which may span a wide affective gamut of curiosity, puzzlement, hesitation, and unease. This chapter focuses on the feelings of strangeness that underlie readers’ engagements with characters by using as case studies two novels, Haruki Murakami’s Hard-Boiled Wonderland and the End of the World(2011; originally published in Japanese in 1985) and Martin Amis’sTime’s Arrow(2003; first edition 1991). Both texts play on a triangulation between the reader and two narrators (Murakami)

Coda: from: Strange Narrators in Contemporary Fiction
Abstract: In the concluding lines of Why We Read Fiction, Lisa Zunshine writes, “I can say that I personally read fiction because it offers a pleasurable and intensive workout for my Theory of Mind” (2006, 164). Zunshine’s argument is well known: we feel attracted to fiction because it affords opportunities for exercising our “theory of mind” (our capacity to attribute mental states to other subjects), thus functioning as some sort of cognitive “weightlifting” (124–25). In discussing this gymnastic metaphor, Zunshine is careful to uncouple the pleasure provided by reading fictional characters’ minds from its real-world consequences, adding that “[just] as

The Dark Side of the Truth. from: Theodor W. Adorno: Truth and Dialectical Experience / Verità ed esperienza dialettica
Author(s) Matteucci Giovanni
Abstract: The title of this paper refers to the peculiar and indeed special role played by the concepts of nature, in general, and natural beauty, in particular, in Adorno’s philosophy. In fact, since Adorno’s early works of the 1930s up to his mature works of the 1960s, nature seems to represent what has been systematically repressed in the course of civilization. Hence, if observed from a dialectical point of view and expressed in somehow Pinkfloydian terms, nature appears as something like “the dark side of the truth” (or, in a more Springsteenian fashion, the “darkness” that lies “at the edge of

Chapter 2 MAY’S TENSIONS TODAY: from: Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) McDonald Kevin
Abstract: On 15 March 1968 France’s most important newspaper, Le Monde, published an editorial by Pierre Viansson-Ponté, its chief political writer, entitled ‘France is bored’ (Viansson-Ponté 1968). The author, a former member of the Resistance and one of the country’s most respected political commentators, bemoaned the fact that France was ‘removed from the convulsions reshaping the world’, a place where ‘nothing is happening’. He observed in passing that a few students were demonstrating at Nanterre University for the right of female students to enter the male dormitories, dismissing this as ‘despite everything, a limited conception of human rights’. Anyone familiar with

Chapter 9 HABERMAS ON SIXTIES STUDENT PROTESTS: from: Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) Driver James
Abstract: As one of the greatest sociologists and social philosophers of the latter part of the twentieth century, Jürgen Habermas’s interactions with, and theorising of the problems confronted by the sixties student movement are of both major historical and contemporary significance. Other chapters in this book (McDonald chapter 2; O’Donnell chapter 6, Cranfield chapter 7) describe the movements for protest and greater freedom of expression amongst the student generations in Europe and North America. More specific to inter-generational conflict in Germany was the awakening of the baby boomer generation to the country’s National Socialist past. The Wirtschaftwunderhad provided the country

Chapter 12 WHEN THE PERSONAL BECAME POLITICAL: from: Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) Freely Maureen
Abstract: It began with a memo. Its original title (‘Some Thoughts in Response to Dottie’s Thoughts on a Women’s Liberation Movement’) suggests the spirit in which it was written. Carol Hanisch, a community organiser for the Southern Conference Educational Fund, was responding to a memo by another staff member. Like so many other activists in the civil rights movement, the antiwar movement, and the New Left, this colleague did not view the fledgling women’s liberation movement as truly political. Dottie Zellner had been particularly scathing about the new vogue for consciousness-raising, which she dismissed as therapy.

Book Title: Modern European Tragedy-Exploring Crucial Plays
Publisher: Anthem Press
Author(s): CASCETTA ANNAMARIA
Abstract: The idea of the tragic has permeated Western culture for millennia, and has been expressed theatrically since the time of the ancient Greeks. However, it was in the Europe of the twentieth century – one of the most violent periods of human history – that the tragic form significantly developed. ‘Modern European Tragedy’ examines the consciousness of this era, drawing a picture of the development of the tragic through an in-depth analysis of some of the twentieth century’s most outstanding texts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gxp8qf

Chapter 3 THE SCHOOL OF HATRED: from: Modern European Tragedy
Author(s) O’NEILL EUGENE
Abstract: It will hardly appear surprising that a selection of the key texts of European twentiethcentury drama should include a work by Eugene O’neill, being yet another response to the emergence of the twentieth century’s tragic consciousness. Of course he was American, but the matrix of his work is deeply rooted in European culture and theatrical research, with a pessimistic anthropology and a probing of behaviour based on depth psychology (one of the major axes of twentieth-century thought), embedded in a formal structure that is original and innovative compared to the currents of commercial Broadway theatre.¹

Chapter 4 THE DESTINY OF MAN IS MAN: from: Modern European Tragedy
Author(s) BRECHT BERTOLT
Abstract: The form of tragedy and the traditional mode of expressing man’s tragic condition in the theatre were, as is well known, some of Bertolt Brecht’s most controversial targets.¹ There are two sets of reasons for this. The first is technical, because classical tragedy and the drama that derives from it belong, as Brecht saw it, to a kind of theatre that does not arouse the critical spirit and the dialectical attitude. The second is philosophical, because they are founded on an idea of destiny and the immutability or universality of human thought, in conflict with Brecht’s Marxian principles.²

A Provisional Epilogue from: Modern European Tragedy
Abstract: I close this study with a provisional epilogue, which offers a glimpse at tragic dramaturgy in the last decades of the century (to which I plan to devote a future study) within the radical renewal of Western theatre since the late sixties.

FOREWORD from: Knowledge and Human Liberation
Author(s) Clammer John
Abstract: This valuable volume brings together in one place for the first time a number of essays by one of India’s (and indeed international sociology’s) most innovative thinkers, and one moreover who is committed to erasing the boundaries between social theory and practice. Essentially what is suggested in the following pages is an approach to social knowledge and to positive social transformation that transcends the normal boundaries that so commonly separate sociology from philosophy and both from religion and spirituality. To a great extent the social sciences have failed to deliver on their Enlightenment promises. Perhaps this was too much to

Chapter Three THE MODERN PRINCE AND THE MODERN SAGE: from: Knowledge and Human Liberation
Abstract: The prince has been the dominant archetypal model of being and becoming in modernity, and despite the supposed beheading of the kings in the modern world, as Machiavelli (1981) and antonio gramsci (1957), among many others, tell us it is the values of the prince, namely his will to power, that guide us in the modern world, rather than the values of an unconditional ethical obligation of the self to the other. Power, politics and empowerment have provided determinant frames of selfconstitution and social emancipation in the modern world, and they have provided the singular definition of freedom as well.

Chapter Four KANT AND ANTHROPOLOGY from: Knowledge and Human Liberation
Abstract: In this chapter, we explore the challenge of rethinking modernist knowledge by looking at Kant’s conception of anthropology. Kant taught courses in both anthropology and physical geography, and his book Anthropology from a Pragmatic Point of Viewwas published nearly thirty years after his initial engagement with anthropology. While his lectures embodied Kant’s crisis of identity as a professional philosopher, thus facilitating a border crossing between philosophy and anthropology,Anthropology from a Pragmatic Point of Viewwas far short of his earlier critique of metaphysics and wanted anthropology to play by universal principles if not be totally subordinated to metaphysics.

Chapter Sixteen SPIRITUAL CULTIVATION FOR A SECULAR SOCIETY from: Knowledge and Human Liberation
Abstract: Much water has flown down the Jordan, Jhelum, ganges, Cauvery, Mahanadi, thames, rhines and Mississippi rivers since the dawn of humanity and the independence of india, and in recent years much discussion has taken place over the nature of secularism in india, including its uses and abuses. Broadly speaking, we can classify the various contending positions on secularism in india into three approaches: a) those who defend the secular character of the Indian Republic as enshrined in the Constitution of India; b) those who oppose it on the grounds that the practice of Indian state-led secularism has been a pseudo-secularism;

Book Title: Philosophy and Anthropology-Border Crossing and Transformations
Publisher: Anthem Press
Author(s): Clammer John
Abstract: Philosophy and Anthropology: Border Crossings and Transformations is an innovative and original collection of essays exploring the relationships between philosophy and anthropology – historically and presently – and the theoretical and practical issues concerning their dialogue.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gxpchs

Introduction from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Giri Ananta Kumar
Abstract: Philosophy and anthropology have long been intellectual companions. In European continental philosophy in particular, the boundaries between the two disciplines have always been very porous. One thinks at once of the largely German project to construct a philosophy of man and of human’s place in nature (a project broadly known as philosophical anthropology), the constant border crossings between anthropology and philosophy of notable individuals such as Paul Cassirer and Martin Heidegger, and the importation into British analytical philosophy by way of Ludwig Wittgenstein of concerns that can only be called anthropological. Although from the other side of the disciplinary boundary

Chapter 6 MEDIATION THROUGH COGNITIVE DYNAMICS: from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Strydom Piet
Abstract: In the light of a heightened sense of contingency and vulnerability, a pronounced uncertainty has set in since the late twentieth century about human nature and, hence, the image of the human being. This has been fuelled further by the recognition of the inherent ambiguity of these concepts. Awareness of the precariousness of our assumptions about what human beings are like has not only affected intellectuals, prompting philosophers and social scientists to embark on a searching interrogation, but has also penetrated into the policymaking and the public domain. While philosophers and social scientists may still be able, during the process

Chapter 8 KANT AND ANTHROPOLOGY from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Giri Ananta Kumar
Abstract: In this chapter, we explore the challenge of rethinking modernist knowledge by looking at Kant’s conception of anthropology. Kant taught courses in both anthropology and physical geography, and his book Anthropology from a Pragmatic Point of View(1798) was published nearly thirty years after his initial engagement with anthropology. While his lectures embodied his crisis of identity as a professional philosopher, thus facilitating a border crossing between philosophy and anthropology,Anthropology from a Pragmatic Point of Viewwas far short of his earlier critique of metaphysics. Kant wanted anthropology to play by universal principles, if not be totally subordinate to

Chapter 14 BAKHTIN’S HERITAGE IN ANTHROPOLOGY: from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Brocki Marcin
Abstract: For over thirty years, the development of theory in anthropology has been under heavy influence from literary theory, serving mostly as an inspiration in solving certain problems in the research practice of ethnography. This influence first started with the assimilation of structuralism and semiotics into anthropology, with their concept of culture as a collection of texts interacting with one another. The real interdisciplinary dialogue, however, originated with the discovery, received in the field of ethnography with much suspicion and astonishment, that the practice of anthropology is not only collecting and analysing data, but also ‘producing texts’, and that the textualization

Chapter 19 ANTHROPOLOGY, DEVELOPMENT AND THE MYTH OF CULTURE from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Feleppa Robert
Abstract: Anthropologists have become increasingly involved as participants on development teams, but their great potential to promote sustainable development is hindered by vestiges of one of cultural anthropology’s founding myths. It is the notion of cultures construed as self-contained symbol systems, conceptually opaque to all but true insiders, with an implied notion of correct translation, which makes it an ‘all or nothing’ matter. This notion is also linked to long-standing concerns in the field with moral relativism, value neutrality and colonialism. As a result, within the community of anthropologists working in development, two somewhat opposed positions have arisen: one holds that

Book Title: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski-Essays on the ‘Pragmatic Sociology of Critique’
Publisher: Anthem Press
Author(s): Turner Bryan S.
Abstract: This volume – which brings together essays by prominent scholars in the field of sociology – provides a range of perspectives on the increasing influence of Luc Boltanski’s writings on both theoretical and empirical problems of contemporary social and political analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gxpcqw

CHAPTER 1 Figures of Descent from Classical Sociological Theory: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Fowler Bridget
Abstract: Luc Boltanski, whose work is reaching a crescendo, has made an enduring contribution to sociology. His distinction lies chiefly in his inventive crossing of the approach to domination in the Marxist and Weberian traditions with the interest in moral and symbolic representations of the Durkheimian tradition. Yet, it also bears all the fascination of his early alliance with his master, Bourdieu, and his subsequent public break from him. In particular, we see the mature Boltanski wrestling productively with a fruitful conceptual framework for understanding the contemporary mode of production, and the reappearance within it of mass precariousness in relation to

CHAPTER 3 Why (Not) Pragmatism? from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Bogusz Tanja
Abstract: Is Luc Boltanski a pragmatist thinker? In some current French debates, this question is not a rhetorical one. More than ten years after Pierre Bourdieu’s death, and about thirty years after the founding of the Groupe de Sociologie Politique et Morale (GSPM) with Laurent Thévenot and Michael Pollak at the École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales in Paris, the critical stance towards Bourdieusian sociology seems to be increasingly linked to the question of whether or not one may be described as a pragmatist.

CHAPTER 8 Enlarging Conceptions of Testing Moments and Critical Theory: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Jacobs Amy
Abstract: Discussing Luc Boltanski’s research is a particularly delicate task for the person who co-authored works and articles with him that have given rise to a new sociological paradigm and led to the creation of the Groupe de Sociologie Politique et Morale. I could have avoided the difficulty by choosing a masterwork of his that is quite different from the works we wrote together, such as the admirable La condition foetale(Boltanski, 2004). Yet, I have chosen instead to confront it in the spirit of the long, friendly, and ongoing conversation between us, renewed this past year. I would like to

CHAPTER 11 Towards a Dialogue between Pierre Bourdieu’s ‘Critical Sociology’ and Luc Boltanski’s ‘Pragmatic Sociology of Critique’ from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: One of the most fruitful sources of controversy in the contemporary sociological literature, notably in France, is the debate on the relationship between two prominent paradigmatic programmes, which are often regarded as diametrically opposed: on the one hand, Pierre Bourdieu’s critical sociology, which has been increasingly influential since the 1970s; on the other hand, Luc Boltanski’spragmatic sociology of critique, which has become widely known since the late 1980s. Not only in recent Francophone² intellectual discussions, but also in current Germanophone³ and Anglophone⁴ sociological disputes, the writings of both Bourdieu and Boltanski are commonly considered as major contributions to the

CHAPTER 12 The Promise of Pragmatic Sociology, Human Rights, and the State from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Nash Kate
Abstract: As a sociologist working in the emerging area of the sociology of human rights, I find the approach that Luc Boltanski and his various collaborators take to cultural, moral, and political questions inspiring. There is an urgent need to develop theoretical concepts and methodologies to study human rights, which have been growing in importance as a result of the activities of transnational advocacy networks, digital communication, and the codification and enactment of international law since the end of the Cold War (see Nash, 2012). What resources do human rights offer for the critique of injustices? Are human rights contributing to

CHAPTER 15 The Civil Sphere and On Justification: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Eulriet Irène
Abstract: Jeffrey Alexander’s The Civil Sphereand Luc Boltanski and Laurent Thévenot’sOn Justification, both first published in English in 2006, represent each in their own genre major sociological contributions. This chapter is concerned with appraising their respective input towards a renewal of our understanding of public culture in liberal democracies as well as of the sociological tools for analysing it.

CHAPTER 16 Luc Boltanski in Euroland from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Spence David
Abstract: This chapter relates some of Luc Boltanski’s theoretical reflections to the study of the European Union, focusing on its endeavours to create a European-level approach to policy areas hitherto the ‘competence’ of member states. The chapter discusses problematic implications of European integration, such as the notion that some form of European state may emerge or that the ‘evercloser union’ – one of the EU’s ambitions – implies the creation of European citizenship and parallel forms of identity and class allegiances to those found in traditional nation-states. Our hope is that sociologists might be incited to examine power, class interests, and the justification

CHAPTER 22 An Introduction to ‘“Whatever Works”: Political Philosophy and Sociology – Luc Boltanski in Conversation with Craig Browne’ from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Browne Craig
Abstract: The discipline of sociology partly originated from a perception of the limitations of political philosophy. The transition to modernity demanded new ways of addressing the questions that political philosophy had typically posed, such as the nature of authority, the conditions of the good life, the definition of justice, the degrees of freedom, and the prerequisites of inclusion in a community. Classical sociological theory reflected the modern appreciation of the independence of ‘the social’ relative to ‘the political’ and the need to understand the internal dynamics of ‘the social’ in their own terms. In a stronger sense, sociological theory suggested that

CHAPTER 25 The Fragility of Reality: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: Luc Boltanski is a sociologist and Directeur d’études at the École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales. Born in 1940, he is the author of 15 books, which are based on various field studies and transcend disciplinary boundaries: nursing, reproduction, abortion, the professional world of cadres, humanitarian issues, and management – to mention only a few of the topics covered in his works. His sociology focuses on the analysis of normative orders and resources mobilized by human actors in order to preserve, or challenge, particular sets of social arrangements. As reflected in the debates sparked by his ‘pragmatic turn’, the conceptual

INTRODUCTION: from: The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Turner Bryan S.
Abstract: Unsurprisingly, the Second World War had separate and distinctive consequences for different national traditions of sociology. After the War, the dominant and arguably most successful of the Western democracies emerged in North America, and its sociological traditions assumed a celebratory and often triumphalist perspective on modernisation. The defeat of the fascist nations – notably Germany, Italy, and Japan – seemed to demonstrate the superiority of Western liberal democratic systems, and North American sociologists took the lead in developing theories of development and modernisation that were optimistic and forward-looking. The examples are numerous, but we might mention Daniel Lerner’s The Passing

CHAPTER SIX Bourdieu and Nietzsche: from: The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Rahkonen Keijo
Abstract: This chapter makes a comparison, which from a sociological perspective might appear a little surprising: it is between Pierre Bourdieu’s and Friedrich Nietzsche’s respective conceptions of ‘power’ and ‘taste’. The aim is to show that there is an interesting resemblance between the two with regard to these conceptions in general, and to ‘struggle for power’, ‘ressentiment’ and ‘will to power’ in particular, and thus to shed light on some key aspects of Bourdieu’s thinking. The order of the dramatis personaein this analysis is no accident: Bourdieu and Nietzsche. This alludes to the fact that the discussion that follows is

CHAPTER ELEVEN Bourdieu’s Sociological Fiction: from: The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Frère Bruno
Abstract: For nearly thirty years now, the critical sociology of Pierre Bourdieu has been used in an increasingly large number of studies in the social sciences. It is remarkable, however, that it has had a rather weak impact on my own field of research: the study of new social movements. This chapter argues that the reason for this anomaly lies with Bourdieu’s theory of habitus (a central element of Bourdieusian thought) and the particular problems that this theory poses for researchers of new social movements. As original and powerful as it can be, the theory of habitus is, first and foremost,

CHAPTER TWELVE Overcoming Semiotic Structuralism: from: The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Kögler Hans-Herbert
Abstract: Pierre Bourdieu’s conception of habitus marks a theoretical step which no adequate understanding of social reality can ignore. By introducing habitus, Bourdieu is able both to integrate and to transcend major insights of the linguistic turn in philosophy, most prominently the idea that conscious intentional understanding necessarily relies on a host of implicit, practical, and holistic background assumptions which constitute meaning while being themselves unrepresented (Searle, 1989). The concept of habitus incorporates this idea since it shows that individual agency and its self-understanding are constituted by relying on an acquired social sense, the cognitive habitus, which defines how an agent

Book Title: Fabricating Authenticity in Soviet Hungary-The Afterlife of the First Hungarian Soviet Republic in the Age of State Socialism
Publisher: Anthem Press
Author(s): Apor Péter
Abstract: This book explores the memory of the First Hungarian Soviet Republic of 1919, which proved crucial for communist Hungarian political culture throughout the twentieth century. Apor takes an innovative approach to understudied aspects of European memory cultures, focusing particularly on how a dictatorship remembers and the concept of authenticity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gxpf42

INTRODUCTION from: Fabricating Authenticity in Soviet Hungary
Abstract: What makes abstract historical interpretations authentic? This theoretical question troubled Communist Party leaders and propaganda historians in Hungary during the years that followed the restoration of dictatorship after the suppression of the anti-Stalinist uprising in October–November 1956. János Kádár’s government, which had been established only by the military might of the Soviet Union, attempted to obtain legitimacy on the basis of a curious historical argument. Meanwhile, the new Communist leadership justified the suppression of democratic and independent aspirations by claiming to protect Hungarians against the peril of counterrevolution. It built the image of October 1956 on its alleged historical

Chapter 2 RESURRECTION: from: Fabricating Authenticity in Soviet Hungary
Abstract: Having succeeded the suppression of the revolution in October 1956, the first time that the new Communist regime evoked the events of 1919 was likely in the 21 November issue of the Népszabadság(People’s freedom), the party’s official daily. That day the editors published a letter, which had allegedly been sent to the government by an old worker. The author of this letter first gives an account of his life spent within the labour movement since 1917. The worker writes about his sufferings and privation during the previous regime, then recalls the happy years following the end of the war.

1 Introduction from: The Vision of the Priestly Narrative
Abstract: It is generally agreed that it is relatively easy to distinguish Priestly material (P)¹ from non-Priestly material (non-P) in Genesis–Numbers (Joshua).² However, when it comes to identifying the overall theology of the Priestly material, or what it might be primarily about, there is much more contention. A range of views have been proposed, primarily in articles³ and sections in books whose primary concern is mostly with one section of P⁴ or with source/redactional issues or with defining the extent or possible levels within P.⁵ Philip Jenson’s statement that “there have been surprisingly few full-scale theological studies of P in

3 The Genre and Hermeneutics of Pg from: The Vision of the Priestly Narrative
Abstract: A vital factor in any attempt to interpret Pg as a whole is the question of its nature or genre.¹ However, how exactly to describe the nature of the Priestly material (Pg) has proven to be an elusive task. The Priestly material has been described in various ways; it has been described as “ Geschichte,” and specific nuances of this such as “Geschichtserzählung” or “Ursprungsgeschichte,” as “historiography,” and as “history viewed in ritual categories.”² It has also been described in terms of “paradigm,” whether as comprising “fundamental paradigmatic constellations” or being described as “paradigmatic” narrative, “paradigmatic history,” or “myth.”³

Book Title: Bible through the Lens of Trauma- Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Frechette Christopher G.
Abstract: In recent years there has been a surge of interest in trauma, trauma theory, and its application to the biblical text. This collection of essays explores the usefulness of using trauma theory as a lens through which to read the biblical texts. Each of the essays explores the concept of how trauma might be defined and applied in biblical studies. Using a range of different but intersection theories of trauma, the essays reflect on the value of trauma studies for offering new insights into the biblical text. Including contributions from biblical scholars, as well as systematic and pastoral theologians, this book provides a timely critical reflection on this emerging discussion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1h1htfd

Defining “Trauma” as a Useful Lens for Biblical Interpretation from: Bible through the Lens of Trauma
Author(s) Boase Elizabeth
Abstract: In recent decades biblical scholars have increasingly come to regard the concept of trauma as a powerful interpretive lens, and that interest has begun to spark significant discussion.¹ The interdisciplinary conference “Trauma and Traumatization: Biblical Studies and Beyond,” held at Aarhus University, Denmark, in 2012, brought biblical scholars into conversation with scholars from various disciplines, including anthropology, classics, history of medicine, patristics, psychology, and sociology. Subsequently, an important volume of revised conference papers appeared in 2014.² During the Annual Meetings of the Society of Biblical Literature (SBL) from 2012 to 2015, papers presented across more than thirty program units explicitly

Reading Biblical Texts through the Lens of Resilience from: Bible through the Lens of Trauma
Author(s) Schreiter Robert J.
Abstract: Reading scriptural texts through the lens of trauma studies is proving to be an exciting development in biblical studies and the study of other ancient Mediterranean and Near Eastern texts. The first forays into theologicaltexts through the lens of trauma are promising as well, although this lens would seem, at least at this point, not to provide the far-reaching consequences that it may well have in biblical studies.¹ I come to this literature in biblical studies not as an expert in that field but as a systematic theologian who has become interested in trauma studies, especially as it plays

Toward a Pastoral Reading of 2 Corinthians as a Memoir of PTSD and Healing from: Bible through the Lens of Trauma
Author(s) Clark Peter Yuichi
Abstract: When people endure times of crisis or trauma, they often search for meaning and hope by engaging in a bidirectional reading of texts. One direction involves hearing, reading, or witnessing the stories of others in analogous circumstances. Doing so can help people to know that they are not alone in their suffering, thus fulfilling Donne’s axiom that “no man is an island, entire of itself.”¹ The other direction points toward texts and rituals in one’s religious faith and spiritual practices, seeking a linkage between one’s own story and a larger, transcendent story: one that recounts what is sacred or ultimate.

CHAPTER 1 “The Body of This Death”: from: Light and Death
Abstract: In Romans 7:24, Saint Paul, lamenting the conflict between his enlightened mind and his sinful flesh, utters a cry that has echoed down the centuries: “O wretched man that I am! Who shall deliver me from the body of this death?” Almost predictably, Paul’s moving outcry attracted the sustained attention of the poets of early modern England, conspicuous among them Spenser, Donne, and Milton—predictably, not only because of Paul’s anguish but also because of its unusual phrasing and figuration. Popular English translations of the Bible, such as Geneva and King James, in accord with the Latin Vulgate and the

CHAPTER 2 Mutability and Mortality in The Faerie Queene from: Light and Death
Abstract: Spenser’s Mutabilitie Cantos engage the subjects of sin and death from start to finish—from the introduction of Mutability herself through the end of her pageant. Descended from Mother Earth and the rebellious Titans, Mutability desires “Rule and dominion” over Earth, her maternal inheritance, “That as a Goddesse, men might her admire, / And heauenly honours yield” (VII.vi.4). To this end, she has perverted the order of Nature, quite altered “the worlds faire frame,” and made all those “accurst / That God had blest” (vi.5):

CHAPTER 3 Satanic Ethos: from: Light and Death
Abstract: The organization of this chapter on Paradise Lostmight be considered a diptych. The first of its panels—Part I—shows the origin of evil, hence sin, in Satan’s envy when the Son is exalted, an envy that underlies Satan’s self-authoring pride.¹ This panel focuses primarily on negation and death. Part II, the second panel, which examines God’s terms of exaltation in greater detail, focuses on the inseparable questions of individuality, allness, and pride, each of which, even pride, has a more positive potential.² My argument in both panels grows out of two crucial speeches in Book V, examining them

CHAPTER 4 Connecting the Cultural Dots: from: Light and Death
Abstract: Changing focus, this chapter engages the history and structure of analogy. The change is pronounced—from sin and death to rhetoric, from poetry and belief to science and methodology. In manner, the chapter is historical, analytical, and abstract, in effect a further shift. These changes threaten to confirm the very chasm between science and the humanities against which I argue. Yet my first three chapters have treated matters that relevantly recur in this one, such as physical and intellectual vision, body and mind, imagination, knowledge, figurative illumination, and Neoplatonism. More importantly, the argument of this chapter enables a theorized broadening

The Future of Islam from: New Thinking in Islam
Abstract: The thinkers presented here have confronted a central problem of modern Islamic theology, namely, how to deal with specific Qur’anic statements. For us Muslims today this is an existential question since many Qur’anic statements do not agree with what we accept as values – at least when these statements remain uninterpreted. This complex of problems taken in itself can be discussed and a new way of interpretation devised and developed, for example, one that is favorable to women. But it can also be placed within the context of a more far-reaching question and an answer can be attempted as to

Book Title: Metaphor, Morality, and the Spirit in Romans 8-1–17
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Robinson William E. W.
Abstract: In this innovative book, William E. W. Robinson takes the reader on a journey through Romans 8:1-17 using Conceptual Metaphor Theory and Conceptual Integration Theory. Robinson delineates the underlying cognitive metaphors, their structure, their function, what they mean, and how Paul's audiences then and now are able to comprehend their meaning. He examines each metaphor in the light of relevant aspects of the Greco-Roman world and Paul's Jewish background. Robinson contends that Paul portrays the Spirit as the principal agent in the religious-ethical life of believers. At the same time, his analysis demonstrates that the conceptual metaphors in Romans 8:1-17 convey the integral role of believers in ethical conduct. In the process, he addresses thorny theological issues such as whether Spirit and flesh signal an internal battle within believers or two conflicting ways of life. Finally, Robinson shows how this study is relevant to related Pauline passages and challenges scholars to incorporate these methods into their own investigation of biblical texts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1h4mhzd

Book Title: The Resounding Soul-Reflections on the Metaphysics and Vivacity of the Human Person
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Kimbriel Samuel
Abstract: It is surely not coincidental that the term “soul" should mean not only the centre of a creature’s life and consciousness, but also a thing or action characterized by intense vivacity (“that bike’s got soul!"). It also seems far from coincidental that the same contemporary academic discussions that have largely cast aside the language of “soul" in their quest to define the character of human mental life should themselves be so – how to say it? – bloodless, so lacking in soul. This volume arises from the opposite premise, namely that the task of understanding human nature is bound up with and in important respects dependent upon the more critical task of learning to be fully human, of learning to have soul. The papers collected here are derived from a conference in Oxford sponsored by the Centre of Theology and Philosophy and together explore the often surprising landscape that emerges when human consciousness is approached from this angle. Drawing upon literary, philosophical, theological, historical, and musical modes of analysis, the essays of this volume vividly remind the reader of the power of the ancient language of soul over against contemporary impulses to reduce, fragment, and overly determine human selfhood.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1hd17z7

7 Transcending the Body/Soul Distinction through the Perspective of Maximus the Confessor’s Anthropology from: The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Mitralexis Sotiris
Abstract: Does the question of the soul alwaysandnecessarilyentail the dualistic dichotomy so characteristic of the body/soul discourse? And, if we do accept the existence of immortal souls and the prevalence of free will, how can these two coincide? How can the soul of a human person possessing a truly free will becompulsorilyeternal? In this article I will address these two different but interconnected questions through examination of selected passages from Maximus the Confessor’s writings, in an attempt to trace possible answers.

8 Nous (Energeia) and Kardia (Dynamis) in the Holistic Anthropology of St. Gregory Palamas from: The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Tănase Nichifor
Abstract: Athonite spirituality of the fourteenth century is situated at the confluence of a theology of divine names already present in the Old Testament and of the ancient practice of monastic traditions, and is also illustrated by the writings of Evagrius and Ps.-Macarius. Hesychasm provides a deep, spiritual theological meaning by grafting the uncreated energies and a single word of prayer onto a theological conception of divine glory. Hesychastic spirituality is “able to assimilate and integrate creatively, as in the case of Evagrius, for whom the mystical tendencies are colored by Neoplatonism and Stoicism.”¹

9 Souls, Minds, Bodies, and Planets from: The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Midgley Mary
Abstract: What does it mean to say that we have got a mind-body problem? Do we need to think of our inner and outer lives as two separate items between which business must somehow be transacted, rather than as aspects of a whole person?

10 The Soul in the Novel: from: The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Waldstein Edmund
Abstract: The novel developed as a literary form particularly suited to a certain typically modern view of the division between soul and body—a view that makes a very sharp distinction between the inner, psychic reality and the outer corporeal reality; between the res cogitansand theres extensa; between interiority and exteriority; between the subject and the object; between the world of “the first-person” and that of the “third person.” The novel, I claim, was particularly suited to expressing the world as experienced through this dualism. I shall illustrate this by looking at Daniel Defoe’sRobinson Crusoe. I shall then

15 Music and Liminal Ethics: from: The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Stone-Davis Ferdia J.
Abstract: This article takes as its starting-point the conception of the soul as “the medium in which we dwell as human beings.” It also acknowledges that this dwelling occurs relationally, since it is only in response to and in dialogue with an environment that a “soulful reality” can emerge. It is on this basis that a consideration of music is undertaken. Music operates by means of thresholds, encouraging a certain porosity that mediates notions of “inner” and “outer” in a unique way, and facilitating the development of the subject as both “interior” and “exterior,” both “active” and “passive,” as both “giver”

17 The Soul at Work: from: The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Kotva Simone
Abstract: Dresden, the winter of 1828–29. In the final months of a life not wanting in notoriety, Friedrich Schlegel (born 1772) delivers a set of curious lectures “concerning in particular the philosophy of language and words.”¹ They are the third part of a trilogy, collectively christened the Philosophy of Life (Philosophie des Lebens),² which argues that the Divine telos of the soul, “the full and living centre of consciousness,”³ lies in the restoration of the imago Dei. Despite this stolid appeal to doctrine, Schlegel’s latePhilosophy of Lifehas caused continual embarrassment for scholars of Romanticism, focusing the eye on

I Am Because We Are—Twenty years on from: I Am Because We Are
Abstract: In the twenty years since the first edition of I Am Because We Are—Readings in Black Philosophywent to print many things have changed both within the academy and outside the walls of colleges and universities. many departments and programs of Black studies have rechristened themselves as programs in Africana studies, while other such entities have been folded into programs dedicated to race and ethnic studies. At the same time, there has been a remarkable proliferation of anthologies and texts dealing with African philosophy and with African American philosophy (for a guide to these resources, see our selected Bibliography

An Interview with H. Odera Oruka (ca. late 1970s) from: I Am Because We Are
Author(s) AKOKO PAUL MBUYA
Abstract: A. In Dholuo,“Luo Language,” time is known askinde.The Luo have always had quite a lot to say about those things which happened long ago by using specific events to mark out or pinpoint the location of such events on the time-continuum. Ex hypothesi, a person may refer to a famine which had taken place as a result of drought. That would be quite a story. Another example which could be given is the case of a man who defended the tribe during wars,

Feminism and Revolution (1978) from: I Am Because We Are
Author(s) THÍAM AWA
Abstract: While women from industrialized countries are focusing their attention on the problem of creating a typically female language, the daughters of black Africa are still at the stage of seeking their own dignity, for the recognition of their own specificity as human beings. This specificity has always been refused them by white colonialists or neocolonialists and by their own black males. One only needs to glance briefly at history to realize this. Africa in the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries was the source of human merchandise, the “black gold” of the time: slaves to be scattered all over America and the

Racism and Culture (1956) from: I Am Because We Are
Author(s) FANON FRANTZ
Abstract: We have here the whole range from overall negation to singular and specific recognition. It is precisely this fragmented and bloody history that we must sketch on the level of cultural anthropology.

from The Racial Contract (1997) from: I Am Because We Are
Author(s) MILLS CHARLES W.
Abstract: If the epistemology of the signatories, the agents, of the racial contract requires evasion and denial of the realities of race, the epistemology of the victims, the objects, of the racial contract is, unsurprisingly, focused on these realities themselves. (so there is a reciprocal relationship, the racial contract tracking white moral/political consciousness, the reaction to the racial contract tracking nonwhite moral/political consciousness and stimulating a puzzled investigation of that white moral/political consciousness.) The term “standpoint theory” is now routinely used to signify the notion that in understanding the workings of a system of oppression, a perspective from the bottom up

The Relations and Duties of Free Colored Men in America to Africa from: I Am Because We Are
Author(s) CRUMMELL ALEXANDER
Abstract: My dear sir,—It is now many months since I received a letter from you, just as you were about sailing from our shores for your home. In that note you requested me to address you a letter setting forth my views concerning liberia, suggesting at the same time that such a letter might prove interesting to many of our old friends and schoolmates in new york. I have not forgotten your request, although I have not heretofore complied with it. Though convinced of the need and possible usefulness of such a letter as you asked from me, I have

On Being Ashamed of Oneself: from: I Am Because We Are
Author(s) DU BOIS W. E. B.
Abstract: My grandfather left a passage in his diary expressing his indignation at receiving an invitation to a Negro picnic. Alexander DuBois, born in the Bahamas, son of Dr. James DuBois of the well-known DuBois family of Poughkeepsie, N. Y., had been trained as a gentleman in the Cheshire School of Connecticut, and the implications of a Negro picnic were anathema to his fastidious soul. It meant close association with poverty, ignorance, and suppressed and disadvantaged people, dirty and with bad manners.

Black Power (1967) from: I Am Because We Are
Author(s) KING MARTIN LUTHER
Abstract: Black Power is now a part of the nomenclature of the national community. To some it is abhorrent, to others dynamic; to some it is repugnant, to others exhilarating; to some it is destructive, to others it is useful. since Black Power means different things to different people and indeed, being essentially an emotional concept, can mean different things to the same person on differing occasions, it is impossible to attribute its ultimate meaning to any single individual or organization. One must look beyond personal styles, verbal flourishes, and the hysteria of the mass media to assess its values, its

The Black Underclass and Black Philosophers (1989) from: I Am Because We Are
Author(s) WEST CORNEL
Abstract: I want to begin by raising the question of what it means to talk about the black underclass from the vantage point of being a black philosopher. It means then that we have to engage in a kind of critical self-inventory, a his torical situating and positioning of ourselves as persons who reflect on the situation of those more disadvantaged than us even though we may have relatives and friends in the black underclass. We have to reflect in part on what is our identity as both black intellectuals, as black philosophers, and more broadly as academicians within the professional-managerial

The Eschatological Dilemma: from: I Am Because We Are
Author(s) CURRY TOMMY J.
Abstract: The sensibilities of the Black American intellectual concerning race have historically been cemented to their ascendency within empire. how one writes about race, offering hope for change in opposition to the totality of racism, and communicates an aspiration for the possibilities made available by American ideals like freedom, justice, and equality has separated the radical from the progressive. In “The failure of the Black Intellectual,” E. Franklin Frazier describes Black intellectualization as de-niggerization of Black scholarship, a retreat from using Black experience as the foundation of theorizing the Blackness, or an “emptying of his [her] life of meaning-ful and content

Addiction from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Canavan Gerry
Abstract: A July 16, 2010, segment on The Daily Show, three months after the catastrophic Deep water Horizon oil spill in the Gulf of Mexico, offers an amusing supercut of every president since 1970 promising to eliminate US oil dependence. Barack Obama in 2010 announces that “now is the moment” to “seize control of our own destiny” back from the oil on which we depend; George W. Bush in 2006 promises to “make our dependence on Middle Eastern oil a thing of the past”; his father in 1992 asserts “there is no security for the United States in further dependence on

Arctic from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Ruiz Rafico
Abstract: “Arctic” is a cultural figuration that does a lot of work. It marks a nebulous geographic region, an atmospheric condition, and, increasingly, perhaps thecommon place where environmental CHANGE is made manifest. With the proliferation of time-lapse satellite images showing the shrinking polar ice cap, documentary PHOTOGRAPHY and film following the pace of glacial melt, and the prominence of the Northwest Passage as a maritime transportation corridor, the Arctic has a recurring cultural visuality and instrumentality all its own and utterly of the present. Part of the Arctic’s figurative work depends on its being perceived as a mappable territory—a

Automobility from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Green-Simms Lindsey
Abstract: In The Life of the Automobile, Soviet critic Ilya Ehrenburg writes, “Cars don’t have a homeland. Like oil stocks or like classic love, they can easily cross borders . . . . The automobile has come to show even the slowest minds that the earth is truly round” (1929, 167). Ehrenburg’s semi-fictional chronicle of the rise of the AUTOMOBILE can help us understand the specific, paradoxical ways that different subjects experience automobility in a world that is increasingly linked through technologies yet profoundly uneven. His interwar tour de force addresses the combined pleasure and violence of the system of automobility

Boom from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Marshall Brenda K.
Abstract: In 1873 the Northern Pacific Railroad (NPRR), the recipient of a federal land grant to build a line from Duluth to Puget Sound, ran out of money at Bismarck, Dakota Territory. With newspapers in the east deriding this “wild scheme to build a railroad from Nowhere, through No-Man’s-Land to No Place,” the NPRR came up with a strategy to advertise the fertility of this No-Man’s-Land: “bonanza” farms owned and operated mostly by eastern industrialists who exchanged increasingly worthless NPRR stock for huge parcels of land abutting the railroad.

China 1 from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Dirlik Arif
Abstract: These headlines date from a short period of no particular eventfulness in late 2013. They are typical of reports that are increasingly streaming out of the People’s Republic of China (PRC). Attention to the social and environmental toll of development in China now claims nearly equal time to celebrations of development and its yet-to-be fulfilled promises. Such gloomy prospects are of deep concern among the leadership and the population at large, especially the latter, who have to live with the negative consequences of development even as they benefit from it.

Corporation from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Pendakis Andrew
Abstract: An ambiguity has clouded our understanding of the corporation ever since Stewart Kyd’s 1793 treatise distinguished between the corporation as a stable juridico-material entity and the process (of incorporation) by which the corporation gains its unique legal prerogative. Incorporation, however, is never mechanically anterior to the corporate form, per se, but instead its very essence: a dynamic, precarious activity characterized by a desire for what Kyd called “perpetual succession,” an existence projected aggressively onto a temporal horizon limited only by the criterion of profit (Kyd 1793, 6). The corporation is a “living being” that combines Spinoza’s conatus—the impulse to

Detritus from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Chari Sharad
Abstract: Oil is literally rot. As biomass decomposing over millions of years, oil is the rot of ages, and yet it has become the fuel we cannot yet do without. This dialectic of protracted ruination and fatal promise crystallizes the ethos of our time. If the late-nineteenth and early-twentieth-century moment that inaugurated the age of oil was also, at least in some places, a time of modernist hope for human liberation against the specter of annihilation, the present appears more obviously marked by proliferating decay, desperate walling-in from inequality, political discourse utterly disengaged from arts of survival, and painful archiving of

Exhaust from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Sajecki Anna
Abstract: The world of British science fiction writer J. G. Ballard is one of motorways and cars; highways and automobiles emblematize changing technological landscapes and emergent postmodern geographies, betokening capitalism and Americanization. At the beginning of the 1970s, when the environmental effects of automobiles came under increasing scrutiny, another aspect of the car garnered attention: exhaust. A UTOMOBILE exhaust is a secondarily produced waste resulting from energetic depletion. Think of the car as a system: gasoline in the form of fuel drives the system and is required for it to function, but this energetic imperative and the burning of fuel transforms

Fallout from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Masco Joseph
Abstract: In his 1964 film, Red Desert, Michelangelo Antonioni depicts a terrifying conundrum of late modernity: a world of technological marvels, whose price is local culture and the environment. The film is set in an Italian industrial town, where Monica Vitti plays the increasingly distraught wife of a petrochemical executive. The film veers from an examination of Italian industrial design—the beautiful sculptural forms enabled by PLASTICS, steel, and glass that constitute a radical break with local craft traditions grounded in organic materials—to the natural landscape destroyed by industrial production. The characters inhabit spectacular high modernist living spaces but traverse

Fracking from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Szeman Imre
Abstract: As conventional sources of oil and gas become depleted, nations have turned increasingly to “unconventional” (i. e., expensive and difficult to access) forms of ENERGY. Shale gas—natural gas trapped in the rock of black shale—has quickly become one of most important of these. The process known as hydraulic fracturing, or “fracking,” combined with an increased capacity to undertake horizontal (as opposed to vertical) drilling, has transformed a handful of countries into surprise energy superpowers in the past decade. It cannot help but appear as a cruel historical irony that these same countries launched the hydrocarbon era: instead of

Limits from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Soluri John
Abstract: When Chilean Army Captain Arturo Fuentes Rabé arrived in Tierra del Fuego on official business in 1918, he rented a car “a small, old Ford”—for a “rather steep” price (Fuentes Rabé 1923). Within a decade of the first Model T rolling off an assembly line in Detroit, automobiles had reached the southernmost part of the Americas, introducing a defining element of twentieth-century petrocultures to a place that a generation earlier had been the territory of an indigenous foraging/hunting society. Automobiles appear frequently in Fuentes Rabé’s account of his travels in Tierra del Fuego, but unlike other recent studies that

Mediashock from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Grusin Richard
Abstract: More than a decade after 9/11, the networked world remains in an acute state of “mediashock.” At the first sign of meteorological turmoil, social unrest, financial turbulence, or natural cataclysm, news media shift into 24–7 crisis mode, generating on-the-ground reports, live updates, multiple commentaries, and breaking news. CNN pioneered this mode in global cable news as far back as the 1980s, but the media’s obsession with remediating disaster and premediating shock has intensified in the twenty-first century, jump-started by the events of 9/11 but escalating since then. With the exception of regularly scheduled events like to the Olympics or

Middle East from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Cole Juan
Abstract: Moreover, carbon dioxide emissions, causing disruptive climate change, have led to increasing water shortages in the region, which are implicated in the

Rubber from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Loman Andrew
Abstract: The petroleum industry emerged alongside the late-Victorian imperial romance, a genre of FICTION in which white men have violent adventures at the Empire’s periphery before returning, usually enriched, to its core. Because petroleum exploration was global, it would not be surprising to see cross-pollination between the romance and discourses on petroleum, in the form, for instance, of adventure novels about oil explorers.¹ Yet no such subgenre of Victorian petro-romance exists.² Still, even if the major imperial romances do not make oil an explicit subject, certain well-known works are demonstrably interested in petromodernity. Edgar Rice Burroughs’s Tarzan of the Apesand

Spiritual from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Sideris Lisa
Abstract: The Bluegrass Pipeline would connect FRACKING operations in the northeast United States with chemical processing plants in the Gulf of Mexico. Natural gas liquids (NGLs) are hydrocarbons like ethane, propane, and butane that are removed from natural gas and used for a variety of purposes, often as petrochemical feedstock. NGLs may end up as plastic bags or antifreeze, tire RUBBER or lighter fluid.

Statistics from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Morrison Spencer
Abstract: Edward Burtynsky’s photograph Shipbreaking #20, an IMAGE in his collectionOil, depicts a ship demolition yard in Chittagong, Bangladesh, strewn with oil barrels and scrap metal from abandoned ships (see Figure 12). Atop one barrel crouches the photo’s sole human figure, a young Bangladeshi ship-breaker splotched with oil; before him lies oil-soaked terrain that descends into a stagnant black pond from which pipes, ladders, and wires haphazardly jut. It might seem counterintuitive to use Burtynsky’s photo to discuss statistical reasoning’s role in shaping discursive relationships between human subjects and ENERGY REGIMES, since no numbers appear in the photo. Yet by

Surveillance from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Badia Lynn
Abstract: Figure 15, produced by the International Energy Agency, maps the flow of the world’s total production and consumption of ENERGY (in various states and materials) between myriad origins and destinations. Although the diagram represents sources ranging from water to COAL, they are all converted into a single unit of measurement—the Mtoe, or millions of tons of oil equivalent. This visualization of global energy flows is just one example of how energy topologies (or energyscapes) are mapped and analyzed (Strauss, Rupp, and Love 2012; Appadurai 1990). Energy is analyzed in terms of type, source, capacity, conversion, distribution, etc., across various

Sustainability from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Medovoi Leerom
Abstract: In recent decades, the vision of a genuinely ecological economics has focused on the principle of sustainability. Capitalism, we are told, should be refashioned as a “sustainable economy” whose growth, in the words of the United Nation’s Brundtland Commission Report, “meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of FUTURE generations to meet their own needs” (Brundtland 1987). Like other liberal political ideals (e.g., democracy, freedom, tolerance), the ideological work performed by sustainability is complex and multivalent. As Joan Martinez-Alier (2009) notes, ecological economics understands the economy not as a system of exchange but rather as a metabolic

Textiles from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Robertson Kirsty
Abstract: Every day we dress in oil. At each stage in the process of making, purchasing, and discarding clothing and other textiles, oil is present as a secret companion. Petrochemicals douse the cotton fields; oil powers the complex farm machinery that has replaced hand labor in the fields; it powers the vast looms that weave cotton into fabric. Oil polymers subtend the many synthetic and natural-synthetic hybrid fabrics that make possible a waterproof, stainresistant, hard-wearing, easily replaced material existence. Underlying the vast transport systems that carry textiles and apparel across the globe is oil. At the end of their lives, as

Whaling from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Burnett D. Graham
Abstract: Animal fats have served human beings as sources of ENERGY ever since humans merited the name. Crammed in the gullet, a little marbling or caul afforded early hominids the same kilocalories that such comestibles afforded any other creature equipped to function as a carnivore. And we can assume that whenever those restless hominids mastered the runaway oxidation reaction known as fire, they likely noticed that the white bits of their roasted meat flamed up impressively. Control over these little grease fires presumably followed, in the form of TALLOW lamps and candles.

Afterword from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Szeman Imre
Abstract: The contributions to Fueling Cultureoffer ample evidence of the multiple and varied ways in which energy has figured and transfigured human life. By highlighting the key role of fossil fuels in shaping the experience and reality of the modern, these essays provide an important and much-needed corrective to our understanding of the forces that shape societies, organize geopolitics, and, perhaps most surprisingly, animate cultural and intellectual life. Unprecedented access to massive and ever-increasing amounts of cheap energy from fossil fuels—first coal, later oil and gas—is rarely identified as a constitutive element in the narrative of modernity, which

5 GRACE AND JUSTIFICATION OF THE SINNER IN PAUL from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: Let us now consider the doctrine of grace in the corpus paulinum.¹ In the face of human sinfulness and the presumptuous attitude humans often have in performing “good works,” the apostle to the Gentiles insists above all on humans’ absolute need for the grace of Christ, God’s pure gift, in order to be saved. Grace places us in a new state by means of a “new creation” in which we become children of God through the power of the Holy Spirit and are freed from sin and slavery, introduced into a new life, and moved to witness our faith before

9 “CREATED GRACE” IN THE MEDIEVAL PERIOD from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: Three aspects of Augustine’s understanding of the workings of Christian grace may be noted: the priority of divine action (what would later be designated as “uncreated grace”), the human experience of grace (Augustine speaks of the suavitas amoris), and human ethical action that derives from grace. According to Augustine, anterior divine action—grace—produces adelectatio, a pleasing spiritual inclination in the soul, and divinizes believerssuaviter et fortiter(gently and firmly), moving them through love to carry out good works. Not only that: it isgrace itselfthat carries out the divine actions in humans.

13 CHILDREN OF GOD IN THE HOLY SPIRIT: from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: Grace has God as its origin, as its only source. Grace is simply the life of God in humans. As we saw in the last chapter, grace is present at every stage of human life; it presides over a wide-ranging historical narrative composed of different stages that are, while distinct, inseparable from one another: creation, predestination in Christ, divine call, justification of the person and his gradual purification from sin, and, finally, eschatological communion with the Trinity in glory. We considered them in the previous chapter.

14 DIVINE LIFE IN HUMANS: from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: Still, scripture speaks of grace as present and active in humans using a wide variety of expressions, mainly Biblical in origin, that refer openly

19 THE HUMAN BEING: from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: So far we have spoken of the human being as a unity, that is, simply, as a person. However, when it comes to describing human nature, all scientific, philosophical, and theological anthropologies speak in a variety of different ways of the different “components” that go to make up the human being, for the most part using terms such as “soul” (or “spirit”) and “body.” More recently it has become common to speak of the “mind” or the “brain.” Humans, we are told, are composed of two fundamental elements or aspects, more or less linked with one another, the body and

24 HUMANS, MADE IN THE IMAGE OF GOD, AT WORK IN THE WORLD from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: Labor is the greatest reality of human life in this world, it is a primary reality.… In labor there is both a truth of redemption (“in the sweat of your face shall you gain your bread”) and a truth of the creative and constructive power of men. Both elements are present in labor. Human labor humanizes nature; it bears witness to the great mission of man in nature. But sin and evil have perverted the mission of labor. A reverse process has taken place in the dehumanization of labor, an alienation

LES CONCEPTS DE TEXTES, GENRES, DISCOURS POUR L’ANALYSE TEXTUELLE DES DISCOURS from: Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Adam Jean-Michel
Abstract: J’ai mis les trois concepts qui sont au centre du colloque au pluriel – TEXTES, GENRES et DISCOURS – dans le but de signifier que je me méfie de tout ce qui pourrait apparaître comme une essentialisation DU Texte, DU Genre et même DU Discours. Ces réifications ont mené aux dérives du textualisme et à la cristallisation des genres littéraires en grandes catégories immuables. Je me méfie de l’idée d’une science DU discours ; le singulier dissimule les différences entre discours littéraire, discours religieux, discours philosophique, discours politique, journalistique ou publicitaire. C’est cette volonté de différencier qui m’a poussé à

EL VINO Y LAS VIANDAS DE LA MESA MEDIEVAL. from: Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Cascante Mª Jesús Salinero
Abstract: Siguiendo con nuestro estudio sobre «Vino y Literatura», hemos querido en esta ocasión ampliar el marco de investigación a la comida para completar la imagen de la mesa medieval. Este primer acercamiento lo hemos fundamentado en la mesa de dos clases sociales que aglutinan la mayor parte de la población del Occidente medieval y que remiten a mundos distintos, por no decir opuestos: la clase popular trabajadora tanto del medio urbano como del rural, es decir, el campesino, el trabajador y el artesano; y la clase rica ya sea burguesa o noble. También nos ha parecido pertinente analizar los usos

EL DISCURSO Y LA IMAGEN DEL DISCURSO EN LE ROMAN DE LA ROSE DE GUILLAUME DE LORRIS from: Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) del Pilar Mendoza Ramos Mª
Abstract: Cuando se trata de aplicar el análisis de la articulación discursiva a la literatura medieval, debe destacarse sin duda el Roman de la Rosepor estar construido sobre un discurso organizado en interacciones concéntricas². Así, en primer lugar, encontramos la interacción marco donde se identifica el autor con el personaje Amante quien, a través del texto, pretende dar cuenta de un sueño³ que tuvo cinco años atrás. Esta identificación hace que el texto constituya en su conjunto una única escena circular, determinada por su carácter retrospectivo, donde, bajo forma de monólogo directo, se pretende encerrar el Arte de Amar (vv.

LA AUTOBIOGRAFÍA EN EL MÉTODO CARTESIANO from: Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Arribas Jesús Camarero
Abstract: De todos es conocida la trascendencia capital del Discours de la méthode(1637), de René Descartes, en tanto que texto fundador de la filosofía moderna y de la corriente racionalista. En este breve tratado, construido con el objetivo de «bien conduire sa raison et chercher la vérité dans les sciences», tal como consta en el subtítulo¹, Descartes expone los principios de una nueva filosofía humanista y científica, sintetizada en lo que ya es un tópico universal, el famoso asertocogito ergo sum, comprendido como una relación entre el pensar y el existir, y tradicionalmente traducido al español como ‘pienso luego

ESCUCHAR L’ASTRÉE. from: Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Santos Tomás Gonzalo
Abstract: Cuando nos referimos a la lectura de novelas pensamos indefectiblemente, condicionados como estamos por la práctica reinante hoy día, en una lectura silenciosa y solitaria. Nos cuidaremos mucho, sin embargo, de tomarla como modalidad única de recepción del libro, en los siglos XVII y XVIII al menos. Lo cierto es que la lectura en silencio y en la intimidad constituye un logro relativamente moderno en el mundo occidental (Cavallo, Chartier, 2001: 47-48, 255-259, 482-485), y ello no significa que eclipsara por completo la recepción tal y como se entendió durante siglos, es decir, de viva voz (Manguel, 1998: 135-151). Tanto

EL GÉNERO DEL CUENTO EN LA SEGUNDA MITAD DEL SIGLO XVIII: from: Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) de Vicente-Yagüe Jara Antonio José
Abstract: La literatura, en el Siglo de las Luces, es a la vez reflejo del individuo y de la sociedad, así como un instrumento para reformarlos a ambos. El cuento, como género literario, conoció en esta época de pleno moralismo lagrimoso (Martin, 1981: 8) un momento de esplendor. Esta vitalidad no se mide únicamente por referencias cuantitativas, sino más bien por criterios cualitativos. Incluso los escritores más importantes, desde Montesquieu hasta Voltaire, Rousseau y Diderot, no hacían ascos a este género. El prestigio del cuento se mide quizá también por el número de ilustres personajes reales que lo cultivaron: Federico de

LA SALOMÉ DE CLAUDE CAHUN from: Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Cucala Cristina Ballestín
Abstract: El breve episodio recogido en el evangelio de San Mateo¹ cuenta cómo la relación de Herodías con Herodes, hermano de su marido Filipo, provoca la captura de Juan, que insiste en denunciar la ilegitimidad de tal unión y su fatal destino. Si Herodes, el Tetrarca, se muestra cauto al retrasar la muerte del apresado por temor a su pueblo ( Mt14, 3-5)², durante las celebraciones de su onomástica no escuchará sino las voces de su deseo hacia la hija de su nueva mujer: «Mas llegado el cumpleaños de Herodes, la hija de Herodías danzó en medio de todos gustando tanto

LES LETTRES CHINOISES DE YING CHEN: from: Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Dopazo Olaya González
Abstract: La literatura migrante se ha convertido en un vástago de la literatura de los últimos años, muy especialmente en Quebec. Como indica Daniel Chartier (2002: 303), a lo largo de los dos últimos siglos más de quinientos escritores han emigrado a Quebec en circunstancias variadas, y en la actualidad el porcentaje de inmigrantes entre los escritores parece duplicar la proporción existente entre la población general¹. Cifras tan significativas marcan sin duda un periodo que se caracteriza por la diversificación. Escritores francófonos originarios de Argelia, Marruecos o Túnez se unen a los procedentes de Europa o Haití; también los hay oriundos

L’ART DE PARLER FRANÇAIS À TRAVERS LES FILMS DE DENYS ARCAND from: Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Haize Christine Verna
Abstract: L’approche du français du Canada à travers les films de Denys Arcand, nous fait prendre conscience d’une part des réalités spécifiquement canadiennes et nous permet d’observer d’autre part certaines formes lexicales, courantes au Canada, totalement inconnues en France. Dû à une position stratégique les Québécois se chargent de promouvoir leur identité culturelle et linguistique. Cette résistance à l’anglais se manifeste très clairement et nos cousins d’Amérique francisent systématiquement certaines terminaisons et traduisent sans hésiter les mots anglophones. Notre étude se penchera sur les emprunts francisés et sur les nombreux archaïsmes, sans oublier certains euphémismes, véritables fleurons d’une langue respectueuse et

L’ADAPTATION PUBLICITAIRE : from: Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Kwik Esther
Abstract: Plus que jamais, la mondialisation des marchés, la libéralisation de l’économie, la désintégration des frontières et le développement des technologies et des communications atteint d’une façon spectaculaire le domaine de la publicité. Impossible donc, de se soustraire aux exigences d’une hégémonie mercantile qui doit s’étendre à l’échelle mondiale. Au sein donc, de cette globalisation évidente et inévitable, surgit le choix d’une stratégie de marketing et de communication orientée à la standardisation et/ou à l’adaptation. La mise en place de l’une ou l’autre stratégie s’effectuera essentiellement en fonction de l’équilibre existant entre les contraintes (linguistiques, socioculturelles, légales, budgétaires, etc.) et les

AVATARES CASTELLANOS DE LA CARMAGNOLE (I) from: Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Ripoll Alberto Supiot
Abstract: Carmagniolaes una localidad situada en el Piamonte; también es el nombre de ciertas prendas: en Saboya, chaqueta de obrero, en el Dauphiné, “jaquette de cérémonie” de los campesinos, según elDictionnaire étymologiquede Oscar Bloch y Walter von Wartburg, pero igualmente, según señala Arnold Van Genepp (1932: 57), corpiño formando parte del ajuar de la novia. La relación entre una de estas prendas, una de las dos chaquetas, y el significado revolucionario la establece Ferdinand Brunot (1937, T. IX: 992 y ss.) al relatar cómo, en 1791, un delegado del Club de la rue Saint Antoine apareció vestido con

3. Preguntas peligrosas. from: La experiencia como hecho social
Author(s) Aguilar Luis Manuel Hernández
Abstract: ¿Qué es ser totonaco? ¿Qué significa ser totonaco? ¿Qué es la identidad totonaca? Son sin duda cuestionamientos problemáticos desde su planteamiento; sin embargo, en algunos contextos son también preguntas indispensables. De lo anterior se desprenden las siguientes interrogantes: ¿Cómo poder enunciar dichos cuestionamientos en el marco de una investigación sin caer en esencialismos identitarios, representaciones folclóricas u objetivaciones con hedor a colonialismo? De la misma forma, ¿cómo traducir la respuesta a dicha pregunta en un discurso con pretensiones analíticas y explicativas, sin arrebatar y apropiarse de la voz de los sujetos, sin pretender representarlos? Estas preguntas se erigen como cuestionamientos

5. Habitar la historia: from: La experiencia como hecho social
Author(s) Duro Carlos Nazario Mora
Abstract: La construcción de monumentos es un elemento central en los sucesos conmemorativos. De hecho, se puede decir con seguridad que los monumentos son el centro de la propia conmemoración, ya que en estos se proyecta la celebración de un evento “memorable” para las sociedades.¹ Merced a estos registros, no existe una memoria colectiva en bruto, es decir, sin ningún tipo de configuración monumental que reconstruya lo que acaeció en sus gestas épicas. La necesidad de materializar la experiencia histórica propicia la configuración de una trama, en donde se entreteje el problema del tiempo, el espacio y la percepción colectiva de

7. Regímenes de historicidad: from: La experiencia como hecho social
Author(s) Gómez Jorge Eduardo Suárez
Abstract: De acuerdo con Hegel, existían algunas sociedades sin historia. Desde su perspectiva, como lo explica Lefort, “la Historia universal no recubre el curso empírico de la humanidad. La historia propiamente dicha no nace sino con el Estado, cuando la

8 Life-Stories, Survivor Memory, and Trauma in the Irish Troubles: from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) DAWSON GRAHAM
Abstract: Since the 1994 paramilitary ceasefires, the Irish peace process has stimulated a flowering of practices of history-making, remembrance, and commemoration concerned with the legacy of the Troubles in “post-conflict” Northern Ireland.¹ Much of this work has taken the form of oral-history and life-history narrative that enables personal reflection on the significance of violent conflict in the recent past and reassessment of its impact upon individuals, families, and local areas. Such memory-work has intersected with wider public debate over, and engagement with, the question of the victims of violence, including the formation of numbers of local victims’ support groups addressing the

9 Vestiges: from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) DAWE GERALD
Abstract: “At certain periods of history,” writes the Russian poet Joseph Brodsky, “it is only poetry that is capable of dealing with reality by condensing it into something graspable, something that otherwise couldn’t be retained by the mind” (Brodsky 1986, 52). The word that sparks this essay is “retained” rather than the inherently grander claims of Brodsky’s statement, claims that one can only fully understand and relate to the traditions of Russian poetry, instead of the slightly more moderate preoccupations of contemporary poetry in English. For “retained” read “memory,” the bulwark of the individual mind, or poetic imagination, in the act

1 Imaginary Connections? from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) ARROWSMITH AIDAN
Abstract: In 2004, Clint Eastwood’s film Million Dollar Babybecame the latest in a line of Hollywood movies to present Irishness as a metaphor for home, belonging, and connectedness—all the values perceived to be missing in an early-twenty-first-century world dominated by the homogenizing force of global capitalism. Eastwood’s film is based on a short story, “Rope Burns,” by the Irish-American writer F. X. Toole, and concerns the surrogate father-daughter relationship between poverty-stricken waitress Maggie Fitzgerald (Hilary Swank) and Frankie Dunne (Clint Eastwood), a disillusioned boxing coach. Their names might indicate an ancestral link to Ireland, but their current condition is

6 The Kitsch of the Dispossessed from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) THOMPSON SPURGEON
Abstract: Since the mid–nineteenth century at least, Ireland has appeared in American culture somewhat as it does on “The Surrealist Map of the World”—larger than life and severely distorted. Most imported Irish cultural elements have, historically, been systematically mediated through mass cultural forms; that is, they have entered into American consciousness as artifacts of commodity culture. That this has been occurring for at least 150 years is clear from recent research into the tourism industry in Ireland, which has been promoting itself actively since the end of the Great Famine. Less researched, however, is what lies behind or motivates

11 “The Tone of Defiance” from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) BROWN KATIE
Abstract: Ireland, with its reputation as the “Land of Song,” is the only country in the world to have a musical instrument as its national symbol. It is thus not surprising that music is so intimately involved in the collective remembering of events in Irish history. When in the eighteenth century a decline in the numbers of Irish speakers occurred, the Irish language could no longer serve to transmit cultural memory as it once had; during this period, music became central to national expression. Charles Hamilton Teeling, a member of the United Irishmen, noted that throughout the time surrounding the 1798

13 The Eviction Photograph as Shifting Trace from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) BAYLIS GAIL
Abstract: It has been noted that “the language of memory does seem to be above all a language of images” (Kuhn 2000, 188). Susan Sontag argues that photography’s preeminence within the “language” of memory stems from the mechanics of how memory operates, in that it “freeze-frames”; its “basic unit is the single image” (2004, 19). If we accept that “there is no such thing as an authentic origin of memory, since all memory, whether preserved in image, word, or sound, is grounded in representation” (van Dijik 2004, 268), we must accept too that there is no such thing as an authentic

18 Getting the Measure of Treasure Island from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) MULDOON PAUL
Abstract: My annual foray into the Eagle Bar often took place on a frosty, mistshrouded morning. I’d long since come to associate the frost and mist with

1 Amnesia, Forgetting, and the Nation in James Joyceʹs Ulysses from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) CHENG VINCENT J.
Abstract: Let me begin on a personal note. Although I am known among my family and friends for having a good memory, I have long been aware, since childhood, of the attractions, even the desirability, of forgetting. Indeed, in my teens and twenties, I used to regularly experience what I grew to call “amnesia fantasies”: wish-fulfillment fantasies in which I imagined myself suffering from amnesia and having no idea who I was. In that condition, I could be unburdened of my own troubles and free to move on. I suspect I am not alone in having had such fantasies: after all,

4 A Bloomsday Seder from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) BENDER ABBY
Abstract: In UlyssesJames Joyce offers a glimpse of an Irish Promised Land—a “new Bloomusalem in the Nova Hibernia of the Future” (U461)—but it is clouded with the irony of foreknowledge. Joyce saw that the most immediate result of Irish independence would be, just as Leopold Bloom intimates, another type of oppression: “out of the land of Egypt and into the house of bondage” (U114). It is not surprising, then, thatUlyssesconfronts us with the apparent failure of the Irish-Israelite analogy as a narrative for Ireland; Parnell-as-Moses did not reach Canaan, and the many Moseses in

5 ʺFabled by the daughters of memoryʺ from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) SCHWARZE TRACEY
Abstract: Sir Roger Casement—Irish crusader for the rights of Congolese Africans and Putumayo Indians of the Peruvian Amazon basin, knighted for this work by the British government in 1911, and hanged by the same government for treason in August 1916 after a failed attempt to secure German arms and recruit Irish POWs to aid the Easter Rising in Ireland—is undoubtedly a figure of complex personal and political identities. Stripped of his knighthood on June 30, 1916, immediately following his conviction of high treason, Casement had enjoyed a significant career in the British consular service. His report detailing atrocities in

7 ʺNow, just wash and brush up your memoiriasʺ from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) PLATT LEN
Abstract: Joyce scholars have always been interested in situating Joyce in historical context, but only since the late 1980s has the “Joyce and History” formulation become central. In part, this turn toward “history” has been philosophical. Less concerned with Joyce as a historical subject, the American academy in the 1980s and early 1990s produced a Joyce engaged with the subject of history—that is with history as historiography. Such critics as Robert Spoo and James Fairhall, then, constructed a Joyce preoccupied with history as ideological formation, particularly in relation to the orthodoxies of late nineteenth- and early twentieth-century historiography (Fairhall 1993;

12 ʺOld Hauntsʺ from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) GIBBONS LUKE
Abstract: In his early review of A Portrait of the Artist as a Young Man, Ezra Pound noted in passing that Joyce’s work acquired an additional currency for readers in the aftermath of the Easter Rising of 1916: “If more people had readA Portraitand certain stories in Mr Joyce’sDublinersthere might have been less recent trouble in Ireland. A clear diagnosis is never without value” (Pound 1970, 83). For Pound, it is as if Joyce is writing in the prose ofcounter-insurgency, diagnosing the ills that should have been redressed to prevent revolution, but for others his writing

1 The Poet as Thinker—the Thinker as Poet from: Seamus Heaney as Aesthetic Thinker
Abstract: That this is only the second sustained study of Heaney’s prose is surprising, but it is an issue that needs to be addressed at this stage. Generally, he is seen as a poet who gives occasional lectures, writes occasional pieces, and gives interviews; he is not generally seen as an aesthetic thinker, but this point is what I will be arguing, and I think some basics facts about Heaney’s academic career will underline the relevance of my position. Seamus Heaney’s intellectual career began not so much as a poet per se, but as someone who thinks, writes, and teaches about

3 The Epistemology of Poetry: from: Seamus Heaney as Aesthetic Thinker
Abstract: In the last chapter, we looked at representations of the frontier or border and at poetry both as an epistemological crossing of that border and also as a way of engaging with, and connecting, both sides of that border, whether these sides are self and other, Irish and English identities, or conscious thought and unconscious. This sense of poetry as a genre wherein the necessity of “either/or” choices can be replaced with the more encompassing “both/and” alternative further rhizomatically connects Heaney’s thought with Derrida’s, and with other contemporary European thinking, where meaning and signification are viewed as relational as opposed

13 Climax and Denouement: from: A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: Once liberated from the concentration camp, Trocmé and Theis went about their business in Le Chambon, more aware that they were being watched, but seemingly immune to the paralysis of fear. On the Sunday after their return, the two parsons and Darcissac told the congregation their story of Saint-Paul d’Eyjeaux. The pews were full and the atmosphere was a warm one. It was clear that all three men had earned the admiration of the parishioners. Unfortunately, however, LeForestier’s assurance to Trocmé, Theis, and Darcissac that the duck would keep on walking automatically in their absence was a metaphor overtaken by

16 Versailles: from: A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: The Italian visits were, like those in Germany, a return to familiar nations and networks, and the Trocmés had a handle at least on what had happened there during the decade from 1935 to 1945. America was another story. Both Trocmés had done their graduate studies there. Both felt at ease in the United States and in the English language, but they were not nearly as familiar with what had transpired in America during the two decades since their single year as foreign students there.

2 Toward a Theory of Cultural Memory in an Irish Postcolonial Context from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) FRAWLEY OONA
Abstract: While terms like “memory,” “cultural memory,” and their variants frequently occur in the discourses of Irish literature, culture, and history, “memory” has remained largely undefined, addressed laterally. That the field of Irish studies has thus far failed adequately to define memory is hardly surprising, since those who have made memory their lifework experience similar problems. Memory, as the neuroscientist Antonio Damasio points out, is particularly elusive. “We are not conscious,” he writes, “of which memories we store and which memories we do not; of how we store memories; of how we classify and organize them; of how we interrelate memories

6 Women and the Survival of Archaeological Monuments in Nineteenth-Century Ireland from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) CHEALLAIGH MÁIRÍN NÍ
Abstract: In the 1840s, while famine and disease gnawed at the lives of large sections of Ireland’s poor, Irish antiquarians increasingly turned their attention to the study of prehistoric and other archaeological remains. Inspired by the visit of the Danish antiquarian Worsaae and his account of the development of the chronological framework known as the “Three Age System” (Worsaae 1845–7, 312–14), members of learned societies and students of the past visited and described a variety of mounds and megalithic constructions. They may also, consciously or unconsciously, have been mirroring Worsaae’s observation that “It was immediately after great national calamities,

9 Embodying the Memory of War and Civil War from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) DOLAN ANNE
Abstract: With reference to your letter dated 2nd July re the burial of your son Lieutenant Guthrie [ sic] and particulars of how he died. Lieutenant Guthrie was the only man of his party who escaped from the scene of the ambush and was uninjured. He seemed to bear a charmed life. He had to retreat through an open country on foot under the full concentrated fire of the opposing party. He got within

10 De Valera’s Historical Memory from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) DALY MARY E.
Abstract: Eamon de Valera is the most important political figure of twentiethcentury Ireland. His political career is unprecedented in terms of a longevity unlikely to be exceeded by any future Irish politician. The only surviving commandant in the Easter Rising of 1916, he was still active in public life as president when Ireland celebrated the Golden Jubilee of the Rising in 1966 and the fiftieth anniversary of the founding of Dáil Éireann in 1969. His personal papers, now held in University College Dublin Archives,¹ testify to an abiding interest in history. His correspondence is peppered with letters from fellow-veterans of the

11 Coming Clean? from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) PINE EMILIE
Abstract: On 11 May 1999 the Irish taoiseach, Bertie Ahern, convened a press conference at which he delivered a public apology to the children who had been abused while in the care of the state: “On behalf of the State and of all the citizens of the State, the Government wishes to make a sincere and long overdue apology to the victims of childhood abuse for our collective failure to intervene, to detect their pain, to come to their rescue.” Although the family is enshrined in the Irish constitution as “a moral institution possessing inalienable and imprescriptible rights” which the state

12 Producing Memory from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) MAPLES HOLLY
Abstract: Radical changes to Irish society at the end of the nineteenth and beginning of the twentieth centuries helped shape notions of Irishness in the century to come. The emergence of the Celtic Revival at the end of the nineteenth century encouraged the foundation of numerous community-led societies such as the Gaelic League and the Gaelic Athletics Association, while the early twentieth century witnessed major events of political and social upheaval such as the First World War, the Easter Rising, the founding of the Republic, and the subsequent Irish Civil War. One hundred years on, the Irish Republic has experienced equally

13 Remembering to Forget from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) CREGAN DAVID
Abstract: Mainstream public memory is traditionally understood as an intentional recollection of quantifiable facts of the historical past that then constitute collective identity. Because of its suppressed nature, queer memory is flimsier: while mainstream public memory is solidly supported institutionally by politics and history, queer memory is more symbolic, derived from what is implied by exclusion rather than inclusion. By uncovering previously hidden gay and lesbian experiences, queer historians have initiated a type of cultural rebellion, juxtaposing queer memory with hetero-normative histories. The production of this alternative history has evoked a renewed engagement with memory because more traditional methodological approaches to

Book Title: Placing Aesthetics-Reflections on the Philosophic Tradition
Publisher: Ohio University Press
Author(s): Wood Robert E.
Abstract: Examining select high points in the speculative tradition from Plato and Aristotle through the Middle Ages and German tradition to Dewey and Heidegger, Placing Aestheticsseeks to locate the aesthetic concern within the larger framework of each thinker's philosophy.In Professor Robert Wood's study, aesthetics is not peripheral but rather central to the speculative tradition and to human existence as such. In Dewey's terms, aesthetics is "experience in its integrity." Its personal ground is in "the heart," which is the dispositional ground formed by genetic, cultural , and personal historical factors by which we are spontaneously moved and, in turn, are inclined to move, both practically and theoretically, in certain directions.Prepared for use by the student as well as the philosopher,Placing Aestheticsaims to recover the fullness of humanness within a sense of the fullness of encompassing Being. It attempts to overcome the splitting of thought, even in philosophy, into exclusive specializations and the fracturing of life itself into theoretical, practical, and emotive dimensions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j7x66b

II PLATO from: Placing Aesthetics
Abstract: In my treatment of Plato, the first of the great philosophers to address matters aesthetic, I begin to flesh out more fully the framework considerations I have offered in the previous chapter by an interpretation that builds a whole world of meaning, encompassing every aspect of human existence. There is a sense in which one might say that Plato’s philosophy is essentially an aesthetic. Beauty plays a central role in his thought, though he has some harsh things to say about its appearance in art. However, in spite of the latter, his own works exhibit an artistry unmatched in the

V KANT from: Placing Aesthetics
Abstract: Once on immanuel kant’s tombstone stood the words, “The starry skies above, the moral law within.”¹ They are taken from the closing paragraphs of his Critique of Practical Reason, the second work in his critical project. The beginning of the quotation reads: “Two things fill the heart with ever new and increasing admiration and awe[Bewunderung und Ehrfurcht]….”² The starry skies above are the object and model for mechanistic science. In Newtonian mechanics the laws that govern the stars govern all terrestrial motions as well. It was such knowing that furnished the exemplar of knowing analyzed in the first part

VII SCHOPENHAUER from: Placing Aesthetics
Abstract: One way of looking at Arthur Schopenhauer’s thought is to view it as a synthesis between Kant and Plato (together with Plotinus) on the one hand and the Indian tradition on the other. Schopenhauer’s early work On the Fourfold Root of the Principle of Sufficient Reasonwas straight Kantian analysis.¹ Recall in Kant the three levels of form, which function as filters or glasses through which the world of appearance is constituted. The first level is that of the forms of sensibility—space and time—which furnish the encompassing frame of all appearance; the second, the level of the categories

XI CONCLUSION from: Placing Aesthetics
Abstract: In conclusion, let me summarize, clarify, and extend my leading contentions, focusing discussion on the interrelation of form and what I am calling the aesthetic center.¹ In so doing, I will rehearse the primary evidences on which I have rested throughout. I have been developing a series of related theses: first, that human nature is culture creating, condemned by its nature to giving form, to shaping by choice, in itself and its offspring, the potential chaos that ontological openness sets on an animal base; second, that the region aesthetics addresses is the heart as the developed center between intellect, will,

CHAPTER 3 THE PHILOSOPHICAL ETHICS OF TOTALITY AND INFINITY from: Prophetic Politics
Abstract: Throughout my interpretation of Levinas I have been opposing the interpretation that takes his thought to be a moral philosophy. Such a reading is ubiquitous in the literature. The I is a subject, under this view, enjoying itself selfishly until it meets another person, the “other” who breaks into my closed realm, decenters me, but also gives me a new (moral) identity deeper and more fulfilling than before. As Silvia Benso writes, “To renounce one’s own ontological power as an ego means to receive back the ethical power of the Me.”¹ Robert Gibbs puts it: “I become myself—I become

CHAPTER 4 THE TURNING POINT: from: Prophetic Politics
Abstract: In his discussion of “the move” to the third party and justice, Simon Critchley describes an interpretation of Levinas that would argue in the following way: “ ifI inhabited an angelic I-Thou relation without a relation to others—ethics without politics—then there would be no problem and no question of raising a question.”¹ It is an interpretation that errs, Critchley points out, since the third party is already there. However, it errs for a deeper reason: the relation to the other alone, a saying without the said, is in no way “angelic.” The saying is horrible, frightful, and under

CHAPTER 6 THE POLITICAL REVERSAL OF SUBSTITUTION from: Prophetic Politics
Abstract: Emmanuel Levinas is typically thought of as an ethical thinker, with his thought involving a tension between “ethics” and “politics.”¹ Certainly Levinas’s formulations seem to lend themselves to be thought in this way, as he speaks of an infinite responsibility for the other person that goes beyond all politics and all power systems, the latter arising only with the interruption of this face-to-face relationship by the “third,” which would delimit this responsibility and even betray it.² I have been arguing that Levinas has never been an ethicist in the traditional sense. Levinas says as much: “What guides our research, which

Book Title: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries-Volume 9 of Religion & Society
Publisher: Berkshire Publishing Group LLC
Author(s): Bonk Jonathan J.
Abstract: The Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries is the ninth and final volume of the acclaimed Religion and Society series, focusing on the historical impact of missions over the centuries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1jd94tp

Introduction from: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Author(s) Bonk Jonathan J.
Abstract: Any single volume purporting to be encyclopedic requires an explanation, or at least an excuse. The idea for the Encyclopedia of Mission and Missionaries—to take its place among already published volumes in Routledge’s Religion and Society series of encyclopedias—was spelled out to me by David Levinson in a letter dated 30 August 2004, excerpted below:

F from: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: Many Evangelical Protestant missions, including many of the largest and most influential, have their roots in the faith-mission tradition. Examples of such missions include the China Inland Mission (now the Overseas Missionary Fellowship), Africa Inland Mission, Christian and Missionary Alliance, Wycliffe Bible Translators, and New Tribes. The founding principle, which remained the most distinctive characteristic of faith missions, was that they permitted no overt fundraising but relied on quiet faith in God to meet financial needs.

G from: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: The largest organized women’s movement in North America in the early twentieth century was the women’s missionary movement, whose expansive involvement reached across the globe into Asia, Africa, Latin America, and the Middle East. Women missionaries constituted an indispensable workforce in the foreign missionary enterprise, representing almost 60 percent of the entire mission personnel by 1890. Despite the significant role of women in the foreign missionary enterprise, it is only since the 1980s have women missionaries and their subjects of conversion begun to draw scholarly attention. Since then, much research has shown that, although women were precluded from clerical rights

L from: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: In 1493 Christopher Columbus made his second voyage to America. Included with his colonists were members of religious orders, but only three of these attempted to evangelize the native population. They were lay brothers Ramón Pané, a Jeronymite who in 1498 wrote a short account of his mission work, and Juan Deledeule and Juan Tisin, both Franciscans about

M from: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: A martyr is defined as “one who voluntarily suffers death as the penalty of witness to and refusing to renounce his religion” ( Webster’s Third New International Dictionary of the English Language). For purposes of quantification, Christian martyrs are “believers in Christ who have lost their lives prematurely, in situations of witness, as a result of human hostility.” This definition can be expounded as follows: “Believers in Christ” are individuals from the entire Christian community of Roman Catholics, Orthodox, Protestants, Anglicans, Marginal Christians, and Independents. “‘Lost their lives” restricts it to Christians actually put to death, for whatever reason. “Prematurely” means

Book Title: Love and Christian Ethics-Tradition, Theory, and Society
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Sorrells Brian C.
Abstract: At the heart of Christian ethics is the biblical commandment to love God and to love one's neighbor as oneself. But what is the meaning of love? Scholars have wrestled with this question since the recording of the Christian gospels, and in recent decades teachers and students of Christian ethics have engaged in vigorous debates about appropriate interpretations and implications of this critical norm.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1jktq08

Introduction: from: Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) SIMMONS FREDERICK V.
Abstract: Love is often extolled as the source, substance, standard, and goal of Christian ethics. Yet a perception that love has seldom been its subject is also prevalent. Anders Nygren began Agape and Erosby juxtaposing love’s centrality and neglect within contemporary Christian ethics, and love’s prominence in Christian moral and theological reflection since he made these claims in 1930 is one indication of his study’s significance.¹ It is hardly the volume’s only opposition. Indeed, although Nygren categorized his inquiry into love as “motif-research” and thus disclaimed any evaluative intent, his assurance that “Agape and Eros are contrasted with one another

2 Conceptions of Love, Greek and Christian from: Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) IRWIN TERENCE
Abstract: My task is to discuss Christian love with special reference to one part of the tradition from which it develops—Plato and Aristotle. I will pursue this task by discussing a controversy about love within Christian thought. Even a sketch of this controversy will help us to appreciate more justly the role of Platonic and Aristotelian views in the formation of Christian views about love.

13 Evolution, Agape, and the Image of God: from: Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) JACKSON TIMOTHY P.
Abstract: In chapter 4 of On the Origin of Species, Charles Darwin briefly discusses why birds sing. It is often, he notes, a function of “the severest rivalry between the males of many species to attract by singing the females.”¹ A particularly strong or melodious song will contribute to reproductive success both by inducing females to mate and by announcing territoriality to other males. Darwin was unaware of modern genetics, but neo-Darwinians would say that a strikingly robust or appealing song makes it more likely that the male will be able to get his genes into the next generation and, over

17 Meditations on Love and Violence from: Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) TOWNES EMILIE M.
Abstract: I was initially somewhat amused at the invitation to participate in this volume because the key ethical and moral category I deal with in my work and teaching is justice, not love. However, when I hit the global “find” button on the computer to see how I reflect on love, I discovered that it is always twined with justice. This is not surprising given that love and justice are extremely natural if not necessary dance partners. They inform each other and enrich our ethical reflection as moral, believing animals in a vast creation.¹ Justice is the corporate or communal expression

18 Loving Nature: from: Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) ROLSTON HOLMES
Abstract: Love is so central to life that the single English word “love” opens up to become an umbrella. Love is not some distinct behavior with clearly recognized content and boundaries but a varied collection of many kinds of emotions that have in common only some relationship with a quite positive quality. Loves may be self-regarding, mate- and kin-regarding, other-regarding, genetically based, instinctive or acquired during a lifetime, conscious or subconscious, deliberated or spontaneous, proximate or ultimate, intrinsic or instrumental. They may be in-group or out-group, local or global, trans-generational, transformed by experience of the natural world or by cultural and

Book Title: The Intimate. Polity and the Catholic Church-Laws about Life, Death and the Family in So-called Catholic Countries
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): PÉREZ-AGOTE ALFONSO
Abstract: The waning influence of the Catholic church in the ethical and political debate. For centuries the Catholic Church was able to impose her ethical rules in matters related to the intimate, that is, questions concerning life (from its beginning until its end) and the family, in the so-called Catholic countries in Western Europe. When the polity started to introduce legislation that was in opposition to the Catholic ethic, the ecclesiastical authorities and part of the population reacted. The media reported massive manifestations in France against same-sex marriages and in Spain against the de-penalization of abortion. In Italy the Episcopal conference entered the political field in opposition to the relaxation of several restrictive legal rules concerning medically assisted procreation and exhorted the voters to abstain from voting so that the referendum did not obtain the necessary quorum. In Portugal, to the contrary, the Church made a “pact" with the prime minister so that the law on same-sex marriages did not include the possibility of adoption. And in Belgium the Episcopal conference limited its actions to clearly expressing with religious, legal, and anthropological arguments its opposition to such laws, which all other Episcopal conferences did also. In this book, the authors analyse the full spectrum of the issue, including the emergence of such laws; the political discussions; the standpoints defended in the media by professionals, ethicists, and politicians; the votes in the parliaments; the political interventions of the Episcopal conferences; and the attitude of professionals. As a result the reader understands what was at stake and the differences in actions of the various Episcopal conferences. The authors also analyse the pro and con evaluations among the civil population of such actions by the Church. Finally, in a comparative synthesis, they discuss the public positions taken by Pope Francis to evaluate if a change in Church policy might be possible in the near future. Research by GERICR (Groupe européen de recherche interdisciplinaire sur le changement religieux), a European interdisciplinary research group studying religious changes coordinated by Alfonso Pérez-Agote. Contributors Céline Béraud (Université de Caen), Karel Dobbelaere (KU Leuven/University of Antwerp), Annalisa Frisina (Università degli Studi di Padova), Franco Garelli (Università degli Studi di Torino), Antonio Montañés (Universidad Complutense de Madrid), Maria João Oliveira (University of Porto), Enzo Pace (Università degli Studi di Padova), Alfonso Pérez-Agote (University Complutense of Madrid), Philippe Portier (École pratique des hautes études, Paris-Sorbonne), Jose Santiago (Universidad Complutense de Madrid), Roberto Francesco Scalon (Università degli Studi di Torino), Helena Vilaça (University of Porto), Liliane Voyé (Université Catholique de Louvain)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1jkts6b

EUTHANASIA AND THE BELGIAN CATHOLIC WORLD from: The Intimate. Polity and the Catholic Church
Author(s) DOBBELAERE KAREL
Abstract: In the ethical domain, Belgium has been one of the first Western European countries to introduce new legislation clashing head on with the prescriptions of the Catholic Church in these matters. In 1990, a law was passed de-penalizing abortion, in 2002 a law authorizing euthanasia and, in 2003, one legalizing samesex marriages. Although the law authorizing euthanasia, under different restrictive conditions, had existed for more than ten years, we nevertheless selected this theme to illustrate the topicality of the ethical problems since euthanasia came very definitely to the fore again recently as a result of two distinct events which stimulated

“MARIAGE POUR TOUS” from: The Intimate. Polity and the Catholic Church
Author(s) PORTIER PHILIPPE
Abstract: Making marriage open to same-sex couples is one of the “new public issues”¹ that are controversial. In France, the passing of the marriage for everyone act gave rise to the expression of and confrontation between very divergent views. Among the opponents of the bill, the Catholics appeared as key players. From August 2012 onwards, some bishops aimed at acting as “whistleblowers”.² In the months that followed, up to the adoption of the bill by the French parliament and even beyond, some Catholics conducted a moral re-armament campaign against le mariage pour tous(marriage for everyone), with the aim of challenging

THE CATHOLIC CHURCH FACES ETHICAL CHALLENGES IN SPAIN from: The Intimate. Polity and the Catholic Church
Author(s) MONTAÑÉS ANTONIO
Abstract: In the last quarter of the twentieth century, Spain has seen the historical confluence of two social processes which are highly significant for analysing the position of the Spanish Church, and essentially of its hierarchy, when confronted with the ethical challenges which have a ultimately motivated its current resurgence in the public sphere. On the one hand, in various European countries – and also outside Europe – scientific and technological advances in the sphere of human biology have sparked a series of public debates. The regulation of these issues by the national political systems in the countries included in this study – and

COMPARATIVE SYNTHESIS from: The Intimate. Polity and the Catholic Church
Author(s) BÉRAUD CÉLINE
Abstract: The management of death, the regulation of pregnancy termination and medically assisted procreation and the institutionalization of same-sex couples and same-sex parenting: in the different European countries that we have studied, the public authorities are preoccupied by such issues which relate to questions concerning life (from its beginning until its end), sexuality and gender. As per Michel Foucault¹, new bio politics are being developed, a new “government of bodies” (according to Didier Fassin and Dominique Memmi²). This usually concerns women’s bodies, regardless whether it is abortion, medically assisted reproduction – as Frisina writes in the chapter on Italy – or same-sex marriage.³

Le studio d’enregistrement comme laboratoire du son from: Sémiotique et vécu musical
Author(s) Deveney Guillaume
Abstract: Dans le cadre des productions de musiques actuelles, le studio d’enregistrement est un lieu d’un intérêt capital dans l’élaboration du projet artistique. Comme le fait remarquer Simon Frith dans la citation d’introduction, il est un espace de coopération, de coaction entre différents acteurs de la réalisation, qu’ils soient interprètes, compositeurs, arrangeurs ou encore ingénieurs du son. Il s’agit du creuset où les perspectives de ces acteurs se rencontrent pour élaborer un produit sonore singulier. C’est à cet endroit que l’oeuvre trouve sa mise en matière sonore(Deveney, 2014) avant sa présentation à un public. L’importance de la coopération des acteurs

Angélica Liddell ou un théâtre sur le fil grinçant du rasoir from: Sémiotique et vécu musical
Author(s) Reck Isabelle
Abstract: Angélica est une artiste complète : auteure, actrice, performeuse et metteur en scène de ses propres pièces écrites pour la compagnie Atra Bilisqu’elle crée en 1993 avec Gumersindo Puche. Touche-à-tout de l’écriture, on lui doit une quinzaine de pièces, des poèmes, des textes de théorisation (articles, introductions de ses pièces, digressions théoriques glissées dans ses textes dramatiques). Après un parcours essentiellement limité aux petites salles alternatives de Madrid dans les années quatre-vingt-dix, la consécration arrive d’abord en 2007 lorsquePerro muerto en tintorería. Los fuerteest montée au Centro Dramático Nacional par Gerardo Vera, puis en 2010 avecEl

2. LA “UTOPÍA DÉBIL”: from: El amor es el límite. Reflexiones sobre el cristianismo hermenéutico de G. Vattimo y sus consecuencias teológico-políticas
Abstract: Hoy me atrevo, al hilo de la filosofía debolista de Gianni Vattimo, y las hermosas y proféticas palabras de S. Pablo a los corintios “sin amor nada soy” (1 Cor 13,2), y “si no tengo amor, nada me sirve” (1 Cor 13,3),

4. CONFLUENCIAS KENÓTICO-DEBOLISTAS CON LA TEOLOGÍA DE LA LIBERACIÓN from: El amor es el límite. Reflexiones sobre el cristianismo hermenéutico de G. Vattimo y sus consecuencias teológico-políticas
Abstract: Al hilo de este compleja cuestión que plantea Vattimo con el debolismo kenóticocaritativo, desde su profundo conocimiento teológico y filosófico y, a pesar de considerarse más habermasiano que vattimiano, J. A. Estrada apoya la idea base de la kénosis, observando que la salvación no está referida simplemente al más allá, sino que se traduce en el más acá de la historia. Genera un proyecto de vida con sentido, sólo posible a partir de Jesús, como sugiere a lo largo de su libro De la salvación a un proyecto de sentido. Por una cristología actual.

6. CONCLUSIONES from: El amor es el límite. Reflexiones sobre el cristianismo hermenéutico de G. Vattimo y sus consecuencias teológico-políticas
Abstract: Dicen los abuelos guaranís que “palabra” y “alma” se dicen de la misma manera. “Ñe, ë” significa “palabra” y a la vez “alma”. Esa ha sido mi intención: mostrar mi palabra… abrir el alma, pues igual que un cuerpo sin

Book Title: Translatio y Cultura- Publisher: Dykinson
Author(s): Silván Alfonso
Abstract: El presente volumen Translatio y Cultura forma parte de un ambicioso proyecto de investigación, Translatio, promovido por los responsables de la facultad de Lingüística Aplicada de la Universidad de Varsovia. Se trata, tomando un concepto muy amplio y poliédrico de traducción, de afrontar sucesivamente aspectos relevantes de su posibilidad múltiple y miscelánea. El diseño viene también a recuperar así un modo convincente de la tradicional miscelánea filológica dentro de los límites de un cierto monografismo liberalmente abierta a las inclinaciones y actividades diversas de los estudiosos. Esto, que define una metodología como actuación, también constituye un modo de encuesta y representación de la que hay y es imprescindible sondear y tomar en cuenta. El fenómeno de la traducción es, sin duda, clave portentosa de la cultura y la humanidad pues encierra la entidad y el saber mistérico de los esencial al ser humano que es el lenguaje, a lo cual se añade de prodigio traslaticio de su asimilación, intromisión multiplicadora o sobreposición entre las diversas manifestaciones concretas del mismo, las lenguas naturales, próximas y lejanas... El hecho es que la cuestión del ser del lenguaje se halla ahí comprometida, al igual que en consecuencia la cuestión bíblica o religiosa, la cuestión artística y literaria, la cuestión filológica como tantas otras pero que en ningún momento han de hacer olvidar a esas esenciales. Sea como fuere, el concepto de Cultura así lo exige.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1k2325f

6. Las trasformaciones del héroe: from: Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Rodríguez Alfonso Silván
Abstract: Al hablar de picaresca o de pícaro en literatura hay razones históricas que llevan pensar en primera instancia en las novelas clásicas españolas de los siglos XVI y XVII con sus principales personajes. La crítica literaria no obstante hace ya tiempo que ha flexibilizado las exigencias del género, sin renunciar al rigor de análisis. El concepto más amplio de narrativa picaresca ha merecido crédito y su estudio se ha enfocado desde algunas perspectivas más abarcadoras, que no descartan las relaciones entre los géneros tradicionales, como puede ser la teoría de los modos básicos (Scholes 1969; Wicks 1974, 1989: 35-51), susceptibles

7. Un gran paradigma filológico de presencia/ausencia traductográfica: from: Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Kuznetsova Natalia Timoshenko
Abstract: La obra de Veselovski, uno de los monumentos mayores de la filología del siglo XIX, proyectó importantes ideaciones filológicas desarrolladas en el XX, entre otros por los formalistas rusos¹, por Bajtín y Lotman, a través de los cuales ha influido de algún modo en el pensamiento filológico occidental. Sin embargo, la obra de Veselovski es escasamente conocida en Europa y apenas citada sino de forma indirecta. El hecho, por otra parte, consiste en que la limitadísima presencia de la traducción de la obra de Veselovski, en un continente que en general ni lee ni accede a los textos en lengua

10. Traducir el balneario: from: Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Lozano Carlos Sánchez
Abstract: Voy a tratar de ciertas palabras muy relevantes vinculadas a la hidroterapia y el problema traductográfico que revelan. Ciertamente el término ‘SPA’ es aquel que actualmente se presenta con mayor frecuencia y complejidad léxica al tiempo que describe un fenómeno extraordinariamente singular tanto en sentido lingüístico como finalmente traductológico. La era del turismo representa un nuevo y tercer gran universo tras el mundo termal creado por la cultura romana, evolucionado en la generalidad europea a partir de las prácticas balnearias, desarrolladas en establecimientos y complejos urbanísticos situados en torno a las fuentes mineromedicinales, y en determinados espacios del litoral, como

12. Sienkiewicz en España o cómo los factores extratextuales influyen en la forma de la traducción y en la recepción de una obra en la cultura meta from: Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Zaboklicka Bozena
Abstract: Henryk Sienkiewicz es el escritor polaco más traducido y publicado en España de todos los tiempos, aunque probablemente la profusión de las traducciones de sus obras no ha ido a la par que la calidad de las mismas. Hasta ahora, solo de Quo vadis?hemos podido contabilizar ciento treinta ediciones españolas, sin contar las reediciones y reimpresiones. En dichas ediciones se utilizaron treinta traducciones diferentes (sin contar las anónimas), de las cuales, al parecer, solo tres son traducciones directas del polaco, dos al castellano y una al catalán. Aparte de las traducciones (aunque en la mayoría de los casos más

19. Traducciones y recensiones de un texto inestable: from: Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Monferrer Luis Pomer
Abstract: La Historia Alexandri Magni, más conocida comoPseudo Calístenespor haber sido falsamente atribuida por algunos manuscritos al sobrino de Aristóteles, es un buen ejemplo de un texto abierto, de difícil establecimiento, que no ha llegado a través de una única versión, sino que puede reconstruirse a través de diversas recensiones y con la ayuda de posteriores y numerosas traducciones: “La novela del Pseudo-Calístenes, frente a la gran mayoría de otros textos de la Antigüedad, que pueden llamarse muertos, en el sentido de que han sido transcritos con suma fidelidad, es lo que podríamos llamar un texto vivo, es decir,

43. Spellmaker or The Witcher? from: Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Salich Hanna
Abstract: The short story entitled Wiedźmin(known to English readers asThe Witcherand/orSpellmaker) is one of the most important fantasy narratives in Poland. The short story first appeared in December 1986 issue ofFantastykamagazine; since then it has been published in numerous short story collections,Ostatnie źyczenie(The Last Wish) being one of them.Wiedźminopens this collection and the whole cycle of literary works about the adventures of a witcher.

45. POLITENESS AND VALUES IN POLISH, DUTCH AND FLEMISH FINANCIAL DIRECT MAIL LETTERS from: Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Waterlot Muriel
Abstract: In her book Cross-cultural Pragmatics(1991) Anna Wierzbicka claims that values affect the system of speech acts. She demonstrates this on the basis of a comparative study between English and Polish requests. Using a series of examples she shows that the interaction between an Englishman and a Pole does not always go smoothly, because of the fact that differences in the formulation and interpretation of requests can lead to misunderstandings. According to Wierzbicka, two cultural values held by Poles seem to motivate certain lexico-syntactic phenomena in this type of speech acts namely cordiality and courtesy.

46. „Schwache“ und „starke“ Intertextualität als Übersetzungsproblem from: Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Majkiewicz Anna
Abstract: Die vorangestellten Worte von Julia Kristeva, die im Jahre 1967 den Begriff der Intertextualität, den sie aus Bachtins Betrachtungen über die Dialogizität des literarischen Textes abgeleitet hatte, in die Literaturwissenschaft einführte, sind als universelles Prinzip der Textkonstitution zu verstehen. Die poststrukturalistischen Theorien legten damit einen weiten Textbegriff zugrunde und sahen jeden Text als intertextuell konstituiert an. Doch dieses Modell findet wenig Anwendung im translatorischen Umfeld (der literarischen Übersetzung), da es keine Ansatzpunkte bzw. Interpretationsmodelle für den literarischen Übersetzer bietet, für den die Analyse und Interpretation des jeweiligen literarischen Textes ein unabdingbares Element des Übersetzungsprozesses bildet. Die Aussage, dass die intertextuellen

DEFINICIÓN (ILIMITADA) Y LÍMITES (INDEFINIDOS) DEL DERECHO from: Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del Derecho II
Author(s) Ochoa Luis Bueno
Abstract: Referirse a una definición desprovista de límites, esto es, ilimitada, y, al propio tiempo, a unos límites que tampoco tienen fin, de ahí el calificativo de indefinidos, es quedar emponzoñado, como si de un espectáculo circense se tratara, en el «más difícil todavía»; aunque tal vez sería mejor decir que se trataría, sin más ni más, de algo imposible. De una suerte de ejercicio imposible que más tendría que ver, decididamente, con la «cuadratura del círculo» .

EL DERECHO COMO ESTRUCTURA ABIERTA, INTERACTIVA Y RETICULAR from: Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del Derecho II
Author(s) Ochoa Luis Bueno
Abstract: Definir o delimitar, es decir, señalar los confines o poner límites, es una tarea útil por lo que conlleva, por lo que da de sí -o puede dar de sí-, sin embargo, propala, en general, por no decir siempre, insatisfacción (léase displacer, de acuerdo con la poética afirmación heideggeriana del encabezamiento). Una insatisfacción sana, maticemos, por chocante que resulte, tal como tendremos oportunidad de comprobar en el tramo final de esta exposición.

DEFINICIÓN ETIMOLÓGICA E ICONOGRÁFICA DE DERECHO from: Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del Derecho II
Author(s) Adsuara Borja
Abstract: a). En primer lugar, el estudio etimológico de un término es relevante y revelador, porque las palabras no son meros “golpes de voz”, como dirían los nominalistas, sino verdaderos conceptos, con sus reglas de construcción y su

EL CONCEPTO DEL DERECHO from: Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del Derecho II
Author(s) Ordóñez Carmen Dolores Baeza
Abstract: No pueden serlo porque, como bien dice LEGAZ, la palabra Derecho no se refiere de forma unívoca a un concepto, sino de forma equívoca a muchos, dispares aunque relacionados. Con esa palabra, en el ámbito

DIALÉCTICA Y ADAPTACIÓN A LAS CIRCUNSTANCIAS EN LA NOCIÓN DE DERECHO from: Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del Derecho II
Author(s) Guerrero Pedro Francisco Gago
Abstract: 1. Durante las sesiones del Seminario de Filosofía del Derecho de esta Academia, se han propuesto diversas definiciones, todas ellas muy bien fundamentadas y, en general, compatibles. Volvió a demostrarse que la noción de Derecho no es unívoca y que hay que distinguir entre el seryel deber serdel Derecho, oel derecho de... yel derecho a... Posiblemente lo que más diferenciará a los estudiosos de la noción de Derecho, será discernir acerca de la esencialidad y ontologización. La noción de Derecho no sólo es ambigua y contradictoria, sino que si fuera específica, esto es, que

EL PAPEL DE LOS PRINCIPIOS EN LA TEORÍA DEL DERECHO DE RONALD DWORKIN from: Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del Derecho II
Author(s) Fontanillo José Antonio Pinto
Abstract: “El filósofo del derecho más importante de su generación” al decir de Richard Revesz decano de la NYU Law School y el segundo autor norteamericano del siglo XX más citado en el campo del Derecho según The Journal of Legal Studies,Ronald Myles Dworkin (Worcester, Estados Unidos, 11 de diciembre de 1931; Londresl4 de febrero de 2013) ha dejado sin duda una importante estela de su paso por el universo jurídico. Ya sea en el ámbito académico: Harvard, Yale, Oxford, London (University College) y Nueva York, ya sea en las tribunas de opinión de actualidad (especialmente desde su atalaya del

LEGITIMACIÓN Y LÍMITES DEL IUS PUNIENDI from: Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del Derecho II
Author(s) García Fernando Santa Cecilia
Abstract: Hace algún tiempo, coincidiendo con la entrada en vigor del denominado “Plan Bolonia”, en reunión de Departamento, manifesté mi preocupación y dificultad para explicar la asignatura, por la falta de tiempo, que suponen los nuevos Planes de estudio, ajustados al Espacio Europeo de Educación Superior. Se trata de dar a conocer, siquiera esquemáticamente, la introducción al Derecho Penal, sus principios, categorías dogmáticas fundamentales y, ello sin entrar en el proceso histórico de codificación, estructura y criterios que informan el vigente Código Penal, reformas respectivas y al menos dar cuenta de las leyes penales especiales. Pensaba que si en un curso

LA RESOCIALIZACIÓN DEL DELINCUENTE: from: Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del Derecho II
Author(s) de Molina Antonio García Pablos
Abstract: Para empezar, y con buen criterio, el Tribunal Constitucional español ha precisado que la « reeducación » del penado no es la finalidad única ni prioritaria de todas las penas y medidas de seguridad privativas de libertad, sino solo la meta a la que ha de orientarseel proceso de cumplimiento yejecuciónde unas y otras,

I. INTRODUCCIÓN from: Repensar la Universidad. Reflexión histórica de un problema actual
Abstract: Con esta inquietante reflexión inicia el profesor Alejandro Llano su artículo sobre el ocaso de las humanidades. Inquietante sí, pero no carente de razón. En su análisis, el autor acierta al señalar que se ha “encendido una alerta roja” en el ámbito de las disciplinas humanísticas; una alerta que, por desgracia, no sólo afecta al campo de las humanidades, sino que se extiende como una marea negra por todas las ramas del saber. ¿Cuál es la causa?, se preguntará el sufrido lector: una reforma de los planes de estudio incardinada hacia el rendimiento económico y la tecnificación del saber, que

IV. LA HUMANITAS ROMANA: from: Repensar la Universidad. Reflexión histórica de un problema actual
Abstract: Como acabamos de ver, la preocupación por el saber no es un tema novedoso, propio de la sociedad en que vivimos, sino que es un debate constante en la Historia del pensamiento, como lo demuestra el hecho de que hace veintiún siglos un romano paradigmático y controvertido como Marco Tulio Cicerón había escrito y reflexionado sobre el alcance y la importancia de la oratoria, de un conocimiento que impregna la vida privada y la pública, y lo hizo al estilo del más puro jurista de la Roma clásica: desde la genuina argumentación política y judicial 154. La razón que le movió

V. EL SABER EN LA EDAD MEDIA from: Repensar la Universidad. Reflexión histórica de un problema actual
Abstract: Como señala Haskins, el nacimiento de la Universidad en la Edad Media es fruto del despertar intelectual que se origina con el renacimiento cultural del siglo XII 259, momento en que, a diferencia de los siglos precedentes, las bibliotecas no sólo estaban dotadas con ejemplares de la Biblia, de los textos de laPatrología latina, es decir, de las obras de los Padres de la Iglesia, de algún libro del oficio divino, de vidas de santos, de las obras de Boecio y tal vez de algún clásico latino, sino que ya se podía encontrar -junto a éstas obras- elCorpus Iuris

VII. LOS CAMINOS DEL SABER EN EL ÁMBITO UNIVERSITARIO: from: Repensar la Universidad. Reflexión histórica de un problema actual
Abstract: Señalaba E. H. Carr en su clásico ¿Qué es la Historia?que cualquiera que sucumba a la “herejía” de pensar que la Historia consiste únicamente en la compilación del mayor número posible de hechos irrefutables y objetivos “tendrá que abandonar la historia por considerarla un mal trabajo, y dedicarse a coleccionar estampillas… o acabará en un manicomio”. A su juicio, el “fetichismo de los hechos”596se ve con frecuencia complementado por lo que denomina el “fetichismo de los documentos”597. Esto no quiere decir que tanto los hechos como los documentos no son esenciales para la labor historiográfica, sino que, para

IX. EPÍLOGO from: Repensar la Universidad. Reflexión histórica de un problema actual
Abstract: Cabe concluir. Y cabe hacerlo reconociendo que la bibliografía sobre el devenir del Saber y de la Universidad es demasiado extensa y especializada para que un único estudio pueda dominarla. No ha sido ésta nuestra intención, sino el plantearnos ¿cómo podemos contribuir a levantar las conciencias en torno a esta cuestión que nos parece crucial para el devenir de la Cultura y el desarrollo de nuestros estudiantes? ¿Y cómo hacerlo desde una dimensión teórica, muy alejada de los gráficos y de las estadísticas al uso? Desde esa dimensión reflexiva con la que se interrogaba Marc Bloch sobre el valor y

Introducción from: Teoría contemporánea de los derechos humanos. Elementos para una reconstrucción sistémica
Abstract: El tema de los Derechos Humanos constituye en la actualidad un gran fenómeno social, político, jurídico y cultural actuando como código elemental de una ética universalmente aceptada, la ética del respeto a la dignidad de la persona humana. Los derechos humanos se estudian desde distintas perspectivas y, han adquirido una conciencia cada día más viva, no sólo de la existencia sino de la necesidad de respeto que implica cada uno de ellos. En los últimos años, al menos en México, se ha venido consolidando la tendencia, tanto de la sociedad civil organizada, como del ciudadano común víctima de la marginación

Capítulo IV DERECHOS HUMANOS Y DERECHOS FUNDAMENTALES: from: Teoría contemporánea de los derechos humanos. Elementos para una reconstrucción sistémica
Abstract: La historia de los derechos fundamentales puede solaparse, si se quiere, con la propia historia de los Derechos Humanos. Sin embargo, uno de los puntos básicos del presente trabajo consiste en intentar establecer lo que distingue y lo que une a los conceptos de «derechos fundamentales» y «Derechos Humanos». Por consiguiente, un breve recorrido histórico por la singladura de los derechos fundamentales, pasa a ser una forma adecuada, según creemos, de dar razones de la distinción y conexión de ambos conceptos¹⁹⁶. Veamos: La historia de los derechos se encuentra indisolublemente unida al concepto racional-normativo de constitución. Las primeras formas constitucionales

Capítulo IX TEORÍAS DE LOS DERECHOS HUMANOS (IV): from: Teoría contemporánea de los derechos humanos. Elementos para una reconstrucción sistémica
Abstract: Con el examen de la tesis sobre los Derechos Humanos del filósofo de origen italiano, Angelo Papacchini, pretendemos completar el análisis de los autores de esta parte de la obra. Aunque Papacchini se formó en las universidades italianas, sin embargo, su obra ha pasado a ser un referente en Latinoamérica, desde que en los años 80 del pasado siglo ocupó su cátedra en la Universidad del Valle en Santiago de Cali, Colombia.

Book Title: Acción, deber, donación. Dos dimensiones éticas inseparables de la acción- Publisher: Dykinson
Author(s): Seifert Josef
Abstract: Tomando por guía la acción, el presente libro analiza en sus dos primeras partes las vertientes fenomenológico- eidética, hermenéutica y ética de la acción en diálogo con los autores clásicos y contemporáneos que más representativamente las han abordado (Tomás de Aquino, Ricoeur, Polo, Scheler, Wojtyla..). El autor muestra que no son estadios superpuestos, sino que se puede transitar del análisis eidético al hermenéutico a través del agente motivado en sus actos voluntarios y de las mediaciones cultural e histórica de su actuación y se desemboca al fi n en el nivel ético cuando se repara en la exigencia de universalización que reivindica la acción en tanto que humana. La tercera parte aborda las dos fuentes éticas de la donación y la obligación, resaltando la convergencia de ambas desde el primado de la donación. Para ello Urbano Ferrer cuenta con los relevantes estudios sobre el don procedentes del área francesa (Mauss, Marion, Derrida, Bruaire..) y termina enmarcándolo constitutivamente en la persona. No pretende una síntesis de diferentes planteamientos, sino dejarse llevar por las cosas mismas en sus conexiones de esencia y traer a colación a propósito de ellas las averiguaciones de los autores aludidos, ejerciendo la crítica desde el contraste con las evidencias de esencia. Urbano FERRER SANTOS es Catedrático de Filosofía Moral de la Universidad de Murcia y Profesor Visitante de las Universidades de Dresde y Lublin. Su producción filosófica se centra en la fenomenología (con especial atención a Husserl, Scheler, Edith Stein, von Hildebrand, Reinach..), en Teoría de la Acción y en distintos estudios sobre la persona. Ha colaborado en varios Proyectos investigadores sobre cuestiones de Bioética. Es miembro de la SEFE (Sociedad Española de Fenomenología), miembro fundador de AEP (Asociación Española de Personalismo) y pertenece a la Sociedad Española de Bioética (AEBI).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1k2337z

CAPÍTULO 2. DISTINTAS APROXIMACIONES A LA NOCIÓN DE AGENTE VOLUNTARIO from: Acción, deber, donación. Dos dimensiones éticas inseparables de la acción
Abstract: Este capítulo va a centrarse en el agente, cuya noción se hace precisa para diferenciar la acción voluntaria del acontecimiento anónimo. El agente no solo acompaña a aquella en su realización, sino que se le imputan o atribuyen las acciones realizadas por él y es apto para responsabilizarse de ellas. Más aún: es él quien pone límites a lo que hace a través de su intención, que se comporta como unificadora de la acción, como se ha visto. Pero la responsabilidad también puede ser entendida como lo que devuelve la acción, una vez autonomizada, al realizador que está en su

CAPÍTULO 1. DE LAS DIMENSIONES CULTURAL E HISTÓRICA DE LA ACCIÓN AL SUJETO ÉTICO from: Acción, deber, donación. Dos dimensiones éticas inseparables de la acción
Abstract: Uno de los aspectos de la acción es el cultural. Pero antes que nada vamos a delimitarlo respecto de otros aspectos colindantes. En primer lugar, si tomamos la acción en sentido predicamental, en correlación con un pati(padecer), entonces acaba residiendo esta en el paciente sobre el que recae, quedando reducido el agente a lugar de paso; así, la acción de abrir una puerta no está lograda hasta que la puerta no queda abierta, o elusus activustomista de la voluntad no se cumple sin elusus passivusde las potencias movidas por ella. En segundo lugar, tampoco nos

CAPÍTULO 2. EL PROBLEMA DE LA UNIVERSALIZACIÓN DEL IPSE COMO VÍA DE ACCESO A LA MORALIDAD from: Acción, deber, donación. Dos dimensiones éticas inseparables de la acción
Abstract: Hemos averiguado en lo anterior que el sujeto dela cultura y de la historia no extrae su sentido por el hecho de estarsujeto alas determinaciones culturales e históricas, sino que antes al contrario estas lo velan en su doble condición de agente moral, provisto de fines intencionales, y de persona, que con su libertad abre el futuro. Los fines intencionales se realizan culturalmente y el futuro de la persona se documenta históricamente, pero en ninguno de los dos casos las condiciones externas de plasmación están por quien se atestigua en ellas. No es posible fijar el sujeto

CAPÍTULO 3. EL ENTRONQUE ANTROPOLÓGICO DE LAS CUALIFICACIONES ÉTICAS from: Acción, deber, donación. Dos dimensiones éticas inseparables de la acción
Abstract: La bivalencia antropológico-moral no solo afecta a las estructuras del dinamismo personal destacadas en el capítulo anterior (autodecisión y autoteleología), sino que derivadamente también se encuentra en las cualificaciones morales particulares, tales como justificación, responsabilidad, voz de la conciencia, dignidad, mi deber, sindéresis, justicia…, teniendo como eje la realidad in fieride la persona. El desdoblamiento antropológico-moral ha sido ejemplificado de un modo suficiente en K. Wojtyla, pero, como veremos en este capítulo, es un tema recurrente en varios autores de nuestro tiempo, con una terminología no siempre coincidente. Ahora bien, los predicados éticos cuentan con la particularidad de que

CAPÍTULO 3. EL AMOR DONAL COMO TRASCENDENTAL ANTROPOLÓGICO from: Acción, deber, donación. Dos dimensiones éticas inseparables de la acción
Abstract: El enigma del don acaba siendo el enigma de la persona. Por ello, abordamos a continuación su esclarecimiento desde los trascendentales personales. Vamos a tratar de inscribir la donación en la persona, basándonos en la propuesta de ampliación antropológica de los trascendentales debida a Leonardo Polo.¹⁷² Partimos de que la diferencia entre las personas y las cosas es la diferencia entre el quién y el qué, no referida a los entes objetivables, sino al acto de ser ( esse) que les da su respectiva consistencia.

Book Title: Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson- Publisher: Dykinson
Author(s): Summers Lucía
Abstract: Estamos en un magnífico momento del estudio del delito, y hay razones para pensar que no es el mejor. Estamos al borde de una nueva revolución científica por varios motivos: tenemos nuevas y vastas bases de datos, nuevo software, matemáticas avanzadas que nos ayudarán a construir mapas y mejorar los modelos para determinar cómo actúan los delincuentes y las víctimas. Los teléfonos móviles, el posicionamiento geográfico, y los datos sobre el tráfico, también nos ayudarán en estos análisis. Y esta transformación va más allá de los datos. La Criminología en particular y las ciencias sociales en general van alejándose del individuo puro como centro del universo. Ahora sabemos que los individuos responden de maneras muy distintas al cambiar sus ambientes y sus situaciones durante un día normal. El trabajo de Roger Barker en el año 1950 sobre los marcos del comportamiento se aplica ahora a datos reales. Pues esa es la clave de este progreso: una teoría más práctica, enfocada y de análisis de datos y patrones para determinar qué se puede hacer. Estamos asistiendo a una acumulación de conocimiento y comprensión del delito, y avanzaremos más si prestamos mayor atención al delito, si lo relacionamos con las actividades no delictivas, si usamos análisis espacio- temporales sencillos, y otros análisis más avanzados para sintetizar los datos, y especialmente si prestamos menos atención a las grandes teorías y más a las de alcance medio. Prof. Dr. Marcus FELSON
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1k234hk

¿PARA QUÉ SIRVE Y CÓMO SE CONSTRUYE UNA TEORÍA CRIMINOLÓGICA? from: Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Agustina José R.
Abstract: Tuve el privilegio de conocer hace ya algunos años a Marcus Felson, cuando estaba en mis últimos pasos para acabar mi tesis doctoral en Nueva York. Estuvimos charlando en su despacho —entonces él era profesor en Rutgers University—. Su inquietud intelectual, su carisma y su sencillez me cautivaron desde el primer momento y pronto se fraguó una sincera amistad, de la que tanto he recibido.

CUANDO EL ENEMIGO ESTÁ EN CASA: from: Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Hidalgo Patricia Hernández
Abstract: La aportación más reconocida de Marcus Felson ha sido la tesis que vincula la victimización con las actividades rutinarias. Su contribución supuso un giro relevante en la orientación de la teoría criminológica, pues a partir de ella el centro de atención ya no está en la conducta del delincuente, ni en la pura interacción entre éste y la víctima o en los factores de riesgo derivados de las características o el estilo de vida de ésta, sino en un tercer elemento, la oportunidad, entendida especialmente como la ausencia de guardián o su falta de competencia o disponibilidad. El éxito de

ELECCIÓN RACIONAL, OPORTUNIDAD PARA DELINQUIR Y PREVENCIÓN SITUACIONAL: from: Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Bermejo Mateo G.
Abstract: Estos esfuerzos académicos no estuvieron al servicio sólo de la teorización especulativa sino que, por el contrario, con

ACTIVIDADES COTIDIANAS Y SEGURIDAD VIAL. from: Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Sarmiento José E. Medina
Abstract: El enfoque de las actividades cotidianas (Cohen y Felson, 1979) ha tenido un considerable impacto en la investigación criminológica y en la prevención del delito. En síntesis, sus autores hipotetizaron que el aumento de las tasas delictivas tras la II Guerra Mundial, podía ser atribuido a los cambios en los patrones de comportamiento cotidiano de las personas, los cuales habían propiciado la confluencia en el espacio y el tiempo de los posibles delincuentes con sus objetivos, sin que un guardián o vigilante con posibilidades de intervenir, estuviera en condiciones de evitar con su presencia que el delito se llevase a

EL INICIO DE LA CARRERA CRIMINAL EN MENORES INFRACTORES CON TRASTORNO POR DÉFICIT DE ATENCIÓN E HIPERACTIVIDAD (TDAH) from: Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Cárceles Marta María Aguilar
Abstract: Partiendo de la delimitación conceptual de la Psicopatología sobre la definición establecida por la Sociedad de Psiquiatría Americana (APA) en la Quinta Edición del Manual Diagnóstico y Estadístico de los Trastornos Mentales (DSM-5)¹, el diagnóstico de TDAH se establece sobre la corroboración de la existencia de diversas alteraciones a nivel del Sistema Nervioso, concretamente las concernientes al déficit atencional, hiperactividad e impulsividad². Así pues, el TDAH se configura como el Trastorno del Neurodesarrollo de mayor prevalencia a escala mundial, cuya sintomatología nuclear se asienta sobre niveles de deterioro a nivel atencional, organizacional, y/o presencia de hiperactividad-impulsividad, y que interfiere en

LA VICTIMIZACIÓN DEL INMIGRANTE IRREGULAR. from: Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) González Carlos Vázquez
Abstract: En los últimos tiempos, en contraste a la economía sin fronteras y la libre circulación de ciudadanos de la Unión Europea, estamos asistiendo a un desmesurado incremento de los controles transfronterizos de inmigrantes, como un denodado esfuerzo de la Unión Europea por intentar frenar la inmigración irregular¹. La política migratoria de la UE persigue como uno de sus principales objetivos aumentar la eficacia de la lucha contra la inmigración irregular², reforzando los medios e instrumentos destinados al control de flujos, el catálogo de sanciones, tanto para los que favorezcan o faciliten la inmigración ilegal, como para los propios inmigrantes que

LA PERSPECTIVA DE GÉNERO EN EL TRATAMIENTO Y PREVENCIÓN DE LA DELINCUENCIA FEMENINA from: Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Ripollés José Luís Díez
Abstract: El presente trabajo pretende acercarse a la realidad de la delincuencia femenina en España. Para ello se hace, en primer lugar, imprescindible la consulta de las estadísticas oficiales de delincuencia que nos van a permitir conocer la evolución de este fenómeno. Analizar las singularidades de este tipo de delincuencia, el cual, de forma similar a otros países de nuestro entorno, ha experimentado un considerable aumento en los últimos años, nos llevará a establecer una serie de conclusiones al respecto.

OPINIÓN PÚBLICA Y CASTIGO: from: Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Gómez Daniel Varona
Abstract: Puede afirmarse sin riesgo de exagerar que una de las modernas tendencias en la investigación criminológica, tanto a nivel comparado como en nuestro país, es la relativa al amplio campo que abarca la opinión pública sobre la justicia penal y el castigo, o más concretamente las denominadas «actitudes punitivas» de los ciudadanos. Así, por ejemplo, Roberts y Hough (2005, p. 3) aluden a un «aumento muy importante del volumen de investigación sobre las actitudes ciudadanas hacia el sistema penal» a partir del comienzo de los años 90 del siglo pasado. Ciertamente, como es habitual en nuestro país, ese interés por

5. A MODO DE BREVE CONCLUSIÓN. from: Diversidad de género, minorías sexuales y teorías feministas. Superposiciones entre las teorías de lesbianas, gays, bisexuales y transexuales y el feminismo en la reformulación de conceptos y estrategias político-jurídicas
Abstract: Desde esta investigación se propone que la lucha por la igualdad y los de rechos del colectivo de LGBT se realice a través de un concepto de igualdad complejo que permita configurar un nuevo sujeto de derechos capaz de incluir a todas las personas sin exclusiones. Ciertamente, el sujeto moderno se erige como el sujeto racional universal, libre e igual, pero la realidad práctica es que excluye a gran parte de los seres humanos que han tenido que agruparse estra tégicamente a lo largo de la historia reciente para ser considerados con respe to, dignidad e igualdad de derechos. la

Book Title: Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte- Publisher: Dykinson
Author(s): Zarzo Esther
Abstract: La Historiografía ha sido sometida en el curso de la época moderna tanto a su confirmación inicial de mayor rango humanístico como a su depauperación en el siglo XX por negligencia regional en sectores tan decisorios por su objeto como la literatura, la filosofía o el arte. El gran dominio contemporáneo estructural-formalista significó por principio la destrucción de los conceptos de tiempo e historia en el ámbito operacional de las ciencias humanas. Ya de la Ilustración cabe interpretar que desempeñó una función ambivalente en este sentido. Aún cabría argüir que nos hallamos ante una deficiencia o depauperación solidaria respecto del proceso conducente al nuevo estado de cosas actual, es decir la aminoración generalizada de los estudios humanísticos serios en favor de las simples prácticas profesionales; la aminoración de los criterios críticos y su relegación a los intervenidos medios de opinión pública; la imposición permanente de las ciencias sociales so pretexto de convergencia sobre las humanas propiamente dichas; la doble y paralela liquidación de las artes de la lectura y la memoria; y por último, digamos, el abocamiento a un resituado momento “final" de la Historia y la progresión confirmada de la Globalización… En cualquier caso, todo ello no exime sino que exige, cuando menos, un análisis de los hechos y el intento de establecimiento de un diagnóstico bien fundado.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1k235x8

1. Introducción a una Epistemología historiográfica como Historia universal de las Ideas y las Formas literarias y artísticas from: Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) de Haro Pedro Aullón
Abstract: La Historiografía, tanto en su sentido general de estudio de la Historia como en el más técnico o historiológico, requiere a nuestro juicio una asunción humanística firme, la propia de una entidad en proceso pero no por ello inestable sino disciplinar en virtud del mundo de cultura al que ha de servir. Esto es estrictamente un requisito (o en nuestro tiempo todavía lo es) para el género de las Historias especiales, por conceptos de materia, así de las literaturas, las ideas estéticas o del pensamiento, la ciencia o el arte. De no ser así, habríamos dado en disolución, no ya

8. La evolución de la historiografía literaria clásica from: Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) Caerols José Joaquín
Abstract: Cierto afán enciclopédico y ese gusto por el detalle y la noticia recóndita que caracterizan al filólogo clásico (también a los especialistas de otras lenguas, supongo) hacen a éste particularmente proclive a considerar el género de las Historias de las literaturas griega y latina instrumento no ya útil, sino imprescindible en su biblioteca, aunque, paradójicamente, se resista a consultarlos con la frecuencia que sería esperable, salvo en casos de absoluta necesidad*. Esta contradictoria actitud tiene que ver, en buena medida, con esa otra paradoja que entraña el término “clásico” aplicado a las literaturas en lengua griega y latina: al hacer

13. Musicología histórica e historiografía from: Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) Cascudo Teresa
Abstract: “El musicólogo es, en primer lugar y ante todo, un historiador”¹. Esta frase, dicha a mediados de la década de los sesenta del siglo pasado por Palisca (1921-2001), uno de los musicólogos más destacados de la segunda mitad del siglo XX, sintetiza una postura según la cual la historia de la música constituye el interés primario de todo musicólogo², siendo así cualquier consideración acerca de los hechos y objetos musicales en la historia, por sí misma, una investigación histórica, independientemente del punto de vista, de los métodos utilizados y de los objetivos perseguidos³. Este punto de vista, bastante extendido, explica

16. La historia de los conceptos y su relación con la historia de la filosofía y la historia social from: Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) de Murcia Conesa Antonio
Abstract: La historia de los conceptos o Begriffsgeschichtetiene una presencia muy relevante desde hace décadas en diferentes disciplinas históricas y diversos mundos académicos, más allá del ámbito universitario y editorial alemán en el que se acuñó. Si entre los historiadores del derecho, la política o la ciencia su repercusión es considerable, entre los filósofos ha sido objeto de una atención más profunda y continuada. Sin duda esa atención es inseparable de la importante contribución de la historia conceptual a la historiografía filosófica. Pero aún más obedece a dos virtudes que podemos llamar, no sin cierta precaución, “ilustradas”: por un lado,

18. El estudio comparatista de la historia literaria de Asia del Este según Cho Dong-il from: Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) Hye-kyung Lee
Abstract: Me propongo exponer y subrayar la importancia del Estudio comparatista de la historiografía literaria de Asia del Este(동아시아문학사비교론, “dong-asiamunhaksabiguioron”)¹, de Cho Dong-il. En esta obra el autor expone sus ideas, criterios y sugerencias a fin de avanzar hacia una posible elaboración historiográfica de la literatura universal tomando como punto de partida la comparación de las historias de la literatura de los cuatro países de Asia del Este. A tal fin hace esbozo del proceso histórico comparado de las literaturas de Corea, China, Japón y Vietnam y se propone a su vez la paralela comprehensión sintética correspondiente a los países

19. Hacia una historiografía literaria en Japón from: Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) Falero Alfonso
Abstract: La reconstrucción del proceso de formación de la historiografía literaria en Japón ha de atender a la cuestión terminológica, a qué se entienda por “literatura” e “historia de la literatura”. En el caso de Japón la cuestión, naturalmente, no debe ser reducida a una simple e hipotética postura de autoafirmación culturalista. Más bien a la inversa. El movimiento de occidentalización, y precedente de la globalización de nuestro tiempo, que acompaña a la restauración Meiji (a partir de la década de 1860), introduce un elemento de ruptura con las tradiciones heredadas, a la vez que no puede sino desplegarse mediante una

22. La evolución de la historiografía literaria eslava from: Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) Gabaldón Jesús García
Abstract: El estudio de la historia literaria eslava o, más apropiadamente, de las literaturas eslavas, constituye en gran medida una de las tareas pendientes de la Filología Eslava, así como de otras disciplinas humanísticas afines a ella. En el presente trabajo, concebido como aproximación sintética y personal, esbozaremos las tendencias fundamentales de la evolución de la historiografía literaria eslava desde el siglo XVIII a su situación actual; expondremos los principales problemas de investigación que se plantean en la historia literaria existente, centrándonos en los conceptos críticos, períodos y movimientos literarios; y, por último, intentaremos atalayar una perspectiva integrada para la investigación

24. En torno a la historia del concepto de historia literaria hispanoamericana from: Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) Kristal Efraín
Abstract: La historia de la literatura hispanoamericana es fenómeno reciente. No es sino en el siglo XX cuando se alcanza a contemplar las literaturas hispanoamericanas del siglo XIX en su conjunto, e incluso textos escritos en épocas anteriores. Durante la formación de las nuevas repúblicas nadie dudaba de que el pasado literario hispanoamericano fuera español. Hubo, sin embargo, diferencias y polémicas en torno al papel de la literatura española respecto de las nuevas repúblicas independientes. Las posturas de Andrés Bello y Domingo Faustino Sarmiento representan polos opuestos y de alguna manera paradigmáticos en este asunto. Para Bello la emancipación intelectual de

27. Historiografía árabe islámica (siglos xviii-xx). from: Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) Nava Antonio Constán
Abstract: El corpus de documentos correspondiente, que exige un acercamiento desde uno o varios prismas de observación², es relativo a una historiografía árabe caracterizable no ya como disciplina de una cultura y lengua sino que por necesidad a atiende varios campos entrecruzadamente históricos, ya etnográfico, genealógico, geográfico, o

29. Sobre la historiografía literaria hispanoafricana from: Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) N’gom M’bare
Abstract: La literatura africana en lengua castellana empezó a atraer la atención teórica y crítica de los estudiosos en la década de los años noventa del siglo XX. Si bien la primera novela en castellano escrita por un africano en África sale a la luz editorial a mediados de los años 50, la literatura africana de expresión española fue, hasta bien entrada la posindependencia africana, la gran ausente del debate sobre las literaturas de África en lenguas transcontinentales. En las otras colonias europeas de África, las primeras manifestaciones literarias en lengua francesa o inglesa ocurren durante el período de entre-guerras. En

3. Análisis de libros from: La literatura testimonial como memoria de las guerras en Colombia
Abstract: Parafraseando a Edith Negrín, se puede afirmar que la literatura testimonial no es suficiente para comprender los fenómenos violentos, pero tampoco puede hacerse sin ella. Esto es válido, de acuerdo con el sociólogo Orlando Fals Borda, “en aquellas circunstancias en las que no hay documentación escrita ni fuentes secundarias accesibles; todo ello con el fin de rescatar la historia olvidada”.¹ En estas “circunstancias” y con estas características, surge Siguiendo el corte, del periodista, sociólogo y escritor colombiano Alfredo Molano Bravo.

DEL DAÑO AL SILENCIO. from: Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) Aranzueque Gabriel
Abstract: Los procesos de justicia transicional presuponen un vínculo entre historia y verdad no siempre explícito en sus protocolos de actuación. Son muchas las ocasiones en las que se presume, sin mayor reflexión, que el acto de volver a narrar lo sucedido, en un marco jurídico-político que supuestamente vele por su esclarecimiento efectivo, puede desembocar en el reconocimiento y en la reparación del daño infligido, e incluso en la reconciliación, el perdón o la garantía de no repetición de los abusos. Pero, ¿es realmente de ese modo?, ¿tienen el relato histórico o el literario el poder de restañar ese tipo de

PAUL RICŒUR Y LA POSIBILIDAD DE DOTAR DE SENTIDO A UN MUNDO POST-HEGELIANO from: Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) Artime Manuel
Abstract: Cuenta Heine una conversación -probablemente nunca acaecida- entre Kant y un discípulo, en la que éste se maravillaba en la contemplación del cielo estrellado. Ante el desinterés mostrado por el maestro, aquél le preguntará si acaso no depositaba allí, en lo ultramundano, sus más profundas esperanzas, la compensación por su buen obrar; a lo que Kant le habría respondido, que si acaso por haber cuidado a su madre en la enfermedad, no haber dejado pasar hambre a su hermano y haber renunciado a vengarse de su enemigo le cabía esperar alguna otra satisfacción, además de la que supone en sí

RICŒUR PARA EL DESALIENTO from: Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) Rodríguez Belén Castellanos
Abstract: ¿Qué está ocurriendo cuando una pierde el temple para vivir? Creo poder adelantar una respuesta provisional. Si nos paramos e intentamos cifrar, fenoménicamente, qué está ocurriendo en el ocaso del brío vital, fácilmente nos daremos cuenta de que la reflexión le ha ganado la carrera al cuerpo y, en ese momento, la empecinada búsqueda de sentido da lugar a una honda sensación de sin-sentido, o, expresado en términos intrasubjetivos, a una obscura sucesión de ¿para qué?

DISTANCIARSE DE SÍ (MISMO) LEYENDO Y ESTAR IRREDUCTIBLEMENTE SOLO: from: Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) Arroyo José Luis Díaz
Abstract: Establecer puentes entre dos autores habría de hacer modular la orientación del viento que les agita, el suelo que les asienta, las miradas que orientan al cielo y la atmósfera en la que residen y respiran profundamente con cierto tono y ritmicidad. Especialmente si el puente son puentes². El riesgo a difuminar los bordes delimitadores substantivos de cada uno se torna entonces fortuna, suerte y oportunidad para pensar cómo acaso un lado y otro de los puentes, orillas ya, no estando sin embargo ya ahí previamente disponibles como orillas para la construcción urbanística y financiera, sí pueden por ello precisamente

PAUL RICŒUR, HEREDERO UNA TOPOLOGÍA DE LA JUSTICIA SIN CASTIGO from: Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) Salcedo Diego S. Garrocho
Abstract: Sabemos, creo, por Nietzsche, lo que es hacer genealogía; y sabemos, también, lo que es hacer historia de las ideas. La propuesta de este texto es mucho más modesta y no pretende dar razón causal o genética ni de un concepto ni tampoco de experiencia alguna. Bajo el rótulo “tiempo, dolor y justicia”¹ recordamos a Paul Ricœur y mi propuesta, les digo, no consistirá tanto en servirme del curso causal que se prolonga a lo largo de una coordenada tan polisémica como es el tiempo sino que este título aspira a establecer, más propiamente, una reflexión espacial. O si lo

AFIRMACIONES FRENTE A UN MUNDO ROTO. from: Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) González-Luis (Kory) Mª Lourdes C.
Abstract: Con Julio Cortazar “ digo: libertad, digo: democracia, y de pronto siento que he dicho esas palabras sin haberme planteado una vez más su sentido más hondo, su mensaje más agudo, y siento también que muchos de los que las escuchan las están recibiendo a su vez como algo que amenaza convertirse en un estereotipo, en un cliché sobre el cual todo el mundo está de acuerdo porque ésa es la naturaleza misma del cliché y del estereotipo: anteponer un lugar común a una vivencia, una convención a una reflexión, una piedra opaca a un pájaro vivo”.

SENTIDO Y HERMENÉUTICA EN EL PENSAMIENTO DE PAUL RICŒUR from: Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) Félix María Jesús Hermoso
Abstract: La Hermenéutica se muestra en la obra de Paul Ricoeur como un proyecto vivificador de la filosofía, del discurso devenido metáfora muerta, concepto rígido que busca apresar una significación; significacióon-constructo que sustituye a la infinita riqueza semántica de la realidad. No sustituir la realidad sino acompañarla en su fluidez, en su riqueza infinita, en sus variaciones y sus diferencias. Vivificar, sacar a la filosofía de un discurso muerto que no amplifica la vida, que no religa al hombre con lo sagrado sino que ocupa el lugar de un olvido fundamental, radical. Tal es el norte que guía a Ricœur en

EL HEIDEGGER DE LOS TRATADOS DE LA HISTORIA DEL SER: from: Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) Maldonado Rebeca
Abstract: En un momento que se distingue por el desmantelamiento de la contienda Mundo/Tierra-como réplica de hombres y dioses³. En un momento en el que vagamos sin tierra, sin mundo, sin dioses en el Inmundo, donde la futuridad misma es una sombra que nos cerca y donde un Único y Gran Poder ha vuelto a la inmensa mayoría de los seres humanos inaudibles e invisibles; donde ya no hay ni interpelación ni escucha, donde todos los seres están sujetos a la disposición y utilización universal de todas las cosas, tenemos que ir con aquéllos que pensaron en una situación de hundimiento

DEFENSA DE LA CONFESIÓN from: Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) Porée Jérôme
Abstract: Había pensado, en primer lugar, en darle a este texto el título elegido por Paul Ricœur para introducir la primera parte de La simbólica del mal: «Fenomenología de la confesión»¹, pues esta fenomenología es, precisamente, lo que voy a esbozar a continuación. Y no lo he hecho porque mi intención no es comentar ese texto en particular. Sin embargo, quedémonos tranquilos: no lo desestimaré sino para poder seguir mejor la lección de la obra en su totalidad; para, también, poder defender mejor la confesión de los ataques a los que su polisemia no es ajena.

HERMENÉUTICA Y NIHILISMO: from: Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) Šerpytytė Rita
Abstract: El discurso sobre la hermenéutica de Vattimo y el nihilismo hoy podría ser desarrollado en varias direcciones. Lo que está ocurriendo en la filosofía actual, sin embargo, requiere, como parece, tomar en consideración, en primer lugar, el renovado debate sobre la realidad /sobre lo verdadero. Como sabemos este debate ha puesto claramente de relieve las contradicciones incompatibles entre las posiciones de Gianni Vattimo y Maurizio Ferraris. Aquí me gustaría considerar los momentos teóricos relevantes para la hermenéutica que el debate evidencia.

AMNISTÍA VS. AMNESIA, EL EFECTO PLACEBO EN LA MEMORIA HISTÓRICA from: Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) González Ariadna Simó
Abstract: A través de este texto hemos intentado poner en conversación a Paul Ricoeur y otros personajes que irán apareciendo a lo largo de la exposición, quizás algunos vinculados a mundos del arte o del escenario, pero que sin ninguna duda son orfebres de la palabra, cantautores del alma o filósofos de la vida. Al fin y al cabo, fue labor de aedos y rapsodas el que parte de la Historia trascendiera y no cayera en el olvido.

AMOR Y JUSTICIA EN PAUL RICŒUR (II) from: Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) Oñate Teresa
Abstract: A partir de aquí, yendo al caso concreto de Paul Ricœur todo resultará más fácil, en un cierto sentido, pero también más denso, a la hora de comprender la hermenéutica del filósofo sobre las virtudes del Amor y la Justicia. Tan es así que para ello tenemos que hacer aún un viaje al país de los muertos y esto supone una dificultad, no precisamente mental, sino que cuesta desde otro punto de vista. Hemos de situarnos, en vista de ello, según creo, en el momento en que Ricœur pasa por la más dolorosa de las pruebas en su propia existencia;

INTRODUCCIÓN. from: El pensamiento político de Fredric Jameson. Discurso utópico para la transformación de la sociedad y la defensa del débil
Abstract: En la actualidad — y desde la Alta Ilustración de la primera mitad del siglo XVIII — se viene cultivando intensamente la idea de que existe una dinámica interna en la cultura. Se trata de una apelación que se encuentra asentada en concebir la realidad del objeto histórico como parte de una característica principal o rasgo distintivo que « evoluciona desde dentro » (naturalmente, como parte de su movimiento original) y que no es sino la forma ideológica bajo la que se ha encapsulado todo aquello que nosotros mismos (y los que nos antecedieron) hemos ido construyendo, aprendiendo y reproduciendo. En efecto,

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO EL MARCO DEL MARXISMO: from: El pensamiento político de Fredric Jameson. Discurso utópico para la transformación de la sociedad y la defensa del débil
Abstract: A la hora de seleccionar un punto de inicio desde el que ir desgranando no solamente el pensamiento original de Fredric Jameson, sino el proceso heurístico, esencialmente dialéctico, que ha fundamentado el proceso de evolución y crecimiento intelectual contenido en su obra de crítica y reflexión, resultaba a necesario arrancar desde el corazón teórico que ha proporcionado forma particular y esencia conceptual a la mayor parte de sus herramientas de deducción e interpretación: el « método » de Karl Marx y el modo de encajar el materialismo histórico en sus objetos de estudio. Por esta causa, resulta pertinente estructurar, en

CAPÍTULO TERCERO LA POSMODERNIDAD. from: El pensamiento político de Fredric Jameson. Discurso utópico para la transformación de la sociedad y la defensa del débil
Abstract: La posmodernidad, en cierto sentido, puede considerarse como la consecuencia del declive del modernismo. Sin embargo, desde la orilla opuesta y con la misma perspicacia, puede asumirse también como el desarrollo otoñalde la modernidad en los términos connaturales a la lógica de la estructura productiva de acumulación capitalista, que es lo que la determina. Obviar o enfatizar un límite visible o latente para separar lo moderno de lo posmoderno viene a ser igual de ambiguo y con-flictivo que diferenciar entre lo industrial y lo posindustrial. En el trasfondo conceptual, el flujo que todo lo atraviesa viene a ser el

AUTONOMÍA DEL DERECHO Y RAZÓN JURÍDICA: from: Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del derecho III
Author(s) Fontanillo José Antonio Pinto
Abstract: Fundar el conocimiento en estructuras permanentes o inamovibles ha sido siempre la máxima aspiración de la investigación clásica y singularmente de la investigación especulativa. A las diferentes disciplinas se les pide que aporten un objeto y un método y que sus principios rectores estén sustentados en criterios de universalidad y necesidad para ser admitidos en la selecta corte de las ciencias propiamente dichas. El Derecho, como aspirante a verdadera ciencia social, siempre ha precisado revisar sus postulados y acreditar ser garante de una estructura gnoseológica suficientemente solvente como para no necesitar reinventarse de tiempo en tiempo. Es por ello que

LA COACCIÓN EN EL DERECHO from: Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del derecho III
Author(s) Ferríz José L. J. Martínez
Abstract: El análisis del derecho como fenómeno social muestra no sólo su naturaleza imperativa, sino también su carácter coactivo. El derecho no es un mandato cualquiera, sino un mandato radical en cuanto amenaza con la fuerza –a veces incluso con la muerte–, en caso de su incumplimiento. El carácter coactivo del derecho, no se ha discutido ni se discute, pero su reconocimiento puede ser de diversa índole y alcance hasta el punto de comprometer el mismo concepto del derecho. Por consiguiente conviene preguntarse: ¿qué significa la coacción del derecho?, ¿qué sentido y alcance tiene su carácter coactivo?

8. LA INTERVENCIÓN CON MENORES EN UN CENTRO DE ACOGIDA INMEDIATA from: La intervención social con menores. Promocionando la práctica profesional. España
Author(s) Varela Antonia Pérez
Abstract: El ingreso de un menor en un centro no solo supone su protección, sino la oportunidad de

9. INTERVENCIÓN SOCIAL EN CASOS DE ABUSO SEXUAL A MENORES from: La intervención social con menores. Promocionando la práctica profesional. España
Author(s) Guilloto Laura Fernández-Trabanco
Abstract: Sabemos que entre las distintas formas de maltrato contra los/las menores, el abuso sexuales una tipología que marca una diferencia no sólo por la dificultad manifiesta para su detección, sino por las consecuencias físicas, psicológicas y sociales (además de jurídicas y económicas) derivadas de la misma, por lo que requiere de una especial atención y prevención.

12. INTERVENCION CON MENORES EN CASOS DE VIOLENCIA DE GÉNERO from: La intervención social con menores. Promocionando la práctica profesional. España
Author(s) Grimaldi Encarna Martínez
Abstract: ¿Qué le ocurre a un padre para asesinar a sus hijos?

CAPÍTULO IV LAS TÉCNICAS DE REPRODUCCIÓN MÉDICAMENTE ASISTIDA from: Bioética. Vulnerabilidad y responsabilidad en el comienzo de la vida
Abstract: Con este capítulo pretendemos, ante todo y sobre todo, ayudar a reflexionar sobre las distintas TRMA a las diversas personas y parejas basándome en argumentos. También espero que pueda ayudar a algunos especialistas y estudiantes de Máster y doctorado en bioética a considerar este tema más desde una óptica distinta. Esta orientación hará que adoptemos un tono dialogal e interrogativo que permita ir serenamente formando una valoración moral en este tema. Nuestro discurso no debatirá tanto con los diversos autores que han tratado el tema sino con los argumentos morales esbozados por ellos que deben ser sopesados, valorados y ponderados

Introducción from: Memoria retórica y experiencia estética. Retórica, Estética y Educación
Abstract: La presente investigación se propone el estudio de dos importantes objetos humanísticos, no en el sentido paralelo y restrictivo de una doble constitución monográfica sino con el propósito último de alcanzar a determinar sus mutuas relaciones. El primero de ellos, la memoria retórica, es propio de la mentalidad clásica. El segundo, el concepto de experiencia, eminentemente moderno. La historia del arte de la memoria desfallece cuando emerge la historia de la experiencia. Sin embargo ambos elementos parecen estar en crisis en la actualidad. El arte de la memoria, en proceso de aminoración desde el siglo pasado, raya la extinción. La

Capítulo 1 Experiencia: from: Memoria retórica y experiencia estética. Retórica, Estética y Educación
Abstract: Tanto el sustantivo latino experientiacomo el griego ἐμπειρία, un compuesto de πεῖρα, están construidos sobre la raíz muy rentable en todas las lenguas indoeuropeas, que se presenta en alternacia vocálica,per / por, dando lugar así a palabras como πόρος oporta, y a unas preposiciones o prefijos muy reconocibles. Entraña pues la idea de discurrir a través de un lugar determinado, con obstáculos concretos, sin origen, destino o camino trazado, μέθοδος. ‘Andar viajando’ sería, a juicio de Ortega y Gasset645, la vivencia originaria que da sentido al conjunto. Fórmula que implica una relación o encuentro con algo, un

Capítulo 2 Problematización griega de la experiencia from: Memoria retórica y experiencia estética. Retórica, Estética y Educación
Abstract: El problema teórico de la experiencia no existe propiamente en el pensa-miento griego. No obstante, sí hubo aproximaciones iniciales a los fenó-menos que hoy día se engloban bajo el título de experiencia así como por las impresiones sensoriales, pero no se empleó el término ἐμπειρία sino el de αἴσϑησις en contraposición con νόησις.

1 The Faith of Jacob: from: The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: The goal of this chapter is to lay the groundwork for all that is to follow by discussing three foundational issues. First, since my concern in this volume is to develop and defend a particular hermeneutic of Scripture, I need to go beyond what was said in the introduction and spell out a bit further my understanding of what is entailed in the confession that all Scripture is “God-breathed” (2 Tim 3: 16).

4 The Cruciform Center, Part 1: from: The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: Over the previous two chapters, I have argued that the NT as well as the church throughout history has to one degree or another advocated for a Christocentric approach to the OT. While the entire Bible is “God- breathed,” it is not to be interpreted in a flat way (viz. as if every part of it was equally authoritative for us). Rather, since Jesus culminates and supersedes all previous divine revelations, the OT must be interpreted in the light of him, never placed alongside of him as though it was a supplementary revelation. Indeed, I have argued that if we

9 Wrestling with Yahweh’s Violence, Part 2: from: The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: While theologians within the historic-orthodox church have always viewed Christ as the most important revelation of God, they have, especially since the fifth century, also generally assumed that the plenary inspiration of Scripture entails that the OT’s violent portraits of God must be accepted as accurate revelations alongside of Christ. Rather than seeking for ways to reinterpret the violence found in these portraits as a means of preserving a nonviolent conception of God, the way Origen, Nyssa, and others had done, these theologians sought for ways to justify the violence these portraits ascribe to God. Consequently, the dominant portrait of

11 Through the Lens of the Cross: from: The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: In this chapter, I will provide an overview of the Cruciform Hermeneutic, which I will further nuance in the following chapter by placing it in the context of the contemporary Theological Interpretation of Scripture (TIS) movement. Since all theological reflection must be done in dialogue with others, past and present, I will first set the stage for my development and defense of the Cruciform Hermeneutic by briefly discussing the views of six scholars whose thinking, to one degree or another, reflects foundational aspects of this hermeneutic.³ I will then proceed to outline three closely related distinctive aspects of the Cruciform

13 The “Masks” of a Humble God: from: The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: The goal of this and the following chapter is to develop and defend the first of the four principles that comprise the Cruciform Thesis. For reasons that will become clear in a moment, I label this principle the Principle of Cruciform Accommodation. In this chapter, I will first demonstrate the manner in which this principle is rooted in the paradoxical truth that the cross is simultaneously the supreme revelation of God and the supreme example of God accommodating the sin and curse of humanity. I will then defend the intelligibility of this paradox by discussing the manner in which this

15 Divine Aikido: from: The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: Aikido means “the way of peace” or “the way of the harmonious spirit.” Developed by Morihei Ueshiba in the 1920s and 30s, Aikido is a martial arts technique that trains “warriors” to engage in nonresistant combat, turning the force of aggressors back on themselves in order to neutralize their opponent and hopefully to enlighten them regarding the evil in their heart that fueled their aggression.³ The second of the four principles that comprise the Cruciform Thesis—the Principle of Redemptive Withdrawal—essentially stipulates that the cross reveals that God wisely uses an Aikido-like strategy in judging sin and overcome evil.

18 A Question of Divine Culpability: from: The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: Having fleshed out the biblical material that confirms God’s Aikido-like method of judging sin and overcoming evil on the cross, I will in this chapter address four possible objections to the Principal of Redemptive Withdrawal. The first objection is theological in nature, the second and third are philosophical, while the fourth is a pragmatic concern. As will become clear, my responses to these objections will afford me an opportunity to further nuance my understanding of precisely how God does and does not participate in bringing about the violent judgments recounted in the OT. First, a number of theologians, especially in

19 Defending Divine Genocide: from: The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: In 2003, Zondervan published a book entitled Show Them No Mercy: 4 Views on God and Canaanite Genocide.² Of all the episodes of God commanding and/or engaging in violence in the OT, why did Zondervan single out the conquest narrative as the one worth soliciting four different views on?³ The answer is that this narrative, with its terrifying depiction of God commanding the merciless slaughter of “everything that breathes” in certain areas within Canaan (Deut 20:16), stands out as the Bible’s most horrific and most prolonged portrait of divine violence. As Jerome Creach notes, “ this portion of Scripture seems

21 The Battle of the Gods: from: The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: To set a context that will help us appreciate the significance of the third principle of the Cruciform Thesis, I would like to return to the story of my wife’s bizarre behavior toward an apparently disabled panhandler on the other side of the busy city street that I first shared in the Introduction. Imagine that after witnessing my wife mistreat this disabled panhandler and walking around downtown for several hours in a confused stupor, I finally decide to return home. I walk through the front door and discover Shelley with a dozen or so well-dressed men and women wearing Department

25 Mauling Bears and a Lethal Palladium: from: The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: There is one final category of violent divine portraits in the OT that yet need to be assessed through the lens of the cross. How are we to interpret biblical depictions of certain OT heroes that display God’s power in violent ways? What are we to make of Elisha pronouncing a supernatural curse on forty-two boys that caused them to be mauled by two bears (2 Kgs 2:23–24), or of Elijah using his supernatural power to have fire from heaven annihilate one hundred men, even though these men meant him no harm (2 Kgs 1:10–12)? And what are

6 What Asaph Remembers from: Memories of Asaph
Abstract: Mnemohistory in the Psalms of Asaph is not uniform in its appearance or application. There is no single pattern or formula for what is recalled, how it is recalled, or how its recollection will function within a given psalm. There is a range of length and detail that the remembered past exhibits in the Asaphite Psalms, and it would be overreaching

Introduction from: A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) RICHARDSON BRIAN
Abstract: IN RECENT YEARS, unnatural narratology has developed into the most exciting new paradigm in narrative theory and the most important new approach since the advent of cognitive narratology. A wide range of scholars have become increasingly interested in the analysis of unnatural texts, that is, texts that feature strikingly impossible or antimimetic elements.¹ Such works have been consistently neglected or marginalized in existing narratological frameworks.

3 Unnatural Spaces and Narrative Worlds from: A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) ALBER JAN
Abstract: Narrative space has traditionally been considered to be much less important than narrative time. For example, in the eighteenth century, Gotthold Ephraim Lessing defined narrative literature as an art

5 Unnatural Minds from: A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) IVERSEN STEFAN
Abstract: THE GOAL of this essay is twofold. First, in taking certain types of subversive, arresting, strange, and odd minds that one encounters in narratives as my primary target, I aim to propose a definition of such narrative phenomena as unnatural mindsand illustrate how they might be constructed and interpreted in a concrete narrative. Second, in order to situate this definition in the current postnarratological landscape, I want to discuss some of the promising and problematic aspects of the tools developed by cognitive narratology for dealing with presentations of consciousness in narrative. Seen as a whole, the essay thus attempts

9 Unnatural Narrative in Hypertext Fiction from: A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) BELL ALICE
Abstract: This essay argues that hypertext provides a distinctive context for unnaturalness in narrative fiction. It explores the structural attributes of hypertext fiction in general before analyzing two examples of unnatural narrative in Stuart Moulthrop’s Storyspace hypertext fiction Victory Garden. The first analysis shows how the multilinear structure of hypertext facilitates narrative contradiction. The second analysis demonstrates that the fragmented structure of the text allows the unnatural status of a scene to change depending on the reading route through which it is accessed. The study thus analyzes two different types of unnaturalness in hypertext by first focusing on a logical impossibility

Book Title: Postclassical Narratology-Approaches and Analyses
Publisher: Ohio State University Press
Author(s): FLUDERNIK MONIKA
Abstract: In this volume, an international group of contributors presents new perspectives on narrative. Using David Herman's 1999 definition of "postclassical narratology" from Narratologies: New Perspectives on Narrative Analysis (OSUP) as their launching point, these eleven essayists explore the various ways in which new approaches overlap and interrelate to form new ways of understanding narrative texts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1kgqw6k

3 Large Intermental Units in Middlemarch from: Postclassical Narratology
Author(s) PALMER ALAN
Abstract: Intermental thoughtis joint, group, shared or collective thought, as opposed to intramental, or individual or private thought. It is also known associally distributed, situated,orextended cognition, and also asintersubjectivity. Intermental thought is a crucially important component of fictional narrative because much of the mental functioning that occurs in novels is done by large organizations, small groups, work colleagues, friends, families, couples and other intermental units. It could plausibly be argued that a large amount of the subject matter of novels is the formation, development and breakdown of these intermental systems.¹ However, this aspect of narrative has

FOREWORD from: The IMAGINATION OF CLASS
Author(s) Brantlinger Patrick
Abstract: On the contributors’ page for the Spring 1992 issue of NOVEL, the editors list Roger Henkle, whose article on George Gissing, Arthur Morrison, and urban poverty in late-nineteenth-century British fiction it contains. Following Roger’s name, they indicate that he “was at work on a book-length study of the fiction of urban poverty in late-Victorian England before his untimely death on October 5, 1991.” Thanks to Professor Daniel Bivona of Arizona State University, The Imagination of Classis at last the completed version of that book-length study. I am certain that Roger, our mutual friend and Dan’s former mentor and dissertation

INTRODUCTION from: The IMAGINATION OF CLASS
Abstract: The poor were always with the English. Poverty had been of broad social concern since the Elizabethan period at least: the topic of ongoing debate, periodic legislation, sporadic philanthropy. But the London poor of the nineteenth century—particularly from the 1840s on—seemed to present a different phenomenon. The spectacle of poverty and associated degradation in Central and East London, and later in South London, gave rise to a new set of imaginative and cultural representations. It developed from and in turn created new relationships between an ascending urban middle class and the worst victims of the metropolis. Poverty became,

CHAPTER 3 Morrison, Gissing, and the Stark Reality from: The IMAGINATION OF CLASS
Abstract: In the early 1890s a stark vision of life in the East End emerges from the pens of two writers with a close acquaintance with life there: Arthur Morrison and George Gissing. Morrison was born in Poplar in 1863, the son of an engine fitter who worked on the docks. His father died of consumption when Arthur was a boy, and his mother raised the three children by running a haberdasher’s shop in Grundy Street. Arthur himself took a job early as office boy in the architect’s department of the School Board of London at a weekly salary of seven

CHAPTER 4 Hell Hath Its Flâneurs: from: The IMAGINATION OF CLASS
Abstract: Gissing’s response to East End poverty was, like Hardy’s to rural poverty, to associate energy with antisocial behavior and enervation with the requirements of goodness. There was a type of active energy that writers could deploy, however: the energy required by social investigation and reporting. The combination of culturalist critique, moral judgment, and risk-taking that these activities required and called forth signifies a change in the conceptualization of working and lower class life among male intellectuals in the 1890s, especially among those we associate with what we are calling the “discourse of the abyss.” If the model of the earnest

CHAPTER 3 MARK TWAIN’S HYMNS IN PROSE: from: The REVEREND MARK TWAIN
Abstract: GIVEN SOME of Mark Twain’s comments about his novel The Adventures of Tom Sawyer(1876), it is somewhat surprising that the structure of the work has been the focus of many substantive articles. “Since there is no plot to the thing,” Twain wrote William Dean Howells, “it is likely to follow its own drift, & so is as likely to drift into manhood as anywhere—I won’t interpose” (MTHL 1: 87–88). Of course, Twain made other comments belying this disingenuous assertion, and beyond his claims of artlessness stands the novel itself; scholarly commentary, too. Considering the tendency to neglect

CHAPTER 6 Q: WHAT DO SOCRATES AND THE SHORTER CATECHISM HAVE IN COMMON? from: The REVEREND MARK TWAIN
Abstract: ON MAY 9, 1875, Olivia Clemens, wife of writer Mark Twain, sat writing a letter to her mother. “Mr. Clemens is reading aloud in ‘Plato’s Dialogues,’” she began, “so if I write incoherently you must excuse it” (Gribbon, Mark Twain’s Library2: 549). This “polyphony in the parlor” is emblematic of the sometimes unexpected influences on Twain’s work; far from causing Twain to “write incoherently,” as it may have for Mrs. Clemens, the writer thrived on a plurality of voices and influences. In the last decade, scholars have increasingly examined minority and female voices in Twain’s writing, analyzing the extent

Introduction from: The OLD STORY, WITH A DIFFERENCE
Abstract: In addressing at length Charles Dickens’ first novel, The Posthumous Papers of the Pickwick Club(1836–37), what is this bookabout?What does it think it is doing, and around what focal points will it circle? The visible, visuality, visibility, vision, visions, visualization, invisibility, view, prospect, observation, perception, sight, insight, hindsight, foresight, introspection, retrospection, eyes, reflection, appearance, spectacle, spectacles, optics, magnification, apparitions, phantasms, microscopes, telescopes, focal point, dream, looking, gazing, glancing, mental picture, hallucination.

1 History’s Difference from: The OLD STORY, WITH A DIFFERENCE
Abstract: “Admirers of Pickwick Papers,” John Bowen tells us, “have often seen it as a beginning like no other . . . an inaugurative creative act” (2000, 49). In a hyperbolic gesture recalling the opening sentence of Dickens’The Posthumous Papers of the Pickwick Club,Steven Marcus avers thatPickwick“dramatizes the fundamental activity of the Logos” (1987, 133). What, though, if anything, wasinventive,if not exactlynew,or say insteadnovel,aboutPickwick? How do we situate ourselves with regard toThe Pickwick Papersso as to perceive, however indirectly, its difference? In the current chapter, I shall attempt

3 Illuminating Difference from: The OLD STORY, WITH A DIFFERENCE
Abstract: That prosopopoeic synecdoche for spectral legions of amateur researchers of independent means, the “elderly gentleman of scientific attainments” with whom we concluded the previous chapter, is associated with light and with illumination, in several ways. The first association has to do with literal light. As we have seen, the empirical fact of its appearance is separated from the misinterpretation that arises from it. This separation leads to a moment of epistemological enlightenment, however dubious or risible this may appear to the reader through the focus offered by Boz. This in turn survives beyond the event to become a scientific “paper”

Afterword: from: The OLD STORY, WITH A DIFFERENCE
Abstract: In focusing throughout this study on the odd, insistent recurrence of figures of sight, vision, visualization, and so on in Pickwick, I have situated a series of questions that arise in part from a struggle with determination similar to that expressed by Raymond Williams in the second of my three epigraphs (1983, 160–61), fragments of which have already surfaced in previous chapters. Though already asked, and in part answered, they should now be restated. Why do these motifs, figures, metaphors, and forms of seeing occur and recur, and why do they keep coming and going, taking place in that

INTRODUCTION. from: Revelation and Convergence
Author(s) Bosco Mark
Abstract: Flannery O’Connor’s fiction stands as a singular achievement of twentieth-century American literature, yet scholars and enthusiasts of her novels and short stories have been inevitably drawn to her posthumously published critical essays, Mystery and Manners(1969), and to her personal letters to friends and colleagues,The Habit of Being(1979). Reading these texts one gleans further insight into the extraordinary clarity of vision that inspired and focused O’Connor’s talent. InMystery and Mannersone appreciates the context of O’Connor’s southern Catholic experience, allowing the reader to connect the dots between her erudite statements about the craft of fiction with the

CHAPTER 1 Revelation in History: from: Revelation and Convergence
Author(s) Schloesser Stephen
Abstract: Although it has been twenty-five years since Linda Schlafer investigated the seminal importance of Flannery O’Connor’s encounter with the work of Léon Bloy (1846–1917), scholars have been slow to follow her lead.² Yet Bloy’s literary style, indelibly marked by rhetorical violence and vitriolic humor, sounds much like characterizations of O’Connor’s own “language of apocalypse” and “imagination of extremity.”³ Moreover, Bloy’s privileging of “suffering” as redemption apparently responded to O’Connor’s felt need for what Ralph Wood has called a “darker reading of human misery, a more startling revelation of transcendent hope.”⁴ Perhaps most important, Bloy’s symbolist vision of history—the

CHAPTER 2 Breaking Bodies: from: Revelation and Convergence
Author(s) Murphy Michael P.
Abstract: George Bernanos, the great French writer (or “scribbler,” as he called himself) of the twentieth-century French Catholic literary revival, wrote in the “Sermon from an Agnostic on the Feast of St. Therese of Lisieux” episode from his 1938 work The Great Cemeteries under the Moonthe following: “Because you do not live your faith, your faith has ceased to be a living thing. It has become abstract—bodiless. Perhaps we shall find that the disincarnation of the Word of God is the real cause of all our misfortune.”¹ This propensity—the tendency to idealize experience and “disincarnate” theological phenomena from

CHAPTER 5 “The Baron Is in Milledgeville”: from: Revelation and Convergence
Author(s) Bruner Michael
Abstract: Flannery O’Connor was in the midst of revising her soon-to-be-published second and last novel, The Violent Bear It Away, when she wrote the letter highlighted above to Fannie Cheney in May 1959.³ She was clearly in a less sardonic mood than when she wrote to Betty Hester in 1955, highlighted at the chapter opening. Baron von Hügel’s writings had already proved to be an invaluable companion to, and crucial influence on, O’Connor’s growing storehouse of theological knowledge, and her latest foray into his first book,The Mystical Element of Religion as Studied in Saint Catherine of Genoa and Her Friends,

CHAPTER 8 O’Connor’s Unfinished Novel: from: Revelation and Convergence
Author(s) Wilson Jessica Hooten
Abstract: Flannery O’Connor never finished her third novel— Why Do the Heathen Rage?HerCollected Worksincludes a teaser from the incomplete manuscript, an excerpt thatEsquirepublished in 1963. A decade later, Stuart Burns visited O’Connor’s archives at Georgia College and State University, hoping to discover a treasure like James Agee’sA Death in the Familyor F. Scott Fitzgerald’sThe Last Tycoonwaiting for the right editor to sift through and compile the pieces. However, Burns was disappointed by what he found: “All in all, there are about a half-dozen episodes, each extensively revised, most of them connected, in

Book Title: The Algerian New Novel-The Poetics of a Modern Nation, 1950-1979
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): ORLANDO VALÉRIE K.
Abstract: This book considers Algerian writing from 1950-1979 in the context of the French New Novel and proposes that many of the works of this era need to be considered as avant-garde and exemplary of literary experimentation, expressing a new age literarily as well as politically and culturally.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1kk66x9

INTRODUCTION from: The Algerian New Novel
Abstract: The modern Algerian novel, blending styles, languages, and ways of looking at and being in the world, demonstrates that Algerian writing of French expression has indeed always been cosmopolitan and global, exuding the Maghreb pluriel(multiple) ethic that Moroccan philosopher Abdelkébir Khatibi maintains privileges “une pensée autre” (an-Other way of thinking), which he first articulated in the 1980s. The philosopher’s concept explores the inherent hybridity of the Maghrebi subject, particularly the author writing in French, as a celebration of his/her bilingualism, which, according to Khatibi, always displays “two languages in a heterogeneous position, one working on the other, crisscrossing over,

3 ASSIA DJEBAR’S LA SOIF AND NATHALIE SARRAUTE’S PORTRAIT D’UN INCONNU: from: The Algerian New Novel
Abstract: As the previous chapter explained, by the mid-1950s New Novelists began contributing to conversations that became increasingly sociopolitical and intertwined with the Algerian Revolution raging on the other side of the Mediterranean. How to explain and explore the evolving new era as it hurtled toward decolonization, overturning the long-standing colonizer-colonized dynamic, fostered questions about identity in the burgeoning freed nation that would become postcolonial Algeria in the early 1960s. Through their novels of the 1950s, Algerian authors sought to articulate what forms of subjectivity would define men and women of a nascent nation. As discussed in the last chapter, writers

Book Title: Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Keeler Ward
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback and hardcover editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1m3221q

1. LANGUAGE, POWER, AND ASCETICISM from: Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves
Abstract: Formal Javanese encounter is remarkable. Among people who are not close kin or longtime associates, and to an extent even among them, face-to-face encounter requires that everyone take great care to behave in a manner appropriate to his or her relative social status, no matter what the business at hand. Vocabulary, sentiment, gesture, timing—all must be adjusted carefully in view of the responses they are liable to arouse among the people present, and in view of one’s own social status relative to theirs. Such issues matter in encounter everywhere, certainly, but in Java the degree to which they have

Book Title: Mythical Intentions in Modern Literature- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Gould Eric
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback and hardcover editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1m3225s

INTRODUCTION from: Mythical Intentions in Modern Literature
Abstract: Any account of the relation between myth and literature has a responsibility first to define “myth.” And there, with historical stubbornness, lies not merely a problem, but perhaps the entire subject of myth studies. On the one hand, there is a question as to what myths actually refer to, since they have come to mean many things, from primitive and sacred ritual to propaganda and ideological statements. On the other, there is a good deal of confusion and conflicting argument over how to define the significance of myth. Is it primarily a matter of thematics, or form, or function—or

CHAPTER 2 THE STRUCTURAL MODEL: from: Mythical Intentions in Modern Literature
Abstract: Is there a genetic model available to us which fulfills the ontological conditions for myth as discourse which I have just been discussing? For obvious reasons, one hesitates to assert that such a model could possibly exist, but it is valuable nonetheless to turn with some skepticism, but a good deal of admiration, to one of the most influential attempts to prove that myth has some kind of discernible structure. This will give us an opportunity to examine in more detail the relationship of the structural model to mythicity. Claude Lévi-Strauss, in lengthy documentation from totemistic myth drawn mainly from

CHAPTER 4 THE MYTHIC AND THE NUMINOUS from: Mythical Intentions in Modern Literature
Abstract: We cannot answer the question of what makes mythology so attractive to writers and readers of modern literature if we remain with structure and semiotics alone and ignore myth’s talent for arguing for the numinous signifier and the validity of the supernatural. But, not surprisingly, that has been a much avoided question in modern literary criticism. The safest way of showing the relationship between the sacred and art, for example, has long been to emphasize art’s reference to or use of religious and mythological (meaning archetypal) motifs. Art becomes the transition between the numinous and the everyday. But as I

CHAPTER 5 RECOVERING THE NUMINOUS: from: Mythical Intentions in Modern Literature
Abstract: From opposing ideological positions—familiarly translated as vitalist-theosophical on the one hand and orthodox Anglo-Catholic on the other—D. H. Lawrence and T. S. Eliot have been considered important in our modern tradition for their effort to reinstate some connection between religion and art in a literature aggressively shorn of religious thought. If we think of early twentieth-century writing as occasionally turning to some prescription for spiritual health, then we do think of Lawrence and Eliot. But what prescriptiveness there is—and it is perhaps less pronounced than criticism would have it—is not the affinity between these two writers

Book Title: Flannery O'Connor and the Language of Apocalypse- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): KESSLER EDWARD
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback and hardcover editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1m323xn

Book Title: Coleridge on the Language of Verse- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Marks Emerson R.
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback and hardcover editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1m3nvnr

III The Universal Principle from: Coleridge on the Language of Verse
Abstract: Of Wordsworth’s declarationsthat the language of good poetry is ideally derived from rustic speech, and that there is no essential difference between the languages of poetry and prose, Coleridge provided the readers of theBiographia Literariawith a bi-level refutation. On the first level, which has received the bulk of critical attention since, are several more or less direct denials of these assertions themselves or of assumptions they seem to entail. Thus he retorts that the best part of any language comes not from the countryman’s daily communion with nature but from the intellectual and imaginative activity of educated

Book Title: Language and Desire in Seneca's "Phaedra"- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Segal Charles
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback and hardcover editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1m3nxp7

EIGHT Desire, Silence, and the Speech of the Sword from: Language and Desire in Seneca's "Phaedra"
Abstract: For Seneca’s Phaedra, as for Euripides’ and Racine’s, the crossing of the barrier between silence and speech is the critical event. Once these words of desire are spoken, the relation between the speakers is irrevocably changed. Neither the lover who confesses the love nor the beloved who receives the message can ever be quite the same toward one another again. This climactic point of decisive speaking lies at the heart of dramatic representation: the art of converting the exchange of words and feelings into theatrical situation. Communication becomes surrounded with a suspenseful direction that draws us inevitably toward an overwhelming

ELEVEN Closure, Form, and the Father from: Language and Desire in Seneca's "Phaedra"
Abstract: Just below the surface of Seneca’s text, with the attempt to recompose mutilated fragments of a once beautiful form, lies Seneca’s own authorial problem: recomposing into a beautiful unity the now scattered pieces of a past tradition: the two Hippolytus plays of Euripides,

Incohérences narratives du fait divers from: L’incoerenza creativa nella narrativa francese contemporanea
Author(s) Viart Dominique
Abstract: La question de l’incohérence en matière littéraire tient à la fois du scandale et de l’évidence. De l’évidence car on ne voit pas ce qu’il y aurait à raconter si rien d’étonnant, ni d’insolite ne venait rompre le cours usuel des choses. Pour que récit il y ait, il faut bien qu’un événement singulier, le parcours inattendu de quelque personnage, justifient l’existence même de ce récit. Mais scandale cependant, au regard de certaines normes esthétiques tout au moins, car il convient que l’œuvre s’affirme comme une totalité où l’ensemble des parties est censé concourir à l’harmonie du tout : dès

Julia Deck, incohérence psychique et logique textuelle from: L’incoerenza creativa nella narrativa francese contemporanea
Author(s) Houppermans Sjef
Abstract: Le premier roman de Julia Deck¹ prend l’allure d’un roman policier classique dans lequel l’échange des rôles installe la perversion. La piste d’Echenoz en dessine le canevas sans toutefois nuire à son originalité. Le personnage principal fortement troublée par le fait que son mari la quitte cherche l’aide de son psy. Les paroles de celui-ci l’enfermant plutôt dans un rituel psychanalytique sclérosé, elle passe à l’acte et le tue à coups de couteau. Elle fera tout pour effacer les traces du crime et pour le revendiquer d’une certaine manière à la fois. D’interrogatoire en errance, de prise en filière à

CHAPITRE 2 La participation d’enseignants à la recherche en éducation from: Le chercheur face aux défis méthodologiques de la recherche
Author(s) Bélanger Michel
Abstract: Pour le chercheur universitaire en éducation, l’un des moments critiques de la réalisation d’un projet de recherche est assurément la collecte des données; le recrutement peut, notamment, représenter un réel défi. Or, s’il est manifeste que la participation à la recherche en éducation est déterminée de manière importante par l’attitude qu’ont les enseignants envers celle-ci, les facteurs influant sur cette volonté de participer ou non font toujours l’objet de recherches (p. ex. voir Cousins et Walker, 2000).

4 ‘A nation of Others’: from: Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Villar-Argáiz Pilar
Abstract: The changing face of Irish society and the new influx of immigration during the economic boom of the country have compelled Irish poets to rethink nationhood intersectionally, as modulated by race and ethnicity. Depictions of ethnic migrant communities in Ireland have appeared in the work of poets since the early 1990s. Eithne Strong, for instance, dealt with this topic in her poems ‘Let Live’, about the emotional impact the Indian community has on the native Irish population with its ‘oddness’ and ‘alternative culture’ (1993: 75–6), and ‘Woad and Olive’, which reflects on the difficulty of ‘harmonious coexistence’ among different

10 ‘Marooned men in foreign cities’: from: Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Murphy Paula
Abstract: In The Townlands of Brazil, the second play in Dermot Bolger’sThe Ballymun Trilogy, multiculturalism in Ireland is explored by focusing on the small community of Ballymun, in Dublin city. The first act takes place in the 1960s and explores the fate of an unmarried pregnant woman, Eileen, who escapes having to give up her baby for adoption by fleeing to England. Her experience of being an emigrant in a foreign city echoes that of her baby’s father, Michael. Eileen and he met and conceived their child while he was at home in Ireland on holiday from his job in

11 ‘Like a foreigner / in my native land’: from: Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Schrage-Früh Michaela
Abstract: Ireland in the Celtic Tiger years saw an unprecedented influx of ethnically diverse migrants to a nation formerly perceived as comparatively monocultural. Sketching the two dominant representations of post-Celtic Tiger multiculturalism, Amanda Tucker notes that the first of these ‘emphasizes that fear and hostility continue to characterize Irish responses to inward migration since the Gaelic Catholic monolith remains’ at the heart of twenty-first-century Irish identity, thus reinforcing ‘the idea of Ireland as a monocultural rather than multicultural society’ (Tucker, 2010: 107).¹ The second type of response claims that, despite the legal situation of immigrants, Ireland is a country traditionally open

14 Hospitality and hauteur: from: Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Armstrong Charles I.
Abstract: Tourism tends to be observed as an indispensable but regrettable epiphenomenon. For many states it provides a major source of income, facilitating commerce and jobs that make up an important part of the national economy. At the same time, there is a tendency to see tourism as involving a pernicious commodification of space, culture, and people’s lives in general. Common conceptions of tourism tend to circle around cliché and stereotype. In an increasingly globalised economy, tourism is seen as bringing with it particularly reductive and restrictive forms of interaction across national and cultural borders. Relatedly, it is interpreted as being

16 Beginning history again: from: Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Balzano Wanda
Abstract: In Ireland, especially in the post-Celtic Tiger era, we are witnessing a radical move toward a new historicity and a new feminism. It is almost as if we were given the chance to record time on a new scale and thereby, still resisting patriarchal and capitalistic systems, begin history again, starting from zero. As Alice A. Jardine had anticipated over two decades ago in her ground-breaking critical study Gynesis: Configurations of Woman and Modernity, the master narratives of history, religion, and philosophy at the turn of the millennium have been placed under close scrutiny, while what was left out of

18 Mean streets, new lives: from: Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Clark David
Abstract: One of the most interesting phenomena to appear in Irish literature since the late 1990s has been the rise of ‘homegrown’ crime fiction. Irish crime narrative has been strong, historically, as a sub-genre, but until the 1990s had largely been concerned with the representation of fictional crime in non-Irish settings, usually the US or the UK. Since the period immediately prior to the economic boom commonly known as the Celtic Tiger, however, a number of circumstances have given rise to a situation in which, for the first time, Irish readers are demanding novels and other narratives which portray Irish crime

1 Introduction: from: The humanities and the Irish university
Abstract: The phrase the ‘crisis in the humanities’ has been appearing in American academic circles at the very least since the founding of the Irish state in 1922. In that year, art historian Josef Strzygowski lectured in Boston on ‘The Crisis in the Humanities as Exemplified in the History of Art’, the same year James Joyce published Ulyssesand changed the literary landscape of the humanities in Ireland forever (Bell, 2010:69). The humanities is, of course, a recognized disciplinary and institutional field in the Irish university system, but the humanities in the Irish context has not received anything like the critical

5 International comparisons from: The humanities and the Irish university
Abstract: The work of leading French academics such as Pierre Bourdieu and Jacques Derrida on education points to key differences in emphasis in the Irish and French university systems. However, the French university system did share, only much earlier, many of the key changes that have come to Irish universities since the 1980s. It experienced a surge in university numbers slightly earlier than its Irish counterpart. Alain Bienayme notes that the French experienced its ‘unprecedented growth in its student population’ (1984: 152) in the 1960s. In 1963, 5% of the French eighteen-to twenty-six-year-old age group was in university. This had risen

1 St Margaret and the literary politics of Scottish sainthood from: Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) Ash Kate
Abstract: Canonised in 1250, Queen Margaret of Scotland is perhaps one of the most familiar Scottish saints to modern readers, yet surprisingly little material relating to her life (beyond brief mentions in chronicles) survives from the Middle Ages. Furthermore, there has been little scholarly consideration of the literariness of representations of Margaret. What work has been done focuses on Margaret as a historical figure, or uses material relating to her sanctity as evidence for the existence of particular sites of veneration within Scotland. These studies are useful for understanding Margaret’s role in Scotland in historical and religious terms, and suggest avenues

2 Good knights and holy men: from: Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) Lynch Andrew
Abstract: Hagiography and romance have long been understood to have some important elements in common, such as narrative patterns of edification and exemplarity, an overlapping repertoire of incidents and motifs, and a penchant for valuing strenuous affectivity, especially bodily suffering. It is not surprising that these literary genres quite frequently occur in the same manuscript miscellanies, or that their heroes can sometimes switch genres.¹ Nor is it surprising that actual knights claimed for themselves a form of religious virtue on the grounds of their bodily trials.² Yet secular knighthood and Christian sanctity are by no means a perfect match. Although soldier

3 Englishing the saints in Robert Mannyng’s Handlyng Synne from: Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) Greenspan Kate
Abstract: In medieval England, as elsewhere, episodes from the lives of the saints constituted one of the most common sources of story, both for layfolk and professional religious. Saints were popular heroes in every genre, held up for admiration, imitation, a good laugh, or the relief of a despairing heart. In their piety and love of God, saints provided models for all of Christendom. Their deeds could be recast for specialised purposes: to demonstrate, for example, how to wield earthly power, conduct oneself appropriately towards superiors or inferiors, resist oppression, or recognise the sins arising from inborn qualities. In Robert Mannyng

Modelling holiness: from: Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) Barr Jessica
Abstract: ‘Dere lord Ihesu mercy, þat welle art of mercy, why wyl not myn herte breste and cleue in-two?’¹ So begins the shorter of Richard Rolle’s Meditations on the Passion, a fourteenth-century affective devotional text that describes the speaker’s imagined witnessing of Christ’s passion. Noteworthy here is the use of pronouns: while theMeditationsis in a large sense for its audience’s spiritual benefit, the speaker’s focus is on his own emotional state; it ishisheart that he wishes would split, so overwhelmed is he by the evidence of Jesus’ sacrifice and his own unworthiness. In a work that serves

5 Body and soul: from: Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) Fulton Helen
Abstract: In the Middle English poem attributed to John Lydgate, The Pilgrimage of the Life of Man, translated from the French poem by Guillaume de Deguileville, the allegorical figure of Grace Dieu, hoping to guide the Pilgrim safely on his journey to salvation, describes the relationship between the body and the soul. Addressing the Pilgrim’s soul, the seat of his intellect and cognition, Grace Dieu tells him that he must fight ‘lyk a myghty champyoun’ against the ‘deceyt & flaterye’ of the body who will otherwise lead him to damnation.¹

7 Reading classical authors in Capgrave’s Life of St Katherine from: Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) James Sarah
Abstract: To characterise John Capgrave as a writer of ‘literature’ has been, until recently, to court controversy, if not outright dissent. In his foreword to the Early English Text Society’s edition of Capgrave’s Life of St Katherine, Frederick Furnivall spares no time to consider what, if any, literary merit might attach to the work, being instead concerned to provide a rather patronising author portrait before launching into an embittered attack upon Carl Horstmann’s editorial decision-making; the text, it seems, is of no more than antiquarian concern.¹ More recently M. C. Seymour dismisses Capgrave’s literary credentials; hisLife of St Norbertis

10 Reforming sanctity: from: Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) Atkin Tamara
Abstract: Sanctity, the quality of being holy, is by definition an inviolable state.¹ This chapter takes as its subject two plays that give dramatic shape to the life of Mary Magdalene, the sinner turned saint whose conversion might best be read as a crash course in becoming holy. They are: the Digby Mary Magdalen(c. 1490s), which survives in a single manuscript, Oxford, Bodleian Library, MS Digby 133; and Lewis Wager’sLife and Repentaunce of Marie Magdalene(c. 1553), which was printed twice in the 1560s. Although both plays work to reveal the holiness of the Magdalene’s life, the decisions made

11 The humanist grammar of sanctity in the early Lives of Thomas More from: Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) Larsen Anna Siebach
Abstract: In the dedicatory epistle of his Life of Sir Thomas More, Nicholas Harpsfield refers to his text as ‘a garlande decked and adorned with pretious pearles and stones’, fashioned from the ‘pleasaunt, sweete nosegaye of most sweete and odoriferous flowers’ of William Roper’s own, earlierLyfe of Sir Thomas Moore.¹ Collapsing temporal and technological boundaries, Harpsfield’s description encompasses his subject, his style, and – in its evocation of the verdant borders of the manuscript or the woodcut title page – the potential materiality of his text. It indicates a moment of transition, in which familiar motifs, genres, and symbols can be reappropriated,

12 Afterword: from: Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) Sanok Catherine
Abstract: In a stanza at the close of his mid-fifteenth-century Life of St Ursula and the 11,000 Virgins, Osbern Bokenham outlines how readers might say 11,000 Pater nosters during the course of a year in order to secure the intercession of this heavenly company.¹ The stanza is readily categorised as instrumental verse: its single function is announced in the preceding stanza: ‘And who-so lyste knowe how he may do / This nowmbyr to perform euen in a yere / the next kalende shewyth doctryn clere’ (‘And whoever would like to know how he may perform this number accurately in a year,

Epílogo. from: Las Fuerzas Militares del posacuerdo
Author(s) Ozkan Mehmet
Abstract: La transformación del cuerpo y el papel de los militares en cualquier cambio socio-político, ya sea en la paz o en la guerra, siempre han sido un tema crítico. Instituciones fuertes como las militares tienen siempre una larga tradición con base en sus propias experiencias junto a disciplinas establecidas que han aprendido a lo largo de los años. La evolución y el futuro de los propios militares es siempre un gran reto no solo frente a la doctrina, componente esencial de la institución, sino de cara al redireccionamiento de la tradición.

Book Title: Sin and Evil-Moral Values in Literature
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): PAULSON RONALD
Abstract: The confusion of sin and evil, or religious and moral transgression, is the subject of Ronald Paulson's latest book. He calls attention to the important distinction between sin and Evil (with a capital E) that in our times is largely ignored, and to the further confusion caused by the term "moral values." Ranging widely through the history of Western literature, Paulson focuses particularly on American and English works of the eighteenth through twentieth centuries to discover how questions of evil and sin-and evil and sinful behavior-have been discussed and represented.The breadth of Paulson's discussion is enormous, taking the reader from Greek and Roman tragedy, to Christian satire in the work of Swift and Hogarth, to Hawthorne's and Melville's novels, and finally to twentieth-century studies of good and evil by such authors as James, Conrad, Faulkner, Greene, Heller, Vonnegut, and O'Brien. Where does evil come from? What are "moral values"? If evil is a cultural construct, what does that imply? Paulson's literary tour of sin and evil over the past two hundred years provides not only a historical perspective but also new ways of thinking about important issues that characterize our own era of violence, intolerance, and war.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1njjx9

CHAPTER TWO Classical and Christian Equivalents of Sin and Evil from: Sin and Evil
Abstract: The Greek word used to translate the Hebrew chattat(sin) was, we saw,hamartia,referring to the missing of a mark with bow and arrow: a lack of skill, not a morally culpable act. One scholar writes, “Hamartia(error) and its concrete equivalentharmartema(an erroneous act) and the cognate verbhamartaneinseem to connote an area of senses shading in from a periphery of vice and passion to a center of rash and culpable negligence,” and notes “a passage inOedipus at Colonus,ll. 966ff., wherehamartiaandhamartaneinshift in successive lines from the connotation of the voluntary

CHAPTER FOUR Sin/Evil and the Law: from: Sin and Evil
Abstract: The place to learn morals in this period, as the last chapter suggested, was not the church but the stage (the sinful stage the Puritans closed during the Civil War), and Hogarth extended the stage to his “modern moral subjects,” engravings that were frozen scenes from plays like The Beggar’s Operaand Nicholas Rowe’sJane Shore(1714) and George Lillo’sLondon Merchant(1731). In these venues conventional ideas of sin were modified and complicated—and then, above all, rematerialized in the new genre that emerged in the 1720s–40s, the novel.

CHAPTER FIVE The Demonizing of Sin from: Sin and Evil
Abstract: can no more be a great sinner than he can be a great saint.

CHAPTER SEVEN The Original Evil and the Original Sin from: Sin and Evil
Abstract: Hell posed problems that remained to worry the Enlightenment. It was a place where sin was punished with evils, and the evils were imposed by sinners whose punishment included imposing these evils. Post-Reformation hell posed a second problem: punishment that was essentially sinless, or that rested only on the Original Sin. When everyone sinned, there was no sin-directed punishment in hell. Hell was essentially punishment, imposed on those designated sinners who had been denied grace. It was not, however, merely the absence of God; it was vividly burning forever in a fiery furnace.

CHAPTERLINK 5 – 6: from: Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: Naming the age is one important way in which people respond to collective experience. On the debit side there are ‘hard times’, ‘times of trouble’, ‘ages of iron’; on the credit side, ‘good times’, ‘years of plenty’, ‘days of wine and roses’ and, retrospectively, ‘golden ages’. These enter into songs, sayings, mythologies. They send messages about the past, and prepare people for emotions to come: ‘Come listen a while, I’ll sing you a song / Concerning the times – it will not be long . . .’.

CHAPTERLINK 6 – 7: from: Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: All societies have ways of locating themselves in time and history. That is far from saying that the popular recall of the past is perfect. On the contrary, many are the complaints that people today – led especially, it seems, by the young – are constituting a heedless ‘Now Generation’ that knows nothing of olden times. ‘Speak so much of memory because there is so little of it left,’ the French historian Pierre Nora exclaimed dramatically in 1989. And he is not alone in expressing such anxieties.

CHAPTER 8 History Past and Future from: Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: Time’s outwardness and inwardness mean that we not only observe but simultaneously live the process. And, as a result, we share it too, since we all belong within this universal framework.

Book Title: Contesting Democracy- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): MÜLLER JAN-WERNER
Abstract: This book is the first major account of political thought in twentieth-century Europe, both West and East, to appear since the end of the Cold War. Skillfully blending intellectual, political, and cultural history, Jan-Werner Müller elucidates the ideas that shaped the period of ideological extremes before 1945 and the liberalization of West European politics after the Second World War. He also offers vivid portraits of famous as well as unjustly forgotten political thinkers and the movements and institutions they inspired.Müller pays particular attention to ideas advanced to justify fascism and how they relate to the special kind of liberal democracy that was created in postwar Western Europe. He also explains the impact of the 1960s and neoliberalism, ending with a critical assessment of today's self-consciously post-ideological age.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1np9jh

CHAPTER 1 The Molten Mass from: Contesting Democracy
Abstract: At Christmas 1918 Max Weber had recently returned from Berlin to Munich, only to find himself in the midst of a ‘bloody carnival’. In the capital he had played a prominent role in deliberations about a new German constitution. This was somewhat surprising: for almost twenty years, the Heidelberg professor had suffered from various illnesses and was hardly seen in public. In the last two years of the First World War, however, he had written a series of polemical articles and tried desperately to act as a political educator of the German nation. He had also hoped to stand for

CHAPTER 2 What is Literature? from: The Event of Literature
Abstract: Almost thirty years ago, in Literary Theory: An Introduction, I argued a strongly anti-essentialist case about the nature of literature.¹ Literature, I insisted, has no essence whatsoever. Those pieces of writing dubbed ‘literary’ have no single property or even set of properties in

CHAPTER 4 The Nature of Fiction from: The Event of Literature
Abstract: The theory of fiction is perhaps the most difficult aspect of the philosophy of literature, as well as the one that has attracted the most sustained scholarly attention. For some curious reason, commentary on the subject has produced not only some penetrating insights but also more than its fair share of embarrassing banalities. Gregory Currie, for example, informs us that ‘we say that an inference is reasonable when it has a relatively high degree of reasonableness, unreasonable when its degree of reasonableness is very low’.¹ Peter Lamarque impresses on us the fact that ‘fictional characters, like Mr. Allworthy or Miss

V Politics, Marx, Judaism from: Who Was Jacques Derrida?
Abstract: In the 1990s, as he neared the close of his life and his academic career, Derrida again sought an arena outside philosophy: a wider and more consequential place than arguments about the coherence of metaphysical texts could provide. His chosen term, increasingly, was politics. And the accent of Derrida’s political writings was a prophetic one, full of commanding ethical import. He relied more than before on a Lévinasian view of our responsibility toward others. Derrida was no doubt reacting to his own role in the de Man and Heidegger scandals, when he failed to confront the political commitments of these

9 The Faith of the Philosophers from: The Enlightenment and the Intellectual Foundations of Modern Culture
Abstract: In this chapter I shall discuss the main philosophical responses to the challenges to religion described in the preceding one. Some philosophers, such as Leibniz and Clarke, responded from within the rationalist tradition. Others, among them Malebranche, Berkeley, and Jacobi, considered philosophical rationalism the very source of the religious crisis and repudiated it altogether. The first group attempted to revive philosophical theology, a branch of metaphysics that had existed since the early Stoics and that aimed at establishing the existence and nature of God. The Arabs, in their commentaries on the works of Aristotle, revived it as a rational foundation

Conclusion from: The Enlightenment and the Intellectual Foundations of Modern Culture
Abstract: The ideas of the Enlightenment continue to influence our present culture. The ideal of human emancipation still occupies a central place among them, though it has since passed through a number of changes. Marxism, which until recently played a leading role in European life, may serve as an example both of the continuity with and the transformation of the original ideal. It derived its goal of social liberation from the eighteenth-century ideal of emancipation. Yet the kind of social liberation Marx had in mind obviously differs from the emancipation pursued by the Enlightenment. Eighteenthcentury thought had at least in principle

Book Title: Simplexity-Simplifying Principles for a Complex World'
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Weiss Giselle
Abstract: In a sense, the history of living organisms may be summed up by their remarkable ability to find solutions that avoid the world's complexity by imposing on it their own rules and functions. Evolution has resolved the problem of complexity not by simplifying but by finding solutions whose processes-though they can sometimes be complex-allow us to act in the midst of complexity and of uncertainty. Nature can inspire us by making us realize that simplification is never simple and requires instead that we choose, refuse, connect, and imagine, in order to act in the best possible manner. Such solutions are already being applied in design and engineering and are significant in biology, medicine, economics, and the behavioral sciences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nph7v

3. Gaze and Empathy from: Simplexity
Abstract: Throughout evolution, solutions have been devised to permit living organisms to act rapidly and efficiently. My hypothesis is that incredibly numerous and varied solutions—the diversity of life—are found in very different organisms. Simplexity responds to the same rules as language or culture: It encompasses both diversity and universality, as is evident in the opposing ideas of American linguist Noam Chomsky (who stresses the universality of grammar)¹ and his French contemporary Claude Hagège (who emphasizes the diversity of language).² The problem is present as well in the work of the late anthropologist Claude Lévi-Strauss, who based his structural anthropology

10. Simplex Space from: Simplexity
Abstract: Let us now quickly review the neural basis of spatial processing in the brain. The goal here is not to present a course on physiology but to show how the spatialization of perception, action, memory, and decision making reduces complexity, sometimes by way of detours that, in turn, engender simplexity This theory has been revisited several times since neuroscientist and, later, Nobel Laureate Santiago Ramón y Cajal revealed the remarkable diversity of neuronal morphology. It seems obvious when we recall that the body, or even the outside world, is represented in the brain by neural maps organized by “topies,” which

11. Perceiving, Experiencing,and Imagining Space from: Simplexity
Abstract: The preceding chapter presented examples of the variety and the importance of brain mechanisms dealing with or using space. We also touched upon the problem of the relation between space and time and how it may contribute to simplexity. Now we will explore some of the more challenging questions relating to the role of space. Specifically, we will consider the foundations of geometry, first because, as we have seen, the brain is structured according to geometric kinematic laws, and second because mathematicians specializing in geometry use the word “simplex.”

3 The Scarlet Letter from: The American Classics
Abstract: When I first read The Scarlet Letter,I found it bewildering. That impression has not entirely receded, but I think I understand how it came about and why it has to some extent persisted. The title of the book implied a story about sin—a scarlet woman—and indeed the book often refers to sin and sinfulness; but none of the characters has a convinced sense of sin. Hawthorne seems to equivocate among the values he brings forward. I acknowledge, without regarding the acknowledgment as a major concession, that my understanding of sin is the one I was taught in

5 Leaves of Grass from: The American Classics
Abstract: He is singing and chanting the things that are part of him,

Afterword from: The American Classics
Abstract: “The true business of literature, as of all intellect, critical or creative, is to remind the powers that be, simple and corrupt as they are, of the turbulence they have to control.” I assume that Blackmur meant by that formulation the true social or public business of literature, without prejudice to its private and personal bearing for one reader or another. He added, as a footnote to the turbulence: “There is a disorder vital to the individual which is fatal to society.”¹ Presumably he meant that disorder is vital to the individual, else the order he or she maintains is

13 Wrestling with the Devil from: Clueless in Academe
Abstract: IT IS NOT SURPRISING if students feel ambivalent about talking the talk of the academic world, since this ambivalence is pervasive in the larger society in which academics’ funny way of talking is a common joke. Nor is it surprising if teachers themselves so internalize this ambivalence that they hesitate to ask students to master academic discourse, or they fail to master it themselves. Like other divisive issues in academia, the unresolved debates over academic discourse tend to reach students in the form of curricular mixed messages rather than straightforward discussions of the problem.

CHAPTER 1 Introduction: from: Theory of Literature
Abstract: The word “theory” has a complicated etymological history that I won’t linger over except to point out what can make its meaning confusing. The way the word has actually been used at certain periods has made it mean something like what we call “practice,” whereas at other periods it has meant something very different from practice: a concept to which practice can appeal. This

CHAPTER 3 Ways In and Out of the Hermeneutic Circle from: Theory of Literature
Abstract: Despite the intimidating sound of the word, “hermeneutics” is easily defined as the science of interpretation. You would think hermeneutics had always been a matter of interest, but in fact it’s of continuous interest only fairly recently. Aristotle did write a treatise called De Interpretatione, and the Middle Ages were much concerned with interpretation, so I suppose what I’m saying in part is that the word “hermeneutics” wasn’t then available; but it’s also true that at many times the idea that there ought to be a systematic study of how we interpret things wasn’t a matter of pressing concern.

CHAPTER 4 Configurative Reading from: Theory of Literature
Abstract: In this lecture we continue discussing approaches to interpretation. Before we talk further about E. D. Hirsch and then move to Wolfgang Iser, I want to go back to Gadamer and say something more about his implied taste in books, about the kind of literary and intellectual canon that his approach to hermeneutics establishes. You remember that Gadamer is concerned with the norm of classicism, which later in your excerpt he begins to call “tradition.” The reason tradition is so important for him is not quite the same as the reason tradition is important for a political or cultural conservative;

CHAPTER 10 Deconstruction I from: Theory of Literature
Author(s) Derrida Jacques
Abstract: In this lecture we confront one of the most formidable and influential figures in our reading. In the years preceding and since his recent death (2004), Jacques Derrida has enjoyed a second vogue on the strength of having turned to ethical and political issues. He never repudiated his earlier thinking or his notoriously involuted style, but he adapted these signatures to the interests of progressive humanists. Together with the Italian philosopher Giorgio Agamben in particular, late Derrida is associated with what’s called “the ethical turn” in theoretical approaches to literature and other matters that is very much of the current

CHAPTER 11 Deconstruction II from: Theory of Literature
Author(s) de Man Paul
Abstract: Here there is a sort of question, call it historical, of which we are only glimpsing today, the conception, the formation, the gestation, the labor. I employ these words, I admit, with a glance toward the business of childbearing—

CHAPTER 22 Postcolonial Criticism from: Theory of Literature
Abstract: I should mention in passing certain not unrelated topics

CHAPTER 24 The Institutional Construction of Literary Study from: Theory of Literature
Abstract: We’ve now completed a sequence of theoretical approaches to identity, always with a view—though rather often lately a view from afar—to the way identity is constructed in literature. I’ll return to what may have seemed at times the missing link, literature, in a minute. In the meantime, I just wanted to point out something I’m sure you’ve noticed even when I haven’t mentioned it: namely, that each of these approaches to identity has a history in two chapters. Each history arrives at a second chapter that is something like a deconstructive moment, signifying on theory itself, on the

EQUAL TO GOD from: In Search of the Early Christians
Abstract: John 5:18 says that the plot to have Jesus killed began because Jesus was “making himself equal to God.” This assertion can hardly be historical, so we must seek an explanation for it in the history of the Johannine circle. It was not only the Johannine Christians who made such connections, of course. Already in Mark hostility against Jesus is first aroused by his claim to exercise a prerogative—to forgive sins—that is God’s alone (Mark 2:7), and the actual plot against his life springs, as in John, from a Sabbath healing (3:6). Christians prior to John had appropriated

THE MAN FROM HEAVEN IN PAUL’S LETTER TO THE PHILIPPIANS from: In Search of the Early Christians
Abstract: In Helmut Koester’s enormous contribution to the history of early Christianity, one of the things of which he has never tired of reminding us is the exuberance of Jesus’ followers that created, in the first decades of the movement’s existence, the wildest diversity of mythic portraits of him.¹ Students of the New Testament had often been blinded to this diversity by confusing the church’s canon with the canon of the historian. However, we do not have to look beyond the canonical documents to see one of these developments that is among the most astonishing of all: the subject of this

FOREWORD from: Absorbing Perfections
Author(s) Bloom Harold
Abstract: Moshe Idel, born in 1947, submitted his doctoral dissertation on the Kabbalah of Abraham Abulafia to the Hebrew University, Jerusalem, in 1976. In the quarter-century since, his researches and publications have reconfigured the field of Kabbalistic study, essentially founded by his majestic precursor, Gershom Scholem (1897–1982). Half-a-century younger than Scholem, Idel is both Scholem’s successor and his major revisionist. It is not too much to speak of the Kabbalah of Gershom Scholem and the Kabbalah of Moshe Idel, since these great scholars are as much visionary speculators as they are historians of what can be called “Jewish mysticism,” though

INTRODUCTION from: Absorbing Perfections
Abstract: Two main processes informed most of the speculative hermeneutical corpora in the postbiblical forms of Judaism. The first is the expansion of the relevance of the content of the canonical texts to increasingly more cosmological, theosophical, intellectual, and psychological realms than those ancient texts themselves claimed to engage. This expansion is often related to processes of arcanization, secretive understandings of the canonical texts understood as pointing to these realms in allusive ways: anagrammatic, numerical, allegorical, or symbolic.

2 THE GOD-ABSORBING TEXT: from: Absorbing Perfections
Abstract: Ancient Jewish monotheism was generally uncomfortable with the idea of the preexistence of any entity to the creation of the world, a premise that would imperil the uniqueness of God as the single creator. The coexistence of an additional entity would produce a theological dynamics that would question the most singular religious achievement of ancient Judaism. Implicitly, allowing any role to such a founding and formative entity would reintroduce a type of myth that could recall the pagan mythology, where once again the relationship between the preexistent deities as a crucial condition for the cosmogonic process would be thrown into

6 TORAH STUDY AND MYSTICAL EXPERIENCES IN JEWISH MYSTICISM from: Absorbing Perfections
Abstract: The biblical attitude toward the recipients of the divine message surmised rather obedient personalities, envisioned as consumers of the revelation who yielded to the divine will and fulfilled the religious imperatives, which were considered semantically transparent. Living in what was believed to be a pressing presence of the divine in daily life, a life punctuated by miracles, there was no significant role for the religious creativity of the believer. With the emergence of the canonical text as intermediary between the Author and the religious consumer, the situation changed. According to rabbinic stands, the divine text not only mediates between the

II The Good: from: The Good, the True, and the Beautiful
Abstract: Since David Hume (1711–1776), philosophy, as well as common sense, has differentiated science from morality. Science establishes facts (“what is”), whereas morality decides “what should be,” but many admit that we cannot distinguish what should be from what is. I shall consider whether it is plausible to take an opposite, although perhaps rather surprising, approach and ask whether we can favor what should be from our knowledge about what is. In fact, such a question belongs to a long philosophical tradition, including Hume, Henri de Saint-Simon (1760–1825), Auguste Comte, Charles Darwin, and contemporary ethologists. My idea is to

IV The Molecular Biology of the Brain from: The Good, the True, and the Beautiful
Abstract: Before science developed, humans elaborated mythical reflections to give some meaning to events and experiences they encountered and to establish classifications that were “superior to chaos,” as Claude Lévi-Strauss said. Theories included creation by gods and spontaneous generation. Common concepts included great floods to punish sins and re-create the world, and creation of life in a primeval ocean by successive steps. In the West the myth of dualism of body and soul emerged. The dualist, creationist view was opposed from ancient Greece onward by more materialist concepts, some of which emphasized that diverse elements could be combined randomly to form

V Molecules and the Mind from: The Good, the True, and the Beautiful
Abstract: Neurotransmitters and their receptors appeared very early in animal evolution, and their structural genes have not changed much since. We have even found ancestors of the nicotinic acetylcholine receptor in ancient bacteria! Our understanding of this receptor has progressed greatly in the last few years, and it remains easily the best known of all neurotransmitter receptors and is one of the best reference models.

Introduction from: The Spirit of Early Christian Thought
Abstract: THE CHRISTIAN RELIGION is inescapably ritualistic (one is received into the church by a solemn washing with water), uncompromisingly moral (“be ye perfect as your Father in heaven is perfect,” said Jesus), and unapologetically intellectual (be ready to give a “reason for the hope that is in you,” in the words of I Peter). Like all the major religions of the world, Christianity is more than a set of devotional practices and a moral code: it is also a way of thinking about God, about human beings, about the world and history. For Christians, thinking is part of believing. Augustine

Chapter 5 Not My Will But Thine from: The Spirit of Early Christian Thought
Abstract: THE EARLY CHRISTIANS, it is sometimes alleged, were given to squabbling over picayune points of doctrine. In the great debate over the doctrine of the Trinity in the fourth century, the issue seemed to turn on a single letter, the Greek iota, what Edward Gibbon called a “furious contest” over a diphthong. Was the Son of “like substance” with the Father, using a Greek word with an iota ( omoiousion), or of the “same substance” with the Father, using a Greekn word without an iota (omoousion)? Yet the iota signified a genuine, not contrived, difference over a matter of great moment,

Chapter 10 Making This Thing Other from: The Spirit of Early Christian Thought
Abstract: ONE OF THE practices most despised by ancient critics of Christianity was devotion to the dead, particularly veneration of the bones of martyrs and saints. A zealous foe of the church, Julian, Roman emperor from 361 to 363, complained that Christians had “filled the whole world with tombs and memorials to the dead,” even though nowhere in the Scriptures is it said one should “haunt tombs or show them reverence.”¹ By the end of the fourth century the cities of the Roman world were sprinkled with shrines housing relics, that is, the bones of holy men and women, and pious

Book Title: Freedom and Time-A Theory of Constitutional Self-Government
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): RUBENFELD JED
Abstract: Should we try to "live in the present"? Such is the imperative of modernity, Jed Rubenfeld writes in this important and original work of political theory. Since Jefferson proclaimed that "the earth belongs to the living"-since Freud announced that mental health requires people to "get free of their past"-since Nietzsche declared that the happy man is the man who "leaps" into "the moment-modernity has directed its inhabitants to live in the present, as if there alone could they find happiness, authenticity, and above all freedom.But this imperative, Rubenfeld argues, rests on a profoundly inadequate, deforming picture of the relationship between freedom and time. Instead, Rubenfeld suggests, human freedom-human being itself--necessarily extends into both past and future; self-government consists of giving our lives meaning and purpose over time. From this conception of self-government, Rubenfeld derives a new theory of constitutional law's place in democracy. Democracy, he writes, is not a matter of governance by the present "will of the people"; it is a matter of a nation's laying down and living up to enduring political and legal commitments. Constitutionalism is not counter to democracy, as many believe, or a pre-condition of democracy; it is or should be democracy itself--over time. On this basis, Rubenfeld offers a new understanding of constitutional interpretation and of the fundamental right of privacy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1npqs8

3 After the Great War from: Frontiers of History
Abstract: The dream of Enlightenment was tempered by the “nightmare of history.” So Freud turned from the pleasure principle to the death instinct, with erosbeing joined bythanatosin a fuller conception of culture in the continuum of time—and “in the shadow of tomorrow.”

5 After the Good War from: Frontiers of History
Abstract: Historians have always, though not always ostensibly, sought a “usable past”; and reviewing historiographical practice around the world and back over two and a half millennia, one cannot be surprised that ideas of objectivity, a single “big story,” and other “noble dreams” have given way to even older notions of history as the product of social creation or authorial imagination. “Representation” has become a watchword of contemporary historical writing; and the upshot, Foucauldian warnings about the tyranny of the subject notwithstanding, is to restore the “point of view” as sovereign, whether or not the historical viewer is in full command

Conclusion: from: Frontiers of History
Abstract: So my trilogy on historical inquiry across the ages comes to an end: Faces of Historyplaced the story of Western historiography in a long perspective and carried it down to the eighteenth century;Fortunes of Historypursued an increasingly complex narrative from the Enlightenment down to World War I; andFrontiers of Historysurveys in a more personal manner, from the author’s own self-examination and “point of view,” from then down to the first decade of the new millennium. “A man sets out to draw the world,” Borges wrote. “As the years go by, he peoples a space with

Introduction from: Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: This volume is a collection of my essays, written in the second half of the 1990s, on the topic of the moving image—the label that I prefer to use for the category comprising film, video, broadcast television, moving computer-generated imagery, and, in short, any mass-produced moving image technologically within our reach now and in times to come.¹ My reasons for speaking of the moving image rather than of film, video, or computer-generated images (CGI) revolve around the fact that those ways of speaking are too wedded to reference to particular media, whereas the moving image, as it has come

Chapter 2 Film, Attention, and Communication: from: Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: Although there are disputes about when to date the beginning of film, one traditional opinion favors 1895. On December 28 of that year, Louis and Auguste Lumière staged the first publicscreening of a series of their films, includingWorkers Leaving the Factory,in a room of the Grand Café in Paris. This event had been preceded by a series ofprivatescreenings for selected scientific and business audiences. On December 28, the public had the opportunity to see the product.

Chapter 4 Ethnicity, Race, and Monstrosity: from: Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: There are many conceptions of beauty. Some associate beauty with proportion and harmony; some with pleasure taken in the appearance of things; and some, more narrowly, with disinterestedpleasure. Kant, of course, uses disinterested pleasure as the central mark of what he calls free beauty. However, Kant also speaks of dependent or accessory beauty, which pertains to the aesthetic judgments we make about things in relation to the determinate concepts under which the objects in question fall.¹ Human beauty, for Kant, is of this sort.² We call a human beautiful, he suggests, insofar as a person approaches being a perfect

Chapter 5 Is the Medium a (Moral) Message? from: Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: The question to be addressed in this essay concerns the moral significance of the television medium. By ‘medium’ here I am not referring to television as a business that churns out countless stories. Rather, I am referring specifically to the historically standard image, especially in regard to fiction, and to the ways in which it is typically elaborated by structures like editing, camera movement, narrative forms, and the like. Moreover, I will be concerned with the moral status of the television image as such, irrespective of what it is an image of.

Chapter 7 Introducing Film Evaluation from: Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: When we first think of evaluating films, we think initially of film critics. These are people who are in the business of pronouncing on the value of films. There are so many films to see and so little time. Thus, almost all of us have to fall back on the recommendations of film critics in order to inform our choice of viewing fare.

Chapter 11 Toward a Definition of Moving-Picture Dance from: Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: Almost since the inception of moving pictures, those pictures have often featured dance. The obvious reason for this is that the natural subject of moving pictures is movement. And dances—along with hurtling locomotives, car chases, cattle stampedes, tennis matches, intergalactic dog-fights, and the like—move. Thus, a significant portion of the history of moving pictures involves dance movement. Many moving-picture makers have devoted admirable amounts of effort and imagination to portraying dance in or through media as diverse as film, video, and computer animation. The purpose of this essay is to attempt to offer a philosophical characterization of this

Chapter 12 The Essence of Cinema? from: Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: Gregory Currie’s Image and Mind: Film, Philosophy and Cognitive Science¹ is a major event in the study of film. It represents the first thoroughgoing philosophy of film in the analytic tradition. Covering such topics as the essence of cinema, the nature of representation in film, the relation of film to language, the nature of the spectator’s imaginative involvement in film, and problems of film narration and interpretation, the book addresses a gamut of classical questions of film theory and answers them, often in surprising ways, from a perspective richly informed by Currie’s impressive grasp of the philosophy of mind and

Book Title: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years-1916-1938
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): MOHANTY J. N.
Abstract: In his award-winning book The Philosophy of Edmund Husserl: A Historical Development, J. N. Mohanty charted Husserl's philosophical development from the young man's earliest studies-informed by his work as a mathematician-to the publication of hisIdeasin 1913. In this welcome new volume, the author takes up the final decades of Husserl's life, addressing the work of his Freiburg period, from 1916 until his death in 1938.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1npzng

3 Constitution of Nature from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: A complete draft of the second book of the Ideaswas prepared by Husserl in 1912, apparently soon after he wrote the first book. However, it appears that he was not quite satisfied with that draft; he worked on the manuscript from time to time, more so after moving to Freiburg. In 1916, he appointed Edith Stein as his assistant and entrusted her with the task of preparing the second and the third parts of theIdeasfor the publication. Stein prepared two versions of theIdeas II—one in 1916 and another in 1918—using many of Husserl’s lectures

13 The Middle Way from: Abraham's Children
Author(s) MIRAHMADI HEDIEH
Abstract: The Prophet Abraham never liked to eat alone. He felt that food was a divine blessing and, as such, should be shared with others, particularly those in need. Therefore, he made it his constant practice that before a meal he would invite someone to eat with him. One day, Abraham invited a

16 An Islamic Treatise on Tolerance from: Abraham's Children
Author(s) Mobasser Nilou
Abstract: When my book Tolerance and Governance was being put forward for publication (1995), Iran was experiencing its most severe period of political asphyxiation since the revolution. I was forced to leave the country, having been subjected to savage physical assaults at universities and public venues, as well as fierce written attacks in newspapers. I lost my job and security and—far away from my family—spent my time fleeing from country to country (Germany to Britain to Canada). The Iranian Culture Ministry had fallen into the hands of a minister who came from the ranks of extremist conservatives—a minister

Book Title: Sin-A History
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): anderson gary a.
Abstract: Anderson shows how this ancient Jewish revolution in thought shaped the way the Christian church understood the death and resurrection of Jesus and eventually led to the development of various penitential disciplines, deeds of charity, and even papal indulgences. In so doing it reveals how these changing notions of sin provided a spur for the Protestant Reformation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nq1r7

1 what is a sin? from: Sin
Abstract: It is not easy to define a sin. If we pay attention to how people talk, we notice that metaphors are impossible to avoid. For example, slavery in the United States is said to have left a “stain” upon our hands that still awaits “cleansing.” To speak in this fashion is to assume that sin is much more than a violation of a moral norm and that the effects of sin are more extensive than a guilty conscience. A verbal declaration of regret may be fine, but the way a culture grapples with the enduring legacy of sin is another

3 a debt to be repaid from: Sin
Abstract: Sin, I wish to argue, has a history. As we saw in the previous chapter, the Old Testament contains a number of metaphors for sin, the most pre - dominant being that of sin as a burden. This concept changed dramatically, however, during the Second Temple period, an era in which some of the youngest books of the Old Testament were written, as well as a number of nonbiblical books. During this time the metaphor of sin as a burden was replaced by that of sin as a debt.¹ Although there is little evidence in the Hebrew texts of the

4 redemption and the satisfaction of debts from: Sin
Abstract: I resume the exploration of sin as a debt by returning to the Hebrew Bible. By the time we get to materials from the later Second Temple period, such as those at Qumran (second century BCE through the first century CE), the metaphor of sin as a debt has become well established. The dialect of Mishnaic Hebrew, which I assume is close to the Hebrew Jesus would have spoken, illustrates how complete the transformation had become. The usage of nās’ā’‛ǎwōnas an idiom to describe culpability has by and large fallen out of use in these works.¹ One does not

5 ancient creditors, bound laborers, and the sanctity of the land from: Sin
Abstract: In the previous chapter I traced the origins of the metaphor for sin as a debt back to the prophet Second Isaiah. I did not mention, however, that the root rāṣâhalso occurs in Leviticus 26. Although the usage is similar, Leviticus 26 adds one important detail: it assumes that not only Israel but the land as well must repay a debt. The responsibility of the land for its own debt comes as a surprise, for the main concern has been Israel’s responsibility to the commandments she has been given.

7 loans and the rabbinic sages from: Sin
Abstract: Up to this point I have examined how the metaphor of sin as a debt functioned in late biblical material and some early postbiblical texts. These texts adapted the classical Hebrew vocabulary to fit a radical new way of thinking about sin. But to get the best perspective on this metaphor, I turn to the two living languages of first-century Palestine, the era of Jesus of Nazareth and the early rabbinic sages: they are Mishnaic Hebrew and the Palestinian and Babylonian dialects of Aramaic. Mishnaic Hebrew, in its limited sense, refers to the Hebrew of the Mishnah itself, a relatively

9 redeem your sins with alms from: Sin
Abstract: Almost as soon as the idea of sin as a debt appears on the scene, so does its financial counterpart, credit. These two ideas are a natural pair in the commercial world, and they continue to be such in religious thinking. In this respect the idiom of sin as a debt represents a novum, or new idea, in biblical thought, since previous idioms for sin such as stain or weight did not produce such obvious counterparts. Although it is theoretically possible to imagine a virtuous person such as a Mr. Clean, who could have scoured away the blot of sin

10 salvation by works? from: Sin
Abstract: Many readers will find something unsettling about the matter-of-fact way I have interpreted Daniel’s advice to King Nebuchadnezzar. Is the act of giving alms simply a financial exchange between the debtor and his God? If so, it would seem that human beings can “buy” their way out of their sinful state and that the critique of the Protestant reformers applies: humans save themselves by their good works.¹

12 why god became man from: Sin
Abstract: No book on the history of sin as debt would be complete without a discussion of St. Anselm of Canterbury, who served as archbishop there from 1093 to 1109 and is perhaps best known among philosophers for his ontological argument in favor of the existence of God. As such, his work has spawned an enormous literature. Among theologians, however, he is best known for his classic work Cur deus homo(Why God Became Man), in which he articulates why it was necessary for the incarnation to take place.¹ In developing his argument, he provides an account of the sin of

Book Title: On Evil- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): EAGLETON TERRY
Abstract: In this witty, accessible study, the prominent Marxist thinker Terry Eagleton launches a surprising defense of the reality of evil, drawing on literary, theological, and psychoanalytic sources to suggest that evil, no mere medieval artifact, is a real phenomenon with palpable force in our contemporary world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nq3bb

INTRODUCTION from: On Evil
Abstract: Fifteen years ago, two ten-year-old boys tortured and killed a toddler in the north of England. There was an outcry of public horror, though why the public found this particular murder especially shocking is not entirely clear. Children, after all, are only semi-socialised creatures who can be expected to behave pretty savagely from time to time. If Freud is to be credited, they have a weaker superego or moral sense than their elders. In this sense, it is surprising that such grisly events do not occur more often. Perhaps children murder each other all the time and are simply keeping

Is Anatomy Destiny? from: Whose Freud?
Author(s) Moi Toril
Abstract: This volume invites us to consider the place of psychoanalysis in contemporary culture. In modern feminism debates pitting cultural against biological causation have played an important role. Such debates have also arisen in relation to research in biotechnology, neurobiology, sociobiology, and ethnomethodology. I think it could be shown that Freud thinks of the body in terms that undermine the opposition between natural causation and cultural meanings that have been with us since Kant first distinguished between the realms of necessity and freedom. If this is right, then Freud does have a philosophically original contribution to make to contemporary debates about

Introduction from: Whose Freud?
Abstract: This section considers the role of psychoanalysis in posing the question of sexual identity: a question crucial to psychoanalysis, but also one in which Freud’s own views have been most open to attack. Paul Robinson, an intellectual historian, begins by showing how an ambivalent or vacillating perspective toward homosexuality—within Freud’s own work—generates various perspectives on sexual desire and social norms in twentieth-century psychoanalytic thought. On one hand, as Robinson claims, “no one has done more to destabilize the notion of heterosexuality than Freud.” For Freud, the “homosexual object choice” is present in allindividuals’ psychic development; it is

Discussion from: Whose Freud?
Abstract: Eric Santner: I’d like to ask Dominick LaCapra a couple of questions, really for clarification. I’m very taken by this effort to distinguish structural trauma from historical trauma or episodic, contingent trauma, and to distinguish absence or gap from loss. I was wondering if you think that this comes down to the problem of establishing what the object of anxiety is? That is, anxiety at some level is that something has gone missing. Well, what’s gone missing? Well, nothing has gone missing. We don’t know. Yet there’s something objectlike which seems to have gone missing. And part of what might

Introduction from: Whose Freud?
Abstract: Reiser gives the first example of such an isomorphism, focusing “on aspects of dreaming for which cogent data from both psychoanalysis and neuroscience are available.” His essay succinctly shows how the idea of nodal association in dreams

Discussion from: Whose Freud?
Abstract: David Forrest: The imaging technology is progressing so fast it’s practically every trimester they have to revise what they have. I have a report from Scienceof 20 March 98 which lists all these brand-new, super-fast, ultra-fast MRI, EPI, RARE, SPIRAL, BURST, GRASS, all acronymic techniques, ecoplanner techniques. The point is that the resolution, the speed, and the penetrance into mental process is so great. Don’t you think that this enormous wave

Book Title: Agitations-Essays on Life and Literature
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Krystal Arthur
Abstract: We disagree. From small questions of taste to large questions concerning the nature of existence, intellectual debate takes up much of our time. In this book the respected literary critic Arthur Krystal examines what most commentators ignore: the role of temperament and taste in the forming of aesthetic and ideological opinions. In provocative essays about reading and writing, about the relation between life and literature, about knowledge and certainty, about God and death, and about his own gradual disaffection with the literary scene, Krystal demonstrates that opposing points of view are based more on innate predilections than on disinterested thought or analysis.Not beholden to any fashionable theory or political agenda, Krystal interrogates the usual suspects in the cultural wars from an independent, though not impartial, vantage point. Clearly personal and unabashedly belletrist, his essays ask important questions. What makes culture one thing and not another? What inspires aesthetic values? What drives us to make comparisons? And how does a bias for one kind of evidence as opposed to another contribute to the form and content of intellectual argument?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nq906

5 Death, It’s What Ails You from: Agitations
Abstract: You who are about to read this, I salute you. Not because you’re going to die any time soon, but because you aregoing to die. Maybe not today, maybe not tomorrow, but one day your day will come. Don’t think I enjoy pressing your nose against the grave; it’s just that I have a bone to pick with death—two hundred and six, to be precise, all of which will soon enough be picked clean by time and the elements. I’ll just come out and say it: I am appalled at the prospect of my own extinction, outraged at

12 How We Write When We Write About Writing from: Agitations
Abstract: Near the beginning of Enemies of Promise,that strange alloy of literary criticism and autobiography, Cyril Connolly contends that ‘‘it should be possible to learn as much about an author’s income and sex-life from one paragraph of his writing as from his cheque stubs and his love letters.’’ Though this is probably more of a conceit than firm conviction (one can barely identify a writer’s sex, much less sex life, from what may be a few impersonal sentences), Connolly was expressing a general confidence in style’s transparency. ‘‘It is most true,stylus virum arguit,our style betrays us,’’ wrote Robert

four ISRAEL’S SENSE OF PLACE IN JEREMIAH from: The God of All Flesh
Abstract: Recent Old Testament study, in addressing the issue of Israel’s view of time and space, has tended to celebrate time and minimize space as an important faith motif.¹ This emphasis was shared not only by Bultmannian scholars² but also by some

Book Title: Becoming Human Again-The Theological Life of Gustaf Wingren
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Olson Daniel M.
Abstract: One of the most influential Swedish theologians of the twentieth century, Gustaf Wingren’s career spanned more than forty years of upheaval both in his field and around the globe. Provocative and challenging, Wingren revelled in a good argument and this attitude set the tone for much of his scholarship. A Swedish Lutheran, he made his name through his research into the theology of Martin Luther, breaking away from both traditional interpretations of Luther and the theology of his famous teachers, Karl Barth and Anders Nygren, before shifting his focus onto systematic theology. In a fresh take, Bengt Kristensson Uggla delves into the influence of Wingren’s second wife, Greta Hofsten, on the direction of his theology. Hofsten, a left-wing political activist who was searching for a new language of faith, wove Wingren’s work together with her own political philosophy to create an unusual kind of Christian socialism. Her thinking had a profound effect on Wingren, causing him to recontextualise his older work entirely. In Becoming Human Again, Uggla examines how Wingren’s combative nature often served him well as a theologian, driving him to engage with innovations in the field and re-examine his older views.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1p5f1x6

Book Title: The Operation of Grace-Further Essays on Art, Faith, and Mystery
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Wolfe Gregory
Abstract: The Operation of Grace collects a decade’s worth of essays by Gregory Wolfe taken from the pages of Image, the literary journal he founded more than a quarter century ago. As he notes in the preface, his Image editorials, while they cover a wide range of topics, focus on the intersection of “art, faith, and mystery". Wolfe believes that art and religion, while hardly identical, offer illuminating analogies to one another—art deepening faith through the empathetic reach of the imagination and faith anchoring art in a vision beyond the artist’s ego. Several essays dwell on how aesthetic values like ambiguity, tragedy, and beauty enlarge our understanding of the spiritual life. There are also a series of reflections that extend Wolfe’s campaign to renew the neglected and often misunderstood tradition of Christian humanism. Finally, there are sections that contain more personal meditations arising from Wolfe’s involvement in nurturing and promoting the work of emerging writers and artists. The Operation of Grace demonstrates once again why novelist Ron Hansen has spoken of Wolfe as “one of the most incisive and persuasive voices of our generation".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1p5f2hg

Secular Scriptures from: The Operation of Grace
Abstract: There is no disguising

East and West in Miniature from: The Operation of Grace
Abstract: The recent controversy over Pope Benedict XVI’s Regensburg lecture—which touched on the nature of human reason, but which also questioned, in passing, the relationship between faith and reason in Islam—may turn out to be more productive than was at first thought. Among other things, it generated a substantive open letter to the pope signed by thirty-eight respected Muslim clerics—a document that itself is carefully reasoned and gracious. At a time when the rising tide of Islamic fundamentalism and terrorism is being met by increasing fear and stereotyping in the West, any form of dialogue is cause for

Why the Inklings Aren’t Enough from: The Operation of Grace
Abstract: Toward the end of his life, Karl Marx found himself in conversation with an earnest would-be acolyte who was burbling about his plan to found a Marxist club. The older man suddenly rounded on him, declaring: Je ne suis pas une Marxiste!(I am not a Marxist). In a few simple words Marx managed not only to reject the status of cult hero but also to insinuate that systematizing his thought would falsify it.

Two-Way Traffic from: The Operation of Grace
Abstract: In a recent essay, poet Ira Sadoff issued a sweeping denunciation of what he calls the “spiritualization of American poetry.” Entitled “Trafficking in the Radiant” and published in the American Poetry Review, the essay asserts that contemporary poets have been influenced by the resurgence of religiosity in our culture, with disastrous results. “My contention is that using religion as a metaphorical expression of our powerlessness . . . diminishes human agency and makes possible a hierarchical authoritarianism . . . [and] that the Romantic desire to transcend materiality leads to a flight from the social and the sexual.”

Poetic Justice from: The Operation of Grace
Abstract: Before I came down here to deliver this talk on how art and social justice should—and shouldn’t—mix, I posted on Facebook that I was preparing by reading the works of various writers. One commentator singled out Gustave Flaubert from my list and responded with a skeptical “Hmm.” I understood the reaction: after all, Flaubert was known as a writer who cared more for style than social justice (“One never tires of what is well-written, style is life!”). In contrast to the two other great social realists of nineteenth-century French fiction—Honoré de Balzac and Émile Zola—Flaubert rarely

The Four Cultures from: The Operation of Grace
Abstract: An old Albert Brooks film has been rattling around in my head of late: Defending Your Life. Divorced advertising exec fiddles with the CD player in his brand new BMW and plows into a city bus, only to find himself in Judgment City, where he has to account for himself in a jury trial where the evidence consists of episodes from his life. The worst possible result isn’t exactly hell; it’s being sent back to earth for another attempt, rather than moving forward, to a better planet and a better life.

Breath from: The Operation of Grace
Abstract: That farmhouse has long since been torn down, and three gleaming

Book Title: The Only Mind Worth Having-Thomas Merton and the Child Mind
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Williams Rowan
Abstract: In The Only Mind Worth Having, Fiona Gardner takes Thomas Merton’s belief that the child mind is “the only mind worth having" and explores it in the context of Jesus’ challenging, paradoxical, and enigmatic command to become like small children. She demonstrates how Merton’s belief and Jesus’ command can be understood as part of contemporary spirituality and spiritual practice. To follow Christ’s command requires a great leap of the imagination. Gardner examines what it might mean to make this leap when one is an adult without it becoming sentimental and mawkish, or regressive and pathological. Using both psychological and spiritual insights, and drawing on the experiences of Thomas Merton and others, Gardner suggests that in some mysterious and paradoxical way recovering a sense of childhood spirituality is the path towards spiritual maturity. The move from childhood spirituality to adulthood and on to a spiritual maturity through the child mind is a move from innocence to experience to organised innocence, or from dependence to independence to a state of being in-dependence with God.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1p5f2w5

3 Thinking about God as Parent and God as Child from: The Only Mind Worth Having
Abstract: Can we love God as a parent? How confusing does this become if we also love God as the Christ child—indeed as the eternal child within us? Reading the Bible suggests that envisaging God as both parent and child, though a paradox, is yet conceivable and that the one does not cancel out the other. Both are about relationship; one way to understand the everchanging relationship with God is to consider the psychodynamics. As Lancelot Andrewes (1555–1626) expressed it, “Christianity is a meeting.”¹ Using the term “psychodynamics” implies that the relationship with God is never static. It involves

6 The Shadow and the Disguise: from: The Only Mind Worth Having
Abstract: From both the Western and Eastern traditions it is acknowledged that characteristics of childhood are seen as essential for the spiritual life. So what goes wrong as we get older and why is it so hard to hold on to the promise of childhood spirituality? One helpful way to begin to think about it is to understand that as we grow as children we become increasingly compliant and then turn away from the vivid feelings we knew as children. As we learn to fit in and pick and choose certain words and phrases to describe what is happening and what

10 An Invitation to Look and Find Paradise from: The Only Mind Worth Having
Abstract: Present-moment awareness is about creating a gap in the constant busyness of the mind. This also means a break in the continuum between what is past and what lies ahead. It is through such a clear space that new and creative possibilities are born. The closing down of present-moment awareness in the small child happens as the weight of the adult life of care and rational thought gradually but relentlessly obscures the enchanted world. The possibility of re-enchantment and sometimes the invitation to move from the grown-up life of care can come from a child: from being in the presence

Book Title: Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo- Publisher: Quodlibet
Author(s): Schlimme Jann E.
Abstract: Sommario: Stefania Achella, Jann E. Schlimme, Presentazione / PARTE I. GENEALOGIE, CONCETTI, CONFRONTI: Roberto Garaventa, All’origine dell’idea jaspersiana di Weltanschauung / Giuseppe Cantillo, L’ambivalenza delle Weltanschauungen tra ragione ed esistenza / Csaba Olay, Jaspers’ Begriff der "Weltanschauung“ im Anschluss an Dilthey und Weber / Oliver Immel, Heideggers Stellungnahme zur "Psychologie der Weltanschauungen“ als Wegmarke der Jaspers’schen Existenzphilosophie / Michael Steinmann, Wertung und Wertwiderstand. Selbsterfahrung und die antinomische Struktur der Existenz bei Jaspers und Heidegger / Stefania Achella, Il concetto di “mondo" nella Psychologie der Weltanschauungen / Elena Alessiato, Weltanschauungen e politica / Andrea Staiti, Naturalism as Weltanschauung / PARTE II. PRATICHE E ORIENTAMENTI TEORICI: Jean-Claude Gens, Die Weltanschauung zwischen Ideenflucht und Wahnsinnigkeit / Reinhard Schulz, Praktiken des Verstehens und Weltanschauungsanalyse / Anna Donise, Gli involucri tra forma e vita: per una difesa dell’inautentico / Borut Škodlar, Jan Ciglenečki, Multiple Orientations within the Worldviews in Psychosis and Mysticism: Relevance for Psychotherapy / Jann E. Schlimme, Wahnsinns-Erzählungen. Weltanschauung und lange anhaltende Psychoseerfahrung / Burkhart Brückner, Samuel Thoma, Wahn, Weltanschauung und Habitus. Zur sozialwissenschaftlichen Kritik der Theorie des Wahns im Werk von Karl Jaspers
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1p5f306

L’ambivalenza delle Weltanschauungen tra ragione ed esistenza from: Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Cantillo Giuseppe
Abstract: This paper aims to understand the meaning and role that Jaspers attributes to worldviews. By analysing the nature of the Weltanschauungen, the paper shows how Jaspers, inspired by Dilthey, alludes to a fundamental stratum of the Weltanschauung that goes beyond every objective construction, every shell (Gehäuse) and every doctrine, and which is identified with the process of the existential experience. The antinomicity of the lived process and the ambiguity that characterises the worldviews becomes clearer where Jaspers introduces the notion of limit situation. By analysing the relationship between theWeltanschauungenand the philosophical faith, the paper shows that theWeltanschauungen

Heideggers Stellungnahme zur „Psychologie der Weltanschauungen“ als Wegmarke der Jaspers’schen Existenzphilosophie from: Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Immel Oliver
Abstract: This paper focuses on the genesis of Karl Jaspers’ concept of existential philosophy by discussing the intention of Jaspers’ Psychologie der Weltanschauungenand the impact of Martin Heidegger’s review „ Anmerkungen zu Karl Jaspers’ Psychologie der Weltanschauungen“ on Jaspers’ later works. By analyzing personal statements, letters and the consequences of Heidegger’s critique for Jaspers’ subsequent philosophical publications, particularlyDie geistige Situationder Zeit and the three-volumedPhilosophie, I want so show in which respect Heidegger’s review made thePsychologie der Weltanschauungenretrospectively appear as historically „ the earliest work of the later so-called modern existential philosophy“, as Jaspers put it

Gli involucri tra forma e vita: from: Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Donise Anna
Abstract: The present essay analyses Jasper’s concept of “ Gehäuse”. TheGehäuse, “cases” or “shells”, are the forms that define subjectivity, which we work very hard to construct. When the subject experiences change or development, though, the “shell” can become too rigid and suffocating, so the subject feels the need to get out of that form, at the risk of ending up like “an oyster without the shell”. In Jaspers’ perspective, however, these “casings” are unavoidable and their dismissal is a question of “metamorphosis” rather than veritable “destruction”: as soon as one form is rejected, another one is constructed. This paper in

Wahnsinns-Erzählungen. from: Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Schlimme Jann E.
Abstract: Living with ongoing psychotic experiences requires a constant reflective alignment between the parallel psychotic reality (para-actuality, Nebenwirklichkeit) and the socially shared reality (sozial geteilte Wirklichkeit). A fine-grained phenomenological analysis of this manner of living describes the required amount of reflective activity in combination with a loss of certain common-sensical habitualities, the often missing option to communicate one‘s experiences and the necessity to reframe the metaphysical insights as world-view (Weltanschauung), besides the psychotic experiences themselves, as major pitfalls and challenges of ongoing psychotic experiences. In this sense, persons with ongoing psychotic experiences are just like everybody else persons in an adventurous

2. ¿ES POSIBLE UNA TEORÍA DE LA PALABRA Y DEL LÉXICO? from: Teoría semántica y método lexicográfico
Abstract: ¿Es una ilusión la existencia de la unidad palabra, como lo creía Charles Bally (1909: §§ 77-80) hace más de ochenta años y como todavía parece afirmarlo la lingüística contemporánea? ¿Convendrá más, como plantea la conocidaLa lingüística. Guía alfabética(Art. 38) dirigida por André Martinet (1969)¹, “eliminar completamente el términopalabray sustituirlo pormonemaysintagma, según los casos, que tienen la ventaja de ser utilizables con referencia a todas las estructuras lingüísticas”? ¿Por qué, a pesar de ello, se agrega en seguida: “No obstante, es innegable que en el plano psicológico, la palabra es un elemento real

10. LA DESCRIPCIÓN DEL SIGNIFICADO DEL VOCABULARIO NO-ESTÁNDAR from: Teoría semántica y método lexicográfico
Abstract: Debemos al Círculo Lingüístico de Praga la definición más reflexionada y adecuada que se haya podido hacer de la lengua literaria. Obra de varios de los integrantes del Círculo, como Bohuslav Havránek, Josef Vachek o Karel Horálek¹, la definición no obedece a una especulación apriorística acerca de lo que pueden ser sus características, y menos a una posición ideológica en cuanto a la lengua, sino al resultado de sus investigaciones acerca de la historia de las lenguas eslavas y la manera en que se construyeron sus lenguas literarias. Cuando uno estudia la formación de otras lenguas literarias, como la del

11. LA DEFINICIÓN LEXICOGRÁFICA DEL VOCABULARIO DE GERMANÍA Y JERGAL from: Teoría semántica y método lexicográfico
Abstract: El Diccionario de autoridades(1734), asienta quegermanía“es lo mismo que jerigonza” y en el artículo correspondiente ajerigonzadice: “el dialecto o modo de hablar que usan los gitanos, ladrones y rufianes para no ser entendidos, adaptando las voces comunes a sus conceptos particulares, e introduciendo muchas voluntarias”; en seguida agrega: “llámase también germanía”. El núcleo del significado de la palabragermanía, sin embargo, ya era común, al menos, en 1534, según se puede comprobar en el corde: en laSegunda Celestina, de Feliciano de Silva, se lee: “porque palabra no te dirá que no tenga dos entendimientos,

14. HACIA UNA TIPOLOGÍA DE LAS TRADICIONES VERBALES POPULARES from: Teoría semántica y método lexicográfico
Abstract: La lingüística de la actividad verbal, de la energeia, como la proponía Guillermo de Humboldt y la expuso magistralmente Eugenio Coseriu en su clásicoSincronía, diacronía e historia(1973), es una disciplina difícil de concebir y más aún de practicar, en cuanto que los aparatos conceptuales comunes en la lingüística corresponden, no a la consideración de la actividad, laenergeia, sino al estudio delergon, al estudio de la lengua en cuanto producto. Se recogen datos, se elaboran catálogos y clasificaciones, se operan sobre ellos cálculos, tanto cualitativos —el análisis de pares mínimos, los soñados algoritmos de la lingüística formal

15. PARADIGMATIZACIÓN Y CONTEXTO EN LEXICOGRAFÍA from: Teoría semántica y método lexicográfico
Abstract: El Curso de lingüística generalde Ferdinand de Saussure se ha leído desde finales de la Segunda Guerra Mundial como una obra contemporánea; es decir, sus concepciones, que inauguran la lingüística moderna, se han venido tomando como un conjunto de postulados teóricos plenamente válidos desde entonces. Aquí me interesa tomar como punto de partida la dicotomía de lengua y habla. Desde mi punto de vista el sentido profundo de esa dicotomía —como también de la de sincronía y diacronía— consiste en el establecimiento de lascondiciones de posibilidaddel estudio lingüístico, es decir, de las condiciones previas y necesarias para

Book Title: The Cruft of Fiction-Mega-Novels and the Science of Paying Attention
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): LETZLER DAVID
Abstract: While mega-novel text is often intricately meaningful or experimental, sometimes it is just excessive and pointless. On the other hand, mega-novels also contain text that, though appearing to be cruft, turns out to be quite important. Letzler posits that this cruft requires readers to develop a sophisticated method of attentional modulation, allowing one to subtly distinguish between text requiring focused attention and text that must be skimmed or even skipped to avoid processing failures. The Cruft of Fictionshows how the attentional maturation prompted by reading mega-novels can help manage the information overload that increasingly characterizes contemporary life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pc5fzd

3 Life-Writing from: The Cruft of Fiction
Abstract: The first two chapters have dealt with cruft that mimics the excessive, born-textual data of reference guides. However, ever since Tristram Shandy set out to recount his life and opinions, only to find upon finishing the fourth volume that he was barely past his own birth and that “ things have crowded in so thick upon me, that I have not been able to get into that part of my work, towards which, I have all the way, looked forwards,” we have known that the details of a single life can sprawl out similarly.¹ While Tristram finds this situation stressful,

4 The Menippean Satire from: The Cruft of Fiction
Abstract: Though the previous chapters have used mega-novels’ relationships to several nonfictional genres to examine how their detailed accumulation of the facts of real life can overload readers’ attention capacities and subsequently prompt them to modulate their methods of text processing, cruft is not limited to the small-scale cases of the incoherent word, the irrelevant datum, the passing moment of consciousness. The following three chapters will examine how mega-novels’ incorporation of elements from other literary genres produces more extensive but equally pointless cruft, inducing the same characteristic frustration and boredom to provoke a similar reorientation of attention. We will begin by

Introduction from: The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle East
Abstract: This book aims to explain how and why jihadism wove its way into a Sunni social fabric in the throes of a leadership crisis. It shows how this new phenomenon is both exploiting and provoking a deep crisis of authority within Sunni Islam. The setting is the predominantly Sunni Muslim city of Tripoli, Lebanon’s second largest city, with a population of 350,000 inhabitants. Yet the story also encompasses other parts of North Lebanon, as well as western Syria, especially since the outbreak of the Syrian crisis in 2011.

CHAPTER 3 The Anti-Syrian Movement: from: The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle East
Abstract: Former prime Minister Rafiq al-Hariri’s assassination on February 14, 2005, sparked both international pressure and local pro-sovereignty protests, forcing Syrian troops from Lebanon in April. This series of events profoundly transformed Sunni Islamism in North Lebanon.¹ For the first time, the Future Movement (Rafiq al-Hariri’s political party) could extend its political influence to the north of the country, a move that was not possible under the Syrian occupation. Salafi sheikhs with much to gain from the Syrian forces’ scheduled departure also threw their support behind the Future Movement. They hoped in particular to benefit electorally from public reaction to the

CHAPTER 4 The Syrian Regime Reacts: from: The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle East
Abstract: Fatah al-Islam proclaimed its existence from the Palestinian camp of Nahr al-Bared on November 26, 2006. This announcement profoundly changed the political situation that had existed in North Lebanon since the departure of Syrian troops in April 2005. From the beginning, this jihadi group outlined a series of rather grandiose objectives aimed at winning international, Arab, and local Lebanese public opinion over to its cause. It would struggle against the West and its local allies, conduct jihad for the liberation of Palestine, and destroy all those who opposed these glorious purposes. Alongside an intense public relations campaign—featuring press conferences,

CHAPTER 6 The Failure to Create a Lasting Support Base for the Syrian Insurrection from: The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle East
Abstract: To pro-independence Sunni elites in Lebanon, the Syrian uprising presented a unique chance to right the unfavorable domestic position in which they had found themselves ever since Hezbollah became the country’s main political and military force in the 1990s. Sa‘ad al-Hariri, whose father was assassinated by Hezbollah’s operational apparatus, would benefit greatly were the Syrian regime to fall. Potentially, it could be his path back into power and a way for Lebanon to ditch the Syrian-Iranian military agenda. In 2011, at the beginning of what was then called the “Syrian revolution,” many in Lebanon and abroad thought the time was

Epilogue from: The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle East
Abstract: With the fall of al-Qusayr in June 2013 and the Syrian regime’s reconquest of Homs, the Syrian region of Qalamoun, to the northeast of the Anti-Lebanon Mountain Range, has taken on strategic importance for belligerents in both camps. For the regime, “pacification” of Qalamoun is a prerequisite to securing the highway between Damascus and Homs and destroying any form of threat coming from Lebanon. Hezbollah also considers that groups active in the region planned the attacks that struck the southern suburb. After losing the battle of al-Qusayr, thousands of Syrian rebels defending Homs withdrew into this mountainous area, seeking to

Conclusion from: The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle East
Abstract: Syria’s withdrawal from Lebanon following Rafiq al-Hariri’s assassination facilitated the affirmation, within the Sunni milieu, of a political community defined by a

Methodology Underlying the Presentation of Visual Texture in the Gospel of John from: The Art of Visual Exegesis
Author(s) Bloomquist L. Gregory
Abstract: specialists in rhetoric—especially those who deliver addresses, even more than those who analyze them—have long recognized the power of the image to get a point across. One of the first extant examples of sophistic practice, gorgias’s Encomium of Helen, uses words to set beautiful Helen before the audience’s eyes, but also her case.¹ Aristotle’s second book of hisRhetoricis devoted to the means of picturing and presenting character, primarily that of the speaker.² Examples of the power of imagery in contemporary rhetorical practice also abound, especially in the realm of advertising and preaching.³ Preaching is especially interesting

Paul, Imperial Situation, and Visualization in the Epistle to the Colossians from: The Art of Visual Exegesis
Author(s) Maier Harry O.
Abstract: Throughout the past decade, scholars of Christian origins have turned their attention increasingly to the relationship of emergent Christianity to the roman empire.¹ The themes taken up in fact echo ideas presented by new Testament exegetes over a hundred years ago, when German archaeologists made new discoveries about the imperial cult in Asia Minor. Adolf Deissmann, Adolf von Harnack, Ernst Lohmeyer, Paul Wendland, and Karl Bornhäuser, for example, recognizing New Testament echoes of imperial language, argued that biblical authors used political terms and images drawn from the imperial cult to oppose persecuting emperors and a hostile empire.² Contemporary exegetes largely

Armor, Peace, and Gladiators: from: The Art of Visual Exegesis
Author(s) Canavan Rosemary
Abstract: Ephesians 6:10–17 employs clothing and armor imagery to describe the spiritual struggle of the Pauline communities addressed in the letter. A growing field of interpretation looks to the systematic interpretation of such imagery in relation to and in dialogue with the sociopolitical visual landscape. for my part, I wish to engage with the iconographic panorama of the cities in which the biblical texts were written, heard, and read to illuminate the meaning of the text. In this essay, using an adapted sociorhetorical analytic, I engage in a visual exegesis of the clothing and armor images in eph 6:10–17

Graphic Exegesis: from: The Art of Visual Exegesis
Author(s) Nygren Christopher J.
Abstract: Art history is a discipline of images, but more than that it is a discipline that relies on the flexibility of the term image. Images are the vital essence at the center of art history, the essential constituent that distinguishes the field from aesthetics. Most art historians study pictures or sculptures, concrete instances of cultural production, items that index the agency of some person, group, or force that created—or even simply chose to frame or set apart—some object. yet over the last hundred years or so, art history has developed into an increasingly promiscuous field of inquiry that

“Exactitude and Fidelity”? from: The Art of Visual Exegesis
Author(s) Clifton James
Abstract: In a lecture of January 7, 1668, to the Académie Royale de Peinture et de Sculpture, Philippe de Champaigne famously criticized Nicolas Poussin for his failure to adhere faithfully to sacred history in his painting of Rebecca and Eliezerof ca. 1648 (in the Louvre), specifically for not including the camels mentioned in the biblical text, which deserved to be shown, he said, in order to prove the exactitude and the fidelity of the painter in a true subject.¹ Champaigne might well have attended Sebastien Bourdon’s lecture on Poussin’sChrist Healing the Blindof 1650 (also in the Louvre; see

2 Expatriate/Traveler from: Faces of Displacement
Abstract: Literary critics have tended to frame Vynnychenko’s stay abroad in terms of two concepts – émigré and exile, which indeed were dominant faces of his displacement. Such critics have also taken for granted Vynnychenko’s orientation towards Ukraine, focusing on hardships of his displacement. They have referred to his time abroad as “difficult” (Doroshkevych, 219), as a “miserable existence” (Richytsky, 11) and, in the Soviet time in a more ideological vein, as part of an “emigrant rubbish heap” (Shabliovsky, 48). Displacement, however, is a complex phenomenon, and I will challenge the established approach to reveal another face of Vynnychenko’s displacement – the face

Book Title: Bearing Witness-Perspectives on War and Peace from the Arts and Humanities
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Johnstone Tiffany
Abstract: As the centenary of the Great War approaches, citizens worldwide are reflecting on the history, trauma, and losses of a war-torn twentieth century. It is in remembering past wars that we are at once confronted with the profound horror and suffering of armed conflict and the increasing elusiveness of peace. The contributors to Bearing Witness do not presume to resolve these troubling questions, but provoke new kinds of reflection. They explore literature, the arts, history, language, and popular culture to move beyond the language of rhetoric and commemoration provided by politicians and the military. Adding nuance to discussions of war and peace, this collection probes the understanding and insight created in the works of musicians, dramatists, poets, painters, photographers, and novelists, to provide a complex view of the ways in which war is waged, witnessed, and remembered. A compelling and informative collection, Bearing Witness sheds new light on the impact of war and the power of suffering, heroism and memory, to expose the human roots of violence and compassion. Contributors include Heribert Adam (Simon Fraser University), Laura Brandon (Carleton University), Mireille Calle-Gruber (Université La Sorbonne Nouvelle), Janet Danielson (Simon Fraser University), Sandra Djwa (emeritus, Simon Fraser University), Alan Filewod (University of Guelph), Sherrill Grace (University of British Columbia), Patrick Imbert (University of Ottawa), Tiffany Johnstone (PhD Candidate, University of British Columbia), Martin Löschnigg (Graz University), Lauren Lydic (PhD, University of Toronto), Conny Steenman Marcusse (Netherlands), Jonathan Vance (University of Western Ontario), Aritha van Herk (University of Calgary), Peter C. van Wyck (Concordia University), Christl Verduyn (Mount Allison University), and Anne Wheeler (filmmaker).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pq1ds

8 Bearing Witness and Cultural Memory: from: Bearing Witness
Author(s) GRACE SHERRILL
Abstract: Over the past thirty years, and with increasing frequency, Canadian writers, filmmakers, and playwrights have assumed the task of recreating the experiences of Canadians in the Second World War. Canadians are by no means unique in this work of cultural memory and the recreation of the past; artists, historians, and philosophers from many of the countries involved in that global war have revisited it, tried to make sense of the sheer senselessness of many events, and yet stubbornly insisted that later generations must remember and must try to understand. For me, however, since my subject is literature and the arts,

14 from: Bearing Witness
Author(s) DANIELSON JANET HENSHAW
Abstract: The horrors of war and the longing for peace cannot be fully expressed in words: music has the capacity both to evoke deep emotion in individuals and to meld these individual responses into a communal expression, providing a channel for the sharing of intentions, a “human technology for crossing the solipsistic gulf.”¹ It was fitting, therefore, for music to be part of a symposium on The Cultures of War and Peace, voicing the call for a culture of peace.

4 “Are We Still in the Game?”: from: Precarious Visualities
Author(s) OCHSNER BEATE
Abstract: Today, technological progress has shown to what extent there is no longer a distinction in the body between what is organic and what isn’t, between inside and outside, normality and monstrosity, identity and alterity. The reorganization of the real body and the reconfiguration of self-image have, today, turned the body into a sort of instrument, a kind of joystick in a virtual game whose name, eXistenZ, promises existence, which is to say, being, presence, and historicity. But eXistenZ isn’t just a game, it’s an opening or interlude for attaining (rising up) to a higher level of fun leading directly to

5 What the Body Remembers: from: Precarious Visualities
Author(s) LAUZON CLAUDETTE
Abstract: Rebecca Belmore’s Vigil appears to proceed according to the conventions associated with public ceremonies of remembrance. At a nondescript urban intersection, the performance begins with a ritualistic cleansing of the sidewalk, followed by the lighting of candles, the distribution of red roses, and the calling out of names. But this is not any street corner, and Vigil is not a customary vigil. The names that Belmore calls out – cries out, actually, with a palpable sense of anguish – are inscribed on her arms in thick black ink, scarring her skin like hastily made tattoos. After each name is called, Belmore drags

11 Janine Antoni’s from: Precarious Visualities
Author(s) Ralickas Eduardo
Abstract: Eroticism, as it is usually understood, is a depiction of a sexual nature that is deemed acceptable by a given society. However, such a distinctive definition of eroticism seems to be compromised by the concept of pornography, which, at least over the last fifteen years, is increasingly thought to circumscribe the same semantic space.¹ This confirms that the concept of eroticism is highly subjective as it depends on a moral judgment, which, by virtue of its very existence, makes the theoretical use of the former concept unstable. Nevertheless, my investigation into the notion of eroticism is motivated by just such

CHAPTER 4 Who Were the Maoists? from: The Wind From the East
Abstract: However, we now know that Mao was rapidly losing his grip on power. His credibility as a leader had suffered greatly from the debacle of the Great Leap Forward: the disastrous agricultural modernization

CHAPTER 6 Tel Quel in Cultural-Political Hell from: The Wind From the East
Abstract: During the 1960s Tel Quel, led by consummate literary entrepreneur Philippe Sollers, rode to notoriety the crest of nearly every passing intellectual trend: the nouveau roman, structuralism, and poststructuralism. Unsurprisingly, the journal’s political loyalties were equally mercurial. After cultivating a studious apoliticism, it lurched from the most rigid Stalinist orthodoxy to an equally fervent embrace of Cultural Revolutionary China—an instance of revolutionary romanticism that culminated in a celebrated 1974 trip to Beijing. As Communist Party loyalists, the Telquelians “missed out” on May 1968. In a now-legendary episode, Sollers—whose father, incidentally, was a leading Bordeaux industrialist—actively denounced the

INTRODUCTION. from: The Vision of the Soul
Abstract: The reflections with which I begin these pages may seem, at moments, to indulge in the barbed and the bitter, and the reader unfamiliar with my subject and with my own work, and otherwise disinclined to assertive denunciation, may be tempted to let the book slip back quietly to the shelf. But what I have to say on the matter of conservatism and culture emerges from my own life experience and comes in answer to questions salient to my own search for self-knowledge as well as to questions of a more obviously public nature regarding the goods of political and

THREE We Must Retranslate Kalon from: The Vision of the Soul
Abstract: Even before the elections in November 2008, particularly astute conservatives had lamented that many of the supposed victories for their cause were in truth nothing to celebrate. In the years since, the volume of this lament has grown to the point of becoming audible within the main corridors of contemporary political debate. Most of these persons were “paleo” or traditional conservatives, who saw in the George W. Bush administration little that was genuinely conservative and much that testified to the further usurpation of the word “conservative,” and of the Republican Party, by a neo-conservative agenda.¹ That agenda was largely repugnant

FOURTEEN Retelling the Story of Reason from: The Vision of the Soul
Abstract: It is now time to weave together a number of threads we have followed in earlier parts of this book, and to define what they have to tell us on the role of narrative in human life—and particularly in the life of reason and its vocation to truth. As we have seen in discussing both Burke and Dante, venerable claims have been made in our tradition for the power of the poetic and literary imagination; but Burke’s counter-revolutionary importance should also remind us that many of those claims have been compensatory for losses experienced elsewhere. Consider, for instance, the

6 DIGITAL WAR AND THE PUBLIC MIND: from: In/visible War
Author(s) STAHL ROGER
Abstract: In the dozen years since 9/11, the U.S. War on Terror has kept pace, complementing troop draw-downs in Afghanistan and Iraq with drone strikes that have expanded to at least six countries, sweeping surveillance of the global digital grid, and traditional air strikes in Libya and Syria. At the same time, however, the war has faded to invisibility as these conflicts precipitously dropped from the news screen. Beginning in 2005, the occupations of Iraq and Afghanistan migrated from lead story to background noise. By this time, reporters had disembedded en masse, handing over their significantly attenuated role as the “fourth

10 THE IN/VISIBILITY OF LIBERAL PEACE: from: In/visible War
Author(s) SIMONS JON
Abstract: In Episode 7 of the first season of The Newsroom, a TV drama created by Aaron Sorkin, the news breaks that Osama bin Laden has been killed.¹The Newsroomis an enactment of the American liberal imaginary showing an idealized version of television journalism fit for liberal democracy.² The opening credits for Season 1 are “a montage of great moments in the history of TV journalism” that evokes a past, golden age.³ Sorkin admits to portraying “a romanticized, idealized newsroom” in his script that delivers a message that “corporate concerns and ratings-chasings have left the US with an embarrassingly skewed,

Introduction from: Constructing Constructive Theology
Abstract: Theology, as an academic discipline, has found a comfortable place as a “systematic” endeavor. Responding to the rigors of the academy, historical philosophies, and the Enlightenment and modernity, theology has for the most part produced works systematically, using classic theological doctrinal loci one by one in order to arrive at a coherent, rigorous whole, either through dogmatic theology or systematic theology. Yet in recent years, such a preoccupation hasn’t sustained talk about God as it has in the past. Within theological work, there has always been a constructive element or phase of doing theology; recently, however, a methodological trend has

Book Title: The Priority of Injustice-Locating Democracy in Critical Theory
Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): Doshi Sapana
Abstract: Debates about radical democracy, Barnett argues, have become trapped around a set of oppositions between deliberative and agonistic theories-contrasting thinkers who promote the possibility of rational agreement and those who seek to unmask the role of power or violence or difference in shaping human affairs. While these debates are often framed in terms of consensus versus contestation, Barnett unpacks the assumptions about space and time that underlie different understandings of the sources of political conflict and shows how these differences reflect deeper philosophical commitments to theories of creative action or revived ontologies of "the political." Rather than developing ideal theories of democracy or models of proper politics, he argues that attention should turn toward the practices of claims-making through which political movements express experiences of injustice and make demands for recognition, redress, and re pair. By rethinking the spatial grammar of discussions of public space, democratic inclusion, and globalization, Barnett develops a conceptual framework for analyzing the crucial roles played by geographical processes in generating and processing contentious politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pwt43v

CHAPTER 1 An Awareness of Politics from: The Priority of Injustice
Abstract: Democracy seems to have a simple enough meaning. It means “rule by the people.” Or it means “rule by the many,” to distinguish it from monarchy (rule by a single person), aristocracy (rule by the best), or anarchy (the absence of rule). It is common enough to note that the word “democracy” derives from the Greek words “demos” (the people) and “ kratos” (power). But, as Philip Pettit observes, “Each of these words is ambiguous in an interesting way.”¹ Are the people a unified community or a more pluralistic and divided populace? Should power be understood as equivalent to rule, as

CHAPTER 2 Criteria for Democratic Inquiry from: The Priority of Injustice
Abstract: In this chapter I want to elaborate further on why thinking about democracy in an ordinary way, as suggested at the end of the previous chapter, should lead us away from supposing that there is a particular form of politics that is properly political, as if grasping this form would allow lesser forms to be characterized as postpolitical. In particular, I want to consider how best to understand the problem of deriving “context-transcending” principles from the specific situations in which the meanings of democratic politics are articulated. I take it for granted that this possibility can no longer be premised

CHAPTER 6 Claims of the Affected from: The Priority of Injustice
Abstract: The chapters in part 2 tracked the way in which strongly ontological interpretations of the political are used to sustain a priori models of proper politics and real democracy. These models underwrite laments about the postpolitical condition as well as excited declarations of the radical potential of dramatic protest events. From within this worldview, properly political events have no determinative content—they exceed given forms of expression and order. Political events occur when singularities that cannot be represented in current formations of political life make their presence felt. Across their variety, whether informed by readings of Spinoza or strands of

CONCLUSION from: The Priority of Injustice
Abstract: I have sought in this book to trace divergent ways of conceptualizing the sources of transformative political action in radical thought. In so doing, I have tried to draw into view how radical theorists’ interest in democracy is not simply driven by a concern with substantive or procedural questions of governance, participation, resistance, or rule. Democracy arises in a broad range of Left theory as a worry about the status, the legitimacy even, of the vocation of critique itself. What is at stake in assessing different theories is not simply whether they successfully identify the possibility of social transformation, perhaps

5 AMERICAN FICTION AND THE ACT OF GENOCIDE from: Textual Silence
Abstract: Paradoxically, the more time that separates the Holocaust from the present, and so the less available the Holocaust is in terms of eyewitness testimony, the more accessible it becomes to readers and writers of Holocaust fiction and the more it becomes historically normalized.¹ Whereas eyewitness authors overtly acknowledge the impossibility of reading their texts in the truest sense of the word—a consequence of reaching the limits of language and representation—contemporary authors, often in an effort to shorten the distance between themselves and the historical event at hand, create a version of the Holocaust that is increasingly available as

CHAPTER 3 Posidonius and Other Stoics on Extra-Sensory Knowledge from: Divination and Human Nature
Abstract: As we have seen, Plato and Aristotle treat divinatory insight as a curiosity, an epiphenomenon of human anatomy and cognition. For them, building a theory of it means proposing an alternative system of information-processing, paratactic to the everyday rational system. They revert to the lower orders of the soul by a process of elimination. Since divination seems not to have a place in the normal modes of thinking, they propose that some other form of insight dwells in the soul’s other parts, situated closely to our creaturely selves. In Plato’s case, we have the appetitive soul on occasion finding its

2 “Tangled in a Golden Mesh”: from: Restless Secularism
Abstract: For Wallace Stevens, the most dangerous residue of religion for aesthetics lay in the tendency of poetic language to generate religious metaphors and anthropomorphisms. The fiction of Virginia Woolf discloses another danger for aesthetics: the propensity of modern experiences of beauty and sublimity to engender religious modes of thought and desire that are no longer intelligible within a secular conception of the world. For Woolf’s characters, the beautiful (and its modern cousin, the sublime) is suspended in the uncertain space between religious and secular ontologies. The intensity of experiences of beauty amongher characters is matched only by the suspicion

INTRODUCTION from: Saints Alive
Abstract: The etymology of the word “text,” like all etymology, reveals buried connotations that haunt the contemporary meaning beneath the level of active memory. For most of us, “text” means the written document, and even in the more nuanced semiological concept, texts are “sign-systems, linguistic or non-linguistic” ( Concise Oxford Dictionary of Literary Terms), the plural “systems” suggesting the disintegration of the unified concept of “text” into texts of different kinds: verbal, visual, aural, gestural, and so on. The etymology of the word, however, seems to resist divisions, indicating integration and unification: the participle of the verb, textus, from which we get

Introduction: from: Stories of the Middle Space
Author(s) BAKHTIN MIKHAIL
Abstract: Lazing on the deck in the hazy warmth of a late afternoon in August, I had been idly flicking through the pages of our city’s monthly glossy magazine, a publication which depends heavily on upmarket advertising and is “mailed to selected homes” in our area. Sandwiched between a piece about customized tailoring and a full spread heralding a new townhomes complex, and interrupted by a section called “Body and Soul: Your Better Health and Wellness Guide” (“Learn to live in the present,” “Get into rhythm with nature,” “Become a child again,” etc., etc.), thirteen whole pages had been given over

4 Writing with Photographs: from: Stories of the Middle Space
Author(s) SHIELDS CAROL
Abstract: Thus far in this exploration of the fictions of postmodern realism we have considered three oxymoronic categories of the “middle space”: historiographic metafiction, magic realism, and parodic myth. We have seen how each in its palimpsestic boundary-crossings offers specific culturally sensitive possibilities for narrative-as-ethics. Now, in this chapter, I want to look at a particular non-verbal form of storytelling, and that is photography. I am going to argue that, because photographs are both dependent on the givenness of the physical world and yet at the same time manifestly constructed, they can be read as paradigmatic of postmodern realism. In light

Epilogue: from: Stories of the Middle Space
Abstract: Though A.S. Byatt dismisses Christian faith as a viable personal option, it is no surprise that as a literary critic and a writer she has a profound appreciation of the foundational nature of the Christian tradition for Western literature and art. She understands Christian stories and symbols as fictional but still powerful. When she writes in her key essay on Van Gogh that we all make sense out of our life experiences by using the myths and fictions of our ancestors, she adds that “we play, in a sense, with so few essentials, since the myths became defined as fictions”

The Meaning of Old Age: from: A World Growing Old
Author(s) Moody Harry R.
Abstract: Does old age have any meaning? Does the prolongation of life really amount to a benefit either for individuals or for society? Or on the contrary have recent gains in human life expectancy been instead a prolongation of decrepitude, frailty, and a meaningless existence? No topic seems less promising for productive public debate than a discussion about the “meaning of life.” Talk about “meaning” is notoriously difficult and divisive. Yet without confronting questions about the meaning of old age, we risk impoverishing public discussion of choices that we all must face.

Will There Be a Scarcity of Resources? from: A World Growing Old
Author(s) Thorslund Mats
Abstract: One of the major issues in the debate about the future of care is how to keep costs under control while meeting the growing demands for care. Addressing that, especially on an international scale, is far from easy. How are we to determine what the demands for care will most likely be? Even if it is not possible to estimate the future number of dependent elderly persons with any precision, it is hard to ignore the most probable scenario: a substantial increase in the number of the oldest old.

Caring for the Elderly: from: A World Growing Old
Author(s) Parker Marti G.
Abstract: In most industrialized countries, the needs and demands for medical care and social services for elderly people are increasing. There are several reasons for this. One factor these countries have in common is that the number and the proportion of elderly persons is increasing. This is especially true for persons over eighty years of age. The increase is expected to continue into the next century. Since it is the oldest groups that have the greatest need for care and services, this development is creating a challenge for welfare states.

Solidarity with the Elderly and the Allocation of Resources from: A World Growing Old
Author(s) ter Meulen Ruud H. J.
Abstract: One of the cornerstones of European health care systems is the principle of solidarity. The care of the elderly, including health care and social care, is in many respects based on this principle: the young contribute to the costs of care for the old, who have a greater risk of disease and handicaps. But the increasing demand for care by the elderly—resulting from epidemiological changes as well as various social processes—is putting solidarity between the young and the old under strain. Particularly the medicalization of old age, which is draining away resources from long-term care, is an important

The Meaning of Old Age Impeded by Chronic Disease from: A World Growing Old
Author(s) Keller Frieder
Abstract: Increasing life expectancy and decreasing birthrates are responsible for a significant demographic change in the industrial nations. In Germany, the proportion of people who are sixty years and older is about 20 percent of the total population; this is similar to other Western nations. Demographic projections show that by the year 2025 about one-third of our population will be over sixty. Already by the year 2000, Germany will have the highest rate of people over sixty compared with the other European countries, the United States, Canada, and Japan.¹

The Goals and Ends of Medicine: from: The Goals of Medicine
Author(s) Pellegrino Edmund D.
Abstract: Medicine today is in an unprecedented state of confusion about its identity, about its role and the role of physicians in contemporary society. Philosophers and judicial opinions are disassembling the Hippocratic Oath and ethic; medical care has become a commodity transacted as a business and organized as an industry; insurance companies see in medicine an investment opportunity; scientists and engineers see it as the subject of technical prestidigitation.

Book Title: Redescribing the Gospel of Mark- Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Miller Merrill P.
Abstract: This final volume of studies by members of the Society of Biblical Literature's consultation, and later seminar, on Ancient Myths and Modern Theories of Christian Origins focuses on Mark. As with previous volumes, the provocative proposals on Christian origins offered by Burton L. Mack are tested by applying Jonathan Z. Smith's distinctive social theorizing and comparative method. Essays examine Mark as an author's writing in a book culture, a writing that responded to situations arising out of the first Roman-Judean war after the destruction of the Jerusalem temple in 70 CE. Contributors William E. Arnal, Barry S. Crawford, Burton L. Mack, Christopher R. Matthews, Merrill P. Miller, Jonathan Z. Smith, and Robyn Faith Walsh explore the southern Levant as a plausible provenance of the Gospel of Mark and provide a detailed analysis of the construction of Mark as a narrative composed without access to prior narrative sources about Jesus. A concluding retrospective follows the work of the seminar, its developing discourse and debates, and the continuing work of successor groups in the field.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1qd8zmm

On Smith, On Myth, On Mark from: Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Arnal William E.
Abstract: As a preliminary matter, I note that i find myself increasingly ambivalent about the role of theory in the study of religion. On the one hand, I have long

Markan Grapplings from: Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Matthews Christopher R.
Abstract: My agreement with the steering committee for this paper was to offer reflections on aspects of the other papers prepared for our sessions in Toronto. Both Burton L. Mack and William E. Arnal have responded in some detail to Jonathan Z. Smith’s extensive work that allows the seminar to conceptualize a theoretical grappling hook for the recovery of the “submerged” Markan situation. Mack’s and Arnal’s coverage of Smith’s contributions has allowed me the luxury of focusing on some of the issues that they have raised from my own perspective. I am in complete accord with Arnal’s sentiments, expressed at the

Book Title: The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer-Building on the Work of Edmund D. Pellegrino
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Kissell Judith Lee
Abstract: This book illuminates issues in medical ethics revolving around the complex bond between healer and patient, focusing on friendship and other important values in the healing relationship. Embracing medicine, philosophy, theology, and bioethics, it considers whether bioethical issues in medicine, nursing, and dentistry can be examined from the perspective of the healing relationship rather than external moral principles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1qd8zv7

Friendship as an Ideal for the Patient-Physician Relationship: from: The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Davis F. Daniel
Abstract: The title of this collection is rich in possibilities for ethical analysis and reflection. It projects two different ideals of the health care professional: as a healer and as a friend to the patient. I have interpreted the title of this volume as a provocative challenge to explore and assess the cogency of these ideals—particularly the latter. Thus, focusing on the physician and the profession of medicine, I address two interrelated questions. First, is friendship a viable ideal for the patient-physician relationship? Second, does “being a friend to the patient” provide medical students with an appropriate ideal for their

Learning through Experience and Expression: from: The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Benner Patricia
Abstract: Florence Nightingale envisioned the work of the nurse as placing the body in the best condition for repair and recovery.² In the West, nursing

Moral Courage: from: The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Purtillo Ruth B.
Abstract: Edmund Pellegrino’s work on medical humanism stands out among contemporary writings devoted to a deep understanding of the health professional as healer and friend. Time and again I have turned to Pellegrino’s work to regain my moral equilibrium as a health professional and bioethicist. His examination is instructive for many scholars in their search for resources available to health professionals: What will assist professionals in their desire to walk the walk of respect for patients? What can educators do to nurture “the spirit of sincere concern” that initially motivated many professionals to enter their chosen field? As important, how can

The Search for the Meaning of the Human Body from: The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Kissell Judith Lee
Abstract: Emerging biotechnology is producing a genre of cases that question, in an unprecedented way, the ethical meaning and significance of the human body in the practice of medicine. These cases span clinical practice and research, laboratory experimentation and public policy. Examples include the cultivation of human embryonic stem cells for various research purposes, including the generation of substitute body tissues and organs; l the selling of human tissue by not-for-profit research institutions to for-profit health product and pharmaceutical companies; the use of bone from a hip replacement for dental procedures; the accessing, for experimental purposes, of stored pathology specimens;² the

Prophet to the Profession: from: The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Campbell Courtney S.
Abstract: The ethos of medicine as a profession is under challenge and critique as never before. Under the influence of managed care and public policy regulations—and under the pressure of public image of medical professionals—physicians are asked and indeed demanded to deliver the highest quality medicine at the lowest possible cost to the greatest number of people. As patients increasingly become “customers” and “consumers,” physicians find their roles undergoing a transformation to those of “retailers” and “providers” in the delivery of a market commodity—namely, health care. This context seems guaranteed to generate patient and political discontent with medicine

Money, Medicine, and Morals from: The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Andereck William S.
Abstract: One problem that individuals venturing into the health care debate encounter is the multiplicity and complexity of special interests, each representing something different and contradictory to the whole. To seek order in this chaos, it is easier to start from the perspective of the big picture—global budgets, competitive health care purchasing groups, refocusing physicians on primary rather than specialty care—rather than address personal stories and needs.

En busca del efecto útil de las normas internacionales: from: La influencia de las víctimas en el tratamiento jurídico de la violencia colectiva.
Author(s) Álvarez Javier Chinchón
Abstract: En el marco de los trabajos que conforman la presente obra, esta contribución inicial tiene por objeto construir y ofrecer una primera visión de conjunto del tema general que aquí se analiza. Su intención no responde a tratar de exponer una solución global, ni tan siquiera mi solución general, sino que sólo pretende establecer la que yo estimo como perspectiva adecuada, o el correcto modo de enfocar jurídicamente, los muchos problemas que suelen o pueden presentarse en los contextos de violencia colectiva respecto a lo que se conoce, desde hace años, como deberes en materia de verdad, justicia, reparación y

El impacto de las jurisdicciones penales internacionales en la finalización de un conflicto de violencia grave y la consolidación de la paz from: La influencia de las víctimas en el tratamiento jurídico de la violencia colectiva.
Author(s) Eiroa Pablo D.
Abstract: El Estatuto de la Corte Penal Internacional (ECPI) establece que los crímenes que tipifica (en adelante, crímenes internacionales) constituyen una amenaza para la paz, y que no deben quedar sin castigo para contribuir a su prevención¹.

El papel de las víctimas respecto de los mecanismos utilizados en la justicia transicional from: La influencia de las víctimas en el tratamiento jurídico de la violencia colectiva.
Author(s) Martínez Gema Varona
Abstract: Existen muy pocos trabajos en nuestro contexto que exploren, críticamente y en profundidad, la conexión entre la justicia restaurativa y la transicional. Esta última debe entenderse, no como un guión dado de mecanismos para alcanzar una paz justa (Arthur, 2009), sino como un término descriptivo de procesos muy diversos en contextos de transición política que, según los datos, fracasan en gran medida al no lograr evitar posteriores episodios de violencia².

Discapacidad, educación y vida digna: from: Educación y capacidades: hacia un nuevo enfoque del desarrollo humano.
Author(s) Gozálvez Vicent
Abstract: Pero, ¿de qué inclusión estamos hablando? Actualmente la inclusión educativa hace referencia a la consideración como sujetos de pleno derecho a las personas con perfiles culturales o socio-económicos diferentes, aspiración de la llamada educación intercultural. En este texto nos centraremos sin embargo en la inclusión de las personas con diversidad funcional a nivel intelectual.

Book Title: Cather Studies, Volume 11-Willa Cather at the Modernist Crux
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): Thacker Robert
Abstract: Willa Cather at the Modernist Cruxexamines Willa Cather's position in time, in aesthetics, and in the world. Born a Victorian in 1873, Cather made herself a modernist through the poems, stories, and novels she wrote and published into the twentieth century. Beginning with a prologue locating Cather's position, this volume of Cather Studies offers three sets of related essays.The first section takes up Cather's beginnings with her late nineteenth-century cultural influences. The second section explores a range of discernible direct connections with contemporary artists (Howard Pyle, Frederic Remington, and Ernest Blumenschein) and others who figured in the making of her texts. The third section focuses onThe Song of the Lark, a novel that confirms Cather's shift westward and elaborates her emergent modernism. An epilogue by the editors ofThe Selected Letters of Willa Catheraddresses how the recent availability of these letters has transformed Cather studies. Altogether, these essays detail Cather's shaping of the world of the early twentieth century and later into a singular modernism born of both inherited and newer cultural traditions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1qv5psc

Introduction: from: Cather Studies, Volume 11
Author(s) THACKER ROBERT
Abstract: When in My ÁntoniaWilla Cather concludes the story of Mr. Shimerda’s burial, his grave having been placed by Mrs. Shimerda and Ambrosch at “the southwest corner of their own land,” perhaps to satisfy an old Bohemian custom that a suicide be buried at a crossroads, she explains through Jim Burden how the roads that came later, as his grandfather had foreseen, deviated slightly so as to avoid passing over the suicide’s grave. Stepping back, Jim also writes that “I never came upon that place without emotion, and in all that country it was the spot most dear to me.

3 Ántonia and Hiawatha: from: Cather Studies, Volume 11
Author(s) MURPHY JOSEPH C.
Abstract: In an 1882 photograph taken in Washington DC, Willa Cather, aged about nine, wears a cross on a cotton lace dress and grips a bow and arrow fully her own height (fig. 3.1). She is out-fitted for a recitation of Henry Wadsworth Longfellow’s Song of Hiawatha(1855). At the ripe moment in her performance, Cather reportedly “would drop on one knee and shoot her arrow into the imaginary forest,” in step with Longfellow’s verse: “Then, upon one knee uprising /Hiawatha aimed an arrow” (161).¹ Having committed the lines to memory, she embodied them in pose and picture.

Real Women and Literary Airbrushing: from: Early Jewish Writings
Author(s) Taylor Joan E.
Abstract: In De vita contemplativaPhilo describes a group of contemplative Jewish ascetics who exemplify philosophical ideals. They live outside Alexandria, without possessions, and spend most of their time focusing on God, or rather “Being” (Contempl.2), studying scripture, and composing music in small huts, gathering together only on Sabbath days for communal teaching and a meal. Every seven weeks this extends to an all-night sacred event of dancing and singing, configured in strongly cultic terms.¹ Philo states women’s inclusion within his example at the start (Contempl. 2), and he then mentions them specifically when they appear with men on the

The World of Qumran and the Sectarian Dead Sea Scrolls in Gendered Perspective from: Early Jewish Writings
Author(s) Grossman Maxine L.
Abstract: The religious world represented in the sectarian Dead Sea Scrolls is one that assumes distinctive roles for women and men, as well as very particular understandings of acceptable gender dynamics and sexual norms. a feminist critical reading of these texts “against the grain,” however, reveals some surprising possibilities for women’s presence, participation, and authority in the communities associated with these texts. Such a reading also reveals significant dynamics of contestation around these social roles. awareness of the apparent power dynamics in the sectarian scrolls suggests that readers must be cautious in making historical claims with regard to the textual evidence.

PROLOGUE: from: Identity and Control
Abstract: From studies of sociocultural process of interest this book distills and integrates analytic themes. “Of interest”? To whom? Use “observer” as placeholder for the great variety of perceivers (personal or not) who may, singly or jointly, figure in and/or influence and/or unobtrusively observe:

THREE THREE DISCIPLINES from: Identity and Control
Author(s) Steiny Don
Abstract: Disciplines offer rules of the games that yield coordination in tasks in an otherwise messy world. Joint tasks of many sorts get done and keep getting done. Disciplines order ties between identities, enabling joint accomplishment of tasks. To persist and reproduce itself, any joint accomplishment must root in and emerge from some focusing, some disciplining of the ties and talk, as presented in chapter 2, among theidentities, presented in chapter 1.

EIGHT OVERVIEW AND CONTEXTS from: Identity and Control
Author(s) Corona Victor
Abstract: How does the approach of this book differ from existing analyses of social process? I start this overview with that question. Then I develop how contexts and contextualizing are central to all the previous chapters. Following that, I sketch the gist of each of the chapters, and point to some alternative angles, after which I return to linguistics, as in the prologue. The central third of this overview deals with operationalizing my approach through explicit modeling. The chapter ends with two sections of further musings about context.

Capítulo 2 SEÑAS PARTICULARES DE ROBERTO BURGOS CANTOR from: Raíces de la memoria
Abstract: Una madrugada en que viajaba por una trocha en las afueras de Cartagena, a bordo de una Dodge 55, Roberto Burgos Cantor escuchó de los labios de su padre una expresión que no quería parecer indiscreta: sabía que estaba escribiendo. Burgos recuerda¹ que en ese instante sintió una gran vergüenza. Pero tal vez ese rostro ruborizado ya insinuaba con tal sutil gesto el valor personal que nuestro autor asignaba a la literatura para una sociedad. Burgos evoca esta escena poco después de cumplir sus 50 años, tiempo alrededor del cual escribiría Señas particulares, su propio testimonio de época. Consideraba que

CONCLUSIÓN from: Raíces de la memoria
Abstract: La ceiba de la memoriaes una Novela Total que sintetiza múltiples géneros y estéticas, entre ellos la Nueva Novela Histórica, propiciada a su vez por el Romanticismo, el relato histórico, la escritura testimonial, la poesía negra y mulata antillana, la descripción etnográfica, la crónica de los colonizadores y el estilo neobarroco.

Capítulo 1 CARTOGRAFÍAS DE LA CRÍTICA from: Transculturación narrativa: La clave Wayuu en Gabriel García Márquez
Abstract: El universo literario de todo escritor es percibido a través de perspectivas o rejillas de interpretación que lo han juzgado e, inevitablemente, clasificado. Siendo la existencia de tal dispositivo crítico una realidad previa para la llegada de todo texto literario ante la comunidad de lec tores, esto permite afirmar que un texto literario no llega a las manos del lector sino que se le hace llegar. De hecho, al entrar en contacto con la bibliotecade los libros escritos por un autor, el lector accede a un terreno que ya no es « virgen »; no accede directamente a los

Capítulo 5 ESQUEMAS ARQUETIPALES WAYUU Y ESQUEMAS ARQUETIPALES DE LA SOBRENATURALEZA GARCIAMARQUIANA from: Transculturación narrativa: La clave Wayuu en Gabriel García Márquez
Abstract: Si hay entre el mito wayúu y la fábula garciamarquiana una relación diacrónica ella se halla a un nivel más profundo de la lengua narradora pues el mito no es sólo un conjunto de motivos o temas dispersos que se mani-fiestan en la expresión sino también, y sobre todo, un sistema de semanticidad que aterrizaen los relatos (en la lengua) desde una profundidad de sentido que en cierta forma es su matriz.

Capítulo 2 LA EVOLUCIÓN HUMANA EN EL PROCESO DE EVOLUCIÓN VITAL: from: Construcción psicológica y desarrollo temprano del sujeto.
Abstract: Si bien son muchos los académicos e investigadores que han realizado profundos recorridos sobre los modos de humanización y constitución subjetiva, social y antropológica del ser humano (Freud, Jung, Dolto, Melanie Klein, Mannoni, Levi Strauss, Wallon, De Ajuriaguerra, Mazet, entre otros), he querido plantear en este libro el resultado de los recorridos realizados en mi práctica clínica con niños, adolescentes y adultos con severas perturbaciones de la vida psicológica como el autismo. Reconozco que este itinera rio conlleva dificultades, sé que los conceptos que abordaré tienen diversas formas de interpretarse, sin embargo, quiero plasmar aquí la comprensión surgida de la

Capítulo 3 LA EVOLUCIÓN HUMANA EN EL PROCESO DE EVOLUCIÓN VITAL: from: Construcción psicológica y desarrollo temprano del sujeto.
Abstract: Este mito de Prometeo ofrece un sentido profundo acerca de la consciencia; en él encontramos una apología a esa no consciencia de la humanidad expresada en: Miraban en vano, sin ver; oían sin oír. Vagaban como fantasmas, sin poder ayudarse de lo creado.

Capítulo 5 LA EXPERIENCIA VITAL DEL BEBÉ EN ÚTERO from: Construcción psicológica y desarrollo temprano del sujeto.
Abstract: Gracias a los avances realizados por la ingeniería médica que nos ha do tado de herramientas y de técnicas de imágenes cada vez más sofisticadas, ahora podemos asomarnos al mundo del bebé en útero, al que no se había llegado con tanta claridad, para comprender no solo la constitución del organismo como tal sino los modos como el bebé da comienzo a su organiza- ción psicológica. La revisión de estos conocimientos da lugar al interés que tengo con este capítulo de realizar una aproximación comprensiva —desde la psicología— a los modos como el ser humano se constituye en una unidad

II. Percepción from: Ciencia y modulación del pensamiento poético
Abstract: Nuestra incursión en la obra Égéeatiende a los paradigmas fenomenológicos de la percepción. El objetivo de este apartado es sentar las bases de una investigación que comienza en la filosofía y termina en la neurobiología, acerca de la relación que la percepción establece con el conocimiento. Para ello se pensaráÉgéedesde algunos instrumentos fenomenológicos, principalmente desde la noción dePensée-paysage, propuesta por Michel Collot, sin por ello eludir otros modos de conocimiento «no fenomenológico» que se manifiestan en la obra. Adviértase que, si bien la fenomenología se expresa en un lenguaje distinto a la teoría literaria, —tal como

“Single Sisters” and Occupations: from: Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) NAKA TOMOMI
Abstract: “How old are you?” “Are you married?” “Do you have children?” These are the questions I was often asked when I first visited conservative Mennonite families in Lancaster County, Pennsylvania in July 1999. At the time, I was a graduate student at a Japanese university researching tourism in Lancaster. I was a little perplexed in hearing the same questions over and over again, but I explained that I was in my mid-twenties, single without children, and had no relatives in the United States. I answered their questions as accurately as I could, but in part because of my limited English,

“Tirelessly Working to Dispense Her Own Wisdom”: from: Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) DOWDESWELL TRACEY LEIGH
Abstract: The ideology of scientific motherhood began to gain ground in Canada in the late nineteenth century, and came to rationalize mothering for Mennonite women along expert and scientific lines. Scientific motherhood was a widespread cultural movement that sought to reproduce the conditions of industrialization and regulate the modes of women’s labour inside the “factory” home. Scientific motherhood is closely associated with urbanization, industrialization, the medicalization of childbirth, and the increasing popularity of artificial formula that characterized its rise during the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries (see Apple), a time of significant Mennonite resettlement in Canada. For Canadian mothers, including

An Evangelical Reorientation: from: Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) ANDERSON CORY
Abstract: When the beachy amish-mennonites withdrew from the Old Order Amish,¹ they not only loosened restrictions on dress and technology usage, but adopted evangelical Christian theology, that is, a preoccupation with the sudden, dramatic salvation of individual souls (Cronk; Geiger). Yet, Beachy Amish-Mennonites have sought to retain Amish characteristics, including an emphasis on lifelong redemption through separatist community life, defined gender roles, and distinct practices. This hybridization of evangelical and Old Order reorganized their society in nuanced ways, including how women contributed to community and family formation. Among the Amish, women are responsible for having and raising children, that is, perpetuating

“I Always Played Restaurant”: from: Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) KLASSEN DOREEN HELEN
Abstract: A common assumption concerning childhood play in societies with well-entrenched gender roles and conservative religious values is that imaginative play is discouraged and that play simply replicates anticipated “real-life roles” (Carlson, Taylor, and Levin 538; Taylor and Carlson 257). However, scholars of cross-cultural research on childhood, and particularly on childhood play, argue that children’s play is more independent of pragmatic expectations and adult supervision than often assumed (Aguilar 29-30, 37; Edwards 335-7; Rabain-Jamin, Maynard, and Greenfield 204-5; Watson-Gegeo 148; McMahon and Sutton-Smith 297-8), since children’s symbolic behaviour is not necessarily compliant, but at times even subversive, defying cultural expectations (Ackerley

Book Title: Natal Signs-Cultural Representations of Pregnancy, Birth and Parenting
Publisher: Demeter Press
Author(s): BURTON NADYA
Abstract: Natal Signs: Cultural Representations of Pregnancy, Birth and Parenting explores some of the ways in which reproductive experiences are taken up in the rich arena of cultural production. The chapters in this collection pose questions, unsettle assumptions, and generate broad imaginative spaces for thinking about representation of pregnancy, birth, and parenting. They demonstrate the ways in which practices of consuming and using representations carry within them the productive forces of creation. Bringing together an eclectic and vibrant range of perspectives, this collection offers readers the possibility to rethink and reimagine the diverse meanings and practices of representations of these significant life events. Engaging theoretical reflection and creative image making, the contributors explore a broad range of cultural signs with a focus on challenging authoritative representations in a manner that seeks to reveal rather than conceal the insistently problematic and contestable nature of image culture. Natal Signs gathers an exciting set of critically engaged voices to reflect on some of life’s most meaningful moments in ways that affirm natality as the renewed promise of possibility.Natal Signs: Cultural Representations of Pregnancy, Birth and Parenting explores some of the ways in which reproductive experiences are taken up in the rich arena of cultural production. The chapters in this collection pose questions, unsettle assumptions, and generate broad imaginative spaces for thinking about representation of pregnancy, birth, and parenting. They demonstrate the ways in which practices of consuming and using representations carry within them the productive forces of creation. Bringing together an eclectic and vibrant range of perspectives, this collection offers readers the possibility to rethink and reimagine the diverse meanings and practices of representations of these significant life events. Engaging theoretical reflection and creative image making, the contributors explore a broad range of cultural signs with a focus on challenging authoritative representations in a manner that seeks to reveal rather than conceal the insistently problematic and contestable nature of image culture. Natal Signs gathers an exciting set of critically engaged voices to reflect on some of life’s most meaningful moments in ways that affirm natality as the renewed promise of possibility.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1rrd8tc

Introduction from: Natal Signs
Author(s) BURTON NADYA
Abstract: Although most readily accessible popular representations remain conventional and banal, just as notably we find ourselves increasingly confronted

That Fat Man is Giving Birth: from: Natal Signs
Author(s) SURKAN K. J.
Abstract: “Did you always want to be pregnant?” The social worker peered across the room at the two of us, but the question is directed to me, since I am the patient. My partner and I are sitting in an office in a prestigious urban teaching hospital, on a floor dedicated to reproductive medicine. On any given day in this location, scores of women emerge from the elevator, sit in waiting rooms, have vital signs checked, undergo blood tests, ultrasounds, and internal exams, and consult with doctors, nurses, social workers, and patient coordinators—all in the attempt to have a baby.

Gay Men’s Narratives of Pregnancy in the Context of Commercial Surrogacy from: Natal Signs
Author(s) DEMPSEY DEBORAH
Abstract: Historically, gay men have primarily become fathers in the context of heterosexual relationships, or for some men through foster care, adoption, or co-parenting arrangements as sperm donors (Riggs and Due). Since the beginning of the twenty-first century, however, gay men living in western countries have increasingly made use of commercial surrogacy services (Everingham, Stafford-Bell, and Hammarberg). The increased use of these services has become possible as a result of legislative change in countries such as the U.S. (in which many states now allow for the contracting of surrogacy services), in addition to the provision of services in countries where the

Representations of Birth and Motherhood as Contemporary Forms of the Sacred from: Natal Signs
Author(s) HENNESSEY ANNA
Abstract: This paper examines ways in which images of birth and the maternal body are contemporary forms of the sacred, and, controversially, how their production represents a renewed interest in birth and mothering as primary sources of empowerment for many women. Through research in art history, religious studies, philosophy, medical anthropology, and feminism, I first show how members of an international movement devoted to birth and art are actively using religious, secular, and re-sacralized art imagery in the visualization of labour and birth and as a ritualistic part of birth as a rite of passage. While this process of ritualizing art

Representing Birth: from: Natal Signs
Author(s) LYONS JEANNE
Abstract: As a midwife and an artist, I see many commonalities between art making, midwifery, and birth giving. As a midwifery educator I find value in representing the point of view that birth is a work of art that we are privileged to participate in. As well, I find value in using artistic modalities to explore and teach the art of midwifery. How birth is represented can leave long-term and powerful impressions. How do we, as midwives, present birth to the families we serve? What impressions are left on midwifery students as they traverse our educational systems, and in turn what

Birth is a Labour of Art from: Natal Signs
Author(s) KOTAK MARNI
Abstract: For me, my existence as an artist and a mother are deeply intertwined and reflect my belief that human life is the most profound work of art. Being a mother as an artist has the potential to unlock cultural institutions that have traditionally codified the maternal body as irrational, weak, and economically ineffectual (Liss 2). Giving birth and raising my child as a work of art challenges our capitalist society that glorifies products over people and the spectacle over authentic human experience.

Birth Shock: from: Natal Signs
Author(s) WATTS LISA
Abstract: The birth project is funded research by the Arts and Humanities Research Council, UK. New mothers are being given the opportunity to explore their experiences of pregnancy, birth, and post-natal readjustments using different art forms: phototherapy, photo-diaries, and participatory arts. In The Birth Project, the arts are being used to interrogate this complex topic. We situate this endeavour in the context of an emerging practice of health humanities (Crawford et al.) art as social action (Levine and Levine) and visual research methodologies (Pink, Advances, The Future). This chapter will focus on the participatory arts work already undertaken to date with

Book Title: Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema- Publisher: Demeter Press
Author(s): Sayed Asma
Abstract: Using a variety of critical and theoretical approaches, the contributing scholars to this collection analyze culturally specific and globally held attitudes about mothers and mothering, as represented in world cinema. Examining films from a range of countries including Afghanistan, India, Iran, Eastern Europe, Canada, and the United States, the various chapters contextualize the socio-cultural realities of motherhood as they are represented on screen, and explore the maternal figure as she has been glamorized and celebrated, while simultaneously subjected to public scrutiny. Collectively, this scholarly investigation provides insights into where women’s struggles converge, while also highlighting the dramatically different realities of women around the globe.Using a variety of critical and theoretical approaches, the contributing scholars to this collection analyze culturally specific and globally held attitudes about mothers and mothering, as represented in world cinema. Examining films from a range of countries including Afghanistan, India, Iran, Eastern Europe, Canada, and the United States, the various chapters contextualize the socio-cultural realities of motherhood as they are represented on screen, and explore the maternal figure as she has been glamorized and celebrated, while simultaneously subjected to public scrutiny. Collectively, this scholarly investigation provides insights into where women’s struggles converge, while also highlighting the dramatically different realities of women around the globe.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1rrd9dn

3. Discourses of the Maternal in the Cinema of Eastern Europe from: Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) SYWENKY IRENE
Abstract: Approaching the development of the cinematic tradition in Eastern Europe necessarily calls for a historical contextualization of this phenomenon in the framework of the cataclysmic socio-political changes that shaped the region throughout the twentieth century. Representations of maternal space in films are conditioned by the ideologies and social institutions that shape understandings of women’s role in society, and, as such, they also explore connections between motherhood, social order, and articulations of private and public spheres. Focusing on the cinematic tradition of Eastern Europe, the chapter explores the construction of motherhood from a socio-historical and political perspective during the early Soviet

4. (Re)Producing Globalization: from: Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) WINGARD JENNIFER
Abstract: How do the flows of global capital impress themselves on the female body? Much of the feminist literature on globalization discusses the ways women are affected by global economies, politics, and migration. The economic imperative to cross borders, and what this border crossing means to the identities of both communities and individuals, has been examined.¹ This work is vital to understanding how global capital affects the opportunities and identities of those forced to navigate it, but this focus on borders and identities often obscures the ways in which “the body” is affected by the flows of globalization.

9. Fortune Favours the Brave: from: Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) MARTINEZ MELISSA DEMI
Abstract: The 2012 pixar-animated film Braveexplores the struggles mothers often experience in raising daughters while attempting to negotiate competing interests and societal demands. The mother, Queen Elinor is determined to teach her eldest child Merida the skills that she needs to survive and succeed in the patriarchal culture of tenth-century Scotland. Elinor’s attempts to train her sixteen-year-old daughter to think and act “like a lady” conflict with Merida’s athleticism, youthful exuberance, and liberated visions of self-determination and independence. Brave focuses on the conflicts that Elinor and Merida experience in acting on their divergent worldviews. The female-centred storyline—with a primary

14. Maligned Mothers: from: Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) SANTOS CRISTINA
Abstract: In her book the monster within:The Hidden Side of Motherhood, practising psychoanalyst Barbara Almond explores the idea of “maternal ambivalence” as the “monster within.” She takes an interdisciplinary approach, pulling from her own medical cases, personal experiences, and literary examples to discuss the “darkside to womanhood” (xiii), when mothering and/or motherhood is not automatically self-fulfilling for a woman (3). Socio-cultural conditions create what Paul Ricoeur might call¹ a “prefiguration” and idealization of the self-sacrificing mother figure that lives (and dies) for her children. But what happens when women are unwilling or unable to fulfill this unobtainable ideal of the

15. Motherhood and Masculinity in Atiq Rahimi’s Syngue Sabour from: Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) DEHNAVI ELLI
Abstract: Syngue sabour[the patient stone] (2012), directed by Atiq Rahimi, the Afghan-French novelist and filmmaker, is an unconventional film that boldly crosses the red lines of Afghan culture and dares to break the taboos of the fatherland by addressing sex, body, and sensuality, the most denied and hidden aspects of womanhood in traditional Afghan society. The film, which is based on Rahimi’s novel of the same title published in 2008, is the story of a young mother of two children in war-ridden Afghanistan looking after her husband, who is in a coma after being shot in the neck. She finds

17. The “New” Indian Mothers in Popular Bollywood Films from: Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) AYOB ASMA
Abstract: Contemporary bollywood filmmakers are increasingly questioning the links between the depiction of women, patriarchy, and national discourses that were considered normative in the early 1900s. The representation of mother figures in popular Bollywood films¹ has changed considerably over the years. This paper explores the representations of “ diasporic” mother figures as portrayed in popular films post-1990 and takes into consideration the effects of feminist consciousness, which, in turn, has been fuelled by globalization. Indian diaspora audiences are increasingly engaging in processes of identification with the themes of Bollywood films. As Gokulsing and Dissanayake rightfully note, diasporic Bollywood films promote modernization,

INTRODUCTION: from: Red Legacies in China
Author(s) Li Jie
Abstract: As Chinese schoolchildren continue to sing the revolutionary anthem “Song of the Young Pioneers,” what arethe legacies of the Communist Revolution in today’s China?¹ The celebrations of the sixtieth anniversary of the founding of the People’s Republic of China (PRC) in 2009 and the ninetieth anniversary of the founding of the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) in 2011 seemed to be culminations of a recent official and popular revival of so-called red culture, wherein cultural artifacts associated with the Communist Revolution received makeovers as “red classics,” “red songs,” “red art,” “red collections,” “red restaurants,” and “red tourism.” Yet after nearly

THREE AMBIGUITIES OF ADDRESS: from: Red Legacies in China
Author(s) Evans Harriet
Abstract: Posters of China’s Cultural Revolution occupy a prominent but paradoxical place in the memory and imaginary of Mao’s China; they elicit complex and contradictory responses among diverse audiences, Chinese and global. Some, particularly those who experienced the political persecution and physical violence of the era, see them as unwelcome reminders of an oppressive and brutal regime. For others, they recall lost dreams of youth, and yearnings for a socialist future of justice and equality.¹ For yet others, they represent the imagined certainties of a past structured by order and stability. In the decades since their production, their images have been

FOUR SOCIALIST VISUAL EXPERIENCE AS CULTURAL IDENTITY: from: Red Legacies in China
Author(s) Tang Xiaobing
Abstract: A central figure in the fast-moving and globally connected story of contemporary art from China, a story often narrated in close parallel to the growing prominence of the Chinese economy since the early 1990s, is no doubt Wang Guangyi 王广义 (1957‒).¹ Best known since the early 1990s for his Great Criticismseries, Wang is in many a survey and art-historical account described as the defining Political Pop artist, a Chinese Andy Warhol with a poignant political thrust. His bold, poster-like images of Chinese socialist subjects, be they workers or Red Guards, charging at Western consumer brand names such as Coca-Cola

SIX RED LEGACIES IN FICTION from: Red Legacies in China
Author(s) Wang David Der-wei
Abstract: Amid a mixture of euphoria and controversy, the Chinese writer Mo Yan 莫言 (1955–) was awarded the 2012 Nobel Prize in Literature. Readers and critics in Chinese and Sinophone communities welcomed the news because since the mid-1980s, Mo Yan has proven to be a most eloquent and poignant storyteller of modern Chinese history, a writer, in the words of the Nobel Prize Committee, “who with hallucinatory realism merges folk tales, history and the contemporary.”¹ The Chinese government took Mo Yan’s honor most favorably, treating it as a belated recognition of Chinese socialist literature at its finest. For the Chinese

ELEVEN MUSEUMS AND MEMORIALS OF THE MAO ERA: from: Red Legacies in China
Author(s) Li Jie
Abstract: In 1986, renowned writer Ba Jin 巴金 called for building a Cultural Revolution museum ( wenge bowuguan文革博物馆) to pass on to later generations memories of a “catastrophic era,” so that “history would not repeat itself.”¹ Although many intellectuals have since echoed the same wish, and although Mao-era memorabilia abounds in souvenir markets, there is nothing in China today like what Ba Jin originally envisioned: a museum where young people can learn about the causes and ramifications of the Mao era’s tumultuous mass movements, about the passions, sufferings, and complicities of their parents and grandparents. The idea of a memorial museum

Book Title: Literature Against Criticism-University English and Contemporary Fiction in Conflict
Publisher: Open Book Publishers
Author(s): Eve Martin Paul
Abstract: This is a book about the power game currently being played out between two symbiotic cultural institutions: the university and the novel. As the number of hyper-knowledgeable literary fans grows, students and researchers in English departments waiver between dismissing and harnessing voices outside the academy. Meanwhile, the role that the university plays in contemporary literary fiction is becoming increasingly complex and metafictional, moving far beyond the ‘campus novel’ of the mid-twentieth century. Martin Paul Eve’s engaging and far-reaching study explores the novel's contribution to the ongoing displacement of cultural authority away from university English. Spanning the works of Jennifer Egan, Ishmael Reed, Tom McCarthy, Sarah Waters, Percival Everett, Roberto Bolaño and many others, Literature Against Criticism forces us to re-think our previous notions about the relationship between those who write literary fiction and those who critique it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1sq5v00

3. Aesthetic Critique from: Literature Against Criticism
Abstract: It is an often overlooked facet of early university English programmes in the United States that there was greater agreement between academicians on the texts to be taught than on the very rationale for the study of literature. As Gerald Graff has demonstrated, while some felt in the early period that literature could not even betaught and simply stood alone as art, those who wanted to professionalise the discipline began prescribing set lists of texts for examination. Surprisingly, as Graff notes, there was consensus on these texts, mostly because this gave the appearance of a coherent object of study

5. Sincerity and Truth from: Literature Against Criticism
Abstract: Although slightly older than the commonly-supposed professionalising Arnoldian origin, the discipline of English studies is relatively young, having come into being as “English language and literature” in 1828 at the University of London (now UCL rather than the federated research university that currently takes the name University of London).¹ Over the course of the discipline’s short history, however, a range of aspects has remained ever-present and unsatisfactorily resolved under the heading of ‘value’. As John Hartley traces it, these debates can be subdivided into three phases (simplifying for reasons of comprehensibility). The first is to chart the lineage of Matthew

6. Labour and Theory from: Literature Against Criticism
Abstract: Although it may be unwise to speak of the ‘career’ of a writer so evidently in full-flow as Jennifer Egan, it is nonetheless true that certain trends can already be seen over the arc of her writing since 1995. Whether the foremost of these areas is the emergence of new technologies and the way in which they shape our concepts of (re)mediation or in Egan’s seemingly broader interest in the place of affect in experimental fiction will remain a topic for a scholarly debate that is only beginning to give Egan her due. It is also apparent, however, that certain

7. Genre and Class from: Literature Against Criticism
Abstract: In the preceding parts of this book, I have demonstrated several reasons why contemporary fiction may choose to represent the academy, mostly focusing on the fact that in contemporary metafiction, the critical space is shared by the academy and fiction. This results in a struggle for the right to express critique and then a legitimation battle. Beginning with Tom McCarthy’s oblique engagement with the academy through his public intellectualism and canny understanding of generic conventions, I suggested that C, although not a work that directly depicts academia, is a novel tightly bound to formalist criticism and canon formation and a

2. Channeled, Reformulated, and Controlled: from: Love and its Critics
Abstract: Interpretation […] presupposes a discrepancy between the clear meaning of the text and the demands of (later) readers. It seeks to resolve that discrepancy. The situation is that for some reason a text has become unacceptable; yet it cannot be discarded. Interpretation is a radical strategy for conserving an old text, which is thought too precious to repudiate, by revamping it. The interpreter, without actually erasing or rewriting the text, is altering

6. The Albigensian Crusade and the Death of Fin’amor in Medieval French and English Poetry from: Love and its Critics
Abstract: At the beginning of the thirteenth century, everything changed. In its earliest days, the mood in Provençe was ebullient and defiant. It radiates from the tale of Aucassin et Nicolette, which, though written in the northern dialect of Picardy, “gives a faithful picture”¹ of the attitudes held in Occitania—sensual, anticlerical, and fiercely independent:

7. The Ladder of Love in Italian Poetry and Prose, and the Reactions of the Sixteenth-Century Sonneteers from: Love and its Critics
Abstract: Perhaps the single most basic element of Platonic metaphysical thought is the separation between the world we see and the world we

8. Shakespeare: from: Love and its Critics
Abstract: The true recovery of the troubadour tradition comes with Shakespeare, the poet and playwright who “towers like a mountain peak above the surrounding foothills, but is one substance and structure with them”.¹ Most truly “of the English strain”, Shakespeare’s sonnets are a reversing, even a mocking of the Petrarchan mode and the Neoplatonic sublimation of passion into worship that sometimes marks the poetry of Sidney. Rather than treating the individual as a means to an end, the lowest rung on the ladder of love, Shakespeare’s sonnets reverse this emphasis, valuing the individual as an end in itself, not a means

10. Paradise Lost: from: Love and its Critics
Abstract: To choose is not so easy as it sounds. “All choice is frightening, when one thinks about it: a terrifying liberty, unguided by a greater duty”.¹ Choices open some doors, while closing others. New lives, new possibilities, often come at the expense of other lives now foreclosed or lost. The wages of choiceare death, as every life leads, eventually, to that ending that may be the only true universal of the human experience—not the understanding or the experience of the end, but the physical cessation itself, the transition from animate to inert, from you to it. Authority figures

CREER EN LA HISTORIA AYER Y HOY from: Historia / Fin de siglo
Author(s) Pie Aurelia Valero
Abstract: “¡ Un historiador que se quedara meditando fijamente sobre la situación dada a la historia no haría avanzar mucho esta historia!” Esas palabras, cargadas de ironía, son de Charles Péguy, extraídas de un texto de 1906 acerca de “La situación dada a la historia y a la sociología en los tiempos modernos”.¹ Poeta, filósofo, publicista, se trata sin duda del autor que más escribió, entre el caso Dreyfus y su muerte en el campo de batalla en 1914, sobre la historia y contra la historia, aquella, al menos, que entonces triunfaba en la Sorbona y que encarnaba, a sus ojos,

LA FICCIÓN EXTERNA Y LA HISTORIOGRAFÍA from: Historia / Fin de siglo
Author(s) Lima Luiz Costa
Abstract: Es también usual pensar que el historiador forma parte del grupo de especialistas que se contenta con saber lo que debe hacer— trabajar en los archivos en búsqueda de documentos desconocidos sobre determinado tema, temporalmente situado— sin preocuparsede qué estará haciendo.

GENOCIDIO, CIENCIA, ETNO-SUICIDIO: from: Historia / Fin de siglo
Author(s) Rabasa José
Abstract: Historias de indios (siempre un grupo específico) que participan en campañas genocidas de otros indios (siempre un grupo diferente) abundan en la colonización de las Américas.¹ Mencionamos este hecho para deshacernos de entrada de señalamientos que establecen que los españoles no deben tener el título exclusivo de la conquista de las Américas. Sin la participación activa de los indios la conquista hubiera sido una empresa ilusiva. Y no existe razón alguna por la que deberíamos esperar que los indios (de nuevo, siempre un grupo específico) fueran solidarios con otros indios. Nuestro objetivo no es diluir la culpabilidad, sino plantear la

CAPÍTULO I REALIDAD Y AMBIGÜEDAD from: Hispanoamérica en diez novelas
Abstract: Otros trabajos han propuesto los recursos de integración, desintegración e intensificación como los instrumentos idóneos para caracterizar el mundo de Pedro Páramo, y tienen razón; solo que a la hora de aplicarlos vemos que lo que se integra son elementos que

CAPÍTULO II PROCEDIMIENTOS TÉCNICOS Y AMBIGÜEDAD from: Hispanoamérica en diez novelas
Abstract: La técnica no hace al arte, pero el arte no se hace sin la técnica. De la acertada invención de esta depende el logro de la intencionalidad artística.

CAPÍTULO III PROCEDIMIENTOS EXPRESIVOS Y AMBIGÜEDAD from: Hispanoamérica en diez novelas
Abstract: Esto crea una red de relaciones verticales y horizontales, paradigmáticas y sintagmáticas, que cohesionan de una manera original la heterogeneidad de los elementos presentes en la obra y con ello vinculan

CAPÍTULO III DEL LADO DE ACÁ: from: Hispanoamérica en diez novelas
Abstract: En esta parte se acentúan los rasgos que caracterizan a este personaje en «el lado de allá». Hay una curva descendente que lleva al protagonista «cuesta abajo en la rodada», o para trabajar con textos de la novela, podemos decir que Oliveira reconoce, como el vals: «mi diagnóstico es sencillo: sé que no tengo remedio». En efecto, vemos que en Buenos Aires no ha remediado su egocentrismo, su unilateralidad dialéctica, su búsqueda sin norte y sin sur, y su desarraigo y que, poco a poco, la no-vía lo acerca a la solución de la no-solución de su problema (como no

CAPÍTULO IV HISPANOAMÉRICA Y LA INSULARIDAD from: Hispanoamérica en diez novelas
Abstract: El abrirse y cerrarse es un movimiento pendular característico de nuestra realidad hispanoamericana. El desmerecerse ante sí mismo y ante los demás lleva a desorbitar las dimensiones de los otros, los que son lejanos, y quienes se presienten extraños. No ante los suyos, sus iguales, a los que desmerece mediante la envidia y el menosprecio, sino ante los que no son como él, ante los que presume superiores. Mentalidad adolescente, el hispanoamericano siente compulsivamente la necesidad de autoafirmación y elige modelos inalcanzables que desde arriba lo conformen.

VI PARTE Perspectivas Complementarias from: Hispanoamérica en diez novelas
Abstract: La inferioridad nuestra no es sino

Book Title: Philosophical criminology- Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Millie Andrew
Abstract: This accessible book is structured around six philosophical ideas concerning our relations with others: values, morality, aesthetics, order, rules and respect. Using examples from a range of countries, it provides a platform for engaging with important topical issues.Philosophical criminology asks big questions about how we get on with one another and what happens when we do not. This accessible book in the New Horizons in Criminology series is the first to foreground this growing area. The book is structured around six philosophical ideas concerning our relations with others: values, morality, aesthetics, order, rules and respect. Building on the author’s theoretical and empirical research, the book considers the boundaries of criminology and the scope for greater exchange between criminology and philosophy. The book is illustrated using examples from a range of countries, and provides a platform for engaging with important topical issues using philosophical and theoretical insights.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1t890xp

TWO Value judgements from: Philosophical criminology
Abstract: ... one would have to assume, as some apparently do, that it is indeed possible to do research that is uncontaminated by personal and political sympathies. I propose to argue that it is not possible and, therefore, that the question is not whether we should take sides, since we

Book Title: Researching the lifecourse-Critical reflections from the social sciences
Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Hardill Irene
Abstract: Researching the Lifecourse features methods linking time, space and mobilities and provides practitioners with practical detail in each chapter. It covers the full lifecourse and includes innovative methods and case study examples from different European and North American contexts.The lifecourse perspective continues to be an important subject in the social sciences. Researching the Lifecourse offers a distinctive approach in that it truly covers the lifecourse (childhood, adulthood and older age), focusing on innovative methods and case study examples from a variety of European and North American contexts. This original approach connects theory and practice from across the social sciences by situating methodology and research design within relevant conceptual frameworks. This diverse collection features methods that are linked to questions of time, space and mobilities while providing practitioners with practical detail in each chapter.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1t89635

ONE Introduction from: Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Hardill Irene
Abstract: Lifecourse research is undertaken by researchers from across the social sciences, often working in a multidisciplinary context, using the lifecourse as an underpinning concept and/or a method of study. In this book we aim to represent the diversity of lifecourse methodologies employed in the social sciences, as well as having a concern for epistemology – how different knowledge claims are connected to our research practices. Moreover, the contributors in this edited book emphasise how different theoretical frameworks and positionality affect the research process – each contributor examines the challenges of their research design and how they worked through methodological issues

THREE Time in mixed methods longitudinal research: from: Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Edwards Rosalind
Abstract: The aim of this chapter is to explore the methodological and analytical challenges thrown up by an ongoing study that has been reusing and combining longitudinal qualitative narrative and quantitative survey data to research individual attitudes to voluntarism between 1981 and 2012.¹ This period represents a time of economic and social policy change encompassing recession and cuts to public services; followed by relative prosperity and increase in investment in public services; and then the most recent recession and accompanying austerity measures (Timmins, 2001; Glennerster, 2007; Alcock 2011; Defty, 2011; Driver, 2008).

FIVE A method for collecting lifecourse data: from: Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Del Bianco Ann
Abstract: The lifecourse can be studied using a number of different research designs and methodological approaches – all presenting their own set of challenges and benefits. In recent years there has been increasing use of the lifegrid for both quantitative and qualitative studies. The application of the lifegrid is appealing to many researchers for a variety of reasons. It is especially useful for studies where a longitudinal focus is integral to the research objective(s), and such is the case with lifecourse research. Compared with traditional longitudinal studies, the administration of the lifegrid is a less costly alternative and is relatively easy

SIX Life geohistories: from: Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Falola Bisola
Abstract: ‘I need to stop by Mr Daniels and get this form signed … okay now to Mrs Travis, she’s the best, she helped me get through high school …, outside, hmm no one sits here anymore, not since freshman year, the BISA kids [arts magnet programme] took it over … oh look, [he says pointing to a wall lined with

SEVEN Using mapmaking to research the geographies of young children affected by political violence from: Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Akesson Bree
Abstract: Mapmaking can be a process by which individuals orient themselves and navigate from place to place. The process of mapmaking can also be used as a tool for understanding one’s sense of place. The mapmaking experience is rooted in what Sobel (1998, p 5) identifies as ‘our visual, kinesthetic, and emotional experiences’. As a visual method, mapmaking provides one example of how individuals engage with place. Individuals throughout the lifecourse – from young children to ageing adults – influence and are influenced by place. And in order to better understand individuals’ experience with place, research methodologies have increasingly turned to

NINE Triangulation with softGIS in lifecourse research: from: Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Schmidt-Thomé Kaisa
Abstract: In this chapter I focus on the possibilities that embodied knowledge opens up when undertaking research on the lifecourse. Shotter (2009) argues that social theorists often overlook embodied knowledge as they evaluate human action through causes (emphasising structures) or reasons (emphasising agency). In my work on ‘geobiographies’ I connect the highly contextual and unique with lifecourse information, specifically relating current everyday life (especially outdoor activities) with the habitualities developed over a participant’s lifecourse. I examine embodied knowledge as a joint outcome of the lifecourse and its geographical context – space and place. In this chapter I use geo-coordinates as a

SIX Living in Spain: from: Retiring to Spain
Abstract: In the previous chapter I focused on how my research participants felt dislocated from and in the UK and how their sense of belonging was fractured. Women experienced disengagement from the UK as a place, or space, and also as temporal disjuncture since they also rejected the UK in the present. Age and ethnic positionalities, too, shaped feelings of disruption regarding being on the margins through retirement and the presence of ‘others’ through immigration to the UK. I unravelled the multiple motivations for women’s migration, taking account of structural forces, their unique biographies and agency and positionalities through structurally analysing

CONCLUSION from: Retiring to Spain
Abstract: I premised at the outset that the idea of community is often romantic and utopian, idealising and evoking a bygone age. Often considered to have been ‘lost’ through modernity, community has also been hailed as the solution to social ‘problems’ by successive governments in the UK. From the New Right to the present Conservative-led coalition government, community has become synonymous with a relinquishment of responsibility by the state (Hoggett et al, 1997). When the women made their move to Spain, community in policy circles was presented by the then government, as a panacea to the lack of social cohesion among

ONE Old age and the fourth age paradigm from: Personhood, identity and care in advanced old age
Abstract: The world’s population is ageing at an unprecedented rate. If an ‘ageing society’ is defined as one where at least 10% of the population is aged 65 years and above, the number of such ageing societies is projected to increase from 59 in 2010 to 138 in 2050 (UN, 2014). By 2050 the world will be home to some 1.5 billion people aged 65 and over, more agedness than the world has ever experienced. Not only are there increasing numbers of ageing societies (Hyde and Higgs, 2016), but some of the already ageing societies are undergoing a process of ‘hyper-ageing’

TWO Interrogating personhood from: Personhood, identity and care in advanced old age
Abstract: The fourth age imaginary embodies fears of dependency, frailty and the gradual loss of our sense of agency, identity and our status as persons. This fear, particularly as it is represented in the fear of ‘losing one’s mind’ or of developing Alzheimer’s, brings to the fore questions of agency, identity and personhood. When we first wrote about the fourth age, we described it as ‘ageing without agency’ (Gilleard and Higgs, 2010), treating mental decline as a decline in ‘agency’. By so doing we wanted to acknowledge how closely allied fears are of an unwanted old age with fears of losing

Book Title: Biography and social exclusion in Europe-Experiences and life journeys
Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Torrabadella Laura
Abstract: Throughout Europe, standardised approaches to social policy and practice are being radically questioned and modified. Beginning from the narrative detail of individual lives, this book re-thinks welfare predicaments, emphasising gender, generation, ethnic and class implications of economic and social deregulation.Based on 250 life-story interviews in seven European Union countries, Biography and social exclusion in Europe: analyses personal struggles against social exclusion to illuminate local milieus and changing welfare regimes and contexts; points to challenging new agendas for European politics and welfare, beyond the rhetoric of communitarianism and the New Deal; vividly illustrates the lived experience and environmental complexity working for and against structural processes of social exclusion; refashions the interpretive tradition as a teaching and research tool linking macro and micro realities. · · Students, academic teachers and professional trainers, practitioners, politicians, policy makers and researchers in applied and comparative welfare fields will all benefit from reading this book.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1t8982m

ONE Introduction: from: Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Chamberlayne Prue
Abstract: This book describes the life experiences of individuals in contemporary Europe whose lives have been marked by one or more forms of ‘social exclusion’, as this term has come to be used over the past decade or so (Askonas and Stewart, 2000; Levitas 1998). We try to make meaningful such experiences as being made redundant, being blocked in a career, leaving school without qualifications, finding a place as a migrant in a European country, or bringing up children as a ‘single parent’. These were among the life contingencies that had originally led to individuals being selected for our study sample

THREE Guilty victims: from: Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Murard Numa
Abstract: ‘Exclusion’ is not a concept rooted in the social sciences, but an empty box given by the French state to the social sciences in the late 1980s as a subject to study. It was exported to Brussels at the same time, and acknowledged by the EU in 1994 (the poverty programme being renamed Programme Against Exclusion). It was then re-exported to all the European countries. The empty box has since been filled with a huge number of

SIX The shortest way out of work from: Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Murard Numa
Abstract: Readers of Robert Roberts’ famous book, The classic slum, will remember a photograph showing men standing at the doorstep of a pub, with the legend: “The shortest way out of Manchester”. What these men wish to escape by drinking is not work in itself, the book relates, but the combination of low wages, exhaustion and awful working conditions, together with miseries in everyday life, such as terrible housing, shortage of food, illness, and all the outcomes of these at the levels of public and private life, privacy and intimacy. These men want to escape from their life as a whole,

SEVEN Male journeys into uncertainty from: Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Mestheneos Elizabeth
Abstract: The notion of Ithaki for most men and women has been historically and socially differentiated, the result of socially determined gender expectations and personal and social constraints. Men’s journeys in this century have typically been associated with their lives outside the home and at work (Seccombe, 1986). However, the social and economic changes of the past three decades have made many men feel that the journey to the island is no longer a well-charted one. Journeys in modern capitalist states have become increasingly uncertain. They depend on the ability of the individual to negotiate the Scylla and Charybdis1 of unemployment,

EIGHT Love and emancipation from: Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Thorsell Birgitta
Abstract: In this chapter, women’s identities are conceptualised in terms of two poles – love and emancipation. In the Sostris case studies of women from varied backgrounds, these polarities were frequently seen to interact in the women’s lives, to the point of cross-fertilisation, leading to new orientations. We have chosen the cases of three women whose circumstances are in some respects strikingly similar and in others notably different. Together these cases indicate new patterns in contemporary European societies: the crossing of cultural, social and geographical borders, as well as the growing importance of emancipation for providing a sense of security relative

NINE Female identities in late modernity from: Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Spanò Antonella
Abstract: The condition of women has undergone impressive changes since the late 1960s. A series of interconnected changes have made possible a new way of being a woman: the new consumer culture, television, the technological transformation of domestic activities, mass schooling, the new youth culture, the political and cultural environment around 1968, and the feminist struggle that brought abortion, contraception and divorce to the forefront of public debate.

TEN Gender and family in the development of Greek state and society from: Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Ioannidi-Kapolou Elisabeth
Abstract: Current European debates concerning the decline of the nuclear family, the forms and implications of new family type structures, and the role of the welfare state in changes in family and gender relationships are hardly on the political agenda in Greece. There are clear indications that aspects of family life are altering. These include the later age of marriage¹, increasing rates of divorce², the increase in female participation in the paid labour force³, and the very slow increase in single parenthood⁴. Other new phenomena indirectly relating to family life, such as increased drug and alcohol use, and homelessness among young

TWELVE ‘Migrants’: from: Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Breckner Roswitha
Abstract: More and more people share the experience of migration, in the sense of crossing nation-state borders to start a new life in a different society. Theories of globalisation and postmodernism present this experience as a typical occurrence, almost taken for granted, in the lives of growing numbers of people. Even though migration constitutes the ‘normality’ of many societies to a greater or lesser degree, the public and, not least, the sociopolitical discourses of migration, are still predominantly shaped by the view that the large-scale movement of people somehow constitutes a problem. In the first place, the ‘problem’ of migration within

FOURTEEN Biographical work and agency innovation: from: Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Wengraf Tom
Abstract: A colleague once recalled his satisfaction when, after weeks of painstaking advocacy for a recently bereaved woman, he had helped her to resolve her housing problems. But then, on the eve of gaining her new tenancy, she killed herself. (Froggett, 2002, pp 9-10)

THREE Balancing precarious work, entrepreneurship and a new gendered professionalism in migrant self-employment from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Apitzsch Ursula
Abstract: The structural crisis experienced generally in post-industrial society since the last third of the 20th century has been characterised by the continuous dismantling of jobs and workplaces, with no compensation in sight. This has prompted some intellectuals and policy makers to speak in terms of the ‘economically redundant’, in much the same way that industrialisation discourse of the 19th century spoke of a ‘surplus population’¹.

FIVE Ethnic entrepreneurship as innovation from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Kupferberg Feiwel
Abstract: This chapter is a result of long-standing interest in three different research areas that rarely intersect or are even seen as of mutual interest: biography, entrepreneurship and innovation. The reasons why biographical research and entrepreneurial research have rarely engaged in an effort of interdisciplinary communication are easy to identify. Entrepreneurial research is a branch of business economics that specialises in the founding of new ventures, mainly small businesses (Gartner, 1985), and in particular the problems of legitimisation that such new ventures encounter as they seek to gain trust among potential stakeholders and business partners (Gartner, 1990; Gartner et al, 1992;

ELEVEN The biographical turn in health studies from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Rickard Wendy
Abstract: This chapter offers an overview of existing biographical methods in health studies. The focus comes from my own efforts over the past few years to draw together a picture of some potentialities, possibilities and challenges of using biographical methods in health studies, both in research with marginalised groups and individuals, and in university teaching. I came to the topic initially from British oral history work in the two different – but both highly politicised – areas of HIV and AIDS (for example, Rickard, 1998, 2000) and prostitution (for example, Rickard, 2001; Rickard and Growney, 2001), work that I undertook in

TWELVE Ethical aspects of biographical interviewing and analysis from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Kaźmierska Kaja
Abstract: It may seem obvious to say that biographical research differs from all other sociological research. The differences apply to research techniques, procedures of analysing biographical material and something that can be called a ‘style of work’, which covers the very time-consuming research stages of material collection and analysis. These and many other specific features of biographical research are grounded in theoretical and methodological assumptions which vary for particular types of biographical work. However, the outstanding characteristic of this kind of work is that the research material is biography.

FOURTEEN ‘Bucking and kicking’: from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Gunaratnam Yasmin
Abstract: Concerns about how to work with and across differences of ethnicity, culture, language and religion are central to discussions on policy and practice development in the health and social care services in Britain (Alexander, 1999), where references to the need for cultural ‘awareness’, ‘sensitivity’ and ‘competence’ are commonplace. These concerns have taken on further meaning with the renewed attention to ‘institutional racism’ (Macpherson, 1999) in public sector services, and with the extension of race relations legislation (2000 Race Relations [Amendment] Act) to these services. However, despite the increasing attention being given to the need for culturally sensitive and anti-discriminatory professional

NINETEEN Narratives, community organisations and pedagogy from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Mortlock Belinda
Abstract: This chapter engages with three categories of narrative: stories about teaching a social research course; students’ stories about their practice as researchers; and the stories of 42 women and men working for community organisations in a city in New Zealand. These stories emerge from a teaching programme in which final-year sociology students are involved in biographical research. Students write a life-story narrative drawn from multiple interviews with a single narrator, as well as a research journal, in which they offer an autobiographical account of their research process. They also submit an analytical essay; that is, a sociological commentary that locates

TWO Neighbourhood planning and the purposes and practices of localism from: Localism and neighbourhood planning
Author(s) Brownill Sue
Abstract: This chapter situates neighbourhood planning within the context of the evolution of community-led planning, citizen engagement and the shifting scales of spatial planning at the national and international levels. It critically examines neighbourhood planning as a key element of the localism that has evolved in England since 2010, outlining the contradictory propositions and powers at its heart. The chapter is in three parts. The first explores international trends in planning policy and governance and ways of characterising and understanding these, arguing that we have to move away from dichotomies to look at the complexities of the social, spatial and political

FIVE The uneven geographies of neighbourhood planning in England from: Localism and neighbourhood planning
Author(s) Parker Gavin
Abstract: While neighbourhood planning is still emerging as an active component of planning practice and as part of the wider project of planning reform taken up by the UK government since 2010, it is revealing to narrate how it has been designed and responded to. The political and theoretical implications of neighbourhood planning are clearly important to understand and reflect upon (see Bradley, 2015; Davoudi and Madanipour, 2015; Parker et al, 2015; see also Chapters Two and Nine), but this chapter focuses on how, where and on what basis this non-mandatory, voluntary approach to statutory planning has been taken up by

THIRTEEN Localism and neighbourhood planning in australian public policy and governance from: Localism and neighbourhood planning
Author(s) Burton Paul
Abstract: Localism is often used in confusing and contradictory ways in Australian political debate and policy discourse. While many state and territory governments extol the virtues of devolving responsibility for planning and service delivery down to local governments, they show no sign of relinquishing their constitutional authority over local government or of pressing for further devolution to more localised communities. State and territory governments continue to exercise their constitutional authority over local government in regulating their powers, responsibilities and finances, and, most symbolically, in enforcing the amalgamation of local councils in the name of efficiency and effectiveness, often in the face

Book Title: Zhou Zuoren and an Alternative Chinese Response to Modernity- Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Daruvala Susan
Abstract: This book explores the issues of nation and modernity in China by focusing on the work of Zhou Zuoren (1885-1967), one of the most controversial of modern Chinese intellectuals and brother of the writer Lu Xun. Zhou was radically at odds with many of his contemporaries and opposed their nation-building and modernization projects. Through his literary and aesthetic practice as an essayist, Zhou espoused a way of constructing the individual and affirming the individual’s importance in opposition to the normative national subject of most May Fourth reformers. Zhou’s work presents an alternative vision of the nation and questions the monolithic claims of modernity by promoting traditional aesthetic categories, the locality rather than the nation, and a literary history that values openness and individualism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tfj8w7

FIVE The Construction of the Nation from: Zhou Zuoren and an Alternative Chinese Response to Modernity
Abstract: The mistrust of didacticism that runs through Zhou’s writing can be read as a commentary on the ideological construction of the modern nation-state. Zhou’s attack on Han Yu and the daotong systemtakes us to the heart of his criticism, for Han Yu was a pivotal figure in the attempt to construct a single foundation for sociopolitical action and individual cultural production in the wake of the An Lushan (d. 757) rebellion.¹ Han Yu’s radical innovations in guwen as a literary form redefined learning in terms of the Confucian “way of the sage,” and he particularly attacked Daoist and Buddhist

Book Title: The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time- Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Struve Lynn A.
Abstract: For many years, the Ming and Qing dynasties have been grouped as “late imperial China," a temporal framework that allows scholars to identify and evaluate indigenous patterns of social, economic, and cultural change initiated in the last century of Ming rule that imparted a particular character to state and society throughout the Qing and into the twentieth century. This paradigm asserts the autonomous character of social change in China and has allowed historians to create a “China-centered history." Recently, however, many scholars have begun emphasizing the singular qualities of the Qing. Among the eight contributors to this volume on the formation of the Qing, those who emphasize the Manchu ethos of the Qing tend to see it as part of an early modernity and stress parallel and sometimes mutually reinforcing patterns of political consolidation and cultural integration across Eurasia. Other contributors who examine the Qing formation from the perspective of those who lived through the dynastic transition see the advent of Qing rule as prompting attempts by the Chinese subjects of the new empire to make sense of what they perceived as a historical disjuncture and to rework these understandings into an accommodation to foreign rule. In contrast to the late imperial paradigm, the new ways of configuring the Qing in historical time in both groups of essays assert the singular qualities of the Qing formation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tfj908

Introduction from: The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time
Author(s) Struve Lynn A.
Abstract: As was intended, the various contributors to this volume have interpreted “the Qing formation” somewhat differently. We all agree, however, that it had something to do with a series of events that took place in the eighth decade of the sixteenth century since the birth of Jesus Christ (“the 1580s”), to use the calendrical scheme now hegemonic in the global sphere. In the calendrical scheme that thenwas hegemonic in the sinitic culturesphere, it was in the second ten-year period (the first sixth of a new sexagesimal cycle) of the “Wanli” reign, that of the thirteenth emperor of the Ming

CHAPTER 6 Neither Late Imperial nor Early Modern: from: The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time
Author(s) Goldstone Jack A.
Abstract: Words are just words, but they bedevil our efforts to write a meaningful history of the world when they limit our discourse and therefore our understanding of patterns and trends. I would like to suggest that we are missing a word for the opposite of “crisis.” The trends that we commonly encounter in comparative and global histories are growth, stagnation, stability, and crisis. Yet this vocabulary is stunted, and it is biased in ways that have made it difficult to recognize the dynamics of premodern societies.

CHAPTER 8 Chimerical Early Modernity: from: The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time
Author(s) Struve Lynn A.
Abstract: This statement typifies attitudes about history and memory in midseventeenth-century Chinese memoirs. The author, like everyone everywhere, past or present (for all we know, since there exists no large body of memoirs earlier than the seventeenth century in China and Europe), grants that his memory is incomplete but insists that what he does remember is basically sound. Like many Chinese scholar-officials in all eras, he wants later generations to be able to understand the truth about “historical” matters that he knew firsthand, and he goes to extraordinary lengths to make that possible. Displaying an acuity about the relative value of

Book Title: Muslim Chinese-Ethnic Nationalism in the People’s Republic
Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Gladney Dru C.
Abstract: This second edition of Dru Gladney’s critically acclaimed study of the Muslim population in China includes a new preface by the author, as well as a valuable addendum to the bibliography, already hailed as one of the most extensive listing of modern sources on the Sino-Muslims. China's ten million Hui are one of the Muslim national minorities recognized by the Chinese government. Dru Gladney's fieldwork among these people has enabled him to identify diverse patterns of interaction between their rising nationalism and state policy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tg5gkz

TWO Ethnographic Research and the Chinese State from: Muslim Chinese
Abstract: The complex and diffuse identity of the Hui as outlined in the preceding chapter challenges traditional approaches to ethnicity theory. Anthropology in the past was ill-equipped to address this kind of expansive ethnic identity. Given their widespread distribution and lack of cohesion, one may very rightly question the validity of Hui ethnic identity. The Hui regard themselves as an ethnic group, however, and the Chinese state registers them as an official nationality. The Hui are also beginning to play an increasingly important role in the Chinese state’s domestic affairs and in international ethnopolitics. The Hui thus pose an interesting problem

THREE Ethnoreligious Resurgence in a Northwestern Sufi Community from: Muslim Chinese
Abstract: Na Homestead (Najiahu), in Ningxia Hui autonomous region, is, in many respects, typical of other Hui Muslim communities throughout the northwest. A collection of adobe houses clustered around a central mosque, N a Homestead has been the site of an Islamic resurgence in recent years. As several visitors to other northwestern Muslim communities have noted, Islamic conservativism has become more pronounced among the Hui since 1979.¹ This rising radical, even fundamentalist, emphasis upon Islamic purity (qing)in Hui communities has caused concern among local government cadres.

Book Title: Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation-From the Late Ming to the Late Qing and Beyond
Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Wei Shang
Abstract: This volume addresses cultural and literary transformation in the late Ming (1550–1644) and late Qing (1851–1911) eras. Although conventionally associated with a devastating sociopolitical crisis, each of these periods was also a time when Chinese culture was rejuvenated. Focusing on the twin themes of crisis and innovation, the seventeen chapters in this book aim to illuminate the late Ming and late Qing as eras of literary-cultural innovation during periods of imperial disintegration; to analyze linkages between the two periods and the radical heritage they bequeathed to the modern imagination; and to rethink the “premodernity" of the late Ming and late Qing in the context of the end of the age of modernism. The chapters touch on a remarkably wide spectrum of works, some never before discussed in English, such as poetry, drama, full-length novels, short stories, tanci narratives, newspaper articles, miscellanies, sketches, familiar essays, and public and private historical accounts. More important, they intersect on issues ranging from testimony about dynastic decline to the negotiation of authorial subjectivity, from the introduction of cultural technology to the renewal of literary convention.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tg5hxm

Introduction from: Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Wei Shang
Abstract: This volume addresses issues of cultural and literary transformation in the Ming (1368–1644) and Qing (1644–I911) dynasties by examining two periods of accelerated change—the late Ming (1550-1644) and the late Qing (185I–I911).¹ Although conventionally associated with increasingly deepening and devastating sociopolitical crises, each of these two periods represents a crucial stage in which Chinese culture was rejuvenated. Focusing on the twin themes of crisis and innovation, this book aims to illuminate linkages between the two periods, beginning with the representation of cultural politics and the reform of narrative discourse and culminating in the radical heritage bequeathed

The Making of the Everyday World: from: Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Wei Shang
Abstract: Unlike such earlier novels as Sanguo yanyi三國演義 (The romance of the Three Kingdoms),Shuihu zhuan水滸傳 (The water margin), andXiyou ji西遊記 (The journey to the west), which were concerned with dynastic cycles, military affairs, heroic adventures, and religious journeys,Jin Ping Mei cihua金瓶梅詞話 (The plum in the golden vase, preface dated 1617 or 1618; hereafter,Jin Ping Mei) offers a comprehensive and meticulous representation of daily life.¹ It is distinctive in using streets, brothels, and a merchant household as the main stages for its characters, who are by no means historical personages or larger-than-life heroes. From

Creating Subjectivity in Wu Jianren’s The Sea of Regret from: Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Huters Theodore
Abstract: At least since the publication of Jaroslav PrůŠek’ s path breaking work of the 1950s and 196os on the transformation of narrative modes in modern and late traditional Chinese literature, the question of the introduction of new sorts of subjectivity (or what critics now would be more inclined to refer to as “interiority”)¹ into modern Chinese literature has inspired much further analysis.² Průšek’s work was part of his broader effort to ascertain a world trend in literary writing, a tendency that many later critics would label a function of an unacknowledged impulse to establish the universal validity of narrative developments

The Subject of Pain from: Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Ko Dorothy
Abstract: This chapter analyzes a variety of narrative modes that describe, reveal, picture, or convey the experience of pain, especially that of the female body, in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries. Focusing on the discourses of pain popularized by the anti–footbinding movement, I explore the novel conditions that allowed female pain to be narrated, by women or others on their behalf, and the terms of this narration. My main argument is that these conditions and terms bespeak the difficulties involved in the formation of the female “voice” and female “agency”—attributes of the modern female subject—in late

Women’s Poetic Witnessing: from: Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Chang Kang-i Sun
Abstract: In traditional Chinese poetry, the task of witnessing-especially on the subject of war and other political issues-was generally assumed to be male territory. But, in fact, the earliest important work of political witnessing in Chinese poetry was attributed to a woman. In a poem written at the end of the Han dynasty (late second century BeE) and entitled “Beifen shi” 悲憤詩 (Poem of lament and indignation), Cai Yan 蔡琰 narrated her unfortunate experiences during the upheavals of the Dong Zhuo rebellion, including her capture by “barbarian” Xiongnu and her many subsequent dilemmas, experiences over which she had little or no

CHAPTER 1 He Yan, Authorship, and Xuanxtie Thought from: Transmitters and Creators
Abstract: Collected Explanations of the Analects (hereafter Collected Explanations)¹ is a corporate work of unusual importance and complexity. It is important because it is the representative writing of the “old commentary” tradition of the Analects, as opposed to the “new commentary” tradition represented by Zhu Xi’s Collected Annotations on the Analects. Collected Explanations preserves a selection of some of the earliest commentaries ever written for the Analects, including substantial selections attributed to two of the earliest commentators, Kong Anguo and Bao Xian 包咸 (6 B.C.–A.D. 65).² Although Zheng Xuan was arguably the single most influential commentator between the Han and

CHAPTER 4 The Philosophical Character of Elucidation of the Meaning from: Transmitters and Creators
Abstract: Freed from the constraints imposed by the “closed system” that had been both the sustainer and the stifler of much Han classical scholarship, thinkers increasingly used the commentary as a vehicle for expressing individual thought from the early third century on. Although all interpretation can be considered a creative act,¹ when a commentary introduces a philosophical platform or series of platforms that are foreign to or undeveloped in the original text, it becomes more than an appendage to another body of writing and a work in its own right. Some of the more prominent examples of this written in the

SIX Narrative and Recompense from: A Patterned Past
Abstract: The anecdote cannot easily accommodate multiple plot lines. It is well adapted for the narration of events involving a limited cast of characters and a single set of consequences, but when a narrative involves many characters or groups, with varying motivations, acting in different times and places, the anecdote falls short. For more complex chains of events, the historiographers of the ZuozhuanandGuoyucombined anecdotes into series, building largescale narratives that are nonetheless fundamentally anecdotal in character. The anecdote series merits study for its role as a shaper of historical memory: it is the narrative genre in which the

2. Early Christian Approaches to Divine Simplicity from: Divine Simplicity
Abstract: The doctrine of divine simplicity has a long history involving complex accounts that interweave philosophy, scripture, and theology. Without a doubt, there is no single doctrine of divine simplicity that remained perfectly unaltered throughout the Christian tradition. Perhaps this is because, as Christopher Stead argues, throughout the early church various senses of divine simplicity were used to speak about God without ever clarifying which sense was in use. In other words, “we must not think that simplicity is itself a simple notion.”¹ However, the simplistic versions of divine simplicity represented in much contemporary theology—primarily from critics—might lead others

4. Divine Simplicity from the Reformation to Karl Barth from: Divine Simplicity
Abstract: Following the patristic and medieval conceptions of divine simplicity, the Reformation and post-Reformation mark a time of significant change. Yet does this mean that the doctrine of divine simplicity itself changed? Surely, it was not at the center of the Reformation debates, but that does not mean that it received little or no attention from the Reformation to the early modern periods. In this chapter, I will begin with a brief overview of the Reformation and early modern approaches to God and divine simplicity. Next, I will continue the approach of previous chapters—choosing representative theologians who espouse the doctrine

6. A Trinitarian Account of Divine Simplicity from: Divine Simplicity
Abstract: The previous chapters demonstrated that divine simplicity developed in opposition to false teaching (e.g., gnostics, Eunomius), subsequently received further development and clarification (by, for example, Basil, Gregory of Nyssa, and others), and remained a standard Christian doctrine until later in the nineteenth century. Its biblical roots, implicit throughout the tradition, were identified in the last chapter as deriving from scripture’s habits of (1) using the many names or descriptions of God’s nature and (2) ascribing God’s various works to the indivisible operations of the Trinity ad extra. If this is correct, then the critics of divine simplicity have misunderstood the

2. Luther’s Reading of Genesis 22: from: Faith in a Hidden God
Abstract: This chapter explicates Luther’s reading of Genesis 22 in the Lectures on Genesisin his exegetical and historical context, focusing on the theological and exegetical moves by which he simultaneously softens the story and intensifies its problematic elements. In particular, the doctrine of the resurrection of the dead as an example ofcreatio ex nihiloserves as a hermeneutical key to both God and Abraham. It resolves the tension between God’s promise and command and it provides a response to ethical critiques of Abraham’s behavior. But the concept of resurrection fails to solve the underlying theological problems of who God

5. The Great Tradition Ruptured? from: "Without Ceasing to be a Christian"
Author(s) ROBINSON BOB
Abstract: Before further engagement with Panikkar’s thought, it is important to note one problem presented by the reality that Panikkar’s large body of writing spans a period in excess of fifty years: any attempted summary or survey is difficult, given the evolving nature of his thought. The difficulty is compounded by one of the logically prior challenges of making sense of Panikkar: the idiosyncratic relationship between the publishing dates of Panikkar’s books and other writings and the actual genesis of their content. At times, this makes it difficult to understand the development of Panikkar’s thought, even about a single issue. Nonetheless,

Book Title: Preaching Must Die!-Troubling Homiletical Theology
Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): Myers Jacob D.
Abstract: The real question for homiletics in our increasingly postmodern, post-Christian contexts is not how are we going to prevent preaching from dying, but how are we going to help it die a good death. Preaching was not made to live. At most, preaching is a witness, a sign, a crimson X marking a demolition site. The church has developed sophisticated technologies in modernity to give preaching the semblance of life, belying the truth: preaching was born under a death sentence. It was born to die. Only when preaching embraces its own death is it able to truly live.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tm7hbc

9. A New Frontier from: World Christianity as Public Religion
Author(s) HARRIS-SMITH YVETTE JOY
Abstract: In Christianity, we move through cultural contexts often. Whenever we recite scripture or sing hymns penned long ago, listen to sermons or read the Bible privately or aloud, we are moving through cultural contexts. The study of World Christianity is interested in the myriad of expressions of the Christian faith as seen across several continents. It is interested in the cultural contexts through which people express their belief in God.¹ Similarly, the field of public religion is interested in the expressions of religious beliefs through behaviors that “have a direct bearing on public order.”² The common thread that connects these

10. “Who You Are Does Not Matter in Europe!” from: World Christianity as Public Religion
Author(s) ADOGAME AFE
Abstract: On May 20, 2015, Nicolas Haque anchored the story of sixteen-year-old Senegalese Abdou as he prepared his perilous journey to Europe.¹ This was part of a prolonged Al Jazeera TV documentary Desperate Journeys, chronicling a series of woes, misery, and catastrophe in which hundreds of thousands of African and other immigrants, hopeless but with sanguine expectations, are fleeing economic hardship, poverty, natural disasters, ethnic clashes, political oppression, and unwarranted civil strife partly orchestrated by failing governments. By raising a loan of over $3,000 to facilitate the journey organized by individuals in the migration industry, including people smugglers or human traffickers,

Book Title: Principalities in Particular-A Practical Theology of the Powers That Be
Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): Berger Rose Marie
Abstract: Activist pastor Bill Wylie-Kellermann gives an urgent specificity to the theology of the powers, relating biblical concepts to contemporary struggles for civil rights, clean air, fair housing, safe affordable water, public education, and more, highlighting throughout the vital importance of a community of struggle connected through time and across space. The book‘s uniqueness lies in its practicality, as biblical and theological analyses arise from, and are addressed to, particular historical moments and given ecclesial and movement struggles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tm7htm

Introduction: from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: It will be fifty years since William Stringfellow lay in a hospital bed, preparing for radical and life-threatening surgery, while simultaneously contemplating the principalities. He’d been put onto them by the

1 William Stringfellow: from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: William Stringfellow was my mentor in the practical theology of principalities. I’ve spent the three decades since his death, if not thinking like he did, at least framing my work in the outlines of this thought on the powers.

6 Discerning the Angel of Detroit: from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: In the hot summer of 1988, something happened in Detroit. A well-financed campaign to legalize and develop casino gambling as the panacea for the city’s desperate, ongoing economic crisis was rejected overwhelmingly at the polls. Oh, yes, there was a

7 Fallen: from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: It is the powers, the rulers of this age, who crucified Christ.¹ That is perhaps the single most edifying point in comprehending them. They are at best confused and blind to their vocations. And if all the New Testament references are amassed, from the lowliest human agent to the powers in high places, from the Sadducean party to the Beast rising out of the sea, the preponderance of them report demonic agencies, a host in rebellion against God. They are among the forces that separate human beings from the love of God (Rom 8:39); they blind the minds of unbelievers

11 Spiritual Warfare and Economic Justice (1994) from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: Among the most important (and most neglected) biblical resources for Christian economic thinking is the theology of principalities and powers. William Stringfellow, who must be credited with the theological and political discernment that awakened much of the recent practical interest in the powers, first began to speak on the topic in the early ‘60s. Slated to give two identical presentations in Boston—one at the Harvard Business School and another at

13 Death Has Its Day: from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: In the lust for oil, drones sail the deserts and robots sink to the deeps. Thus far the reach of the military corporate maw. And the doxology their choristers chant: Drill, baby, kill! Make no mistake: The powers, and behind them death,

21 Katrina and the Wrath to Come (2005) from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: In May of 1964, brushfires of racial violence had erupted in American cities, but the major uprisings and rebellions were yet to come.

23 Lest Death Prevail: from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: For a decade now, we have read as a family J. K. Rowling’s magical Harry Potter books aloud to one another in beds and cars and cottages.¹ A bookstore friend mailed us the first, which caught and held with our two girls. Except for the last that she never saw or heard, the subsequent volumes served for us as a therapeutic backstory to my wife’s struggle with cancer. Here was a lively gift of diversion and delight, which we increasingly read as rich in themes biblical and Christian. It was as if the Oxford Inklings (C. S. Lewis, J. R.

25 The Dismantling of Public Education: from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: When the Detroit schools were first taken over in 1999, enrollment was stable (at 200,000 students), test scores were middle range compared to state averages and rising,

26 Her Name Was Charity: from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: Think of Charity Hicks as the Rosa Parks of the Detroit Water Struggle.¹ She was arrested in Detroit early on May 16 for resisting the shut-off of her own water. The private contractor came early in the morning, but she was up. Since he was hitting a bunch of people on her block, she went door to door rousing people to say: He’s coming; fill your tub, fill pots and pans! Then, because she still had two more days to settle her bill, she demanded to see the shut-off order. He had none, only a list of addresses. When the

28 Trump Powers: from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: A prophet’s warning. To write about the principalities in this present moment, just weeks since the inauguration of the Trump regime in January 2017, is to risk speaking too soon. By the time these reflections see the light of print, impeachment proceedings may be launched, or a nonviolent groundswell of resistance may have brought the president to the brink of resignation, or yet perhaps an iron fist is holding collapse at bay with the “brink” and the “launch” being war, God forbid—even nuclear, or maybe Mother Earth has reached her limit and thrown the planet in deeper turmoil, nor

Introduction from: Engaging the Powers
Abstract: The Powers, unfortunately, have long since been identified as an

12. But What If …? from: Engaging the Powers
Abstract: It is surprising how few people have seriously considered nonviolence as a way of life and a strategy for social change. We are so inured to violence that we find it hard to believe inanything else. And that phrase “believe in” provides the clue. We trust violence. Violence “saves.” It is “redemptive.” All we have to do is make survival the highest goal, and death the greatest evil, and we have handed ourselves over to the gods of the Domination System. We trust violence because we are afraid. And we will not relinquish our fears until we are able

6. The Marvel of the Coming Son of Man (Mark 11:27–13:37) from: The Rhetoric of Jesus in the Gospel of Mark
Abstract: And they were discussing among themselves saying, “If we say, ‘from

Book Title: Civitas augescens. Includere e comparare nell'Europa di oggi- Publisher: Casa Editrice Leo S. Olschki s.r.l.
Author(s): Marramao Giacomo
Abstract: Il volume qui proposto al lettore è il frutto del confronto fra intellettuali europei attenti ai problemi più cogenti dell’attualità: globalizzazione, crisi economico-finanziaria, immigrazione, cittadinanza e accoglienza. Il dibattito prende così le mosse dai concetti di inclusione ed esclusione per individuare nell’ospite la condizione dell’uomo in quanto tale e non di un singolo gruppo, inoltrandosi dunque in una riflessione sul mercato, sulle sue degenerazioni finanziarie e sui suoi conflitti con la democrazia. This volume collects the results of the joined efforts of European intellectuals in front of the most urgent problems of our times: globalization, economic and financial crisis, immigration, citizenship. The debate moves from the concepts of inclusion and exclusion to assert that the condition of ‘guest’ is common to all human race, and not that of a single group. It then reflects on the financial degeneration of the market and on its conflicts with democracy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tqx7xh

Introduzione: from: Civitas augescens. Includere e comparare nell'Europa di oggi
Author(s) Marramao Giacomo
Abstract: Il sintagma Civitas augescensrimanda a un concetto-chiave della tradizione giuridica romana, documentato nel corso dei secoli dall’opera di vari autori: da Ennio (Ann., 478) a Cicerone (Pro Balbo, 13.31), da Sallustio (De Catilinae coniur., 6.7, 7.3, 10.1) a Livio (4.4.4, 8.13.16). L’idea che lo sottende – la crescita del popolo e l’allargamento della cittadinanza – attraversa la storia di Roma sin dalle origini, trovando il suo momento topico nellaConstitutio Antoninianae il suo punto d’approdo in Giustiniano, con l’eliminazione della categoria di ‘straniero’. Assumere questa visione dinamica, incrementale e ‘inclusiva’ (senza tacere la costitutiva ambivalenza del termine), come sfondo simbolico

COMUNITÀ E LIBERTÀ from: Civitas augescens. Includere e comparare nell'Europa di oggi
Author(s) Tomatis Francesco
Abstract: È possibile non dover porre in alternativa comunità e libertà? Comunemente, infatti, libertà e comunità vengono contrapposte, come due dimensioni alternative. La libertà, intesa quale libertà dei moderni, individuale, si potrebbe realizzare solo indipendentemente dalle relazioni interpersonali comunitarie, quali singoli individui; al più come corrispettivo privato di una solidità sociale, di un tutto collettivo superiore, meccanicamente costituito, positivamente istituito, come una sfera di libertà interiore che non possa trovare espressione nella società pubblica. D’altro canto, comunità si potrebbe dare solo a discapito delle libertà personali, a favore di un tutto organico comunitario superiore alle sue singole parti, rispetto al quale

REPUBBLICA: from: Civitas augescens. Includere e comparare nell'Europa di oggi
Author(s) Tuozzolo Claudio
Abstract: Infatti il nuovo anno politico italiano (l’anno che si è concluso con un referendum perso dal più rappresentativo sindacato dei lavoratori italiani e con la vittoria delle ragioni del ‘mercato globale’ rappresentate dall’amministratore delegato della FIAT Marchionne) è stato inaugurato dal ministro Gaetano Brunetta che ha dichiarato: «”L’Italia è una repubblica democratica fondata sul lavoro’’ non significa assolutamente nulla», e poi ha aggiunto: bisogna cambiare la

FRIEDEN, KULTURELLE DIVERSITÄT UND NACHHALTIGKEIT ALS AUFGABEN TRANSKULTURELLER BILDUNG IN EUROPA from: Civitas augescens. Includere e comparare nell'Europa di oggi
Author(s) Wulf Christoph
Abstract: Alle drei Bereiche sind miteinander verschränkt. Wenn Fragen des Friedens bearbeitet werden, spielen Probleme der kulturellen Vielfalt und der Nachhaltigkeit eine Rolle. Eine Erziehung zur Nachhaltigkeit ist ohne Berücksichtigung kultureller Vielfalt und sozialer Gerechtigkeit nicht möglich. Dass alledrei

JUSTICE AS FRATERNITY from: Civitas augescens. Includere e comparare nell'Europa di oggi
Author(s) Puyol Angel
Abstract: The French Revolution proclaimed an ethical and political ideal with its three principles that have not been improved on since: liberty, equality and fraternity. Since then, western political philosophy has put its greatest efforts into analysing the former two (liberty and equality), but has ignored, and even disdained, the third part of the revolutionary triad: fraternity. In my opinion, forgetting or underestimating fraternity as a political category is unjustifiable, given that so many injustices in our world are not only related to a lack of liberty and equality, but also to the scarcity, and sometimes inexistence, of fraternity.

Book Title: Filozofia religii- Publisher: John Paul II Catholic University of Lublin, Faculty of Philosophy
Author(s): JANECZEK ks. Stanisław
Abstract: This volume takes up the problem of the human relation with God. Religion, perceived as a lasting and important cultural and social phenomenon, was and still is a research theme in the humanities and social sciences. The contributors examines religion both on the ground of philosophy and the sciences, discussing its nature and status, being concerned about the autonomy of philosophy and related issues. A wide-ranging overview of the multifaceted nature of religious discourse is combined with a discourse on the methodological status of religious studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1trkj5d

Book Title: Antropologia- Publisher: John Paul II Catholic University of Lublin, Faculty of Philosophy
Author(s): JANECZEK Ks. Stanisław
Abstract: Antropologia [Anthropology] is a gateway to the series of volumes devoted to particular disciplines of philosophy, taking into account their relationship with the Christian worldview and recognizing the need to include the philosophical and ideological diversity of contemporary culture. Antropologia covers Thomist tradition, enriching its achievements with other perspectives, especially Karol Wojtyla's personalism. Increasing influence of "third culture thinking", where the humanities are carried out in the context of the natural sciences, justifies the need to take up the difficult task of demonstrating complex problems of philosophical and natural anthropology. Anthropological considerations force us to realize the multifaceted nature of classical discussions on the nature of man, including theirs scientific and ideological facets, and to demonstrate them in a well-balanced manner. In this context, it enables readers to gain guidance in the debate on the philosophy of mind, providing ways of understanding and assessing the problem of the human soul (concerning the mind-body problem).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1trkj9g

Book Title: Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations- Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): GLEACH FREDERIC W.
Abstract: The Histories of Anthropology Annual presents diverse perspectives on the discipline's history within a global context, with a goal of increasing awareness and use of historical approaches in teaching, learning, and conducting anthropology. The series includes critical, comparative, analytical, and narrative studies involving all aspects and subfields of anthropology.Volume 11, Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations, examines the work and influence of scholars, including Franz Boas, Ruth Benedict, John Dewey, Randolph Bourne, A. Irving Hallowell, and Edward Westermarck, and anthropological practices and theories in Vietnam and Ukraine as well as the United States. Contributions also focus on the influence of Western thought and practice on anthropological traditions, as well as issues of relativism, physical anthropology, language, epistemology, ethnography, and social synergy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1trkjsq

EDITORS’ INTRODUCTION from: Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) GLEACH FREDERIC W.
Abstract: This is our fourth volume since Histories of Anthropology Annualreturned from the journals to the book division at the University of Nebraska Press. This may seem nothing but a structural question of production, but there are real distinctions between journals and books that are quite significant to the ways we conceived and continue to produceHoAA. After more than a decade we find ourselves reflecting on the peculiarities of an annual cycle of publication geared to professional colleagues in anthropology and history (broadly defined to include ethnohistory and history of science) and in Native studies and other specific cultural

1 Franz Boas as Theorist: from: Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) DARNELL REGNA
Abstract: Franz Boas is uniformly credited as the dominant figure of American anthropology from the late nineteenth century to the Second World War. His stature as a public intellectual is acknowledged to have extended far beyond the borders of the discipline he established. Nonetheless, few contemporary anthropologists actually read Boas or have a clear sense of what he wrote or thought. Sadly, little of the enormous Boas scholarship is based on historicist engagement with his work. In the seven decades since his death, the theoretical preoccupations of anthropologists have shifted more than once. Furthermore, the world itself has changed such that

7 An Epistemological Shift in the History of Anthropology: from: Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) ULIN ROBERT C.
Abstract: Anthropology’s venerable and unusual tradition of self-critique addresses its complicity with colonialism and has sought, moreover, to periodically reconstitute its political relevance by addressing social inequality worldwide (Asad 1980[1973]; Hymes 1969). Toward this end, anthropologists have absorbed the critical insights from allied disciplines and the broad parameters of nonpositivistic critique. One only has to think of Marx or the numerous anthropologists who have been influenced by the Frankfurt School and the multiple contemporary currents of Continental social theory more generally. In what follows, I explore the historical relation between the “linguistic turn” in social theory and the strides that anthropologists

9 Heritage Gatherers: from: Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) GLINSKII OLGA
Abstract: The decades leading up to the First World War were marked with profound concerns over the identities and loyalties of the peasantry in eastern Europe.¹ Particularly after the revolutions of 1848 swept across Europe, the looming question of uncertain allegiances of the peasant masses came to be one of the most pressing issues for the pre–World War I revolutionaries, the national awakeners, and the ruling elite in both the Russian and Austro-Hungarian Empires. In this formative context, Ukrainian national developments are inextricably intertwined with their Polish and Russian counterparts, on the one hand, and pre–World War I empires

11 Life in Hanoi in the State Subsidy Period: from: Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) VAN HUY NGUYEN
Abstract: The important exhibition Life in Hanoi in the State Subsidy Period, 1975–1986closed at the Vietnam Museum of Ethnology (VME) in the middle of 2007. The exhibition had been extended six months past the original plan to stay open one year, from June 2006 to June 2007. The public regretted the closing of the exhibition. Their regret not only surfaced at that time but continues even now whenever that period of time or the Vietnam Museum of Ethnology is mentioned, as the exhibition had increased the reputation of the VME. As the former director of the Vietnam Museum of

INTRODUCTION from: God's Creativity and Human Action
Abstract: This book presents the proceedings of the fourteenth annual Building Bridges Seminar, convened at the Georgetown University School of Foreign Service in Doha, Qatar, May 3–6, 2015, with university president John J. DeGioia present as host and participant. Launched in 2002 as an initiative of the Archbishop of Canterbury—and with the stewardship of Georgetown University since 2013, this gathering of scholar-practitioners of Islam and Christianity convenes annually, alternating between Muslim- majority and Christian-majority contexts, for deep study of selected texts pertaining to a carefully chosen theme. The circle of participants is always diverse ethnically and geographically, and balanced

Human Action within Divine Creation: from: God's Creativity and Human Action
Author(s) KADIVAR MOHSEN
Abstract: Human action within divine creation has been the subject of long and controversial discussions among Muslims since the eighth century, first as the subject of study and debate in commentaries on the Qurʾān and Ḥadīth and then continuing as one of the first problems of Islamic theology. The Muslim philosophers and mystics engaged deeply in the subject and enriched its literature from their specific perspectives.

Scripture Dialogue 3: from: God's Creativity and Human Action
Abstract: Humankind were but a single community, but then differed. And were it not for a [decreed] word that had already preceded from your Lord, it would have been decided between them regarding that over which they differed.

CHAPTER 3 Eyes Wide Open: from: The Film Museum Practice and Film Historiography
Abstract: The change in archival priorities more or less paralleled developments in film historiography, causing film museums to re-evaluate what they considered to be, in Bourdieu’s words, re-evaluating their ‘specific capital’. This consisted of old film titles that were at risk of perishing or already listed as ‘lost films’. The focus on endangered and lost films was clearly in tune with the new ideas that had started to dominate film historiography: the aim appeared to be to acquire as many unknown films as possible and rehabilitate them by including them in the museums’ programming and in the new film historiography. These

Coda: from: The Film Museum Practice and Film Historiography
Abstract: The 2012 celebration of Unesco’s annual World Day for Audiovisual Heritage, held by EYE Filmmuseum in its newly opened venue on the banks of the IJ in Amsterdam, was a remarkable event. The celebration consisted of a programme of newly restored films, dating from exactly 100 years earlier. Before the screening started, however, a dazzling display of pink, green, and blue light was projected onto the walls of the institute, suffusing them with colour. Then, a strange pattern began to appear, which slowly resolved itself into a full-colour projection of an art-deco interior, complete with lacquered wood panelling. This was

Book Title: Trópicos de Gutenberg-Escenas y mitos del editor
Publisher: Trama editorial
Author(s): Katz Alejandro
Abstract: Adolfo Castañón no es tanto un editor como, más justamente, un hombre de letras. Poeta, ensayista, traductor, profesor y académico de la lengua en México, la tarea editorial ha sido para él parte de la polimorfa estrategia orientada a poner la palabra escrita en el centro de una escena pública de la que parece estar fugándose con una velocidad cada vez mayor. Sus reflexiones sobre el mundo de la edición no son, por ello, uno más de los discursos para los cuales la edición es una de esas prácticas vintage, algo anticuado y de calidad pero sobre cuyo futuro hay bastante menos para decir que sobre su pasado. Sin proponérselo –o, más justamente, sin imponérnoslo– los ensayos recogidos en TRÓPICOS DE GUTENBERG. ESCENAS Y MITOS DEL EDITOR van dibujando, con la sutil mano del editor que los conoce a todos, los rostros de quienes están implicados en el funcionamiento del “ecosistema del libro”. Como si fuera el director de un casting, Castañón hace subir a escena a autores, traductores, lectores y diversos artesanos a los que aquellos confiarán la confección del libro, y como buen director de escena pone bajo los reflectores sus atributos.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1v2xt7w

DEDICATORIA: from: Trópicos de Gutenberg
Abstract: Jesús Castañón Rodríguez amaba los libros. Siempre tenía uno en la mano; invariablemente llegaba de la calle a la casa, no con uno sino con varios recién adquiridos. Vivía dentro de ellos y a su alrededor. Cuando éramos niños, mi hermana y yo llegamos a pensar que, para que él nos oyera, teníamos que transformarnos en libro. No sé cómo le vino esa pasión, pues no procedía de una familia de letrados.

EL PODER DE LA CONVERSACIÓN from: Trópicos de Gutenberg
Abstract: Cada libro es como una cita, una promesa de cohabitación mental y convivencia, una conversación, un proyecto de vida, una promesa, un adorno mental. Las actas del simposio sobre La mitología del cerdo. Las figuras de la biblioteca en la imaginación del siglo de oro español, losPoemas completosde D. H. Lawrence, losDiariosde M. F. K. Fisher –la ensayista usamericana que escribe sobre cocina y vida cotidiana–, el libro sobreEuropade Lucien Febvre, los ensayos de Germán Arciniegas o la prosa de Paul Celan. El comprador de libros no sólo los adquiere para leerlos sino, por

DEL LIBRO A LA IRRADIACIÓN ELECTRÓNICA LIBRESCA from: Trópicos de Gutenberg
Abstract: Estábamos acostumbrados a que el saber tuviese un peso material; se hablaba, no sin razón, del «peso de la cultura». Esta expresión evocaba mares de papel, el volumen de los volúmenes, hileras o montones de libros. El hombre de saber era un hombre literalmente cargado de libros. La aparición de una textualidad virtual asentada en memorias electrónicas –libros, cartas, listas, documentos– viene a transformar esta imagen. Sin embargo, esto no significa de ninguna manera que esté en peligro la existencia del hombre de saber o, más llanamente, del lector. La escritura, según Platón, es una herramienta ambigua, pues al tiempo

LA EDICIÓN EN ESPAÑOL: from: Trópicos de Gutenberg
Abstract: Editar en español a fines del siglo xx, ¿no es llorar? Al menos así lo harían pensar las exclamaciones invariablemente quejumbrosas de los editores de uno y otro lado del Atlántico que no pocas veces parecen haber aprendido a leer en el libro del malhumorado Jeremías. Las quejas españolas y americanas suenan igual a los oídos legos, pero alientan desde diversas heridas. Las quejas americanas más comunes, fronteras adentro, argumentan la falta de estímulos a la empresa editorial, el intervencionismo de Estado en materia de libros de texto (singularmente en el caso del Libro de Texto Gratuito en México), la

CONSTITUCIÓN DE LA CIUDAD EDITORIAL from: Trópicos de Gutenberg
Abstract: Si cada lenguaje encierra una forma de vida, como sostiene Ludwig Wittgenstein, ¿qué pensar de ese singular obrero de la palabra que no se expresa por medio de frases y argumentos sino que discute fraguando bibliotecas? Cierto: hace colecciones, ¿pero cabrá imponerle el título de coleccionista, reducirlo a la neurosis de entregarse a unos acopios más o menos congruentes? ¿Es el editor una especie de fetichista intelectual que añade a la adoración irracional el pecado del exhibicionismo compulsivo? Si en la especie humana cohabitan el león y la rata, como quiere Pascal y recuerda Alejandro Rossi, ¿por qué bajo la

NO SÉ SI SÉ from: Trópicos de Gutenberg
Abstract: La imagen que escogí –¿o fue ella la que me escogió?– para identificar mis libros proviene del grabado de Brueghel ‘el Viejo’ (¿1530?-1569) realizado en 1557. Se titula La leccióny lleva una leyenda en latín:Parisios stollidum si quis transmittat asellum. Si hic est asinus non erit illic equus. La vi por primera vez, aislada del grabado como en mi exlibris, en el escritorio de Francisco Valdés, el entonces joven escritor con quien a principios de los años setenta dirigí la efímera y juvenil revistaCave Canem. La lecciónde Brueghel ‘el Viejo’ despliega una cascada de personajes –más

LOS FABRICANTES DE TEXTOS from: Trópicos de Gutenberg
Abstract: Durante mucho tiempo –y todavía hoy– admiré a los escritores fluidos y espontáneos que de un solo trazo emitían sus chorros verbales sin asomo de duda o de incertidumbre. Es el caso de los supersabios que saben llenar las páginas de los periódicos con opiniones sobre casi cualquier asunto: la violencia, los impuestos, los partidos políticos, los adelantos de la ciencia… Ante esas emisiones espontáneas, sigo siendo como al principio un vacilante aprendiz. Esa situación creo haberla dramatizado en algunos cuentos donde ensayo interrogar el surgimiento y las circunstancias emergentes de la palabra (como en «La opaca» y de «Esas

On the Interrelations of Eighteenth-Century Literary Forms from: Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: Modern critics, in discussing neoclassical genres, have insisted on the rigidity of forms, while acknowledging that eighteenth-century critics disagreed about and poets seemed to diverge from this “rigidity.” Austin Warren wrote: “That genres are distinct—and also should be kept distinct—is a general article of Neo-Classical faith. But if we look to Neo-Classical criticism for definition of genre or method of distinguishing genre from genre, we find little consistency or even awareness of the need for a rationale.”¹ James Sutherland, in A Preface to Eighteenth Century Poetry,declared: “You knew where you were with Pastoral, Elegy, Epic, and the

Innovation and Variation: from: Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: The study of literary history inevitably involves the study of literary change, and any explanation of change must distinguish among the types of change that are possible. These include changes within the work of a single writer, changes among different writers who share common ends, like the Scriblerus group (this can include, as well, changes in what are called “schools,” “movements,” and “periods”), changes in the forms of genres, changes in style, changes in critical interpretation. It is apparent that the term “change” identified with these many different literary situations—and they are not all that one can name—needs

Historical Knowledge and Literary Understanding from: Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: My argument shall be that the historical study of literature is a necessary condition for any literary analysis. As critics and scholars, we invoke historical assumptions in our practice, our methods, and our theory. The problem, therefore, is to present a conception of historical knowledge and literary understanding that will acknowledge this phenomenon and make practice consonant with it. And to do this, one must begin by recognizing the historical nature of literary study. In this essay I shall be using examples from my own work in progress—a study of literary change from Milton to Keats—and although I

Literary History and Literary Theory from: Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: Although I shall address myself to literary history and literary theory, because this relation is central to our time, this is not the traditional relation that, for centuries, interested scholars. The traditional contrast established by Aristotle was between historyandpoetry.He distinguished between them by declaring that “poetry is something more philosophic and of graver import than history, since its statements are of the nature rather of universals, whereas those of history are singulars. By a universal statement I mean one as to what such or such a kind of man will probably or necessarily say or do—which

Interpreting Interpretations from: Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: In Poetry and RepressionHarold Bloom remarks that every strong poem, at least since Petrarch, has known implicitly what Nietzsche has taught us explicitly: that there is only interpretation, and that every interpretation answers an earlier interpretation, and then must yield to a later one. But this statement is undercut by another made at the outset:

1. Die Ordnung der Götter: from: Der russische Symbolismus
Abstract: Die "Kulturgötter" des mythopoetischen Symbolismus (S II) befinden sich (und das in zunehmendem Maße) diesseits der kosmischen und himmlischen Sphäre, von der bisher die Rede war: Sie sind schon weitgehend personifiziert, differenziert und – was besonders auffällt – aus einer ungeheuren Menge archaischer, antiker, orientalischer Götter und Dämonen selektiert: Der mythopoetische Götterhimmel des russischen Symbolismus um 1900 rechnet zwar durchaus mit der als gegeben angenommen (und weitgehend literarisierten) klassischen "Götterfamilie" (samt allen Halbgöttern, Heroen u.a. mythologischen Figuren), beschränkt sich aber im Rahmen des konkreten mifotvorčestvoauf ganz wenige Götter (oder besser Personifizierungen göttlicher Funktionen!), in die alle anderen mythologischen Figuren

5. Vom Natur- zum Kulturmythos: from: Der russische Symbolismus
Abstract: Anders als in der "orthodoxen" Mythopoesie Ivanovs sind in der frühen Dichtung Bloks und vor allem Belyjs die (jedenfalls für die europäische Kultur) universellen Symbole und Mythologeme zwar auch an den hellenischen Götterhimmel gebunden, dieser wird aber äußerst selektiv behandelt und mit heterogenen Motiven der slawischen und germanischen (v.a. folkloristischen) Symbolwelt kontaminiert und im Rahmen eines sehr spezifischen Gruppen- oder Individualmythos aktualisiert und damit zum Bestandteil einer eigentümlichen mythopoetischen Pragmatik (man denke etwa an den argonavtizmBelyjs und seines Kreises Anfang des Jahrhunderts oder an den Sophia-Kult Belyjs, Bloks, S. Solov’evs).

8. Stadt – Volk – Rußland from: Der russische Symbolismus
Abstract: Der diabolische "Stadt"-Mythos gehört in das Paradigma der künstlichen Welt(en), die dem negativ gewerteten Organisch-Naturhaften polar entgegengesetzt sind: Unter dem Gesichtspunkt der Künstlichkeit, Gemachtheit, Gestelltheit (im Sinne von Inszenierung einer existentiellen Situation) sind "Stadt" ( gorod) und "Text" (kniga) bzw. allgemeiniskusstvo(reduziert aufiskusnyj) analog; beide Sphären beherrscht der Künstler-Demiurg, dessen "gemachter" Mikrokosmos als Anti-Welt der geschaffenen Natur gegenübersteht. Die diabolische Stadt versteht sich selbst als positive Scheinwelt, in der anstelle der kosmischen Gestirne diefonarileuchten, anstelle der Landschaft (Berge, Täler, Höhlen etc.) gibt es eine versteinerte Welt der Türme, Straßen und Keller. Im Rahmen der Mythopoesie des S

12. Von der Seele zur Psyche: from: Der russische Symbolismus
Abstract: Freud unterscheidet zunächst prinzipiell zwischen zwei Grundformen der Psychopathien, deren Beziehung zueinander in der Entwicklung der Psychoanalyse immer wieder neu definiert wurde: Es sind dies die Neurosen und Psychosen. Beide psychopathologischen Typen, wie sie Freund etwa in der hierfür maßgeblichen Schrift "Neurose und Psychose" (Freud XIII, 387-391) beschreibt, wurzeln in fundamentalen Störungen innerhalb des psychischen Apparats und zwischen diesem und der Realität. Und beiden gemeinsam ist das Bestreben nach (Selbst-)Heilung und Restitution eines Urzustandes – eine Tendenz, die auch die diesen Grundstörungen homologen Kunsttypen charakterisiert. Hervorgehoben sei hier gleich einleitend, daß die Korrelation zwischen der psychoanalytischen Typologie der Grundstörungen und

3 The mimetic prejudice: from: Imagining the popular in contemporary French culture
Author(s) Holmes Diana
Abstract: As earlier chapters have pointed out, ‘popular’ is a capacious and slippery word. On the one hand, popular novels are simply the novels read and appreciated by a very large number of readers, as opposed to those that are canonised by critics and by literary histories but actually read by a relatively small élite. On the other hand, the ‘popular’ novel conjures up – if somewhat vaguely – a particular kind of fiction, raising the question of the aesthetic and philosophical specificity of the popular: do ‘popular’ novels conform to particular models of narrative? Do they deploy specifically ‘popular’ strategies?

5 French television: from: Imagining the popular in contemporary French culture
Author(s) Mazdon Lucy
Abstract: As has been argued in previous chapters, discourses relating to what constitutes popular culture in France have experienced a sweeping paradigm shift in the last fifty or so years. This has been witnessed across a range of cultural practices and philosophical and political debates. This period of change and negotiation coincides to a great extent with the development and gradual entrenchment of television in French cultural life, from its early days as a little-watched curiosity to its current incarnation as an ever-present and highly influential medium. To attempt to analyse the construction of the popular without addressing the role of

Not Doing from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: Of more interest, perhaps are two other kinds of cases. One is the not doing what one has been asked to do, or what one has indeed promised to do, so that the act itself perseveres, along with its undoing. Here I am thinking of Rainer Maria Rilke, asked, invited, to edit the letters and journal entries of the great German painter Paula Modersohn-Becker, and refusing, alleging that it would do her reputation no good:

Pseudonyms and De/Retitlings from: Undoing Art
Abstract: As for an amusing material coverup, try the cover of Frederic Tuten’s autobiography, which is overpictured by a gigantic Roy Lichtenstein cheese: obviously, the Big Cheese whose writing lurks.

Clinamen from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.D.: Walker’s installation is about how art seeks to remediate history’s tragic flaws by revisiting some of its cardinal sins and canonical objects. Likewise, the canonical status enjoyed by Mallarmé and Proust looms large in Broodthaers’s and Bennequin’s erasure experiments. Like Broodthaers’s «IMAGE», Ommagesuggests that such acts of undoing - whether affectionate, ironic or both - often originate in an attempt to deal with the pressure of influence. InThe Anxiety of Influence, Harold Bloom famously argued that poets since Milton have sought to escape from their predecessors’ haunting importance. In view of the examples seen so far the

More Cover-Ups, Overpaintings, Blackouts and Cutting-Outs from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.D.: An exhaustive list of early 21st century erasurist texts would have to include Stephen Ratcliffe’s [where late the sweet] BIRDS SANG(another text cut out of Shakespeare’sSonnets), Mary Ruefle’s correction fluid coveredA Little White Shadow(based on a late, anonymous 19th century manual published «for the Benefit of a Summer Home for Working Girls»), Austin Kleon’s self-explanatoryNewspaper Blackout, Janet Holmes’s further reduction of Emily Dickinson’s already elliptical verse inThe ms of my kin, David Dodd Lee’s Ashbery-erasingSkybooths in the Breath Somewhere, Srikanth Reddy’sVoyager(an erasure of Kurt Waldheim’s memoirs), my own truncated Carrollian

Ex-humings from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.D.: Despite the exponential popularity of erasure techniques amongst contemporary experimental artists, the most important and successful avatar of overpainting erasurism to this day remains Tom Phillips’s ongoing A Humument: A Treated Victorian Novel(1966-). By «ex-huming» the corpse of an obscure late 19thcentury novel (W.H. Mallock’s now forgotten three-deckerA Human Document[1892])A Humumenteludes Bloom’s logic of influence and constitutes a singular case of a rewriting whose achievements clearly outdo those of its (non-canonical) predecessor. For Phillips erasure is as much about covering and adding as it is about canceling and subtracting: the book is filled

Fading from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: Van Gogh, according to the astounding exhibition in the Metropolitan Museum in New York, knew that the red lake pigment he was using for his still lifes - such as in the irises and the roses he gathered in bunches from the garden in St. Remy to paint, three months before his suicide - might fade. He took that risk because he wanted to see how the purple (blue and red, of course) of the irises would look against the yellow of the sunflowers, and how the pink of the roses (white and red) would look against the verdant

Undoings of the Self from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: Human and ritualistic self-destruction works the same way: when you are an artist, and you jump of a bridge into water, it is surely undoing your art. So Robert Schumann trying to drown himself in the Rhine in 1854 before he was taken to an asylum where he stopped composing alto-gether, Paul Celan going off the Pont Mirabeau in Paris - of all bridges, given Apollinaire’s famous poem about its remaining! - and Ghérasim Luca off the same bridge, and then John Berryman in 1972 in Minnesota (see The New York Review of Books, June 4, 2015 for the

Scissoring the Sister from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: Here’s a tale: Florine Stettheimer’s sister Ettie, she of the pseudonym - how delicious it is! - “Henrie Waste,” published two novels under that rather extraordinary name: Philosophy/An Autobiographical Fragment, in 1917, andLove Daysin 1923. She seems to have written her doctoral dissertation for Freiburg University in 1907 on William James’The Will to Believe, which was translated into English and published with those two novels and a few short stories.63And, to top it off, she also painted, like her famous sister Florine. BUT, and this seems a bit beyond the pale, to understate the case,

Loathing from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: So how does your individual loathing undo the art against which it is (and you are) directed? You won’t be alone in our detestation of Jeff Koons, we think, but why? Is it kitsch and we never loved kitsch? Or is it overblownness and we like small? That can’t be it, since we really love large Motherwells and don’t find the massive black ovals overpowering, just persuasive. It is something that is crystallized, well, blown up into the balloons and stuck there, like idiocy itself.

Book Title: Fiction, propagande, témoignage, réalité-Cinq microessais sur la représentation de la guerre civile espagnole en Italie
Publisher: Quodlibet
Author(s): Curreri Luciano
Abstract: Ces cinq micro-essais sont consacrés à l’un des épisodes historiques les plus denses et complexes du XXe siècle : la guerre civile espagnole (1936-39), dont on célèbre cette année le 80e anniversaire. En Italie peut-être plus qu’ailleurs, fiction et réalité s’entremêlent dans la représentation de la guerre d’Espagne. En effet, l’histoire du « Bel Paese » a très vite fait osciller entre Droite et Gauche toute une série d’éléments qu’on aurait pourtant cru n’appartenir qu’à une seule vision du monde : le thème de la croisade, par exemple, ou l’ordre ‘militaro-narratif’, figures idéologiquement affiliables à un credo conservateur, comme on le sait, mais qu’on retrouve, néanmoins, à gauche. En ce sens, et dès le premier de ces micro-essais, il faudra affronter de façon quelque peu malicieuse et provocatrice un obstacle épistémologique coriace, pour faire le point sur une certaine réalité et l’usage plus ou moins légitime qu’en fait la fiction, avançant ou reculant entre propagande et témoignages et circulant entre narration, reportage, études, pamphlets, théâtre, cinéma, bande dessinée : et ceci d’un côté à l’autre de la barricade. On s’apercevra alors de la nécessité de ne pas se concentrer seulement sur les chefs-d’oeuvre, ni de se référer à une inutile philologie des représentations de la guerre d’Espagne — même si l’on ne négligera pas certains instruments connus de tous les philologues.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1vxm86z

AVANT-PROPOS ET REMERCIEMENTS from: Fiction, propagande, témoignage, réalité
Abstract: Il s’agit d’un ensemble de micro-essais relativement proches les uns des autres. En effet, bien que lisibles d’une façon autonome, ces cinq réflexions isolées entretiennent des liens importants. Nourries de redites et de recommencements, elles dessinent un espace critique caractérisé par une cohésion qui n’est pas nécessairement continue. Cet espace critique a d’ailleurs l’ambition de constituer — par le biais d’une série d’approximations successives — un véritable work in

5. LA GUERRE D’ESPAGNE DE NENNI, BERNERI, NITTI, LONGO ENTRE TÉMOIGNAGE, PROPAGANDE ET ÉCRITURE from: Fiction, propagande, témoignage, réalité
Abstract: Après avoir abordé, au début de ce petit livre, la représentation de la guerre civile espagnole sous l’angle des romans, reportages, pièces de théâtre, films et bandes dessinées au service du fascisme italien, je propose ici — presque spéculairement — de revenir sur cet événement majeur du XXe siècle dans un autre contexte. Je partirai cette fois d’une veine non fictionnelle de récits constitués par les témoignages d’un petit groupe d’antifascistes italiens nés entre 1891 et 1900, et retenus pour leur hétérogénéité largement représentative (courants politiques divers et différentes régions d’origine).

5 Disaster Cosmopolitanism: from: Negative Cosmopolitanism
Author(s) O’Loughlin Liam
Abstract: Mohsin Hamid’s noir novel Moth Smoke(2000), set in Lahore amidst the South Asian nuclear tests of 1998, features a scene in which news of the successful Pakistani tests at the Chagai Hills reaches the novel’s protagonist, Daru. An otherwise disaffected character – recently fired from his a banking job and spiralling into drug addiction and crime – Daru unexpectedly discovers in himself “a strange excitement, the posture-correcting force of pride.”¹ In Daru’s upright stance, evoking a soldier standing at attention, Hamid isolates the intended impact of the Pakistani government’s nuclear tests: the establishment of a militarized ideological formation which scholars and

6 Cosmopolitanism from Below: from: Negative Cosmopolitanism
Author(s) Ugor Paul
Abstract: Both as a moral and political project, cosmopolitanism is invested in a universalism that promotes the impartial treatment of all human beings, irrespective of one’s place of birth, ethnicity, race, gender/sexuality, or religion. Cosmopolitanism, then, is committed to a process of internationalization in which human beings everywhere are world citizens with basic rights grounded in natural law, that is, with rights which cannot be denied by any person(s), group(s), institution(s), or constituted authority, including the nation-state. Stressing the rights of the individual rather than those of the sovereign state, cosmopolitanism thus favours what Brown and Held call a “non-national sense

8 Cosmopolitan Creoles and Neoliberal Mobility in Annalee Davis’s On the Map from: Negative Cosmopolitanism
Abstract: However, since the 1970s, the region has been influenced strongly by the emergence of neoliberalism in the United States, the military and economic hegemon in the hemisphere. With its grounding in the logic of the market, neoliberalism promises an opportunity for the Caribbean to transcend the burdensome legacies of slavery and colonialism. This promise, of equality and mobility and freedom, poses difficulties to artists who perceive that neoliberalism has served only to

10 Standing Outside the Law: from: Negative Cosmopolitanism
Author(s) Collard Juliane
Abstract: following months, headlines like this celebrated the passing of Portland’s prostitution-free zone ordinance as a crucial tool for the police to take back their neighbourhoods and business districts, and rid the city of illegalized prostitution.¹ The ordinance was encoded in the Portland City Code and Charter in the wake of longstanding conflict over the rapid expansion and lax regulation of adult businesses within the city limits. Frustrated in their attempts to enact tighter controls on the legal sex industry, neighbourhood activists turned to

14 Homiletic Realism from: Negative Cosmopolitanism
Author(s) Brennan Timothy
Abstract: When I began writing on cosmopolitanism in the late 1980s, some critics accused me of negativity, a view often harshly treated in the euphoria surrounding the triumphant globalization that followed the fall of the Berlin Wall.¹ Whatever its openings and correctives, that event marked what I think we can all agree in retrospect was a powerful resurgence of US imperial ambitions and domestic political foreclosures in matters ranging from trade unions to public spending and media access. The attention in this volume to “negative cosmopolitanism,” then, is very welcome since it suggests that exploring this potent concept’s contradictions–its negativity,

Book Title: Il recupero dei siti di cava: strategie di scala vasta-Ipotesi per il Parco dell’Appia Antica
Publisher: Quodlibet
Author(s): Guarini Paola
Abstract: Il recupero e la valorizzazione delle aree estrattive dismesse, ipogee e “a cielo aperto", si fonda sull’obiettivo generale di un’azione rigenerativa di scala vasta, urbana e/o territoriale, che promuova sistemi di riconnessione di valore ambientale, storico, culturale. Si intende superare l’intervento di semplice bonifica o rinaturalizzazione, e interpretare il recupero come un’opportunità di re-immissione in vita di questi luoghi, proponendo la loro “messa in sicurezza", suggerendo l’inserimento di funzioni e servizi urbani, restituendone il godimento alla dimensione pubblica. Si vuole puntare all’individuazione, rilettura, recupero di sistemi estensivi e complessi, attraverso: la creazione di reti di ricucitura territoriale, il ripristino di relazioni ecologiche, culturali, fruitive, l’identificazione di “infrastrutture ambientali" o viarie (linee d’acqua, corridoi ecologici, antichi tracciati), il riconoscimento e/o la proposizione di “figure territoriali", capaci di evidenziare e rappresentare le relazioni spaziali e morfologiche tra singoli luoghi. La Ricerca, di cui il presente volume costituisce presentazione e consuntivo, ha scelto come terreno di sperimentazione il Parco dell’Appia Antica: un contesto unico, nel quale l’azione di valorizzazione si intreccia con un ricco palinsesto di preesistenze, naturalistiche e antropiche, suggerendo articolate dinamiche d’uso congiunto, tra ri-funzionalizzazione e tutela, oltreché percorsi di visita alternativi e inconsueti.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1w1vnhp

LA VALORIZZAZIONE DEI SITI DI CAVA COME STRATEGIA DI SISTEMA PER LA CITTÀ CONTEMPORANEA from: Il recupero dei siti di cava: strategie di scala vasta
Author(s) Guarini Paola
Abstract: Le relazioni spaziali. Nell’iniziare a studiare e indagare le aree di cava, emerge subito con evidenza quanto non abbia senso parlare di singolo luogo ma di sistema di luoghi.

PROVE DI ECO-RIUSO from: Il recupero dei siti di cava: strategie di scala vasta
Author(s) Dell’Aira Paola Veronica
Abstract: La chiave: sovrapporre le valenze, creare sinergie tra utilità ed evidenza, tra funzionalità e risalto.

Schemi cinestetici e metafore nella matematica from: Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Peruzzi Alberto
Abstract: Immanuel Kant descrisse la filosofia critica come una rivoluzione copernicana. A me quella di Kant è sempre parsa come una controrivoluzione tolemaica. Per correggere la mia ovviamente fallace impressione mi sono sempre detto che avevo trascurato qualcosa. Dovevo tener in maggior conto che, almeno per un certo Kant, il soggetto conoscente non è pienamente oggetto di conoscenza ma piuttosto è il bordo del conoscibile… o una singolarità, un buco al centro del conoscibile.

Does persuasion really come at “the end of reasons”? from: Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Salis Pietro
Abstract: Persuasion is a special aspect of our social and linguistic practices – one where an interlocutor, or an audience, is induced, to perform a certain action or to endorse a certain belief, and these episodes are not due to the force of the better reason. When we come near persuasion, it seems that, in general, we are somehow giving up factual discourse (and perhaps the principles of logic), since persuading must be understood as almost different from convincing rationally¹. Sometimes, for example, we can find persuasion a political speech that relies on our feelings, emotions and values, but we can also

Drawn norms: from: Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Maynard Patrick
Abstract: There seems to be good evidence of a recent rise of “non-logocentric”, yet fully philosophical, interest in images. This would be at least partly due to digitalization. Just as a technological revolution that started two and a half centuries ago greatly expanded our powers to gather, store and use energy, another revolution today rapidly expands our information gathering, storage and processing powers. And though much of that is given over to automatic systems, one of the information revolution’s biggest challenges has been to human user access and manipulation of its fast expanding data sets. Fortunately, digitalization has also provided ways

Norms, representationality, accessibility from: Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Feis Guglielmo
Abstract: A possible and, we believe, fruitful way to answer the question on whether representationality is necessary for normativity is to consider it using formal methods. Discussing what representationality is exceeds the scope of this paper; we would like to stay non-committal about its metaphysical nature or precise philosophical definition¹. The only assumption we need is the following: that representationality can itself be represented as a modality, and it is thus amenable to the methods of modal logic. This is in line with the standard formal treatments of other concepts such as metaphysical necessity, time, knowledge etc. and the analysis of

Verso una semiotica dei segnali stradali from: Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Pusceddu Roberto
Abstract: La sussistenza di una sintassi nel sistema dei segnali stradali, infatti, è una delle condizioni necessarie ai fini della configurabilità in termini di

Premessa from: Che cosa vale
Author(s) Semerari Furio
Abstract: In una pagina di Aut-Aut, attraverso la parola dell’assessore Wilhelm, Kierkegaard presenta una reinterpretazione della figura dell’imperatore Nerone, il cui senso è mostrare, da un lato, il carattere ineludibile dell’esigenza morale, persino da parte di chi, come per esempio l’imperatore romano, almeno apparentemente sia mosso solo dalla ricerca del piacere individuale, e, dall’altro, il tragico destino cui va incontro colui il quale, consapevole di quella esigenza, non si impegni a soddisfarla.

Ascoltare le emozioni che sono in noi from: Che cosa vale
Author(s) Borgna Eugenio
Abstract: La svolta emozionale della psichiatria come è stata definita da Eugène Minkowski, le ha ridato un’anima che era stata cancellata da ogni sua concezione descrittiva e biologica orientata alla trionfalizzazione dei sintomi, e non delle esperienze vissute, delle esperienze emozionali, dalle quali i sintomi nascono. Il tema, il Leitmotiv, delle emozioni in psichiatria ha un senso solo se non si abbia mai a staccare dalla realtà clinica: dalle sorgenti di vita e di conoscenza che la realtà clinica ha in sé. Le emozioni fanno parte della vita, anche quando la vita si incrina nel suo svolgersi nel tempo, e si

Generazioni meticce. from: Che cosa vale
Author(s) Natoli Salvatore
Abstract: Abitualmente “frontiera” e “confine” vengono usati come sinonimi, ma i sinonimi non indicano in assoluto il medesimo, e, se lo indicano, lo colgono sotto un diverso aspetto. Il confine è, certo, una linea di demarcazione, ma è anche un cum, una linea condivisa: non è necessariamente una barriera, ma è anche vicinanza, linea di passaggio. La frontiera è anch’essa confine – nel senso del latino fines terminare– ma suggerisce anche l’idea difrontee perciò del fronteggiare, dell’opporsi. In breve, il confine non esclude il transito, la frontiera evoca la difesa e la chiusura. I confini si attraversano, le frontiere bloccano.

Book Title: Le vertigini della materia-Roger Caillois, la letteratura e il fantastico
Publisher: Quodlibet
Author(s): Coglitore Roberta
Abstract: Il fantastico è la chiave di volta dell’esperienza intellettuale di Roger Caillois. Alla teoria generale del fantastico, alle descrizioni di mirabilia della natura e ai fantasmi delle scritture dell’io sono dedicate le tre sezioni del presente volume. Nella prima parte la famosa definizione cailloisiana del fantastico in arte e in letteratura, «l’irruzione dell’inammissibile all’interno della inalterabile regolarità quotidiana», è interpretata come il nucleo fondativo di un’estetica generale che include il mondo degli animali, alla luce delle contemporanee teorie evoluzioniste, e quello dei minerali, interpretato come l’esempio decisivo per illustrare la legge della dissimmetria che regola l’universo. Nella seconda parte le mirabili pagine di Caillois dedicate alle pietre figurate vengono considerate tra gli esempi più alti dell’ékphrasis novecentesca, dove emerge una vocazione letteraria continuamente negata e dissimulata. Nell’ultima parte le passeggiate parigine alla ricerca dei fantasmi del XV arrondissement, oggetto di un saggio sulla logica dell’immaginario, assumono la forma di un racconto autobiografico e di un film per la televisione, dove Caillois recita la parte del narratore e di un personaggio con cappa e maschera, a metà tra Fantômas e Zorro. Caillois ritorna così alla scrittura letteraria e autobiografica, presente sin dalle prime esperienze giovanili, ma abbandonata dopo i contrasti con André Breton e il gruppo dei Surrealisti.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1w2f2z7

I grattacieli, il castello e il ritratto from: Le vertigini della materia
Abstract: Tra le splendide pagine di un lapidario moderno, La scrittura delle pietre¹di Roger Caillois, si trovano le descrizioni esemplari di tre pietre – una paesina e due calcari – interamente disegnate dalla natura e considerate opere d’arte naturali.

L’autobiografia e l’immemoriale from: Le vertigini della materia
Abstract: La pubblicazione delle Operedi Roger Caillois (OEuvresnella collana «Quarto» di Gallimard, 2008) conferisce a posteriori una forma organica agli eterogenei interessi dell’autore e alla varietà delle sue scritture. Come è evidente sin dall’immagine della scacchiera raffigurata in copertina, il volume mira a ricomporre in sistema la quasi totalità delle ricerche cailloisiane, in linea con la vocazione della collana editoriale¹.

Book Title: Mourning Nature-Hope at the Heart of Ecological Loss and Grief
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): LANDMAN KAREN
Abstract: We are facing unprecedented environmental challenges, including global climate change, large-scale industrial development, rapidly increasing species extinction, ocean acidification, and deforestation – challenges that require new vocabularies and new ways to express grief and sorrow over the disappearance, degradation, and loss of nature. Seeking to redress the silence around ecologically based anxiety in academic and public domains, and to extend the concepts of sadness, anger, and loss, Mourning Nature creates a lexicon for the recognition and expression of emotions related to environmental degradation. Exploring the ways in which grief is experienced in numerous contexts, this groundbreaking collection draws on classical, philosophical, artistic, and poetic elements to explain environmental melancholia. Understanding that it is not just how we mourn but what we mourn that defines us, the authors introduce new perspectives on conservation, sustainability, and our relationships with nature. An ecological elegy for a time of climatic and environmental upheaval, Mourning Nature challenges readers to turn devastating events into an opportunity for positive change. Contributors include Glenn Albrecht (Murdoch University, retired); Jessica Marion Barr (Trent University); Sebastian Braun (University of North Dakota); Ashlee Cunsolo (Labrador Institute of Memorial University); Amanda Di Battista (York University); Franklin Ginn (University of Edinburgh); Bernie Krause (soundscape ecologist, author, and independent scholar); Lisa Kretz (University of Evansville); Karen Landman (University of Guelph); Patrick Lane (Poet); Andrew Mark (independent scholar); Nancy Menning (Ithaca College); John Charles Ryan (University of New England); Catriona Sandilands (York University); and Helen Whale (independent scholar).We are facing unprecedented environmental challenges, including global climate change, large-scale industrial development, rapidly increasing species extinction, ocean acidification, and deforestation – challenges that require new vocabularies and new ways to express grief and sorrow over the disappearance, degradation, and loss of nature. Seeking to redress the silence around ecologically based anxiety in academic and public domains, and to extend the concepts of sadness, anger, and loss, Mourning Nature creates a lexicon for the recognition and expression of emotions related to environmental degradation. Exploring the ways in which grief is experienced in numerous contexts, this groundbreaking collection draws on classical, philosophical, artistic, and poetic elements to explain environmental melancholia. Understanding that it is not just how we mourn but what we mourn that defines us, the authors introduce new perspectives on conservation, sustainability, and our relationships with nature. An ecological elegy for a time of climatic and environmental upheaval, Mourning Nature challenges readers to turn devastating events into an opportunity for positive change. Contributors include Glenn Albrecht (Murdoch University, retired); Jessica Marion Barr (Trent University); Sebastian Braun (University of North Dakota); Ashlee Cunsolo (Labrador Institute of Memorial University); Amanda Di Battista (York University); Franklin Ginn (University of Edinburgh); Bernie Krause (soundscape ecologist, author, and independent scholar); Lisa Kretz (University of Evansville); Karen Landman (University of Guelph); Patrick Lane (Poet); Andrew Mark (independent scholar); Nancy Menning (Ithaca College); John Charles Ryan (University of New England); Catriona Sandilands (York University); and Helen Whale (independent scholar).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1w6t9hg

1 Mourning the Loss of Wild Soundscapes: from: Mourning Nature
Author(s) KRAUSE BERNIE
Abstract: Historically, natural soundscapes have been recorded in fragmented, decontextualized formats, the emphasis focused on the abstraction of single species’ animal voices intentionally removed from their more holistic and informative acoustic fabric. This older model, first expressed in the late nineteenth century when recording technologies were in their infancy, became an act of faith by the 1930s when ornithologists first applied the parabolic dish primarily to the capture of bird song and calls. The 1935 recording of the ivory-billed woodpecker in a Georgia swamp by Arthur Allen and Peter Kellogg from Cornell’s Macaulay Library of Natural Sound fixed a course that

10 Emotional Solidarity: from: Mourning Nature
Author(s) KRETZ LISA
Abstract: The ecological crisis provides no shortage of evidence for justified mourning. For a non-exhaustive list, consider the following: overpopulation (more than 200,000 people added every day); global warming (global ice cap melting, sea level rise, increasing catastrophic natural disasters); deforestation (32 million acres annually); unsustainable agriculture¹ (the abominable treatment of non-human animals aside, current farming practices are responsible for 70 per cent of the pollution of United States rivers and streams); unsustainable transportation (a single car emits 12,000 pounds of carbon dioxide every year in the form of exhaust; in the United States cars emit roughly the same amount of

Conclusiones from: Santa Bárbara, el barrio que no soportó las tempestades
Abstract: En el desarrollo de esta investigación mostré que, en los años ochenta del siglo XX, el relato histórico de Bogotá se construyó no solo a partir de la ausencia de Santa Bárbara, sino también de los demás barrios que compusieron la ciudad antigua. De acuerdo con los eventos que impidieron la preservación de Santa Bárbara, es posible afirmar que ese olvido fue conveniente y respondió a intereses privados. El análisis de los diversos sentidos del pasado de ese barrio permitió estudiar la complejidad de las voces que se alzaron durante esta situación de conflicto, las razones que movilizaron la memoria

CHAPTER 6 GREAT POLITICS from: Nietzsche's Great Politics
Abstract: Nietzsche’s productive life almost exactly spans Bismarck’s era. He was a medical orderly in the Franco-Prussian War (1870–71), but fell ill and only served for two months. Serving as a medical orderly was quite a common experience for many of the more “spiritual” types of Nietzsche’s generation. Most, however, were not as fortunate as he was to have actually survived, being decimated by various diseases contracted on the battlefield—illness already being a greater harvester of souls than war itself.¹ Nietzsche had previously volunteered as a cavalry officer in his local town, Naumburg, but after a self-described promising start,

Book Title: Class in the Composition Classroom-Pedagogy and the Working Class
Publisher: Utah State University Press
Author(s): THELIN WILLIAM H.
Abstract: The real college experiences of veterans, rural Midwesterners, and trade unionists show that what it means to be working class is not obvious or easily definable. Resisting outdated characterizations of these students as underprepared and dispensing with a one-size-fits-all pedagogical approach, contributors address how region and education impact students, explore working-class pedagogy and the ways in which it can reify social class in teaching settings, and give voice to students' lived experiences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1whm918

INTRODUCTION from: Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Carter Genesea M.
Abstract: Travis, eighteen, had just started his first year at the University of Wisconsin–Stout. An undeclared major at Wisconsin’s only polytechnic, he came to UW–Stout hoping to major in something practical. He chose Stout because it is a few hours’ drive from home, the people were friendly during his campus visit, the college town was small, and his application was accepted. Travis, like many of the students at UW–Stout, is from a small rural farming community and does not know what he wants to do yet. He is pretty sure he wants to stay in Wisconsin and maybe

5 THE WRITING SPACE AS DIALECTICAL SPACE: from: Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Preston Jacqueline
Abstract: In most public and private universities, students are placed in one or another writing course based on scores from the ACT, SAT or another standardized assessment, such as Accuplacer. As it stands, most writing assessments used to place students measure primarily students’ capacity to demonstrate knowledge of middle-class “Standard Written English” of the essayist bent. We know students of low-income families are likely to achieve lower scores on these aptitude tests. Not surprisingly, a high percentage of students of working-class origin fill basic writing (BW) and first-semester first-year writing (FYW) classrooms. At worst, many of these courses, as well as

10 PEDAGOGIES OF INTERDEPENDENCE: from: Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Middleton Holly
Abstract: In 2007 I moved to northern New Mexico to teach at New Mexico Highlands University (NMHU), an open-admissions federally designated Hispanic-serving institution. At the time, an anti-DUI public service campaign (PSA) was underway appealing to the cultural values of young Hispanic men. In this series, the effects of DUI are dramatized as a threat to families—not to those of the victims of drunk driving but to the families of those who drink and drive. The one I want to single out is called “Mi Mijito.” It opens on a young Hispanic man leaving the house for a night out

11 NEVER AND FOREVER JUST KEEP COMING BACK AGAIN: from: Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Phegley Missy Nieveen
Abstract: As a high-school teacher in the mid-90s, I often integrated technical writing into the curriculum for my non-college-boundclasses (a label used by the school administrators to differentiate from thecollege-prepclasses), which were mainly populated with working-class students who planned to enter the workforce immediately after graduation. Consequently, I frequently asked these students to create documents using a computer. On one particular occasion, after introducing a new assignment, I asked my class whether they had any questions, and I received the usual Areyou gonna make us type this?As I answered, a tall white student nicknamed “Fro” for

15 “BEING PART OF SOMETHING GAVE ME PURPOSE”: from: Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Carter Genesea M.
Abstract: College instructors who wish to help first-year working-class students transition from high school to college are often tasked with teasing out the array of intentions working-class students have for attending college. Working-class students attend college for a variety of reasons that have been well documented,² and supporting them in the classroom is not necessarily easy. Academia, as a well-oiled discourse community, can be inflexible and unforgiving toward new members who may not be prepared for the expectations therein. Students who are academic insiders already know how to “process, comprehend, and respond to existing knowledge—in short, making it their own

Book Title: The History Problem-The Politics of War Commemoration in East Asia
Publisher: University of Hawai'i Press
Author(s): Saito Hiro
Abstract: Seventy years have passed since the end of the Asia-Pacific War, yet Japan remains embroiled in controversy with its neighbors over the war’s commemoration. Among the many points of contention between Japan, China, and South Korea are interpretations of the Tokyo War Crimes Trial, apologies and compensation for foreign victims of Japanese aggression, prime ministerial visits to the Yasukuni Shrine, and the war’s portrayal in textbooks. Collectively, these controversies have come to be called the “history problem." But why has the problem become so intractable? Can it ever be resolved, and if so, how? To answer these questions, Hiro Saito mobilizes the sociology of collective memory and social movements, political theories of apology and reconciliation, psychological research on intergroup conflict, and philosophical reflections on memory and history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1wn0r56

CHAPTER 1 Cross-National Fragmentation, 1945–1964 from: The History Problem
Abstract: The focus of the history problem, the Asia-Pacific War, was not a single, clearly bounded event. Instead, it evolved through a series of armed conflicts between Japan and China that began with the Mukden Incident in September 1931 and eventually led to the outbreak of the Second Sino-Japanese War in July 1937. Japan then proceeded to war with the United States and other Allied powers in December 1941 and quickly advanced to the Pacific and Southeast Asia. But the tide of war began to turn at the Battle of Midway in June 1942, and Japan was increasingly overwhelmed by the

CHAPTER 3 Apologies and Denunciations, 1989–1996 from: The History Problem
Abstract: Ever since SCAP and Japanese leaders had shielded the emperor from prosecution at the Tokyo Trial, it had been taboo to openly question his responsibility for the Asia-Pacific War. The special programs that

Conclusion from: The History Problem
Abstract: Can East Asia’s history problem ever be resolved, and if so, how? This is the question that I set out to answer in this book. In light of the field analysis of the history problem, my answer is cautiously affirmative—yes, it can be resolved if the governments and citizens in Japan, South Korea, and China find a way to unleash the potential of the historians’ debate to promote the cosmopolitan logic of commemoration. My affirmative answer is cautious because nationalist commemorations, focusing on the suffering of conationals without sufficient regard for foreign others, persist in the region, overwhelm historians’

Immediacy from: Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Nitschke Claudia
Abstract: As a means of observing and analysing this historical self-exploration embedded narratives – here more specifically the metadiegetic level – seem particularly well-suited: they

The Tension between Idea and Narrative Form from: Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Waldschmidt Christine
Abstract: For the literature of the eighteenth century, particularly for those works that are seen as part of the Enlightenment, critics have foregrounded the moral, didactic interest of these texts. In the Enlightenment view, literature is supposed to serve a purpose (cf. Pizer, 2005, p. 91), and literary texts are always understood in terms of their function as serving moral goals. This penchant for the usefulness of literature is not very surprising: The Enlightenment defines itself as a movement towards greater intellectual independence and moral instruction – leading mankind out of its ‘selfinflicted immaturity’.² Hence the Enlightenment tends to explain the (ever-noticeable)

Peritextual Disposition in French Eighteenth-Century Narratives from: Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Ikonen Teemu
Abstract: The study of the so-called transnational novel has demonstrated the variety of practices of rewriting inside and across linguistic borders in the eighteenth century Europe (see e.g. Montandon, 1999; Stewart, 2009). Original works from the period are hard to distinguish from translations, translations of translations, pseudo-translations, authorial revisions, free adaptations, impostures, crudely abridged editions and other versions (Stewart, 2009, pp. 164-65). According to Coulet (1992), French authors were particularly busy revising their own works. Significant changes in narration and plot were common. Well-known is marquis de Sade’s transposition from first-person narration in Justine(1791) to third person inLa Nouvelle

Chapter Five The RISE of ÑUU TNOO from: Encounter with the Plumed Serpent
Abstract: The history of the lineages begins with the warmth and energy of the first rising of Lord Sun (Iya Ndicandii), who, with his rays of life-giving power and his call to work and glory, created a human world of knowledge and seeing while the past became a time of darkness and mystery, solid and cold as stone. The IyaandIyadzehe,who had their origin in Yuta Tnoho, were children of light and heat; the earlier populations were reduced to immobile rock formations in their new landscape. As it was in the beginning, this process of awakening and coming to

1 Changing history: from: Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Parker Michael
Abstract: Given the variety and energy of Irish creative and critical writing and its contribution to re-thinking relationships, histories and futures within and beyond Ireland, the first decade of the twenty-first century seems an opportune moment to examine and evaluate the literary voices that continue to enhance and enrich contemporary Irish culture. The book that follows consists of seventeen chapters focusing on the drama, poetry and autobiography fiction published since 1990, but also reflecting upon related forms of creative work in this period, including film and the visual and performing arts. The ‘diverse voices’ in the title refers not only to

2 Flying high? from: Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Brewster Scott
Abstract: Lucy McDiarmid begins her review of The Cambridge History of Irish Literatureby reflecting on the upholstery of Aer Lingus seats, which features quotations from James Connolly, Yeats, Shaw, and lines from the sixteenth-century anonymous Gaelic lament for Kilcash. The quotations on the seats knit together the recurrent dynamics of Irish culture and society that have been interwoven since the twelfth century: tradition and modernity, arrival and departure, native and foreign, art and politics, Irish and Anglo-Irish, the Gaelic and English tongues. The soft furnishings also showcase Irish writing in its broad sense: literary and political writing, and both official

7 Scattered and diverse: from: Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) McDonagh John
Abstract: In the introduction to The Penguin Book of Contemporary Irish Poetry, first published in 1990, editors Peter Fallon and Derek Mahon note that Irish poetry ‘speaks for itself in one or another of the many voices which have evolved over the years’¹ and this crucial acknowldgement in an important and popular anthology points clearly to the disparate, polyvocal and chimerical nature of a good deal of contemporary Irish poetry up to 1990 and beyond. Ranging from Cathal O’Searchaigh’s homoerotic odes to his gay lover to Paul Durcan’s laments over the crass materialism of contemporary Ireland, Irish poetry since 1990 has

8 Architectural metaphors: from: Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Collins Lucy
Abstract: Feminist criticism frequently employs metaphors of space to interrogate the position of women within society and their ability to articulate that position to a wider world. The idea of ‘clearing a space’ from which to speak suggests that for women freedom of expression can only be achieved in ‘empty’ space, space that is unmarked by ideological and aesthetic convictions. Yet such emptiness is impossible, since the speaking self must be meaningfully located. Space, both public and private, is closely related to the construction of identity and to its textual representation. This chapter examines the representation of the house by two

13 ‘Sacred spaces’: from: Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Regan Stephen
Abstract: One of the familiar conventions of autobiography is its revelation of an individual life through a compelling first-person narrative voice. To work upon its readers most effectively, autobiography needs to present the life in question as both unique and typical; it must offer an appealing account of an existence that is special enough and significant enough to warrant attention, but it must also sustain that attention through an insistence on common human dilemmas and a shared sense of endeavour. At the same time as presenting a single life as unfolding and uncertain, shaped by that which can only be dimly

14 Secret gardens: from: Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Lynch Vivian Valvano
Abstract: The publication of Patrick O’Keeffe’s 2005 collection of four novellas, The Hill Road, marked the arrival of a significant new voice in Irish fiction. Born in Ireland in 1963, O’Keeffe grew up on a dairy farm in Limerick near the Tipperary border. At the age of twenty-three he emigrated to the United States, but only became legally resident there in 1989, after winning his green card in a lottery. His stories clearly reflect his own diasporic status, since his characters are frequently haunted by the culture they cannot quite leave behind. While the recurring motifs of buried secrets in an

16 Remembering to forget: from: Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Alexander Neal
Abstract: To speak of post-Troubles fiction, or even fiction ‘after’ the Troubles, is perhaps as problematic as it is unavoidable. Nearly a decade since the Good Friday Agreement of 1998, the political accord for which it paved the way remains fraught and uncertain. And if it can be said with at least some certainty that the war is finally over, then it is equally certain that Northern Ireland’s troubles are not. The latest edition of Lost Livesincludes entries for 195 Troubles-related deaths in the period after the IRA ceasefire announced on 31 August 1994.¹ Moreover, the very real social and

17 ‘What do I say when they wheel out their dead?’ from: Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Alcobia-Murphy Shane
Abstract: In one emblematic shot from Midge MacKenzie’s The Sky: A Silent Witness(1995), a documentary made in collaboration with Amnesty International about human rights abuses, the camera frames the sky’s reflection on the surface of water while an unidentified woman recounts the horrifying story of her rape on 3 September 1991, in the midst of the Bosnian conflict. The reflection, as Wendy Hesford identifies, ‘reverses, distorts, and contains the sky on the surface of the water’; thus, it ‘establishes boundaries where there are none, and therefore draws attention to both the crisis of reference and the crisis of witnessing’.¹ The

CHAPTER 1 The Issue of Hope as the Starting Point from: The Three Dynamisms of Faith
Abstract: The sociologist Peter Berger highlights one of the major differences between premodern and modern societies. In the former, one could find a great measure of fate, inasmuch as the possibilities of changing practices and conducts were restricted. In medicine, in nonscientific techniques, in methods of education, and so forth, there was little room for maneuvering. By contrast, “the modern individual … lives in a world of choice…. He must choose in innumerable situations of everyday life; but this necessity of choosing reaches into the areas of beliefs, values, and worldviews.”¹ This necessity of choosing he calls “the heretical imperative,” from

Book Title: Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity-The Ethics of Theatricality in Kant, Kierkegaard, and Levinas
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): PICKETT HOWARD
Abstract: "This above all: To thine own self be true," is an ideal-or pretense-belonging as much to Hamlet as to the carefully choreographed realms of today's politics and social media. But what if our "true" selves aren't our "best" selves? Instagram's curated portraits of authenticity often betray the paradox of our performative selves: sincerity obliges us to be who we actually are, yet ethics would have us be better.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1wvwdtb

INTRODUCTION: from: Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: “All the world’s a stage, / And all the men and women merely players” is a sentiment that neither debuts nor disappears with Shakespeare.¹ Plato, Seneca, and Saint Paul, among others, adopt the theatrum mundi(theater of the world) analogy to highlight resemblances between human existence and theatrical performance.² More recently, dramaturgical sociologists (Erving Goffman) have analyzed social roles and interactions using theatrical metaphors.³ Psychologists and advocates of drama therapy (Jean Piaget) have af-firmed imitation’s formative role in cognitive and moral development.⁴And philosophers (Judith Butler) have emphasized the performative aspects of identity.⁵Clearly, whatever their differences, these examples (modern, premodern, and postmodern) reveal

1. THE TROUBLE WITH LYING: from: Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: Immanuel Kant’s preoccupation with self-congruence reveals itself most famously—or infamously, depending on your point of view—in his absolute prohibition against lying. However, as this first chapter demonstrates, Kant mounts a passionate, repeated, and multidimensional endorsement of self-congruence that encompasses more than the conformity between what I think and what I say. Reading through Kant’s practical philosophy—from the early ethics lectures (1762) through The Metaphysics of Morals(1797) and beyond—one finds Kant’s repeated affirmation of (1) truthfulness, (2) sincerity, (3) autonomy, and (4) character.¹ To clarify Kant’s views, the following discussion focuses on these specific forms of

2. VIRTUOUS HYPOCRISY: from: Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: Immanuel Kant’s commitment to the self-congruence of character, with its pervasive impact on his moral thought in particular, may surprise some readers. Much more surprising, however, is his belief that the cultivation of character also requires incongruence. Despite his well-known prohibition against lying and a related distaste for hypocrisy, Kant often recommends something strikingly similar to both. Specifically, he recommends both dissimulation(concealing one’s thoughts and feelings) andsimulation(pretending to be something one is not). Just as surprising—and just as revealing of his ambivalence toward self-congruence—is the subject of this chapter’s latter half: Kant’s occasional recommendation of

[PART II Introduction] from: Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: What Iago’s taunt reveals, if gruesomely, is a second problem with self-congruence and sincerity.¹ Beyond the ”problem of imperfection” lies the ”problem of inexpressibility.” Even if the self were worthy of externalization, externalization is no simple matter. Iago’s villainous example reminds us that appearances (including of sincerity) are often deceptive. In effect, sincerity’s advocates forget the very realization that led them to value that virtue in the first place: people lie. Worse, we cannot tell when people lie.

3. INEVITABLE INSINCERITY: from: Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: Like Immanuel Kant before him, Søren Kier kegaard exhibits modernity’s acute ambivalence toward self-congruence. Kierkegaard’s opposition to incongruence reveals itself in his career-long indictment of hypocrisy. Caught in the crosshairs of much of Kierkegaard’s work are the pretentious ambitions of Hegelian philosophy, whose practitioners claim to know more than they do,¹ and the insincere conformity of the Danish state church, whose members claim to believe more than they do.² Kierkegaard’s works (published and unpublished, pseudonymous and signed, philosophical and religious) exhort the reader to shun incongruence. Instead, they encourage the reader to be true to the actual, existing “single individual,”

4. HIDDEN LIVES, IRONIC SELVES: from: Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: Kierkegaard’s deep-seated ambivalence toward self-congruence and theatricality extends beyond his pseudonymous works, and into his signed religious discourses, written, as the title page to each indicates, by ”S. Kierkegaard.” What’s more, the career-long oscillation between pseudonymous and nonpseudonymous works (published in a more or less alternating pattern from 1843 to 1849) dramatizes the depths of that ambivalence. While pseudonymity—what Kierkegaard elsewhere calls ”polyonymity” ( SV7:545/CUP625)—cautions readers against the assumption of sincerity (i.e., that any particular claim is necessarily Kierkegaard’s own), nonpseudonymity renews questions about sincerity. One rightly wonders if a signed work represents Kierkegaard’s own sincerely held

[PART III Introduction] from: Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: What Celan’s line reveals, if paradoxically, is that there is at least one more problem with self-congruence.¹ Specifically, ”Sincerity and the Problem of Individualism” recognizes that the modern obsession with self-congruence may often be less virtue than vice. Despite Polonius’s advice, life (the moral aspect of it, in particular) involves being true not so much to myself as to the others who surround me. An uncompromising commitment to self-congruence, therefore, stands at odds with the moral imperative’s defining commitment to doing for others around me. Self-congruence resembles, instead, self-interest and the narcissism that threatens genuine ethical concern for others.

5. FEARSOME AUTHENTICITY: from: Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: According to Lionel Trilling, authenticity ”usurp[ed] [sincerity’s] place in our esteem” somewhere between sincerity’s heyday (the sixteenth or seventeenth century) and today.¹ While sincerity ”had dominion over men’s imagination of how they ought to be” in the early modern period,² late modernity has become, in Charles Taylor’s words, ”The Age of Authenticity.”³ Although both are forms of self-congruence, sincerity and authenticity often stand at odds with each another. Most late modern thinkers prefer authenticity over sincerity for one of two overlapping reasons. (1) For some (Jean-Paul Sartre), sincerity (self-representation for others) assumes a problematic, essentialist conception of the self. If

6. BEYOND SINCERITY: from: Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: Though the topic has received little scholarly attention, Levinas’s Otherwise Than Beingcontains the strongest recent defense of sincerity.¹ Despite this neglect, Levinas’s preference for sincerity over its typically better-esteemed alternative, authenticity, marks one of the most intriguing moments in the history of self-congruence. As the last chapter demonstrates, Levinas goes so far as to champion sincerity as a virtual synonym for both responsibility and subjectivity. In words taken from hisHumanism of the Other(1972), ”Sincerity . . . is the very responsibility for others” (HO69); ”Is subjectivity not sincerity—putting oneself out in the open, which is

CONCLUSION from: Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: At this point, one might rightly wonder if the three problems with sincerity highlighted here (imperfection, inexpressibility, and individualism) give way to a more positive conception of the right role of congruence and incongruence in our lives. To repeat the earlier point, each problem with sincerity gave way already to one or more ethical theatricalities and also to a revised understanding of self-congruence. However, one might nevertheless wonder if these three distinct problems, not to mention their solutions, give way to a joint— dare I say unified—view of sincerity and theatricality. After all, Kant’s imitation of the moral exemplar,

19. Le témoignage et l’imaginaire from: Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Bianchi Jean
Abstract: Ma notion d’imaginaire est très proche de celle de Robert White : un immense bassin d’images et

24. L’interactivité de la communication : from: Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Plude Frances Forde
Abstract: Je découvrais, au tournant des années 1980, que les audacieuses et nouvelles technologies de la communication redessineraient notre environnement et, jusqu’à un certain point, notre entourage personnel. À ce moment précis, on s’emballait pour la

Chapitre 6 Ottawa, « métropole » de l’Ontario français ? from: Ottawa, lieu de vie français
Author(s) Richer Geneviève
Abstract: Le père oblat Georges Simard, professeur à l’Université d’Ottawa et théologien, exprimait, en 1927, ce point de vue sur l’« Ottawa intellectuel » en réponse à un article du jésuite François Hertel paru quelques années plus tôt. Ce dernier avait longuement disserté sur les vertus respectives des deux grands centres culturels et intellectuels du Canada français, Montréal et Québec, le premier dissimulant mal le mépris que lui inspirait le second, trop provincial à ses yeux. Certes, concéda Hertel, le « brouhaha » de Montréal, comme celui de la « commerçante Alexandrie », contrastait singulièrement avec l’« harmonieuse quiétude » de

[Part III Introduction] from: Holocaust Monuments and National Memory
Abstract: The dramatic increase in the number of historical monuments, commemorations and exhibitions since the 1970s is an international phenomenon, as demonstrated by the sociologist Frank Füredi in his extensive study of memory cultures in the U.K., France, Germany, Japan and the United States.¹ In Europe, debates over historical monuments, museums and commemorations have occurred with such frequency and intensity during this period that the debates themselves have become paradigmatic moments if not intellectual monuments of contemporary public understandings of history. Controversy over the cult of the past following the National Heritage Act of 1983 in the U.K., the Historians’ Dispute

6 The National Memorial Paradigm from: Holocaust Monuments and National Memory
Abstract: The proliferation of monuments and commemorations and the social and political values invested in them since the 1970s are symptomatic of societies that have been actively seeking a symbolic reinforcement of collective memories. Public symbols are neither a cause nor a consequence of the present international preoccupation with memory, however, but the very language with which these societies transmit and negotiate their pasts. What are the historical and political origins and the social consequences of this phenomenon? And how do contemporary societies legitimate their existence on the basis of memory and historical representations? The rise of memory cultures, which is

Introduction: from: History
Abstract: History is much more than only a matter of historical studies. It is an essential cultural factor in everybody’s life, since human life needs an orientation in the course of time which has to be brought about by remembering the past. Historical studies are a systematic way of performing this function of orientation. In order to understand what historians do one should start with this fundamental and general function.

Chapter 1 Historical Narration: from: History
Abstract: Hayden White, with elaborate sagacity, labored to convince historians of this fact when he treated “the historical work as what it most manifestly is,” that is to say, “a verbal structure in the form of a narrative prose discourse.” But since he explicated this discourse

Chapter 7 Theoretical Approaches to an Intercultural Comparison of Historiography from: History
Abstract: Most works on historiography have been done within the framework of a national history.² A broader perspective is related to European or Western historiography³, or to the historiography of non-Western cultures. The latter mainly deals with a single country or a single culture such as China⁴ or India.⁵ Comparative studies have been rare so far.⁶ There are a lot of reasons for this but I will only mention two: the difficulty of combining the competences of research in different historical cultures, and the dominance of Western historical thinking in historical studies even in non-Western countries. This dominance draws the academic

Foreword from: Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Dettke Dieter
Abstract: Toward a Global Civil Societyis the first volume of a new series entitledInternational Political Currents, published by the Washington Office of the Friedrich Ebert Foundation. The series will address major international economic, political, and cultural issues. Publications in this series will try to contribute to a discourse on public policy issues with international dimensions. Based in Germany, the Friedrich Ebert Foundation, Germany’s oldest political foundation, is involved in programs in 89 countries in Asia, Africa, Latin America, Central America and the Caribbean, the U.S., and Europe. Our activities are increasingly global and international in character.

1. The Concept of Civil Society from: Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Walzer Michael
Abstract: My aim in this essay is to defend a complex, imprecise, and, at crucial points, uncertain account of society and politics. I have no hope of theoretical simplicity, not at this historical moment when so many stable oppositions of political and intellectual life have collapsed; but I also have no desire for simplicity, since a world that theory could fully grasp and neatly explain would not, I suspect, be a pleasant place. In the nature of things, then, my argument won’t be elegant, and though I believe that arguments should march, the sentences following one another like soldiers on parade,

6. In Common Together: from: Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Elshtain Jean Bethke
Abstract: The question of the one and the many, of unity and diversity, has been posed since the beginning of political thought in the West. The American Founders were well aware of the vexations attendant upon the creation of a new political body. They worked with, and against, a stock of metaphors that had previously served as the symbolic vehicles of political incorporation. As men of the Enlightenment, they rejected the images of the body politic that had dominated medieval and early modern political thinking. For a Jefferson or a Madison such tropes as “the King’s two bodies” or John of

10. From Socialism to Communitarianism from: Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Selznick Philip
Abstract: Nevertheless, I could no longer accept socialist economic doctrines, and since 1948 I have been

18. East European Reform and West European Integration from: Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Glotz Peter
Abstract: The political world has been changing radically since the Central European revolution of 1989. Instead of traditional bi-polar conflict, we now have the potential for multi-polar political conflict. Small wars have once again become a real possibility. Ethnic and social conflicts in Central and Eastern Europe are brewing into equally revolutionary and explosive mixtures. Despite these changes, however, Western Europe’s political classes are still sitting impassively at yesterday’s gambling tables, placing their bets as though oblivious of the fact that “Rouge” and “Noir” have become almost indistinguishable after the historic downpour. They mutter strange codes under their breath (CSCE, CFE,

20. Ethnicity, Migration, and the Validity of the Nation-State from: Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Hobsbawm Eric
Abstract: Bush’s new world order is a new world disorder, and for the time being, no restoration of stability is visible or even conceivable. It is against this background that we see the present rise of ethnic or nationalist or separatist phenomena in various, but by no means in all parts of the world. But on the other side of the coin is supranationalism or transnationalism, that is, the development of an increasingly integrated world economy or, more generally, a world whose problems cannot effectively be tackled let alone solved within the borders of nation states.

21. Neither Politics Nor Economics from: Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Wolfe Alan
Abstract: Americans are increasingly oblivious to politics but exceptionally sensitive to culture. What constitutes for other countries the meat and potatoes of political conflict—the distribution of income among classes, regulation of industry, protectionism versus free trade, sectional antagonism—here captures only the attention of the interests immediately affected. Politics in the classic sense of who gets what, when, and how is carried out by a tiny elite watched over by a somewhat larger, but still infinitesimally small, audience of news followers. The attitude of the great majority of Americans to such traditional political subjects is an unstable combination of boredom,

24. Pluralism and the Left Identity from: Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Mouffe Chantal
Abstract: If the project of the Left is to survive the discredit that the collapse of “actually existing socialism” has thrown over the very idea of socialism, it requires a new formulation. Even social democracy is presently suffering from the impact of the events in the East and the proclaimed triumph of liberal capitalism. Claims for social justice, economic democracy and struggles against inequalities are increasingly dismissed as relics of a foregone age dominated by the rhetoric of class struggle.

26. Some Reflections on the New World Order and Disorder from: Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Ossorio Julian Santamaria
Abstract: The breakdown of the Berlin wall and more generally, the failure of communism in the (now former) Soviet Union and eastern Europe has suddenly put an end to half a century of cold war. The division of the world in two opposing blocs is over. The nuclear danger looks much less imposing and real. The existential enemy has vanished and the political, ideological, and military threats that the enemy was supposed to embody have faded within a short period of time. Democracy has become the only legitimate principle of political organization accepted almost worldwide, while the market economy and the

Introduction: from: The Imaginary Revolution
Abstract: In 1968 worldwide revolutionary agitation was greater than at any time since the end of World War I. From Paris to Peking, governments were forced to deal with varieties of unrest. The global revolts of 1968 seemed to constitute an international revolutionary wave comparable to the Atlantic Revolutions at the end of the eighteenth century or to the continental European revolutions of 1848. As in 1789 and 1848, Paris was once again a center of revolt. Although this time Paris did not initiate the movement (German, Italian, and American upheavals preceded it), the French capital became the first major theater

Book Title: Ethnographica Moralia-Experiments in Interpretive Anthropology
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Marcus George E.
Abstract: Panourgia and Marcus bring together anthropologists working in various parts of the world (Greece, Bali, Taiwan, the United States) with classicists, historians, and scholars in cultural studies. The volume takes into account global realities such as 9/11 and the opening of the Cypriot Green Line and explores the different ways in which Geertz’s anthropology has shaped the pedagogy of their disciplines and enabled discussions among them. Focusing on place and time, locations and temporalities, the essays in this volume interrogate the fixity of interpretation and open new spaces of inquiry. The volume addresses a wide audience from the humanities and the social sciences—anyone interested in the development of a new humanism that will relocate the human as a subject of social action.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1x76fs8

The Birth of Anthropology out of a Pause on Pausanias: from: Ethnographica Moralia
Author(s) Boon James A.
Abstract: Alas, poor Frazer: deceased since 1941, yet never at rest. Yes, Sir James George Frazer: repeatedly revenant. AfterWorld War II, Theodor Gaster eventually prunedThe New Golden Bough; later Stanley Edgar Hyman gauged Frazer’s legacy, along with Darwin, Marx, and Freud; and John B. Vickery saluted Frazer’s influence among literary modernists: T. S. Eliot, James Joyce, and others.¹ Meanwhile in 1969, I. C. Jarvie had assessed disciplinary “othering” of Frazer’s approach versus Bronislaw Malinowski’s functionalism—by then also “historical.”² Subsequently, I recommended amalgamating anthropological and literary rereadings of FrazerandMalinowski (among others), aiming to avoid reductive polarizations that keep

Fragments of Oedipus: from: Ethnographica Moralia
Author(s) Panourgiá Neni
Abstract: This paper was originally written differently, argued differently, and presented differently, before the clouds and drums of the unspoken and undeclared war and occupation that surround us now. However, this same war, whose absence produced a different discourse, makes imperative the reflection on what follows. The events of 9/11 forced upon us the radical reevaluation of the ways in which we engage in critical discourses. Not that we need to invent new ways of addressing the events around us, because, as Schiller already noted in his letter to Goethe, “everything is already there, so it needs only to be extricated.”

Anthropology at the French National Assembly: from: Ethnographica Moralia
Author(s) Abélès Marc
Abstract: In the conclusion of his book Negara: The Theatre State in Nineteenth-Century Bali, Clifford Geertz writes: “What our concept of politic power obscures, that of the Balinese exposes; and vice versa. And so far as a political theory is concerned, it is there in exposing the symbolic dimensions of state-power.”¹ Commenting, a few pages later, on the classical conceptions of the state, Geertz notes also that “in these views the semiotic aspects of the state remain so much a mummery.”² What seems to me very stimulating in these reflections, as in the whole analysis ofNegara, is that it opens

AFTERWORD: from: Ethnographica Moralia
Author(s) Kakavoulia Maria
Abstract: Since commentary seems to be both a questions-raising and an interpretive practice, I would like to bring into discussion an issue that I think relates in an immediate way to the preceding papers in this volume. We already have an overabundance of theoretical metalanguages informed by powerful interdisciplinary movements (semiotics, linguistics, textual theory, postcolonialism, etc.) that attempt to master issues concerning representational modes. Here, for reasons of terminological economy, I would like to bring into the discussion the verbal-visual distinction and its importance in cross-cultural research. Reminding us of Michel Foucault’s distinction between the seeable and the sayable, this semiotic

Foreword: from: Chinese Landscape Painting as Western Art History
Author(s) Purtle Jennifer
Abstract: I read the manuscript for this book expecting to hate it. Rumors about the manuscript bemoaned a non-specialist author who presumed to tell specialists in the field of Chinese painting history working to recover traditional Chinese ideas about painting that and how they practiced Western art history. Moreover, the author allegedly did so in terms not interesting to many specialists in the field of Chinese painting history, nor fully intelligible to some. To propose the Westernness of the practice of art history in the field of Chinese painting history—which has, since the middle of the twentieth century, sought means

Chapter 2 REMEMBERING ABORIGINAL SYDNEY from: Migrant Nation
Author(s) Read Peter
Abstract: Aboriginal Sydney has two histories. The first is well known, centred in Redfern, and includes the history of the Aboriginal Legal Service, the Medical Service and the radical housing plan known as the Block. The second is much less known, and of much less interest to historians. This is the history of those who have always lived in Sydney, who would be known now, if they lived in northern or central Australia, as Traditional Owners. In Sydney, they know themselves, and are respected by some, as the Traditional Custodians. They have formed legal entities known as Local Aboriginal Land Councils

Chapter 4 WRITING, FEMININITY AND COLONIALISM: from: Migrant Nation
Author(s) Ravenscroft Alison
Abstract: How to write of a white feminine Iso as not to tell – once more – the story of the woman we already know, the woman we take ourselves to be? The answer might lie in a kind of writing that gives a formal place to uncertainty. This would be a writing practice that aims at a writer’s doubts about herself and others, rather than closing them over, and which works with anaestheticsof uncertainty and not just avocabulary. Such a writing practice would also aim at the production of doubt in a reader. If aesthetics is

Chapter 5 THE STAGING OF SOCIAL POLICY: from: Migrant Nation
Author(s) Ely-Harper Kerreen
Abstract: A large number of photographs were taken in the late 1940s and 1950s by the Department of Information (later Australian News and Information Bureau) to promote post-war migration to Australia. These photos were of new arrivals, family groups, single adults and sponsored child migrants from the United Kingdom. With the increase in unaccompanied minors coming to Australia, the federal government enacted the Immigration Guardianship of Children Act of 1946, which ensured that the Minister for Immigration and Citizenship (then Arthur Calwell) would assume legal guardianship of unaccompanied children under 21 years of age. The child migration schemes were operated by

Book Title: Questions of Phenomenology-Language, Alterity, Temporality, Finitude
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: Through her critical and productive dialogue with multiple phenomenological thinkers, Dastur concisely shows each thinker's debts to and departures from others, as well as each thinker's innovations and limitations. She does this judiciously, without choosing sides because, for her, phenomenology is above all a way of thinking through a problem and practicing a method. The fecundity of the movement is appreciated only by participating in it-phenomenology has always thought of itself as philosophical research undertaken by and through a community of thinkers who share certain fundamental questions and ways of approaching those questions, even if their responses to these questions often differ. In this regard, Dastur is both one of the clearest guides to phenomenology and one of its ablest practitioners.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr5sw

3 The Problem of Pre-Predicative Experience (Husserl) from: Questions of Phenomenology
Abstract: From the Logical Investigationsto theCartesian Meditations, Husserl always saw in phenomenology a new “critique of reason,” giving himself the task of “the elucidation of knowledge”¹—the title of the sixthInvestigation—redefining it later, in the transcendental perspective developed in theParis Lecturesin 1929, as a “theory of knowledge.”² Beyond this essential definition of phenomenology as phenomenology of knowledge, the permanence of the theme of the foundation (Fundierung) of the formal sciences must be underlined, as we see it throughout Husserl’s entire itinerary, from thePhilosophy of Arithmetic to Experience and Judgment via the Logical Investigationsand

10 Phenomenology of the Event: from: Questions of Phenomenology
Abstract: Is philosophy ready to take account of the sudden emergence and factuality of the event, which since Plato has been defined as a thought of the generality and invariance of essence? Such is the very general question with which I would like to begin. As Husserl recalls at the very beginning of his lectures on the phenomenology of internal time-consciousness, the question of time and its contingency has always constituted the most crucial challenge for philosophy, marking the limits of its enterprise to intellectually possess the world because, as the very stuff of things, time seems to escape radically from

11 Phenomenology and History (Dilthey, Husserl, Heidegger) from: Questions of Phenomenology
Abstract: Is it possible to come to an understanding of the historical dimension in its totality without relating it to an anthropological agency [ instance]? This question may seem altogether meaningless at first glance, since it seems perfectly obvious that Karl Marx was right to claim that it is humans who make history.¹ Do we other moderns agree with his fundamental thesis that humans are by definition historical beings? What meaning should be given to the historicity of human beings? Does it mean the decline of the absolute in all its forms and the domination of the most unbridled form of relativism,

13 Phenomenology and the Question of Man (Patočka and Heidegger) from: Questions of Phenomenology
Abstract: In one of his last texts, dedicated to “Heidegger, thinker of humanity,”¹ Jan Patočka claims that Heidegger is the thinker who realized Dilthey’s idea of “understanding the human on the basis of the human” by starting from what separates the human from all other beings, without recourse to anything foreign to humanity.² For Heidegger, the human is the only being capable of truth, which at first sight has the air of a truism, but in fact refers to an entirely new manner of posing the problem of truth. It is no longer a matter of the traditional view of judgment

9 Commanded Love and Divine Transcendence in Levinas and Kierkegaard from: The Face of the Other and the Trace of God
Author(s) Westphal Merold
Abstract: Levinas’s essay “God and Philosophy” is contemporaneous with Otherwise Than Being or Beyond Essenceand develops theological implications of the argument left largely unthematized in what we might call themagnum opusof Levinas II.¹ Levinas sets the God of the Bible over against “the philosophical discourse of the West” and its interpretation of rationality; and he taunts “rational theology” for accepting “vassalage” to philosophy’s claim to be “the amplitude of an all-encompassing structure or of an ultimate comprehension” which “compels every other discourse to justify itself before philosophy” (GP153–54). We are reminded of Heidegger’s critique of onto-theology.

1 The Problem of Choice in Comparative Theology from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Cornille Catherine
Abstract: The discipline of comparative theology is steadily growing and diversifying. While it is often seen as originating within Christian, and predominantly Roman Catholic, theological circles, it is increasingly practiced by Christians of other denominations and by other religious traditions. And comparative theologians of any one tradition are presented with a seemingly endless possibility of choice in terms of which tradition, which text, or which aspect of that tradition to engage in comparative work. Once other religions are recognized as possible resources for constructive religious reflection and insight, there is no limit to where such truth or insight might manifest itself

2 Reflecting on Approaches to Jesus in the Qur’ān from the Perspective of Comparative Theology from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) von Stosch Klaus
Abstract: The first issue to which comparative theology must respond when its methodology is questioned is choosing a topic for discussion. As religions offer such great variety of starting points for discussion, these points should not be chosen only according to the preference of the researcher or institution, if comparative theology wants to show its relevance to the Church and society. In my opinion, theology, like any other science, should try to solve problems and to respond to contemporary issues. Therefore, I see three legitimate starting points for comparative theology: problems of society, problems of theology, and problems that arise out

14 Living Interreligiously: from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Barnes Michael
Abstract: Comparative Theology commends an imaginative entry into another religious world. In so doing it raises some difficult questions about what it means to live and act “interreligiously.” How to recognize continuities, acknowledge discontinuities, build creative analogies, without getting stuck into some sort of self-serving colonizing of the other? How to ensure that the complex business of mediating across religious borders does not ignore the demands of truth—and justice? How to keep alive the discipline of obedience that arises from the hearing of the Word while yet taking seriously the myriad words that are inseparable from life in a thoroughly

15 Theologizing for the Yoga Community? from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Corigliano Stephanie
Abstract: Comparative theology is a transformative academic pursuit. To name but a few examples, James Fredericks, Paul Knitter, Catherine Cornille, and Francis X. Clooney all argue in different ways that comparative theology is a study that begins with a theologian who is rooted in a particular faith tradition. In this way, the learning about and from another tradition, as Knitter describes, is an act of passing over, which necessarily entails a passing back, or return to one’s home tradition.¹

Book Title: Spiritual Grammar-Genre and the Saintly Subject in Islam and Christianity
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Thatamanil John
Abstract: Spiritual Grammar identifies a genre of religious literature that until now has not been recognized as such. In this surprising and theoretically nuanced study, F. Dominic Longo reveals how grammatical structures of language addressed in two medieval texts published nearly four centuries apart, from distinct religious traditions, offer a metaphor for how the self is embedded in spiritual reality. Reading The Grammar of Hearts (Nahw al-qulūb) by the great Sufi shaykh and Islamic scholar 'Abd al-Karīm al-Qushayrī (d. 1074) and Moralized Grammar (Donatus moralizatus) by Christian theologian Jean Gerson (d. 1429), Longo reveals how both authors use the rules of language and syntax to advance their pastoral goals. Indeed, grammar provides the two masters with a fresh way of explaining spiritual reality to their pupils and to discipline the souls of their readers in the hopes that their writings would make others adept in the grammar of the heart.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr64j

2 Genres and Genders of Gerson from: Spiritual Grammar
Abstract: Saint Jean-en-Grève Church. Paris, around the turn of the fifteenth century. It is Mass on the Feast of the Holy Trinity, a day when the church contemplates a mystery that is as central to Christian theology as it is difficult for the faithful to comprehend. Father Jean Gerson, the presider at this liturgy, is familiar to the congregants. He comes over regularly from the University of Paris, where he has been chancellor since 1395, to preach in French to the parishioners who pray at this grand church on the Right Bank of the Seine. Indeed, in 1403 Avignon’s Pope Benedict

4 From the Names of God to the Grammar of Hearts from: Spiritual Grammar
Abstract: We now tack east and back in history, from Latin to Arabic, French to Persian, Christian to Islamic. While juxtaposing Gerson’s Moralized Grammarand Qushayrī’sGrammar of Heartscreates a new context for the two texts, they are also linked to their respective times and places of origins. Attending to these original contexts grounds the fresh literary and theological understandings that the present study constructs. To prepare for understandingThe Grammar of Heartsin both its literary form and its religious content, we will examine in this chapter two of Qushayrī’s most famous works and two of his less well-known

Book Title: The Rigor of Things-Conversations with Dan Arbib
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Tracy David
Abstract: In a series of conversations, Jean-Luc Marion reconstructs a career's path in the history of philosophy, theology, and phenomenology. Discussing such concepts as the event, the gift, and the saturated phenomenon, Marion elaborates the rigor displayed by the things themselves. He discusses the major stages of his work and offers his views on the forces that have driven his thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr68m

FOREWORD from: The Rigor of Things
Author(s) Tracy David
Abstract: It is hardly necessary to introduce Professor Jean-Luc Marion to this audience, since he has become a very important interlocutor in North America for over twenty years. However, the occasion of the English translation of these fascinating interviews is a good time to remind ourselves of some of his accomplishments in philosophy, intellectual history, and, more recently, theology.

1 PARTITIONS from: The Origin of the Political
Abstract: The relation between Hannah Arendt and Simone Weil can be viewed through the sign of a double paradox. First of all, theirs is the sign of a missed encounter: Two of the most important thinkers of the century, both Jewish and both deeply touched by the experience of persecution and exile, never had the chance to meet, each one generating their thought in distinct and distant circles. Nevertheless—and this is the second paradox—it is precisely this conceptual distance that appears to constitute an imperceptible zone of contact, an invisible tangent, a form of mysterious convergence that is increasingly

2 TRUTH from: The Origin of the Political
Abstract: It is precisely in relation to this order of inquiry that Arendt and Weil’s interpretations of the Homeric world—and of The Iliadin particular—assume singular importance. This is the case because it is a question to which they both return on a number of occasions, as if the return itself were decisive for the formulation of their own categories. But, above all, it is the case because their interpretations uncover, like nothing else, the aforementioned phenomenon of “concordant dissonance” or of “dissonant concordance.” It is not by chance that the most extensive reference that Arendt ever made to

11 TOPOLOGIES from: The Origin of the Political
Abstract: The overturning of Arendt’s views is not limited to the judgment on Rome, since it also proceeds by means of a symmetrical inversion in the shadow of this argument. By this I mean that the very Christianity that Arendt situates as the commencement of the drift toward the modern constitutes for Weil both its internal rampart and its principle source of contention simultaneously. Indeed, for Weil Christianity is the spiritual thread that allows modernity to continue advancing in light of its originary inspiration. This does not mean that the two interpretative horizons are openly contradictory. They even coincide at one

12 IN THE GRIP OF LOVE from: The Origin of the Political
Abstract: As already noted, this consciousness is the poetic heart of the Iliad. This heart, however, beats not in the verses but in the lapses, pauses, and silences that scan and pierce the poem like a “clearing” suddenly opening and immediately closing in the universe of force, in which force contains its limit as its own oblivious surface. This means that contrary to what Arendt believed, one can never “really” escape this consciousness, and “reality”—which coincides with our notion of the possible—is not infinite in the sense of it being limited by an impossible toward which at least one

“Our Book of Revelation … Prescribes Our Fate and Releases Us from It”: from: Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) HIDALGO JACQUELINE M.
Abstract: Invoking a range of religious intonations, Cherríe Moraga frames her essay collection, The Last Generation: Prose and Poetry(1993), as “a prayer” even though she “no longer remember[s] how to pray.”¹ She writes in a moment of temporal convergence as she reflects upon the five hundred years since Christopher Columbus arrived in the Americas.² She reminds readers of the “catastrophic consequence” of this advent, a catastrophe that still ripples through the early 1990s. The essays in the collection, all written between 1990 and 1993, respond to varying local and international crises: “the Gulf War, the collapse of the Soviet Union,

“They Had No Rest from This Torment”: from: Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) PERRY BROCK
Abstract: “At one point, Rev. Lovejoy described Hell in so much detail that Mrs. Addison, a dignified lady with yellow feathers in her yellow hat, burst into tears and ran right out of the church. A bunch of people, including me, followed her with their eyes, guessing why she thought she was going to Hell.”¹ So recalls Gary Gray, the black protagonist of James Hannaham’s novel God Says No, of his visit to the A.M.E. Zion Church of Charleston, South Carolina—his home church—during Thanksgiving break of his freshman year of college. Gary, a devout Christian since he was a

The Entrepreneur and the Big Drag: from: Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) TONSTAD LINN MARIE
Abstract: Two different strategies naturalize the current order, increasing the power of both. One insists there is no alternative; any attempt to create one is

Remember—When? from: Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) MACKENDRICK KARMEN
Abstract: “Surely my memory is where you dwell,” Augustine famously writes in his Confessions, addressing the puzzling, immaterial God for whom “there can be no question of place.” We might hope to resolve the puzzle by replacing the “where” of memory with a “when,” but chronologically, too, God turns out to be not quite placeable. Augustine argues that one way that we can be sure that werememberGod is that we all seek the happiness God brings, even though we have not yet found it in this life: How else could we know about it?¹ It must be that we

Response: from: Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) RUBENSTEIN MARY-JANE
Abstract: On numerous occasions, I have had the chance to respond to Karmen MacKendrick’s challenging and beautiful work, or to respond to her response to something I have written (often under the influence of her challenging and beautiful work). In the face of this complex and perennial entanglement, I admit to feeling both prideful and indulgent. Steeped in such sinful affect, I would like to think for a nonlinear moment within some of the possibilities MacKendrick’s thinking opens, most recently in the preceding essay “Remember—When?” for something like a queer-incarnational apophasis.

Afterword from: Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) FREEMAN ELIZABETH
Abstract: In the Episcopal Church, there is a Sunday school curriculum called Godly Play. Based on Montessori principles, the curriculum involves an adult telling a Bible story, parable, or “liturgical action” story, using small fi gurines and symbolic objects to make the story pictorial and compelling to children ages three through ten. The very first story the children hear, “The Circle of the Church Year,” is about time.¹

3. Piaget’s Theory of Knowledge: from: Piaget's Theory of Knowledge
Abstract: In discussing Piaget’s epistemology, a very natural starting point is the question, what is Piaget’s basic epistemological outlook, and how does it differ from traditional philosophical epistemology? Philosophers from the Greeks-to the twentieth century have advanced numerous theories of knowledge—for example, that knowledge comes from the senses and is reducible to a collection of sense impressions, or that knowledge comes from the creative activity of the rational mind. Traditionally they have also discussed questions of a more abstract, reflective kind: What problems should epistemology investigate? What are the limits of our knowledge? What method(s) should one employ in epistemology?

6. The Nature and Scope of Genetic Epistemology from: Piaget's Theory of Knowledge
Abstract: One of the most controversial aspects of Piaget’s genetic epistemology concerns the claim that epistemology can and must be investigated empirically by using appropriate scientific methods coupled with conceptual theorizing. Although such an empirical epistemology will employ the standard scientific method, it will focus on the development of knowledge, hence it will employ certain auxiliary methods, notably the genetic method, which attempts to understand the development of knowledge.

Book Title: American Poetry-The Rhetoric of Its Forms
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): BLASING MUTLU KONUK
Abstract: An important study that redefines poetic tradition in America. Arguing against the prevailing view that Emerson stands alone at the head of a single line of succession, Mutlu Konuk Blasing proposes four traditions, traceable through modernist and postmodernist poets. She chooses for analysis T. S. Eliot, and Sylvia Plath, in the line of descent from Poe; Wallace Stevens and Elizabeth Bishop, descending from Emerson; Ezra Pound and Frank O'Hara, from Whitman; and Hart Crane and John Ashbery, from Dickinson.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xp3scx

Chapter Two T. S. Eliot and the Archaeology of Poetry from: American Poetry
Abstract: In a lecture presented at the Library of Congress in 1948, T. S. Eliot acknowledges so early an acquaintance with Poe that he cannot be sure whether his own work has been influenced by him. He then distances himself from his predecessor by focusing on Poe’s relation to the French Symbolists Baudelaire, Mallarmé, and Valéry.¹ This detour through another country and another language is the standard reading of the Eliot-Poe connection: Poe’s insistence on the poem as a formal artifact, as well as his critical self-consciousness, influenced the French Symbolists, who in turn influenced Eliot. Clearly, Eliot shares the Symbolists’

Chapter Six The Re-Verses of Elizabeth Bishop from: American Poetry
Abstract: Elizabeth Bishop extends Stevens’s revision of Emerson and his bipartite career by engaging in a process of “constant re-adjustment” between subject and object, mind and nature, rhetoric and meters. The seemingly contradictory commentary that her work sustains proves her success in “con-fusing” romantic and modernist oppositions: she has been read as an autobiographical poet with an impersonal touch, as a surrealist given to meticulous observations of natural facts, and as a formalist whose poems are open-ended accumulations of detail.¹ Her distinction is to have developed the kind of diction and formal flexibility that enable her to be at home on

Chapter Seven The Coinciding Leaves of Walt Whitman from: American Poetry
Abstract: Walt Whitman begins by promising to begin again:

Chapter Ten Emily Dickinson’s Untitled Discourse from: American Poetry
Abstract: The lines “dissect” the laws of both nature and the powers that be, exposing the “Play” of “Patriarch” and “Pussy” alike through a writerly intrusion. The p- alliteration brings the two parties into proximity, touching each with a hint of the ludicrous, and puts

CHAPTER 5 The Multiplicity of Dreaming in Anthropology, the Ancient World, and the Nineteenth Century from: The Multiplicity of Dreams
Abstract: Nineteenth-century dream studies, prior to Freud, continue to fascinate, in part because they are based on careful observations by single individuals (and their like-minded friends) of their own often distinctive and unusually developed dreams. Precisely because long, sustained self-reflection on dreams seemed to change their dreams in mulitple but characteristic directions, these writers also cast a unique light on normative dreaming (at least within our own tradition). William James, Sigmund Freud, and A. R. Luria all held that only the selective exaggeration of the average allows us to see its normally masked dimensions and processes. On this approach exaggeration, excess,

CHAPTER 10 Freud, Jung, and Culture Pattern Dreams: from: The Multiplicity of Dreams
Abstract: It is quite clear that Freud’s and Jung’s dreams differed markedly in style or form-yet with enough overlap to suggest that they represent variations within a single dreaming process. The old saw that Freudian patients dream Freudian dreams, and Jungians dream Jungian, also seems likely, although causation is less clear. Dreaming is socially malleable, but given the differences in the dreams of the founders, it may well be that people are drawn to one tradition or the other because it mirrors their lives (awake and asleep).

Book Title: Heidegger's Estrangements-Language, Truth, and Poetry in the Later Writings
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Bruns Gerald L.
Abstract: According to Bruns, the strangeness of Heidegger's later writings is a deliberate attempt to expose philosophy to what it cannot contain within its powers of description and explanation. Heidegger takes poetry more seriously than any philosopher since Plato, says Bruns. In his texts on language and poetry he reappropriates the ancient notion of poetry as enigma, the impermeable text that resists our efforts to lay bare its meaning or structure. What matters to Heidegger in these writings, Bruns explains, is the rift between poetry and thinking., where each is said to repose in its own darkness. Poetry moves thinking away from philosophy by turning the thinker into a wanderer, closer to listening than to reasoning, more at home with puns than with concepts. Bruns shows this to be no less true of Heidegger's later writings as he examines them for the way they resist conventional methods of reading.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xp3sjh

Conclusion from: Heidegger's Estrangements
Abstract: The folly of trying to follow closely Heidegger’s thinking, I mean his later writings, comes out very forcefully when you try to stop, because there is no natural stopping place, no place of arrival where everything falls into place and you can say, “Well now that’s done: and I’m glad it’s over.” Instead, the movement you get into is that of going back over what has been said in order to pick up on what is missing or what has been left out of account. So you are always starting over with something familiar, and then going astray as you

Book Title: Norms of Rhetorical Culture- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Farrell Thomas B.
Abstract: Rhetoric is widely regarded by both its detractors and advocates as a kind of antithesis to reason. In this book Thomas B. Farrell restores rhetoric as an art of practical reason and enlightened civic participation, grounding it in its classical tradition-particularly in the rhetoric of Aristotle. And, because prevailing modernist world views bear principal responsibility for the disparagement of rhetorical tradition, Farrell also offers a critique of the dominant currents of modern humanist thought.Farrell argues that rhetoric is not antithetical to reason but is a manner of posing and answering questions that is distinct from the approaches of analytic and dialectical reason. He develops this position in a number of ways: through a series of bold reinterpretations of Aristotle's Rhetoric; through a detailed appraisal of traditional rhetorical concepts as seen in modern texts from the Army-McCarthy hearings to Edward Kennedy's memorial for his brother, Mario Cuomo's address on abortion, Betty Friedan'sFeminine Mystique, and Vaclav Havel's inaugural address; and through a fresh appraisal of theories on the character of language and discourse found in contemporary philosophy, literary criticism, anthropology, deconstructionism, Marxism, and especially in Habermas's critical theory of communicative action.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xp3sn2

Introduction from: Norms of Rhetorical Culture
Abstract: A rhetorical culture is an institutional formation in which motives of competing parties are intelligible, audiences available, expressions reciprocal, norms translatable, and silences noticeable. It may seem odd, even confounding, to introduce certain norms or “goods” where the notoriously crafty business of rhetoric is concerned. Today we have spin doctors and image consultants, audience-manipulators of every ideological stripe—hence the much discussed flight of audiences from the public arena. But this is not really so surprising. Rhetoric has always been a practiced imperfection, the worst fear of idealized reason and the best hope for whatever remains of civic life. This

1 Rhetoric and Dialectic as Modes of Inquiry from: Norms of Rhetorical Culture
Abstract: Asking questions is a curious business. The larger the question, the less likely the questioners are to be satisfied with the answer. And rhetoricalquestions seem the most elusive of all. They are questions in name only, introduced for effect; questions for which we already have answers. Still, they continue to provoke us.¹ Earlier this century, two fascinating public figures struggled with that strange amalgam of power, suspicion, and curiosity that is implied by the thoughtful question. The figures were as different from one another as the questions that engaged them. One was a formidable intellectual, a political revolutionary, a

Book Title: The Music of Béla Bartók- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): WILSON PAUL
Abstract: According to Wilson, earlier critics of Bartók's music have often sought to discover an unvarying precompositional system that accounted for individual musical events. Wilson's approach is different in that he develops a way to explore each work within the musical contexts that the work itself creates and sustains. Wilson begins by discussing a number of fundamental musical materials that Bartók employed throughout his oeuvre. Using these materials as foundations, he then describes a series of flexible, behaviorally defined harmonic functions and a model of pitch hierarchy based on the functions and on several connective designs. Wilson shows how these hierarchical structures provide meaningful forces for coherence and for dynamism and progressional drive in the music. After analyzing the five works from Bartók's oeuvre, he concludes by explaining the philosophical similarities between his theory and the work of David Lewin and Charles Taylor in the related fields of perception and hermeneutics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xp3tqk

ONE FUNDAMENTALS: from: The Music of Béla Bartók
Abstract: This chapter discusses four elements fundamental to the book’s approach to Bartok’s music. That these elements are fundamental does not imply that, once described, they are to be forgotten or necessarily subsumed in some higher theoretical synthesis. Although this part of the theory is foundational for the part that follows in chapter 2, there are works by Bartok for which these fundamental concepts are the only ones that an analysis using the theory can successfully employ. In any case the topics discussed in this chapter are a constant presence in every analysis undertaken in Part 11.

TWO A MODEL OF HIERARCHICAL STRUCTURE from: The Music of Béla Bartók
Abstract: The mention of hierarchical pitch structure immediately and appropriately calls forth the imposing figure of Heinrich Schenker. His immensely important (if not universally accepted) theories of the structure of tonal music are the inescapable source for any subsequent inquiry into this general area. Unfortunately for those who wish to apply his ideas to newer music, the prolongational model does not seem to travel well outside the common-practice literature for which it was designed. The introduction alluded to efforts by Felix Salzer and Roy Travis to employ that model in Bartok’s music and in other music of the twentieth century.

Remigration reconsidered. from: Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Author(s) FEICHTINGER JOHANNES
Abstract: In der Zeit des Nationalsozialismus wurden 130.000 bis 150.000 ÖsterreicherInnen aus „rassischen“ oder politischen Gründen zur Emigration gezwungen, die überwiegende Mehrheit davon Juden (Stadler, „Emigration“ 17). Schon lange vor der Machtübernahme des Nationalsozialismus hatten viele junge ForscherInnen jüdischer Herkunft und/oder linker politischer Gesinnung Österreich verlassen, da ihnen seit Anfang der 1920er Jahre Berufslaufbahnen an den Universitäten zusehends verwehrt wurden (Feichtinger, „Braindrain“ 286-98; Taschwer 99-132). Auswanderung und Vertreibung zerstörten nicht nur die lebendige Wissenschaftskultur Österreichs zur Jahrhundertwende, sie hinterließen auch eine gravierende personelle Lücke in der Zweiten Republik: „A noticeable characteristic of Austrian science is the great shortage of scientific workers

Henry Kreisel’s Vienna: from: Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Author(s) BESNER NEIL
Abstract: Born in Vienna in 1922, novelist, short-story writer, critic, and scholar Henry Kreisel was forced to flee Vienna with his family after the Anschlussin 1938. The vital and many-layered significance of that forced departure from Vienna in Kreisel’s writing – as in his life – exerted, both autobiographically and imaginatively, a strong and enduring hold on him. It is a very old cliché, perhaps because over time it has proven truer than a cliché, that no city comes alive in the collective imagination unless and until it has been memorably invoked in narrative art: Defoe’s or Dickens’ London, Mordecai

Literarische Allianzen – unmögliche Rückkehr. from: Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Author(s) LEUCHT ROBERT
Abstract: Felix Rosenheim, a taciturn man, had kept a journal since his arrival in Jaffa in 1936, when he was twenty-four. In essence, it was the journal of a stranger, someone ill equipped to cope with the mental and physical pressures of the climate and the new society. In his journal, the carefully chiseled German prose, the classical German of Goethe and Schiller, conferred upon the content a cool ironic tone. What the irony concealed was the

Paul Nettl, Bohemian Musicologist: from: Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Author(s) NETTL BRUNO
Abstract: This paper about my father, the distinguished music historian Paul Nettl, takes its departure from two statements which I heard him make in conversation, after he had been living in America for a good decade. The first, “mir ist der Schnabel deutsch gewachsen,” was his response to a question about his continued desire to publish in German, and relates to his inability to feel at home in English. The second, more significant, was a response to a question in a conversation about ethnic identity: somewhat like “Was sind Sie eigentlich.” – “Ja, alles in allem, bin ich eigentlich Österreicher.” I

„… aber ein stolzer Bettler“. Friedrich Engel-Janosi (1893-1978): from: Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Author(s) NAGL-DOCEKAL HERTA
Abstract: Friedrich Engel-Janosis Wiener Hörerinnen und Hörer, vor allem jene, die bei ihm promovierten, blicken mit großer Dankbarkeit zurück, da dieser Professor sie in besonderer Weise geprägt hat. Von dieser Dankbarkeit sind auch die folgenden Ausführungen getragen.

Exil – (partielle) Rückkehr – Innovationstransfer. from: Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Author(s) MATIS HERBERT
Abstract: In meinem Beitrag über den Einfluss von Remigranten auf die Entwicklung der Wirtschaftsgeschichte in Österreich nach dem Zweiten Weltkrieg möchte ich mich auf zwei bzw. drei Persönlichkeiten konzentrieren: Nämlich auf Eduard März und auf Alice Teichova – wobei man diese aber ohne gleichzeitig ihren Mann, Mikuláš Teich, zu berücksichtigen, der an sich ein Historiker der Naturwissenschaften ist, wohl nicht behandeln darf. Denn jeder, der die beiden Teichs kennenlernen durfte, weiß, dass beide wie das aus der griechischen Mythologie bekannte Paar Philemon und Baucis überaus eng verbunden waren und als Einzelne gar nicht vorstellbar sind.

Book Title: Vatican II and Beyond-The Changing Mission and Identity of Canadian Women Religious
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Smyth Elizabeth M.
Abstract: The year 2015 marked the fiftieth anniversary of the end of the Second Vatican Council, which aimed to align the Church with the modern world. Over the last five decades, women religious have engaged with the council’s reforms with unprecedented enthusiasm, far exceeding the expectations of the Church. Addressing how Canadian women religious envisioned and lived out the changes in religious life brought on by a pluralistic and secularizing world, Vatican II and Beyond analyzes the national organization of female and male congregations, the Canadian Religious Conference, and the lives of two individual sisters: visionary congregational leader Alice Trudeau and social justice activist Mary Alban. This book focuses on the new transnational networks, feminist concepts, professionalization of religious life, and complex political landscapes that emerged during this period of drastic transition as women religious sought to reconstruct identities, redefine roles, and signify vision and mission at both the personal and collective levels. Following women religious as they encountered new meanings of faith in their congregations, the Church, and society at large, Vatican II and Beyond demonstrates that the search for a renewed vision was not just a response to secularization, but a way to be reborn as Catholic women.The year 2015 marked the fiftieth anniversary of the end of the Second Vatican Council, which aimed to align the Church with the modern world. Over the last five decades, women religious have engaged with the council’s reforms with unprecedented enthusiasm, far exceeding the expectations of the Church. Addressing how Canadian women religious envisioned and lived out the changes in religious life brought on by a pluralistic and secularizing world, Vatican II and Beyond analyzes the national organization of female and male congregations, the Canadian Religious Conference, and the lives of two individual sisters: visionary congregational leader Alice Trudeau and social justice activist Mary Alban. This book focuses on the new transnational networks, feminist concepts, professionalization of religious life, and complex political landscapes that emerged during this period of drastic transition as women religious sought to reconstruct identities, redefine roles, and signify vision and mission at both the personal and collective levels. Following women religious as they encountered new meanings of faith in their congregations, the Church, and society at large, Vatican II and Beyond demonstrates that the search for a renewed vision was not just a response to secularization, but a way to be reborn as Catholic women.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xp3w79

2 The Missionary Oblate Sisters: from: Vatican II and Beyond
Author(s) Bruno-Jofré Rosa
Abstract: The Missionary Oblate Sisters of the Sacred Heart and Mary Immaculate (mo), a bilingual (French and English) teaching congregation, was founded by Archbishop Adélard Langevin in 1904, in Manitoba, Canada. The foundation was Langevin’s practical way of expressing his commitment to a culturally dual French-English vision of Canada, and of addressing his fears of Anglicization, which were heightened after the Manitoba government withdrew financial support for confessional schools in 1890. It was also a way to respond to the needs of the Oblate Fathers of Mary Immaculate in relation to the process of colonization of the Aboriginal peoples, mainly through

Foreword: from: The Ambiguous Allure of the West
Author(s) Chakrabarty Dipesh
Abstract: For quite some time now, the history of modern Thailand has remained a surprisingly closed book for most students of modern South Asia. Surprising, because Thai history provides an obvious, and almost text-book, study in contrast to South Asian history of the modern period. Thailand is another and proximate Asian country that has experienced the gravitational pull of Europe over all its questions and agitations to do with becoming “modern”. Yet, unlike India, it was never formally colonized. Thai and Indian nationalisms, while showing some shared tensions over cultural domination by the West, have some significant differences that should engage

6 Coming to Terms with the West: from: The Ambiguous Allure of the West
Author(s) Winichakul Thongchai
Abstract: One of the most troubling questions in Thai society since the nineteenth century has been how to deal with the farang, the Thai word for the West, Western, and Westerners (see the introduction, Herzfeld and Pattana in this volume). Over this period, the farang has been a temptation as well as a threat in the Thai imagination, a seductive but dangerous Other (Thongchai 2000b). To Thais of all social strata, the relationship with the West has entailed a paradoxical set of desires: how to catch up with the West without “kissing the asses of the farang” (tam kon farang); how

Book Title: Liturgical Theology after Schmemann-An Orthodox Reading of Paul Ricoeur
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Louth Andrew
Abstract: While only rarely reflecting explicitly on liturgy, French philosopher Paul Ricoeur (1913-2005) gave sustained attention to several themes pertinent to the interpretation of worship, including metaphor, narrative, subjectivity, and memory. Inspired by his well-known aphorism, "The symbol gives rise to thought," Liturgical Theology after Schmemann offers an original exploration of the symbolic world of the Byzantine Rite , culminating in a Ricoeurian analysis of its Theophany "Great Blessing of Water." .
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xzh13v

CHAPTER 2 Western Perspectives from: Liturgical Theology after Schmemann
Abstract: In the previous chapter we set the stage for a Ricoeurian reading of liturgy: After considering the centrality of the Church’s lex orandiwithin the Orthodox Weltanschauung, we explored the potential role of philosophy in further developing a liturgical theology “after Schmemann.” We also probed the challenges of integrating stereo typically Western forms of thought into Eastern Christian reflection, concluding that although liturgy figures as a sine qua non in Orthodox thinking, it is yet in need of being subjected to a hermeneutical analysis. The next step of our inquiry will be to situate the appropriation of Ricoeur hitherto by

CHAPTER 4 At the Intersection of the Via Positiva and the Via Negativa from: Liturgical Theology after Schmemann
Abstract: In this chapter we extend the preceding discussion of metaphor by focusing on the question of the kind of truthcommunicated in metaphorical utterance. Given the primacy of metaphor in liturgical speech, this question is of particular importance. Dialogue with several interlocutors will set up our concluding consideration of how Byzantine worship characteristically combines kataphatic and apophatic forms of discourse—resulting in a peculiar approach to naming (and experiencing) God.

CHAPTER 8 Manifestation and Proclamation from: Liturgical Theology after Schmemann
Abstract: In this chapter we will finally endeavor to apply the insights acquired from our reading of Ricoeur to the interpretation of a particular liturgical rite—namely, the Byzantine tradition’s “Great Blessing of Water” ( GBW) to which we have hitherto referred only obliquely. Following a brief description of the service, I provide a historical overview of its development. Then I offer an analysis according to the threefold schema proposed in Parts II and III above, treating in turn the rite’s metaphors and symbols, its models of subjectivity and, finally, its dynamics of mnemonic transformation.

Conclusion from: Liturgical Theology after Schmemann
Abstract: Inspired by Ricoeur’s well-known aphorism “The symbol gives rise to thought,” this book has engaged the symbolic manifold of the Byzantine Rite, and specifically its Theophany “Great Blessing of Water,” by means of Ricoeur’s own hermeneutical philosophy. It has sought to make a contribution to Orthodox liturgical theology, inspired by the legacy of Schmemann, through whom I first discovered the power of a Weltanschauung grounded in the worship of the Church. While respecting Schmemann, I have sought to go “beyond” him by questioning, at various removes, what it means to “seek in the liturgy the vision implied in its own

Book Title: Points of Departure-Rethinking Student Source Use and Writing Studies Research Methods
Publisher: Utah State University Press
Author(s): JAMIESON SANDRA
Abstract: Points of Departureencourages a return to empirical research about writing, presenting a wealth of transparent, reproducible studies of student sources. The volume shows how to develop methods for coding and characterizing student texts, their choice of source material, and the resources used to teach information literacy. In so doing, the volume advances our understanding of how students actually write.The contributors offer methodologies, techniques, and suggestions for research that move beyond decontextualized guides to grapple with the messiness of research-in-process, as well as design, development, and expansion. Serviss and Jamieson's model of RAD writing studies research is transcontextual and based on hybridized or mixed methods. Among these methods are citation context analysis, research-aloud protocols, textual and genre analysis, surveys, interviews, and focus groups, with an emphasis on process and knowledge as contingent. Chapters report on research projects at different stages and across institution types-from pilot to multi-site, from community college to research university-focusing on the methods and artifacts employed.A rich mosaic of research about research,Points of Departureadvances knowledge about student writing and serves as a guide for both new and experienced researchers in writing studies.Contributors: Crystal Benedicks, Katt Blackwell-Starnes, Lee-Ann Kastman Breuch, Kristi Murray Costello, Anne Diekema, Rebecca Moore Howard, Sandra Jamieson, Elizabeth Kleinfeld, Brian N. Larson, Karen J. Lunsford, M. Whitney Olsen, Tricia Serviss, Janice R. Walker
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xzh15w

FOREWORD from: Points of Departure
Author(s) Lunsford Karen J.
Abstract: Somewhat to my surprise, as I write these words, I realize it has been over a decade since Rich Haswell (2005) published his influential article, “NCTE/CCCC’s Recent War on Scholarship.” Calling on writing scholars to return to conducting empirical studies, Haswell coined a term to encompass both the qualitative and quantitative research needed—“RAD scholarship,” or “replicable, aggregable, and data-driven scholarship.” He also implied an agenda for the discipline: to define areas in which our collective research will make a difference. In the decade since then, writing scholars have responded to his call. As the contributors to this collection argue,

Interchapter 1: from: Points of Departure
Abstract: Many researchers in writing studies resist quantitative research because they feel unprepared in statistical methods or lack the time required to learn and then conduct such research. This worry is hardly new, though. It has been repeatedly articulated by those struggling to develop research methods since the earliest days of our national conferences and journals (see Serviss, introduction to this collection). Members of our discipline, particularly WPAs, often employ qualitative or quantitative research, or a combination of the two, in response to local institutional need, but when those local questions are answered, they move on to the next issue. Sometimes

Chapter 2 REPORTS FROM THE LILAC PROJECT: from: Points of Departure
Author(s) Walker Janice R.
Abstract: In the foreword to The New Digital Scholar, Alison J. Head and Michael B. Eisenberg note that “one of the paradoxes of the digital age is that while finding information and answers may be easy, making sense and using all that information is not” (Head and Eisenberg 2013, xi). In that same volume, Barry M. Maid and Barbara J. D’Angelo suggest ways instructors can “think about which pedagogical strategies all of us need to employ in order to develop an [information-literacy]-based curriculum that is relevant in the digital age” (Maid and D’Angelo 2013, 310–11). In this chapter, we discuss

Points of Departure 1: from: Points of Departure
Abstract: In August 2015, the Open Science Collaboration (OSC) published the results of a project that attempted to replicate the results of one hundred experimental and correlational studies reported in three top-tier psychology journals in a single year (2008). The collaboration warns that there is no single indicator that can describe replication success, but based on the five different indicators they employed, they report that between 53 and 64 percent of the studies they replicated did not produce the same results as the original. They report that their replication studies used materials provided by the original authors and were reviewed in

Interchapter 2: from: Points of Departure
Abstract: One of the great challenges and opportunities of educational research is rectifying predictions about how learning theoretically works with how learning actuallyworks in—and across—different contexts. Those of us who study writing and literacy are uniquely aware of these tensions. In fact, writing studies research traditionally inquires into how beautifully divergent and surprising learning can be in practice. Conversations about writing processes in 1960s writing-pedagogy research embody this tension; theoretical understandings oftypicalprocesses of developing writers became dangerously calcified intothewriting process quite quickly. What began as inquiry about how writing happens (Cooper 1986; Emig 1971;

Chapter 3 THE THINGS THEY CARRY: from: Points of Departure
Author(s) Serviss Tricia
Abstract: For writing studies scholars like me who focus on teacher preparation, terms like teaching practicumandgraduate-student orientationstir up deep and pressing disciplinary tensions. We return to the same theoretical and practical questions as we do in the work of professionalizing ourselves as teachers:How can we best prepare writing teachers, both novice and veteran? When and how should programming support their professionalization? How do we simultaneously prepare them both as emerging writers and writing teachers?As we embrace digital writing, reading, and research tools even more fully, the cracks in our knowledge and strategies for preparing new writing

11 LE PORTRAIT ET L’ANALYSE DE L’ENGAGEMENT DES FONDATIONS SUBVENTIONNAIRES CANADIENNES DANS LES POLITIQUES PUBLIQUES from: Les fondations philanthropiques:de nouveaux acteurs politiques?
Author(s) Hall Sara
Abstract: Nous pourrions considérer que les politiques publiques représentent une reconnaissance institutionnelle et une volonté de produire du bien public. Du point de vue des actions posées par des fondations canadiennes voulant engendrer un changement sociétal, nous considérons que l’énoncé politique permet de combler l’incertitude relative à la possibilité ou à la nécessité de changement, représente une forme d’engagement collectif à aller dans cette direction et à travailler à changer les choses. Au Canada, les fondations subventionnaires occupent une position singulière, car, contrairement aux autres organismes sans but lucratif et de bienfaisance canadiens, nombre de fondations disposent d’actifs considérables qui les

Book Title: Whitman & Dickinson-A Colloquy
Publisher: University of Iowa Press
Author(s): Miller Cristanne
Abstract: Whitman & Dickinsonis the first collection to bring together original essays by European and North American scholars directly linking the poetry and ideas of Walt Whitman and Emily Dickinson. The essays present intersections between these great figures across several fields of study, rehearsing well-established topics from new perspectives, opening entirely new areas of investigation, and providing new information about Whitman's and Dickinson's lives, work, and reception.Essays included in this book cover the topics of mentoring influence on each poet, religion, the Civil War, phenomenology, the environment, humor, poetic structures of language, and Whitman's and Dickinson's twentieth- and twenty-first-century reception-including prolonged engagement with Adrienne Rich's response to this "strange uncoupled couple" of poets who stand at the beginning of an American national poetic.Contributors Include:Marina Camboni Andrew Dorkin Vincent DussolBetsy Erkkilä Ed FolsomChristine GerhardtJay GrossmanJennifer LeaderMarianne NobleCécile RoudeauShira Wolosky
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1z27hqz

Introduction: from: Whitman & Dickinson
Author(s) MILLER CRISTANNE
Abstract: In 2015 it had been 150 years since both walt whitman and Emily Dickinson had produced the better part of their poetic output. This collection of essays stems from a “colloquy” that brought scholars together to discuss these poets explicitly in relation to each other for the first time in all those 150 years. As any bibliographical search will confirm, Whitman and Dickinson have frequently inspired fruitful and exciting scholarship when analyzed comparatively—as they have been in several essays, especially from the 1960s on. Naturally, they also have figured alongside each other in nineteenth-century U.S. literature survey courses around

Queer Contingencies of Canonicity: from: Whitman & Dickinson
Author(s) GROSSMAN JAY
Abstract: For many readers since its publication in 1941, the omission of Emily Dickinson from F. O. Matthiessen’s landmark American Renaissance: Art and Expression in the Age of Emerson and Whitmanis among its most egregious and often-noted shortcomings.¹ So imagine my surprise to have found a letter from 1931 in which Matthiessen insists upon Dickinson’s necessary place in the following year’s survey of American literature for Harvard undergraduates. Matthiessen writes to his partner, Russell Cheney, about a meeting with his Harvard colleague Kenneth Murdock regarding the syllabus for their co-taught American literature course:

La lexicografía perceptiva y la perspectiva del destinatario del diccionario (una aproximación al estudio de las actitudes lingüísticas de los periodistas) from: Filología, comunicación y otros estudios
Author(s) Hernández Humberto Hernández
Abstract: Fue por los años ochenta cuando realicé mis primeras investigaciones sobre el uso del diccionario, su función en el aula, la idea que se tenía de él y las valoraciones que hacían alumnos y profesores. Las inicié a través de una serie de cuestionarios elaborados ad hoc, y, sin tener plena conciencia de ello, estaba realizando un estudio sobre las actitudes lingüísticas de los distintos sectores implicados en el proceso de enseñanza- aprendizaje. Trataba de averiguar, más concretamente, la opinión que tenían ciertos grupos de usuarios (profesionales no lingüistas) sobre el diccionario, cómo y por qué se han ido conformando

Las enfermedades transmisibles continúan siendo un problema de salud pública en el siglo XXI from: Filología, comunicación y otros estudios
Author(s) de Miguel Ángel Gil
Abstract: Para ello, me centraré en la situación actual de las enfermedades transmisibles, ya que, aunque estamos en la era de la Cronicidad y de las enfermedades que denominamos crónicas, sin embargo, seguimos teniendo una gran incidencia de las enfermedades

Book Title: 40 ideas para la práctica de la justicia restaurativa en la jurisdicción penal- Publisher: Dykinson
Author(s): Altarejos Alberto José Olalde
Abstract: ¿Es posible que las personas enfrentadas por conductas delictivas puedan encontrarse y dialogar?, ¿con qué finalidad?, ¿quedan en entredicho las funciones preventivas del sistema penal?, ¿con qué herramientas trabaja la persona mediadora? Estas son las cuestiones, entre otras muchas, que aborda este libro. Algunas víctimas se acercan a los procesos restaurativos en la búsqueda de datos que completen la verdad del delito sufrido, también en la búsqueda de un reconocimiento. Quedan preguntas sin contestar a cuestiones humanamente esenciales, porque los hechos probados de la sentencia no los aporta, al no ser significativos para la aplicación de la ley. Sin verdad, no hay paz; sin conocimiento de las consecuencias del daño causado, sin reconocimiento de la humanidad dañada, sin palabra honesta y auténtica, sin escucha compasiva, no hay ni reparación, ni responsabilidad, ni crecimiento humano. Se construye paz cuando hubo violencia si se respeta el valor de cada persona, sus cualidades únicas, su humanidad imperfecta, pero digna; cuando se siente el dolor causado al otro. Con el reconocimiento personal, el más íntimo, el que no se puede suplir por ningún otro, las víctimas tienen todos los elementos y datos para iniciar o continuar sus procesos de desidentificación, cerrar sanamente sus duelos, conectar con sus necesidades vitales para continuar la vida sin un muro hasta entonces infranqueable. A profundizar en la teoría, filosofía, ética y metodología práctica de este sistema de justicia restaurativa, está destinada esta obra.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zgwkz1

Capítulo 2. LENTE CONTEXTUAL from: 40 ideas para la práctica de la justicia restaurativa en la jurisdicción penal
Abstract: Hacer justicia restaurativa dentro de la dinámica laberíntica del sistema de justicia penal requiere de una mirada sistémica a todo lo que nos rodea. No solamente los preceptos legales, las garantías procesales que se estén poniendo en juego, sino que es necesario saber de qué nos rodeamos y cómo hemos llegado hasta aquí.

Epílogo from: 40 ideas para la práctica de la justicia restaurativa en la jurisdicción penal
Author(s) García-Longoria María Paz
Abstract: Desde el trabajo social se destaca la participación activa, a partir de la narración de historias vividas desde perspectivas constructivistas; potenciar las fortalezas de las personas, que pone el foco no en los problemas sino en los aspectos positivos para la construcción de un mundo mejor, así como

The Making of a Russian Icon: from: Close Encounters
Abstract: One hundred and eighty-four kilometers from Moscow, and a good half year after it happened, all trains slowed down their course almost to a crawl. The passengers pressed to the windows, went out into the vestibule: were they repairing the tracks, or what? Was there a change in schedule? No. Past the crossing, the train again picked up speed and the passengers settled back.

Dostoevsky’s Concept of Reality and Its Representation in Art from: Close Encounters
Abstract: “By the word reality we understand everything that is,” observed Belinsky in 1840, “the visible world and the spiritual world, the world of facts and the world of ideas.”² Belinsky’s definition—which belongs to his middle or so-called Hegelian period of rationalization of reality— comes close to characterizing Dostoevsky’s omnibus view of reality. We shall not encounter a single binding concept of reality in Dostoevsky’s thought; rather, his notion of reality is a syncretism.³ Reality for him embraces concrete, historical reality with its classes, its immediate problems and conflicts, and its social and national types which give expression to the

Bakhtin’s Poetics of Dostoevsky and “Dostoevsky’s Christian Declaration of Faith” from: Close Encounters
Abstract: “God can get along without man,” Mikhail M. Bakhtin wrote in “Towards a Reworking of the Dostoevsky Book” in 1961, “but man cannot get along without Him.”² How does Dostoevsky get along with God? Vyacheslav Ivanov answers this question in his Dostoevsky book (1932): “Dostoevsky has long since made his choice: his surety and pledge for it is the figure of Christ shining upon his path.”³ The “infallible criterion” for this claim, Ivanov insists, is “the accord between what Dostoevsky had to teach and the living artistic imagery in which he clothed it.”⁴ For Ivanov, “the investigation of Dostoevsky’s religious

Intimations of Mortality: from: Close Encounters
Abstract: “Here are some bad verses expressing something even worse,” Fyodor I. Tyutchev (1803–1873) wrote to his wife with reference to his poem of August 6, 1851.² The poem is in no sense a bad one; on the contrary, it is a masterpiece in miniature. Whether it expresses something on the somber or pessimistic side is a question. In any case, Tyutchev’s subjective reaction to his poem does not alter the poem’s independence or its rich poetic and philosophical texture.

The Poetry of Memory and the Memory of Poetry: from: Close Encounters
Abstract: Igor Severyanin’s poem consists of a title, “Ne Bolee Chem Son” (“No More Than a Dream”), and two quatrains, each one numbering twenty-four words. In the first quatrain, the narrator-dreamer relates that he has dreamed a “remarkable” dream. He lists five discrete dream sequences beginning with the scene of his riding in a carriage with a girl who is reading Blok.³ In the second quatrain, the narrator dwells on the profound impact the dream has had on him and how increasingly moved he was by the thought that the “the strange girl had not forgotten Blok.” “No More Than a

Book Title: The Superstitious Muse-Thinking Russian Literature Mythopoetically
Publisher: Academic Studies Press
Author(s): Bethea David M.
Abstract: For several decades David Bethea has written authoritatively on the “mythopoetic thinking" that lies at the heart of classical Russian literature, especially Russian poetry. His theoretically informed essays and books have made a point of turning back to issues of intentionality and biography at a time when authorial agency seems under threat of “erasure" and the question of how writers, and poets in particular, live their lives through their art is increasingly moot. The lichnost’ (personhood, psychic totality) of the given writer is all-important, argues Bethea, as it is that which combines the specifically biographical and the capaciously mythical in verbal units that speak simultaneously to different planes of being. Pushkin’s Evgeny can be one incarnation of the poet himself and an Everyman rising up to challenge Peter’s new world order; Brodsky can be, all at once, Dante and Mandelstam and himself, the exile paying an Orphic visit to Florence (and, by ghostly association, Leningrad).This sort of metempsychosis, where the stories that constitute the Ur-texts of Russian literature are constantly reworked in the biographical myths shaping individual writers’ lives, is Bethea’s primary focus. This collection contains a liberal sampling of Bethea’s most memorable previously published essays along with new studies prepared for this occasion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxsj7q

Chapter 1 The Mythopoetic “Vectors” of Russian Literature from: The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: Any national literature is to some significant extent a mirror held up to its people’s collective countenance: its myths, aspirations, national triumphs and traumas, current ideologies, historical understanding, linguistic traditions. But it is also more than that—more than a reflection in the glass of what has come before and what is now, even as one glances into it, passing from view. It is, in a real sense, generative of new meaning, and thus capable of shaping that countenance in the future. For the society that takes its literary products seriously, the text of a novel or poem can be

Chapter 3 Mythopoesis and Biography: from: The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: Schools in the “human sciences” are bound virtually by their own phylogenetic principles to undermine and supersede their predecessors rather than disinterestedly, patiently, build on them. A prior school has to be razed and then a new one erected on the same spot, with the “school board” quickly forgetting the attractions and the still usable space of the now nonexistent building. Students get bussed to the new school without any knowledge (un less some teachers tell them so) that they are walking the halls of a place that once looked much different. The prior school is precisely not “refurbished” or

Chapter 5 Relativity and Reality: from: The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: Given his interest in complex semiotic structures and in a “semiosphere” whose ever ramifying interactions model the vast physical cosmos, it is not surprising that Yury Lotman paused in his writings to discuss the most elaborate of all texts, the worlds within worlds of Dante’s La Divina Commedia.Indeed, these two authors seem almost made for each other, for their passion for meaning (and meaning making) against a moving backdrop of epistemology and geo-and astrophysics are uncannily similar. InUniverse of the MindLotman juxtaposes the vertical journey of Dante the pilgrim and the horizontal journey of the curious, courageous,

Chapter 6 Whose Mind Is This Anyway? from: The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: On a green island amid the dark-blue sea there appeared a man. Here he decided to erect a temple. He broke up and carted blocks of marble, hewed them, cut capitals and friezes, erected columns and walls. But before doing that he constructed a temple in his imagination, and all that he erected in stone was simply the recreation of his already created ideal. This ideal was not something dead and immobile: in the head of the builder there swarmed designs, with the variants pressing in on each other, and the view from a hill or the form of a

Chapter 7 Of Pushkin and Pushkinists from: The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: Introductions to books and collections about Alexander Pushkin tend to begin, especially when their origin is not Russian, with de rigueurnods to the poet’s massive presence in, and seminal influence on, the native culture. Such expository scaffolding falls under the category of preemptive advertising for a figure who, outside his context and more importantly outside his language, has difficulty translating. Thus, from the operas of Glinka, Tchaikovsky, Musorgsky and Rimsky-Korsakov to the stylish illustrations and set designs of Benois, Bilibin, and Dobuzhinsky; from endlessly anthologized paintings by Kiprensky and Repin to ghosts of allusion in better known works by

Chapter 9 Pushkin’s Mythopoetic Consciousness: from: The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: Pushkin was possessed of a richly mythopoetic consciousness. He was also, as numerous friends attest, intensely superstitious. Indeed, for a poet of Pushkin’s range and energy, it is not surprising that some of his finest works are motivated thematically on the dual and interpenetrating notions that myths can, literally, come to life and that forces beyond one’s control can prearrange one’s destiny. Yet Pushkin never made the connection between certain crucial myths (or beliefs, superstitions) and his own unfolding biography explicit.He was protected from this not only by his ownamour proprebut by the carapace of what Lydia

Chapter 12 Slavic Gift-Giving, The Poet in History, and Pushkin’s The Captain’s Daughter from: The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: Like the bread and salt that are their folk embodiments, the values of generosity and hospitality are very old in the Russian mentality. And no writer is considered more “Russian” in this sense of spiritual generosity and inexhaustible “giftedness” than Alexander Pushkin. But what exactly does this mean, once one leaves the porous level of cultural myth? “There should not be any free gifts,” writes the social anthropologist Mary Douglas, since each gift and each personality donating and receiving each gift belongs to a larger system of ongoing and mutually implicating relations. “Gift cycles engage persons in permanent commitments that

Chapter 18 Joseph Brodsky and the American Seashore Poem: from: The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: The two anglophone poets who exercised the greatest sway over the young exiled Russian poet Joseph Brodsky in the early 1970’s were W. H. Auden and Robert Lowell. In retrospect, this influence should not be puzzling, inasmuch as these two established older poets took the younger one under their wings after his forced expulsion from the Soviet Union in June 1972, extended him various kindnesses as he tried to adapt to a new linguistic environment, and then both died soon thereafter — Auden in 1973, Lowell in 1977 — leaving Brodsky, an obsessive elegist, to consider their passing in the light of

Book Title: The Translator’s Doubts-Vladimir Nabokov and the Ambiguity of Translation
Publisher: Academic Studies Press
Author(s): TRUBIKHINA JULIA
Abstract: Using Vladimir Nabokov as its “case study," this volume approaches translation as a crucial avenue into literary history and theory, philosophy and interpretation. It attempts to bring together issues in translation and the shift in Nabokov studies from its earlier emphasis on the “metaliterary" to the more recent “metaphysical" approach. Addressing specific texts (both literary and cinematic), the book investigates Nabokov’s deeply ambivalent relationship to translation as a hermeneutic oscillation on his part between the relative stability of meaning, which expresses itself philosophically as a faith in the beyond, and deep metaphysical uncertainty. While Nabokov’s practice of translation changed profoundly over the course of his career, his adherence to the Romantic notion of a “true" but ultimately elusive metaphysical language remained paradoxically constant.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxsjwj

Introduction from: The Translator’s Doubts
Abstract: This book singles out translation as a way of talking about literary history and theory, philosophy, and interpretation. Vladimir Nabokov is its case study. The advantage of making Nabokov a case study for an investigation of questions of translation is obvious. It is hard to separate Vladimir Nabokov from the act of translation, in all senses of the word—ranging from “moving across” geographical borders and cultural and linguistic boundaries to the transposing of the split between “here” and “there” and “then” and “now” (the essential elements of exile, components of every émigré experience) onto a metaphysical plane sometimes suggested

Conclusion from: The Translator’s Doubts
Abstract: In this conclusion, I would like to provide an overview that situates Nabokov vis-à-vis the Russian and Western traditions of translation, and to bring together in this context the central issues of Nabokov’s ambivalent relationship to translation. These issues include his origin—his own “secret stem,” leading back to Russian Romanticism—as well as translation as a vehicle for expressing Nabokov’s own strongly held ideas about art. While Nabokov’s practice of translation undergoes significant changes in the course of his career, his adherence to the idea of some “true,” “metaphysical” language—ever elusive and ever present—remains surprisingly constant.

Presentación from: Los silencios de la guerra
Author(s) Uribe María Victoria
Abstract: Vivimos tiempos inciertos y turbulentos en los que la guerra no se libra únicamente en trincheras o campos de batalla sino en los escenarios más variados. Durante el siglo xx y en lo que va corrido del siglo xxi, hemos sido testigos de guerras múltiples que han dejado millones de víctimas, de testimonios y de silencios. Salvo el artículo pionero de Shoshana Felman sobre el silencio de Walter Benjamin, el cual sirve de referencia a varios de los autores que escriben en este libro, los silencios de la guerra no habían sido abordados de manera sistemática ni desde una perspectiva

Volver a hablar tras la muerte del lenguaje. from: Los silencios de la guerra
Author(s) Heuer Wolfgang
Abstract: Alemania fue gobernada, desde 1933 a 1945, por un movimiento totalitario que desencadenó una guerra mundial sin precedentes, asesinando una gran parte del pueblo judío, a incontables gitanos, zíngaros y romaníes, e incapacitados. Muchas ciudades quedaron completamente destruidas en los raids aéreos, aliados, casi un tercio de los alemanes fueron forzados a abandonar su patria en Alemania del Este, por entonces

3. WESTPHAL AND HEGEL: from: Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: Westphal’s reading of Hegel reveals the political nature of his own philosophy. Moreover, Westphal’s struggle with Hegel, as we shall see, can also be seen as a struggle with modernity and its resultant political, economic, and religious structures. With these thoughts in mind, Westphal’s second book on Hegel, entitled Hegel, Freedom, and Modernity, is a prime source, as Westphal shapes the book to highlight these struggles, hoping to shed light upon the insights Hegel can give us and where he goes astray. This chapter explores Westphal’s journey with Hegel by focusing on Westphal’s political (and therefore religious) critique of Hegel.

5. RELIGIOUSNESS: from: Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: The previous chapter partially answered the question of the type of faith Westphal holds by finding it to be Kierkegaardian and wholly dependent on revelation, and thus resists any reasonable foundation to ground itself. However, this was only a partial answer since it merely addresses how one assents to, or otherwise accepts, faith. Holding or enacting that faith through discipleship is the decisive step and what follows will continue our investigation by describing how, exactly, faith is opposed to sin and how this opposition, once enacted and lived, becomes an ideology critique.

9. COMPARATIVE ESCHATOLOGY: from: Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: In the previous chapter, we discussed Merold Westphal’s thought in light of his primary debate partner, John Caputo. As I argued, Westphal is almost always discussed alongside his friend Caputo as both represent different, opposing sides of various debates in Continental philosophy of religion in North America. On the one hand, Westphal argues for a ‘thick theology’—a hearty soup—that provides a theistic, religious appropriation of postmodern thought to nourish the believing soul. On the other hand, Caputo analyses theism through a radical critique of religion’s onto-theo-logico-centrism. Caputo’s postmodernism declares that religion must be rethought—even to the point

3 THE ARCHITECTURE OF MOVEMENT: from: The Cinema of the Soviet Thaw
Abstract: There is a surprising correspondence in the opening seconds of two very different films: Georgii Danelia’s I Walk the Streets of Moscow, a Soviet production from 1964 that is relatively unknown to international audiences, and Jacques Tati’sPlaytime, a widely discussed French masterpiece from 1967. The Soviet film begins at a Moscow airport, with a young woman dancing and humming as she moves along a glass-curtain exterior wall (figure 3.1). The French film, set in Paris, begins with two nuns walking first on the outside of and then on the interior side of a glass terminal façade, eventually disappearing around

Book Title: Sonata Fragments-Romantic Narratives in Chopin, Schumann, and Brahms
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Davis Andrew
Abstract: In Sonata Fragments, Andrew Davis argues that the Romantic sonata is firmly rooted, both formally and expressively, in its Classical forebears, using Classical conventions in order to convey a broad constellation of Romantic aesthetic values. This claim runs contrary to conventional theories of the Romantic sonata that place this nineteenth-century musical form squarely outside inherited Classical sonata procedures. Building on Sonata Theory, Davis examines moments of fracture and fragmentation that disrupt the cohesive and linear temporality in piano sonatas by Chopin, Brahms, and Schumann. These disruptions in the sonata form are a narrative technique that signify temporal shifts during which we move from the outer action to the inner thoughts of a musical agent, or we move from the story as it unfolds to a flashback or flash-forward. Through an interpretation of Romantic sonatas as temporally multi-dimensional works in which portions of the music in any given piece can lie inside or outside of what Sonata Theory would define as the sonata-space proper, Davis reads into these ruptures a narrative of expressive features that mark these sonatas as uniquely Romantic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxz0jw

1 Fragmentation: from: Sonata Fragments
Abstract: Addressing questions such as those posed in the introduction requires considering the constellation of Romantic aesthetics and ideologies pervasive among European artists in the first half of the nineteenth century. These are normally understood as being marked by a skepticism toward older, Classical forms and procedures, the employment of which in music, literature, or other of the arts would have been viewed by the Romantics as something of an exercise in form—as the replication of older procedures for the sake of conformist repetition, as an endorsement of Enlightenment ideals that had long since become outdated. One of the clearest

2 Atemporality in Narrative and Music from: Sonata Fragments
Abstract: This chapter sets out to construct a theory of structure and expressive meaning in the nineteenth-century Romantic sonata, within the view of Romanticism articulated in chapter 1.¹ The theory will focus particularly on the problematized moments of formal and expressive ambiguity characteristic of that genre. I first consider what we might mean by narrativeornarrative formsin music, continue by examining issues related to time and temporality within those narrative forms, and finish by proposing ways that some of these (mainly literary) concepts might map onto music.

3 Irigaray’s To Be Two: from: Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Jaarsma Ada S.
Abstract: As this epigraph signals, an awareness of “sin” emerges out of Luce Irigaray’s central assertion of sexual difference as the essential ethical and philosophical problem. Irigaray asserts that a rejection or refutation of sexual difference risks committing an ultimate sin. Through this claim, we can glimpse a problematic of evil emerging out of Irigaray’s project that cannot be easily or quickly delimited. Irigaray herself traverses this problematic in her texts, elaborating sources of brokenness and violence as well as concomitant possibilities for regeneration (see, e.g., 1993b, 1993d, and 1996). Rather than mobilizing traditional concepts like “moral evil” or “natural evil,”

6 Banal Evil and Useless Knowledge: from: Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Geddes Jennifer L.
Abstract: Three related divisions currently mark scholarship on evil. The first is the divide between studies of perpetrators and studies of victims. In the field of Holocaust studies, this division is a matter of principle for some scholars, who focus solely on the testimonies and histories of the victims. One rationale behind refusing to study the perpetrators of the Nazi horrors is the belief that they do not deserve the dignity even of being made objects of study. Behind the work of those who study the perpetrators is the idea that unless we understand how it was that humans came to

13 The Vertigo of Secularization: from: Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Lara María Pía
Abstract: Those who hurried to write something about September 11, 2001, were prone to make errors of judgment because the events of that day were so difficult to comprehend. A few years have passed, and this act of terrorism still haunts us. The legacy of terror is something that will reverberate in our global era until we are capable of properly analyzing this new type of terrorism that worships death and destruction, disguising itself behind the excuse of fundamentalist “religious views.” If we are to believe the terrorist’s claims of righteousness, their means and their ends were disproportionate. Clearly, their ultimate

16 Those Who “Witness the Evil”: from: Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Razack Sherene H.
Abstract: It is said that a Canadian speechwriter in the Bush administration coined the phrase “axis of evil” that has been so much a part of American political vocabulary since the September 11, 2001, terrorist attacks on the World Trade Center and the Pentagon (Walker 2002). If this is true, it is fitting. For the better part of the 1990s, Canadian peacekeepers have described their activities in Somalia, Rwanda, Haiti, Bosnia, Kosovo, and Croatia as encounters with “absolute evil.” The American president and the Canadian peacekeeper quoted above¹ both imagine the international as a space where civilized peoples from the North

18 Feminist Reactions to the Contemporary Security Regime from: Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Young Iris Marion
Abstract: The American and European women’s movement of the late 1970s and early 1980s contained a large segment organizing around issues of weapons, war, and peace. By the early 1990s, the humor and heroism of women’s peace actions had been all but forgotten. Prompted by events in the United States and the world since September 2001, and by the rhetoric of U.S. leaders justifying some of their actions, I do think that there are urgent reasons to reopen the question of whether looking at war and security issues through a gendered lens can teach us all lessons that might further the

Foreword from: Reading Eco
Author(s) Sebeok Thomas A.
Abstract: At the peak of Summer in 1981, I land in Rome from overseas. For the first time, I glimpse Il nome della rosa, by my long-time friend and semiotic comrade-in-arms, Umberto Eco, published a few months earlier, displayed wherever books are sold. I buy a copy–“Naturalmente, un manoscritto”–prove the resonance of its Old Testament beginnings, then continue browsing at my hotel, wide-eyed from jet lag, late into the night. I finish reading the novel during sleepless times to follow in the course of a dozen train-rides up and down Italy and nights in hotels, until I reach “stat

1.3 Two Problems in Textual Interpretation from: Reading Eco
Author(s) Eco Umberto
Abstract: For the convenience of the reader, I am presenting here the table of levels of textual cooperation (published in Role14). In the box on discursive structures I did not sufficiently develop the voice “chosen of the isotopies,” since the concept of isotopy was there understood as used in Greimas’ semiotics. As to the deeper intensional levels, inThe Role of the ReaderI have developed

2.10 Eco and Dramatology from: Reading Eco
Author(s) Kevelson Roberta
Abstract: That Eco makes frequent recourse to narrative fiction is not surprising since the semiotician and the author of fictive narrative are two of the most public faces he presents to us who adore and admire him from whatever portion of himself he gives freely and with great gusto. But what is a surprising fact, to use Peirce’s notable term for that which comes to us from experience and shakes us out of old habit into new play, is Eco’s occasional mention of the dramatic text as representing through the work of so me twentieth-century playwrights a prototype of the indeterminacy,

2.12 Interpretation and Overinterpretation: from: Reading Eco
Author(s) Capozzi Rocco
Abstract: The sensational “success story”¹ of Umberto Eco’s first internationally acclaimed best-seller novel The Name of the Rose(1980), followed byFoucault’s Pendulum(1988) andThe Island of the Day Before(1995), has been accompanied by an increasing amount of attention given to the author’s writings on interpretation vis-à-vis his views on semiotics, textual analysis, narratology, postmodernism, and reader response theories. In North America, Eco’s role among contemporary theorists of literary criticism became noticeable after the publication ofA Theory of Semiotics(1975; 1976) andThe Role of the Reader(1979). Today, after the appearance ofSemiotics and the Philosophy of

3.3 Give Me Another Horse from: Reading Eco
Author(s) Sebeok Thomas A.
Abstract: Because “The Adventure of the Lion’s Mane” (Doyle 1967:776-89), first published in the same year, 1926, represents a singularly radical stylistic experiment on the part of its author, then age 67, this, of all his mysteries, surely became one the most intriguing in the entire Sherlock Holmes corpus of 56 short stories: for Holmes, then living in retirement in his Sussex home, necessarily conducts his investigation there in the absence of Watson. As the

4 THE LIFE STORY OF VICTOR KLEMPERER from: Trauma in First Person
Abstract: Part II is dedicated to the reading of the diaries kept by Victor Klemperer in Dresden during the Nazi years focusing on the temporal experience, as reflected during the course of the protracted traumatic event. As we shall see, the autobiographical structure of time that underlies these diaries underwent a fundamental disruption but was reorganized in a very different way in the context of documentary writing. In order to understand the disruptions in Victor Klemperer’s life story during the Nazi period, and the way in which the story took shape in his diaries, we must first devote a few words

CONCLUSION from: Trauma in First Person
Abstract: Believing she had succeeded in recovering from the traumas of her life, Anaïs Nin wrote the following in her diary: “Stories are the only enchantment possible, for when we begin to see our suffering as a story, we are saved.”¹ These words reflect the optimistic approach to the power of stories to deliver the victim from the suffering of trauma. Nin refers both to fictional writing and to autobiographical, diary writing. There are situations, however, in which narrative appears to lack sufficient power—situations in which the force of shock is so great that it disintegrates even the story and

8 HEGEL’S THEOLOGY II from: In Praise of Heteronomy
Abstract: The usual story is that Hegel is the culmination of German Idealism, drawing on and revising the work of Kant, Fichte, Schelling, and a few others. There is much truth in this approach.¹ But it is also true that Hegel tells us “thought must beginby placing itself at the standpoint of Spinozism; to be a follower of Spinoza is the essentialcommencementof all Philosophy . . . when a man begins to philosophize, the soul mustcommenceby bathing in this ether of the One Substance” (HP/S, III, 257; emphasis added).

10 THE INEVITABILITY OF HETERONOMY from: In Praise of Heteronomy
Abstract: In its original, modern mode, religion within the limits of reason alone regularly presents itself as the voice of a single, universally operative reason. The actual, substantial differences among various versions of this project undermine this claim and show human reason to speak with a variety of quite particular voices, each one relative to the paradigm that it presupposes. In the absence of any evidently universal reason, even the criteria for choosing among alternatives appear to be more nearly internal to the different theologies than “neutral” or “objective.” Epistemically speaking, we are operating within one of many possible hermeneutical circles.

Book Title: The Prayers and Tears of Jacques Derrida-Religion without Religion
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: Caputo's book is riveting.... A singular achievement of stylistic brio and impeccable scholarship, it breaks new ground in making a powerful case for treating Derrida as homo religiosis.... There can be no mistaking the importance of Caputo's work." -Edith Wyschogrod
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005rjr

V. Circumcision from: The Prayers and Tears of Jacques Derrida
Abstract: Derrida is not a Jewish writer in the strong sense in which that is true of Rosenzweig, Buber, or Levinas. He is a Jew who is “rightly described as an atheist,” of an “assimilated” family, raised in an Arab country, whose native language, culture, and education are thoroughly French—“Christian Latin French” ( Circon., 57/Circum., 58)—trained in the Greco-European tradition of philosophy and letters, ofmondialatinisation, who has lived in France since the age of nineteen but whose greatest following is in the United States, always being made welcome elsewhere. But this does not mean his work is not driven

4 Peirce and Saussure on Signs and Ideas in Language from: Signs and Society
Abstract: Charles S. Peirce (1839–1914) and Ferdinand de Saussure (1857–1913) spent considerable effort trying to clarify and articulate what they meant by signs and the ideas, or concepts, associated with them. There are many attempts in the scholarly literature to align Peircean and Saussurean terminologies, as well as several valiant efforts to create new synthetic models encompassing their differences. My task here is different: to point out several ways in which Peirce, an American experimental physicist and logician (trained as a chemist), and Saussure, a Swiss linguist (trained as a philologist of Indo-European languages), have fundamentally opposed views stemming

6 Semiotic Degeneracy of Social Life: from: Signs and Society
Abstract: Twenty years ago, Ketner (1993) published a groundbreaking paper proposing “semiotic” as a cure for what ails “social science” and “literature” (by which he means literary studies, not the artistic production of literature). His key point is as follows:

10 It’s About Time: from: Signs and Society
Abstract: The invitation to comment on this set of papers in linguistic anthropology dealing with temporalities and texts (first presented at the American Anthropological Association’s 2005 meetings in Washington, DC) has prompted a moment of personal reflection, since it was exactly twenty years ago, in 1985, that I published my first application of semiotic categories to the ethnographic analysis of time and history. My paper, “Times of the Signs: Modalities of History and Levels of Social Structure in Belau” (Parmentier 1985b), tried to synthesize Fernand Braudel, Meyer Fortes, and Marshall Sahlins by using Charles S. Peirce’s sign theory to argue that

13 Money Walks, People Talk: from: Signs and Society
Abstract: In political life, every occasion for intercourse between two tribes is based on an exchange of certain money, the value and the amount of which is determined by custom. In social life, everyone is bound by custom to make certain carefully regulated expenditures in relation to his position in the community. Everyone is responsible for his cousins, his children, and his household, and must pay for them. Every act performed for a

14 Representing Transcendence: from: Signs and Society
Author(s) Leone Massimo
Abstract: In using the phrase “representing transcendence” to focus this supplementary issue of Signs and Society, we are interested in socially constructed and historically specific discursive, behavioral, and material forms of signs that express (depict, imply, suggest, problematize, deny, etc.) something beyondnormal human experience for individuals and groups in day-to-day and specially marked contexts. We are not, that is, primarily interested in the questions raised, for example, by evolutionary psychology about the “naturalness” for all humans or for humans at some defined “age” of cultural history of cognitive representations expressing beliefs in transcendent entities or quests for transcendent experiences. What

Book Title: A Theory of Musical Narrative- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): ALMÉN BYRON
Abstract: Byron Almén proposes an original synthesis of approaches to musical narrative from literary criticism, semiotics, historiography, musicology, and music theory, resulting in a significant critical reorientation of the field. This volume includes an extensive survey of traditional approaches to musical narrative illustrated by a wide variety of musical examples that highlight the range and applicability of the theoretical apparatus. Almén provides a careful delineation of the essential elements and preconditions of musical narrative organization, an eclectic analytical model applicable to a wide range of musical styles and repertoires, a classification scheme of narrative types and subtypes reflecting conceptually distinct narrative strategies, a wide array of interpretive categories, and a sensitivity to the dependence of narrative interpretation on the cultural milieu of the work, its various audiences, and the analyst. A Theory of Musical Narrativeprovides both an excellent introduction to an increasingly important conceptual domain and a complex reassessment of its possibilities and characteristics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005szf

10 Summary and Conclusion from: A Theory of Musical Narrative
Abstract: In the preceding pages, I have elaborated and illustrated a theory of musical narrative that is both grounded in principles applicable to narrative media in general and organized around discourses that are specifically musical. In place of the subtle and not-so-subtle distortions arising from a literature-based approach to narrative, this book reconstitutes the fundamentals of narrative theory in terms of Liszkian transvaluation, recognizing that the shifting hierarchical organization of our various “cultures”—psychic, interpersonal, social—lies at the heart of our subject.

5 The Making of a Myth: from: The War of 1948
Author(s) Greenblum Dror
Abstract: Between 1948 and 1967 the story of Kfar Etzion, one of the best-known cases of heroism in Israel’s War of Independence, became the defining myth in religious Zionism. No other story or single event in the history of religious Zionism has attained such mythical proportions and had so much influence on religious Zionists. The essence of religious-Zionist belief, how to live a life of purity and holiness and how to die a hero’s death, all for the sanctification of God’s name ( kiddush ha-shem) is an integral part of this story.

Epilogue: from: The War of 1948
Author(s) Caplan Neil
Abstract: The chapters in this volume have discussed various Israeli and Palestinian approaches to, and perceptions of, 1948 commonly represented in historiography, literature, films, and other public realms of culture and knowledge. In presenting their case studies, the authors have made valuable contributions to a field increasingly marked by perceptive interpretations of the nature and fluctuating trends among Israelis and Palestinians as they remember and narrate their respective histories.

Book Title: Cosmopolitanism and Place- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Stuhr John J.
Abstract: Addressing perspectives about who "we" are, the importance of place and home, and the many differences that still separate individuals, this volume reimagines cosmopolitanism in light of our differences, including the different places we all inhabit and the many places where we do not feel at home. Beginning with the two-part recognition that the world is a smaller place and that it is indeed many worlds, Cosmopolitanism and Place critically explores what it means to assert that all people are citizens of the world, everywhere in the world, as well as persons bounded by a universal and shared morality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005th6

Introduction from: Cosmopolitanism and Place
Abstract: We live in an increasingly interconnected world. it is a world of global manufacturing and trade, international travel and almost instant communication, shared climate change and epidemics, and far-flung wars and campaigns of terror. and it is a world of different languages, different narratives, different standards of living. nations and their borders and boundaries mark us differently as citizens or tourists or immigrants or refugees or homeless.

Introduction from: Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Wahman Jessica
Abstract: The chapters in this first part confront key topics to be addressed by a contemporary cosmopolitanism. All suggest that cosmopolitanism is an orientation worth considering, and some argue explicitly in favor of the position. Many of the authors draw our attention to an increasingly globalized world and suggest this is a prominent reason for taking cosmopolitanism seriously. Our growing access to and consistent impact on one another, they argue, increase our awareness of human connectedness, rendering the possibility of entirely localized commitments both rationally untenable and ethically irresponsible. At the same time, each author claims that a feasible cosmopolitanism, despite

5 Pragmatism and the Challenge of a Cosmopolitan Aesthetics: from: Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Innis Robert E.
Abstract: In his Art Without Borders: A Philosophical Exploration of Art and Humanity, Ben-Ami Scharfstein, writing against the background of his deeply pragmaticThe Dilemma of Context, contends, “Art is not a single problem, nor does it have a single solution, rational or mystical.”¹ Art’s multiple contexts, and types of contexts, are, he argues, the sources of this radical plurality, which characterizes thought itself. In this, art mirrors life itself. Nevertheless, in spite of the admitted plurality, he issues a call for an “open aesthetics” and an “aesthetic pluralism” and asks, “Is there really an aesthetics that cuts across all human

6 Toward a Politics of Cohabitation: from: Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Colapietro Vincent
Abstract: This chapter is first and foremost a reflection on place, precisely as a verb—that is, not as an antecedently fixed container or enclosure, but as a historically evolved and evolving set of processes and practices. While unavoidably abstract in some respects, it is pointedly political and, to a less extent, polemical. For I am taking this occasion to urge a shift from a politics of occupation (including dwelling) to one of cohabitation, based on a reconstructed self-understanding of ourselves as wayfarersin a sense to be defined later. I am also urging a shift in focus from the cosmos

8 America and Cosmopolitan Responsibility: from: Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Edmonds Jeff
Abstract: The conversations on cosmopolitanism rise out of the practical problems of a world that is increasingly mobile, changing, and intimate. Cosmopolitanism is a lived condition—the name of a problem that perhaps cannot

9 Heidegger and Derrida: from: The Essential Caputo
Abstract: I want to undertake here a double-reading of Martin Heidegger and Jacques Derrida. I do not intend a comparison, in any usual sense. Rather I want to let the texts of Heidegger and Derrida mingle with each other to the point of infiltrating and subverting each other. I want first to let Derrida insinuate his way into Heidegger and then, in a return movement, to let Heidegger insinuate his way into Derrida. Heidegger and Derrida: by that I do not intend an Aufhebung but rather a double-cross in which each, taking the side of the other, is co-opted and corrupted

22 “Lazarus, Come Out”: from: The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Once, during the time that Jesus was using Bethany as a base of operations, staying with his close friends Mary and Martha, he had left town for a short spell when Lazarus, the brother of Mary and Martha, became ill. The two sisters, whom Jesus loved, sent him a message to return at once. By the time Jesus got back, however, he found that Lazarus had been dead for four days. At his approach to Bethany, Martha had gone out to meet him on the road into town and as much as rebuked him for having been away at this

3 TRANSFORMATIVE LINES OF FLIGHT: from: Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) FRIEDMAN LYAT
Abstract: Simone de Beauvoir’s The Second Sexposes a challenge: Because “humanity is male, and man defines woman, not in herself, but in relation to himself,” then, we must ask, Can women define themselves, in themselves, without falling into the trap set up by such prior definitions.¹ Can one overcome dyads such as male–female, subject–object, culture–nature in order to demarcate difference in non-negating terms? Can differences be understood without reimposing opposites? It is a simple challenge, and yet complex, as de Beauvoir notes:

4 CRAFTING CONTINGENCY from: Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) McCANN RACHEL
Abstract: Thirteen years into the twenty-first century, much of the promise of the postmodern era has begun to materialize for the field of architecture. Technology has caught up with imagination, and our tolerance for evanescence, contingency, and multiplicity has found consonances in a world of informatics and bioengineering that transgress old boundaries of form, order, and identity. In the field of architecture, the chaotic character of earlier decades (when we drew sharp angles with dissonant relationships to show that we were no longer seeking a singular truth) is morphing into an appreciation and understanding of deep pattern. In contrast to the

18 WHAT IS FEMINIST PHENOMENOLOGY? from: Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) STOLLER SILVIA
Abstract: The question “What is feminist phenomenology?” is not as easily answered as it might first seem. To some extent, this has to do with the term itself, since in the academic field two different terms are regularly used to designate more or less the same area: “feminist phenomenology” and “phenomenological feminism.” Strictly speaking, feminist phenomenology is a feminist-oriented phenomenology, whereas phenomenological feminism can be characterized as a phenomenologically oriented feminism. In her early essay “Sexual Ideology and Phenomenological Description,” Judith Butler speaks of “phenomenological feminism,” whereas in her encyclopedia article Dorothea Olkowski speaks of “phenomenologically-oriented feminists” and of “feminist phenomenologists”

Book Title: Self-Understanding and Lifeworld-Basic Traits of a Phenomenological Hermeneutics
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): RAYMAN JOSHUA
Abstract: What are the foundations of human self-understanding and the value of responsible philosophical questioning? Focusing on Heidegger's early work on facticity, historicity, and the phenomenological hermeneutics of factical-historical life, Hans-Helmuth Gander develops an idea of understanding that reflects our connection with the world and other, and thus invites deep consideration of phenomenology, hermeneutics, and deconstruction. He draws usefully on Husserl's phenomenology and provides grounds for exchange with Descartes, Dilthey, Nietzsche, Gadamer, Ricoeur, and Foucault. On the way to developing a contemporary hermeneutical philosophy, Gander clarifies the human relation to self in and through conversation with Heidegger's early hermeneutics. Questions about reading and writing then follow as these are the very actions that structure human self-understanding and world understanding.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005w6h

CHAPTER TWO ON LIFE IN LIFEWORLDS: from: Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: The understanding of reality brought into our approach orients itself to that which has long since become indigenous to philosophy in the concept of the lifeworld.¹ If Gadamer’s dictum applies, that a statement is “always an answer,”² the enormous resonance that this coinage has—in such a way that the concept after all became, without further ado, a part of our everyday and common language—offers a material indication of a constellation of problems in the air, as it were, and focusing itself in it as in a burning lens.³

4 The Virgin Queen and the English Nation from: The Spirits of Crossbones Graveyard
Abstract: Redcross Way, the location of our modern ritual, is home to the spirits of a flock of dead prostitutes who are buried in land that lies somewhere between a modern London transport system and an Anglican cathedral. Communing with these spirits and with the London of old—nay, with the Southwark of old—we have a contemporary shaman, who reminds us that we stand before a “singlewomen’s graveyard,” although in truth it is a much later site than the one he refers to in the account of the Tudor chronicler and lay cartographer John Stow. And attending these memorials of

Book Title: Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment-Ancillae Vitae
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Gasché Rodolphe
Abstract: As one of the most respected voices of Continental philosophy today, Rodolphe Gasché pulls together Aristotle's conception of rhetoric, Martin Heidegger's debate with theory, and Hannah Arendt's conception of judgment in a single work on the centrality of these themes as fundamental to human flourishing in public and political life. Gasché's readings address the distinctively human space of the public square and the actions that occur there, and his valorization of persuasion, reflection, and judgment reveals new insight into how the philosophical tradition distinguishes thinking from other faculties of the human mind.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005wvb

INTRODUCTION from: Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment
Abstract: Each of the three sections of this book—on persuasion in Aristotle, reflection ( Besinnung) in Martin Heidegger, and judgment in Hannah Arendt—comes with its own introduction. Each section can, thus, be read on its own and without regard for the order in which it is presented. Yet, apart from the fact that the order in which these studies follow one another is chronological, the essays, though they do not explicitly build upon or derive from one another, are interrelated in many ways and, ultimately, pursue one question, one major concern. These prefatory remarks, which I keep to a minimum,

[PART I Introduction] from: Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment
Abstract: IN ARISTOTLE SCHOLARSHIP, the Stagirite’s treatise on rhetoric has undergone a peculiar treatment. Not only is it one of the philosopher’s most neglected works, but this neglect has also taken peculiar forms. When it is taken seriously at all, the Rhetoricis considered only after all the other works of the philosopher have been dealt with. Commentators’ uneasiness with the work has been so great that the place usually reserved for it is, once respect has been paid to all of Aristotle’s great works, at the end of their commentaries, in the shape of an acknowledgment, an endnote, as it

[PART II Introduction] from: Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment
Abstract: IF SOMETHING LIKE thought were possible, that is, if thought would indeed come to pass in philosophical reflection ( Besinnung), in an inquiry that is entirely directed toward making thought occur, then for such thought, Heidegger submits inBesinnung, “it would not be essential whether it succeeds in making an observation about something hitherto unknown, [and] whether something conducive to ‘life’ can be determined.”¹ By contrast, what is essential to thought, as Heidegger understands it, is exclusively whether within it Being itself has come properly into its own (sich er-eignet) and, in the same stroke, has thus abysmally unsettled metaphysical, that

6 BEYOND THEORY: from: Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment
Abstract: AT FIRST SIGHT, THE LECTURE from 1953 on “Science and Reflection” is above all concerned with the modern sciences.¹ As “the theory of the real,” they have shaped our sense of reality. But if this state of affairs requires a reflection, or rather a Besinnung, it is because something is already at work in the sciences, which, in spite of what I will call the “un-world” to which they have given rise, announces a new age of the world: an age that, in distinction from the sciences’ planetary expansion, would be one of the “world” itself.² It is in this

INTRODUCTION: from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Thomas Dominic
Abstract: Paris, November 13, 2015 . . . one hundred and thirty dead and almost four hundred injured . . . Earlier, in January 2015, French prime minister Manuel Valls had used the word war, a word he has since repeated on multiple occasions along with French president François Hollande as a way of describing the November attacks: “What I want to say to the French people, is that France is at war. What happened was a systematically organized act of war.”² A few days later, on November 16, speaking in Versailles before a joint session of parliament, François Hollande declared

2 WHEN A (WAR) MEMORY HIDES ANOTHER (COLONIAL) MEMORY from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Stora Benjamin
Abstract: In a book I published in 1991, La gangrène et l’oubli,¹ I analyzed how a number of subtle lies and repressions, how denial and memory gaps, from across the Mediterranean, worked together to hide and distort the history of the Algerian War. Today, the memory of that war has surged to the fore massively, in both Algerian and French socie ties. However, behind that war hides another, even bigger piece of history, that of colonization. That “block” of history remains imposing and almost unmoving, precisely at the origin of the Algerian War; and there is still much to be explored

4 REDUCING THE REPUBLIC’S NATIVE TO THE BODY from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Guénif-Souilamas Nacira
Abstract: The days following decolonization must have surely been triumphant. At least that is what third worldism and the promises of development for all in the South and reformist unionism in a democratic world in the North would have had you believe. But these positions did not take into consideration the rush to forget it all—since it could not be erased—as soon as in de pendence was declared. Amnesia and disillusionment were introduced into our world, which was fashioned by the dynamics of the post-national, the postindustrial, and the postcolonial. Far from stopping at the borders, these dynamics crossed

6 MEMORY WARS: from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Veyrat-Masson Isabelle
Abstract: The very idea of “memory wars” has triggered considerable controversy, especially when it is considered in a “memorial” temporality that begins with the centennial of the French Revolution in 1889 (and on the eve of the “Dreyfus affair”), spans the twentieth century, and engages with a new century that finds itself at the intersection of several “memory wars.” A trace of this “omnipresence in the present day” was evident in President Nicolas Sarkozy’s speeches and ongoing “dialogue” with the past: from the “rebels of 1917” to the “memory of Vichy,” and passing by way of the “speeches” in Dakar and

9 THE REPUBLIC, COLONIZATION, AND BEYOND . . . from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Wieviorka Michel
Abstract: France was a colonial power well before becoming a republic, and it remained so in the periods separating the five republics that it conceived for itself. Only with the First Republic (1792–1804) can one begin to associate the two terms, republicandcolonization, and that association was not subsequently stable, since the Second Republic was not established until February 25, 1848, ceding its place shortly thereafter to the Second Empire in 1852, which the Third Republic, a zealous promoter of colonial expansion, replaced in 1870. The Third Republic was then replaced by Pétain’s France in 1940, to which the

11 THE BANLIEUES AS A COLONIAL THEATER, OR THE COLONIAL FRACTURE IN DISADVANTAGED NEIGHBORHOODS from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Lapeyronnie Didier
Abstract: Over the past twenty years, life in disadvantaged neighborhoods or banlieueshousing projects has under gone a number of changes. These have included the implementation of protectionist, but isolationist, measures and efforts aimed at restoring “social order” through a process of group segmentation. Communication across gender lines in these neighborhoods has diminished, identities have become increasingly ethnicized, and the importance of religion has been amplified. Today’s France is witnessing the creation of ghettos, neighborhoods populated by what are effectively second-class citizens, and who have become increasingly withdrawn into their own communities as a reaction to their lack of integration.

14 RETHINKING POLITICS IN THE FRENCH OVERSEAS DEPARTMENTS from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Dahomay Jacky
Abstract: In 2009, the four French overseas Départements et régions d’outre mer (Overseas departments and regions, DROMs)—Martinique, Guadeloupe, Guiana, and Réunion—were shaken by protests initiated by various social movements. Guadeloupe was particularly affected. A fifth DROM was added during the same period: Mayotte. The news brought images of the tumult coursing through these small French territories scattered in the Americas and Indian Ocean to audiences in mainland France. How can we begin to explain the fact that conflicts that began in Guadeloupe eventually spread to other overseas departments? What gave rise to them? Does France have a prob lem

15 “RACE,” ETHNICIZATION, AND DISCRIMINATION: from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Simon Patrick
Abstract: In 1950, the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO), based in Paris, convened an assembly of eminent scholars to discuss the issue of “race.” Following the Universal Declaration of Human Rights (1948), the time had come to develop a strategy aimed at ending racism. The options were eitherto discredit the very concept of race and prohibit the use of the word or to preserve its scientific validity (specifically in classifications to describe human populations), but strip it of its hierarchizing value as a means of addressing, and quelling, potential uses for segregation and extermination. Scholars were divided

19 THE POSTCOLONIAL CHALLENGES OF TEACHING HISTORY: from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Falaize Benoît
Abstract: When France’s imperial period came to an end and in light of the trauma of losing Indochina and Algeria, French schools in mainland France continued to teach a very traditional history. The curriculum, which emphasized the glorious feats of France’s past, was a legacy from Ernest Lavisse and de Malet and Isaac. A monolithic narrative proudly featured France’s Enlightenment thinkers, whose ideas had been spread throughout the world, notably in the colonies. Meanwhile, the French school system was also affected by the Trente Glorieuses , the postwar period of economic and social growth in French society. The shock of decolonization

21 FROM SLAVERY TO THE POSTCOLONIAL from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Weil Patrick
Abstract: Patrick Weil: I became interested in these questions while conducting research. After publishing La France et sesétrangers, which was based on my doctoral dissertation on immigration policy since 1938, I began to examine the law of November 2, 1945, which has been very important in immigration policy, and which still continues to organize thinking on French policies on these issues.¹ My earlier research had dealt mainly with the period between 1974 and 1986. With this new project, I wanted to reconstruct the

25 COULD ISLAMOPHOBIA BE THE START OF A NEW IDENTITY-BASED BOND IN FRANCE? from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Benzine Rachid
Abstract: Are the majority of French people afraid of Islam? A number of opinion polls over the past de cade would appear to suggest as much, just as the rise in popularity of the Front National (a populist party that has fed on the fear of foreigners since its creation in 1972) during recent regional elections also seems to confirm (27 percent of votes in December 2015). However, the French are not necessarily more mistrustful of Muslims than are the Italians, Polish, Spanish, Dutch, Germans, or the British. The French context must be understood in historical terms that are not merely

27 CULTURAL ORIENTALIZATION OR POLITICAL OCCIDENTALISM? from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Lebourg Nicolas
Abstract: The Front National, which reached new heights in popularity in the first round of regional elections in December 2015, has developed a strategy, since 2010, around exposing Islamization, which it claims is inherent to multicultural society. Meanwhile, Islamophobia cannot be limited to members of the Front National, and it has certainly not replaced antisemitism. Unburdened from ideological partisanship, antisemitism has become a product of cultural consumption. The move to the political right in thinking about such questions has created a fragmented image of a French society in need of an authoritarian response. It has revitalized the fear of otherness in

28 FACES OF THE FRONT NATIONAL (1972–2015) from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Crépon Sylvain
Abstract: After forty years at the head of the Front National, Jean-Marie Le Pen (finally) passed the baton on January 11, 2011. The eighty-three-year-old leader, who had participated in just about every shift on the French farright since the 1950s, entrusted his party to his youngest daughter, Marine. Beyond the fact the she bore her father’s name (not irrelevant in a party where the leader had always embodied its very essence), Marine received massive support during an internal primary—67.65 percent—anunprece dented level of support in the FN, in a race which had pitted her against Bruno Gollnisch.

29 INFILTRATION OF LIQUID POPULISM from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Liogier Raphaël
Abstract: The overused notion of “populism” should not be conflated with the term bandied about by politicians who say what they think voters want to hear. Nor is populism related to popular preoccupations, those of artisans, fishermen, workers, hunters, farmers, engineers, doctors, the rich, or the poor. In the enthusiasm surrounding populism, concrete categories within the population—professions, at times contradictory interests, class distinctions—tend to be elided over in favor of a fiction of an all encompassing, omnipresent, and omniscient people, who are believed to have a single soul and unified identity. Populists can be either Marxist, like Stalin, or

30 NANORACISM AND THE FORCE OF EMPTINESS from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Mbembe Achille
Abstract: At first glance, our era appears to have discovered its truth. Liberated from its inhibitions, it can now bare itself, naked. It can let its masks fall and shed its costumes. The era of repression (supposing there ever really was one) has given way to an era of disinhibition—but at what price, for whom, and how long will it last? Indeed, in the salty marshes of this nascent century, there is nothing left to hide. All taboos have been lifted; all interdictions banished. Every thing is today transparent, and thus also fully accomplished. The water tank is almost full

32 CLOSING BORDERS AGAINST FEAR: from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Rodier Claire
Abstract: In October 2015, Frontex, the European Agency for the Management of Operational Cooperation at the External Borders of the Member States of the European Union, announced that 710,000 migrants had illegally crossed onto European soil during the first nine months of the year. This represented a sharp rise, given that it had announced in early June 2015 having recorded approximately 100,000 illegal crossings since the month of January, compared with 40,000 over the same period in 2014. These numbers fed a climate of panic that had emerged a few months earlier in Europe following two devastating shipwrecks off the Sicilian

Book Title: The Year's Work in Nerds, Wonks, and Neocons- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): SCHREIER BENJAMIN
Abstract: What happens when math nerds, band and theater geeks, goths, sci-fi fanatics, Young Republican debate poindexters, techies, Trekkies, D&D players, wallflowers, bookworms, and RPG players grow up? And what can they tell us about the life of the mind in the contemporary United States? With #GamerGate in the national news, shows like The Big Bang Theory on ever-increasing numbers of screens, and Peter Orzsag and Paul Ryan on magazine covers, it is clear that nerds, policy wonks, and neoconservatives play a major role in today's popular culture in America. The Year's Work in Nerds, Wonks, and Neocons delves into subcultures of intellectual history to explore their influence on contemporary American intellectual life. Not limiting themselves to describing how individuals are depicted, the authors consider the intellectual endeavors these depictions have come to represent, exploring many models and practices of learnedness, reflection, knowledge production, and opinion in the contemporary world. As teachers, researchers, and university scholars continue to struggle for mainstream visibility, this book illuminates the other forms of intellectual excitement that have emerged alongside them and found ways to survive and even thrive in the face of dismissal or contempt.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt20060h2

2 SURFACE WORSHIP, SUPER-PUBLIC INTELLECTUALS, AND THE SUSPICIOUSLY COMMON READER from: The Year's Work in Nerds, Wonks, and Neocons
Author(s) MAXWELL WILLIAM J.
Abstract: Young nerds may rule at last, as the title of this book implies, but their public intellectual moms and dads have never felt less regal. By this I don’t mean, Richard A. Posner–style, that it’s all been downhill for such intellectuals practically since Wilhelm von Humboldt forced seminars, laboratories, and departments on the learned gentlemen of Prussia. At the start of his millennial plaint Public Intellectuals: A Study of Decline(2001), Posner defines his subject as “academics’ writing outside their field,” and attributes the regular failures of professors courting a general readership to the successes of academic freedom and

7 THE TURING TEST AND OTHER LOVE SONGS from: The Year's Work in Nerds, Wonks, and Neocons
Author(s) GLAVEY BRIAN
Abstract: In the introduction to The Most Human Human: What Artificial Intelligence Teaches Us about Being Alive, Brian Christian relates an embarrassing anecdote about being alive and intelligent. Looking for love in all the wrong places, a psychologist and author named Robert Epstein finds himself entangled in a long-distance relationship with a woman he met through an online dating service. Ivana lived thousands of miles away and her English was spotty, but the two spark a connection and begin an extended correspondence nonetheless. It is only after several months of evasive and oddball answers to his requests to meet in person,

8 SEX AND THE SINGLE NERD: from: The Year's Work in Nerds, Wonks, and Neocons
Author(s) ROOF JUDITH
Abstract: In the latter half of the nineteenth century, Sir Francis Galton, halfcousin of Charles Darwin and most remembered for his advocacy of eugenics (he coined the term), worked to define scientifically the phenomenon of genius. Using surveys and developing statistical methods as the basis for his anthropometric studies, Galton published Hereditary Geniusin 1869. In a 1874 lecture, “On Men in Science, Their Nature and Their Nurture,” Galton queried, “What then are the conditions of nature, and the various circumstances and conditions of life,—which I include under the general name of nurture,—which have selected that one and left

12 THE FAN AS PUBLIC INTELLECTUAL IN “RACEFAIL ’09” from: The Year's Work in Nerds, Wonks, and Neocons
Author(s) CARROLL SIOBHAN
Abstract: “All men are intellectuals,” Gramsci famously declared, “but not all men have in society the function of intellectuals.”¹ For scholars writing in the wake of Edward Said’s influential Representations of the Intellectual, that function has mainly been to serve as a “critical commentator addressing a nonspecialist audience on matters of broad public concern.”² While writers on public intellectualism acknowledge that university credentials are not a prerequisite for this kind of enterprise, for the most part their discussions describe a “person trained in a particular discipline . . . who is on the faculty of a college or university.”³ While such

Introduction from: Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Walke Anika
Abstract: SINCE THE FALL of the Iron Curtain in the late 1980s, the movement of people is a central topic of concern, among the citizenry, among politicians, and among scholars in Central and Eastern Europe (CEE) and the former Soviet Union. The intense debate about people’s ability to move and the transfer of goods and ideas and about ways to deal with unregulated migration reflects a complex web of movements and their assigned meanings. Recent scholarship on the movement of people in this region largely uses and expands on sociological and political science frameworks, focusing on pressing problems of integration and

CHAPTER 6 Sex at the Border: from: Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Stauter-Halsted Keely
Abstract: THE TURN OF the twentieth century was a time of nearly constant human movement out of Eastern Europe. A huge portion of the population of the Polish lands left home during the decades leading up to World War I, with some 8 percent of ethnic Poles crossing international boundaries for seasonal or long-term work.¹ This heightened mobility brought with it chaos, corruption, and anxiety about the fate of loved ones across the sea.² Those left behind reserved special concern for the fortunes of single women traveling abroad on their own.³ Families worried about the vulnerabilities young women suffered during the

CHAPTER 7 Evacuation as Migration: from: Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Moch Leslie Page
Abstract: WE LIVE IN an age when large undertakings by states are likely to inspire suspicion if not outright hostility, when the fruits of previous state endeavors wither for lack of commitment to their continuation, and when corporate and other private enterprises reap the whirlwind of profit and power from state retrenchment. The only exceptions to these trends might be war and disaster relief, though states increasingly are privatizing and outsourcing war making, and their relief efforts often take second place to those of nongovernmental organizations (NGOs) or international bodies.

CHAPTER 8 Far From Home: from: Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Ward Christopher J.
Abstract: THIS CHAPTER EXPLORES the efforts of the Soviet administration, particularly members of the Komsomol (the USSR Young Communist League) and the USSR Ministry of Transport Construction, to complete the Baikal-Amur Mainline Railway (BAM) by propagandizing the mainline among the peoples of the Soviet Union’s allies and through the use of foreign labor in the area in which the railway was being constructed, which is known as the BAM Zone.⁴ In the eyes of the project’s managers, this accomplishment would serve as a catalyst in increasing trade between the European USSR and the Pacific Rim, particularly with Japan, and thus help

CHAPTER 9 Traumatic Mobility: from: Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Blake Elizabeth
Abstract: THE VARIOUS LABELS deportees,exiles, andSybiracy(Siberians) do not adequately express the violent and traumatic dislocation experienced by generations of nineteenth-century Polish revolutionaries, when they were arrested, imprisoned in citadels, and forced to march, often in shackles, across vast expanses of the Russian Empire as part of the process of being relocated to prisons and fortresses in a land governed by officials speaking another tongue.¹ Polish exiles from theepoka miêdzypowstaniowa(inter-revolutionary epoch), sentenced between the 1830–1831 November Uprising and the 1863 January Uprising in the Congress Kingdom of Poland, comprised a particularly mobile group ofSybiracy, since

Introduction from: Music and Embodied Cognition
Abstract: Like many music students, I spent a good deal of my undergraduate and graduate coursework in music theory focusing on musical structure and making more or less factual observations about how the various elements of music fit together in particular works and styles. Since I enjoyed this kind of study, for my doctoral thesis I planned to take the same approach in analyzing the music of Debussy. But then one day the stove in my apartment stopped working, the repairman came over, and we started chatting. He asked if I was a student up at the college, and I said

IV. CONCLUSIÓN from: Novelas españolas ambientadas en Italia
Abstract: Se ha dicho de estas novelas que la vida de sus personajes es sólo un pretexto para mostrar el Renacimiento italiano, que se convierte en el verdadero protagonista. En Emilio Castelar, la cita de Francisco Blanco García pretende evidenciar la poca calidad dramática de la novela de Fra Filippo Lippi, pues las aventuras del fraile carmelita se pierden en largas descripciones y un sinfín de reseñas históricas y literarias. La interpretación es diferente en Mujica Lainez. La crítica valora el hecho de que el ambiente renacentista deBomarzose haya personalizado en un personaje con entidad propia.

INTRODUCTION from: Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Jonsson-Skradol Natalia
Abstract: Soviet cultural policy in Eastern Europe after World War II has been the topic of many articles, monographs and dissertations since the initial post-war years. The growth or decline of interest in the subject has often been determined by the political and social context of a specific moment, with the research focus shifting accordingly. The novelty of the theme and the extent of transformations in the European political and cultural sphere spurred the earliest studies, in which researchers focused on ‘the scope and scale of oppression and uniformity behind the “Iron Curtain,” as did later scholars working on the immediate

Chapter Four FROM LITERATURE CENSORED BY POETS TO LITERATURE CENSORED BY THE PARTY: from: Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Janáček Pavel
Abstract: On 22 October 1948 members of what was called the Interim Board of Editors (Prozatímní ediční rada) convened at the Ministry of Information on Stalinova třída (Stalin Avenue) in Prague. This was an advisory body to the Ministry of Information of Czechoslovakia, which for three years, since autumn 1945, had been assessing Czech (not Slovak, for there were different print regulations in place in the eastern part of Czechoslovakia) publishers’ plans and recommending to the ministry whether or not to allow the publication of particular titles. It would also propose alterations to manuscripts on the basis of internal reviews, judging

Chapter Nine STALINISM’S IMPERIAL FIGURE: from: Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Robinson Benjamin
Abstract: The Ara Pacis Augustae, the great altar consecrated to the Augustan Pax Romana, bears a fresco of the goddess Pax with Plutos, the child god of wealth, nursing on her arm, the fruit of plenty on her lap, a sheep and cow grazing at her feet and sprays of wheat and poppies behind her. Her sisters, Justice and Good Order, sit mounted on animals to either side of her.¹ Originally, the Latin paxdid not signify peace, as personified by the Greek Eirene, but a pact or treaty without any special cultic standing.² After defeating Antony at Actium in 31

Book Title: Holocaust Public Memory in Postcommunist Romania- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Florian Alexandru
Abstract: How is the Holocaust remembered in Romania since the fall of communism? Alexandru Florian and an international group of contributors unveil how and why Romania, a place where large segments of the Jewish and Roma populations perished, still fails to address its recent past. These essays focus on the roles of government and public actors that choose to promote, construct, defend, or contest the memory of the Holocaust, as well as the tools-the press, the media, monuments, and commemorations-that create public memory. Coming from a variety of perspectives, these essays provide a compelling view of what memories exist, how they are sustained, how they can be distorted, and how public remembrance of the Holocaust can be encouraged in Romanian society today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2050vp3

Chapter Seven ION ANTONESCU’S IMAGE IN POSTCOMMUNIST HISTORIOGRAPHY from: Holocaust Public Memory in Postcommunist Romania
Author(s) Cazan Marius
Abstract: Ion Antonescu was the leader of the Romanian state from September 1940 to August 1944. From September 1940 to January 1941 he shared power with the far-right Legionary Movement in what was called the National Legionary State. The collaboration between Antonescu and the legionaries did not last, and conflicts between the two sides became frequent as the abuses of the legionaries were increasingly apparent. In January 1941 Antonescu crushed the attempt of the former government partners to oust him, and, counting on his slightly unclear agreement with Hitler, managed to stay in power. As head of government, he developed a

CHAPTER ONE Hebrew Bible Accounts from: Eve and Adam
Abstract: No other text has affected women in the Western world as much as that found in the opening chapters of Genesis. The biblical story of the first man and woman became for many readers a blueprint for relationships between all men and women. Yet in spite of the wide-ranging influence of Genesis 1-3, there is surprisingly little agreement among readers concerning what these chapters actually say about such relationships. Do they present a message of subordination

4 Between Theodicy and Despair from: Levinas and the Trauma of Responsibility
Abstract: Levinas’s critique of narrative and the conception of the narrating subject that underlies it leads him to the issue of how time is synchronized in the philosophy of history, where the process of abstraction from the singular other is most prominent. By interpreting the significance of disparate events and integrating them into a coherent account, the disciplinary approaches of history typically assume a formal conception of time, in which a linear chronology can be represented by consciousness. In other words, past events are treated as intentional objects. This synchronization of time entails generalizing from people’s experiences, selectively emphasizing certain elements

5 The Sobering Up of Oedipus from: Levinas and the Trauma of Responsibility
Abstract: In enemies of the People, a documentary film about the Cambodian genocide under the Khmer Rouge, the former leader known as Brother Number Two tells his subordinates, who tortured and executed political prisoners: “You did not have any intention, therefore you did not commit any sin.”¹ Although we may well reject the claim that these agents of violence remained morally innocent, the idea that responsibility depends upon intentions dominates the moral and legal imaginary of modern Western thought. It is a claim that Levinas associates with the Greek tradition, and one that he insistently challenges. However, the undermining of this

6 Anxieties of Incarnation from: Levinas and the Trauma of Responsibility
Abstract: A year after Hitler came to power in Germany, Levinas published a short essay titled “Some Thoughts on the Philosophy of Hitlerism,” which delineates the struggle between two movements within European thought: liberalism and Hitlerism. Somewhat surprisingly, Levinas treats Hitlerism as a philosophy, if a “simplistic” one. He interprets it as “the primary attitude of a soul faced with the whole of the real and its own destiny” (PH 13). Certainly Hitlerism was or is a form of ideology, but why should Levinas grace it with the name of what has systematically opposed dogmatism? Yet Levinas insists that the “awakening

INTRODUCCIÓN from: Celebrar la nación
Abstract: Cuando se habla del final de la Segunda República —algo que normalmente se hace en términos de fracaso— entre las múltiples explicaciones que se han propuesto, tanto económicas, como sociales, políticas o militares, uno de los argumentos que se ha utilizado de forma recurrente ha sido el de la escasa interiorización del republicanismo dentro de la sociedad española¹. Este argumento de que España fue una república sin republicanos y de que quienes habían votado por este régimen de gobierno el 12 de abril de 1931 lo habían hecho sin saber lo que hacían había sido ya expuesto a los pocos

Capítulo 2 CONMEMORACIONES OFICIALES, CONMEMORACIONES OFICIOSAS Y OTROS USOS POLÍTICOS DEL ESPACIO PÚBLICO DURANTE LA SEGUNDA REPÚBLICA from: Celebrar la nación
Abstract: La esfera pública, cuyo surgimiento tanto conceptual como sociológico se produce en el arranque del Siglo de las Luces, hacía referencia —para los pensadores de entonces— a lo universal en oposición a lo particular o familiar, que pertenecería a la esfera de lo privado. Esta esfera pública, que comenzó siendo una ampliación de la República de las Letras del siglo xviii, era el espacio en el que los intelectuales —únicos a los que inicialmente se les confirió la potestad para tomar parte en esta— discutían libremente, es decir, sin la supervisión del rey o de la Iglesia, sobre cuestiones relacionadas

Capítulo 9 ESPAÑA, LA CIVILIZACIÓN Y LA RAZA, LA FIESTA DEL DOCE DE OCTUBRE from: Celebrar la nación
Abstract: En memoria de la audaz empresa marítima encabezada por Cristóbal Colón, cuyo resultado fue —aunque el propio Colón muriera sin saberlo— el descubrimiento del continente americano, el Doce de Octubre fue establecido como fiesta nacional cuando se cumplía el cuarto centenario del primer avistamiento de tierras americanas, en 1892, como parte de las celebraciones oficiales y académicas que con tal motivo se llevaron a cabo en Madrid y Huelva. Inspirada inicialmente por un espíritu regeneracionista, el impulso de esta primera celebración se vio pronto frenado a resultas de las guerras con Cuba, que concluirían en 1898 con la pérdida definitiva

CONCLUSIONES from: Celebrar la nación
Abstract: Las conmemoraciones oficiales establecidas por el Estado republicano sirvieron, como había ocurrido con las implantadas durante la Restauración y como ocurriría unos años más tarde con las creadas por la dictadura franquista, como importantes correas de transmisión de culturas políticas. Sin embargo, a diferencia de lo ocurrido inmediatamente antes y después de 1931-1936, las culturas políticas republicanas no se impusieron a la sociedad como una religión política, auspiciada por el Estado e incontestable, sino —como correspondía a una incipiente democracia parlamentaria— como una religión cívica, destinada, indudablemente, a la socialización de unas determinadas ideas, valores y sentimientos en la sociedad,

5. Subjects in Abundance from: Numinous Subjects
Abstract: ‘Abundance,’ says the sacred. A statement at once descriptive and demanding. At once restful in its placid certitude: there is abundance, now as it was in the beginning, reality is abundant; and unrelenting in its insistence: there must be many, must be more and other. The sacred refuses to be placed in the service of the singular, of the static, of the unchanging.

7. Corporeality and the Numinous from: Numinous Subjects
Abstract: To read the sacred inscriptions upon your body I must know your skin as palimpsest. With my fingertips I trace words no longer visible to the naked eye. Letters long since scraped off, or covered over with layer after layer of the tamed, acceptable, and ordinary. Steeped in the dye of the same, still the Other etchings upon your skin remain. Demand to be read. And as they are read, are they not written ever anew?

Book Title: Echoes of the Tambaran-Masculinity, history and the subject in the work of Donald F. Tuzin
Publisher: ANU E Press
Author(s): Roscoe Paul
Abstract: In the Sepik Basin of Papua New Guinea, ritual culture was dominated by the Tambaran —a male tutelary spirit that acted as a social and intellectual guardian or patron to those under its aegis as they made their way through life. To Melanesian scholarship, the cultural and psychological anthropologist, Donald F. Tuzin, was something of a Tambaran, a figure whose brilliant and fine-grained ethnographic project in the Arapesh village of Ilahita was immensely influential within and beyond New Guinea anthropology. Tuzin died in 2007, at the age of 61. In his memory, the editors of this collection commissioned a set of original and thought provoking essays from eminent and accomplished anthropologists who knew and were influenced by his work. They are echoes of the Tambaran. The anthology begins with a biographical sketch of Tuzin's life and scholarship. It is divided into four sections, each of which focuses loosely around one of his preoccupations. The first concerns warfare history, the male cult and changing masculinity, all in Melanesia. The second addresses the relationship between actor and structure. Here, the ethnographic focus momentarily shifts to the Caribbean before turning back to Papua New Guinea in essays that examine uncanny phenomena, narratives about childhood and messianic promises. The third part goes on to offer comparative and psychoanalytic perspectives on the subject in Fiji, Bali, the Amazon as well as Melanesia. Appropriately, the last section concludes with essays on Tuzin's fieldwork style and his distinctive authorial voice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt24hbjj

MASTER PLAN FOR THE OLD PORT OF MONTREAL from: Architecture, Ethics, and Technology
Author(s) ROSE PETER
Abstract: In this paper I will present the thoughts, the ideas, of a practising architect rather than those of a theoretician or an architectural historian, concerning a project on which I have worked for several years – the design of a master plan for the Vieux Port de Montréal.¹

POUR QUE LA VIE AIT LIEU (FRAGMENTS) from: Architecture, Ethics, and Technology
Author(s) MADEC PHILIPPE
Abstract: Nos pères, eux, étaient persuadés de trouver les fondements de l’architecture dans l’activité de l’architecte, dans le projet et ses effets: les textes, les dessins et les bâtiments.

“THE PROBLEM WITH THE ARCHITECT AS WRITER…”: from: Architecture, Ethics, and Technology
Author(s) CHI LILY
Abstract: What can an architect mean when he writes of his own discipline that “in order to be significant, architecture must be forgotten?” The author of A Scientific Autobiography makes this assertion repeatedly. Indeed, he admits, “Forgetting Architecture comes to mind as a more appropriate title for this book, since while I may talk about a school, a cemetery, a theater, it is more correct to say that I talk about life, death, imagination.”

Book Title: Comics and Narration- Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): Miller Ann
Abstract: This book is the follow-up to Thierry Groensteen's ground-breaking The System of Comics, in which the leading French-language comics theorist set out to investigate how the medium functions, introducing the principle of iconic solidarity, and showing the systems that underlie the articulation between panels at three levels: page layout, linear sequence, and nonsequential links woven through the comic book as a whole. He now develops that analysis further, using examples from a very wide range of comics, including the work of American artists such as Chris Ware and Robert Crumb. He tests out his theoretical framework by bringing it up against cases that challenge it, such as abstract comics, digital comics and sh?jo manga, and offers insightful reflections on these innovations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt24hvcv

TRANSLATOR’S FOREWORD from: Comics and Narration
Abstract: Bande dessinée et narration: Système de la bande dessinée 2,¹ published in the original French in 2011, is the long-awaited follow-up to Thierry Groensteen’s seminalSystème de la bande dessinée, written in 1999,² in which he embarked on the project of defining the fundamental resources deployed by comics for the production of meaning and aesthetic effects. By making underlying systems visible, Groensteen was able to shed light on the spatial operations of layout and articulation that conditioned the activity of the reader. He now builds on and expands that analysis, refining the concepts set out inSystème 1by bringing

INTRODUCTION from: Comics and Narration
Abstract: The System of Comics, published in the original French in 1999 and in English translation in 2007, set out to theorize the foundations of the language of comics. This theory was macrosemiotic in its scope: it was not concerned with the details of single images, but with the articulation of images within the space of the page and across that of the book as a whole. The principle oficonic solidaritywas shown to be applicable to three major operations: breakdown, page layout, and braiding. The book had the further aim of describing the formal apparatus through which meaning is

CHAPTER SEVEN The Rhythms of Comics from: Comics and Narration
Abstract: Consequently, so is “music.” And since comic art is distinguished by its capacity for converting time into space,¹ the rhythmic scansion of the narrative necessarily implies certain ways of occupying space.

CHAPTER EIGHT Is Comics a Branch of Contemporary Art? from: Comics and Narration
Abstract: In this final chapter, we are going to leave the domain of semiotic or narratological analysis and move onto the terrain of sociology of art, art history, and cultural history. It would undoubtedly be worth developing the following reflections into a full-length essay. However, it seems appropriate to include them in the present volume, since, as we shall see, they will ultimately lead us back, by another route, to the question of narration.

Book Title: Desi Divas-Political Activism in South Asian American Cultural Performances
Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): Garlough Christine L.
Abstract: Desi Divas: Activism in South Asian American Cultural Performancesis the product of five years of field research with progressive activists associated with the School for Indian Languages and Cultures (SILC), South Asian Americans Leading Together (SAALT), the feminist dance collective Post Natyam, and the grassroots feminist political organization South Asian Sisters. Christine L. Garlough explores how traditional cultural forms may be critically appropriated by marginalized groups and used as rhetorical tools to promote deliberation and debate, spur understanding and connection, broaden political engagement, and advance particular social identities. Within this framework she examines how these performance activists advocate a political commitment to both justice and care, to both deliberative discussion and deeper understanding. To consider how this might happen in diasporic performance contexts, Garlough weaves together two lines of thinking. One grows from feminist theory and draws upon a core literature concerning the ethics of care. The other comes from rhetoric, philosophy, and political science literature on recognition and acknowledgment. This dual approach is used to reflect upon South Asian American women's performances that address pressing social problems related to gender inequality, immigration rights, ethnic stereotyping, hate crimes, and religious violence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt24hvm7

Chapter One Toward Acknowledgment: from: Desi Divas
Abstract: Shyamala Moorty sits on a cold, white toilet in the center of a bare stage. Her eyes move slowly across an audience that includes mainstream and South Asian American community members, war veterans, as well as university students and faculty. This diverse group has come together on a cold October night in Madison, Wisconsin, to participate in a 2005 performance called Rise.Hands shaking as she holds a newspaper, Shyamala listens to a cacophony of local and national media reports. Playing one over the other, each details the terrorist destruction of the World Trade Center in New York City and

Chapter Two Performing South Asian American Histories from: Desi Divas
Abstract: One hundred years separate these evocations of flags and founding fathers in the name of minority exclusion.¹ Taken together, however, they reveal a good deal about the central dilemmas facing South Asian American community members today. In both moments, South Asian Americans have found themselves characterized as perpetual strangers at the door of American democracy. By raising the specter of the Other and promising protection from their fearsome “foreignness,” these appeals to the majority do not recognize the legitimacy of South Asians as citizens or neighbors. This long history of discrimination against South Asian Americans, firmly rooted in colonialism and

Chapter Three National Recognition and Community Acknowledgment from: Desi Divas
Abstract: Performances at folk festivals have long encouraged community members to engage in imaginary travel, drawing attention to the tension between us/them, here/there, and then/now, while also collapsing these divides (Bauman and Sawin 1991; Kirshenblatt-Gimblett 1991). Growing out of colonial discourses of the eighteenth century, they implicitly address questions such as: what does “foreign” or “foreigner” mean? Where is home? Or, who are strangers or aliens? In this way, festivals like the Festival of Nations have always broadly involved “struggles for recognition.” These struggles center around how people make cultural, political, or social claims that involve gaining equal respect for diverse

VI Christian Martyrdom and Christian Humanism from: Postmodernism and Cultural Identities
Abstract: For various complicated motives (sometimes too unpleasant to discuss, even when they are suspected), Christianity has been often regarded (and sometimes still is) by many as a religion of victory, of triumph, of battles won, and of domination (early on Origen felt obliged to combat this erroneous understanding). Such an impression was encouraged among other things by the impressively swift spread of this faith on all continents of our planet: in its first few centuries around the Mediterranean basin; thereafter for another few centuries throughout Europe, among the immigrant tribes massively settling here; finally, during the latest half-millennium, on all

Book Title: Reading Patristic Texts on Social Ethics-Issues and Challenges for the Twenty-First Century
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): Verstraeten Johan
Abstract: Can writings of the church fathers related to the field of social ethics be of value to contemporary discussions on the topic? In addressing this question, the authors of this book discuss the exciting challenges that scholars of both early Christianity and contemporary Catholic social thought face regarding the interaction of historical sources and present issues.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt284w7b

Book Title: Love Song for the Life of the Mind-An Essay on the Purpose of Comedy
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): Fendt Gene
Abstract: Love Song for the Life of the Mind develops the view of comedy that, the author argues, would have been set out in Aristotle's missing second book of Poetics. As such it is both a philosophical and a historical argument about Aristotle; and the theory of comedy it elucidates is meant to be trans-historically and trans-culturally accurate.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt284x0d

Epilogue: from: Love Song for the Life of the Mind
Abstract: If what I have been arguing for is true about comedy, then it might also have been a thought familiar to that one-time dramatist and lover of Aristophanes, Plato, and so, feeling merry and self-indulgent at the end of this project—it being a season of merriment—and entertaining the fleeting recollection of having been, in a previous life, a flute girl in the house of Agathon, I will make bold in closing to philosophize a little about the famous drinking party. Plato’s Symposium concludes with the “outrageous paradox”² that the same man who can write tragedy can write comedy

Chapter Five The Roman Way and Romanization from: Rhetoric in Antiquity
Abstract: These sentences have been famous since antiquity, and they abide in the memory of all who have studied Latin even today. What is the source of their power? First, it derives from the power of those speaking: Cato the censor, Cicero the consul, Caesar the dictator, statesmen holding the highest magistracies. Next, it comes from the circumstances, in which the fates of Rome and its enemies, indeed, the fate of the world, were at stake. And it comes from their very content, where rigor rules. Finally, it comes from the inherent energy of the Latin language, which permits saying a

Chapter Six The Empire: from: Rhetoric in Antiquity
Abstract: Coming after a long period of civil war, the Empire meant the establishing of a strong and stable power under the authority of the princeps or “prince.” This regime dominated the entire Mediterranean basin, both Latin-speaking provinces in the west and Greek-speaking provinces in the east. An immense and centralized structure, the Empire was built on strong foundations and accepted by the large majority of subjects. The reign of the famous pax Romana brought security and cohesion to the ancient world and in particular assured a cross-fertilizing of Greek and Latin regions.

3 Renewing Moral Theology: from: Resilience and the virtue of fortitude
Abstract: In order to contribute to the renewal of moral theology,¹ I shall critically assess, contrast, and integrate two levels of observation and reflection concerning human agency: a psychosocial resilience perspective, on the one hand, and St. Thomas Aquinas’ virtue theory and theology of character, on the other. Previously, we saw that resilience research offers anthropological insights about extreme cases of adversity, as well as more typical challenges to growth. In this chapter, I widen the focus, by addressing how these studies relate to ethical principles and moral reflection. Aquinas’ virtue anthropology and moral theology offer a qualitative vision of human

4 Resilience and Aquinas’ Virtue of Fortitude from: Resilience and the virtue of fortitude
Abstract: If any of our communities, families, or selves were invulnerable, we would need neither emotions such as fear, hope, and daring, nor virtues such as fortitude. Even in the most protected environments, we rightly experience fear when faced with real and potential deformation, destruction, or loss. Fear is based on human vulnerabilities that extend from physical to psychological, from economic to social, and from moral to spiritual levels. Can we prevent fear from causing deeper anxiety? Can we prepare ourselves in order to better control fearful situations? Can we resist fear without forgoing what is good, right, and true? Courage

ONE Beginnings of the Debate from: Humanae vitae, a generation later
Abstract: What are the main points of disagreement about the morality of contraception? Why is it that so many think the use of contraception is morally justifiable and a sign of responsibility, whereas others count it among the grave sins against marriage? It is striking that the most ardent voices on each side are Catholics who, one would think, share fundamental values. But we find Catholics disagreeing about the purpose of marriage, about the place of children within marriage, about how one comes to discern God’s will about marriage as well as about the morality of contraception. Moreover, in the last

EIGHT Self-Giving and Self-Mastery: from: Humanae vitae, a generation later
Abstract: The most energetic proponent and expositor of the doctrine of Humanae Vitae in recent years has been Pope John Paul II. In a series of talks given over a period of six years (1979–84), he has laid out an anthropology both philosophically and biblically based that has provided the foundation for his reflections on Humanae Vitae.¹ Two of his earlier major works, Love and Responsibility (1960) and The Acting Person (1969), were foundational for much of the thinking exhibited in this series of talks, as was Familiaris Consortio (1981).² In Familiaris Consortio he issued a “pressing invitation” to theologians

Chapter 2 Skeptical Self-Contradiction in from: Idling the Engine
Abstract: Because Julio Cortázar’s novel of 1963, Rayuela, or Hopscotch, explores basic questions about knowing, and about reading and writing in particular, it can be considered a broad investigation of hermeneutics, the pervasive and perpetual work of understanding that constitutes human being. It should not surprise us, then, that we encounter at the heart of Hopscotch doubts very similar to those so important to Paradise Lost. Horacio Oliveira, Cortázar’s protagonist, is Satan’s true heir, an engine-idler of the first order. By the time we happen upon Oliveira, he has long thought himself impaired by the original sin of historicity. The doubt

Chapter 4 The Skeptic and the Hermeneut in Joyce from: Idling the Engine
Abstract: We all know that Stephen Dedalus’s fault is pride, a pride that Stephen himself, as well as Joyce, models on that of Satan. We could throw darts at A Portrait of the Artist as a Young Man for evidence. Throughout chapter 3, and after, Stephen’s young conscience is haunted and enchanted by a preacher’s description of Satan’s sin: “an instant of rebellious pride of the intellect” (A Portrait of the Artist as a Young Man, 133), “the sin of pride, the sinful thought conceived in an instant: non serviam” (P, 117). It is pride that forbids Stephen repentance before God

1. THE PHILOSOPHY OF KENNETH L. SCHMITZ: from: Person, Being, and History
Author(s) Kow James
Abstract: Why take up philosophy? Kenneth L. Schmitz recalls that, while returning from leave in wartime England and browsing in a bookstall, he was astonished to find a book entitled Does the World Exist? In his words: “Recall the times. That world, too much with us.... What a fantastic mind that could raise such a question! I bought the book and philosophy had trapped a new victim.”¹ A gracious victim, entrapped maybe, but a unique person, who has liberated many of his students and colleagues with his breadth of spirit and mind since then.

8. VIOLENT AND NONVIOLENT TELEOLOGY IN HEGEL’S from: Person, Being, and History
Author(s) Lampert Jay
Abstract: Some modern and postmodern philosophers favor violence as a means of outflanking authoritarian forms of peace and philosophy, and find promising concepts of violence in the great philosophers, above all in Hegel. This motivation is not altogether incorrect, but perhaps there are other ways besides violence to slip out of classical constraints. Kenneth Schmitz’s philosophy of freedom is, among other things, a move away from modern violence philosophies. Yet with all his classical philosophical commitments, Schmitz is as modern a philosopher as there is, particularly regarding the modern proof of unconditioned freedom. For these reasons, his work is not only

11. THE PROBLEM OF GENIUS IN from: Person, Being, and History
Author(s) Bates Jennifer
Abstract: Hegel’s discussion of the genius of the “feeling soul” ( Die fühlende Seele) is found in his Anthropology (under “Mind Subjective” in Hegel’s Encyclopedia Philosophy of Mind).¹ The feeling soul is a singular inwardness of feeling. It embraces the corporeal in itself as its substance. It does not experience the multiple parts of the external body as divisions of the soul. Rather (like Aristotle’s sensus communis), it gathers them up into one experience. “[T]he ‘real’ outness of parts in the body has no truth for the sentient soul.”² The feeling soul in the body is “one simple, omnipresent unity.”³

16. THE UNMASKING OF OBJECTIVITY from: Person, Being, and History
Author(s) Deely John
Abstract: Professor Kenneth Schmitz and I developed a friendship as senior to relatively junior member of the academic world with a common interest in Heidegger, Aquinas, and matters metaphysical and epistemological, which came increasingly to mean for me semiotics.

17. SEEING THE UNSEEN from: Person, Being, and History
Author(s) McCarthy John C.
Abstract: It was as an undergraduate student that I incurred my first debts to Kenneth Schmitz. In the years since, my obligations to him have steadily mounted, and in ways that I could not possibly have anticipated on that bright September afternoon, now decades ago, when I found myself sitting in a wood-paneled classroom at Trinity College, the University of Toronto, as he outlined the task of the semester ahead: a reading of the Critique of Pure Reason. The course had been highly recommended by friends, as was its sequel, an introduction to the Phenomenology of Spirit. In conformity with the

1. Systematic Theology in Homeric Dress: from: Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Daley Brian E.
Abstract: In the American academic world today, it is customary to distinguish between “systematic” theology and theology in its historical or scriptural forms. Whatever one thinks of the validity of such distinctions—and from a Christian perspective, at least, they raise serious questions—one must recognize that the project of forming one’s religious understanding of God, the world, and the human journey into a single, coherent whole began long before Barth or Tillich, or even Thomas Aquinas. From Varro to academic Platonists, scholars and thinkers in antiquity showed a perennial instinct not just for research and speculation, but also for tying

2. Illumined from All Sides by the Trinity: from: Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Harrison Verna E. F.
Abstract: In recent studies Michel Barnes and Lewis Ayres have drawn attention to a broad consensus among fourth-century defenders of Nicaea, in particular the Cappadocians and Augustine. They have highlighted how these theologians argue for the full divinity of the Son and the Holy Spirit and their equality with the Father on the grounds that the activity of the three persons in the created world is one, and hence their nature is one. Thus, when Scripture speaks of one of them acting, the other two must be present and active, too, and together they produce a single activity.¹ Ayres concludes from

7. Gregory Nazianzen and Philosophy, with Remarks on Gregory’s Cynicism from: Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) CHIODO CAROL
Abstract: It is well known that for the Cappadocian fathers—and especially for Gregory of Nazianzen—the term “philosophy” signifies “the Christian life” or “the contemplation of Christian truth.”¹ When referring to the contemplation of Christian truth, philosophein and theologein are almost equivalent in Gregory’s works, though philosophein occurs with greater frequency. Yet, in addition to these basic senses, philosophein carries a controversial meaning, as well. This polemical sense reflects Gregory’s sophistic art and his refined use of logoi: “[the doctor] discoursing learnedly on your disease after you are dead,” as he puts it in one of his orations.²

10. Bishops Behaving Badly: from: Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Limberis Vasiliki
Abstract: Scholars have generally overlooked the interpersonal exchanges in the lives of Gregory of Nazianzus and Gregory of Nyssa, since they are tangential to the study of theological anthropology and the Trinity. Such are the “Helladius affairs,” the rousing stories of Bishop Helladius’ contentious behavior against Gregory of Nazianzus and Gregory of Nyssa.¹ These mundane events not only give valuable biographical information, they also isolate moments in their individual lives within the context of their social situations as powerful bishops. In the fourth century a bishop’s social status was fraught with the Christian prescriptions of humility, poverty, and retreat from the

12. On the “Play” of Divine Providence in Gregory Nazianzen and Maximus the Confessor from: Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Blowers Paul M.
Abstract: Maximus the Confessor’s Ambigua ad Joannem, addressed to Bishop John of Cyzicus (Anatolia), broaches perplexing passages in the writings of Gregory Nazianzen that Maximus clarifies in extensive expositions, often by giving Gregory’s words fresh nuances. The vulnerability of Gregory to misinterpretation raises the stakes all the more, as observable in Maximus’ vigorous attack on Origenists in the Ambigua ad Joannem.¹ But for Maximus, as bad a fate would be that Gregory’s words and images would fail to register their full impact and richness.

14. Emperors and Priests: from: Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Elm Susanna
Abstract: Between 879 and 882 CE, emperor Basil I and his family were presented with an illustrated copy of Gregory of Nazianzus’ Orations. Produced in Constantinople, this copy “is arguably the most complex and internally sophisticated illustrated manuscript ever produced in Byzantium.”¹ Known as Parisinus Graecus 510, it is also one of the most intensely discussed manuscripts, not least because it is only one of two extant illustrated manuscripts of all of Gregory’s orations (rather than of the selections known as the “liturgical sermons,” of which several illustrated copies survive).² In addition, the manuscript represents what “the artisans, their employer, and

Introduction from: Spirit's Gift
Abstract: “ Has anyone promised us anything? Why then are we still waiting?”¹ These disturbing questions that Cesare Pavese’s skepticism was unable to hush set us in front of a dilemma. If we respond negatively to the first question, then we find ourselves unable to explain why it is that the resilient longing suggested by the second question is so unwilling to fade away. On the other hand, if we reply positively to the first question, then human existence finds itself thrust into an open-ended, dramatic dialogue with the giver of that assurance, that is, someone who is adamantly opposed to closing

Conclusion from: Spirit's Gift
Abstract: It is not at all easy to free human awareness from the captivating idea that the human being can account for his own existence without coming to terms with the question of his own origin. The anthropological turn of modernity, for the sake of pursuing more pressing matters or more deceivingly fundamental issues, presumed that severing the question of God from the inquiry into the human being’s own identity would give wings to the quest for knowledge. Instead, as postmodernity witnesses, this too-often rated “successful” revolution has yielded a radical dissolution of any unifying principle and thus, of man himself.

Introduction from: Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Abstract: Assessing war in moral terms means asking whether war

[PART ONE Introduction] from: Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Abstract: (1) While many wars can and should be stopped, preferably before their inception, war is and remains an inescapable fact in the world. The option of using armed force can never be disregarded once and for all.

3 Augustine and Just War: from: Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Author(s) SYSE HENRIK
Abstract: Augustine is often referred to as the founder of just war doctrine. While that is not quite accurate, since Cicero and several of the earlier Church Fathers had already formulated the basic elements of the just war idea,¹ it is certainly true that Augustine would become the most influential of the early Christian teachers writing on the morality of war. He formulated his ideas at a crucial time in Church history, just when the Western Roman Empire was crumbling and Christianity had to accommodate to life in the world—a world that was showing few signs of an imminent end,

7 Reflections on Medieval Just War Theories: from: Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Author(s) MORENO-RIAÑO GERSON
Abstract: A useful place to begin a discussion on the complexities of medieval just war theories is by briefly discussing two other basic ethical positions regarding the morality of armed conflict. It may be the case that medieval just war theories—both ius ad bellum and ius in bello, as well as other variants¹ — were created as possible alternatives in part to mediate between the extremes of these two basic positions, namely, political realism and pacifism. My brief opening survey is simply meant to serve as an introduction into a discussion about just war theory in the Middle Ages, using insights

[PART TWO Introduction] from: Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Abstract: THE TERRORIST ATTACKS of september 11, 2001, have given rise to much speculation about their implications for the ethics of war. Surely, the political map as well as the rhetoric about armed force seem to have undergone a radical transformation since the day when the Twin Towers fell and the Pentagon was attacked. The long-term implications of 9/11 are, however, much harder to measure. In this respect, we would do well to remember the words of former Chinese premier Zhou Enlai who, when asked about the impact of the French Revolution, answered, “It is too soon to say.”

12 The Sort of Nationalism and Patriotism That Europe Needs from: Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Author(s) FOLLESDAL ANDREAS
Abstract: Politicians and scholars have addressed these questions of European identity for more than thirty years, since the European Community 1973 Declaration on European Identity. Recent political events have increased public attention to the topic, most notably two apparently unrelated and different forms of integration failure. Multicultural integration has left much to be desired, most visibly in cases of Muslim immigrants and their children. And the recent

15 Genocide: from: Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Author(s) VETLESEN ARNE JOHAN
Abstract: After affirming that genocide is a crime under international law whether committed in time of peace or war, the 1948 Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide defines genocide as “any of the following acts committed with intent to destroy, in whole or in part, a national, ethnic, racial or religious group, as such: killing members of the group; causing serious bodily or mental harm to members of the group; deliberately inflicting on the group conditions of life calculated to bring about its physical destruction in whole or in part; imposing measures intended to prevent births

CHAPTER THREE The Historical Background of Kant’s General Logic from: Necessity and Possibility
Abstract: I have tried to show up to this point that Kant conceives of general logic as a set of universal and necessary rules for the possibility of thought, or as a set of minimal necessary conditions for ascribing rationality to an agent (focusing, up to this point, on the principle of non-contradiction). Such a conception contrasts with contemporary notions of formal, mathematical, or symbolic logic: rather as an attempt to identify those conditions that must hold for the possibility of thought, such conditions must hold a fortiori for any specific model of thought, including axiomatic treatments of logic and standard

CHAPTER FOUR The Metaphysical Deduction from: Necessity and Possibility
Abstract: Up to this point, I have tried to clarify Kant’s conception of general logic as a set of universal and necessary rules ranging over the possibility of thought, relative to a generic kind of thinking subject. This subject is able to refer to itself using “I,” employs concepts to make judgments, and can regard itself as free. Relative, again, to this kind of subject, general logic functions to identify a set of conditions that this subject can come to see, reflectively, as necessary for the possibility of its own thought. Furthermore, any agent one takes to satisfy the above criteria—

CHAPTER 1 The Challenge of Process Thought from: The One, the Many, and the Trinity
Abstract: Considered in isolation, Whitehead’s process metaphysics might seem a bizarre, unrealistic, and irrelevant eccentricity of the early twentieth century. Without understanding the issues it was addressing, one runs the risk of underestimating process thought’s meaning and importance, and of easily dismissing it.¹ Therefore here I will raise some of the important questions of the last several centuries that process thought tries to address.

CHAPTER 5 Conclusion from: The One, the Many, and the Trinity
Abstract: Process thought appeared as a reconstruction of the perennial task of systematically addressing the ever-present ultimate limit questions of the great philosophical and religious traditions, but in a way that seriously reckons with the significant theoretical and practical developments

4 THE DIGNITY OF POWER from: A Sacred Kingdom
Abstract: In the course of the late sixth and seventh centuries, bishops became functionally and structurally central to the Frankish system. Frankish kingdoms were organized around cities and dioceses governed by bishops, and kings recognized their importance by attempting to control the selection of bishops to important sees. This system served to stabilize an enormous region extending from the foothills of the Pyrenees to the forests along the Rhine. Acting on their position as a cultural aristocracy and serving as ritual leaders of the cult, bishops were increasingly drawn from the Frankish aristocracy and cooperated extensively with the Frankish kings. The

5 Josef Pieper and the Ethics of Virtue from: A cosmopolitan hermit
Author(s) Hibbs Thomas S.
Abstract: Perhaps no alteration in the landscape of Anglo-American philosophy in the last thirty years has been more surprising, more sustained, and more fruitful than the resurgence of interest in the ethics of virtue. Most discussions of the history of twentieth-century moral philosophy trace the return of virtue to Elizabeth Anscombe’s essay from the late 1950s, “Modern moral philosophy.”¹ A jeremiad against Kantian and utilitarian ethical theories, Anscombe’s essay urged that, given the present state of philosophical ethics—with its incoherent conceptions of obligation, its lack both of terminological clarity and of an adequate philosophical psychology—we should banish ethics totally

7 Josef Pieper and the Concept of Tradition from: A cosmopolitan hermit
Author(s) Schmitz Kenneth
Abstract: It is well known that there can be, strictly speaking, no demonstration regarding first things. Now “tradition,” for Josef Pieper, is one of those first things. Or rather, precisely, it is not simply “one” of those first things; it is almost everything, that is, everything that is original, primordial, structural—it is the first thing. There can be no demonstration of it in the syllogistic, derivative, and secondary sense, since—being first—nothing stands behind it, nothing that could be relied upon as a presupposition from which a conclusion could be derived. And yet, for all that, there is a

10 The Platonic Inspiration of Pieper’s Philosophy from: A cosmopolitan hermit
Author(s) Franck Juan F.
Abstract: Together with Aristotle, Augustine, and Thomas, Plato is for Josef Pieper one of the four greatest Western thinkers. Reference to the Athenian philosopher becomes more frequent in his mature works. Whereas in his first four volumes on the virtues—which date from 1934 through 1939 and are mainly conceived as a philosophical actualization of Aquinas’s thought—Plato is not quoted,¹ the other three—dating from the fifties, sixties, and seventies—show an increasing assimilation of basic Platonic theses.² This constitutes an important enrichment in Pieper’s philosophical itinerary. Without abandoning Thomas, Pieper sees in Plato a source of insights for illuminating

CHAPTER 5 Authority and the Canon of Scripture from: The Eyes of Faith
Abstract: In addressing, in the previous chapter, the oral and literary formation of the Jesus tradition, the issue of communal authority was raised in terms of “approbative reception.” We now continue our exploration of authority by examining in greater detail the issue of approbative reception within the lives of the communities of the New Testament writings. We will then go on to see how this same concern for approbative reception gives rise to the selection and delimitation of certain writings, and not others, as constituting an accepted norm for the Christian faith. Significantly, we will see that the final canon of

CHAPTER 7 The Threefold Teaching Office of the Church from: The Eyes of Faith
Abstract: The mission of the church is to tradition faithfully the reality it has received: God’s self-giving in Jesus Christ, made possible through the Holy Spirit, the principle of that gift’s reception. In the church’s fulfillment of that mission, the rubric of the “three offices of Christ” names three specific, albeit overlapping dimensions of church life. The specific “teaching office” is but one dimension. However, since it is in its treatment of the teaching office that Lumen Gentium locates discussion of the sensus fidei totius populi, part 3 of this volume, “The Task,” will focus specifically on the task of the

CHAPTER 8 from: The Eyes of Faith
Abstract: In part 3, we are examining the relationship between the sensus fidelium, theology, and the magisterium in the teaching office of the church. Determination of the sensus fidei fidelium, and its significance for theology and the magisterium, necessarily demands prior attention to the sensus fidei fidelis, the sense of the faith of the individual believer. Such an investigation includes both lay and ordained, bishops and theologians, since they are all individual fideles (“from the bishops to the last of the faithful”).¹ Therefore, before we consider determination of the communal sensus fidelium, this chapter examines the locus, context, mode, norm, and

10 Buon Governo: from: Papal Justice
Abstract: Roman congregations, using every device at hand, aimed at forging something more than irreproachable ministers of God well adapted to Trent’s severe discipline and ready for their ordained labors. Churchmen, in the early modern age, were also to be the blood and sinews of temporal governance; in Rome, it was they who held power and went out to far places to represent the state. They were therefore the messengers and witnesses of the double authority upholding papal monarchy, an authority defined and defended in those years by every means at hand. Clergy, then, were first of all the bearers of

Chapter Two THREE PREMISES from: The Turn to Transcendence
Abstract: Three premises of this book’s analysis need explicit articulation and defense: 1) the claim that there is a natural fit between a religious and a communal existence, that is, the claim for the superiority of a “communitarian” over an “individualistic” form of life for nurturing the religious individual; 2) the claim that, despite increasing attacks on ideas of progress during the past century and the demonstration of the inadequacy of such ideas for understanding history and politics, they largely continue, to our detriment, to shape our lives; and 3) the claim that politics must be founded on a non-or anti-utopian

CHAPTER TWO HEIDEGGER’S RELIGIOUS-PHILOSOPHICAL from: The Early Heidegger and Medieval Philosophy
Abstract: Heidegger began his career at Freiburg University in 1915 as an interpreter of the Catholic Middle Ages and as, to all appearances, a devout Roman Catholic: former seminarian and son of the sexton in Meßkirch. As his views on facticity and historicity developed, he became increasingly critical of “the system of Catholicism.” He came to believe that Catholicism inured itself from life through an architectonic of Scholastic concepts, a “pseudo-philosophy” with “police power” (GA60 313). Scholasticism (not identical to Catholicism in Heidegger’s mind but nonetheless inseparable from it) distorted Aristotle and compounded the forgetfulness of being already underway in antiquity

CHAPTER THREE THE PHENOMENOLOGY OF THE EARLY HEIDEGGER from: The Early Heidegger and Medieval Philosophy
Abstract: The early Heidegger’s circuitous path, from the Habilitationsschrift to Sein und Zeit ultimately moves in a single direction. The question that drives the Daseinanalytic of Sein und Zeit—the question of the being of time—first surfaces in Heidegger’s 1995 Scotus research. It reappears in the 1917–19 mysticism research, the remarks on Luther, the 1920–21 religion lectures, and the 1921–26 Aristotle research. The early Freiburg lectures document the variety of approaches Heidegger took to this problem, tentative solutions, experiments with language, and forays into the tradition, some that became lifelong projects, like the retrieval of non-Platonic Greek

CHAPTER FOUR DUNS SCOTUS from: The Early Heidegger and Medieval Philosophy
Abstract: The influence of Scotus on Heidegger, while long a subject of general speculation, has not yet received a careful study. Heidegger’s debt to Scotus manifests itself on the opening page of Sein und Zeit. Heidegger asks about the meaning of being, that is, to what essence (logos) does the word “being” refer (SZ 2/1). He assumes a single meaning of being, a univocatio entis, which determines and makes possible all thinking and discourse. And he assumes that this notion of being is the a priori possession of Dasein; it is pre-understood in all that Dasein thinks and says. Further on,

CHAPTER NINE BEING-BEFORE-GOD IN THE MIDDLE AGES from: The Early Heidegger and Medieval Philosophy
Abstract: Scholasticism did not leave the Jewish-Christian sense of history as it found it nor did it annul it. It sublated the early Christian understanding of time, fusing it with Hellenistic theoretical structures into a distinctively new way of being Christian. Greco-Roman “circular thinking” (the emphasis on the eternity of form) and Jewish-Christian historical thinking (the emphasis on the singularity of event), which initially tended to conflict with one another, achieved a precarious balance in Scholasticism. The Jewish-Christian historical sense was initially antagonistic to cultural and scientific life. There was no sense in building up culture when the Last Day was

Introduction from: The Texture of Being
Author(s) O’Herron Paul
Abstract: Intellectual reconciliation itself is not his goal. It is rather “to make one single philosophical life.” The seventeen articles gathered here make an arc from the firstness of being to the newness of being. In the second part of the introduction, I mark off how, on the warp of the old, Professor Schmitz shuttles the woof of

Chapter 8 THE SOLIDARITY OF PERSONALISM AND THE METAPHYSICS OF EXISTENTIAL ACT from: The Texture of Being
Abstract: There have been human persons since Adam delved and Eve span. And the word persona, prosopon—thickened and deepened by the revelation of the God-man Jesus Christ—has been with us since the great Councils of the Church. Is it not surprising, then, that we have had to wait until the twentieth century to hear of philosophies that bear the name “personalism”? Emmanuel Mounier suggests that the neo-Kantian idealist Charles-Bernard Renouvier first used the term to describe his own philosophy in 1903,¹ before it was rescued from idealism for Catholic thinkers by Max Scheler.² No doubt, the thing, the reality—

Chapter 9 THE GEOGRAPHY OF THE HUMAN PERSON from: The Texture of Being
Abstract: If an inquisitive acquaintance gets uncomfortably close to what we don’t want broadcast to others, we are likely to demur with the excuse: “I really don’t want to talk about that, it’s very personal.” If the questioner has any sensitivity at all, that should warn him or her off any further inquisition, since to cry “Personal” is one of our acceptable informal social ways of preserving our privacy. In another sense of the term, however, we may credit a person (sometimes a figure in authority) with treating us “as a person.” By that, we mean that he or she respects

Chapter 14 THEOLOGICAL CLEARANCES: from: The Texture of Being
Abstract: Near the beginning of the Summa theologiae St. Thomas Aquinas presents the well-known “five ways.”¹ The quinque viae make up a single proof of the existence of God by way of five approaches: from motion concluding to the First Mover; from causative action concluding to the First Cause or Source; from contingent beings to Something that is absolutely necessary; from degrees of actual perfections in things to the Original Source of their existence and goodness; and, finally, from the regularity of processes in the world to a Creative Intelligence that implants tendencies towards order in things. At the end of

Chapter 17 THE WITNESS OF BEAUTY: from: The Texture of Being
Abstract: In 1939, during the early horrible days of the Nazi occupation of the Polish city of Krakow, the young Karol Wojtyla wrote to an older friend, replying to his request for information regarding mutual friends, those who had disappeared during the initial terror. Wojtyla provided him with what meager information he could, for no one knew whether the victims had emigrated, gone into hiding, been murdered, or been transported to the camps. After addressing the list of the missing, Wojtyla then invited his friend to come to Krakow to create, in the midst of the suffering that engulfed the people,

Book Title: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising- Publisher: ANU E Press
Author(s): Gregor Shirley D.
Abstract: This volume contains the papers presented at the second biennial Information Systems Foundations ('Constructing and Criticising') Workshop, held at The Australian National University in Canberra from 16-17 July 2004. The focus of the workshop was, as for the first in the series, the foundations of Information Systems as an academic discipline. The particular emphasis was on the adequacy and completeness of theoretical underpinnings and the research methods employed. At the same time the practical nature of the applications and phenomena with which the discipline deals were kept firmly in view. The papers in this volume range from the unashamedly theoretical ('The Struggle Towards an Understanding of Theory in Information Systems') to the much more practically oriented ('A Procedural Model for Ontological Analyses'). The contents of this volume will be of interest and relevance to academics and advanced students as well as thoughtful and reflective practitioners in the Information Systems field.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jbj4x

1. The struggle towards an understanding of theory in information systems from: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Gregor Shirley
Abstract: This paper is, logically, a precursor to an earlier paper that sets out the different interrelated types of theory that can be employed in information systems research, namely: (i) descriptive theory, (ii) theory for understanding, (iii) theory for predicting, (iv) theory for explanation and prediction, and (v) theory for design and action (Gregor, 2002). What that paper failed to do was show clearly why the distinctive nature of the information systems discipline requires a perspective on theorising all of its own. The aim of this current paper is to show clearly how ideas can be combined from some views of

7. Information systems technology grounded on institutional facts from: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Colomb Robert M.
Abstract: Information systems are generally and very successfully implemented using a particular sort of technology typified by relational database systems, which I will call logical databases for reasons that will be explained below. There are alternative technologies. Why have logical database systems been successful?

9. Reflection in self-organised systems from: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Johan Carmen
Abstract: The increase in interconnectivity and the ubiquity of information systems across the globe is causing

10. Strategic knowledge sharing: from: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Metcalfe Mike
Abstract: Centralised governance of effective knowledge sharing is very difficult in times of rapid change, especially for purposeful, information rich, socio-technical wicked systems. The lines of communication quickly become clogged, leaders suffer information overload and are unable to fully appreciate problems at the local level. Decentralisation of knowledge sharing runs the risk of causing local overload, with key information not being prioritised or depending on actors who only have experience at processing local problems. Alternatives such as ʹmiddle-outʹ (Keen, 1999) have been suggested, where strategically informed middle level actors play a coordination role between the top and bottom level actors. This

11. A unified open systems model for explaining organisational change from: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Hasan Helen
Abstract: We currently dwell in a turbulent environment, one in which change constantly occurs and elements in the environment are increasingly interrelated (Emery and Trist, 1971; Terreberry; 1971; Robbins, 1990). The nature of change has recently tended to be revolutionary rather than evolutionary. One possible explanation is that the progress in information and telecommunication technologies, together with the inception of the Internet as a global computer network, has made the world substantially more interconnected than ever before. This acts as a catalyst in fostering further change so that change is now the norm rather than an occasional occurrence. This poses an

13. A procedural model for ontological analyses from: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Indulska Marta
Abstract: As techniques for conceptual modelling, enterprise modelling, and business process modelling have proliferated over the years (e.g. Olle et al., 1991), researchers and practitioners alike have attempted to determine objective bases on which to compare, evaluate, and determine when to use these different techniques (e.g. Karam and Casselman, 1993; Gorla et al., 1995) . However, throughout the 1980s, 1990s, and into the new millennium, it has become increasingly apparent to many researchers that without a theoretical foundation on which to base the specification for these various modelling techniques, incomplete evaluative frameworks of factors, features, and facets will continue to proliferate.

15. Conversations at the electronic frontier: from: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Hamilton Douglas
Abstract: A new language, referred to for the purposes of this paper as the information systems business language or ISBL, is being born in the world of business. It is an artificial language (Lotman, 1990), designed to eliminate possibilities for misunderstandings in the conduct of standardised business transactions. Its primary source language is English but it incorporates information systems (IS) concepts, definitions, symbols and gestures and is therefore not a subset of English. The language has a sphere of operation restricted to interactions involving at least one autonomous IS, and is still in the very early stages of development. The development

1. Negotiating the sacred in multicultural societies from: Negotiating the Sacred
Author(s) White Kevin
Abstract: The social costs of increasing antagonism, fear and social dislocation on the basis of religious persuasion suggest that Australia, as well as other multicultural societies, needs to re-examine the place of religion in society, the causes of social discontent, as well as the various means by which religious differences may be negotiated peaceably. Such an examination requires information from a wide variety of perspectives, and discussion at all levels of society. The purpose of this volume is to make a contribution to this discussion by providing a rich, multifaceted exploration of the issue. It brings together religious and secular perspectives

10. Sacrilege: from: Negotiating the Sacred
Author(s) Hunter Ian
Abstract: In this chapter I will be looking at sacrilege in the context of Western European religion and politics in the early modern period. I will be adopting an historical-anthropological approach, with a view to making this discussion of sacrilege comparable with those of people working in other religious and cultural settings. Moreover, there is an important sense in which the societies of early modern Western Europe were themselves multicultural, not just because most contained diverse ethnic ′nations′, but more importantly because they contained mutually hostile religious communities. In fact, ′religious cleansing′ in early modern Europe provided the prototype for later

11. Expressions of religiosity and blasphemy in modern societies from: Negotiating the Sacred
Author(s) Hassan Riaz
Abstract: Until recently a widely held view in sociology was that the conditions of modernity inevitably lead to the secularisation of society. It was further argued that in a secular society, religion becomes increasingly a private concern of the individual and thus loses much of its public relevance and influence. The conditions of modernity were seen as conducive to promoting religious pluralism in which people were voluntary adherents to a plurality of religions, none of which could claim a position of hegemony in society. These and similar views appeared in the works of a number of prominent scholars including Talcott Parsons,¹

15. The sacred and sacrilege—ethics not metaphysics from: Negotiating the Sacred
Author(s) St John Eilidh
Abstract: When I tell my colleagues in both the School of Philosophy and the School of Government that I am writing on blasphemy and sacrilege most of them meet me with blank stares and I have a distinct feeling that they think I have crawled out of the seventeenth century. And yet, in this world beset more each day with religious tension between faiths and between adherents of the same faith it becomes increasingly more urgent to find an adequate cross-cultural, multi-faith way of addressing questions of blasphemy and sacrilege. I haven′t crawled out of the seventeenth century so there must

Chapter 1. Land and Territory in the Austronesian World from: Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land
Author(s) Reuter Thomas
Abstract: Contemporary societies within the South-East Asia-Pacific Region still maintain a distinctively Austronesian cultural perspective on land and territory. The present volume contributes to the comparative study of Austronesian societies by exploring this important theme of land and territory within their traditional cultures. At the same time, the authors acknowledge that these are cultures in transition and traditional relationships to land are increasingly compromised by the legal and administrative systems of modern nationstates in the region. This volume also contributes to a current debate in anthropology on the conflicting human tendencies of mobility and emplacement. In the context of this debate,

Chapter 2. The Origin Structure of from: Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land
Author(s) Sakai Minako
Abstract: This chapter examines indigenous territorial categories in the highlands of the Province of South Sumatra, by focusing on Gumai villages. While desa is the official term for villages, conceived as administrative units of the modern Indonesian State, and while most people will name their dusun or ′hamlet′ when asked about their place of residence, local ritual specialists still use kute as the traditional term to refer to a residential territory (from Sanskrit and Old-Malay kuta, ′fortified town′ or ′palace′). They do so primarily in the context of the rituals to commemorate the origin of the kute.

Chapter 4. from: Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land
Author(s) MacRae Graeme
Abstract: Land has always been a critical resource in the successive political economies of south Bali, and not surprisingly, it has also been deeply embedded in a rich matrix of cultural meanings. ¹ This ,was evident to the earliest foreign observers—′There is a … correlation of the … people with … the land′ (Covarrubias 1994: 11, see also pp. 59, 84)—and has remained so until relatively recently. In the past generation, however, land has been relocated substantially from this matrix of meaning into something increasingly resembling the universal capitalist commodity hidden in the misleading term ′real estate′, with all

Chapter 7. Traditional Territorial Categories and Constituent Institutions in West Seram: from: Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land
Author(s) Boulan-Smit Christine
Abstract: Seram, the largest island of the Moluccas, lies only a few hours by boat from the regional capital city of Ambon. According to tradition, Seram is referred to as Nusa Ina, the ′Mother Island′. An Alune narrative, collected by A.D.E. Jensen, recalls that at one time in the past Seram, Ambon and the Uliase Islands (Saparua, Haruku and Nusalaut) formed a single island where warfare was constant. So, the people of Ambon cut off a large parcel of land, tied it with human hair and dragged it to where it lies nowadays. Later, those of Saparua, Haruku and Nusalaut did

Chapter 14. Finishing the Land: from: Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land
Author(s) Patterson Mary
Abstract: The first wave of scholars interested in the archipelago of Vanuatu, known as the New Hebrides before 1980, made frequent reference in their work to continuities and commonalities linking the region to its north-west, but it is in the work of linguists and archaeologists rather than in anthropology that Vanuatu′s position in the Austronesian world has been recently established. In most of the work of the second wave of scholars working in the colonial period in Vanuatu, from the 1950s to the late 1970s, anthropologists were much more likely to refer to theoretical issues arising from work in Melanesia, for

Postscript — Spatial Categories in Social Context: from: Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land
Author(s) Fox James J.
Abstract: This collection of ethnographic essays on different peoples within the Austronesian-speaking world represents a step in a comparative effort that is encouraging and frustrating. The papers in this volume engage in this comparative effort in fascinating and diverse ways but their very diversity only highlights the variety of approaches adopted within a comparative Austronesian framework. The papers speak to each other and to previous papers in earlier volumes in the series on Comparative Austronesian Studies but they represent no single viewpoint, nor do they espouse a consistent methodology comparable with that of the ′comparative method′ in linguistics. The cumulative effect

Chapter 8. Speaking of Places: from: The Poetic Power of Place
Author(s) Bubandt Nils
Abstract: This paper seeks to explore the nexus between language, space and identity.¹ It does so by focusing on the frequent use of orientational or deictic words in Buli language and relating it to the processes of identification. Spatial deixis seems to be relevant to the processes of identification at two levels: those of individual subjectivity on the one hand and those of cultural identity and differentiation on the other. In this discussion of the relationship between the perception of space and forms of identification I hope to suggest a possible connection between the numerous descriptive analyses of orientational systems in

Chapter 1. Introduction from: Origins, Ancestry and Alliance
Author(s) Fox James J.
Abstract: This is the third in a series of volumes produced in the Departme of Anthropology from the work of the Comparative Austronesian Project.¹ The first of these volumes examined the comparative design of Austronesian houses and related these spatial forms to the social and ritual practices of their resident groups. The second volume provided a general survey of the Austronesians focusing on their common origins and historical transformations. This third volume explores indigenous Austronesian ideas of origin, ancestry and alliance and considers the comparative significance of these ideas in social practice. As a collection, these papers offer a variety of

Chapter 4. Rank, Hierarchy and Routes of Migration: from: Origins, Ancestry and Alliance
Author(s) Sudo Ken-ichi
Abstract: The traditional political communities of the central Caroline Islands, from Ulithi to Namonuito Atoll, are characteristically small. A politically autonomous community may consist of a single village, a district or a small island, each composed of matrilineal descent groups. The total population of an island or an atoll is, on average, less than 800 persons and its land area is at most five square kilometres in extent. Some scholars have suggested that institutionalized chieftainship in Micronesia, as a form of suprafamilial authority, is directly related to surplus food production (e.g. Mason 1968). Therefore, due to their meagre resource base, the

Chapter 5. ʺAll Threads Are Whiteʺ: from: Origins, Ancestry and Alliance
Author(s) Sather Clifford
Abstract: The characterization of societies as ʺegalitarianʺ — in Borneo as elsewhere in the non-Western world — has come under increasing scrutiny in recent years (Boehm 1993; Flanagan and Rayner 1988; Flanagan 1989; Woodburn 1982). Even so, despite this newfound interest, compared to ʺhierarchyʺ, notions of equality have been far less explored in the anthropological literature. Part of the reason is almost certainly as Flanagan (1989:261) suggests: that equality tends to be ʺnaturalizedʺ in the social sciences and so regarded as the proto-cultural condition out of which structures of inequality are presumed to have developed by evolutionary differentiation (cf. Fried 1967).

5 The Axial Age in Global History: from: The Axial Age and Its Consequences
Author(s) WITTROCK BJÖRN
Abstract: Jaspers, who at the time had played an important role, together with Alfred Weber and others, in trying to reconstitute the University of Heidelberg after the end of Nazi rule, erroneously believed he was using a term from

7 The Idea of Transcendence from: The Axial Age and Its Consequences
Author(s) DALFERTH INGOLF U.
Abstract: The idea of an Axial Age has many facets. However, in Karl Jaspers’ thought its decisive feature “is man’s reaching out beyond himself by growing aware of himself within the whole of Being.”¹ “In some way or other man becomes certain of transcendence,” and thereby becomes human in a new and decisive sense: “It is impossible for man to lose transcendence, without ceasing to be man.”² Reference to transcendence is the defining characteristic of Axial man.³ Its correlate in human life is “faith”—not the faith of a particular religious tradition but what Jaspers calls “philosophic faith,”⁴ a faith that

18 The Heritage of the Axial Age: from: The Axial Age and Its Consequences
Author(s) BELLAH ROBERT N.
Abstract: In this volume the contributors are focusing on the Axial Age and my chapter will do likewise. However, my work on the Axial Age comes out of a larger project concerning religion in human evolution from the Paleolithic to the Axial Age.¹ I will therefore begin with a word about evolution itself as a concept. I assume that none of the contributors to this volume has a problem with the theory of biological evolution, even though we may have some different ways of interpreting it. Problems arise when we speak of social and cultural evolution: Is that even a valid

1 LOYALTY AND ANTI-COLONIAL NATIONALISM from: Changing Homelands
Abstract: The turn of the twentieth century was a time of flux for the Hindus of the Punjab. The long shadow of the famines of the 1890s; the tension produced by rival Christian and Arya Samaji orphan relief movements; the assassination of an Arya Samaji preacher, Pt. Lekh Ram, by a Muslim followed by a momentary coming together of the otherwise divided Hindu community; the discovery of an imperial policy that aimed to redress the imbalance in government employment by favouring Muslims; and the passing of the Land Alienation Act of 1900 all seemed to suggest to Punjabi Hindus that this

5 PARTITION VIOLENCE AND THE QUESTION OF RESPONSIBILITY from: Changing Homelands
Abstract: Manto’s questions echoed endlessly in the summer of 1947.¹ Later, historians attempted an answer. They used big words—“genocide,” “ethnic cleansing,” “sectarian violence,” and “communal violence”—that sounded bulky and alien to Punjabi ears, words that hardly ventured into the contemporary archive. For contemporaries who were victims, perpetrators, as well as mere witnesses, there was fear to contend with, a strange, polarizing fear to which they were not accustomed. When, on Partition’s eve, power flew from the seemingly comprehensible instructions of ministers to the incomprehensible rumours of an uncontrollable press, from railway station to student rally, from mixed neighbourhoods to

6 MEMORY AND THE SEARCH FOR MEANING IN POST-PARTITION DELHI from: Changing Homelands
Abstract: My journey to grapple with Partition began when my grandfather remarked that despite the fact of Partition, he would gladly have continued to work in Lahore. I sat there stunned, not sure if he was serious. Why, he asked, don’t people work in Dubai? And wasn’t Lahore far closer than Dubai? In post-Partition India, Lahore felt a million miles further than Dubai. His vivid memory of the desire to stay on in Lahore, despite the high politicking that had resulted in Partition and despite the long years since Partition, formed an unanalysed silence. This chapter uses oral history to think

CHAPTER TWO Riding the Wind: from: Stranger Magic
Abstract: Shahrazad begins to relate ‘The Tale of the City of Brass’ on the 567th night, past the centre of the vortex of her stories; it is a slow, magnificent, melancholy tale of a quest within a quest, a sober elegy to human littleness and mortality, condensing major themes of the Nights. The critic Andras Hamori has called it, a little unkindly, ‘the gloomiest of travelogues’, but its protracted, incantatory melancholy creates a lull – aberceusemotif in the midst of a vast symphony.

Story 3 Prince Ahmed and the Fairy Peri Banou from: Stranger Magic
Abstract: Three brothers, sons of the Sultan of the Indies, are rivals for the hand of the exquisitely beautiful Princess Nouronnihar, their first cousin and an orphan, who lives in the palace with them. The three princes are dispatched by their father at the beginning of the story: the one who brings back the greatest wonder shall marry her.

CHAPTER THREE A Tapestry of Great Price: from: Stranger Magic
Abstract: The stories of the Nightsinvite the Sultan to deepen his understanding – of wonders, secrets, human behaviour and the unexpected twists of destiny – and we the readers find ourselves listening in and learning alongside him. When human characters, as opposed to Solomon, are given the chance to set off on a flying carpet, the double effects of excitement and disorientation resonate very powerfully indeed.

Story 7 The Greek King and Doctor Douban from: Stranger Magic
Abstract: The fisherman has managed with his cunning ruse to trick the furious – and highly gullible – Sakhr back into the copper bottle and is walking back to the water’s edge to throw him back into the sea when, from within, the jinni pleads for his life. The fisherman sternly refuses, while the jinni promises him every blessing. ‘You are lying,’ says the fisherman. ‘Your promises are empty. You and I are like the vizier of King Yunan and Douban, the doctor. ‘Tell me how we’re like them,’ says the jinni, and so sparks the next story within a story

Story 8 Abu Mohammed the Lazy from: Stranger Magic
Abstract: Zubayda, the wife whom Caliph Harun al-Rashid loves most of all, is making a head-dress of splendid jewels, but the central gem is missing and she wants a jewel bigger and brighter than any other. She sends a eunuch to the caliph and he immediately gives the order that the jewel she covets must be found; when he hears there are problems, he cries out in a rage, and is then told that the merchants have revealed that a certain merchant in Basra, nicknamed Abu Mohammed ‘the Lazy’, the son of a mere barber at the public baths, has a

CHAPTER ELEVEN The Voice of the Toy from: Stranger Magic
Abstract: Fortune is wealth in the story of ‘Marouf the Cobbler,’ and both arise without rhyme or reason and pour down blessings on him: no special qualities of personality single out the hero, except perhaps an unparalleled willingness to blag and go along with the scam once his friend the Egyptian merchant Ali has put it in his head. No unusual marks of favour from destiny, or exceptional piety or ability entitle him. The luck that comes his way when he disturbs the jinni in the ruined warehouse puts paid to any notions that virtues like hard work and diligence and

CHAPTER FOURTEEN ‘Symbols of Wonder’: from: Stranger Magic
Abstract: The story about Rosebud and Uns al-Wujud the Darling Boy appears in many different editions of the Nights, but none, as far as I know, includes the story which the writer William Beckford (1760–1844) interjects, ‘The Jinniya and the Egyptian Prince’. The protagonists often allude to a legend that gave the mountain its sad name, but their accounts make little sense. (Lane has the jinn happily giving birth to ‘hundreds of children’ – and it is their crying that passing sailors hear. But that would hardly add ‘Grief-Stricken Mother’ to the mountain’s name.) Beckford paid attention to these inconsistencies

CHAPTER FIFTEEN Oriental Masquerade: from: Stranger Magic
Abstract: And though the whole world sink to ruin, I will emulate you, Hafiz, you alone! Let us, who are twin spirits, share pleasure and sorrow! To love like you, and drink like you, shall be my pride and my life-long

CHAPTER SIXTEEN Thought Experiments: from: Stranger Magic
Abstract: The story of Camar al-Zaman and Princess Badoura is one of the lovely long romances of the Nights, told by Shahrazad over many nights, from the 179th to the 217th night. Its heroine Badoura is strong-willed, ardent, capable and, above all, intensely loyal. She is a prime exhibit in Shahrazad’s pageant of virtuous women: beginning as a stern, proud virgin, a fairytale princess who is wholly bound up with her royal father, she develops into a witty trickster who tests Camar in one of the frankest and most surprising bed tricks from a wide repertoire of variations on the motif:

Story 14 Aladdin of the Beautiful Moles from: Stranger Magic
Abstract: One of the richest and most powerful merchants in Baghdad grieves that he has no children, and a passing magician rallies him by giving him a wonderful mixture of stuff to thicken his sperm. The potion is a placebo – its power lies wholly in the believing, and the merchant does believe. A baby is born. He is the most beautiful boy ever seen, like the summer moon in its fullness on the horizon, with jet black hair and on his fair cheeks some beauty spots – shamat– which give him his name, Ala al-Din Abu ’l-Shamat, Aladdin of

CHAPTER TWENTY The Couch: from: Stranger Magic
Abstract: The long and tangled romance, ‘The Tale of Ala al-Din Abu ’l-Shamat’ (Aladdin of the Beautiful Moles), is one of the most extravagant of all the Nightsin its wayward plotting, far-fetched coincidence, and peculiar, unexplained emotional reversals. Told over nineteen nights, it proves a rigmarole which Shahrazad barely keeps under control; no summary can capture its corkscrew shape. It is, however, ‘the true Aladdin’, as Philip Kennedy has written, and it plies together multiple strands from different romances and different periods, so that ‘a single tale has a complex stratigraphy of distinct kinds of stories that, in their tone,

Conclusion: from: Stranger Magic
Abstract: Anyone who reaches the end of the tales of the 1001 Nights will die, the legend says; but the danger is not very serious, since it is not possible to say, as you might about another book, that you can put it down because you have finished it. The reason does not lie in its length, but in its myriad variations and the efflorescence of the structure. On the 602 ndNight, Sultan Shahriyar finds himself listening to a story … about the son of a king, a young prince with no name, who climbs a tree and then sees a

3 What Do the Science-Makers Do? from: Working Knowledge
Abstract: Notably underrepresented in the deliberations of the Pareto circle were Harvard’s psychologists. When Henderson’s seminar commenced in 1932, the institutional status of psychology at Harvard was just as uncertain as that of sociology, anthropology, and business administration. Since the 1870s, when William James established in Cambridge the nation’s first psychological laboratory, psychology at Harvard had existed in “forced cohabitation” with philosophy.¹ Very much the junior partner in this alliance, psychology would not attain independent departmental standing until 1934. Yet, marginal figures though they were, Harvard psychologists of the interwar decades—especially Edwin G. Boring, Karl Lashley, B. F. Skinner, and

Epilogue: from: Working Knowledge
Abstract: The publication of The Structure of Scientific Revolutionsin 1962 takes us back to where we began our investigation. In the Prologue, we surveyed the crisis of the Anglophone human sciences since World War II. The defining moment of this period of upheaval was the attack on the “behavioral science” program launched during the 1960s by a heterodox group of historicists, neopragmatists, Wittgensteinians, and critical theorists.Structureis often said to have led the charge. “The natural sciences, whose claims to objectivity had intimidated humanists and inspired philosophers and social scientists,” writes one historian “fell before the historicist analysis of

CHAPTER 3 Writing: from: Dying for Time
Abstract: When the phone rings, it will have been seventeen years since he heard her voice. It is July 14, 1922, and he has been driving all night to meet her at the hotel where they parted in 1905. He has aged, time has been lost, and faced with the prospect of seeing her again, he finds himself in a state of “exhilaration, exhaustion, expectancy, and panic.”¹ He does not know who they have become to one another and which possibilities remain. Yet her voice on the phone cuts through his anxiety and resuscitates the past in spite of all the

Conclusion: from: Dying for Time
Abstract: The music has stopped. During the performance of the sonata, the little phrase they cherished as the national anthem of their love has held him spellbound. With the violin rising to a series of high notes—“holding on to them in a prolonged expectancy, in the exaltation of already seeing the object of its expectation approaching, and with a desperate effort to try to endure until it arrived, to welcome it before expiring, to keep the way open for it another moment” (1:358/1:339)—it was as if she had entered the room. And not only she but also the very

Introduction from: The World of Persian Literary Humanism
Abstract: Once upon a time, so says the sagacious and always jovial poet Sheykh Mosleh al-Din Sa’di (ca. 1209–1291) in his Golestan(composed in 1258), there was a king who one day in a rage ordered the execution of a foreign slave in his custody. The condemned man began cursing the king in his native tongue, for he was now convinced he would be killed, and so he let go his fears and told the monarch what he thought of him. The king did not understand the language in which the condemned man spoke, so he turned to his courtiers

Book Title: Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel- Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Author(s): Tattam Helen
Abstract: Gabriel Marcel (1889–1973) stands outside the traditional canon of twentieth-century French philosophers. Where he is not simply forgotten or overlooked, he is dismissed as a ‘relentlessly unsystematic’ thinker, or, following Jean-Paul Sartre’s lead, labelled a ‘Christian existentialist’ — a label that avoids consideration of Marcel’s work on its own terms. How is one to appreciate Marcel’s contribution, especially when his oeuvre appears to be at odds with philosophical convention? Helen Tattam proposes a range of readings, as opposed to one single interpretation: a series of departures or explorations that bring Marcel’s work into contact with critical partners such as Henri Bergson, Paul Ricoeur and Emmanuel Lévinas and other insights into a host of twentieth-century philosophical shifts concerning time, the subject, the other, ethics, and religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jc857

CHAPTER 1 Encuentro con Lope en el Camino: from: The Signifying Self
Abstract: Canavaggio has commented that: ‘No se puede hablar de Cervantes sin encontrar a Lope en el camino’, a view substantiated by the fact that critical attention concerning Cervantes’s Ocho comediashas prioritised the playwright’s unease with Lope’s highly popular theatre.¹ Canavaggio’s observation, however, is particularly reflective of studies ofLa entretenida,El laberinto de amorandLa casa de los celos. Each of these plays has been identified as a Cervantine reaction to dominant contemporary theatrical practise and all have been subject to analysis vis-à-vis Lope to varying degrees. This is especially true ofEl laberinto de amorandLa

1. Integral Pluralism: from: Integral Pluralism
Abstract: In traditional terminology, the world was conceived as a “cosmos,” that is, as an appealingly structured ensemble endowed with internal coherence and a high degree of intelligibility. In conformity with this conception, human societies were seen as small replicas of the cosmic order, replicas whose constituent elements were integrally related, with each fitting harmoniously into a preordained pattern. Since the onset of Western modernity, this orderly vision has been increasingly sundered or thrown into disarray. In large measure, the trajectory of modernity can be construed as a series of steadily deepening dualisms or polarities. In the course of this development,

8. Reason and Lifeworld: from: Integral Pluralism
Abstract: It was with great sadness that I learned of the passing of two leading Indian philosophers: Daya Krishna and Ramchandra Gandhi. What renders the loss particularly grievous is the fact that they were not just ordinary academics but exemplary and even iconic Indian thinkers. In a way, during much of their lives they represented two different possibilities of Indian thought, two alternative conceptions of the meaning of philosophy. On the whole, Daya Krishna identified philosophy with critical analysis and the striving for exact knowledge, whereas Ramchandra Gandhi placed himself in the tradition of the great Indian seers, the teachings of

2 Us and Them: from: Blood in the Sand
Abstract: The State of the Union address offers every president the chance to identify his accomplishments, laud the condition of the country under his reign, and offer a vision for the future. In his speech of January 30, 2002, George W. Bush focused on the need for a drastic military buildup and a new doctrine for fighting terrorism in the aftermath of the attacks on the World Trade Center and the Pentagon by the al Qaeda terrorist network. It would become, arguably, the most important speech of his first term. The picture was painted of a nation at risk since September

5 States of Despair: from: Blood in the Sand
Abstract: Hope is said to have a bitter taste. Nowhere is that more true than in the Middle East, where the possibilities for peace have been squandered and the longings for justice have grown ever more burdensome over the last half century. Worry over the treatment of Arabs by Jews stretches back to the last century over a host of modern Jewish intellectuals, including Hannah Arendt, Martin Buber, Albert Einstein, and Gershom Scholem, among others. But their cautionary warnings were ignored, if not derided, by the Jewish mainstream. It is ironic, since these thinkers implicitly, and sometimes explicitly, anticipated that the

8 Constructing Neoconservatism from: Blood in the Sand
Abstract: Neoconservatismhas become a code word for reactionary thinking in our time and a badge of unity for those in the Bush administration advocating a new imperialist foreign policy, an assault on the welfare state, and a return to “family values.” Its members are directly culpable for the disintegration of American prestige abroad, the erosion of a huge budget surplus, and the debasement of democracy at home. Iraq has turned into a disaster, and much of the American citizenry has been revolted by the arrogance, lies, and incompetence of leading neoconservatives within the administration. But their agenda remains fixed; the

The Duty of Reason: from: The Philosophy of the Western
Author(s) Evans Daw-Nay
Abstract: I saw a lot of movies, and especially liked the westerns. My favorite was High Noon—I probably saw it half a dozen times during its run in Hope, [Arkansas], and have seen it more than a dozen times since. It’s still my favorite movie, because it’s not your typical macho western. I loved the movie because from start

Book Title: In Search of the Good Life-A Pedogogy for Troubled Times
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): DALLMAYR FRED
Abstract: The great German novelist Thomas Mann implored readers to resist the persistent and growing militarism of the mid-twentieth century. To whom should we turn for guidance during this current era of global violence, political corruption, economic inequality, and environmental degradation? For more than two millennia, the world's great thinkers have held that the ethically "good life" is the highest purpose of human existence. Renowned political philosopher Fred Dallmayr traces the development of this notion, finding surprising connections among Aristotelian ethics, Abrahamic and Eastern religious traditions, German idealism, and postindustrial social criticism. In Search of the Good Life does not offer a blueprint but rather invites readers on a cross-cultural quest. Along the way, the author discusses the teachings of Aristotle, Confucius, Nicolaus of Cusa, Leibniz, and Schiller, in addition invoking more recent writings of Gadamer and Ricoeur, as guideposts and sources of hope during our troubled times. Among contemporary themes Dallmayr discusses are the role of the classics in education, proper and improper ways of spreading democracy globally, the possibility of transnational citizenship, the problem of politicized evil, and the role of religion in our predominantly secular culture. Dallmayr restores the notion of the good life as a hallmark of personal conduct, civic virtue, and political engagement, and as the road map to enduring peace. In Search of the Good Life seeks to arouse complacent and dispirited citizens, guiding them out of the distractions of shallow amusements and perilous resentments in the direction of mutual learning and civic pedagogy -- a direction that will enable them to impose accountability on political leaders who stray from fundamental ethical standards.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jcp7k

7. Why the Classics Today? from: In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: We live in a fast-paced age; in fact, the pace of change—at least in the so-called advanced societies—seems to be constantly increasing. Technological innovations that were unheard of just a few decades ago are briskly overturned and rendered obsolete by newer inventions of still more staggering magnitude. Using the parlance of videotapes, some observers have described our age as moving in “fast-forward.” The question that remains to be pondered, however, is whether speed is an adequate gauge for the quality of human life. Clearly, no matter how germane it is to certain technical developments, fastness by itself does

8. Canons or Cannons? from: In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: “Mobilizing democracy” is a stirring catchphrase, and it was a well-chosen theme for the 2005 meeting of one of the largest social science associations in the United States.¹ In choosing that theme, the organizers obviously wanted to establish a broad agenda, both nationally and globally. In fact, although couched as an ongoing process, the motto can readily be translated into a directive or even an imperative that postulates “mobilize democracy” or “spread democracy everywhere” or simply “democratize the world.” The directive is stirring and captivating—but also disorienting, given the serious malaise afflicting contemporary democracy both at home and abroad.

10. Transnational Citizenship: from: In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: At the dawn of Western civilization (so called), we find two conceptions of citizenship: one Greek, arising in Athens, and the other Christian, inspired by Jerusalem. The first conception of citizenship, usually associated with Aristotle, is that of membership in a polis, or city-state (with Aristotle holding that such membership is “natural” for, or constitutive of, human beings). The second conception, most prominently formulated by Saint Augustine, assumes a duality of membership: that is, membership in the earthly city ( civitas terrena) and the heavenly city (civitas Dei). The two conceptions clearly do not coincide. In fact, as has often been

An Introduction to the Philosophy of Science Fiction Film from: The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) Sanders Steven M.
Abstract: Over the last decade there has been a significant shift in the attitudes of philosophers as they have become increasingly receptive to the opportunity to apply methods of philosophical inquiry to film, television, and other areas of popular culture. In fact, receptiveis far too mild a word to describe the enthusiasm with which many philosophers now embrace popular culture. The authors of the essays included in this volume have genuine affection for science fiction feature films and the expertise to describe, explain, analyze, and evaluate the story lines, conflicts, and philosophically salient themes in them. Their contributions are designed

What Is It to Be Human? from: The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) McKnight George
Abstract: Blade Runner(Ridley Scott, 1982) andDark City(Alex Proyas, 1998) take place in dystopic cities set in the future of what appears to be our world.¹ Both literally and metaphorically, these are dark cities.Blade Runneris set in Los Angeles in 2019. The city is a gloomy, rainy, commercially driven, multiethnic megalopolis composed of street-level stall vendors, abandoned downtown buildings, and huge modernist and Mayanesque complexes housing the most powerful members of society. Our protagonist, Rick Deckard (Harrison Ford), a former member of a special police squad, is coerced into taking on one more job, to kill four

The Existential Frankenstein from: The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) McMahon Jennifer L.
Abstract: Though Mary Shelley’s Frankenstein story has taken a variety of forms since it was published in 1818, certain elements of the story remain constant. Whether set in a gothic context or a modern lab, whether drama or comedy, the Frankenstein story examines the

Terminator-Fear and the Paradox of Fiction from: The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) Holt Jason
Abstract: Some of the most vividly unnerving scenes in The Terminator(James Cameron, 1984) are those that present the Terminator’s point of view, giving us a sense of what it would be like to be the Terminator, to see the world as it does, to have not only artificial intelligence but also, more disturbingly, artificial consciousness. The judicious use of the subjective camera is an especially effective technique when appropriately modified to evoke alien perspectives, those radically unlike our own. The Terminator’s visual field is infrared, with heads-up displays for attentional shift and focus, information processing of different kinds, decision-making menus,

The Matrix, the Cave, and the Cogito from: The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) Conard Mark T.
Abstract: Thomas Anderson, computer programmer and hacker, learns that everything he thought he knew about the world and his life is false, that he’s been deceived. Further, he discovers that he and most of his fellow human beings are enslaved in a way that he never could have imagined and that he is the chosen One, the savior who will lead them out of the slavery of ignorance and to enlightenment and understanding. Interestingly, René Descartes asks us to imagine a similar all-encompassing deception, and Plato famously writes in the Republicabout just such an escape from bondage and a journey

Book Title: The Philosophy of Neo-Noir- Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Conard Mark T.
Abstract: Film noir is a classic genre characterized by visual elements such as tilted camera angles, skewed scene compositions, and an interplay between darkness and light. Common motifs include crime and punishment, the upheaval of traditional moral values, and a pessimistic stance on the meaning of life and on the place of humankind in the universe. Spanning the 1940s and 1950s, the classic film noir era saw the release of many of Hollywood's best-loved studies of shady characters and shadowy underworlds, including Double Indemnity, The Big Sleep, Touch of Evil, and The Maltese Falcon. Neo-noir is a somewhat loosely defined genre of films produced after the classic noir era that display the visual or thematic hallmarks of the noir sensibility. The essays collected in The Philosophy of Neo-Noir explore the philosophical implications of neo-noir touchstones such as Blade Runner, Chinatown, Reservoir Dogs, Memento, and the films of the Coen brothers. Through the lens of philosophy, Mark T. Conard and the contributors examine previously obscure layers of meaning in these challenging films. The contributors also consider these neo-noir films as a means of addressing philosophical questions about guilt, redemption, the essence of human nature, and problems of knowledge, memory and identity. In the neo-noir universe, the lines between right and wrong and good and evil are blurred, and the detective and the criminal frequently mirror each other's most debilitating personality traits. The neo-noir detective -- more antihero than hero -- is frequently a morally compromised and spiritually shaken individual whose pursuit of a criminal masks the search for lost or unattainable aspects of the self. Conard argues that the films discussed in The Philosophy of Neo-Noir convey ambiguity, disillusionment, and disorientation more effectively than even the most iconic films of the classic noir era. Able to self-consciously draw upon noir conventions and simultaneously subvert them, neo-noir directors push beyond the earlier genre's limitations and open new paths of cinematic and philosophical exploration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jcts3

Problems of Memory and Identity in Neo-Noir’s Existentialist Antihero from: The Philosophy of Neo-Noir
Author(s) Spicer Andrew
Abstract: One of the most arresting traits of film noir is its depiction of male protagonists who lack the qualities (courage, incorruptibility, tenacity, and dynamism) that characterize the archetypal American hero and who therefore function as antiheroes. Typical noir male protagonists are weak, confused, unstable, and ineffectual, damaged men who suffer from a range of psychological neuroses and who are unable to resolve the problems they face. Noir’s depiction of its male protagonists—what Frank Krutnik calls its “pervasive problematising of masculine identity”—is expressive of a fundamentally existentialist view of life.¹ As Robert Porfirio argues, noir’s “nonheroic hero” is such

The Dark Sublimity of Chinatown from: The Philosophy of Neo-Noir
Author(s) Gilmore Richard
Abstract: American film noir was always neo-noir. It was first seen as a genre, first recognized for its genuinely surprising darkness, in 1946 and in France.¹ That is five years after the generally accepted year of the first instances of pure film noir and in another country. That means that the first experiences of film noir as a genre, if it can be called a genre (as a phenomenon,ifgenreis too strong), already included a certain distance, a certain level of detachment, a certain re-visionary artfulness. I am not saying that the early noir films were made from this

Sunshine Noir: from: The Philosophy of Neo-Noir
Author(s) Sanders Steven M.
Abstract: Film noir by now has achieved not just familiar but totemic status. Brand noir is utilized in editorials, magazine articles, advertising campaigns, and music videos. Its suggestive power evokes a mood, style, or sensibility redolent of certain predominantly black-and-white films of the 1940s and 1950s such as Double Indemnity(Billy Wilder, 1944),Out of the Past(Jacques Tourneur, 1947),Criss Cross(Robert Siodmak, 1949),D.O.A.(Rudolph Maté, 1950), andKiss Me Deadly(Robert Aldrich, 1955). As other commentators have noted, the suitability of film noir for variation and adaptation makes it both unproductive and unnecessary to try to provide a

The Prostitution Trap of Elite Sport in He Got Game from: The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Pitter Robert
Abstract: Spike Lee is an accomplished filmmaker who drew much public attention following the release of his first feature films in the late 1980s. School Daze(1988),Do the Right Thing(1989), andJungle Fever(1991), which he both wrote and directed, tell stories involving complex social, political, and philosophical issues. And they do this so effectively and provocatively that they generated significant controversy when they were first released, illustrating Lee’s skill at portraying the complexities of contemporary life on the big screen in a way that provokes serious and sometimes harmful misinterpretation. For example, several American media outlets opposed the

Aristotle and MacIntyre on Justice in 25th Hour from: The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Conard Mark T.
Abstract: Spike Lee’s 25th Hour(2002) is the story of a convicted drug dealer’s last free day before having to report to prison. The protagonist, Monty (Edward Norton), uses the day to say good-bye to friends and his widower father, and he wraps up some loose business ends. Further, he has a suspicion, encouraged by others, that his girlfriend might have turned him in to the police to save herself from prosecution, so he also uses the time to investigate. All seem to agree that Monty will be easy prey for the hardened cons in prison, such that the seven-year sentence

We Can’t Get Off the Bus: from: The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Beckles-Raymond Gabriella
Abstract: On October 16, 1995, a million black men marched on Washington, D.C.,¹ answering Louis Farrakhan’s call for reconciliation and atonement.² Not since the 1963 march for civil rights had so many Americans descended on Capitol Hill. Although the mainstream contemporary historical narrative suggests otherwise, Martin Luther King Jr., like Farrakhan, was a controversial figure in his time. Nevertheless, in spite of the varied perspectives within the African American community about Farrakhan’s beliefs and methods,³ his call to action was answered by thousands of African American men across the country.

Feminists and “Freaks”: from: The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Hoffman Karen D.
Abstract: Shortly after the release of She’s Gotta Have It(1986), Spike Lee’s first full-length feature film, feminists began discussing the lead character, Nola Darling (Tracy Camilla Johns), and questioning the extent to which she embodies a liberatory ideal of African American female sexuality.¹ Involved with three different men without being committed to any of them, Nola initially appears to be a woman who knows what she wants and how to get it. But, upon deeper inspection, she is also revealed to be a rather superficial woman who embodies problematic gender stereotypes, has very few female friends, and is ultimately punished

Fevered Desires and Interracial Intimacies in Jungle Fever from: The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Sundstrom Ronald R.
Abstract: Spike Lee’s 1991 film Jungle Feveris one of several concerning American taboos against interracial intimacy and sex. The earliest film on the subject was D. W. Griffith’s 1915 silent movieThe Birth of a Nation, which condemns interracial sex ormiscegenation, to use the term invented by opponents of black emancipation, as a threat to the nation. Every film on interracial intimacies since then has been a comment on Griffith’s work, which also stands apart as a milestone of epic cinematography. Most of the subsequent films, such as Elia Kazan’s 1949 filmPinkyor Guy Green’s 1965 filmA

Economies of Time in Clockers from: The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Gilmore Richard
Abstract: Clockers (1995) begins with signs of violence: still shots of brutally shot people, all young, all black, all apparently inner city.¹ On the sound track Marc Dorsey sings a cool jazz “People in Search of a Life” (written by Raymond James). Capitalism is an extremely violent social system, but that violence is mostly symbolic in the bourgeois boardrooms and in the middle-class experience. In the inner city, where poverty is extreme, the violence is literal and very real. It is the dark side of the American way, of the American dream. But it is, essentially, the same system. The literal

Rethinking the First Person: from: The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) LaRocca David
Abstract: Can someone else write my autobiography? The question challenges the conventional meaning of autobiography. And since writing an autobiography—in America, after Benjamin Franklin—often occurs with an awareness that the status of the work is bound up with the authority of its author, the notion of authorship also becomes troubled.¹ For instance, because an autobiography appears to be direct communication from its author, the very conditions of its presentation may suggest we are reading a true story, a mere record of what happened. Yet, like the life it aims to account for, autobiography is fashioned, a literary artifact, necessarily

4 Customary land tenure and common/public rights to minerals in Papua New Guinea from: The Governance of Common Property in the Pacific Region
Author(s) Lakau Andrew A.L.
Abstract: Throughout Papua New Guinea a wide range of natural resources or substances were extracted from land, sea and waters, using a variety of techniques. In coastal areas coral reefs, shells and other marine resources have always had great value. In the highlands, there is widespread evidence of stone quarries and other extraction sites which were worked on for thousands of years. Haynes (1995:33) summarises the evidence on the use of natural resources

6 Common property, Maori identity and the Treaty of Waitangi from: The Governance of Common Property in the Pacific Region
Author(s) Kawharu Hugh
Abstract: In the terms of the Treaty of Waitangi, New Zealand became a British colony and the Maori people, together with their lands and estates, were given Crown protection as well as the rights and privileges of British subjects. In 1975, the New Zealand Parliament, for the first time since 1840, gave statutory recognition to the Treaty by setting up a tribunal to hear claims by Maori people that the Crown had failed to honour its guarantees under the Treaty. Claims lodged since then have been made mostly by kin-based tribal groups. They depend heavily on recitals of history, tradition and

9 Common property regimes in Aboriginal Australia: from: The Governance of Common Property in the Pacific Region
Author(s) Rose Deborah Bird
Abstract: In the closing years of the twentieth century, debates in Australia about Indigenous institutions of common property ownership and management are inseparable from the highly political issues of Native Title. In this chapter I intend to move beyond debates about the politics of land tenure and toward an analysis of a dynamic jurisprudence of duty in which responsibilities and rights are considered together. I will examine totemism as a common property institution for long-term ecological management. The purpose is to describe and analyse this Indigenous regime in order to examine some of the principles which inform it. The implications of

Book Title: Aquinas, Feminism, and the Common Good- Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): DeCrane Susanne M.
Abstract: To dismiss the work of philosophers and theologians of the past because of their limited perceptions of the whole of humankind is tantamount to tossing the tot out with the tub water. Such is the case when feminist scholars of religion and ethics confront Thomas Aquinas, whose views of women can only be described as misogynistic. Rather than dispense with him, Susanne DeCrane seeks to engage Aquinas and reflect his otherwise compelling thought through the prism of feminist theology, hermeneutics, and ethics. Focusing on one of Aquinas's great intellectual contributions, the fundamental notion of "the common good"-in short, the human will toward peace and justice-DeCrane demonstrates the currency of that notion through a contemporary social issue: women's health care in the United States and, specifically, black women and breast cancer. In her skillful re-engagement with Aquinas, DeCrane shows that certain aspects of religious traditions heretofore understood as oppressive to women and minority groups can actually be parsed, "retrieved," and used to rectify social ills. Aquinas, Feminism, and the Common Goodis a bold and intellectually rigorous feminist retrieval of an important text by a Catholic scholar seeking to remain in the tradition, while demanding that the tradition live up to its emphasis on human equity and justice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt3q4

Introduction from: Aquinas, Feminism, and the Common Good
Abstract: It is widely recognized that postmodernism has shaped contemporary approaches to theology and ethics.¹ Given this fact, a writer must make clear at the outset the ways in which she responds to the postmodern challenge regarding the use of classic texts and universal claims. However, the issue is not as simple as responding to a singular postmodern challenge.² Rather, the postmodern critique of modern, liberal, Enlightenment-based convictions holds within it a range of orientations toward purported universal truths. This book is a response to these postmodern positions. At the same time, it offers a constructive method for retrieving a classic

CHAPTER 3 A Feminist Retrieval of the Principle of the Common Good from: Aquinas, Feminism, and the Common Good
Abstract: The feminist hermeneutical method proposed in the first chapter is comprehensive and ethical. It includes a consideration of the text or tradition using appropriate analytical tools, as well as the next and necessary step into praxis. When one engages in a critical assessment of significant aspects of Aquinas’s principle of the common good, such as his anthropology, one must attend to the contributions that Aquinas’s work can make to contemporary scholarship: for example, Aquinas’s conception of the person contributes to a fuller description of the human person suggested by Martha Nussbaum’s functioning capabilities. Without openness to a mutual correlation of

Afterword from: Aquinas, Feminism, and the Common Good
Abstract: The principle of the common good holds considerable promise for improving life both in American society and globally, particularly when it is reinterpreted through the lens of women’s experience. It has become commonplace today to recognize that a significant cultural blinder in the United States is individualism, and that nation-states internationally are all too often guided by narrow national interests rather than what is best for the global community. The retrieved notion of the common good can serve as a necessary corrective, whether discussing health care policy, as this book has done, or other domestic social issues such as welfare

Book Title: In Search of the Whole-Twelve Essays on Faith and Academic Life
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Haughey John C.
Abstract: The contributors to this inspiring anthology meet the challenge that everyone faces: that of becoming a whole person in both their personal and professional lives. John C. Haughey, SJ, has gathered twelve professionals in higher education from a variety of disciplines-philosophy, theology, health care, business, and administration. What they have in common reflects the creative understanding of the meaning of "catholic" as Haughey has found it to operate in Catholic higher education. Each essay in the first six chapters describes how its author has assembled a unique whole from within his or her particular area of academic competence. The last six chapters are more autobiographical, with each author describing what has become central to his or her identity. All twelve are "anticipating an entirety" with each contributing a coherence that is as surprising as it is delightful.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt43w

CHAPTER 3 Professional Education as Transformation from: In Search of the Whole
Author(s) Deahl Robert J.
Abstract: I have been for the last thirteen years the dean of the College of Professional Studies at Marquette University in Milwaukee, Wisconsin. The college is one of eleven colleges and schools at Marquette and is committed to educating working professionals—adult, nontraditional students—throughout southeastern Wisconsin.

CHAPTER 9 Le Petit Philosophe from: In Search of the Whole
Author(s) Heelan Patrick A.
Abstract: My family tells me—usually with good-humored teasing—that when I was baptized, my godfather, a lawyer and a philosopher of sorts, looked bemusedly at me in the cradle and said, “ Le petit philosophe!” Given who the philosophes were, it could have been an ironic lawyerly comment on the promises just made on my behalf; but in deference to the prophetic genre, this is where my story begins.

Book Title: Christianity in Evolution-An Exploration
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): MAHONEY JACK
Abstract: Evolution has provided a new understanding of reality, with revolutionary consequences for Christianity. In an evolutionary perspective the incarnation involved God entering the evolving human species to help it imitate the trinitarian altruism in whose image it was created and counter its tendency to self-absorption. Primarily, however, the evolutionary achievement of Jesus was to confront and overcome death in an act of cosmic significance, ushering humanity into the culminating stage of its evolutionary destiny, the full sharing of God's inner life. Previously such doctrines as original sin, the fall, sacrifice, and atonement stemmed from viewing death as the penalty for sin and are shown not only to have serious difficulties in themselves, but also to emerge from a Jewish culture preoccupied with sin and sacrifice that could not otherwise account for death. The death of Jesus on the cross is now seen as saving humanity, not from sin, but from individual extinction and meaninglessness. Death is now seen as a normal process that affect all living things and the religious doctrines connected with explaining it in humans are no longer required or justified. Similar evolutionary implications are explored affecting other subjects of Christian belief, including the Church, the Eucharist, priesthood, and moral behavior.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt49s

CHAPTER FOUR Incarnation without the Fall from: Christianity in Evolution
Abstract: In chapter 3 I argue that with the acceptance of the evolutionary origin of humanity there is no longer a need or a place in Christian beliefs for the traditional doctrines of original sin, the Fall, and human concupiscence resulting from that sin and, further, that much more positively the evolutionary achievement of Jesus was to communicate the altruism of God to the evolving human species and to lead it through death and individual extinction to a richer experience of life by sharing in the altruistic love of the three-personed God. This approach argues against the mainline Christian tradition that

CHAPTER FIVE Seeking a New Paradigm from: Christianity in Evolution
Abstract: Examining the traditional Christian doctrines of original sin, the fall of humanity, and concupiscence reveals that these beliefs have been heavily influenced by a Jewish culture that was preoccupied in ascribing all human sufferings, including death, to divine punishment for human sins. As the acceptance of evolution and closer theological and historical examination make it unnecessary to continue to subscribe to these traditional beliefs, it becomes apparent that another line of explanation is required to account for human ills and tragedies, and for God’s part in these, and this chapter is devoted to exploring what shape such a change of

CHAPTER SIX The Church and the Eucharist in Evolution from: Christianity in Evolution
Abstract: As the previous chapters have examined, acknowledging the findings of evolutionary science can highlight and clarify the evolutionary achievement that Jesus brought about for the human race through his leading it through death to a richer life with an altruistic God. It can also enable us to dispense with the traditional beliefs in original sin, the Fall, and redemptive atonement, or propitiatory sacrifice, along with the inherent historical and intellectual difficulties that have been raised by these beliefs. Is it possible that such an exploration of Christian belief in reference to evolution, as this chapter is titled, can expand to

CHAPTER SEVEN Theology in Evolution from: Christianity in Evolution
Abstract: This book has aimed to explore a theology of evolution that will enable the Christian faith to take constructive and systematic note of the way in which the science of evolution has advanced our knowledge of human origins. Much of it will appear negative to many in terms of arguing to dispense with some traditional Christian beliefs, namely, the interconnected beliefs relating to original sin, the Fall, concupiscence, and the resulting need for human reconciliation and redemption and for a propitiatory sacrifice of atonement to an offended God. Yet my aim has been entirely positive. The work of constructing a

Book Title: Building a Better Bridge-Muslims, Christians, and the Common Good
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Ipgrave Michael
Abstract: Building a Better Bridgeis a record of the fourth "Building Bridges" seminar held in Sarajevo in 2005 as part of an annual symposium on Muslim-Christian relations cosponsored by Georgetown University and the Archbishop of Canterbury. This volume presents the texts of the public lectures with regional presentations on issues of citizenship, religious believing and belonging, and the relationship between government and religion-both from the immediate situation in Bosnia-Herzegovina and from three contexts further afield: Britain, Malaysia, and West Africa. Both Christian and Muslim scholars propose key questions to be faced in addressing the issue of the common good. How do we approach the civic sphere as believers in particular faiths and as citizens of mixed societies? What makes us who we are, and how do our religious and secular allegiances relate to one another? How do we accommodate our commitment to religious values with acknowledgment of human disagreement, and how can this be expressed in models of governance and justice? How are we, mandated by scriptures to be caretakers, to respond to the current ecological and economic disorder of our world? Michael Ipgrave and his contributors do not claim to provide definitive answers to these questions, but rather they further a necessary dialogue and show that, while Christian and Islamic understandings of God may differ sharply and perhaps irreducibly, the acknowledgment of one another as people of faith is the surest ground on which to build trust, friendship, and cooperation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt50w

Book Title: Power and the Past-Collective Memory and International Relations
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Shain Yossi
Abstract: Only recently have international relations scholars started to seriously examine the influence of collective memory on foreign policy formation and relations between states and peoples. The ways in which the memories of past events are interpreted, misinterpreted, or even manipulated in public discourse create the context that shapes international relations. Power and the Pastbrings together leading history and international relations scholars to provide a groundbreaking examination of the impact of collective memory. This timely study makes a contribution to developing a theory of memory and international relations and also examines specific cases of collective memory's influence resulting from the legacies of World War II, the Holocaust, and September 11. Addressing concerns shared by world leaders and international institutions as well as scholars of international studies, this volume illustrates clearly how the memory of past events alters the ways countries interact in the present, how memory shapes public debate and policymaking, and how memory may aid or more frequently impede conflict resolution.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt597

Chapter 3 Collective Memory and German–Polish Relations from: Power and the Past
Author(s) Langenbacher Eric
Abstract: There are few other countries today whose perceptions of each other, bilateral relations, and foreign policies are as beholden to historical legacies and collective memories as Poland and Germany. As Oliver Schmidtke writes: “It is difficult to imagine finding a similar case in Europe, in which the relationship between two nations is so firmly anchored in memories.”¹ Or as Marcin Zaborowski puts it: “Germanic–Polish relations have been some of the most troublesome in Europe ever since the eighteenth century. . . . Polish–German antagonism has always been of more than bilateral or even regional significance.”² Although the twentieth-century

Chapter 6 September 11 in the Rearview Mirror: from: Power and the Past
Author(s) Bartov Omer
Abstract: At the end of the last century several books were published reviewing the past hundred years and making predictions about the future. Historians naturally participated both in the summing up and in the more tentative forecasts. Not surprisingly, historians are much better qualified to analyze the events of yesteryear than to predict what might happen tomorrow. But they—or I should say we—do work under the assumption that by detecting some trends, undercurrents, structures, evolutionary predilections, or revolutionary preconditions, which characterized past events, we might be better prepared for them in the future as well. In other words, we

Conclusion: from: Power and the Past
Author(s) Shain Yossi
Abstract: Several common themes and conclusions have emerged from the contributions assembled in this volume. First, and perhaps not surprisingly, collective memories emerge in a variety of cultural and national contexts to greatly influence various foreign policies, bilateral relationships, and international affairs. Nevertheless, the ways in which collective memories become influential factors in decision making are not always as expected. The ways that memories are used as rhetorical weapons are often surprising. Although the emotions that are embedded in these memories-as-weapons are visceral and, as with other more conventional weapons, can be highly divisive and even dangerous.

Chapter Five Rights-Holders or Beggars? from: Theology and the Boundary Discourse of Human Rights
Abstract: Defining and locating human rights discourse as a boundary discourse prevents it from eclipsing other forms of ethical, political, or theological discourse. The argument

Conclusion from: Theology and the Boundary Discourse of Human Rights
Abstract: Charles taylor holds that the contemporary philosophical preoccupation with issues of rights and justice reflects a narrow concern with “morality” in contrast with broader “ethical” questions about the “good life” and human flourishing.¹ In an argument akin to that of the “new traditionalists,” rights are juxtaposed with eudaimonia and addressing the latter is proposed as a more worthy pursuit for philosophers and theologians. Two major aims of this book have been to respond to that juxtaposition of rights and flourishing and to challenge the assumption that a concern about human rights is a “preoccupation” with a narrow range of issues.

Introduction from: Telling Stories
Author(s) DE FINA ANNA
Abstract: NARRATIVES ARE FUNDAMENTAL to our lives. We dream, plan, complain, endorse, entertain, teach, learn, and reminisce by telling stories. They provide hopes, enhance or mitigate disappointments, challenge or support moral order, and test out theories of the world at both personal and communal levels. Given this broad swath of uses and meanings, it should not be surprising that narratives have been studied in many different disciplines: linguistics, literary theory, folklore, clinical psychology, cognitive and developmental psychology, anthropology, sociology, and history. And in the past few years, we find that narrative has become part of the public imagination and has provided

3 Narrative, Culture, and Mind from: Telling Stories
Author(s) BRUNER JEROME
Abstract: I AM FASCINATED by how narrative, the story form, is able to shape our immediate experience, even to influence deeply our conceptions of what is real, what must be real. Indeed, we are beginning to understand how cultures rely upon narrative conventions to maintain their coherence and to shape their members to their requirements. Indeed, commonplace stories and narrative genres even provide a powerful means whereby cultures pass on their norms to successive generations. Narrative is serious business.

14 Truth and Authorship in Textual Trajectories from: Telling Stories
Author(s) CARRANZA ISOLDA E.
Abstract: THE TWO TERMS in the title of this chapter, “truth” and “authorship,” have long been central topics in narrative research. They remain ineludible because they are not only core elements of narrativity but also raise key questions about the roles of narrative in social life. The chapter seeks to show how truth and authorship are shaped by the path taken by witnesses’ depositions within the institutional meanders of the justice system. It does so by focusing on the multilateral character of storytelling in institutions and the complex processes of entextualization, decontextualization, and recontextualization.

15 Legitimation and the Heteroglossic Nature of Closing Arguments from: Telling Stories
Author(s) ROSULEK LAURA FELTON
Abstract: THE CLOSING ARGUMENTS of criminal trials in the United States are both a persuasive and an argumentative genre in which two lawyers take the same defendant, victim, witnesses, and evidence and use their linguistic and communicative skills to create opposing discourses that are intended to make the jurors decide in their side’s favor. In these discourses, lawyers frequently call upon the words or voices (Bakhtin 1981) of others such as witnesses, the law, and cultural products such as the Bible. In this chapter I examine the official trial transcripts of the closing arguments in eighteen felony state district court trials

17 The Role of Style Shifting in the Functions and Purposes of Storytelling: from: Telling Stories
Author(s) NAZIKIAN FUMIKO
Abstract: ANIME IS A STYLE OF ANIMATION, commonly referred to as Japanese animation, that is popular not only in Japan but around the world. This popularity is in part due to the intriguing stories and the interesting roles played by anime characters. Using a discourse-based microanalysis, this chapter examines the role of speech styles in the context of storytelling, especially focusing on the role of style shifting in Japanese. Using anime as data, I attempt to show how people choose certain linguistic resources to present various images of themselves or others to fulfill various communicative goals. More specifically, I investigate a

Chapter Seven Homosexuality from: The Sexual Person
Abstract: One sexual issue is today causing anguish to some Christians and confusion and anger to others and is tearing the churches apart as never before. It is the issue of homosexuality. In this chapter we consider this issue in the context of scripture and the Catholic moral tradition interpreted in the contemporary sociohistorical context. Our approach is that mapped out by Pope Benedict XVI when he was Professor Joseph Ratzinger: “Not everything that exists in the Church must for that reason be also a legitimate tradition; in other words, not every tradition that arises in the Church is a true

Chapter 3 What Is the Ethical Aim? from: Ethics in Light of Childhood
Abstract: SO FAR, we have only considered the abstract question of the nature of human being. Childhood has a surprising amount to teach on this score. However, ethics is not just about being but also about doing, especially by and for children.

Chapter 5 Human Rights in Light of Childhood from: Ethics in Light of Childhood
Abstract: THE IDEAS OF THE previous three chapters have implications for any area of moral life. In the following three chapters I offer but three examples. The application of theory to practice is not a one-way street: theory sheds light on action just as understanding action changes theory—in a hermeneutical circle, as it were. However, if the ethics of childhood calls for anything, it calls for addressing moral relations not only abstractly but also in their practical concreteness.

Conclusion from: Ethics in Light of Childhood
Abstract: THIS BOOK HAS BEEN exploring how the consideration of childhood should transform fundamental ethical understanding. More than just applying ethics to children, it has applied the experiences and perspectives of children to ethics. Since children are fully a third of all humanity, and since they are not morally reducible to adults, this transformation is no small matter. Reimagining ethics in light of childhood—and not just in light of adulthood—is challenging and often surprising. Philosophers and theologians throughout the ages have attempted this task from different angles, but the results of history show that much more work needs to

Book Title: Overcoming Our Evil-Human Nature and Spiritual Exercises in Xunzi and Augustine
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Stalnaker Aaron
Abstract: Can people ever really change? Do they ever become more ethical, and if so, how? Overcoming Our Evilfocuses on the way ethical and religious commitments are conceived and nurtured through the methodical practices that Pierre Hadot has called "spiritual exercises." These practices engage thought, imagination, and sensibility, and have a significant ethical component, yet aim for a broader transformation of the whole personality. Going beyond recent philosophical and historical work that has focused on ancient Greco-Roman philosophy, Stalnaker broadens ethical inquiry into spiritual exercises by examining East Asian as well as classical Christian sources, and taking religious and seemingly "aesthetic" practices such as prayer, ritual, and music more seriously as objects of study. More specifically,Overcoming Our Evilexamines and compares the thought and practice of the early Christian Augustine of Hippo, and the early Confucian Xunzi. Both have sophisticated and insightful accounts of spiritual exercises, and both make such ethical work central to their religious thought and practice. Yet to understand the two thinkers' recommendations for cultivating virtue we must first understand some important differences. Here Stalnaker disentangles the competing aspects of Augustine and Xunxi's ideas of "human nature." His groundbreaking comparison of their ethical vocabularies also drives a substantive analysis of fundamental issues in moral psychology, especially regarding emotion and the complex idea of "the will," to examine how our dispositions to feel, think, and act might be slowly transformed over time. The comparison meticulously constructs vivid portraits of both thinkers demonstrating where they connect and where they diverge, making the case that both have been misunderstood and misinterpreted. In throwing light on these seemingly disparate ancient figures in unexpected ways, Stalnaker redirects recent debate regarding practices of personal formation, and more clearly exposes the intellectual and political issues involved in the retrieval of "classic" ethical sources in diverse contemporary societies, illuminating a path toward a contemporary understanding of difference.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt78n

Introduction: from: Overcoming Our Evil
Abstract: Does anyone ever really change?¹ Religions tend to answer this question with an emphatic yes. And it does seem that religions can transform people: Some believers become selfless servants of the poor, or even suicide bombers. But how and why might this happen? Similar circumstances push people in quite different ways; “good intentions” alone are not sufficient for real conversion to some demanding new form of life. This book focuses on how ethical and religious commitments are conceived, articulated, and nurtured through methodical practices that guide aspirants through alternative territories of sin and salvation, ignorance and wisdom, or suffering and

CHAPTER THREE Ugly Impulses and a Muddy Heart from: Overcoming Our Evil
Abstract: A few commentators have noted in passing the similarity between Xunzi’s apparent teaching that “human nature is evil” and Augustine’s notions of original sin. H. H. Dubs inaugurated this line of thought in a 1956 article, in which he argued tendentiously that “like Augustine, [Xunzi] saw that the only safe foundation for authoritarianism is the belief that human nature is fundamentally evil, for then man cannot trust his own reasoning.”¹ More recently A. C. Graham and P. J. Ivanhoe have both rejected this judgment of similarity to Augustine and have argued that a more accurate translation of Xunzi’s slogan ren

CHAPTER SEVEN Crucifying and Resurrecting the Mind from: Overcoming Our Evil
Abstract: Augustine’s vast literary output encompasses so much, it is inevitable that a particular era’s fascinations bring certain aspects to the fore and leave others less widely known. At least since the Reformation, the intellectual anxiety provoked by Augustine’s doctrine of predestination has led to intensive critical scrutiny of this and related themes, especially in his late, anti-Pelagian writings. It might seem that if the number and identity of the elect have been known since the founding of the universe, and salvation is not in our power but in God’s, then we humans are puppets in the hands of the Lord,¹

Book Title: Wittgenstein Reads Freud: The Myth of the Unconscious- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Descombes Vincent
Abstract: Did Freud present a scientific hypothesis about the unconscious, as he always maintained and as many of his disciples keep repeating? This question has long prompted debates concerning the legitimacy and usefulness of psychoanalysis, and it is of utmost importance to Lacanian analysts, whose main project has been to stress Freud's scientific grounding. Here Jacques Bouveresse, a noted authority on Ludwig Wittgenstein, contributes to the debate by turning to this Austrian-born philosopher and contemporary of Freud for a candid assessment of the early issues surrounding psychoanalysis. Wittgenstein, who himself had delivered a devastating critique of traditional philosophy, sympathetically pondered Freud's claim to have produced a scientific theory in proposing a new model of the human psyche. What Wittgenstein recognized--and what Bouveresse so eloquently stresses for today's reader--is that psychoanalysis does not aim to produce a change limited to the intellect but rather seeks to provoke an authentic change of human attitudes. The beauty behind the theory of the unconscious for Wittgenstein is that it breaks away from scientific, causal explanations to offer new forms of thinking and speaking, or rather, a new mythology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt8cj

INTRODUCTION from: The Furies
Abstract: In this early dawn of the twenty-first century, following one of humanity’s darkest seasons, revolution is seen as offering little promise and posing little threat. But only yesteryear, during the discontinuous yet not unrelated epochs of the French and Russian revolutions, promise and threat were vigorous and inextricably entwined. Indeed, revolution presents two contrasting faces: the one glorious and appealing; the other violent and terrifying.¹ Today utopia is completely eclipsed by dystopia. In much of the First and Second World there is a consensus, articulated by Hannah Arendt, that “freedom has been better preserved in countries where no revolution ever

CHAPTER 1 Revolution from: The Furies
Abstract: Revolution is a word-concept of multiple meanings. It evokes dialectically linked oppositions: light and darkness; rupture and continuity; disorder and order; liberation and oppression; salvation and damnation; hope and disillusion.¹ Precisely because it is Janus-faced, revolution is intrinsically tempestuous and savage. The Furies of revolution are fueled above all by the resistance of the forces and ideas opposed to it. This confrontation turns singularly fierce once it becomes clear that revolution entails and promises—or threatens—a thoroughly new beginning or foundation of polity and society. Hannah Arendt rightly insists that “revolutions are the only political events which confront us

CHAPTER 4 Terror from: The Furies
Abstract: The problem of terror is even more complex and perplexing than that of violence. Since 1789 it has challenged and humbled social theorists and historians who strain to strike an equitable balance between engaged and distanced explanation. In the wake of Auschwitz, the Gulag, andHiroshima, terror has become an even more disconcerting and controversial issue than it was during the century following the Furies of the French Revolution. Indeed, scholarly and popular debates about the reasons, functions, and effects of generic terror have been both enriched and complicated by the questions raised by students of the singularities of the Furies

CHAPTER 6 Religion from: The Furies
Abstract: The french and Russian revolutions originated and unfolded in countries in which a monopolistic official religion and church permeated every aspect of civil and political society. There was no carrying through consequential reforms, let alone revolutionary transformations, without significantly changing the relationship between, on the one hand, the political, social, and cultural spheres and, on the other, the ecclesiastic sphere. Since criticism of church and, to a lesser degree, religion was central to the enlightenments of the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, it is hardly surprising that after 1789 and 1917 there should have been a drive for disestablishment, followed by

CHAPTER 8 In the Eye of a “Time of Troubles”: from: The Furies
Abstract: In 1917 the overexertions of a protracted and failing war gravely unsettled Russia: the imperial army was on the verge of disintegration; famine stalked the major cities; the economy and exchequer were wasted; and industry was paralyzed. Twice before, in the time of the CrimeanWar and Russo-Japanese War, military defeat had shaken the tsarist regime and called forth prophylactic reforms. But in scale and intensity these earlier upheavals were nothing like the deep crisis brought on and fueled by the inordinate material and human sacrifices of the Very Great War. In February–March 1917, between the fall of the Peter-Paul

CHAPTER 9 Peasant War in France: from: The Furies
Abstract: The Vendée was in essence a civil war, and it is this fact of civil war which accounts for its singular fury. If war is hell, then civil war belongs to hell’s deepest and most infernal regions. Except for the two world wars of the twentieth century, which were partly civil wars, Montaigne’s lapidary formulation stands: “foreign war is a much milder evil than civil war.”¹ Of course, this axiom is counterbalanced by Montesquieu’s reflection that “unrest within a country is preferable to the calm of despotism.”² In any case, in a long-term and universal perspective, civil war is “the

CHAPTER 15 Internalization of the Russian Revolution: from: The Furies
Abstract: Stalin, like Napoleon, should not benefit from comparison with Hitler. The rule of Stalin was an uneven and unstable amalgam of monumental achievements and monstrous crimes. There is, of course, an angle of vision which completely shuts out the former for fear that to take note of anything positive about Stalin is to extenuate his unpardonable sins and mistakes. But for a historian of my background and generation it is difficult, if not impossible, to take such a narrow field of view and equate Stalin with Hitler, to see them as identical twins. Historians are themselves “products of their society

Book Title: Being in the World-Dialogue and Cosmopolis
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Dallmayr Fred
Abstract: In Being in the World, noted political theorist Fred Dallmayr explores the globe's transition from the traditional Westphalian system of states to today's interlocking cosmopolitan network. Drawing upon sacred scriptures as well as the work of ancient philosophers such as Plato and Aristotle and more recent scholars such as Martin Heidegger, Hans-Georg Gadamer, and Raimon Panikkar, this book delves into what Dallmayr calls "being in the world," seen as an aspect of ethical-political engagement. Rather than lamenting current problems, he suggests addressing them through civic education and cosmopolitan citizenship. Dallmayr advocates a politics of the common good, which requires the cultivation of public ethics, open dialogue, and civic responsibility.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tv6pd

Introduction from: Being in the World
Abstract: By now it is a commonplace—a widely accepted commonplace—to say that we live in an age of globalization, that the world is steadily shrinking, and that people around the globe are increasingly pushed together. The saying has a ring of correctness or plausibility. What is correct is that financial markets are relentlessly expanding, that complex information networks are encircling the world, and that military weaponry is stretching around the globe (and capable of annihilating it many times over). What is not often noted is that the correctness of the saying conceals as much as it reveals. Underneath the

1. Being in the World: from: Being in the World
Abstract: Our age of globalization conjures up a host of challenging problems, mostly of a cultural, economic, and political nature. A steadily expanding literature deals with these problems. What is not often noticed is that globalization also harbors terminological and semantic quandaries. We know at least since Copernicus and Galileo that our Earth is a “globe” and not a flattened landscape. Given this knowledge, what does it mean that our habitat is “globalized” in our time? Surely, its physical “global” shape is not modified. In aggravated form, similar semantic problems beset other terms often used as equivalents: like worldorearth.

Book Title: Covering for the Bosses-Labor and the Southern Press
Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): ARONOWITZ STANLEY
Abstract: Atkins details the fall of the once-dominant textile industry and the region's emergence as the "Sunbelt South." He explores the advent of "Detroit South" with the arrival of foreign automakers from Japan, Germany, and South Korea. And finally he relates the effects of the influx of millions of workers from Mexico and elsewhere. Covering for the Bossesshows how, with few exceptions, the press has been a key partner in the powerful alliance of business and political interests that keep the South the nation's least-unionized region.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tv941

FOREWORD from: Covering for the Bosses
Author(s) Aronowitz Stanley
Abstract: John Sweeney, the leader of the Service Employees International Union (SEIU), led a revolt of a gaggle of large unions and was elected American Federation of Labor–Congress of Industrial Organizations (AFL-CIO) president in 1995, an unprecedented challenge in modern labor history to a sitting administration. Not since 1908 when an insurgency within the AFL opposed the reelection of its longtime leader, Samuel Gompers, and a group of industrial unions bolted from the AFL in 1935, had labor’s ranks been so divided.

Chapter 1 LABOR, THE SOUTHERN PRESS, AND THE CIVIL WAR THAT NEVER ENDED from: Covering for the Bosses
Abstract: They came in from the suburb of Brandon for this May 2004 interview. Smithhart, eighty-seven, lives in a nursing home. Bracken, sixty-six,

Chapter 2 LABOR IN THE OLD NEW SOUTH from: Covering for the Bosses
Abstract: In the little northeastern Mississippi town of Nettleton in the early 1980s, the Tapscott family was going through the many rooms and countless closets of the century-old, long-vacant home of my late wife Marilyn’s four never-married great-aunts, the last of whom—Aunt Cam (for Camille)—had recently died in a nearby nursing home at the age of ninety-eight. Known as “The Hotel,” the rambling former boardinghouse was about to fall prey to the wrecking ball, and members of the family wanted to see what remained to be salvaged.

Chapter 5 LABOR, RACE, AND THE MISSISSIPPI PRESS from: Covering for the Bosses
Abstract: Claude Ramsay, the crusty, barrel-chested president of the Mississippi AFL-CIO from 1959 to 1986, delivered a stem-winder of a speech at the University of Mississippi in 1966—a time when the fires of the civil rights struggle were still burning—that included a snapshot history of the labor movement, a discussion of the twin legacies of Samuel Gompers and Eugene Debs, and a withering analysis of how the state’s political and business leaders had failed working Mississippians. His best shots, however, came in a blistering indictment of the Mississippi press.

Chapter 6 THE SUNBELT SOUTH AND ITS SHADOWS from: Covering for the Bosses
Abstract: The “Sunbelt South” is only the latest reincarnation of a region that has been proclaiming itself renewed, redeemed, and reconstructed since the Civil War. Henry Grady of the Atlanta Constitutionintroduced the first “New South” in 1886. Political analyst Kevin Phillips became his spiritual descendant when he announced the arrival of the “Sun Belt” in 1969. Meanwhile, with each new emanation, a long lineage of writers, scholars, and musicians lamented the disappearance of the South they once knew and loved.

Chapter 7 SOUTHERN EXPOSURE from: Covering for the Bosses
Abstract: The first thing I thought about when I drove up to the modest two-story, red brick building on Chapel Hill Road in Durham, North Carolina, was Egyptian president Hosni Mubarak’s comment when he visited the equally unimposing headquarters of the Al Jazeera network in Doha, Qatar. “All this noise from this matchbox?”¹ It’s an easy-to-miss building just southwest of the renovated and gentrified tobacco warehouses of downtown Durham and due south of the gothic magnificence of the Duke University campus. However, from its cluttered second-floor offices comes a rare voice for the voiceless in the U.S. South, the progressive, independent

Introduction from: Faulkner
Abstract: The pronouncement of the nineteenth century philosopher Friedrich Nietzsche as transmitted through the deconstructive spirit of Jacques Derrida and the casual remark of the contemporary American poet Tom Whalen on a writer’s pleasure in role-playing mark the wide range of this book’s theme. It contains cognitive, ethical, and aesthetic aspects, centering on masks and metaphors and comprising the sociopsychic implications for Faulkner’s readers of his personae and his imagery. Nietzsche’s replacement of truth by metaphor accords well with his conviction that the modern artist can best be understood as a wearer of masks (“around every complex spirit a mask continually

ONE Role-Play in Photos, Letters, and Interviews from: Faulkner
Abstract: Authors furnish us with pictures of themselves, but these are, as the epigraph from Faulkner’s Mosquitoesindicates, not nearly as clear as Melville’s remark would lead us to believe. Rather, they offer us, as both Melville’s and Faulkner’s examples illustrate, projections and distorted reflections of themselves. Noel Polk, inChildren of the Dark House, illustrates a comic aspect of the problem by recounting how Faulkner, in the 1952Omnibustelevision program about himself, says to the former editor of the OxfordEagle, “Do your story,” but then, putting on the mask of the writer as recluse, insists, “But no pictures”

THREE The Artist as Visionary and as “Craftsman”: from: Faulkner
Abstract: The yearning for pagan sensuality shyly announcing itself in the context of Hawthorne’s Puritan culture emerges with Walter Pater and young Faulkner’s literary idol, Swinburne, as a dominant cultural force. Sensuous fauns and naked Pans side by side with attractive female and male bodies in emancipatory bathing scenes are among the chief inspirations of the international art nouveau movement.¹ It is, therefore, not surprising that fauns constitute a major motif in Aubrey Beardsley’s art nouveau drawings, whose impact is visible in Faulkner’s Marionettesillustrations as well as by his references to Beardsley not only inSoldiers’ Paybut also in

The Faulkner–Hemingway Rivalry from: Faulkner and His Contemporaries
Author(s) Monteiro George
Abstract: Carlos Baker, Hemingway’s first biographer and editor of his letters, reports that Wyndham Lewis’s essay on Hemingway in Men without Art(1934) so infuriated Hemingway that “he broke a vase of flowers in Sylvia Beach’s bookshop.”² Yet Lewis’s “Dumb Ox” essay starts out promisingly enough in Hemingway’s favor, one might think, with a comparison of Hemingway and Faulkner as artists: “Ernest Hemingway is a very considerable artist in prose-fiction. Besides this, or with this, his work possesses a penetrating quality, like an animal speaking. Compared often with Hemingway, Faulkner is an excellent, big-strong, novelist: but a conscious artist he cannot

Invisible Men: from: Faulkner and His Contemporaries
Author(s) Hale Grace Elizabeth
Abstract: In the 1950s, William Faulkner was finally famous. The Noble Prize in 1950 and the National Book Award and Pulitzer several years later had given him a celebrity at home he had long enjoyed abroad. On a State Department trip to Brazil, Faulkner eloquently argued that the world needed to address racial conflict, its most pressing problem. For a moment, that elusive identity, the public man of letters, seemed within his grasp.²

BONDAGE AND DISCIPLINE from: Charles Johnson
Author(s) BEAVERS HERMAN
Abstract: Reading The Sorcerer’s Apprenticeprompted me to revisit Paolo Friere’sPedagogy of the Oppressed, in part because the question of failed pedagogy frames the opening and closing stories in the collection. But I also decided a turn to Friere was appropriate because reading Johnson’s stories and discovering in them the investment in Eastern philosophical tenets characteristic of his other works of fiction, I determined that if pedagogy was at issue in these stories, it is best described as apedagogy of discomfort.In light of the ways that we find aspiration and desire working in each of these stories, I’m

INVISIBLE THREADS from: Charles Johnson
Author(s) WHALEN-BRIDGE JOHN
Abstract: In this essay I would like to make the case for a kind of feminism in Johnson’s work, a feminism that makes visible foundational feminine virtues within African American culture in part by revealing the effects of strong women and in part by rendering the misogynism against which this feminism defines itself. My argument runs against the grain of most though not all work on Johnson. While critics focusing on racial hybridity in Johnson’s work have celebrated his integrationalist aesthetic (Little and Storhoff), those who have focused on gender have more often found Johnson’s fiction unsatisfactory.¹ Some even draw on

INTRODUCTION from: West African Drumming and Dance in North American Universities
Abstract: West African Drumming and Dance in North American Universities: An Ethnomusicological Perspectiveexplores the strong existence of a world music ensemble and genre in the American academy. For, ever since Mantle Hood’s introduction of world music ensembles into the ethnomusicology program at the University of California at Los Angeles in the early 1960s, West African drumming and dance have gradually become part of the soundscapes and cultural lives of other institutions. Beginning in 1964 at both UCLA and Columbia University,¹ a good number of North American universities have vigorously and wholeheartedly embraced the teaching, learning, promotion, support, performance, and reception

1 HISTORICAL OVERVIEW OF WEST AFRICAN DRUMMING AND DANCE IN NORTH AMERICA from: West African Drumming and Dance in North American Universities
Abstract: This book explores the strong presence of West African drumming and dance at North American universities, an ongoing process since 1964 that I describe as a resurrection. To offer a better understanding and appreciation of the reasons for calling West African drumming in the American academy a novelty, presence, and resurrection of a genre, it is crucial to situate this discussion by first evoking the broader a priori historical context that characterized the absence, disruption, and suppression of a symbolic musical tradition. Accordingly, I subsume this chapter under two historical phases: (1) Slavery (1619–1863), and (2) After Slavery until

2 SELECTED UNIVERSITY ENSEMBLES from: West African Drumming and Dance in North American Universities
Abstract: This chapter provides narratives on the West African dance drumming programs at University of California at Los Angeles (UCLA), Wesleyan University (Middletown, Connecticut), University of California at Berkeley, York University (Toronto), University of Toronto, University of Pittsburgh, Tufts University (Medford, Massachusetts), Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT), University of Mississippi (Ole Miss, Oxford, Mississippi), and Binghamton University, New York. But before discussing these selected institutions I visited as part of my ethnographic study, I provide information regarding other colleges that have African dance drumming ensembles, year founded, founding and current directors, and countries from which ensembles’ frequently performed genres and repertoires

7 WORLD MUSIC AND GLOBALIZATION from: West African Drumming and Dance in North American Universities
Abstract: Economic and political ideology stubbornly assume center-stage thematic positions in discourse on globalization. Accordingly, it is not surprising when a student who walks into my world music class after leaving a class discussion on the global economy at an International Studies Institute, for example, challenges his world music teacher (myself) for “falsely claiming” globalization for the domain of music cultures. Certainly, such may not be the reaction of students from cultural studies, diaspora studies, ethnomusicology, anthropology, and other culture-related cognate disciplines. Yet, the lesson I learned from this classroom scenario is not to take the understanding of popularly used concepts

FIVE Does the Paschal Mystery Reveal the Trinity? from: Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Levering Matthew
Abstract: When a biblical scholar such as N. T. Wright, a confessing Christian with a deserved reputation for theological depth, faults Patristic and medieval theology for a distortion of the biblical portrait of God, his argument deserves attention from theologians.¹ This is even more the case when his view corresponds to a movement in Protestant (Barth, Moltmann) and Catholic (Mühlen, Balthasar) Trinitarian theology to employ the Paschal mystery of Jesus Christ as the fundamental datum for speculation into the life of the Trinity.² Anne Hunt, in her study of this theological movement, speaks for many of these theologians in arguing that

SEVENTEEN “That the Faithful Become the Temple of God” from: Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Bauerschmidt Frederick Christian
Abstract: Where did Thomas Aquinas put his ecclesiology? Theologians today generally accept the claim that Thomas has no “ecclesiology” as we would understand that term, by which I mean that he never takes up the Church as a distinct locus for comprehensive theological discussion.¹ Did the famously absent-minded saint simply misplace it? One searches the Summa theologiae in vain for a treatise de ecclesiae.² The situation seems even less promising in his Commentary on the Gospel of St. John, where the commentary genre itself does not tend to the systematic treatment of anything. Yet this does not mean that Thomas’s commentary

1 The Natural World from: The Quest for God and the Good Life
Abstract: Deeply troubled by the Great Depression, two world wars, and modernity’s challenges to religion, Bernard Lonergan attempted to do for our age what Thomas Aquinas did for his—that is, to integrate the best of secular and sacred teaching in order to further the ongoing Catholic tradition of using both faith and reason to promote the common good and to participate in God’s work of redemption. Echoing centuries of the Catholic tradition’s esteem for secular and sacred, or natural and supernatural, forms of learning, Lonergan affirms that “God becomes known to us in two ways: as the ground and end

[Part 2 Introduction] from: The Quest for God and the Good Life
Abstract: The utopian idea that progress in human affairs is automatic and unbroken was perhaps the biggest mistake made by early modern proponents of progress, according to Bernard Lonergan.¹ In his view these theorists failed to account for slowdowns and breakdowns, particularly those caused by sin and evil. Accompanying the many positive contributions of modernity to the natural and human sciences came an arrogance that believed that human intelligence at the service of personal egoism was the sufficient engine for progress, and human sin was what transforms an ordinary, unimportant person into a unique, free-thinking individual.² Modern liberals thus were aware

5 Sin and Evil from: The Quest for God and the Good Life
Abstract: In the Bible sin is not something created by God. It is not natural. It does not enter into the picture until the third chapter, where we see human beings choose to listen to

6 Bias from: The Quest for God and the Good Life
Abstract: Sin and evil are categories traditional to Catholic theology, even if Lonergan’s analysis of them is his own. Bias, an inauthentic orientation caused by and causal of inauthentic actions, decisions, judgments, ideas, and experiences, is a concept more original to Lonergan. It is both the result of sin and a cause of further sin.¹ As such, bias functions in a way I find similar to Aristotle’s bad habits, or vices.² However, while Aristotle discusses vice as an extreme on either side of a golden mean, Lonergan analyzes bias in terms of conscious intentionality, social dynamics, and history. Sinful personal judgments

10 A Redemptive Community from: The Quest for God and the Good Life
Abstract: Typically, in Insight Lonergan credits progress to human intelligence as driven by the “detached and disinterested desire to know.” Surprisingly, however, he sometimes in this same work credits liberty. Rather than view this as an irreconcilable inconsistency, I would argue that liberty and intelligence are complementary. They work hand in hand. And both are necessary for progress.¹ Good ideas can improve the situation, but there must be liberty in the community if the ideas are to be reflected on, communicated, tested, implemented, allowed to change the social situation, and eventually to be reevaluated and corrected by new ideas.

Introduction from: Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) MARSHALL DAVID
Abstract: This volume is a record of the proceedings of the ninth Building Bridges seminar for Christian and Muslim scholars, convened by the Archbishop of Canterbury, Dr. Rowan Williams, and held at Georgetown University, Washington, DC, from May 25–27, 2010. The focus of this seminar on Christian and Muslim approaches to the relationship between tradition and modernity was a natural continuation of discussions at earlier Building Bridges seminars, notably on the interface between science and religion in 2009. Following an established pattern, after an opening day of public lectures, the second and third days were spent in private sessions discussing

Tradition from: Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) SOSKICE JANET
Abstract: It may be helpful, before specifically discussing “tradition” in Christian thought, to consider how much in human life is “passed on” by others. Here are two musical examples. The first is from my own workplace—the choristers of the Jesus College chapel. I want to draw attention not to the antiquity of the particular pieces of music they sing (for they sing works both ancient and modern) but to the practice of choral singing itself. The choir is composed

John Henry Newman (1801–90) from: Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) Newman John Henry
Abstract: The following essay is directed towards a solution of the difficulty which has been stated,—the difficulty, as far as it exists, which lies in the way of our using in controversy the testimony of our most natural informant concerning the doctrine and worship of Christianity, viz. the history of eighteen hundred years. The view on which it is written has at all times, perhaps, been implicitly adopted by theologians, and, I believe, has recently been illustrated by several distinguished writers of the continent, such as De Maistre and Möhler: viz. that the increase and expansion of the Christian Creed

Muḥammad ʿAbduh: from: Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) CORNELL VINCENT J.
Abstract: Chronologically the earliest of the Muslim reformers to be discussed in this volume, Muḥammad ʿAbduh is the most ambiguous in terms of understanding the full extent of his legacy in the century since his death. With the possible exception of his teacher and political mentor Jamāl al-Dīn al-Afghānī (1838–97), he is arguably the most overinterpreted figure in modern Islamic thought. Indeed, it may be useful to think of ʿAbduh as the “Illustrated Man” of contemporary Sunnī Islam. Much as with the figure that is the frame device for Ray Bradbury’s classic work of science fiction,¹ the stories that are

Alasdair MacIntyre (1929– ) from: Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) MacIntyre Alasdair
Abstract: It is now possible to return to the question from which this enquiry into the nature of human action and identity started: In what does the unity of an individual life consist? The answer is that its unity is the unity of a narrative embodied in a single life. To ask “What is the good for me?” is to ask how best I might live out that unity and bring it to completion. To ask “What is the good for man?” is to ask what all answers to the former question must have in common. But now it is important

Tariq Ramadan’s Tryst with Modernity: from: Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) RIZVI SAJJAD
Abstract: “Religion” may—or may not—be here to stay. As a “concept” (but which or whose exactly?), from one perspective it might seem to be losing its received reference (the transcendent, the world beyond, and the life hereafter) and its shared relevance (a unified view of the cosmos and all beings in it; a doctrine of the origin, purpose and end of all things; an alert, enlightened or redeemed sense of self; a practice and way of life), if it had

2 Therapeutic Modernism: from: Troubling Natural Categories
Author(s) NGUYEN VINH-KIM
Abstract: I trained under Margaret Lock in the years after she published her seminal work Encounters with Aging(1993). After three years of practising full-time as an emergency and HIV physician, the grind of medical practice had left me longing for an approach that went beyond the clinical or epidemiological sciences. Neither helped me make sense of what I saw in the clinic. As I began working in West Africa as a community organizer with HIV groups, most of the anthropological work I encountered viewed the epidemic through the lens of either culture or political economy. The realities I encountered were

7 Cases and Narratives in Private Medical Providers’ Accounts of Managing HIV in Urban India from: Troubling Natural Categories
Author(s) KIELMANN KARINA
Abstract: While medical pluralism in India has been of longstanding interest to medical anthropologists (see Leslie, 1976; Leslie and Young, 1992), it is only more recently that pluralism, under the guise of privatization in Indian health care, has attracted comparable interest among public health specialists. Accompanying nationwide economic reforms toward a market-based economy (Purohit 2001; Sen 2003), India’s private medical sector rapidly expanded throughout the 1990s, encompassing a wide range of formal and informal medical providers with varying degrees of institutional legitimacy. Operating alongside the government health services, private medical practitioners represent the first pattern of resort for a majority of

6 When Tragedy Becomes Comedy from: Genuine Multiculturalism
Abstract: In a common-sense way, the maxims at the start of the previous chapter capture a contradiction immanent to life. Their irony gives them a generalized truth that is not always the case, while they remind us that we always face the certainty of despair and hope – often from the same source. Despair and hope are dialectical, for they can be opposing, and at times even complementary, parts of the same whole. The sayings also speak to the possibility of change for the better or the worse and to how every thought and act appear pregnant with the possibility of producing

12 Tyranny v. Freedom: from: Genuine Multiculturalism
Abstract: In a famous exchange about the time Canadians were examining the idea of official multiculturalism, two leading theorists – conservative US philosopher Leo Strauss and left-leaning French philosopher Alexandre Kojève – debated about what it took to produce wise and good government in a modern state. Strauss wrestled with the question of the sovereign individual and whether one can remain authentic while living in a society – can he or she live happily ever after? Strauss starts always with the desires of the individual in discussing freedom and tyranny. He sees a “crisis in modernity” because neither the individual nor the state knows

6 Truthfulness, Discourse, and the Problem of Pluralism from: Truth Matters
Author(s) SMITH ADAM
Abstract: In this chapter, I describe pluralism as an approach to securing legitimacy for laws that govern democracies. While I assume that no other approach is acceptable, and that pluralism is a prerequisite for democracy, I argue first that pluralism has a problem. I also argue that the most promising attempt to resolve this problem – Habermas’s theory of discourse – fails to do so. To conclude, I suggest that another Habermasian term – truthfulness – might be developed in a way that addresses the problem of pluralism.

7 A Comparative Ethics Approach to the Concept of Bearing Witness: from: Truth Matters
Author(s) RICHARDS AMY D.
Abstract: Bearing witness is an ethical act. Whether a person bears truthful witness or false witness, the act involves moral agency. Choosing to testify to an experience or event that others, or the established narrative of a culture, may contest may alter the rest of a person’s life. Witnessing is not without cost to both the agent bearing witness and also possibly to the audiences, the secondary witnesses hearing or observing the testimony. Therefore, deciding to bear or not bear witness has moral and cultural significance. Consider the example of two British journalists working in Soviet Russia and the moral and

8 Narrative Truth in Canadian Historical Fiction: from: Truth Matters
Author(s) VAN RYS JOHN
Abstract: Of all literary genres, historical fiction is perhaps the most problematic and the most promising in relation to difficult questions of truth. Ostensibly rooted in some form of historical veracity in the traces of actual events or people, its fictional dimensions (from invented narrative to poetic qualities) nevertheless impress upon readers an imaginative truthfulness. In this way, historical fiction becomes a site of contention over truth; in its modern and postmodern manifestations, the genre becomes an exploration of the nature of truth itself.

Book Title: Configuring Community-Theories, Narratives, and Practices of Community Identities in Contemporary Spain
Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Author(s): George David D.
Abstract: The concept of community has become central to constructions of Spanish identities since the transition to democracy. Contemporary Spain is witnessing a political, social, and economic resurgence of community, which both cuts across and is prioritized over nation. Yet few studies of contemporary Spanish culture deal with this concept. This book aims to fill a gap in Spanish cultural studies by providing an in-depth analysis of the intersections of theories, narratives, and concepts of community identities across a broad range of media. Literature, film, music, and photography are analysed here in order to explore the diverse means by which community is imagined and constructed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32b8xg

CHAPTER 2 THE AESTHETICS OF MEMORY: from: Configuring Community
Abstract: Issues concerning the concept of community in the context of modernity which were presented in Chapter 1, will be explored in a more specific way in this chapter. My aim here is to problematize community identity by focusing upon key aspects of Julio Llamazares’s prose narratives, attending particularly to La lluvia amarilla (1988), Luna de lobos (1985), and El río del olvido (1990). Where relevant, I shall also draw upon some of Llamazares’s other works, namely Escenas de cine mudo (1994) and his earlier poetry, La lentitud de los bueyes (1979) and Memoria de la nieve (1982). My particular focus

CHAPTER 4 COMMUNITY, ETHNICITY, AND BORDER CROSSINGS IN from: Configuring Community
Abstract: This chapter aims to examine concepts and narratives of community identities in relation to representations of ethnicity in the film Alma gitana (Chus Gutiérrez, 1995).¹ This film, which projects a love story between Lucía, a gitana, and Antonio, a payo, ² problematizes ethnic and communal boundaries not just as borders which fence off identity, but also as possible points of crossing. The borders of ethnicity therefore fulfil the dual function of demarcating ‘self ’ from ‘other’ whilst also being presented as bridges for the passage of cultural exchange. Ethnicity is simultaneously projected in the film, on the one hand, as

Prologue from: Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Abstract: At mid-century E. R. Curtius, adverting to the study of rhetoric in his magisterial European Literature and the Latin Middle Ages, boldly pronounced not only that “as an independent subject, it has long since vanished from the curriculum” but that “in our culture, rhetoric has no place.”¹ Only a few years later, related sentiments were expressed by the Oxford scholar C. S. Lewis. Lewis was, among other things, a Renaissance specialist for whom the modern ignorance of rhetoric as a subject of study presented the single greatest obstacle to our properly approaching the literature of the distant past.² For Lewis,

3 On the Tragedy of Hermeneutical Experience from: Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Bruns Gerald L.
Abstract: Hermeneutics is made up of a family of questions about what happens in the understanding of anything, not just of texts but of how things are. This is different from the usual question about how to make understanding happen, how to produceit the way you produce a meaning or a statement where one is missing. For hermeneutics, understanding is not (or not just) of meanings; rather, meaning is, metaphorically, the light that a text sheds on the subject (Sache) that we seek to understand. Think ofSachenot as an object of thought or as the product or goal

17 Reason and Rhetoric in Habermas’s Theory of Argumentation from: Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Rehg William
Abstract: The late twentieth century presents an especially hostile environment for comprehensive accounts of reason. Precisely at a time when the dangers of social fragmentation and cross-cultural misunderstanding are becoming increasingly evident, the common bases for social integration and rational conflict adjudication seem to be disappearing in a postmodern, multicultural melee. The pluralization of worldviews and disenchantment with grand narratives, the suspicion of hasty ethnocentric generalization, and even the disciplinary specialization of inquiry itself encourage a general retreat into forms of relativism or narrow empiricism. As a result, it has become increasingly difficult to maintain a link between critical social theory,

1 Rhetoric from: Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Fish Stanley
Abstract: For Milton’s seventeenth-century readers this passage, introducing one of the more prominent of the fallen angels, would have been immediately recognizable as a brief but trenchant essay on the art and character of the rhetorician. Indeed in these few lines Milton has managed to gather and restate with great rhetorical force (a paradox of which more later) all of the traditional arguments against rhetoric. Even Belial’s gesture of rising is to the (negative) point: he catches the eye even before he begins to speak, just as Satan will in Book IX when he too raises himself and moves so that

9 Hymes, Rorty, and the Social-Rhetorical Construction of Meaning from: Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Smith Robert E.
Abstract: Today, yesterday, and tomorrow—it is 3:00 A.M. in the southern montanaand lowlands of eastern Ecuador, in the tropical rain forests of the upper Amazon Basin. Inside a traditional Shuar house of palm and thatch, surrounded by the now-dark gardens of manioc and plantains and yams, set apart from any sort of village—living “concealed,” as the Indians sometimes call it—a Shuar father begins the day by instructing his children. This morning he is talking about “Takea and Hummingbird.”

12 The Subject of Invention: from: Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Glejzer Richard R.
Abstract: Over the past decade Medieval Studies has increasingly begun to question overtly the issues surrounding its object—the Middle Ages—in terms of methodology. The studies of Lee Patterson, Paul Zumthor, Norman Cantor, and others begin to consider the ways in which the Middle Ages are constructed as an a priori, where readings of medieval texts are grounded by particular inventionsof the Middle Ages, to borrow Cantor’s title. Questions of medievalism have become central to the medievalist as a way to get outside particular methodological hermeticisms, outside contemporary foundations, whether they be New Critical (which is still very much

13 The Royal Road: from: Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Sprinker Michael
Abstract: What is a consequent marxist view of the history and philosophy of science? Reference to Marx’s and Engels’s (or even Lenin’s) work will not yield a satisfactory answer, although certain signposts are evident. For example, there is the famous observation on method in the introduction to the Grundrisse, which argues that, contrary to the procedures adopted in classical economy, where the starting point for investigation is apparently concrete phenomena from which abstract theoretical descriptions are then derived, “the method of rising from the abstract to the concrete is the only way in which thought appropriates the concrete, reproduces it as

3 The Human Species as an Object of Study from: The Uncertain Sciences
Abstract: Any effort at devising and using a suitable form of scientific method must be clear about the subject of study. What are the phenomena into which we inquire? What are their boundaries? Once the field is established, we can ask what techniques (instruments, ways of collecting data, institutional supports, modes of employing evidence, modes of inference) may be suitable to its materials. Involved in this question is the issue of classification, which appears to be a necessary feature of most attempts at science: How can the phenomena under investigation be meaningfully ordered?

4 Hermeneutics from: The Uncertain Sciences
Abstract: Culture is the key concept in much (though not all) of human science. Yet it is more useful to think of humans first as symbolic animals, rather than cultural animals, for symbolic abilities underlie the existence of both cultures and societies. The species, at the same time that its brain physically evolved, adding a cerebral cortex to its limbic core, increasingly replaced immediate, instinctual responses with delayed, thoughtful actions, mediated through symbols. We need not examine in detail the familiar findings of recent research that tell us of the development of symbolic language, with denotative and connotative characteristics, especially as

5 Some Achievements to Date from: The Uncertain Sciences
Abstract: The future of the human sciences appears unpromising. On one side, we are faced with a positivism that functions in faint imitation of its relatively successful use in the natural sciences. On the other side, we are confronted by phenomena that call for a hermeneutic method. The status of that method, however, is problematic. In sum, the use of an effective scientific method along the lines of positivism is handicapped, and the employment of the interpretive method highly unreliable.

6 The Uncertain Sciences from: The Uncertain Sciences
Abstract: A foremost possibility is that the human sciences can develop only by humans becoming conscious of the ongoing achievements of the human sciences. By becoming conscious, I mean not only possessing ourselves of the

7 “Da Capo," or Back to the Beginning from: The Uncertain Sciences
Abstract: Our conclusion is necessarily inconclusive. This befits the uncertain I sciences. Humanity is still in the process of cultural evolution. Many emergent phenomena are still in the womb of time. In pursuing our inquiry into the nature and meaning of the human sciences, we have had to proceed as if in a fox hunt, not chasing our quarry in a straight line but over hedges and ditches and through the trees.

Book Title: Introduction to Philosophical Hermeneutics- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): WEINSHEIMER JOEL
Abstract: In this wide-ranging historical introduction to philosophical hermeneutics, Jean Grondin discusses the major figures from Philo to Habermas, analyzes conflicts between various interpretive schools, and provides a persuasive critique of Gadamer's view of hermeneutic history, though in other ways Gadamer's Truth and Methodserves as a model for Grondin's approach.Grondin begins with brief overviews of the pre-nineteenth-century thinkers Philo, Origen, Augustine, Luther, Flacius, Dannhauer, Chladenius, Meier, Rambach, Ast, and Schlegel. Next he provides more extensive treatments of such major nineteenth-century figures as Schleiermacher, Böckh, Droysen, and Dilthey. There are full chapters devoted to Heidegger and Gadamer as well as shorter discussions of Betti, Habermas, and Derrida. Because he is the first to pay close attention to pre-Romantic figures, Grondin is able to show that the history of hermeneutics cannot be viewed as a gradual, steady progression in the direction of complete universalization. His book makes it clear that even in the early period, hermeneutic thinkers acknowledged a universal aspect in interpretation-that long before Schleiermacher, hermeneutics was philosophical and not merely practical. In revising and correcting the standard account, Grondin's book is not merely introductory but revisionary, suitable for beginners as well as advanced students in the field.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bfxq

Afterword from: Introduction to Philosophical Hermeneutics
Abstract: The argument between Derrida and Gadamer has made at least one thing clear: the charge brought against the universal search for truth and understanding is universal perspectivism, as Nietzsche inscribed it in philosophical consciousness. What is the point of striving for understanding, when everything is perspectival and historically conditioned? Often Gadamer has himself been viewed as the spokesman for historical relativism, since he had written that we do not understand better, but only differently. What would it mean to talk about the universality of understanding differently? Ultimately, does it not destroy the whole notion of truth?

Introduction from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Abstract: Despite continuing references in the scholarly and the popular press to the lasting artistic and cultural relevance of Abstract Expressionism, no comprehensive collection of essays related to this movement has been published since David and Cecile Shapiro’s Abstract Expressionism: A Critical Record and Clifford Ross’s Abstract Expressionism: Creators and Critics appeared in 1990. Francis Frascina’s Pollock and After: The Critical Debate (second edition) and Pepe Karmel’s Jackson Pollock: New Approaches are the only anthologies with any direct relation to art of the New York School produced after 1995. Each is a specialized endeavor that does not aim to reflect the

A Problem for Critics from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) PUTZEL HOWARD
Abstract: During the past dozen years, and particularly since 1940, the tendency toward a new metamorphism was manifest in painting. However this may seem related with totemic images, earliest Mediterranean art and

de Kooning Paints a Picture from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) HESS THOMAS B.
Abstract: In the first days of June, 1950, Willem de Kooning tacked a 7-foot-high canvas to his painting frame and began intensive work on Woman—a picture of a seated figure, and a theme which had preoccupied him for over two decades. He decided to concentrate on this single major effort until it was finished to his satisfaction.

Artistʹs Statement from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) BOURGEOIS LOUISE
Abstract: An artist’s words are always to be taken cautiously. The finished work is often a stranger to, and sometimes very much at odds with what the artist felt, or wished to express when he began. At best the artist does what he can rather than what he wants to do. After the battle is over and the damage faced up to, the result may be surprisingly dull—but sometimes it is surprisingly interesting. The mountain brought forth a mouse, but the bee will create a miracle of beauty and order. Asked to enlighten us on their creative process, both would

The Legacy of Jackson Pollock from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) KAPROW ALLAN
Abstract: The tragic news of Pollock’s death two summers ago was profoundly depressing to many of us. We felt not only a sadness over the death of a great figure, but also a deep loss, as if something of ourselves had died too. We were a piece of him: he was, perhaps, the embodiment of our ambition for absolute liberation and a secretly cherished wish to overturn old tables of crockery and flat champagne. We saw in his example the possibility of an astounding freshness, a sort of ecstatic blindness.

Excerpt from ʺThe Liberating Quality of Avant-Garde Artʺ from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) SCHAPIRO MEYER
Abstract: In discussing the place of painting and sculpture in the culture of our time, I shall refer only to those kinds which, whether abstract or not, have a fresh inventive character, that art which is called “modern” not simply because it is of our century, but because it is the work of artists who take seriously the challenge of new possibilities and wish to introduce into their work perceptions, ideas and experiences which have come about only within our time.

Excerpt from from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) ARNASON H. H.
Abstract: […] As the title indicates, the present exhibition is really a double exhibition which not only surveys the present state of the Abstract Expressionists but follows in some detail the direction to which the name “Abstract Imagists” has been applied. It is a fact that from the late Forties to the present day certain painters, loosely grouped with the Abstract Expressionists, have rather been concerned through extreme simplification of their canvases—frequently to the dominant assertion of a single overpowering element—in presenting an all-encompassing presence. This “presence” could be described as an “image” in the sense of an abstract

Residual Sign Systems in Abstract Expressionism from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) ALLOWAY LAWRENCE
Abstract: A problem that reciprocally involved both subject matter and formality engaged the Abstract Expressionist painters of the middle and late forties. It was how to make paintings that would be powerful signifiers, and this led to decisions as to what signifiers could be properly referred to without compromising (too much) the flatness of the picture plane. The desire for a momentous content was constricted by the spatial requirement of flatness and by the historically influenced need to avoid direct citation of objects. Something of this train of thought can be seen in Barnett Newman’s reflections on the role of the

Excerpt from ʺAbstract Expressionism: from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) SHAPIRO CECILE
Abstract: The most surprising fact about American art in the late 1950s is the dearth of well-written published material critical of or hostile to Abstract Expressionism. Since a conspiracy is entirely unlikely—even Senator Joe McCarthy never claimed to have uncovered any in the art world—more likely possibilities must be examined. […]

Book Title: Hannah Arendt-For Love of the World, Second Edition
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Young-Bruehl Elisabeth
Abstract: "A story of surprising drama . . . . At last, we can see Arendt whole."-Jim Miller, Newsweek"Indispensable to anyone interested in the life, the thought, or . . . the example of Hannah Arendt."-Mark Feeney,Boston Globe
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bk2f

CHAPTER 3 The Life of a Jewess from: Hannah Arendt
Abstract: In January 1929 Hannah Arendt attended a masquerade ball in Berlin, a bal de Parissponsored for fund-raising by a group of Marxists who were trying to keep a small political magazine afloat. The dance was held at the Museum of Ethnology, and the guests came in suitably ethnological costumes—Hannah Arendt as an Arab harem girl. She spent the evening with the young Jewish philosopher Günther Stern, whom she had not seen since he attended Heidegger’s 1925 Marburg seminar as a postdoctoral student.

CHAPTER 4 Stateless Persons from: Hannah Arendt
Abstract: After arranging for her mother’s safe return to Königsberg, Hannah Arendt went to Paris in the fall of 1933 and rejoined Günther Stern. They lived together, had common friends and activities, but their marriage was never restored. Companionship and the difficult practical business of securing food and lodging continued to bind them; and such bonds, between people who hardly knew what to expect from one day to the next at the hands of “that old trickster, World-History,” were important to them both. To friends like Hans Jonas, who visited them shortly after the Stavisky scandals of 1934, they still presented

[PART 3: Introduction] from: Hannah Arendt
Abstract: “THE WORLD AND THE PEOPLE WHO INHABIT IT ARE NOT the same. The world lies in between people,”¹ wrote Hannah Arendt, fully aware that a natural, untroubled “in-between” with one’s fellows had not been considered since Goethe’s time as the mark of great thinkers, or even as a condition greatly desired by them. To modern people, Lessing’s model man of genius— Sein glücklicher Geschmack ist der Geschmack der Welt(“his felicitous taste is the world’s taste”)—is an unknown. Even Lessing himself could not find a serene relation with the world such as the one that Goethe had attained. “His

CHAPTER 9 America in Dark Times from: Hannah Arendt
Abstract: While Hannah Arendt was trying to think her way toward a “political morals,” her adopted country entered years of political and moral confusion as drastic as any in the postwar period. Many Americans in and around the New Left thought they were witnessing a reenactment of the decline of the Weimar Republic or France between the wars. Arendt resisted the analogy. In the mid-1960s, she thought that the American military presence in Vietnam would remain limited; she expected early withdrawal of troops, assuming that informed public opinion, which she viewed as solidly against the war, would prevail. In April 1965,

Book Title: Passage to Modernity-An Essay on the Hermeneutics of Nature and Culture
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Dupré Louis
Abstract: Did modernity begin with the Renaissance and end with post-modernity? In this book a distinguished scholar challenges both these assumptions. Louis Dupré discusses the roots, development, and impact of modern thought, tracing the fundamental principles of modernity to the late fourteenth century and affirming that modernity is still an influential force in contemporary culture.The combination of late medieval theology and early Italian humanism shattered the traditional synthesis that had united cosmic, human, and transcendent components in a comprehensive idea of nature. Early Italian humanism transformed the traditional worldview by its unprecedented emphasis on human creativity. The person emerged as the sole source of meaning while nature was reduced to an object and transcendence withdrew into a "supernatural" realm. Dupré analyzes this fragmentation as well as the writings of those who reacted against it-philosophers like Cusanus and Bruno, humanists like Ficino and Erasmus, theologians like Baius and Jansenius, mystics like Ignatius Loyola and Francis de Sales, and theosophists like Weigel and Boehme.Baroque culture briefly reunited the human, cosmic, and transcendent components, but since that time the disintegrating forces have increased in strength. Despite post-modern criticism, the principles of early modernity continue to dominate the climate of our time. Passage to Modernityis not so much a critique as a search for the philosophical meaning of the epochal change achieved by those principles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bm6t

Introduction from: Passage to Modernity
Abstract: The idea of modernity has long attracted critical attention. Many hold its principles responsible for various ills that threaten to drain our culture of meaning and purpose. Those charges presuppose that we know how to distinguish the modernfrom thepremodern. Most critics, however, finding it unnecessary to be precise on this issue, remain satisfied with reversing the praise that earlier generations showered upon an allegedly modern mode of thinking and acting. While they exalted rational objectivity, moral tolerance, and individual choice as cultural absolutes, we now regard these principles with some suspicion. Undoubtedly there are good reasons to distrust

Chapter 1 Classical and Medieval Antecedents from: Passage to Modernity
Abstract: Leslie Stephen described the term natureas contrived to introduce the maximum number of equivocations into any theory it enters.¹ The semantic disintegration of what once functioned as a single, though complex, concept into a multiplicity of meanings began whenphysisbecamenaturaand was completed when, early in the modern age, nature lost two of its three original components.

Chapter 6 The Birth of the Past from: Passage to Modernity
Abstract: The modern age was the first to distinguish itself from all others by a time indicator: modo—“now.” Anxious to assert its superiority to past epochs, its culture exchanged the older claim of upholding a tradition for the one of surpassing it. A different sense of time directly followed the new sense of freedom. An unprecedented awareness grew that what humans accomplish in the transitoriness of time definitively changes the very nature of human life. History thereby suddenly acquired an existential significance that it had not possessed before. In a medieval cosmic play the human person clearly had the lead,

Chapter 8 The Attempted Reunion from: Passage to Modernity
Abstract: In this chapter I will review three major attempts to overcome the theological dualism modern culture inherited from late medieval thought, namely, those of humanist religion, the early Reformation, and Jansenist theology. According to such Christian humanists as Valla, Erasmus, and Ficino, a universal divine attraction sanctifies the natural order and draws it back to its source. Archaic religion, ancient philosophy, Hebrew and Christian revelation—in an order of increasing intensity—all responded to the same divine impulse. Generally speaking, humanism offered more an alternative than an answer to the questions raised by fifteenth-century School theology. Humanists, even when acquainted

Chapter 9 A Provisional Synthesis from: Passage to Modernity
Abstract: In this final chapter I shall consider three responses to the religious predicament that, at least temporarily, succeeded in reuniting modern culture with its transcendent component. We can hardly speak of a single movement since a variety of individuals and groups belonging to different camps worked, for often opposite reasons, toward the goal of restoring an all-inclusive religious vision to their world. The pursuit of that common vision gave birth to a new Christian humanism in the Reformation as well as in the Counter-Reformation. It included Catholics and Protestants, mystics and Baroque artists. In differing degrees and by different methods

introduction from: Pushkin's Historical Imagination
Abstract: The analysis of the relationship between history and fiction—a problem that has stimulated European thought since the time of Aristotle, was developed by Vico, and then elaborated in structural and post-structural theory—has special relevance in the Russian context in general and for the study of Pushkin in particular. The beginning of the nineteenth century was a turning point in the development of both Russian literary and historical imagination. This was the time of artistic experimentation, when old genres were rethought and new ones proliferated. The Romanticist interest in history generated an intense growth in historical fiction and history

Book Title: Interpreting Interpretation-The Limits of Hermeneutic Psychoanalysis
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Saks Elyn R.
Abstract: Psychoanalytic interpretation, according to the hermeneutic view, is concerned with meaning rather than facts or causes. In this provocative book, Elyn R. Saks focuses closely on what hermeneutic psychoanalysis is and how the approaches of hermeneutic psychoanalysts differ. She finds that although these psychoanalysts use the same words, concepts, images, and analogies, they hold to at least five different positions on the truth of psychoanalytic interpretations. Saks locates within these five models the thought of such prominent analysts as Roy Schafer, Donald Spence, and George Klein. Then, approaching each model from the patient's point of view, the author reaches important conclusions about treatments that patients not only will-but should-reject.If patients understood the true nature of the various models of hermeneutic psychoanalysis, Saks argues, they would spurn the story model, which asks patients to believe interpretations that do not purport to be true; that is, the psychoanalyst simply tells stories that give meaning to patients' lives, the truth of which is not considered relevant. And patients would question the metaphor and the interpretations-as-literary-criticism models, which propose views of psychoanalysis that may be unsatisfying. In addition to discussing which hermeneutic models of treatment are plausible, Saks discusses the nature of metaphorical truth. She arrives at some penetrating insights into the theory of psychoanalysis itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bpmh

1 Introduction from: Interpreting Interpretation
Abstract: Like other disciplines in our universities, psychoanalysis has lately been reinterpreted as a hermeneutic discipline. Indeed, many traditional hermeneuts have singled out psychoanalysis, among the human sciences, as the exemplar of a hermeneutic discipline, and many psychoanalysts proclaim themselves converts to the hermeneutic reading of their discipline. An equally large number of psychoanalysts, however, repudiate that reading and reaffirm traditional understandings. The arguments for their repudiation are many, but in this book I am concerned with one in particular: the idea that, if patients were informed of the true nature of psychoanalysis on the hermeneutic reading, they would reject psychoanalysis

4 The Plausibility of the Story Model of Hermeneutic Psychoanalysis from: Interpreting Interpretation
Abstract: I want to evaluate the five visions of hermeneutic analysis primarily in terms of the argument from patient rejection; each vision may have additional weaknesses and strengths that I do not discuss. The story model is most vulnerable to the argument, and I devote the most attention to it. The other versions of hermeneutic psychoanalysis are less vulnerable to the argument or possibly vulnerable to it only in a different form.¹ Thus, in the course of discussing the models of hermeneutic psychoanalysis, I identify a strong and a weak version of the argument from patient rejection. Later I return to

2 Psychological Healing in Ancient Greece and Rome from: Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Three types of healing in the ancient world have often been differentiated—magical, religious, and empirico-rational—and these three have frequently been noted to have been inextricably interwoven with one another. Each type has had associated with it a particular type of healer—the sorcerermagician, the priest, and the physician, respectively. Not infrequently, two or more of these roles were interwoven and vested in a single person.

4 The Listening Healer from: Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Among other things, a healer is commonly a person to whom a sufferer tells things; and, out of his listening, the healer develops the basis for his therapeutic interventions. The psychological healer, in particular, is one who listens in order to learn and to understand; and, from the fruits of this listening, he or she develops the basis for reassuring, advising, consoling, comforting, interpreting, explaining, or otherwise intervening.

6 Catharsis and Abreaction from: Care of the Psyche
Abstract: The term catharsiswas derived from the Greekkatharsis,meaning purification, fromkathairein,meaning to cleanse or purify. In the original edition of theOxford English Dictionaryin 1893, it was defined as “purgation of the excrements of the body; esp. evacuation of the bowels.” In addition to this meaning, the adjectivecatharticwas given a second, more general, meaning of “cleansing, purifying, purging.”¹ By the time theOED Supplementwas published in 1933, the meanings ofcatharsishad been extended to include (1) “the purification of the emotions by vicarious experience, esp. through the drama (in reference to Aristotle’s

7 Confession and Confiding from: Care of the Psyche
Abstract: The term confessionis defined as “the disclosing of something the knowledge of which by others is considered humiliating or prejudicial to the person confessing: a making known or acknowledging of one’s fault, wrong, crime, weakness, etc.” Although this definition encompasses matters of special importance in the traditions of both law and religion, it is the religious association that is relevant to the history of psychological healing. In that tradition, it has been considered “a religious act: the acknowledging of sin or sinfulness.” More specifically, it became “auricular confession”: that is, “addressed to the ear; told privately in the ear.”¹

8 Consolation and Comfort from: Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Consolation—“the act of consoling, cheering, or comforting... alleviation of sorrow or mental distress”¹—would seem to be one of the oldest among the modes of psychological healing. With its verb,to console,defined as “to comfort in mental distress or depression; to alleviate the sorrow of (any one); ‘to free from the sense of misery,’ ” we are discussing a rich tradition of ministering to troubled persons. Distress in response to misfortune has been part of the human story since time immemorial. And one’s fellows’ inclination to respond to that distress with some effort to comfort or console seems

12 Suggestion from: Care of the Psyche
Abstract: As noted in the chapter on mesmerism and hypnotism, the language we associate with healing through suggestion did not emerge until the latter part of the nineteenth century. In the wake of Bernheim’s suggestive therapeuticsin the 1880s, suggestion became a recognized element in psychological healing and has continued as such ever since. To some degree, though, this is misleading, as suggestive influences in healing long antedated the mesmerism and hypnotism out of which suggestion seemed to emerge.

17 Self-Observation and Introspection from: Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Human beings have long observed the operations of their own minds or inspected the flow of their own mental events, whether in an effort to know more about themselves or for the grander purpose of increasing their knowledge of “mind.” The mental activities that came to be known as consciousness—sensations,

Introduction from: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) OLMSTED WENDY
Abstract: Perhaps not since the Renaissance, when the rhetorical theologies and theological rhetorics of such figures as Thomas More, Desiderius Erasmus, and Philipp Melanchthon drew on the equally rhetorical Saint Augustine, the Church Fathers, and the Bible, have students of rhetoric and religion had so much to say to one another. Since the mid-1980s, primarily in journals but also in an increasing number of books, scholars in one field have been drawing out significant lines of inquiry and posing provocative questions to those in the other: Are rhetoric and religion in some sense “essentially” wedded? In general, what are the rhetorical

9 Prophetic Rhetoric and Mystical Rhetoric from: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) TRACY DAVID
Abstract: Perhaps we have finally reached the end of Perhaps We have finally reached the end of the more familiar discussions of Freud and religion. Surely we do not need another round of theologians showing the “ultimate concern” in the works of Freud. Nor do we really need psychoanalysts announcing, once again, that religions are finally, indeed totally, illusion. Orthodox religionists have long since noted the many obvious religious analogues in Freud’s work: the founding of the orthodox church, the purges of the heretical “Gnostic” Jung and the “Anabaptist” Adler, the debates over the translations of the sacred texts and their

10 Apophatic Analogy: from: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) CARLSON THOMAS A.
Abstract: The rhetorical modes of “negative” or “apophatic” theology — and of its twin, “mystical” theology — have since the 1970s attracted serious inquiry and extended discussion not only among theologians but also among literary theorists, and philosophers, who tend to share three interconnected concerns: the human subject’s finitude, its situation in language, and its desire. Among post-Heideggerian thinkers in particular, the fascination with textual and discursive traditions deriving from the negative theology of Pseudo-Dionysius (flourished ca. 500) almost always involves a fascination as well with the radically finite, desiring subject of language—to the point that one might suspect contemporary interest in

11 Machiavellian Rhetoric in Paradise lost from: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) KAHN VICTORIA
Abstract: Better than any other single figure in Milton, Satan in ParadiseLost exemplifies the intersection of rhetoric, theology, the Machiavel, and the republican.¹ Perhaps the most famous nondramatic Machiavel of the Renaissance, Satan is a skillful orator and casuist, who uses rhetorical force and fraud to wheedle and coerce his fellow fallen angels. Not surprisingly, the topics of Machiavellism — the relation ofvirtùor virtue to success, means to ends, persuasion to coercion, force to consent — appear regularly in his speeches. What is surprising, or truly diabolical, however, is the way Satan attributes the stereotypically Machiavellian understanding of these topics

16 The Rhetoric of Philosemitism from: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) KRUPNICK MARK
Abstract: Since 1980 both Jewish and non-Jewish scholars have made important contributions to the understanding of antisemitism, dubbed by Robert Wistrich “the longest hatred.”¹ But little attention has been given to antisemitism’s opposite, philosemitism.² That lacuna exists even though it has been increasingly recognized that Jewish history is not a story of unremitting worldwide persecution. Allowing for rough patches, America in particular has been hospitable to Jews. Even Antisemitism in America,a scholarly history of that unhappy topic, concludes with chapters on the second half of the twentieth century entitled “The Tide Ebbs” and “At Home in America.”³

9 Philosophical History from: Faces of History
Abstract: The Enlightenment conception of history, in its classic form, is based on one of the oldest historical conceits. Humanity is like individual members of the species, and the experience of the human race over time is much like the life of a person, from generation and growth to, presumably if not predictably, corruption and death, whence history, for Ferguson, Lessing, and Condorcet no less than for Florus and Augustine, can be understood as “the education of the human race.” Education, or the neologism “culture” (which referred to the same thing in the eighteenth century), was of course seen differently by

Chapter 12 Is There a Sign of Freedom? from: Metaphysics in Ordinary Language
Abstract: There is more than one way in which to honor the work of a thinker. I shall try to recognize the contribution of Josef Simon, not by a summary of his achievements or even by a textual analysis of his work, but by addressing the theme which he has so subtly articulated in the two books Wahrheit als FreiheitandPhilosophie des Zeichens. In the course of a single essay, I cannot pretend to do more than to indicate how Simon’s thinking has assisted me in stating the difficulties I see in contemporary philosophy of language.

Chapter 13 Philosophy and Ordinary Experience from: Metaphysics in Ordinary Language
Abstract: I propose to deal with the question of the relation between philosophy and ordinary experience. This sounds quite straightforward, but I am afraid that it is actually an unusually difficult problem. It is a striking fact of our century that philosophy has become increasingly concerned with ordinary experience, ordinary language, everyday life, or the life-world, to cite four often-used expressions. This concern is evident in both wings of the two major contemporary philosophical movements, which are popularly if inaccurately designated as the analytical and the continental or phenomenological schools. Interest in everyday or ordinary language has clearly been stimulated by

4 NARRATION AND NARRATIVITY IN FILM AND FICTION from: Semiotics and Interpretation
Abstract: Let us assume that there is something called narrative that can exist apart from any particular method of narration or any particular narrative utterance, as we assume that there is something called the English language that exists apart from any particular form of discourse or any individual speech act in English. Narration is, first of all, a kind of human behavior. It is specifically a mimetic or representative behavior, through which human beings communicate certain kinds of message. The modes of narration may vary extraordinarily. (In passing, I should say that I am aware of our customary distinction between what

6 SEMIOTIC APPROACHES TO JOYCE’S “EVELINE” from: Semiotics and Interpretation
Author(s) Joyce James
Abstract: The purpose of this chapter is a simple one. I wish to argue, and to demonstrate as well as possible, that certain semiotic approaches to fictional texts, each incomplete in itself, can be combined in a manner that facilitates the practical criticism of fiction. The three approaches I wish to combine into a single methodology are the following:

8 UNCODING MAMA: from: Semiotics and Interpretation
Abstract: It is a tenet of semiotic studies—and one to which I fully subscribe—that much of what we take to be natural is in fact cultural. Part of the critical enterprise of this discipline is a continual process of defamiliarization: the exposing of conventions, the discovering of codes that have become so ingrained we do not notice them but believe ourselves to behold through their transparency the real itself. Nowhere is this process more important or more powerful than in our perceptions of our own bodies. We think we know ourselves directly, but both the “we” that know and

Editorial Introduction from: Types of Christian Theology
Author(s) PLACHER WILLIAM C.
Abstract: When we undertook the task of assembling for publication Hans Frei’s typology of modern Christian theology, we were acutely aware that the book Frei wished to write could no longer be written; we have thus decided to make available some obviously fragmentary manuscripts without disguising their unfinished character.

1 Proposal for a Project from: Types of Christian Theology
Abstract: I propose to complete a book on types of modern Christian thought, which will itself be part of a larger project on the figure of Jesus of Nazareth in England and Germany—in high culture, ecclesiastical and otherwise, as well as popular culture—since 1700.

4 Five Types of Theology from: Types of Christian Theology
Abstract: In the first type that I am proposing, theology as a philosophical disciplinein the academy takes complete priority over Christian self-description within the religious community called the Church, and Christian selfdescription, in its subordinate place, tends to emulate the philosophical character of academic theology by being as general as possible or as little specific about Christianity as it can be, and the distinction between external and internal description is basically unimportant. In Gordon Kaufman’s monograph,An Essay on Theological Method, the task of the theologian is to search out the rules governing the use of the word or concept

7 The End of Academic Theology? from: Types of Christian Theology
Abstract: It is necessary to refer again to Karl Barth at this point. He proposed that Christian hermeneutics is a procedure whose taxonomy or phenomenology may be very simply set forth in three logically distinct but in fact united elements: explicatio, meditatio, applicatio. Applicatio, the last of these, is for him the transition from the sense to the use of scriptural texts. In his “rules” for using philosophical schemes or some subjective modality in reading, he was talking aboutmeditatio. The proponents of type 5 may be described as saying thatat best, understanding the Bible—and Christian language more generally

12 Consciousness as Time from: On the Nature of Consciousness
Abstract: We have begun to consider consciousness in terms of its “with” — as the socially shared forms of awareness in self-referential symbolic beings. In addition, since symbolic cognition reuses the here-there, whence-whither dimensions of the array, this human “with” extends into the envelope of flow shared by all sentient motile beings. It remains to turn our attention back toward the “in” of consciousness. Human consciousness is inseparable from a being-in-the-world. The life worlds of sentient creatures are also “in” the physical universe as understood by modern physical science. Accordingly, we would expect the being of sentient creatures to be broadly

13 Consciousness as Space: from: On the Nature of Consciousness
Abstract: A number of investigators from both sides of the interface between physical theory and consciousness have called attention to some intriguing parallels between various aspects of modern physics and eastern meditative traditions (Bohm, 1980; Capra, 1975; LeShan, 1969; Grof, 1980; Wallace, 1986; Wolf, 1990). Vedanta and aspects of Buddhism picture a “unified field” comprising physical reality and consciousness, both of them based on minute particle energies in vibration. The difference, of course, is that even the most speculative of physicists, who understand consciousness as a subatomic quantum reality, are nonetheless deriving mind from the principles of the physical universe. This

Book Title: Does Psychoanalysis Work?- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): WALDRON SHERWOOD
Abstract: This important book is a thorough survey of every major study of the efficacy of psychoanalytic treatment. The authors-all well-known psychoanalysts-critically analyze the studies and their findings, discuss the issues that have been and should be explored in such studies, and examine the problems in conducting research into psychoanalytic outcomes. The authors begin by providing a definition of psychoanalysis, establishing central psychoanalytic goals, and determining what questions need to be addressed in assessing whether analysis is effective. They then describe their methods and criteria for evaluating modern research on psychoanalytic outcome and apply these criteria to four major studies of adult psychoanalytic patients, several studies of child and adolescent analysis, and some small-group studies. They find that all the studies show that psychoanalysis is an effective treatment for many patients-and that some cherished assumptions about psychoanalysis are probably wrong. In the final part of the book, the authors address the challenges of collecting empirical data on psychoanalysis and explore the possibilities inherent in the single-case study.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bvwm

[PART I Introduction] from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Despite the extensive advances in psychotherapy research during the past quarter-century (Garfield and Bergin, 1994; Roth and Fonagy, 1996), there have been few systematic efforts to address questions about psychoanalysis as therapy. Psychotherapy research, as a distinct and largely independent discipline, not to be confused with the practice of psychotherapy, involves systematic and empirical studies of psychotherapy process and outcome. It has gradually moved from fledgling attempts at empirical investigation, through a period of attempts to approximate a model of then-current medical research, to an increasing focus on interactive, subjective, and humanistic aspects of study (Orlinsky and Russel, 1994). Psychoanalysts

3 Predicting the Course and Outcome of Analysis from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Every psychoanalyst of some clinical experience is aware of apparently unpromising analytic situations that turned out well and of analyses that began favorably but ended badly. Often, with benefit of hindsight, it is possible to identify sources of strength or weakness that were not recognized at the outset. Examples of such situations include barely mentioned but psychologically lifesaving relationships in the patient’s early childhood, or disturbances of thinking not manifest in the initial consultation. The analyst’s particular unresolved conflicts that lead to countertransference interferences may impede the ability to work with otherwise promising patients. Sometimes the reasons for unexpected outcomes

11 Clinical Follow-Up Studies and Case Studies from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Readers of the earlier chapters in this section will be understandably disappointed that, despite the enormous efforts of investigators, systematic research seems to have addressed few questions that are germane to clinical psychoanalytic practice. Either the population studied is too different from the patients ordinarily taken into psychoanalysis, or the measures of outcome and process are too crude to answer the questions that most interest analysts. The analyst wishes for investigative methods that are closer to the methods customarily used in psychoanalysis, addressing issues that confront her in daily work. The follow-up methods first introduced by Arnold Pfeffer meet many

13 Some General Problems of Psychoanalytic Research from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Increasingly sophisticated research methods promise results from systematic investigations that are more psychoanalytically significant than those of past investigations. However, systematic investigation in psychoanalysis is unfortunately associated in many analysts’ minds, and also in the minds of many friends and foes of psychoanalysis, with a long history of fault finding. This attitude is epitomized in the criticisms of Eysenck (1952, 1966), Hook (1959), Grünbaum (1984, 1994), and Crews and colleagues (1995). Each of these authors asserts a rigidly positivistic view of science and shows that psychoanalysis

20 The Single-Case Method from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: All that we have considered in this volume now brings us to our penultimate point—namely, that single-case methods are the most promising line of approach to exploring the efficacy of psychoanalysis. Case studies differ from case reports in that they employ rigorous and systematic means of collecting, analyzing, and reporting data, with the goal of making the epistemological status of the investigation clear. Case studies explore a single situation in depth and attempt to reach valid conclusions on the basis of such exploration. Because this method is most commonly used to describe complex phenomena, and because many case studies

Paul among the Storytellers: from: Paul and Scripture
Author(s) Fisk Bruce N.
Abstract: Only a generation ago it was possible for a ranking Pauline scholar to offer a learned treatise on Paul’s relationship to Palestinian Judaism and say virtually nothing about how Scripture functioned in either context. Times have changed. The quest for Paul’s “Jewishness” inspired by E. P. Sanders (among others),¹ combined with the increasing availability of primary sources and the literary turn in late twentieth-century biblical scholarship, meant it was inevitable that Paul’s use of Scripture would come to be compared closely with the way Scripture functioned among the tradents of Second Temple Judaism. Thus today the claim that Paul’s use

Does Paul Respect the Context of His Quotations? from: Paul and Scripture
Author(s) Moyise Steve
Abstract: It is clear from even a cursory glance at the literature on Paul’s use of Scripture that studies tend to fall into one of two camps: some regard him as a great exegete, laying bare the meaning of Scripture in the light of the Christ-event,¹ while others view him as an expert in rhetoric, using Scripture to support positions that may have been reached on other grounds. Both sides recognize the importance of the Christ-event for Paul’s interpretations, but they differ as to its role. The former sees Scripture as a genuine object of study, able to “speak” to the

The Use of Scripture in Philippians from: Paul and Scripture
Author(s) Fowl Stephen
Abstract: I should begin by confessing that I was and still am a huge fan of Richard Hays’s Echoes of Scripture in the Letters of Paul.¹ I found his readings compelling, as they often resolve textual conundrums and opening new vistas for thinking about familiar texts. It is one of those books that changes the shape of conversations. Scholars now think of the connections between Paul’s letters and the Old Testament in significantly richer, deeper, and more comprehensive ways as the result of this book.

Writing “in the Image” of Scripture: from: Paul and Scripture
Author(s) Sumney Jerry L.
Abstract: Discussion of Paul’s use of Scripture has grown exponentially since the publication of Richard Hays’s Echoes of Scripture in the Letters of Paultwenty years ago. His work has stimulated important discussions of methods for identifying and interpreting allusions, as well as of analyses of Paul’s hermeneutic. Even though I will treat Colossians as a pseudonymous work, the recent work on Paul’s use of Israel’s Scriptures demands that one stake out some initial positions about identifying allusions and their use in the broader Greco-Roman culture.

6 Possible Analogies for a Philosophy of Ancient Israelite Religion from: The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: In the previous chapter we looked at three descriptive philosophical currents that offer tools for the clarifying of concepts, beliefs, and practices in religion. The objective was to get biblical scholars’ heads around the idea that we engage in descriptive philosophy of religion that limits itself to the elucidation of meaning. Now we go one step further than theorizing about a philosophical perspective onIsraelite religion (the objective genitive) by imagining the presence of philosophical assumptionsinIsraelite religion (the subjective genitive). In order to do this we shall be broadening the very concept of “philosophy” via possible analogies to

14 Religion and Morality in Ancient Israel from: The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: The word “ethics” does not appear in biblical Hebrew. Of course, this does not mean that there were no assumptions about the nature of morality in ancient Israel. This fact has been recognized, yet up to now, scholarly discussions on ethics in the Hebrew Bible have been primarily concerned with what philosophers call substantivetheories of morality. These includedescriptiveethics, which provides a supposedly unbiased account of the Hebrew Bible’s moral beliefs; andnormativeethics, which classifies the contents of moral beliefs in the Hebrew Bible viaethical theoryand discerning the intricate operations of itsapplied ethicsin

2 Beyond the “Ordinary Reader” and the “Invisible Intellectual”: from: The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Nadar Sarojini
Abstract: At the World Forum on Liberation and Theology in Belem, Brazil, January 2009, I was asked to respond to a panel of presentations that dealt with the topic of liberation and embodiment.¹ Chung Hyung Kung, the eminent Korean feminist theologian, began her reflections praising liberation theology for saving her from destruction—physical, mental, and spiritual—but lamented at length about the question one of her Korean students at Union Theological Seminary, New York, had posed to her. It seemed that this student earnestly and seriously wanted to know why, after forty-odd years of liberation theology, the world still faced so

3 Dealing (with) the Past and Future of Biblical Studies: from: The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Punt Jeremy
Abstract: This contribution proceeds from the southern African context as its specific social location for reflecting on some aspects of the future of the biblical studies enterprise in light of its past. Cognizant of important changes in the region since the dawn of the post-Apartheid era, the study takes its point of departure from and interacts with the complex settings and legacies of South Africa, given its rich human diversity as a former Dutch settlement, a British colony, and an Apartheid state. In so doing, it attempts to understand the future of biblical studies while recognizing that it does so amid

5 For A Better Future in Korean Biblical Studies: from: The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Ahn Yong-Sung
Abstract: Korean Christianity has been marked by two features in particular: on the one hand, astonishing church growth, especially among Protestant churches, which has generated megachurches of more than ten thousand members; on the other hand, minjung theology and the active participation of theologians in politics. Both aspects can be understood as responses to the same social phenomenon—miraculous economic growth alongside political suppression, or what has often been referred to as “the tyranny of development.” The majority of Korean churches have supported the side of “development,” strengthening the significance of economic success with their Christian teachings of blessings, while a

6 Biblical Studies in a Rising Asia: from: The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Chia Philip
Abstract: The rise of modern biblical studies as a discipline has been, since the heyday of the Enlightenment and the Reformation, a predominantly Western institutional-academic phenomenon closely associated with the modern development of Western culture and the academic enterprise. With the expansion of Western civilization and Christianity in the modern world, biblical scholarship gained access into nonWestern cultures. Western imperial/colonial power spread globally via sea and land, fleets and gunpowder, under the Geistand project of the Enlightenment and modernity. It brought with it the biblical text, which it readily made available to nonWestern peoples, together with modern tools of interpretation

7 The Future of a Nonexistent Past: from: The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Kirova Milena
Abstract: Every narrative addressing the state of biblical studies in Bulgaria should begin with an odd and traumatic situation in the distant past of the country. Christianity was not at all a popular religion until the mid-ninth century. Each of the two tribes comprising the Bulgarian state, the local Slavs and the old Bulgarians (or Protobulgarians), who had migrated from Asia, had their established pantheon and rituals. In contrast to the aristocratic circles in both tribes, various pagan gods coexisted quite peacefully in the lives of the common people. The situation in question took place in the year 865 c.e.

10 Paper Is Patient, History Is Not: from: The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Pereira Nancy Cardoso
Abstract: The Bible in Latin America is many things at once.¹ As a “book” of a historically imposed religion, the Bible participates in the religious and cultural polyphony of Latin America in a way that is conflictive and marked by ambiguities. As a religion imposed, Christianity has no positive contribution to make. There is no way to change such an assessment without compromising facts as well as historical interpretations well known to all.

21 Signifying on the Fetish: from: The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Wimbush Vincent L.
Abstract: This essay makes the case for a new critical orientation that has as its focus not historical criticism and its ever increasing razzle-dazzle offshoots, but a critical history (Nora 1994, 300) involving engagement and fathoming of forms of representations and expressivity (including artifacts), modes of performativity, structures of social-cultural-psychological dynamics and power relations—in effect, the phenomenon most often referred to with the English shorthand “Scriptures.” In this essay about the future of a discourse about Scriptures that has been complexly oriented to the study of the past, I arrogate to myself the right and privilege to think with that

6 Augustine and Aquinas on Original Sin: from: Aquinas the Augustinian
Author(s) Johnson Mark
Abstract: My interest in this topic stems from my graduate school days, when I began studying the Fathers and then the moral teaching of Thomas Aquinas. When it came to assessing the reach and influence of Augustine’s teachings in the thirteenth century, our teachers instructed us always to remember that Augustine’s principal conduit was the Libri sententiarum of Peter Lombard, who had gathered together quotations from many theological figures but most especially from Augustine and had placed them into his “book of opinions,” arranging them dogmatically, in order to cover the Christian religion.¹ The success of Lombard’s text, both inside the

7 “Without Me You Can Do Nothing”: from: Aquinas the Augustinian
Author(s) Mansini Guy
Abstract: Both St. Augustine and St. Thomas commented on the Gospel according to John. As we might expect, St. Thomas learned much about the fourth gospel from St. Augustine. In his own commentary, St. Thomas cites him more than any other patristic writer. However, and again as we should expect, he had lights of his own in meditating on the Light that shone in the darkness, the Light that neither St. Augustine nor St. Thomas supposed they could comprehend. “As Augustine says, to attain to God with the mind is a great blessing, but to comprehend Him is impossible.”¹ This essay

11 Wisdom Eschatology in Augustine and Aquinas from: Aquinas the Augustinian
Author(s) Lamb Matthew L.
Abstract: The theme “Aquinas the Augustinian” provides an occasion to overcome some contemporary stereotypes that pit a Platonic St. Augustine against an Aristotelian St. Thomas Aquinas. Augustine, in this scenario, is a world-despising rigorist wrapped up in a subject-centered, self-communicative approach to questions, whereas Aquinas is identified with a world-affirming, object-centered metaphysical approach.¹ There are differences between the two theological giants. But the differences are far more complementary than contradictory. The erection of contradictory contrasts has occasioned misreadings by contemporary writers unaware of the Cartesian or Kantian lenses through which they project onto the ancient texts typically modern and postmodern dualisms

The Conversion of Jews to Islam from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Hatimi Mohammed
Abstract: The Islamic scholarly literature granted little place to the conversion of the Jews to Islam. Although Christians did so more often for many reasons, many Jews did convert and contributed toward shaping Muslim civilization. The absence of Jewish converts in the collective memory is linked in many cases to Islamic resentment at not having been successful in gathering the Jews, despite the fact that, early on, Muhammad had hoped to find in them an ally on which to build the new religion he was professing. It is therefore the refusal to convert that became a major theme in the Arabic

The Legal Status of the Jews and Muslims in the Christian States from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Tolan John
Abstract: In the Muslim societies of the Middle Ages, Jews and Christians had the status of dhimmīs, protected but at the same time inferior. In the Christian kingdoms of the Middle Ages, Jews and sometimes Muslims lived under similar conditions with respect to the Christians. But their status became increasingly precarious in many European countries. Minorities were subjected to violence and expulsions. For example, the Jews were expelled from France in 1182, again in 1306, and once more in 1394; from England in 1290; from Spain in 1492; and from Portugal in 1497. The Muslims were expelled from Sicily in the

Jews and Muslims in the Latin Kingdom of Jerusalem from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Frenkel Yehoshua
Abstract: Yet, with the passing of time, the Franks adopted a sociopolitical policy that did not differ

In Emergent Morocco from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Gottreich Emily Benichou
Abstract: Morocco as a protonational entity came into existence in the period stretching from the late fifteenth to the early nineteenth century. During this period its borders became fixed, its cities emerged as world capitals, and its defining political ideologies and institutions, including sharifism, maraboutism, the abīd al-būkhāri, and themakhzen(to name just a few), grew firmly entrenched. Meanwhile, Moroccan Jewish identity, despite its purported timelessness, likewise cohered into its recognizable form as a result of the new geopolitical and spiritual realities. The protonational identities forged during this period would be increasingly challenged by European intervention in the coming centuries,

Jews of Yemen from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Tobi Yosef
Abstract: According to their own tradition and according to new archaeological findings, Jews lived in the country later known as Yemen at least since the seventh century B.C.E. It seems that trade was the main incentive of Israelites to immigrate to that country. Their position was so strong that around 370 C.E., the major political power in Yemen, the Kingdom of Himyar, adopted Judaism, until the Ethiopian Christians took control of the country and destroyed the Jewish state. Since 629 the country was governed by Islam and the Jews became subject to Muslim discriminatory rules of dhimmīand were forced to

Israel in the Face of Its Victories from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Charbit Denis
Abstract: The Six-Day War of 1967 ought to have been the crowning achievement of the pan-Arab strategy of reconquest: despite their differences of regime, leadership, and diplomatic orientation, and the rivalries between one state and another, a coalition linking Egypt, Syria, and Jordan galvanized the crowds. The response of Israeli public opinion tended toward panic in the face of that increasing tension, that unprecedented anti-Zionist and anti-Semitic provocation, after eleven years of implicit peaceful coexistence. But the top advisers favored a preemptive war (which consisted, in this case, in anticipating the enemy attack by a few weeks, or even a few

Survival of the Jewish Community in Turkey from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Seni Nora
Abstract: In 1923, the year Mustafa Kemal Atatürk’s population, Republic of Turkey was created, there were 78,000 members of the Jewish community in Turkey. By the 2000s, the figure had fallen to 17,000. That demographic decline, which even now continues at a slower pace, stands in contrast to the rather prosperous situation of the Jewish population, whose institutions have experienced a clear revival since the late 1990s. That paradox is an expression of the complex relations between the Turkish nation and its Jewish community, and it demonstrates equally complex connections between history and memory. Despite the drop in its population, the

Muslim Anti-Semitism: from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Cohen Mark R.
Abstract: The anti-Semitism that is so widespread in the Muslim world today first came to the attention of Israelis and the Diaspora thanks to Yehoshafat Harkabi’s pathbreaking 1968 book, Arab Attitudes to Israel, published in both English and Hebrew.¹ He called itArabanti-Semitism, but today in the wake of Islamist anti-Semitism, and in light of its presence in Iran and other non-Arab Islamic countries, had he been revising his book, it is likely that Harkabi would have named itMuslim Attitudes toward Israel.

Recapitulating the Positives without Giving in to Myth from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Goldberg Sylvie Anne
Abstract: After more than fourteen centuries of living together, Jews and Muslims now find themselves in a historical context in which their relationship has profoundly changed. The Jewish presence in Islamic territories has been receding since the second half of the twentieth century, and the Jews are now almost completely absent. The majority (four-fifths) now live in North America or Israel. The fear, therefore, is that the imaginary Jew will replace the real Jew in Islamic representations. The effect of the separation between the two groups can be felt on the other side as well. Jewish consciousness is not free from

Arabic Translations of the Hebrew Bible from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Metwali Hanan Kamel
Abstract: The Hebrew Bible has been translated many times since antiquity, by both Jews and Christians. In the third century BCE, the Torah was rendered into Greek for the Hellenophone community of Alexandria : this was the famous version known as the Septuagint. The tradition of the Targum developed concurrently in the Jewish communities of the Middle East , whose vernacular language had been Aramaic in its various dialects since the Babylonian exile in the sixth century. The biblical text was translated into Aramaic and was recited verse by verse at the synagogue, alongside the liturgical reading of the Torah. The

Respectful Rival: from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Russ-Fishbane Elisha
Abstract: Islam occupies a unique position in the medieval Jewish imagination. From the tenth through the thirteenth centuries, Islamic society was for many Jews the bastion of civilization and culture, in which Jews played a vital and transformative role.¹ Yet as members of a proud religious minority, many Jews regarded the religion of Islam with deep ambivalence. Jews at once repudiated Islam as a legitimate faith while singling it out from all others as an exponent of pure monotheism on par with its Jewish precursor. As such, Islam occupied a middle position in Jewish law, outside the divine covenant yet the

Jewish Pilgrimages in Egypt from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Youssef Suzan
Abstract: Cults of saints are a fundamental phenomenon in Egyptian popular culture. They attest to the preservation of a large share of archaic beliefs associated with magical and totemic practices and with agrarian mythologies. The cult of “saints” ( awliyaʾfor Muslims,qaddissinfor Christians,siddiqinortsaddiqimfor Jews) manifests that continuity in everyday practices, most often orally but sometimes in written form. What is being played out is the relation between human beings and their environment but also the relation to their humanity itself, to the mental and symbolic universe reflected in language, religion, and art, all within an extreme

Aspects of Family Life among Jews in Muslim Societies from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Kailani Wasfi
Abstract: Family life, among Jews and Muslims, carried forward many cultural features that were widespread in the Middle East since antiquity. The specifics of each society also reflected the impact of the two religions as these evolved over time. The norms and practice of family life entailed ongoing adjustment among taken-for-granted lifestyles, explicit values, and canonized written sources. A systematic comparison between biblical and Qurʾanic prescriptions, or between fiqhandhalakha, would far exceed the boundaries of this article. We will thus limit ourselves to an anthropological outlook on the shared cultural values between Jews and Muslims concerning family life, as

Flavors and Memories of Shared Culinary Spaces in the Maghreb from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Bahloul Joëlle
Abstract: Over the some twelve centuries that the Jews and the Muslims lived together in the Mediterranean world and the Near East, relations between the two communities were nowhere so dense and reciprocal as in the leisurely routines of everyday life. This rich relationship between two religious communities with a turbulent history has not been documented as meticulously as their hostile relations and their segregation. The colonial period in the Maghreb, which lasted until the 1950s, was emblematic of these everyday exchanges. In analyzing Judeo-Muslim cultural and social relationships as they were expressed in the Jewish diet and Jewish cuisine in

Introduction from: Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) BERMANN SANDRA
Abstract: There has probably never been a time when issues of nation, language, and translation have been more important or more troubling than they are today. In a world where individual nation-states are increasingly enmeshed in financial and information networks, where multiple linguistic and national identities can inhabit a single state’s borders or exceed them in vast diasporas, where globalization has its serious—and often violent—discontents, and where terrorism and war transform distrust into destruction, language and translation play central, if often unacknowledged, roles. Though the reasons for this are undeniably complex, they are, at least in broad terms, understandable.

Simultaneous Interpretation: from: Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) VISSON LYNN
Abstract: Though modern simultaneous interpretation with its microphones, earphones, and sound equipment is a relatively new phenomenon, it certainly has ancient analogues.¹ In the first Letter to the Corinthians St. Paul orders, “If any man speak in an unknown tongue let it be by two, or at most by three . . . and let one interpret” (14:27). At various times interpreters have served as missionaries, liaison officers, military envoys, court interpreters, business couriers, and trade negotiators. The French drogmans (dragomans), who were trained in Oriental languages, were required not only to translate what was said but also to advise French

A Touch of Translation: from: Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) WEBER SAMUEL
Abstract: If one were to search today for a way of reflecting on the destiny of language and literature in an age dominated increasingly by electronic media, there is probably no better place to start—and perhaps even to end—than with the question of translation. This might seem a somewhat surprising assertion to make, given the widespread tendency to associate the rise of electronic media with what is usually called the “audiovisual,” as distinct from the linguistic, discursive, or textual. Such an association is, of course, by no means simply arbitrary. In 1999, the dollar value produced by the sales

Nationum Origo from: Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) LEZRA JACQUES
Abstract: Globalization has taken our tongues from us—local, autochthonous, idiomatic, ancestral tongues. Its clamorous internationalism hangs critics on a mute peg, with no common voice or general vocabulary on which to string alternative inter- or transnational forms of work, thought, and organization. And so the disarmed, heteroglot opposition takes shelter in various weak utopianisms, in weakly regulative images generally and understandably drawn from increasingly abstract domains (from reinvigorated notions of the “human” and of “humanism,” for instance or, most recently, from the sketchy descriptions of an antihegemonic Europe that Jürgen Habermas and Derrida erect against the depredations of the United

DeLillo in Greece Eluding the Name from: Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) GOURGOURIS STATHIS
Abstract: “I think fiction rescues history from its confusions.” This tentative assertion in one of the rare interviews with Don DeLillo could draw a hail of objections from historians, as it insinuates, with confident and serious nonchalance (DeLillo’s characteristic style), that history is confused. Elaborating, the novelist goes on to attribute to the writing of fiction a capacity of historical insight that the writing of history cannot possibly possess, a clarity of perception into history’s own things: “[Fiction] can operate in a deeper way: providing the balance and rhythm we don’t experience in our daily lives, in our real lives. So

[PART FOUR Introduction] from: Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Abstract: Looking to the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, the essays in this section examine the role of translation in an increasingly interwoven, globalizing world. Here, translations become exemplary “traveling texts,” capable of highlighting the complex interactions between still vital nationalisms on the one hand, and growing local and international cultures on the other. Four of these essays explore colonial and postcolonial issues in texts from francophone Africa, India, South Africa, and Latin America, while the fifth and final essay takes its literary example from the war-torn Balkans. As each “thick description” suggests, though in very different ways, translations today demand an

National Literature in Transnational Times: from: Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) COOPPAN VILASHINI
Abstract: Among the many changes we credit globalization with—including the increasing interconnection of nations, cultures, and economies, the rapid and widespread flows of persons, goods, information, and capital across national borders, and the production of new forms of identity and community—we may add the reconfiguration of academic disciplines from national to global frameworks. As a practice of critical thought, intellectual globalization is marked, as Anthony D. King notes, by “the rejection of the nationally-constituted society as the appropriate object of discourse, or unit of social and cultural analysis, and to varying degrees, a commitment to conceptualising ‘the world as

Chapter Four What Can Stories Do? from: Shattered Voices
Abstract: If a state cannot enact traditional retribution for its citizens who were victimized by the former government, is there any point in the gathering and publishing of these victims’ stories? While the story of the evolution from revenge to retribution shows us that a state must do something, must take responsibility to effect a rebalancing for the victims or risk a reversion to personal revenge, our collective imagination has given us little in the way of alternatives to state violence. The pendulum of possible responses swings without pausing from the extreme of traditional retributive justice—requiring investigations, trials, and punishment

Chapter Five Telling Stories in a Search for Justice: from: Shattered Voices
Abstract: The rapid emergence of truth commissions and their collection and creation of narratives reflects, in part, the “return to narrative” that is prominent in diverse disciplines. Historians, philosophers, theologians, moralists, anthropologists, sociologists, psychologists, psychoanalysts, artists, and even legal scholars¹ have newly and increasingly embraced narrative as a valid and powerful mode of explanation and representation of reality.² This change is characterized as a “return to narrative” because narrative, once the primary mode of discourse, has been long devalued. From the time of the classical Greeks until recently, narrative was regarded as an inferior mode of discourse, frivolous and fanciful compared

Book Title: Homo Narrans-The Poetics and Anthropology of Oral Literature
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Niles John D.
Abstract: It would be difficult to imagine what human life would be like without stories-from myths recited by Pueblo Indian healers in the kiva, ballads sung in Slovenian market squares, folktales and legends told by the fireside in Italy, to jokes told at a dinner table in Des Moines-for it is chiefly through storytelling that people possess a past. In Homo NarransJohn D. Niles explores how human beings shape their world through the stories they tell. The book vividly weaves together the study of Anglo-Saxon literature and culture with the author's own engagements in the field with some of the greatest twentieth-century singers and storytellers in the Scottish tradition. Niles ponders the nature of the storytelling impulse, the social function of narrative, and the role of individual talent in oral tradition. His investigation of the poetics of oral narrative encompasses literary works, such as the epic poems and hymns of early Greece and the Anglo-SaxonBeowulf, texts that we know only through written versions but that are grounded in oral technique. That all forms of narrative, even the most sophisticated genres of contemporary fiction, have their ultimate origin in storytelling is a point that scarcely needs to be argued. Niles's claims here are more ambitious: that oral narrative is and has long been the chief basis of culture itself, that the need to tell stories is what distinguishes humans from all other living creatures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fh9rr

Conclusion: from: Homo Narrans
Abstract: Anthony Seeger has written a fascinating book, Why Suyá Sing, about the Mouse Ceremony of the Suyá Indians of the Amazon basin (1987). In it he discusses what an ethnomusicologist can learn about Suyá society from a consideration of their singing. While this is no place to review his findings in detail, his response to the question implied in his title is worth citing here, in a book that takes oral narrative as its topic. Not only does Seeger’s response accord with my own experience in the field and at home; it has a sprightliness about it that goes well

Book Title: Shelter Blues-Sanity and Selfhood Among the Homeless
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Desjarlais Robert
Abstract: Desjarlais shows us not anonymous faces of the homeless but real people.While it is estimated that 25 percent or more of America's homeless are mentally ill, their lives are largely unknown to us. What must life be like for those who, in addition to living on the street, hear voices, suffer paranoid delusions, or have trouble thinking clearly or talking to others. Shelter Bluesis an innovative portrait of people residing in Boston's Station Street Shelter. It examines the everyday lives of more than 40 homeless men and women, both white and African-American, ranging in age from early 20s to mid-60s. Based on a sixteen-month study, it draws readers into the personal worlds of these individuals and, by addressing the intimacies of homelessness, illness, and abjection, picks up where most scholarship and journalism stops.Robert Desjarlais works against the grain of media representations of homelessness by showing us not anonymous stereotypes but individuals. He draws on conversations as well as observations, talking with and listening to shelter residents to understand how they relate to their environment, to one another, and to those entrusted with their care. His book considers their lives in terms of a complex range of forces and helps us comprehend the linkages between culture, illness, personhood, and political agency on the margins of contemporary American society.Shelter Bluesis unlike anything else ever written about homelessness. It challenges social scientists and mental health professionals to rethink their approaches to human subjectivity and helps us all to better understand one of the most pressing problems of our time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fhjmz

Five Coefficients from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: The need for housing, and questions as to which kind of accommodations best suited “the chronically and persistently mentally ill,” led to the research project with which my fieldwork was formally linked. The project, itself part of a nationwide comparative study, tried to assess the effects of two housing models on the welfare and well-being of the “consumers” participating in the study. To begin this project, “housing officers” and case managers recruited prospective subjects from the three DMH shelters. Once a person agreed to participate in the study, he or she was randomly assigned and relocated to either an “independent

The Sea of Tranquility from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: Anyone who did locate the sliding glass doors at the shaded northwest corner of the Mental Health building, which were open only during business hours, first had to pass through a circular expanse about a hundred yards wide and seventy-five yards deep that was bordered by the building on one side and two streets on the other. With its perimeter defined by a concrete ridge, the area suggested a quiet, shallow, waterless pool. “I always thought of it as a sea of tranquility,” said Stuart Coopan of this courtyard-like space (see Figure 5). Stuart was a young and usually talkative

Sensory (Dis)Orientations from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: Since people’s feelings could become part of the State Service Center when they touched, looked at, or breathed onto it, the building felt different and meant different things for different people, at different times, and from different vantage points. The building could not be read like a book, with a single meaning: its uses and meanings tied into one’s position in space and one’s place in society. While many of the residents of the building, more familiar with its nuances than most, found the unusual architecture to be dangerous and “distracting,” they also knew the structure as a place of

On the Basketball Court from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: and walked into the confines of a gym complete with shower rooms and a basketball court that provided the grounds for the men’s and women’s “dormitories.” In crossing the border between lobby and shelter, people entered (or left) a specific domain of social and political relations.

Hearing Voices from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: “The doctors have no name for my illness,” said Julie Mason, a usually pensive African American woman in her early thirties who lived in the shelter for a year before moving into an apartment provided by the housing project. “I hear voices, telling me to hurt myself. But I don’t talk back. It’s not so bad. Others are a lot worse.”

Stand Away from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: “I think a lot about him leaving. He bummed a lot of cigarettes from me, you know,” Larry said to Lisa and me as we sat a table in the shelter. He was referring to his pal Bruce, who two days before had moved into a halfway house provided by the housing project.

Ragtime from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: Some phrasings relied on an exuberant, associative semantics of concrete metaphors and metonymns. “You’re gorgeous,” a woman said to me, “you have a house and two kids and a dog in Brookline.” “I’ve been to Ohio for so long,”

ʺWeʹre Losing Him, Samʺ from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: As with my exchanges with Simone and Nancy, I found that I was often engaged in two or more conversations at once—for instance, talking to Richard, responding to Simone’s request for change to buy a cup of coffee, and watching Helen show me what she bought at a store. People would vie for my attention. One day I found myself in the lobby conversing with Larry about the rules of the shelter, and at the same time with Stuart about where the best free meals in Boston could be found. “Stop interrupting,” Larry said to Stuart. “ I’mtalking to

Tactics, Questions, Rhetoric from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: Like Wendy, who ignored Lisa and maintained the singular over the general (“It’s just one cigarette”), residents did not always heed the staff’s advice because it did not always ring true to them.¹ While the staff’s views were quite potent, residents moved in different circles, primarily because they were in a position at odds with and defined in opposition to that of the staff. The kinds of words staff members and residents relied on, the way in which they used those words, and their reasons for doing so followed more often than not from the political exigencies of their lives.

Epistemologies of the Real from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: Questions such as Carla’s and Sylvia’s pointed to another side of many utterances in the shelter. This was a tendency to bemoan some aspect of one’s life. The larger realities of many shelter lives, which were spent in and out of hospitals, psychiatrists’ offices, and halfway houses, help to explain the use-value of complaints. Complaints typically rode on the first person singular: the “I” was plaintive. They often alluded to some private feeling or personal trouble, but primarily for practical reasons: by noting a pain or oppression, the complaints could effect a reality to which one’s audience might feel compelled

The Office of Reason from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: So, too, is reason. In the shelter at least, ideas of truth, reason, sincerity, and responsibility were not foundational in any sense. They owed their strength to political concerns and pragmatic effects, and served as tropes in the lives of staff and residents alike. Paul Rabinow notes that sociologies of scientific practices “have sought (with some success) to lower-case the abstractions of Science, Reason, Truth and Society.”¹ Reflections on a commonplace but perhaps less well understood kind of reasoning—reasoning that takes form in everyday life—might enable us to similarly lower-case reason, intimate its cultural and political features, and

How to Do Things with Feeling from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: In the State Service Center, feeling was ensconced in rhetoric. The shelter was a place for all things psychological. A great deal of talk involved comments on or indications of states of feeling—such as when Carla said, “I just feel wretched. I really do,” at a group meeting. Although I did not keep count, overt references to feelings seemed more numerous in the shelter than in most other contexts. The high frequency of glossings had a lot to do with the fact that shelter life evolved around therapeutic care. Niko Besnier points out that “in probably all speech communities,

Introduction: from: Beyond the Red Notebook
Author(s) Barone Dennis
Abstract: Before the publication of The New York Trilogy, Paul Auster was known primarily for having edited the Random House anthology of twentieth-century French poetry and for having written several insightful literary essays. In the short time since the publication of the Trilogy (1985–1986) he has become one of America’s most praised contemporary novelists. He has frequently been compared to authors ranging from Nathaniel Hawthorne to Alain Robbe-Grillet. Yet, perhaps because of the speed at which his novels have appeared and his reputation has grown, there is little scholarship available on his work. One has the sense, however, that just

“The Hunger Must Be Preserved at All Cost”: from: Beyond the Red Notebook
Author(s) Rubin Derek
Abstract: The future of Jewish-American literature has been a controversial issue for some time. It goes back at least to the publication of Philip Roth’s Goodbye, Columbus (1959), when Irving Howe argued in a review of the book that Roth “is one of the first American Jewish writers who finds ...almost no sustenance in the Jewish tradition” (“The Suburbs of Babylon,” 37). Howe suggested that, since for a younger writer like Roth memories of the Jewish-immigrant culture and way of life were fading, “[i] t is possible that [his book] signifies ... the closing of an arc of American Jewish experience”

“Looking for Signs in the Air”: from: Beyond the Red Notebook
Author(s) Woods Tim
Abstract: “Space is for us an existential and cultural dominant.” So concludes Fredric Jameson, having described postmodernism’s dependence on a “supplement of spatiality” that results from its depletion of history and consequent exaggeration of the present (365). Indeed, recent years have seen an increasing interest in the politics of place, the cultural function of geography, and the reassertion of the importance of space in any cultural study. The territory of these arguments is marked out in diverse areas in the work of people like Michel Foucault, Gaston Bachelard, David Harvey, Edward Soja, Doreen Massey, Fredric Jameson, Pierre Bourdieu, and Michel de

Being Paul Auster’s Ghost from: Beyond the Red Notebook
Author(s) Shibata Motoyuki
Abstract: The attempt to discuss the experience of translating Paul Auster is a slightly discouraging task, since one cannot help feeling that such experience has already been given a perfect expression by Auster himself. I am referring to a memorable passage in The Invention of Solitude:

Introduction from: The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: Here speaks the storyteller, telling by voice what was learned by ear. Here speaks a poet who did not learn language structure from one teacher and language meaning from another, nor plot structure from one and characterization from another, nor even an art of storytelling from one and an art of hermeneutics from another, but always heard all these things working together in the stories of other storytellers. And this poet, or mythopoet, not only narrates what characters do, but speaks when they speak, chants when they chant, and sings when they sing. A story is not a genre like

Prologue: from: The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: It’s a FLAT ( hand as if pressing on a flat vertical surface)

6 On Praying, Exclaiming, and Saying Hello in Zuni from: The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: In Zuni there are two ways of radically removing speech ( penanne) or song (tenanne) from the plane of everyday vocalization. The speaker or singer may either ana k’eyato’u, “raise it right up,” or else yam ik’eenannakkya peye’a, “utter it with his/her heart.” In the case of singing, “raising up” affects the last two parts of a five-part song of the Kachina (masked dance) Society. The first three parts all have the same tonic, but the tonic of the fourth part may be raised higher and that of the final part still higher.¹ When a song is sung “with the heart,”

8 The Forms of Mayan Verse from: The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: What happens when our notions about what a poetics might be are held within the orbit of linguistics is well illustrated by the work of Roman Jakobson. In a statement meant to be a general pronouncement on poetics, he argues that the “poetic function” of language is actualized as a “focus on the message for its own sake,” specifically the structure of the message, and “since linguistics is the global science of verbal structure, poetics may be regarded as an integral part of linguistics.”¹ And just as his phonology involves a repression of the continuous and material nature of speech

11 Creation and the Popol Vuh: from: The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: Generations of Americanists, including such figures as Brinton and Morley, have held the Popol Vuh to be the most important single native-language text in all the New World, and much emphasis has been laid on the pre-Columbian character of its contents. But the Popol Vuh also has contents that reflect the fact that it was written after the Conquest, contents that have long been a source of embarrassment for Americanists. Bandelier wrote a century ago that the Popol Vuh “appears to be, for the first chapters, an evident fabrication, or at least an accommodation (of Indian mythology to Christian notions

13 Ethnography as Interaction: from: The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: One November evening at Zuni, New Mexico, for the first time in a year’s devotion to the ethnography of Zuni storytelling, I suddenly found myself in near-perfect conditions for the witnessing of Zuni storytelling as it really should be, rather than in near-perfect conditions for the making of a studio-like recording. I had gone with Andrew Peynetsa, an accomplished raconteur, to the house of his eldest son.¹ Andrew’s daughter-in-law, Jane, her twenty-year-old brother, and several grandchildren were there, but his son, with whom he desired a conversation, had not yet returned from his job at a gas station. A couple

Epilogue: from: The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: On October 13, 1976, Barbara Tedlock and I were in Chuua 4,ak, a Quiché Maya town in Guatemala, talking with Andrés Xiloj. We were undergoing training in Quiché divination and dream interpretation during this period.¹ The day before, I had told don Andrés of dreaming that a shining white mountain had spoken to me with the voice of an old woman, saying, “Come with me.” He had commented that “worlds” do indeed shine, “worlds” ( mundos, from Spanish) being a favorite Quiché metaphor for mountains. In the singular, “World” refers to the earth deity at his/her full planetary scale, sometimes called

Prologue: from: Dreams of Fiery Stars
Abstract: In Linda Hogan’s novel, Mean Spirit (1990), a character dreams of “fiery stars” that fall to earth and terminate more than five hundred years of Euro-American domination. Other contemporary Indian authors, perhaps most notably Leslie Marmon Silko in Almanac of the Dead (1991), refer frequently to various tribal prophecies predicting the restoration of the “old world.”² I borrow Hogan’s phrase for the title of this study—Dreams of Fiery Stars: The Transformations of Native American Fiction—because it concerns the counter-colonial, world-transformative efforts of writers such as Hogan. Over the past three decades, an ever-increasing number of American Indian authors

Introduction: from: Gender on the Market
Abstract: A woman sits on a mat laid on a rocky dirt hill in a marketplace at the foot of the Middle Atlas Mountains in Morocco. Before her are five piles of minerals and herbs, including dried sea urchins, some roots, and a blue fluorescent rock that is chipped for use. It is market day and she has come to do business. About a dozen people surround her, a few of them men. She caresses a small hedgehog and offers her audience samples of homemade remedy: black pellets, a mixture of ground animal parts, herbs, olive oil, and honey. By the

4. Words About Herbs: from: Gender on the Market
Abstract: The frequency of oaths, proverbs, blessings, and scripture in Moroccan oratory make it a formal or ritualized language like those historically associated with tradition and rhetorical power.¹ Yet despite its highly stylized form, the pragmatic revoicing of this oratory by women opens the interpretive possibilities of traditional speech events. Formal language in the informal setting of the suq does not limit meaning; rather, by embodying words and gestures customarily performed by and for men, women orators create a multivocalic and hybrid discourse in a context of heteroglossia. By appropriating the authority vested in public discourse, women marketers challenge traditional notions

7. Catering to the Sexual Market: from: Gender on the Market
Abstract: I first met Mouna at Khadija’s wedding. She was the lead singer in a group of four women and two men. These women all

3. The Structure and Representation of the Cosmos from: Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna (Ibn Sina)
Abstract: Avicenna possessed an extraordinarily systematic vision of the structure of the cosmos—and of how it should be studied. Appreciating this fact is crucial if we are to understand his intellectual accomplishments; but it must also be kept in perspective. His passion for cohesiveness and completion led to the preoccupation with detail and demonstration that characterizes his logos writings: everything must fit, everything must hang together logically.¹ This being the case, it is not surprising that many later students of Avicenna, attracted by these very attributes of system, detail, and logical coherence, tend to view his philosophy through the prism

6. Translation of the from: Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna (Ibn Sina)
Abstract: The Mi‘râj Nâma is a short treatise in Persian traditionally attributed to Avicenna.¹ My reason for including a translation of it here requires a brief introductory note. When I first contemplated studying Islamic allegory, I planned to analyze a series of allegories or allegoreses dealing with the single theme of the mi‘râj, heavenly ascent or journey. The most prominent example of this theme in Islamic literature is the prophet Muḥammad’s own mi‘râj, with the accompanying tradition of his Night Journey (isrâ) from the sacred Mosque (in Mecca) to the Further Mosque (in Jerusalem).² This story exists primarily in the form

8. Allegory and Allegoresis from: Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna (Ibn Sina)
Abstract: Until now we have examined Avicenna’s allegories mainly in terms of their relationship to his philosophical writings, muthos in conjunction with logos. But his formulation of allegory itself deserves attention since it constitutes only one of the many possible expressions that the genre encompasses, whether in terms of general theoretical potentiality or in regard to specific historical manifestations appearing in premodern Islamic literatures. In this chapter we will situate Avicenna’s allegories and allegoreses more precisely within the realm of the praxis of allegory per se by investigating in greater detail their modes of description and metaphoric structure.

Book Title: Clan Cleansing in Somalia-The Ruinous Legacy of 1991
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Kapteijns Lidwien
Abstract: In 1991, certain political and military leaders in Somalia, wishing to gain exclusive control over the state, mobilized their followers to use terror-wounding, raping, and killing-to expel a vast number of Somalis from the capital city of Mogadishu and south-central and southern Somalia. Manipulating clan sentiment, they succeeded in turning ordinary civilians against neighbors, friends, and coworkers. Although this episode of organized communal violence is common knowledge among Somalis, its real nature has not been publicly acknowledged and has been ignored, concealed, or misrepresented in scholarly works and political memoirs-until now. Marshaling a vast amount of source material, including Somali poetry and survivor accounts, Clan Cleansing in Somaliaanalyzes this campaign of clan cleansing against the historical background of a violent and divisive military dictatorship, in the contemporary context of regime collapse, and in relationship to the rampant militia warfare that followed in its wake.Clan Cleansing in Somaliaalso reflects on the relationship between history, truth, and postconflict reconstruction in Somalia. Documenting the organization and intent behind the campaign of clan cleansing, Lidwien Kapteijns traces the emergence of the hate narratives and code words that came to serve as rationales and triggers for the violence. However, it was not clans that killed, she insists, but people who killed in the name of clan. Kapteijns argues that the mutual forgiveness for which politicians often so lightly call is not a feasible proposition as long as the violent acts for which Somalis should forgive each other remain suppressed and undiscussed.Clan Cleansing in Somaliaestablishes that public acknowledgment of the ruinous turn to communal violence is indispensable to social and moral repair, and can provide a gateway for the critical memory work required from Somalis on all sides of this multifaceted conflict.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fhzvq

Introduction from: Clan Cleansing in Somalia
Abstract: This book deals with the changing use of clan- based violence against civilians as a technology of power in the Somali civil war (1978–present). At its center is what I consider the violence of the “key shift,”¹ activated by politico-military leaders in the course of the armed uprising that culminated in the expulsion of President Maxamed Siyaad Barre on January 26, 1991. This study argues that the violence that accompanied and followed the moment of regime and state collapse was analytically, politically, and discursively something new, a transformative turning point and key shift that has remained largely unaddressed (and

Chapter 4 The Why and How of Clan Cleansing: from: Clan Cleansing in Somalia
Abstract: The chapters above have traced the changing use of large- scale clan- based violence against civilians as a political tool in the hands of politico- military leaders at three historical moments, namely during the Barre regime, at the moment of its collapse, and during the factional militia warfare in its wake. They have outlined the historical background and contemporary circumstances of what I have called the violence of the key shift, that is to say, a campaign of clan cleansing that turned ordinary civilians, outside any mediating state institutions, into both perpetrators and victims of communal violence. Since this key

10. Afterwords from: Body and Emotion
Abstract: Latu played a section of the tape, which sounded several male voices chorusing a Buddhist chant.

PART ONE BEYOND OBJECTIVISM AND RELATIVISM: from: Beyond Objectivism and Relativism
Abstract: There is an uneasiness that has spread throughout intellectual and cultural life. It affects almost every discipline and every aspect of our lives. This uneasiness is expressed by the opposition between objectivism and relativism, but there are a variety of other contrasts that indicate the same underlying anxiety: rationality versus irrationality, objectivity versus subjectivity, realism versus antirealism. Contemporary thinking has moved between these and other, related extremes. Even the attempts that some have made to break out of this framework of thinking have all too frequently been assimilated to these standard oppositions. There are, however, many signs that the deep

PART TWO SCIENCE, RATIONALITY, AND INCOMMENSURABILITY from: Beyond Objectivism and Relativism
Abstract: With elegant conciseness William James described “the classic stages of a theory’s career. First, you know, a new theory is attacked as absurd; then it is admitted to be true, but obvious and insignificant; finally it is seen to be so important that its adversaries claim that they themselves discovered it.”¹ Something like this has already occurred with the theory advanced by Thomas Kuhn in the twenty years since the publication of The Structure of Scientific Revolutions. The reaction to the book by its critics was immediate and sharp: Kuhn’s leading ideas were absurd, contradictory; and wrong.² It was even

PART THREE from: Beyond Objectivism and Relativism
Abstract: The term “hermeneutics,” with its ancient lineage, has only recently begun to enter the working vocabulary of Anglo-American thinkers. Its novelty is indicated in a passage cited earlier from Thomas Kuhn’s The Essential Tension (1977) in which he confesses that “the term ‘hermeneutic’ . . . was no part of my vocabulary as recently as five years ago. Increasingly, I suspect that anyone who believes that history may have deep philosophical import will have to learn to bridge the longstanding divide between the Continental and English-language philosophical traditions.”¹

PART FOUR PRAXIS, from: Beyond Objectivism and Relativism
Abstract: At this stage of our inquiry, we have opened up the play—the to-and-fro movement—of science, hermeneutics, and praxis. In exploring the new image of science that has been developing in the postempiricist philosophy and history of science, we have witnessed the recovery of the hermeneutical dimension of science in both the natural and the social sciences. In the philosophy of the natural sciences, this development has been characterized as having begun with an obsession with the meaning and reference of single terms (logically proper names and ostensive definition), moved to the search for a rigorous criterion for discriminating

Book Title: Sensuous Scholarship- Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): STOLLER PAUL
Abstract: Among the Songhay of Mali and Niger, who consider the stomach the seat of personality, learning is understood not in terms of mental activity but in bodily terms. Songhay bards study history by "eating the words of the ancestors," and sorcerers learn their art by ingesting particular substances, by testing their flesh with knives, by mastering pain and illness. In Sensuous ScholarshipPaul Stoller challenges contemporary social theorists and cultural critics who-using the notion of embodiment to critique Eurocentric and phallocentric predispositions in scholarly thought-consider the body primarily as a text that can be read and analyzed. Stoller argues that this attitude is in itself Eurocentric and is particularly inappropriate for anthropologists, who often work in societies in which the notion of text, and textual interpretation, is foreign. ThroughoutSensuous ScholarshipStoller argues for the importance of understanding the "sensuous epistemologies" of many non-Western societies so that we can better understand the societies themselves and what their epistemologies have to teach us about human experience in general.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fj1pm

3 EMBODYING COLONIAL MEMORIES from: Sensuous Scholarship
Abstract: The acrid smell of burning resins wafts through Adamu Jenitongo’s compound, preparing it for the holle (spirits). It is late afternoon in Tillaberi, and the sounds of a Songhay spirit possession ceremony crackle through the dusty air: the high pitched “cries” of the monochord violin, the resonant clacks of bamboo drumsticks striking gourd drums, the melodious contours of the praise-singer’s “old words,” the patter of dancing feet on dune sand.

6 ARTAUD, ROUCH, AND THE CINEMA OF CRUELTY from: Sensuous Scholarship
Abstract: Sensuous scholarship may well have begun in 1954 in the film theater of the Musée de l’Homme. A select audience of African and European intellectuals has been assembled to see a film screening. Marcel Griaule is there, as are Germaine Dieterlen, Paulin Vierya, Alioune Sar, and Luc de Reusch. Jean Rouch, a pioneer of ethnographic film and cinéma vérité, is in the projection booth. He beams onto the screen the initial frames of Les maîtres fous. Rouch begins to speak, but soon senses a rising tension in the theater. As the reel winds down, the uncompromising scenes of Les maîtres

Book Title: The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa- Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): LEMARCHAND RENÉ
Abstract: Endowed with natural resources, majestic bodies of fresh water, and a relatively mild climate, the Great Lakes region of Central Africa has also been the site of some of the world's bloodiest atrocities. In Rwanda, Burundi, and the Congo-Kinshasa, decades of colonial subjugation-most infamously under Belgium's Leopold II-were followed by decades of civil warfare that spilled into neighboring countries. When these conflicts lead to horrors such as the 1994 Rwandan genocide, ethnic difference and postcolonial legacies are commonly blamed, but, with so much at stake, such simple explanations cannot take the place of detailed, dispassionate analysis. The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africaprovides a thorough exploration of the contemporary crises in the region. By focusing on the historical and social forces behind the cycles of bloodshed in Rwanda, Burundi, and the Congo-Kinshasa, René Lemarchand challenges much of the conventional wisdom about the roots of civil strife in former Belgian Africa. He offers telling insights into the appalling cycle of genocidal violence, ethnic strife, and civil war that has made the Great Lakes region of Central Africa the most violent on the continent, and he sheds new light on the dynamics of conflict in the region. Building on a full career of scholarship and fieldwork, Lemarchand's analysis breaks new ground in our understanding of the complex historical forces that continue to shape the destinies of one of Africa's most important regions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fj2cq

Chapter 5 The Rationality of Genocide from: The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: The image of Rwanda conveyed by the media is that of a society gone amok. How else to explain the collective insanity that led to the butchering of half a million civilians: men, women, and children? As much as the scale of the killings, the visual impact of the atrocities numbs the mind and makes the quest for rational motives singularly irrelevant. Tribal savagery suggests itself as the most plausible subtext for the scenes of apocalypse captured by television crews and photojournalists.

Chapter 11 Burundi’s Endangered Transition from: The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: Few other states in the continent can claim to have emerged from a ten-year civil war under more promising circumstances than Burundi. The transition process, however long and painful, has been exemplary. Beginning with the Arusha agreement of 2000, a constitutional formula was finally worked out whereby the rights of the Tutsi minority could be reconciled with the demands of the Hutu majority.¹ The 2005 legislative and presidential elections went remarkably smoothly, giving birth to a consociational government² headed by a Hutu president, Pierre Nkurunziza, where Hutu and Tutsi held respectively 60 and 40 percent of the ministerial portfolios. A

Chapter 14 The DRC: from: The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: The African continent is littered with the wreckage of imploded polities. From Guinea Bissau to Burundi, from Congo-Brazzaville to Congo-Kinshasa, and from Sierra Leone to Guinea and Côte d’Ivoire, failed or failing states confront us with an all too familiar litany of scourges—civil societies shot to bits by ethnoregional violence, massive flows of hapless refugees across national boundaries, widespread environmental disasters, rising rates of criminality, and the utter bankruptcy of national economies.

Chapter 15 The Tunnel at the End of the Light from: The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: For those of us old enough to remember what in the 1960s was known as “the Congo crisis”—soon to become the “endless crisis”—the tragic singularity of the present conjuncture is perhaps less apparent than some of the contributions to this volume might suggest. No one who lived through the agonies of the Congo’s improvised leap into independence—followed by the swift collapse of the successor state and the breakup of the country into warring fragments—can fail to note the analogy with the dismemberment of the Mobutist state in the wake of the 1998 civil war. Then as

Chapter 16 From Kabila to Kabila: from: The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: Reflecting on the merits of electoral democracy in the Congo, one of the least memorable characters in John Le Carré’s novel The Mission Song makes his point with characteristic bluntness: “Elections won’t bring democracy, they’ll bring chaos. The winners will scoop the pool and tell the losers to go fuck themselves. The losers will say the game was fixed and take to the bush. And since everyone voted on ethnic lines anyway, they’ll be back to where they started and worse.”¹ Expletive aside, Skipper’s assessment encapsulates many of the concerns of the international community in the aftermath of the Congo’s

Introduction: from: Aliens and Sojourners
Abstract: At the close of the first century C.E., the early Christian text 1 Clement (c.93–97) opens with a greeting from one group of Christian aliens to another: “The church of God residing as aliens (paroikousa) in Rome to the church of God residing as aliens (paroikousē) in Corinth.”¹ This was not the first text to characterize Christians in terms of their status as aliens or sojourners. But as the first century came to a close and the second century progressed, the trope proved to be an increasingly useful one. Other Christian writers made use of it in epistolary prescripts

Chapter Five Strangers and Soteriology in the from: Aliens and Sojourners
Abstract: Not all early Christians thought that speaking about themselves as aliens was a good thing. While numerous texts of the first and second centuries were making exactly this move (as evidenced by our analysis thus far), this was not the only conceptual option available to Christians as they thought about their identity and what its legitimate relationship ought to be to the rhetoric of alienation. Thus there were (perhaps not surprisingly) voices of protest to the increasingly common strategy of constructing the Christian self as other. These voices were not separate or outside the contested discourse of formative Christian identity,

Book Title: Detecting Texts-The Metaphysical Detective Story from Poe to Postmodernism
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Sweeney Susan Elizabeth
Abstract: Although readers of detective fiction ordinarily expect to learn the mystery's solution at the end, there is another kind of detective story-the history of which encompasses writers as diverse as Poe, Borges, Robbe-Grillet, Auster, and Stephen King-that ends with a question rather than an answer. The detective not only fails to solve the crime, but also confronts insoluble mysteries of interpretation and identity. As the contributors to Detecting Textscontend, such stories belong to a distinct genre, the "metaphysical detective story," in which the detective hero's inability to interpret the mystery inevitably casts doubt on the reader's similar attempt to make sense of the text and the world.Detecting Textsincludes an introduction by the editors that defines the metaphysical detective story and traces its history from Poe's classic tales to today's postmodernist experiments. In addition to the editors, contributors include Stephen Bernstein, Joel Black, John T. Irwin, Jeffrey T. Nealon, and others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fj4sd

Chapter 4 Gumshoe Gothics: from: Detecting Texts
Author(s) Merivale Patricia
Abstract: “An excellent idea, I think, to start from a dead body,” said Kobo Abe ( Inter 47), and Hubert Aquin, similarly, “L’investigation délirante de Sherlock Holmes débute immanquablement à partir d’un cadavre” (“Sherlock Holmes’s dizzying investigation unfailingly starts off from a corpse” [Trou 82]). About how the classical detective story starts they were both right. But, of course, quite often there isn’t a corpse in the postmodernist library. “There is no body in the house at all,” said Sylvia Plath, in an inscrutable poem called “The Detective” (1962), which I suspect is, like most of the texts I am discussing, about

Chapter 9 Postmodernism and the Monstrous Criminal: from: Detecting Texts
Author(s) Ramsay Raylene
Abstract: Since the early 1950s, Alain Robbe-Grillet’s writings and films have influenced that body of French literary investigative work which reflects the “suspicion” (in Nathalie Sarraute’s sense) that the real world and natural language might be arbitrary constructions. Despite the metafictional character of his de-naturing of traditional narratives, his ex-posing of the ideologies concealed behind Western myths, and his interrogation of the hidden structures of thought and feeling (Logos and Eros) in which writer and reader are enmeshed, Robbe-Grillet’s detecting project can itself be generated only from within the traditional frames of language, myth, and feeling.

Chapter 12 ʺSubject-Casesʺ and ʺBook-Casesʺ: from: Detecting Texts
Author(s) Sweeney Susan Elizabeth
Abstract: What does it mean, in Thoreau’s terms, to “suppose a case”? “To suppose,” as Stein suggests, is to substitute some faraway, remotely possible “instance” for one’s real position. (“Suppose” derives, in fact, from the roots of substitute and position.) A “case” is a set of circumstances or conditions. Supposing a case, then, must mean thinking in the subjunctive mood: imagining scenarios, developing hypotheses, speculating that “if this were the case,” or “in that case,” or even “in any case….” But “case” also has another meaning: a crime that requires investigation.¹ Indeed, the best way to solve such a case, according

Book Title: Performing the Past-Memory, History, and Identity in Modern Europe
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Winter Jay
Abstract: Special EURO 10,- discount for our ABG readers: now EURO 24,50 instead of EURO 34,50Performing the Past is an investigation of the multiple social and culture practices through which Europeans have negotiated the space between their history and their memory over the past 200 years. In museums, in opera houses, in the streets, in the schools, in theatres, in films, on the internet and beyond, narratives about the past circulate today at a dizzying speed. Producing and selling them is big business; if the past is indeed a foreign country, there are tens of thousands of tourist agents, guides, and pundits around to help us on our way, for a fee, to be sure.This collection of essays by renowned scholars from, among others, Yale, Columbia, Amsterdam Oxford, Cambridge, New York University and the European University Institute in Florence, is essential reading for anyone interested in today's memory boom. Drawing on different national and disciplinary traditions, the authors ultimately engage us with the ways in which Europeans continue a venerable tradition of finding out who they are, and where they are going, by performing the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt45kdkt

CHAPTER 9 Music and memory in Mozart’s Zauberflöte from: Performing the Past
Author(s) ASSMANN JAN
Abstract: As an art working with time and addressing the ear, music, like poetry, requires and challenges memory. As early as the fourth century, Augustine used the example of music to illustrate his meditations on time and memory, describing the process of understanding a melody that unfolds in time,¹ and Edmund Husserl, in his Untersuchungen zur Phänomenologie des inneren Zeitbewußtseins, used music as the most obvious example of how memory and expectation or, in his terminology, retention and protention, cooperate in the perceptive construction of a melody.² Perceiving and understanding a melody requires memory, the same kind of short-term memory which

CHAPTER 10 The many afterlives of Ivanhoe from: Performing the Past
Author(s) RIGNEY ANN
Abstract: Despite poor health foreshadowing his death later that year, Walter Scott spent the spring of 1832 with his son and daughter in Naples. He was fêted by all and sundry, among others by the Austrian minister who organized a masquerade ball in his honour on the theme of the Waverley novels. The invitations to this literary masquerade apparently led to some commotion, Scott’s son Charles describing how ‘one beautiful Italian woman has been in tears for the last week because her family are too Catholic to allow her to take the character of Rebecca the Jewess’.² Refusing a Catholic permission

Book Title: Sound Souvenirs-Audio Technologies, Memory and Cultural Practices
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): van Dijck José
Abstract: In recent decades, the importance of sound for remembering the past and for creating a sense of belonging has been increasingly acknowledged. We keep "sound souvenirs" such as cassette tapes and long play albums in our attics because we want to be able to recreate the music and everyday sounds we once cherished. Artists and ordinary listeners deploy the newest digital audio technologies to recycle past sounds into present tunes. Sound and memory are inextricably intertwined, not just through the commercially exploited nostalgia on oldies radio stations, but through the exchange of valued songs by means of pristine recordings and cultural practices such as collecting, archiving and listing. This book explores several types of cultural practices involving the remembrance and restoration of past sounds. At the same time, it theorizes the cultural meaning of collecting, recycling, reciting, and remembering sound and music. This title is available in the OAPEN Library - http://www.oapen.org.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt45kf7f

Chapter Five The Auditory Nostalgia of iPod Culture from: Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) Bull Michael
Abstract: For the first time in history, the majority of Westerners possess the technology to create their own private mobile auditory world wherever they go.¹ Apple iPods, alternative brand MP3 players, or mobile phones whose music listening options enable these people to construct highly individualized soundscapes. The iPod is symbolic of a culture in which many increasingly use communication technologies to control and manage their daily experiences.

Chapter Six Performance and Nostalgia on the Oldies Circuit from: Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) Taylor Timothy D.
Abstract: In 1869, members of the Methodist Episcopal Church built a town on the coast of New Jersey (regionally known as “the Jersey shore”). The town was populated mainly by Methodists, as it is to this day. Every August, for one week, thousands of people from out of town would descend on this tiny shore village for a “camp meeting,” a week of sermons, prayer, hymn singing, and fellowship. To accommodate them all, in 1894 the church fathers built a large auditorium called, appropriately enough, the Great Auditorium. This enormous wooden structure seats about six thousand people and today, when not

Chapter Seven Remembering Songs through Telling Stories: from: Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) van Dijck José
Abstract: “You can check out any time you like, but you can never leave…” The knife-sharp guitar solo following Don Henley’s last words rack up a series of emotions and memories in my brain. Ever since my definite return from California, where I lived from 1987 to 1991, the song is intensely colored by experiences: staying at a desolate hotel in the desert, driving a pick-up truck up north on Highway 101, playing a frisbee at Pacific Beach. The song is also inevitably associated with the old tape recorder in my apartment’s living room, a red ghetto blaster from which many

3 A streetcar named desire: from: Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe
Author(s) Lindo Flip
Abstract: In 1996, youth workers in one of the boroughs in the southern part of the city of Rotterdam¹ started using a converted local bus to visit places where local youth were loitering on the streets. Problems with young people in several districts of the borough, but especially a neighbourhood called Pendrecht, were the main impetus for this new strategy. Pendrecht is mostly made up of working-class housing projects (mainly blocks of flats some five stories high), constructed right after the War for dockworkers and other labourers. From the 1970s onwards, families have moved out when they could afford better housing

7 Introduction to a study of comparative inter-ethnic relations: from: Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe
Author(s) Dias Nuno
Abstract: This chapter is based on my PhD research, entitled ‘The Voyages of Rama: Hindu Diasporical Identity Constructions in Colonial and Post-Colonial Contexts in Portugal and England’. The objective of the study is to approach inter-ethnic relations in a diachronic and comparative perspective, focusing in particular on the trajectories of early Hindu migrants from Gujarat to East Africa. Following the independence of these territories, many East African Hindus migrated to Portugal and Britain.

8 Frontier identity in Portugal and Russia: from: Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe
Author(s) Machaqueiro Mário Artur
Abstract: Postmodern and post-colonial discourses have praised hybridity and ambivalence as enriching traces of identity-building in our age of multidirectional migrations as if only travelling between and across cultures through transnational dislocations could provide the experience of developing diasporic, hyphenated or deterritorialised identities. But some authors are beginning to challenge what may be too narrow a perspective of the social conditions from which such identities can spring. The Portuguese sociologist Santos recently highlighted the fact that since its inception Portuguese colonialism has always been an experience of ambivalence and hybridity in the relationship it promoted between the coloniser and the colonised.

10 Identity, integration and associations: from: Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe
Author(s) Sardinha João
Abstract: The phenomenon of immigration is becoming increasingly significant in present-day Portugal, particularly in the Lisbon metropolitan area. In the 2001 census, 55.3 per cent of the documented foreign population resident in Portugal, live in the Greater Lisbon and the Setúbal Peninsula municipalities, representing 5.1 per cent and 3.7 per cent, respectively, of the total resident populations.

The Lecturer and the Attraction from: The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Lacasse Germain
Abstract: “Come here! Come here! Ladies and gentlemen, come to see the most surprising and exciting fairground attraction, the cinematograph.” Such was the commentary of dozens, if not of hundreds of barkers ( bonisseurs¹) in front of theaters where the first “animated photographs” were presented all over the globe circa 1895. They invited passers-by to come to experience a “state of shock.” This expression is appropriate to portray the first film spectator because the views represented the quintessence of what art historians have named the distraction, which characterized modernity, and that cinema historians have named “cinema of attractions.”

Integrated Attractions: from: The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Keil Charlie
Abstract: In the twenty years since “the cinema of attractions” introduced a compelling periodization schema predicated on an attentiveness to early cinema’s formal norms, the exact nature of the attraction’s relationship to narrative remains open to debate. Linda Williams has suggested that “[Tom] Gunning’s notions of attraction and astonishment have caught on […] because, in addition to being apt descriptions of early cinema, they describe aspects of all cinema that have also been undervalued in the classical paradigm”³; according to this account, attractions stand as a refutation of classicism’s reliance on causality and its appeal to a viewer’s problem-solving capabilities. But

Circularity and Repetition at the Heart of the Attraction: from: The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Gaudreault André
Abstract: For nearly 200 years the term “attraction” has seen a host of semantic and theoretical shifts, becoming today one of the key concepts in cinema studies. According to the Oxford English Dictionary, the meaning of “attraction” as a “thing or feature which draws people by appealing to their desires, tastes, etc.,esp. any interesting or amusing exhibition which ‘draws’ crowds” dates from as early as 1829 (“These performances, although possessing much novelty, did not prove sterling attractions”). This sense of attraction as something which “draws crowds” had by the 1860s come to mean both an “interesting and amusing exhibition” and

Lumière, the Train and the Avant-Garde from: The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Blümlinger Christa
Abstract: The history of cinema began with a train, and it is as if this train has been driving into film history every since; as if destined to return unendingly, it criss-crosses the Lumière films and their ghost train journeys, it drives the phantom rides of early cinema and is then embraced with open arms by the avant-garde as one of the primary motifs of the cinématographe, a motif which, more than almost any other, allows us to engage with the modern experience of visuality. Thus it is no coincidence that the development of an independent language of film can be

The Associational Attractions of the Musical from: The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Jaques Pierre-Emmanuel
Abstract: In use again in the 1980s, the concept of attraction first provided a way to analyze the discourse features of early cinema. However, since his first article on this concept, Tom Gunning has not failed to note that attractions, far from disappearing with the development of integrated narrative cinema, continue to exist within certain genres: “In fact the cinema of attraction does not disappear with the dominance of narrative, but rather goes underground, both into certain avant-garde practices and as a component of narrative films, more evident in some genres (e.g. the musical) than in others.”¹ In the same article,

“Cutting to the Quick”: from: The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Sobchack Vivian
Abstract: In “Re-Newing Old Technologies: Astonishment, Second Nature, and the Uncanny in Technology from the Previous Turn-of-the-Century,” a remarkable essay that furthers his investigation of “attraction” and “astonishment,” Tom Gunning asks two related questions: first, “What happens in modernity to the initial wonder at a new technology or device when the novelty has faded into the banality of the everyday?”³; and second, “Once understood, does technology ever recover something of its original strangeness?”⁴ Although it has attracted and astonished us since the beginnings of cinema, in what follows I want to explore the particular appeal of “slow motion” cinematography as it

The Cinema of Attraction[s]: from: The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Gunning Tom
Abstract: Writing in 1922, flushed with the excitement of seeing Abel Gance’s La Roue, Fernand Léger tried to define something of the radical possibilities of the cinema. The potential of the new art did not lie in “imitating the movements of nature” or in “the mistaken path” of its resemblance to theater. Its unique power was a “matter of making images seen.”¹ It is precisely this harnessing of visibility, this act of showing and exhibition, which I feel cinema before 1906 displays most intensely. [Its] inspiration for the avant-garde of the early decades of this century needs to be re-explored.

Book Title: Shooting the Family-Transnational Media and Intercultural Values
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Staat Wim
Abstract: Do contemporary movements of migration and the ever-increasing abundance of audiovisual media correspond to - or even cause - shifts in the defenition of both the bourgeois nuclear family and the tribal extended family? In Shooting the Family, twelve authors investigate the transfigured role of the family in a transnational world in which intercultural values are negotiated through mass media like film and television, as well as through particularistic media like home movies and videos. "Shooting the Family" has a double meaning. On the one hand, this book claims that the family is under pressure from the forces of globalization and migration; it is the family that risks being shot to pieces. On the other hand, family matters of all kinds, including family values, are increasingly being constructed and refigured in a mediated form. The audiovisual family has become an important medium for intercultural affairs - this is a family that is being re-established as a place of security and comfort in times of upheaval; it is the family shot by cameras that register and simultaneously create new family values. This title is available in the OAPEN Library - http://www.oapen.org.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46n0d7

Chapter 3 The Shooting Family: from: Shooting the Family
Author(s) de Bruin Joost
Abstract: A group of adults is seated in a kitchen. It is evening, the lights are low, and the atmosphere is intimate. They are listening to an older man who is explaining what really happened. “Such a shame”, says an older woman, as she pours them an after-dinner drink. The younger man, the Indonesian man, and the younger woman nod. Baantjer’s signature tune begins and it is the end of another episode of the Netherlands’ most popular television drama series.¹ Baantjer is a police series that has been on the Dutch commercial TV station RTL4 since 1995. Episodes are based on

Chapter 4 Family Portrait: from: Shooting the Family
Author(s) Kooijman Jaap
Abstract: The opening scene of François Ozon’s first feature film Sitcom (1998) shows a mansion in the sunny French countryside, the idyllic home of the bourgeois family. Arriving home from work, the father (François Marthouret) is greeted by his family singing “Joyeux Anniversaire”. Before the birthday song is over, the father shoots each family member dead. All the action takes place inside the home, outside of the audience’s view. Not until nearly the end of the film, after a long sequence of flashbacks explaining the events leading up to the killings, do we actually see the father shooting the family, with

Chapter 8 Eurydice’s Diasporic Voice: from: Shooting the Family
Author(s) Lord Catherine M.
Abstract: In Revolution in Poetic LanguageJulia Kristeva psychoanalytically understands the myth of Orpheus to be indicative of the perilous journey of the poet in danger of losing his or her subjectivity in the process of writing.² While Kristeva’s approach may offer a beginning to reading poetic practice, I will use an additional ally in my underworld journey of critique. Not entrenched in the psychoanalytic paradigm, Benedict Anderson’s influentialImagined Communitiesexamines how writing, in the form of print, newspapers, and novels, produces an imaginary, a set of fictional mechanisms by which community can be imagined.³ Curiously, he focuses on prose

Chapter 10 Suspending the Body: from: Shooting the Family
Author(s) Dasgupta Sudeep
Abstract: If the family is the original scene of filial belonging, and culture the general term for affilial bonding, what are the consequences of (con)fusing la patriewithla nation? If family values undergird a normative understanding of cultural identity, what is the father’s place in the patrimony through which national culture is to be understood? In the context of dispersed and divided families, how might we understand family values in the recent debates around cultural values? What happens to the family when the migrant body enters the nation? If there is indeed a metonymic confusion between nation and patrimony, this

Introduction: from: The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) Bod Rens
Abstract: In the field of the history of the natural sciences, overviews have been written at least since the nineteenth century (e.g. William Whewell’s well-known History of the Inductive Sciences). It may thus be surprising that

Ficino, Diacceto and Michelangelo’s Presentation Drawings from: The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) van den Doel Marieke
Abstract: The Florentine philosopher Marsilio Ficino (1433-1499) was one of the first scholars who suggested that painting, which was generally regarded as a craft, should be included among the Liberal Arts. His main work, Platonic Theology(1482), compared his own time to a Golden Age that ‘has brought back to light the Liberal Arts which had almost been extinct: Grammar, Poetry, Rhetoric, Painting, Architecture, Music and the ancient art of singing to the Orphic Lyre’.² Ficino not only replaced logic with poetry in thetrivium, but formulated an almost completely newquadrivium, removing geometry, arithmetic and astronomy, in favor of painting

Giordano Bruno and Metaphor from: The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) Gatti Hilary
Abstract: Giordano Bruno was born in Nola, near Naples, in 1548, and died in Rome in 1600, burnt at the stake as a heretic. That means he was born only five years after the first publication of Copernicus’s De revolutionibusin 1543, and only thirty-odd years after Martin Luther’s excommunication from the Catholic church had divided Europe and its culture into two militantly hostile factions. During the second half of the sixteenth century, in a lifetime of wandering through the cultural capitals of an often blood-stained Europe, Bruno was able to witness first hand, as few of his contemporaries could do,

Humanism in the Classroom, a Reassessment from: The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) Groenland Juliette A.
Abstract: Starting from a single case-study into a virtual historical nonperson, Joannes Murmellius (ca.1480-1517), this paper purports to draw attention to a basic tenet of Renaissance humanism and of the humanities, both pedagogical movements in origin: the classroom practice. A most characteristic profile sketch of the pioneer northern humanist school teacher is to be found in his own account of his pedagogic standpoint:

Origins and Principles. from: The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) Esteve Cesc
Abstract: In his ‘Essay upon the Epic Poetry of the European Nations’, which first appeared in London in 1727, Voltaire reproaches ‘the greatest part of the critics [who] mistake commonly the beginning of an art, for the principles of the art itself’ and complains about their tendency to believe ‘that everything must be, by its own nature, what it was when contrived at first’.¹ Voltaire understands that, since all the inventions of art change because fancy and custom differ in time and from one nation to another, critics should find the nature and eternal rules of epic poetry in those features

Childhood of the Race: from: The Children's Table
Author(s) Hodgson Lucia
Abstract: The popular defense of processing children under eighteen in the adult criminal justice system instead of the juvenile justice system turns on the nature of the offense: children who commit adult crimes should do adult time. This position highlights the ways in which American cultural constructions of the child are not exclusively child based. That is to say, adult constructions of the child often do not correspond to what children themselves say and do. Paradoxically, children can lose their child status when they do not act like children. The definitions of the child that inform academic inquiry and social policy

[Part 3. Introduction] from: The Children's Table
Abstract: This section occupies a fissure in childhood studies that the field is working to bridge between social constructionism—a central insight of childhood studies icon Philippe Ariès and a key tenet of humanities scholarship—and social science’s emphasis on biologically determined development. Our first two contributions by Sarah Chinn and Susan Honeyman pick up the theme of educational control ably introduced in section 2 and explore the work of disciplining children’s habits of love and attachment. They do so by focusing on heteronormative control over children’s gender and sexuality or, to be more precise, the social insistence that children cannot

Trans(cending)gender through Childhood from: The Children's Table
Author(s) Honeyman Susan
Abstract: If one is not born a woman, as Simone de Beauvoir and Monique Wittig so famously argue, then one is not really born a girl or boy either.¹ In fact, one is not necessarily born a child. Ever since Philippe Ariès posited childhood as an invention of modernity, childhood studies has argued for recognizing the state of prolonged protection (and sometimes fetishization) generally ascribed to Western youth as relatively constructed, class bound, and historically varied. Most of the world’s young can’t afford what many in affluent nations take for granted as universal: early years of total dependence, security, innocence, extended

Doing Childhood Studies: from: The Children's Table
Author(s) Vallone Lynne
Abstract: After seventeen years at a university in central Texas, I accepted a position in southern New Jersey. This fact is not so very surprising or even particularly interesting; academics relocate frequently and for a host of reasons. Two things, however, made this move somewhat unusual: I left a conventional, well-established discipline at the center of liberal arts curricula—English—to join a nascent multidisciplinary department in an emergent field, childhood studies. In what follows, I reflect on what this move has meant for me as a scholar of children’s literature. I also outline the creation of the Department of Childhood

CHAPTER TWO The Dinner Party and the Sailor at War from: Poetry as Survival
Abstract: A surprising number of scholars and teachers and even poets—people who claim to “know” what poetry is—will insist that only one aspect of poetry is crucial. Insist for instance, that the essence of poetry is formal coherence (order) or that only emotion matters (disorder). Maybe this one-sided emphasis is a temperamental thing. For some people, the need for order is so pronounced and pleasurable that order seems everything to them in the project of poetry. And for others, the destabilizing claims or threats of experience are so urgent that it would be impossible for them to talk about

CHAPTER FIVE Bags Full of Havoc from: Poetry as Survival
Abstract: We could do worse than to begin by noting that most commentators since the dawn of history have felt that the great themes of the personal lyric are love and death. Once we move past the governing abstraction “love” into its multitudinous manifestations, it’s as if we snorkeled above a tropical coral reef

CHAPTER TEN Wordsworth and the Permanent Forms from: Poetry as Survival
Abstract: More than anyone before him, William Wordsworth (1770–1850) brought poetry down out of the high-flown literary language that so subtly served the Overculture’s class interests. The language in a poem, he said, should “consist of a selection of the real language spoken by men.” With that single, simple idea, he brought poetry closer to the average person and connected it to the urgencies in people’s lives. He insisted that a poet was neither a special, divinely inspired genius nor a spokesman for the Overculture and a propagandist for its values. Instead, the poet was simply “a man speaking to

CHAPTER FIFTEEN The Quest and the Dangerous Path from: Poetry as Survival
Abstract: As we approach our final trio of poets, we enter the contemporary world. These poets have read Freud and Jung and others. They know that the spiritual and emotional quests for meaning that began with such naive force in Romanticism have now been eroded by the skepticism and insights of psychoanalysis. The imagination of these three poets persists in mining what can seem at first like little more than a ribbon of neurotic themes crossing the rock face of an individual life. But as it digs down into the dark, unpromising rock, it still manages to extract what will become

Reconstructing Men in Savannah, Georgia, 1865–1876 from: Southern Masculinity
Author(s) Taylor Karen
Abstract: If Tunis G. Campbell looked for friends and supporters among the people who witnessed his progress along the streets of Savannah, Georgia, or glared into the faces of enemies, he left no record of it. It was 12 January 1876, and Savannah’s populace was as divided over issues of race as it was about most everything else. Even many African American Savannahns found men like Campbell embarrassing, if not frightening. Although he attracted as many people as he frightened, there Campbell was, at age sixty-three, on his way to Colonel Jack Smith’s Washington County plantation, where men were measured by

Memory and Masculinity: from: Southern Masculinity
Author(s) Barbee Matthew Mace
Abstract: On 6 February 1993, Arthur Ashe died due to complications from HIV/AIDS. The tennis champion, activist, writer, and Richmond, Virginia, native was forty-nine years old. National newspapers reported his passing with pronounced mourning and loss. Along with a standard obituary, the Washington Post recalled Ashe in an editorial as “a legendary figure in modern American history.” The Post’s Tony Kornheiser lauded Ashe as “my hero. He was a man of grace, of intellect, of moral purpose, of courage and integrity.” Kornheiser’s fellow sports columnist Michael Wilbon wrote that “nobody brought more dignity or honor than Arthur Ashe” and defined his

Book Title: The Bioregional Imagination-Literature, Ecology, and Place
Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): ZEITLER EZRA
Abstract: Bioregionalism is an innovative way of thinking about place and planet from an ecological perspective. Although bioregional ideas occur regularly in ecocritical writing, until now no systematic effort has been made to outline the principles of bioregional literary criticism and to use it as a way to read, write, understand, and teach literature. The twenty-four original essays here are written by an outstanding selection of international scholars. The range of bioregions covered is global and includes such diverse places as British Columbia's Meldrum Creek and Italy's Po River Valley, the Arctic and the Outback. There are even forays into cyberspace and outer space. In their comprehensive introduction, the editors map the terrain of the bioregional movement, including its history and potential to inspire and invigorate place-based and environmental literary criticism. Responding to bioregional tenets, this volume is divided into four sections. The essays in the "Reinhabiting" section narrate experiments in living-in-place and restoring damaged environments. The "Rereading" essays practice bioregional literary criticism, both by examining texts with strong ties to bioregional paradigms and by opening other, less-obvious texts to bioregional analysis. In "Reimagining," the essays push bioregionalism to evolve-by expanding its corpus of texts, coupling its perspectives with other approaches, or challenging its core constructs. Essays in the "Renewal" section address bioregional pedagogy, beginning with local habitat studies and concluding with musings about the Internet. In response to the environmental crisis, we must reimagine our relationship to the places we inhabit. This volume shows how literature and literary studies are fundamental tools to such a reimagining.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46nnf7

Big Picture, Local Place: from: The Bioregional Imagination
Author(s) GLOTFELTY CHERYLL
Abstract: The buildings of the uc Davis campus assert their verticality amid the flat, agricultural fields of California’s Central Valley. Shrouded in bone-chilling, thick gray Tule fog for much of the winter, Davis is then baked by kilnlike heat in summer. With the sublime Sierra Nevada mountains ninety minutes to the east and the hip San Francisco Bay Area ninety minutes to the west, Davis appears as a podunk exit off of Interstate 80 on the way to somewhere else. Surprising, then, that in the 1990s Davis became a Camelot of place-based culture and bioregional thought, looked to as a model

The Poetics of Water: from: The Bioregional Imagination
Author(s) WRIGLESWORTH CHAD
Abstract: Since 1902, western watersheds in the United States have been managed by the Bureau of Reclamation, an extension of the U.S. Department of Interior that was established to ensure the equitable distribution of water for purposes of settlement, irrigation, and hydroelectric production in seventeen arid and semiarid states. During the 1930s, federal engineers identified the Columbia River Basin as a latent powerhouse and planned to put it to work with hydroelectric dams made to serve regional and national interests. Franklin Delano Roosevelt’s New Deal supported the Columbia Basin Project (1933), which was followed by the Reclamation Project Act (1939), and

Critical Bioregionalist Method in from: The Bioregional Imagination
Author(s) ANDERSON DANIEL GUSTAV
Abstract: A disclosure: in proposing “critical bioregionalism,” I assume that diverse bioregions are functionally homogenous. In other words, claims about the cultural life of bioregion X must be significant and meaningful to those who live in bioregion Y. As Pavel Cenkl observes in his essay in this collection, productive labor is one such function common to all bioregions; he argues that the qualities of that labor make the North both distinct from and comparable to any other bioregion. Absent the assumption of functional commonalities, one could only speak responsibly of a bioregional culture by celebrating its cultural artifacts and practices without

Reading Climate Change and Work in the Circumpolar North from: The Bioregional Imagination
Author(s) CENKL PAVEL
Abstract: My students and i typically begin the first day of our “Literature and Film of the North” class by considering the question, “What is North?” We start by looking at a wide range of documents that includes the 550 ce Voyage of Saint Brendan, which recounts the episodic narrative of Brendan’s crossing of the North Atlantic in an ox hide boat; passages from Homer and Dante; and for a visual cornerstone, Gerhard Mercator’s 1595 map, Septentrionalium Terrarum Descriptio.

Teaching Bioregional Perception—at a Distance from: The Bioregional Imagination
Author(s) CHRISTENSEN LAIRD
Abstract: At 1,919 feet it’s not much of a mountain, even by northern Taconic standards, but still people climb through the hickory, beech, and maple to take in the view from Haystack Mountain: Adirondacks to the west, Green Mountains to the east, and the basin of Lake Champlain opening to the north. There’s nothing visible to suggest where a mapmaker’s line separates Vermont from New York, or Rutland County from Bennington and Washington Counties—never mind the fainter lines between the towns of Pawlet, Granville, Rupert, or Danby. That’s why I bring my graduate students here each September, in the company

The Days of Yore: from: When Our Words Return
Author(s) Partnow Patricia H.
Abstract: On June 6, 1912, Novarupta Volcano in southwestern Alaska exploded in one of the largest eruptions in the history of the world. Ash and pumice buried the Alaska Peninsula villages of Katmai and Douglas and the seasonally operated fish-processing camp at Kaflia Bay and fell two feet deep on the city of Kodiak, 115 miles away. The explosion spawned continuous thunder and lightning storms and resulted in total darkness for more than forty-eight hours. Its roar was heard as far away as Juneau, 750 miles distant (Martin 1913: 131). This event was the cause of widespread displacement of the Alutiiq

Book Title: The Archaeology of Class War-The Colorado Coalfield Strike of 1913-1914
Publisher: University Press of Colorado
Author(s): McGuire Randall H.
Abstract: The Archaeology of the Colorado Coalfield War Project has conducted archaeological investigations at the site of the Ludlow Massacre in Ludlow, Colorado, since 1996. With the help of the United Mine Workers of America and funds from the Colorado State Historical Society and the Colorado Endowment for the Humanities, the scholars involved have integrated archaeological finds with archival evidence to show how the everyday experiences of miners and their families shaped the strike and its outcome.The Archaeology of Class War weaves together material culture, documents, oral histories, landscapes, and photographs to reveal aspects of the strike and life in early twentieth-century Colorado coalfields unlike any standard documentary history. Excavations at the site of the massacre and the nearby town of Berwind exposed tent platforms, latrines, trash dumps, and the cellars in which families huddled during the attack. Myriad artifacts—from canning jars to a doll’s head—reveal the details of daily existence and bring the community to life.The Archaeology of Class War will be of interest to archaeologists, historians, and general readers interested in mining and labor history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46nv52

2 A Terrible Unrest: from: The Archaeology of Class War
Author(s) McGUIRE RANDALL H.
Abstract: On April 21, 1914, class warfare raged on the plains of southern Colorado. Near the Ludlow railroad depot, troops of the Colorado National Guard hunkered down in a burned-out union tent colony, besieged by armed strikers. The morning before, they had attacked the colony with machine gun and rifle fire and, after a daylong battle, driven the strikers out. The bodies of two women and ten children lay at the bottom of a dark, smoky pit in the colony. Passengers on a passing train were horrified to see the corpses of union leaders Louis Tikas and James Fyler sprawled by

11 Teaching Class Conflict: from: The Archaeology of Class War
Author(s) CASELLA ELEANOR CONLIN
Abstract: Like many good collaborations, this chapter began in a pub. When the 2005 Society for Historical Archaeology meetings were held in York, England, the two of us took the opportunity to get in a good visit. As newly minted faculty teaching historical archaeology, we spent much of our time talking about teaching, discussing students, and comparing notes about pedagogy as viewed from different sides of the Atlantic. During one of these meandering conversations, our discussion turned to the Colorado Coalfield War Archaeology Project. In the field, only one of us (Clark) had intersected with this research, once at the inception

Book Title: The Sacredness of the Person-A New Genealogy of Human Rights
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Skinner Alex
Abstract: According to Joas, every single human being has increasingly been viewed as sacred. He discusses the abolition of torture and slavery, once common practice in the pre-18th century west, as two milestones in modern human history. The author concludes by portraying the emergence of the UN Declaration of Human Rights of 1948 as a successful process of value generalization. Joas demonstrates that the history of human rights cannot adequately be described as a history of ideas or as legal history, but as a complex transformation in which diverse cultural traditions had to be articulated, legally codified, and assimilated into practices of everyday life. The sacralization of the person and universal human rights will only be secure in the future, warns Joas, through continued support by institutions and society, vigorous discourse in their defense, and their incarnation in everyday life and practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt4cg8vx

Chapter 3 MAKING SENSE OF THE CASE from: Hysteria Complicated by Ecstasy
Abstract: In analyzing the Leroux case, it is important to distinguish the levels of that analysis: what the various participants thought was happening and what we, reading the text nearly two hundred years later, might surmise. Let me begin by teasing out the participants’ views.

Book Title: Marrow of Human Experience, The-Essays on Folklore by William A. Wilson
Publisher: Utah State University Press
Author(s): Call Diane
Abstract: As a body, Wilson's essays develop related topics and connected themes. This collection organizes them in three coherent parts. The first examines the importance of folklore-what it is and its value in various contexts. Part two, drawing especially on the experience of Finland, considers the role of folklore in national identity, including both how it helps define and sustain identity and the less savory ways it may be used for the sake of nationalistic ideology. Part three, based in large part on Wilson's extensive work in Mormon folklore, which is the most important in that area since that of Austin and Alta Fife, looks at religious cultural expressions and outsider perceptions of them and, again, at how identity is shaped, by religious belief, experience, and participation; by the stories about them; and by the many other expressive parts of life encountered daily in a culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt4cgkmk

Building Bridges: from: Marrow of Human Experience, The
Abstract: In an effort to address the perennial questions of where a person with a PhD in folklore could find an academic position and how to succeed in the profession, I proposed that the Folklore Institute at Indiana University host a symposium in 1995 entitled, “Folklore in the Academy: The Relevance of Folklore to Language and Literature Departments.” It was my intention to feature Bert Wilson as the role model because he had been an inspiration to me since I encountered him at my first meeting of the American Folklore Society in Austin, Texas, where we had a memorable discussion about

Documenting Folklore from: Marrow of Human Experience, The
Abstract: A series of serendipitous events led me to Bert Wilson’s Introduction to Folklore class in fall semester 1977, and by the end of the semester I wanted to be a folklorist. I succeeded and became the first permanent archivist in the BYU Folklore Archives, since renamed the William A. Wilson Folklore Archives. Like so many others, I owe my profession to Bert’s influence. Bert once told me that he sometimes thought he should have been a full-time archivist rather than the myriad of roles he played throughout his career. I’m glad that wasn’t the path Bert chose. For despite his

Sibelius, the Kalevala, and Karelianism from: Marrow of Human Experience, The
Abstract: In this engaging article, William Wilson provides an overview of the social and artistic movement of late nineteenth-century Finland known as Karelianism. The term Karelia (Finnish Karjala) designates both a portion of eastern Finland and abroad expanse of territory east of the border. The eastern region was never part of the Swedish empire, an entity that molded the culture of Finland proper for six centuries. Predominantly Orthodox in faith and possessing a language distinct from (although very closely related to) Finnish, it would seem an unlikely candidate for national epitome. Yet through the epic song collecting efforts of Elias Lönnrot

2. The maturing of a profession from: Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Author(s) Ridge John
Abstract: There is a significant difference between a person being considered to be ʹprofessionalʹ in their approach to conducting business, whatever that business may be, and a person being part of a profession and therefore considered to be a professional. This difference has created enormous misunderstanding and confusion within the information and communications technology (ICT) sector, and hampered its progress towards being recognised as a profession. Being part of a profession is a vocation requiring knowledge of some department of learning or science, for example, medicine, law, engineering, architecture, accountancy and, more recently, ICT.

3. Some ethical imperatives for the computing profession from: Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Author(s) Holmes Neville
Abstract: This chapter focuses on the ethical responsibilities of the computing profession. Governance should be based on ethics and be imposed by authority. The ethical aspects of digital technology should, therefore, be understood before its governance can be expected to be effective. Also, to be respected, governance of the industry should be administered by a knowledgeable authority; that is, by a professional body encompassing the entirety of digital technology. This technology has been developed and exploited in a quagmire of commercialism and hyperbole in which intellectual property law and market dominance determine the direction of development much more than the nature

6. ICT is not a profession: from: Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Author(s) Adeney Douglas
Abstract: Information and communications technology (ICT) is not a profession in any significant sense, but this is not a slight on ICT. It is, of course, a profession in an insignificant sense. If a person develops software for a living as opposed to doing it as a hobby, that person is a professional software developer. Some people sing for a living and others just for fun. The former are professional singers while the latter are amateurs. In this sense any occupation is a profession insofar as those engaged in it are making a living from it, but this is not what

8. Informed consent in information technology: from: Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Author(s) Flick Catherine
Abstract: Information technology suffers from a distinct lack of care with respect to adequate informed consent procedures. Computer users are commonly asked to consent to various things that could threaten their personal identity, privacy, and property, yet little care is taken in assessing whether the consent is truly informed. Some software even takes advantage of the confusion rife in informed consent procedures in order to install otherwise unwanted software on usersʹ computers (such as adware or spyware). End user licence agreements (EULAs) are a common example of these poorinformed consent procedures, which have their basis in the inappropriate use of medical

The place of ethics in ICT courses from: Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Abstract: Professionalism, as we have noted previously, has strong links with ethics. A professional is someone who, amongst other things, behaves ethically with respect to his or her occupation. Education is also an important aspect of professionalism. A professional is an expert relative to the general population and this expertise is usually partly a result of being educated in a particular of body of knowledge. It is not surprising, then, that a component of ethics education is commonly considered to be an important element of a professionalʹs education. This is the case in information and communications technology (ICT) and, for a

13. ICT governance and what to do about the toothless tiger(s): from: Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Author(s) Gotterbarn Don
Abstract: Information and communications technology (ICT) is infamous for unfortunate incidents in planning, development, and delivery. A typical response to these incidents is to both complain about the toothless tiger of technical and professional standards that are not enforced, or enforceable, and to also advocate the development and implementation of strong government regulations — licensing and legislation. These regulations constitute one form of what has been called ʹICT governanceʹ. Unfortunately, there are significant limitations to both approaches to ICT governance.

14. Business benefits from keeping codes of ethics up to date from: Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Author(s) Burmeister Oliver K
Abstract: The greater the extent to which a code of ethics is kept up to date, the better is the case that it benefits business to abide by that code. In 2010 the Australian Computer Society (ACS) updated its code of ethics after an extensive review, including national focus groups with members, and international input. Its last update, in 1985, predates most of the recent industry advancements. It was undertaken prior to advances and innovations, such as object-oriented techniques, the Internet and nanotechnology, of the last two decades. Industry currency of the ACS code is important if it is to have

Book Title: Moral Evil- Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Flescher Andrew Michael
Abstract: The idea of moral evil has always held a special place in philosophy and theology because the existence of evil has implications for the dignity of the human and the limits of human action. Andrew M. Flescher proposes four interpretations of evil, drawing on philosophical and theological sources and using them to trace through history the moral traditions that are associated with them.The first model, evil as the presence of badness, offers a traditional dualistic model represented by Manicheanism. The second, evil leading to goodness through suffering, presents a theological interpretation known as theodicy. Absence of badness-that is, evil as a social construction-is the third model. The fourth, evil as the absence of goodness, describes when evil exists in lieu of the good-the "privation" thesis staked out nearly two millennia ago by Christian theologian St. Augustine. Flescher extends this fourth model-evil as privation-into a fifth, which incorporates a virtue ethic. Drawing original connections between Augustine and Aristotle, Flescher's fifth model emphasizes the formation of altruistic habits that can lead us to better moral choices throughout our lives.Flescher eschews the temptation to think of human agents who commit evil as outside the norm of human experience. Instead, through the honing of moral skills and the practice of attending to the needs of others to a greater degree than we currently do, Flescher offers a plausible and hopeful approach to the reality of moral evil.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hh3bq

Book Title: Philosophy of Communication- Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Butchart Garnet C.
Abstract: To philosophize is to communicate philosophically. From its inception, philosophy has communicated forcefully. Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle talk a lot, and talk ardently. Because philosophy and communication have belonged together from the beginning--and because philosophy comes into its own and solidifies its stance through communication--it is logical that we subject communication to philosophical investigation. This collection of key works of classical, modern, and contemporary philosophers brings communication back into philosophy's orbit. It is the first anthology to gather in a single volume foundational works that address the core questions, concepts, and problems of communication in philosophical terms. The editors have chosen thirty-two selections from the work of Plato, Leibniz, Hegel, Husserl, Heidegger, Wittgenstein, Benjamin, Lacan, Derrida, Sloterdijk, and others. They have organized these texts thematically, rather than historically, in seven sections: consciousness; intersubjective understanding; language; writing and context; difference and subjectivity; gift and exchange; and communicability and community. Taken together, these texts not only lay the foundation for establishing communication as a distinct philosophical topic but also provide an outline of what philosophy of communication might look like.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhcqm

5 The End of Philosophy and the Task of Thinking from: Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Heidegger Martin
Abstract: The following text belongs to a larger context. It is the attempt undertaken again and again ever since 1930 to shape the question of Being and Timein a more primordial fashion. This means to subject the point of departure of the question inBeing and Timeto an immanent criticism. Thus it must become clear to what

9 Foundations of a Theory of Intersubjective Understanding from: Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Schutz Alfred
Abstract: As we proceed to our study of the social world, we abandon the strictly phenomenological method. We shall start out by simply accepting the existence of the social world as it is always accepted in the attitude of the natural standpoint, whether in everyday life or in sociological observation. In so doing, we shall avoid any attempt to deal with the problem from the point of view of transcendental phenomenology. We shall, therefore, be bypassing a whole nest of problems whose significance and difficulty were pointed out by Husserl in his Formal and Transcendental Logic, although he did not there

19 Eighth Series of Structure | Twenty-Fourth Series of the Communication of Events | Twenty-Sixth Series of Language from: Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Deleuze Gilles
Abstract: Lévi-Strauss has indicated a paradox in the form of an antinomy, which is similar to Lacan’s paradox: two series being given, one signifying and the other signified, the first presents an excess and the latter a lack. By means of this excess and this lack, the series refer to each other in eternal disequilibrium and in perpetual displacement. As the hero of Cosmossays, there are always too many signifying signs. The primordial signifier is of the order of language. In whatever manner language is acquired, the elements of language must have been given all together, all at once, since

20 Ethics as First Philosophy from: Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Levinas Emmanuel
Abstract: The correlation between knowledge, understood as disinterested contemplation, andbeing, is, according to our philosophical tradition, the very site of intelligibility, the occurrence of meaning (sens). The comprehension of being—the semantics of this verb—would thus be the very possibility of or the occasion for wisdom and the wise and, as such, isfirst philosophy. The intellectual, and even spiritual life, of the West, through the priority it gives to knowledge identified with Spirit, demonstrates its fidelity to the first philosophy of Aristotle, whether one interprets the latter according to the ontology of book Γ of theMetaphysicsor

26 The Reason of the Gift from: Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Marion Jean-Luc
Abstract: We give without account. We give without accounting, in every sense of the word. First, because we give without ceasing. We give in the same way we breathe, every moment, in every circumstance, from morning until evening. Not a single day passes without our having given, in one form or another, something to someone, even if we rarely, if ever, “give everything.”¹ Also, we give without keeping account,without measure, because giving implies that one gives at a loss, or at least without taking into account either one’s time or one’s efforts: one simply does not keep account of what

28 Something Like: from: Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Lyotard Jean-Francois
Abstract: With a view to dramatizing the question laid down, “Art and Communication,” I would just like to recall the regime of representation which is proper, or which has been thought proper, at least since Kant, to aesthetic reception; and, in order to pick out this regime, I will just quote two sentences, aphorisms, which appear to contradict one another perfectly:

30 The Paradox of Sovereignty | Form of Law | The Ban and the Wolf from: Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Agamben Giorgio
Abstract: 1.1. The paradox of sovereignty consists in the fact the sovereign is, at the same time, outside and inside the juridical order. If the sovereign is truly the one to whom the juridical order grants the power of proclaiming a state of exception and, therefore, of suspending the order’s own validity, then “the sovereign stands outside the juridical order and, nevertheless, belongs to it, since it is up to him to decide if the constitution is to be suspended in toto” (Schmitt,Politische Theologie, p. 13). The specification that the sovereign is “at the same timeoutside and inside the

31 Becoming-Media: from: Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Vogl Joseph
Abstract: Mediummeans middle and in the middle, mediation and mediator; it calls for a closer questioning of the role, workings, and materials of this “in-between.” Media studies’ field of inquiry is quite rightly a broad one, stretching from prehistoric registers of the tides and stars to the ubiquitous contemporary mass media, encompassing physical transmitters (such as air and light), as well as schemes of notation, whether hieroglyphic, phonetic, or alphanumeric. It includes technologies and artifacts like electrification, the telescope, or the gramophone alongside symbolic forms and spatial representations such as perspective, theater, or literature as a whole. However, the very

Book Title: The Machine Question-Critical Perspectives on AI, Robots, and Ethics
Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Gunkel David J.
Abstract: One of the enduring concerns of moral philosophy is deciding who or what is deserving of ethical consideration. Much recent attention has been devoted to the "animal question" -- consideration of the moral status of nonhuman animals. In this book, David Gunkel takes up the "machine question": whether and to what extent intelligent and autonomous machines of our own making can be considered to have legitimate moral responsibilities and any legitimate claim to moral consideration. The machine question poses a fundamental challenge to moral thinking, questioning the traditional philosophical conceptualization of technology as a tool or instrument to be used by human agents. Gunkel begins by addressing the question of machine moral agency: whether a machine might be considered a legitimate moral agent that could be held responsible for decisions and actions. He then approaches the machine question from the other side, considering whether a machine might be a moral patient due legitimate moral consideration. Finally, Gunkel considers some recent innovations in moral philosophy and critical theory that complicate the machine question, deconstructing the binary agent--patient opposition itself. Technological advances may prompt us to wonder if the science fiction of computers and robots whose actions affect their human companions (think of HAL in 2001: A Space Odyssey) could become science fact. Gunkel's argument promises to influence future considerations of ethics, ourselves, and the other entities who inhabit this world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhks8

Book Title: Translating Childhoods-Immigrant Youth, Language, and Culture
Publisher: Rutgers University Press
Author(s): ORELLANA MARJORIE FAULSTICH
Abstract: Skilled in two vernaculars, children shoulder basic and more complicated verbal exchanges for non-English speaking adults. Readers hear, through children's own words, what it means be "in the middle" or the "keys to communication" that adults otherwise would lack. Drawing from ethnographic data and research in three immigrant communities, Marjorie Faulstich Orellana's study expands the definition of child labor by assessing children's roles as translators as part of a cost equation in an era of global restructuring and considers how sociocultural learning and development is shaped as a result of children's contributions as translators.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hj1hn

Introduction from: Translating Childhoods
Abstract: For more than a decade, I have been documenting the work that the children of immigrants do as they use their skills in two languages to read, write, listen, speak, and do things for their families.¹ I refer to a practice that has variously been called Natural Translation, family interpreting, language brokering, and para-phrasing–terms I discuss further in chapter 1. Placing phone calls, taking and leaving messages, scheduling appointments, filling out credit card applications, negotiating sales purchases, soliciting social services, and communicating for their parents with teachers, medical personnel, and other authority figures are part of everyday life for

Chapter 4 Public Para-Phrasing from: Translating Childhoods
Abstract: Like home-based translation work, public para-phrasing involved a myriad of activities involving an array of institutional domains, set in distinct relationships, and directed toward assorted problems. Children developed and used a wide array of what Luis Moll calls “funds of knowledge,”¹ as they engaged in tasks that ranged from relatively simple things such as asking where items were located in a store or for directions on the street to much more complex negotiations with doctors, lawyers, and social service providers. Translations were provided mostly for family members, as when children read signs, labels, maps, and directions; often, publicpara-phrasing acts

Chapter 6 Transformations from: Translating Childhoods
Abstract: “Marjorie!” I looked up from my lunch in this restaurant frequented by university faculty on this first day of a return visit to the Midwest, startled to see “Nova” standing straight and tall in a waiter’s white pressed shirt and red tie, looking and sounding professional, confident, mature, and at home in this position and setting. After I registered my surprise to see him here, Nova told me of his activities: working as a waiter; designing web pages for cyberspace clients who paid for his services (with a business partner from Mexico); playing on the volleyball team (despite his father’s

Book Title: Theorizing Scriptures-New Critical Orientations to a Cultural Phenomenon
Publisher: Rutgers University Press
Author(s): WIMBUSH VINCENT L.
Abstract: Historically, religious scriptures are defined as holy texts that are considered to be beyond the abilities of the layperson to interpret. Their content is most frequently analyzed by clerics who do not question the underlying political or social implications of the text, but use the writing to convey messages to their congregations about how to live a holy existence. In Western society, moreover, what counts as scripture is generally confined to the Judeo-Christian Bible, leaving the voices of minorities, as well as the holy texts of faiths from Africa and Asia, for example, unheard. In this innovative collection of essays that aims to turn the traditional bible-study definition of scriptures on its head, Vincent L. Wimbush leads an in-depth look at the social, cultural, and racial meanings invested in these texts. Contributors hail from a wide array of academic fields and geographic locations and include such noted academics as Susan Harding, Elisabeth Shnssler Fiorenza, and William L. Andrews. Purposefully transgressing disciplinary boundaries, this ambitious book opens the door to different interpretations and critical orientations, and in doing so, allows an ultimately humanist definition of scriptures to emerge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hj5wr

1 Scriptures—Text and Then Some from: Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) BELL CATHERINE
Abstract: It is a daunting task to address a question about the “phenomenology” of anything. Yet I have had the good fortune to count among my teachers the great phenomenologist, Mircea Eliade, and the undisputed great anti-phenomenologist, Jonathan Z. Smith. If they remain in my psyche as dual influences, although perhaps more Scylla and Charybdis than yin and yang, they also insure there is little that I cannot attemptto address one way or another. So I put prevarications aside. I have been drawn to the study of texts and issues of textuality since the beginning of my career, and it

5 Known Knowns and Unknown Unknowns: from: Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) SUGIRTHARAJAH R. S.
Abstract: These were the words of the U.S. Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld at a press conference. This is indeed a highly complicated use of the English language, at least equivalent to and perhaps surpassing the Bhabha-ist and Spivakian verbiage. The defense secretary may not have had the world of scriptural interpretation in mind when he uttered these profound thoughts, but what he said has some relevance to the discipline.

11 Conjuring Scriptures and Engendering Healing Traditions from: Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) CHIREAU YVONNE P.
Abstract: There are numerous meanings that may be given to textuality using comparative approaches, and the religions of the Afro-Atlantic world provide an especially rich terrain for conceptualizing the phenomena of “scriptures” as it appears in the experiences of historically dominated peoples. So in the following discussion I want to put forward some examples from black American religions that demonstrate how practitioners make use of “scriptures,” sometimes in unique ways.

27 Who Needs the Subaltern? from: Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) SAMANTRAI RANU
Abstract: I read the call for an Institute for Signifying Scriptures primarily as a methodological statement, one that resonates well with my own research affiliations and inclinations. Vincent Wimbush proposes an approach to “scriptures” that shifts attention from the correct interpretation of canonical texts to the use of scriptural material in practice. Understood as phenomena, “scriptures” derives their meaning not from authorial intent but from their activation in everyday life in often unintended and surprising uses. Shifting from “ what ‘scriptures’ mean” to “how ‘scriptures’ mean,” Wimbush also directs our attention to the range of scriptural materials evident in the meaning-making, or

1 The Holocaust, History Writing, and the Role of Fiction from: After Representation?
Author(s) HARTMAN GEOFFREY
Abstract: Once upon a time, history and legend formed a single, relatively consistent narrative. Consistent, at least, after a period of redaction and centuries of interpretation. Hebrew Scripture may have started as a diverse bundle of oral or written traditions, but these were unified—not without leaving traces of difference—by an editorial and canonical process.

6 Writing Ruins: from: After Representation?
Author(s) ROTHBERG MICHAEL
Abstract: In the concluding lines of André Schwarz-Bart’s novel A Woman Named Solitude(La Mulatresse Solitude, 1972), the narrator recalls the “humiliated ruins of the Warsaw Ghetto” while describing the site of a failed Caribbean slave revolt.¹ Schwarz-Bart, who died on September 30, 2006, was a French Jew of Polish origin who lost his family in the Nazi genocide and who remains best known for his novel of Holocaust and Jewish history,The Last of the Just(Le Dernier des Justes, 1959).² In the wake of the surprising success of that prize-winning novel, Schwarz-Bart, in collaboration with his Guadeloupean wife, Simone

Book Title: Thinking About Dementia-Culture, Loss, and the Anthropology of Senility
Publisher: Rutgers University Press
Author(s): COHEN LAWRENCE
Abstract: As Alzheimer's disease and other forms of dementia continue to command an ever-increasing amount of attention in medicine and psychology, this book will be essential reading for anthropologists, social scientists, and health care professionals.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjbhp

6 Genetic Susceptibility and Alzheimerʹs Disease: from: Thinking About Dementia
Author(s) PREST JANALYN
Abstract: Comments and claims, such as the preceding by Francis Collins, as well as reports about newly located genes, appear with increasing frequency in the media these days. The sociologist Alan Peterson argues that such stories are deemed newsworthy “precisely because they offer people the promise of being able to re-make themselves anew—to ‘play God’—so that they can better deal with, if not overcome, the reality of disease, disability and death” (2001, 267). Because of the possibility that such stories may bring about changes in individual behaviors, Peterson insists that it is important to investigate how “gene stories” selectively

Book Title: The King James Version at 400-Assessing Its Genius as Bible Translation and Its Literary Influence
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Towner Philip H.
Abstract: In this collection of essays, thirty scholars from diverse disciplines offer their unique perspectives on the genius of the King James Version, a translation whose 400th anniversary was recently celebrated throughout the English-speaking world. While avoiding nostalgia and hagiography, each author clearly appreciates the monumental, formative role the KJV has had on religious and civil life on both sides of the Atlantic (and beyond) as well as on the English language itself. In part 1 the essayists look at the KJV in its historical contexts—the politics and rapid language growth of the era, the emerging printing and travel industries, and the way women are depicted in the text (and later feminist responses to such depictions). Part 2 takes a closer look at the KJV as a translation and the powerful precedents it set for all translations to follow, with the essayists exploring the translators’ principles and processes (with close examinations of “Bancroft’s Rules" and the Prefaces), assessing later revisions of the text, and reviewing the translation’s influence on the English language, textual criticism, and the practice of translation in Jewish and Chinese contexts. Part 3 looks at the various ways the KJV has impacted the English language and literature, the practice of religion (including within the African American and Eastern Orthodox churches), and the broader culture. The contributors are Robert Alter, C. Clifton Black, David G. Burke, Richard A. Burridge, David J. A. Clines, Simon Crisp, David J. Davis, James D. G. Dunn, Lori Anne Ferrell, Leonard J. Greenspoon, Robin Griffith-Jones, Malcolm Guite, Andrew E. Hill, John F. Kutsko, Seth Lerer, Barbara K. Lewalski, Jacobus A. Naudé, David Norton, Jon Pahl, Kuo-Wei Peng, Deborah W. Rooke, Rodney Sadler Jr., Katharine Doob Sakenfeld, Harold Scanlin, Naomi Seidman, Christopher Southgate, R. S. Sugirtharajah, Joan Taylor, Graham Tomlin, Philip H. Towner, David Trobisch, and N. T. Wright.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjgtt

Foreword: from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Burke David G.
Abstract: The King James Bible came at the end of the Elizabethan age, between Shakespeare and Milton, when Englishmen were using words more passionately, richly, vigorously, wittily, and sublimely than ever before or since. Although none of the divines or scholars who made it were literary men, their language was touched with genius—the genius of a period when style was the common property of educated men rather than an individual achievement.¹

The KJV and the Rapid Growth of English in the Elizabethan-Jacobean Era from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Lerer Seth
Abstract: The period from 1500 to 1650 saw the largest documented increase in the English vocabulary since the Norman Conquest.¹ It has been estimated that about 70 percent of our current, working lexicon comes from words borrowed from outside the language, and the overwhelming bulk of these words entered learned and common parlance in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries. Such words, too, were not simply lifted wholesale from other tongues. They were coined out of the raw material of classical example: inkhorn terms, aureate diction, denotations for scientific and technical material—all of these came to increase the vocabulary of the

The KJV and the Development of Text Criticism from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Trobisch David
Abstract: Several years ago I was invited to teach an evening class at a liberal arts college in the Midwest. The topic of the session was apocalyptic literature. We read from the book of Daniel using the New International Version. At one point a student asked, “Why are we not reading the Bible in its original language?” I was impressed by this question, especially since some chapters of Daniel are written in Hebrew, while other chapters are written in Aramaic. It took a while before I realized that the student referred to the King James Version.

The KJV Translation of the Old Testament: from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Clines David J. A.
Abstract: Perhaps unsurprisingly, in both cases, though the KJV’s literal translation is unexceptionable, the original meaning has been misunderstood. “The root of the matter” is generally used today to mean the essential or inner part of something, the core,² but roots are more properly the origin of things than their essence. The friends whom Job imagines saying “the root of the matter is

The KJV New Testament: from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Dunn James D. G.
Abstract: Part of the reason for taking on this subject, I guess, was the memory of teenage irritation, more than fifty years ago, when I found myself increasingly frustrated at the many occurrences of “thou,” “thee,” and “ye”; the suffixes “-eth” and “-est”; and “hath,” “spake,” “wist,” “wax,” and “brethren.” It was all so old-fashioned, out of date, not language I would use in any other context than reading the Bible. So I suppose I wanted an opportunity to say how I came to find the KJV less and less satisfactory and satisfying as a translation. Not simply for me in

The KJV and Anglo-Jewish Translations of the Bible: from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Greenspoon Leonard J.
Abstract: In a recent study of the relationship between the King James Version and English-language biblical translations by/for Jews, I concluded: “In no other language or culture does a single non-Jewish version exert such influence over Jewish translations.”¹ In order to establish a firm foundation for this declaration, two propositions must be demonstrated. The first, which is implicit in my statement, is that the KJV exerted a significant influence on subsequent Jewish English-language texts. The second, which I might term explicit, is that there are no parallels for such extensive influence by any other non-Jewish version in another language or culture.

The Question of Eloquence in the King James Version from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Alter Robert
Abstract: If there is a single attribute large numbers of readers attach almost reflexively to the King James Version, it would most likely be eloquence. The warrant for this attribution is abundantly evident. Eloquence, a term often associated with oratory, perhaps especially delivered orally, suggests a powerful marshalling of the resources of language to produce a persuasive effect, and that quality is manifested in verse after verse of the 1611 translation. It is an intrinsic quality of this English rendering of the Bible that no doubt has been heightened by the virtually canonical status the King James Bible came to enjoy

“Not of an Age, But for All Time”: from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Black C. Clifton
Abstract: In the slender space of twenty years not one but two corpora exploded the course of English language and literature. I know of no other culture in which a revolutionary convergence of such magnitude occurred. Two centuries separate Goethe (1749–1832) from Luther’s Bible (1534). Pushkin (1799–1837) consolidated Russia’s vernacular a century after East Slavic’s push and pull between Church Slavonic and Peter the Great (1672–1725). From 1590 to 1611 England witnessed the emergence of bothShakespearean poetryandthe King James Bible. The world has never been the same since. The Bard of Avon is now regarded

The KJV and the Seventeenth-Century Religious Lyric from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Lewalski Barbara K.
Abstract: Why was there such a flowering of religious lyric poetry in England in the seventeenth century, and did the publication of the King James (or Authorized) Version in 1611 have anything to do with it? I think it did, for reasons and in ways I want to explore here. Some aspects of the Reformation and its aftermath in England seem hardly conducive to the development of religious arts—insistence on the single, literal sense of Scripture, iconoclasm, suspicion in some quarters about church music, anxieties about adding to or ornamenting the Word of God in sermons or poems, and the

America’s King of Kings: from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Pahl Jon
Abstract: The 400th anniversary of the publication of the King James Version of the Bible has given rise to many fine appreciations of the text and its influence.¹ There is no reason to gainsay these appreciations. The text does, often, dignify English with a singular sonorous sublimity. Yet the question I would like to consider today is less aesthetic than political. That is, what is the connection between the KJV and the emergence on the global stage of what I call, in my most recent book, an American empire of sacrifice?² Put more prosaically: Are there historical links between the KJV

“A New Garb for the Jewish Soul”: from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Seidman Naomi
Abstract: In a field as well trodden as that of Bible translation, a would-be translator has two curiously dissimilar tasks. On the one hand, Bible translators at least since Jerome have insisted on the importance of “going back to the original text,” of coming closer to this original than previous efforts had succeeded in doing. On the other hand, new translations, particularly in the modern period, also aspire to differentiate themselves from their precursors who have worked in the same language, to gain the sort of status that accrues to new translations and is justly withheld from mere revisions.¹ Proximity and

The Hermeneutics of Dignity from: Fragile Dignity
Author(s) Brand Gerrit
Abstract: Furthermore, the concept of dignity can only be understood when its narrative structure is acknowledged. By using the metaphor of an old master’s canvas, covered in several layers of paint, I first try to condense the historical dimension of the narrative to form a composite image. I further assume that “dignity” does not refer to some objective essence of

Figuring God and Humankind: from: Fragile Dignity
Author(s) Spronk Klaas
Abstract: When one person kills almost eighty unarmed people without any obvious remorse in Norway, a country renowned for its culture of human rights and cultural tolerance, the brutality triggers the renewal of age-old questions: What does human dignity entail? What is it to be human?¹ Presupposing that the Old Testament has any contribution to make will not meet with unqualified support. On the contrary, most critics may deny that the Old Testament has any contribution to make to this debate at all—a point of view with which a few scholars, such as John Rogerson, will disagree (Rogerson 2009, 171–

The Givenness of Human Dignity: from: Fragile Dignity
Author(s) Mitchell Beverly Eileen
Abstract: Frits de Lange’s “The Hermeneutics of Dignity” (and Gerrit Brand’s response) and Hendrik Bosman’s “Figuring God and Humankind” (and Klaas Spronk’s response) provide a stimulating contribution to the ongoing discussion on the nature of human dignity. Not surprisingly, I found many points of convergence with my own thought. Each author also raised issues that were intriguing to me but would require more sustained reflection on my part before I could offer a fully developed response. There was also a small subset of ideas that were discussed that raised serious questions for me, but I will offer a sustained comment on

Human Dignity, Families, and Violence: from: Fragile Dignity
Author(s) Misset-van de Weg Magda
Abstract: Any investigation into the connection between family and violence is from the outset confronted by two almost opposing situations, particularly in a context where biblical texts are deemed to inform the notion of family. On the one hand, the family—defined in various ways and comprising of smaller or larger units of various structural forms—has proven to be a dangerous context for many people. This is attested to, for example, by abused spouses and neglected, maltreated children; it is communicated in personal testimonies, anecdotal reports, and research findings. In the South African context, it is in families where marital

A Fragile Dignity: from: Fragile Dignity
Author(s) Tamez Elsa
Abstract: After reading the three essays with your respective responses, my head was whirling with ideas. The diversity of approaches to the topic of dignity, family, and violence, to using the Bible, literature, and the complex problem of Assisted Reproductive Technologies as study resources indicate that we are experiencing a true intercultural dialogue. Intercultural and interdisciplinary dialogues are effective ways to become aware of the problems in other contexts, to learn from them, and to reflect on the facts in a critical and self-critical manner. In this regard, the objective has been achieved. However, you have asked for a third voice,

Family and its Discontents: from: Fragile Dignity
Author(s) Anderson Cheryl B.
Abstract: Even at first reading, the articles by Schaafsma and Mulder work well together. Schaafsma’s article acknowledges that the human dignity of individual family members may be compromised in the family itself—a problem that Dan Browning’s work seeks to address. In turn, Mulder’s article develops theological constructs to counter the low self-esteem of battered women. By discussing domestic abuse, Mulder effectively offers one example of how the human dignity of an individual family member can be undermined, just as Schaafsma notes.

Book Title: Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory-Collected Essays of Werner H. Kelber
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Kelber Werner H.
Abstract: Jesus and his followers defined their allegiances and expressed their identities in a communications culture that manifested itself in voice and chirographic practices, in oral-scribal interfaces, and in performative activities rooted in memory. In the sixteen essays gathered in Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory, Werner Kelber explores the verbal arts of early Christian word processing operative in a media world that was separated by two millennia from our contemporary media history. The title articulates the fact that the ancient culture of voiced texts, hand-copying, and remembering is chiefly accessible to us in print format and predominantly assimilated from print perspectives. The oral-scribal-memorial-performative paradigm developed in these essays challenges the reigning historical-critical model in biblical scholarship. Notions of tradition, the fixation on the single original saying, the dominant methodology of form criticism, and the heroic labors of the Quest—stalwart features of the historical, documentary paradigm—are all subject to a critical review. A number of essays reach beyond New Testament texts, ranging from the pre-Socratic Gorgias through medieval manuscript culture on to print’s triumphant apotheosis in Gutenberg’s Vulgate, product of the high tech of the fifteenth century, all the way to conflicting commemorations of Auschwitz—taking tentative steps toward a history of media technologies, culture, and cognition of the Christian tradition in the West.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjh34

6 Language, Memory, and Sense Perception in the Religious and Technological Culture of Antiquity and the Middle Ages (1995) from: Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: The two persons in whose honor this lecture is named were North American classicists of eminence who had acquired additional training in the oral traditional epics of the former Yugoslavia, an achievement unequaled among scholars of their time. Long before interdisciplinary studies had come into scholarly and curricular vogue, Milman Parry and Albert Lord had attained a literacy in comparative studies that was both severely academic and daringly imaginative. Almost singlehandedly, they initiated the distinct academic field of oral traditional literature, which concerns itself with the study of compositional, performative, and aesthetic aspects of living oral traditions and of texts

9 Geschichte als Kommunikationsgeschichte: from: Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: Das in den 60er Jahren des vorigen Jahrhunderts vorwiegend in der angloamerikanischen Kultur- und Humanwissenschaft aufgebrochene Kommunikationsdenken dürfte von der Suggestivkraft der gegenwärtigen Medienerfahrung nicht ganz unbeeinflusst gewesen sein. Bemerkenswerterweise sind die drei in den USA nahezu kanonisch gewordenen Werke, welche medien- und kommunikationsbewusste Kulturgeschichte betreiben, alle um 1960 herum veröffentlicht wurden: Walter J. Ongs monumentales Buch Ramus Method, and the Decay of Dialogue(1958), Albert LordsThe Singer of Tales(1960), und Eric HavelocksPreface to Plato(1963). Unter dem Eindruck des zunehmend mit dem Siegeszug der elektronischen Medien verbundenen technologischen Informationschubes, welcher die Transformation der modernen Lese- und

13 Memory and Violence, or: from: Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: Three interrelated features may be said to characterize the work of Edith Wyschogrod. There is first an interdisciplinary drive to rise above institutionally sanctioned boundaries and to retrieve intellectual categories from their disciplinary captivity so as to reconfigure them in novel contexts. It is this desire and the ability to bring widely differing genres, discourses, and traditionally separate intellectual orbits into productive coalitions that has increasingly distinguished her writings. This interfacing of philosophy and theology, psychoanalysis and science, literary criticism and linguistics, architecture and the arts, media studies and above all ethics is carried off with a high degree of

Introduction: from: Political Creativity
Abstract: The game’s afoot in institutionalist research. As institutionalists grapple with change, diversity, innovation, indeterminacy, creativity, and surprising assemblages of institutional artifacts, some have come to question the implicit structuralist foundations of their research and turned elsewhere for help. The catalog is big and growing. Among other traditions, institutionalists have turned to social studies of science, action theory, ecology, narrative knowing, poststructuralism, constructivism, postcolonialism, pragmatism, theories of entrepreneurship, religious studies, and economic anthropology. This volume assembles a group of political scientists, whose only obvious commonality is their restlessness with structuralism and their commitment to alternative intellectual traditions to animate their research.

Chapter 3 Governance Architectures for Learning and Self-Recomposition in Chinese Industrial Upgrading from: Political Creativity
Author(s) Voskamp Ulrich
Abstract: For most of its post-1992 rapid industrialization, Chinese manufacturing excelled in global markets as a platform for high-volume and low-cost, export-oriented production.¹ Since China’s accession to the World Trade Organization in 2001, however, the fruits of rapid industrialization have been creating home market conditions for very different manufacturing strategies. Successful export-led industrialization has created more sophisticated domestic Chinese demand for a broad array of manufactured goods. In an effort to capture this emergent demand, Chinese producers are shifting their focus toward more advanced production and away from what was traditionally needed (or possible) within the framework of export processing relationships.

Chapter 6 Creating Political Strategy, Controlling Political Work: from: Political Creativity
Author(s) Sheingate Adam
Abstract: A central theme guiding this volume is that politics is marked by everyday forms of innovation, what Gerald Berk and Dennis Galvan refer to as creative syncretism.¹ Focusing on this creativity, they argue, offers key insights into the nature and conduct of politics. What at first may appear to be fixed and rigid structures, such as rules and roles, interests and institutions, are in fact multiple and malleable elements of political life. This diversity allows actors to combine and recombine elements in pursuit of their political goals. The payoff from such an analytical move is twofold. First, attention to the

Chapter 7 Accidental Hegemony: from: Political Creativity
Author(s) Herrera Yoshiko M.
Abstract: The System of National Accounts (SNA) is a massively ambitious institutional enterprise that aims to clarify the overall structure and dynamics of a country’s economy. As a single standardized system, it is the basis for virtually every comparative economic indicator used today, including gross domestic product. By structuring the content and meaning of aggregate economic information, the SNA makes economies legible to governments, firms, citizens, and external observers, and informs the development of policy and policy assessment.

Chapter 8 The Fluidity of Labor Politics in Postcommunist Transitions: from: Political Creativity
Author(s) Sil Rudra
Abstract: Images of disaffected workers rising up against communist regimes—most evident in the case of the Solidarity-led movement in Poland and the 1989 miners’ strikes in the Soviet Union—initially spawned hopes that unions could spearhead the emergence of civil society throughout the postcommunist world. Within a decade after the fall of communism, however, a much bleaker picture emerged: “Not only have unions not experienced a rebirth—on the contrary, they have seen a drop in membership—but they have been largely unable to create for themselves a pronounced political role to allow them to shape the postcommunist transformation.”¹ Labor

Chapter 9 From Birmingham to Baghdad: from: Political Creativity
Author(s) Lowndes Joseph
Abstract: In September 2003, national security advisor Condoleezza Rice began laying claim to the legacy of the civil rights movement to authorize the U.S. war in Iraq. The speeches themselves are arresting, as familiar political affinities between race, war, and political party identification are dramatically rearranged. The strangeness of the political position Rice is attempting commands attention. Are Rice’s efforts to realign Republican foreign policy with a civil rights agenda sincere? Or is the equation of liberation in the American South with liberation in Iraq mere window dressing for the Bush administration’s military aims, divorced from deeper political commitments? Put differently,

1 Logical Empiricism, 1922–1970 from: How Does Social Science Work?
Abstract: LOGICAL EMPIRICISM was the dominant movement in twentieth-century philosophy of science until about 1965. During its prime in the 1950s it dominated the field so totally that philosophers regarded it as identical with philosophy of science itself. Its basic definitions and distinctions were regarded as self-evident, and anyone who questioned them was contemptuously ignored as simply not a philosopher of science. After about 1958, it was increasingly on the defensive against newer movements, and by 1970 all the innovation was occurring in the newer movements. By 1980 it had almost completely disappeared from philosophy of science convention programs in the

3 Kuhn and Stegmüller from: How Does Social Science Work?
Abstract: KUHN’S THEORY of scientific revolutions swept through the social sciences in the early 1970s with enormous effect. One theorist after another announced that the social sciences were in crisis, that the old paradigm was collapsing under the weight of its anomalies, and that the new paradigm had just appeared. If we are to believe all these announcements, the social sciences experienced a revolution every six months, on the average, in those years. In each case, all the social sciences were included in the old paradigm except for a few anticipations and predecessors of the theorist making the announcement. His work,

4 Pragmatism from: How Does Social Science Work?
Abstract: PRAGMATISTS TREAT SCIENCE as a process of inquiry or search for truth. The emphasis is on process, method, correction, change, not definitive and permanent results. Inquiry begins with a question or a problem, and is directed to answering the question or solving the problem. Problems are initially practical ones: How can we resolve or tone down family quarrels? How can we reduce the inflation rate, or compensate for its more harmful effects without causing trouble elsewhere? However, the search for solutions brings up more abstract problems: What is a good measure of inflation? What is the relation between the quantity

6 Macrosociology of Social Science from: How Does Social Science Work?
Abstract: THE MODERN macrosociology of science begins with the work of Robert Merton in the 1930s. The evidence for the above statement consists of citation counts of journal articles (Cole and Zuckerman, 1975), reports of informants (Storer, 1973, esp. p. xi), and acknowledgments and tracing of ideas in leading works such as Hagstrom (1965). Many sociologists of science since 1960 were Merton’s students or students of students (Cole and Zuckerman, 1975, p. 155), and others took up and developed some of his ideas, for instance, Blissett (1972) and Mitroff (1974a). When the Society for Social Studies of Science (4S) was founded

7 Microsociology of Social Science from: How Does Social Science Work?
Abstract: IT IS TIME once again to give chaos its due, and as always bring some order to it. The Mertonian scientific community was unified by shared norms and countemorms which enabled scientists to work together and achieve a shared truth. But Merton’s critics such as Michael Mulkay and Randall Collins have maintained that these norms are fictions that scientists have invented as part of their struggle for professional prestige and foundation grants. Scientists are not disinterested, not self-skeptical, and certainly not humble, the critics assert; they push their own ideas dogmatically and persistently. They do not judge others’ ideas on

8 Science Politics from: How Does Social Science Work?
Abstract: FOR THE MERTONIANS, social science is an autonomous subsystem of society unified by its own institutionalized values. The values have to be maintained by socialization and by rewards handed out by elite scientists for conformity. However, Mertonian empirical investigations have complicated this scheme by suggesting that all or nearly all norms are accompanied by equally valid counternorms. The resulting normative ambivalence produces conflict as well as unity, since scientists can urge norms on others while they themselves follow counternorms. Shared values thus can serve as rhetorical devices in disputes, rather than as unifying forces. Consequently, the unity-disunity balance must be

12 Problems and Dangers on the Road of Knowledge from: How Does Social Science Work?
Abstract: IN THIS CHAPTER we derive further answers to our basic questions from the materials of part II. We will focus on the second and third questions posed at the opening of chapter 11: (2) How do research programs or traditions develop knowledge; (3) What difficulties come up in this process and how can they be remedied? Under question 3, the philosophers have left two unanswered questions for us. One is a problem derived from Lakatos: there seems to be no rational basis for choosing to work in a particular research program or programs. By this we mean rational for the

5 A Dance of Time Beings from: Dancing Identity
Abstract: Sociocultural processes and artifacts are human doings, expressions that extend from and also extend our bodily nature. Encompassing sex and gender, our performances include nature and are sown in word and deed. The body is a primal natural fact and also a sophisticated artifact, and if fact comes before “arti-fact,” both dissolve in metaphysics. Artifacts reflect the nebulous material of beings-in-the-world that shaped them. Dancing brings this to us, but in a slippery way.

Book Title: A Counter-History of Composition-Toward Methodologies of Complexity
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): HAWK BYRON
Abstract: A Counter-History of Compositioncontests the foundational disciplinary assumption that vitalism and contemporary rhetoric represent opposing, disconnected poles in the writing tradition. Vitalism has been historically linked to expressivism and concurrently dismissed as innate, intuitive, and unteachable, whereas rhetoric is seen as a rational, teachable method for producing argumentative texts. Counter to this, Byron Hawk identifies vitalism as the ground for producing rhetorical texts-the product of complex material relations rather than the product of chance. Through insightful historical analysis ranging from classical Greek rhetoric to contemporary complexity theory, Hawk defines three forms of vitalism (oppositional, investigative, and complex) and argues for their application in the environments where students write and think today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjqxd

2 CARTOGRAPHY AND FORGETTING from: A Counter-History of Composition
Abstract: Following Richard Young’s 1978 NEH seminar, James Berlin accepts Young’s articulation of current-traditional rhetoric and folds vitalism into this category while at the same time revaluing Coleridge. In three articles that appeared in 1980, Berlin establishes his debt to the seminar but also turns the discourse of the field away from the more social-scientific basis that Young uses to ground the discipline. Initially, Berlin reads the concept of vitalism as natural genius and moves it from romanticism to current-traditional rhetoric via the work of Hugh Blair and Richard Whately. Though he starts out using the term vitalism in conjunction with

3 REMAPPING METHOD from: A Counter-History of Composition
Abstract: Because he was teaching at the University of Pittsburgh at the time, Paul Kameen was a part of the academic milieu surrounding Richard Young’s NEH seminar at Carnegie Mellon University in 1978. William Coles and Otis Walter, also from the University of Pittsburgh, were guests at the seminar, and Kameen was very much aware of their work regarding the composing process and rhetorical invention. Like James Berlin, Kameen was wary of the dubious connection between Coleridge and the characterization of vitalism that Young was putting forward in the seminar. Kameen also published a key article in 1980 that put forward

4 A Short Counter-History from: A Counter-History of Composition
Abstract: Rather than place Coleridge in the narrative of rhetoric’s retreat and return, either in retreat as Richard Young does or in return as James Berlin does, Paul Kameen’s reading seems to place Coleridge elsewhere. Certainly Kameen is interested in the ways Coleridge can expand the field’s conceptions of rhetorical invention and the composing process, but his rearticulation of Coleridge goes beyond the revaluation of the romantic individual. If Coleridge is read as espousing a complex relationship among the world, the body, the mind, and writing, then his importance clearly goes beyond mystical genius. But simply placing Coleridge into the return

Book Title: Illness as Narrative- Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Jurecic Ann
Abstract: For most of literary history, personal confessions about illness were considered too intimate to share publicly. By the mid-twentieth century, however, a series of events set the stage for the emergence of the illness narrative. The increase of chronic disease, the transformation of medicine into big business, the women's health movement, the AIDS/HIV pandemic, the advent of inexpensive paperbacks, and the rise of self-publishing all contributed to the proliferation of narratives about encounters with medicine and mortality.While the illness narrative is now a staple of the publishing industry, the genre itself has posed a problem for literary studies. What is the role of criticism in relation to personal accounts of suffering? Can these narratives be judged on aesthetic grounds? Are they a collective expression of the lost intimacy of the patient-doctor relationship? Is their function thus instrumental-to elicit the reader's empathy?To answer these questions, Ann Jurecic turns to major works on pain and suffering by Susan Sontag, Elaine Scarry, and Eve Sedgwick and reads these alongside illness narratives by Jean-Dominique Bauby, Reynolds Price, and Anne Fadiman, among others. In the process, she defines the subgenres of risk and pain narratives and explores a range of critical responses guided, alternately, by narrative empathy, the hermeneutics of suspicion, and the practice of reparative reading. Illness as Narrativeseeks to draw wider attention to this form of life writing and to argue for new approaches to both literary criticism and teaching narrative. Jurecic calls for a practice that's both compassionate and critical. She asks that we consider why writers compose stories of illness, how readers receive them, and how both use these narratives to make meaning of human fragility and mortality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjr8p

Four Sontag, Suffering, and the Work of Writing from: Illness as Narrative
Abstract: Susan Sontag has done more than any other single writer to bring attention to how literature documents and shapes the cultural meaning and experience of illness, pain, and suffering.¹ While Sontag’s work on illness assumes center stage in Illness as MetaphorandAIDS and Its Metaphors, she wrote about suffering throughout her career, fromOn Photography, to novels such asThe Volcano Lover, and to her final book,Regarding the Pain of Others. Sontag’s body of work reveals a deep and sustained exploration—with many turns, conflicts, and contradictions—of the ethics of reception, how audiences regard and respond to

Five Theory’s Aging Body from: Illness as Narrative
Abstract: To ask about the function of criticism at the present time is to invite nearly as many answers as there are critics. The profession has traveled a long way from Matthew Arnold’s confident declaration in 1865 that the only rule a critic must follow is “disinterestedness” in order “to know the best that is known and thought in the world, irrespectively of practice, politics, and everything of the kind” (“Function,” 17). While a good number of today’s critics might define their work as motivated by “interest,” rather than disinterest, there is no consensus on what the focus of that interest

1 DANCE AND THE LIVED BODY from: Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: There are obvious connections between existential thought, the body, dance, and art in general, since they are all founded in lived and experiential values. Particular existentialist authors, however, developed views of the human being growing out of theories of the body, which have specific implications for understanding dance (not to mention the other arts, sport, or movement in general). These views of the

5 DANCE TENSION from: Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: In part 2, we are still moving away from those futile existentialist views that fail to see meaning in life because they emphasize lifeʹs contingency rather than its cohesion, and fail to see the impossibility of erasing (even in our thoughts, let alone our actions) the compelling connectedness of self, body, earth, and world – a universe (a single verse), rendering both unity and diversity possible. Disconnection is possible only if connection is assumed. Likewise, irrationality stands in relation to rationality, nonbeing to being, negative to positive, and contingent properties must be contingent upon something. In short, all oppositions stand

14 The Contest of Values: from: The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Krämer Gudrun
Abstract: People are thinking seriously about values again. They are doing so in Europe, which has been reappraising its Christian heritage since the fall of the Berlin Wall and the collapse of the Soviet empire; in the United States, which has decided to launch a worldwide crusade for freedom; and in Asia, which insists on its cultural specificity. The Muslim world, too, is debating values, internally as well as with the outside world. The debate is taking place in a highly charged atmosphere, and it is marked by a pronounced asymmetry of power. The west calls on ‘Islam’, that is to

15 Does Europe Have a Cultural Identity? from: The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Wagner Peter
Abstract: In 1870, once the process of Italian unification had been completed with the creation of a nation-state after several years of conflict (including armed conflict), in much the same way as in Germany, one of the protagonists stated: ‘Now that we’ve created Italy, we have to create the Italians’ (this remark is attributed, perhaps wrongly, to Massimo d’Azeglio). Despite his efforts to fuse the territories of the peninsula together into a single political order, d’Azeglio did notbelieve that Italy already had a cultural identity. But he did think that the future Italians ought to become more aware of what

Book Title: Black Intersectionalities-A Critique for the 21st Century
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): Rocchi Jean-Paul
Abstract: Black Intersectionalities: A Critique for the 21st Century explores the complex interrelationships between race, gender, and sex as these are conceptualised within contemporary thought. Markers of identity are too often isolated and presented as definitive, then examined and theorised, a process that further naturalises their absoluteness; thus socially generated constructs become socialising categories that assume coercive power. The resulting set of oppositions isolate and delimit: male or female, black or white, straight or gay. A new kind of intervention is needed, an intervention that recognises the validity of the researcher’s own self-reflexivity. Focusing on the way identity is both constructed and constructive, the collection examines the frameworks and practices that deny transgressive possibilities. It seeks to engage in a consciousness raising exercise that documents the damaging nature of assigned social positions and either/or identity constructions. It seeks to progress beyond the socially prescribed categories of race, gender and sex, recognising the need to combine intellectualization and feeling, rationality and affectivity, abstraction and emotion, consciousness and desire. It seeks to develop new types of transdisciplinary frameworks where subjective and political spaces can be universalized while remaining particular, leaving texts open so that identity remains imagined, plural, and continuously shifting. Such an approach restores the complexity of what it means to be human.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjbrv

9 “Risking Sensuality”: from: Black Intersectionalities
Author(s) Raynaud Claudine
Abstract: While past scholarship has explored at great length the inscription of the black body in Morrison’s work, recent analysis has focused on her “use of the erotic” – to take up Audre Lorde’s phrase (Turpin, 2010) – in an effort to locate her specific work with language in comparison and contrast with Audre Lorde and Dionne Brand. I wish to argue in this chapter that writing the erotic is what Morrison has been “risking” throughout her output since Sula(1973) throughBeloved(1987) andJazz(1992), down toA Mercy(2008). The erotic is not a “theme,” a moment in the novels’

10 Cultures of Melancholia: from: Black Intersectionalities
Author(s) Sarnelli Laura
Abstract: The theoretical concept of melancholia has recently received heightened critical attention in the field of race and postcolonial studies. As an emotional reaction to the denial of the loss of a loved object, be it a person, a place, or an ideal, melancholia gives shape to a “constellation of affect” or a “structure of feeling” encompassing the individual and the collective, the psychic and the social (Eng and Kazanjian, 2003: 3). As such, it has emerged as a crucial touchstone for subjective as well as political formations. In particular, melancholia has been deployed to unravel the complex mechanisms of national

Book Title: Ciaran Carson-Space, Place, Writing
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): ALEXANDER NEAL
Abstract: Ciaran Carson is one of the most challenging and inventive of contemporary Irish writers, exhibiting verbal brilliance, formal complexity, and intellectual daring across a remarkably varied body of work. This study considers the full range of his oeuvre, in poetry, prose, and translations, and discusses the major themes to which he returns, including: memory and history, narrative, language and translation, mapping, violence, and power. It argues that the singularity of Carson’s writing is to be found in his radical imaginative engagements with ideas of space and place. The city of Belfast, in particular, occupies a crucially important place in his texts, serving as an imaginative focal point around which his many other concerns are constellated. The city, in all its volatile mutability, is an abiding frame of reference and a reservoir of creative impetus for Carson’s imagination. Accordingly, the book adopts an interdisciplinary approach that draws upon geography, urbanism, and cultural theory as well as literary criticism. It provides both a stimulating and thorough introduction to Carson’s work, and a flexible critical framework for exploring literary representations of space.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjcgf

CHAPTER ONE Imaginative Geographies: from: Ciaran Carson
Abstract: The singularity of a literary work, argues Derek Attridge, is best understood as an event in which the reader experiences both inventiveness and alterity. Each reading constitutes ‘an appreciation, a living-through, of the invention that makes the work not just different but a creative reimagination of cultural materials’.¹ My contention is that the singularity of Ciaran Carson’s writing rests upon his far-reaching imaginative engagements with ideas of space and place, and particularly urban spatiality in an Irish context. It is the purpose of this chapter to set out a critical framework for exploring these engagements in their widest manifestations. Carson’s

CHAPTER THREE Deviations from the Known Route: from: Ciaran Carson
Abstract: Given his desire to know the street map with his feet, it is unsurprising that the act of walking should play such a prominent role in Carson’s writing. Indeed, his is a distinctively peripatetic aesthetic. Time and again walking serves not only as a means of registering urban experience, the medium through which all manner of encounters, associations, and sidelong observations are made; it also functions as a figure for the meandering, digressive nature of Carson’s narratives, in which ‘one thing leads to another’ ( FFA, 152) much as the pedestrian wends her way through the divagating and interconnecting streets of

Lafcadio Hearn’s American Writings and the Creole Continuum from: American Creoles
Author(s) Gallagher Mary
Abstract: Lafcadio Hearn (1850–1904) is famous principally for having ‘interpreted’ Japan for the West in the closing years of the nineteenth century. Even if his life and work are recognized as falling into two main periods, the American and the Far Eastern, the latter is usually seen as outshining the former. It is less, however, the work of Hearn’s Japanese period than the inscapes of his American/Caribbean writings that hold the key – if not to the overall significance, then certainly to the contemporary resonance of this unusual fin-de-sièclefigure and of his work. These writings are clearly founded on

Auguste Lussan’s La Famille créole: from: American Creoles
Author(s) Leservot Typhaine
Abstract: The 1791 slave uprising in Saint-Domingue, followed by the revolution and Haiti’s independence in 1804, had a profound impact on Louisiana. Soon after the uprising began, hundreds of refugees from the island trickled into New Orleans. Around 1803, thousands more arrived. Six years later, in a few months between 1809 and 1810, 10,000 of them poured into the region when they were no longer welcome in Cuba, where they had first settled after fleeing Saint-Domingue. The sheer number of refugees doubled the population of New Orleans, which reached 25,000 by 1810, turning it into the seventh largest city in the

Book Title: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World- Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): Murphy David
Abstract: In the late 1990’s, Postcolonial Studies risked imploding as a credible area of academic enquiry. Repeated anthologization and an overemphasis on the English-language literatures led to sustained critiques of the field and to an active search for alternative approaches to the globalized and transnational formations of the post-colonial world. In the early twenty-first century, however, postcolonial began to reveal a new openness to its comparative dimensions. French-language contributors to postcolonial debate (such as Edouard Glissant and Abdelkebir Khatibi) have recently risen to greater prominence in the English-speaking world, and there have also appeared an increasing number of important critical and theoretical texts on postcolonial issues, written by scholars working principally on French-language material. It is to such a context that this book responds. Acknowledging these shifts, this volume provides an essential tool for students and scholars outside French departments seeking a way into the study of Francophone colonial postcolonial debates. At the same time, it supplies scholars in French with a comprehensive overview of essential ideas and key intellectuals in this area.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjgn6

CHAPTER 6 Édouard Glissant: from: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Bongie Chris
Abstract: It is over half a century now since Martinique’s Édouard Glissant arrived on the literary scene in Paris, publishing his first volumes of poetry in the early 1950s, and his first novel, La Lézarde, in 1958. Since that time he has produced eight stylistically demanding novels (the latest beingOrmerodin 2003), a good many collections of poetry, and one influential play about the Haitian Revolution.¹ Arguably, though, it is not as a novelist or poet that Glissant has proved most influential at the international level, but as a theorist. With his unflagging advocacy of a creolizing world of Diversity

CHAPTER 7 Tangled History and Photographic (In)Visibility: from: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Norindr Panivong
Abstract: In a letter dated 6 July 1920, L. Josselme, the head of the Indochinese Postal Control in Marseilles, complains in the following terms about the photograph of Nguyên Ai Quôc he has just received from the Résident Supérieur: ‘elle est absolument invisible, ayant jauni par progression depuis son arrivée’ [it is entirely invisible, having progressively yellowed since its arrival], adding that this deterioration ‘m’oblige à vous demander de vouloir bien m’en adresser un autre exemplaire mieux fixé’ [forces me to ask you kindly to send another more permanent, better fixed copy] (Gaspard, 1992: 101–02). Nguyên Ai Quôc was suspected

CHAPTER 9 Albert Memmi: from: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Crowley Patrick
Abstract: Since the publication of his first novel, The Pillar of Salt(1953), Albert Memmi has offered textual portraits that bring the discomforting perspective of hisvécu[lived experience] to bear upon discourses, practices and legacies of domination. In particular, and not surprisingly, Memmi’s name often appears alongside those of critics of colonization such as Aimé Césaire, Frantz Fanon and Jean-Paul Sartre (for discussion of these writers, see Chapters 1, 5 and 11 of this volume). Jean-Marc Moura provides a typical example of this when he writes that the work of Memmi, Césaire and Fanon constitute ‘les essais de combat’ [the

CHAPTER 11 Roads to Freedom: from: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Williams Patrick
Abstract: There is, perhaps, an excessive obviousness in the decision to focus on the concept of freedom in any discussion of Jean-Paul Sartre, since if there is one pre-eminently Sartrean theme, it is arguably that of freedom. However, precisely because of the dangers inherent in the ‘obviousness’, in regarding the chosen subject as already known and comprehended, but also because of the inevitably changing and evolving sense of the term in the context of a lifetime’s passionate engagement, we would be wrong to think that we fully understand Sartre’s repeated working through – ‘elaboration’ in the strongest Gramscian sense – of

CHAPTER 14 French Theory and the Exotic from: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Yee Jennifer
Abstract: From the sixteenth century, the French adjective exotiquewas used to refer to the natural or cultural product of another country, but the term rapidly became marked by its current Eurocentrism, losing any reversibility. It was a virtual synonym of ‘colonial’ by the nineteenth century, when the nounexotismeappeared (1845). The newly reified concept had acquired connotations of hackneyed imagery and falsity in the representation of the Other (Moura, 1998: 19–40). This pejorative sense was not to be seriously challenged until the early years of the twentieth century, by Victor Segalen (1878–1919), who attempted to revalorize the

CHAPTER 20 Locating Quebec on the Postcolonial Map from: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Green Mary Jean
Abstract: In his introduction to a 2003 issue of Québec Studies, Vincent Desroches poses the question, for the first time in the context of a serious theoretical discussion: ‘En quoi la littérature québécoise est-elle postcoloniale?’ [In what sense can Quebec literature be deemed postcolonial?] (2003b). It is not surprising that this question, framed in French by aQuébécoisscholar, is given serious consideration in a journal published in the United States: in US academic circles Quebec literature had, for at least a decade, been associated with the postcolonial, however loosely defined. Yet within Quebec itself the term ‘postcolonial’ is still largely

CHAPTER 21 Diversity and Difference in Postcolonial France from: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Stovall Tyler
Abstract: Questions of immigration, diversity and race have dominated the social, cultural and political life of France since the late twentieth century. Even before the widespread uprisings in the banlieues(France’s deprived suburbs) in the autumn of 2005, the question of how the French might conceive of themselves as a nation that could (or could not) embrace peoples of different origins and traditions fuelled seemingly endless debates among intellectuals, politicians and people of all walks of life. The riots themselves focused attention as never before upon the fact that large numbers of French citizens not only resented police harassment and lack

CHAPTER 22 Colonialism, Postcolonialism and the Cultures of Commemoration from: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Forsdick Charles
Abstract: The Bicentenary of the French Revolution in 1989 heralded the series of commemorations by which late twentieth-century France now appears to have been increasingly characterized. In the 1990s, literature, cinema and intellectual debate all began to reflect an increasing focus on memory, a tendency also apparent in popular culture and public life. The historian Pierre Nora, inaugurating in 1984 Les Lieux de mémoire, a monumental collection of essays on key ‘sites’ of the French historical experience understood as having had an impact on national self-identity, presented the lack of shared post-war national memory as a rationale for alternative manifestations of

Book Title: Sympathetic Ink-Intertextual Relations in Northern Irish Poetry
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): ALCOBIA-MURPHY SHANE
Abstract: Northern Irish poets have been accused of reticence in addressing political issues in their work. In Sympathetic Ink, Shane Alcobia-Murphy challenges this view through a consideration of the works of Seamus Heaney, Paul Muldoon and Medbh McGuckian. Making use of substantial collections of the poets’ papers which have only recently become available, Alcobia-Murphy focuses on the oblique, subtle strategies employed by these poets to critique contemporary political issues. He employs the concept of sympathetic ink, or invisible ink, arguing that rather than avoiding politics, these poets have, via complex intertextual references and resonances, woven them deeply into the formal construction of their works. Acute and learned, Sympathetic Ink re-examines existing attitudes towards Northern Irish poetry as well as being the first critical work to address the poetry of Medbh McGuckian.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjgq5

Introduction from: Sympathetic Ink
Abstract: In its terrible state o’chassis, does Northern Ireland’s history interweave with or overwhelm the poetic imagination? When it comes to a ‘chronic sovereignty neurosis’² the cultural spin doctors are always ready with their diagnoses, but what about the creative writers? The dilemma involves not only the writer’s perception of how poiesisintersects with politics, but also his or her relation to tradition(s), literary or otherwise: does he or she embrace the community with all its intimate biases or become a solitary figure, abstracted, seeking objectivity? InTransitions, Richard Kearney uncovers an apparent transitional crisis at the core of modern Irish

3 ‘Something a little nearer home’: from: Sympathetic Ink
Abstract: The fragmented, multivoiced complexity of much mainstream Irish poetry is often dismissed as fatally hermetic; what is allusive is elitist and insincere, a latter-day art for art’s sake. Iain Sinclair’s polemical introduction to Conductors of Chaos, for example, makes the remarkable claim that in anthologies of Irish poetry, ‘[e]vent is adulterated by self-regarding tropes, false language’.¹ Especially vituperative in his description of Irish anthologists’ (and, by extension, Irish poets’) self-interested preoccupation with ‘[b]og and bomb and blarney’, he dismisses their work as ‘a heap of glittering similes burnished for westward transit’.² Although justified in voicing a general anxiety concerning the

6 ‘Roaming root of multiple meanings’: from: Sympathetic Ink
Abstract: When it comes to discussing ‘Irish identity’, critics are inclined to develop an acute sense of place, most notably an indeterminate space tentatively tucked in between inverted commas; indeed, the more seasoned hack will sigh in resignation at having to go and encounter for the millionth time the reality of ‘that will-o’-the-wisp which has caused the shedding of so much innocent ink’.¹ One influential writer, Peter McDonald, has recently objected to the intellectually stultifying manner in which identity politics is discussed within Irish studies. However, in his justifiable eagerness to expose the hidden agendas behind the systematic erection of constrictive

Book Title: The Poetry of Saying-British Poetry and its Discontents, 1950-2000
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): SHEPPARD ROBERT
Abstract: In The Poetry of Saying Robert Sheppard explores an array of ‘experimental’ writers and styles of writing many of which have never secured a large audience in Britain, but which are often fascinatingly innovative. As a published poet in this tradition, Sheppard provides a detailed and thought provoking account of the development of the British poetry movement from the 1950s. As well as analysing the work of individual poets such as Roy Fisher, Lee Harwood and Tom Raworth The Poetry of Saying also examines the influence of the Poetry Society and poetry magazines on the evolution of British poetry throughout this period. The overriding virtue of the poetry of this period is its diversity, a fact that Sheppard has not ignored. As well as providing a fascinating into the work of these poets, The Poetry of Saying offers an ‘insider’s’ commentary on the social, political and historical background during this exciting period in British poetry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjh2f

INTRODUCTION: from: The Poetry of Saying
Abstract: While this work offers a unifying theory of the poetry studied, I am cautioned by what has become increasingly clear to me after writing about (and writing) this verse for the last twenty years: the overriding virtue of its diversity. I am aware, therefore, that any theoretical approach needs to emphasize the particularity of this heterodoxy, to allow its otherness to speak.

Book Title: Translating Life-Studies in Transpositional Aesthetics
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): STEAD ALISTAIR
Abstract: This volume brings together eighteen substantial essays by distinguished scholars, critics and translators, and two interviews with eminent figures of British theatre, to explore the idea and practice of translation. The individual, but conceptually related, contributions examine topics from the Renaissance to the present in the context of apt exploration of the translation process, invoking both restricted and extended senses of translation. The endeavour is to study in detail the theory, workings and implications of what might be called the art of creative transposition, effective at the level of interlingual transcoding, dynamic rewriting, theatrical and cinematic adaptation, intersemiotic or intermedial translation, and cultural exchange. Many of the essays focus on aspects of intertextuality, the dialogue with text, past and present, as they bear on the issue of translation, attending to the historical, political or cultural dimensions of the practice, whether it illuminates a gendered reading of a text or a staging of cultural difference. The historic and generic range of the discussions is wide, encompassing the Elizabethan epyllion, Sensibility fiction, Victorian poetry and prose, modern and postmodern novels, but the book is dominated by dramatic or performance-related applications, with major representation of fresh investigations into Shakespeare (from A Midsummer Night’s Dream to The Tempest) and foregrounding of acts of self-translation on stage, in the dramatic monologue and in fiction. Contributions from theatre practitioners such as Sir Peter Hall, John Barton and Peter Lichtenfels underscore the immense practical importance of the translator on the stage and the business of both acting and directing as a species of translation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjj6t

Introduction from: Translating Life
Author(s) STEAD ALISTAIR
Abstract: This volume, comprising many individual but conceptually interrelated studies, sets out to multiply perspectives on the concept of translation, making it intellectually generative, an invaluable prompter to reinterpretation of texts and fresh theoretical reflections on pertinent critical issues. Mindful that the ideally singular light radiating from translation as conceived by the translators of the King James Bible might actually be refracted through manifold interpretations, our twenty-two collaborators read and reread through what we would call the prism of translation, shedding on the concept and the texts, to bend one of Philip Larkin’s luminous epithets, a ‘many-angled light’.

Elizabethan Translation: from: Translating Life
Author(s) BATE JONATHAN
Abstract: The Elizabethans seem to have had a peculiar interest in hybrids, in the crossing of boundaries and the mixture of opposites. Shakespearean comedy celebrates the quasi-hermaphroditic boy actor playing the part of a girl who then dresses as a boy (Rosalind, Viola). The first published version of The Faerie Queeneends with the coupling of Amoret and her beloved Sir Scudamour: fused together in ‘long embracement’, they are ‘growne together quite’, so that

CHAPTER 1 The Holocaust’s Life as a Ghost from: Social Theory after the Holocaust
Author(s) BAUMAN ZYGMUNT
Abstract: Half a century has passed since the victory of the Allied troops put an abrupt end to Hitler’s ‘final solution of the Jewish question’ – but the memory of the Holocaust goes on polluting the world of the living, and the inventory of its insidious poisons seems anything but complete. We are all to some degree possessed by that memory, though the Jews among us, the prime targets of the Holocaust, are perhaps more than most.¹

CHAPTER 11 Holocaust Testimony and the Challenge to the Philosophy of History from: Social Theory after the Holocaust
Author(s) STONE DAN
Abstract: In her testimony written in the immediate aftermath of the war, Suzanne Birnbaum, stunned by the pace at which the Jews of Hungary had been decimated at Auschwitz, wrote that 600,000 were murdered in July and August of 1944. The reality was somewhat less – we know now that the number of Hungarian Jews killed in this period was around 435,000. Nevertheless, Annette Wieviorka, in her study of testimonies of the immediate post-war period – of which there are a surprisingly large number – notes in response to this error that it ‘makes no difference to the insane scale of the massacre’.²

Introduction: from: Colombia’s Forgotten Frontier
Abstract: ‘Todo es inmenso en esa región, empezando por nuestra ignorancia respecto a ella’ [Everything about that region is immense, beginning with our lack of knowledge about it].¹ Little seems to have changed since this observation was included in Luis Antonio Toro Osorio’s 1960s book on the Putumayo.² Today most people outside Colombia are more likely to associate the Putumayo with the popular multicultural record label than the Amazonian region which lends it its name.³ Nevertheless, the Putumayo figures significantly in Colombia and beyond, politically, socially, economically, and culturally. The 1,000-mile long Putumayo River (the Iza in Brazil), which rises in

Chapter Eight Oil and blood: from: Colombia’s Forgotten Frontier
Abstract: ‘It is a horror to go to the Putumayo. I should prefer to go to hell.’ One hundred years after this sentiment was cited in Hardenburg’s book on the rubber boom, the Putumayo continues to generate horror.³ For the past twenty years or so left-wing guerrillas, right-wing paramilitaries, and the army have all played a part in consolidating the region’s reputation as one of the poorest and most dangerous places in Colombia. The Putumayo has been a stronghold of the FARC since the early 1980s and more recently has seen the influx of paramilitaries, leading to frequent armed clashes and

4 Constructing Famine Spaces in Ireland from: Commemorating the Irish Famine
Abstract: In Ireland, unlike so many previous epochs of historical commemorations where local efforts piggy-backed onto or modified narratives enshrined at the national level (as with the 1798 rebellion, Easter Rising, or the First World War), the Famine was an intensely local experience, not one which occurred at a remove from daily life. Today the remnants of that experience pervade the depopulated Irish landscape: abandoned stone cottages, crumbling workhouses and overgrown mass graves, and the endlessly stonewalled and subdivided smallholdings that are testament to the meagre acreage allotted to the Famine poor existing at the very margins of society. At many

5 Community Famine Commemoration in Northern Ireland and the Diaspora from: Commemorating the Irish Famine
Abstract: As with the monuments of the previous chapter, most community commemorations in Northern Ireland and the diaspora represent vernacular counterparts to officially sanctioned and nationally scaled monumental projects, screened through local concerns, histories and places. Though the rallying cry ‘remember the Famine’ unites these memorials, the outcomes of more than three dozen projects in Northern Ireland, Britain, Canada and the United States constructed since 1990 indicate that key questions of what Famine memory actually isandwhyit should be remembered remain far from consensual.¹ From the outset there were concerns voiced in the Irish media that diasporic, particularly American,

Book Title: French Studies in and for the 21st Century- Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): Worton Michael
Abstract: French Studies in and for the 21st Century draws together a range of key scholars to examine the current state of French Studies in the UK, taking account of the variety of factors which have made the discipline what it is. The book looks ahead to the place of French Studies in a world that is increasingly interdisciplinary, and where student demands, new technologies and transnational education are changing the ways in which we learn, teach, research and assess. Required reading for all UK French Studies scholars, the book will also be an essential text for the French Studies community worldwide as it grapples with current demands and plans for the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjkzw

1 Introduction from: French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Worton Michael
Abstract: The world of higher education has been changing radically since the beginning of the twenty-first century, and the next ten years will witness the

3 The exception anglo-saxonne? from: French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Armstrong Adrian
Abstract: In March 2009, the Ministère des affaires étrangères et européennes held an international seminar in Sèvres, in collaboration with the Centre International d’Études Pédagogiques.¹ It emerged clearly from discussions at the seminar that French provision in UK universities contrasts with that in most other EU countries in three important respects.² First, UK French departments are relatively unusual in delivering a curriculum that includes a high volume and a wide variety of ‘content courses’, as practitioners often term them, alongside core language provision. Second, innovation in the delivery of that curriculum appears to be more widespread in UK universities. Increasing use

7 Contemporary Women’s Writing in French: from: French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Rye Gill
Abstract: In the UK and elsewhere in the anglophone world, contemporary literature in French continues to be a strong field of study in both research and teaching. Traditionally lone scholars, researchers of literature are now increasingly being pressured by their institutions to network, to collaborate and, above all, to generate large sums of external research funding. Contemporary women-authored literature is not the threatened subject that some other contributions to this publication document – it is widely researched and taught on a range of undergraduate and postgraduate courses – except perhaps in the sense that if women’s writing is not made visible,

10 Oxford, Theatre and Quarrels from: French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Viala Alain
Abstract: Oxford University’s French subfaculty occupies a rather unusual position in the network of French Studies in the UK: the size of the department, the collegiate structure of the university, and certain of its very specific traditions all contribute to this singularity. But in recent years this department has, like so many others, undergone a series of necessary changes; some of them welcome and others less so. Certain of these changes will doubtless require development in the coming years: it is these changes that form the subject of this chapter.

14 Teaching and Research in French Cinema from: French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Reader Keith
Abstract: Teaching and research in French cinema has developed rapidly in a relatively short time since the mid- to late 1970s. At that time, teaching was confined to the occasional course unit in a handful of universities, and research was only just starting to emerge from work aimed at cinephile rather than academic readerships. This chapter starts by considering the ways in which teaching has evolved over that time, and then gives an account of developments in research, with a strong focus on the UK, but also taking into account work done in France and the USA.

17 French Studies and the Postcolonial: from: French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Murphy David
Abstract: Over the past two decades, we have witnessed what Françoise Lionnet has termed the ‘becoming-transnational’ of French Studies.¹ French and the other modern languages had originally been constructed as academic subjects around the framework of the nineteenth-century European nation-state but, as the primacy of the nation state has come to be challenged in the era of globalisation, this structure has been increasingly questioned by scholars working from transnational, global and postcolonial perspectives.² The prominent North American critic Lawrence Kritzman has been prompted to ask, in light of these developments, whether the very existence of French Studies is now in question:

19 French Studies at the Open University: from: French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Vialleton Elodie
Abstract: At the Open University, French is taught by the largest but least conventional department of languages in the UK. Numbers of language students are now approaching 10,000 a year, which translates into over 3,000 full-time equivalent student (FTEs) numbers. In terms of recruitment, whether actual students or FTEs, the Open University is also the largest French department in the UK. This chapter describes our distinctive and innovative approach to teaching French, and our related research activities. It opens by setting language learning in the context of supported distance education, and concludes by proposing wider inter-university collaboration in the context of

20 Opportunities and Challenges of Technologically Enhanced Programmes: from: French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Borel Dominique
Abstract: Blended learning, a mix of face-to-face and virtual interactions, and online courses have been developed at the Modern Language Centre (MLC) at King’s since 2004. They are a key component of the department’s strategy for fostering autonomous learning both within credit-bearing language courses, and for students enrolled on non degree-language programmes, while adhering to Quality Assurance Agency (QAA) criteria and promoting academic excellence. Incorporating an e-learning dimension into existing face-to-face programmes, and designing specific online material and courses has been a deliberate policy choice, both in support of the college’s own strategic plan, and in the desire to enhance the

21 French Studies and Employability at Home and Abroad: from: French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Randall Laurence
Abstract: Ten years ago, the teaching of French in British universities was in decline. Five years ago it was in peril throughout the land, with many French departments closing. As an academic subject, French nosedived in terms of student recruitment figures, the discipline apparently destined to be confined to a branch of classics in Russell Group institutions. It was at risk from extinction in the former polytechnics where it became threatened even as a subsidiary subject in its market-friendly incarnation as Business French. To many, the choice was stark but clear – stake all on French for Business or die. But

23 Culturetheque: from: French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Auer Laurence
Abstract: On 27 May 2010, the central project of the centenary celebrations of the Institut français du Royaume-Uni was unveiled: a digital platform called Culturetheque. The response of the French Institute in South Kensington, London to the new challenges posed by the digital revolution was to launch a new tool, which was unprecedented both in the UK and in France.

Book Title: London Irish Fictions-Narrative, Diaspora and Identity
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): MURRAY TONY
Abstract: This is the first book about the literature of the Irish in London. By examining over 30 novels, short stories and autobiographies set in London since the Second World War, London Irish Fictions investigates the complex psychological landscapes of belonging and cultural allegiance found in these unique and intensely personal perspectives on the Irish experience of migration. As well as bringing new research to bear on the work of established Irish writers such as Edna O’Brien, John McGahern, Emma Donoghue and Joseph O’Connor, this study reveals a fascinating and hitherto unexplored literature, diverse in form and content. By synthesising theories of narrative and diaspora into a new methodological approach to the study of migration, London Irish Fictions sheds new light on the ways in which migrant identities are negotiated, mediated and represented through literature. It also examines the specific role that the metropolis plays in literary portrayals of migrant experience as an arena for the performance of Irishness, as a catalyst in transformations of Irishness and as an intrinsic component of second-generation Irish identities. Furthermore, by analysing the central role of narrative in configuring migrant cultures and identities, it reassesses notions of exile, escape and return in Irish culture more generally. In this regard, it has particular relevance to current debates on migration and multiculturalism in both Britain and Ireland, especially in the wake of an emerging new phase of Irish migration in the post-‘Celtic Tiger’ era.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjm19

Introduction from: London Irish Fictions
Abstract: By the mid-1930s Britain had overtaken the United States as the primary destination for Irish migrants.¹ By the end of the Second World War, when Ireland experienced the largest wave of emigration since the Great Famine of the 1840s, this had become overwhelmingly the case.² Whereas in the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries Scotland and the north of England had been the favoured destinations for Irish migrants, London and the south-east of England now emerged in this position.³ According to Jackson, the Irish-born population of London rose by more than half between 1951 and 1961 to reach 172,493.⁴ After the

3 Navvy Narratives from: London Irish Fictions
Abstract: In the closing days of 2003, heated debates took place in the Irish parliament over the plight of elderly Irish men in Britain in the wake of a documentary shown on national television.¹ Many of the interviewees in the programme had spent the best part of their working lives on the building sites of England, but due to major changes in the construction industry over the previous twenty years and the financially insecure nature of their employment, such men were now living out their final days in extremely impoverished conditions in the very towns and cities they helped rebuild after

4 Escape and its Discontents from: London Irish Fictions
Abstract: Edna O’Brien is regarded today as one of Ireland’s most eminent writers. Declan Kiberd, for instance, has referred to her prose style as one of ‘surpassing beauty and exactitude’.¹ Such accolades, however, are a relatively recent phenomenon. It is only in the last ten to fifteen years that substantial critical attention has been paid to her work, largely due to the endeavours of feminist scholars.² Most criticism of O’Brien’s work has been from the perspective of gender and sexuality, something which is not surprising given the subject-matter of her early work.³ For critics who read her through psychoanalytical theory, it

9 Transit and Transgression from: London Irish Fictions
Abstract: something fundamentally different has overtaken novelistic discourse in Ireland since the mid-1980s […] a willingness to confront the formal and conceptual legacies of a received literary (and wider social) tradition alongside a self-awareness of the role played by cultural narratives in mediating modern (or perhaps it would be better now

Introduction from: London Irish Fictions
Abstract: In the British census of 2001, which for the first time allowed respondents to indicate their ‘cultural background’, only seven to eight per cent of an estimated two to two and a half million second-generation Irish people in Britain ticked the box marked ‘Irish’. Researchers have offered a number of reasons why such a small percentage of second-generation migrants were disinclined to identify themselves in this way, among them being a tendency to read the concept of ‘cultural background’ (or ethnicity) as equivalent to formal nationality.² The outcome of the census illustrates just how difficult it is to quantify or

11 Elastic Paddies from: London Irish Fictions
Abstract: In September 2009, Fintan O’Toole wrote an article in the Irish Timesin tribute to the late second-generation Irish poet, Michael Donaghy. Born in the Bronx, Donaghy lived most of his life in London and, through his work, epitomized the ambivalent yet undeniable attachment to Ireland experienced by many of the second generation. In the article, for which O’Toole coined the term I have used to title this chapter, he makes the following statement about Irishness:

Book Title: Back to Modern Reason-Johan Hjerpe and Other Petit Bourgeois in Stockholm in the Age of Enlightenment
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): JARRICK ARNE
Abstract: A revised and translated edition of Mot det moderna förnuftet, published in 1992. Utilising the diaries from the 1780s of Johan Hjerpe, the study focuses on the specific world of Hjerpe in terms of trade, social conditions and contemporary social life in Stockholm.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjm4r

Introduction: from: Back to Modern Reason
Abstract: In his youth, Johan Hjerpe served in the linen shop of the wholesaler Anders Kjellstedt in the Old Town. Like others he started at the bottom but did better than most, rising in time above his humble beginnings.² An industrious and decent man, in 1801 he eventually acquired a small workshop for the production of silk thread and camel hair, by which time he was already thirty-five

Chapter 5 Johan Hjerpe and the culture of Enlightenment from: Back to Modern Reason
Abstract: What concerns me in this chapter is how these attitudes were remoulded when they reached the man in the street. Indeed, the discussion is even more narrowly focused, as it largely concerns a single person who has already made

Introduction from: Reading Rochester
Abstract: Bald heads forgetful of their sins

Gender and Artfulness in Rochester’s ‘Song of a Young Lady to Her Ancient Lover’ from: Reading Rochester
Author(s) WILCOX HELEN
Abstract: This essay arises primarily out of the experience of discussing Rochester’s work with readers who possess plenty of ‘Youth, Fire, Wit and Discernment’, namely, fascinated but perplexed undergraduates. How does Rochester, they ask, achieve that astonishing rational directness, that surprisingly delicate lyric grace? Why does he so regularly challenge these, and his readers, with cynicism and obscenity? Is his wit sharpened in anger or love? Is it concerned or dispassionate? Is there a consistent perspective underlying and shaping the variety of poetic masks worn in and by the texts? More particularly, as a male author did he regard the human

‘Upon Nothing’: from: Reading Rochester
Author(s) BARLEY TONY
Abstract: Because of its knowing exhibitionism, because of its flair, because of its mock-solemn pride in its own achievement, Rochester’s poem ‘Upon Nothing’ brushes aside the kind of readerly interrogation invited by similarly impressive metaphysical displays. If Donne’s ‘Lecture on the Shadow’ or ‘A Nocturnall upon S. Lucie’s Day’ or Marvell’s ‘Definition of Love’, provide a recent generic pedigree for ‘Upon Nothing’, Rochester’s salient improvisation on non-entity requires of its readership qualitatively less imaginative effort to succumb to its arguments and admire its paradoxes. ‘Upon Nothing’ asks, supposing it asks anything of its readers, for a take-it-or-leave-it sense of delightedly amused

Book Title: Varieties of World Making-Beyond Globalization
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): WAGNER PETER
Abstract: Globalization has been the topic of heated debate in recent years, with one side asserting that it will produce a better standard of living for people around the world, and a fierce opposition arguing that it will ultimately lead to greater poverty and the destruction of unique human cultures. Varieties of World Making tackles the issue from a different angle, proposing that the contemporary global network of business, politics and culture be viewed from the inter-disciplinary perspective of ‘world making’. Drawn from the ranks of sociology, law, international relations, political philosophy and history, the distinguished contributors cut through polarized rhetoric to examine the current global situation. Their proposed diagnoses draw upon thoughtful analyses of various political dilemmas whose ripple effects are felt around the world, such as the volatile relationship between Islam and Europe, or the legal foundations for a true international order absent in the shadows of imperialism. Varieties of World Making will be an essential resource for all those grappling with the complex consequences of globalization for the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjmbn

CHAPTER 3 Multiple Modernities or Global Interconnections: from: Varieties of World Making
Author(s) Bhambra Gurminder K.
Abstract: The colonial encounter has been a defining moment in the making of the contemporary world. It has madea particular world and established cognitive patterns forknowingthe world, yet the colonial encounter is missing in most sociological accounts of modernity. In recent times, increasing significance has been given to global phenomena. Acknowledging the complexity brought by globalization and interdependence has led theorists to contend that a new approach to modernity is needed. A shift from the singular trajectory of modernity to multiple modernities has been recommended (Arnason 2000; Delanty 2004; Eisenstadt 2000, 2001, 2004; Eisenstadt and Schluchter 1998; Wittrock

CHAPTER NINE Conclusion from: Spanish Spaces
Abstract: One of the purposes of this book has been to reinvigorate the meaning of the word Spain as a term of more than simple convenience for academics. What that term means, of course, is another matter altogether. Given the case studies outlined here, the term resonates in different and often opposing ways. While both the films of del Toro and the novels of Torrente Ballester look to recover a Spain apparently lost, the Spains they imagine to be lost are very different, as are the reasons why recuperation is desirable. As regards the Basque Country, considered in Chapter 4, there

Book Title: V. Y. Mudimbe-Undisciplined Africanism
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): FRAITURE PIERRE-PHILIPPE
Abstract: VY Mudimbe: Undisciplined Africanism is the first English-language monograph dedicated to the work of Valentin Yves Mudimbe. This book charts the intellectual history of the seminal Congolese philosopher, epistemologist, and philologist from the late 1960s to the present day, exploring his major essays and novels. Pierre-Philippe Fraiture highlights Mudimbe’s trajectory through major debates on African nationalism, Panafricanism, neo-colonialism, negritude, pedagogy, Christianisation, decolonisation, anthropology, postcolonial representations, and a variety of other subjects, using these as contexts for close readings of many of Mudimbe’s texts, both influential and lesser-known. The book demonstrates that Mudimbe’s intellectual career has been informed by a series of decisive dialogues with some of the key exponents of Africanism (Herodotus, EW Blyden, Placide Tempels), continental and postcolonial thought (Jean-Paul Sartre, Frantz Fanon, Michel Foucault, and Claude Lévi-Strauss), and African thought and philosophy from Africa and the diaspora (L.S. Senghor, Patrice Nganang, and Achille Mbembe).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjnck

3 ‘The West or the Rest?’ from: V. Y. Mudimbe
Abstract: Anger, hope, Utopia, and radicalism are the four axes of V. Y. Mudimbe’s work in the 1970s. There is in this corpus a marked tendency to exaggerate the West’s supposed oneness and to convey the impression that the world, to use an expression first coined by Chinweizu² and the American anthropologist Marshall Sahlins,³ is made up of the ‘West and the Rest’. This dualistic dimension is all the more surprising given that Mudimbe advocates at the end of both L’Autre FaceandL’Odeuran epistemological ‘insurrection’ that would reject the very dualistic basis upon which colonialismandneo-colonialism are predicated.

5 ‘Independences?’ from: V. Y. Mudimbe
Abstract: Tradition is a contentious notion. What does it really mean? Where is the much-vaunted tradition: in the past, in the present, in the future? Its corpses are silent and demand the intervention of patient pathologists who will retrospectively reveal the time and the etiology of their deaths. The morgue is a text but, ultimately, it defies strict generalisations as the singularity of each corpse cannot be subsumed by one unifying narrative. It could be said that V. Y. Mudimbe, Achille Mbembe, and Patrice Nganang are part of a Central African tradition of writing. Interestingly, each author has devoted a significant

Book Title: Thresholds of Meaning-Passage, Ritual and Liminality in Contemporary French Narrative
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): DUFFY JEAN H.
Abstract: Thresholds of Meaning examines contemporary French narrative and explores two related issues: the centrality within recent French fiction and autofiction of the themes of passage, ritual and liminality; and the thematic continuity which links this work with its literary ancestors of the 1960s and 1970s. Through the close analysis of novels and récits by Pierre Bergounioux, François Bon, Marie Darrieussecq, Hélène Lenoir, Laurent Mauvignier and Jean Rouaud, Duffy demonstrates the ways in which contemporary narrative, while capitalising on the formal lessons of the nouveau roman and drawing upon a shared repertoire of motifs and themes, engages with the complex processes by which meaning is produced in the referential world and, in particular, with the rituals and codes that social man brings into play in order to negotiate the various stages of the human life-cycle. By the application of concepts and models derived from ritual theory and from visual analysis, Thresholds of Meaning situates itself at the intersection of the developing field of literature and anthropology studies and research into word and image.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjnd2

CHAPTER ONE At death’s door: from: Thresholds of Meaning
Abstract: In recent years the concepts of rite of passage and, in particular, of liminality have figured prominently in medical and medical-related research, providing useful ways of analysing a range of experiences of illness and disability. With the expansion of the medical humanities and the development of ‘narrative medicine’, medical practitioners have looked to other disciplines – literary analysis, philosophy, history and anthropology – for models and metaphors by which to express the experiences of patients, carers and clinicians. The attraction of the notion of rite of passage is obvious, offering a versatile means of expressing a range of phenomena including:

CHAPTER THREE Commemoration, monument and identity in Bergounioux, Darrieussecq and Rouaud from: Thresholds of Meaning
Abstract: Over the last thirty years, memory and commemoration studies have become one of the fastest developing interdisciplinary fields in the humanities, attracting the attention of, among others, historians, anthropologists, sociologists, literary critics and art-historians. This growth and the dizzying array of publications produced not only reflect what has been variously described as a memory boom, a memory industry, an addiction to memory and, perhaps most graphically, an ‘immersion in memory and its sites [that] may at times have the quality of junk-Proustian Schwärmerei’ (LaCapra, 1998, 8).¹ They also attest to the dynamic, if at times confusing and confused, dialogues taking

Occupy Central: from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Chia Philip P.
Abstract: Sixteen years down the road, in the battle for democracy since Hong Kong’s return to China, church leaders in Hong Kong clashed publicly in 2013, arguing “for” and “against” the “Occupy Central (2014)” Movement,¹ a civil disobedience or a civil nonviolent resistance action, first initiated in January 2013 by a law academic at the University of Hong Kong, Benny Tai Yiu-ting,² a professed Christian, who launched the campaign with an intention to paralyze the financial and administration district of Hong Kong, the Central District, in order to force the (central) government (of China) to fulfill its promise to implement “genuine”

Linguistic Clues as to the Date of the Book of Job: from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Joosten Jan
Abstract: In an influential article published in 1974, Avi Hurvitz showed that the language of the prose tale of Job has several features aligning it with the Late Biblical Hebrew (LBH) known from Persian-period writings such as Chronicles, Ezra–Nehemiah, Esther, Ecclesiastes, and Daniel.¹ Since the book of Job, a fictional story addressing universal human problems, is otherwise hard to date, the contribution of historical linguistics was much appreciated by commentators.² More recently, however, Ian Young has argued that Hurvitz did not make a decisive argument for the lateness of the prose tale of Job.³ Part of Young’s argument is hard

Book Title: Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II-The Pontigny Encounters at Mount Holyoke College, 19421944
Publisher: University of Massachusetts Press
Author(s): Remmler Karen
Abstract: Sixty years ago, at the height of World War II, an extraordinary series of gatherings took place at Mount Holyoke College in western Massachusetts. During the summers of 1942–1944, leading Europeanﬁgures in the arts and sciences met at the college with their American counterparts for urgent conversations about the future of human civilization in a precarious world. Two Sorbonne professors, the distinguished medievalist Gustave Cohen and the existentialist philosopher Jean Wahl, organized these “Pontigny” sessions, named after an abbey in Burgundy where similar symposia had been held in the decades before the war. Among the participants—many of whom were Jewish or had Jewish backgrounds—were the philosophers Hannah Arendt and Rachel Bespaloff, the poets Marianne Moore and Wallace Stevens, the anthropologist Claude LéviStrauss and the linguist Roman Jakobson, and the painters Marc Chagall and Robert Motherwell. In this collection of original essays, Stanley Cavell and Jacques Derrida lead an international group of scholars—including Jed Perl, Mary Ann Caws, Jeffrey Mehlman, and Elisabeth YoungBruehl—in assessing the lasting impact and contemporary signiﬁcance of Pontignyen Amérique. Rachel Bespaloff, a tragicﬁgure who wrote a major work on the Iliad, is restored to her rightful place beside Arendt and Simone Weil. Anyone interested in the “intellectual resistance” of Francophone intellectuals and artists, and the inspiring support from such Americanﬁgures as Stevens and Moore, will want to read this pioneering work of scholarship and historical recreation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vk4c8

Introduction: from: Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Benfey Christopher
Abstract: Pontigny began for me with a faded snapshot, a freeze frame in time. I stumbled across it among the swatch of photographs in the center of Peter Brazeau’s Parts of a World, his fragmentary “oral history” of people who had known the poet Wallace Stevens. The black and white image, slightly blurred by bright sunlight, shows Stevens, in his habitual business suit—the uniform of an insurance executive from Hartford, Connecticut—seated on the lawn by a brick building beside a diminutive man with wavy hair and glasses. Brazeau’s caption reads: “Jean Wahl and Wallace Stevens at Mount Holyoke College

The OSS Pays a Visit from: Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Hewitt Leah D.
Abstract: In rethinking France’s identities through the memory of its interactions with its various “others,” inside and outside of France, I note that the Mount Holyoke celebration calls attention to the interplay between margin and center, of French intellectuals and artists decentered or marginalized by the war striving to make Mount Holyoke, between 1942 and 1944, a new “marginal center,” if you will. I am not sure, however, who is the center and who the margin, the French or the Americans, in this context. I think that while all were discussing emerging trends, new forms of creativity, new forms of art,

The Philosophical Model of a Counter-Institution from: Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Mehlman Jeffrey
Abstract: Although this session is devoted or restricted to philosophy, to the established and statutory discipline named “philosophy,” recognized and designated as such, I believe it legitimate to posit that all the décadesin which I have participated—even when their title or name gestured in the direction of literature or poetry—were also fully and unreservedly philosophical moments, intensely philosophical adventures that were at times as worthy of “philosophy” as any one of a number of suchdécadesthat might more legitimately lay claim to the title.¹ This stipulation is important to me, to limit myself to the instances to

[Part II: Introduction] from: Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Abstract: Adventurous philosophical thought was always at the center of the Pontigny tradition, especially when the philosopher-poet Jean Wahl assumed the direction of Pontigny-en-Amérique after 1942. Wahl invited his favorite American poets, Wallace Stevens and Marianne Moore, along with John Peale Bishop, to speak at Mount Holyoke during the summer of 1943. The topic was to be the relation of poetry and philosophy. Moore lectured on “Feeling and Precision,” carefully choosing her examples of understated eloquence from poetic responses to war. “An unselfish experiment like that of the Pontigny Committee,” she wrote in a letter, “leaves a certain memory of exaltation,

Reflections on Wallace Stevens at Mount Holyoke from: Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Cavell Stanley
Abstract: I counted on the fact that by the time it fell to me to present these remarks, we would have had sketched more of the texture and the details of the event sixty years ago that we are gathered to commemorate than I have learned in the course of my preparation, on and off these past months, for composing them. It went almost without saying in Christopher Benfey’s invitation to me, and in our exchanges about how I might think of my contribution, that I would include reflections on what might have been expected in 1943, from the still moving,

Thoughts on Wallace Stevens’s Contribution at Pontigny-en-Amérique: from: Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Mehlman Jeffrey
Abstract: “The Figure of the Youth as Virile Poet” is a confusing text, but it does have a recognizable armature of sorts, pertaining to the three references to a muse said to be “a kind of sister of the Minotaur.” The mythographer immediately thinks of Ariadne and Phaedra, but because she first appears in relation to a “younger figure,” a “son still bearing the antique imagination of the father,” Phaedra-and-Hippolytus (rather than Ariadne-and-Theseus) seems the more apt allusion. This impression is reinforced by a number of additional elements. First, there is the somewhat jarring insistence on the “virility” of the poet-youth,

Jacques Hadamard and Creativity in the Sciences from: Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) O’Shea Donal
Abstract: When he checked in the first summer at Pontigny-en-Amérique in 1942, Jacques Hadamard was seventy-six years old. Revered in France as the intellectual heir to Henri Poincaré, he had been world famous among mathematicians since before the turn of the century. He held professorships at the Collège de France (from 1909), at the École polytechnique (from 1912), and at the École centrale (from 1920) until his retirement from all three at the age of seventy-one in 1937.

Hannah Arendt on Action and Violence with Reference to Simone Weil and Rachel Bespaloff on Homer’s Iliad: from: Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Young-Bruehl Elisabeth
Abstract: In 1968 Elisabeth and I met for the first time in Hannah Arendt’s seminar “Political Experiences in the Twentieth Century,” and we have been talking ever since. We have often wondered why, in 1968, just as her students were protesting America’s aggression in Vietnam, which she also opposed, Arendt chose to evoke the wars, revolutions, and unprecedented terror that had destroyed so many millions of lives in the first half of the twentieth century. Just five years earlier, in her book On Revolution, she had affirmed the political and legal principles of the Constitution of the United States, which inspired

Chapter 6 Heidegger, Japanese Aesthetics, and the Idea of a ‘Dialogue’ between East and West from: Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Kobayashi Chinatsu
Abstract: The story of ‘modern Japanese philosophy’ offers an interesting case study of ‘migration’. The expression covers, roughly, the philosophical output in Japan during the first half of the 20 thcentury, including the writings of the Kyoto School, founded around Kitaro Nishida.¹ This modern Japanese philosophy originated in the discovery by the Japanese of the Western philosophical tradition during the closing decades of the 19thcentury. There had been until then no knowledge of the latter and no recognizably independent Japanese tradition of philosophy. However, from the time of Kukai, Shinran and Dogen, there had been no lack of religious discourse

Chapter 10 Sharing Insights: from: Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Mason Sheila
Abstract: In the last few decades we have seen increasing turmoil in the world and an increasing concern about the weakening of moral bonds within the Western societies.¹ At the same time we have seen a great outpouring of writings on Buddhism in North America. Buddhist masters have founded centres for the study and practice of meditation, many North American men and women have become practitioners and teachers of Buddhism, some taking vows and becoming monks or nuns, while the Dalai Lama has become a public figure of great renown. Anyone with the inclination can easily find books, websites and courses

Chapter 14 Radhakrishnan and the Construction of Philosophical Dialogue across Cultural Traditions from: Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Leighton Denys P.
Abstract: Many humanities and social science scholars today are committed to, or at any rate, pay lip service to ideals of interdisciplinarity and methodological cross-fertilization. In light of this fact, it is remarkable that there should be so little dialogue between historians of philosophy (including those who study political and religious philosophy) and intellectual historians, particularly with respect to study of ‘non-Western’ thought systems or world views. A common tendency among intellectual historians today is to reduce history of philosophy to a minor province of philosophical hermeneutics. The increasingly ahistorical philosophical hermeneuticists, in turn, usually prioritize exposition and internal analysis of

Book Title: Researching Dance-Evolving Modes of Inquiry
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Hanstein Penelope
Abstract: In Researching Dance, an introduction to research methods in dance addressed primarily to graduate students, the editors explore dance as evolutional, defining it in view of its intrinsic participatory values, its developmental aspects, and its purposes from art to ritual, and they examine the role of theory in research. The editors have also included essays by nine dancer-scholars who examine qualitative and quantitative inquiry and delineate the most common approaches for investigating dance, raising concerns about philosophy and aesthetics, historical scholarship, movement analysis, sexual and gender identification, cultural diversity, and the resources available to students. The writers have included study questions, research exercises, and suggested readings to facilitate the book's use as a classroom text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vkdz2

2 FROM IDEA TO RESEARCH PROPOSAL: from: Researching Dance
Author(s) Hanstein Penelope
Abstract: Research is a confusing term; it has so many meanings and applications that it is difficult to understand precisely what we mean when we speak about research in a scholarly sense. We all have done research of one sort or another—looked up the date of the first performance of a favored dance work, sought pedagogical information by asking several experienced teachers about the best way to present material in a choreography class, or consulted Consumer Reportsto select the best VCR to purchase. All of these activities do indeed involve research, but are they research as scholarship?

6 DANCE IN THE HERMENEUTIC CIRCLE from: Researching Dance
Author(s) McNamara Joann
Abstract: Talking in the dressing room after a contact improvisation performance, dancers are struck by the diverse

10 EVERY LITTLE MOVEMENT HAS A MEANING ALL ITS OWN: from: Researching Dance
Author(s) Brennan Mary Alice
Abstract: To state that human movement is the basis of dance is not a revelation. What is surprising is that its detailed study has not more fully permeated all areas of dance research and that a conceptual framework and systematic approach of movement analysis applicable for inclusion in varied research designs is still not widely accepted. Attention to the analysis of dance movement is not new. For centuries people have given verbal descriptions of steps, drawn pictures or symbols of dance, and eloquently detailed in words the poetry of dance movement. Through these efforts present-day scholars have clues to what dance

12 CULTURAL DIVERSITY AND DANCE HISTORY RESEARCH from: Researching Dance
Author(s) Perpener John O.
Abstract: Dance history, like other academic disciplines, is influenced by contemporary trends in education and the new directions in scholarship that those trends produce. For more than a decade, the reassessment of research goals has been influenced by issues of multiculturalism and diversity in American education. As university curricula continue to be restructured in acknowledgment of the diverse roots of America’s intellectual and cultural heritage, scholars from various disciplines are searching for ways to include traditionally disenfranchised voices in their discourses. Such developments have increasingly influenced dance history scholars to recognize that diverse and historically marginalized groups have made profound contributions

UNIFIED FIELD POSTSCRIPT from: Researching Dance
Author(s) Hanstein Penelope
Abstract: Swing from the rope that hangs from the grid, holding the loop at the end. Since we first began to understand it as more than taps and steps or swinging from ropes, more than glitter and goo, more than skipping or running in the breeze (holding our mothers’ curtains aloft), more than leaping in splits or tangling ourselves around other bodies, more than contact or giving and taking weight, even more than pulsing with drumming or floating with butoh-white shadow bodies, dance has become a field, more than its descriptive parts, yet all of them, still more.

5.1 Comment on Nida-Rümelin’s Paper “Is the Naturalization of Qualitative Experience Possible or Sensible?” from: Mindscapes
Author(s) Tetens Holm
Abstract: In general, terms or parts of a language are indispensable when entities, features, or states of the world cannot be discriminated, described, or explained unless the respective terms or parts of the language are used. Terms are indispensable if dispensing with the use of them implies a loss of information about the world including ourselves. Are the

6 Explaining Voluntary Action: from: Mindscapes
Author(s) Prinz Wolfgang
Abstract: There is a common and widespread belief that the way we perceive the physical world is fundamentally different from the way we are aware of our own mental world. In order to perceive events in the outer world, it is held, the mind has to get into contact with matter. For this purpose it relies on a complex machinery (sense organs, nerves, central processing modules, etc.), and the working of that machinery yields results that may be more or less adequate representations of the events to be represented.

8 On Cognitive Luck: from: Mindscapes
Author(s) Millikan Ruth Garrett
Abstract: Paleontologists like to say that to a first approximation, all species are extinct (ninety-nine percent is the usual estimate). The organisms we see around us are distant cousins, not great grandparents; they are a few scattered twig-tips of an enormous tree whose branches and trunk

8.1 Fitting the Frame to the Picture: from: Mindscapes
Author(s) Wilson Bradley E.
Abstract: When choosing a frame for a picture, it is important to consider carefully both the picture that you want to frame and the frame itself. Not just any frame will go with any picture. A wellchosen frame can add to a picture; a poorly-chosen frame can detract from it. The picture that Millikan wants to frame here is an externalist picture of the semantic content of thought, or more simply, an externalist theory of meaning. What does this picture look like?

9 Animal Cognition and Animal Minds from: Mindscapes
Author(s) Allen Colin
Abstract: Psychology, according to a standard dictionary definition, is the science of mind and behavior. For a major part of the twentieth century, (nonhuman) animal psychology was on a behavioristic track that explicitly denied the possibility of a science of animal mind. While many comparative psychologists remain wedded to behavioristic methods, they have more recently adopted a cognitive, information-processing approach that does not adhere to the strictures of stimulus-response explanations of animal behavior. Cognitive ethologists are typically willing to go much further than comparative psychologists by adopting folk-psychological terms to explain the behavior of nonhuman animals.

11.2 Property Physicalism, Reduction and Realization from: Mindscapes
Author(s) Beckermann Ansgar
Abstract: Once, a mind-body theory based upon the idea of supervenience seemed to be a promising alternative to the various kinds of reductionistic physicalism. In recent years, however, Jaegwon Kim has subjected his own brainchild to a very thorough criticism. With most of Kim’s arguments I agree wholeheartedly—not least because they converge with my own thoughts.² In order to explain the few points of divergence with Kim’s views, I shall have to prepare the ground a little. In the course of this paper I will therefore do two things: At the start, I will try to sketch the logical topography

Book Title: The Philosophy of Tim Burton- Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): McMahon Jennifer L.
Abstract: Director and producer Tim Burton impresses audiences with stunning visuals, sinister fantasy worlds, and characters whose personalities are strange and yet familiar. Drawing inspiration from sources as varied as Lewis Carroll, Salvador Dalí, Washington Irving, and Dr. Seuss, Burton's creations frequently elicit both alarm and wonder. Whether crafting an offbeat animated feature, a box-office hit, a collection of short fiction, or an art exhibition, Burton pushes the envelope, and he has emerged as a powerful force in contemporary popular culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vkkxt

Introduction from: The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Abstract: No contemporary director-producer has as deliciously macabre a signature as Tim Burton. Known for his quirky characters and delightfully sinister settings, Burton displays an undeniable knack for the fantastic. Alluding to sources as varied as Lewis Carroll, Mary Shelley, Washington Irving, Edward Gorey, Salvador Dali, and Dr. Seuss, Burton’s creations fascinate audiences by virtue of their ability to elicit both alarm and wonder. And Burton’s influence extends beyond the screen. After over a decade spent establishing a reputation primarily in the cinematic arts, in 2007 Burton released The Melancholy Death of Oyster Boy and Other Stories,a collection of short

Catwoman and Subjectivity: from: The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) Weldon Ryan
Abstract: Tim Burton’s films always contain a cast of interesting characters. Primarily, his character construction and interaction with the plot revolve around a critique of the normal. Normalcy, by whatever yardstick the viewer measures it, never goes unconsidered in a Tim Burton film. We see this in movies as diverse in setting and storytelling as Edward Scissorhands(1990) andSleepy Hollow(1999). Often Burton portrays the normal people, the powerful people, and the conventionally beautiful people as possessing deep character flaws, and the entrenched systems of discourse in which they participate as pervasively corrupt. This corruption is a study in inauthenticity

CHAPTER SEVEN from: Joseph Brodsky
Abstract: THE POEMS COLLECTED IN A Halt in the DesertandThe End of a Beautiful Erapresent a world created by an already mature poet. That is, whatever the next quarter-century might bring, from this point on, Brodsky himself would not change. He would simply become more accomplished in his own idiom; the language in which he spoke of his own universe would become increasingly more precise and sophisticated. This maturity manifested itself in the clarity with which he spoke of the world, of faith, of people, of society. This was true even of his seemingly contradictory views on Christianity

Introduction from: Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: When Tolstoy states dramatically in his aesthetic treatise What Is Art?that “the interpretation of works of art by words only indicates that the interpreter is himself incapable of feeling the infection of art,”¹ one forgets, for just a moment, that Tolstoy himself is using words to tell us how to understand art. For me, the exploration of this kind of mild contradiction is part of what makes reading Tolstoy enjoyable. Sometimes the contradiction is really nothing more than the thematic chiaroscuro of a story, as when Tolstoy celebrates fidelity in vivid stories of adultery, or cherishes the innocence of

1 Guilty Stories from: Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: Evgeny Irtenev, the recognizably autobiographical hero of Tolstoy’s late unpublished story “The Devil” (1889), is destined for happiness: he has saved his family estate from financial ruin, he has married a woman who loves him, and he even has a lovely new baby girl.¹ One thing alone prevents him from achieving complete happiness: his dire need to continue an affair with a local peasant woman, Stepanida, the “devil” of the story’s title. Ravaged by desire, he ultimately goes insane, vowing in the closing pages of the story either to kill Stepanida or to kill himself in order to end the

5 Family Histories from: Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: Tolstoy intended Natasha Rostova to be an authentic character. She was unique for Tolstoy, and represents a turning point. “Natasha, in her freshness and vitality, is absolutely unprecedented in previous writings,” as Kathryn Feuer puts it, “which makes it all the more astonishing that Tolstoy seems to have created her so effortlessly.”¹ Whereas Nikolai and Andrei dramatize the metafictional debate about boundaries between fiction and reality, the novel and history, Natasha lives along the boundary of art and life. Readers might at first assume that no such boundary can be distinguished in Natasha’s life, since she is, of all characters,

6 The Recovery of Childhood from: Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: Tolstoy’s early stories use misdirection, diversion, in order to create the experience of real presentness for the reader, who, happily distracted, passes into a world of fiction perhaps without realizing it. The late stories, on the contrary, often feign the simplicity of pure readerly experience, while alienating that experience through complex narrative structures. In the former, Tolstoy struggles against the alibi of narrative, continually collapsing the distance between “elsewhere” and the present “here.” In the latter, however, Tolstoy raises a narrative barrier to purely present meaning; and though his stories often contain what should be a simple moral meaning, they

11 The Role of Violence in Art from: Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: Although Hadji Murad(1896–1904) is, as we have seen, a story in which violence seems indivisible from fiction, Tolstoy spent most of the years of its authorship developing, publicizing, and trying to live by the precepts of his religious philosophy. His most important work espousing nonviolence in these years wasThe Kingdom of God Is within You(1893). Nonviolence united Tolstoy’s dreams for a communal brotherhood of man with his increasingly strident opposition to the government and Russian Orthodox church. Was Tolstoy a hypocrite for preaching nonviolence while simultaneously writing sometimes lurid violent fiction? No, not in the ordinary

12 On Tolstoy’s Authorship from: Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: For the conclusion of this book, I would like to treat Tolstoy’s narrative alibi within the tradition of primarily western theories of authorial intent and identity. Narrative alibi is the term I have been using throughout this study to describe, first, Tolstoy’s exculpatory fictions, works like “Father Sergius,” where the author looks back at his previous sinful life and creates a narrative arc that leads toward conversion and repentance. I have also used the term narrative alibito characterize the gaps or absences that Tolstoy incribed into his early works. Although all literary texts have gaps, Tolstoy especially worked to

INTRODUCTION from: Utopia
Abstract: The circumstances under which More composed Utopia,as he recounts them in the opening of the book, give us some clues about one of its central issues: public service versus contemplative withdrawal. More was a busy London lawyer in the service of Henry VIII on a trade commission negotiating in the spring and early summer of 1515 in Bruges. In the midst of this activity came three months of leisure from late July to late October; the negotiations were interrupted because the Flemish ambassadors had to return to consult with their prince. Released from business and public service, More had

Thomas More to Peter Giles, Greetings from: Utopia
Abstract: I am almost ashamed, my dear Peter Giles,⁴ to have delayed for almost a year in sending you this little book about the Utopian⁵ commonwealth, which I’m sure you expected within six weeks.⁶ You knew, after all, that I was spared the labor of finding my matter, and did not have to give any thought to its arrangement; all I had to do was repeat what you and I heard Raphael⁷ say. For that reason there was no need to strive for eloquence,⁸ since his language could hardly be polished, first because it was informal and extemporaneous, and also because

Thomas More to His Friend Peter Giles, Warmest Greetings from: Utopia
Abstract: My dear Peter, I was thoroughly delighted with the judgment you know about, delivered by that very sharp fellow in the form of a dilemma directed against my Utopia:if the story is being presented as true, I find some things in it rather absurd; if it is a fiction, then I think that More’s usual good judgment is lacking on some points. I am very grateful to this man, my dear Peter, whoever he may be, who I suspect is learned and whom I see as a friendly critic. I do not know whether any other critique since the

Paths and Presences from: The Allure of the Archives
Abstract: To give preference to the judicial archive presupposes a choice, and presents an itinerary; to make it the sole basis of one’s research or to bring it into the historical debate as one’s principal interlocutor is not altogether natural. Why deny it? There’s certainly something a little quaint about spending years of research obstinately parsing reports of lives led centuries ago, even as increasingly elaborate new ways of thinking about history are all the while being formulated and reformulated. But we should not forget to what extent the judicial archives themselves made many of these breakthroughs possible in the first

Introduction. from: The Religion and Science Debate
Author(s) THOMSON KEITH
Abstract: Science and religion, science versus religion: the subject was argued by the ancient Greeks and scholars of the Middle Ages and the Enlightenment. In choosing this subject for its centennial occasion, the Committee for the Terry Lectures has highlighted an issue that is both ancient and modern, exquisitely complex and painfully simple. The one certainty that we share with our intellectual forebears in this matter is the need for well-considered dialogue. For both Cicero and David Hume ( Dialogues Concerning Natural Religion) a dialogue was not just a literary device but the best way to discuss “any question of philosophy …

2 Cassirer’s Concept of a Philosophy of Human Culture from: Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) VERENE DONALD PHILLIP
Abstract: Cassirer’s philosophy, in the end, is a philosophy of culture. He makes this clear in the title of his book An Essay on Man: An Introduction to a Philosophy of Culture, published a year before his death, which he intended to be a summary of his philosophy of symbolic forms. In a review of this work, Brand Blanshard, while expressing admiration for Cassirer’s great learning, regrets its lack of speculative depth. He says: “It is hard not to think, as one reads a book so wealthy as this in historic and scientific erudition, but at the same time so oddly

4 Cassirer’s Symbolic Theory of Culture and the Historicization of Philosophy from: Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) DUPRÉ LOUIS
Abstract: Ernst Cassirer’s philosophy of culture steered philosophical thought in a new direction. In contrast to both the unmediated unity of being in traditional metaphysics and the epistemic unity of the transcendental subject in modern, critical philosophy, his theory of cultural symbols assumes the object of philosophical reflection to be irreducibly pluralist. His approach raises two fundamental questions. First, is the philosophy of symbolic forms a substitute for metaphysics or does it require a metaphysical foundation to remain consistent with its own principles? Second, how can it discuss contingent matters, such as the historical process of culture, without losing its philosophical

5 “Art” and “Science” in The Philosophy of Symbolic Forms from: Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) HOLQUIST MICHAEL
Abstract: Whatever else one might say about him, Ernst Cassirer would seem indubitably to be a modern philosopher, not only in the contingency of his birth, but in the nature of his concerns. Like so many modernist artists, he is consumed by a passion to understand relations rather than things; thus it is not surprising that The Philosophy of Symbolic Formsis a philosophy of culture. Not merely because its basic analytic tool is semiotic of a particular kind, but because of the urgency one senses on every page to connect regions that otherwise are in danger of falling into isolation

CHAPTER 2 Media Archaeology: from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Strauven Wanda
Abstract: For a long time, talking to oneself on the street or in any other public place was considered abnormal, deviant from the expected social norm. Singing on your own was okay, but talking on your own, without having any interlocutor, was simply weird. When taken unawares by a fellow citizen in such an odd situation, a possible and often-spontaneous reaction (which I have indeed caught myself in several times) was to quickly shift from talking to singing, as if to imply: don’t worry, I was not talking to myself, I was just singing. Today people talk, or even shout, to

CHAPTER 5 The Analysis of the Artwork from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Marchiori Dario
Abstract: While the Greek etymology of analysis means “dis-solution,” analysis as a thinking practice (which has been theorized since the ancient times, initially in the realm of geometry¹) involves the related idea of a “breaking up”²: the first experience of it may be considered that of a child breaking a toy to understand its internal structure, and the way it works. Modern thought has reinforced this “decompositional” conception of analysis, which “found its classic statement in the work of Kant at the end of the eighteenth century” and “set the methodological agenda for philosophical approaches and debates in the (late) modern

Book Title: Contemporary Culture-New Directions in Art and Humanities Research
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Zijlmans Kitty
Abstract: Are the humanities still relevant in the twenty-first century? In the context of pervasive economic liberalism and shrinking budgets, the importance of humanities research for society is increasingly put into question. This volume claims that the humanities do indeed matter by offering empirically grounded critical reflections on contemporary cultural practices, thereby opening up new ways of understanding social life and new directions in humanities scholarship. The contributors argue that the humanities can regain their relevance for society, pose new questions and provide fresh answers, while maintaining their core values: critical reflection, historical consciousness and analytical distance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wp6n0

Introduction from: Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Thissen Judith
Abstract: Are the humanities still relevant in the twenty-first century? In the context of pervasive economic liberalism and shrinking budgets due to a deep and prolonged recession, the exigency of humanities research for society is increasingly put into question, even within academia. Why should governments finance research that does not generate computable and marketable results? Are the immediate costs worth the alleged long-term social benefits? Similar arguments are also made about the arts and culture more generally – one of the main fields of inquiry in humanities scholarship, past and present. With Contemporary Culture: New Directions in Arts and Humanities Research,

Chapter Five Homo Ludens 2.0: from: Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Raessens Joost
Abstract: A spectre is haunting the world – the spectre of playfulness. We are witnessing a global “ludification of culture”. Since the 1960s, in which the word “ludic” became popular in Europe and the United States to designate playful behaviour and artefacts, playfulness has increasingly become a mainstream characteristic of our culture. Perhaps the first thing that comes to mind in this context is the immense popularity of computer games, which, as far as global sales are concerned, have already outstripped Hollywood. According to a recent study in the United States, 8 to 18 year olds play computer games on average

Chapter Six Digital Cartographies as Playful Practices from: Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Lammes Sybille
Abstract: My neighbour recently looked up a Google Street View image of his tattoo parlour in Amsterdam. He noticed that his bicycle was parked in front of his shop, so he gathered that the specially equipped cars that made the panoramic photographs were traversing the city on one of his working days. Becoming intrigued he returned to the map and looked up the school of his children whom he always picks up on his non-working days. On the Google Street View image a crowd of parents were gathering outside the school building. So he figured that the picture must have been

Chapter Twelve On the Need for Cooperation between Art and Science from: Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Zwijnenberg Robert
Abstract: Over the last two decades there has been an increasing tendency for artists to seek partnerships with academics and vice versa.¹ Exchange projects like artist-in-residency programmes at universities have become common practice and there are many organizations that initiate and actively promote collaboration between artists and academics.² To stimulate theoretical reflection on this development, the Netherlands Organisation for Scientific Research (NWO) launched in 2006 the CO-OPs programme. CO-OPs focused on the processes of knowledge production that take place when artists and academics work together on a common research question. On the one hand, it aimed at the formation of new

Chapter Thirteen Laboratory on the Move in Retrospect from: Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Zijlmans Kitty
Abstract: “Is it then never enough?” a woman exclaimed, visiting the exhibition The Return of the Shredsin Scheltema, the contemporary art venue of Museum De Lakenhal in Leiden in the summer of 2007, when facing the mountain of nine tons of textile shreds on display. The exhibition was the largest in a series of projects organized by the Chinese-born, Amsterdam-based artist Ni Haifeng and me during our 18-month collaboration. We called our allianceLaboratory on the Move, indicating the dynamics of our research that was performed in the context of the experimental artist/scholar collaborations (the “CO-OPs”) within the TKC research

CHAPTER 1 Introduction from: Secularism, Assimilation and the Crisis of Multiculturalism
Abstract: This book is the result of my reflections on the deepening crisis of multiculturalism that has been developing across the Euro-Atlantic region, in European countries in particular since the turn of the millennium. I critically evaluate multiculturalism’s contemporary alternatives in terms of secularism, assimilation and (civic) integration, while also tracing the interconnections between these. I furthermore examine why these alternatives are problematic, not only from the standpoint of the migrants and minorities concerned, but also because these notions stem from, and will increasingly lead to, nationalist, Eurocentric and insufficiently democratic conceptions and practices of citizenship. This book, finally, sketches the

CHAPTER 2 Assimilation in the French sociology of incorporation from a multicultural perspective from: Secularism, Assimilation and the Crisis of Multiculturalism
Abstract: Assimilation is a rather unfriendly concept when used in a social context. In French, it generally means an act of the mind that considers (something) as similar (to something else). A relevant secondary meaning is the action of making (something) similar (to something else) by integration or absorption. This meaning has existed in physiology since 1495. Around 1840, the concept was related to social processes for the first time, as the act of assimilating persons and peoples; the process through which these persons, these peoples, assimilate (themselves). This connotation incorporates terms like ‘Americanisation’ and ‘Frenchisation’. The older physiological connotation shines

TRANSIT I Proust as a witness of assimilation in 19th-century France from: Secularism, Assimilation and the Crisis of Multiculturalism
Abstract: The following chapters are founded on the idea that a critical rethinking of Jewish assimilation in 19th-century France – or the process which has been interpreted as such – is important for an assessment of the moral legitimacy and practical wisdom of (re)introducing liberal-assimilationist discourses and practices in the European context. Rethinking Jewish assimilation will also help us trace assimilation’s connections to secularisation in the France of the Third Republic. This will facilitate our understanding of the connections between secularism and assimilationism today. I try to contribute to such a rethinking of assimilation by scrutinising the ways in which assimilation’s practical and

CHAPTER 7 Secularism, sociology and security from: Secularism, Assimilation and the Crisis of Multiculturalism
Abstract: This chapter first examines the Stasi report (2003), which imparted to the French government the crucial recommendation to issue a law prohibiting the wearing of conspicuous religious signs in public schools. The report provides a lengthy analysis of the actuality of laïcité. The final recommendation about the conspicuous religious signs forms only a small part of this document, which redefineslaïcitéin several regards. I relate my reading of the report to the views of multiculturalists who have concentrated on secularism such as Brahm Levey and Bader, focusing especially on the report’s reiteration of the modernist dichotomies discussed in the

1 The Life of the Bay of Bengal from: Crossing the Bay of Bengal
Abstract: Ahmad Rijaluddin traveled across the Bay of Bengal, from Penang to Calcutta, in late 1810. He accompanied Robert Scott—son of James Scott, one of Penang’s first residents and wealthiest merchants. Rijaluddin was himself the son of a rich local family: his father was a Tamil trader, his mother was Malay. He worked as an interpreter for the Europe an merchants of Penang, which had been established in 1786 as a settlement of the British East India Company. Rijaluddin’s memoir, written in the Malay language, is probably the first modern account published by an Asian traveler of crossing the Bay

6 Crossings Interrupted from: Crossing the Bay of Bengal
Abstract: Under pressure of economic competition, squeezed by falling prices, and spurred by rising nationalism, the cords that held up the world of the Bay of Bengal broke. Writing in early 1939, the Indian government’s agent in Burma reported that “for more than six months past, Indians in Mandalay . . . have had to endure what can only be described as organised persecution; their business has been boycotted, their shops picketed.” They faced isolation, marooned in upper Burma as the political tide turned. Many of the shop keepers affected were Tamil-speaking Muslims, or “Chulias,” from the Coromandel Coast. They had

Book Title: A New Republic of Letters- Publisher: Harvard University Press
Author(s): McGann Jerome
Abstract: Jerome McGann's manifesto argues that the history of texts and how they are preserved and accessed for interpretation are the overriding subjects of humanist study in the digital age. Theory and philosophy no longer suffice as an intellectual framework. But philology--out of fashion for decades--models these concerns with surprising fidelity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wpnfx

7 What Do Scholars Want? from: A New Republic of Letters
Abstract: “Sustainability” is a dark but potent word in the field of digital humanities. It signals a broad set of concerns—both technical and institutional—about how to maintain and augment the increasingly large body of digital information that humanists are both creating and using. It is a word with far more than a contemporary pertinence, however. It could (it should) remind us that the traditional problems of philology have scarcely changed at all, and certainly have not gone away.

INTRODUCTION from: Seven Modes of Uncertainty
Abstract: Let’s begin with a beginning. Humbert Humbert’s first words in Lolitaare famously, even infamously, incantatory: “Lolita, light of my life, fire of my loins. My sin, my soul. Lo-lee-ta: the tip of the tongue taking a trip of three steps down the palate to tap, at three, on the teeth. Lo. Lee. Ta.”¹ Because they come at the beginning of the novel, we cannot escape these lines, whether we find them gorgeous, allusive—Poe has already reared his head in the merest syllable cribbed from “AnnabelLee”—or merely purple.² As we read on, Humbert’s poeticizing poses another problem:

[I Introduction] from: Seven Modes of Uncertainty
Abstract: Mutual exclusionis the narrative presentation of mutually exclusive sets of events or of mutually exclusive explanations for the same set of events. In logic, the termmutually exclusivedescribes when two events are equally possible but could not have both occurred, or when two propositions cannot logically be true at the same time. As with tossing a coin, only one outcome (heads) can be true; if it is, the other outcome (tails) cannot be true. In that example, the mutual exclusion is collectively exhaustive, meaning that either one or the other must happen. There are other forms—the rolling

3 ADJACENCY from: Seven Modes of Uncertainty
Abstract: The dominance of the authorial persona in ethics-minded criticism is perhaps nowhere more evident than in the case of Nobel Laureate Toni Morrison. Although her writing is well known for its difficulty, Morrison has given enough explanatory interviews to fill two volumes, both extensively cited despite the humble, homey “conversations” intimated by their titles.¹ Morrison’s “conversational” appearances on the Oprah Winfrey show also dramatize an anxious negotiation of readers’ desire to know and the author’s will to tell.² With stunning audacity, Morrison even interpreted her own novels in her Tanner lecture at the University of Michigan in 1988. Yung-Hsing Wu

[III Introduction] from: Seven Modes of Uncertainty
Abstract: Repetitionis a necessary feature of narrative. A repeated name, for example, permits us to track a single character across a novel. Repetition’s operation ofsimilitudeurges consistency over time, emphasizing the reality of things and of persons, as when we speak of habits, customs, conventions. While some repetition is necessary for narrative stability, it can also afford uncertainty because every iteration can seem to bear more—or different—meaning in its new context. William Empson describes the effect of Sidney’sArcadia:“in tracing their lovelorn pastoral tedium through thirteen repetitions, with something of the aimless multitudinousness of the sea

The Motive for Metaphor from: Metaphor
Abstract: [Metaphor] is both a gift which Nature herself confers on us, and which is therefore used even by uneducated persons and unconsciously, and at the same time so attractive and elegant that it shines by its own light however splendid its context. So long as it is correctly employed, it cannot be vulgar or mean or unpleasing. It also adds to the resources of language by exchanges or borrowings to supply its deficiencies, and (hardest task of all) it ensures that nothing goes without

Book Title: Sobre el viejo humanismo-Exposición y defensa de una tradición
Publisher: Marcial Pons, Ediciones de Historia
Author(s): GIBERT JAVIER GARCÍA
Abstract: Como reza su subtítulo, este libro se presenta como una «exposición» histórica de la tradición humanística y repasa los nombres y aportaciones más significativos que, desde la antigüedad clásica hasta la actualidad, han contribuido a construir, fijar o interpretar los rasgos esenciales del «viejo humanismo», una categoría que conviene distinguir de las concepciones más modernas o recientes, derivadas todas ellas del humanitarismo ilustrado. El lector encontrará una «defensa» de aquellos principios, tanto frente a los permanentes ataques anti-humanísticos que ha recibido a lo largo de la historia, como frente a los falsos amigos o malas interpretaciones que la tradición humanística —y el propio concepto de «humanismo»— soportan en la actualidad. Se trata, en definitiva, de un ensayo de amplio recorrido y no exento de interpretación, un texto que pretende levantar un análisis objetivo, aunque apasionado, de los hitos y los postulados que han ido conformando, no sólo filosófica y literariamente, sino también emocional y simbólicamente, aquella tradición.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wpsg6

Capítulo 5 PETRARCA Y SUS ENEMIGOS from: Sobre el viejo humanismo
Abstract: No vamos a referirnos en este capítulo al Petrarca poeta en lengua toscana, que tan enorme influencia iba a tener en la historia de la literatura occidental, sino al autor de una serie de obras latinas que lo han hecho ser considerado, con toda justicia, como el primer humanista moderno. Esta atribución no sólo se debe, como trataremos de ver en las páginas que siguen, al contenido formal de su obra sino, sobre todo, a una actitud emocional y una vocación existencial plenamente humanísticas, a una defensa sin cuartel de esta tradición (que él mismo contribuyó a implantar en la

12 FEDERICO GARCÍA LORCA, MUERTE Y MEMORIA from: Elogio de historia en tiempo de memoria
Abstract: En uno de esos grandes titulares que han acabado por imponerse en la prensa española desde los primeros años de este siglo XXI, alguien preguntaba hace tres meses: «¿Y ahora dónde estás, Federico?». La autora del reportaje hablaba en tiempo presente: Federico no está allí, lamentaba, lo mismo que el expresidente de la Asociación para la recuperación de la Memoria Histórica de Granada. Mientras tanto, el historiador que tanto trabajo ha dedicado a documentar hasta el último detalle de su muerte y que había creído, por la confesión de un testigo desinteresado, tener perfectamente localizado el lugar de su enterramiento

14 EL HISTORIADOR, ARTESANO EN SU TALLER from: Elogio de historia en tiempo de memoria
Abstract: Durante los treinta y cinco años —hoy, exactamente y por un nuevo azar, la mitad de mi vida— que llevo dedicado a este oficio, primero como una afición, luego como una profesión, he sido muy afortunado, debo reconocerlo y lo hago sin ninguna necesidad de pedir excusas. He dispuesto de ese preciado bien que es el tiempo para dedicarme a lo que me interesa y divierte, y de ese mayor tesoro que es la libertad para emplear el tiempo según mi buen saber y entender. En el ejercicio diario del trabajo de un profesor de universidad, al menos desde que

Capítulo II GRAFÍAS PARA LA ETERNIDAD from: Homo viator, homo scribens
Abstract: Las relaciones del descubrimiento y conquista de los nuevos mundos, además de ser muchas de ellas el cumplimiento de un mandato regio, ninguna oculta la curiosidad que sintieron sus artífices por unos lugares lejanos, extraños, ocultos y desconocidos, en donde se desarrollan unos hechos merecedores del reconocimiento oficial. Conscientes de los servicios prestados al poder, los ejecutores de las hazañas aspirarán a la fama y, sobre todo, al premio de las autoridades, emolumentos económicos y sociales en forma de bienes raíces, mano de obra, rentas y cargos públicos retributivos de sus heroicas acciones. El mérito es una de las claves

Capítulo III LA CONQUISTA DE LA INFORMACIÓN from: Homo viator, homo scribens
Abstract: Cuando Colón volvía de su primer y venturoso viaje a la India, un día de la larga travesía del Océano, el 14 de febrero de 1493, cerca de las Azores estalló una gran tormenta, meteoro que puso al borde del naufragio a los navíos que venían plenos de dicha tras haber alcanzado la meta deseada y soñada. La furia de tamaño temporal obligó al Almirante a tomar las precauciones propias de condiciones de navegación tan adversas, aunque hubo una que llama la atención de manera especial. Temiendo desgracias y para que los reyes no quedasen sin saber de su victoria

COLOFÓN from: Homo viator, homo scribens
Abstract: Escritos y libros, en definitiva, conformaron un canal de información, a escala planetaria, vital para la Europa del Renacimiento, sobre todo para el mundo ibérico que inició la que, a la zaga de S. Gruzinski, podríamos llamar la primera globalización o mundialización. Una movilización universal que, partiendo de una fantástica, distante y sin precedentes empresa guerrera, económica y religiosa, empezó a modificar muchas escalas de valores, hábitos y formas de pensar en la cultura occidental. Sus actores, consciente e inconscientemente, hicieron un grato servicio a los distintos poderes y a unas gentes ávidas de conocimientos; a un orbe, en suma,

Book Title: Signs of Science-Literature, Science, and spa Modernity since 1868
Publisher: Purdue University Press
Author(s): Pratt Dale J.
Abstract: Signs of Science: Literature, Science, and spa Modernity since 1868 traces how spa culture represented scientific activity from the mid-nineteenth century onward. The book combines the global perspective afforded by historical narrative with detailed rhetorical analyses of images of science in specific literary and scientific texts. As literary criticism it seeks to illuminate similarities and differences in how science and scientists are pictured; as cultural history it follows the course of a centuries-long dialogue about Spain and science.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wq1rm

Introduction from: Signs of Science
Abstract: On a recent trip to Madrid, the bus I took from the airport in Barajas to the Plaza de Colón was caught in the usual morning traffic jam. The irritated driver shouted “¡ Esto no pasa en Europa!” thereby expressing the commonplace that Spain has not been part of mainstream European culture since the heyday of Felipe II. Though the driver eventually navigated the congested streets successfully, his lament about Spain’s supposed backwardness echoes those of Spanish “europeizantes” writing from the 1700s until our time. Perhaps the most important issue in the debate over Spain’s membership in modem Europe, especially

Chapter Five The Tragicomedy of Science in 1898 from: Signs of Science
Abstract: Cajal’s studies of the nervous system trace the limits of scientific realism. The workings of the cellular world obviously have global effects on the body, but the greater the detail of Cajal’s descriptions, the more difficult it becomes for him to explain human behavior in terms of cells. What is it about the branches of neurons that makes individuals think the way they do? Literary realism has similar limits. It may be obvious that environmental factors like alcoholism or poverty have dramatic effects on a person’s (and a character’s) identity, but the realist process of amassing minute observations is often

Chapter Three The Chinese Garden and the Concept of the Vision of Jing from: A Jesuit Garden in Beijing and Early Modern Chinese Culture
Abstract: The vision of Round Brightness, with its cosmological and ethical meanings, was embodied by the multiple scenes of the Yuanming Yuan. The brightness not only diffused along the route of the Forty Scenes (Sishi jing) but also was composed by each scene. One of the principal questions is this: Is the transcendental Round Brightness essentially related to the physical scenes in this garden? To answer the question, a historical analysis of the concept of jingis necessary. Through focusing on multiple scenes in this garden, we can retrieve the vision of Round Brightness. The meaning ofjingas the unity

Creation and Mortalization: from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Mandell Sara R.
Abstract: Although we generally approach Gen. 1:1–3:24, the first majorpericope in the Hebrew Scriptures,¹ as a religious text, the narrative as many have noted contains a number of intertwined and powerful literarytopoithat are frequently found in epic.² This is not surprising since this pericope, although not an epic unto itself, is the introduction to

Developments in Catholic-Jewish Relations: from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Pawlikowski John T.
Abstract: The last fifteen years or so have witnessed significant new developments but also the emergence of new challenges in the Catholic-Jewish relationship. In this essay, I will highlight some of the main new developments and discuss the emerging challenges, focusing in particular on four areas: (1) the Holocaust, (2) the theology of the Church’s relationship with Judaism in the light of new biblical research, (3) Jewish understandings of the land of Israel, and (4) joint social responsibility. In considering all these issues I shall attempt to be as candid as possible about positive developments as well as continuing tensions. An

Rabbi Abraham Joshua Heschel’s Paths to God from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Kasimow Harold
Abstract: In his best-known work, God in Search of Man, a book that has been called “the single most sophisticated, profound and comprehensive statement within modern Judaic theology,” Abraham Joshua Heschel (1907–72), one of the most significant Jewish thinkers of the twentieth century, expresses his deep concern over the decline of religion today.¹ This concern extends beyond the survival of Judaism to the survival of humanity itself. In a 1967 article he says:

Once More to the Jabbok: from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Knight Henry F.
Abstract: Of course, these imperatives are not exhaustive. A summons to attend to missing faces articulates a sense of responsibility

On Oil and Antisemitism from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Rubenstein Richard L.
Abstract: An attitudinal sea change has occurred in Europe. The nations of the European Union (EU), formerly the European Community (EC), have turned aggressively against Israel, and the post-Holocaust taboo on antisemitic speech and incitement, observed by the mainstream media and responsible political, religious, and intellectual leaders for decades, has been broken. When and why did this happen? How are we to understand the plethora of vulgarly antisemitic cartoons and caricatures, as well as statements by European leaders of a kind not uttered publicly since the fall of the Third Reich?

Book Title: Genre Fusion-A New Approach to History, Fiction, and Memory in Contemporary Spain
Publisher: Purdue University Press
Author(s): Brenneis Sara J.
Abstract: Genre Fusion opens with a straightforward overview of the relationships among history, fiction, and memory in contemporary culture. While providing an up-to-date context for scholarly debates about Spain’s historical memory, Genre Fusion also expands the contours of the discussion beyond the specialized territory of Hispanic studies. To demonstrate the theoretical necessity of genre fusion, Brenneis analyzes pairs of interconnected texts (one a work of literature, the other a work of historiography) written by a single author. She explores how fictional and nonfictional works by Montserrat Roig, Carmen Martín Gaite, Carlos Blanco Aguinaga, and Javier Marías unearth the collective memories of Spain’s past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wq3rh

Chapter Five Javier Marías: from: Genre Fusion
Abstract: Cada vez que ETA asesina —y casi siempre lo hace de buena mañana, los terroristas madrugan, o quizá es que no duerman la noche previa—, existe la costumbre de que, hacia el mediodía, los responsables de los ayuntamientos de las ciudades salgan a la puerta de sus edificios, con calor, frío o lluvia, y guarden uno o dos minutos de silencio. (“De

Chapter One Sentimental Postmodernism, Identification, and the Feeling Audience from: Postmodern Texts and Emotional Audiences
Abstract: Postmodern literature and film have often been characterized by a thematic obsession with the disintegration of families, communities, and larger socio-political ties. Rather than painting such dark themes with the brush of tragedy, postmodern texts often adopt a tone of mocking irony or disaffected nihilism. Kathy Acker’s parodic avant-garde fiction, for example, is a complex meditation on contemporary nihilism, on the “nothingness everybody now seems to want” ( In Memoriam to Identity263). The hipness of postmodern disaffection was cemented with the popularity of Quentin Tarantino’s filmPulp Fiction(1994), which turns an absence of morality into fodder for black comedy.

Chapter Two Critical Hybridity and the Building of Methodological Bridges from: Postmodern Texts and Emotional Audiences
Abstract: The theory and method informing this study can best be described as a dialectical mediation between dissimilar cultural genres and between antagonistic scholarly traditions. The critical dialectic of sentimental postmodernism allows me to illuminate theoretical biases and blind spots in scholarship concerning both postmodernism and popular affective genres. While many theorists of postmodern culture pay lip service to the idea that postmodernism breaks down the division between high and popular culture, most of their exemplary texts are nonetheless high art or avant-garde works. Focusing on irony, self-reflexivity, avant-garde aesthetics, and poststructuralist ideas about language, many of these critics draw a

Chapter Four Northern Exposure and Postmodern Utopian Communities from: Postmodern Texts and Emotional Audiences
Abstract: Once one of the most popular programs on television and winner of an Emmy for Best Drama in 1991–92, Northern Exposurewas unusually highbrow television fare, offering viewers weekly philosophical ruminations about cultural pluralism, democracy, gender and sexuality, and the meaning of artistic production. Many television critics have commented thatExposure’s demise after six seasons (1990–95) was less surprising than the fact that this intellectual show ever commanded such a large following. Ranked in the Nielsen top-15 for three seasons, the program spawned several fanclubs, including an Internet newsgroup (alt.tv.northern-exp). While “quality” television programs aimed at affluent and

7 Psalm 22 in Pesiqta Rabbati: from: The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Ulmer Rivka
Abstract: Psalm 22 is cited in several critical New Testament passages; by comparison, Psalm 22 is rarely cited in rabbinic literature. In particular, Psalm 22 is used as an expression of personal suffering by the New Testament writers in the cruci-fixion scenes that recount the suffering of Jesus. In rabbinic literature, Psalm 22 is also cited as relating to the afflictions of a Jewish Messiah. The major rabbinic passage addressing the subject of a suffering Messiah is found in Pesiqta Rabbati, a rabbinic homiletic work that contains numerous messianic passages, as well as four entire homilies that present apocalyptic messianic visions,

12 Typical Jewish Misunderstandings of Christ, Christianity, and Jewish-Christian Relations over the Centuries from: The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Fisher Eugene J.
Abstract: I have spent a large portion of my professional life since I finished my coursework at New York University’s Institute of Hebrew Studies in 1971 educating my fellow Christians on the Jewishness of Jesus, of his teachings, and of Christianity down through the ages. My dissertation analyzed the treatment of Jews and Judaism in Catholic religious education materials, a study I was happy to share with the publishers a few years later in a program co-sponsored with the Anti-Defamation League, which resulted, I am even happier to say, in a number of improvements in Catholic textbooks. My first book¹ briefly

CHAPTER TWO Pure Science of Nature and Pure Psychology from: Edmund Husserl's Phenomenology
Abstract: Die neuzeitliche Psychologie ist die Wissenschaft vom “Psychischen” im konkreten Zusammenhang der raumzeitlichen Realitäten, also von in der Natur sozusagen ichartig Vorkommendem mit all dem, was untrennbar dazugehört als psychisches Erleben (wie Erfahren, Denken, Fühlen, Wollen), als Vermögen und Habitus. Die Erfahrung bietet das Psychische als bloße Seinsschicht an Menschen und Tieren. Die Psychologie ist danach ein Zweig der konkreteren Anthropologie bzw. Zoologie. Animalische Realitäten sind zunächst einer Grundschichte nach physische Realitäten. Als das gehören sie in den geschlossenen Zusammenhang der physischen Natur, der Natur im ersten und prägnantesten Sinn, welche das universale Thema einer reinen Naturwissenschaft ist, d.i. einer

CHAPTER THREE The Purely Psychical as Given in Experience: from: Edmund Husserl's Phenomenology
Abstract: Die Einstellung des erfahrenden Blickes auf unser Psychisches vollzieht sich notwendig als eine Reflexion, als Umwendung des vordem anders gerichteten Blickes. Jede Erfahrung läßt solche Reflexion zu, aber auch jede sonstige Weise, in der wir mit irgend welchen realen oder idealen Gegenständen beschäftigt sind, etwa

CHAPTER TEN Transcendental Phenomenology as Ontology: from: Edmund Husserl's Phenomenology
Abstract: In Erwägung der Tragweite der transzendentalen Phänomenologie ergeben sich merkwürdige Konsequenzen. In ihrer systematischen Durchführung verwirklicht sie die Leibnizsche Idee eineruniversalen Ontologieals systematischer Einheit aller erdenklichen apriorischen Wissenschaften, aber in einer neuen, den “Dogmatismus” durch die transzendental phänomenologische Methode überwindenden Begründung. Die Phänomenologie als Wissenschaft von allen erdenklichen transzendentalen Phänomenen und zwar je in den synthetischen Gesamtgestalten, in denen sie allein konkret möglich sind—denen von transzendentalen Einzelsubjekten, verbunden zu [297] Subjektgemeinschaften—isteo ipsoapriorische Wissenschaft von allem erdenklichen Seienden; aber dann nicht bloß von dem All des objektiv Seienden und nun gar in einer Einstellung natürlicher

Chapter One Translation from: On the Cultures of Exile,Translation and Writing
Abstract: Translation is based, as Walter Benjamin intimates in his essay on translation, "Die Aufgabe des Übersetzers" ("The Task of the Translator"; 1923), on an exhilarating paradox and a fundamental metaphysical conundrum. Benjamin's thesis is that translation is possible, indeed necessary, because all languages are connected to one original language (on language and translation in Benjamin see also Andrew Benjamin, "The Absolute"; Jacobs; and Fynsk). Benjamin calls this original language "pure language" ("die reine Sprache"). But perhaps "related" is a better word than "connected" since in Benjamin's thought there is a strong sense of origin and genealogy—of kinship ("Verwandtschaft"). It

Chapter Two Time from: On the Cultures of Exile,Translation and Writing
Abstract: Time slips away, time stops; it goes fast, proceeds erratically, it even stays still. Time keeps changing and yet never changes. We often speak of old time and new time, of present time, past time and future time. And yet, whenever we do this we do not talk about time: we talk about ourselves in time. What ages in time is not time itself but subjectivity. Calendars do not measure the passing of time, but the passing of lives in time. History is the site of this peculiar metonym through which what is measured and saved is, in reality, not

Chapter Three Exile from: On the Cultures of Exile,Translation and Writing
Abstract: In "Politica dell'esilio" ("Politics of Exile") Agamben states that: "Only now that exile is no longer the banning of an individual from the community, but 'of one alone into one,' the condition of negativity and exclusion that exile enunciates appears to turn instead into a state of 'bliss' and lightness" (my translation; "Solo ora che l'esilio non è più il bando di un singolo dalla comunità, ma 'di un solo presso uno' e la condizione di negatività ed esclusione che esso esprime sembra, invece, rovesciarsi in uno stato di 'felicità' ["eudaimonion bios"] e di leggerezza ["kouphisthesetai"]"; "Politica" 25). Agamben introduces

Gustav Shpet and Phenomenology in an Orthodox Key from: Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Cassedy Steven
Abstract: Gustav Shpet was one of a number of Husserl's disciples who took some of phenomenology's central principles and applied them to language theory and aesthetics. Much of the value of Shpet's contribution to philosophy derives from his introduction of phenomenology into his own country. But even though he knowingly proposed certain significant modifications to Husserl's thought, an examination of some of his major writings on language and aesthetics leads one to suspect that Shpet, apparently without knowing it, gave his own slant to those parts that he thought he was merely interpreting and passing on. Both the witting and the

Vladimir Solov'ev and the Legacy of Russian Religious Thought in the Works of Gustav Shpet from: Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Dennes Maryse
Abstract: The task of studying Vladimir Solov'ev's legacy as well as that of Russian religious thought in the works of Gustav Shpet should come as no surprise since the publication of Tatiana Shchedrina's book on the intellectual biography of Gustav Shpet in 2004. So far only a few papers have been devoted to this topic (see Boiko; Cassedy; Noskov; Epina, "G.G. Shpet," "Tvorchestvo"). The approach I use here will shed further light on this subject. I attempt to demonstrate that such a legacy is not only present in Shpet's works, but also has a pivotal role, insofar as it allows the

About the Narratives of a Blood Libel Case in Post-Shoah Hungary from: Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies
Author(s) Pető Andrea
Abstract: After the liberation of Hungary from nazi occupation by the Soviet army, May 1945 was an exciting and agitated time in the capital, Budapest. People were discussing the ongoing peace negotiations in Paris and cases brought before the People's Tribunals that were being reviewed on the front pages of newspapers. During World War II some 500,000 Jews had been deported from Hungary within a period of few months and the People's Tribunals ( Népbíróság) were in charge of handling the war crimes and crimes against humanity that had occurred during that period (see Karsai). In the immediate postwar period, the new

Mapping the Lines of Fact and Fiction in Holocaust Testimonial Novels from: Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies
Author(s) Richardson Anna
Abstract: In the case of an event as extreme as the Holocaust, one could be forgiven for presupposing that the boundary between factual and fictional modes of representation is sacred in its rigidity. However, it is often the case with survivor narratives that this expectation is far too proscriptive in its division of the realms of fact and fiction; as James E. Young comments, "If there is a line between fact and fiction, it may by necessity be a winding border that tends to bind these two categories as much as it separates them, allowing each side to dissolve occasionally into

Rescue Narratives by Central European Holocaust Survivors from Carpatho-Russia from: Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies
Author(s) Rosen Ilana
Abstract: Although in recent decades scholarly interest in Holocaust narratives is ever growing, the narrative of so-called ordinary people—interviewees of research and documentation authorities, participants in communal memorial books, and authors of singular Holocaust memoirs—have not yet received due attention in this research. Here, I present an analysis of what might be called the central theme of all Holocaust narratives, namely, the narration of rescue acts or events. I analyze twelve narratives told by six survivor-narrators of Carpatho-Russian origins in terms of the relationship they maintain among these elements: dangerous or challenging predicament, narrator's response or nonresponse, degree of

Chapter 8 Bougainville: from: Mediating Across Difference
Author(s) Garasu Lorraine
Abstract: After almost a decade of war (1989–1998) and the bloodiest violent conflict in the South Pacific since the end of the Second World War, Bougainville has gone through a comprehensive peacebuilding process. This process is a rare success story in contemporary postconflict peacebuilding. Because the conflict occurred during a time of statelessness in Bougainville, space was opened for a renaissance of nonstate customary institutions and processes. In the absence of state institutions, local practices resumed their central role in the life of the communities. In many places elders and chiefs, assisted particularly by women and local church people, became

Chapter 12 Korean Sources of Conflict Resolution: from: Mediating Across Difference
Author(s) Young-ju Hoang
Abstract: Korea has a long history of linking conflict resolution with particular moral and societal values. In this chapter we explore the potentials and limits of this tradition by focusing on the concept of Han, which many Korean scholars claim as unique to their culture.

Chapter 13 Conclusion: from: Mediating Across Difference
Author(s) Chan Stephen
Abstract: There is a phenomenon that appears almost everywhere there is conflict. It began with sporadic and uncoordinated interventions by well-meaning people who found they could help influence, shape, and even suspend conflict, particularly in regions remote from the interests of the great powers. This movement of international mediators proved to be a curious hybrid of academic idealism and prescriptive procedures. The mediator was most often male and Western, and he took centre stage, controlling communication among conflicting parties to nudge them into compromises, settlements, and even resolution of their disputes—using techniques extrapolated from, among other sources, marriage guidance manuals.

Book Title: Japanese Philosophy-A Sourcebook
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Maraldo John C.
Abstract: With Japanese Philosophy: A Sourcebook,readers of English can now access in a single volume the richness and diversity of Japanese philosophy as it has developed throughout history. Leading scholars in the field have translated selections from the writings of more than a hundred philosophical thinkers from all eras and schools of thought, many of them available in English for the first time.TheSourcebookeditors have set out to represent the entire Japanese philosophical tradition-not only the broad spectrum of academic philosophy dating from the introduction of Western philosophy in the latter part of the nineteenth century, but also the philosophical ideas of major Japanese traditions of Buddhism, Confucianism, and Shinto. The philosophical significance of each tradition is laid out in an extensive overview, and each selection is accompanied by a brief biographical sketch of its author and helpful information on placing the work in its proper context. The bulk of the supporting material, which comprises nearly a quarter of the volume, is given to original interpretive essays on topics not explicitly covered in other chapters: cultural identity, samurai thought, women philosophers, aesthetics, bioethics.An introductory chapter provides a historical overview of Japanese philosophy and a discussion of the Japanese debate over defining the idea of philosophy, both of which help explain the rationale behind the design of the Sourcebook. An exhaustive glossary of technical terminology, a chronology of authors, and a thematic index are appended. Specialists will find information related to original sources and sinographs for Japanese names and terms in a comprehensive bibliography and general index.Handsomely presented and clearly organized for ease of use,Japanese Philosophy: A Sourcebookwill be a cornerstone in Japanese studies for decades to come. It will be an essential reference for anyone interested in traditional or contemporary Japanese culture and the way it has shaped and been shaped by its great thinkers over the centuries.24 illus.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqg76

Prelude: from: Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: It is folly to think of any single historical person or event as marking the beginning of philosophy in a given culture. Still, any treatment of a philosophical tradition has to start somewhere and we may take a cue for how to proceed from Aristotle. In his narrative about the development of his own intellectual heritage, Aristotle crowned Thales of Miletus as the first philosopher ( Metaphysics1.3) and to the present day, most histories of western philosophy follow Aristotle’s lead. He believed Thales to be the earliest Hellenic thinker to seek not merely an explanation for everything, but an explanation

Kakuban 覚鑁 (1095–1143) from: Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: Kakuban integrated into Shingon the increasingly popular Amidist or ⌜Pure Land⌝ devotional tradition. In the selections below, Kakuban reaffirms ⌜Amida’s⌝ prominence in Shingon as an incarnation of ⌜Dainichi’s⌝ wisdom. By stressing the dynamic between the mind of

Myōe 明恵 (1173–1232) from: Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: A Japanese monk ordained in both the ⌜Shingon⌝ and ⌜Kegon⌝ heritages, Myōe was an original and restive thinker who straddled the borders of traditional Buddhism and new directions of his age. His theory of universal salvation supported efforts to recognize the disinherited and marginalized members of society at the same time as he criticized the moral laxity of popular ⌜nenbutsu⌝practices and what he saw as the distortions of the “heretical” ⌜Pure Land⌝ thinker Hōnen.* In its place, he championed a restoration of monastic discipline and advocated a “mantra of light” that focused on rebirth in the ⌜Pure Land⌝ rather

Nichiren 日蓮 (1222–1282) from: Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: Among the founders of new Buddhist movements in the Kamakura period (1192–1333), Nichiren stands out for his strident opposition to the religious and political authorities of the day. Basing his teachings on an original interpretation of the Lotus Sutrathat combined elements from the ⌜Tendai⌝ and esoteric traditions, he preached attainment of ⌜buddhahood⌝ and peace in the land through the recitation of a single mantra, ..⌜namu-myōhō-rengekyō⌝, expressing devotion to the mystic law of theLotus Sutra.In subsequent ages, his ideas would be put to the service of differing causes. For example, Nichiren’s teachings were revived during Japan’s

Jiun Sonja 慈雲尊者 (1718–1804) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Sonja Jiun
Abstract: Jiun Sonja was a leading Buddhist reformer, scholar, and apologist during the Edo period (1600–1868). At a time when the Buddhist establishment was increasingly occupied with tasks imposed on it by the Tokugawa government, such as keeping registers of the local citizenry, and conducting funeral and memorial services, Jiun devoted himself to reviving traditional monastic life, based on the model of the historical Buddha and grounded in Buddhist philosophy. To study early Buddhism, he undertook the study of Sanskrit, using the limited resources available to him in Japan, and compiled the 1,000-chapter Guide to Sanskrit Studies, a work unparalleled

Overview from: Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: Like almost all forms of Japanese Buddhism, the Pure Land tradition was formulated in China in the sixth and seventh centuries, based on Indian scriptures that were interpreted according to indigenous Chinese thinking. The name “Pure Land” is used today to refer to either a line of Buddhist thinking or a cluster of Buddhist institutions. There are five or six major traditions within Japanese Buddhist thought, but Zen and Pure Land are given their own sections here because of their prominence in Japanese philosophical history since the thirteenth century. It should be noted that as a religion—and taken all

Kumazawa Banzan 熊沢蕃山 (1619–1691) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Banzan Kumazawa
Abstract: A major Japanese advocate of the neo-Confucian philosophy of Wang Yangming, Kumazawa Banzan gravitated from the metaphysical toward more practical, sociopolitical, and economic applications of that intuitive, mind-centered system. Rather than the doctrinal innovations, often very spiritual in nature, advanced by his teacher, Nakae Tōju*, Banzan’s major works, Questions and Answers on the Great Learning and Japanese Writings on Accumulating Righteousness, spell out his conviction that a true philosophy is one that can be applied to the real and pressing issues of the day. Banzan took his philosophical commitment to practical political concerns seriously and continued to speak out even

Itō Jinsai 伊藤仁斎 (1627–1705) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Jinsai Itō
Abstract: Itō Jinsai’s family moved to Kyoto, the ancient imperial capital, towards the end of the sixteenth century, just before Tokugawa Ieyasu (1543–1616) was to consolidate the samurai rule of Japan as the new shōgun, and inaugurate the Tokugawa period (1600–1868). Ieyasu based his samurai regime in Edo (later Tokyo), the capital of his ⌜shogunate⌝. Within a century Edo had become the cultural center of Japan, increasingly eclipsing Kyoto in the intellectual, artistic, and cultural arenas. During Jinsai’s life, however, Kyoto retained its status as the center of traditional culture, if not political power.

Tominaga Nakamoto 富永仲基 (1715–1746) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Nakamoto Tominaga
Abstract: Tominaga Nakamoto was born and raised in Osaka, the son of a soy merchant who was one of the founders of the Kaitokudo academy, a center of neo-Confucian philosophizing for merchants and townspeople. Though he passed away at age thirty-one after a lengthy illness, Nakamoto authored two important works, Emerging from Meditation(1745) andThe Writings of an Old Man(1746). The former attempts a kind of historical deconstruction of the Buddhist tradition in Asia, while the latter outlines Nakamoto’s critiques of Shinto, Buddhist, and Confucian traditions. A third work, since lost, entitledAn Explanation of Errors, critically analyzed Confucian

Ōkuni Takamasa 大國隆正 (1792–1871) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Takamasa Ōkuni
Abstract: Ōkuni Takamasa was born into a samurai family in the Tsuwano domain compound of Edo. At age fourteen he joined the school of Hirata Atsutane* as one of the first disciples and at the same time he received a formal education in Confucian studies at the Shōheigaku shogunal academy. A visit to Nagasaki in 1818 piqued his interest in western studies. He went on to establish himself in Edo as a calligrapher and as a scholar of ”ancient matters,” focusing on the study of the age of the ⌜kami⌝in the spirit of Atsutane. Shortly after being appointed to an

Tsujimura Kōichi 辻村公一 (1922–2010) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Kōichi Tsujimura
Abstract: Tsujimura Kōichi studied philosophy at Kyoto University under Tanabe Hajime,* and went on to assume his teacher’s chair from 1948 until retiring in 1982. More formative for his thinking, however, was the Zen he practiced with Hisamatsu Shin’ichi,* coupled with the thought of Martin Heidegger, whom he knew personally from travels in Germany. His translations and essays often elucidated Zen texts and Heidegger’s thought in the light of one another to introduce novel interpretations of both. For example, Tsujimura translated Heidegger’s term Gelassenheit, and the book based on it, using a Buddhist term for liberation. In addition to translations of

Ichikawa Hakugen 市川白弦 (1902–1986) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Hakugen Ichikawa
Abstract: In assessing the ethical issues surrounding wartime Zen and such Zen-influenced thinkers

Imanishi Kinji 今西錦司 (1902–1992) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Kinji Imanishi
Abstract: In 1941, within a year of completing his doctorate at Kyoto Imperial University with a specialization in entomology and ecology, Imanishi Kinji published perhaps his best-known and lasting contribution in the form of a philosophy of nature, The World of Living Things.In it he argued that since all things arise together, the “life” of the organic and inorganic should be considered as part of a single interactive world. Living subjects and the environment were part of each other, flowed into each other, and created a particular world over which each organism had some control, which he termed its “autonomy.”

Funayama Shin’ichi 舩山信一 (1907–1994) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Shin’ichi Funayama
Abstract: Funayama Shin’ichi, perhaps the most important figure in Japanese philosophical materialism during and after the war, is also widely respected for his studies of Hegel and Feuerbach as well as for his historical studies of modern Japanese philosophy. After graduating in 1930 from Kyoto University, where he focused on the philosophies of Hegel and Nishida Kitarō*, and came under the influence of Miki Kiyoshi*, he was persuaded by Tosaka Jun* to join the Materialism Study Circle. Under the influence of the Communist party, the circle became increasingly politicized, leading to the investigation and arrest of some of its prominent members,

Fujita Masakatsu 藤田正勝 (1949– ) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Masakatsu Fujita
Abstract: After finishing his undergraduate and doctoral course work at Kyoto University in 1978, Fujita Masakatsu spent a number of years in Bochum, Germany, where he earned a doctorate in 1982 with a dissertation on the early Hegel’s philosophy of religion. After returning to Japan, Fujita continued his work on German idealism, while also increasingly turning his attention to modern Japanese philosophy, Nishida Kitarō* in particular. In addition to two monographs on Nishida’s thought, Fujita has edited and contributed to numerous volumes, among them The Philosophy of the Kyoto SchoolandJapanese Philosophy in the World. He is also a founding

Overview from: Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: Ever since Socrates accepted the Delphic oracle’s challenge to “know thyself,” the issue of personal identity has been part of the western philosophical repertoire. That issue typically broke down into two fundamental questions. The first was one of individual identity: who am I? The second was one of universal identity: what characterizes our humanity? Only in recent history has the West added questions of cultural, linguistic, and ethnic identity: for example, what does it mean to be French Canadian? Three circumstances have supported this rather new enterprise. The first is the rise of the social sciences, especially cultural anthropology, sociology,

Karatani Kōjin 柄谷行人 (1941– ) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Kōjin Karatani
Abstract: The writings of Karatani Kōjin, like those of many other literary critics today, cross disciplinary boundaries and challenge the presuppositions of academic philosophy. Educated in economics and English literature at Tokyo University, Karatani has exerted an influence far beyond his native land and original fields of training. At Yale University in the mid-1970s he worked alongside Paul de Man and Fredric Jameson on problems associated with formalism and structuralism. His Transcritique: On Kant and Marx(2003) was a seminal work for thinkers like Slavoj Zizek who practice philosophy as cultural criticism. Teaching at Columbia University since 1990 and occasionally at

Zeami Motokiyo 世阿弥元清 (1363–1443) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Motokiyo Zeami
Abstract: Born into a family of ‘ ⌜sarugaku⌝’ performers in the Nara basin, Zeami was trained in performance and playwriting by his father Kan’ami. Kan’ami’s successes in Kyoto gave Zeami the opportunity to learn about classical Japanesewakaand to acquire a competence in the most popular poetic genre of his day, linked verse orrenga. As a young man Zeami also learned about Chinese and Japanese legends and Buddhist doctrine, chiefly at Daigo-ji. When Kan’ami died in 1384, the leadership of his troupe was passed to his son, who seems to have built on his father’s successes in the capital, particularly

Book Title: Locating Life Stories-Beyond East-West Binaries in (Auto)Biographical Studies
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): PERKINS MAUREEN
Abstract: The thirteen essays in this volume come from Australia, China, India, Indonesia, Iraq, Malaysia, South Africa, and Hawai'i. With a shared focus on the specific local conditions that influence the ways in which life narratives are told, the authors engage with a variety of academic disciplines, including anthropology, history, media studies, and literature, to challenge claims that life writing is an exclusively Western phenomenon. Addressing the common desire to reflect on lived experience, the authors enlist interdisciplinary perspectives to interrogate the range of cultural forms available for representing and understanding lives.Contributors:Maria Faini, Kenneth George, Philip Holden, David T. Hill, Craig Howes, Bryan Kuwada, Kirin Narayan, Maureen Perkins, Peter Read, Tony Simoes da Silva, Mathilda Slabbert, Gerry van Klinken, Pei-yi Wu.30 illus.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqm51

NEVER THE TWAIN: from: Locating Life Stories
Author(s) PERKINS MAUREEN
Abstract: In today’s globalized, hyper-international, post-migration times, it may seem obvious that Kipling’s claim about East and West no longer holds true. Nevertheless, the East/West split is still widely held to have relevance, not only in popular stereotypes and vague generalizations, but even in academic scholarship across a range of fields, including psychology, literature, and some areas of politics. Witness Samuel Huntington’s Clash of Civilizations theory, which posits a West under increasing threat from the “civilization” of Islam. The field of life writing has also at times been prone to make generalizations about whole swathes of humanity, suggesting that “Western” life

LOCAL BOONS: from: Locating Life Stories
Author(s) NARAYAN KIRIN
Abstract: “Why did she never tell us this?” My stunned aunt Chanda-phui turned to look again at the small, brightly painted Shiva temple in the Kathiawar peninsula of Gujarat, western India. Moments before, a gray haired stranger had ambled in through the temple gate, settled on a ledge, and casually narrated the founding legend of this village temple: a legend that featured Chandaphui’s mother, my grandmother Ba. This soft-spoken man had most likely not imagined that he would be addressing Ba’s descendents to explode over eighty years of silence and unsettle our conceptions of ancestral identity.

Introduction from: Great Fool
Abstract: Generations have called this beggar-monk of the early nineteenth century “Ryōkan-san,” the informal suffix “ san” expressing affectionate respect. Only two other eminent Buddhist figures in Japanese history have received this particular honor: “Kōbō-san” or “Daishi-san,” Kūkai, the ninth-century founder of Shingon Buddhism, who is remembered in popular legends as a savior–miracle worker; and “Ikkyū-san,” the fifteenth-century Zen monk whose eccentric life-style has inspired numerous folk stories in which he is depicted as a marvelously quick-witted child novice. Ryōkan is a singularly attractive figure. Minakami Tsutomu, the celebrated contemporary novelist, explains why, despite countless earlier works examining the minutest details

Ryōkan of Mount Kugami from: Great Fool
Author(s) Haskel Peter
Abstract: Spend time at one of Japan’s busy commuter train stations and you will probably notice a bookstore crowded with silent rows of well-dressed “salarymen” and “salarywomen” browsing through an array of paperbacks and magazines. There, among the ubiquitous tabloids, the sex-and-violence comics, and the very latest Japanese and American bestsellers, you are likely to find several books devoted to the Zen master Taigu Ryōkan (1758–1831), a penniless monk whose life was spent in obscurity in Japan’s snow country, meditating, playing with children, and writing poems that vividly describe his world. He lived by begging in the villages and towns

Commemorating Ryōkan: from: Great Fool
Author(s) Abé Ryūichi
Abstract: Because of the vast amount of legendary literature, both oral and written, that has accumulated around Ryōkan since his death, it is often forgotten that the effort to document Ryōkan’s life and to preserve his writings had already begun during his lifetime (1758–1831). This brief survey identifies the key primary sources for Ryōkan’s biography, sketches the historical context in which the contemporaneous biographies of Ryōkan were composed, and illustrates the intertwining historical relationships that join these texts. Many of the sources exist only as unpublished manuscripts. In cases where there exist printed editions of these sources, whether partial or

Chapter 1 Relatives and Histories from: Relative Histories
Abstract: Family memoirs, also called “multigenerational” or “intergenerational auto/biographies”, have become ubiquitous in ethnic writing in the United States. Since Alex Haley’s dramatic (albeit controversial) Roots: The Saga of an American Family(1976), ethnic writers have increasingly used family stories to engage the history of immigration, adaptation, and presence in American society. Carole Ione’sPride of Family: Four Generations of American Women of Color(2004), Andrea Simon’sBashert: A Granddaughter’s Holocaust Quest(2002), Louise DeSalvo’sCrazy in the Kitchen: Foods, Feuds, and Forgiveness in an Italian American Family(2004), Lalita Tademy’s mirroringCane River(2001) andRed River(2007), and Victor

Chapter 7 We’re Everywhere: from: Relative Histories
Abstract: This examination of the family narratives of Asian diasporic subjects gives us a sociohistorical portrait of an increasingly dynamic phenomenon. These stories explain particular histories by juxtaposing public events with private experiences, to reveal the ways families construct (or reconstruct) identity within the experience of diaspora. Giving a sense of cohesion and closure to the lives of grandparents and parents can establish a sense of authority and meaning to the writer’s own life story. Access to these stories also allows readers to understand the development of particular ethnic communities, as the narratives support the production of a history and culture

COUNTING AND MANAGING from: On Diary
Abstract: In business, it is important to keep track of transactions and to know the status of your inventory. Which means making a record and dating it. Accounting serves two purposes: an internal purpose (business management based on full and accurate information) and an external purpose (to stand as evidence in the event of a dispute). This function remains unchanged through history, from the earliest known accounting systems in Chaldea or ancient Egypt right up until today, when our banks obligingly send us regular statements of credits

SPIRITUAL JOURNALS IN FRANCE FROM THE SIXTEENTH TO THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURIES from: On Diary
Abstract: 1) the “journal” or “diary” form, defined as a series of dated traces; that is, a practice of making notations extended over time: a single notation, such as Blaise Pascal’sMémorialdated 23 November 1654 “from about ten o’clock until about midnight” is not, properly speaking, a journal;

ON TODAYʹS DATE from: On Diary
Abstract: One should never start the New Year without plans, even modest ones. For some time now I have been thinking of doing a bit of research on the datingof diaries. And, for that matter, on dating things in general. It has probably already been done. I imagine that studies already exist, for letters at least, since the date is a basic element, along with the signature and the address. Let’s get straight to the point: the modern diary does not really become what it is until the day it begins to resemble the letter in that respect, when the

O MY PAPER! from: On Diary
Abstract: Clearly, this is an imaginary addressee, kept behind closed doors. But when did people start using the pretense of creating a private space by developing or deploying (and for whom?) a dialogic relationship with themselves?

THE DIARY AS ʺANTIFICTIONʺ from: On Diary
Abstract: I’ve just Googled the word “antifiction” and found that it’s free, at least for literary theory. A hip-hop group has staked a claim, but that’s it. No competition. These days, the minute you invent a word, you have to take out a patent. Serge Doubrovsky thought he had invented the word “autofiction” in 1977, but in 1998 his little cousin Marc Weitzmann claimed that Jerzy Kosinski had already invented the concept in 1965, something that Philippe Vilain has just taken the time to disprove in Défense de Narcisse(2005). I tell this amusing story because I created “antifiction” out of

DIARIES ON THE INTERNET: from: On Diary
Abstract: From October 1999 to October 2000 I did a study of a phenomenon that was just beginning to appear in the French-speaking world: online diaries. Today, in 2008, given the explosion of blogs, it is hard to believe that in November 1999, after a month of systematic searching on the Internet, I had found only sixty-nine diaries. Things are moving so fast that my study already has a sort of archeological value. At the time, I was dealing with a single shrub showing a few buds; today, it is a forest of trees in full bloom. I observed these diaries

LUCULLUS DINES WITH LUCULLUS from: On Diary
Abstract: I have been fascinated by Lucullus since I was a boy, and I thought of him the moment I was invited to this colloquium. Lucullus was a Roman general who fought against Mithradates, was a rival of Sylla, and had the wisdom not to seek supreme power when he returned to Rome victorious. Instead he enjoyed, with pomp and generosity, the immense fortune that he had amassed from the wars. He was a friend of Cicero and Cato. This is an anecdote about him as told by Plutarch:

Book Title: Making Transcendents-Ascetics and Social Memory in Early Medieval China
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Campany Robert Ford
Abstract: By the middle of the third century B.C.E. in China there were individuals who sought to become transcendents (xian)—deathless, godlike beings endowed with supernormal powers. This quest for transcendence became a major form of religious expression and helped lay the foundation on which the first Daoist religion was built. Both xian and those who aspired to this exalted status in the centuries leading up to 350 C.E. have traditionally been portrayed as secretive and hermit-like figures. This groundbreaking study offers a very different view of xian-seekers in late classical and early medieval China. It suggests that transcendence did not involve a withdrawal from society but rather should be seen as a religious role situated among other social roles and conceived in contrast to them. Robert Campany argues that the much-discussed secrecy surrounding ascetic disciplines was actually one important way in which practitioners presented themselves to others. He contends, moreover, that many adepts were not socially isolated at all but were much sought after for their power to heal the sick, divine the future, and narrate their exotic experiences. By the middle of the third century B.C.E. in China there were individuals who sought to become transcendents (xian)—deathless, godlike beings endowed with supernormal powers. This quest for transcendence became a major form of religious expression and helped lay the foundation on which the first Daoist religion was built. Both xian and those who aspired to this exalted status in the centuries leading up to 350 C.E. have traditionally been portrayed as secretive and hermit-like figures. This groundbreaking study offers a very different view of xian-seekers in late classical and early medieval China. It suggests that transcendence did not involve a withdrawal from society but rather should be seen as a religious role situated among other social roles and conceived in contrast to them. Robert Campany argues that the much-discussed secrecy surrounding ascetic disciplines was actually one important way in which practitioners presented themselves to others. He contends, moreover, that many adepts were not socially isolated at all but were much sought after for their power to heal the sick, divine the future, and narrate their exotic experiences. The book moves from a description of the roles of xian and xian-seekers to an account of how individuals filled these roles, whether by their own agency or by others’—or, often, by both. Campany summarizes the repertoire of features that constituted xian roles and presents a detailed example of what analyses of those cultural repertoires look like. He charts the functions of a basic dialectic in the self-presentations of adepts and examines their narratives and relations with others, including family members and officials. Finally, he looks at hagiographies as attempts to persuade readers as to the identities and reputations of past individuals. His interpretation of these stories allows us to see how reputations were shaped and even co-opted—sometimes quite surprisingly—into the ranks of xian. Making Transcendents provides a nuanced discussion that draws on a sophisticated grasp of diverse theoretical sources while being thoroughly grounded in traditional Chinese hagiographical, historiographical, and scriptural texts. The picture it presents of the quest for transcendence as a social phenomenon in early medieval China is original and provocative, as is the paradigm it offers for understanding the roles of holy persons in other societies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqqwh

Introduction from: Making Transcendents
Abstract: In China, before there was any such thing as a Daoist¹ priest or Daoist scripture, before Buddhist scriptures and images were brought in along the Silk Road or the coast, before there were monasteries where religious practitioners from either of these traditions gathered, there existed an only loosely cohesive tradition, a body of ideas and practices that I will call the quest for transcendence. Its main elements were already in place by the late third century B.C.E., well established by the turn of the first millennium, and increasingly well documented in sources dating from the second, third, and early fourth

CHAPTER 3 Deeper Repertoire Analysis: from: Making Transcendents
Abstract: Because the extrinsic functions of particular repertoire features can be complex and powerful, we may learn a great deal from deeper analysis of a single, important repertoire feature: the adept’s claimed avoidance of “grains” (referred to by duangu斷榖, “cutting off grains,” and other terms). Such dietary regimens, whatever their details, directed the adept to minimize or entirely avoid eating things considered to be staple foods in the surrounding culture and to subsist on something else instead, something that, we might say, was precultural or natural, often pureqi(ingested in breathing exercises) orqias available in certain rare

1 INTRODUCTION: from: The Melodrama of Mobility
Abstract: Although they necessarily fall at the beginnings of books, introductions strike me as foremost betwixt and between. With one arm they coax the readers, imploring them to read on, promising treasures in the pages that stretch ahead. With the other arm, they pull back, warning that the offerings are frail, that they falter here or there. Hubris makes her claims, just as humility softens, or even retracts, them. And ethnography, with its often resolutely local lens—focused, in the case of this book, on the talk of not even a dozen middle-aged South Korean women—similarly straddles diverse claims: at

6 PERSONALITY SPEAKING from: The Melodrama of Mobility
Abstract: In chapter 5 we left off on the difficulties of assessing social mobility—on the Laundress’s various accounts of educating her three sons: various for the extent to which she appreciates her extended family’s contributions, and various for her account of the meaning of that education in South Korea. In both senses, we observed how her view of her own role, or agency, varied. I argued in chapter 5 that the tension between structural constraints and her own contribution to things reflects larger social debates on the course and character of South Korea’s rapid social change or “development.” Similarly, in

8 ALL IN THE FAMILY: from: The Melodrama of Mobility
Abstract: In this chapter we follow kinship lines in and out of the nuclear family: to women’s siblings, siblings-in-law, and cousins of various distances. Increasingly in anthropology, kinship is understood not as a static map of all blood relations fanning out from “ego”—the center of the traditional kinship chart—but rather as a map, however lopsided and quixotic, that traces the odd assembly of persons who matter (Carsten 2000; Stone 2000). The kinship charts in this chapter, then, aim to trace the ties across which things, ideas, and images are exchanged, and through which meaning is made. The chapter focuses

2 In Search of a New Subject from: The Subject in Crisis in Contemporary Chinese Literature
Abstract: In this chapter, I contextualize the search for a new subject in post- Mao literature. I approach the task by concentrating on two areas pivotal to the unfolding of the historical project: theory and literary practice. First, I discuss the efforts made on the theoretical front, focusing in greater detail on the aesthetic theory of what China’s well-known literary theorist in the 1980s Liu Zaifu called “subjectivity in literature.” Second, I give an overview of post-Mao representation of the subject in the New Era, examining the literary, cultural, and ideological characteristics of three models of the subject: as a sociopolitical

6 Mirror of the Self: from: The Subject in Crisis in Contemporary Chinese Literature
Abstract: The image of the traveler I analyzed in chapter 5 reveals the frustration and confusion experienced by the ill-prepared youth on the post-Mao journey of reforms. But this journey does not only involve the Chinese self. Just as in the initial stage of the national journey in the late nineteenth century, the post-Mao move toward modernity has also been designed and implemented under an acute awareness of the need to position China in an increasingly globalized environment. Opening its door to the outside world to establish strategic and economic ties with the West was at the basis of China’s post-Mao

Epilogue from: The Subject in Crisis in Contemporary Chinese Literature
Abstract: The representation of the disenchanted agent constitutes a recent chapter in a convoluted national narrative that Chinese intellectuals have been writing since the country’s entry into the modern world. With its debut some eight decades ago, the humanist hero, one of the central tropes of this national narrative, embarked on a long and arduous journey only to come to a problematic stop in the last decade of the twentieth century. The sound and fury of the Enlightenment ideals having finally been drowned out in the din of modernization and commercialization in the 1990s, we can now look back on the

Book Title: The Phantom Heroine-Ghosts and Gender in Seventeenth-Century Chinese Literature
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): ZEITLIN JUDITH T.
Abstract: The "phantom heroine"—in particular the fantasy of her resurrection through sex with a living man—is one of the most striking features of traditional Chinese literature. Even today the hypersexual female ghost continues to be a source of fascination in East Asian media, much like the sexually predatory vampire in American and European movies, TV, and novels. But while vampires can be of either gender, erotic Chinese ghosts are almost exclusively female. The significance of this gender asymmetry in Chinese literary history is the subject of Judith Zeitlin’s elegantly written and meticulously researched new book. Zeitlin’s study centers on the seventeenth century, one of the most interesting and creative periods of Chinese literature and politically one of the most traumatic, witnessing the overthrow of the Ming, the Manchu conquest, and the subsequent founding of the Qing. Drawing on fiction, drama, poetry, medical cases, and visual culture, the author departs from more traditional literary studies, which tend to focus on a single genre or author. Ranging widely across disciplines, she integrates detailed analyses of great literary works with insights drawn from the history of medicine, art history, comparative literature, anthropology, religion, and performance studies. The Phantom Heroine probes the complex literary and cultural roots of the Chinese ghost tradition. Zeitlin is the first to address its most remarkable feature: the phenomenon of verse attributed to phantom writers—that is, authors actually reputed to be spirits of the deceased. She also makes the case for the importance of lyric poetry in developing a ghostly aesthetics and image code. Most strikingly, Zeitlin shows that the representation of female ghosts, far from being a marginal preoccupation, expresses cultural concerns of central importance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqx52

3 Ghosts and Historical Time from: The Phantom Heroine
Abstract: In the previous chapter I explored how the ghost was used in Chinese literature to stage a confrontation with mortality. Endowing the ghost with a voice capable of expressing subjective emotion, primarily through the vehicle of lyric poetry, opened a window onto the unknowable: what would it feel like to be dead, to be on the other side? Accordingly, these ghost stories represent death as an interior state of exile in which suffering and longing are intensified rather than annihilated. The paradigmatic sites of such stories are the cemetery, the unmarked grave, uninhabited wasteland; the paradigmatic poetic genres involved are

Book Title: Justice and Democracy-Cross-Cultural Perspectives
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Stepaniants Marietta
Abstract: Today democracy is increasingly recognized around the world as the only form of government with moral legitimacy. The problems of establishing and preserving truly democratic institutions, however, vary dramatically from culture to culture. Justice and Democracy explores these problems from a wide range of perspectives, theoretical and practical. It addresses problems related to the distortion of democratic decision-making by the gross disparities in wealth that arise in capitalist economies, and, in particular, focuses on the problems relating to the reconciliation of democratic values with the indigenous religious and social values of a culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqxhw

JUSTICE AND SOLIDARITY: from: Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Lara María Pía
Abstract: Today democracy is almost universally acclaimed as the criterion of legitimacy for political systems. The consensus regarding its worth is the result of painful historical experiences in this century. The revival of political philosophy in academic circles reflects a need to rethink some basic issues concerning what democracy is and how it should be conceived. Political philosophers are discussing whether democracy is merely a form of government, or a political way of life, and how proceduralism relates to questions concerning the good, or if it is even capable of dealing with such substantial issues. Communitarianism and feminism have raised many

DEMOCRACY AS CULTURE from: Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Tiles J. E.
Abstract: Of course, desires of all kinds, including the yearnings of the oppressed, are directed at objects which may not be adequately understood. To succeed in business is not necessarily to put financial worries behind one. To marry is not necessarily to live happily ever after. A government

THE IDEA OF DEMOCRACY AND THE TWILIGHT OF THE ELITE CULTURE IN MODERN CHINA from: Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Ying-shih Yü
Abstract: If ever a democratic republic similar to that of the United States came to be established in a country in which earlier a single man’s power had introduced administrative centralization and had made it something accepted by custom and by law, I have no hesitation in saying that in such a republic despotism would become more intolerable than in any of the absolute monarchies of Europe. One would have to go over into Asia to find anything with which to compare it.¹

DEWEY, CHINA, AND THE DEMOCRACY OF THE DEAD from: Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Ames Roger T.
Abstract: On May 1, 1919, John Dewey arrived in China to begin his twenty-six month lecture tour. Three days later, the May Fourth uprising occurred in Beijing, initiating one of the most crucial periods in the history of modern China. In the beginning, the New Culture movement was particularly open to novel ideas and programs urging social reform, and given that the central subject of Dewey’s numerous and wide-ranging lectures was to be that of “democracy,” circumstances appeared auspicious for the positive reception of Western democratic ideas. Indeed, Dewey’s influence was significant. Among other things, soon after his arrival, efforts were

THE IDEAL OF JUSTICE IN THE CONTEXT OF CULTURAL DIALOGUE from: Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Stepaniants Marietta
Abstract: The great integrative processes characterizing the twentieth century lead some people to forecast radical quantitative changes in the life of the world community, up to and including the emergence of a single planetary civilization with a new system of human values. Others, whose projections strike me as more probable, forecast the rise of a metacivilization that will become a kind of a cultural “common denominator,” and which, instead of absorbing or pushing aside national, regional civilizations, will rather stand above all of them. Under any scenario of future developments, it is quite evident that the expansion of contacts and cultural

WORLD CHANGE AND THE CULTURAL SYNTHESIS OF THE WEST from: Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Kim Yersu
Abstract: As a century and, indeed, a millennium draw to a close, we stand today perhaps at the most open moment in the history of humankind. The cultural synthesis that it has taken the West well over four hundred years of the departing millennium to forge and which brought power and wealth to the West, but also a pervasive improvement in the material condition of humankind at large during the waning century is losing its once matter-of-fact validity and persuasiveness. The world a hundred years ago was in a very fundamental sense one. The world was ruled by the West—which

Book Title: Dark Writing-Geography, Performance, Design
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Carter Paul
Abstract: We do not see empty figures and outlines; we do not move in straight lines. Everywhere we are surrounded by dapple; the geometry of our embodied lives is curviform, meandering, bi-pedal. Our personal worlds are timed, inter-positional, and contingent. But nowhere in the language of cartography and design do these ordinary experiences appear. This, Dark Writing argues, is a serious omission because they are designs on the world: architects and colonizers use their lines to construct the places where we will live. But the rectilinear streets, squares, and public spaces produced in this way leave out people and the entire environmental history of their coming together. How, this book asks, can we explain the omission of bodies from maps and plans? And how can we redraw the lines maps and plans use so that the qualitative world of shadows, footprints, comings and goings, and occasions—all essential qualities of places that incubate sociality—can be registered? In short, Dark Writing asks why we represent the world as static when our experience of it is mobile. It traces this bias in Enlightenment cartography, in inductive logic, and in contemporary place design. This is the negative critique. Its positive argument is that, when we look closely at these designs on the world, we find traces of a repressed movement form. Even the ideal lines of geometrical figures turn out to contain traces of earlier passages; and there are many forms of graphic design that do engage with the dark environment that surrounds the light of reason. How can this "dark writing"—so important to reconfiguring our world as a place of meeting, of co-existence and sustaining diversity—be represented? And how, therefore, can our representations of the world embody more sensuously the mobile histories that have produced it? Dark Writing answers these questions using case studies: the exemplary case of the beginnings of the now world-famous Papunya Tula Painting Movement (Central Australia) and three high-profile public place-making initiatives in which the author was involved as artist and thinker. These case studies are nested inside historical chapters and philosophical discussions of the line and linear thinking that make Dark Writing both a highly personal book and a narrative with wide general appeal.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqzx4

CHAPTER 2 Dark with Excess of Bright: from: Dark Writing
Abstract: If you were to tell an oceangoing yachtsman that coastlines were a construction of the mind, he would take you for a madman. The aim may be to keep a safe distance from the shore, but the slow film of low cliffs sliding aft is surely evidence enough of an empirically verifiable boundary between water and land. Common sense tells us that coasts have existed as long as shipwrecks, and to argue otherwise is, one would have thought, perverse. It’s true, if amazing, that up until the seventeenth century cartographers regularly depicted islands and continental edges using only symbols for

CHAPTER 8 Dark Writing: from: Dark Writing
Abstract: What is “dark writing”? In the first three chapters it referred to the trace of movement that is arrested in spatial representations. A history of journeys, encounters, inclinations, and leaps of faith can be shown to survive in maps and plans once their symbolic character is recognized, and it is these supplementary inscriptions that constitute dark writing. Dark writing alludes to the bodies that go missing in the action of representation. But it does not seek to replace them—to represent them. Aligned to their passage, it registers their passage graphically, as a pattern of traces. In the last three

Chapter 3 Kollumba Kang Wansuk, an Early Catholic Activist and Martyr from: Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Ledyard Gari
Abstract: Kollumba (Columba) Kang Wansuk (1761–1801), who perished in the great anti-Catholic persecution of 1801, is well known among a small number of historians of Korean Catholicism, but not among more general scholars of Korean history or in the wider field of Korean Studies. She should be more broadly recognized, since aside from her importance as an early Catholic, she was also a remarkable woman who worked in a cause that unfolded outside the home in public space, something that was hardly imaginable for a woman in her time and probably without precedent in earlier Korean history. She had a

Chapter 4 Chinese Protestant Literature and Early Korean Protestantism from: Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Oak Sung-Deuk
Abstract: Since the 1870s when Chinese Protestant literature began making inroads into Korea and especially since the 1880s when missionaries from the United States began arriving in the peninsula, Protestantism made rapid progress in Korea. By the end of the twentieth century, as Donald Baker and Timothy S. Lee discuss in this volume, every fifth South Korean was a Protestant. Many a factor—ranging from the sociopolitical to the religious—has been proffered to explain this rapid growth. This is all good and proper: no relevant factor should be neglected if we are fully to appreciate the complexity and richness of

Chapter 8 Mothers, Daughters, Biblewomen, and Sisters: from: Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Clark Donald N.
Abstract: In 1984, the publication of Jane Hunter’s study of women missionaries in China opened a new window of scholarly inquiry about the work and interactions of Western and Chinese Christian women, particularly single women, in the promotion of Christian institutions and opportunities for “native” women.¹ Especially notable is the field of women’s education. Less familiar is the work of evangelistic missionaries and their local counterparts. The contributions and achievements of the “agents and actors” in these areas are not in doubt. However, the practitioners remain objects for study rather than people to identify with, and missionaries—and again this seems

Chapter 10 Minjung Theology’s Biblical Hermeneutics: from: Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Kim Wonil
Abstract: As has been the case with liberation theologians of the Americas, it is therefore not surprising that minjungtheologians do their work by showing that the theology they are constructing is rooted in the Bible in some significant way, and therefore credible. While we can hardly label them biblicists, their reliance on the Bible as an indispensable primary source of their theology is unmistakable.

Chapter 12 The Division and Reunification of a Nation: from: Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Min Anselm Kyongsuk
Abstract: As we speak of reunification, North and South, as we Koreans have been increasingly doing in recent years, it is crucial to approach the issue comprehensively by considering as many dimensions of its challenge as we can, rather than narrowly focusing on immediate political issues. Reunification requires more than the establishment of a single government on the peninsula; it demands a long period of preparation and adjustment as well. It demands not only the unification of political, military, and economic systems and institutions but also the elimination of those elements of national consciousness that militate against reunification in many areas

Chapter 15 Beleaguered Success: from: Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Lee Timothy S.
Abstract: At the beginning of the twentieth century, Christians constituted less than 1 percent of the Korean population.¹ By the end of the century, according to a 1995 survey by the South Korean Statistics Office, Christians constituted 26.3 percent of the South Korean population, surpassing Buddhists, the next largest religious group, at 23.3 percent. In 1997, according to another major study, Christianity’s numerical edge over Buddhism was even larger—27.4 percent versus 18.3 percent. In both these studies, Protestants constitute the vast majority of Korean Christians: 75 percent of the Christian population (or 19.7 percent of the entire population) in the

Chapter 16 In Search of Healing: from: Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Chong Kelly H.
Abstract: South Korea has been receiving increasing recognition in recent years for the spectacular growth and success of Protestantism on its soil. Not surprisingly, this comes amid intensified interest on the part of both the Western academy and the public in the revitalization and expansion of religious “fundamentalisms” around the globe, including that of traditionalist Islam, evangelical and fundamentalist Protestantism in the United States, and Pentecostalism in various parts of Latin America.

Book Title: Cult, Culture and Authority-Princess Lieu Hanh in Vietnamese History
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): DROR OLGA
Abstract: Princess Liễu Hạnh, often called the Mother of the Vietnamese people by her followers, is one of the most prominent goddesses in Vietnamese popular religion. First emerging some four centuries ago as a local sect appealing to women, the princess’ cult has since transcended its geographical and gender boundaries and remains vibrant today. Who was this revered deity? Was she a virtuous woman or a prostitute? Why did people begin worshiping her and why have they continued? Cult, Culture, and Authority traces Liễu Hạnh’s cult from its ostensible appearance in the sixteenth century to its present-day prominence in North Vietnam and considers it from a broad range of perspectives, as religion and literature and in the context of politics and society. Over time, Liễu Hạnh’s personality and cult became the subject of numerous literary accounts, and these historical texts are a major source for this book. Author Olga Dror explores the authorship and historical context of each text considered, treating her subject in an interdisciplinary way. Her interest lies in how these accounts reflect the various political agendas of successive generations of intellectuals and officials. The same cult was called into service for a variety of ideological ends: feminism, nationalism, Buddhism, or Daoism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wr2wd

10 The Archeology of Anxiety: from: Heian Japan, Centers and Peripheries
Author(s) MOERMAN D. MAX
Abstract: The Heian period has often been characterized as a golden age of Japanese religious culture, one in which the Buddhist literature, painting, sculpture, and architecture produced at court are considered to have reached unprecedented heights. It is thus all the more surprising that in this time of cultural florescence many Buddhists, monastics and aristocrats alike, understood themselves to be living in an age of decay. According to their interpretation of Buddhist chronologies, the eleventh century marked the beginning of the end: the onset of mappō,the final degenerate age of the Dharma, or Buddhist Law, in which both the availability

Book Title: The Hermes Complex-Philosophical Reflections on Translation
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Folkart Barbara
Abstract: When Hermes handed over to Apollo his finest invention, the lyre, in exchange for promotion to the status of messenger of the gods, he relinquished the creativity that gave life to his words.The trade-off proved frustrating: Hermes chafed under the obligation to deliver the ideas and words of others and resorted to all manner of ruses in order to assert his presence in the messages he transmitted. His theorizing descendants, too, allow their pretentions to creatorship to interfere with the actual business of reinventing originals in another language.Just as the Hermes of old delighted in leading the traveller astray, so his descendants lead their acolytes, through thickets of jargon, into labyrinths of eloquence without substance.Charles Le Blanc possesses the philosophical tools to dismantle this empty eloquence: he exposes the inconsistencies, internal contradictions, misreadings, and misunderstandings rife in so much of the current academic discourse en translation, and traces the failings of this discourse back to its roots in the anguish of having traded authentic creativity for mere status.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wr8cv

HYMN TO HERMES from: The Hermes Complex
Abstract: Sing, O Muse, of Hermes, King of Cyllene and of Arcadia with its abundant flocks, sing of Hermes, the benevolent messenger of the gods, born of the august and comely Maia after Zeus had lain with her.

THE HERMES COMPLEX from: The Hermes Complex
Abstract: The abuse of language has spawned innumerable errors, and the pronouncements of celebrated philosophers are all too often the product of verbal incontinence. Systematic recourse to inflated language is invariably detrimental to the ideas to be conveyed. The speaker or writer who uses the word “sincerity” at the drop of a hat is likely to be suspected of being less than sincere: the indiscriminate use of words dulls their edge. Words are cheapened through overuse; like everything else that is beautiful and rare, they gain value when held in reserve. The wise man hoards his words, rather than spending them

Transfert généalogique et transfert migratoire: from: Transfert
Author(s) Goyer Nicolas
Abstract: 1) Roland Cahn écrit que « la mise en évidence du transfert fait surgir de l’ailleurs, de l’autrefois, en contrepoint de l’ici et maintenant du face-à-face et permet la reconnaissance et l’appropriation de cette “réalité psychique” » (Cahn 2002, p. 124¹). Cela indique bien les deux premiers « attracteurs » du déplacement et de l’élargissement du concept de transfert ici proposés, l’ailleurs et l’autrefois, à partir de nouveaux paramètres et matériaux anthropologiques. Il s’agira d’envisager, par-delà cette différenciation en deux, latiercéité des transferts, c’est-à-dire (plutôt que de les limiter à trois) leur singularisation non binaire, leur capacité de forme

Transfert de supports: from: Transfert
Author(s) Murray Timothy
Abstract: Il n’y a plus de sujets, mais des individuations dynamiques sans sujet, qui constituent des agencements collectifs. [...] Rien ne se subjective, mais des heccéités se dessinent d’après les compositions de puissances et d’affects non subjectivés. Carte des vitesses et des intensités. Nous avons déjà rencontré cette histoire des vitesses et des lenteurs : elles ont en commun de pousser par le milieu, d’être toujours-entre; elles ont en commun l’imperceptible,

“FORKED JUSTICE” from: American Indian Rhetorics of Survivance
Author(s) Hudson Angela Pulley
Abstract: IN the late 1820s, the Cherokee Nation was in the midst of a revolutionary series of sociopolitical changes that would forever change the course of its history. In fifty years, over half of all Cherokee lands had been ceded to the United States and the pressure for them to move to a territory west of the Mississippi River had been steadily increasing. The growing state of Georgia had a particularly strong desire to see the Cherokees removed, and in 1802, the federal government had assured Georgia leaders that the Indian title to remaining lands in and around Georgia would be

INSIDE THE CIRCLE, OUTSIDE THE CIRCLE from: American Indian Rhetorics of Survivance
Author(s) Redfield Karen A.
Abstract: I CAME to teach at the Lac Courte Oreilles Ojibwe Community College in January 1997. Along with teaching, I was going to collect student writing samples and conduct interviews with students and staff; this work was the foundation of my PhD dissertation. In addition to that project, I was contributing to the Center for English Learning and Achievement project, specifically in the area of Wisconsin literacy. Although I had never lived through a northern Wisconsin winter, or taught at a tribal college, I was fairly confident that I had packed all the necessities for winter survival and good fieldwork: my

AMERICAN INDIAN SOVEREIGNTY from: American Indian Rhetorics of Survivance
Author(s) dʹErrico Peter
Abstract: Inter Caetera, May 3, 1493—Among other works well pleasing to the Divine Majesty and cherished of our heart, this assuredly ranks highest, that in our times especially the Catholic faith and the Christian religion be exalted and everywhere increased and spread, that the health of souls be cared for and that barbarous nations be overthrown and brought to the faith itself. …Our beloved son Christopher Columbus, …

Book Title: Traces Of A Stream-Literacy and Social Change Among African American Women
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Royster Jacqueline Jones
Abstract: Traces of a Streamoffers a unique scholarly perspective that merges interests in rhetorical and literacy studies, United States social and political theory, and African American women writers. Focusing on elite nineteenth-century African American women who formed a new class of women well positioned to use language with consequence, Royster uses interdisciplinary perspectives (literature, history, feminist studies, African American studies, psychology, art, sociology, economics) to present a well-textured rhetorical analysis of the literate practices of these women. With a shift in educational opportunity after the Civil War, African American women gained access to higher education and received formal training in rhetoric and writing. By the end of the nineteenth-century, significant numbers of African American women operated actively in many public arenas.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrb9s

Chapter 6 A View from a Bridge: from: Traces Of A Stream
Abstract: In resonance with this epigraph,my goal here is to share knowledge and experience, not about the literate practices of African American women as in the previous chapters but about my own standpoint as a researcher and scholar in the process of completing this book. The first and most consistent challenges have come hand in hand with the very choosing of the work itself, that is, with identifying myself as a researcher who focuses on a multiply marginalized group; whose interests in this group center on topics not typically associated with the group, such as nonfiction and public discourse rather

4 The Making of the “New Intelligentsia” from: From Darkness To Light
Abstract: THE 1920S BOLSHEVIKS sought to turn the universities into “construction sites” for the fabrication of the New Man. The young state was determined to have the institutions of higher education function as the meeting place of the working class and its consciousness. Inevitably, the old intelligentsia proved an obstacle, insisting on civic liberties, occupying the universities, and refusing to turn them over to the proletariat. Lenin set the tone for the Bolshevik enterprise when he summarily rejected the idea that education could be indifferent to class. “The very term ‘apolitical,’” he said in November 1920, “is a piece of bourgeois

Book Title: Interpretation-Ways of Thinking about the Sciences and the Arts
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Wolters Gereon
Abstract: The act of interpretation occurs in nearly every area of the arts and sciences. That ubiquity serves as the inspiration for the fourteen essays of this volume, covering many of the domains in which interpretive practices are found. Individual topics include: the general nature of interpretation and its forms; comparing and contrasting interpretation and hermeneutics; culture as interpretation seen through Hegel's aesthetics; interpreting philosophical texts; methodologies for interpreting human action; interpretation in medical practice focusing on manifestations as indicators of disease; the brain and its interpretative, structured, learning and storage processes; interpreting hybrid wines and cognitive preconceptions of novel objects; and the importance of sensory perception as means of interpreting in the case of dry German Rieslings.In an interesting turn, Nicholas Rescher writes on the interpretation of philosophical texts. Then Catherine Wilson and Andreas Blank explicate and critique Rescher's theories through analysis of the mill passage from Leibniz's Monadology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrd67

5 Davidson and Gadamer on Plato’s Dialectical Ethics from: Interpretation
Author(s) Gjesdal Kristin
Abstract: Over the past twenty years, there has been an increasing interest in the relation between Donald Davidson’s theory of radical interpretation and Hans-Georg Gadamer’s philosophical hermeneutics. Whereas some of this interest has been geared toward the intellectual horizon and heritage of Davidson’s work,¹ philosophers such as Richard Rorty and John McDowell have taken Gadamer’s hermeneutics to suggest a possible avenue beyond what they perceive to be the limitations of Davidson’s theory.² This essay approaches the Davidson-Gadamer relation from a different point of view. My concern is not to ask about the proper location or possible limitations of Davidson’s philosophy, but

11 Interpreting Medicine: from: Interpretation
Author(s) Borck Cornelius
Abstract: Ars longa vita brevis—Hippocrates’ famous aphorism once acquired a surprising new meaning in the hands of a freshman at the University of Heidelberg’s Medical School.¹ Taking the compulsoryIntroduction to Medical Terminologyclass, the student translated: “The difficult art to shorten life.” Apparently, the student was lost in translation, proposing an audacious interpretation where the proper meaning had escaped him. Beyond the pun, the mistaken interpretation may offer a suitable starting point, a first hypothesis for entering a discussion about forms of interpretation in clinical practice: in the more than two thousand years since Hippocrates, the art of healing

14 Classifying Dry German Riesling Wines: from: Interpretation
Author(s) Sautter Ulrich
Abstract: Reflection on olfactory and gustatory perceptions and their epistemological status has not been playing a major role in the philosophical tradition. Most classical philosophers deal with the senses of smell and taste rather parenthetically and with a sense of flippancy—if at all.¹ Sometimes philosophical texts cite phenomena of smell and taste where exemplification in factually unrelated, particularly abstract contexts is needed²—as if the difficulties of abstraction might be evened out by choosing examples from an area of life that is surrounded by a sense of light-heartedness and concreteness. But almost no classical text of philosophy has dealt with

Green Things in the Garbage: from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) SANDILANDS CATRIONA
Abstract: Where we perceive a chain of events, [the angel] sees one single catastrophe which keeps piling wreckage upon wreckage and hurls it in front of his feet. The angel would like to stay, awaken the dead, and make whole what has been smashed. But a storm is blowing in from Paradise; it has got caught in his wings with such violence that the angel can no longer close

Raymond Williams: from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) RYLE MARTIN
Abstract: Raymond Williams was born in 1921 and died in 1988. Many would regard him as the single-most important critic of literature and culture at work in postwar Britain. He was a major figure on the British intellectual left: “by far the most commanding figure,” in Terry Eagleton’s assessment.¹ Working initially in university adult education, at the age of forty he was appointed a Lecturer, and subsequently became Professor of Drama, at Cambridge. He made the ancient university a new base for his continued extramural commitments: to the critical public discussion of ideas, to the political Left, to his native Wales

Martin Heidegger, D. H. Lawrence, and Poetic Attention to Being from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) NORRIS TREVOR
Abstract: The thought of the German philosopher Martin Heidegger (1889–1976) is a challenge to thinking because it asks us to imagine being differently. His works are not straightforward and do not set out an explicit program for social change but rather invite a shift in attention and conception of self in relation to world, time, and the nature of knowledge. This shift involves refusing a major aspect of our late modernity, that is, the ubiquity and dominance of forms of abstract and theoretical knowledge. Heidegger wishes to return this knowledge to its proper place, grounded in pragmatic relationships that respond

The Ecological Irigaray? from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) COHOON CHRISTOPHER
Abstract: It could appear that the work of Luce Irigaray bears little relevance to environmental thought.¹ Irigaray is a feminist philosopher of sexual difference, after all, and the injustices that concern her are explicitly social and political. Most prominently, her work has sought to undermine the dominance of masculine culture by exposing the systematic exclusion of women from psychoanalytic theory and traditional Western philosophy; to discover positive forms of feminine subjectivity; and to imagine social and political relationships that advance beyond masculine monism and inaugurate a “culture of two subjects”—man and woman in their irreducible difference.² And yet, as we

Cybernetics and Social Systems Theory from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) BERGTHALLER HANNES
Abstract: Aldo Leopold’s A Sand County Almanacopens with a walk in the hills of southwestern Wisconsin, in January, during a brief spell of thaw. The narrator follows the track of a skunk: “[It] leads straight across-country. . . . I follow, curious to deduce his state of mind and appetite. . . . In January one may follow a skunk track . . . with only an occasional and mild digression into other doings. . . . There is time not only to see who has done what, but to speculate why.”¹

Book Title: Textual Intimacy-Autobiography and Religious Identities
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): KORT WESLEY A.
Abstract: Given its affinity with questions of identity, autobiography offers a way into the interior space between author and reader, especially when writers define themselves in terms of religion. In his exploration of this "textual intimacy," Wesley Kort begins with a theorization of what it means to say who one is and how one's self-account as a religious person stands in relation to other forms of self-identification. He then provides a critical analysis of autobiographical texts by nine contemporary American writers-including Maya Angelou, Philip Roth, and Anne Lamott-who give religion a positive place in their accounts of who they are. Finally, in disclosing his own religious identity, Kort concludes with a meditation on several meanings of the word assumption.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrjgw

2 NARRATIVE AND SELF-ACCOUNTS from: Textual Intimacy
Abstract: A further question about self-accounts that is worth raising concerns the importance of narrative discourse for self-accounts. This question takes two forms. The first and more particular form is whether or not giving a self-account requires narrative. Does the act of telling you who I am and narrative discourse have a natural or necessary interdependence? The second form of the question, which arises from the first, is the cultural standing of narrated self-accounts. Are they, for example, specific to our own culture, or can they be thought of as constituting a more general human phenomenon?

Book Title: Doing Justice to Mercy-Religion, Law, and Criminal Justice
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Jung Kevin
Abstract: Authored by legal practitioners, activists, and theorists in addition to theologians and ethicists, the essays collected here are informed by timeless principles, and yet they could not be timelier. The trend in sentencing moves toward an increased severity, and the number of incarcerated people in the United States is at an all-time high. In the half-decade since 9/11, moreover, homeland security has established itself as a permanent fixture in our lives. In this atmosphere, the current volume seeks initially to clarify how justice and mercy intertwine in relation to a number of issues, such as rehabilitation, the death penalty, domestic violence, and war crimes. Exploring the legal, philosophical, and theological grounds for mercy in our courts, the discussion then moves to the practical ways in which mercy may be implemented.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrm3g

Introduction from: Doing Justice to Mercy
Abstract: Recent events on both domestic and international fronts have underscored how pressing issues of crime and punishment are reawakening awareness and discussion, from the dinner table to the highest centers of government. The September 11 attacks and the subsequent war on terror and

Race, Class, and the Development of Criminal Justice Policy from: Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) MAUER MARC
Abstract: The profound racial disparities that permeate the criminal justice system are by now distressingly prevalent and well documented. The unprecedented rise in the prison population over the past three decades—a six-fold increase, leading to the incarceration of more than 2 million Americans—has been accompanied by widespread racial effects. The figures are well known, but shocking nonetheless: one of every eight black males in the 25–34 age group is locked up on any given day, and 32 percent of black males born today can expect to spend time in a state or federal prison if current trends continue.¹

Critical Response to Mark Lewis Taylor from: Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) COAKLEY SARAH
Abstract: Mark Taylor writes a very powerful and passionate essay, in which he has gone significantly beyond the central themes of his recent book The Executed God¹ by bringing the notion of “organized terror” in the American prison system into relation now to other forms of (so-called) “imperial” terror and reactions thereto. In what follows I shall be raising four specific questions about theadvisabilityof his particular strategies for critical response to the current prison system in the United States; as I do so, however, I hope it will be clear that I share with utter conviction Taylor’s horror at

Criminal Justice and Responsible Mercy from: Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) SCHWEIKER WILLIAM
Abstract: The American public is increasingly aware of problems in the United States criminal justice system as well as the massive social ills—poverty, racism, abuse—that motivate and yet are concealed by the system. More and more individuals, especially young men from ethnic and racial minorities, populate the prison system. In 1999, 1.5 million children in the United States had at least one parent in prison. What is more, even those who complete their sentences are marked for life: background checks, employment problems, family difficulties, and the like. Cities and states continue to build prisons in the hope of stemming

Postscript from: Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) SCHWEIKER WILLIAM
Abstract: This volume has offered a feast of ideas and concerns about some of the most pressing issues our society now faces. It has given us a glimpse of the human face of suffering and the longing for justice and mercy in a harsh and violent world. The different perspectives have addressed many facets of justice and mercy in the criminal justice system.

3 “No Admittance”: from: Locating the Destitute
Abstract: The approach to identity as an outcome of spatial practice constitutes one of the most important aspects of V. S. Naipaul’s semi-autobiographical novel A House for Mr. Biswas(1961). This novel is a prime example of the correlation between spatial theory and Caribbean postcolonial discourse and draws into sharper focus a number of questions that I have been raising. The novel consists of a central triad—space, self, and writing—that, in its triple orientation, allows me to examine the material significance of the house, its impact on identity, and its symbolic relevance in the protagonist’s quest for autonomy and

5 Heterotopia of Old Age in Beryl Gilroy’s Frangipani House from: Locating the Destitute
Abstract: In this chapter I explore the figure of the house as an exclusionary space where the allegedly burdensome and deviant aspects of social life are supposed to be safely contained. One such dimension of social reality is old age, which we—uncertain how to treat its gradual loss of productivity and social function—increasingly isolate. Homes for the elderly provide the space where visible traces of old age are conveniently kept out of sight. Through Beryl Gilroy’s Frangipani House(1986), I explore this marginalization of old age by means of heterotopia, a concept that allows us a critical view of

Book Title: Essays from the Edge-Parerga and Paralipomena
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): JAY MARTIN
Abstract: All of these efforts can be considered what Arthur Schopenhauer called, to borrow the title of one of his most celebrated collections, "parerga and paralipomena." As essays from the edges of major projects, they illuminate Jay's major arguments, elaborate points made only in passing in the larger texts, and explore ideas farther than would have been possible, given the focus of the larger works themselves. The result is a lively, diverse offering from an extraordinary intellect.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrp5b

Introduction from: Essays from the Edge
Abstract: In 1851, the German philosopher Arthur Schopenhauer gathered together two volumes of his scattered essays, aphorisms, dialogues, and random thoughts and published them under the recherché title Parerga and Paralipomena.¹ Far more than his masterwork of 1819,The World as Will and Representation,it reached a surprisingly wide readership and made his reputation. The 1850s were, after all, a grim period of political reentrenchment following the failures of the revolutions of 1848, and the time was ripe for the sour pessimism and disillusionment with reason expressed in his philosophy of the irrational will. If any progress were to be made,

Is Experience Still in Crisis? from: Essays from the Edge
Abstract: Let me begin with two quotations: (1) “The identity of experience in the form of a life that is articulated and possesses internal continuity—and that life was the only thing that made the narrator’s stance possible—has disintegrated. One need only note how impossible it would be for someone who participated in the war to tell stories about it the way people used to tell stories about their adventures.”¹ (2) The war is “as totally divorced from experience as is the functioning of a machine from the movement of the body, which only begins to resemble it in pathological

Mourning a Metaphor from: Essays from the Edge
Abstract: ”Revolution,” it should be recalled, began its extraordinary career as a metaphor borrowed from astronomy, which had only recently revised its understanding of what in the heavens really revolved around what.¹ In medieval Latin, revolutiomeant a return or rolling back, often implying a cyclical revolving in time. This was its meaning, for example, in Copernicus’s famous treatise of 1543De revolutionibus orbium coelestium.Although its earliest political uses have been detected in mid-fourteenth-century Italy, the term did not come into its own in the lexicon of politics until the upheavals of seventeenth-century England, when “reformation,” losing its power as

Visual Parrhesia? from: Essays from the Edge
Abstract: Cézanne’s famous assertion in a letter to a friend in 1905, “I owe you the truth in painting and I will tell it to you,” was first brought into prominence by the French art historian Hubert Damisch in his 1978 Huit thèses pour (ou contre?) une sémiologie de la peintureand then made into the occasion for a widely discussed book by Jacques Derrida,La verité en peinture,later the same year.¹ In that work, Derrida challenged the distinction between work and frame,ergonandparergon,that had allowed philosophers like Kant to establish an autonomous, disinterested realm for art,

Aesthetic Experience and Historical Experience from: Essays from the Edge
Abstract: Ever since Homer—or the gaggle of bards who have come down to us under that name—sat down to commemorate in epic poetry the Greek siege of Troy, artists have been inspired to find in historical events the stuff of literature. Indeed, until Heinrich Schliemann’s excavations in Asia Minor in the 1870s, the Iliadwas generally assumed to be only fictional, with scant basis in historical fact. We now know it to be a mixture of myth, legend, and semireliable memory of real events, with the precise balance still a source of scholarly conjecture. Even when the first acknowledged

Can There Be National Philosophies in a Transnational World? from: Essays from the Edge
Abstract: In June of 2000, the Times Literary Supplementpublished an anguished commentary by the Polish philosopher Adam J. Chmielewski entitled “Looking Westward: The Submissiveness of Polish Philosophy.”¹ Reflecting on the demise of Marxism as a universalist lingua franca for Polish intellectuals, indeed for all of their counterparts in Eastern Europe, he noted that since 1989, they have been frantically searching for a new guiding paradigm, a new way to orient themselves in an unfamiliar global intellectual landscape. Without a reigningWeltanschauungthey have felt spiritually bereft. Inevitably, he lamented, they have turned to the West for answers, for no original

1990 from: Essays from the Edge
Abstract: Of all the phenomena that register the distance between history as lived experience and history as written record, nothing is more emphatic than the concept of a historical period. When we live through the happenings that constitute our lives, we are never able to know for sure if we inhabit a meaningful epoch of historical time, for without terminal closure and the crossing of a threshold no epoch is yet defined. We cannot see beyond our current horizon to know what the future landscape will look like. Even the apparently mechanical and uniform temporality of centuries, which so often seems

Allons enfants de l’humanité from: Essays from the Edge
Abstract: There can be fewer more appalling signs of our increasingly appalling times than the imprisonment without legal redress or terminal sentence of six hundred or so “enemy combatants” in the Guantánamo Bay prison run by the American government. Outside the legal jurisdiction of any country, not even that of the one doing the imprisoning, they are in what can rightfully be called a dystopian nonterritory, where there is no semblance of the human rights whose virtues America so often preaches to the world. National security, we are told, trumps any other considerations in the time of war, even when that

Intellectual Family Values from: Essays from the Edge
Abstract: With the death on September 12, 2002, of William Phillips and the subsequent suspension of the Partisan Review,the publication he had edited since its founding in 1934, an era in American intellectual life, it has widely been acknowledged, came to a close. The quintessential engaged “little magazine,” whose circulation never passed fifteen thousand, was no longer viable in today’s cultural marketplace, where cutting-edge ideas are more likely to be expressed in the specialized jargon of esoteric academics than in the conversational prose of public intellectuals. The face-to-face interaction of friends and former friends, often entangled in webs of personal

Introduction from: Postcolonial Francophone Autobiographies
Abstract: Postcolonial Francophone Autobiographies: From Africa to the Antillesreflects a broad spectrum of Francophone autobiographies, examining the works of such authors as Valentin Mudimbé from the Democratic Republic of the Congo; Amadou Hampâté Bâ from Mali (formerly French Sudan); Kesso Barry from Guinea; Patrick Chamoiseau and Raphaël Confiant from Martinique; and Maryse Condé from Guadeloupe. To date, there has been a paucity of scholarship in the field of comparative Francophone studies. With its rich geographical and cultural coverage of Africa and the diaspora, this study fills an important gap by juxtaposing works from two colonized entities as they relate to

CHAPTER 7 A Rustling in the Woods: from: Religion after Religion
Abstract: The most influential and brilliant students of Hermann Cohen (1842—1918), the neo-Kantian Jewish philosopher of Marburg, largely rejected one of his fundamental views on Judaism. Opposing his characterization of Judaism as the religion definitively opposed to myth—Judaism as virtually identical with a demythologized Enlightenment rationality—these post-Cohenian thinkers turned to a view of myth as a creative and living force. At least three Cohen students, Franz Rosenzweig, Ernst Bloch, and Ernst Cassirer, wrote revolutionary works that innovatively reassessed the relations between myth, the History of Religions, and Judaism. These figures were joined by a much larger cohort in

INTRODUCTION from: Liberal Languages
Abstract: The term “liberalism” has always enjoyed a separate existence away from the constricting, formal, and austere world of political concepts and theories. To be liberal evokes generosity, tolerance, compassion, being fired up with the promise of open, unbounded spaces within which the free play of personality can be aired. Yet the clues to liberalism’s political nature are not hard to detect. Generosity suggests the dispensing of bounties beyond the call of duty—to prioritise justice as the first liberal virtue is unnecessarily reductionist. Tolerance suggests a flexibility, a movement, a diversity—of ideas, of language, and of conceptual content—that

CHAPTER FIVE J. A. Hobson as a Political Theorist from: Liberal Languages
Abstract: J. A. Hobson was one of the half-dozen most influential political thinkers in late-nineteenth—early-twentieth-century Britain, a fact that even the partial revival of his fortunes has infrequently brought to light. The main reason for this oversight has two complementary facets: Hobson’s contribution lay chiefly in his formulation of a liberal version of British welfare thought, an ideological genre that until recently was accorded insufficient recognition; and, conversely, recourse to conventional modes of political theorising, utilising existing traditions, or referring to the constructs of leading individuals, was not paramount in his work. It is symptomatic that in the various reading

CHAPTER SEVEN Eugenics and Progressive Thought: from: Liberal Languages
Abstract: The issues raised by eugenics are of more than passing interest for the student of political thought. In itself a minor offshoot of turn-of-the-century sociobiological thought that never achieved ideological “takeoff” in terms of influence or circulation, there was certainly more in eugenics than nowadays meets the eye. The following pages propose to depart from the oversimplistic identification of eugenics, as political theory, with racism or ultraconservatism and to offer instead two alternative modes of interpretation.¹ On the one hand, eugenics will be portrayed as an exploratory avenue of the social reformist tendencies of early-twentieth-century British political thought. On the

CHAPTER EIGHT True Blood or False Genealogy: from: Liberal Languages
Abstract: When tony blair traced some of the ideational roots of New Labour back to early-and mid-twentieth-century liberals, as well as when he put out organisational feelers of cooperation toward the Liberal Democrats, he dared make explicit a central feature of British progressivism. In contrast to the overt politics of confrontation and the tactics of exclusion that have typified the public face of British political culture, with its assumption of a one-to-one association between party and political values, the ideology of social and political reform has cut across party boundaries ever since Labour was formed. Although liberalism and social democracy have

CHAPTER ELEVEN Political Theory and the Environment: from: Liberal Languages
Abstract: Consider sitting on a tree. Every year in Oxford hundreds of human beings sit on trees. Most of them are children, often in their backgardens, scrambling over branches, hiding in their tree houses. Some are adults, out for a walk, looking for a view, or a place to rest for a while when the ground is wet. Sitting on trees is a recreational activity, and has been so since time immemorial. Not long ago, one group of adults chose to sit on trees on the site of the Oxford-Business-School-to-be. Was that a recreational activity? I doubt it. The act was

2 BEGINNINGS TO 300 B.C.E.: from: Birth of the Symbol
Abstract: When porphyry refers (repeatedly) to Homer’s cave of the nymphs as a σύμβολου of certain hidden meanings, he is using the term in a sense that appears only in the postclassical period in ancient Greece. The early Greek term meant something quite different—so different, in fact, that we will be forced to wonder just how it developed a literary sense at all. These earliest manifestations of the Greek symbol provide insights into the trajectories the notion later follows. Of course, they do not and cannot be asked to provide some authentic glimpse of the “true” or “real” symbol, as

7 MOONSTONES AND MEN THAT GLOW: from: Birth of the Symbol
Abstract: Proclus was born in Constantinople, where his family was located temporarily on business, on February 8, in 410 or 412 c.e., two years after Alaric sacked Rome.¹ We know the day and month of his birth with relative precision because of his interests in the astrological arts. He received a thorough classical training in Lycia, Alexandria, and Constantinople before assuming the mantle of “successor” to the Platonic Academy in Athens.² He took his place in a two-centuries-old tradition of Neoplatonic thinkers, including Plotinus, Porphyry, Iamblichus, Syrianus, and others, who styled themselves as Plato’s true heirs.

I Passage and Accident: from: Available Light
Abstract: It is a shaking business to stand up in public toward the end of an improvised life and call it learned. I didn’t realize, when I started out, after an isolate childhood, to see what might be going on elsewhere in the world, that there would be a final exam. I suppose that what I have been doing all these years is piling up learning. But, at the time, it seemed to me that I was trying to figure out what to do next, and hold off a reckoning: reviewing the situation, scouting out the possibilities, evading the consequences, thinking

VI The Strange Estrangement: from: Available Light
Abstract: In the opening paragraphs of the introduction of his Philosophical Papers, Charles Taylor confesses himself to be in the grip of an obsession.¹ He is, he says, a hedgehog, a monomaniac endlessly polemicizing against a single idea—“the ambition to model the study of man on the natural sciences.” He calls this idea many things, most often “naturalism” or “the naturalistic world view,” and he sees it virtually everywhere in the human sciences. The invasion of those sciences by alien and inappropriate modes of thought has conduced toward the destruction of their distinctiveness, their autonomy, their effectiveness, and their relevance.

XI The World in Pieces: from: Available Light
Abstract: Political theory, which presents itself as addressing universal and abiding matters concerning power, obligation, justice, and government in general and unconditioned terms, the truth about things as at bottom they always and everywhere necessarily are, is in fact, and inevitably, a specific response to immediate circumstances. However cosmopolitan it may be in intent, it is, like religion, literature, historiography, or law, driven and animated by the demands of the moment: a guide to perplexities particular, pressing, local, and at hand.

12 BRUNO’S NATURAL PHILOSOPHY from: Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: Ever since bruno started to be studied seriously as a key figure in the European philosophical tradition, there has been uncertainty as to what kind of philosopher he was. John Toland proposed him to the more radical components of the Enlightenment culture of his time as a fundamentally anti-hierarchical thinker, drawing out all the most subversive implications of his post-Copernican, infinite cosmology, with its relativization of values, not only spatial but also social, political, historical, and religious.¹ But when Friedrich Heinrich Jacobi included some pregnant passages from one of Bruno’s major philosophical dialogues in Italian, De la causa, principio et

13 BRUNO’S USE OF THE BIBLE IN HIS ITALIAN PHILOSOPHICAL DIALOGUES from: Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: This chapter originated with the realization that during the composition of his philosophical works, Giordano Bruno made a constant and expert use of numerous Biblical texts. This may seem surprising, at first sight, in a philosopher noted above all, in his own days and in ours, for his heretical opinions with respect to the fundamental doctrines of both the Hebrew and the Christian religions. Nonetheless, Bruno’s Biblical references do not appear to have a merely rhetorical or ornamental function, nor do they express a purely ironical or satirical attitude toward the Biblical texts, although they are certainly eccentric with respect

15 BRUNO AND METAPHOR from: Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: Giordano bruno was born only five years after the first publication of Copernicus’s De revolutionibusin 1543, and only thirty-odd years after Martin Luther’s excommunication from the Catholic Church had divided Europe and its culture into two militantly hostile factions. Bruno’s lifetime in the second half of the sixteenth century thus covers a vital if often turbulent moment of cultural transition, which would radically affect the history of both science and the humanities. This chapter will primarily be concerned with his thinking about language, and especially with his thoughts about metaphor, thus aligning itself with an interpretative model of early

EPILOGUE from: Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: In one of his italian philosophical dialogues written and published in London in 1584, De l’infinito,universo et mondi, Giordano Bruno described his life’s work as an attempt to define a “tranquil universal philosophy”: a philosophy that he imagined as a peaceful swim through the infinite ocean of universal being.¹ This was Bruno’s third philosophical dialogue written in Italian. In it, he criticizes the fifteenth-century Catholic cardinal, Nicholas Cusanus, who anticipated him in proposing an infinite universe. Cusanus, however, proposed a dualistic universe of Aristotelian origin and with clearly Christian and neo-Thomistic implications, divided between spheres of being of intense

Book Title: The Aesthetics of Mimesis-Ancient Texts and Modern Problems
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Halliwell Stephen
Abstract: Far from providing a static model of artistic representation, mimesis has generated many different models of art, encompassing a spectrum of positions from realism to idealism. Under the influence of Platonist and Aristotelian paradigms, mimesis has been a crux of debate between proponents of what Halliwell calls "world-reflecting" and "world-simulating" theories of representation in both the visual and musico-poetic arts. This debate is about not only the fraught relationship between art and reality but also the psychology and ethics of how we experience and are affected by mimetic art.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rn67

Chapter Five Inside and Outside the Work of Art: from: The Aesthetics of Mimesis
Abstract: The understanding of Aristotelian mimesis has suffered almost as much at the hands of its ostensible friends as at those of its avowed opponents. While the philosopher’s concept of mimesis has played a vital role in the long story of Western attitudes to artistic representation, that role has often been mediated through the reworking and misinterpretation of his ideas, especially those found in the Poetics. The critical balance of the treatise has been prejudicially weighted down, at different times, either on the side of a doctrinal didacticism or, equally distortingly, on that of a formalist creed of pure artistic autonomy.

Chapter Eight Music and the Limits of Mimesis: from: The Aesthetics of Mimesis
Abstract: The nature of music is perhaps the most intractable, as well as one of the most fascinating, of all problems in aesthetics. It has been debated voluminously and often polemically since antiquity, and far from becoming worn out the subject has in recent years seen a spate of publications from contemporary philosophers, especially in the English-speaking world.¹ However intellectualized the questions that cluster around the topic may have become, their roots are unmistakably “anthropological.” Every known human culture not only possesses music but develops ways of using it that consistently manifest both an association with special categories of events and

Chapter Twelve An Inheritance Contested: from: The Aesthetics of Mimesis
Abstract: Despite, or perhaps in part because of, its importance and influence within the history of aesthetics, the current status of mimesis as a concept (or family of concepts) in the theory of art is contentious and unstable. In an age when talk of representation has become increasingly subject to both ideological and epistemological suspicion, mimesis is, for many philosophers and critics, little more than a broken column surviving from a long-dilapidated classical edifice, a sadly obsolete relic of former certainties. According to such convictions, even the Renaissance and neoclassical revival of mimeticism was a phase of thought whose structure of

Book Title: A Theory of the Trial- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Burns Robert P.
Abstract: Burns explores the rich narrative structure of the trial, beginning with the lawyers' opening statements, which establish opposing moral frameworks in which to interpret the evidence. In the succession of witnesses, stories compete and are held in tension. At some point during the performance, a sense of the right thing to do arises among the jurors. How this happens is at the core of Burns's investigation, which draws on careful descriptions of what trial lawyers do, the rules governing their actions, interpretations of actual trial material, social science findings, and a broad philosophical and political appreciation of the trial as a unique vehicle of American self-government.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rnt9

I The Received View of the Trial from: A Theory of the Trial
Abstract: What is a trial? The simplicity of the question is deceptive. Since Socrates began posing such “What is . . .” questions about human practices, we have learned that these apparently straightforward factual questions quickly open out into an ideal realm whose limits are always indeterminate. We do not really understandwhat a trial is unless we understand the interrelation between what we may only provisionally call “what a trial is” and “what a trial can aspire to be.” For us, “factual” questions become practical questions, such as, “How should we shape our public life?”

II The Trial’s Linguistic Practices from: A Theory of the Trial
Abstract: One of the fixed points of the social scientific study of the trial is that the juror makes his or her decision after an intense encounter with the evidence, and it is the evidence in the case, more than any other factor, that determines the outcome.³ The juror performs his or her task only after this highly structured language-centered event: the trial itself. The trial is usually over immediately after this encounter, since jury deliberation “changes” the result in fewer than one in ten cases. The initial majority almost always prevails.⁴ Before we focus in greater detail on the kinds

Introduction from: Freud, the Reluctant Philosopher
Abstract: Freud’s concept—whereby “man lives with his unconscious, not by it” (Meissner 2003, 214)—has vexed critics since its inception. That humans possess a vast reservoir of memories, perceptions, and forms of judgment cannot be denied. Indeed, Freud has been credited with an important role in setting the research agenda for contemporary cognitive psychology (e.g., Pribram and Gill 1976; Erdelyi 1985; Modell 2006; Westen, Weinberger, and Bradley 2007) and many aspects of cognitive science (e.g., Bilder and Lefever 1998; Smith 1999a; Wilson 2002). But the scientific standing of psychoanalysis and of its therapeutic claims has been severely compromised both by

CHAPTER ONE Introduction from: Reading Renunciation
Abstract: R eading Renunciationexplores the exegetical problem confronting early Christian ascetic writers who wished to ground their renunciatory program in the Bible. Their “problem” arose because the Bible only sporadically supported their agenda; many verses appeared rather to assume that marriage and reproduction were the norm for godly living. To read the Bible as wholeheartedly endorsing their ascetic program challenged the Fathers’ interpretive ingenuity as well as their comprehensive knowledge of Scripture. How, given the Bible’s sometime recalcitrance, could the lived experience of Christian renunciants find a Scriptural justification? How might they derive a consistently ascetic message from the Bible? What

CHAPTER EIGHT From Ritual to Askēsis from: Reading Renunciation
Abstract: In some quarters, the study of ritual has shifted emphasis in recent decades. Scholars have gradually abandoned the functionalist view that ritual serves to create social unity,¹ stressing instead its marking of social difference. In part, this shift signals a dissatisfaction with functionalism’s inherently conservative emphasis on “societal balance,” on the preservation of the status quo.² Informed by a more sharply critical analysis, theoreticians now note the gaps, the distinctions, the discrepancies of a society that ritual, far from healing, instead underscores and maintains. Differentiation is here seen as an activity that can be examined through a focus on ritual.³

Book Title: The Undivine Comedy-Detheologizing Dante
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): BAROLINI TEODOLINDA
Abstract: Accepting Dante's prophetic truth claims on their own terms, Teodolinda Barolini proposes a "detheologized" reading as a global new approach to the Divine Comedy. Not aimed at excising theological concerns from Dante, this approach instead attempts to break out of the hermeneutic guidelines that Dante structured into his poem and that have resulted in theologized readings whose outcomes have been overdetermined by the poet. By detheologizing, the reader can emerge from this poet's hall of mirrors and discover the narrative techniques that enabled Dante to forge a true fiction. Foregrounding the formal exigencies that Dante masked as ideology, Barolini moves from the problems of beginning to those of closure, focusing always on the narrative journey. Her investigation--which treats such topics as the visionary and the poet, the One and the many, narrative and time--reveals some of the transgressive paths trodden by a master of mimesis, some of the ways in which Dante's poetic adventuring is indeed, according to his own lights, Ulyssean.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rvnj

Chapter 2 INFERNAL INCIPITS: from: The Undivine Comedy
Abstract: The commedia, perhaps more than any other text ever written, consciously seeks to imitate life, the conditions of human existence. Not surprisingly, then, the narrative journey begins with the problem of beginnings.¹ Dante’s beginning, “Nel mezzo del cammin di nostra vita” (“In the middle of the path of our life”), evokes biblical and classical precedents for not beginning at the beginning. As Frank Kermode reminds us, “Men, like poets, rush ‘into the middest,’in medias res, when they are born; they also diein mediis rebus.”² This is to say that we exist in time, which, according to Aistotle, “is

INTRODUCTION from: The Satanic Epic
Abstract: Paradise Lostis not an orthodox poem and it needs to be rescued from its orthodox critics. This book contends that the best way back to the poem Milton composed, rather than the one the orthodox would have us read, is to reassert the importance of Satan, heretic and hater. I shall be doing this in various ways. One is through revising the history of the Satan that Milton reimagines for us, since a mistaken idea about it has been widely accepted in recent years. It is the combat myth, I argue, that has always been at the center of

TWO THE EPIC VOICE from: The Satanic Epic
Abstract: In André Gide’s Les Faux-Monnayeurs(The Counterfeiters) the “demon” who appears in the first paragraph may be read as a figure for the text itself in all its sinuous and self-reflexive turns. What is obvious in the case of a modernist and experimental novel, however, may take a little more demonstration if we are to make a similar case for Milton’s epic. Clearly Satan is the figure who begins the story. But what of the narration itself?

ELEVEN AT THE SIGN OF THE DOVE AND SERPENT from: The Satanic Epic
Abstract: We have just been exploring the contrasting but related activity of the poem’s two protagonists, Son and Satan, in Book 10. This opposition, which is essential to the combat myth Milton is retelling, is actually signalled very early in the poem and pervades it from then on. But so many things are happening in the first few lines of Paradise Lostthat we are in danger of missing the wood for the trees. Thus we may miss the fact, obvious enough when we think about it, that the narration places two symbolic animals close to the beginning. First, as the

Discovering Brahms (1862–72) from: Brahms and His World
Author(s) KARNES KEVIN C.
Abstract: Johannes Brahms has now presented himself as composer and virtuoso before the public in a concert of his own.⁶ Brahms’s compositions do not number among those immediately understandable and captivating works that carry one along in their flight. Their esoteric character, nobly disavowing every sort of popular effect, combined with their significant technical difficulties, assures that a broad embrace of these works will be much longer in coming than Schumann delightedly prophesized for his darling as a parting blessing.ᦍ In Vienna, none of Brahms’s larger compositions had previously been performed, and among his smaller works we had heard only a

Johannes Brahms: from: Brahms and His World
Author(s) KARNES KEVIN C.
Abstract: Alas, we have lost him, too, the true, great master and loyal friend! He, who until recently was able to vaunt the fact that he had never been sick in his entire life, not even for a single day! That had continued to be the case until the end of the summer, when he suddenly became sick without realizing it himself. In Ischl, some friends pointed out to him that his face had acquired a sickly yellow hue. With the explanation that he never looked at himself in the mirror, he cut the conversation short, since it irritated him. Brahms,

Brahms and the Newer Generation: from: Brahms and His World
Author(s) FRISCH WALTER
Abstract: When I think of the time during which I had the fortune to know Brahms personally—it was during the last two years of his life—I can recall immediately how his music affected me and my colleagues in composition, including Schoenberg. It was fascinating, its influence inescapable, its effect intoxicating. I was still a pupil at the Vienna Conservatory and knew most of Brahms’s works thoroughly. I was obsessed by this music. My goal at the time was nothing less than the appropriation and mastery of this wonderful, singular compositional technique.

Book Title: Freud's Wishful Dream Book- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): WELSH ALEXANDER
Abstract: In Welsh's book, readers are invited on Freud's journey, to pause at each concealed pass in his seminal work and ask where the guide is taking them and why. Along the way, Welsh shows how Freud's arbitrary turnings are themselves wishful, intended to persuade by pleasing the reader and author alike; that his interest in secrets and his self-proclaimed modest ambition are products of their time; and that the book may best be read as a romance or serial comedy. "Some of the humor throughout," Welsh notes, "can only be understood as a particular kind of fine performance." Welsh offers the first critical overview of the argument in Freud's masterpiece and of the author who presents himself as guide.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7s0j7

CHAPTER TWO “Dreams Really Have a Secret Meaning” from: Freud's Wishful Dream Book
Abstract: Instead of fighting the dream book or being mystified by it, we can speculate usefully about what its author was hoping to do. What were the advantages of writing on dream interpretation? What is attractive about the theory chosen? Why should dreams have a secret meaning? What use is the search for motives? What is to be gained from basing narratives on the slightest evidence? There are no fixed answers to such questions, needless to say: one can merely interpret Freud’s Interpretation. But wish fulfillment—that is, in story, not reality—is an excellent guide to understanding narrative, including the

CHAPTER THREE “So Far as I Knew, I Was Not an Ambitious Man” from: Freud's Wishful Dream Book
Abstract: Though trained psychoanalysts often say that chapter 7 delivers the important lessons of The Interpretation of Dreams, far more readers respond positively to Freud’s attractive self-presentation. One of the ways Freud most pleases—however testily he complained about supposed indiscretions—is by confession of his own dreams. These dreams, with the background and analysis he provides, are absorbing in themselves and partially linked up as autobiography. Only the naive or the doctrinaire, however, can suppose that the success of this broken narrative is due to its honesty per se. Confessions are by definition formally honest, since unless they reveal what

CHAPTER FOUR “It Had Been Possible to Hoodwink the Censorship” from: Freud's Wishful Dream Book
Abstract: In the dream book, the insistence on secrets supports the censorship: dreams have a secret meaning; the censorship is in the business of keeping secrets. The censorship figures in the formal conclusion of the book, with its affirmation of “the two psychical systems, the censorship upon the passage from one of them to the other” (607). Freudian censorship is very much the invention of The Interpretation of Dreams. Freud had employed the word (Zensur) casually inStudies on Hysteria(1895, 269, 282) and an early paper, “The Neuro-Psychoses of Defence” (1896, 182, 185), but in the dream book he expressly

Book Title: Performing Africa- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): EBRON PAULLA A.
Abstract: Africa often enters the global imagination through news accounts of ethnic war, famine, and despotic political regimes. Those interested in countering such dystopic images--be they cultural nationalists in the African diaspora or connoisseurs of "global culture"--often found their representations of an emancipatory Africa on an enthusiasm for West African popular culture and performance arts. Based on extensive field research in The Gambia and focusing on the figure of the jali, Performing Africa interrogates these representations together with their cultural and political implications. It explores how Africa is produced, circulated, and consumed through performance and how encounters through performance create the place of Africa in the world. Innovative and discerning, Performing Africa is a provocative contribution to debates over cultural nationalism and the construction of identity and history in Africa and elsewhere.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7s6ph

CHAPTER THREE Curators of Tradition from: Performing Africa
Abstract: On February 18, 1965, amid the cautions of many anxious observers, The Gambia raised its flag as an independent nation. The tiny country in transition, so obviously a colonial port of call, with its thin strip of riverside territory, could not present the mass of a former empire or the solidity of an ethnic homeland. Some, no doubt, felt that the country would fold into the encompassing nation of Senegal. A place so small and with so few resources, they reasoned, would by necessity require the protection of a more substantial nation-state. As people wondered about the feasibility of this

CHAPTER FIVE Interview Encounters: from: Performing Africa
Abstract: Jali musaloo Sakiliba must have spotted us at a distance for we could hear someone singing praises, seemingly in our direction.¹ Preoccupied with thoughts about how this interview might go, and the fatigue of our long trip, I did not see her. We had started early in the morning from Serrekunda, and now in the heat of the day, shaking loose the tight feeling after a three-hour busride upcountry, a transfer by ferry, and finally a truck ride, we were tired; and yet the day had really only just begun. We had met Jali Sakiliba several months before at the

CHAPTER SIX Travel Stories from: Performing Africa
Abstract: In July of 1994, the thirty-year reign of Sir Dawada Jawara came to an end as a new political regime rose to power: the Armed Forces Provisional Ruling Council (AFPRC). During this transition, installed as president was Lieutenant Yahya Jammeh, elected through a peaceful, although not invited, shift in power. The former president, Jawara, had been elected head of state since the end of colonial rule, but the democratic elections that periodically marked the postcolonial political era did not create a shift in political leadership. Many felt it was time for a change.

CODA from: Performing Africa
Abstract: September 26, 2000. Protestors stage another action aimed against the agenda of globalization as promoted through the policies of wealthy Northern countries and corporations. The scene: the World Economic summit held in Prague, Czechoslovakia. With their persistent outcries and violent confrontations, demonstrators capture the attention of the powerful leaders and global financiers and the world spectatorship. They express their outrage. Among the protestors, Bono, the lead singer of the prominent Irish rock band U2, manages to gain the ear of The World Bank’s president, James Wolfensohn. He requests a meeting with Wolfensohn for the purpose of stressing the urgent need

1 Introduction from: Writing Outside the Nation
Abstract: The words of the eighteenth-century German Romantic poet Novalis (Friedrich von Hardenberg) resonate beyond the boundaries of their history and geography and are poignantly rearticulated by a contemporary master of the arts of memory. Salman Rushdie’s critical sentiment stands as a testimony to the labor of remembrance that reclaims the lost experience of another time and place in language and imagination. The work of commemoration is often the only means of releasing our (hi)stories from subjugation to official or institutionalized regimes of forgetting. Remembering is an act of lending coherence and integrity to a history interrupted, divided, or compromised by

CHAPTER THREE Revenants, Remnants, and Counterrevolution in “The Fire and the Hearth” from: William Faulkner
Abstract: THE Agricultural Adjustment Act (AAA) of 1933 initiated the transformation of southern labor and its place, prompting a labor revolution, driven by federal funds, and effectively exorcising black from white. To read sociological commentators in the early 1930s, addressing southern agriculture, is to hear black tenants described as “virtual slaves,” held “in thrall,” subjected to “almost complete dependence” and “incapable of ever achieving but a modicum of self direction.”¹ Although the Civil War had freed the slave, it had done so only for southern landowners to bind him again in an alternative form of “dependency”: for chattel slavery read debt

CHAPTER FIVE Reading the Ledgers: from: William Faulkner
Author(s) Polk Noel
Abstract: THE Old People” opens with Buck and Buddy tangled on the horns of a latently black beast;¹ the story closes with two males in bed, dark hand to white “flank.”² At either end, “The Old People” exhibits associative transformations rendered only slightly less shocking by their not being singular. The first four stories in Go Down, Moses, read cumulatively, release a whispered ur-narrative, or more properly an ur-narrative kit, whose constituent parts (bed; woman under erasure; male cross-racial couple; corpse) with each emergence advance toward emergency. The nub of that emergency, or so this argument has run, is to be

CHAPTER SIX Find the Jew: from: William Faulkner
Abstract: FAULKNER published A Fablein 1954. He wrote it over the ten years between 1943 and 1954, a period during which issues of “hot,” “cold,” and “total” war came to preoccupy American life. A brief list may serve to make the point thatA Fable, though set during a single week of the Great War, addresses militarization in a more extensive sense. The eleven years of the novel’s writing include: the last years of World War II (1943–45); the explosion of the first atomic bomb (August 1945); the Red Scare, reaching into the State Department and toward the Pentagon

CHAPTER SEVEN “The Bugger’s a Jew”: from: William Faulkner
Abstract: MY ACCOUNT of A Fable, seeking the Jew and finding him in the potentially Semitic semen of the old general, risks simplifying the complex politics of the supreme commander’s sexuality. In 1918, aged sixty-two, the “old” general apparently approaches what Faulkner elsewhere spoke of as ungendered peace, but the biography of his missing years (1877–circa 1914), fabricated over two meetings by his contemporaries (graduates of the St Cyr military academy) in Paris (1877) and Zermatt (1887–88), suggests a life founded on a systematic negation of sexuality. Since the life is collectively and substantially made up, its findings may

Book Title: Contesting Spirit-Nietzsche, Affirmation, Religion
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): ROBERTS TYLER T.
Abstract: Nietzsche criticizes the ascetic hatred of the body and this-worldly life, yet engages in rigorous practices of self-denial--he sees philosophy as such a practice--and affirms the need of imposing suffering on oneself in order to enhance the spirit. He dismisses the "intoxication" of mysticism, yet links mysticism, power, and creativity, and describes his own self-transcending experiences. The tensions in his relation to religion are closely related to that between negation and affirmation in his thinking in general. In Roberts's view, Nietzsche's transfigurations of religion offer resources for a postmodern religious imagination. Though as a "master of suspicion," Nietzsche, with Freud and Marx, is an integral part of modern antireligion, he has the power to take us beyond the flat, modern distinction between the secular and the religious--a distinction that, at the end of modernity, begs to be reexamined.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7sjd2

CHAPTER 4 Who Were the Maoists? from: The Wind from the East
Abstract: However, we now know that Mao was rapidly losing his grip on power. His credibility as a leader had suffered greatly from the debacle of the Great Leap Forward: the disastrous agricultural modernization

CHAPTER 6 Tel Quel in Cultural-Political Hell from: The Wind from the East
Abstract: During the 1960s Tel Quel, led by consummate literary entrepreneur Philippe Sollers, rode to notoriety the crest of nearly every passing intellectual trend: the nouveau roman, structuralism, and poststructuralism. Unsurprisingly, the journal’s political loyalties were equally mercurial. After cultivating a studious apoliticism, it lurched from the most rigid Stalinist orthodoxy to an equally fervent embrace of Cultural Revolutionary China—an instance of revolutionary romanticism that culminated in a celebrated 1974 trip to Beijing. As Communist Party loyalists, the Telquelians “missed out” on May 1968. In a now-legendary episode, Sollers—whose father, incidentally, was a leading Bordeaux industrialist—actively denounced the

CHAPTER 6 Nonstandard Time: from: Through Other Continents
Abstract: Deep time is “un-American” in conforming neither to a national chronology nor to a national map. It nourishes a politics as well as an aesthetics: a devotion to ancient beauty that can lend itself to the charge of treason. Ezra Pound is an extreme case. Robert Lowell, in his attachment to Latin and his opposition to the Vietnam War, would seem to be rehearsing much the same dynamics. Rather than pitting him against the Saturday Review, I return now to a more theoretical argument of this book, having to do with the depth of literary culture and the sinuous threads

Book Title: Modernity's Wager-Authority, the Self, and Transcendence
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Seligman Adam B.
Abstract: Through its denial of an authority rooted in an experience of transcendence, modernity fails to account for individual and collective moral action. First, deprived of a sacred source of the self, depictions of moral action are reduced to motives of self interest. Second, dismissing the sacred leaves the resurgence of religious movements unexplained.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7sp0b

Chapter One THE SELF IN THE SOCIAL SCIENCES from: Modernity's Wager
Abstract: One of the more intractable problems in the social sciences is the problem of explaining human agency, or what is often termed the structure/action debate. The problem seems to crop up anew with each generation of practitioners, who have generated a small library on this problem alone. The very triumph of sociology, anthropology, and political science as disciplinary specialties has, however, been marked by a loss of certain categories of thought and by an ever increasing difficulty in expressing human existence in the world in terms of words and concepts that had, in a presociological era, stood at the core

Chapter Three HETERONOMY AND RESPONSIBILITY from: Modernity's Wager
Abstract: In the last chapter we studied different forms of externality, of that which is other than self, and we considered the necessity of authority for an idea of the self as something beyond a mere bundle of desires. Moreover, we argued that it was only with the transcendent (what Rudolf Otto termed the ganz Anderen, or wholly other) that the self as locus of moral decision making can exist.¹ Only with the emergence of this dimension of existence is it possible to keep the sacred from collapsing into mere idolatry and thereby to sustain those assumptions about a realm free

Chapter Five TOLERANCE AND TRADITION from: Modernity's Wager
Abstract: The previous chapter ended with the problem of recognition, which lies at the core of the “politics of identity.” With authority internalized as individual right, mutual recognition becomes an elusive goal as, in de Tocqueville’s words, “each man is narrowly shut in himself and from that basis makes the pretense to judge the world.”¹ With recognition lost, the self comes increasingly to rest solely on the calculus and negotiation of power. Wills are, to return to the nomenclature of our opening chapter, coerced from without, rather than subjugated from within. The result is a situation fraught with paradox: the very

Book Title: Charred Lullabies-Chapters in an Anthropography of Violence
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Daniel E. Valentine
Abstract: How does an ethnographer write about violence? How can he make sense of violent acts, for himself and for his readers, without compromising its sheer excess and its meaning-defying core? How can he remain a scholarly observer when the country of his birth is engulfed by terror? These are some of the questions that engage Valentine Daniel in this exploration of life and death in contemporary Sri Lanka. In 1983 Daniel "walked into the ashes and mortal residue" of the violence that had occurred in his homeland. His planned project--the study of women's folk songs as ethnohistory--was immediately displaced by the responsibility that he felt had been given to him, by surviving family members and friends of victims, to recount beyond Sri Lanka what he had seen and heard there. Trained to do fieldwork by staying in one place and educated to look for coherence and meaning in human behavior, what does an anthropologist do when he is forced by circumstances to keep moving, searching for reasons he never finds? How does he write an ethnography (or an anthropography, to use the author's term) without transforming it into a pornography of violence? In avoiding fattening the anthropography into prurience, how does he avoid flattening it with theory? The ways in which Daniel grapples with these questions, and their answers, instill this groundbreaking book with a rare sense of passion, purpose, and intellect.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7srks

4 MOOD, MOMENT, AND MIND from: Charred Lullabies
Abstract: This middle chapter is also a transitional one in that I attempt to make explicit the effort that has in the previous three been implicit: the effort of writing about violence. To mark this transition, I would like to begin by posing the tacit question in the manner of an open query. To what shall I compare the writing of this book? I shall compare it to the lowering of a tetrahedron¹ held by a string attached to its base into a liquid so that the point of the inverted pyramid, where the planes of three triangles meet, enters the

INTRODUCTION from: Cultures in Flux
Author(s) Frank Stephen P.
Abstract: Paradoxically, as our knowledge of postemancipation Russian society and culture has grown, we have produced a historical portrait that is increasingly rough, fractured, and blurred. The coexistence of the traditional and the new, of inertia and vibrancy, is increasingly familiar to students of late imperial Russia—and, indeed, of Soviet Russia as well. But these simple dichotomies only begin to convey the complex dynamism and fluidity of Russian society and culture as social relationships, values, and structures were battered and reconstructed. Russia’s emerging public sphere—the civic space that, for many contemporaries and historians, constitutes the essential foundation for a

CHAPTER SIX Is Impartiality Politics? from: Democratic Legitimacy
Abstract: First, democratic impartiality means more than just constitutionalism, even if it shares with constitutional thinking the idea that it is wrong to set a single social authority above all the institutions of government, law, and knowledge.

CHAPTER TEN Attention to Particularity from: Democratic Legitimacy
Abstract: The legitimacy of impartiality and the legitimacy of reflexivity have been linked to the development of new democratic institutions, as we have seen. But citizens are also increasingly conscious of the way in which they are governed. They want to be listened to and reckoned with. They want their views to be taken into account. They expect the government to be attentive to their problems and to show genuine concern with their everyday experiences. Everyone wants his or her particular situation to be taken into account, and no one wants to be subject to inflexible rules. Around the world, survey

CHAPTER ELEVEN The Politics of Presence from: Democratic Legitimacy
Abstract: The election of a representative rests on a double logic of distinction and identification. Voters want the person for whom they vote to have the ability to govern. When their choice is guided by recognition of the candidate’s leadership skills and technical competence, it is the logic of distinction that governs. The election is seen as a means of “choosing the best,” and voters implicitly concede that the candidates possess abilities that they do not. But voters also expect their representatives to be close to them, to be familiar with their problems and concerns, and to share their worries and

Book Title: Slavery and the Culture of Taste- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Gikandi Simon
Abstract: Gikandi focuses on the ways that the enslavement of Africans and the profits derived from this exploitation enabled the moment of taste in European--mainly British--life, leading to a transformation of bourgeois ideas regarding freedom and selfhood. He explores how these connections played out in the immense fortunes made in the West Indies sugar colonies, supporting the lavish lives of English barons and altering the ideals that defined middle-class subjects. Discussing how the ownership of slaves turned the American planter class into a new aristocracy, Gikandi engages with the slaves' own response to the strange interplay of modern notions of freedom and the realities of bondage, and he emphasizes the aesthetic and cultural processes developed by slaves to create spaces of freedom outside the regimen of enforced labor and truncated leisure.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7svr8

2 Intersections: from: Slavery and the Culture of Taste
Abstract: Judging from the entry she made in her diary, Monday, April 24, 1797, was a very good day for Anna Margaretta Larpent (fig. 2.1), a theater critic and woman of taste. On that particular day, Larpent rose up early and, after prayer, attended to some family business, including hemming and mending a handkerchief for her son George; she then read Claude Carloman de Rulhièr’s Histoire ou Anecdotes sur La Révolution de Russie; en l’Année 1762. She would spend the rest of the day visiting or corresponding with friends, attending to other domestic matters, and doing some reading. We know that

Book Title: Anthropos Today-Reflections on Modern Equipment
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Rabinow Paul
Abstract: The discipline of anthropology is, at its best, characterized by turbulence, self-examination, and inventiveness. In recent decades, new thinking and practice within the field has certainly reflected this pattern, as shown for example by numerous fruitful ventures into the "politics and poetics" of anthropology. Surprisingly little attention, however, has been given to the simple insight that anthropology is composed of claims, whether tacit or explicit, about anthropos and about logos--and the myriad ways in which these two Greek nouns have been, might be, and should be, connected. Anthropos Todayrepresents a pathbreaking effort to fill this gap.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7sz2j

3 Christianity, Civil Society, and the State: from: Christian Political Ethics
Author(s) STACKHOUSE MAX L.
Abstract: I am delighted to have a chance to respond formally to John Coleman, for I have done so often in my mind and too seldom in person. He is one of the most important Christian thinkers in the area of social thought. Obviously a deeply committed Roman Catholic, he is also one who has taken some pains to study major strands of Protestant thought, just as many Protestants who are committed still to motifs from the Reformation have tried to sympathetically reengage the Roman Catholic tradition since Vatican II. However, I engage his chapter as one who is convinced that

4 Christian Attitudes toward Boundaries: from: Christian Political Ethics
Author(s) MILLER RICHARD B.
Abstract: Christians began to think systematically about the ethics of land, territory, and boundaries within a specific set of historical circumstances. European claims to dominion in the New World during the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries generated a new range of questions in moral theology for Catholics and Protestants alike, theology developed most notably by Cajetan, Vitoria, Soto, Suarez, Molina, Las Casas, Gentili, and Grotius. Yet these authors did not generate normative principles for addressing questions of dominion and boundaries de novo; they drew on a tradition of categories, distinctions, and concrete practices that give substance to the Christian imagination regarding political

6 Conscientious Individualism: from: Christian Political Ethics
Author(s) LITTLE DAVID
Abstract: There are several conceptual ambiguities about the term ʺpluralismʺ that need to be clarified. According to the dictionary, it is both a descriptive term, ʺthe quality or state of being plural,ʺ and a theoretical or normative term, ʺthe doctrine that there are more than one or two kinds of being or independent centers of causationʺ; ʺopposed to monism, or dualism.ʺ¹ Accordingly, the phrase ʺethical pluralismʺ might designate the simple existence of a diversity or plurality of ethical positions, or it might refer to a doctrine holding that ethics, as the systematic evaluation of human action, isin its natureincapable

8 Christianity and the Prospects for a New Global Order from: Christian Political Ethics
Author(s) STACKHOUSE MAX L.
Abstract: It is no accident that the issue of reconstituting international society appears before us today, at a moment when the economic, medical, cultural, and communication structures that play such a critical role in modern society are changing rapidly. Although civil society in the past largely coincided with the boundaries of the state, it is now being reconstructed internationally in ways that strain the capacity of any government to order, guide, or control. In fact, some observers foresee little but chaos since societies are no longer confined within a single legal system and no one seems to be in control.¹ Even

9 Globalization and Catholic Social Thought: from: Christian Political Ethics
Author(s) COLEMAN JOHN A.
Abstract: I confess to some trepidation in addressing the topic: Globalization as a challenge to Catholic social thought. Why not its inverse: Catholic social thought as a challenge to globalization? As we will see, they represent a mutual challenge to each other. Moreover, the title of this essay made me mindful of solemn advice earlier imparted to me: never try to explain the obscure by the even more obscure! Catholic social thought, notoriously, has been dubbed ʺour best kept secret.ʺ¹ Some of its key ideals and concepts, such as subsidiarity, justice as participation, solidarity, the option for the poor, and, especially,

12 Christian Nonviolence: from: Christian Political Ethics
Author(s) KOONTZ THEODORE J.
Abstract: I have four aims in this chapter. The first is to describe briefly something of the range of views that may fit under the heading ʺChristian nonviolence.ʺ The second is to give an account of the context out of which it makes sense to be committed to a certain kind of Christian nonviolence (ʺpacifismʺ). The third is to note how, from this pacifist perspective, the questions posed to just war theorists and realists are not the central questions about peace and war, and how focusing on them in fact distorts our thinking. The fourth is to attempt, nevertheless, to deal

Book Title: Journeys to the Other Shore-Muslim and Western Travelers in Search of Knowledge
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Euben Roxanne L.
Abstract: This extraordinary book shows that curiosity about the unknown, the quest to understand foreign cultures, critical distance from one's own world, and the desire to remake the foreign into the familiar are not the monopoly of any single civilization or epoch. Euben demonstrates that the fluidity of identities, cultures, and borders associated with our postcolonial, globalized world has a long history--one shaped not only by Western power but also by an Islamic ethos of travel in search of knowledge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7t5dw

Chapter 1 FRONTIERS: WALLS AND WINDOWS from: Journeys to the Other Shore
Abstract: In a globalized world grown smaller by progressively dizzying flows of people, knowledge, and information, ʺtravelʺ seems to have become the image of the age. Porous borders, portable allegiances, virtual networks, and elastic identities now more than ever evoke the language of mobility, contingency, fluidity, provisionality, and process rather than that of stability, permanence, and fixity.¹ Scholars who traffic in the lingo of deterritorialization and nomadism increasingly traverse disciplines and regions, mining disparate experiences of displacement such as tourism, diaspora, exile, cyberculture, and migration as ʺcontact zones,ʺ sites that articulate the preconditions and implications of cross-cultural encounters.²

Chapter 3 LIARS, TRAVELERS, THEORISTS: from: Journeys to the Other Shore
Abstract: This is a chapter about liars. Or at least about two travelers, Herodotus and Ibn Battuta, consistently accused of lying. Cicero may have dubbed Herodotus the Father of History, but Thucydides repudiated entirely Herodotusʹs approach to the past, accusing him of fabrication and telling tall tales.² In the wake of Thucydidesʹ damning verdict, impugning Herodotusʹs reliability became, for a time, a veritable cottage industry. Some characterized him as ignorant or overly credulous; others would accuse him of malicious intent. Plutarch, for example, charged Herodotus with undue partiality to both the non-Greeks ( philobarbaros—lover/friend of barbarians) and Athens, along with an

Chapter 5 GENDER, GENRE, AND TRAVEL: from: Journeys to the Other Shore
Abstract: Odysseus may be the hero ʺwho has traveled a great deal . . . see[ing] the cities of men and learn[ing] their minds,ʺ¹ but it is the immobility and fidelity of his wife Penelope that frame his voyage. And it is Penelope who, literally and figuratively, reproduces this masculine journey when, in Fénelonʹs Telemachus, her son departs in search of Odysseus, leaving her behind once again to endlessly reenact her virtue by refusing a phalanx of suitors. So thoroughly is travel materially and symbolically masculinized that Eric Leed terms it the ʺspermatic journey,ʺ opposing it to the feminization of ʺsessility,ʺ

CHAPTER TWO Telling Time in War from: War at a Distance
Abstract: This chapter extends the thought that the experience of war at a distance, of a mediated war, is fundamentally dislocating, and that such dislocation expresses itself most frequently and forcefully through our sense of the movement (or stasis) of time, through temporalities. Thus the wartime poems set on a winter’s evening, considered in the prelude, elaborate the simplest markers of time (winter, evening) into channels of memory and prophecy, avenues of recursivity and nodes of stillness. Wartime in modernity refers not to a single temporal mode— thetime of war. Rather it houses many temporalities, each one, as we will

INTRODUCTION from: Mappings
Abstract: Border talk is everywhere—literal and figural, material and symbolic. The “cartographies of silence” pioneered by feminists like Adrienne Rich in the 1970s have morphed into the spatial practices of third wave feminism as national boundaries and personal borders become ever more permeable in the face of rapidly changing cultural terrains and global landscapes. Borders have a way of insisting on separation at the same time as they acknowledge connection. Like bridges. Bridges signify the possibility of passing over. They also mark the fact of separation and the distance that has to be crossed. Borders between individuals, genders, groups, and

CHAPTER 5 Telling Contacts: from: Mappings
Abstract: So begins Nisa’s “once upon a time,” her formulaic opening of a story-to-come, her signal as storyteller to her listener that what follows is marked off and shaped as a separate entity that the “wind will take away” once her words are finished. So begins as well her reflection on the performance and passing of one of the many stories she tells to the North American anthropologist Marjorie Shostak, stories that constitute her life in the one-time gathering and hunting society of the !Kung as they subsist and face substantial change and possible annihilation in the Kalahari Desert of southern

CHAPTER 6 “Routes/Roots”: from: Mappings
Abstract: Thinking geopolitically about identity is a “spatial practice,” to echo Michel de Certeau in The Practice of Everyday Life. It involves maps and mapping, routes and routing, borders and bordercrossings. As a form of relational spatialization, however, it incorporates the opposing dimensions of the homonym routes/roots. Traveling is a concept that depends upon the notion of stasis to be comprehensible. Routes are pathways between here and there, two points of rootedness. Identity often requires some form of displacement—literal or figurative—to come to consciousness. Leaving home brings into being the idea of “home,” the perception of its identity as

CHAPTER 8 Making History: from: Mappings
Abstract: My reflections begin with the contradictory desires within contemporary American feminism revolving around the question of history, particularly what is involved when feminists write histories of feminism. On the one hand, a pressing urgency to reclaim and hold on to a newly reconstituted history of women has fueled the development of the field of women’s history as well as the archaeological, archival, and oral history activities of feminists in other areas of women’s studies outside the discipline of history, inside and outside the academy. On the other hand, there has been a palpable anxiety within the feminist movement about the

X Richard Rorty at Princeton from: Politics and the Imagination
Abstract: When I arrived in Princeton during the 1970s my addiction to tea was already long standing and very well entrenched, but I was so concerned about the quality of the water in town, that I used to buy large containers of allegedly “pure” water at Davidson’s—the local supermarket, which seems now to have gone out of business. I didn’t, of course, have a car, and given the amount of tea I consumed, the transport of adequate supplies of water was a highly labor-intense and inconvenient matter. Dick and Mary Rorty must have noticed me lugging canisters of water home,

CHAPTER FIVE Conviction and Community from: Acts of Compassion
Abstract: Debbie Carson began doing volunteer work in high school. Much of it was organized by her youth group at church. She visited inmates at the county jail and sang hymns at local nursing homes on Sunday afternoons. She also worked as a candy striper at a hospital. Volunteering became a habit. So did caring for the needy. In college she majored in special education. After college she worked for a year in an inner-city program for disadvantaged families. After that she taught children with learning disabilities.

CHAPTER SEVEN Bounded Love from: Acts of Compassion
Abstract: “To save a woman from being sent to a nursing home, Carla had moved in with an Alzheimer’s victim. So at 12:30, Carla rushed home to make lunch for her roommate. At supper time, Carla rushed home again to make supper for her roommate.

CHAPTER 5 Do Androids Prove Theorems in Their Sleep? from: Circles Disturbed
Author(s) HARRIS MICHAEL
Abstract: The first author must state that his coauthor and close friend, Tom Trobaugh, quite intelligent, singularly original, and inordinately generous, killed himself

CHAPTER 7 Vividness in Mathematics and Narrative from: Circles Disturbed
Author(s) GOWERS TIMOTHY
Abstract: Is there any interesting connection between mathematics and narrative? The answer is not obviously yes, and until one thinks about the question for a while, one might even be tempted to say that it is obviously no, since the two activities seem so different. But on further reflection, one starts to see that there are some points of contact. For example, to write out the proof of a complicated theorem one must take several interrelated ideas and present them in a linear fashion. The same could be said of writing a novel. If the novel is describing a series of

CHAPTER 11 Mathematics and Narrative: from: Circles Disturbed
Author(s) LLOYD G. E. R.
Abstract: The idea that mathematics deals with timeless truths is forcefully stated in a famous exchange between Socrates and Glaucon in Plato’s Republic, which makes the further point that the language of geometry, with its talk of manipulating figures, is absurd, since it conflicts with the idea of the timelessness of its objects. Let me quote the passage in full:

The Roads of Exile, 1792-1817 from: Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Darcel Jean-Louis
Abstract: When the Revolution irrupted into Savoy on 22 September 1792, and the 20,000 soldiers of the Revolutionary army concentrated at Fort de Barraux under the command of General ex-marquis de Montesquieu-Fezensac descended under a driving rain, the effect was total surprise.² Without a shadow of resistence on the part of the strong Sardinian army of 12,000 men, a multi-secular order collapsed.³ Within a few weeks Savoy became the eighty-fourth department of the young French republic. It entered into the new world without experiencing the steps, which, in France, had prepared minds by passing from the absolute monarchy, to the constitutional

Joseph de Maistre Economist from: Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Denizet Jean
Abstract: Large landowners multiplied agricultural innovations in the hope of increasing the net productof their lands; many ruined themselves in the process. Lawsuits, with the communes or with their neighbours, born of these innovations, came before the

Joseph de Maistre’s Theory of Language: from: Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Thurston Benjamin
Abstract: Ever since the appearance of Maupertuis’s Réflexions sur I’origine des langues et la signification des motsin 1748, the Berlin Academy had been at the centre of a vigorous debate on the origin, formation, and function of language. Arguments of considerable ingenuity were put forward, including seminal works by Süssmilch, Michaelis, and Herder. Such studies were much more than finger exercises for philologists, however; a given account of the genesis and development of language would situate its author in a wider polemic of political and religious contention. At the same time, there was an abiding fascination for, and curiosity to

Joseph de Maistre, New Mentor of the Prince: from: Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Darcel Jean-Louis
Abstract: Joseph de Maistre, it has often been noticed, did not create an ideology Counter-Revolution; his works are fragmented essays, sometimes unfinished, often published after his death. In twenty years, from Considerations sur la FrancetoLes Soirées de Saint-Pétersbourg,²they touched on topics from political history to philosophical and religious controversy without constructing a doctrine in the sense that we would understand it, which is surprising on the part of the most radical denigrator of modernity. Diverse reasons for this have been advanced: his rejection of a rational organization of society led him to condemn all intellectual constructions, which he

Joseph de Maistre and Carl Schmitt from: Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Garrard Graeme
Abstract: Among those in the twentieth century who have taken Joseph de Maistre seriously are those who regard him as the quintessential political “realist,” someone whose clear-sighted perception of the harsh “realities” at the heart of political life was refreshingly unobscured by the wishful thinking and naïve assumptions of so much political thought since the Enlightenment The best known of Maistre’s twentieth century “realist” admirers is Carl Schmitt (1888 -1985), interest in whom has exploded over the last two decades.² Given this interest, and in light of the fact that Maistre occupied a privileged place in Schmitt’s pantheon of heroes, alongside

6 Judith Thampson: from: Buried Astrolabe
Abstract: When, in 1990, Judith Thompson described herself as “a devoted Freudian in some ways” ( Fair,99) some of her admirers may have been disconcerted. By then the great man’s reputation was already manifestly in decline. A series of increasingly biting attacks were being made by writers such as Adolf Grünbaum, Jeffrey Masson, Frederick Crews, even Gloria Steinem, that represented the father of psychoanalysis patriarchal, sexist, unscientific, capricious, irrational, egotistical, deluded, paranoid, dishonest, sexually perverted, and just plain wrong. Many people apparently felt that the time had come simply to junk Freud and his ideas altogether.

1 The Language of Love: from: Writing Lovers
Abstract: In his essay “On Love,” Adam Phillips observes that since the language of love borrows its referents from the discourses of theology and epistemology, it is at once relentlessly redemptive and insistently enlightening (40). The lover, like the mystic or the paranoiac, is a reader of signs and wonders: all are terrorized and bewitched by an experience that, in the absence of a transcendental signifier, displaces our contemporary version of the sublime. If this comparison is to provide a useful analogy, then it is possible to concede that we have, in the late twentieth and early twenty-first centuries, enshrined literature

3 Possessed by Love: from: Writing Lovers
Abstract: In her foreword to By Grand Central Station I Sat Down and Wept,Brigid Brophy praises what she names Elizabeth Smart’s “poetic prose” (7), an apt designation since it accounts for both the narrative momentum of the text and its emphasis on metaphor, figurative language, and poetic rhythm.¹ In fact, Smart’s book-lengthcri de coeurconforms to the elements of poetry rather more than to those of prose, since the narrative does not exceed the geometry of a lover’s triangle and much of the so-called plot must be inferred from the narrator’s ecstatic lamentation.² As such, I feel justified in

4 In Between: from: Writing Lovers
Abstract: The problem of creating something nourishing out of nothing much – bread out of stone, revolution out of writing - haunts Brand’s earlier poetry collection No Language Is Neutral(1990), much as it does her political manifesto. As a Black¹ lesbian feminist, as a self-proclaimed immigrant (a position she exploresin Winter Epigrams[1983] andLand To Light On[i997]),² as a politically charged writer, Brand is multiply displaced from white patriarchal heterosexual discourse, from what she despises as a “secret and cowardly language of normalcy and affirmation” (Bread23). In the same essay she proclaims the need for writing that

Foreword from: Gift and Communion
Author(s) ANDERSON CARL A.
Abstract: Speaking in 1978 of the newly elected John Paul I, Cardinal Karol Wojtyła once described the pope’s role in post–Vatican II society as shouldering “the cross of contemporary man”—taking up and addressing the dangers, the wrongs that “can be righted only through justice and love.”¹ Unknown to him at the time, he was describing the very task that would be laid upon his own shoulders less than a month later when he would be elected to the papacy and would declare “Do not be afraid. Open wide the doors to Christ.”²

Chapter One DISCOURSE ON METHOD from: Gift and Communion
Abstract: Using the title of the first philosophical publication of René Descartes, Discours de la méthodefrom 1637, as the name of this chapter is intentional.¹ It results from the conviction that the method of the theological anthropology of John Paul II is built in opposition to the Cartesian method, which has been considered paradigmatic for modern humanities and social sciences.² The papal reflections in the catecheses are theological; however, the fact that both thinkers intend to understand the real man living in history makes a comparison with Cartesian thought possible.

4 The Growth of National Consciousness in Mexico and Latin America from: The Making of the Nations and Cultures of the New World
Abstract: After Quebec, our attention turns to Mexico and Latin America (Map 1). Considering the continent’s diversity, it might appear surprising that this inquiry starts with Mexico and then spills into the whole of Latin America.¹ Yet, beyond their important distinguishing features, I believe that the collectivities of this continent shared dreams, problems, and historical experiences that legitimize my approach. Moreover, the act of recognizing elements of a common narrative can, in turn, shed light on particular trajectories. In describing the process whereby European immigrants appropriated these new spaces between the sixteenth and twentieth centuries, I use the concept of “Americanization”

5 Political Emancipation and National Identity in Australia from: The Making of the Nations and Cultures of the New World
Abstract: First a word to signpost our journey. The concept of oceanity refers at once to the direction and to the outcome of the symbolic appropriation of the Australian continent; in this sense, oceanity constitutes a reference point diametrically opposed to the European pole, since it is constructed at the latter’s expense. The concept ends up embracing all the attempts to create an authentic national identity, sometimes known as Australianity. In discussing the European pole, I will frequently refer to the British mother country. Strictly speaking, one should distinguish between England and the other parts of the United Kingdom; however, since

7 Collective Paths, Discursive Strategies: from: The Making of the Nations and Cultures of the New World
Abstract: The forays made throughout the preceding chapters, though very incomplete, have brought to light numerous particularities and convergences in the historical paths under discussion; they have allowed us to uncover surprising recurrences in the discursive strategies that new collectivities deployed to construct and order imaginaries at different times. I now proceed to make sense of each of these recurring tendencies and, in conclusion, ask what we have learned about these routes and representations.

CHAPTER FOUR Dylan Thomas from: Poetic Argument
Abstract: In a letter complaining about the composition of Under Milk Wood,Dylan Thomas noted that through “the complicated violence of the words” his comedy was turning into “some savage and devious metaphysical lyric” (SL, 364).¹ The phrase more accurately describes his poetry, which deviously and energetically argues about questions of life and death in a manner that is nevertheless lyrical. Although never a learned thinker,² he was fascinated by thought and by the intensity and intricacy of its operation; that is, he had a passionate mind, which wrestled with ideas and delighted in ingenious means of expressing this conflict. Like

3 Language and Signification from: Word of the Law
Abstract: ... a Scheme for entirely abolishing all Words whatsoever: And this was urged as a great Advantage in Point of Health as well as Brevity. For, it is plain, that every Word we speak is in some Degree a Diminution of our Lungs by Corrosion; and consequently contributes to the shortning of our Lives. An Expedient was therefore offered, that since Words

7 Legal Diction from: Word of the Law
Abstract: In Chapter 5, I outlined some general considerations that should be kept in mind in discussions of “legal language.” One of these was the “lexicogrammatical” or formal features of legal discourse. I promised, in that chapter, to go on to consider in greater detail what some of the formal features characterizing legal language might be. And, in Chapter 6, I referred to elocutioas one of the elements in the classical rhetorical account of discourse, again promising to discuss in detail its two major aspects — diction and syntax. This takes us to what might be described as an inquiry into

11 Critical Evaluation of Texts from: Word of the Law
Abstract: In his essay “Criticising the judges,”⁵ Robert Martin characterized the writing of the late justices of the Supreme Court of Canada Rand J. and Laskin C.J.C. as “abysmal,” On the other hand, he points to the “grace and felicity” of the judgments of such jurists as Lords Mansfield, Atkin, Reid, and Denning.⁶ And, in a reversal of the accustomed pattern of academics criticising judges, we find a judge commenting on the style of an academician’s writing in the Honourable Samuel Freedman’s observation that “every page” of a book introducing the Canadian legal system “is written in clear, simple, translucent prose.”⁷

Book Title: Russian Experimental Fiction-Resisting Ideology after Utopia
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Clowes Edith W.
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztgwq

CHAPTER ONE Meta-utopian Writing: from: Russian Experimental Fiction
Abstract: In the short period since 1987 when Gorbachev made his speech about filling in the “blank passages” of Soviet Russian history, Russian intellectuals have confronted a serious crisis of social imagination. While it is clear that the old monopolistic, authoritarian communist ideology is in retreat, many people, and not just the old hardliners, fear that the absence of an authoritarian hierarchy portends an apocalypse, the onslaught of complete political and economic disorder. On the other hand, particularly since the failed coup of August 1991, a significant number of citizens have proved that they are probing some wholly different notion of

CHAPTER TEN Play with Closure in Petrushevskaia’s “The New Robinsons” and Kabakov’s “The Deserter” from: Russian Experimental Fiction
Abstract: Meta-utopian fiction written since 1987 is, as might be expected, more radically reductive than its forebears, finding naked coercion behind all but the most locally defined ideologies. It exposes a similar matrix of responses as the critical discussion about utopia. On the one hand, it harbors the same fear of the abyss as the only real alternative to stable, if oppressive, order, while, on the other, it is strongly concerned with reopening language to untried possibility, with reexamining deep social scripts, and with probing automatized readerly expectations. Two “best-selling” pieces, Liudmila Petrushevskaia’s short story “The New Robinsons” (“Novye Robinzony: Khronika

Book Title: Sung Dynasty Uses of the I Ching- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wyatt Don J.
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztn88

CHAPTER ONE The I Ching Prior to Sung from: Sung Dynasty Uses of the I Ching
Abstract: There is not a single thing that those who made the Idid not conjoin, from the obscure and bright of heaven-and-earth to the minute subtleties of the various insects, grasses and trees.¹

CHAPTER FOUR Shao Yung and Number from: Sung Dynasty Uses of the I Ching
Abstract: Shao Yung is best known for his use of number, inspired by the Book of Change, to build a world-system of enormous scale and complexity. Thus a contemporary noted that Shao “contemplated the growth and decline of heaven-and-earth, inferred the waxing and waning of sun and moon, examined the measure-numbers of yin and yang, and scrutinized the form and structure of firm and soft.”¹ Somewhat less remarked on is the way this knowledge of heaven-and-earth was the means for Shao to address the issues of human nature and destiny (hsing-ming) that came to occupy literati thinkers from the 1030s on.

CHAPTER FIVE Ch’eng I and the Pattern of Heaven-and-Earth from: Sung Dynasty Uses of the I Ching
Abstract: Your ignorant and worthless subject Ch’eng I, sincerely risking death and repeatedly saluting, offers this memorial to Your Majesty the Emperor….

Book Title: Romanticism and the Forms of Ruin: Wordsworth, Coleridge, the Modalities of Fragmentation- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): McFarland Thomas
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztq28

Book Title: The Matrix of Modernism-Pound, Eliot, and Early Twentieth-Century Thought
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Schwartz Sanford
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztqsd

CONCLUSION from: The Matrix of Modernism
Abstract: Throughout this book I have explored the modern tendency to think in terms of “surfaces” and “depths,” focusing particularly on the opposition between conceptual abstraction and concrete sensation. These terms have been used to conduct an investigation that might be extended well beyond the limits of this study. They inform the works of many writers of the early twentieth century, and Chapters III and IV merely suggest the kind of work to be done with Yeats, Stevens, and Williams, as well as the novelists of the period. In many respects these terms are still central to the human sciences, philosophy,

Book Title: Milton's Epics and the Book of Psalms- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): RADZINOWICZ MARY ANN
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztqxb

INTRODUCTION from: Milton's Epics and the Book of Psalms
Abstract: Milton read the Book of Psalms as the record of a journey through life traversing all the tempers, moods, passions, and uneven reactions that mark the psalmist’s search for an adequate faith. Such a mode of reading was common to Englishmen in his day, guided by the Geneva Bible’s representation of Psalms as a course of life by which “at length [to] atteine to [an] incorruptible crowne of glorie.”¹ Since the journey is not a consistent progress toward enlightenment, individual psalms register backsliding, fear, self-deception, even inadequacy of response no less truly than nobility of spirit. Milton did not congratulate

ONE “Where God is prais’d aright”: from: Milton's Epics and the Book of Psalms
Abstract: When milton began to write Paradise Regainedon the model of Job, he brought to the new poem hermeneutic habits made precise and boldly imaginative by having written bothChristian DoctrineandParadise Lost. The new theme came to him inspired and authorized by the Book of Psalms, “Where God is prais’d aright, and Godlike men” (4.348).Paradise Regainedquickly exposes the inadequacy of the termliteralto describe Milton’s thematic analysis of psalms and directs the modern reader to reinstate the distinction English Reformed exegetes sought to make in using the termscarnalandspiritualfor biblical interpretation. Psalms

THREE “Smit with the love of sacred Song”: from: Milton's Epics and the Book of Psalms
Abstract: Hymns are sung across Paradise Lostnot only by angelic choirs, praising both God’s nature and his specific acts, but also by the human pair, extemporizing occasional

CONCLUSION from: Milton's Epics and the Book of Psalms
Abstract: In the margins of his own Bible, Milton singled out fifteen psalms in some way: he underlined part of Psalm 2; initialed with “KJ” parts of Psalms 56, 66, and 89; ticked 50, 55, 105, 141, 142, and 146; bracketed 98: 12–13; otherwise marked 51, 55, and 96; and smudged 1, 42, and 78 with wear.¹ In Christian Doctrinehe most frequently cited proof texts from Psalms 2, 18, 19, 33, 37, 51, 78, 94, 102, 103, 104, 119, and 147.² He translated or paraphrased Psalms 1 through 8, 80 through 88, 114, and 136. Finally, throughout the English

Book Title: The Darwinian Heritage- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): KOTTLER MALCOLM J.
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztrtb

Introduction: from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Kohn David
Abstract: The Darwinian Heritagerepresents the present rich state of historical work on Darwin and Darwinism. The common thread of the essays in this volume is a sensitivity to the pressing need to place Darwin in the context of Victorian science. The organization of the work reflects the goal of building bridges between the study of an individual and his place in scientific culture. Part One,The Evolution of a Theorist, explores Darwin’s growth as a scientific thinker from his student days in Edinburgh to the writing of theOrigin of Species. Part Two,Darwin in Victorian Context, examines both Darwin’s

15 Darwin of Down: from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Moore James R.
Abstract: Ever since the English establishment appropriated the body of Charles Darwin and buried it in Westminster Abbey, the interpretation of Darwin’s religious life has been controversial. Right from the start partisan opinion was divided; explanations had to be dredged up pro and con. No sooner had the coffin sunk ironically beneath the Abbey pavement than the flotsam of Darwin’s religious life began to surface in the press. On the weekend the evangelical Recordreported how the Lord Bishop of Derry had told a crowd of cheering clergymen about Darwin’s support for Church of England missions. Some months later readers of

19 Darwin’s Reading and the Fictions of Development from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Beer Gillian
Abstract: Darwin’s writing profoundly unsettled the received relationships between fiction, metaphor, and the material world. That power of his was nurtured by his omnivorous reading. None of Darwin’s reading seems to have been in vain. It was all useable, and used, though relatively little of it was undertaken in a utilitarian spirit. We might apply the remarks of one of his favorite authors, Sir Thomas Browne, who wrote in the Religio Medici(1642): “Natura nihil agit frustra, is the only indisputable axiom in Philosophy; there are noGrotesquesin nature; nor any thing framed to fill up empty cantons, and unnecessary

23 Darwinism in Germany, France, and Italy from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Weindling Paul J.
Abstract: The eleven-year interval since the conference on the reception of Darwinism organized by Thomas F. Glick (1974) has witnessed important changes in research on evolutionary ideas in Europe. More case studies on Germany have appeared; Professor Yvette Conry has published her large volume on French non-reactions to Darwin; and a new generation of Italian historians of science has undertaken to explore the immense and immensely under-researched territory of Italian reactions to Darwin. Yet at present, as in 1972, the task of offering a balanced comparative assessment of Darwinian debates within the major European countries proves daunting. For the most part,

24 Darwin and Russian Evolutionary Biology from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Acanfora Michele
Abstract: As is well known, Darwin produced a large number of theories, many of which dealt explicitly with evolution or special aspects of it, and many others of which were closely related to problems in evolution, although the evolutionary aspect was only implicit. Furthermore, throughout his life Darwin varied the emphasis he placed on different processes and mechanisms, and, for some of them, he radically altered his position. In his published works, Darwin hardly ever indicated precisely how any single topic he discussed could or should be connected with other topics, in an overall interpretative framework of evolutionary phenomena. Thus there

29 Darwin on Natural Selection: from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Sober Elliott
Abstract: Whig history is full of threats and promises. Interpreting the past in terms of the present has its dangers; since the present did not cause the past, one can be misled in the search for explanation. But when the question we put to the past concerns its meaning, matters change; seeing the significance of the past may well essentially involve seeing it in terms of the present.

30 Images of Darwin: from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) La Vergata Antonello
Abstract: The members of any community sooner or later begin to reflect on their past with an eye to their future. Darwin scholars are no exception. They have increasingly found themselves discussing methodological problems and more general “philosophical” questions, such as their relationship to other areas of the history of science and to studies on the nature of science.

Book Title: The Three Genres and the Interpretation of Lyric- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Rogers William Elford
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zttcz

CHAPTER III Standards of Interpretation and Evaluation from: The Three Genres and the Interpretation of Lyric
Abstract: Adopting any model of literary interpretation plunges one at once into enormously involved philosophical problems. I have provisionally put forward a model on Heideggerian lines. But the model is Heideggerian onlyin that it accepts Heidegger’s crucial notion that interpretation is a making-explicit of what is already grasped (“understood”), but not fully articulated, in our encounters with literary works. What concerns me here is something I have previously mentioned in passing—namely, the fact that a Heideggerian model might seem to lead inevitably to a strict relativism, and, therefore, to the conclusion that knowledge in the human studies is impossible.

Book Title: Interpreting SAMSON AGONISTES- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): WITTREICH JOSEPH ANTHONY
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztvq7

Book Title: Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): COOK ELEANOR
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztwr5

CHAPTER ONE Places, Common and Other: from: Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: Stevensis such a master of openings that we expect the first poems of Harmoniumto entice us, and we are a little baffled when they do not. Stevens selected these poems to openHarmonium, choosing from work written between 1916 and 1921; he saw no reason to alter the order in 1931 for a second edition or in 1954 for hisCollected Poems. They are the entrance into his work and I propose to begin with the first six. Slight, pleasing poems, they lead into the powerful pair,Domination of BlackandThe Snow Man, but have themselves attracted little

CHAPTER TWO The Play and War of Venus: from: Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: The young Stevens was a love poet, who wrote verses of paralyzing dullness to his future wife He read erotic poetry when he ʺwas young and reading left and rightʺ ( L381) OvidʹsArs Amatona(L65), Paulus Silentianus from MackailʹsGreek Anthology(SP183–84), Campion, and so on When the miraculous year 1915 came, and Stevens inexplicably began to write major poetry, it was not surprising that one of his subjects was erotic love The poem itself is surprising It isPeter Quince at the Clavier, a variation on the Apocryphal story of Susannah and the Elders Stevens

CHAPTER SIX A Rhetoric of Beginning Again: from: Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: Ideas of Orderis a book of ending and beginning again, as we can see from the plots of the opening and closing poems. The opening poems tell us that beginning again is often a matter of returning, and the words ʺturnʺ and ʺreturnʺ echo through the volume like a refrain. The trade edition of 1936 opens withFarewell to Florida, a voyage from an old love, but not to a new one (the old love is Venus as Florida, the ʺreturnʺ is to a ʺviolent mindʺ). Next we haveGhosts as Cocoons: an address to a much-desired bride still

CHAPTER THIRTEEN Late Poems: from: Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: I have moved from the end of Transport to SummertoAn Ordinary Evening in New Haven, the major long poem of Stevensʹ next volume. That poem, and the volumeʹs title poem,Auroras of Autumnexplore ways of saying farewell. At the same time, Stevens increasingly writes short poems of peculiar force and intensity that do not give the effect of meditating on farewells, except by indirection. Randall Jarrell describes them as the work of a man ʺat once very old and beyond the dominion of age; such men seem to have entered into (or are able to create for

Book Title: Beauty and Holiness-The Dialogue Between Aesthetics and Religion
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Martin James Alfred
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztx00

Book Title: Merleau-Ponty and the Foundation of Existential Politics- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Whiteside Kerry H.
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztzb8

INTRODUCTION from: Merleau-Ponty and the Foundation of Existential Politics
Abstract: In his first essay published after the liberation of France, Maurice Merleau-Ponty described with chagrin the facile reasoning with which he had once discounted political affairs. “Before the war,” he wrote, “politics seemed to us unthinkablebecause it is a statistical treatment of men, and it makes no sense, we thought, to treat these singular beings . . . as if they were a collection of substitutable objects” (SNS 255, tr. 145, emphasis added). Six years of destruction, foreign occupation, and resistance had shown how vital it was to overcome such naiveté. Making politics “thinkable” was the most urgent problem

ONE FIRST ESSAYS: from: Merleau-Ponty and the Foundation of Existential Politics
Abstract: Between 1925 and 1945 French philosophy underwent far-reaching changes in style, in the canon of authors it studied, in the subject matter it deemed worthy of attention. Merleau-Ponty’s primary thesis for his doctorat d’Etatincluded, for example, a chapter on “The Body as a Sexed Being.” His adviser, Émile Bréhier, a philosopher of apparently traditional sensibilities, was taken aback. Bréhier asked him if he could make this chapter a trifle more discreet; Merleau-Ponty promised that this suggestion would receive the thoughtful consideration it deserved. A week later he announced his decision: Alas, he could not change a single word.¹ Even

THREE COLLECTIVE MEANING: from: Merleau-Ponty and the Foundation of Existential Politics
Abstract: When Sartre first applied his existential ontology to political questions, the Marxist theorist Henri Lefebvre chided him for posing “the human problem” as “an individual question, abstract and theoretical.” This was in sorry contrast to Marxism, which sees man’s social condition as “a problem of action founded on objective knowledge.”¹ Merleau-Ponty, coming to Sartre’s defense, was suspicious of this Marxism that refused to “tarry over the task of describing being and of founding the existence of other people” (SNS 134, tr. 77). His use of “founding” suggests that political theory starts not by assuming that man’s nature is social, but

NINE POLITICS AND EXPRESSION from: Merleau-Ponty and the Foundation of Existential Politics
Abstract: The argument cannot be made that, having become liberal, Merleau-Ponty suddenly forgot what it meant to think politically. In The Adventures of the Dialectiche repeats once again the litany of requirements that he places on truly political thought: it begins with a probabilistic reading of events, it needs a philosophy of history, it treats people statistically, it aims at success (AD 239, 9, 226, 251, tr. 163, 3, 154, 172). Chastising Sartre for his notion of “pure action,” Merleau-Ponty reminds him that political actors cannot use the fact that history is “overflowing with meaning” to justify an arbitrary perspective

Book Title: The Social Vision of William Blake- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): FERBER MICHAEL
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztzd7

2 Blake’s Ideology from: The Social Vision of William Blake
Abstract: At centennial celebrations of the Glorious Revolution of 1688, many a toast to liberty and the rights of Englishmen was followed by another toast to that revolution’s philosopher, John Locke. “Locke” was a regular feature of the rhetoric of liberty. When the Dissenting interest preached parliamentary reform it did so in the name of its “holy of holies,” the Great Liberator.¹ Addressing the Society for the Commemoration of the Revolution a year after the centennial, the Dissenting minister Richard Price adduced a list of Lockean rights that included the right to cashier governors. Burke indignantly observed that he was not

Book Title: Eros the Bittersweet-An Essay
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Carson Anne
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zv117

Gone from: Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: Perhaps there are many ways to answer this. One comes clearest in Greek. The Greek word erosdenotes ‘want,’ ‘lack,’ ‘desire for that which is missing.’ The lover wants what he does not have. It is by definition impossible for him to have what he wants if, as soon as it is had, it is no longer wanting. This is more than wordplay. There is a dilemma within eros that has been thought crucial by thinkers from Sappho to the present day. Plato turns and returns to it. Four of his dialogues explore what it means to say that desire

A Novel Sense from: Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: Imagination is the core of desire. It acts at the core of metaphor. It is essential to the activity of reading and writing. In the archaic lyric poetry of Greece, these three trajectories intersected, perhaps fortuitously, and imagination transcribed on human desire an outline more beautiful (some people think) than any before or since. We have seen what shape that outline took. Writing about desire, the archaic poets made triangles with their words. Or, to put it less sharply, they represent situations that ought to involve two factors (lover, beloved) in terms of three (lover, beloved and the space between

Bellerophon Is Quite Wrong After All from: Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: Although embedded in an epic genealogy, Bellerophon’s is a story of erotic triangles, ideal matter for a novel. We do not know where Homer got the story; presumably it reflects an extremely ancient Lydian layer in the epic tradition from which he drew, dating from a time long before his own (supposing we place Homer in the eighth century b.c.). It was a time when some form of reading and writing was known to the Aegean world, or at least to the people of Lykia where the story is set. No one knows what system of writing this was. Homer

Cicadas from: Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: … and the cicadas appear to be staring down at us, singing away in the heat over our heads and chatting with one another…. (258e)

Mythoplokos from: Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: Imagine a city where there is no desire. Supposing for the moment that the inhabitants of the city continue to eat, drink and procreate in some mechanical way; still, their life looks flat. They do not theorize or spin tops or speak figuratively. Few think to shun pain; none give gifts. They bury their dead and forget where. Zeno finds himself elected mayor and is set to work copying the legal code on sheets of bronze. Now and again a man and a woman may marry and live very happily, as travellers who meet by chance at an inn; at

Book Title: Authority, Autonomy, and Representation in American Literature, 1776-1865- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): PATTERSON MARK R.
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zv1pd

CHAPTER THREE Charles Brockden Brown, Authority, and Intentionality from: Authority, Autonomy, and Representation in American Literature, 1776-1865
Abstract: The late eighteenth century in America was a frightened age. The social aftershocks of the Revolution continued to shake the United States’ political structure as the country neared what appeared to be the apocalyptic end of the eighteenth century. In the 1780s and 1790s, America found itself tested by the internal conflicts as the two parties, the weakening Federalist party and the ever-more-powerful Republicans (the opposition party arising from Antifederalist sentiment), fought for control. Aggravating these internecine battles were fears of an international conspiracy stemming from the French Revolution.¹ The projected fears eventually gave rise to the Alien and Sedition

Book Title: Shakespeare-The Theater and the Book
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): KNAPP ROBERT S.
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zv1rc

TWO The Body of the Sign from: Shakespeare
Abstract: All shifts in modern sympathies notwithstanding, the perplexing thing about late medieval theater is still its radical union of drama with doctrine. I do not mean that there is trouble believing in the orthodoxy of the nonliturgical religious stage: despite a resurgence of Marxist criticism, and our increasing awareness of the dialogic character of all texts, I would not want to claim that the plays embody a dialectical tension between official teaching and popular expression or entertainment.¹ The difficulty, rather, is the absence of such a contradiction, and of any other obvious opposition in these texts between earnest and game,

THREE The Idea of the Play from: Shakespeare
Abstract: Two related myths of closure inscribe themselves within most modern attempts to understand the literary past. Both are myths of community. The first evokes an unfallen, preindustrial age without moral uncertainty, personal anomie, or economic alienation: this is the era inhabited by Benjamin’s storyteller or D. W. Robertson’s Chaucer, an era in which everyone’s experience was more or less public and shareable, as were the norms by which to judge it. Though hardly a world without sin and error, it at least permitted sin to be identified and at best was a world in which poetry mattered, not as unacknowledged

Book Title: Poetics of Reading- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): WIMMERS INGE CROSMAN
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zv2nc

INTRODUCTION from: Poetics of Reading
Abstract: In his provocatively titled Is There a Text in This Class?Stanley Fish, for one, expresses such rising skepticism: “In 1970 I was asking the

TWO Rewriting vraisemblance in La Princesse de Clèves from: Poetics of Reading
Abstract: When La Princesse de Clèveswas first published in March 1678, it gave rise to lively discussions. Of major interest in these first responses to the book was the behavior of its central character, the princess. A telling example is the poll organized byLe Mercure Galantthat asked its readers whether Mme. de Clèves was right to tell her husband about her love for the due de Nemours. The majority thought not. Her conduct seemed implausible, since according to social custom (the well-established code ofbienséance), such behavior was not sanctioned.¹ Readers of the time did not ask themselves

THREE Madame Bovary or the Dangers of Misreading from: Poetics of Reading
Abstract: Though the novel’s title focuses the reader’s attention on what he may well expect to be its central subject, such expectations are frustrated from the start, since the opening chapters focus on Charles, not Emma. Nor is this narrative focus a stable one, as soon becomes evident when other disconcerting hurdles are encountered. Through jarring contrasts and shifting perspectives, Flaubert’s reader is soon drawn into a more active, hermeneutic reading; the central question is no longer “What will happen next?” but, rather, “Why are things told that way?” This heightened attention to narrative form takes us beyond the story world

Book Title: The Princeton Handbook of Poetic Terms- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Brogan T. V. F.
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zv2s9

Book Title: The Reader in the Text-Essays on Audience and Interpretation
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Crosman Inge
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zv3jc

Introduction: from: The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Suleiman Susan R.
Abstract: For the past few years, we have been witnessing just such a change in the field of literary theory and criticism. The words readerandaudience,once relegated to the status of the unproblematic

Do Readers Make Meaning? from: The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Crosman Robert
Abstract: The question is itself annoyingly vague and ambiguous, yet it is as close as I can get to expressing what seems to me the central issue of literary theory today. When Jonathan Culler calls for a “theory of reading,” when Stanley Fish speaks of “reading communities” and “reading strategies,” when Jacques Derrida announces that “the reader writes the text,” they are all, in varying degrees, answering in the affirmative. And when other theorists—Wayne Booth, E. D. Hirsch, and a host of others—see solipsism and moral chaos in such an answer, they too are testifying to the importance of

Toward a Sociology of Reading from: The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Suleiman Susan R.
Abstract: When raising the question of the reader’s status in the text, we may have in mind two sets of problems. According to one approach, the reader is thought of as an end conceived by the writer, whose work, accordingly, may be read in reference to the idea we have of that reader. A certain number of studies have enriched the history of literary criticism in this way, showing that the expectations of a particular public aimed at by the writer were determinative down to the most secret strata of the text (Jauss’s Erwartungshorizontfor example).

Notes on the Text as Reader from: The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Prince Gerald
Abstract: (1) “The two suites on the second floor were taken, one by an old gentleman named Poiret; the other by a man of forty, who wore a black wig, dyed his whiskers, said he was in business,

“What’s Hecuba to Us?” from: The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Rabinowitz Peter J.
Abstract: In choosing the title “Phorion” (“Stolen Goods”) for his hallucinatory fantasy on a Bach prelude, Lukas Foss wittily summed up not only a swelling subgenre of contemporary music, but a major trend in literature and film as well. We live in an age of artistic recycling: Alain Robbe-Grillet’s Les Gommesborrows fromOedipus;Tom Stoppard’sRosencrantz and Guildenstern Are Deadincorporates passages fromHamlet,while hisTravestiestakes Joyce’sUlysses(itself built on Homer) and Wilde’sThe Importance of Being Earnestas basic material. Peter Maxwell Davies, Hugh Hartwell, George Rochberg, and Karlheinz Stockhausen have in their diverse ways “recomposed”

Toward A Theory of Reading in the Visual Arts: from: The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Marin Louis
Abstract: This paper is an attempt at reading a single painting—Poussin’s The Arcadian Shepherds(Louvre)¹—but such a tentative reading cannot be truly accomplished without being aware of the operations involved in the contemplative process, their implications on theoretical and practical levels, and the hypotheses which guide that process. My essay can thus be considered as an approach to a partial history of reading in the field of visual art. To put my undertaking in more general terms, I wish to test some notions and procedures elaborated in contemporary semiotic and semantic theories by using a specific painting as an

Exemplary Pornography: from: The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Beaujour Michel
Abstract: In order to avoid the kind of frivolity that holds ethical concerns to be irrelevant in a discussion of the reader in (of) texts, it may be wise to revisit briefly the Russian critical tradition. This tradition has entertained with high seriousness the notion—somewhat disreputable in the West—that literature, and particularly fiction, must be held accountable, since it encodes messages which affect not only the subjective world view of readers, but their attitudes and actions. Novels are presumed capable of endangering (or reinforcing) the structure of society and the legal order.¹ Rufus Mathewson’s analysis of Russian radical poetics

The Theory and Practice of Reading Nouveaux Romans: from: The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Mistacco Vicki
Abstract: A critic interested in how we read nouveaux romans might very well be allergic to terms like convention, naturalhation,andliterary competence.Being institutional, conventions rest upon a foundation that smacks uncomfortably of the “dominant ideology” so often decried by Ricardou and his disciples. Naturalization involves constructing “communicative circuits”¹ into which we can fit a literary text; the nouveau roman officially rejects the idea of literature as communication.² And although the reader’s intertext has been invoked as an important factor in processing a given text,³ the model of literary competence has been challenged by that of performance, presumably less

9 Autonomy and Multinationality in Spain: from: Contemporary Majority Nationalism
Author(s) FOSSAS ENRIC
Abstract: It is not easy to summarize the twenty-five years of Spanish decentralization, because it was an exercise of great political and legal complexity that included several factors and many nuances. It is therefore a very difficult subject to deal with in a satisfying manner within the framework of a conference, where this chapter originated. Moreover, every assessment is always tainted by some subjectivity that is inevitably dependent on preconceived political ideas, as well as inescapable cultural sensibilities. Finally, the time when a study is conducted can influence the evaluation of a historical period, which is the case today, since Spain

Book Title: The Skeptic Disposition-Deconstruction, Ideology, and Other Matters
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Goodheart Eugene
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zv4x4

4 READING WITH/OUT A TEXT from: The Skeptic Disposition
Abstract: For Roland Barthes, the pleasure of the text is in the making of one’s own text at the expense of the text of another. “Thus begins at the heart of the critical work, the dialogue of two histories and two subjectivities, the author’s and the critic’s. But this dialogue is egoistically shifted toward the present: criticism is not an homage to the truth of the past or to the truth of ‘others’—it is a construction of the intelligibility of our own time.”¹ In shamelessly confessing the egoism of the critical act, Barthes casts doubt upon the objective existence of

CONCLUSION: from: The Skeptic Disposition
Abstract: The implications of deconstruction extend beyond texts. One potential casualty of deconstruction is social criticism. Deconstruction makes social criticism of whatever inspiration (literary, historical, philosophical) very difficult, if not impossible. The touchstone for a literary-inspired social criticism has been of course, Matthew Arnold. Arnold had an abundant capacity for doubt, but he assumed the presence and fullness of the cultural tradition. Disinterestedness, the free play of the mind upon our “stock habits of thought and feeling” never really extended to the touchstones that formed his convictions. Arnold’s particular touchstones are, of course, vulnerable to criticism. The Hebraistic or puritanical constraints

Book Title: Shakespeare and the Dramaturgy of Power- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): COX JOHN D.
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zv52h

CHAPTER 7 POWER AND ARCHAIC DRAMATURGY IN ALL’S WELL THAT ENDS WELL from: Shakespeare and the Dramaturgy of Power
Abstract: Two comedies that Shakespeare wrote after Henry Vshow the clear impression of what he had done in the history plays. These two areAll’s Well That Ends WellandMeasure for Measure, both of which have been recognized as “problem plays” since F. S. Boas called them that in the late nineteenth century.¹ To a large extent, their problems can be understood as an experiment in the dramaturgy of power. On one hand, Shakespeare more explicitly—one is tempted to say, more confidently—recalls the traditions of popular medieval religious drama in these two plays than he had done

Book Title: Scripture, Canon and Commentary-A Comparison of Confucian and Western Exegesis
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): HENDERSON JOHN B.
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvb8n

Chapter 4 COMMENTARIAL ASSUMPTIONS from: Scripture, Canon and Commentary
Abstract: THE MOST UNIVERSAL and widely expressed commentarial assumption regarding the character of almost any canon is that it is comprehensive and all-encompassing, that it contains all significant learning and truth. As Jonathan Z. Smith has written, “Where there is a canon we can predict the necessary occurrence of a hermeneute, of an interpreter whose task it is to continually extend the domain of the closed canon over everything that is known or everything that is.”¹ This is true not only of classical or scriptural canons, such as Homer, the Christian Bible, the Torah, the Qur’ān, the Veda, and the Confucian

Book Title: The Status and Appraisal of Classic Texts- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): CONDREN CONAL
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvc26

CHAPTER 1 Methodology: from: The Status and Appraisal of Classic Texts
Abstract: Arguably, we live in an age of methodology, and if Shelley was right in stating that each deifies its greatest sins, are we, when confronted with such terms as methodology,metatheory,methodeutic, in the presence of a trinity—aspects of the god of rationalistic excess?¹ Possibly, but we are given to worse failings, for this has also been called the age of wastepaper and rubbish. For good or ill, few modern, major intellectual figures have not been concerned with problems of method. Moreover, we are prone to delineate intellectual activities, above all else, by their methods;² and the condition of

Introduction from: The Status and Appraisal of Classic Texts
Abstract: So far, although incomplete, my argument has shown sufficiently the difficulties of taking the major items of the received appraisive field of political theory seriously as a means of organizing the qualitative analysis of a text and of using the accepted virtues of this field as a means of explaining classic status. “A very wholesome and comfortable doctrine” perhaps, as Fielding wrote of something quite different, “and to which we have but one objection, namely, that it is not true.” Analytical categories easily become a pattern of historical expectation (see pp. 3–4), and it is as unsatisfactory to see

Introduction from: Isak Dinesen and Narrativity
Author(s) Woods Gurli A.
Abstract: Much has happened in Dinesen criticism in North America since Robert Langbaum launched his ground breaking study The Gayety of Visionin 1964.This book opened up the academic world in North America to an interest in the fiction of Danish writer Karen Blixen whose chosen pen name for her English speaking readers was Isak Dinesen. It is beyond the scope of this brief introduction to list the considerable amount of criticism published since then, but for the purposes of situating the resent collection of Dinesen criticism in context, the following important factors should be mentioned.

Tapping the Roots: from: Isak Dinesen and Narrativity
Author(s) Barnwell Kathryn
Abstract: “The Dreamers” was probably the first story of Seven Gothic Tales tohave been written after Dinesen returned to Rungstedlund, having left her African life behind her. And since she did nothing to discourage a comparison between herself and Pellegrina Leoni, the story’s mysterious central figure, we might suppose that this particular tale had a special significance for its author. Like Pellegrina, Dinesen had suffered loss by fire, had attempted suicide¹ and was forced to leave behind a life which had seemed perfectly resonant of her deepest self. Also like her heroine,Dinesen ever after mistrusted investing herself fully in one persona.In

Mallarméan Poetics and Isak Dinesen’s Politis in “The Blank Page” from: Isak Dinesen and Narrativity
Author(s) Gabriel Barbara
Abstract: The title of Dinesen's haunting tale suggests the white-on-white of acanvas by Russian painter Kasimir Malevich, reversing the Derridean reading of Western thought to construct a metaphysics of absence. It is the same non-meaning at the centre of the still geometry of Mondrian and Rothko, echoing formally the vanishing point at the heart of the ancient Mandala paradigm. But although concepts of void, emptiness, and silenceare at the centre of a number of non-Western belief systems, they have been marginalized historically in the institutionalized teachings of the Judeo-Christian tradition, constituting a way of knowing for the most partsituated within hermetic

The Phenomenon of Intertextuality and the Role of Androgyny in Isak Dinesen’s “The Roads Round Pisa” from: Isak Dinesen and Narrativity
Author(s) Black Casey Bjerregaard
Abstract: Intertextuality can be construed in a narrow way as a synonym for the explicit or indirect references that go by the name of allusion. More broadly conceived, however, to speak of intertextuality is to recognize that allliterary texts are interlinked and that no single text is an island of meaningunto itself. As Jonathan Culler puts it in Structuralist Poetics:

Book Title: The Skeptic Disposition In Contemporary Criticism- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Goodheart Eugene
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvcsb

4 READING WITH/OUT A TEXT from: The Skeptic Disposition In Contemporary Criticism
Abstract: For Roland Barthes, the pleasure of the text is in the making of one’s own text at the expense of the text of another. “Thus begins at the heart of the critical work, the dialogue of two histories and two subjectivities, the author’s and the critic’s. But this dialogue is egoistically shifted toward the present: criticism is not an homage to the truth of the past or to the truth of ‘others’—it is a construction of the intelligibility of our own time.”¹ In shamelessly confessing the egoism of the critical act, Barthes casts doubt upon the objective existence of

CONCLUSION: from: The Skeptic Disposition In Contemporary Criticism
Abstract: The implications of deconstruction extend beyond texts. One potential casualty of deconstruction is social criticism. Deconstruction makes social criticism of whatever inspiration (literary, historical, philosophical) very difficult, if not impossible. The touchstone for a literary-inspired social criticism has been of course, Matthew Arnold. Arnold had an abundant capacity for doubt, but he assumed the presence and fullness of the cultural tradition. Disinterestedness, the free play of the mind upon our “stock habits of thought and feeling” never really extended to the touchstones that formed his convictions. Arnold’s particular touchstones are, of course, vulnerable to criticism. The Hebraistic or puritanical constraints

Book Title: History as a Visual Art in the Twelfth-Century Renaissance- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Morrison Karl F.
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvdgf

Chapter 8 CONCLUSIONS: from: History as a Visual Art in the Twelfth-Century Renaissance
Abstract: At the outset, I invoked the authority of John Scotus Eriugena. In some Scriptural parables, he found, hidden beneath the surface of the text, a structure of transitions that enabled astute interpreters to move from one figure to another, thus establishing multiple meanings. These transitions constituted an invisible framing structure, but one that was by no means evident to all (see Preface, n. 2). I have suggested that twelfth-century historical writers likewise assumed invisible transitusin their own works, as well as in Scripture, and that they indicated as much by the analogies that they drew between their works and

CONCLUSION from: The Life of Roman Republicanism
Abstract: At the core of most classical and contemporary approaches to politics—including the recently fashionable Carl Schmitt and his epigones—lies the commitment to the concept of sovereignty and the tendency, dominant since the nineteenth century emergence of sociology and economics, to treat human beings primarily as rational calculators or creatures of practical reason. But it is not clear that the Romans who think constructively about politics privilege either sovereignty or reason as starting or end points—or indeed that they believe that politics can yield much to systematic analysis.

Book Title: What's Happened to the Humanities?- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Kernan Alvin
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvftq

Foreword from: What's Happened to the Humanities?
Author(s) SHAPIRO HAROLD T.
Abstract: Humanistic scholarship—especially the close reading and interpretation of texts—has always been an important part of our cultural inheritance, particularly since the eighteenth-century flowering of biblical philology and hermeneutics. The twentieth century has witnessed not only a redefinition of the humanities and a new disciplinary organization of teaching and research in this and other areas, but also the successive development of a number of new approaches to the interpretation of texts. In the most recent decades, some would say that certain components of the humanities have changed more than any other area of study at the universities. One clear

Introduction: from: What's Happened to the Humanities?
Author(s) KERNAN ALVIN
Abstract: Institutionally, in the standard academic table of organization, the university catalogue—the knowledge tree of contemporary western culture—the humanities are the subjects regularly listed under that heading: literature, philosophy, art history, music, religion, languages, and sometimes history. This branch of knowledge is separated from the branch of the social sciences and from the branch of the biological and physical sciences. These three branches together form the arts and sciences, or the liberal arts, as they are sometimes known, which are as a group separated in turn from the professional disciplines—such as medicine, education, business, and law—which, at

One Democratization and Decline? from: What's Happened to the Humanities?
Author(s) HUNT LYNN
Abstract: Teaching and research in the humanities are shaped by various factors, not all of which are immediately evident either to the public or to humanities scholars themselves. This essay examines the role of some of those silently acting but nonetheless effective agents in remaking the world of higher education. The focus will be on the intersection of two major structural trends: the ever-progressing democratization of higher education and the less certain but nonetheless potentially momentous decline in the status of the humanities. How are these trends connected to each other? More generally, what are the likely consequences of demographic changes

Four Evolution and Revolution: from: What's Happened to the Humanities?
Author(s) SABIN MARGERY
Abstract: Many reasonable consultants prescribe more debate as the best treatment for current symptoms of pathology in the humanities.¹ Debate therapy, however, in this case somewhat resembles the old fever cure. Rhetorical techniques such as caricature, imprecation, lament, and dire prophecy all win debate points in the humanities, but only while further raising our collective fever. The degree to which grandiose claims and spectacular accusations have in recent decades infected discussion of change in the humanities is itself a key symptom of a historical disorder that the method of debate can hardly hope to cure.

Book Title: The Tale of the Tribe-Ezra Pound and the Modern Verse Epic
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Bernstein Michael André
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvgsp

CHAPTER ONE A POEM INCLUDING HISTORY from: The Tale of the Tribe
Abstract: In his essay, “Ez and Old Billyum,” Richard Ellmann refers to these lines and restricts his commentary to a single, ironic sentence: “Orage stood on the firm ground of Major Douglas’ economics.”² Clearly Ellmann intends to allow Pound’s own extravagance to mock its author, and his laconic dismissal itself “stands on” the assurance that all except for a few “credit cranks” (Pound’s own term)³ will find the poet’s judgment not worth serious consideration. Later in this chapter, I will examine the function of Pound’s fiscal doctrine as an integral development of his conception of history, but first there is a

CHAPTER THREE THUS WAS IT IN TIME from: The Tale of the Tribe
Abstract: “It may suit some of my friends to go about with their noses pointing skyward, decrying the age and comparing us un-favourably to the dead men of Hellas or of Hesperian Italy. . . . But I, for one, have no intention of decreasing my enjoyment of this vale of tears by under-estimating my own generation.”² These lines, so characteristic of Pound’s exuberance at its finest, record both the energy he derived from collaborating “with the most intelligent men of the period” ( GK:217), the “lordly companions” with whom he had struggled to modernize the arts of his day, and his

Book Title: Symbol and Truth in Blake's Myth- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Damrosch Leopold
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvh3g

INTRODUCTION from: Symbol and Truth in Blake's Myth
Abstract: This book attempts to elucidate some fundamental problems in Blake’s myth and in the theory of imagination on which it is implicitly founded. Despite years of trying earnestly to see the myth as philosophically coherent, I have come to believe that it contains serious inconsistencies and owes its lines of development to Blake’s unceasing effort to reconcile them. I am deeply indebted, as will be obvious, to the rich variety of insights available in Blake scholarship, but I shall argue against both prevailing views that assume coherence in Blake’s myth: the orthodox claim that it never changed, and the revisionist

FOUR The Zoas and the Self from: Symbol and Truth in Blake's Myth
Abstract: Blake’s myth is above all else psychological. His cosmology, theology, and even epistemology are all transpositions of the central inquiry into the self. This is no disinterested quest. Like many in his age Blake was haunted, if not obsessed, by dividedness within the self and between self and world. As Hegel said in his first published work, division or discord (Entzweiung)“is the source of the need for philosophy.” And both Hegel and Blake were convinced that harmony must be achieved by restoring the fruitful interaction of opposites, not by abolishing them. “When the power of unification disappears from the

Book Title: I Am You-The Hermeneutics of Empathy in Western Literature, Theology and Art
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Morrison Karl F.
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvm0c

INTRODUCTION from: I Am You
Abstract: The history of compassion is yet to be written. With the studied artlessness of his age, Bernard de Fontenelle (1657–1757) lightly touched the starting point—a common humanity. “All human faces in general,” he wrote, “are of the same model, and yet the Europeans and the Africans have two particular models: nay, commonly every family has a different aspect. What secret then has nature to show so much variety in a single face? Our world, in respect of the universe, is but a little family, where all the faces bear some resemblance to each other. . . ,”¹ In

NINE The Hermeneutic Gap in Painting from: I Am You
Abstract: We have now considered the understanding in the enterprise of understanding words. From words, or participation in another through the sense of hearing, we turn to pictures, participation through sight—the sense that, with hearing, lies at the base of all thought about esthetic understanding. Here, as in earlier discussions, we shall find that, even when the esthetic paradigm of assimilation predominated, it was complemented, through a common link of eroticism, with the biological paradigm. The analogy of composing with engendering was never entirely out of mind. As before, we shall find that the union of “I” and “you” was

TWELVE The Ascendancy of Sensations over Passions: from: I Am You
Abstract: The contemplative tradition in Western art was an erotic tradition. Violent and exalted, eroticism took many forms, but it was always present in that moment when the contemplator took to his heart the object of his desire. When this kind of absorption occurred in the asymmetry of viewer and painting, it generally hinged on invention, that is, on the subject portrayed. When it occurred in the asymmetry of artist and painting, it hinged on the manifold experience of previsualization, that is, on the instant of choosing the subject. The pathetic and affective fallacies played a role in both asymmetries.

Book Title: Neverending Stories-Toward a Critical Narratology
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Tatar Maria
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvn6q

FIVE HABSBURG LETTERS: from: Neverending Stories
Author(s) Wolff Larry
Abstract: On april 19, 1770, the fourteen-year-old Habsburg archduchess, Marie Antoinette, was married in Vienna by proxy to the faraway Bourbon dauphin, the future Louis XVI. Two days later, Marie Antoinette left Vienna forever, setting off to join her new husband in France, and taking leave of her mother, the Empress Maria Theresa, whom she would never see again. That date—“21 April, the day of departure”—headed the first letter in the ten-year correspondence that then ensued between mother and daughter. It is a correspondence that has exercised a certain historical fascination since its first publication in 1864, especially inasmuch

Book Title: The Language of Balinese Shadow Theater- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): ZURBUCHEN MARY SABINA
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvpqd

2 LANGUAGE FROM BIRTH TO DEATH from: The Language of Balinese Shadow Theater
Abstract: Language, even though a universal human attribute, may not always possess universal significance across cultures. That is to say, different language groups may view the place of language in the world, and in human experience, in different ways Beliefs about language in turn reflect as well as shape the techniques a culture uses for processing and communicating knowledge. The Balinese manifest complex beliefs about language consistent with their elaborate material and ritual culture, m surveying these beliefs we are brought into contact with an equally ornate system of metaphysical interpretations. These interpretations have important bearing on vocal traditions, literary forms,

[PART TWO Introduction] from: The Language of Balinese Shadow Theater
Abstract: It is surprising that, among all of Bali’s varied dramatic arts, the shadow theater (wayang)has received relatively little detailed attention in the works of scholars The standard treatise on dance and drama of the island (de Zoete and Spies 1938, new edition 1973) mentions wayang only in passing¹ In the most popular introduction to Balinese culture in general, Covarrubias (1937 243) gives some description of the setting and technique of wayang, noting that even though foreign visitors might not see much of interest in the drama,

Book Title: Fabricating History-English Writers on the French Revolution
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Friedman Barton R.
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvq6m

Introduction from: Fabricating History
Abstract: Some years ago at a conference on history and narrative art, hosted by the University of Wisconsin English Department, I watched one of the few historians to have ventured into that den of (mostly) literary critics and philosophers of history berate the assemblage for repeatedly insisting on the kinship between historical narrative and fiction Actually, the argument in which this indignant historian became embroiled had been adumbrated by Northrop Frye, who observes, in an essay entitled “New Directions from Old,” that though historians’ narratives (like those of poets) incorporate “unifying forms,” or myths, “to tell a historian that what gives

ONE Fabricating History from: Fabricating History
Abstract: “Reasons and opinions concerning acts, are,” Blake proclaims in the Descriptive Catalogueto his exhibition of 1809, “not history Acts themselves alone are history “Thus he announces himself a partisan of the movement against Enlightenment historiography in the then budding (and still flourishing) debate over how, or whether, the past can be plausibly represented to those living in the present Acts, Blake adds, “are neither the exclusive property of Hume, Gibbon nor Voltaire, Echaid, Rapin, Plutarch nor Herodotus” (E, p 534) Reasoning historians all, they twist cause and consequence, and in separating acts from their explanations—proposing chains of cause

SIX Proving Nothing: from: Fabricating History
Abstract: “I left off on a note of hope,” Hardy wrote to his friend Edward Clodd in 1908 “It was just as well that the Pities should have the last word, since The Dynastsproves nothing”¹ Thus, with a single pronouncement, he anticipates and would appar ently have dismissed almost eighty years of critical debate concerning the metaphysical significance of the Overworld in his drama of the Napoleonic Wars

Book Title: Fictions in Autobiography-Studies in the Art of Self-Invention
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): EAKIN PAUL JOHN
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvs6h

CHAPTER FOUR Self-Invention in Autobiography: from: Fictions in Autobiography
Abstract: In The WordsJean-Paul Sartre presents the two opposing views of the nature of the self and its relation to language that have been the principal subject of debate among theorists of autobiography in recent years: is the self autonomous and transcendent, or is it contingent and provisional, dependent on language and others for its very existence? In the fable of the train we are shown a Poulou whose ticketless condition exemplifies his initial lack of justified selfhood, his alienated sense of exclusion from the closed system of pre-existing reality—the Simonnot-like solidity of other selves—into which he has

1 W.V.Quine: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Kemp Gary
Abstract: Western philosophy since Descartes has been marked by certain seminal books whose concern is the nature and scope of human knowledge. After Descartes's Meditations,works by Locke, Berkeley, Hume and Kant are perhaps the most familiar and enduringly influential examples. Quine'sWord and Object(1960) not conspicuously announce itself as an intended successor to these, but is very much what it is. And after Wittgenstein'sPhilosophical Investigations,it is among the most likely of the philosophical fruits of the twentieth century to attain something like the prestige of those earlier works (setting aside century's great achievements in pure logic and

2 P.F.Strawson: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Snowdon Paul
Abstract: Peter Strawson published Individualsin 1959. He had been a Fellow at University College, Oxford, since 1948. Later he was appointed as Gilbert Ryle's successor to the Waynflete Professorship in Oxford. Strawson had achieved fame, like Frege earlier and Kripke later, by writing about reference. In “On Referring” (1950a) he criticized Russell's theory of definite descriptions and claimed that at least some uses of expressions of the form “TheF” are devices reference rather than a form of general quantification.¹ He moved from this to consider the question of the general relation between ordinary language formal logic, in his first

3 John Rawls: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Laden Anthony Simon
Abstract: In his classes, John Rawls routinely quoted R. G. Collingwood’s remark that “the history of political theory is not the history of different answers to one and same question, but the history of a problem more or less constantly changing, whose solution was changing with it" (Rawls 2000b: xvi). To understand Rawls’s own work, we would do well to understand the problem he took himself be addressing. Fortunately, Rawls tells us what that problem is:

5 Michael Dummett: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Weiss Bernhard
Abstract: Truth Other Enigmasis a collection of some of Michael Dummett's writings on truth and other enigmas. The other enigmas include: meaning and understanding, time and causation, the past, realism, logic, proof, vagueness and philosophy itself. The writings span a considerable portion of Dummett's career - the years 1953 to 1975 - and reflect his diverse concerns in that period. So it would be a to look for and wrong to impose a single theme that unifies the essays.However, two issues stand out as central, recurring as they do in many of the essays. One issue is the set of

13 Charles Taylor: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Abbey Ruth
Abstract: Since its publication in 1989, Charles Taylor's Sources of the Selfhas commanded much attention and generated considerable controversy. It has attracted lavish praise and fierce criticism - sometimes from the same commentator!¹ Yet when one considers its scope and ambition, it is not surprising thatSources of the Selfshould have elicited, and should continue to elicit, such a range of reactions. This chapter provides an overview of the book by outlining what Taylor was attempting to do inSources of the Self;what conception of the self it adduces; what the sources of the modern self are and

14 John McDowell: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Thornton Tim
Abstract: First, it addresses what is perhaps the central question of modern philosophy since Descartes: what is the relation between mind and world? This large and rather abstract question is raised through a number of more specific, but still central, questions in philosophy. How is it possible for thoughts to be about the

Book Title: Between Muslim and Jew-The Problem of Symbiosis under Early Islam
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): WASSERSTROM STEVEN M.
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvsxn

Book Title: Modernist Anthropology-From Fieldwork to Text
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Manganaro Marc
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvt1j

Ruth Benedict and the Modernist Sensibility from: Modernist Anthropology
Author(s) HANDLER RICHARD
Abstract: In recent works, Michael Levenson (1984) and Kathryne Lindberg (1987) have charted the tension within literary modernism between the quest for self-expression and the desire to recover a viable tradition. Both critics, in strikingly different ways, have presented the dialogue and debate between Ezra Pound and T. S. Eliot (among others) as emblematic of the larger opposition of individuality and tradition, or deconstructive originality and cultural constraint. In my work on the literary endeavors of Boasian anthropologists, I have examined a similar tension in the development of a culture theory that could accommodate both cultural holism and human individuality. Using

The Historical Materialist Critique of Surrealism and Postmodernist Ethnography from: Modernist Anthropology
Author(s) WEBSTER STEVEN
Abstract: Form has become important in some contemporary ethnographic writing. However, the social theory implicit in the writing cannot be easily distinguished from its form. History is obscured in this merger, which is itself historic. In the social sciences, the long-established distinction between aesthetic criticism and social science, although often questioned, seems to have become blurred in practice and problematic in theory since about the 1960s. In aesthetics and literary criticism, on the other hand, the apparent convergence has long been implicit in the conceptual framework of modernism. Since the 1970s the perhaps related processes in some of the social sciences

Book Title: The Writer Writing-Philosophic Acts in Literature
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Thomas Francis-Noël
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvvd9

CHAPTER SIX Marcel Proust: from: The Writer Writing
Abstract: A la recherche du temps perduis so unconventional that there is no danger of mistaking it for an “ordinary” novel. The demands it makes of its readers are so great that Proust is almost obliged to promise more than the ordinary aesthetic pleasures of fiction as a condition for finding readers at all. He does promise more and has apparently fulfilled his promise. Early critics who accused his book of being formless, chaotic, and self-indulgent have long since given way to those who see it as a distinguished and serious work, not only a great work of fiction but

CHAPTER SEVEN Historical Interpretation: from: The Writer Writing
Abstract: In the course of discussing the concept of historical interpretation in the opening chapter, I quoted R. G. Collingwood on the proper way to understand “what a man means.” This phrase was conventional in 1939, the publication date of Collingwood’s book. This nuance of his discourse helps to date him by placing him within a set of conventions about gender. Such conventions have changed so much in the ensuing fifty years that if an Oxford professor of philosophy were to use this phrase today in a similar context, it would seem pointed.

Book Title: The Semantics of Desire-Changing Models of Identity from Dickens to Joyce
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Weinstein Philip M.
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvwf7

[PART ONE Introduction] from: The Semantics of Desire
Abstract: The chapters on Dickens and Eliot move, in their respective ways, laterally and downward. They seek to convey the imaginative geography of each writer’s world—its norms of characterization, plot sequence, and setting—as well as to identify within each world, beneath the surface, a cluster of latent confusions. I attend to Dickens and Eliot in the measure that their work reveals an internal resistance to its own premises. Indeed, one formulation of Dickens’ more capacious achievement is that his work manages (as Eliot’s does not) to assimilate—by out-maneuvering, by disguising, by blinking—its own fissures.

One The Nocturnal Dickens from: The Semantics of Desire
Abstract: As often, he was suffering from insomnia. Restless, certain that sleep would not come before morning—if at all—he dressed quickly, pocketed his notebook and pencil, and headed toward the river. Perhaps he would come across the inspector, and together they could survey the sinister traffic on the water that night. He was making his way briskly along the empty streets when, to his surprise, he came upon a young prostitute standing in the middle of the road about fifty yards away, alone and energetically swearing. Curious, he listened to the unbroken stream of oaths, and he began to

Book Title: Modernist Poetics of History-Pound, Eliot, and the Sense of the Past
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Longenbach James
Abstract: ThePrinceton Legacy Libraryuses the latest print-on-demand technology to again make available previously out-of-print books from the distinguished backlist of Princeton University Press. These paperback editions preserve the original texts of these important books while presenting them in durable paperback editions. The goal of the Princeton Legacy Library is to vastly increase access to the rich scholarly heritage found in the thousands of books published by Princeton University Press since its founding in 1905.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvx3v

Chapter Three Canzoni: from: Modernist Poetics of History
Abstract: the whole effect [was] pleasingly 18th century—Goya, Rossini, Goldini sort of effect, delighting my sense of history— notmy “historical sense”—a difference to be explained at length

Chapter Seven Eeldrop and Appleplex: from: Modernist Poetics of History
Abstract: Eliot first came to visit Pound in the triangular study of his Kensington apartment in the Autumn of 1914, and Pound immediately sent “The Love Song of J. Alfred Prufrock” to Harriet Monroe, calling it “the best poem I have yet had or seen from an American” (L, 40). At the same time, Eliot wrote to Conrad Aiken that he found Pound’s verse “touchingly incompetent.”¹ This opinion would change. Eliot went up to Oxford, completed his dissertation on the philosophy of F. H. Bradley, married Vivienne Haigh-Wood, suffered, moved back to London, and began working at Lloyds Bank in 1917.

6 An Ethics of Measure: from: Existentialist Thinkers and Ethics
Author(s) KNEE PHILIP
Abstract: Despite Camus’ refusal to be labelled an existentialist, his early thought in The OutsiderandThe Myth of Sisyphusis sometimes seen as an example of existentialism’s incapacity to avoid ethical nihilism. Rather than discussing (once again) the accuracy of such judgments, I want to offer some reflections on the positive ethics Camus provided a few years later inThe Rebel. To do this, I will compare it with certain aspects of Rousseau’s thought, however paradoxical this comparison may at first appear.

1 Voices of Royaumont from: Transdisciplinarity
Author(s) Klein Julie Thompson
Abstract: A stay at Royaumont Abbey, as the original inhabitants intended, is good for the mind and soul. Acquired by King Louis IX in 1228 from nuns of the Saint-Martin-de-Boran priory, the Royaumont estate became the site of a new abbey for the Cistercian order of monks. Subsequently occupied by nuns of the Holy Family of Bordeaux, Royaumont would also become the residence of a wealthy businessman, a hospital for wounded soldiers in World War I, and eventually an international cultural center. The travelers who journeyed in May 1998 to this meeting place of artists and intellectuals were, like Roderick Macdonald’s

5 Perspectives from Physicians and Medical Scientists from: Transdisciplinarity
Author(s) Benatar Solomon
Abstract: I understand the concept of transdisciplinarity as an integrated approach to complex problems using the methodology and insights from a range of disciplines with differing perspectives on the problem under consideration. Clearly, the term needs to be distinguished from what is meant by multi- and interdisciplinarity, but these three terms can be seen as a continuum, with transdisciplinarity as the most evolved version of an interaction that transcends individual disciplines.

7 Exploring Transdisciplinarity from: Transdisciplinarity
Author(s) Macdonald Roderick
Abstract: One of the crucial activities in any transdisciplinary endeavor is the process of clarifying assumptions, recognizing commonalities and differences, and formulating a working agreement in order to achieve a particular goal. Our assigned goal was to generate a definition of transdisciplinarity. The working group divided its time into three phases: initial exploratory discussion, a more focused effort to create a single definition, and preparation of an oral report to the colloquium.

Afterword from: Transdisciplinarity
Author(s) Rapport David J
Abstract: We leave this text, in a metaphysical sense, in mid-sentence. But this is appropriate. It will be for many others to write the next paragraphs, chapters, and books in the evolution of transdisciplinarity. Transdisciplinarity is a dynamic process, not a static event, and it is one which will continue to need increasingly deep, broad, and diverse contributions. Transdisciplinarity is an idea whose time has come and one whose time will remain.

Introduction from: Subaltern Appeal to Experience
Abstract: Over the last few decades, the term “experience” has persistently preoccupied certain strands in cultural, subaltern, and aesthetic inquiry concerned with issues of agency, identity formation or counterhegemonic resistance. This preoccupation with experience has also sparked a series of skirmishes since the 1970s between those who debunk experience as the stuff of an antiquated philosophy of consciousness and those who, on the contrary, seek its rehabilitation by resurrecting Dilthey or Dewey. Heated and protracted exchanges on experience take place to this day in such journals as the New Left Review, Critical Inquiry, New Literary History, and theYale Journal of,

5 Experience and the Temporal Logic of Late Modernity from: Subaltern Appeal to Experience
Abstract: A confluence of sociohistorical vectors so impinged on processes of self-formation, then, that by the mid- to late eighteenth century the self increasingly becomes a narrative of events, or, to use Taylor’s expression, a “chain of happenings.” And these events, or happenings, insofar as they are reflexively reworked into a self’s horizon, are what experience is all about. But it is legitimate at this point to ask whether the continuity between the late eighteenth and the late twentieth century noted by Taylor still holds – whether, in other words, those late-eighteenth-century socio-historical preconditions for an accentuated role of experience in

Book Title: In Search of Elegance-Towards an Architecture of Satisfaction
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Beauprè-Lincourt Louise
Abstract: Michel Lincourt calls for a dignified architecture, centred around the concept of elegance, that will provide satisfaction to both its users and the surrounding society. Elegance, defined as the symbiosis of excellence and magnificence, is the ultimate attribute of any creative endeavour and achieving it is the architect's prime motivation. Using this concept, Lincourt develops a set of archetypes for designing a more satisfactory architecture and provides an in-depth analysis of three examples of architectural elegance: the Palais-Royal and the Fondation Rothchild Workers' Residence in Paris and the Municipality of Outremont in Montreal.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt8002k

1 INTRODUCTION: from: In Search of Elegance
Abstract: The architect’s sine qua non undertaking is the architectural design practice, a multifaceted professional activity that seeks to meet people's habitation needs by supplying architectural products. Simply

4 VALUES AND DESIGN CRITERIA from: In Search of Elegance
Abstract: Architectural design entails the conscious enactment of a comprehensive decision-making endeavour, which necessitates, on the part of the architect, a never-ending sequence of value judgements. In all cases, the formulation of judgements requires the explicit use of criteria. In this context, a criterion may be understood as a standard by which a thing is assessed. Whether explicitly expressed or not, the validity of the criteria depends upon how well they conform to corresponding human values, which, in turn, underpin judgements. A list of value-based criteria for evaluating places that have already been built and assessing the design of new buildings

6 FONDATION ROTHSCHILD WORKERS’ RESIDENCE: from: In Search of Elegance
Abstract: My first visit there was late on a Thursday afternoon in September 1994. Many more were to follow. I wanted to see a subsidized housing complex that had been brought to my attention by a French colleague. 69Fortunately, he had provided me with an address - 8, rue de Prague. I could not have found the complex without this information. No exterior features distinguished it from its neighbours. Should foreign visitors be surprised to find that this, a

7 OUTREMONT: from: In Search of Elegance
Abstract: Now for our third phenomenological journey. I invite you to Montreal, where we will stroll through the municipality of Outremont, my home. Outremont is a small community tucked into northern flank of Mont-Royal. The mountain is at the geographic centre of Montreal, a large island on the Saint Lawrence River. To say the least, Montreal is a place of very sharp climatic contrasts. Summers in Outremont can be surprisingly hot, springs and autumns always seem too short, and winters are bitterly cold. 89But all the seasons have their pleasant days. The summer of 1993 was particularly felicitous. Mild mornings were

8 REVEILING ARCHITECTURE from: In Search of Elegance
Abstract: The preceding epochès and constitution were attempts to grasp the essence of architecture. Using three examples, we explored the symbiotic idea of high quality and great beauty as the necessary conditions for producing an architecture of satisfaction. But our inquiry is not yet finished. We have not taken the final step of the epochès. This step might involve a fuller formulation of the essence of architecture and lead to a respectful, successful design. And we have developed only one constitution; more are required.

10 CONCLUSION: from: In Search of Elegance
Abstract: Harnessing the phenomenological method of inquiry, the theory undertakes to answer the first question by defining the architectural artefact: it is a physical object, time and

Book Title: Living Prism-Itineraries in Comparative Literature
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): KUSHNER EVA
Abstract: She discusses the current state of comparative literary studies and the renewed role of comparative literature in a world that is at once more plural and more globalized, as well as some of the debates now taking place within literary criticism as a whole, including the interchange between comparative literature and cultural studies, the re-envisaging of the Renaissance, the work of Northrop Frye, myth and literature at the end of the twentieth century, modern drama, and post-colonialism. To play an important role in the human sciences, comparative literature had first to free itself of a number of restrictive habits, such as an insufficiently critical literary history. In order to do this, it had to think theoretically, but without yielding to the temptation of letting theory become an end in itself. Kushner demonstrates that, while under strong pressures to be a more rigourous science, comparative literature has realized that in the human sciences the validation of knowledge has to seek its own tests and criteria, becoming increasingly more open to individuality, difference, and life situations and controlling its tendency to universalize. With its emphasis on whether literary history is possible and the problems it raises for literary theory and for comparative literature in particular, The Living Prism adds an important dimension to the ongoing debate about criticism and comparative literary studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt801kq

Introduction from: Living Prism
Abstract: The unity of this book lies not in any answers it may bring but in the persistence of its questionings. The circumstances of life, study, and work had led me to the humanities: a smattering of Protestant theology, followed by philosophy, followed in turn by French literature of the twentieth century but gradually also of the sixteenth; and, along these paths, the discovery of comparative literature. These were – and are – widely separate disciplines, guarded by specialists who would view any border trespassing with suspicion. My transgressions were due to the availability of certain programs of study rather than others, and

4 Literary Studies, Cultural Studies: from: Living Prism
Abstract: Admittedly, my title dramatizes the tension that has been observed for some time between “literary” and “cultural” studies. A state of tension is not necessarily negative, but it does signal a need for attention. In this case it requires that special thought be given to the present and future orientation of comparative literature studies since the outcome may have profound repercussions upon this field of endeavour, from both an intellectual and a professional viewpoint.

15 History and the Absent Self from: Living Prism
Abstract: Despite the fact that collective identities (whether in terms of gender or culture or ethnicity) claim to exist, and to have the right to exist for the sake of the development of the individual self, that claim is often little more than window-dressing. Yet what can one hope to accomplish by showing that the subject of the subject has received insufficient attention or the wrong kind of attention? Even if it were only clarification, it would be time well spent. But humanists have more at stake in this questioning than just clear categories because it matters supremely – without any play

24 Liberating Children’s Imagination from: Living Prism
Abstract: It is now a commonly accepted fact that the development of feminist readings, by dint of providing different appropriations of literary texts than those that have long been taken for granted, have had a strong impact upon the theory of literature in general, since it became apparent that if reception and interpretation will vary with the

1 (Un)framing Genres from: From Cohen to Carson
Abstract: In choosing to work with the lyric, the long poem, and the novel, I have invoked three of the most established – but also the vaguest – terms in literary criticism. The formal innovation that critics identify as a key aspect of the lyric also characterizes the long poem and the novel. Paul Ricoeur remarks that the novel “has, since its creation, presented itself as the protean genre par excellence ... Indeed, it has constituted for at least three centuries now a prodigious workshop for experiments in the domains of composition.”² My aim here is not to wrestle these shape-shifting genres into

Section 3 Return to Opacity from: Distant Relation
Abstract: Carpentier discovers that writing, in fact, distills the authorial voice through the duplication and multiplication of voices opened by the repetition of texts that have preceded the author’s own. In this way, no text (indeed, no system of signification) can purport to be the one unique text, the text that could, through its own unity, lead us towards a unified totality. The notion of a unified literary tradition in which a singular voice could take on the value of the whole is therefore constantly dissolved in the multiplicity of voices that tradition is constituted by. What this finally discloses is

Book Title: Patriotic Elaborations-Essays in Practical Philosophy
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): BLATTBERG CHARLES
Abstract: Blattberg's is a genuinely original philosophical voice. The essays collected here discuss how to re-conceive the political spectrum, where "deliberative deomocrats" go wrong, why human rights language is tragically counterproductive, how nationalism is not really secular, how many nations should share a single state, a new approach to the Arab-Israeli conflict, and why Canada might have something to teach about the "war on terror." We also learn about the right way to deny a role to principles in ethics, how to distinguish between the good and the beautiful, the way humor works, the rabbinic nature of modernism, the difference between good, bad, great, and evil, why Plato's dialogues are not really dialogues, and why most philosophers are actually artists.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt8054j

2 Patriotic, Not Deliberative, Democracy from: Patriotic Elaborations
Abstract: Both those who defend what I call a patriotic politics and those in favour of a deliberative conception of democracy call on us to try to respond to conflict with conversation rather than just negotiation or bargaining.² And since conversation aims for reconciliation, for realizing the common good, while the compromises of negotiation take us no further than accommodation, both patriots and deliberative democrats can claim an inheritance from the classical republican tradition.³ To classical republicans, negotiation is the mark of a corrupt polity dominated by factions, this being how they would conceive of the politics advocated by contemporary pluralist

5 Federalism and Multinationalism from: Patriotic Elaborations
Abstract: Even those who accept that a single country can serve as a home for more than one nation are often led astray by the venerable nationstate model of what a country is or should be. Consider what has become a virtual axiom among scholars of nations and nationalism, namely that nationalists’ concern for self-determination invariably leads to a desire for sovereignty, for the complete control over a state. When applied to multinational federations, the axiom supports the assumption that the members of the minority nations will, at the very least, favour decentralization. Here, for example, is Will Kymlicka:

11 Good, Bad, Great, Evil from: Patriotic Elaborations
Abstract: There is a diversity of goods in the world: the various kinds of liberty (political, national, and individual), equality, welfare, happiness, friendship, beauty, family, pleasure, and so on. We come to adopt these goods as we grow up, forming and reforming the unique wholes that constitute our identities. These we realize throughout our lives as we participate in practices, which are but the expression of our goods. More often than not, we carry those practices out prereflectively, habitually, expressing goods that are so closely integrated and harmonious with each other that we are barely aware that they are there. But

3 The Kingston Years (1971–present) from: Istvan Anhalt
Author(s) SMITH GORDON E.
Abstract: The pathway that led Istvan Anhalt from McGill to Queen’s appeared only after much reflection. As seen in chapter 2, Anhalt’s decision to leave his full-time professorship at McGill University for Queen’s in 1971 did not come easily. He had worked at McGill since his arrival in Canada in 1949 with good results, building up the theory and composition department, establishing the Electronic Music Studio, and forming his reputation as a teacher and a composer. Over the twenty-two year period in Montreal, Anhalt had also found a stimulating circle of colleagues and friends, both English and French speaking. As an

Introduction from: Istvan Anhalt
Abstract: Throughout his career in Canada, Istvan Anhalt has demonstrated a stimulating talent not only for composing but also for writing about music. For all of his own major compositions he has provided at least one and in some instances several essays explaining the work’s aesthetic and musical qualities. His major contribution as an engaged and profound thinker about music is his book Alternative Voices, in which he brings his wide learning to bear on the subject of contemporary vocal and choral composition. It seems fitting, then, to include Anhalt’s voice here, in a number of essays that deal with his

13 On the Way to Traces: from: Istvan Anhalt
Abstract: A: You would not want me to make a hash of it this way, with or without attempting to add some of the vocal part. I am not much of a singer, and the piece demands a fairly high level of vocal agility, besides.

14 From “Mirage” to Simulacrum and “Afterthought” from: Istvan Anhalt
Abstract: I am here to speak about Simulacrum, which I shall do. Alongside this, I shall also have things to say about memory, recall, and about certain specific things I remember that, in one way or another, found their way intoSimulacrumas I was composing the piece.

16 A Continuing Thread? from: Istvan Anhalt
Abstract: I am writing this in December 1997, about a year and a half after the premiere of Traces(Tikkun). I am now in the midst of composing a new work for voices and orchestra which I am calling “A Voice-Drama for the Imagination.” As on earlier occasions, the thought that these works might be related, in some way, to my earlier works for voices (Comments, Cento, Foci, Thisness, and others) keeps coming back to mind. I now believe that there is a connection linking these pieces together; as a result, they could be, or perhaps even ought to be, regarded

Foreword from: Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism
Author(s) Jones Ben
Abstract: These essays, gathered as they are from a group of conference papers, show diversities of approach, concern, rhetoric and strategy. But they have been assembled with a sense of composition. They were not presumed to bring into focus a singular Nietzsche, this Nietzsche whose mark is plural. The conference, “Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism” (held at Carleton University, Ottawa, Canada, 25-28 September 1986), set out to initiate discussion of Nietzsche’s work, recognizing conventional interpretation of it, and to pose questions about whether or not (and if so, how?) it is rhetorical and nihilistic. Are there relations between rhetoric and

INTRODUCTION from: Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism
Author(s) Egyed Béla
Abstract: Nietzsche had much to say about nihilism. It might even be argued that it is the single most important theme running through his works. He says comparatively little about rhetoric. But one could assert that rhetoric is strongly implicated as one of Nietzsche’s permanent concerns. Indeed, it could be argued that such Nietzschean themes as perspectivism, nihilism, will to power, eternal recurrence, or the overman lose altogether

Passing-A-Way-Of-The-Child from: Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism
Author(s) Egyed Béla
Abstract: It is a bit late already and, I imagine, you have done a lot of work for the last two days, and will, no doubt, continue to do so. You have listened, in English and in French, to discourses of a high degree of intellectual, moral, and philosophical import. I would not wish to add, be it even a grain of coriander, to the mass of knowledge with which you now find yourselves loaded, like Nietzschean camels— no harm intended¹—who are ready to brave the crossing of the desert in hopes of carrying on their backs the richest products

Eurotaoism from: Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism
Author(s) Eldred Michael
Abstract: In the first section of this paper I will explain the necessity of posing the problem of nihilism differently from the way Nietzsche posed it. In the second section I elaborate on the idea that the philosophy of subjectivity—which is closely woven with the phenomenon of nihilism—is an attempt by Western thinking to compensate for the unhomeliness (Unheimlichkeit) of the world by means of a forced quest within oneself. In doing this I extend the old idea of philosophy as a spiritual midwife towards a general understanding of the subject as the centre of a will of exertions,

Nihilism and Technology from: Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism
Author(s) Cooper Barry
Abstract: George Grant, the only political philosopher this country has produced, once remarked that, during the century since Nietzsche wrote, “his opinions filtered down unrecognized through lesser minds to become the popular platitudes of the age, but also what he prophesied is now all around us to be easily seen” (Grant 1969, 25). The current level of vulgarization of Nietzsche’s thought is not perhaps as easily seen as what is all around us. What is all around us, in turn, is not so easy to characterize as to see. Heidegger considered Nietzsche’s the “final thought of Western metaphysics” (Heidegger 1984, 2:232).

The Life and Times of K.Z. Paltiel from: Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Paltiel Jeremy
Abstract: My father, K.Z. Paltiel, was born into a well-to-do family in the Jewish neighbourhood of Montreal on March 16, 1922. This was the same neighbourhood evoked by the poet A.M. Klein and later satirized by Richler. His father, Aaron David, who immigrated from Romania just before the turn of the century, had started off as a dry-goods merchant in Northern Ontario in Porcupine and North Bay, but settled down in Montreal around the time of the First World War and built up a successful business as a real estate developer and property manager. His mother, Bella Ruth, was a much

The Meech Lake Impasse in Theoretical Perspective from: Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) McRae Kenneth D.
Abstract: In spite of notable efforts by medieval theologians and modern constitutional lawyers to render their respective crafts esoteric, some things remain fundamentally simple. That is to say, their essentials can be understood by lay people possessing a little detachment and good will. Among these simple matters we may rank the basic relationship between Francophones and Anglophones in Canada, which appears reasonably clear to most informed observers outside the country, but which is obscured for many Canadians by the shadows and myths of the cave society in which they pass their lives. My main argument in this paper is that the

The Comparative Study of Clientelism and the Realities of Patronage in Modern Societies: from: Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Roniger Luis
Abstract: The study of patronage and clientelism — which has burgeoned in the social sciences since the late 1960s — can be considered part of a broader reaction against evolutionary assumptions about the presumed generalized move of modern society towards Western liberal forms of political development and bureaucratic-universalism. From different vantage points, these assumptions were seriously questioned by the research of scholars who analyzed the actual operation of modern institutions. Thus, over and above their concrete contribution, works by Khayyam Paltiel on the financing of modern parties and studies on political machines by J. Scott, René Lemarchand and Keith Legg — among others —have

From Parties to Symbols and Entourages: from: Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Noel S. J. R.
Abstract: “The power of rewarding modest worth is perhaps the sweetest blessing that attends Rank & authority, for our Great Master tells us that it is more blessed to give than to receive.” Thus wrote the Reverend John Strachan in 1818 (Spragge, 1946:186). For understandable reasons, however, prime ministers, premiers, and others in high political office have been inclined to view the business of bestowing discretionary rewards — that is, the dispensing of patronage — in a less altruistic light, and their power over it as less of a blessing than, as Brian Mulroney put it, “a pain in the neck” (Simpson, 1988:355).

A Political Economy Approach to Interest Representation from: Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Jenson Jane
Abstract: Thinking about modes of interest representation has undergone several permutations in recent years, as major alterations in post-war electoral coalitions mark the emergence of new political actors, partisan strategies, and forms of state/society and global relations. The diversity of literatures analyzing neo-corporatism, new social movements, New Left and post-modern politics indicates that the theoretical perspectives on liberal democracy which dominated political science and sociology after 1945 required reconceptualization. Moreover, since the political events provoking new theory occurred in conjunction with a profound crisis and restructuring of economic relations, even political economy approaches began to reassess representation.

New Social Movements and Unequal Representation: from: Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Phillips Susan D.
Abstract: As a scholar of Canadian politics, Khayyam Z. Paltiel was concerned with the appropriate and equitable representation of interests in the policy process. In particular, he addressed the issue of whether interest groups have displaced political parties as the fundamental agents of representation and democratic legitimation in the Canadian political system and he examined the impact of special interest groups on the Canadian state (1989, 1982). Because interest groups of all kinds have proliferated since the 1960s, they now are often in vigorous competition with each other, as well as with political parties, in the policy-making process. However, interest groups

The Changing Face of Class Politics in Quebec: from: Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Wise Bruce
Abstract: The 1980s witnessed the rise of a new and powerful francophone business class in the province of Quebec, which Gagnon and Paltiel (1986) have called a “Balzacian bourgeoisie.” This is a fitting concept, for it alludes to the great French writer and social critic of the July Monarchy, who documented the changes in social structure resulting from the industrial revolution in France, particularly the ascendancy of a commercial class whose concerns were with wealth, position and power. In similar fashion, economic change has brought Quebec’s new francophone business class to a dominant place within politics, government and society, so that

Popular Financing of Parties in Quebec: from: Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Massicotte Louis
Abstract: In his useful summary of world political finance, K.Z. Paltiel observed some years ago that parties generally had been unable to rely exclusively on individuals for raising funds, without the assistance of corporate, union or government bureaucracies (Paltiel, 1981). On 26 August 1977, royal assent was given in the Province of Quebec to a Bill (No.2) regulating political party financing. This legislation was, and has remained, quite unique by Canadian standards, insofar as it prohibited contributions from corporations, labour unions and individuals living outside the province: only provincial electors could henceforth contribute to parties (Massicotte, 1984). What the new Act

3 Matthew Arnold’s Wordsworth: from: Mind in Creation
Author(s) CURTIS JARED
Abstract: Wordsworth very nearly published a poem called The Tinkerin the collection of 1807, but he vigorously crossed it out before sending copy to the printer, and never printed it thereafter.¹ Had he published the poem, then or later, it might have tempered somewhat his Victorian reputation as a sombre poet of ideas. Sprinkled with cheerfulnon sequitursand local slang, the fifty-line poem is an amusing portrait of an itinerant pot-mender with a penchant for humming loudly at his work. No one has ever taken the poem seriously enough to suggest that it is a mock-heroic picture of the

4 Women and Words in Keats (with an Instance from La Belle Dame sans Merci) from: Mind in Creation
Author(s) TETREAULT RONALD
Abstract: It has become commonplace to praise Keats as a moral hero, bravely enduring the ravages of disease and disappointment until he makes his awkward bow from the stage of the tragedy that can be constructed from his life. His writing, however, is a different matter, for it offers no cathartic reconciliation. That calm of mind with which he faced his death (“Now you must be firm,” he reassured Severn, “for it will not last long”)¹ is missing from a text marked again and again by passion and uncertainty. Yet these, rather than any faith he may have achieved, may be

6 Romantic Aversions: from: Mind in Creation
Author(s) KNEALE J. DOUGLAS
Abstract: According to certain recent publications, the figure of apostrophe or aversiohas become something of an “embarrassment.” Jonathan Culler, in an essay entitled “Apostrophe,” claims that whatever else apostrophes may be, “above all they are embarrassing: embarrassing to me and to you.” Because it is allegedly so embarrassing, the figure, Culler asserts, has been “systematically repressed or excluded by critics”; more specifically, Mary Jacobus argues, it has been “regularly ignored by writers on the ode.”¹ In another essay Culler repeats his thesis: “Apostrophes are awkward and embarrassing. ... Critics either ignore them or transform apostrophe into description.”² And once more,

Book Title: The Modern Dilemma-Wallace Stevens, T.S. Eliot, and Humanism
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): SURETTE LEON
Abstract: Where Eliot's poetry is dominated by cultural, religious, and philosophical anxiety, Stevens' is bright, witty, and playful - and commonly dismissed as superficial. Surette demonstrates the seriousness of Stevens' life-long engagement with the modern dilemma of disbelief, showing that he, like Eliot, rejected the Humanist resolution. Surette proceeds by juxtaposing the two poets' responses in poetry and prose to the same texts and events: Marianne Moore's poetry, the Great War, Humanists and anti-Humanists, the Franco-Mexican Humanist Ramon Fernandez, Pure Poetry, and, finally, the gathering war clouds of the late 1930s.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt809f7

Introduction from: The Modern Dilemma
Abstract: A comparative study of Wallace Stevens and T.S. Eliot might be seen as an unpromising enterprise since one of the most notable things about the relationship between them is that it was virtually non-existent. When William Van O’Connor claimed in The Shaping Spiritthat Stevens knew Eliot “only slightly and principally through correspondence,” Stevens took the trouble to write to him: “As a matter of fact, I don’t know him at all and have had no correspondence whatever with him ... All I knew about him in the days ofOtherswas the correspondence between him and the people who

3 Writing Poetry in a Time of War from: The Modern Dilemma
Abstract: At the beginning of the previous chapter I postponed examination of Eliot’s and Stevens’ poetry of the First World War years until I had examined the evidence in Eliot’s prose and correspondence supporting my contention that in those years Eliot adopted – at least provisionally – a Humanist hostility toward religious belief. There was no necessity to demonstrate the same for Stevens, since it is widely assumed that his view of religion was essentially that of a Humanist – that religious beliefs are fantasies or fictions. In this chapter I examine the poems written and published by both poets before, during, and after

7 Avoiding the Abyss: from: The Modern Dilemma
Abstract: It is frustrating that Eliot nowhere gave any indication of why he had no interest in Stevens’ poetry. Since we have seen him admitting to taking pleasure in Valéry’s poetry despite disapproving its lack of content, and since he confessed in his contribution to the Trinity Reviewthat he liked Stevens’ poetry “so much,” we can surmise that it was not Stevens’ manner or style that occasioned his lack of interest, but rather the substance or themes of his poetry. That circumstance did not prevent Eliot from commenting at considerable length on Valéry’s poetry, carefully articulating the ground for his

On the Renaissance Studioli Federico da Montefeltro and the Architecture of Memory from: Chora 4
Author(s) Kirkbride Robert
Abstract: The studioliof the ducal Palaces of Urbino and Gubbio offer elegant demonstrations of architecture’s capacity, as a discipline and medium, to transact between the mental and physical realms of human experience. Constructed in the late fifteenth century for the renowned military captain Federico da Montefeltro, Duke of Urbino, thestudiolimay be described as treasuries of emblems, since they contain not things but images of things. Over the past five centuries these chambers have themselves become emblems for the intellectual milieu at the Court of Urbino, crystallizing a unique humanism that bridged the mathematical and verbal arts, as well

Storying Home: from: Tropes and Territories
Author(s) BRYDON DIANA
Abstract: The tension between these two epigraphs frames my paper. “Home is an image for the power of stories” (Chamberlin). “Can telling a story ever be the same as telling the truth?”(Cowley). What links home, story, and truth? Can we assume that truth is singular, or that it can be reduced to mere information only, as Jason Cowley’s comments seem to imply? Surely postcolonial literature tells us otherwise. How do power, conflict, and the search for truth meet in story, especially in postcolonial and globalizing contexts?¹ Conventional short story theory and criticism provide little help in answering such questions. In privileging

Alice Munro’s Ontario from: Tropes and Territories
Author(s) THACKER ROBERT
Abstract: Also there is a red box, which has the letters D.M. WILLENS, OPTOMETRIST printed on it, and a note beside it, saying, ‘This box of optometrist’s instruments though not very old has considerable local significance, since it belonged to Mr. D.M. Willens, who drowned in the Peregrine River, 1951. It escaped the catastrophe and was found, presumably by the anonymous donor, who dispatched it to be

Alistair MacLeod and the Gaelic Diaspora from: Tropes and Territories
Author(s) DAVIES GWENDOLYN
Abstract: In Alistair MacLeod’s “The Closing Down of Summer,” Gaelic-speaking Cape Breton miners carry sprigs of spruce from Cape Breton with them “to Africa as mementos or talismans or symbols of identity.” “Much,” argues the narrator, “as our Highland ancestors, for centuries, fashioned crude badges of heather or whortleberries to accompany them on the battlefields of the world. Perhaps so that in the closeness of their work with death they might find nearness to their homes and an intensified realization of themselves” ( As BirdsII).

Epistolary Traditions in Caribbean Diasporic Writing: from: Tropes and Territories
Author(s) SUÁREZ ISABEL CARRERA
Abstract: Caribbean literatures have a long history of using Creole in writing, and more markedly in orature, although the scope and reception of this use has varied, with acceptability and more confident practice growing in the final decades of the twentieth century. One of the pioneering and persistent subgenres associated with orality and the use of Creole is the epistolary exchange or series of epistolary monologues, where a persona, often female and using humour, writes home relating impressions of the new land to family or friends, or abroad to inform émigrés of the state of affairs “back home.” The literary form

Roots and Routes in a Selection of Stories by Alistair MacLeod from: Tropes and Territories
Author(s) OMHOVÈRE CLAIRE
Abstract: Central to Alistair MacLeod’s Islandis the return to the original island or Highlands, phonetic closeness somehow reducing the geographical distance between the two referents. The motif is particularly prominent in four of the collection’s sixteen short stories: “The Return” (1971), “The Closing Down of Summer” (1976), “As Birds Bring Forth the Sun” (1985), and “Clearances” (1999).¹ Read in conjunction, these stories make up a corpus that roughly spans Alistair MacLeod’s writing life. Starting from W.H. New’s remark that “the English-language vocabulary for characterizing landscape (and people’s relationship with land) interconnects with the vocabulary for characterizing language

Fragmentation, Improvisation, and Urban Quality: from: Chora 3
Author(s) Reeh Henrik
Abstract: Towards the end of the second millennium, the issue of whether fragmentation is part of modernity is no longer in dispute. In many spheres of human endeavour and perception, phenomena linked with fragmentation express a general diversification in social and cultural life. One only has to think of the social division of labour which has distanced architecture from engineering, and both of these professions from urban studies in the social sciences as well as in the humanities. Furthermore, fragmentation has had profound spatial consequences, since privately owned parcels of space are used for construction rather independently of one another. In

Origins and Ornaments: from: Chora 3
Author(s) Trubiano Franca
Abstract: JEAN-JACQUES LEQUEU was a most meticulous and gifted architectural draughtsman. The briefest glance at any one of the hundreds of plates given in bequest to the Bibliothèque Royale will bear witness to his great skill. During a lifetime dedicated to the representation of architecture and its historical allegories, ornamental drawings were Lequeu’s principal means of expression. Many scholars have come to see, in the eyes and hands of this late-eighteenth/early-nineteenth-century dessinateur,the profile of the modern architectural technician. His adoption of descriptive geometry for drawing the human head and his overly exacting and analytical precision undoubtedly have contributed to this

4 Dressing Up Discourse, Dressing Down the Audience: from: A Portrait of the Artist as Australian
Abstract: Barry Humphries’ stage scripts have appeared in five books: A Nice Night’s Entertainment: Sketches and Monologues 1956–1981(1981);The Humour of Barry Humphries, compiled by John Allen;Shades of Sandy Stone: The Reveries of a Returned Man(1989), comprising “Shades of Sandy” and “Sandy Comes Home”;The Life and Death of Sandy Stone, edited by Collin O’Brien (1990); andSingle Voices(1990), based on the BBC TV series, which features dramatic monologues by Roy Clarke, Sheila Hancock, Carla Lane, Bob Larbey, and John Sessions as well as Humphries (i.e., “Sandy Comes Home,” a monologue that Humphries adjudges “has been

7 Humphries’ Occasional Texts,or One Good Man’s Miscellany from: A Portrait of the Artist as Australian
Abstract: In More Please(1992) Humphries is candid (frank) andcandide(ingenuous) in recounting his adventures with alcohol in the 1960s and his misadventures with alcoholism in the late 1960s (Dr Lászlo Zadór, Harley Street specialist, London, 1967; Elm Hill Nursing Home, London, 1967) and the early 1970s (St Vincent’s Hospital, Melbourne, 1970; Alcoholics Anonymous, Melbourne, 1970; Delmont Hospital, Sydney, 1970). In contrast, Richard Ouzounian, in “An Audience with … Dame Edna and Barry Humphries,” has noted that “Humphries has been candid with other journalists up to this point [2000], but he has never discussed his actual recovery.”¹ Yet, in fact, Humphries has

Memory, Identity, and Redemption: from: Postmodernism and the Ethical Subject
Author(s) LORIGGIO FRANCESCO
Abstract: Towards the end of the 1970s Christopher Lasch described American social behaviour of the time as a kind of grass-roots disenchantment with progress. “Having no hope of improving their lives,” he contended, “people … convinced themselves that what matters is psychic self-improvement: getting in touch with their feelings, eating health food, taking lessons in ballet or belly-dancing, immersing themselves in the wisdom of the East, jogging, learning how to ‘relate,’ overcoming the ‘fear of pleasure’” (Lasch 1979, 29). Together with other things, at the heart of this retreat from “the political turmoil of the sixties” into “privatism” and “personal preoccupations”

CONCLUSION: from: Rewriting Apocalypse in Canadian Fiction
Abstract: Fashioning an ending for a book about fictions that advocate skepticism about endings is, admittedly, a tricky business. However, in light of this study’s findings that it is dangerous to ignore the myth of the end, it seems prudent to offer some concluding remarks. This study began with the desire to explore the treatment of the apocalyptic paradigm from the ex-centric perspective of contemporary Canadian writers. In effect, their works confirm Ronald Granofsky’s observation that 1945 was “the year a certain innocence ended for the human race, a Second Fall” (2). Using the grammar of apocalypse outlined in the introduction,

1 Imagery from: Elizabeth Bishop's Poetics of Description
Abstract: Throughout this book, I use the word “description” in a number of different senses – some familiar, others less so. I want to begin, however, with the simplest and most concrete sense of the word, the sense derived from the rhetorical figure of descriptio: the attempt to bring things before the mind’s eye, to make the leap from textual to visual. My goal in this chapter is not to present an account of how poetry does so – a question well beyond the scope of a single bookchapter – but to study the effect that doing so has on a particular poem, “The

2 Surrealism from: Elizabeth Bishop's Poetics of Description
Abstract: In the mid-1960s, while writing what would be the first full-length study of Bishop’s poetry, Anne Stevenson sent Bishop a rough outline of the book’s chapters. In it, Stevenson likens Bishop to “the surrealists and the symbolists too,” proposing that, like “Klee and Ernst,” she uses a great deal of “hallucinatory and dream material” in the belief that “there is no split personality, but rather a sensitivity that extends equally into the sub-conscious and the conscious world” (Stevenson, “Letter”). Bishop begins by agreeing, “Yes, I agree with you. I think that’s what I was trying to say in the speech

4 Water from: Elizabeth Bishop's Poetics of Description
Abstract: When Bishop’s first collection of poetry was published in the summer of 1946, she was not on hand to celebrate; instead, she was touring Nova Scotia, visiting family and childhood friends. Some of what she saw on that trip found its way into her poetry: the bus ride back to Boston became “The Moose,” and a few notes, comparing the “dark, icy, clear” Atlantic to her “idea of knowledge” (quoted in Millier 181), became the closing lines of “At the Fishhouses,” which, coincidentally, was first published when Bishop was back in Nova Scotia during the summer of 1947. “At the

Conclusion from: Elizabeth Bishop's Poetics of Description
Abstract: For all the deeper honesty of her poetry, Bishop was often rather disingenuous in her letters, and so it is with a grain of salt that we must take the famous line about a “perfectly useless concentration” (DL). There is a strange doubleness to it, a way in which it is both accurate and misleading. On the one hand Bishop is dedicated to a concentration so intense that it precludes conscious intention, and each individual act of observation is indeed perfectly useless in and of itself. But behind the (false) modesty of this statement is a more serious engagement: the

Book Title: Ethics of Catholicism and the Consecration of the Intellectual- Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): BÉLANGER ANDRÉ J.
Abstract: Using France as the most representative case of a Catholic context, Bélanger argues that as French society became more secularized intellectuals replaced the clergy as arbitrators of justice and enlightenment. Catholic morality was consolidated by the scholastic tradition and confirmed by the Counter-Reformation, providing the foundation that allowed the establishment of a lay elite. Bélanger describes the progressive takeover of positions of influence by the new elite in Catholic society and examines arguments used by thinkers from the seventeenth to the twentieth century to legitimize their positions. In contrast, the Anglo-Saxon Protestant tradition, due to its emphasis on the priesthood of all believers, led to recognition of the individual's conscience as the sole judge of her or his deeds and failed to provide intellectuals with the basis for any claim to serve as moral leaders in political affairs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80m78

Introduction from: Ethics of Catholicism and the Consecration of the Intellectual
Abstract: Rule-making is a twofold process of representation; there are rulers who act officially as warrants of the interests of the whole, and there are mediators who act in the name of more specific interests. In the contemporary world politics can be understood as the interplay of agents who claim to represent the interests of others. As societies grow more complex, people tend to delegate the task of promoting their interests to those who specialize in representation. These specialists may be lobbyists, pressure groups, or political parties. The highest and most encompassing level of representation is indeed that attained by legislators,

1 Catholic Ethics from: Ethics of Catholicism and the Consecration of the Intellectual
Abstract: There may be different ways of contrasting the Catholic and Protestant traditions. Discussing Catholic ethics first allows us to respect the chronological order in which the two appeared, and to underline the Protestant departure from orthodoxy. Since my purpose here is merely to demonstrate the opposing characteristics of the two traditions, I prefer to steer clear of any considerations of precedence. Instead I will emphasize the political consequences that can be derived from their contrary positions. I shall treat the Catholic perspective first in order to delineate a basic paradigm that will subsequently be used as a point of reference

3 The American Assessment of Natural Law from: Ethics of Catholicism and the Consecration of the Intellectual
Abstract: The revolutionary features of the American understanding of natural law are intimately linked to the colonies’ Protestant tradition, particularly that of Puritanism. Puritans conceived of salvation in individualistic and juridical terms. Their religious universe was one of law derived from God’s will, and the relationship of human beings to God was governed by a covenant or compact. Each individual stood alone in a direct relationship to God: the covenant of grace with God allowed no intermediaries. So it is not surprising that natural law was translated into individual rights.

6 Lay Ethics within the Bounds of the Church from: Ethics of Catholicism and the Consecration of the Intellectual
Abstract: France does indeed have a long tradition of moralistes,as they are called, but they are more often than notlittérateurswho are concerned with the harmonious adaptation of human beings to life in society. Their discourse pertains to the overall human condition and to the manner in which a well-educated reader should conduct him- or herself. Their prescriptions usually take the form of short considerations that are several paragraphs in length, that is, when they are not summed up in maxims or aphorisms. Themoralistesin the French tradition are, therefore, judged by their qualities as persons of letters,

7 The Philosophe: from: Ethics of Catholicism and the Consecration of the Intellectual
Abstract: Calling eighteenth-century French authors either philosophesor moralists is a misnomer in both cases, for they were usually neither. They identified themselves asphilosophes, but they had little in common with philosophers like Hume or Kant. There was no intention to deceive on their part. By posing asphilosophesthey intended to stand in the name of reason, outside any considerations of religion or even of metaphysics. Unlike most of their predecessors, who usually stopped short of tackling revelation, thephilosophesopenly crossed this threshold and claimed total intellectual freedom. Abstract metaphysics was also put aside in favour of a

6 My Self: A Task from: Kierkegaard as Humanist
Abstract: Throughout the entire foregoing text, the words “free” and “voluntary” have been used as if they indicate a simple, self-evident and irreducible act (or event) of “deciding” and “choosing.” Certainly Kierkegaard assumes and believes in such an event when he says that “the self is freedom.” While writing Works of Love(1847), he confides to his journal, “That which has made my life so strenuous but also full of discoveries is that I ... have had to choose decision infinitely. ... In the decisions of the spirit, one can make up one’s mind freely. ... To ’be compelled” is the

Book Title: Knight-Monks of Vichy France-Uriage, 1940-1945
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): HELLMAN JOHN
Abstract: In The Knight-Monks of Vichy France John Hellman describes the founding, operation, transformation, and demise of the school, details the institution's ideological and political struggles with other segments of French society, and deals with the remarkable rise of Uriage ideas and alumni in postwar France. By focusing on the social, philosophical, and psychological concepts propounded by the staff of the school, Hellman has produced the first study that shows the École Nationale des Cadres d'Uriage to have been an original educational and group experience which inspired French youth from very different backgrounds to abandon the liberal democratic tradition for a new political and social vision. Drawing on a variety of sources, including interviews, newly available archival material, Vichy publications, correspondence, and diary entries, Hellman contributes to the current, lively debate concerning the phenomenon of collaboration and the response of the French population to fascism and to the occupation during the Second World War. This book will be of particular interest to readers concerned with the intellectual and political life of modern France, modern religious thought and experience, fascism and the Vichy regime, changes in France in the prewar and postwar periods, and the "third way" political option in contemporary Europe.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80qmf

Introduction: from: Knight-Monks of Vichy France
Abstract: Was there a “French fascism”? Once this would have been a lunatic fringe question, but recent monographs have suggested not only that there was a distinctive French fascism but that fascism itself, far from being a somewhat ephemeral Italian or German import, actually originated in France.¹ Beyond that, contemporary historians have been suggesting that French support for Pétainisme, if not for outright fascism, though marginal according to the accepted view in France since the Liberation, was in fact widespread. Acceptance of the new view of France’s relationship with fascism/Pétainismerequires a rethinking of several aspects of the history of modern

CHAPTER EIGHT Exile from the Castle, the Order, and the Flying Squads from: Knight-Monks of Vichy France
Abstract: The closing of the École Nationale des Cadres d’Uriage at the end of 1942 marked the end of the golden age of a community that had brought together some of the best and the brightest people to create a new kind of France. It was succeeded by a period that many of the alumni, in retrospect, saw as the best, the most heroic, even the most important, period in their lives. The activities of the Uriage group during the disintegration of the Vichy regime and the liberation of France are interesting and instructive, if not the most important from our

Epilogue from: Knight-Monks of Vichy France
Abstract: The École Nationale des Cadres d’Uriage may have been the solitary inspiration of a visionary young cavalry officer but it brought to common fruition a host of important “underground” movements of the 1930s. The euphoria of the great days at the Château Bayard represented the culmination of a period during which the hope of a communitarian spiritual revolution led by the young generated great enthusiasm and hope. The Uriage school brought together some of the best and the brightest young representatives of anti-democratic and anti-liberal thinking that the country had produced since the revolution — philosophers, ethnologists, doctors, economists, legal scholars,

6 Larry’s A/Mazing Spaces from: Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) HOWELLS CORAL ANN
Abstract: Larry Weller’s first business card when he sets himself up as a specialist in garden mazes in suburban Chicago in 1988 provides an apt emblem for this essay, as it summarizes in visual profile all the issues related to mazes and spaces that I wish to consider in my reading of Carol Shields’s fictive biography. That card advertises the maze as a physical feature in landscape architecture, while its miniature pictorial representation foregrounds the maze as an artificially constructed space where one can wander slightly disoriented and be amazed, so that the maze may be appreciated as a spatial design

7 A Knowable Country: from: Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) IRVINE LORNA
Abstract: In The Republic of Love, Tom Avery, one of two central characters in a novel narrated in the third person, briefly addresses his body, observed, as always, by a narrator who mingles voice and perspective with those of Tom: “‘You wimp,’ he said to his dusky penis, but in a friendly tone. He dried carefully between his toes. It had been some time since he had regarded his toes closely. Years.”¹Larry’s Partyis also narrated in the third person. In it, we are presented with a series of questions by a narrator who likewise mingles voice and perspective with

12 Disappearance and “the Vision Multiplied”: from: Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) DVOŘÁK MARTA
Abstract: This essay sets out to throw light on the work of a highly erudite, francophile Canadian writer by placing it within the larger cultural context of certain aesthetic currents such as modernism and postmodernism, in particular their subsidiary tendencies in European and especially French postmodern writing. The discussion will focus first of all on a story from the collection Dressing Up for the Carnival, “Absence,” situating it within the continuum of experimental writers such as Raymond Queneau and Georges Perec, whose landmark works – whether they be direct influences or not – can serve a useful exegetical function. This involves

3 Polanyi’s Contemporary Relevance from: Karl Polanyi on Ethics and Economics
Abstract: Since the 1960s, social ethics has assumed increasing importance in the theological education, pastoral practice, and ministry of the Christian churches. One of the reasons for this development is the recognition that in the past the churches tended to identify themselves, consciously or unconsciously, with the societies in which they lived and, more especially, with the ruling powers or dominant ideologies. Although individual Christians and critical Christian movements gave prophetic witness in their societies, the churches as a whole tended to remain silent in the face of the injustices practised by their societies. Today, their behaviour is much different.

3 Terre des hommes from: Aphorism in the Francophone Novel of the Twentieth Century
Abstract: It is not surprising that Antoine de Saint-Exupéry would demonstrate a penchant for aphoristic discourse, in light of his early attraction to Nietzsche and his lifelong admiration for Pascal. Whether it is a question of influence or simple affinity matters little for our purposes here; suffice it to say that we are often reminded of the sententiousaphoristic style of these two predecessors as we read Saint-Exupéry’s text. The most clear-cut manifestation of the style in question occurs in Saint-Exupéry’s highly aphoristic Citadelle.Published after his death, the text in its formal structure effects something of a synthesis of Nietzsche’sZarathustra

8 Présence de la mort from: Aphorism in the Francophone Novel of the Twentieth Century
Abstract: In one of the more recent overviews of Ramuz’s work David Be van devotes only a single line to Prèsence de la mort(59). Instead, he turns his attention to three novels of the author’s mature period:La Grande Peur dans la montagne (1926), Farinet ou la fausse monnaie (1932),andDerborence(1934). Bevan and many other critics consider these later works to be Ramuz’s finest.

2 READING THE FEMININE from: Gender and Narrativity
Author(s) Richard Robert
Abstract: Discourse—all discourse—has forever been the object of surveillance. History is there to remind us that political or religious thought has never been totally free. And of course, esthetic discourses of all kinds (paintings, books, plays) have always been prey to censorship. Tintoretto, Molière, Voltaire, Rousseau, etc., all had dealings with the thought police of their day.¹ In the last ten years or so, the age-old practice of policing opinions has acquired a new name: political correctness, offspring of the American liberal left of the 1980s. For the purposes of this paper, I will single out two discourses that

6 WRITING TOWARD ABSENCE: from: Gender and Narrativity
Author(s) Jones Ben
Abstract: Let me start with cautionary words from Frances Gregg: “So far, in all my life I have met no single Man—though I have done my best to make one of Oliver Marlow [her son]—nor has any man encouraged me, or indeed been willing for me, to be a Woman. Mumbo-jumbo, superstitions, muddled mythologies, have been my fate among these artists and prelates and magicians, these escapists from life—from Life!” (1995, 61).

7 PARSIFAL AND SEMIOTIC STRUCTURALISM from: Gender and Narrativity
Author(s) Prattis J. Iain
Abstract: The legend of Parsifal and the quest for the Holy Grail has been one of my favorite stories since boyhood. The many versions I have encountered have never failed to fascinate and ignite the imagination. The long acquaintance with the story and the personal cultural tendrils that take me into the Celtic world are sufficient (though perhaps not necessary) to recognize an adequate treatment of the material when it is presented. Such a recognition was not forthcoming in my reading of Lévi-Strauss’s discourse on the myth (1985, 219-34). But my respect for Lévi-Strauss’s immense contribution to scholarship remains constant. It

8 ANDROGYNOUS REALISM IN HEINRICH VON KLEIST’S “DIE HEILIGE CÄCILIE ODER DIE GEWALT DER MUSIK (EINE LEGENDE)” from: Gender and Narrativity
Author(s) Bohm Arnd
Abstract: Relatively neglected by critics in comparison to others of his works, Kleist’s story with the elaborate tripartite title, which can be approximately translated into English as “Saint Cecilia, or the Power of Music (A Legend),” has begun to attract increasing attention. To some extent, this is due to the fact that the other works have been examined and reexamined with such exhausting intensity that a turn to lesser-known texts is inevitable. But it is also the case that, among Kleist’s puzzling prose, this story stands out for its strangeness. What is it about? What is its “message”? In this case,

Book Title: Political Ecumenism-Catholics, Jews, and Protestants in De Gaulle’s Free France, 1940-1945
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): ADAMS GEOFFREY
Abstract: Adams examines the contributions of such major Français libres as René Cassin, Pierre Mendès France, and Jacques Soustelle and explores de Gaulle's troubled relations with Churchill and Roosevelt. The opportunity for Gaullists to offer full membership to the fourth religious family, Algeria's Muslim majority, following the liberation of French North Africa is also considered. In an epilogue, Adams reflects on the impact of Free France's political ecumenism in the postwar era.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80x6j

INTRODUCTION from: Political Ecumenism
Abstract: When, on 18 June 1940, in the aftermath of France’s defeat and the assumption of power by Marshal Philippe Pétain, Charles de Gaulle appealed to his fellow citizens over the BBC to join him in continuing the fight against Nazi Germany, he initiated a process that would reunite the Two Frances (revolutionary and counter-revolutionary) which had been in open or covert conflict since 1789. And, when men and women of France’s “three religious families,” Jews and Protestants as well as Catholics, who had been involved in this conflict, joined him to fight under a banner on which the Cross of

CHAPTER ONE 1905–1940: from: Political Ecumenism
Abstract: During 1906, when French Catholics were beginning to absorb the shock created by the Separation law, the nation’s attention was drawn toward the serious external threat posed by Germany, which was openly challenging France’s increasing influence in Morocco. Since their humiliating defeat in 1870, the French had been debating whether to challenge Germany directly on the Rhine, in an effort to regain domination of the Continent, or to compensate for their losses in Europe by expanding their colonial holdings in Asia and North Africa. The appointment in 1912 of General (future Marshal) Hubert Lyautey as commissaire-résident généralin Morocco provided

CHAPTER TWO Charles de Gaulle: from: Political Ecumenism
Abstract: While his chief biographers point to the mix of qualities which, against all odds, helped de Gaulle become the saviour of his nation’s honour in 1940, none of them would maintain that the general was a plausible champion of France’s republican or democratic tradition.¹ In any event, those republican patriots ready to continue the battle against fascism following France’s defeat in 1940 would normally have looked for leadership from among the agnostics, Jews, Protestants, and Freemasons who had governed the Third Republic since 1879. As it turned out, such a potential leader existed in the person of the Jew Georges

CHAPTER FOUR René Cassin: from: Political Ecumenism
Abstract: Interestingly enough, one of the first well-known personalities to show up at Free French headquarters was René Cassin, a Jew. Cassin was a law professor at the University of Paris who brought to the cause a rich experience of public service in Geneva as well as France. His arrival and the warm welcome he received from de Gaulle established the general’s indifference to the religious or ethnic background of would-be recruits and his clear willingness to override the evident anti-Semitism in his military entourage. As a jurist, Cassin would develop a persuasive case for the political legitimacy of La France

CHAPTER NINE Pierre Mendès France: from: Political Ecumenism
Abstract: The strong Jewish presence in the ranks of the Free French was hardly surprising. Jews had been consistent defenders of the republican ideal since 1848. They had participated in the ephemeral government of the Second Republic in 1848, and the quintessentially assimilated Léon Blum had become the first Jewish premier of France in 1936 (albeit, not without infuriating disciples of Maurras). Pierre Mendès France, who played a secondary role in Blum’s Popular Front government, would join La France libre following his escape from Vichy. His presence in General de Gaulle’s wartime organization would be the prelude to a long, mutually

CHAPTER TWELVE André Philip and the Christian Left Commit to Free France from: Political Ecumenism
Abstract: Given the longstanding devotion of the vast majority of French Protestants to the Republic and to democratic principles, it is not surprising that a substantial proportion of those who showed up to enrol in La France libre were linked to the Reformed communion.¹ None of these Protestants had a more significant role in shaping wartime Gaullist policy than André Philip, the only practicing Christian among the pre-war leaders of the SFIO.² Before arriving in London, Philip had been active in the internal Resistance. Through his initiative, two more Protestant résistantsfamiliar with the French trade-union movement – Albert Guigui and Louis

CHAPTER THIRTEEN De Gaulle’s Protestant Emissaries: from: Political Ecumenism
Abstract: In the aftermath of his 18 June 1940 appeal over the BBC, Charles de Gaulle expected to rally to his cause key members of France’s military and political elites. Nowhere was the reaction to the general’s challenge more disappointing than among France’s senior diplomats, whose responses ranged in tone from indifferent to openly hostile. As a result, at least during its first year, Free France’s external relations were entrusted to a variety of well-intentioned intellectuals and two men with a background in business.

CHAPTER SIXTEEN Legislating for La France Nouvelle: from: Political Ecumenism
Abstract: The demand for the creation of an assembly which would reflect the democratic aspirations of Fighting France had been growing since the early days of La France libre in London. Dedicated republicans including Henry Hauck, Pierre-Olivier Lapie and, most persistently, René Cassin, had been pressing de Gaulle to create such a body as had Félix Gouin, Blum’s emissary in London, who chaired a group of French parliamentary exiles in the British capital. Anxious to see some restraints placed on the authoritarian side of the general whose cause he had endorsed from the beginning, Churchill gave the idea his full support.

CHAPTER SEVENTEEN Liberation: from: Political Ecumenism
Abstract: Having established the CFLN and the Provisional Consultative Assembly to help him debate both wartime strategy and post-war planning, Charles de Gaulle waited through the winter of 1943–44 in Algiers to be invited to London to join in devising Allied strategy for the liberation of France. Much time was spent during these months in vain efforts to secure formal recognition of the CFLN by the Allies. Thanks to the unbudging antipathy of Roosevelt to de Gaulle and to the growing bitterness of Churchill toward what he saw to be the general’s increasingly perfidious behaviour, this diplomatic acceptance would not

4 The Angel and the Mirror: from: Chora 2
Author(s) Galvin Terrance
Abstract: ARCHITECTURE HAS HISTORICALLY been a means of giving form to the invisible through the use of the faculty of the imagination. This essay will examine the symbolism of the angel as a manifestation of the invisible realm, specifically operating at the juncture of two realms, as evidenced by the marriage of the celestial firmament and the mirrored sea. In discussing the ontological meaning behind the symbolism of the angel, I will construct an argument supporting the angelic image as one that embodies a profound understanding of transformation and mediates the classical Cartesian separation of mind and body. The consequences of

6 Architecture as Site of Reception. Part II: from: Chora 2
Author(s) Kunze Donald
Abstract: THE NOW SOMEWHAT INFAMOUS futurist impresario Filippo Tommaso Marinetti recognized that a public numbed by the over-intellectualized debates of artists, historians, and critics could be refreshed by shifting the venue to issues of cuisine. The “point” of The Futurist Cookbook(1932) may have been a serious joke about the culinary conservatism of the twentieth century, but it displayed a showman’s wit in its willingness to translate aesthetic issues into a readily recognizable language - or, rather, to split the language of art into two parts, one that seemed to speak of recipes for nourishment, another that considered “food as a

Introduction from: Ghost Brothers
Abstract: When Europeans discovered that an entire universe existed beyond that familiar to them, terror and curiosity of the unknown gave birth to both extreme intolerance and a wondrous reaching out. We have often heard of the seventeenth-century Little Ice Age, when Catholic and Protestant crossed swords, witch pyres were ablaze across the countryside, boats from Africa groaned with families in chains, and the Americas were deeply afflicted with smallpox fever. Not surprisingly, it was one of the most fanatic eras that Europe ever witnessed, excluding, of course, our own century.¹ Yet we have not often imagined that, under these circumstances,

CHAPTER SIX Je me souviens from: Ghost Brothers
Abstract: Models, symbols, and myths that developed in settler society were the fruit Native influence and dialogue. The Native sharing ethic and "dread of losing face" shaped early French North American cultural ideals through their convergence with provincial French aristocratic ideals of libéralité (generosity) and honneur (bravery), both of which evinced settler reverence. Intertwined, these combined qualities comprised the older French of an "homme de coeur" - a generous man willing to risk himself to the defenceless.¹ This ideal reflects the lengthy vulnerability of small European tribes to invasions from the East and later (after the decline of the Empire) to

Book Title: Weakening Philosophy-Essays in Honour of Gianni Vattimo
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): ZABALA SANTIAGO
Abstract: Moving away from Jacques Derrida's deconstructionism and Paul Ricoeur's hermeneutics, and building on his experiences as a politician, Vattimo asks if it is still possible to speak of moral imperatives, individual rights, and political freedom. Acknowledging the force of Nietzsche's "God is dead," Vattimo argues for a philosophy of pensiero debole or "weak thinking" that shows how moral values can exist without being guaranteed by an external authority. His secularising interpretation stresses anti-metaphysical elements and puts philosophy into a relationship with postmodern culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt81c69

6 Can the Globalized World Be in-the-World? from: Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) SILVERMAN HUGH J .
Abstract: “A shot heard ‘round the world’” – a phrase linked with the American Revolution and Bunker Hill – was often repeated after the American president John F. Kennedy was assassinated in 1963 . Here was an event that marked the world, marked it with “shock and awe.” How could death come to such a young leader – very much in his prime, whose promise as president held a great sense of pride and hope for a new world? Cut off at this crucial moment, that hope for a new world came to an end. Around the world people would remember where they were

7 Deconstruction Is Not Enough: from: Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) SCHÜRMANN REINER
Abstract: Vattimo’s paper on weak thinking is strongly argued, at least in its general strategy.¹ He first describes the dialectical mode of philosophizing, then opposes it to the differential mode that “combats” dialectics while remaining “deeply complicitous” with it, and finally sublates both: weak ontology is “constructed not only by developing the discourse of difference, but also by recalling dialectics.” This is strong thinking indeed, perhaps unintendedly so. The Hegelian as well as the Heideggerian positions are to be aufgehoben,since ours is the time in which both modes of reappropriating the past have proved asthenic. They are elevated and at

8 Weak Thought 2004: from: Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) Valgenti Robert T.
Abstract: I think that the most sincere tribute to a friend and thinker – one to whom I feel profoundly tied and with whom I have publicly shared a philosophical adventure in which I continue to believe – should return to the very grounds of our encounter, beginning with the so-called differences between us. Gianni Vattimo is one of the most original and significant Italian philosophers of our time (I write “one of” out of modesty and bon ton; in reality, I consider him the most important). This is already a great difference between us, one that I will assume is taken for

12 Vattimo’s Latinization of Hermeneutics: from: Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) GRONDIN JEAN
Abstract: We have many reasons to be grateful to Gianni Vattimo for his continuing contribution to philosophy and public life. Undoubtedly, his most decisive philosophical impulses have come from the German philosophical tradition, and mostly from the Holy Trinity of Nietzsche, Heidegger, and Gadamer, who was his teacher. Yet he was not German but a proud Italian and for some reason more able than others to carry this tradition further. The German philosophical tradition has to a large extent dominated philosophy since Leibniz and Kant, but its dominion ebbed considerably after Husserl, Heidegger, and Gadamer. One could attribute this decline to

14 Pharmakons of Onto-theology from: Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) ZABALA SANTIAGO
Abstract: It is worth noticing that while never suggesting a new philosophy or philosophical method meant to correct past positions, Martin Heidegger became the most original and important philosopher of twentieth century. George Steiner presented him not only as “the most eminent philosopher or critic of metaphysics since Immanuel Kant but also as one of that small number of decisive Western thinkers that would include Plato, Aristotle, Descartes, Leibniz, and Hegel”; Hannah Arendt described him as “the secret king of thought throughout twentiethcentury philosophic sensitivity”; and when he died on 26 May 1976 , a number of European philosophers affirmed that

18 Israel as Foundling, Jesus as Bachelor: from: Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) MILES JACK
Abstract: As the author of books explicitly about the Jewish and Christian scriptures – books, however, in which by design I reveal nothing about my personal stance with regard to religion, I am often asked whether or not I am, after all, a believer. My extemporaneous answers never satisfy me but only, perhaps, reveal why I have so studiously avoided the question. But since the publication of Gianni Vattimo’s Credo di credere,I have developed a better answer. Read Vattimo, I say, and you will acquaint yourself with my predicament better than I could acquaint you with it myself.

CHAPTER TWO Phenomenology from: Philosophy of Merleau-Ponty
Abstract: Many philosophers influenced the direction of Merleau-Ponty's thinking, as was shown in Chapter 1, but the single most significant influence was that of Edmund Husserl (1859-1938) and the “phenomenological” school that he founded. If we are to understand Merleau-Ponty properly, we have to see him above all in relation to phenomenology. At least in his major works, he certainly saw himself as a phenomenologist, and even the other influences on his thought were filtered through his conception of phenomenology. And, clearly, if we are to understand Merleau-Ponty's relationship to Husserlian phenomenology, we must first say something about Husserl's own thought.

CHAPTER EIGHT The Later Thought from: Philosophy of Merleau-Ponty
Abstract: In 1952, Merleau-Ponty was appointed to a chair at the Collège de France in Paris, one of the pinnacles of academic life in France, and continued in that post until his death in 1961. His inaugural lecture, “In Praise of Philosophy”, in which he examines the function of philosophy, first through considering particular past philosophers (Lavelle, Bergson, Socrates) and then by discussing in more general terms the relation between philosophy's past and its present, was published in book form in 1953.¹ Summaries of his lecture courses at the Collège de France were published in book form after his death, in

Book Title: Diasporic Feminist Theology-Asia and Theopolitical Imagination
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Kang Namsoon
Abstract: How do we navigate the question of identity in the fluid and pluralist conditions of postmodern society? Even more, how do we articulate identity as a defining particularity in the disappearance of borders, boundaries, and spaces in an increasingly globalist world? What constitutes identity and the formation of narratives under such conditions? How do these issues affect not only discursive practices, but theological and ethical construction and practice? This volumes explores these issues in depth. Diasporic Feminist Theology attempts to construct feminist theology by adopting diaspora as a theopolitical and ethical metaphor. Namsoon Kang here revisits and reexamines today’s significant issues such as identity politics, dislocation, postmodernism, postcolonialism, neoempire, Asian values, and constructs diasporic, transethnic, and glocal feminist theological discourses that create spaces of transformation, reconciliation, hospitality, worldliness, solidarity, and border-traversing. This work draws on diverse sources from contemporary critical discourses of diaspora studies, cultural studies, ethnic studies, postmodernism, postcolonialism, and feminism and feminist theology from a transterritorial space. This book is a landmark work, providing a comprehensive discourse for feminist theology today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0snb

2 Identity, Différance, and Alterity from: Diasporic Feminist Theology
Abstract: The question of self-identity, Who am I?, is an enduring theme in human reality. When one connects this question of Who am I? to the question of Who are we?, one forms a politics of identity. The question as to how and where people as groups construct and express the identity that holds them together is more complex than it appears on the surface. Identity politics has made tremendous contributions for the marginalized groups: raising self-awareness and self-dignity; challenging through politicization the mainstream claim to hegemonic power; providing spaces to claim their voices and experiences as legitimate; and empowering both

4 Radical Border–Traversing from: Diasporic Feminist Theology
Abstract: Postcolonialism has emerged as one of the major critical discourses in academia since its development in the 1980s. Defining postcolonialism is, however, not easy due to its complexity and the variety of its implications. Postcolonial scholars tend to split over the question as to whether postcolonialism implies certain historicality, pertaining to a specific time and space, or if it entailstranshistoricality.⁴ That scholars write the term in two ways,post-colonialismandpostcolonialism, further reveals the multiple understandings and perceptions of postcolonialism itself.⁵ Some scholars use the two terms interchangeably without making a distinction between them. Scholars who emphasize the historical,

8 Transethnic Feminist Theology in an Era of Globalization from: Diasporic Feminist Theology
Abstract: Today the word globalizationis an all-purpose catchword both in popular and scholarly discourse; it is “on the lips of politicians, professors, and pundits alike.”³ People in different areas use the term in highly disparate ways and its meaning often is elusive. Globalization easily risks becoming a cliché as different people use and misuse it for their purposes. The most common interpretation of globalization is the idea that the world is becoming more uniform, homogenized, standardized, and compressed through a technological, commercial, and cultural synchronization emanating from the West. Corporations, markets, finance, banking, transportation, communication, and production increasingly cut across

9 Negotiating the Alternative from: Diasporic Feminist Theology
Abstract: In most countries in Asia, one chooses to become, rather than happens to be, a Christian. When one makes a religious choice for a foreign religion such as Christianity, one bases the choice on the difference from, not the similarity with, the existing indigenous religions. In this chapter, I will illustrate the critical differences, as the ground of women’s religious choice-in-differencebetween Confucianism and Christianity. Challenging the status quo of religions and moving toward a more just and transformative religion require breaking what I would call an ecumenical taboo, which discourages one from addressing critical differences between religions. I will

Introduction from: Augustine's Theology of Preaching
Abstract: Since preaching has been central to the Church from its inception, it is surprising that what revival of the expository ministry there has been in the modern church has been nurtured with a notable lack of

4 Interiority, Temporality, and Scripture from: Augustine's Theology of Preaching
Abstract: Augustine’s preaching reveals a particular concern for both interiority and temporality, and that this is due to his using Scripture to change listeners. This chapter aims to offer preliminary definitions of interiority and temporality, our two hermeneutical keys. These terms are constructive theological developments of the concepts “passion” and “order,” which structured the opening chapter. Our hope is that the definitions capture the essence of the assumptions Augustine brought to his preaching, and that they can then operate as tools to help us better explicate what he believed himself to be doing as a preacher. Such a methodology was commended

7 Case Study: from: Augustine's Theology of Preaching
Abstract: The people listening to Augustine preach were varied in age, gender, and status; Augustine mentions in a letter that both sexes listen to the Scripture reading in church together.² Part of the value of the Sermones, then, is their ability to portray something of what Augustine thought about ordinary human relationships. Especially since he died before editing them, theSermonesoffer a vivid portrait of one of the great theologians preaching in a way which he hoped would enable ordinary listeners to make sense of their lives in light of God’s revelation.

3 Schillebeeckx Contends with a History Marked by Suffering: from: Hope in Action
Abstract: In the preceding two chapters, we examined the turn to eschatology in the writings of Metz and Schillebeeckx as they attempted to respond to the cultural pressures faced by the European church in the 1960s. Initially, their distinctly modern approaches to eschatology allowed both theologians to champion a practical eschatology that operated rather comfortably within the wider cultural context. As we observed, however, it was not long before both theologians grew increasingly sensitive to the subsequent overidentification of the hope of Christianity with the hope of modern culture. This sensitivity to the nonidentity of eschatological and societal hope only would

5 Metz Contends with a History Marked by Suffering: from: Hope in Action
Abstract: In the preceding two chapters, when tracing the developments in Schillebeeckx’s thought from the late 1960s through the early 1990s, we observed in his writings his increasing unease with the historical processes of secularization and the distinct form of progressive optimism underlying European and North American technocratic societies. In search of a theological response to what critical theorists called the “dialectic of Enlightenment,” Schillebeeckx turned to the critical negativity of Christianity’s eschatological hope. He saw in that hope a powerful resource capable of resisting the dangerous excesses of the period’s myopic commitment to technological progress while concurrently animating the Christian’s

1 Creatio ex Nihilo and the Nearness of Difference from: Christian Doctrine and the Grammar of Difference
Abstract: To suggest that a Christian account of human difference would find grounding in the story of creation is hardly surprising. That a narrative about Creator and creation may say somethingabout the multifaceted forms of human difference seems self-evident. However, feminist theology has been squeamish about the biblical creation narrative, not only because of certain masculine notions of the Creator God,¹ but also because of the particularities of male and female in the creation account. There is the difficulty of the Yahwist creation account in Genesis 2—especially the provision of woman to man—and the overwhelming binary force of

4 Original Sin from: Christian Doctrine and the Grammar of Difference
Abstract: The doctrine of creation is at the core of any theological discussion regarding human difference. Theological distinctions regarding creaturely freedom and divine sovereignty are not always appreciated, and a tendency toward ontotheological categories can easily distort the divine and creaturely relationship. A Christian theological account of difference is most fertile and coherent when divine transcendence is understood to affirm the goodness of God’s creation and to challenge contemporary theoretical accounts of power and autonomy. However, theological accounts must also attend to the doctrinal language of the fall and original sin; otherwise whatever else we have said about creation will be

5 The Power of Sin and Epistemic Transformation from: Christian Doctrine and the Grammar of Difference
Abstract: The hydra seems an apt metaphor for sin: a beast with many heads, so poisonous even its tracks are lethal. Sin is hard to define. It is naïve and dangerous to imagine sin with clear boundaries. And yet, in the sins we narrate against creaturely difference, there seems an inextricable relationship between sin and power. Perhaps no concept has received greater attention in postmodern discourse than that of power, and here no figure has loomed larger than Michel Foucault. Attending to the power epistémèof modernity has enabled those concerned with difference and oppression—especially feminists—to face the full

Foreword from: By Bread Alone
Author(s) Vladimiroff Christine
Abstract: I recall from my childhood a part of my Russian heritage, a ceremonial blessing exchanged by host and guest: “Bread, that this house may never know hunger, salt, that life may always have savor.” The reader of this book will be the recipient of another rich blessing with both the substance and flavor of the hermeneutic of hunger.

4 War, Famine, and Baby Stew: from: By Bread Alone
Author(s) Wilkins Lauress L.
Abstract: The Israelite prophets frequently use the paired metaphors of “famine and the sword” to describe weapons wielded by the Divine Warrior to punish sinful nations.¹ These prophetic references function either to motivate the Israelites to repent in order to avert YHWH’s judgment, or to justify a disaster that had occurred and is interpreted by the prophets as divine retribution. Metaphorical references to war and hunger, however, play a very different role in the book of Lamentations. The poems’ references to war-related hunger evoke sympathy for the city’s population, especially women and children, and call into question the appropriateness of God’s

10 2 Thessalonians vs. the Ataktoi: from: By Bread Alone
Author(s) Wilson-Reitz Megan T.
Abstract: The remarks in Second Thessalonians about the ataktoi, in particular 2 Thess. 3:10 (“anyone unwilling to work should not eat”), have received great attention from those who use the Bible to promote particular political and economic perspectives. In the United States, verse 10 has been quoted in support of a surprisingly diverse array of political and economic viewpoints, including the Populist platform of 1892, socialist John Spargo, and laissez-faire capitalist William Graham Sumner.¹ Max Weber argued that this passage is at the heart of the Protestant work ethic, which he saw as a necessary condition for the rise of American

Book Title: Liturgy as Revelation-Re-Sourcing a Theme in Twentieth-Century Catholic Theology
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Caldwell Philip
Abstract: A critical issue in modern Catholic theology has been the relationship between the doctrine of revelation and the church’s liturgical and sacramental practice. This volume argues that although in the twentieth century Catholic theology increasingly recognized the centrality of Christology—particularly the person of Christ—as the locus of revelation and drew out the crucial implications of Christ as the revelation of God, it was slow to connect this revelatory dynamic with the encounter that occurs within the sacramental space of the liturgy, most notably the Eucharist. Taking the decline of the neoscholastic enterprise in Catholic theology and the challenges posed by modernism as his point of departure, Philip Caldwell traces the evolution of the Catholic theology of revelation in the twentieth century and the vital role played by the liturgical and sacramental renewal movements in reimagining this pivotal theological category. Examining the specific contributions of René Latourelle, Avery Dulles, Salvatore Marsilli, and Gustave Martelet against a background of pre-conciliar ressourcement theology, this volume provides a comprehensive account of why a Trinitarian and Christological construal of liturgy and sacraments as revelation is key to the vision that informed Vatican II and offers constructive theological and ecclesial possibilities for the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0tr7

2 René Latourelle from: Liturgy as Revelation
Abstract: René Latourelle is a theologian typical of the focus phase¹ in the history of fundamental theology. Born in Montreal in 1918, he entered the Society of Jesus in 1938 and, after completing doctoral studies in both history and theology, he began in 1959 to teach theology at the Gregorian University, where he subsequently became dean of the faculty of theology.² Latourelle’s career as a student, theologian, and teacher spans the era of the development of fundamental theology through phases that he later calls “Reaction,” “Expansion,” and “Focusing.” Educated within the era of classical apologetics, he was involved with the development

Book Title: Postmodernity and Univocity-A Critical Account of Radical Orthodoxy and John Duns Scotus
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Horan Daniel P.
Abstract: Nearly twenty-five years ago, John Milbank inaugurated Radical Orthodoxy, one of the most significant and influential theological movements of the last two decades. In Milbank’s Theology and Social Theory, he constructed a sweeping theological genealogy of the origins of modernity and the emergence of the secular, counterposed by a robust retrieval of traditional orthodoxy as the critical philosophical and theological mode of being in the postmodern world. That genealogy turns upon a critical point—the work of John Duns Scotus as the starting point of modernity and progenitor of a raft of philosophical and theological ills that have prevailed since. Milbank’s account has been disseminated proliferously through Radical Orthodoxy and even beyond and is largely uncontested in contemporary theology. The present volume conducts a comprehensive examination and critical analysis of Radical Orthodoxy’s use and interpretation of John Duns Scotus. Daniel P. Horan, OFM, offers a substantial challenge to the narrative of Radical Orthodoxy’s idiosyncratic take on Scotus and his role in ushering in the philosophical age of the modern. This volume not only corrects the received account of Scotus but opens a constructive way forward toward a positive assessment and appropriation of Scotus’s work for contemporary theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0v6z

2 The Reach of Radical Orthodoxy’s Influence from: Postmodernity and Univocity
Abstract: One of the more interesting aspects of Radical Orthodoxy’s interpretation of John Duns Scotus has been the unexpected and at times unattributed influence that it has had on so many other thinkers and their projects, particularly in the English-speaking world. Whereas one might naturally anticipate that some academic theologians would appropriate the thought of their Radical Orthodoxy colleagues, what is surprising is the way in which the Scotus Story has made its way into the work of historians, philosophers, and popular religious writers beyond the confines of the academic theological guild. As early as ten years after the launch of

3 Major Critiques and Analysis of Radical Orthodoxy’s Use of Scotus from: Postmodernity and Univocity
Abstract: In the previous two chapters, we explored the genesis and subsequent development of what I have termed the Scotus Story in Radical Orthodoxy and beyond. Tracing the scripting of the Scotus as protomodern antagonist narrative, we came to see the increasing degree of influence and ubiquity the story has gained. Through the work of John Milbank, Catherine Pickstock, and others, many contemporary theologians have adopted the Scotus Story. As we saw in chapter 2, this influential narrative has gone largely unquestioned and unanalyzed, especially by those who have adopted it in their own work. There exists little opposition to the

Book Title: Parables Unplugged-Reading the Lukan Parables in Their Rhetorical Context
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Thurén Lauri
Abstract: For far too long, Lauri Thurén argues, the parables of Jesus have been read either as allegories encoding Christian theology—including the theological message of one or another Gospel writer—or as tantalizing clues to the authentic voice of Jesus. Thurén proposes instead to read the parables “unplugged” from any assumptions beyond those given in the narrative situation in the text, on the common-sense premise that the very form of the parable works to propose a (sometimes startling) resolution to a particular problem. Thurén applies his method to the parables in Luke with some surprising results involving the Evangelist’s overall narrative purposes and the discrete purposes of individual parables in supporting the authority of Jesus, proclaiming God’s love, exhorting steadfastness, and so on. Eschatological and allegorical readings are equally unlikely, according to Thurén’s results. This study is sure to spark learned discussion among scholars, preachers, and students for years to come.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0vdv

1 Introduction from: Parables Unplugged
Abstract: The parables told by Jesus are among the most fascinating and beloved of all tales, and the most studied as well. Values and ideas attributed to these short stories have inspired later cultures in many ways, and the teaching of the Christian churches constantly refers to them. Surprisingly, there is no unanimity about their meaning or purpose. Instead, a single parable can be interpreted in innumerable different ways.¹

4 The Unjust Steward (16:1-9) from: Parables Unplugged
Abstract: The simple, vivid story of the Unjust Stewardin Luke 16:1-9 is generally, albeit surprisingly, assessed as “the most difficult of the parables.”¹ Its original meaning is either considered to be completely lost,² so that Luke too was perplexed,³ or the parable is thought to convey a complex message that is hard to perceive at first reading. The reason for the bafflement is obvious: by presenting his hearers with a deceitful man as a role model Jesus appears to commend immoral behavior. For most religious and academic readers this is unacceptable. Moreover, it is difficult to combine the unethical parable

7 The Parables as Persuasion from: Parables Unplugged
Abstract: The most important challenge when interpreting any parable is recognizing its function: How is it intended to convince its audience? Only thus can its meaning or message can be accurately perceived. Together with the story line, contextual factors such as the speaker, the audience, and the exigency determine the function of a parable. The argumentative structure is just as important. This chapter presents a comprehensive unplugged analysis of every Lukan parable told by Jesus, focusing on these issues.

2 Godʹs Fierce Whimsy in the Literature from: Walking with the Mud Flower Collective
Abstract: The text under consideration here— God’s Fierce Whimsy—was published almost thirty years ago. Therefore it has a historical context of its own that must be explored. What have others written about the text? How has it been utilized, critiqued, and engaged following its publication? This history of the text’s impact, which will be the focus of this chapter, is an interesting one, with features both surprising and expected. Up until this point, the text has not received a full analysis or treatment. In many ways, one gets the sense that it is a book that many reference but few

4 Reflections on Godʹs Fierce Whimsy in the Words of Members of the Mud Flower Collective from: Walking with the Mud Flower Collective
Abstract: In autumn of 2011 I interviewed six of the seven members of the Mud Flower Collective.¹ These women welcomed me into their homes and offices and spent significant time with me recalling and reflecting on the experiences of being a member of the collective. These interviews fundamentally changed my interaction with the text God’s Fierce Whimsy. I anticipated that conducting these interviews would be important when I began this project, but by the time I was addressing the complexity of relationships and experiences depicted in the text, I realized this research was essential to my project. So too, I expected

Introduction from: The World in the Trinity
Abstract: In the years since Ian Barbour’s first set of Gifford Lectures titled Religion in an Age of Science,¹ the contemporary literature on the topic of religion and science has expanded exponentially. While this extended conversation between theologians and scientists has opened up many new avenues for fruitful exchange of views on controversial issues, other “doors,” so to speak, remain closed. For example, scientific materialists consciously or unconsciously seem to be proposing the equivalent of a secular religion, that is, a belief-system opposed to the belief-systems of the various theistic religions; but their own secular belief-system can no more be proven

1 Language and Reality from: The World in the Trinity
Abstract: Does language simply reflect the world in which we live, or instead shape it so that we see things differently as a result of using one language to express ourselves rather than another? On the basis both of personal experience and of the conclusions reached by some major European philosophers, I would say “yes” to the second alternative. With respect to personal experience, for example, in the 1960s after being ordained a priest at a Jesuit seminary here in the United States, I received permission from my religious superiors to do a final year of spiritual reflection and pastoral training

4 Other Approaches to Panentheism in the Current Religion-and-Science Debate from: The World in the Trinity
Abstract: In 2004 Philip Clayton and Arthur Peacocke published the papers of an academic conference on panentheism that brought together many prominent natural scientists, philosophers, and Christian systematic theologians.¹ Given their large number (eighteen), in this chapter I will primarily focus on the essays of the systematic theologians in preference to those written by natural scientists and philosophers since in the chapters to follow I will be addressing various theological issues related to a number of classical Christian beliefs. The first essay to be considered, titled “God Immanent yet Transcendent: The Divine Energies according to Saint Gregory Palamas,” was written by

Conclusion from: The World in the Trinity
Abstract: In the Introduction to this book, I noted how Wentzel van Huyssteen has tried to bridge the current gap between scientifically oriented and religiously inspired worldviews in the postmodern Western world by proposing a new kind of interdisciplinary rational reflection, namely, what he calls “transversal rationality.”¹ This new type of rationality is not theory-based or purely cognitive but likewise a performative praxis: “the practice of responsible judgment, that is at the heart of a postfoundationalist notion of rationality, and that enables us to reach fragile and provisional forms of coherence in our interpersonal and interdisciplinary conversations.”² My counterargument was that,

3 Eco-Anthropologies in the Joban Dialogues from: Consider Leviathan
Abstract: Job’s Friends are infamous for their attempts to comfort Job, and the broad strokes of their arguments are well known: righteous behavior produces a life of harmony and prosperity while wickedness causes sure ruin. In truth, however, the notion that the Friends represent a single viewpoint or argumentative strategy is not exactly borne out by a close reading of the text.¹ Rather, the Friends offer a storm of conflicting viewpoints. Here are two of them: First, there is the “Deuteronomistic,”² or “Proverbial” strategy—life is a type of cosmic math equation (framed as a covenant) in which excellent moral choice

5 Natural Theologies of the Post-Exilic Self in Job from: Consider Leviathan
Abstract: In this final chapter I turn to the intersection of ecology, politics, and the role of the specifically Joban “self” in the creation of new possibilities for Israel’s existence in the sixth to fifth centuries bce. In the previous two chapters I have argued that this Joban “self” is a rather insecure entity, torn among several competing fragments of ancient Israelite self-making projects. The Friends’ alluring nature-response covenant posited that Job’s suddenly stunted economic life and blistered body came by way of a morally disobedient self. Job had sinned, and the world reacted. They attempted to restore Job from the

6 Conclusion: from: Antiochene Theoria in the Writings of Theodore of Mopsuestia and Theodoret of Cyrus
Abstract: while we agree that theological exegesis is the missing part of the agenda on most exegetical guides that normally take the exegete through an enormous mass of data in higher and lower

Chapter 2 The Regulation of Preimplantation Genetic Diagnosis for Sibling Donors in Israel, Germany, and England: from: Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Shkedi Shiri
Abstract: PGD is an early form of prenatal diagnosis. Couples opting for PGD undergo in vitro fertilization (IVF). The pre-embryos are biopsied and genetically screened in vitro. Only those which have the desired genetic profile are transferred to the uterus, using standard IVF procedures (Sermon 2002). During the years since its introduction in the 1990s, PGD has been used predominantly to avoid the birth of children affected by identified incurable genetic diseases, such as monogenic disorders¹ (i.e.: cystic fibrosis, hemophilia), or chromosomal aberrations² (Geraedts et al. 1999; Harper et al. 2006). Thus, the technique is mainly used (where allowed) by couples

Chapter 3 The Man in the Sperm: from: Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Goldberg Helene
Abstract: This article explores kinship and fatherhood in light of male infertility and artificial reproductive technologies (ARTs) in the Jewish-Israeli context. I became interested in the male reproductive experience in Israel through a backdoor interest in Jewish identity, and then came across Susan Kahn’s groundbreaking study (2000) of single, secular Jewish women’s reproduction in Israel with the use of sperm donation. It seemed that because of Israeli technological advances in reproductive technologies, the state’s support of fertility treatment, national efforts to increase the Jewish population, and the concept that Jewish identity is passed through the mother, men could be removed from

Chapter 5 Adoption and Assisted Reproduction Technologies: from: Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Carmeli Yoram S.
Abstract: State policies construct and mold the behavior of individuals and formal bodies, licensing some practices as acceptable, labeling others as not. But they go deeper than that. Initially imposed

Chapter 7 Ultrasonic Challenges to Pro-Natalism from: Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Ivry Tsipy
Abstract: Israel, so many scholars claim, is a pro-natal state. But what does that mean in terms of the public imagery of pregnancy? That failingto conceive is pictured as an unbearable tragedy might come as no surprise, but what about a normal healthy pregnancy? One could hypothesize that since such a pregnancy is the height of the pro-natal fantasy, then it should be depicted in the most positive of terms. How then, can one interpret the following scene in which terror is so tightly intertwined into the very fabric of the social imagery of gestation?

Chapter 8 Abortion Committees as Agents of Eugenics: from: Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Raz Aviad
Abstract: The Israeli penal law concerning the interruption of pregnancy (1977) authorizes hospital committees to assess parents’ requests for selective abortion. Applications for abortion due to “genetic defects” counted for 15 to 20 percent of all applications submitted to hospital “abortion committees” from 1990 to 2007 (Israeli ministry of health 2008). However, the law does not provide any definition of these “genetic defects” in terms of severity and/or likelihood of expression. Rather, the legal phrasing—kept unchanged since 1977—allows an abortion on the basis of any medical diagnosis for which the fetus “may suffer from physical or mental defect.” These

Chapter 10 ART, Community, and Beyond: from: Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Birenbaum-Carmeli Daphna
Abstract: The study of human embryonic stem cells (hESCs) is inherently linked to IVF. It is the extracorporeal existence of fertilized eggs in the early stages of cell division that has enabled the recent development of the study of these special cells. Comprising the primary moments in human development, embryonic stem cells offer a singular vantage point to foundational life processes.

Chapter 12 The Mirth of the Clinic: from: Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Kahn Susan Martha
Abstract: Assisted conception is so unprecedented and the consequences for beliefs about reproduction so uncertain that we anthropologists have had our plates full as we try to construct theoretical frameworks with adequate explanatory power. Much of the recent anthropological work in the Israeli context follows these trends, often using Foucauldian frameworks to illuminate the complex social processes inherent in the social uses of new reproductive technologies. I draw particular attention to the works in this volume. To date, however, little has been written about the routinization of conception enabled by these technologies and the everyday experience of the people who work

Chapter 14 Ethnography, Exegesis, and Jewish Ethical Reflection: from: Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Seeman Don
Abstract: The State of Israel has emerged as a leader in the use and development of new reproductive technologies. It is well-known for example, that Israel boasts more IVF clinics per capita than any other country in the world, and is one of the only nations to make this technology available at public expense to women without regard to their marital status or sexual orientation (Kahn 2000). More surprising perhaps is that Israel, where determinations of personal status and the legality of reproductive technologies are subject to veto by state-authorized religious authorities, specifically legalized donor insemination at least a decade before

CHAPTER 3 Time, Ritual, and Rhythm in Dimodonko from: Time and History
Author(s) Cordero Anne D.
Abstract: Dimodonko was a small, de facto autonomous Nuba land west of the White Nile in the far south of the Nuba Mountains of the Sudan until 1992, when it became the target of a Muslim Jihad militia, as did the entire territory of the Nuba. The last years before this “ethnic cleansing” constitute the situation I describe here, using the “ethnographical present.” My information stems from a field study conducted in 1975 and 1987/88.¹ The structures I intend to describe existed in similar fashion in the wider area of the southern Nuba; I shall refer to them occasionally, but not

CHAPTER 5 Aspects of Zeitdenken in the Inscriptions in Premodern India from: Time and History
Author(s) Berkemer Georg
Abstract: The present chapter is about the change of the Zeitdenkenin premodern India in a single group of sources.¹ This group contains the epigraphical material that forms the most important textual base for the historian of premodern South Asia.² It comprises a large number of historical documents that—due to the material they are written on—are termed “inscriptions.” It is not exactly known how many of these texts have been found so far, or how many of them have been published or at least entered in one of the numerous catalogues and find-lists. Estimations are generally between 50,000 and

CHAPTER 9 Competing Visions of History in Internal Islamic Discourse and Islamic-Western Dialogue from: Time and History
Author(s) An-Na’im Abdullahi A.
Abstract: This paper explores the prospects of a proactive approach to historical thinking in relation to the paradox of human difference and interdependence in a global context. The dual premise of my analysis is the reality and permanence of cultural (including religious) diversity of human societies, on the one hand, and the imperatives of peaceful and cooperative co-existence in an increasingly globalized environment, on the other. Competing visions of history, I suggest, have always been integral to conceptions of self-identity and relationship to the “other,” in individual and communal interactions. But the history of any society would have been mixed, containing

CHAPTER 10 Cultural Plurality Contending Memories and Concerns of Comparative History: from: Time and History
Author(s) Chattopadhyaya B. D.
Abstract: Historical thinking has always been at the crossroads; it is never homogenous or unilineal. Thus, the dynamics and the heterogeneity inherent in the writing of history merit emphasis at the outset of this chapter, if only because it is sometimes assumed that history-writing has taken a common approach so far. The initial points I make are, first, that the domain of history has not really ever been rigidly defined. It is not only since Marc Bloch and Lucien Febvre effectively broke down some of its time-honored but artificial barriers that history has become open-ended; the two patriarchs of what is

CHAPTER 14 History and Cultural Identity: from: Time and History
Author(s) Shimada Shingo
Abstract: It has been three months since I came to this island, so that now I know how life functions here. Regardless of whether it is winter or spring back home, here on the island it is always like the summer we know at home … Surprisingly enough life is quite pleasant here. As the islands nearby are all governed by our country, there are many

CHAPTER 4 Medical Rhetoric in the U.S. and Africa: from: Culture, Rhetoric and the Vicissitudes of Life
Author(s) Biesele Megan
Abstract: A rhetorical subtitle for this paper might be ‘The Ubiquity of Persuasion in Medicine’. As in most other areas of human life, it is difficult, in healing performance and discourse, to get away from the primacy of nuanced communication about socialized belief. Thinking back some twelve years after my original writing in light of both anthropological work on Ju/’hoan San texts of many kinds and the complex indigenous politics which increasingly inform their production and use, I feel that social anthropology is nothing if not combined with rhetorical awareness.

Introduction from: Hannah Arendt and the Uses of History
Author(s) Stone Dan
Abstract: One hundred years after her birth, Hannah Arendt (1906–1975) scarcely needs the usual sort of introduction, since her work has become so well known of late. Much of it has at least. The point of this collection is to foreground aspects of her work, especially drawn from The Origins of Totalitarianism(1951), which bear on imperialism, slavery, race, and genocide but have been neglected in the general revival of interest in Arendt.

Chapter 4 Race and Bureaucracy Revisited: from: Hannah Arendt and the Uses of History
Author(s) Lee Christopher J.
Abstract: In October 1904, an extermination order was issued by General Lothar von Trotha in the sparsely colonized territory of German Southwest Africa (contemporary Namibia). As a consequence of an anti-colonial uprising that had broken out in early January of that year, members of the Herero community were to be shot on sight, with those escaping direct execution to be driven into the Omaheke Desert where they would be left to die from exposure. This policy did not exclude women or children. In short, this order sought in explicit terms to eliminate the Herero people and thus end a conflict that

Book Title: Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries-Cultural Meanings, Social Practices
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Paletschek Sylvia
Abstract: Popular presentations of history have recently been discovered as a new field of research, and even though interest in it has been growing noticeably very little has been published on this topic. This volume is one of the first to open up this new area of historical research, introducing some of the work that has emerged in Germany over the past few years. While mainly focusing on Germany (though not exclusively), the authors analyze different forms of popular historiographies and popular presentations of history since 1800 and the interrelation between popular and academic historiography, exploring in particular popular histories in different media and popular historiography as part of memory culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qck1n

1 Introduction: from: Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Paletschek Sylvia
Abstract: At this point in time, popular presentations of history are booming – not only in the Western world, but worldwide. Recent allusions to history as the ‘new gardening’ by a BBC representative¹ or its characterization as the ‘new cooking’ by historian Justin Champion (2008a) suggest that in Britain history-related television programmes are on their way to outdoing the highly successful gardening or cooking formats in terms of popularity. While this may be a slight exaggeration, the fact is that there has been a rising interest in history since the 1980s. From the second half of the 1990s this interest has

4 Understanding the World around 1900: from: Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Bergenthum Hartmut
Abstract: Why were so many people at that time interested in the history of the world? What factors caused this boom and what did this particular upsurge signify? What kind of stories do these universal histories tell and what do these reveal about Wilhelmine society? What are the functions of these popular historiographies? Why is it worthwhile analysing popular world history compendia in general? And what can be said about the relation between these popular historiographies and the academic mainstream?

5 History for Readers: from: Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Hardtwig Wolfgang
Abstract: When addressing the public, the academic discipline of history has recently been facing unprecedented competition. Television broadcasts and series have been presenting the history of Nazi and post-war Germany in a manner appealing to a broader audience. Motion pictures tell stories from the Third Reich, the air raids and post-war life. Documentaries are in great demand. They offer an attractive combination of solid research, eyewitness interviews, a moving soundtrack and contemporary photographs and filmstrips (Benz 1986; Knopp and Quandt 1988; Bösch 1999: 204–18). As demonstrated by Steven Spielberg’s Schindler’s List(1993) or by Bernd Eichinger’sThe Downfall(2004), the

7 Moving History: from: Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Bösch Frank
Abstract: In summer 2007, the German public discussed the film Valkyrie, about Claus Schenk Graf von Stauffenberg and the attempted assassination of Hitler in July 1944. Although filming had only just started, numerous newspapers carried out detailed debates about this piece of popular historiography. An investigative journalist of theSüddeutsche Zeitungeven managed to get access to the screenplay and compared its designated historical facts to academic books and previous films.¹ Famous historians, journalists and relatives of the historical characters explained Stauffenberg’s resistance to Hitler and discussed whether a Hollywood production and an actor like Tom Cruise would be adequate for

10 Sissi: from: Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Schraut Sylvia
Abstract: ‘Sissi lives!’ a book recently published declared (Webson 1998).¹ A recent Google search of the term ‘Elisabeth von Österreich’ yielded 56,300 hits; a search of the term ‘Sissi’ in combination with Romy Schneider, the actress who played Sissi in the successful film of the same name, yielded 151,000 hits; while 303,000 hits were obtained from a search with the single term ‘Sissi’.² The German Books in print(Verzeichnis lieferbarer Bücher) recently listed fifty-five historical biographies, coffee-table books and novels on the subject of Elisabeth von Österreich. Keep-sakes and devotional objects are in as well. The ZVAB (a central catalogue of

11 Scientists as Heroes? from: Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Ceranski Beate
Abstract: In 2005, Germans encountered Albert Einstein virtually everywhere. The jubilee of his annus mirabilis, 1905, when he published three epochal discoveries, among them the special theory of relativity, brought Einstein to the title pages of all major journals and magazines. A government campaign using the physicist’s quotations and portrait encouraged Germans to become actively involved in cultural, scientific and public life. People queued for hours at the entrance of an Einstein exhibition at the famous Kronprinzenpalais, Berlin, which was one of several important exhibitions about the scientist. Official activities like the Festakt of the German physics society (Deutsche Physikalische Gesellschaft)

Book Title: Constructing Charisma-Celebrity, Fame, and Power in Nineteenth-Century Europe
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): GILOI EVA
Abstract: Railroads, telegraphs, lithographs, photographs, and mass periodicals-the major technological advances of the 19th century seemed to diminish the space separating people from one another, creating new and apparently closer, albeit highly mediated, social relationships. Nowhere was this phenomenon more evident than in the relationship between celebrity and fan, leader and follower, the famous and the unknown. By mid-century, heroes and celebrities constituted a new and powerful social force, as innovations in print and visual media made it possible for ordinary people to identify with the famous; to feel they knew the hero, leader, or "star"; to imagine that public figures belonged to their private lives. This volume examines the origins and nature of modern mass media and the culture of celebrity and fame they helped to create. Crossing disciplines and national boundaries, the book focuses on arts celebrities (Sarah Bernhardt, Byron and Liszt); charismatic political figures (Napoleon and Wilhelm II); famous explorers (Stanley and Brazza); and celebrated fictional characters (Cyrano de Bergerac).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qckwq

CHAPTER 3 The Workings of Royal Celebrity: from: Constructing Charisma
Author(s) KOHLRAUSCH MARTIN
Abstract: Only rarely has Wilhelm II, the last Prussian King and German Emperor, been portrayed as a charismatic ruler.¹ This may not be surprising, as nineteenth-century monarchs are usually regarded, according to Max Weber’s ideal-types, as examples of traditional authority. Nevertheless, the reluctance to think about charisma and the Kaiser is regrettable, not least because Weber developed his concepts of authority against the backdrop of Wilhelm II’s rule.²

CHAPTER 6 Rethinking Female Celebrity: from: Constructing Charisma
Author(s) ROBERTS MARY LOUISE
Abstract: Does female celebrity in the nineteenth century warrant our particular attention? Does it differ significantly from male celebrity or can it be deemed impervious to gender norms? In The Frenzy of Renown, Leo Braudy left such questions aside, focusing his history of fame mostly on men. Though he never denies that societies could celebrate women, he does not examine what happens when they do. It is this question that interests the historian Lenard Berlanstein, who argues that celebrated women, and actresses in particular, evoked more attention than did their male counterparts. Because celebrity in the nineteenth century was defined as

CONCLUSION: from: Constructing Charisma
Author(s) BRAUDY LEO
Abstract: When I was somewhere in the middle of writing The Frenzy of Renown— which turned out to be a twelve-year project—my agent started getting anxious. “You’d better hurry up and finish,” she said. “Soon, no one’s going to be interested in fame any more.” Yet today, more than twenty years later, US culture as well as global culture generally seems more flooded than ever before with the dissemination and merchandising of names and faces that are the hallmarks of modern fame.

Introduction from: The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Meyer Christian
Abstract: The International Rhetoric Culture Project has stated in its theoretical outline that “just as rhetoric is founded in culture, culture is founded in rhetoric.” The first part of this chiasmus can readily be accepted, since cross-cultural research on speaker performance, memory techniques, social expression of emotion, practical reasoning, and the interrelation between speaking styles and political organization have provided abundant evidence that rhetoric is culture-specific. Extensive research in folklore studies, the ethnography of speaking, and linguistic anthropology have also proved this claim over and over again, the most spectacular cases being the use of parallelism and metaphor (e.g., Fox 1988,

CHAPTER 2 Co-Opting Intersubjectivity: from: The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Du Bois John W.
Abstract: Just as the role of subjectivity in language is attracting increasing attention from an array of disciplines ranging across linguistics, communication, anthropology, history, philosophy, and others, the thrust of this interest appears to be headed in the opposite direction from an agenda that would place rhetoric at center stage. Rhetoric in its conventional guise has been deemed a quintessentially public enterprise, oriented to the marketplace of propositions projected to appeal to others. In the market square of civil discourse, sellers of ideas invite prospective buyers to critically test the proffered wares for plausibility and persuasiveness. In contrast, subjectivity as popularly

CHAPTER 4 Discourse Beyond Language: from: The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Boromisza-Habashi David
Abstract: On a beautiful fall day in Cody, Wyoming, Scott Frazier, a member of the Native American Crow Nation, was discussing water and wind. As an educator, he had been invited to speak on these matters at a conference on Native Land and the People of the Great Plains. Mr. Frazier spoke energetically to his mostly Native audience about the importance traditional people place on watching and observing one’s surroundings. He summarized his point through a slowly paced, highly reflective, measured tone, in these words:

CHAPTER 5 The Spellbinding Aura of Culture: from: The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Streck Bernhard
Abstract: This blow by the “philosopher with the hammer” (Nietzsche himself) strikes at least two thousand five hundred years in which, after the discovery of the “naked” truth, it was contrasted with merely fictional worlds—and with the consequential demand that they should disappear. Jacob Taubes dubbed this program Abendländische Eschatologie(1991) and spoke in his last work of the prophetic dictate to replace “speaking” with “saying” (1995: 109)—the Yiddish “tachles,” or the truth of the word standing here in contrast to the Zarathustra as a parody of the Bible and other works of art. “Poets lie,” say intellectuals since

CHAPTER 11 Evoking Peace and Arguing Harmony: from: The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Pankhurst Alula
Abstract: This blessing, led by Nakwa Dald’o of Bashada, and joined by a chorus of elders from several other ethnic groups, was part of a peace ceremony that took place in March 1993 in Arbore, South Omo Zone, Ethiopia.

CHAPTER 14 Attention and Rhetoric: from: The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Oakley Todd
Abstract: One day in the final months of 1999 as I was passing a law office on my way to my favorite cafe, I spied in their window a poster of a large mail-in questionnaire with the Census 2000 logo above it and a superimposed pen poised to fill it out. In large black letters just below the image read the following message:

CHAPTER 15 Emergence, Agency, and the Middle Ground of Culture: from: The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Tyler Stephen A.
Abstract: When we speak of rhetoric/culture, anthropologists and rhetoricians might well ask, “What kind of rhetoric do you have in mind—the rhetoric of inquiry (Megill 1987), the rhetoric of argument (Perleman 1969), or perhaps the rhetoric of the ingenium(Grassi 1980), or some version of Burke’s dramatism (1966)?” Then, too, it might be reasonable to inquire about the parts of rhetoric that capture our interest. Do we focus on such concepts asinventio, topic, and memory, or are we concerned with issues of arrangement, style, and figuration? Are we focusing on the structure of our own textual production as in

Chapter 9 The only Act in Town: from: Stardom in Postwar France
Author(s) Gaffney John
Abstract: It may seem odd to compare the cultural phenomenon of stardom with politics, and probe the extent to which stardom and a star system might exist here too. In approaching French politics in this way, however, we can shed light on its very singular nature, its preoccupation with the personalisation of leadership, and on how de Gaulle – the biggest star since Napoleon – influenced French politics. In one sense, as regards our study of the 1950s and 1960s, de Gaulle was the biggest star of them all: in 1958, he returned to public life after twelve years in obscurity; was hailed

Book Title: Human Nature as Capacity-Transcending Discourse and Classification
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Rapport Nigel
Abstract: What is it to be human? What are our specifically human attributes, our capacities and liabilities?Such questions gave birth to anthropology as an Enlightenment science. This book argues that it is again appropriate to bring "the human" to the fore, to reclaim the singularity of the word as central to the anthropological endeavor, not on the basis of thesubstanceof a human nature - "To be human is to act like this and react like this, to feel this and want this" - but in terms of species-widecapacities: capabilities for action and imagination, liabilities for suffering and cruelty. The contributors approach "the human" with an awareness of these complexities and particularities, rendering this volume unique in its ability to build on anthropology's ethnographic expertise.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qcpw2

Introduction: from: Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Rapport Nigel
Abstract: The issue of human nature, what it is to be human, has been the central enterprise of an ‘anthropological’ science – nominally, at least – since Immanuel Kant’s (1996) first, modern formulation of the disciplinary endeavour in the late 1700s. At the same time it has been argued that in ‘human nature’ anthropology conjures with a concept compromised beyond redemption by its essentialistic, hierarchical and exclusionary history: its role in an imperialism of male over female, adult over child, advanced over primitive, Occidental over Oriental, rational over emotional, and conscientious over brutish, as representative of the essentially human. Others again

Chapter 2 THE LIMITS OF LIMINALITY: from: Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Amit Vered
Abstract: The topic of student travel readily evokes two long-standing tropes of transition and change. On the one hand, youth is commonly regarded as quintessentially ephemeral. On the other hand, since the Grand Tour of the sixteenthth and seventeenth centuries, travel has often been associated with processes of self-formation and transformation. Both youth and travel also call to mind the interaction between change as a modality of personal as well as broader social formation. Thus the Grand Tour through Continental Europe was intended to serve as the basis for the cultivation of elite tastes among young British aristocrats. The transitions identified

Chapter 7 EMBODIED COGNITION, COMMUNICATION AND THE MAKING OF PLACE AND IDENTITY: from: Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Marchand Trevor H.J.
Abstract: Despite anthropology’s long-standing fascination with the spaces and places of people’s lives, Gupta and Ferguson rightly identified a surprising lack of ‘self-consciousness about the issue of space in anthropological theory’ (1997b:33). In general, space has been dismissed as a preexisting natural category within which societies are distributed and humans are politically, economically and socially organized: in other words, an infinite three-dimensional emptiness containing bounded places. Euclidean notions of space as homogenous and extensible have permitted passive contemplation of a distanced ‘there’, safely separated and reified as a static entity rather than a changing and socially contingent phenomenon. Until recent decades,

1 The Intellectual Pursuit of the Sacred from: Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: The central goal of this book is to map the emergence, trajectory, and influence of a very particular kind of intellectual project that I call mystic Durkheimianism, which unites two seemingly very strange bedfellows: Durkheimian sociology and poststructuralism. An understanding of its existence and influence in the French intellectual world will contribute to a better understanding of some otherwise fairly mysterious facts in intellectual history. Moreover, there are to date no treatments of this important piece of the history of French social theory by a sociologist using sociological terms and tools, and I hope to contribute to the work of

5 The Scene of Poststructuralism: from: Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: As we leap half a century forward from the previous chapters, much obviously changes in terms of historical detail. But with respect to the broad set of problematics that defined the emergence of the intellectuelsin the Third Republic, there is significant structural continuity between the two periods. Indeed, the same three intellectual problematics that I described facing the Durkheimians over the last two chapters can be recognized in the field in which the poststructuralists emerged. The problematic concerning the political role of intellectuals is informed in this second period by the dominance of Marxist notions of the engaged intellectual.

8 The Sacred in Durkheimian Thought I from: Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: What is the definition of the sacred in the Durkheimian school? The text to which virtually everyone who is interested in responding to this question looks is Les Formes élémentaires de la vie religieusewhere the term is a key to the definition of religion: “A religion is a solidary system of beliefs and practices relative to sacred things, that is, things that are separated and forbidden, beliefs and practices that unite in a single moral community, called a Church, all those who adhere to them” (Durkheim 1991 [1912]: 108–9). But what exactly is this thing, the sacred? What

10 The Line of Descent of the Mystics: from: Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: In Chapter 5, I looked at some of the reasons for the decline of Durkheimian thought in French academic institutions following Durkheim’s death in 1917. The goal there was to respond to a pressing question: why this near total abandonment of an intellectual and political position that was one of the more powerful and promising ones during the middle Third Republic? Although Terry Clark’s (1973) claim for a general shift in temperament in the Latin Quarter from cartesianism to spontaneism is less an explanation than a description of the effects of some other causal factors, it seems indisputable that a

13 Godless Intellectuals, Then? from: Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: At the conclusion of Formes élémentaires, Durkheim posed a question: What shape will religion take in the future, as secularization, already well underway in his time, continues its expansion? I have argued that he was posing this question for the intellectuals as much as for everyone else, and that the echoes of that fact resounded in some ways that have not been fully understood. Mystic Durkheimianism, in its incarnations among the youngAnnéemembers, in the Collège de Sociologie, or in some varieties of the poststructuralism that emerged in France in the 1960s, constitutes a fascinatingly nuanced intellectual response to

4 Ritualization of Life from: Practicing the Faith
Author(s) Csordas Thomas J.
Abstract: The most compelling aspect of Charismatic and Pentecostal ritual is not its repertoire of specific ritual practices such as speaking in tongues, laying on of hands, or resting in the Spirit. It is not the inventory of ritual events such as prayer meetings, healing services, or revival meetings. Neither is it the integrated system of ritual language genres including prophecy, prayer, teaching, and witnessing. What is most compelling is the manner in which ritual performance has the potential, for individuals and communities, to bring about the transformation of everyday life, to generate a new habitus, indeed to subsume quotidian practices

5 Adventure and Atrophy in a Charismatic Movement: from: Practicing the Faith
Author(s) Percy Martyn
Abstract: Dating from 1994, the “Toronto Blessing” is the name for a phenomenon that is associated with the Toronto Airport Christian Fellowship. From its very foundation, the Vineyard Christian Church in Toronto had experienced many of the things that would be typical for Christians within the fundamentalist-revivalist tradition: miracles, healings, an emphasis on deliverance, speaking in tongues, and a sense of the believers being in the vanguard of the Holy Spirit’s movement as the millennium neared. However, what marked out the Toronto Blessing for special consideration were the more unusual phenomena that occurred. A number of followers trace the initial outpouring

Book Title: The French Road Movie-Space, Mobility, Identity
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Archer Neil
Abstract: The traditionally American genre of the road movie has been explored and reconfigured in the French context since the later 1960s. Comparative in its approach, this book studies the inter-relationship between American and French culture and cinemas, and in the process considers and challenges histories of the road movie. It combines film history with film theory methodologies, analysing transformations in social, political and film-industrial contexts alongside changing perspectives on the meaning and possibilities of film. At once chronological and thematic in structure, The French Road Movieprovides in each chapter a comprehensive introduction to key themes emerging from the genre in the French context - liberty, identity and citizenship, masculinity, femininity, border-crossing - followed by detailed, innovative and often revisionist readings of the chosen films. Through these readings the author justifies the place of the road genre within French cinema histories and reinvigorates this often neglected and misunderstood area of study.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qczwn

Afterword from: The French Road Movie
Abstract: The aim of this book has been to historicize and understand French cinema’s exploration of the road movie. As I suggested in my introduction, this is not a straightforward task. As the road movie is dif-fi cult to identify in culturally specific terms, and is therefore always a genre in search of its identity, a French road movie is engaged in a constant negotiation of its own physical and conceptual boundaries. In fact, as I hope to have shown, analysing the ‘French road movie’ ultimately begs the question of its ‘French-ness’. If the road movie, to an extent, resists being

FOREWORD: from: A Lover's Quarrel with the Past
Author(s) Ankersmit Frank
Abstract: In Lover’s Quarrel with the PastGhosh presents us with a fascinating account of Indian historical consciousness and of how India relates to its past. ‘Fascinating’, if only because India still often is the country of miracles (‘das Wunderland’) in Western eyes that Hegel already discerned in it. But fascinating above all since for most Western readers Ghosh’s book will be like the exploration of a strange and unknown territory. They will discover in this book the account of a relationship to the past that is wholly unlike anything familiar to them.

CHAPTER 1 Romancing the Past: from: A Lover's Quarrel with the Past
Abstract: Romancing history is a projection of sympathy and indulgence into a past age; history in its invocation of the past is a ‘museum of held reverberations’⁴; this can lead to excesses, transgressions, instabilities summoning up a delicate consortment of imbalances between the past and the present. It is a poeticisation of the past, a kind of sin that ‘imbalances’ generate, a sin that ‘imagination’ promotes, a sin that spurts a creative gush. Ann Rigney, in her delight of a book Imperfect Histories,argues that the ‘very possibility of historical knowledge implies the possibility of ignorance’. She writes:

CHAPTER 2 Reality of Representation, Reality behind Representation: from: A Lover's Quarrel with the Past
Abstract: The two terms that form a contrasting pair are effacement(forgetfulness) andconservation.Memory is, always and necessarily, an interaction between the two. The complete restitution of the past is terrifying and a clear impossibility (one, however, that Borges imagined in his story of ‘Funes, the Memorious’). Memory is essentially a selection: certain traits of an event are conserved, others immediately or progressively set aside and forgotten. Hence it is baffling that the ability Computers have to save information is termed memory, since they lack a basic feature of memory,

Book Title: Melanesian Odysseys-Negotiating the Self, Narrative, and Modernity
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Josephides Lisette
Abstract: In a series of epic self-narratives ranging from traditional cultural embodiments to picaresque adventures, Christian epiphanies and a host of interactive strategies and techniques for living, Kewa Highlanders (PNG) attempt to shape and control their selves and their relentlessly changing world. This lively account transcends ethnographic particularity and offers a wide-reaching perspective on the nature of being human. Inverting the analytic logic of her previous work, which sought to uncover what social structures concealed, Josephides focuses instead on the cultural understandings that people make explicit in their actions and speech. Using approaches from philosophy and anthropology, she examines elicitation (how people create their selves and their worlds in the act of making explicit) and mimesis (how anthropologists produce ethnographies), to arrive at an unexpected conclusion: that knowledge of self and other alike derives from self-externalization rather than self-introspection.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qd3fk

Chapter 2 Self Strategies: from: Melanesian Odysseys
Abstract: In the previous chapter I attempted, using all the arts at my disposal, to convey to the reader how my field-site had impressed itself on my consciousness, and how I perceived daily life to be lived there. I presented the vignettes with little commentary, almost like pictures at an exhibition, but I also intended that they should serve to introduce the ethnography’s theoretical aim: to provide, by means of narratives, ‘portraits’ and elicitations, a concrete demonstration of people’s strategies as they negotiate their social world and their own place within it. Reversing the usual sequence, the second chapter will provide

Chapter 6 Portraits and Minimal Narratives: from: Melanesian Odysseys
Abstract: It is one thing to tell a story and quite another to engage in theoretical debate. To imbue narrative with theory is always a small miracle, even when the theory was extracted from the narrative in a barely conscious process of distillation, until it emerged fully-formed, both explicans and explicandum.¹ But once theory has taken on that separate existence – clean, concise and economical, unencumbered by the messiness of multistranded life which nevertheless is congealed in it – it passes as pure understanding and wrong-foots narrative, as being excessive to its needs. In the following chapters as in previous ones I shall

Introduction from: Grassroots Memorials
Author(s) Sánchez-Carretero Cristina
Abstract: On 13 October 2008, the initial global economic crash had just occurred, and people everywhere seemed to be in a state of shock about what had happened to the world. In the City of London, a memorial was created on a lamppost in front of the Bank of England. It was constructed with flowers, stuffed animals, and crosses and topped with a plaque representing a circle of bleeding roses and the text “In Loving Memory of the Boom Economy.” Letters were attached expressing grievances about what had happened and what was yet to come, like “R.I.P., Rest in Poverty.” It

Chapter 6 Ghost Bikes: from: Grassroots Memorials
Author(s) Dobler Robert Thomas
Abstract: In October 2003, the first “ghost bike” appeared in St. Louis, Missouri, to memorialize the death of a cyclist who had been hit by a car. A local bicycle shop owner witnessed the accident and placed a mangled bike, painted stark white, on the scene, with a sign proclaiming “Cyclist struck here.” The movement quickly spread beyond St. Louis, and similar memorials have since appeared in thirty other cities across North and South America, Europe, and Australia, creating a network of mourners and activists who are working to increase vehicular awareness of bicyclists. The sudden popularity of ghost bike memorials

CHAPTER 8 Rhetoric, Truth, and the Work of Trope from: Culture and Rhetoric
Author(s) Rumsey Alan
Abstract: The main body of this chapter will consist of three parts, the second of which is an antidote to the first, and the third of which explains why. In the first part I will play the part of the gadfly, expressing certain reservations I have about the Rhetoric Culture project. I am in full agreement with what I take to be one of the project’s main aims: to overcome the limits of previous understandings of discourse that give pride of place to its truth-functional aspects and devalue others as mererhetoric. But, for reasons I will argue in the first

Book Title: Protest Beyond Borders-Contentious Politics in Europe since 1945
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Romanos Eduardo
Abstract: The protest movements that followed the Second World War have recently become the object of study for various disciplines; however, the exchange of ideas between research fields, and comparative research in general, is lacking. An international and interdisciplinary dialogue is vital to not only describe the similarities and differences between the single national movements but also to evaluate how they contributed to the formation and evolution of a transnational civil society in Europe. This volume undertakes this challenge as well as questions some major assumptions of post-1945 protest and social mobilization both in Western and Eastern Europe. Historians, political scientists, sociologists and media studies scholars come together and offer insights into social movement research beyond conventional repertoires of protest and strictly defined periods, borders and paradigms, offering new perspectives on past and present processes of social change of the contemporary world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qd6qs

Transnational Approaches to Contentious Politics: from: Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Romanos Eduardo
Abstract: Emerging from an international workshop, this volume examines a variety of different aspects of social mobilization since 1945, while the contributors constitute an equally heterogeneous group of young political scientists and historians, anthropologists, as well as researchers on social movement and the media. Their research poses numerous questions covering a broad range of issues across time and space, looking retrospectively at global interactions during the Cold War, as well as looking forward at reconfigurations of protest politics in the twenty-first century, both in Western and Eastern Europe. Blurring chronological and geographical boundaries of study and merging strictly defined methods and

Chapter 2 The Prague Spring and the “Gypsy Question”: from: Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Donert Celia
Abstract: Few episodes in the postwar history of Czechoslovakia have received greater attention than the Prague Spring, when reformers in the Czechoslovak Communist Party (KSČ) attempted to create a democratic socialism in the heart of the Soviet bloc, creating unprecedented opportunities for political liberalization, social mobilization, and internationalism in a Stalinist regime that had previously been one of the most conservative in Eastern Europe. The subsequent invasion of Czechoslovakia by Warsaw Pact troops contributed to the commemoration of the Prague Spring as a national rebellion against Soviet hegemony, a myth that Czech and Slovak historians have been laboring to confront since

Chapter 5 Communicating Dissent: from: Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Teune Simon
Abstract: Just as its forerunners were, the Group of Eight (G8) summit in Heiligendamm, Germany, was challenged by protests emerging from the global justice movements (GJMs). The images of protest were complementing and at times eclipsing the images of the official summit.¹ When we recall the events in June 2007, we think of colorful marches with thousands and tens of thousands of participants, clowns poking fun at the security forces, protesters in black disguises throwing stones, discussions at the alternative summit, or activists roaming the fields near Heiligendamm to blockade the access to the venue.

Chapter 6 Digitalized Anti-Corporate Campaigns: from: Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Niesyto Johanna
Abstract: As mass media-communicated corporate public relations and product advertising form conditions for the distribution of product and corporate images, the transformation into a multimedia society and, in particular, the introduction and widespread appropriation of the Internet, enable the sociotechnical possibility of converting political protest in favor of anti-corporate campaigns using a consumerist repertoire. Appealing to citizens as “netizen consumers” creates new options for a politicization of market sphere-related activities.¹ Protest actors promoting consumer resistance use the Internet as a site of contestation: they use digital communication tools to deconstruct brand images and re-contextualize them against the backdrop of global justice.

Chapter 11 Globalization and the Transformation of National Protest Politics: from: Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Hutter Swen
Abstract: Is globalization leading to a reconfiguration of political cleavage structures and mobilization in Western Europe at the beginning of the twenty-first century? And what are the specific consequences regarding protest politics? The following chapter presents key ideas of an ongoing research project* that puts globalization in a Rokkanean perspective.¹ It conceives the contemporary opening up of boundaries as a new critical juncture, which induces new structural cleavages, both within and between nation-states.² Using this perspective, the project tries to find novel answers to the transformation of national electoral and protest politics in a globalizing world.

Chapter 1 Historical Representation, Identity, Allegiance from: Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Megill Allan
Abstract: The disinterested, scientific side of the project is manifested throughout the detailed research proposal that the ‘National Histories in Europe’ research network submitted to

Chapter 2 Drawing the Line: from: Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Lorenz Chris
Abstract: In December 1985 William McNeill presented a paper to the American Historical Association’s annual meeting. At the time McNeill, who had earned his fame with widely acknowledged books such as The Rise of the WestandPlagues and People,was president of the AHA and one of the pioneers of a kind of history which has since become known as ‘global history’ or ‘world history’. The title of his paper was as original as it was enigmatic: ‘Mythistory, or Truth, Myth, History, and Historians’. Published in the same year as a chapter in a volume entitledMythistory and Other Essays,

Chapter 12 The Nation in Song from: Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Bohlman Philip V.
Abstract: Two bards sing this chapter into being, resonant with the narratives they intoned to sing in the Ukrainian nation in the seventeenth and nineteenth century (Figures 12. 1 and 12.2).¹ The two bards, a Cossack nobleman, domesticated through the elevation of folk art in the seventeenth century, and Wernyhora, memorialised through the monumental style of the Romantic Polish painter, Jan Matejko (1838–1893), sing of the Ukrainian nation in styles and with national imaginaries that are as strikingly similar as they are different.²

Chapter 1 “Shining” in Public: from: Young Men in Uncertain Times
Author(s) Lukose Ritty A.
Abstract: A wide-ranging contemporary set of conceptions tout India’s place in a globalizing world, particularly images and discourses increasingly popular since the early 1990s that proclaim India as an emerging global power. This is “India Rising,” as a recent magazine article puts it (Zakaria 2006). Reform policies that opened up the Indian economy to global market forces—colloquially known as “liberalization”—have significantly transformed the political, economic, and cultural landscape of India. Media representations of Third-World poverty, an uneducated, rural, and traditional society, and an inefficient and corrupt bureaucratic state—all backward or underdeveloped in comparison to the “modern” West—jostle

Chapter 2 “There Will Be a Lot of Old Young Men Going Home”: from: Young Men in Uncertain Times
Author(s) Irwin Anne
Abstract: The title of this chapter was inspired by a comment made to me by a key informant during the course of field research with a Canadian infantry rifle company engaged in combat operations in Southern Afghanistan during the summer months of 2006.¹ He was an experienced soldier, a sergeant whom I had known since 1996 when I had studied the same unit during peacetime training in Canada. The company had been “outside the wire,” that is, outside the protective confines of the coalition base at Kandahar Air Field, for several weeks, but had returned to the base for two days

Chapter 3 Institutionalizing an Extended Youth Phase in Chinese Society: from: Young Men in Uncertain Times
Author(s) Pan Tianshu
Abstract: Throughout most of Chinese history, males—and especially sons—have comprised the preferred social category in which parents strove to develop emotional and ethical obligation. This relationship has constituted the fundamental value orientation by which Chinese society has traditionally organized itself. But the 1949 communist transformation of society, especially urban life, profoundly altered the parent-son dyad, and in its place the parent-daughter bond became increasingly paramount. Even in the countryside, where the parent-son relationship and the patrilineal principle remained sociological constants, a transformation took place by the late twentieth century. Increasingly, urbanites and some rural residents (Shi 2009; Yan 2003)

Chapter 7 Being “Made” Through Conflict: from: Young Men in Uncertain Times
Author(s) Roche Rosellen
Abstract: With few exceptions in academic literature concerning violence in Northern Ireland (Bell 1990; Jenkins 1983; Roche 2008; Roche 2007; Roche 2005a; Roche 2003), young people and their violent interplay have not held much appeal for social scientists. This is so even despite the fact that throughout urban, enclaved, and economically deprived working-class housing areas in Northern Ireland, young people, and particularly young men, are reported as consistently participating in “low-level” violent activities. While no formal definition of this notion of “low-level” violence exists, its use in the Northern Irish context is widespread. Thoughts vary on the origin of the expression

Chapter 8 Young Men, Trouble, and the Law: from: Young Men in Uncertain Times
Author(s) Terrio Susan J.
Abstract: In the 1990s, juvenile arrest rates increased in France while overall crime declined. As a result, public attention centered on what was identified as a newly threatening social category, a “delinquency of exclusion.” This was a category many experts in the media, law enforcement, the bar, the magistracy, the academy, and the government associated with disadvantaged Muslim males, both French citizens and immigrants, living in the stigmatized urban space of the citésor housing projects. They depicted the “new” delinquents as younger, more violent, and irredeemable. They came to view the offender “from an immigrant background” through the lens of

Book Title: Conflicted Memories-Europeanizing Contemporary Histories
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Ramsbrock Annelie
Abstract: Despite the growing interest in general European history, the European dimension is surprisingly absent from the writing of contemporary history. In most countries, the historiography on the 20th century continues to be dominated by national perspectives. Although there is cross-national work on specific topics such as occupation or resistance, transnational conceptions and narratives of contemporary European history have yet to be worked out. This volume focuses on the development of a shared conception of recent European history that will be required as an underpinning for further economic and political integration so as to make lasting cooperation on the old continent possible. It tries to overcome the traditional national framing that ironically persists just at a time when organized efforts to transform Europe from an object of debate to an actual subject have some chance of succeeding in making it into a polity in its own right.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdff2

Chapter 2 Communist Legacies in the ‘New Europe’: from: Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Petrescu Dragoş
Abstract: ‘Man is a complex animal who is tractable in some respects and intractable in others. Both the successes and the failures of our communist cases suggest that there is a pattern to this tractability-intractability behavior, that liberty once experienced is not quickly forgotten, and that equity and equality of some kind resonate in the human spirit.’ This is how Gabriel Almond concludes his study on communist political cultures focusing on the former Soviet Union, Czechoslovakia, and Yugoslavia, as well as on Cuba, Hungary, and Poland.¹ It may be argued that, apart from liberty, equity, and equality, the notions of social

Chapter 8 Europe as Leisure Time Communication: from: Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Mergel Thomas
Abstract: Ideas of European integration are mostly shaped by the image of an increasing merger of distinct states. In this process differences are dissolved to be finally subsumed into one coherent social and political space with one homogenous public sphere inhabited by actors who perceive each other as similar. This idea derives from the common experience of the nation- building process and its homogenizing effects since the nineteenth century: diverse societies built a common new form, where differences were largely extinguished. This perspective has not remained unchallenged: disapproving skeptics highlight the value of European plurality, which should not be pressed into

Chapter 10 Twentieth-Century Culture, ‘Americanization,’ and European Audiovisual Space from: Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Siefert Marsha
Abstract: Since the Renaissance—or more especially since its historical appreciation—the idea of Europe has resonated with the idea of ‘Culture.’ Artists, writers, musicians, and their works circulated throughout Europe while imperial capitals and emerging nation-states built institutions to train, exhibit, and judge artists and their work. By the nineteenth century what could be called the European cultural space was global, as opera houses and theatres were built in colonial capitals and outposts from Buenos Aires to Hanoi, and as European educators and performers took ‘Culture’ to the far reaches of empire. Even before the First World War, however, several

Chapter 12 A European Civil Society? from: Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Kaelble Hartmut
Abstract: In recent years, the term ‘civil society’ has played an increasingly significant role in the language of the European Union. It is employed in speeches given by the president of the European Commission, in the much-discussed white paper on Governance in the European Union, and in debates about the European Constitution, as well as in the catalogue of research topics supported within the Sixth Framework Programme and in several hundred additional documents published by the EU. It is nevertheless still a matter of dispute whether a civil society has in fact emerged on the level of the European Union or

Chapter 5 Populism versus Elitism in Max Reinhardt’s Austrian Productions of the 1920s from: The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Patterson Michael
Abstract: Berlin, 1910. The Kammerspiele of the Deutsches Theater is performing a small-cast production by Max Reinhardt, a revival of Ibsen’s Ghosts, with which the Kammerspiele had opened four years previously, using a striking set design by Edvard Munch. The auditorium, itself not much larger than the stage, seats 346. Tickets cost twenty marks each, about the amount a female manual laborer could hope to earn in two weeks, or the equivalent of two hundred eggs, one hundred liters of milk, or ten kilos of mutton. So the audience comprises the cultural elite of Berlin, attired in furs, jewels, and dinner

Chapter 7 George Tabori’s Return to the Danube, 1987–1999 from: The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Bayerdörfer Hans-Peter
Abstract: George Tabori loves to declare himself the oldest living “royal-imperial Austro-Hungarian playwright.”¹ It took him several decades to return—at least temporarily—to the proper place for a writer of this traditional distinction: in 1968/69 he returned to Europe, first to Germany, then in the 1980s to Austria and to Vienna, and finally to the Burgtheater. As is well known, Tabori is fond of puns, calembours, and clichés in general, so it is hardly surprising that he seems to be fond of Vienna clichés in particular, choosing titles such as Wiener BlutandWiener Schnitzelfor his writings.

Chapter 8 Thomas Bernhard’s Heldenplatz: from: The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Pfabigan Alfred
Abstract: What we call a scandal was a phenomenon that accompanied Bernhard’s work for decades.² He was often accused of provoking scandals to get attention and ensure the success of his work.³ Although this is an insinuation, Bernhard,

Book Title: Academic Anthropology and the Museum-Back to the Future
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Bouquet Mary
Abstract: The museum boom, with its accompanying objectification and politicization of culture, finds its counterpart in the growing interest by social scientists in material culture, much of which is to be found in museums. Not surprisingly, anthropologists in particular are turning their attention again to museums, after decades of neglect, during which fieldwork became the hallmark of modern anthropology - so much so that the "social" and the "material" parted company so radically as to produce a kind of knowledge gap between historical collections and the intellectuals who might have benefitted from working on these material representations of culture. Moreover it was forgotten that museums do not only present the "pastness" of things. A great deal of what goes on in contemporary museums is literally about planning the shape of the future: making culture materialize involves mixing things from the past, taking into account current visions, and knowing that the scenes constructed will shape the perspectives of future generations. However, the (re-)invention of museum anthropology presents a series of challenges for academic teaching and research, as well as for the work of cultural production in contemporary museums - issues that are explored in this volume.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdgkf

5 Anthropology at home and in the museum: from: Academic Anthropology and the Museum
Author(s) Segalen Martine
Abstract: France has two national museums of general anthropology: the Musée de l’Homme, which covers the cultures and civilisations of the world; and for France, the Musée National des Arts et Traditions Populaires. These are in addition to specialist museums such as the Musée Guimet, which is devoted to oriental art. Anthropological museums seemed poised, at the beginning of the twenty-first century, for a new future. After long debate, a new Musée des Arts et Civilisations comprising the ethnographic collections of the present Musée de l’Homme (at Trocadéro) and Musée des Arts Africains et Océaniens (at the Porte Dorée, on the

7 Towards an ethnography of museums: from: Academic Anthropology and the Museum
Author(s) Ou C. Jay
Abstract: Recent controversies at the Smithsonian Institution in Washington, D.C. provoked our thinking about the involvement of anthropology in museums over time and about a revitalised, ethnographically-informed interest in museums and museum exhibits by anthropologists that has been increasingly evident since the 1980s. One of the Smithsonian controversies dealt with the Enola Gayexhibit, which commemorated the fiftieth anniversary of the dropping of atomic bombs on the Japanese cities of Nagasaki and Hiroshima. The second controversy centred aroundScience in American life, an exhibit located at the National Museum of American History, and will be described in more detail below. Both

Introducción: from: Etnicidades en construcción. Identidad y acción social en contextos de desigualdad
Author(s) Cuenca Ricardo
Abstract: En una reciente publicación sobre la formación histórica del movimiento indígena-campesino en Bolivia, Huáscar Salazar Lohman¹ relata cómo el eminente triunfo de Evo Morales, en el año 2005, reanimó entre la población indígena la vieja idea de tener una nueva oportunidad para “conquistar el momento actual” y cambiar así los designios del futuro. Esta figura de apropiarse del tiempo es más que una forma literaria; es un poderoso enunciado político que significa la posibilidad de ejercer el poder para actuar colectivamente frente al Estado y también frente a otros grupos dominantes distintos; es apostar por la construcción de una nación

Las transformaciones del mapa: from: Globalización y diversidad cultural: una mirada desde América Latina
Author(s) Martín-Barbero Jesús
Abstract: Hasta hace pocos años, pensar la cultura era otear un mapa claro y sin arrugas: la antropología tenía a su cargo las culturas primitivas y la sociología se encargaba de las modernas. Lo que implicaba dos opuestas ideas de cultura. Para los antropólogos, «cultura» es todo, pues en el magma primordial que habitan los primitivos tan cultura es el hacha como el mito, la maloca como las relaciones de parentesco, el repertorio de las plantas medicinales o el de las danzas rituales. Mientras, para los sociólogos, cultura es sólo un especial tipo de actividades y de objetos, de productos y

Modernidad-mundo e identidad from: Globalización y diversidad cultural: una mirada desde América Latina
Author(s) Ortiz Renato
Abstract: El tema de la identidad es rico y controvertido. Si en la actualidad, partir del proceso de globalización, resurge con fuerza en las discusiones políticas y académicas, se hace necesario, sin embargo, dimensionarlo correctamente. Por cierto, las transformaciones recientes replantean los movimientos identitarios en una nueva meseta. Pero antes de reflexionar acerca de su configuración, hay que reconsiderar el modo en que el propio concepto fue trabajado en las ciencias sociales. Tengo la impresión de que a menudo implica una lectura deificadora de la sociedad, lo que nos conduce a una comprensión equívoca de las relaciones sociales. En este sentido,

La aldea global entre la utopía transcultural y el ratio mercantil: from: Globalización y diversidad cultural: una mirada desde América Latina
Author(s) Hopenhayn Martín
Abstract: Dos ámbitos decisivos de la vida se encuentran hoy globalizados microelectrónicamente y cruzan fronteras sin limitaciones de espacio ni dilaciones en el tiempo, a saber, la información y las finanzas. Ocurre, con la transmisión de mensajes lo mismo que con la circulación del dinero: no hay límite espacial ni demora temporal entre emisores y receptores de mensajes. Esto crea una interdependencia inédita en la economía financiera y en el diálogo a escala planetaria. Interdependencia que se juega en las antípodas: como máxima vulnerabilidad económica de las sociedades nacionales frente a movimientos que ocurren en cualquier otro punto del planeta, y

Book Title: Las formas del recuerdo: etnografías de la violencia política en el Perú- Publisher: IEP
Author(s): Yezer Coroline
Abstract: Los estudios reunidos en este libro ofrecen una variedad de perspectivas y enfoques sobre la violencia armada que vivió el país durante las décadas de 1980 y 1990, y han sido trabajados en diferentes comunicades de Ayacucho, la región más afectada por el conflicto armado. Son etnografías históricas y antropológicas que se aproximan a la violencia, enmarcándola en procesos históricos y políticos más amplios, y expresada en una variada producción cultural, que incluye canciones, sueños e, incluso, una figura religiosa. Cada una de estas manifestaciones refleja la política local, la vida posconflicto y la reconstrucción social e identitaria. Estos trabajos abordan la memoria (de la guerra) no como un hecho aislado, sino como una realidad que impregna la vida y se articula a otros procesos sociales y políticos. Exploran, asimismo, formas alternativas de recordar el pasado, sugeridas de los mencionados espacios de producción cultural desde los cuales se reimagina la comunidad y se busca asegurar los derechos de las poblaciones marginadas.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdw2k

Book Title: Between Educationalization and Appropriation-Selected Writings on the History of Modern Educational Systems
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): Vervenne Marc
Abstract: Advanced reader on the history of education Developments in educational systems worldwide have largely contributed to the modernization and globalization of present-day society. However, in order to fully understand their impact, educational systems must be interpreted against a background of particular situations and contexts. This textbook brings together more than twenty (collaborative) contributions focusing on the two key themes in the work of Marc Depaepe: educationalization and appropriation. Compiled for his international master classes, these selected writings provide not only a thorough introduction to the history of modern educational systems, but also a twenty-five year overview of the work of a well-known pioneer in the field of history of education. Covering the modernization of schooling in Western history, the characteristics and origins of educationalization, the colonial experience in education and the process of appropriation, Between Educationalization and Appropriation will be of great interest to a larger audience of scholars in the social sciences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdwdd

Foreword from: Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Vervenne Marc
Abstract: Having a colleague and friend ask one to write a foreword for his scholarly book is a great honour. I have known Professor Marc Depaepe for many years: in the beginning at quite a distance, since he was one of the select company of star research professors appointed permanently through the Flemish Fund for Scientific Research in Belgium. These professors were, so to speak, “untouchable” and we, “the rank and file”, respectfully kept our distance. Marc Depaepe’s CV and academic bibliography offer convincing evidence that he is indeed an outstanding researcher. But to be serious, he is not aloof at

4 The Sacralization of Childhood in a Secularized World: from: Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Depaepe M.
Abstract: The long list of questions issued by the organizers of this seminar is, we assume, primarily heuristic in intent. Rather than formulating a response to them all, therefore, we have concentrated on a single theme. It takes its relevance from the point of view of the discipline in which we as researchers have profiled ourselves, namely educational historiography. This contemporary variant of what was previously often termed “the history of pedagogy” still may be institutionally associated with the “educational sciences” but does not necessarily coincide with it as part of fundamental research². Rather than as the internal history of the

5 Educationalisation: from: Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Depaepe M.
Abstract: Long before there was talk of any ‘postmodernism’ in philosophy or in historiography, the German philosopher Friedrich Nietzsche (1844-1900), with this citation from his Genealogy of Morality,¹ pointed out that our perception of things – and thus also of the past – has always been colored by our perspective. Because we are biologically situated in a specific spatial (social and cultural) and temporal (historical) context, we can do nothing other than look from a specific standpoint (casu quo perspective) at what lies behind us. And since time always further blurs (and ultimately even erases or wipes out) the past, this

7 Educationalization as an Ongoing Modernization Process from: Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Smeyers P.
Abstract: In several Western societies we witness today an increasing tendency to “educationalize” social problems. As an institution, the school is, among other things, held accountable for solving social inequalities (related to class, race, and gender); for reducing traffic deaths, obesity, teenage sex, and environmental destruction; and for enhancing public health, economic productivity, citizenship, and even performances in sport contests such as the Olympic Games. Pushing these kind of “social” responsibilities on schools is a process that has been under way for a long time and coincides with the role of education in the formation of the modern nation-state. This phenomenon

Book Title: Islam & Europe-Challenges and Opportunities
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): TIBI Bassam
Abstract: Dedicated to increasing our knowledge and awareness of the ever-growing diversity and pluralism of global society, Forum A. & A. Leysen has initiated an annual debate/lecture series, beginning with a focus on Islam in today's world and in Europe in particular. Seven well-known influential authorities - each an active participant in the public debate on the global role of Islam past, present and future - recently presented papers at the first Intercultural Relations Conference sponsored by Forum A.& A. Leysen. These important contributions, on the topic Islam and Europe: Challenges and Opportunities, are reprinted in this volume. Although each contributor speaks from his own distinctive point of view, a common message emerges from all seven texts: only dialogue - on the one hand between the West (countries that manifest themselves as Western Democratic constitutional states) and Islam, and on the other hand within and among societies historically identified with Islam- will overcome entrenched confrontation and negative animosity, engender new possibilities and understandings, and, by encouraging free and critical thinking, pave the way to social equity and the scientific innovation that, potentially, can lead to more prosperity. In the course of the conference all seven talks led to fascinating debates. This book includes the most important questions asked and the speakers' responses. Although the question of how to actually construct the dialogue remains unsettled, this ground-breaking book takes a giant step toward an answer.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdwsq

Multiple Adaptations: from: Islam & Europe
Author(s) Bowen John
Abstract: I find this way of putting the question, about what Islam says or does or could do, to be the wrong way because it is socially ungrammatical. There is no Muhammad who speaks, not even a single written ‘Islam’ that reveals. What there is,

Islam and Europe in the Age of Intercivilizational Conflict. from: Islam & Europe
Author(s) Tibi Bassam
Abstract: The deliberations and the entire reasoning undertaken in this lecture are based on two major assumptions. The first of which refers to the increasing significance of Islam in the new century, not only for the world at large¹ but also and in particular for Europe.²

Islam, Muslims and the West: from: Islam & Europe
Author(s) Abu Zayd Nasr
Abstract: Since the French president announced on December 16, 2003 the necessity to introduce a new law in order to prohibit religious symbols, such as the Jewish yarmulke, the big crosses and the female Muslim headscarf, hijâb, to be shown in the national French schools, the reaction generated all over the Muslim World, especially in the Arab World, presents the model of the polemic controversy/dispute/debate/ discussion that has been overshadowing the relationship between the Muslim World and the Western World since the late eighteenth and the beginning of the nineteenth centuries. The issue at steak here, from the French view, is

THE RECYCLING OF LITURGY UNDER PIPPIN III AND CHARLEMAGNE from: Medieval Manuscripts in Transition
Author(s) HEN Yitzhak
Abstract: The age of Pippin III (d. 768) and Charlemagne (d. 814) was a significant period of liturgical formation in the early medieval West. For the first time in the history of western Christendom a concerted interest in liturgy was demonstrated by rulers who obviously recognised the political and social advantages that lay within the patronage of liturgy.¹ Several unrelated sources clearly associate Pippin III with the introduction of the cantus Romanusinto Francia, and consequently credit him with replacing thecantus Gallicanuswith what were understood to be Roman musical traditions.² Walahfrid Strabo (d. 849) even recounts that it was

THE WRITER’S LOVE. LOVE AND THE ACT OF READING: from: Medieval Manuscripts in Transition
Author(s) VERBAAL Wim
Abstract: When commencing his commentary on the Song of songs and pondering over its abrupt opening verse, its beginning without beginning, Bernard of Clairvaux stresses at first the attractiveness of a text opening on a kiss. ‘And it really is a pleasing communication, which takes its beginning from a kiss, and Scripture itself, as if with an attractive face, easily disposes and invites to its reading.’² The attractive face of Scripture, offering itself to the reader with a kiss: one cannot deny that Bernard makes use of a striking image when illustrating the intriguing character of the Song of songs. The

The Ultimate Causes of Paranoia: from: Origins and Ends of the Mind
Author(s) de Block Andreas
Abstract: Griesinger and Kraepelin qualified paranoia as one of the three major psychotic disorders, together with schizophrenia and manic-depressive psychosis (Griesinger 1845, Kraepelin 1915). In psychoanalytic thinking, paranoia even became the paradigmatic form of psychosis. Freud’s only case-studies of psychotic patients, for instance, were devoted to paranoid individuals (Freud 1911, Freud 1915). Jacques Lacan (1988), and to a lesser degree Melanie Klein (1946), pursued this line of thinking by considering paranoia as the essence of the psychotic process (Roudinesco & Plon 1997). Contemporary psychiatric nosography, however, handles schizophrenia as the central taxon. In fact, schizophrenia has become a more or less generic

Poetic Pleasure, Psychosis, and Perversion: from: Origins and Ends of the Mind
Author(s) Geyskens Tomas
Abstract: In 1905, Freud wrote Three Essays on the Theory of SexualityandJokes and their Relation to the Unconscious. In both of these works, the concept of ‘fore-pleasure’ plays a central and structuring role, but only inJokesis it thoroughly analyzed. Freud’s theory of sexuality, therefore, can only be understood when it is confronted with his theory of jokes. Surprisingly, such a simultaneous reading ofJokesandThree Essaysleads us very far away from the classical interpretation of Freud’s theory of sexuality and especially from his later theory centred on the Oedipus complex. First, we will confront Freud’s

Love as Ontology: from: Origins and Ends of the Mind
Author(s) Clemens Justin
Abstract: Psychoanalysis has, from its origins, remained indifferent to or suspicious towards ontology. More precisely, the practice of psychoanalysis has not necessitated that clinical psychoanalysts intervene directly in ontological questioning, whether implicitly or explicitly. Even in the most volatile moments of its struggles to sustain itself as a singular practice, psychoanalysis has remained relatively unmoved in the face of the counter-claims, concepts and criticisms coming from philosophy — and, a fortiori, from philosophical ontologies. Indeed, the reverse seems to have been the case: it is philosophers who have had to respond, with some urgency, to the challenges offered by psychoanalysis. However

3. The Belgian Constitutional Court and federalism from: Beyond Federal Dogmatics (pdf)
Abstract: [d]uring the first years, the Court of Arbitration has laid the foundations for the allocation of competences [case law], which has resulted in a wide conception of the competences of Communities and Regions, without however, when necessary, losing track of the unity of policy, and in the upholding of an exclusive territorial division of competences. These foundations were clearly affirmed in the subsequent phases and can as such be deemed to be “established jurisprudence”²⁸¹

4. European influence on Constitutional Court case law from: Beyond Federal Dogmatics (pdf)
Abstract: Not so long ago, scholars⁷⁴⁴ usually discussed the relationship between international law and national (constitutional) law in light of the jurisprudence of the Court, generally comparing the European ‘primacy’ perspective, as elaborated in Costa⁷⁴⁵ andInternationale Handelsgesellschaft⁷⁴⁶, with the Constitutional Court case law since theLanakenjudgment⁷⁴⁷, where the Court, notwithstanding the utterly monistic jurisprudence of the Belgian Court of Cassation⁷⁴⁸, held that it can (contentiously)

Resurrecting Siyar Through Fatwas? from: Islam & Europe
Author(s) Ali Shaheen Sardar
Abstract: This article seeks to explore the impact of the Iraq war on siyaror ‘Islamic international law’ from a range of Muslim perspectives by raising some critical questions and addressing these through the lens of a selection offatwassolicited by Muslims from a range of countries and continents, on the Iraq war and its implications for popular understandings ofsiyarandjihad. This article suggests that the Iraq war presents an opportunity to revisit and potentially revive historicalsiyarpronouncements of a dichotomous world,i.e., dar-al-harb and dar-al-Islam. I argue that in so doing, this discourse has invigorated the

European Foreign Policy and the Universality of Human Rights from: Islam & Europe
Author(s) Ryngaert Cedric
Abstract: In some Muslim quarters, there is a lingering, and even increasing skepticism over the universal validity of human rights. those quarters may consider human rights as vehicles of Western arrogance and supremacy that run roughshod over deeply held cultural and religious convictions. Such skepticism demonstrates that human rights are still in what An Na’im has termed ‘a process of universalization’. Their full realization is an aim to which all States have committed themselves, and which is dependent on (1) domestic political willingness and strong institutions, (2) grassroots support, (3) international assistance, and (4) evenhandedness. In order to further universalize the

4 Postcolonial Databasing? from: Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Christie Michael
Abstract: Databasing is a particular contemporary way of “doing knowledge” with information and communications technologies. Here we write out of our experience with what we understand as a postcolonial databasing project (seehttp://www.cdu.edu.au/centres/ik) that aimed to devise some specific forms of databasing that might be useful for Aboriginal Australian users.At the project’s core was the understanding that in engaging with ICTs in thoughtful ways as a group, we were connecting up (and keeping separate) Aboriginal knowledge traditions and technoscientific traditions.

7 Making the Invisible Visible: from: Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Lewis Jerome
Abstract: Pygmy hunter-gatherers in the Congo Basin are reputed simply to vanish when danger is imminent. They are famous for supposedly using such skills when accomplishing seemingly impossible tasks such as single-handedly spearing a fierce forest elephant or vanishing suddenly into the forest and then reappearing just as suddenly when it suits them. Their fearfulness of incoming agriculturalists and fisher groups led them to avoid such newcomers, sometimes for many years, before tentatively making contact through practices such as silent trade.¹ One consequence of this is that non-Pygmy groups in the Congo Basin frequently call Pygmy hunter-gatherers “Twa,” “Tua,” or “Cwa”

8 Assembling Diverse Knowledges: from: Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Chambers Wade
Abstract: At least since Plato, critical thinkers have been aware of a key problem at the heart of Western civilization. Although knowledge is revered and given centrality as the keystone of all that is good and true, there is no agreement on how to define it, and knowledge comes in many guises. Michael Polanyi, for example, famously pointed out that “we know more than we can tell.” He called this kind of knowledge “tacit knowledge”—the kind of acquired, taken-for-granted skills that are essential to using computers, for example (Polanyi 1958). But precisely because tacit knowledge is acquired almost unconsciously and

10 Design for X: from: Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Nafus Dawn
Abstract: Consumption has been theorized as a process of appropriation (Miller 1997) where consumers adjust, reframe, hack, or otherwise infuse their own meanings and intentions into the commodities they buy and use. Information and communications technologies (ICTs) are no exception (Horst and Miller 2006; Burrell 2011). Designers of ICTs are increasingly recognizing consumer appropriation in various ways. One way is to hire anthropologists and user experience researchers to conduct what is called user-centered design. This enables firms to better understand and anticipate the ways consumers might appropriate their products. Although fully predicting those uses is impossible, the premise of user-centered design

12 Subversion, Conversion, Development: from: Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Wilson Lee
Abstract: Lievrouw and Livingstone have defined (or redefined) new media as “information and communication technologies and their social contexts” (see Lievrouw 2011, 7; our italics). In doing so, they emphasize that new media are interesting and important inasmuch as they combine three main elements: artifacts or devices, practices, and the arrangements and social forms built around practices. “Today, a lively and contentious cycle of capture, cooptation and subversion of information, content, personal interaction, and system architecture characterizes the relationship between the institutionalized, mainstream center and the increasingly interactive, participatory and expanding edges of media culture” (Lievrouw 2011, 2).

Book Title: Synthetic Biology and Morality-Artificial Life and the Bounds of Nature
Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Murray Thomas H.
Abstract: Synthetic biology, which aims to design and build organisms that serve human needs, has potential applications that range from producing biofuels to programming human behavior. The emergence of this new form of biotechnology, however, raises a variety of ethical questions -- first and foremost, whether synthetic biology is intrinsically troubling in moral terms. Is it an egregious example of scientists "playing God"? Synthetic Biology and Moralitytakes on this threshold ethical question, as well as others that follow, offering a range of philosophical and political perspectives on the power of synthetic biology.The contributors consider the basic question of the ethics of making new organisms, with essays that lay out the conceptual terrain and offer opposing views of the intrinsic moral concerns; discuss the possibility that synthetic organisms are inherently valuable; and address whether, and how, moral objections to synthetic biology could be relevant to policy making and political discourse. Variations of these questions have been raised before, in debates over other biotechnologies, but, as this book shows, they take on novel and illuminating form when considered in the context of synthetic biology.ContributorsJohn Basl, Mark A. Bedau, Joachim Boldt, John H. Evans, Bruce Jennings, Gregory E. Kaebnick, Ben Larson, Andrew Lustig, Jon Mandle, Thomas H. Murray, Christopher J. Preston, Ronald Sandler
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qf7xj

5 Three Puzzles Regarding the Moral Status of Synthetic Organisms from: Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Sandler Ronald
Abstract: Minimally artifactual organisms are commonplace. Selective breeding, grafting, and intentional hybridization—processes that have been occurring since the beginning of agriculture—produce minimally artifactual organisms. But although traditional

8 Biotechnology as Cultural Meaning: from: Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Jennings Bruce
Abstract: Perhaps the fundamental question before us in science policy today involves the extension of human power and artifice into the realm of life. The general question is not new. Shakespeare’s Prospero pondered it, as did Mary Shelley’s Frankenstein and H. G. Wells’s Dr. Moreau. But the gap between fantasy and actual technological capacity is closing, so that now the morality of power must speak to the governance of power; ethics must inform public policy. Synthetic biology constitutes a significant extension of the human capacity to manipulate the conditions of life at several levels—the molecular and cellular level, the level

INTRODUCCIÓN from: Mitos cristianos en la poesía del 27
Abstract: Aunque en el título aparecen bajo la simplificada etiqueta de ‘del veintisiete’ que claramente quiere evitar de entrada el controvertido título de ‘generación del veintisiete’ sin permitir que deje de identificarse una época y un trasfondo cultural, los poetas que irán apareciendo por estas páginas no están reunidos en su totalidad en ninguna antología y ciertamente es difícil trazar líneas que enlacen sus estilos de manera que pueda resultar coherente un estudio sobre ellos. Sí que comparten algunas circunstancias: nacieron entre 1891 y 1907, tuvieron una formación académica o literaria que en la mayoría de los casos incluía estar al

CAPÍTULO 4 Poeta profeta: from: Mitos cristianos en la poesía del 27
Abstract: Mirando con algo de perspectiva este trabajo veremos que desde el primer capítulo hasta este que nos ocupa, han pasado unos diez años de la vida de nuestros poetas.¹ En estos diez años, de 1918 a 1928 aproximadamente, los poetas del veintisiete han desarrollado su poesía más intelectualizada, aquella que responde a la ‘deshumanización del arte’ descrita por Ortega y Gasset. Y sin embargo, y aun suponiéndose que dicha deshumanización del arte surgió como reacción contra los excesos retóricos y sentimentales del Romanticismo (Geist 1980: 152–55), en realidad no se han apartado del paradigma románticomoderno tal y como se

CHAPTER 2 Poiesis from: Constructing Feminine Poetics in the Works of a Late-20th-Century Catalan Woman Poet: Maria-Mercè Marçal
Abstract: The preceding chapter has explored the theoretical framework and direction that the paradigm of the body takes in relation to language in Marçal’s poems. Through various perspectives and insights, I have explored how the body connects poetry and feminism in her work and how feminism is based on praxis rather than theory. By juxtaposing differenza sessualewith Judith Butler’s theorization of gender, I have discussed the means by which the body conditions Marçal’s composition and how its presence in the texts should be taken as the poet’s particular experience of being.

5 Wailin’ Soul: from: Soul
Author(s) Fared Grant
Abstract: At the height of his experiment in democratic socialism in the 1970s, Prime Minister Michael Manley coined a stinging retort to those Jamaicans opposed to his government’s restructuring of this Caribbean island’s economy. “We have five flights to Miami every day,” he tartly reminded these disgruntled Jamaicans, the majority of whom were white and Creole. The prime minister’s information about the frequency of flights to Miami was, of course, redundant, since these disaffected citizens were infinitely more familiar than Manley with the plane schedules. However, the Jamaican leader’s contempt for both these malcontents and the U.S. city for which they

7 From Freedom to Equality: from: Soul
Author(s) Marable Manning
Abstract: It has been more than a generation since Fannie Lou Hamer’s eloquent and moving plea for freedom and civil rights before the 1964 Democratic National Convention in Atlantic City. More than thirty years have elapsed since Dr. Martin Luther King Jr. led thousands of nonviolent protestors across the Edmund Pettus Bridge in Selma, Alabama, to confront the racist phalanx of state police troopers defending segregation. The politics of resistance at that turbulent moment in our history gave new meaning to our sense of identity. The politics of soul in the 1960s was the personal and collective decision to fight for

11 Soul’s Revival: from: Soul
Author(s) Wald Gayle
Abstract: In May 1988, English singer George Michael became the first white solo artist ever to have a number one album on Billboard’s Top Black Albums chart. Having dethroned the debut of another British soul import, self-proclaimedwunderkindTerence Trent D’Arby, Michael’s albumFaithheld on to its number one ranking for six weeks, until New Jack artist Al B. Sure! precipitated its gradual slide down the charts and out of musical memory.Faithrepresented a sharp departure—artistically and commercially—for Michael, who achieved international fame as the more musically ambitious half of Wham!, an English pop duo known for

INTRODUCTION: from: Soul
Author(s) Reed Ishmael
Abstract: By writing about black pleasure, I risk being chastised by universalists for even positing that there might be such a thing. For the rigorousminded, the notion of black pleasure might be problematic, since, technically, those we designate as “African American” are transracial, having DNA from Asia and Europe. This is a murky area that serious intellectuals will have to deal with sooner or later.

13 Ethnophysicality, or An Ethnography of Some Body from: Soul
Author(s) Jackson John L.
Abstract: “That boy can flat-out sing,” seventeen-year-old Shanita says to me as she ever so carefully drapes a just-ironed pair of Boss jeans over a wire hanger. And who am I? I’m AnthroMan®, the anthropologist-in-training who is superscientifically stretched out across Shanita’s pecan-sandy colored comforter.¹ I’m engaged in fieldwork on this day (that rite of passage called participant observation) and one of my first tasks as an ethnographer is to discursively render my environment. So I simply sit on the comforter, take in my surroundings, and jot down notes.

Book Title: A Politics of the Ordinary- Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Dumm Thomas L.
Abstract: In A Politics of the Ordinary, Thomas Dumm dramatizes how everyday life in the United States intersects with and is influenced by the power of events, on the one hand, and forces of conformity and normalcy on the other. Combining poststructuralist analysis with a sympathetic reading of a strain of American thought that begins with Emerson and culminates in the work of Stanley Cavell, A Politics of the Ordinary investigates incidents from everyday life, political spectacles, and popular culture. Whether juxtaposing reflections about boredom in rural New Mexico with Emerson's theory of constitutional amendment, Richard Nixon's letter of resignation with Thoreau's writings to overcome quiet desperation, or demonstrating how Disney's Toy Story allegorizes the downsizing of the American white-collar work force, Dumm's constant concern is to show how the ordinary is the primary source of the democratic political imagination.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qfjxk

Book Title: America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth-Reform Beyond Electoral Politics
Publisher: Monthly Review Press
Author(s): GIROUX HENRY A.
Abstract: America's latest war, according to renowned social critic Henry Giroux, is a war on youth. While this may seem counterintuitive in our youth-obsessed culture, Giroux lays bare the grim reality of how our educational, social, and economic institutions continually fail young people. Their systemic failure is the result of what Giroux identifies as four fundamentalisms: market deregulation, patriotic and religious fervor, the instrumentalization of education, and the militarization of society. We see the consequences most plainly in the decaying education system: schools are increasingly designed to churn out drone-like future employees, imbued with authoritarian values, inured to violence, and destined to serve the market. And those are the lucky ones. Young people who don't conform to cultural and economic discipline are left to navigate the neoliberal landscape on their own; if they are black or brown, they are likely to become ensnared by a harsh penal system.Giroux sets his sights on the war on youth and takes it apart, examining how a lack of access to quality education, unemployment, the repression of dissent, a culture of violence, and the discipline of the market work together to shape the dismal experiences of so many young people. He urges critical educators to unite with students and workers in rebellion to form a new pedagogy, and to build a new, democratic society from the ground up. Here is a book you won't soon forget, and a call that grows more urgent by the day.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qfrqc

Introduction: from: America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth
Abstract: There is by now an overwhelming catalogue of evidence revealing the depth and breadth of the corporate- and state-sponsored assaults being waged against democracy in the United States. Indeed, it appears that the nation has entered a new and more ruthless historical era, marked by a growing disinvestment in the social state, public institutions, and civic morality. The attack on the social state is of particular importance because it represents an attempt to shift social protections to the responsibility of individuals while at the same time privatizing investments in the public good and undermining the bonds of communal solidarity. The

1. Beyond the Politics of the Big Lie: from: America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth
Abstract: The American public is suffering from an education deficit. By this I mean it exhibits a growing inability to think critically, question authority, be reflective, weigh evidence, discriminate between reasoned arguments and opinions, listen across differences, and engage the mutually informing relationship between private problems and broader public issues. This growing political and cultural illiteracy is not merely a problem of the individual, which points to simple ignorance. It is a collective and social problem that goes to the heart of the increasing attack on democratic public spheres and supportive public institutions that promote analytical capacities, thoughtful exchange, and a

2. The Scorched-Earth Politics of America’s Four Fundamentalisms from: America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth
Abstract: Americans seem confident in the mythical notion that the United States is a free nation dedicated to reproducing the principles of equality, justice, and democracy. What has been ignored in this delusional view is the growing rise of an expanded national security state since 2001,¹ and an attack on individual rights that suggests the United States has more in common with authoritarian regimes like China and Iran “than anyone may like to admit.”² I want to address this seemingly untenable notion that the United States has become a breeding ground for authoritarianism by focusing on four fundamentalisms: market fundamentalism, religious

3. Violence, USA: from: America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth
Abstract: Since 9/11, the war on terror and the campaign for homeland security have increasingly mimicked the tactics of the enemies they sought to crush. Violence and punishment as both a media spectacle and a bone-crushing reality have become prominent and influential forces shaping American society. As the boundaries between “the realms of war and civil life have collapsed,” social relations and the public services needed to make them viable have been increasingly privatized and militarized.¹ The logic of profitability works its magic in channeling the public funding of warfare and organized violence into universities, market-based service providers, Hollywood cinema, cable

5. The “Suicidal State” and the War on Youth from: America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth
Abstract: In spite of being discredited by the economic recession of 2008, unfettered free-market capitalism has once again become a dominant force in American society. This pervasive regime of neoliberalism is producing unprecedented inequalities in wealth and income, runaway environmental devastation, egregious amounts of human suffering, and what Alex Honneth has called an “abyss of failed sociality.”¹ The Gilded Age is back with big profits for the ultra-rich and large financial institutions, and increasing impoverishment and misery for middle and working classes. Political illiteracy and religious fundamentalism have cornered the market on populist rage, providing support for a country in which,

7. Gated Intellectuals and Fortress America: from: America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth
Abstract: A group of right-wing extremists in the United States would have the American public believe it is easier to imagine the end of the world than it is to imagine the end of a market society. Comprising this group are the Republican Party extremists; religious fundamentalists such as Rick Santorum, Ayn Rand disciples like Paul Ryan; and a host of conservative anti-public foundations funded by billionaires such as the Koch brothers.¹ Their pernicious influence has transformed the landscape of American political discourse into “fortresses of . . . one truth, one way, one life formula—of adamant and pugnacious certainty

8. The Occupy Movement and the Politics of Educated Hope from: America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth
Abstract: Having lost its claim on democracy, American society must change direction as a matter of survival. One indication of America’s loss of purchase on a democratic future is the discourse of denial surrounding the crises produced on a daily basis by hyper-punitive casino capitalism.¹ Rather than address the ever-proliferating crises produced by market fundamentalism as an opportunity to understand how the United States has arrived at such a point, the dominant classes now use such crises as an excuse for normalizing a growing punishing and warfare state, while consolidating the power of finance capital and the mega-rich. Uncritically situated in

10. Dangerous Pedagogy in the Age of Casino Capitalism: from: America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth
Abstract: All over the world, the forces of neoliberalism are on the march, dismantling the historically guaranteed social provisions provided by the welfare state, defining profit-making and market freedoms as the essence of democracy, and diminishing state regulation of the economy. At the same time that the forces of privatization, deregulation, and financial marketization tighten their grip on all aspects of society, the social state is transformed into the punishing state and increasingly violates civil liberties as part of an alleged war against terrorism. Echoing the ideology of Margaret Thatcher, advocates of neoliberalism appear secure in their dystopian vision that there

2 Why Talk to Clients and Lawyers? from: Negotiating Justice
Abstract: Broadly generalized, there are two strains of literature on legal services lawyers. One strain takes an explicitly normative stance regarding what outcomes, relationships, or processes are “good.” Scholarship in this genre provides advice about how legal services lawyers should act in order to optimize the assistance they provide to their clients. They advise on everything from choosing cases and clients from disparate community interests to empowering clients and avoiding paternalism. Such literature is not purely instrumental, as much of it provides a rationale for the underlying values promoted. These authors share the espousal of value-based practice, even when they are

6 Lawyer and Client: from: Negotiating Justice
Abstract: Progressive lawyering literature stresses the importance of focusing on clients. The basis for client-centeredness is respect for clients, client autonomy, and decision making. Legal services lawyers and clients in this study reveal a complex foundation for a practice centered on the individual client: the often transformative nature of the client-lawyer relationship for both client and lawyer. This takes place when lawyer and client open themselves to each other, even within the limited context of their legal services relationship. Beyond the material assistance clients seek from NELS, empathy, respect, and a feeling of connection are deeply powerful and affirming for people

1 Global Immigrants: from: The Lebanese Diaspora
Abstract: In December 2008 I set out to obtain an entry visa from the German Consulate in Cairo, preparing to attend an academic workshop there. I was in Cairo visiting my family and thought that spending a day of my vacation at the consulate would be better than taking the time from my busy teaching schedule in the US. After a long wait, I handed the receptionist the stack of required papers for my visa. She took one quick look at my papers and exclaimed that my application could not be processed at the consulate in Cairo, since the supporting documents

2 Narratives of Identification: from: The Lebanese Diaspora
Abstract: When I first started collecting research data for this book in the summer of 2001, I was invited by a Lebanese American acquaintance to a hafle, or ethnic party, at a Maronite church in one of New York’s suburbs. I saw this as a good opportunity to observe the community that I had set out to study and possibly to recruit respondents who would agree to be interviewed. As an Egyptian, I had assumed that I would be easily welcomed into the Lebanese community in New York since I share a language and culture with its members. I also considered

4 Law and Society from: Legal Intellectuals in Conversation
Author(s) SARAT AUSTIN
Abstract: SARAT: I went to graduate school at the University of Wisconsin, Madison, for political science with the idea of studying and doing urban politics. My interests shifted, and my training as a graduate student and my PhD were focused in the field of political science, which was then called public law. After Wisconsin, I did a postdoctoral fellowship at the Yale Law School

1 JEAN BODIN: from: Religion Morality & the Law
Author(s) HOLMES STEPHEN
Abstract: Liberal beliefs about the proper relation among law, morality, and religion first acquired distinct contours during the wars of religion that ravaged France between 1562 and 1598. While recent commentators on the state’s obligatory “neutrality” toward conflicting moral ideals often refer to this bloodily traumatic period,² they usually do so only in passing. We can shed considerable light, however, upon our constitutionally mandated separation of political and religious spheres as well as upon the uneasy relation between law and morals typical of the liberal tradition if we exhume and reexamine one deeply influential argument for religious toleration advanced in late

4 BAYLE’S COMMONWEALTH OF ATHEISTS REVISITED from: Religion Morality & the Law
Author(s) KELLY GEORGE A.
Abstract: In the triad law, morality, religion, it is distinctively the third term with which modern political theory feels least comfortable. Despite fierce debates over their nature, genesis, and relation, law and morality are the sine quibus nonof the social experiment, unless one is an anarchist or an antinomian. It is broadly recognized that law is the central feature of the territorial state and its matrix of authority—nulla iustitia, hulla iniuria. Somewhat more imaginatively, we have “moral territories” as well, spaces of intention and action where we cooperate in ways that the laws do not prescribe and where, by

7 THE WALL OF SEPARATION AND LEGISLATIVE PURPOSE from: Religion Morality & the Law
Author(s) HENKIN LOUIS
Abstract: Professor Hauerwas has provided a perceptive analysis of contemporary Christian attitudes towards the perennial tension between the demands of God and of Caesar as that tension is reflected in the United States today. His own views are particularly noteworthy in that they are “ec-centric” within the Christian universe and stand in contrast to what is increasingly heard from Christian spokesmen. They contrast, as well, with the views of some representatives of some other religions, and with more idiosyncratic views such as those of the anonymous, secular Jewish philosopher cited by Professor Hauerwas.

Book Title: Postmodern Legal Movements-Law and Jurisprudence At Century's End
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Minda Gary
Abstract: What do Catharine MacKinnon, the legacy of Brown v. Board of Education, and Lani Guinier have in common? All have, in recent years, become flashpoints for different approaches to legal reform. In the last quarter century, the study and practice of law have been profoundly influenced by a number of powerful new movements; academics and activists alike are rethinking the interaction between law and society, focusing more on the tangible effects of law on human lives than on its procedural elements.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qg2gf

Introduction from: Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: After several decades of interdisciplinary work in academic legal scholarship, it is impossible for one not to notice how obscure theories of economics, sociology, philosophy, anthropology, literary criticism, and other fields have infected recent academic writing and thinking about law and adjudication, or what is commonly understood as jurisprudence.¹ Ever since the New Deal, legal studies have become more sophisticated and more eclectic.² This expanding eclecticism has brought about sharp debate in jurisprudence. Diversity and fragmentation of jurisprudence have been stimulated by a profession that has itself become splintered as a result of competition and rivalry between new jurisprudential movements,

5. Law and Economics from: Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: The sources responsible for the expansion and transformation of the law and economics movement of the 1970s and 1980s have never been adequately explained. One fact remains clear: this movement coincided with the rise of interdisciplinary legal studies and the growing disenchantment with the legal process and fundamental rights schools. In the midst of the disintegration of and disillusionment with mainstream jurisprudence, legal scholars looked outside law to economics for law’s missing authority and the autonomy of legal discourse. Of all the social sciences, economics was the most promising candidate offering “right answers” for law’s problems.

6. Critical Legal Studies from: Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: While law and economics attracted the attention of legal scholars, a distinct movement in legal studies established itself as a major critic of both traditional and law and economics scholarship. This new academic movement—critical legal studies (CLS—surfaced in 1976 when a group of legal scholars met at the University of Wisconsin Law School and formed a social and professional network called The Conference on Critical Legal Studies.¹ The diverse intellectual projects of these writers established the thematic character of this movement. The intellectual component of this movement known as CLS continues to grow and expand, despite the fact

11. Reaction of Modern Legal Scholars from: Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: History indicates that when a new theory or paradigm appears to challenge the view and methods of an established theory or paradigm, a crisis in confidence emerges, provoking a response from the mainstream.¹ The reason is clear. Professional reputations and careers are at stake; the old guard must hold off the challenge posed by the “Young Turks” in order to maintain their status and privilege. It is thus not surprising that new movements in legal thought have provoked heated response from a number of distinguished legal scholars. Some questioned the new critics’ professional and ethical commitment to law, and the

12. Postmodern Jurisprudence from: Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: Postmodernism is an elusive idea that is not easily defined. Postmodernism is neither a theory nor a concept; it is rather a skeptical attitude or aesthetic that “distrusts all attempts to create large-scale, totalizing theories in order to explain social phenomena.” ¹ Postmodernists resist the idea that “there is a ‘real’ world or legal system ‘out there,’ perfected, formed, complete and coherent, waiting to be discovered by theory.”² As developed in linguistics, literary theory, art, and architecture, postmodernism is also a style that signals the end of an era, the passing of the modern age.³ It marks a certain “chronological

Conclusion: from: Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: Academic trends in legal scholarship do not occur in a vacuum, nor are law schools and legal scholars autonomous. To understand what has been going on in contemporary legal theory, one must look to what has been going on at the university. American university campuses have recently witnessed a form of organized dissent not seen since the turbulent 1960s and 1970s. Commentators report that “[a] n intellectual and cultural revolution is now under way at American Universities.”¹ The revolution has been stirred in part by cultural changes unfolding in American society brought about by the diversity movement. This movement consists

Introduction: from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Paul Lissa
Abstract: Since about 1970, scholarship in children’s literature has brought together people from the fields of literature, education, library and information science, cultural studies, and media studies. “Children’s literature” itself has become a kind of umbrella term encompassing a wide range of disciplines, genres, and media. of the challenges of children’s literature studies that scholars from disparate disciplines use the same terms in different ways. As a result, meanings can be blurred and cross-disciplinary conversations confused. Drawing on the expertise of scholars in many fields, Keywords for Children’s Literatureresponds to the need a shared vocabulary by mapping the history of

8 Childhood from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Sánchez-Eppler Karen
Abstract: “Childhood” is an ancient word in English, not a young one. The Oxford English Dictionarytakes as its earliest example for “cildhad” an English gloss inserted during the tenth century between the lines of the Lindisfarne Gospels. The meaning expressed there appears consistent with the most literal strand of our contemporary usage: this passage from the Gospel of Mark (“soð he cuoeð from cildhad”; 9:21) employs childhood as a temporal marker: a father explains to Jesus that his son had been wracked by fits since the earliest years of his life. The miraculous cure Jesus performs stands as a test

11 Classic from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Kidd Kenneth
Abstract: In her study of comparative children’s literature, Emer O’Sullivan (2001) notes that children’s classics come from three sources: (1) appropriations of adult works; (2) adaptations from traditional (usually oral) narratives; and (3) works written specifically for children. A classic, then, could be a text adopted by children as well as a work written for them. But, as O’Sullivan’s study also makes clear, things are not so simple. “Classic” is an overdetermined and elastic term, one encompassing very different ideas and attitudes. The notion of a children’s classic amplifies the contradictions of the term, especially to the degree that children’s literature

15 Education from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Gruner Elisabeth Rose
Abstract: In both Keywords(Williams 1983a) andNew KeywordsBennett, Grossberg, and Morris 2005), “education”Keywordshas “educate”) is primarily an institutional practice, which, after the late eighteenth century, is increasingly formalized and universalized in Western countries. Bearing the twin senses of “to lead forth” from the Latineducere) and “to bring up” (from the Latineducare), “education” appears chiefly as an action practiced by adults on children. TheOxford English Dictionarythus defines the term as “the systematic instruction, schooling, or training given to the young in preparation for the work of life.”

19 Girlhood from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Reid-Walsh Jacqueline
Abstract: According to the Oxford English Dictionary(OED), “girlhood” has been in use from the mid-eighteenth century until the present day as both a singular and a plural noun. From the first cited use—notably, in Samuel Richardson’sClarissa(1747–48), a novel concerning the paragon of virtuous adolescent girlhood—the term “girlhood” has had a history as an ideologically loaded term in Western culture. As the following brief definitions indicate, several meanings overlap: “The state of being a girl; the time of life during which one is a girl. Also: girls collectively.” Its different denotations and connotations make for a

25 Image from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) de Beeck Nathalie op
Abstract: Depending on the speaker (children’s author, literary critic, art historian, advertising designer, painter) and the venue (bookstore, literature conference, gallery, marketing meeting), the term “image” implies an array of connotations, purposes, and audiences (Mitchell 1986). In the hybrid contexts of the twenty-first century—where visual culture, visual studies, and visual literacy are related but contested terms—“image” crosses disciplinary boundaries and characterizes multimodal activities in classrooms and communication. For children’s literature, an interdisciplinary field drawing upon many scholarly discourses, pedagogical approaches, and modes of creative expression, “image” is a complex and provisional term, always at play and in flux.

26 Innocence from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Gubar Marah
Abstract: Pondering the immense popularity of young starlets such as Deanna Durbin and Shirley Temple, Grahame Greene (1993) declared in 1939, “Innocence is a tricky subject: its appeal is not always so clean as a whistle.” While Temple’s charm ostensibly lay in her perfect purity, he argued, in fact she functioned as a highly eroticized figure. Indeed, Temple’s first films were a series of shorts known as “Baby Burlesks” that placed tiny children in compromising positions. “Boy, she’s hot stuff!” remarks one of Temple’s male admirers in one of these shorts ( War Babies[Lamont 1932]), and her later films likewise situate

27 Intention from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Pullman Philip
Abstract: Authors of novels, especially novels for children, know that questions such as these are not uncommon. This might be surprising, in view of the fact that more than sixty years have gone by since William K. Wimsatt and Monroe C. Beardsley published their famous essay “The Intentional Fallacy” (1946 ), except that somehow it isn’t surprising at all to find that

31 Marketing from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Cummins June
Abstract: At its most basic level, the word “marketing” refers to the “action of buying or selling” ( Oxford English Dictionary[OED]) and always implies some sort of exchange, usually involving goods, services, or ideas—and money. A common usage of “marketing” that directly affects children’s literature is “the action, business, or process of promoting and selling a product” (OED). Since the advent of the printing press, literature has been intimately related to marketing. It is self-evident that developing technologies made widespread literacy possible; what may take some explaining is that marketing is as essential to the development and dissemination of children’s

33 Multicultural from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Dudek Debra
Abstract: The term “multicultural” and its associated “-ism” have been the focus of many debates in literary, educational, political, and sociological circles since the terms were coined. “Multicultural” first appeared in the New York Herald Tribunein 1941: “A fervent sermon against nationalism, national prejudice and behavior in favor of a ‘multicultural’ way of life” (Oxford English Dictionary[OED]). The second usage, in 1959 by theNew York Times, both narrows and broadens the definition by connecting a culturally diverse city to cosmopolitanism. In 1965, the adjective “multicultural” expanded into the noun “multiculturalism” in thePreliminary Report of the Royal Commission

35 Nonsense from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Shortsleeve Kevin
Abstract: In his introduction to The Chatto Book of Nonsense, Hugh Haughton (1988) comments that “nonsense is a bit of a problem.” Haughton is alluding to a set of semantic and literary “difficulties” that have surrounded “nonsense” since the term came into common usage in the seventeenth century. At first the word was used mostly in its literal sense, meaning that which makes no sense, or that which is useless, but a new meaning emerged over the next two hundred years, referring to a particular literary phenomenon. The interactions between these senses of the word are at the heart of some

39 Postmodernism from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Nel Philip
Abstract: “Postmodernism” denotes an historical period, a style, or a cultural logic. If an historical period, then the word means after modernism—although when, precisely, modernism ended is debatable: 1939, 1945, and 1950 are common dates, but the term “postmodernism” crops up well before then. TheOxford English Dictionary(OED) finds J. M. Thompson in 1914 using “Post-Modernism” to describe a shift in Christian thinking that would “escape from the double-mindedness of Modernism.” A still earlier example eluded theOED: circa 1870, the English painter John Watkins Chapman spoke of “postmodern painting,” which he alleged was more avant-garde than French impressionism

40 Queer from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Mallan Kerry
Abstract: The word “queer” is a slippery one; its etymology is uncertain, and academic and popular usage attributes conflicting meanings to the word. By the mid-nineteenth century, “queer” was used as a pejorative term for a (male) homosexual. This negative connotation continues when it becomes a term for homophobic abuse. In recent years, “queer” has taken on additional uses: as an all-encompassing term for culturally marginalized sexualities—gay, lesbian, bi, trans, and intersex (GLBTI)—and as a theoretical strategy for deconstructing the binary oppositions that govern identity formation. Tracing its history, the Oxford English Dictionarynotes that the earliest references to

43 Realism from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Mercier Cathryn M.
Abstract: Unlike the term “fantasy,” “realism” (or “realistic fiction”) doesn’t always appear as a distinct category in reference books about children’s literature. The Norton Anthology of Children’s Literature(Zipes et al. 2005) includes sections on legends, myth, fairy tales, fantasy, and science fiction, but no single entry on realistic fiction. TheNorton Anthologydoes devote sections to adventures, school stories, and domestic fiction, and excerpts from seminal titles that have realistic qualities, such asFrom the Mixed-Up Files of Mrs. Basil E. Frankweiler(Konigsburg 1967). Similarly, Perry Nodelman and Mavis Reimer’sThe Pleasures of Children’s Literature(2003) includes sections on poetry,

44 Science Fiction from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Hastings A. Waller
Abstract: The term “science fiction” denotes a genre of imaginative literature distinguished from realism by its speculation about things that cannot happen in the world as we know it, and from fantasy by abjuring the use of magic or supernatural. In science fiction, all phenomena and events described are theoretically possible under the laws of physics, even though they may not at present be achievable. Stated in this way, it would appear that works belonging to the genre would be easily identifiable. However, critics of science fiction have struggled to find an adequate definition almost since the term was coined and

45 Story from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Crago Hugh
Abstract: Historically, “story” is probably one of the most frequently employed words in relation to children’s literature. Yet despite its constant use by reviewers and critics over much of the history of fiction written specifically for young people, it has rarely been defined or analyzed. In its apparent simplicity, taken-for-grantedness, and resistance to deconstruction, the term establishes itself as something unquestioned, like the nature of “childhood” or “the child” itself. “Story” is missing from the index of numerous works where one might reasonably expect to find it—such as Katherine Nelson’s Narratives from the Crib(1989), a psycholinguistic study of the

46 Theory from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Rudd David
Abstract: The word “theory” appears in Raymond Williams’s original Keywords(1976). He traces its origins back to the Greektheoros, meaning “spectator,” with its root inthea, for “sight,” which also gave us “theater.” As more recent commentators put it, “[T]he literal sense of looking has then been metaphorized to that of contemplating or speculating” (Wolfreys et al. 2006). The term became increasingly opposed to “practice,” not only as something removed from the everyday, but also as something involved in attempts to explain and model the everyday. Although the title of Williams’s work—Keywords—implicitly underwrites the importance of language, his

49 Young Adult from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Talley Lee A.
Abstract: Talley phrase “young adult” reflects the history of changing perceptions of childhood, adolescence, and adulthood and how these ideas have shaped parenting, education, libraries, publishing, and marketing (Cart 1996 ; Eccleshare 1996 ; Campbell 2009). The Young Adult Services Association (YALSA) denotes ages to eighteen as composing “ young adult” readers YALSA 1994). Given the dominant conception that period of growth is particularly important, understandings of what constitutes “good” young adult literature vary extensively, for there is a great deal at stake.

4 Transcendental Meditation from: Transcendent in America
Abstract: On February 5, 2008, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi passed away at his home and headquarters in Vlodrop, the Netherlands, where he had lived since the late 1980s. He was believed to have been ninety-one years old. In the last years of his life he rarely met with anyone face-to-face, preferring to speak with followers by closed-circuit television. Maharishi’s body was shipped to Allahabad, about six hundred kilometers southwest of New Delhi. His relatives and disciples carried his body, propped up in a yogic posture, to a specially erected platform near the Sangam, the confluence of the Ganges and the Yamuna rivers.

8 Worldview from: Transcendent in America
Abstract: Existential questioning at a young age and the suffering that often accompanies it was a predominant theme among those I interviewed: “I would look up at the stars and ask, ‘Why am I here?’” “I was always searching, searching, searching.” “I felt something was really missing.” “Always in the back of my mind I was thinking, there must be something more.” “Everything seemed empty.”

Conclusion from: Transcendent in America
Abstract: Let us end where we began—with three meditators who follow three different HIMMs. Since 1969 Walter has meditated twice a day under the auspices of SRF and has attended a weekly satsang at his local center for almost as many years. Aaron has been practicing Transcendental Meditation since 1970 and performs his TM-Sidhi program in the “Dome” twice a day. Jennifer began meditating using the TM technique, but later received shaktipat from Muktananda, and for almost thirty years has chanted and meditated in the early morning and attended satsang weekly.

Chapter 1 Introduction: from: Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Sommer Benjamin D.
Abstract: On one level, there is a simple answer to the question “What is scripture for the Jews?” For roughly the past two thousand years, Jews have had a canon of twenty-four books that form the Jewish Bible,¹ starting with Genesis and ending with Chronicles.² Some Jewish groups up until about two thousand years ago accepted additional books as scripture, but by the end of the first century CE the canon used by Jews today was more or less universally accepted by all Jews. In this respect, Jews differ from Christians, since to this day there are books regarded by Orthodox

Chapter 2 Concepts of Scripture in the Synagogue Service from: Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Stern Elsie
Abstract: For most contemporary Jews, the “Jewish Bible” is a single volume containing the twenty-four books of the Tanakh, which is readily available and accessible through the process of reading. While totally familiar to us, these paired phenomena—the Bible as a book and reading as the primary means of accessing it—are relatively new developments in the history of Jewish encounters with scripture. Until the onset of printing, most Jews would never have encountered a “Bible.” They might have encountered a Torah scroll in the synagogue or scrolls or volumes containing selections from other parts of the canon. However, manuscripts

Chapter 4 Concepts of Scripture in the Schools of Rabbi Akiva and Rabbi Ishmael from: Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Yadin-Israel Azzan
Abstract: Once a year, Israel celebrates “Book Week,” a holiday devoted to the written word, consisting of book fairs in city centers, deep discounts on books, and various interviews and panels of authors, critics, and other literary figures. Alongside the mainstream celebrations, there is also “Torah Book Week,” during which ultraorthodox book vendors sell religious texts and artifacts. Years ago, I was perusing the booths of a “Torah Book Week” exhibitor, looking for rabbinic Torah commentaries, when I spotted a series of illustrated children’s books—age-appropriate retellings of Bible stories for young ultraorthodox readers. Curious, I leafed through the first volume,

Chapter 5 Concepts of Scriptural Language in Midrash from: Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Sommer Benjamin D.
Abstract: Virtually all Jewish conceptions of scripture since late antiquity grow up in the shadow of the rabbinic interpretations known as midrash. Whether by incorporating them, adapting them, or reacting to them, postrabbinic Jewish thinkers who studied the Bible lived in a conceptual world shaped by the midrash. To this day, the interpretations of the weekly biblical reading one hears from a darshan(a rabbi, teacher, or preacher who gives the sermon) in the course of synagogue worship¹ is likely to consist of a paraphrase of a passage from a midrashic anthology that treats the weekly reading; alternatively (if thedarshan

Chapter 7 Concepts of Scripture in the School of Rashi from: Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Harris Robert A.
Abstract: In considering the definition of a “Jewish conception of Scripture,” it is just so right on many levels to begin with Rashi’s Torah commentary: Jewish children have begun their own studies with this work almost since the very generation in which he wrote it. Rashi, or Rabbi Solomon ben Isaac (1040–1105), lived in Troyes, in Champagne country in northern France. Though as a young man he studied in the great centers of rabbinic scholarship in Germany, Rashi’s fame rests on the Bible and Talmud commentaries he wrote after his return to France. These commentaries provide a unique blend of

Chapter 8 Concepts of Scripture in Maimonides from: Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Diamond James A.
Abstract: There is virtually no facet of present-day Judaism that does not bear the imprint of the formidable intellectual legacy of Moses ben Maimon (1138–1204), whether it be in Jewish law ( halakha), rabbinics, theology, philosophy, or biblical interpretation. Even the mystical tradition’s (kabbala) inventive re-readings of Scripture can be seen as a negative reaction to his overpowering rationalist approach. He was a first in many respects. No fundamental tenets of Judaism to which Jews must subscribe existed prior to his introduction of thirteen articles of faith, what have since been generally assented to as the Jewish creed. He pioneered the

Book Title: The Disarticulate-Language, Disability, and the Narratives of Modernity
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Berger James
Abstract: Language is integral to our social being. But what is the status of those who stand outside of language? The mentally disabled, wild children, people with autism and other neurological disorders, as well as animals, infants, angels, and artificial intelligences, have all engaged with language from a position at its borders. In the intricate verbal constructions of modern literature, the 'disarticulate' - those at the edges of language - have, paradoxically, played essential, defining roles.Drawing on the disarticulate figures in modern fictional works such asBilly Budd, The Sound and the Fury, Nightwood, White Noise,andThe Echo Maker,among others, James Berger shows in this intellectually bracing study how these characters mark sites at which aesthetic, philosophical, ethical, political, medical, and scientific discourses converge. It is also the place of the greatest ethical tension, as society confronts the needs and desires of the least of its brothers. Berger argues that the disarticulate is that which is unaccountable in the discourses of modernity and thus stands as an alternative to the prevailing social order. Using literary history and theory, as well as disability and trauma theory, he examines how these disarticulate figures reveal modernity's anxieties in terms of how it constructs its others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qg6xh

1 The Bearing Across of Language: from: The Disarticulate
Abstract: The problem of how to speak with the non-speaking, with those in some sense outside the loop of language, has occupied users of language since at least some of the earliest documentations of language—the Epic of Gilgameshand the Hebrew Bible. Since then, both in narrative and in the more abstract discourses of religion, philosophy, and, more recently, science and medicine, there has been a continuing dialogue, or an imagined dialogue, with those sited beyond, or just on the borders of language: with animals, infants, angels, the dead, the inanimate objects of nature, and the inanimate (or animate) constructions

3 Post-Modern Wild Children, Falling Towers, and the Counter-Linguistic Turn from: The Disarticulate
Abstract: Most commentaries on the destruction of the Tower of Babel regard it as a second Fall, a fragmentation of the perfect language of naming that Adam conceived and so the beginning of the split between word and thing that brought into the world lying, ambiguity, irony, negation, artifice, the unconscious, ideology, the subject, the Other, and all the various woes and pleasures we now associate with language. In the Zohar we read that the biblical phrase “the whole earth was of one language” indicates that “the world was still a unity with one single faith in the Holy One” (253),

1 “All human beings have unlimited potential, unlimited capacity, unlimited creative energy” from: 22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Dutkiewicz Piotr
Abstract: Muhammad Yunus is famous as an economist and a philanthropist, but he takes issue with both labels and with the way that mainstream economics and philanthropy are practiced.* He sees poverty, an issue he has sought to tackle in his writing and through his business endeavors, as a systemic problem that robs individuals of their capacity for self-realization. He argues that only in a system that values money above all else and sees humans as atomized, selfish actors can ills like poverty and unemployment be seen as natural or even desirable. He argues that most economics excludes the possibility of

6 “This is not Planet Earth; it’s Planet Ocean” from: 22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Dutkiewicz Jan
Abstract: Veteran environmental activist Paul Watson offers a provocative, counterintuitive, and iconoclastic view of the state of an environment in crisis. Basing his analysis on a long-term conception of ecological history as well as recent examples of environmental crises, his central premise is that the environmental movement is not about saving the planet itself but saving the planet as it is for future human generations. From this perspective, the planet will survive environmental degradation and eventually evolve new life, but it is the human race that may not adapt fast enough. This view clashes with our dominant approaches to protecting the

9 “Think communally” from: 22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Kulikov Vladimir
Abstract: In a rare interview, the Russian businessman and philanthropist Vladimir Yakunin shares his unique worldview with Vladimir Kulikov. Yakunin argues that the current global paradigm of human relations (interpersonal, international, and relating to the world’s environment and resources) is a predatory one. Eschewing mainstream critiques of capitalism, he argues that such predation occurs in both the East and the West. He suggests that predominant ideologies based on rampant individual consumption and the satisfaction of self-interest not only undermines social stability but can be harmful to capitalism itself. In opposition to what he terms “wild capitalism,” Yakunin proposes a focus on

11 “Re-create the social state” from: 22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Sala Vincent Della
Abstract: In this challenging discussion with Vincent Della Sala, the sociologist Zygmunt Bauman focuses on the state of flux—the interregnum—in which the world finds itself. He suggests that we are seeing an increasing separation between politics and power, between the means available to enact change and the vastness of the problems that need to be addressed. In this new world, we are living through what he terms a liquid modernity, where change is the only constant and uncertainty the only certainty. This is a world with no teleology but also one far from an end of history. In this

12 “Create global social policy” from: 22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Mahon Rianne
Abstract: In a frank conversation, Bob Deacon, a preeminent expert on global social policy, explains the history of the concept as theory, policy, and practice, focusing primarily on welfarist policies since the acceleration of globalization in the 1970s. He argues that some problems, like disease, migration, and trade, cannot be dealt with at the level of the state and require international cooperation between states, supranational organizations, and nongovernmental organizations, acting both locally and in the global arena. Calling on his own involvement in the development of such processes, he explains the difficulties of such initiatives and makes a number of concrete

Conclusion from: 22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Sakwa Richard
Abstract: If there is a single central feature of the Great Recession as outlined in these conversations, it is that the contemporary crisis is one of the reproduction of social forms and ideas, if not of the social and environmental bases for the sustainable development of humanity itself. This comes out explicitly in the conversation between Craig Calhoun and Ivan Krause but is evident throughout the others. This brief conclusion will draw out some of the key elements of this multiple crisis of reproduction.

Book Title: Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker-A Reader in Documents and Essays
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Smith Richard Cándida
Abstract: More than one hundred years after her death, Elizabeth Cady Stanton still stands - along with her close friend Susan B. Anthony - as the major icon of the struggle for women's suffrage. In spite of this celebrity, Stanton's intellectual contributions have been largely overshadowed by the focus on her political activities, and she is yet to be recognized as one of the major thinkers of the nineteenth century.Here, at long last, is a single volume exploring and presenting Stanton's thoughtful, original, lifelong inquiries into the nature, origins, range, and solutions of women's subordination. Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker reintroduces, contextualizes, and critiques Stanton's numerous contributions to modern thought. It juxtaposes a selection of Stanton's own writings, many of them previously unavailable, with eight original essays by prominent historians and social theorists interrogating Stanton's views on such pressing social issues as religion, marriage, race, the self and community, and her place among leading nineteenth century feminist thinkers. Taken together, these essays and documents reveal the different facets, enduring insights, and fascinating contradictions of the work of one of the great thinkers of the feminist tradition.Contributors: Barbara Caine, Richard Candida Smith, Ellen Carol DuBois, Ann D. Gordon, Vivian Gornick, Kathi Kern, Michele Mitchell, and Christine Stansell.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qgf51

Chapter 4 Stanton on Self and Community from: Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Author(s) Smith Richard Cándida
Abstract: Elizabeth Cady Stanton’s apparently absolute defense of individual rights in her talk from 1892, “Solitude of Self,” rests on a sober confrontation with mortality. She was seventy-six years old, still vibrant intellectually but facing the increasing physical limitations of old age. The feminist movement she had piloted since the 1840s was shifting away from a broad natural rights defense of women’s equality in all areas of life into a narrower, more respectable campaign for the vote. Without question, she understood the importance of suffrage, for without the vote no person could participate in the great decisions of the day, in

Chapter 7 “The Other Side of the Woman Question” (1879) from: Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Abstract: Editors’ Note: This essay, published in the influential journalThe North American Review,highlights Stanton’s increasing emphasis on “the difference in sex” as an argument in favor of women’s equal political and civil rights. Stanton was responding to the renowned historian Francis Parkman, who wrote a series of articles condemning democratic suffrage in general and woman suffrage in particular. TheReviewinvited Stanton and four other noted suffrage advocates to respond. All the pro-suffrage responses defended democratic enfranchisement and challenged Parkman’s assertion that the suffrage movement ignored the difference between the sexes in what he regarded as the impossible claim

Chapter 10 “The Matriarchate, or Mother-Age” (1891) from: Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Abstract: Editors’ Note: Here Stanton provides an explicitly feminist reading of the literature on matriarchy emphasizing the work of anthropological pioneer Lewis Henry Morgan. In his last book,Ancient Society(1877), Morgan argued that the status of women was the single best indicator of a people’s development from “savagery” to “civilization.” The level of women’s participation was a test for Morgan of a society’s movement toward modern civilization and an indication that a militarized aristocracy was being replaced by democratic cooperation. The closing sentences of Morgan’s Ancient Society reads: “Democracy in government, brotherhood in society, equality in rights and privileges, and

INTRODUCTION from: Religious Imaginaries
Abstract: As Samuel Palmer recognized already in 1812, nineteenth-century Christianity in England was both united and divided.¹ Though Christian churches held most of the central teachings of Christianity in common, they diverged significantly in polity, theology, and liturgy. For the ordinary churchgoing Christian, denominational divergence emerged most obviously not in theological discussions, seminary debates, or circulated writings but in the public worship service, where communal worship practices shaped and bespoke religious principle. True, the basic elements of Christian liturgy—Scripture reading, singing, prayer, sermon, sacrament—appeared in almost all worship services, of whatever denomination; but as Palmer points out, how these

CHAPTER FOUR MANIFESTATION, AESTHETICS, AND COMMUNITY IN CHRISTINA ROSSETTI’S VERSES from: Religious Imaginaries
Abstract: In moving from a consideration of Christina Rossetti’s religious imaginary as shaped within Anglican and Anglo-Catholic worship to a close reading of the religious poetry itself, this chapter focuses primarily on Rossetti’s last publication. Verses,published in 1893, one year before Rossetti’s death, is the poet’s only collection of solely religious poetry. I focus on it for two reasons. First, becauseVersesconcentrates on religious poetry, its liturgical associations emerge more clearly than in the shorter devotional sections or isolated religious poems scattered across other volumes; at the same time, sinceVersesis not a collection of newly written poems

THREE Conjugal separation and immigration in the life course of immigrant single mothers in Québec from: Biography and turning points in Europe and America
Author(s) Saint-Jacques Marie-Christine
Abstract: Single parenthood over the past few decades has been a focus of family scholar research that has shown its characteristics as a family form, its risks and opportunities, as well as its coping mechanisms. Within this body of research, the situation of immigrant single parents is less documented, although specific conditions particularise this experience, as it will be demonstrated in this chapter. We intend to discuss whether or not immigration can initiate a turning point in the lives of parents experiencing a conjugal separation after settling in the receiving society. Examples are drawn from a research¹ based on biographic interviews

FOUR Migration biography and ethnic identity: from: Biography and turning points in Europe and America
Author(s) Boldt Thea D.
Abstract: There is no single way of understanding migration, but the one I know of is to think of it as a journey with a certain goal. In times of global migration, there are countless people on the move every day. They intentionally set forth to make new achievements and take new chances in life. Thus, it often surprises me that there is hardly any empirical research that emphasises the empowering aspects of migration experience, and only a few researchers who conceptualise migration as an exciting, hopeful, future-oriented biographical project (see Morokvasic, 1991, 1993; Apitzsch, 2000, 2003; Lutz, 2000). Instead, migration

FIVE Biographical structuring through a critical life event: from: Biography and turning points in Europe and America
Author(s) Jost Gerhard
Abstract: Critical life events such as the loss of a job, the end of a relationship or a divorce or, as discussed in this chapter, the passing of a parent, are often accompanied by depression, melancholy, disorientation and loss of perspective on life. It is the concept of critical life events in particular that is a predictor of psychological anomalies. As a general rule, a critical life event condenses the experience and takes the affected person into a stadium of ‘relative imbalance’ (Filipp, 1981, p 24; Inglehart, 1991), therefore requiring the person to reorganise his or her behaviour and experience making

SEVEN The turning points of the single life course in Budapest, Hungary from: Biography and turning points in Europe and America
Author(s) Sántha Ágnes
Abstract: This chapter examines the specific phases and turning points of the life course that can influence the decision of young people to choose singleness as a way of life or become single by virtue of structural conditions. The research focused on a group of young, urban singles from Budapest. Singles are understood as those young adults at an age (25–40) typically devoted to family, living alone in their own household and having neither a durable partnership nor children. The population I studied was that of urban singles in their thirties from the upper social strata, having (at least) a

Book Title: The governance of problems-Puzzling, powering and participation
Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Hoppe Robert
Abstract: Contemporary democracies need to develop a better governance of problems, as all too often, policy is a sophisticated answer to the wrong problem. This book offers a compelling approach to public policy-making as problem processing, bringing together aspects of puzzling, powering and participation, relating them in interesting and different ways to cultural theory, to issues about networks, to models of democracy and modes of citizen participation. Part of a growing body of work in policy analysis literature, the book is clearly written and accessibly presented, making this an ideal text for academics and postgraduate students.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qgx59

ONE A problem-processing perspective on governance from: The governance of problems
Abstract: People are problem-processing animals. Not that we are all worrywarts, of course. But people do tend to be concerned about conditions they feel uneasy about. They brood over situations they experience as uncomfortable or troublesome, especially if they see no obvious way out. One might call this the substantive logic of problem processing: experiencing an uncomfortable situation, diagnosing the nature of the problem and figuring out what to do to solve, or at least, alleviate the problem. Most problems have a personal character; they concern people as problem owners, their families, relatives, friends, colleagues, fellow members of sports clubs and

TWO The governance of problems: from: The governance of problems
Abstract: First, this chapter deals conceptually with the question: what is problem structuring? Second, using the development of the welfare state and, particularly, the events of

THREE Analysing policy problems: from: The governance of problems
Abstract: This chapter introduces the typology of policy problems that underlies the rest of the book. This requires some preliminary conceptual work. Choosing a social-constructivist approach, the first section develops the perspective of a politics of meaning. It views politics as the collective attempt to control a polity’s shared response to the adversities and opportunities of the human condition. The second section gives an overview of how others have approached the social and political analysis of policy issues or problems. Here the proposal is to look at problem structuring as socio-cognitive processes that frame political task environments. From this perspective, four

FIVE Problem types and types of policy politics from: The governance of problems
Abstract: The previous chapter looked at translation and framing dynamics from the perspective of the distribution of cultures in society. It inquired into congruencies of citizens’ ways of life with policy makers’ styles and strategies in problem framing and structuring. This chapter will deal with policy politicsin policy networks. If policy making is intertwined cogitation and interaction (Wildavsky, 1980 [1979]), then policy politics is the combination of types of cognitive processes and styles of interaction, characteristic for problem processing in an issue domain. Policy politics is the specific mode or style of policy making among the set of political actors,

SIX Problem-structuring dynamics and meta-governance from: The governance of problems
Abstract: This chapter explores a theory of problem-structuring dynamics. It follows the structuration logic proposed by Giddens (1979), showing how policy actors can influence the nature of institutionalised systems of interaction while at the same time being constrained by them. On the one hand, problem-frame shifts and the possibilities for policy change depend on the structure of policy networks. A closed, institutionalised policy network differs from an open, emergent or decaying network. Part of the difference is in shaping different types of policy-making processes, with different capacities for problem processing, and, therefore, speed, scope and direction of policy change and innovation.

TWO Re-imagining child protection in the context of re-imagining welfare from: Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: Current policy responses to the economic crisis are mobilising social forces, including social work, in a divisive and authoritarian project against those most vulnerable. In the field of child protection, as indeed in other areas of welfare, the roots of current policies are to be found in those of previous New Labour administrations, but the trends predate them. From the late 1970s onwards, the doctrines of Reagan and Thatcher became dominant, promoting the virtues of letting the market rule in a triumph of neoliberalism. Although we recognise the term neoliberal is not a satisfactory one, as it is reductive, lumping

THREE We need to talk about ethics from: Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: Written 30 years ago, this closing paragraph of a lucid ethnography of social work by sociologists Robert Dingwall and Topsy Murray and socio-legal scholar John Eekelaar underscores the moral and ethical aesthetic at the core of practice. Unfortunately, their wise counsel was not followed and social work has been mired in a series of technical fixes which have distracted us from, and masked, the moral nature of the work. Thus, the right debates have not taken place, or at least have not taken place in the right spaces.

SEVEN Thinking afresh about relationships: from: Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: It is our contention in this chapter that the vocabularies with which social workers in children’s services describe relationships have become impoverished. This is a point we have alluded to elsewhere in this book, but here we develop it further. Their motivations for ‘choices’ made are described as both clear and also suspicious and deliberately hidden. They are failing to put their children’s needs before their own. They are choosing to stay with a violent partner. If they are men they are useless or dangerous, or both. We argue here that it is time to resurrect the intensity and the

The Missional Role of ὁ Πρεσβύτερος from: Communities in Dispute
Author(s) Jones Peter Rhea
Abstract: Time and space have chastened me to limit my topic considerably from the ecclesial role of ὁ πρεσβύτερος to the missional role. This latter choice pressed upon me by the texts themselves, particularly in 1 and 2 John, is itself a rather large focus upon which I can only make a modest and introductory comment. When approaching either the presumably larger topic or the rather more restricted topic, two courses of action commend themselves: first, to do an analysis of the title itself and then, more promisingly, to do an inductive analysis of the actual action implied in the two

On Ethics in 1 John from: Communities in Dispute
Author(s) van der Watt Jan G.
Abstract: First John is indeed “the letter of love,” and ethical issues are generally regarded as a core focus in this letter. As a topic, ethics are mentioned in virtually all commentaries on the Epistles,¹ with an obvious emphasis upon aspects like the commandment of love, the exemplary requirement to act according to the light, and some interesting references to sin. The pessimistic view of the presence of ethics in the Gospel of John² does not apply to the Epistles of John.

The Significance of 2:15–17 for Understanding the Ethics of 1 John from: Communities in Dispute
Author(s) Loader William R. G.
Abstract: My initial reaction in returning to 1 John 2:15–17 after investigating attitudes towards sexuality in the New Testament and early Judaism was to see here a reflection of the view expressed in Mark 12:25 and, I believe, presupposed by Paul, that in the age to come there would be no place for sexual desire and sexual relations, for “the world and its desire are passing away” (ὁ κόσμος παράγεται καὶ ἡ ἐπιθυμία αὐτοῦ, 1 John 2:17).¹ This need not imply a negative stance towards sexual desire in itself as part of God’s creation. It is just that in the

What Does It Mean to Be a Latino/a Biblical Critic? from: Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics
Author(s) Agosto Efrain
Abstract: “I have been teaching the Bible since I was fifteen years old.” So began the personal essay to both my application for theological school thirty-five years ago and that for graduate school over thirty years ago. This sentence reflected a couple of matters that I would like to point out at the outset of this study.

The Challenges of Latino/a Biblical Criticism from: Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics
Author(s) Dupertuis Rubén R.
Abstract: The term challengesin the title of this essay has a number of possible references, some of which are very personal. I was in graduate school working diligently to understand the Acts of the Apostles in the context of rhetorical training and education in the larger Greco-Roman world when I encountered an essay by Fernando Segovia (1995a) in which he critiques the methods that were at the very core of what had, up to that point, been my introduction to biblical and early Christian studies. My reaction was twofold.

Reading from No Place: from: Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics
Author(s) Hidalgo Jacqueline M.
Abstract: One mild December evening, while I was still pursuing a Master of Arts degree, I sat with my elder brother Jorge and my father (also Jorge) around my father’s kitchen table. His kitchen table sits in the same home my parents owned when I was born, a home located in a suburb of San José, Costa Rica. On this particular evening, I was recovering from surgery, sipping water weakly through a straw, when my brother decided it was time to confront my father about a pressing family matter. My brother pointed out that he was now a father who had

2 Understanding and Scientific Explanation from: Scientific Understanding
Author(s) DE REGT HENK W.
Abstract: In 1948, physicist Erwin Schrödinger delivered the Shearman Lectures at University College London. In 1954, these lectures were published as Nature and the Greeks. In this book Schrödinger argues that science, since it is a Greek invention and is based on the Greek way of thinking, is “something special,” that is, “it is not the only possible way of thinking about Nature.” Schrödinger then poses the following question: “What are the peculiar, special traits of our scientific world-picture?” and he answers it immediately by stating: “About one of these fundamental features there can be no doubt. It is the hypothesis

3 Understanding without Explanation from: Scientific Understanding
Author(s) LIPTON PETER
Abstract: Explaining why and understanding why are closely connected. Indeed, it is tempting to identify understanding with having an explanation. Explanations are answers to why questions, and understanding, it seems, is simply having those answers. Equating understanding with explanation is also attractive from an analytic point of view, since an explanation is understanding incarnate. The explanation is propositional and explicit. It is also conveniently argument shaped, if we take the premise to be the explanation proper and the conclusion a description of the phenomenon that is being explained. So we are on the way to specifying the logic of understanding.

7 Understanding in Physics and Biology: from: Scientific Understanding
Author(s) MORRISON MARGARET
Abstract: It is commonly thought that the greater the degree of abstraction used in describing phenomena the less understanding we have with respect to their concrete features. I want to challenge that myth by showing how mathematical abstraction—the characterization of phenomena using mathematical descriptions that seem to bear little or no relation to concrete physical entities/systems—can aid our understanding in ways that more empirically based investigations often cannot. What I mean here by “understanding” is simply having a theoretical account of how the system is constituted that enables us to solve problems, make predictions, and explain why the phenomena

16 Understanding in Historical Science: from: Scientific Understanding
Author(s) KOSTER EDWIN
Abstract: The sense of understanding would be epistemically idle phenomenology were it not so poisonous a combination of seduction and unreliability. It actually does harm, sometimes making us squeamish about accepting true claims that we don’t personally understand, and more often operating in the opposite direction, causing us to overconfidently accept false claims because they have a

Book Title: Liberalism at Its Limits-Crime and Terror in the Latin American Cultural Text
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): RODRÍGUEZ ILEANA
Abstract: In Liberalism at Its Limits,Ileana Rodríguez considers several Latin American nations that govern under the name of liberalism yet display a shocking range of nondemocratic features. In her political, cultural, and philosophical analysis, she examines these environments in which liberalism seems to have reached its limits, as the universalizing project gives way to rampant nonstate violence, gross inequality, and neocolonialism.Focusing on Guatemala, Colombia, and Mexico, Rodríguez shows how standard liberal models fail to account for new forms of violence and exploitation, which in fact follow from specific clashes between liberal ideology and local practice. Looking at these tensions within the ostensibly well-ordered state, Rodríguez exposes how the misunderstanding and misuse of liberal principles are behind realities of political turmoil, and questions whether liberalism is in fact an ideology sufficient to empower populations and transition nation-states into democratic roles in the global order.In this way,Liberalism at Its Limitsoffers a critical examination of the forced fitting of liberal models to Latin American nations and reasserts cross-cultural communication as crucial to grasping the true link between varying systems of value and politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qh6vz

5 Constituting Subaltern Subjectivities, Disclosing Acts of Violence from: Liberalism at Its Limits
Abstract: SOCIAL SCIENTISTS succeeded in laying out the variables conditioning the structure of Colombian society, focusing on land and land-tenure patterns and highlighting the concept of the agrarian frontier to underscore the chaotic nature of the social and point to the inchoate form of the political. Invoking Fabio López de la Roche’s argument that the fundamentalist Christian view serves as the umbrella or atmosphere to this historical moment provides a brief but significant comment on the cultural parameters subtending this mode-of-production model. I now shift from high to subaltern forms of culture in an effort to get my readers to move

7 The Perverse Heterosexual from: Liberalism at Its Limits
Abstract: THE NUMBER OF articles, books, films, pictures, paintings, and theatrical productions concerning the women assassinated in Ciudad Juárez grows steadily.¹ This is due not only to the bemusing and menacing nature of this massive event that bewilders scholars but also to the intuition that it constitutes a symptom of overriding importance of events to come and constitutes one of the patterns of governmentality in the postmodern world. Without packing everything into a convenient catchall explanation, it can be said that evidence of this menace can be found in the murders of women in other areas of Mexico, such as Baja

Chapter 6 Whose Vanguardist City? from: Barcelona
Author(s) NUÑEZ NATALIA
Abstract: As the Carvalho cycle of novels by Manuel Vázquez Montalbán (1939–2003) illustrates, late 1970s Barcelona had many reasons to be a rather ‘disenchanted’ city. The combined effects of the Porciolista administration (1957–73), and the disastrous aftermath of economic recession had turned the Catalan capital into a rather ‘grey’ post-industrial metropolis (Calavita and Ferrer, 2000, p. 793). This 1970s version of Barcelona as a decaying urban centre was miles away from the fetishized City of Ivoryconceived by intellectuals of theNoucentistaperiod (Resina, 2003, p. 108). But it was all about to change with the arrival of democracy

Chapter 8 Translating the Enigma: from: Barcelona
Author(s) FERNÀNDEZ JOSEP-ANTON
Abstract: Recent scholarship on Catalan culture has tended to focus on space, urban geography and memory in relation to place. The city of Barcelona has been the obvious case study, not just because of its international projection, but also because of its position as a site of symbolic struggles with regards to Catalan identity (see Epps, 2004; Johnson, 2006; Resina, 2008a). By virtue of its very title, Ventura Pons’s nineteenth feature film, Barcelona (Un mapa)(2007), would therefore seem to be an ideal object for analysis from this kind of perspective. Indeed, the film’s title appears to point to the centrality

Chapter 12 Absent Bodies and Objects from: Barcelona
Author(s) ASTLES CARIAD
Abstract: This chapter explores contemporary visual culture in Barcelona with a particular focus on puppet theatre, which has been significant in the development of Catalan theatre over the last century, in particular within the Catalan movement towards independence since the last days of the Franco regime. The chapter will centre on Barcelona itself as a concrete locus of identity negotiation, and on the body as the specific site of that negotiation, through its presence in carnivalesque performance or by its absence, fragmentation or imprint. The body, in particular the puppet body, thus serves as a metaphor for discussing how the accultured

Chapter 13 A Broken Mirror? from: Barcelona
Author(s) WILSON ANNA
Abstract: As explored in many chapters in this volume, the Barcelona cityscape is a contested space, caught up in conflicting discourses that interlink cultural identity and power. Capital of Catalonia and home to the Catalan regional government, Barcelona is the vortex of debates that question both the Catalan relationship to the Spanish state and to the wider European and world communities. It is these power struggles which will be brought into focus in this chapter, in so far as they have been compounded by the increasingly problematic location of identity in the context of a postmodern, global city. Any sense of

Introduction: from: France’s Colonial Legacies
Author(s) BARCLAY FIONA
Abstract: We live in an era of commemoration. Thirty years after Pierre Nora made the claim in his magisterial work, Les Lieux de mémoire,it is no less true; indeed, the new millennium may be seen as heralding a high point in memorialisation.² This volume contributes to the debates which continue to be conducted around the place of empire in the contemporary life of the French nation, debates that have been underway since the 1990s and that now reach across public life and society with manifestations in the French parliament, media and universities. Remembrance of the past has come to the

Chapter Three Conflicting Memories: from: France’s Colonial Legacies
Author(s) MOSSMAN IAIN
Abstract: The events and actors of the Algerian war hold an ambiguous place in recent French history, particularly given the way in which the war was actively erased from national memory soon after Algerian independence.¹ However, since the early 1990s, narratives of the war have re-emerged in France, taking complex and often conflicting positions which have escalated to the level of ‘memory wars’.² The contrast between the recent, violent return of Algerian war memories and the long preceding period of societal amnesia has meant that the persistent memories of the metropolitan French populace generated during the conflict are often overlooked. This

Chapter Seven Interrogating the Transnational Family: from: France’s Colonial Legacies
Author(s) ASAVA ZÉLIE
Abstract: This chapter explores the legacy of French imperialism in Sous la clarté de la lune(Under the Moon’s Light,2004), an African film by Burkinabé female director Apolline Traoré which was partly funded by a French government grant and made with a French cinematographer and leading actor. Centred around an interracial family unit, the film explores the effects of (neo-) colonialism on concepts of race, cultural memory and identity politics, proposing contemporary Africa as a borderland in which hybridity flourishes. By foregrounding the experiences of mixed-race women and their families, and examining personal and cultural histories and identities, the film

Chapter Eight Continuity and Discontinuity in the Family: from: France’s Colonial Legacies
Author(s) HANDYSIDE FIONA
Abstract: Arguably one of the most notorious and certainly most critically discussed contemporary French films addressing the question of post-colonial traumas and guilt is Michael Haneke’s Caché(2005): indeed, the film continues to garner considerable critical interest from both French and film scholars.³ At the heart of this film lies an unsuccessful attempt at a (post) colonial adoption by a French family of a young child of Algerian origin, Majid. If much scholarly attention has been paid to the question of the post-colonial subject in Haneke’s film, and the possibilities that the film can be read beyond a specifically national framework

Chapter Ten Playing out the Postcolonial: from: France’s Colonial Legacies
Author(s) KILCLINE CATHAL
Abstract: In 1998, Zinédine Zidane and his teammates who beat Brazil in the final of the World Cup were hailed as heralds of a new, multicultural nation symbolised by black-blanc-beurfootballers representing ‘la France qui gagne’ (victorious France). Largely inspired by the 1998 French victory, a number of significant exhibitions and productions have since commemorated the footballer as a national hero and in particular as a standard bearer for immigrant and ethnic identities in France. The National Library’s 2007 exhibition on ‘Heroes’ enshrined Zidane as a national and global hero, whilst a 2010 exhibition at the Cité nationale de l’histoire de

Chapter Eleven Crime and Penitence in Slavery Commemoration: from: France’s Colonial Legacies
Author(s) FRITH NICOLA
Abstract: ‘10 May: Sarkozy’s words move Taubira to tears’ ran the headline for the French overseas newspaper, France-Guyane.¹ The editorial was reporting on the reaction of the left-wing Guyanese deputy and author of the so-called Taubira law, Christiane Taubira, to a speech given in 2011 by the president of the Republic, Nicolas Sarkozy, in the symbolic Jardin du Luxembourg.² The occasion was to honour the sixth national day for remembering the slave trade, slavery and their abolitions (inaugurated under Chirac in 2006), and the tenth anniversary since the French Senate had, after numerous debates and delays, unanimously voted in the Taubira

4 The Consolidation of Strategies in Outside the House of Baal from: Emyr Humphreys
Abstract: Outside the House of Baalbuilds on Humphreys’s achievement inA Toy Epicand is certainly the single text in which he best achieves his aims as a novelist-cum-Welsh nationalist. Whereas ‘The Land of the Living’ sequence will in its seven volumes cover a greater stretch of Welsh history and chart its effect on a wider range of characters, this single novel’s scope is both more specifically focused and in literary terms more adventurous. The novel has aWelsh setting and is a realistic portrayal of life in various areas of Wales, particularly the north, from the end of the nineteenth

5 Strategies of Resistance: from: Emyr Humphreys
Abstract: Using indigenous myth within a work of fiction is an established postcolonial strategy of resistance. The fact that Humphreys made a practice of using classical myth in a variety of narrative techniques in his fiction before he began to use Celtic myths predominantly does not prevent his use of indigenous myth being considered as a deliberately anti-imperial strategy. ‘The Land of the Living’ sequence is perhaps the best, certainly the most complex, example of his use of a variety of tales from The Mabinogion, although the Blodeuwedd archetype has occurred in his fiction throughout his career.² Humphreys has written extensively

6 Strategies of Resistance: from: Emyr Humphreys
Abstract: Emyr Humphreys’s later novels fall naturally into two groups: ‘The Land of the Living’ sequence (197–91) and the independent novels: The Anchor Tree(1980),Jones(1984),Unconditional Surrender(1996) andThe Gift of a Daughter(1998). In both groups there is deliberate intention on the part of the author to utilize Welsh history, whether by using ‘textbook’ or anecdotal sources, his own memory of events and their repercussions in Wales during the twentieth century or, indeed, by using the history of other nations as a commentary on the Welsh situation. Each way in which Humphreys uses history may be

7 Strategies of Resistance: from: Emyr Humphreys
Abstract: This is the issue with which Emyr Humphreys wrestles both in his sequence of novels and in the independent novels written concurrently. Using very different techniques, Humphreys is concerned, no less in the independent novels than in his ‘The Land of the Living’ sequence, both to express the importance of its history to Welsh society and to instruct his reader about that history. After writing National Winnerin 1971, andFlesh and BloodandThe Best of Friendsin 1974 and 1978 respectively, Humphreys produced two novels, independent of the sequence,The Anchor Tree(1980) andJones(1984). Four more

8 Monstering and Disabling: from: Emyr Humphreys
Abstract: Throughout his long career as a novelist Emyr Humphreys has been inclined to reuse certain tropes, archetypes and paradigms, albeit in novels of a variety of types. We have seen in the earlier chapters that his protagonist is often a weak, over-sensitive male who is failing in some way in his familial or social life. From A Man’s Estateonwards this character has increasingly dominated and particularly in those novels concerned with the matter of Wales. John Cilydd More, in ‘The Land of the Living’ sequence, is a prime example. This character may in certain ways epitomize for the author

3 Manuscripts, multilingualism and fragmentation from: Darogan
Abstract: Most of my interpretative categories are heuristic devices, and also somewhat hesitant. The major entities are less than certain, since the identity of a ‘manuscript’ is often as unstable as

Chapter One Annie Ernaux and the Narrating of Time from: French Fiction into the Twenty-First Century
Abstract: Since her first publication in 1974, Annie Ernaux (b.1940) has garnered increasing success and critical controversy with each stage of her oeuvre. To date she has published sixteen texts, which divide into four distinct categories. There are the three semiautobiographical novels with which she began her career, Les Armoires vides(1974),Ce qu’ils disent ou rien(1977) andLa Femme gelée(1981), first-person narratives dealing with issues of class and gender as the characters become distanced from their working-class origins through education, and experience oppression in social and domestic spheres. There are then the seven non-fiction texts on which her

Chapter Three Marie Darrieussecq and the Voice of the Mind from: French Fiction into the Twenty-First Century
Abstract: Marie Darrieussecq (b.1969) is the youngest of the five writers, and has at the time of writing barely a decade to her career as a published author. In this short time, however, she has established herself as a significant voice in European literature. Following the succès de scandaleof her first novel,Truismes(1996), which divided critics yet went on to become the kind of publishing sensation not seen in France since Françoise Sagan’sBonjour Tristesse(1954), Darrieussecq has produced six further novels, along with several shorter pieces and non-fiction works.¹ The later novels, which will be our main concern

Chapter Four Jean Echenoz and the Uses of Digression from: French Fiction into the Twenty-First Century
Abstract: Of the five novelists on which this study focuses, Jean Echenoz (b.1947) is most frequently compared with the experimenters of Oulipo and the nouveau roman, perhaps in part due to his position as the most prominent author atLes Éditions de Minuitsince thenouveaux romanciersfirmly established the publishing house’s avantgarde credentials in the 1950s. Such comparisons are not always apt: when, in 1979, Jérôme Lindon first welcomed the aspiring author toMinuit, Echenoz was told, ‘“You like Robbe–Grillet, of course” … as if it were obvious, as if my book stemmed naturally from this influence’, leaving the

Chapter Five Patrick Modiano and the Problem of Endings from: French Fiction into the Twenty-First Century
Abstract: Of the five authors in this study Patrick Modiano (b.1945) has the longest career as a published writer, beginning with La Place de l’étoilein 1968, and has maintained a high literary profile ever since, combining critical acclaim with popularity among the reading public.¹ The twenty-three novels and non-fiction narratives he has so far produced, up toDans le café de la jeunesse perduein 2007, regularly exceed 150,000 copies in sales; his 1978 Goncourt winner,Rue des Boutiques Obscures, sold 470,000.² With his other literary prizes including the Prix Fénéon (1968, forLa Place de l’étoile), the Grand prix

Introduction from: The Brazilian Road Movie
Author(s) BRANDELLERO SARA
Abstract: Journeys and life on the road have fired the human imagination since time immemorial and inspired some of literature’s most enduringly popular narratives. Film did not escape this attraction, and the birth of cinema itself is tantalizingly associated with recording the experience of being on the move. Early cinema, as Giuliana Bruno has pointed out, ‘envisioned “panoramic views” that incorporated site-seeing journeys and the spatio-visual desire for circulation that had become fully embedded with modernity.’¹ Such connection between mobility and film is encoded in the very titles of some of the new medium’s earliest outputs, from the Lumière brothers’ landmark

Chapter One Silvino Santos and the Mobile View: from: The Brazilian Road Movie
Author(s) MARTINS LUCIANA
Abstract: In 1969, the documentary film-maker Silvino Santos was awarded a prize at the First Northern Festival of Brazilian Cinema (I Festival Norte do Cinema Brasileiro) in Manaos, in recognition of his pioneering work on the Amazon. Almost forgotten, aged eighty-two, Silvino Santos had been making films since 1913. In the same festival, the best film award was given to Macunaíma(1969), Joaquim Pedro de Andrade’s adaptation of Mário de Andrade’s novel from 1928. In a period of intensely politicized cultural production at the end of the 1960s, artists were looking back to modernism in order to find answers to contemporary

Chapter Four Framing Landscapes: from: The Brazilian Road Movie
Author(s) CUNHA MARIANA A. C. DA
Abstract: O céu de Suely(Suely in the Sky, 2006), directed by Karim Aïnouz, is set in the backlands (thesertão), in the interior of the Brazilian northeast.¹ The film portrays a migrant’s return there after a period spent in the urban south of the country, thereby representing a space that has been a recurrent subject matter in Brazilian cinema since the 1960s. This essay examines the relationship between mobility, subjectivity and the construction of cinematic landscapes, spaces and places in this film. The questions that drive this essay are the following: how is the sertão as a space of mobility

Chapter Five Road to Riches: from: The Brazilian Road Movie
Author(s) HEISE TATIANA SIGNORELLI
Abstract: Aside from the many images of roads filmed from moving vehicles, the motif of the journey and the numerous travelling shots of impressive landscapes, 2 filhos de Francisco(Two Sons of Francisco, Breno Silveira, 2005) could hardly be categorized as a road movie, even if we accept the term as encompassing the many variations on the American genre. Silveira’s film does not address any of the themes normally associated with road movies, such as the quest for individual freedom, the subversion of society’s norms or the escape from restrictive domestic environments.¹ Neither does the film use the motif of the

Chapter Seven Leaving Home in Three Films by Walter Salles from: The Brazilian Road Movie
Author(s) SADLIER DARLENE J.
Abstract: When Walter Salles began making feature films in the early 1990s, Brazilian cinema was at one of its lowest ebbs, occupying at one point less than one percent of the domestic marketplace.² Struggling in the 1980s, the industry was completely derailed by newly-elected President Fernando Collor de Mello’s 1990 austerity programme which included a freeze on all personal savings accounts and the closure of Embrafilme, the government agency that had supported film-making since 1969. Any Brazilian film-maker in this period would have needed to go outside the country for work, or at least for international financing. As a result, for

Book Title: Saul Bass-Anatomy of Film Design
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Horak Jan-Christopher
Abstract: The first book to examine the life and work of this fascinating figure, Saul Bass: Anatomy of Film Design explores the designer's revolutionary career and his lasting impact on the entertainment and advertising industries. Jan-Christopher Horak traces Bass from his humble beginnings as a self-taught artist to his professional peak, when auteur directors like Stanley Kubrick, Robert Aldrich, and Martin Scorsese sought him as a collaborator. He also discusses how Bass incorporated aesthetic concepts borrowed from modern art in his work, presenting them in a new way that made them easily recognizable to the public.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qhm5p

2 Film Titles: from: Saul Bass
Abstract: Having previously branded himself as the most innovative designer of modern Hollywood film titles, Saul Bass took a twenty-year hiatus. Between Seconds(1966) andBroadcast News(1987), he designed only a couple of titles for Otto Preminger, as well asThat’s Entertainment II(1976).¹ He took his name off the credits forLooking for Mr. Goodbar(1977) after a monumental fight with director Richard Brooks, but by then, title work was no longer a factor in the Bass studio business. Apparently, title work on several films in the late 1960s fell through, including a planned prologue and title forHawaii

3 Creating a Mood: from: Saul Bass
Abstract: Bauhaus and Gestalt aesthetics influenced Saul Bass’s art, nowhere more visibly than in his film posters, which often reduced a film’s narrative content to a single iconic image. The designer’s later reputation as a creator of pithy corporate logos provides a clue to his method: Bass had an extreme talent for capturing the essence of a film’s narrative in a single abstract, highly iconographic image; this image, through its metonymic quality, would then become the central visual idea or logo for an advertising campaign. Most historians credit Bass as being the inventor of the film logo, which “is the figurative

4 Modernism’s Multiplicity of Views from: Saul Bass
Abstract: If one important conceptual strategy for Saul Bass’s design work was pars pro toto(finding a single image to stand for the whole), then another strategy he developed early on was creating wholes out of many individual parts. Photomontages were important in the Bauhaus, with Moholy-Nagy creating some of the most striking examples, because they taught design students about spatial proportions within the frame and the juxtaposition of intellectual content. Bass’s movie advertisements demonstrate that he was a master at both. Montage on a two-dimensional surface takes the form of a multiplicity of images often separated into panels on a

5 The Urban Landscape from: Saul Bass
Abstract: Saul Bass lived in New York City until 1946, when he was twenty-six years old. At the time, it was still the most modern urban environment in the world. Indeed, going back to the turn of the twentieth century, European and American modernists considered New York the modern city par excellence. Walt Whitman sang its praises in his poem “Mannahatta,” first published in the 1860 edition of The Leaves of Grass: “High growths of iron, slender, strong, splendidly uprising toward clear skies.” Paul Strand, Alfred Stieglitz, and Alvin Langdon Coburn captured not only the explosion of skyscrapers before World War

2 Lay Disease Narratives, Tuberculosis, and Health Education Films from: Tuberculosis Then and Now
Author(s) BOON TIM
Abstract: This essay makes a speculative proposal: by using an approach to tuberculosis that focuses on the storied nature of lay understandings of disease, it may be possible to gain a broad grasp of its place in the culture of the past. It is a contribution to the strand within medical history that seeks to move beyond the social historical towards the cultural historical in an attempt to make an account of the past that places the experience of disease and medicine proportionally as an aspect of life and not its whole. Because the prevalence and threat of tuberculosis have declined

4 Beyond the Total Institution: from: Tuberculosis Then and Now
Author(s) CONDRAU FLURIN
Abstract: When Erving Goffman published his seminal study Asylumsin 1961 , few would have anticipated its far-reaching impact on social theory and, somewhat later, the historiography of medical institutions.¹ Such institutions had previously been regarded as loci of care. But with Michel Foucault and Thomas Szasz, Goffman popularised the view that they ought to be studied as social institutions that shaped medical knowledge. Szasz coined the terminstitutional pathologyto begin to understand what he called a misguided definition of (mental) illness. For him, institutions combined a general inability to usefully treat a mental illness with an explicit aim to

10 At Home in the Colonies: from: Tuberculosis Then and Now
Author(s) VALIER HELEN
Abstract: Attitudes towards and treatment of communicable diseases changed considerably during the 1950s. New anti-malarials, the unprecedentedly powerful antibiotic penicillin, and the new anti-tuberculosis drugs were finally demonstrating the staggering – but as yet unfulfilled – potential of chemotherapy to challenge some of the world’s most intransigent disease problems.¹ With the introduction of effective combined chemotherapy treatments, for instance using streptomycin, para-amino-salicylic acid (PAS), and isoniazid, came dreams of the total eradication of tuberculosis (a disease that though already in steep decline across the developed world was on the increase in many poorer countries). Chemotherapies promised treatments and cures for a range of

The Measure of Expression: from: Chora 1
Author(s) Bédard Jean-François
Abstract: It was not until the publication in 1933 of Emil Kaufmann’s Von Ledoux bis Le Corbusierthat Jean-Jacques Lequeu was officially ushered into the world of architectural historiography.² Both in this book and in a later article,³ Kaufmann asserted that Lequeu and his colleagues Etienne-Louis Boullee and Claude-Nicolas Ledoux were important forerunners of early twentieth-century modernism. Other historians have analyzed Lequeu’s work since then, variously describing him as a romantic, a surrealist, a dadaist, a schizophrenic, and a pornographer; Philippe Duboy even called him the “pataphysical” alter ego of Marcel Duchamp.⁴ Beyond these differences of interpretation, all agree that Lequeu’s

Architecture as a Site of Reception – Part I: from: Chora 1
Author(s) Kunze Donald
Abstract: In The Gastronomical Me,M.F.K. Fisher noted that our three basic needs for food, security, and love are so intermingled that we cannot think of one without encompassing the others.³ There are two important truths here. The first is that the human mind works so much through a logic of displacement, whereby concerns of one kind are written in the language of another, that in fact mind itself might be regarded as nothing more than the process of displacement.⁴ The second truth is that hunger, its object (food), and its functions (ingestion and digestion) figure prominently in that process.

4 NEUSNER: from: Common Ground
Abstract: The first thing I notice in the story of creation—and I think it is what the story wants me to notice—is that the seventh day, the Sabbath of creation, is the climax of the beginning of creation. Everything is aimed at that one thing, which commemorates and celebrates creation, all in a single sentence: “And God blessed the seventh day and declared it holy, because on it God ceased from all the work of creation that He had done.” That contains the entire message of “in the beginning”:

5 GREELEY: from: Common Ground
Abstract: Often this intimacy is pictured as romantic love, a marriage, even a love affair between God and us. Love is not the dominant theme of the Bible in the sense that there are no other emotions in it. The books were not written or collected to fit any single theme. There are more than six thousand incidents of violence in the Scriptures. Love is

7 NEUSNER: from: Common Ground
Abstract: Humanity in our image? Is the Bible joking? Father Andy, you and I share the single faith in humankind that this stunning passage sets forth: we are in God’s image, after God’s likeness. You find in Jesus Christ what it means to be in God’s image, after God’s likeness: God in the flesh. And I find in the picture of what it means to live a holy life, to be a holy human being, the image and the likeness. And you and I both find God in the face of the other—at least, we try. But then you and

17 NEUSNER: from: Common Ground
Abstract: The Passover celebration, which commemorates the exodus of Israel from Egypt, is the single most widely practiced rite of Judaism. What do people do? Well, what happens is that family and friends sit down for supper. That is what Jesus did with his disciples, formed into a surrogate family, at the Last Supper, and that is what Jews do, nearly universally, at the same season at which Christians celebrate Easter.

20 GREELEY: from: Common Ground
Abstract: Not a pleasant event. But thus was adultery punished in Israel. The crime was not so much one of sexual “impurity” as we would think of it. Rather, the faithless woman had sinned against the basic social structure of her people because she risked producing a child who might inherit the family property though not, in fact, of

21 GREELEY: from: Common Ground
Abstract: The Bible is a “tissue of metaphors.” So speaks Australian scholar Mark Coleridge. At one level the statement is unassailable: one can only describe God through metaphors, since God cannot be known directly and immediately in this world. The Bible is about God and therefore it depends on comparisons to tell us what God is like.

33 NEUSNER: from: Common Ground
Abstract: How does Scripture propose to settle the question of God’s gender? Israel achieves its authentic relationship to God when Israel is feminine to God’s masculine role; its proper virtue when it conforms to those traits of emotion and attitude that the system assigns to women. In chapter 7 I raised that question, but in the years since then, I have learned more about the subject. The main point that I have found out is simple: the Torah in fact portrays God as androgynous. Because our traits correspond to God’s, God too turns out to share in and value the gender

36 NEUSNER: from: Common Ground
Abstract: Now we come to the nub of the matter. Religions can teach one another. These pages have shown that fact. But can they communicate with one another? That is another question, and it defines the single most important problem facing religion for the next hundred years, as for the last, as an intellectual one: how to think through difference, how to account, within one’s own faith and framework, for the outsider, indeed, for many outsiders.

37 NEUSNER: from: Common Ground
Abstract: Previously, I said I thought religious people could communicate, since the capacity to convey feeling and thought to another person marks us as human. But I did not think religious systems can communicate. That is because a religious

AQUÍ ESTAMOS: from: Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Hazelton Hugh
Abstract: Much time has gone by since the first Latin American authors began to arrive in Canada among the refugees and immigrants who left their native

POETIC DISCOURSE IN BABYLON: from: Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Case Frederick Ivor
Abstract: THOUGH DIONNE BRAND is not a member of the Rastafari, her published collections of poetry¹ display characteristics of one who has lived the alienation of Babylon and has had to confront it with the arms at her disposal. While her poetry is essentially about the right to define and to determine one’s own being, it would be misleading to speak of the universal appeal of her work, since there are many who would react sharply to her unambiguous ideological perspectives.²

COME TO JAMAICA AND FEEL ALL RIGHT: from: Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Ford-Smith Honor
Abstract: THE UNITED NATIONS World Tourism Organization forecasts that by the year 2000, tourism will be the single most important global economic activity (Enloe, 1989, p.20.). Internationally, tourism employs more people than the oil industry. In the Caribbean, the hotel, the blue skies and the beach have replaced the great house and the sugar plantation as major foreign exchange earners. Mass tourism is transforming population the physical environment, aspects of sexuality and sexual relations, speech habits, education and forms of representation of the region.

ARGENTINE COMMERCIAL CINEMA: from: Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Ciria Alberto
Abstract: L’auteur trace le parcours de I’industrie cinematographique en Argentine pendant la présidence de Raul Alfonsin (1983-1989). En faisant le bilan à la fois du développement économique et de I’activite artistique, il insiste sur le

IDENTITY AND DIFFERENCES IN THE CARIBBEAN DIASPORA: from: Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Yon Daniel
Abstract: THE ISSUE OF IDENTITY, and the questions it evokes, occupies a central place in social, political and cultural theory in the closing decade of the 20th century. In positing this development, in the words of Stuart Hall 1989) as “the question of identity,” I draw attention to the contestation and struggles over what it means to talk about identity and to the identifications that are invoked in the process of talking and writing. The theoretical and other developments leading to the present centering of identity in theory and politics are multiple. They include intense debates around issues of nationalism, ethnicity,

Book Title: Everyone Says No-Public Service Broadcasting and the Failure of Translation
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): CONWAY KYLE
Abstract: Quebec has never signed on to Canada's constitution. After both major attempts to win Quebec's approval - the Meech Lake and Charlottetown Accords - failed, Quebec came within a fraction of a percentage point of voting for independence. Everyone Says No examines how the failure of these accords was depicted in French and English media and the ways in which journalists' reporting failed to translate the differences between Quebec and the rest of Canada. Focusing on the English- and French-language networks of the Canadian Broadcasting Corporation, Kyle Conway draws on the CBC/Radio Canada rich print and video archive as well as journalists' accounts of their reporting to revisit the story of the accords and the furor they stirred in both French and English Canada. He shows that CBC/Radio Canada attempts to translate language and culture and encourage understanding among Canadians actually confirmed viewers' pre-existing assumptions rather than challenging them. The first book to examine translation in Canadian news, Everyone Says No also provides insight into Canada's constitutional history and the challenges faced by contemporary public service broadcasters in increasingly multilingual and multicultural communities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.cttq93tk

INTRODUCTION: from: Everyone Says No
Abstract: The institution of public service broadcasting is at a crossroads. Or, perhaps more accurately, institutions of public service broadcasting are at a crossroads. The audiences they serve are increasingly heterogeneous: in multicultural countries like Canada, the viewers that public broadcasters seek speak more languages and identify with a wider range of ethnic, cultural, and even national identities than they have at any time in the past. Public broadcasters face a considerable challenge in addressing this diversity. How do they reconcile their historical nation-building mandates with the new ways

6 The Charlottetown Accord and the Translation of Ambivalence from: Everyone Says No
Abstract: With the failure of the Meech Lake Accord in 1990, Canadians and their leaders were tired, frustrated, and increasingly bitter. Nothing was settled, and in fact, constitutional matters were now even more complicated than before. English Canadians were exasperated by what they took to be Quebec’s unwillingness to compromise, while many in Quebec felt that the failure of Meech Lake represented a callous repudiation of the province’s concerns. In addition, the First Nations had now asserted themselves on the constitutional stage. With Meech Lake, they had succeeded in doing something that had long been in the making, channelling years of

CONCLUSION: from: Everyone Says No
Abstract: Nearly two decades after the defeat of the Charlottetown Accord, Canada’s public broadcaster faces a familiar set of challenges. The fragmentation characterizing the CBC/Radio-Canada’s audience has increased since 1992, and with it, so has a demand for the representation of different cultural groups. The desire for representation expressed by the country’s principal linguistic groups, by members of its different geographic regions, and by its Native peoples has been supplemented by a desire for representation expressed by members of Canada’s multicultural communities. At the same time, the Canadian Broadcasting Corporation has had to make do with progressively less funding – the cuts

1 Gossip Girls: from: Reading Modern Drama
Author(s) ROACH JOSEPH
Abstract: Gossip is to modern drama what myth was to ancient tragedy. Gossip, like myth, offers playwrights a selection of favourite story types, well stocked with embarrassing details. Gossip, like myth, brings secrets into the public light, charming audiences with the socially cohesive pleasures of other people’s pain. Gossip, like myth, unites communities against deviance in the cause of normality or, with equal efficiency, against normality on behalf of popular subversion. Ancient myth, however, handing down the world-historical heritage of atrocious deeds, concerned itself primarily with relations of kinship; modern gossip, by contrast, retailing damaging new information pertaining to just about

2 “Vinløv i håret”: from: Reading Modern Drama
Author(s) THRESHER TANYA
Abstract: The difficulty Ibsen’s women experience accessing the dominant male discourse finds its most acute example in Hedda Gabler(1890), the play in which Ibsen’s dramatic dialogue is at its most condensed and circumlocution is the dominant narrative technique.¹ The paucity of Hedda’s words has been a matter of critical concern since the very inception of the play. In an 1891 review ofHedda Gabler, Edmund Gosse stated that

1 The Imperialism of the Market: from: Endless Propaganda
Abstract: In the summer of 1943, so the story goes, an English visitor was struck by the signs of ‘normality’ everywhere as he flew over the state of Nebraska – ‘hundreds of miles of it and not a sight or sound to remind one that this was a country at war.’ But when his lunch arrived, he received a small jolt: there, stamped on his pat of butter, was the command, ‘REMEMBER PEARL HARBOR.’ ‘Of course they knew there was a war on,’ commented George Will. ‘However, Americans believe that a bit of advertising never hurts.’¹

[PART II: Introduction] from: Endless Propaganda
Abstract: We owe the concept of hegemony to the Prison Notebooksof Antonio Gramsci (1891–1937), an Italian Communist leader who produced a formidable body of writings during the many years he was incarcerated by the Fascist regime.² ThePrison Notebookswere no ordinary collection. They included thoughts, notations, drafts of essays, reconsiderations, musings, much of

3 Governing Affluence: from: Endless Propaganda
Abstract: Searching(1975) was an instance of shock advertising, sponsored by the British government, probably appearing courtesy of its Central Office of Information (COI). What the Americans had started spread to other parts of the advanced world (and sometime s beyond) in the course of the 1970s. There were differences. Corporate advocacy never reached the same proportions outside of the United States, though by the early 1980s it was sufficiently prominent in Canada to justify a special public affairs conference of luminaries from business, government, and academe.² Britain prohibited the brand of broadcast political advertising that the United States had come to

[PART III: Introduction] from: Endless Propaganda
Abstract: At the moment of his death, the philosopher-historian Michel Foucault (1926–84) was the premier theorist, at least in the western world, of those human sciences he had so often criticized.¹ His books, essays, lectures, interviews, and musings, many published or republished in a variety of editions and collections after he died, had challenged orthodoxies, fostered controversy, and inspired innovation in a range of disciplines.² There was a quality of the perverse about his views: he seemed to delight in arguing the contrary. The past became a topsy-turvy realm where that bright march of progress might now be revealed as

6 Administered Minds, or Shaming the Citizenry from: Endless Propaganda
Abstract: Only in Singapore? Not so. Smiletypified a common brand of propaganda – call it ‘administrative advertising’ – used throughout the affluent world of the 1980s and 1990s. It was part of a much wider effort at social engineering in which marketing was only one tool (legislation was equally, if not more, important) used in efforts to program affluent populations. Authorities, and not just the state, set out to construct or reconstruct the citizen – his behaviour, her attitudes, their conducts – in way that suited some purpose or agenda. That priority inspired an assault upon the personal – or,

7 Appropriations: from: Endless Propaganda
Abstract: A defining attribute of culture at the end of the twentieth century is the appeal of the eclectic, a penchant for hybrids, fusions, bricolage. And this attribute of the culture is reflected in its advertising. Consider events in the United States, always the home of experiment, in 1997 and 1998: the federal government adopted paid PSAs (for the census and for anti-drug campaigns), the Ad Council agreed to tailor PSAs to the network’s promotional efforts, the Arthritis Foundation turned to an ad-supported infomercial to raise funds, and the Children’s Television Network (purveyors ofSesame Street) proudly announced a new initiative

9 Green Nightmares: from: Endless Propaganda
Abstract: Exit technopia. Exit the Land of Cockaigne, as well. This is an example, albeit one of the more extreme versions, of a genre of civic advocacy I call ‘green nightmares.’ Here is a very different realm, where technology threatens the survival of humanity. Risks abound. ‘Progress’ is a sinister word that signifies not improvement but its reverse. The obsession with private goods fosters social risks: masses of garbage, devastating explosions, air and water pollution, ozone depletion, toxicity, cruelty to animals, and species extinctions. Standing against the tide are the greens, the champions of the environment and the animals. Especially in

1962-2 from: Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: The final object is being, which is the same as the good: everything about everything that is, insofar as it is. Consequently, it is completely universal and completely concrete at once. Again, since knowledge is of opposites, the final object is also all that is not, insofar

1962-6 from: Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: We begin with a twofold point.² We can handle within the same science the necessary and the empirically intelligible, the universal and the imaginative scheme which approaches the singular, the changeable and the unchanging, the per seand theper accidens, insofar as we go behind the conceptual order. Within the conceptual order those terms are contradictory. But prior to conceiving, there is the act of understanding, and prior to the act of understanding, there is the state of mind that is expressed in the question. When it is expressed in the question, one has concepts. But the prior state of

1962-9 from: Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: In general, exegesis is learned in practice, in a seminar. The four articles I wrote on gratia operansinTheological Studiesin 1941–1942² represent the exegesis of an article in St Thomas,Summa theologiae, 1-2, q. 111, a. 2. What does this article mean? Well, you can easily write four articles and refer to all sorts of elements in St Thomas’s thought to set forth

1964-5 from: Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: What was singular in mind of Christ became common by its diffusion to Apostles and to the believing Church. The process of teaching involves universale in mente. There are obvious differences between the way different minds assimilated. Each had his ownmodus recipientiswhich is brought to light by positive theology. Daniélou,Théologie du judéo-christianisme(Tournai-Paris, Desclée, 1958),³

1968-7 from: Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: Religious values may be briefly referred to as values connected with, arising from, ultimate concern. Our conception of religion in that section on values had to do primarily with religion conceived in its roots, as simply ultimate concern, as authentic human existence with regard to God and God’s world. The primary and ordinary manifestation or expression of ultimate concern is not any technically formulated question about

[SECTION ONE: Introduction] from: Fighting Words and Images
Abstract: The three chapters gathered together in this section address the silences arising from, and complicating, the representation of war. Each of them considers silence not so much as an absence as it does as a technique for indirectly evoking war, a large and multifaceted phenomenon whose complexity resists comprehensive articulation at nearly every turn. Jay Winter, Kate McLoughlin, and Brad Prager all work to show how silences about war may be deployed to animate an understanding of warʹs representational elusiveness. Each author, however, locates this elusiveness in different representational domains: Winter in commemorations of war organized around the construction of

[SECTION TWO: Introduction] from: Fighting Words and Images
Abstract: Though relevant to any representation, perspective is a particularly important theoretical issue in war representations. At first glance this is readily apparent, since every struggle, military or otherwise, involves at least two antagonists, and representations of conflict usually emphasize the concerns of only one of them. At the same time, there are numerous journalistic and academic accounts of war that aim for a birdʹs-eye view. For example, a historian sifting through historical sources must deal with many different perspectives, all in some way unreliable since they are written from limited – and often during times of war strategically manipulated –

4 Historiographical Simulations of War from: Fighting Words and Images
Author(s) JAEGER STEPHAN
Abstract: The numerous narrative techniques available to represent war and violence must allow for the expression of an immense range of perspectives. It spans from the survey perspective of the historian to the personal experiences of participants in the war such as soldiers or civilians, from first-hand experiences to considering the impact on future generations. Representations oscillate between distance and proximity, between critical summary or analysis and personal experience. For historiography in its narrower meaning as historical writing within the scholarly field of history, representing war seems particularly difficult since historiography is traditionally seen as a secondary narrative discourse, one in

8 Exchange of Sacrifices: from: Fighting Words and Images
Author(s) OUSHAKINE SERGUEI ALEX.
Abstract: The Chechen war became one of the most vivid representations of the political and social chaos that followed the collapse of the Soviet Union. To a large degree, the war was an unexpected outcome of the fight for independence that had started in Chechnya in the early 1990s. At the time, Boris Yeltsinʹs government was capable of neither negotiating with the pro-independence forces in Chechnya nor suppressing them. Apparently misinformed by his advisors about the possibility of defeating heavily armed Chechen rebels, in December 1994 Yeltsin began a military campaign aimed at ʹrestoring the constitutional orderʹ in Chechnya (see figure

12 ʹRuins: from: Fighting Words and Images
Author(s) BAKER SIMON
Abstract: The period between the conclusion of hostilities on the Western Front in 1918 and the start of the Second World War twenty years later is one within which several cultural trajectories comprising the subjects of this essay overlap: the reconstruction of the built environment in north-eastern France (the devastated areas known as the ʹRed Zonesʹ); the development and popularization of modernist and avant-garde photography in Europe; and the development and cultural assimilation of the work of Sigmund Freud, both in avant-garde literary and artistic circles and more widely in popular cultural forms such as ʹpulpʹ fiction. These three very different

1 Introduction from: Civility
Abstract: The origins of this book are rooted in my childhood. My father worked for the United Nations, so we moved from one country to another every three or four years. I came to be fascinated by the manner in which people differed from one place to another. In the British school, we were sent to the principal if we were caught using a ballpoint instead of a fountain pen. In the American school, we were forbidden from using fountain pens. In the French school, we could use anything we wanted to just as long as we didn’t forget to stand

2 The Demonology of Spenserian Discipline from: Magical Imaginations
Abstract: In his 1590 Faerie Queene, Spenser represents demonic conjuration in terms that could well describe poetic creation. His diabolical magician Archimago, for instance, conjures malevolent spirits using ‘verses’ (1.1.27) from his magic books, and he fashions his spirits to make ‘false showes’ that ‘abuse [the] fantasy’ (1.1.46) of the Redcrosse knight.¹ Indeed, ever since A. Bartlett Giamatti first noticed that the demonic ‘false shewes’ conjured by Archimago’s verses are akin to the imaginative images invoked by Spenser’s poetry, it has become commonplace to read the magician as Spenser’s allegorical figure for the poet. Hence critics generally characterize Archimago and the

3 Why Devils Came When Faustus Called Them from: Magical Imaginations
Abstract: Like Sidney and Spenser, Marlowe deployed instrumental aesthetics in order to establish his art as a distinct and valued cultural form. Unlike them, however, Marlowe never sought patronage by promising to improve his audiences morally; rather, he attempted to draw people to the Bankside with the charisma of his persona, expanding the market in which theatre arose as an independent institution by staging astonishingly powerful performances whose effects appeared to transcend the disenchanted boundaries that usually frame the experience of a play. Nor did he hesitate to exploit the connection of instrumental aesthetics and magic to achieve his artistic goals.

4 The End of Magic: from: Magical Imaginations
Abstract: Twentieth-century Shakespeare criticism has bequeathed us a picture of The Tempestas a document of early British imperialism.¹ Like the interpretations they serve to contest, postcolonial readings of the play usually view Prospero as an analogue of James or his colonial administrator.² Such readings, though, ignore the historical fact that in his political writings and his legislation James represented magicians as traitors who should be tortured and executed without pardon. In his 1597Daemonologie, and again in his 1603Basilikon Doron, James explicitly proclaimed that in using powers given to them by devils, magicians undermine the divine sovereignty of the

Epilogue: from: Magical Imaginations
Abstract: The historical relationship between magical spells called ‘charms’ and literary texts meant to have instrumental effects has emerged repeatedly a leitmotif of this book. The Elizabethan parliament outlawed the practice of charming as a felony in 1563, yet in The Defense of Poesy, Sidney characterized poetry’s efficacy as its ‘sweet, charming force.’² A figure for the court poet who attempts to seduce his married beloved with sonnets, Spenser’s Busirane deployed ‘a thousand charms’ to compel Amoret’s love ‘perforce.’³ The Protestants whose account of conjuration Marlowe appropriated forDoctor Faustusinsisted that any signs used to spiritual ends without scriptural authorization

4 The Pluralist Alternative from: Herder's Political Thought
Abstract: Herder’s sustained attention to linguistic and cultural specificity means he rejects the rationalist and absolutist belief in a single and harmonious body of knowledge. Yet he never abandons many of the universal values associated with ‘the Enlightenment’ by adopting a relativist conception of ‘truth.’ Owing to the recent pluralist turn in Anglo-American political thought,¹ the dichotomy between relativism and absolutism that held such a dominant place in Western thought has undergone considerable re-evaluation. Richard Bernstein locates its intellectual force as having emerged from Descartes’s search for an absolute foundation, that is, some fixed point from which all metaphysical and epistemological

6 Republicanism from: Herder's Political Thought
Abstract: It is hardly surprising, given Herder’s views on the state, that he shows relatively little interest in government and administration. But the fact that Herder’s direct engagement with politics in this narrow sense forms only a small part of his extensive intellectual output has meant that it has often been thought that he ‘was not a political thinker in the true sense of the word.’¹ It should be clear that I reject the narrow conception of politics on which this assessment is based, but due to its pervasiveness and misleading nature it needs to be addressed directly.² Viroli in his

chapter one Introduction from: Redrawing the Map of Early Modern English Catholicism
Author(s) GALLAGHER LOWELL
Abstract: This book presents an itinerary of English Catholicism in the early modern period. Imagine you are looking at an interactive map depicting the fortunes of members of the ‘old faith’ – variously called ‘Romanist,’ ‘Romish,’ and ‘papist,’ as well as ‘Catholic’ – in Reformation-era England. Maps tell stories of one kind or another and this one would be in no way different, but the embedded graphs and visual icons would yield a tangle of information not easily reducible to a single story. The machinery of an epic tale would be on display, notably through the sense of heroic antagonism animating the sequence

chapter two In Defence of Idolatry: from: Redrawing the Map of Early Modern English Catholicism
Author(s) MAROTTI ARTHUR F.
Abstract: In an Italian-American parish in which I lived for part of my youth, many of the plaster statues of saints, the Virgin, and Christ had feet worn down, mainly by the devout old women who kissed and rubbed them as part of their religious ritual behaviour. Without such touching, their religious experience was impoverished – even if, to some ways of thinking, what they were doing was practising idolatry.

chapter seven Alchemy, Repentance, and Recusant Allegory in Robert Southwell’s Saint Peters Complaint from: Redrawing the Map of Early Modern English Catholicism
Author(s) KUCHAR GARY
Abstract: Although Saint Peters Complaintis one of Robert Southwell’s most well-known and widely discussed poems, in one sense it represents uncharted territory: readers have not yet observed that it unfolds as a sustained alchemical allegory. ‘The burning Babe’ is generally recognized as presenting the conceptually simple, if poetically effective, alchemical conceit that Jesus is the alembic-furnace orfornax tribulationisin which penitent hearts undergo purification, but the numerous and surprisingly involved alchemical allusions structuringSaint Peters Complainthave not received comparable attention.¹ The basic conceit of the poem is that Peter is transmuted by Christ’s grace in a way that

Book Title: Avant-Garde Canadian Literature-The Early Manifestations
Publisher: University of Toronto Press
Author(s): BETTS GREGORY
Abstract: Avant-Garde Canadian Literatureoffers an entrance into the vocabulary of the ongoing and primarily international debate surrounding the idea of avant-gardism, providing readers with a functional vocabulary for discussing some of the most hermetic and yet energetic literature ever produced in this country.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3138/9781442696907

L’Envoi: from: Avant-Garde Canadian Literature
Abstract: The early avant-garde in Canada responded to the arrival of foreign cultural models at first by learning and imitating but eventually by translating cultural practices into the Canadian context. The Cosmic Canadians borrowed European models of idealism, occultism, and mysticism, as well as American models of transcendental idealism and poetic form, but developed these influences into a distinctly Canadian r/evolutionary node. The cultural products that emerged from this Anschauung remain marked by idealism, occultism, and mysticism, but became something else, something entirely new, as they colluded with the rising national spirit, the ideas of Richard Maurice Bucke, the general North

The time of the elders from: The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: In the 1930s, at the time when Saint-Denys Garneau, Jean-Louis Gagnon, André Laurendeau, and others were beginning to do their writing, I was just a little boy, carefully protected from books by my working-class milieu. I was more concerned about stealing apples from the neighbouring farmers than participating in the intellectual or political confrontations of the period. As I develop, however, I feel myself increasingly involved in those past events. They have changed, but only in appearance. Today, like yesterday, we are circling the same difficulty or empêchement(the term is that of Jean Le Moyne): we are always prowling

Is there a future for the French Canadian? from: The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: For the moment, there is still a French Canadian. He is difficult to isolate and define - slightly more so, no doubt, than the American or the Frenchman. But it is enough to travel in the Beauce or Charlevoix and even in certain sections of our big cities to recognize this singular being, and to feel one’s own heart leap in that unmistakable way. Is there point in this curious variety of human fauna continuing to exist? That is the real question, the most trivial and the stupidest; but I am surprised not to hear it more often in those

What is a political program? from: The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: Our society may be working out a serious kind of political thinking, but we are still groping, as it is particularly difficult to relate together such disparate requirements as our economic weakness and our desire for independence, our democratic aspirations and our socialist inclinations. These difficulties are reflected in the program of the Parti québécois. Not surprisingly, it gives rise to a type of thinking that, though committed, is still critical. Combining political conviction and free inquiry, unconnected with election-time manoeuvring, is no doubt one indication among others that things can change in Quebec’s political life.

Democracy and speech from: The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: Among the many often obscure pretexts furnished us by governments to sanction the imposition of the War Measures Act, one deserves our attention. At the beginning the federal Minister of Justice spoke of ‘a kind of disintegration of the will of the people.’ He returned to this later, insinuating that the hypothesis antedates the arrival on the scene of the few individuals who proposed to save Mr Laporte’s life, that it had been accepted for a fairly long time, and remained the most plausible hypothesis once the ‘parallel governments’ and pseudo-data on the ‘insurrection’ had gone up in smoke.

2 Recognition and violence from: Merleau-Ponty and Marxism
Abstract: Merleau-Ponty’s chief criticism of his contemporaries, as we have seen, was that they were wrong in refusing to acknowledge that intentions and consequences presented a problematic. One might also speak here of a dialectic of intentions and consequences, but in either case the connotation was of an unavoidable practical or pragmatic uncertainty. A problem can be solved, but a problematic must be coped with for better or for worse. To resolve a problematic into its analytically distinct constituent elements is to destroy its characteristic tension between (or among) those elements. Likewise, a dialectic contains its own internal dynamic, for example

Dante’s Katabasis and Mission from: The World of Dante
Author(s) SAROLLI GIAN ROBERTO
Abstract: Dante’s creative task has been defined as of “superhuman difficulty.” This is clearly discernible in the language of the poem; for although the Commedia, considered as a whole, seems astonishingly light and simple—thanks to its clear and orderly structure—there is no single passage that does not reflect tension and effort; one is left with the impression that the work at every step demanded of Dante a boundless devotion, an unstinting expenditure of himself. No less devotion, no less unstinting expenditure of self is demanded of Dante scholars when they are faced by the difficult question of whether or

1 Displaying the Fluttering Wing: from: Spenser's Famous Flight
Abstract: Spenserʹs most significant contribution to Western poetics lies in Christianizing the Virgilian idea of a literary career. Dante may precede Spenser in this enterprise, but he privileges a single Virgilian genre, the epic, and he subordinates this genreʹs political telos. Spenserʹs genius lies in constructing a comprehensive career idea that synthesizes the Renaissance version of the Virgilian progression, pastoral and epic, with non-Virgilian genres compatible with Christianity and the Reformation: the Petrarchan love lyric and the Augustinian hymn. For the Renaissance poet, the Virgilian, politicaltelosof the earthly city fulfils the Augustinian, salvifictelosof the heavenly city (FQ

4 Love Lyric, or Sporting the Muse in Pleasant Mew: from: Spenser's Famous Flight
Abstract: Spenser does not follow the Renaissance program of beginning a poetic career with pastoral and ending it with epic. In 1595, a year before publishing the second instalment of The Faerie Queene, he publishes a volume of love lyrics titledAMORETTI AND Epithalamion. In the fiction ofAmoretti(again, we can only speculate about actual life), the New Poet completes his Virgilian epic while composing his Petrarchan sonnet sequence.

Book Title: The Narcissistic Text-A Reading of Camus' Fiction
Publisher: University of Toronto Press
Author(s): Fitch Brian T.
Abstract: This volume is the first book is the first to judge the whole of Camus' fiction by contemporary critical methods, and 'inter-textuality,' or the study of the interrelationship between Camus' own texts, using the critical tools elaborated in the writings of French formalists and the hermeneutic theory of literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3138/j.ctt1vgw8kv

Introduction from: The Narcissistic Text
Abstract: For some forty years now and since well before his premature death in an automobile accident in 1960, Albert Camus has been considered one of the most significant and influential writers of this century. Eloquent testimony to this fact is furnished by the several thousands of articles and books that have been devoted to the man and his work in countless countries on all five continents and in languages as diverse as Russian, Arabic, and Japanese.¹ That this status as one of the ‘classics’ of French literature would only be disputed precisely within the boundaries of his native land is

1 The Writing on the Blackboard from: The Narcissistic Text
Abstract: One finds in Camus’ fiction a curious and unremarked predilection for blackboards and analogous objects that fulfil the same function as circumscribed surfaces to be written upon. There is the blackboard on which the rebel Arabs leave Daru’s death sentence at the end of the short story ‘L’Hôte.’ The long process during which Joseph Grand labours painstakingly over the single sentence he seeks to perfect is also worked out on a blackboard, his room being described thus: ‘On remarquait seulement un rayon de bois blanc garni de deux ou trois dictionnaires, et un tableau noir sur lequel on pouvait lire

5 The Interpreter Interpreted: from: The Narcissistic Text
Abstract: Although La Chuteis narrated in the first person, the ‘I’ of the narrative voice is by no means the only ‘forme vide’ or empty slot that the text provides for the reader. Even the most cursory reading of this novel or ‘récit’ reveals the presence of a silent interlocutor, a paradoxical phenomenon made possible only because the words of Clamence’s companion are never reported directly by him. Clamence describes the person with whom he is conversing in terms that are general enough to have a general applicability and yet concrete enough to turn a shadow into a presence: he

6 Just between Texts: from: The Narcissistic Text
Abstract: In the previous chapters, I have spoken of the way the Camusian text functions within itself, produces its own reflection, as well as the way it reproduces within itself its relationship to its reader. It remains to consider the manner in which the different texts relate to one another, for here too a mirroring effect can be seen to be at work. The intertextuality¹ in question is of a very special kind since no texts by other writers are concerned. In fact, if one were to consider the whole of Camus’ works as one single text, then one could more

Chapter Two TIME, SUICIDE AND DEATH from: French Existentialism
Abstract: All the existentialists are united in their opposition to idealist philosophies which ignore space and time as necessary conditions of the human existence. In no way is the finiteness of the human creature more evident than in the fact that he must live an earthly existence, and, since things in time have a beginning and an end, that he must be subject to the mysteries of birth and death. Ignoring these fundamental facts, the idealists sought to transcend the time process by rational system and they imposed a rational pattern upon the course of historical events. In other words, they

Chapter Ten CONCLUSION from: French Existentialism
Abstract: There is a common tendency to regard existentialism as a passing fad rather than as a valid philosophy. This has been largely due to the existentialist writers’ presentation of certain risqué themes as well as to the wide distribution of Sartre’s journalistic and artistic writings. However, this popularizing is due not to a desire for scandal only, but, more fundamentally, to the moral mission which Sartre has assigned himself, to bring as many men as possible to an awareness of themselves and of their freedom. Though there are elements in the philosophies of the non-Christian existentialists which encourage scandal and

Introduction from: Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Hicks Henry B.
Abstract: He has taught political science at Harvard since 1926, but has also lectured at other great centres of learning all over the world. He is president of the International Political

The role and conduct of public enterprise from: Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Robson William A.
Abstract: I WILL BEGIN by explaining what I understand by public enterprise. It comprises all those activities on the part of public authorities which plan, control, initiate and organize economic and social development. It is convenient to divide the functions of the State into three categories. There are the traditional functions such as the maintenance of law and order, foreign affairs, and defence. These have been provided by the governments of all civilized countries for many centuries. There are the social services, such as education, public health, welfare, public housing, social insurance, and public assistance. These are relatively modern hi their

Introduction from: Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Bonneau Louis-Philippe
Abstract: LORSQUE ON FAIT un séjour quelque peu prolongé dans un pays étranger, on prend l’habitude de lire les journaux avec attention et intérêt. J’ai vécu l’expérience suivante en France durant l’été de 1959. Les journaux du temps étaient pleins de deux sujets. Le premier se rapportait à un crime perpétré dans le bois de Fontainebleau. Ce n’est pas, bien sûr, à ce fait divers que je pense, mais bien plutôt au second qui prenait une allure intéressante pour un étranger. Il s’agissait du projet d’implantation, par la firme américaine Libby’s, d’une usine de conserverie dans le Midi de la France.

New trends in education from: Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Petersen K. Helveg
Abstract: THE 1960s can be called the decade of education, because a great number of changes and reforms have taken place and are taking place all over the world, in order to meet the increasing demands from a society which itself is changing rapidly. This growing awareness of the role of education meets with increasing demands for well educated and specialized people. Governments realize that they have an obligation to provide the means for an efficient educational system. It is characteristic that parliaments and governments really begin to listen when shown that expansion in education provides for economic growth. Generally speaking,

Introduction from: Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Affleck R. T.
Abstract: PEOPLE IN MONTREAL feel that the enormous impact and enormous success of Expo in many ways transcends architecture as such. Professor Bruno Zevi in his life and his work is an example of an architect who transcends architecture. This one can see in a moment when one examines his activities as a historian, a scholar, a professor, a writer, a journalist, and a practising architect, planner, and consultant. He has been involved in Expo as a consultant to the Italian pavilion. He has been involved in direct education in a very meaningful way at the University of Rome as professor

Architecture 1967: from: Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Zevi Bruno
Abstract: IT is QUITE EVIDENT that I would not be discussing such a controversial subject as “Architecture 1967: Progress or Regression?” were it not for a fortuitous but significant coincidence. The year 1967 is not only the Canadian Centennial, a very happy event, but also the third centenary of a tragic episode in architectural history. In 1667 Francesco Borromini, perhaps the greatest architect of the Baroque period, committed suicide. Why? we ask ourselves. Was he neurotic, sexually frustrated, unhappily married? Actually he killed himself because he felt and knew that everything he had been struggling to accomplish during his life was

Introduction from: Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Krotkov G.
Abstract: PROTEINS HAVE BEEN attracting the attention of biologists for many years. Being extremely varied, complex, and unstable, these substances could be studied from many different points of view and using different techniques. However, a Chinese proverb says : “There are many paths to the top of the mountain, but the view is always the same.”

Cosmology, enduring and changing features from: Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Bondi Hermann
Abstract: MY SUBJECT in this lecture is perhaps more concerned with the human reaction to cosmology rather than with cosmology itself, since I have become more and more fascinated with the way the human muid responds to changes and advances in science. Cosmology excites particularly strong, varied and interesting responses, for the subject matter is the structure and history of the universe as a whole. It is therefore not in the least surprising that people have been fascinated by it for thousands of years. Nor is it surprising that it belongs among the most speculative and rapidly varying subjects in the

Book Title: The Unmaking of Home in Contemporary Art- Publisher: University of Toronto Press
Author(s): LAUZON CLAUDETTE
Abstract: In a world where the notion of home is more traumatizing than it is comforting, artists are using this literal and figurative space to reframe human responses to trauma. Building on the scholarship of key art historians and theorists such as Judith Butler and Mieke Bal, Claudette Lauzon embarks upon a transnational analysis of contemporary artists who challenge the assumption that ‘home’ is a stable site of belonging. Lauzon’s boundary-breaking discussion of artists including Krzysztof Wodiczko, Sanitago Sierra, Doris Salcedo, and Yto Barrada posits that contemporary art offers a unique set of responses to questions of home and belonging in an increasingly unwelcoming world. From the legacies of Colombia’s ‘dirty war’ to migrant North African workers crossing the Mediterranean, The Unmaking of Home in Contemporary Art bears witness to the suffering of others whose overriding notion of home reveals the universality of human vulnerability and the limits of empathy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3138/j.ctt1whm8v6

2 The Art of Longing and Belonging from: The Unmaking of Home in Contemporary Art
Abstract: In New York in 2003, Polish-American artist Krzysztof Wodiczko exhibited Dis-Armor, a high-tech wearable communications instrument equipped with video camera, microphone, speakers, and LCD screens broadcasting stories of alienation and cultural displacement, designed to facilitate public testimony and eventual (re)integration into the social body. The same year, Mexico City–based Spanish artist Santiago Sierra represented Spain at the 50th Venice Biennale withWall Enclosing a SpaceandCovered Word, an installation that saw the national pavilion bricked in and accessible only through the back entrance, and only to those who presented a Spanish passport. In their diverse art practices, both

4 Biennial Culture’s Reluctant Nomads from: The Unmaking of Home in Contemporary Art
Abstract: In October 2007, Doris Salcedo performed another sort of archaeological dig when she occupied the massive space of the Tate Modern’s Turbine Hall with Shibboleth, a 548-foot fissure that snakes its way along the length of the floor, beginning as a hairline crack and at times gaping to expose what appears to be a bottomless crevasse, lined with concrete and chain-link fencing. A complex meditation on the experience of immigration that simultaneously evokes the often treacherous experience of crossing borders and the “negative space” occupied by migrants within the increasingly policed borders of the European Union, the work seems determined

Book Title: Kathleen Jamie-Essays and Poems on Her work
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Falconer Rachel
Abstract: Kathleen Jamie's works are classics. No one can read Kathleen Jamie and remain indifferent or unchanged. Nationally acclaimed since her first major publications in the 1980s, Jamie stands out from other contemporary poets in her exceptional musicality, her strikingly unusual perspectives, her wry humour, translucent imagery, and hard-edged economy of expression. These 16 newly commissioned critical essays and 7 previously unpublished poems by leading poets make up the first full-length study of Kathleen Jamie's writing. The essays discuss all of her poetry collections, including The Queen of Sheba (1994), Jizzen (1999), Mr and Mrs Scotland Are Dead: Poems 1980-94 (2002), The Tree House (2004) and The Overhaul (2012), as well as her travel writing, including Among Muslims (2002), her nature writing, Findings (2005) and Sightlines (2012) and her collaborative work, including Frissure (2013), with artist Brigid Collins. Whether engaging with national politics, with gender, with landscape and place, or with humanity's relation to the natural environment, this volume demonstrates that Kathleen Jamie's verse teaches us new ways of listening, of seeing and of living in the contemporary world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt14brxr6

Introduction from: Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Falconer Rachel
Abstract: The ‘green and ventricular cave’, where this speaker imagines teaching herself to listen, might also stand for the space where poetry is being read these days – somewhere quiet and removed, one would hope – somewhere the word can still shudder up against silence in the reader’s mind. Kathleen Jamie’s work has been around in the public domain since 1982. She has been the recipient of numerous national awards, and in the past decade, has frequently been in the public eye or ear – in the national newspapers, or on BBC Radio. We are so used to having her around (by ‘we’ I

4. Transcending the Urban: from: Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Bell Amanda
Abstract: The Queen of Shebaappeared at an important moment in the raising of

5. ‘Proceeding Without a Map’: from: Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Wheatley David
Abstract: ‘Art proceeds without a map’, Kathleen Jamie has written of the act of finishing a book: ‘It seems to me that if you know precisely what you’ve done, or are going to do, then it’s a project. Projects are not art.’¹ For all her sceptical embargo, the cartographical metaphor remains a compelling way of approaching Jamie’s poetry. Also with cartography in mind, Elizabeth Bishop wrote: ‘More delicate than the historians’ are the map-makers’ colors’, suggesting ways in which the business of cartography, tied though it is to the business of nation-building, achieves a non-political surplus of aesthetic delight.² Access to

8. ‘The Tilt from One Parish to Another’: from: Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Mackay Peter
Abstract: Sometimes we have to hush the frantic inner voice that says ‘Don’t be stupid,’ and learn again to look, to listen. You can do the organising and redrafting, the diagnosing and identifying later, but right now, just be open to

9. Repetition, Return and the Negotiation of Place in The Tree House from: Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Davidson Lynn
Abstract: The Tree Houseasks how we can live more interactively and less destructively with nature. It explores the concept of place with its confluence of political, historical, communal and familial elements, and raises questions around the mythologising and division of land. My interest is in how Jamie employs poetic technique to demonstrate new ways of thinking about place: specifically, her use of intertextual repetends and how these repetitions negotiate between a connection to place and the need to advance our stories of belonging.

10. Form in The Tree House from: Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) O’Neill Michael
Abstract: In her dealings with form, Kathleen Jamie is on her guard against anything that smacks of prepackaged comfort. Forms seem often to be calculatedly under stress, at an angle to anything conventional, as in the fine sonnet ‘The Cupboard’ from The Tree House(44). In this poem, short lines and an emphatic but unpredictable use of rhyme and off-rhyme keep the poem and reader on their toes, following the twists and turns of a poem that feels its way forward. The ‘cupboard’ is less symbol than wryly presented surrogate for symbolic meaning. Jamie adeptly obeys and departs from the organising

13. ‘Connective Leaps’: from: Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Gairn Louisa
Abstract: When asked to define the genre of her 2005 essay collection, Findings, Kathleen Jamie encountered a challenge: ‘ There didn’t really seem to be a word for it’, she notes;¹ ‘It’s not nature writing, but it is; it’s not autobiography, but it is; it’s not travel writing, but it is’.² Matt McGuire notes that her work ‘disrupts the demarcation lines within recent Scottish criticism’, operating ‘in the gaps, in the places where other discourses fail to reach’.³ Similar border-crossings take place in Jamie’s latest book of essays,Sightlines(2012), which, together with her latest poetry collection,The Overhaul(2012), continues

14. Life Lines, Sight Lines: from: Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Spencer Eleanor
Abstract: Lines written by a young Spitfire pilot to his sweetheart, tentative at first, but growing increasingly desperate, progressively more honest. A black and white photograph of an austerely beautiful Tibetan plain, delicately, almost imperceptibly marked with a neat line of irregular white stones. The livid line of a recent mastectomy scar, surgically inscribed on the changed and changing body of a breast cancer survivor.

Book Title: Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Stokes Patrick
Abstract: Is each of us the main character in a story we tell about ourselves, or is this narrative understanding of selfhood misguided and possibly harmful? Are selves and persons the same thing? And what does the possibility of sudden death mean for our ability to understand the narrative of ourselves?For the first time, this collection brings together figures in contemporary philosophy and Kierkegaard studies to explore pressing questions like these in the philosophy of personal identity and moral psychology. These essays will both advance important ongoing discussions of selfhood and expand the light that, 200 years after his birth, Kierkegaard is still able to shed on contemporary problems.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt16r0hb2

1 The Moments of a Life: from: Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self
Author(s) SCHECHTMAN MARYA
Abstract: Over the past several decades narrative accounts of personal identity have become increasingly popular (see, e.g. Davenport 2012, MacIntyre 1984, Ricoeur 1992, Rudd 2012, Schechtman 1996, Taylor 1989). As the narrative approach has become more prominent it has, predictably, attracted its share of criticism, and there has been a fairly strong reaction against the idea that our lives can profitably be understood in narrative terms. The most common and forceful objection to this approach is often formulated as a kind of dilemma: either narrative theories really mean to claim that our lives are significantly like literary narratives or these views

2 Teleology, Narrative and Death from: Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self
Author(s) ALTSHULER ROMAN
Abstract: Consider the fission problem: a single human being, A, is divided into two such humans, B and C, through teleportation, divine intervention, or some other mythical power. Both B and C are psychologically continuous with A. As the established account of personal identity would have it, psychological continuity is sufficient for personal identity.¹ But if fission is conceptually possible, the psychological continuity view of personal identity faces a problem: since both B and C are psychologically continuous and thus identical with A, given the transitivity of identity it must follow that B and C are identical with each other. And

8 Forgiveness and the Rat Man: from: Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self
Author(s) LIPPITT JOHN
Abstract: It is surprising to write a couple of articles and receive a book in response. Yet such has been the flattering reaction to my own modest contribution to the debate about whether or not Kierkegaard should be classed as a ‘narrativist’ in any interesting sense (Lippitt 2005, 2007). Both John J. Davenport (the author of the book in question) and Anthony Rudd have in recent work sought to clarify the conception of ‘narrative’ that they see as operative in Kierkegaard (Davenport 2011, 2012; Rudd 2007b, 2008a, 2012). In doing so, both have revised and qualified their positions in various respects,

Introduction from: Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Pernin Judith
Abstract: The documentary field is arguably one of the most vibrant, challenging and creative areas in moving images today. In countries with well-established film and television industries, documentary production has been considerably revitalised since the late 1980s. From this period onwards, new distribution opportunities through specialised TV channels and circulation in both international film festivals and theatres have steadily ensured the vitality of both documentary TV programmes and feature-length documentaries. Simultaneously, the globalisation and popularisation of video and digital technologies around the world, and the concomitant development of video practices outside conventional cinema, have transformed the documentary form into a common

CHAPTER 1 Post-unification (East) German Documentary and the Contradictions of Identity from: Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Byg Barton
Abstract: In assessing what post-German Democratic Republic (GDR) documentary brings to independent documentary film culture in Germany, one is struck in general by the relatively privileged status the ‘independent’ documentary has long had. Despite being ‘marginal’ to the major media industries based on entertainment, documentary films in Germany enjoy considerable status, exhibition outlets and funding, even where topics are politically controversial and methods are either avant-garde or critical of the mainstream. Prior to the fall of the Berlin Wall, the position of secure employment, steading funding and guaranteed screening outlets even made GDR documentary filmmakers the envy of their Western counterparts.

CHAPTER 5 Chris Marker: from: Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Feigelson Kristian
Abstract: Chris Marker (1921–2012), the creator of more than eighty films, has become a source of fascination for an entire generation of documentary filmmakers, as well as for the general public. In the 1950s, he succeeded in rejuvenating the documentary form and has since wielded considerable, though discreet, influence. The invention of mobile video cameras in the 1960s accorded greater liberty to documentary cinema. There was already talk of a New Wave in this field when Chris Marker reinvented the documentary essay, successively using various technologies from 16mm to Super 8, still photographs and digital images, while experimenting with the

CHAPTER 6 The Survivor–Perpetrator Encounter and the Truth Archive in Rithy Panh’s Documentaries from: Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Morag Raya
Abstract: In this chapter, I propose an analysis of Rithy Panh’s documentaries, S21: The Khmer Rouge Death Machine(2003),Duch, Master of the Forges of Hell(2012) and, to a lesser degree,The Missing Picture(2013), as what I term ‘perpetrator documentaries’ – that is, documentaries that focus on the figure of the perpetrator, while unravelling the long-time enigma of the ‘ordinary man turned perpetrator’ (Browning [1992] 1998: 159–89). I suggest that the survivor– perpetrator encounter staged at the heart ofS21andDuchis a major characteristic of Panh’s perpetrator documentary cinema, aiming at undermining the perpetrator’s ideology of extermination

CHAPTER 9 From the Ashes: from: Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Maasdorp Liani
Abstract: South African documentary filmmaking has changed substantially since 1990. Repressive state control of the media under the apartheid regime from 1948 to 1990 led to filmmaking that either overtly eschewed the political or made a strong statement on political and social issues. In both cases, personal stories and artistic expression were neglected. Thanks to the official transition to democracy that started in South Africa around 1990, space has been created for a new era in fiction and non-fiction filmmaking.

CHAPTER 11 Documentary Filmmakers on the Circuit: from: Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Vallejo Aida
Abstract: From the 1990s onwards, festivals specialising in documentary film have spread across the globe, and their new features have changed the roles these events previously played in film culture and business. Where festivals once served primarily as exhibition sites, the recent incorporation of industry sections to their programmes has resulted in these events having a profound influence not only on film criticism, but also on production and distribution. In this context, independent filmmakers have found a professional space to develop their projects at different stages, from searching for pre-production funding to finding distributors for theatrical release or television broadcasts. In

CHAPTER 12 Material Traces of Lebanon: from: Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Takahashi Tess
Abstract: Since the mid-1990s, artists have explored the status of documentary reference and the material trace in the gallery with increasing frequency. In part, this line of investigation stems from a situation in which the power of documentary images has been met with a widespread cultural uncertainty about their trustworthiness. As Hito Steyerl and Maria Lind write: ‘The double bind is strong: on the one hand documentary images are more powerful than ever. On the other hand, we have less and less trust in documentary representations’ (2008: 1). In response to this uncertainty, artists and filmmakers alike have turned increasingly to

CHAPTER 13 Autonomous Navigation? from: Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Luciano Bernadette
Abstract: In recent decades, many Italian filmmakers have been turning to the documentary medium in response to the lack of commitment by public and private broadcasters to the production of programmes of cultural significance (Bertozzi 2008: 305). Unfortunately, the contestable funding available for their production (mostly local, regional or special interest) is limited, as is documentary distribution beyond the festival circuit. The emergence and evolution of the web documentary has provided an opportunity for new channels of distribution and increasingly foregrounds the role of the user/viewer in their engagement, interaction and negotiation with the reality documented. The key distinction between linear

CHAPTER 15 Independent Documentaries and Online Uses in China: from: Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Pernin Judith
Abstract: Since the late 1980s, radical transformations of the Chinese film industry and art circles have led to the emergence of a significant body of independent documentary films produced and circulated without the backing of state institutions. This was definitely a breakthrough, since state documentary studios and television stations were the sole producers and broadcasters of non-fiction films in China for more than thirty years. Reforms that gradually adjusted the film and television industries to a market economy in the 1980s and 1990s generated, as a side effect, a grey area in which individual projects could be produced without prior submission

Book Title: Forgetting Differences-Tragedy, Historiography, and the French Wars of Religion
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Frisch Andrea
Abstract: This study argues that the political and legislative process of forgetting internal differences, undertaken in France after the civil wars of the sixteenth century, leads to subtle yet fundamental shifts in the broader conception of the relationship between readers or spectators on the one hand, and the matter of history, on the other. These shifts, occasioned by the desire for communal reconciliation and generally associated with an increasingly modern sensibility, will nonetheless prove useful to the ideologies of cultural and political absolutism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt16r0hwb

Chapter 3 History without Passion: from: Forgetting Differences
Abstract: In the article on the city Mâcon in his 1697 Dictionnaire historique et critique, Pierre Bayle devotes a long, convolutedremarqueto the question of whether he should include material about the Wars of Religion in his work.² He begins by paraphrasing the sixteenth-century edicts of pacification that urged the French to extinguish memories of the conflicts: “it would be desirable that the memory of all of those inhuman acts had been abolished in the first place, and that all the books that spoke about it had been thrown into the fire.”³ Those who hold that memories of the conflicts

Chapter 4 Tragedy as History: from: Forgetting Differences
Abstract: Pierre Matthieu was certainly not the first to characterize the French Wars of Religion in terms of tragedy. The intersection between history and tragedy was a commonplace in French writing about the wars from all sides, and in many different genres. An anonymous 1562 “Advertissement à la Royne mere du Roy” complains to Catherine de Médicis about the treatment of the Huguenots, using a theatrical metaphor to warn the queen mother that she risks becoming the main character in the tragedy represented by a France at civil war:

Introduction from: Katherine Mansfield and Translation
Author(s) Davison Claire
Abstract: Writing to her father from the Gurdjieff Institute only weeks before she died, Katherine Mansfield announced delightedly, ‘One very pleasant thing here is that I have to speak Russian consistently and shall I hope get as fluent in it as I am in French and German. After that I should like to rub up my Italian. Languages fascinateme.’¹ Even allowing for her putting on a perky voice to please her parents, or perhaps to convince herself that a medical cure could still be found, there is no mistaking the sparkling sincerity when expressing her passion for languages. Mansfield was

‘Into Unknown Country’: from: Katherine Mansfield and Translation
Author(s) Harland Faye
Abstract: Between the mid-nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, a transition occurred in modern fiction as writers became increasingly reliant on the visual. In his study Fiction and the Camera Eye, Alan Spiegel argues that this new visual consciousness in the novel was symptomatic of the shift from a theological to a scientific understanding of the world, meaning that, in modern fiction, ‘truth’ can only be revealed through sensory experience rather than authorial intervention.¹ In an uncertain modern world, Spiegel suggests, an author is no longer an authority; the common practice of pausing action in the novel to allow for exposition was

Welcome to Paradise from: Katherine Mansfield and Translation
Author(s) Hager Mandy
Abstract: It was a glimpse into Paradise. The sun caught the old town first, its jumble of faded pastels glowing like the gilded ceilings of the Vatican – yellow, pink, rose, white, red, orange, grey and cadmium; medieval plasterwork rising joyously from the silky sea as it had done for more centuries than she could even comprehend.

Beau Champ from: Katherine Mansfield and Translation
Author(s) Gasston Aimee
Abstract: You couldn’t really see the sun – it was like a poached yolk hiding inside its white, but when it burst it would be something really special. Some birds were soaring, coasting high, high, trying to plash around up there in those esculent clouds but no, no, o! they would always cleave. But there was no sadness in that, for down below there was such fine green of so many vibrantly different kinds, and so many sturdy boughs and trunks beneath that, silver sinews and august umbers, some gymnastically betrothed, some straight and stoic. And there were rivers, sparking and

Dorothy Brett’s Umbrellas (1917) from: Katherine Mansfield and Translation
Author(s) Spalding Frances
Abstract: Behind this playful, exuberant image,¹ celebrating Lady Ottoline Morrell and her court at Garsington, lie complex emotions. At an early age, Dorothy Brett had suffered from hearing problems. It first became noticeable while she was a student at the Slade School of Art, then, as now, part of University College, London. The Provost of this prestigious institution, horrified by the fact that Brett and two friends had chosen to picnic on the hallowed lawn inside the courtyard, delivered a severe reprimand. ‘I’m sorry, I’m deaf,’ Brett replied, ‘I haven’t been able to hear a word you said.’²

Book Title: The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Steven Mark
Abstract: Bringing together established and emerging scholars from multiple disciplines, the collection's unique contribution is to show how Angelopoulos created singularly intricate forms whose aesthetic contours invite us to think critically about modern history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1bgzcz6

CHAPTER 12 Syncope and Fractal Liminality: from: The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Pouli Nektaria
Abstract: Intertwined and iterative as Angelopoulos’ films may be, Ταξίδι στα Κύθηρα ( Voyage to Cythera, 1984) occupies a special place in the director’s oeuvre. Speaking to the French film critic Michel Ciment shortly after its release, Angelopoulos conceded thatVoyage to Cytherawas his ‘least Greek’ and his ‘least deep-rooted’ film, insofar as it was intended to express a ‘general illbeing’ (cited in Ciment 1985: 26). Anyone familiar with Greece’s tumultuous political history during the twentieth century will find this statement surprising, given the film’s central concern (or so it would seem) with the impossible homecoming of an exiled communist Αντάρτης

CHAPTER 14 An ‘Untimely’ History from: The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Brown Precious
Abstract: An essential (albeit controversial) point should immediately be made clear: the work of Angelopoulos is not ‘modernist’ in the sense that Anglo-Saxon critics have given to this term to qualify, in art history, a time past, but still belonging to modernity.¹ From end to end, Angelopoulos’ work is, in fact, traversed by history. Yet modernity is defined precisely by our awareness of unsurpassable historicity. In the words of Jacques Rancière, we have entered into the ‘ age of history’. He adds that it is also the ‘age of cinema’, as this late art possesses a singular power of ‘historicity and

INTRODUCTION from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Woods Angela
Abstract: The medical humanities, we claim, names a series of intersections, exchanges and entanglements between the biomedical sciences,¹ the arts and humanities, and the social sciences. The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanitiesintroduces the ideas, individuals and scholarly approaches that are currently shaping the field. The medical humanities is an area of inquiry that is highly interdisciplinary, rapidly expanding and increasingly globalised. As this Introduction and the chapters that follow demonstrate,The Companionis both a reinvigoration and a critical reorientation of the medical humanities: an identification of new challenges for research, which also expands the methodologies, perspectives and

2 MODELLING SYSTEMS BIOMEDICINE: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Carusi Annamaria
Abstract: At a conference on developing the capacity of systems biology to transform itself in systems biomedicine, several of the scientists’ presentations showcase the computational modelling methods they are developing. Drawing towards the end of his presentation, an experienced pharmacologist admonishes the audience to bear in mind that, despite the progress in modelling techniques that he has been discussing, a model is always just a representation and never reality. At this point, there is a PowerPoint slide showing Magritte’s painting, This is not a Pipe, and chuckling from the audience. It will not have been the first time that they have

10 THE BODY BEYOND THE ANATOMY LAB: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Allen Rachael
Abstract: I will never forget my first encounter with a corpse on entering the anatomy lab that day, unaware of the journey ahead and the profound influence these donors would have on my work as an artist. Inside here, I am grounded in a sense of belonging. Using my eyes as dissecting tools, I flay the layers of skin and fascia to reveal the inner world of strangers that are at once familiar and unknown. I am held in a momentary state of reverie.

12 REFRAMING FATNESS: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Cooper Charlotte
Abstract: Over the last twenty years or so, fatness,¹ pathologised as overweight and obesity, has been a core public health concern around which has grown a lucrative international weight loss industry. Referred to as a ‘time bomb’ and ‘the terror within’, analogies of ‘war’ circulate around obesity, framing fatness as enemy.² Religious imagery and cultural and moral ideologies inform medical, popular and policy language with the ‘sins’ of ‘gluttony’ and ‘sloth’, evoked to frame fat people as immoral at worst and unknowledgeable victims at best,³ and understandings of fatness intersect with gender, class, age, sexuality, disability and race to make some

14 TOUCHING BLIND BODIES: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Olsén Jan Eric
Abstract: Changing ideas on the nature of and relationship between the senses in nineteenth-century Europe constructed blindness as a disability in often complex ways. The loss or absence of sight was disabling in this period, given vision’s celebrated status, and visually impaired people faced particular social and educational challenges as well as cultural stereotyping as poor, pitiable and intellectually impaired. However, the experience of blind people also came to challenge received ideas that the visual was the privileged mode of accessing information about the world, and contributed to an increasingly complex understanding of the tactile sense.

20 MAN’S DARK INTERIOR: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Juler Edward
Abstract: Born of the sociocultural effervescence that swept through Europe in the years following the First World War, Surrealism represented a profound disillusionment towards the established intellectual order that it held responsible for the dehumanising and violent depths to which civilisation had so recently sunk.¹ Decrying the inadequacy of postwar philosophies and politics to deal with the new, brutalised world of the interwar period, the Surrealists loudly championed a revolution of perception by replacing the certainties of prewar thought with the unpredictable discontinuities of non-Euclidean geometry, the base materialism of Georges Bataille and, most especially, the dark visions of the human

21 NARRATIVE AND CLINICAL NEUROSCIENCE: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Gallagher Shaun
Abstract: Science (from the Latin, scientia) originally meant knowledge, so that ‘natural science’ meant knowledge of the natural world and of its laws. The term has since come to mean empirical, experimentally acquired knowledge and, as such, refers to some of the most powerful tools we have for understanding the world and indeed our own physiology. Scientific medicine has led to huge improvements in outcomes from a variety of conditions, from infectious diseases to cancer and heart disease. These advances have come, largely, from a mechanistic or reductionist approach to illness, which focuses on putting the body, understood as a physical

22 ON PAIN OF DEATH: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Guenther Lisa
Abstract: The chemicals began flowing about 10:29 a. m., and for a while, McGuire was quiet, closing his eyes and turning his face up and away from his family.

26 TRANS-SPECIES ENTANGLEMENTS: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Herman David
Abstract: without hesitation, Rowan opened his arms and hugged Betsy’s great brown head, which was hanging low enough for him to reach. Then he gave her a kiss. As he did so, an expression of extraordinary gentleness came over her – a certain softening of the eye, a blissful half-closing

28 MEDICAL MIGRATION AND THE GLOBAL POLITICS OF EQUALITY from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Bradby Hannah
Abstract: Employing doctors and nurses who were trained overseas has been standard practice since the inception of the British National Health Service (NHS) in 1948. However, by the twenty-first century, recruitment of doctors from Africa was being compared with the slave trade in terms of its exploitative and damaging effects: ‘current policies of recruiting doctors from poor countries are a real cause of premature death and untreated disease in those countries and actively contribute to the sum of human misery.’² The assertion that employing foreign doctors was causing poor health in those doctors’ countries of origin was echoed in two reports

30 FICTIONS OF THE HUMAN RIGHT TO HEALTH: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Jolly Rosemary J.
Abstract: The last decade has witnessed far greater attention to the social determinants of health in health research,¹ but literary studies have yet to address, in a sustained way, how narratives addressing issues of health across postcolonial cultural divides depict the meeting – or non-meeting – of radically differing conceptualisations of wellness and disease.² This chapter explores representations of illness in which Western narrators and notions of the body are juxtaposed with conceptualisations of health and wellness entirely foreign to them, embedded as the former are in assumptions about Cartesian duality and the superiority of scientific method – itself often conceived of as floating

Introduction from: French Philosophy Today
Abstract: French philosophy today is laying fresh claim to the human. This is not to be mistaken for an exercise in winding back the clock, nor is it a return to previous ideas of the human, much less a coordinated ‘human turn’. It is a series of fundamentally independent and yet strikingly simultaneous initiatives arising across the diverse landscape of French thought to transform and rework the figure of the human. Whereas the latter decades of the twentieth century adopted a decidedly critical and cautious approach to the question of ‘the human’, imprisoning it within the iron bars of scare quotes

1 Imagining Ancient Arabs: from: Imagining the Arabs
Abstract: The evidence about pre-Islamic Arabian populations emanates from two perspectives: (1) the writings of peoples from outside Arabia who, across the 1,500 years from the Assyrians in the ninth century BCE to Islam’s rise in the seventh century CE, recorded many stories about Arabians, and (2) voices from within the Arabian Peninsula itself, preserved in inscriptions from as early as the eighth century BCE. Both bodies of sources contain numerous and intriguing references to an array of ancient peoples whose names resemble ‘Arab’, and it may seem logical enough that Arab history can be written by synthesising the material, but,

Imagining and Reimagining the Arabs: from: Imagining the Arabs
Abstract: By unfastening Arab identity from conventional cultural stereotypes, Bedouinism and ancient pre-Islamic Arabian bloodlines, this book sought to reveal the complexities and changing nature of historic Arab identity. The book was intended as an invitation to begin rethinking Arabness afresh, and by highlighting the shortcomings inherent in the static, monolithic manner in which historical Arab communities have often been discussed, our analysis sought to reappraise historic Arabness as an ethnicity, tracking its evolution and contextualising its development with close attention to the sociopolitical and ‘cultural stuff’ factors that sustain ethnogenesis.

1 Introduction: from: Levinas, Ethics and Law
Abstract: The truest violence of law is not attributable to its errors, but to its essence. As a structure of meaning and a source of norms, framed through general and abstract standards, law has an especial, inevitable capacity to misrecognise ‘the other’ at the precise moment that the other is in most need of its justice. The significance of the other, upon which Levinas speaks with unparalleled philosophical authority, is instead personal, unique, singular, and fundamental in informing our understanding of ourselves, our desires and our duties. This book addresses law’s difficult task of responding meaningfully to the type of ethical

3 Can Law Be Ethical? from: Levinas, Ethics and Law
Abstract: Moving from the ethical to the legal (or, indeed, the political) is an irreducible problem within the Levinasian framework. This is not an internal failing of his thought. Were it not a problem, were there an easy solution to this relationship, Levinas’s ethics would of course lose all of their radical purchase. Ethics is, by definition, a unique relationship. It is the very singularity of subjectivity put into discord with the infinitely chasmic accusation by the other that constitutes not only ethics but the very movement of subjectivity. The question is how we move from the singular to the general,

5 The Law of the Same: from: Levinas, Ethics and Law
Abstract: Having provided an overview of the various ways we might read Levinas in relation to law, and the issues they raise, it is time to put forward the substantive argument of the book. This is the first of two concluding chapters making the argument that Levinas is best read as someone who offers us the possibility of thinking about ethics as perpetual critique of the law, rather than as a legal theorist. In other words, instead of using his work to think about how we inject ethics into law or unveil law’s ethical foundation, his philosophy provides resources to understand

3 On Property and the Philosophy of Poverty: from: Agamben and Radical Politics
Author(s) Bignall Simone
Abstract: Despite his interest in a non-sovereign and anomial politics, Agamben makes scant reference to thinkers in the anarchist tradition.¹ However, particularly with the turn to questions of government and economy in his latest works, he delves increasingly into themes at the heart of anarchist philosophy: the renunciation of property and the practice of poverty as a means of living outside of determination by law and state; the negative and positive moments of transformation variously associated with revolt or revolution; the ‘idea of communism’ and the figure of ‘the Ungovernable’. It is noteworthy how, at the point in The Time That

4 ‘Man Produces Universally’: from: Agamben and Radical Politics
Author(s) Whyte Jessica
Abstract: In The Kingdom of the Glory, in the midst of outlining what he sees as a specifically Christian account of governing as constant praxis, Giorgio Agamben turns his attention to a text that has preoccupied him for several decades: theEconomic and Philosophic Manuscriptsof Karl Marx. Beginning with his first book,The Man without Content, Agamben has repeatedly ignored Louis Althusser’s suggestion that ‘Marx’s early works do not have to be taken into account’¹ and turned to theParis Manuscriptsin the course of formulating his own accounts of praxis and of history.² Indeed, references to Marx in Agamben’s

5 Liturgical Labour: from: Agamben and Radical Politics
Author(s) McLoughlin Daniel
Abstract: Agamben has described contemporariness as ‘a singular relationship with one’s own time, which adheres to it and, at the same time, keeps a distance from it’.¹ He suggests that the way that one maintains such a disjunction to the present is by ‘perceiving the indices and signatures of the most archaic in the most modern’.² The archaic does not, however, simply mean that which is chronologically distant: it is what is ‘close to the origin’, an archethat remains an operative force within historical becoming.

9 Form-of-Life and Antagonism: from: Agamben and Radical Politics
Author(s) Smith Jason E.
Abstract: Before the publication in 2011 of his Altissima povertà. Regole monastiche e forme di vita, perhaps the most important concept in the work of Giorgio Agamben remained an enigma.¹ The notion of a ‘form-of-life’ has been crucial for the conceptual system Agamben has slowly articulated since the first volume of his long-runningHomo Sacerproject appeared in 1995. This concept, however, was nowhere developed in a thematic way, referred to only rarely and seemingly in passing. Yet a detailed examination of those instances where this term does appear would show that they are always placed at crucial sites, as if

Book Title: Border Crossing-Russian Literature into Film
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): White Frederick H.
Abstract: Applying the metaphor of the 'border crossing' from one temporal or spatial territory into another, Border Crossing: Russian Literature into Filmexamines the way classic Russian texts have been altered to suit new cinematic environments.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1bh2kpq

CHAPTER 2 Dostoevskii’s “White Nights”: from: Border Crossing
Author(s) Meyer Ronald
Abstract: Fedor Dostoevskii’s short story “White Nights” (1848), subtitled a “sentimental love story (from the notes of a dreamer),” has been adapted for the screen more than any other of his short works. A staggering twelve feature films have been mounted on the basis of this early short story, though only two Russian entries and Luchino Visconti’s Le notti bianche(1957) carry Dostoevskii’s title.² Perhaps even more surprising than the sheer number of adaptations, half of which were released in the twenty-first century, is the language distribution: Russian and Hindi tie for the most with three each, followed by two in

CHAPTER 4 Stealing the Scene: from: Border Crossing
Author(s) Orr S. Ceilidh
Abstract: Robert Bresson’s 1959 film Pickpocket, ostensibly based onCrime and Punishment, begins with the declaration, “This is not a detective story.”¹ And it is not. The titular thief, Michel (Martin LaSalle), confesses in the opening scene, so that viewers learn “whodunnit” before ever witnessing a crime. The only mystery left is motive: What drives Michel to steal, and to pick pockets, in particular? And how does it become so compulsive that he will drop everything, even romance, when a stranger with a handsome watch walks by? Studies of Bresson andPickpocketare full of references to the inscrutability of the

CHAPTER 7 A Slap in the Face of American Taste: from: Border Crossing
Author(s) White Frederick H.
Abstract: In 1915, the author and playwright Leonid Andreev debuted his play He Who Gets Slappedat the Moscow Art Theater. In the following years, this dramatic work about a vanquished intellectual-turned-circus-clown, more than any of his twenty other plays, achieved spectacular success among American audiences, first as a play in English translation, then when adapted for the silver screen, then as a novel and, finally, as an opera. Andreev had argued in his “Letters on the Theater” that cinema would become the place for action and spectacle, diminishing the popularity of the realist theater. Not surprisingly then, a love affair,

Introduction: from: In the Archive of Longing
Abstract: Interest in Susan Sontag has grown in recent years. As I complete this book, two new books on her have just come out: the first, an intimate portrait, the second, a biography translated from the German.¹ Not surprisingly, her life draws attention. It is a fascinating example of the formation of the public intellectual in modernity. With the publication of two volumes of her journals we have been given access to an extraordinary document of that formation.² The conflicting desires for knowledge and experience, which for Sontag the woman translated into a constant oscillation between the mind and the body,

Introduction from: Seamus Heaney
Abstract: Seamus Heaney’s 2013 poem, “On the Gift of a Fountain Pen,” provides an appropriate starting point for this critical introduction to his work since it encapsulates his central concern—the role of the writer. In pondering his vocation, Heaney has always worried about his obligation to others—not just readers, but also to the general public—and this poem vocalizes that worry ably. Moreover, he seems also to fear a drying-up of inspiration here. Drawing on John Keats’s “When I Have Fears that I May Cease to Be,” he opens by musing, “Now that your pen is in my hand

Chapter 1 Life and Contexts from: Seamus Heaney
Abstract: Seamus Heaney’s work vacillates restlessly between the demand for solitude by the artistic self and the lure of communal intimacy, a dialectic captured most memorably in his 1979 elegy “Casualty,” which begins by praising the solitude of a dead friend, an eel fisherman, moves to an appreciation of the Catholics murdered on Bloody Sunday, and then concludes in solitude again by recalling a fishing trip he took with the slain fisherman, Louis O’Neill. Somewhat surprisingly for one who “in the early 1970s … surely did identify with the Catholic minority,”¹ he rejects what he perceives as the “swaddling band” of

Chapter 1 About Time from: Lyric Cousins
Abstract: The region it’s passing through seems equally unchanged by the passage of time; though in fact

Chapter 3 Drawing the Line from: Lyric Cousins
Abstract: Igor Stravinsky’s Rite of Springopens with one of the most famous solos in the orchestral canon. In fact, it starts with just one note, itself instantly recognisable within the Western tradition: a single high C on the bassoon. This is of course a wind instrument and its reedy, wooden timbre evokes the wind, reeds and woods that make up the endless Russiantaiga(see Fig. 3.1).¹

Chapter 10 The Consolations of Tradition from: Lyric Cousins
Abstract: Since the millennium, certain trends in Anglophone poetry have echoed the ‘turn’ in Western art music away from what we might think of as mid-century ‘scholasticism’ towards such conventional musical rewards as readily detectable patterning, or euphony. Artistic credibility and a response by non-specialist audiences no longer appear inimical. It has once again become possible to develop serious original work using traditional verse forms such as the ballad (which we saw at work in Chapter 6), or musical tropes as familiar as the rising or falling scale on which Arvo Pärt’s famous Fratresis built.¹

Chapter 11 Radical Measures from: Lyric Cousins
Abstract: In recent years, the idea of ‘the poem’ has been pulled in polarising directions. In the last chapter, we began to see how an ideological debate is under way that echoes what’s taken place in Western art music since the middle of the twentieth century. This is not just a question of style. Poetic ‘sense’, already a complicated, unstable concept, is being challenged and transformed.

3 Is it Happening? from: From Violence to Speaking Out
Abstract: Let us begin with the following proposition from The Critique of Pure Reason: “We assert,” Kant says, “that the conditions of thepossibility of experiencein general are at the same time [sind zugleich] conditions of thepossibility of the objects of experience” (Kant 1998: 283, B197/A158, Kant’s italics [Heidegger 1997: 84, §24]).¹ We know that this proposition opened the way for the circular path of the Hegelian dialectic.² But, closer to our time, and cited so often across the twentieth century, Heidegger’s Kant book taught us how to deconstruct the Kantian correlation between the possibility of experience and the

5 Auto-Affection and Becoming: from: From Violence to Speaking Out
Abstract: As we pointed out in Chapter 1, globalization defines the epoch in which we are living right now. As we noted, the word “globalization” means that the earth has been or is trying to be enclosed within a globe. Enclosing the earth in a globe means that all the ways out have been closed, so that one species, the human, is able to dominate all the other species. What justifies, what gives us the right to dominate the animals? The answer to this question is well-known: humans believe they have the right to dominate because humans believe that they possess

Chapter 13 Desire and Pleasure from: Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Smith Daniel W.
Abstract: 2) In relation to Michel: since it allowed him to go beyond the duality of discursive formations and non-discursive formations, which was still present in The Archaeology of Knowledge, and to explain how the two types of formations are distributed or articulated segment by segment (without the one being reduced to the

Chapter 15 Biopower and Control from: Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Nail Thomas
Abstract: What is the relationship between Foucault’s concept of biopower and Deleuze’s concept of control? Despite the similarities between these two concepts, there is not a single scholarly article that solely thematizes this question, nor a comparative survey of the answers given so far. This essay aims to fill this lacuna. Despite the lack of a full-length interrogation of this question, scholars have taken up several different positions on the relationship between these two concepts. While some distinguish the two concepts based on the content of what they act on (biopower on life vs control on economics), others distinguish them based

Chapter 16 Two Concepts of Resistance: from: Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Smith Daniel W.
Abstract: In a letter Deleuze addressed to Foucault in 1977, shortly after the publication of the first volume on The History of Sexuality(and which has since been published under the title “Desire and Pleasure”), Deleuze laid out several distinctions between his own philosophical trajectory and Foucault’s, one of which concerns, precisely, the status of Foucault’s concept ofresistance. “It seems to me that Michel confronts a problem that does not have the same status for me,” Deleuze wrote.

4 Real Folds: from: Narrative and Becoming
Abstract: To date, House of Leaveshas overwhelmingly been read in light of its mediality, the question of technology, and digital culture at large. Apart from the oft-quoted pioneering articles by Brian W. Chanen, Mark B. N. Hansen, N. Katherine Hayles, and Jessica Pressman (Chanen 2007; Hansen 2004; Hayles 2002a; Pressman 2006), three out of five essays dealing withHouse of Leavesin the first book project exclusively devoted to the works of Danielewski read the novel through this lens (McCormick 2011; Evans 2011; Thomas 2011). Add to that another two essays fromRevolutionary Leaves(Aghoro 2012; Bilsky 2012), the second

Introduction from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Porter Robert
Abstract: It would appear that we know poststructuralism. It has long since become an uncontroversial feature of conference proceedings and a wide range of scholarly publications, almost to the point, in some circles at least, that not to mention it is seen as a dereliction of one’s academic duties. More often than not, across many disciplines in the humanities and social sciences, convenors of academic modules and programmes are obliged to have a week on poststructuralism, usually alongside feminism, toward the end of the lecture series. That it has a well-established set of criticisms that accompany it also gives poststructuralism an

Chapter 7 Schizoanalysis: from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Buchanan Ian
Abstract: There is no straightforward way to say what schizoanalysis is. The problem is not so much that the question is not answered by Deleuze and Guattari or that it is somehow unanswerable; rather the problem is that it has several answers. Unwilling to provide any kind of ‘formula’ or ‘model’ that would enable us to simply ‘do’ schizoanalysis as a tick-box exercise in which everything relates inexorably to one single factor (e.g. the family), which is what they thought psychoanalysis had become, Deleuze and Guattari observe a quite deliberate strategy of providing multiple answers to the questions their work raises.

Chapter 10 Foucault: from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Besley A. C. (Tina)
Abstract: Western philosophy has had a continuous engagement with the problem of subjectivity and with the self as a locus of both consciousness and experience – a question that is deemed to be open to understanding, analysis and philosophical reflection – ever since the first moments of institutional philosophy in Ancient Greece. The notion of the self has been an object of inquiry, a problem and a locus for posing questions concerning knowledge, action and ethics since Antiquity. Plato and Aristotle in different ways inquired of the self in terms that we understand today as personhood and personal identity, viewing the

Chapter 11 Derrida’s Language: from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Anderson Nicole
Abstract: On 9 May 1992, Barry Smith and eighteen cosignatories wrote a letter to the The Timesin an attempt to sway Cambridge University dons not to award Derrida an Honorary Degree. (It failed. The vote was 336 to 204 in favour of Derrida.) This event became known as the ‘Cambridge Affair’. In this letter Barry Smith and company claim that Derrida’s writing ‘does not meet with accepted standards of clarity and rigour … his works employ a written style that defies comprehension … [and] consist in no small part of elaborate jokes and puns “logical phallusies” [sic] and the like’.

Chapter 12 Hélène Cixous and the Play of Language from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Puri Tara
Abstract: For Hélène Cixous, words are powerful, mellifluous things capable not only of evoking memories and fantasies, but creating the world and the self. Her writing constantly plays with language, breaking it up and recomposing it, widening its gaps, showing its fractures, filling it up with puns, and inventing new portmanteau words. It is this irrepressible energy that makes so much of her writing epiphanic in its effect. Her formulation of écriture féminine, as articulated inThe Newly Born Womanand ‘The laugh of the Medusa’, has everything to do with the potentiality that resides in words.

Chapter 14 Photography and Poststructuralism: from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Edge Sarah
Abstract: In his final text Camera Lucida, first published in 1970, Roland Barthes gave his closing views on how photographs should be approached as a signifying system. ‘The important thing’, he proposes, ‘is that the photograph possesses an evidential force, and that its testimony bears not on the object but on the time. From a phenomenological viewpoint, in the photograph, the power of authentication exceeds the power of representation’ (Barthes 1984: 88–9). This final reflection by Barthes signposts the peculiarity of the photographic system which is made up of two signs, the indexical and the iconic; one belonging to the

Chapter 16 The Museum of Now from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Cutler Anna
Abstract: There is an ongoing debate in the museums sector about what it means to be a museum in the twenty-first century. This pursuit of meaning is not new to the discipline. Indeed there is a wealth of literature that explores the museum’s shifting social and cultural role since its emergence in the eighteenth century (Bennett 1985). Many narratives follow the development of the museum from private collections for the few, into their current status as public institutions for the many (with all the contention that this might imply). With such narratives to hand, institutions work from a foundation of experience

Chapter 21 The Receptions of Poststructuralism from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Bowman Paul
Abstract: One of the most famous figures of poststructuralism, Jacques Derrida, died on 8 October 2004. Over the following days, weeks and months, newspapers and other media the world over contained reactions, responses, comments and obituaries to him. Many of these were surprisingly hostile; they were often irreverent and disrespectful; and often also mocking, joking and scornful. Some were starkly abusive and aggressive. In fact, many obituaries, reactions and responses to the news of Derrida’s death attacked or slandered not only his work but also cast aspersions on his character and personality. A large proportion made crass jokes about whether we

Chapter 22 From Liberation Theory to Postcolonial Theory: from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Rooney Caroline
Abstract: This chapter aims to address the ways in which the transition from liberation theory to postcolonial theory entails a historical intellectual encounter with poststructuralism, one that may be termed ‘the poststructuralist turn’. However, in broaching this question, the intention is not to propose that postcolonial theory is determined by its poststructuralist influences in a unilateral manner. That this constitutes a particular area of contention becomes apparent in a context where seminal postcolonial theorists attract attention in the light of their being highly influenced by European theory. For instance, Bart Moore-Gilbert, in discussing Homi Bhabha’s The Location of Culturestates that

Book Title: Chinese Philosophy A–Z- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Mou Bo
Abstract: Chinese Philosophy A-Zstresses philosophical relevance in choosing entries while paying due attention to historical links between relevant ideas and movements of thought. The volume also shows how some of the central ideas under discussion contribute to the philosophical enterprise as a whole. The book is aimed at students, teachers of philosophy, and educated non-specialists who are interested in Chinese philosophy, particularly those readers new to Chinese philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g09wdc

Philosophy of Mathematics from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Avigad Jeremy
Abstract: The philosophy of mathematics plays an important role in analytic philosophy, both as a subject of inquiry in its own right, and as an important landmark in the broader philosophical landscape. Mathematical knowledge has long been regarded as a paradigm of human knowledge with truths that are both necessary and certain, so giving an account of mathematical knowledge is an important part of epistemology. Mathematical objects like numbers and sets are archetypical examples of abstracta, since we treat such objects in our discourse as though they are independent of time and space; finding a place for such objects in a

Philosophy of Logic from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Marion Mathieu
Abstract: Although it has sometimes been described since Frege as the pursuit of truth (Quine 1982: 1), logic is in fact the study

Feminism from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Donovan Josephine
Abstract: The feminist engagement with the analytic tradition in the twentieth century was for the most part a contentious one. Beginning in the early 1970s – when feminist academics began applying propositions formulated in the women’s liberation political movement of the late 1960s and early 1970s to their respective intellectual fields, feminist philosophers at first used analytic methodologies and assumptions to examine feminist questions. This was not surprising, given that the dominant philosophical tradition in academic departments at the time was the analytic and that these (mostly women) philosophers had been trained in the analytic tradition. Soon, however – by the

Aesthetics from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Schellekens Elisabeth
Abstract: The expression ‘Analytic Aesthetics,’ generally used to refer to Philosophical Aesthetics as pursued in the Anglo-American academic world since the middle of the twentieth century, is best understood in terms of its emphasis on conceptual analysis. The rise of the discipline is clearly related to the widespread championing of cognitive and linguistic causes that distinguishes the broader framework of Analytic Philosophy, and should not in the first instance be thought of as unveiling a hitherto buried treasure of questions and concerns. The novelty of Analytic Aesthetics had rather to do with the approach used to tackle issues about aesthetic value

Continental Themes in Analytic Philosophy from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Carman Taylor
Abstract: To begin with, whereas the term ‘analytic’ is meant to describe a style or method of inquiry, ‘Continental’ refers to a large, rather vaguely defined landmass in Europe; contrasting the two seems to involve a category mistake. Of course, neither term can be taken literally: there is no single ‘analytical’ method in philosophy, just as ‘Continental’ philosophers

Life: from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Lawlor Leonard
Abstract: Life by itself does not constitute a ‘twentieth-century philosophy.’ But it amounted to a constant theme throughout the twentieth century since European philosophers in particular continuously appropriate and transform the concept of life. So, after the nineteenth-century philosophies of vitalism and Lebensphilosophie, two major philosophical movements centering on the concept of life – Bergsonism and Husserlian phenomenology – dominated European philosophy up to the end of the 1920s. However, in 1927, Heidegger published hisBeing and Time. Heidegger himself told us thatBeing and Timewas written out of the experience of the ‘forgetfulness of being’ in Western metaphysics (Heidegger

Aesthetics from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Davey Nicholas
Abstract: Whitehead described Western philosophy as a footnote to Plato’s. As recent philosophical tradition has shown, some footnotes have established texts of their own. Aesthetics is one such footnote. Whereas Plato banished aesthetics to the realm of doxa, Continental philosophy stands witness since the late nineteenth century to a renaissance of aesthetic thought. Now, not only has the discipline achieved a philosophical autonomy but aesthetics has come to haunt those philosophies that marginalize the apparent and the subjective. If earlier forms of aesthetics feted order, recent forms of twentieth-century Continental philosophy are attracted to the sublime and its disruptive power. The

Indian Philosophy from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Dalvi Rohit
Abstract: At least since Hegel, Indian thought has been excluded from the proper domain of philosophy. Despite the vigorous affirmation by the German Romantics of the value of Sanskrit poetry and literature, and the celebration by philologists like Max Mueller of the cultural and linguistic proximity of Sanskritic civilization to Europe, the European philosophical tradition, with perhaps the exception of Schopenhauer, has rejected the idea of an Indian ‘philosophy.’ Classical Indian ‘philosophy’ was not regarded as at par, in terms of rigor and rationality, with the products of European civilization. Indian thinking was devalued as being thoroughly religious in character or

Introduction from: Aesthetics A–Z
Author(s) Guter Eran
Abstract: Aesthetics is one of the most intellectually stimulating and enriching fields of philosophical inquiry. This statement may sound a bit strange to anyone who is easily impressed by the longevity of ancient metaphysical problems or by the cutting-edge verve of recent empirically informed debates in the theory of consciousness, or by the applicative promise and popular demand of business ethics, and so tends to dismiss aesthetics as peripheral to philosophy. Yet, as Frank Sibley, one of the important early analytic aestheticians of the twentieth century, has observed, aestheticians encounter ranges of concepts wider than and inevitably inclusive of those studied

Introduction: from: The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Stone Alison
Abstract: Nineteenth-century philosophy can be broadly characterised by several themes: the conflict between metaphysics and religious faith on the one hand and the empirical sciences on the other; a new focus on history, progress and evolution; new ideas of individuality, society and revolution; and ever-increasing concerns about nihilism.¹ This volume provides a re-examination of nineteenth-century philosophy in terms of these and other themes distinctive of the period.

3 The Question of Romanticism from: The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Welchman Alistair
Abstract: ‘Romanticism’ is one of the more hotly contested terms in the history of ideas. There is a singular lack of consensus as to its meaning, unity and historical extension and many attempts to fix the category of Romanticism very quickly become blurry. In his Conversations with Eckermann, Goethe says that the concept of Romanticism ‘is now spread over the whole world and occasions so many quarrels and divisions’ (Goethe [1836] 1984: 297) and this situation has not rectified itself in the 180 years since then. But the term was poorly defined from the start. Friedrich Schlegel, frequently claimed as the

5 Idealism and Naturalism in the Nineteenth Century from: The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Gardner Sebastian
Abstract: The nineteenth century may be regarded as comprising the first chapter in the story, as it must appear to us now, of idealism’s long-term decline and of the eventual ascent within the analytic tradition of a confident and sophisticated naturalism.¹ The chief landmarks of both developments are fairly clear. The former begins with Kant’s Critical Philosophy and the great systems of Fichte, Schelling and Hegel, a rich legacy which is re-explored continuously over the course of the century and provides the basis for myriad novel positions, leading in the final quarter of the nineteenth century to a renaissance of absolute

6 Darwinism and Philosophy in the Nineteenth Century: from: The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Moore Gregory
Abstract: More than twenty years before the publication of The Origin of Species, Charles Darwin was already certain that his embryonic hypothesis would have far-reaching consequences and not just in biology. ‘My theory’, he wrote in 1837, ‘would give zest to recent and fossil comparative anatomy; it would lead to the study of instinct, heredity and mind-heredity, [the] whole [of] metaphysics’ (Darwin 1887: 1: 370). By emphasising mutability and struggle instead of stability and harmony, by banishing the last intellectually respectable vestiges of supernaturalism, by asserting a genealogical continuity between humanity and the rest of the animal kingdom that shone light

14 Theory and Practice of Revolution in the Nineteenth Century from: The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Blackledge Paul
Abstract: The word ‘revolution’ was first used in an unmistakably modern sense in the eighteenth century to describe the American and French Revolutions. And although it had begun to gravitate towards something like this modern meaning in England in the wake of her seventeenth-century revolutions (Williams 1976; Hill 1991; Hobsbawm 1962: 74–5), John Dunn is right that ‘in a few short months, in the year of 1789, the people of France set their stamp ineffaceably on a political idea which has loomed over the history of the world ever since’ (Dunn 2008: 17). In fact, as Krishan Kumar points out,

Book Title: Rancière and Film- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Bowman Paul
Abstract: Contributors includeNico Baumbach, Columbia UniversityRey Chow, Duke UniversityBram Ieven, Utrecht UniversityMónica Lopez Lerma, Helsinki UniversityPatricia MacCormack, University of East AngliaRichard Stamp, Bath Spa UniversityJames Steintrager, University of California, Irvine
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b27n

1 Rancière and the Disciplines: from: Rancière and Film
Author(s) Bowman Paul
Abstract: The question of the relation ‘Rancière and film’quietly presupposes another relation: ‘Rancière and filmstudies’. This leads to a bifurcation: what is the character, status and significance of Rancière’s work onfilm, and – quietly – therefore also, the character, status and significance of Rancière’s work in relation to the discipline or disciplines of filmstudies? I say ‘disciplines’ because film studies both is and is notonediscipline. No discipline is univocal. No discipline is singular – other than in the eyes, or the fantasy, of the most reductive, taxonomical and exterior gaze – a gaze from outside of the field in

4 The Spectator without Qualities from: Rancière and Film
Author(s) Geil Abraham
Abstract: Jacques Rancière’s book The Emancipated Spectatormarks his first sustained discussion of spectatorship (Rancière 2008b; 2009a).¹ This might seem a surprisingly late addition to Rancière’s project of rethinking the conjunction of art and politics. From the disciplinary perspective of Anglo-American film studies, it is a belated intervention indeed. For the question of the spectator is the terrain upon which many of the most significant disciplinary battles over the politics of film theory have been waged over the past three decades. In that time, critical approaches to spectators have proliferated: feminist revisions of psychoanalysis; cultural studies models of differentially ‘decoding’ viewers;

Book Title: Research Methods for Cultural Studies- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Pickering Michael
Abstract: Drawing on experience, and studying how narratives make sense of experience.Investigating production processes in the cultural industries, and the consumption and assimilation of cultural products by audiences and fans.Taking both quantitative and qualitative approaches to the study of cultural life.Analysing visual images and both spoken and written forms of discourse.Exploring cultural memory and historical representation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b2nv

CHAPTER 4 Investigating Cultural Consumers from: Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Meyer Anneke
Abstract: Consumption in its many forms is not a new phenomenon (Storey 1999), but since the end of the Second World War, consumption in industrialised countries has proliferated to such an extent that the phrase ‘consumer society’ was coined. Arguably, culturalconsumption has especially increased because technological advances have led to the development and spread of new forms of media and information and communication technologies (ICTs). These have in turn generated new forms of cultural texts and made cultural consumption more accessible. The term ‘cultural consumer’ refers to those who consume cultural texts or engage in cultural practices involving consumption. Key

CHAPTER 8 Analysing Discourse from: Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Barker Martin
Abstract: The seemingly inexorable rise of the concept of ‘discourse’ has made it almost unavoidable for cultural studies researchers, particularly since its invitation to theorise culture as ‘like a language’ coincides with so many impulses within our field. But not without substantial costs. Looking at the cultural studies field from my angle as an audience researcher, some troubling features within discourse work come into view. For all the multiplicity of approaches, and the attendant variations in attached modes of ‘discourse analysis’, there are some powerful unifying features in ‘discourse talk’; and these features presume the very thingsthat as an audience

CHAPTER 9 Engaging with Memory from: Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Keightley Emily
Abstract: Memory has enjoyed a well charted resurgence in the postwar period in cultural production, social life and academic study (see Huyssen 2000; Misztal 2003; Radstone 2000). The social dislocations that occurred in the aftermath of the world wars, and the radical trauma of the Holocaust, threw into sharp relief issues of remembrance and commemoration (Wolf 2004; Margalit 20002). In more recent years, a growing disillusionment with the rhetoric of progress which has been so central to modernity has required a reconsideration of pasts that had been hurriedly discarded. At this historical juncture memory is becoming an increasingly key feature of

5 The Derridean model of Difference: from: François Laruelle’s Philosophies of Difference
Abstract: Derrida is the thinker who carries philosophical decision to the limit of aporetic dislocation pure and simple and who yet, through the virtuosity of the endangered tightrope-walker, undertakes to seize decision again one last time and to maintain its possibility and truth, refusing to take the final step.¹

CHAPTER FIVE Equivalence: from: Poetic Language
Abstract: Poetry can be a reflection upon what it is to be the kind of being that uses language, a reflection upon how humanity is characterised by being linguistic. This reflection, in the form it takes in several of the poems read in this book, is critical, in as much as it emanates from a crisis, a deeply unnerving realisation about the nature of being a language-using being. This unnerving realisation, I suggest, is the realisation that the language people use, and which can feel to its users so deeply intertwined with the natures of the objects it refers to, the

CHAPTER SEVEN Spirit: from: Poetic Language
Abstract: The tradition I sketched in the run-up to my discussion of ‘The Idea of Order at Key West’, that of identifying a spark or charge in poetic language, is sometimes manifested in psychologistic forms in the twentieth century: the energy expressing itself in poetic language is not that of a divine ordering spirit, nor the character of a people, nor a latent ‘chemical’ power in the language itself, but in the psyche of the poet concerned. The surrealist and poet André Breton thought this way. Adopting the language of the poet-critic Pierre Reverdy, who said that one ‘creates … a

CHAPTER ELEVEN Selection: from: Poetic Language
Abstract: My main concerns in this chapter are the restrictions placed upon the selection of words that make up poems, whether these restrictions are more personal or social (if that distinction makes sense), and how selection for poems relates to selectional procedures in language more generally. In relation to this last topic I consider selection in the work of the generative linguist Noam Chomsky. Whilst generative grammar and modern logic understand selection as an operation pertaining to particular terms in an individual’s lexicon, following, or refusing to follow, certain rules, other theorists of literary language have focused on the selection of

CHAPTER 2 Archival Methods from: Research Methods for English Studies
Author(s) Steedman Carolyn
Abstract: Archives and ‘the archive’ now have a wider range of meanings and potential meanings attached to them than at any point since the inauguration of European and North American state archives in the early nineteenth century.¹ There is, for a start, Jacques Derrida’s compelling philosophy of the archive in Mal d’archive(Archive Fever, 1995) in which thearkeof the Greek city state is named as the place where things begin, where power originates, with power’s workings inextricably and for all time bound up with the authority of beginnings, origins, starting points.² Those who make their way throughArchive Fever

CHAPTER 3 Auto/biography as a Research Method from: Research Methods for English Studies
Author(s) Evans Mary
Abstract: The first question that should engage our attention is that of why we wish to do research. The issue is in no sense straightforward, since ‘doing research’ is a common mantra of academic life, and is, of course, an activity in which we are all expected to partake. Not‘doing research’ is nowadays an unacceptable position for academics; to be described as ‘not research active’ implies (and indeed invokes) isolation in the distant steppes of the academic world, in which the only possible redemptive activity is teaching undergraduates. So let us not assume that ‘doing research’ is always, and simply,

CHAPTER 9 Textual Analysis as a Research Method from: Research Methods for English Studies
Author(s) Belsey Catherine
Abstract: How important is textual analysis in research? What is it? How is it done? And what difference does it make? My contention will be that textual analysis is indispensable to research in cultural criticism, where cultural criticism includes English, cultural history and cultural studies, as well as any other discipline that focuses on texts, or seeks to understand the inscription of culture in its artefacts. And since textual analysis is in the end empirical, I shall set out to exemplify my methodological account with a single instance. The project is to imagine that Titian’s painting of Tarquin and Lucretiaconstitutes

CHAPTER 12 English Research Methods and the Digital Humanities from: Research Methods for English Studies
Author(s) Deegan Marilyn
Abstract: Since the first version of this volume appeared, much has changed in the uses of digital methods in the humanities, and what was previously known variously as humanities computing, digital scholarship, or ICT in the humanities has been broadly subsumed under the newer term, digital humanities. What digital humanities actually is has been the subject of intense discussion since it was pronounced as ‘the next big thing’ by William Pannapacker at the 2009 MLA conference, where ‘digital humanists (as they are often called) stole the spotlight’.²,³ Since then, the number of sessions at the MLA that treat of digital humanities

Book Title: The Lyotard Dictionary- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Sim Stuart
Abstract: Drawing on a multidisciplinary team of experts, the 168 entries in The Lyotard Dictionary explain all of his main concepts, contextualising these within his work as a whole and relating him to his contemporaries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b5xf

Book Title: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy-From Pre-history to Future Possibilities
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Stockwell Stephen
Abstract: Anti-Apartheid in South Africa o 'Rose Revolution' in Georgia o Iraq o Bolivia o Burma o Chinese Local Democratisation o Islam since 9/11
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b6rb

Chapter 1 Prehistory from: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Boehm Christopher
Abstract: Democracy is a political system that allows the will of the rank and file to be expressed in arriving at and executing policies that affect the group. A prerequisite for this sharing of power is a set of political institutions that prevent those in higher positions from increasing their power in ways that encroach on the autonomy of those below them; and while we think of these checks and balances mainly in the context of constitutional democracies, they were present less formally in egalitarian agricultural tribes (Fried 1967) and in egalitarian hunting bands (Glassman 1986). Because some obvious parallels were

Chapter 3 Ancient India from: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Muhlberger Steven
Abstract: In the period before CE 400, ancient India was home to a variety of self-governing polities using quasi-democratic institutions comparable with those of the Greek city-states of the same era. Indeed, Greek and Roman historians, relying on the reports of Greek visitors, did not hesitate to say that the India they knew was largely democratic. But although the evidence has been carefully analysed and the existence of a multitude of republics has long been established, these republics and the political culture that they represent are little known to anyone but specialists. The purpose of this chapter is to set forth

Chapter 9 Islam from: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Sadiki Larbi
Abstract: Nothing is more perilous than trying to wed Islam and democracy, or engaging in endless discussions on Islam’s compatibility with democracy via a framework designed within the Western episteme. This episteme assumes that Islam and democracy are two distinct and autonomous systems and, in its worst iterations, it asserts that they are antithetical to one another. Since the European Enlightenment, the scholarly discussion of Islam and democracy has been one-sided. Western intellectuals condemn religion to the margins and Enlightenment’s singular practice of rationality denounces religious foundationalism. Fixity, singularity and determinacy have all been attributed to religion, especially Islam, and cited

Chapter 20 Australasia from: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Rowse Tim
Abstract: ‘Democracy’ was among their colonising projects.

Chapter 23 1848: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Rapport Mike
Abstract: Between February and April 1848, the conservative order which had dominated Europe since the fall of Napoleon in 1815 was felled by the hammer-blows of revolution across the continent. The revolutions swept liberal governments to power, tasked with forging a new political order based on the principles of civil rights and parliamentary government. By the end of 1849, all the revolutions had collapsed and the short and violent European experiment in liberal (and, in some countries, democratic) politics was over. For the history of democracy, the fascination of 1848 lies in the variety of democratic forms that emerged in such

Chapter 24 1919: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Fischer Conan
Abstract: If a name can be attached to the Treaty of Versailles and the wider Paris Peace Settlement, it is that of the United States President, Woodrow Wilson. Of all the Allied leaders, it was Wilson who caught the international popular imagination, and it was Wilson who appeared to offer the defeated Germans and their allies the best prospects for a tolerable peace within a reformed global order. In December 1918, he arrived in France for the peace conference to a hero’s welcome and possessing an aura of moral authority to which many British and French delegates initially willingly deferred. Wilson

Chapter 25 1945: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Inoguchi Takashi
Abstract: This chapter examines the undertaking of the United States to bring democracy to Japan between 1941 and 1952 during both the Pacific War and the American occupation of Japan. It explores the extent to which the United States was successful in its effort to democratise Japan. The United States was determined that the wartime government of Japan must be destroyed by repeated military campaigns. Step by step, the United States helped to craft a small, conservative, pro-American force in Japan into a majority political party, and, in doing so, successfully brought democracy to the island nation. Before discussing US democracy

Chapter 26 1989: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Volten Peter M. E.
Abstract: The transitions to democracy in Eastern and Central Europe from 1989 onwards not only came as a big surprise both inside and outside the region, they were also characterised by incredible speed and by a radical challenge to the prevailing political cultures during the pressing phase of consolidation. The two companion concepts and processes – transition and consolidation of democratic transformation – are clearly culture-bound and dependent on the historical and present context of the country or region involved. This was particularly the case in Central Europe, where cultural and contextual confusion sometimes led to misunderstanding and friction. Westerners who showed their

Chapter 28 Women’s Suffrage from: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Sowerwine Charles
Abstract: Historians have often treated the introduction of women’s suffrage as a narrative of linear progress. In this view, women’s exclusion from the suffrage resulted from ageold prejudices, which, gradually and inevitably, gave way to modern egalitarian ideas. Recent scholarship, however, has complicated this story by emphasising the intractability of the issue. Enlightenment and republican discourse talked in universal terms, but constructed the citizen as public man in opposition to private woman, creating a feminine ‘other’ in order to create a ‘universal’, which was in fact gendered, masculine (Sowerwine 2010: 19). The idea of equal rights and the subordination

Chapter 29 Socialism, Communism, Anarchism from: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Hindess Barry
Abstract: This chapter examines important divisions in the history of socialism, focusing on the period before the schism between communists and others that followed the First World War and the subsequent revolutions in Russia (1917) and Germany (1918–1919). It considers divisions between anarchist and Marxist socialism (or, as the anarchist, Michael Bakunin framed it: between revolutionary socialism and communism (Bakunin 1950)); and, within European social democracy, the divisions over the projects of a peaceful, democratic road to socialism and the ‘dictatorship of the proletariat’.

Introduction from: Form and Object
Abstract: A kind of ‘thingly’ contamination of the present was brought about through the division of labour, the industrialisation of production, the processing of information, the specialisation of the knowledge of things, and above all the desubstantialisation of these things. In Western philosophical traditions, things were often ordered according to essences, substrata, qualities, predicates, quidditasandquodditas, being and beings. Precluding anything from being equally ‘something’, neither more nor less than any other thing, thus becomes a rather delicate task. We live in this world of things, where a cutting

Part III Being and Comprehending from: Form and Object
Abstract: Being nothing is still being something(since nothing is something, even if it is only a word, a false concept, or the union between a before-thing, the negative contemporaneous with a thing, and the absence following the thing).

Chapter III Time from: Form and Object
Abstract: Since at least Saint Augustine,¹ understanding time from the present only leads to confusion. The past is not, since it is no longer present; the future is not, since it is not yet present; and the present is only insofar as it slips by and is already no more, since its being is to become. Augustinian confusion essentially comes from the desire to define the present as presence (to the mind), and presence as being or as existence. The present is what is present, and what is present

Chapter IX Culture from: Form and Object
Abstract: In Beyond Nature and Culture,¹ Philippe Descola claims that the idea of ‘culture’ arose from a tension between at least two of the 164 meanings of the term catalogued by Alfred Kroeber and Clyde Kluckhorn.² Culture, in the singular, is defined as a distinctive characteristic of humanity, in a sense close to ‘civilisation’. Cultures, in the plural, are defined as a plurality of human modes of organisation. In 1871, Edward Burnett Tylor stated that: Culture or Civilisation, taken in its wide ethnographic sense, is that complex whole, which includes knowledge, belief, art, morals, law, custom, and any other capabilities and

Chapter X History from: Form and Object
Abstract: The problem of universal history does not result from the possibility of organising the universe in time, but rather from considering time as a universe. How is it possible to grasp time – structured by the present (maximal presence), the past (weakening of presence), and the future (maximal absence) – as a cumulative order of all past instants, from the most remote to the most present? We raised this question in Chapter III of this book. Universal history inscribes objects and events in an order of comprehension, which leads to the present and points towards the future. The cultural structuring of time

Chapter XI Economy of Objects from: Form and Object
Abstract: Utilitarianism was a minority position in nineteenth-century English philosophy. After many twists and turns, it gradually spread across all branches of modern knowledge: economics, animal ethics, morality, political science, and law. This ‘consequentialist’ moral theory focuses on an action’s consequences, and not on an action’s intention or intrinsic value. The theory recommends acting so that every being’s well-being increases. It is not egoistic (since it does not

Chapter XV Ages of Life from: Form and Object
Abstract: ‘Ages of life’ are the primary objects that an individuated life comprehends, itself comprehended in classes and in genders. Today, among these ages, one in particular captivates, since it seems to be at the centre of ages, the heart of life, the object in the very middle of becoming: adolescence.

3 Clôtural Readings I: from: The Ethics of Deconstruction
Abstract: ‘Bois’ – ‘drink’; understood verbally, Derrida’s final word articulates an imperative, it places the reader under obligation. It is an imperative written without a point of exclamation in the intimacy of the second person singular. It is not directed from a position of height to an anonymous multitude; it is not the impersonal ‘Buvons!’ or ‘Buvez!’, which, in a spirit of exclamation and camaraderie, commands others to join in a toast or partake in a symposium. The imperative ‘Bois’ does not call

4 Clôtural Readings II: from: The Ethics of Deconstruction
Abstract: In this chapter, I follow the path of a dislocation. When Levinas reads Derrida, he renounces the ‘ridiculous ambition of “improving”’ ( NP89) a true philosopher. Levinas is content to cross Derrida’s path in order to engage him in a philosophical encounter. I shall report this encounter by following the reading that Levinas gives of Derrida, a reading which, while continually transgressing the order of commentary, remains faithful, I believe, to the ultimate ethical orientation of the thinking under discussion. At stake here is the perverse fidelity of a dislocation in the act of reading.

Chapter 4 Deleuze and the Micropolitics of Desire from: Immanence and Micropolitics
Abstract: ‘Desire’ is an undoubtedly slippery concept, and one that seems constantly weighed down, as it were, by metaphysical, essentialist and discursive baggage. As we saw in the last chapter, it was for this reason that Foucault felt uncomfortable with Deleuze’s use of desire, albeit subverted. A number of interpreters – Žižek chief among them – have since made this the basis of their critique of Deleuze and the micropolitics of immanence. It is essentially argued that by virtue of retaining desire as a primordial ‘micro’ essence or pre-social multiplicity, Deleuze ends up viewing power as a negative force concomitant with the macro

Chapter 4 SYSTEMIC EVIL AND THE LIMITS OF PLURALISM from: Evil in Contemporary Political Theory
Author(s) Haddock Bruce
Abstract: Contemporary political theory has never been comfortable with the idea of evil. Indeed, the gradual, sporadic, but nevertheless incomplete secularisation of political discourse since the Renaissance has made the conceptualisation of absolute value deeply problematic. One response, dominant in the liberal tradition, is simply to deny that politics is the realm of absolute value at all. The pragmatic adjustment of competing interests in a scheme of social co-operation invites, at the very least, a moderation of tone. And increasing empirical awareness of the diversity of different schemes of (merely political) co-operation has made us (rightly) guarded in the language we

Chapter 6 EVIL IN CONTEMPORARY INTERNATIONAL POLITICAL THEORY: from: Evil in Contemporary Political Theory
Author(s) Sutch Peter
Abstract: If there is one branch of contemporary political theory that has many concrete examples of ‘evil’ as its subject matter, it is international political theory. Indeed, the word has made a spectacular return to international political discourse since 9/11. In this chapter I suggest a novel approach to theorising ‘evil’ in international political theory. It is an approach that diverges from much of the established (and very useful) commentary that has explored the concept as it emerges in the rhetoric of political leaders on both sides of the war on terror. I think that dealing with evil in that context

3 SHAKESPEARE AND THE NOVEL from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Novy Marianne
Abstract: In her essay “Shakespeare in Iceland”, Jane Smiley writes, “I wanted to communicate the ways I found the conventional readings of King Lear frustrating and wrong . . . My intention was to stick as closely to the plot as I could, given a few caveats” (Smiley, 1999, 160, 171). So she imagined parallels to the events of King Lear occurring on a farm in the American Midwest in the 1970s as she transformed the play into a novel narrated by Ginny, the oldest daughter. Ginny’s behaviour in some ways resembles Goneril’s, but since she explains it from her own

5 SHAKESPEARE ANTHOLOGIZED from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Rumbold Kate
Abstract: In the twenty-first century, “Shakespeare” is not only an English cultural icon but shares some of the characteristics of a powerful global brand. This chapter shows the surprising but important role that the many books of quotations and extracts from Shakespeare’s works, published from within his own lifetime to the present day, have played in establishing that status. It argues that these anthologies have not simply reflected Shakespeare’s growing status, but actively helped to construct it. The seemingly inherent qualities for which Shakespeare is now admired – the beauty of his language, his wise understanding of human nature, his Englishness – are

8 SHAKESPEARE AND OPERA from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Streete Adrian
Abstract: For the nineteenth-century French composer, Hector Berlioz, Shakespeare offered more than artistic inspiration. In fact, the playwright and his works acted as a prism through which the composer understood and rationalized his personal and professional successes and failures, indeed his very identity. Berlioz first discovered Shakespeare in 1827, an event he describes in his Memoires (1870) with typically Romantic effusion: “This sudden and unexpected revelation of Shakespeare overwhelmed me. The lightening flash of his genius revealed the whole heaven of art to me, illuminating its remotest depths in a single flash” (Berlioz, 1932, 66; see Schmidgall, 1990, 272–9; Cairns,

10 SHAKESPEARE AND MUSICAL THEATRE from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Teague Fran
Abstract: Musical theatre is found world-wide, often with national inflections. Whether one considers a satyr play, opera, zarzuela, or Broadway show, that work is clearly an instance of musical theatre. Given the frequency with which songs occur, Shakespeare’s plays are themselves instances of musical theatre, but in this chapter I shall be focusing on one narrow branch of musical theatre, the sort of show that is sometimes called the Broadway musical (no Verdi or Elvis Costello here). A few such musicals have grown from Shakespeare’s plays, with the best-known instances being The Boys from Syracuse, West Side Story and Kiss Me,

11 SHAKESPEARE, BALLET AND DANCE from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Edgecombe Rodney Stenning
Abstract: When in Much Ado About Nothing Beatrice claims “there was a star danced, and under that [she] was born” (2.1.293– 4), our immediate sense is of energy and mobile spontaneity. But for Shakespeare’s audience, of course, any illusions of free, wilful movement would have been contained and centred by the structural geometry of the Ptolemaic system. Much the same tension subsists within the art of ballet, which is nothing if not rigorous and enclosing, however much its protagonists seem to move without a care in the world. Frederick Ashton studied Euclid before he began choreographing his Scènes de Ballet, and

13 SHAKESPEARE AND DRAMA from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Munro Lucy
Abstract: At the end of Shakespeare’s The Taming of the Shrew, a triumphant Petruccio declares, “Why, there’s a wench! Come on, and kiss me, Kate!” (5.2.184), underlining through his demand the domination over Katherine Minola that he has been asserting since their first meeting, when he told her, “We will have rings, and things, and fine array, / And kiss me, Kate, we will be married o’ Sunday” (2.1.315–16). Within twenty years, however, Petruccio’s dominance was to be undermined and Shakespeare’s narrative reshaped in a new play by John Fletcher, The Woman’s Prize or The Tamer Tamed. Fletcher’s play resurrects

15 SHAKESPEARE AND THE RESTORATION AND EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY STAGE from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Ritchie Fiona
Abstract: In 1679 John Dryden wrote of the challenges he found in adapting Shakespeare in terms that might surprise a modern reader. In remodelling Troilus and Cressida, Dryden said he “undertook to remove that heap of Rubbish, under which many excellent thoughts lay wholly bury’d”. Similarly, in 1681 Nahum Tate described Shakespeare’s King Lear as “a Heap of Jewels, unstrung and unpolisht; yet . . . dazling in their Disorder” (Clark, 1997, 295). The Restoration theatre did not have the same reverence towards Shakespeare’s works that we do today; indeed, perhaps the most surprising aspect of the performance of Shakespeare on

17 SHAKESPEARE AND THE MODERN STAGE from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Carson Christie
Abstract: In addressing Shakespeare on stage in the twentieth and twenty-first centuries I face the two opposing dangers of providing too much coherence, on the one hand, and too little, on the other. It seems sensible therefore to try to trace three narrative strands that have largely determined our current vision of events, outlining the engagement with a Shakespeare who, in his theatrical manifestations, has become subject to a bewildering spectrum of new interpretive practices. Rather than an exhaustive account of Shakespeare on stage during these two centuries, this essay will try to connect, question and extend existing partial pictures of

23 SHAKESPEARE, SCULPTURE AND THE MATERIAL ARTS from: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Engler Balz
Abstract: Sculptures, traditionally three-dimensional representations of human beings, have been popular in the history of Shakespeare reception. They usually show the writer himself, occasionally certain figures from his plays, and they do so in different sizes, from larger-than life to miniature knick-knacks, and in different materials, from marble and bronze to china and even Welsh coal. The knick-knack has been popular since the eighteenth century, in the shape of small statues, thimbles, wine-stoppers, teapots, and so on as they can be found today in Stratford souvenir shops; Batman, of course, used a switch hidden in a Shakespeare bust to open the

Book Title: Texts-Contemporary Cultural Texts and Critical Approaches
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Childs Peter
Abstract: Being able to analyse different types of text is an essential skill for students of literature. Texts is a new kind of book which shows students how to use literary theory to approach a wide range of literary, cultural and media texts of the kind studied on today’s courses. These texts range from short stories, autobiographies, political speeches, websites and lyrics to films such as The Matrix and Harry Potter and from television’s Big Brother to shopping malls, celebrities, and rock videos.Each chapter combines an introduction to the text and aspects of its critical reception with an analysis using one of sixteen key approaches, from established angles like feminism, postcolonial studies and deconstruction to newer areas such as ecocriticism, trauma theory, and ethical criticism. Each chapter also indicates alternative ways of reading the text by drawing on other critical approaches. Texts:*is the first student guide to examine visual, virtual and performance texts alongside written texts reflecting the broadening range of the contemporary literature syllabus*demonstrates clearly how students can analyse a familiar text in different ways, a core skill which many find difficult*provides a student introduction to contemporary culture via well known popular texts and literary theories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r1zbd

INTRODUCTION: from: Texts
Abstract: Unlike many books in the field, this is not a study of literary texts in cultural contexts but a book about cultural texts of the kind increasingly studied through literary approaches. The chapters analyse a wide range of different texts that are neither poems nor ‘literary’ novels and offer readings of them in the light of issues that arise in literary studies and elsewhere, from considerations of trauma to questions of time, from ethics to spatial dynamics. A number of pre-selected critical and theoretical perspectives are brought to bear, from ecocriticism to performativity theory to postcolonial studies, but these are

CHAPTER 2 BUILDING: SHOPPING IN UTOPIA from: Texts
Abstract: Since the late 1980s, cultural geographers have been increasingly reading landscape as text, considering and employing linguistic metaphors, semiotic analyses, and poststructuralist terminology. In particular, the tools of literary analysis and theory have been helpfully employed to consider the built environment. Also, Henri Lefebvre’s influential book The Production of Space (1974) introduced the idea of ‘social space’, overturning the traditional understanding of ‘space’ as an empty area and replacing it with the view that space is always both occupied and meaningful: is always socially, politically and ideologically constructed and interpreted. Rather like the Bakhtinian idea of the chronotope in literature,

CHAPTER 4 POP VIDEO: MICHAEL JACKSON’S ‘THRILLER’ AND ‘RACE’ from: Texts
Abstract: One of Michael Jackson’s hit singles has the consistent line in its chorus, ‘It Don’t Matter If You’re Black Or White’: the statement of an ideal rather than a social fact.³ In Western society, white has been generally portrayed as a norm against which blackness is positioned as aberrant threatening and perhaps even monstrous. As well as telling a mini-story familiar from teen horror, Michael Jackson’s music video for his song ‘Thriller’ invokes a number of discourses about ‘race’ and race relations in the US. Riffing on 1950s horror movies, it divides small-town America between respectable cinemagoers, fascinated and appalled

CHAPTER 7 NEWSPAPER ARTICLE: THE GULF WAR IN REAL TIME AND VIRTUAL SPACE from: Texts
Abstract: The literary, however identified, may be said to include many examples of non-fiction, including works of journalism. Given the reporter’s quasi-objective relationship to history, the journalistic article was in some ways seen as a model for much literature in the 1930s, with a writer such as George Orwell specialising equally in fiction, essay-writing and reportage, and a novelist such as Christopher Isherwood fashioning himself in fiction as a news camera ‘recording, not thinking’.² Newspaper articles are, in fact, defined by their place of publication rather than their content, but there are certain likely formal characteristics or principles of journalistic writing

CHAPTER 8 PHOTOGRAPH(ER): CINDY SHERMAN AND THE MASQUERADE from: Texts
Abstract: Actively reading or analysing images is an uncommon experience even though – or perhaps because – in a visual culture everyone sees thousands of them everyday. Pictures, with or without words, are presented in newspapers, in advertising, on TV and elsewhere, yet when discussing images we have to turn exclusively to words. It is in language that social meaning-making occurs and appraising images is a function of language. However, every seeing child encounters images before learning language and the subject has a complex relationship with the visual field that needs exploring before we consider the meaning of particular images.

CHAPTER 13 LYRIC: ‘WHERE’S MY SNARE?’: EMINEM AND SYLVIA PLATH from: Texts
Abstract: Released on 16 September 2002, Eminem’s song ‘Cleanin’ Out My Closet’ signals itself as a child’s rebellion in its title by alluding to the common parental demand to clean up private space in the family home and using this as a metaphor for emotionally and mentally exorcising past traumas inflicted by the parent.¹ Presented as an image of the repository for the clutter and ‘skeletons’ of the past, the closet is also both the psyche of the singer and a representation of the child’s space in relation to the mother, ultimately the womb.²

Chapter 3 Prolepsis from: About Time
Abstract: This chapter is about the anticipation of retrospection and the extended significance that this temporal loop has acquired in our world. I am going to approach the subject through three different meanings of the word prolepsis, or, since the primary significance of prolepsis is anticipation, three different types of the anticipation of retrospection. The first of these I will refer to as the narratological meaning of prolepsis: a term used by Genette and others to describe flashforward. Prolepsis, for Genette, is a moment in a narrative in which the chronological order of story events is disturbed and the narrator narrates

Chapter 5 Inner and Outer Time from: About Time
Abstract: The previous chapters open a set of questions about the relationship between time and self-consciousness, an axis which has received too little attention within literary studies.¹ This neglect is all the more surprising since the idea of self-consciousness itself has played such a central role in the characterisation not only of contemporary fiction but of the more general social and discursive condition of the contemporary world. In prolepsis, we find on one hand a kind of temporal self-distance – a form of reflection which involves looking back on the present, from one’s own point of view or that of another – and

Chapter 6 Backwards Time from: About Time
Abstract: In ‘The Typology of Detective Fiction’, Todorov distinguishes between the whodunit and the thriller on the grounds that the former is a double story and the latter a single one (2000: 139). The whodunit is double in the sense that it is the story of ‘the days of the investigation which begin with the crime, and the days of the drama which lead up to it’.¹ The simplicity of this observation is matched only by its importance, because it means that the whodunit goes backwards as it goes forwards, or more precisely that it reconstructs the time line of the

Book Title: Death, 'Deathlessness' and Existenz in Karl Jaspers' Philosophy- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Peach Filiz
Abstract: Filiz Peach provides a clear explanation of Jaspers’ philosophy of existence, clarifying and reassessing the concept of death that is central to his thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r214t

CHAPTER 1 Death – Some Preliminary Reflections from: Death, 'Deathlessness' and Existenz in Karl Jaspers' Philosophy
Abstract: The issue of human relatedness to death manifests itself in various forms. There is neither a single, unchangeable attitude nor a correct one. In recognition of their importance, traditional attitudes towards death can be presented under three headings:

Introduction: from: The Political Mind
Abstract: In 2000 an interesting argument developed between Apple Macintosh computers and the Church of Satan. Apple had been running an advertising campaign that used black-and-white photographs of famous historical people considered to have been influential in bringing about some change of perspective on behalf of their contemporaries superimposed with the slogan ‘Think different’. This appealed to the Church of Satan, an organisation born in San Francisco in the late 1960s and citing individualist freethinkers such as Nietzsche, Twain and Franklin as influences, as well as including Freud, Jung and Foucault on its suggested reading list. The Satanists were also enamoured

3 The Political Use of Emotion from: The Political Mind
Abstract: So far we have seen research from neuropsychology that illustrates the role which nonconscious processing plays in our mental lives. This is connected to the world around us through the role of the body in processing and cognition. One further aspect of this picture is emotion and affect. This chapter will seek to investigate the emotive aspect in thought and the debates as to its biological or social nature. Without going too far down the well-worn road of the nature/nurture debate, it is fairly uncontroversial to claim a socially constructed aspect to emotional experience and expression, even if one believes

Book Title: Death-Drive-Freudian Hauntings in Literature and Art
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Smith Robert Rowland
Abstract: Robert Rowland Smith takes Freud's work on the death-drive and compares it with other philosophies of death - Pascal, Heidegger and Derrida in particular. He also applies it in a new way to literature and art - to Shakespeare, Rothko and Katharina Fritsch, among others. He asks whether artworks are dead or alive, if artistic creativity isn't actually a form of destruction, and whether our ability to be seduced by fine words means we don't put our selves at risk of death. In doing so, he proposes a new theory of aesthetics in which artworks and literary texts have a death-drive of their own, not least by their defining ability to turn away from all that is real, and where the effects of the death-drive mean that we are constantly living in imaginary, rhetorical or 'artistic' worlds. The book also provides a valuable introduction to the rich tradition of work on the death-drive since Freud.Key Features* Includes a general introduction to the death-drive* Presents an original theory of aesthetics* Analyses both theoretical and clinical psychoanalysis* Offers in-depth treatment of Freud* Provides an overview of philosophies of death
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r23mg

Chapter 6 A Harmless Suggestion from: Death-Drive
Abstract: ‘So foul and fair a day I have not seen’: Macbeth’s first words invoke, from the start, a coextensiveness of benefit and harm that will dominate the remainder of his foreshortened life. The ‘day’, a semi-objective correlative for his own destiny, will be foul and fair in equal measure. What will make him will also destroy him, giving him advantage only to the degree that it scuppers him too. As Macbeth is magnified, so he disintegrates, like a photographic blow-up.

CHAPTER 2 A Concern for Metaphor from: Creating Worldviews
Abstract: One rich and wide-reaching element in language has become the focal point of much study in the past three decades: metaphor. If this element of language has aroused such interest, it is because there has been increasing recognition that all of our concepts are framed within metaphorical terms. Rather than a model of language based upon the linguistic sign (a model which implies that words designate things in the world outside of language), linguists today are more inclined to accept that there exists a figurative substructure to concepts. This in turn helps us to understand that concepts are not extra-lingual

CHAPTER 3 Metaphors We Live By from: Creating Worldviews
Abstract: The explosion of work on metaphor in recent decades has its roots in the ground-breaking book Metaphors We Live By, written by Lakoff and Johnson in 1980. Though the two authors have modified their position in separate and co-written works since then, and though cognitive approaches have moved on to other fields of linguistics, semantics and epistemology, and though they have introduced new paradigms for analysing metaphor, it is worth quoting the fundamental claims made in this work, since these claims have influenced the terms of the debate that revolves around the representation of conceptual constructs in language. The pith

CHAPTER 5 Further Cognitive Contributions to Metaphor Theory from: Creating Worldviews
Abstract: Cognitive approaches to metaphor show a great diversity in themselves, and this diversity is mirrored by the variety of strands within Lakoff’s own work. In his individual work since 1990, Lakoff has concentrated a great deal of his energy on applying metaphor theory to politics. Adopting the role of the engaged intellectual, he has used the concepts of folk theories, narrative theory and conceptual metaphor to analyse the discourse of political rhetoric in studies such as his accounts of the two wars in Iraq. He offered a book-length account of the deficiencies of Democrat Party rhetoric in Moral Politics, published

Introduction to Part II from: Creating Worldviews
Abstract: The following three case studies will explore the relationship between speech and metaphor in the construction of ideological worldviews and in the very construction of our concept of language itself. In the first and second case studies, we will discuss the role played by metaphor in constructing ideological worldviews, or what we will increasingly call cultural mindsets. Two unfashionable mindsets have been selected deliberately, in order to upset readers and force them to leave behind their own convictions and concepts, and to enter into an unfamiliar and probably ‘unsavoury’ vision of the world. The first study will investigate the function

CHAPTER 8 from: Creating Worldviews
Abstract: In the last chapter we considered the way metaphor helped to shape and structure the worldview of Czech communists in the 1970s. We were, however, forced to accept that we were often dealing with three different kinds of worldview. The Czech language itself, as a network of concepts, conceptual links and linguistic habits, had been remodelled by the forces of the Marxist–Leninist worldview. This was by no means a one-way process: on the contrary, the concepts of ‘people’, ‘folk’ and ‘nation’ which were fundamental to the communist worldview were modelled using the plastic material of the Czech imagination, an

2 Protestant Liberty: from: Dissenting Histories
Abstract: The most influential Dissenting history of the eighteenth century was The History of the Puritans by Daniel Neal; or to give its full title: The History of the Puritans; or, Protestant Nonconformists; from the Reformation in 1517. To the Revolution in 1688: comprising an account of their principles; their attempts for a further reformation in the Church; their sufferings; and the lives and characters of their most considerable divines. Caroline Robbins called it ‘probably the most interesting revelation of Dissenting ideas in a secular work in the second quarter of the eighteenth century’.¹

Conclusion from: Dissenting Histories
Abstract: To move beyond Burke’s Reflections into the Revolution debate of the 1790s is to move beyond the scope of this book – indeed, would warrant another book. These rich and complex exchanges, in a situation of acute political crisis, were the nexus out of which came some of the major works of Whig history of the first half of the nineteenth century, bedevilled by the unfinished business of 1688.¹ The Revolution debate was precisely – and this has been underplayed in the secondary literature – a dispute about history. It was, in key respects, initiated by the Dissenters in their campaigns against the

Book Title: Language and Power in the Modern World- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Atkinson David
Abstract: This book explores key areas of modern society in which language is used to form power and social relations. These are presented in five sections:Language and the MediaLanguage and OrganisationsLanguage and GenderLanguage and YouthMultilingualism, Identity and EthnicityWith a unique combination of selected readings and student-centred tasks in a single volume, the book covers contemporary issues in language and power, ranging from the global to the interpersonal. Each area - and each reading chosen to explore it - is substantially contextualised and discussed through a detailed introduction and then followed up with related activities.Each section comprises:*a substantial, specific introduction which draws students’ attention to key themes and issues relevant to its topic; *a set of four or five selected readings which encourages students to locate critically these issues in context; *a task, or set of tasks, obliging students to undertake ‘hands-on’ linguistic analysis of data and engage in more sophisticated discussion of pertinent issues.*In-depth exploration of a variety of approaches to the study of language and power*Unique combination of advanced readings, student-centred tasks and editorial guidance*Hands-on activities at the end of each chapter
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r24nd

5 MULTILINGUALISM, ETHNICITY AND IDENTITY from: Language and Power in the Modern World
Abstract: The world is frequently portrayed as an increasingly uniform place from the point of view of the number of languages used on our planet, not least by some of the media in Western countries where English is the dominant language. Despite this portrayal, however, its population continues to use a huge, if diminishing, variety of languages – most estimates are of around 6,000 living languages (a figure inevitably highly dependent on the definition of ‘a language’ used – see, for example, Crystal 1997: Chapter 47, for a discussion). Nevertheless, whatever the real figure, languages are certainly disappearing all the time

Introduction: from: George Mackay Brown and the Philosophy of Community
Abstract: For the islands I sing

3 The Usual Suspects from: The Idea of Continental Philosophy
Abstract: The engagement with texts outside the mainstream of analytic philosophy that has characterised my own work in philosophy has always involved an effort indirectly to intervene in the regular programming of analytic expectations about such texts. By rendering myself capable of reading these texts I have sought to encourage others to feel less well prepared for what they might encounter. My thought is that without such a disruption they will remain prepared only for the (for them, for everyone) depressing prospect of reading the Other.¹

CHAPTER 1 PREPARATION FOR A THREEFOLD SIEVE from: Islam, Christianity and Tradition
Abstract: We live in an age when the tired paradigms of public perception reign supreme. Stereotype is all. In this respect, the new millennium is no different from the old. Samuel P. Huntington famously talked of the potential clash of two civilisations, a Western Christian and an Eastern Islamic.¹ The Kosovan crisis of 1999 provided an interesting example of that within the former communist Yugoslavia, with Serbian forces of the Christian Orthodox faith conducting a policy of ethnic cleansing against Kosovan Albanians.² The profound irony of this particular conflict, in the light of Huntington’s prognostication, was that ‘the West’ in the

Book Title: Media and Memory- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Garde-Hansen Joanne
Abstract: How do we rely on media for remembering? In exploring the complex ways that media converge to support our desire to capture, store and retrieve memories, this textbook offers analyses of representations of memorable events, media tools for remembering and forgetting, media technologies for archiving and the role of media producers in making memories.Theories of memory and media are covered alongside an accessible range of case studies focusing on memory in relation to radio, television, pop music, celebrity, digital media and mobile phones. Ethnographic and production culture research, including interviews with members of the public and industry professionals, is also included. Offering a comprehensive introduction to the connections and disconnections in the study of media and memory, this is the perfect textbook for media studies students.Key Features* Presents a thorough and detailed overview of key writers, theories and debates* Case studies enrich the text, offering innovative approaches and insights on methodology * Covers a range of 'old' and 'new' media including: from radio, television, film, photography, digital media, mobile phones and popular music* Explores discourses, forms and practices of media and memory with active learning exercises that engage readers
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r25r9

Introduction: from: Media and Memory
Abstract: Apart from mandatory history lessons at school that may inspire a minority to pursue historical studies at a higher level and beyond, where do the rest of us get an understanding of the past? It is safe to say, as we stand firmly established in the twenty-first century, that our engagement with history has become almost entirely mediated. Media, in the form of print, television, film, photography, radio and increasingly the Internet, are the main sources for recording, constructing, archiving and disseminating public and private histories in the early twenty-first century. They provide the most compelling devices for accessing information

1 Memory Studies and Media Studies from: Media and Memory
Abstract: There is a long history of thinkers who have, to certain degrees, evaluated, reflected upon and tried to explain memory and remembering. Not surprisingly, this extends as far back as Plato and Aristotle as well as being found in the more recent philosophical thinking of writers as diverse as Friedrich Nietzsche (1844–1900), Sigmund Freud (1856–1939), Émile Durkheim (1858–1917), Henri Bergson (1859–1941) and Walter Benjamin (1892–1940). It has developed from early sixteenth-century beliefs that ‘memory could offer unmediated access to experience or to external reality’ (Radstone and Hodgkin 2005: 9) to late nineteenth-century challenges; as ‘modernity’s

3 Using Media to Make Memories: from: Media and Memory
Abstract: Media can represent lions or hunters. However, powerful media and cultural institutions whose business it is to record, archive and make accessible the everyday life, major events and social and cultural heritage of nations and communities, invariably write those narratives in ways that glorify not only themselves but the cultural hegemony of the societies they serve. They need to keep their customers, readers, audiences and users happy. They control their own archives even if they are actually only the custodians and not the full rightful owners of a nation’s heritage. This is the case with the publicly funded broadcaster in

5 Voicing the Past: from: Media and Memory
Abstract: There is a tendency within media studies to ignore sound. The visual image has dominated: art, photography, advertising, film, television, video games, online media, mobile phones. Just compare the amount of scholarly texts on television to radio, on cinema and gaming rather than soundtracks and soundscapes. Even the mobile phone, which is essentially a listening device, has only become interesting to media studies since it has a screen interface of applications, games, graphics, e-mail, photos and videos. When it comes to memory we assume that the visual dominates and structures our understanding of the world. We do not assume that

Book Title: The Discursive Construction of National Identity- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Unger J. W.
Abstract: How do we construct national identities in discourse? Which topics, which discursive strategies and which linguistic devices are employed to construct national sameness and uniqueness on the one hand, and differences to other national collectives on the other hand? The Discursive Construction of National Identity analyses discourses of national identity in Europe with particular attention to Austria.In the tradition of critical discourse analysis, the authors analyse current and on-going transformations in the self-and other definition of national identities using an innovative interdisciplinary approach which combines discourse-historical theory and methodology and political science perspectives. Thus, the rhetorical promotion of national identification and the discursive construction and reproduction of national difference on public, semi-public and semi-private levels within a nation state are analysed in much detail and illustrated with a huge amount of examples taken from many genres (speeches, focus-groups, interviews, media, and so forth).In addition to the critical discourse analysis of multiple genres accompanying various commemorative and celebratory events in 1995, this extended and revised edition is able to draw comparisons with similar events in 2005. The impact of socio-political changes in Austria and in the European Union is also made transparent in the attempts of constructing hegemonic national identities. Key Features:*Discourse-historical approach.*Interdisciplinarity (cultural studies, discourse analysis, history, political science).*Multi-method, multi-genre.*Qualitative case studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r26kb

Chapter 7 Conclusion: from: The Discursive Construction of National Identity
Abstract: Over the past decade, the concept of nation as an imagined community has gained increasing importance in the relevant scholarly literature. The main objective of our study has been to identify this mental

Chapter 8 The ‘Story’ Continues: from: The Discursive Construction of National Identity
Abstract: While we continue the discussion from the last chapter, it is important to emphasise specifically that ‘neutrality’, which was already considered to be obsolete, has made a surprising ‘comeback’ in the Austrian debates (see p. 202; see also Kovács and Wodak 2003). This development is tied to recent global crises and wars such as 9/11, the wars

8 FROM AN ORDER OF FEAR TO ONE OF RESPECT from: Philosophy of International Law
Abstract: The predominant anthropology for the place of law in international relations, whether on the side of state sovereignty or international organization, or constitution, has been a radically subjectivist, individualist one. The state of nature, in which sovereign states still find themselves, is reinforced by predatory doctrines of pre-emption in the area of national security and of relentless expansion in the area of economic activity, itself continuously dominated by security interests.¹ This analysis may not be disputed by legal internationalists or constitutionalists. They continue to set themselves the task of harnessing the beast of the state, Aron’s ‘cold monsters,’ into a

Book Title: The Lacanian Left-Psychoanalysis, Theory, Politics
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Stavrakakis Yannis
Abstract: In recent years psychoanalysis – especially Lacanian theory – has been gradually acknowledged as a vital resource in the ongoing re-orientation of contemporary political theory and analysis. Of particular note is that the work of Jacques Lacan is increasingly being used by major political philosophers associated with the Left. This indicates the dynamic emergence of a new theoretico-political horizon: that of the ‘Lacanian Left’. However, this has yet to be properly conceived and structured as a field. The Lacanian Left is the first book to bring it into academic consciousness and to draw its implications for concrete political analysis in a systematic way. It offers:• An accessible mapping of its main contours. • A detailed examination of the points of convergence and divergence between the major figures active or at the periphery of this terrain, including Slavoj h the central Lacanian notion of ‘enjoyment’, The Lacanian Left puts forward innovative analyses of political power and authority, nationalism, European identity, consumerism and advertising culture, de-democratisation and post-democracy. It will be of value to everyone interested in exploring the potential of psychoanalysis to reinvigorate political theory, critical political analysis and democratic politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r288w

Introduction: from: The Lacanian Left
Abstract: Over the last ten to fifteen years, psychoanalysis, and especially Lacanian theory, has emerged as one of the most important resources in the ongoing re-orientation of contemporary political theory and critical analysis. So much so is now acknowledged even in mainstream political science fora. For example, in a critical review essay recently published in the British Journal of Politics and International Relations – one of the journals of the UK Political Studies Association – and characteristically entitled ‘The Politics of Lack’, one reads that ‘an approach to politics drawn from Lacanian psychoanalysis is becoming increasingly popular of late among theorists . .

2 Laclau with Lacan on from: The Lacanian Left
Abstract: If Castoriadis constitutes the (extimate) frontier of the emerging Lacanian Left, two of its pivotal figures are certainly Ernesto Laclau and Chantal Mouffe. For a start, they have both exhibited, again and again, their increasing readiness to take on board many crucial Lacanian insights in their innovative analysis of political discourse and in reorienting the political theory of the Left in the direction of a ‘radical and plural democracy’. In their joint work, theoretical affinities with Lacanian thought are evident from at least the time of Hegemony and Socialist Strategy (Laclau and Mouffe 1985), if not earlier. This is not

5 Enjoying the Nation: from: The Lacanian Left
Abstract: Although our contemporary world is marked throughout by the importance of questions of identity, something increasingly reflected in the directions of contemporary social–scientific research, in the general field of nationalism studies the issue of the attraction and salience of national identities has not been sufficiently examined. This is partly due to the hegemonic position of modernist and constructionist approaches in the relevant literature.² In opposition to the common doxa reproduced by nationalist myths, contemporary research on the nation tends to stress the constructed character of national identity: the nation is primarily understood as a modern social and political construction.

6 Lack of Passion: from: The Lacanian Left
Abstract: I started the previous chapter with an observation regarding the importance that questions of identity have gradually acquired. It would be bizarre if the broad field of international relations were to stay untouched by this trend. In fact, no one is surprised any more by the fact that ‘the discipline of international relations (IR) is witnessing a surge of interest in identity and identity formation’ (Neumann 1999:1). The same applies to the sub-discipline of European Studies – affecting both marginal and mainstream approaches. As Anthony Smith has pointed out, one of the fundamental reasons for the current interest in ‘European unification’

3 Beyond Reason: from: Intending Scotland
Abstract: At the Walter Scott conference in Oregon in 1999, Jerome McGann pronounced Scott to be the first postmodernist,¹ a judgment based on Scott’s deployment of various metafictional techniques and on his ironic combination of contradictory genres. The proposal was less surprising (to some, at any rate) than it might have been, given how regularly another Scottish novel of the early nineteenth century – James Hogg’s Confessions of a Justified Sinner – is cited as prophetic of postmodernism in its use of multiple and conflicting narratives. Taken together, the implications of these prescient texts might suggest that there is something inherently postmodern about

Introduction from: Phenomenology or Deconstruction?
Abstract: As a philosophical movement at the forefront of contemporary thought, phenomenology might be thought to have had its day. Since Edmund Husserl recast the term in his 1901 Logische Untersuchungen from earlier Hegelian and Kantian usage,¹ it has come to be employed mainly as a yardstick against which to size up other features in the contemporary philosophical landscape, features that are themselves considered to be post-phenomenological. Terms such as ‘intuition’ and ‘reduction’ retain the faint nostalgic glow of a simpler age, when meaning was given to consciousness and the philosopher could go about her business secure in the knowledge that,

6. Jean-Luc Nancy: from: Phenomenology or Deconstruction?
Abstract: The previous chapter dealt with the question of alterity in Nancy’s work. Now we turn to the problem of commensurability. Chapter 5 considered the possibility of contact with a meaningful world, while this chapter pursues the issue of the conflict of meaning(s) in the world: what is to be done when a number of incommensurable values must be measured against each other or, in other words, how are we to calculate the incalculable? It is the problem we have been posing to Derrida’s deconstruction; it is also the question at the heart of the cosmological motif we have been tracing

5 AFRICA’S MEDIA: from: Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Nyamnjoh Francis B.
Abstract: In popular as well as academic circles, there are varying degrees of certainty about the extent to which media influence Africans. Contrary to the popular understanding of the media as magic multipliers capable of stimulating or dulling the senses of those who receive them, media effects are neither direct, simple nor immediate. The audience, by extension, is neither altogether passive nor helpless, since members of the same demographic often get different messages from the same source. In other words, what people make of particular media contents depends, inter alia, on where their vested interests lie, interests which are not fixed.

8 AFRICAN INTELLECTUALS IN A HOSTILE MEDIA ENVIRONMENT from: Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Munene Macharia
Abstract: The African intellectual faces a hostile media environment because the media are largely foreign owned or dependent on foreign sources and programming. The symbiotic relationship between foreign-based media ownership and local media providers is one in which the local elites are the agents of the foreign elites. The foreign elites decide what everyone else is to think and, using their local agents, force it on the Africans. Olatunde A. Oladimeji of Nigeria has argued that Africa has been the target of a new kind of ‘war without missiles’, in which the African elites are the ‘victims of the war on

10 PENTECOSTALISM AND THE MODERN AUDIOVISUAL MEDIA from: Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Meyer Birgit
Abstract: In recent years, Pentecostal charismatic churches (PCCs) have gained increasing popularity throughout Africa (Corten and Marshall-Fratani 2001; Gifford 1998; Meyer 2004a). Situated in a genealogy of Christianity in Africa, these churches espouse significant continuities with mission churches, African Independent Churches and even the African religious traditions which they despise as being the realm of the ‘powers of darkness’.¹

14 POPULAR DANCE MUSIC AND THE MEDIA from: Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Collins John
Abstract: The record business in Ghana (and indeed West Africa) began in the mid-1920s, when the British Zonophone/HMV company first issued recordings of West African popular music and local ‘spirituals’; and particularly after 1928, when the United Africa Company (UAC) became their distributor. In 1930 the Zonophone/HMV company sold 181,484 shellac 78-rpm records, and between 1930 and 1933 this company and the German Odeon company (working out of Lagos, Nigeria) sold 800,000 records in West Africa. This was possible because lucrative cash crops (like cocoa and oil palm) enabled many Ghanaian and Nigerians, even farmers, to buy wind-up gramophones and enjoy

EPILOGUE: from: Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Mudimbe V. Y.
Abstract: ‘I lie, I speak’, such is the beginning of ‘La pensée du dehors’, by Michel Foucault, published in a 1966 issue of Critique. To apprehend the singularity of contemporary fiction, and to think of this fiction in its own right, instead of claiming to relate it to an absolute truth, the French philosopher invokes the old argument of Epimenides about a liar. Charles Manson, in interviews conducted by Neul Emmons and transcribed in Manson in His Own Words (1988), said: ‘The more I speak, the more I lie; the less I speak, the less I lie.’ Manson’s rapport with Epimenides’

Chapter 3 Deleuze, Kant, and the Theory of Immanent Ideas from: Deleuze and Philosophy
Author(s) Smith Daniel W.
Abstract: One of Deleuze’s primary aims in Difference and Repetitionis to present a new theory of Ideas (dialectics) in which Ideas are conceived of as both immanent and differential. What I would like to examine in this paper is the relation between Deleuze’s theory of Ideas and the theme of immanence, particularly with regard to the theory of Ideas found in Kant’s three critiques. In using the term ‘Idea’, Deleuze is not referring to the common-sense use of the term, or the use to which empiricists like Hume or Locke put it, for whom the word ‘idea’ refers primarily to

Chapter 5 Counter-Actualisation and the Method of Intuition from: Deleuze and Philosophy
Author(s) Egyed Bela
Abstract: In his article, ‘Un, multiple, multiplicité(s)’ (2000), Badiou reiterates his earlier objections to Deleuze: (1) Deleuze’s conception of ‘set’ is anachronistic because it is pre-Cantorian. It ignores the extraordinary immanent dialectic that mathematics has bestowed ( dotē) this concept since the end of the nineteenth century; (2) Deleuze’s concept of multiplicity remains inferior (because of its qualitative differentiation) to the concept ofmultipleemerging from the history of contemporary mathematics; and (3) the qualitative determination of multiplicities makes it impossible to subtract them from their equivocal re-absorption into the One (of classical ontology). In the same article, Badiou complains that those

Chapter 13 Fabulation, Narration and the People to Come from: Deleuze and Philosophy
Author(s) Bogue Ronald
Abstract: In a 1990 interview, Deleuze addresses the question of the relationship of politics to art via a reflection on the modern problem of the ‘creation of a people’. The artists Deleuze admires (he names here Mallarmé, Rimbaud, Klee, Berg, Huillet and Straub) have a deep need of a people, but the collectivity they invoke does not yet exist – ‘the people are missing [ le peuple manque]’ (Deleuze 1990: 235/174). Artists cannot themselves create a people, and the people in their struggles cannot concern themselves directly with art, but when a people begins to take form, an interactive process emerges that

Chapter 1 Introduction: from: Scandalous Knowledge
Abstract: It has been said that knowledge, or the problem of knowledge, is the scandal of philosophy. The scandal is philosophy’s apparent inability to show how, when and why we can be sure that we know something or, indeed, that we know anything. Philosopher Michael Williams writes: ‘Is it possible to obtain knowledge at all? This problem is pressing because there are powerful arguments, some very ancient, for the conclusion that it is not . . . Scepticism is the skeleton in Western rationalism’s closet’.¹ While it is not clear that the scandal matters to anyone but philosophers, philosophers point out

Chapter 2 Pre-Post-Modern Relativism from: Scandalous Knowledge
Abstract: If ‘relativism’ means anything at all, it means a great many things. It is certainly not, though often regarded that way, a one-line ‘claim’ or ‘thesis’: for example, ‘man is the measure of all things’, ‘nothing is absolutely right or wrong’, ‘all opinions are equally valid’, and so forth.¹ Nor is it, I think, a permanent feature of a fixed logical landscape, a single perilous chasm into which incautious thinkers from Protagoras’ time to our own have ‘slid’ unawares or ‘fallen’ catastrophically. Indeed, it may be that relativism, at least in our own era, is nothing at all – a phantom

Chapter 4 Cutting-Edge Equivocation: from: Scandalous Knowledge
Abstract: We can derive some sense of the way intellectual life is experienced in some era from the recurrence of certain metaphors used to describe its conduct – for example, the frequency with which, in our own time, intellectual projects and achievements are described in terms of navigational finesse: the charting of passages between extremes, the steering of middle courses, the avoidance of the twin perils of Scylla and Charybdis. Thus an advertisement for philosopher Susan Haack’s book, Evidence and Inquiry, features a statement by Hilary Putnam praising the author for ‘elaborating and persuasively defending a position . . . which adroitly

Chapter 5 Disciplinary Cultures and Tribal Warfare: from: Scandalous Knowledge
Abstract: The durability of C.P. Snow’s notion of ‘the two cultures’ is a testament, no doubt, to the evocativeness and apparent continued aptness of the phrase, but also, one suspects, to the sense of scandal that has always attended it: its acknowledgement, that is, of extensive ignorance and provincialism among the educated classes and its image of the academy as divided into two mutually suspicious or indeed warring tribes. The intellectual map has shifted in important ways since Snow’s essay was first published, and his account of the differences between natural scientists and the group he called ‘literary intellectuals’ appears increasingly

Chapter 7 Animal Relatives, Difficult Relations from: Scandalous Knowledge
Abstract: The title of this chapter points to two sets of interrelated difficulties. Those in the first set arise chronically from our individual psychologically complex and often ambivalent relations to animals. The second set reflects the intellectually and ideologically crisscrossed connections among the various discourses currently concerned with those relations, including the movement for animal rights, ecological ethics, posthumanist theory, and such fields as primatology and evolutionary psychology. I begin with some general observations on kin and kinds – that is, relations and classifications – and then turn to the increasingly complex play of claims and counter-claims regarding the so-called species barrier.

Chapter 5 The State and the Politics of Truth: from: Post-Foundational Political Thought
Abstract: Badiou’s work constitutes one of the rare examples in current theorizing of a post-foundational philosophical system – and there is hardly a contradiction here between a post-foundational stance and systematic philosophy. For Badiou, true philosophy is always systematic, yet it is not systematic in the sense of being centered around a keystone: ‘if by “system” you mean, first, that philosophy is conceived as an argumentative discipline with a requirement of coherence, and second, that philosophy never takes the form of a singular body of knowledge but, to use my own vocabulary, exists conditionally with respect to a complex set of truths,

Chapter 1 Scotland and the places of memory from: The Scots Imagination and Modern Memory
Abstract: A fictional Scots detective gives fleeting pause for thought, stubs out his Silk Cut, moves on quickly to more pressing, practical matters, the conundrum lingering only as long as the pause in his conversation with a disagreeable colleague. The plot moves on. I finished the novel, but marked the page, wanting to dwell some more on the frisson where ‘loss and permanence had mingled and become some new entity’. What, quite, could this ‘something extraordinary’ be and what was new about that ‘new entity’? A momentary reverie points to a difficult issue: memories link people with places in enigmatic ways.

Chapter 5 Retrieving ‘that invisible leeway’: from: The Scots Imagination and Modern Memory
Abstract: The conventional logic of landscape evaluation is that the Romantic Movement was a conservative response to the onset of modernity, emphasising the need to develop ‘culture’ as moral salvation against the instability of urbanisation and industrialisation. Its legacy has seen a supposedly preexisting Arcadia touted as ‘authentic’ for a public that misrecognises fabrication for historical fact. Arguably, alienated from their own acts of creation, cultural producers have reified their own constructions, believing likewise that these reflect a sacred essence of ‘natural beauty’. Icons abound. What more can be said about the social construction of the Scottish landscape?

Book Title: Memory and the Moving Image-French Film in the Digital Era
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): McNeill Isabelle
Abstract: A vital rethinking of memory and the moving image for the digital age, Isabelle McNeill investigates the role of the moving image in cultural memory, considering the impact of digital technologies on visual culture. Drawing on an interdisciplinary range of theoretical resources and an unusual body of films and moving image works, the author examines the ways in which recent French filmmaking conceptualises both the past and the workings of memory. Ultimately the author argues that memory is an intersubjective process, in which filmic forms continue to play a crucial role even as new media come to dominate our contemporary experience.Memory and the Moving Image:*Introduces new ways of thinking about the relation between film and memory, arising from a compelling, interdisciplinary study of theories and films*Subtly explores the French context while drawing theoretical conclusions with wider implications and applicability*Provides detailed and illuminating close readings of varied moving image works to aid theoretical explorations*Moves away from auteurist approaches, examining work by canonical directors including Jean-Luc Godard, Chris Marker and Agnès Varda alongside that of less well-known filmmakers such as Claire Simon and Yamina Benguigui*Brings together thinkers such as Bergson, Deleuze, Bazin and Barthes with, for example, Rodowick and Mulvey, in an engaging interweaving of theories.Works considered include Jean-Luc Godard's Histoire(s) du Cinéma (1989-98), Yamina Benguigui's Mémoires d'Immigrés (1997), Chris Marker's CD-ROM Immemory (1998), Claire Simon's Mimi (2003), Michael Haneke's Caché (2005) and Agnès Varda's multi-media exhibition, L'Île et Elle (2006).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r2cnj

INTRODUCTION: from: Memory and the Moving Image
Abstract: A recurring image in Jean-Luc Godard’s eight-part video series Histoire(s) du cinéma (1989–98) shows a man and woman staring intently at a film projection, taken from an early film by Ingmar Bergman, Fängelse (1946). Along with shots of James Stewart peering voyeuristically through a zoom lens in Rear Window (Hitchcock, 1954) the image is developed through the series as a figure of cinema’s gaze upon history. Citing a line from Alain Resnais’ Hiroshima mon amour (1959), the sequence of titles inscribed upon the Fängelse image as it appears in chapter 4B of Godard’s series evokes a failure of witnessing

2. VIRTUAL MUSEUMS AND MEMORY OBJECTS from: Memory and the Moving Image
Abstract: In the previous chapter I suggested that certain films actively elicit a ‘transversal’ viewing, contrary to Metz’s suggestion that as soon as two images are juxtaposed a longitudinal narrativity is born, suppressing any such lateral movement. In this chapter I want to look at recent French films and moving image material that can be seen to summon transversal readings by drawing on an intertextual deployment of objects that resonate with personal and collective memory. To a certain extent all films can be seen to activate cultural memory in this way, especially in the age of DVD and other viewing technologies,

Introduction: from: Democratic Piety
Abstract: Religion has long been a target for the critical weaponry of modern political philosophy. Whether it is accused of anaesthetising an otherwise potentially revolutionary subject or generating war and political conflict, religion is often derided in secular political theory as the basis of unthinking faith, trust in traditional hierarchy, or mystical fanaticism. Against this irrationalism, the dominant forms of contemporary political theory attempt to make sense of the world by diagnosing social and political malignancies and advocating alternative paths to a better world free from the dangerous competition of political viewpoints or the fruitless pursuit of any number of religious

Chapter 3 Democracy, Consensus and Dissent from: Democratic Piety
Abstract: The challenges of complexity unsettle many of the prevailing assumptions in democratic theory. Most important among these is the consensual impetus that lies behind many contemporary articulations of liberal democracy and the rationalism and universalism that frequently underpin them. The notion of a rational consensus has become an increasingly controversial dimension of recent democratic theory, as radical democratic theorists have challenged the ways in which liberal democracies deal with political disagreement and contestation. Subsequently, several theorists within the liberal tradition have attempted to incorporate models of dissent in their democratic arguments or have reiterated the supposedly intrinsic place of disagreement

Book Title: The Unexpected-Narrative Temporality and the Philosophy of Surprise
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Currie Mark
Abstract: This new study asks how stories affect the way we think about time and, in particular, how they condition thinking about the future. Focusing on surprise and the unforeseeable, the book argues that stories are mechanisms that reconcile what is taking place with what will have been. This relation between the present and the future perfect offers a grammatical formula quite different from our default notions of narrative as recollection or recapitulation. It promises new understandings of the reading process within the strange logic of a future that is already complete. It also points beyond that to some of the key temporal concepts of our epoch: prediction and unpredictability, uncertainty, the event, the untimely and the messianic. The argument is worked out in new readings of Sarah Waters’ Fingersmith, Kazuo Ishiguro’s Never Let Me Go and Julian Barnes’ The Sense of an Ending.Key Features: An original discussion of the relation of time and narrativeAn important intervention in narratologyA striking general argument about the workings of the mindProvides an overview of the question of surprise in philosophy and literature
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt3fgrm7

Chapter 2 Narratological Approaches to the Unforeseeable from: The Unexpected
Abstract: There is narrative theory that concerns itself with the unforeseeable, but not in what might be thought of as the mainstream of contemporary narratology. Questions of surprise, of the unexpected, the reversal of fortune, of chance and contingency are present in the philosophical traditions of writing about narrative and nearly absent from the new, ‘postclassical’ narratologies and cognitive narratologies that have dominated the systematic and theoretical study of narrative since the mid-1990s. There is a larger issue here, about the absence of a more general kind of any systematic analysis of narrative temporality in postclassical narratology, and within this, a

Chapter 5 The Untimely and the Messianic from: The Unexpected
Abstract: Unexpected events, by standing out against the backdrop of routine and predictable moments, can make us see the originality of every moment, the novelty and unexpectedness of the present in general. Time, says Elizabeth Grosz, is ‘a kind of evanescence that appears only at those moments when our expectations are (positively or negatively) surprised’ (Grosz 2004, 5). This is not, for Grosz, the usual cliché, where a sensation to which we are normally dead comes into being as the defamiliarising effect of the unexpected, or the power of now elevates special people above the mundane. The unexpected, or the ‘untimely’,

2 ‘AND WHAT HAS ALL THIS TO DO WITH EXPERIMENTAL WRITING?’: from: Modernism and Magic
Abstract: If magic is error for modernity, then the most scandalous of its errors is its collapsing into identity of words and objects. As Randall Styers argues, one of the central themes running through scholarly work on magic from the second half of the nineteenth century is the claim that magic is fixated on the power of words (Styers 2004: 219ff.). Certainly magic is often defined as that which attempts to animate matter, but again and again writers on magic assert a particular attitude to language as central to this animation. For James Frazer, if magic originates in the human fear

3 A ‘SUBTLE METAMORPHOSIS’: from: Modernism and Magic
Abstract: If the experiment of Finnegans Wakeis the harnessing of a magical understanding of transformation through a renewed relation between word and world, one of the central mechanisms for this transformation is sound. The importance of sound inFinnegans Wakeis well known, and has been insisted on from Beckett’s famous assertion in ‘Dante . . . Bruno. Vico . . . Joyce’ (1929) that Joyce’s novel is not to be read, or rather is not only to be read; it ‘is to be looked at and listened to’ (Beckett 1983: 27). Another early admirer, Sergei Eisenstein, went further, suggesting

Chapter 1 CIA HISTORY AS A COLD WAR BATTLEGROUND: from: Intelligence Studies in Britain and the US
Author(s) Aldrich Richard J.
Abstract: Where does the history of the history of intelligence begin? As a self-conscious academic subject, intelligence history is widely understood to have started in the 1980s. In Britain, Christopher Andrew and David Dilks proclaimed a deliberate manifesto for intelligence historians in 1984, urging scholars to explore the ‘missing dimension’. Broadly contemporaneous with this, the American historian Richard Immerman asserted that it was important to incorporate covert action into any sophisticated understanding of foreign policy. The mid-1980s also saw the creation of the journal Intelligence and National Security, edited by Christopher Andrew and Michael Handel.¹ Since that time, we have enjoyed

Chapter 7 RECONCEIVING REALISM: from: Intelligence Studies in Britain and the US
Author(s) Willmetts Simon
Abstract: The academic study of intelligence has long established itself in opposition to spy fiction. In Christopher Andrew and David Dilks’ seminal introduction to The Missing Dimension, they argued that the lurid embellishments and gross inaccuracies of novelists, journalists and filmmakers had dissuaded professional historians from undertaking a serious study of intelligence history:

Chapter 12 WHITEHALL, INTELLIGENCE AND OFFICIAL HISTORY: from: Intelligence Studies in Britain and the US
Author(s) Murphy Christopher J.
Abstract: In the historiography of British intelligence, the publication of SOE in France– an officially sponsored account of the activities of the Special Operations Executive (SOE) during the Second World War – stands out as a significant moment. While the existence of the organisation and its activities already constituted something of an open secret – a consequence of numerous memoirs and investigative works published since its dissolution in 1946 –SOE in Francewas an account of part of the wartime secret world, which was published by Her Majesty’s Stationery Office: an official history, based on access to SOE’s own

Chapter 14 1968 – ‘A YEAR TO REMEMBER’ FOR THE STUDY OF BRITISH INTELLIGENCE? from: Intelligence Studies in Britain and the US
Author(s) Svendsen Adam D. M.
Abstract: Nineteen-sixty-eight was a momentous year for a multitude of reasons. In the wider context of the Cold War, the ‘Prague Spring’ was underway in Eastern Europe, whilst the war in Vietnam was gathering an ugly momentum. Both Martin Luther King and Robert ‘Bobby’ Kennedy were assassinated.¹

Chapter 16 INTELLIGENCE AND ‘OFFICIAL HISTORY’ from: Intelligence Studies in Britain and the US
Author(s) Jeffery Keith
Abstract: The extraordinary expansion of contemporary and historical intelligence studies since the mid-1970s has been both reflected and stimulated by developments in government policy, as well as academic initiative.² On the government side – and we are confining ourselves here to the situation within the United Kingdom – there are two main aspects to this. First, there is the commissioning and writing of ‘Official Histories’; and, second, the release of documents. One rationale for the UK government’s Official History programme is ‘to provide authoritative histories in their own right; [and] a reliable secondary source for historians until all the records are

1 A Case of Thought from: Deleuze's Literary Clinic
Abstract: For Deleuze, all thinking begins in a kind of pathos. This is because thinking must be distinguished from knowledge or mental activity in general: remembering, sensing, imagining and so on. These modes of cognition remain at the purely empirical level of recognisable objects. Thought, however, goes beyond the limits of the recognisable and thus needs to be grasped in a way which distinguishes it from our day-to-day cognition of the world.¹ In other words, thought goes beyond the given differences which allow us to recognise the objects of our experience, and in turn leads towards a realm in which differences

2 The Paradox of the Body and the Genesis of Form and Content from: Deleuze's Literary Clinic
Abstract: The literary clinic suggests a profound linkage between biophilosophy and literature. In the biophilosophical tradition of hylomorphism which includes Aristotle and Kant equally, life is isolated from the material it animates, since, as Toscano explains, life ‘cannot organize itself, it can only organize matter’ (Toscano 2006: 36). From the hylomorphic point of view, a self-organising life would be unintelligible, since the forms which organise matter would be indistinguishable from matter itself. Life is thus properly speaking ‘immaterial’ and immortal, the pure formal movement of the concept, while matter is mere lifeless receptivity. Deleuze is critical of this position,¹ and it

3 Symptoms, Repetition and the Productive Death Instinct from: Deleuze's Literary Clinic
Abstract: The literary clinical procedure as a creative practice works via repetition, but there is always a chance that the procedure will fail and the repetition will remain unproductive. While failure and success are not to be judged from the point of view of conscious intent, as this would imply a transcendent judgment rather than an immanent evaluation, their effects are nevertheless quite real. The prospect of psychological disintegration, manifesting itself in the worst cases in schizophrenic illness, is, in Deleuze’s conception of writing, an ever-present threat. However, the very reality of this threat offers salvation from it. Failure and success

5 The People to Come from: Deleuze's Literary Clinic
Abstract: From his early work on Masoch, Deleuze associated health with an engagement with issues of group subjectivity and collective life. The literary clinic grasps the author’s position not as a particular and personal case of a wider social and collective generality, but precisely as a problematicintersection of the personal and the collective in which the author can be viewed as a singularity capturing both personal and collective forces at once. If Masoch or Kafka suffered their own conditions at some private or personal level, it was the procedures of their literary activity that allowed a transmutation – what we have

Introduction: from: Psychoanalysis is an Antiphilosophy
Abstract: Psychoanalysis is an antiphilosophy. Despite the precision of this concept and this claim, their implications remain controversial. This book thus introduces the concept of antiphilosophy, speaks of its constitution and pertinence with respect to psychoanalysis, and examines the consequences of such a determination through a sequence of case-studies. Although the concept has some highly abstract aspects and a somewhat forbidding intellectual history, it is deployed here, first, as a kind of corrosive of received ideas, and, second, as an affirmative means of characterising psychoanalysis that captures something essential, if often elided, about the peculiar status of the practice.

2. Love as Ontology; or, Psychoanalysis against Philosophy from: Psychoanalysis is an Antiphilosophy
Abstract: Because it is an antiphilosophy, psychoanalysis has, from its beginnings, remained indifferent or suspicious towards that most philosophical of themes: ontology. One can see this indifference operating at a number of levels. The practice of psychoanalysis has not necessitated that clinical psychoanalysts intervene directly in ontological questioning, whether implicitly or explicitly. Even in the most volatile moments of its struggles to sustain itself as a singular practice, psychoanalysis has remained relatively unmoved in the face of the counter-claims, concepts and criticisms coming from philosophy – and, a fortiori, from philosophical ontologies. Indeed, the reverse is more the case: it is

Chapter 1 Introduction from: Muriel Rukeyser and Documentary
Abstract: Muriel Rukeyser – poet, biographer, novelist and playwright – remains surprisingly neglected by scholars of American literature and culture. Although a handful of scholars (whose important scholarship will be referred to in the course of this book) are helping to initiate a recovery of her work, Rukeyser is too often omitted from academic reading lists, library bookshelves and poetry anthologies. My reason for writing this book was principally to address this lack and to help instigate a proper reclamation of Rukeyser’s writing, situating her firmly in the canon of essential twentieth-century American poets and acknowledging her role as a critical

Chapter 2 The Photo-text from: Muriel Rukeyser and Documentary
Abstract: In the mid- to late 1930s, a new sub-genre of documentary developed in America. Magazine articles reporting the effects of the Depression were relying increasingly on the immediacy of visual impact, and the FSA’s photographic file soon became the primary source of images. In January 1936, Survey Graphicwas the first non-governmental magazine to feature an extended article on the programmes of what was then the Resettlement Administration, publishing photographs of sharecroppers and tenant farmers in the South. By the end of 1936, other picture magazines, notably those of the Luce empire,Fortune,LifeandLook, had also featured RA

Chapter 3 The Lives from: Muriel Rukeyser and Documentary
Abstract: This chapter further explores Rukeyser’s use of the human portrait, analysing her methods of documenting what she termed ‘exemplary lives’, and examining the extent to which the 1930s documentary impulse towards the aesthetic, ethical and iconographical representation of human beings informed Rukeyser’s own methods of biographical representation. Rukeyser said, ‘[t]he poem seems to me a meeting place just as a person’s life is a meeting place.’¹ By investigating the ways in which Rukeyser depicts human lives as ‘meeting places’, I will demonstrate how the biographies, individually and as a group, represent the coming together of several of the figures who

Chapter 6 Conclusion from: Muriel Rukeyser and Documentary
Abstract: Rukeyser begins The Life of Poetrywith a call to arms and an affirmation: ‘In time of crisis, we summon up our strength.’¹ This ‘strength’, she asserts, may be derived from ‘every forgotten image … every memory that can make us know our power’.² For Rukeyser, in a manner similar to that discovered by Francis Galton when conducting his experiments into language and mental imagery, the singular image of a boat generates and communicates a vast network of imaginative associations.³ Summoning the memory of her evacuation from Spain, Rukeyser writes simply, ‘I think now of a boat on which I

Chapter 2 Prufrock, Party-Goer: from: The Modernist Party
Author(s) McLoughlin Kate
Abstract: J. Alfred Prufrock would not rank highly on anyone’s list of party-guests. Distinctly lacking in conviviality, the protagonist of T. S. Eliot’s poem anticipates ‘the taking of a toast and tea’ as an excruciating occasion on which the ‘overwhelming question’ he wishes to pose will be, even if he can bring himself to pose it, painfully misunderstood.² The work’s critics have attributed the problem to Prufrock (or Eliot) himself,³ analysing his internal wrestling in terms of fear of female (and male) sexuality,⁴ hysteria and other psychological disorders,⁵ Matthew Arnold’s ‘buried life’,⁶ Sigmund Freud’s notion of the uncanny⁷ and Henri Bergson’s

Chapter 6 Proustian Peristalsis: from: The Modernist Party
Author(s) Ellison David R.
Abstract: The reader might wonder whether John Steinbeck’s amusing statement on ‘the nature of parties’ applies exclusively to the novel in which it appears, or whether it has a broader applicability. Cannery Row(1945), set in Monterey, California, during the Great Depression, is a concatenation of short scenes tied together by two parties – one which takes place about halfway through the book, and which is disastrous in its results, and a second one, which is planned as an act of atonement for the first one. A group of unemployed or underemployed men usually referred to as ‘The Boys’ by the narrator

Chapter 10 The Party In Extremis in D. H. Lawrence’s Women in Love from: The Modernist Party
Author(s) Norris Margot
Abstract: In Women in Love,¹ D. H. Lawrence created some of the most intense representations of early twentieth-century English parties to be found. Published in 1920, the novel had been completed in 1917, and it was difficult for contemporaries not to read the party sequences as recreations of the author’s interactions with Lady Ottoline Morrell and her circle at her Oxfordshire country home, Garsington Manor.² Lawrence and his wife Frieda were among the very first guests invited to Garsington – to attend a small birthday-party for Morrell on 16 June 1915 – and they were frequent and sometimes contentious guests there in the

Chapter 2 ‘An End to Journeying’: from: Travellers' Tales of Wonder
Abstract: ‘An End to Journeying’: thus the often-cited, era-defining title – part injunction, part lament – of the first part of Claude Lévi-Strauss’ Tristes tropiques, his seminal anthropological memoir (and, indeed, travel account) of his years in South America. First published in 1955, it was translated from French into English by John Russell in 1961 with the substantially inaccurate, and thus all the more telling, title ofA World on the Wane. The combative, exasperated, self-chastising opening sentences – ‘I hate travelling and explorers. Yet here I am proposing to tell the story of my expeditions’ (Lévi-Strauss 1976: 15) – launches

Chapter 3 Forms of Recovery and Renewal: from: Travellers' Tales of Wonder
Abstract: It might at first appear an irony: the peak in anxieties about the end of travel coincides, almost exactly, with what has been described as the ‘renaissance of the travel book’ (see for example, Graves 2003). But this convergence in the late 1970s and 1980s is more likely an expression of a broad literary and cultural engagement with questions of travel in a world increasingly on the move, increasingly interconnected. The publication of Bruce Chatwin’s In Patagoniain 1977, alongside that of Patrick Leigh Fermor’sA Time of Gifts, is often given as the literary historical moment in which travel

Chapter 6 W. G. Sebald’s Travels through ‘das unentdeckte Land’: from: Travellers' Tales of Wonder
Abstract: It seems fitting for a study in contemporary literary history to culminate in a reading of W. G. Sebald. The body of work he brought into expression from the late 1980s through to his death in a car accident in 2001, not far from his adopted home of some twenty years near Norwich, England, was itself a culmination, the harvest of a long personal apprenticeship: a German émigré, Sebald had been active as an academic in England since the 1960s, and was a professor of European literature at the University of East Anglia when his first major ‘non-academic’ work, the

Afterword: from: Travellers' Tales of Wonder
Abstract: This study began with a consideration of dimensions of the literary and cultural horizon of expectations that are often brought to bear when encountering travels in contemporary literature; that is, what we may bring with us upon ‘arrival’. Before closing, it may be appropriate to offer a consideration of what we take with us when we ‘leave’. The question is not so much, as is often the case in studies in travel writing, ‘where next?’ This study has attempted to question a model of reading travels as exclusively or primarily documents of geographical discovery, rendered precarious by the increasingly full

Conclusion from: Happy Endings in Hollywood Cinema
Abstract: Clearly, the ‘happy ending’ is not as simple as is commonly assumed. This is unsurprising, however, since most assumptions about how simple the convention is have themselves been notable precisely for their tendency to oversimplify. Indeed, if being uncharitable we could say that the true

Book Title: Post-beur Cinema-North African Émigré and Maghrebi-French Filmmaking in France since 2000
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Higbee Will
Abstract: Since the early 1980s and the arrival of Beur cinema filmmakers of Maghrebi origin have made a key contribution French cinema's representation of issues such as immigration, integration and national identity. However, they have done so mostly from a position on the margins of the industry. In contrast, since the early 2000s, Maghrebi-French and North African émigré filmmakers have occupied an increasingly prominent position on both sides of the camera, announcing their presence on French screens in a wider range of genres and styles than ever before. This greater visibility and move to the mainstream has not, however, automatically meant that these films have lost any of the social or political relevance. Indeed in the 2000s many of these films have increasingly questioned the boundaries between national, transnational and diasporic cinema, whilst simultaneously demanding, either implicitly or explicitly, a reconsideration of the very difference that has traditionally been seen as a barrier to the successful integration of North African immigrants and their descendants into French society. Through a detailed study of this transformative decade for Maghrebi-French and North African émigré filmmaking in France, this book argues for the emergence of a 'Post-Beur' cinema in the 2000s that is simultaneously global and local in its outlook. Its key features include: A comprehensive overview of the key developments in Maghrebi-French and North African émigré filmmaking in France since the 2000s: counter-heritage cinema and the memorialisation of France’s colonial past; journey narratives and the myth of return; the ‘mainstreaming’ of Maghrebi-French directors and stars; representations of Islam. Detailed case studies of key films from the 2000s that have yet to receive scholarly attention, such as Hors-la-loi, Dernier maquis and Vénus noire. An in-depth analysis of trends in production, distribution and exhibition as they relate to Maghrebi-French and North African émigré filmmakers in the 2000s.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt5hh2vh

6. SCREENING ISLAM: from: Post-beur Cinema
Abstract: Given the extent to which the integration of France’s North African Muslim population has been foregrounded in public debates over immigration, integration and national identity since the late 1980s, it is perhaps surprising that representations of Islam have remained marginal in Maghrebi-French and North African émigré filmmaking. This is even more so the case when it is considered that films by directors of North African origin have tended to foreground narratives addressing contemporary socio-political realities concerning the Maghrebi immigrant community and their French descendants. In other ways, however, this structuring absence of Islam since the 1980s finds a clear precedence

Introduction. from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Author(s) McQuillan Martin
Abstract: The Paul de Man papers are held in the Critical Theory Archive, on the fifth floor of the Langdon Library, in the Department of Special Collections and Archives at the University of California Irvine (UCI). The papers cover a wide range of material, including texts from de Man’s time as a graduate student at Harvard in the late 1950s, manuscripts of his published writing, manuscripts of essays that have since his death formed the content for published books edited by others, correspondence, and files related to his many years as a professor and teacher of comparative literature. Included in these

5 Introduction to Madame Bovary (1965) from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: Ever since its publication in 1857, Madame Bovaryhas been one of the most discussed books in the history of world literature. Despite the distinction and importance of his other novels, Flaubert had to reconcile himself to the fact that he became known, once and forever, as the author ofMadame Bovary. The popularity of the novel has increased rather than diminished with time. Numberless translations exist in various languages; the word “bovarysme” has become part of the French language; the myth surrounding the figure of Emma Bovary is so powerful that, as in the case of Don Quixote, or

10 Introduction to Studies in Romanticism (1979) from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: The essays collected in this issue come as close as one can come, in this country, to the format of what is referred to, in Germany, as an Arbeits-gruppe, an ongoing seminar oriented toward open research rather than directed by a single authoritative voice. Some of the papers originated in a year-long seminar sponsored by the National Endowment for the Humanities conducted at Yale during the academic year of 1977–78. It was entitled “The Rhetoric of Romanticism,” and the title seemed suitable enough to be retrained in this expanded version of the initial group. The additional papers were often

12 A Letter from Paul de Man (1982) from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: You generously invited me to reply to Stanley Corngold’s essay, a somewhat ambivalent assignment since I can hardly feel to be “addressed” by a discourse which, as is so often the case, addresses its own rather than my defenses or uncertainties. But since the tone of the essay suggests indictment rather than dialogue, and since the only alternative thus left to me is a plea for mercy, I welcome the opportunity to set the record straight on one specific point: the Nietzsche passage which is offered as the main exhibit to establish probable cause of my guilt.

Introduction from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Author(s) McQuillan Martin
Abstract: An entire volume could be devoted to de Man as a translator. It might include his wartime translation into Flemish of Melville’s Moby Dick,or the texts produced while working as a hired hand for Henry Kissinger’s journalConfluence,when he was making ends meet prior to becoming a Junior Fellow at Harvard and translating across a range of European languages. It would include his edition ofMadame Bovaryand the French edition of Rilke. It would certainly include de Man’s translation into English of Martin Heidegger’s Hölderlin and the Essence of Poetry, published in 1959 in theQuarterly Review

15 Hölderlin and the Essence of Poetry (1959) from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Author(s) de Man Paul
Abstract: 2. “Therefore, man was given language, the perilous of all blessings … that he bear witness to what he is…” (IV, 246).

17 Field of Comparative Literature: from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: Comparative literature has been an established field of study in European and American universities since the end of the nineteenth century: American departments such as Harvard and Columbia trace back their origins to the 1890s. The main expansion, however, took place after the Second World War, prompted by a renewed concern for the international aspects

33 From Nietzsche to Rousseau from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: The project is the outcome of a fifteen-year-long concern with the history and the poetics of romantic and post-romantic literature in France, Germany and England. It began as a study of the poetry of Mallarmé, Yeats, and George written as a doctoral dissertation at Harvard under the title “The Post-Romantic Predicament.” In the course of rewriting this thesis for publication, I increasingly felt the need for a wider historical framework reaching back to the later part of the eighteenth century. At the same time, the experience of teaching alternatively in the US and in Europe has led me to reflect

2. Gadamer’s Re-Orientation of Aesthetics from: Unfinished Worlds
Abstract: Gadamer’s approach to aesthetic experience stands squarely in the phenomenological tradition: his concern is with the place of art in our experienceof the world.² His reflection on aesthetic theory is a rare intellectual achievement, simultaneously deconstructive and constructive. It dismantles elements of the grand traditions of Platonic and Kantian aesthetics but offers, nevertheless, a phenomenological reconstruction of many of their central insights. This makes for a flexible philosophical approach to artwork which ranges freely over a number of art forms and styles, discussing both the singularity of works and their broader significance. The approach is hermeneutical: it reacquaints us

3. Aesthetic Attentiveness and the Question of Distanciation from: Unfinished Worlds
Abstract: Gadamer’s reflection on the experience of art is vexed by a tension between the existential interests that dominate his phenomenological account of experience and his rejection of Kantian disinterestedness in aesthetics. How can Gadamer defend his phenomenological approach to experience and demonstrate how art supports its cognitive concerns, and yet proclaim the autonomy of art without losing its connectedness to the everyday world? Having examined Gadamer’s critique of subjectivist aesthetics, we suggest that his approach to aesthetic attentiveness offers a persuasive reconciliation of the interested and the disinterested. The reconciliation is one of Gadamer’s greatest unremarked contributions to contemporary aesthetics.

4. Theoros and Spectorial Participation from: Unfinished Worlds
Abstract: Gadamer’s reconstruction of aesthetic experience as a participatory act offers a new valence to the part–whole relationship within hermeneutics. The emphasis given to experiential movement and transformational understanding implies participation in a part–whole nexus. In traditional literary hermeneutics, the part–whole relationship is deployed by the knowing subject as a contextualising procedure of understanding: a section of a text is explained by being set into an exposition of the whole. For Gadamer, however, the part–whole structure is not a fixed epistemological device utilised by the interpreter to set a work into a given context but an ontological

Chapter 1 ‘that trouble’: from: Regional Modernisms
Author(s) Thacker Andrew
Abstract: This chapter starts by posing a simple and seemingly rather foolish question: why are there so few regional examples of modernist ‘little magazines’ in Britain and Ireland? The foolishness of the question might be because we all know that modernism was an international or transnational phenomenon, a matter of metropolitan perceptions and urban innovation. In other words, it happens in Bloomsbury and not Birmingham, since ‘Art is a matter of capitals’, and ‘Provincialism the Enemy’, to quote two slogans of Ezra Pound.¹ Hence, it is not surprising to discover that the vast majority of the ‘little magazines’ that from the

Chapter 5 Capturing the Scale of Fiction at Mid-Century from: Regional Modernisms
Author(s) James David
Abstract: Writing in spring 1947, Storm Jameson – the prolific Yorkshire-born novelist and former president of the English centre of International PEN – used the occasion of an essay on the ‘situation’ of contemporary fiction to glance back two years and reflect on her visit to an indelibly-scarred northern Europe. From an aerial vantage point, Jameson adopts, at least initially and fleetingly, a disinterested and reportorial perspective. Then the standpoint shifts, and with it the diction and gesture of Jameson’s treatment of destruction. Dropping the objective pretence of reportage, she progresses into a more personalised and noticeably elegiac register of remembrance:

Chapter 6 Regionalism and Modernity: from: Regional Modernisms
Author(s) Head Dominic
Abstract: Some notable recent re-evaluations of English modernism have placed stress, not on the cosmopolitan and international aspects of high modernist expression, but on a surprising turn towards England – and ideas of Englishness – in late modernism. This line of argument, in which Jed Esty’s A Shrinking Island(2004) is a key landmark, was developed in a more popular format by Alexandra Harris inRomantic Moderns(2010), in a discussion which links literary trends with developments in the visual arts, giving the revisionist dynamic a purchase beyond academic publishing.¹

Chapter 9 Between the Islands: from: Regional Modernisms
Author(s) Brannigan John
Abstract: In June 1939, The Timesreported the disappearance of the Cocos Islands in the Indian Ocean, when a flying boat called theGuba,which was seeking to establish a route from Britain to Australia that did not involve crossing the Mediterranean, failed to find the islands.¹ The islands were found again the following day, when theGubareported less cloud cover, but the momentary disappearance sparked an editorial and a string of letters in the following days about the peculiar tendencies of islands. ‘Continents at least stay, for practical purposes, where they are’, declared theTimeseditorial, ‘no matter with

CHAPTER 1 Taking Leave of Our Senses from: Sensual Relations
Abstract: Anthropology’s engagement with the sensuous has shifted over the last century and a half from a concern with measuring bodies and recording sense data to an interest in sensing patterns, then from sensing patterns to reading texts, and finally from reading texts to writing culture. In the course of the latter shifts, the content of anthropological knowledge has changed from being multisensory and social to being spectacularly stylized and centered on the individual ethnographer. The result is that ethnographic authority now depends more on the “reflexivity” with which one writes than the accuracy with which one “represents” a culture (e.g.,

CHAPTER 2 Coming to Our Senses from: Sensual Relations
Abstract: In the 1980s, just as the textual revolution was entering its secondary phase and sweeping the discipline, a few anthropologists began to question the disembodied nature of much of contemporary ethnography and its conceptual reliance on language-based models of analysis. Their work prepared the ground for a sensual turn in anthropological understanding—that is, a move away from linguistic and textual paradigms toward an understanding that treats cultures as ways of sensing the world. This chapter documents this countertradition within the anthropology of the 1980s and 1990s, which culminated in the emergence of the anthropology of the senses.

CHAPTER 4 On Being in Good Taste from: Sensual Relations
Abstract: In the Massim way of sensing the world, the sense that is subject to the most restrictions is that of taste. In this chapter, we first examine how the repression (or constant deferral) of gustation is related to the centrality of exchange in Massim society, with the result that foods are classified and valued by reference to their presentability rather than their delectability. It also shows how Massim food preferences are ordered by a principle of likeness to humanity, as in the case of pork, which is reputed to be the next best thing to human flesh—at least in

CHAPTER 8 The Material Body of the Commodity from: Sensual Relations
Author(s) Marx Sensing
Abstract: The production of guides to reading the work of Karl Marx has become an industry unto itself over the years, with some of the finer titles including For Marx(Althusser 1969) andReading Marx Writing(Kempel 1995). This chapter proposes not another reading but a sensing of Marx’s life and works, keyed to the play of the senses in Marx’s writings and personal circumstances. It traces the origin of some of his most critical insights into the life of the senses under capitalism to the works of the materialist philosopher Ludwig Feuerbach and the utopianist Charles Fourier. It then the

chapter four Def Poetry Jam: from: Utopia in Performance
Abstract: Performance, as I argued by discussing monopolylogue performers in the last chapter, offers a way to practice imagining new forms of social relationships. I believe in theater’s use value as a place to fantasize how peace and justice, equality and truly participatory democracy might take hold sometime in a near or distant future, as well as in theater’s value as a place in which to connect emotionally and spiritually with other people. Seeing performance requires that we listen attentively to the speech of others, that we hear people speak and feel their humanity and its connections with our own. Performance

Disciplines, Subjectivity, and Law from: The Fate of Law
Author(s) West Robin
Abstract: Professor Sarat has asked that I address this question: Given the modern and postmodern disillusionment with reason, how should we criticize or evaluate a law? How should we go about criticizing law, if not by reference to general principles derived from reason? What does it mean, given the “death of reason,” to ask whether a particular law-say, a statute outlawing “surrogacy contracts,” or a judicial decision requiring the busing of schoolchildren to achieve integrated schools, or a law criminalizing sexual sodomy, or a constitutional provision or constitutional interpretation invalidating state statutes that criminalize abortions on demand-is a good law or

Introduction from: Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Saltz David Z.
Abstract: Though the past fifteen years have observed a veritable golden age of performance theory—a lively discourse that draws on anthropology, sociology, linguistics, psychoanalysis, political theory, cultural studies, feminism, and queer theory—performance theorists rarely draw on works emanating from American philosophy departments.¹ Similarly, very few professional philosophers have focused in depth on questions pertaining to the phenomena of theater or performance.² This situation is especially surprising given the attention recent philosophers have lavished on other art forms, such as painting, music, and film.

TWO Kenneth Burke: from: Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Puchner Martin
Abstract: Philosophy, a discipline concerned with truth, being, and the foundations of knowledge, was predestined to abhor the theater, which is premised on lying, appearance, and the construction of false worlds. Philosophical attacks on the theater, as they accompany the history of philosophy from Plato onward, are thus not only frequent but also unsurprising. At the same time, self-declared defenders of the theater, including many playwrights, have fought back by creating mock philosophers who are exposed as fools and charlatans on the stage, a tradition that begins with Aristophanes’ unflattering portrayal of Socrates in The Clouds.Indeed, Plato and Aristophanes can

SIX Embodiment and Presence: from: Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Jaeger Suzanne M.
Abstract: The following discussion addresses recent contentions in performance theory about the concept of presence. Two conflicting viewpoints are evident. First there are those for whom the lived phenomenon of presence still makes sense and is borne out in practical experience.¹ Presence is thought of as “the lingua franca” for many stage performers, acting teachers, critics, and audiences. Second are poststructuralist interpreters of performance art who reject the possibility of any singularly meaningful experience of self-presence. Experiences of presence are contested by solely linguistic explanations of the nature of meaning. The challenge, therefore, for a performance theory that aims to af‹

THIRTEEN Empathy and Theater from: Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Krasner David
Abstract: In this essay I examine “empathy” insofar as it is a possible audience response in live theater. In particular I attend to empathy not merely as an emotional response but as something possessing cognitive function as well. My main concern will be with the idea of a theatrical experience that evokes empathy, that makes use of empathetic responses as part of the mechanism of artistic comprehension, and that emphasizes emotional responses as a unique, as well as a rational, activity. The subject of emotion in fiction and art has been the central focus in several recent studies, but less has

FOURTEEN The Voice of Blackness: from: Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Sell Mike
Abstract: In “And Shine Swam On,” his most incisive description of the cultural, political, and philosophical imperatives of the Black Arts Movement (BAM), Larry Neal asks us to “listen to James Brown scream. . . . Have you ever heard a Negro poet sing like that?” He answers, “Of course not, because we have been tied to the texts, like most white poets. The text could be destroyed and no one would be hurt in the least by it.”¹ At least, no one committed to the overthrow of political and economic powers reeling from the shocks of India, Ghana, Cuba, the

Modern Realist Theory and the Study of International Politics in the Twenty-first Century from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Grieco Joseph M.
Abstract: Participants in the millennial reflections panels held under the auspices of the 2000 annual meeting of the International Studies Association were invited to offer self-critical reflections about the state of different elements of the field of international relations and to put forward recommendations on how these different elements might push forward most productively in the years ahead. Toward that end, I present ideas about some of the main contributions of modern realist theory to the study of world politics, a few of its main problems as an approach to international studies, and a sample of its most promising areas of

Realism and the Study of Peace and War from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Vasquez John
Abstract: If appraising theory and evaluating paradigms is going to lead to fruitful

Realism and the Democratic Peace: from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Midlarsky Manus I.
Abstract: For all of the now vast amount of research done on the democratic peace, there is still a chasm in that research that has only been very partially filled. Simply put, it is the virtual absence of the international security setting. This is all the more surprising because of the growth of international security as a field and the rather obvious concern that scholars in the field should have for the internationalin international relations. Perhaps it is a reaction to the emphasis on polarity during the long cold war period when structural relations dominated much of the thinking in

Progress in International Relations: from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Lake David A.
Abstract: Progress is hard to measure, especially in one’s own era. There is certainly no consensus on the general meaning of the term, even less so when applied to scholarly inquiry. Moreover, the implications of new ideas or concepts can take generations to become apparent. It is doubtful that many of the early experimenters with electricity envisioned the role harnessing that force would eventually play in modern life. Nor did Adam Smith, writing against the mercantilist orthodoxy of his day, expect economic theory to develop its axiomatic form or become the new orthodoxy two centuries later. As a subject, progress is

Universality in International Studies: from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Cox Robert W.
Abstract: One of the problems in participating on a panel entitled Alternative and Critical Perspectives is that the very nature of “alternative” is diversity and nonconformity. There can be no single alternative perspective nor any alternative school. Nor can I think of alternative as a “subfield.” Alternative is a residual category for all who are not considered to be “mainstream.” It has a clearer exclusionary meaning for those who consider themselves to be mainstream than it does for those who are so excluded. As a participant in an alternative panel, I can only write about the intellectual problems that confront me

En Route to Knowledge: from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Lapid Yosef
Abstract: Notwithstanding the general understanding that the end of the millennium may well represent an arbitrary or insignificant temporal marker, few scholarly disciplines (international relations [IR] included) have been able to resist the temptation of using this festive occasion as a pretext for another round of extensive and vigorous stock taking. Michael Burawoy, a Berkeley sociologist, perceptively notes that at

Feminist Theory and Gender Studies: from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Tickner J. Ann
Abstract: A forty-year retrospect is a difficult challenge for feminist theory and gender studies. For thirty of those years there was almost total silence on gender issues in international relations (IR); women were barely visible as scholars and foreign policy practitioners, as well as in the subject matter of the discipline. The invisibility in the discipline was not because gender was, and for some still is, irrelevant but because international relations, in both its theory and practice, was so thoroughly gendered that, in Cynthia Enloe’s words, no one noticed that women were missing.¹ So clearly, feminist approaches to IR have come

Feminism and/in International Relations: from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Zalewski Marysia
Abstract: In common with the other presenters on the millennial reflections feminist theory panel, I found the task at hand something of a challenge. At one level this should not be surprising; writing any academic paper usually is—and should be—a challenge. But there was something about the kinds of questions we were being asked to consider that clearly troubled our group. J. Ann Tickner, for example, suggested that the questions asked were not ones that “ feminists would ask when engaging in self-evaluation.”¹ Jan Jindy Pettman claimed that “it is a daunting task to respond to the challenges laid

Formal Methods in International Relations from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Nicholson Michael
Abstract: Approaches to the analysis of international relations using formal methods are now well established. Models of international relations problems appear frequently in many of the leading journals. While there are still those who hold that formal methods only manage to render obscure what had hitherto been clear, the achievements of such methods, commonplace in all the other social sciences, make such positions hard to justify. The purpose of this paper is to discuss the principles behind formalization. I also wish to justify its extensive use, mainly by conceptual argument and by referring very briefly to some of the achievements. These

Game Theory in Practice: from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Brams Steven J.
Abstract: In the last twenty or so years, there has been a surge of interest in modeling both national security and international political economy issues using the tools of game theory.¹ I will not try to cite this now extensive literature here but instead will (1) outline four major theoretical problems that have bedeviled various attempts at game-theoretic modeling of international relations (IR) and (2) propose an alternative approach, called the “theory of moves,” that is grounded in game theory and that I and others have found attractive in modeling dynamic play. I argue that it captures the thinking of decision

Convergences Between International Security Studies and Peace Studies from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Kriesberg Louis
Abstract: International security studies and peace studies are not a single subfield of international relations. Analysts in security studies and those in peace studies have generally viewed themselves and been viewed by others as working in quite different domains. Some persons in each area have been critical or dismissive of the efforts of those in the other. Nevertheless, many persons across both areas actually share significant concerns and questions, such as how to avoid or to limit wars and other violent conflicts. Furthermore, the work being done in each of these domains is increasingly overlapping. To enhance the possibilities of beneficial

Notes from the Underground: from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Miller Linda B.
Abstract: The invitation to participate in a millennial reflections panel on international security and peace studies and to publish these remarks arrived at a propitious moment. The public opportunity to reappraise my own academic career as I was already doing privately meant a chance to ruminate in a way that might have value for younger scholars at earlier stages of their careers. And since my own trajectory closely parallels that of the International Studies Association (ISA) in terms of time, such an overview should be of general interest to the membership.

International Political Economy: from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Martin Lisa L.
Abstract: In their instructions to the millennial reflections panel participants, the organizers of these panels suggested that they were necessary, in part, because of the increasing diversity of subfields and sections in the International Studies Association. They wrote that this diversity “has made increasingly difficult the crucial task of identifying intrasubfield consensus about important theoretical and/or empirical insights.” In this essay, I take issue with the organizers’ claim.

2 MODALITIES OF SCIENCE: from: The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: the present inquiry does not aim at theoretical knowledge like the others (for we are inquiring not in order to know what virtue is, but in order to become good, since otherwise our inquiry would have been of no use), we must examine the nature of actions, namely how we ought to do them. . . . now, that we must act according to the right rule is a common principle

Book Title: The Neuroscientific Turn-Transdisciplinarity in the Age of the Brain
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Johnson Jenell M.
Abstract: The Neuroscientific Turnbrings together 19 scholars from a variety of fields to reflect on the promises of and challenges facing emergent "neurodisciplines" such as neuroethics, neuroeconomics, and neurohistory. In the aftermath of the Decade of the Brain, neuroscience has become one of the hottest topics of study---not only for scientists but also, increasingly, for scholars from the humanities and social sciences. While the popular press has simultaneously lauded and loathed the coming "neurorevolution," the academy has yet to voice any collective speculations about whether there is any coherence to this neuroscientific turn; what this turn will and should produce; and what implications it has for inter- or transdisciplinary inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.4585194

Chapter 2 The Performativity of a Historical Brain Event: from: The Neuroscientific Turn
Author(s) Bell Jameson Kismet
Abstract: Since the early nineteenth century, the military surgeon Hans von Gersdorff’s (ca. 1455–1529) Feldtbuch der Wundartzney(1517) and medical doctor Lorenz Fries’s (ca. 1490–1530)Spiegel der Artzney(1518) have been used as a keying mechanism to help delimit the boundaries of the modern brain.¹ Gersdorff’s book includes fugitive sheets (fliegende Blätter), one of which represents an anatomized body and brain in a single sheet broadside; copies of this fugitive sheet were subsequently reprinted the next year in Fries’s text. In the history of the brain, these images mark the beginning of all subsequent, similarly represented cerebral cortices.² Hans

Chapter 7 Pragmatic Neuroethics and Neuroscience’s Potential to Radically Change Ethics from: The Neuroscientific Turn
Author(s) Zimmerman Emma
Abstract: Neuroscience research is increasingly informing ethics scholarship and ethics practices under the impetus of the fields of the neuroscience of ethics and of social neuroscience. This neuroturn within the field of ethics promises to enhance understanding of ourselves and of our fellow human beings. It has been argued that this knowledge will be a route to foster happiness in individual lives and the foundation of brain-based ethical norms and behaviors that will lead to greater social well-being (Changeux 1996, 1981). For example, Gazzaniga states that neuroscience will bring radical changes to ethics: “Neuroethics is more than just bioethics for the

Chapter 9 Neuroeconomics: from: The Neuroscientific Turn
Author(s) Rothschild Casey
Abstract: Neuroeconomicsis a term that has received significant media exposure over the past decade (Bonanno et al. 2008). It has been hailed as a discipline that can answer a number of fundamental questions in the area of economics, while it offers up a new set of findings that can augment and potentially alter standard economic practice (Camerer, Loewenstein, and Prelec 2005). It is, along with its close cousin behavioral economics, one of the fastest growing subdisciplines in the field and even has its own listing in theJournal of Economic Literatureclassification system.¹

Conclusion from: The Immaterial Book
Abstract: As I proposed in chapter 4, the sealed book in the enchanted theater in Wroth’s Uraniacalls to mind the book with seven seals in Revelation, perhaps the most book-filled portion of the Bible. There, St. John observes God holding the Book of Truth: “And I sawe in the right hand of him that sate upon the throne, a Boke written within, and on the backeside, sealed with seven seales.”¹ Christ appears as a slain lamb and begins to open the seals, releasing more visions and voices with each stage of opening, so that all the images and admonitions of

CHAPTER 1 Introduction from: Strung Together
Abstract: String theory is reputed to have begun in 1968, when a postdoctoral fellow named Gabrielle Veneziano, working at CERN,¹ one of the world’s leading high energy physics laboratories, proposed a solution to a vexing problem concerning the interaction of subatomic particles in the nuclei of atoms. He accomplished this by using a formula he had found in an eighteenth-century mathematics text.² Two years later, three other theorists—Yoichiro Nambu, Leonard Susskind, and Holger Nielsen—independently suggested that Veneziano’s redeployment of this antique mathematical function implied that the particles that formed the nuclei of atoms were not actually zero-dimensional point-particles, but

CHAPTER 2 A Return to the Eleventh Dimension from: Strung Together
Abstract: [Scott] Mehring, of Mechanicsburg, Pennsylvania, is forty-eight years old, the onetime owner of a business that had something to do with performance cars. He wore a tight leather motorcycle jacket with no visible shirt underneath and had a Rod Stewart haircut. He liked to party, he told me, and was ready to go out and party hard, but because he’d lost his license for various reasons he had no car and his cab had not yet arrived. So, sure, he’d be happy to share his views with me. I took out my recorder.

CHAPTER 6 Strung Together from: Strung Together
Abstract: As with many, I first encountered string theory when I picked up a copy of Brian Greene’s popularization, The Elegant Universe,in 1999. Having at the time a passing familiarity with the counterintuitive idiosyncrasies of quantum theory, I was drawn to it by the prospect of discovering further strangeness lurking in the remotest recesses of the subatomic universe. Thus captivated by what I took to be the astonishing ideas of string theory itself, I paid little attention to the manner in which those ideas were expressed. In effect, I was not entirely cognizant of the book’s patently romantic undertone. It

Book Title: The Real and the Sacred-Picturing Jesus in Nineteenth-Century Fiction
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): GATRALL JEFFERSON J. A.
Abstract: The figure of Jesus appears as a character in dozens of nineteenth-century novels, including works by Balzac, Flaubert, Dickens, Dostoevsky, and others. The Real and the Sacredfocuses in particular on two fiction genres: the Jesus redivivus tale and the Jesus novel. In the former, Christ makes surprise visits to earth, from rural Flanders (Balzac) and Muscovy (Turgenev) to the bustling streets of Paris (Flaubert), Seville (Dostoevsky), Berlin, and Boston. In the latter, the historical Jesus wanders through the picturesque towns and plains of first-century Galilee and Judea, attracting followers and enemies. In short, authors subjected Christ, the second person of the Christian trinity, to the realist norms of secular fiction. Thus the Jesus of nineteenth-century fiction was both situated within a specific time and place, whether ancient or modern, and positioned before the gaze of increasingly daring literary portraitists. The highest artistic challenge for authors was to paint, using mere words, a faithful picture of Jesus in all his humanity. The incongruity of a sacred figure inhabiting secular literary forms nevertheless tested the limits of modern realist style no less than the doctrine of Christ's divinity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.5339783

CHAPTER 1 The Jesus Novel from: The Real and the Sacred
Abstract: In 1830, the English writer Harriet Martineau published a short novel titled Traditions of Palestine.Given her trailblazing career as the “first woman sociologist,”¹ Martineau’s biographers tend to reserve no more than passing reference to this youthful work from her oeuvre. Martineau nevertheless claimed to “cherish” this “little volume” alongsideEastern Life, Past and Present(1848)—a freethinker’s travelogue to the Holy Land—above all her other writings. After its success in London, the novel was republished in the United States, later translated into French, and reprinted as late as 1892, more than a quarter century after the author’s death.

CHAPTER 6 Eclipse of the Christ Image from: The Real and the Sacred
Abstract: In Lev Tolstoy’s folktale “Where Love Is, There God Is Also” (1884), the protagonist, a pious shoemaker, hears what he believes to be Christ’s voice one night in his sleep: “Martin! Watch outside tomorrow, I’m coming.”¹ The next day, Martin sees, passing before his window, an old man struggling through the snow, a soldier’s wife out begging with her newborn, and an elderly market woman quarrelling with a boy thief. One by one, Martin invites these guests into his home, listens to their troubles, and assists them however he can. At the end of the day, disappointed at not having

3 DEMOCRATIC PEACE AS A PUBLIC CONVENTION from: Democratic Peace
Abstract: The multiplicity of configurations and the multiplicity of options within each configuration support the claim that theory indeed is a theoretical construction, or a mode of political thought in Freeden’s sense. Theories offer not just explanations for complex phenomena, but also an inclusive understanding of the phenomena. They do this by defining the political concepts and thus decontesting them. This is a point worth stressing: theories do offer explanations—that being their manifest function, after all—but on a prior and deeper level, they define political concepts for usand in so doing, equipuswith a road map to

CONCLUSIONS: from: Democratic Peace
Abstract: Though faltering at times, the democratic peace theories have thriving lives. The aim of this book has been to trace those lives, understand them theoretically, and assess them in normative terms. Theoretically, the migration of theory to the nonacademic world was conceptualized through the hermeneutical mechanism model. By focusing on a theory’s internal structure as an assemblage of political concepts, this book conceptualizes theories as theoretical constructions, a form of idea entity, and moreover, a form of political thought: a configuration of decontested political concepts arranged together, each conferring meaning on the others and receiving meaning from them. Thus, theories

1 Introduction from: Forging the World
Author(s) Roselle Laura
Abstract: Communication and power are the touchstones for the study of strategic narrative. The concept of strategic narrative focuses our attention, as both International Relations scholars and analysts of foreign policy—and as students wishing to understand more about the world around us—on a world in which power and communication technologies are in the midst of a rapid transition. The aim of this volume is to highlight the explanatory power of the concept of strategic narrative. We do this by focusing on a set of empirical studies across a range of important issues in international affairs. These studies demonstrate how

8 Strategic Narratives of the Arab Spring and After from: Forging the World
Author(s) Price Monroe E.
Abstract: Our quondam certainties about what occurred during the 2011 “Arab Spring” have faded.¹ What even to call the series of events in Tunisia, Egypt, and beyond is increasingly problematic, given the less than rosy aftermath to the initial protests (see for example, “Arab Spring” 2013). The struggle over nomenclature underscores the power of stories and their limitations in policy and political change. The uprisings were replete with projected narratives, narratives whose proponents sought to shape current and future events as protestors took to the streets and state actors dug in their heels to retain power. These strategic narratives were constructed

10 Filling the Narrative Vacuum in a Global Crisis: from: Forging the World
Author(s) O’Loughlin Ben
Abstract: The silhouette of the triple disasters striking Japan in March 2011 had loomed large for several decades in Japan (cf. Kittler 2010, 25). The country is regularly beset with natural disasters, while the iconography of nuclear energy and disaster is embedded in Japanese culture through the mushroom clouds of Hiroshima, the films of Godzilla (Kirby 2011), and Katsuhiro Otomo’s 2005 film Steamboy(see Sotinel 2011). Its material infrastructure is as prepared as any for earthquakes (Kingston 2012, 2). Risk was known and anticipated. On March 11 the fourth largest earthquake reported globally since 1900 hit in the sea just east

Book Title: Traces of the Past-Classics between History and Archaeology
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Bassi Karen
Abstract: What are we doing when we walk into an archaeological museum or onto an archaeological site? What do the objects and features we encounter in these unique places mean and, more specifically, how do they convey to us something about the beliefs and activities of formerly living humans? In short, how do visible remains and ruins in the present give meaning to the human past? Karen Bassi addresses these questions through detailed close readings of canonical works spanning the archaic to the classical periods of ancient Greek culture, showing how the past is constituted in descriptions of what narrators and characters see in their present context. She introduces the term protoarchaeological to refer to narratives that navigate the gap between linguistic representation and empirical observation-between words and things-in accessing and giving meaning to the past. Such narratives invite readers to view the past as a receding visual field and, in the process, to cross the disciplinary boundaries that divide literature, history, and archaeology.Aimed at classicists, literary scholars, ancient historians, cultural historians, and archaeological theorists, the book combines three areas of research: time as a feature of narrative structure in literary theory; the concept of "the past itself" in the philosophy of history; and the ontological status of material objects in archaeological theory. Each of five central chapters explores how specific protoarchaeological narratives-from the fate of Zeus' stone in Hesiod's Theogony to the contest between words and objects in Aristophanes' Frogs-both expose and attempt to bridge this gap. Throughout, the book serves as a response to Herodotus' task in writing the Histories, namely, to ensure that "the past deeds of men do not fade with time."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.8785930

CHAPTER 1 The Landscape of the Past in Hesiod’s Theogony from: Traces of the Past
Abstract: As succinctly expressed in its opening line, “Let us begin to sing” ἀρχώμεθ᾿ ἀείδειν, 1)), Hesiod’s Theogonyis about the beginning of time as the motivation for the beginning of poetic production.² The question before us is how the visible or material world is part of the poem’s temporal environment. In general, scholarly attention paid to material or visible objects in archaic poetry has taken two routes. On the one hand, they are the source of aesthetic effects in ecphrastic passages, with the Shield of Achilles in the Iliad taking pride of place.³ On the other hand, they are marshaled

CHAPTER 2 The Hypothetical Past and the Achaean Wall in the Iliad from: Traces of the Past
Abstract: According to John Camp, walls are the “most enduring evidence of antiquity surviving in the landscape today.”² As features in the built environment, the remains of walls delimit the lives of ancient humans in both time and space; they give substance to the past. Perhaps it is not surprising that the prominence of walls as archaeological features is shared by their prominence as narrative plot devices. They stand out (as it were) in both contexts. It might even be said that walls occupy a unique position as both signifiers of cultural production and structures within narrative. Between their existence as

The Problem of Publicité in the Archives of Second Empire France from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Milligan Jennifer S.
Abstract: In his scathing essay on the coup d’état that brought France’s Second Empire to power, Karl Marx produced some of his most memorable (or at least quotable) musings on the nature of history. “Men,” he wrote, “make their own history, but they do not make it just as they please; they do not make it under circumstances chosen by themselves, but under circumstances encountered, given and transmitted from the past.”¹ Focused on material conditions, Marx’s criticism did not extend to the Archives, where Louis Napoleon’s imperial government sought to control the conditions for men to write French history. For Léon

Archiving/Architecture from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Kleinman Kent
Abstract: It is conventional and useful for both architects and archivists to recognize that architecture exists in two distinct modes: first, the built artifact and, second, representations of that artifact. This division is useful precisely because it allows architecture in the second sense to be collected, cataloged, and protected by archival institutions without the necessity of dealing with the messy business of built work. The Le Corbusier Foundation in Paris does not collect buildings by the French master, although it is housed in one; the Mies van der Rohe archive at the Museum of Modern Art in New York contains not

“Records of Simple Truth and Precision”: from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Schwartz Joan M.
Abstract: The caricature shows a crowd of people pushing into the enterprising establishment of Susse Frères, attracted by an enormous advertisement to buy daguerreotypes for New Year’s gifts. Over the entrance large notices proclaim that “Non-inverted pictures can be taken in 13 minutes without sunshine.” While one photographer is just aiming his camera up the skirts of a tight-rope dancer on the left, another tries to take the portrait of a child whose

Out of the Closet and into the Archives? from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Grossmann Atina
Abstract: Frank Mecklenburg discusses the Leo Baeck Institute (LBI) Archives as an institution initially established for the preservation and generation of social memories among a group whose collective identity—as the much-mythologized German-speaking Jews of prewar central Europe—is rapidly fading, as well as a repository whose contents are increasingly relevant not only to scholarship but to the highly contested production of political culture for both Jews and Germans. The texts, photographs, and artifacts contained in the archives have long provided fodder for well-trodden academic debates about the fate of German Jewry: cultural symbiosis versus failed assimilation, proud legacy of cosmopolitan

Introduction from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Abstract: The diverse essays included in this section take up complicated questions about the role of archives in conditioning social memory and creating certain kinds of cultural understandings. The complex relationship between social memories and elements of social culture is itself a growing area of concern in the fields of history, literature, anthropology, and social psychology. Not surprisingly, the relationship between archives and social memory provoked lively discussion among scholars in all of these fields at our interdisciplinary seminar. At its core, the question involves a set of issues that bear directly on understandings of what is a record, what is

Archives, Heritage, and History from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Lowenthal David
Abstract: Diverse archival aims mirror diverse uses of the past in general. At one extreme are disinterested efforts to learn and understand what has actually happened; at the other, partisan zeal to fabricate a past that suits present needs—to forge an identity, to secure a legacy, to validate a conquest or a claim, to prove a preeminence. The role of archives in these contrary goals is symptomatic, indeed, crucial. The conflict is exemplified today in a widening gulf between established archival repute and emerging archival reality.

Classified Federal Records and the End of the Cold War: from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Joyce William L.
Abstract: In the fall of 1992, Congress passed the President John F. Kennedy Assassination Records Collection Act (PL-102-526, codiaed as 44 U.S.C. 2107) (ARCA) in an attempt to address the suspicion that the federal government had been involved in a cover-up of the November 1963 assassination of President John F. Kennedy. Soon after taking office and eager to reassure the public, President Lyndon B. Johnson appointed a commission to investigate the slaying of the president, the President’s Commission to Investigate the Assassination of President Kennedy, more commonly known as the Warren Commission. The commission concluded that Lee Harvey Oswald, acting alone,

Redemption’s Archive: from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Eiss Paul K.
Abstract: While Alice brushed the White Queen’s tousled hair, the monarch offered her employ as a lady’s maid for a salary of two pence a week, along with a regular ration of jam. As Lewis Carroll relates in Through the Looking Glass, Alice was disinclined to accept in any case. Nonetheless, she grew disturbed when the White Queen informed her that the offered jam was only to be given “every other day”—that is, only “yesterday” and “tomorrow” but never “today.” Alice immediately realized that she would never receive jam on the series of “todays” that she worked but rather could

Television Archives and the Making of Collective Memory: from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Kansteiner Wulf
Abstract: Television archives play a vital role in the day-to-day business of the television industry. They help television makers identify footage and ideas for the programs of tomorrow. Consequently, the archives are organized to support the production process, and any other function is secondary to that objective. At the same time, by default not design, television archives contain the cultural legacy of the twentieth century and play a key role in the infrastructure of modern memory. On the one hand, they house the blockbuster television events and hit series that are recycled so frequently that they seem to be permanently established

The Historian and the Source: from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Ananich Boris V.
Abstract: The analysis of historical sources is perhaps the most important aspect of a historian’s work. The professional competence of the historian can be measured by his or her ability to make the right choices when choosing from many sources, as well as by his or her ability to ascertain the authenticity of a source, verify the information it contains, and compel it to “speak.” Even if the validity of the information contained within the source is doubtful, it still retains value as a rebection of its epoch—a source of information about the time and the individuals responsible for its

Book Title: Microdramas-Crucibles for Theater and Time
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Muse John H.
Abstract: In Microdramas, John H. Muse argues that plays shorter than twenty minutes deserve sustained attention, and that brevity should be considered a distinct mode of theatrical practice. Focusing on artists for whom brevity became both a structural principle and a tool to investigate theater itself (August Strindberg, Maurice Maeterlinck, F. T. Marinetti, Samuel Beckett, Suzan-Lori Parks, and Caryl Churchill), the book explores four episodes in the history of very short theater, all characterized by the self-conscious embrace of brevity. The story moves from the birth of the modernist microdrama in French little theaters in the 1880s, to the explicit worship of speed in Italian Futurist synthetic theater, to Samuel Beckett's often-misunderstood short plays, and finally to a range of contemporary playwrights whose long compilations of shorts offer a new take on momentary theater.Subjecting short plays to extended scrutiny upends assumptions about brief or minimal art, and about theatrical experience. The book shows that short performances often demand greater attention from audiences than plays that unfold more predictably. Microdramas put pressure on preconceptions about which aspects of theater might be fundamental and about what might qualify as an event. In the process, they suggest answers to crucial questions about time, spectatorship, and significance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.9380984

FOUR The Shape of Time in Beckett’s Late Theater from: Microdramas
Abstract: In Samuel Beckett’s play Endgame, as Clov fervently collects a few objects littering the ground, he says, in frustration, “I’m doing my best to create a little order.”¹ Clov yearns to bring the single room that bounds his exis tence under control, to combat entropy with habit. Clov’s statement is, on one level, the complaint of a weary domestic servant employing chores as consolation to make the space he tends for three other people more tolera ble. But he is also a stage manager and property master who lifts the hand kerchief from Hamm’s face like a curtain, structures the

Book Title: American Night-The Literary Left in the Era of the Cold War
Publisher: The University of North Carolina Press
Author(s): WALD ALAN M.
Abstract: American Night, the final volume of an unprecedented trilogy, brings Alan Wald's multigenerational history of Communist writers to a poignant climax. Using new research to explore the intimate lives of novelists, poets, and critics during the Cold War, Wald reveals a radical community longing for the rebirth of the social vision of the 1930s and struggling with a loss of moral certainty as the Communist worldview was being called into question. The resulting literature, Wald shows, is a haunting record of fracture and struggle linked by common structures of feeling, ones more suggestive of the "negative dialectics" of Theodor Adorno than the traditional social realism of the Left.Establishing new points of contact among Kenneth Fearing, Ann Petry, Alexander Saxton, Richard Wright, Jo Sinclair, Thomas McGrath, and Carlos Bulosan, Wald argues that these writers were in dialogue with psychoanalysis, existentialism, and postwar modernism, often generating moods of piercing emotional acuity and cosmic dissent. He also recounts the contributions of lesser known cultural workers, with a unique accent on gays and lesbians, secular Jews, and people of color. The vexing ambiguities of an era Wald labels "late antifascism" serve to frame an impressive collective biography.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5149/9780807837344_wald

Book Title: The Science of the Soul in Colonial New England- Publisher: The University of North Carolina Press
Author(s): RIVETT SARAH
Abstract: The Science of the Soulchallenges long-standing notions of Puritan provincialism as antithetical to the Enlightenment. Sarah Rivett demonstrates that, instead, empiricism and natural philosophy combined with Puritanism to transform the scope of religious activity in colonial New England from the 1630s to the Great Awakening of the 1740s.In an unprecedented move, Puritan ministers from Thomas Shepard and John Eliot to Cotton Mather and Jonathan Edwards studied the human soul using the same systematic methods that philosophers applied to the study of nature. In particular, they considered the testimonies of tortured adolescent girls at the center of the Salem witch trials, Native American converts, and dying women as a source of material insight into the divine. Conversions and deathbed speeches were thus scrutinized for evidence of grace in a way that bridged the material and the spiritual, the visible and the invisible, the worldly and the divine.In this way, the "science of the soul" was as much a part of seventeenth- and eighteenth-century natural philosophy as it was part of post-Reformation theology. Rivett's account restores the unity of religion and science in the early modern world and highlights the role and importance of both to transatlantic circuits of knowledge formation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5149/9780807838709_rivett

Book Title: Sufi Narratives of Intimacy-Ibn 'Arabī, Gender, and Sexuality
Publisher: The University of North Carolina Press
Author(s): Shaikh Saʿdiyya
Abstract: Thirteenth-century Sufi poet, mystic, and legal scholar Muhyi al-Din ibn al-'Arabi gave deep and sustained attention to gender as integral to questions of human existence and moral personhood. Reading his works through a critical feminist lens, Sa'diyya Shaikh opens fertile spaces in which new and creative encounters with gender justice in Islam can take place. Grounding her work in Islamic epistemology, Shaikh attends to the ways in which Sufi metaphysics and theology might allow for fundamental shifts in Islamic gender ethics and legal formulations, addressing wide-ranging contemporary challenges including questions of women's rights in marriage and divorce, the politics of veiling, and women's leadership of ritual prayer.Shaikh deftly deconstructs traditional binaries between the spiritual and the political, private conceptions of spiritual development and public notions of social justice, and the realms of inner refinement and those of communal virtue. Drawing on the treasured works of Sufism, Shaikh raises a number of critical questions about the nature of selfhood, subjectivity, spirituality, and society to contribute richly to the prospects of Islamic feminism as well as feminist ethics more broadly.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5149/9780807869864_shaikh

Chapter One Craving Completion from: Sufi Narratives of Intimacy
Abstract: Springing from the heart of Islam’s spiritual reservoir, Taṣwwuf, or Sufism, can be described as the process by which a believer embraces the full spiritual consequences of God’s oneness (tawḥīd).¹ The goal of the Sufi path is to enable a human being, through the cultivation of virtuous excellence (ihsān), to commune directly and experientially with her Creator. In the historical development of Sufism, one encounters varied and increasingly sophisticated notions of the mystical path, orṭarīqa. Such a path generally entails that the Sufi aspirant, under the guidance of a spiritual master, follows a practical method of purification and refinement

Chapter Two Charting Ibn ʿArabī’s Religious Anthropology from: Sufi Narratives of Intimacy
Abstract: It is a beautiful starlit night. Ibn ʿArabī, a Sufi teacher revered throughout Muslim lands, is within the sacred precincts of the Ka ɔba, the cubelike focal point of Muslim prayers in Mecca.¹ This evening, the house of worship is characterized by a feeling of almost intense quiet despite the large number of devotees. Savoring the gentle breeze caressing his face, Ibn ʿArabī experiences a profound state of tranquility. Circling the outer perimeter of the holy sanctuary, he becomes increasingly oblivious of his surroundings, his state of contemplation simultaneously expanding and intensifying. Suddenly, a few lines of poetry leap to his

Chapter Three Mysticism and Gender from: Sufi Narratives of Intimacy
Abstract: Ibn ʿArabī’s sophisticated cosmology, his profound understandings of human nature and the processes of spiritual transformation for men and women alike, and his sometimes radical gendered legal positions were birthed from within the complexities of his experience, both mystical and mundane. Using the insightful feminist adage that “the personal is political,” this chapter explores aspects of Ibn ʿArabī’s life and relationships as he presents them, imagining how these experiences created the background against which he received mystical insights and shaped his mystical understandings. For an epistemology of spiritual experience, mystical “openings” occur within a flesh-and-blood person whose personal disposition and

Book Title: Understanding Health Inequalities and Justice-New Conversations across the Disciplines
Publisher: The University of North Carolina Press
Author(s): Walker Rebecca L.
Abstract: The need for informed analyses of health policy is now greater than ever. The twelve essays in this volume show that public debates routinely bypass complex ethical, sociocultural, historical, and political questions about how we should address ideals of justice and equality in health care. Integrating perspectives from the humanities, social sciences, medicine, and public health, this volume illuminates the relationships between justice and health inequalities to enrich debates. Understanding Health Inequalities and Justiceexplores three questions: How do scholars approach relations between health inequalities and ideals of justice? When do justice considerations inform solutions to health inequalities, and how do specific health inequalities affect perceptions of injustice? And how can diverse scholarly approaches contribute to better health policy? From addressing patient agency in an inequitable health care environment to examining how scholars of social justice and health care amass evidence, this volume promotes a richer understanding of health and justice and how to achieve both.The contributors are Judith C. Barker, Paula Braveman, Paul Brodwin, Jami Suki Chang, Debra DeBruin, Leslie A. Dubbin, Sarah Horton, Carla C. Keirns, J. Paul Kelleher, Nicholas B. King, Eva Feder Kittay, Joan Liaschenko, Anne Drapkin Lyerly, Mary Faith Marshall, Carolyn Moxley Rouse, Jennifer Prah Ruger, and Janet K. Shim.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5149/9781469630366_buchbinder

1 Health Difference, Disparity, Inequality, or Inequity—What Difference Does It Make What We Call It? from: Understanding Health Inequalities and Justice
Author(s) Braveman Paula
Abstract: Over the past two and a half decades, distinct approaches have been taken to defining and measuring health inequalities or disparities and health equity. Some efforts have focused on technical issues in measurement, at times without addressing the implications for the concepts themselves and how that might influence action. Others have focused on the concepts, sometimes without adequately addressing the implications for measurement. This chapter contrasts a few different approaches, examining their conceptual bases and the implications for measurement and policy. It argues for an approach to defining health inequalities and health equity that centers explicitly on notions of justice

2 Global Health Inequalities and Justice from: Understanding Health Inequalities and Justice
Author(s) Ruger Jennifer Prah
Abstract: Moral philosophers have for some time been arguing that global poverty and associated human suffering are universal concerns, and that there is a moral obligation, not just a matter of charity, for wealthier countries to do more to alleviate global poverty. The scope of this moral concern is the topic of considerable debate, and it is unclear to many that this obligation is grounded in justice, rather than in humanitarian duties to foreigners. In this chapter I suggest that if we are serious about addressing the problem of global health inequalities, we need to develop a better conception of global

7 Justice, Respect, and Recognition in Mental Health Services: from: Understanding Health Inequalities and Justice
Author(s) Brodwin Paul
Abstract: Posing questions about justice and inequality in the realm of mental health services opens up two very different lines of analysis. A long tradition of social epidemiology demonstrates the disproportionate burden of mental illness associated with poverty, migration, and membership in stigmatized ethnic and racial groups (Ngui et al. 2013; Kessler et al. 2012; Martins et al. 2012).¹ This approach begins with objective epidemiological data and then launches a normative argument about the psychiatric sequelae of social injustice. The inequalities documented in this literature arise from large-scale social arrangements, including class hierarchy, global imbalances of resources and opportunities, and symbolic

Capítulo 4 LA VANGUARDIA REHUMANIZADA: from: Visiones de Estereoscopio
Abstract: La imagen de la mujer completa e integral que ofrecen las escri-toras y artistas de la vanguardia tiene su correspondiente para-lelo en el perfil del nuevo modelo de hombre ético y polĺtico pro-puesto en muchas de las obras de la vanguardia española. No hay discrepancias, por tanto, en este sentido en cuanto al proyecto etico y sociopolĺtico defendido por gran número de estos intelectuales. La conceptualización humana e ideológica articulada en el nuevo arte y la nueva literatura necesita, sin embargo, crear un punto de contraste donde poder confrontar la imagen del hombre nuevo. Como en el caso de la

Book Title: The Poetics of Inconstancy-Etienne Durand and the End of Renaissance Verse
Publisher: University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill Department of Romance Studies
Author(s): ROGERS HOYT
Abstract: The transformation of Late Petrarchism from earlier stages reflects a profound shift in cultural values--a 'crisis of the Renaissance' that generated new perspectives in poetic theory and practice. Broadly, this book identifies a distinctive 'poetics of inconstancy' that came to the fore at the end of the sixteenth century and pervaded the love verse of the age. At the same time, as a study based on the inductive method, the book takes as its point of departure a single poet: Etienne Durand. Because of his frequently anthologized 'Stances a l'Inconstance,' Durand is often singled out as 'the poet of inconstancy.' This study, however, identifies the theme of universal change as a hallmark of Durand's contemporaries as well--a signal of a stylistic revolution that heralded the end of Renaissance verse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5149/9781469641676_rogers

Introduction: from: The Poetics of Inconstancy
Abstract: Late Petrarchism differs notably from its earlier stages. Its transformation reflects a profound shift in cultural values – a “crisis of the Renaissance”¹ which opens new perspectives in poetic theory and practice. On a broad level, this book will identify a distinctive “poetics of inconstancy” which comes to the fore at the end of the sixteenth century, and which pervades the love verse of the age. At the same time, as a study based on the inductive method, it will take a single poet as its point of departure: Etienne Durand, whose Poésies complètesare now widely available for the

Chapter I THE PETRARCHIST TRADITION from: The Poetics of Inconstancy
Abstract: Given its date of publication, the love poem cycle of Durand’s Méditationsbelongs inevitably to the Petrarchist tradition. Beginning with Scève,¹ all French love poets of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries draw heavily on the common fund of themes, images, and vaguely Platonic theories inherited from Italy.² Any global definition of Petrarchism would have to include the style and motifs used by Petrarch himself, the classicism of the Bembists, the freer variations of Tansillo and others, and the imitations of all these Italian sources in other languages – with the latter inspiring further imitations in their turn.³ But since the

Chapter III THE THEME OF INCONSTANCY from: The Poetics of Inconstancy
Abstract: In his reminiscences of Durand, Guillaume Colletet already singled out the “Stances à l’Inconstance” as “toutes merveilleuses” (p. XVI); the renewal of interest in Durand in the last forty years was originally sparked by this poem alone. Unfortunately, their enthusiasm for the “Stances” has led some critics to dismiss his other verse from serious consideration. To do so is to misunderstand the “Stances” themselves, which take on their full meaning only in relation to the Méditationsproper, with their emphasis on constancy. Of these poems Yves Bonnefoy writes in his “Préface” (p. III): “LesMéditations, c’est l’envahissement d’une poésie qui

Chapter IV THE POETICS OF INCONSTANCY from: The Poetics of Inconstancy
Abstract: The inconstancy praised by Durand and his contemporaries transcends the bounds of simple infidelity: it represents a universal principle of instability and change. The rising popularity of this topostoward the end of the sixteenth century reflects a shift, not only in literary poses, but also in literary practice. If the original tenets of Petrarchism are undermined by a new stance toward the beloved, the poetic technique of Durand and other Petrarchists of his time undergoes a parallel evolution. It is revealed, for example, in the treatment of religious motifs within an amorous context, where they function in an appreciably

2. Soberanía genérica. from: José Revueltas y Roberto Bolaño
Abstract: Independientemente que se le califique como “nacional,” “popular,” “campesina” o simplemente como “una

3. 1968: from: José Revueltas y Roberto Bolaño
Abstract: José Revueltas es quizás la figura más destacada y polémica del 68 en México. Figuración ambigua que por supuesto se encuentra en su obra literaria y política: por un lado, diagnostica que el proletariado en México se encuentra sin cabeza, o lleva sobre los hombros una cabeza que no es suya, esto es, reclama una vanguardia o verdadero Partido Comunista Leninista. Por el otro, y retomando en su obra el impacto del anarquista Ricardo Flórez Magón (1874-1922), figura clave del replanteamiento de la cuestión obrera en México (de ahí en parte el interés de Revueltas en él),¹ postula nociones de

6. ¿Fascismo y sadismo en Chile? from: José Revueltas y Roberto Bolaño
Abstract: “Todas las poetisas están muertas.” Esa es la frase que pronuncia Alberto Ruiz-Tagle, asesino en serie de mujeres en la novela Estrella distantede Roberto Bolaño (1996). Ruiz-Tagle elegía sus víctimas en los talleres de literatura de la ciudad de Concepción en Chile en 1973 y 1974. Ruiz-Tagle, o Carlos Wieder como se le conocerá después, militar que escribe poemas en el aire, artista-asesino cuyas víctimas no logran reconocer la verdad que anuncia este “poeta autodidacta”: “está a punto de nacer la ‘nueva poesía chilena’” (Bolaño,Estrella distante30). A renglón seguido de esta frase, Wieder asesina precisamente a dos

Palabras de salida from: José Revueltas y Roberto Bolaño
Abstract: Describir el trayecto del proyecto implica recordar que el criterio para relacionar a Revueltas y Bolaño—y a los capítulos—no fue el de obra o autor, sino el de problemas. Y recrear la tentativa de engranaje. Allí donde la historia coagula en meros hechos o catálogo de sucesos, la filosofía emerge para mostrar la disparidad de esta con respecto al devenir. Donde cae en el historicismo, y pierde de vista la totalidad (abierta) sucumbiendo en el relativismo, la literatura muestra los diversos rostros de la verdad, desfigurándolos para llevarlos tan lejos como sea posible.

Book Title: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings- Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): Le Bon de Beauvoir Sylvie
Abstract: "The Useless Mouths" and Other Literary Writings brings to English-language readers literary writings--several previously unknown--by Simone de Beauvoir. Culled from sources including various American university collections, the works span decades of Beauvoir's career. Ranging from dramatic works and literary theory to radio broadcasts, they collectively reveal fresh insights into Beauvoir's writing process, personal life, and the honing of her philosophy. The volume begins with a new translation of the 1945 play The Useless Mouths, written in Paris during the Nazi occupation. Other pieces were discovered after Beauvoir's death in 1986, such as the 1965 short novel "Misunderstanding in Moscow," involving an elderly French couple who confront their fears of aging. Two additional previously unknown texts include the fragmentary "Notes for a Novel," which contains the seed of what she later would call "the problem of the Other," and a lecture on postwar French theater titled Existentialist Theater. The collection notably includes the eagerly awaited translation of Beauvoir's contribution to a 1965 debate among Jean-Paul Sartre and other French writers and intellectuals, "What Can Literature Do?" Prefaces to well-known works such as Bluebeard and Other Fairy Tales, La Bâtarde, and James Joyce in Paris: His Final Years are also available in English for the first time, alongside essays and other short articles. A landmark contribution to Beauvoir studies and French literary studies, the volume includes informative and engaging introductory essays by prominent and rising scholars. Contributors are Meryl Altman, Elizabeth Fallaize, Alison S. Fell, Sarah Gendron, Dennis A. Gilbert, Laura Hengehold, Eleanore Holveck, Terry Keefe, J. Debbie Mann, Frederick M. Morrison, Catherine Naji, Justine Sarrot, Liz Stanley, Ursula Tidd, and Veronique Zaytzeff
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt13x1m7b

INTRODUCTION from: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) Simons Margaret A.
Abstract: This volume of literary writings by Simone de Beauvoir (1908–86), the renowned French existentialist author of The Second Sex, opens with a drama. Beauvoir wrote her 1945 play,The Useless Mouths, during the final year of the Nazi Occupation of France when food shortages were acute. Her story of the anguish of choice for a besieged medieval town facing starvation is also a surprisingly feminist tale of courageous women who stare down death and inspire the male leaders of the town to do the same.

EXISTENTIALIST THEATER from: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) GILBERT DENNIS A.
Abstract: Today I intend to speak to you about French theater such as it has developed and affirmed itself since the war. But, as it is a subject that would be much too long for a short talk, I think it would be best to limit ourselves to a few plays and a few authors.

INTRODUCTION from: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) Hengehold Laura
Abstract: “To will that there be being,” Simone de Beauvoir wrote in The Ethics of Ambiguity,“is also to will that there be men by and for whom the world is endowed with human significations. . . . To make being ‘be’ is to communicate with others by means of being.”¹ However, for most of her intellectual career, literature was Beauvoir’s preferred means for carrying out the philosophical task of disclosing being in a communicable, communicative way. As she argued in a series of essays and public lectures between the 1940s and 1960s, literature is better equipped to present the qualitative

WHAT CAN LITERATURE DO? from: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) SIMONS MARGARET
Abstract: However, my colleague touched upon an issue that I find very interesting, one that I wanted to talk to you about anyway; namely the relationship between literature and information. This is a pressing issue of our day, now that there are all these types of information to which Semprun just alluded and which are so very successful.³

MY EXPERIENCE AS A WRITER from: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) MANN J. DEBBIE
Abstract: Jean-Paul Sartre spoke to you about literature in general. He told you what all writers have in common; for them it is a question of communicating “the lived sense of being-in-the-world” by giving as a product an object which is a singular universal: their oeuvre.¹

PREFACE TO JAMES JOYCE IN PARIS: from: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) MOY JANELLA D.
Abstract: So often of late, while walking through this new Paris of freshly whitened façades where a stream of traffic flows along the road between hedges of parked cars, I find myself pausing to ask: What did all this look like in the days when I was young? How I longed to bring back from memory a picture as vivid as one of the illustrations in Votre Maison,¹ the old farmhouse transformed into an elegant villa—before and after. This desire of mine was suddenly fulfilled when the photographs Gisèle Freund made during the thirties were placed in my hands.²

Book Title: Moving Consciously-Somatic Transformations through Dance, Yoga, and Touch
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): Fraleigh Sondra
Abstract: The popularity of yoga and Zen meditation has heightened awareness of somatic practices. Individuals develop the conscious embodiment central to somatics work via movement and dance, or through touch from a skilled teacher or therapist often called a somatic bodyworker. Methods of touch and movement foster generative processes of consciousness in order to create a fluid interconnection between sensation, thought, movement, and expression. In Moving Consciously , Sondra Fraleigh gathers essays that probe ideas surrounding embodied knowledge and the conscious embodiment of movement and dance. Using a variety of perspectives on movement and dance somatics, Fraleigh and other contributors draw on scholarship and personal practice to participate in a multifaceted investigation of a thriving worldwide phenomenon. Their goal: to present the mental and physical health benefits of experiencing one's inner world through sensory awareness and movement integration. A stimulating addition to a burgeoning field, Moving Consciously incorporates concepts from East and West into a timely look at life-changing, intertwined practices that involve dance, movement, performance studies, and education. Contributors: Richard Biehl, Robert Bingham, Hillel Braude, Alison East, Sondra Fraleigh, Kelly Ferris Lester, Karin Rugman, Catherine Schaeffer, Jeanne Schul, and Ruth Way.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt1647csj

CHAPTER 12 Contact Unwinding from: Moving Consciously
Author(s) Rugman Karin
Abstract: The study of somatics offers many layers of learning, from the simplest focusing of attention to the cultivation of a deeper sense of self. Somatic study is concerned with experiencing the self from an internal perspective, inviting students to feel, acknowledge, and respond to inner and outer sensations and to consciously participate in attending to, and taking responsibility for, themselves. Developing self-awareness and self-knowledge through somatic processes can allow us to find release, ease, and clarity both physically and emotionally, and can give us choice and freedom to explore new possibilities in our approach to life.

CHAPTER 3 Diasporic Fragility and Brokenness: from: The Minor Intimacies of Race
Abstract: In “I=You,” her essay on digital identity politics, Kara Keeling explores difference within collective identification via an examination of cinema, an advertising campaign, and digital storytelling. Introducing her argument with Audre Lorde’s words about women of color feminism as the “house of difference” and a turn to Brent Hayes Edwards’s insights into diasporic décalage, which he describes as “a changing core of difference; it is the work of differences within unity, an unidentifiable point that is incessantly touched and fingered and pressed” (Edwards qtd. in Keeling 55), Keeling proposes “I=Another” as “an equation in which difference functions in and as

Conclusion: from: The Minor Intimacies of Race
Abstract: Kyo Maclear’s first novel, The Letter Opener, explores the place that diasporic individuals occupy within the Canadian social imagination by focusing on the friendship between a recent Romanian refugee and a Japanese Canadian woman, both of whom work as mail-recovery employees, returning lost mail to their intended recipients. At the beginning of the novel, we are told that Andrei has disappeared without a word, leaving Naiko both grief-stricken and unsure about what to do with the bits of story that he has confided in her. The text’s premise underscores a link between the task of remembering and the material objects

CHAPTER 5 Elements of Resilience: from: Storytelling in Siberia
Abstract: The historical chapters of this work provide a narrative frame that informs this chapter’s discussion of continuity and change in olonkho performance. Measuring change for intangible cultural heritage remains a complicated process, but sociolinguists have found ways to address issues of language shift that may contribute helpful models for assessing music shift as well. Without drawing overly strict, problematic parallels between language and music (Tilley 2014, 487), sociolinguistic and other communication-based models can be modified effectively for measuring change in forms of artistic expression. In addition, these approaches highlight key factors related to resilience, thereby providing strategic insights into encouraging

5 REFORM NARRATIVES: from: Been a Heavy Life
Abstract: Change or consistency in one’s moral self over time was a major theme of the men’s stories. This theme is not surprising given the use of narrative in explaining oneself (Ricoeur 1984) and thus establishing a cohesive self over time (Linde 1993; McAdams 1999), and cues to crime or sanctions that I gave the men (e.g., “How did you get here?”), however neutral and universal I believed them to be at the time. At two archetypical extremes, I heard reform narrativesandstability narratives.¹ These are broad ways of discussing the trajectory or journey one’s moral self has traveled over

Book Title: New German Dance Studies- Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): RUPRECHT LUCIA
Abstract: New German Dance Studies offers fresh histories and theoretical inquiries that resonate across fields of the humanities. Sixteen essays range from eighteenth-century theater dance to popular contemporary dances in global circulation. In an exquisite trans-Atlantic dialogue that demonstrates the complexity and multilayered history of German dance, American and European scholars and artists elaborate on definitive performers and choreography, focusing on three major thematic areas: Weimar culture and its afterlife, the German Democratic Republic, and recent conceptual trends in theater dance._x000B__x000B_Contributors are Maaike Bleeker, Franz Anton Cramer, Kate Elswit, Susanne Franco, Susan Funkenstein, Jens Richard Giersdorf, Yvonne Hardt, Sabine Huschka, Claudia Jeschke, Marion Kant, Gabriele Klein, Karen Mozingo, Tresa Randall, Gerald Siegmund, and Christina Thurner.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt1xcmdx

Book Title: Eight Women Philosophers-Theory, Politics, and Feminism
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): Duran Jane
Abstract: Spanning over nine hundred years, Eight Women Philosophers is the first singly-authored work to trace the themes of standard philosophical theorizing and feminist thought across women philosophers in the Western tradition. Jane Duran has crafted a comprehensive overview of eight women philosophers--Hildegard of Bingen, Anne Conway, Mary Astell, Mary Wollstonecraft, Harriet Taylor Mill, Edith Stein, Simone Weil, and Simone de Beauvoir--that underscores the profound and continuing significance of these thinkers for contemporary scholars. _x000B_Duran devotes one chapter to each philosopher and provides a sustained critical analysis of her work, utilizing aspects of Continental theory, poststructuralist theory, and literary theory. She situates each philosopher within her respective era and in relation to her intellectual contemporaries, and specifically addresses the contributions each has made to major areas such as metaphysics/epistemology, theory of value, and feminist theory. She affirms the viability and importance of recovering these women's overlooked work and provides a powerful answer to the question of why the rubric "women philosophers" remains so valuable.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt1xcn4h

four MARY WOLLSTONECRAFT from: Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: Mary Wollstonecraft (1759–97), unlike Mary Astell or Anne Conway, is indisputably recognized as an important thinker of her time, and such recognition has in general not flagged since the early part of the nineteenth century. Unlike Hildegard, but perhaps like Anne Conway, Wollstonecraft is certainly recognized as a philosopher, for her works are lengthy enough and conceptually oriented enough that she is often included in anthologies of philosophical thought.¹ Thus, unlike Mary Astell—although both women are paradigmatically political thinkers—Wollstonecraft is not often labeled a “pamphleteer.”

History from: Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies
Author(s) NERONE JOHN
Abstract: The term historyrefers simultaneously to a dimension of the human past and the representation of that past. Both uses of the word contain ambiguities, and the dissonance between the two produces an additional layer of ambiguity. Moreover, the dimension of the human past that is called history is distinguished from other dimensions. Depending on who is parsing the historical from the rest of the past, nonhistory might be called “prehistory” or “everyday life” or the personal or the spiritual. The distinction between the historical and the nonhistorical is always contested. Perhaps the bottom-line distinction between the historical and the

Education from: Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies
Author(s) DENZIN NORMAN K.
Abstract: Informed by James Carey’s theories of democracy and his ritual model of communication, I enter a conversation that interrogates the place of critical pedagogy in a free democratic society (Carey 1989, 1997j, 1997l; Rosen 1997). Critical pedagogy is a key component in Carey’s intellectual project. A master teacher, Carey taught us how to think critically, to think and act in ways that linked critical pedagogy with a politics of hope. With Carey I seek a democratic pedagogy crafted for life in America since September 11, 2001 (Denzin 2007).

Community from: Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies
Author(s) STEINER LINDA
Abstract: Wildly inflated, if not oxymoronic, versions of community—the intelligence community, military community, self-help community, and international business community—began proliferating a few decades ago, and such references continue apace. Communities have emerged around various diseases. They produce jobs, such as community literacy work. Although these may lack the thrill of “ecstatic communities,” “singular” communities are identified for academicians (the scholarly community), lawyers, artists, scientists, and various other professions and occupations. We can study a host of interpretive communities and in doing so form an interpretive community. The term has even been stretched to refer to momentary aggregations of people

8 Identity from: Eight Words for the Study of Expressive Culture
Author(s) ABRAHAMS ROGER D.
Abstract: Identity has become the encompassing term for cultural, social, and spiritual wholeness. It also emerges in discussions of territorial integrity, often as a rhetorical ploy in struggles for establishing and maintaining domain. As such, it references many of the most central fictions of our time. Such fictions invite questions, not of their truth value but of their usefulness. Identity invokes a conception of individual and social life that has become ubiquitous but that causes more confusion and confrontation than it designates meaningful social states of being.

INTRODUCTION from: Doing Emotions History
Author(s) STEARNS PETER N.
Abstract: Why did early modern Europeans believe the world to be a vale of tears? In contrast, how and when did Americans come to be so cheerful? Why did homicidal husbands in the eighteenth century kill their wives out of anger, while husbands in the nineteenth were more likely to claim they murdered out of jealousy? How did Americans learn to manage their anger to increase productivity and profits?¹ These questions, and others like them, are topics that historians of the emotions have been raising for the last several decades. While concerned with the most personal of subjects—human feelings—their

CHAPTER 1 MODERN PATTERNS IN EMOTIONS HISTORY from: Doing Emotions History
Author(s) STEARNS PETER N.
Abstract: After thirty to forty years of serious, informative work on emotions history, scholars have not clearly answered what would seem a vital and timely question: do emotions and emotional standards change when a society moves toward modernity? This essay seeks to explore the current status of the issue, to indicate promising lines for renewed attention, and to urge greater priority for analysis and discussion.

CHAPTER 6 ADVERTISING FOR LOVE: from: Doing Emotions History
Author(s) EPSTEIN PAMELA
Abstract: In June 1864, a man signing himself “Bertram” printed a remarkable matrimonial advertisement. At forty-three lines long and three hundred and seventy-two words (but only three sentences), it took up nearly a quarter of a column in the New York Times. Describing himself as a “young gentleman in all respects favorably situated in life,” with all the qualities a privileged man should have: “prepossessing appearance and manners . . . no ordinary capabilities and attainments, independent in thought and action, enlarged, liberal and charitable in views,” he nevertheless lamented that he was “still wanting the essential element of happiness,” a

AFTERWORD from: Doing Emotions History
Author(s) STEARNS PETER N.
Abstract: The momentum for research in the history of emotions is truly impressive, after the somewhat tentative launch of the field several decades back. Major centers in the United Kingdom, Australia, and Germany as well as periodic conferences in many other countries demonstrate the growing institutional interest in emotions history. Individual scholars and writers contribute additional vigor, under the emotions history label or more indirectly. A recent study of the modern history of sincerity, calling attention to the important emotional alignments involved, is an intriguing case in point.¹ Emotions history is gaining recognition as an innovative way to improve understanding of

1 Bin Laden’s Ghost and the Epistemological Crises of Counterterrorism from: Covering Bin Laden
Author(s) JACKSON RICHARD
Abstract: Osama bin Laden remains one of the most recognized figures of this century. At the height of the war on terror, he received more media coverage than his opponent, President George W. Bush, and likely more than any other single newsmaker over the past ten years.¹ At the same time, the United States government invested billions of dollars and vast human and material resources in the attempt to bring him to justice, arguing that as the mastermind, symbolic leader, and financier of the global jihadist movement and the individual most directly responsible for the 9/11 attacks, his death or capture

3 The bin Laden Tapes from: Covering Bin Laden
Author(s) HILL ANDREW
Abstract: This chapter takes as its focus bin Laden’s video appearances since the September 11 attacks (while also discussing aspects

CHAPTER THREE EMPIRE BITES BACK from: Scenes of Projection
Abstract: The disciplinary pedagogical premise for the demonstration of image-casting devices—the camera obscura, the magic lantern, the solar microscope, and their variants—was to show and thereby train the spectator, in an idealized, ostensibly objectivizing, and instrumentalized version of how the eye works and, by extension, how the observer or witness of the experiment is supposed to see. As instrument imago of the spectator as subject of rational vision, however, projective apparatus did not actually resemble the witnessing body of the subject of rational vision.¹ This lack of corporeal resemblance is not incidental but rather the material form of a

Introduction from: Cannibal Metaphysics
Author(s) Skafish Peter
Abstract: Can anthropology be philosophy? Can it not just contribute to but do, and even aid in reinventing philosophy, in the sense of constructive, speculative metaphysics? And what, in that event, would philosophy be, since most of its best instances begin, end with, and never abandon Western categories? Such questions might be lamely disciplinary were it not for the symmetrically unimaginative, joint response they still receive. For the philosophers, things are often quite simple: anthropology is a source of empirical specifications or exemplifications of matters conceived more universally by themselves, but only rarely does it accede to such a broad level

Chapter Four Images of Savage Thought from: Cannibal Metaphysics
Abstract: In calling perspectivism and multinaturalism an indigenous cosmopolitical theory, I am using the word “theory” by design. 36A widespread tendency in the anthropology of the past several decades has consisted in refusing savage thought [la pensée sauvage] the status of a veritable theoretical imagination. What this denial primarily enlightens us about is a certain lack of theoretical imagination on the part of anthropologists. Amerindian perspectivism, before being a possible object of a theory extrinsic to it—a theory, for example, conceived as the derived epistemological reflex of a more primary animist ontology (Descola 2013) or an emergent phenomenological pragmatics peculiar

Book Title: Becoming Past-History in Contemporary Art
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Blocker Jane
Abstract: Focusing on a significant aspect of current art practice?in which artists have engaged with historical subject matter, methods, and inquiry?Blocker asks how the creation of the artist implicates and interrogates that of the art historian. She moves from art history to theater, to performance, and to literature as she investigates a series of works, including performances by the collaborative group Goat Island, the film Deadpanby Steve McQueen, the philosophies of science fiction writer Samuel Delany and documentary filmmaker Ross McElwee, the filmAmos Fortune Roadby Matthew Buckingham, and sculptures by Dario Robleto.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt18s3115

Five STUPID BIRDS: from: Becoming Past
Abstract: Where you see an epigraph or a quotation, I am standing in the place of another, speaking in the voice of another, repeating the words of another. I am compressing and distorting time.

Six TRANSITIONAL OBJECTS: from: Becoming Past
Abstract: had an occasional disturbing habit of taking any small objects he could get a hold of and throwing them away from him into a corner, under the bed, and so on, so that hunting for his toys and picking them up was often quite a business…. I eventually realized that it was a game and that the only use he made of any of

4 ORBITS OF POWER from: Exchanging Clothes
Author(s) Mariani Andrea
Abstract: James Merrill agrees with Charles Baudelaire in considering dressing a deeply spiritual act that, through artifice (which opposes the banality of daily reality), demonstrates the soul’s immaterial dimension.¹ His texts abound in elegant skirts, fur coats, sandals, and sunglasses; the poetic “I” describes with morbid satisfaction scarves, pochettes, jewels (tissues, colors, textures) as signals of deeper truths (good or bad taste, tensions and intentions) that contribute to the overall message of the text. This is true even of tights (according to Umberto Eco, the only garment that “the thought abhors”), which can allow for an appreciation of the abstract, purely

9 SLIPS OF THE TONGUE from: Exchanging Clothes
Author(s) Rabinowitz Paula
Abstract: The department store, site of middle-class female consumer culture since the nineteenth century, demarks a zone in which women not only shop but, in the process of trying on apparel, communally disrobe, sometimes literally together within a huge open space, occasionally under the supervising eye of the saleswoman who monitors the cut and fit of the garments, more often alone before a full-length three-way mirror, producing a solitary portrait. In another part of the modern cityscape, bohemia, female models shed their clothes and pose nude or draped in fabric for life drawing and painting classes in artists’ studios. Each scene

3 Wounding Attachment: from: Life, Emergent
Abstract: On the morning of October 31, 1984, the prime minister of India, Indira Gandhi, was walking toward her morning appointments in her official residence when her accompanying bodyguards turned their guns on her and shot her down. Her bodyguards belonged to the Sikh community, and this assassination of the country’s reigning political leader was connected to the prevailing Sikh militancy of the time. The north Indian state of Punjab, the territorial home of the Sikh community, had been in violent political turmoil for several years leading up to this event. Led by a charismatic religious leader, Jarnail Singh Bhindranwale, the

4 This Is Your Brain on Cinema: from: Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Flaxman Gregory
Abstract: Poet and critic, sometimes surrealist and sublime schizophrenic, Antonin Artaud has been the subject of vastly greater posthumous interest than he ever enjoyed during his relatively short life. His fame derives primarily from his poetry, plays, letters, and essays—above all, from the revolutionary Theater of Cruelty he developed “to restore a passionate and convulsive conception of life” to the stage.³ Still, his writings acquired a significant readership only after he died, alone in a psychiatric clinic, in 1948.⁴ Thus, Artaud was as much discovered as rediscovered in the subsequent decades, when the initial publication of the Oeuvres complètesintroduced

7 André Bazin’s Film Theory and the History of Ideas from: Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Vacche Angela Dalle
Abstract: André Bazin was influenced by many philosophical figures. This range of influences was no gratuitous eclecticism. Rather, it stemmed from Bazin’s need to develop a critical discourse that would address the impure ontology of the cinema. Because the medium involves nature and culture, it perforce requires insights into art, religion, science, and technology. Without a doubt, the history of philosophy helped Bazin bring together all these dimensions, even if he seldom identified his sources. As a critic he did not seek a perfect fit between his overall film theory and a single philosopher. Bazin never mentioned the names of Saint

10 Thinking Cinema with Alain Badiou from: Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Ling Alex
Abstract: Alain Badiou is, by any measure, one of the most original and exciting voices in continental philosophy today. His ambitious project (which involves not only a wholesale rethinking of ontology and phenomenology but also a radical reconfiguring of the place of philosophy itself ) has moreover gained considerable currency in Anglophone academia in recent years. While the inaugural English translation of one of his books only appeared comparatively recently, in 1999, the uptake of his philosophy since then has been swift indeed, and today, a very respectable (and ever-increasing) number of Badiou’s works are available in English, together with numerous

14 “Not Time’s Fool”: from: Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Wartenberg Thomas E.
Abstract: Amour(2012) is the latest in a series of films made by the Austrian director Michael Haneke that center on a couple whose partners are Georges and Anne. The films are not in any sense sequels, since despite sharing the same names, the characters in the different films are not different versions of the same people, a fact indicated, for example, by the different actors playing them, the different professions they have, and the very different circumstances in which they live. Nonetheless, it is fair to say that the films do exhibit a certain unity, for each film focuses on

Book Title: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries-Experiments in the Digital Humanities
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Sayers Jentery
Abstract: In Making Things and Drawing Boundaries, critical theory and cultural practice meet creativity, collaboration, and experimentation with physical materials as never before. Foregrounding the interdisciplinary character of experimental methods and hands-on research, this collection asks what it means to "make" things in the humanities. How is humanities research manifested in hand and on screen alongside the essay and monograph? And, importantly, how does experimentation with physical materials correspond with social justice and responsibility? Comprising almost forty chapters from ninety practitioners across twenty disciplines,Making Things and Drawing Boundariesspeaks directly and extensively to how humanities research engages a growing interest in "maker" culture, however "making" may be defined.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt1pwt6wq

Chapter 1 The Boundary Work of Making in Digital Humanities from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) KLEIN JULIE THOMPSON
Abstract: Debates on digital humanities are sites of boundary work in a history of arguments about the nature of the field. Boundary work is a composite label for the claims, activities, and structures by which individuals and groups create, maintain, break down, and reformulate boundaries between knowledge units (Fisher 13–14; Klein, Crossing1–2). Thomas Gieryn coined the term in 1983 in a study of demarcating science from non-science. It is an ideological style that constructs boundaries rhetorically in three ways: by expanding authority or expertise into domains claimed by other professions or occupations, by monopolizing authority and resources, and

Chapter 3 Project Snapshot: from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) KRZYZANIAK MICHAEL
Abstract: The Living Netis one of several techno-textile projects created by the Vibrant Lives team. Using our Vibrant Lives app, we transform the network activity—or “data shed”—of event participants into a sound file that then plays through subsonic subwoofers, thereby causing the Living Net to vibrate at a variable rate depending on the amount of data being shed.

Chapter 5 Project Snapshot: from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) BURGESS HELEN J.
Abstract: MashBOT consists of a small thermal receipt printer connected to Twitter via an Arduino microcontroller. Love notes are generated using Markov chains from a corpus consisting of 90 lines from Roland Barthes’s A Lover’s Discourse: Fragmentsand ten from Bruno Latour’sAramis, or the Love of Technology. They are then published to the @mashomatic Twitter account and printed as “receipts” for display. MashBOT asks us to think about the ways in which the written declaration of love (the “mash note”) is a document at once transactional and unfathomable.

Chapter 6 Making Humanities in the Digital: from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) SNEHA P. P.
Abstract: The humanities are traditionally text-based disciplines, domains of interpreting and representing human experience in its many forms and facets. The object of humanities inquiry is the cultural artifact, of which text is almost always a primary component. In the last decade or so, however, with the growth of predominantly digital environments in which the humanities now function, these objects and the approaches used to study them have changed significantly. Apart from texts (in the form of written material), images and audiovisual archival objects have added new dimensions to humanities research, creating potential for unique modes of inquiry while also imposing

Chapter 9 Looks Like We Made It, But Are We Sustaining Digital Scholarship? from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) TWETEN LISA
Abstract: The increasing amount of digital projects relating to the field of antiquity is especially promising for the future of traditionally archaic academic fields, including Ancient History, Classics, and Classical Archaeology. An enormous number of fragile, irreplaceable artifacts have survived from antiquity, but only a small number are accessible to the public. The vast majority are housed in storage rooms or isolated collections in museums and universities, as well as private collections around the world. For decades, this global scattering of antiquity resulted in widespread inaccessibility to ancient artifacts for both teaching and research. Through the process of digitization and the

Chapter 15 All Technology Is Assistive: from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) HENDREN SARA
Abstract: In 1941, the United States Navy commissioned the husband-and-wife team of Charles and Ray Eames to design a lightweight splint to get wounded soldiers safely out of the battlefield. Metal splints of the period were not secure enough to hold the leg still, causing unnecessary death from gangrene, shock, blood loss, and so on. The Eameses had been working on techniques to mold and bend plywood, and they came up with a splint design conforming to the body without a lot of extra joints and parts. The wood design became a secure, lightweight, nestable solution, and the Eameses produced more

Chapter 17 Project Snapshot: from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) KRAUS KARI
Abstract: Bibliocircuitry and the Design of the Alien Everyday is a series of student projects that grew out of several book design labs conducted as part of a Fall 2012 course (ENGL 758B Book 2.0: The History of the Book and the Future of Reading) taught by Kari Kraus at the University of Maryland. Using physical books as springboards for computation and mixed media experiments, the student projects realize one of the larger aims of the course: to position bibliotextual scholarship and pedagogy as design-oriented practices that can be used to prototype and imagine the future of the book. The project

Chapter 23 Project Snapshot: from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) AHMED NAMIR
Abstract: Working with Ryerson University’s Digital Media Experience Lab, the Ryerson Geospatial Maps and Data Centre, and the Ryerson Centre for Digital Humanities, the Loss Sets 3-D Poetry Project translates poems co-written by Jordan Scott and Aaron Tucker into sculptures. The poems are first turned into coordinates along the X, Y, and Z axes, after which (under Tucker, Namir Ahmed, and Tiffany Cheung’s direction) those points are imported into the 3-D modeling software, Rhino, where the models are rendered with the Grasshopper plug-in. The pieces are further manipulated using information such as latitude, longitude, and spot height from the Columbia Icefields.

Chapter 27 Making Queer Feminisms Matter: from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) ROGERS MELISSA
Abstract: With maker methodologies gaining popularity in the humanities, how might we imagine queer feminist investments in and engagements with making? What do queer feminist approaches to making look like in academic environments where entrepreneurial maker movements extend the optimistic promise of transforming education through pedagogies of “invent to learn?” Science, Technology, Engineering, and Math are slowly becoming STEAM (STEM + Art), and “innovation” will supposedly rescue the increasingly obsolescent humanities for a future of corporate universities.¹ In a landscape of knowledge production where institutional resources are up for grabs for some kinds of work and as constricted as ever for

Chapter 29 Disrupting Dichotomies: from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) HUNT RYAN
Abstract: As demonstrated by the popularity of Make: Magazine, Maker Faires, and maker-inspired curricula, makerspaces and maker culture have gathered significant attention in recent years. Although these concepts are increasingly familiar, many makerspaces (also known as fab labs, hackerspaces, and DIY centers) are often found in basements of university campuses or off the beaten path of popular downtown streets. As makerspaces gain traction, their role in supporting their local communities and acting as social spaces for their members has become clearer (Taylor, Connolly, and Hurley). For instance, many of them are becoming mobile, shifting from dark basements and hidden streets into

Chapter 30 Project Snapshot: from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) DURKIN CRAIG
Abstract: Design for Foraging explores the appropriation of precision technologies for ad-hoc urban agricultures. Fruit Are Heavy is a custom-designed, low-fidelity sensing platform to infer the ripeness of fruit in trees by monitoring the relative droop of branches as the fruit matures. The project uses research-through-design to speculate on diverse economies and propose alternative configurations of so-called smart cities.

Chapter 35 Making the Model: from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) SNYDER LISA M.
Abstract: The workflow for traditional humanistic scholarship might be loosely described as follows: (1) identify a research question, (2) gather and critically analyze the materials (primary and secondary) that inform said question, and (3) write an interpretive analysis using selected elements from your materials to support and communicate an argument.¹ In evaluating the resulting scholarship, reviewers are asked to gauge the work and its potential impact on their field. Is the research question important? Did the author use the appropriate source materials (in terms of both quantity and quality)? Were the source materials harnessed to make a convincing argument? Did the

Chapter 36 Beyond Making from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) CHACHRA DEBBIE
Abstract: Every once in a while, I am asked to describe what I “make.” The question was part of an application for a technology conference a few years ago; when I saw it, I closed the browser tab, and I only applied later (and eventually attended) because of the enthusiastic encouragement of friends. I am always uncomfortable identifying myself as a maker. I am uncomfortable with any culture that encourages taking on an entire identity rather than expressing a facet of my own identity (“maker” rather than “someone who makes things”). This is not to say that I am opposed to

Globalize from: Veer Ecology
Author(s) TAYLOR JESSE OAK
Abstract: We don’t live onEarth. We liveinit. If there is a single perspectival shift demanded by the Anthropocene, it lies in acknowledging our own planetary internality. Earth’s atmosphere envelops all of history, a vaporous archive in which molecules exhaled by the dead remain suspended along with an ever-increasing quantity of industrial effluent. History bubbles up from the depths of an alien planet whose interior remains as mysterious as the heavens. Modernity runs on the fossilized remains of our prehistoric ancestors sucked and blasted from subterranean fissures. But the world we know has always been shaken, stirred, and, occasionally,

Power Down from: Veer Ecology
Author(s) CAMPANA JOSEPH
Abstract: Power down—why not just power down? Everything seems to scream it: the rise of CO 2levels, the rise of sea levels, superstorms, temperature swings, and polar vortices, not to mention the exponentially accelerating pace of extinctions, displacements, and deforestation, or the melting ice sheets, ice shelves, and glaciers, all of which make up a short list (you surely have your own) of only a few of the many symptoms of the already irrevocably altered ecosystems in which the lives of humans and other creatures will be increasingly trying and, perhaps eventually, impossible. If only we could surrender our addiction

Decorate from: Veer Ecology
Author(s) REMEIN DANIEL C.
Abstract: What decorates? And how? Why should the ecologically minded practitioner of the humanities concern herself with decorating—an activity of expenditure, of waste, an activity that resonates more with the theoretical invocations of oikosthat mark an exclusively human household economy and the excesses of thedomus(the household, yes, but also the unsustainable extravagance of thedominus, the lord, whose decorating displays his sovereignty and ownership) than the invocations ofoikosin an ecological thinking that would mark the etymology ofeco-in order to better think the earth as a much larger and complex household?¹

Environ from: Veer Ecology
Author(s) NARDIZZI VIN
Abstract: At the end of the twentieth century, the consensus would seem to have been that the term and concept environmentwere no longer (and may never have been) critically productive. According to Wendell Berry in “Conservation Is Good Work,” “The idea that we live in something called ‘the environment’ … is utterly preposterous.” The prime position accorded to this noun in “the language we are using to talk about our connection to the world” signals, for Berry, both the anthropocentrism and the “inadequacy” of twentieth-century ecodiscourse. Berry aims to correct for this paucity in language by itemizing concrete nouns that

Shade from: Veer Ecology
Author(s) THILL BRIAN
Abstract: The rich tradition of linking ecological thought to spectacle—to the practices of bearing witness, on film and through documentary photography, to visible instances of environmental degradation and destruction—is no longer sufficient for confronting the existential threats posed by contemporary ecological crises. Carbon levels, species extinction, the collapsing ice shelf, rising seas, and other indicators of humankind’s impacts on the environment exceed our capacity to witness and document the true scope of the damage directly. Because it grants special weight to ecological spectacle and tableau that evoke strong feelings in us, the ecological image can only offer us an

Drown from: Veer Ecology
Author(s) COHEN JEFFREY JEROME
Abstract: After four millennia of practice, narratives of worldly obliteration come easily. The Epic of Gilgameshis “a text haunted by rising waters and disaster.”² The Book of Revelation promises sudden global warming, floods of flame. Millenarianism springs eternal, from the medieval “Fifteen Signs before Doomsday” tradition to the endless Left Behind novels, internet sites, and films.³ Never out of print since its publication in 1960, Walter M. Miller Jr.’sA Canticle for Leibowitzimagines the long aftermath of nuclear winter by arcing time round into a radioactive Middle Ages. A genre dubbed “cli-fi”

Curl from: Veer Ecology
Author(s) FARINA LARA
Abstract: Lacking voices, faces, and quick motility, plants have seldom been considered candidates for the category of thinking beings in the West. Following Aristotle, early natural philosophers saw plants as the most minimal expression of “life,” possessing vitality but no feeling or awareness of their own matter.¹ As Tobias Baskin’s above response to Michael Pollan’s “The Intelligent Plant,” makes clear, resistance to extending sentience to species plantarumremains strong among bioscientists (Baskin is a cellular biologist studying botanic morphogenesis).² His use of the medieval figure of the mandrake root is meant to place plants’ possible “resemblance to our intelligence” firmly in

5 NEUROAESTHETICS from: Bioaesthetics
Abstract: On November 11, 2007, the New York Timesran a full-page article in its Op-Ed section titled “This Is Your Brain on Politics.”¹ Cowritten by three neuroscientists, one public policy analyst, and three neuromarketing experts, the article summarized the test results of using fMRIs on twenty undecided voters who had to answer questions about their preferences for the upcoming 2008 presidential election. The results were hardly revolutionary: “Voters sense both peril and promise in party brands” was one of the findings in bold print. “Emotions about Hillary Clinton are mixed,” “The gender gap may be closing,” and “Mitt Romney shows

Book Title: Commemorating and Forgetting-Challenges for the New South Africa
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): MURRAY MARTIN J.
Abstract: How is the historical past made to appear in the present? In addressing these questions, Murray reveals how collective memory is stored and disseminated in architecture, statuary, monuments and memorials, literature, and art-"landscapes of remembrance" that selectively recall and even fabricate history in the service of nation-building. He examines such vehicles of memory in postapartheid South Africa and parses the stories they tell-stories by turn sanitized, distorted, embellished, and compressed. In this analysis, Commemorating and Forgettingmarks a critical move toward recognizing how the legacies and impositions of white minority rule, far from being truly past, remain embedded in, intertwined with, and imprinted on the new nation's here and now.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt32bck0

5 Haunted Heritage: from: Commemorating and Forgetting
Abstract: Urban landscapes are densely textured places where both material and immaterial traces of the past cling stubbornly to the social fabric, refusing to fade into obscurity. The meaning of a place depends in large measure upon the residues of memory that are embedded there. The thickness of these memory-traces indicates the lingering presence of unresolved tensions and unrealized hopes for the future.¹

Book Title: The Thought of Death and the Memory of War- Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Gasché Rodolphe
Abstract: War lays bare death and our relation to it. And in the wars-or more precisely the memories of war-of the twentieth century, images of the deaths of countless faceless or nameless others eclipse the singularity of each victim's death as well as the end of the world as such that each death signifies. Marc Crépon's The Thought of Death and the Memory of War is a call to resist such images in which death is no longer actual death since it happens to anonymous others, and to seek instead a world in which mourning the other whose mortality we always already share points us toward a cosmopolitics. Crépon pursues this path toward a cosmopolitics of mourning through readings of works by Freud, Heidegger, Sartre, Patocka, Levinas, Derrida, and Ricœur, and others. The movement among these writers, Crépon shows, marks a way through-and against-twentieth-century interpretation to argue that no war, genocide, or neglect of people is possible without suspending how one relates to the death of another human being. A history of a critical strain in contemporary thought, this book is, as Rodolphe Gasché says in the Foreword, "a profound meditation on what constitutes evil and a rigorous and illuminating reflection on death, community, and world." The translation of this work received financial support from the French Ministry of Foreign Affairs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt4cggnq

Foreword from: The Thought of Death and the Memory of War
Author(s) Gasché Rodolphe
Abstract: Since Socrates shared his thoughts about death with his friends before his execution in the Phaedo, death and sharing thoughts thereon have been a continuous concern in Western thought. Despite its seeming innovations, the thesis about death that Martin Heidegger advanced in 1927 in his opus magnum Being and Time is in many regards still part and parcel of the tradition inaugurated by Greek philosophy. According to this tradition, death is something that the philosopher welcomes—as Hannah Arendt says, the philosopher is somehow in love with death—since death is, precisely, what allows the soul to separate from the

3 Vanquishing Death from: The Thought of Death and the Memory of War
Author(s) Levinas Emmanuel
Abstract: As stated in the introduction, none of the philosophical engagements with Heidegger’s Being and Time in the last century is more clearly marked by the memory of World War II—by the torment of mass murder, the assassinations, the untold executions, and, most extraordinarily, the deportation and extermination of the Jews of Europe, which distinguishes this war from all others—than the thought of Emmanuel Levinas. It is this torment that makes for the uniqueness of the thought of death that Levinas elaborates in the pages of his work. It keeps alive, like no other, the memory of the victims

8 The Thought of Death and the Image of the Dead from: The Thought of Death and the Memory of War
Abstract: We live day in and day out with images of death. They are foisted on us at regular hours of the day. We encounter them at newsstands, both in magazines and in the publicity for magazines. They continually invade the televised news. They participate in the coverage of events whose distinctive character, whose primary character is to convey death [mortifère], to present, that is, to present us with (to bring to us) images of death. Whether they be images of war, of assassinations, of natural catastrophes, spectacular accidents, death makes news [actualité].¹ What is given to us as news (as

Book Title: Meeting Place-The Human Encounter and the Challenge of Coexistence
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Carter Paul
Abstract: The volume's central narrative-between Northern cultural philosophers and Australian societies-traverses the troubled history of misinterpretation that is characteristic of colonial cross-cultural encounter. As he brings the literature of Indigenous and non-Indigenous anthropological research into dialogue with Western approaches of conceptualizing sociability, Carter makes a startling discovery: that meeting may not be desirable and, if it is, its primary objective may be to negotiate a future of non-meeting.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt5hjjn9

Borderline from: Meeting Place
Abstract: To stage a dialogue between northern and southern experiences of meeting is to assume a productively dialectical relationship. It is already to move beyond the nostalgia inherent in most anthropological descriptions and the urgent functionalism of sociological ideas of the crowd. It relocates both in a time and space that is not reducible to the idealized level playing field of contemporary, scientific modernity (where place-based, situational knowledge is always at a loss). It retains instead a topography of hills and vales, of crisscrossing tracks, and within the network of traces of passage lozenges of ground as yet unvisited. It is

Hollowed Out from: Meeting Place
Abstract: “Half past twelve: how the time has gone by.”¹ You are obviously not coming; or you are here cocooned from sight in another dimension, where time and space retain their qualitative aspects of east and west, before and after. Either way, as with the recently departed, the time is approaching when it is ceasing to make sense to speak in the second person, as if you are in earshot. After writing about love in the third person, Jean-Luc Nancy added a postlude, wondering whether love could only ever be talked about between two people, in a letter. Shouldn’t a discourse

All Change from: Meeting Place
Abstract: So much for ground rules, but the question is: who are the players, the determinedly indeterminate multitude of singularities that peoples this newly animated environment? To answer this it is necessary to insist on the difference of the meeting place investigated as a concrete situation and the general discourse on improved sociability associated with postcolonial discussions of intercultural or transcultural reconciliation. The meeting place is in the west presided over by Eros in the guise of the Public Worker or Demiurge, a name that suggests turbulent energy. Eros in this incarnation is the protean principle of change but also the

First Impressions from: Meeting Place
Abstract: Circling round the erotope brings us to another topic: the writing of public space. Up until now the phenomenon of meeting has been imagined as emerging out of a primary pantomimicry, as an evolution of gestures informing a performance whose communication is increasingly verbal. The word discoursemeans literally a running hither and thither, and this sense of meeting as a choreography of encounter has enabled us to define the meeting place in terms of the dynamics of meeting itself, as an event whose meaning is inscribed in the continuous present of the action. A tradition of such actions depends

Terminal from: Meeting Place
Abstract: Perhaps I am tilting at windmills. Perhaps the campaign to rehabilitate encounter is out of date. In the age of the digital media the meeting place may be losing its pivotal role in social life, but this doesn’t mean that opportunities for encounter are also declining. On the contrary, they are hugely expanded. You may not meetpeople on the Web, but the chances of encountering strangers are almost unlimited. Of course, the second culture of the social media overlaps with the first culture of physical bodies and places as the success of online dating services illustrates. However, in the

Middle Ground from: Meeting Place
Abstract: Perhaps the question of the meeting place has been wrongly framed. Instead of bringing things together, perhaps it is an art of arrangement or redistribution. Take Leibniz’s thought experiment, according to which the order of events is as follows: a random distribution of points exists, and an equation is found, an algorithm, that joins them into a single line. This two-step process implies a third: the elimination of the need for points. In the future, the instantaneously produced, self-consistent line neutralizes time and space. Leibniz’s calculus seems to make it possible to draw together the most unlike positions: it resolves

Accompaniment from: Meeting Place
Abstract: Despite the stress on the strangeness at the heart of encounter, there is an expectation that it will lead to familiarity. If strangers meet in Jean Genet’s sense of recognizing each other’s “solitude of being,” they form a bond of sorts. Even if a face-to-face meeting—with its rhetoric of negotiation and its expectation of breakthrough—is not the goal, a sense of accompaniment is enjoyed. Such an accompaniment is not necessarily musical. “Music,” the distinguished English poet Jeremy Prynne remarks, “is truly the / sound of our time, since it is how we most / deeply recognise the home

Pink from: Prismatic Ecology
Author(s) McRUER ROBERT
Abstract: In early 2012 a number of journalists and bloggers reported, with varying levels of jocularity, that pink no longer existed. The spectrum of color that appears in the sky when the sun shines onto moisture exists, but pink (these stories suggested) does not, since it could be produced only through a combination of red and violet, which are on opposite sides of the rainbow.¹ Since the natural commingling of red and violet light is a theoretical impossibility, pink in a certain sense is about as real as the famous pink elephants Dumbo sees after he accidentally imbibes absinthe. Of course,

Violet-Black from: Prismatic Ecology
Author(s) ALAIMO STACY
Abstract: A violet-black ecology hovers in the bathypelagic, abyssopelagic, and hadal zones, the three regions of the deep seas, one thousand meters down and much deeper, where sunlight cannot descend. The violet-black depths—cold, dark regions under the crushing weight of the water column—were long thought to be “azoic,” or devoid of life. It is not surprising that Edward Forbes’s azoic theory of the 1840s (preceded by that of Henry de la Beche a decade earlier) stood as the accepted doctrine for a quarter century, since it is difficult for terrestrial creatures to imagine what could possibly survive in the

Book Title: Agitating Images-Photography against History in Indigenous Siberia
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Campbell Craig
Abstract: Agitating Imagesprovides a glimpse into the first moments of cultural engineering in remote areas of Soviet Siberia. The territories were perceived by outsiders to be on the margins of civilization, replete with shamanic rituals and inhabited by exiles, criminals, and "primitive" indigenous peoples. The Soviets hoped to permanently transform the mythologized landscape by establishing socialist utopian developments designed to incorporate minority cultures into the communist state. This book delves deep into photographic archives from these Soviet programs, but rather than using the photographs to complement an official history, Campbell presents them as anti-illustrations, or intrusions, that confound simple narratives of Soviet bureaucracy and power. Meant to agitate, these images offer critiques that cannot be explained in text alone and, in turn, put into question the nature of photographs as historical artifacts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt7zw6wz

1 An Outline of Names from: The Road to Botany Bay
Abstract: Casting a jaundiced eye over burgeoning preparations for Australia’s bi-centenary, a weekend columnist of the Melbourne newspaper The Agereported not so long ago a plan to replace all Cook’s Australian place names with others more congenial to ordinary Australians. It is a measure of Cook’s ambiguous role in Australian history that one was not at all sure whether or not the writer was serious. In the nearly two hundred years since Arthur Phillip, commander of the First Fleet and first governor of the colony of New South Wales, found Cook’s description of Botany Bay so inaccurate he had to

4 Triangles of Life from: The Road to Botany Bay
Abstract: Sturt and Leichhardt may have been good biographers of the journey, but when it came to surveyingthe country they passed through, their journals were less satisfactory. Equipment failures aside, comparison with journals kept by other expedition members suggests that their estimates of latitude and longitude (where they are given) sometimes seem based on quite inadequate observations. There are discrepancies between the published and unpublished data. Sometimes curious lacunae appear in the journals - days go missing. Another explorer, Giles, candidly admits to losing track of time. Estimates of distance are impressionistic and, in many instances, insufficient angles seem to

Introduction: from: Murder Most Modern
Abstract: “Detective fiction,” declared the popular author Yumeno Kyūsaku (1889–1936) in 1935, “is like the serum for diphtheria.” Yumeno employed such an unusual metaphor to answer a nebulous question about one of the most popular genres of modern Japanese literature: “What is tantei shōsetsu[detective fiction]?” Although works in this genre, with their dazzling plots and shocking secrets, have captivated the Japanese reading public since the late nineteenth century, the genre itself has defied rigid categorization and resisted strict definition. Within the same essay, Yumeno went on to elaborate the comparison:

1. Tailing the Tail: from: Murder Most Modern
Abstract: A scene like this is business as usual for detective fiction. Normally, tailing ( bikō) is but one technique a detective

2. Eyeing the Privates: from: Murder Most Modern
Abstract: In Edogawa Ranpo’s 1930 work “Majutsushi” (The Magician), Hanazono Yōko, the daughter of a wealthy business owner, is kidnapped by a crazed killer. As amateur detective Tamamura Jirō, her fiancé, searches for her, he stumbles upon a bizarre show in a little theater:

3. Mad Scientists and Their Prey: from: Murder Most Modern
Abstract: Japanese detective fiction of the early twentieth century challenged its own generic norms by blurring the boundary between fiction and reality, between legitimate academic endeavor and vulgar thrill. Behind this haze at the periphery of detective fiction, the dichotomy between hero (detective) and villain (criminal), the genre’s central setup, was also being undermined. Prominent but deranged agents of science—such as research scientists, engineers, and doctors—started to appear more often as serial killers than as models of scientific morality. Such sinister representations of scientists are somewhat at odds with both the contemporary state ideology toward and the popular understanding

Book Title: The Tourist State-Performing Leisure, Liberalism, and Race in New Zealand
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Werry Margaret
Abstract: Addressing the embodied dimensions of biopolitics and exploring the collision of race, performance, and the cultural poetics of the state, Margaret Werry exposes the real drama behind the new New Zealand. Weaving together interpretive history, performance ethnography, and cultural criticism, Werry offers new ways to think about race and indigeneity—and about the role of human agency in state-making.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttts7cr

conclusion: from: The Tourist State
Abstract: As the first decade of the new millennium drew to a close, tourism growth slowed in Aotearoa New Zealand. Rising fuel prices took their toll, as did the nation’s stronger currency (the neoliberal economy turned victim of its own success). Then global recession set in. State policy has shifted: the new emerging market is now China, the new mantra “sustainability” rather than growth, with ecological outcomes now ranking alongside high-quality experiences, growing investment, and community partnering as strategic priorities.¹ As at the turn of the previous century, the art of government has always demanded reflexivity, a state ready to propose

Aesthetic Criticism: from: The Yale Critics
Author(s) Sprinker Michael
Abstract: Writing to Louis Colet in 1852, Flaubert envisioned an ideal work of prose fiction. This ideal has haunted European literature ever since:

J. Hillis Miller: from: The Yale Critics
Author(s) Pease Donald
Abstract: Several abrupt turns mark the critical career of J. Hillis Miller and withhold from his works that sense of stability and continuity that a lifelong pursuit of a single critical project might otherwise provide. They do so, moreover, because they seem precipitated more by Miller’s translation and adaptation of the positions of other critics than by reversals in his own thinking. First, there was the New Critical dissertation at Harvard; then, after a one-year stay at Williams in 1952-53, the years of phenomenological criticism at Johns Hopkins from 1953 to 1972, and more recently the move to deconstruction at Yale.

Error in Paul de Man from: The Yale Critics
Author(s) Corngold Stanley
Abstract: Paul de Man was born in 1919.¹ This fact will come as a surprise, I think, to many of his readers. Many will have begun reading him about 1971, with the publication of Blindness and Insightand his increasing conspicuousness in the new critical journalsDiacritics, New Literary History,andGlyph. They will have taken him to be a “strong” writer, perhaps in his thirties, on the basis of marked anomalies of his exposition: a drive toward the boldest and least cautious form of a position;² a taste for the jargon of foreign schools imported but not naturalized; an untroubled

The Genius of Irony: from: The Yale Critics
Author(s) O’Hara Daniel
Abstract: As she mused the pitiful vision of her mother’s life laid its spell on the very quick of her being—that life of commonplace sacrifices closing in final craziness. She trembled as she heard again her mother’s voice saying constantly with foolish insistence:

FIVE Memory Traces, Mystical States, and Deep Pluralism from: Neuropolitics
Abstract: It seems simple. Because life is riddled with mystery and uncertainty, an existential faith may encounter paradoxes that call its claim to universality into question. So a dictum becomes tempting: wherever mystery and freedom meet, a variety of faiths bubble up; wherever, therefore, people prize freedom they will support a significant presumption in favor of honoring that variety. Many give preliminary consent to such a dictum. But it quickly runs into difficulties. Christians have often insisted that because their faith is universal it must be sanctioned by public ethics in the states or civilizations they inhabit. Secularists, while praising religious

Chapter 2 Breaking the Circle: from: Heidegger and Criticism
Abstract: Martin Heidegger’s destructive phenomenology has shown that modern philosophy, from Descartes through Kant and Hegel to the discourse of positive science, constitutes an “anthropology” that fulfills the imperatives of a metaphysical or logocentric concept of truth and thus brings “philosophy to its end.”¹ Simultaneously, in dis-closing the temporality being that the (anthropo)logos as Word or Presence encloses (covers over and forgets), Heidegger’s destruction of the tradition points to a hermeneutics of being that is capable of surpassing metaphysics ( Überwindung), to a postmodern hermeneutics of dis-covery, in which a disclosed temporality is given ontological priority over Being.² What I wish to

5 Screen Events of Velocity and Duration from: Documentary Time
Abstract: From the perspective of existential phenomenology it is interesting to note how the reflection on film and temporality has been biased toward duration and continuity, at the expense of rhythm, change, and repetition. For example, André Bazin was primarily interested in cinematic duration and the quality of lived time that may result from the tension between change and stasis within a single take. The inheritance of existential phenomenology in the work of Bazin and others includes a romantic recognition of the human gesture—a confidence in cinema to transmit directly the experience traced in faces and gestures. For example, Maurice

5. Unnatural Selection: from: Atavistic Tendencies
Abstract: In a 1915 short story in Vanity Fair, Anita Loos, the wellknown author ofGentlemen Prefer Blondes, portrays a young woman in the grip of an unfortunate decision. In a story entitled “The Force of Heredity, and Nella: A Modern Fable with a telling Moral for Eugenists,” Loos tells us that “twelve years had elapsed since Nella had promised her old mother that, come what might, she would always be eugenic.”¹ In the duration of those twelve years, Nella moves to New York City, becomes a manicurist at a fancy hotel, and disavows “the teachings of her good old mother.”

4 Managing a View from: On the Rim
Abstract: “No, I don’t think it’s any flatter. It just looks that way from here,” returns Joe. His eyes follow two ravens rising out of the canyon on a current of air.

Two What Memories Are We Talking About? from: State Repression and the Labors of Memory
Abstract: The draft title for this chapter was “What is memory?” Such a title invites a single and univocal definition of the term. Though not involving a logical contradiction, asking what memory is (in singular) may seem at odds with offering to study processes of memory construction, of memories in the plural, and of social disputes over memories, their social legitimacy, and claims to “truth.” This chapter attempts to advance some conceptual issues in order to offer some tools for further analytical and empirical steps. It does not pretend to be an exhaustive discussion of issues that, by their very complexity

Book Title: Recording Reality, Desiring the Real- Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Cowie Elizabeth
Abstract: Recording Reality, Desiring the Real shows how documentary has been simultaneously understood as factual, as story, as art, and as political. Elizabeth Cowie stakes documentary’s central place in cinema as both an art form and a form of social engagement, addressing the seeming paradox between the pleasures of spectacle in the documentary and its project of informing and educating.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttsm8z

2 Working Images: from: Recording Reality, Desiring the Real
Abstract: This chapter introduces two questions that are central to this book: First is the question of the representability of everyday life and the project of “voicing” the ordinary as not only subjective testimony but also art—that is, as a sensory experience that is emotional and aesthetic. Second is the question of how the sounds and images of work, workers, ordinary people, and their activities signify as facts and as historical information. How has documentary film produced such discursive definitions and thus such defining discoursing? The focus here will be images of work in 1930s documentaries for these raise the

11 Vampire Culture from: Monster Theory
Author(s) Grady Frank
Abstract: In his 1982 essay “The Dialectic of Fear,” Franco Moretti makes a persuasive case for reading the vampire of Bram Stoker’s Draculaas a metaphor for capital.¹ According to Moretti, the novel operates on one level as a parable about the dangers of monopoly capitalism, constituted by Stoker as an external threat in the monstrous, predatory, acquisitive, and above all utterly foreign figure of the count, “a rational entrepreneur who invests his gold to expand his dominion: to conquer the City of London.”² Opposing Dracula in the name of individualism and economic liberty, then, are a small band of valiant

Introduction from: Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) Villanueva Darío
Abstract: This volume presents a sample of contemporary critical work now being done in Spain. More often than not, “theory” is a word associated with France, Germany, and the United States. Seldom do we read how Spanish scholars are examining and using critical perspectives such as psychoanalysis, deconstruction, discourse analysis, text theory, or the aesthetics of reception. The essays presented here, submitted by professors of communication and literary theory in the Spanish university system, differ not only in their problematics but also in style and presentation from what one is accustomed to seeing in the United States. As editors of this

Chapter 5 Phenomenology and Pragmatics of Literary Realism from: Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) Villanueva Darío
Abstract: Realism not only has shaped important schools and periods in the evolution of world literature, but also has constituted a basic constant in all literature since the formulation of the principle of mimesis in the Poeticsof Aristotle. For this reason, it is one of the central points of literary theory most in need of a clarification of its conceptual limits. This effort, in turn, would contribute to the task—often opposed by various authors—of correcting the imprecision, polysemia, and ambiguity with which the realist principle is applied.

Afterword from: Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) Lewis Tom
Abstract: The selection of essays presented in Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spainaccurately reflects the balance of forces within Spanish literary theory since 1975. Fairly specific absences and emphases help to map the terrain. Gender criticism of Spanish literature remains primarily the work of scholars residing in North America. Today, in contrast to the 1960s and 1970s, Marxist theory enjoys little purchase among Spanish literary theorists or social philosophers. And, having coaxed a turn toward concepts that treat incompleteness, openness, and pragmatics as opposed to wholeness, closure, and universals, a diffuse but hegemonic “postmodernism” now overlies earlier Spanish traditions of linguistic

CHAPTER TWO Brazilian National Identity: from: Utopias of Otherness
Abstract: In a vein similar to that of chapter 1, which focuses on macrological views of Portuguese nationhood and their eventual weakening or relativization in today’s cultural landscape, this chapter traces the movement from the emergence of grand narratives of national identity since the 1930s in the Brazilian intellectual field to the upsurge of a multiplicity of smaller narratives of nationhood across various discursive fields, social arenas, and media in contemporary Brazil. Thus, we observe a shift from macrological approaches that have privileged constructs such as “racial democracy,” social typologies such as “the cordial man,” or geopolitical binaries such as the

CHAPTER FOUR Women’s Difference in Contemporary Portuguese Fiction: from: Utopias of Otherness
Abstract: The late twentieth century was a period of major historical transformations for Portugal. The single most important event was the April Revolution of 1974, which toppled the forty-year-old authoritarian Salazar/Caetano regime at the same time as it brought about the end of approximately five hundred years of Portuguese colonialism in Africa and Asia. Certainly, the end of Portuguese colonialism was the result of a historical dialectic between events in Portugal and the successful campaign of national liberation movements throughout Portuguese-speaking Africa and East Timor. Nonetheless, after a brief period of political turmoil, the April Revolution opened the path for the

Conclusion from: Utopias of Otherness
Abstract: From the early part of his career in the late 1940s, Ferreira felt increasingly marginalized in a Portuguese national context

4. Freud’s Dream of America from: The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Gherovici Patricia
Abstract: Fully immersed in a book I was writing on hysteria in the Puerto Rican ghetto, I chanced upon historical material about the colonial history of the United States at the end of the nineteenth century. It was in that connection that I reopened the pages of The Interpretation of Dreamsin which Freud describes one of his most peculiar dreams, a dream of a castle by the sea, a dream of naval war, too, a complex narrative dealing with the Spanish-American War (SE V, 463-64) . This was the war that ended with the annexation of Puerto Rico by the

7. Heteros Autos: from: The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Weineck Silke-Maria
Abstract: In the first sentence of what must be the most famous subchapter of The Interpretation of Dreams,Freud writes: “Another series of dreams that may be called typical are those with the content that a dear relative, parents or siblings, children etc. has died.”¹ The odd grammatical structure of the sentence, with its singular verb following multiple subjects, announces that it is really only one dear relative whose dreamed death will matter to psychoanalysis: the father, whose death, according to Freud’s widely accepted autobiographical narrative, gave rise to his self-analysis and hence to psychoanalysis as we know it. In his

11. Dream Model and Mirroring Anxiety: from: The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Bay Amanda
Abstract: Freud’s Interpretation of Dreamsis generally acknowledged to interrogate the very status of the sexual. Yet it is striking to observe that the psychoanalytic literature of the past fifty years virulently challenges the Freudian model—Vorbild—of the dream and the transference. We are actually witnessing a perplexing evolution characterized by the always more profound denial of the very essence of the Freudian discovery and its foundation—namely, the existence of the images created by autoerotic sexuality, i.e., the unconscious (infantile) images—Bild[er]—that shape the dream as well as the neurotic symptom, and even psychosis. Already in the preface

12. Closing and Opening of the Dream: from: The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Pepper Thomas
Abstract: It is from the point of view of communicationthat we wish to reexamine the theory of the dream. But this word takes on two different meanings:communication of the dream(notably its account in treatment) andcommunication in the dream, whether or not there exists a communication in the dream itself. As to “communication of the dream,” a purely idealist, intersubjective, linguistic conception of the cure would consider this problem outmoded. Such a view would consider it nonsense to wish to analyze the dream, since there is never anything but the account of the dream, which is merely an

Book Title: Philosophy Beside Itself-On Deconstruction and Modernism
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Marshall Donald
Abstract: The writings of French philosopher Jacques Derrida have been the single most powerful influence on critical theory and practice in the United States over the past decade. But with few exceptions American philosophers have taken little or no interest in Derrida’s work, and the task of reception, translation, and commentary has been left to literary critics. As a result, Derrida has appeared as a figure already defined by essentially literary critical activities and interests. Stephen Melville’s aim in Philosophy Beside Itself is to insist upon and clarify the distinctions between philosophy and criticism. He argues that until we grasp Derrida’s philosophical project as such, we remain fundamentally unable to see his significance for criticism. In terms derived from Stanley Cavell’s writings on modernism, Melville develops a case for Derrida as a modernist philosopher, working at once within and against that tradition and discipline. Melville first places Derrida in a Hegelian context, the structure of which he explores by examining the work of Heidegger, Lacan, and Bataille. With this foundation, he is able to reappraise the project of deconstructive criticism as developed in Paul de Man’s Blindness and Insight and further articulated by other Yale critics. Central to this critique is the ambivalent relationship between deconstructive criticism and Lacanian psychoanalysis. Criticism—radical self-criticism—is a central means through which the difficult facts of human community come to recognition, and Melville argues for criticism as an activity intimately bound to the ways in which we do and do not belong in time and in community. Derrida’s achievement has been to find a new and necessary way to assert that the task of philosophy is criticism; the task of literary criticism is to assume the burden of that achievement. Stephen Melville is an assistant professor of English at Syracuse University, and Donald Marshall is a professor of English at the University of Iowa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttt44r

Foreword from: Philosophy Beside Itself
Author(s) Marshall Donald
Abstract: In 1912, Arnold Schönberg composed Pierrot Lunaire, a musical setting of “thrice seven” poems by the French poet Albert Guirard. The texts assemble a conventional symbolist environment, through which move characters from thecommedia dell’arteengaged in vaguely ritual actions of indeterminate import but with overtones of hostility to the order and monuments of ordinary bourgeois culture. They are, in short, “dated.” But Schönberg’s music remains irreducibly strange even after three-quarters of a century (this fact has seemed to some Schönberg’s chief excellence). And the “method of composing with twelve tones” goes even further. For that method can no longer

Chapter 4 Paul de Man: from: Philosophy Beside Itself
Abstract: The burden of the argument to this point has been that philosophy, in response to needs generated within its “own” history, has come to be at necessary odds with its self, its history, and the proprietary self-presence implicit in such notions of self and history. In these straits, philosophy has turned increasingly to criticism for an understanding of its activity, and so has risked also its possible disappearance into literature. Literary criticism and theory thus find themselves in an odd position: a discipline that has a long-established habit of looking elsewhere—primarily to science or philosophy—for models of its

Chapter 5 Psychoanalysis, Criticism, Self-Criticism from: Philosophy Beside Itself
Abstract: The part here played by Freud (and we are not now concerned with the “validity” of this interpretation with regard to Freud) could be equally assigned to literary texts, since literature can be shown to accomplish in its terms a deconstruction that parallels the psychological deconstruction of selfhood in Freud. The intensity of the interplay between literary and psychoanalytical criticism is easy enough to

Introduction from: Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Reis Roberto
Abstract: According to Webster’s New World Dictionary,the wordintroduction,in strict usage, refers to the preliminary section of a book (often written by someone other than the author) that explains and leads into the subject proper.Introderives fromintero,which, akin tointer,denotes “inwardly.”Duce,coming fromducere,implies “to lead,” which, not surprisingly, will later becomedukeorprince,one who rules an independent duchy. Bearing in mind the etymology of the two terms that compose the wordintroductionitself, we suspect it is not exactly our role to introduceBodies and Biases: Sexualities in Hispanic Cultures

Chapter 7 Sexing the Bildungsroman: from: Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Bermúdez Silvia
Abstract: A few months after Las edades de Lulú (The Ages of Lulu)won the coveted First Prize of the erotic collection “La sonrisa vertical” (The Vertical Smile),Marie Claire(Spain), one of the major European women’s magazines, published a revealing interview (August 1989) with Almudena Grandes, the young author of the novel.¹ The interview’s suggestive title, “Almudena Grandes: inventora de Pasiones y perversiones” (Almudena Grandes: Inventor of Passions and Perversions) is but the first emblem of the (con)fusing nature of the novel.² For couched in the choice of the wordspassionandperversionan implicit and important distinction is metonymically

Chapter 16 Intricacies of Brazilian Gayness: from: Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Borim Dário
Abstract: Some of the changes Brazilian society undertakes in the late 1960s and 1970s exemplify an authoritarian aspect of its sociopolitical values and dynamics. This aspect has much to do with the division of people into two mutually exclusive categories, the domains of masculinity and femininity, which I would like to discuss by focusing on homosexuality. While reviewing pieces of colonial literature and cultural anthropology, I propose to retrace ties between the past and the present of Brazil.

Introduction: from: Abiding by Sri Lanka
Abstract: Newton Gunasinghe, in his 1984 essay ʺMay Day after the July Holocaust,ʺ made a cortical, if now almost forgotten, intervention into the Sri Lankan debate on peace. He contended, about what was beginning to be called the ʺethnic conflictʺ:

4 What, to the Leftist, Is a Good Story? from: Abiding by Sri Lanka
Abstract: First, some brutal summaries of the French critique of history that perhaps belong in a previous chapter but could also serve as an introduction to this one. To Foucault (1973), history is not the working out of an objective process that the discipline merely reflects but the ground of, that which enables, the modern episteme. Take for instance, biology, a historical discipline if there ever was one: since its object is understood to change through time, it would be impossible without this ground (arche). To Althusser (1997), radically rereading Marx, the historicist notion of time as single/homogenous and continuous is

2 Social Imaginaries in Transition: from: Calibrations
Abstract: In our day, the problem needs to be posed again from a new angle: is there a single phenomenon here, or do we need to speak

Book Title: Postcolonial Insecurities-India, Sri Lanka, and the Question of Nationhood
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): KRISHNA SANKARAN
Abstract: This ambitious work explores the vexed connections among nation building, ethnic identity, and regional conflict by focusing on a specific event: Indian political and military intervention in the ethnic conflict between the Sinhalese and Tamils in Sri Lanka. Postcolonial Insecurities counters the perception of “ethnicity” as an inferior and subversive principle compared with the progressive ideal of the “nation.” Krishna, in fact, shows ethnicity to be indispensable to the production and reproduction of the nation itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttt8vt

Introduction from: Postcolonial Insecurities
Abstract: This book is about the troubled and violent journey of postcolonial nationalism in South Asia. It examines the interaction between the modern enterprise of nation building and the emergence of ethnic conflict in this area by focusing on a specific event: Indian political and military involvement in the struggle between Sinhalese and Tamils in Sri Lanka. It argues that the attempt to construct nation-states on the basis of exclusionary narratives of the past and univocal visions for the future has reached an impasse. The fixation with producing a pulverized and uniform sense of national identity (usually along majoritarian lines) has

7 Postcolonial Aporias: from: Postcolonial Insecurities
Abstract: If an aporia is defined as a problem or difficulty arising from an awareness of opposing or incompatible views on the same theoretic matter, it seems to me that we have reached an aporetic stage in the postcolonial quest for nation building. The very practices that produce the nation are coeval with its simultaneous fragmentation or unraveling. Although the supposedly progressive and universal idea of the nation is expected to eventually triumph over the reactionary and particularist idea denoted as ethnicity, a close look at the practices of nation building reveal that both nation and ethnicity share a logic that

8 Decolonizing the Future in South Asia from: Postcolonial Insecurities
Abstract: This book arose from a conviction that the present violence in South Asia, by both states and various insurgent movements, is unconscionable and has to be opposed. The commonly offered salvatore clausii(violence is an inevitable and indispensable part of nation building; once economic development reverses centuries of colonial distortion, such political problems will fall by the wayside; ethnic and other forms of false consciousness will one day be replaced by the singular pellucidity of class; and so on) have rung increasingly hollow, at least to my ears. The problems of nation building in South Asia are not so much

CHAPTER 2 Garrisonism and the Public Sphere from: Abolition’s Public Sphere
Abstract: Although the founding principles of nonresistance were acclaimed with a “sacred respect for the right of opinion,” there was little doubt that the discussion of nonresistance in public venues and print media honored William Lloyd Garrison’s right of opinion. It was his exercise of this right that gave nonresistance a regular column and columnist in The Liberator,the flagship abolitionist newspaper; it was his editorial policy that in turn set the agenda for the abolition movement and, his critics charged, turned it away from the singular object of freeing the slaves. Of course, Garrison claimed to publicize nonresistance for avowedly

Introduction from: Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) NICHOLS BILL
Abstract: In 1964 the respected film scholar Jay Leyda published an invaluable little book, Films Beget Films: A Study of the Compilation Film.¹ It was the first sustained effort to explore the effects of reusing footage originally intended to convey one meaning to convey a different meaning. In his foreword Leyda likens such films to H. G. Wells’sTime Machineas a way to return to and comment on the past: the “compilation machine,” as he termed this form of filmmaking, “offers itself for the communication of more abstract concepts than can be expected of the more habitual fiction film, more

[3] Toward a New Historiography: from: Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) VAN ALPHEN ERNST
Abstract: Since the 1990s, the spread of memory practices in art and literature has been enormous. These memory practices manifest themselves not only around issues such as trauma, the Holocaust and other genocides, and migration but also in the increasing use of media and genres like photography, documentary film and video, the archive, and the family album. These memory practices form a specific aesthetics. The major question raised by this flourishing of memory practices is, should we see this as a celebration of memory, as a fin de siècle, and in the meantime a debut de siècle, as an expression of

[10] Reenvisioning the Documentary Fact: from: Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) MILLER TYRUS
Abstract: In 1992, Péter Forgács made two films that utilize, like other of his Private Hungary films, amateur film footage but also stand out in his corpus for their explicitly reflexive, metapoetic treatment and their innovative, nonnarrative formal structure: Wittgenstein TractatusandBourgeois Dictionary.Both films, in fact, share overlapping film materials, withBourgeois Dictionarygenerally presenting lengthier, contextualized versions of some passages that appear inWittgenstein Tractatusin more pontillistic, fragmentary form. Both films also, notably, explore linguistic and quasi- mathematical frameworks for organizing the found images and motivating their potential meanings. Image, voice-over, music, and text stand in a

[14] Reorchestrating History: from: Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) KINDER MARSHA
Abstract: In 2000, the Labyrinth Project (an art collective and research initiative on interactive narrative)¹ embarked on a collaboration with Hungarian media artist Péter Forgács to turn his sixty-minute, single-channel film, The Danube Exodus,into a large scale, multiscreen immersive installation. Forgács’s film (which was aired on European television in 1997) provided intriguing narrative material: a network of compelling stories, a mysterious river captain whose motives remain unknown, a Central European setting full of rich historical associations, and a hypnotic musical score that created a mesmerizing tone.

2 The Persistence of Cold War Antagonisms from: Divided Korea
Abstract: One would think that ideological antagonisms substantially subsided with the collapse of the Berlin Wall in 1989 and the subsequent disintegration of the Soviet Union. But in Korea it is striking how much remains the same. The peninsula has become an anachronism in international relations: a small but highly volatile Cold War enclave surrounded by a world that has long moved away from a dualistic ideological standoff. What Kihl Young Hwan noted two decades ago thus remains by and large true today: the level of ideological hostility in Korea is so intense that it leads to the perception, and actual

CHAPTER ONE Ecstatic Aesthetics: from: Compelling Visuality
Author(s) Bal Mieke
Abstract: The image of a royal robe with ample folds cannot today but evoke that historical aesthetic and its contemporary counterpart that we associate with Gilles Deleuze (1993), with the idea of the fold. The image is thoroughly baroque. Walter Benjamin, whose work on German baroque drama has inspired extensive philosophical commentary on the baroqueness of his thought as exemplary of modernity in general, is here speaking not about art but about language.¹ Comparing the task of the translator with that of the poet, Benjamin creates a powerful image of the translator’s product as both rich (royal) and encompassing (ample), expansive

Book Title: Covert Gestures-Crypto-Islamic Literature as Cultural Practice in Early Modern Spain
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Barletta Vincent
Abstract: Covert Gestures reveals how the traditional Islamic narratives of the moriscos both shaped and encoded a wide range of covert social activity characterized by a profound and persistent concern with time and temporality. Using a unique blend of literary analysis, linguistic anthropology, and phenomenological philosophy, Vincent Barletta explores the narratives as testimonials of past human experiences and discovers in them evidence of community resistance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttgdg

Interlude from: American Prophecy
Abstract: Martin Luther King Jr. and James Baldwin came to prominence during what many scholars now call the second Reconstruction, from the late 1940s through the late 1960s, and each figure has been domesticated since this project of democratization was abandoned. King now is a national icon, cast as a figure who embodied—who lived and died for—the American Dream; he is contained by an American exceptionalist story of a nation whose progressive telos is to fulfill its founding principles. Baldwin, too, has been made into a critic who stands up for the universalism latent in a national consensus, to

Book Title: Narratives of Agency-Self-Making in China, India, and Japan
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Dissanayake Wimal
Abstract: This multidisciplinary collection underlines the importance of understanding the operations of human agency-defined here as the ability to exert power, specifically in resistance to ideological pressure. In particular, the contributors emphasize the historical and cultural conditions that facilitate the production of agency in an effort to gain a deeper understanding of the cultures of China, India, and Japan. In Narratives of Agency, scholars from a variety of disciplines argue that traditional Western approaches to the study of these cultures have unduly focused on the pervasive influence of family and clan (China), caste and fatalism (India), and groupism (Japan). This tendency has been exacerbated by modern critical approaches, such as postmodernism and poststructuralism, that not only are increasingly popular in studying these cultures but also de-emphasize the role of the individual. The resultant undermining of the notion of human agency tends to give short shrift to the very real individual differences between groups and ignores questions of personal desire and intentionality. These essays remind us that members of a community have to make personal choices, struggle and interact with others, argue about positions, and confront new challenges, all of which involve intentionality and human agency. A new look at a topic central to cross-cultural understanding, Narratives of Agency will be essential reading for those interested in China, India, Japan, and the world beyond._x000B_ _x000B_Contributors: Richard G. Fox, Washington U; Lydia H. Liu, U of California, Berkeley; Owen M. Lynch, New York U; Vijay Mishra, Murdoch U, Australia; Marie Thorsten Morimoto; Emiko Ohnuki-Tierney, U of Wisconsin, Madison; Eugene Yuejin Wang, U of Chicago; Ming-Bao Yue, U of Hawaii, Manoa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttp11

Introduction / Agency and Cultural Understanding: from: Narratives of Agency
Author(s) Dissanayake Wimal
Abstract: The broad objective of the essays gathered in this volume is to focus on the concept of human agency and its importance in cultural understanding and cultural redescription. The word “agency,” like the words “selfhood,” “individuality,” “subjectivity,” and “personhood,” with which it is imbricated, does not admit of simple and clear definitions. All these words inhabit overlapping positions in a semantic field and conceptual cartography that are increasingly attracting the scholarly attention of both humanists and social scientists alike. In this introduction, and indeed in this book as a whole, no attempt will be made to affix immutable meanings to

1 Translingual Practice: from: Narratives of Agency
Author(s) Liu Lydia H.
Abstract: The concept of the self, subject, or individual (as well as the slippage between them) has been a main target of criticism in the academic West since the emergence of poststructuralist scholarship. A good deal of that critique is bent on deconstructing the post-Enlightenment European notion of the subject. This move has been greeted with challenge by critics of deconstruction feminists and others who try to (re)introduce concepts such as political agency, strategic identity, and multiple subjectivities into the contemporary debate.1 As someone who specializes in a non-European language, I find this debate fascinating within the context of Euro-American academia

3 Visual Agency and Ideological Fantasy in Three Films by Zhang Yimou from: Narratives of Agency
Author(s) Yue Ming-Bao
Abstract: Among China’s diverse group of internationally acclaimed Fifth Generation directors, only Zhang Yimou has managed to make films that capture and maintain the West’s undivided and unprecedented attention.¹ Although it is also true that Zhang’s fellow director Chen Kaige has launched a potential Academy-award-winning epic with his latest film, Farewell to My Concubine, his work in general has not been greeted with quite the same degree of enthusiasm.² For viewers familiar with Zhang’s hallmark artistic obsession with eroticism, this obvious discrepancy in audience reception is indicative of the powerful lure of Orientalism long thought dispelled, but now causing Hollywood critics

4 Contesting and Contested Identities: from: Narratives of Agency
Author(s) Lynch Owen M.
Abstract: Mathura City lies about one hundred miles south of New Delhi, India. It is famous for the ancient Buddhist and Jain cultures buried in its soil and displayed in its museum; it is even more renowned among Hindus as the birthplace of India’s beloved god, Lord Krishna, and as a sin-cleansing bathing spot, Vishram Ghat, on the banks of the holy river Jamuna. The city is one of the saptamahātīrthas, Hinduism’s seven great pilgrimage centers. Pilgrims come to Mathura throughout the year for a day or so to bathe in Jamuna’s waters and visit temples, including that erected over the

5 Self-Made from: Narratives of Agency
Author(s) Fox Richard G.
Abstract: Clifford Geertz (1983:59) tells us that “the Western conception of the person as bounded, unique, more or less integrated motivational and cognitive universe ... organized into a distinctive whole and set contrastively both against other such wholes and against its social and natural background is ... a rather peculiar idea.” Geertz is hardly alone in recognizing this supposedly singular Western conception. For example, the psychiatrist Alan Roland (1988), under heavy influence from South Asian anthropologists, contrasts the “prevailing psychological maps and norms” of “Western man” (we must assume he also means to include Western woman)—the Western universalizing mode of

7 Selves and Others in Japanese Culture in Historical Perspective from: Narratives of Agency
Author(s) Ohnuki-Tierney Emiko
Abstract: For this volume on the self of China, India and Japan, I have chosen the concept of self (selves) and other (others) of the Japanese¹ and its symbolic expressions through a twin metaphor of rice and rice paddies.² I try to show how the construction and the reconstruction of the self of the Japanese have always taken place through their discourse with different peoples, using the metaphors of rice and rice paddies as the vehicles of thought in these processes. I also argue that the collective self of the agrarian Japanese, as expressed in “Rice as Self,” has involved a

CHAPTER 5 “Something Is Lost”: from: Out of Time
Abstract: When Lee Edelman launches his incisive and ultimately compelling attack on the prevalence of a reproductive ideology—an ideology that views social and physical reproduction as the fundamental goal of our existence—in contemporary American society, it is not surprising that the main target for his critique is the cinema. In No Future, he contends, “the image of the Child, not to be confused with the lived experiences of any historical children, serves to regulate political discourse—to prescribe what willcountas political discourse—by compelling such discourse to accede in advance to the reality of a collective future

CHAPTER 7 Affirmation of the Lost Object: from: Out of Time
Abstract: The interconnection of individual development and the evolution of a nation has served as a subject for cinema since the birth of the feature film. From D. W. Griffith’s The Birth of a Nation(1915) and Sergei Eisenstein’sThe Old and the New(1929) to Zhang Yimou’sTo Live(1994) and Ken Loach’sThe Wind That Shakes the Barley(2006), filmmakers have used the development of a particular individual or individuals as a way of telling the story of the nation to which the individual belongs. For D. W. Griffith, the trajectory from blissful peace to tragic suffering to radical

Book Title: The Brain Is the Screen-Deleuze and the Philosophy of Cinema
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Flaxman Gregory
Abstract: In the nearly twenty years since their publication, Gilles Deleuze’s books about cinema have proven as daunting as they are enticing—a new aesthetics of film, one equally at home with Henri Bergson and Wim Wenders, Friedrich Nietzsche and Orson Welles, that also takes its place in the philosopher’s immense and difficult oeuvre. With this collection, the first to focus solely and extensively on Deleuze’s cinematic work, the nature and reach of that work finally become clear. Composed of a substantial introduction, twelve original essays produced for this volume, and a new English translation of a personal, intriguing, and little-known interview with Deleuze on his cinema books, The Brain Is the Screen is a sustained engagement with Deleuze’s cinematic philosophy that leads to a new view of the larger confrontation of philosophy with cinematic images. Contributors: Éric Alliez, Dudley Andrew, Peter Canning, Tom Conley, András Bálint Kovács, Gregg Lambert, Laura U. Marks, Jean-Clet Martin, Angelo Restivo, Martin Schwab, and François Zourabichvili.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttq6p

Chapter 2 Cinema Year Zero from: The Brain Is the Screen
Author(s) Flaxman Gregory
Abstract: Ever since Plato′s Republic, philosophy seems to have been the labor of ″master builders″: Descartes demolishes all prosaic assumptions about the world to lay the groundwork for his first principles, Kant fashions the exquisite proportions of his firstCritiquesas a propaedeutic to metaphysics, and even Hegel′s professed dislike of philosophical preludes grounds hisPhenomenology of Spirit.² We have come to expect our philosophers to build by design, pausing at the outset to reflect on the construction, and so it is all the more astonishing how Gilles Deleuze opens his cinema books. Never mind the brief, almost capricious preface that

Chapter 8 The Roots of the Nomadic: from: The Brain Is the Screen
Author(s) Andrew Dudley
Abstract: If one were to take the Academy Awards and the Cannes film festival the way the newspapers do, one would believe that standard cinema is in good health. Global action pictures ( Independence Day), more artistic passion pictures (The English Patient), and their perfectly stewed combination (Titanic) have appeared on screens around the world, firing the universal imagination the way cinema has since Griffith. These two types of cinema, which might be termed first and second cinema, seem to defy predictions that the century′s end also spells the end of this century′s mass art. Still, those tracking aesthetic and social developments

Chapter 12 The Imagination of Immanence: from: The Brain Is the Screen
Author(s) Canning Peter
Abstract: The most uncanny image in cinema must be the sudden apparition of Simon Srebnik in Shoahreturning from the dead, accompanied by Claude Lanzmann′s film crew. To the Polish villagers who heard him sing for his life more than thirty years before and who assumed he had finally died with the rest of the Jews, the victim of an SS bullet, Srebnik′s reappearance proved so strange that they hastened to frame him with their bodies, to voice over his tale with their own ″song of the Holocaust.″¹ For every occurrence, no matter how weird, the human sensory-motor mechanism generates a

Introduction from: Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Piotrowski Andrzej
Abstract: The disciplinary character of architecture is one of the most important, though under explored, issues that architects face today. Disciplinarity—the way that architecture defines, creates, disseminates, and applies the knowledge within its domain of influence—is increasingly central to the discussions about the present and future direction of the field. However, we rarely focus on how our seeing, thinking, and understanding of architecture or on how the social construction of our field can obstruct or advance our ability to create a built world viable and valuable for the next century.

6 A Dialectics of Determination: from: Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Ellis W. Russell
Abstract: A well-known British architect (Duffy 1996 ) confesses to having been “ruthless” while researching his doctorate, one of the first awarded in a wave of new graduate programs created in the 1970s. Then, as now, research in architecture required frequent cross-disciplinary visits. Such visitors must be ruthless in taking advantage of the host discipline, and ruthless again with themselves to avoid what anthropologists call “going native.” In this, they fit the classic image of the architect as using knowledge from many other disciplines without becoming an expert in any of them (Vitruvius 1960 , 5—11 ).

7 Unpacking the Suitcase: from: Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Jones Kay Bea
Abstract: I want here to consider the promises and problems of learning through direct site exposure, and to unpack our presumptions as architects, while proposing a revised role for travel in the construction of architectural knowledge. My concern is with “travel pedagogy,” by which I mean experientially centered studies dependent on some cultural and geographic shift that radically alters sense perception and challenges visual and spatial cognition. Although learning from experience has pedagogical value among some studio educators, neither the bases for its theoretical grounding nor analyses of trial and error methods have been systematically pursued. Consequently architecture students bene fit

12 A Framework for Aligning Professional Education and Practice in Architecture from: Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Burns Carol
Abstract: During the past thirty years, the relationship between architectural education and architectural practice has provoked recurrent anxiety. The discussion has become especially animated since the mid-1990s. Schools, professional organizations, and publications have all devoted great attention to analyzing and commenting on the disjunction between education and practice.

Keynes and the Capitalist Theory of the State from: Labor of Dionysus
Abstract: FIFTY YEARS have passed since the events of Red October 1917. Those events were the climax of a historical movement that began with the June 1848 insurrection on the streets of Paris, when the modern industrial proletariat first discovered its class autonomy, its independent antagonism to the capitalist system. A further decisive turning point came again in Paris, with the Commune of 1871, the defeat of which led to the generalization of the slogan of the party and the awareness of the need to organize class autonomy politically.

Communist State Theory from: Labor of Dionysus
Abstract: “STATEMONOPOLYcapitalism consists in the subordination of the State apparatus to the capitalist monopolies.” Ever since Stalin posed this definition for the Third International in the 1930s, the official current of the workers' movement has taken few steps forward in developing the theory of the State, and has thus neglected the analytical tasks necessary to adjust the political course of international communism in light of the changes at work in the capitalist State in response to the great economic crises. (See chapter 2.) The mechanical and instrumental conception of the relationship between monopoly capital and the structure of the State has

The State and Public Spending from: Labor of Dionysus
Abstract: IN THE major capitalist countries, public expenditures (by the State and the public sector) approach or surpass half of the gross national income. The increasing rate of growth of public spending with respect to the growth of national income is an irreversible trend. “Yet despite this, there have been only isolated studies by Marxists which systematically examine the causes and consequences of this unprecedented growth” (Ian Gough, “State Expenditure in Advanced Capitalism,” p. 53). When such studies do appear, in fact, they only rarely grasp the new specificity of the situation in general; instead they recast the explanation of the

5 They Are Sleeping and We Are Watching over Them from: Without Offending Humans
Abstract: For far too long, the animal question has been monopolized by the sole question of knowing whether or not animals benefit from those competencies related to the rational and reasonable norms men recognize as being within their capacity. At philosophical dramaturgy’s half-time, Descartes was the decisive agent for the excommunication of nonhuman living beings. In fact, for the majority of Greek and Latin authors, and then for Christians, the problematic of the logoswas intimately tied to the problematic of justice. Animals,aloga,those who were not attributed withlogos,incapable of entering into a contract since they were lacking

6 The Pathetic Pranks of Bio-Art from: Without Offending Humans
Abstract: There are certain artists that mean to mark the end of the avantgarde by setting up their studios in laboratories and working with geneticists so as to act on the mechanisms of life. Artistically modified organisms, writes Eduardo Kac, one of these artists to whose work I will be paying particular attention, “are going to become our familiar companions.”¹ He adds that “artists could usefully increase the planet’s biodiversity by inventing new forms of life.” For these artists, it is a question of replacing the representation of life with its modification and of exhibiting the results of these détournementsin

7 The Ordinariness of Barbarity from: Without Offending Humans
Abstract: In Latin, crudelitasdesignated cruelty only when it coincided withcruor,spilled blood, whether coagulated or in a puddle, wounded flesh. As for noble blood, it was calledsanguis.This is why the consecrated phrase is “Hic est enim calix sanguinis mei.” This observation is less incongruous than it might at first appear, since this divine blood was in no way shed for any kind of redemption of the animals, and since this is precisely thecrucialcharacteristic of our Western Christian culture. This semantic remark must nonetheless not allow us to ignore the fact that one can act with

Introduction from: Chaucer’s Queer Nation
Abstract: Any book about a single author—especially one like this that treats the work of the first “great author” in the English literary tradition and whose critique situates itself within current sexual politics—raises particular and urgent theoretical questions. Why Chaucer? Why now? Why Chaucer’squeer nation?

1 Shameful Pleasures from: Chaucer’s Queer Nation
Abstract: Throughout their many disciplinary manifestations, Chaucer and Chaucerian fictions have played a preeminent role in defining, grounding, and maintaining “English Literature” and the discourses of heterosexuality and modernity that depend on it. As Elaine Tuttle Hansen succinctly puts it: “Chaucer has been known and valued differently in different ages, but he has always been read, talked about, and more often than not singled out for praise as the precursor to be emulated, the forebear to be revered, the Father of English poetry. . . . Present or absent, Chaucer matters.”¹ What has been at stake here is the ability of

Introduction from: Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: Although the illusionof the literary text’s autonomy as well as that of the work of art in general arises from the Enlightenment’s emancipatory project (that is, the attempt to establish a science, morality, and art answerable respectively only to scientific, ethical, and aesthetic norms), literary criticism did not begin to isolate its object of study until very recently. Such has been, since the European Renaissance, the influence of historicism, in its various modalities, and the identification of philology with its objectives and methods. It was thus in the twentieth century—and under the impact exerted almost simultaneously by structural

Chapter 7 The Antimodernization of Spain from: Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: The term antimodernization may call to mind the currently fashionable maneuver whereby to the poorly defined concept of “modernity” is opposed a concept that derives from it— “postmodernity,” which is as poorly defined as the framework from which it originates. One does not always credit Spanish (a language where “isms” abound) with being able to distinguish between the terms of this contemporary debate and those forged by the historiography of Hispanic literatures, which has accustomed us to opposing an aesthetic movement known as modernism to what has been called the Generation of 1898, an ideological movement (as if aesthetics and

Epilogue from: Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: In an article in the journal Gorn,Tretyakov (1923, 1972) asks himself: How is it that man, who as a child draws, dances, sings, and invents “good words,” as an adult is truly impoverished in his expressive faculties and is satisfied with only occasionally enjoying the creativity of an artist? Gerhard Goebel-Schilling (1988) comments on Tretyakov’s question:

Book Title: Notes on Nowhere-Feminism, Utopian Logic, and Social Transformation
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Burwell Jennifer
Abstract: Using contemporary feminist science fiction, Jennifer Burwell examines the political and literary meaning of utopian writing and thought. “Notes from Nowhere makes an original, significant, and persuasive contribution to our understanding of the political and literary dimensions of utopian writing.” --Nancy Fraser, New School for Social Research
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttttvf

1 Locational Hazards: from: Notes on Nowhere
Abstract: In Critique, Norm, and Utopia,Seyla Benhabib identifies the anticipatory/utopian pole within theories of social transformation as that which gives us our normative grounding and sense of a moral imperative, that which allows us to make qualitative judgments and to construct an orientation toward the good. In this way, Benhabib associates the Utopian impulse with what Ernst Bloch calls our “principle of hope”—our ability and desire to imagine something other and better than our existing conditions. At the same time, however, the Utopian impulse is characterized by a set of conservative logics and gestures that are increasingly seen as

3 Speaking Parts: from: Notes on Nowhere
Abstract: Possessing a disempowered position within society, oppressed groups need something more than a stabilizing of the social space that consolidates their position on the margins. The traditional utopian goal of projecting an ideal space free from ideological conflict, however, is incompatible with the goal of exposing and exploring the contradictions and double binds that inflect female subjectivity. If marginalized groups retain this strategy, challenges to the status quo tend to reproduce the logic of stable difference and create “utopias of reversal.” To the extent that contemporary feminists address the ways in which women have been denied the opportunity to establish

4 Utopia and Technopolitics in Woman on the Edge of Time from: Notes on Nowhere
Abstract: Traditional utopian literature relates to the novel’s contemporary historical circumstances through a process of negation—contemporary society is present only as a repressed subtext, and visible only in the conceptual “antinomies” that the utopian text attempts to neutralize or resolve. In the previous chapter, I explored the effects that occur when, instead of repressing the connection between contemporary society and imaginary society (a repression that is designed to preserve the absolute “elsewhere” of utopia), a text actively foregrounds and thematizes the interaction between utopia and contemporary society. This increased interaction funds an “ideologeme of activism” within the text, while the

Chapter 3 Narrative and Verbal Art: from: Narrative as Communication
Abstract: So-called literary narrative is, at least in modern times and in urban, industrial societies, one of the grand categories of narrative communication, so central indeed, as we have already noted, that it has come to obfuscate the study and relevance of narrativeness in other semiotic systems, for example, film, television, advertising, photography, and drama, and appears as a model or a key antagonist for historiography, philosophy, and scientific Discourses. We must therefore try to determine the specific weight and implication of the concept “literary” in phrases like “literary narrative” and “literary work of art”; in other words, we have to

Chapter 6 Voices: from: Narrative as Communication
Abstract: Whether it is a narrative or not, when I open a book, it is because I want the author to talk to me.And since I am not deaf or dumb yet, I

Chapter 7 Binding and Unfolding: from: Narrative as Communication
Abstract: Like “discourse,” “syntax” is, in our context, one of the words that demand an accurate redefinition for a limited purpose, lest they invade with a battalion of loaded linguistic concepts our modest attempt to theorize the system and process of narrative communication. It is worth repeating: narrative is neither a language nor a chain of events but a particular manner of imposing design on a presented world and of presenting worlds through the operations required by the constraints of this design.

Chapter 10 What Tales Tell Us to Do and Think, and How (Narrative and Didactic Constructions of Meaning) from: Narrative as Communication
Abstract: I have hitherto described textual structures and the artistic communication system, among others, essentially as sets of material data and networks that constitute the preconditions for the formation of “primary” messages, that is, for the mental elaboration of relatively autonomous possible worlds. Such worlds could be considered mutually interchangeable in the eyes of an ideal, abstract “subject,” since they were approached on the basis of their production rules, not from the viewpoint of their desirability. Similarly, a nation’s industrial equipment and infrastructure can be described as able to produce heavy machinery and high tech means of transportation, without taking into

A Primer of Restrictions on Picture– Taking in Traditional Areas of Aboriginal Australia [1986] from: Bad Aboriginal Art
Abstract: TRADITIONAL PEOPLES’ first encounters with photography sometimes lead them to conclude that the camera is a dangerous, magical instrument capable of stealing some essential part of their being, causing illness or death. Generally such anecdotes are not explained but get filed away with other exotic superstitions held by curious primitives, leaving these people to sort out their own relationship to cameras, photographs, film, and now video. Traditional people sometimes follow through by taming the magical properties of recording media. For example, when missionaries and health workers banned the preservation and display of the bones of dead ancestors in Melanesian houses,

CHAPTER THREE LSDesign from: Architecture's Historical Turn
Abstract: In December 1979, Progressive Architectureasked American architects to nominate the most influential architects from among their peers. Charles Moore (1925–1993) made the top ten. He also came in first in terms of number of pages devoted to a single architect by the magazine. His influence was not confined to the profession but extended deep into academia as well. In 1989 the American Collegiate Schools of Architecture, in partnership with the American Institute of Architects, awarded him the Topaz Medallion for Excellence in Architectural Education. The board conferring the award described him as “a brilliant and inspiring force who

EPILOGUE from: Architecture's Historical Turn
Abstract: Architectural phenomenology radically transformed architectural historiography, expanding traditional theories of history beyond mere writing conventions to include a more ambiguous experiential intellectual realm expressed through photography, graphic design, camouflage studies, and in short, a wealth of visual techniques imported from architectural practice. Yet the intellectual history of architecture has once again become surprisingly text-centric. Contemporary textbooks and compendia on the history of architectural intellectuality invariably mention phenomenology as a major movement and include the writings of architectural phenomenologists.¹ What is transmitted in these reprints are the words, but not their visual context. A lot of information is lost through this

Book Title: Assembling the Lyric Self-Authorship from Troubadour Song to Italian Poetry Book
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Holmes Olivia
Abstract: Assembling the Lyric Self investigates the transition in the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries from the first surviving Provençal and Italian manuscripts (mostly multiauthor lyric anthologies prepared by scribes) to the single-author codex-that is, to the form we now think of as the book of poems. Working from extensive archival and philological research, Olivia Holmes explores the efforts of individual poets to establish poetic authenticity and authority in the context of expanding vernacular literacy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttx65

CHAPTER 1 Assembling the Book and Its Author from: Assembling the Lyric Self
Abstract: In the thirteenth century, western Europe witnessed a sharp increase in vernacular literacy and the widespread appearance, for the first time since classical antiquity, of a large body of secular literature for popular consumption.¹ Some of the earliest surviving manuscripts of vernacular poetry are multiauthored, scribally compiled anthologies of troubadour lyric, composed in Old Occitan (also known as Old Provençal) and assembled around the middle of the century. Although the period of troubadour lyric production spans both the twelfth and thirteenth centuries, transmission had been predominantly oral—the texts were sung—and only the poets from the end of the

CHAPTER 3 Guittone d’Arezzo from: Assembling the Lyric Self
Abstract: In passing from the Occitan troubadour Uc de Saint Circ to the Italian poet Guittone d’Arezzo, we find ourselves on firmer ground. Italian poetry was born under the sign of Latinity, and of writing; there is little evidence of its oral transmission or musical performance. Guittone flourished from around 1255 to 1280, in the period immediately following the one in which Uc was active and the earliest extant troubadour anthologies were compiled, and he had an enormous impact on the literary culture of his day (see Marti, “Ritratto e fortuna di Guittone d’Arezzo”). There are fifty canzoni, about 250 sonnets,

Introduction from: Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Lavezzo Kathy
Abstract: At least since Benedict Anderson breathed new life into the thought of Walter Benjamin, Ernst Renan, and Victor Turner, nationalism has constituted a prominent conceptual feature of contemporary literary and cultural studies. Following the lead of Perry Anderson, Anthony Giddens, and others, academics in English literary studies, by and large, have restricted their analyses to artifacts produced since the late eighteenth century, when the American and French revolutions launched the processes that gave rise to both a modern state founded on popular sovereignty and the appearance in the lexicon of the word “nationalism” (Anderson, Imagined Communities, 116–19).¹ But, as

Latin England from: Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Galloway Andrew
Abstract: Thorlac Turville-Petre’s England the Nation, linking English literary communities and anthologies with the emerging national status of the English language, calls out for a succession of appendices—or rather, in the spirit of his nondogmatic and open-ended work, with its provocatively pre-Ricardian stopping point, many further chapters, in what deserves to be a vast, collaborative project assessing the ideologies and contexts of national community in late medieval English-speaking areas.¹ A simple encompassing claim about nationalism in the period will not be satisfactory, but the time is long past when we can make a flat declaration that a pan-European Christian ideology

“As Englishe is comoun langage to oure puple”: from: Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Havens Jill C.
Abstract: In her article “Lollardy: The English Heresy?” Anne Hudson argues that Lollardy and its promotion of the English vernacular was not propelled by a “nationalistic” movement: “To attempt to show that the single major heresy known in medieval England arose from a concatenation of peculiarly insular factors would be, I think, a forlorn enterprise. Nor does it seem right to discern nationalism as a major force in the origin of lollardy or in its continuance” (143). Hudson defines “nationalism” here as a catalyst, not an end result. She is right in asserting that nationalism had little to do with the

Chaucer Imagines England (in English) from: Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Knapp Peggy A.
Abstract: When Benedict Anderson argued that the nation is “an imagined political community,” his phrase seemed so apt, even obvious, that it made its way into many facets of analysis in the human sciences. It also meshed with the current elevation of imagination as the most interesting, most effective, mental power we humans have—Captain Janeway must make a remarkable leap to find any continuity between her self-enclosed mental landscape and the collective intelligence of the Borg.¹ More particularly, the idea of imagined communities forged an important link between political and literary theories, since the mutual effects of imaginative constructs and

Hymeneal Alogic: from: Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Davis Kathleen
Abstract: At the end of the dream vision in The Parliament of Fowls, just after Nature has given the common fowl their mates “by evene acord,” the birds sing a departing song in Nature’s honor. “The note,” the narrator explains, “imaked was in Fraunce, / The wordes were swiche as ye may heer fynde, / The nexte verse, as I now have in mynde” (677–79).¹ The multivalenced “heer” in this context refers most obviously to the written page, to the “nexte verse” of the poem; however, “heer” must also refer to England, the geographical source of these “wordes,” in counterpoint

King, Commons, and Kind Wit: from: Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Scanlon Larry
Abstract: Erich Auerbach is not generally associated with postcolonial theory. Yet open up that postcolonialist urtext, Benedict Anderson’s Imagined Communities, and you will find that Auerbach is the very first thinker Anderson mentions: “As will be apparent to the reader, my thinking about nationalism has been deeply affected by the writings of Erich Auerbach, Walter Benjamin and Victor Turner” (ix). On its face, this grouping seems unlikely; but what is most surprising, given the predominantly Marxist orientation of Anderson’s project, is that it is Auerbach who proves to be the most important of the three. Turner gets cited only once, as

Translating “Communitas” from: Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Staley Lynn
Abstract: Translatio, the act of transferring authority, significance, of transplanting, grafting, of transposing, was a concept that for the literate meant that ideas, meanings, words, or things would be moved from one sphere to another.¹ The very act of removal was intended to convey the carefully interlocked sets of meanings that had obtained in the original sphere to the new sphere, thus investing the new medium with the power of the old. Or, to use France as the prime example of the arts of translation, if the authority of the empire was to be transferred from a pagan and classical world

The Captivity of Henry Chrystede: from: Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Sponsler Claire
Abstract: Near the end of Book IV of his Chroniques, Jean Froissart describes an encounter in Richard II’s chambers with an Anglo-Irish knight named Henry Chrystede, “ung escuier d’Angleterre” about fifty years of age, whom Froissart meets on his return visit to England in 1395. Noting with approval that Chrystede is “moult homme de bien et de prudence grandement pourveu” (Oeuvres, 15:167–68) and is fluent in French, Froissart is pleased when Chrystede recognizes that Froissart is “ung historien” (15:168) (as he has heard from Sir Richard Stury) and engages him in conversation, promising a story he can use in his

1 Uses of the Other in World Politics from: Uses of the Other
Abstract: The discipline of international relations (IR) is witnessing a surge of interest in identity and identity formation.¹ This development has definitely been permitted and facilitated by the general uncertainty of a discipline that feels itself to have spent the 1980s barking up the wrong trees. A lack of faith in the old has made it easier for the new to break through. And yet because identity formation has been foremost among the common concerns of social theory for years and years, it is hardly coincidental that “the new” happened to take the study of identity formation as one of its

2 Space Quest: from: Re-Envisioning Peacekeeping
Abstract: An omnivoyant eye, a power from above, capable of encompassing by its constant gaze all life on earth and of simultaneously controlling and regulating with a most detailed perfection the existence of individuals, animals, plants, machines, institutions placed under its inspection: the myth of an omnivoyant and omnipotent center of surveillance has persisted, from Christian mystics of the late Middle Ages to nineteenth-century liberal utilitarians, from technocratic fictions (Orwell’s 1984) to some of the most recent global governance and planetary sustainability utopias (late-twentieth-century environmentalism). Jeremy Bentham first formulated¹ the myth and, later, Michel Foucault theorized it as a panoptic society.²

4 Visions of Otherness and Interventionism in Bosnia, or How the West Was Won Again from: Re-Envisioning Peacekeeping
Abstract: Through this account of what the author feels is a particularly unarousing striptease scene (a businesslike, antiseptic, medical peepshow that does not fulfill the author’s desires), Miller intends to allegorize the entire Bosnian conflict. For the Western observer/voyeur that Miller claims to represent (during his trip to Bosnia in 1994), Bosnia has no attractive power anymore. Miller’s cultural and libidinal décalage(gap) with the Bosnian reality is exemplified by his asking the “fatal” question: which nationality does the stripper belong to? A supposedly fatal question because, in Miller’s mind, and despite the overtly nationalistic and ethnic motivations of the Bosnian

6 Theorizing the Visual: from: Re-Envisioning Peacekeeping
Abstract: Techniques and strategies of visual simulation are shaping the contemporary landscape of international politics. Placing the interpretive focus of critical/postmodern international relations theory on the UN and its peacekeeping operations allows one to realize that, in a post–cold war era, techniques such as panopticism, visual suture, clinical witnessing, or photojournalistic displays of the other’s gaze are crucial international mechanisms. It is through such visually and mediatically enhanced strategies that both reality and ideology (and reality as ideology) are accessed. In the current practice of international affairs, the strategy of simulation seeks to “fool the eye” of the international observer,

1. Nothing Is Fundamental... from: The Ethos of Pluralization
Abstract: Onta, the really existing things;ontology, the study of the fundamental logic of reality apart from appearances. These determinations are both too restrictive and too total for what I have in mind. For example, thelogosinontologyalready suggests a fundamental logic, principle, or design of being. But it can and has been urged that the most fundamental thing about being is that it contains no such overriding logic or design. “Ontopolitical interpretation” may come closer, then.Onto, because every political interpretation invokes a set of fundaments about necessities and possibilities of human being, about, for instance, the forms

4. Fundamentalism in America from: The Ethos of Pluralization
Abstract: Fundamentalism, as conventionally understood in the country where the term was introduced, is a general imperative to assert an absolute, singular ground of authority; to ground your own identity and allegiances in this unquestionable source; to define political issues in a vocabulary of God, morality, or nature that invokes such a certain, authoritative source; and to condemn tolerance, abortion, pluralism, radicalism, homosexuality, secular humanism, welfarism, and internationalism (among other things) by imputing moral weakness, relativism, selfishness, or corruption to them. A fundamentalist is an American dogmatist who is proud of it. This combination is what renders fundamentalism so tenacious politically,

5. Democracy and Territoriality from: The Ethos of Pluralization
Abstract: Today, nostalgic realism and nostalgic idealism coexist within the compass of the state. While political movements, economic transactions, environmental dangers, security risks, cultural communications, tourist travel, and disease transmission increasingly acquire global dimensions, the state retains a tight grip over public definitions of danger, security, collective identification, and democratic accountability. Even when a fragment within the state

4 BETWEEN TRAUMA AND TRAGEDY from: From Utopia to Apocalypse
Abstract: According to an incisive formation of Slavoj Žižek, it is easier at the present historical moment to imagine the destruction of the world than to imagine the end of capitalism. Certainly images of apocalyptic destruction abound in contemporary culture, as the increasing interconnectedness of the globe engenders new forms of vulnerability just as it fosters new types of affiliation. In Margaret Atwood’s Oryx and Crake,a rigorously rational scientist unleashes a plague that wipes out almost all of humanity in order to populate the world with a new, more peaceful humanoid species. The sexual utopia of Michel Houellebecq’sPlatform,in

1. Narrative, Media, and Modes from: Avatars of Story
Abstract: Academic disciplines, unlike people, usually don’t have birthdays, but if one could be given to narratology, it would fall on the publication date of issue 8 of the French journal Communicationsin 1966. The issue contained articles by Claude Bremond, Gérard Genette, A. J. Greimas, Tzvetan Todorov, and Roland Barthes. (One of Genette’s favorite stories is that Barthes’s invitation to contribute to this issue was the incentive that resulted in his lifelong dedication to narrative.) In his contribution, “L’Analyse structurale du récit,” Barthes wrote:

2. Drawing and Transgressing Fictional Boundaries from: Avatars of Story
Abstract: Fiction lies at the intersection of two fundamental modes of thinking. One is narrative, the set of cognitive operations that organizes and explains human agency and experience. Fiction does not necessarily fulfill all the conditions of narrativity that I have spelled out in chapter 1, but it must create a world by means of singular existential propositions, and it must offer, to the very least, an embryonic story.¹ The other mode of thinking is what we may variously call “off-line thinking,” “virtual thinking,” or “non factual thinking”: the ability to detach thought from what exists and to conduct mental experiments

7. Web-Based Narrative, Multimedia, and Interactive Drama from: Avatars of Story
Abstract: In the early to mid-1990s, computer systems underwent two developments that deeply affected digital textuality: the ability to encode and transmit visual and aural data efficiently; and the ability to connect personal computers into a world-spanning network. The textual consequences of these new features are publicly posted on millions of Internet pages. Though Web pages implement the same hypertextual architecture as Storyspace fiction, they differ significantly from the latter in their linking philosophy and graphic appearance. From a visual point of view, the major design characteristic of Web pages is what Bolter and Grusin have called their “hypermediated structure”: the

Book Title: Gameplay Mode-War, Simulation, and Technoculture
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): CROGAN PATRICK
Abstract: To understand the place of computer games in contemporary culture, Patrick Crogan argues, we must first understand the military logics that created and continue to inform them. Drawing on critical theoretical perspectives on computer-based technoculture, Crogan reveals how today’s computer games—and the wider culture they increasingly influence—are informed by the technoscientific program they inherited from the military-industrial complex.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttv857

Introduction: from: Gameplay Mode
Abstract: Maxis’s 2008 computer game Spore(Electronic Arts) offers a world of interactive play that tells us much about the world in which it jostles for position among competing digital entertainments. Designed by Will Wright, legendary designer of video game classicsSim City(Maxis, 1989) andThe Sims(Maxis, 2000), it is a game of many modes. Single-player play (including first-person, tactical, realtime, and turn-based strategy), asynchronous interactivity, user-generated content creation, and publishing are all built into the downloadable or packaged commodity. The player controls the development of a species from its beginnings as a single cell organism through stages of

1 From the Military-Industrial to the Military-Entertainment Complex from: Gameplay Mode
Abstract: Mainstream media commentary on the carefully orchestrated “highlights packages” released daily to the international press during the U.S.-led 1991 Desert Storm campaign in Kuwait and Iraq registered the striking resemblance between the “missile cam” and spotter plane footage of targets being destroyed and the screens of contemporary combat-based video games. Media theorists typically responded in the wake of the war by exposing the highly selective and unrepresentative nature of U.S. military–controlled media briefings. The rhetoric of a war of precision weapons delivering surgical strikes obscured the fact that the vast majority of military ordnance was not precision guided; that

2 Select Gameplay Mode: from: Gameplay Mode
Abstract: Alternative reality games (ARGs) have grown in popularity since the turn of the most recent century. Players are engaged to uncover some mystery or puzzle by searching for clues in documents, on Web sites, via communication with other players or game-created automatic agents (“bots”), and so forth. The multimodal means by which ARGs are played is key to their appeal: the games are played not on a screen like a video game, but in and among the spaces and routines of everyday life.

Chapter 5 “Wanting-to-Say and Representation” from: Strategies of Deconstruction
Abstract: Chapter 4 of Speech and Phenomenafollows Husserl’s attempt to isolate pure expression, free from all indicative functions, in the monologue of solitary discourse. According to Husserl, even when I talk to myself there is no genuine communication and thus no indication: I merely imagine or represent myself as speaking and communicating. This is Derrida’s opportunity to investigate the role of representation in language. “Representation” has a variety of senses, and Derrida argues that through all the registers of its meaning, the “fundamental distinction between reality and representation” cannot be drawn, since in language it is impossible to distinguish them.

Chapter 10 Saussure from: Strategies of Deconstruction
Abstract: The deconstructive reading of Ferdinand de Saussure’s Cours de la linguistique généraleplays a crucial role inOf Grammatology, for in Saussure Derrida thinks that he can attack “the entire uncritical tradition which [Saussure] inherits” (OG, 67/46). If it can be shown that Saussure’s work is governed by a “coherence of desire producing itself in a near-oneiric way . . . through a contradictory logic,” this will “already give us the assured means of broaching the deconstruction of thegreatest totality—the concept of theepistēmēand logocentric metaphysics—within which are produced, without ever posing the radical question of

1 THE DAO OF ASIAN MARTIAL ARTS from: Striking Beauty
Abstract: What the world knows as the Asian martial arts began in China. China is not the only civilization to have spiritualized combat arts; there are other, no less ancient, examples in India and Mesopotamia. Yet the Chinese, drawing on the resources of a mature civilization, merged their arts of armed and unarmed combat with Buddhist meditation and Daoist inner alchemy, two of the most dynamic currents of their postclassical culture. Creatively synthesizing combative arts with these prestigious teachings reinvented their practice as a way of self-cultivation. Indeed, scholars increasingly recognize that “without reliable research and informed commentary on the martial

EPILOGUE from: Striking Beauty
Abstract: An aesthetic paradox of Asian martial arts is that something so warlike in conception should be beautiful to watch and joyful to perform. While designed for violence and visibly expressing that functionality, the martial arts are not practiced with a violent purpose and do no harm (although they certainly could). By suspending the dread of violence, the practice creates a theater in which to contemplate movements combining artful design with eloquent efficacy. But if you remove the training conventions and introduce unfeigned violence (as in boxing), the aesthetic serenity will vanish into the sometimes irrepressibly fascinating chaos of violence.

CONCLUSION TOUTE LA MÉMOIRE DU MONDE: from: Counter-Archive
Abstract: Siegfried kracauer’s recollection of Fernand Léger’s 1931 dream of a “monster film” in which every single moment of a day in the life of a couple would be recorded without their knowledge presents a dystopian version of the quest to archive everyday life that motivated Albert Kahn’s Archives de la Planète.³ This book has explored the two extremes of film’s archival longing for the everyday as figured literally in the Archives de la Planète and conceptually in the discursive context engendering Léger’s “monster film.” At one extreme this desire expected to unite humanity through a multimedia visual inventory of daily

Book Title: Roberto Bolaño's Fiction-An Expanding Universe
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): ANDREWS CHRIS
Abstract: Since the publication of The Savage Detectivesin 2007, the work of Roberto Bolaño (1953--2003) has achieved an acclaim rarely enjoyed in contemporary fiction. Chris Andrews, a leading translator of Bolaño's work into English, explores the singular achievements of the author's oeuvre, engaging with its distinct style and key thematic concerns, incorporating his novels and stories into the larger history of Latin American and global literary fiction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/andr16806

4 AIMLESSNESS from: Roberto Bolaño's Fiction
Abstract: The drifting of Bolaño’s stories, discussed at the end of the previous chapter, is not a purely formal feature of his writing. If his stories often drift, it is partly because many of his characters are drifters by choice, by nature, or by force of circumstance. When the narrator in “Sensini” says that the eponymous writer’s stories are peopled by “brave and aimless characters” (LEE 5), he could be referring to the fiction of Bolaño. The characteristics of bravery and aimlessness are preeminently combined by Cesárea Tinajero in The Savage Detectives.In the final section of the next chapter I

5 DUELS AND BRAWLS: from: Roberto Bolaño's Fiction
Abstract: Among the authors he admired, Roberto Bolaño reserved a special place for Jorge Luis Borges. “Borges,” he wrote, “is or should be at the center of our canon” (BP 337). Perhaps surprisingly for readers in the English-speaking world, what Bolaño particularly valued was not the conceptual brilliance of the thought experiments that made Borges famous in Europe and North America from the early 1960s on, but the Argentine writer’s humor and courage. In an interview, Bolaño described his tutelary elder as “possibly the best humorist we’ve had” (B 77), alluding to a comic vein that is evident in Borges’s erudite

6 EVIL AGENCIES from: Roberto Bolaño's Fiction
Abstract: It would be hyperbolic to use the category of evil in discussing much contemporary fiction, but not in Bolaño’s case. His fictional universe accommodates ethical extremes: it is not full of heroes and villains, but as I argued in the previous chapter, it is home to at least one exemplar of heroism (Cesárea Tinajero). In this chapter I will be substantiating the unsurprising claim that it is also inhabited and haunted by a small number of genuinely villainous characters, intent not just on dominating the lives of others but also on destroying them. If we adopt Claudia Card’s definition of

INTRODUCTION from: Modernist Commitments
Abstract: In his first novel, Untouchable (1928), the celebrated Indian writer Mulk Raj Anand follows a day in the life of an untouchable boy named Bakha, whose travails in a small village raise complex questions about the ethical and political dimensions of modernity in latecolonial India. One of the first novels to feature the outcaste as hero,Untouchable documents the conflicts between Bakha’s obligations as a sweeper and his rising ethical awareness, which grows over the course of the novel and infuses its subjective, highly focalized narration. The novel is stunning in its depiction of the corporeality of Bakha’s existence, incorporating the sounds

Book Title: Crossing Horizons-World, Self, and Language in Indian and Western Thought
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): ROTEM ORNAN
Abstract: Biderman uses concrete examples from religion and literature to illustrate the formal aspects of the philosophical problems of transcendence, language, selfhood, and the external world and then demonstrates their plausibility in actual situations. Though his method of analysis is comparative, Biderman does not adopt the disinterested stance of an "ideal" spectator. Rather, Biderman approaches ancient Indian thought and culture from a Western philosophical standpoint to uncover cultural presuppositions that can be difficult to expose from within the culture in question.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/bide14024

Introduction from: Crossing Horizons
Abstract: This book sets itself the task of examining and comparing the views, outlooks, and attitudes of two distinct cultures. However, its purpose is neither to offer a bird’s-eye view of these cultures nor to gaze at them from the privileged point of view of some disinterested ideal spectator. On the contrary, the book as a whole is imbued by the author’s philosophical outlook and intellectual convictions, which are, in this case, distinctly Western (as they are commonly—and perhaps inaccurately—referred to). In adopting the comparative method to examine Indian and Western philosophical views it is not my intention to

Book Title: Reclaiming the Enlightenment-Toward a Politics of Radical Engagement
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): BRONNER STEPHEN ERIC
Abstract: With its championing of democracy, equality, cosmopolitanism, and reason -- and its vociferous attacks on popular prejudice, religious superstition, and arbitrary abuses of power -- the Enlightenment was once hailed as the foundation of all modern, progressive politics. But in 1947, this perspective was dramatically undermined when Max Horkheimer and Theodor Adorno published their classic work, Dialectic of Enlightenment, which claims that the Enlightenment was the source of totalitarianism and the worst excesses of modernity. Reclaiming the Enlightenment from purely philosophical and cultural interpretations, Bronner shows that its notion of political engagement keeps democracy fresh and alive by providing a practical foundation for fostering institutional accountability, opposing infringements on individual rights, instilling an enduring commitment to social reform, and building a cosmopolitan sensibility. This forceful and timely reinterpretation of the Enlightenment and its powerful influence on contemporary political life is a resounding wake-up call to critics on both the left and the right.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/bron12608

5 ABOLISHING THE GHETTO: from: Reclaiming the Enlightenment
Abstract: Voltaire once noted in a justly famous quip that if God did not exist it would have been necessary to invent Him. It is the same with the Jews and the Enlightenment: if the “accursed race” did not invent it then they should have. Times have changed since the totalitarian attempt to annihilate the Jews—the other of western civilization since its inception—seemed to justify the belief that progress had culminated in the most radical form of reification: the number tattooed on an inmate’s arm. While this stance left Dialectic of Enlightenment locked into identifying the absolute evil with

8 PATHWAYS TO FREEDOM: from: Reclaiming the Enlightenment
Abstract: Human rights is the global expression of a demand for civil liberty. Its origins derive from natural law and the European Enlightenment. Opposition to “rights” from the ancien régime was fierce, however, and it took a few hundred ideas for the idea to permeate the mainstream discourse. Human rights only gained currency after Auschwitz and Hiroshima and, in fact, it became popular in the United States only during the presidency of Jimmy Carter in the aftermath of the Vietnam War. Once again, using the famous phrase of Hegel, the Owl of Minerva spread its wings only at dusk: the Universal

4 PRAGMATISM AND ULTIMATE JUSTIFICATION from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) KETTNER MATTHIAS
Abstract: Jürgen Habermas’s intellectual itinerary can hardly be understood without considering its critical and constructive interplay with the thought of Karl-Otto Apel—interactions between the two theorists have often marked significant turning points in Habermas’s project. Without the theoretical-architectonic alternatives that Apel’s reflections open, it would be impossible to evaluate the philosophical course Habermas has steered. Apel and Habermas are united by a lifelong professional friendship, which began when they studied together in Bonn in the early 1950s; since then, the liberating encounter with American pragmatism—of which Apel was one of the first German translators (1967, 1970)—has strengthened their

14 JURIDICAL DISCOURSES from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) GÜNTHER KLAUS
Abstract: Among the controversies of jurisprudence that gripped the Federal Republic of Germany in its early days, one of the most pressing concerned the “social and constitutional state” ( sozialer Rechtsstaat). In the Basic Law (Grundgesetz) (1949), one reads the pithy commandment (article 28, paragraph 1): “The constitutional order in theLändermust conform to the principles of a republican, democratic, and social state governed by the rule of law, within the meaning of this Basic Law.” In similar fashion, article 20, paragraph 1 affirms that the Federal Republic of Germany is “a democratic and social federal state.” Debate concerning the meaning

16 MORAL AND ETHICAL DISCOURSES: from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) LOHMANN GEORG
Abstract: From the beginning, Jürgen Habermas has elaborated his theory of discursive ethics by engaging with Hegel’s critique of Kant. He shares both these philosophers’ view that morality, under the conditions of modernity, can no longer be understood—as had been the case for Aristotle and Thomas Aquinas—by way of all-encompassing prescriptions concerning the “good” or “happy” life ( eudaimonia,summum bonum).

32 HISTORY AND EVOLUTION: from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) MCCARTHY THOMAS
Abstract: The essays collected in Zur Rekonstruktion des Historischen Materialismus(1976), all written in the mid-1970s, represent a major juncture in Habermas’s thought. They brought his reflections on historical materialism since the 1950s together with his work in the early 1970s on the theory of communicative action, on one side, and with the results of his recent exchange with Niklas Luhmann concerning social-systems theory, on the other side. Together they introduced the research program that would soon lead toThe Theory of Communicative Action(1985 [1981]).

36 THE DISCOURSE THEORY OF MORALITY: from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) FORST RAINER
Abstract: Discourse Ethics—Notes on a Program of Philosophical Justifi-cation,” which was written on the occasion of Karl-Otto Apel’s sixtieth birthday and subsequently appeared in Moral Consciousness and Communicative Action, offers a programmatic and comprehensive account of Habermas’s approach to discourse ethics. The text synthesizes a number of the author’s writings since the early 1970s and provides the point of departure for a range of further discussions and revisions of the discourse theory of morality. Although Habermas developed this theory together with Apel, here he also discusses key points on which his view differs from Apel’s transcendental pragmatics.

38 DEMOCRACY, LAW, AND SOCIETY: from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) MÖLLERS CHRISTOPH
Abstract: Habermas’s legal theory must be understood as part of a much larger project that combines theoretical and practical philosophy in an uncommonly thorough way for the twentieth and twenty-first centuries. Habermas (in Truth) has lamented the fact that, in a landscape increasingly distinguished by the division of academic labor, the two perspectives have grown more and more separate (for an expressly different view, see Rawls 2005, 372ff.). At the same time, his writings have proved that this need not be the case. Habermas was interested in matters of political theory from the first, even if he came to address them

39 EUROPE, EUROPEAN CONSTITUTION: from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) ARATO ANDREW
Abstract: Europe and its constitution are important for Habermas for both theoretical and political reasons. Modern constitutions that include fundamental rights, each developed under specific national circumstances, represent key and even indispensable moments of bringing the particular and the universal under a single denominator; hence the concept of constitutional patriotism was developed as the center of an “ethics” that can both motivate and satisfy universal norms. The preconditions were right, namely, a liberal democratic constitution and a political culture capable of recognizing its own highest aspirations in that normative order. In spite of occasional optimism, Habermas was apparently never fully convinced

47 CONSERVATISM from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) BRUMLIK MICHA
Abstract: Conservative thinking in its various adumbrations has interested Jürgen Habermas since the very beginning of his sociological and philosophical efforts. In 1963, he authored the article “Kritische und konservative Aufgaben der Soziologie” (Critical and conservative tasks of sociology). Referring to Scottish moral philosophy—especially the works of David Hume—as a conservative element of sociology in its early stages, Habermas declared that conservatism “esteems tradition as the peaceful basis of ongoing development precisely because it does not question the naturalness [ Naturwüchsigkeit] of progress.”

50 COUNTERFACTUAL PRESUPPOSITIONS from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) KOLLER ANDREAS
Abstract: The notion of unavoidable, idealizing presuppositions of a pragmatic nature that Habermas elaborates in his later works represents an effort to nuance—and, ultimately, to replace—the confusing concept of an “ideal speech situation” that he presented in the works of his middle period. Since Between Facts and Norms, Habermas has understood “counterfactual presuppositions”—or, alternatively, the “vocabulary of the as-if”—as “the nerve of my entire theoretical undertaking” (1998, 418). The social sciences in particular have paid little attention to this conceptual move, however. Accordingly, the matter represents one of the most misunderstood elements of Habermasian theory.

54 EQUALITY from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) BAYNES KENNETH
Abstract: Although Habermas has rarely explicitly addressed the topic of equality, it is clearly an ideal that informs much of his thought. This is, of course, not surprising, since the idea of an association in which “the free development of each is a condition for the free development of all” is an ideal that informs the tradition of Western Marxism, of which Habermas is a central figure. It is, however, important to see the ways in which Habermas has learned from the deficiencies in Marxist thought and other treatments of equality. His own conception of “radical democracy,” for which the

2 IS THE CLASSIC CONCEPT OF UTOPIA READY FOR THE FUTURE? from: Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) SAAGE RICHARD
Abstract: The origins of the intentional conception go back to Gustav Landauer. In his study Revolutionfrom 1907, Landauer interprets utopia as a decisive explosive charge of the revolutionary upheavals in Europe that have happened since the sixteenth century.¹ He seeks to isolate its mechanism in the fact that social development always swings between two “states of

9 NEGATIVITY AND UTOPIA IN THE GLOBAL JUSTICE MOVEMENT from: Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) LÖWY MICHAEL
Abstract: The global justice movement is without a doubt the most important phenomenon of antisystemic resistance of the beginning of the twenty-first century. This vast, nebulous “movement of movements,” which has taken visible form since the regional or world social forums and the great protest demonstrations—against the WTO, the G8, or the imperial war in Iraq—does not correspond to the usual forms of social or political action. A large decentralized network, it is multiple, diverse, and heterogeneous, joining trade unions and peasant movements, NGOs and indigenous organizations, women’s movements, as well as ecological associations, intellectuals, and young activists. Far

12 REALISM, WISHFUL THINKING, UTOPIA from: Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) GEUSS RAYMOND
Abstract: The short monograph Philosophy and Real Politicsrepresents my attempt to give a sketchy answer to the question of how a political philosophy that can be taken seriously might look today.¹ As an explicitly programmatic work, the book certainly does not claim to contain a complete political philosophy, if completeness would even be a meaningful demand in this domain. Rather, it includes only a few positive and a few negative pointers: positive pointers as to where one could possibly continue the investigation, and negative pointers concerning approaches and modes of inquiry that have proven to be not especially promising, or

13 DESIRE AND SHIPWRECK: from: Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) TASSIN ÉTIENNE
Abstract: “The world has long dreamed of possessing something of which it has only to be conscious in order to possess it in reality,” writes Marx in a letter to Ruge from September 1843.¹ For the dream to become reality, it is sufficient that, here and now, humanity be aware of its ancient desire in order to give it existence, to actualize and see the birth of a new society.”

One Innovating Ourselves from: Neopoetics
Abstract: Since the evolution of speech, writing has arguably been our species’ most consequential innovation. By “innovation” I mean any successful, alternative way of doing something. Some of these changes were the result of gene mutation, the prime factor in natural selection, as over time alternative procedures aided their users to survive and reproduce and were thereby passed along to their descendants. Other innovations, learned by imitation, were transmitted through cultural evolution. Nonhuman animals show little or no capacity for innovation. Our nearest evolutionary cousins, the chimpanzees, for example, have the innate ability to hurl things, yet they cannot learn how

Five Poets’ Play and Plato’s Poetics from: Neopoetics
Abstract: In ancient Greece, these performers, the aoidoi(singers), were the essential agents of the Muses’ art, ormousikê. Singers in an oral culture, though prized as archives of communal information, were also adept

Seven Writing and the Reading Mind from: Neopoetics
Abstract: In the last chapter, I discussed writing as a means of reenacting speech events such as dialogues and monologues, either for others or for oneself. If for oneself, this performance could be a silent simulation of speech using the reader’s articulatory and auditory imagination. In this concluding chapter I will sketch out some of the unique ways in which writing also began to represent aspects of the mind that only writing could reveal. We have no reason to assume that the new model of the mind that literate culture introduced was the inevitable outcome of evolutionary forces. For Europe, it

Epilogue from: Neopoetics
Abstract: It is more than mere passage of time that separates the poets of Rome’s Golden Age from those that John Stuart Mill had in mind when, in 1833, he contrasted poetry with eloquence. Both these discourses, he said, are “alike the expression or uttering forth of feeling. But … eloquence is heard; poetry isoverheard. Eloquence supposes an audience; the peculiarity of poetry appears to us to lie in the poet’s utter unconsciousness of a listener. Poetry is feeling confessing itself to itself, in moments of solitude.… All poetry is of the nature of soliloquy” (Mill 1965, 109–110). Classical

INTRODUCTION from: Foucault/Derrida Fifty Years Later
Author(s) HADDAD SAMIR
Abstract: There was no debate. There never was a moment when Derrida and Foucault were sitting opposite each other, on display for an audience, arguing back and forth, controlled by a mediator or provoked by a journalist. There can be no images, no transcript. Of course, the history of philosophy is full of debates whose reality and vitality does not depend on an empirical encounter of the sort Foucault had with Chomsky: writers and readers frequently proceed by staging two authors as figures to stake out opposing positions. But the strange quarrel explored in these essays is not quite of that

2 Looking Back at History of Madness from: Foucault/Derrida Fifty Years Later
Author(s) HUFFER LYNNE
Abstract: Over fifty years have passed since Derrida’s “Cogito and the History of Madness” triggered a philosophical quarrel whose reverberations still haunt us. But why concern ourselves today with what many regard as a debate whose moment has passed? I want to ask: In knowing the debate so well, have we passed something over?¹ Have we really read the strange histoire—history and story—that compelled Derrida to “start to speak” (CH 32/52) in the first place?

10 “This Death Which Is Not One”: from: Foucault/Derrida Fifty Years Later
Author(s) DEUTSCHER PENELOPE
Abstract: To recall—in derrida’s work there was “always a telephone.” It was just one of the technologies promising to annul distance, while calling into question the immediacy it promised and the distance it promised to annul.¹ Yet, as Eric Prenowitz writes, the telephone held a more peculiar interest: from “Plato’s Pharmacy,” through Derrida’s many reflections on teletechnologies (generalized inEchographies), to the ongoing dialogues with Hélène Cixous² that were also repeated openings to sexual difference. Consistent with those openings, the telephone becomes, at one point in hisThe Death Penalty, Volume 1, an umbilical cord. Here is Derrida describing teletechnology

11 From Reprisal to Reprise from: Foucault/Derrida Fifty Years Later
Author(s) CUSTER OLIVIA
Abstract: As is no doubt the case for all who think with, and through, bothDerrida and Foucault, rereading the initial exchange in their quarrel provokes a mixture of emotions for me. Pleasure at the familiarity as they show off what have since become signature moves, hilarity and occasional bafflement at the degree to which they manage to be inaudible to one another, admiration for their brilliance tinged with a certain regret when caustic wit seems to veer into exaggerated aggression, and a lingering sense that this exchange does more to explain why it should be difficult to follow both of

4 Exemplifying the Worst: from: The Force of the Example
Abstract: Unfortunately, exemplarity in the public realm is not just about the force of the reasonable. Just as crucial, for buttressing the viability of the paradigm of judgment, is the task of making sense of the repulsive force exerted by radical evil when it is identified as such. The flip side of reasonability is negative exemplarity, that from which we recoil in utter horror—as the hero of Heart of Darknessat the end of his life—or, in other words, evil as the exemplification of the worst we could possibly be. In this chapter the relation of radical evil, judgment, and

8 Europe as a Special Area for Human Hope from: The Force of the Example
Abstract: As a European, few expressions irritate me more than the so-called idea of Europe. I find the exercise of grafting a possible identity for the Europeans onto some philosophical or religious concept both futile and arrogant, indeed, a perfect example of what Europeans had better stay away from. This is not to say, however, that a reflection on what is distinctive about Europe in the larger context of contemporary Western society is purposeless. On the contrary, it is a priority, given the “constitutional” moment that the European Union has been undergoing since the formal signing of the Constitutional Treaty and

Book Title: History in the Comic Mode-Medieval Communities and the Matter of Person
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Holsinger Bruce W.
Abstract: Essays feature close readings of both familiar and lesser known materials, offering provocative interpretations of John of Rupescissa's alchemy; the relationship between the living and the saintly dead in Bernard of Clairvaux's sermons; the nomenclature of heresy in the early eleventh century; the apocalyptic visions of Robert of Uzès; Machiavelli's De principatibus; the role of "demotic religiosity" in economic development; and the visions of Elizabeth of Schönau. Contributors write as historians of religion, art, literature, culture, and society, approaching their subjects through the particular and the singular rather than through the thematic and the theoretical. Playing with the wild possibilities of the historical fragments at their disposal, the scholars in this collection advance a new and exciting approach to writing medieval history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/fult13368

1 FORGETTING HATHUMODA: from: History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Paxton Frederick S.
Abstract: Hathumoda, first abbess of Gandersheim, could have had a glorious afterlife. Agius, a monk-priest of the nearby abbey of Corvey—her confidant and perhaps a blood relative—was with her when she died.¹ Afterward, so he tells us, Agius consoled her bereaved sisters at Gandersheim, speaking movingly of Hathumoda’s long and painful passing and the significance of her life and death. Over the next two years he transformed those conversations into a consolatory dialogue in verse. At the same time, so that they, who could “no longer hold her or gaze at her in the flesh,” might at least “possess

2 “IF ONE MEMBER GLORIES …”: from: History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Harrison Anna
Abstract: Bathed in the bliss of eternity, the dead commune with the living. So Bernard proclaims in his five Sermons for the Feast of All Saints.¹ For Bernard, commonality of experience establishes a sense of community between the happy dead and those who labor on pilgrimage. Our common experience of suffering and of sinfulness fuels our confidence in the saints and engenders sympathy for us in them. Furthermore, desire for God is common to the living and the dead; desire transports the longing soul to heaven to share—however partially—in the experience of saved souls, which is boundless desire for

5 THE CHANGING FORTUNES OF ANGELA OF FOLIGNO, DAUGHTER, MOTHER, AND WIFE from: History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Mooney Catherine M.
Abstract: Angela of Foligno as daughter, mother, and wife has a chameleonlike character, to judge by the opinions of her many editors and commentators. She is variously adulterous spouse or mistreated wife, tender or detached mother, daughter overly devoted to her mother or one eager to break free. These multiple representations of Angela are striking because each is based on evidence from a single source, known as the Liber.⁵ The text lavishly describes Angela’s interior mystical journey along a path of penitence, poverty, and suffering, yet is virtually bereft of the sort of biographical details required to reconstruct her family life.

12 UNDERSTANDING CONTAGION: from: History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Kramer Susan R.
Abstract: At the end of the twelfth century the Paris master and theologian Peter the Chanter devoted a chapter of his handbook on ethics to the contaminating effects of sin. Discussing the impact of contact with sinners, Peter raises the specter of collective guilt and damnation by recalling the erring Israeli tribes, who had dared to build an altar in honor of a pagan god, with a warning from the Book of Joshua: “Because you erected an altar against God’s great and sacred word, tomorrow his anger will rage against all the people.” Peter’s own more prosaic words show that the

Book Title: The End of Cinema?-A Medium in Crisis in the Digital Age
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): BARNARD TIMOTHY
Abstract: The authors begin with an overview of the extreme positions held by opposing camps in the debate over cinema: the "digitalphobes" who lament the implosion of cinema and the "digitalphiles" who celebrate its new, vital incarnation. Throughout, they remind readers that cinema has never been a static medium but a series of processes and transformations powering a dynamic art. From their perspective, the digital revolution is the eighth major crisis in the history of motion pictures, with more disruptions to come. Brokering a peace among all sides, Gaudreault and Marion emphasize the cultural practice of cinema over rigid claims on its identity, moving toward a common conception of cinema to better understand where it is headed next.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/gaud17356

Chapter Three A Brief Phenomenology of “Digitalized” Cinema from: The End of Cinema?
Abstract: Images today are not merely digitalimages; they are alsomultipleandmigrating. The authors of this volume call this the “DiMuMi syndrome” (fordigital,multiple, andmigrating), behind which we find, on the reception level, one of the most explicitly “revolutionary” dimensions of the digital mutation we are a part of and a witness to. What our “media modernity” offers us are numerous “on ramps”—most often by way of a touch of our finger—to a phenomenal quantity of images, both moving and not. At the same time, the number of screens in our lives is increasing at

Chapter Six New Variants of the Moving Image from: The End of Cinema?
Abstract: When it comes to cinema, things were once simpler than they are today. There is no need to belabor the fact that since sounds and images became relatively dematerialized and transformed into cathodeornumericalsignals, the paradigm that we call the “classical model of cinematic proceedings” has been smashed to bits. Nor is there any need to belabor the fact that thecommercialrelation between theordinary film viewerand cinema is no longer what it was. Things are not as simple as they were before, starting with the fact that buying a ticket to a movie theater is

Book Title: Progress and Values in the Humanities-Comparing Culture and Science
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Gay Volney
Abstract: By comparing objects of science, such as the brain, the galaxy, the amoeba, and the quark, with objects of humanistic inquiry, such as the poem, the photograph, the belief, and the philosophical concept, Volney Gay reestablishes a fundamental distinction between science and the humanities. He frees the latter from its pursuit of material-based progress and restores its disciplines to a place of privilege and respect. Using the metaphor of magnification, Gay shows that, while we can investigate natural objects to the limits of imaging capacity, magnifying cultural objects dissolves them into noise. In other words, cultural objects can be studied only within their contexts and through the prism of metaphor and narrative.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/gay-14790

1. A NEW ANSWER from: Progress and Values in the Humanities
Abstract: The question of progress in the humanities is an ancient one. To offer a new answer, I suggest we compare the objects of humanistic inquiry to the objects of natural science. They are radically different. To show this, I use an unusual device: the magnifying lens. Using the magnifying lens, we can distinguish two types of object: one type (objects amenable to natural science) can sustain magnification; the other type (objects typical of humanistic inquiry) cannot. I demonstrate this thesis in two slide shows; the short version summarized above, and a longer version entitled “Magnification” on my web page.¹ These

3. BACK TO FREUD, BACK TO THE GREEKS! from: Progress and Values in the Humanities
Abstract: It is easy to say what counts as progress in some endeavors: an economy progresses when it produces more wealth and better jobs, when the standard of living goes up and child mortality goes down. A science progresses when its theories explain more, with fewer anomalies, and it enhances our ability to control phenomena of interest. Medical science progresses when it helps increase the quality of life and eliminates a disease like polio. In all these cases we feel justified in using the word progress because we can cite agreed-upon measures of success. Poverty, ignorance of natural laws, diseases and

Book Title: Eastwood's Iwo Jima-Critical Engagements with
Publisher: Wallflower Press
Author(s): GJELSVIK ANNE
Abstract: With Flags of Our Fathers(2006) andLetters from Iwo Jima(2006), Clint Eastwood made a unique contribution to film history, being the first director to make two films about the same event. Eastwood's films examine the battle over Iwo Jima from two nations' perspectives, in two languages, and embody a passionate view on conflict, enemies, and heroes. Together these works tell the story behind one of history's most famous photographs, Leo Rosenthal's "Raising the Flag on Iwo Jima." In this volume, international scholars in political science and film, literary, and cultural studies undertake multifaceted investigations into how Eastwood's diptych reflects war today. Fifteen essays explore the intersection among war films, American history, and Japanese patriotism. They present global attitudes toward war memories, icons, and heroism while offering new perspectives on cinema, photography, journalism, ethics, propaganda, war strategy, leadership, and the war on terror.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/gjel16564

INTRODUCTION: from: Eastwood's Iwo Jima
Author(s) GJELSVIK ANNE
Abstract: Taken together, Eastwood’s diptych Flags of Our Fathers (2006) and Letters from Iwo Jima (2006) form a unique contribution to film history. It was the first time a director made two films at the same time about the same event, which here is the battle over Iwo Jima in 1945 during World War II. And it was also the first time an American director made an American film in Japanese, since Letters from Iwo Jima (despite its English title) is entirely in Japanese. Finally, and what motivated us to produce this anthology, it was the first time a director touched

THE MAKING AND REMAKINGS OF AN AMERICAN ICON: from: Eastwood's Iwo Jima
Author(s) MORTENSEN METTE
Abstract: On the poster for Clint Eastwood’s 2006 movie Flags of Our Fathers we see the allegedly most extensively reproduced icon in American popular culture, Joe Rosenthal’s Pulitzer Prize-winning image from February 1945 of United States Marines raising ‘Old Glory’ atop Mount Suribachi on the Japanese volcano island Iwo Jima. ‘A single shot can end the war,’ the poster’s tagline says. This is a pun. In the context of a war movie, ‘shot’ would normally be associated with a gunshot. Here, however, it also refers to a photographic ‘shot’ or ‘snapshot’, namely the prominent picture taken by Rosenthal. With this wordplay

FLAGS OF THEIR from: Eastwood's Iwo Jima
Author(s) ANDERSEN MARTIN EDWIN
Abstract: Ira Hayes, a Pima Indian from the hardscrabble Gila River reservation in Arizona, was a central character in Flags of Our Fathers. Memorably portrayed by a Canadian-born member of the Ojibwa Indian Nation, Adam Beach, Hayes played a principal part both in the second – posed – raising of ‘Old Glory’ on the equally hardscrabble island of Iwo Jima, and in its aftermath. A second-class citizen in the land of his forefathers, Hayes thus participated as a main protagonist in an epochal event, one that spawned a national icon ‘owned and operated by various interests for particular cultural experiences …

FOLLOWING THE FLAG IN AMERICAN FILM from: Eastwood's Iwo Jima
Author(s) EBERWEIN ROBERT
Abstract: On the Library of Congress website is a 40-second film, Raising Old Glory Over Morro Castle,* which celebrates the peace treaty formally ending the Spanish-American War (J. Stuart Blackton, 1899). We see a pole with a Spanish flag in front of a crudely painted backdrop of a castle. This flag is lowered and replaced with an American flag that flaps in the breeze for 20 seconds.¹ Midway through Clint Eastwood’s Flags of Our Fathers (2006), we see two flag raisings at the top of Mount Suribachi on Iwo Jima. The second results in the iconic photograph that becomes the centrepiece

CLINT EASTWOOD’S POSTCLASSICAL MULTIPLE NARRATIVES OF IWO JIMA from: Eastwood's Iwo Jima
Author(s) MAN GLENN
Abstract: Clint Eastwood’s two-pronged cinematic treatment of the battle for Iwo Jima during World War II stirringly illustrates his flexibility and progressiveness as a classical Hollywood filmmaker as he engages certain postclassical and postmodern elements of the multiple narrative film, plying them uncompromisingly in Flags of Our Fathers (2006), while assimilating them into the classical mode in Letters from Iwo Jima (2006). This should come as no surprise to Eastwood fans, since as early as 1992 his western Unforgiven not only challenged genre expectations, but also spectacularly displayed such seemingly postmodern elements as parody, reflexivity, intertextuality, ambiguity, and gender and racial

HAUNTING IN THE WAR FILM: from: Eastwood's Iwo Jima
Author(s) BURGOYNE ROBERT
Abstract: Shortly after the introductory logo of Flags of Our Fathers (Clint Eastwood, 2006) appears, a faint voice emerges from the darkness of the screen, a voice that has an old-fashioned texture and grain, singing a song that sounds like a fragment of a half-heard radio broadcast. The lyrics, which are barely audible, come through as ‘Dreams we fashion in the night. Dreams I must gather’, and set a mood of solitude, loss, and regret. The source of the song is ambiguous; it seems to float between the opening Dreamworks logo, crafted in antique black and white, and the beginnings of

SUICIDE IN from: Eastwood's Iwo Jima
Author(s) BURGOYNE ROBERT
Abstract: The second film in Clint Eastwood’s World War II diptych, Letters from Iwo Jima (2006), immediately sets itself apart from all previous war films by focusing on the question of suicide. For so long a taboo in Western culture and rarely represented in American films, suicide occupies a space in the US imagination that is deeply Other. In US war films, suicide has conventionally served to mark the enemy; the perceived fanaticism of kamikaze pilots in World War II films or the blind frenzy of suicide bombers in films about contemporary Arab and Islamic conflicts defines them as pathological agents

Book Title: Regimes of Historicity-Presentism and Experiences of Time
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): BROWN SASKIA
Abstract: Our presentist present is by no means uniform or clear-cut, and it is experienced very differently depending on the position we occupy in society. We are caught up in global movement and accelerated flows, or else condemned to the life of casual workers, living from hand to mouth in a stagnant present, with no recognized past, and no real future either (since the temporality of plans and projects is inaccessible). The present is therefore experienced as emancipation or enclosure, and the perspective of the future is no longer reassuring, since it is perceived not as a promise, but as a threat. Hartog's resonant readings show us how the motor of history(-writing) has stalled and help us understand the contradictory qualities of our contemporary presentist relation to time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/hart16376

PRESENTISM: from: Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: At the time this book was first published, in 2003, it already talked of a crisis of time, but obviously not of the crisis that has engulfed us since 2008—and I would not go so far as to claim for myself the gift of prophecy (not even with hindsight). However, it is not hard to see that links exist between the crisis, initially financial, which radiated out from the United States, and a world so enslaved to the present that no other viewpoint is considered admissible. What words have we been hearing since 2008? Essentially “crisis,” “recession,” “depression,” but

3 CHATEAUBRIAND, BETWEEN OLD AND NEW REGIMES OF HISTORICITY from: Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: Unlike Odysseus, Chateaubriand hadread Augustine. Immersed as he was in a Christian experience of time, his one and only temporal reference was that of the Catholic monarchy. However, since he was born in 1768, he grew up in a period of profound crisis and conflictual relations to time. That is why he will be our guide here, he whose world was utterly shattered by the French Revolution. Yet many other names could rightfully figure between Augustine and Chateaubriand, between Alaric’s sack of Rome and the storming of the Bastille, not least Petrarch, Bacon, Montaigne, Perrault, and Rousseau; and several

Book Title: Ecosickness in Contemporary U.S. Fiction-Environment and Affect
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): HOUSER HEATHER
Abstract: Tracing the development of ecosickness through a compelling archive of modern U.S. novels and memoirs, this study demonstrates the mode's crucial role in shaping thematic content and formal and affective literary strategies. Examining works by David Foster Wallace, Richard Powers, Leslie Marmon Silko, Marge Piercy, Jan Zita Grover, and David Wojnarowicz, Heather Houser shows how these authors unite experiences of environmental and somatic damage through narrative affects that draw attention to ecological phenomena, organize perception, and convert knowledge into ethics. Traversing contemporary cultural studies, ecocriticism, affect studies, and literature and medicine, Houser juxtaposes ecosickness fiction against new forms of environmentalism and technoscientific innovations such as regenerative medicine and alternative ecosystems. Ecosickness in Contemporary U.S. Fictionrecasts recent narrative as a laboratory in which affective and perceptual changes both support and challenge political projects.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/hous16514

3 Richard Powers’s Strange Wonder from: Ecosickness in Contemporary U.S. Fiction
Abstract: It was at first a pleasing divertissement to view the vivid and intense colours produced thereby; but after a while applying myself to consider them more circumspectly, I became surprised to see them in an oblong form; which … I expected should have been circular…. Comparing the length of this colored spectrum with its breadth, I found it about five times greater, a disproportion so extravagant that it excited me to a more than ordinary curiosity

4 Infinite Jest’s Environmental Case for Disgust from: Ecosickness in Contemporary U.S. Fiction
Abstract: In 2008 WWF (formerly World Wildlife Fund for Nature) developed a campaign around two horrors of climate change: devolution and mutation. In the year when “change” became an unavoidable buzzword as part of Barack Obama’s first presidential campaign, the environmental group revised the word’s connotations to include devastation and unsettling alterations to the essence of life. Commissioned by WWF, Belgian advertising firm Germaine offered a commentary on the fate of humanness in the face of unabated climate change (figure 4.1). Adapting to rising sea levels and a new aquatic environment, humans have morphed into a chimerical life-form: a fishman. The

5 The Anxiety of Intervention in Leslie Marmon Silko and Marge Piercy from: Ecosickness in Contemporary U.S. Fiction
Abstract: Standing in the twenty-first century, it’s clear that the “age of anxiety” that W. H. Auden declared in 1947 is still with us. But some things have changed. In the wake of World War II, writers looked to the inventions of total war, notably to nuclear weaponry, when composing their visions of technological anxiety. In the last decades of the millennium, nuclear worry does not disappear, but it cedes some ground to concerns about techniques for radically altering so-called nature. Biotechnologies that transform life take center stage; they change the world not through the spectacular blast but through gradual reconfiguration

Book Title: The Specter of Democracy-What Marx and Marxists Haven't Understood and Why
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Howard Dick
Abstract: In this rethinking of Marxism and its blind spots, Dick Howard argues that the collapse of European communism in 1989 should not be identified with a victory for capitalism and makes possible a wholesale reevaluation of democratic politics in the U.S. and abroad. The author turns to the American and French Revolutions to uncover what was truly "revolutionary" about those events, arguing that two distinct styles of democratic life emerged, the implications of which were misinterpreted in light of the rise of communism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/howa12484

CHAPTER 3 The Frankfurt School and the Transformation of Critical Theory into Cultural Theory from: The Specter of Democracy
Abstract: The appeal of the Frankfurt School’s critical theory to a young leftist of the late 1960 s was based on a paradox expressed in the practice of both critical theory and the leftist. On the one hand, modern capitalist society seemed able to co-opt protest by integrating it into the dynamics of competitive business, creating a demand for the newest, most advanced, and most risqué products (a trend that continues today as cultural rebellion has became the motor of consumer society). On the other hand, that society was characterized by a spirit of revolt against its “one-dimensional” reduction of all

CHAPTER 7 From Marx to Castoriadis, and from Castoriadis to Us from: The Specter of Democracy
Abstract: Some decry the sixties generation as hedonistic and blame it for the social laxity that has given us culture wars and increasingly conservative government. I remember it rather for the attempt to create the politics of a new left. That project, I have been arguing in this book, remains on the contemporary agenda. But in order to reclaim it, it is necessary to understand where it went astray and to see whether it can be reconstructed on another foundation. As it happens, this project coincides in many ways with Cornelius Castoriadis’s own political development. To illustrate the overlaps (without denying

CHAPTER 12 Fundamentalism and the American Exception from: The Specter of Democracy
Abstract: Despite the constitutional separation of church and state—which Jefferson considered his proudest achievement—religion has always played a role in American political life. And it has not always been the organized religious congregations that have been leaders in crossing the line that the Constitution tries to establish. Religion touches deeper; it affects the language through which people express themselves as well as their vision of the nation to which they belong. What is new in the last two decades is the rise of a religious right that has become an active voting bloc bringing into politics social and cultural

Book Title: Radical Cosmopolitics-The Ethics and Politics of Democratic Universalism
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Ingram James D.
Abstract: While supporting the cosmopolitan pursuit of a world that respects all rights and interests, James D. Ingram believes political theorists have, in their approach to this project, compromised its egalitarian and emancipatory principles. Focusing on recent debates without losing sight of cosmopolitanism's ancient and Enlightenment roots, Ingram confronts the philosophical difficulties of defending universal ideals and the implications for ethics and political theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/ingr16110

CHAPTER FOUR Rethinking Ethical Cosmopolitanism: from: Radical Cosmopolitics
Abstract: To this point my discussion has been mainly negative, focusing on various ways in which the cosmopolitan commitment to egalitarian universalism goes astray. My survey of the history of Western cosmopolitanisms in chapter 1 showed how they have always reflected the conditions of their emergence, mirroring or reproducing the social, cultural, ideological, and political contexts from and against which they arose. In chapter 2 I depicted moral-ethical cosmopolitanisms as afflicted by a double bind. On the one hand, like Rawls’s theory of justice, they tend to lose their critical force by abstracting from existing social-political conditions and cultural values; yet,

CHAPTER SIX Cosmopolitics in Practice: from: Radical Cosmopolitics
Abstract: As I observed in the introduction, more than any other development over the last two decades the rise of human rights as a universal language of political justification has been taken to herald the imminence, if not the arrival, of a world of cosmopolitan politics. Whether we date the advent of human rights to the revolutionary declarations of the Age of Reason, the Universal Declaration of Human Rights in 1948, or the Helsinki Accords and their embrace by the Western democracies and a burgeoning third sector in the 1970s, it was only when the collapse of “really existing socialism” left

4 A WALLED WORLD from: Governance in the New Global Disorder
Abstract: The current transformation of many of our borders into walls is a clear indicator of the ambiguity of the process of globalization, which combines opening and fragmentation, delimitation and closure. This issue places crucial aspects of our humanity at stake since borders and boundaries are linked to the realities of inside and outside, inclusion and exclusion, questions of identity and difference. The current tendency of multiplying strategies for closure reveals that we have significant difficulties when it comes to different ways of configuring everything that has to do with the legal-political realm, citizenship, identity, or security. Perhaps it is time

8 A POLITICS OF HUMANITY from: Governance in the New Global Disorder
Abstract: Reality has been communistfor a few years now. The Cold War was won by capitalism, but current events are imposing problems that place care for thecommunalrather than care for the individual at the center of our concerns. Globalization is often associated with privatization (with economic liberalization or the movement of certain goods and services toward the marketplace), but it can also be understood as an increase in what is public, the fact that societies are more interdependent. The political agenda is now full of common problems, of universal public goods. I am not talking about a battle

7 Fear and Trembling from: Situating Existentialism
Author(s) Pattison George
Abstract: If existentialism is identified with the atheistic existentialism of Sartre, then to speak of Christian existentialism would seem to be a contradiction in terms. Thus, when Catholic apologists such as Étienne Gilson and Jacques Maritain sought to recapture the vocabulary of “existence” for Christian theology, they did so by opposing the Sartrean disjunction of essence and existence and invoking scholasticism’s definition of God as that being whose essence is to exist, a definition rendered in the Thomist affirmation of “He Who Is” as the most appropriate of the divine names.¹ Although this seemed to suggest a certain transcendence of existence

13 Simone de Beauvoir in Her Times and Ours: from: Situating Existentialism
Author(s) Bergoffen Debra
Abstract: It is impossible to know where Simone de Beauvoir’s thinking would have gone had she been spared the depravation and fright of living in Nazi-occupied Paris. What we do know is that coming face-to-face with forces of injustice beyond her control gave a new urgency to the questions of evil and the other. Beauvoir spoke of the war as creating an existential rupture in time and spoke of herself as having undergone a conversion.¹ She could no longer afford the luxury of focusing on her own happiness and pleasure. The question of oppression became a pressing concern. One cannot refuse

Book Title: Reimagining the Sacred-Richard Kearney Debates God with James Wood, Catherine Keller, Charles Taylor, Julia Kristeva, Gianni Vattimo, Simon Critchley, Jean-Luc Marion, John Caputo, David Tracey, Jens Zimmermann, and Merold Westphal
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Zimmermann Jens
Abstract: Contemporary conversations about religion and culture are framed by two reductive definitions of secularity. In one, multiple faiths and nonfaiths coexist free from a dominant belief in God. In the other, we deny the sacred altogether and exclude religion from rational thought and behavior. But is there a third way for those who wish to rediscover the sacred in a skeptical society? What kind of faith, if any, can be proclaimed after the ravages of the Holocaust and the many religion-based terrors since?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/kear16102

2 Imagination, Anatheism, and the Sacred from: Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) Wood James
Abstract: James Wood is a well-known English literary critic, essayist, and novelist. His career as an increasingly influential writer includes positions as the Guardian’s chief literary critic (1991– 1994), senior editor of theNew Republic, staff writer at theNew Yorker, and professor at Harvard University. After publishing several volumes of essays, Wood has also written a theological novel,The Book Against God(2004). Not unlike his novel’s main character, who struggles with his religious background, Wood, an atheist convert from evangelicalism, finds in literature a middle ground between belief and unbelief. Good literature, he argues inThe Broken Estate, not

3 Beyond the Impossible from: Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) Keller Catherine
Abstract: Catherine Keller is professor of constructive theology at Drew University in Madison, New Jersey. She is a process theologian with wide-ranging theoretical interests, encompassing feminist theology, ecotheology, and poststructuralist and postcolonial theory. In her highly original and influential theological works—most notably Face of the Deep, From a Broken Web, andOn the Mystery—she has sought to develop the relational potential of a theology of becoming. Her books reconfigure ancient symbols of divinity for the sake of a planetary conviviality—a life together, across vast webs of difference. Her latest book,Cloud of the Impossible(2014), explores the relation

Artist’s Note on Cover Art from: Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) GALLAGHER SHEILA
Abstract: The cover image points to a crossing of the sacred and the profane. This is a central insight of Richard

1 On Proxy Wars and Surrogate Victims from: Civil and Uncivil Violence in Lebanon
Abstract: The social and political history of Lebanon—despite occasional manifestations of consensus, balance and harmony—has always been characterized by successive outbursts of civil strife and political violence. The brutality and duration of almost two decades of senseless bloodletting might have obscured some of the earlier episodes. Consequently, observers are often unaware that much of Lebanon’s history is essentially a history of intermittent violence. Dramatic episodes such as the peasant uprisings of 1820, 1840, and 1857 and the repeated outbreaks of sectarian hostilities in 1841, 1845, 1860, 1958, and the protracted civil war of 1975–92, reveal, if anything, the

4 Peasants, Commoners and Clerics: from: Civil and Uncivil Violence in Lebanon
Abstract: There has been reawakened interest in the forms that peasant resistance are likely to assume, particularly in historical situations where open defiance is either impossible or entails considerable hazards (Scott 1985; Colburn 1989). Under such circumstances, it is argued, peasant resistance is prone to remain in the “hidden realm of political conflict.” Hence, it is less likely to take the form of open collective acts of violence such as riots, rebellion, sedition, or revolutionary movements. Since peasant uprisings, anyway, are “few and far in between,” it is more meaningful, Scott and Colburn tell us, to shift analysis to the more

6 Lebanon’s Golden/Gilded Age: from: Civil and Uncivil Violence in Lebanon
Abstract: The brief interlude between the relatively benign civil war of 1958 and the protracted cruelties of 1975 stands out as a perplexing often anomalous epoch in Lebanon’s eventful political history. It is a period marked by sustained political stability, economic prosperity, and swift societal transformations, the closest the country ever got to a “golden age” with all the outward manifestations of stupendous vitality, exuberance, and rising expectations. But these were also times of growing disparities, cleavages, neglect, portends perhaps of a more “gilded age” of misdirected and uneven growth, boisterous political culture, conspicuous consumption, and the trappings of frivolous life-style

CHAPTER 1 Why Do We Need to Create a Moral Image of the World? from: Narrating Evil
Abstract: Kant was well aware of humanity’s propensity for evil. Much has been written on the subject, yet we hardly understand it. That humans are capable of harming other humans, and of choosing to do so, is still one of the most puzzling questions—dramas—that we must still confront. This problem has lately been addressed by several philosophers who have reexamined previous attempts to consider these issues.² I, on the other hand, will employ a different view as my point of departure. As I explained in the introduction, I wish to address the problem of evil as a moral problem

Book Title: Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945-History, Culture, Memory
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): WANG DAVID DER-WEI
Abstract: The contributors encourage readers to rethink issues concerning history and ethnicity, cultural hegemony and resistance, tradition and modernity, and the romancing of racial identity. Their examination not only provides a singular understanding of Taiwan's colonial past, but also offers insight into Taiwan's relationship with China, Japan, and the United States today. Focusing on a crucial period in which the culture and language of Taiwan, China, and Japan became inextricably linked, Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Ruleeffectively broadens the critique of colonialism and modernity in East Asia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/liao13798

6 THE STATE OF TAIWANESE CULTURE AND TAIWANESE NEW LITERATURE IN 1937: from: Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) ISAO KAWAHARA
Abstract: The following four newspapers jointly announce that due to the current state of affairs we have decided to abolish the Chinese section. It has been over forty years since Japan took over Taiwan. In the light of the thoroughness of imperialization and the flourishing of cultural activities, we believe there is no hindrance to the complete abolition of the Chinese section. Beginning on April 1, the Taiwan News, Tainan News, andTaiwan Daily Newswill drop their Chinese sections;Taiwan shinminpō台灣新民報 will cut

8 HEGEMONY AND IDENTITY IN THE COLONIAL EXPERIENCE OF TAIWAN, 1895–1945 from: Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) SHIAW-CHIAN FONG
Abstract: Prior to the 1990s, the story of colonial Taiwan under Japanese rule was rarely heard in the English-speaking world; it also lacked an audience in Taiwan itself. With its democratization, which also removed pan-Chinese ideology, people on the island began to show interest in their own history. A space was thus created in which colonial experience could be researched and its stories told. However, since the time for intensive research has been relatively short thus far, the stories of both the colonizer and the colonized, particularly in regard to cultural domains, remain rudimentary, and not entirely precise in many details.

12 AN AUTHOR LISTENING TO VOICES FROM THE NETHERWORLD: from: Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) CHIE TARUMI
Abstract: Lu Heruo 吕赫若¹ (1914–1950) is one of the Taiwanese authors who best represents prewar Taiwanese literature. In January 1935 Lu made his debut in the Japanese proletarian magazine Bungaku hyōron文学评论 with “Gyūsha 牛車,” a tragedy set in colonial Taiwan and indicting modernization. Further, Lu enthusiastically helped lead the 1930s Taiwan New Literature movement as an influential writer and during the 1940s he was active as a singer in the Tōhō performance troop, which gained popular favor with their enterprising combination of Greater East Asian Co-Prosperity Sphere ideology and orientalism. When he returned to Taiwan, Lu played a leading

14 GENDER, ETHNOGRAPHY, AND COLONIAL CULTURAL PRODUCTION: from: Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) KLEEMAN FAYE YUAN
Abstract: Colonial enterprises and colonial encounters generate the need to produce and possess the knowledge of other(s). There is an urgent need for the colonizing subject to acquire information on the colonized people, in order to aid in the management of its newly acquired territory, and it is equally pressing for the colonized to gain knowledge of their overlord. This transculturation, or the exchange of colonial knowledge, is nevertheless a reluctant liaison fraught with asymmetrical, nonreciprocal, and at times dangerous misreadings. As Said so clearly demonstrated in his Orientalism, the production of the Orient created a writing subject and a narrated

Book Title: Prose of the World-Modernism and the Banality of Empire
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Majumdar Saikat
Abstract: Prose of the Worldexplores the global life of this narrative aesthetic, from late-colonial modernism to the present day, focusing on a writer each from Ireland, New Zealand, South Africa, and India. Ranging from James Joyce's deflated epiphanies to Amit Chaudhuri's disavowal of the grand spectacle of postcolonial national allegories, Majumdar foregrounds the banal as a key instinct of modern and contemporary fiction -- one that nevertheless remains submerged because of its antithetical relation to literature's intuitive function to engage or excite.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/maju15694

INTRODUCTION: from: Prose of the World
Abstract: I should like to write a life much in the style of Walter Pater’s ‘Child in the House’. About a girl in Wellington; the singular charm and barrenness of that place, with climatic effects—wind, rain, spring, night, the sea, the cloud pageantry. And then to leave the place and go to Europe, to live there a dual existence—to go back and

CHAPTER 3 The Dailiness of Trauma and Liberation in Zoë Wicomb from: Prose of the World
Abstract: Published in 1988, James Clifford’s The Predicament of Culture is an insightful exploration of metropolitan modernist aesthetics against the backdrop of a troubled global modernity in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries. It is, moreover, representative of a critical momentum in the developing relationship between literary and anthropological discourse in the late twentieth century. The book has been considered a critical work in the so-called literary turn in anthropology, which was already exemplified by the influential collection co-edited by Clifford, Writing Culture, published in 1986.¹ In his introduction to the collection, Clifford points to the rising popularity of literary

CHAPTER 4 Amit Chaudhuri and the Materiality of the Mundane from: Prose of the World
Abstract: More than a quarter-century after its initial publication, Fredric Jameson’s controversial essay “Third World Literature in the Era of Multinational Capitalism” retains something of an unfortunate relevance to Anglophone fiction from India. The central claim in that essay—that all Third World cultures are characterized by a fusion of private and public lives and that this fusion ensures that all narratives (especially the novel) from such cultures are structured on the paradigm of the national allegory—still continues to resonate with an overarching trend of Indian English fiction. Ever since the publication of Salman Rushdie’s Midnight’s Children, the novel many

2 Hegel and the Comparative Imaginary of the West from: Religion and the Specter of the West
Abstract: Arguably the most important theoretical movement to have influenced postcolonial studies of India stems from Edward Said’s critique of Orientalism. Now built in to the very fabric of discourse on South Asia, the central thrust of “post-Orientalist” critique is directed at the static understanding of “area” as an object of scholarly inquiry, and more specifically at the versions of Orientalism spawned by the intimate relationship between Indology and British colonialism. In hindsight, though, Said’s influence on South Asian studies may seem surprising, given that he has not specifically engaged the major source of Orientalism in the case of India, namely

6 Decolonizing Postsecular Theory from: Religion and the Specter of the West
Abstract: In the previous chapter I argued that it may be possible to break the cycles of repetition that produce identity politics centered around structures of transcendence. These structures have continued to govern the modern and postmodern (globalized) forms of Sikhism and Hinduism by limiting their engagements in the world to revivals or retrievals of an essence or an original identity. For Sikhs such a break can be effected through interpretations of texts such as the Guru Granth Sāhib, which are inherently capable of posing resistance to the sui generismodel of religion, thereby allowing us to connect central terms in

Epilogue from: Religion and the Specter of the West
Abstract: Each chapter in this book has, in different ways, engaged with and provided an extended critique of the concept of religion as a cultural universal. Through a case study of Sikhism, I have tried to demonstrate how certain aspects of Sikh and Hindu traditions were reinvented in terms of the category of “religion” during the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries. As scholars working in different disciplines have increasingly recognized, the context of India’s colonial encounter with the West provides fertile ground for the emergence and crystallization of concepts and categories that inform—but at the same time test the

3 Theodor W. Adorno: from: The Highway of Despair
Abstract: Theodor W. Adorno comes to us in various ways—as a philosopher, a cultural critic, a literary theorist, a sociologist—but alwaysin despair. Martin Jay, describing the famous profile photograph of Adorno used by his German publisher, deciphers despair in the contours of his downcast lips and eyes, in the “mournful expression on his face.” This photo—the one Jay used on the cover of his own book-length study of Adorno—is a portrait of the critic, a snapshot image of a vast philosophical legacy, yet one that resonates precisely because it captures the somber tones of so much

Concluding Postscript from: The Highway of Despair
Abstract: No single thinker has done more to shape the idea of critical theory in the postwar period than Jürgen Habermas. As I see things, Habermas turns away from a potential project opened up by the thinkers considered in this study—not just Adorno, to whom his connection is obvious, but also Bataille, of whom he is substantially more critical, and Fanon, about whom he says nothing. In recent years, Habermas has turned his attention to questions pertaining to philosophy and religion, the relationship between reason and faith, and the connection between postmetaphysical thinking and theological endeavors. These inquiries are exciting,

CHAPTER 3 Romanian Cinema in the 1970s: from: Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: The end of the Romanian Thaw – which lasted less than a decade – was characterised by two events. On the one hand it was specified in the 10 thParty Congress Report in August 1969 that the new society would be superior to capitalist societies from all perspectives, overtly criticising former established contacts with the Western world. On the other, after a trip to China and North Korea in May 1971, Ceaușescu was highly tempted to introduce methods of indoctrination used by Maoʹs Cultural Revolution. The politicised media thus initiated the publication of the famous July 1971 Theses. Liberalisation movements

1. THE LAW AND THE FACT: from: The Historiographic Perversion
Abstract: THE SYSTEMATIC AND RADICAL EXTERMINATION OF THE Armenians of the Ottoman Empire during the years 1915–1916 is finally, or so it seems, on the current agenda. It has been eighty years since the event.¹ For the survivors and their descendants, it never ceased being current. Not for an instant. If it is so today, it is only for “civilized humanity” and for the duration of a trial and a judgment. The trial is that which brought before a French civil court the famous historian of the Islamic world and of the Ottoman Empire Bernard Lewis. He was summoned before

CONCLUSION: from: The Historiographic Perversion
Abstract: AND NOW, IN THE GUISE OF A CONCLUSION, IT REMAINS FOR me to do what is most difficult. It remains for me to speak of shame, the logic of shame, and to do so not in an allusive manner and in passing, as I have done so far, but by taking shame as a theme, by really speaking of it and from it, by confronting it face to face.¹

AGAINST HISTORY from: The Historiographic Perversion
Author(s) ANIDJAR GIL
Abstract: Thus the inescapable conclusion toward which Marc Nichanian leads us.¹ At the provisional limit of the singular trajectory traced by his extended work (of which The Historiographic Perversion constitutes a small, if remarkable, part), this formulation is hardly forced, nor does it appear to articulate a substantial departure from Theodor Adorno’s famous assertion (“to write poetry after Auschwitz is barbaric”), only an intensification of its claim, indeed, a version or translation of it.² Yet, the formulation practically engages with historical difference—“our historical differences actually make a difference”—in its claim to bridge

FIVE A Rule of Immanent Play from: A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: As long as God is in charge, morality is a subsection of theology. Ever since Sinai, the True, the Good, the Positive, and the Just all come from the Decalogue. No need to philosophize, to look for foundations, a genealogy, or origins. God serves as an explanation for all of them. The tablets of the Law, Torah, Gospels, and Pauline Epistles have had their time. When God bothers to show himself, or when he delegates this mission to his most dedicated envoys (who dictate all behavior between the self and itself, the self and others, and the self and the

SIX A Hedonist Intersubjectivity from: A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: Given the existence of the neuronal machine, it has to have content, since it cannot function in a vacuum. The brain is an instrument, a means, but never an end in itself. If neuronal training proceeds according to the potentialities of the nervous system, it has to have an aim. What does one train? Why? According to what criteria? Education has to have a plan. Without a clearly defined objective, ethics is useless. What rules of the game are worth the trouble of following? What makes the game appealing?

FOURTEEN An Art of Artifice from: A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: Ever since humans started humanizing themselves, they made themselves artificial, emancipating themselves from their natural condition. The first trepanations and cataract procedures proved that nature was not to be celebrated as a sweet and good provider of nothing but positivity, like some cornucopia. It also contains death, sadness, suffering, conflict, claws, beaks, and condemnation of the weak to death.

4 Circulating Representations: from: The Triangle of Representation
Abstract: New Historicism, like all the other isms of our time, has rapidly become a catchword, a label, under which the heterogeneous is repackaged and marketed as the more or less homogeneous. The intellectual reality of New Historicisms in fact discloses a variety of sins or virtues or a mix of both depending on one’s point of view (the points of view themselves of course vary in that from its inception to the present New Historicism has been an object of fierce and continuing controversy). For example, in the very fine book by Graham Bradshaw on Shakespeare,¹ we find, convincingly demonstrated,

8 God’s Secret: from: The Triangle of Representation
Abstract: I have to begin on what might seem a potentially discouraging note by remarking that, in a project devoted to discussing the idea of mimesis and commemorating the magisterial work of Erich Auerbach, I shall not really be talking about either, although I hope it can be taken more or less for granted that the shadow of Auerbach looms over virtually everything I will be saying.¹ My concern is broadly speaking with certain intellectual developments post-Auerbach, in connection with the concept of realism, historically and theoretically a subspecies of the concept of mimesis. The two—mimesis and realism—are often

11 English Proust from: The Triangle of Representation
Abstract: In this book in which there is not a single incident which is not fictitious, not a single character who is a real person in disguise … I owe it to the credit of my country to say that only the millionaire cousins of Françoise who came out

6 ON PSYCHOTHEOLOGY from: Encountering Religion
Abstract: Eric Santner’s On the Psychotheology of Everyday Life does its work at an intersection of the thought of Sigmund Freud and Franz Rosenzweig. Early in the book, Santner quotes Rosenzweig: “The concept of the order of this world is thus not the universal, neither the arche nor the telos, neither the natural nor the historical unity, but rather the singular, the event, not beginning or end, but center of the world.”² This event, Santner points out, is for Rosenzweig an event of divine revelation. Scholars of religion thus may find it tempting to see in Rosenzweig, writing in the second

Book Title: Reading the-The Literary Aims of a Theravada Buddhist History
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Scheible Kristin
Abstract: Reading the Mahavamsaadvocates a new, literary approach to this text by revealing its embedded reading advice (to experiencesamvegaandpasada) and affective work of metaphors (the Buddha's dharma as light) and salient characters (nagas). Kristin Scheible argues that theMahavamsarequires a particular kind of reading. In the text's proem, special instructions draw readers to the metaphor of light and thenagas, or salient snake-beings, of the first chapter.Nagasare both model worshippers and unworthy hoarders of Buddha's relics. As nonhuman agents, they challenge political and historicist readings of the text. Scheible sees these slippery characters and the narrative's potent and playful metaphors as techniques for refocusing the reader's attention on the text's emotional aims. Her work explains theMahavamsa's central motivational role in contemporary Sri Lankan Buddhist and nationalist circles. It also speaks broadly to strategies of reading religious texts and to the internal and external cues that give such works lives beyond the page.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/sche17138

INTRODUCTION from: Reading the
Abstract: In the study of religions, we find that certain key texts come to define their interpretive communities, for both the communities themselves and the scholars who study them.¹ Texts are an appealing source for the cultivation of understanding; they seem stable and fixed in a way that a religious community, comprising people who change through time and contexts, simply is not. But a text is not a source unless it is brought to life through reading and interpretation, irrespective of the vicissitudes of time and context. Reading and interpretation necessarily negate, to some extent, the stability or fixedness of a

4 NĀGAS AND RELICS from: Reading the
Abstract: As liminal characters, the betwixt and in-betweeners, nāgasmediate the dark and the light. They are characters precisely poised to be interpreters for the outside reader-hearer through the text. As we have seen,nāgasoften act as attention getters within the text, functioning as red flags to denote important passages, but that is not all they do. In the previous chapter, we sawnāgasin close proximity with the living Buddha. In the case of Bhūridatta, this proximity is in fact a shared ontology of sorts and a window into the eventual soteriological aptitude of even the lowest born—the

2 “Taking Sanctuary Among the Jews”: from: Milton and the Rabbis
Abstract: Of Reformation in England and the Cawses that Hitherto have Hindered it (May 1641), the first of Milton’s five pamphlets written against the prelacy, the hierarchical clergy of the Church of England, begins with a protracted lament over the decline of the Church since the time of the apostles. Charged with key terms from the debates over religious doctrine, not only between the Roman church and Protestants, or among diverse Protestant groupings, but also from the age-old debates between Judaism and Christianity, Milton’s account of this decline describes

Book Title: Winged Faith-Rethinking Globalization and Religious Pluralism through the Sathya Sai Movement
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Srinivas Tulasi
Abstract: This study considers a new kind of cosmopolitanism located in an alternate understanding of difference and contestation. It considers how acts of "sacred spectating" and illusion, "moral stakeholding" and the problems of community are debated and experienced. A thrilling study of a transcultural and transurban phenomenon that questions narratives of self and being, circuits of sacred mobility, and the politics of affect, Winged Faithsuggests new methods for discussing religion in a globalizing world and introduces readers to an easily critiqued yet not fully understood community.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/srin14932

1 Skeptical and Scientific “Post-philosophy” from: The Death of Philosophy
Abstract: My analysis of the discourse pronouncing the death of philosophy shall begin with its most resounding assertions and end with its resigned, and even surreptitious, acceptances. Indeed, this theme, so common today, is inflected according to different variations whose nuances we must grasp so that their commonalities are more clearly illustrated at the end of our examination. This is why I will start my inquiry with the most radical antiphilosophers, those we can call, with Vincent Descombes, the “post-contemporary philosophers,”¹ and I will show how their ideas, beneath their manifest differences (since they go from the most radical skepticism to

2 “Saying and the Said”: from: The Death of Philosophy
Abstract: That two traditions as opposed as the Continental and analytic traditions could thus be encompassed within a single thematic calls for a more nuanced justification than a simple assertion. Different reasons undergird this grouping, reasons whose full force won’t be able to appear until my analysis has been completed.

11 Helmholtz’s Choice as a Choice for Reference: from: The Death of Philosophy
Abstract: The return to Kant is in fact the choice of a single path that brings an end to the tension in the critical project. It is a matter of “returning” to the question of representation as an explication of the relation between a subject and an object. Let’s first of all recall that, from 1810 to 1850, Hegel and his disciples were the main figures on the philosophical scene. Henri Dussort points this out, “From 1800 to about 1840, speculative thought, its famous developers and their disciples occupied the center stage.”¹ Friedrich Engels himself noted that this enthusiasm for the

Book Title: Left-Wing Melancholia-Marxism, History, and Memory
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): TRAVERSO ENZO
Abstract: The fall of the Berlin Wall marked the end of the Cold War but also the rise of a melancholic vision of history as a series of losses. For the political left, the cause lost was communism, and this trauma determined how leftists wrote the next chapter in their political struggle and how they have thought about their past since. Throughout the twentieth century, argues Left-Wing Melancholy, from classical Marxism to psychoanalysis to the advent of critical theory, a culture of defeat and its emotional overlay of melancholy have characterized the leftist understanding of the political in history and in theoretical critique.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/trav17942

Book Title: Flight Ways-Life and Loss at the Edge of Extinction
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): van Dooren Thom
Abstract: A leading figure in the emerging field of extinction studies, Thom van Dooren puts philosophy into conversation with the natural sciences and his own ethnographic encounters to vivify the cultural and ethical significance of modern-day extinctions. Unlike other meditations on the subject, Flight Waysincorporates the particularities of real animals and their worlds, drawing philosophers, natural scientists, and general readers into the experience of living among and losing biodiversity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/van-16618

Book Title: After Christianity- Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): D’Isanto Luca
Abstract: What has been the fate of Christianity since Nietzsche's famous announcement of the "death of God"? What is the possibility of religion, specifically Christianity, thriving in our postmodern era? In this provocative new book, Gianni Vattimo, leading Italian philosopher, politician, and framer of the European constitution, addresses these critical questions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/vatt10628

1 The God Who Is Dead from: After Christianity
Abstract: IN ONE OF the long fragments on nihilism from the 1800s (which was first published in The Will to Power), Nietzsche asks whether nihilism is compatible with some form of faith in the divine and conceives of the possibility of a pantheistic religiosity, since “after all only the moral God is denied”¹). After all, there are other, well-known passages in Nietzsche’s more mature work where he speaks of the creation of new gods. Let me remark that when announcing the death of God, Nietzsche anticipates that the latter’s shadow will continue to be cast upon our world for a long

3 God the Ornament from: After Christianity
Abstract: WHAT ARE THE consequences of the fact that philosophy has recovered its provenance from the Judeo-Christian tradition, interpreted in light of the ontology of the event rather than of a metaphysical conception of Being? In the two preceding chapters, I have tried to establish, or at least to suggest, that on the basis of these two premises it is possible to construe an image of postmodern religious experience. I do not renounce using the word postmodern, because I am convinced that the history of salvation announced by the Bible realizes itself in world historical events—in this I remain faithful

9 Violence, Metaphysics, and Christianity from: After Christianity
Abstract: IT IS THE paradox of our epoch that we are called to reflect on the link between violence and metaphysics, and on its presence in the history of Christianity, precisely when war is being waged to eradicate war and violence employed to eliminate violence (e.g., of Serbs against Kosovars, or vice versa). The idea that violence might put an end to violence (since every war is supposedly the last) shows that violence ultimately draws from the need, the resolve, and the desire to reach and be taken up into the first principle. I do not know whether this might be

Book Title: Not Being God-A Collaborative Autobiography
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): MCCUAIG WILLIAM
Abstract: Vattimo's status as a left-wing faculty president paradoxically made him a target of the Red Brigades in the 1970s, causing him to flee Turin for his life. Left-wing terrorism did not deter the philosopher from his quest for social progress, however, and in the 1980s, he introduced a daring formulation called "weak thought," which stripped metaphysics, science, religion, and all other absolute systems of their authority. Vattimo then became notorious both for his renewed commitment to the core values of Christianity (he was trained as a Catholic intellectual) and for the Vatican's denunciation of his views.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/vatt14720

39 THE VOLUNTEER FOR WEAK THOUGHT from: Not Being God
Abstract: I was invited to a meeting on the postmodern at the University of Wisconsin at Milwaukee (that’s right, Jeffrey Dahmer’s town).

42 IN HUMAN CONVERSATION from: Not Being God
Abstract: Among the passages from Hölderlin cited most frequently by Heidegger, there’s a particularly beautiful one: “Because mankind has named many gods since we have been a colloquy.”

44 SCIENCE’S POSITIVE SIDE from: Not Being God
Abstract: Surprising. Gadamer personally confirmed to me that when Heidegger made that statement during a lecture, it wasn’t just an offhand remark. Indeed, he was

47 OBITUARIES THREE: from: Not Being God
Abstract: Even though I couldn’t write his obit, because I don’t believe he has said anything new in philosophy. He has made advances in semiotics, but since I don’t understand anything about semiotics, I’d still be unable to write a word.

53 ALMOST A MAYOR from: Not Being God
Abstract: They wanted me to run for mayor against Diego Novelli, the incumbent. He was running again as an extreme leftist, since the Democratic Party of the Left had washed its hands of him. God knows why. One more idiocy in my view. I had

54 THE END OF PREHISTORY? from: Not Being God
Abstract: There isn’t much to tell about my firsthand political experience as a member of the European Parliament from 1999 to 2004: the lunch where Gad Lerner and Luciano Segre proposed that I run, the slightly hypocritical maneuverings of Romano Prodi, the telephone call from Massimo D’Alema, a letter from me to which Piero Fassino didn’t even deign to respond with a raspberry, the telephone calls from Antonio Di Pietro every half hour, the improprieties of Marco Rizzo’s stooges. . . .

56 AT A CERTAIN HOUR from: Not Being God
Abstract: Indeed, I’d like to be remembered as a professor who was generous and accessible, the way Pareyson was with me. I try. I strive to be accessible and welcoming. But I don’t believe I’ll ever succeed in supervising anyone the way Pareyson supervised me.

57 RETURN TO CHRISTIANITY from: Not Being God
Abstract: I asked myself why it was that I adopted a “left” reading of Heidegger, that of “increasing lightness,” versus a “right” reading, because one does exist. (And here the reference is purely philosophical, to the Hegelian right and left, even though it was the Hegelian right that read Hegel as the restoration of traditional religiosity, whereas Marx and Feuerbach were out to cause trouble.) Purely because he seemed to me

60 EVIL, WHAT A PITY from: Not Being God
Abstract: Because in Credere di credere I maintain that the only meaningful use of the word peccato (sin) is when we say: “oh, che peccato” (“Oh, that’s too bad” or “Oh, what a pity”). In other words: “ogni lasciata è persa” (“Everything left is lost,” implying, “Never miss a chance to grab something for yourself when you can”). But every missed chance to do good is also a loss: I didn’t pay attention to that person

62 COMPLINE from: Not Being God
Abstract: Ever since Gianpiero fell ill, I recite compline, the part of the breviary that ends the day, every evening before going to sleep. I still do so today.

Book Title: Political Responsibility-Responding to Predicaments of Power
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): VÁZQUEZ-ARROYO ANTONIO Y.
Abstract: Scholars in the humanities and social sciences have turned to ethics to theorize politics in what seems to be an increasingly depoliticized age. Yet the move toward ethics has obscured the ongoing value of political responsibility and the vibrant life it represents as an effective response to power.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/vazq17484

1 HISTORICIZING THE ETHICAL TURN from: Political Responsibility
Abstract: In spite of the prevalence of ethical tropes in theoretical discussions in North Atlantic scholarly circles, an explicit embrace of the ethical turn in the humanities and social sciences has not been as prominent as that afforded to other so-called turns—including the cultural, linguistic, theological, psychoanalytic, and affective turns—of the past thirty years. Indeed, in contrast with previous turns, the ethical turn displays an almost apologetic reluctance about its self-identity: uneasiness and ambiguity define the attitude of many theoretical proponents of the turn, even if its political practitioners—humanitarians and human and animal rights advocates, among others—are

5. The Birth of the First Printed Canon: from: Spreading Buddha's Word in East Asia
Author(s) Zhichao Chen
Abstract: In the fourth year of the Kaibao 開寶 reign (971), Emperor Taizu (r. 960–975) of the Song Dynasty 宋太祖 ordered the first carving of a set of woodblocks for the Chinese Buddhist canon. Thus this edition is referred to as Kaibao Canon, or the Shu (i.e., Sichuan) edition (Shuban蜀版)—since it was collated and the blocks were carved in Sichuan. In 1127, Kaifeng, the Northern Song capital, was sacked by the invading Jurchens, who abducted the two emperors and carted off many treasures. The imperial libraries were looted and many of their books and woodblocks taken north. One

9. Taishō Canon: from: Spreading Buddha's Word in East Asia
Author(s) Wilkinson Greg
Abstract: Taishō Canon(Taishō Shinshū Daizōkyō大正新修大蔵經), published between 1924 and 1932, was one of several projects in modern Japan aimed at creating a revised edition of the Chinese Tripitaka. This new edition has become a standard for academic research and devotional study, simply known as“T”in academic notation. Less known is how the production of the modern Japanese edition was influenced by a combination of religious devotion, Western-style academic scholarship, and Japan’s rising nationalism. In religious terms, Buddhist priests and intellectuals in Japan believed that these new printings of the Chinese Tripitaka would not only elevate Buddhism and Japan

Book Title: Comparative Journeys-Essays on Literature and Religion East and West
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Yu Anthony C.
Abstract: In these essays, Yu explores the overlap between literature and religion in Chinese and Western literature. He opens with a principal method for relating texts to religion and follows with several essays that apply this approach to single texts in discrete traditions: the Greek religion in Prometheus; Christian theology in Milton; ancient Chinese philosophical thought in Laozi; and Chinese religious syncretism in The Journey to the West.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/yu--14326

3 LIFE IN THE GARDEN: from: Comparative Journeys
Abstract: In his particular effort to justify the ways of God to man, Milton knows full well that it is not sufficient merely to demonstrate the proper origin of evil, though a satisfactory treatment of the subject that has so exercised some of the best minds throughout Christian history is itself no mean or easy accomplishment. In order to magnify the seriousness of the Fall and its terrible consequences, Milton, like most Christian apologists since Ambrose, realizes the value of emphasizing the original perfection of the first couple. Though Milton chooses to use the theme of the Fortunate Fall later in

8 RELIGION AND LITERATURE IN CHINA: from: Comparative Journeys
Abstract: If we begin looking for features of our own [Western] literature which are not paralleled in Chinese literature, we shall find the most striking instance in the absence of religious inspiration. Our drama began in pagan ritual and developed in medieval mystery. Chinese drama is secular for as far back as we can trace it—to the masques and buffooneries with which Han emperors were entertained two thousand years ago. Our greatest poets sing of

10 “REST, REST, PERTURBED SPIRIT!”: from: Comparative Journeys
Abstract: The sheer complexity of the subject no less than its utter unwieldiness will be the first impression of anyone undertaking a study of the topic of ghosts in traditional Chinese literature. The length of the Chinese literary tradition and the persistence of interest in the subject have helped to spawn a staggering amount of materials and create enormous difficulty in the isolation of sources. As in the case of many topics in Chinese culture, the development of this particular one ranges in many directions; it is not a subject enshrined in only a single genre of writing.

15 ENDURING CHANGE: from: Comparative Journeys
Abstract: Whether there is such a thing as the “essence” or “soul” of China and whether it can change over time are hardly idle questions, questions that I’d like to examine on this occasion. Even for a single individual, the questions of the subject and personal identity-who am I and in what sense the I of today is the same as the I of yesterday-are questions of great complexity and much discussion.¹ To note the difficulty inherent in my project does not mean that students of China have been reluctant to debate the peculiar or distinctive characteristics of that civilization. Indeed,

2. Life and Immortality in the Mind of Han China from: Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Confucius once said, “While you do not know life, how can you know about death?”¹ Life and death are among the basic problems with which the traditional Chinese mind has been grappling unceasingly ever since the time of Confucius, and to which various kinds of answers have been given. Especially during the Han Period, these two problems were discussed with even greater enthusiasm, not only because of scholars’ intellectual interest but also because of the existential necessity of the common people.

3. “O Soul, Come Back!”: from: Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: In this study, I propose to investigate indigenous Chinese conceptions of the afterlife in the period before the arrival of Buddhism in China. I shall take the ritual of fu復, “Summons” or “Recall,” as the point of departure, for in my judgment, this ritual embodied the crystallization of a variety of ideas about human survival after death that had developed in China since high antiquity. After a reconstruction of the ritual offu, I shall proceed to inquire into the origin and development of the notions ofhun魂 andpo魄, two pivotal concepts that have been,

4. New Evidence on the Early Chinese Conception of Afterlife from: Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: The spectacular discovery of the three Han tombs at Mawangdui in Changsha, Hunan, in 1972–1974 was indeed an event of singular importance in the history of Han studies. Of the three tombs, 1 and 3 in particular aroused worldwide attention. Tomb 3 is known for its preservation of a large quantity of silk manuscripts, some of which were long assumed lost. Tomb 1 made headline news at the time of its excavation, primarily for the well-preserved body of its occupant, the wife of the Marquis of Dai 噡, who prob ably died around the 168 B.C.E. When the full report

7. Individualism and the Neo-Daoist Movement in Wei-Jin China from: Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Both “individualism” and “holism” are Western concepts whose introduction into Chinese intellectual discourse is a matter of only recent historical development.¹ This does not mean, however, that as categories of analy sis these two concepts are totally inapplicable to the study of early Chinese thought. As a matter of fact, we find in the long history of Chinese political and social thought a wide range of views that can be legitimately characterized as either holistic or individualistic. In this study, the Neo-Daoist movement since the end of the Han dynasty will be explored as an example of one type of

9. Morality and Knowledge in Zhu Xi’s Philosophical System from: Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Generally speaking, since the time of Zisi 子思“honoring the moral nature” ( zun dexing尊德性) and “following the path of inquiry and study” (dao wenxue道問學) have been the two basic methods of instruction according to which people are taught to exert themselves.¹ Now, what Zijing 子靜 [Lu Xiangshan 陸象山, 1139–1193] talks about are matters pertaining exclusively to “honoring the moral nature,” whereas in my daily discussions I have placed a greater emphasis on “inquiry and study.” . . . From now on, I ought to

11. Business Culture and Chinese Traditions: from: Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: As indicated by the title, this chapter will relate “business culture” to “Chinese traditions.” To begin with, let me explain briefly what sort of things will be discussed. In the first place, business culture must be distinguished from business itself. The former may be understood as a way of life grown out of the ever-evolving business world that involves ideas, beliefs, values, ethical code, behavior patterns, etc. It is mainly to these cultural aspects, not the business world itself, that I shall address myself. In the second place, from the very beginning, business culture has been an integral part of

6. The Two Worlds of Honglou meng (Dream of the Red Chamber) from: Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Two worlds in sharp contrast to each other are created by Cao Xueqin 曹雪芹 (1716?–1763) in his novel Honglou meng紅樓夢 (Dream of the Red Chamber), two worlds which, for the sake for distinction, I shall call the “Utopian world” and the “world of real ity.” These two worlds, as embodied in the novel, are the world of Daguanyuan 大觀園¹ and the world that existed outside it. The difference between these two worlds is indicated by a variety of opposing symbols, such as “purity” and “impurity,” “love” and “lust,” “falsity” and “truth,” and the two sides of the Precious

11. The Idea of Democracy and the Twilight of the Elite Culture in Modern China from: Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: If ever a democratic republic similar to that of the United States came to be established in a country in which earlier a single man’s power had introduced administrative centralization and had made it something accepted by custom and by law, I have no hesitation in saying that in such a republic despotism would become more intolerable than in any of the absolute monarchies of Europe. One would have to go over into Asia to find anything with which to compare

16. Modern Chronological Biography and the Conception of Historical Scholarship from: Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Chronological biography ( nianpu) is a special form of Chinese historical writing. Leaving aside the lostZibian nianpu自編年譜 (Autobiographical Compilation) of Bai Juyi 白居易 (772–864), this form of writing can be traced to the Song dynasty (960–1279) beginning with the chronological biographies of Han Yu 韓愈 (768–824) and Liu Zongyuan 柳宗元 (773–819). In the one thousand years since, thousands ofnianpu, including chronological autobiographies, have been produced in China. More than twelve hundred chronological biographies are listed in Li Shitao’sZhongguo lidai mingren nianpu mulu(Bibliography of Chronological Biographies of Famous Figures by Dynasty).¹ Today, new

17. The Study of Chinese History: from: Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: History has always been the most glorious of all branches of knowledge in the scholarly tradition of China. It has declined markedly nowadays, however. This decline is not an isolated or unusual phenomenon; it is merely a part of the poverty of the Chinese scholarly world in modern times. Not only natural sciences, but social sciences and the humanities have not had adequate opportunities for development during the last fifty or sixty years. Even in philosophy, a subject that has the most to do with raising the intellectual level of the average educated person, research and instruction have not gone

18. Confucianism and China’s Encounter with the West in Historical Perspective from: Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: The thesis of a “clash of civilizations” has been much debated since Samuel P. Huntington published his famous article in Foreign Affairsin 1993.¹ InThe Clash of Civilizations and the Remaking of World Order(New York: Simon & Schuster, 1996; page numbers in parentheses for this title only), Huntington gives his original thesis a more detailed documentation and, at the same time, also somewhat modifies some of the sharp formulations in the earlier article. However, the book is essentially an elaboration, not a revision, of the original argument. To avoid distorting Huntington, I would like to present the core

Book Title: Why Only Art Can Save Us-Aesthetics and the Absence of Emergency
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): ZABALA SANTIAGO
Abstract: The state of emergency, according to thinkers such as Carl Schmidt, Walter Benjamin, and Giorgio Agamben, is at the heart of any theory of politics. But today the problem is not the crises that we do confront, which are often used by governments to legitimize themselves, but the ones that political realism stops us from recognizing as emergencies, from widespread surveillance to climate change to the systemic shocks of neoliberalism. We need a way of disrupting the existing order that can energize radical democratic action rather than reinforcing the status quo. In this provocative book, Santiago Zabala declares that in an age where the greatest emergency is the absence of emergency, only contemporary art's capacity to alter reality can save us. Why Only Art Can Save Usadvances a new aesthetics centered on the nature of the emergency that characterizes the twenty-first century. Zabala draws on Martin Heidegger's distinction between works of art that rescue us from emergency and those that are rescuersintoemergency. The former are a means of cultural politics, conservers of the status quo that conceal emergencies; the latter are disruptive events that thrust us into emergencies. Building on Arthur Danto, Jacques Rancière, and Gianni Vattimo, who made aesthetics more responsive to contemporary art, Zabala argues that works of art are not simply a means of elevating consumerism or contemplating beauty but are points of departure to change the world. Radical artists create works that disclose and demand active intervention in ongoing crises. Interpreting works of art that aim to propel us into absent emergencies, Zabala shows how art's ability to create new realities is fundamental to the politics of radical democracy in the state of emergency that is the present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/zaba18348

1 La manifestación política: from: Hannah Arendt
Author(s) Tassin Etienne
Abstract: En las notas que siguen me gustaría proponer una lectura de la obra de Hannah Arendt que dé testimonio no solamente de la actualidad política de su pensamiento, sino también de su fecunda capacidad para renovar los términos de la filosofía política contemporánea. Sean cuales sean los debates que trazan las grandes líneas de investigación en la actualidad —por ejemplo, la controversia entre liberales y comunitaristas sobre la justicia y el bien; o la cuestión de la organización de una política mundial en el contexto de una globalización económica neoliberal; o el conflicto de interpretaciones sobre las formas efectivas de

6 Memorias en conflicto en sociedades postotalitarias from: Hannah Arendt
Author(s) Sánchez Cristina
Abstract: En este ensayo quiero exponer, utilizando un marco de análisis arendtiano, algunas reflexiones en torno a la memoria y su papel en las sociedades democráticas, así como las dificultades y paradojas con las que nos encontramos al tratar el tema. La actual discusión en España acerca de la represión durante el franquismo y de las memorias enfrentadas sobre el mismo tema guían sin duda estas páginas, en un intento de esclarecer alguna de las perplejidades que provoca esa memoria, aún sesenta años después de acaecidos los hechos.

Book Title: Los setenta convulsionan el mundo. Irrumpe el presente histórico- Publisher: Universidad de los Andes
Author(s): Vengoa Hugo Fazio
Abstract: Hay coyunturas que pesan más que otras en la balanza de la historia. La larga década de los setenta, cuyos inicios se remontan al año de 1968, fue uno de esos momentos cruciales porque simbolizó el debut del presente histórico, es decir, representa la década inicial de la contemporaneidad que nos ha correspondido vivir. El libro que tiene el lector en sus manos analiza el conjunto de las grandes transformaciones que le confirieron a la década un distintivo particular: una especia de "malestar global" que prorrumpía de manera particular en cada caso y respondía a causas y circunstancias específicas, pero que se sincronizaba en determinados puntos o situaciones. Fue una década en que se intensificó la globalización, la cual cabalgaba a lomo de procesos tan dispares, como las grandes innovaciones científicas y tecnológicas; el advenimiento de nuevos modelos de capitalismo, más flexibles en cuanto a la acumulación y dúctiles en sus diseños monetarios y financieros; experiencias imbricadas de modernidad ("las modernidades entramadas") que irradian sensibles cambios sociales, culturales y sociopolíticos en los distintos continentes; y notables alteraciones en el mapa político y geopolítico, como resultado del desgaste que estaba experimentando el orden mundial durante la guerra fría.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7440/j.ctt18d834c

3 Inflexión de la Guerra Fría y cambios en el mapa político from: Los setenta convulsionan el mundo. Irrumpe el presente histórico
Abstract: Si en las esferas económicas y sociales las transformaciones de los setenta fueron estructurales y dieron origen a nuevas configuraciones y formas de organización, sin las cuales resulta casi imposible comprender el desarrollo subsiguiente del presente histórico y de la actualidad mundial más inmediata, se tiene que en el ámbito político –doméstico e internacional– los cambios resultaron ser igualmente significativos, pero situados en un registro menor en cuanto a su alcance sistémico. Ello, en buena parte, obedecía a que las modificaciones políticas y geopolíticas se desplegaban en una cadencia más lenta, debido a que la raigambre de la institucionalidad de

Book Title: En busca del lugar de la teoría- Publisher: Universidad de los Andes
Author(s): Escobar Luis Javier Orjuela
Abstract: En busca del lugar de la teoría es un ejercicio de reflexión del Grupo de Teoría, de la Universidad de los Andes, sobre la naturaleza, el alcance, los límites, las manifestaciones y el lugar de la teoría en las ciencias sociales, y de su relación con la práctica. En esta experiencia resultó evidente que para quien se interese en la teoría, más allá de la razón por la que lo haga, practicar la crítica y la vigilancia teórica son ejercicios simulténeos y complementarios en el desarrollo mismo de la teoría. Por medio de estos ejercicios hemos visto que no hay diferencia cualitativa entre teoría y práctica, pues tanto investigadores teóricos como empíricos hablan sobre el mundo. La teoría de la teoría no es un proceso de aislamento, sino de aproximación cautelosa e informada no solo al mundo de las ideas, sino también a la realidad. El mayor anhelo del Grupo de Teoría es provocar una intensa y fructífera descusión sobre el lugar y la pertinencia de la teoría en las ciencias sociales. Se daría por satisfecho como colectivo si este trabajo conduce al debate y a la producción de más textos de este tipo. Pero, fundamentalmente, aspira a contagiar en los más jóvenes eso que uno de nuestros miembros llama una "actitud teorizante".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7440/j.ctt18d83mm

Revelaciones sobre las posibilidades del juego esclarecedor de la teoría en ciencias sociales from: En busca del lugar de la teoría
Author(s) Núñez Rodolfo Masías
Abstract: El juego esclarecedor del concepto de teoría se aparece en la actualidad como un rompecabezas perverso. Uno que reconfigura las piezas cada vez que el jugador se halla cerca de completarlo. Este juego se revela como un juego punzante y desgarrador, pero también vitalmente desafiante. Si juego pensando que el juego tiene fin, esperando que el objeto-teoría, completo y distinto, aparezca ante mis ávidos ojos, me llevaré una irremediable decepción. El juego propone—eso es lo que colijo después haberlo jugado bastante—cambiar la mentalidad de jugador convencional por una que se satisface no con el resultado, sino con el

Book Title: La arqueología social latinoamericana.-De la teoría a la praxis
Publisher: Universidad de los Andes
Author(s): Aguilar Miguel
Abstract: La arqueología social latinoamericana. De la teoría a la praxis, es una compilación de artículos escritos por arqueólogos, antropólogos e historiadores de la arqueología marxista de viejas y nuevas generaciones de toda América y España. Por primera vez se reúne un conjunto de textos que explora las diferentes formas en que los autores, inspirados en el materialismo histórico, han pensado, reflexionado y actuado en la sociedad desde la disciplina antropológica y arqueológica, a partir no sólo de la propuesta teórica que tuvo un fuerte auge en la arqueología latinoamericana de los años setenta, sino de las experiencias de investigación y la manera de llevarla a la praxis, Este libro es el resultado del simposio Arqueología Social Latinoamericana, llevado a cabo en julio de 2009 en la ciudad de México, en el Congreso de Americanistas y en la Escuela Nacional de Antropología e Historia, y espera mostrar que la arqueología social latinoamericana sigue aún vigente y que, más que nunca, se postula como una importante propuesta teórico-práctica para entender política y científicamente el pasado, actuar críticamente en el presente y, consecuentemente, tener propuestas de modelos sociales alternativos en el futuro.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7440/j.ctt18gzdps

PROEMIO from: La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Author(s) Lull Vicente
Abstract: Se trata de un referente que no sólo continúa vivo en cualquiera de sus dos formas (efectiva o latente), sino que se ha manifestado superador de los experimentos paramarxistas del realismo socialista. Extraordinariamente, el legado de Marx se mantiene también a pesar de la enconada lucha por silenciarlo. El enemigo sigue siendo el mismo de antaño: las fuerzas de la reacción que con su imaginería

¿ESTRUCTURA OCULTA O NARRATIVA CAUSAL?: from: La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Author(s) Gándara Manuel
Abstract: Una de las características que distingue a la arqueología social de otras posiciones teóricas en arqueología, desde los padres fundadores como Childe, hasta los avances más recientes, es su énfasis en la explicación. A diferencia de la arqueología tradicional, a la que reaccionaron los primeros arqueólogos sociales, para nosotros no es suficiente decir solamente qué pasó en la historia, sino por qué. He sostenido en otro lado (Gándara 1995) que el objetivo cognitivo central de la posición, es decir, el tipo de conocimiento que nos interesa producir, es de corte explicativo. Ello no implica que otros objetivos cognitivos, como la

APORTES TEÓRICOS Y ÉTICOS POLÍTICOS DE LA ARQUEOLOGÍA SOCIAL LATINOAMERICANA EN LA OBRA DE MARIO SANOJA E IRAIDA VARGAS from: La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Author(s) Pacheco Lino Meneses
Abstract: En Venezuela, y sin temor a equivocarnos, en toda América, mientras más antiguo y más fantásticos son los contextos arqueológicos y los objetos que se encuentran en ellos, la valoración intelectual y popular de éstos adquiere mayor relevancia. De esta realidad se desprende la imagen más notoria que se tiene de un arqueólogo como persona que estudia objetos y restos muy antiguos, que en la mayoría de los casos se desvinculan de la historia venezolana.

HACIA UNA PRAXIS DE LA ARQUEOLOGÍA SOCIAL EN LA CUENCA NORTE DEL LAGO TITICACA, PERÚ from: La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Author(s) Tantaleán Henry
Abstract: En este capítulo describiremos sintéticamente el desarrollo de nuestra más reciente praxis arqueológica en la cuenca norte del Titicaca (Puno, Perú). Con esta praxis tratamos de reconocer la producción de la vida social mediante los restos de la materialidad social de un área concreta de estudio: el valle del río Quilcamayo-Tintiri. Para ello desarrollamos una metodología, con el objeto de poder registrarlos y analizarlos de la manera más realista posible. Gracias a los conocimientos adquiridos en nuestra experiencia en el área de la cuenca norte del lago Titicaca (Tantaleán 2006, 2008) desarrollamos una serie de planteamientos que contrastamos en una

BALANCE CRÍTICO DE LA PARTE IV: from: La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Abstract: El conjunto de textos de esta parte del libro quiere recordar que la arqueología social latinoamericana (ASL), como lo ha proclamado desde sus inicios, ha tenido una vocación por mantener los vínculos con la realidad social de la que nunca debió haberse alejado. De esta manera podría, entre otras cuestiones, recuperar la sustancia de la cual se originaron primordialmente muchos de los conceptos que operan actualmente y utilizamos muchos de nosotros. Al hacer esto, también pueden compartir sus deseos por un mundo mejor no sólo intelectual o académico sino, sobre todo, social, al integrarse y caminar en conjunto con la

Book Title: La arqueología: entre la historia y la prehistoria.-Estudio de una frontera conceptual
Publisher: Universidad de los Andes
Author(s): Suárez Carlo Emilio Piazzini
Abstract: Desde el siglo XIX la arqueología se ha concebido como una etnografía prehistórica o como una ciencia auxiliar de la historia, mientras que en las últimas décadas la certeza de que la disciplina no debe restringirse al pasado prehistórico explica el auge de las denominadas arqueologías históricas. De ahí que la diferencia entre historia y prehistoria no sólo sea cronológica, sino que, y más importante, constituya una actualización de las diferencias entre categorías más amplias como espíritu y materia, espacio y tiempo. Así, preguntarse por el concepto de prehistoria es cuestionarse por las huellas excluidas de la historia en virtud de una metafísica que acerca la escritura alfabética al espíritu, mientras condena las materialidades a una condición abyecta. Asimismo, la lejanía de la prehistoria respecto al presente histórico no es sólo una cuestión temporal, sino que remite al proceso por el cual la diferencia en el espacio fue ordenada en la modernidad como una diferencia en el tiempo. Mediante una espacialización crítica de la oposición historia-prehistoria tal como ha operado en Colombia, se plantea que, cuando la arqueología rompe los límites cronológicos de lo indígena precolombino, se produce una restitución de la diferencia espacial entre prehistoria e historia, y con ello emerge, en los márgenes e intersticios de los espacios sociales, lo no dicho, lo olvidado en el corazón mismo de la historia. Desde esta perspectiva, son las espacialidades y las materialidades las que constituyen el ámbito de referencia de una arqueología que no puede ser simplemente histórica si quiere transgredir el régimen del tiempo moderno.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7440/j.ctt18pkdks

INTRODUCCIÓN from: Relaciones Internacionales y Política Exterior de Colombia
Author(s) Borda Sandra
Abstract: A comienzos de la década de los ochenta, la famosa expresión del ex presidente Alfonso López Michelsen que afirmaba que Colombia era el “Tíbet de Sudamérica”, aislada del contexto mundial y encerrada en sí misma, se veía reflejada no sólo en la política exterior, sino en el estado de los estudios internacionales. A pesar de que las relaciones internacionales como campo académico se fueron consolidando en Argentina, Brasil, Chile y México durante los años sesenta y setenta, el interés en el tema surgió mucho más tarde en Colombia. Un diagnóstico realizado en 1984 a solicitud de la Fundación Ford concluía,

Intervención por invitación. from: Relaciones Internacionales y Política Exterior de Colombia
Author(s) Tickner Arlene B.
Abstract: Entre las tendencias históricas de la política exterior colombiana, la cercanía a Estados Unidos es, sin duda, una de las más sobresalientes. Desde la pérdida de Panamá, Colombia ha buscado satisfacer sus objetivos diplomáticos principalmente por medio de la asociación con el país del norte. La convicción generalizada de las élites políticas y económicas de que la proximidad era deseable como estrategia para defender los intereses nacionales, dio lugar a la doctrina del respice polum(Drekonja 1983; Pardo y Tokatlian 1989). A pesar de la existencia de otra directriz en política exterior —denominadarespice similiapor su énfasis en el

Derecho internacional y conflicto interno. from: Relaciones Internacionales y Política Exterior de Colombia
Author(s) Villa Alejandro Valencia
Abstract: Colombia vive una conflictiva situación de orden público, caracterizada por una agudización de las violencias. Todos anhelamos la paz. Sin embargo, el objetivo no es la paz, sino la democracia y la justicia, acompañadas de profundas reformas sociales y políticas, que nos conduzcan a la consolidación del estado de derecho. De todas formas, conociendo la incapacidad del Estado y de sus partidos políticos de apoyo, tales transformaciones se lograrán a muy largo plazo, siendo vanas ilusiones en el presente.

La producción bibliográfica del Departamento de Ciencia Política de la Universidad de los Andes 1969–2009 from: Relaciones Internacionales y Política Exterior de Colombia
Author(s) Berger María Paz
Abstract: Uno de los primeros ejercicios al que nos enfrentamos siendo estudiantes es la búsqueda bibliográfica y su consecuente sistematización. Se trata de un ejercicio básico en la formación de todo académico y que en nuestros años mozos suelen parecernos acciones odiosas, mecánicas y sin sentido. A medida que avanzamos en nuestra formación intelectual, descubrimos que elaborar bibliografías, no sólo es fundamental, sino necesario para demostrar nuestro proceso de aprendizaje y nuestro conocimiento sobre una disciplina en particular.

Guerras de guerrillas, acuerdos de paz y regímenes políticos from: Conflicto armado
Author(s) Nasi Carlo
Abstract: La interconexión entre guerras de guerrillas, acuerdos de paz y regímenes políticos es problemática y compleja. Las guerras de guerrillas y los acuerdos de paz, en parte, determinan la naturaleza de los regímenes políticos, al alterar la relación que existe entre el Estado y la sociedad. Abordar las relaciones entre estos tres factores es importante, porque considerarlos en forma independiente ha sido una fuente de confusiones analíticas. Cabe anotar que las transiciones democráticas en América Latina han tenido lugar con o sin guerras de guerrillas. Sin embargo, la firma de acuerdos de paz entre Estados y grupos rebeldes ha ocurrido

Las negociaciones de Ralito o “se vuelven a barajar los naipes” from: Conflicto armado
Author(s) Duncan Gustavo
Abstract: Luego de tres años de negociaciones con los grupos de autodefensa, el gobierno de Álvaro Uribe logró la desmovilización de al menos 30 000 combatientes y la entrega de más de 12 000 armas. Más meritorio fue que todos estos objetivos se alcanzaron sin que la Corte Constitucional hubiera dictado el fallo definitivo sobre la aplicación de la Ley de Justicia y Paz (ley 975 de 2005), con los riesgos implícitos de que los magistrados endurecieran los parámetros de juzgamiento de los comandantes y combatientes de las autodefensas, como efectivamente sucedió. Pese a los inconvenientes con la decisión de la

La barbarie horizontal from: Conflicto armado
Author(s) Orozco Iván
Abstract: Dentro de la comunidad de académicos y profesionales que manejan de manera empírica el aún naciente campo de la “justicia transicional” hay actualmente un muy interesante debate sobre la relación que existe entre la verdad, la justicia y la reconciliación. En parte debido a la carencia de conocimiento confiable, este nuevo campo está infestado de “creencias” más que de afirmaciones científicamente respaldadas. Basándose no sólo en creencias tradicionales, sino también en los testimonios de víctimas individuales, algunos autores afirman que lo más probable es que el conocimiento de la verdad sobre la identidad de los perpetradores y las circunstancias de

La producción bibliográfica del Departamento de Ciencia Política de la Universidad de los Andes 1969-2009 from: Conflicto armado
Author(s) Berger María Paz
Abstract: Uno de los primeros ejercicios al que nos enfrentamos siendo estudiantes es la búsqueda bibliográfica y su consecuente sistematización. Es un ejercicio básico en la formación de todo académico y que en nuestros años mozos suelen parecernos acciones odiosas, mecánicas y sin sentido. A medida que avanzamos en nuestra formación intelectual, descubrimos que elaborar bibliografías, no sólo es fundamental, sino necesario para demostrar nuestro proceso de aprendizaje y nuestro conocimiento sobre una disciplina en particular.

Capítulo iv La persona y el sueño from: Ooyoriyasa
Abstract: ¿Minikima ooyoriga? ¿Minikima ooyoriga sijnaka?es una fórmula de saludo matutino ette cuya traducción puede ser “¿Cómo soñaste? ¿Cómo soñaste anoche?”. Para este pueblo la pregunta sobre la actividad onírica reemplaza a aquella que, siendo tan común en nuestra sociedad, versa sobre la calidad del reposo o el estado de ánimo de quien acaba de despertar. La explicación de este hecho radica en la singular valoración que se le ha otorgado a la experiencia de soñar. Lejos de ser pensados como simples elaboraciones fantasiosas, los ette conciben los sueños como eventos reales y significativos durante los cuales el soñante puede

Book Title: Más acá, o más allá.-Del cambio, lo nuevo y la alternatividad en la teoría de los saberes sociales
Publisher: Universidad de Los Andes, Colombia
Author(s): Becerra Alcira Saavedra
Abstract: Este libro gira en torno a tres problemas esenciales, no solo para los directamente interesados en la teoría, sino también, y sin lugar a dudas, para todas las ciencias sociales y los más recientes proyectos cognitivo-políticos que encarnan los estudios culturales, los estudios poscoloniales y el giro descolonial, además de la propuesta de Boaventura de Sousa Santos. Entre sus capítulos están en juego el cambio teórico y sus límites, que comprende otras cuestiones como la innovación y la necesidad de la renovación teórica; el problema de la diferenciación teórica, es decir, el de la aparición de otras teorías distintas a las existentes en un momento dado, y el revivido tema de lo alternativo y la alternatividad como respuesta a unos regímenes de hegemonía teórica que se darían en el mundo de la teoría. Frente a estos —como grupo de reflexión e investigación— nos interesó desarrollar un punto de vista, una especie de diagnóstico sobre el acontecer de la teoría, no solo sobre el sector de las canónicas ciencias sociales, sino sobre esos otros proyectos, como los ya mencionados. No dimos por hecho que no estaba pasando nada en las teorías y los teóricos, impresión que se fortaleció una vez que indagamos y discutimos más a fondo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7440/j.ctt1zw5tgq

El pensamiento heterárquico: from: Más acá, o más allá.
Author(s) Jiménez John Alejandro Pérez
Abstract: Un conocimiento de algo, sin referencia y ubicación en un estatuto epistemológico que le dé sentido y proyección, queda huérfano y resulta ininteligible; es decir, que ni siquiera sería conocimiento. En efecto, conocer es siempre aprehender un dato en una cierta función, pero, a su vez, el método para

Capítulo 5 La casa de los libros. from: Las letras de la Provincia en la República.
Abstract: Otra de las funciones primordiales de los entusiastas de la educación en las provincias fue la difusión de las letras por vía de la publicación, la comercialización y la circulación de una variedad de libros al servicio de la alfabetización y la instrucción pública en general, sobre todo después de la década de 1820 cuando se iba afirmando la libertad de imprenta, de pensamiento y de comercio en la República de Colombia¹. Después de ese año, cada vez más los hombres de letras en las provincias, caracterizados por su extrema diversidad(en tanto no solo eran los autores consagrados sino

La desilusión en los sobrevivientes de la masacre del Alto Naya en el marco de Justicia y Paz from: La ilusión de la justicia transicional:
Author(s) Albarracín Fredy Leonardo Reyes
Abstract: La región del Alto Naya es una unidad geográfica de más de 300 000 hectáreas que se extiende desde la formación rocosa de los Farallones de Cali al oriente hasta la costa Pacífica colombiana en el occidente, bañada por la hoya del río Naya. Entre el 10 y 13 de abril del 2001, alrededor de 500 hombres del Bloque Calima de las Autodefensas Unidas de Colombia (auc) entraron en esta extensa región y asesinaron a la población aborigen, afrodescendiente y campesina bajo el supuesto de ser auxiliadora de la insurgencia del Ejército de Liberación Nacional (eln). La incursión paramilitar desencadenó

11. A implosão da forma dramática from: Dramaturgia, ainda: reconfigurações e rasuras
Author(s) Marfuz Luiz
Abstract: Absurdista, classicista, simbolista, tragicômico, niilista, teatro não-ilusionista, antiteatro, metateatro, teatro do repouso, teatro do absurdo, drama de estações, drama estático, drama lírico, farsa metafísica – estas são algumas formas de se adjetivar o teatro de Beckett. Nenhuma resume a totalidade e a singularidade com que o autor dispôs seu itinerário. Isto se deve não só à pluralidade da produção intelectual, mas principalmente à rede inextricada na qual teceu seus escritos, marcados por intertextualidade, polifonia sensorial, envios e re-envios entre caos e ordem, linguagem e expressão.

13. Teatro experimental na Bahia: from: Dramaturgia, ainda: reconfigurações e rasuras
Author(s) de Leão Raimundo Matos
Abstract: Desde a década de 1960, o teatro deu sinais enfáticos na direção de retirar o texto dramático do centro da cena para fazer valer a autonomia da encenação. Essa tendência intensifica-se na década seguinte, quando o espetáculo deixa de subordinar-se ao texto, ao logocentrismo, para torná-lo mais um dos signos da encenação. O texto passa a igualar-se aos signos visuais, gestuais, auditivos e espaciais – palco – chegando mesmo a perder a densidade em relação ao outros elementos constitutivos da linguagem teatral. Essa tendência, se não decreta a morte do texto dramático, coloca em xeque a sua condição de obra

15. Tempo e lugar em Nelson Rodrigues: from: Dramaturgia, ainda: reconfigurações e rasuras
Author(s) de Souza Motta Véra Dantas
Abstract: O princípio de cronotopia da imagem artístico-literária foi descoberto pela primeira vez por Lessing, afirma Bakhtin (1998, p. 211-362). Tudo o que é estático-espacial deve ser incluído na série temporal dos acontecimentos representados e da própria narrativa-imagem. Por cronotopo, que literalmente quer dizer tempo-espaço,² Bakhtin entende a interligação fundamental das relações temporais e espaciais, artisticamente assimiladas em literatura. Este termo, empregado nas ciências matemáticas, foi introduzido e fundamentado com base na teoria da relatividade. Bakhtin o transporta para a crítica literária como uma metáfora: é importante no termo a indissolubilidade de espaço e de tempo (tempo como a quarta dimensão

1 A questão do método e a crítica do conhecimento from: Geografia e filosofia: contribuição para o ensino do pensamento geográfico
Abstract: Para se conceber uma metodologia de ensino do pensamento geo gráfico é preciso, inicialmente, discutir o método científico. É considerando-o historicamente e em sua dimensão filosófica que passaremos a tratá-lo neste texto.

Considerações finais from: Geografia e filosofia: contribuição para o ensino do pensamento geográfico
Abstract: Uma proposta de metodologia de ensino do pensamento geográfico, como a que esboçamos, não tem a pretensão de ser a única. Considerando que o conhecimento é universal, contextualizado e atualizado, outras pessoas devem estar pensando no mesmo assunto e, portanto, estabelecendo outros parâmetros para a tarefa de se relacionar o método, a teoria do conhecimento e o pensamento geográfico.

2 A transcendência negativa do sujeito from: A paixão do negativo: Lacan e a dialética
Abstract: Falamos da noção de cura analítica como reconhecimento do desejo por si mesmo e pelo Outro. Cura como índice da nomeação de um desejo que, até então, só podia aparecer sob a forma de sintomas. Porém, no interior desta coreografia, esquecemos constantemente o teor da reposta lacaniana a questões como: “Qual desejo espera insistentemente por reconhecimento?”, “O que significa exatamente dar nome ao desejo?”. Pode-se começar a responder tais questões se levarmos em conta afirmações como:

9 Reconhecimento e dialética negativa from: A paixão do negativo: Lacan e a dialética
Abstract: Vimos, em vários momentos deste livro, o esforço em recuperar um conceito de reconhecimento apto a apreender aquilo que fundamenta a experiência intelectual lacaniana. Tentou-se mostrar como a particularidade da clínica lacaniana encontra-se na especificidade dos seus modos de subjetivação. Tais subjetivações não passam pela nomeação positiva da pulsão, do real do corpo e do sinthomeou pela interiorização reflexiva de um processo de rememoração da história subjetiva. Ao contrário, elas se fundam no reconhecimento do caráter eminentemente negativo dos objetos aos quais a pulsão se vincula. A fim de melhor compreender a estrutura da subjetivação em Lacan, passou-se a

Book Title: A persistência dos deuses: religião, cultura e natureza- Publisher: SciELO - Editora UNESP
Author(s): CRUZ EDUARDO RODRIGUES DA
Abstract: PARADIDÁTICOS - SÉRIE: CULTURA Um dos traços culturais brasileiros que mais se destaca é o da pluralidade e vitalidade religiosas e o "jeitinho brasileiro" para lidar com a questão religiosa está presente nesta obra. Com um texto empolgante, o autor apresenta "as regras do jogo" no universo das religiões estabelecidas e põe em xeque o dito popular de que "religião, política e futebol não se discutem", ao abordar: a identidade nacional, a separação Igreja-Estado, a obrigatoriedade do ensino religioso no país e o entendimento moderno da religião como forma de cultura. Eduardo Rodrigues propõe uma reflexão sobre as características universais da religião ao debater a forma como ela produz deuses e seus mundos sobrenaturais.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7476/9788539303359

CONCLUSÃO from: A persistência dos deuses: religião, cultura e natureza
Abstract: Procuramos descrever, ao longo destes capítulos, como a fascinante variedade religiosa existente no Brasil requer e suscita vários níveis de interpretação. Partimos da constatação de que o perfil de nossas religiões, mostrado no censo do IBGE de 2000, recebeu uma atenção sem precedentes dos analistas e dos meios de comunicação. Quer sejamos observadores distanciados das manifestações mais recentes da força religiosa de nosso povo, quer sintamos esta última como fiéis de uma religião específica, não podemos deixar de ignorar que as religiões estarão presentes no século XXI influenciando e se deixando influenciar pelas mudanças culturais que experimentarmos.

O PROBLEMA DO SENTIDO HISTÓRICO EM HISTÓRIA DAS IDEIAS: from: Epistemologias da história
Author(s) Lopes Marcos Antônio
Abstract: Nos meados do século passado, o filósofo britânico Robin George Collingwood ironizou certo gênero de historiadores que, segundo ele, em busca de escrever boa História, acabavam por exibir em seus textos eruditos algumas notáveis singularidades, mormente as relacionadas a certas carências de sentido histórico. Com efeito, há um emprego muito difundido da expressão sentido histórico, utilizada comumente na acepção de teleologia, de preparação de um determinado presente por agentes históricos situados no passado ou mesmo de um determinado futuro por atores vivendo no tempo presente. Aqui, a expressão é empregada com conotação bem diversa. Em vez de caracterizar uma filosofia

Apresentação from: Pesquisa qualitativa em geografia: reflexões teórico-conceituais e aplicadas
Abstract: Esta coletânea retoma nossas preocupações sobre o uso das metodologias qualitativas na pesquisa geográfica, ampliando o escopo de pesquisadores de cursos de geografia de instituições de ensino superior – Universidade Federal de Uberlândia (UFU), Universidade Federal de Goiás (UFG/Catalão), Universidade Federal da Paraíba (UFPB/Campina Grande), Universidade do Estado do Rio de Janeiro (UERJ), Universidade Estadual de Goiás (UEG/Unidade Cora Coralina), Universidade Federal de Alfenas (UNIFAL), Universidade Estadual de Montes Claros (UNIMONTES), Universidade Federal do Tocantins (UFT), Faculdade de Ciências Integradas do Pontal (FACIP/UFU), Instituto Federal de Goiás (IFG), Instituto Estadual do Ambiente (INEA) – e cobrindo, dessa forma, diversas partes do território

Nas tramas do discurso: from: Pesquisa qualitativa em geografia: reflexões teórico-conceituais e aplicadas
Author(s) Junior João Cleps
Abstract: O termo discurso é polissêmico. Ele está inscrito em nosso cotidiano e, às vezes, ligado ao simples ato da fala, ou é visto, em certas situações, com sentido negativo. Isso é observado em alguns sinônimos comumente dados a ele: palavras ditas sem uma ordem de verdade; estratégia política no intuito de angariar votos etc. Em outras palavras, o discurso é entendido como superficial, sem referência à história, sem uma referência geográfica. Palavras ditas e esquecidas por não possuírem uma proposição verdadeira.

Saberes da cultura camponesa: from: Pesquisa qualitativa em geografia: reflexões teórico-conceituais e aplicadas
Author(s) Pessôa Vera Lúcia Salazar
Abstract: Pensar a educação básica do campo como direito que deve ser garantido à população do campo traz à luz a discussão sobre como esse direito é negado, já que, com a aprovação da Lei de Diretrizes e Bases n. 9.394/96, essa etapa do ensino agrega a educação infantil, o ensino fundamental e o ensino médio e essas três etapas não são

A dinâmica espacial na Região Metropolitana de Goiânia: from: Pesquisa qualitativa em geografia: reflexões teórico-conceituais e aplicadas
Author(s) Teixeira Renato Araújo
Abstract: O município de Inhumas compõe a Região Metropolitana de Goiânia e tem como centro econômico a produção de etanol. Isso propicia um estudo, no contexto municipal e regional goiano, de uma problemática singular, por causa dos reflexos dos canaviais no frontda metrópole, e desencadeia novos olhares e abordagens sobre esse município, em

O uso das geotecnologias na análise socioespacial from: Pesquisa qualitativa em geografia: reflexões teórico-conceituais e aplicadas
Author(s) Corrêa Renata da Silva
Abstract: Passado mais de um século desde a institucionalização da geografia, muito ainda se tem discutido sobre a definição do objeto de estudo de tal ramo do conhecimento. Entre as várias perspectivas que surgem na história do pensamento geográfico, encontra-se o espaço, como vital, singularizado, quantificado, abordado criticamente ou no viés mais fenomenológico. Assim, tem-se buscado entender a importância desse conceito para as análises e reflexões sobre os fenômenos que se processam nas interações do homem em sociedade intermediadas pela materialidade presente na Terra.

APRESENTAÇÃO from: Filosofia da psicanálise: autores, diálogos, problemas
Author(s) Simanke Richard Theisen
Abstract: Num trabalho dedicado a um inventário do “estado atual da arte” no campo daquilo que veio a ser conhecido como filosofia da biologiadesde os anos 1960, Ruse (1988) a considerava como uma subdisciplina, dentro do campo mais amplo da filosofia da ciência. Essa reivindicação assinalava uma nova forma de relação entre os dois discursos (filosófico e biológico), à medida que, ao contrário das assim chamadas filosofias biológicas que a precederam – interrogações mais ou menos sistemáticas sobre a significação e as implicações filosóficas dos fenômenos vitais –, a forte institucionalização que muito cedo caracterizou o trabalho em filosofia da biologia

INTRODUÇÃO from: Filosofia da psicanálise: autores, diálogos, problemas
Author(s) Simanke Richard Theisen
Abstract: Atítulo de introdução da presente coletânea, o trabalho que segue visa fazer uma apresentação sintética da área de pesquisa em filosofia da psicanálise, tal como esta se apresenta contemporaneamente no Brasil e no mundo. Para tanto, apresenta um breve histórico das relações entre psicanálise e filosofia, ao qual se segue um comentário a respeito do surgimento da filosofia da biologia, que pode ser tomado como modelo precedente do que hoje acontece com a filosofia da psicanálise. A seguir, expõe-se e discute-se o modo como a filosofia da psicanálise se desenvolveu na cena filosófica brasileira, o qual, dada a amplitude, as

Limites entre a filosofia de Merleau-Ponty e a psicanálise from: Filosofia da psicanálise: autores, diálogos, problemas
Author(s) Junior Nelson Coelho
Abstract: O objetivo principal deste artigo é explicitar diferentes limites que aproximam e, ao mesmo tempo, separam o pensamento filosó-fico de Merleau-Ponty das formulações desenvolvidas pela Psicanálise. Como se sabe, Merleau-Ponty mostrou interesse pela Psicanálise desde seus primeiros trabalhos, ainda na década de 1940. Mas foi principalmente nos anos 1950 que o filósofo construiu concepções singulares sobre o inconsciente, o sonho, a memória e o simbolismo, que o colocaram simultaneamente em um diálogo intenso com a Psicanálise e na direção de um pensamento original que parece ser capaz de reinstalar o solo da própria Psicanálise em um território nunca antes habitado.

Do Idealtyp weberiano ao tipo clínico lacaniano: from: Filosofia da psicanálise: autores, diálogos, problemas
Author(s) Teixeira Antonio
Abstract: Épor demais conhecida a ênfase que se dá, no discurso psicanalítico, à dimensão do caso único, irreprodutível, da experiência ímpar que não se repete. Falamos sempre do caso a caso, doum a um, estamos continuamente a espreita daquilo que o sintoma comporta como solução subjetiva incalculável, assim como da resposta que cada um traz a um problema para cuja saída não haviam coordenadas previstas. Trata-se de um ponto absolutamente pacífico, imune a todo tipo de querela na comunidade psicanalítica: não há quem discorde, no que tange à direção da cura, quanto à importância a ser dada à experiência singular

A pulsão no pensamento mítico: from: Filosofia da psicanálise: autores, diálogos, problemas
Author(s) Álvares Cristina
Abstract: Para elaborar as duas componentes fundamentais da teoria narrativa, a componente sintática e a componente semântica, Greimas inspirou-se dos estudos de Propp sobre a forma do conto popular russo assim como dos estudos de Lévi-Strauss sobre a estrutura dos mitos. Por isso, o modelo da sintaxe actancial é a morfologia do conto e o da semântica profunda é o pensamento mítico. No pensamento mítico Greimas encontrou a dimensão paradigmática não manifesta que constrange o desenrolar sintagmático dos mitos e suporta a sua coerência lógica. De fato, a noção lévi-straussiana de ‘pensée mythique’, designa um plano para lá da diversi dade

Uma outra carta para um outro pai from: Ficção brasileira no século XXI: terceiras leituras
Author(s) LAJOLO MARISA
Abstract: 1. Como se lê na epígrafe – extraída de uma afirmação do narrador de Ribamar(CASTELLO, 2010)¹ – “todo escritor é um náufrago. Um Robinson”. Será? E se for, que papel fica reservado, nesse naufrágio, para o leitor? A questão é instigante. O leitor desse romance de José Castello com certeza se lembra da solidão do náufrago criado pelo romancista inglês Daniel Defoe (1659/1661-1731) e da providencial figura de Sexta Feira, o nativo da ilha a quem Robinson ensina inglês e que se torna seu companheiro, como narra o livro publicado em 1719 e que circula pelo Brasil a partir de 1836.

O senhor do lado esquerdo, de Alberto Mussa: from: Ficção brasileira no século XXI: terceiras leituras
Author(s) TREVISAN ANA LÚCIA
Abstract: As obras literárias remodelam as temporalidades de forma singular e, tantas vezes, conseguem traduzir no percurso das palavras as faces multiculturais de sujeitos históricos ancorados nas mais diversas latitudes. Em uma proposta de análise literária, que tem como objeto a literatura contemporânea, é imprescindível refletir sobre os sentidos da diversidade, presentes nas perspectivas estéticas e nas formulações temáticas. Desvendar as muitas formas de expressão da literariedade é um exercício que obriga o crítico a repensar os sentidos renovados das categorias narrativas, assim como a reformulação dos limites tradicionais de gêneros. A leitura da prosa contemporânea configura-se como terreno profícuo o

Fragmentos de uma paisagem urbana from: Ficção brasileira no século XXI: terceiras leituras
Author(s) ATIK MARIA LUIZA GUARNIERI
Abstract: Em Questões de literatura e de estética, Bakhtin (1998, p. 397) assinala que o estudo do romance como gênero “caracteriza-se por dificuldades particulares”, as quais são decorrentes da própria singularidade do objeto: “o romance é o único gênero por se constituir”. Assim, ao contrário de outros gêneros, o processo de evolução do romance não está concluído e, consequentemente, não podemos ainda prever todas as suas potencialidades artísticas.

Book Title: Healing Dramas- Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): ROMBERG RAQUEL
Abstract: In this intimate ethnography, Raquel Romberg seeks to illuminate the performative significance of healing rituals and magic works, their embodied nature, and their effectiveness in transforming the states of participants by focusing on the visible, albeit mostly obscure, ways in which healing and magic rituals proceed. The questions posed by Romberg emerge directly from the particular pragmatics of Puerto Rican brujería (witch-healing), shaped by the eclecticism of its rituals, the heterogeneous character of its participants, and the heterodoxy of its moral economy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/706583

Chapter Two DREAMS from: Healing Dramas
Abstract: While dreaming is common to all human beings, not everyone makes the recording, telling, interpreting, and circulating of them an important part of the everyday experience of dreaming. As soon as I arrived in Puerto Rico in the summer of 1995 to conduct an exploratory research on the circulation of spiritual practices between the island and the U.S. mainland, I realized that describing one’s dreams and asking others to interpret them is a common practice, even among quasi-strangers, as I was for many. In various situations since my first days in Puerto Rico—at the university, in stores, and obviously

Chapter Three DRAMA from: Healing Dramas
Abstract: Miriam, a young woman in her late teens walks into Haydée’s altar with some difficulty; one of her legs is in a cast from her toes to her thigh. The obvious heaviness of her pace is matched by the chubbiness of her physique and overall clumsiness of her clothes, as well as by her dull, inexpressive visage. Before opening the cards for her, Haydée makes a few unexpected general comments about this young, sad-looking client.

Chapter Four SPIRITUAL TIME from: Healing Dramas
Abstract: The word “sense,” as any thesaurus shows, is synonymous with (a) meaning, significance, logic; (b) intelligence, wisdom, common sense; and (c) feeling, sensation, awareness. It is the same word, yet it carries very different, even opposing, meanings. Characterizing the history of anthropological theory as a quest for finding the sense of the behaviors of fellow human beings, Michael Herzfeld argues (2001) that theories were engaged first in “making sense” of the behaviors of “exotic others”; then in studying the “common sense” or taken-for-granted realities of different groups within a society (including those of the anthropologist); and now are focusing on

Chapter Six SPACE from: Healing Dramas
Abstract: Basi, the botánica owner and espiritista with whom I lived for several months, insisted I meet Ken and Mora, a married couple working together as healers. Basi and her teenage granddaughter who lived with her had participated in a series of workshops on the beach that Ken and Mora conducted about healing, cleansing, and meditation techniques. The flyer she gave me with the address and phone number read as follows: “Ken [his last name]: Magnified Healing Master Teacher” (in forty-eight-point italics) and on the next line “Reiki Treatment: Balancing of Inner Self.” I called him and met with him and

CHAPTER 2 The Language in Storytelling from: The Last Cannibals
Abstract: Kalapalo told me stories from the very first week in Aifa, their settlement. As a novice, my first research goal was to try to learn how to speak to the residents in their own language, and for this purpose I began my work by asking for lists of words for things, using as a translator the single Portuguese-speaking man present in the settlement at that time and the only person who used a Portuguese name. In 1952, Antonio had been taken as a teenager to live in Rio de Janeiro along with his sister Dyaqui, who was being married to

CHAPTER 4 Kambe’s Testimony from: The Last Cannibals
Abstract: In 1927, searching for the remnants of the lost civilization of Mu, the English explorer Sir Percival Fawcett, his son Jack, and their friend Raleigh Rimell disappeared somewhere in the central Brazilian Upper Xingu Basin. Colonel Fawcett was no ordinary eccentric. An engineer and distinguished member of the Royal Geographic Society with connections to the Court of St. James, his trip was sponsored by none other than the famous writer H. Rider Haggard, author of The Ring of the Queen of ShebaandKing Solomon’s Mines. Fawcett’s first attempt to obtain the permission of the Brazilian authorities was thwarted by

FIVE EDWARD SAID SPACED OUT from: Why the Humanities Matter
Abstract: Ever since my undergraduate days as an English major at UC Berkeley, when chapters on Orientalismwere required reading in many upperdivision courses, I’ve been a great admirer of Edward Said. Unlike otherau couranttheorists, Said was refreshing: his accessible erudition and sharp-edged writing style sliced cleanly through a seemingly autochthonous, gelatinous mass of theoretical obscurantism. That he was one of a handful of politically inclined academics in the United States—from the mid-1970s till his death in 2003 he stuck his neck out to defend the Palestinian underdog against a tyrannical Israeli government—made him especially unique and

Book Title: Death and the Classic Maya Kings- Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): FITZSIMMONS JAMES L.
Abstract: Focusing on the Classic Period (AD 250-900), James Fitzsimmons examines and compares textual and archaeological evidence for rites of death and burial in the Maya lowlands, from which he creates models of royal Maya funerary behavior. Exploring ancient Maya attitudes toward death expressed at well-known sites such as Tikal, Guatemala, and Copan, Honduras, as well as less-explored archaeological locations, Fitzsimmons reconstructs royal mortuary rites and expands our understanding of key Maya concepts including the afterlife and ancestor veneration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/718906

1 Vernacular Cosmopolitanism from: Cosmopolitanism in Mexican Visual Culture
Abstract: On May 7, 1680, Charles II of Spain appointed Don Tomás Antonio de la Cerda y Aragón, Conde de Paredes, Marqués de la Laguna, as the twenty-eighth viceroy of New Spain. On September 7, after a three-month journey from Cadiz passing through the Canary Islands and the Antilles, the new viceroy and his entourage disembarked at the Port of Veracruz. Two more months of travel awaited them, punctuated with welcoming receptions and feasts in officially designated cities between Veracruz and the seat of the viceroyalty. On November 30 the Conde de Paredes made his ceremonial entry to Mexico City. This

2 Castas, Monstrous Bodies, and Soft Buildings from: Cosmopolitanism in Mexican Visual Culture
Abstract: It is no secret that traditional discourses of classical architecture are founded on analogies to the human body. In the third volume of The Ten Books of Architecture, the Roman architect Vitruvius established what would become a permanent union between the proportions of the (male) body and classical architecture. Vitruvius asserted that the ancient Greeks designed their buildings using measuring units that corresponded to bodily proportions. “It was from the members of the body that they derived the fundamental ideas of the measures which are obviously necessary in all works, as the finger, palm, foot, and cubit”; hence symmetry in

4 Of Ruins and Ghosts from: Cosmopolitanism in Mexican Visual Culture
Abstract: Archaeological remains are more than traces of civilizations past. Like other sites of nation-building they serve as stages for the contestation of multiple interests. Official histories, tourist literature, art history, and archaeology often obscure these tensions by focusing on the impressive materiality of the monuments and on deciphering their original significance (Fig. 4.1). While these efforts illuminate our knowledge of the past, they leave out aggregates of individual and collective experiences that also contribute to the signification of the works. Ancient monuments belong to places. As E. V. Walters argued, the significance of a place is inaccessible through rational processes

5 Traces of the Past from: Cosmopolitanism in Mexican Visual Culture
Abstract: Nineteenth-century Mexican architecture is widely recognized as eclectic. Especially from about 1880 to the first decade of the twentieth century, Mexican cities exhibited buildings of multiple stylistic tendencies, including neoclassical, Baroque, neo-Gothic, and art nouveau, indicative of a cosmopolitan consciousness. Sometimes an architect would employ various styles in a single edifice. As in the study of colonial Mexican architecture, scholars have attempted to classify the architecture of the period with little success: the buildings consistently elude traditional stylistic classifications.¹

Book Title: Wicked Cinema-Sex and Religion on Screen
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): Cutrara Daniel S.
Abstract: From struggles over identity politics in the 1990s to current concerns about a clash of civilizations between Islam and Christianity, culture wars play a prominent role in the twenty-first century. Movies help to define and drive these conflicts by both reflecting and shaping cultural norms, as well as showing what violates those norms. In this pathfinding book, Daniel S. Cutrara employs queer theory, cultural studies, theological studies, and film studies to investigate how cinema represents and often denigrates religion and religious believers—an issue that has received little attention in film studies, despite the fact that faith in its varied manifestations is at the heart of so many cultural conflicts today.Wicked Cinema examines films from the United States, Europe, and the Middle East, including Crimes and Misdemeanors, The Circle, Breaking the Waves, Closed Doors, Agnes of God, Priest, The Last Temptation of Christ, and Dogma. Central to all of the films is their protagonists' struggles with sexual transgression and traditional belief systems within Christianity, Judaism, or Islam—a struggle, Cutrara argues, that positions believers as the Other and magnifies the abuses of religion while ignoring its positive aspects. Uncovering a hazardous web of ideological assumptions informed by patriarchy, the spirit/flesh dichotomy, and heteronormativity, Cutrara demonstrates that ultimately these films emphasize the "Otherness" of the faithful through a variety of strategies commonly used to denigrate the queer, from erasing their existence, to using feminization to make them appear weak, to presenting them as dangerous fanatics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/754720

Introduction from: Wicked Cinema
Abstract: Millions of people have watched in delight what has now become an iconic image from The Sound of Music: Maria (Julie Andrews) twirling on a grassy hill with its backdrop of snow-covered mountains. Director Robert Wise’s musical adaptation of the Von Trapp story was a huge box office success and a favorite of the Academy, winning five awards. On occasion, I still sing to myself Maria’s lesson to the children, “Do, a deer, a female deer / Re, a drop of golden sun.” This family-friendly film about an unruly postulant, who seems utterly devout yet unable to conform to the

Book Title: Sanctioning Modernism-Architecture and the Making of Postwar Identities
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): Steiner Frederick
Abstract: In the decades following World War II, modern architecture spread around the globe alongside increased modernization, urbanization, and postwar reconstruction—and it eventually won widespread acceptance. But as the limitations of conventional conceptions of modernism became apparent, modern architecture has come under increasing criticism. In this collection of essays, experienced and emerging scholars take a fresh look at postwar modern architecture by asking what it meant to be "modern," what role modern architecture played in constructing modern identities, and who sanctioned (or was sanctioned by) modernism in architecture.This volume presents focused case studies of modern architecture in three realms—political, religious, and domestic—that address our very essence as human beings. Several essays explore developments in Czechoslovakia, Romania, and Yugoslavia and document a modernist design culture that crossed political barriers, such as the Iron Curtain, more readily than previously imagined. Other essays investigate various efforts to reconcile the concerns of modernist architects with the traditions of the Roman Catholic Church and other Christian institutions. And a final group of essays looks at postwar homebuilding in the United States and demonstrates how malleable and contested the image of the American home was in the mid-twentieth century. These inquiries show the limits of canonical views of modern architecture and reveal instead how civic institutions, ecclesiastical traditions, individual consumers, and others sought to sanction the forms and ideas of modern architecture in the service of their respective claims or desires to be modern.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/757257

INTRODUCTION. from: Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) DOORDAN DENNIS P.
Abstract: In a park-like setting along New York City’s East River the United Nations stands proudly as an enduring symbol of … what? Today the UN buildings are assailed by some as the sinister architectural symbol of a new world order that threatens to strip nations of sovereign control over their own affairs. For others, the pristine geometry and midcentury palette of materials and artworks serve as a poignant reminder of the naïve hopes and disappointing achievements that trail in the wake of the promise of a new peaceful world order rising phoenix-like from the ashes of World War II. Six

INTRODUCTION from: Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) KULIĆ VLADIMIR
Abstract: During the two decades following World War II, various political entities across the world adopted modernist architecture in its different guises both for representational purposes and as an instrument of modernization. The period thus stood in contrast with the interwar years, when modernists struggled to attract official support, especially after the turbulent alliance between the avant-gardes and the varied central and local governments of the 1920s dissolved under the rising totalitarian forces. It was only in a few places such as Czechoslovakia and Turkey that architectural modernism before World War II was consistently accepted as the “official style” of political

3 CZECHOSLOVAKIAʹS MODEL HOUSING DEVELOPMENTS: from: Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) ZARECOR KIMBERLY ELMAN
Abstract: In the aftermath of World War II, Czechoslovakia began a process of national transformation and reconstruction that ultimately led to more than forty years of Communist Party rule. During the war and immediate postwar years, its multiethnic population became more homogeneous with the decimation of the Jewish population, the loss of Subcarpathian Ruthenia to the Soviet Union, and the expulsion of three million people of German descent. Internal and regional migration was also common as the government encouraged Slavs to resettle in the “borderlands” (Sudetenland) where properties and businesses confiscated from Jews and Germans were distributed to new settlers. One

4 SANCTIONING MODERNISM AND TRADITION: from: Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) SABATINO MICHELANGELO
Abstract: From the early 1920s to the late 1950s the dialectic of modernism and tradition, whether classical or vernacular, characterized the Italian state’s architectural patronage.¹ This essay investigates post–World War II state-sponsored building initiatives, mainly housing, and the architectural debates accompanying their design and realization. It sets them against the backdrop of Italian architectural discourse on identity that surfaced during the Fascist period (1922–1943) and continued to weigh heavily on the decisions of architects and urban designers in postwar democratic Italy. The essay focuses on the role that appropriation of extant vernacular building traditions and the abandonment of classicism

5 UNCERTAINTY AND THE MODERN CHURCH: from: Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) PROCTOR ROBERT
Abstract: The 1960s witnessed the most significant changes in the history of the Roman Catholic Church (and, arguably, in Christianity) since at least the Reformation and Counter-Reformation. A major liturgical reform was announced at the Second Vatican Council of 1962 to 1965 and was subsequently implemented throughout the Church. This reform marked an endorsement of previous calls for change from theologians, liturgy scholars, and ordinary priests around the world; known as the Liturgical Movement, it now has a well-documented historical narrative.¹ Yet in Britain these changes came suddenly to many clergy and faithful, since few had any significant awareness of the

6 ʺHUMANLY SUBLIME TENSIONSʺ: from: Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) PARKER TIMOTHY
Abstract: In 1967, Luigi Moretti (1907–1973)¹ published in Fede e Artea pointed essay, “Where two or three are gathered in my name … (Matthew 18:20),” concerning the “great perplexity” facing architects of new churches in the wake of the sea change that was the Second Vatican Council (1962–1965).² Observing the “dangerous, or at least incautious, vehemence” with which otherwise sincere architects prematurely produced “a flood of purely formalistic designs,” Moretti lamented the too-frequent consequence of “bare, denuded” churches.³ The verbal terms of this judgment and disparaging visual characterization echo a description Moretti had given a work of his

INTRODUCTION from: Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) PENICK MONICA
Abstract: During World War II and in the two decades that followed, scores of architects were engaged in the design of the postwar house, a building type that offered extraordinary opportunities and unprecedented challenges. In the United States in particular, the postwar house—single-family, detached, and increasingly built for a middle-class clientele—became, on the one hand, an arena in which a once-stagnant housing industry could expand and thrive; on the other hand, the postwar house offered a venue in which architects could explore progressive ideas. Perhaps more significantly, as the three essays in this section demonstrate, the house became a

CHAPTER 4 Gods in the Flesh: from: The Fate of Earthly Things
Abstract: Teteo(gods) and theirteixiptlahuan(localized embodiments) frequently appear together in Nahuatl accounts of ritual activity, especially in those that describe devotees constructing and venerating a deity embodiment—whether human, dough, wood, or stone. Aztec rituals and devotional practices often involved multipleteixiptlahuanrepresenting severalteteo. This multiplicity has contributed to scholars’ tendency to fuse the two concepts—teotlandteixiptla(localized embodiment)—into a single more manageable one. A description of Painal’s appearance at the temple of Huitzilopochtli from theFlorentine Codexexemplifies ritual contexts in which devotees interacted with multipleteixiptlahuan:

THREE A Khipu Information String Theory from: Narrative Threads
Author(s) Conklin William J
Abstract: The chroniclers of the Spanish Conquest of Peru provided both eyewitness and word-of-mouth reports on the many uses of the plied and knotted-string information devices called khipu that the Inka used. Although these reports have varying degrees of credibility, the discovery, in the centuries since the conquest, of actual khipu from the Inka Empire provides material substance to those reports. In addition to these reports on the uses of khipu, Felipe Guaman Poma de Ayala, the ardent native chronicler of the woes of the conquest, provided many drawn images of khipu. A comparison of his depictions of khipu¹ with recovered

Book Title: The Political Unconscious-Narrative as a Socially Symbolic Act
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): JAMESON FREDRIC
Abstract: Jameson applies his interpretive theory to nineteenth- and twentieth-century texts, including the works of Balzac, Gissing, and Conrad. Throughout, he considers other interpretive approaches to the works he discusses, assessing the importance and limitations of methods as different as Lacanian psychoanalysis, semiotics, dialectical analysis, and allegorical readings. The book as a whole raises directly issues that have been only implicit in Jameson's earlier work, namely the relationship between dialectics and structuralism, and the tension between the German and the French aesthetic traditions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt1287f8w

[4] Making News in the Eighteenth Century from: News and Politics in the Age of Revolution
Abstract: An eighteenth-century Italian engraving shows the offices of a Florentine gazette contemporary with the Gazette de Leyde, theNotizie del mondo. Dressed in wigs and knee-breeches, going over their copy with quill pens, the editors seem to have little in common with their twentieth-century journalistic descendants. But the excitement with which the two men on the left are perusing the bulletins that have just come in and the evident haste with which the seated editors are marking up copy for the printers in the background indicate that some aspects of the news business have not changed. Twice a week, for

[5] Producing a Newspaper in the Eighteenth Century from: News and Politics in the Age of Revolution
Abstract: Once he had selected the news and documents destined for each issue of the paper, Jean Luzac’s personal role in the production of the Gazette de Leydewas at an end. Unlike Benjamin Franklin in Philadelphia in the 1730s, most of the European newspaper editors of the eighteenth century were incapable of setting type or operating a printing press. Nor did they usually have much to do with the distribution of the printed copies or the management of their enterprise’s business affairs. Yet all these aspects of newspaper production vitally affected the content of newspapers and their impact. Jean Luzac

[7] The Gazette de Leyde and the Crises of the 1770s from: News and Politics in the Age of Revolution
Abstract: The year 1772, in which the elder Etienne Luzac summoned his nephew Jean to take over the editorship of the Gazette de Leyde, was a year during which the paper had many crises to report to its widely dispersed readers. In four states—France, Sweden, Denmark, and Poland—fundamental principles of Europe’s long-standing order seemed threatened by governments grasping for unrestrained power. According to historian Franco Venturi, the “republican forms of government and those that protected freedom seemed increasingly unable to resist the thrust of absolutism, of standing armies, of bureaucracy, of the diplomacy of countries where power was the

[9] The Challenge of the French Revolution from: News and Politics in the Age of Revolution
Abstract: One of the ironies of the Gazette de Leyde’s situation during the last years of the Patriot struggle in the Netherlands was that the paper, despite the bitter quarrels in which its publisher was involved, was prospering as never before. The 90 percent of his news space that Jean Luzac did not devote to Dutch politics went to coverage of increasingly dramatic events elsewhere, and although the final collapse of the Patriots in September 1787 was a tragedy for Luzae himself, it freed his newspaper to concentrate even more heavily on other stories. Some of these events in the larger

1: “TASTE AND SEE”: from: Eating Beauty
Abstract: Eating beauty. The title of this book is intentionally ambiguous. It carries, on the one hand, a sinister meaning, for the eating of beauty denotes its frightening, mythic consumption, whether by cunning serpents, monstrous beasts, cannibals, or machines. It recalls the vicious abuse of food and drink and the concomitant destruction of health and humanity, emblematically represented in the gaping glutton and the drunkard sprawled on the sidewalk. Finally it evokes the devouring mouth of the grave, the sepulcher that swallows every beautiful person and thing (in Latin, pulcher), and the horrific mouth of Hell. On the other hand, the

2: THE APPLE AND THE EUCHARIST: from: Eating Beauty
Abstract: When the beauty of the world as one knows it is lost through some personal or communal catastrophe, be it a crippling accident, the death of a loved one, betrayal by a trusted and idealized friend, or some more far reaching disturbance—a terrorist attack that ends in mass destruction, an epidemic, a genocidal uprising, a world war—the ancient question arises anew: How is this possible? What went wrong in the beginning to allow this to happen? How can the beauty that was lost be restored?

4: “ADORNED WITH WOUNDS”: from: Eating Beauty
Abstract: For St. Bonaventure (1221–1274), the stigmatization of St. Francis of Assisi (1182–1226) gave new meaning to the Augustinian question of the beauty of Christus deformis—so much so that the “unprecedented miracle,”¹ whereby the wounds of Christ were imprinted on the hands, feet, and side of thePoverello, became a key that unlocked the beauty of the universe and brought into relief the artistic pattern and providential design of history. Identifying original sin with concupiscence or covetousness in its various forms, Bonaventure discovered a remedy for the restoration of the world’s microcosmic and macro cosmic beauty in a

8: TO (FAIL TO) CONCLUDE: from: Eating Beauty
Abstract: When Simone Weil died in England in August 1943, Edith Stein (1891–1942) was already dead, a Jewish victim of the Nazis in Auschwitz. Stein, one of Edmund Husserl’s most brilliant students, had become Catholic in 1922. For ten years she had lived a devout life as a teacher and scholar, practicing an intense, eucharistic piety. In 1933 she entered the Carmelite cloister in Cologne, choosing for herself a name, “Sister Teresa Benedicta of the Cross,” that evoked the names of Carmel’s two great sixteenth-century reformers, Saints John of the Cross (1542–1591) and Teresa of Ávila (1515–1582), whose

1 THE POLITICS OF MOURNING IN AMERICA: from: Mourning in America
Abstract: In the late morning on Saturday, November 3, 1979, a caravan of Ku Klux Klansmen steered its way through the streets of Greensboro, North Carolina. The thirty-five individuals packed into nine automobiles were on their way to disrupt a scheduled rally in a black public-housing neighborhood that had been planned by the Communist Workers Party (CWP), which had been organizing mill and cafeteria workers along with the Greensboro Association for Poor People (GAPP). Ostensibly, this disruption was to be limited to throwing eggs and making speeches, but the pistols and shotguns packed into the Klansmen’s vehicles bespoke other possibilities. As

Book Title: The Deed of Reading-Literature * Writing * Language * Philosophy
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): STEWART GARRETT
Abstract: To take the measure of literary writing, The Deed of Readingconvenes diverse philosophic commentary on the linguistics of literature, with stress on the complementary work of Stanley Cavell and Giorgio Agamben. Sympathetic to recent ventures in form-attentive analysis but resisting an emphasis on so-called surface reading, Stewart explores not some new formalism but the internal pressures of language in formation, registering the verbal infrastructure of literary prose as well as verse. In this mode of "contextual" reading, the context is language itself. Literary phrasing, tapping the speech act's own generative pulse, emerges as a latent philosophy of language in its own right, whereby human subjects, finding no secure place to situate themselves within language, settle for its taking place in, through, and between them.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt1h4mhkq

CHAPTER 4 When Difference Has Its Home from: Making All the Difference
Abstract: Art restorers use the word pentimentoto refer to what happens when one painting has been painted over another: the earlier painting, over time, may begin to show through.¹ Perhaps it is not surprising that similar reminders of the past appear in legal arguments: lawyers and judges routinely reuse materials from the past in constructing the new. Yet the reappearance of earlier patterns of thought in legal arguments does not always reflect deliberate design.

Prologue from: Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: A thesis of these reflections is that there are two encompassing and complementary movements significantly dominating the development of world culture today, digitization and hermeneutics—which is to say (as will be explained more fully throughout the work)—a fractioning movement and a holistic movement, and that these movements explain something of what has been going on in the development of human beings’ intellectual relationship and concomitant relationships to the world around them, chiefly in highly technologized societies but indirectly through all the world.

3 Affiliations of Hermeneutics with Text from: Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: Words, both oral and textual, as has been seen, can call for interpretation with a certain special urgency. For words themselves are always efforts at explanation, yet insofar as words, spoken or written or printed or processed electronically, never provide total explanation, they invite further interpretation, the completion of the business they have left unfinished. Utterance of any sort is always in some sense un-finished business. One can conclude verbal exchange quite satisfactorily and arrive at truth when what is at stake in a given situation is cleared up. But one could also always ask one more question. This is

3 “A Peculiar Apparatus”: from: Inconceivable Effects
Abstract: “It’s a remarkable [eigentümlicher] piece of apparatus,” reads the first prophetic sentence of Kafka’s 1914 story “In the Penal Colony” (161, 140).¹ It is the officer who speaks this first sentence to the explorer, and in a way, Willa and Edwin Muir’s mistranslation in the Schocken edition is “remarkable” in itself in that, though wrong, they got it just right. For ein eigentümlicher Apparat is, of course, not a “remarkable” but rather a “peculiar” or “singular” or “specific” or “idiosyncratic” apparatus. Yet in the eyes of the officer, the apparatus is indeed not peculiar but simply remarkable—there is nothing

7 A Politics of Enmity: from: Inconceivable Effects
Abstract: Germania Death in Berlin (1956/1971), together with The Battle (1951/1974), Life of Gundling Lessing’s Sleep Dream Cry (1977), and Germania 3 Ghosts at the Dead Man (1995), testifies to Heiner Müller’s intense occupation with German history, particularly the history of violence. The play, which consists of thirteen miscellaneously interrelated scenes, generates a certain politics of enmity—a politics whose poetic itinerary has neither an evident beginning nor an end. We thus may well begin in the middle of the play, in a scene titled “Hommage à Stalin 1,” and we shall, for the time being, “imagine” (vorstellen) “Snow. Battle noise.

1 Atlas Gazed: from: Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images
Abstract: Schmerzlos sind wir und haben fast

2 from: Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images
Abstract: The eclecticism encountered in the previous chapter—the history of cosmology, Hopi ritual, Ovidian metamorphosis, and so on—would seem to discourage any attempt to tie Warburg to a single period or method. Nevertheless, there are good reasons for doing so. Warburg roots his Kulturwissenschaft in the Renaissance. And it is in the Renaissance, but especially late quattrocento Florence, that he discerns most clearly the ability to create metaphoric distance, an ability he would exercise in every intellectual arena he enters.

4 Translating the Symbol: from: Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images
Abstract: It bears repeating: Mnemosyne is largely divorced from iconology as practiced by Warburg’s chief successors, who turn rather to his earlier work for their methodological inspiration.¹ Briefly put, iconology aims to explicate the significance of an individual artwork through the interpretation of the symbolic values attached to compositional or iconographic features. To decipher these contingent features, imbricated as they are in a medieval or humanist culture long since past, great erudition is usually demanded. Yet to grasp next the meaning of the work’s symbolic values, interpretation becomes mostly an intuitive act. This is because iconology tends to regard the individual

5 Metaphorologies: from: Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images
Abstract: As he tried to widen the scope and refine the method of his Kulturwissenschaft, Warburg wrestled with giants whose historiographies had shaped the fields he hoped to map. To begin with, there was J.J. Winckelmann (1717–56), whose neo-Stoic, decidedly aesthetic interpretations of Greek culture and its imitators found “edle Einfalt und stille Größe” not only in the Laocoön statue and Plato’s philosophy, but also in Raphael’s painting.¹ Partly to shake free of Winckelmann’s constricting influence on German art history, Warburg turned to Jacob Burckhardt, whose enormously influential account of Italian Renaissance culture had been increasingly eclipsed increasingly eclipsed in

6 Exemplary Figures and Diagrammatic Thought from: Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images
Abstract: To illustrate better the motives, methods, and rhythms of Mnemosyne, but especially to chart more exactly its metaphoric logic, I want to turn again to the period after Warburg emerged from the sanatorium. Besides reimmersing himself in the cosmographical material that yielded, just before his breakdown, the magisterial essay on sixteenth-century German astrological imagery, Warburg began work in 1924 on a new topic, which eventually became the lecture Italienische Antike im Zeitalter Rembrandts, given at the K.B.W. in May 1926.¹ While only a partial text of the lecture survives, it deserves attention, firstly, because it directly informs panels 70, 71,

Book Title: The Light of Knowledge-Literacy Activism and the Politics of Writing in South India
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Cody Francis
Abstract: The Light of Knowledgeis set primarily in the rural district of Pudukkottai in Tamil Nadu, and it is about activism among laboring women from marginalized castes who have been particularly active as learners and volunteers in the movement. In their endeavors to remake the Tamil countryside through literacy activism, workers in the movement found that their own understanding of the politics of writing and Enlightenment was often transformed as they encountered vastly different notions of language and imaginations of social order. Indeed, while activists of the movement successfully mobilized large numbers of rural women, they did so through logics that often pushed against the very Enlightenment rationality they hoped to foster. Offering a rare behind-the-scenes look at an increasingly important area of social and political activism,The Light of Knowledgebrings tools of linguistic anthropology to engage with critical social theories of the postcolonial state.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt32b5k9

Introduction: from: The Light of Knowledge
Abstract: People in Katrampatti had nowhere to cremate their dead. Or, as the residents of this small, southern Indian hamlet would put it more bluntly, “We’ve got no place to croak” ( maṇṭaippōṭṟatu iṭam illai). The Dalit community of Katrampatti had been allotted a small plot of land some years back to use as a cremation ground, since they were barred from sharing a cremation ground with the caste-Hindus who lived in nearby villages. This land was surrounded by fields owned by the dominant Kallar caste. While the fields were left fallow, no one bothered about the cremation ground’s location. But when

5 Subject to Citizenship: from: The Light of Knowledge
Abstract: Petitioning the state became an act of citizenship for Arivoli Iyakkam activists and their followers in a place where such appeals have long been understood in terms of subjection and even servitude. The literacy movement sought to democratize access to this mode of asserting citizenship by encouraging people who would previously have relied on others to write on their behalf to submit their own petitions at the district headquarters. Explaining the changes she had seen since the beginning of the Arivoli Iyakkam, for example, Sundari, a literacy-movement organizer in Pudukkottai, explained, “Before Arivoli, if village people wanted to give a

Book Title: The Emergency of Being-On Heidegger’s “Contributions to Philosophy”
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): POLT RICHARD
Abstract: The esoteric Contributions to Philosophy, often considered Martin Heidegger's second main work afterBeing and Time, is crucial to any interpretation of his thought. Here Heidegger proposes that being takes place as "appropriation." Richard Polt's independent-minded account of theContributionsinterprets appropriation as an event of emergency that demands to be thought in a "future-subjunctive" mode. Polt explores the roots of appropriation in Heidegger's earlier philosophy; Heidegger's search for a way of thinking suited to appropriation; and the implications of appropriation for time, space, human existence, and beings as a whole. In his concluding chapter, Polt reflects critically on the difficulties of the radically antirationalist and antimodern thought of theContributions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt32b5pr

1 Toward Appropriation from: The Emergency of Being
Abstract: All these preliminaries may seem redundant, since we presumably already know what is at stake in Heidegger’s thinking and what, according to him, lies spoken or unspoken behind every philosophical problem: “the question of being.” But what is this question asking? What topic does Heidegger’s word being indicate, and

2 The Event of Thinking the Event from: The Emergency of Being
Abstract: We have come far enough to see that appropriation demands a unique way of thinking and writing. Ordinarily, to think is to represent entities; but Heidegger wants to think of a coming-to-ownness that could take place between being-there and be-ing. Our task in this chapter is a Wegbesinnung, a meditation on the way (77). This cannot simply be a meditation about the way, a discourse on method, as if we could determine the proper path before setting foot on it. To think about the thinking of appropriation is, at the same time, to think of appropriation itself—and even to

4 Afterthoughts from: The Emergency of Being
Abstract: The text Contributions to Philosophy is one of Heidegger’s thought experiments.¹ One does not refute a thought experiment; one pursues it imaginatively and sees where it leads, without giving up one’s critical awareness. It would be inappropriate to treat Heidegger’s inquiry as nothing but a set of claims to be defended or attacked. Instead, we have to follow the paths it opens and decide as best we can which ones are promising, without assuming in advance that any are dead ends.

Book Title: Outlaw Rhetoric-Figuring Vernacular Eloquence in Shakespeare's England
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Mann Jenny C.
Abstract: A central feature of English Renaissance humanism was its reverence for classical Latin as the one true form of eloquent expression. Yet sixteenth-century writers increasingly came to believe that England needed an equally distinguished vernacular language to serve its burgeoning national community. Thus, one of the main cultural projects of Renaissance rhetoricians was that of producing a "common" vernacular eloquence, mindful of its classical origins yet self-consciously English in character. The process of vernacularization began during Henry VIII's reign and continued, with fits and starts, late into the seventeenth century. However, as Jenny C. Mann shows in Outlaw Rhetoric, this project was beset with problems and conflicts from the start.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7v6gk

Chapter 6 The Mingle-Mangle: from: Outlaw Rhetoric
Abstract: In the following passage from the Institutio oratoria, Quintilian coins the word sardismos to name a stylistic vice otherwise known by the Greek term soraismus, which refers to the mixture of different languages within a single speech. In defining this form of linguistic abuse, Quintilian writes,

Conclusion: from: Outlaw Rhetoric
Abstract: Cicero begins his De inventione worrying about rhetoric’s influence on civil society, confessing that “I have often seriously debated with myself whether men and communities have received more good or evil from oratory and a consuming devotion to eloquence. For when I ponder the troubles in our commonwealth, and run over in my mind the ancient misfortunes of mighty cities, I see that no little part of the disasters were brought about by men of eloquence.”¹ As the proponents of the “plain style” quoted in the previous chapter suggest, the sectarian conflict of the Civil War and its aftermath caused

Book Title: Overkill-Sex and Violence in Contemporary Russian Popular Culture
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): BORENSTEIN ELIOT
Abstract: In Overkill, Eliot Borenstein explores this lurid and often-disturbing cultural landscape in close, imaginative readings of such works asYou're Just a Slut, My Dear!(Ty prosto shliukha, dorogaia!), a novel about sexual slavery and illegal organ harvesting; theNymphotrilogy of books featuring a Chechen-fighting sex addict; and theMad DogandAntikillerseries of books and films recounting, respectively, the exploits of the Russian Rambo and an assassin killing in the cause of justice. Borenstein argues that the popular cultural products consumed in the post-perestroika era were more than just diversions; they allowed Russians to indulge their despair over economic woes and everyday threats. At the same time, they built a notion of nationalism or heroism that could be maintained even under the most miserable of social conditions, when consumers felt most powerless.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7v77v

Chapter Four TO BE CONTINUED: from: Overkill
Abstract: Violent crime in popular entertainment is first and foremost a question of storytelling. On the most basic level, violence demands more story than does sex. Consider, for example, the extreme cases in popular entertainment directed at roughly the same demographic (men): in pornography, storytelling is kept to a minimum, since anything that is not overtly sexual is simply a distraction, and thus sex scenes can be strung together with the flimsiest of narrative threads (“Is that the delivery boy?”). In stories of violence, there is no precise narrative equivalent to pornography, as graphic violence tends to be much more motivated

CONCLUSION: from: Overkill
Abstract: In the summer of 2002, an unknown female duo called Singing Together ( Poiushchie vmeste) released a surprise hit, literally singing the praises of Vladimir Vladimirovich Putin, the man who became president of the Russian Federation after Boris Yeltsin’s unexpected resignation on the last New Year’s Eve of the 1990s. The group’s name was modeled on that of a patriotic, pro-Putin youth group calling itself Moving Together (Idushchie vmeste), which had recently begun crusading for moral purity and national pride. Even at the height of Yeltsin’s popularity, bolstered by the image of Russia’s leader standing defiantly on top of a tank

Book Title: Paradigms for a Metaphorology- Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Savage Robert
Abstract: In Paradigms for a Metaphorology, originally published in 1960 and here made available for the first time in English translation, Hans Blumenberg (1920-1996) approaches these questions by examining the relationship between metaphors and concepts. Blumenberg argues for the existence of "absolute metaphors" that cannot be translated back into conceptual language. These metaphors answer the supposedly naïve, theoretically unanswerable questions whose relevance lies quite simply in the fact that they cannot be brushed aside, since we do not pose them ourselves but find them already posed in the ground of our existence. They leap into a void that concepts are unable to fill.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7v7cn

II Metaphorics of Truth and Pragmatics of Knowledge from: Paradigms for a Metaphorology
Abstract: What Lessing raises here is the question of the truth of metaphor itself. It is self-evident that metaphors like that of the power or impotence of truth do not admit of verification, and that the alternative

IV Metaphorics of the ‘Naked’ Truth from: Paradigms for a Metaphorology
Abstract: While discussing the relationship between truth and rhetoric in the passage, cited in the previous section, from the first chapter of book III of the “Divinae institutiones,” Lactantius comments on the ‘natural’ nakedness of truth. This divinely sanctioned nakedness is tarted up with rhetorical frippery in a manner that is characteristic precisely of the way in which lies manifest themselves: “But since God has willed this to be the nature of the case, that simple and undisguised truth should be more clear, because it has sufficient ornament of itself, and on this account it is corrupted when embellished with adornings

IX Metaphorized Cosmology from: Paradigms for a Metaphorology
Abstract: The impression might arise that our lengthy exemplification of the ‘transition’ from metaphors to concepts (and thus our entire attempt at a typology of metaphor histories) remains beholden to a primitive evolutionary schema. We shall seek to dispel this impression by surveying a type of metaphor history that proceeds in the opposite direction, from concepts to metaphors. With respect to the evidence presented, we must fear having to hear the same reproach once leveled by Lessing against Privy Counselor Klotz: “And how many of them do you suppose that he cites? In all, summa summarum, rightly counted—one.”¹ But we

1. THE HUMAN from: Artifice and Design
Abstract: Part of what it is to be “philosophical” about a subject is to take a long view of it. The view from eternity, seeing the world as a fixed and changeless whole, is a traditional ideal of Western theory. I prefer a timescale more down-to-earth, one that is secular, evolutionary, and unrepentantly anthropocentric: the time since the appearance of bipedal hominids, about 4.5 million years ago; since the first species of the Homo genus, about 2.5 million years ago; and since the consolidation of the modern sapiens mutation, about 160,000 years ago. My scientific perspective is that of Darwinian evolution,

2. THE TECHNICAL from: Artifice and Design
Abstract: The theory of tools and technical action is poorly developed in Western philosophy. There has been little advance over the ideas of Aristotle, which contain serious errors. Another source of misunderstanding is the “well-known fact” that lots of species use tools, especially chimpanzees. This chapter is partly a critique of prevailing ideas about tools and artifacts. I want to show the need for a new take on the basic concepts of technological civilization, including artifact, artifice, technique, and tool. One topic I will not be discussing is “modern” or advanced, scientific technology. I leave that to chapter 4. This chapter

Book Title: The Total Work of Art in European Modernism- Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Roberts David
Abstract: In this groundbreaking book, David Roberts sets out to demonstrate the centrality of the total work of art to European modernism since the French Revolution. The total work of art is usually understood as the intention to reunite the arts into the one integrated whole, but it is also tied from the beginning to the desire to recover and renew the public function of art. The synthesis of the arts in the service of social and cultural regeneration was a particularly German dream, which made Wagner and Nietzsche the other center of aesthetic modernism alongside Baudelaire and Mallarmé.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7v9cg

Introduction from: The Total Work of Art in European Modernism
Abstract: This is the first book in English to treat the total work of art as a key concept in aesthetic modernism, and, as far as I can see, the first to attempt an overview of the theory and history of the total work in European art since the French Revolution. It is therefore both an ambitious and necessarily preliminary undertaking, in which my guiding concern has been to demonstrate the significance of the idea of the total work for modern art and politics. The term “total work of art” translates the German Gesamtkunstwerk,coined by Wagner in the wake of

Conclusion from: The Total Work of Art in European Modernism
Abstract: In his memorable parable of the downfall of art since the spiritual synthesis of the Gothic cathedral, Adolf Behne captures the sense of loss that haunts modern art (see chapter 7). He charts the spirit’s descent from collective creation to the individual artwork as a progressive materialization that finally imprisons art in the picture frame, apt symbol of the framing of art as aesthetic object and valuable commodity. The frame, with its separating and isolating function, appears as the antithesis of the lost unity of the arts—the recurrent reminder that the commercialization of production and the privatization of reception

Book Title: Habits of the Heartland-Small-Town Life in Modern America
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Macgregor Lyn C.
Abstract: Although most Americans no longer live in small towns, images of small-town life, and particularly of the mutual support and neighborliness to be found in such places, remain powerful in our culture. In Habits of the Heartland, Lyn C. Macgregor investigates how the residents of Viroqua, Wisconsin, population 4,355, create a small-town community together. Macgregor lived in Viroqua for nearly two years. During that time she gathered data in public places, attended meetings, volunteered for civic organizations, talked to residents in their workplaces and homes, and worked as a bartender at the local American Legion post.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7z6pd

Introduction from: Habits of the Heartland
Abstract: Viroqua, population 4,335,¹ sits among the many hills and ridges of southwest Wisconsin’s Driftless Area, so called because of the hills left in place when the last wave of Ice Age glaciers passed the area by. Viroqua is the seat of Vernon County, and it lies about twenty miles from the Mississippi River, directly east of the Iowa-Minnesota border on the river’s opposite shore. It is a two-hour drive northwest from Madison, Wisconsin’s state capital, and three hours from the Twin Cities in Minnesota, though residents advise allowing four hours if you are catching a flight at the St. Paul–

[Part I Introduction] from: Habits of the Heartland
Abstract: The first feature of Viroqua to make a deep impression on me was the larger-than-life fiberglass bull that stared sternly out over drivers on Highway 14 as they entered the town from the south. The bull advertised what was, at the time of my first visit in December 2000, a restaurant called Ricky’s. Passing the bull and heading into the downtown proper, I passed the VFW hall on the right, the Century 21 real estate office on the left and, shortly after that, the Latter-day Saints church, the optometry office, the Vernon County Historical Society Museum, and Vernon Memorial Hospital,

6 Beneficent Enterprise and Viroquan Exceptionalism from: Habits of the Heartland
Abstract: In their relations with each other, [Springdale’s] businessmen are highly suspicious and distrustful. They scrutinize each

7 Retail Morality from: Habits of the Heartland
Abstract: Maridene Olson, owner of Bonnie’s Wedding Center smiled sympathetically, but said only, “Let’s get you back and try it on. Did you bring your shoes so we can mark the hem?” As she said this, Maridene gathered up the offending dress and its garment bag, and led the reluctant bridesmaid toward the dressing room. As she walked past the chair she had provided for me to sit in to

Epilogue and Conclusion from: Habits of the Heartland
Abstract: By 2009 many things had changed in Viroqua, though much was the same as well. The locally owned pharmacies closed after the arrival of a Walgreens. The Macasaet family transformed the Clark/Peterson building into an indoor “European style” market in which a number of local entrepreneurs opened new businesses. The Blue Diamond Café closed, and the building was reopened as a Mexican restaurant. Controversy was stirred by the proposal of an Illinois company to place a high-density dairy operation on sites relatively close to residences and smaller farms near Viroqua’s border with Westby.

Chapter 6 Truth from: Meaning, Truth, and Reference in Historical Representation
Abstract: In the previous chapters it was argued that representation leaves no room for propositional truth. This raises the question whether this should be our last word about historical truth. Since historians themselves do not hesitate to apply the notion of truth to historical writing and since the practice of historical writing amply supports their confidence in historical truth, we cannot leave this issue undiscussed. Perhaps we can think of an alternative to propositional truth that agrees with the relevant facts about historical representation.¹

Chapter 9 Experience (I) from: Meaning, Truth, and Reference in Historical Representation
Abstract: As far as I know, the Dutch historian Johan Huizinga (1872–1945) has until now been the only theorist of historical writing to take seriously the notion of historical experience.¹ This is not surprising, since there seems to be near-unanimous agreement that the experience of the past is of no use for a proper explanation of historical writing and of how it came into being. Or, to be more precise, all that the existing philosophy of history has on offer is a theory denying that there could be such a thing as an experience of the past at all. A

Chapter 2 A Mourning Happiness: from: Mourning Happiness
Abstract: The Solonian judgment of happiness need not be restricted to a particular social context or sedimented into a formalized social ritual. Any such formalization of the judgment of happiness into a habitual practice, not arising from the initiative of the community but from the obligation of social custom, always risks undermining the very responsibility it seeks to instill, because it requires the performance of an action that is responsible only insofar as it is not compelled. There is no institution that escapes this aporia. Nevertheless, the existence of an institution also testifies to the social currency of particular practices. It

Chapter 3 Difficult Happiness: from: Mourning Happiness
Abstract: The audacity of Solon’s pronouncement is that it imagines a happiness that is possible for finite beings. Solon’s proverb simply requires that we judge a life’s narrative as we find it: is this life happy or unhappy? It does not specify any content to happiness in advance. Nor does it specify any criteria for happiness that would place it out of the reach of a finite being, such as the continuity of pleasure or satisfaction or the optimization of wealth. The hermeneutic of happiness is not a quest for perfection or a pure state, since there is nothing uncontaminated in

Chapter 9 Kantian Ethics and the Discourses of Modernity from: Mourning Happiness
Abstract: The trial narrative paradigm achieves its most radical development and rigorous theorization in Kant’s writings on ethics, politics, history, and religion.¹ When Kant’s thought is interrogated from the perspective of the trial narrative, not only do we gain unconventional insight into the underlying narrative structure of his theories, but we also discover surprising continuities between the eighteenth-century novel, sentimentalism, and Kantian ethics.² Indeed, I would argue that novels such as Pamela and Julie are the imaginative precondition for the emergence of Kantian ethics, just as Kant theorizes one of the most important narrative developments in the eighteenth century.³ Among his

Book Title: The Aesthetics of Antichrist-From Christian Drama to Christopher Marlowe
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): PARKER JOHN
Abstract: The Antichrist myth in particular tells of an impostor turned prophet: performing Christ's life, he reduces the godhead to a special effect yet in so doing foretells the real second coming. Medieval audiences, as well as Marlowe's, could evidently enjoy the constant confusion between true Christianity and its empty look-alikes for that very reason: mimetic degradation anticipated some final, as yet deferred revelation. Mere theater was a necessary prelude to redemption. The versions of the myth we find in Marlowe and earlier drama actually approximate, John Parker argues, a premodern theory of the redemptive effect of dramatic representation itself. Crossing the divide between medieval and Renaissance theater while drawing heavily on New Testament scholarship, Patristics, and research into the apocrypha, The Aesthetics of Antichristproposes a wholesale rereading of pre-Shakespearean drama.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7zk8k

INTRODUCTION: from: The Aesthetics of Antichrist
Abstract: Antichrist appears by name first in the Johannine epistles and not again for about a hundred years.¹ By then a lot had happened. To flesh out the figure certain passages in scripture, originally unrelated, had to be connected. Extrapolation ran rampant. The lawless “man of sin” or “son of perdition” predicted to arrive before the innocent son of God could lawfully second his first appearance (2 Thess. 2:3, 8); the sea monster foretold by John to star in a devilish trinity comprising itself, a Dragon, and land beast (Rev. 11:7, 13:1–10);² the pseudo-Christs and false prophets enshrined throughout the

1 Transformations of the Word and Alienation from: Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: Orality, Writing, and Disjuncture Alienation, a favorite diagnosis variously applied to modem man’s plight since at least Hegel and Feuerbach, has not been commonly thought of in terms of the technological history of the word, although some attention, more analytic than historical or clinical, has been given by structuralists to certain tensions attendant on writing.¹ Yet it would appear that the technological inventions of writings, print, and electronic verbalization, in their historical effects, are connected with and have helped bring about a certain kind of alienation within the human lifeworld. This is not at all to say that these inventions

11 Voice and the Opening of Closed Systems from: Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: Studies in this book have treated the history of the word often, though not entirely, in tenus of sequestration, interposition, diaeresis or division, alienation, and closed fields or systems. The history of the word since its encounter and interaction with technology when the first writing systems were devised some six thousand years ago has been largely a matter of such separations and systems. By comparison with oral speech, writing is itself a closed system: a written text exists on its own, physically separate from any speaker or hearer, as no real spoken word can exist. Print creates a world even

Book Title: Studies in Medievalism XXIV-Medievalism on the Margins
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Montoya Alicia C.
Abstract: This volume not only defines medievalism's margins, as well as its role in marginalizing other fields, ideas, people, places, and events, but also provides tools and models for exploring those issues and indicates new subjects to which they might apply. The eight opening essays address the physical marginalizing of medievalism in annotated texts on medieval studies; the marginalism of oneself via medievalism; medievalism's dearth of ecotheory and religious studies; academia's paucity of pop medievalism; and the marginalization of races, ethnicities, genders, sexual orientations, and literary characters in contemporary medievalism. The seven subsequent articles build on this foundation while discussing: the distancing of oneself (and others) during imaginary visits to the Middle Ages; lessons from the margins of Brazilian medievalism; mutual marginalization among factions of Spanish medieval studies; and medievalism in the marginalization of lower socio-economic classes in late-eighteenth- and early nineteenth-century Spain, of modern gamers, of contemporary laborers, and of Alfred Austin, a late-nineteenth- and early twentieth-century poet also known as Alfred the Little. In thus investigating the margins of and marginalization via medievalism, the volume affirms their centrality to the field. Karl Fugelso is Professor of Art History at Towson University in Baltimore, Maryland. Contributors: Nadia R. Altschul, Megan Arnott, Jaume Aurell, Juan Gomis Coloma, Elizabeth Emery, Vincent Ferré, Valerie B. Johnson, Alexander L. Kaufman, Erin Felicia Labbie, Vickie Larsen, Kevin Moberly, Brent Moberly, Alicia C. Montoya, Serina Patterson, Jeff Rider, Lindsey Simon-Jones, Richard Utz, Helen Young.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt12879b0

Medievalism Studies and the Subject of Religion from: Studies in Medievalism XXIV
Author(s) Utz Richard
Abstract: In 2013, Cynthia Cyrus published a monograph entitled Received Medievalisms: A Cognitive Geography of Viennese Women’s Conventsin Palgrave’s “The New Middle Ages” series.¹ In her study, Cyrus describes and examines the complex cultural history of reception of women’s monastic communities from the Ottoman siege of Vienna in 1529 through the nineteenth century. Focusing mainly on Augustinian, Premonstratensian, Clarissan, Penitent, and Cistercian monastic houses, she investigates an extensive panoply of multimodal references (visual: as in cartographical plans and various pictorial representations; verbal: as in travel literature, topographies, anecdotes, and legends) and fully fledged “foundation stories” (formal histories told to relate

Whiteness and Time: from: Studies in Medievalism XXIV
Author(s) Young Helen
Abstract: Nestled among the concrete, glass, and steel skyscrapers in the central business district of Perth, Western Australia, the mock Tudor frontage of “Ye London Court” is, at first sight, a curious landmark. Completed in 1937, the cobbled pedestrian mall compresses history, time, and place. A plaque at the entrance commemorates 1997 as both the 60th anniversary of the space and the 600th anniversary of the election of Dick Whittington as Lord Mayor of London. “Ye London Court” is just one of the many examples littered throughout the Australian landscape of medievalism being employed to foster connections between the antipodes and

Echoes from the Middle Ages: from: Studies in Medievalism XXIV
Author(s) Gomis Juan
Abstract: When the printer Antón de Centenera published Gómez Manrique’s Regimiento de príncipesin 1482, he could hardly have imagined that he was creating a new publishing line whose fortune in Spain would extend over four centuries. Since it was only a short work, Centenera used a single sheet for it, producing the first known pliego suelto in Spain: cordel literature was thus inaugurated.² In the first few years,pliegos sueltoswere used only to distribute short works of poetry among the court elite, but in the early sixteenth century astute printers realized the great profits that they could make by

Antiquarianism over Presentism: from: Studies in Medievalism XXIV
Author(s) Aurell Jaume
Abstract: It has been rightly argued that there is a difference between the historical and the historiographical Middle Ages, this second generally called “medievalism,” that is, the application of medieval models to contemporary needs, and the inspiration provided by the Middle Ages in all forms of postmedieval art and thought.¹ It can also be said, using different words, that modern medieval historians cannot escape (probably they shouldnot escape) their own context, and they have to describe, analyze, interpret not only what happened in the Middle Ages, but also the projection of what really happened in the past depending on the

The Middle Ages Are within Your Grasp: from: Studies in Medievalism XXIV
Author(s) Rider Jeff
Abstract: Today, the Middle Ages might be conveniently defined as the study of the events and artifacts in Europe (more or less) between 500 and 1500 (more or less) that still survive, and our interactions with them. Countless medieval acts of various kinds have been incorporated, and survive as what Bruno Latour has called “actants,” in our present institutions, artifacts, and gestures, but they are so combined with so many other actants that it is impossible to disentangle the medieval actants from the others, and meaningless to do so, since in these cases their value lies not in their historical difference,

Book Title: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Koepke Wulf
Abstract: Johann Gottfried Herder (1744-1803) is one of the great names of the classical age of German literature. One of the last universalists, he wrote on aesthetics, literary history and theory, historiography, anthropology, psychology, education, and theology; translated and adapted poetry from ancient Greek, English, Italian, even from Persian and Arabic; collected folk songs from around the world; and pioneered a better understanding of non-European cultures. A student of Kant's, he became Goethe's mentor in Strasbourg, and was a mastermind of the Sturm und Drang and a luminary of classical Weimar. But the wide range of Herder's interests and writings, along with his unorthodox ways of seeing things, seems to have prevented him being fully appreciated for any of them. His image has also been clouded by association with political ideologies, the proponents of which ignored the message of Humanität in his texts. So although Herder is acknowledged by scholars to be one of the great thinkers of European Enlightenment, there is no up-to-date, comprehensive introduction to his works in English, a lacuna this book fills with seventeen new, specially commissioned essays. Contributors: Hans Adler, Wulf Koepke, Steven Martinson, Marion Heinz and Heinrich Clairmont, John Zammito, Jürgen Trabant, Stefan Greif, Ulrich Gaier, Karl Menges, Christoph Bultmann, Martin Keler, Arnd Bohm, Gerhard Sauder, Robert E. Norton, Harro Müller-Michaels, Günter Arnold, Kurt Kloocke, and Ernest A. Menze. Hans Adler is Halls-Bascom Professor of Modern Literature Studies at the University of Wisconsin-Madison. Wulf Koepke is Distinguished Professor Emeritus of German, Texas A&M University and recipient of the Medal of the International J. G. Herder Society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt14brrn7

4: Herder’s Concept of Humanität from: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Adler Hans
Abstract: Johann Gottfried Herder has long been known for having developed groundbreaking concepts of thought as well as having modified those of others decisively. Humanitätis—along with concepts such as origin, history, culture, Volk, and language—one of the core concepts of Herder’s works. As a matter of fact,Humanitätis Herder’s all-encompassing concept. All his thinking, writing, and actions were centered around it. In short: Herder was the philosopher ofHumanität.Not only has Herder often been called “the philosopher of humanity”; he has also been accused of being the proponent of a vague “philanthropy.”¹ The fact that scholars

8: Particular Universals: from: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Menges Karl
Abstract: When Johann Gottfried Herder at the age of twenty-two stepped onto the literary scene with his first major publication, the fragments Über die neuere deutsche Literatur(1766), he did so with a mixture of appropriate modesty and youthful self-assurance. His text, supposedly, was meant to be no more than a “supplement” to one of the most important critical projects of eighteenth-century Germany, that is, theBriefe, die neueste Literatur betreffend(1759–65), which were written and edited by such luminaries as Lessing, Mendelssohn, Nicolai, and Abbt, among others. The occasion for the composition of theLiteraturbriefewas the Seven Years’

11: Herder’s Theology from: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Kessler Martin
Abstract: Among the theologians of the late eighteenth century, Herder combines a unique variety of traditional elements with highly progressive and innovative components. His publications touch on most classical fields of academic education as well as the broad range of professional interests typical of the Protestant clergy. Herder expanded the frontiers of academic theology, exploring and interpreting results of contemporary debates in the humanities and sciences. Within the boundaries of a transitory period characterized by rationalist, empirical, and idealistic currents of thought, Herder investigated the various positions by addressing a wide range of fundamental questions. Striving for popularity and practical applications

15: Herder as Critical Contemporary from: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Norton Robert E.
Abstract: To an extraordinary and perhaps even singular degree, Herder’s life and work are defined by the practice, function, and meaning of criticism. Despite the numerous other roles he occupied — and there were many: theologian, philosopher, linguist, historian, ethnographer, to name only a few — it was in his activity as a critic that Herder revealed his greatest strengths and arguably produced his most lasting achievements. Indeed, one might reasonably argue that Herder approached virtually everything he did asa critic, that his thinking and expression as a whole are a reflection or product of a fundamentally critical habit of mind. It

17: Herder’s Reception and Influence from: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Menze Ernest A.
Abstract: The study of the reception of and influences on literature is relatively new and, for the works of many authors, has hardly begun. Current literature tends to receive the most attention. In the past, literary works were often co-opted for ideological reasons and in the process misinterpreted and distorted; this was the case with Johann Gottfried Herder through the nineteenth and well into the twentieth century. Ultimately, Herder was discredited by nationalist perversion of his works during the National-Socialist era. Whereas there are several studies dealing with Herder’s early-twentieth-century reception history, little has been done regarding Herder’s influence in earlier

Introduction: from: A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) McAVOY LIZ HERBERT
Abstract: The above quotation, taken from a 1934 novel by Enid Dinnis, the main character of which is based loosely on the figure of Julian of Norwich, speaks volumes for the ‘industry’ of imaginative projection which Julian has become during the course of the last century or so. The very fact that this now obscure novel reached its sixth imprint in 1934 attests to its contemporary popularity and to a burgeoning fascination with Julian and the anchoritic life which she embraced. Since that time, Julian has become an increasingly familiar figure within both literary and non-literary circles, and both religious and

2 ‘A recluse atte Norwyche’: from: A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) GUNN CATE
Abstract: We know nothing conclusive about Julian’s early life, but she indicates that she had been devout since her youth; if Julian’s childhood and youth had been spent in Norwich, how would the experiences of her early life have fed her devotional life and possibly informed her visions? Among the evidence that Norman tanner cites in support of his claim that Norwich may have been ‘Europe’s most; religious city’¹ is the number of hermits and anchorites supported by the city in the high middle Ages. Pre-eminent among these anchorites is Julian herself, the ‘star attraction’² of the spiritual life of Norwich.

3 ‘No such sitting’: from: A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) BARRATT ALEXANDRA
Abstract: Devotion to the Trinity was growing in the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries: ‘In 1334 Pope John XXII set aside the first Sunday after Pentecost as Trinity Sunday. Increasing devotion to the Trinity can also be seen in the many prayers addressed to the Trinity’.¹ Theology, however, did not necessarily keep pace. In his study of the doctrine of the Holy Trinity, Thomas Marsh has claimed: ‘In spite of the formal, notional acknowledgement of the doctrine, a real understanding of God as Trinity practically disappeared from the Christian consciousness of the Middle Ages’.² This sweeping condemnation, however, ignores the notable contribution

11 Julian of Norwich’s ‘Modernist Style’ and the Creation of Audience from: A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) ROBERTSON ELIZABETH
Abstract: Given the prominence of Julian of Norwich’s writing in the canon of English literature, it is surprising how little we know about her audience in general. Neither historical nor manuscript evidence reveals much about her contemporary audience. To determine who read or heard her work, either as a written or oral composition, we need to consider such questions as who Julian was, who wrote down her story in its short form and then in its longer and more considered version, for whom she intended these versions, and who actually received them. Despite the fact that these questions yield only fragmentary

16 Julian’s Afterlives from: A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) SALIH SARAH
Abstract: Academic interest in her has increased rapidly since the mid twentieth century, and she is now a fixture in the academic canons of the Middle English mystics, of medieval women writers and of vernacular theologians. However,

The Composite Nature of Eleventh-Century Homiliaries: from: Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts
Author(s) CORRADINI ERIKA
Abstract: The production of English vernacular homilies in the eleventh century has often been studied with regard to textual transmission and adaptation. Much focus has been placed on the eleventh-century practices of adapting earlier sources to the needs of new users, and to studying the different purposes underlying the original production of, for instance, Ælfric and Wulfstan.¹ These studies provide invaluable evidence regarding the interests and concerns of those preachers who were interested in using Ælfric and Wulfstan’s homiletic texts in the eleventh and early twelfth centuries. However, the form in which such adaptations of earlier homilies were collected physically and

The Power and the Glory: from: Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts
Author(s) CRICK JULIA
Abstract: Historians of the modern and pre-modern worlds have often sought to make connections between the boundaries of states and the shape of their respective historiographies; in recent years they have scrutinised archival processes and the preservation of artefacts of the past, and they and their literary peers have examined the historical narratives which imposed order on the past and gave meaning to its remains.¹ National historiographies are thus commonly ascribed active properties, as means by which elites might recognise and realise a collective future for their nation, stifle opposing views and assert a common will. If we accept the general

The Ellesmere Manuscript: from: Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts
Author(s) EDWARDS A. S. G.
Abstract: TO BEGIN WITH THE OBVIOUS: Geoffrey Chaucer enjoys a foundational status as ‘the father of English poetry’ and the Canterbury Taleshas been the most popular of his works. Over eighty manuscripts of it survive, complete, selected or fragmentary; and the earlier existence of a much larger number can be confidently inferred from a variety of evidence.¹ No English poetic work occurs in more fifteenth-century copies. In addition, it was the earliest major such work in English to be printed and the only medieval English one to have been consistently republished over the centuries since Chaucer’s death. In terms of

Descriptive Bibliography and Electronic Publication from: Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts
Author(s) GANTS DAVID L.
Abstract: As part of a session at the 1977 Annual Meeting of the Association of American University Presses, five scholarly publishers prepared business plans for an imagined work entitled No Time for Houseplants, by Purvis Mulch. The University Presses at Chicago, MIT, North Carolina, Texas and Toronto each presented detailed procedures for the acquisition, editing, design, production and marketing of this made-up book. Published asOne Book / Five Waysa year later, the results of the experiment illustrate how the physical embodiment of a single verbal text can display quite different stylistic and bibliographical characteristics. Each press brought to the

Problematising Textual Authority in the York Register from: Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts
Author(s) STANAVAGE LIBERTY
Abstract: Recent work on medieval textuality has disrupted the popular notion that books in the Middle Ages were universally treated with reverence as almost magical objects, although the notion remains disturbingly persistent.¹ The past two decades have seen an increasing interest in destabilised texts, in reified meanings and in marginalia and glosses as a component of the text, rather than a defacement. Critics such as Peter Diehl, Siân Echard, Ralph Hanna and Carol Braun Pasternack have suggested variant editorial practices that recognise the complexity of texts, rather than reducing them to a single ‘correct’ edition.² Other critics have argued the need

Book Title: Aesthetic Vision and German Romanticism-Writing Images
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Prager Brad
Abstract: The work of the groundbreaking writers and artists of German Romanticism -- including the writers Tieck, Brentano, and Eichendorff and the artists Caspar David Friedrich and Philipp Otto Runge -- followed from the philosophical arguments of the German Idealists, who placed emphasis on exploring the subjective space of the imagination. The Romantic perspective was a form of engagement with Idealist discourses, especially Kant's Critique of Pure Reason and Fichte's Science of Knowledge. Through an aggressive, speculative reading of Kant, the Romantics abandoned the binary distinction between the palpable outer world and the ungraspable space of the mind's eye and were therefore compelled to develop new terms for understanding the distinction between "internal" and "external." In this light, Brad Prager urges a reassessment of some of Romanticism's major oppositional tropes, contending that binaries such as "self and other," "symbol and allegory," and "light and dark," should be understood as alternatives to Lessing's distinction between interior and exterior worlds. Prager thus crosses the boundaries between philosophy, literature, and art history to explore German Romantic writing about visual experience, examining the interplay of text and image in the formulation of Romantic epistemology. Brad Prager is Associate Professor of German at the University of Missouri, Columbia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt169wdp2

1: Interior and Exterior: from: Aesthetic Vision and German Romanticism
Abstract: Although Lessing was not a Romantic, his writings were important precursors to Romantic thought, especially his 1766 essay on the subject of the Laocoon, which served as a foundational moment in the Romantic discourse on the perception of art. The following chapter provides background for my general argument in that it explores the philosophical consequences of Lessing’s assertions about vision, art, and the exterior world. His observations concerning theLaocoonsculpture argue against the power of works of art as they are found “in the outside world” and instead favor aesthetic experience as it is said to occur in the

2: Image and Phantasm: from: Aesthetic Vision and German Romanticism
Abstract: For the Romantics the canvas and the written page were sites of contestation, spaces on which ephemeral experience was said to be represented in the material world. Art, understood in these terms, became the middle point or stage upon which something absent and intangible was made to appear present and graspable. It was, in other words, a material invocation of a sphere unavailable to the senses. In the following chapter I attempt to reconstruct the model of aesthetic perception in the work of Wackenroder and Tieck in light of the epistemological and perceptual categories laid out by Lessing’s essay on

5: Light and Dark: from: Aesthetic Vision and German Romanticism
Abstract: Philipp Otto Runge saw himself as the apostle of a new Romantic religion. He was undisputedly Christian, but his primary object of veneration was less the martyr’s passion than the interconnectedness of man and nature. He was dissatisfied with the contemporary arts — which, in his view, demurred from presenting the unfolding of the natural world — and considered Weimar Classicism a flight into the past. He saw classicism’s failure primarily in its lack of attention to color. Using Jacob Böhme’s theology of light and dark as a basis, Runge developed his own approach to religious painting. For him a

Book Title: Cultural Performances in Medieval France-Essays in Honor of Nancy Freeman Regalado
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Burns E. Jane
Abstract: This collection of essays pays tribute to Nancy Freeman Regalado, a ground-breaking scholar in the field of medieval French literature whose research has always pushed beyond disciplinary boundaries. The articles in the volume reflect the depth and diversity of her scholarship, as well as her collaborations with literary critics, philologists, historians, art historians, musicologists, and vocalists - in France, England, and the United States. Inspired by her most recent work, these twenty-four essays are tied together by a single question, rich in ramifications: how does performance shape our understanding of medieval and pre-modern literature and culture, whether the nature of that performance is visual, linguistic, theatrical, musical, religious, didactic, socio-political, or editorial? The studies presented here invite us to look afresh at the interrelationship of audience, author, text, and artifact, to imagine new ways of conceptualizing the creation, transmission, and reception of medieval literature, music, and art. EGLAL DOSS-QUINBY is Professor of French at Smith College; ROBERTA L. KRUEGER is Professor of French at Hamilton College; E. JANE BURNS is Professor of Women's Studies and Adjunct Professor of Comparative Literature at the University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill. Contributors: ANNE AZÉMA, RENATE BLUMENFELD-KOSINSKI, CYNTHIA J. BROWN, ELIZABETH A. R. BROWN, MATILDA TOMARYN BRUCKNER, E. JANE BURNS, ARDIS BUTTERFIELD, KIMBERLEE CAMPBELL, ROBERT L. A. CLARK, MARK CRUSE, KATHRYN A. DUYS, ELIZABETH EMERY, SYLVIA HUOT, MARILYN LAWRENCE, KATHLEEN A. LOYSEN, LAURIE POSTLEWATE, EDWARD H. ROESNER, SAMUEL N. ROSENBERG, LUCY FREEMAN SANDLER, PAMELA SHEINGORN, HELEN SOLTERER, JANE H. M. TAYLOR, EVELYN BIRGE VITZ, LORI J. WALTERS, AND MICHEL ZINK.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt169wfdd

Introduction from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Doss-Quinby Eglal
Abstract: This collection of essays recognizes the accomplishments of one of the path-breaking senior women in the field of medieval French literature, Nancy Freeman Regalado, who has been on the faculty of New York University since 1968.

Colin Muset and Performance from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Rosenberg Samuel N.
Abstract: More than is commonly the case in the trouvèrerepertory, the songs attributable to Colin Muset ask to be understood in terms of performance. Nothing is more banal than a poem that begins,Chanter m’estuet(Gace Brulé, Blondel de Nesle, et al.), and even incipit expansions such asOnques maiz nus hom ne chanta / En la maniere que je chant(Never before has any man sung as I sing [Blondel de Nesle]) andJ’ai souvent d’Amors chanté; / Oncore en chant(I have often sung of Love; I still sing of it [Gillebert de Berneville]) abound in the repertory.

Subtilitas and Delectatio: from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Roesner Edward H.
Abstract: The later medieval motet has long been known for its technical virtuosity and intricate design, and for verbal and musical content of extraordinary subtlety. It is only relatively recently, however, that scholars have begun seriously to look for evidence of comparable sophistication in the large and diverse corpus of motets surviving from the thirteenth century, when the motet emerged as a distinct genre. This essay will contribute to the exploration of the thirteenth-century motet, focusing on a single two-voice composition to make its points: Ne m’a pas oublié / In seculum, known from a single source, the motet manuscript Montpellier

“Flables couvertes”: from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Taylor Jane H. M.
Abstract: The late medieval lyric is, says Jacqueline Cerquiglini-Toulet, “une pratique sociale”; everyone agrees that in the fifteenth century anyone with the remotest pretensions to social standing – anyone, that is, who aspired to being thought of as joyeux,joly, andgracieux– was expected to be able to turn a neat rondeau or a witty ballade.¹ The adjectives I have just used come from the account in his biography of Boucicaut’s social education: he was, it says, trained in the art of composingbalades, rondeaux, virelais, lais et complaintes d’amoureux sentement.² Charles d’Orléans, on Saint Valentine’s day, could call his court to

Acting Like a Man: from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Campbell Kimberlee
Abstract: For scholars of the Middle Ages, the old French chanson de gestehas traditionally served as the benchmark for one extreme of a continuum of representation, a genre expressing the distilled essence of the medieval masculine. This reading of the epic presumes a transparent equivalence of the masculine with the body and actions of the knight, constructing the “male” as a necessary element in an ideology of chivalric caste and power. Furthermore, this definition of the masculine is, in Simon Gaunt’s words, “monologic,” meaning that “in thechansons de gestemale characters are defined as individuals in relation to other

Amorous Performances: from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Huot Sylvia
Abstract: The vast fourteenth-century prose Roman de Perceforest, a fictional chronicle of pre-Arthurian Britain under Greek rule, offers a fascinating exposition of courtly ideologies.¹ In this essay I will examine a single episode, that of theAventure de l’espee vermeille, which is played out in the course of Book V.² In this adventure, young knights are offered an easy sexual encounter with a beautiful young maiden, and given to believe that it is only through sexual “performance” that they can prove their manhood. As the adventure progresses, however, it becomes increasingly clear that this kind of sexual adventuring is actually antithetical

Performing Vernacular Song in Monastic Culture: from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Duys Kathryn A.
Abstract: Gautier de Coinci cast his Miracles de Nostre Dameas a single long performance.¹ Most of his work calls for narrative recitation of miracle stories composed in octosyllabic rhymed couplets, while his songs, many of which are set to the melodies of thetrouvères’ “greatest-hits,” call for minstrel-like singing.² These performance practices are easily recognizable from secular literary models, romances and love songs, and they are well suited to the recreational purpose of theMiracles de Nostre Dame. As I have argued elsewhere, Gautier explicitly designed his work as a spiritual literary recreation for monks, nuns, and pious laypersons to

Preaching the Sins of the Ladies: from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Postlewate Laurie
Abstract: An important strategy in the method of early Franciscan preachers and poets was to evoke understanding of vice and virtue through concrete and visible examples. In sermons and catechetical texts, Franciscans used stories and poetry full of lively images to describe sin and show it in action; in this way, the Friars Minor provided literary performance of the vices and virtues for the purpose of correcting the sins of lay society.¹ Indeed our understanding today of what “sinful” behavior was for medieval people is greatly enhanced by the depiction and enactment of specific vices in Franciscan literature. The works of

Late Medieval Representations of Storytelling and Story-Performance from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Loysen Kathleen A.
Abstract: The decision to re-enact on the page a scene of oral storytelling is extraordinarily prevalent in late-medieval French literature, as it will continue to be throughout the sixteenth century. Texts such as the anonymous Cent nouvelles nouvelles(1462) and the anonymousÉvangiles des quenouilles(ca. 1470–80)¹ experiment with the staging of oral storytelling in a range of ways, using embedded narratives, the structural device of the frame, and the depiction of storytelling circles. Scenes of oral storytelling are fertile ground for inquiry regarding late medieval practices of story transmission, especially the dynamic relation between performance and audience reception.²

Paratextual Performances in the Early Parisian Book Trade: from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Brown Cynthia J.
Abstract: When Pierre Gringore had the first-known ordonnanceprotecting an author writing in French printed in the colophon of hisFolles entreprisesin December 1505, a new breed of writer was born.¹ Or rather, a new ground-breaking use was made of the paratext of printed books: the author was now featured in defiant fashion. Writers such as Gringore did not suddenly develop a consciousness about the place of prominence they deserved on the literary stage, however. New bookpublishing strategies resulting from the advent of print, in particular innovative paratextual “performances” orchestrated by a bold new class of printers and publishers, played

1 Introduction: from: Middle English Romance and the Craft of Memory
Abstract: Why, indeed, is memory important in medieval romances? This question needs clarification given the many associations and definitions of such a complex cognitive faculty as memory, and the equally wide-ranging scope of this particular literary genre. We should begin by considering what exactly we mean by “memory,” which can be both individual, relating to the thought processes of a single remembering subject, and also collective. To take examples from the romance genre itself, a single knight might be trying desperately to maintain the memory of his love whilst away from home for many years. This is his individual memorial challenge.

7 The Memory of Change: from: Middle English Romance and the Craft of Memory
Abstract: Throughout this study two rules have emerged regarding the process of recollection: firstly, that the past is crucial in shaping responses to a present situation and, secondly, in order for any recollection to be successful, thatpast must be crafted to fit with a current set of circumstances. Certain characters in the previous chapter deliberately denied any such opportunities by imposing boundaries between the present and “true” past or restricting the creative opportunities that were available to form a reconnection with the past. However, when we talk of adapting the present in line with the past, the silent understanding is

CHAPTER 2 The difficulty of Cleanness from: God and the Gawain-Poet
Abstract: Although Pearlis the first poem in its section of MS Cotton Nero, and the first to be discussed in this study, there is a general assumption thatCleannesswas actually the first of the four poems to be composed.¹ The main reason for this may be thatCleannessinitially strikes the reader as a less polished production than the others, uneven in its structure and inconsistent in its message.Cleannessis nevertheless a very powerful and impressive poem. It contains exciting scenes of cataclysmic disaster, vivid passages of descriptive chronicle, direct and earthy expressions of humorous contempt, a lovingly

CHAPTER 4 Sir Gawain and the Green Knight: from: God and the Gawain-Poet
Abstract: once the template is imposed, it becomes tyrannical. It not only excludes other interpretations and clouds perception, but also sends the interpreter off into a multiplication of detailed identifications often so far-fetched that they arouse the amusement or scorn of all except other believers. It demands that everything be reduced to a single set of terms.¹

Book Title: Edinburgh German Yearbook 9-Archive and Memory in German Literature and Visual Culture
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Osborne Dora
Abstract: In recent years, the discourse of memory - and of German memory culture in particular - has become increasingly concerned with questions of the archive. An archive can refer to a physical place, the material found there, or the system that orders this material; in its broadest sense, it might refer to something public (records housed in a municipal building), or something private (photographs in a family album). The material and documentary qualities of the archive confer on it an authenticating function attributed only cautiously to memory, but theories of the archive have questioned the status of material, documentary vestiges of the past. Memory and the archive are inextricably linked, but how does this affect the mediation of the past? This volume explores the changing relationship between memory and the archive in German-language literature and culture since 1945. Contributions approach this topic from a range of perspectives (film, visual culture, urban culture, digital technology, as well as literature) and offer illuminating studies of Harun Farocki, Anselm Kiefer, Thomas Demand, Bernd and Hilla Becher, Jürgen Fuchs, Stefan Wolter, and Sasa Stanisic. Contributors: Priyanka Basu, Carol Anne Costabile-Heming, Regine Criser, Tobias Ebbrecht-Hartmann, Diana Hitzke and Charlton Payne, Caitríona Leahy, Dora Osborne, Annie Ring, Lizzie Stewart, Simon Ward. Dora Osborne is Lecturer in German at Durham University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1814h2s

Between Preservation and Destruction: from: Edinburgh German Yearbook 9
Author(s) Basu Priyanka
Abstract: This essay examines the archival practices of German photographers Bernd and Hilla Becher, focusing on their first decade working together beginning in 1959, during which they produced the earliest iterations of and statements about their ongoing project photographing the industrial structures they termed “anonymous sculpture.” It considers what they meant to achieve in this production by systematically documenting these edifices—pit heads, cooling towers, blast furnaces, water towers, and others used in resource extraction and processing—of the Siegerland and Ruhr regions of central and western Germany. The Bechers keenly sensed that the industries of which these structures were emblems

Thomas Demand’s Nationalgalerie: from: Edinburgh German Yearbook 9
Author(s) Osborne Dora
Abstract: In 2009 Germany celebrated sixty years since the founding of the Federal Republic and twenty years since the fall of the Berlin Wall. That double-anniversary year two exhibitions opened in Berlin: the high-profile, popular show 60 Jahre—60 Werkeat the Martin-Gropius-Bau and a solo show in Mies van der Rohe’s Neue Nationalgalerie by the Munich-born artist Thomas Demand. Demand had been invited to participate in60 Jahre, but, fearing that the show was concerned with things other than art, had declined.¹ It seemed Demand was right: one critic dismissed60 Jahreas “kunsthistorische[r] Blödsinn” (art historical nonsense) and Günter

Echoes from the Archive: from: Edinburgh German Yearbook 9
Author(s) Ebbrecht-Hartmann Tobias
Abstract: Film footage made in the Third Reich and since found in the archive has recently provoked new forms of cinematic engagement with the incriminating images that often emphasize the perpetrator’s perspective on historic events. Georges Didi-Huberman calls these visual remnants of the Nazi past “ill seen images”; “ill seen” because they have been “poorly described, poorly captioned, poorly classed, poorly reproduced, poorly used” by historians as well as filmmakers.¹ In the case of archive films that remain from the Nazi period we are left with footage that is, for the most part, fragmentary and that has sometimes been edited in

Harun Farocki’s Critical Film Archive from: Edinburgh German Yearbook 9
Author(s) Ring Annie
Abstract: Harun Farocki died in Berlin in July 2014 at the height of an unmatched career in political filmmaking. The oeuvre of this graduate of the Deutsche Film und Fernsehakademie (German Film and Television Academy Berlin; dffb) is characterized by a technique of repurposing moving-image archives in a critical documentary mode crafted to reveal the hidden processes of preparation, acculturation, and training that pervasively constitute the present-day West and render its citizens unwittingly yet habitually complicit. In this chapter I focus on Farocki’s works that piece together found footage drawn from such diverse sources as classic Hollywood feature film, prison CCTV

Book Title: Forgotten Dreams-Revisiting Romanticism in the Cinema of Werner Herzog
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Johnson Laurie Ruth
Abstract: Werner Herzog (b. 1942) is perhaps the most famous living German filmmaker, but his films have never been read in the context of German cultural history. And while there is a surfeit of film reviews, interviews, and scholarly articles on Herzog and his work, there are very few books devoted to his films, and none addressing his entire career to date. Until now. Forgotten Dreams offers not only an analytical study of Herzog's films but also a new reading of Romanticism's impact beyond the nineteenth century. It argues that his films re-envision and help us better understand a critical stream in Romanticism, and places the films in conversation with other filmmakers, authors, and philosophers in order to illuminate that critical stream. The result is a lively reconnection with Romantic themes and convictions that have been partly forgotten in the midst of Germany's postwar rejection of much of Romantic thought, yet are still operative in German culture today. The film analyses will interest scholars of film, German Studies, and Romanticism as well as a broader public interested in Herzog's films and contemporary German cultural debates. The book will also appeal to those interested in the ongoing renegotiation - by Western and other cultures - of relationships between reason and passion, civilization and wild nature, knowledge and belief. Laurie Ruth Johnson is Associate Professor of German, Comparative and World Literature, and Criticism and Interpretive Theory at the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt18kr6wj

1: Image and Knowledge from: Forgotten Dreams
Abstract: In the essay “Ruysdael als Dichter” (1816; Ruisdael as Poet), Johann Wolfgang Goethe argues that Jacob van Ruisdael’s images seem to move, and in fact to enact a narrative. Goethe notes that the seventeenth-century painter’s technique is impeccable, but the essay focuses on Ruisdael “as a thinking artist, even as a poet” (als denkenden Künstler, ja als Dichter).¹ “Ruysdael als Dichter” implicitly disputes the conclusions of Gotthold Ephraim Lessing’s Laokoon(1766; Laocoon), which states that painting and sculpture can only imitate plots or narratives, not convey them.² Ruisdael, counters Goethe, indeed can portray movement through time in his painting: his

5: Sound and Silence from: Forgotten Dreams
Abstract: Such sounds as imitate the natural inarticulate voices of men, or any animals in pain or danger, are capable of conveying great ideas; unless it be the well-known voice of some creature, on which we are used to look with contempt. The angry tones of wild beasts are equally capable of causing a great and awful sensation. . . . It might seem that those modulations of sound carry some connection with the nature

Book Title: Verse and Voice in Byrd's Song Collections of 1588 and 1589- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Smith Jeremy L.
Abstract: As he grappled with the challenges of composing for various instrumental and vocal ensembles, William Byrd (c. 1540-1623), England's premier Renaissance composer, devoted considerable attention to the poetry and prose of his native language, producing such treasured masterpieces as the hauntingly beautiful "Lulla lullaby"; the infectiously comedic "Though Amarillis dance in green"; and two extraordinarily dramatic Easter anthems. This book, the first full-length study specifically devoted to Byrd's English-texted music, provides a close reading of all of the works he published in the late 1580s, constituting nearly half of his total song output. It delves into the musical, political, literary, and, specifically, the sequential qualities of Byrd's 1588 and 1589 published collections as a whole, revealing, explaining, and interpreting an overall grand narrative, while remaining fully attentive to the particularities of each individual piece. Often deemed "unliterary" and generally considered political only in his approach to Latin texts, which were often of special interest to his fellow Catholics, Byrd was not only an inspired composer who had mastered the challenges of his nation's burgeoning verse, but also one who used his voice in song to foster a more inclusive polity in a time of religious strife. Jeremy L. Smith is Associate Professor of Musicology at the University of Colorado Boulder.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1bh49c3

CHAPTER 5 Songs of sadnes and pietie from: Verse and Voice in Byrd's Song Collections of 1588 and 1589
Abstract: On the title page of his Psalmes, sonets and songsByrd described the third section of the book as “songs of sadnes and pietie” (BE 12., p. xli). Here, as elsewhere, Byrd’s title does not serve as a completely reliable guide to the nature of the set’s contents. It might easily be assumed that the phrase “sadness and piety” applies to all nine songs in this final section, but a cursory study of the poems suggests that five songs are devoted to “piety” (BE 12: 27–31) and four to “sadness” (BE 12: 32–35) – reversing the topic order

CHAPTER 6 Songs of Three Parts from: Verse and Voice in Byrd's Song Collections of 1588 and 1589
Abstract: In the preface to his Songs of sundrie naturesof 1589 Byrd celebrates the success of hisPsalmes, Sonets,& songsof 1588 – its “good passage and utterance” (BE 13, p. xxxvii) – and offers this happy outcome as his rationale for publishing another set of music of a similar vein. In 1588 he could describe all the works therein as originally composed for a single voice and (four) instruments, although he makes sure to note that he has added texts to all the parts in the edition. As they were so consistent in their scoring and, to some extent,

CHAPTER 8 Songs of Five Parts from: Verse and Voice in Byrd's Song Collections of 1588 and 1589
Abstract: As we begin our discussion of Byrd’s songs of five parts, the penultimate segment of his Songs of sundrie natures, it is worth noting that one of the composer’s proclivities, as a sequence maker, was to provide effective transitions as he moved from section to section. The songs of three parts, for example, ended with “The greedy hawk” (BE 13: 14) seemingly posing the question: Will Cupid strike? In the first four-voiced song, “Is love a boy?” (BE 13: 15), Byrd confirmed that this was indeed the question, and that it would later be answered affirmatively.

CHAPTER 9 Songs of Six Parts from: Verse and Voice in Byrd's Song Collections of 1588 and 1589
Abstract: As we move into the final section of Byrd’s Songs of sundrie naturesit is worth stepping back from the topical stories discussed thus far, involving Mary Queen of Scots and Sir Philip Sidney, to note that this is a collection that begins with biblical material in the songs in three parts and ends with a six-voiced depiction of the Resurrection, in “Christ rising again” | “Christ is risen again” (BE 13: 46–47). It is, in many ways, a satisfying way to draw things to a close, the gradual shift from few to many voices representing a long but

Book Title: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Whitehead Chris
Abstract: Across the global networks of heritage sites, museums, and galleries, the importance of communities to the interpretation and conservation of heritage is increasingly being recognised. Yet the very term "meaningful community engagement" betrays a myriad of contrary approaches and understandings. Who is a community? How can they engage with heritage and why would they want to? How do communities and heritage professionals perceive one another? What does it mean to "engage"? These questions unsettle the very foundations of community engagement and indicate a need to unpick this important but complex trend. Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities critically explores the latest debates and practices surrounding community collaboration. By examining the different ways in which communities participate in heritage projects, the book questions the benefits, costs and limitations of community engagement. Whether communities are engaging through innovative initiatives or in response to economic, political or social factors, there is a need to understand how such engagements are conceptualised, facilitated and experienced by both the organisations and the communities involved.BR> Bryony Onciul is Lecturer in History at the University of Exeter; Michelle Stefano is the Co-Director of Maryland Traditions, the folklife program for the state of Maryland and Visiting Assistant Professor in American Studies at the University of Maryland, Baltimore County; Stephanie Hawke is a project manager and fundraiser, working on a range of projects aiming to engage communities with cultural heritage. Contributors: Gregory Ashworth, Evita Busa, Helen Graham, Julian Hartley, Stephanie Hawke, Carl Hogsden, Shatha Abu Khafajah, Nicole King, Bernadette Lynch, Billie Lythberg, Conal McCarthy, Ashley Minner, Wayne Ngata, Bryony Onciul, Elizabeth Pishief, Gregory Ramshaw, Philipp Schorch, Justin Sikora, Michelle Stefano, Gemma Tully, John Tunbridge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1kgqvrc

Introduction from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Onciul Bryony
Abstract: Across the global networks of heritage sites, museums and galleries, the importance of communities to the interpretation and conservation of heritage is increasingly being recognised. Meaningful community engagement is noted as a worthy institutional goal and is a common requirement of funding bodies. Yet the very term ‘meaningful community engagement’ betrays a myriad of contrary approaches and understandings. Who is a community? How can they engage with heritage? Why would a community want to? How do communities and heritage professionals perceive one another? What does it mean to ‘engage’? These questions unsettle the very foundations of community engagement and indicate

1 The Gate in the Wall: from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Lynch Bernadette
Abstract: There are a number of moments in the Somalian author Nuruddin Farah’s wonderful book Gifts(Farah 2000) in which Duniya, a single mother and nurse working at the hospital in Mogadishu, has cause to question the generosity of others,

3 Interview – John Tunbridge from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Tunbridge John
Abstract: Could you say something about your career so far, focusing on community engagement with heritage?

4 Interview – Gregory Ashworth from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Ashworth Gregory
Abstract: Please could you reflect on your career so far, focusing on your work in relation to how communities engage with heritage?

5 Engaging with Māori and Archaeologists: from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Pishief Elizabeth
Abstract: Understanding what heritage means to community groups is an essential prerequisite for active, creative and successful engagement with them. Heritage is a cultural construct comprising different ideological and material phenomena for diverse groups of people, which means there are innumerable possible heritages, each shaped for the specific user group. However, although there may be an infinite variety of possible heritages, in New Zealand, for example, the dominant Western discourse controls the development of independent heritages. This chapter provides evidence of two different ‘heritages’ and identifies key principles about heritage. A view of heritage has emerged since 2011 that reflects the

6 Horizontality: from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Graham Helen
Abstract: This book is questioningly titled ‘Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities’. Let us think about some of the everyday meanings of ‘engagement’ for a moment.¹ If a toilet is engaged, then it means someone is using it and you cannot; you must wait your turn. If you are engaged to be married, you cannot marry anyone else, and you wear a ring to show this exclusiveness to others. An engaged person is not open to others, or other romantic or sexual possibilities. To want to engagesomeone or something is not, therefore, a neutral act; it is claiming something totally. It is

8 Interview – Evita Buša from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Buša Evita
Abstract: Could you reflect on your career so far, focusing on your work on community engagement?

9 Interview – Shatha Abu Khafajah from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Khafajah Shatha Abu
Abstract: Could you reflect on your career so far, focusing on your work on heritage?

11 Interview – Ashley Minner from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Minner Ashley
Abstract: Well, let me start by saying that I have a strong sense of ‘where I’m from’ and ‘who I’m from’. I am a native Baltimorean – as in, I was born and raised just across the Baltimore City line, in a neighborhood of Dundalk that was once called the ‘Royal Homes’. I grew up on one side of the block; now I live on the other side of the same block. All of the houses began as identical Cape Cod-style concrete bungalows. They were built as temporary housing for soldiers

13 At the Community Level: from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Stefano Michelle L.
Abstract: ‘Intangible cultural heritage’, as defined by the 2003 Convention for the Safeguarding of the Intangible Cultural Heritageof the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO), continues to gain traction as a concept within the international heritage discourse. Despite the fact that a decade has now passed since the enforcement of the 2003 Convention, the issue ofeffectivelysafeguarding intangible cultural heritage (hereafter ICH) remains an important topic of debate at international, national and regional levels.¹ Most importantly, there exists a framework for the safeguarding of ICH that continues to gain international acceptance: the set of guidelines and suggestions

17 Interview – Conal McCarthy from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) McCarthy Conal
Abstract: I have worked in galleries and museums since the late 1980s, in a variety of roles including education, public programmes, exhibition development, collections and curatorial. From 1996 to 2000 I was a developer at Te Papa involved in education, public programmes and interpretation, including discovery centres for children and some temporary exhibitions such as the iwiexhibition with the Te Aupouri people of Northland. Since then I have moved into an academic position in museum and heritage studies, but our teaching and work placements mean

8: Surveillance and the Senses in a Documentary Portrait of Radio Free Europe from: Secret Police Files from the Eastern Bloc
Author(s) Komska Yuliya
Abstract: The story of Radio Free Europe (RFE; since 1976, Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty, or RFE/RL), the West’s key Cold War–era broadcaster into five Eastern European countries in six languages, is laced with tales of mystery, murder, and espionage.¹ Founded in 1950 and covertly financed by the CIA until 1967, based in divided Germany’s western half, amplified along fascist Portugal’s coast, and jammed east of the Iron Curtain, the station remained for decades in the spotlight of more than one country’s secret police. In addition to the CIA and its Western European counterparts, “[a] ll of the intelligence services of

The Theater of Anamnesis: from: Goethe Yearbook 24
Author(s) BENERT COLIN
Abstract: When Wilhelm suffers his first great loss in the Lehrjahre, that of Mariane, he recovers his spirits on his travels by re-immersing himself in the natural world. He is revived by the rejuvenating power of nature, but also by the animating power of memory:

Blind Spots as Projection Spaces in Die Wahlverwandtschaften from: Goethe Yearbook 24
Author(s) HOLMES TOVE
Abstract: In the opening chapter of Die Wahlverwandtschaften(Elective Affinities, 1809) Charlotte positions Eduard in her newly finished “Mooshütte” or summer-house in such a way “daß er durch Türe und Fenster die verschiedenen Bilder, welche die Landschaft gleichsam im Rahmen zeigten, auf einen Blick übersehen konnte”¹ (“so that through windows and door he could oversee at a glance the different views, in which the landscape appeared like a sequence of framed pictures”).² In expressing his admiration for the instantaneous overview, Eduard nevertheless includes the detractor: “Nur eines habe ich zu erinnern . . . die Hütte scheint mir etwas zu eng”

Disorientation in Novalis or “The Subterranean Homesick Blues” from: Goethe Yearbook 24
Author(s) LYON JOHN B.
Abstract: German Romantic literature rests on unstable ground. For example, Friedrich Schlegel’s notion of Romantic irony as a “permanente Parekbase” (permanent parabasis)¹ denies the authority of a single vantage point. As parabasis—the Greek term for the chorus stepping out of the action of the play and addressing an ode to the audience—irony is the constant possibility of assuming another subject position, of viewing and representing the world from a different and even contradictory angle. Whether in Brentano’s Godwi(1800/1801), where the narrator dies before the end of the novel and the protagonist completes the narration, or in Tieck’sDer

Selfhood, Sovereignty, and Public Space in Die italienische Reise, “Das Rochus-Fest zu Bingen,” and Dichtung und Wahrheit, Book Five from: Goethe Yearbook 24
Author(s) O’NEIL JOSEPH D.
Abstract: The following consideration of a few autobiographical texts by Goethe in terms of the “spatial turn” argues for the importance of the loss of self and personal identity in spatialized aesthetic experiences and the reconstitution of that identity not in individual becoming—the self-referential processing of the spatial environment—but by analogy to the constitution of external space, especially, but not only, urban public spaces. The representation of observed and lived space in the texts I shall read joins anachronisms and contradictions, present and past, high and low, self and other, in a form of symbolization made expressly for the

Form and Contention: from: Goethe Yearbook 24
Author(s) GALASSO STEPHANIE
Abstract: In Die Günderode, her fictionalized biography of the poet Karoline von Günderrode, 1 Bettine von Arnim conspicuously excludes her beloved friend’s suicide from the plot. In its place, she intersperses the novel with previously unpublished texts by Günderrode, and ends the novel with the image of a rose bush full of life—so much life, in fact, that the number of its blossoms corresponds to the years in Günderrode’s life: “mit siebenundzwanzig Knospen, das sind Deine Jahre, ich habe sie freudig gezählt und daß es grad Deine Jahre trifft das freut mich so” (with twenty-seven buds, exactly your years, I

Educational Environments: from: Goethe Yearbook 24
Author(s) LANDGRAF EDGAR
Abstract: In the extensive discussion of the emergence of a modern concept of childhood in the eighteenth century—and the controversy Philippe Ariès caused by suggesting its absence before then¹—relatively little attention has been given to changing conceptions of the “environment” ( Umwelt) that is thought to surround a child and influence its upbringing. This is surprising, not only because today it is commonplace to assume that the environment in which a child grows up—be it social, cultural, familial, economical, or other—is of utmost significance for the child’s development,¹ but also because there were significant changes in meaning and

Book Title: Nation as Grand Narrative-The Nigerian Press and the Politics of Meaning
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Adebanwi Wale
Abstract: Nation as Grand Narrative offers a methodical analysis of how relations of domination and subordination are conveyed through media narratives of nationhood. Using the typical postcolonial state of Nigeria as a template and engaging with disciplines ranging from media studies, political science, and social theory to historical sociology and hermeneutics, Wale Adebanwi examines how the nation as grand narrative provides a critical interpretive lens through which competition among ethnic, ethnoregional, and ethnoreligious groups can be analyzed. Adebanwi illustrates how meaning is connected to power through ideology in the struggles enacted on the pages of the print media over diverse issues including federalism, democracy and democratization, religion, majority-minority ethnic relations, space and territoriality, self-determination, and threat of secession. Nation as Grand Narrative will trigger further critical reflections on the articulation of relations of domination in the context of postcolonial grand narratives. Wale Adebanwi is associate professor of African American and African studies, University of California-Davis, and a visiting professor at the Institute of Social and Economic Research (ISER), Rhodes University, Grahamstown, South Africa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1r69zcb

2 Interpretive Theory, Narrative, and the Politics of Meaning from: Nation as Grand Narrative
Abstract: The social sciences have been concerned for many decades with fundamental questions concerning the nature of social life and its investigation. Whereas some of these concerns, and the debates they have generated, have been geared toward resolving ontological and epistemological dilemmas, others have focused on methodological challenges of the process of social enquiry.¹ This concern forms my examination of the hermeneutical analysis of social phenomenon such as the narratives about the idea and practices of the “nation.” Using interpretive theory, or hermeneutics, this chapter explores how interpreting ideology as “meaning in the service of power” illuminates the analysis of media

Conclusion: from: Nation as Grand Narrative
Abstract: Narratives make “meaningful totality” out of a myriad of events.¹ Therefore they play a very important role in the struggle for control and full participation in whatever is constituted as a “totality”—particularly a political totality expressive in ethnic or ethno-national boundaries. In constructing a meaningful totality out of the mess of political life, narratives invite other narratives to validate or invalidate them. Therefore, no single narrative is adequate in representing the political world. As Campbell asserts, “only through the clash of competing narratives are we likely to assemble justifiable knowledge.”² Indeed, although they present a more meaningful and coherent

3 Las Rimas de Tomé de Burguillos from: Luis de Góngora and Lope de Vega
Abstract: In 1634, the year before his death, Lope de Vega published an anthology of poetry in the parodic mode, comprising 161 sonnets, 11 rimas sacras, various espinelas and canciones and the seven-silva, feline mock epicLa Gatomaquia: theRimas humanas y divinas del licenciado Tomé de Burguillos. The pseudonym was not a new creation, and the true author of the text was a thinly veiled secret, which raises some interesting questions about authorial intent and subsequent textual interpretations. Why would a poet like Lope de Vega, who sought to be taken seriously as the principal lyric poet of his age,

Afterword from: Luis de Góngora and Lope de Vega
Abstract: This study has attempted to pose, and answer, new questions regarding the literary relationship between Luis de Góngora and Lope de Vega, particularly in the twilight of their respective careers. Neither of these poets turned to parody without precedent. That they did turn to parody, however, after their greatest career successes and at the end of their lives, establishes a correlation between lateness, decline, mastery and humour. These texts show an awareness of kairosin the midst of the endless and shapelesschronos, a moment of truth, of reflection; an event that must not simply continue on in the predictable

Introduction from: Writing and Heritage in Contemporary Spain
Abstract: Situated on the calle Serrano, just north of some of the boutique shopping streets in Madrid, the Museo Lázaro Galdiano stands proudly amid the early twentieth-century apartment blocks and offices of the district, some of the busiest Madrid thoroughfares passing close by. A house, large enough to warrant being called a mansion, built in the first decade of the 1900s in a neo-Romantic style, with a gravel driveway to the entrance, flanked by shrubs and lawns, denotes a peaceful oasis amid the pandemonium of the capital city that surrounds it. This is a place of refuge and calm. Only a

2 Never-Ending Story: from: Writing and Heritage in Contemporary Spain
Abstract: Like many grand national museums, the Biblioteca Nacional de España (BNE) has an imposing presence just a stone’s throw from one of the main thoroughfares of Madrid’s city centre, the Paseo de Recoletos. From the street, the eye is drawn above the railings to the building’s frieze, populated with muses, deities, human allegories of arts, war and peace; above the frieze atop the building sits Spain herself, a laurel wreath held aloft in her hand, and above her flies the national flag. The façade is supported by eight neo-classical columns, standing above a trio of door arches, themselves reached by

Book Title: Twenty Years On-Competing Memories of the GDR in Postunification German Culture
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Tate Dennis
Abstract: Twenty years on from the dramatic events that led to the opening of the Berlin Wall and the collapse of the GDR, the subjective dimension of German unification is still far from complete. The nature of the East German state remains a matter of cultural as well as political debate. This volume of new research focuses on competing memories of the GDR and the ways they have evolved in the mass media, literature, and film since 1989-90. Taking as its point of departure the impact of iconic visual images of the fall of the Wall on our understanding of the historical GDR, the volume first considers the decade of cultural conflict that followed unification and then the emergence of a more complex and diverse "textual memory" of the GDR since the Berlin Republic was established in 1999. It highlights competing generational perspectives on the GDR era and the unexpected "afterlife" of the GDR in recent publications. The volume as a whole shows the vitality of eastern German culture two decades after the demise of the GDR and the centrality of these memory debates to the success of Germany's unification process. Contributors: Daniel Argelès, Stephen Brockmann, Arne De Winde, Wolfgang Emmerich, Andrea Geier, Hilde Hoffmann, Astrid Köhler, Karen Leeder, Andrew Plowman, Gillian Pye, Benjamin Robinson, Catherine Smale, Rosemary Stott, Dennis Tate, Frederik Van Dam, Nadezda Zemaníková. Renate Rechtien is Lecturer in German Studies, and Dennis Tate is Emeritus Professor of German Studies, both at the University of Bath, UK.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1x72d3

3: “Das waren wir nicht!”: from: Twenty Years On
Author(s) Argelès Daniel
Abstract: In 1998 the German author Klaus Schlesinger recalled the phase of suspicion against East Germans that marked unified Germany’s public life in the years following the fall of the Berlin Wall:

4: “Der Schrei des Marsyas”: from: Twenty Years On
Author(s) Van Dam Frederik
Abstract: “Um ein Publikum am Lesen von Büchern, die des Lesens wert sind, festzuhalten, dazu bedarf es wahrlich eines Stein-Kopfes!”¹ This assessment of the reading public may well be considered a defining characteristic of Reinhard Jirgl’s writing. Not only does the expression “Stein-Kopf” refer to the eponymous peak in the Taunus mountain range, which Jirgl became acquainted with during his time as writer-in-residence in Bergen-Enkheim, it also captures the ethos of obstinacy that characterizes his poetics. It can of course be argued — as the satirist Gerhard Henschel has — that such self-positioning is pompous or elitist.² Those familiar with Jirgl’s

5: An Early Challenge to the Construction of Cross-Border Romance in Post-1989 Film: from: Twenty Years On
Author(s) Stott Rosemary
Abstract: Depictions of relationships between partners who lived on opposite sides of the German-German border before the events of 1989 have maintained an enduring appeal for producers of film and television feature films commemorating the Wende and German unification. This is not surprising given that narratives involving cross-border romance have the potential to engage wide audiences from both the former East and West Germany. They therefore provide the scope to explore barriers to unification such as distinctive identities, values, and attitudes. At the same time they can act as metaphors for the dominant popular perception that unification was somehow natural and

8: Matter Out of Place: from: Twenty Years On
Author(s) Pye Gillian
Abstract: As these opening quotations indicate, the questions of waste and discarding are central to the experience of transition in the former East Germany. The legacy of the destruction wrought in the Second World War and the infrastructural and material deficits of the GDR — the environmental impact of heavy industry and the rapid rate of obsolescence not only of material things, but also human skills and networks, in the turn from socialism to capitalism — mean that both physical and mental topographies have been profoundly affected by trash in the broadest sense of the term. It is hardly surprising, then,

11: Parallels and Divergences in Post-1989 Memory Discourse: from: Twenty Years On
Author(s) Zemaníková Nadežda
Abstract: In June 2009 an event entitled “20 Jahre Freiheit: Deutschland sagt Danke!” took place in Slovakia’s capital, Bratislava. It was organized by the German Foreign Office and the German Embassy in cooperation with the Slovak Foreign and Cultural Ministries and other partners. This was one of a number of commemorative occasions in different parts of eastern Europe: others took place in Prague, Warsaw, Gdansk, and Budapest. Designed to foster dialogue between German perspectives on the recent past and those of the post-communist states, these events sought to celebrate common achievements since the fall of the Iron Curtain while expressing Germany’s

9: Kafka in Virilio’s Teletopical City from: Kafka for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Goebel Rolf J.
Abstract: Kafka’s actuality emerges from the ability of his texts to enlighten, explain, and subvert some of the most pressing issues in our global culture today. Nothing seems to resonate more acutely with today’s culture than Kafka’s persistent questioning of modern techno logies of travel (railway, automobile, or airplane), audiovisual reproduction (photography, film, gramophone), and communication (telephone, telegraph).¹

Chapter 2 “Laissez les bons temps rouler!” and Other Concealments: from: Interconnections
Author(s) Johnson Rashauna
Abstract: This essay uses a deceptively discrete category—“women of African descent in antebellum New Orleans”—to highlight the instabilities within all social categories, even those premised on unities of time and space, gender and race. Unfortunately, sociocultural histories of the antebellum South devote precious little attention to women of African descent, let alone to the diverse, multidimensional modes of hierarchy that subdivided them. This essay writes into that silence by using one free woman of color’s household and neighborhood as a microcosm in which frontier Louisiana’s hierarchies of race and gender conspired with cleavages of class and status to produce

Chapter 3 “There Are Two Great Oceans”: from: Interconnections
Author(s) Quanquin Hélène
Abstract: The anniversary of the American Equal Rights Association of May 12 and 13, 1869, was a watershed for American reformers. During the meeting, abolitionists and women’s rights activists severed personal ties already weakened by the debate over the Fourteenth and Fifteenth Amendments and divided into opposing camps. How did people who had been working side by side for several decades find themselves in the situation of choosing between the two causes—the rights of African Americans and those of women—they had previously fought for almost indiscriminately?¹ Trying to make sense of this rift, women’s rights activist Lucy Stone opted

Chapter 4 “Grandpa Brown Didn’t Have No Land”: from: Interconnections
Author(s) Field Kendra Taira
Abstract: When Thomas Jefferson Brown finally decided to make his home in Indian Territory in 1870, he had been there many times before. For months he had been going in on day trips from Arkansas, his grandson mused more than a century later, learning the Indian languages and becoming familiar with the land, people, and opportunities for economic gain. In spite of national boundaries, promises of federal “protection,” and claims to Indian sovereignty, the borders between the nineteenth-century United States and Indian Territory grew increasingly porous, especially following the Civil War. American settlers in and around the territory were scrambling for

Chapter 7 A “Corrupting Influence”: from: Interconnections
Author(s) Mitchell Michele
Abstract: Anna Pauline Murray found herself fighting to remain in college, pay for a room at the Harlem YWCA, and eat on a regular basis during a time when the economy of the United States was itself under considerable strain. A young woman of African descent, Murray had moved to New York City from Durham, North Carolina, in the fall of 1926 due to her determination not to attend a segregated institution in the South. Murray lived with a cousin in Brooklyn during the 1926–27 academic year, mainly so that she could supplement her education to meet Hunter College’s entrance

Chapter 8 What Women Want: from: Interconnections
Author(s) White Deborah Gray
Abstract: On the morning of October 4, 1997, members of the National Organization of Women (NOW) greeted the hundreds of thousands of Promise Keepers (PK) who gathered for the Stand in the Gap assembly on the National Mall with shouts of “Ominous!” and “Dangerous!” and with placards that read “Patriarch Keeper.”¹ It was a familiar sight, one that had been repeated at almost every Promise Keepers gathering since Bill McCartney founded the organization in 1990, and one that would be repeated at every Promise Keepers gathering through the remainder of the 1990s. “They’re a very sexist, racist and homophobic organization," said

2: Repeatability and Crime from: The World as Metaphor in Robert Musil's 'The Man without Qualities'
Abstract: Humans both desire and tire of the security and inevitability of seinesgleichen geschieht (the selfsame happens) and long for and fear its equally inevitable interruption. This tension is palpable, again and again in seemingly infinite variation, in both the themes and the experimental techniques of Musil’s novel. Its complications are expressed only in part by Ulrich’s confession to his sister Agathe, “Ich habe auch das unstillbare Streben in mir, die Erlebnisse wiederholbar zu machen. Aber in dem Augenblick, wo sie es sind, ist die Welt materiell und langweilig. Du hast gestern ein Wort gesagt, das mich ergriffen hat: Alles, was

3 Visual Eroticism, Poetic Voyeurism: from: Cultural Capital, Language and National Identity in Imperial Spain
Abstract: Based on the Ovidian fable of the ill-fated love between the nymph Galatea and the young shepherd Acis, the poem departs from and expands upon Ovid’s version, focusing on the amorous encounter that will bring about

Book Title: Gabriel García Márquez and Ovid-Magical and Monstrous Realities
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): ROBINSON LORNA
Abstract: This book explores the ways in which Ovid's poem, Metamorphoses, and Gabriel García Márquez's novel, One Hundred Years of Solitude, use magical devices to construct their literary realities. The study examines in detail the similarities and differences of each author's style and investigates the impact of politics and culture upon the magical and frequently brutal realities the two authors create in their works. Ultimately the book is interested in the use of magical elements by authors in political climates where freedoms are being restricted, and by using magical realism to explore Ovid's Metamorphoses, it is able to illuminate aspects of the regime of emperor Augustus and the world of Ovid and demonstrate their closeness to that of García Márquez's Colombia.BR> Lorna Robinson holds a PhD in Classics from University College London. She is the author of Cave Canem: A Miscellany of Latin Words and Phrases and the essay 'The Golden Age in Metamorphoses' and 'One Hundred Years of Solitude' in A Companion to Magical Realism (Tamesis, 2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt24hfs8

4 More than Words Can Say from: Gabriel García Márquez and Ovid
Abstract: In the previous chapter, I examined the claims of Latin Americanists that magical realism emerged from their continent due to its unique history, geography and racial mixing. It was demonstrated, by the analysis of key passages in García Márquez’s novel and Ovid’s poem, that there are many factors that can explain the use of magical realism, ranging from political and cultural to literary traditions. In this chapter, I continue to examine the claims of Latin Americanists, in this instance, focusing upon the aesthetic effect of magical realism, rather than the reasons for its appearance.

Conclusion from: Gabriel García Márquez and Ovid
Abstract: This book has examined the use of magical realism in Ovid’s Metamorphoses, using García Márquez’sCien años de soledadas a comparative tool. Chapter one examined how magical realist effects were produced by manipulating aspects of narration; cultural perspectives were explored in chapter two, specifically how and to what effect these were incorporated into the texts by the authors. The third chapter analysed the influences of Latin America upon García Márquez’s novel, exploring political, historical and cultural spheres. Finally, case studies were used in chapter four to examine realistic depiction, and how magical realism can supplement the failings of the

4 Memory as Mester in the Libro de Alexandre and Libro de Apolonio from: Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond
Author(s) HAZBUN GERALDINE
Abstract: mester es sin pecado, ca es de clerezía

8 The Misa de amor in the Spanish Cancioneros and the Sentimental Romance from: Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond
Author(s) SEVERIN DOROTHY SHERMAN
Abstract: Alan Deyermond’s contribution to the study of the sentimental romance is so essential that, before he wrote his seminal essay on the genre in the medieval volume of his Literary History of Spain(1971), we used to call it the sentimental novel. To him I owe the inspiration for my book on the genre (2005), and this additional footnote to that book. When I categorized religious parody in the sentimental romance in that book, I did not include the category of theMisa de amor, although I made a passing reference to it. A rereading of the key texts of

12 Games of Love and War in the Castilian Frontier Ballads: from: Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond
Author(s) YIACOUP ŞIZEN
Abstract: In her overview of the symbolism of games in the romancero, Edith Rogers observes that the use of the game as a central motif ‘creates an atmosphere of tension and imminence of change’ relating to a shift of fortune or a reversal of the relative position of two adversaries, while at the same time serving as ‘a visible, condensed, localized expression of the emotional conquest’ involved in courtship (1972: 424). The following analysis seeks to develop Rogers’ theory by focusing on two frontier ballads,El romance del juego de ajedrezandEl romance de la conquista de Antequera, and the

Introduction from: Medievalist Enlightenment
Abstract: Perceptions of medieval literature, far from being a simple matter of philological interest, have historically been fraught with ideological implications.¹ Thus, for example, when, announcing the advent of romanticism, Madame de Staël famously proposed that “romantic or chivalric literature is indigenous to us’,² she was not only celebrating the birth of a literary movement. She was also saying something about the literature that was, according to her, most appropriate for the French national–political context of her day. Opposing Napoleon’s neo-classicist ideal, the Middle Ages stood in her writings for an alternative, freer model of art and power. Likewise, when,

6 The Invention of Medieval Studies from: Medievalist Enlightenment
Abstract: This chapter examines how out of the galant, aristocratic engagement with the medieval whose contours I have sketched in the previous chapters, there emerged during the first decades of the eighteenth century a new, scholarly approach to the Middle Ages. This new, academic medievalism had its institutional basis at the Académie royale des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres. Originally founded by Louis XIV to compose Latin commemorative inscriptions in his honour, during the eighteenth century the Academy evolved into a full-fledged scholarly body, focusing more exclusively on historical and philological activities, and shifting its emphasis from classical to medieval subjects. This process

1: The German Faustian Century from: The Faustian Century
Author(s) Weeks Andrew
Abstract: As noted in the introduction, this volume aims to illuminate the Faust phenomenon by focusing on what the work shares with its age: the obsession with the devil and curiosity

5: Faust from Cipher to Sign and Pious to Profane from: The Faustian Century
Author(s) van der Laan J. M.
Abstract: For many reasons, we can consider the sixteenth century a Faustian age. One way to define the era in Faustian terms, and probably the most obvious, involves a particular individual, part fact perhaps, but almost entirely fiction, who emerges full blown in the sixteenth century and has been with us ever since as a dynamic figure laden with meaning. That person or character is Faust himself, who embodies the zeitgeist or spirit of the age. If we survey the century, we find that Faust receives more and more attention as the years go by and transforms from a cipher, from

10: Exploring the “Three-Fold World”: from: The Faustian Century
Author(s) Watanabe-O’Kelly Helen
Abstract: The title page of the original edition of the Historia von D. Johann Fausten¹ prepares the reader for a straightforward black-and-white “damnation narrative,” the inverse of the salvation narrative of the saint’s vita so well established in contemporary Catholic piety.² It emphasizes that this is a tale about a man who, entirely through his own fault, comes to a bad end and that it should serve as an awful warning to all “hochtragenden fürwitzigen und Gottlosen Menschen” (arrogant, inappropriately curious, and godless people). The title page even quotes, surprisingly for a Lutheran work, the Epistle of St. James (4:7): “submit

6: Keeping Up the Pace (1991–1995) from: Becoming John Updike
Abstract: After the success of Rabbit at Rest, few would have held it against Updike if he would have eased up on the grinding publication schedule he had set for himself more than three decades earlier. Yet in 1991 his name graced the spine of another hefty collection of nonfiction, Odd Jobs, and a year later he published a new novel, Memories of the Ford Administration. If there was a break, it came in 1993 when he collected the poetry he had been publishing since the 1950s into a surprisingly large volume. He brought out another novel in 1994, Brazil, and

7: America and Updike, Growing Old Together (1996–1999) from: Becoming John Updike
Abstract: Any thought that Updike, approaching sixty-five, might slow down as the century moved toward its close was quickly dispelled by the publication in 1996 of what some have come to regard as his finest single novel, In the Beauty of the Lilies. That work was followed in succeeding years by another novel, a new collection about Henry Bech, and a fourth compendium of nonfiction. At the same time, however, a new generation of reviewers, raised after the post-war years of American prosperity and the angst-ridden years of the Cold War, was beginning to describe Updike as a literary dinosaur. Throughout

Book Title: El documental cinematográfico y televisivo contemporáneo-Memoria, sujeto y formación de la identidad democrática española
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): ESTRADA ISABEL M.
Abstract: Este libro evalúa la aportación del documental cinematográfico y televisivo producido en España a partir de los años 90 al debate en torno a la memoria de la represión franquista, por un lado, así como a la construcción de la identidad democrática, en términos más generales. Propongo que tanto los documentales con un enfoque histórico explícito como aquellos cuya mirada retrospectiva se realiza sin referentes tan concretos cuestionan el proyecto político teleológico concebido durante la Transición. La primera parte de mi estudio trata de la memoria histórica de la guerra civil específicamente y, la segunda, de la memoria en un sentido socioeconómico para apuntar el déficit de agencia del sujeto en la democracia neoliberal. En última instancia se reivindica la marginalidad social de la víctima a la vez que se deja al descubierto su obliteración de los procesos democráticos. Isabel M. Estrada is Visiting Assistant Professor, Franklin & Marshall College. ENGLISH VERSION This book examines how a selected group of documentaries made since 1995 for both film and television inform the debate centered on the so-called "recuperation of memory" of the Spanish Civil War and dictatorship. Estrada contends that these documentaries modify Spanish identity as it was conceived by the teleological historical project of the transition. The narrative of mass media should be examined in order to comprehend the process of the "recovery of memory" that culminated in the Law of Historical Memory (2007). She carries out a comparative analysis of the visual discourse of the documentary and the narrative discourses of history and testimony, paying special attention to the relations of power among them. Using theoretical frameworks provided by Badiou, Adorno, Renov, and Ricoeur, this study ultimately sheds light on the status of the victim in the context of Spain's neoliberal democracy. Isabel M. Estrada is Visiting Assistant Professor, Franklin & Marshall College.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt2jbkxg

INTRODUCCIÓN from: El documental cinematográfico y televisivo contemporáneo
Abstract: Este libro evalúa la aportación del documental cinematográfico y televisivo producido en España a partir de los años noventa al debate en torno a la memoria de la represión franquista, por un lado, así como a la construcción de la identidad democrática, en términos más generales. Propongo que tanto los documentales con un enfoque histórico explícito como aquellos cuya mirada retrospectiva se realiza sin referentes tan concretos cuestionan la identidad de la España democrática según había sido concebida durante la Transición. En última instancia se reivindica la marginalidad social de la víctima a la vez que se deja al descubierto

4 Jugando con la memoria: from: El documental cinematográfico y televisivo contemporáneo
Abstract: El 12 de julio de 2011, Telemadrid estrenó una nueva serie documental sobre la guerra civil con motivo del 75.º aniversario de su comienzo. Ha bastado con el primer episodio para causar indignación en Santos Juliá y crear la consiguiente polémica. La serie comienza estableciendo una relación causal entre el asesinato del conservador Calvo Sotelo por los socialistas y el inicio del conflicto armado, lo cual Santos Juliá califica como una ‘lamentable manipulación’.¹ En capítulos anteriores he analizado algunos ejemplos de la instrumentalización de la memoria, que parece seguir estando a la orden del día en las televisiones autonómicas. Basilio

Introduction: from: Christians and Jews in Angevin England
Author(s) Watson Sethina
Abstract: During the course of one desperate night in March 1190, an estimated 150 Jewish men, women and children committed suicide or were murdered at the royal castle in York, where they had fled for safety. The York massacre horrified contemporaries, Christians and Jews, and is remembered today around the world. It is recalled in Jewish elegies and holds a singular, sad place in the English national story as ʹthe most notorious anti-Jewish atrocityʹ in its history.¹ Most particularly, the memory is tied to place. Cliffordʹs Tower, the mid-thirteenth-century stone keep of the royal castle, has become its most enduring symbol.²

1 Neighbours and Victims in Twelfth-Century York: from: Christians and Jews in Angevin England
Author(s) Jones Sarah Rees
Abstract: Barrie Dobsonʹs wide-ranging and richly-detailed study of the massacre of the Jews of York in March 1190 remains the definitive history of that terrible event.¹ Most importantly he demonstrated that the massacre did not mark the end of a Jewish community in the city but rather occurred near its beginning: very soon after their first settlement under Josce and Benedict of York in the 1170s and 1180s. The return of Jews to York after 1190, and the new Jewish community which flourished in the early thirteenth century, was the subject of later papers by Dobson, now reprinted in a single

9 An from: Christians and Jews in Angevin England
Author(s) De Visscher Eva
Abstract: An increasing emphasis on the otherness of the Jews in twelfth- and thirteenth-century ecclesiastical sources seems to coincide with a revival of the study of Hebrew among Christian scholars. While this revival, which forms part of a wider intensification of interest in language, rhetoric and the study of the biblical text, is visible all over Western Europe, scholars and texts of English origin are particularly well-represented in the extant source material.¹ This chapter focuses on the learning process involved in this type of cross-religious language acquisition. Examining Hebrew and Hebraist texts from pre-expulsion England, it aims to reconstruct, in so

15 Massacre and Memory: from: Christians and Jews in Angevin England
Author(s) Johnson Hannah
Abstract: History, it seems, must always suffer the impositions of second guessing. If this is true of historical events, the traditional content of historical accounts, it is no less true of historiography, that higher order analysis which is itself a venerable form of retrospective re-examination. We continuously revise our understanding of historical explanations as well as events. In a volume dedicated to revisiting the massacre at York in 1190 and its legacy, I take it as given that part of our task is to consider what kinds of tools we have in our scholarly arsenal in the early twenty-first century for

Chapter One Negotiating the “Absolute”: from: Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) Deaville James
Abstract: Music appreciation texts—the sources of knowledge for thousands of undergraduates and their instructors in North America since they began appearing in the 1960s—have perpetuated the topos of Hanslick as the

Chapter Two Hanslick’s Composers from: Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) Maus Fred Everett
Abstract: However, Hanslick’s detailed music criticism, addressing specific compositions in the context of Viennese concert life, does not typically stay within the limits of this aesthetic position. The apparent discrepancy between Hanslick’s treatise—a brief, early text—and the other

Chapter Five Hanslick on Johann Strauss Jr.: from: Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) Gooley Dana
Abstract: In his review of Johann Strauss Jr.’s 1881 operetta Der lustige Krieg, Hanslick critiqued the current state of Viennese operetta as follows: “This is what makes most of our Viennese operettas so intolerable: they earnestly ape Verdi and Meyerbeer. Your Sepperl and Leni sing like Raoul and Valentine, so that every squabble at the inn becomes a St. Bartholomew’s Night. At any moment, naturally, the composer can leap down from his tragic throne into the most trivial yodeling; Raoul and Valentine get transformed back into Sepperl and Leni, the Huguenots into tailor’s apprentices; and the rest of us get seasick

Chapter Ten “Faust und Hamlet in Einer Person”: from: Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) Donovan Siobhán
Abstract: Reading Hanslick’s autobiography Aus meinem Leben (1894), one could be forgiven for thinking that both a public discourse on gender and the women’s movement were completely absent in Vienna during the latter part of the nineteenth century;¹ for nowhere does Hanslick refer to this socially and politically rousing topic.² Events such as the Prater massacre in August 1848, which witnessed the brutal suppression of a protest by female workers against a 25 percent pay cut, go completely unmentioned. Had this been pointed out to Hanslick, presumably he would have retorted that his job as music critic had nothing to do

Chapter Eleven Body and Soul, Content and Form: from: Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) Marx Wolfgang
Abstract: It has been common practice since the early nineteenth century to compare a musical work with a “living organism,” a metaphor that Eduard Hanslick—like Richard Wagner, Franz Brendel, and many others—also employed, both in his treatise On the Musically Beautiful (1854) and in many of his reviews.¹ That he rarely reflects on this practice is revealing of the underlying assumptions of Hanslick’s aesthetic thinking, his musical preferences and antipathies. These unreflected, apparently self-evident paradigms are particularly relevant to the intellectual horizon of an author and his epoch. On the one hand, there is the tradition of German idealism

Chapter Fourteen On “Jewishness” and Genre: from: Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) Kasunic David
Abstract: The historian Peter Gay concludes his 1978 book Freud, Jews and Other Germans: Masters and Victims in Modernist Culture with a chapter entitled “For Beckmesser: Eduard Hanslick, Victim and Prophet.” What is remarkable about the chapter is Gay’s studied avoidance of the issue of anti-Semitism as it relates to arguments about Die Meistersinger or Hanslick, or both. In a book that elsewhere addresses issues of anti-Semitism, this last chapter fashions Hanslick as one of the “other Germans” of its title. The issue of anti-Semitism, however, is picked up in two of the chapter’s footnotes. Footnote fourteen cites Friedrich Blume’s encyclopedia

3 Representing the Civil Wars and Interregnum, 1680–5 from: The Civil Wars after 1660
Abstract: One of the most important consequences of the public furore occasioned by revelations of a ‘popish plot’ to assassinate Charles II in 1678, the dissolution of the ‘long’ Cavalier Parliament in January 1679, the subsequent lapse of licensing the press, and a crisis over the succession that pitted some members of Parliament against the Court and its allies, was the explosive growth of popular printed literature.¹ A great many texts invoked the national past as part of their arguments for, among other things, the undesirability of a Roman Catholic successor, the importance of Parliament as a bulwark against Stuart pretensions

4 Struggling over Settlements in Civil-War Historical Writing, 1696–1714 from: The Civil Wars after 1660
Abstract: The Parliament that assembled to construct a settlement around the revolution of 1688 took a new approach to the question of remembering and forgetting the conflicted past. Several laws enacted by the Convention Parliament had profound implications for the cultural memory of the civil wars and Interregnum. Most significantly, under the Toleration Act of 1689, Trinitarian Protestant Dissenters could worship freely, subject to the granting of licences by local magistrates.¹ This meant that for the first time since the Reformation, the crown legally relinquished its role as promoter and enforcer of religious conformity. Moreover, religious toleration implied that the spiritual

5 John Walker and the Memory of the Restoration in Augustan England from: The Civil Wars after 1660
Abstract: In 1705, Ann Harris was an old woman who possessed an increasingly rare and precious resource: a personal memory of the civil war years. Indeed, it is possible that by the turn of the seventeenth century she was the only person remaining in the parish of Coleorton, Leicestershire, who could recall that tumultuous period. During the 1640s, Harris had been a servant in the household of William Pestell, Coleorton’s rector. Six decades later, she claimed to remember very well the abuse her employer had received at the hands of parliamentarian soldiers. Forced by them to ride over sixteen miles to

Conclusion from: The Civil Wars after 1660
Abstract: In the spring of 1715, the day after he celebrated his 55th birthday, King George I attended a service of thanksgiving at St James’s palace chapel. The king’s court had gathered to remember the providential restoration of the established state and Church, heralded by the popular rejoicing that had greeted King Charles II upon his entry into London in May of 1660. The sermon, subsequently published at royal command, was delivered by William Burscough, an Oxford don and one of the new king’s chaplains. Taking as his text Psalm 147.1, ‘For it is Good to sing Praises unto our God’,

5: The “Good German” between Silence and Artistic Deconstruction of an Inhumane World: from: Representing the "Good German" in Literature and Culture after 1945
Author(s) Egger Sabine
Abstract: It could be argued that the poetry of Johannes Bobrowski (1917–1965) tends towards absolute moral polarities, with Germans generally bad, and their Jewish, Polish, and other victims equally good, rather than exploring the complexities of individuals, ethnic communities, and their relations. This does not apply in the same way to the prose fiction he increasingly turned to in the 1960s. Several of his narrative texts show a German soldier with positive character traits, partly representing the author’s own experience, while pointing to the insufficiency of these traits in the historical context. This essay will explore the representation of such

7: Being Human: from: Representing the "Good German" in Literature and Culture after 1945
Author(s) Schönfeld Christiane
Abstract: The focus of this chapter is on the cinematic representation of the “good German” in the immediate aftermath of the Second World War, and the reorientation of defeated, isolated, and morally devastated Germans, not only by addressing the country’s all-too-recent genocidal past, but especially by highlighting the possibility of moral truth, autonomous agency, and ethical action, and thereby, the possibility of a better future. Representations of humanity, decency, and the courage to disobey or change were projected during this early postwar period onto often makeshift cinema screens as seeds lying dormant under thousands of cubic feet of rubble. Provided with

8: “The Banality of Good”? from: Representing the "Good German" in Literature and Culture after 1945
Author(s) Ludewig Alexandra
Abstract: The fascination with fascism, whether in Germany or abroad, continues as strongly as ever, and — as Jewish historian Yaffa Eliach mordantly commented with reference to the Holocaust industry — “There’s no business like Shoah business.”¹ An analysis of recent representations of Nazism and its aftermath in contemporary film will uncover a shift towards the depiction of Nazis as victims as well as heroes. As many of these films are used in educational settings, with the intention of enlightening students about the Nazi period and contributing to the teaching of values ( Werteerziehung), their showcasing of exemplary conduct by both victims and perpetrators

9: Memories of Good and Evil in from: Representing the "Good German" in Literature and Culture after 1945
Author(s) Hamilton Coman
Abstract: In the past six decades of German cultural memory, the figure of Sophie Scholl has undergone a series of metamorphoses. She has developed from being a traitor and a suicidal failure into a distant, legendary heroine. Today, her story of resistance against the Nazi regime and her iconic and tragically fatal act of scattering seditious leaflets in the University of Munich atrium is heroically retold in classrooms throughout Germany. Placing Scholl in the context of historiographical development since her execution in 1943, this essay intends to look at how director Marc Rothemund has further modified the shape of Sophie Scholl

10: Deconstructing the “Good German” in French Best Sellers Published in the Aftermath of the Second World War from: Representing the "Good German" in Literature and Culture after 1945
Author(s) Bragança Manuel
Abstract: In the aftermath of the Second World War, it was through fiction that many French writers decided to reflect on the conflict. Unsurprisingly, the relationship between “occupiers” and “occupied” was often depicted quite simplistically: German soldiers were either robots or barbarians. Yet, many texts — including the best sellers Education européenne by Romain Gary (Prix des Critiques winner 1945); Mon Village à l’heure allemande by Jean-Louis Bory (Goncourt winner 1945); and Les Forêts de la nuit by Jean-Louis Curtis (Goncourt winner 1947),¹ on which this article will focus — contain a “good German” character. I have suggested elsewhere² that the inclusion of

Open-Air Museums, Authenticity and the Shaping of Cultural Identity: from: Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Mackie Catriona
Abstract: What is widely believed to be the world’s first open-air folk museum was opened at Skansen in Sweden in 1891. It was the brainchild of Artur Hazelius who, in 1873, had founded the Nordiska Museet in Stockholm, which exhibited examples of folklife from around the country. It was Hazelius’s desire that the Nordiska Museet be ‘of benefit to science and at the same time arouse and fuel feelings of patriotism’, as well as ‘contribute to the strengthening of national feeling generation after generation, infusing love of one’s country … among young and old’.¹ This was a nationalism not of politics,

‘No Certain Roof but the Coffin Lid’: from: Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Janaway Robert C.
Abstract: Dramatic developments in manufacturing, mining and transportation precipitated by the Industrial Revolution brought irreversible cultural and socio-economic change to Britain. Thousands of ordinary people experienced profound changes, their life experiences and personal stories etched into their physical remains and threaded through the trappings of their death. The pressures of modern development mean that many recent burials are disinterred from their ‘final’ resting place and reburied elsewhere. The research value of post-medieval burial assemblages was recognised only relatively recently,² and this has undoubtedly influenced the strategic approach to planning and excavation. Harding³ identified the publication in English of Philippe Ariès’ work

Introducción from: Relecturas y narraciones femeninas de la Revolución Mexicana
Abstract: Entre 2008 y 2014 diversos países de América latina estarán festejando el bicenterario de sus Guerras de Independencia. En el 2010, en México, además de conmemorarse la Independencia de España, hubieron diversos eventos en memoria del centenario de la primera gran revolución social del siglo XX: la Revolución Mexicana. Mi intención es honrar no sólo la memoria de todos aquellos y aquellas que vivieron, gozaron y sufrieron durante esos treinta largos y sangrientos años (1910–1940), sino, en particular, la de mis abuelas, quienes representan la heterogeneidad y el mestizaje racial y cultural de nuestro continente.

1 Garcilaso de la Vega (c. 1501–1536): from: Love Poetry in the Spanish Golden Age
Abstract: Roland Barthes’ insistence on the death of the author (1968),¹ closely followed by Michel Foucault’s equally provocative interrogation of the writing subject (‘What is an Author?’ 1969),² have been elaborated, qualified, denigrated and newly historicised in almost half a century’s literary theorisings. Common sense alone suggests that in denying a critical need to relate the individual subject (whether author or reader) to a larger cultural, historically specific field of operations, Barthes’ theory of textual construction went too far. But whatever its implicit contradictions (and current memory studies have identified several), there is no denying that the post-structuralist critique of authorship

5 Luis de Góngora y Argote: from: Love Poetry in the Spanish Golden Age
Abstract: Neoplatonic love had been presented by Castiglione as the perfect antidote to the darker emotions associated with human passion – jealousy being prominent among the transgressive desires that required suppression.¹ It is not wholly surprising, therefore, that the dismantling of the Neoplatonic aesthetic in Góngora would liberate a revisionary play upon that most illicit, appetitive drive whose cultural history allowed for the interconnection of erotic and emulative poetics. This chapter will explore how motifs of envy and jealousy are interwoven in Góngora’s love poetry and forge a metaphoric merger between two complementary attitudes: the will to usurp the forbidden feminine object

Book Title: Expressing Identities in the Basque Arena- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Allen N.J.
Abstract: Everyday nationalism, the human and cultural aspects of identity, is a neglected subject in the literature on nationalism in Europe. Jeremy MacClancy redresses the balance in this unusual and sharp book on the human and cultural aspects of the idea of being Basque in the modern world. The style is fresh and colloquial, dealing with several of the kinds of issues that usually appear in popular magazines - cuisine, football, art and graffiti - but the treatment is serious and illustrative of underlying currents in social life. MacClancy argues that the ethnographic understanding of nationalisms, rather than the orthodox studies of ideology, political parties, social classes and centre-periphery clashes - offers a more nuanced comprehension of the lived reality of people in areas where nationalism is a significant force. This is very much nationalism from the bottom up. JEREMY MACCLANCY is Professor of Social Anthropology at Oxford Brookes University. Series editors: Wendy James & Nick Allen
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt3fgm17

2 At Play with Identity from: Expressing Identities in the Basque Arena
Abstract: Identity is a catch-all term of our times. It is an empty vessel which can be filled with almost any content. As a quick perusal of recent volumes on European communities shows, astute anthropologists can use identity as a general framing device for a surprising variety of ethnographic data. In these books discussion can span from the individual to the regional to the supranational, from styles of dress or dance to religious faith. The range of possible topics seems to be limited only by the imaginative power of the compiler. The worry, of course, is that we anthropologists may well

3 Football from: Expressing Identities in the Basque Arena
Abstract: Johan Huizinga was right: play is central to life. In his seminal and much-praised Homo Ludens, first published in 1938, Huizinga argued that play had an essential role in the development of civilization. To understand humanity in any rounded sense, it had to be taken into account. And of course, one key latter-day manifestation of play was the rise of organized sports from the nineteenth century on.¹ It is thus surprising that until relatively recently mass sport was not thought an appropriate topic of research for serious social scientists. The attitude seemed to be that nothing so enjoyable could be

4 Feeding Nationalism from: Expressing Identities in the Basque Arena
Abstract: Given this, it is all the more surprising that a recognizable ‘food studies’ did not arise within academia until the closing decade of the last century. Economists and geographers might have

6 Art from: Expressing Identities in the Basque Arena
Abstract: Anthropologists of art have a problem: how to define the central term of their sub-discipline? Their quandary is how to compare something across cultures without the particular definition chosen predetermining the answers arrived at. If they choose too restrictive a definition they exclude a host of potential objects of study and end up producing generalizations which are neither novel nor representative of human endeavour. If they choose a very open definition they run the risk of including such a broad range of different types of objects that meaningful comparison is turned into a near impossible ideal. This difficulty of choosing

Introduction from: Dialogic Aspects in the Cuban Novel of the 1990s
Abstract: This work focuses on six novels: Reinaldo Arenas’s El color del verano, Leonardo Padura Fuentes’Máscaras, Abilio Estévez’sTuyo es el reino, Daína Chaviano’sCasa de juegos, Yanitzia Canetti’sAl otro ladoand Zoé Valdés’La nada cotidiana. The selected novels were published during the 1990s, and in my view their authors, regardless of their place of residence, are products of the educational system of the Cuban revolution, since even those who left the island to go and live abroad did so as adults. The six novels that occupy my attention in this study share a common territorialization: their spatial

Book Title: Narratives of Identity in Alban Berg's "Lulu"- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): dos Santos Silvio J.
Abstract: Exploring the crossroads between autobiographical narrative and musical composition, this book examines Berg's transformation of Frank Wedekind's Erdgeist (1895) and Die Büchse der Pandora/ (1904) -- the plays used in the formation of the libretto for Lulu -- according to notions of gender identity, social customs, and the aesthetics of modernity in Vienna of the 1920s and 1930s. While Berg modernized several aspects of the plays by Wedekind and incorporated serial techniques of composition from Arnold Schoenberg, he never let go of the idealistic Wagnerian perspectives of his youth. In fact, he went as far as reconfiguring aspects of Richard Wagner's life as an ideal identity to be played out in the compositional process. In the process of composing the opera, Berg also reflected on the most important cultural figures in fin-de-siècle Vienna that affected his worldview, including Karl Kraus, Emil Lucka, Otto Weininger, and others. Adopting an approach that combines a systematic analysis of Berg's numerous sketches for Lulu, correspondence, and the finished work with interpretive models drawn from cultural studies and philosophy, this book elucidates the ways in which Berg grappled with his self-image as an "incorrigible romantic" (unverbesserliche Romantiker) at the end of his life, explaining aspects of his musical language that have been considered strange or anomalous in the scholarship. Silvio J. dos Santos is assistant professor of musicology at the University of Florida.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt5vj797

Chapter Two Berg as Wagner: from: Narratives of Identity in Alban Berg's "Lulu"
Abstract: By establishing a principle of identity between Berg and Wagner, this chapter is bound to cause suspicion, as it could rightly be argued that a person’s identity is formed by a multitude of factors—including the appropriation of historical or fictional narratives—by which the individual and collective identities are in a constant process of reconfiguration. To single out one element as themost important factor in the formation of one’s identity would seem to establish a rather rigid category that overlooks other relational properties in identity formation. To be sure, as is well-known, Berg identified himself overtly with an

Chapter Five Marriage as Prostitution from: Narratives of Identity in Alban Berg's "Lulu"
Abstract: When Berg explained his progress with composing Luluin a letter to Schoenberg on August 7, 1930, he had already set his mind on one of the most important distinctions between his new opera and the plays by Frank Wedekind on which the libretto was based: namely, the return of Lulu’s “victims” (her husbands) as her clients in the final scene. After describing the role of the orchestral interlude between the first and second scenes of act 2 as the “focal point for the whole tragedy,” Berg added this parenthetical comment: “(Incidentally: the 4 men [actually three] who visit Lulu

Book Title: War and Literature- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Patterson Ian
Abstract: War was the first subject of literature; at times, war has been its only subject. In this volume, the contributors reflect on the uneasy yet symbiotic relations of war and writing, from medieval to modern literature. War writing emerges in multiple forms, celebratory and critical, awed and disgusted; the rhetoric of inexpressibility fights its own battle with the urgent necessity of representation, record and recognition. This is shown to be true even to the present day: whether mimetic or metaphorical, literature that concerns itself overtly or covertly with the real pressures of war continues to speak to issues of pressing significance. Particular topics addressed include writings of and about the Crusades and battles during the Hundred Years War; Shakespeare's "Casus Belly"; Auden's "Journal of an Airman"; and War and Peace. Contributors: Joanna Bellis, Catherine A.M. Clarke, Mary A. Favret, Rachel Galvin, James Purdon, Mark Rawlinson, Susanna A. Throop, Katie J. Walter, Carol Watts, Tom F. Wright, Andrew Zurcher,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt5vj7vz

Shakespeare’s Casus Belly; from: War and Literature
Author(s) ZURCHER ANDREW
Abstract: In april 1581, Arthur Lord Grey of Wilton, then Lord Deputy of Ireland, wrote to Sir Francis Walsingham to report on the state of his administration in Dublin. Grey’s main concern in the spring of 1581 was the restive Irish lords and septs around the Pale, and especially the dangerous Feagh McHugh O’Byrne, lord of Ballinecor in the Wicklow mountains. Grey reported to Walsingham that two of his captains in the Irish service, Sir William Stanley and Captain William Russell, had recently raided Feagh McHugh’s stronghold, and burned it, ‘kyll[ing] certayne of hys kerne & churles, withowte the loss or hurtt

Book Title: Modern German Thought from Kant to Habermas-An Annotated German-Language Reader
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Large Duncan
Abstract: German-language thinkers such as Kant, Marx, Nietzsche, and Freud are central to modernity. Yet their reception in the English-speaking world has largely depended on translations, a situation that has often hampered full engagement with the rhetorical and philosophical complexity of the German history of ideas. The present volume, the first of its kind, is a response to this situation. After an introduction charting the remarkable flowering of German-language thought since the eighteenth century, it offers extracts -- in the original German -- from sixteen major philosophical texts, with extensive introductions and annotations in English. All extracts are carefully chosen to introduce the individual thinkers while allowing the reader to pursue broader themes such as the fate of reason or the history of modern selfhood. The book offers students and scholars of German a complement to linguistic, historical, and literary study by giving them access to the wealth of German-language philosophy. It represents a new way into the work of a succession of thinkers who have defined modern philosophy and thus remain of crucial relevance today. The philosophers: Immanuel Kant, G. W. F. Hegel, Ludwig Feuerbach, Karl Marx, Arthur Schopenhauer, Friedrich Nietzsche, Sigmund Freud, Martin Heidegger, Walter Benjamin, Georg Lukács, Max Horkheimer and Theodor Adorno, Jürgen Habermas. Henk de Berg is Professor of German at the University of Sheffield. Duncan Large is Professor of German at Swansea University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt6wp91n

Introduction: from: Modern German Thought from Kant to Habermas
Abstract: In the recent evolution of philosophy in France we can trace the passage from the generation known after 1945 as that of the “three H’s” to the generation known since 1960 as that of the three “masters of suspicion”: the three H’s being Hegel, Husserl and Heidegger, and the three masters of suspicion Marx, Nietzsche and Freud.¹

4: Arthur Schopenhauer (1788–1860) from: Modern German Thought from Kant to Habermas
Abstract: The year 1788 stands out in the history of German philosophy for being the year in which Kant’s Kritik der praktischen Vernunftwas published, in Riga, and Arthur Schopenhauer was born, down the Baltic coast in Danzig (now Gdańsk, Poland), on 22 February. This contingent conjunction of the two philosophers’ lives was a happy coincidence, since Schopenhauer would in due course become one of Kant’s most devoted followers (as well as one of his most stringent critics). Their lives were markedly different, though, and can perhaps be taken as symptomatic of the larger differences between the Enlightenment and the Romantic

7: Sigmund Freud (1856–1939) from: Modern German Thought from Kant to Habermas
Abstract: Sigismund Schlomo Freud was born in 1856, in the small town of Freiberg, which at the time belonged to the Austro-Hungarian Empire (renamed Příbor, it is now part of the Czech Republic). Both his parents were Jewish. Their domestic situation was unusual: Freud’s mother, Amalia, was not only twenty years younger than her husband, Jacob, but also younger than Freud’s oldest half-brother. In 1859, Jacob’s wool business was facing financial ruin and he moved the family to Leipzig. They settled in Vienna the following year (by which time Freud’s two half-brothers had emigrated to England). Jacob’s commercial position remained precarious,

11: Max Horkheimer (1895–1973) and Theodor W. Adorno (1903–69) from: Modern German Thought from Kant to Habermas
Abstract: Of the two authors of Dialektik der Aufklärung, Theodor W. Adorno is by far the more influential philosopher. Born in Frankfurt in 1903, he lived his first eleven years in the same street on which Arthur Schopenhauer had once resided. His father, Oscar Wiesengrund, owned a successful wine business; his mother, Maria Calvelli-Adorno della Piana, had been an opera singer. It was only when Adorno emigrated to America, in 1938, that he replaced the patronymic Wiesengrund with the less German-sounding surname taken from his mother. Maria’s unmarried sister, Agathe, a well-known pianist, also lived with the family, and within this

12: Jürgen Habermas (b. 1929) from: Modern German Thought from Kant to Habermas
Abstract: Philosopher, sociologist, and political theorist Jürgen Habermas is the most distinguished German intellectual currently alive, and one of the world’s leading thinkers. Combining genuine philosophical depth with penetrating social analysis, his work draws inspiration from a wide variety of sources, including Marxism and neo-Marxist kritische Theorie, post-Wittgensteinian linguistic philosophy, and the sociological tradition since Émile Durkheim (1858–1917) and Max Weber (1864–1920).

Book Title: El niño en el cine argentino de la postdictadura (1983-2008)-alegoría y nostalgia
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): DUFAYS SOPHIE
Abstract: Este libro constituye la primera monografía dedicada al papel del niño en el cine latinoamericano. El análisis detallado de una decena de películas argentinas de la post-dictadura dirigidas entre 1983 y 2008, incluyendo tanto clásicas (La historia oficial, Un lugar en el mundo) como olvidadas (Amigomio, El rigor del destino), revela cómo la mirada y el lenguaje del niño son puestos al servicio de una alegoría nostálgica, estructurada en torno a la memoria o al lenguaje verbal y vinculada a la figura del padre ausente. Dufays combina los análisis fílmicos con una amplia reflexión teórica sobre las cuatro nociones clave de alegoría, melancolía, nostalgia y duelo y los articula con una genealogía de la figura alegórica del niño en las tradiciones narrativas latinoamericanas. Este recorrido permite al lector explorar las significaciones simbólicas y discursivas que el personaje infantil, la infancia y la familia han adquirido en el cine y en el contexto postdictatorial argentino. Sophie Dufays es investigadora postdoctoral del Fondo Nacional de Investigación Científica de Bélgica, en la Universidad de Louvain-la-Neuve. This book is the first monograph devoted to the role of the child in Latin American cinema. Through close analysis of about ten Argentine fiction films of the post-dictatorship period directed between 1983 and 2008, including both classic such as The Official Story and A Place in the World) and forgotten works such as Amigomío and El rigor del destino. Dufays shows how the child's gaze and language are a means of focusing a nostalgic form of allegory, structured around either memory or verbal language, and related to the figure of the absent father. In combining these analyses with a wide theoretical articulation of four key notions (allegory, melancholy, mourning and nostalgia) and with a genealogy of the allegorical child character in Latin American narrative traditions, Relatos de infancia allows the reader to explore the meanings that childhood and family have come to acquire in cinema, particularly in the Argentine post-dictatorial context. Sophie Dufays is a FNRS Postdoctoral Researcher (Belgian National Fund for Scientific Research) at the University of Louvain-la-Neuve.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt6wp9v7

1 La alegoría clásica versus el símbolo (post)romántico from: El niño en el cine argentino de la postdictadura (1983-2008)
Abstract: La alegoría pictórica o retórica clásica (si se trata de una personificación) se concibe como una imagen concreta, “corporal”, que vehicula, re-presenta o encarna convencionalmente un concepto superior y universal; una imagen que ilustra una idea sin confundirse con ella. Se compone de varios elementos “simbólicos” o emblemas que pueden combinarse de diversas maneras. La organización de los datos visuales suscita en el espectador un esfuerzo interpretativo semejante al que implica la lectura de un relato; es decir, la imagen alegórica clásica lo invita a reconstituir una secuencia (eventualmente narrativa) de acciones o eventos (cf. Vandendorpe 2005: 26). Esta imagen

4 La alegoría entre la melancolía y el duelo: from: El niño en el cine argentino de la postdictadura (1983-2008)
Abstract: La alegoría barroca, que había nacido de un conflicto de interpretación respecto del carácter enigmático de la naturaleza – esta se presentaba como una acumulación de fragmentos estáticos –, conoció un (nuevo) movimiento de interiorización en el siglo XIX, en el contexto de la desposesión de la experiencia subjetiva característica del hombre moderno,²¹ desposesión que la poesía de Baudelaire representa de manera ejemplar. Desde entonces, la alegoría representaría el resto ya no solo de la naturaleza y de la historia colectiva, sino también de una historia subjetiva.

Introducción from: El niño en el cine argentino de la postdictadura (1983-2008)
Abstract: El terreno en el que se arraigan las películas argentinas alegóricas de infancia abarca, además de la historia nacional y de sus símbolos convencionales, una red abundante de tradiciones artísticas articuladas en torno al personaje infantil. No se pretende aquí estudiar el conjunto de estas tradiciones susceptibles de haber alimentado y seguir alimentando la narración de la infancia en el cine argentino contemporáneo, sino más bien insistir en unatendencia narrativa particularmente relevante como antecedente de las películas consideradas y que pone en juego las nociones de alegoría, nostalgia y melancolía que han sido introducidas teóricamente.

2 Niños que hablan from: El niño en el cine argentino de la postdictadura (1983-2008)
Abstract: Si La historia oficialinauguró una serie de películas urbanas articuladas en torno a una niña inocente cuya mirada silenciosa adquiere un valor sintomático y a veces traumático en la economía narrativa, se puede considerar queEspérame muchoabrió otra línea de filmes, centrados en un niño de unos diez años en proceso de iniciación. La mayoría de las películas “de infancia” que siguieron (El rigor del destino, La deuda interna, Un lugar en el mundo, Kamchatka; inclusoAmigomío) fundaron su nostalgia en la puesta en escena armoniosa de un territorio principalmente natural. Es la ciudad, sin embargo, o más

Book Title: Spanish Golden Age Poetry in Motion-The Dynamics of Creation and Conversation
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): TORRES ISABEL
Abstract: The fourteen essays of this volume engage in distinct ways with the matter of motion in early modern Spanish poetics, without limiting the dialectic of stasis and movement to any single sphere or manifestation. Interrogation of the interdependence of tradition and innovation, poetry, power and politics, shifting signifiers, the intersection of topography and deviant temporalities, the movement between the secular and the sacred, tensions between centres and peripheries, issues of manuscript circulation and reception, poetic calls and echoes across continents and centuries, and between creative writing and reading subjects, all demonstrate that Helgerson's central notion of conspicuous movement is relevant beyond early sixteenth-century secular poetics, By opening it up we approximate a better understanding of poetry's flexible spatio-temporal co-ordinates in a period of extraordinary historical circumstances and conterminous radical cultural transformation. Los catorce ensayos de este volumen conectan de una manera perceptible con el tema del movimiento en la poesía española del siglo de oro, sin limitar la dialéctica de la estasis y movimiento a una sola esfera o manifestación única. Entre los multiples enfoques cabe destacar: el cuestionamiento de la interdependencia de la tradición e inovación, de la poesía, del poder y la política, de los significantes que se transforman, de los espacios que conectan y cruzan con los tiempos 'desviados'; análisis de las tensiones entre lo sagrado y lo secular, del conflicto centro-periferia y del complejo sistema de producción, circulación y recepción de los manuscritos; el diálogo con el eco poético a través de los siglos y de los continentes y la construcción creativa del sujeto escritor y/o lector. Al abrir la noción central de Helgerson del "movimiento conspicuo" más allá de la poesía nueva secular, este libro propone un entendimiento más completo de las coordinadas espacio-temporales de la poesía en un periodo de circunstancias históricas extrao Jean Andrews is Associate Professor in the Department of Spanish, Portuguese and Latin American Studies, University of Nottingham. Isabel Torres is Professor of Spanish Golden Age Literature at Queen's University, Belfast. Contributors: Jean Andrews, Dana Bultman, Noelia Cirnigliaro, Marsha Collins, Trevor J. Dadson, Aurora Egido, Verónica Grossi, Anne Holloway, Mark J. Mascia,Terence O'Reilly, Carmen Peraita, Amanda Powell, Colin Thompson, Isabel Torres
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt6wpbqr

1 La poesía mutante del Siglo de Oro from: Spanish Golden Age Poetry in Motion
Author(s) Egido Aurora
Abstract: Para los lectores actuales, ‘Poesía en movimiento’ remite sin duda a la antología de signo vanguardista preparada en 1966 por Octavio Pazy José Emilio Pacheco en la que estos pretendían recoger los poemas de quienes hubieran contribuido a la transformación de la poesía mejicana desde el Modernismo.¹ El asunto no es baladí, si tenemos en cuenta lo que cl Barroco simbolizó, desde su invención, para los modernos, sobre todo a partir de los Conceptos Fundamentales de la Historia del Arte(1915) de Heinrich Wölfflin, que lo caracterizó precisamente como búsqueda del movimiento.² El siglo XX asignó además con esa palabra

7 ‘Dulce es refugio’: from: Spanish Golden Age Poetry in Motion
Author(s) Cirnigliaro Noelia
Abstract: La producción de movimiento en la obra poética del Barroco está asociada usualmente a la trayectoria de un viaje que llega a tener connotaciones alegóricas. Uno de los casos más estelares es la obra de Luis de Góngora, quien abordó en múltiples ocasiones y con una variedad de objetivos estéticos el motivo del viaje y la multifacética figura del peregrino.¹ Ligado indefectiblemente al movimiento de sus pasos, el peregrino gongorino es tan errante como el proceso mismo de la creación poética. Peregrinar, no obstante, no es mero sinónimo de viaje, de movimiento, de desplazamiento y de errático caminar. El objetivo

8 The Staging of Góngora’s Three Funereal Sonnets for Margarita de Austria Estiria from: Spanish Golden Age Poetry in Motion
Author(s) Andrews Jean
Abstract: Luis de Góngora y Argote’s three funeral sonnets for Margarita de Austria Estiria were published in 1612 in the festival book recording the exequies to mark the post-partum death of the queen, celebrated in the Santa Iglesia, Córdoba Cathedral, on 1 and 2 January of that year.¹ Góngora’s three sonnets appear first in a collection of poetry consisting of over thirty sonnets and also canciones,estanciasanddécimascomposed expressly for the exequies by the poets of Córdoba, the vast majority of whom, understandably since the event was organised by the Cathedral chapter, appear to have been clergy. A small

Book Title: Edinburgh German Yearbook 3-Contested Legacies: Constructions of Cultural Heritage in the GDR
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Rolle Sabine
Abstract: Established, commissioned, and edited by the Department of German at the University of Edinburgh, Edinburgh German Yearbook encourages and disseminates lively and open discussion of themes pertinent to German Studies, viewed from all angles but with particular interest in problems arising out of politics and history. No other yearbook covers the entire field while addressing a focused theme in each issue. Coinciding with the twentieth anniversary of the fall of the Berlin Wall, volume 3 re-directs current debates on memory and tradition, opening up fresh perspectives on the cultural history of the GDR and exploring how the nation's cultural discourses entered into a productive but often problematic dialogue with the values of the past and with the German cultural inheritance. Topics include the compositional engagement with musical heritage; industrial design and cultural politics; the establishment of antifascist monuments and their use as sites of resistance; constructions of a cultural heritage in architecture; the influence of cultural politics on literary scholarship; continuities and breaks with tradition in visual and literary culture; and engagement with the past in the works of Konrad Wolf, Irmtraud Morgner, and Anna Seghers. Contributors: Leonie Beiersdorf, Julian Blunk, Dara Bryant, Helen Finch, Carola Hähnel-Mesnard, Stacy Hartman, Elaine Kelly, Heather Mathews, Katharina Pfützner, Matthew Philpotts, Larson Powell, Tim Rei, Marianne Schwarz-Scherer, Laura Silverberg. Matthew Philpotts is Lecturer in German at the University of Manchester, and Sabine Rolle is Lecturer in German at the University of Edinburgh.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt7zssk0

Formalism, Naturalism, and the Elusive Socialist Realist Picture at the GDR’s Dritte deutsche Kunstausstellung, 1953 from: Edinburgh German Yearbook 3
Author(s) Mathews Heather E.
Abstract: Willy Colberg’s painting Streikposten in Hamburg[Fig. 1] was one of a number of artworks by West Germans to be included in theDritte deutsche Kunstausstellungin 1953, a major national event dedicated to showcasing emerging socialist realist art in the German Democratic Republic. In the following discussion, I will examine how the persistence of a naturalistic style, communicated in part by West German artworks like Colberg’s, helped to shape East Germans’ perceptions of their own progress towards socialist realism. As the case of theDritte deutsche Kunstausstellungdemonstrates, exhibitions are active, public narratives through which organizers are able to

Vom „Klassencharakter der Literatur“ zum „nationalen Kulturerbe“: from: Edinburgh German Yearbook 3
Author(s) Reiß Tim
Abstract: Der folgende Text geht von der Beobachtung aus, dass die kulturpolitisch angeleiteten Versuche, eine eigenständige DDRIdentität herauszubilden, schon lange vor 1989/90 gescheitert sind.¹ In den 1980er Jahren beziehen sich kulturpolitische Veröffentlichungen der DDR zunehmend auf eine Idee der Einheit der kulturellen Überlieferung. Diese Idee artikulierte sich in einer Rhetorik, die das „Bewußtwerden der Verwurzelung der sozialistischen deutschen Nation in der ganzen deutschenGeschichte“ anmahnte.² Damit war der Versuch einer erbetheoretischen Legitimation deutscher Zweistaatlichkeit gescheitert, denn diese bezog sich auf eine Konzeption, die von der wesentlichen Heterogenität der kulturellen Überlieferung ausging.³ Die Vorstellung vom Erbe als „unteilbarer“ Einheit stand von ihrer

Distinktionsstrategien im literarischen Feld und Aktualisierung tabuisierter Traditionen in der selbst verlegten Literatur der DDR in den 1980er Jahren from: Edinburgh German Yearbook 3
Author(s) Hähnel-Mesnard Carola
Abstract: Die selbst verlegte Literatur der 1980er Jahre zeichnet sich auf inhaltlicher und formaler Ebene, aber auch hinsichtlich ihrer Produktion und Rezeption durch einen radikalen Bruch mit den verschiedenen Traditionen der DDR-Literatur aus. Zwischen 1978 und 1990 zirkulierten in der DDR circa dreißig Kleinstzeitschriften, die größtenteils durch die Zusammenarbeit jüngerer Autoren und bildender Künstler entstanden sind.¹

6: Freud und die Tragödie from: Tragedy and the Tragic in German Literature, Art, and Thought
Author(s) Ette Wolfram
Abstract: Die Behauptung, in der Moderne könne es keine authentischen Tragödien mehr geben, verdankt sich zum einem Teil der Blindheit gegenüber dem Medium des Films. Hier floriert das Genre, und nicht bloß in depravierter Form. Zu einem anderen Teil jedoch liegt ihr eine zutreffende Intuition zugrunde. “Die Mehrzahl der Stücke, die wir als tragische Meisterwerke betrachten, sind nur Familiendebatten und -streitereien,” schreibt Jean Giraudoux.¹ Wie aber könnte die kleine Welt der Familie noch beanspruchen, die tragenden gesellschaftlichen Konflikte einer globalen, hochkomplexen Welt mit offenen und sich permanent verschiebenen Rändern darzustellen? Es spricht einiges dafür, dass diese Welt “tragisch” verfasst ist, dass

8: Rosenzweig’s Tragedy and the Spectacles of Strauss: from: Tragedy and the Tragic in German Literature, Art, and Thought
Author(s) Bernstein Jeffrey A.
Abstract: Is there not something oppressive about raising, once again, the question of how to understand German-Jewish history (if, in fact, one assumes that non-Jewish and Jewish Germans actually participated in the samehistory)? According to Gershom Scholem, the answer would have to be yes. In the context of speaking about German-Jewish dialogue, he states the following:

12: Vestiges of the Tragic from: Tragedy and the Tragic in German Literature, Art, and Thought
Author(s) Roche Mark W.
Abstract: A common refrain today is that tragedy is either not possible or hopelessly unable to do justice to our age. Arguments for this view are diverse. They include, among others, the transition from what the Italian philosopher Giambattista Vico called the age of heroes, where one single individual could still direct the course of history, to the age of men, when the due procedure of civic institutions, and no longer the great individual, became the guarantor of order, justice, and historical change.

13: Atrocity and Agency: from: Tragedy and the Tragic in German Literature, Art, and Thought
Author(s) Pirro Robert
Abstract: Relatively late in his career W. G. Sebald began attracting wide attention for his semi-autobiographical books written in a dense and digressive style and incorporating black-and-white photographs and postcard images. These images intimate some of the more profound costs of nineteenth-and twentieth-century European civilization. Evoking the aftermath of wars, genocides, and environmental devastation in such books as Vertigo,The Rings of Saturn, andThe Emigrants, Sebald has attracted a growing body of scholarly criticism that tends increasingly to examine his literary engagement with traces of past suffering under the rubric of trauma. In discussing Sebald’sLuftkrieg und Literatur, his polemic

Book Title: Arno Schmidt's 'Zettel's Traum'-An Analysis
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Langbehn Volker Max
Abstract: Arno Schmidt (1914-1979) is considered one of the most daring and influential writers of postwar Germany; the Germanist Jeremy Adler has called him a "giant of postwar German literature." Schmidt was awarded the Fontane Prize in 1964 and the Goethe Prize in 1973, and his early fiction has been translated into English to high critical acclaim, but he is not a well-known figure in the English-speaking world, where his complex work remains at the margins of critical inquiry. Volker Langbehn's book introduces Schmidt to the English-speaking audience, with primary emphasis on his most famous novel, 'Zettel's Traum'. One reviewer called the book an "elephantine monster" because of its unconventional size (folio format), length (1334 pages and over 10 million characters), and unique presentation of text in the form of notes, typewritten pages, parallel columns, and collages. The novel narrates the life of the main characters, Daniel Pagenstecher, Paul Jacobi and his wife Wilma, and their teenage daughter Franziska. In discussing the life and works of Edgar Allan Poe, the four engage in the problems connected with a translation of Poe. Langbehn's study investigates how literary language can mediate or account for the world of experiences and for concepts. Schmidt's use of unconventional presentation formats challenges us to analyze how we think about reading and writing literary texts. Instead of viewing such texts as a representation of reality, Schmidt's novel destabilizes this unquestioned mode of representation, posing a radical challenge to what contemporary literary criticism defines as literature. No comprehensive study of 'Zettel's Traum' exists in English. Volker Langbehn is associate professor of German at San Francisco State University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81f1w

Introduction from: Arno Schmidt's 'Zettel's Traum'
Abstract: Arno Schmidt (1914–1979) is not a well-known figure in literary studies in this country. Although he has been recognized as probably the single most important experimental novelist in German since the Second World War, there is still little criticism on his work. Despite the increase in the amount of published Schmidt research over the past ten years in Germany, his works have never attracted a large readership. The linguistic density and the sophisticated cultural reflections of his texts seem to prohibit his writings from ever becoming popular. But Schmidt has at least finally gained recognition as a “giant of

3: The Etym Theory from: Arno Schmidt's 'Zettel's Traum'
Abstract: A small detour is necessary to mark the developments Schmidt underwent before Zettel’s Traum. In the conclusion to “Berechnungen II,” he projects a new prose model based on the dream. The remark hints at Schmidt’s increasing interest in the dream as a literary means of representation and as a subjective demonstration of personal experiences. The small essay “Traumkunstwerke,” also written in 1956, documents Schmidt’s fascination with the interrelation of literary texts and dreams.¹ In his discussion of Fouqué, the English critic, poet, and philosopher Samuel Taylor Coleridge (1772–1834), and E. T. A. Hoffmann, Schmidt concludes that literature is filled

5: Schmidt’s Reading of Freud’s Ego-Development from: Arno Schmidt's 'Zettel's Traum'
Abstract: An analysis of Schmidt’s dialectic of conscious and unconscious thought processes remains insufficient without a more thorough investigation of Schmidt’s understanding of subjectivity. An inquiry into what constitutes subjectivity seems even more necessary since Schmidt alludes to the androgynous character of our being. Schmidt’s stress on the unconscious as the prime determinant of our conscious mode of processing information unveils the central role the unconscious assumes in any reflection on subjectivity. Throughout the previous chapters, however, I emphasized that reading entails a process of decipherment, which in turn always leads to a process of construction and reconstruction. Since for Schmidt

3: Frau Welt. Venereal Disease. from: Love and Death in Goethe
Abstract: Woman, in the Liebestod tradition, is both a love object and an agent of death. Charlotte, for example, is both a madonna and femme fatale to Werther, a paragon of lust-defying purity but as seductive as the magnetic mountain in Werther’s grandmother’s tale, a mountain that pulls the hardware out of passing ships and sends them to a watery grave (16. and 26. Julius 1771). The narratives that evolved around Friederike Brion, too, rely on stereotypes of woman as virgin and woman as whore.¹ The Princess von Este in Torquato Tasso appears first as Tasso’s muse, and then, in his

4: Die Leiden des jungen Werthers from: Love and Death in Goethe
Abstract: Two of the works that Goethe wrote in 1774 end with a Liebestod. Clavigo, an enduringly popular play, does not actually celebrate the blending of the lovers in a death-transcending union: Its horizon is more social than existential and revolves around Clavigo’s difficulty in choosing between love and ambition, between ascendancy in society and government on the one hand and marriage to the declassé Marie Beaumarchais on the other. The dilemma is resolved by the thrust of a dagger from Marie’s brother, the mortally wounded Clavigo falling on the coffin of the woman he has wronged. He grasps her cold

5: Stella: from: Love and Death in Goethe
Abstract: Stella has been called a “Pendant zu Werther . . .; die Figuren der Dreiecksgeschichte sind vertauscht” (MA 1,1:757), for while in Werther it was one woman between two men, in Stella it is one man between two women. Werther ends in the death of the protagonist, Stella does so only in a late, second version, no longer subtitled “Ein Schauspiel für Liebende,” but simply “Ein Trauerspiel.” Both works pose the question of the uniqueness of personalities and raise the possibility of one lover replacing or standing in for another. In Stella, substitution is thematized, as part of a demonstration

2: The Whites Arrive: from: History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Higgins Iain M.
Abstract: Like most modern nation states, Canada was invented slowly, and like many nation states beyond Europe, it was invented by white colonizers who came from overseas. Indeed, the standard history of the name “Canada” itself retraces the nation’s slow historical emergence as a product of European expansion and colonization. Originally a Huron-Iroquois word meaning “village” or “settlement,” kanata entered the Euro-American record through Jacques Cartier’s accounts of his explorations in the 1530s and 1540s, and referred to a region in the Laurentians (see ch. 4, Laflèche). Contemporary European mapmakers quickly borrowed the name from Cartier, using it still more vaguely

4: Literature on New France from: History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Laflèche Guy
Abstract: The writings on New France constitute a great marginal literature spanning three centuries. The term “literature” has to be understood in a broader sense here, since literary texts, or works possessing an aesthetic value, were rare exceptions in this period. Such texts as did exist seldom concerned themselves with the French colony. Their subject was rather North America and the Native Americans — in other words, the anthropology, human geography, or, as it was called at the time, the natural history of the New World. After the discoveries, explorations, and voyages came the long and difficult missionary endeavors, conducted mostly by

11: Politics and Literature between Nationalism and Internationalism from: History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Breitbach Julia
Abstract: In 1926 the poet A. J. M. Smith (1902–1980) found Canada immersed in “an age of change, and . . . a change that is taking place with a rapidity unknown in any other epoch. . . . Ideas are changing and therefore manners and morals are changing. It is not surprising, then, to find that the arts, which are an intensification of life and thought, are likewise in a state of flux” (“Contemporary Poetry”). At this point in its history, Smith argued, the forces of modernization had already transformed the country so thoroughly as to infuse it with

27: Canons of Diversity in Contemporary English-Canadian Literature from: History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Banita Georgiana
Abstract: Both in theory and ideally also in practice, Canada has adopted a constitutional policy of multiculturalism that comprises the layered, interrelated histories and cultures of all its constituent groups: English Canadians, French Canadians, First Nations, and other ethnic minorities alike. Before the passing of the 1947 Canadian Citizenship Act, all Canadians were counted as British subjects, but over the following two decades, mounting local and international tensions — such as Quebec nationalism, growing demands for compensation from members of the First Nations, and post-Second World War immigration policies — required a revision of the Canadian concept of nation. Canadian identity was thus

30: The French-Canadian Short Prose Narrative from: History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Eibl Doris G.
Abstract: For a long time Quebec short fiction did not rank highly in the hierarchy of genres. In the 1980s and 1990s, however, it experienced a boom in popularity, with the number of publications steadily rising: In the early 1970s only about ten short-story volumes had been published per annum, whereas the 1990s saw an average of thirty to thirty-five volumes published per year, not to mention publications in numerous journals and weekly as well as daily newspapers. From the mid-1970s onwards a great thematic and formal diversity could be found in French-Canadian short stories. This diversity, characterized by a seemingly

1 Preliminaries: from: Spanish American Poetry after 1950
Abstract: Why begin a book about modern Spanish American poetry using the mid-twentieth century as the point of departure? Because, as William Rowe has pointed out (Rowe, 2000, 17), Vanguardism as a movement had largely run out of steam by the 1940s and “In the poets who began to write in the 1950s, there is a concern with new starting points”. Other critics (cf. Salvador, 1993, 262) agree. We can now see that the clearest illustration of this concern is to be found in the Poemas y antipoemas(1954) of Nicanor Parra. But as we examine this collection we notice that,

3 Borges and Cardenal from: Spanish American Poetry after 1950
Abstract: I have attempted to show that the the mid-twentieth century constituted a watershed in Spanish American poetry. This is confirmed by two more important facts of literary history. The first is that Borges was now about to begin writing a significant amount of poetry again, after having all but abandoned the genre since 1929. The second is that in 1954, the year which saw the first volume of Neruda’s Odasand the publication of Parra’sPoemas y antipoemas, Ernesto Cardenal began to write his first major poem,Hora O.

Book Title: Narrative Deconstructions of Gender in Works by Audrey Thomas, Daphne Marlatt, and Louise Erdrich- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Rosenthal Caroline
Abstract: By analyzing the works of Thomas, Marlatt, and Erdrich through the lenses of subjectivity, gender studies, and narratology, Caroline Rosenthal brings to light new perspectives on their writings. Although all three authors write metafictions that challenge literary realism and dominant views of gender, the forms of their counter-narratives vary. In her novel 'Intertidal Life', Thomas traces the disintegration of an identity through narrative devices that unearth ruptures and contradictions in stories of gender. In contrast, Marlatt, in 'Ana Historic', challenges the regulatory fiction of heterosexuality. She offers her protagonist a way out into a new order that breaks with the law of the father, creating a "monstrous" text that explores the possibilities of a lesbian identity. In her tetralogy of novels made up of 'Love Medicine', 'Tracks', 'The Beet Queen', and 'The Bingo Palace', Erdrich resists definite readings of femininity altogether. By drawing on trickster narratives, she creates an open system of gendered identities that is dynamic and unfinalizable, positing the most fragmented worldview as the most enduring. By applying gender and narrative theory to nuanced analysis of the texts, Rosenthal's study elucidates the correlation between gender identity formation and narrative. Caroline Rosenthal is Professor and Chair of American Literature at the Friedrich-Schiller University in Jena, Germany. Her book 'Narrative Deconstructions of Gender' was published by Camden House in 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81nd9

1: Framing Theories from: Narrative Deconstructions of Gender in Works by Audrey Thomas, Daphne Marlatt, and Louise Erdrich
Abstract: Identity is an all-pervasive and fundamental aspect of human life, and yet identity as a concept is one of the most hotly debated — contested and defended — concepts of our time. The term identity has its roots in developmental psychology and has only been the subject of critical debates since modernism. The notion of identity as a psycho-social entity only dates back about 100 years to the psychology of William James who differentiated an outer perspective, the “social self” (me) as the self recognized by others, from an inner perspective, the “continuous, inner self” (I) that denoted the self as experienced

The Myth of Otherness: from: Goethe Yearbook 19
Author(s) BERNDT FRAUKE
Abstract: Western culture is dominated by representation—however, in 1993 in a series of essays, Jean-Luc Nancy counters this paradigm of all signification processes from a culturally critical perspective with a new paradigm, and proclaims “the birth to presence.”¹ In the course of this paradigm shift from representation to presence and as a consequence of Hans Ulrich Gumbrecht’s work, contemporary literary criticism has also taken an interest in “what meaning cannot convey.”² Yet, to speak of a “new” paradigm implies a kind of mastery, since presence basically represents an outdated paradigm in two respects. In the hermeneutic tradition, whose roots are

Introduction from: Goethe Yearbook 19
Author(s) HAMACHER BERND
Abstract: In der Wissenschaftsgeschichte der Germanistik wurde bereits in unterschiedlichen Zusammenhängen die Goethe-Philologie als Paradigma für die Theorie-und Methodenentwicklung in der Literaturwissenschaft insgesamt beschrieben. Nicht ausreichend aufgearbeitet ist indes, dass die Neugermanistik im 19. Jahrhundert nicht nur aus der Goethe-Philologie heraus entstanden, sondern ihre disziplinäre Gestalt noch bis in die Gegenwart hinein von diesen Entstehungsbedingungen geprägt ist. Bei einzelnen Segmenten der wissenschaftlichen Terminologie—wie etwa bei den Gattungsbegriffen oder bei Begriffen wie “Symbol”—ist evident, dass wichtige Grundbegriffe noch der heutigen (deutschen) germanistischen Wissenschaftssprache nicht ohne Rekurs auf Goethe zu definieren sind. Eher verdeckt wird durch solche punktuellen begriffsgeschichtlichen Evidenzen der

“Man sucht einen Mittelpunkt und das ist schwer und nicht einmal gut”: from: Goethe Yearbook 19
Author(s) MEIER-EWERT LAVINIA
Abstract: Ich wünschte, versetzte Wilhelm, daß ich Ihnen alles, was gegenwärtig in mir vorgeht, entdecken könnte! Alle Vorgefühle, die ich jemals über Menschheit und ihre Schicksale gehabt, die mich von Jugend auf, mir selbst unbemerkt, begleiteten, finde ich in Shakespeares Stücken erfüllt und entwickelt. Es scheint, als wenn er uns alle Rätsel offenbarte, ohne daß man doch sagen kann: hier oder da ist das Wort der Auflösung. Seine Menschen scheinen natürliche Menschen zu sein, und sie sind es doch nicht. Diese geheimnisvollsten und zusammengesetztesten Geschöpfe der Natur handeln vor uns in seinen Stücken,

Book Title: Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): MITCHELL J. ALLAN
Abstract: Why do medieval writers routinely make use of exemplary rhetoric? How does it work, and what are its ethical and poetical values? And if Chaucer and Gower must be seen as vigorously subverting it, then why do they persist in using it? Borrowing from recent developments in ethical criticism and theory, this book addresses such questions by reconstructing a late medieval rationale for the ethics of exemplary narrative. The author argues that Chaucer's ‘Canterbury Tales’ and Gower's ‘Confessio Amantis’ attest to the vitality of a narrative - rather than strictly normative - ethics that has roots in premodern traditions of practical reason and rhetoric. Chaucer and Gower are shown to be inheritors and respecters of an early and unexpected form of ethical pragmatism - which has profound implications for the orthodox history of ethics in the West. Recipient of the 2008 John H. Fisher Award for significant contribution to the field of Gower Studies. Dr J ALLAN MITCHELL is Lecturer in Medieval Literature, University of Kent, Canterbury.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81rhw

2 Rhetorical Reason: from: Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower
Abstract: In its ethical capacity exemplary rhetoric has been maligned at least since the time of Kant’s fatal pronouncement, “worse service cannot be rendered morality than that an attempt be made to derive it from examples.”¹ The eighteenth-century rationalist could not accept that moral philosophy might legitimately be based upon the rhetoric of example, or rather, as it was known, reasoning from cases a posteriori.² When it came to the metaphysical grounding of morals Kant famously rejected cases and everything circumstantial for that matter, preferring “categorical imperatives” over all things “hypothetical.” Such a tectonic shift away from rhetoric towards pure a

6 Pointing the Moral: from: Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower
Abstract: In his monumental study of preaching in the later Middle Ages, G. R. Owst argued that vernacular literary tradition effectively contracted the “germs” of literary realism, satire, and social consciousness from the pulpit. In a later chapter of his Literature and Pulpit in Medieval England, entitled “Fiction and Instruction in the Sermon Exempla,” Owst was able to show that English poetry and drama were profoundly shaped by the pulpit rhetoric: travelogue, classical pagan tales, animal fables, ribald and satirical matter (anticlerical, antimatrimonial, antifeminist) all have precedents in sermon exempla.¹ Historians since have gone on to corroborate and refine his thesis,

7 Griselda and the Question of Ethical Monstrosity from: Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower
Abstract: From the standpoint of exemplary morality the Clerk’s Tale can easily offend ordinary “prudence.”¹ The tale is emphatically a problem exemplum in which the most pressing practical question – for medievalists and medievals – is what to do with Griselda’s voluntary submission to the inhuman demands of Walter. What is it good to do with her example? Does Griselda epitomize wifely perfection in acting as she does; does she represent a spiritual ideal to which readers should aspire without acting as she does; or is she morally repugnant for doing what she does? At what level of generality or specificity, ultimately, are

Introduction from: Charles d'Orléans in England, 1415-1440
Author(s) Arn M.
Abstract: When I began studying the life and work of Charles d’Orléans some twenty years ago, many of the major sources were old. Pierre Champion’s biography of the duke and edition of his French poems dated from the early part of the century; Steele and Day’s edition of the English work, from the 1940s. Only the work of Daniel Poirion, especially his book Le Poète et le prince: L’Évolution du lyrisme courtois de Guillaume de Machaut à Charles d’Orléans (1965), was relatively recent – but all that has since changed.

Charles d’Orléans et l’‘autre’ langue: from: Charles d'Orléans in England, 1415-1440
Author(s) GALDERISI CLAUDIO
Abstract: Pour beaucoup de poètes, rimer, au début du XV e siècle, est aussi, sinon surtout, un ‘Passe Temps’. Comme l’a clairement mis en évidence Jean-Claude Mühlethaler,³ c’est dans cette perspective poétique en ton mineur que semble s’inscrire toute une branche de la production poétique de cette période, de Jean Regnier à Alain Chartier, de François Villon aux Grands Rhétoriqueurs. Par delà le rapprochement traditionnel et courtois aux activités de la chasse, de la pêche ou de l’amour, le mot Passe Temps paraît lié surtout

4: Reckoning with God: from: German Women's Writing in the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Marshall Sheridan
Abstract: In this article I examine the place of religious beliefs, and the interrelation between religion and gender, in a selection of twenty-first-century German-language prose fiction written by women. In line with the widespread recognition of a “ religious turn”¹ or “(re)sacralization”² that is transforming political and cultural discourse in the “post-secular society”³ in which we live, the role of religion in contemporary German-language literature is subject to increasing scrutiny. In German literary studies the depiction of Islam in Germanic culture and the history of German-Jewish identity currently receive much more explicit attention than the place of Christian faith.⁴ Julian Preece

5: Muslim Writing, Women’s Writing from: German Women's Writing in the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Lawton Lindsay
Abstract: Women’s memoirs that share common themes of forced marriage, honor killing, or “crimes of honor” and detail the cruelty and violence to which the protagonist is subjected during her quest to pursue a “Western” lifestyle have been a part of the German-language literary landscape for decades. As they are increasingly tied to Islam, however, these memoirs have become especially visible in the twenty-first century.¹ The similarity of these works is reinforced by marketing conventions, including sensational titles like Ich wollte nur frei sein: Meine Flucht vor der Zwangsehe(I Only Wanted to be Free: My Flight from Forced Marriage, 2005),

7: The Awkward Politics of Popfeminist Literary Events: from: German Women's Writing in the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Stehle Maria
Abstract: Since the mid-2000s there has been a marked uptick across the Western world of discussions surrounding the validity and effectiveness of feminism today.¹ Terms such as “postfeminism” or “lifestyle feminism” are increasingly used to characterize a popular interest in making feminism palatable through depoliticization, even as political actions are publicly evaluated as successes or failures on the basis of criteria more appropriate for their second-wave forebears. These discussions either brand feminist cultural production as successful activism against a sexist, mainstream, and consumerist culture, or condemn it as mere media sensation that points to the failure or ineffectuality of feminism today.

8: The Indictment of Neoliberalism and Communism in the Novels of Katharina Hacker, Nikola Richter, Judith Schalansky, and Julia Schoch from: German Women's Writing in the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Druxes Helga
Abstract: Leftist cultural critic Jeffrey Nealon argues that “we’ve experienced an intensification of postmodern capitalism over the past decades, an increasing saturation of the economic sphere into formerly independent segments of everyday cultural life.”¹ The new global economy elevates competitiveness to its guiding principle, mandating a national quest to maintain “Konkurrenzfähigkeit des Standorts Deutschland” (competitiveness of Germany as a business hub).² At the same time, since the rise of neoliberalism in the 1990s, intensified technologies of the self, widely promoted by popular culture and the advertising industry, insinuate that individuals should take a functionalist approach toward themselves as sites of experience,

3 Rescuing the Past from: Arturo Pérez-Reverte: Narrative Tricks and Narrative Strategies
Abstract: ‘Ya no es malo ni es bueno. Sólo es historia’ [It is no longer either good or bad. It is just history]. So says Arturo Pérez-Reverte when discussing Spain’s past, and the temptation to use that past for political ends.¹ His point is that history, the past, is only dangerous when it is manipulated in the present. We need not fear it except when we are ignorant about it, for then others can retell it, reshape it and, in so doing, mould it and us to their purposes. However, knowledge of events, a memory of them, whether direct or indirect,

Book Title: Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): de Menezes Alison Ribeiro
Abstract: This monograph offers two new perspectives on Spanish writer, Juan Goytisolo. First, under the themes of authorship and dissidence, it integrates his writing across several genres, providing a rounded assessment of his contribution to cultural debates in Spain since the sixties and arguing that resistance to repressive discourses characterizes his essays and autobiographies as much as his fiction. Second, it revises the prevailing critical interpretation of Goytisolo's fiction by building on four premises: that his novels are less clearly oppositional than prevailing interpretations imply; that, in order to engage with discourses of identity, he employs an idiom which, contrary to his own statements, is not a poststructuralist autonomous world of words; that a textual practice grounded in the recognizable experience of post-Civil War Spain, rather than one which seeks out the realm of pure textuality, is essential to Goytisolo's subversive political intentions; and that the autobiographical element of much of his work constitutes a more complex narrative aesthetic than has been appreciated. The book argues that if Goytisolo's work is interpreted as an ethical engagement with postmodernist theory, rather than as an illustration of it, then certain contradictions for which he has been criticized are seen in a new and valuable light. ALISON RIBEIRO DE MENEZES is a Senior Lecturer in Spanish at University College Dublin.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt9qdps1

INTRODUCTION: from: Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident
Abstract: The humble proof-reader in José Saramago’s História do cerco de Lisboa, who inserts a negative in a text where the author had intended none, thus changing retrospectively the course of historical events, raises some of the most pressing questions preoccupying contemporary novelists: the issues of truth and relativity, the possibility and implications of multiple authoring, and the potency of authorship as narrative authority. Impersonalizing authorship, by turning it into a process involving one or more agents and various stages, does not, however, remove textual author-ity. As Cervantes magnificently demonstrated inDon Quixotefive centuries ago, it can also, paradoxically, reinforce

1 AUTHORING THE SELF: from: Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident
Abstract: If, for twentieth-century writers, the question of authorship and its relationship to the authority of a ‘writing subject’ has posed considerable problems, then writing the life of the self – encapsulated perfectly, if in reverse order, in the very term auto-bio-graphy – makes these issues even more acute. The practice of autobiography necessarily confers on the autobiographical text an implied truth value upon which the weight of contemporary theory since existentialism and structuralism has cast considerable doubt. Unmoored from the Cartesian certainties of consciousness, contemporary autobiography stages an interplay between facts and imaginative creativity, replacing the original ‘confessional’ status of

4 MIGRATING SOUTH, WANDERING EAST: from: Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident
Abstract: In Juan sin Tierra(1975) andMakbara(1980) Goytisolo develops a number of themes already outlined inDon Julián, but from a more international and less purely Spanish perspective. The author’s search for a dissident literary identity, as the majority of critics have argued, is now subsumed into a wider political preoccupation with North–South and East–West relations.² Although certain autobiographical aspects of the earlier novels are retained – the opening allusion to a Cuban sugar plantation inJuan sin Tierra, for instance, deliberately recalls the manner in which Goytisolo’s great-grandfather amassed the family fortune³ – the focus broadens

6 THE AUTHOR AS MYSTIC: from: Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident
Abstract: When Las virtudes del pájaro solitariofirst appeared in 1988 the novel caused a certain sensation, its mystical theme taking readers by surprise. Research by Javier Escudero Rodríguez has since shown that this reaction was somewhat misplaced, given that an obsession with death and an emergent interest in mysticism can be traced in Goytisolo’s fiction to at least the time ofMakbara.² Indeed, looking back even further, we might recall from the discussion above (pp. 94–5) thatJuan sin Tierraopens with an allusion to Eastern mysticism, though, admittedly, a pejorative one. The appearance of a religious theme is

7 THE AUTHOR AS INTERTEXTUAL CRITIC: from: Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident
Abstract: In 2003, with the publication of Telón de boca, Goytisolo rather dramatically announced an end to his fifty-year career as a writer of fiction.² Whether or not this turns out to be the case, the last three novels of Goytisolo’s career to date constitute a review of the main preoccupations of his writing sinceSeñas de identidad. In this sense, they bring us full circle, for each novel tackles anew the themes of authorship, identity, and dissidence with which this book has been concerned. But these novels are not just a review or summary of past works. They also offer

Link to from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Abstract: Against the wishes of his mother and his sister (KGB II.6.1, 501), and against the advice of his friend Erwin Rohde (KGB II.6.1, 595) — which may, ever since Rohde’s marriage in August 1877, have counted for much less (cf. KSB 5, 277) — Nietzsche decided to give up his professorship at Basel, and he applied to be released from the post on grounds of ill-health on 2 May 1879 (KSB 5, 411–12). He had developed, as he told Franz Overbeck on 3 April 1879, “a phobia about Basel, a veritable anxiety and inhibition about the bad water, the

5: Daybreak from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Bamford Rebecca
Abstract: Nietzsche began to make preparatory notes for Daybreak: Thoughts on the Prejudices of Morality (Morgenröthe: Gedanken über die moralischen Vorurteile) in January 1880, and performed most of the main work of composing it in Genoa between November 1880 and May 1881; the preface was added in 1886.¹ In Ecce Homo(published 1908), Nietzsche claims that the particular pathologies of his existence provided the necessary conditions for Daybreak. He writes that during the winter of 1880, spent at Genoa, a “sweetening and spiritualization” (Versüssung und Vergeistigung) almost inseparable from an “extreme poverty of blood and muscle” (extremen Armuth an Blut und Muskel)

11: Twilight of the Idols from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Diethe Carol
Abstract: The great tragedy of Nietzsche’s mental breakdown is compounded by the fact that, by the time of his last year of sanity, he had severed his connections with those formerly nearest to him (Wagner, his mother Franziska, and his sister Elisabeth): he was free at last to concentrate on what he intended to publish as his magnum opus , The Will to Power (Der Wille zur Macht). His sister, with whom he had had a fraught relationship ever since her involvement in his attempt at a rapprochement with Lou Salomé in 1882, had married the anti-Semitic agitator and Wagnerian acolyte

Link to the from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Abstract: When he received a Wahnsinnszettel from Nietzsche, Strindberg replied immediately (in Latin) with a quotation from Horace:

Book Title: Museums and Biographies-Stories, Objects, Identities
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Hill Kate
Abstract: Museums and biographies both tell the stories of lives. This innovative collection examines for the first time biography - of individuals, objects and institutions - in relationship to the museum, casting new light on the many facets of museum history and theory, from the lives of prominent curators, to the context of museums of biography and autobiography. Separate sections cover individual biography and museum history, problematising individual biographies, institutional biographies, object biographies, and museums as biographies/autobiographies. These articles offer new ways of thinking about museums and museum history, exploring how biography in and of the museum enriches museum stories by stressing the inter-related nature of lives of people, objects and institutions as part of a dense web of relationships. Through their widely ranging research, the contributors demonstrate the value of thinking about the stories told in and by museums, and the relationships which make up museums; and suggest new ways of undertaking and understanding museum biographies. Dr Kate Hill is Senior Lecturer in History at the University of Lincoln. Contributors: Jeffrey Abt, Felicity Bodenstein, Alison Booth, Stuart Burch, Lucie Carreau, Elizabeth Crooke, Steffi de Jong, Mark Elliott, Sophie Forgan, Mariana Françozo, Laura Gray, Kate Hill, Suzanne MacLeod, Wallis Miller, Belinda Nemec, Donald Preziosi, Helen Rees Leahy, Linda Sandino, Julie Sheldon, Alexandra Stara, Louise Tythacott, Chris Whitehead, Anne Whitelaw.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.cttn3370

2 Introducing Mr Moderna Museet: from: Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Burch Stuart
Abstract: Jean Tinguely’s Fiesta Bar is lined with liquor bottles. Tasty-looking snacks by Claes Oldenburg are available for visual consumption. People hungry for knowledge can read from an extensive library. The even more inquisitive are able to salve their curiosity by nosing through some postcards sent by On Kawara. Those wishing to exercise their bodies rather than their minds can follow Andy Warhol’s handy Dance Diagram and foxtrot around the gallery. There is, alas, no musical accompaniment. Indeed, time seems to stand still, like the motionless hands of Ed Kienholz’s clock. Suddenly the silence is broken when someone presses an inviting

3 Sydney Pavière and the Harris Museum and Art Gallery, Preston from: Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Gray Laura
Abstract: After 33 years of service, Sydney Pavière, white-haired and three years beyond the usual retirement age, stood before the Art Gallery Committee. He was there to announce his retirement from his post of art director and curator at the Harris Museum and Art Gallery. Addressing the committee, and speaking with obvious affection and sincerity, he said: ‘Gentlemen we have built a monument here. please see that nothing is done to despoil it’ (Rushton 1959, 33).

4 ‘His Best Successor’: from: Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Sheldon Julie
Abstract: In 1875, Lady Eastlake, the widow of the first Director of the National Gallery, confided to a cousin that she believed herself to have been the best person to have succeeded her husband in the management of the Gallery:

8 Schinkel’s Museums: from: Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Miller Wallis
Abstract: The story of architecture museums in Berlin is, in one sense, a short one.¹ Although Berlin’s collection of archives dedicated to architecture is quite deep, it was only in 2007, when the Technical University renamed its archive and exhibition space after its historic Architekturmuseum, that the architecture museum as a type of institution re-established itself in the city’s cultural landscape.² Before this, the last time there was an architecture museum in Berlin was from 1931 to 1933. It was called the Schinkel Museum, and its short lifespan is surprising, given that Karl Friedrich Schinkel (1781–1841) was – and still

11 Institutional Autobiography and the Architecture of the Art Museum: from: Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Whitehead Christopher
Abstract: This chapter explores some of the ways in which art museums speak with and about their own pasts through focusing historically on events at the National Gallery in the 1980s and 1990s. The ongoing revalorisation of Victorian interiors within museums which commenced in those decades has led to a spate of restoration projects. These ostensibly reverse the modernist project of stripping away (or, more accurately, overlaying) Victorian features. Such restorations re-inscribe a heritage of Victorian museology into the modern-day art museum as a building and as an institution. What emerges is a special kind of institutional autobiography in which the

13 ‘Dressed like an Amazon’: from: Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Françozo Mariana
Abstract: In 2000, the Brazilian Ministry of Culture prepared and organised an exhibition commemorating the 500th anniversary of the arrival of Europeans on the South American continent. Located at the Ibirapuera Park in the city of São Paulo, the exhibition was called ‘Mostra do Redescobrimento’ (‘Rediscovery Exhibit’) and aimed at showcasing a wide variety of examples of Brazilian art, including Portuguese–Brazilian, African–Brazilian, Amerindian, Baroque and Popular Art.² For this occasion, the Danish National Museum agreed to lend a particularly rare artefact that was produced during the first century of colonial contacts: a 1.2m-long, 60cm-wide red feather coat, most likely

Introduction from: A Companion to Javier Marías
Abstract: For readers with more than a passing familiarity with his writing and, in particular, with his novels, Marías’s observation that he takes his time will come as no surprise. Indeed, for the narrators who tell his stories, and for the readers who navigate the complicated path

VII Other Writings from: A Companion to Javier Marías
Abstract: Vidas escritas(1992) (Written Lives, 2006) andMiramientos(Glimpses) (1999) have in common at least one authorial intention: Marías’s desire to write brief sketches about writers whom he finds intriguing. While on the face of it the two books share certain elements of composition (for example, photographic images of the writers inMiramientos; both photographs and drawings of authors inVidas), the differences between the two texts are pronounced. Most notably, inVidasMarías comments solely on non-Spanish writers who are deceased, using biographical and other information to form the content of his narrative, while inMiramientoshe focuses exclusively

9: King’s Contestatory Intertextualities: from: Thomas King
Author(s) Kuester Martin
Abstract: As he grew up as the son of a Greek and Swiss mother and a Cherokee father, Thomas King’s childhood “involved a continual movement between communities and across various racial and cultural boundaries” (Davidson, Walton, and Andrews 2003, 4). The crossing of these borders equipped him with an acute understanding of how potentially harmful a dominant culture’s narratives may be for the members of a minority group (Andrews and Walton 2006, 603). In The Truth about Stories, a testimony to his keen awareness of the power of stories, King comments on the discursive legacy of non-Native writers in a North

11: “Have I Got Stories—” and “Coyote Was There”: from: Thomas King
Author(s) Shackleton Mark
Abstract: Thomas king’s engagement with trickster figures, Coyote in particular, has long roots. In his 1986 dissertation “Inventing the Indian: White Images, Native Oral Literature, and Contemporary Native Writers” King wrote: “If there is a need to understand a culture, and one can only hear a single story that the culture tells about itself, that story should probably be a creation story” (King 1986, 69), and of course Coyote was there at the beginning of things.¹ In his anthology of contemporary Canadian Native literature in English, All My Relations, he depicts the trickster as “an important figure for Native writers for

15: “Sometimes It Works and Sometimes It Doesn’t”: from: Thomas King
Author(s) Rintoul Suzanne
Abstract: Much of the criticism on Thomas King’s fiction focuses on border crossing, and rightly so: national boundaries, town lines, bridges, rivers, and myriad other signs point to in-between spaces where King renegotiates hierarchical binaries. The role of gender in relation to this motif, though, remains underexplored. King’s texts are full of gender-ambiguous characters, some of whom harness the power to revise the dominant discourses of Empire, but discussions of gender have nevertheless taken the proverbial backseat to discussions of race.¹ This is surprising, given that the intersectionality of race and gender has been well established in feminist and postcolonial theory

20: Tom King and the from: Thomas King
Author(s) Flaherty Kathleen
Abstract: Once upon a time I got a call from Thomas King saying he wanted to do an old-fashioned radio show. Since we had worked together before, on radio dramas he had adapted from his own stories, I knew he had a keen sense of radio. So we talked about what he meant by old-fashioned radio. He meant short plays with people talking directly to the audience from a single location. He meant cheesy sound effects created live in the studio. The show was going to be about contemporary life from a Native perspective. And from the perspective of someone who

Book Title: Fighting For Time-Shifting Boundaries of Work and Social Life
Publisher: Russell Sage Foundation
Author(s): Kalleberg Arne L.
Abstract: Though there are still just twenty-four hours in a day, society’s idea of who should be doing what and when has shifted. Time, the ultimate scarce resource, has become an increasingly contested battle zone in American life, with work, family, and personal obligations pulling individuals in conflicting directions. In Fighting for Time, editors Cynthia Fuchs Epstein and Arne Kalleberg bring together a team of distinguished sociologists and management analysts to examine the social construction of time and its importance in American culture. Fighting for Time opens with an exploration of changes in time spent at work—both when people are on the job and the number of hours they spend there—and the consequences of those changes for individuals and families. Contributors Jerry Jacobs and Kathleen Gerson find that the relative constancy of the average workweek in America over the last thirty years hides the fact that blue-collar workers are putting in fewer hours while more educated white-collar workers are putting in more. Rudy Fenwick and Mark Tausig look at the effect of nonstandard schedules on workers’ health and family life. They find that working unconventional hours can increase family stress, but that control over one’s work schedule improves family, social, and health outcomes for workers. The book then turns to an examination of how time influences the organization and control of work. The British insurance company studied by David Collinson and Margaret Collinson is an example of a culture where employees are judged on the number of hours they work rather than on their productivity. There, managers are under intense pressure not to take legally guaranteed parental leave, and clocks are banned from the office walls so that employees will work without regard to the time. In the book’s final section, the contributors examine how time can have different meanings for men and women. Cynthia Fuchs Epstein points out that professional women and stay-at-home fathers face social disapproval for spending too much time on activities that do not conform to socially prescribed gender roles—men are mocked by coworkers for taking paternity leave, while working mothers are chastised for leaving their children to the care of others. Fighting for Time challenges assumptions about the relationship between time and work, revealing that time is a fluid concept that derives its importance from cultural attitudes, social psychological processes, and the exercise of power. Its insight will be of interest to sociologists, economists, social psychologists, business leaders, and anyone interested in the work-life balance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7758/9781610441872

Chapter 1 Time and Work: from: Fighting For Time
Author(s) Kalleberg Arne L.
Abstract: Throughout history claims on people’s time have come from formal and informal authorities—from the state, from the church, from the firm and corporation, and from the family. The “natural” pace of life, in earlier times determined by the rising and setting of the sun, has given

Chapter 2 Understanding Changes in American Working Time: from: Fighting For Time
Author(s) Gerson Kathleen
Abstract: Time on the job is a central and increasingly contested terrain in the lives of Americans. Working time sets the framework for both work and family life, and since time is not an expandable resource, long hours at the workplace must inevitably take time away from the rest of life. Long schedules of sixty hours a week or more mean that a worker is forced to scramble for time at home, inevitably missing even simple daily rituals such as breakfast or dinner with family and friends. Yet short workweeks of thirty hours or less, which offer more time for private

Chapter 4 The Health and Family-Social Consequences of Shift Work and Schedule Control: from: Fighting For Time
Author(s) Tausig Mark
Abstract: Recent changes in the U.S. economy and labor force have led to great diversity in the time workers spend on the job. The increased diversity refers not only to changes in the absolute number of working hours, as many workers work more hours per week and many others work fewer hours, but also to which hours and days they are working and how much flexibility they have in determining which hours they work. The so-called “standard shift”—thirty-five to forty hours per week, nine to five, Monday through Friday—has increasingly become the exception rather than the standard, since fewer

Chapter 5 Temporal Depth, Age, and Organizational Performance from: Fighting For Time
Author(s) Ferris Stephen P.
Abstract: The first author once toured a manufacturing plant in the United States that was owned and operated by a Japanese company. After guiding him on the tour, the facility’s Japanese manager said, “I have an advantage over my American counterparts: they are expected to show a profit every quarter, but I have years to develop this business before my company expects my operation to be profitable.” The comment could have come from the pages of William Ouchi’s best-seller, Theory Z(1981), which proposed, as did this Japanese businessman, that a long-term perspective gives companies a competitive advantage. Indeed, John Kotter

Chapter 6 Bicycle Messengers and the Dialectics of Speed from: Fighting For Time
Author(s) Stewart Benjamin
Abstract: Bicycle messengers provide a valuable on-demand service to urban businesses that require same-day delivery of time-sensitive material. This chapter analyzes the spatial and organizational contradictions that enable and disrupt the urban bicycle messenger industry’s production of speed. It begins with the industry’s general context, describing the congestion that makes the “low-tech” bicycle the city’s fastest mode of delivery. It then moves to explore two sides of the messenger’s labor situation, the stress that arises conjointly out of that enabling congestion and the industry’s demands for speed, and the stress-mitigating enjoyment that arises out of those aspects of the labor similar

Chapter 7 Engineering Overwork: from: Fighting For Time
Author(s) Sharone Ofer
Abstract: After steadily decreasing throughout the first half of the twentieth century, in the late 1960s the number of hours Americans work made a sudden U-turn and began to rise (Schor 1991).¹ In 1999, American workers surpassed the Japanese to earn the dubious distinction of working the longest hours in the industrialized world (International Labour Organization 1999). Among American workers, it is the relatively well-off professional, managerial, and technical workers who are putting in the longest work hours (Jacobs and Gerson 1998).² This paper explores the causes underlying long work hours among a group of workers on the front line of

Book Title: After Parsons-A Theory of Social Action for the Twenty-First Century
Publisher: Russell Sage Foundation
Author(s): Bershady Harold J.
Abstract: Rather than simply celebrating Parsons and his accomplishments, the contributors to After Parsonsrethink and reformulate his ideas to place them on more solid foundations, extend their scope, and strengthen their empirical insights.After Parsonsconstitutes the work of a distinguished roster of American and European sociologists who find Parsons' theory of action a valuable resource for addressing contemporary issues in sociological theory. All of the essays in this volume take elements of Parsons' theory and critique, adapt, refine, or extend them to gain fresh purchase on problems that confront sociologists today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7758/9781610442152

Chapter 10 Rationalists, Fetishists, and Art Lovers: from: After Parsons
Author(s) Tanner Jeremy
Abstract: This chapter deals with two key issues in the sociology of art, the social construction of the role of the artist and the nature of high culture. It poses the question of how they might be approached differently than they are in currently popular approaches, and attempts to answer it by using the comparative and evolutionary perspective advocated by Parsons as part of action theory. I will briefly sketch the state of play in contemporary sociology of the artist and high culture, and the set of concepts and models from within action theory that I will use to approach these

Chapter 14 What Do American Bioethics and Médecins Sans Frontières Have in Common? from: After Parsons
Author(s) Fox Renée C.
Abstract: During the past ten years I have been involved in two major research projects. One of them is a study of the emergence of the young field of bioethics in the United States—its origins, ethos, and progressive institutionalization, and its civic as well as medical import in American society.¹ The other is a still-ongoing examination of medical humanitarian and human rights witnessing action—its underlying ideology and value commitments, the moral dilemmas it entails, and its (unintended as well as intended) consequences. This is being done chiefly through the medium of a sociological case study of Médecins Sans Frontières

Book Title: Approaches to Social Theory- Publisher: Russell Sage Foundation
Author(s): NOWAK STEFAN
Abstract: Many social scientists lament the increasing fragmentation of their discipline, the trend toward specialization and away from engagement with overarching issues. Opportunities to transcend established subdisciplinary boundaries are rare, but the extraordinary conference that gave rise to this volume was one such occasion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7758/9781610443616

The Development of Scholasticism from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) STINCHCOMBE ARTHUR L.
Abstract: My general argument is that the development of sociology as a discipline led us systematically away from the study of humans acting in society. The higher the prestige of a piece of sociological work, the fewer people in it are sweaty, laughing, ugly or pretty, dull at parties, or have warts on their noses. Field work is the lowest status in methodology, because surprising humans keep popping out and bewildering us by doing things we do not understand; much better to have people answering closedended questions so that they fall neatly into cross-classifications to be analyzed by loglinear methods. Similarly,

Two Traditions: from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) SHILS EDWARD
Abstract: I was so filled with admiration by Professor Collins’s paper that I want to go him one better. I see only two traditions in sociology. First, the tradition of empirical study, the study of the data, either using officially gathered statistics or creating data where they didn’t exist before by direct observation, in the way field anthropologists or the old-fashioned participant observers used to do or the way it is done now by surveys. Second, the tradition of substantive analysis.

The California Gold Rush: from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) OBERSCHALL ANTHONY
Abstract: This paper will provide an example of how to account for social structure by means of transaction costs. Transaction costs refer to the costs of interaction and of exchange itself, such as the costs of collecting information on interaction partners and on the commodity or action that is exchanged, the costs of negotiating an agreement or contract and of monitoring its implementation, and the actual enforcement costs of the agreement. Transaction costs exist because human beings’ rationality is bounded, not least by the time and effort of collecting and processing information; because some people are opportunists who violate trust and

Comment from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) ALDRICH HOWARD
Abstract: I want to emphasize a point that Hannan and Freeman have made about the paradigm shift their work represents. In 1974, at the International Sociological Association meetings in Toronto, Hannan and Freeman presented a paper called “The Population Ecology of Organizations.” Things haven’t been the same since that time! They pointed out the very high death rate of organizations compared with what the literature in the 1960s would have led us to expect. For a representative cross section of organizations, the death rate is about one in ten per year, and for new organizations it is over one in two

Comment from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) PADGEIT JOHN
Abstract: Ever since the pioneering empirical work of Alfred Chandler, the investigation of multidivisional firms has been transforming our understanding of what organizations are and of how they operate. Williamson began the theoretical task by undermining the classical Weberian dichotomy between markets and hierarchies. Through his transaction cost analysis of contracting systems, Williamson underlined the fact that current business management is a mixture of market and hierarchy principles. Hybrid organizational forms such as diversification, profit centers, performance evaluation, transfer pricing, subcontracting, joint ventures, and conglomerates all point to the pervasiveness both of profit-oriented exchange relations within economic units and of overtly

Explaining the Origins of Welfare States: from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) ORLOFF ANN SHOLA
Abstract: Social scientists have been “worrying about social change,” as Charles Tilly puts it (1983, p.1), since the emergence of the various disciplines in the nineteenth century. The enduring concern to understand the roots and consequences of the industrial revolution has certainly not been misplaced. Yet sociologists, even more than other social scientists, have labored under serious misconceptions. All too often, according to Tilly (1983, p. 6), sociologists have assumed that “ ‘social change’ is a coherent general phenomenon, explicable en bloc.” And they have postulated that the “main processes of large-scale social change take distinct societies through a succession of

Comment from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) MANN ARTHUR
Abstract: It is flattering to be the only historian asked to the Thomas and Znaniecki Conference on Contemporary Social Theory. I also welcome the invitation to respond to the Skocpol-Orloff comparative study of the foundations of the British and American welfare states in the years surrounding World War I. Their paper bears on a synthesis I am trying to write of the American Progressive movement. The term is an umbrella term that was coined just after 1910 for a multitude of reform movements that had been agitating the country since the end of the Spanish-American War. Continuing through World War I,

General Discussion from: Approaches to Social Theory
Abstract: Mancur Olson:Older blacks in the Philadelphia ghetto had speech that was less different from most American whites than did younger blacks in the same ghetto? I find it a most important and depressing finding that the older blacks, growing under a system of legal segregation, should in some respects diverge less from the rest of American society than teenagers growing up now in the big northern city ghetto.

General Discussion from: Approaches to Social Theory
Abstract: Ronald Burt:I have a problem with your procedure because of results on related items that a set of students in one of Columbia’s summer research seminars found. The question of their research was the meaning of cognitive space. We exposed people to a variety of hypothetical situations, created as vignettes using, on a much narrower scale, the same sort of conditions you do. Respondents were also asked to interpret their especially close relations with real people, on the same dimensions used to interpret the vignettes. If you looked at the semantic or cognitive space for real people versus the

General Discussion from: Approaches to Social Theory
Abstract: James Coleman:I want to reinforce a point that Michael Hechter made, because it seems to me so important, given you are the author of this piece. It has to do with the logic of collective action. Consider the sentence in your paper: “The only way a distributional coalition can retain its value over several generations is by restricting the children of members of marriages with one another or by disinheriting a large number of the children.” Or, “endogamy, which is necessary” to the guild’s continuation.” You are treating collectivities as actors. In other words, you have engaged in exactly

Revolutions and Revolutionaries, Lessons of the Years of Crises from: Promises of 1968
Author(s) Palouş Martin
Abstract: Forty years have already passed since 1968 and there is no doubt that what happened during this year of promises and hopes turned into illusions and utopias, leaving behind a significant trace—both locally and globally—in our recent history. That the legacies of 1968 are worth being explored and discussed today, not only from the historical point of view, but also in the light of our current political experience. The present volume’s declared aim is to put forth a discussion of 1968 as both a global event and a local moment of crisis.

In Search of a New Left from: Promises of 1968
Author(s) Howard Dick
Abstract: Officially, I left the University of Texas for Paris in the summer of 1966 as a fulbright scholar. What I wanted in fact to learn was how to make a revolution—or at least to understand the Marxist theory that had been identified with this skill. I had taken part in the civil rights movement, and demonstrated against the war in Vietnam; but both of these movements seemed to be caught in the trap of using the language of liberalism against the liberal system. What was needed instead, it seemed, was a framework that would permit a radical transformation of

What Did They Think They Were Doing? from: Promises of 1968
Author(s) Müller Jan-Werner
Abstract: Nineteen sixty-eight was a year of mass violence: the Vietnam War, the crushing of student protest in Mexico, the Cultural Revolution in China—and, in East-Central Europe, the suppression of the “Polish March” and the Prague Spring. By comparison, little seemed at stake in Western Europe—which nevertheless produced most of the iconic images of’68. As was often pointed out, west of Czechoslovakia “no one died”; no government fell. Not surprisingly, then, for a number of not even especially conservative observers, ’68—and the sixties, more broadly—seemed to have been about a small minority of spoiled children playing revolution.

The Divided Spirit of the Sixties from: Promises of 1968
Author(s) Sołtan Karol Edward
Abstract: The sixties, with the year 1968 serving as their symbolic high point, are best understood in a broader historical context, as one of a sequence of three periods of heightened idealism since World War II. These periods can be dated roughly: 1943–1950 (between World War II and the Cold War), 1960–1972 (the sixties), and 1988–1994 (usually identified with the year 1989). We can trace through all these periods, despite their obvious discontinuities, the development of a project of a global civic awakening (now taking the form of a global civic society) in opposition to what we might

1968 and the Terrorist Aftermath in West Germany from: Promises of 1968
Author(s) Herf Jeffrey
Abstract: “1968,” like “1917” and “1945,” was one of the three key Hegelian moments in the history of twentieth-century Communism not only in Europe, but around the world.¹ That is, it was a moment in which parts of the international communist movement became convinced that the actual course of events was conforming to their understanding of a historical teleology pointing toward the fulfillment of revolutionary aspirations. The two previous Hegelian moments, the Bolshevik coup d’état of October 1917 and the red Army’s role in the defeat of Nazi Germany in May 1945, convinced the radical left that history was progressing along

Book Title: Bones of Contention-The living archive of Vasil Levski and the making of Bulgaria's national hero
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Todorova Maria
Abstract: This book is about documenting and analyzing the living archive around the figure of Vasil Levski (1837–1873), arguably the major and only uncontested hero of the Bulgarian national pantheon. The processes described, although with a chronological depth of almost two centuries, are still very much in the making, and the living archive expands not only in size but constantly adding surprising new forms. The monograph is a historical study, taking as its narrative focus the life, death and posthumous fate of Levski. By exploring the vicissitudes of his heroicization, glorification, appropriations, reinterpretation, commemoration and, finally, canonization, it seeks to engage in several broad theoretical debates, and provide the basis for subsequent regional comparative research. The analysis of Levski's consecutive and simultaneous appropriations by different social platforms, political parties, secular and religious institutions, ideologies, professional groups, and individuals, demonstrates how boundaries within the framework of the nation are negotiated around accepted national symbols.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt128245

INTRODUCTION from: Bones of Contention
Abstract: This book is about documenting and analyzing the living archive around the figure of Vasil Levski, arguably the major and only uncontested hero of the Bulgarian national pantheon. In the course of working on the problem, it became clear that this cannot be a finite task. The processes described, although with a chronological depth of almost two centuries, are still very much in the making, and the living archive expands not only in size but constantly adds surprising new forms. While archives continue to occupy an almost sacral place both in the public imagination (as the repositories of truth) as

[Part I Introduction] from: Bones of Contention
Abstract: It was in late December 1985 when my old friend Diana Gergova called me over the phone, and asked to meet her urgently. We had been inseparable since the 1960s in high school, and later as history students at the University of Sofia. At the time of the call, I was associate professor of Balkan history at the University of Sofia, and Diana was a research fellow at the Archeological Institute at the Bulgarian Academy of Sciences. She acted also as party secretary of the institute.¹ She immediately came to the point: my father, at that moment acting as vice

6. Recognizing the Schism, or What Is Worse: from: Bones of Contention
Abstract: Already at the end of the BAN debates it was clear that a compromise, let alone a consensus, could not be reached between the two sides. While Khaitov’s framing imagination may have taken him too far—both in the deployment of political conspiracies and in his patriotic claim that the church “Sv. Petka” may have served as a burial pantheon for freedom fighters 280—his concrete analytical assault on the opposing version was devastating. It irrefutably demonstrated that the “professionals” had been anything but professional. The archeologists, on the other hand, although privately acknowledging mistakes, decided that even a partial concession

Conclusion from: Bones of Contention
Abstract: This book has been an argument for the relevance of microhistory, an attempt to demonstrate the significance of local knowledge in approaching the big issues of the profession and of life in general. It is taken for granted that a narrative, written in a few big languages and using examples of a few big countries, has universal connotations. Other examples in other languages (even large languages as Mandarin, Arabic or Hindi) are, at most, allowed to be footnotes in this universal sweep. It is this book’s attempt to demonstrate the general meaning and worth of examples from very small places,

CHAPTER I. THE TRANSFORMATION OF SYMBOLIC GEOGRAPHY from: Late Enlightenment
Abstract: In the 1760s the Republic of Venice, to which Dalmatia belonged as a province, recognized the shortcomings of its economic status and introduced an agricultural policy based on physiocratic ideas.¹ The situation in Dalmatia had been particularly bad and the rural population in the Dalmatian hinterlands, known as Morlacchia, was suffering from famine caused by crop failure. Yet, despite these calamities, it proved difficult to interest the Slavic-speaking Morlachs ( Gr. Mavrovlachs = ‘Black Wallachians’) in any sort of bettering of their condition, since their martial culture was incompatible with ideas of agricultural reform. Around the same time the Serenissima, anxious

CHAPTER II. CULTURAL AND HISTORIOGRAPHICAL NARRATIVES OF IDENTITY from: Late Enlightenment
Abstract: In the second half of the eighteenth century, Austrian state and society experienced a period of profound transformations. In 1749, facing increasing political and social unrest, Empress Maria Theresa (r. 1740–1780) introduced a number of reforms, which would have an enduring effect on the Habsburg Monarchy. The administration of the state was divided among a state chancellery, a state council, and the Directorium in publicis et cameralibus charged with the management of internal affairs. Other reforms included the introduction of district commissions, the creation of a general land register and the establishment of a military academy in Wiener Neustadt.

Chapter 1 Friendship, Love, and Sexuality in Premodern Times from: Friendship and Love, Ethics and Politics
Abstract: As Michel Foucault said, we academics ought always to ask ourselves why something suddenly becomes a scholarly issue. Why do we begin to mull over something that until then had appeared natural and selfevident? Why when faced with a given situation does it suddenly seem appropriate to find new words and categories to reflect more deeply on a phenomenon we previously only ever noticed in passing? “Why does this happen?” asks Foucault. What intellectual, political, or social forces impel such a problematization?¹

Chapter 2 Challenging the Private–Public Dichotomy from: Friendship and Love, Ethics and Politics
Abstract: Acknowledgement of the historical relevance of the private–public dichotomy is often associated with Jürgen Habermas’s influential theory, focusing as it does on the bourgeois public sphere in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. In his view, this public sphere was characterized by open communication, rational argument, and reason. He also views it as something new, in stark contrast to the representative public sphere of premodern society, in which hierarchical power presented itself to the people in what was to all intents and purposes one-way communication.¹ In recent decades, however, Habermas’s ideas have been challenged, not least by historians studying popular

Chapter 3 Me and My Friends from: Friendship and Love, Ethics and Politics
Abstract: My themes in this chapter are individuality, autobiography, and friendship. The combination of individuality and autobiography is hardly surprising. Autobiographies are usually regarded as the best place for authors to reflect upon themselves as unique persons and lay bare their individuality. Critical voices are heard accusing autobiographers of being egocentric, if not narcissistic and pompous, and dwelling far too long on their subject; less jaundiced observers note the naked self-criticism and humble attitude that some writers reveal in their autobiographies. In any case, with the recently renewed interest in subjectformation—the development of the individual over time—autobiographies have become

Chapter 5 Close Relationships—Then and Now from: Friendship and Love, Ethics and Politics
Abstract: In the previous chapters I set out to show how premodern love and friendship, both as ideals and in the full diversity of reality, were not only important in private life, but also in public life. The focus of my analysis has been the ways that philosophers, writers, and State and Church thought and spoke about close relationships, and the great changes in these discourses over time. But I have also been able to shed light on specific variations in actual relationships by using diaries, correspondence, and autobiographical material. It goes without saying that I have only been able to

Conclusion from: Debating the Past
Abstract: In what follows, I will review the concepts of “objectivity” and “truth” in Bulgarian historical scholarship on the basis of my historiographical research and observations. As will be seen, there is a great difference between theoretical-methodological statements and historiographical practice. However, my purpose is not to blame the presumably “objective” historiography for “lack of objectivity” (especially since I do not believe in this ideal), but to see how things stand on particular issues of the “objectivity and truth” complex. Hence the account is somewhat fragmented. The question will also be posed: why were there, until recently, no relativizations of the

1. Introduction: from: Remembering Communism
Author(s) Todorova Maria
Abstract: The most remarkable thing about the spontaneous street demonstrations in different Bulgarian cities in February 2013 was not their surprising (and totally unexpected) success in toppling the center-right government of Boiko Borisov, but two features that made them unique: the demography of the protesters and their slogans. The crowd was mostly composed of young people, university and high-school students in their teens, and there was an almost complete avoidance of political sloganeering. The protests started over the high electricity bills, but were generally directed against the corruption of the political class, the arrogance of the nouveaux riches, and the abject

6. Remembering Dictatorship: from: Remembering Communism
Author(s) Schmidt Bradley
Abstract: The French political scientist Maurice Duverger, born in 1917, became known throughout Europe in 1954 for Duverger’s law, according to which a system of simple majority in single-representative districts tends to favor the development of a two-party system.¹ Ten years later, the social democrat published a book, entitled De la Dictature, in which, instead of writing pragmatically about election statistics, he adopted an emotional, even dramatic tone:

10. Remembering the Private Display of Decorative Things under Communism from: Remembering Communism
Author(s) Dîrţu Evagrina
Abstract: My study was triggered by both professional and personal motives. Firstly, I participated in a research project entitled “A New Perspective on the Idea of Patrimony: Object and Image in Twentieth-Century Romanian Autobiographical Literature,” and the keyword in this project was what the French callle petit patrimoine.The “little patrimony” is not a metaphor, but a concept that has been increasingly dealt with lately. Jocelyne Bonnet-Carbonell puts its emergence down to a real revolution that took place in patrimonial studies, wherein the focus moved away from the verb “to have” to the verb “to be.” “Little patrimonies” include objects

15. “Remembering the Old City, Building a New One”: from: Remembering Communism
Author(s) Ţârău Virgiliu
Abstract: In a city of East-Central Europe, where the inhabitants spoke Hungarian, Romanian, German, or Yiddish as their native language, prayed in churches of Orthodox, Catholic, Lutheran, Calvinist, Unitarian, or Jewish denominations for centuries, paradoxically (since communism is known for its official references to proletarian internationalism) ethnicity became the dominant frame for remembering communism, socialist industrialization, and the roles different groups played in social transformations. The language used by the local community’s old and new leaders, traditional and new members, as well as the metamorphosis of national and historical symbols in the urban public space are important elements of the interviewees’

28. Remembering the “Revival Process” in Post-1989 Bulgaria from: Remembering Communism
Author(s) Kalinova Evgenia
Abstract: The euphemistically called “revival process,” that is, the policy of the Bulgarian Communist Party aiming at ethnic assimilation of the Turkish minority in Bulgaria in the second half of the 1980s, has been in the scope of my research interests as an important part of contemporary Bulgarian history which I teach at the University of Sofia. At the same time, I have always been aware that the “revival process,” even though it ended in December 1989, is still present as a painful memory. When discussing the problem with my students, I observed that their reactions most often were purely emotional

Promotion of a Usable Past: from: Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Brandenberger David
Abstract: For much of the Soviet period, party authorities endorsed a single, mobilizational view of USSR history that was supported not only by academia and the censor, but by official mass culture, public educational institutions, and state textbook publishing. Indeed, it was not until the fall of the Soviet Union in 1991 that the society’s traditional reliance on an “official line” and a handful of prescribed textbooks gave way to a much looser system in which a variety of ideologically diverse titles could vie with one another within a newly competitive public school textbook market. The curricular diversity of this new

Germany’s Two Processes of “Coming to Terms with the Past”—Failures, After all? from: Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Müller Jan-Werner
Abstract: Germany’s dealing with its two difficult pasts—the East German state socialist dictatorship and, much more important, Nazism and the Holocaust—has almost globally been considered a success, even a model for others to emulate.¹ Human rights activists and politicians from South Africa, for instance, closely studied what the Germans had done by way of trials, public commemoration and schoolbooks; and the Chinese would at one point admonish Japan that, in dealing with World War II, it should adopt the “German model.” Not surprisingly perhaps, this Modell Deutschlandwas increasingly viewed with pride within Germany itself, especially, but not only,

The South African Transition: from: Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Villa-Vicencio Charles
Abstract: The South African transition from apartheid to the country’s first democratically elected government in 1994 is widely acclaimed as an example of a successful political transition that avoided the predicted blood bath and political chaos. Some among the oppressed people of South Africa, however, had quite unrealistic expectations of what the new age could usher in. This has contributed, two decades later, to a wave of disillusionment and resentment in the country, raising questions about the viability of the soft South African transition. It also adds to the global debate on the nature of political transitions from dictatorship and authoritarian

Chapter Four THE PURSUIT OF “SECULAR” SALVATION THE INFLUENCE OF ORTHODOXY IN THE SERBIAN POLITICAL CULTURE from: Serbian Orthodox Fundamentals
Abstract: Orthodoxy, as a holistic, religious experience, may initially appear to be an incompatible referent when considered with purely political forms of personal and societal expression. From a Serbian historical perspective, this almost unequal relation originates in the territorial organisation of the church, which transcends political boundaries in an encompassing pursuit of her congregation’s existential problems, sacred or profane. The political encroachment of the Orthodox laity, the separation of vox Dei from vox populi, was forcibly pronounced under the secular conditions of Yugoslav communism, which limited the scope, intensity and formal depth of confessional affinities. In an Orthodox environment, communism’s appeal

Introduction from: What Holds Europe Together?
Author(s) MICHALSKI KRZYSZTOF
Abstract: The European Union is facing a great challenge, perhaps its greatest thus far. On the one hand, it is expanding on a dramatic scale: over 70 million more people will have EU passports in the near future. On the other hand, the EU is attempting to radically redefine itself through the process of drawing up a Constitution and by metamorphosing into a new kind of political union.

Europe—Still Divided from: What Holds Europe Together?
Author(s) KACZYNSKI LECH
Abstract: Almost a quarter of a century has passed since Tadeusz Mazowiecki’s famous article “The other face of Europe.” In evaluating the significance of the appointment of Karol Woytyla to the throne of St. Peter’s, Mazowiecki, who went on to become the first president of independent Poland, reminded us that aside from the happy, western part of the continent, there is also a central and central eastern part, which, while belonging to the same historical–cultural community, finds itself in a completely different situation. It was necessary to deliver this reminder, because the community which Mazowiecki was appealing to had at

Islam in Europe from: What Holds Europe Together?
Author(s) SCHEFFER PAUL
Abstract: In my commentary I would like to focus on the passage in the Europe Paper that deals in a very general and non-committal way with Islam in Europe, and the chances and threats connected with it. A subject of the highest urgency is at issue here; above all since the recent Islamist terror attacks on the streets of Madrid and Amsterdam. It is no wonder that attention is currently being directed toward our own societies. But the grand drama is being played out elsewhere, in countries such as Pakistan, Egypt, and Saudi Arabia: it is primarily the Islamic world that

CHAPTER 7 Islamic Political Thought: from: Times of History
Abstract: It is thus perhaps little surprising that conceptions of power and political thought elaborated in the course of Muslim histories, in modern times no less than in the

Façades. from: Past for the Eyes
Author(s) Varga Balázs
Abstract: More than fifteen years have passed since the change of the political regime in Eastern Europe, but the countries of the former Soviet bloc still face the fundamental challenge of how to deal with the events of their recent past, how to come to terms with the legacy of Socialism and its local versions. There are countless ways of approaching these issues, but I will focus on the possibilities of interpretation provided by creative documentaries. The material for my analysis is Péter Forgács’s film Kádár’s Kiss(1997, the original Hungarian title isCsermanek csókja, meaningCsermanek’s Kiss), which by its

“We Have Democracy, Don’t We?” from: Past for the Eyes
Author(s) Dominková Petra
Abstract: The “Velvet Revolution” in November 1989 brought about enormous changes in the political and social environment: the communist regime was abolished and after forty-one years democracy was reestablished in Czechoslovakia. In art, the most important change brought by the Revolution was the end of censorship. Since 1989 artists have been allowed to do as they wish—as long as they can find the funding. Film in socialism was funded exclusively by the state, but since about 1990 the state has not been responsible for what is produced and, not surprisingly, the authorities have cut the subsidies of the costly film

Book Title: Hybrid Renaissance-Culture, Language, Architecture
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Burke Peter
Abstract: Hybrid Renaissance presents the Renaissance in Italy, elsewhere in Europe and in the world beyond Europe as an example of cultural hybridization. It is impossible to give a clear definition of either of the two key concepts used in this book, “hybridization" and “Renaissance". Roughly speaking, hybridity refers to something new that emerges from the combination of diverse older elements. The term “hybridization" is preferable to “hybridity" because it refers to a process rather than to a state, and also because it encourages the writer and the readers alike to think in terms of more or less rather than of presence versus absence. The book begins with a discussion of the concept of cultural hybridity and a cluster of other concepts related to it. Then comes a geography of hybridity, focusing on three locales: courts, major cities (whether ports or capitals) and frontiers. There follow six chapters about the hybrid Renaissance in different fields: architecture, painting and sculpture, languages, literatures, music, philosophy and law and finally religion. The essay concludes with a brief account of attempts to resist hybridization or to purify cultures or domains from what was already hybridized
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt1d4txq4

Chapter 4 Hybrid Arts from: Hybrid Renaissance
Abstract: As we have seen, in the 1920s August Schmarsow and Frederick Antal were already discussing the survival of Gothic in Renaissance Italy. Antal presented a famous contrast between the classical Virgin

Chapter 6 Hybrid Literatures from: Hybrid Renaissance
Abstract: This chapter is concerned with hybrid writing and especially those forms of writing now known as “literature” and formerly as belles-lettres, a term that is not easy to translate into English. It will include history alongside poetry, plays and the prose fiction we describe as “novels”, while contemporaries called them “romances”. In fact, writing was not the only medium in which these works circulated, since oral performances were commonplace. The circulation of texts in performance, manuscript and print suggests that we think in terms of hybrid media.

FOREWORD from: Where Currents Meet
Abstract: As happens at times, this book grew out of my PhD dissertation, “Where the Currents Meet: Frontiers of Memory in the Post-Soviet Fiction of East Ukraine,” which was completed at the University of Cambridge in 2014. The last day of February was my chosen deadline for unloading its softbound copies at the Board of Graduate Studies in a partly triumphant and partly anticlimactic local ritual known as submission. The week before, Ukraine’s Maidan uprising claimed its largest number of victims yet. The bloodshed continued for several days. February 2014 saw the Maidan movement’s most fatal time.

CONCLUSION from: Where Currents Meet
Abstract: This study has examined how, in “a culture increasingly dominated by space and spatial logic,”¹ contemporary Ukrainian writers of the younger generation—doubletake writers—work their characters into a traumatized cultural landscape. In such a landscape, the language of categories and coordinates is subverted in favor of blurriness, uncertainty, and the supernatural. I call this cohort the doubletake generation, in reference to their coming of age at the time of the Soviet Union’s collapse. Upon reaching adulthood, they revisit the intense historical experience that coincided with their childhood or adolescence—a time when external changes fuse with internal ones, and

Book Title: Utopian Horizons-Ideology, Politics, Literature
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Czigányik Zsolt
Abstract: The 500th anniversary of Thomas More’s Utopia has directed attention toward the importance of utopianism. Utopian Horizons investigates the possibilities of cooperation between the humanities and the social sciences in the analysis of 20th century and contemporary utopian phenomena. The papers deal with major problems of interpreting utopias, the relationship of utopia and ideology, and the highly problematic issue as to whether utopia necessarily leads to dystopia. Besides reflecting the interdisciplinary nature of contemporary utopian investigations, the papers effectively represent the constructive attitudes of utopian thought, a feature that not only defines late 20th- and 21st-century utopianism, but is one of the primary reasons behind the rising importance of the topic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt1pq340t

Negative Utopia in Central Europe: from: Utopian Horizons
Author(s) Czigányik Zsolt
Abstract: There is a curious book that keeps causing discomfort to its readers: A Voyage to Kazohinia, written in or around 1935 and first published in 1941, is often considered the single most important book of the Hungarian utopian (and dystopian) tradition. As part of a larger project of mapping Hungarian utopianism from a social and political perspective, this chapter analyzes this book of central importance by displaying its textual and structural parallels with contemporary political ideologies, especially nationalism, fascism, and anarchism.¹

What They Were Going to Do About It: from: Utopian Horizons
Author(s) Farkas Ákos
Abstract: In 1936, two years after the establishment of the Peace Pledge Union (PPU), Britain’s largest pacifist organisation of the twentieth century, one of the organization’s founders, Aldous Huxley, undertook to write a pamphlet to promote the Union and its cause. In the thirty-one-page booklet, Huxley set out to persuade hard-headed opponents of pacifism that peace was not only a desirable, but also a practicable alternative to war. He pleaded that any kind of peace was preferable to any kind of war, even at the cost of rewarding the aggressor: Italy attacking Abyssinia, Japan devastating Manchuria and Germany bent on annexing

Realism and Utopianism Reconsidered: from: Utopian Horizons
Author(s) Szűcs Zoltán Gábor
Abstract: George R. R. Martin’s fantasy book series, A Song of Ice and Fire(1996–, followed by theGame of ThronesTV series based on the books, 2011–) was critically acclaimed as a dystopian depiction of a world of dynastic wars, civil discontents, and feudal feuds. Its plot is centered around power hunger, violence, conspiracies, and treachery. Not surprisingly, many reviewers welcomed the series as a textbook example of Machiavellian political realism.

Book Title: Christian Demonology and Popular- Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Csonka-Takács Eszter
Abstract: The authors—recognized historians, ethnologists, folklorists coming from four continents—present the latest research findings on the relationship, coexistence and conflicts of popular belief systems, Judeo-Christian mythology and demonology in medieval and modern Europe. The present volume focuses on the divergence between Western and Eastern evolution, on the different relationship of learned demonology to popular belief systems in the two parts of Europe. It discusses the conflict of saints, healers, seers, shamans with the representatives of evil; the special function of escorting, protecting, possessing, harming and healing spirits; the role of the dead, the ghosts, of pre-Christian, Jewish and Christian spirit-world, the antagonism of the devil and the saint.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt2jbmrh

AN ICONOGRAPHICAL APPROACH TO REPRESENTATIONS OF THE DEVIL IN MEDIEVAL HUNGARY from: Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) TATAI ERZSÉBET
Abstract: Discussing representations of the devil is at least as complicated as discussing the devil itself. The appearances of specific forms of the devil are closely related to the evolution and changes of the notion of the devil. The more “good” and “evil” begin to polarize, the more their representations begin to differentiate; evil gradually evolves from the notion of chaos (Ricoeur 1998, pp. 175. ff.; Cohn 1994, pp. 78–89).

TALKING WITH DEMONS. EARLY MODERN THEORIES AND PRACTICE from: Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) SZŐNYI GYÖRGY E.
Abstract: Although half a century ago it may have seemed surprising, by today we are quite used to the idea that early modern Humanism was by no means the enlightened and rational period as some interpreters of the Renaissance wanted to see and to have it seen. Decades of research in science-and cultural history as well as in historical anthropology has made it manifest that many brilliant minds of the great generation of fifteenth and sixteenth-century humanists not only believed in astrology, alchemy, and in a host of demons and spirits surrounding them, but quite often they even engaged in sometimes

SAINTLY AND SYMPATHETIC MAGIC IN THE LORE OF THE JEWS OF CARPATHO-RUSSIA BETWEEN THE TWO WORLD WARS from: Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) ROSEN ILANA
Abstract: Jews have lived in Carpatho-Russia (or Sub-Carpathian Ruthenia, at present the western part of the Ukraine Republic) since the late medieval era (Jelinek 2003; Gutman 1990, 4, pp. 1472–73). They were as a rule Hasidic in a Galician fashion (Stransky 1971, p. 349), rural, and traditional. However, under the inter-war Czechoslovakian regime and its relatively liberal attitude towards the different national minorities of the region (Sole 1968, p. 134), this Jewry went through an ideological revolution regarding traditionality, due to the rise of the Zionist movement in the region (Sole 1971, pp. 401–439). As a result of the

SYSTEMATIZATION OF THE CONCEPT OF DEMONIC AND EVIL IN MONGOLIAN FOLK RELIGION from: Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) BIRTALAN ÁGNES
Abstract: Being a part of an ongoing project dealing with the new interpretation of the Mongolian mythology, this paper is an attempt to offer a kind of systematization of the phenomenon of evil and the demonic in Mongolian folk religion. Ritual and folklore texts of different Mongolian peoples, travelers’ notes, and field work materials collected since the nineteenth century are used as main sources for the systematization.

Book Title: Given World and Time-Temporalities in Context
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Miller Tyrus
Abstract: The interconnections of time with historical thought and knowledge have come powerfully to the fore since the 1970s. An international group of scholars, from a range of fields including literary theory, history of ideas, cultural anthropology, philosophy, intellectual history and theology, philology, and musicology, address the matter of time and temporalities. The volume’s essays, divided into four main topical groups question critically the key problem of context, connecting it to the problem of time. Contexts, the essays suggest, are not timeless. Time and its contexts are only partly “given” to us: to the primordial donations of time and world correspond our epistemic, moral, and practical modes of receiving what has been granted. The notion of context may have radically different parameters in different historical, cultural, and disciplinary situations. Topics include the deep antiquity, and the timeless time of eternity, as well as formal philosophies of history and the forms of histories implicit in individual and community experience. The medium specific use of time and history are examined with regard to song, image, film, oral narration, and legal discourse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt2jbmxx

8. Image-Times, Image-Histories, Image-Thinking from: Given World and Time
Author(s) Soussloff Catherine M.
Abstract: Derived from the Latin, i.e., imago (f. noun) and imagines (pl.), the terminology and the concepts adhering to “image” have both fascinated and perplexed scholars, most of them philosophers, psychoanalysts, and historians of religion, art, and film. To explore these etymologies today, however, seems superfluous since the term has an expanded significance in all media studies and practices, including computer technologies, digital and analog photography and film, television, and video. While the conceptual intricacies associated with the image and its cognates in the Western tradition stretch back to ancient Greece and have led to a wide discrepancy of views regarding

11. Religious Revivals: from: Given World and Time
Author(s) Wegley Andrew
Abstract: One linchpin that holds together Western modernity, the secularization thesis, is crucial in narrating the historical progress of society away from religious control to individual determination. The thesis can be seen as comprising six components: 1) the creation of different institutional apparati that separate religion from politics, 2) the depoliticization and privatization of religion, 3) the decline in religious belief, 4) the development of cultural identity, 5) the rise of the state as governmental form, and 6) the production of capitalist markets.¹ Together these components describe the new phenomenon that constitutes modernity as different from religious and traditional cultures. Moving

12. Hetero-Temporalities of Post-Socialism from: Given World and Time
Author(s) Rofel Lisa
Abstract: Time has, if you will forgive the paradoxical phrasing, long been a terrain for projects of social justice and utopian dreams. As Susan Buck-Morss has recently pointed out, this function of time is self-consciously true in historically sedimented ways for the praxis of formerly socialist nation-states.¹ What has become of time in the aftermath of socialism? My answer to this question will focus on China, a country whose continuously radical transformations have coursed through the twentieth century and now into the twenty-first. Unlike in the countries of eastern Europe, China’s Communist Party still holds the reins of state power. Yet

13. The Politics of Temporality: from: Given World and Time
Author(s) Hoy David Couzens
Abstract: “The time of our lives”—this expression condenses into one phrase a series of questions that could require much more than one lifetime to answer. Is the time of our lives a function of a life as a whole, a life-time, or can it be condensed into a single moment of vision? Does a life have a unity that runs through it, or is the unity of time, and of a life, a narrative, a story, a fiction, or even an illusion? In this essay the question that particularly interests me is, what notion of time is the time that

15. A Microscope for Time: from: Given World and Time
Author(s) Clausberg Karl
Abstract: In today’s day and age, upheavals in human worlds of image and media are preferably traced back to technical achievements. The history of optical media—camera obscura, photography, the cinema, television, etc.—seems meanwhile firmly established as a prime example of such means of viewing. But how well do these perspectives of progress fit the “nature” of humankind, which has somehow struggled through the channels of anthropological predispositions, neurobiological influences, et al. to the peaks of civilization? Using a short and anonymously published text from the mid-nineteenth century by a Berlin lay-astronomer, whose considerable impact is suggestively illustrated in the

Introduction from: Constitutions, Courts, and History
Abstract: Theories of constitutional interpretation and constitutional adjudication seek to establish a model of constitutional review which enables courts to respond even to hard cases without transgressing the limits of the legitimate exercise of the review power.¹ In the course of this exercise one of the riddles used to be the countermajoritarian difficulty, as exposed in Bickel’s landmark work The Least Dangerous Branch (1962). Theories that understand constitutional adjudication in the matrix of the continuing operation of the branches of government respond well to challenges that stem from the undemocratic nature of constitutional review. As Dworkin explains in Freedom’s Law,. “[w]hen

Chapter Two An Overview of Arguments Used in Constitutional Adjudication from: Constitutions, Courts, and History
Abstract: In jurisdictions with a written constitution, the paradox underlying constitutional reasoning is relatively easy to identify. Constitutional provisions are phrased in a general manner: their open texture often offers little specific guidance for the resolution of particulars in constitutional claims. Despite fleeting indeterminacy in constitutional adjudication, in the thousands of judgments being handed down in constitutional cases each year courts tend to rely on relatively few types of arguments. This phenomenon evokes an deep Aristotelian current in legal reasoning and makes the (post-)modern observer mindful of the stasis (status) system developed to analyze legal conflicts using a set of formal

Chapter 2 POLAND: from: Dilemmas of Dissidence in East-Central Europe
Abstract: The frequency of protest and instability in authoritarian communist Poland can be explained according to three competing explanations. First, Polish experiences are seen unique in the region: peculiar factors such as an institutionally strong and independent Catholic Church; the survival of private ownership of land and de-collectivization of agriculture; a history replete with both anti-Russian, anti-Soviet and working class uprisings (in 1831, 1863, 1944, 1956, 1970, 1976, and 1980–1981); the relative power and prowess of intellectuals and the intelligentsia; and the weakness of party-state institutions and elites (Schöpflin, 1983; Ekiert and Kubic, 2001). Second, Poland shares with countries throughout

Chapter 3 CZECHOSLOVAKIA: from: Dilemmas of Dissidence in East-Central Europe
Abstract: The Komunistická Strana Československa, or Communist Party of Czechoslovakia (CPCz), assumed power by engineering a coup in 1948, ousting their former coalition partners from power.¹ However, the Czech communists had the strongest indigenous support in the region, a point that cannot be overemphasized. The CPCz had been legally operating in the country since 1921 (although was banned in 1938 and illegal during World War II). Reasons for support are also rooted in the Munich Agreement in 1938—when the Sudeten lands were ceded to Hitler’s Germany and Czechoslovakia was effectively abandoned by the Western powers.² Germany, not the Soviet Union,

Chapter 4 POST-1956 HUNGARY: from: Dilemmas of Dissidence in East-Central Europe
Abstract: The failure of the Hungarian Revolution of 1956 was mitigated by the many “lessons” it provided, not only for the reconsolidation of reform communism under János Kádár in Hungary, but also for the generation of communist reformers in Poland and in Czechoslovakia who constructed their programs with an eye to avoiding the “errors” of 1956. Whereas Gomułka’s accession to power in Warsaw seemed to indicate how far one could go in nationalist deviation from the Soviet model, Imre Nagy’s support for and attempted guidance of an essentially armed uprising and popular revolt certainly demonstrated what was completely unacceptable and would

Book Title: Transition in Post-Soviet Art-The Collective Actions Group Before and After 1989
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Groys Boris
Abstract: The artistic tradition that emerged as a form of cultural resistance in the 1970s changed during the transition from socialism to capitalism. This volume presents the evolution of the Moscow-based conceptual artist group called Collective Actions, proposing it as a case-study for understanding the transformations that took place in Eastern European art after the fall of the Berlin Wall. Esanu introduces Moscow Conceptualism by performing a close examination of the Collective Actions group’s ten-volume publication Journeys Outside the City and of the Dictionary of Moscow Conceptualism. He analyzes above all the evolution of Collective Actions through ten consecutive phases, discussing changes that occur in each new volume of the Journeys. Compares the part of the Journeys produced in the Soviet period with those volumes assembled after the dissolution of the USSR. The concept of “transition” and the activities of Soros Centers for Contemporary Art are also analyzed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt5hgzpb

Chapter 2 MAPPING MOSCOW CONCEPTUALISM from: Transition in Post-Soviet Art
Abstract: The Dictionarydefines "Moscow Conceptualism" as a "romantic, dreaming, and psychologizing version of the international conceptual art of the 1960s and 1970s."¹ This is a rather laconic definition for a term that has served this tradition for more than three decades. The following sections of this book provide a broader elucidation of such terms. Focusing not only on "Moscow Conceptualism" but also on the attribute "romantic" and the notion of "emptiness," I aim to indicate how they originated and what range of significance they have acquired in their cultural milieus.

Chapter 3 KD'S JOURNEYS BEFORE 1989 from: Transition in Post-Soviet Art
Abstract: It was during the Soviet period that the KD group gradually emerged with its own mythology, methodology, and terminology. From 1976 to 1989 its members sought unique ways to investigate the nature of art—this search for method comprising the group's main self-professed artistic program and affecting all aspects of its artistic and aesthetic practice. This Soviet or "before" period is the time in which the group created the model called "KD"—a model that, in spite of all changes since, has guided its aesthetic principles for almost three decades.

Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ajs.2000.106.issue-2
Date: 09 2000
Author(s): Lara Maria Pia
Abstract: Lara’s book is thick with references and interwoven arguments and is sometimes hard to follow for this reason. She is concerned with showing the possibilities for a recognition of the importance of self‐fashioning narrative in Habermas’s own work, especially in his early analysis in The Structural Transformation of the Public. She takes up discussions of deliberative democracy to show how they are enriched by a recognition of the place of narrative; she takes up postmodern accounts of identity; and she pursues her argument through the work of Paul Ricoeur, Albrecht Wellmer, and Wayne Booth, as well as a host of others. Despite the density of the work, Lara succeeds in illuminating the relation between narrative, identity, and morality. If the question of how we should live is bound up with ideas of who we are, and if we shape who we are with the help of narratives of other lives, these ideas would seem to be an integral part of the normative question that Habermas asks as to how we should live with others. Lara’s book is not only a welcome addition to recent work on Habermas, but also an important participant in current discussions of the relationship between literature and morality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/316983

Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: et.2001.112.issue-1
Date: 10 2001
Author(s): Young, Jeffrey T.
Abstract: Young’s new book on Adam Smith provides a careful textual analysis of Smith’s two major works: The Theory of Moral SentimentsandThe Wealth of Nations. Young argues, with good textual evidence, that Smith did not divide economics from moral theory and that, indeed, Smith thought of economics as a moral science. Young traces Smith’s economic and moral philosophy to Aristotle and Hume, and he points out, correctly, that “self‐interest itself had a significant moral dimension in Smith” (p. 173). Thus Smith’s alleged focus on self‐interest inThe Wealth of Nationshas normative dimensions not always recognized by all Smith scholars. Young uses Smith’s notions of the impartial spectator and benevolence as well as his theory of justice to link the two texts. This is a controversial conclusion since neither the impartial spectator nor benevolence is evident as an important concept inThe Wealth of Nations. Young also argues that Smith divides the economic sphere from the political sphere (see his matrix on p. 158), a questionable conclusion in light of Smith’s focus on political economy inThe Wealth of Nations. Young’s book also suffers from his apparently not having read Amartya Sen’s or my works on Smith, both of which make many of the same arguments Young develops. Still, Young has added further to the growing literature that reads Smith as a serious moral philosopher whose theory of self‐interest is far from libertarian and who neither divided economics from ethics nor politics from either.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/322762

Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: et.2002.112.issue-2
Date: 01 2002
Author(s): Ricoeur, Paul
Abstract: The necessity of both solidarity and proceduralism thus holds for both distributive and criminal justice. In the end, Ricoeur remains committed to notions that ground the just polity in community and mutual sharing without thinking that these notions require us to dispense with the formalism of procedures of justice. While the latter are not sufficient on their own to create or sustain a just society, while, indeed, formal procedures always presuppose some conception of the good, procedural conceptions allow us to recognize each other as subjects of rights. Although it is not always clear that Ricoeur succeeds in reconciling Rawls and Walzer or Habermas and Gadamer, he does provide a fresh perspective on current debates within his own interesting account of the structure of moral action.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/324242

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2002.28.issue-4
Date: 06 2002
Author(s): Vidal Fernando
Abstract: For an illuminating discussion and critique, see Kathleen V. Wilkes, Real People: Personal Identity without Thought Experiments(Oxford, 1988), esp. chap. 1.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/341240

Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ajs.2003.108.issue-4
Date: 01 2003
Author(s): Lichterman Paul
Abstract: Of course, researchers routinely pursue some of these questions, through different methods of research. Part of our methodological contribution is to bring them together in the concept of group style.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/367920

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ca.2003.44.issue-3
Date: 06 2003
Author(s): Duranti Alessandro
Abstract: Ahearn, always a perceptive writer, brings out a fear that many linguistic anthropologists have but rarely expressthe fear of being assimilated to sociocultural anthropology and thus losing their identity through the forfeiting of their specificity. This is the flip side of William Labovs original wish that sociolinguistics might disappear once linguistics agreed to see language as a social phenomenon (that this has not happened is both an indictment of linguistics narrowmindedness and a validation of Labovs and other sociolinguists efforts to develop sociolinguistics into a vibrant independent field). The question then arises why we should worry about being assimilated. Shouldnt we, on the contrary, welcome such a possibility, to be seen as a validation of our work or as the mainstreaming of our concerns? The problem is not in the future, which cannot be predicted, but in the past. Everything we know from our earlier experiences warns us that an anthropology without a distinct group of language specialists is likely to be an anthropology with a nave understanding of communication. We have seen it happen already. When anthropology departments decide not to have a linguistic subfield, thinking that they dont need one, their students tend to take language for granted, identifying it with a vague notion of discourse. It is for this reason that we need to sharpen our historical, theoretical, and methodological understanding of what it means to study language as culture. We owe it first to our students.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/368118

Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ajs.2002.108.issue-1
Date: 07 2002
Author(s): Luhmann Niklas
Abstract: Theories are always, in some way, about their theorists. While Luhmann’s variant of mutant functionalism is not palatable to American tastes, his theories are as reflective of late‐20th‐century European sensibilities as Parsons’s were of mid‐20th‐century America or Bellah and Geertz’s of the upheaval of the 1960s and 1970s. Indeed, some art critics have warmed to Luhmann’s book as an exemplar of one of the newer “cool” theories of art; that is, those that challenge more subject‐centered and humanist theories and aim to accommodate the growth of new mediums such as digital art and cyberspace. But in any conception of art that includes culture, the medium is only as good as the meaning it conveys. And it is the meaning of art that is sorely lacking in Luhmann’s appraisal. Paul Ricoeur once wrote that “materialism is the truth of a world without truth.” It might then be said of Luhmann’s conception of the art system that it is the truth of art without meaning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/376294

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2003.29.issue-4
Date: 06 2003
Author(s): Mialet Hélène
Abstract: I would like to thank the participants of seminars and colloquia at the Max Planck Institute for the History of Science (Berlin), at the Department of Science and Technology Studies at Cornell, and at the ST&S and History of Medicine Colloquia at the University of Michigan for their helpful comments on earlier versions of this paper. I would also like to thank Robin Boast, Stephen Hirschauer, Michael Lynch, Michael Wintroub, and Skuli Sigurdsson for their suggestions, comments, and criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/377721

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ca.2004.45.issue-1
Date: 02 2004
Author(s): Juillerat Bernard
Abstract: Doctrine and method, theory and interpretation are not necessarily coordinate. Were such coordination possible, a metacritical stance would be required. By accepting uncritically the presuppositions that lie behind psychoanalytic metapsychology, Juillerat abrogates, in my view, ethnological responsibility, that is, the responsibility to measure in a receptive manner the presuppositions of ones hermeneutic against those of the culture one is studying. Though his attention to ethnographic detail leads Juillerat to refine psychoanalytic doctrine, it confirms the epistemological and hermeneutic assumptions of that doctrine (e.g., notions of the unconscious, id, ego, and superego, drives, repression, and, indeed, psychic space). Yafar myth and ritual as he presents them become allegories of that doctrineallegories, I would argue, of allegories. There would appear to be no escape, were it not for the Yafar voices that sound through Juillerats psychoanalytically predetermined presentations. (He offers us almost no contextualized verbatim texts in these essays, though he does in his monographs.) They remind us that, as LviStrauss demonstrated, myths are readily translated one into another, particularly when they are decontextualized. What is of ethnographic, indeed, psychoanalytic import is howand perhaps whytranslation is arrested and a particular myth (e.g., the Oedipal tale) becomes so authoritative that it has the power of promiscuous reduction. Though fascinated by the range of Yafar cultural expression, Juillerat fails to consider the implications of Yafars refusal to reduce their corpus of mythology and ritual to a single mytha singular ritual.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/381011

Journal Title: Journal of British Studies
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jbs.2005.44.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Seed John
Abstract: See Timothy Larsen, “Victorian Nonconformity and the Memory of the Ejected Ministers: The Impact of the Bicentennial Commemorations of 1862,” in The Church Retrospective: Papers Read at the 1995 Summer Meeting and 1996 Winter Meeting of the Ecclesiastical Society, ed. R. N. Swanson (Woodbridge, 1997), pp. 459–73. The centenary in 1762 was not apparently commemorated in any public way, though a few years later, 1688 was celebrated by Dissenters on a considerable scale.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/424945

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Marion Jean‐Luc
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, “Herméneutique de l’idée de Révélation,” in La Révélation, ed. Daniel Coppieters de Gibson (Bruxelles: Facultés universitaires Saint‐Louis, 1977), p. 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/424974

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2004.76.issue-3
Date: 09 2004
Author(s): Marino John A.
Abstract: Braudel, The Mediterranean,2d ed. (1972), 2:1243–44. Among many references to Machiavelli, see, e.g., Machiavelli,The Prince,chap. xxv, beginning of last paragraph: “I conclude, then, that so long as Fortune varies and men stand still, they will prosper while they suit the times, and fail when they do not.”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/425442

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2004.31.issue-1
Date: 09 2004
Author(s): Guillory John
Abstract: On the question of the relation between writing and media, which is perhaps thequestion of a larger inquiry beyond my own, I have benefited from exchanges with Alan Liu. See his “The Future Literary: Literature and the Culture of Information,” inTime and the Literary,ed. Karen Newman et al. (New York, 2002), pp. 61–100.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/427304

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-2
Date: 04 2005
Author(s): Nicholson Hugh
Abstract: This idea of the deliberate recovery of theological tensions by crossing religious boundaries can be understood in terms of the ecumenical concept of the complementarity of conflicting doctrinal formulations. Opposing doctrinal formulations are regarded as complementary expressions of a theological truth so profound as to be irreducible to any single formulation. For the ecumenical use of the complementarity concept, see, e.g., Avery Dulles, “Paths to Doctrinal Agreement: Ten Theses,” Theological Studies47 (1986): 44–45.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/427313

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2004.76.issue-4
Date: 12 1997
Author(s): Woodall Christopher
Abstract: Scholars and their students interested in the field would do well to begin with these studies, despite some unevenness in period, place, and theme. Developments in the twentieth century, for example, are not well served, especially as their globalization bursts all traditional boundaries in the discipline, making a historical perspective essential to an understanding of ongoing transformations in literate life everywhere, not just in the West. Similarly, the absence of illustrations undermines the potential value of these books as introductions to the history of reading. Much of the work here depends on the material objects that readers actually had; without images of them, the reader develops less of a sense of the field. Finally, the exclusion of the essays on correspondence from the original collection is deeply regrettable; Chartier’s summary of their implications in the introduction hardly does justice to them, especially to the important study of the 1847 postal survey by Dauphin and two other colleagues. The translations are generally accurate, but the indexes are barely adequate.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/427573

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Robbins, Jeffrey W.
Abstract: While sharing the aim of relating philosophy and theology, I do not think the project is best accomplished by thinking ontotheologically (at least, not in its Heideggerian sense). What is needed is to insist on a sharper distinction between ontotheological philosophy and religious theology so that we can better understand how they might relate. And here again, I agree with Robbins for different reasons: Ricoeur, Lévinas, and Marion are key sources in this project, for their work maintains the distinction that it calls into question.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/428537

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Bourgeois, Patrick L.
Abstract: Ricoeur gets the relation of critique and reason right, in Bourgeois’s eyes, as a philosopher who sees imagination tied to thinking at the boundary (not limit) of reason. In a chapter examining Derrida’s views on “sign, time, and trace” (chap. 7), Bourgeois elaborates Derrida’s view that Edmund Husserl’s distinction between meaningful expression and sign depends on a stable borderline between primary and secondary memory (or retention and recollection) in his theory of “the living present” (or duration), which, Derrida asserts, is phenomenologically unavailable. In light of this analysis, Bourgeois draws an interesting contrast between Derrida’s insistence on a discrete closure of meaning and Ricoeur’s theory of language and imagination based in a view of the living present of meaning and experience that refuses such discrete closure. Once more, however, Bourgeois overreaches when he attempts to identify these accurately drawn contrasts with the limit/boundary distinction. In Bourgeois’s reading of Ricoeur, imagination does not produce reason from below (as in Heidegger); rather, “reason itself limits knowledge to experience from above, putting the imagination in a central position both in knowledge and thinking” (p. 131). A productive imagination of living metaphor takes place at the boundary of reason, allowing the living present in meaning and action to escape deconstruction’s critique while still incorporating a positive relation to alterity. Nevertheless, Bourgeois may be drawing the wrong conclusion about these contrasts, for it seems possible to read both Ricoeur and Derrida as seeking to work at the boundary (not limit) of reason and to think somehow the presentation of the Idea in the Kantian sense. Whereas Ricoeur’s theory of metaphor and narrative allows him to present the semantic content of the Ideas of Reason positively, these remain for Derrida (as for Kant) unrepresentable, or “the impossible.” This problem has been Derrida’s enduring concern since his 1962 Introduction to Husserl’s “The Origin of Geometry.”The real difference between the thought of Ricoeur and Derrida is the distinctive way each thinker supplements phenomenology to take into account the creativity of meaning at the boundary of reason. For Derrida, it is thedifféranceof deconstruction; for Ricoeur, the graft of hermeneutics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/428538

Journal Title: Signs
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: signs.2005.30.issue-4
Date: 06 2005
Author(s): McNay Lois
Abstract: See especially Diana Tietjens Meyers, Self, Society, and Personal Choice(New York: Columbia University Press, 1989), and Diana Tietjens Meyers, ed.,Feminists Rethink the Self(Boulder, CO: Westview, 1997).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/429806

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-2
Date: 04 2005
Author(s): Mandry, Christof
Abstract: This is an engaging book for specialists in theological ethics and especially for those interested in the contributions of hermeneutical thinking to ethics. One can only hope that Mandry will continue to develop this line of reflection.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/430555

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: lq.2005.75.issue-2
Date: 04 2005
Author(s): Jones Bonna
Abstract: Hence, our choice of philosophies should not be limited to the two main philosophies identified by Budd but rather could take up ideas from process thinking, which is a quieter but nevertheless relevant philosophy to which LIS should attend. By valuing the processes and articulating this with better abstractions more congruent with our action, we not only further our own project; we also sustain a vital engagement with the projects of individuals. We more clearly articulate the library in the life of the user, to use the words of Wiegand [ 2].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431329

Journal Title: Signs
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: signs.2005.31.issue-1
Date: 09 2005
Author(s): Johar Schueller Malini
Abstract: However, Somerville often uses strategies very similar to Butler's in seeing the primacy of the sexual. See, e.g., the analysis of Jean Toomer based on the term queer(Somerville2000, 136) and the insistence that compulsory heterosexuality is “integral” to the logic of racial segregation (137).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431372

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-4
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Lee Hyo‐Dong
Abstract: For the notion of strategic essentialism, see Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, “Subaltern Studies: Deconstructing Historiography,” in her The Spivak Reader, 214–21. Serene Jones has drawn attention to the fact that the poststructuralist theoretical assumptions about the always oppressive nature of binarisms do not necessarily hold up under the pressures of concrete political struggles and that, in order to strengthen the bond of solidarity for a coalition of diverse social and cultural identities, what is called for is some kind of grand narrative that clearly defines the powers to be resisted and dismantled. I think this applies to a coalition of different religious identities as well. Serene Jones, “Cultural Labor and Theological Critique,” in Brown, Davaney, and Tanner, eds.,Converging on Culture, 166–68.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431810

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-4
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Maggi Armando
Abstract: 1 Cor. 13:12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431811

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-4
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Young III William W.
Abstract: Frei recognized the need for greater plurality within his own reading as well, particularly with regard to the “Gospel narrative” set forth in The Identity of Jesus Christ. See Higton,Christ, Providence, and History, 200–201.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431812

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2006.32.issue-2
Date: 01 2006
Author(s): Williams Jay
Abstract: Mitchell, “ Critical Inquiryand the Ideology of Pluralism,”Critical Inquiry8 (Summer 1982): 613.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/500701

Journal Title: American Journal of Education
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: aje.2006.112.issue-3
Date: 05 2006
Author(s): Schweber Simone
Abstract: Brooks ( 2001) reported, for example, that a Pentecostal minister in Franklin County, the location symbolizing Red America in his article, “regards such culture warriors as Jerry Falwell and Pat Robertson as loose cannons.”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/500714

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2006.86.issue-3
Date: 07 2006
Author(s): van der Ven Johannes A.
Abstract: Nevertheless, empiricism does not have the last word—it perhaps never has the last word, not even in what might be called “positivist empiricism,” and certainly not in practical theology, as this discipline is characterized by the interaction between empiricism and normativeness. We both share this conviction—the fifth characteristic. Therefore human rights—no matter how contested they are, which is neither surprising nor extraordinary—offer an important perspective, as the normative criteria they embody always require critical and constructive reflection. In the last part of the article I have even presented them as regulative principles of truth and justice, as a result of which they offer a kind of worldview‐related and morality‐related infrastructure for the social institutions that determine human actions in societal and personal life—the sixth characteristic. After all, for both Browning and me the ultimate issue is—the seventh characteristic—the vitality of the Christian tradition in terms of relevance and identity in the context of a multicivilization society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/503696

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2006.78.issue-2
Date: 06 2006
Author(s): Todorova Maria
Abstract: Ibid., 260. It was only at the last stages of correction of this manuscript that I learned about the work of Nikolai Voukov on the destruction of Dimitrov's mausoleum. While I find it an excellent contribution, Voukov's take on the event and its meaning is somewhat different than my own. I would like to express my gratitude to the author for sending me his manuscript, whose shorter version was published as “The Destruction of Georgi Dimitrov's Mausoleum in Sofia: The ‘Incoincidence' between Memory and Its Referents,” in Places of Memory,ed. Augustin Ioan, special issue ofOctogon(Bucharest, 2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/505801

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2006.86.issue-4
Date: 10 2006
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: Whatever normative conclusions may be drawn in the end, theological ethicists ignore the unique situation of children and childhood at their own peril. Neglecting such marginalized groups as women and minorities weakened the voice of theological ethics in the past, both by silently playing into larger social wrongs and by failing to learn and grow from those silenced. Childhood in the United States and the world presents theological ethics today with a new and different but just as acute social challenge. Methodologically, since children cannot speak up as fully as can adults for themselves, theological ethicists should engage as deeply as possible with children’s actual social experiences, including through the sophisticated observational work of the human sciences, in order more creatively to understand and respond. Substantively, childhood demands at the very least renewed attention to the asymmetrical tensions of human moral responsibility, the senses in which others demand of those around them creative self‐transformation. This childist gesture of responsiveness and self‐critique has already begun to animate the human sciences. How much more, then, should it be welcomed and deepened further by Christian ethicists, who in one way or another trace a transformed world to the possibilities incarnated in an infant’s birth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/505893

Journal Title: Isis
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: isis.2006.97.issue-2
Date: 06 2004.
Author(s): Kern Stephen
Abstract: Kern’s analysis is lucid and his thesis is ultimately persuasive. He argues that “the novel is emphatically historical in capturing a new sense of the complexity and uncertainty of causal understanding” as he traces the “sensitivity” of contemporary authors like Don DeLillo to “the significance of the new technologies of transportation, communication and investigation that transformed causal understanding in modern society” (p. 369). This is an observation with which many literary critics would agree. There are resemblances here to the methodology deployed by Ronald Thomas in his seminal and startlingly successful work Detective Fiction and the Rise of Forensic Science(Cambridge, 1999): narrative registers in its very construction the pressures of scientific and epistemological change. Yet a comparison with Thomas’s work reveals perhaps one of the few flaws of Kern’s study. IfA Cultural History of Causalityis directed toward the historian of science, one must question whether novels are ever really adequate source material for the construction of a hypothesis regarding nonfictional understandings of causality and probability. Paul Ricoeur reminds us inTime and Narrative(Chicago, 1984–1988) that literature has been seen since ancient times as “an ethical laboratory where the artist pursues through the mode of fiction experimentation with values” (Vol. 1, p. 59): fiction is thus both tethered to, yet at the same time distinct from, the world of the actual and the real. Kern acknowledges this to be so, yet his theory of mimesis, of realistic representation, seems to exclude any genuine engagement with tropes of playfulness, indeterminacy, symbolism, and ambiguity that mark literature just as deeply as any desire to replicate the real. Kern notes that he relies “primarily on novels by male authors about male murderers, because [his] method is comparative and requires controlling variables to focus on historical change” (p. 21). This seems to evade a broader question about the extent to which novels can be understood as “evidence” in any sense at all, or whether Kern should be focusing on trial reports rather than their fictionalized representations. This difficulty would be obviated if the focus of the work were an understanding of the impact of developments in scientific theory on narrative form, yet Kern seems reluctant to move fully in this direction. And indeed, if the ideal reader ofA Cultural History of Causalityis in fact a literary critic, he or she may be inclined to probe a number of Kern’s other assumptions as well—he is perhaps a little too inclined to assert that the Victorian novel is artistically “tidy,” that its patterns of closure are always neat and carefully wrought, as an expression of what Thomas Vargish has called “the providential aesthetic” in his study of the same name (Virginia, 1985). Scholars of nineteenth‐century fiction may perhaps feel that Kern’s descriptions of such neat closures sit uncomfortably with their readings ofBleak House(which is as much about the loss and destruction of evidence as it is about its recovery and careful explication) orOur Mutual FriendorDaniel DerondaorThe Brothers Karamazov(each of which problematizes our sense of a character’s relentless movement toward transgression, judgment, and punishment or acquittal). One is left with a sense that Kern occasionally deploys the term “Victorian” in a rather unsophisticated fashion: as Thomas has shown inDetective Fiction and the Rise of Forensic Science,even the most carefully crafted detective story of the nineteenth century can raise for readers and critics crucial questions about individual and national identity and the power of public surveillance. Yet these criticisms should not undermine a reader’s sense of Kern’s achievement in this book: it is a vast, ambitious attempt to effect a synthesis of scientific thought and literary experimentation, and on the whole it succeeds well.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/507355

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 508383
Date: 01 2007
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: In this respect, my project has similarities with the “multidimensional hermeneutic” approach to religious ethical inquiry proposed by William Schweiker in “On the Future of Religious Ethics: Keeping Religious Ethics, Religious and Ethics,” Journal of the American Academy of Religion74, no. 1 (March 2006): 135–51.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/508386

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2006.33.issue-1
Date: 09 2006
Abstract: Young, Paul. The Cinema Dreams Its Rivals: Media Fantasy Films from Radio to the Internet.Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2006. 284 pp. $74.95 (cloth); $24.95 (paper).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/509752

Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522257
Date: 01 2007
Author(s): Ricoeur, Paul
Abstract: In a first reading of the book, I was critical of this emphasis on moral motivations, since it seemed to be overburdened by a psychological approach. But, on a second reading, I had to refrain from my critique. Ricoeur makes the point that he has no intention to “take the place of a resolution for the perplexities raised by the very concept of a struggle, still less of a resolution of the conflicts” (218). In other words, Ricoeur is proposing a well‐needed complement to the institutional design trend that has invaded contemporary political philosophy. Contrary to many, he stands before the most perplexing issue of recognition with eyes wide open: indeed, demands of recognition may never end and take the form of an “unhappy consciousness” (218). One can try to resolve this potential inflation of claims by sorting out political and substantive issues. But a solution that takes only this path could create vast areas of frustration that canny elites have learned to fuel, or come to neglect recognition claims on the grounds that they hide a Pandora's box waiting to be opened. I suspect that this neglect mechanism is one of the reasons why so many legitimate recognition claims still languish in limbo as we speak. The course taken by Ricoeur may be difficult to square with the mainstream approach in contemporary political philosophy—political liberalism, to name it—but it nonetheless deserves careful attention.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/510704

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: lq.2006.76.issue-3
Date: 07 2006
Author(s): Budd John M.
Abstract: Three general features of this method can be noted in advance. First, this method must be immanent or internal to its subject matter. Dialectical theorists reject outright the idea that the thinker can occupy some privileged Archimedean point outside the subject of investigation. … A second feature of dialectical method is its dialogical character. Theorizing is an activity taking place not simply within the mind but between minds. Thinking is dialogical because it always takes the form of an exchange or a conversation between ourselves, our contemporaries, and our predecessors. … Third, the dialogical element is related to the historical dimension of theory. [ 40, pp. 167–68]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/511140

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2006.78.issue-4
Date: 12 2005
Author(s): Popkin Jeremy D.
Abstract: Instructive as his book is, Popkin could also have explored in greater depth yet the relationship between historical scholarship and expressions of the self. By focusing on autobiographies alone, he misses an opportunity to examine how such texts and scholarly publications related to (and possibly affected) one another, most notably in their divergent or convergent patterns of self‐representation. The boundary between autobiographical and scholarly writings may be more porous than Popkin intimates. Paul Hollander’s recent study of academic acknowledgments arrives, for instance, at conclusions that mirror Popkin’s regarding self‐representation and professional norms (“Acknowledgments: An Academic Ritual,” Academic Questions15, no. 1 [2001–2]: 63–76). Likewise, one could question why Popkin limited himself to the discursive analysis of published sources and “the motives that historian‐autobiographers acknowledge in their texts” (78). Autobiographies are also social practices that call for systematic research outside the text, in archival and published sources (and, perhaps, interviews as well). But Popkin is too good a historian not to know this. His book is by and about historians; it is dedicated to historians, but it is not only for historians. Its chief objective may well be to show how much the historian’s autobiography has contributed “to the literature of personal life writing” (8). In this respect as in many others,History, Historians, and Autobiographyis a success.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/511206

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2007.33.issue-2
Date: 01 2007
Author(s): Gasché Rodolphe
Abstract: See Derrida, Passions(Paris, 1993).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/511505

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509553
Date: 04 2007
Author(s): Wall, John
Abstract: Wall has skillfully woven the exegetical, dialogical, and constructive parts of his project into a thought‐provoking and readable work. Moral Creativitycould be profitably read by anyone familiar with contemporary debates in religious and philosophical ethics. It will both broaden the appeal of Ricoeur’s writings and advance the conversation about the relation of ethics to poetics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/513233

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522064
Date: 03 2007
Author(s): Harootunian Harry
Abstract: I had the benefit of reading versions of this paper at a number of institutions, and I wish to record the help I received at the University of Chicago, the University of Michigan, the New School for Social Research, Waseda University (Tokyo), and the University of Washington. I also want to thank Kristin Ross, Carol Gluck, and Hyun Ok Park for commenting on earlier revisions of the manuscript.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/513523

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509555
Date: 10 2007
Author(s): Flake Kathleen
Abstract: Bloom, American Religion, 97.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/519770

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509555
Date: 10 2007
Author(s): Nicholson Hugh
Abstract: Hacker, “Distinctive Features,” 95 and passim; Michael A. Sells, Mystical Languages of Unsaying(Chicago, 1994), 1–13, esp. 12. Note that Hacker acknowledges that Śaṅkara’s discourse on brahman is all the more alive (lebendiger) for its terminological imprecision (“Distinctive Features,” 95).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/519771

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509554
Date: 07 2007
Author(s): Browning, Don S.
Abstract: While this book will be of great interest to Christian ethicists as well as to religious and moral educators, it should also be read by social scientists, philosophers, and evolutionary psychologists. Browning’s view that nontheological disciplines depend on images of the human that play a guiding role for their research, as well as for the interpretation of their results, points to the continued need for more interdisciplinary work. According to this point of view, theology should play a public role in identifying such prescientific or preempirical images as well as in describing and advancing refined and responsible images based on the Christian tradition. The present volume goes a long way in either direction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/519893

Journal Title: Signs
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 518276
Date: 01 2008
Author(s): Plate Liedeke
Abstract: My encounter with this student suggests another way of thinking about the political value of rewriting. Countering all the more blasé signals my students were giving me that it was most naive to think the retelling of stories from another point of view could have any political impact, it is evidence that women’s rewritings of classic texts can still affect young women, still make them think and make them want to contribute to the discussions, the debates that shape the public sphere. Although we need, of course, to factor in serendipity—the student was on holiday and thought she had discovered a little‐known book when in fact it was a New York Timesbest seller—there is definitely a sense in which her discovery marked a moment in her life and signals the development of a feminist consciousness (broadly defined as a certain awareness of gender identity combined with a critical position in respect to misogyny and patriarchy and a conviction that things can be changed). There is no denying that increasing individualization at all levels of society has caused the loss of a sense of collective action and political projects. This is equally true for ideas of improvement, emancipation, and modernization, the responsibility of which has largely been shifted to the individual, whose “human rights,” as Bauman argues, are redefined as “the right of individuals to stay different and to pick and choose at will their own models of happiness and fitting life‐style” (2000;2005, 29). In this deregulated and privatized sociopolitical context that knows no common cause, re‐vision can only fail to formulate enabling fictions for a better future for all. Yet in its capacity to speak to individuals, it can still draw them into visions of community and collectivity. Re‐vision may thus not be the lifeline that is to haul us out of patriarchy any more, but as a structure of address that engages readers into contemplating differences, it remains one of the ways in which we keep sane and critical and thinking, moved by the stories of long‐forgotten lives into participating in an open public sphere.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/521054

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 527832
Date: 01 2008
Author(s): Scimeca Ross
Abstract: In this article, we have argued that the application of library practice requires a suspension of truth. We support this by introducing a new theory of truth that is rooted in historicism. One of the overarching missions of library practice is to acquire, manage, preserve, and make accessible human knowledge. While there are pragmatic and sociopolitical considerations that often constrict fulfillment of this mission, the public purpose of librarianship in a free and open society nonetheless dictates that materials be made accessible regardless of what the society at the current time or the majority of people within a culturally defined place consider as true.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/523909

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 526095
Date: 09 2007
Abstract: Zulawski, Ann. Unequal Cures: Public Health and Political Change in Bolivia, 1900‐1950.Durham, North Carolina: Duke University Press, 2007. 253 pp. $21.95 (paper); $74.95 (cloth).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/526093

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587019
Date: April 2004
Author(s): Woolf Daniel
Abstract: [[START 06A00070]] Reviews of Books and Films neered research in this latter area in "A Feminine Past? Gender, Genre and Historical Knowledge in England, 1500-1800," American Historical Review 102:3 [June 1997]: 645-79). But these are ungenerous caveats: this is a meticulously researched study in which analysis is ably supported by a range of impres- sive statistical data and well-chosen (and sometimes entertaining) case studies of individual readers, pub- lishers, and publications. ROSEMARY MITCHELL University of Leeds J. G. A. POCocK. [[END 06A00070]] [[START 06A00080]] Barbarism and Religion: Volume Three, The First Decline and Fall. New York: Cam- bridge University Press. 2003. Pp. xiii, 527. $60.00. In reviewing for this journal the first two volumes of J. G. A. Pocock's Barbarism and Religion, the present reviewer observed that there is a symphonic quality to Pocock's writing, as polyphonic lines in the form of concepts are spun out, developed, inverted, and brought into counterpoint with others. This third movement offers a scherzo reminiscent of the author's 1975 book, The Machiavellian Moment, and it sounds some of the same chords (republicanism, political cycles, civic virtue, arms vs. commerce). The subtitle of volume three is deceptively simple: it refers to the first (and best-known) volume of Edward Gibbon's masterpiece, which he published in 1776. That book commenced (after a very brief account of the structure of the Augustan principate) with the "Five Good" Antonine emperors from Nerva to Mar- cus Aurelius, and concluded (narratively) with Con- stantine's defeat of Licinius and restoration of a unified rule-a temporary resolution immediately fol- lowed by two chapters on Christianity that seem jarringly out of place, given the fact that Christians are scarcely mentioned through the previous fourteen chapters. Gibbon's readers had to wait until 1781 for the story to pick up again. Exposition of this "first decline and fall" in fact occupies only the last hundred pages of Pocock's volume and therefore serves as both a climax to the Pocockian story so far, and a bridge to the next volume. Volume one of Barbarism and Religion situated Gibbon intellectually within a number of different European "Enlightenments"; volume two located him on a different axis, among the various writers of "narratives of civil government" in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. (We are still missing the parallel vector running through ecclesiastical histori- ography, although Eusebius, Augustine, Orosius, and Otto of Freising figure prominently here. Christianity only begins to signal its importance with chapter fifteen of Gibbon; where he used ecclesiastical author- ities, up to that point, it was to document civil rather than sacred history.) Volume three moves in a third, diachronic dimension, tracing the transformations of key themes, in particular the idea of "decline and fall" itself, from very ancient origins up to the Scot Adam Ferguson's Progress and Termination of the Roman Republic (which appeared seven years after Gibbon's first volume and is thus offered for comparison rather than direct influence). The flight of concepts and motifs is dizzying, the lengthy quotations apposite, and as with the previous volumes, one can scarcely miss a sentence without losing a nuance or a parenthetical qualification. The theme of decline and fall, which informs the conception and beginning of Gibbon's book, would eventually yield to "barbarism and reli- gion" as its principal causes in later volumes (along with over-taxation, which Gibbon mentions at the close of chapter fourteen). But behind that idea, which only gradually emerged from Polybian political cycles via medieval notions of the translatio imperii, lay much else, including sequential recognitions of crucial turn- ing points in Roman history going back to Gracchan land reforms in the late second century B.C.E. The core problem, historiographically, remains how to explain why Gibbon, committed from an early stage to a Tacitean narrative, chose to begin his account not with the Julio-Claudians but instead at the "Antonine moment" of imperial zenith achieved by Trajan. (As he once did with cinquecento Florence, Pocock inclines to define major turning points or episodes, both historical and intellectual, in terms of "moments"-a historical Constantinean and historiographical Zosiman moment lie ahead, and the Machiavellian version even puts in a cameo appearance when this volume reaches the early eighteenth century.) Gibbon knew intimately the char- acter of Augustan rule and the flaws of the late republic; he had read his Sallust as well as Tacitus. The later imperial historians, especially Appian of Alexan- dria and Ammianus Marcellinus, also figure in this account as historians of decline, but of a decline that takes a great deal of time-all the way to the "Illyrian" recovery of the late third century-really to become unmistakeable. The subjects confronted by Gibbon's nearly two millennia of predecessors include the military problem of restless troops settling in an empire that has con- quered all its rivals and closed itself off from further expansion; the civic conflict between virtue and cor- ruption (or rather, the way in which virtue leads to military conquest and empire, which in turn produce an oriental softness); the role of the soldiers in making emperors and especially the legions' realization, in the Year of Four Emperors (68/69 C.E.), that emperors could be made "elsewhere than Rome"; the place of the Augustinian-Orosian "two cities" view of history; the vicissitudes in republicanism (an issue revived in the fifteenth century by Leonardi Bruni, who as a non-Roman concerned mainly with Florence was able to see the empire's longue duree for the first time as declinatio rather than translatio and to initiate, though not complete, a gradual transition in historiography from the latter to the former); and the extension of citizenship to the provinces, along, soon, with the capacity of provincials to be proclaimed emperor. All of these streams converge, not entirely satisfactorily AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 470 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00080]] [[START 06A00080]] Methods/Theory from either Gibbon's or Pocock's point of view, in the making of the first volume of the Decline and Fall. In Pocock's summary of Gibbon, the Augustan principate was a system that bumped along for a quarter millennium until, following fifty years of mili- tary anarchy, the Illyrian Diocletian divided the empire into two halves ruled by two senior and two junior emperors. Diocletian himself abandoned any remain- ing pretence that the emperor was merely princeps and imperator, openly assuming virtually an Asiatic despo- tism, styled dominus and secluded from public access. This set the stage for the establishment of an entirely new kind of regime under Constantine in the next generation. The very resilience of the Augustan-Anto- nine system up to that point posed narrative and explanatory challenges for Gibbon in itself, since it occurred despite runs of weak emperors, intermittent monsters (Caligula, Nero, Domitian, Commodus, Ca- racalla), the progressive emasculation of the senate (effectively completed by Septimius Severus early in the third century), and the growing independence of the military. Gibbon's flowing recit is bracketed by peintures (the gallicisms are Pocock's) of Antonine civilization at the start and of Christianity in chapter fifteen. In between the beginning and end of his volume, Gibbon appears to have realized that he had, in a way, painted himself into a corner, given that he had over a thousand years still to narrate, and a radical shift in priorities and design proved necessary. Future volumes of the Decline and Fall would give both the foreign tribes and the Christians much greater prom- inence, and before the last volume's conclusion, a Tacitean account of the decline and fall of western antiquity would evolve into an "enlightened narrative" of the triumph of barbarism and religion, recovery from which had only really begun in Gibbon's own age of civility. This volume is every bit as persuasive as its prede- cessors and, perhaps because it is as much recit as the others were peintures, it is also rather more compelling a read. More than the first two volumes of his work, volume three of Barbarism and Religion leaves one hanging; like Gibbon and his first readers, we are only at the Milvian Bridge, pondering what will follow with Constantine. One hopes that, unlike those readers, we will not have to wait five years for the next episode. DANIEL WOOLF University of Alberta [[END 06A00080]] [[START 06A00090]] LAWRENCE W. MCBRIDE, editor. Reading Irish Histories: Texts, Contexts, and Memory in Modem Ireland. Port- land, Oreg.: Four Courts Press. 2003. Pp. 233. $55.00. The final essay of this collection closes with the following sentiment from Sean Farrell Moran: "Like Socrates and Plato who stood firmly against the influ- ence of myth in Athenian democracy, academic histo- rians will step in to attempt to correct the misconcep- tions of Irish citizens" (p. 218). In the previous essay, one such "academic historian," Ben Novick, stepped into the breach in the following fashion: "Writing, as discussed throughout this book, is a primary means of disseminating information" (p. 211). Socrates and Plato have indeed met their match. It is perhaps unfortunate that this collection, edited by Lawrence W. McBride, closes with one of the most arrogant pieces of scholarship that I have ever had the displeasure of reading. The conceit of the comparison quoted above, and the condescension of statements such as "Perhaps we should pity the peasants. They made the mistake of remembering their past incor- rectly" and "The common Irish man and woman must then be re-educated about Ireland's past and abandon their memories" (p. 218), make it difficult to commend the essay as a fine conclusion to an exceptional book. One can only hope that Moran is trying to be ironic. But it would be unfair to condemn this book on the basis of one author's misguided faith in the powers of the "academic historian." Indeed, the book, although most worthy at times, has enough problems without that. The intention of the collection is clearly estab- lished in the editor's preface: to "examine how a variety of historical narratives were delivered through the written word, but with special attention paid to how readers might have reacted to these texts" (p. 13). The difficulty is that the reader is the one consistent absentee from the essays that follow. From Paul Townend's chapter on the reading rooms of the na- tional movements of the late nineteenth century to Novick's chapter on the newspaper of the Irish Volun- teers, the reader is little more than a shadowy figure. Even the most basic details are ignored; there is no attempt to estimate circulation figures for books or newspapers. Anne Kane's attempts at "reconstructing" (p. 46) what a newspaper reader during the land war might have felt amounts to little more than an essay in speculative sociology. Paul Ricoeur and Clifford Geertz seem to get more attention than the actual people who "may have" (p. 46) and "could well have" (p. 56) responded to the newspapers examined. It also seems unlikely that any farmer facing eviction could have conceived of the land war as a "ritual process" (p. 45). But Kane's essay is not the only one at fault in this fashion. The extent of the readers' absence almost begs one to question why the editor made such a particular point of drawing "special attention" to the reader at all. This is not a fault particular to this book or to these essays. Beyond specific accounts by a reader reacting to a text, which in turn have all the inherent linguistic and interpretative pitfalls of any other text, there are very few ways to interpret the readers' response to any type of narrative. Timothy McMahon is one of the few authors in this collection who actually quotes from the men and women who attended the Gaelic Summer Colleges that he examines. His essay is one of the collection's most valuable as a result. Colin Barr's piece on university education, again valuable in its factual content, has nothing to say about the students or how the changes in the universities effected them AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 471 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00090]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/530341

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587019
Date: April 2004
Author(s): Dolan Anne
Abstract: [[START 06A00080]] Methods/Theory from either Gibbon's or Pocock's point of view, in the making of the first volume of the Decline and Fall. In Pocock's summary of Gibbon, the Augustan principate was a system that bumped along for a quarter millennium until, following fifty years of mili- tary anarchy, the Illyrian Diocletian divided the empire into two halves ruled by two senior and two junior emperors. Diocletian himself abandoned any remain- ing pretence that the emperor was merely princeps and imperator, openly assuming virtually an Asiatic despo- tism, styled dominus and secluded from public access. This set the stage for the establishment of an entirely new kind of regime under Constantine in the next generation. The very resilience of the Augustan-Anto- nine system up to that point posed narrative and explanatory challenges for Gibbon in itself, since it occurred despite runs of weak emperors, intermittent monsters (Caligula, Nero, Domitian, Commodus, Ca- racalla), the progressive emasculation of the senate (effectively completed by Septimius Severus early in the third century), and the growing independence of the military. Gibbon's flowing recit is bracketed by peintures (the gallicisms are Pocock's) of Antonine civilization at the start and of Christianity in chapter fifteen. In between the beginning and end of his volume, Gibbon appears to have realized that he had, in a way, painted himself into a corner, given that he had over a thousand years still to narrate, and a radical shift in priorities and design proved necessary. Future volumes of the Decline and Fall would give both the foreign tribes and the Christians much greater prom- inence, and before the last volume's conclusion, a Tacitean account of the decline and fall of western antiquity would evolve into an "enlightened narrative" of the triumph of barbarism and religion, recovery from which had only really begun in Gibbon's own age of civility. This volume is every bit as persuasive as its prede- cessors and, perhaps because it is as much recit as the others were peintures, it is also rather more compelling a read. More than the first two volumes of his work, volume three of Barbarism and Religion leaves one hanging; like Gibbon and his first readers, we are only at the Milvian Bridge, pondering what will follow with Constantine. One hopes that, unlike those readers, we will not have to wait five years for the next episode. DANIEL WOOLF University of Alberta [[END 06A00080]] [[START 06A00090]] LAWRENCE W. MCBRIDE, editor. Reading Irish Histories: Texts, Contexts, and Memory in Modem Ireland. Port- land, Oreg.: Four Courts Press. 2003. Pp. 233. $55.00. The final essay of this collection closes with the following sentiment from Sean Farrell Moran: "Like Socrates and Plato who stood firmly against the influ- ence of myth in Athenian democracy, academic histo- rians will step in to attempt to correct the misconcep- tions of Irish citizens" (p. 218). In the previous essay, one such "academic historian," Ben Novick, stepped into the breach in the following fashion: "Writing, as discussed throughout this book, is a primary means of disseminating information" (p. 211). Socrates and Plato have indeed met their match. It is perhaps unfortunate that this collection, edited by Lawrence W. McBride, closes with one of the most arrogant pieces of scholarship that I have ever had the displeasure of reading. The conceit of the comparison quoted above, and the condescension of statements such as "Perhaps we should pity the peasants. They made the mistake of remembering their past incor- rectly" and "The common Irish man and woman must then be re-educated about Ireland's past and abandon their memories" (p. 218), make it difficult to commend the essay as a fine conclusion to an exceptional book. One can only hope that Moran is trying to be ironic. But it would be unfair to condemn this book on the basis of one author's misguided faith in the powers of the "academic historian." Indeed, the book, although most worthy at times, has enough problems without that. The intention of the collection is clearly estab- lished in the editor's preface: to "examine how a variety of historical narratives were delivered through the written word, but with special attention paid to how readers might have reacted to these texts" (p. 13). The difficulty is that the reader is the one consistent absentee from the essays that follow. From Paul Townend's chapter on the reading rooms of the na- tional movements of the late nineteenth century to Novick's chapter on the newspaper of the Irish Volun- teers, the reader is little more than a shadowy figure. Even the most basic details are ignored; there is no attempt to estimate circulation figures for books or newspapers. Anne Kane's attempts at "reconstructing" (p. 46) what a newspaper reader during the land war might have felt amounts to little more than an essay in speculative sociology. Paul Ricoeur and Clifford Geertz seem to get more attention than the actual people who "may have" (p. 46) and "could well have" (p. 56) responded to the newspapers examined. It also seems unlikely that any farmer facing eviction could have conceived of the land war as a "ritual process" (p. 45). But Kane's essay is not the only one at fault in this fashion. The extent of the readers' absence almost begs one to question why the editor made such a particular point of drawing "special attention" to the reader at all. This is not a fault particular to this book or to these essays. Beyond specific accounts by a reader reacting to a text, which in turn have all the inherent linguistic and interpretative pitfalls of any other text, there are very few ways to interpret the readers' response to any type of narrative. Timothy McMahon is one of the few authors in this collection who actually quotes from the men and women who attended the Gaelic Summer Colleges that he examines. His essay is one of the collection's most valuable as a result. Colin Barr's piece on university education, again valuable in its factual content, has nothing to say about the students or how the changes in the universities effected them AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 471 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00090]] [[START 06A00090]] Reviews of Books and Films and their learning. The academic career of one Galway student, H. Fitzwalter Kirker, is traced in its entirety, but only in a footnote. The reader gets at least something approximating a lifeline in the piece by McBride on the young reader and the teaching and learning of Irish history. That "young people are by nature curious" (p. 114), however, seems an inade- quate point on which to hang a conclusion. The book is at its strongest in the essays by Jose Lanters and Gregory Castle, which focus on the work of T. W. Rolleston and Standish O'Grady, respectively. Both historians are examined in the context of their contemporaries; both essays actually attempt to fulfill the claims they make for themselves in their opening pages. The same cannot be said, however, for Eileen Reilly's piece on J. A. Froude. Its bland rehearsal of his life is punctuated with references to his visits to Ireland and quotations from some of his more offen- sive diatribes on the Irish people. She offers little or no comment on the bigotry that billowed forth from his pen. For example, one is told of Froude's dislike for Daniel O'Connell but not the reason why. Novick's piece on the military education of the Irish Volunteers begins with an interesting description, but it is rather disappointing thereafter. Although the material is fascinating, the author's conclusions are not. At one point, he deduces that "The pattern of military education seen in the Irish Volunteer and the Workers' Republic lends weight to the idea of the Rising as blood sacrifice, since the key strategist, Joseph Plunkett, never wrote military columns for the Irish Volunteer" (p. 198). At no point does it occur to Novick that the rebels might not have printed their plans in the paper because letting the authorities in Dublin Castle know in advance was not really part of the plan. How useful, indeed, is an examination of the Irish Volunteer's role in the training of the rebels when even the author concedes that details of training on urban insurrection were "left to the writers of the Workers' Republic" (p. 210); when the author gives approximately nine lines of consideration to what he adjudges to be the more important source? Through- out there is little sense of the eye of Dublin Castle watching over what was published and curtailing what could be written. This is a worthy but a frustrating book. There is a lot of value in each essay in terms of the material that is brought to light, but there is also the crushing weight of the artificial framework under which the essays are forced to labor. Like Froude, it is perhaps this book's "portion in life to please no one faction" (p. 140). ANNE DOLAN Trinity College Dublin [[END 06A00090]] [[START 06A00100]] COLIN NEWBURY. Patrons, Clients, and Empire: Chief- taincy and Over-Rule in Asia, Africa, and the Pacific. New York: Oxford University Press. 2003. Pp. xii, 328. $72.00. It is a brave historian nowadays who admits that his or her current academic preoccupations began in the 1950s, but an unrepentant Colin Newbury tells us that imperial history at Oxford University is peculiarly marked by continuity. He says that literary theory has dominated the study of discourse for too long (al- though presumably not at Oxford), and it is time to get back to the study of political discourse using the time-honored model of patron-client relations. Drawing on his extensive knowledge of African and Pacific imperial history, with the addition of material on South and Southeast Asia, Newbury presents a well researched and cogently argued case for the persis- tence of precolonial clientage networks in certain British and French colonies. Patron-client modeling was refined by social scientists in the 1960s and 1970s, when it became a useful way of explaining why inde- pendence had brought relatively little change to the administrative systems of former colonies. That polit- ical and economic relations in some colonies can be analyzed effectively using this theory is clear; whether the exercise speaks to wider debates about empire is another question. The omission of colonies of settle- ment, along with almost all of the Portuguese, Dutch, and German empires, weakens the case considerably. Newbury draws on a wide, although extremely selec- tive, range of secondary literature to supplement his own research, wisely conceding that authors may not like the use he makes of their material. He feels no need to address the epistemological and methodolog- ical concerns raised by authors whose work he mines for empirical detail. He excludes pioneering cross- disciplinary studies, such as Jean and John Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution (1991) and Nicholas Thomas, Colonialism's Culture: Anthropology, Travel and Government (1994), which have done so much to shape current debates in postcolonial anthropology. Newbury calls for more interaction between social scientists and historians, but he does surprisingly little to encourage it. If patron-client brokerage really is the best model, Newbury should be able to tackle other theories with confidence, demonstrating their inade- quacies through constructive engagement. Instead he revives battles won long ago, such as the critique of "collaboration" and "indirect rule" analysis. There are still some historians who work with these terms, but far more interesting is the much larger number of scholars tackling more recent debates. This book's contribution to imperial historiography is therefore difficult to assess. Newbury hopes that it will help to determine whether imperial rule suc- ceeded or failed "in 'preparing' [its colonies] for the exigencies and responsibilities of devolved govern- ment" (p. viii). One wonders whether this is still a pressing question, however. It has been a long time since independence for many of the countries Newbury discusses. Scholars posing broader questions about colonialism's legacy will wonder about the cost of Newbury's ruthlessly exclusive approach. While dis- cussing the influence of indigenous networks, Newbury AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 472 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00100]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/530342

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587009
Date: February 2002
Author(s): Bender Thomas
Abstract: [[START 02P0009T]] Review Essay Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History THOMAS BENDER [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] OVER THE PAST QUARTER CENTURY, a new American history has been written.1 This rewriting of American history has often been associated with the "triumph" of social history within the discipline, but in fact the transformation is much broader than that: the domain of the historical has been vastly extended, inherited narratives displaced, new subjects and narratives introduced. While at the monographic level, one sees similar developments in various national historiographies, national synthesis-and the idea of a national synthesis- seems to have been less troubled elsewhere than in the field of U.S. history. Admittedly, generalization is risky, especially if one reaches into historiographies with which one is barely familiar. Still, I think that a variety of outstanding national histories (or histories of a people sometimes treated as nations) have been more confident of established narrative strategies. With the exception of the historians of France that I will note, historians of other modern nations seem to have had fewer doubts about the basic framing of a narrative synthesis, and they have not felt compelled to develop new approaches, even though in many cases the other work of the authors involved has been strikingly innovative.2 Yet the social, intellectual, and political developments that have complicated American historiography are likely, I suspect, to make themselves felt in other national historiographies fairly soon, a point recently made by Jacques Revel, a leading French historian.3 And that circumstance may spawn a generation of controversy about the politics and strategies of synthesis. If so, the American case may be of more general import and interest. Beginning in the 1940s, intellectual history became the synthesizing subfield in U.S. history. reDlacing the political-economic narratives of Frederick Jackson [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] I wish to thank the editors of the AHR, first, for inviting me to consider the issues in this essay, second, for the helpful comments of Acting Editor Jeffrey Wasserstrom, and, third, for the quite stimulating commentary of several anonymous reviewers. 1 See Eric Foner, ed., The New American History (Philadelphia, 1990); Foner, ed., The New American History, rev. and expanded edn. (Philadelphia, 1997). 2 I have in mind Linda Colley, Britons: Forging the Nation, 1707-1837 (New Haven, Conn., 1992); Jonathan D. Spence, The Search for Modem China (New York, 1990); Albert Hourani, A History of the Arab Peoples (Cambridge, Mass., 1991); Paul Ginsborg, A History of Contemporary Italy (Harmond- sworth, Eng., 1990); Theodore Zeldin, France, 1848-1945, 2 vols. (Oxford, 1979); Fernand Braudel, The Identity of France, Sian Reynolds, trans., 2 vols. (New York, 1988-90); Andre Burguiere and Jacques Revel, eds., Histoire de la France, 5 vols. (Paris, 1989-2000). 3 Jacques Revel, "Le fandeau de la memoire," paper presented at the conference "International- izing the Study of American History," Florence, Italy, July 5, 1999. Paper in possession of author. 129 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 130 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Turner and Charles A. Beard.4 But during the 1970s, the claims being made for a national mind or culture were challenged by social historians. Intellectual history was chastened and transformed by the confrontation with social history. Eschewing their former embrace of synthesis, intellectual historians pulled back to study more precisely defined themes and thinkers.5 Not only intellectual history but other subfields accommodated social history's provocation to rethink conventional gen- eralizations. In addition, a professional, even "social-scientific," concern for precision and specificity of reference collaborated-sometimes with forethought, often not-with a sharpened awareness of difference and conflict that came from social movements outside the academy to undermine older composite narratives. Neither the frame supplied by Charles and Mary Beard in The Rise of American Civilization (1927), with its dramatic narrative of conflict between the "people" and the "interests," nor the consensual pluralism that succeeded that interpretation in the 1950s survived.6 If the consensus historians underplayed conflict, the Beards' approach, for all of its sympathy for the dispossessed, was found to be inadequate as well. Their narrative revealed little feel for the diversity of Americans, and it paid scant attention to non-whites. Most important of all, while their narrative voice was sympathetic, one did not discover the quotidian life or hear the voices of those groups that have found voice in more recent historiography. Judged by newer historiographical expectations, The Rise of American Civilization seemed "thin," compared with the increasingly popular "thick" description that was built, in part, on the enormously influential anthropological work of Clifford Geertz.7 In the past quarter century, there has been a proliferation of exciting new research, much of it bringing previously overlooked or explicitly excluded groups and events into the light of history. The number and variety of American stories multiplied. Suddenly, there were histories where there had been none or where the available histories had not been attended to by professional historians: histories of African Americans in the era of slavery and beyond; of Native Americans; of workers at home in their communities, at work, and at play; of women at home and outside of the home and of gender relations more generally; of consumption as well as production; of ethnic minorities and "borderlands"; of popular culture and other "marginal" forms of cultural production; of objects and material culture; of whites and whiteness as historical subjects; of non-state international and intercultural relations; and much more. [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 4Frederick Jackson Turner never completed a major synthesis, but one can see how he might have done that work in his posthumously published The United States, 1830-1850 (New York, 1935); Charles A. Beard and Mary R. Beard, The Rise of American Civilization (1927; 2 volumes in 1, New York, 1930).. In fact, the Beards participated in this shift with the publication of The American Spirit: A Study of the Idea of Civilization in the United States (New York, 1942). 5 For an early anticipation of this development-from the point of view of intellectual history-see Lawrence Veysey, "Intellectual History and the New Social History," in Paul K. Conkin and John Higham, eds., New Directions in American Intellectual History (Baltimore, Md., 1979), 3-26. See also, in the same volume, David A. Hollinger, "Historians and the Discourse of Intellectuals," 42-63; and Thomas Bender, "The Cultures of Intellectual Life: The City and the Professions," 181-95. 6 For consensus history as synthesis, see especially Daniel J. Boorstin, The Americans, 3 vols. (New York, 1958-73); Louis Hartz, The Liberal Tradition in America: An Interpretation of American Political Thought since the Revolution (New York, 1955). 7 On the Beards and newer social histories, see Thomas Bender, "The New History-Then and Now," Reviews in American History 12 (1984): 612-22. For Clifford Geertz, see The Interpretation of Cultures: Selected Essays (New York, 1973). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 131 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] By the early 1980s, some commentators inside and outside the profession were wondering whether an American history had disappeared in the onslaught of highly particular studies, often about subgroups in the larger society of the United States. These developments were occurring at a moment when the number of American historians was expanding to an unprecedented degree. Disciplinary expansion both allowed and prompted increased specialization. And that worried some, who began to speak of hyperspecialization and fragmentation. The structure of specialization derived in large part from the impact of a social history that often fused the group-based particularity of focus with ideological commitments to class and identity-based social movements. This pattern of work discouraged the integration of particular histories into some kind of synthesis.8 Traditionalists, perhaps not surprisingly, were unnerved by these develop- ments.9 But even some proponents of the newer history worried. Early on, Herbert G. Gutman, one of the leading figures in the movement to write a history that included all Americans and that recognized differences-class, ethnic, racial, gender-was concerned that instead of enriching and enlarging the usable history of the United States, the new scholarship was failing to do that, perhaps making it in fact less usable. The "new social history," he wrote in the introduction to his collection of pioneering essays in the field, "suffers from a very limiting overspe- cialization." Take an Irish-born Catholic female textile worker and union organizer in Fall River involved in a disorderly strike in 1875. She might be the subject of nearly a dozen sub-specializations, which would, he feared, "wash out the wholeness that is essential to understanding human behavior."10 Later, in the wake of a national meeting of writers at which historians and history seemed to be largely ignored in discussions of the political and cultural situation in the aftermath of Richard Nixon, Gutman mused aloud in the pages of The Nation over whether the failure of historians to incorporate social history's findings into a new synthesis had seriously diminished, even evacuated, history's possible contribution to public debate."1 In the mid-1980s, in what turned out to be a controversial pair of articles, I raised a related question: how might one construct the (to my mind) needed synthesis of recent historiography on the United States.12 There was considerable negative reaction to those articles, coming from two different positions. One [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 8 For an insightful and quite worrisome examination of recent scholarly practice and its trajectory, see Winfried Fluck, "The Modernity of America and the Practice of Scholarship," in Thomas Bender, ed., Rethinking American History in a Global Age (Berkeley, Calif., 2002). 9 See, for example, Gertrude Himmelfarb, The New History and the Old (Cambridge, Mass., 1987). This volume includes essays published by Himmelfarb between 1975 and 1984. 10 Herbert G. Gutman, Work, Culture and Society in Industrializing America: Essays in American Working-Class and Social History (New York, 1976), xii-xiii. Bernard Bailyn, who did not share Gutman's political or historiographical agenda, raised similar issues a few years later in his presidential address to the American Historical Association. Bailyn, "The Challenge of Modern Historiography," AHR 87 (February 1982): 1-24. 11 Herbert G. Gutman, "The Missing Synthesis: Whatever Happened to History," The Nation, November 21, 1981. See also, in a similar spirit, Eric Foner, "History in Crisis," Commonweal (December 18, 1981): 723-26. 12 Thomas Bender, "Making History Whole Again," New York Times Book Review (October 6, 1985): 1, 42-43; Bender, "Wholes and Parts: The Need for Synthesis in American History," Journal of American History 73 (1986): 120-36. See also the earlier and less commented on essay, Bender, "New History." AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 132 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] position worried about its critique of specialization and its call for addressing a larger public. These arguments were equated with a carelessness about scholarly rigor.13 The other, and more widespread position, focused on the risks of a national narrative itself. It was evidently feared that such a narrative would, by definition, re-exclude those groups and themes that had so recently been brought under the umbrella of history and would re-inscribe a "master narrative" dominated by white, elite males.14 By the end of the 1980s, however, the question of synthesis had become less controversial. The issue became more practical, more professional in some sense: how to do it and how to do it within the parameters of inclusion that had been central to the discussion from the beginning. It was on this note that Alice Kessler-Harris, the author of the chapter on social history in The New American History (1990 edition), addressed the question. In the last section of her essay, with the section title of "The Problem of Synthesis," she acknowledged the problem and explored various possible ways to overcome "fragmentation" and move toward synthesis.15 A different issue emerged in the 1990s. Poststructuralist literary and cultural theory, sometimes broadly and even more vaguely characterized as postmodernism, was and is suspicious of any aspiration toward a comprehensive narrative. It is to this body of theory that we owe the commonplace use and misuse of the epithet "master narrative."16 These theories have been rather slow to penetrate workaday historical practice among American historians. Levels and types of awareness of them vary: from shocked indignation at the whole idea, to vague awareness and thoughtless dismissal, to intellectual fascination largely in isolation from the making of one's own histories. In his recent book, Beyond the Great Story: History as Text and Discourse (1995), Robert Berkhofer seeks to force more attention to these issues. Insistently, but not always consistently, he urges historians to recognize the dimensions of the postmodern crisis that surrounds them. He seems more interested in sounding the alarm about the quicksand before us than in guiding us [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 13 Eric H. Monkkonen, "The Dangers of Synthesis," AHR 91 (December 1986): 1146-57. 14 See the Round Table articles, Nell Irvin Painter, "Bias and Synthesis in History," Journal of American History 74 (June 1987): 109-12; Richard Wightman Fox, "Public Culture and the Problem of Synthesis," 113-16; Roy Rosenzweig, "What Is the Matter with History?" 117-22; and for my response, Thomas Bender, "Wholes and Parts: Continuing the Conversation," 123-30. For a more recent and more broadly argued critique, see Randolph Roth, "Is There a Democratic Alternative to Republi- canism? The Rhetoric and Politics of Recent Pleas for Synthesis," in Jeffrey Cox and Shelton Stromquist, eds., Contesting the Master Narrative: Essays in Social History (Iowa City, Iowa, 1998), 210-56. 15 Alice Kessler-Harris, "Social History," in Foner, New American History, 177-80. The closing chapters of Peter Novick's very influential social history of the profession worries this issue as well. Peter Novick, That Noble Dream: The "Objectivity Question" and the American Historical Profession (Cambridge, 1988), chaps. 14-16. The most recent public discussion is David Oshinsky, "The Humpty Dumpty of Scholarship: American History Has Broken in Pieces, Can It Be Put Together Again?" New York Times, August 26, 2000. 16 See Allen Megill, "Fragmentation and the Future of Historiography," AHR 96 (June 1991): 693-98. For a more general but very rich survey, see Dorothy Ross, "Grand Narrative in American Historical Writing: From Romance to Uncertainty," AHR 100 (June 1995): 651-77. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 133 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] around it or safely through. But either way, he intends to challenge the very possibility of narrative synthesis.17 While these worries, proposals, and polemics were being fashioned, the daily work of historians proceeded. Among the products of that work have been a good number of explicitly synthetic volumes. There is, of course, no clear or settled notion of what defines a work of synthesis. I have used a rather generous definition. Some of the books I am calling synthetic might alternatively be designated as monographs-archivally based but exceptionally ambitious books that tackle big questions and seek to frame a large field or to provide an interpretation for an audience well beyond specialists. Others are more obviously synthetic, relying heavily on secondary literature to establish the state of the art in a broad field for a wide audience, including, often, students and the general public. With this diversity of form, purpose, and audience in mind-as well as a concern for a reasonable distribution of fields and periods-I have, with the help of the editors of the American Historical Review, selected a few recent synthetic works for examina- tion.18 The very existence of these books mutes the question of whether we need synthetic works or whether, under the constraints of present historiographical practice, synthesis is possible. In fact, the seeming proliferation of syntheses at present-and their variousness-suggests that the field of American history is at a formative (or reformative) moment that invites synthesis: the quest for new understandings that has undermined established narratives has now, perhaps, prompted new efforts at crystallizing a very unstable body of historical writing into new syntheses. A different question, however, provides the focus of this essay. What strategies for narrative synthesis are available to historians today? How might we think about the relation between a particular structure of narrative synthesis and the author's purpose or interpretation? How do these different strategies relate to current historiography? What particular work do they do, within the profession and beyond it? And finally I want to ask some questions about the firmness of the boundaries (mostly geographical) that define what is and is not captured in synthetic narratives of U.S. history. These works do not, of course, cover the whole field of synthetic works. More and other books could have been chosen, but these eleven books (and several others mentioned along the way) at least represent different kinds of history, different [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 17 Robert F. Berkhofer, Jr., Beyond the Great Story: History as Text and Discourse (Cambridge, Mass., 1995). See the "Forum" on the book in the American Quarterly: Michael C. Coleman, "Gut Reactions of a Historian to a Missionary Tract," American Quarterly 50 (June 1998): 340-48; Saul Cornell, "Moving Beyond the Great Story: Post Modern Possibilities, Postmodern Problems," 349-57; Betsy Erkkila, "Critical History," 358-64; and Robert F. Berkhofer, Jr., "Self-Reflections on Beyond the Great Story: The Ambivalent Author as Ironic Interlocutor," 365-75. See especially the exceptionally insightful and critical review essay by Thomas L. Haskell, "Farewell to Fallibilism: Robert Berkhofer's Beyond the Great Story and the Allure of the Postmodern," History and Theory 37 (October 1998): 347-69. 18 None, incidentally though importantly, present themselves as synthetic narratives of the nation, although some to be discussed below certainly reach toward that in practical effect, particularly those authored by Eric Foner (The Story of American Freedom) and by Robert V. Hine and John Mack Faragher (TheAmerican West). In fact, I have recommended each to non-historians asking for a literate one-volume history of the United States. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 134 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] periods, and different themes. Together, the eleven total nearly 6,000 pages of outstanding historical writing. If nothing else, I can conclude that synthetic narrative invites long books. Because I cannot claim special knowledge in any of the fields being synthesized in these books, I do not propose to do the kind of analysis one would find in specialized reviews. Such criticisms that I have will be framed from the position of my interest in synthetic narrative. I say that in part to be honest about my own limitations in appraising these books but also for another, more positive reason. I want to insist that narrative synthesis is a form of knowledge, indeed, a particularly powerful form of creating, not simply summarizing, knowledge. I hope to get past or under the story enough to probe the implications of different modes of structuring a narrative synthesis. The way different narrative strategies construct that knowledge is important. While inclusion is one of the tests our generation will rightly ask of synthesis, there are other important historiographical issues that are embedded in the question of narrative synthesis.19 The more seriously we consider possible narratives of American history, the more we may be prepared to ask questions that press beyond inclusion. We may even be both bold enough and hopeful enough to worry a little about the language of inclusion, if not the principle. Is there perhaps more than a hint of dominant culture noblesse oblige in the language of inclusion? Might not a more sophisticated notion of the temporal and geographical boundaries of American history, including an awareness of the diasporic stories within American history, complicate and enrich the notion of inclusion?20 Can the historical and historiographical terrain be opened a bit more in a way that enables a deeper, denser, and more complex historiographical exploration of justice and difference at the center of American history? Might democracy be the word, the concept, the commitment that will move us in that direction? As I examine the stack of books before me, I propose to keep these issues in mind and to return to them at the end of this essay. JON BUTLER'S Becoming America: The Revolution before 1776 (2000) covers the whole mainland British colonial space and history, and it addresses a wide range of themes. In fact, themes, not time or chronology, organize his story. His brief, often one-word, chapter titles reveal a very distinctive type of synthesis, one immediately accessible to the reader, whether professional or lay: Peoples, Economy, Politics, Things Material, Things Spiritual. It is a reasonable progression, and in each case he brings together a good deal of material. Although his theme is transformation, Butler also claims (following recent historiography) a more inclusive geography, making more of the middle colonies than would have been the case a generation ago. In some ways, his manner of organizing the material topically bears a relation to [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 19 I do not propose to go into theories of narrative or even my own notions, but I will here indicate that my understanding has been greatly influenced by the work of Paul Ricoeur, Time and Narrative, Kathleen McLaughlin and David Pellauer, trans., 3 vols. (Chicago, 1984-88). 20 Such thinking is not restricted to specialists in the profession exploring the theme of diaspora. The novelist Russell Banks has recently argued that the focus for a synthesis of American history ought to be the African diaspora. See "The Star-Spangled Novel," Los Angeles Times, July 2, 2000. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 135 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Richard Hofstadter's posthumously published America at 1750: A Social Portrait (1971).21 But what might have worked for Hofstadter, who was setting the scene for a three-volume narrative history of the United States, works less well for the purposes Butler has in his book. If Hofstadter's book was intended to provide a snapshot that would serve as a starting point, Butler's title ("Becoming America") and his stated intentions announce change as his theme. He means to persuade the reader of a broad pattern of transformation that produced a distinctive and modern society in advance of 1776 and that in turn spawned the first modern revolution. Such an argument demands more complex and careful attention to process and cause than his framing of the book seems to allow. While he has surely gathered together a considerable body of material (his notes run to fifty pages), he has not produced a synthetic narrative of change over time, one that sketches a develop- mental sequence that integrates disparate elements in the interest of a causal interpretation. By bounding each unit of synthesis, Butler is stuck with a structural isolation of topics that undercuts narrative explanation. Given that Butler's theme is transformation, this narrative structure is crippling. For reasons related to structure and style of argument, Butler's claims for American modernity are quite vulnerable. While there are doubtless some specific ways in which the British North American colonies became "modern" before independence, they were not uniformly modern-over space or in all aspects of life. Many historians would readily grant numerous anticipations of modernity by the middle of the eighteenth century, but few would insist, with Butler, that so much modernity had been achieved so soon, implying that only a few pre-modern anomalies remained on the eve of revolution.22 Most give a significant role to the revolution.23 But the most serious problem is not with the phenomena he notices or does not notice, even if there is some real unevenness on this point. Rather, it is Butler's teleology of the modern, combined with his exceedingly loose, elusive, and, as is so often said today, undertheorized definition of modernity. Add to this an unneces- sary but apparently irresistible tendency to claim American uniqueness and "firsts" for nearly everything he identifies as modern in America. He names a number of phenomena that he considers evidences of the modern-polyglot, slaves, cities, market economy, refined crafts and trades, religious pluralism, and "sophisticated politics." Without further historical specification and theoretical precision, one can indulge in reductio ad absurdum. With the exception of religious pluralism, all of these qualities probably described Athens in the age of Aristotle at least as well as the British colonies. In fact, I suspect that Peter Linebaugh and Marcus Rediker, relying on their recent book The Many-Headed Hydra: Sailors, Slaves, Commoners, and the Hidden History of the Revolutionary Atlantic (2000), would argue that the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 21 Richard Hofstadter, America at 1750: A Social Portrait (New York, 1971). 22 Jon Butler, Becoming America: The Revolution before 1776 (Cambridge, Mass., 2000), 1. 23 See, for example, Gordon S. Wood, The Radicalism of the American Revolution (New York, 1992). Long before, Bernard Bailyn suggested certain developments that Butler would consider modern had developed in the eighteenth century, but he emphasized the unevenness and even paradoxical character of this proto-modernity. See "Political Experience and Enlightenment Ideas in Eighteenth-Century America," AHR 67 (January 1962): 339-51; and Bailyn, The Origins of American Politics (New York, 1968). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 136 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Atlantic world provides a better example of modernity on those terms than does the colonial mainland.24 He makes many claims for American distinctiveness. In the end, however, it is diversity, which he tends to equate with multiculturalism, that for Butler makes Americans modern. But if we look around, we cannot but wonder about his claims for a uniquely polyglot society. This assertion may be quite vulnerable from any sight line approaching a global perspective. Can he fairly claim that New York City harbored a level of diversity "never before gathered together"?25 Might not this be as plausibly said of Constantinople during the period covered by Butler's book? And did not the Ottoman Empire-of which Constantinople was the capital-far exceed the religious and ethnic diversity of the British colonies? My point here is partly one of fact, of care in making comparative statements without comparison. More important, however, are the criteria of the modern. Few, if any, major political bodies in the past half millennium more successfully accommodated diversity than the Ottomans, yet that achievement has never brought them recognition for a precocious modernity. One needs greater defini- tional and descriptive specificity to make the argument he claims. Because of the breadth and generality of synthetic narratives, it is especially important to be clear about key concepts. Similarly, he tends to claim the realization of "Americanness"-here equated with some vague notion of modernity-for events that, however interesting in themselves, hardly sustain his assertion that they designated "the American future."26 For example, writing of the French Huguenots, a group he knows well, he notes their assimilation, and he calls this "American."27 Well, of course it is, but so are the endogenous marriages that continue for various groups well into the twentieth century-sometimes because of racial difference and even legislation (as in the case of African Americans) or out of choice, as in the case of Scandinavians in the upper Midwest. Or to take a more ominous subject, it seems a bit fatalistic to say that colonial encroachment on Indian land "predicted" nineteenth-century relations with the Indians.28 Oddly, such a claim, while taking the moral high ground, nonetheless erases the postcolonial history of the United States by denying contingency and thus diminishing both the capacity and moral responsibility of all later actors or potential actors. The twin and linked teleologies of "modern" and "American" produce a distorting and de-historicizing synthesis. If there is a problem with the sort of synthesis Butler has written, what precisely is it? He makes historical claims about patterns and meanings of development on the basis of a narrative structure that effectively isolates and de-historicizes his themes. By not constructing a developmental narrative that integrates the various themes now separated in distinct chapters, the process and complexity of develop- ment is obscured. While his chapters are full of relevant and interesting details of [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 24 Peter Linebaugh and Marcus Rediker, The Many-Headed Hydra: Sailors, Slaves, Commoners, and the Hidden History of the Revolutionary Atlantic (Boston, 2000). 25 Butler, Becoming America, 9. 26 Butler, Becoming America, 36. 27 Butler, Becoming America, 22. One of Butler's previous books is The Huguenots in America: A Refugee People in a New World Society (Cambridge, Mass., 1983). 28 Butler, Becoming America, 68. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 137 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] everyday life, they never get integrated in any individual, institution, or place. In the absence of a narrative of change to explain and interpret, he resorts for a theme to repeated assertions of "modernity." The issue is not so much the claim for an eighteenth-century American modernity-although I am myself drawn to much more complex, nuanced, and contradictory discussions of that theme-as it is the incapacity of the particular model of synthesis he deploys to advance that theme or argument. Philip D. Morgan's Slave Counterpoint: Black Culture in the Eighteenth-Century Chesapeake and Lowcountry (1998) is at once similar to Butler's and quite different. Both focus tightly in each chapter on a particular topic or theme; there is little play among the different themes in both cases. While Butler's themes propose a reorganization of material, thus giving an impression of freshness, Morgan's quite important questions are phrased in well-established ways. While Butler's structure works against his theme of transformation, Morgan's similar structure better fits his goals for the book, partly because transformation plays a smaller role in his analysis than one might expect. Slave Counterpoint addresses nearly all the issues raised by a half century of vigorous scholarship on the beginnings of slavery, the practices of racial slavery as a labor and social system, and the nature of African-American culture in early America. It is a book of enviable learning: with a seeming total command of the historiography and an impressive knowledge of a substantial archival base, Morgan proceeds to pose (or re-pose) difficult historiographical issues. Again and again, he offers compelling answers. Want to know what scholarship has disclosed about slavery and African-American culture in the eighteenth-century Chesapeake and Lowcountry? Look to Morgan's synthesis of a generation of scholarship. To have done that is to have done a great deal, and he has done it magnificently. Yet one gets the sense of a summary volume, a volume driven by the past, by past questions. Synthesis can either cap a phase of scholarship or initiate another. I think Morgan's book falls into the former category, while Ira Berlin's new book, Many Thousands Gone: The First Two Centuries of Slavery in North America (1998), which also relies on a generation of scholarship and addresses many of the same issues, has the potential to become a new starting point. Berlin has captured the shift to an Atlantic perspective that has increasingly characterized scholarship by early modern Europeanists, Africanists, Latin Americanists, and historians of British North America. In this sense, his work, at least the early parts that sketch out and populate the Atlantic littoral, points forward.29 In a dramatic opening section, Berlin, relying more on secondary literatures than does Morgan, locates his story in very broad understandings of time (periodization) and space (the Atlantic world), the dimensions of which are shadowy, almost invisible, in Morgan's account. He locates Africans in an Atlantic history connecting four continents and in a rich and growing historiography reaching out from Europe, Africa, Latin America, and North America.30 One [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 29 Ira Berlin, Many Thousands Gone: The First Two Centuries of Slavery in North America (Cambridge, Mass., 1998). 30 Berlin's powerful evocation of the Atlantic builds on many predecessors. At minimum, mention should be made of Philip D. Curtin's The Atlantic Slave Trade: A Census (Madison, Wis., 1969); and The AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 138 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] wishes Berlin had sustained this perspective in the later sections. But even if he narrows the story to the territory that later became the United States and loses the multiple histories implied by his portrait of the Atlantic world, the beginnings of stories, whether novels or histories, are heavy with intention and implication that can, I hope, be built upon.31 In fact, the four Atlantic continents remain an always changing aspect of American and African histories. Attending to, or at least recognizing, that larger and continuing extended terrain of American history would enrich the story of the making of African Americans and America, a historiography that is at present too much captured by an implicit and too simple assimilation or "Americanization" model. Nonetheless, Berlin has provided a powerful image of the creation of the Atlantic world and of the origin of modern slavery within it. Morgan has a quite different strategy. His domain is not the Atlantic but the South, or two regions of the South, which he is anxious to reveal as differentiated. Thus his is a comparative history, comparing two regions within the South. Suggesting a certain scientific aspiration, he refers to his delimited space as a kind of laboratory, a site for an "indirect experiment."32 This approach offers him much. He is able to focus tightly on his questions and generally achieves sharply phrased answers. Yet, like any good scientific laboratory, his field of inquiry is almost hermetically sealed. A two-hundred-page part of the book titled "The Black World" begins with a fifteen-page section on "Africans." Yet it is in only one paragraph at the beginning and a few other scattered references that one reads anything about Africa. His story rarely strays east (or south or north or west) of the Maryland/ Virginia and South Carolina boundaries. His comparative method has impressive rigor. Yet one senses that not only does his approach trap him within a particular place, he is also caught within a very confining net woven from the existing historiography. As Walter Johnson pointed out in a review of the book in this journal, his questions are smaller than the stories he has unearthed.33 Much like another important book on African-American history, Herbert G. Gutman's The Black Family in Slavery and Freedom (1976), this book, for all its synthetic aspirations, cannot capture some of its best material within the tightly bounded historiographical questions and issues that frame it.34 As in the case of Berlin's book, Morgan's is quite explicit about time and space. There is a well-thought-out chronology of change, and one of his major arguments is that the South, and thus the black as well as white experience, was not uniform over space. He shows real and important distinctions between the experience of [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Rise and Fall of the Plantation Complex (New York, 1990; 2d edn., 1998); and John K. Thornton's Africa and Africans in the Making of the Atlantic World, 1400-1680 (New York, 1992; 2d edn., 1400-1800, 1998). 31 On the importance of beginnings, see Edward W. Said, Beginnings: Intention and Method (Baltimore, Md., 1975). 32 Philip D. Morgan, Slave Counterpoint: Black Culture in the Eighteenth-Century Chesapeake and Lowcountry (Chapel Hill, N.C., 1998), xvii. 33 Walter Johnson, review of Morgan, Slave Counterpoint, AHR 105 (October 2000): 1295-97, esp. 1297. 34 See Herbert G. Gutman, The Black Family in Slavery and Freedom, 1750-1925 (New York, 1976), which loses more than it gains by focusing so tightly on refuting the assumptions of the Moynihan Report. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 139 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] slavery in the Chesapeake and in the Lowcountry. Yet by treating both the temporal and spatial aspects of the story as sites (and very limited ones) rather than as processes of historical making, he weakens the capacity of his local analyses to explain change over time and, to a lesser extent, space. His major explanatory claims appear in the introduction. They are not only brief but also separate from the rich stories he tells and the analyses he makes of historiographical questions.35 The expansiveness of Many Thousands Gone, by contrast, evokes a strong sense of change, of process. It achieves a narrative synthesis of the movement of Africans onto the Atlantic and into the Western hemisphere. The difference between this approach and the tightly controlled analysis crafted by Morgan is striking. Like Morgan's, Michael Schudson's book, The Good Citizen: A History of American Civic Life (1998), is organized around fairly established questions- especially one big question. Has American civic life deteriorated over the course of the past three centuries? Naturally, the question is of a different order than those driving Morgan's analysis. It has not been generated by disciplinary scholarship. It arose out of American public life. Schudson thus draws on history and other disciplines to address directly a public question, one endlessly repeated today and, as he shows, in the past. Schudson himself, we should note, is not a historian. He was trained as a sociologist, and he teaches in a Department of Communication. While he reveals an impressive command of the relevant historiography, historians are not his primary reference group or audience.36 Although I am sure specialists will find some of his formulations to be of considerable historiographical significance and likely to encourage new lines of research, his intention, again, is different: his audience is a general one, and he seeks to bring historical knowledge to bear on a civic issue. What he is doing points toward the most important work that one kind of successful narrative synthesis can do, for the profession and for the public. By openly declaring his address to a public issue and for a public audience, Schudson participates in a very important tradition of historical writing. Some of the very best professional historians of the United States in this century have done precisely that: Frederick Jackson Turner, W. E. B. Du Bois, Charles Beard, and Richard Hofstadter all focused on issues, worries, or preoccupations of fairly general interest to write synthetic works that importantly rephrased fundamental themes in American history. This mutual enrichment of public and professional discourse is perhaps the ideal cultural work of narrative synthesis. Let us hope that historians can do this more often and more effectively. Yet as I make this point, I realize that all of the historians just named, including Schudson himself, were either trained as social scientists or did not recognize a significant boundary between history and the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 35Morgan, Slave Counterpoint, xv-xxiv. I should note that my concerns about boundary setting in Morgan's book do not apply nearly so much to Philip D. Morgan, "The Black Experience in the British Empire, 1680-1810," in The Oxford History of the British Empire, Vol. 2: The Eighteenth Century, P. J. Marshall, ed. (Oxford, 1998), 465-86. 36 This command is at once impressive and sometimes puzzling. In discussing the Founding and the Constitution, he does not mention Gordon Wood's The Creation of the American Republic, 1776-1787 (Chapel Hill, N.C., 1969). Nor, in writing about the first decades of the nineteenth century, does he mention either of two key books by Robert H. Wiebe, The Opening of American Society: From the Adoption of the Constitution to the Eve of Disunion (New York, 1984); and Self-Rule: A Cultural History of American Democracy (Chicago, 1995). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 140 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] (other?) once more expansive social sciences. Is this a mere coincidence, or is it an issue to be addressed by the profession? While I would not place Schudson's book in the same class as the scholarship produced by the short list of great historians, he has written a fine book. It is a book about change over time, and he establishes three eras of citizenship and participa- tion, each clearly defined. He does not devote much attention to how each configuration changes into the next, but he effectively characterizes their differ- ences, even in some very brief summaries, as in the following paragraph from early in the book: Another way to characterize the past three hundred years of political change is to say that the type of authority by which society is governed shifted from personal authority (gentlemen) to interpersonal authority (parties, coalitions, and majorities), to impersonal authority (science, expertise, legal rights, and information) ... The geographical center of politics has shifted from the countryside to the cities to the suburbs and perhaps, today, to "technoburbs," "postsuburbs," or "edge cities," or whatever we name our newer habitations. Correspondingly, the kind of knowledge a good citizen requires has changed: in an age of gentlemen, the citizen's relatively rare entrances into public discussion or controversy could be guided by his knowledge of social position; in the era of rule by majorities, the citizen's voting could be led by the enthusiasm and rhetoric of parties and their most active partisans; in the era of expertise and bureaucracies, the citizens had increasingly to learn to trust their own canvass of newspapers, interest groups, parties, and other sources of knowledge, only occasionally supported by the immediacy of human contact; and in the emerging age of rights, citizens learn to catalog what entitlements they may have and what forms of victimization they may knowingly or unknowingly have experienced.37 This paragraph reveals the argument and the narrative strategy that Schudson uses to undercut the widespread notion of civic decline: rather than a story of decline, it is one of restructuring, one that recalibrates citizenship and civic practice in relation to changing values and social experiences. What some, including me, see as the erosion of our public life and the thinning of American political culture, he presents as a complex rearticulation of expectations and institutions. Whether one fully agrees with Schudson or not, the book and the point of view it ingeniously argues constitutes an important contribution of contemporary civic life. And a narrative strategy of restructuring (as opposed to the usual rise or fall scenarios) deserves a place in the historian's menu of narrative types. "Presentist" purposes may, however, carry the danger of anachronistic readings. Schudson is vulnerable on this score, especially in his consideration of the colonial period. He too easily asks how democratic any phase of political life was. A commitment to explore the fate of democracy in our past-something I endorse- surely includes recognizing when democracy is not an available concept. He might better have asked how the legitimation and exercise of power worked. Indeed, such a deeper historicism would complement his anti-anti-Whig approach. Similarly, while a then-and-now binary invites sometimes interesting questions and offers some illumination of past and present, it also invites problems. Again, one sees this risk in Schudson's work. False categories of judgment are explicitly or implicitly brought to bear. Speaking of the first generation to live under the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 37Michael Schudson, The Good Citizen: A History of American Civic Life (New York, 1998), 8. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 141 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Constitution, he observes that little political knowledge was expected of voters, "at least little of the sort of knowledge that today's civic moralists urge upon people." Voters then were expected to have "local knowledge-not of laws or principles, but of men."38 The binary obscures the role of principles in the past and knowledge of men in the present. Most important of all, it diverts our attention from the principles that it was thought would aid voters in judging character.39 Sometimes, by focusing so much on the party system that we worry about today, he overlooks those important issues that eluded the parties or that parties avoided. Substantive issues-the reason citizenship and civic life are important-are marginalized in his account of the different concepts and patterns of public life. The result, whether intended or not, is a form of consensus history.40 "Progress or decline is not the real question," Schudson concludes.41 He converts that question into one of restructuring that points to his core argument: there must be a fit between forms of citizenship and forms of everyday life, between values and institutions, between aspirations and commitments. It is that historically informed understanding that allows him in his conclusion to speculate in quite promising ways about an evolving pattern of citizenship that may yet serve our collective hopes and needs. Still, his conclusion leaves me uneasy. Like the journalistic coverage of politics today, the substance of political conflict is subordinated to discussion of the "health" of the system, of the institutions and practices. By contrast, the tensions, conflicts, and substantive issues that made politics so important in the development of the United States and in the lives of individuals are at the center of Eric Foner's The Story of American Freedom (1998). Foner's book has an uncanny resemblance to one that at first glance might seem utterly unrelated: Richard Hofstadter's The American Political Tradition and the Men Who Made It.42 Of course, Foner inverts the point Hofstadter sought to make. If Hofstadter famously played down conflict and (less remarked upon) paid little attention to the social making of political ideologies, Foner emphasizes conflict and the changing historical construction and reconstruction of the idea and ideology of freedom. Foner's work is much more explicitly sensitive to social history, even if it parallels Hofstadter's in its interest in ideology and the limits and possibilities of American political culture. While Hofstadter was alternately comic and ironic, bitterly so at times, in The American Political Tradition, Foner's Story of American Freedom is strikingly fair and straightforward. Yet the underlying hope is similar. As James Oakes has perceptively noted, Foner's narrative is undergirded by an unstated but firm liberal ideal of freedom- one that at once shares in an Enlightenment universalism and [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 38 Schudson, Good Citizen, 81. 39 See Joyce Appleby, Inheriting the Revolution: The First Generation of Americans (Cambridge, Mass., 2000). 40 See, for example, his summary judgment of the party system at Schudson, Good Citizen, 132. Put differently, it bears at least a formal relationship to the theories of pluralism popular in political science during the 1950s. 41 Schudson, Good Citizen, 313. 42 Richard Hofstadter, TheAmerican Political Tradition and the Men Who Made It (New York, 1948). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 142 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] accommodates current concerns for inclusion and regard for difference.43 I would even argue that Hofstadter's own liberal position was closer to Foner's than one might at first suspect. Both appraised American political culture and its prospects from the position of a richer, more textured liberalism than we usually recognize in current debates.44 In thinking about the core issue in Foner's narrative, therefore, it seems fair to consider it to be the quest for a democratic liberalism, insisting on the relevance and indispensability of the modifier inserted before liberalism. One might thus characterize Foner's as a democratic synthesis, which, as I suggested above, offers a stronger and more egalitarian standard of judgment than commonplace invoca- tions of inclusion. It offers as well the implication of voice and empowerment. To Foner, as he indicates in his introduction, "abstract definitions" of freedom are not the focus. His concern is "with the debates and struggles through which freedom acquires concrete meanings, and how understandings of freedom are shaped by, and in turn help to shape, social movements and political and economic events."45 The result is a narrative that is at once focused yet always open to an examination of larger issues, structures, and events that intersect with and often drive his story. It is a dynamic story, filled with actors, with agents making freedom and using freedom. He selects key events or controversies of different eras, events that are widely contested (slavery, labor and property, the role of the state, social movements). Of course, coverage is selective; the gain is the richness deriving from a series of concentrated focal points. In each case, he examines the conflict, the parties contending, and the stakes. He does not hesitate to declare justices and injustices, to name winners and losers, and he does so from a consistently democratic perspective. Foner thus achieves inclusion without the dilution conse- quent with the faux openness characteristic of talk radio and without the postmod- ern hesitations that undermine moral judgment.46 The American West: A New Interpretive History (2000) by Robert V. Hine and John Mack Faragher spans the whole of American history, from "the European invasion" until the present.47 The book is written in the spirit of Frederick Jackson Turner. Instead of lamenting the ambiguity of Turner's conception of the frontier, which after Turner got reduced by rigorous historians to a place, the West, Hine and Faragher embrace its fullness. For them, the frontier is both a place and a nrocess. and thev recognize that it is not onlv imnossible but limiting to senarate [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 43 James Oakes, "Radical Liberals, Liberal Radicals: The Dissenting Tradition in American Political Culture," Reviews in American History 27 (1999): 503-11. 44 For just such a contemporary theorization of liberalism, see Ira Katznelson, Liberalism's Crooked Circle: Letters to Adam Michnik (Princeton, N.J., 1996). Interestingly, this work also comes from a Columbia scholar, however much it is openly acknowledged to have derived largely from his experience at the New School for Social Research. Perhaps the relevant context for this liberalism is the city of New York, with its cosmopolitan character and free-for-all quality of political contestation. For a brief statement of Hofstadter's relation to liberalism, see Thomas Bender, "Richard Hofstadter," in American National Biography, John A. Garraty and Mark C. Carnes, gen. eds. (New York, 1999), 11: 1-4. 45 Eric Foner, The Story of American Freedom (New York, 1998), xvii. 46 In Eric Foner, Reconstruction: America's Unfinished Revolution, 1863-1877 (New York, 1988), where chronological compression allows for a richer analysis, one can see more fully the method and its achievements. 47 Robert V. Hine and John Mack Faragher, The American West: A New Interpretive History (New Haven, Conn., 2000), 9. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 143 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] and sharply distinguish between the two aspects of the concept. That openness allows them to tell the history of the United States as a story of successive frontiers, including a fascinating rethinking of American regionalism as urban-centered at the end of the twentieth century.48 In fact, the chapter on the postwar era is a tour de force-imaginative, original, and quite compelling. In Turnerian fashion, they argue that "westering defined America's unique heritage."49 To a very impressive degree, they give substance to this claim, but recent historiography makes that claim, even for western history, problematic. As Hine and Faragher show, in the nineteenth century as well as today, the West (and the United States) was formed by migrations from west to east and south to north, and even in a limited way north to south, as well as east to west. The notion of westering is so strong in American and European history and culture, it is difficult to construct an alternative narrative structure, though no less important for the difficulty.50 This worry does not, however, undercut another summary point they make: the "frontier is our common past."51 The book is grounded in social history. Of all the books under consideration here, The American West is probably the most sensitive to the categories of experience and groups previously excluded from mainstream narratives of Ameri- can history. Their work goes well beyond mere representation of such groups and categories; previously invisible groups, whether Native Americans, migrating women, African-American settlers, working people, or the people of the border- lands, are actors who contributed to the shaping of history. But there are limits to this achievement. While there are multiple positions and voices represented in their narrative, only rarely does their narrative bring the reader inside group life. There is not much inquiry into the interior experience and subjective meanings shared by the various groups identified and recognized.52 While the story could have been situated in a wider context, one that revealed the global reach of the empires or, later, the importance of global markets, in its particular geographical focus the book consistently avoids privileging the English line of settlement. Other settler efforts are considered and sometimes compared. As is often the case with synthetic histories, however, there is a tendency to do the work of inclusion at a particular moment, and then lose the group at issue. For example, there is a good discussion of the origins of racial slavery, but the later [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 48 On the potential of the urban region model for historical analysis, see Jane Jacobs, Cities and the Wealth of Nations: Principles of Economic Life (New York, 1984). For an extremely stimulating extension of Turner's frontier to transnational dimensions, see Paul Sabin, "Home and Abroad: The Two 'Wests' of Twentieth-Century United States History," Pacific Historical Review 66, no. 3 (1997): 305-36. 49 Hine and Faragher, Amertican West, 531. 50 Loren Baritz, "The Idea of the West," AHR 66 (April 1961): 618-40. For three forays into alternative narrative strategies on this point, see Thomas Bender, "The Geography of Historical Memory and the Making of Public Culture," in Anna Maria Martellone, ed., Towards a New American Nation? Redefinitions and Reconstruction (Staffordshire, 1995), 174-87; Ian Tyrrell, "Beyond the View from Euro-America: Environment, Settler Societies, and Internationalization of American History," in Bender, Rethinking American History in a Global Age; Dirk Hoerder, "From the Euro- and Afro- Atlantic to the Pacific Migration System in North American History," in Bender. 51 Hine and Faragher, American West, 560. 52 In fact, they concentrate this kind of analysis in one chapter, a fascinating one in "A Search for Community," but it is limited in its cases, and it segregates such analysis from the greater part of the narrative. Hine and Faragher, American West, chap. 12. AMERICAN HISTORIcAL REvIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 144 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] extension of the plantation system and internal slave market that was a part of the frontier movement is not adequately recognized. At times, the transnational themes they develop are extremely illuminating. They refer to what would later be characterized by theorists of the global cities as a "dual economy" in describing the role of foreign migrants, especially Chinese, in the nineteenth-century California agricultural economy.53 Likewise the interplay of national and international in their discussion of the Zimmerman telegram inviting Mexico to ally with Germany in World War I and in their discussion of San Francisco's "commercial hinterland."54 But, as in the case of Butler's book, there is a bit of parochialism in making claims of distinction. Perhaps such assertions can be demonstrated, but more rigorous definitions and empirical research than we have here are required to establish, for example, that the United States is today the world's most multicultural society.55 How would it compare with Indonesia, the world's fourth most populous nation, whose citizens speak more than 100 languages and live on almost numberless islands? The social-history approach, whatever its success in representing difference, has in this instance under-represented national political institutions and policies. The development of the West, as Richard White and other historians of the West have pointed out, was profoundly indebted to what western Republicans now call "big government," for water, transportation, Indian removal, and, more recently, direct investment, as in defense contracts and installations and aerospace industries.56 The political economy and the role of markets, as has already been suggested, do not get the attention they deserve. We often overlook how much industry was in the West, and how much western industries-from milling and meatpacking to mining-were integral to the industrial system of the United States. And we forget how much the astonishing productivity of western agriculture enabled the formation of a large urban industrial labor supply. More of these dimensions of western history might have been included if only in the interest in enabling the story better to tell the national experience. If Hine and Faragher encompass both the full geographical and temporal dimensions of western history, Linda Gordon's microhistory builds out from a very delimited western space, the Sonoran highlands of Arizona, to develop a highly innovative narrative synthesis that locates itself at the various and causally interrelated scales of town, region, nation, and the transnational. Her work reminds us that there is a difference between a mere local study and a microhistory. The local histories of villages, towns, and cities, so common in the 1970s, tended to use global concepts but within artificially bounded fields of inquiry. One of the most famous of them all, Kenneth Lockridge's study of Dedham, Massachusetts, offered an isolated inwardness as a principal finding, although it was a finding that derived [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 53Hine and Faragher, American West, 358-60. 54 Hine and Faragher, American West, 395-97, 414. This story could be greatly expanded. San Francisco was closer to Asia than to Europe, a simple geographical point that usually eludes us. For an outstanding study of this relationship, see Ian Tyrrell, True Gardens of the Gods: Californian-Australian Environmental Reform, 1860-1930 (Berkeley, Calif., 1999). 55 Hine and Faragher, American West, 514. 56 Richard White, "It's Your Misfortune and None of My Own": A History of the American West (Norman, Okla., 1991). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 145 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] mainly from a methodology not only local but firmly bounded.57 By contrast, Gordon's The Great Arizona Orphan Abduction exemplifies a microhistory that enables the historian to synthesize the threads of local life, many of which are translocal in origin and implication.58 Unlike Hine and Faragher, she gets inside the subjective experience of local life, even the experience of very ordinary people, without getting trapped inside that world and without implying that the larger world of the region, the nation, and even transnational economic and religious institutions were beyond the ken of her study of a seemingly local conflict. Mostly, her account is the story of the arrival and fate of Catholic orphans from New York who were to be placed in Catholic homes. The homes were Mexican as well as Catholic, and that was the problem and the focus of conflict. The conflict played out along class, ethnic, religious, and gender lines, and it eventually reached the Supreme Court. It is a compelling and very human narrative, but one that also addresses a whole range of analytical and interpretive issues of broader interest to historians. Bringing the issues of gender, class, and race into relation with each other allows for an appraisal of their relative importance in this particular historical explanation. I think that her story reveals class to be more important than her conclusion argues, but the real point to be made is that only a narrative synthesis that brings diverse threads together will enable the historian and the reader to make this kind of judgment. These complex ends are achieved in part by her adoption of an imaginative literary strategy. Gordon's book is constructed of two types of chapters. One is quite often a broad frame for local events. In these chapters, her perspective as narrator is exterior to the action. The issues addressed are frequently structural and, as often as not, extend beyond the community. Here, one gets an analytical explanation of the relation of local experience to larger national and international cultural, political, and economic developments. Between these chapters, she has crafted others that get inside the culture of the community, providing wonderfully rich, thick descriptions of daily life and the development of the conflict. With oral histories as well as fragmentary documentary evidence, she brings the reader very close to the experience and voices of the community. The play between these accounts and the more conventional chapters produces an unusual but powerful synthesis. Whether a microhistory qualifies as a synthesis, even by my generous definition, may be debated. But the singular relevance of this book for the discussion of synthesis concerns not scale but its literary ambition, the literary experiment that gives structure to the book. Those who would write other syntheses-at various scales-will, I hope, be encouraged, even inspired, to experiment with novel narrative strategies in the interest of more powerful representations of the past. Quintard Taylor presents a third version of western history, In Search of the Racial Frontier: African Americans in the American West, 1528-1990 (1998). He offers a broad synthetic account that characterizes the experiences of African Americans over a very long period of time. While the book does not ignore the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 57Kenneth A. Lockridge, A New England Town: The First Hundred Years; Dedham, Massachusetts, 1636-1736 (New York, 1970). 58 Linda Gordon, The Great Arizona Orphan Abduction (Cambridge, Mass., 1999). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRuARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 146 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] relations among different groups in the West, particularly and inevitably between blacks and whites, but also between blacks and Native American, the contribution of the book is otherwise.59 He is mapping and making visible as a whole a history that has been largely unknown or studied in very specific instances and places. Drawing on a substantial body of scholarship, most of it published in the past quarter century, he aims to "reconstruct the history of African American women and men" in the West over five centuries, although mostly his focus is the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. Taylor's central themes are the quest for community by blacks and the relative degrees of freedom and opportunity they find in different times and places. The conjuncture of the map of African-American presence and the conventional history of the West that his story brings out compels rethinking of both African-American and western history. He makes the point, for example, that the issue of Texas independence in 1836 was not simply, as myth, even the more recent multicultural version, would have it: Anglos and Tejanos in Texas confronting a despotic government in Mexico. It was also an Anglo effort to preserve slavery.60 More broadly, the map literally reveals that African Americans in the West were overwhelmingly city and town dwellers, and it is that fact that unifies their experience. The kind of synthetic narrative that he has constructed provides an invaluable service at a particular moment, crystallizing a generation of scholarship, making generalization possible. His work not only informs the public of the dimensions of previously unrecognized histories, it also provides a base for the next generation of scholarship. In a similar way, another recent synthesis, one that focuses on a more narrowly defined but also more developed area of scholarship, reveals the harvest of recent scholarship on work and workers. American Work: Four Centuries of Black and Vhite Labor (1998) by Jacqueline Jones at once brings this rich scholarship to a wider audience and proffers a fresh way of framing the field.61 If The American West, In Search of the Racial Frontier, and American Work cover very long chronological spans, books by David M. Kennedy and Fred Anderson address short periods. Their focus is also quite different, since both concentrate on political and military history. Kennedy's Freedom from Fear: The American People in Depression and War, 1929-1945 (1999) addresses what might well be called "high politics," while Anderson's The Crucible of War: The Seven Years' War and the Fate of Empire in British North America, 1754-1766 (2000) brings social history and high politics into fruitful play, finding in that interaction the terms of his central argument about the nature of power in the British Empire. At the outset, both books locate their stories in a broad international context. Kennedy's book begins at the close of World War I, and the first character introduced is Lance Corporal Adolf Hitler, who was in a military hospital recovering from a poison gas attack when he heard the news of Germany's surrender. The international context thus suggested is obviously central to the half [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 59He explicitly recognizes the issue of intergroup relations, but he equally explicitly indicates that such is not his aim here. See Quintard Taylor, In Search of the Racial Frontier: African Americans in the American West, 1528-1990 (New York, 1998), 18-19. 60 Taylor, In Search of the Racial Frontier, 39. 61 Jacqueline Jones, American Work: Four Centuries of Black and White Labor (New York, 1998). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 147 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] of the book devoted to World War II, but it is not nearly so much developed as it might be. The geography of Washington, D.C., even that of the White House, and the biographies of three men-Franklin D. Roosevelt, Winston Churchill, and Hitler-are more important to Kennedy's story than the world beyond the borders of the United States or, for that matter, than the American people of his subtitle. One of Kennedy's aims is evidently to urge upon Americans a greater attention to and sense of responsibility in the larger world, yet with the exception of the excellent discussion of the differing explanations of the economic crisis offered by Herbert Hoover and Roosevelt, there is surprisingly little incorporation of inter- national elements into the dynamic of the story. For all the importance of the larger world, for Kennedy, as for many Americans, whether professional historians or not, the international is a sort of "other," something "over there," if I may reverse the title of one of Kennedy's earlier books.62 Kennedy- also pays little attention to social history, not even to social histories that have sought to better explain the politics of the interwar years.63 Nor does the book address intellectual history, the history of science and technology (except briefly in connection with war production), the states, education, urban history, and much more. In fact, the book would have been more accurately described by the title of William E. Leuchtenburg's classic, F.D.R. and the New Deal, 1932-1940, which is here superseded and extended into the war years.64 So titled, adding the war to the New Deal, one could have no objection to this extraordinarily well-written, deeply researched, and compellingly argued book. But is it a history of "the American people"? Freedom from Fear is a masterful narrative on the terms it has assumed for itself. Yet having said that, historiographical questions remain. Kennedy apparently assumes that three voices are the important ones; not many other voices are heard, even though each of a small clutch of additional figures is presented very effectively as a full human being: Lorena Hickok, Eleanor Roosevelt, Harry Hopkins, Raymond Moley, Herbert Hoover, John L. Lewis, and A. Philip Randolph, among a few others. History for Kennedy, unlike for the other authors of these syntheses, is made by select leaders, not by ordinary people. What is remarkable, therefore, is the illusion of synthesis that is achieved. The book was published in a series that promises narrative syntheses of the defining periods of American national history. Most so far published accept traditional definitions of periods, and they are framed as political history, but none is so severely restricted as this one, which won the Pulitzer Prize in part because it was recognized as a work of grand synthesis. Dramatic changes in the historiography of the American field make it seem anachronistic. Yet its success makes the point that political history in the grand [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 62 David M. Kennedy, Over Here: The First World War and American Society (New York, 1980). The point Kennedy makes about Americans could be turned against his own book, which assumes the same divide he finds among Americans generally. He complains in the text that Americans held tight to "the dangerous illusion that they could choose whether and when [I would add how] to participate in the world." David M. Kennedy, Freedom from Fear: The American People in Depression and War, 1929-1945 (New York, 1999), 386. 63 The only exception I spotted in the footnotes is Lizabeth Cohen, Making a New Deal: Industrial Workers in Chicago, 1919-1939 (New York, 1990). 64 William E. Leuchtenburg, F.D.R. and the New Deal: 1932-1940 (New York, 1963). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 148 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] style, focusing on a few elite figures, can still claim, at least for the general public, to be a narrative history of a people. Fred Anderson's Crucible of War again engages us with the question of elites and ordinary people, and it provides -a promising approach. While Kennedy seems quite confident of the importance of a few leaders, Anderson seems to be ambivalent, and that ambivalence enriches his history. Although I think the principal contribution of Crucible of War to our understanding of the British Empire is grounded in the social history of the political and military experience of ordinary Americans, the dramatic focus, as with Francis Parkman's great nineteenth-century narrative, is on two great leaders of the French and Indian War, the marquis de Montcalm and James Wolfe.65 Yet, as Alan Taylor has insightfully insisted, Anderson has rewritten the story of their confrontation in a way that diminishes these actors, especially Wolfe.66 To be sure, Anderson's book goes beyond Parkman in its respect for Native Americans, their agency, and their role in the empire (and the role of the empire and war for them). He also modifies Parkman on a point that is central to the book's contribution to imperial history: unlike Parkman, Anderson not only notices but makes much of the division between English colonials and English metropolitans. These differences in expectation and experience make the war in his view a "theatre of intercultural interaction."67 Like Butler, Anderson seeks to diminish the role of 1776 in understanding the development of what became the United States. Historians, he argues, will better understand the creation of the United States by closely examining the Seven Years' War and, more generally, by challenging the usual tendency to "take as our point of reference the thirteen rebelling colonies, not the empire as a whole."68 Yet, even as he argues the importance of getting behind the Revolution of 1776 so that one can discover the eighteenth century as it was experienced, the revolution remains a touchstone for him. More than anything else, he wants the reader to recognize that the shots fired in the Seven Years' War were the ones with implications around the world. But he keeps de-historicizing his story to use it to diminish the shot of lesser implication (in his view) heard 'round the world in 1775. When one begins the book, there is a sense of excitement. Here is a history of the United States ready to take the globe as its context. Before the narrative even begins, the reader is presented with a portfolio of maps. Only two of eight describe the British colonies; no more than four of them consider North America at all. The portfolio begins with a world map, revealing the global distribution of the battles that marked the Seven Years' War. There are also maps of the Indian subcontinent, Central Europe, and the Caribbean. The introduction promises a book that will make the world, or at least the full extent of the British Empire, its context and subject. We are told that "if viewed from Montreal or Vincennes, St. Augustine, Havana, Paris or Madrid-or, for that matter Calcutta or Berlin-the Seven Years' War was far more significant than the War of American Independence."69 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 65 Francis Parkman, Montcalm and Wolfe, 6th edn., 2 vols. (Boston, 1885). 66 See Alan Taylor, "The Forgotten War," New Republic (August 14, 2000): 40-45. 67 Fred Anderson, The Crucible of War: The Seven Years' War and the Fate of Empire in British North America, 1754-1766 (New York, 2000), xvi. 68 Anderson, Crucible of War, xv. 69 Anderson, Crucible of War, xvi. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 149 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Yet once the narrative is begun, it immediately narrows. We get very little of Asia (although Manila makes a brief but important comparative appearance), the Caribbean, Africa, and continental Europe. Of course, other European powers are part of the narrative, but they only have walk-on roles. We learn little of them at home or about the ways leaders or ordinary citizens interpret events, while we are, by contrast, led through elaborate accounts of high British politics. The preface, presumably written last, sketches an extraordinary agenda for what would be a stunning book. Unfortunately, Anderson did not write the book he there described. Still, judged in terms of what it did rather than what it proposed to do, it is an outstanding work of craft. It will no doubt be our generation's account of the Seven Years' War. As military history, it is superb, and it contributes importantly-but not so grandly as some of the opening rhetoric promises-to the non-controversial but still unclear issue of the causal relations that connect the Seven Years' War to the coming of the revolution. Anderson in fact offers a rich Anglo-centric narrative that explores and explains the different meaning of the war both as strategic event and as experience for the British of the metropole and in the colonies. It is written with verve and confidence-and a seemingly complete command of the materials, primary and secondary. One of its themes is the misperception of events by political elites; with the exception of William Pitt, surely Anderson's hero in this story, they fail to understand the different meaning of the war and empire for ordinary soldiers and colonial subjects. He thus makes cultural issues the heart of the book. Military and political elites play a dramatic role in the narrative, but causation for Anderson- and here he points to important newer developments in military and diplomatic history-is to be found in the culture of everyday life.70 In making this point, he not only offers an important interpretation of the war (building in part on his previous book on Massachusetts soldiers), he also reveals the empire to be less solid, more a matter of continuous negotiation, than historians often consider such entities, whether empires or nations or states.71 MORE EFFECTIVELY THAN ANDERSON, Ira Berlin, referring to the earliest history of Afro-European North America, and Daniel T. Rodgers, addressing the early twentieth century, incorporate the Atlantic, or at least the North Atlantic, into their narratives of American history. Berlin and Rodgers write very different kinds of history and focus on different periods. Berlin's is a social history, while Rodgers has written an intellectual history, or, perhaps, a history of political culture. Yet both Berlin and Rodgers recognize the complex webs that route movements-of people, of ideas, of money, of things-in the Atlantic world. The transnational terrains that Berlin and Rodgers evoke establish larger and truer frames for national histories than do notions of bounded and self-contained regions or nations. The first section of Berlin's Many Thousands Gone, a portrait of the Atlantic littoral, describes a world framed by cities and the sea, little divided by national [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 70 Anderson, Crucible of War, 453-54. 71 See Fred Anderson, A Peoples' Army: Massachusetts Soldiers and Society in the Seven Years' War (Chapel Hill, N.C., 1984). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 150 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] boundaries, which did not yet organize any of the four Atlantic continents. Berlin's opening tableau describes the emergence of the Atlantic world as an ever- expanding historical terrain, where the African presence is pervasive on the sea and in the cities, including Lisbon, where they made up 10 percent of the population in the sixteenth century. He evokes a world defined by a network of cosmopolitan cities populated by creolized peoples. African people were not only omnipresent, they were often crucial cultural and economic brokers, helping to knit this new world together. Berlin lets go of this powerful frame and image in his later chapters, where he narrows the focus to regional difference within the bounds of British North America. Still, the book's protean beginning remains in the reader's mind, inviting others to realize its narrative logic and moral meaning.72 In Atlantic Crossings: Social Politics in a Progressive Age (1998), Daniel T. Rodgers also achieves a richer historicism by expanding the space of analysis. One small indication is in the subtitle. He refers to "social politics," not the more usual "welfare state." His approach, examining relations in space as well as over time as fields of contingency, makes the welfare state a problematic common term. When he uses the more general and more mobile term "social politics," he effectively historicizes the concept, lineage, and practice of the welfare state. The development of a social politics has other possible paths and outcomes besides evolution into the national welfare state.73 The national welfare state thus becomes a historically and place-specific invention rather than a universal or, worse, the teleological endpoint of American liberal narratives-an endpoint surely upended by the politics of the last quarter of the twentieth century. Following the pioneering work of James T. Kloppenberg, who also assumed a Euro-American context for progressivism and social democracy, Rodgers ap- proaches this age of reform as at once a transnational and national issue.74 A variety of reforms-from urban planning to social insurance to regulation of capitalism- are examined as products both of general, transnational ideas and of particular, national political cultures. The complex narratives thus developed by Rodgers and Kloppenberg-ones that recognize, especially in the case of Rodgers, the historicity of the balance between national and transnational-are a major advance in the narrative synthesis of a national history. Both Rodgers and Kloppenberg impress on the reader that ideas could cross the Atlantic in either direction. This is salutary; American intellectual history is too often thought by Europeans and Americans as well to be either insignificant or derivative, not quite up to equal participation in an international world of ideas. This common point is handled differently in each book. While Kloppenberg notes [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 72 One hopes this extension of the historiographical terrain will continue and that connections as well as comparisons will be made between the North Atlantic and the South Atlantic and between the Atlantic slave trade and the slave trade that turned to the east, to the Muslim empires of the Mediterranean and today's Middle East. Big as it is, the Atlantic does not capture the logic and dimensions of slavery in this era. 73 See, for example, the argument (somewhat dependent on Rodgers's work) in Thomas Bender, "Cities, Intellectuals, and Citizenship in the United States: The 1890s and 1990s," Citizenship Studies 3 (1999): 203-20. 74 Daniel T. Rodgers, Atlantic Crossings: Social Politics in a Progressive Age (Cambridge, Mass., 1998); James T. Kloppenberg, Uncertain Victory: Social Democracy and Progressivism in European and American Thought, 1870-1920 (New York, 1986). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 151 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] direct interaction, he seems more interested in demonstrating a homological relation or a kind of convergence. Rodgers, by contrast, focuses on the specific transit of ideas and emphasizes the way intellectuals and reformers on either side of the Atlantic drew selectively on these ideas, depending on personal taste and local circumstance. The result is a fundamental and valuable reorientation of the way we might understand intellectual history. The conceptual opening they have created invites a yet more radical under- standing of the territory and movement of ideas. Let me go back to the title of Rodgers's book. I think that "Atlantic Crossings" projects too narrow an under- standing of the implications of the book. It emphasizes the movement of people and ideas back and forth across the Atlantic. To that extent, it recalls a much older Anglo-American historiography of "trans-Atlantic influences."75 Rodgers goes well beyond this historiography in showing that, in important respects, Europe was partly Americanized and the United States was partly Europeanized by the phenomena he describes. But his really important accomplishment is to get away from the "influence" model, to displace the linear A to B notion of intellectual history. But he could have gone farther yet. There is more to the circulation of ideas than this framing recognizes. It is more than an Atlantic crossing, more than a link between Western Europe and the United States. The whole Atlantic, South Atlantic as well as North Atlantic, and, indeed, increasingly, parts of the Pacific world better describe the extent of the intellectual network his book evokes. In regard to urban development and reform, an important theme in Rodgers's book, it is clear that there is a global conversation at work. Rather than the linearity of steamship crossings (the dustjacket illustration) between the port cities of Western Europe and New York, I imagine a Great Bazaar of urban ideas, technology, and aesthetics hovering over the Atlantic, with many traders and buyers. This exchange is not, of course, symmetrical, and that itself is an issue, but participation was nearly global in 1900. Progressive ideas, especially those dealing with urban reform and technologies, traveled through many circuits and with different voltage, but nearly the whole world was connected, not only Western Europe and the United States. Simply look at the cities of Eastern Europe, Latin America, parts of Africa, Central and East Asia. Surely, they were part of an international conception of urbanism-and of urban commercial culture. The remnants of the era make it clear that New York and Chicago, no less than Lyons, Cairo, Buenos Aires, or Shanghai, were local instances of a global process of city-making. THESE LAST COMMENTS SUGGEST what I take to be the next challenge of narrative synthesis. But before I conclude, let me briefly review what has been accomplished by the cohort of synthetic histories considered here. These books reveal, even verify, the capacity of narrative synthesis to achieve inclusion and to respect issues of identity. Moreover, it seems possible in synthetic narratives to combine structure [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 75 See Frank Thistlethwaite, The Anglo-American Connection in the Early Nineteenth Century (Philadelphia, 1959). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 152 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] and agency and to consider causal explanation without sacrificing the explication of subjective meaning-and vice versa. The volumes here examined reveal many narrative strategies and quite different relations to a wider reading public. There is no single model, and no one volume (yet) does all the things we might fairly expect in a realized synthesis. In addition, these books, both in what they do and do not do, suggest to me the value of embracing a narrative core that is a more explicit and deeper exploration of democracy and difference, freedom and empowerment, contest and justice. Such a focus promises a sharper analytical history, one more historical and less susceptible to teleology, whether of modernity or anything else. It seems plausible to propose that a wider canvas, a supranational context, may in fact enhance the examination of these issues. The work of Hine and Faragher, Berlin, Gordon, and Rodgers in particular enables one to imagine an even more radical synthesis of national history, one that operates on multiple geographical scales, from narratives smaller than the nation to supra-national ones-thus identifying the nation as a product of history as well as an object of historical inquiry. Such a framing of national history will increase awareness of the complexity of the multiple axes of historical interaction, causation, and identity formation. While I mean these concluding comments to suggest an ambitious new agenda for the discipline, we must not overlook an already existing and compelling example. Decades ago, David Brion Davis embarked on a multivolume history that considered all these issues. He brought them together in his majestic synthesis that explores slavery and freedom in the Atlantic world, a history of nearly global reach that is also-and I emphasize this fact-a history of the United States.76 My point, then, is that such histories can be written, have been written, and I trust that more will yet be written. The present moment seems especially propitious for such histories. The relation of the nation to both subnational and transnational solidarities is very much in question. It is a public concern as well as an object of interdisciplinary scholarly inquiry. Historians surely have an open invitation to rethink the boundaries of national histories.77 Colonial historians have been moving in this direction for some time, redefining their field as the Atlantic world long before the globalization talk. Likewise, Rodgers and Ian Tyrrell, both of whom work on the modern period, moved in this direction fairly early and for a different reason: their concern about the claims of American exceptionalism.78 With these various concerns at work, we may fairly expect a movement of American historians and other historians as well toward a wider sense of their fields. National histories will not be so firmly bounded, and the assumption of their national autarky will be softened by the recognition that national histories are [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 76 David Brion Davis, The Problem of Slavery in Western Culture (Ithaca, N.Y., 1966); The Problem of Slavery in the Age of Revolution, 1770-1823 (Ithaca, 1975), with the final installment yet to come. 77 See Bender, Rethinking American History in a Global Age; and Thomas Bender, The La Pietra Report (Bloomington, Ind., 2000), also available on the World Wide Web at www.oah.org/activities/ lapietra/index.html. 78 Ian Tyrrell, "American Exceptionalism in an Age of International History," AHR 96 (October 1991): 1031-55; Daniel T. Rodgers, "Exceptionalism," in Anthony Molho and Gordon S. Wood, eds., Imagined Histories: American Historians Interpret the Past (Princeton, N.J., 1998), 21-40. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 153 embedded in yet larger histories. And all of this will demand yet more ambitious strategies of narrative synthesis. Thomas Bender is University Professor of the Humanities and Professor of History at New York University. His scholarship has been in the broad domain of cultural history, particularly studies of cities, intellectuals, and, most recently, the history of scholarly disciplines. His books on these themes include Toward an Urban Vision (1975), New York Intellect (1987), and Intellect and Public Life (1993), as well as The Unfinished City: New York and the Metropol- itan Idea (forthcoming). He has a longstanding interest in the larger framings of American history that dates from his Community and Social Change in America (1978) and continued in his article "Wholes and Parts: The Need for Synthesis in American History," Journal of American History (1986), which provides the starting point for this essay. His thinking on this topic also derives in part from his work on the OAH-NYU project that resulted in the La Pietra Report (2000), which he authored, and Rethinking American History in a Global Age (2002), which he edited. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/532101

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587015
Date: April 2003
Author(s): Elbourne Elizabeth
Abstract: [[START 03X0760F]] Review Essays Word Made Flesh: Christianity, Modernity, and Cultural Colonialism in the Work of Jean and John Comaroff ELIZABETH ELBOURNE "IN THE BEGINNING WAS THE WORD, and the word was made flesh and dwelt among us," as the first chapter of the Book of John proclaims in a text often read at Christian Easter celebrations. The text might be taken as a something of a leitmotif of the first two volumes (of a projected three) of Jean and John Comaroff's brilliant and rightly influential series, Of Revelation and Revolution.1 The first two volumes, Christianity, Colonialism, and Consciousness in South Africa and The Dialectics of Modernity on a South African Frontier, explore the nineteenth-century encounter between British Protestant Nonconformist missionaries and the southern Tswana in a region that is now in the northern part of the Republic of South Africa. The Comaroffs attempt, however, to do far more than merely describe a series of relatively small-scale historical events. They are interested in missionaries above all because of their complex relationship to "modernity," which the Comaroffs see in turn as tightly linked to a particular phase of European colonialism. The title of the second volume, "The Dialectics of Modernity," suggests as much. Most European missionaries tried hard to function as agents of cultural change-of "civilization" in early nineteenth-century missionaries' own terms, implicitly casting the Tswana as "savage" and thereby laying out one of the key dialectical oppositions of colonial- ism, which would function as a justification for dispossession. Some Tswana interlocutors adapted some elements of "Christian behavior," the Comaroffs argue, but many others demonstrated resistance to the hegemony of British colonialism in part by resisting the colonization of their everyday lives. The nineteenth-century Protestant project to remake the world, of which the Nonconformist missionaries of southern Africa were important proponents, is thus linked by the Comaroffs forward to colonialism and to contemporary globalization, and backward in time to Part of this article was presented in a much earlier version at the Twentieth Anniversary Conference of the Journal of Southern African Studies, York, 1994; I would like to thank the participants as well as those who subsequently commented helpfully, including David Maxwell, Norman Etherington, Ed Wilmsen, and Paul Landau. For reading the current essay, my particular thanks to Catherine Desbarats, Eric Jabbari, James Ron, and Michael Wasser, as well as to Tim Rowse, Desley Deacon, Ann Curthoys, and John Docker for helpful suggestions. I am of course solely responsible for the content. The research for this essay was supported by the Social Sciences and Humanities Research Council of Canada. 1 Jean Comaroff and John L. Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, Vol. 1: Christianity, Colonialism, and Consciousness in South Africa (Chicago, 1991), and Vol. 2: The Dialectics of Modernity on a South African Frontier (Chicago, 1997). 435 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne the emergence of capitalism. Missionaries were, in effect, agents of a first wave of globalization. The missionary movement was an early exemplar of a transnational global movement, while the intellectual claims of missionaries to universality paralleled the modernist claims of a globalizing colonialism. The struggles over the texture and composition of everyday life that took place on the frontiers of colonial society in nineteenth-century southern Africa therefore tell us something not only about the nature of colonialism but also about modernity and its considerable discontents, as well as about the resistance of the colonized to the European colonial project. In this sense, a quest for origins informs the narrative structure of both books.2 Indeed, one of the reasons that this seminal text engages us so closely is its concern with the narrative of dispossession and resistance, with a beginning and therefore, implicitly, some hope for an end-an only ambivalently postmodern narrative, in fact, despite some alarm in southern Africanist circles over Of Revelation and Revolution as a postmodern nail in the coffin of materialist history.3 This focus lends moral urgency to the Comaroffs' consideration of the distant initial encounters between white missionaries and the southern Tswana in the early nineteenth century. Volume 2, for example, opens with a striking vignette: Tswana soldiers refuse to defend the white regime in 1994, as Afrikaner patriots launch a last-ditch raid on Bophuthatswana. As homeland structures crumble around them as they write, the Comaroffs acknowledge that endings and beginnings are never entirely neat. "And yet in many respects, the narrative of Tswana colonization had completed itself, finally running its course from Revelation to Revolution."4 Doubtless the authors would now adopt a less utopian position, but their enthusiasm for revolution and for endings is important, and typical of South African historical writing from the decades before the end of apartheid.5 2 Catherine Desbarats, "Essais sur quelques elements de l'6criture de l'histoire am6rindienne," Revue d'histoire de l'Ameriquefranqaise 53, no. 4 (Spring 2000): 491-520, provides an interesting model, inspired among others by Paul Ricoeur, Hayden White, and Kerwin Lee Klein, for the reading of various historical approaches to the colonial encounter as forms of narrative romance, given the inescapable narrativity of the historical text. Susan Newton-King, also drawing on Ricoeur, similarly reflects on the inescapable imposition of an artificial order on colonial encounters by the historian of colonialism. Newton-King, "Introduction," Masters and Servants on the Cape Eastern Frontier, 1760- 1803 (Cambridge, 1999). See also Kerwin Lee Klein, Frontiers of Historical Imagination: Narrating the European Conquest of Native America, 1890-1990 (Berkeley, Calif., 1997); Hayden White, The Content of the Form: Narrative Discourse and Historical Representation (Baltimore, 1987); Paul Ricoeur, Temps et recit, 3 vols. (Paris, 1985-87). 3 Meghan Vaughan, "Colonial Discourse Theory and African History, or Has Postmodernism Passed Us By?" Social Dynamics 20, no. 2 (Summer 1994): 1-23; David Bunn, "The Insistence of Theory: Three Questions for Meghan Vaughan," Social Dynamics 20, no. 2: 24-34; Clifton Crais, "South Africa and the Pitfalls of Postmodern," South African Historical Journal, no. 31 (1994): 274-79; Leon de Kock, "For and Against the Comaroffs: Postmodernist Puffery and Competing Conceptions of the 'Archive,'" South African Historical Journal, no. 31: 280-89. These authors take a variety of positions on the issues of whether or not the Comaroffs are postmodern and whether or not the rise of postmodernism in post-apartheid South African academic historical scholarship has been a positive development in a field that was previously (and in many ways still is) passionately materialist in approach. 4 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: xiii. 5 The original title of the series was reportedly From Revelation to Revolution, planned at a time before the release of Nelson Mandela. In a recent conversation with Homi Bhabha, however, John Comaroff is considerably less sanguine about the end of apartheid in South Africa and popular enthusiasm for Mandela outside South Africa, which he sees as a last gasp of modernist optimism in AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 436 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh In a similar vein, at the heart of Volume 1 is a crucial chapter, "Through the Looking Glass: Heroic Journeys, First Encounters." This chapter sets out to explore "the initial meeting of two worlds, one imperial and expansive, the other local and defensive."6 In marvelously evocative detail, the authors describe the initial entry of envoys of the London Missionary Society (LMS) in 1816 into the Tswana capital, Dithakong (seen by the missionaries themselves as a sacred journey into the land of Satan), a subsequent meeting, and the complex negotiations that took place throughout over the terms of the mission. A key metaphor is furnished by the mirror that the LMS envoy John Campbell presented as a gift to the Tswana chief, Mothibi, symbolizing the Western effort to reconfigure Tswana consciousness and the Tswana notion of the self. These initial encounters prefigured the colonial encounter to come: "the square enclosure and all that 'took place' at the center of the most public of Tswana spaces was ominous, foreshadowing a methodical reconstruction of their symbolic map."7 The Christian missionary project, this chapter further suggests, was from the start central to the creation of the dialectical oppositions of colonialism, ironic in view of its claim to erase difference. For the Comaroffs, the colonization of the Tswana thus began (although it certainly did not end) with the word, in the sense both of Bible and of cultural text, with the advent of white Protestant missionaries and their claims to possess the revealed divine word-albeit a word made flesh, clothed in material power. The roots of colonization were in a series of knowledge claims and a set of hegemonic cultural discourses, which would bolster the later seizure of land and of labor. Many scholars have explored the linkage between knowledge claims and colonial power, an issue that has long lain at the heart of postcolonial scholarship and that occupies an increasingly central place in the study of imperialism from a diversity of perspectives.8 Nonetheless, Of Revelation and Revolution furnishes a particularly influential and important statement of the position, in part because it provides a great deal of flesh on the bones of a theoretical model of cultural colonialism. The work moves from the field of discourse alone to examine in great detail concrete material struggles over the remaking of everyday life, including Tswana efforts to resist cultural colonialism. More controversially, perhaps, Of Revelation and Revolution also attempts to make explicit the links in southern Africa between a postcolonial setting. Homi Bhabha and John Comaroff, "Speaking of Postcoloniality, in the Continuous Present: A Conversation," in David Theo Goldberg and Ato Quayson, eds., Relocating Postcolonialism (Oxford, 2002). 6 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 171. 7 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 182. 8 Among many recent discussions of colonialism and European knowledge claims, see Ato Quayson and David Theo Goldberg, "Introduction: Scale and Sensibility," and Benita Parry, "Directions and Dead Ends in Postcolonial Studies," in Goldberg and Quayson, Relocating Postcolo- nialism, xi-xxii and 66-81; Michael Adas, "From Settler Colony to Global Hegemon: Integrating the Exceptionalist Narrative of the American Experience into World History," AHR 106 (December 2001): 1692-1720; various essays in Catherine Hall, ed., Cultures of Empire: Colonizers in Britain and the Empire in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries (Manchester, 2000); Gyan Prakash, "Who's Afraid of Postcoloniality?" Social Text 49 (Winter 1996): 187-203; Prakash, "Subaltern Studies as Postcolonial Criticism," AHR 99 (December 1994): 1475-90. On the reconfiguration of African history, see Frederick Cooper, "Conflict and Connection: Rethinking Colonial African History," AHR 99: 1516-45. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 437 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne political, economic, and cultural colonialism-fields the authors argue are in any case impossible to disaggregate.9 The programmatic claims that lend Of Revelation and Revolution its force also, however, cause some interesting tensions in the book. The need to make linkages and the Comaroffs' explicit commitment to the exploration of large-scale processes lead the authors to oversimplify in places. Not only that, but the imperatives of a dialectical method push the Comaroffs at times (despite their parallel stress on indeterminacy and their very explicit engagement with the costs and benefits of a dialectical analysis, especially in Volume 2) into tighter methodological corners than they might themselves like. The links between early nineteenth-century cultural colonialism and late nineteenth-century political colonialism are not as direct or as ontologically indissoluble as the Comaroffs assume they are, while the relationship of "modernity" to colonialism furnishes matter for debate, with considerable contemporary implications. The very boldness of the Comaroffs' arguments has indeed contributed to a mixed reception among scholars of southern African history and of religion in Africa, with some enthusiastically welcoming the methodological innovation of the Comaroffs and others casting doubt in a number of ways. In the second volume of the series, the Comaroffs seem to me to have backed down somewhat from some of their bolder claims, despite their spirited engagement with the critics. This in itself provides an interesting case study of the evolution of ideas during a turbulent decade in South African history. In what follows, I would like to engage with this important work in several ways. First, I want to lay out my understanding of the theoretical guidelines in the opening volume, with particular attention to the issue of hegemony and power. Second, I want to provide an alternate reading of the opening encounters between Tswana and missionary, focusing on other intermediaries and on the fact that, even before the advent of European missionaries, the region was already affected by colonialism. I shall use this example to ask whether a dialectic model does not in some ways oversimplify complicated situations and make it hard to account for fudging across the fault lines. I shall further ask whether the result is not a rather muted account of individual agency and an attenuated depiction of the multiple uses of mission Christianity, both as language and as practice. This is not, however, to deny the latent authoritarian potential of much missionary activity, particularly in a colonial context. Third, I also want to gesture, albeit sketchily, toward some issues associated with narrative and chronology, suggesting that the schematic narrative about "modernity," industrialization, and globalization that undergirds both volumes, though provocative and important, also offers a number of hostages to fortune. These include an undue stress on the capacity of missionaries to induct converts into the global economy by changing their consciousness; rather, I see converts struggling to adapt to an overpowering global economy, among other things by trying to use Christianity in a variety of ways, with greater or lesser degrees of success. Having said all that, does this fact-mongering matter?-What are the Comaroffs doing that might go beyond reading the content of particular 9 Colonialism was simultaneously a "process in political economy and culture," and these dimensions were "indissoluble aspects of the same reality, whose fragmentation into discrete spheres hides their ontological unity." Comarofff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 19. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 438 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh archives? Throughout, I want to take up some concerns of African historians and anthropologists with questions of narrative, voice, and agency in Of Revelation and Revolution. THE INITIAL CHAPTER OF THE FIRST VOLUME is a careful theoretical exposition. Although the authors rather cheerfully direct those with little stomach for theoretical discussions to skip theirs and, en bon bricoleur, to pick up the narrative at a later point, the opening discussion of anthropological concepts is in fact crucial for an understanding of what both this book and its later companion seek to accomplish. I would accordingly like to pause upon it. The stated goal of the work is to present an anthropology of the "colonial encounter," in this case between British Nonconformist missionaries and the southern Tswana, with the larger implication that the missionaries acted as the cultural arm of colonialism, while the dilemmas of the Tswana in their confrontations with colonialism mirrored, if they obviously did not precisely reproduce, the experience of other colonized African groups in South Africa. The Comaroffs state that they hope that their discussion of this particular mission will accomplish three other things: to anticipate later modes of consciousness and struggle in South Africa; to look at an example of historical processes that were happening across Africa and indeed much of the non-Western world; and to examine analytic issues to do with the "nature of power and resistance." With reference to this latter objective: How, precisely, were structures of inequality fashioned during the colonial encounter, often in the absence of more conventional, more coercive tools of domination? How was consciousness made and remade in this process? ... How were new hegemonies established and the "ground prepared," in [Antonio] Gramsci's phrase, for formal European political control? ... Even more fundamentally, how are we to understand the dialectics of culture and power, ideology and consciousness that shape such historical processes?'1 From the vantage point of 1991, the Comaroffs placed their project into a historiographical framework that has since changed considerably, in no small part due to their own work."1 At the time, the Comaroffs castigated anthropologists for 10 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 6. 11 Among many possibilities, some works of particular importance to southern Africa include Paul Stuart Landau, The Realm of the Word: Language, Gender and Christianity in a Southern African Kingdom (London, 1995); Henry Bredekamp and Robert Ross, eds., Missions and Christianity in South African History (Johannesburg, 1995); Pier M. Larson, "'Capacities and Modes of Thinking': Intellectual Engagements and Subaltern Hegemony in the Early History of Malagasy Christianity," AHR 102 (October 1997): 969-1002; Richard Elphick and Rodney Davenport, eds., Christianity in South Africa: A Political, Social, and Cultural History (Berkeley, Calif., 1997); and many other works discussed in David Chidester, Judy Tobler, and Darrel Wratten, Christianity in South Africa: An Annotated Bibliography (Westport, Conn., 1997). The sheer diversity of recent approaches to the history of mission Christianity, a growth field, is impossible to capture in a footnote but is suggested by works such as David Maxwell and Ingrid Lawrie, eds., Christianity and the African Imagination: Essays in Honour of Adrian Hastings (Leiden, 2001); Nicholas Thomas, "Colonial Conversions: Difference, Hierarchy and History in Early Twentieth-Century Evangelical Propaganda," in Hall, Cultures of Empire; Susan Thorne, Congregational Missions and the Making of an Imperial Culture in Nineteenth- Century England (Stanford, Calif., 1999); Peter van der Veer, ed., Conversion to Moderities: The Globalization of Christianity (London, 1996); Robert W. Hefner, ed., Conversion to Christianity: Historical and Anthropological Perspectives on a Great Transformation (Berkeley, 1993); Lamin Sanneh, AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 439 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne neglecting both the study of colonialism and, more broadly, history itself. Historians paid more attention to missions but in the 1960s and 1970s often focused on the theoretically crude question of "whose side were the missionaries really on?" By the 1980s, mission history had been more fruitfully incorporated into work on such long-term processes as colonial conquest, capitalist expansion, state formation, and proletarianization. The methodological innovation of the Comaroffs in the early 1990s was, however, to underscore how much this new approach was itself limited by its "preoccupation with political economy at the expense of culture, symbolism, and ideology."12 They echoed the 1986 claim of Terence Ranger that most of the historiography of early missions to that point had overestimated the political and economic factors in its expansion-in a manner, according to the Comaroffs, stemming ultimately from oppositions between mind and matter at the ontological roots of our social thought.13 In rejecting a narrowly political-economic approach, the authors believed they could better answer the questions of why it was that missionaries succeeded in effecting broad social, political, and economic changes without substantial material resources (a question that, of course, assumes that this was accomplished by missionaries). What was needed, the Comaroffs claimed, was a study of consciousness: of why people articulated belief in certain things, why they took others for granted, how colonialism and consciousness were inextricably intertwined. It is in this sense that missionaries were most clearly colonial agents: they sought to remake the lifeworld of the Tswana, indeed, to colonize their consciousness. They did not necessarily seek directly and simplistically to incorpo- rate the Tswana into an unequal colonial world: they had dreamed instead of a "global democracy of material well-being and moral merit," in the Comaroffs' phrase.14 Nonetheless, their actions contributed to building an empire of inequality. This claim rests on the additional argument that the missionaries were the products of post-Enlightenment modernity, creations and agents of rationalization in the Weberian sense. Similarly, Tswana interlocutors made a variety of unexpected uses of the evangelical message, and of evangelical attempts to remake their world, again with unpredictable results. In sum, the encounter between colonial evangelism and the southern Tswana can best be described as a "long conversation," a continuing process in the course of which "signifiers were set afloat, fought over, and recaptured on both sides of the colonial encounter."15 Over the course of this conversation, the Tswana came to conceive of themselves as constituting a separate, Translating the Message: The Missionary Impact on Culture (Maryknoll, N.Y., 1989); and V. Y. Mudimbe, The Invention of Africa: Gnosis, Philosophy, and the Order of Knowledge (Bloomington, Ind., 1988). The Currents in World Christianity Project, at the University of Cambridge, has also since 1996 lent considerable impetus to the scholarly study of missions. A longstanding African literature reconsiders missions and the truth claims of missionaries, often from a theological perspective: for example, J. N. K. Mugambi, From Liberation to Reconstruction: African Christian Theology after the Cold War (Nairobi, 1996). Many works by African scholars are less well distributed in the West than they might be, given material constraints. From a wide variety of directions, missionary activity has become a newly invigorated area of research since the 1990s, although some of the more difficult underlying issues are perhaps not adequately discussed in all the literature. 12 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 8. 13 Terence Ranger, "Religious Movements and Politics in Sub-Saharan Africa," African Studies Review 29 (1986): 1-69. 14 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 12. 15 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 17-18. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 440 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh reified entity, with a set of "Tswana" customs, or setswana. At the same time, the "forms" of the "European worldview" became inscribed on the "African land- scape": "not only did colonialism produce reified cultural orders, it gave rise to a new hegemony amidst-and despite-cultural contestation."16 Throughout this discussion, the Comaroffs reject the poststructuralist claim that all meanings are equally tenuous and open to contestation, regretting the episte- mological hypochondria and consequent intellectual immobility to which postmod- ern critiques have given rise in academia-even as the authors uphold some of the central insights of such critiques, notably their insistence that the indeterminacies of meaning and action be addressed by scholars.17 What poststructuralists cannot address is the basic question of how some meanings get widely accepted over significant periods of time by those against whose interest it is to believe them. This is the problem of hegemony, raised by Gramsci (however sketchy his discussion in the Prison Notebooks) and developed by many social theorists.18 The Comaroffs offer a solution, though over-schematic in the literal sense of the word. They see human consciousness as existing on a spectrum from "hegemony" to "ideology." At the hegemony end of the spectrum, one finds the taken-for-granted inscribed in everyday life-those beliefs that are not questioned because they are not even noticed as beliefs. At the other end, one finds articulated ideology, which is available for debate and which often tries to bring into consciousness the hegemonic beliefs of earlier stages. Culture in general is the "space of signifying practice, the semantic ground on which human beings seek to construct and represent themselves and others-and hence, society and history."l9 Somewhat oddly, hegemonic concepts are described as "constructs and conventions that have come to be shared and naturalized through a political community," while ideology is "the expression and ultimately the possession of a particular social group, although it may be widely peddled beyond."20 This psychological structure seems artificial and unwieldy; it is unclear why the province of the hegemonic idea should be the political community (a tricky concept to define in any case), while ideology is described not only as the product of communities (rather than at least sometimes of individuals) but as the province of the social rather than, say, political or even self-consciously intellectual groupings. The definition of the political is murky here, as it is throughout the book, despite (even sometimes because of) the painstaking effort of the authors to demonstrate the deeply political nature of the everyday stuff of life; what is lacking here and elsewhere is a willingness to limit and define the nature of the political in such a manner as to make it meaningful to call something political in the first place. Be that as it may, this construction of group political psychology permits the Comaroffs to draw conclusions that are critically important for their overall project. Indeed, the reconstruction of struggles over the stuff of everyday life that takes pride of place in the second volume depends ultimately on this theoretical 16 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 18. 17 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 17. 18 Antonio Gramsci, Selections from the Prison Notebooks of Antonio Gramsci, Quentin Hoare and Geoffrey Nowell-Smith, trans. (New York, 1991). 19 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 21. 20 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 24, my emphases. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 441 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elboume structure. Given the place of hegemony and ideology on an ever-changing spectrum, the two are constantly fluid; meanings are always being made and remade, as ideology challenges hegemony to reveal itself, and it is in the inchoate, fluid space between hegemony and ideology that human consciousness is at its most creative. Given that hegemony is constructed largely through the "assertion of control over various modes of symbolic production: over such things as educational and ritual processes, patterns of socialization, political and legal procedures, canons of style and self-representation, public communication, health and bodily discipline and so on," the realm of "symbolic production" is (presumably) political because it is a site for power struggles. This means both that the "symbolic production" is political and that resistance to modes of symbolic production that generate hegemony is political. Modes of resistance run across as wide a spectrum as modes of control, with at one end organized protest and other movements readily recognized as political by the West; at the other end are "gestures of tacit refusal and iconoclasms, gestures that sullenly and silently contest the forms of an existing hegemony."21 It is thus in this light that missions must be seen. They sought to extend hegemonic control over indigenous peoples by changing their worldviews to a point that new ways of behaving and seeing the world were completely internalized. Resistance to the specific forms of Christianity was also resistance to the message behind the signs. In the purest sense, resistance to Christian forms was resistance to the content of capitalism and to the global capitalist system; this is indeed a critical plank of Jean Comaroff's fascinating (if not uncontroversial) reading of African independent churches as quintessentially subversive because they appropriated and yet subverted Christian forms, in her important 1985 study Body of Power, Spirit of Resistance.22 Christian missions must also be re-read. Their gestures and ritual must be analyzed in order to see how missionaries were attempting to change far more than religious allegiance, acting as emissaries of modernity and economic transfor- mation. Finally, conversion was inextricably political, and as such a suitable site for political competition between colonizers and the colonized. The extremely rich remainder of this book and its successor volume work out the implications of these theoretical positions through a quite brilliant analysis of the nineteenth-century "colonial exchange" between the southern Tswana and the Nonconformist missions to them run first by the London Missionary Society (pioneers in the field) and then by their later-arriving brethren, the Wesleyan Methodist Missionary Society. An additional important project of the authors throughout this study is to demonstrate the importance of an imagined Africa to the British sense of themselves and more broadly to the construction of modernity. As the Comaroffs argue in Volume 2, as part of a series of seven propositions about colonialism, "colonialism was as much involved in making the metropole, and the identities and ideologies of colonizers, as it was in (re)making peripheries and colonial sub- 21 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 31. 22 Jean Comaroff, Body of Power, Spirit of Resistance: The Culture and History of a South African People (Chicago, 1985). Contrast J. M. Schoffeleers, "Ritual Healing and Political Acquiescence: The Case of the Zionist Churches in Southern Africa," Africa 61, no. 1 (1991): 1-25. Schoffeleers sees Zionist healing churches as not necessarily subversive of the established order and sometimes supportive of it. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 442 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh jects."23 In particular, in developing the theme of Africa as a "negative trope in the language of modernity" in Volume 1, the Comaroffs were among the most influential of scholars to introduce into the history of missionary activity in South Africa the postcolonialist concern with the construction of the colonial or minority "other" as a means for self-construction on the part of the person doing the defining.24 Despite their influence on many literary scholars, in Volume 2 the Comaroffs ironically confess themselves "uneasy with most literary critical ap- proaches to colonialism," eschew a vulgar Hegelian approach, and stress that they prefer to focus on "selves" and "others" in the plural; we shall return to this issue. A final critical point is that the authors see the interaction between missionary and Tswana as a form of dialectic between two key groups of interlocutors, dependent on the notion of difference. In the second volume, the Comaroffs acknowledge with more force than in Volume 1 the existence of overlap on the ground, and they reemphasize that the idea of difference was created by the dialectical process, despite some merging of lifeways on the ground and the mutual influence of Tswana and British. Note their comment that "neither 'the colonizer' nor 'the colonized' represented an undifferentiated sociological or political reality, save in exceptional circumstances."25 Since the end product of the colonial encounter was so clearly the production of difference and a series of deeply embedded dialectical oppositions, the Comaroffs nonetheless argue that this is the most productive optic through which to view the early nineteenth-century encounter between European mission- aries and Africans. This model is furthermore essential to their theoretical account of the formation of hegemony. ONE OF THE THINGS I HAVE FOUND MOST PERPLEXING about the work of the Comaroffs is, nevertheless, the question of the extent to which it is appropriate to describe the Tswana encounter with Christianity as a form of dialectic. This question implies the ancillary question of who the agents of the dialectic were at given moments. On the face of it, these are tendentious concerns, since colonialism was so clearly in many ways a dialectic between colonized and colonizer, just as colonialism clearly generated reified views of colonizer and colonized alike. Missionaries themselves usually understood their activities in dialectical terms. Yet I think one can ask whether a dialectical approach to the history of Christianity in colonial contexts 23 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 22. 24 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 86. Those influenced by the Comaroffs in this respect include David Chidester, Savage Systems: Colonialism and Comparative Religion in Southern Africa (Charlottesville, Va., 1996); Leon de Kock, Civilising Barbarians: Missionary Narrative and African Textual Response in Nineteenth-Century South Africa (Johannesburg, 1996); Doug Stuart, "'Of Savages and Heroes': Discourses of Race, Nation and Gender in the Evangelical Missions to Southern Africa in the Early Nineteenth Century" (PhD dissertation, Institute of Commonwealth Studies, University of London, 1994). This approach of course represents the concerns of many scholars of the British Empire and the related construction of British identity. Edward W. Said, Orientalism (New York, 1978; 2d edn., 1996); Henry L. Gates, ed., Race, Writing and Difference (Chicago, 1986); Mary Louise Pratt, Imperial Eyes: Travel Writing and Transculturation (London, 1992); Linda Colley, Britons: Forging the Nation (New Haven, Conn., 1992); Ann Stoler and Frederick Cooper, eds., Tensions of Empire: Colonial Cultures in a Bourgeois World (Berkeley, Calif., 1997), including Stoler and Cooper, "Rethinking a Research Agenda." 25 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 24. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 443 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne does not fail to capture some aspects of social and political reality. This is above all because of the rapidity with which Christianity was out of the hands of the missionaries and settlers who brought it, the corresponding importance of non- Europeans in the spread of Christianity, the multiplicity of uses to which diverse interest groups of all ethnicities put Christianity as both a language and a practice, and the political and cultural complications of regions with multiple power players. These issues are brought out by a re-reading of the opening encounters between missionaries and Tswana that occupy so key a role in the first volume of Of Revelation and Revolution. I should add that I made similar comments about the opening phases of the mission in an unpublished conference paper after the publication of Volume 1. The Comaroffs respond generously to this paper in Volume 2, as they do to a number of other critics, using the occasion to clarify and amplify their understanding of a dialectical approach. I do not want to beat a dead horse. Nonetheless, I think there are some useful differences of interpretation at stake, and so will abuse the Comaroffs' patience by briefly recapitulating a potential alternate reading of these opening gambits, before returning to the wider issue of different approaches to mission history.26 Let me first make a comment about regional issues. The lands of the southern Tswana were disrupted by colonialism, drought, hunger, and regional conflict well before the formal advent of missions. Furthermore, as Johannes du Bruyn has underscored, the lands inhabited by the southern Tswana were so profoundly affected by the Cape Colony to the south that it is problematic to frame a discussion of cultural colonialism primarily in terms of Europe and the Transvaal. In particular, the colonial firearms frontier moved with great speed, was highly destructive, and was arguably more important earlier than the Comaroffs suggest. Many different armed bands, some of them ethnically mixed, decimated peaceful groups in conflict situations exacerbated by hunger.27 Arguments about the regional context for evangelical missions to the Tswana are also implicit in a much wider body of literature about the so-called mfecane (or difaqane)-terms that have been much disputed by historians. Traditionally, the mfecane was a term given to the widespread wars, famines, and refugee movements that shook (and temporarily depopulated) much of the interior of southern Africa in the early nineteenth century, the impact of which on the Tswana the Comaroffs date from 1822. There is no space here to explore that debate, although it will be helpful to know that a 26 My re-reading of the opening encounter is based on my own work on LMS archives, which I consulted primarily with the aim of writing about contestation over the uses of Christianity within the Cape Colony and with a focus on Khoesan not Tswana uses of Christianity. It seems to me fruitful, however, to unite diverse perspectives on a very complex subject. Elizabeth Elbourne, Blood Ground: Colonialism, Missions and the Contest for Christianity in the Cape Colony and Britain, 1799-1853 (Montreal, 2002). There were four LMS delegations to the Tswana to establish a mission, not two as the Comaroffs have it. 27 Johannes du Bruyn, "Of Muffled Tswana and Overwhelming Missionaries: The Comaroffs and the Colonial Encounter," South African Historical Journal, no. 31 (1994): 294-309; Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 275-76. On Tswana views of the firearms frontier, see Robert Moffat to Richard Miles, Lattakoo [Kuruman], December 5, 1827, in Isaac Schapera, ed., Apprenticeship at Kuruman: Being the Journals and Letters of Robert and Mary Moffat, 1820-1828 (London, 1951), 274. Other letters in this collection describe frequent deadly raids throughout the 1820s, in which a wide variety of often ethnically mixed groups preyed on one another. On Cape influence, see also Johannes du Bruyn, "James Read en die Thlaping, 1816-1820," Historia 35 (1990). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 444 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh critical issue is whether or not covert slave trading from the Cape Colony and Portuguese territories was at the root of disruptions that have more traditionally been ascribed to the many conquests of the Zulu kingdom in the region of what is now Natal. The point I want to emphasize here is not only the great disruption in the region but also the plausibility of historian Neil Parsons's argument that Tswana territory had already been subject since the seventeenth century to political unrest and the large-scale movement of populations. Parsons in fact suggests that the roots of disruption and state formation in the area may well lie in destabilization that considerably antedated the 1820s and may in turn be linked in at least some way to eighteenth-century slave trading to the north and the rise of the predatory Cape Colony to the south.28 Scholars also tend to see later Afrikaner settler colonialism in the region as part of the same broad processes. All this calls into question the determinative impact of mission Christianity in an already destabilized region. Maybe political colonialism did precede cultural colonialism after all? How might we need to reconceptualize the Christian/Tswana encounter if we think of it as taking place in some sense in a frontier zone, or even a borderland, with multiple players, already characterized by cultural admixture, politically influenced uses of Christianity, and political turbulence? The Comaroffs are of course sensitive to these hugely important issues. I think nonetheless that they could emphasize regional complexity more and the power of missionary Christianity somewhat less in their discussion of the roots of material change (at both ends of the nineteenth century), as well as pay more attention to the implications for their overall theoretical argument of the fact that Africans tried to experiment in response to very difficult local conditions. It is also important that the missionaries entered as potential power brokers in a turbulent environment but were initially weak, able to manipulate power if and only if they could make the right alliances. With these types of broad issues in mind, the opening encounters between missionaries and Tswana, so well described by the Comaroffs, might be re-read as conversations between a number of actors. Four LMS delegations traveled between 1813 and 1817 to the southern Tswana settlement known to the missionaries as Lattakoo (later Dithakong) to try to persuade the Tswana to accept missionaries. It is perhaps symbolically appropriate that none of these delegations was exclusively white. In addition to the delegations' African members, even the missionaries themselves included a black West Indian man and a Welsh speaker. Neither, come to that, was the Tswana polity entirely "Tswana." The Thlaping polity was relatively multi-ethnic; the chief Mothibi, for example, was half !Kora (a Khoekhoe-speaking group) and (like others of the chiefly lineage) married a !Kora woman. More significantly, the Europeans were not the only, or even the most important, players promoting an evangelical mission. Key from a Tswana perspective were regional actors, the Griqua (as they 28 Julian Cobbing, "The Mfecane as Alibi: Thoughts on Dithakong and Mbolompo," Journal of African History 29, no. 3 (1988): 487-519; Caroline Hamilton, ed., Mfecane Aftermath (Johannesburg, 1996), including Neil Parsons, "Prelude to Difaqane in the Interior of Southern Africa c. 1600-1822," 323-49; Neil Parsons, "Kicking the Hornets' Nest: A Third View of the Cobbing Controversy on the Mfecane/Difaqane," address to the University of Botswana History Society, Gabarone, Botswana, March 16, 1999 (available online through the University of Botswana History Department web page, at http://ubh.tripod.com/ub/np.htm). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 445 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elboume eventually came to be known), some of whom acted as patrons of the early LMS mission to the Tswana. The Griqua were clusters of settlers in the region of Khoekhoe descent, some of whom had white fathers and Khoesan mothers, and many of whom had migrated from the Cape Colony, epitomizing the remaking of identity in the wake of colonialism. Groups spearheaded by Griqua had established regional hegemony through their access to arms and horses. They provided important trade links with the Cape Colony and were sources of trade goods for the Tswana. The Griqua were already using Christianity in a variety of complicated ways, as a token of equality with white settlers, as justification for what Robert Ross has termed "sub-imperialism" with regard to the unconverted Tswana, and indeed as a basis for their reconstituted polities. Alliances with missionaries gave these emergent polities potential access to diplomacy and markets, including the arms trade, in addition to spiritual concerns. Indeed, on the way to Mothibi's settlement, British LMS inspector Campbell had helped compose a formal written constitution for a Griqua group, reflecting the symbolic uses of the language of law. The language of Christianity was already on the loose in the interior, in other words, and subject to interpretation in Griqualand as much as in the seminaries of Europe.29 The (Khoekhoe) !Kora had also been exposed to Christianity and were also competing by the 1820s to obtain guns and horses from the Cape Colony. The decision of Mothibi and his counselors about whether to accept an LMS mission was thus complicated by the fact that the LMS came under the protection of the powerful Griqua Kok clan. During a second LMS delegation to the Tswana (overlooked by the Comaroffs), for example, Adam Kok presented newly arrived missionaries to Mothibi and acted as their translator. Mothibi was anxious not to offend the powerful Kok family, but worried because his own people had since turned against the mission. In fact, he eventually sent these missionaries away altogether. When two missionaries told Mothibi that one of them "wrought in wood, and one that was to come wrought in Iron, that we would do all the work for him in that way that he wanted," Mothibi was pleased and told Kok "he could not think of rejecting those that came with or through the medium of him." When the missionaries pursued the issue of teaching, however, Mothibi worriedly told Kok that "he would not be instructed, and if A. Kok should endeavour to press it sharply upon him, and his refusal cause a variance between them, he said that he would rather take the flight from Lattakoo, with people." Kok had to reassure Mothibi that the Griqua leader would not force the Tswana chief to relocate if the Thlaping 29 This discussion both here and below draws on Robert Ross, Adam Kok's Griquas: A Study in the Development of Stratification in South Africa (Cambridge, 1976); Elizabeth Elbourne and Robert Ross, "Combating Spiritual and Social Bondage: Early Missions in the Cape Colony," in Elphick and Davenport, Christianity in South Africa; Alan Barnard, Hunters and Herders of Southern Africa: A Comparative Ethnography of the Khoisan Peoples (Cambridge, 1992), 156-75, 193-94; Martin Legassick, "The Northern Frontier to c. 1840: The Rise and Decline of the Griqua People," in Richard Elphick and Hermann Giliomee, eds., The Shaping of South African Society, 1652-1840 (Middletown, Conn., 1988), 358-420; Nigel Penn, "The Orange River Frontier Zone, c. 1700-1805," in Andrew B. Smith, ed., Einiqualand: Studies of the Orange River Frontier (Cape Town, 1995); Karel Schoeman, ed., Griqua Records: The Philippolis Captaincy, 1825-1861 (Cape Town, 1996). Mary and Robert Moffat's letters and journals make the station's vulnerability and its reliance on Griqua protection abundantly clear. See Schapera, ed., Apprenticeship at Kuruman. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 446 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh refused missionaries.30 Once the Kuruman mission had been established, it depended for its survival on Griqua military protection for many years. If missionaries were initially dependent on Griqua intermediaries, they were also materially dependent for travel and translation on Khoesan hired in the colony. The Khoekhoe and San had long borne the brunt of brutal colonial subjugation and were in many cases more receptive to conversion than groups beyond the Cape Colony. The Comaroffs indeed have a wonderful discussion of the occlusion of such intermediary figures from missionary accounts of putatively solitary heroic jour- neys.31 I would go further than the Comaroffs, however, and suggest that at least some of these companions saw themselves as fellow missionaries. On the first delegation, Campbell was accompanied by a number of Khoesan Christians from the Cape. Their prayers and preaching had made a pilgrimage route of their journey through a country of which they saw themselves as taking spiritual possession. They were active in trying to persuade Tswana individuals to accept missionaries.32 In 1814, a synod of the southern African LMS missionaries had "set aside" in a religious ceremony several men of Khoesan descent to act as LMS agents in the interior, several of whom, including Griqua leader Andries Waterboer, subse- quently played important roles in the politics of Transorangia. Cupido Kakkerlak, a product of Eastern Cape mission schools whose letters reveal a passionate spirituality, also itinerated in the region, attempting, albeit with little success, to evangelize among the !Kora. These men were employed by the LMS. As the Comaroffs point out, the society would devote much energy to reining in and controlling "native agents" after the earliest years of the mission. Nonetheless, evidence from the Cape suggests that there was also considerable evangelical activity by converts who were not formally paid by missionary societies, including elephant hunters such as Hendrik Boesak or long-range wagon drivers. In addition, as mission stations became more like churches and congregations fought for independence from missionary control around the mid-century mark, congregations had more authority, not less. My point is that evidence from elsewhere in southern Africa suggests that Christianity was spread by people with long-range contacts other than missionaries, presumably not necessarily in orthodox form. The central- ity of Khoesan people (and later other Africans) to European-led missions to the Tswana suggests a wider oral evangelical culture that the written records would not completely reflect.33 Be that as it may, the importance of Khoesan agents to the Tswana mission is most clearly exemplified by the fourth delegation to Lattakoo, led by a former 30 Robert Hamilton to LMS Directors, Griquatown, April 28, 1816, London Missionary Society Papers, South Africa Correspondence-Incoming, 6/3/C, Council for World Mission Archives, School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London (hereafter, LMS-SA). See also LMS-SA, 6/3/C: J. Evans, R. Hamilton, and W. Corner to LMS Directors, Griquatown, May 27, 1816; LMS-SA, 6/3/C: R. Hamilton to LMS Directors, Griquatown, November 13, 1816. 31 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 78. 32 John Campbell, Travels in South Africa (London, 1815). The full extent of Khoesan missionary activity emerges most clearly from Campbell's unpublished journals, held at the National Library of South Africa, Cape Town. 33 LMS-SA, 5/2/F: "Minutes of the First Conference held by the African Missionaries at Graaff Reinet in August 1814"; V. C. Malherbe, "The Life and Times of Cupido Kakkerlak," Journal ofAfrican History 20 (1979): 365-79; Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 81, on Robert Moffat's campaign against Kakkerlak. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 447 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne carpenter from Essex, James Read, after Mothibi had finally capitulated. Read brought with him an unusually large group of people of varied ethnic origins, mostly Khoesan, including, more problematically, his own Khoekhoe wife, Elizabeth Valentyn, and his pregnant former mistress, a San woman, Sabina Pretorius, whom he claimed to have met by accident on the road. At least ten Khoesan men and six Khoesan women accompanied Read, all of whom were church members and some of whom were "zealous persons."34 It is indeed possible that the Khoesan of the Cape Colony saw this as a Khoesan mission to the Tswana, brokered by their kin among the Griqua. In any case, once Robert Moffat took over the Lattakoo station in 1821 from Read (disgraced for his adultery), he would fight successfully to diminish the influence of the Khoesan group from the Cape Colony, whom he then firmly wrote out of the history of the station. He dismissed several for immorality, despite the resistance, in which women played prominent roles, of members of the group. Moffat also found himself opposed by Griqua factions, many of whom resented his power-mongering presence.35 Before the late 1810s, the earliest LMS agents in southern Africa were not particularly good or even very enthusiastic apostles of capitalist cultural practices, mostly because they were so poor themselves and so looked-down-upon by many respectable members of colonial society. More than a few also tended to believe in dreams, to hear the personal voice of God, or to look for the imminent end of the world. Those missionaries who were closest in time to the Enlightenment, in sum, acted least like the bourgeois agents of respectability described by the Comaroffs as quintessential exemplars of the rationalizing project of modernity. The colonial unrespectability of early missionaries was compounded by the fact that perhaps a third of them married African women before 1817, while several were involved in sexual scandals. Others took high-profile political positions that were unpopular among settlers. The Comaroffs pick up the story as Moffat, in common with many of his fellows, was urgently trying to reclaim the moral high ground and to reinvent the mission as visibly respectable and as focused on "civilization." A lot of this is more about the internal history of the LMS than about African Christianity; we certainly in general need more of the latter and perhaps less of the former. Nonetheless, it argues for the importance of local detail, and for the centrality of fractures within as well as between groups. It also points forward to ways in which converts would later need to perform "civilization" and "respectability" in order to maneuver on the colonial stage, not solely because their consciousnesses had been colonized. From the start, tensions among evangelicals themselves were fueled by anxiety over the rapid removal of Christianity from the control of white missionaries. This tension was arguably innate to a type of evangelical Christianity based on textual interpretation and the notion of divine inspiration, as well as being the product of Tswana reconstruction of Christian forms. Certainly, missionaries soon lost control even of "orthodox" Christianity. Among the northern Tswana, Paul Landau has brilliantly documented the use of Christianity by junior royals to challenge existing authority in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, in ways that escaped 34 LMS-SA, 6/4/A: James Read to Joseph Hardcastle, Bethelsdorp, August 7, 1816. 35 See Schapera, ed., Apprenticeship at Kuruman. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 448 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh a series of rather peripheral white missionaries. Among the southern Tswana, Thlaping elites also exploited divisions among missionaries to their own political ends. In 1842, for example, Tswana elite men successfully appealed to LMS superintendent John Philip to fire missionary Holloway Helmore for excessive interference in congregational affairs, including deposing Mothibi's son as a deacon.36 Missionaries to the Tswana experienced other humiliations. The coherent Tswana group targeted by the mission decamped, to be replaced by a more motley group of refugees. The mission was battered by raids from various groups, could not protect its members, and was not successful at all until it started picking up displaced persons in the 1830s. A NUMBER OF QUESTIONS arise from this type of re-reading. At a macro level, the region was already turbulent and populations were mobile, so Christianity scarcely arrived as the harbinger of globalization in anything other than an ideological sense. This raises in turn the thorny and ultimately unanswerable question of whether Christianity would have had the capacity to colonize minds without the prior disruption of material conditions. We are back at the difficult issue of how determinative "culture" is by itself. Perhaps in the end, this rejigging of chronology strengthens the Comaroffs' fundamental argument about the inextricability of "culture" and material struggle. It does nonetheless pose all the more sharply the question of how Christianity-and religious innovation, more broadly defined- functioned in a frontier zone in a manner that was independent of the machinations of white missionaries.37 Also at the "macro" level, the Tswana were not entirely "local," nor were they unused to cultural difference. In a multi-lingual, multi-religious environment, were missionaries really needed to contextualize "Tswana custom"? Missionary papers record Mothibi making distinctions between !Kora, Tswana, and colonial Khoekhoe customs, for example. I would not want to deny the importance of local identity, or to exaggerate the degree of long-range contacts of the southern Tswana, in contrast to the remarkable global reach and global identity claims of the early missionary movement. There are issues of tremendous importance raised by that contrast. But it also seems important that there were other regional interlocutors who were of greater material importance initially to the Tswana than the Europeans, and with whom they already had the kind of cultural interchanges that might have permitted the type of self-consciousness about "Tswana" identity that the Comaroffs see as the fruit of the "long conversation." This is also a way of asking about what the southern African interior looked like before formal European colonialism and whether the communities of the region were really as settled as they appeared. There are echoes here of an older debate about whether the encounter with the "macrocosmic" claims of the "world religions" Christianity and Islam shattered the 36 Landau, Realm of the Word; Elbourne, Blood Ground. On Helmore's dismissal, see LMS-SA, 19/2/A: James Read to LMS Directors, Philipton, June 3, 1843. The LMS Directors overturned the dismissal and censured Philip. 37 An interesting point of contrast is provided by Janet Hodgson, "A Battle for Sacred Power: Christian Beginnings among the Xhosa," in Elphick and Davenport, Christianity in South Africa. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 449 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne "microcosm" of African localist religions, at a time when colonialism was shattering the microcosm of daily life. As Terence Ranger has argued, whatever the intellectual issues at stake, African societies, at least in the southern African interior, have to be recognized as also "macrocosmic" in the sense that they had long-range contacts, exchanged ideas over large swathes of territory (as the rapid spread of prophetic movements suggests), and rubbed up against a wide variety of different groups.38 The relative mobility of different communities was also a factor in breaking down localism. This type of approach, to my mind, decenters the European missionary-at least until the missionary came backed up by a colonial economy and a colonial army. The power exerted by the conditions of the "frontier zone" of the region is represented by the fact that even missionaries were compelled by material circumstances to take on features of African polities. The Comaroffs highlight the vision of Kuruman mission head and former gardener Robert Moffat, and his wife Mary, like that of many early nineteenth-century Nonconformist missionaries, as one of an unrealistic rural idyll, in which they sought to remake Africa in the image of a vanishing and imagined rural utopian Britain. One could, however, go further in considering the contradictions of Kuruman. Robert Moffat acted in many ways like an African leader as well as like a nostalgic Scot, and he needed to do so because of the material conditions of the frontier. In the 1820s, he proved unable to retain the allegiance of existing chiefs, for whom he was too clearly a competitor. As the refugee crisis accelerated, however, Moffat was able to gather together dispossessed people. The price of their admission was allegiance to the religion of the leader, since religion was used to rebuild communities. The currency of power was people. In similar ways, the control of women and their reproduction was important to the maintenance of the power of the patriarch, whether African chief or mission station head-Moffat even went so far, for example, as to attempt to discipline publicly Ann Hamilton, the wife of his colleague Robert Hamilton, for refusing to sleep with her husband.39 Moffat was more a part of the African frontier world than he might have liked to admit. A further critical point raised by this case study is that Africans transmitted Christianity more effectively than missionaries did. The centrality of Africans to the spread of Christianity means that much of the early history of the mission is unrecoverable. It is often unclear what kinds of Christianity were spread orally, for example. In other parts of southern Africa, prophetic figures emerged from time to time to use aspects of the Christian message in a context that suggests how quickly its language became unhinged from missionary guardianship. For example, Xhosa prophet and war hero Makanda Nxele (Makana), who led a Xhosa attack on the colony in 1819, had an earlier flirtation with the LMS; he was refused the right to work as a native agent when he insisted that there was a god for the white man and a god for the black man, and that he himself was related to Jesus Christ. The examples could be multiplied, as the Comaroffs would certainly agree. The lines 38 Terence Ranger, "The Local and the Global in Southern African Religious History," in Hefner, Conversion to Christianity, 65-98. 39 Karel Schoeman, A Thorn Bush That Grows in the Path: The Missionary Career of Ann Hamilton, 1815-1823 (Cape Town, 1995); LMS-SA, 8/3/B: Robert Moffat to LMS, Lattakoo, July 12, 1821. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 450 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh between orthodoxy as the missionaries perceived it and African prophetic innova- tion were fluid and could be crossed in both directions, explaining the anxiety of white missionaries to bring Christianity back under control. In contrast to the Comaroffs, who emphasize the orthodoxy of the Nonconformists (whom they see in rather stereotypical, indeed Victorianist, terms), I would contend that this anxiety was familiar from debates within the European churches as well; after all, Methodism had once been perceived from within the citadels of Anglican orthodoxy in ways similar to Nonconformist views of African ecstatic innovation.40 If in the early days of missionary activity, Christianity was never fully in the control of the white missionaries who had brought it and only became popular once it was spread mostly by Africans and then transformed in the process, what does this imply about how we might conceptualize the study of colonial missions? I have suggested in the past that the messy scenario I outline above, with its complications and its fudging across the fault lines, calls into question the utility at the micro level of a strict dialectical approach to the history of colonial Christianity. The ghost of French structuralist understandings of G. W. Hegel's master-slave dialectic seems to me to hover over and to constrain the first volume. In response, however, the Comaroffs argue in Volume 2 that I have too conventional an understanding of their view of dialectical processes. A dialectic is not a "formal, abstract, or strictly teleological movement through time and space," in a Hegelian sense. Rather, it is a "process of reciprocal determination; a process of material, social and cultural articulation-involving sentient human beings rather than abstract forces or structures."41 Colonialism is dialectical because it creates binary understandings of difference and depends on the idea of opposites; it is also presumably dialectical because colonial interaction shapes both the colonized and the colonizer in new ways. Returning to the issue at the end of Volume 2, the Comaroffs reiterate (although this seems to me a somewhat different take) that by "dialectics" they mean "the mutually transforming play of social forces whose outcome is neither linear nor simply overdetermined." Defined thus, they add, "it is hard to imagine how colonial history could be regarded as anything else."42 In a weak sense, this is undeniable. Furthermore, on this model, it may not matter that the early encounter between missionaries and Tswana was so much messier than a "dialectical" account would suggest. The Comaroffs' point is precisely that out of difference and mess colonialism created binary opposites. At the same time, the exact nature of this process is often hard to capture. It is interesting to hear John Comaroff raise, in a recently published transcribed conversation with Homi Bhabha, what he terms the question of theory related to "the old Manichean opposition between colonizer and colonized, those 'iteratively marked,' positionally conflated points of reference around which the human geography of empire is so widely imagined. How, other than purely by descriptive insistence, does one displace the crushing logic of binarism in terms of which 40 Among many possibilities, see Deborah Valenze, Prophetic Sons and Daughters: Female Preaching and Popular Religion in Industrial England (Princeton, N.J., 1985). 41 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 29. 42 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 410. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 451 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne colonial worlds are apprehended and narrated?"43 I think this is a genuine point of tension for the Comaroffs, and quite rightly for many others. Perhaps my own discomfort arises from the difficulty of defining who the agents of dialectic are. In the end, the Comaroffs are interested in doing a historical anthropology of colonialism, more than of religion in colonial contexts. In this optic, the fault line of interest is that between colonized and colonizer. Religious belief did not, however, adhere to that fault line, even though both colonized and colonizers mobilized religion to the ends of power struggle. Nor of course was Christianity itself static. At the same time, the very notion of ethnic difference was still in the process of being worked out more broadly well past the early era of industrialization; therefore it was incorporated differently into the views of colonial evangelists at different times. From the point of view of the Comaroffs' overall narrative structure, this leads us away from the Enlightenment and onto the terrain of more immediately nineteenth-century colonial concerns. On this model, colonial conquest and the need to maintain and justify white rule shaped the mid- nineteenth-century culture of white Christianity. The end was not contained in the beginning but formed by colonial processes. Be that as it may, it is instructive that the Khoesan themselves were not able indefinitely to maintain the interstitial status to which Christianity gave them some access. By the early 1850s, many living in the Cape Colony were forced to choose between the colonial binaries of "black" and "white," in the 1850-1853 frontier war in which many people of Khoesan descent rebelled to fight against the "white" colony, as "race" became the determinant of colonial identity.44 The example also underscores the importance of "black" and "white" as colonial binaries arguably of more importance than "English" and "Tswana." All this should not, however, lead us to read the late eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries in terms of the mid-nineteenth. There is a basic problem here that dogs the Comaroffs throughout the books. Christianity is both text and practice, and therefore difficult to pin down. Not only that, it also permits and contains a wide variety both of practices and of different interpretations of its central themes. As text, Christianity became a free-floating signifier. As a practice, it was fought over bitterly by those who wanted to benefit from it. It is therefore difficult to identify Christianity clearly with one side of a dialectical or even dialogic model. This is all the more problematic because it is hard to define Christianity clearly, other than by appeals to authority. There was considerable scope for Africans to reinvent Christianity even from the beginning of the mission described by the Comaroffs. In some ways, this is precisely the Comaroffs' point: the signs of Christianity were fought over by competing ethnic groups. The Comaroffs nonetheless cannot bring themselves to see acceptance of Christianity in its unadulterated mission form as anything other than a defeat for 43 Bhabha and Comaroff, "Speaking of Postcoloniality," 22. 44 Elbourne, Blood Ground, 345-76; Robert Ross, "The Kat River Rebellion and Khoikhoi Nationalism: The Fate of an Ethnic Identification," Kronos: Journal of Cape History/Tydskrif vir Kaaplandse Geskiedenis 24 (November 1997): 91-105. On the emergence of racial stratification more generally, see Clifton C. Crais, White Supremacy and Black Resistance in Pre-industrial South Africa: The Making of the Colonial Order in the Eastern Cape, 1770-1865 (Cambridge, 1992); Timothy Keegan, Colonial South Africa and the Origins of the Racial Order (Charlottesville, Va., 1996). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 452 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh African converts, who were thereby surrendering positions in the struggles over the colonization of consciousness. This position ultimately obscures complexity. EVENTUALLY, ONE MUST CONFRONT the type of question raised by Leon de Kock, about disciplinary conventions and the fetishization of the archive.45 De Kock argues that historians have spent too much time in their reaction to this wonderful book looking for factual flaws. To put the question in its boldest form, are the details really that essential to the overall project? Perhaps less tendentiously, what are the Comaroffs doing that goes beyond the reading of the words of colonists? The Comaroffs are important precisely because they move beyond words to decipher the gestures of people in the past. They put an anthropologist's emphasis on ritual and performance. They add thereby a crucial dimension to our reading of culture-bound historical archives. The Comaroffs' understanding of performance goes well beyond the staged performances of religious rites (although they acknowledge at the same time that people used the framework of religious ritual as a springboard for their own acting out of emotions and ideas). The missionaries are described as performing civilization, in the hope of educating the Tswana to adopt Western cultural practices through the power of display. In response, the Tswana performed noncompliance or acted out cultural bricolage. The tangible display of the body interests the Comaroffs, just as the material suffering of the colonized body that we readers know is to come provides a moral template for our reading of the early nineteenth century. The authors are particularly interested in space and the disposition of the body in space: their analyses frequently return, like the apartheid state itself, to issues of the control of the movement of African bodies.46 The Comaroffs are in some ways mistrustful of the self-interested and one-sided colonial text and find more solidity in the unspoken exchanges of bodily perfor- mance. It is this approach that both furnishes the greatest richness of the books and yet at the same time has excited unease in some interlocutors. If the evidence that remains of Tswana actions is mostly accounts of their physical activity, does that not place the reporter (the anthropologist, the historian, or even the reader) in the privileged position of interpreting Tswana actions, leaving the Tswana themselves rarely free to speak directly in their own voice? Is this even an accurate assessment of the nature of the historical record, or are there more extensive Tswana records? J. D. Y. Peel and Terence Ranger have both queried the absence of Tswana 45 De Kock, "For and Against the Comaroffs." 46 For example, Volume 2 tellingly argues that integral to the late nineteenth-century struggle over African labor was a further struggle over the "distribution of people in space and, concomitantly, their passage across the social landscape." This is a typical discussion of space that appropriately reflects the struggle of the apartheid state to control the physical body, just as slavery had earlier lent mastery of the body to the slaveowner. Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 203. Rikk van Dijk and Peter Pels, "Contested Authorities and the Politics of Perception: Deconstructing the Study of Religion in Africa," in Richard Werbner and Terence Ranger, eds., Postcolonial Identities in Africa (London, 1996), 245-70; Celestin Monga, The Anthropology of Anger: Civil Society and Democracy in Africa, Linda Fleck and Celestin Monga, trans. (Boulder, Colo., 1996), 112-15, on the "subversive and silent" nature of many African forms of dissent. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 453 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne narrative in Of Revelation and Revolution's first volume, for example.47 It seems unlikely that Christian converts did not leave a more extensive written record even in the early years of the mission or that community historical memory was not richer. The Comaroffs have responded that community historical narrative was not a genre espoused by the Tswana. They argue, furthermore, that the quest for "narrative" is elitist: it is "a short step from the stress on narrative to the history of elites, thence to elitist history."48 The issue remains uneasily unresolved. For Paul Landau, the Comaroffs themselves have a culturally constrained view of what constitutes "genuine narrative." They pay "little attention to genealogy, song, Tswana conversation, letters, political speech, tales, myth or church charters- because they are not 'genuine' narratives. Consequently Tswana people's ideas of fulfillment and transcendence do not show themselves in either volume."49 Even the Tswana intellectual and politician Sol Plaatje's great novel Mhudi, which draws on Tswana traditions about the difaqane, has been brought into the fray: for the Comaroffs, the fact that Plaatje himself claims that he could only gather material in fragments suggests that the southern Tswana indeed did not have a tradition of sustained historical narrative as late as the early twentieth century, even though Mhudi is more conventionally seen as a reflection at least to some extent of more sustained Tswana oral tradition.50 There is another critical debate at work in these discussions of agency and voice. The Comaroffs are very clear that missionary activity was part of the victimization of Africans. Much recent scholarship on southern African Christianity emphasizes instead the agency of Africans in using and reshaping Christianity to their own ends, as the focus has shifted away from missionaries and onto African Christians. In some ways, the Comaroffs want to restore a sense of moral indignation at the ways in which colonial missions did change the consciousness of Africans in a damaging fashion. Ironically, this may involve seeing people as victims who did not necessarily see themselves that way at the time-another issue of authorial voice. The Comaroffs' anger represents nonetheless an important strand of longstanding protest across the colonized world at the "colonization of the mind."51 It is impossible to deny that many Christian missionaries had a profoundly negative 47 J. D. Y. Peel, "For Who Hath Despised the Day of Small Things? Missionary Narratives and Historical Anthropology," Comparative Studies in Society and History 37, no. 3 (1995): 581-607; Terence Ranger, "No Missionary: No Exchange: No Story? Narrative in Southern Africa," unpublished paper read at All Souls College, Oxford, June 1992. 48 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 51. 49 Paul Landau, "Hegemony and History in Jean and John L. Comaroff's Of Revelation and Revolution," Africa 70, no. 3 (2000): 516. 50 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 46-47. 51 Steve Biko, I Write What I Like (1978), provides an eloquent locus classicus, as does Ezekiel Mphahlele, The African Image (London, 1962). Dickson A. Mungazi, The Mind of Black Africa (Westport, Conn., 1996), expresses typical anger, pp. 1-32. Greg Cuthbertson discusses Christian missions as a form of cultural violence in Charles Villa-Vicencio, ed., Theology and Violence: The South African Debate (Johannesburg, 1987). Sanneh, Translating the Message, emphasizes in contrast indigenous agency in the "translation" of Christianity from one culture to another. At a different end of the spectrum of debate might be those who see efforts to change the religious systems of indigenous peoples as a form (or as an element) of cultural genocide. A. Dirk Moses gives an eloquent overview of debates about genocide and cultural genocide: "Conceptual Blockages and Definitional Dilemmas in the 'Racial Century': Genocides of Indigenous Peoples and the Holocaust," Patterns of Prejudice 36, no. 4 (2002). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 454 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh impact in many areas of the world, not least when they gained (or were given) control of educational systems and thus had control over the formation of children.52 The fact that missionaries in various ways had such power was, however, almost invariably related to the expansion of the colonial state, not to the corrosive power of the message alone. Furthermore, as Peggy Brock has persuasively argued, missionary institutional structures affected the degree of control missionaries could exert over congregations, and these structures were affected by indigenous social arrangements as well as by state power.53 I would further contend, in ways there is not space to elaborate on fully here, that shame was a key element of colonial control. Mission education could and did reinforce this. At the same time, Christianity could also provide a language through which to reclaim dignity and deny the shaming process. I think it is important in sum to see Christianity as a language with many possible uses. Conversion, for example, fulfilled a wider and more flexible range of functions than is suggested by the Comaroffs' reduction of it to a symbolic field of struggle over capitalism. A reading that focuses too exclusively on Christianity as a language of cultural domination rather than a language with a multiplicity of possible meanings pays too much attention to the Western roots of Christianity and not enough to the multiple uses to which Africans very quickly put it. I make this comment in awareness of the extent to which the Comaroffs emphasize the need to explore African perspectives through every possible means, and the extent to which they clearly do this. However, conversion was even more of an empty signifier than the Comaroffs suggest, and some of these significations did not have a lot to do with rational capitalism. On the other hand, conversion was also an act, with attached rituals and beliefs, and this is important for understanding what the act meant in the immediate rather than long-term sense. Even if I am not completely at ease with a victimization model, I would want to add that these were and are enormously complicated processes. They had deep and often painful implications for many. This demands humility from any historian. Undergirding much of the above has been a historian's concern with chronology, which, while justified, cannot do full justice to the rich ferment of ideas in these remarkable books. The Comaroffs in fact comment on what they see as different disciplinary conventions and their inherent costs and benefits. They see real and longstanding differences, as they remark at the end of Volume 2, between the ideal type of a more conventional historian and the archetypal historical anthropologist: "differences between the ideographic and the nomothetic, between the effort to arrive at the fullest possible description of events in their infinite particularity and the desire to pick out general principles across time and space." The latter approach, they underscore, "demands a certain boldness of abstraction" and is "inherently risky."54 Although one would hope that historians are not as painstak- ingly antiquarian and abstraction-averse as this implies, there is some justice to the 52 A wonderfully instructive example of the ambiguities of Christian liberal control of the education system in South Africa, just before apartheid, is furnished by Shula Marks, ed., Not Either an Experimental Doll: The Separate Worlds of Three South African Women (London, 1985). 53 Peggy Brock, "Mission Encounters in the Colonial World: British Columbia and South-West Australia," Journal of Religious History 24, no. 2 (June 2000): 159-79. 54 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 411. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 455 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elboume comment, at least as it pertains to the Comaroffs' own work. The very manner in which they offer up a multitude of bold ideas, fizzing with possibility, also ensures that they offer a number of hostages to fortune. The Comaroffs are, for example, probably the most influential of recent scholars to argue for tight linkage between missionary activity, "modernity," "Enlighten- ment," and globalization. As Brian Stanley points out, this is also a question that has been much debated in the past few years by Christian theologians and mission theorists, with theologians paying particular attention to the damage done by the universalist truth claims of mission Christianity.55 More broadly, the Comaroffs are participating in a vast debate about modernity and postmodernity among social, political, and cultural theorists that it would be foolhardy to venture upon here. Their contribution is both important and vexed: important because they show the culturally constrained nature of claims to "modernity," vexed because despite everything they reify the truth claims of modernity and have too neat a view of the "Enlightenment," despite substantial historical debate on the utility of the concept. In so doing, they exaggerate the long-term influence of mission Christianity on the material subjugation of the Tswana, particularly by minimizing the impact of illiberal forces and overemphasizing cultural change. This could be true, however, and the significance of the Comaroffs' analysis of practice still be undimmed. The Comaroffs see "modernity" as "always historically constructed." It is in their view "an ideological formation in terms of which societies valorize their own practices by contrast to the specter of barbarism and other marks of negation."56 The Comaroffs link modernity to a view of the self as a rights-bearing atomistic individual, ultimately the "fully fledged bourgeois subject." They further associate modernity with a wide-ranging series of cultural and economic practices, including but not limited to dependence on a worldwide market, industrialization, the use of money, the use of "advanced" agricultural practices, the promotion of individuated space, and a sense of the body as private.57 It is part of the great richness of the Comaroffs' approach that they so fruitfully link cultural and economic practices, refusing to prioritize one over the other. At the same time, this view of modernity is slippery-and this is both its richness and an occasional source of frustration. The Comaroffs move between presenting the truth claims of modernity-its "text," if one likes-and the concrete material practices that advocates saw as characterizing the modern. The authors' desire not to take the truth claims of missionaries at face value make it difficult for them to spell out what, if any, were the irreducible material practices that defined modernity. If there weren't any, however, what was the material force behind the cultural claims and practices of missionaries? Yet it is arguable that at least some of what the Comaroffs identify as the 55 Brian Stanley, "Christian Missions and the Enlightenment: A Reevaluation," in Stanley, ed., Christian Missions and the Enlightenment (Grand Rapids, Mich., 2001), 1-2. Stanley points to David Bosch's Transforming Mission: Paradigm Shifts in Theology of Mission (Maryknoll, N.Y., 1991) as a seminal text for Christian theologians of mission in a postmodern context. 56 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 32. 57 A particularly influential figure for the Comaroffs' reading of the creation of the modern self in Volume 2 is Charles Taylor, whose Sources of the Self is a seminal text for their work. Taylor is of course a Christian Hegelian, whose view of the emergence of the modern self is certainly influenced by Hegelian dialectics, in however inexplicit a fashion. Sources of the Self: The Making of the Modem Identity (Cambridge, 1989). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 456 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh intellectual aspects of modernity are primarily identifiable with the truth claims of liberalism, and that the Comaroffs link these in turn to neoliberalism. There are echoes here of the great debates between radical and liberal historians in 1970s and 1980s South Africa, split over the origins of apartheid.58 For the "radical" school, liberalism, in both its ideological and economic sense, contributed to the economic domination that was at the root of apartheid. Radical historians argued that late nineteenth-century British capitalism precipitated and anticipated many features of South African society under apartheid, just as the Comaroffs here blame nine- teenth-century British liberal ideas about such things as money, markets, the individuated self, and the primacy of certain gender roles for the mental prepara- tion of the Tswana for labor oppression. Indeed, in their 2000 article "Millennial Capitalism: First Thoughts on a Second Coming," the Comaroffs explicitly link what they term the "Age of Revolution" (1789-1848) to the current "Age of Millennial Capitalism" with their similar anxieties and ontological challenges.59 This article makes explicit the magical, mystical elements of neoliberalism, and its culturally constrained forms, in contrast to neoliberals' claims to rationality and access to universal truth, just as Of Revelation and Revolution describes culturally constructed views of "modernity" and a "modern" economy. This is very helpful. Nonetheless, I think it would also be useful in Of Revelation and Revolution to be more explicit about actual intellectual debates among and between people: to have more ideology in places and less hegemony. The argument made by many, that early twentieth-century white liberals in practice came to support racist segregationist policies, while in ideological terms liberalism's support of the free market economy and nonviolent political action left it with little space to mobilize opposition to apartheid, all adds up to a trenchant and at least partially justified critique. By leaving out of the picture the intellectual shifts in liberalism (and among the opponents of liberalism) on the ground in the nineteenth century (and implicitly in the twentieth), however, the Comaroffs, like other authors, conflate several ills into one. Disciplinary specialists might want to throw further darts at the Comaroffs' narrative superstructure. Must industrialization and by implication modernity really begin in 1789? This is very French. What might be the impact of the questioning by economists of the linearity and suddenness of industrialization in Britain, which now looks more like an extended messy process than a "revolution" within neat chronological parameters? What difference does it make that the evangelical movement had many roots in seventeenth and eighteenth-century continental pietism? If Protestantism is the necessary condition of capitalism, where does this leave Catholic countries (not least France)? The point I want to close on is, however, that of tragedy. If there is, as I have suggested, an implicit narrative of origins that runs throughout Of Revelation and Revolution and lends the work its moral passion, this is not, for all that, a straightforward linear narrative of beginnings and ends. Rather, it is marked by 58 Christopher Saunders, The Making of the South African Past: Major Historians on Race and Class (Cape Town, 1988), describes the liberal/radical split. 59 Jean Comaroff and John L. Comaroff, "Millennial Capitalism: First Thoughts on a Second Coming," Public Culture 12, no. 2 (2000): 334. This issue has been reprinted as Comaroff and Comaroff, eds., Millennial Capitalism and the Culture of Neoliberalism (Durham, N.C., 2001). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 457 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] 458 Elizabeth Elbourne tragic irony and unexpected plot twists. The Nonconformist missionaries who labored so intensely to change the daily lives of Africans in order to induct them into the "modern" economy did not foresee the devastating consequences of that economy for the Tswana peasantry (as might be said of some of the missionaries' modern counterparts, development workers). At the same time, the Comaroffs write as though missionaries inducted the Tswana into the global market and colonized their consciousness in a way that made their engagement more likely. It seems to me just as possible that the global market and related economic coercion came crashing into the lives and consciousness of the Tswana in a way about which they could do little, particularly as their contact was frequently mediated by coercive legislation on the part of the colonial state.60 Missionaries reflected the efforts of other Westerners to moralize the market: to see it as a force for moral good. In this, they shared the ambiguities (and guilty conscience?) of nineteenth-century liberalism. It does not take a great leap of the imagination to find contemporary parallels in the neoliberal discourse, and of course the Comaroffs are right that this putatively universalist creed contains deeply embedded culturally specific assumptions, as did nineteenth-century Anglo- American liberalism itself.61 If nonetheless market expansion is relatively inevita- ble, then is it not appropriate to ask on what terms this expansion might be the most moral? Or is the most appropriate response full-fledged resistance? Must the global marketplace necessarily be bad, on average, for Africa? From a somewhat different point on the ideological spectrum, one might also ask whether in fact Africa is incorporated into the global market on the equal terms supposedly demanded by neoliberal economics. These are clearly issues beyond the scope of this article, but not without historical parallels. In late nineteenth and early twentieth-century terms, the Tswana, it could be argued, were crowded out of an agricultural market in which many were making profits and farming more effectively than whites, in fact, in order to favor white farmers artificially and in order to bolster labor for the mines, again through "artificial" restraints on movement, through the theft of land, through racially targeted taxation, and through coercive legislation. This antici- pated many of the later strategies of apartheid.62 It is not as clear to me as it is to the Comaroffs that the questions some missionaries and Africans were asking about the possibility of a just economy were not the right ones, even if the culturally constrained answers they gave were so obviously, hopelessly wrong. I do not have answers to these questions either-merely some sympathy with the misguided quest for certainty in a rapidly changing, brutal, and deeply uncertain economic universe. 60 This is a point also made by Landau, "Hegemony and History." 61 Uday Mehta, Liberalism and Empire: A Study in Nineteenth-Century British Liberal Thought (Chicago, 1999); Mehta, "Liberal Strategies of Exclusion," in Stoler and Cooper, Tensions of Empire, 59-86. 62 Ted Matsetela, "The Life Story of Mma-Pooe: Aspects of Sharecropping and Proletarianization in the Northern Orange Free State 1890-1930," in Shula Marks and Richard Rathbone, eds., Industrialization and Social Change in South Africa (New York, 1982), 212-37; Charles Van Onselen, The Seed Is Mine: The Life of Kas Maine, a South African Sharecropper, 1894-1985 (Cape Town, 1996). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh I HAVE SUGGESTED THROUGHOUT THIS ESSAY that the Comaroffs present nineteenth- century missionaries as fairly powerful figures, able to effect changes in the consciousness of Tswana interlocutors, despite the resistance of many. In contrast, I see Christianity as important but, with some important exceptions, not necessarily white missionaries themselves. I also suggest that the linkages between political and cultural colonialism are often unclear in Of Revelation and Revolution, and that the role of "cultural colonialism" is overdetermined. If it is possible to guess about such counterfactuals, I suspect that at least some of the missionaries whose work has been scrutinized by the Comaroffs would ironically have preferred the Comaroffs' account of their activities to mine, however doubtless upset they would have been at the implication that their preaching laid the groundwork for the Tswana's entrapment within enslaving capitalist systems. But the Comaroffs do give the missionaries credit for a coherent, rationalizing, globalizing system that taught one universal truth. They also recognize the missionaries' own belief that they might instill into their converts the necessary principles of "civilization" to transform totally their supposedly primitive economies and to move them rapidly up the scale of human development toward settled commercial societies. My own interpretation, while recognizing the tremendous importance of the universalizing project as a mode of domination, calls into question the capacity of Christianity to convey as effectively as it would have liked a message of unifying orthodoxy, or indeed the overall ability of missionaries to accomplish their objectives. From the very beginning of the activity of Christians in Africa, as elsewhere in the world, Christianity was out of control, unorthodox, and an available subject for reinter- pretation in light of the needs of its interlocutors. Ironically, in sum, it is not always wise to take missionaries at their word. Elizabeth Elbourne is an associate professor in the Department of History at McGill University, where she teaches British and South African history. She is also currently a visiting fellow in the History Program of the Research School of Social Sciences, Australian National University. Her publications include Blood Ground: Colonialism, Missions and the Contest for Christianity in the Cape Colony and Britain, 1799-1853 (2002), as well as various articles, most recently "Domesticity and Disposession: British Ideologies of 'Home' and the Primitive at Work in the Early Nineteenth-Century Cape," in Wendy Woodward, Patricia Hayes, and Gary Minkley, eds., Deep Histories: Gender and Colonialism in Southern Africa (2002). She earned her D.Phil. in 1992 from the University of Oxford, under the supervision of Terence Ranger. Her major fields of interest include colonialism, gender, and religion, especially the early nineteenth- century British white settler empire and southern Africa. Her current work in progress explores the creation of networks around the idea of being "aborig- inal" in the early nineteenth-century British empire, and is focusing on links between New South Wales, the Cape Colony, New Zealand, and Canadian colonies as well as on activists in Great Britain. She is also writing on liberalism and Khoekhoe citizenship at the Cape. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 459 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/533242

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522214
Date: 04 2008
Author(s): Reynolds, Thomas E.
Abstract: Theorizing for theory’s sake certainly has its place, and not every book needs to be focused on practical issues. Nonetheless, even the most gymnastic theoretician needs some grounding connection to relevant cases. Reynolds is profoundly uninterested in this level of analysis. While he flies through the theoretical air with great speed in The Broken Whole, it is unclear whether the book can make any sort of stable or decisive landing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/587599

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 589491
2008
Author(s): Stewart Garrett
Abstract: Ibid., p. 111. Even Riffaterre's approach to the structuring unsaid of textual writing can be seen to represent on its own terms a shift from the ontology of narrative toward its epistemology at the level of form rather than content. By the deliberate provocation of his title, his semiotic narratology is interested not just in the structural essence of fiction as art but in its specific truth:a story's immanent signifying patterns in their subtextual disclosure.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/589488

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522216
Date: 10 2008
Author(s): Balsamo Gian
Abstract: Nussbaum, Upheavals of Thought, 590.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/589948

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 592372
Date: 01 2009
Author(s): Miller Richard B.
Abstract: Anscombe, “The Justice of the Present War Examined,” 81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/592359

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 596101
Date: 04 2009
Author(s): Schweiker William
Abstract: I conclude, then, that the task of theological ethics and, more broadly, the humanities and, if I can be bold, more broadly still the university itself is to examine carefully and critically and from multiple perspectives—including the religions—what it means to be and to live as responsible human beings within the vulnerabilities and complexities of forms of life. When we within our several disciplines respond to this task with all the vitality and resources at our disposal, then, I believe, knowledge will indeed grow from more to more, and life will be increased without the illusions of power or servitude to the tyranny of idols.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/596069

Journal Title: Isis
Publisher: State University of New York Press
Issue: 597753
Date: 12 2007
Author(s): Zimmerman Virginia
Abstract: Excavating Victoriansbrings out very clearly the discomfort the newly discovered vast expanse of geological time gave the Victorians and examines some of the writings that helped shape responses to it. Though the book may not be of particular relevance to the historian focusing closely on Victorian geology or archaeology, for the historian of science who examines wider cultural or literary phenomena it is an important guide to the stimulus that the writings of geologists and archaeologists gave other mid-Victorian writers. Nevertheless, the specialist or narrowly focused historian of science will probably find it frustrating rather than helpful, since the overviews of Victorian geology and archaeology are brief and there are distracting errors, such as the attribution of theNinth Bridgewater Treatiseto William Buckland rather than to Charles Babbage (p. 18). The chapters on Tennyson and Dickens are both interesting and illuminating, although a reader accustomed to historical argument and with limited knowledge of the techniques of literary criticism may find them faintly bewildering in places. Nonetheless, it is in this part of the analysis that the work provides valuable guidance to the historian of science.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/597725

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: Éditions du Cerf
Issue: 598752
Date: 3 2006
Author(s): Eades Caroline
Abstract: Readers without solid background knowledge of French film and colonial history may have some difficulty navigating through Eades's tightly packed, allusive prose, especially since no index of any kind is provided. This absence is difficult to understand in a work of serious scholarship aimed at academic readers, as is the press's decision to invest in numerous glossy still‐frame illustrations that add nothing substantive to the analysis. However, the extensive, thematically organized filmographies and bibliographies that conclude the volume should prove very useful to all readers by providing a starting point for further reading and research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/598731

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 598771
Date: 8 2009
Author(s): Andrew Dudley
Abstract: See Andrew, “Time Zones and Jetlag: The Flows and Phases of World Cinema,” in World Cinemas,Transnational Perspectives, ed. Natasa Durovicová and Kathleen Newman (forthcoming).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/599587

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 598689
Date: 07 2009
Author(s): Ricoeur, Paul
Abstract: In providing clarification of previous works, Reflections on the Justis exceptionally helpful. Of particular interest in this volume is the paradoxical nature of authority—What is authority? How is it legitimated? Is it claimed or granted?—the existence of vulnerability and passivity within autonomy and initiative, and the relationship between moral ideals and historical manifestation, questions that exist more on the margins ofOneself as Another. Those interested in Ricoeur’s religious thought will find little of direct interest here. Those who see a deep connection between his moral philosophy and his philosophy of religion will find some confirmation, but there are other places where the connections are more explicitly manifest.Reflections on the Justis best approached as a companion volume to earlier philosophical works, certainlyThe Justbut perhaps more importantlyOneself as Another. As such, it holds an important place in Ricoeur’s oeuvre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/600278

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 598689
Date: 07 2009
Author(s): Mrozik, Susanne
Abstract: This second, more normative dimension of Mrozik’s project opens up some challenging questions. If it is the case, as she suggests, that a sympathetic reading of the Compendium of Trainingcan provide valuable intellectual resources for contemporary ethical reflection, it remains unclear to me how our engagement with this text should proceed, given the significant disparities in cosmological assumptions (e.g., karmic causation and rebirth) and forms of practice that separate Mrozik’s contemporary readers from the text’s original audience. The text, moreover, appears less concerned with advancing particular truth claims than with creating a distinctive kind of religious subjectivity through ascetic and ritualized practice. Can we assess the value of the text’s ethical ideals apart from the forms of discipline and practice with which they were linked in medieval India? IfVirtuous Bodiesleaves such questions open to further exploration and analysis, its nuanced reading of theCompendium of Trainingbrings into sharper focus the centrality of human embodiment in South Asian Buddhist religious discourses and encourages us to reflect deeply on its implications for our own ethical inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/600285

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 603531
Date: 10 2009
Author(s): Stokes Christopher
Abstract: Coleridge, Shorter Works, 2:1118–19.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/600876

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 605587
Date: 6 2010
Author(s): Coleman Charly
Abstract: Ibid., 1:11–12, 2:443–49, quote on 1:12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/651614

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 651998
Date: 07 2010
Author(s): Kitts Margo
Abstract: Johann Huizinga, Homo Ludens: A Study of the Play‐Element in Culture(Boston: Beacon, 1950); Adolf E. Jensen,Myth and Cult among Primitive Peoples, trans. Marianna Tax Choldin and Wolfgang Weissleder (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1963); Pierre Smith, “Aspects of the Organization of Rites,” inBetween Belief and Transgression: Structuralist Essays in Religion, History and Myth, ed. Michael Izard and Pierre Smith and trans. John Leavitt (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1979), 103–28.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/651708

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 651999
Date: 10 2010
Author(s): Walter Gregory
Abstract: For instance, Hans Urs von Balthasar’s provocative account of the Eucharist: Hans Urs von Balthasar, Theodramatik(Einselden: Johannes, 1980), 3:363–78. Von Balthasar’s use of dramatic conceptuality seems to satisfy these demands by offering the Eucharist as a phenomenon that is surprising and free yet deeply imbedded within the economy of creation as a drama. Also of significance would be Bernd Wannenwetsch,Political Worship: Ethics for Christian Citizens, trans. Margaret Kohl (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/654823

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 655202
Date: 8 2010
Author(s): Hammerschlag Sarah
Abstract: Michaël Lévinas refers here to Blanchot's political activities relating to the Algerian war. Unlike Lévinas who always considered De Gaulle a war hero, Blanchot saw in him the reappearance of fascist leadership. In September 1960 Blanchot was one of the initial drafters and signers of the “Manifeste de 121,” a document articulating its support of those who were being prosecuted for aiding and abbetting the FLN (Le Front de Libération Nationale).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/655206

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 655202
Date: 8 2010
Author(s): Hammerschlag Sarah
Abstract: Thanks to Clark Gilpin for helping me to see this double displacement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/655207

Journal Title: Isis
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 652685
Date: 9 2010
Author(s): Bono James J.
Abstract: For an approach to the issues raised by this Focus section see James J. Bono, “Perception, Living Matter, Cognitive Systems, Immune Networks: A Whiteheadian Future for Science Studies,” Configurations, 2005,13:135–181.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/655792

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 653501
Date: 08 2010
Author(s): Schildgen Brenda Deen
Abstract: Guy Guldentops, “The Sagacity of Bees: An Aristotelian Topos in Thirteenth-Century Philosophy,” in Steel, Guldentops, and Beullens, Aristotle's Animals, 296.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/656448

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 656725
Date: 01 01, 2011
Author(s): Pranger Burcht
Abstract: Augustine, Confessiones13.38.53; Chadwick, 305.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/656607

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 656725
Date: 01 01, 2011
Author(s): Thistleton Anthony C.
Abstract: These criticisms and oversights notwithstanding, there are many redeeming aspects to the book. Insofar as hermeneutics and exegesis are essential for any understanding of religious texts and traditions, Thistleton's work is a good way to be introduced to a complex history, the thorny debates, and the diverse approaches that have come to constitute its history and development. And the copious references that are made throughout and at the end of each chapter will enable readers to probe more deeply into a thinker, subject, or historical period of interest to them.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/659287

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 659348
Date: 4 2011
Author(s): Landy Joshua
Abstract: It is true, of course, that we have a much harder time postulating an author for Adaptation—that is, working out what an “ideal” Kaufman would have wanted the overall effect of his film to be—than postulating an author for the average Hollywood movie. Still, it is surely not the case thatAdaptation“undermines the concept of the author as a unifying origin and legitimation,” as Karen Diehl claims (Karen Diehl, “Once upon an Adaptation: Traces of the Authorial on Film,” inBooks in Motion: Adaptation, Intertextuality, Authorship, ed. Mireia Aragay [Amsterdam, 2005], p. 100). It may be harder to know what Kaufman is up to than what James Cameron (say) is up to, but Kaufman is clearly up tosomething, and the film bears if anything a more powerful stamp of an original vision than that average movie we find easier to read. In fact,Adaptationhas only solidified Kaufman's reputation as a filmmaker with an idiosyncratic and internally consistent way of seeing the world. (Although cinema is a collaborative enterprise, it is reasonable to imagine Spike Jonze and company collectively seeking to realize Kaufman's design.) Far from putting inherited notions of authorship into question, then, it has comfortably positioned Kaufman as the “unifying origin” of his various works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/659355

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 660269
Date: 08 2011
Author(s): Guenther Genevieve
Abstract: For the original argument that early modern drama evacuated spiritual forms of their content, see Stephen Greenblatt, “Shakespeare and the Exorcists,” in Shakespearean Negotiations: The Circulation of Social Energy in Renaissance England(Berkeley: University of California Press, 1988), 94–128.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/662147

Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 662056
Date: 01 01, 2012
Author(s): Bowman Sharon
Abstract: In sum, this is one of the most important books on selves or the practical side of personhood in the last decade. It is also well written; the particular arguments are virtually always clear, and it is not too hard to keep track of their role within in the larger argument of the book. Some portions rise to an almost literary style and provide a rich survey of key ideas in twentieth-century French philosophy, while others engage quite originally with scholarship in moral psychology and theories of self-knowledge that will be more familiar to analytic readers. This work also complements the more detailed ethical theory on Larmore’s other books. Despite its relative inattention to volitional aspects of practical identity, and some questionable moves in the critique of authenticity, then, this work is still highly recommended.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/663580

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 665386
Date: 10 01, 2012
Author(s): Walton Heather,
Abstract: The cultural and social sciences are welcome to examine and critique theology and Christian practice, and theology can profitably learn from these studies, but the studies themselves are not theology. To be theology, even in an interdisciplinary sense, the work must become constructive and speak to the religiousthought and practice of specific communities or faith traditions. In any given community, theology can become a displaced language in need of renewal, but theology can also uncover the displaced or implicit religion within the seemingly secular. To do this well, theology must remain in critical tension with the cultural sciences, including literature. The result may well be deconstructive, but such radical critique is necessary for any living tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/668266

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 669643
Date: 05 01, 2013
Author(s): Vásquez Manuel A.
Abstract: In sum: while it has it flaws, this book is one of the most comprehensive and up-to-date surveys of the field of theories of religion around. It is worth the cover price for that alone, which makes it definitely recommendable. Those who want to learn about the current state of theory, especially if they tend in the realist direction, will find this book very useful. Constructivists acquainted with theory will likely find it less so.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/669654

Journal Title: Journal of Near Eastern Studies
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 671448
Date: 10 01, 2013
Author(s): Feder Yitzhaq
Abstract: For a different view on the function of conceptual blending, cf. E. G. Slingerland, “Conceptual Blending, Somatic Marking and Normativity: A Case Example from Ancient Chinese,” Cognitive Linguistics16 (2005): 557–84.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/671434

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 668652
Date: 10 01, 2013
Author(s): Csordas Thomas
Abstract: Pablo Wright observes that while I leave behind Geertz’s concept of a cultural system with respect to morality, I retain the Geertzian concern with symbols and meaning. I would not dispute Wright’s statement that meaning is the master concept on a methodological level prior to the substantive issue of evil but would stress that in addition to idiom, code, practice, and symbol, experience must figure into a comprehensive account. Wright’s evocative references to “moral installation in the world” (one might consider terms like investment, suffusion, and tonality, as well as installation) and morality as a “practiced ontology in the micropolitics of social life” deserve further elaboration. Wright endorses a pluralized notion of moralities, but I reiterate that even more important is an adjectival sense of moral rather than the nominal morality. Like Parkin, Wright poses the question of how to reintroduce the ethnographically salient notions of cosmological and radical evil once evil is first construed as a human and intersubjective phenomenon. The answer is to ask how these dimensions come into play in the experiential immediacy of social life, for example, how a cosmological battle between angels and devils is experienced concretely on the human scale. Finally, he suggests that concepts of power from Otto and the shadow from Jung may be alternatives to the notion of evil, though I rejoin that they are just as much in need of critique with respect to Christian overtones. They may be valuable for the study of morality but are not suitable replacements for evil in the sense for which I have argued.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/672210

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 670329
Date: 07 01, 2013
Author(s): Fisher Cass
Abstract: Despite these caveats, Contemplative Nationis highly recommended for scholars of Jewish studies, religious studies, philosophy, and theology. The book is an excellent example of how to apply hermeneutical theories to the study of Judaism, how to bridge the gap between continental philosophy and analytic philosophy, and how to expand the scope of Jewish studies by appreciating the nature of theological discourse. While Judaica scholars could use the book in university-level courses, and rabbis could apply its approach to synagogue life, the claim that “Israel” is a “contemplative nation” will hardly resonate with most Jews today. It is very doubtful that the book could “guide the way for [the] future” of the Jewish people’s survival (226), precisely because Jews today are overwhelmingly secular, and the culture in which Jews live, both in Israel and in the Diaspora, is anti-intellectual and antitheological. Furthermore, if Fisher is so keen on Philo, he should have also reminded his readers of the fate of Philo’s enterprise: it was no coincidence that Philo became one of the Church Fathers and that his exegetical/hermeneutical project was not adopted by the tradition that became normative Judaism. When “Israel” denotes a nation of divine contemplators, “carnal Israel” (namely “Israel” as a historical, cultural, and ethnic entity) is marginalized, denigrated, and persecuted. It is true that Jewish religious life is theological, but being Jewish cannot be reduced to contemplating God.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/672230

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673367
Date: 02 01, 2014
Author(s): Lehnhof Kent R.
Abstract: Critchley uses the term in a discussion of Levinas and politics. Noting that government tends to become tyrannical when left to itself, Critchley commends the way Levinas’s ethical ideas can cultivate forms of “dissensual emancipatory praxis” that “work against the consensual idyll of the state, not in order to do away with the state or consensus, but to bring about its endless betterment” (“Five Problems in Levinas’s View of Politics,” 183).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/673478

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 674410
Date: 02 01, 2014
Author(s): Rüpke Jörg
Abstract: See the analysis of Metzger ( Religion, Geschichte, Nation). For the modern spread of the paradigm, see Leigh E. Schmidt, “A History of All Religions,”Journal of the Early Republic24 (2004): 327–34.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/674241

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673750
Date: 08 01, 2014
Author(s): Hequembourg Stephen
Abstract: See George Herbert, “The Forerunners” and “Jordan (I),” in George Herbert: The Complete English Poems, ed. John Tobin (New York: Penguin, 2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/676498

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 677726
Date: 10 01, 2014
Author(s): Urbaniak Jakub
Abstract: Depoortere, Badiou and Theology, 123–24.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/677288

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673747
Date: 03 01, 2014
Abstract: Žižek, Slavoj. Demanding the Impossible. Cambridge: Polity Press, 2013. $14.95 (paper). 160 pp.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/677379

Journal Title: Renaissance Drama
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673118
Date: 09 01, 2014
Author(s): Huth Kimberly
Abstract: Wayne C. Booth, “Metaphor as Rhetoric: The Problem of Evaluation,” in Sacks, On Metaphor, 61.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/678121

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 527516
Date: 4 2005
Author(s): Popkin Jeremy D.
Abstract: This book is a very original and important contribution to both the study of autobiography and that of historiography. In addition to his analysis of autobiographies of historians, Popkin gives new insights about the relationship between narrative and history. Maybe every historian should write an autobiography at some stage as an essential step in his or her professional development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/ahr.111.2.429

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: Brill
Issue: 526084
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Mooij J. J. A.
Abstract: Closely related to the philosophical problem of consciousness of time was the question of the meaning of time and duration in psychology and in literature. Although Mooij mentions William James's notion of “specious present” in passing, he fails to explicate James's perception of time, which attempted to provide an empiricist account of our temporal concepts through the influence of John Locke (p. 197). Apart from this caveat, the book's strength lies in its perceptiveness and breadth of interpretation of the history of the concept of time. Mooij's accuracy in comprehending and in transmitting the essence of such difficult and complicated philosophies is remarkable.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/ahr.111.4.1130

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Issue: 526084
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Gutterman David S.
Abstract: Ultimately it is at times unclear what is gained in making these comparisons or if such analysis “enhances our understanding of the relationship between religious narratives and politics” (p. 92). What precisely is revealed in grouping these movements together, other than that political crisis invites prophetic criticism? Gutterman carefully unpacks the readings of shared Biblical texts, and he skillfully details contextual and interpretative differences. But one wishes he had gone beyond these descriptive endeavors to construct a more nuanced account of the relationship between religion and politics and, more importantly, of the specifically religious grounds of the activism he examines. While Gutterman can be theoretically deft—in exploring the relation between narrative and politics (p. 21) or garden/wilderness metaphors (p. 47)—he is not fully engaged with the literature on political religion, often citing unrepresentative figures like William Connolly or Stephen Carter. He is a sharp writer with an eye for interesting problems and material. I applaud his engagement with important issues and also the ambition of his thinking. But his central categories require further explication, and this book speaks to the need for more conversations across disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/ahr.111.4.1221

Journal Title: The Journal of Politics
Publisher: University of Missouri Press
Issue: jpolitics.68.issue-2
Date: 05 2004
Author(s): Eubanks Cecil
Abstract: Both Faith and PhilosophyandEric Voegelin's Dialogues with the Postmodernsilluminate and challenge the assumptions in Voegelin's philosophy and lead readers in new directions for Voegelinian scholarship. They are indispensable readings for students of political philosophy in their examination of transcendence, philosophy, and politics. By seeing Voegelin as a postmodern thinker and by showing his exchange with Strauss, both of these books provide us with a broader context to understand Voegelin's political philosophy. As part of the University of Missouri Press' new series, bothFaith and PhilosophyandEric Voegelin's Dialogues with the Postmodernsprovide intellectually provocative and serious-minded secondary works on Eric Voegelin and his ultimate place in political philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1111/j.1468-2508.2006.00420_20.x

Journal Title: Contagion: Journal of Violence, Mimesis, and Culture
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Issue: contagion.21.issue-2014
2014
Author(s): Schwager‡ Raymund
Abstract: Schwager's own (?) translation from: Horstmann, Das Untier, 100.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/contagion.21.2014.0029

Journal Title: CR: The New Centennial Review
Publisher: Galaxia-Gutemberg
Issue: crnewcentrevi.14.issue-3
Date: 12 2007
Author(s): Valéry Paul
Abstract: Benjamin also notes: “Every present day is determined by the images that are synchronic with it: each ‘now’ is the now of a particular recognizability. In it, truth is charged to the bursting point with time. (This point of explosion, and nothing else, is the death of the intentio, which thus coincides with the birth of authentic historical time, the time of truth.) It is not that what is past casts its light on what is present, or what is present its light on what is past; rather, image is that wherein what has been comes together in a flash with the now to form a constellation” (2002, N3,1). The two great related demands made by T. S. Eliot in “Tradition and the Individual Talent” will also be recalled here: his call for the exercise of the “historical sense” as a juxtaposition of significant events from discontinuous times, which in turn produces an “impersonal” (nonintentional) effect. These demands define the representation of history in works such asThe Waste Landand Pound’s early cantos.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/crnewcentrevi.14.3.0001

Journal Title: QED: A Journal in GLBTQ Worldmaking
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Issue: qed.1.issue-1
Date: 4 2014
Author(s): Wight Jules
Abstract: James Poniewozik, “When Did Chelsea Manning Become Chelsea Manning?” Time, August 28, 2013,http://entertainment.time.com/2013/08/28/when-did-chelsea-manning-become-chelsea-manning/.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/qed.1.1.0118

Journal Title: Classical Antiquity
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ca.2013.32.issue-2
Date: 10 2013
Abstract: This paper seeks to bridge two aspects of Fronto's letters, erotics and rhetoric, by demonstrating that Fronto himself merges the two areas in his discourse with Marcus Aurelius about their relationship. Whereas some letters suggest an unequal relationship based on power, others encourage the identification of Fronto with Marcus. Fronto achieves this identification by structuring their relationship itself as a metaphor in which he and Marcus are equated and linked by epistolary bonds. I close by discussing why the epistolary genre in particular is an apt site for the merger of metaphor and love.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ca.2013.32.2.406

Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jams.2002.55.issue-3
Date: 12 2002
Author(s): Calcagno Mauro
Abstract: Conventional views of text/music relationships in early Italian opera focus on the imitation of affections. But by dealing exclusively with the referential meanings of texts (e.g., emotions, images, and concepts) these views overlook an important aspect of music's interaction with language. In opera, music also imitates language's contextual and communicative functions—i.e., discourse, as studied today by the subfield of linguistics called pragmatics. In his operas Monteverdi fully realized Peri's ideal of “imitating in song a person speaking” (“imitar col canto chi parla”) by musically emphasizing those context-dependent meanings that emerge especially in ordinary language and that are prominent in dramatic texts, as opposed to poetry and prose. Such meanings are manifest whenever words such as “I,” “here,” and “now” appear— words called “deictics”—with the function of situating the speaker/singer's utterances in a specific time and place. Monteverdi highlights deictics through melodic and rhythmic emphases, repetition, shifts of meter, style, and harmony, as part of a strategy to create a musical language suited to opera as a genre and to singers as actors. In Il ritorno d'Ulisse in patriaandL'incoronazione di Poppea, this strategy serves large-scale dramaturgical aims with respect to the relationships among space, time, and character identity, highlighting issues also discussed within the contemporary intellectual context.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jams.2002.55.3.383

Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jams.2004.57.issue-3
Date: February 2005
Author(s): Higgins Paula
Abstract: Within the theoretical framework of Roland Barthes's writings on myth and ideology, this essay seeks to expose the historical legitimation project through which the mythmaking, universalizing rhetoric of musical genius that has long surrounded the figure of Ludwig van Beethoven came to infiltrate scholarship on Josquin des Prez, culminating in his late twentieth-century apotheosis. Contextualizing the composer's reception history with respect to the debates between Joseph Kerman and Edward Lowinsky in 1965 and especially the 1971 Josquin Festival-Conference, the author suggests that the ideological refashioning of Josquin in the image of Beethoven has simultaneously shaped and derailed the intellectual trajectory of early music scholarship in the past thirty years. By privileging a discourse of musical genius in the service of which, among other concerns, the canon of works attributed to the composer is being decimated beyond historical recognition, the richness and complexity of the musical culture of which he was a vital part risks being overshadowed and obfuscated by the disproportionate amount of attention invested in his singular accomplishments. The essay advocates a resolute historicization of sixteenth-century discourses of creative endowment, a critical reassessment of the role of authentication scholarship in Josquin studies, and a renewed sensitivity to the imbrication of mythologies of musical genius in music historiographies of both the past and the present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jams.2004.57.3.443

Journal Title: Journal of Palestine Studies
Publisher: The University of California Press
Issue: jps.2014.43.issue-3
Date: 5 1, 2014
Author(s): Mardam-Bey Farouk
Abstract: For a good description of this general atmosphere, see Denis Sieffert, “La ‘Sarkozye’ médiatique et intellectuelle,” in Sarkozy au Proche-Orient, ed. Farouk Mardam-Bey (Paris: Sindbad/Actes Sud, 2010).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jps.2014.43.3.26

Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Architectural Historians
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jsah.2011.70.issue-1
Date: 03 2011
Author(s): Ortenberg Alexander
Abstract: Chapman, "Unrealized Designs," 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jsah.2011.70.1.38

Journal Title: Law and Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: lal.2005.17.issue-1
Date: 03 2005
Author(s): Hiddleston Jane
Abstract: This article examines the conflicts of 1990s Algeria and Assia Djebar's critique of these events using the flexibility and experimentation of the novel form. The entrenched government of the Front de Libération Nationale has been engaged in an ongoing conflict with a group of radical, underground Islamist terrorists, and the result has been that both parties attempt to quash any political or cultural dissent. The government clings to its policy of strict Arabization, while the Islamists fight for the invention of a thoroughly new spiritual, Islamic community, necessarily in harmony with itself. Djebar's Le Blanc de l'Algérie (Algerian White)challenges both the Islamists and the government by exposing the limits of their stultifying rhetoric, and by describing the author's own experiences of bereavement using an alternative language resistant to generic norms. Djebar upholds unique, creative forms of commemoration that refuse to conform to the demands of Islamist ideology or sanctioned political rhetoric, and that can mimic her deceased friends' own singular art forms. At the same time, Djebar's commemorative text seeks a language free from convention-bound formulae and able to transcend the linear progress of a narrative necessarily evolving through time. In this sense,Le Blanc de l'Algérieuses both content and form to deconstruct the layers and masks of commemorative discourse, and the political misuse of those masks. The novel engages with the difficulties of creating an appropriate discourse of mourning while stretching and opening out existing rhetorical forms.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/lal.2005.17.1.1

Journal Title: Mexican Studies/Estudios Mexicanos
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: msem.2004.20.issue-2
Date: 08 2004
Author(s): Matute Álvaro
Abstract: Más que hacer un recorrido a través de la vasta producción historiográfica mexicana de los últimos 20 años (1984-2004), el artículo pretende analizar las condiciones de desarrollo institucional a partir de las cuales se ha desenvuelto dicha producción historiográfica. Los sistemas de evaluación desarrollados a partir del Sistema Nacional de Investigadores cobran un papel relevante. Asimismo, se pone énfasis en el surgimiento de las nuevas generaciones de historiadores, en los nuevos temas que se han incorporado a los tradicionalmente tratados y en el contraste entre las nuevas propuestas de los historiadores provenientes de los resultados de las investigaciones y las interpretaciones a que han dado lugar y la resistencia del público, moldeado por la inercia de la historia oficial. El artículo está deliberadamente planteado con títulos y elementos de don Luis González, a cuya memoria está dedicado.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/msem.2004.20.2.327

Journal Title: Mexican Studies/Estudios Mexicanos
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: msem.2013.29.issue-2
Date: 8 2013
Author(s): Vázquez Juan de Dios
Abstract: This essay examines the novel Cementerio de Papel[Paper Cemetery] (2002), a detective thriller about a murder that took place under the dome of the Archivo General de la Nación [National General Archive] (Lecumberri). The relocation and opening of the files of the former Dirección Federal de Seguridad [Federal Security Bureau] in the former prison comes along with the return of victims and victimizers, only now they come back as ghosts of things past. The novel works with the binomial jail/archive, featuring Lecumberri as a live space from which to begin a search for justice and truth, without sinking into melancholy or victimhood.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/msem.2013.29.2.478

Journal Title: Music Theory Spectrum
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: mts.2003.25.issue-1
Date: 04 01, 2003
Author(s): Moreno Jairo
Abstract: In nearly thirty densely argued pages, Gottfried Weber (1832) analyzed four measures from Mozart's"Dissonance" Quartet; the "ear" subjects each note and chord to multiple possible interpretations. This paper examines Weber's interpretive practice in light of his theory of harmony, considering his cognitive teasing of potential meanings from the perspective of philosophical notions of consciousness (Kant and Fichte) and the poetics of self-reflective subjectivity proposed by the Early Romantics (F.Schlegel and Novalis) in their critiques of linguistic representation, temporality,and subject-object relations.The Early Romantic conception of irony and allegory brings the subject fully within the fold of linguistic representation, as does Weber,marking a key moment in the history of the representation of listening by music theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/mts.2003.25.1.99

Journal Title: Music Theory Spectrum
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: mts.2006.28.issue-2
Date: 10 2006
Author(s): LOCHHEAD JUDY
Abstract: Charles Dodge's Any Resemblance is Purely Coincidentalposes a challenge to a musical analyst seeking to explain “how it works.” For piano and computer-generated tape, including a sample from the famed tenor Caruso singing Leoncavallo's “Vesti la giubba,” Dodge's piece challenges notions of what counts as the work's structural elements and how the analyst gathers evidence about them. The article proposes an analysis ofAny Resemblancethat addresses these challenges.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/mts.2006.28.2.233

Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ncl.2003.57.issue-4
Date: 03 01, 2003
Author(s): Stern Rebecca F.
Abstract: Christina Rossetti's "Goblin Market" (1862) has garnered seemingly limitless critical interpretation — the goblins' remarkable fruit inviting allegorical readings of the poem that reference, most popularly, Christianity, sexuality, and capitalism. In this essay I read fruit simply as food, situating the poem within the context of food adulteration contemporary with its 1859 composition. Food adulteration was a widespread problem in Victorian England, as increasing numbers of merchants cut flour with alum, doctored curry with mercury, and enhanced the appearance of potted fruits and vegetables with copper and lead. Public alarm regarding this form of fraud reached its height in the 1850s, largely due to the work of an independent Analytical Sanitary Commission, which published its findings in The Lancetbetween 1851 and 1854. While Parliament responded to these reports with the formation of a Select Committee in 1855, the popular press responded with articles, tracts, and ballads addressing this pandemic problem. Manuals that instructed consumers how to protect themselves by acquiring the accoutrements of home laboratories proliferated, as did references to adulteration in popular literature. In this essay I read Rossetti's poem as an example of this type of reference. The market of the poem's title, I argue, references a literally contaminated marketplace in which the numbers of people who ate ostensibly nutritious food, only to wither and die in consequence, provoked both governmental and popular alarm.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ncl.2003.57.4.477

Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ncl.2005.60.issue-2
Date: 09 2005
Author(s): JÖTTKANDT SIGI
Abstract: Walter Pater's theoretical "come-back" over the past forty years or so has been dominated by the competing claims of the new historicism and deconstruction, both of which discover prescient forerunners of their own, seemingly mutually exclusive, theoretical concerns in Pater's aesthetic criticism and in his historical novel Marius the Epicurean (1885). Yet despite their obvious differences, both critical approaches share one thing in common: the same post-humanist denigration of the trope of metaphor in favor of the seemingly more ethically responsive (because inclusive) trope of metonymy. In this essay I observe how the new historicism's and deconstruction's privilegings of metonymy as the prime trope of difference poses an immediate problem for ethical thought that, largely under the influence of Alain Badiou, has become increasingly cognizant of the need for a workable conception of sameness (or universality), traditionally supplied by metaphor. Accordingly, this close reading of the metaphorical dialectic of one of Pater's surprisingly underread Imaginary Portraits, "Sebastian van Storck" (1887), explores the basic charge against metaphor-namely, that it is an essentially "theological" trope insofar as it invariably pre-posits the "identity" that it modestly claims to have merely discovered. Employing the central figure of Sebastian's idealism- equation-I venture that, once rethought as a relation not of identity but of equivalence, metaphor is capable of shouldering the rhetorical burden of similarity without relinquishing its ethical claim as a primary producer of new differences in the world and is, hence, deserving of a central place in a post-deconstructive ethics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ncl.2005.60.2.163

Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century Literature
Publisher: The University of California Press
Issue: ncl.2012.67.issue-1
Date: 6 1, 2012
Abstract: This essay argues that Emily Dickinson’s poetry intervenes in the broad cultural assessment of epistemology provoked by the evolutionary debates of the 1860s. While scholars have begun to explore the thematic correspondences between Dickinson’s poetry and some aspects of this cultural conversation, this essay examines the ways in which her intervention occurs at the level of poetic form and is in fact profoundly dependent upon form. Specifically, it analyzes a set of her poems from the early 1860s through the early 1870s in which she uses the dual structure of metaphor to elicit a way of thinking about truth that is aligned with the empirical methods of research that were widely embraced in the mid nineteenth century; however, in the face of an increasingly contingent notion of truth, Dickinson’s way of thinking significantly revises cultural assumptions about what those methods might yield. The metaphors examined here amplify the distinctions between two material entities—lightning and fork, or sunset and lilac, for example—rather than merging them or leaping beyond them to stable, transcendent meaning. What Dickinson plays with is the possibility of a revised version of revelation or truth, one that is not only derived from the observation of material difference through the two parts of a metaphor, but that is more radically contingent on the perpetuity of such dual perception. Altogether, Dickinson’s metaphors are both critical and recuperative, as they contribute to the dismantling of fixed truth while embracing the limited revelations made possible by— onlymade possible by—sustained process.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ncl.2012.67.1.58

Journal Title: 19th-Century Music
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ncm.2001.25.issue-2-3
Date: 11 01, 2001
Author(s): Webster James
Abstract: 3. A brief account of the crucial role of the 1790s in these developments, focusing on the complementary achievements of Haydn and Beethoven. For Beethoven, Haydn's and Mozart's music was, precisely, modern. Together, he and Haydn dominated the Viennese scene, producing ever-more-imposing masterworks in every genre except opera. This explicitly modernist orientation was fostered, if not indeed in part created, by their patrons. After 1800 Beethoven maintained and further developed this same tradition. These years "between" Enlightenment and Romanticism were no mere transition; they constituted an equally weighty phase, on the same historical-structural "level," as those that preceded and followed it. Concomitantly, Romanticism as such did not become predominant in music until 1815, in Viennese music (except for the Lied) perhaps not even until 1828/30. For both reasons, it makes sense to regard the beginning of the music-historical nineteenth century as having been "delayed," until around 1815 or 1830.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ncm.2001.25.2-3.108

Journal Title: 19th-Century Music
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ncm.2012.36.issue-1
Date: July 2012
Abstract: Framed in such a way, the early movements of Mahler's Second Symphony—characterized by the alternation between halting sections that dissolve almost as soon as they begin and long-breathed melodies that seem to unfold effortlessly—suggest the melancholic subject's struggle between despair in the face of abject meaninglessness and a manic euphoria, neither of which addresses the loss. By contrast, the text in the symphony's final movement, adapted by Mahler from Friedrich Klopstock's chorale on the resurrection of the dead, encourages true remembrance of the deceased as a figure beyond death. Heard as a musical enactment of mourning, the final movement suggests that the dead who are mourned are resurrected through remembrance. Forcing us to acknowledge Mahler's death on some level, the final movement completes the work of mourning by engendering the composer's own resurrection in our memories as we witness each performance of his Second Symphony.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ncm.2012.36.1.058

Journal Title: Nova Religio: The Journal of Alternative and Emergent Religions
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: nr.2004.8.issue-2
Date: 11 2004
Author(s): Shuck Glenn W.
Abstract: The Left Behindnovels by Tim LaHaye and Jerry Jenkins have become a major publishing phenomenon in recent years. The novels have succeeded in part because they address the anxieties of their readers, using apocalyptic language to depict a future world in which evildoers are punished, and the faithful reverse the tables on their cultural marginality. The novels, however, also speak to the "here and now," articulating in narrative form the beliefs and actions that place one among either the saved or the damned. The novels accomplish this through the issuance of marks. Both believers and the followers of Antichrist have distinctive marks, which prove less than reliable. At stake, ultimately, is an evangelicalism open to the ambiguity and uncertainty of contemporary life, and a reactive fundamentalism that insists, metaphorically, on the rigidity of marks—a quest for certainty ill-advised in a world characterized by relentless change.*
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/nr.2004.8.2.48

Journal Title: Religion and American Culture: A Journal of Interpretation
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rac.2003.13.issue-1
Date: 01 01, 2003
Author(s): Flake Kathleen
Abstract: The L.D.S Church's use of commemorative rituals and narrative history to simultaneously adapt and maintain identity is not unique, but it is uniquely available to analysis because of the immediacy of the change and the Saints' devotion to record-keeping. Thus, the drama of LDS survival during the Progressive Era illuminates age-old religious strategies for adaptation to social norms, which strategies preserve the faithful's confidence in the timelessness of their god's moral and ecclesiastical order. More narrowly, these events in American church history are critical for understanding how the civilly disobedient Saints finally accepted the rule of federal law without losing their religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rac.2003.13.1.69

Journal Title: Representations
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rep.2013.123.issue-1
Date: 8 2013
Author(s): McAleavey Maia
Abstract: This article traces a single plot—the plot of bigamous return—through a range of genres and texts, including Mary Elizabeth Braddon’s Lady Audley’s Secret(1862) and Alfred Tennyson’s “Enoch Arden” (1864), concentrating on Elizabeth Gaskell’sSylvia’s Lovers(1863). Arguing that plot is a more productive heuristic than genre, this article investigates the intersection of literary currents in one historical moment with the long durée of a recurring story, powerfully present in nautical ballads and melodrama.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rep.2013.123.1.87

Journal Title: Representations
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rep.2013.124.issue-1
Date: 11 2013
Author(s): Gluck Carol
Abstract: Carol Gluck is the George Sansom Professor of History at Columbia University, specializing in the history of modern Japan. She is co-editor with Anna Tsing of Words in Motion:Toward a Global Lexicon(Durham, NC, 2009) and author ofThinking with the Past: Japan and Modern History(Berkeley, forthcoming).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rep.2013.124.1.125

Journal Title: Representations
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rep.2014.127.issue-1
Date: 8 2014
Author(s): Bulson Eric
Abstract: Why is James Joyce’s Ulyssesas long as it is? Using word counts from the thirteen and a quarter episodes that appeared in theLittle Review, this essay is one attempt to get into the novel’s numerical unconscious and explains how its genetic evolution was significantly shaped by the material constraints of serial production.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rep.2014.127.1.1

Journal Title: Rhetorica: A Journal of the History of Rhetoric
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rh.1993.11.issue-3
Date: 08 01, 1993
Author(s): Sharon-Zisser Shirley
Abstract: Abstract:The concem with progress and utility is shared by nineteenth-century scientists, philosophers, and rhetoricians, leading to significant correspondences among their discourses. This concern is manifest, for example, in the way in which several rhetorical treatises of the nineteenth century regard the distinction between a figure and a trope, which had been a common part of rhetorical theory since the time of Quintilian, as useless and anachronistic. By examining three nineteenth-century articulations of the justifications for erasing the trope/figure distinction from the cultural repertoire, this essay reveals structural and semantic parallels between these rhetorical treatises and the discourses of evolution and utilitarianism. Thus, the essay locates the source of the synonymity which the terms "trope" and "figure" have acquired in contemporary critical metalanguage in Victorian ideologies of progress and of the unprofitability and consequent discardability of the ancient.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rh.1993.11.3.321

Journal Title: Rhetorica: A Journal of the History of Rhetoric
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rh.1998.16.issue-2
Date: 05 01, 1998
Author(s): Paxson James J.
Abstract: Abstract:The fact that classical and early medieval allegorical personifications were exclusively female has long perplexed literary scholars and rhetoricians. Although arguments have been made about this gendering using grammatical formalism for the most part, an examination of rhetoric's own deep structure—that is, the discursive metaphors it has always employed to talkabouttropes and figures—promises to better articulate the gendered bases of the figure. Using analytical tactics drawn from Paul de Man's discussions of prosopopeia, this essay re-examines some of the rhetorical record along with programmatic imagery from patristic writings in order to demonstrate how women theinselves could serve as the "figures of figuration."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rh.1998.16.2.149

Journal Title: Rhetorica: A Journal of the History of Rhetoric
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rh.2005.23.issue-4
Date: 11 2005
Author(s): Graff Richard
Abstract: AbstractThe rise of prose in Greece has been linked to broader cultural and intellectual developments under way in the classical period. Prose has also been characterized as challenging poetry's traditional status as the privileged expression of the culture. Yet throughout the classical period and beyond, poetry was still regularly invoked as the yardstick by which innovation was measured. This paper investigates how poetry figures in the earliest accounts of prose style. Focusing on Isocrates, Alcidamas, and Aristotle, it argues that although each author distinguishes between the styles of prose and poetry, none is able to sustain the distinction consistently. The criteria for what constitutes an acceptable level of poeticality in prose were unstable. The diverse conceptions of poetic style were tied to intellectual polemics and professional rivalries of the early- to mid-fourth century bce and reflect competing aims and ideals for rhetorical performance in prose.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rh.2005.23.4.303

Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.1984.7.issue-2
Date: November 1984
Author(s): Jorgensen Danny L.
Abstract: Using data from an ethnographic study of tarot divination, occult claims to knowledge are analyzed and interpreted. Attention is focused on theproceduresparties to occult divination employ to claim and sustain what they regard as extraordinary knowledge. This view of occult knowledge stands opposed to efforts to discredit occult claims as unscientific or the result of psychosocial conditions like deprivation and marginality. Like knowledge in general, occult knowledge is a product of sociohistorical influences, interactional negotiation, and interpretation. The challenge for sociology therefore is the pursuit of the social interactional and historical processes whereby knowledge and interpretation are accomplished in everyday life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.1984.7.2.135

Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.1986.9.issue-1
Date: May 1986
Author(s): Kleinman Sherryl
Abstract: Many sociologists have tried in vain to find the “true” meaning of the classic works in the discipline. An interactionist perspective suggests that this search is not a valid one for sociologists, especially symbolic interactionists. Although there can be no “true” meaning, some authors use conventions of writing that make their work more orless clear. Using Mead'sMind, Self and Societyas an example, we discuss the dimensions of clarity. We then argue that the sociological classics should be read to (I) simulate new theories and research (pragmatic analysis), (2) determine how sociologists have used that classic to support or refute particular theories or perspectives (rhetorical analysis), and (3) provide information about the sociological concerns of the author and his/her contemporaries (historical analysis).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.1986.9.1.129

Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.1999.22.issue-2
Date: August 1999
Author(s): TenHouten Warren D.
Abstract: It is argued that autobiographical texts, such as life-historical interviews, provide the richest possible source of information about a person's temporality and a culture's historical past. It is proposed that time-consciousness can be inferred from such texts. To this end, ethnographic and other studies of Australian Aboriginal time-consciousness were used to construct a seven-part model of patterned-cyclical time-consciousness. Turning these seven attributes of patterned-cyclical time-consciousness into their opposites yields seven features of one-dimensional, ordinary-linear time-consciousness, thereby establishing a structured temporal polarity. A lexical-level, content-analytic methodology, Neurocognitive Hierarchical Categorization Analysis (NHCA), is introduced, in which folk-concepts of time from Roget's International Thesauruswere used to construct wordlist indicators for 9 of the 14 definitional components. Then, using NHCA for a comparative analysis of texts consisting of life-historical interviews, earlier results of an empirical study were brieflv re-presented. Australian Aborigines, compared to Euro-Australian controls, used a significantly smaller proportion of words for an index of ordinary-linear time but a higher proportion of words for an index of patterned-cyclical time, indicating a time-consciousness that is primarily patterned-cyclical rather than linear. Females were less linear and more patterned-cyclical than males in both cultures. These cross-cultural results contribute predictive validity to the proposed polarity of time-consciousness. Implications for the culture-and-cognition paradox and its resolution in dual-brain theory are addressed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.1999.22.2.121

Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.2001.24.issue-3
Date: 08 01, 2001
Author(s): Järvinen Margaretha
Abstract: This article combines a narrative approach on life histories, inspired by Paul Ricoeur, with the symbolic interactionist approaches of George Herbert Mead and Erving Goffman. It focuses on "negotiations" in qualitative interviews with alcoholics, that is, narrative sequences in which the interviewee's line comes into conflict with the line of the interviewer. From a larger study of drinking careers among alcoholics in Copenhagen, two interviews are singled out for a more detailed analysis. The two interviewees did not live up to the (implicit) expectations of the study: the presumptions (a) that persons contacted at institutions for heavily addicted alcoholics do indeed identify themselves as alcoholics and (b) that alcoholics are interested in structuring their life histories according to the development of their drinking problems. By struggling to defend an alternative identity for themselves than the one the interviewer had in readiness for them, the interviewees laid bare the (problematic) therapeutic framework of the study.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.2001.24.3.263

Journal Title: Social Problems
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: sp.2011.58.issue-2
Date: 5 2011
Author(s): Del Rosso Jared
Abstract: The rhetorical techniques by which governments deny, justify, and qualify alleged instances of torture have been well documented. Sociologists, however, have neglected the social contexts in which officials confront allegations of torture, as well as officials' use of evidence to strengthen their own or weaken competing claims about torture. Relying on findings from a qualitative content analysis of seven Senate Armed Services Committee hearings held in 2004 on “detainee abuse” at Abu Ghraib prison, this article examines the processes by which hearing participants portrayed the violence there as an isolated incident. Building on James A. Holstein and Jaber F. Gubrium's (2003) “constructionist analytics,” I examine the textual mediation of claims-making in the hearings, focusing on the interplay between textual realities of detainee abuse and the interpretive uses to which hearing participants put these realities. I show that developments in the textual environment of the hearings, particularly the development of a textually mediated vantage on events that “really occurred” throughout Afghanistan and Iraq, provided hearing participants with rich interpretive materials to downplay and rationalize instances of abuse that occurred in places other than Abu Ghraib prison. These findings suggest that official denial is sustained by diverse claims-making activities, including the production of a textual reality of human rights violations. The findings also extend the purview of social problems theory to account for the role of texts in the construction of social problems.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/sp.2011.58.2.165

Journal Title: The Public Historian
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: tph.2008.30.issue-1
Date: February 2008
Author(s): GUEMBE MARIA LAURA
Abstract: Memoria Abierta's work responds to the need for a dialogue in Argentina among human rights organizations, the government, and civil society that will stimulate the formation of a collective memory about the history of State-led terrorism in the country. Processing documents, testimonies, and images related to the history of illegal repression in Argentina (c. 1974–1983), and creating a topographical reconstruction of the locations where State-led terrorism occurred poses diverse ethical, technical, and political problems regarding the recollection, description, transmission, and diffusion of the materials of memory. This article describes some of these challenges and how they affect and are shaped by the work of Memoria Abierta.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/tph.2008.30.1.63

Journal Title: Oxford Review of Education
Publisher: Carfax Publishing
Issue: i243245
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Zeichner Pádraig
Abstract: The numerous changes and improvements which have been wrought in teacher education courses in the last two decades have not, apparently, satisfied the critics. Ironically, the reverse seems to have occurred, as recent events on both sides of the Atlantic testify. This essay argues that the developments of the last two decades in educational research and teacher education, which have yielded a wealth of new ideas and procedures, have also yielded a confusing proliferation of educational ideologies. In short, it suggests that the ascendancy of a diffuse, unselfcritical, and often combative discourse within educational studies has effectively eclipsed the more important question which must first be tackled if educational studies are to have a coherent, robust focus. This question, which is pursued in the second section of the paper, asks: is the educational enterprise, properly conceived, a distinctive, autonomous or sui generis enterprise with purposes of its own which are universal, or is it essentially a subservient enterprise, a vehicle for one or other currently prevailing ideology (cultural, technological, political, religious, etc.)? In exploring this question the essay puts to work some enduring insights from contemporary European philosophy, arguing that education as a 'practical hermeneutic discipline' holds a singular promise. Some important consequences of this promise for educational studies and teacher education are then considered.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1050455

Journal Title: Oxford Review of Education
Publisher: Carfax Publishing
Issue: i243292
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Thompson Jim
Abstract: In the formation and composition of what might be termed personal identity a key but often neglected aspect is ideal identity. While comprising aspirations rather than realities, it makes a major contribution to the definition of self-identity. It does this as a result of: (a) clarifying what kind of person the individual wishes to be; and (b) an interrogation of how she sets about achieving her ideal identity, intimating what kind of person she is at a particular moment by virtue of the way in which she strives to achieve her ideal. The article argues for a re-appraisal of the notion of ideals in education and for its reinstatement as a significant feature of education. Indeed, we argue, children cannot avoid ideals--they are presented to them everyday from a wide variety of sources. But these sources or the ideals that they promote are not necessarily good for the child's well-being or for her fellow citizens. Consequently, teachers as moral agents have an important role in assisting children to acquire ideals that do meet such a criterion of goodness in addition to helping them reflect critically on the range of ideals they may encounter in their communities and society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1050582

Journal Title: Journal of Law and Religion
Publisher: Hamline University School of Law
Issue: i243306
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Burt Emily Fowler
Abstract: Cover, Obligation, supra note 200, at 74. 74
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1051152

Journal Title: Journal of Law and Religion
Publisher: Hamline University School of Law
Issue: i243301
Date: 1 1, 1953
Author(s): Auerbach Harry P.
Abstract: E. AUERBACH, MIMESIS: THE REPRESENTATION OF REALITY IN WESTERN LITERA- TURE 15 (1953). Auerbach 15 Mimesis: The Representation of Reality in Western Literature 1953
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1051217

Journal Title: Journal of Law and Religion
Publisher: Hamline University School of Law
Issue: i243325
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Lonergan Patrick McKinley
Abstract: Bernard Lonergan, Method: Trend and Variations, in A Third Collection 13, 21 (F. Crowe ed., Paulist Press 1985) Lonergan 21 13 Method: Trend and Variations, in A Third Collection 1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1051496

Journal Title: Journal of Law and Religion
Publisher: Hamline University School of Law
Issue: i243320
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Gudorf Lisa Sowle
Abstract: Christine Gudorf, Life Without Anchors: Sex, Exchange, and Human Rights in a Postmodern World 26 J Rel Ethics 300 (1998). Gudorf 300 26 J Rel Ethics 1998
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1051776

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243696
Date: 11 1, 1976
Author(s): Derrida Charles H.
Abstract: pt. 2
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062335

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243719
Date: 8 1, 1982
Author(s): Fenn Lawrence E.
Abstract: Richard Fenn, Liturgies and Trials (New York, 1982) Fenn Liturgies and Trials 1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062385

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243717
Date: 2 1, 1977
Author(s): Lévi-Strauss Hans H.
Abstract: Ibid., p. 117. 117
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062514

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243684
Date: 5 1, 1967
Author(s): Myths N. J.
Abstract: LTCK, p. 149. 149
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062633

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243710
Date: 5 1, 1963
Author(s): Durkheim Whalen
Abstract: Emile Durkheim and Marcel Mauss, Primitive Classifi- cations [Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1963] Durkheim Primitive Classifications 1963
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062644

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243741
Date: 2 1, 1972
Author(s): DeBernardi Jean
Abstract: Ibid., p. 13. 13
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062863

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243734
Date: 5 1, 1974
Author(s): Segal Whalen
Abstract: Robert A. Segal, "Joseph Campbell's Theory of Myth," in Dundee, ed. (n. 16 above), pp. 256-69 Segal 256 Joseph Campbell's Theory of Myth
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062920

Journal Title: Columbia Law Review
Publisher: Columbia University School of Law
Issue: i246912
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Brest William N.
Abstract: J. Ely, Democracy and Distrust: A Theory ofJudicial Review 135-70 (1980)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1122910

Journal Title: Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i249351
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Strayer James E.
Abstract: The cross-cultural program of research presented here is about matters of temporal persistence-personal persistence and cultural persistence-and about solution strategies for solving the paradox of "sameness-in-change." The crux of this paradox resides in the fact that, on threat of otherwise ceasing to be recognizable as a self, all of us must satisfy at least two constitutive conditions. The first of these is that selves are obliged to keep moving or die, and, so, must continually change. The second is that selves must also somehow remain the same, lest all notions of moral responsibility and any commitment to an as yet unrealized future become nonsensical. Although long understood as a problem demanding the attention of philosophers, we argue that this same paradox arises in the ordinary course of identity development and dictates the different developmental routes taken by culturally mainstream and Aboriginal youth in coming to the identity-preserving conclusion that they and others are somehow continuous through time. Findings from a set of five studies are presented. The first and second studies document the development and refinement of a method for parsing and coding what young people say on the topic of personal persistence or self-continuity. Both studies demonstrate that it is not only possible to seriously engage children as young as age 9 or 10 years in detailed and codable discussions about personal persistence, but that their reasoning concerning such matters typically proceeds in an orderly and increasingly sophisticated manner over the course of their early identity development. Our third study underscores the high personal costs of failing to sustain a workable sense of personal persistence by showing that failures to warrant self-continuity are strongly associated with increased suicide risk in adolescence. Study four documents this same relation between continuity and suicide, this time at the macrolevel of whole cultures, and shows that efforts by Aboriginal groups to preserve and promote their culture are associated with dramatic reductions in rates of youth suicide. In the final study we show that different default strategies for resolving the paradox of personal persistence and change-Narrative and Essentialist strategies-distinctly characterize Aboriginal and non-Aboriginal youth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1166217

Journal Title: Review of Educational Research
Publisher: American Educational Research Association
Issue: i249760
Date: 7 1, 1997
Author(s): Young Aaron
Abstract: Postmodern theory is often seen as a realm either of totally free play--where anything goes and there are no rules at all--or of despair where all visions of equality and democracy are equated with totalitarianism. Coherent ways of talking about "actors" or "responsibility" can appear to be entirely repudiated. Further perceived as elitist, obscure, convoluted, and entirely removed from any kind of practical reality, postmodernism is often viewed as having nothing relevant to say to teachers or those interested in concretely improving education. This paper attempts to show that these visions are not entirely fair to the ways many "postmodern" theorists strive to explore carefully the myriad tensions invariably involved in politics and pedagogy or to the (perhaps surprising) egalitarian commitments that generally undergird their projects. Taking advantage of the fluid and ultimately undefinable character of the idea of the "postmodern," this paper draws from an eclectic group of thinkers, teasing out a range of different perspectives that might inform, complicate, and contest efforts to "teach freedom."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1170662

Journal Title: Review of Educational Research
Publisher: American Educational Research Association
Issue: i249721
Date: 10 1, 1989
Author(s): Zumwalt Dona M.
Abstract: Although research on teacher cognition is no longer in its infancy, it has largely failed to affect the ways in which programs and teachers are evaluated. In accordance with what Raths and Katz (1985) call the Goldilocks Principle, the notion of teacher cognition may simply be "too big" (too general and vague) for mundane application. This review was designed to compare alternative approaches to the evaluation of teacher cognition and to consider ways in which the literature of this subfield may be discouraging its application. Teacher cognition is defined as pre- or inservice teachers' self-reflections; beliefs and knowledge about teaching, students, and content; and awareness of problem-solving strategies endemic to classroom teaching. This paper describes and critiques five different approaches to the evaluation of teacher cognition: (a) direct and noninferential ways of assessing teacher belief, (b) methods that rely on contextual analyses of teachers' descriptive language, (c) taxonomies for assessing self-reflection and metacognition, (d) multimethod evaluations of pedagogical content knowledge and beliefs, and (e) concept mapping. In the final section, ambiguities and paradoxes inherent in this literature are discussed, particularly the continued use of rhetoric associated with process--product research. Questions regarding the ecological validity of measurement tools and tasks are raised. A suggestion is made that it may be politically exigent to begin relating measures of teacher cognition to valued student outcomes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1170760

Journal Title: Educational Researcher
Publisher: American Educational Research Association
Issue: i250180
Date: 7 1, 1986
Author(s): Yonemura D. Jean
Abstract: Although narrative inquiry has a long intellectual history both in and out of education, it is increasingly used in studies of educational experience. One theory in educational research holds that humans are storytelling organisms who, individually and socially, lead storied lives. Thus, the study of narrative is the study of the ways humans experience the world. This general concept is refined into the view that education and educational research is the construction and reconstruction of personal and social stories; learners, teachers, and researchers are storytellers and characters in their own and other's stories. In this paper we briefly survey forms of narrative inquiry in educational studies and outline certain criteria, methods, and writing forms, which we describe in terms of beginning the story, living the story, and selecting stories to construct and reconstruct narrative plots. Certain risks, dangers, and abuses possible in narrative studies are discussed. We conclude by describing a two-part research agenda for curriculum and teacher studies flowing from stories of experience and narrative inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1176100

Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i250458
Date: 4 1, 1980
Author(s): Yehoshua Dani
Abstract: The introduction of entrepreneurial education (EE) in the Israeli education system is discussed in this article as an example of the introduction of new curriculum. We argue that this introduction should be construed as a consequence of major ideological changes in Israel and its education system, a change from collectivist to individualistic values. We open with an analysis of a Ministry of Education publication that introduces the EE program and find that it is loaded with references to Zionist myths. We suggest that relying on references to these myths in promoting EE reflects a need to disguise the discontinuity between the social values behind the new curriculum and the traditional collectivist values of pioneering Zionism. We note that the Israeli programs exercise EE in groups, whereby the responsibility for the new ventures is shared by the group members. We suggest that adopting the group method indicates a compromise between a completely individualistic and competitive approach to entrepreneurship and a collectivist approach to coping with new tasks-which is more in line with traditional Zionist values. We argue that the change of atmosphere from collectivism to individualism is a result of demographic and economic processes that have occurred since the establishment of the Israeli state, and that these processes may be exposed through observing the Israeli youth movements and the public discourse. We believe that the gradual shift from collectivism to individualism is a central factor in explaining the timing of EE's introduction in Israel.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1179899

Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i250466
Date: 4 1, 1987
Author(s): White Marcy Singer
Abstract: This article examines challenges to discourses of curriculum research and practice by the growing fascination with alternative forms of representation. The author takes as a starting point a cluster of exchanges with students that were situated in a study of a classroom in which music and image joined word and number as essential sources for learning about a context irreducibly distant from students' own: the past. In the study, what seemed to make painting, photography, film, and poetry potent sources of understanding was their capacity to bridge the gap between a remote, textbook past, and the sensory world of the students' present; these forms expressed to students not only the outline of events, but also what the events signified and felt like. Yet, in juxtaposing students' comments against discourses of historiography, philosophical aesthetics, and history teaching and learning, one soon recognizes that the very ability of the arts to communicate a sense of immediacy and human intention is what makes them problematic as sources of historical insight: in pushing out the boundaries of "acceptable" forms beyond discursive text, one also pushes up against assumptions about the nature and purposes of knowledge and inquiry. While the starting point of this article is historical inquiry, the author argues that the difficulties of representing experiences of persons in contexts removed in time or space, and of making sense of others' representations, are relevant to other forms of inquiry; the challenge of the arts to historical inquiry is paralleled in other fields, and no less in educational research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1180164

Journal Title: Winterthur Portfolio
Publisher: University Press of Virginia
Issue: i250484
Date: 1 1, 1963
Author(s): Mead D. H.
Abstract: Sid- ney E. Mead, The Lively Experiment: The Shaping of Christianity in America (New York: Harper & Row, 1963), pp. 90-102 Mead go The Lively Experiment: The Shaping of Christianity in America 1963
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1180550

Journal Title: Comparative Education Review
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i250893
Date: 11 1, 1988
Author(s): Kroes Val D.
Abstract: McLaren and Hammer (n. 21 above), p. 33. 33
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1188108

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251493
Date: 7 1, 1951
Author(s): Steiner Giles B.
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1201552

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251495
Date: 1 1, 1961
Author(s): Pannenberg W. Taylor
Abstract: n. 25 above
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1201604

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251499
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): Ricoeur David
Abstract: "State and Violence," p. 246.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1201954

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251550
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Duling Erich
Abstract: Perrin, Rediscovering, p. 53.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202778

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251554
Date: 10 1, 1968
Author(s): Fried Lynn M.
Abstract: Brooks, pp. 17, 18.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203065

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251546
Date: 10 1, 1981
Author(s): Ellingsen Mark
Abstract: Mark Ellingsen, "Luther's Concept of the Ministry: The Creative Tension," Word & World 1 (Fall 1981): 338-46 Ellingsen Fall 338 1 Word & World 1981
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203406

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251561
Date: 10 1, 1981
Author(s): PutnamAbstract: Hilary Putnam so interprets an argument of Wittgenstein's in Reason, Truth and History (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1981), pp. 123-24. Putnam 123 Hilary Putnam so interprets an argument of Wittgenstein's in Reason, Truth and History 1981
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203420

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251571
Date: 4 1, 1954
Author(s): Murray Gregory D.
Abstract: Murray, Early Greece. p. 49. Murray 49 Early Greece
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203885

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251578
Date: 1 1, 1965
Author(s): de Chardin C. Allen
Abstract: Pierre Teil- hard de Chardin's The Phenomenon of Man (New York: Harper & Row, 1965). de Chardin The Phenomenon of Man 1965
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1204099

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251592
Date: 7 1, 1977
Author(s): Elder Charles R.
Abstract: San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1205377

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251610
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Lindbeck Owen C.
Abstract: George A. Lindbeck, The Nature of Doctrine: Religion and Theology in a Postliberal Age (Phila- delphia: Westminster, 1984), pp. 33-34. Lindbeck 33 The Nature of Doctrine: Religion and Theology in a Postliberal Age 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1205655

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251609
Date: 10 1, 1987
Author(s): Tracy M. A.
Abstract: Tracy, BRO (n. 40 above), p. xiii.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1206115

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251604
Date: 7 1, 1991
Author(s): McCollough William A.
Abstract: Thomas E. McCollough, The Moral Imagination and Public Life: Raising the Ethical Question (Chatham, N.J.: Chatham House, 1991 McCollough The Moral Imagination and Public Life: Raising the Ethical Question 1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1206461

Journal Title: Contemporary Literature
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i251779
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Zakin Jonathan
Abstract: Buell's view in The Environmental Imagination can serve to epitomize the prevailing consensus: "Thoreau is often thought of as Emerson's earthy opposite. But it would be truer to imagine him as moving gradually, partially, and self-conflictedly beyond the pro- gram Emerson outlined in Nature, which sacralized nature as humankind's mystic coun- terpart .... Thoreau became increasingly interested in defining nature's structure, both spiritual and material, for its own sake, as against how nature might subserve humanity, which was Emerson's primary consideration" (117)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1208760

Journal Title: Contemporary Literature
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i251779
Date: 7 1, 1977
Author(s): Williams Michael
Abstract: Caroline Brothers's clear discussion of the photo- graph as a "constant dialogue between image and society" (23) 23
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1208761

Journal Title: Contemporary Literature
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i251777
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Wirth-Nesher Timothy L.
Abstract: Shostak is right to say that this "association suggests that Smilesburger is connected to the consummate Old-World Jewish storyteller, in a sense one of Roth's progenitors" (749n17) 749n17
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1208795

Journal Title: Contemporary Literature
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i251778
Date: 4 1, 1981
Author(s): Yeats Devin
Abstract: Peter Middleton has written regarding Blake, "The recurrence of names is not a guarantee of an existing entity, successfully named and located, able to unify the appearances of its names in the text. Instead this recurrence marks redefinition, re-examination, as of the terms used in a long, complex process of rea- soning. ... These characters are not, we might say, quite in the same play or on the same stage or even quite all there" (41) 41
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1208965

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i252086
Date: 8 1, 1993
Author(s): Rich Stephen
Abstract: Linda Marie Brooks, "Alternative Identities: Stating the Problem," and David Roberts, "Suffocation and Vocation: History, Anti-History and the Self," in Alternative Identities: The Self in Literature, History, and Theory, ed. Linda Marie Brooks (New York: Garland, 1995), pp. 3-35 and 109-38
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1215581

Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252711
Date: 4 1, 1988
Author(s): Zlotchew Susan
Abstract: POSTSCRIPT, supra note 19, at 81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228742

Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252697
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Bell Charles R.
Abstract: Bell, The Suipr-eme Court1, 1984 Termii-Forewt'ord:. The Civil Rights Chro?icles, 99 HARV. L. REV.4, 56-68 (1985) Bell 4 99 HARV. L. REV. 1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228797

Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252715
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Bernstein Philip P.
Abstract: Richard J. Bernstein, From Hermeneutics to Praxis, in HERMENEUTICS AND PRAXIS 273, 287-90 (R. Hollinger ed. 1985) Bernstein From Hermeneutics to Praxis 273 HERMENEUTICS AND PRAXIS 1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228963

Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252719
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): Pitkin Frank
Abstract: Law- rence, supra note 101, at 942-43
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1229014

Journal Title: Michigan Law Review
Publisher: University of Michigan Law School
Issue: i255068
Date: 8 1, 1987
Author(s): Cass Edward L.
Abstract: Farber & Frickey, Practical Reason, supra note 122, at 1643- 47
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1289072

Journal Title: The Russian Review
Publisher: The Ohio State University Press
Issue: i207486
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): Kabakov Edith W.
Abstract: Ivanova, "Proshchanie s utopiei."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/131118

Journal Title: The Journal of the Midwest Modern Language Association
Publisher: Midwest Modern Language Association
Issue: i256333
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Scott H. Aram
Abstract: Literary Criticism and the Southern Question": 99 99 Literary Criticism and the Southern Question
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1315021

Journal Title: Harvard Law Review
Publisher: Harvard Law Review Association
Issue: i257579
Date: 6 1, 1988
Author(s): Alters William W.
Abstract: supra pp. 1718-19, 1739.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1341435

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257709
Date: 12 1, 1972
Author(s): Frye Paul
Abstract: Northrop Frye, The Critical Path (Bloomington, Ind., 1972), esp. pp. 106-8 and 155-56 Frye 106 The Critical Path 1972
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1342895

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257716
Date: 10 1, 1976
Author(s): Sahlins Wayne C.
Abstract: Marshall Sahlins, Culture and Practical Reason (Chicago, 1976). Sahlins Culture and Practical Reason 1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1342977

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257741
Date: 12 1, 1981
Author(s): Feverabend E. D.
Abstract: Paul K. Feverabend, Philosophical Papers, vol. 1 (Cambridge, 1981), pp. 114-18 Feverabend 114 1 Philosophical Papers 1981
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343392

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257749
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Michels Sander L.
Abstract: New York Times, 19 May 1985, p. 20E. 19 May 20 New York Times 1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343494

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257760
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Elias Jay
Abstract: Norbert Elias, The Civilizing Process, trans. Edmund Jephcott, 3 vols. (New York, 1978-82). Elias The Civilizing Process 1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343625

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257763
Date: 7 1, 1977
Author(s): Conrad Johannes
Abstract: Joseph Conrad, "Karain: A Memory," Selected Tales from Conrad, ed. Nigel Stewart (London, 1977), pp. 65-66. Conrad Karain: A Memory 65 Selected Tales from Conrad 1977
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343766

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257799
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): Zivek Dominick
Abstract: Slavoj Zivek, The Sublime Object of Ideology (London, 1989), p. 50. Zivek 50 The Sublime Object of Ideology 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1344100

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257809
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): Veysey John
Abstract: Laurence Veysey, "The Plural Organized World of the Humani- ties," in The Organization of Knowledge in Modern America, ed. Alexandra Oleson and John Voss [Baltimore, Md., 1979], p. 57 Veysey The Plural Organized World of the Humanities 57 The Organization of Knowledge in Modern America 1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1344279

Journal Title: Cultural Critique
Publisher: Society for Cultural Critique
Issue: i258507
Date: 10 1, 1983
Author(s): Ellison Sylvia
Abstract: Ellison, Invisible Man, 568. Ellison 568 Invisible Man
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1354156

Journal Title: Cultural Critique
Publisher: Society for Cultural Critique
Issue: i258508
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Rose Vincent P.
Abstract: Gillian Rose, Dialectic of Nihilism (Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1984), 207 Rose 207 Dialectic of Nihilism 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1354216

Journal Title: Cultural Critique
Publisher: Society for Cultural Critique
Issue: i258501
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Johnson William V.
Abstract: "The End of Education:'The Harvard Core Curriculum Report' and the Pedagogy of Reformation," boundary 2, Vol. X, 2 (Winter 1982), 1-33 2 1 X boundary 2 1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1354280

Journal Title: Duke Law Journal
Publisher: Duke University School of Law
Issue: i259836
Date: 11 1, 1992
Author(s): Collier Charles W.
Abstract: Charles W. Collier, Intellectual Authority and Institutional Authority, 42 J. LEGAL EDUC. (forthcoming 1992) Collier 42 J. Legal Educ. 1992
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1372767

Journal Title: Duke Law Journal
Publisher: Duke University School of Law
Issue: i259905
Date: 3 1, 1987
Author(s): Coons Morris B.
Abstract: Smith v. State, 479 S.W.2d 680, 681 (Tex. Crim. App. 1972)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1373126

Journal Title: Feminist Review
Publisher: Taylor & Francis Group
Issue: i260667
Date: 10 1, 1931
Author(s): Woolf Steph
Abstract: This article is concerned with the ways in which women narrate a move from a 'working-class' position to a position marked (in however fragmentary and complex a way) as 'middle class'. While such a move might be seen in terms of a straightforward escape from a disadvantaged social position, I argue here that what has to be analysed is the pain and the sense of estrangement associated with this class movement. Drawing on the class narratives of a group of seven white British women, the article uses Bourdieu's concepts of symbolic capital and habitus to explore the cultural and symbolic configurations of class. These configurations may be inscribed into the self, so that the self, itself, is class marked. Since working-class selves are frequently marked in pathological terms, this raises particular difficulties for the idea of an 'escape' from such a position. Class in this sense is embedded in people's history and so cannot be so easily 'escaped'. The usual conventions of life-narratives - in which the self remains the same entity from birth to death and later events are a culmination of earlier ones - are also disrupted in this case. But if a working-class position is marked as pathological, so too is taking on the markers of middle-class existence. to do so is not only to risk 'getting it wrong', but it is also to risk the scorn attached to 'pretentiousness'. There is a particular jeopardy here for women, since it is women who have been especially associated with desires for artefacts associated with bourgeois existence. The article argues for a focus for classed desires and class envy, not in pathological terms, but in terms of a coherent response to political and social exclusions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1395585

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261290
Date: 10 1, 1958
Author(s): Kluback Hwa Yol
Abstract: What Is Philosophy? trs. William Kluback and Jean T. Wilde (New York, 1958), p. 59. Kluback 59 What Is Philosophy? 1958
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1405723

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261306
Date: 10 1, 1960
Author(s): Maurice Hwa Yol
Abstract: The Semi-Sovereign People (New York, 1960) The Semi-Sovereign People 1960
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1406378

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261382
Date: 10 1, 1989
Author(s): Pangle Fred
Abstract: Recent literature on Heidegger concentrates heavily on his (temporary) involvement in or collusion with Nazi ideology and policies. Without belittling the gravity of the issue, this article shifts the focus somewhat by invoking a distinction which recently has emerged (or reemerged) in political thought: namely, the distinction between "politics" and "the political" or between politics viewed as partisan ideology or policy making, on the one hand, and politics seen as regime or paradigmatic framework, on the other. The main thesis of the article is that Heidegger's promising contributions to political theory are located on the level of ontology or paradigmatic framework rather than that of ideological partisanship. While not neglecting the dismal intrusions of the latter plane, the article probes Heideggerian cues for a "rethinking of the political" by placing the accent on four topical areas: first, the status of the subject or individual as political agent; second, the character of the political community, that is, of the polity or (in modern terms) the "state"; thirdly, the issue of cultural and political development or modernization; and finally, the problem of an emerging cosmopolis or world order beyond the confines of Western culture. In discussing these topics, an effort is made to disentangle Heidegger from possible misinterpretations and to indicate how, in each area, his thought pointed in the direction of an "overcoming" of Western political metaphysics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1407522

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261406
Date: 10 1, 1968
Author(s): Webb Thomas W.
Abstract: Webb, Philosopher of History, p. 35. Webb 35 Philosopher of History
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1408620

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261426
Date: 10 1, 1997
Author(s): Walzer William A.
Abstract: Karl-Otto Apel, "Discourse Ethics as a Response to the Novel Challenges of Today's Reality to Coresponsibility," Journal of Religion 74 (1993): 496-513 10.2307/1204180 496
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1408857

Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: Butterworth-Heinemann
Issue: i262155
Date: 8 1, 1989
Author(s): Kramer Réjean
Abstract: Lloyd S. Kramer, "Literature, Criticism and Historical Imagination: The Literary Challenge of Hayden White and Dominick LaCapra," in Lynn Hunt, ed., The New Cultural History (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1989), pp. 122-124 Kramer Literature, Criticism and Historical Imagination: The Literary Challenge of Hayden White and Dominick LaCapra 122 The New Cultural History 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1425141

Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: i262176
Date: 9 1, 1971
Author(s): Bachelard Clive R.
Abstract: In a practice environment that unswervingly promotes the systematic tendencies of efficient architectural productivity, to the detriment of architectural creativity, it becomes increasingly important for studio pedagogy to recover and sustain an imaginative engagement with the richness and ambiguity of lived reality. Inhabiting the Chasm is a studio project that attempts to deny the urge to rationalize program and structure and any unchallenged participation in the prevailing apparatus of conventionalized graphic depiction. The project focuses on the simultaneously unfathomable yet familiar reality of two individuals in love. It encourages a perception of the architect as place maker, as interpreter of dynamic human events, and as creator of the settings for the unraveling of dramatic human action.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1425285

Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: i262178
Date: 2 1, 1992
Author(s): Bozdogan Samuel
Abstract: The following essay considers Josep Lluis Sert's American Embassy in Baghdad (1955-1961) as an attempt to project a new basis for American political influence abroad that was compatible with a rapidly changing postcolonial world. Although the United States began its program of embassy construction to accord with its new role as a world power, the government required architects to be sensitive to local conditions of the site and the host country. In Iraq, this meant distinguishing America from both a rival Soviet Union and from England, America's ally but increasingly despised by Iraqis for its uninvited sway over their government, as well as addressing questions of climate and local construction capacities. To negotiate political complexities of the cold war and to balance American ambitions with local conditions, Sert drew on a modernism that was itself in the process of transition due in part to its application to a broader range of building types and social tasks, of which the embassy program is an instance, and in part to the representational pressures such institutional patronage entails.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1425469

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263699
Date: 6 1, 1925
Author(s): Blackmur Giles
Abstract: Blackmur, Anni Mirabiles, 1921-1925 (Washington, D.C.: The Library of Congress, 1956), p. 54. Blackmur 54 Anni Mirabiles 1925
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1461617

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263704
Date: 6 1, 1974
Author(s): Ricoeur Robert
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, "Metaphor and the Main Problem of Hermeneutics," New Literary Histori, 6, 1 (Autumn, 1974), pp. 95-110. Ricoeur Autumn 95 6 New Literary Histori 1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1462336

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263715
Date: 3 1, 1970
Author(s): Windisch William A.
Abstract: Considered rhetorically, or by phenomenological-literary analysis, the saying about finding one's life by losing it intends to break up the continuity of existence of the hearer to the extent that he or she is left without a frame of reference. Considered from a historical-literary point of view, however, the saying occurs in an environment and presupposes a context which gives meaning to the response. A Whiteheadian or process perspective of interpretation offers an approach which can relate these two types of understanding of the saying, and can also cast light on contemporary styles of interpretation with their ontological presuppositions, either to set the saying in a framework of "rightness" or in one of "creativity."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1462641

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263714
Date: 12 1, 1978
Author(s): Rauschenbusch Walter
Abstract: Walter Rauschenbusch's Christianity and the Social Crisis, viewed by many as the masterpiece of the social gospel movement, has been confined to the dusty shelves of the library. Can we catch no glimpse of what astounded its massive reading public, no glimmer of Rauschenbusch's own sense of the work as a "dangerous book" written in fear and trembling? This article suggests that a generic analysis of Christianity and the Social Crisis might lead to surprising disclosures. Any generic analysis involves the discussion of a group of texts. Consequently this study proceeds via a comparison of the structure of Christianity and the Social Crisis with those of other works of a similar type which were produced between 1890 and 1915. The genre is isolated by utilizing the techniques of Tzvetan Todorov. Certain negative traits are specified which separate the genre from its neighbors. The positive leitmotif of a dual crisis-a crisis affecting society as a whole and the ramifications of that crisis within the Christian churches-is specified as the decisive trait of the genre. To deal with this leitmotif a specific structure was generated by the works under consideration. They provided-to pirate the words of Clifford Geertz in his landmark essay on modern ideologies-"maps of problematic reality" and "matrices for the creation of collective conscience." In designing their maps of problematic reality our authors worked along two separate but related vectors. The first of these vectors was constituted by a historical analysis of the origins of the present crisis, while the second consisted of a systemic analysis of the present social order. Each of these elements of the genre is examined in turn. The mapping of problematic reality by means of a historical and a structural analysis was geared towards provoking as well as defining the crisis. Crisis, once defined, demanded decision. Nevertheless the "permanent basis for action" which Rauschenbusch and others sought could not be grounded upon ideological conviction alone. It required both concrete guidelines for praxis and the creation of an institutional matrix to mobilize the moral forces of the society, to form public opinion. These works then as ideological matrices for the creation of collective conscience were also designed to precipitate the transformation of the Church into an agent of human emancipation. The art of the genre was also an act. But in an age noted for "writing-as-action" the exemplars of the genre laid a complexly interwoven, carefully stressed foundation for Christian involvement in social change. Rauschenbusch's Christianity and the Social Crisis appears at the end of this analysis as the unsurpassed formulation of this distinctive genre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463047

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263709
Date: 9 1, 1975
Author(s): Wiggins Mary
Abstract: In recent years, the need for a critique of "reader" as rigorous as that which has been developed for "text" and for "author" has become increasingly acute. Whether in the study of religion as story and biography or in interpretative reading in general, a critical notion of reader is essential if the act of reading is to be anything other than mere consumption of texts. Some new way of understanding the hermeneutical circle is required to avert the narcissism latent in the Anselmian model. The notion of "genre" as developed by four recent theorists is helpful in the task of constructing a critique of "reader." E. D. Hirsch, Hans-Georg Gadamer, Tzvetán Todorov, and Paul Ricoeur have each surpassed the idealist notion of genre as a classificatory device and developed in its place the notion of genre as a generative pinciple. Todorov, for example, illustrates how "form" is a theoretical, as distinct from a descriptive or explanatory, issue. According to both Hirsch and Todorov, somewhere between empirical details and metaphysical thematizations lie generic formulations which can assist the reader to organize his/her response to the text and to recognize the probable understanding toward which the conventions of the text are directed. In Gadamer's theory of interpretation, the notion of genre acquires historicity. After Gadamer, genres can no longer be regarded as timeless a priori categories. Rather, because they are constituted by historical reflections, their rise and decline are intrinsic to text-interpretation. Finally, in Ricoeur's theory that generic considerations are correlative principles of production and interpretation, we find a basis for understanding genre as praxis. If we understand reading to be isomorphic to authoring, it becomes clear that the reader can no longer be regarded as the self-evident recipient of text-signification. Genre, in Ricoeur's theory, transforms "speech" into a "work" and points toward a new notion of "reader" as one whose reconstruction of the text is the condition for the possibility of its being a story that "gives life." This notion of "reader" makes possible a new model of the hermeneutical circle-one which signifies the essential roles of critical thought which follows naive reading and of informed understanding which follows after thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463143

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263710
Date: 12 1, 1944
Author(s): Stevenson Walter J.
Abstract: Recent study of the nature of textuality as such opens new insights for the study of the Bible. Although individual parts of the Bible have oral antecedents, the Bible as a whole has existed only as a text, and a unique kind of text, folded back on itself out of communal memory as no other book has been. A text is a monument. Textuality establishes a special relationship between discourse and death. Spoken words are exchanges between living persons. The text presents its message as well if its author is dead as it does if he or she is alive. Print is even more bound to death than writing is. In comparison with oral performance-delivery of an oration, song-a text physically has certain special alliances with past time. All texts come out of the past. Literature as text is psychologically retrospective: its effects typically include an element of nostalgia. Because of its future orientation, culminating in the closing words of Revelation, "Come, Lord Jesus" (as against typical narrative closes such as "They lived happily ever after"), the Bible has an unusual relationship to textuality: it is not literature in the way other texts are. Typical narrative plot structures existence retrospectively: the story is organized back from the conclusion. This retrospective organization is maximized by writing, which tightens plot and makes more of re-cognition, a kind of return to the beginning (the past) and hence a cyclic pattern. In addition to being related intimately to death, writing and print are also limitlessly fecund, the central forces in the evolution of consciousness, once they appear. The fecundity of writing and print, like other fecundity in human existence, is achieved by passage through death. "Unless the grain of wheat dies." The Word of God in the Person of Jesus Christ is conceived of by analogy with the spoken word. The Father speaks the Word, the Son (eo verbum quo filius); he does not write the Word, who would then by biblical attestation be not life but death: "The letter kills, but the spirit [pneuma, breath, producer of speech] gives life." The Son passes through death to resurrected life. The written text, also God's word, must also be resurrected-by interpretation, by being inserted into the lifeworld of living persons. Hermeneutics is resurrection and in common Christian teaching demands faith. Study of the textuality of the Bible-which presumes but is not the same as study of the text of the Bible-opens many new theological questions and / or gives new contours to old questions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463750

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263710
Date: 12 1, 1966
Author(s): Winter Charles R.
Abstract: Through the provision of a set of theses for the interpretation and evaluation of theologies of liberation, this paper attempts to mediate the existing conflict between academic theologians and theologians of liberation. It seeks to establish the legitimacy of theological discourse focused on the problem of alienation and liberation if carefully executed according to a clear set of guidelines. The paper begins with the argument that all interpretations of theologies of liberation must begin with an analysis of the theological genre within which these works fall. After insisting that theologies of liberation belong neither to the genre of systematic theology nor that of Christian social ethics, the paper develops the second thesis that theologies of liberation are best understood as members of a genre whose distinctive characteristics and functions are analogous to those intrinsic to secular ideologies. This thesis hinges upon a revisionist understanding of ideology drawn from the works of Clifford Geertz et al. and upon a careful specification of the generic similarities between the two forms of discourse. The second part of the paper moves from the level of interpretation to that of evaluation. It argues that theologies of liberation share with ideologies a tendency to occlude self-critical reflection. It suggests that a conscious recognition that theologies of liberation do not exhaust the possibilities of theological discourse but are relative models which select and interpret Christian symbols and doctrines in the light of the central dynamic of alienation and liberation might provide an antidote to this pathology. It maintains with Rosemary Ruether that there is no absolutely adequate model of alienation and liberation and that various models of alienation and liberation must be "interstructured" in order to overcome the perspectival biases of models which focus upon a single root of oppression. To establish relative degrees of adequacy between various theological models of liberation the paper argues that these models be evaluated a) by the criterion of appropriateness to the charter documents and to the historical development of one's chosen religious tradition, b) by the criterion of adequacy to the human condition in its essential commonality and in its historical diversity, and c) by the criterion of dialectical inclusiveness. The paper concludes by agreeing with theologians of liberation that ultimately no set of criteria validates a theology of liberation. As fundamentally geared to praxis, such a theology must be subject to a process of existential verification.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463752

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263713
Date: 9 1, 1970
Author(s): Teselle Robert F.
Abstract: The thesis of this paper is that an absolute origin of evil, arising from the free will of a creature, must be incomprehensible. Although Augustine occasionally acknowledges this point, nevertheless in a number of better-known passages (chiefly in The City of God) he attempts to give a causal account of the fall of Adam and/or Satan. Much of the subsequent Christian tradition has unfortunately followed his lead, and major recent commentators routinely ignore or passively approve of his conceptual error. Augustine offers three unacceptable explanations of the fall, which conflict variously with his own doctrines of divine omnipotence, the goodness of creation, and creaturely free will and responsibility, as well as violating the canons of sound argumentation and explanation. First, his contention that free creatures made "out of nothing" inevitably fall makes the fall seem ontologically necessary (unfree) and thereby lays the ultimate responsibility for it on the Creator. Second, the appeal to pride as an explanation is a spurious causal account, for "pride" is only a synonym for "fallenness" itself and not a possible antecedent condition in a being created good and not yet fallen. Finally, his assertion that the first sin is intrinsically comprehensible, but not comprehensible to us because we are fallen, is an obfuscation masquerading as an explanation, for we have no warrant for supposing that this assertion is true or even meaningful. Instead of seeking causal explanation Augustine should have stayed with his own wiser observation that an evil will has no efficient cause. Theology of the Augustinian sort (which comprises much of the Christian tradition) ought to concede that the fall as a work of genuine freedom is an absurd "fact," an incomprehensible given which steadfastly and in principle resists causal explanation. The concluding section of the paper draws upon Ricoeur's insights to tell why the narrative structure of the "Adamic myth" (which has important positive functions of its own) begets as an unfortunate byproduct this tendency to spin out a causal account of the first evil, with the conceptual confusion resulting from it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463800

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263756
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): Whitehead Lorne
Abstract: Freud, 1917:416
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1464384

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263774
Date: 12 1, 1986
Author(s): Wolterstorff Richard
Abstract: Tracy 1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1465057

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i263803
Date: 3 1, 1958
Author(s): Wittgenstein Matthew G.
Abstract: Pelagian writings, "it is signifi- cant that Augustine now quotes Ambrose with increasing frequency and devotion" (1999b: 140)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1466069

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263794
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Sullivan Nadine Pence
Abstract: The Revelatory Text: Interpreting the New Testament as Sacred Scripture [New York: Harper San Francisco, 1991] The Revelatory Text: Interpreting the New Testament as Sacred Scripture 1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1466172

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i263808
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Williamson Tod
Abstract: Kristeva: 398 398
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1466465

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i263809
Date: 9 1, 1996
Author(s): Zaleski Charles T.
Abstract: Lear: 148-166, 219-246 148
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1466523

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Education / Revue canadienne de l'éducation
Publisher: Canadian Society for the Study of Education
Issue: i266065
Date: 1 1, 1958
Author(s): Winch Denis C.
Abstract: According to a school of thought that has been gaining ground for about a century, the social sciences are best conceived as styles of humanistic inquiry akin to hermeneutics rather than as branches of naturalistic inquiry paralleling the natural or physical sciences. In the past decade or so, advocates of this position have been active in providing critiques of educational research. It is argued that, although the case has some merit, the prognosis is mistaken--traditional naturalistic inquiry in education and the social sciences will continue to have an important and strong role. /// D'après une école de pensée qui gagne du terrain depuis environ un siècle, les sciences sociales devraient être considérées comme des enquêtes humanistes apparentées à l'herméneutique plutôt que comme des disciplines cherchant à comprendre la nature des choses comme le font les sciences naturelles. Au cours de la dernière décennie, les partisans de ce point de vue ont multiplié leurs critiques à l'endroit de la recherche en éducation. On affirme que, même si ce point de vue est valable à certains égards, le pronostic donné est erroné: les recherches en éducation cherchant à élucider la nature même de son objet d'étude et les sciences sociales continueront à jouer un rôle clé. /// Eine geistige Richtung, die sich seit etwa einem Jahrhundert stärker durchsetzt, sieht die Socialwissenschaften am ehesten als Arten humanistischer Untersuchung, die mit der Hermeneutik verwandt sind, denn als Zweige der naturalistischen Untersuchung, die den Natur- oder Physik-Wissenschaften gleichen. In den letzten zehn Jahren etwa waren Vertreter dieser Schule aktiv damit beschäftig, kritische Abhandlungen über erziehungswissenschaftliche Forschung vorzubringen. Es wird argumentiert, daß die gestellte Prognose falsch ist, wenngleich die Sache einen gewissen Wert hat--traditionelle naturalistiche Forschung in den Erziehungs--und Sozialwissenschaften wird weiterhin eine wichtige und starke Rolle spielen. /// De acuerdo a una corriente de pensamiento que ha estado ganando terreno durante un centenar de años, las ciencias sociales se conceben como estilos de investigación de índole humanística, similares a la hermenéutica, más bien que como ramas de una investigación naturalística paralela a las ciencias naturales o físicas. En aproximadamente la última década, los partidarios de esta posición han estado activos en preparar críticas de la investigación en educación. Se argumenta que, aunque su caso tiene algún mérito, la prognosis que dan es equivocada; la investigación tradicional de índole naturalística en educación y en ciencias sociales sequirá teniendo un papel fuerte y importante.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1495162

Journal Title: Western Folklore
Publisher: California Folklore Society
Issue: i266268
Date: 10 1, 1985
Author(s): Bellah Jay
Abstract: Sue Samuelson describes her own experi- ence as an "expert witness" in her "Folklore and the Legal System: The Expert Witness," Western Folklore 41 (1982): 139-144 10.2307/1499786 139
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1499375

Journal Title: Western Folklore
Publisher: California Folklore Society
Issue: i266257
Date: 1 1, 1964
Author(s): Hand Jack
Abstract: Wayland D. Hand, Popular Beliefs and Superstitions from North Carolina, vols. 6 and 7 of the Frank C. Brown Collection of North Carolina Folklore (Durham, 1961 and 1964) Hand Popular Beliefs and Superstitions from North Carolina 1964
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1499461

Journal Title: British Educational Research Journal
Publisher: Carfax Publishing Company
Issue: i266351
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Yorke D. M.
Abstract: In recent years personal construct theory has become increasingly used to underpin research into teachers' thinking, and a number of researchers have opted to give methodological prominence to the repertory grid. This paper points to the limitations of the theory in respect of research outside the domain of psychotherapy and to some of the problems associated with repertory grid studies. It is argued that repertory grids are inherently positivistic and are thus in philosophical tension with the theory on which they are based, a tension that is not removed by researching in a 'conversation paradigm'. The importance of events in personal construct theory is discussed, and it is suggested that an emphasis on events requires the researcher to adopt an approach that is informed by phenomenology and the philosophy of history. Finally, a return is made to the level of research practice,i and a methodological approach is outlined which is-to a greater extent than the repertory grid-consistent with the main thrust of personal construct theory. Stress is given to the importance of the quality of the relationships between constructs, since these have implications for connections between construing and action-an issue which is of crucial importance is the study of teachers' thinking.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1501228

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Harvard University Press
Issue: i267044
Date: 1 1, 1948
Author(s): Cuénot Christopher F.
Abstract: Comment je vois (1948), p. 23. 23 Comment je vois 1948
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1508793

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267129
Date: 7 1, 1798
Author(s): Wordsworth Richard E.
Abstract: Wordsworth's "Lines, Written a Few Miles Above Tintern Abbey" (1798) Wordsworth Lines, Written a Few Miles Above Tintern Abbey 1798
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509876

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267148
Date: 4 1, 1965
Author(s): d'Alverny Willemien
Abstract: Ein Jahrtausend lateinischer Hymnendichtung (2 vols.; ed. Guido Maria Dreves, rev. Clemens Blume S.J.; Leipzig: Reisland, 1909) 1. 288
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509888

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267141
Date: 7 1, 1988
Author(s): Ruf Frederick J.
Abstract: Ruf, "Coleridge's Biographia Literaria: Extravagantly Mixed Genres." Ruf Coleridge's Biographia Literaria: Extravagantly Mixed Genres
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1510012

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267152
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Idem Francis Schüssler
Abstract: The Eyes of Faith (New York: Fordham University Press, 1990) The Eyes of Faith 1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1510139

Journal Title: Design Issues
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i267285
Date: 10 1, 1958
Author(s): Polanyi Richard
Abstract: ) Schön (note 44).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1511599

Journal Title: Design Issues
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i267303
Date: 7 1, 1965
Author(s): Weber John
Abstract: Boltanski, "L'amour et la justice," 113 Boltanski 113 L'amour et la justice
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1511841

Journal Title: Vetus Testamentum
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i267662
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Westermann Brian
Abstract: Jacquet (pp. 541-542)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1519031

Journal Title: British Journal of Educational Studies
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i269832
Date: 9 1, 1989
Author(s): Woods Peter
Abstract: Economics is privileged in contemporary government policy such that all human transactions are seen as economic forms of exchange. Education has been discursively restructured according to the logic of the market, with education policy being increasingly colonised by economic policy imperatives. This paper explores some of the consequences of this reframing which draws upon metaphors from industrial and business domains. This paper examines a significant dimension of teaching that currently has marginal presence in official discourse: social contingency. We argue that social contingency is characterised by a variety of distinctive features that include unpredictability, relationality and ethical demands. The significance of social contingency is highlighted by a comparison with industrial production, which is organisationally contingent, and craft production, which is characterised as materially contingent. We argue that the different nature of contingency in these domains makes them inappropriate as metaphors for teaching. We explore the nature of social contingency and some of the practical and ethical consequences of the failure to articulate this in official discourse. Its absence in such discourse is illustrated by consideration of competence statements in the Initial Teacher Education context. We argue that the neglect of social contingency is founded on assumptions of teacher sovereignty that are both philosophically and ethically unsustainable.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1555869

Journal Title: Novum Testamentum
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i270179
Date: 7 1, 1957
Author(s): Bömer Gerd
Abstract: F. BÖMER: Untersuchungen über die Religion der Sklaven in Griechenland und Rom. i, AbhMainz 1957, S. 178 f. Bömer 178 i Rom. 1957
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1560014

Journal Title: Novum Testamentum
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i270171
Date: 7 1, 1935
Author(s): Cordier H.
Abstract: supra, p. 166; p. 178, n. I, 2
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1560228

Journal Title: Diacritics
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i270545
Date: 4 1, 1943
Author(s): Zorrilla Joan Ramon
Abstract: Resina
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1566435

Journal Title: Diacritics
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i270555
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Tagore Gayatri Chakravorty
Abstract: Rajat Ray's in Exploring Emotional History: Gender, Mentality, and Literature in the Indian Awakening [79, 115n28]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1566443

Journal Title: Die Welt des Islams
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i270844
Date: 3 1, 1997
Author(s): Ammann Ludwig
Abstract: Gaebel (1995)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1571125

Journal Title: Studia Islamica
Publisher: G.-P. Maisonneuve-Larose
Issue: i271907
Date: 1 1, 1963
Author(s): Theater Henri
Abstract: Op. cit., pp. 152-162.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1595477

Journal Title: Studia Islamica
Publisher: G.-P. Maisonneuve-Larose
Issue: i271952
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): BloomAbstract: Bloom, Kabbalab and Criticism, pp. 33-35, 71-79, 95-126. Bloom 33 Kabbalab and Criticism
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1595855

Journal Title: Studia Islamica
Publisher: G.-P. Maisonneuve-Larose
Issue: i271962
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Cornell Fernando R.
Abstract: V.J. Cornell, The way of Abiu Madyan, Cambridge, 1996, 122-3 Cornell 122 The way of Abiu Madyan 1996
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1596166

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i273563
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Yerushalmi Howard L.
Abstract: Robert Bellah and colleagues' Habits of the Heart (1985)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1602332

Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i301520
Date: 1 1, 1963
Author(s): Milton Joel D.
Abstract: p. 84
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1770741

Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i301593
Date: 4 1, 1989
Author(s): Wolk Julie A.
Abstract: A.A. Verbitskaya, Pokinutyi (Riga, 1925/6) Verbitskaya Pokinutyi 1925
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1771253

Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i301599
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): Zygelbojm D.G.
Abstract: Levinas himself nods when he introduces these terms into a discussion of S.Y Agnon in "Poetry and Revelation."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1771263

Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i301584
Date: 1 1, 1928
Author(s): Woolf Stacy
Abstract: Myself with Others 27 27
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1771629

Journal Title: Journal of African Cultural Studies
Publisher: Taylor & Francis Ltd
Issue: i302185
Date: 6 1, 1982
Author(s): Wolf George Clement
Abstract: This essay explores the relation of authority to legitimacy through the social construction of local histories that validate claims to 'authentic' rulership. Using the historical example of the Chiefdom of Uyombe in northern Zambia, I intend to argue that the construction of these local histories has been a crucial element in the process of domination, subjugation, resistance and collaboration between rulers and those they would rule. Exploring specific Gramscian concepts, I will also argue that historical narratives contain hegemonic and ideological components that are critical to relating authority to legitimacy in an active manner. These narratives contain African voices, which express varied local interests. Through the narratives, Africans may be seen as active agents in contributing to the making of their own local histories of rulership. Thus, authority and legitimacy are conjoined through the fabrication, inscription and recitation of historical narratives and are an essential part of governance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1771857

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Porter Institute for Poetics and Semiotics
Issue: i303065
Date: 1 1, 1968
Author(s): Wilden Louise O.
Abstract: 11. 632-633
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1772376

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Porter Institute for Poetics and Semiotics
Issue: i303076
Date: 1 1, 1973
Author(s): Towner Daniel
Abstract: Mekhilta, cf. Lauterbach's edition (176 ff.) 176
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1772567

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303078
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Schwarzchild Susan
Abstract: Rotenstreich 1968: 3-4 3
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1772696

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303087
Date: 10 1, 1988
Author(s): Schank Mark
Abstract: Lakoff and Turner (1989)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1772822

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303088
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Wimmers Dorrit
Abstract: Martinez-Bonati's own illustration (1981: 112) 112
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773077

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303088
Date: 12 1, 1978
Author(s): White Meir
Abstract: Labov (1972)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773082

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303098
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): White Gabriel
Abstract: Zikir Vakca-i Haile-i Osmaniye
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773125

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303114
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): White C. Allen
Abstract: White 1973: 22-29 22
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773130

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303097
Date: 4 1, 1963
Author(s): Wellek Chanita
Abstract: Philip Johnson-Laird's (1983: 413) 413
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773141

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303104
Date: 4 1, 1988
Author(s): Zea Walter D.
Abstract: Mignolo (1991, 1992a)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773227

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303096
Date: 12 1, 1982
Author(s): Tourangeau Raymond W.
Abstract: ibid.: 149
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773290

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303109
Date: 7 1, 1976
Author(s): Woolf Louise Shabat
Abstract: ibid.: 270 270
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773356

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303121
Date: 7 1, 1984
Author(s): Wellbery Adam
Abstract: Wellbery 1984: 141-42 141
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773381

Journal Title: The Journal of African History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i209472
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Portelli Elizabeth
Abstract: H. U. E. Thoden Van Velzen, 'Robinson Crusoe and Friday: strength and weakness of the big man paradigm', Man (n.s.), VIII, iv (1973), 592-612 10.2307/2800743 592
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/181133

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: The American Historical Association
Issue: i332152
Date: 6 1, 1983
Author(s): Higham David
Abstract: john Higham, History: Professional Scholarship in America [Baltimore, Md., 1983], 241 Higham 241 History: Professional Scholarship in America 1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1873746

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: The American Historical Association
Issue: i332152
Date: 6 1, 1954
Author(s): Thucydides Allan
Abstract: Thucydides, History of the Peloponnesian War, trans. Rex Warner (Harmondsworth, Eng., 1954). Thucydides History of the Peloponnesian War 1954
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1873749

Journal Title: PSA: Proceedings of the Biennial Meeting of the Philosophy of Science Association
Publisher: Philosophy of Science Association
Issue: i209985
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): Rabinow Richard J.
Abstract: Against the background of disputes about modernity and post-modernity in philosophy, this paper probes the differences among Gadamer, Habermas, and Rorty. Focusing on the themes of praxis, phronesis, and practical discourse, it is argued that what initially appear to be hard and fast cleavages and irreconcilable differences turn out to be differences of emphasis. The common ground that emerges is adumbrated as "non-foundational pragmatic humanism". Although there are important differences among these three thinkers each of their voices contributes to a coherent conversation in developing "moral-political vision".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/192429

Journal Title: PSA: Proceedings of the Biennial Meeting of the Philosophy of Science Association
Publisher: Philosophy of Science Association
Issue: i209984
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): van Fraassen Patrick A.
Abstract: Using the methods of hermeneutic phenomenology, and against the background of the principle that the real is what is or can be given in a public way in perception as a state of the World, and of the thesis established elsewhere that acts of perception are always epistemic, contextual, and hermeneutical, the writer proposes that objects of scientific observation are perceptual objects, states of the World described by theoretical scientific terms and, therefore, real. This thesis of Hermeneutical Realism is proved by showing how the response of a standard instrument is 'read' as if it were a 'text'. Conclusions are then drawn about a number of topics, including Scientific Realism, Conventionalism, and Cultural Relativism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/192657

Journal Title: British Journal of Political Science
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i210084
Date: 7 1, 1992
Author(s): Merelman Richard M.
Abstract: This paper utilizes recent Marxist cultural theory to theorize about the cultural dynamics of racial group conflict in the United States. After laying out a typology of cultural relations between dominant and subordinate groups, the article examines data on African-American cultural penetration of American public culture. The data indicate that since the late 1960s 'imagerial hegemony' has yielded to 'imagerial projection' for African-Americans. The article concludes by speculating about some interpretations and consequences of this phenomenon.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/194196

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: The American Political Science Association
Issue: i333662
Date: 6 1, 1966
Author(s): Skinner John G.
Abstract: Recent challenges to traditional approaches and purposes for studying the history of political theory have raised questions about its constitution as both a subject matter and subfield of political science. Methodological arguments advocating what is characterized as a more truly historical mode of inquiry for understanding political ideas and recovering textual meaning have become increasingly popular. The relationship of these hermeneutical claims about historicity, such as that advanced by Quentin Skinner, to the actual practice of interpretation is problematical. Such claims are more a defense of a certain norm of historical investigation than a method of interpretation, and the implications of this norm for the reconstitution of the history of political theory require careful consideration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1961112

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: The American Political Science Association
Issue: i333668
Date: 12 1, 1976
Author(s): Tinder Deborah
Abstract: Taylor, it has to be noted, would presumably quarrel with this "either/or" formulation, either interpret the classics or interpret the world. His Hegel book obvi- ously falls within the genre of commentary on the tradi- tion. Furthermore, in the preface to its condensation as Hegel and Modern Society, he emphasizes the relevance of Hegel's political philosophy to our time (1979, pp. xi- xii) xi
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1962293

Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20008149
Date: 5 1, 1998
Author(s): Friedman R. Z.
Abstract: Jean-Paul Sartre, Anti-Semite and Jew (first published 1946), trans. George J. Becker (New York: Schocken, 1965), pp. 67-9.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20008152

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Ablex Publishing Corporation
Issue: i20008666
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Jung Hwa Yol
Abstract: "The Study of Texts," paper presented at the Annual International Meeting of the Conference for the Study of Political Thought, City University of New York Graduate School, New York City, March 20-23, 1975
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20008671

Journal Title: American Philosophical Quarterly
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Issue: i20009122
Date: 4 1, 1964
Author(s): Edie James M.
Abstract: Aron Gurwitsch, "La conception de la conscience chez Kant et chez Husserl," in Bulletin de la société française de philosophie (1959), 65-96
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20009127

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20010370
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Papastephanou Marianna
Abstract: Rawls's recent modification of his theory of justice claims that political liberalism is free-standing and "falls under the category of the political. It works entirely within that domain and does not rely on anything outside it." In this article I pursue the metatheoretical goal of obtaining insight into the anthropological assumptions that have remained so far unacknowledged by Rawls and critics alike. My argument is that political liberalism has a dependence on comprehensive liberalism and its conception of a self-serving subjectivity that is far more binding as well as undesirable than it has been so far acknowledged. I proceed with a heuristic approach that introduces us to the possibility that political liberalism presupposes tacitly the Occidental metanarrative of reason harnessing rampant self-interest and subordinating it to a higher-order interest. As the presuppositions of political liberalism emerge, I draw from the debate between Rawls and Habermas in order to illustrate my argument for the existence of a dependence on these presuppositions. I outline some implications of the anthropological basis of political liberalism and conclude by exemplifying them with reference to Rawls's comments on the division of a cake.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20010377

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20011066
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Bentz Valerie Malhotra
Abstract: This paper is a reflection on the boundaries of academic discourse as I came to be acutely aware of them while attempting to teach a graduate seminar in qualitative research methods. The purpose of the readings in Husserl and Schutz and the writing exercises was to assist students trained in quantitative methods and steeped in positivistic assumptions about research to write phenomenological descriptions of lived experience. "Paul" could not write the assigned papers due to a diagnosed writing "disability" but he did submit fictional stories and sketches which beautifully illustrated the concepts of Husserl and Schutz. Paul's disability presented a natural "bracketing" experiment which brought the positivistic assumptions surrounding academic research and writing to the forefront. I engaged in verbal dialogues with Paul, in which he discussed the philosophical ideas. My work with Paul highlighted the extent to which the academic lifeworld marginalizes those who seek to write from the heart, disguising even the work of those philosophers who wish to uncover direct experiences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20011071

Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20019618
Date: 9 1, 1993
Author(s): Humbert David
Abstract: SE 21, 7-8
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20019620

Journal Title: Daedalus
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: i20028008
Date: 10 1, 2005
Author(s): Geertz Clifford
Abstract: John Hughes, Indonesian Upheaval [New York: McKay, 1967], 173-183
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20028014

Journal Title: Contemporary European History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20081335
Date: 2 1, 2007
Author(s): Freeman Kirrily
Abstract: Jean-Marie Guillon, 'Sociabilité et Rumeurs en Temps de Guerre: Bruits et Contestations en Provence dans les Années Quarante', Provence Historique 47 (187) (1997), 245-58.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20081339

Journal Title: Contemporary European History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20081727
Date: 3 1, 2000
Author(s): Deli Peter
Abstract: Face au Scepticisme [1976-1993]: les mutations du paysage intellectuel ou l'invention de l'intellectuel démocratique (Paris:Editions la Découverte, 1994).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20081731

Journal Title: Contemporary European History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20081753
Date: 11 1, 2000
Author(s): Geary Dick
Abstract: Stefan Berger and David Broughton, eds., The Force of Labour. The Western European Labour Movement and the Working Classes (Oxford: Berg, 1995).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20081764

Journal Title: Contemporary European History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20081854
Date: 11 1, 2002
Author(s): Vion Antoine
Abstract: Grémion, Intelligence de l'anticommunisme, 623.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20081863

Journal Title: Studies in East European Thought
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i20099867
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): Bird Robert
Abstract: Aleksej Losev's definition of myth centres on the concept of detachment. In modern times detachment has most often figured in the context of philosophical aesthetics, where it is a cognitive category akin to Kant's "disinterestedness" or the Russian formalists' "estrangement." However Losev's usage also makes reference to the ontological sense of detachment as contemplative ascent (cf. Meister Eckhardt's "Abgeschiedenheit"). Thus, Losev's concept of myth combines both senses of detachment, binding perceptual attitude and being together in a double movement of resignation from the world and union with meaning; this movement literally makes sense out of reality. It therefore bears comparison to the treatment of distanciation in contemporary hermeneutics, where detachment is a key condition of understanding. By investigating Losev's connections to other Russian thinkers, the author makes a case for a distinct Russian tradition of hermeneutic philosophy (V. Ivanov, G. Shpet, A. Bakshy, A. Losev).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20099872

Journal Title: Philosophy East and West
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Issue: i20109441
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Fox Russell Arben
Abstract: Puritanism and Confucianism have little in common in terms of their substantive teachings, but they do share an emphasis on bounded, authoritative, localized human arrangements, and this profoundly challenges the dominant presumptions of contemporary globalization. It is not enough to say that these worldviews are "communitarian" alternatives to globalism, for that defines away what needs to be explained. This article compares the ontology of certain elements of the Puritan and Confucian worldviews, and, by focusing on the role of both authority and activity in these systems, assesses (with the assistance of Max Weber) the theories of harmony that each invoke. It concludes by identifying the distinct options that these two modes of human existence suggest for those who wish to defend the relevance of boundedness and authority, and thus the very possibility of a human-scaled politics, in today's world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20109446

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20126950
Date: 3 1, 1977
Author(s): Collins James
Abstract: S. Givone, La storia della filosofia secundo Kant (Milan: Mursia, 1972), especially pp. 135-146.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20126955

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20127871
Date: 3 1, 1983
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: S. Kierkegaard, Kierkegaard's Concluding Unscientific Postscript, trans. D. Swenson and W. Lowrie (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1941), p. 99.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20127878

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20129409
Date: 6 1, 1993
Author(s): Rescher Nicholas
Abstract: Philosophy: Princeton Studies of Humanistic Scholarship in America, p. x.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20129414

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20130029
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Muldoon Mark S.
Abstract: Picard, The World of Silence, 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20130031

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20130774
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Watson Stephen H.
Abstract: Ibid., 21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20130779

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20130854
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Avramenko Richard
Abstract: von Heyking, Augustine and Politics as Longing in the World, 51-76.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20130859

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20131299
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Norris Christopher
Abstract: Ideology and Rationality in the History of the Life Sci- ences, trans. Arthur Goldhammer (Cambridge: MIT Press, 1988)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20131302

Journal Title: Revista de Historia de América
Publisher: Instituto Panamericano de Geografia e Historia
Issue: i20139938
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Guiance Ariel
Abstract: Véase también Servier, op. cit., especialmente cap. IV, "La utopía y la conquista del Nuevo Mundo".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20139941

Journal Title: Revista de Historia de América
Publisher: Instituto Panamericano de Geografia e Historia
Issue: i20139971
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Gómez Fernando
Abstract: The Dustbin of History by Greil Marcus, Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1995.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20139975

Journal Title: Die Welt des Islams
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i20140776
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Schielke Samuli
Abstract: Thomas Kuhn, The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, 3rd ed. (Chicago, Chicago Univer- sity Press, 1996), chapter 11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20140782

Journal Title: The Historical Journal
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20175108
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Isaac Joel
Abstract: Jamie Cohen-Cole, 'The reflexivity of cognitive science: the scientist as model of human nature', History of the Human Sciences, 18 (2005), pp. 107-39.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20175119

Journal Title: Ethnomusicology Forum
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i20184534
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Shelemay Kay Kaufman
Abstract: This paper explores the interactive relationship of memory and history during the ethnographic research process, using as its case study interviews with Syrian Jews about a hymn (pizmon) repertory. The paper uses strategies of the new historicism as well as concepts from psychology, literary theory and anthropology to explore ways in which ethnomusicologists are instrumental both in eliciting memories and in constructing historical narratives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20184538

Journal Title: Ethnomusicology Forum
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i20184534
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Bithell Caroline
Abstract: This paper focuses on the revival and reconstruction of polyphonic settings of the Latin Mass in selected villages in Corsica. Many such mass settings, often unique to a single village and preserved only in oral tradition, fell into disuse during the first half of the 20th century for a variety of reasons that are briefly explored. In some cases, however, fragments remained in the memories of surviving singers or on old recordings and these were to provide the seeds for the repertoire's later renaissance. My account of the processes of retrieval, reconstruction and re-absorption of the musical material itself is balanced by an examination of the different motives and ideologies of the various parties involved, together with an exploration of the broader theoretical implications of the enterprise of reclaiming the musical patrimony and, in particular, what it reveals about attitudes towards the past, authenticity, ownership and local identity. In the course of my analysis I draw on a series of metaphors and paradigms from the fields of archaeology and heritage conservation. Ultimately, I argue that the renewed practice of singing the mass in the "old way" should be viewed as an authentic part of the Corsican present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20184542

Journal Title: Ethnomusicology Forum
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i20184615
Date: 11 1, 2008
Author(s): Iguchi Kawori
Abstract: This article seeks to explore the act of reading as an essential element of notated musical practices and of the construction of knowledge about them. By examining how musical notations affect their reader-performers (and vice versa) in two different musical contexts in Japan--the Kyoto Gion festival and amateur lessons on the nohkan flute--the article draws attention to the ways in which the act of reading notation is central to the construction of knowledge about such musical practices. With reference to Etienne Wenger's notion of learning as a process of alignment, and to debates in the anthropology of reading, it then argues that, for learners of these musics, reading notations is a practice of reverse tracing towards the bodily practices of the accomplished. In discussing the musicians' concern for the efficacy of reading as a means of achieving a relevant state of understanding, the article also addresses questions on the role of reading as a method of becoming knowledgeable in the practice of anthropological inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20184621

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i210419
Date: 7 1, 1998
Author(s): Klausner Samuel Z.
Abstract: The ways in which values are assimilated to social research differ according to the theoretical frame of reference informing the research. An example from the writings of E. Digby Baltzell illustrates how a moral commitment shaped his assumptions about the nature of the social matrix and his research strategies. A Western moral rhetoric fares well if the researcher chooses a methodologically individualist framework. The framework assists a moral rhetoric by providing it with concrete rather than abstract social actors and with a basis for explanation in terms of motive rather than situational forces. Along the way moral statements can appear in the form of empirical generalizations and historical laws. Should sociologists deem ethically neutral social research desirable, this study suggests that concentration on scientific method, without exploring the value bases for selecting a frame of reference, is not a promising approach. A value analysis, especially around Weber's "value relevance," may function propaedeuticly.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/201851

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i210402
Date: 4 1, 1991
Author(s): Kaye Howard L.
Abstract: In the 1950s and 1960s Freudian theory was deemed to be a vital part of the sociological tradition, but since then it has fallen from favor, largely because of the simplifications and misinterpretations both by Freud's sociological critics and by his supporters. Chief among such misunderstandings is the tendency to view Freud's social theory as a variant of that of Hobbes, in which a selfish and asocial human nature is made social through the imposition of external constraints; these constraints, as Durkheim stated, eventually are "internalized" into the personalities of social beings. Against such a claim this paper argues that Freud's views differ profoundly from those of Hobbes and that the myth of the Hobbesian Freud has so distorted Freud's most fundamental concepts that their social theoretical significance has been largely obscured.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/201875

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i210405
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): Hall John R.
Abstract: Conventionally, proposals to improve working relations between sociology and history have been interdisciplinary. The present essay advances an alternative approach-consolidation of sociohistorical inquiry as a transdisciplinary enterprise. All socio-historical inquiry depends on four elemental forms of discourse: discourse on values, narrative discourse, social theoretical discourse, and the discourse of explanation. Though inquiry is transdisciplinary in the problematics of these discourses, concrete methodology typically is oriented either toward theorization in relation to cases (historical sociology) or toward comprehensive analysis of a single phenomenon (sociological history). Varying the articulated relations among the four forms of discourse once for historical sociology and again for sociological history yields eight ideal typical strategies of inquiry. The four strategies of historical sociology include universal history, theory application, macro-analytic history, and contrast-oriented comparison. The parallel strategies for sociological history are situational history, specific history, configurational history, and historicism. These ideal types offer standard reference points that help clarify the underpinnings of a diverse range of scholarly practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/201957

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i210416
Date: 3 1, 1997
Author(s): Smith Philip
Abstract: Contemporary social theory has turned increasingly to concepts such as civil society, community, and the public sphere in order to theorize about the construction of vital, democratic, and solidaristic political cultures. The dominant prescriptions for attaining this end invoke the need for institutional and procedural reform, but overlook the autonomous role of culture in shaping and defining the forms of social solidarity. This article proposes a model of solidarity based on the two genres of Romance and Irony, and argues that these narrative forms offer useful vocabularies for organizing public discourse within and between civil society and its constituent communities. Whilst unable to sustain fully-inclusive and solidaristic political cultures on their own, in combination the genres of Romance and Irony allow for solidaristic forms built around tolerance, reflexivity, and intersubjectivity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/202135

Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Editions Ophrys
Issue: i20453408
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Lemel Yannick
Abstract: Steve Bruce (2001)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20453412

Journal Title: Revista Mexicana de Sociología
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Sociales de la Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico
Issue: i20454218
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Suárez Hugo José
Abstract: Suárez, 2003a
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20454221

Journal Title: The Slavic and East European Journal
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of Slavic and East European Languages (AATSEEL of the U.S., Inc.)
Issue: i20459564
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Marquette Scarlet
Abstract: E. Lea Carpenter and her Har- vard Commencement speech, "Auden's Little Things" (June 2003)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20459569

Journal Title: Oxford Review of Education
Publisher: Routledge Journals, Taylor & Francis
Issue: i20462366
Date: 2 1, 2008
Author(s): Crossouard Barbara
Abstract: Formative assessment has attracted increasing attention from both practitioners and scholars over the last decade. This paper draws on the authors' empirical research conducted over eleven years in educational situations ranging from infant schools to postgraduate education to propose a theorisation of formative assessment. Formative assessment is seen as taking place when teachers and learners seek to respond to student work, making judgements about what is good learning with a view to improving that learning. However, the theorisation emphasises formative assessment as being a discursive social practice, involving dialectical, sometimes conflictual, processes. These bring into play issues of power in which learners' and teachers' identities are implicated and what counts as legitimate knowledge is framed by institutional discourses and summative assessment demands. The paper argues that, rather than only paying attention to the content of learning, an ambition for formative assessment might be to deconstruct these contextual issues, allowing a critical consideration of learning as a wider process of becoming. The article suggests a model that might be useful to teachers and learners in achieving this.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20462368

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i20475540
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Chaubet François
Abstract: Michel Trebitsch, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20475554

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für philosophische Forschung
Publisher: Verlag Anton Hain
Issue: i20482247
Date: 6 1, 1976
Author(s): Bollnow Otto Friedrich
Abstract: o. S. Fahne 2f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20482249

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für philosophische Forschung
Publisher: Vittorio Klostermann
Issue: i20484715
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Rinderle Peter
Abstract: Rinderle (2007, 1. Begriffe im Kontext).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20484719

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für philosophische Forschung
Publisher: Vittorio Klostermann
Issue: i20484947
Date: 6 1, 2000
Author(s): Große Jürgen
Abstract: Hans Kellner, „As Real as it Gets”. Ricoeur and Narrativity, in: Meaning in Texts and Actions: Questioning Paul Ricoeur, hg. David E. Klemm und Wil- liam Schweiker, Charlottesville-London 1993, 49-66, dort 62.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20484953

Journal Title: Human Rights Quarterly
Publisher: The Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i20486733
Date: 2 1, 2009
Author(s): Addis Adeno
Abstract: John Rawls, A Theory of Justice 455 (1971).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20486739

Journal Title: Journal of Feminist Studies in Religion
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i20487848
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): West Traci C.
Abstract: Editorial, Washington Afro-American, December 3-9, 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20487856

Journal Title: Revue d'histoire moderne et contemporaine (1954-)
Publisher: Société d'histoire moderne et contemporaine
Issue: i20530135
Date: 6 1, 1996
Author(s): Mollier Jean-Yves
Abstract: C. Ginzburg, Le Fromage et les vers, traduction française, Flammarion, Paris, 1980.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20530143

Journal Title: Philosophy
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20533165
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): van Woudenberg René
Abstract: Fred Dretske, "Epistemic Operators", Journal of Philosophy 67 (1970): 1003-1013.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20533170

Journal Title: Hispamérica
Publisher: Hispamérica, Saúl Sosnowski
Issue: i20540263
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Villanueva Alberto
Abstract: OPI, p. 262. Señalo aquí la relación entre religar y religión, etimológicamente "reunir lo fragmentado", que parece fiel al proyecto de Girri.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20540275

Journal Title: Hispamérica
Publisher: Hispamérica, Saúl Sosnowski
Issue: i20540552
Date: 8 1, 2004
Author(s): Tompkins Cynthia
Abstract: Ver Nelly Richard, "Latinoamérica y la posmodernidad", Revista de crítica cultural, 13 (abril 1991), pp. 15-9.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20540573

Journal Title: Hispamérica
Publisher: Hispamérica, Saúl Sosnowski
Issue: i20540603
Date: 4 1, 2005
Author(s): Aínsa Fernando
Abstract: Manuel Fraijó "Walter Benjamin: las reflexiones de una víctima de la violencia", Pensando en la violencia. Desde Walter Benjamin, Hanna Arendt, René Girard y Paul Ricoeur, José Antonio Binaburo y Xabier Etxeberria (eds.) Colección Los Libros de la Catarata Madrid, Bakeaz/Los Libros de la Catarata, 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20540606

Journal Title: Hispamérica
Publisher: Hispamérica, Saúl Sosnowski
Issue: i20540798
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Willson Patricia
Abstract: Ver, sobre este tema, M.T. Gramuglio, "Las minorías y la defensa de la cultura. Proyecciones de un tópico de la crítica inglesa en Sur", Boletín/7 (octubre 1999), pp. 71-7.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20540801

Journal Title: Hispamérica
Publisher: Hispamérica, Saúl Sosnowski
Issue: i20541639
Date: 8 1, 1978
Author(s): Molloy Sylvia
Abstract: "La sustitución del tema de la muerte por el que la locura no marca una ruptura sino más bien una torsión dentro de la misma inquietud. Se trata siempre de la nada de la existencia pero esa nada ya no se reconoce como término exterior y final, a la vez amenaza y conclusión; se la experimenta en cambio desde el interior, como la forma continua y constante de la existencia", Michel Foucault, Histoire de la folie à l'âge classique, Paris, Union Générale des Editeurs, 1961, p. 28. Traducción nuestra.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20541641

Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20542799
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Brincat Shannon
Abstract: Hegel quoted in Mieczyslaw Maneli, 'Three Concepts of Freedom: Kant - Hegel - Marx', Interpretation, 7:1 (January, 1978), p. 28
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20542805

Journal Title: Quaderni Urbinati di Cultura Classica
Publisher: Instituto Editoriali e Poligrafici Internazionali
Issue: i20546867
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Giordano-Zecharya Manuela
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20546873

Journal Title: The Journal of Asian Studies
Publisher: The Association for Asian Studies, Inc.
Issue: i309677
Date: 8 1, 1978
Author(s): Weber Charles F.
Abstract: Although the Thai-Lao peasants living in rain-fed agricultural communities in northeastern Thailand have experienced some improvements in their socioeconomic situation as a consequence of the growth of the Thai economy since the mid-1950s, these peasants still constitute the poorest sector of the population of Thailand. Moreover, the socioeconomic position of the rural northeastern Thai populace has actually declined relative to that of the urban populace and that of the rural populace living in central Thailand. The economic disadvantageous position of Thai-Lao peasants is linked with a sense of being an ethnoregional minority within a polity that has been highly centralized since reforms instituted at the end of the nineteenth century. Much of the social action of Thai-Lao peasants with reference to the political-economic constraints on their world can be understood, as long-term research in one community reveals, as having been impelled by rational calculation aimed at improving the well being of peasant families. The ways in which peasants have assessed in practice the justice of these constraints as well as the ways in which they have assessed the limits to entrepreneurship must be seen, however, as being rooted in moral premises that Thai-Lao villagers have appropriated from Theravada Buddhism as known to them in their popular culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2054768

Journal Title: New Hibernia Review / Iris Éireannach Nua
Publisher: Center for Irish Studies at the University of St. Thomas
Issue: i20557567
Date: 10 1, 1999
Author(s): Ó Laoire Lillis
Abstract: Gearóid Ó Crualaoich, "Litríocht na Gaeltachta: Seoladh isteach ar pheirspeictíocht ó thaobh na litríochta béil," in Litríocht na Gaeltachta, ed. Pádraig Ó Fiannachta, Léachtaí Cholm Cille, XIX (Maigh Nuad: An Sagart, 1989), pp. 8-25.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20557587

Journal Title: New Hibernia Review / Iris Éireannach Nua
Publisher: Center for Irish Studies at the University of St. Thomas
Issue: i20558102
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Wilson James Matthew
Abstract: Luke Gibbons, "'Into the Cyclops Eye': James Barry, Historical Portraiture and Colonial Ire- land." Unpublished typescript.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20558115

Journal Title: The Journal of Asian Studies
Publisher: The Association for Asian Studies, Inc.
Issue: i309685
Date: 8 1, 1976
Author(s): Ricoeur Jeff
Abstract: This article suggests that two distinct modes of text-building constraints coincide in the Indonesian novel "Surabaya." The first set of constraints consists of narrative functions that shape sentence-level grammar within the story; the second level of text-building constraints shapes the thematic structure of the story. The author argues that, unlike its narrative structure, which is bound by the linearity of time, the thematic structure, of "Surabaya" is defined by a hierarchy of "heavier" and "lighter" themes, the "heavier" themes being evoked more often than are the "lighter" themes. He suggests that heaviness of theme is a strategy of text building found in classical Malaysian (Hikayat) texts, gamelan orchestra musical organization, and in calendric reckoning in much of Indonesia. He argues, in sum, for a method of writing that encourages grammatical description from two or more perspectives. "Binocular vision," to use Gregory Bateson's words, is necessary in writing to provide a more honest, richer description of a text than a single mode of grammatical description can provide; it makes available to readers more than one means of access to the text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2056446

Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Istituto Gramsci Editore
Issue: i20565388
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Maiello Francesco H.
Abstract: La prima edizione del calendario composto esclusivamente di immagini e simboli Almanack des bergers, Liège, V.ve Barnabé, 1758. I calendari per simboli sono: Dieu soit béni e Almanack du bon laboureur: «Il arriva plus que centenaire jusqu'en 1850»: Socard, Mémoires de la Société académique d'agriculture des sciences, arts et belles lettres du département de l'Aube, 1881, p. 336. In questa nuova prospettiva andrebbe studiato il Messager Boiteux, il calendario di Basilea, poi stampato a Vevey dall'inizio del XVIII secolo e ampiamente diffiiso in Francia, soprattutto a partire dalla meta del Settecento.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20565393

Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Edizioni Dedalo
Issue: i20565540
Date: 3 1, 1993
Author(s): Ceci Lucia
Abstract: Cfr. Miccoli, Una chiesa lacerata, in Id., Era mito della cristianità e secolarizzazione, cit., pp. 455-473, pp. 459-461.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20565553

Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Edizioni Dedalo
Issue: i20565615
Date: 6 1, 1994
Author(s): Festa Roberto
Abstract: Dopo un periodo, negli anni Sessanta e Settanta, in cui la fortuna di Lovejoy sembrò declinare, lo studioso è tornato d'attualità negli anni Ottanta, con la ripresa della di- scussione teorica intorno alia storia intellettuale. Nel 1987 il «Journal of the History of Ideas» dedicò un numero per celebrare il mezzo secolo della Great Chain of Being, con articoli di D.J. Wilson, G. Gordon-Bournique, E.P. Mahoney, F. Oakley e Melvin Ri- chter (cfr. Lovejoy, «The Great Chain of Being» and the History of Ideas, in «Journal of the History of Ideas», 48, 2, 1987). Contributi importanti sono inoltre venuti da Donald R. Kelley, Tattuale editor del «Journal». Tra questi citiamo D.R. Kelley, Horizons of In- tellectual History: Retrospect, Circumspect, Prospect, in «Journal of the History of Ideas», 48, 1, 1987, pp. 143-169; e, sempre di Kelley, What is happening to the History of Ideas?, in «Journal of the History of Ideas», 51, 1990, pp. 3-25. Proprio quest'ultimo articolo rappresenta a tutt'oggi uno dei piú equilibrad tentativi di bilancio della history of ideas, e al tempo stesso una meditazione sui futuro della disciplina da parte di uno degli «ere- di» di Lovejoy. Significativamente Kelley propone di utilizzare Tespressione intellectual history, e non piú history of ideas, proprio a voler allontanare i «fantasmi» di idealismo impliciti nella scelta di fare della storia della filosofia il referente privilegiato della di- sciplina (un'attitudine che era certamente di Lovejoy). Intellectual history è secondo Kel- ley «doing a kind, or several kinds, of historical interpretation, in which philosophy and literature figure not as controlling methods but as human creations suggesting the con- ditions of historical understanding» [What is happening, cit., p. 18). L'approccio inter- disciplinare, che era stato uno dei punti centrali del programma lovejoyano, rimane an- cor oggi secondo Kelley valido, anche se ciò non deve significare Tadozione di strumenti critici «alla moda» propri di altre discipline. A questo proposito si pone per Kelley il problema dell'atteggiamento da tenere nei confronti di studiosi come Hayden White, Dominick LaCapra, David Harlan, teorici del linguistic turn, un modo di fare storia che si awale delle indicazioni provenienti dall'ermeneutica di Gadamer e Ricoeur, da Hei- degger e dai suoi discepoli francesi Foucault e Derrida, e che rifiuta ogni reale possibi- lità di giungere a una determinazione delle intenzioni dell'autore, cioè di un «significa- to», della verità di un'opera, e del contesto entro cui Topera è stata composta. Per Kel- ley non era possibile evitare le implicazioni che il linguistic turn poneva, tanto piú che esso si rivelava utile soprattutto nel rivelare risorse, strutture, memorie culturali conser- vate nel linguaggio (topoi, tropi, metafore, analogie), non soltanto dell'alta cultura ma anche delle forme di espressione irriflessa, o popolare (anche questo secondo un'indica- zione di Lovejoy). Se è però vero che il significato di un testo non è univoco, è altret- tanto vero secondo Kelley che la ricerca delle intenzioni dell'autore è premessa indi- spensabile di qualsiasi lavoro di storia intellettuale. Quanto alia questione dell'attenzio- ne al «contesto», che i sostenitori del linguistic turn denigrano, Kelley prende atto che non è certamente possibile giungere alia ricostruzione dell'intera rete di relazioni entro cui un'opera si colloca. Ciò non significa pero che il testo o l'autore studiato non pos- sano essere collocati in un «contesto», e che quindi, attraverso lo studio del linguaggio di un'epoca, non si riesca a ricostruire le condizioni di possibilità per la nascita di un'opera.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20565621

Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Istituto Gramsci Editore
Issue: i20565772
Date: 9 1, 1987
Author(s): Ricuperati Giuseppe
Abstract: Cfr. Aa.Vv., L'aggiornamento degli insegnanti, a cura di G. Quazza, Torino, Stampatori, 1978.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20565776

Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Edizioni Dedalo
Issue: i20566703
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Sgambati Valeria
Abstract: Cfr. C. Ef Reagan and D, Stewart, eds., The Philosophy of Paul Ricoeur, Boston, 1978, pp. 77-79, citato in H. White, La questione della narrazione nella teoria contemporanea della storiografia, cit., pp. 69-70.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20566708

Journal Title: The Journal of Asian Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20619665
Date: 2 1, 2009
Author(s): Liu Lydia H.
Abstract: Lu Xun 1981, 6:608
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20619669

Journal Title: The Oral History Review
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i20627996
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Kirby R. Kenneth
Abstract: In this article, the author argues that many of the best practices of oral history reflect phenomenological thinking even though practitioners may not describe themselves as using phenomenological methods. The author suggests that knowledge and application of phenomenology can clarify or minimize such potential problems as interviewer bias and informant unreliability and can refute accusations that oral history is less reliable than history taken from documents.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20628001

Journal Title: International Journal of Sociology
Publisher: M. E. Sharpe
Issue: i20628279
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Gödl Doris
Abstract: Using the example of former Yugoslavia, specifically the Serbian and Croatian nations, this article examines the transformation of collective memory of aggression and victimhood by focusing on the content of national narratives. The article begins by examining narratives developed at the founding of Yugoslavia and proceeds to trace the reinterpretation of these narratives as a function of their political instrumentality—especially in Serbia and Croatia—for respective nationalist projects. In the end, the article provides tools with which to frame two questions: first, whether political and social stability is being created at the cost of forgetting and repression; second, whether a "policy of remembrance" is socially "desirable" in practice. Both forgetting and an instrumental "policy of remembrance" based on the power of revelation perpetuate aggressor—victim divisions: what is needed, rather, is a stable, systematic process of remembrance and reconciliation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20628284

Journal Title: Indiana Journal of Global Legal Studies
Publisher: Indiana University School of Law
Issue: i20644716
Date: 10 1, 1999
Author(s): Mazlish Bruce
Abstract: Stephen Kern, The Culture of Time and Space: 1880-1918 (1983)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20644719

Journal Title: Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance
Publisher: Librairie Droz S. A.
Issue: i20675336
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): Roussel Bernard
Abstract: Erasme, Ratio seu Methodius compendio perveniendi ad veram theologiam, dans Ausgewählte Schriften, Bd. III, Darmstadt, 1967, p. 230 et 258.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20675338

Journal Title: Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance
Publisher: Librairie Droz S. A.
Issue: i20675774
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): Margolin Jean-Claude
Abstract: Selon l'expression forgée par Vladimir Jankelevitch dans son livre, Le Mensonge (Confluences, 1942).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20675778

Journal Title: Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance
Publisher: Librairie Droz S. A.
Issue: i20680879
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Stawarz-Luginbühl Ruth
Abstract: Exemplaires consultés: BNF (Gallica); Bibliothèque publique et universitaire de Neu- châtel (cote ZQ 300) ; Stadt- und Universitätsbibliothek Bern (cote k. 14).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20680883

Journal Title: Latin American Perspectives
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i20684666
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Barbera Rosemary
Abstract: The dictatorship in Chile perpetrated massive human rights violations for 17 years, causing a rupture in social processes and engendering fear in the population. Data being gathered in an ongoing participatory action research study of the población (shanty-town) La Pincoya show that while memory can be debilitating to most persons, it may empower others. Memories of the practices of the military regime continue to cause fear in some of the population, affecting community cohesion and participation in local organizations. This has led to the dismantling of social networks in the community, robbing members of their ability to be the protagonists of their own lives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20684672

Journal Title: Revista Mexicana de Sociología
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Sociales de la Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico
Issue: i20697603
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Montaño Eugenia Allier
Abstract: Álvarez Garin (1998).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20697607

Journal Title: Visual Arts Research
Publisher: University of Illinois
Issue: i20715824
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): Thunder-McGuire Steve
Abstract: Children, who are composers of meaning rather than merely handlers of art materials, proceed by strategies of generative praxis that include fictive play and autobiography and involve judgment that is critically reflective and imagination that is productive. The view of things that leads an art teacher to believe that a child is making meaningful art is one in which a child's judgment is a sign, or even a criterion of thoughtful involvement. When this reflective judgment is manifested, you see that a child is guided by an inner critic of their work, and the claim that "Michael is making art" says it all. As I interpreted the long self-sustained efforts of children composing artist books, I became most aware of the way in which children's desire to represent their stories merged with drawing and a developing schema in the same way lived experience and metaphor interchange and generate each other. This interchange is the living ground of the inner critic in children's meaningful art.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20715830

Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Society for Utopian Studies
Issue: i20719896
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Boer Roland
Abstract: Focusing on the interplay of religion and Utopia in Fredric Jameson's recent Archaeologies of the Future, I identify a tension: on the one hand, the content of religion has been superseded (although not its forms), yet, on the other, Jameson still wishes to make use of a hermeneutics of suspicion and recovery in which even the most retrograde material may be recuperated—religion included. So we find a clash underway in this work. Sometimes Jameson sidelines religion, as one would expect if religion was no longer relevant. At other times, he exercises his dialectical hermeneutics, particularly at two moments: first, a recovery, via Feuerbach, of the role of magic within fantasy literature; second, the partial treatment of apocalyptic, which comes very close to his own argument for Utopia as rupture. From here, I develop the dialectic of ideology and Utopia further by expanding Jameson's comments on the possibilities of medieval theology and the utopian role of religion (both Catholic and Protestant) in More's Utopia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20719903

Journal Title: Ecología Política
Publisher: Icaria editorial / Fundación hogar del empleado
Issue: i20742913
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Riechmann Jorge
Abstract: Aquí puede enlazarse con la reflexión de Jon Elster sobre los «esta- dos que son esencialmente subproductos» (Uvas amargas —sobre la Subversión de la racionalidad, Península, Barcelona 1988, capttulo 2); y con las recomendaciones de José Sanmartin sobre la conveniencia de preferlr las buenas prácticas educativas a la ortopedla genética (Los nue- vos redentores, Anthropos, Barcelona 1987, p. 150-151).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20742922

Journal Title: College Literature
Publisher: West Chester University
Issue: i20749578
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Marrouchi Mustapha
Abstract: Caryl Phillips's narrative is painfully concerned with the relationship of Empire, Colony, and the In-between; Europe, Africa, and the Caribbean; slavery, rebellion, and freedom; Men, women and children; absent or useless fathers and damaged, aimless sons. It explores what hold in common while never losing sight of the painful quotidian, the specific. It is a narrative where the picaresque shakes hands with the epic and the linearity is broken, encircled, and put fast forward or in reverse by a mise-en-abîme of sorts: the tale-within-the-tale-within-the-tale even if interrupted by the tapestry of an emergent voice that finally proposes itself as both the identity and the difference of its verbal universe. "Enter your own self and discover the world," Phillips seems to be saying, "but also go out into the world and discover yourself." Once that call is answered, fiction itself becomes another way of questioning truth as we strive for it through the paradox of a lie. That lie can be called the imagination. It can also be seen as a parallel reality. For it may be observed as a critical mirror of what passes for the truth in the world of convention. It certainly sets up a second universe of being, where the narrator, say Cambridge in Cambridge, has a reality greater, though no less important, than the host of hastily met and then forgotten people we deal with on a daily basis. It is in this sense that Phillips brings into light another way of telling in that his narrative gives weight and presence to the virtues and vices—the fugitive personalities—of our daily acquaintance. This is the prerogative of his style, which I try to discuss in this essay. It has the power to render disenchantment and pleasure without resolving the contradiction between them. In fact, what holds them in tension, as equal forces straining in opposite directions, is the artist's mature subjectivity, stripped of hubris, unashamed either of its fallibility or of the modest assurance it has gained as a result of being out of place and not quite right.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20749583

Journal Title: Il Giappone
Publisher: Centro di Cultura Italo-Giapponese
Issue: i20749767
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Vienna Maria Gioia
Abstract: Il sisma rase al suolo la zona di Tökyö e i paesi circostanti (1 settembre 1923).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20749772

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: Center for Historical Social Research / Zentrum für Historische Sozialforschung
Issue: i20761908
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Keller Reiner
Abstract: This article reviews some new international releases in the field of discourse analysis in the tradition of Michel FOUCAULT. This kind of Foucauldian discourse analysis is related to other forms in the wider interdisciplinary field of discourse analysis. Nonetheless, it can be demonstrated that the Foucauldian form of discourse analysis is the most relevant one for contemporary analysis in the social sciences. It is argued that in the German social sciences the term "discourse analysis" is primarily used for theoretical social research or is used for empirical social research, without disclosing discourse-analytic methodology. Since the 1990s, the development of empirical methodologies for social discourse analysis in Germany has intensified. From it's beginning in the late 1960s, French methodology of discourse analysis has been empirically orientated. Here, the work of Michel PÊCHEUX is the central influence in which the epistemology of discourse analysis is thoroughly discussed and theorized. In France, PÊCHEUX continued the work of Michel FOUCAULT and, since then, one can speak of a Foucauldian tradition of discourse analysis, namely "French Discourse Analysis" (FDA). This review outlines the state-of- the-art of the transformation of Foucauldian discourse theory into a discourse-analytic methodology as a new kind of qualitative social research. For this reason, the influence and the analytic tools of linguistics are critically reviewed and a comparison of FDA in France and Foucauldian discourse analysis in Germany is undertaken. The first book reviewed is a British monograph from Glyn WILLIAMS that describes the development of French discourse analysis in the context of structuralism and post-structuralism. The book contains a thorough update of French discourse analysis and is path breaking for German readers of the discourse-analytic work of Michel PÊCHEUX. The volume comes on the heels of a new German handbook of social discourse analysis (edited by KELLER; HIRSELAND, SCHNEIDER & VIEHÖVER) that continues the thread with additional articles on theory and methodology, mostly in the field of (German) Foucauldian discourse analysis. This handbook presents a collection of articles by the most influential researchers in this field and it can be regarded as representing the state-of-the-art in the German field of discourse analysis. Next, a selection of several articles related to discourse theory from an interdisciplinary conference is reviewed. The content of these papers is mainly the social theory of discourse, not discourse analytic methodology. Following this, a new and clearly written French dictionary, edited by CHARAUDEAU and MAINGUENEAU, is reviewed. It is not only the first dictionary of the French vocabulary (mainly) of FDA, but also very useful for German social research on discourse. Finally, the latest release in this field is a new and very instructive introduction to the field of social research on discourse from KELLER. This book will be very useful not only for beginners—it contains a systematic overview of the research field and discusses strategies for further discourse-analytic research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20761912

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: Center for Historical Social Research / Zentrum für Historische Sozialforschung
Issue: i20762349
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Schmid Georg
Abstract: Unquestionable as history may seem, there are all the same quite different readings and disparate inferences despite the same series of facts. This goes to show that even professional historians can sometimes be overcome by meditations on past possibilities of bifurcations. As to "alternatives to actual history," is serves well to bear in mind that few are plausible, but that belief in a predeterminative universe of necessities would certainly be misplaced. Whereas some occurrences are clear-cut enough to make us understand which components would have had to be changed in order to get a different outcome, others are of such a high degree of complexity that attempts to imagine an alternative course and divergent results remain rather illusory: the examples of Midway (the former type) and the defeat of France in 1940 (intricately overdetermined) clearly show that it pays in any case, in defiance to all complexities, to consider past potential. It is prerequisite for choosing between future options in more reasonable and efficient ways than hitherto.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20762355

Journal Title: Chasqui
Publisher: Chasqui: Revista de literatura latinoamericana
Issue: i20778321
Date: 11 1, 2002
Author(s): Volek Emil
Abstract: Jan Mukařovský planteó esta dialéctica de la referencialidad en su trabajo pionero "El arte como hecho sígnico" (1934), aunque sin ninguna referencia al funcionamiento del sueño. Aunque reconocido como "manifiesto" de la semiótica de la Escuela de Praga, este bosquejo, general- mente mal traducido, no tuvo el menor eco en la semiótica posterior, embarrada en los pañales de la sémiologie saussureana o en la tupida escolástica peirceana. Habría que releerlo junto con el gran trabajo revisionista y desconstructivista, "La intencionalidad y la no intencionalidad en el arte" (1943). Ambos ahora en Signo, función y valor.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20778326

Journal Title: New Hibernia Review / Iris Éireannach Nua
Publisher: Center for Irish Studies at the University of St. Thomas
Issue: i20779226
Date: 7 1, 2010
Author(s): Flannery Eoin
Abstract: Whelan, p. 311.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20779239

Journal Title: Cahiers d'ethnomusicologie
Publisher: ateliers d'ethnomusicologie
Issue: i20799672
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Olivier Emmanuelle
Abstract: Ces relations sont facilitées dans la mesure où Jul'hoan etIXuu parlent deux dialectes d'une même langue (Güdelmann et Vossen 2000).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20799683

Journal Title: Annual Review of Sociology
Publisher: Annual Reviews Inc.
Issue: i310000
Date: 1 1, 1976
Author(s): Zurcher Jerzy
Abstract: In recent years, sociologists and anthropologists have conducted significant studies of modern life using concepts and perspectives derived from symbolic anthropology. This paper discusses the theoretical and methodological problems entailed, including the distinction between symbolic and nonsymbolic actions. Research on three major areas of behavior is reviewed: (a) studies of institutions, especially politics, law, and social control; (b) studies of ceremonial events, including life-cycle rituals, sports, and festivals; and (c) studies of everyday life, including consumer goods and food, and popular culture. We conclude with a discussion of the methodological issues of location and dimensionality and the different forms of symbolic analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2083183

Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20848489
Date: 3 1, 1991
Author(s): Jazé J.-Ph.
Abstract: Edmund Husserl (1913), Idées directrices pour une phénoménologie, trad, franç. P. Ricoeur, Gallimard, p. 240-241.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20848493

Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20848905
Date: 3 1, 1995
Author(s): Roy Jean-Michel
Abstract: 1910 Know- ledge by description and knowledge by acquaintance
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20848911

Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20848927
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: Umberto Eco, Les limites de l*interpretation, Paris, Grasset, 1991.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20848930

Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849099
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Gagnebin Jeanne-Marie
Abstract: Yvon Brès, op. cit, chap. Ill
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20849101

Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849393
Date: 6 1, 2001
Author(s): Monod Jean-Claude
Abstract: « Foucault repond a Sartre », repris dans Dits etéecrits, Paris, Gallimard, 1994, t. 1, 55, p. 662-668
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20849398

Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849779
Date: 7 1, 2006
Author(s): Campa Olivier
Abstract: Ibid., p. 183-184.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20849782

Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849827
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Cormier Philippe
Abstract: J. Ratzinger, Zum Personverständnis in der Theologie, in Dogma und Verkündigung Munich, Erich Wewel Verlag, 1973.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20849830

Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849955
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Bienenstock Myriam
Abstract: Olivier Tinland (éd.), Lectures de Hegel, Paris, Le Livre de poche, 2005, p. 223-267.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/leph.092.0207

Journal Title: Revue française d'études américaines
Publisher: Editions Belin
Issue: i20875993
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Hauchecorne Mathieu
Abstract: This essay is a comparative study of the tributes paid to the American philosopher John Rawls, in France and the United States, after his death in November 2010. Whereas in the U.S. tributes to Rawls appeared in scholarly journals, in France they did in political magazines and general interest media. Besides, the focus in U.S. journals on Rawls's philosophical commitments is at odds with the emphasis placed by the French media on the political interpretations of his theory of justice. The contrast between Rawls's French and U.S. "funerals" is a consequence of the way intellectual fields in France and the U.S. differ in their relation to politics. While Rawls conformed with what was expected of him in the American academia by staying away from politics almost all his life, he was seen in France as an intellectuel engagé, the typical figure of intellectual life since the Dreyfus case. The contrast between the French and American reactions to Rawls's death is also related to the fact that those who first got interested in his theory of justice in France were supporters of the anti-totalitarian left or center-right, rather than academic philosophers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20875998

Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: University of Buffalo, Inc.
Issue: i336917
Date: 9 1, 1967
Author(s): Derrida Jacques
Abstract: "The Dichtung must be freed from literature" (Text published by the Revue de Poésie, Paris, 1967). The Dichtung must be freed from literature Revue de Poésie 1967
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2105919

Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: Brown University
Issue: i310337
Date: 12 1, 1979
Author(s): Hoffman Mark
Abstract: "A Philosophical Perspective on the Problems of Metaphor," in R. H. Hoffman and R. Honeck (eds.), Cognition and Figurative Language (Hillsdale, N.J.: Lawrence Erlbaum, 1979), 47-67. Hoffman A Philosophical Perspective on the Problems of Metaphor 47 Cognition and Figurative Language 1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2107356

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: i337200
Date: 12 1, 1965
Author(s): Ricoeur Michael
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur distills this point well: "When we discover that there are several cultures instead of just one and consequently at the time when we acknowledge the end of a sort of cultural monopoly, be it illusory or real, we are threatened with the destruction of our own discovery. Suddenly it becomes possible that there are just others, that we ourselves are an 'other' among others" (History and Truth [Evanston, Ill., 1965], p. 278). Ricoeur 278 History and Truth 1965
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2124538

Journal Title: The Journal of Politics
Publisher: Southern Political Science Association
Issue: i337338
Date: 11 1, 1968
Author(s): Merleau-Ponty Fred R.
Abstract: Die Abenteuer der Dialektik (Franldurt-Main: Suhrkamp, 1968), 7-11 7 Die Abenteuer der Dialektik 1968
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2129401

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i211058
Date: 11 1, 1995
Author(s): Somers Margaret R.
Abstract: The English translation of Habermas's The Structural Transformation of the Public Sphere converges with the revival of the "political culture concept" in the social sciences. Surprisingly, Habermas's account of the Western bourgeois public sphere has much in common with the original political culture concept associated with Parsonian modernization theory in the 1950s and 1960s. In both cases, the concept of political culture is used in a way that is neither political nor cultural. Explaining this peculiarity is the central problem addressed in this article and its companion piece, which appeared in Sociological Theory, volume 3, number 2 (1995). I hypothesize that this is the case because the concept itself is embedded in an historically constituted political culture (here called a conceptual network)-a structured web of conceptual relationships that combine into Anglo-American citizenship theory. The method of an historical sociology of concept formation is used to analyze historically and empirically the internal constraints and dynamics of this conceptual network. The method draws from new work in cultural history and sociology, social studies, and network, narrative, and institutional analysis. This research yields three empirical findings: this conceptual network has a narrative structure, here called the Anglo-American citizenship story; this narrative is grafted onto an epistemology of social naturalism; and these elements combine in a metanarrative that continues to constrain empirical research in political sociology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/223298

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Jossey-Bass Inc.
Issue: i211057
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Rogers Mary F.
Abstract: The work of literary structuralists, particularly Roland Barthes, provides sharper insights into ethnomethodology than symbolic interactionism, labeling theory, or phenomenology. Further, it suggests that the metaphor of text may be fruitful for analysts of everyday life. Greater theoretical benefits derive from that metaphor, however, if one applies it using the ideas of literary theorists outside the structuralist tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/223347

Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23004843
Date: 3 1, 2003
Author(s): PARDI FRANCESCO
Abstract: The article identifies a paradox in the concept of person and in its use. Modernity, and the liberation from the logic of status, should have brought about the ultimate consolidation of the idea of personal value. On the contrary it caused such a drastic functional differentiation within society that the individual has come to be defined by his/her function (citizen, economic actor, etc.) rather than as the single bearer of different roles. The concept of person has thus become an expression to identify only the communicative aspect of social life. That is the reason why in our complex society the concept of person cannot find a proper location and comes to the fore only when the other codes fail.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23004936

Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23004739
Date: 3 1, 1999
Author(s): BICHI RITA
Abstract: Halbwachs (1987)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23004996

Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23005104
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): MARTINI ELVIRA
Abstract: Plutarco 1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23005221

Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23005054
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): CADARIO VITTORINO
Abstract: 2001b).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23005280

Journal Title: Music & Letters
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23013006
Date: 5 1, 2011
Author(s): Gelbart Matthew
Abstract: Rodel, 'Extreme Noise Terror'.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/ml/gcr037

Journal Title: Information Systems Research
Publisher: The Institute for Operations Research and the Management Sciences (INFORMS)
Issue: i23011115
Date: 3 1, 2003
Author(s): Saunders Carol S.
Abstract: Hollingshead and McGrath's (1995)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23015731

Journal Title: Public Administration Review
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i23017455
Date: 8 1, 2011
Author(s): Rhodes R. A. W.
Abstract: What intellectual influence, if any, have British public administration scholars had on their American counterparts since World War II? In this article, the author briefly reviews the major areas of theory and research in the British study of publication administration, further identifying important contributions by British scholars in the areas of modernist-empiricism, the new public management, regulation, policy networks and governance, and interpretive theory. Although there is a discernible American influence on British public administration, there is little British impact on U.S. public administration; nowadays it is a one-way street. Increasingly, British scholars are involved in a growing community of European public administration scholars with whom they share active, two-way connections. Recent European developments suggest that American and European public administration academics are growing further apart. Due to the immense strength of modernist-empiricism throughout American universities, plus the interpretive turn to a European epistemology of "blurred genres," these twin, traditionally self-referential, communities seem to be parting company with an attendant danger that future intellectual engagement may be a dead end.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1540-6210.2011.02388.x

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i23020023
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Cisneros Ariane Hentsch
Abstract: Dallmayr 2009, 24, 27
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-9795.2011.00475.x

Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i23025453
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): GUNNELL JOHN G.
Abstract: Cora Diamond, The Realistic Spirit in Philosophy: Wittgenstein, Philosophy, and the Mind (Cambridge: MIT, 1991).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/S0260210510001609

Journal Title: Shakespeare Quarterly
Publisher: The Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i23025612
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Sherman Anita Gilman
Abstract: Wulf Kansteiner, "Memory, Media, and Menschen: Where Is the Individual in Collective Memory Studies?" Memory Studies 3 (2010): 3-4.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1353/shq.2011.0003

Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i23029135
Date: 3 1, 2011
Author(s): Brauer Juliane
Abstract: Reinhart Koselleck, „Erfahrungsraum" und „Erwartungshorizont". Zwei historische Kategorien, in: ders., Vergangene Zukunft. Zur Semantik geschichtlicher Zeiten, Frankfurt 1989, S. 349-375.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23029140

Journal Title: Studies in Philology
Publisher: The University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i23056047
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Stegner Paul D.
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, Memory, History, and Forgetting, trans. Kathleen Blarney and David Pellauer (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2004), 500-501.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23056050

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i23064085
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Oses Darío
Abstract: En el discurso que leyó en el Congreso Latinoamericano de Partidarios de la Paz, en México, en 1949, Neruda había dicho que en los últimos años "maestros snobs se han apoderado de Kafka, de Rilke, de todos los laberintos que no tengan salida, de todas las metafísicas que han ido cayendo, como cajones vacíos desde el tren de la historia [...]" ("Mi país, como ustedes saben..." 765).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23064093

Journal Title: Journal of Arabic Literature
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i23071583
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Hayek Ghenwa
Abstract: Introduction; Jens Hanssen's Fiti-de-Siecle Beirut.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1163/157006411X596140

Journal Title: Journal of Arabic Literature
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i23071596
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Scott Bede
Abstract: This article explores the crisis initiated by colonial modernity in Naguib Mahfouz's 1947 novel Midaq Alley. I begin by discussing the significance of anger within the narrative, arguing that this dominant structure of feeling could be read as a collective response to wider social and historical forces. In other words, rather than understanding emotion as the "subjective property" of the individual, I regard it here as a relational practice embedded within and determined by quite specific sociocultural circumstances. I then proceed to discuss the role of rumour in the novel and the significance of its pronounced melodramatic qualities. In the first case, I shall argue, the circulation of rumour provides a way of containing or quarantining the negative feelings produced by modernity, while also reinforcing the boundaries of a community facing the very real possibility of its own demise. In the second case, I would like to suggest that the narrative's tendency to privilege the melodramatic mode creates a sense of social order and moral intelligibility by channelling these feelings into a stable and predictable generic structure. This latter project is ultimately frustrated, however, when the forces of evil emerge to destroy the novel's principle representative of virtue.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1163/157006411X575792

Journal Title: Pasajes
Publisher: Universitat de València y la Fundación Cañada Blanch
Issue: i23074560
Date: 4 1, 2003
Author(s): Martín Encarna Nicolás
Abstract: F. Bédarida: «Temps présent et présence de l'histoire», que es la conclusion del volumen dedi- cado a su homenaje. La cita en pág. 401.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23075555

Journal Title: Pasajes
Publisher: Universitat de València y la Fundación Cañada Blanch
Issue: i23075093
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Tomás Rafael
Abstract: Cornelius Castoriadis, autor de L'institution, imaginaire de la so- ciété (París, Seuil, l999), cofun- dador de Socialisme ou barbarie, subrayaba justamente la impor- tancia de lo que consideraba co- mo un déficit de imaginario en nuestras sociedades y en nues- tra filosofía. Ver La montée de l'in- signifiance, París, Seuil, 1995.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23075878

Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Carocci editore
Issue: i23078532
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Zapponi Elena
Abstract: A. Wieviorka, L'era del testimone, Milano, Cortina, 1999, p. 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23078539

Journal Title: Criticism
Publisher: Wayne State University Press
Issue: i23102663
Date: 10 1, 1977
Author(s): MASSEY IRVING
Abstract: The Notebooks of Samuel Taylor Coleridge (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1957—), III, entry 3990.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23102665

Journal Title: Western Folklore
Publisher: Western States Folklore Society
Issue: i23120620
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Garlough Christine
Abstract: This article explores the tensions between acknowledgment and recognition in performances by progressive South Asian American activists at the Minnesota Festival of Nations in the year 2000. Focusing on specific South Asian American folk performances that take place within the context of an "India" cultural booth, I argue performers are enjoined to enact cultural practices in ways that foreground a reified sense of "Indianness" that is at odds with the multicultural vision of their progressive grassroots school.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23120624

Journal Title: Social Analysis: The International Journal of Social and Cultural Practice
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Issue: i23182019
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Øye Inger-Elin
Abstract: Building on 25 months of fieldwork in eastern Germany from 1991 to 2003, this article explores the interpenetration of aesthetics and politics, and questions them as theoretical categories. A multilayered description depicts aesthetic perception and action, guided by an imagery of façade, as constituted and reproduced by state policies, positioned experiences, and subversive responses. Moving beyond the Cold War legacy, aesthetics' potency and politicization is dated back to early nation building and Protestant and Romantic influences. Being essential to and controlled by shifting, largely authoritarian regimes, aesthetics simultaneously provided a 'shadow life' and a 'lingua franca', cross-cutting verbal and non-verbal mediums and everyday and high culture, as people juggled with, distrusted, and decoded surfaces, expressing and in search of deeper, hidden truths. I argue that historically generated aesthetic perceptions and praxis not only mark east German political culture but also emerge in Habermas's public sphere theory and, moreover, offer arguments to revise it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23182146

Journal Title: Social Analysis: The International Journal of Social and Cultural Practice
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Issue: i23182174
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Shoshana Avi
Abstract: This article proposes using the theoretical discussions of Deleuze and Guattari as a means of comprehending the various ways in which individuals speak about their ethnic identity. This is done through a case study of a state-run educational boarding school offered to subjects identified as 'ethnic' in Israel. The findings expose two ways of talking about ethnic identity: 'minor language' and 'major language'. What I term the 'major language of ethnicity' makes substantial use of state language and offers two hierarchical categories that serve as an archetype for classifying groups. The 'minor language of ethnicity', on the other hand, offers multiple local identifications and potential identity alternatives. The article suggests using dynamics at the foundation of these concepts to consider the position of the researcher and to expose existential 'lines of flight' and life inventions of subjects in everyday life.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3167/sa.2011.550103

Journal Title: Meridiana
Publisher: Donzelli editore
Issue: i23195064
Date: 5 1, 1997
Author(s): Latouche Serge
Abstract: Citato da Engelhard, L'homme mondial cit., p. 379.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23195774

Journal Title: Meridiana
Publisher: Viella
Issue: i23199886
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Verga Marcello
Abstract: Europa e musei. Identità e rappresentazioni. Atti del Convegno di Torino, 5-6 aprile 2001, Celia, Torino 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23202164

Journal Title: Alternatives: Global, Local, Political
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i23210881
Date: 5 1, 2012
Author(s): Kopper Ákos
Abstract: Controlling for insecurities depends on a capacity to make inferences on the basis of experiences about the past, yet the use of knowledge about the past for anticipating and predicting future threats is highly problematic. This article examines the problem of governing individuals on the basis of what is available about their past deeds and social networks in governmental and commercial archives. It highlights the tension between administrative and private narratives about individuals, the former being constructed on the basis of minute details collected and stored about individuals since birth, and the latter referring to the accounts individuals offer of themselves. By applying the notions of ipse and idem identity developed by Paul Ricoeur, the article examines the two-way flow between memory and identity and the consequent concern that administrative narratives are blind to the ethical renewal of individuals, to the capacity of Man to extricate himself from the shackles of his past. To prepare the ground, the article considers some inherent limitations of biopolitics, pointing out that although biopolitics was classically concerned to govern both individual bodies and the body politic, administrative and governmental limitations have led states to govern the "average citizen" rather than individuals in their "individuality."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23210885

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i23211194
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Calame Claude
Abstract: J'ai développé ce concept à propos de la pragmatique des récits héroïques que nous appréhendons comme des « mythes » et des fictions narratives dans Claude Calame, « La pragmatique poétique des mythes grecs: fiction référentielle et performance rituelle », in F. Lavocat et A. Duprat (dir.), Fiction et cultures, Paris, sflgc, 2010, p. 33- 56; voir aussi Id., « Fiction référentielle et poétique rituelle: pour une pragmatique du mythe (Sappho 17 et Bacchylide 13)», in D.AUGER et C. Delattre (dir.), Mythe et fiction, Paris, Presses universitaires de Paris Ouest, 2010, p. 117-135.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23211237

Journal Title: Historical Reflections / Réflexions Historiques
Publisher: Department of History, University of Waterloo
Issue: i23232661
Date: 10 1, 1988
Author(s): Carrard Philippe
Abstract: Gary Saul Morson, ed., Literature and History: Theoretical Problems and Russian Case Studies (Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1986), p. 132.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23232663

Journal Title: Social Thought & Research
Publisher: Department of Sociology, University of Kansas
Issue: i23250013
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Chriss James J.
Abstract: Chriss (1999a)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23250404

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i23257667
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Arrigo Bruce A.
Abstract: The ultramodern condition represents the "third wave" in postmodernist-inspired philosophy and cultural practice. Two of ultramodernism's critical theoretical components are the human/social forces, flows, and assemblages that sustain transgression; and the human/social intensities, fluctuations, and thresholds that make transcendence possible as both will and way. In the ultramodern age, then, transcendence is about overcoming and transforming the conditions (i.e., forces, flows, and assemblages) that co-produce harm-generating (i.e., transgressive) tendencies. This manuscript problematizes transgression by way of ultramodern theory. This critical investigation represents "the phenomenology of the shadow," or the ultramodern philosophy of harm. To contextualize this phenomenology and philosophy, the intellectual history of ultramodern thought is recounted. This includes a review of the shadow construct by way of its prominent socio-cultural, psychoanalytic, and political-economic currents; and a chronicling of the reification process (regarding risk, captivity, and harm) since the modernist era (i.e., the industrial revolution). The article concludes with some very speculative observations concerning "the phenomenology of the stranger," or the ultramodern philosophy of transcendence as both will and way.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23257675

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i23259318
Date: 7 1, 2012
Author(s): Cosgrove Mary
Abstract: Thompson, '"Die unheimliche Heimat,'" 283.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1215/0094033X-1550863

Journal Title: Humboldt Journal of Social Relations
Publisher: Humboldt State University
Issue: i23261550
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): Jacobs Anton K.
Abstract: This essay suggests Friedrich Nietzsche has a contribution to make to the theoretical enterprise of social science. Contemporary theorizing, reflecting an increased attention to language, has been focusing on the dialogical mode of production and, of course, on hermeneutics. This has led to a renewal of interest in Friedrich Nietzsche. In this essay, two alternative models of the hermeneutic circle are examined: one arising out of the work of the school of Konstanz; the other associated primarily with the work of Juergen Habermas. The former presents a circular image of the "conversational" situation; the latter portrays a time schedule of the process based on the psychoanalytic process of therapy. Nietzsche's contributions are suggested to be significant, in the first model, in regard to the mode of production and, in the second, the stage of the quasi-naturalistic turn. Nietzsche's way to truth is through constant and relentless criticizing. In contrast to the rationalistic practices of Western philosophy, Nietzsche exercised an art of interpreting based on the use of metaphor and aphorism. This practice seems to reflect Nietzsche's concern to communicate truth in a world he saw as inherently ambiguous and dynamic, thus, rendering propositional truth impossible. Nietzsche radically challenges the rational foundations on which we stand. Thus he presents us with a mode of knowledge production that reclaims traditions lost to science. In addition, Nietzsche shows, by word and example, that his existential approach offers a way to see life as a text and source for quasi-naturalistic forays toward understanding. In this way Nietzsche shows that the traditional concept of knowledge is a pseudo-concept by revealing the intimate and inseparable connection between life and knowledge. Knowledge is rooted in life; it is a manifestation of concrete psychological and political realities. Consequently, it makes sense not to ignore life as a source for explanation when examining resources for re-establishing communication when the hermeneutic circle breaks down in a moment of misunderstanding.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23261695

Journal Title: The Geographical Journal
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i23263262
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): JOHNSON NUALA C
Abstract: This commentary reflects on the first official visit made by a British monarch to Ireland since its independence. Focusing on three key moments of Queen Elizabeth's itinerary — the Garden of Remembrance, the Irish National War Memorial, Islandbridge, and the state banquet, Dublin Castle — I suggest that efforts to simultaneously honour rebels/soldiers in acts of public remembrance sought to re-position the past between these two islands in ways which recognised conflict but also aspired towards reconciled understandings of how that past could be more peacefully calibrated.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1475-4959.2011.00454.x

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i23264766
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Thévoz Samuel
Abstract: également Samuel Thévoz (2011)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23264789

Journal Title: Journal of British Studies
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i23265372
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Prince Simon
Abstract: Beiner (again) is among the rare exceptions to the rule that Irish memory studies overlook narrative theory: Guy Beiner, "In Anticipation of a Post-Memory Boom Syndrome," Cultural Analysis 7 (2008): 107-12.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1086/661184

Journal Title: New Hibernia Review / Iris Éireannach Nua
Publisher: Center for Irish Studies at the University of St. Thomas
Issue: i23266696
Date: 7 1, 2012
Author(s): Harney-Mahajan Tara
Abstract: Ricoeur, Memory, History, Forgetting, p. 494.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23266702

Journal Title: Cahiers d'ethnomusicologie
Publisher: ateliers d'ethnomusicologie
Issue: i23267018
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Cler Jérôme
Abstract: Jean During (1994: 407 sq.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23267125

Journal Title: Contemporary European History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i23270664
Date: 8 1, 2012
Author(s): BERNIER ALEXANDRE
Abstract: Nicolo ruling of 1989.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/S0960777312000264

Journal Title: Annual Review of Anthropology
Publisher: Annual Reviews
Issue: i23270692
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Zeitlyn David
Abstract: http://www.rrnpilot. org/.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1146/annurev-anthro-092611-145721

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i23275342
Date: 11 1, 2011
Author(s): BOOTH W. JAMES
Abstract: Booth (2006,134-35)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23275351

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i23277635
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): KUUKKANEN JOUNI-MATTI
Abstract: Rescher, Objectivity; Max Weber, "Objectivity in Social Sciences and Social Policy," in Weber, The Methodology of the Social Sciences (New York: The Free Press, 1949).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1468-2303.2012.00632.x

Journal Title: International Organization
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i23279968
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): de Mello e Souza André
Abstract: Grant and Keohane 2005, especially 36, 38.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23279972

Journal Title: Journal of Mormon History
Publisher: Mormon History Association
Issue: i23289637
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Barlow Philip L.
Abstract: "Baptism for the Dead," Times and Seasons 3:760.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23289683

Journal Title: Iyyun: The Jerusalem Philosophical Quarterly / עיון: רבעון פילוסופי
Publisher: החברה הפילוסופית בירושלים
Issue: i23303150
Date: 4 1, 1960
Author(s): LICHTIGFELD A.
Abstract: Jaspers' thesis (while rejecting the claim of philosophers of the Western tradition to universal validity and Truth, yet conceding that their metaphysical systems express an awareness of Being) is as follows: "Reality is neither the object nor the subject, but that which encompasses both, the Encompassing which is illuminated in the division between subject and object"; He — the One God — is Encompassing and the greatest closeness which has its place within the inwardness of man". The whole inquiry leads Jaspers to claim that the existential self is rooted in Transcendence and the ground of all things lies in the real ization of the existential self in freedom in which eternity and time coalesce. In this freedom time — far from being the "moving image of eternity" — becomes the actual scene of the existential self's moral striving with the forces of this world, and by seizing the cipher (= the language of Transcendence) as the symbol of Transcendence, the existential self achieves authentic existence, thus endowing the historical process of time with unique and ultimate meaning. 1) Reason: It is because of reason with which God has endowed man that any content of a pretended revelation possesses any self-evidencing power: "In diesem Menschwerden durch Vernunft wird das Eine der Transzendenz fühlbar dem Einen der jeweils geschichtlichen Existenz". Yet by abandoning belief in universal Truth we become open for Truth, realised and determined in its concrete historic form for each individual by means of communication. Communication therefore becomes "the universal condition of man's being". It follows that Truth cannot be separated from communicability. It only appears in time as a realitythrough-communication so much so "that I can not even become myself alone without emerging out of my being with others". Now the element in which existential communication lives and moves and has its spiritual being is — reason ("reason is what penetrates everything"). 2) Unity of Mankind: The discovery of the unreality of man's existence apart from God, is the discovery at the same time of the fact that God is the ultimate ground of the unity of mankind. According to Jaspers the fact of life are to conform to the principle of that wider order of reality disclosed to us in the experience of communication in which the reality of each person's likeness to the image of God finds its practical application. The development of communication depends on the principle of correlation of Existenz and Transcendenz which is the property of no finite existential self, but manifests itself alike in all. Though we may be confronted with the question "Is it God or the devil who governs the world?", it remains equally true that even "failure is no argument against the truth that is rooted in transcendence". 3) Ultimate Dignity of Man: Jaspers' unequivocal emphasis on freedom, stating that "Freedom and God are inseparable" serves to assure this ideal its place in human society. Thus man's exercise of freedom knits him up into the transcendental design. The claim that certain facts and experiences yield a basis for the recognition of the ultimate dignity of man is justified precisely by this evidence that through God, as inseparable from freedom, we discern the ultimate significance of both man and humanity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23303155

Journal Title: Journal of Public Administration Research and Theory: J-PART
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23319479
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Leong Ching
Abstract: Leong 2010
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jopart/mus001

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i23327447
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Serban Claudia
Abstract: Nous formulons cette question sans ignorer que la Befindlichkeit heideg- gérienne n'est pas YEmpfindung que Michel Henry mettra à l'honneur. Mais bien qu'il s'agisse de deux conceptions de l'affectivité fort différentes, l'intérêt commun pour l'affect comme mode de révélation à soi antérieur à la réflexion demeure remarquable.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rphi.124.0473

Journal Title: History and Philosophy of the Life Sciences
Publisher: Giannini Editore
Issue: i23335068
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Wolfe Charles T.
Abstract: Hull 1992, 182
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23335072

Journal Title: Iyyun: The Jerusalem Philosophical Quarterly / עיון: רבעון פילוסופי
Publisher: החברה הפילוסופית בירושלים
Issue: i23340007
Date: 10 1, 1965
Author(s): EPSTEIN F.
Abstract: The significance of the conception of the "I" as an "integral ego", which is fundamental to Ricoeur's thought, is brought out. The "integral ego" forms the basis of an analysis of the relations between the voluntary and involuntary in human action and enables these relations to be seen and comperehended from a fresh perspective. The "integral ego" is conceived as an organic unity of the "Cartesian cogito" and the existent body. This necessitates a view of the body as a Corps propre in Merleau-Ponty's sense; "a-body-moved-by-the-will", a conscious body, imbued with meaning. The body is on no account to be regarded as a mere physical object related to other physical objects in a mechanical causal chain. There is no place in man for the Cartesian dualism between thinking substance and extended substance. Although Ricoeur's method in analysing these relations is one of pure or "eidetic" description, he, in contradistinction to Husserl, attempts to integrate the body, as a Corps propre, with the cogito. He repeatedly stresses the danger of naturalizing the cogito; of viewing psychic processes as natural facts and the body as an empirical object. The rigorous phenomenological description clarifies the inter-relation and reciprocity between the voluntary and involuntary—whether in human decision, physical action or consent. The voluntary (the project, the moving of the body and consent) is based on and nourished by the involuntary (motives and given values; body, emotions and habits; character, sub-conscious and life). On the other hand, the involuntary has meaning only within the harmonious synthesis of human action. This analysis enables Ricoeur to refute various traditional explanations of human action. Both deterministic and irrationalistic interpretations distort and misinterpret the place and meaning of the components of human action because of an inadequate representation of man's nature. Determinism is wrong in regarding consciousness as a fact of nature and in confusing motives with causes; irrationalism, which advocates a "liberté d'indifférence", basing itself on the same premise as rationalism, and confusing motives with causes, is wrong in seeing the negation of the very existence of motives as the one way of saving human freedom. Both views disregard the fact that human action is impossible and cannot be understood without motives and that this, in turn, does not mean a determination of man in a mechanical way, for motives are not a part of nature but rather an organic element in a specific human situation—voluntary action. Human freedom is the freedom peculiar to a finite being immersed in time. Both those who stress passivity and receptivity and those who stress the dynamic creating ability of the self are wrong; both those who thought that freedom is possible only on the basis of clear and distinct motives and that action is nothing but the end of deliberation (St. Thomas) and those who thought that freedom is possible only by an irrational emergence of the vital ego (Bergson) or by negating the existence of any previous determination of the self (Sartre) are mistaken. A true human decision is composed of two elements; given motives and values on the one hand, and non-intellectualist spontaneous choice on the other. Duality is peculiar to human action. This is made more explicit in dealing with the more fundamental involuntary elements; character, sub-consciousness and life. Man acts freely from a finite and determined point of view; he acts in a clear and transparent way on the basis of confused and amorphous data; he lives his freedom when thrown into life. Necessity is inherent in man; it is one of his modes of being. There is no "inner freedom" on the one hand and "objective" causal necessity on the other. This conception of human action as both activity and passivity is reminiscent of Merleau-Ponty's statement in his "Philosophie du perception": "Le monde est déjá constitué, mais aussi jamais complètement constitué.... Il n'y a donc jamais déterminisme et jamais choix absolu, jamais je ne suis chose et jamais conscience nue". There is no dilemna between determinism and irrationalism, just as there is none between extended substance and thinking substance; there is dialogue.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23340010

Journal Title: Civilisations
Publisher: Institute de Sociologie
Issue: i23346050
Date: 8 1, 2012
Author(s): STEFANOVSKA Malina
Abstract: Voir son récit autobiographique, Origines (2004).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23346060

Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i23352863
Date: 7 1, 2012
Author(s): Cabantous Alain
Abstract: Jeffrey Bolster, Blackjacks. African Ameñcan Seamen in the Age of Sail, Cambridge (Mass.), Harvard, UP, 1997.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rhis.123.0705

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i23353270
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Guery François
Abstract: La Métaphysique, traduction et commentaire par Jules Tricot, Paris, Vrin, coll. « Bibliothèque des textes philosophiques», 1933.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rmm.124.0611

Journal Title: Early China
Publisher: The Society for the Study of Early China and the Institute of East Asian Studies, University of California, Berkeley
Issue: i23351649
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Schaberg David
Abstract: Duke Ling of Jin (Zuozhuan, Xuan 2.3 [Yang, 655-59]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23354245

Journal Title: October
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i23361522
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): APTER EMILY
Abstract: Roberto Esposito, Immunitas: The Protection and Negation of Life, trans. Zakiya Hanafi (London: Polity Press, 2011), pp. 145-77.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1162/OCTO_a_00107

Journal Title: Studies in Education / עיונים בחינוך
Publisher: הוצאת הספרים של אוניברסיטת חיפה
Issue: i23392461
Date: 3 1, 1986
Author(s): GOLOMB JACOB
Abstract: Nietzsche's impact on educational thought has always been surprisingly neglected, possibly because it is hard to divorce his educational views from his philosophical endeavour, as a whole which has given rise to considerable scholarly polemics during the last few decades. Recently several articles propagating various interpretations of Nietzsche's educational teaching have been published Their main weakness lies in the fact that Nietzsche's central educational theses are discussed quite apart from his "psychological" philosophy, while it is the philosophy that serves as the necessary background for understanding those theses. The present paper, mainly analyzing nietzsche's essay "Schopenhauer as Educator", will attempt to provide a better insight into Nietzsche's early psychological and pedagogic thought. It will also demonsrate those basic criteria implicit in his method of psychologization, which at the very outset had served Nietzsche as an educational means of testing the integrity of certain examplary personalities. Nietzsche's Educational Thought is established in the service of authenticity — a central and influential Existentialist concept, the main ideas of which are explicated in the paper. Another Nietzschean concept, much negleted yet significant, that of the "Higher-Self", is elaborated and compared to Freud's parallel notion of the "Super-Ego".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23393846

Journal Title: Dappim: Research in Literature / דפים למחקר בספרות
Publisher: החוג לספרות עברית והשוואתית, אוניברסיטת חיפה
Issue: i23416296
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Levy Ze'ev
Abstract: Jacques Derrida's deconstructionism has influenced some American shools of literary criticism which aim at abolishing the distinction between literary and philosophical texts and, at the same time, deconstructing the text from its inherent meaning. If no text has any determined meaning, every interpretation is as correct as any other. This article examines some tenets of Derrida and his followers, especially their definitions of the words understanding, interpretation, and difference. It finds some surprizing affinities between Kant's formalistic esthetics and certain formalistic trends in modern criticism, in particular the concept of autonomy, which implies, in deconstructionism, the uniqueness of every text. However, if so, every reading is inevitably a 'misreading' or 'misinterpretation' thereof. This has led to the paradoxical and unwarranted conclusion that reading is impossible... The article questions some eccentric implications of this paralogism, for example, if no text is readable, does this apply to Derrida's writings as well? The article also calls attention to some interesting concepts of Jewish Kabala and of 'negative theology', which bear a striking resemblance to certain of Derrida's and other deconstructionists' ideas. Without diminishing the importance of Derrida's philosohpical work or the contribution of deconstructionism to modern hermeneutics, this article refutes certain nihilistic claims of the 'deconstructors' regarding philosophical hermeneutics and literary criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23417047

Journal Title: Dappim: Research in Literature / דפים למחקר בספרות
Publisher: החוג לספרות עברית והשוואתית, אוניברסיטת חיפה
Issue: i23416455
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Kagan Zipora
Abstract: The aim of this essay is to define the nature of the metaphor in Berdiczewski's novel Miriam (1921). For this purpopse I examine the short story included in Miriam about the scholar who was studying a book entitled The Gate of Heaven. Comparing this story with other literary texts which present a hero who stands in a mystical or philosophical sense before the gate of Heaven illuminates the historic-generative essence of the above metaphor. Using the theoretical and methodological system developed by three scholars (P. Ricuer, D. Schon and B. Indurkyia) to follow the metaphorical process, I attempt to show that Berdiczewski's metaphors are not only figures of speech; they form our essential cultural and historical cognition (tolada in Hebrew). I therefore suggest applying to Berdiczewski's metaphor the form 'historic-generative metaphor.'
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23417436

Journal Title: Israeli Sociology / סוציולוגיה ישראלית
Publisher: החוג לסוציולוגיה ולאנתרופולוגיה, הפקולטה למדעי החברה ע"ש גרשון גורדון אוניברסיטת תל-אביב
Issue: i23442333
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Shenhav Yehouda
Abstract: מסה זו עוסקת בסוציולוגיה של התרגום בתנאים של יחסי כוח תיאולוגיים וקולוניאליים בין שפות. בעקבות ולטר בנימין, פול ריקר, ז'אק דרידה והספרות הפוסט-קולוניאלית, אדגים כיצד תחומים בלתי ניתנים לתרגום הופכים את התרגום לאשליה משיחית. דרך דוגמאות מתוך ספרות הנכבה שנכתבה בערבית אני מבקש להראות כיצד התחומים הבלתי ניתנים לתרגום מוצפים במסמנים לא יציבים ובמצבים אפורתיים של מבוי סתום. למשל, השימוש במילה נכבה אינו עקבי אלא תלוי בהקשר של זמן הכתיבה וזמן התרגום. בערבית אפשר למצוא לבד מנכבה גם את המושגים כארת'ה, הזימה, נכסה ומאסאה. בעברית אפשר למצוא שימוש באסון, בתבוסה, בטרגדיה או בנכבה. גם המסמנים ההיסטוריוגרפיים ומסמני הזמן והמרחב בספרות הנכבה אינם יציבים אלא משתנים תמידית. תובנות אלה מציעות אסטרטגיות תרגום שמתבססות על הטיות זמן מתאימות (למשל זמן הווה מתמשך במקום זמן עבר), על היעזרות בהערות חיצוניות לטקסט ועל שערוב מסוים של העברית. What is translation under asymmetrical conditions of power? How do colonial and theological practices shape the relationships between languages? Drawing on Walter Benjamin, Paul Ricoeur, Jacque Derrida, and postcolonial literature in general, I show how untranslatable texts stemming from such asymmetry result in insurmountable gaps which render the messianic "perfect translation" impossible. Using examples from literature on the Palestinian Naqba, I examine how untranslatable texts (from Arabic to Hebrew) are inflated with unstable signifiers, which themselves are contingent on the time/space aspect of the translation. Using these examples, I demonstrate the extent to which translation from Arabic to Hebrew necessitates peculiar political and aesthetic strategies which are sensitive to colonial and theological conditions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23443031

Journal Title: Annales de Géographie
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i23450960
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Berdoulay Vincent
Abstract: R.Rolland, Le Cloître de la rue d'Vlm, Paris, A.Michel (Cahiers Romain Rolland), 1952, p. 202-203.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23451531

Journal Title: Annales de Géographie
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i23457606
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Lefort Isabelle
Abstract: Vasset Ph. (2007), Un livre blanc. Récit avec cartes, Paris, Fayard.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23458463

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i23483400
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): SHERIDAN RUTH
Abstract: The Australian Oxford English Dictionary [ed. Bruce Moore; 2nd ed.; Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004], 968
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23487893

Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Fundación Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i23496240
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): de la Pascua Sánchez María José
Abstract: Ibidem, pp. 126-127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23496317

Journal Title: Hebrew Union College Annual
Publisher: Hebrew Union College
Issue: i23503346
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): TOWNER W. SIBLEY
Abstract: supra, pp. 107-109.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23507627

Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i23527844
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Ledesma José Luis
Abstract: Keith Jenkins: ¿Por qué la historia? Ética y posmodernidad, México, FCE, 2006 [1999].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23530140

Journal Title: Sociologický Časopis / Czech Sociological Review
Publisher: Sociologický ústav Akademie Věd České Republiky
Issue: i23535034
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): NEKVAPIL JIŘÍ
Abstract: Hájek, Dlouhá 2011
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23535537

Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century French Studies
Publisher: The University of Nebraska Press
Issue: i23535931
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): WRIGHT BETH S.
Abstract: After 1814, the French looked to parallels in the past to explain the causes of contemporary events. For them historical time was doubled, understood through analogies. Signaling multiple times, easily accomplished in historiographic narratives, posed a challenge to historical painters. Delaroche utilized innovative approaches to representing time in his works, which were praised by contemporary historians and art critics as visual parallels to modern historical literature. In this essay I argue that Delaroche's repeated visual quotation of works from the Bowyer Historic Gallery enabled him to represent a doubled moment in his historical paintings. I examine his approach to temporality in Jane Grey (1834), Assassination of the duc de Guise (1834), a suite of watercolors (c.1825) on an episode in Rousseau's Confessions (1782), and Cromwell (1831). The latter was one of several works by Delaroche inspired by Chateaubriand's Les Quatre Stuarts (1828), an insistently multi-temporal text which compared Stuarts and Bourbons, written to ensure the stability of the newly restored Bourbon dynasty.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23538480

Journal Title: Biography
Publisher: University of Hawai'i Press for the Biographical Research Center
Issue: i23538826
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): COULLIE JUDITH LÜTGE
Abstract: Jürgen Schlaeger describes autobiography ("a discourse of anxiety") and biography ("a discourse of usurpation") as "distinctly different kinds of rhetorical constructions with different legitimizing strategies, grounds of authority, and points of view." Focusing on the memoirs of Teresa and Anna, daughters of the poet and writer, Roy Campbell (1901—1957) and his wife Mary (1898—1979), this essay examines the challenges arising when autobiography arbitrates biography.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23540966

Journal Title: Early American Studies
Publisher: THE McNEIL CENTER FOR EARLY AMERICAN STUDIES
Issue: i23545403
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): SCRABA JEFFREY
Abstract: Ibid., 10
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23546624

Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23548454
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): GEERTZ CLIFFORD
Abstract: Lakoff and Turner 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23549990

Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23548420
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Urban Hugh B.
Abstract: Eliade 1969: 8, 9
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23551195

Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23548558
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Schilbrack Kevin
Abstract: Stoller (1997)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23551721

Journal Title: The Annual of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23558361
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Frear, George L.
Abstract: Richard Woods, "Is it oxymoron, temporary antimony [f/c] or an idea in crisis?" National Catholic Reporter, 27 December 1991, 15.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23559770

Journal Title: The Annual of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23559797
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): O'Neill William
Abstract: In this essay, I consider the rival liberal and communitarian accounts of justice emerging in complex, pluralist societies. I argue that we err in posing the question of human rights as a Hobson's choice between a formal, universal metanarrative, as envisioned in philosophical liberalism, or as a merely local, ethnocentric narrative of the western bourgeoisie, as in the communitarian critique. For human rights are best viewed rhetorically, as establishing the possibility of rationally persuasive argument across our varied narrative traditions. The essay concludes by attending to the role of religious belief in the public reason of a postmodern society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23561084

Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Issue: i23562435
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Clairmont David A.
Abstract: THIS ESSAY EXAMINES THE RELEVANCE FOR RELIGIOUS ETHICS OF BUDDHIST Abhidhamma texts, those dealing with the analysis and systematization of mental states arising in and examined by meditation practice. Developing recent scholarship on the prevalence and significance of interlocking lists in Buddhist canonical texts and commentaries, the Buddhist use of lists in the Abhidhamma constitutes a kind of narrative expression of moral development through the sequential occurrence of carefully defined mental states. Attention to this narrative dimension of the moral life, while related to other recent proposals about the place of narrative in religious ethics, offers a way to employ this underexamined genre of religious literature (lists) drawn from a comparative context (Buddhist and Christian ethics), in service of a more nuanced account of moral development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23562950

Journal Title: Traditional Dwellings and Settlements Review
Publisher: International Association for the Study of Traditional Environments (IASTE)
Issue: i23564251
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): BALAMIR AYDAN
Abstract: This paper addresses the problem of interpreting the concepts of tradition and traditionalism with specific reference to the tradition of the Anatolian house and the recent erosion of place quality in Turkish towns. The Anatolian house provides a remarkable example of cultural diffusion and transformation. During the reign of the late Ottoman, a variety of cultures impinged on one another, giving rise to autochthonous traditions that were shared by different religious and ethnic groups. But during the Republican Period the process of Westernization interrupted the continuity of historic traditions, resulting in the emergence of a peculiar contemporary tradition. The majority of Turkish housing today displays characteristics of a "vernacular modernism" conditioned by the moral and technical orders of a market economy. The worldwide spread of such cultural mediocrity has often been attributed to the corrosive influence of a single world civilization. A number of recent attempts have been made to search for a national idiom in Turkey. But these attempts, often promoting a "vernacular historicism," have yet to account for any distinct revision of urban house-form. Argument today revolves around an old rhetorical opposition between universal civilization and national culture. Should a post-traditional society sustain its cultural tradition to attain universal values, or vice-versa? The conservative in this debate is more involved in the revival than in the preservation of tradition. The progressive, though an ardent defender of preservation, resists revivalism because of its chauvinistic connotations and pastiche effects. This paper attempts to resolve this argument by suggesting a simultaneous unfolding of the historical problems of the Anatolian house tradition and the theoretical problems of presumed dichotomies such as "traditional vs. modern." Finally, the paper advocates the development of research strategies to facilitate correct readings of cultural tradition and design strategies to improve the quality of residential environments.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23566252

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23568596
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): Carrier Hervé
Abstract: Moore, The Tutorial System
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23574177

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23568617
Date: 1 1, 1974
Author(s): Latourelle René
Abstract: R. Latourelle, Authenticité historique des miracles de Jésus. Es- sai de critériologie, dans: Gregorianum, 54 (1973), pp. 251-255.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23575244

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23568647
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): Magnani Giovanni
Abstract: Merton Gill, Psychic Energy, J.A.PsA, 1977 p. 581
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23576028

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569630
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Gilbert Paul
Abstract: P.H. Kolvenbach, «Linguistica e teologia» dans Rassegna di teologia, 1985, pp. 481-595.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23577822

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570146
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Salmann Elmar
Abstract: Paris, jetzt zugànglich in K. Barth, Theologi- sche Fragen und Antworten. Ges. Aufsatze II, Zollikon 1957, 175.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23577996

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569608
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Pelland Gilles
Abstract: «La vérité de l'Ecriture et l'herméneutique biblique», RTL 18 (1987) 171-186.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23578218

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569626
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Meyer Ben F.
Abstract: Coreth, Grundfragen, 128.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23578309

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569616
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Kobler John F.
Abstract: John F. Kobler, op. cit. (n. 12 supra), pp. 119-122, 194.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23578486

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569621
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Caba José
Abstract: Dei Verbum 12: AAS 58 (1966) 824.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23578657

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569623
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Henrici Peter
Abstract: 1 Jean 4, 7.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579291

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569865
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Wainright Geoffrey
Abstract: Gemeinsame ròmisch-katholische evangelisch- lutherische Kommission, Kircne und Rechfertigung. Das Verstàndnis der Kirche im Licht der Rechtfertigungslehre (Paderborn: Bonifatius; Frankfurt: Lembeck, 1984).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579346

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570132
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Rasco Emilio
Abstract: Szeged 1995: «Az Apostolok Cselekedeteivel Kapcso- latos Kutatàs Legalapvetobb Szakaszai», 7-29.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579575

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570162
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Tilliette Xavier
Abstract: M. Blondel et Ρ. Teilhard de Chardin: correspondance commentée par Henri de Lubac. Beauchesne, 1964.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579649

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570144
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Sesboüé Bernard
Abstract: Ρ. Ricoeur, «Le récit interprétatif. Exégèse et théologie dans les récits de la pas- sion», reprenant les vues de R, Alter, RSR 73, (1985), p. 18.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579791

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570142
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Lucas Ramón Lucas
Abstract: M.F. Sciacca, Morte e immortalità, 106-107.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581124

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570322
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Gilbert Paul
Abstract: M. Heidegger, De l'essence de la vérité, 78
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581548

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570197
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Finamore Rosanna
Abstract: H.G. Gadamer, Verità e metodo, 442.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581824

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570197
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Lawrence Frederick G.
Abstract: Friendship and the Ways to Truth, Notre Carne,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581825

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570983
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Carlotti Paolo
Abstract: Concilio Ecumenico Vaticano II, Gaudium et spes, 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581907

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23571955
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): D'Agostino Simone
Abstract: Ibid., 248.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581948

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23573307
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Mateo Rogelio García
Abstract: R. Garcìa Mateo, Ignacio de Loyola. Su espiritualidad y su mundo cultural, Bilbao, 2000, 161-206.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23582170

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: J.C.B. MOHR (PAUL SIEBECK)
Issue: i23584417
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): Janowski Bernd
Abstract: Gese, Tod, 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23584888

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: J.C.B. MOHR (PAUL SIEBECK)
Issue: i23584495
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Schneider-Flume Gunda
Abstract: Barth, KD III/4, 445.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23584992

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: J.C.B. Mohr (Paul Siebeck)
Issue: i23585001
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Ringleben Joachim
Abstract: Klopstocks sämmtliche Werke, 5. Bd., 1854, 35.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23585648

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: J.C.B. Mohr (Paul Siebeck)
Issue: i23585004
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): Zumstein Jean
Abstract: B. Feuillet, L'heure de la femme (s. Anm. 29).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23585653

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585752
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): Schneider-Flume Gunda
Abstract: Ricceur [s. Anm. 6], Bd. 3,335- 349
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23585759

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585557
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Morgenstern Matthias
Abstract: G. Aicher, Das Alte Testament in der Mischna, Freiburg i.Br. 1906, 67f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23585919

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585696
Date: 9 1, 2005
Author(s): Körtner Ulrich H. J.
Abstract: G. Schneider-Flume, Grundkurs Dogmatik, 2004,20ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23586062

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585596
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Krause Cyprian
Abstract: Ebd.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23586078

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585695
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Ahrens Theodor
Abstract: Steinmann [s. Anm. 22], 221-239), 221ff. 227ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23586129

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585707
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Stoellger Philipp
Abstract: E. Levinas, Autrement qu'etre ou au-delä de l'essence, Paris 1974, 29-76.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23586358

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585724
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Seibert Christoph
Abstract: Lk23,34.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1628/004435412799484295

Journal Title: Revue Tiers Monde
Publisher: l'Institut d'Étude du Développement économique et social
Issue: i23593146
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Mahieu François-Régis
Abstract: Ballet, Bazin, 2006
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23593645

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: REVISTA PORTUGUESA de Filosofia
Issue: i23596134
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): DE BRITO AMÉLIA SILVEIRA
Abstract: Cortina, Adela - Ètica de la razón cordial, cit., p. 82.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23596156

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: REVISTA PORTUGUESA de Filosofia
Issue: i23596134
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): ETXEBERRIA XABIER
Abstract: Ibid. p. 57.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23596157

Journal Title: Estudios de Asia y Africa
Publisher: EL COLEGIO DE MÉXICO
Issue: i23608180
Date: 8 1, 2013
Author(s): ÁLVAREZ MARÍA DEL PILAR
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, La memoria, la historia, el olvido, op. cit., p. 35.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23608204

Journal Title: Historia Mexicana
Publisher: EL COLEGIO DE MÉXICO
Issue: i23608439
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): Zermeño Guillermo
Abstract: Algunos debates en Historia Mexicana, xlvi:3 (183) (ene.-mar. 1997), pp. 563-580, recogidos de The Hispanic American Historical Review, 79:2 (1999).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23608575

Journal Title: Histoire, Économie et Société
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i23614385
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): De Franceschi Sylvio Hermann
Abstract: Ibid., t. Ier, p. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23614392

Journal Title: Histoire, Économie et Société
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i23612254
Date: 6 1, 2012
Author(s): Anceau Éric
Abstract: Douze leçons sur l'histoire, op. cit., p. 206.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23614476

Journal Title: European Journal of East Asian Studies
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23615377
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): YANG CHUNG FANG
Abstract: Cheung, Rujia Lunli Tu gjhixu Qingjie', Liu, Chui Rong, 'gjiongguoren De Caifu Guarnían' (The Chinese conception of wealth), in K.S. Yang (ed.), jjiongguoren Dejiazhi Guan (Value Orientations of the Chinese People) (Taipei: Guiguan Books, 1993).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23615674

Journal Title: Perspectives
Publisher: INSTITUTE OF INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
Issue: i23615225
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): KUBÁLKOVÁ VENDULKA
Abstract: The Anglo-American discipline of International Relations defends its main principles and resists with an almost religious fervor any change to them, although the explanation of world affairs has been eluding it since its inception. The article attempts to draw up possibly the first historiography of the IR scholarship about religion in world affairs since the 90s, showing the heightened interest in the subject from most other social sciences and humanities. The article proposes the use of the term 'International Political Theology' to bridge the multiple literatures as well as to underscore the theological commitment of the IR discipline to its basic creeds and dogmas.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23616223

Journal Title: Perspectives
Publisher: INSTITUTE OF INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
Issue: i23615225
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): HANSKA JAN
Abstract: This article concerns itself with establishing and defining the concept of prophetic politics as a narrative-based political leadership. It focuses on the use of religious, mythical and otherwise culturally dominating narratives which are often taken for granted or as 'common sense.' By a skilful politician, these stories can be given new forms and used as tools of leadership. This article explores the differences between traditional prophesies in the religious context and political prophesies and shows how with the use of prophetic narratives the politician is able to keep politics from stagnation since every moment and every decision can be endowed with special importance in actualizing the vision that remains the fascinating but elusive goal of politics - whatever it is narrated to be. This might re-invigorate the citizens to participate more in politics. The focus of the article is on American politics since the American civil religion and the narrative tradition of the jeremiad provide ample tools for political prophets, but the concept is not restricted solely to America. I argue that well told narratives have great influence on how people think and that can be manipulated politically. This type of leadership opens new vistas for political candidates, but it also opens new vistas for researchers to use in their study of politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23616226

Journal Title: Perspectives
Publisher: INSTITUTE OF INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
Issue: i23616196
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): HAYS GEORGE
Abstract: This article examines Campbell's concept of 'foreign policy' and its application to identifiers 'below' those utilized by Campbell. Campbell's discussion of 'foreign policy' at the level of the ruling elite, though perhaps necessary for the historical breadth of his analysis, provides a skewed and privileged understanding of both national identity and its creation. Through an analysis of 'foreign policy' at the sub-elite level, using the three versions of The Quiet American as illustrative examples, this article demonstrates that a separation of 'foreign policy' from Foreign Policy can yield multiple potentially conflicting national identities. While at times taking on the form of an argument ad absurdum, it is not the intent of this article to disprove Campbell's work. Rather, its intent is to use the concept of 'foreign policy' with a different level of identifier to demonstrate that the tenuousness and indefiniteness of national identity are actually greater than those proposed by Campbell.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23616255

Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i23622119
Date: 8 1, 2013
Author(s): Slipak Daniela
Abstract: Véase Aboy Cariés (2001: 163-258).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23622286

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: REVISTA PORTUGUESA de Filosofia
Issue: i23630184
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): CATALÃO HELENA B.
Abstract: "C'était bien la même Amérique que j'avais laissée, les mêmes questions, les mêmes Blancs qui cherchaient un bouc émissaire!" Haley, Alex & Malcolm X - op. cit., p. 288.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23631110

Journal Title: Revue d'histoire des sciences
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i23634341
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): GUILLIN Vincent
Abstract: lbid., 129.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23634351

Journal Title: The British Journal of Criminology
Publisher: OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23638508
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Pavlich George
Abstract: Van Swaaningen 1997
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23638899

Journal Title: Paideuma: Mitteilungen zur Kulturkunde
Publisher: W. Kohlhammer
Issue: i23643578
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Kämpf Heike
Abstract: physische Umwelt" geht Honneth nur am Rande ein (2005:74 -75).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23644457

Journal Title: RES: Anthropology and Aesthetics
Publisher: The Peabody Museum of Archaeology and Ethnology and the Harvard University Art Museums
Issue: i23646914
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): Kincaid Claude
Abstract: Strawson, "On Referring," cited in E. Laurent, "Symptôme et nom propre," in Les maladies du nom propre, La Cause freudienne 39 (Paris, 1998), p. 27.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23647765

Journal Title: RES: Anthropology and Aesthetics
Publisher: The Peabody Museum of Archaeology and Ethnology and the Harvard University Art Museums
Issue: i23646290
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): PEZOLET NICOLA
Abstract: "Golden Lion for Malick Sidibé," Nafas (May 2007), http:// universes-in-universe.org/eng/nafas/articles/2007/news_tips/malick_ sidibe (accessed March 30, 2010).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23647795

Journal Title: Acta Orientalia Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae
Publisher: AKADÉMIAI KIADÓ
Issue: i23656603
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Simon Róbert
Abstract: Goldziher (1912, pp. 92 sq)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23658556

Journal Title: Revue de l'histoire des religions
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i23662048
Date: 9 1, 1995
Author(s): SAUZEAU ANDRÉ
Abstract: J. S. Cooper, Sumerian and Aryan : Racial theory, Académie Politics and Parisian Assiriology, RHR, 210, 1993, p. 169-205.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23671687

Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676340
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Liebsch Burkhard
Abstract: Le Juste, 85f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23680561

Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676359
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Schmitz Heinz-Gerd
Abstract: A. Hamilton/J. Madison/J. Jay, The Federalist or, The New Consitution, introduction by W.R. Brock, London/New York 1961, 37
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23680922

Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676298
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Lindahl Hans
Abstract: Giorgio Agamben, État d'exception, 2003, 87
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23681447

Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: CENTRE D'ÉTUDE DES CONFLITS L'HARMATTAN
Issue: i23696068
Date: 10 1, 1991
Author(s): CATANZARO Raimondo
Abstract: C. Duggan, Facism and the Mafia, New Haven : Yale university Press, 1989, p. 6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23698736

Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i23696193
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): APTER DAVID E.
Abstract: David E. Apter et Tony Saich, Revolutionary Discourse in "Mao's Republic", Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23698813

Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i23696812
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): MCGIBBON Rodd
Abstract: Campbell (David), National reconstruction: Violence, Identity and Justice in Bosnia, op. cit., pp. 165-208.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23699462

Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i23697554
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): WASINSKI Christophe
Abstract: Doubler M., Closing with Enemy - How Gis Fought the War in Europe, 1944-1945, Lawrence, University Press of Kansas, 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23703529

Journal Title: The British Journal of Social Work
Publisher: OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23714806
Date: 4 1, 1998
Author(s): BANKS SARAH
Abstract: This paper examines the ethical implications of recent changes in social work, particularly in relation to the conception of social workers as professionals guided by a code of ethics. These changes include the fragmentation of the occupation, the increasing proceduralization of the work and the growing focus on consumer rights and user participation. Some people have argued that codes of ethics are becoming increasingly irrelevant in this climate, in that they assume a unified occupational group and are based upon professionals' definition of values without consultation with service users. On the other hand, it has also been maintained that it is ever more important to retain and strengthen codes of ethics in order to maintain professional identity and to defend the work of the profession from outside attack. This paper explores the relevance of a code of professional ethics for social work, focusing particularly on the British Association of Social Workers' code, in the context of the changing organization and practice of the work. It considers two alternative approaches: the 'new consumerism' which focuses on the worker's technical skills (rather than professional ethics) and consumer rights (as opposed to professional obligations); and a 'new radicalism' which stresses the worker's own personal or political commitment and individual moral responsibility (as opposed to an externally imposed code of professional ethics). It is concluded that the changes in social work do threaten the notion of a single set of professional ethics articulated in a code, and that, in some types of work, this model is less appropriate. However, there is still mileage in retaining and developing a code of ethics, not as an imposed set of rules developed by the professional association, but as part of a dynamic and evolving ethical tradition in social work and as a stimulus for debate and reflection on changing and contradictory values.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23714811

Journal Title: The British Journal of Social Work
Publisher: OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23720551
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Wilks Tom
Abstract: Most accounts of social work values contain two central conceptual strands: social work ethics and anti-discriminatory practice. Within social work, relatively little attention has been paid to the potential of feminist approaches to ethics, grounded in identity to bring these two strands together. Narrative ethics is an approach which, like the feminist ethic of care, takes identity as its starting point and therefore has the potential to bridge these two distinctive approaches to social work values. However, in asserting the centrality of narrative in the construction of our identities, it moves beyond the feminist approach. Narrative approaches to ethics have been widely adopted in medicine. This paper explores their applicability to social work practice, particularly in the light of an increasing interest in narrative as a basis for practice intervention.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23720555

Journal Title: History of Economic Ideas
Publisher: Gruppo Editoriale Internazionale
Issue: i23718600
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Coats A. W. "Bob"
Abstract: Terence W. Hutchison (1988), p. 527.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23722264

Journal Title: History of Economic Ideas
Publisher: Fabrizio Serra editore
Issue: i23722717
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Sobel Richard
Abstract: Archer 1998,194
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23723537

Journal Title: Contributions to the History of Concepts
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i23730852
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Feres João
Abstract: Jurgen Habermas (1989) and (1990).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23730857

Journal Title: Contributions to the History of Concepts
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i23730893
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Scuccimarra Luca
Abstract: Sandro Chignola (2005), 195.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23730896

Journal Title: Contributions to the History of Concepts
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i23730902
Date: 7 1, 2011
Author(s): IFVERSEN JAN
Abstract: http://www.concepta-net.org/beyond_classical_key_concepts.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3167/choc.2011.060104

Journal Title: Contributions to the History of Concepts
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i23730921
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Pérez Lara Campos
Abstract: Helga Von Kiigelgen (1990).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23730924

Journal Title: Innovar: Revista de ciencias administrativas y sociales
Publisher: UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE COLOMBIA
Issue: i23741451
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Tognato Carlo
Abstract: Stevens y Toneguzzo (2004).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23745584

Journal Title: Revista Española de Pedagogía
Publisher: INSTITUTO «SAN JOSÉ DE CALASANZ» DE PEDAGOGÍA CONSEJO SUPERIOR DE INVESTIGACIONES CIENTÍFICAS
Issue: i23757323
Date: 12 1, 1971
Author(s): Seima José Vila
Abstract: Vicens Vives [1952], 1969, 15, 16.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23762901

Journal Title: Revista Española de Pedagogía
Publisher: consejo superior de investigaciones científicas
Issue: i23757753
Date: 4 1, 1992
Author(s): Botía Antonio Bolívar
Abstract: This paper argues that the role of teacher, in the process of curriculum development, is conceptually dependent on the different curriculum approaches. It has been analysed and discussed the instrumental role (user and implementor) which it has from a technical-scientific approach, the curriculum development agent's role from an interpretative-cultural view, and the role of the institucional development from a critical approach. The potentialities and insufficiencies of a curriculum practical view and the teacher's role have been analysed. We suggest the School Institutional Development as one of the most promising ways for curriculum development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23764915

Journal Title: Revista Española de Pedagogía
Publisher: INSTITUTO EUROPEO DE INICIATIVAS EDUCATIVAS
Issue: i23758746
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): ALBA José Antonio MILLÁN
Abstract: Disciplina acuñada en el XIX, la filología surge como historicidad fundamental, identificando la significación de una obra con sus condiciones de producción originarias, un discurso de la ciencia (historia) sobre la lengua y la literatura. La hermenéutica contemporánea supone una ruptura de la razón histórico-filológica y una afirmación de los nuevos significados que a un texto se le añaden al pasar de un contexto cultural u otro nuevo. Para la filología, el criterio pedagógico único de explicación de los textos es la restitución de la intención deliberada y originaria del autor. Hermenéutica y teoría de la literatura afirman que no hay adecuación lógica necesaria entre sentido de la obra e intención de autor. Tras la “muerte del autor” del formalismo semiótico, la posmodernidad niega el texto mismo y afirma que éste tiene tantos sentido como lectores. A discipline minted in the 19th century, philology, emerges as a fundamental historicist approach, identifying the significance of a work with its original conditions of production, a discourse from science (history) about language and literature. Contemporary hermeneutics assumes a break with historical-philological reason, as well as an affirmation of the new meanings added to a text by passing from one cultural context to another new one. For philology, the only pedagogical criterion in explaining texts is the restitution of deliberate and original authorial intent. Hermeneutics and literary theory assert that there is no logical association necessary between the meaning of the work, and authorial intent. Since the “death of the author” of semiotic formalism, postmodernity has denied the text itself, instead asserting that it has as many meanings as it has readers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23766850

Journal Title: The Journal of Educational Thought (JET) / Revue de la Pensée Éducative
Publisher: Faculty of Education, University of Calgary
Issue: i23762745
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): ROTH WOLFF-MICHAEL
Abstract: Present discourses on technology education are taking a positive and value-neutral approach with utilitarian and vocational overtones. The discourses generally lack discussions of human agency and human responsibility for techno-scientific activities and technological literacy. To support the emergence of a collective civic literacy, we argue in this text that technology education needs to take up critical and value-acknowledging aspects with emphasis on building sustainable relationships among human beings, technology, and lifeworld. To understand the relationship between human agency and modern technology, we examine the nature of technology in the dimensions of technology as causality and technology as a relationship of lifeworld. Discussing Martin Heidegger's perspectives on the causalities of technology, we question how the nature of technology situates human beings in power-related relationships to the world. Understanding technology as process and relationship of lifeworld, the paper extends its discussion of the responsibility of a dialectical human-technology-lifeworld relation based on a socio-technical and ethico-moral framework of technology. By recognizing human responsibility of and for modern technology, we outline a critical and reflective approach to technological literacy. The approach challenges the position of current approaches to technology in the attempt to provide a foundation for a contemporary pedagogy of technological awareness and values. Aujourd'hui, les discours en matière d'enseignement de la technologie sont en train de prendre une orientation positive et dépourvue de jugement de valeur comportant des connotations utilitaristes et professionnelles. En général, les discours n'ouvrent pas assez de discussions sur l'action humaine et la responsabilité humaine dans les activités technico-scientifiques et dans l'alphabétisme technologique. Dans ce papier, afin de renforcer l'éclosion de l'alphabétisme civique collectif, nous ouvrons le débat sur le fait que l'enseignement de la technologie a besoin d'aborder des aspects critiques et de valeur reconnue avec un accent mis sur la construction durable des relations chez les êtres humains, dans la technologie et dans la vie mondiale. Dans le but de comprendre les relations entre l'action humaine et la technologie moderne, nous analysons la nature de la technologie en tant que causalité et en tant que relation de la vie mondiale. Nous discutons des perspectives de Martin Heidegger sur les causalités de la technologie. Nous posons des questions sur la manière que la nature de la technologie situe les êtres humains dans les relations basées sur le pouvoir face au monde. Nous assimilons la technologie comme processus et comme relation de la vie mondiale. L'article élargit les propos sur la responsabilité dune relation dialectale humaine technologie/vie mondiale, fondée sur une structure de technologie sociotechnique et éthico morale. En reconnaissant la responsabilité humaine de et pour la technologie moderne, nous soulignons une démarche critique et réfléchie de l'alphabétisme technologique. La démarche remet en question la position des approches actuelles vers le chemin de la technologie afin d'apporter une base à une pédagogie contemporaine de sensibilisation et de valeurs technologiques.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23767086

Journal Title: The Journal of Educational Thought (JET) / Revue de la Pensée Éducative
Publisher: Faculty of Education The University of Calgary
Issue: i23761698
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): Blumenfeld-Jones Donald S.
Abstract: Classroom discipline systems are considered as patriarchal moral systems focused on hyper-individuality and dependent upon rules, consequences, and principles focused through authoritarian structures. Three example systems (Assertive Discipline, Glasser's Control Theory, and Discipline with Dignity) are critiqued using Noddings' analysis of evil and Welch's liberation theology. As an alternative grounding, freedom of responsibility is proposed, moved foward through Noddings' mediation and care and Welch's dangerous memory and solidarity with oppressed peoples. Les différentes approches à la discipline dans la salle de classe sont considérés comme des systèmes patriarcaux et moraux qui ont pour but de brimer l'individualité. Ces systèmes ont également comme bases des règlements, des conséquences et des principes imposés par des structures autoritaires. A la lumière de l'analyse de Nodding sur le mal et de la théologie de la libération de Welch, nous critiquons trois systèmes de discipline: "Assertive Discipline, Glasser's Control Theory, Discipline with Dignity." Comme alternative nous proposons plutôt une approche dite "liberté responsable" qui s'inspire des concepts de médiation et de soin de Nodding et des concepts de mémoire dangereuse et de solidarité des opprimés de Welch.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23767305

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i23783400
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Azevedo Valérie Robin
Abstract: Steve Stern Remembering Pinochet's Chile, 2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785644

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i23783400
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Caillet Laurence
Abstract: Rotermund, 1988 : 206-221.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785651

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: REVISTA PORTUGUESA de Filosofia
Issue: i23783067
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): AMORIM MIGUEL
Abstract: Amorim, Miguel-A Catallegory Fatigue Sampler for an Im-pertinent History of Cinema, take one. Barcelona: unpublished, 2013.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785881

Journal Title: Ägypten und Levante / Egypt and the Levant
Publisher: VERLAG DER ÖSTERREICHISCHEN AKADEMIE DER WISSENSCHAFTEN
Issue: i23785611
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Schneider Thomas
Abstract: Spiegel's statement (Soziale und weltan- schauliche Reformbewegungen im alten Ägypten, Heidelberg 1950, 59)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23788656

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i23799461
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): ROUGÉ BERTRAND
Abstract: infra
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23799586

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i23799482
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): SPRANZI-ZUBER MARTA
Abstract: A. R. Louch, « History as narrative », History and Theory, 8,1969, pp. 55-69.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23799784

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i23799482
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): ALEXANDRE DIDIER
Abstract: Michel Foucault, L'Ordre du discours, Paris, Gallimard, 1971, p. 17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23799786

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Psychosomatische Medizin und Psychotherapie
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i23860471
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Scheidt Carl Eduard
Abstract: Bauer 1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23871488

Journal Title: Ethnicities
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i23880901
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): PATRICK MORAG
Abstract: Many contemporary liberals increasingly accept that plural societies must aspire to far more expansive and inclusive ideals of justice and citizenship than liberal doctrine would suggest. The dominant perception is that extending the set of rights is the most effective way to implement a just and stable multicultural society. In fact, this is not a very plausible description of what people seek in demanding greater respect for diversity. Nor does it offer a compelling vision of how things ought to be. First, social expectations regarding recognition are not uniquely linked to rights; they encompass intractable struggles over values, as well as ways of living and evaluating. For example, a central feature of feminist, black and multicultural politics is the attempt to change social culture into a medium through which personal integrity and self-esteem may be acquired. Second, liberalism cannot easily accommodate this type of struggle, since it takes for granted a narrowly constricted conception of politics that is based on instituting public laws that harmonize the freedom of everyone. Anyone who takes seriously the idea that recognition surpasses legal relations of respect will then surely wish to consider whether liberalism must not be corrected and extended to reveal the political significance of the social conditions that enable individuals to experience themselves as both autonomous and individuated.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23889940

Journal Title: Ethnicities
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i23880984
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): ANTHIAS FLOYA
Abstract: This article argues that the concept of 'identity' is of limited heuristic value and proposes that it may instead be more useful to deploy the notion of narratives of location and positionality for addressing the range of issues normally thought to be about collective identity. Location and positionality (and translocational positionality) are more useful concepts for investigating processes and outcomes of collective identification — that is, the claims and attributions that individuals make about their position in the social order of things, their views of where and to what they belong (and to what they do not belong) as well as an understanding of the broader social relations that constitute and are constituted in this process. This enables a complete abandonment of the residual elements of essentialization retained even within the idea of fragmented and multiple identities so favoured by critics of unitary notions of identity. The article will draw on research into the ways in which experiences of 'race' and ethnicity were articulated in the narrations produced by British-born youngsters of Greek Cypriot background.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23890188

Journal Title: Ethnicities
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i23881003
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): SCOTT-BAUMANN ALISON
Abstract: In order to manage our daily lives, we make many decisions based on empirical evidence derived from instrumental action. At the other extreme, we are often attracted by a so-called postmodern solution that invites us to make arbitrary choices. In the education system, the pressing dilemma should not be a choice between standards of competence or unthinking relativism, but how to take action towards intercultural tolerance. Establishing a small teacher training course for a group of British Muslims has shown that communicative action informed by understanding can be disabled by the instrumentality of positivist frameworks, such as those used by government inspectors. In philosophy, Ricoeur offers a provisional dialectic of hope that can be used to show why neither positivist methods, rational analytic philosophy, postmodernity nor any one belief system for interpreting the world should be allowed to exert hegemonic control. The ethicopractical philosophy of Ricoeur also offers a reconstructive view of reality that helps us to rehabilitate belief in human nature and encourages us to seek solutions to conflicts of interpretation in understanding others. It is applied, in this instance, to project work with Muslim women in the UK, in which an ontology of action shows the power of working collaboratively towards an understanding of oneself as another.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23890295

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Religions- und Geistesgeschichte
Publisher: E. J. BRILL-VERLAG GMBH
Issue: i23886187
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): FLEISCHER MANFRED P.
Abstract: Francis Delaisi: Political Myths and Economic Realities, New York 1927
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23895065

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Religions- und Geistesgeschichte
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23889101
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): KLEIN GIL P.
Abstract: BT Bava Kama 82b.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23898795

Journal Title: Archiv für Religionspsychologie / Archive for the Psychology of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23907886
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Adam Raoul J.
Abstract: Kamenka, 1970
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23907899

Journal Title: Archiv für Religionspsychologie / Archive for the Psychology of Religion
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i23912362
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Hutsebaut Dirk
Abstract: In this study we relate four different measures: the theodicy models proposed by van der Ven, the coping strategies proposed by Pargament, a measure of positive or negative self-image and the post critical belief scales we ourselves have developed. We analysed the data of 251 Dutch-speaking Belgians. In the analysis we focus on the relation of the different measures with the post critical belief scales. Different types of believers are using different theodicy models, somewhat different coping strategies and we observe some differences in self-image, where believers have a more positive self-image than non-believers. We could suggest that there is a specific theodicy model used by symbolic believers and another theodicy model used by more literal believers. The former could be interpreted as more developed and perhaps more religiously mature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23912401

Journal Title: Archiv für Religionspsychologie / Archive for the Psychology of Religion
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i23915987
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Kühn Rolf
Abstract: Dieser Begriff will die gesamte Tradition der sokratisch-stoischen bis phänomenologisch- psychologischen Epoché-Methoden andeuten, wohinter sich oft auch die Beziehung der Philo- sophie zur Therapie („Heil") verbirgt. Für eine philosophische Stellungnahme des näheren zur Sinndiskussion aus der Perspektive der Frage nach dem „Sinn des Lebens" als Gewissensindikator vgl. auch B.-LJ. Hergemöller, Weder-Noch. Traktat über die Sinnfrage. Mit einem Vorwort von H. R. Schlette, Hamburg 1985.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23916001

Journal Title: Archiv für Religionspsychologie / Archive for the Psychology of Religion
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i23918208
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): Stein Herbert
Abstract: Der gewichtigste Einwand gegen eine solche Interpretation geht von dem Anspruch der Psy- choanalyse aus, eine Wissenschaft, ein wissenschaftliches Verfahren zu sein. Als solche und solches behauptet Psychoanalyse sich, wenn auch nicht unangefochten, innerhalb der klinischen Medizin. Gerade der kritische Angriff, der von naturwissenschaftlich ausgerichteten Medizinern und verhal- tenstherapeutisch orientierten Psychologen ausgeht, verstärkt das Bemühen der Psychoanalytiker, Psychoanalyse als Wissenschaft auszuweisen und zu erhärten. Um die Art von Wissenschaftlichkeit, um welche es in der Psychoanalyse geht und gehen kann, gibt es unter den Analytikern Meinungs- verschiedenheiten, kaum einer aber würde den Anspruch auf Wissenschaftlichkeit aufgeben. „My- stisches" mit Psychoanalyse in Verbindung zu bringen, dergestalt, daß Psychoanalyse gar irgend- wann und irgendwo in „Mystischem" gründe, muß als absurd, allenfalls eines Abwinkens wert er- scheinen. Es schadet dem Ansehen. Zustimmung wird dort zu finden sein, wo man zur Meinung neigt, immer schon gewußt zu haben, daß Psychoanalyse etwas Obskures sei. In dieser fachhistori- schen Situation wird es schwer halten zu zeigen, daß, mit Carl Friedrich von Weizsäcker zu spre- chen, die „Anerkennung einer meditativen und mystischen Erfahrung.... wenn wir richtig argu- mentiert haben, eine Konsequenz des Verständnisses des Wesens der Rationalität" darstellt (von Weizsäcker, S. 480). Darüber hinaus weiß der Psychoanalytiker, daß er bei seinem Analysanden Einsicht nicht durch argumentierendes Eingehen auf mancherlei Argumentationen erzeugt, sondern durch die Möglichkeit von Erfahrung in einem Prozeß. Dies gilt dann aber auch für jene Elemente eines Prozesses umwandelnder Erfahrung, welche über das klassische Selbstverständnis der Psycho- analyse hinaus erreichen.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23918225

Journal Title: Archiv für Religionspsychologie / Archive for the Psychology of Religion
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i23918257
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Schindler Johann
Abstract: Als solche Vorleistung bleibt sie nie in der formalen Allgemeinheit von Religiosität, sondern wird wesentlich inhaltlich bestimmt von der konkreten Materialität des elterlichen Glaubens.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23918302

Journal Title: Administrative Science Quarterly
Publisher: Cornell University Graduate School of Business and Public Administration
Issue: i341320
Date: 9 1, 1965
Author(s): Woodward Linda
Abstract: This paper examines the significance of the concept of culture for organizational analysis. The intersection of culture theory and organization theory is evident in five current research themes: comparative management, corporate culture, organizational cognition, organizational symbolism, and unconscious processes and organization. Researchers pursue these themes for different purposes and their work is based on different assumptions about the nature of culture and organization. The task of evaluating the power and limitations of the concept of culture must be conducted within this assumptive context. This review demonstrates that the concept of culture takes organization analysis in several different and promising directions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2392246

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917902
Date: 3 1, 2000
Author(s): Cunningham Valentine
Abstract: Bible reading occurs at intersection of perpetually shifting canons—of textual meaning, interpretative strategies, and preferred textual menu for particular contemporary consumption. Such continual up-to-datedness is the Bible's, as it is the classic's, only survival kit. Contemporary reading is the only reading—ever. Post-modernism's biblical reading menu is notable for its post-modernist yields of meaning; but textual post-modernism—aporias, textual unboundedness, canonical on-edgedness, apocryphalism, etcetera—is typical of biblical texts' ur-post-modernism (the Bible living up, of course, to applied post-modernist reading expectations). All such reading is an aestheticisation, a fictionalising process—abusive naturally; constructively abusive, perhaps; but always catachretical, demythologising, a negative theology. But, of course, this is utterly inevitable for now.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23926235

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917925
Date: 6 1, 1998
Author(s): Condon Matthew G.
Abstract: This paper asks, why does the eponymous hero of Joseph Conrad's Lord Jim fail to obtain absolution despite two confessional attempts, and then seek his own death? By using narratological distinctions together with an analysis of the confessional structures of Jim's narratives, we find that his confessions fail for three reasons: he never fulfils his promise to Marlow to plot the 'fundamental why' of his jumping ship, his father's 'easy morality' condemns him even before he abandons the Patna, and Marlow fails to meet his role as confessor.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23926274

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917895
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Mills Kevin
Abstract: This paper sets out to question contemporary notions of language which employ metaphors of imprisonment or confinement to describe the alleged failure of the word to connect with the world. Valentine Cunningham's recent book. In the Reading Gaol, is confronted with Helen Keller's experience of being excluded from language (as described in her autobiography), in order to argue that the issue of hermeneutic freedom needs to be rethought. This involves raising certain doubts about freedom—doubts identified by means of a consideration of the cases of New Testament prisoners: Peter, John, Paul and Silas. I conclude that freedom, confronted by doubt (evident in ascetical gestures) is produced by a hermeneutics of hope. Hope, constituted by its own rivenness, both allows and limits the effects of hermeneutical suspicion. The imprisoning effect ascribed to language can then be seen as a failure with regard to hope.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23926811

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23922199
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Schleicher Marianne
Abstract: Responding to the ethical and performative call of Judith Butler not to propagate the sex- and gender-related violence of the imbedded discourse that we study, this article inquires into the discursive strategies of Jewish scripture by analysing how it orchestrates certain norms of sex and gender and makes them serve the overall aim of securing cultural survival. Following this, it traces reflections on persons of ambiguous or indeterminate sex from rabbinic to modern Judaism so as to inquire into the rabbinic dependency on scripture when non-conforming individuals challenge its bipolar sex and gender system. Finally, the article considers if scripture, as suggested by Butler, can play a subversive role in how we attend to non-conforming others today. To do so, the author's distinction between hermeneutical and artifactual uses of scripture is presented to evaluate the extent to which modern Jews and non-Jews are able to influence their own representations of sex and gender and thus liberate themselves from the normativity implied by scriptural discourse.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/litthe/frr051

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23922198
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Wallace Cynthia R.
Abstract: Religious echoes are resonant with race and gender in Beloved, raising questions best posed in a psychoanalytic register. Freud's sceptical questioning of religion is important for a consideration of the gendered, raced, and specifically religious subjectivities explored in the novel, as is Lacan's paradigm of entry into the symbolic order. Reading the religious in Beloved in light of both Freud and Lacan, and reading the poetically evocative Word in all three, I locate within the novel a profound ambivalence, an awareness of the limitations of language under the Name of the Father and the necessity—even potential good—of imagining within its system.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/litthe/frr027

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917940
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Wriglesworth Chad
Abstract: This essay outlines and illustrates ways that 'theological humanism' provides methodological possibilities for scholars working in religion and literary studies. I suggest there is a need to investigate more humanistic methods of interpreting literature by exploring approaches that engage questions of sacred depth. After stressing the necessary paradoxes of theological humanism as an interpretive and lived stance in the world, I offer a reading of Margaret Edson's Wit that is shaped by these principles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23927377

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23922202
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Hass Andrew W.
Abstract: The following essay explores the nature of theory within the interdisciplinary space we call literature and theology—or more generally religion and literature—and the role theory has played in that space's collective practice. It argues that theory is natural to the 'binding' of religion with literature and of literature with religion, since both are caught in a dilemma of reading, including the 'reading' of the practices that mark each of their respective disciplines. The discussion then looks at the spectatorial nature of the ancient notion of theory as theoria, before it traces how theory, in moving from theoria to high Theory, has figured in the 25 volumes of Literature and Theology itself. This tracing covers a double assumption of theory and an appropriation of the 'other' as theory. The essay concludes by looking at the dynamic that continues to bind literature and theology, and indeed the readers of a journal such as this one, in a communality of theory, practice, and interpretation.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/litthe/frs032

Journal Title: Italianistica: Rivista di letteratura italiana
Publisher: GIARDINI EDITORI E STAMPATORI IN PISA
Issue: i23919326
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Fenzi Enrico
Abstract: «Nota bene»: vd. Rico, Petrarca y el «De vera religione», cit., p. 326.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23933953

Journal Title: Italianistica: Rivista di letteratura italiana
Publisher: ISTITUTI EDITORIALI E POLIGRAFICI INTERNAZIONALI®
Issue: i23921424
Date: 8 1, 2001
Author(s): Terrusi Leonardo
Abstract: Michele Dell'Aquila, ivi, pp. 90-1.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23937096

Journal Title: Italianistica: Rivista di letteratura italiana
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i23922211
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Boezio Sara
Abstract: C. Hamilton, The future of Cognitive poetics, «Zeszyty Naukowe Uniwersytetu Rzeszowskiego. Seria fi- lologiczna - Studia anglica resoviensia 2», xiv, 2003, pp. 120-128
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23938239

Journal Title: Journal of Korean Religions
Publisher: Institute for the Study of Religion
Issue: i23942764
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Park Jun Hwan
Abstract: In the world of Korean shamanism, there is a particular god, called taegam, which is allegedly famous for its love of money and its abundance of greed for material wealth. During the shamanic ritual of chaesu-kut, the rites for good fortune and luck, this god is popularly worshipped as the Deity of Wealth and is typically symbolized by money placed all over its face and spirit costumes. Nonetheless, as money has the two sides of heads and tails, taegam also has two very different faces—so-taegam and taegam. This article explores the ambiguity of the two taegam gods, focusing on the symbolic action of money-offerings and how its meaning is taken from the perspective of the ritual actors, in the hope of shedding light on the place of Korea's traditional popular religion of shamanism in today's transformed urban landscape. By discussing the semantics of "money is the filial child" (a remark made by so-taegam) and "money is the enemy" (as remarked by taegam), statements I often heard during my fieldwork in Seoul, I suggest that the ambivalent symbolic nature of taegam should be seen as an indispensible vehicle for understanding ritual life, as well as everyday life, of urban Korean people since it is closely related to both normative orientations and the contradictory aspects of the material culture of contemporary urbanites inhabiting the borderless, globalized, and fluctuating modern capitalist market. This conclusion is reached partly with reference to existing sociological theories of money and anthropological inquiries into the ambivalent aspects of taegam.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23943367

Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i23955822
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): de MUL Jos
Abstract: GS XIX, 45
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23955842

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Germanistik
Publisher: Peter Lang Europäischer Verlag der Wissenschaften
Issue: i23954751
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Kartschoke Dieter
Abstract: Christoph Cormeau (Hrsg.): Waither von der Vogelweide. Leich, Lieder, Sangsprüche, 14., voll, neubearb. Aufl. der Ausg. Karl Lachmanns mit Bei- trägen ν. Th. Bein, H. Brunner, Berlin, New York 1996, Nr. 97,1,7ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23975632

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Germanistik
Publisher: Peter Lang Internationaler Verlag der Wissenschaften
Issue: i23962946
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Vollhardt Mascha Marlene
Abstract: Birgit Breiding: Die Braunen Schwestern. Ideologie - Struktur - Funktion einer nationalsozialistischen Elite, Stuttgart 1998.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3726/92143_597

Journal Title: Leviathan
Publisher: Westdeutscher Verlag
Issue: i23982558
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Breuer Stefan
Abstract: Amerikaner Carl Sagan von dieser Möglich- keit: „Bis jetzt gibt es noch kein Computerprogramm, das in der Psychiatrie erfolgreich ein- gesetzt werden könnte, aber dasselbe kann man von gewissen Psychotherapeuten behaupten. In einer Zeit, in der immer mehr Menschen in unserer Gesellschaft einer therapeutischen Be- ratung bedürfen und in der Simultanrechner weit verbreitet sind, könnte ich mir gut die Ent- wicklung eines Netzes von psychotherapeutischen Computeranschlüssen vorstellen, etwa ei- ner Phalanx von Telefonzellen vergleichbar, in denen wir für ein paar Dollar pro Sitzung mit einem aufmerksamen, qualifizierten und weitgehend nicht-direktiven Psychotherapeuten sprechen können", zit. nach Weizenbaum 1977, S. 18.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23982742

Journal Title: Leviathan
Publisher: Westdeutscher Verlag
Issue: i23983253
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): Glassman Deborah
Abstract: The article of M. Lilla marks the political position of Derrida in the context of French philosophy since Sartre. Presenting him as an engaged opponent of existentialism and structuralism Lilla shows that Derrida's vehement philosophical fight is directed fundamentally against what he calls the logocentrism of all western philosophy. Derrida's only remedy against this disease: deconstruction of the language. In applying this recipe himself, Derrida ends at a somewhat mysterious one and only notion, the concept of justice, which according to him is not destructible and should not be destructed. The provocative explanation Lilla gives for the surprising fact, that Derrida's most fervent adherents live in the United States is the unlimited self-confidence and good nature of the Americans.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23984407

Journal Title: Dappim: Research in Literature / דפים למחקר בספרות
Publisher: החוג לספרות עברית והשוואתית, אוניברסיטת חיפה
Issue: i23986509
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Katsman Roman
Abstract: In this article alternative history is regarded not as a postmodern genre of Since Fiction but as a universal mode of thinking and storytelling. Its research is especially effective in discussions of historical-mythical pseudo-chronicles of lost civilizations, such as Agnon's Ir u-mloa, his Holocaust opus magnum. The article is devoted to the story from this volume "In Search of a Rabbi, or The Spirit of the Ruler" (Ha-mekhapsim lahem rav, o be-ruakh ha-moshel). The method lays open the author's complex historical and historiographic conceptions hidden in plots and characters, as well as in symbols of historical alternativeness such as "Crusher of Grits" (Kotesh grisin).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23986511

Journal Title: Leviathan
Publisher: VS Verlag für Sozialwissenschaften
Issue: i23983251
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Paul Axel T.
Abstract: Danielle de Lame: Une Colline entre mille ou le calme avant le tempête. Transforma- tions et blocages du Rwanda rurale, Tervuren 1996, S. 73.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23987369

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Psychosomatische Medizin und Psychoanalyse
Publisher: Verlag für Medizinische Psychologie
Issue: i23984977
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): Horstkotte Gudrun
Abstract: Frau Prof. Dr. med. Annemarie Dührssen zum 65.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23996258

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Psychosomatische Medizin und Psychoanalyse
Publisher: Verlag für Medizinische Psychologie
Issue: i23987363
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Tress Wolfgang
Abstract: Unsere Literaturübersicht diskutiert die Frage, ob und inwieweit eine reife Liebesfähigkeit Erwachsener von entsprechenden Früherfahrungen abhängt bzw. inwieweit Liebe und Partnerschaft eine Korrektur ungünstiger emotionaler Erfahrungen der frühen Kindheit ermöglichen. Bestimmte Partnerschaftsstörungen stehen zu konkreten familiären Gegebenheiten der ersten Lebensjahre in keinem zwingenden Bezug. Sind Partnerschaftsstörungen nach traditioneller psychoanalytischer Auffassung als Folge eines ungelösten infantilen Konfliktes anzusehen, so greifen neuere Ansätze angesichts des weitgehenden Fehlens einer psychoanalytischen Interaktionstheorie bei der Beschreibung und Erklärung interpersoneller Phänomene zunehmend auf systemische Ansätze zurück. Äußerungen psychoanalytischer Autoren zur Entwicklung der Liebesfähigkeit reflektieren im historischen Überblick wesentliche Veränderungen der Theoriebildung. Neuere empirische Arbeiten weisen auf Korrektur- und Kompensationsmöglichkeiten ungünstiger Früherfahrungen von mittlerem Schweregrad hin. Dafür aber dürfte die warme und bedürfnisgerechte Zuwendung durch eine oder mehrere feste Bezugspersonen (möglichst durch die liebevoll und partnerschaftlich aufeinander bezogenen Eltern) in den ersten Lebensjahren eine grundlegende Voraussetzung erwachsener Liebes- und Partnerschaftsfähigkeit sein. In this survey of literature on the subject, we discuss the question of whether or not and if so to what extent a mature, adult ability to love depends on relevant early experience, or whether it functions as a corrective to unfavorable emotional experience in early childhood. There is no compelling connection between certain disturbances of partner relations and concrete family circumstances in the first years of life. Such disturbances are regarded by traditional psychoanalysis as the result of an unresolved infantile conflict; however, since there is no psychoanalytical interaction theory for the description and explanation of interpersonal phenomena, recent discussions have drawn increasingly on a systematic approach. From an historical point of view, psychoanalytical discussions reflect essential changes in theories about the ability to love. More recent empirical studies point to a possible involvement of corrective and compensatory mechanisms for unfavorable early experiences of a medium degree of seriousness. Nevertheless, warm affection based on needs during the first years of life (at best from loving parents with a partner-oriented relationship) provides a basis for the adult's ability to love and form partnerships.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23997632

Journal Title: European Journal of Sociology / Archives Européennes de Sociologie / Europäisches Archiv für Soziologie
Publisher: CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23998986
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Frère Bruno
Abstract: Castoriadis (1997a).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23998993

Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24006560
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Pelosi Olimpia
Abstract: Pozzi, Scrittrici mistiche italiane, p. 462: "Nel 1629 cessarono le visioni e le estasi. La fama di quelle meraviglie, uscita dalla clausura, aveva perô provocato il fenomeno, comune a molte altre estatiche, di un grande traffico spirituale intomo alla suora: le scrissero senza tregua religiosi e prelati,... ma le scrissero soprattutto dame dell'alta aristocrazia, dai vicini ducati di Mantova e . Savoia alle lontane plaghe di Spagna, Boemia, Baviera. Roma intervenne allora col solito rigore; senza emettere condanne, le proibl ogni corrispondenza con Testerno. Cos! calô su di lei un silenzio non piu rotto da fatti straordinari né da rumori del secolo, fino alla morte, avvenuta il 12 febbraio 1671".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24006576

Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24006620
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Pelosi Olimpia
Abstract: Da ricordare nell'ambito della ricerca letteraria che attraverso gli strumenti socio- antropologici si occupa di letteratura méridionale il volume di Luigi Reina dal titolo II viaggio della Démetra. Elegismo regressivo e ansia di modernità negli scrittori meridionali del Novecento, e il doppio numéro speciale di Forum Italicum 27.1-2 (1993), intitolato Immaginario e rappresentazione nella letteratura del Sud, a cura di Sebastiano Martelli.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24006781

Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24016152
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Lollini Massimo
Abstract: "Nei dipinti e negli edifìci risplendono la mente e la prudenzia dell'artista. Vi si percepiscono inoltre la disposizione e quasi la figura stessa dell'animo. Infatti l'animo esprime e raffigura se stesso in queste opere così come riflette se stesso il volto di colui che si guarda nello specchio" (mia traduzione).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24016166

Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24016133
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Tota Anna Lisa
Abstract: Si pensi alle scuse ufficiali rivolte da Reagan alle famiglie dei cittadini americani di origine giapponese internati nei campi di concentramento americani durante la seconda guerra mondiale e commemorati attualmente a Ellis Island.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24016311

Journal Title: Discourse Studies
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24049943
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Bell Allan
Abstract: This article questions the aptness of 'discourse analysis' as a label for our field, and prefers the less reductionist concept of 'Discourse Interpretation'. It does this through drawing on ideas from the field of philosophical hermeneutics – the theory and practice of interpreting texts. It operationalizes and adapts the construct of the Interpretive Arc from the philosophy of Paul Ricoeur in order to address issues that are central to discourse work, including that of how we warrant the validity of our textual interpretations. The Interpretive Arc consists of six interlinked phases, which the article presents and exemplifies through discussion of a single text – the story of Babel. Phase I of the arc defines readers as being in a state of Estrangement before the text because of the distancing created by its written or technological form. Phase 2 is that of Pre-view, the state of opinion or knowledge that readers bring to a text. At phase 3, a first reading forms readers' Proto-understanding, their initial 'guess' at what the text means. Then processes of Analysis (phase 4) test and evidence the validity of alternative readings, limiting the interpretations which can plausibly be taken from a text. Three byways of interpretive analysis are challenged and discarded: the dominance of author intention, structuralist analysis and limitless polysemy. Analysis then leads into 5, the phase of informed Understanding of the matter or injunction of the text, of what is disclosed or unfolded before the text. The Interpretive Arc is completed in phase 6, Ownership. Here, through processes of critique of their own and the text's ideologies and of fresh listening, readers are led to a new self formed by the matter of the text. There is a dialectic amongst Analysis, Understanding and Ownership, with each informing and modifying the other. The approach emphasizes interpretation as the heart of discourse work. The 3000-year-old narrative of Babel is a subject as well as an object here. It contributes to the matter of the article and its interpretation is interwoven with the theoretical substance. The story is shown to be an integrated narrative abounding in sophisticated linguistic techniques which show a delight in language. The traditional Christian and Western interpretation of Babel – as an affront to God which results in the curse of multilingualism – is challenged. A re-constructed interpretation informed by intertextual evidence reads the fault of Babel to be the people's refusal to spread through the earth. Babel can be interpreted as a manifesto against the monolingual and monocultural impetus of empires ancient and contemporary. The multilingual outcome is a positive affirmation of sociocultural and linguistic diversity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24049945

Journal Title: Discourse Studies
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24049943
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Pellauer David
Abstract: I offer some comments from the perspective of someone familiar with the work of Paul Ricoeur on Allan Bell's proposal that discourse studies take a hermeneutic turn drawing on Ricoeur's idea of an arc of interpretation. I suggest that such a hermeneutic turn would need to be more radical than Bell proposes in that he limits it largely to questions of method, without really addressing how it might affect our understanding of either the object of discourse studies or the goal of such studies. This does raise the question, however, whether discourse studies should be considered a subdiscipline of hermeneutical philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24049948

Journal Title: Discourse Studies
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24049943
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): van den Broek Paul
Abstract: Text interpretation – the main interest of discourse analysts – is a central component of the text understanding process. In this article we introduce the Landscape Model, which describes the cognitive processes underlying reading comprehension in a detailed and precise manner. Moreover, this model captures the interpretative processes in which the human mind engages during reading. Within the context of the Landscape Model, we describe the relation between discourse understanding and discourse interpretation, and explain some of the phenomena that are central to the field of discourse analysis as seen from a cognitive perspective. In the first section we describe the basic cognitive processes that underlie discourse understanding, as captured by the Landscape Model. In the following section we illustrate the way that the Landscape Model can be applied to the work of discourse analysts. We conclude by discussing the usefulness of the cognitive Landscape Model for the field of discourse analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24049954

Journal Title: Discourse Studies
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24049943
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Bell Allan
Abstract: The nine responses to my focus article 'Re-constructing Babel: Discourse analysis, hermeneutics and the Interpretive Arc' are cross-disciplinary, as is the article itself. They come from discourse studies (Van Dijk, Billig, Wodak), cognitive science (Tepe, Yeari and Van den Broek, Van Dijk), Old Testament studies (Billig), hermeneutics (Pellauer, Scott-Baumann), history (Gardner) and literature (Pratt). I identify and address five main issues which I see these responses raising for discourse interpretation: the role of author intent and the original sociocultural context in interpretation; principles of translation, particularly in relation to the Babel story; issues of certainty and subjectivism in interpretation, again including the Babel story; the role and limitations of cognitive approaches, and the potential of images like 'unfolding the matter of the text' to be realized in teaching hands-on discourse work; and finally a call to new listening in the encounter with hermeneutics, as a route to freshening the field I like to call Discourse Interpretation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24049955

Journal Title: China Perspectives
Publisher: cefc French Centre for Research on Contemporary China
Issue: i24053272
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): GARAPON ANTOINE
Abstract: Chen Yan, L'eveil de la Chine [The awakening of China], Editions de I'Aube, 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24053278

Journal Title: China Perspectives
Publisher: cefc French Centre for Research on Contemporary China
Issue: i24054563
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): MORIER-GENOUD DAMIEN
Abstract: Robert Eskildsen, "Of Civilization and Savages: The Mimetic Imperialism of Japan's 1874 Expedition to Taiwan," American Historical Review, 107.2, April 2002, pp. 388- 418.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24054621

Journal Title: Perspectives Chinoises
Publisher: Centre d'Etudes Francais sur la Chine contemporaine
Issue: i24071587
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): GARAPON ANTOINE
Abstract: Chen Yan, L'Éveil de la Chine, La Tour d'Aiguës, Éditions de l'Aube, 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24071720

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung. Supplement
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i24136797
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Janssen Philip Jost
Abstract: . Sowiport is based on 18 databases, including Socio- logical Abstracts and Worldwide Political Science Abstracts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24139028

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i24145432
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Zängle Michael
Abstract: Francis 2013, 288
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24145539

Journal Title: Democratic Culture / תרבות דמוקרטית
Publisher: אוניברסיטת בר-אילן, הפקולטה למשפטים
Issue: i24146606
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Ginsberg Yona
Abstract: Through ethnographies in Immanuel and interviews with its residents, this article examines the unique influences of the environment on social relationships and actions taken by individuals and groups. The findings of the ethnographies illustrate the dramatic heterogeneity of the population in Immanuel (made up of ultra-Orthodox Ashkenazim and Mizrahim, newly religious Mizrahim, a group of newly religious ex-convicts, and a group of "drifters"), and show the blatant disregard of the members of the various groups for each other. They also reveal the large number of deserted apartments and buildings in the town. The findings from the interviews present explicit definitions of Immanuel as "a different place." They report the dialectics between the general "invisibility" of Immanuel in the media as compared to its visibility when critical incidents occur (such as terrorist attacks, the Immanuel controversy, and reports of sexual harassment). They also stress the yearning of the interviewees to leave Immanuel, and the paradoxicality of the environment (manifested by the simultaneity of cultural prejudices and protest). With this background in mind, we suggest using the heterotopian concept of Michel Foucault for the complex comprehension of the Immanuel environment. The discussion indicates the "otherness" of Immanuel (heterotopia), and the relationships between social control, heterogeneity, and social protest.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24148015

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: VERLAG HERDER
Issue: i24159065
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): Kern Walter
Abstract: ]. B. Metz: Concilium I (1965) 484—492.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24159901

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: VERLAG HERDER
Issue: i24164416
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Schwager Raymund
Abstract: Ebd. 267-284.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24168024

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: VERLAG HERDER
Issue: i24164415
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Guggenberger Wilhelm
Abstract: J. Niewiadomski, Menschenrechte: ein gordischer Knoten der heutigen Gnaden- theologie. In: ThPQ 145 (1997) 269-280.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24168120

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: Echter Verlag GmbH
Issue: i24160642
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Schärtl Thomas
Abstract: L. Wittgenstein, Vermischte Bemerkungen (= WW, Bd. 8), 571.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24171214

Journal Title: Daat: A Journal of Jewish Philosophy & Kabbalah / דעת: כתב-עת לפילוסופיה יהודית וקבלה
Publisher: אוניברסיטת בר-אילן
Issue: i24185941
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Shechterman Deborah
Abstract: Original Sin is considered to be a uniquely Christian doctrine. Nevertheless, an analysis of apparently forgotten Jewish treatises — most of which are to be found only in manuscript form — reveals that an extraordinary philosophical theory of Original Sin is present in late medieval Jewish thought. It implies, therefore, a new dimension in characterising this doctrine and has implications for the understanding of the process of inter-communicating of Jewish and Christian thought. This study focuses on fundamental Jewish passages, beginning with Apocalyptic literature and ending with medieval philosophical texts. Yet, the examination of those Hebrew texts is carried out in the light of the writing of Christian scholars. This means that the attempt to clarify this Jewish doctrine is made, from a methodological viewpoint, both by looking at the development of this doctrine trough the history of the Jewish thought, and by a close examination of the parallel general sources. It is only then that one can see that rudiments of the Christian doctrine of Original Sin were inserted into the Aristotelian theory of Nature, and combined with elements from Maimonides' Biblical-allegoric exegesis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24186900

Journal Title: Daat: A Journal of Jewish Philosophy & Kabbalah / דעת: כתב-עת לפילוסופיה יהודית וקבלה
Publisher: אוניברסיטת בר-אילן
Issue: i24193434
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Meir Ephraim
Abstract: The article deals with the problem of revelation in Levinas' writings. The first part of the article analizes Levinas' ideas on the Same and the Other, more particularly the topics of the face and of discourse, as these come to the fore in the first section of Totality and Infinity. Investigating the non-totalising relationship between the Same and the Other presents us with the suitable framework for understanding the relation between the finite and the Infinite. Leaving out any ontotheological speech, Levinas shows how Metaphysics is enacted in the ethical relation. The second part cootinues with a description of Levinas' position on revelation in the Jewish tradition. The active Interpretation of Biblical texts "beyond the verse" represents an opportunity of hearing the divine word today and to enter into a more primordial Order than the Order of the Same. In the course of the article, we point to affinities and striking similarities between E. Levinas' and F. Rosenzweig's view on revelation. We also demonstrate how Levinas Orients his Jewish writings to his philosophy of the Other and vice versa. In writing on revelation, Levinas' main concern seems to be the description of the possibility of a fracture in the immanent order of totality and in the self-sufficiency of reason which is its correlative. This fraction is produced by the command "thou shalt not kill", calling the Same to open itself to the Other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24195890

Journal Title: Jahrbuch für Liturgik und Hymnologie
Publisher: Internationalen Arbeitsgemeinschaft für Hymnologie / International Fellowship for Research in Hymnology / Cercle International d'Etudes Hymnologiques
Issue: i24200577
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Rickli-Koser Linda
Abstract: Ebd.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24207749

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Politik
Publisher: NOMOS Verlagsgesellschaft mbH & Co. KG
Issue: i24227920
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): Rinderle Peter
Abstract: Begriff des »Private Citizen« von Bruce Ackerman in: We the People, Vol. 1 Foundations (Cambridge, Mass. 1993, S. 232 ff.)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24228116

Journal Title: Jahrbuch für Liturgik und Hymnologie
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i24234116
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Apel Kim
Abstract: Oswald Bayer: Einführung: Poietologische Theologie, in: ders.: Gott als Autor, Tübingen 1999,1-18, 2, vgl. 30 f
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24238750

Journal Title: Revista de Musicología
Publisher: SOCIEDAD ESPAÑOLA DE MUSICOLOGÍA
Issue: i24243488
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): CALVO-SOTELO Javier CAMPOS
Abstract: TITON, Jeff Todd. «Music and Sustainability: An Ecological Viewpoint». The World of Music, 51, 1 (2009), pp. 119-137
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24246266

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24255017
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): de Rochegonde Thierry
Abstract: Voir T. de Rochegonde, « Les yeux grands ouverts. Plaidoyer pour que les psychana- lystes s'intéressent aux questions nées de la crise de l'éthique médicale », revue de psychana- lyse Che Vuoi?, n° 17, juin 2002, Paris, L'Harmattan, p. 89-104.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24255449

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Hénaff Marcel
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Sur la traduction, op. cit., p. 52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257152

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Tétaz Jean-Marc
Abstract: Voir « La liberté selon l'espérance », dans le Conflit des interprétations, op. cit., p. 393- 415.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257157

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257176
Date: 2 1, 2006
Author(s): Mongin Olivier
Abstract: P. Nora, Lieux de mémoire, op. cit., Ill, p. 1009.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257240

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24259930
Date: 2 1, 2007
Author(s): Constant Fred
Abstract: Sur ce point, on peut se reporter à notre petit essai : le Multiculturalisme, Paris, Flamma- rion, 2000, p. 55 sqq.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24259964

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24259930
Date: 2 1, 2007
Author(s): Weil Patrick
Abstract: Tzvetan Todorov, les Abus de la mémoire, Paris, Arléa, 1995, cité par Paul Ricœur, la Mémoire, l'Histoire, l'Oubli, Paris, Le Seuil, 2000, p. 105.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24259968

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257940
Date: 3 1, 1970
Author(s): BARTOLI HENRI
Abstract: « Un « fantastique » de bibliothèque », Cahiers Renaud- Barrault, mars 1967.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24260832

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24262705
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Abdelmadjid Salim
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24262792

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24263383
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): Ameisen Jean Claude
Abstract: Dossier « Sciences/éthique : grippe aviaire », La Croix, 30 janvier 2007.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24264034

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24265362
Date: 5 1, 2008
Author(s): Worms Frédéric
Abstract: C'est ce que nous nous proposons notamment de faire à travers la chronique intitulée « À quoi tenons-nous » qui paraît dans Esprit depuis novembre 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24265411

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24265362
Date: 5 1, 2008
Author(s): Padis Marc-Olivier
Abstract: Voir Michael Hardt et Toni Negri, Empire, Paris, Exils, 2000, et Multitudes, Paris, La Découverte, 2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24265412

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24266899
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Lamouche Fabien
Abstract: Ibid., p. 380-381.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24266910

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24267380
Date: 11 1, 2008
Author(s): Garapon Antoine
Abstract: On peut notamment s'interroger sur la réalité du contrôle que procurent les indicateurs; voir à ce sujet: «Des indicateurs pour les ministres au risque de l'illusion du contrôle», par Anne Pezet et Samuel Sponem recensé par Maya Beauvallet (www.laviedesidees.fr).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24267392

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24267532
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Maréchal Jean-Paul
Abstract: De « gattopardo » qui signifie guépard en italien et qui, dans le roman éponyme de Giu- seppe Tomasi di Lampedusa, est la métaphore du prince Salina.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24267616

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24268086
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): Théry Irène
Abstract: Voir les nombreuses publications liées aux activités de l'Association des parents et futurs parents gays et lesbiens (Apgl), en particulier: E. Dubreuil, Des parents de même sexe, Paris, Odile Jacob, 1998; M. Gross (sous la dir. de), Homoparentalités, état des lieux, Toulouse, Érès, 2005; M. Gross et M. Peyceré, Fonder une famille homoparentale, Paris, Ramsay, 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24268098

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24268086
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): de Parseval Geneviève Delaisi
Abstract: J'ai remarqué que, dans les congrès, qu'ils soient médicaux, juridiques ou «psy », il est fréquent d'entendre l'orateur parler du «père biologique», voire de vrai père pour désigner le donneur de sperme... puis, se rendant compte de son lapsus au vu de quelques sourires dans la salle, tâche de se rattraper - mal, comme dans toutes les gaffes - parlant alors de « père social » pour désigner le vrai père, ce qui constitue tout autant un lapsus que le premier...
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24268099

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269130
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): d'Allonnes Myriam Revault
Abstract: Ibid., p. 568.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269150

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269178
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Guibal Francis
Abstract: Id., le Récit, la lettre et le corps, op. cit., p. 254.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269231

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269705
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Chrétien Jean-Pierre
Abstract: G. Duby, les Trois ordres ou l'imaginaire du féodalisme, Paris, Gallimard, 1978; C. Casto- riadis, l'Institution imaginaire de la société, Paris, Le Seuil, 1975.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269716

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24270971
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): d'Allonnes Myriam Revault
Abstract: D. Mendelsohn, les Disparus, op. cit., p. 543.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24270985

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24271669
Date: 7 1, 2011
Author(s): Bessone Magali
Abstract: Voir, pour une présentation de la démocratie délibérative, Charles Girard et Alice Le Goff, la Démocratie délibérative, une anthologie, Paris, Hermann, 2010 : la délibération repose sur une éthique normative particulièrement exigeante et les critères d'une parole juste, impartiale, libre, égale, rationnelle, argumentée, sont rarement rencontrés sur les forums de discussion, même en l'absence de tout troll.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24271686

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272892
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, qui publie ce mois-ci une œuvre maîtresse au Seuil, dessine ici les grandes lignes d'une « petite éthique », l'un des nerfs de l'ouvrage. En suivant un mouvement en trois temps — souci de soi, sollicitude, institution —, il montre que le concept de personne peut être éclairé de façon originale.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24273298

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24271056
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Laé Jean-François
Abstract: Comme nous y invite Paul Ricœur dans Le temps raconté, Temps et récit III, Le Seuil, 1985.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24273890

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272706
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Chambat Pierre
Abstract: « Les équivoques de la dépolitisation », Arguments, n° 27-28, 3e et 4e trimestres 1962, p. 35.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276027

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24273553
Date: 2 1, 1996
Author(s): Bouretz Pierre
Abstract: Emmanuel Lévinas, « Au-delà du souvenir », loc. cit., p. 173.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276247

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272896
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Bouretz Pierre
Abstract: Hannah Arendt, Vies politiques, op. cit., p. 17 et 19.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276388

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272890
Date: 9 1, 1994
Author(s): Bruckner Pascal
Abstract: L'opposant serbe Vuk Draskovic a très bien rendu compte de cette perte morale de son peuple : « C'est ainsi que dans cette guerre atroce - qui dure encore et dont la fin est difficile à entrevoir - la grande, la divine frontière qui nous séparait de nos bourreaux, qui faisait la différence entre le livre de la honte et le livre de l'agneau a été à tous points de vue effacée. Il s'agit là de la plus grande défaite serbe, la seule véritable chute de notre peuple depuis qu'il existe », discours préparé pour le deuxième congrès des intellectuels serbes, 23-24 avril 1994, reproduit par Libération, 25 mai 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276452

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275616
Date: 2 1, 1998
Author(s): Herzog Philippe
Abstract: Philippe Herzog, Reconstruire un pouvoir politique, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276587

Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24277178
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Sente Christophe
Abstract: Louis de Brouckère et Henri de Man, le Mouvement ouvrier en Belgique, Bruxelles, Fondation J. Jacquemotte, 1965.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277190

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24274280
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Antoine Agnès
Abstract: Jean, 3, 8.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277263

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24274280
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Théry Irène
Abstract: Hegel, Textes pédagogiques, Vrin, 1978, p. 84-85.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277266

Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24277336
Date: 11 1, 2013
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: Vorlesungen Über die Philosophie der Religion, nouvelle édition par Walter Jaeschke, Hambourg, Félix Meiner, 1985. Les trois séries de leçons de 1821, 1824, 1827 sont publiées séparément.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277343

Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24277618
Date: 2 1, 2014
Author(s): Fischer Francisco Díez
Abstract: Voir P. Ricœur, « Étranger soi-même », Les Réseaux des parvis, 1999, n° 46, point 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277631

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275643
Date: 7 1, 1997
Author(s): Toscano Roberto
Abstract: Pierre Hassner également (op. cit., p. 362)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277764

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275607
Date: 3 1, 1996
Author(s): de Certeau Michel
Abstract: Extraits de Michel de Certeau et Jean-Marie Domenach, le Christianisme éclaté, Paris, Seuil, 1974, p. 44-45, 58, 74-75.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277844

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24276712
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Mongin Olivier
Abstract: Ibid., p. 333.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278262

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24276712
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Rouyer Muriel
Abstract: C. Schmitt, la Notion de politique, op. cit., p. 117.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278265

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24278302
Date: 11 1, 2002
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: Raymond Verdier, la Vengeance, 4 vol., Paris, Éd. Cujas, en particulier tome IV, « La ven- geance de la pensée occidentale. Introduction Gérard Courtois ».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278909

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275627
Date: 5 1, 2000
Author(s): Mongin Olivier
Abstract: J.-P. Dupuy, Introduction aux sciences sociales. Logique des phénomènes collectifs, Paris, Ellipses Marketing, 1992, p. 13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24279341

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275636
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: t. III, le Système totalitaire, trad. fr. de Jean-Loup Bourget, 1995.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24279636

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24308965
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Mellet Paul-Alexis
Abstract: J.G.A. POCOCK, L'Ancienne constitution et le droit féodal. Etude sur la pensée historique dans l'Angleterre du XVLT siècle (1957), Paris: P.U.F., 2000, p. 34.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24309044

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24308969
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Dosse François
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Soi-même comme un autre, op. cit., p. 351.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24309093

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24308872
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Moreil Françoise
Abstract: Françoise MOREIL, «La maison d'Orange à Berlin au début du XVIIIe siècle », actes du colloque international sur La principauté d'Orange, Avignon, 2005
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24309352

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24309040
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Gaussent Jean-Claude
Abstract: Id., ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24309576

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24309456
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Graesslé Isabelle
Abstract: Emmanuel Laurentin dir., A quoi sert l'histoire aujourd'hui, Paris, Bayard, 2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24310307

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24309455
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): Kirschleger Pierre-Yves
Abstract: Patrick Cabanel, Juifs et protestants en France, les affinités électives. XVI'-XXI' siècles, Paris, Fayard, 2004, 351 p.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24310413

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24309455
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): Delteil Gérard
Abstract: P. Ricœur, «Prospective du monde et perspective chrétienne», in L'Eglise vers l'avenir, s. dir. Gérard Bessière, Paris, Cerf, 1969, p. 140.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24310414

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i24311064
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Escoubas Éliane
Abstract: Heidegger dans La Vérité en peinture
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24311714

Journal Title: Rivista Italiana di Musicologia
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki Editore
Issue: i24321280
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Sanguinetti Giorgio
Abstract: Desidero ringraziare Laurence Dreyfus, James Haar, Lewis Lockwood, John Nâ- das, Anthony Newcomb, Christopher Reynolds e Richard Taruskin per aver espresso le loro opinioni sulla prima stesura di questo saggio.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24321287

Journal Title: Rivista Italiana di Musicologia
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki Editore
Issue: i24323706
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Dunsby Jonathan
Abstract: This article is a thoroughly revised and greatly extended version of two previous publications (Nattiez 1988; 1992b).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24323748

Journal Title: Rivista Italiana di Musicologia
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki Editore
Issue: i24324678
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Piras Marcello
Abstract: Per ragioni da ricercare nella stessa società accademica, e non nelle società africane.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24324688

Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: Centro de Comunicação e Expressão - CCE Centro de Filosofia e Clências Humanas - CFH
Issue: i24324948
Date: 8 1, 2008
Author(s): DE MATTOS MOTTA FLÁVIA
Abstract: Paul RICOUER, 1984.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24327761

Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: Centro de Comunicação e Expressão - CCE Centro de Filosofia e Clências Humanas - CFH Universidade Federal de Santa Catarina - UFSC
Issue: i24325570
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): Rodríguez Rosana Paula
Abstract: VIOLI, 1990, p. 138,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24328082

Journal Title: Bruniana & Campanelliana
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24337272
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Blum Paul Richard
Abstract: A term from the philosophy of history of Paul Ricoeur: data are gathered and made un- derstandable in a narrative plot.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24337688

Journal Title: Présence Africaine
Publisher: Présence Africaine Editions
Issue: i24350806
Date: 3 1, 1988
Author(s): KI-ZERBO Lazare
Abstract: Le règne de la critique de R. Koselleck (éd. Minuit).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24351580

Journal Title: Présence Africaine
Publisher: Présence Africaine Editions
Issue: i24350798
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): KASEREKA Kavwahirehi M.
Abstract: M. Foucault, Dits et écrits. 1954-1988. Vol. IV 1980-1988. Édition établie sous la direction de Daniel Defert et François Ewald, Paris, Gallimard, 1994, p. 637.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24352132

Journal Title: McGill International Journal of Sustainable Development Law and Policy / Revue internationale de droit et politique du développement durable de McGill
Publisher: McGill
Issue: i24352116
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Gaillard Emilie
Abstract: Brown-Weiss, Justice, supra note 21
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24352650

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: H. BOUVIER u. CO. VERLAG
Issue: i24354771
Date: 1 1, 1961
Author(s): Schmandt Jürgen
Abstract: Ebenda S. 58 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24354774

Journal Title: Revue de Philosophie Ancienne
Publisher: Éditions OUSIA
Issue: i24353823
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Guéguen Haud
Abstract: Soi-même comme un autre, op. cit., p. 169.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24358725

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: BOUVIER VERLAG HERBERT GRUNDMANN
Issue: i24358961
Date: 1 1, 1974
Author(s): Jaeger Henry-Evrard Hasso
Abstract: Daß die Verstiegenheiten und Mißbräuche, welche die Scholiasten der Spätantike seit der Kaiserzeit mit der Etymologie getrieben haben, aller ernsten Grundlagen entbehrten und reine Fabrikation ebenso mittelmäßiger wie phantasievoller Wichtigtuer darstellten, die sich „Philologen" und „Grammatiker" nannten und noch bis in die byzantinische Epoche hinein fortwirkten, ist allgemein bekannt (s. zum Beispiel die vielfachen Entlarvungen dieses durch die Jahrhunderte mitgeschleppten Ballastes von Pseudogelehrsamkeit bei W. G. Ruther- ford, A Chapter in the History of Annotation, Being Scholia Aristophanica, Bd. III, London 1905, S. 392 etc). Daß die ebenso irrationalen und vielleicht noch geschmackloseren ety- mologischen Spekulationen, die man im 20. Jahrhundert auf die Wortgruppe έρμηνεία, έρμη- νεύειν, ερμηνευτικός anwendete und immer noch anwendet, im gängigen akademischen Lehr- betrieb heute ernst genommen werden und sich professoraler Autorität erfreuen, ist nicht nur ein bildungsgeschichtliches curiosum, sondern ein Zeugnis irrationaler Aushöhlung der „geisteswissenschaftlichen" Fakultäten. Als Beispiel seien nur erwähnt Karl Kerényi, Her- meneia und Hermeneutike, Ursprung und Sinn der Hermeneutik in ders., Griechische Grundbegriffe, Fragen und Antworten aus der heutigen Situation, Zürich 1964, 42-52, und F. K. Mayr, Der Gott Hermes und die Hermeneutik in Tijdschrift voor Filosofie, 30, 1968, 525-635. Wie der Autor des zuletzt genannten Artikels selbst, auf Heideggers Formulierung zurückgreifend, sagt, ist das „Spiel des Denkens verbindlicher als die Strenge der Wissenschaft"... Wohin eine im Banne Heideggers stehende „Begriffsgeschichte" führt, kann man bei der Lektüre dieses Schwalls besser „verstehen"... Wie wenig Tragweite die immer wieder angeführte (Techné) hermeneutike in der Epinomis 975 c hat, sagt der Text selbst: bei der Kunst Orakel zu inter- pretieren, die weder Seelengröße noch Weisheit hervorbringt, weiß der „Interpret" nur, was er sagt, ob es jedoch wahr ist, hat er nicht gelernt (τό λεγόμενον γάρ οίδεν μόνον, εΐ δ' αληθές, ούχ έμαθεν). Übrigens kommt das Wort έρμηνευτική in den pseudo-platonischen Definitiones in seiner sonst gebräuchlichen Bedeutung vor, 414 d 4: "Ονομα διάλεκτος άσιλιθετος έρμηνεντική τοϋ τε κατά τής ουσίας κατηγορουμένου και παντός του μή καθ' έαντοϋ λεγομένου. (Nomen, zuzusammengesetzte Ausdrucksweise für etwas seinem Wesen entsprechend Bezeichnetes, sowie auch für alles von diesem Ausgesagtes). — Pierre Chantraine, Dictionnaire Etymologique de la Langue Grecque, Histoire des Mots, Paris, 1970, S. 373, sagt ausdrücklich, „Terme technique sans étymologid'. Vgl. auch F. Solmsen, Ein dorisches Komödienstück in Rheinisches Museum für Philologie NF 63, 1908, 329-340. (dort s. 336 f über den ionischen Ursprung der Worte έρμηνεΰσα, έρμηνεύς).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24358965

Journal Title: Cahiers du Centre Gustave Glotz
Publisher: DE BOCCARD
Issue: i24358314
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Benoist Stéphane
Abstract: T. Benton, « Epigraphy and Fascism », dans The Afterlife of Inscriptions, cit. supra, p. 183-186
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24359120

Journal Title: BMS: Bulletin of Sociological Methodology / Bulletin de Méthodologie Sociologique
Publisher: AIMS
Issue: i24359731
Date: 3 1, 1997
Author(s): Jenny Jacques
Abstract: An initial awareness is needed of the debates regarding the choice of research approaches in sociology and the diversity and specificity of methods currently being used in the domain of textual data analysis in France. In general the influence of the French socio-linguistic tradition looms large, including, on the one hand, the older works of Michel Pécheux on the "discursive formations" and his A.A.D. (Analyse Automatique du Discours, 1969), and on the other hand, two main perspectives of the "Ecole Française d'Analyse du/de Discours" - which refer to the "speech act" concept and to the problematics of enunciation, and emphasizes the processes and "sociodiscursive practices" between socially-located speakers. Such theoretical conceptions and specific requirements lead to build on methodologies different from the classic, theme-based content analysis, though not yet translated into an operational software. Then the main software developments currently having an impact (at least potential) on practices of computer-aided sociological analysis of textual data, in France, are classified : from the lexicometric using procedures of "French Data Analysis" ('Analyse Factorielle des Correspondances' of Benzecri, and so on...), to a set of "expert-systems" working on specific theoretical frameworks, through more classical methods of content analysis and coding-sorting-retrieving socio-semantic procedures, eventually with various statistical methods. L'auteur expose d'abord quelques considèrations épistémologiques générales sur les présupposés implicites des méthodes de recherche sociologique, abusivement séparées en qualitatives et quantitatives, et des interrogations spécifiques sur le statut des corpus textuels et des pratiques socio-discursives dans différents domaines et selon divers types de problématique en sociologie. Puis, après un résumé des problématiques sociolinguistiques de l'"énonciation", propres aux courants de l'Analyse de Discours à la française", il propose une classification des principaux lieux d'élaboration théorico-méthodologique ayant (ou susceptibles d'avoir) un impact sur les pratiques informatisées d'analyse textuelle: de la lexicométrique inspirée de l'"Analyse des données a la française", actuellement dominante, a des quasi-systèmes-experts, branchés sur des problématiques sociologiques particulières, en passant par des méthodes plus "classiques" d'analyse de contenu thématique, de type socio-sémantique, et de codification a posteriori de réponses à des questions ouvertes et autres énoncés produits en langage naturel.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24359736

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24358400
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Kelkel A. L.
Abstract: Signes, 105.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360181

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24358415
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Welsen Peter
Abstract: „Qu'est-ce qu'un texte?" (Ricœur 1970)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360307

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24358456
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Welsen Peter
Abstract: L III 93, 109 u. 129.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360378

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24359548
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Rodríguez Ramón
Abstract: GA 58,98.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360400

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24358463
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Liebsch Burkhard
Abstract: M. Merleau-Ponty, Phänomenologie der Wahrnehmung, Berlin 1966,17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360437

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24358463
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Schumacher Bernard
Abstract: J. Derrida, Apories, 133 ss.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360438

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24358418
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Schaller Klaus
Abstract: Mit seiner Pädagogik der Wende (Kehre) schließt sich Patodka an Piatons Bildungsverständnis an: „Nur ein solches Beispiel einer unbedingten Umkehr [gemeint ist die Erziehung der Wächter] kann auch im sonstigen Bürgerkreis eine Umkehr einleiten, zu einer tcai&la im weitesten Sinne werden" (KE, 279).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360450

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24359550
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Breitling Andris
Abstract: Andris Breitling: Die Tragik der Handlung. Ricoeurs Ethik an der Grenze zwischen Philosophie und Nicht-Philosophie. In: Andris Breitling / Stefan Orth / Birgit Schaaff (Hg.): Das herausgeforderte Selbst. Perspek- tiven auf Paul Ricoeurs Ethik. Würzburg 1999. S. 75-94.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360479

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24359550
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Meuter Norbert
Abstract: Fellmann, a.a.O., S. 133
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360482

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358609
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Günzel Stephan
Abstract: Stephan Günzel: Hermeneutik im Widerstreit. Habermas zwi- schen den Traditionen. In: Ders.: Anteile. Analytik, Hermeneutik, Politik. Weimar 2002. 95- 98. 93-97.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360647

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24360740
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Alt Peter-André
Abstract: Der Begriff der Dialektik, der zur Beschreibung einer derartigen Verbindung zwischen Ursprung und Ziel gern reserviert wird, wäre hier unangemessen, weil er die Differenz unter- schlägt, die Trieb und Mythos wie Unsichtbares und Sichtbares trennt. Freuds Deutung bringt den Mythos im Trieb zum Verschwinden, aber umgekehrt den Trieb im Teufel zur Präsenz. Die kulturtheoretischen Erzählungen der Psychoanalyse verschaffen dieser Präsenz eine Bühne, die nicht nur der Vorführung des Teufels, sondern auch der Demonstration der eigenen erkenntnis- kritischen Leistung dient; vgl. dazu H. Böhme: Fetischismus und Kultur, a.a.O. [Anm. 9] 408ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360858

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358588
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Siegfried Meike
Abstract: Dieter Thomä: Erzähle dich selbst. Lebensgeschichte als philosophisches Problem. Frankfurt a.M. 2007.166 ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360878

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358470
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Serra Alice Mara
Abstract: Ebd. 38 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360892

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358654
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Amthor David
Abstract: Dodd: „The dignity of the mind". 40 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360913

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358589
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Bonnemann Jens
Abstract: Buber: Urdistanz und Beziehung. 36 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360948

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358589
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Summa Michela
Abstract: Husserl: Zur Phänomenologie des inneren Zeitbewusstseins. 380.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360954

Journal Title: Aufklärung
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24361794
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Hien Markus
Abstract: Buttlar, Das.Nationale' als Thema der Gartenkunst (wie Anm. 122), 196-198.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24361825

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24361677
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Kowalewicz Michel Henri
Abstract: Vgl. R. Ingarden: Ο tlumaczeniach, a.a.O. [Anm. 58] 186: » Pozwolç sobie to rozwinqc na przykladzie Krytyki czystego rozumu Kanta, dokonanego przez P. Chmielowskiego. Wiadomo, ze terminologia przez Chmielowskiego przyjçta rozpowszechnila siç dose znacznie w publika- cjach polskich na temat Kanta, a nawet bywa przez niektorych filozofôw polskich stosowana w pracach specjalnie ζ filozolia Kanta nie zwi^zanych. Przyzwyczajono siç Erscheinung nazywac >zjawiskiem< (i nawet w szerokich kolach naukowych polskich, np. wsrôd fizykow), Anschau- ung - >ogli}dem<, Vernunft - >rozumem<, Verstand - >rozs^dkiem< itd. Czy mamy siç liczyc ζ tym faktem i w dalszym ci;(gu stosowac te terminy w tlumaczeniu i w pracach naszych filozoficznych? Nie da siç zaprzeczyc, ze przynajmniej niektôre ζ tych terminow nie oddajg tresci faktycznych pojçc Kantowskich. Mimo catego przyzwyczajenia do nich przy glçbszym wnikniçciu w wywody Kanta trudno nam siç zgodzic, jakoby Verstand Kantowski byt »rozsqdkiem«. Stowo to oznacza pewng wlasciwosc umyslu ludzkiego w praktycznym zachowaniu siç cztowieka, tymczasem u Kanta Verstand jest gtôwn^ poznawcz^ wtadzq (czy zdolnosciç), gdzie sprawy zycia praktyczne- go nie odgrywajg zadnej roli. Wiadomo tez, ze Kant tç stronç zycia umysiowego, czy zdolnosci umyslu, ktöra wigze siç ζ zagadnieniami praktyki (w szczegolnosci etycznej), nazwal wlasnie nie Verstand, lecz praktische Vernunft
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24361939

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24361677
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Römer Inga
Abstract: Paul Ricœur: Existence et herméneutique. In: ders.: Le conflit des interprétations. Essais d'herméneutique (Paris 1969) 7-28, hier 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24361940

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: BOUVIER VERLAG
Issue: i24362751
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Gawoll Hans-Jürgen
Abstract: Während Strasser einen theoretischen Nihilismus befürchtet (vgl. Stephan Strasser: Von einer Husserl-Interpretation zu einer Husserl-Kritik. Nachdenkliches zu Jacques Derridas Denk- weg. In: Phänomenologische Forschungen 18 (1986). Studien zur neueren französischen Phäno- menologie, 165 f.), wird die Relativität der Wahrheit, die „kein Historismus je hätte ahnen kön- nen", von Levinas durchaus positiv bewertet. Derrida denke Bergsons Kritik des Seins und Kants Kritik der Metaphysik zu Ende, so daß er die Möglichkeit einer ethischen Philosophie des Begehrens eröffne (vgl. Emmanuel Lévinas: Ganz anders - Jacques Derrida. In: Ders.: Eigenna- men. Meditationen über Sprache und Literatur. München 1988. 67 ff.). Zwar philosophiert Der- rida aus einer ethischen Haltung der Verantwortung heraus, aber Levinas verkennt, daß für Der- rida das theoretische Anliegen, den verdrängten Voraussetzungen des abendländischen Wissens nachzuspüren, wichtiger bleibt denn eine theologische Ethik des Anderen.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24362763

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: BOUVIER VERLAG HERBERT GRUNDMANN
Issue: i24362814
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Konersmann Ralf
Abstract: H. v. Kleist: Aufsatz, den sichern Weg des Glücks zu finden, und ungestört, auch unter den größten Drangsalen des Lebens, ihn zu geniessen! An Rühle. In: Werke, a.a.O., Bd. 3, S. 433—449, hier: S. 437. — Übereindenkend formuliert Benjamins „Einbahnstraße": „Glücklich sein heißt ohne Schrecken seiner selbst innewerden können." (In: Schriften, a. a. O., Bd. IV, 1, S. 83-148, hier S. 113).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24362821

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: BOUVIER VERLAG
Issue: i24360243
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): von Heydebrand Renate
Abstract: Vgl. auch Gebhard (s. Anm. 29), S. 143: „Das Gleichnis" - das meint im Zusammenhang die Parabel - „dürfte kaum aus dem Wertungszusammenhang seines prophetisch-eschatologi- schen Ursprungs so herauslösbar sein, daß es Weisheit von jenem Leben werden könnte, das zu kritisieren der biblische Auftrag war".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24362928

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: BOUVIER VERLAG
Issue: i24360243
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Liebsch Burkhard
Abstract: Merleau-Ponty: Die Struktur des Verhaltens, S. 223 ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24362936

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: BOUVIER VERLAG
Issue: i24360276
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Leiteritz Christiane
Abstract: Viktor Jerofejew: Jenseits des Humanismus. Oder: Das Ende der Menschenfreundlich- keit. In: Die Zeit. Nr. 15, 3. 4. 1992.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24362961

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: BOUVIER VERLAG
Issue: i24360276
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Makita Etsuro
Abstract: Jan Edward Garrett meint, daß es bei Gadamer zwei verschiedene Begriffe der Horizont- verschmelzung gäbe, d. h. eine schweigende Horizontverschmelzung und eine explizite und ab- sichtliche, die der ersteren folge. Die Horizontverschmelzung ist aber in Wirklichkeit ein Phäno- men nach der Entstehung des historischen Bewußtseins, während die Vermittlung der Vergangen- heit mit der Gegenwart ein allgemeines Phänomen darstellt, das immer geschieht, obwohl die Ho- rizontverschmelzung eine spezifische Form der Vermittlung ist. Garrett verwechselt die Hori- zontverschmelzung mit der Vermittlung überhaupt. Die „schweigende Horizontverschmelzung" ist ein attributiver Widerspruch, weil die Horizontverschmelzung eine mit dem historischen Be- wußtsein vollzogene, absichtliche und „kontrollierte" (312) Vermittlung ist. Die Vermittlung überhaupt beginnt vom Anfang des Verstehens an, während die Horizontverschmelzung erst an seinem Ende stattfindet. Vgl. J. E. Garrett: Hans-Georg Gadamer on „Fusion of Horizons". In: Man and World. Vol. 11 (1987) pp. 392-400, p. 397 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24362964

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: BOUVIER VERLAG
Issue: i24362985
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Trappe Tobias
Abstract: Ebd. 120 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24362993

Journal Title: Reis: Revista Española de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Issue: i24364367
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Ruiz Jorge Ruiz
Abstract: Rescher (1976)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24364482

Journal Title: Cuadernos de Pensamiento Político
Publisher: faes-fundación para el análisis y los estudios sociales
Issue: i24367200
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): VERA MARIO RAMOS
Abstract: Manuel Fraljó, "Fundamentalismo y religión: El caso del Islam" en Fraljó, Manuel y Román, Ramón (coords.), Fundamentalismo y violencia, Córdoba, UNED, 2004, p. 20.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24367946

Journal Title: Historia Mexicana
Publisher: EL COLEGIO DE MÉXICO
Issue: i24367195
Date: 3 1, 2015
Author(s): Silva José Alfredo Rangel
Abstract: Ankerson, El caudillo agrarista, pp. 16-20.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24369025

Journal Title: Iberoamericana (2001-)
Publisher: Iberoamericana Editorial Vervuert
Issue: i24368990
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Ruderer Stephan
Abstract: Silvia Muñoz en Bustamante/Ruderer (2009: 141).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24369384

Journal Title: KulturPoetik
Publisher: Verlag Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i24368988
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Weiland Marc
Abstract: Schapp (Anm. 34), S. 127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24369776

Journal Title: KulturPoetik
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i24368991
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Ächtler Norman
Abstract: Gerd Appenzeller, Das alte Märchen zieht wieder. In: Der Tagesspiegel, 05.05.2014, S. 6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24369901

Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: l'Institut d'études slaves
Issue: i24372731
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Bocianowska Cécile
Abstract: I. Stokfiszewski, Zwrotpolityczny, Warszawa, Wyd. Krytyki Politycznej, 2009. Sur le virage politique et ses influences sur la critique, voir aussi : D. Kozicka, Krytyczne (nie)porzqdki..., op. cit. Note du rédacteur : cette activité fait partie du groupe de jeunes intellectuels « Krytyka polityczna ». Cf. introduction dans ce volume.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24372736

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Armand Colin et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i24395823
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): DUBOUCLEZ OLIVIER
Abstract: 20. « Les acteurs savent que toute la pièce tend vers le salut » (Voir PM, p. 69).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24396932

Journal Title: Renaissance Studies
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i24411931
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Chojnacki Stanley
Abstract: Cf. Scott, "'Experience'", 34: '[Subjects] are not unified, autonomous individuals exercising free will, but rather subjects whose agency is created through situations and statuses conferred on them.'
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24411934

Journal Title: History
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd.
Issue: i24427273
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): DEAN TREVOR
Abstract: T. Parsons, Nonexistent Objects (New Haven, CN, 1980).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24428913

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24438983
Date: 10 1, 1997
Author(s): DELACAMPAGNE CHRISTIAN
Abstract: Attached for a long time to the illusion of its national "singularity", French philosophy has remained, for a good part of this century, closed to any foreign influence (with the exception of German phenomenology and existentialism). This situation started to change, however, in the early 1980's. From that moment on, the tendency to translate foreign philosophy has strongly increased among French publishers, allowing France to take a more active part in the international philosophical conversation. The French-American dialogue, in particular, is currently experiencing an expanding phase – but this recent trend must continue to be encouraged from both sides of the Atlantic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24438994

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24439058
Date: 7 1, 1997
Author(s): BROTHERS ROBYN F.
Abstract: Martin J. Matustfk's treatment of individualism (1993, 1995).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439065

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24438933
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): MacAVOY LESLIE
Abstract: Leman-Stefanovic 1987.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439164

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24439205
Date: 7 1, 1999
Author(s): BEGGS DONALD
Abstract: "several disciplines" (77)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439209

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i24439507
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): CHRISTMAN JOHN
Abstract: Hacking 1995, 218.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439514

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i24439524
Date: 10 1, 2005
Author(s): HEDERMAN MARK PATRICK
Abstract: Is it possible to connect with the God-who-may-be without paying attention to the tapping on the wall from the other side? Kearney remains within the orbit and the idiom of so-called postmodern philosophy while he expresses phenomenologically the relationship with God as ultimate other. If we are to remain within the confines of postmodern philosophy to articulate such presence, access to what Rilke calls "heart-work" as opposed to "work of sight" might best be glimpsed through excavation of "decisiveness" in the musings of the later Heidegger.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439538

Journal Title: CrossCurrents
Publisher: Cross Currents Corporation
Issue: i24451902
Date: 10 1, 1967
Author(s): Cunneen Joseph E.
Abstract: Celso Furtado, "Les USA et l'Amerique latine," Esprit, July-Aug. 1966.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24457289

Journal Title: CrossCurrents
Publisher: Convergence, Inc.
Issue: i24456710
Date: 10 1, 1986
Author(s): PLÉ ALBERT
Abstract: Karl Marx, The Holy Family, cited in Michel Verret, Les Marxistes et la Religion. Essai sur l'Athéisme Moderne (Paris: Editions sociales, 1965), p. 142.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24458785

Journal Title: English Literary Renaissance
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i24463741
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): ANDERSON JUDITH H.
Abstract: Medusa's Mirrors: Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton, and the Metamorphosis of the Female Self (Newark, 1998), ch. 3, esp. pp. 112-13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24463746

Journal Title: Ethnography
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24465904
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Kilroy-Marac Katie
Abstract: This article considers two revenants – a man and a ghost – who haunt the Fann Psychiatric Clinic in Dakar, Senegal. Following Derrida's assertion that haunting is historical, I take seriously the concept of haunting and insist upon its relevance to anthropological inquiry. As a mode of storytelling that comes from a particular way of apprehending the world, I argue that anthropology might give credence to specters as social figures and assign ethnography the task of chasing after ghosts, not simply for the poetic spaces they may open up but out of a concern for justice and responsibility in the past, present, and future. My own ethnographic encounter with the two revenants described here has generated questions about the often taken-for-granted equivalence of the real and the true. Likewise, it has encouraged me to interrogate the unpredictable (and oftentimes uneasy) cohabitation of memory and history, both within the Fann Clinic and beyond.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24467147

Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24469663
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Sève Bernard
Abstract: André Schaeffner, Origine des instruments de musique, Paris, EHESS, 1994, p. 52-53.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24469874

Journal Title: Africa Development / Afrique et Développement
Publisher: CODESRIA
Issue: i24482948
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Mekusi Busuyi
Abstract: Having a voice, either at the level of the individual or the community, has been one of the atavistic ways of defining or asserting humanity. This allows for the inscription of the twin-capped hegemony of successes or victories and frustrations at both the private locus and the public sphere. The disruptions of this possibility by rifts between natives in pre-colonial South Africa were aggravated in the heat of the colonial suppression it suffered, and was compounded by the operation of apartheid rule. By reason of this misrule, voices were suppressed, with a few cacophonies of dissention breaking forth. The culmination of these disenchantments into the demise of apartheid significantly presaged the need for reconstruction and redefinition of citizenship and cohabitation, and hence the necessity for establishing a public sphere, or put alternatively, a public domain in the form of the Archbishop Desmond Tutu's Truth and Reconciliation Commission. This paper, therefore, seeks to interrogate the dramatic world(s) created using the material properties of the TRC in John Kani's Nothing but the Truth and Zakes Mda's The Bells of Amersfoort. The paper argues that the domination and manipulation of this public realm by the state at the expense of the individual is not only counterproductive, but constitutes a denial of the relevance of such spheres. The paper, going by indices in the plays, therefore, concludes that every individual should not only be: given a voice, and be heard, but be allowed equal unbiased participation. Otherwise, the public sphere would not just be impotent, but the idea of nation-building and desirable citizenship would be a mere ruse. Avoir une voix, que ce soit au niveau individuel ou communautaire, a été l'un des moyens ataviques de définition et d'affirmation de l'humanité. Cela tient compte de l'inscription de l'hégémonie à double face des succés ou victoires et des frustrations tant au niveau de l'espace privé que de la sphère publique. Les parturbations de cette possibilité par des clivages entre les autochtones en Afrique du Sud précoloniale ont empiré sous le feu de la répression coloniale que ce pays a subie et ont été aggravées par le régime d'apartheid. En raison de cette mauvaise administration, des voix ont été réprimées, avec quelques cacophonies de dissension. Le paroxysme de ces désenchantements vers la fin de l'apartheid présageait significativement la nécessité de la reconstruction et la redéfinition de la citoyenneté et de la cohabitation, et donc la nécessité d'établir une sphère publique, ou sinon établir un domaine public, sous la forme de la Commission vérité et réconciliation de l'archevêque Desmond Tutu. Cet article vise donc à examiner le (s) monde (s) dramatique (s) créé (s) à l'aide des propriétés matérielles du TRC dans Nothing but the Truth de John Kani et The Bells of Amersfoort de Zakes Mda. L'article soutient que la domination et la manipulation de ce domaine public par l'État au détriment de l'individu n'est pas seulement nuisible, mais constitue un rejet de la pertinence de telles sphères. Cet article, en parcourant les indexes de ces pièces, conclut donc que tout individu doit non seulement avoir une voix et être entendu, mais aussi jouir de son droit à une participation égale impartiale. Sinon, la sphère publique ne serait impuissante et l'idée de construction de la nation et de la citoyenneté souhaitable ne serait rien d'autre qu'un simple stratagème.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24484686

Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24484208
Date: 8 1, 2014
Author(s): da Silva António Barbosa
Abstract: Illman 1996
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24485175

Journal Title: Cuban Studies
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Issue: i24482950
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): GUTIÉRREZ RAFAEL ROJAS
Abstract: This essay explores the relationship between poetics and politics in Martí's work. By way of an archeology of the political images in his poetry (Ismaelillo, Versos sencillos, Versos libres) and, conversely, of the poetic representations that abound in his prose and oratory, the author argues for a tension between the two textual dimensions that is never quite resolved or diluted within a discursive or historical synthesis. And yet, the authorial schism is not exactly a fault to be "corrected" by critical reading, but rather the very axis of a martinian hermeneutics. Este ensayo explora las relaciones entre poética y política dentro de la escritura de José Martí. A través de una arqueología de las imágenes políticas que aparecen en su poesía (Ismaelillo, Versos sencillos y Versos libres) y, a la inversa, de las representaciones poéticas que abundan en la oratoria y la prosa de Martí, el autor sostiene que esos dos mundos del texto viven siempre en tensión, sin que ambas identidades textuales puedan diluirse en una síntesis discursiva o histórica. Sin embargo, la escisión de la autoría no es, aquí, una falla que el crítico debe "corregir", sino el eje de una hermenéutica del sujeto martiano.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24487741

Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24487138
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Siep Ludwig
Abstract: L. Siep, Private und offentliche Aufgaben, Munster, Verl. der Akad. Franz-Hitze-Haus, 2005
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24487926

Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485962
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Capelle Philippe
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Parcours de la reconnaissance, Paris, Stock, 2005, p. 377.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488393

Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485961
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488465

Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485961
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Maesschalck Marc
Abstract: P. Sheehy, The Reality of Social Groups, Ashgate, Aldershot, 2006, p. 194.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488473

Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24486302
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: Le volontaire et l'involontaire, p. 20.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488531

Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24488640
Date: 1 1, 2012
Abstract: Lorenzo Leuzzi, Messina, Rubbettino, 1996, pp. 65-71.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488810

Journal Title: French Politics, Culture & Society
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i24517619
Date: 4 1, 2014
Author(s): Bracher Nathan
Abstract: The present article argues that Hélène Berr's Journal goes well beyond mere testimony to provide an astute analysis not only of the persecutory measures, arrests, camps, and deportations but also of the various attempts to camouflage the violence and even of the wider implications of what she ultimately recognized to be a systematic extermination. Hélène Berr thus presents an extraordinary case of a young French Jewish student at the Sorbonne who, steeped in literature but untrained in history, nevertheless achieved a degree of historical lucidity that, in view of the confused, limited, and often unreliable information available to her in Nazi-occupied Paris, we can only consider as remarkable. Above all, Hélène Berr's very personal confrontation with history, as it unfolded in all the sinister complexity of what we now know as the Holocaust, enables us to better understand these events in the human terms in which they were experienced and with the ethical dimensions that they take on for us today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24517622

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Palgrave Macmillan
Issue: i24537834
Date: 4 1, 2014
Author(s): Gimbel Edward W.
Abstract: Michael Bamett's Eyewitness to a Genocide (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 2002).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24540199

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Periodicals, Inc.
Issue: i24542833
Date: 5 1, 2013
Author(s): ANKERSMIT FRANK
Abstract: What I have described elsewhere as "the Magritte conception of history." See Ankersmit, Meaning, Truth, and Reference in Historical Representation (Ithaca, NY, and London: Cornell Uni- versity Press, 2012), 192-196.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24542850

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24563540
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Capelle-Pogácean Antonela
Abstract: Un récent sondage réalisé par l'Organisation internationale pour les migrations révélait que 40 % des Roumains avaient des projets d'émigration, plus de 20 % d'entre eux ayant déjà effectué des démarches concrètes en ce sens. Cité par Mircea Boari, « Un loc din care vrei sa fugi » [Un lieu d'où l'on veut s'enfuir], Curentul, 18 mai 1999, http://curentul.logicnet.ro.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24563556

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24564451
Date: 9 1, 2006
Author(s): Tomanova Zuzana
Abstract: Je remercie pour leur coopération et leur disponibilité Josef Alan, Jin Kabele, Milos Kucera, Hana Librovâ, Miloslav Petrusek, Olga Srrridovâ, Zdenëk Uherek, Ivan Vodochodsky, qui m'ont livré des récits plus ou moins bio- graphiques, et Tomas Bitrich, Marie Cerna, Zdenèk Konopâsek, Jin Nekvapil, Majda Rajanova, Eva Stehlikovâ, Tereza Stôckelovâ, dont les conseils et remarques ont considérablement contribué à la rédaction de cet article.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24564461

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24564534
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Niewiedzial Agnieszka
Abstract: Une bibliographie est disponible sur le site du CERI (http://www.ceri-sciences-po.org/cerifr/publica/cri- tique/criti.htm).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24564545

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24565178
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Israël Liora
Abstract: Avant le procès David Rousset et celui dit de 1'« Internationale des traîtres », qui, dans les années suivantes, ont opposé à nouveau des journalistes communistes (défendus notamment par Joë Nordmann) et des dénonciateurs de la répression soviétique. Sur le procès Rousset, voir T. Wieder, « La commission internationale contre le régime concentrationnaire, 1949-1959 : des rescapés des camps nazis combattent les camps de concentration », cité.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24565186

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24565951
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Gelézeau Valérie
Abstract: Philippe Pons, « La "mue" de la Corée du Nord », Le débat, 153, 2009, p. 100-114.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24565954

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24565951
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Bouissou Jean-Marie
Abstract: Pour répondre aux normes éditoriales de Critique internationale, le texte original a été coupé sans toucher au contenu général (NdT).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24565955

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24567235
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Naudet Jules
Abstract: Pour les longues discussions que nous avons eues sur le thème de cette étude, je remercie Nicolas Patin, qui a beaucoup travaillé sur la mise en valeur de l'expérience de guerre des députés du Reichstag (Nicolas Patin, La catastrophe allemande (1914-1945), Paris, Fayard, 2014).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24567243

Journal Title: Cahiers du Monde russe
Publisher: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i24567600
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): CZERNY BORIS
Abstract: http://www.holocaust.kiev.ua/news/viplO_l.htm
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24567621

Journal Title: Biography
Publisher: University of Hawaiʻi Press for the Biographical Research Center
Issue: i24570215
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): STUMM BETTINA
Abstract: This article examines the ethical responsibilities of relating and responding to subjects of oppression in the context of collaborative life writing. One well-established ethical response to oppression is the practice of recognition. Drawing on the phenomenological ethics of Emmanuel Levinas and Paul Ricoeur, as well as the related work of Kelly Oliver, I raise some of the limitations of recognition, and delineate the ethical alternative of witnessing, bringing both to bear on my collaborative work with Holocaust survivor Rhodea Shandler.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24570271

Journal Title: Estudios Demográficos y Urbanos
Publisher: EL COLEGIO DE MÉXICO
Issue: i24570762
Date: 4 1, 2015
Author(s): Malizia Matilde
Abstract: Bauman (2005)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24570789

Journal Title: Journal of Black Studies
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24572645
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Hlongwane Gugu
Abstract: This article offers an examination of Lee Hirsch's Amandla!: A Revolution in Four-Part Harmony. Beginning with the liberation songs that gained salience during the National Party's implementation of apartheid policy in 1948 and ending with the struggle songs of a post-1994 democratic South Africa, the documentary's aim is to retrieve and recount the role of freedom songs in antiapartheid struggle. Using the writings of Ernesto Laclau, John Mbiti, Paul Ricoeur, and Alfred Schutz, this essay will argue that liberation songs are ancestral text that were partly used by antiapartheid activists to create their collective identities. This essay will further argue that Amandla! set itself the task of retrieving South Africa's liberation songs and liberation's praise singers from the ancestral region John Mbiti calls Zamani to a region he calls Sasa. However, this essay will assert that the ancestral retrieval task of this documentary is compromised by the documentary's privileging of the hegemonic groups within the African National Congress (ANC), the documentary's presentation of the ANC as a monolithic and univocal organization, and the producer's snowball sampling method. Arguing that this documentary relegates some of the South African struggle experiences into Zamani, this essay will attempt to correct these omissions and broaden the context of liberation songs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24572832

Journal Title: Historia Mexicana
Publisher: EL COLEGIO DE MÉXICO
Issue: i24573231
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Ayala Elisa Cárdenas
Abstract: Rivera, Entretenimientos, p. 18.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24575179

Journal Title: Histoire de l'éducation
Publisher: ÉCOLE NORMALE SUPÉRIEURE DE LYON: Institut français de l'Éducation
Issue: i24573366
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): Forestier Yann
Abstract: Jean Le Veugle, «Une révolution culturelle, oui. mais laquelle?», Le Monde, 23 mal 1968.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24577182

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i24582422
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Bessy Christian
Abstract: Descombes (2004)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24583127

Journal Title: Artibus et Historiae
Publisher: IRSA
Issue: i24595727
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Burroughs Charles
Abstract: Through the analysis of a major religious painting by Botticelli, this article builds on important recent work on Botticelli's sacred art to explore apparent responses on the part of an especially sophisticated artist to the gathering atmosphere of crisis in the city's political and religious life. The artist uses various devices of connection or separation between the viewer/worshiper and the holy image; these devices are not unique to the painting, but their combination is exceptional. First, Botticelli uses a hieratic gold ground to distinguish a scene set in heaven, the coronation of the Virgin, from a more earthly zone; here recent scruples about the representation of transcendence seem to be in play. Second, the figures beneath, four major saints, embody different ways of addressing the viewer and mediating between him/her and the heavenly event. Third, the latter appears to be treated as an apsidal image within an implied architectural setting, in other words, as a representation of a representation. By establishing modes of mediation, then, Botticelli confronts issues emerging as central to the representation of the sacred, in part on the basis of a critical understanding of Albertian picture theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24595730

Journal Title: Tumultes
Publisher: ÉDITIONS KIMÉ
Issue: i24598544
Date: 11 1, 2006
Author(s): Yinda André Marie Yinda
Abstract: Voir Clarence E. Walker, Deromanticizing black history : critical essays and reappraisals, Knoxville, University of Tennessee Press, 1992, ainsi que le dossier « Réparations, restitutions, réconciliations. Entre Afriques, Europe et Amériques » dirigé par Bosumil Jewsiewicki, Cahier d'Etudes Africaines, n° 173-174, 2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24598550

Journal Title: Tumultes
Publisher: ÉDITIONS KIMÉ
Issue: i24598544
Date: 11 1, 2006
Author(s): Puig Nicolas
Abstract: Evoquant l'habitude, Ricœur constate qu'elle donne une histoire au caractère : « une histoire dans laquelle la sédimentation tend à recouvrir et, à la limite, à abolir l'innovation qui l'a précédée [...]. C'est cette sédimentation qui confère au caractère la sorte de permanence dans le temps que j'interprète ici comme recouvrement de Y ipse par l'idem ». In Soi-même comme un autre, Paris, Seuil, 1990, p. 146. L'ipseque Philippe Corcuff synthétise comme « la part subjective de l'identité personnelle » (« Figures de l'individualité, de Marx aux sociologies contemporaines », Espacestemps.net, web : http://www.espacestemps.net/ documentl390.html, 2005, non paginé) renvoie à la possibilité de n'être que partiellement investi dans un rôle. On glisse ici du caractère à l'appartenance pour amener cette idée d'un retrait ou d'une déprise de l'identité stabilisée autour de symboles rigides en faveur de moments de mise en avant d'une identité personnelle répondant à un besoin d'individualisation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24598552

Journal Title: Tumultes
Publisher: ÉDITIONS KIMÉ
Issue: i24599377
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Zecchini Laetitia
Abstract: M. Darwich, Exil 4, Contrepoint.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24599382

Journal Title: Tumultes
Publisher: ÉDITIONS KIMÉ
Issue: i24599376
Date: 11 1, 2009
Author(s): Čapek Jakub
Abstract: Cette manière de voir les choses, qui renoue avec la notion du politique de Hannah Arendt, est chère à certains signataires de la Charte 77. Voir par exemple les réflexions de Martin Palous ici même, et surtout les textes de Vâclav Benda sur une « polis parallèle ».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24599441

Journal Title: Tumultes
Publisher: ÉDITIONS KIMÉ
Issue: i24599447
Date: 5 1, 2011
Author(s): Smola Julia
Abstract: Cf. Herbert Paul Grice, « Logic and Conversation », in P. Cole and J.L.Morgan (dir.), Syntax and Semantics, Academic Press, Inc., vol. Ill, Speech Acts, 1975.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24599458

Journal Title: Revue Française d'Histoire des Idées Politiques
Publisher: Centre national du livre
Issue: i24609164
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Zékian Stéphane
Abstract: Pierre Rosanvallon, op. cit., p. 203.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24610249

Journal Title: Revue Française d'Histoire des Idées Politiques
Publisher: Centre national du livre et du Centre national de la recherche scientifique
Issue: i24610341
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): López Iñaki Iriarte
Abstract: Caro Baroja, 1971, 42-43.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24610405

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Medicine and Allied Sciences
Publisher: Journal of the History of Medicine and Allied Sciences, Inc.
Issue: i24619291
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): HARLEY DAVID N.
Abstract: W. Stukeley, The Healing of Diseases, a Character of the Messiah (London, 1750).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24623265

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Medicine and Allied Sciences
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i24618790
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): SADOWSKY JONATHAN
Abstract: Pressman, Last Resort, p. 132.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24632274

Journal Title: The Journal of Theological Studies
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i24623237
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Collicutt Joanna
Abstract: W. Brueggemann, The Book that Breathes New Life (Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 2005), p. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24637949

Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i24640649
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Carrozzo Mario
Abstract: http://www.gherush92.com/newsJt.asp?tipo=A.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24642255

Journal Title: Contemporanea
Publisher: il Mulino
Issue: i24650361
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Valle Paola Della
Abstract: A. Liakos, La crise dans les Balkans et le Nationalisme en Grèce, in «Science(s) Politique(s)», 2-3,1993, pp. 179-193.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24651692

Journal Title: Contemporanea
Publisher: il Mulino
Issue: i24651097
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Liakos Antonis
Abstract: Y. Zerubavel, Recovered roots. Collective memory and the making qf Israeli national tradition, Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1995, pp. 60-78.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24652966

Journal Title: Contemporanea
Publisher: il Mulino
Issue: i24651135
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Lollini Andrea
Abstract: Ibidem.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24653108

Journal Title: Contemporanea
Publisher: il Mulino
Issue: i24651194
Date: 6 1, 2012
Author(s): Demaria Cristina
Abstract: P. Ricoeur, La memoria, la storia, l'oblio, Milano, Raffaello Cortina, 2001 Paris, 2000],
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24653511

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Humanities Press, Inc.
Issue: i24649733
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): KISIEL THEODORE
Abstract: "Hermeneutk Models for Natural Science," Die Phanomenologie und die Wisseruchaften, edited by E. W. Orth as Phânomenologische Forschungen 2 (Freiburg/ Munchen: Alber, 1976), pp. 180-191.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24654210

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i24649492
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): WATSON STEPHEN H.
Abstract: Paul Klee's art found broad impact upon philosophers of varying commitments, including Hans-Georg Gadamer. Moreover, Klee himself was not only one of the most important artists of aesthetic modernism but one of its leading theoreticians, and much in his work, as in Gadamer's, originated in post-Kantian literary theory's explications of symbol and allegory. Indeed at one point in Truth and Method, Gadamer associates his project for a general "theory of hermeneutic experience" not only with Goethe's metaphysical account of the symbolic but equally with a "rehabilitation" of allegory. In this paper, I examine this position and Gadamer's own use of it in his analysis of Klee's work, contrasting it with that of Walter Benjamin's account of allegory, equally indebted to Goethe and this archive. Finally, I contrast the resulting interpretations of Klee, discussing the implications that evolve for understanding both Gadamer and Benjamin—but equally for understanding Klee's work and, provisionally, the work of art, thus construed, for philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24654833

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659485
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Mei Todd S.
Abstract: Ricoeur, "Work and the Word," in History and Truth, trans. C. A. Kelbley (Evanston: North- western University Press, 1965), 218.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24659841

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659511
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Kaplan David M.
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, The Just\ trans. David Pellauer (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2000), 76-93.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660192

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659507
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Jung Hwa Yol
Abstract: The Rustle of Language, trans. Richard Howard [New York: Hill and Wang, 1986], 72
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660238

Journal Title: Indo-Iranian Journal
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24663608
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): HILTEBEITEL ALF
Abstract: The superfluity arises from the fact that this "double of Krsna" never has to take the reins, since Nala is driving; see Hiltebeitel, Rethinking, 232-33. As men- tioned in n. 7 above, J. Brockington finds this "implausible." For valuable discus- sion of the "avatära" theme in both epics, and especially in the Rämäyam, see also Robert P. Goldman and Sally J. Sutherland, trans. The Rämäyam of Välmlki, Vol. 5: Sundarakäyanda (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1996), 29-33, 69, 73.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24663613

Journal Title: Journal for the Study of Judaism in the Persian, Hellenistic, and Roman Period
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i24661569
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): MENN ESTHER M.
Abstract: McFague, Metaphorical Theology, 1-29.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24669446

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i24666124
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Reynoso Carlos
Abstract: http://www.medieva- lists.net/2008/09/27/interview-with-natalie-zemon- davis/
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24671803

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24671554
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Chaubet François
Abstract: Diana Pinto, « La conversion de l'intellectuel », in Denis Lacorne, Jacques Rupnik et Marie-France Toinet, Un siècle de fascinations et d'aversions, Paris, Hachette, 1986, p. 124-136.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24673715

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24672910
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Rebreyend Anne-Claire
Abstract: Lettre de Cécile à Etienne, été 1965.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24673888

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24699234
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Aubin-Boltanski Emma
Abstract: Je remercie le linguiste Jérôme Lentin de m'avoir précisément expliqué l'évolution sémantique de ce terme.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24699246

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24699234
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Anheim Étienne
Abstract: Même si ce n'était pas l'objet de ce travail, et outre les féconds prolongements de l'anthro- pologie historique déjà évoqués au début de cet article, il faut rappeler les fructueux échanges empiriques que les historiens, en particulier pour le Moyen Âge, ont pu avoir depuis vingt ans avec différents courants de l'anthropologie, qu'il s'agisse par exemple de l'anthropologie juridique dans le cadre des débats sur la mutation de l'an mil (cf. les travaux de Dominique Barthélémy [1997, 1999]), de l'anthropologie visuelle de chercheurs comme Hans Belting (cf. Schmitt [2002]; ou Baschet [2008]), de l'anthropologie des pratiques d'écriture dans la lignée de Jack Goody (pour une présentation synthétique de l'historiographie médiévale dans ce domaine, cf. Chastang [2008]), de l'anthropologie économique (avec Feller, Gramain & Weber [2005]), ou encore des réflexions de Maurice Godelier ou de Louis Dumont (mobilisés par Iogna-Prat [1998, 2006]).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24699250

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24699828
Date: 3 1, 2015
Author(s): Jewsiewicki Bogumil
Abstract: Ces réserves sont ponctuelles, en voici quelques exemples. Comme tout binôme, et il n'est pas le seul dans le livre, le terme de contre-mémoire risque de produire l'impression d'opposition mécanique ce qui n'est sûrement pas l'intention de l'auteure. Sur un autre registre, malgré tout mon respect pour l'héritage intellectuel de Pierre Bourdieu, je ne suis pas convaincu par les efforts de Christine Chivallon d'appliquer son appareil conceptuel à l'analyse du travail de la mémoire. Puisque son érudition est très impressionnante, l'absence des travaux de Nathan Wachtel surprend d'autant plus. L'Invention du quotidien de Michel de Certeau est citée, mais je n'ai trouvé aucune mention de son concept opératoire de « propre », à mon avis très pertinent pour la démarche de l'auteure. J'estime également que le concept de « lieu de mémoire » de Pierre Nora est trop rapidement jugé inopérant pour sa recherche.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24699837

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24700246
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Martin Denis-Constant
Abstract: Le Voortrekker Monument a été érigé en souvenir des Boers qui entamèrent le grand trek (« migration ») en 1835, quittant la colonie du Cap, après l'abolition de l'esclavage, pour se diriger vers le Nord, où certains fonderont les républiques boers du Transvaal et de l'Etat libre d'Orange.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24700256

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24707302
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Griffioen Sander
Abstract: J. P. van Praag, 'Levensovertuiging, filosofie en wetenschap' ('World-view, philosophy and science'), valedictory address given on retirement from the Univer- sity of Leiden, 13th November 1979, Utrecht, Humanistisch Verbond, pp. 9, 7, 10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24707304

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24707971
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Morton Herbert Donald
Abstract: Thus J. van der Hoeven in an article with the telling title, Ontwikkeling in het Iicht van ontmoeting' [Development in the light of encounter], p. 159.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24707974

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708591
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Seerveld Calvin
Abstract: Jean Brun, 'Le voyage dans le temps. De la chronophotographie au Futurisme', Tempo- ralité et Aliénatkon, p.364.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708593

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708906
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Geertsema Hendrik
Abstract: Hendrik G. Geertsema, Van boven naar voren (Kampen: J.H. Kok, 1980), pp. 95-201
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708911

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708906
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Olthuis James H.
Abstract: Martin Heidegger, Being and time, trans. John Macquarrie and Edward Robinson (New York: Harper & Row, 1962), p. 174.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708912

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708906
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Blosser Philip
Abstract: Steen, Structure, p. 272; cf. above, n. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708915

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24709638
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Glas Gerrit
Abstract: Interestingly enough it appears that the structural features of reconciliation show a re- versed version of the structural features of evil. Resolving the evil I do toward the other re- quires that I am able to say what I have done wrong (the reverse of silence and the tinspeakable), that I recognize my guilt (which is incompatible with splitting) and that I ask for forgiveness (which is very shameful, but may résolve shame when penitence is accepted and forgiveness is given); see Glas (in press); Muφhyand Hampton (1988); Volf (1996).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709643

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24709683
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Glas Gerrit
Abstract: Because they escape precise modal qualification, Troost suggests that insight into disposi- tions can only be gained in an idea-ruled (idee-matig) understanding, in an idea-regulated 'on the way' in the transcendental direction of time. For reformational philosophy this raises an old and prima facie purely theoretical problem: Do the modalities 'continue' right into the heart? One could paraphrase Troost's view for example such that for him the heart should primarily be sought 'below' or 'behind' the act structure, and that the dispositions — relative to this vertical axis — constitute a horizontal layer in which the lower substructures are interwoven with the act structure. In that case the integration of the lower structures in the act structure would take place via the dispositions rather than through a direct relationship with the heart. This notion — for which hints can be found in Dooyeweerd — would in any case lead to an appreciably more nuanced picture of the 'binding' and 'releasing' of substructures. If I understand Troost correctly, he would allow this interpretation for the substructures, though not for the modalities. His caution concerning the 'continuing' of the modalities 'into the' heart is epistemological: the cosmological concentration of the modal functions in the heart is a transcendental idea; at best we see dots (the idea-regulated 'on the way' in the transcendental direction of time), but we should not turn them into lines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709687

Journal Title: Jewish History
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24708650
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): GOLDBERG SYLVIE ANNE
Abstract: Goldberg, L'histoire et la mémoire de l'histoire.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709812

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Association for Reformational Philosophy
Issue: i24710027
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Griffioen Sander
Abstract: Broad definitions are often used in Christian apologetics. One example: 'Everyone has a worldview. Whether or not we realize it, we all have certain presuppositions and biases that affect the way we view all of life and reality. A worldview is like a set of lenses which taint our vision or alter the way we perceive the world around us.' (http://christianworldview.net/, consulted Jan. 23, 2012)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24710030

Journal Title: Revista Española de Pedagogía
Publisher: Universidad Internacional de La Rioja
Issue: i24710732
Date: 8 1, 2016
Author(s): GARCÍA DEL DUJO Ángel
Abstract: The struggles for recognition, focused on cultural and identity issues until recently, are returning to public arenas in the form of struggles for legal recognition, precisely when we are witnessing, in the context of the post-2008 economic recession, a downward review of citizenship rights, in particular social and labour rights. This article discusses this issue by: first, associating education to the struggles for legal recognition, using the «moral grammar of social conflicts» of Axel Honneth; second, showing how education, connected to empowerment, may have an interesting role in the qualification of social actors involved in these struggles; third, defining the major articulations of this educational role in terms of empowerment. The article concludes by demonstrating the strategic role of empowerment, when promoted by education, in the struggles against the recession of subjective or citizenship rights. Las luchas por el reconocimiento, centradas hasta hace poco en aspectos culturales e identitarios, vuelven al dominio público en forma de luchas por el reconocimiento legal, precisamente cuando estamos asistiendo, en el contexto de la recesión económica posterior a 2008, a una revisión a la baja de los derechos de ciudadanía, particularmente de los derechos sociales y laborales. Este artículo aborda este problema: primero, asociando la educación con las luchas por el reconocimiento legal, en base a la «gramática moral de los conflictos sociales» de Axel Honneth; segundo, mostrando cómo la educación, conectada con el empoderamiento, puede desempeñar un interesante papel en la cualificación de los actores sociales involucrados en estas luchas y, en tercer lugar, definiendo las principales expresiones de este papel de la educación en términos de empoderamiento. El artículo concluye demostrando el estratégico papel del empoderamiento, cuando es potenciado por la educación, en las luchas contra la recesión de los derechos subjetivos o de ciudadanía.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24711385

Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i24713074
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Lutterbach Hubertus
Abstract: Dazu sei verwiesen auf die Monografie von Hubertus Lutterbach, Kinder und Chris- tentum. Der religiöse Beitrag zur UN-Kinderrechtskonvention (im Druck).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24713089

Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i24713074
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Konz Britta
Abstract: Metz, Glaube, aaO. (Anm.4), 115.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24713091

Journal Title: Extrême-Orient Extrême-Occident
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes
Issue: i24715389
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Morier-Genoud Damien
Abstract: Benjamin (2000): 431.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24716509

Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i24715377
Date: 10 1, 2015
Author(s): BERNAL ALEJANDRA
Abstract: Desde modalidades enunciativas contrastantes, vinculadas a sus respectivos contextos de producción, En estado de memoria (1990) de Tununa Mercado y Los topos (2008) de Félix Bruzzone funcionan a contracorriente del canon narrativo de la memoria de postdictadura argentina. Ambos relatos abandonan toda pretensión de verdad histórica a favor de construcciones subjetivas inestables, sin renunciar a la dimensión ética del trabajo colectivo de rememoración, sino inscribiéndola precisamente en el acto de denunciar discursos, hábitos o dispositivos encaminados a hacer del sujeto de memoria un vehículo de dicha pretensión de verdad. Si se tiene en cuenta la doble función restitutiva y prospectiva de la alegoría, central en ambos relatos, se hace evidente la tematización del riesgo de convertir el deber ético de la memoria en imperativo esencialista. La lectura alegórica resuelve igualmente la aparente paradoja (restitución por textualización vs destitución por somatización) que surge al leer ambos textos como síntomas de la aceptación o negación del imperativo de duelo. En última instancia, ambos relatos suponen una disociación momentánea entre la escritura como praxis subversiva y la literatura como institución de memoria cultural, mecanismo metaficticio que, siguiendo a Guy Debord, denomino détournement mnemónico.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24717171

Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i24715377
Date: 10 1, 2015
Author(s): LEFERE ROBIN
Abstract: La noche de los tiempos (2009), de Antonio Muñoz Molina, constituye una novela histórica que debe ser comprendida en función del debate español sobre la "memoria histórica". El presente estudio empieza rastreando los artículos comprometidos del autor que preceden y preparan la novela (un epitexto con efecto paratextual), y pone de relieve cómo forjan un mito republicano que se reivindica no solo en tanto recuperación de una herencia sino como referencia para enjuiciar el presente y fundamentar un nuevo porvenir. Luego, examina en qué medida y de qué manera la novela, en especial gracias a las especificidades del pensamiento ficticio, constituye una aportación original: por una parte, con respecto a dichos artículos, cuyo ideario acaba socavando al mismo tiempo que lo exalta, y, por otra, de cara a la memoria controvertida de la Guerra Civil, superando los paradigmas habituales del reconocimiento y de la instrumentalización hacia la construcción de un discurso complejo y no partidista, caracterizado por una representación densísima y polifónica, la ejemplaridad filosófica y un metadiscurso tan crítico como autocrítico.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24717177

Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i24715377
Date: 10 1, 2015
Author(s): VANDEN BERGHE KRISTINE
Abstract: En 2006, casi dos décadas después del asesinato de su padre, Héctor Abad Faciolince publicó una novela sobre este crimen titulada El olvido que seremos. En la medida en que sugiere múltiples relaciones entre la familia y la nación, y entre el padre y la patria, el libro supone un importante análisis revisionista del reciente pasado colombiano. Al mismo tiempo estas relaciones – sobre todo de contraste – suscitan la pregunta de saber hasta qué punto la memoria construida por el escritor – que en principio se presenta como incomparable y literal – tiene un valor emblemático y colectivo. Por los temas que aborda, el libro incita asimismo a reflexionar en torno al papel que pueden desempeñar la belleza y el olvido en los procesos de duelo. En la presente contribución estudiaremos estos temas en la novela del escritor antioqueño, situándolos en el marco más general de las letras colombianas e hispanoamericanas contemporáneas que tratan de la violencia en el reciente pasado histórico.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24717182

Journal Title: Reis: Revista Española de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Issue: i24721320
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Pérez-Díaz Víctor
Abstract: «Hori- zonte y dilemas de la filantropía» (2007).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24721323

Journal Title: Reis: Revista Española de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Issue: i24721320
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Isla José Gómez
Abstract: (http://sociocav.usal.es/stata).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24721324

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Derecho
Publisher: FACULTAD DE DERECHO PONTIFICIA UNIVERSIDAD CATÓLICA DE CHILE
Issue: i24721887
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Caldera Cristóbal Carmona
Abstract: Guastini (2001) p. 146.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24722062

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24739848
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Julia Dominique
Abstract: F. L., 2001 : 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24739861

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24739848
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Langlois Claude
Abstract: Revue : La science catholique, revue des questions religieuses [puis] des sciences sacrées et profanes, Lyon, Paris, Delhomme et Briguet [puis] Arras, Paris, Sueur-Charruey, 1886-1906. Fusion ultérieure : La Revue des sciences ecclésiastiques et La Science catholique (1906-1910). Ouvrages : John Augustine Zahm, chanoine régulier de la Sainte-Croix, pseud. Le Père H. J. Mozans, Science catholique et savants catholiques [Catholic science and catholic scientists, 1893], traduit de l'anglais par M. l'abbé J. Flageolet, Paris, P. Lethielleux, 1895. A. Jeanniard du Dot, L'hypnotisme et la science catholique, Paris, Librairie Bloud et Barrai, 1898, 1900. Théophile Ortolan, Rivalités scientifiques : ou la science catholique et la prétendue impartialité des historiens, I- La manie du dénigrement, II- Fausses réputations, Paris, Bloud et Barrai, Collection : Science et religion : Études pour le temps présent, 1900.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24739862

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24739982
Date: 6 1, 2015
Author(s): Kreil Aymon
Abstract: Les travaux de A. Le Renard se situent dans la ligne des débats sur les modalités de constitution possible pour un « féminisme islamique » (cf. S. Latte Abdallah, 2010, pour une synthèse de ces débats).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24740014

Journal Title: Wiener Slavistisches Jahrbuch
Publisher: ÖSTERREICHISCHEN AKADEMIE DER WISSENSCHAFTEN
Issue: i24748360
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): RICHTEROVÁ SYLVIE
Abstract: V: Les conceptions modernes de la raison, III, Raison et valeur, v: Actualités scientifiques et universelles, Paris 1939, 17-29.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24748376

Journal Title: Journal for the Study of Religion
Publisher: Association for the Study of Religion in Southern Africa
Issue: i24764056
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): van der Merwe Chris N.
Abstract: Afrikaans writers have often found themselves in a marginal position. During the time of apartheid, they vehemently criticised racial discrimination, thus dissociating themselves from the centre of power. After the demise of apartheid, Afrikaans writers were marginalised in a different way, when the Afrikaans language lost its previous dominant position and truly became a minority language. They were then forced to reexamine their past and reinterpret their present. In this article, recent Afrikaans writers' radical reinvention of the ideological significance of the Anglo-Boer War (1899-1902) is discussed. One novel about the War, Ingrid Winterbach's Niggie ("Cousin") is analysed in detail as an example of the search for meaning from a marginal position. The novel has a special relevance for Afrikaners in their painful adaptation to a new South Africa, but it is also linked to general themes like trauma, despair and hope.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24764084

Journal Title: Revue de l'histoire des religions
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i24776583
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): HARTER PIERRE-JULIEN
Abstract: Un grand merci à Gareth Sparham et à David Rawson pour leur remarques et leur critiques qui ont permis d'améliorer le contenu de cet article.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24776605

Journal Title: Journal for the Study of Religion
Publisher: Wesleyan University Press
Issue: e24798115
Date: September 29, 1993
Author(s): Clasquin-Johnson Michel
Abstract: The Earth’s Children series of prehistoric novels by Jean M. Auel, beginning with The Clan of the Cave Bear(1980) and culminating inThe Land of Painted Caves(2010), contains a compelling vision of two species of human practising two utterly different kinds of religion. On the one hand there are the Neanderthals, who practice a pure totemism, while on the other there are the anatomically modern humans, whose religion centres on the worship of an Earth Goddess. Auel’s heroine, Ayla, straddles both religious spheres, but she herself initiates a crisis within the anatomically modern human religious world. This article examines the different fictional religions in these popular and influential books, considers the sources Auel drew on in creating them and considers the influence these books may exert on public understanding of religion, including among future cohorts of students of religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24798121

Journal Title: Journal for the Study of Religion
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: e24798420
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Blond Louis
Abstract: By inquiring into the translatability of Judaism and philosophy, we reawaken an ancient problem that asks after philosophy’s relation with religion: What has Athens to do with Jerusalem?Translation is a rejuvenated means of wrestling with this irksome question, which seeks to understand how multiple approaches to meaning and being can exist concurrently or whether any interaction forfeits multiplicity for the primacy of one form over all others. The specific issue that linguistic versions of the problem address is whether or not the languages that Judaism and philosophy speak are separate and distinct and if those distinctions are established on deeper, non-linguistic ground. For this reason, translation not only raises the problem of articulacy and context in interlingual translations, it also alludes to an ontological or metaphysical separation that speaks of different, non-shared worlds. Whether or not a translation theory addresses, repairs or upholds the opposition between religion and philosophy is in question, and translation becomes a vehicle for discussing what Jerusalem has to offer Athens and what Athens has for Jerusalem. In this essay, I examine the translation problem as an attempt to repair or re-gloss the relation between Judaism and philosophy by way of Michael Fagenblat’s recovery of Emmanuel Levinas’ thought in his work,A Covenant of Creatures: Levinas’s Philosophy of Judaism(2010).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24798426

Journal Title: Journal for the Study of Religion
Publisher: Murray Coombes Publishers
Issue: e24805687
Date: June 1, 1991
Author(s): Mason Garth
Abstract: In this article I examine Philip Qipa (P.Q.) Vundla’s Moral Rearmament-inspired (MRA) politics with a view to explicating the previously hidden currents at work in his political activism. In my analysis, I draw on the theoretical frameworks of Paul Ricoeur and Homi Bhabha. In terms of these conceptual foundations, I investigate Vundla’s involvement in two foundational events in the history of the South African struggle, namely the school boycott of 1955 and the bus boycott of 1957. The official history of these two events, written by social historians such as Tom Lodge, interprets them as the dawn of mass opposition against apartheid. However, I contend that a closer analysis of these two events via biographical material reveals a more complex history, implicitly connected to the person of P.Q. Vundla and his politics of negotiation and finding common ground between opposing ideologies. Vundla stands out within this context because he was a nonconforming ANC leader, who disagreed with the way the party leadership approached political activism. His approach was driven by MRA values, which sought political solutions through dialogue and aimed to benefit all communities within South Africa. Vundla can be seen as an early forerunner of the bridge-building politics of Nelson Mandela. It is hoped that, by examining the role of MRA values in Vundla’s activism, a fuller, more complex account of politics in the 1950s can be arrived at.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24805696

Journal Title: Strategic Management Journal
Publisher: John Wiley and Sons
Issue: i342456
Date: 3 1, 1975
Author(s): Zaleznik Danny
Abstract: Many parallels can be drawn between organizational and individual pathologies. We believe that the fantasies of top executives and the neurotic styles to which they give rise are important determinants of the nature of organizational dysfunctions. This is particularly true in centralized organizations where the top executives have a major impact upon organizational climate, structure, strategy and even the selection of the environment; and, where organizational recruitment and promotion processes ensure uniformity, or at least conformity, among the top ranks of executives. Using an empirically derived taxonomy, we have isolated five common pathological organizational types and related each of these to the fantasies and neurotic styles of their top executives. Each type is shown to reflect a large number of elements of structure and strategy that are consistent with and probably caused by the neurotic style of the cadre of top executives. The types are called paranoid, compulsive, histrionic, depressive and schizoid. Implications for management research and organizational change are discussed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2486009

Journal Title: Revista Española de Derecho Constitucional
Publisher: CENTRO DE ESTUDIOS POLÍTICOS Y CONSTITUCIONALES
Issue: i24886035
Date: 8 1, 2010
Author(s): LUTHER JÖRG
Abstract: BVerfG, 1 BvR 2150/08, 4.11.2009, www.bverfg.de/entscheidungen/rs20091104_lbvr 215008.html, sobre el recurso presentado por una persona posteriormente fallecida.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24886059

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Ethnologie
Publisher: REIMER
Issue: i24888256
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Malefakis Alexis
Abstract: Fieldwork is sometimes marked by experiences of frictions and frustration. Fieldwork with mobile street vendors in an African city may confront the fieldworker with the problem of locating the 'field' and attaining access to it, both spatially and temporally. As I will show by reference to my fieldwork with a group of shoe vendors on the streets of Dar es Salaam, Tanzania, the frictions that occurred at the beginning of my fieldwork nevertheless ignited a process of ethnographic knowledge-gaining that led me to understand the importance of temporality and rhythmicity for the shoe vendors' practices. In their active engagement with the spatio-temporal landscape of the city, the street vendors organised their practices as an experiential rhythm that unfolded as sequences of rising and subsequently declining cognitive and corporeal tensions. These rhythms did not flow smoothly, but were necessarily interspersed with disturbances and frictions by the rhythms of other pedestrians in the streets, whose attention the street vendors tried to attain.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24888264

Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i24890799
Date: 6 1, 2016
Author(s): Chabal Emile
Abstract: Chabal, A Divided Republic, ch. 1-4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24891225

Journal Title: KulturPoetik
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i24894236
Date: 1 1, 2016
Author(s): Rohde Carsten
Abstract: Niklas Luhmann, Die Kunst der Gesellschaft. Frankfurt/M. 2. Aufl. 1998, S. 504.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24894344

Journal Title: Journal of Consumer Research
Publisher: Journal of Consumer Research
Issue: i342751
Date: 12 1, 1963
Author(s): Wellek Barbara B.
Abstract: Advertising Age, "The House that Ivory Built: 150 Years of Procter & Gamble," August 20, 1987, p. 46. August 20 46 Advertising Age 1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2489513

Journal Title: Diplomatic History
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24912290
Date: 4 1, 1995
Author(s): LEFFLER MELVYN P.
Abstract: I am referring to the influential essay by Charles S. Maier, "Marking Time: The Historiography of International Relations," in The Past Before Us: Contemporary Historical Writ- ing in the United States, ed. Michael Kämmen (Ithaca, 1980), 355-87; and to the prize-winning book by Richard E. Neustadt and Ernest R. May, Thinking in Time: The Uses of History for Decision-Makers (New York, 1986).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24912293

Journal Title: Journal of Feminist Studies in Religion
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i25002064
Date: 4 1, 1988
Author(s): Jung L. Shannon
Abstract: my "Commercialization and the Professions," Business and Professional Ethics Journal 2:2 (Winter 1983): 57-81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25002069

Journal Title: Journal of Feminist Studies in Religion
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i25002117
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Cheney Jim
Abstract: Biddy Martin and Chandra Talpade Mohanty, "Feminist Politics: What's Home Got to Do With It?" in Feminist Studies/Critical Studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25002122

Journal Title: Journal of Feminist Studies in Religion
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i25002165
Date: 4 1, 1992
Author(s): Sands Kathleen M.
Abstract: Karl Rahner, Foundations of Christian Faith (New York: Seabury Press, 1978), 22.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25002168

Journal Title: The Catholic Historical Review
Publisher: The Catholic University of America
Issue: i25025058
Date: 10 1, 1997
Author(s): Standaert Nicolas
Abstract: The Conquest of America: The Question of the Other, trans. Richard Howard (New York, 1984).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25025062

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University Press
Issue: i342923
Date: 12 1, 1954
Author(s): Stevens John S.
Abstract: Wallace Stevens, "Sketch of the Ultimate Politician" in The Collected Poems of Wallace Stevens (New York, 1954), 336. Stevens Sketch of the Ultimate Politician The Collected Poems of Wallace Stevens 1954
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2504891

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University Press
Issue: i342936
Date: 2 1, 1983
Author(s): Ricoeur Hayden
Abstract: Ricoeur's latest work, Time and Narrative (Chicago, 1983). Ricoeur Time and Narrative 1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2504969

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University Press
Issue: i342934
Date: 10 1, 1947
Author(s): Alonso Suzanne
Abstract: Paul Zumthor, "Autobiography in the Middle Ages," 29 29
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2504985

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342947
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): MacIntyre F. R.
Abstract: A. MacIntyre, "The Relationship of Philosophy to Its Past," in Philosophy in History, ed. R. Rorty, J. B. Schneewind, and Q. Skinner (Cambridge, 1984), 31-49. MacIntyre The Relationship of Philosophy to Its Past 31 Philosophy in History 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505129

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342983
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Harjo Kerwin Lee
Abstract: Joy Harjo, "Grace," in In Mad Love and War (Middletown, Conn., 1993), 1. Harjo Grace 1 In Mad Love and War 1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505403

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342983
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Platt Fred
Abstract: Gerald M. Platt, "Sociology: Origins, Orientations, Crises,"Annals of Scholarship9(1992), 427-436. Platt 427 9 Annals of Scholarship 1992
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505404

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342994
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): Meiyi Prasenjit
Abstract: Yang, "From Gender Erasure to Gender Difference," for the PRC's "state feminism."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505487

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342994
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): Nelson Chris
Abstract: J. Nelson, A. Megill, and D. McCloskey, "Rhetoric of Inquiry," in The Rhetoric of the Human Sciences, ed. Megill and McCloskey, 3-18. Nelson Rhetoric of Inquiry 3 The Rhetoric of the Human Sciences
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505488

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342994
Date: 10 1, 1978
Author(s): Mink John H.
Abstract: L. Mink, "Narrative Form as a Cognitive Instrument," in The Writing of History: Literary Form and Historical Understanding, ed. R. H. Canary and H. Kozicki (Madison, Wisc., 1978), 129- 149. Mink Narrative Form as a Cognitive Instrument 129 The Writing of History: Literary Form and Historical Understanding 1978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505489

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342984
Date: 2 1, 1957
Author(s): Jaspers David
Abstract: Collingwood, "The Philosophy of the Christian Religion," Sept. 29, 1920, Dep 1, 11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505516

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342974
Date: 10 1, 1899
Author(s): Bosanquet Martyn P.
Abstract: Bernard Bosanquet, The Philosophical Theory of the State (London, 1899). Bosanquet The Philosophical Theory of the State 1899
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505525

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342974
Date: 10 1, 1957
Author(s): Nietzsche Wulf
Abstract: Friedrich Nietzsche, The Use and Abuse of History, transl. Adrian Collins (Indianapolis, 1957). Nietzsche The Use and Abuse of History 1957
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505526

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342980
Date: 2 1, 1992
Author(s): Bloch Ignacio
Abstract: M. Bloch, The Historian's Craft, transl. P. Putnam (Manchester, Eng., 1992), 39. Bloch 39 The Historian's Craft 1992
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505581

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342969
Date: 5 1, 1991
Author(s): Bernstein Cushing
Abstract: Richard Bernstein, "A Historian Enters Fiction's Shadowy Domain," New York Times (May 15, 1991), C18. Bernstein May 15 C18 New York Times 1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505594

Journal Title: Journal of Japanese Studies
Publisher: The Society for Japanese Studies
Issue: i25064644
Date: 7 1, 2006
Author(s): Kono Shion
Abstract: Nakamura Shin'ichirō, Kimura Kenkadō no saron (Tokyo: Shinchōsha, 2000).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25064647

Journal Title: Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies
Publisher: Harvard-Yenching Institute
Issue: i25066776
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Brashier K. E.
Abstract: Rappaport, Ritual and Religion in the Making of Humanity, p. 394.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25066779

Journal Title: Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies
Publisher: Harvard-Yenching Institute
Issue: i25066852
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Huntington Rania
Abstract: "Yihonglou shi cao xu" [Unrepresented Characters], in Chunzaitang zawen wubian, 4:6.25b-26a.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25066855

Journal Title: Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies
Publisher: Harvard-Yenching Institute
Issue: i25066852
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Kurita Kyoko
Abstract: The Content of the Form, p. 184.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25066858

Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i25068549
Date: 10 1, 1998
Author(s): Gross Robert F.
Abstract: Wolfgang Sohlich, "Allegory in the Technological Age: A Case Study of Ibsen's The Wild Duck," Journal of Dramatic Theory and Criticism 6 (Spring 1992): 99-118.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25068554

Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i25073957
Date: 9 1, 1998
Author(s): Randels, George D.
Abstract: The purpose of this paper is to discuss rival views of business and business ethics in terms of narrative. I want to show that we can tell various stories about business, and that our worldview narratives shape our accounts of business. These narratives not only involve description, but contain normative ramifications. We can only act within the world that we perceive. To evaluate competing narratives, I suggest dialectical comparison of the narratives with important values. The second part of the paper discusses five distinct genres of worldview narratives and their implications for business: homo economicus, libertarian, conservative, liberal, and religio-philosophical.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25073962

Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i25074582
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Sneddon Andrew
Abstract: Concerns about advertising take one of two forms. Some people are worried that advertising threatens autonomous choice. Others are worried not about autonomy but about the values spread by advertising as a powerful institution. I suggest that this bifurcation stems from misunderstanding autonomy. When one turns from autonomous choice to autonomy of persons, or what is often glossed as self-rule, then one has reason to think that advertising poses a moral problem of a sort so far unrecognized. I diagnose this problem using Charles Taylor's work on "strong evaluation". This problem turns out to have political ramifications that have been only dimly recognized in business ethics circles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25074586

Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i25075156
Date: 11 1, 2003
Author(s): Arenas Daniel
Abstract: Based on the experience of a course taught by the authors, this paper seeks to show that an adequate use of IT in the teaching of a Business Etchics (BE) course depends on clarifying the assumptions about ethics and the place of the course within a programme. For this purpose it explains how IT can be used to strengthen a view of BE based on dialogue and mutual learning and it encourages the combination between virtual and face-to-face teaching. Finally, the paper examines the relationship between the use of IT, individual learning processes and communities of practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25075168

Journal Title: The Massachusetts Review
Publisher: The Massachusetts Review, Inc.
Issue: i25090461
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Jacobson Joanne
Abstract: Shoshana Felman, "Education and Crisis, or the Vicissitudes of Teaching," American Imago 48 (Spring 1991), p. 65.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25090469

Journal Title: College Literature
Publisher: West Chester University
Issue: i25115452
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Templeton Alice
Abstract: What is the use of writing poems against war if they reenact rather than alter the binaries and brutalities of the war imagination they claim to protest? Why does so much contemporary war poetry only compound war's depleting effect instead of offering us energy for resistance? In The Life of Poetry (1949), Muriel Rukeyser defines poetry as a vital but underused national resource for a culture dominated by war. As a creative transfer of energy, poetry complicates and resists habits of imagination that sustain war. Using Rukeyser's analysis to contrast a representative poem from the volume Poets Against the War (2003) to several poems by Forche, Celan, James Wright, Blake, Yeats, Oppen, and Levertov, this paper discusses ways in which poetry about war and wartime can provide useful, life-giving energy without replicating the very violences it claims to oppose.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25115458

Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i25123273
Date: 8 1, 2004
Author(s): Galavielle Jean-Pierre
Abstract: The myth of an economy where nobody could have a predominant position, has lost its credibility. The presentiment of a high risk of social explosion makes companies undertake tentative moral legitimation. Thus, a new paradigm develops according to which the firm has to care for the satisfaction of public interest if "it wants to try to win forgiveness" for misbehavior towards the decorum rules of the atomicity of competition. Thus, there is a wave of "business ethics industry" building up. However, the stock exchange performances considered as ethical, are not different from others! The market does not seem to be able to say why it might be interesting to invest in stock considered as ethical. Moreover, opinion polls reveal a very significant discrepancy between the characterization of "the responsible company" as defined by itself or by notation agencies and, on the other hand, the hierarchy of criteria according to the answers of polled people. When companies and agencies favor sustainable development and good governance, rejecting child labor and so on, polled people consider that the paramount criterion of ethical conduct is personnel management. The problem is right here. Such is the view of a positively critical economist, situated at the point where macroeconomics meets corporate management.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25123278

Journal Title: Historia Mexicana
Publisher: El Centro de Estudios Históricos de El Colegio de México
Issue: i25138985
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Orensanz Lucrecia
Abstract: La relectura de la historia del siglo XX no reconforta a sus histo- riadores, que la ven como "un caos, si no es que un círculo vicioso, den- tro del que nos movemos desesperadamente, sin encontrar la fórmula adecuada de paz, de estabilidad y de trabajo", Primer..., 1924, p. 17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25138992

Journal Title: Organization Science
Publisher: Institute for Operations Research and the Management Sciences
Issue: i25146196
Date: 8 1, 2008
Author(s): Worline Monica C.
Abstract: On September 11, 2001, the passengers and crew members aboard Flight 93 responded to the hijacking of their airplane by organizing a counterattack against the hijackers. The airplane crashed into an unpopulated field, causing no damage to human lives or national landmarks beyond the lives of those aboard the airplane. We draw on this story of courageous collective action to explore the question of what makes this kind of action possible. We propose that to take courageous collective action, people need three narratives-a personal narrative that helps them understand who they are beyond the immediate situation and manage the intense emotions that accompany duress, a narrative that explains the duress that has been imposed upon them sufficiently to make moral and practical judgments about how to act, and a narrative of collective action-and the resources that make the creation of these narratives feasible. We also consider how the creation of these narratives is relevant to courageous collective action in more common organizational circumstances, and identify how this analysis suggests new insights into our understanding of the core framing tasks of social movements, ways in which social movement actors draw on social infrastructure, the role of discourse and morality in social movements, the formation of collective identity, and resource mobilization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25146198

Journal Title: U.S. Catholic Historian
Publisher: University of Notre Dame Press
Issue: i25154959
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): DeBona Guerric
Abstract: Garrett Green, Theology, Hermeneutics, and Imagination: The Crisis of Interpretation at the End of Modernity (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000), 206.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25154969

Journal Title: U.S. Catholic Historian
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Issue: i25156608
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Losito Giacomo
Abstract: Zambarbieri, Il cattolicesimo tra crisi e rinnovamento, 401.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25156615

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i25157076
Date: 3 1, 2005
Author(s): Calame Claude
Abstract: 1990, 11-35 et 60-72
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25157079

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i25157122
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Martin Denis-Constant
Abstract: Glissant 1990 : 46
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25157129

Journal Title: Arabica
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i25162277
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Achrati Ahmed
Abstract: Reynolds, 2001, p. 247
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25162279

Journal Title: Arabica
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i25162277
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Natij Salah
Abstract: Goethe, cité par Pierre Bertaux, « Goethe », Encyclopédia Universalis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25162281

Journal Title: Archiv für Musikwissenschaft
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i25162377
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Strohm Reinhard
Abstract: Ernst Cassirer, Die Philosophie der Aufklärung, Tübingen, 1932, Kap. 7.II: Die klassizisti- sche Ästhetik und das Problem der Objektivität des Schönen, S. 375
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25162379

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Political Science / Revue canadienne de science politique
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i25165879
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Libesman Heidi
Abstract: The focus of this article is the theory of integration advanced by Alan Cairns in his book, "Citizens Plus: Aboriginal peoples and the Canadian State". Cairns' theory has had a mixed reception since its publication. Like much scholarship and public policy in the Aboriginal rights field, "Citizens Plus" has attracted strong proponents and opponents. At present "Citizens Plus" remains one of the primary competitors vying for influence in guiding the postcolonial reconfiguration of the relationship between Aboriginal peoples, the Canadian state and civil society on terms of justice that may be perceived as legitimate by both Aboriginal and non-Aboriginal peoples. The prime alternative, as conceived by both Cairns and his critics, is the nation-to-nation constitutional vision of the Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples. The author provides a political theoretical reading of "Citizens Plus". She seeks to disclose the normative and conceptual structure of Cairns' argument and to situate Cairns' theory in the context of debates concerning the future of Aboriginal peoples and the constitution of Canada. This reading foregrounds an alternative interpretation of the relationship between "Citizens Plus" and the constitutional vision of the Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples, which makes it possible to see them as complementary rather than opposed constitutional visions. The author also raises broader questions concerning the reasons for continuing the search, at the heart of Cairns' work, for a post-colonial theory and praxis of normative integration in diverse societies, and the conditions of the possibility of such a theory and praxis. Ultimately the author argues that whether one agrees or disagrees with Cairns' prescription, at a minimum "Citizens Plus" should be understood as raising a fundamental question to which multinational constitutional theory must respond. /// Le présent article a pour objet d'examiner la théorie avancée par Alan Cairns dans son ouvrage, "Citizens Plus: Aboriginal Peoples and the Canadian State". Cette théorie est loin de faire l'unanimité; comme beaucoup d'autres ouvrages ou initiatives dans le domaine des droits autochtones, "Citizens Plus" a ses partisans et ses détracteurs. À l'heure actuelle, "Citizens Plus" demeure l'une des principales approches possibles de la redéfinition postcoloniale des relations entre les peuples autochtones et l'État et la société civile canadiens sur le fondement de conditions justes dont la légitimité est susceptible d'être reconnue autant par les peuples autochtones que par les non-autochtones. La vision de relations de nation à nation, telle qu'exprimée par la Commission royale sur les peuples autochtones, est, selon Cairns ainsi que ses détracteurs, la principale alternative à "Citizens Plus". Dans le présent article, l'auteure interprète "Citizens Plus" dans une optique de théorie politique. Elle cherche à faire ressortir la structure normative et conceptuelle de l'argument de Cairns et à situer la théorie de Cairns dans le contexte des débats concernant l'avenir des peuples autochtones et de la constitution canadienne. L'auteure veut ainsi attirer l'attention sur une autre interprétation possible de la relation entre "Citizens Plus" et la vision de la Commission royale sur les peuples autochtones. Selon cette interprétation, il s'agit de visions complémentaires plutôt que contradictoires. L'auteure soulève également des questions plus générales, concernant les raisons de poursuivre la recherche d'une théorie et d'une praxie d'intégration normative au sein de sociétés empreintes de diversité, ainsi que les conditions de la possibilité d'une telle théorie et d'une telle praxie. Cette recherche est, par ailleurs, au cœur de l'œuvre de Cairns. En dernière analyse, l'auteure soutient que, peu importe que l'on souscrive ou non à ce que Cairns propose, "Citizens Plus" soulève, à tout le moins, une question fondamentale à laquelle la théorie constitutionnelle multinationale doit répondre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25165887

Journal Title: The Sixteenth Century Journal
Publisher: Sixteenth Century Journal
Issue: i323394
Date: 7 1, 1991
Author(s): Flynn Maureen
Abstract: In this semiotic analysis of the Spanish auto defe, we begin to understand for the first time the meaning of religious rituals that have appeared completely incomprehensible in traditional accounts. The morning processions of penitents through city streets, the formal denunciations of heretics on public scaffolds, and the final burning at the stake of unrepentant sinners are placed within the context of medieval penitential practices and eschatological beliefs. The ceremony of the auto defe unveiled in time the Judgment Day awaiting all humankind at the end of time. For this reason, the spectacle aroused the interest of spectators all over Christendom, filling them with apprehension of their own final judgment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2542736

Journal Title: The Jewish Quarterly Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i25470124
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Diamond James A.
Abstract: GP 3.47, p. 597.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25470134

Journal Title: Educational Studies in Mathematics
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i25472056
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Ongstad Sigmund
Abstract: The article investigates in the first part critically dyadic and essentialist understanding of signs and utterances in mathematics and mathematics education as opposed to a triadic view. However even Peircean semiotics, giving priority to triadic, dynamic sign may face challenges, such as explaining the sign as a pragmatic act and how signs are related to context. To meet these and other hurdles an explicit communicational, pragmatic and triadic view, found in parts of the works of Bühler, Bakhtin, Habermas, and Halliday, is developed. Two basic principles are combined and established in a theoretical framework. Firstly, whenever uttering, there will exist in any semiotic sign system, dynamic reciprocity and simultaneity between expressing through form, referring to content, and addressing as an act. Secondly, meaning will be created by the dynamics between given and new in utterances and between utterances and contextual genres. The latter principle explains how meaning merge in communication dynamically and create the basis for a discursive understanding of semiosis and hence even learning at large. The second part exemplifies each of the three main aspects and the dynamics of utterance and genre and given and new by excerpts from a textbook in mathematics education. The concept 'positioning', in use for operationalisation, is explained in relation to main principles of the framework. The article ends focusing crucial implications for validation when moving from a dyadic to a triadic understanding of mathematics and mathematics education.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25472067

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25478832
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): Kansteiner Wulf
Abstract: Martin Broszat's "Plea for the Historicization of National Socialism," in Reworking the Past: Hitler, the Holocaust, and the Historians' Debate, ed. Peter Baldwin (Boston: Beacon Press, 1990), 77-87.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25478836

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25478832
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): Wächter Kirsten
Abstract: History and Memory 9, no. 1 & 2 (1997), 113-144.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25478838

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25478832
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): Carbonell Bettina M.
Abstract: Susan Crane's "Memory, Distortion, and History in the Museum," History and Theory, Theme Issue 36 (1997), 44-63.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25478840

Journal Title: The Slavonic and East European Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i25479101
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): Soroka Mykola Iv.
Abstract: Shchodennyk, 2, p. 279 (15 January 1924).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25479104

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i25484065
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Springs Jason A.
Abstract: Crossley 2004: 31-51
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jaarel/lfn087

Journal Title: Irish University Review
Publisher: Irish University Press
Issue: i25484558
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Booker M. Keith
Abstract: O'Brien, At Swim-Two-Birds, p. 314.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25484569

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i25486284
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): McDonald Peter D.
Abstract: The continuing fallout from the theory wars, evident not least in the nostalgic after-theory narrative that is still in vogue, has dissipated critical energy in contemporary literary studies. Rejecting that narrative, this essay calls for a review of the legacy of theory and the polemical oppositions that set it against other scholarly enterprises, like book history. In particular, it suggests that the theoretical interrogation of the category of literature in the past forty years fruitfully intersects with book history's investigation of the material conditions of literary production, opening up new possibilities for literary historiography, while also imposing new demands on it. The essay identifies two traditions of antiessentialist thought (the skeptical and the enchanted), considers the ontology of the printed literary text, and examines the legacies of, among others, Jacques Derrida and Pierre Bourdieu.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25486298

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i25486317
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Elfenbein Andrew
Abstract: Cognitive psychologists studying the reading process have developed a detailed conceptual vocabulary for describing the microprocesses of reading. Modified for the purposes of literary criticism, this vocabulary provides a framework that has been missing from most literary-critical investigations of the history of literate practice. Such concepts as the production of a coherent memory representation, the limitations of working memory span, the relation between online and offline reading processes, the landscape model of comprehension, and the presence of standards of coherence allow for close attention to general patterns in reading and to the ways that individual readers modify them. The interpretation of Victorian responses to the poetry of Robert Browning provides a case study in the adaptation of cognitive models to the history of reading. Such an adaptation can reveal not only reading strategies used by historical readers but also those fostered by the discipline of literary criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25486327

Journal Title: Medical Anthropology Quarterly
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25487848
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Honkasalo Marja-Liisa
Abstract: In medical anthropological research, the question of suffering has been a topic of salient interest mostly from two theoretical viewpoints: those of endurance and of agency. The concept "suffering" derives its origins from two etymological roots, those of suffering-souffrance-sofferanza and of misery-misère-miseria. According to the first approach, that of "endurance" and founded largely on Judeo-Christian theology, suffering is regarded as an existential experience at the borders of human meaning making. The question then is: how to endure, how to suffer? The latter view, that of "agency," follows the Enlightenment, and later the Marxist view on mundane suffering, misery, and the modern question of how to avoid or diminish it. This article follows the lines of the second approach, but my aim is also to try to build a theoretical bridge between the two. I ask whether agency would be understood as a culturally shared and interpreted modes of enduring, and if so, which conceptual definition of agency applies in this context? I theorize the relationship between suffering and agency using Ernesto de Martino's notion la crisi della presenza. In line with Pierre Bourdieu, I think that in people's lives, there may be sufferings in a plural form, as a variety of sufferings. The article is based on a one-year long fieldwork in Finnish North Karelia.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1548-1387.2009.01037.x

Journal Title: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i25511813
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Broadbent Philip
Abstract: Contemporary Berlin novels commonly anchor representations of post-unification Berlin within an ethics of remembering in which the city's mottled topography is frequently portrayed as a historically saturated site. Invariably, this historical focus is supported by an aesthetics in which representing Berlin is concomitant with an ethical obligation to address in some form the city's pasts. It is argued in this paper that through an engaged comparison of Walter Benjamin's theory of critical pedestrianism with Nietzsche's "The Uses and Disadvantages of History for Life," Dutch novelist Cees Nooteboom's novel "All Souls Day" questions the possibility of representing the city as a discursive space in which the past and the present can mutually co-exist. Nooteboom's text offers a singular and unique perspective on the ethical burden the recently unified cities faces in the post-unification era, namely the obligation to remember the division and pre-division German pasts, by questioning whether it is at all possible for the city to fulfill this duty of historical remembering.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25511821

Journal Title: Irish University Review
Publisher: Irish University Press
Issue: i25517119
Date: 7 1, 2000
Author(s): Parker Michael
Abstract: George O'Brien, 'Capturing the Lonely Voice', The Irish Times, 12 May 1995.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25517127

Journal Title: Educational Researcher
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i25592170
Date: 11 1, 2009
Author(s): Barone Tom
Abstract: In commenting on Coulter and Smith (2009), the author explores issues related to the place of the political in education research and in literature, but especially in forms of narrative research that possess both scientific and literary dimensions. More specifically, the author examines four sets of issues related to the researching and writing of forms of narrative composition that exhibit an overtly progressivist orientation. These issues involve (a) the fundamental purposes for which the research is undertaken, (b) the role of opposing tropisms operating through textual design elements that tend to promote or discourage multiple perspectives, (c) ethical issues related to assumed privileges of authorship by the researcher, and (d) the political prerogatives and responsibilities of readers of literary forms of narrative research in education.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25592173

Journal Title: Social Psychology Quarterly
Publisher: American Sociological Association
Issue: i25593909
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Schwartz Barry
Abstract: Burns 1997:34
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25593914

Journal Title: Dance Chronicle
Publisher: Taylor & Francis Group
Issue: i25598220
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Burt Ramsay
Abstract: Mårten Spångberg also used Verdin's video to create his own reinterpretation of Steve Paxton's Goldberg Variations called Powered by Emotion / After Sade (2003).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/01472520903276800

Journal Title: Historia: Zeitschrift für Alte Geschichte
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i25598394
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Doukellis Panagiotis N.
Abstract: St. Panayotakis et al. (eds.), The Ancient Novel and Beyond, Leyde 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25598398

Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25600691
Date: 4 1, 1988
Author(s): Baker John
Abstract: The Letters of John Keats, ed. Hyder Edward Rollins (Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1958) 1: 370.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25600697

Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25600705
Date: 7 1, 1988
Author(s): Hildebrand William H.
Abstract: Hawthorne's account, in The English Notebooks, ed. Randall Stewart (New York: Russell and Russell, 1962)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25600712

Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25600991
Date: 4 1, 1993
Author(s): King Ross
Abstract: Simulations, trans. Paul Foss, et al. (New York: Semiotext[e], 1983) 96-97.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25600995

Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25601150
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): Harding Anthony John
Abstract: Heidegger's Estrangements: Language, Truth, and Poetry (New Haven: Yale UP, 1989) XXV.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25601152

Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25601207
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): Baker, John
Abstract: Agamben on the function of the pronoun in medieval grammatical thought: "Inasmuch as it contains both a particular mode of signification and an indicative act, the pronoun is that part of speech in which the passage from signifying to demonstrating is enacted: pure being, the substantia indeterminata that it signifies and that, as such, is not in itself signifiable or definable, becomes signifiable and determinable through an act of 'indi- cation'" (31/22).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25601213

Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: Laurentian University
Issue: i25605168
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Miller Ann
Abstract: Cet article aborde un aspect du processus d'interprétation de la vie religieuse ou cloîtrée amorcé au sein des communautés religieuses catholiques romaines dans les années '70. On avance que, durant cette période de transition, on a fait l'expérience d'un rejet massif du concept de "cloître" en tant que clôture au sens physique, en soulignant le fait qu'il y avait là plus qu'une simple modification de la pratique communautaire, axé sur une réalité transcendante de caractère utopique qu'on aurait voulu orientée en direction d'une expérience communautaire de caractère profane. En fait, ce type de rejet apparaît comme une transformation du concept de "cloître," ne niant point le fait de la continuité au niveau de l'identité communautaire. Les religieuses catholiques romaines ont eu recours à deux images de pointe: la fiancée éternelle du Christ et le clown, ou bouffon, du monde profane. /// This paper examines one aspect of the interpretive process undertaken by religious communities of North American Roman Catholic sisters in the 1970s, or the redefinition of cloister. It is suggested that during this transitional period, widespread rejection of the concept of cloister as physical enclosure was more than a mere illustrative shift away from a communal paradigm stressing utopian transcendence, and toward a communal paradigm identified as profane. In fact, this rejection signaled a transformation in the concept of cloister that allowed for continuity in communal themes of identity across contrasting paradigms. To effect this transformation, Roman Catholic sisters contrasted two liminal images: the transcendent Bride of Christ, and the profane clown.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25605179

Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i25605554
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Howes David
Abstract: This essay traces the involution of anthropological understanding from the 1950s to the present. It is shown that as the conception of "doing ethnography" changed from sensing patterns to reading texts, and from reading texts to writing culture, so too did the content of anthropological knowledge change from being multi-sensory to being self-centred. The essay also proposes a way of escaping the tunnel-vision of contemporary (post-modern) ethnography — namely, by treating cultures as constituted by a particular interplay of the senses which the ethnographer must simulate before making any attempt to describe or evoke the culture under study. /// Cet article trace l'enchevêtrement qu'a subi l'étude de l'anthropologie depuis les années cinquante à nos jours. L'auteur démontre que le concept de "faire de l'ethnographie" a changé radicalement — de la perception sensorielle à la lecture des textes et de cette lecture à l'acte d'écrire une culture. Également, le contenu des connaissances anthropologiques a subi un changement du multi-sensoriel à l'égocentrique. L'article propose comment s'éloigner du champ de vue plutôt étroit de l'ethnographie contemporaine (dite post-moderne) en suggérant que les ethnographes traitent les cultures telles que constituées par l'action réciproque particulière des sens qui doivent être simulés avant que les ethnographes puissent essayer de décrire ou d'évoquer la culture en question.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25605558

Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i25606186
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Ulin Robert C.
Abstract: This paper argues against the all too common dichotomy of globalization into a process of homogenization or a process of significant diversification. The paper seeks to bridge this dichotomy by arguing for the relative autonomy of culture with respect to global political-economy, for the plurality of voices that constitute ongoing social interaction, and for a vision of actors operating in fields of power that position human agents differentially. The essay makes use of world systems theory to illustrate the merits and problems of global analysis while focussing on the ethnographic examples of French and Michigan wine growers. /// L'article s'inscrit en faux contre la vision dichotomique et récurrente de la mondialisation selon laquelle il s'agit soit d'un processus d'homogénéisation, soit d'un profond processus de diversification. L'article cherche à surmonter cette dichotomie en soutenant l'existence d'une autonomie relative des cultures face à l'économie politique mondiale, d'une pluralité des voix qui constituent les interactions sociales en cours et d'une vision qui situe les acteurs au sein de cercles de pouvoir qui leur imposent des positions différentielles. L'essai se sert de la théorie des systèmes-monde pour illustrer le bien-fondé et les défauts des analyses de niveau mondial. Il met l'accent sur des exemples ethnographiques de viticulteurs de la France et du Michigan.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25606191

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i25609163
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Sieg Christian
Abstract: Siegfried Kracauer, Schriften, ed. Karsten Witte, vol. 1 (Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp, 1971), 7-101.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1215/0094033X-2009-019

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i25610177
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Udoh Fabian E.
Abstract: Luke 12:42-44
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25610185

Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i25614148
Date: 8 1, 2009
Author(s): Juárez Vania Galindo
Abstract: afp, 17 de septiembre de 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25614159

Journal Title: Estudios de Asia y Africa
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i25614457
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Secci M. Cristina
Abstract: Podna resultar estimulante la lectura del nümero tematico de Archivum Historicum Societatis Iesu dedicado a "The Jesuits and cultural intermediacy in the early modern world", al cuidado de Diogo Ramada Curto, 74, 2005, 147.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25614461

Journal Title: Historical Archaeology
Publisher: Society for Historical Archaeology
Issue: i25616488
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): McCarthy John P.
Abstract: Much archaeological scholarship on consumption has approached its subject matter as the means to an end—e.g., as a way of studying socioeconomic status—rather than as a proper object of study in its own right. The "consumer choice" school, and, more recently, advocates of consumer behavior studies, have supported approaches that emphasize quantitative methods, at the same time downplaying the "qualitative" or symbolic aspects of consumption. A considerable body of literature on the symbolic aspects of consumption exists both in historical archaeology and other fields. The intention of this essay is to draw together this recent literature on consumption and combine it into a single approach that emphasizes shopping as the meaningful action at the very heart of consumption. With the emphasis on agency, this approach presents shopping as that crucial moment of transformation where identity, intention, and symbol combine in the decision to purchase, to own, an object.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25616493

Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i25650854
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Roberts John
Abstract: Janet A. Kaplan, 'Flirtations with Evidence', Art in America, October 2004, pp. 134-8, 169-70.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25650861

Journal Title: Arabica
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i25651682
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Zine Mohammed Chaouki
Abstract: Shokoufeh Taghi, The Two Wings of Wisdom. Mysticism and Philosophy in the Risalat ut- tair of Ibn Sind, Uppsala, Uppsala University Library («Studia Iranica Upsaliensia», 4), 2000.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25651686

Journal Title: The New England Quarterly
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: i25652049
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): RONDA BRUCE
Abstract: Sanborn to Harris, 3 March 1888, "Letters to William Torrey Harris, [1864]- 1909," CFPL
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25652051

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i25652834
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Bird Gregory
Abstract: Natanson (1973)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25652837

Journal Title: International Journal for Philosophy of Religion
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i25652842
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Lippitt John
Abstract: Russell (2005, p. 109).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25652844

Journal Title: New Hibernia Review / Iris Éireannach Nua
Publisher: Center for Irish Studies at the University of St. Thomas
Issue: i25660935
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Markus Radvan
Abstract: Louis Armand, Literate Technologies (Prague: Litteraria Pragensia 2006), p. 91.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25660949

Journal Title: Estudios Atacameños
Publisher: Universidad Católica del Norte, Instituto de Investigaciones Arqueológicas y Museo
Issue: i25674726
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): S. Jorge Iván Vergara del
Abstract: Honneth (1990)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25674729

Journal Title: European Review of Latin American and Caribbean Studies / Revista Europea de Estudios Latinoamericanos y del Caribe
Publisher: Centro de Estudios y Documentación Latinoamericanos (CEDLA)
Issue: i25675510
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Velho Otávio
Abstract: Eric Lethbridge. An earlier version of this article was pub- lished in Religiao e Sociedade, Vol. 14, no. 1, 1987.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25675513

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i25676962
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Cisternas Cristián
Abstract: Vidal 55
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25676967

Journal Title: The Academy of Management Journal
Publisher: Academy of Management
Issue: i302938
Date: 12 1, 1958
Author(s): Wittgenstein John L.
Abstract: Calas & Smircich, 1991: 570-571 570
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/256821

Journal Title: Die Welt des Orients
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i25683717
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Richter Hans-Friedemann
Abstract: Es ist also zu uberlegen, ob nicht auch an unserer Stelle die Ubersetzung mit “War- nung" geniigt. leqayin bedeutet dann “zugunsten Kains" (wie le in Jes 5,4 u.6.) und nicht in lokalem Sinne “an Kain daran".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25683725

Journal Title: Nouvelles Études Francophones
Publisher: Conseil International d'Études Francophones
Issue: i25702097
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Hoarau Stéphane
Abstract: "Vazaha: etranger" (glossaire 254).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25702106

Journal Title: Nouvelles Études Francophones
Publisher: Conseil International d'Études Francophones
Issue: i25702177
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Lorre Christine
Abstract: On peut noter que Jean-Francois Billeter etablit une distinction generale entre les deux systemes de pensee, grecque et chinoise, qui recoupe, dans ses grandes lignes, celle exposee par Jullien: "On peut apercevoir [...], me semble-t-il, une difference fondamen- tale entre la pensee grecque et la tradition intellectuelle qui en est issue d'une part, et l'ensemble (ou presque) de la pensee chinoise de l'autre. Notre tradition intellectuelle a eu tendance a privilegier la conscience thetique et la conscience reflechie, qui font toutes deux abstraction du mouvement, du changement, des transformations dans lesquels nous sommes continuellement pris dans les faits. [...] La philosophie a par consequent eu dans notre civilisation une vocation "theorique," contemplative. La pensee chinoise me parait avoir ete, dans l'ensemble, beaucoup plus fidele aux donnees de lexperience commune, au rapport spontane que nous entretenons avec nous-memes et avec les choses dans le cours de nos activites. Elle a donne la priorite aux formes que notre vie consciente prend lorsque nous nous mouvons, que nous agissons, etc., et a celles que la realite a pour nous dans ces moments-la" ("Comment lire Wang Fuzhi?" 111-12).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25702181

Journal Title: Nouvelles Études Francophones
Publisher: Conseil International d'Études Francophones
Issue: i25702217
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Touré Paul N.
Abstract: Faustin releve dans cette reflexion: "Nous sommes au seuil dune nouvelle vie, il faudrait tout recommencer: l'histoire, la geographie, l'fitat, les moeurs, pourquoi pas la maniere de concevoir nos enfants?" (134).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25702235

Journal Title: Business Ethics Quarterly
Publisher: Philosophy Documentation Center
Issue: i25702390
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Nielsen Richard P.
Abstract: In this updated and revised version of his 2008 Society for Business Ethics presidential address, Richard Nielsen documents the characteristics and extent of the 2007–2009 economic crisis and analyzes how the ethics issues of the economic crisis are structurally related to a relatively new form of capitalism, high-leverage finance capitalism. Four types of high-leverage finance capitalism are considered: hedge funds; private equity-leveraged buyouts; high-leverage, subprime mortgage banking; and high-leverage banking. The structurally related problems with the four types of high-leverage finance capitalism converged in something of a perfect economic storm. Explanations for the crisis are offered in the context of the type of the high-leverage finance capitalism system that permitted and facilitated the economic crisis. Ethics issues and potential reforms are considered that may be able to mitigate the destructive effects of what Schumpeter referred to as the "creative destructive" effects of evolutionary forms of capitalism while realizing the Aristotelian economic ideal of creating wealth in such a way as to make us better people and the world a better place.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25702400

Journal Title: Archiv für Musikwissenschaft
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i25702869
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): UTZ CHRISTIAN
Abstract: Übersichtsdarstellungen zu diesen Fragen geben u. a. die Beiträge Gunter Kreutz, Melodiewahr- nehmung: Funktionen von Arbeitsgeddähtnis und Aufinerksamkeit und Christoph Louven, Reiz- und wissensgeleitete harmonische Informationsverarbeitung, in: Musikpsychologie (Handbuch der syste- matischen Musikwissenschaft, 3), hg. von Helga de la Motte Haber und Gunther Rötter, Laaber 2005, S. 185-207 bzw. 208-230.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25702872

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i25703051
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Zapata Florencia
Abstract: Greenwood, 1993: 115
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703063

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i25703106
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Iranzo Teresa
Abstract: Julien Benda, The Betrayal of the Intellectuals (Boston: Beacon, 1958).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703113

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i25703106
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Bofill Mireia
Abstract: Bajo la direccion de Jacques Semelin, Claire Andrieu y Sarah Gensburger, en el marco del Centre d'- histoire des Sciences Po, Paris, en diciembre de 2006.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703115

Journal Title: Hispanic Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i25703529
Date: 7 1, 2010
Author(s): de Looze Laurence
Abstract: Vinsauf's Poetria Nova.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703531

Journal Title: Journal of Qur'anic Studies
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Issue: i25728283
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): ‮لوسون‬ ‮تود‬
Abstract: This article highlights two features of Qur'anic style and content: duality/opposition and typological figuration, which can be seen as providing a continuous and consistent 'narrative stream' through the Qur'an. It is of some interest that both of these features have been singled out as distinctive of apocalypse as a genre in the study of numerous religious and cultural traditions. As debate on whether or not the Qur'an is a bona fide example of apocalyptic literature quietly continues, the interplay of conceptual and substantive oppositions and dualities is discussed in order to highlight the importance of this prominent feature to both the form and contents of the Book. It is suggested that its function is profoundly related to the typological figuration indispensable to the Qur'anic depiction of, for example, the character of the prophets and therefore prophethood. Whether or not this represents a genuine instance of apocalyptic literature, it nonetheless remains that the prominence of the motif renders the Qur'an susceptible of a reading expressive of something called an apocalyptic imagination. It is hoped that this article succeeds in demonstrating that in fact these apparently familiar subjects are stimulated to new life by considering them as defining, interlocking, structural elements of a distinctive Islamic apocalypse. ‮تبرز هذه الدراسة خاصيتين لأسلوب القرآن ومادته: الثنائية/التقابل وتصنيف النماذج مما قد ينظر إليه على أنه يمثل تيارا مستمرا ثابتا في القرآن. ومن اللافت للنظر أنه قد جرى الترکيز على هاتين الخاصيتين على أنهما يختصان بالحديث عن أحوال الآخرة في کثير من الأديان والتقاليد الثقافية. وفي هذا المقال سندرس التفاعل بين الثنائية والتقابل لکي نبرز الأهمية الأساسية لهذه الخاصية بالنسبة لشکل القرآن ومحتواه. فنحن نرى أن وظيفتها تمت بقوة إلى ظاهرة تصنيف الأنواع في تصوير القرآن لشخصيات الأنبياء ثم النبوة نفسها. والأمل أن ينجح هذا المقال في التدليل على أن هذه الموضوعات المألوفة يمکن رؤيتها على أنها نمط إسلامي فريد في الحديث عن الأخرويات.‬
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25728287

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i25758995
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Salazar Philippe-Joseph
Abstract: L'intrigue raciale. Essai de critique anthropologique, Paris, Meridiens Klincksieck, 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25758999

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i25759142
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Lassave Pierre
Abstract: F. La Cecla, Le malentendu (II malentenso, 1997), trad. A. Sauzeau, preface de M. Auge, Paris, Balland, « Voix et Regards », 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25759149

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i25759932
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Gómez Roberto Suazo
Abstract: Droguett, Supay 102
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25759940

Journal Title: The Polish Review
Publisher: Polish Institute of Arts and Sciences of America
Issue: i25778422
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): HAŁAS ELŻBIETA
Abstract: F. Znaniecki, Cultural Sciences. Their Origin and Development (University of Illinois Press, Urbana 1952), pp. 281-290.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25778425

Journal Title: Samuel Beckett Today / Aujourd'hui
Publisher: Rodopi
Issue: i25781274
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Abbott H. Porter
Abstract: Beckett's aggressiveness in crossing generic lines paradoxically accompanied a keen sensitivity to genre and medium differences that often constrained his writing. My argument here is that this combination of abandon and respect was founded in a recognition not just of formal differences in art but of differences in the ways we think. In the wake of groundbreaking work by Jerry Fodor and Howard Gardner, there has been a great deal of research advancing (and qualifying) a modular conception of how the mind evolved and how it continues to work in modern humans. This work puts new light on both the formal differences between mimesis and diegesis, and on Beckett's approach to these two different ways of rendering narrative. Particularly it makes clear why Beckett should have so radically subordinated character and action to staged diegesis in his later work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25781285

Journal Title: Samuel Beckett Today / Aujourd'hui
Publisher: Rodopi
Issue: i25781450
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Luscher-Morata Diane
Abstract: Cet article se propose d'examiner la manière dont la souffrance, si omniprésente dans le roman Watt, est articulée par le protagoniste. Celui-ci, nommé Watt, apparaît d'abord comme un être passif, mutique; ce n'est qu'au terme d'une série d'expériences douloureuses qu'il commence à mettre en mot une souffrance devenue intolérable. Ce sont les conditions d'émergence de cette parole et la nature de ce récit que nous voulons examiner ici. Les souffrances du protagoniste semblent se situer au carrefour d'une constellation d'expériences à la fois individuelles, singulières et collectives, ou génériques.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25781487

Journal Title: Samuel Beckett Today / Aujourd'hui
Publisher: Rodopi
Issue: i25781496
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Lüscher-Morata Diane
Abstract: This article reflects on the question of the disappearance of the individual subject of experience in Beckett's writing, and its gradual replacement by an anonymous subject. After The Unnamable, the voice becomes increasingly ambiguous or plural. It can no longer be ascribed to any distinct individual. In the light of Paul Ricœur's analysis of narrative identity, I intend to show how Beckett's work gradually goes, through the notion of alterity, beyond the problematic of subjectivity. By suspending the question who, the Beckettian text appears to be more and more organized by a missing presence, and moves toward a gradual reinforcement of the notion of past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25781521

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i25782894
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Ginzburg Carlo
Abstract: Carlo Ginzburg, introduction a Marc Bloch, / re taumaturghi. Studi sul carattere sovrannaturale attribuito alia potenza dei re particolarmente in Francia e in Inghilterra, Turin, Einaudi, 1973, en particulier, p. xiv-xv.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25782896

Journal Title: Japan Review
Publisher: International Research Center for Japanese Studies
Issue: i25790882
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): MURAKAMI Yasusuke
Abstract: Kennan, George (1951): American Diplomacy 1900-1950. University of Chicago Press, Chicago, Chap.6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25790885

Journal Title: Law and Contemporary Problems
Publisher: Duke University School of Law
Issue: i25800662
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Deeb Hadi Nicholas
Abstract: Paul V. Kroskrity, Arizona Tewa Kiva Speech as a Manifestation of a Dominant Language Ideology, in LANGUAGE IDEOLOGIES, supra note 16, at 117.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25800672

Journal Title: Oral History
Publisher: Oral History Society
Issue: i25802206
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Crawford Heather K.
Abstract: This paper demonstrates how, in a southern Irish setting, differences based on the historic struggles between Protestantism and Catholicism are perpetuated and communicated. It outlines the background and identifies modes of speech indicating unexamined assumptions grounded in the collective memory of the past. It analyses the ways in which the irruption into everyday communication of this emotional legacy reproduce difference, and examines Protestant perceptions that Catholics see them as incapable of possessing an authentic national identity. It shows how the process results in Protestant exclusion from the imagined nation and the category of 'Irishness'.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25802215

Journal Title: Revista CIDOB d'Afers Internacionals
Publisher: CIDOB
Issue: i25822772
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Ramírez-Orozco Mario
Abstract: Ortiz, 1978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25822788

Journal Title: JuristenZeitung
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i25835992
Date: 7 1, 2011
Author(s): Sorge Christoph
Abstract: S. oben IV. 4.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1628/002268811796366870

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Ethnologie
Publisher: Dietrich Reimer Verlag
Issue: i25842884
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Scheuch Erwin K.
Abstract: Leggewie 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25842888

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Ethnologie
Publisher: Dietrich Reimer Verlag
Issue: i25842972
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Duelke Britta
Abstract: Fuftnote 18
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25842978

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: American Political Science Association
Issue: i344578
Date: 6 1, 1980
Author(s): Zonabend W. James
Abstract: Nora 1984, xxix xxix
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2585394

Journal Title: The Economic History Review
Publisher: Titus Wilson and Son Ltd.
Issue: i324319
Date: 8 1, 1981
Author(s): Vico François
Abstract: Stern, ed. The varieties of history, p. 32 32
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2596249

Journal Title: International Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Butterworth Publishers
Issue: i324420
Date: 9 1, 1989
Author(s): George Jim
Abstract: Recent debates in International Relations have seen some of the characteristic dichotomies of the discipline under severe and sophisticated challenge. The proposition, for example, that the study of International Relations, is somehow "independent" of mainstream debates on theory and practice in the social sciences is now widely rejected. The disciplines change in attitude on this issue owes much, in the 1980s, to the influences of an as yet small group of scholars who have infused the "third debate" in International Relations with an appreciation for previously "alien" approaches to knowledge and society, drawn from interdisciplinary sources, which repudiate (meta) theoretical dualism in all its forms. Utilizing the sponge term "postpositivism" Yosef Lapid has concentrated on an important aspect of the "third debate," one which has seen positivist based perspectives repudiated in favor of critical perspectives derived, primarily, from debates on the philosophy of science. This paper takes a broader view of the "third debate" in focusing on some of the broader patterns of dissent in social theory that are now evident in its literature. It argues that for all the differences associated with the new critical social theory approaches, theirs is critique with common purpose. Its purpose: to help us understand more about contemporary global life by opening up for questioning dimensions of inquiry which have been previously closed off and supressed; by listening closely to voices previously unheard; by examining "realities" excluded from consideration under a traditional (realist) regime of unity and singularity. Its purpose, reiterated: the search for "thinking space" within an International Relations discipline produced by and articulated through Western modernist discourse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2600460

Journal Title: International Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Butterworth Publishers
Issue: i324417
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Kiser Edgar
Abstract: This paper examines the linkages among the ideological, political, and economic dimensions of the world-system by looking at changes in the publication of two types of utopian novels in the United States. We argue that positive and negative visions of the future (eutopian and dystopian literature, respectively) can be treated as aspects of the ideological dimension of the world-system. As part of such an interrelated system, the volume of utopias should change in response to periods of crisis and stability in the political, economic, and cultural dimensions of the system. A time-series analysis indicates that both types of utopian literature are affected by changing conditions of the world-system. On the basis of these findings, we conclude that the world-system perspective represents a promising approach for the study of ideological change.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2600591

Journal Title: International Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Butterworth Scientific
Issue: i324410
Date: 3 1, 1987
Author(s): Walker R. B. J.
Abstract: Much recent commentary on the theory of international politics has focused on the analysis of change and the continuing vitality of political realism. This paper argues that the philosophical dilemmas posed by the concern with change and by the claim to political realism are intimately related. The argument is pursued in the context of contrasting traditions of political realism, of the antithesis between structuralism and historicism in contemporary social and political theory, and of recent tendencies and controversies in the literature on neorealist theories of international politics. The paper concludes that political realism ought to be understood less as a coherent theoretical position in its own right than as the site of a great many interesting claims and metaphysical disputes. As there is no single tradition of political realism, but rather a knot of historically constituted tensions and contradictions, these tensions and contradictions might be reconstituted in a more critical and creative manner. This involves an examination of the way the core categories of international political theory depend upon a particular formulation of the relationship between identity and difference-a formulation which must be refused.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2600660

Journal Title: Journal of Contemporary History
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i211609
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Smith Michael G.
Abstract: Using the case study of an infamous murder scandal, this article uncovers some of the more complex relations and misleading perceptions about the Bolshevik and Musavat parties in Baku, Azerbaijan, during the Russian Revolution and civil war. It explores the power of rumour-making to configure and emplot their competing narratives of the revolution: informed either by the imperatives for social polarization and all-Russian socialism, or by the imperatives for class co-operation and Azerbaijani national socialism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/261224

Journal Title: Belfagor
Publisher: Casa Editrice Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i26144100
Date: 5 31, 1985
Author(s): Cambiano Giuseppe
Abstract: Polit. 260 de.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26145414

Journal Title: Theologische Rundschau
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i26152681
Date: 11 1, 2004
Author(s): Wiggermann Karl-Friedrich
Abstract: Abschiedliches Sein. Theologische und poetische Aspekte, ZThK 101 (2004) 97-115.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26153657

Journal Title: Theologische Rundschau
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i26152689
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Körtner Ulrich H. J.
Abstract: J. Werbick, Der Pluralismus der pluralistischen Religionstheologie. Eine Anfrage, in: R Schwager (Hg.), Christus allein? Der Streit um die pluralistische Religionstheolo- gie (QD 160), Freiburg/Basel/Wien 1996,140-157, hier 153 ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26153715

Journal Title: Environmental Philosophy
Publisher: Philosophy Documentation Center
Issue: e26167879
Date: 4 1, 2004
Author(s): Cameron W. S. K.
Abstract: Heidegger's characterization of Dasein as Being-in-the-world suggests a natural relation to environmental philosophy. Among environmentalists, however, closer inspection must raise alarm, both since Heidegger's approach is in some senses inescapably anthropocentric and since Dasein discovers its environment through its usability, serviceability, and accessibility. Yet Heidegger does not simply adopt a traditionally modern, instrumental view. The conditions under which the environment appears imply neither that the environment consists only of tools, nor that what is true of the parts is also true of the whole, nor that an orientation to use—where appropriate—precludes any other orientation. Heidegger's anthropocentric commitments thus do not rule out the possibility of a non-instrumental perspective on the natural world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26167884

Journal Title: Environmental Philosophy
Publisher: Philosophy Documentation Center
Issue: e26167934
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Scharper Stephen B.
Abstract: See See Richard Peet and Micahel Watts, eds. Liberation Ecologies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26167941

Journal Title: Recherches de théologie et philosophie médiévales
Publisher: PEETERS
Issue: i26172285
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Sère Bénédicte
Abstract: P. RlCŒUR, Soi-même comme un autre, Paris 1990, p. 43: «Le concept de personne serait un concept primitif, dans la mesure où on ne saurait remonter au-delà de lui».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26172290

Journal Title: Revista Española de Derecho Internacional
Publisher: ASOCIACIÓN ESPAÑOLA DE PROFESORES DE DERECHO INTERNACIONAL Y RELACIONES INTERNACIONALES
Issue: e26177211
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): García Picazo Paloma
Abstract: Este trabajo está dedicado a todos los que, como Maximilian M. Kolbe (1894-1941), son capaces e dar su vida por otros, sin pedir nada a cambio, sin furia y sin rencor, tan sólo porque su idea de Dios omprende a la humanidad. Kolbe murió en un «búnker de inanición» del campo de exterminio de uschwitz. Entregó voluntariamente su vida a cambio de la de otro prisionero que era padre de familia. l suplicio del hambre (inanición absoluta) duró catorce días, en los que fallecieron seis condenados; uego, una inyección letal liquidó a los tres moribundos restantes, que «tardaban» demasiado. Así acabó olbe. La pena se dictó como castigo colectivo por la fuga de otro preso del bloque 14. Fischer, U., Maximilian Kolbe, Viena, Sal Terrae-Maria Roggendorf, 1975.En Auschwitz se inyectaba gasolina directamente n el corazón.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26177217

Journal Title: Recherches de théologie ancienne et médiévale
Publisher: ABBAYE DU MONT CÉSAR
Issue: i26188535
Date: 12 1, 1979
Author(s): Smalley B.
Abstract: G. Olsen, The Idea of the «Ecclesia Primitiva» in the Writings of the Twelflh-Cenlury Canonists, in Traditio 25 (1969) 61-86; B. Smalley, Ecclesiastical Attitudes to Novelty c. 1100-c. 1250, in Studies in Church History, op. cit., η. 32, 113-133.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26188539

Journal Title: Recherches de théologie ancienne et médiévale
Publisher: ABBAYE DU MONT CÉSAR
Issue: i26189080
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Laird Martin S.
Abstract: Conf. 10,11 (p. 138).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26189087

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: e26194540
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Bulle Sylvaine
Abstract: This article takes another look at the relationship between the city dwellers of Shu’faat and their environment, which allows it to characterise the importance of proximity. These refugee city dwellers, committed to the fundamental principles of national resistance, the struggle for the right to return and membership in the Palestinian community, are nevertheless driven by relationships expressing their roots and attachment s that place a value on proximity and private property.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26194547

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: Belin
Issue: e26196595
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Martial Agnès
Abstract: According to recent analyses, we are said to be witnessing in the West a « naturalisation » of filiation. The present article challenges this hypothesis, based on anthropological and historical analyses of old “parallel” kinships and the new forms of family configurations. It recalls the longstanding reference to nature in the representations and uses of kinship and the existence of a metaphorical and symbolic world characterised both in the past and today by the plurality of meanings given to kinship relations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26196604

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: e26196983
Date: 1 1, 2017
Author(s): DE FREITAS DA SILVA CLAUDINEI APARECIDO
Abstract: From the perspective of Gabriel Marcel’s juvenile writings, most notably Fragments Philosophiques(1909-1914) andJournal Métaphysique(1914-1923), this study discuss the first theoretical statute of the experience of God. This reflexive movement, strictly speaking, phenomenological-existential is based (as background) on the critique of absolute knowledge (modern idealism and scientism) which, according to Marcel, is an unavoidable contradiction: at the same time, it affirms the being, it denies the being. What draws attention is the fact that such explanatory model is transposed and, therefore, applied using the classical formulation of the so-called problem of the existence of God, of which theodicy has one of the most eloquent and emblematic metaphysical discourses. For the young French thinker, God cannot be verified or justified as an ontological proof: God is the Inverifiable Absolute, since it has to be experienced in the act of faith, in the expression of love and grace.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26197005

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: Belin
Issue: e26197435
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Figari Arnaud
Abstract: Proceeding from an ethnographical study of Cerro Alegre in Valparaiso (Chile), and in the light of the recent registration of this neighbourhood as a World Heritage Site in virtue of its illustrious xix thcentury, the author examines the presence and imprint at the heart of social relations of an underground memory of the Pinochet dictatorship from 1973 to 1990. The paper highlights how becoming a World Heritage Site can trigger and exacerbate conflicts linked to the dictatorship period and which, re-emerging from the social underground to which they had been confined, are played out again on the neighbourhood council.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26197439

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: Belin
Issue: e26197435
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Basset Karine-Larissa
Abstract: This paper deals with the manner of negotiating the relation to its colonial past of France in the Maghreb, concentrating on a key episode in the national historical account, the battle held to have taken place at Poitiers in 732. The creation, near Châtellerault, of a memorial site for that battle, and the annual commemoration which takes place there, constitute the substance of this paper, unfolding in three phases: firstly, an archeology of the genesis of the “Site of 732” situated in the context of the years from 1960 to 1970; secondly, an analysis of the contents of the site as seen through the typology of the discourses constructing the museum project; finally, clearly setting out the social issues involved in memorialisation, through observation and using the survey carried out on visitors to the site.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26197441

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26199296
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Depraz Nathalie
Abstract: J. Derrida, o.e.., 1962.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26199304

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26201706
Date: 9 1, 1998
Author(s): Noiriel Gérard
Abstract: C'est en vertu de cette logique que Ph. Raynaud - ignorant délibérément toutes les pages que j'ai consacrées à l'explicitation de ma problématique - peut présenter mes recherches empiriques sur l'histoire du droit d'asile comme une critique «idéologique» de la «démocratie», inspirée par la philosophie de Foucault (péché capital pour les tenants du libéralisme); voir Ph. Raynaud, «Heurs et malheurs du citoyen», Le Débat, 75, mai-août 1993, pp. 124-125. Pour une discussion plus approfondie sur ce point, voir la préface de mon livre, G. Noiriel, Réfugiés et sans-papiers. La République face au droit d'asile, Paris, Hachette-Pluriel, 1998 (rééd. en poche de la Tyrannie du national. Le droit d'asile en Europe (1793-1993), Paris, Calmann-Lévy, 1991).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26201716

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26201705
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Desrosières Alain
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Temps et Récit, Paris, Éd. du Seuil, 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26201769

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202379
Date: 3 1, 1999
Author(s): Mauger Gérard
Abstract: Dans cette perspective, toute pratique de lecture peut être décrite comme un mouvement en trois temps : «avant lire »/«lire »/«après lire». Des «intérêts à la lecture » qui trouvent leur origine dans la situation du lecteur - « avant lire » - incitent à un « faire » - « lire » - qui porte à conséquences, immédiates ou différées - «après lire» - et qui consolident en retour les «intérêts à la lecture ». L'accent mis classiquement sur la seconde phase (« lire ») - qui est aussi la plus difficilement accessible à l'enquête - est alors déplacé sur les deux autres.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202389

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202500
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Linhardt Dominique
Abstract: John Best, « But Seriously Folks : The Limitations of the Strict Constructionist Interpretation of Social Sciences », ibid., pp. 109-127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202506

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202740
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Ponsard Nathalie
Abstract: Dans mon travail, j'ai distingué les fonctions utilitaires (ordinaires et extraordinaires) et les fonctions de divertissement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202747

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202740
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Vidal Laurent
Abstract: C. Dauphin, A. Farge (éd.), Séduction et sociétés: approches historiques, Paris, EHESS-Seuil, 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202748

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202767
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Offenstadt Nicolas
Abstract: Voir le texte de l'article : « Uses and Abuses of Historical Analogies : Not Munich but Greece », Annals of International Studies, Genève, 1970, pp. 224-232.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202776

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202872
Date: 3 1, 2004
Author(s): Vidal Laurent
Abstract: Benedict Anderson, Imagined Communities, London, Verso, 1991.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202880

Journal Title: Espace géographique (English Edition)
Publisher: BELIN
Issue: e26213697
Date: 3 1, 2014
Author(s): Debarbieux Bernard
Abstract: La littérature académique de langue française fait un usage très abondant des notions d’ancrage et d’enracinement quand elle traite de l’habiter et des pratiques résidentielles. Si l’origine métaphorique de ces notions est parfois rappelée, sinon exploitée, par les auteurs qui y ont recours, elle est souvent passée sous silence. Cet article propose de raviver la dimension métaphorique de ces notions, en les complétant de deux autres – mouillage et amarrage – dans une double intention: d’une part, en montrant qu’en les prenant au sérieux, il est possible de leur faire désigner différents types de rapport aux lieux qui exploitent directement les images sous-jacentes; d’autre part, en rappelant que ces images participent d’une poétique du savoir qui distille des effets de vérité dont les motivations sont à rechercher dans les options épistémologiques majeures adoptées.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26213710

Journal Title: History of Political Thought
Publisher: Imprint Academic
Issue: i26215872
Date: 10 1, 1995
Author(s): Rengger N.J.
Abstract: Cited in Maurice Cranston, John Locke: A Biography (Oxford, 1985), p. 244.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26215878

Journal Title: History of Political Thought
Publisher: Imprint Academic
Issue: i26219815
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Swaine Lucas A.
Abstract: Sorel, Montesquieu, p. 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26219821

Journal Title: History of Political Thought
Publisher: Imprint Academic
Issue: i26219891
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Chowers Eyal
Abstract: Zygmunt Bauman, Liquid Modernity (Cambridge, 2000), p. 178. Agnes Heller makes a similar point in her 'Where are We at Home?', pp. 17-18.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26219896

Journal Title: Lares
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: e26233631
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): Riccardo Gaetano
Abstract: Cfr. Bergson, op. cit., p. 58.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26233634

Journal Title: Espace géographique
Publisher: Belin
Issue: e26236445
Date: 3 1, 2014
Author(s): Debarbieux Bernard
Abstract: Francophone academic literature makes abundant use of the notions of anchoring and rootedness when dealing with dwelling and residential practices. Though the metaphoric origin of these notions can be evoked, and even exploited by the authors, it is generally glossed over. This article seeks to revive the metaphorical dimension of these terms by adding two others – mooring and docking. Our goal is twofold. First, we demonstrate that by taking the terms seriously, it is possible to have them designate different types of of relationships to place, which directly use underlying images. Second, we discuss how these images participate in the poetics of knowledge that distills the effects of truth, whose motivations must be sought out in the major epistemological options that have been adopted.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26236458

Journal Title: Nueva Revista de Filología Hispánica
Publisher: CENTRO DE ESTUDIOS LINGÜÍSTICOS Y LITERARIOS EL COLEGIO DE MÉXICO
Issue: e26254863
Date: 12 1, 2017
Author(s): Callejas Sulemi Bermúdez
Abstract: This paper analyses the semantic and poetic variations present in two of the texts which Julio Torri devotes to Brazilian themes: "Saudade" and "Machado de Assis". By creating metaphors and introducing words in Portuguese, this member of the Mexican Ateneo extends the meanings of the phrases he uses. He is able to do so since both these devices serve as figures of speech, transforming the meaning of the phrases and opening them up to new interpretations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26254870

Journal Title: Lettere Italiane
Publisher: LEO S. OLSCHKI
Issue: i26263326
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Ossola Carlo
Abstract: J. L. Borges, The unending Rose, poesia eponima della raccolta: La Rosa pro- funda, Buenos Aires, Emecé Editores 1975; poi in Obra poètica, 1923-1977, Buenos Aires-Madrid, Alianza Très / Emecé 1983 (da cui citiamo). La citazione alla p. 465. La « rosa profonda » è veramente « fior silenciosa », traccia d'inesprimibile che attraversa e sigilla tutta la poesia di Borges, dalla « inattingibile rosa » che apre la prima raccolta Fervor de Buenos Aires, del 1923 all'« insensata rosa », negli anni ultimi, di Efialtes. Ma come non riportare qui - almeno - quella prima « rosa de la rosas »?: « La rosa, / la inmarcesible rosa que no canto, / la que es peso y fragancia, / la del negro jardin en la alta noche, / la de cualquier jardin y cualquier tarde, / la rosa que resurge de la tenue / ceniza por el arte de la alquimia, / la rosa de los persas y de Ariosto, / la que siempre està sola, / la que siempre es la rosa de las rosas, / la joven fior platonica, / la ardiente y ciega rosa que no canto, / la rosa inalcanzable » (J. L. Borges, La rosa, da Fervor de Buenos Aires; ora in Obra poètica cit., p. 38). Come non ricordare la - così prossima a la « memoria... / de un distico de Angelus Silesius » - «invisibile rosa» di Una rosa y Milton: «De las generaciones de las rosas / Que en el fondo del riempo se han perdido / Quiero que una se salve del olvido, / Una sin marca ο signo entre las cosas / Que fueron. El destino me depara / Este don de nombrar por vez primera / Esa fior silenciosa, la postrera / Rosa que Milton acercó a su cara, / Sin verla. Oh tu bermeja ο amarilla / Ο bianca rosa de un jardin borrado, / Deja màgicamente tu pasado / Inmemorial y en este verso brilla, / Oro, sangre ο marfil ο tenebrosa / Como en sus manos, invisible rosa » (J. Borges, Una rosa y Milton, da El otro, el mismo; ora in Obra poètica cit., p. 213). E se è vero che nella quartina iniziale del Golem, Borges sembra avvicinarsi ai « nomina nuda » ricordati da Eco: « Si (corno el griego afirma en el Cratilo) / El nombre es arquetipo de la cosa, / En las letras de rosa esta la rosa / Y todo el Nilo en la palabra Nilo»); è ugualmente vero che si tratta di «un terrible Nombre», « articulación del Sacro Nombre », nome rivelato ma non articolabile, come mirabil- mente sigilla, nell'estrema visione concessa al Marino, Una rosa gialla: « Allora accadde la rivelazione. Marino vide la rosa, come potè vederla Adamo nel Paradiso, e senti che essa stava nella sua eternità e non nelle sue parole e che noi possiamo menzionare ο alludere ma non esprimere » (J. L. Borges, Una rosa gialla, da El hacedor; trad. it.: in Antologia personale, Milano, Silva 1965, p. 123). Così anche questo percorso è stato vano tender a « la rosa inalcanzable », essa « fior silenciosa ».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26263328

Journal Title: Lettere Italiane
Publisher: LEO S. OLSCHKI
Issue: i26263869
Date: 9 1, 1986
Author(s): Bottoni Luciano
Abstract: Cfr. La Rivoluzione francese del 1789 e la rivoluzione italiana del 1859. Osserva- zioni comparative, in Tutte le Opere cit., II, p. 2112 sgg.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26263873

Journal Title: Lettere Italiane
Publisher: LEO S. OLSCHKI
Issue: i26264537
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Bottoni Luciano
Abstract: Ch. Batteux, Sulla frase cit., p. 203.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26264540

Journal Title: Lettere Italiane
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i26266382
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): Leri Clara
Abstract: Ricordo, a titolo di esempio, solo alcuni degli scrittori e degli studiosi che non hanno avuto, per così dire, accesso alla rassegna (pur se implicitamente e continuamente vivissimi all'attenzione di chi scrive) per l'impossibilità oggettiva di esibire lo sconfinato universo delle presenze bibliche nella letteratura compresa tra il Duecento e il primo Ot- tocento: il Dante delle opere 'minori', soprattutto della Vita Nuova (V. Branca, G. Gor- ni), la predicazione medievale e moderna (C. Delcorno, R. Rusconi, L. Bolzoni, J. Berlioz, etc.), le laude (G. Varanini, R. Bettarini, F. Mancini etc.), la sacra rappresentazione (M. Martelli, N. Newbigin, F. Doglio, G. Ponte, F. Pezzarossa), il Boccaccio delle Rime e delle Epistole (V. Branca, G. Auzzas) e di alcune parti del Decameron (P. Cherchi), la produzione 'sacra' tassiana (Rime Sacre, Mondo Creato), l'Aretino (Larivaille) e il Folengo (M. Chiesa, S. Gatti) nei panni di scrittori cristiani, l'Arcadia edificante, per riprendere un titolo preciso del Di Biase, certa tragedia sacra settecentesca come quella di Martello (I. Magnani, P. Trivero) e, soprattutto, l'Alfieri biblico del Saul e dell'Abele (A. Di Bene- detto, E. Raimondi), lo Jacopo Ortis (M. A. Terzoli) e l'Ipercalisse del Foscolo (B. Rosada, A. Forlini), il linguaggio poetico religioso del Porta (G. Pozzi) e del Belli, il Tommaseo (M. Guglielminetti), il Pascoli (A. Traina, G. Goffis), D'Annunzio e molti altri ancora: spesso, tra l'altro, privi di una vera e propria bibliografia «scritturale» a largo spettro, se non di studi singoli, difficilmente annoverabili nell'ambito ristretto di una precisazione doverosa, ma non esaustiva. Va detto anche che, sebbene la rassegna si chiuda con il 1995, qua e là è stato segnalato qualche libro del 1996, a cui si vuole ora aggiungere, senza l'ambizione di averne citato tutti i volumi relativi all'oggetto delle precedenti pagi- ne, A. Stauble, Le sirene eterne. Studi sull'eredità classica e biblica nella letteratura italia- na, Ravenna, Longo, 1996; e E. Esposito, R. Manica, N. Longo, R. Scrivano, Memo- ria biblica nell'opera di Dante, Roma, Bulzoni, 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26266388

Journal Title: Lettere Italiane
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i26267185
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Scotto Davide
Abstract: Si ringraziano la B. «C. Bonetta» e l'ASCP per aver concesso la pubblicazione delle dantesche; il personale della B. Universitaria e della Β. «P. Fraccaro» di Pavia, della B. Na- zionale Braidense di Milano, della B. Astense e del Museo Storico Italiano della Guerra di Rovereto. Alla prof. Elisa Signori, al dott. Giovanni Zaffignani e al prof. Gilberto Pizzami- glio devo i suggerimenti preziosi raccolti durante la discussione delle cartoline e delle boz- ze. Per l'ospitalità su queste pagine, e l'attenzione ricevuta anche da lontano, sono grato al prof. Carlo Ossola. Due ringraziamenti speciali vanno al prof. Giorgio Cracco e alla prof. Daniela Rando i quali, oltre ad aver seguito la ricerca, ne hanno mantenuto viva l'ispirazio- ne con uno 'sguardo' sempre luminoso. A loro penso leggendo i versi di Purg. VI, 43-48.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26267188

Journal Title: Ecology and Society
Publisher: Resilience Alliance
Issue: e26267950
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Lambin Xavier
Abstract: The benefits of increasing the contribution of the social sciences in the fields of environmental and conservation science disciplines are increasingly recognized. However, integration between the social and natural sciences has been limited, in part because of the barrier caused by major philosophical differences in the perspectives between these research areas. This paper aims to contribute to more effective interdisciplinary integration by explaining some of the philosophical views underpinning social research and how these views influence research methods and outcomes. We use a project investigating the motivation of volunteers working in an adaptive co-management project to eradicate American Mink from the Cairngorms National Park in Scotland as a case study to illustrate the impact of philosophical perspectives on research. Consideration of different perspectives promoted explicit reflection of the contributing researcher’s assumptions, and the implications of his or her perspectives on the outcomes of the research. We suggest a framework to assist conservation research projects by: (1) assisting formulation of research questions; (2) focusing dialogue between managers and researchers, making underlying worldviews explicit; and (3) helping researchers and managers improve longer-term strategies by helping identify overall goals and objectives and by identifying immediate research needs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26268007

Journal Title: Journal of Consumer Research
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i344711
Date: 6 1, 1987
Author(s): Wolfe Elizabeth C.
Abstract: Pollay (1983)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2626822

Journal Title: Modern Fiction Studies
Publisher: THE PURDUE UNIVERSITY DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
Issue: i26280536
Date: 4 1, 1980
Author(s): Sullivan Alvin
Abstract: Jonathan Culler, Structuralist Poetics (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Pres», 1975), p. 200.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26280565

Journal Title: Modern Fiction Studies
Publisher: THE PURDUE UNIVERSITY DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
Issue: i26280028
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Brown Suzanne Hunter
Abstract: "Metacommentary," PMLA, 86 (January 1971), 12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26281276

Journal Title: L'Esprit Créateur
Publisher: L'ESPRIT CREATEUR, Inc.
Issue: i26283924
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Logan Marie-Rose
Abstract: The notion of mathesis is recurrent in Barthes (see Barthes par Barthes, p. 122). In that respect, the terms mathematics and mathesis should be understood in their literal Greek acceptation, as knowledge, and the process of knowledge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26283931

Journal Title: The Eastern Buddhist
Publisher: The Eastern Buddhist Society
Issue: i26289332
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Mohr Michel
Abstract: Aramaki 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26289495

Journal Title: Journal of Southern African Studies
Publisher: Carfax Publishing Ltd.
Issue: i324967
Date: 6 1, 1985
Author(s): Scott Sean
Abstract: Fields, 'Political Contingencies of Witchcraft', Canadian Journal of African Studies, 16 (1982), pp. 567-593. 10.2307/484560 567
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2637060

Journal Title: Journal of Southern African Studies
Publisher: Carfax Publishing, Taylor and Francis Ltd.
Issue: i324979
Date: 6 1, 1991
Author(s): Dube David
Abstract: Osborne, Modernity, p. 37.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2637603

Journal Title: The Historical Journal
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i325015
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Collinson Tom
Abstract: Thomas Brooks, 'Epistle to the saints', Heaven on earth, n.p
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2639939

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: i345591
Date: 12 1, 1990
Author(s): Shields Timothy
Abstract: Breen, "Ideology and Nationalism on the Eve of the American Revolution," 13-39. 13
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2649962

Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: International Phenomenological Society
Issue: i345615
Date: 6 1, 1958
Author(s): Wittgenstein Daniel
Abstract: Melden, 1961, p. 208 208
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2653677

Journal Title: Contemporary Sociology
Publisher: American Sociological Association
Issue: i325491
Date: 9 1, 1993
Author(s): Wolff Janet
Abstract: Grossberg et al., 1992: 3 3
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2654982

Journal Title: The Journal of Asian Studies
Publisher: Association for Asian Studies
Issue: i325590
Date: 5 1, 1993
Author(s): Zhong Edward X.
Abstract: Liu Xiaofeng, Zhengjiu yu Xiaoyao (Redemption and Easiness) (Shanghai: Shanghai renmin chubanshe, 1988) Xiaofeng Zhengjiu yu Xiaoyao (Redemption and Easiness) 1988
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2659402

Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i325622
Date: 6 1, 2001
Author(s): Zeitlyn David
Abstract: Some systems of divination are used to select particular sections of text, which are typically arcane and erudite, in which lies the answer to the particular, pressing problems of the client. Celebrated examples of such systems are the Chinese I Ching and the Yoruba Ifa. Werbner's work on Kalanga and Tswapong divination provides a case-study of the detailed praxis in such systems. Diviners have a multiple role when a divination technique selects a text. At each consultation they must satisfy themselves, their client, and their audience that they have followed the correct procedures to select the text. A second stage follows. The client has a particular question and the selected text was not composed as a specific answer to it. Interpretation is required to satisfy the client that the question has been answered. The diviner thus plays the role of indigenous critic, a role both similar to and different from that of literary critics in the Western tradition. The concept of `dialogic' used by Barber in her analysis of Yoruba praise poetry is taken to illustrate similarities and differences between diviner and critic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2661220

Journal Title: American Journal of Political Science
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i325946
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Schiemann John W.
Abstract: Rational choice theory and the critical theory of Jurgen Habermas exclude important social categories from their analyses of strategic interaction. Successful strategic action in many contexts, however, depends upon the irreducibly intersubjective categories of the lifeworld. I defend this claim by analyzing the use of focal points to solve the multiple equilibria problem in coordination games, reconstructing both the generation of the salience behind focal points as well as the strategic rationality of using them. The goal of this reconstruction is to demonstrate the compatibility of what appears to be mutually hostile research traditions, validating the intuition that together they provide a better understanding of politics than either school can on its own.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2669289

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345910
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Rosen William H.
Abstract: Stanley Rosen, The Ancients and the Moderns: Rethinking Modernity (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1989). Rosen The Ancients and the Moderns: Rethinking Modernity 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2677987

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345910
Date: 12 1, 1756
Author(s): Tulard Jay M.
Abstract: "The Determinist Fix," 31
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2677990

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345907
Date: 2 1, 1986
Author(s): Jameson Julia Adeney
Abstract: Fredric Jameson, "Reflections in Conclusion," in Ernst Bloch et al., Aesthetics and Politics (London: Verso, 1986), 207. Jameson Reflections in Conclusion 207 Aesthetics and Politics 1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2678066

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345907
Date: 2 1, 1969
Author(s): Althusser Nicole
Abstract: Althusser's formula: "Human societies secrete ideology as an element or atmosphere nec- essary for breathing and existence" (L. Althusser, For Marx [London: Verso, 1969], 232). Althusser Human societies secrete ideology as an element or atmosphere necessary for breathing and existence 232 For Marx 1969
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2678068

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345901
Date: 10 1, 1984
Author(s): Prigogine David F.
Abstract: Ibid., 104-106. 104
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2678084

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Journal of the History of Ideas, Inc.
Issue: i346290
Date: 3 1, 1958
Author(s): Toulmin Allan
Abstract: Adolf Griinbaum, "Falsifiability and Rationality," unpublished typescript quoted in Richard Bernstein, Beyond Objectivism and Relativism: Science, Hermeneutics, and Praxis (Philadelphia, 1983), 79.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2709615

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Journal of the History of Ideas, Inc.
Issue: i346290
Date: 3 1, 1970
Author(s): Bianco Donald R.
Abstract: Gadamer, Truth and Method, 156. 156
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2709616

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Journal of the History of Ideas, Inc.
Issue: i346302
Date: 3 1, 1978
Author(s): Laerman Donald R.
Abstract: Lovejoy (see above, n. 23).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2709744

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Journal of the History of Ideas, Inc.
Issue: i346292
Date: 9 1, 1984
Author(s): Sacks Patrick H.
Abstract: Oliver Sacks, "The Lost Mariner," The New York Review of Books (16 February 1984), 18-19. Sacks 16 February 18 The New York Review of Books 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2709758

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i327937
Date: 9 1, 1979
Author(s): Watson-Gegeo Karen Ann
Abstract: Two traditions have been vying for supremacy in the area of cultural analysis. The first sees culture as encompassing the totality of socially learned human phenomena; the second restricts the term to shared mental-primarily cognitive-properties. David Schneider has achieved a dominant positon in the latter school. In this paper I examine critically Schneider's approach to culture, with special attention to the problems raised by his perspective with respect to intracultural consistency and contradiction. While agreeing that the ethnographer must attempt to shun prior assumptions as to the nature of symbolic and conceptual domains recognized by the people under study, that it is incumbent on the anthropologist to comprehend reality from the natives' point of view before attempting to formulate laws or generalizations, that the symbolic systems and their associated meanings plays an essential part in making sense of any human action system, I shall argue that cultures do not exhibit the degree of integration, consistency, and articulation assumed by Schneider, that in his attempt to render culture wholly integrated and consisten he strips the concept of its analytic utility, that social action and symbolic systems are empirically and epistemologically more closely intertwined than he would lead us to believe, and that the very debate over what culture "really" is constitutes an exercise in reification.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2742111

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i327968
Date: 4 1, 1985
Author(s): Webster Steven
Abstract: Using the hermeneutical theory of Paul Ricoeur, it is possible to discern symbolic dimensions in cultural anthropology. Symbols, here, are dominant images in anthropologists' texts, creatively posited by inquirers, that, most importantly, possess a surplus of meaning. A symbol's fullest surplus of meaning is a prereflexive and comprehensive "understanding" (Verstehen) that may encompass a scholar's attempts at "explanation" (Erklaren). Examples of this symbolic dimension are the "understandings" that lie implicit in two elaborate anthropological systems: Levi-Strauss's structuralism and Harris's cultural materialism. Amid their commitments to anthropological "science" and "explanation," the works of each disclose a distinctive Verstehen. For Levi-Strauss, this "understanding" is nurtured by his image "world of reciprocity." For Harris, it is carried by the image "nature." This "understanding" has two major functions. On the level of the intellectual coherence of their texts, it gives unity to their intercultural interpretations of other societies and to their intracultural interpretations of their own traditions. On a moral level, it includes modes of being-in-the-world that Levi-Strauss and Harris prefer and ocasionally press upon their readers. Discernment of symbolic dimensions of "understanding" in anthropologists' texts may be an initial step toward reflection on the matrices out of which diverse explanations are presented in anthropological literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2743131

Journal Title: Ethical Theory and Moral Practice
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i27504265
Date: 9 1, 2003
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: Nussbaum, 2002, p. 272
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27504272

Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Human Sciences Press
Issue: i27505710
Date: 4 1, 1983
Author(s): Kohák Erazim
Abstract: Using the metaphor of lights appearing unexplained in the night, the author argues for a conceptualization of the unconscious based on a posture of trust and acceptance rather than one of fear and explanation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27505717

Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Human Sciences Press
Issue: i27505789
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Hunter James E.
Abstract: By focusing on hermeneutics and dialogue, this article clarifies the distinctive contribution that pastoral and psychotherapeutic interventions have to make in the healing process. It is shown how the hermeneutical process discloses the meaning of events through the interpretation of texts that arise spontaneously in the lives of individuals and groups. Texts may range from individual fantasies and dreams to sacred histories recorded in scriptures. When the meaning of life events is explored in dialogue through symbolic texts, we term that process "dialogical hermeneutics." Effective dialogical hermeneutics requires the use of three techniques: (1) presence in the caring relationship, (2) dialogue toward meaning, and (3) offering alternative interpretation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27505798

Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27513034
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Lamborn Amy Bentley
Abstract: "The Analytic Third: An Overview," www.psychematters.com/papers/ogden.htm, 1999.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27513040

Journal Title: Presidential Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Center for the Study of the Presidency
Issue: i27547583
Date: 7 1, 1980
Author(s): Maidment Richard
Abstract: The conflict between President John F. Kennedy and the management of the steel industry in April, 1962 has been interpreted in an unsatisfactory manner. Many of Kennedy's reactions appear to be inexplicable and do not conform with the impression of him either as an "idealist without illusions" or the calculating cynic of recent revisionist writing. This paper is an attempt to provide another understanding of Kennedy's behaviour. We argue that Kennedy was neither hero nor villain, but a practising politician aware of the obligations and function of his profession in a liberal democratic polity. We suggest that Kennedy was aware of the sensibilities of his constituency and that he possessed a finely attuned ear to the language and discourse of American politics in the early 1960s. Consequently Kennedy realised the peril, in the steel crisis, to his political standing and thus felt compelled to embark on a dramatic and potentially dangerous course of action. We attempt to sustain this argument by closely examining the political language of the participants, relying heavily for our analysis on the writings of the Swiss linguist Ferdinand de Saussure, the Italian semiologist, Umberto Eco and the Russian linguist V.N. Volosinov.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27547588

Journal Title: Presidential Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Center for the Study of the Presidency
Issue: i27551498
Date: 10 1, 1995
Author(s): Dorsey Leroy G.
Abstract: This essay reconceptualizes President Theodore Roosevelt's "anti-trust" image within a "pro-business" framework. Critics who have measured Roosevelt's success by the number of anti-trust suits he brought or won miss the essentially rhetorical purposes of his involvement with corporate America. Specifically, this essay contends that his primary emphasis involved the promotion of the proper attitude in corporate leaders and the general public regarding the role of big business in American society. This Roosevelt did in two ways. First, he argued metaphorically for the necessity of corporations and the restraint of muckraking journalists. Second, along with employing metaphors to chastise big business, Roosevelt assumed the role of moral guardian and preached to corporate leaders to adhere to an ethical standard in business. For Roosevelt, corporate America could be effectively regulated only by its leaders' sense of morality and spirit of public service.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27551508

Journal Title: Journal of American Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i27556257
Date: 8 1, 1997
Author(s): Ritter Gretchen
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur's " The Human Experience of Time and Narrative," in Ricoeur's A Ricoeur Reader (Toronto, 1992).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27556260

Journal Title: Journal of American Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i27557684
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Coates Peter
Abstract: Robyn Dixon, "Silent Warning? Sparrows are Vanishing Throughout Great Britain," Eos Angeles Times, 12 July 2002, at: http://www.ecology.com/ eco...o2/articles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27557692

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i27586360
Date: 8 1, 2000
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: Cf. Antoine Berman, L'épreuve de l'étranger, Paris, Gallimard, 1984.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27586362

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27642764
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: Tony Judt, Postwar: A History of Europe since 1945, Penguin, 2005
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27642770

Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i27643303
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Jackson Robert
Abstract: Jackson (forthcoming)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27643307

Journal Title: International Journal for Philosophy of Religion
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27646172
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Anderson Pamela Sue
Abstract: 'Janké', p. 352n85.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27646178

Journal Title: Revista de Letras
Publisher: Universidade Estadual Paulista
Issue: i27666769
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): de Rezende Neide Luzia
Abstract: Antonio Candido, "Digressão sentimental sobre Oswald de Andrade" (1977, p. 71-2). Também nesse artigo, o crítico conta que, em 1945, Oswald prestara, na Faculdade de Filosofia da mesma universidade, concurso de livre-docência para a cadeira de Literatura Brasileira.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27666778

Journal Title: Revista de Letras
Publisher: Universidade Estadual Paulista
Issue: i27666817
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Andrade Antonio
Abstract: Cf. MOTTA, 2006, p. 155.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27666822

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i27669194
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): Moses A. Dirk
Abstract: German Intellectuals and the Nazi Past (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2007).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27669198

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i27669227
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Broadbent Philip
Abstract: Herzinger, "Jung, Schick und Heiter," 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27669234

Journal Title: The American Sociologist
Publisher: Transaction Periodicals Consortium
Issue: i27698778
Date: 10 1, 1996
Author(s): Caulfield Jon
Abstract: Visual sociology has two main interests: picture-making by researchers (or their subjects) in the course of sociological fieldwork, and pictures made by social actors in the context of everyday life. Focusing on the latter interest and based in three social aspects of images—that they are produced in general societal settings and specific institutional settings, and are a kind of discursive practice—three approaches to the sociology of visual material are illustrated.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27698784

Journal Title: The American Sociologist
Publisher: Transaction Periodicals Consortium
Issue: i27698807
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): Park Elizabeth
Abstract: Richard Schoenherr, professor of sociology at the University of Wisconsin—Madison, passed away unexpectedly on 9 January 1996. He is memorialized in this essay for his scholarly contributions in the areas of teaching, research, and service.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27698818

Journal Title: The German Quarterly
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services, Inc.
Issue: i27701109
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): McKnight Phil
Abstract: With the portrayal of local resentment towards the massive influx of Silesian refugees after WWII in the GDR in his novel Landnahme, Christoph Hein expands the literary representation of history he began earlier in Horns Ende, again using the fictional small town of Guldenberg as paradigmatic for the GDR, extended here over time to include unified Germany. Bernhard Haber's epic, but unscrupulous struggle to overcome the will of his neighbors for him to fail provides the backdrop for Hein's depiction of how the past unavoidably writes the future and how the collective process of socialization shapes meanings and values. Using five narrators, Hein applies his earlier concept of social autobiography to trace historical developments in the acquired collective attitudes of Germans towards Gypsies, Poles, the handicapped, and African and Vietnamese workers left behind after unification, all of whom were subjected to the same abusive language and discrimination directed at the refugees.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27701116

Journal Title: The Journal of English and Germanic Philology
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Issue: i27710725
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): Chickering Howell
Abstract: Samuel Johnson, The Rambler, No. 94, The Yale Edition of the Works of Samuel John- son, ed. W. J. Bate and A. B. Strauss (New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, 1969), iv, 136.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27710729

Journal Title: The Journal of English and Germanic Philology
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Issue: i27712646
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Holsinger Bruce
Abstract: Lerer, Literacy and Power, p. 42.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27712649

Journal Title: Journal of Medical Ethics
Publisher: BMJ Publishing Group
Issue: i27718647
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Berghmans Ron
Abstract: Advance directives for psychiatric care are the subject of debate in a number of Western societies. By using psychiatric advance directives (or so-called "Ulysses contracts"), it would be possible for mentally ill persons who are competent and with their disease in remission, and who want timely intervention in case of future mental crisis, to give prior authorisation to treatment at a later time when they are incompetent, have become non-compliant, and are refusing care. Thus the devastating consequences of recurrent psychosis could be minimised. Ulysses contracts raise a number of ethical questions. In this article the central issues of concern and debate are discussed from a narrative perspective. Ulysses contracts are viewed as elements of an ongoing narrative in which patient and doctor try to make sense of and get a hold on the recurrent crisis inherent in the patient's psychiatric condition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27718653

Journal Title: Foro Internacional
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i27738594
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Santiso Javier
Abstract: Véase J. Santiso, "Les horloges et les nuages: Temps et contretemps des démo- cratisations", Hermès, núm. 19, 1996, pp. 165-182; J. Santiso, "Time, Démocratisation and Rational Choice", trabajo presentado durante el Nuffield Sodology Seminar, organiza- do por John Goldthorpe, el 29 de noviembre de 1997, Oxford University; P. Schmitter, "Rhytm, Timing and Sequence in the Constitution of Democracy", op. cit., pp. 3 y ss. La mayor parte de la obra de Linz, empezando por sus trabajos más recientes, aborda esta dimensión temporal de las democratizaciones. Cabe mencionar, por ejemplo, J. Linz y Y. Shain, "The Timing and the Nature of First Democratic Elections", en Linz y Shain (comps.), Between States. Interim Governments and Democratic Transitions, Cambridge y Nueva York, 1995, pp. 76-91.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27738597

Journal Title: Foro Internacional
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i27738655
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): Duque Sonia
Abstract: Según la definición de EG. Bailey en Les règles du jeu politique, París, PUF, 1971, p. 186.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27738660

Journal Title: Foro Internacional
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i27739107
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): Santiso Javier
Abstract: Véase Paul Ricoeur, " Sanction, réhabilitation, pardon ", en Ricoeur, Le juste, Paris, Esprit Editions, 1995, pp. 193-208.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27739114

Journal Title: The American Journal of Economics and Sociology
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i27739756
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Tillmanns Jenny
Abstract: This paper deals with the question of historical responsibility. It can be subdivided into whether historical responsibility exists, consequently what it is about, and then how it can be put into practice. I am raising these questions as a third-generation German against the background of the Holocaust. In this paper I unfold various views and thus dimensions of historical responsibility, which I finally complement in the form of six models of historical responsibility. These models provide a multilayered perspective on and approach to the philosophical and practical dimensions of historical responsibility and, as a consequence, are of relevance to contemporary political culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27739763

Journal Title: Anales de la literatura española contemporánea
Publisher: Society of Spanish and Spanish-American Studies
Issue: i27741343
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Pratt Dale J.
Abstract: La discusión teórica de posibles signos interartísticos es siempre arriesgada y resbaladiza; la gran tentación es abandonar la postura crítica para fundar el intento comparativo en una sinestesia impresionista entre las artes. Es muy posible que la poesía y la pintura no tengan en común una estructura estética o mimética subyacente a la que cada signo de ambos sistemas se refiere; la posible incomensurabilidad de estos signos y sus referentes deja abierta la cuestión de cómo se relacionan las dos artes. Miguel de Unamuno explota estas ostensibles incomensurabilidades para caracterizar su propia búsqueda de fe en Dios en "El Cristo de Velázquez". La tarea de Unamuno es primero capturar el sentido del cuadro en el poema por medio de una transmutación o traducción de los códigos visuales a códigos poéticos, para luego acercarse al referente divino desde su propia metaforización del cuadro. Su encuentro con lo divino nace y sigue naciendo perpetuamente de la continua búsqueda, el descontento con la insuficiencia de la postura dogmática u ortodoxa; su intento de hallar o construir una analogía interartística entre un poema y un cuadro tiene la misma forma que la búsqueda vital de Dios. En otras palabras, Unamuno nos ofrece la analogía interartística en El Cristo de Velázquez como una heurística del proceso de conocerle a Dios.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27741346

Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27749757
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Bird Frederick
Abstract: Typically people make ethical judgments with reference to unchanging principles, standards, rights, and values. This essay argues that such an ahistorical approach to ethics should be supplemented by a due regard for history. Invoking precedents by authors such as Jonsen and Toulmin, McIntyre, Niebuhr, Weber, De Tocqueville, Machiavelli and others, this essay explores several important ways in which a due regard for history can and should shape the practice of business ethics. Thus a due regard for history helps us both to cultivate fitting appreciation of cultural mores and to understand how current problems and issues have developed as they have; it helps us to gauge current responsibilities with respect legacies of problems inherited from the past; it helps us to develop a lively sense of what is possible in the present, given current contingencies and past experiences; and it moves us to rethink the practice of ethical auditing: not just as a backward-looking effort to gauge compliance but as a forward-looking way of learning from actual experiences and developing fitting responses.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27749769

Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27749812
Date: 2 1, 2010
Author(s): Clegg Stewart R.
Abstract: Although studies in organizational storytelling have dealt extensively with the relationship between narrative, power and organizational change, little attention has been paid to the implications of this for ethics within organizations. This article addresses this by presenting an analysis of narrative and ethics as it relates to the practice of organizational downsizing. Drawing on Paul Ricoeur's theories of narrative and ethics, we analyze stories of organizational change reported by employees and managers in an organization that had undergone persistent downsizing. Our analysis maintains that the presence of a dominant story that seeks to legitimate organizational change also serves to normalize it, and that this, in turn, diminishes the capacity for organizations to scrutinize the ethics of their actions. We argue that when organizational change narratives become singularized through dominant forms of emplotment, ethical deliberation and responsibility in organizations are diminished. More generally, we contend that the narrative closure achieved by the presence of a dominant narrative amongst employees undergoing organizational change is antithetical to the openness required for ethical questioning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27749819

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27752851
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Casanova Julián
Abstract: Habría que insistir en los efectos nada beneficiosos que se derivan de la forma de finan- ciar muchas de esas becas: los proyectos de investigación tienen que ceñirse –obligados por la convocatoria– a la historia de la localidad o región en la que se solicitan. Por no extender- nos en el carácter tan alejado de los criterios científicos que suponen las pruebas de pureza de vecindad, por las que un alicantino que resida en Alicante, por ejemplo, tiene francamen- te difícil acceder a una beca del gobierno aragonés (aunque siempre se le podría decir, como consuelo, que a un aragonés tampoco se la darían en Alicante).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27752858

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27752901
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Alcantud José Antonio González
Abstract: La antropología-acción presenta dos características metodológicamente impactantes: la incorporación del conocimiento local a las investigaciones, que son realizadas en colabora- ción con los estudiados; y el eclecticismo y la diversidad teóricos, puesto que métodos y teo- rías sólo poseen virtudes instrumentales (Greenwood et alii., 1993: 178-179).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27752917

Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i27762666
Date: 4 1, 1989
Author(s): VALDÉS MARIO J.
Abstract: Con más vehemencia que entendimiento algunos colegas han insistido en la oposición, y aún contradicción, entre la historia literaria y la teoría literaria. El concepto de la historia como un pasado fijo e inalterable desde luego que será incompatible no sólo con la teoría literaria sino con todo pensamiento crítico. Sin embargo, quiero insistir que la mayor parte de los historiadores contemporáneos no comparten las premisas positivistas del historicismo. La historia como un pasado que se hace y rehace en el presente por la labor del historiador queda plenamente relacionada con la teoría literaria contemporánea. Ya lo lo percibían Juan Luis Vives y Giambattista Vico.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27762676

Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i27762971
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): URRACA BEATRIZ
Abstract: Este estudio examina la figura del espejo en dos cuentos de Borges, "Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius" y "La biblioteca de Babel," a través de teorías contemporáneas sobre el espejo, la duplicación, y la representación en literatura y filosofía. En particular, se utiliza el concepto de mise en abyme de Lucien Dällenbach, el "reverso" del espejo en el pensamiento de Derrida según lo desarrolla Rodolphe Gasché, y la semiótica del espejo, la enciclopedia y el laberinto de Umberto Eco. Este marco conceptual, cuyo origen se encuentra en la obra misma de Borges, nos permite una relectura del espejo como un instrumento que duplica fielmente, sin invertir ni deformar, una realidad que nuestra propia mente es incapaz de percibir como idéntica a sí misma. Como si fuera la otra cara de una misma moneda, el lenguaje se presenta como un medio que inevitablemente desfigura la realidad. Ya que éste es el único medio, aunque imperfecto, de que los seres humanos disponemos para el conocimiento del mundo, la "diferencia" se introduce como una búsqueda de significado.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27762982

Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i27763130
Date: 4 1, 1994
Author(s): BOYER RICHARD
Abstract: Las narraciones históricas no se basan en los hechos y palabras de seres imaginados sino en los de personas reales cuyos aconteceres han sido reconstruidos a partir de fuentes documentadas. A lo largo del tiempo, el historiador se ha acercado a sus fuentes desde tres perspectivas distintas: (1) respetándolas como autoridad, (2) utilizándolas como prueba evidencial o (3) dialogando con ellas. Aunque estas tres posiciones persisten aún, la práctica actual se apoya en la tercera puesto que va más allá del simple recopilar de los documentos al enfatizar la búsqueda de su significación. Con este procedimiento se evidencia la presencia del historiador en su narración al convertirse en interlocutor, y se muestra una actitud interactiva que ilustro en este artículo con mi propia aproximación a los casos sacados de los registros del Santo Oficio de la Inquisición del México colonial.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27763134

Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i27763258
Date: 10 1, 1995
Author(s): BENET VICENTE J.
Abstract: Ciertos filmes españoles recientes plantean un enfrentamiento con el pasado en el que destacan unas elaboraciones imaginarias densas, retóricas y alejadas de la vertiente naturalista y realista, e incluso documental, que caracterizó al cine de la transición a la democracia. Para poder conducirlas, las tramas detectivescas se han convertido en una estrategia común de estas nuevas lecturas del pasado. En ellas se identifica un trayecto hermenéutico con otro biográfico, el del personaje-detective, e histórico. Y todo ello en un marco narrativo definido por continuas metáforas del totalitarismo, referidas sobre todo a las imágenes tenebristas de la postguerra española. El cine español contemporáneo se ha distanciado de esa reflexión crítica con el pasado reciente pero permite, en filmes como los que nos ocupan en este trabajo, que las sombras de sus fantasmas se proyecten sobre el presente impregnándolo con una atmósfera de pesadilla. El relato parece conducirnos a una verdad esencial en la que siempre aparece aguardar la figura de un siniestro demiurgo, depositario final del sentido de la búsqueda.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27763274

Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i27764029
Date: 10 1, 2005
Author(s): BOU ENRIC
Abstract: Se presenta en este artículo una reflexión sobre un aspecto de la condición del exilio: la interrelación entre memoria personal y colectiva, a partir de cinco obras singulares y complementarias: Vida en claro (1944), de José Moreno Villa, Otoño en Madrid hacia 1950 (1987), de Juan Benet, Los años sin excusa (1975), de Carlos Barral, Autobiografía de Federico Sánchez (1977), de Jorge Semprún y Travesías (1925-1955) (2003), de Jaime Salinas. Utilizando el concepto de memoria individual y colectiva desarrollado por Paul Ricoeur se discute la difícil combinación de ambas entre los escritores en situación de exilio y dictadura a causa del más difícil funcionamiento de los más mínimos mecanismos que permiten su interacción. A partir de la difícil conciliación entre anécdota individual y experiencia colectiva consiguen estos autores una versión de la historia: ambigua y parcial, de intervención y amago, acentuando así las contradicciones de la autobiografía. El sueño imposible de una memoria total que integrara la individual, la colectiva y la histórica, se revela como más difícil de conseguir para estos memorialistas.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27764033

Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i27764046
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): AGUADO TXETXU
Abstract: En Los amantes del Círculo Polar de Julio Medem (1998) la relación entre Otto y Ana es punto de partida, origen, momento de apertura a un otro para hacer frente a los vacíos cada vez más pronunciados del vivir. Si es una relación utópica es porque se sitúa más allá de la realidad, es decir, de las condiciones de realidad positivas de los personajes. Éstos reclaman un momento de totalidad, un momento que, aun sabiéndose efímero, no se quiere tal. Los personajes niegan la realidad de lo que se les presenta – el dolor en sus vidas: la muerte del padre de Ana, la separación de sus padres y posterior muerte de la madre de Otto – porque les deja sin referencialidad a la cual seguir aferrándose para vivir sin miedo a la muerte, para vivir sin miedo la vida. Sin embargo, no están dispuestos ni a dejarse anular ni a renunciar a momentos de plenitud. Sobre si ello es factible, sobre si es posible en este mundo burlar de alguna manera a la muerte e instalarse aunque sea precariamente en la felicidad conseguida con el amor, trata este artículo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27764050

Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i27797773
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Heinze Carsten
Abstract: Diese zusätzlichen “Quellen" der autobiographischen Erzählung werden oftmals von Autoren im Vor- oder Nachwort explizit als Gedächtnisstütze genannt.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27797778

Journal Title: Chungara: Revista de Antropología Chilena
Publisher: Universidad de Tarapacá
Issue: i27802479
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Silva Claudia Zapata
Abstract: El surgimiento de una identidad aymara entre la población indígena del norte grande de Chile es un fenómeno reciente, como lo han demostrado algunos investigadores en los últimos años. En este artículo se aborda el vínculo problemático que se establece entre indentidad y memoria como parte de este fenómeno nuevo en el que los sujetos involucrados, principalmente aymaras urbanos, sienten la necesidad de articular una memoria representativa de ese colectivo amplio que es el pueblo aymara, planteándose, al mismo tiempo, el desafío de construirla, o como sus promotores sostienen, de "conocerla" y "descubrirla". El análisis tiene como punto de partida las tensiones que cruzan este proyecto y cómo éstas se reflejan en los documentos producidos por distintas organizaciones aymaras a partir de los años noventa. Nuestro interés se concentra en aquello que los sujetos dicen acerca de la memoria aymara (nivel de metamemoria), los esfuerzos desplegados en su construcción y los recursos utilizados en este intento. The emergence of an Aymara identity among the indigenous population in the northern part of Chile is a recent phenomenon, as some researchers have shown in the last few years. This paper discusses the difficult link between identity and memory as a part of a new phenomenon, where the concerned individuals, mainly urban Aymara, feel the necessity of articulating a memory that would represent this broad collective group, the Aymara people. At the same time, they assume the challenge to build this memory, or, in their own words, to "know" and "discover" it. The analysis focuses on the tensions that exist in this effort and on the way in which these tensions appear in the writings of different ethnic organizations since the nineties. Our interest centers on what the subjects say about Aymara memory (the level of metamemory), as well as on the efforts they put on its construction, and the resources they use.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27802482

Journal Title: The American Archivist
Publisher: Society of American Archivists
Issue: i27802687
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Mifflin Jeffrey
Abstract: Williams, A Key into the Language of America, [i–ii].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27802693

Journal Title: Dead Sea Discoveries
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i27806733
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Jokiranta Jutta
Abstract: Cecilia Wassen and Jutta Jokiranta, "Groups in Tension: Sectarianism in the Damascus Document and the Commu- nity Rule," in Sectarianism in Early Judaism: Sociological Advances (ed. David J. Chalcraft; London: Equinox, 2007), 205–45.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27806736

Journal Title: Cuadernos de Pensamiento Político
Publisher: FAES-Fundación para el Análisis y los Estudios Sociales
Issue: i27822317
Date: 9 1, 2010
Author(s): FERRER GUILLERMO GRAÍÑO
Abstract: Para los que piensen, con Rawls, que puede fundamentarse, al modo liberal, una justicia sin moral, véase Guillermo Graffio Ferrer (2008).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27822325

Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i329121
Date: 5 1, 1994
Author(s): Goodwin Jeff
Abstract: Network analysis is one of the most promising currents in sociological research, and yet it has never been subjected to a theoretically informed assessment and critique. This article outlines the theoretical presuppositions of network analysis. It also distinguishes between three different (implicit) models in the network literature of the interrelations of social structure, culture, and human agency. It concludes that only a strategy for historical explanation that synthesizes social structural and cultural analysis can adequately explain the formation, reproduction, and transformation of networks themselves. The article sketches the broad contours of such a theoretical synthesis in the conclusion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2782580

Journal Title: La Ricerca Folklorica
Publisher: Grafo
Issue: i27859582
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): ATZENI PAOLA
Abstract: Riprendo, ampliando i conte- sti di riferimento, la complessa nozione demartiniana di mun- dus (De Martino 1977:11-282) che comprende il mondo inte- riore, come vissuto psicopatolo- gico e di alienazione, e il mondo esterno spazio-temporale e sim- bolico per analizzare il rapporto discorso-mondo. Mi allontano dalla nozione di Searle (2001, trad. it. 2003: 117-137) in cui la direzione d' aggiustamento ri- guarda un mondo come real- tà supposta data. Mi accosto, invece, a Vernant (1997: 49) il cui approccio pragmatico con- duce non solo a moltiplicare i mondi - mondo esterno comu- ne, mondo interno del locuto- re, differenti mondi costituenti ciascuno il risultato di un pro- cesso specifico d'interazione e di transazione-, ma anche ad individuare senso e finalità dei discorsi e potenza interazionale e transazionale dei soggetti.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27859595

Journal Title: Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde
Publisher: KITLV Press
Issue: i27864826
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): TSINTJILONIS DIMITRI
Abstract: Foucault 1977:147.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27864833

Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: Medieval Academy of America
Issue: i27866932
Date: 7 1, 2010
Author(s): Gruenler Curtis
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, The Symbolism of Evil, trans. Emerson Buchanan (Boston, 1967), pp. 351–52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27866937

Journal Title: L'Année sociologique (1940/1948-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i27888766
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): GROSSIN William
Abstract: « Le temps présent est devenu éphémère, irréversible et insaisissable », dit A. Y. Gourevitch. Il est aussi homogène et orienté. L'historien sovié- tique ajoute : « Pour la première fois, l'homme a constaté que le temps dont il ne décelait le cours qu'à travers les événements, ne s'arrête pas, même en l'absence d'événement. » A. Y. Gourevitch réintroduit ici une acception métaphysique du temps, s'il entend bien par événements des phénomènes, alors que dans le reste de sa contribution, il paraît convaincu de la maté- rialité du temps. La preuve expérimentale de l'existence du temps hors des phénomènes n'a pas été fournie et ne peut l'être. Les temps dans lesquels nous vivons, sont celui de notre existence même, celui de notre société, celui des mouvements des astres, etc. L'homme ne « constate » donc pas que le temps ne s'arrête pas même en l'absence d'événement, ces événements lui sont cachés par l'usage d'un temps quantitatif qui se réfère à l'un d'entre eux exprimé par les horloges, devenu la référence unique, apparemment « dématérialisé » par son omnipotence et occultant l'existence des autres temps.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27888811

Journal Title: L'Année sociologique (1940/1948-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i27889645
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): SPITÉRI Gérard
Abstract: Par exemple, Claude Allègre était bien considéré par la presse de droite, tandis que celle de gauche s'est montrée plus critique à son égard. La raison en est que le ministre de l'Education nationale s'était mis à dos le personnel enseignant, considéré comme majoritairement à gauche. /-
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27889647

Journal Title: L'Année sociologique (1940/1948-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i27889984
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): GROSSIN William
Abstract: Edouard T. Hall. La danse de la vie. Temps culturel et temps vécu, Parla, Seuil, 1984, p. 233.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27889995

Journal Title: L'Année sociologique (1940/1948-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i27890547
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Raulin Anne
Abstract: Si la Danse du Lion ne présente pas en soi un caractère religieux, les v ux (offerts contre des dons en argent) sont proférés devant des autels, et prennent ainsi un vague caractère de bénédiction. Ces autels installés dans les boutiques, sont le plus souvent dédiés au Dieu du sol (ou « Maître des lieux ») mais aussi à d'autres divinités dont les effigies sont promenées dans les défilés mis en place dans la Petite Asie au cours des années 1990. Pour une description détaillée de la Danse du Lion, cf. Raulin, 2000, 101-102.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/anso.081.0047

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i27919226
Date: 9 1, 2010
Author(s): Clairmont David A.
Abstract: Maclntyre (1988: 373–375).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27919233

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i27919976
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Ambrona Antonio Cil
Abstract: P. Ric ur, op. cit., p. 429.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27919986

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société préhistorique française
Publisher: Société Préhistorique Française
Issue: i27923888
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): CASSEN Serge
Abstract: La stèle du Bronzo est gravée d'un oiseau "levé", en plein vol, la tête tournée vers l'extérieurs, superposé à un filon de quartz blanc; une crosse, également traitée en champlevé, lui barre le passage. En première lecture, une identification plausible du genre volatile semblait prévaloir et le colombidé emportait notre adhésion. Mais une analyse plus posée et un effort de déconstruction graphique du motif permettront cette fois de reprendre et d'affiner la reconnaissance, en décrivant les différents filtres autorisant tel ou tel rejet de catégorie ou d'espèce, pour ne conserver en dernier ressort que les meilleurs prétendants à la seule confrontation possible, celle qui oppose les corvidés aux colombidés. La représentation du Bronzo est en définitive équivalente en substance et en structure aux scènes figurées sur les stèles voisines dans lesquelles un phallus s'oppose qu tranchant d'une lame de hache (Mané Rutual), tandis qu'un cachalot affronte la coalition des animaux et des outils de l'homme (Table des Marchand). A "flushed" bird is engraved on the Bronzo stela, in full flight, its head turned to the exterior, superposed over a white quartz vein; a crook, equally treated in cut-away engraving, bars its passage. At a first reading, a plausible identification of the bird seemed to prevail and the Columbidae met with our approval. However, more deliberate analysis and an effort at the graphic deconstruction of the motif allows the identification to be reconsidered and improved, by describing the various filters authorising the rejection of such or such a category, finally preserving the best claimants to the only possible confrontation, opposing Corvidae to Columbidae. The Bronzo representation is equivalent in substance and in structure to the scenes on the neighbouring stelae where a phallus is opposed to the sharp edge of an axe blade (Mané Rutual), while a sperm-whale confronts the coalition of animals and human tools (Table des Marchand). However Bronzo is a deformed toponym, untranslatable as such; why not search in a more or less recent past, through some unavoidable semantic or linguistic evolution, for traces of a probable or possible mutation of the word? At the end of a brief investigation, we suggest that the expression Men Bran Sao, "The Stone of the Standing Raven", known from the early 19th century, is the name of this monolith. Nevertheless, the last time that a bird was directly observed on this stela was during the 5th millennium; the two closely conected fragments, on the model of the neighbouring Grand Menhir, prove that the stone has not been displaced since that distant period. We consequently propose this explanatory hypothesis to explain in Bronzo such a radical change of name: a zoomorphic mythical entity that we recognize as a pigeon, attached since time immemorial to the stela in question, passed under the influence of the Brittonic language and the new culture to the designation of another ornithological entity, the raven. If a bird as clearly identified as the Bronzo has played a determining role in the mythical Neolithic Armorican bestiary, like the sperm-whale, a scientific step is now necessary to find some hidden occurrences in other poorly understood signs, since such an important representation in our interpretive schema, unique in Brittany, cannot remain isolated. We correspondingly claim, in this coherent and logical research prolonging the Bronzo discovery, that the only possible appropriate solution for the famous "horn" signs is a bird shown full on, in flight, with spread wings.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27923892

Journal Title: Diálogos: Artes, Letras, Ciencias humanas
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i27932546
Date: 6 1, 1968
Author(s): Xirau Ramón
Abstract: El problema es, naturalmente, mucho más antiguo. Podrían encontrarse sus orígenes en la discusión entre los partidarios del movimiento —más los discípulos de Heráclito que Heráclito mismo— y los partidarios eleáticos de la inmovilidad.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27932549

Journal Title: Diálogos: Artes, Letras, Ciencias humanas
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i27933019
Date: 8 1, 1972
Author(s): Dallal Alberto
Abstract: Sin embargo, Rousseau se dedica, como hombre que ha per- dido su "sencillez original" y ya no puede "pasársela sin leyes y patrones" a "respetar los cimientos sagrados" de su sociedad y "escrupulosamente a obedecer las leyes y a los hombres que son sus creadores y sus ministros", burlándose al mismo tiempo "de una constitución que puede ser mantenida sólo con el auxilio de tanta gente respetable... y la cual, a pesar de todos los cuidados de ellos, siempre produce más calamidades reales que ventajas aparentes".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27933025

Journal Title: Romanische Forschungen
Publisher: Vittorio Klostermann
Issue: i27942539
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Laferl Christopher F.
Abstract: In diesem Zusammenhang muß natürlich von kalligraphischen und sphragistischen Aspekten der Urkundenbetrachtung abgesehen werden, denn diese beiden fallen nicht nur in den Gegenstandsbereich der Historie, sondern auch in jenen der Kunstgeschichte, fur die Fragen der Ästhetik zentral sind.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27942542

Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27944038
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Towne Edgar A.
Abstract: Sheila Greeve Davaney, "Options in Post-Modern Theology," Dialog 26 (1987), 199.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944043

Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27944386
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Dorrien Gary
Abstract: Joseph L. Price, "Pedagogy and Theological Method: The Praxis of Langdon Gilkey," ibid., 465-83.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944392

Journal Title: Austrian Studies
Publisher: Maney Publishing for the Modern Humanities Research Association
Issue: i27944903
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): DERUCHIE ANDREW
Abstract: Danuser, Das Lied, pp. 107–11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944910

Journal Title: Revue économique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i27975857
Date: 3 1, 2011
Author(s): Sobel Richard
Abstract: Dans Les Chemins du paradis, Gorz est plus précis. En fait, il n'y a pas deux niveaux (macro- social hétéronome et individuel autonome), mais trois (les deux précédents plus un niveau micro- social autonome). Résumons ces trois niveaux: « 1) le travail macrosocial hétéronome, organisé à l'échelle de la société tout entière et qui assure le fonctionnement ainsi que la couverture des besoins de base [de l'ensemble des membres de la société] ; 2) les activités microsociales, coopéra- tives, communautaires ou associatives, auto-organisées à l'échelle locale et qui auront un caractère facultatif et volontaire, sauf dans les cas où elles se substituent au travail macrosocial pour couvrir des besoins de base ; 3) les activités autonomes correspondant aux projets et désir personnels des individus, familles ou petits groupes. » (Gorz [1988], p. 125-126.)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27975861

Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330145
Date: 9 1, 1980
Author(s): Clifford James
Abstract: Maurice Leenhardt's ethnographic work in New Caledonia spanned nearly half a century, from 1902-1948. The first part of this field research is described and analysed, as background to his later anthropological writings. Leenhardt's specific position as a missionary-ethnographer is discussed, its advantages and disadvantages weighed. A liberal missionary perspective is found, in this case, to be conducive to a portrayal of cultural process. Leenhardt's translation methodology and his relations with key informants are detailed. Transcription, the means by which ethnographic texts are constituted by more than a single subject, is speculatively extended to ethnographic practice generally. Field research may be seen as a collective, reciprocal endeavour through which textualised translations are made. This viewpoint calls into question common notions of description, interpretation and authorship in the writing of ethnography.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2801348

Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330179
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Spencer Jonathan
Abstract: This article reviews the recent interest in the literary aspects of ethnographic writing, concentrating on the work of Geertz, Sperber and the authors associated with the collective volume Writing culture. While it is argued that serious questions are raised in some of this work, it is also argued that recent fashions in literary critical theory may prove unhelpful in addresing those questions. In particular, the tendency to read texts with little or no consideration for the social and historical context in which they were written seems an especially barren approach. Instead it is argued that anthropology is as much a way of working-a kind of practical activity-as it is a way of writing. Acknowledgement of the personal element in the making of ethnographic texts may help the reader to a better assessment of the interpretation on offer; more radical change requires a change in anthropological practice as well as in anthropological writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2802551

Journal Title: American Antiquity
Publisher: Society for American Archaeology
Issue: i212395
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Leone Mark P.
Abstract: Archaeologists have tried to reconstruct patterns of thought, meaning, and ideas, using theories of structuralism, cognition, and ideology. Case studies involving each of the theories are described, and the strengths and weakness of their application to archaeological data are presented. Structuralism is found to yield substantial examples with well-worked treatments of archaeological data. These examples tend to ignore economic context, however. Materialism, especially neo-Marxism, contains thorough definitions of ideology that may be useful to archaeology because they preserve economic context. However, such definitions are new to the field and presently offer few well-worked examples of how to handle archaeological data.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/280280

Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330184
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Carrithers Michael
Abstract: Sociocultural anthropology and evolutionary biology have reached the point at which it is possible to give a coherent and synthetic account of the origins of human cultural variability. From a sociocultural perspective what must be explained is not just the fact of varying cultures and societies, but also the human capacity to create, maintain and alter social forms over time. From a biological perspective we have to ask, what is the selective advantage of such variability? The answer lies in human sociality. Sociality consists in a package of social intellectual capacities-higher order intentionality, pedagogy, narrativity, crativity, speech-which made possible an increasing division of labour. But as these capacities grew, they gave rise to distinctively human (rather than Darwinian) history, that is to the forms of social, political, economic and cultural causation which create ever new variations on the theme of social existence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2804560

Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: The Mediaeval Academy of America
Issue: i333021
Date: 4 1, 1946
Author(s): Gilson Gerhart B.
Abstract: Letter to André Fontainas of March, 1899, Lettres de Gauguin à sa femme et à ses amis (Paris, 1946), p. 288 Letter to André Fontainas of March, 1899 288 Lettres de Gauguin à sa femme et à ses amis 1946
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2854972

Journal Title: Social Studies of Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i212645
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Godin Benoit
Abstract: Literature discussing rhetoric is mainly concerned with rhetoric per se - its structure, and the categorization of arguments by kind. Rarely do rhetorical studies examine the actual effects on audiences, and auditors' reactions. On the other hand, sociological studies of scientific controversies look at rhetoric - or argumentation - in action, but with few references to rhetorical studies. The purpose of this paper is to integrate rhetorical studies into the sociology of technology in order to integrate the concept of action into discourse analysis. I intend to show how the use of discourse to enroll actors in a health technology is intimately linked to action. I deconstruct the promoters' strategy into two discursive components - the utility component and the fear-reduction component - to show how the rhetoric of expectations (utility) and representations (fear) contingently shape the fate of a technology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/285670

Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: Medieval Academy of America
Issue: i337890
Date: 10 1, 1980
Author(s): Wimsatt Linda
Abstract: Middleton, 127-36 127
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2865344

Journal Title: Shakespeare Quarterly
Publisher: The Folger Shakespeare Library
Issue: i338567
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Foucault Leeds
Abstract: conference "The Mental World of the Jacobean Court," The Folger Shakespeare Library, March 18, 1988. The Mental World of the Jacobean Court conference 1988
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2870707

Journal Title: Shakespeare Quarterly
Publisher: The Folger Shakespeare Library
Issue: i338604
Date: 12 1, 1983
Author(s): Price Michael
Abstract: Martin Price, Forms of Life: Character and Moral Imagination in the Novel (New Haven, CT: Yale UP, 1983), 55. Price 55 Forms of Life: Character and Moral Imagination in the Novel 1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2871252

Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: Medieval Academy of America
Issue: i346021
Date: 7 1, 1956
Author(s): HaackAbstract: Newsweek, January 30, 1956, p. 56. January 30 56 Newsweek 1956
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2903882

Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century Fiction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i348122
Date: 9 1, 1975
Author(s): Knoepflmacher John P.
Abstract: "George Eliot's 'Eminent Failure': Will Ladislaw," in This Particular Web, pp. 22-42
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2932968

Journal Title: Annual Review of Sociology
Publisher: Annual Reviews Inc.
Issue: i348454
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Kuklick Henrika
Abstract: Before World War II the intellectual climate of American sociology was congenial to the growth of a sociology of knowledge akin to Mannheim's. Yet in the postwar period American sociologists committed themselves to ahistorical theory, positivist methodology, and team research; their "scientistic" sociology did not permit the historicism, relativism, and holism necessary to Mannheimian analysis. Currently, however, convergent trends in a number of disciplines--not only sociology but also philosophy, anthropology, literary criticism, and the histories of ideas, science, and art--favor a revival of the Mannheimian program. Analysts of culture now seek to integrate the sociological goals of "explanation" and "understanding"--the formulation of quasi-laws of behavior, based on identification of the social structural elements of culture production, and the interpretation of the subjective meaning of culture, based on recovery of actors' intentions. Their research program requires investigation of the peculiar sociohistorical circumstances that condition actors' perceptions, necessitating attention to the cognitive content of culture. This article surveys both the theoretical justifications for such a research program and recent exemplifications of it, focusing on anlyses of what Mannheim termed "objective culture"--such symbolic vehicles for conceptions as religion, the arts, science, and political thought that acquire independent existence, becoming subject to diverse interpretations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2946067

Journal Title: The Journal of Higher Education
Publisher: Ohio State University Press
Issue: i348853
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Toma J. Douglas
Abstract: Using qualitative methods, I explore how paradigm choices influence scholars' professional lives in a single discipline, law. I contend there is a paradigm culture that operates in conjunction with other faculty cultures and suggest where my findings might extend to related disciplines, particularly those in the social sciences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2959968

Journal Title: Chasqui
Publisher: Chasqui: Revista de literatura latinoamericana
Issue: i29742024
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Ortega Francisco
Abstract: Francisco Ortega, Amizade e estética da existencia em Foucault, Biblioteca de Filosofía e Historia das Ciencias, 22 (Rio de Janeiro: Ediçoes Graal, 1999), especially 21-29; 123-143.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29742027

Journal Title: Gesta
Publisher: International Center of Medieval Art
Issue: i29764899
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): CARRUTHERS MARY J.
Abstract: To serve their purpose well, many so-called mnemonic images in the Middle Ages facilitated meditation and invention by presenting many rich materials in a highly abbreviated form, which could be expanded and recombined for a variety of compositions. To abbreviate fruitfully requires rigorous compression and selection, a kind of forgetting that was distinguished both in theory and practice from rote recitation or learning by heart. The twelfth- and thirteenth-century diagram called the Cherub offers an excellent example of how such an image was used in study and composition. Focusing on six versions of it, this essay demonstrates that the medieval cherub image is not an illustration tied to any particular text but functioned independently as an analytical tool, an art for inventing arguments, which incorporated the methods of medieval dialectic and rhetoric.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29764902

Journal Title: Review of Social Economy
Publisher: Catholic Economic Association
Issue: i29767894
Date: 9 1, 1968
Author(s): Goulet Denis A.
Abstract: 1960 by Lebret, "Problematique de la Morale Collective."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29767895

Journal Title: Cahiers d'Études Africaines
Publisher: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i29782741
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Chivallon Christine
Abstract: Yang-Ting (2000).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29782752

Journal Title: Cahiers d'Études Africaines
Publisher: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i29782767
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Giraud Michel
Abstract: Dubois 1998 : 8-9
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29782785

Journal Title: Social Service Review
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i30012379
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Cohler Bertram J.
Abstract: Particular problems are posed in the study of lives since the course of life may be less continuous and predictable than sometimes assumed. Further, the most important aspect of developmental study may be the subjectively constructed narrative of development, or life history, which itself changes over personal and historical time. Following the interpretive approach pioneered by Dilthey, Weber, Freud, and, more recently, Ricoeur, Taylor, and others, lives may be considered as texts to be studied in a systematic manner. The concept of empathy as formulated within the clinical situation, and applied most recently to study of biography, may also foster understanding of changes over time in the life history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30012382

Journal Title: British Journal of Ethnomusicology
Publisher: British Forum for Ethnomusicology
Issue: i30036862
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Laoire Lillis Ó.
Abstract: White 1998:38
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30036872

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i30038913
Date: 2 1, 2005
Author(s): Abizadeh Arash
Abstract: Fearon and Laitin 2000
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30038918

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i30040946
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Gordon Peter Eli
Abstract: Habermas, The Theory of Communicative Action, I: Reason and the Rationalization of Society (Boston: Beacon Press, 1984), and "Die Moderne-ein unvol- lendetes Projekt," Die Moderne ein unvollendetes Projekt, Philosophisch-politische Auf sätze (Leipzig: Reclam, 1994) 32-54.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30040953

Journal Title: The Crane Bag
Publisher: The Crane Bag
Issue: i30059451
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: Mircea Eliade, Myths, Dreams, Mysteries, p. 27
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30059472

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Centre national de la recherche scientifique
Issue: i30116051
Date: 3 1, 1982
Author(s): Vincent Gilbert
Abstract: Reflections by scientists, philosophers and sociologists upon the role of science as the motor of modern history show that apocalyptics can be interpreted neither as irrationalism nor as rhetorical, emphatic speech. Speaking out of the imagination, apocalyptics takes the form of a discourse that is hypercritical of and the least inexact about science, whenever scientific successes have rendered the habitual distinction between reality and model untenable. The imaginary realm of apocalyptics follows upon utopia and science fiction. However it has to be separated from "catastrophism". The latter still takes science to be a messiah because its idea of scientific develop. ment conceals favorable future effects underneath presentday catastrophic consequences. By refusing to separate intentions and effects and by objectifying science as a "totalizing" power, apocalyptics, on the other hand, leads to an irreversible situation that identifies history and destiny. Not only the semantic contents of the apocalyptic discourse are examined but also its "pragmatic" value is weighed. Its paradoxical declarations assume the form of a discourse whose proclamation has a meaning-an instituting scope-that literally contradicts its content, the proclaimed "non-sense" of science.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30116057

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Editions de l'Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales
Issue: i30116663
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Manevy Anne
Abstract: AUSTIN, 1955.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30116666

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Centre national de la recherche scientifique
Issue: i30128575
Date: 9 1, 1992
Author(s): Stoller Paul
Abstract: Avec cette ethnologie de la possession chez les Songhay l'auteur propose une anthropologie de la possession valable pour l'ensemble du monde noir. II établit un parallèle entre possession et roman folkloriste (ou blues) pour dégager cette mémoire profonde des hommes. Une analyse bibliographique critique atteste des progrès accomplis par les sciences sociales dans ce domaine. L'A. conclut que ce n'est pas seulement la vision qui déclenche la possession mais tout autant les odeurs, les sons et les rythmes. La possession lui apparaît comme un phénomène dont la fonction est d'orienter les interrogations des hommes sur leur identité personnelle d'une part et d'autre part, comme une manière d'aborder les manifestations extérieures qui les assaillent. Les différents sens sont évoqués en parallèle avec la littérature anthropologique concernant le « blues » nord-américain noir, en même temps que la dure quotidienneté actuelle. /// Con este análisis de la posesión entre los Songhaï, el autor propone una antropología de la posesión válida para el conjunto del universo cultural de las sociedades africanas. Establece un paralelo entre posesión y novela foklórica para poder desprender la memoria profunda de los hombres. Al conocimiento minucioso del terreno se superpone una investigación crítica de la bibliografía que permite comprender la progresión y los avances que las ciencias sociales han realizado en este sector. El autor llega a la conclusión que no es únicamente la visión que provoca la posesión sino, en igual medida, los olores, los sonidos y los ritmos. Presenta la posesión como un fenómeno que tiene por función orientar la interrogación de los hombres sobre su identidad personal por una parte y, por otra, como una manera de abordar las manifestaciones exteriores que les acometen. Las diferentes significaciones son evocadas en paralelo con la literatura anthropológica relativa a los « blues » norteamericanos. Al mismo tiempo, es la cotidianidad dura y concreta que es evocada en el estudio.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30128582

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Editions de l'Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales
Issue: i30128859
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Furtado Claudio
Abstract: Latouche, Laurent, Singleton, Servais, 2004
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30128866

Journal Title: Transactions of the Institute of British Geographers
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i30133352
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): della Dora Veronica
Abstract: Over the past few years, the relationship between landscape and the body as two physical entities mutually informed through performance has been increasingly interrogated by cultural geographers. Similar issues about memory, embodiment and performativity have been raised in the social sciences, yet often obliterating the material specificities of place and landscape. This paper reconsiders the relationship between landscape and memory in terms of embodied, visual and spatial practice, rather than as a contested cultural politics of heritage and identity (as it has been generally understood in cultural geography after the so-called 'cultural turn'). Drawing on Nora's 'memory places' and on the Deleuzian notion of 'ontological past', as well as on recent writing on historical geographies of exploration and travel, the paper explores the spatial re-activation of Classical historical memory by nineteenth-century British officers and travellers to Aegean mountain peaks through their embodied and site-located practices of climbing, surveying or simply 'gazing'.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30133358

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i30141875
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Matheson Tamara Chaplin
Abstract: Grain de Philo, Les mots de la philosophie, Pas si vite, Cogito, L'abécedaire de Gilles Deleuze and Philosophies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30141880

Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i30153101
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): McDonald William C.
Abstract: Wendy A. Bie, "Dramatic Chronology in 'Troilus and Criseyde'," English Language Notes 14 (1976): 13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30153106

Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i30154373
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Wogenstein Sebastian
Abstract: The question how to situate Dea Loher's drama Manhattan Medea in the Medea reception serves as a point of departure for a discussion of imitation, originality, and the act of copying. In their dialogues, the characters Medea, as in Euripides' tragedy a refugee, and Velazquez, a security guard, reflect on originality and imitation. The article explores the theoretical and self-referential aspects evoked by these discussions and links them with a more general inquiry into the dimensions of interpretation in the arts. The question of originality and appropriation is expanded and problematized through focusing on radical social criticism voiced among others by the drag queen Deaf Daisy. In this context the article also examines the potential of performative signification encountered in Medea's deadly bridal gift, especially in light of Marjorie Garber's remark that "[w]hat gets married is a dress." Transgressive in its form too, Manhattan Medea combines tragic elements and those characteristic of comedy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30154377

Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i30157392
Date: 7 1, 1984
Author(s): McDonald William C.
Abstract: Hie vor dô wir kinder wâren by Der Wilde Alexander (fl. 1250) proceeds from the words of St. Paul: "Even so we, when we were children [nepioi], were in bondage under the elements of the world" (Galatians 4:3). Accordingly, the "Kindheitslied" is no nostalgic song of retrospection in the form of sacred, didactic allegory (a gloss is absent), but rather is an extended scriptural analogy addressing the change from the Old Law to the New. The words dô and nu (1,1 and 1,7) reflect New Testament rhetoric. The biblical echo in the opening line permits immediate identification; thus Alexander relies neither on progressive unveiling of his message nor on a language or ciphers. The "Kindheitslied" can be profitably discussed in conjunction with the body of literature on the encounter of Church and Synagogue.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30157396

Journal Title: Osiris
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i213340
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Ricoeur Dominique
Abstract: Rancière, Les noms de l'histoire (cit. n. 23).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/301969

Journal Title: Revista Hispánica Moderna
Publisher: Hispanic Institute, Columbia University
Issue: i30203233
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Roberts Gemma
Abstract: Conflict, 428-29
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30203244

Journal Title: Revista Hispánica Moderna
Publisher: Hispanic Institute, Columbia University
Issue: i30203516
Date: 12 1, 1998
Author(s): Aggor F. Komla
Abstract: Artaud opts for lunacy, Nieva always emerges with "la risa" in the midst of tragedy (Barrajón 16)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30203531

Journal Title: Revista Hispánica Moderna
Publisher: Hispanic Institute, Columbia University
Issue: i30203651
Date: 6 1, 2001
Author(s): de Ràfols Wifredo
Abstract: Lima 56-57)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30203654

Journal Title: Computers and the Humanities
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i30204873
Date: 2 1, 2003
Author(s): Gardner Colin
Abstract: Traditional discourses upon literature have been predicated upon the ability to refer to a text that others may consult (Landow, 1994, p. 33). Texts that involve elements of feedback and nontrivial decision-making on the part of the reader (Aarseth, 1997, p. 1) therefore present a challenge to readers and critics alike. Since a persuasive case has been made against a critical method that sets out to "identify the task of interpretation as a task of territorial exploration and territorial mastery" (Aarseth, p. 87), this paper proposes the use of readers in an empirically based approach to hypertext fiction. Meta-interpretation, a method that combines individual responses to a text, reading logs, screen recordings and limited qualitative/quantitative analysis, and critical interpretation is outlined. By analysing readers' responses it is possible to suggest both the ways that textual elements may have influenced or determined readers' choices and the ways that readers' choices "configure" the text. The method thus addresses Espen Aarseth's concerns and illuminates interesting features of interactive processes in fictional environments. The paper is divided into two parts: the first part sketches out meta-interpretation through consideration of the main problems confronting the literary critic; the second part describes reading research aimed at generating data for the literary critic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30204878

Journal Title: Revista Hispánica Moderna
Publisher: Hispanic Institute, Columbia University
Issue: i30207958
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Garlinger Patrick Paul
Abstract: Derrida's well-known analysis of the link between "genre" and "gender" in "The Law of Genre."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30207972

Journal Title: Keats-Shelley Journal
Publisher: Keats-Shelley Association of America
Issue: i30210332
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Murphy John F.
Abstract: Reading Paul de Man Reading, ed., Lindsay Walters and Wlad Godzich (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1989), 155-70
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30210343

Journal Title: International Journal of the Classical Tradition
Publisher: Transaction Periodicals Consortium
Issue: i30222215
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Harth Dietrich
Abstract: C. Geertz: The Interpreation of Cultures. Selected Essays, New York 1973. Ders.: Local Know- ledge. Further Essays in Interpretive Anthropology, New York 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30222224

Journal Title: International Journal of the Classical Tradition
Publisher: Transaction Periodicals Consortium
Issue: i30222610
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): Forsyth Neil
Abstract: God who can both love and hate (1.5 - 8.32)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30222613

Journal Title: International Journal of the Classical Tradition
Publisher: Transaction Periodicals Consortium
Issue: i30224118
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Simons Karen
Abstract: Thomas' opposition of the personal and the traditional somewhat problematic, however; he writes, for instance, that "personal experience is private property, while literary tradition is shared and accessible to all poets" (183)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30224122

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern African Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i30224936
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Rubbers Benjamin
Abstract: In order to give an account of the Congolese tragedy since independence, the inhabitants of Haut-Katanga often resort to four different narratives: the abandonment by Belgium; the biblical curse on Africans; the conspiracy of Western capitalism; or the alienation of life powers by Whites. Though these four stories offer different scenarios, they are all constructed with two types of actors - Whites and Congolese people. This article suggests that this racial/national frame finds its origins in colonial and national ideologies, which have left their mark on Haut-Katanga, and that it continues today to structure the narratives through which people remember their post-colonial history. Collective memory and racial/national identity are reciprocally constituted in these stories, but in different terms. They offer, accordingly, different ways of influencing the present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30224943

Journal Title: Contemporary Religions in Japan
Publisher: International Institute for the Study of Religions
Issue: i30233022
Date: 9 1, 1968
Author(s): Ching Julia
Abstract: Ibid., p. 382.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30233024

Journal Title: Japanese Journal of Religious Studies
Publisher: Nanzan Institute of Religion and Culture
Issue: i30233809
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Rhodes Robert F.
Abstract: SEKIGUCHI 1968, 90.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30233812

Journal Title: boundary 2
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i213383
Date: 7 1, 1978
Author(s): Young Laura E.
Abstract: Singer, A Metaphorics of Fiction, 27. 27
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/303282

Journal Title: boundary 2
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i213389
Date: 7 1, 1992
Author(s): Hintikka Meili
Abstract: Bernstein, Beyond Objectivism and Relativism, 82. 82
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/303361

Journal Title: boundary 2
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i213385
Date: 4 1, 1929
Author(s): Dewey Ross
Abstract: The Later Works, 3: 10 10
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/303450

Journal Title: boundary 2
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i213396
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): Hardt Benjamin
Abstract: Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri, Labor of Dionysus (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1994). Hardt Labor of Dionysus 1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/303724

Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: Medieval Academy of America
Issue: i353371
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): Derrida Peter W.
Abstract: Jacques Derrida, "Différance," trans. Alan Bass, repr. in Hazard Adams and Leroy Searle, eds., Critical Theory since 1965 (Tallahassee, Fla., 1986), p. 121. Derrida Différance 121 Critical Theory since 1965 1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3040976

Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354091
Date: 3 1, 1996
Author(s): Goldbard Michael S.
Abstract: Arlene Goldbard, "Let Them Eat Pie: Philanthropy ;i la Mode," Tzkkun, xi, no. 4, July-Aug. 1996. Goldbard 4 xi Tzkkun 1996
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3046227

Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354093
Date: 9 1, 1988
Author(s): Taylor Karen
Abstract: Keith Moxey, "Motivating History," Art Bulletin, LXXVII, no. 3, Sept. 1995, 392-401 10.2307/3046117 392
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3046260

Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354352
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Geertz Larry
Abstract: Time and Narrative, i, Chicago, 1984 i Time and Narrative 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3051038

Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354358
Date: 3 1, 1978
Author(s): Warnock Jack
Abstract: Spitz (as in n. 75)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3051153

Journal Title: Yale French Studies
Publisher: Yale University Press
Issue: i355552
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): Proust Christie
Abstract: Marcel Proust, Jean Santeuil (Paris: Gallimard, 1971), 659. Proust 659 Jean Santeuil 1971
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3090583

Journal Title: Yale French Studies
Publisher: Yale University Press
Issue: i355554
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Sante Catherine
Abstract: Lue Sante, The Factory of Facts (New York: Pantheon Book, 1998), 175. Sante 175 The Factory of Facts 1998
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3090588

Journal Title: Social Problems
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i355770
Date: 5 1, 1982
Author(s): Zinn Francesca
Abstract: Derrick Bell (1992)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3097241

Journal Title: Technology and Culture
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i356114
Date: 1 1, 1936
Author(s): de Havilland Eric
Abstract: G. de Havilland, "'Filled' Resins and Aircraft Construction," Journal of the Aeronautical Sciences 3 (1936): 356-57. De Havilland concluded, based on preliminary research, that it was "likely that synthetic resins may one day play an important part in aircraft construction" (p. 357) de Havilland 356 3 Journal of the Aeronautical Sciences 1936
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3106748

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i356660
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Adorno Michael
Abstract: Theodor W. Adorno, Problems of Moral Philosophy, ed. Thomas SchriSder, trans. Rodney Livingstone (Stanford: Stanford UP, 2000) 70. Adorno 70 Problems of Moral Philosophy 2000
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3115175

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i356737
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Wendt Tim
Abstract: Huntington 1991, esp. 85ff 85
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3117924

Journal Title: The French Review
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of French
Issue: i357300
Date: 2 1, 1987
Author(s): Weedon Kathryn
Abstract: Computer-mediated communication (CMC) can spark students' interest and develop their cross-cultural communication skills. This article describes an on-going CMC cross-cultural project, "Images, Myths, and Realities across Cultures" (IMRAC), between French and American university students. The possibilities and limits of CMC are explored using the research of Claire Kramsch and Paul Ricœur, who provide a practical and theoretical framework in which to analyze student-authored writing. A three-fold articulation of self emerges as students participate in IMRAC. Through a process of mediation, the discussions on the chats offer students a praxis, a way of being that can contribute to making them more culturally literate citizens.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3133361

Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i357335
Date: 9 1, 1981
Author(s): Wolff Robert
Abstract: In his book, Art and agency, Alfred Gell presents a theory of art based neither on aesthetics nor on visual communication. Art is defined by the distinctive function it performs in advancing social relationships through 'the abduction of agency'. Art objects are indexes of the artist's or model's agency. This article examines Gell's use of agency, particularly in relation to the ritual art that is central to his argument. Focusing on Gell's employment of Peirce's term 'index' (out of his triad of index, icon, and symbol), I note that Peirce's approach deflects attention from signification towards the link between art works and the things to which they refer. I consider what Peirce meant by abduction, and conclude that while Gell makes a good case for the agency of art objects he does not explain the distinctive ways in which art objects extend their maker's or user's agency. Gell lacked the time to make detailed revisions before publication and I acknowledge that, given more time, he might have revised some parts of the book. / Dans son livre Art and Agency, Alfred Gell présente une théorie de l'art qui ne se base ni sur l'esthétique, ni sur la communication visuelle. Il définit l'art par sa fonction distinctive dans l'établissement de relations sociales, par «l'abduction de l'intentionnalité (agency)». Les objets d'art sont des index de l'intentionnalité de l'artiste ou du modèle. Le présent article analyse l'utilisation par Gell de l'intentionnalité, notamment dans le cadre de l'art rituel qui constitue un axe central de son raisonnement. En se concentrant sur l'usage par Gell du terme «index» de Peirce (dans la trichotomie index, icône, symbole), l'auteur note que l'approche de Peirce prête moins d'attention à la signification qu'au lien entre les œuvres d'art et les objets auxquels elles font référence. Il examine ce que Peirce entendait par «abduction» et en conclut que si Gell s'en tire bien sur l'intentionnalité des objets d'art, il n'explique pas de quelle manière distinctive ceux-ci prolongent l'intentionnalité de leur créateur ou de leur utilisateur. Gell n'a pas eu le temps d'apporter des révisions détaillées à son ouvrage avant publication, et l'auteur estime que s'il avait eu davantage de temps, il en aurait peut-être remanié certaines parties.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3134597

Journal Title: Church History
Publisher: American Society of Church History
Issue: i358721
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Bem Laurie F.
Abstract: Bem, The Lenses of Gender: Transforming the Debate on Sexual Equality (New Haven, Conn., 1993) Bem The Lenses of Gender: Transforming the Debate on Sexual Equality 1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3168841

Journal Title: History in Africa
Publisher: African Studies Association
Issue: i358795
Date: 1 1, 1986
Author(s): Shillingsburg David
Abstract: Peter L. Shillingsburg, Scholarly Editing in the Computer Age (Athens, Ga., 1986), esp. 31-43 Shillingsburg 31 Scholarly Editing in the Computer Age 1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3171834

Journal Title: Signs
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i358910
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Daly Gayle
Abstract: "The Diaries of Jane Somers: Doris Lessing, Feminism, and the Mother," to be published in Narrating Mothers, ed. Brenda O. Daly and Maureen Reddy (Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1991), in press Daly The Diaries of Jane Somers: Doris Lessing, Feminism, and the Mother Narrating Mothers 1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3174512

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i359014
Date: 2 1, 1976
Author(s): Naquin Hugh B.
Abstract: Susan Naquin, Millenarian Rebellion in China (New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1976) Naquin Millenarian Rebellion in China 1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3176606

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i359009
Date: 11 1, 1994
Author(s): Sahlins Aletta
Abstract: Sahlins, "Goodbye to Tristes Tropes." Sahlins Goodbye to Tristes Tropes
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3176685

Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i360632
Date: 4 1, 1995
Author(s): Tobias Arati
Abstract: The combined works of John Dewey and Jerome Bruner provide a framework spanning a century of educational thought which can inform curriculum decisions concerning students' educational development, especially for middle school students whose waning of motivation toward school has been well documented by researchers and has long concerned parents and teachers. This framework, combined with recent contributions of motivation and interest researchers, can create broad understandings of how to collaboratively construct effective educational contexts. As early as 1913, Dewey specifically looked at the pivotal role of students' genuine interests in Interest and Effort in Education. Our current research focus on how students' interest can inform curricular contexts marks the recent shift showing an increased use of interest in education research since 1990. In this article, we discuss our study of a team-taught double classroom of sixth grade students whose interests were determined through a series of brainstorming sessions, and individual and focus group interviews. Students' interests fell into six categories centering around subject areas such as Drama, Science, and Animal Studies. Learning contexts were constructed around four of these subject areas. Students participated in their first or second choice of subject area group. We found significantly higher scores on measures of Affect and Activation if students participated in their first choice group. We found intra-group unities of preferred and dispreferred ways of learning which distinguished each group from the class as a whole. Finally, our findings indicated that students reliably described their genuine interests over time. Students' interests were found to be effective tools for informing curriculum decisions in the creation of sixth grade learning contexts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3202129

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i361202
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): Celan Michael G.
Abstract: Collected Prose 48 48 Collected Prose
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3211128

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Political Science / Revue canadienne de science politique
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i362030
Date: 12 1, 1976
Author(s): Lane Richard
Abstract: David Lane, The Socialist Industrial State: Towards a Political Sociology of State Socialism (London: Allen and Unwin, 1976), 143-74. Lane 143 The Socialist Industrial State: Towards a Political Sociology of State Socialism 1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3227447

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Political Science / Revue canadienne de science politique
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i362151
Date: 3 1, 1996
Author(s): Lepetit Anne
Abstract: Lepetit, « Histoire des pratiques », 19. Lepetit 19 Histoire des pratiques
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3232167

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Political Science / Revue canadienne de science politique
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i362155
Date: 3 1, 1962
Author(s): Opitz Ellis
Abstract: Opitz and Sebba, eds., Philosophy of Order. Opitz Philosophy of Order
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3232806

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362311
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): Lukács William M.
Abstract: "Han- nah Arendt's Communications Concept of Power," Social Research 44, no. 1 (Spring 1977): pp. 3-25 1 3 44 Social Research 1977
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234279

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362308
Date: 4 1, 1971
Author(s): Miller Barry
Abstract: Ibid., p. 1058 1058
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234315

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362373
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Stites Alison
Abstract: Kathryn Sikkink, "Codes of Conduct: The WHO/UNICEF Case," Inter- national Organization, 40 (Autumn 1986): 815-40. 10.2307/2706830 815
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234960

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362393
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): Somers Rudra
Abstract: Since contending methodological perspectives and different types of research products are founded on irreconcilable philosophical assumptions, the sharp, recurrent debates over social science research methods are likely to be fruitless and counterproductive. This article begins by exposing some of the philosophical assumptions underlying the most recent calls for a unified social science methodology and seeks to help develop a common appreciation of how different kinds of methods and research products advance our understanding of different aspects of social life at different levels of abstraction. Such commonly posited dichotomies as deductivist/inductivist logic, quantitative/qualitative analysis, and nomothetic/idiographic research products are shown to obscure significant differences along a continuum of strategies through which context-bound information and analytic constructs are combined to produce interpretations of varying degrees of complexity or generality. Durkheim's conception of "organic solidarity" in a social "division of labor" serves as a useful metaphor here to capture the complementary roles performed by various research products as well as the trade-offs arising from the strengths and weaknesses of various methodological approaches (ranging from formal and statistical approaches to various case-based and interpretive approaches). Thus, sharp claims regarding the strengths and limitations of particular methods are transformed into elements of an overarching agnostic understanding of the trade-offs and complementarities among these methods. Finally, a distinctive role is identified for an ideal-typical "middle-range" comparative-historical approach in fostering greater communication among a more inclusively defined community of methodologically diverse social scientists.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3235291

Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i363325
Date: 1 1, 1880
Author(s): Spitta James
Abstract: 'Die Wiederbelebung', 57 57 Die Wiederbelebung
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3250669

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364501
Date: 6 1, 1925
Author(s): Blass-Debrunner-Funk Robert C.
Abstract: vs. 51
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3263096

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364491
Date: 12 1, 1965
Author(s): Moore John Dominic
Abstract: J. Jeremias (op. cit., p. 182)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3263614

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364607
Date: 7 1, 1976
Author(s): Payne Paul R.
Abstract: Payne, "Old Testament Exegesis"; idem, "Characteristic Word-Play." Payne Old Testament Exegesis
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3267083

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364637
Date: 12 1, 1963
Author(s): Horsley Alan
Abstract: Horsley, "Ethics and Exe- gesis," 17 Horsley 17 Ethics and Exegesis
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3268071

Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i364779
Date: 12 1, 1965
Author(s): Widengren Walter H.
Abstract: Jes P. Asmussen, "'Manichaeism," in Historia Religionum. op. cit., pp. 580-610
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3269640

Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i364806
Date: 12 1, 1973
Author(s): Kinsley Larry D.
Abstract: Kinsley, The Sword and The Flute, p. 125. Kinsley 125 The Sword and The Flute
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3269953

Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i364859
Date: 1 1, 1970
Author(s): Shepherd Hugh B.
Abstract: Shepherd, Introduction to The Diary of a Drug Fiend, Hyde Park: University Books 1970, vii-viii. Shepherd vii Introduction to The Diary of a Drug Fiend 1970
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3270489

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i371935
Date: 12 1, 1958
Author(s): Wittgenstein Yael
Abstract: Becker (1982: 135-36) 135
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3301099

Journal Title: University of Pennsylvania Law Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Law School
Issue: i273470
Date: 4 1, 1987
Author(s): Minow Steven L.
Abstract: Minow, The Supreme Court 1986 Term - Foreword: Justice Engendered, 101 HARV. L. REV.10 (1987) Minow 10 101 HARV. L. REV. 1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3312131

Journal Title: University of Pennsylvania Law Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Law School
Issue: i273488
Date: 4 1, 1991
Author(s): Delgado Richard
Abstract: Delgado & Stefancic, supra note 88, at 1930
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3312406

Journal Title: Anthropological Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Issue: i274774
Date: 4 1, 1979
Author(s): Young Jon W.
Abstract: Whose perspective is reflected in ethnographic accounts is the enduring problem in bringing ethnographic observation forward in the construction of ethnographies. Both ethnographic research and modes of account display a liminal character that puts this problem in a more organizational perspective on their heterogeneous authority and unites doing ethnography and constructing ethnographies in similar ontological ambiguities arising in the social organization of communication.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3317352

Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique
Issue: i274954
Date: 9 1, 1963
Author(s): Marx Pierre
Abstract: MARX (K.), Le 18 brumaire de Louis Bonaparte, Paris, Ed. Sociales, 1963, p. 13. Marx 13 Le 18 brumaire de Louis Bonaparte 1963
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3320234

Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique
Issue: i275032
Date: 3 1, 1971
Author(s): Veyne Francis
Abstract: Boudon (1984)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3321487

Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Editions Ophrys
Issue: i275054
Date: 9 1, 1971
Author(s): Veyne Nathalie
Abstract: E. Goffman, 1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3322166

Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Editions Ophrys
Issue: i275088
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Harrison Olivier
Abstract: de White (1992, 1995)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3323136

Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Editions Ophrys
Issue: i275093
Date: 6 1, 1963
Author(s): Wright Dominique
Abstract: Conan (1995)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3323160

Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Editions Ophrys
Issue: i275089
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Warin Claudette
Abstract: Meuret (2000)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3323204

Journal Title: The Canadian Journal of Sociology / Cahiers canadiens de sociologie
Publisher: University of Alberta
Issue: i275803
Date: 4 1, 1969
Author(s): WittgensteinAbstract: Baldus, 1990a
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3341193

Journal Title: Indonesia
Publisher: Cornell University
Issue: i367402
Date: 4 1, 1979
Author(s): Gadamer Razif
Abstract: Hans-Georg Gadamer, "The Problem of Historical Consciousness," in Interpretive Social Science, ed. Paul Rabinow and William Sullivan (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1979), p. 152. Gadamer The Problem of Historical Consciousness 152 Interpretive Social Science 1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3351308

Journal Title: International Review of Education / Internationale Zeitschrift für Erziehungswissenschaft / Revue Internationale de l'Education
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i368415
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): Young Chrysoula
Abstract: The paper begins with a clarification of the terms 'effective' versus 'successful' teacher and their implications. There follows a summary of the results of a study addressing the issues: a) which Careers Education and Guidance (CEG) aims in Greece are considered most important, and b) what constitutes a successful careers teacher. The study is based on the responses of careers coordinators in Greece and consultants at the Greek Pedagogical Institute. Issues concerning Information and Self-Awareness as Careers Education and Guidance aims are discussed, and an alternative approach to Information is suggested. The main emphasis is placed on the importance of the teacher as an indispensable factor for the implementation of CEG aims in particular, and educational aims in general. /// Der Artikel beginnt mit der Klärung der Begriffe "effektive" gegen "erfolgreiche" Lehrer und deren Bedeutung. Es folgt eine Zusammenfassung der Ergebnisse einer Studieüber die Themen: a) welche Ziele der Berufsberatung und -lenkung werden in Griechenland als wichtig angesehen und b) was macht einen in der Berufsberatung erfolgreichen Lehrer aus. Die. Studie basiert auf den Antworten derer, die die Berufsberatung in Griechenland koordinieren sowie der Berater im Griechischen Pädagogischen Institut. Streitfragen über Information und Selbsterkenntnis als Ziele der Berufsberatung und -lenkung werden diskutiert, und ein alternativer Ansatz zu Information vorgeschlagen. Das Hauptgewicht wird vor allem auf die Bedeutung des Lehrers als unersetzlicher Faktor für die Durchsetzung der Ziele von Berufsberatung und -lenkung im besonderen und die erzieherischen Ziele im allgemeinen gelegt. /// Le présent article commence par une clarification des termes "efficacité" et "succès" de l'enseignant et de leurs implications. On présente ensuite un résumé des résultats d'une étude portant sur les questions suivantes: a) quels sont les objectifs de la formation et de l'orientation professionnelles considérés comme les plus importants en Grèce, et b) qu'est-ce qui contribue au succès d'un professeur d'enseignement professionnel. Cette étude se fonde sur les réponses des coordinateurs de l'enseignement professionnel en Grèce et des consultants à l'Institut pédagogique grec. On discute des questions concernant l'information et la conscience de soi comme objectifs de la formation et de l'orientation professionnelles, et l'on suggère une nouvelle approche de l'information. L'accent majeur est mis sur l'importance de l'enseignant en tant que facteur indispensable à la réalisation des objectifs de la formation et de l'orientation professionnelles en particulier, et des objectifs éducatifs en général.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3444510

Journal Title: Hispania
Publisher: The American Association of Teachers of Spanish and Portuguese
Issue: i214785
Date: 9 1, 1972
Author(s): Carpio Teresa
Abstract: Al eliminar un tercio de la Fuenteovejuna de Lope para adecuarla a su público, Lorca genera un "tiempo de iniciativa" mediante la fusión del espacio de la experiencia de sus espectadores y su horizonte de expectativas. Al reconocer en la sociedad retratada por Lope aspectos limitantes de su realidad presente que aún no han sido superados, los espectadores convierten sus experiencias en un proceso dinámico que les permite imaginar un futuro en que tales limitaciones no existen. La fusión de ambos horizontes se logra mediante una intensificación de la acción colectiva que se muestra como una legítima herramienta de poder para modificar la historia. Con esta actualización de Fuenteovejuna, Lorca no sólo revitaliza la obra de Lope, sino que promueve una nueva concepción del poder cuyo ejercicio debe ser compartido por el pueblo y la autoridad. Estos cambios se enmarcan dentro del espíritu innovador del teatro modernista de comienzos de siglo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/345824

Journal Title: California Law Review
Publisher: School of Law, University of California, Berkeley
Issue: i276939
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): Donald Edward L.
Abstract: Johnson, Racial Critiques, supra note 6, at 155-60.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3480700

Journal Title: California Law Review
Publisher: School of Law, University of California, Berkeley
Issue: i276943
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Meisels Paolo
Abstract: supra note 232, at 83-100
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3480757

Journal Title: California Law Review
Publisher: School of Law, University of California, Berkeley
Issue: i276929
Date: 12 1, 1990
Author(s): Kagay Steven L.
Abstract: Id. at 8, col. 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3480802

Journal Title: California Law Review
Publisher: School of Law, University of California, Berkeley
Issue: i276945
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): Yeats Paul F.
Abstract: W.B. YEATS, The Choice, in 1 THE COLLECTED WORKS OF W.B. YEATS: THE POEMS 246 (Richard J. Finneran ed., 1989). Yeats The Choice 246 1 The Collected Works of W.B. Yeats: The Poems 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3480888

Journal Title: Educational Studies in Mathematics
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i277409
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Yang Anna
Abstract: In this paper we present an analysis of the articles in Educational Studies in Mathematics since 1990. It is part of a larger project looking at the production and use of theories of teaching and learning mathematics. We outline the theoretical framework of our tool of analysis and discuss briefly some of the methodological difficulties we face. We then present our findings from the analysis of the journal and we also give one example of how we 'read' an article, illustrating the rules whereby criteria are applied.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3483104

Journal Title: The William and Mary Quarterly
Publisher: Omohundro Institute of Early American History and Culture
Issue: i278777
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Naipaul Catherine
Abstract: V. S. Naipaul, "Reading and Writing: A Personal Account," Literary Occasions: Essays (New York, 2003), 3-31 (quotation, 30). Naipaul Reading and Writing: A Personal Account 3 Literary Occasions: Essays 2003
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3491726

Journal Title: Revue économique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i281438
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): Williamson Cécile
Abstract: Maeso-Fernandez, Osbat and Schnatz 120011
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3503213

Journal Title: The Yearbook of English Studies
Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Issue: i284496
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Kelly Tom
Abstract: Narrative Discourse, p. 222
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3509240

Journal Title: The Yearbook of English Studies
Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Issue: i284496
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Eco Catherine
Abstract: Umberto Eco, The Role of the Reader: Explorations in the Semiotics of Texts (Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1984), p. 100. Eco 100 The Role of the Reader: Explorations in the Semiotics of Texts 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3509251

Journal Title: The Yearbook of English Studies
Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Issue: i284496
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): Foss Alexander
Abstract: 'The Writer-To-Be: An Impression of Living', Sub Stance, 9 (1980), 104-14 (P. 10). 104 9 Sub Stance 1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3509253

Journal Title: Review of Religious Research
Publisher: Religious Research Association
Issue: i284859
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): Winter Gibson
Abstract: The natural science model has fostered fragmentation among the human sciences, leaving them ill-equipped to address matters of public policy which demand more holistic approaches. This paper proposes a science of political ethics which could encompass factual, normative, and value materials. Ricoeur's processes of guessing, explanation, and comprehension are used to develop a theory of interpretation for the new science. The work of art is used as the metaphor for interpreting societal processes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3510158

Journal Title: Review of Educational Research
Publisher: American Educational Research Association
Issue: i368708
Date: 4 1, 1989
Author(s): Yaroshevsky Peter
Abstract: This essay explores the notion of meaning, particularly as applied to acts of producing and reading texts. The analysis is grounded in principles of activity theory and cultural semiotics and focuses on the ways in which reading takes place among readers and texts in a culturally mediated, codified experience characterized here as the "transactional zone." The author builds on Vygotsky's work to argue that meaning comes through a reader's generation of new texts in response to the text being read. As a means of accounting for this phenomenon, examples are provided from studies illustrating, for instance, Vygotsky's zones of meaning, the dialogic role of composing during a reading transaction, and the necessity of culturally constructed subjectivity in meaning construction. The author concludes by locating meaning in the transactional zone in which signs become tools for extending or developing concepts and the richness of meaning coming from the potential of a reading transaction to generate new texts. "When I use a word," Humpty Dumpty said in a rather scornful tone, "it means just what I choose it to mean-neither more nor less." (Lewis Carroll, Through the Looking Glass)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3516069

Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: American Musicological Society
Issue: i369130
Date: 10 1, 1967
Author(s): Hansell Martha
Abstract: K. Hansell, "Opera and Ballet at the Regio Ducal Teatro," 1:114 Hansell 114 1 Opera and Ballet at the Regio Ducal Teatro
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3519834

Journal Title: Music & Letters
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i278818
Date: 8 1, 1990
Author(s): Moore Allan F.
Abstract: Gammon, 'Problems of Method'.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3526163

Journal Title: Revista Mexicana de Sociología
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Sociales de la Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico
Issue: i282488
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Yang Isabel
Abstract: Niethammer, 1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3541155

Journal Title: Revista Mexicana de Sociología
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Sociales de la Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico
Issue: i282494
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): Vernant Haydeé Silva
Abstract: j. P. Vernant, 1999, L'univers, les dieux, les hommes, Setiil, Paris, p. 118. Vernant 118 L'univers, les dieux, les hommes 1999
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3541493

Journal Title: Revista Mexicana de Sociología
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Sociales de la Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico
Issue: i282498
Date: 6 1, 1994
Author(s): Williams Farid
Abstract: Stewart, 1998: 507-508 507
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3541570

Journal Title: American Antiquity
Publisher: Society for American Archaeology
Issue: i369292
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): Zigmond Alanah
Abstract: Great Basin ethnography contains little information concerning rock art, suggesting that much of it is pre-Numic. The presence of historic rock art, however, should permit differences between pre-Numic and Numic populations to be identified. Anthropological theory suggests pioneer groups use ritual to socialize the landscape. Rock art may also be associated with colonizing groups to secure access to new resources. Numic populations seem to have responded to pre-Numic rock art through modification of the art. Once the landscape had been re-socialized rock art was generally avoided. This explains why rock art production became sporadic, and memory of it lost. /// La etnografía de Great Basin contiene poca información del arte rupestre, sugiriendo que mucho del este arte en roca es pre-Numic. La presencia del arte rupestre histórico debe identificar diferencias entre poblaciones pre-Numic y Numic. La teoría antropológica sugiere que grupos pioneros realizaron rituales de socialización en el paisaje. El arte rupestre estaría asociado con la colonización de grupos, para afianzar acceso a nuevos recursos. Las poblaciones Numic parecen haber respondido al arte pre-Numic a través de la modificación del arte. Una vez que el paisaje se había resocializado, el arte rupestre generalmente se evitó. Esto explica porqué la producción del arte rupestre fue esporádica, y su memoria se perdió.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3557085

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369550
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Rüsen Jörn
Abstract: Jirn Rüsen, Introduction: "Historical Thinking as Intercultural Discourse," in Western Historical Thinking: An Intercultural Debate, ed. Jörn Rüsen (New York: Berghahn Books, 2002), 1- 14 Rüsen Historical Thinking as Intercultural Discourse 1 Western Historical Thinking: An Intercultural Debate 2002
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590639

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369549
Date: 10 1, 1980
Author(s): Davidson Tor Egil
Abstract: idem, Essays on Actions and Events (New York: Oxford University Press, 1980), quotation from 230-231 Davidson 230 Essays on Actions and Events 1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590646

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369543
Date: 2 1, 1966
Author(s): Ricoeur Jonathan A.
Abstract: Ibid., 214-217.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590799

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369543
Date: 2 1, 2000
Author(s): Shatzmiller Abdelmajid
Abstract: Maya Shatzmiller, The Berbers and the Islamic State (Princeton: Markus Wiener, 2000) Shatzmiller The Berbers and the Islamic State 2000
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590803

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369553
Date: 10 1, 1958
Author(s): Benda A. Dirk
Abstract: Julien Benda, The Betrayal of the Intellectuals (Boston: Beacon, 1958). Benda The Betrayal of the Intellectuals 1958
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590818

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369544
Date: 5 1, 1931
Author(s): Tagore Peter
Abstract: Rabindra- nath Tagore, The Religion of Man (London: George Allen and Unwin, 1931) Tagore The Religion of Man 1931
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590880

Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i369787
Date: 7 1, 1919
Author(s): Wolf Nathaniel
Abstract: Coren's Sleep Thieves
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3593497

Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i282749
Date: 1 1, 1947
Author(s): Sund Brendan
Abstract: Sund, True to Temperament, p. 146 Sund 146 True to Temperament
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3600432

Journal Title: Past & Present
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i282783
Date: 11 1, 2001
Author(s): Kaschuba James M.
Abstract: Kaschuba, '1848/49: Horizonte politischer Kultur', 64. Kaschuba 64 1848/49: Horizonte politischer Kultur
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3600871

Journal Title: Journal of Anthropological Research
Publisher: University of New Mexico
Issue: i286652
Date: 4 1, 1972
Author(s): Yang Barbara
Abstract: Beginning in the 1970s there has been a shift in cultural anthropological methodology from participant observation toward the observation of participation. During participant observation ethnographers attempt to be both emotionally engaged participants and coolly dispassionate observers of the lives of others. In the observation of participation, ethnographers both experience and observe their own and others' coparticipation within the ethnographic encounter. The shift from the one methodology to the other entails a representational transformation in which, instead of a choice between writing an ethnographic memoir centering on the Self or a standard monograph centering on the Other, both the Self and Other are presented together within a single narrative ethnography, focused on the character and process of the ethnographic dialogue.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3630581

Journal Title: Slavic Review
Publisher: American Association for the Advancement of Slavic Studies
Issue: i370063
Date: 4 1, 2002
Author(s): Fabian Maria
Abstract: Ibid., 165.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3650070

Journal Title: Annals of the Association of American Geographers
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i370115
Date: 9 1, 1986
Author(s): Wrigley Trevor J.
Abstract: In this article, I reflect upon and attempt to understand the changing theoretical nature of post-World War II Anglo-American economic geography. In particular, I contrast the kind of theorizing that first occurred in the discipline during the 1950s with the very different kind now carried out under what has been called the "cultural turn" or the "new economic geography." I argue that, during this transition, not only did the use of specific theories alter, but the very idea and practice of theorization also changed. I characterize the phases of this movement by using the terms "epistemological" and "hermeneutic theorizing," defined on the basis of works by pragmatist philosopher Richard Rorty and science studies writer Donna Haraway. I argue that "epistemological theorizing" best describes the first period of theorization in the discipline around the quantitative revolution of the late 1950s and early 1960s, and that it is bound by the quest for accurate (mirror) representation. In contrast, hermeneutic theorizing describes the kind of theorizing found in the new economic geography, marked by an interpretive mode of inquiry that is reflexive, open-ended, and catholic in its theoretical sources.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3651287

Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i370165
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Zilberfein Carol A.
Abstract: Despite the abundance of psychological studies on trauma related ills of descendants of historical trauma, and the extensive scholarly work describing the memory politics of silenced traumatic pasts, there has yet to emerge a critical analysis of the constitutive practices of descendants of historical trauma. This article presents an ethnographic account of a support group for descendants of Holocaust survivors, proposing that the discursive frame of intergenerational transmission of Post Traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD) and support group based narrative practices allow descendants to fashion their sense of self as survivors of the distant traumatic past. The discursive frame of transmitted PTSD acts as both a mnemonic bridge to the past and a mechanism of identity making, as participants narratively reemplot their life stories as having been personally constituted by the distant past. A close ethnographic reading of on-site discursive practices points to how culture ferments to produce narratives, practices and ultimately carriers of memory to both sustain and revitalize historical grand narratives and the cultural scenarios they embed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3651794

Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i370173
Date: 3 1, 2001
Author(s): Walkerdine Valerie
Abstract: In this article, I seek to make an intervention in debates between psychological and postmodern anthropology by engaging with the theme of border crossing. I argue that the theme of the border is one that fundamentally instantiates a separation between interior and exterior with respect to subjectivity, itself a fundamental transformation and a painful and difficult border. This is related to a Cartesian distinction critiqued in this article. How the distinction between interior and exterior may be transcended is discussed in relation to examples of transformation from the crossing of class borders to the production and regulation of workers in a globalized and neoliberal economy. I begin with reference to postwar transformations of class with its anxious borders and go on to think about changes in the labor market and how these demand huge transformations that tear apart communities, destroy work-places, and sunder the sense of safety and stability that those gave. Advanced liberalism or neoliberalism brings with it a speeding up of the transformations of liberalism in which subjects are constantly invoked as self-contained, with a transportable self that must be produced through the developmental processes of personality and rationality. This self must be carried like a snail carries a shell. It must be coherent yet mutable, fixed yet multiple and flexible. But this view of the subject covers over the many connections that make subjectivity possible. I conclude by asking what it would mean to rethink this issue of the production of safe spaces beyond an essentialist psychological conception of only one mother-child space, separated from the social world, as having the power to produce feelings of safety? I end the article with an argument for a relational approach to subjectivity and sociality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3651801

Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i370160
Date: 9 1, 1987
Author(s): Young Brian
Abstract: Using life narrative interviews with Arab students with Israeli citizenship collected in 1997-98, I inquire into the processes and problems in talking about one's collective identity. In particular, I address how Arab students manage multiple identifications and the role of social relationships in shaping identity narratives. First, I argue that identity narratives do not voice a single point of view. Rather, identity narratives articulate multiple affiliations that, often, cohere in an uneasy fashion. Our identities are not incoherent, but such multiplicity provides the opportunity for talking about identity in novel ways. Second, I argue that social relationships are an integral part of identity stories that work to introduce, close off, balance, and rebalance possible self-identifications. In talking about identity, we narrativize our social relationships, and these narrated relationships are key points in the plotline of our identity stories. Drawing on this interpretation, I argue that social policies that equalize power relations and allow for the creation of social relationships based on mutual respect have the potential to shape identities that, without giving up valued affiliations, contain an acceptance of the other at their core.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3651874

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i370282
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Kuko Paul Richard
Abstract: White (note 1), 173
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3654042

Journal Title: Desarrollo Económico
Publisher: Instituto de Desarrollo Economico y Social
Issue: i370465
Date: 9 1, 1989
Author(s): Martin Mariana
Abstract: N. Loraux, Les mores en deuil, op. cit., p. 69 y p. 21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3655856

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i370519
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Eilberg-Schwartz Jonathan
Abstract: SBL conference in Boston, November 1999
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3657400

Journal Title: Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i370531
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): al-Ya'qūbī Mohammad Ali
Abstract: id., 'Imam absconditus and the beginnings of a theology of occultation: Imami Shi'ism circai 280-90/900 A.D.', JAOS, 117/1, 1997, 1-12 Amir Arjomand 1 1 117 JAOS 1997
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3657538

Journal Title: The Oral History Review
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i287269
Date: 10 1, 1991
Author(s): Soffer Andrew
Abstract: Soffer, "Oral History and the History of American Foreign Relations," 609-610. Soffer 609 Oral History and the History of American Foreign Relations
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3675588

Journal Title: SubStance
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i287917
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Perec H. Porter
Abstract: Assessing the limits of evolutionary and cognitive approaches to the study of culture goes to the heart of an issue that tends to divide humanists and scientists. The issue is how far, in dealing with complex cultural texts and the complex transactions we perform as readers, can we advance by scientific reduction? The issue is vexed by the fact that at times the complexity and novelty of humanistic discourse is little more than obfuscation and strained ingenuity. But such failings discredit neither the search for novelty, nor the earned perception of irreducible complexity, nor the immense importance of work that is necessarily, and terminally, speculative.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3685513

Journal Title: Revue belge de Musicologie / Belgisch Tijdschrift voor Muziekwetenschap
Publisher: Societe Belge de Musicologie / Belgische Vereniging voor Muziekwetenschap
Issue: i287990
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Loret Philippe
Abstract: Alain Loret, «L'athlète, le rocker et le surfer », in Génération glisse (Paris, Éditions Autrement, 1995), p. 30. Loret 30 L'athlète, le rocker et le surfer », in Génération glisse 1995
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3686915

Journal Title: Sociology of Religion
Publisher: Association for the Sociology of Religion
Issue: i288371
Date: 7 1, 1966
Author(s): WolfAbstract: For the past twenty-five years, a sub-branch of biblical studies has engaged, sometimes rather vigorously, in the pursuit of using sociological methods to understand the Bible. These, often autodidact biblical scholars, have taken over a branch of sociology of religion. The methods they follow in their pursuit of the strange world of the Bible can teach sociology how to retrieve a more critical sociology. The questions they ask would be helpful more generally to sociology of religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3711745

Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i288896
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): JonasAbstract: Hans Jonas, The Imperative of Responsibility. In Search of an Ethics for a Technological Age (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1984). Jonas The Imperative of Responsibility In Search of an Ethics for a Technological Age 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3735715

Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i288917
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): Sampon Emma
Abstract: 'Andre du Bouchet', in Six French Poets ofOur Time: A Critical and Historical Study (Prince¬ ton: Princeton University Press, 1979), pp. 124-39 (p. 137). Andre du Bouchet 124 Six French Poets ofOur Time: A Critical and Historical Study 1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3738410

Journal Title: Philosophy
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i289498
Date: 7 1, 1978
Author(s): Veyne Stephen
Abstract: Comment on écrit l'histoire, suivi de Foucault révolutionne l'histoire, by Paul Veyne (Paris: Editions du Seuil, 1978) Veyne Comment on écrit l'histoire, suivi de Foucault révolutionne l'histoire 1978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3750278

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290761
Date: 6 1, 1851
Author(s): Carbonnier Jean
Abstract: Nouvelles études évangéliques, Paris, Marc D)UClOux et Cie, 1851, p. 383 et suiv 383 Nouvelles études évangéliques 1851
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3768838

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290768
Date: 3 1, 1953
Author(s): Carat Pierre
Abstract: Preuves, 23, janvier1953 janvier 23 Preuves 1953
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3769902

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290812
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Winock Michelle
Abstract: Serge Moscovici, ≪ Passion révolutionnaire et passion éthi- que ≫, dans M. Wieviorka (dir.), op. cit., p. 89-109
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3770930

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290792
Date: 9 1, 1967
Author(s): Alexis de Jacques
Abstract: "Totalitarisme", "révolutions antitotalitaires", "refus de l'oppression", "dissidence", "résistance civile": autant de termes, anciens ou nouveaux, que la bascule du siècle à "l'Est" en 1989 nous oblige à revisiter, de 1939 à 1980, en passant par 1956. Jacques Sémelin entreprend ici cet indispensable travail de réflexion. /// "Totalitarianism", "anti-totalitarian revolutions", refusal of oppression, dissidence: the century's swing of the pendulum in "the east" in 1989 forces us to revisit these terms and concepts, from 1939 to 1980 via 1956. The author undertakes this reflection by basing his work on the notion of "civil resistance" of which he is the best advocate in France.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3770982

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290798
Date: 6 1, 1993
Author(s): Delage Christian
Abstract: Christian Delage, - Cinema, history, memory., Persistence of vision (New York), a paraitre Delage Cinema, history, memory Persistence of vision
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3771543

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290798
Date: 6 1, 1983
Author(s): Ricœur Emmanuel
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Temps et récit, tome 1, L'intrigue et le récit historique, Paris, Le Seuil, 1983 (Points Essais) Ricœur L'intrigue et le récit historique 1 Temps et récit 1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3771547

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290836
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Colas Patrick
Abstract: Documents parlementaires Sénat, 7 décembre 1922, n° 734
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772064

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290821
Date: 3 1, 1986
Author(s): Ricœur François
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Du texte à l'action, Paris, Le Seuil, 1986, p. 391 Ricœur 391 Du texte à l'action 1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772370

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290824
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Malraux Vincent
Abstract: Andre Malraux, Hommage à Jean Moulin et autres grands discours, Bry-sur-Marne, Institut national de laudio- visuel, 1989 Malraux Hommage à Jean Moulin et autres grands discours 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772428

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i371167
Date: 11 1, 2005
Author(s): Berliner David
Abstract: Memory, persistence, and cultural transmission are hot topics in anthropology today. Contributing to an increasing anthropological interest in youth agency, in this article I invite readers to look at youth as a crucial site for understanding issues of religious memory and cultural transmission. In the past five decades, Bulongic people (Guinea-Conakry) have undergone significant religious changes caused by the introduction of Islam, which has led to the official disappearance of pre-Islamic rituals. In this article, I explore how young Bulongic remember a pre-Islamic past that they have never experienced. I argue that, to understand how they assimilate and perpetuate this religious heritage, one must examine the subtle processes of intergenerational transmission through which their memories are dynamically shaped.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3805349

Journal Title: Hypatia
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i290859
Date: 4 1, 1981
Author(s): Johnson Jane
Abstract: As radical feminists seeking to overcome the linguistic oppression of women, Rich and Daly apparently shared the same agenda in the late 1970s; but they approached the problem differently, and their paths have increasingly diverged. Whereas Daly's approach to the repossession of language is code-oriented and totalizing, Rich's approach is open-ended and context-oriented. Rich has therefore addressed more successfully than Daly the problem of language in use.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3809997

Journal Title: Hypatia
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i290886
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Whitford Robyn
Abstract: Is history a category of reason, or is reason a category of history? These opposing questions have divided the structuralist from the materialist-but neither question is wrong. Analysis of the logic of oppositions challenges feminism, in particular, to find a logic-and a poetics-in which to render its values without historical or theoretical naiveté. I explore the question of the timing of feminism through Julia Kristeva and Luce Irigaray.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3810622

Journal Title: Huntington Library Quarterly
Publisher: Henry E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery
Issue: i292120
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Jacques A. J.
Abstract: Francis Jacques, Difference and Subjectivity (New Haven, Conn., 1991) Jacques Difference and Subjectivity 1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3817676

Journal Title: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: Temple University
Issue: i294250
Date: 7 1, 1915
Author(s): Cummings William
Abstract: Affirmations—Vorticism" (14 January1915), Visual Arts, pp. 7-8. 14 January 7 Visual Arts 1915
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3831319

Journal Title: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: Temple University
Issue: i294267
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Thomas Richard K.
Abstract: Pictures, pp. 238, 264
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3831545

Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i371427
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): McKendrick Karen L.
Abstract: Neil McKendrick, John Brewer and J.H. Plumb in The Birth of Consumer Society: The Commercialization of Eighteenth-Century England (Europa Publications: London, 1982) McKendrick The Birth of Consumer Society: The Commercialization of Eighteenth-Century England 1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3841014

Journal Title: Shakespeare Quarterly
Publisher: Folger Shakespeare Library
Issue: i371502
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Fraser Heather
Abstract: Russell Fraser, "Shakespeare's Book of Genesis," Comparative Drama25 (1991): 121-28 Fraser 121 25 Comparative Drama 1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3844057

Journal Title: Business Ethics Quarterly
Publisher: Society for Business Ethics
Issue: i294320
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): Westin Georges
Abstract: Recalling several profound disagreements about business ethics as it is currently discussed in Western societies, I emphasize the need for business ethics as an academic discipline that constitutes the "backbone" for both teaching business ethics and improving business practice (section 1). Then I outline a conceptual framework of business ethics that promotes a "bottom-up" approach (section 2). This "problem- and action-oriented" conception appears to be fruitful in terms of both practical relevance and theoretical understanding. Finally, I argue for (section 3) the relevance of discussing goals at all levels of human action (i.e., individuals, organizations, systems) as well as the indispensability of human rights, and propose Amartya Sen's "goal-rights-system" approach as a normative-ethical framework for business ethics that integrates these two fundamental aspects.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3857240

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i371616
Date: 5 1, 2005
Author(s): Borden William
Abstract: Iain Borden, "Cities, Critical Theory, Architecture," in Borden and Dunster, ed., Architecture and the Sites of History, 387-399 Borden Cities, Critical Theory, Architecture 387 Architecture and the Sites of History
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3874104

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i371617
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Ricoeur Michael
Abstract: Being and Time
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3874129

Journal Title: Comparative Studies in Society and History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i371889
Date: 4 1, 1977
Author(s): Williams Webb
Abstract: Hill 1995
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3879315

Journal Title: Comparative Studies in Society and History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i371885
Date: 4 1, 1988
Author(s): Scott Sam
Abstract: Joan Wallach Scott, "A Statistical Representation of Work: La Statistique de l'in- dustrie à Paris, 1847-1848," in Gender and the Politics of History (New York: Colum- bia University Press, 1988), 137. Scott A Statistical Representation of Work: La Statistique de l'industrie à Paris, 1847-1848 137 Gender and the Politics of History 1988
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3879450

Journal Title: Newsletter: Rhetoric Society of America
Publisher: Rhetoric Society of America
Issue: i375717
Date: 5 1, 1971
Author(s): YoungAbstract: vegincev, V. Semazjologija.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3885137

Journal Title: The French Review
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of French
Issue: i216617
Date: 12 1, 1986
Author(s): Worton David
Abstract: Michel Tournier is the most controversial French writer alive today. His fiction has provided fertile ground for diverse, often conflicting theoretical practices, and sharpened critiques, yet the author himself has remained aloof and is often perplexed at the way in which his work is received. Focusing on one story from Le Médianoche amoureux (1989), this article records a quest for the essential Tournier. Under the auspices of a master narrator, the reader of "Pyrotechnie" embarks on a voyage of discovery, which is ultimately one of self-discovery, for it finishes, delightfully, in the story-telling world of the child.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/397914

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i40000336
Date: 3 1, 2004
Author(s): Dhand Arti
Abstract: "The epic's view of this matter is far from straightforward" (367)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40005876

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i40000455
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Sizgorich Thomas
Abstract: Bourdieu, Outline of a Theory of Practice, 192-193.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40008441

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000757
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Novak David
Abstract: (Heidegger 1977, 308).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40014885

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame Press
Issue: i40000771
Date: 4 1, 1987
Author(s): Read Kay A.
Abstract: This paper continues a dialogue begun in the Focus on Cosmogony and Religious Ethics published in JRE 14/1 (Spring, 1986). There Charles Reynolds and Ronald Green argued for a model of comparative religious ethics that seeks to locate certain "descriptive universals" across cultural boundaries in diverse forms of religious ethics. The present paper argues that this approach is dangerously imbalanced in its emphasis on similarities, ignoring the importance of diversity for interpreting cross-cultural phenomena and tending to impose a heterogeneous conceptual framework on all religious ethical systems examined. Using the case of the Aztec ethic, the paper argues instead for an approach that studies each particular system in depth in its own context. Such an approach, besides being more faithful to each system being examined, also carries the potential of enriching the search for universals by nuancing the description of the patterns being sought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015049

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000783
Date: 10 1, 1996
Author(s): Hansen Anne
Abstract: Hallisey 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015212

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000790
Date: 10 1, 2001
Author(s): Ferreira M. Jamie
Abstract: Schrag 1997, 14n., 100, 144,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015299

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000791
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Schofer Jonathan Wyn
Abstract: Schofer 2003, 43-44.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015307

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000901
Date: 9 1, 2006
Author(s): Ferreira M. Jamie
Abstract: footnote 14
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40017697

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Religious Ethics, Inc.
Issue: i40000905
Date: 4 1, 1980
Author(s): McCann Dennis P.
Abstract: This essay explores the imaginative foundations of ethics, not by presenting a theory about the moral imagination, but by reconstructing the hermeneutic strategy underlying Reinhold Niebuhr's proposal for "an independent Christian ethic." The thesis is that Niebuhr's ethic cannot adequately be evaluated without careful attention to his hermeneutics, what he described as "the mythical method of interpretation." This point is argued first, by reconstructing Niebuhr's hermeneutics; second, by showing how his hermeneutics determines the strategy of his ethics; and third, by using this focus to clarify certain issues separating Niebuhr and some of his recent critics, specifically, William Frankena's criticism of his metaethics, Gene Outka's objections to his normative ethic of love as self-sacrifice; and John Howard Yoder's rejection of the strategy of his Christian realism as a whole. The essay is presented in the hope that Niebuhr's example will encourage American religious ethicists to explore the relationship between hermeneutics and ethics with greater intellectual sympathy and theoretical sophistication. The example of Niebuhr's "independent Christian ethic" is commended as one attempt to map the formal and substantive ways in which religious visions help shape our dispositions and moral choices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40017735

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i40000931
Date: 4 1, 1974
Author(s): Hauerwas Stanley
Abstract: Albert Speer's life offers a paradigm of self-deception, and his autobiography serves to illustrate Fingarette's account of self-deception as a persistent failure to spell out our engagements in the world. Using both Speer and Fingarette, we show how self-deception becomes our lot as the stories we adopt to shape our lives cover up what is destructive in our activity. Had Speer not settled for the neutral label of "architect," he might have found a story substantive enough to allow him to recognize the implications of his engagements with Hitler's Reich. This side of Auschwitz we require a story which allows us to appropriate our own capacities for evil and yet empowers us to go on.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40018102

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000936
Date: 4 1, 1993
Author(s): Wattles Jeffrey
Abstract: Ephesians 4:30: "Grieve not the spirit of God."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40018144

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000941
Date: 4 1, 2003
Author(s): Rees Geoffrey
Abstract: (Aquinas 1964, I-II, 81.1),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40018203

Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i40002095
Date: 4 1, 2004
Author(s): Hussain Nasser
Abstract: Clinton L. Rossiter, Constitutional Dictatorship: Crisis Government in Modern Democracies (1948).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40040179

Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i40002170
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Pettigrove Glen
Abstract: Hans-Georg Gadamer, "The Relevance of the Beautiful" (1977), in The Relevance of the Beautiful and Other Essays, Nicholas Walker, trans. (New York: Cambridge, 1986) 11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40041031

Journal Title: Technology and Culture
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i40002604
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Shah Esha
Abstract: several chapters in Shah (n. 3
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40061431

Journal Title: Journal of the Southwest
Publisher: The Southwest Center at the University of Arizona
Issue: i40004601
Date: 7 1, 1997
Author(s): Taylor Paul Beekman
Abstract: Troilus 5, 1786)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40170010

Journal Title: Research in the Teaching of English
Publisher: National Council of Teachers of English
Issue: i40004720
Date: 12 1, 1990
Author(s): Attridge Steve
Abstract: Vico maintained that metaphor is a fundamental process of human mental life which bridges the gap between emotion and cognition. This Vichian perspective is reflected in areas of critical theory treating metaphor and other tropes, particularly their use in narrative. In psychology too, the significance of metaphor is increasingly recognized despite the Cartesian emphasis on literal thought and language in contemporary psychology's central paradigm, cognitive science. The paper compares the Cartesian and Vichian perspectives and suggests that the former limits the integrated treatment of cognition and emotion. This is illustrated with an example of how a child's feelings about a distressing situation are both revealed and changed in storytelling. The Vichian perspective is more appropriate to understanding this therapeutic interaction of cognition and emotion through metaphoric narrative play. This perspective has significant echoes in psychoanalytic and textual studies suggesting how sensitivity to the latent content of narrative metaphors offers both speaker and hearer a unique insight into the experience of the narrator.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40171175

Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i40005456
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Pielhoff Stephen
Abstract: Ralf Dahrendorf, Das Zerbrechen der Ligaturen und die Utopie der Weltbürgergesellschaft, in: Ulrich Beck u. Elisabeth Beck-Gernsheim (Hg.), Riskante Freiheiten. Individualisierung in modernen Gesellschaften, Frankfurt 1994, S. 421-436.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40182220

Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005493
Date: 3 1, 1984
Author(s): del Aguila Tejerina Rafael
Abstract: J. Muguerza, "La crisis de identidad de la filosofía de la identidad (una aproximación teológico-política)", op. cit., p. 36.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183055

Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005525
Date: 6 1, 1993
Author(s): de la Yncera Ignacio Sánchez
Abstract: Ibidem, p. 36.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183635

Journal Title: Reis: Revista Española de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005526
Date: 9 1, 1993
Author(s): Donati Pierpaolo
Abstract: P. Donati (1985), cap. 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183648

Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005535
Date: 9 1, 1992
Author(s): Guillén Mauro F.
Abstract: Las profesiones contemporáneas actúan en un medio dominado por las grandes empresas y por el Estado, verificándose una división del trabajo experto entre los diversos grupos profesionales. En este artículo se estudia el caso de las ocupaciones y profesiones económicas españolas en perspectiva histórica y comparada. El marco teórico recalca la importancia de estudiar las luchas entre diversos grupos ocupativos y profesionales por controlar esferas de actuación, institucionalizar la enseñanza universitaria, crear y reproducir un conocimiento profesional abstracto y exclusivo, convencer a la opinión pública y obtener legislación estatal favorable. También se analizan las mentalidades e ideologías profesionales y su incidencia sobre la dinámica de poder y cambio, no solamente del sistema de profesiones en su conjunto, sino también dentro de cada grupo profesional.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183824

Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005542
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Baena Enrique Luque
Abstract: (Jaeger, 1960, pp. 315-316).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183985

Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005571
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): Flyvbjerg Bent
Abstract: Diccionario (1984).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40184584

Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005577
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Alastuey Eduardo Bericat
Abstract: El presente artículo expone los principales resultados de una investigación realizada con el objeto de analizar el papel que cumplen las emociones colectivas en el mantenimiento del orden social. En concreto, trata de explicar el hecho de que las noticias más importantes que aparecen en los medios de comunicación sean noticias de horror, es decir, noticias en las que la muerte siempre aparece en el primer plano de la escena. Los informativos de los medios de comunicación expresan y fomentan la cultura del horror característica de nuestras sociedades avanzadas. Ahora bien, para entender esta cultura es preciso determinar previamente la naturaleza emocional del horror, así como establecer una definición sociológica de este sentimiento. El horror es una emoción compleja compuesta por sentimientos de terror, de asco y de conmoción. El horror, sociológicamente, puede entenderse como "la emoción mediante la que un orden social señala sus límites más extremos". El estudio concluye señalando que existen dos modos alternativos de mantener el orden y la cohesión en el seno de un sistema social. El primer modo de legitimación, característico de las sociedades centrípetas, funciona mediante la gran potencia atractiva que ejerce sobre el campo social un núcleo central de valores sociales positivos. El segundo, característico de las sociedades centrífugas, funciona mediante la gran potencia repulsiva que ejercen sobre el campo social las transgresiones flagrantes del orden moral. El modo típico en el que las sociedades centrífugas regulan el orden social explica la cultura del horror característica de nuestras sociedades avanzadas. /// This article sets out the main results obtained from a research study carried out for the purpose of analysing the role that collective emotions play in maintaining social order. In specifíc terms, it attempts to explain the fact that the most important items of news that appear in the media are news of horror, in other words, news in which death always appears in the foreground. The news programmes of the media express and encourage the culture of horror that is characteristic of our advanced societies. However, in order to understand this culture, we must first establish the emotional nature of horror and also establish a sociological definition of this feeling. Horror is a complex emotion made up of feelings of terror, disgust and shock. Sociologically speaking, horror can be understood as "the emotion through which a social order indicates its outermost limits". The study concludes showing that there are two alternative ways of maintaining order and cohesión within the bosom of a social system. The first method of legitimation, which is characteristic of centripetal societies, works through the great power of attraction it exerts over the social field of a central nucleus of positive social values. The second, which is characteristic of centrifugal societies, works through the great power of repulsion exerted by flagrant transgressions of moral order over the social field. The typical method in which centrifugal societies regulate social order explains the culture of horror that is characteristic of our advanced societies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40184683

Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005583
Date: 9 1, 2006
Author(s): Cruz María Luengo
Abstract: McRobbie (1994).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40184768

Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i40005676
Date: 3 1, 1996
Author(s): Raphael Lutz
Abstract: Frankfurt 1976. (franz.: L'ontologie politique de Martin Heidegger, in: Actes de la recherche en sciences sociales 5-6. 1975, S. 109-56).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40185766

Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i40005685
Date: 12 1, 1998
Author(s): Lorenz Chirs
Abstract: Zagorin, Historiography and Postmodernism, S. 271,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40185861

Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i40005703
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Epple Angelika
Abstract: Koselleck, Darstellung, Ereignis und Struktur, S. 149.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40186008

Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i40005704
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Lehmkuhl Ursula
Abstract: Wehler, "Moderne" Politikgeschichte, S. 266.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40186015

Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i40005728
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Dejung Christof
Abstract: Jakob Tanner, Historisch Anthropologie zur Einführung, Hamburg 2004, S. 117-122.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40186237

Journal Title: Research in Higher Education
Publisher: Human Sciences Press, Inc.
Issue: i40006432
Date: 10 1, 1999
Author(s): Toma J. Douglas
Abstract: With the rise of alternative inquiry paradigms across academic fields, faculty within the same academic departments choose to ground themselves within different intellectual traditions and distinct academic cultures, not simply those parallel to the positivist tradition. One illustration of the emerging paradigmatic pluralism across academe is the actual paradigm choice by individual scholars. Appreciating these paradigm choices is critical if we are to interpret the faculty work and faculty culture that shape institutional culture and influence resource allocation at universities and colleges. Using qualitative methods, I focus upon a single discipline in my exploratory study, law, but extend these concepts and issues in analyzing and interpreting my findings to how they might apply to faculty working in other academic fields.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40196372

Journal Title: Geografiska Annaler. Series B, Human Geography
Publisher: Swedish Society for Anthropology and Geography
Issue: i40006783
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Dodgshon Robert A.
Abstract: From the moment it began to engage with time in a considered way, human geography has employed a variety of analytical and conceptual approaches to it. Recent work especially has greatly extended the range of these different approaches by stressing the innate variability of time, leading some to talk of 'multiple temporalities' and to pronounce time as 'uneven' even within the same society. Fractured by such differences over how time may be used and interpreted, the possibility of an overarching concept of time in human geography has long gone. However, this does not prevent us from asking whether it is still possible to produce a coherent review of the differences involved. This paper offers such a review, arguing that setting these differences down within a structured framework can provide a clearer sense of how diverse the debate among human geographers has become and the trends of thought that have underpinned this growing diversity. Among the trends identified, it places particular stress on the shift from objectified interpretations to those dealing with relational forms of lived and experiential time and on how the separation of early discussions of space from those on time, their dimensional stand-off from each other, has slowly given way to a view in which space and time are treated as sticky concepts that are difficult to separate from each other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40205021

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i40007298
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): McManus Helen
Abstract: Tracy Strong, "Introduction: The Self and the Political Order", in The Self and the Political Order, ed. Tracy Strong (New York: New York University Press, 1992), 3, 7.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40213520

Journal Title: Intégral
Publisher: Eastman School of Music
Issue: i40007321
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Korsyn Kevin
Abstract: Richard Rorty in Contingency, Irony, and Solidarity (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40213949

Journal Title: Intégral
Publisher: Department of Music Theory, Eastman School of Music, University of Rochester
Issue: i40007332
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Wheeldon Marianne
Abstract: Hutcheon, Parody. 101.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40214086

Journal Title: Imago Mundi
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i40008710
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Schauerte Paul
Abstract: A comparison of Giuseppe Bagetti's landscape sketches, watercolours, oil paintings and engravings with contemporary maps and the existing landscape reveals that in the creation of Bagetti's landscapes, narrative played a role that differed in cartographic and artistic representations. The comparison also demonstrates that his images were powerful constructions that were more successful in reflecting a narrative of glorious conquest than was possible through cartography. This paper offers a critical examination of Bagetti's representations of Napoleon's northern Italian campaign, which he sketched and painted between 1802 and 1809. Bagetti's paintings were neither pacifist nor an expression of Piedmontese patriotism but instead were inspired by, and constructed according to, a narrative about the conquest that reflected the views of the French authorities. The narrative found expression in formal written instructions from the central cartographical office in the Dépôt de la guerre, Paris, in verbal and written instructions from Bagetti's immediate superior, Jean François Martinel, and in letters personally addressed to Bagetti from the officer commanding the Dépôt. It is clear from a careful reading of the correspondence and from a comparison of Bagetti's paintings with both the present landscape and maps made at the time that Bagetti's disputes with his supervisors revolved around protecting his artistic integrity and reputation rather than resisting the authority of a foreign regime. /// Une comparaison entre les dessins, aquarelles, peintures et gravures de paysages de Giuseppe Bagetti avec des cartes de son temps et les paysages actuels révèle que dans la création des paysages de Bagetti le récit ne joue pas le même rôle que dans les représentations cartographiques et artistiques. La comparaison démontre également que ses images étaient des constructions puissantes qui reflétaient l'histoire d'une conquête victorieuse plus efficacement que la cartographie ne le permettait. Cet article propose un examen critique des représentations des campagnes napoléoniennes en Italie du Nord, dessinées ou peintes par Bagetti entre 1802 et 1809. Les peintures de Bagetti n'étaient ni pacifistes, ni représentatives d'un patriotisme piémontais, mais au contraire inspirées par un récit de la conquête qui reflétait les vues des autorités françaises et construites selon celui-ci. Ce récit se trouvait exprimé dans les instructions écrites de l'office central de cartographie du Dépôt de la Guerre à Paris, dans les instructions verbales et écrites du supérieur direct de Bagetti, Jean-François Martinel, et dans les lettres adressées à Bagetti en personne par l'officier qui dirigeait le Dépôt. Il est clair, si on lit attentivement la correspondance et si l'on compare les peintures de Bagetti avec le paysage actuel et les cartes faites à l'époque, que les discussions entre Bagetti et ses chefs tournaient autour de la préservation de son intégrité et de sa réputation artistique plutôt que de sa résistance à l'autorité d'un régime étranger. /// Ein Vergleich von Giuseppe Bagettis Landschaftsskizzen, Aquarellen, Ölbildern und Druckgraphiken mit zeitgenössischen Karten und der erhaltenen realen Landschaft zeigt, dass bei der Entstehung von Bagettis Landschaftsdarstellungen eine Variante der Ereignisgeschichte eine Rolle spielte, die in seinem Werk zu anderen Ergebnissen führte als bei kartographischen und anderen künstlerischen Darstellungen. Die Vergleiche zeigen auch, dass dabei aussagestarke Bilder entstanden, die die Geschichte der erfolgreichen Eroberungen besser transportierten als es mit den Mitteln der Kartographie möglich war. In diesem Beitrag werden Bagettis Darstellungen der Oberitalienischen Feldzüge Napoleons, die er zwischen 1802 und 1809 anfertigte, kritisch gewürdigt. Seine Darstellungen waren weder pazifistisch noch Ausdruck eines Piemontesischen Patriotismus, sondern Bagetti folgte bei der Konzeption seiner Landschaftsdarstellungen der von offizieller französischer Seite bevorzugten Sichtweise der Geschichte der Eroberungen. Seine Grundlagen bildeten formelle schriftliche Instruktionen der zentralen kartographischen Einrichtung, des Dépôt de la guerre in Paris, sowie mündliche und schriftliche Anweisungen durch Bagettis unmittelbaren Vorgesetzten, Jean François Martinel. Darüber hinaus erhielt er Briefe, die vom Kommandanten des Dépôt de la guerre an ihn persönlich gerichtet waren. Bei sorgfältiger Auswertung dieser Korrespondenz und dem Vergleich seiner Gemälde mit der erhaltenen realen Landschaft und den zeitgenössischen Karten wird deutlich, dass es bei Bagettis Auseinandersetzungen mit seinen Vorgesetzten mehr um Fragen seiner künstlerischen Integrität und Reputation ging als um den Widerstand gegen die Autorität eines fremden Regimes. /// Una comparación de los bocetos de paisajes, aguadas, óleos y grabados de Giuseppe Bagetti con mapas contemporáneos y con el paisaje existente, revela que en la creación paisajística de Bagetti la narrativa jugó un papel diferente de las representaciones cartográficas y artísticas. La comparación también demuestra que sus imágenes eran poderosas construcciones que reflejaban una narrativa de famosas conquistas de manera más acertada de lo que era posible a través de la cartografía. Este artículo ofrece un examen crítico de las representaciones de las campañas napoleónicas en el norte de Italia, que Bagetti dibujó y pintó entre 1802 y 1809. Las pinturas de Bagetti no fueron ni pacifistas ni una expresión del patriotismo piamontés, sino que fueron inspiradas y construidas de acuerdo a una narrativa sobre la conquista que reflejaba el punto de vista de las autoridades francesas. La narrativa encontró su expresión en instrucciones formales escritas desde el centro cartográfico del Dépôt de la Guerre en Paris, en instrucciones verbales y escritas del inmediato superior de Bagetti, Jean François Martinel y en cartas personales dirigidas a Bagetti por el oficial que mandaba el Dépôt. Queda claro, a través de una cuidadosa lectura de la correspondencia y de la comparación de las pinturas de Bagetti con el paisaje actual y con los mapas de su tiempo, que las disputas de Bagetti con su supervisor se centraban en proteger su integridad artística y su reputación más que en resistirse a la autoridad de un régimen extranjero.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40233993

Journal Title: The British Journal for the History of Science
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i385381
Date: 12 1, 1987
Author(s): Latour J. R. R.
Abstract: New York Times (19 April1987, section 6, p. 42) 19 April 42 New York Times 1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4027463

Journal Title: Journal of Southern African Studies
Publisher: Routledge, Taylor & Francis Group
Issue: i40011236
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): Igreja Victor
Abstract: A. Guebuza, at the time Frelimo candidate for the national presidential elections. Domingo, 15 August 2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40283167

Journal Title: Ethical Theory and Moral Practice
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40011321
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Foster Gary
Abstract: Alan Soble (2005), p. 13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40284280

Journal Title: Educational Studies in Mathematics
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40011337
Date: 11 1, 2008
Author(s): Brown Tony
Abstract: (Brown, Atkinson and England 2006, pp. 244-254)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40284549

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40011359
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Dawdy Shannon Lee
Abstract: -Ibid., t. 1, p. 112.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40284757

Journal Title: The American Archivist
Publisher: Society of American Archivists
Issue: i40011857
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): Mifflin Jeffrey
Abstract: James Clifford, On the Edges of Anthropology: Interviews (Chicago: Prickly Paradigm Press, 2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40294449

Journal Title: The American Archivist
Publisher: Society of American Archivists
Issue: i40011862
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Tussing Nicholas J.
Abstract: Pietro Balan, Gli archivi della S. Sede in relazione alla storia d'Italia. Discorso recitato nella Pontificia accade- mia di religione cattolica di Roma nel giorno 5 maggio 1881 (Rome: Fratelli Monaldi, 1881).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40294575

Journal Title: Nueva Revista de Filología Hispánica
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012105
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Valdés Mario J.
Abstract: Alfred Schutz, The phenomenology of the social world, Northwestern University Press, Evanston, 1967.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40298965

Journal Title: Nueva Revista de Filología Hispánica
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012112
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Resina Joan Ramón
Abstract: Clarín en su obra ejem- plar, Castalia, Madrid, 1985, p. 154.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40299118

Journal Title: Nueva Revista de Filología Hispánica
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012152
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Cuarón Beatriz Garza
Abstract: ed. cit., p. 195, nota 28.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40300282

Journal Title: Nueva Revista de Filología Hispánica
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012166
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Alí María Alejandra
Abstract: P. Ricoeur, op. cit, p. 209.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40300651

Journal Title: Estudios de Asia y Africa
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012903
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Duceux Isabelle
Abstract: Th. De Bary, "Individualism and Humanitarianism in Late Ming Thought", en ibid., p. 146.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40313608

Journal Title: Estudios de Asia y Africa
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012913
Date: 8 1, 2008
Author(s): Muñoz Adrián
Abstract: Theosophical Transactions, en Thompson, op. cit., p. 39.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40313753

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40012947
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Ricoeur Paul
Abstract: O.c. p. 102-3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40314288

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40012947
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Henriques Fernanda
Abstract: KICOEUR, Paul -La metaphore vive, op.cit, p. 375.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40314300

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40012947
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): de Ternay Henri D'Aviau
Abstract: (Ak VI, 44; PI 3, 60)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40314301

Journal Title: Oceania
Publisher: University of Sydney
Issue: i40014217
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): Telban Borut
Abstract: By focusing on children involved in the ritual practices in Ambonwari village, East Sepik Province, Papua New Guinea, this essay compares two types of ritual: that of healing and that of male initiation. Like other life crisis rituals both deal with two dimensions of the Ambonwari life-world, that is with the living and the dead and, in a broader sense, with people and spirits. Though both are based upon the same cosmology there are fundamental differences between them. First, healers in healing ceremonies treat uninitiated children as 'non-beings'. From the perspective of Ambonwari 'selves' or 'beings', children belong to this domain. They exist as extensions of their parents or carers, from whom they cannot be separated conceptually. Second, by examining the Ambonwari concepts of negation I show that healers do not approach the domain of cosmological non-existence: they are not concerned with the cosmogony of the Ambonwari life-world. The male initiation rituals do just the opposite, however. It is only in the male initiation ritual, seen as a cosmogonic event, that young boys are cut off from their parents and 'thrown' abruptly into a state of becoming. Unlike the healing rites, these rituals treat young boys as both Ambonwari beginnings and Ambonwari beings. I argue that Ambonwari initiation rituals are not concerned with symbolic death followed by rebirth, but with states of being. Initiation means that death becomes possible for a child. The initiated boy will now be able to die as an Ambonwari being.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40331578

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014410
Date: 6 1, 1988
Author(s): Vila-Chã João
Abstract: Francis Jacques, op. cit., p. 21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335930

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014411
Date: 9 1, 1988
Author(s): Morujão Alexandre Fradique
Abstract: "Wir bestimmen den Begriff der Situation eben dadurch; dass sie einen Standort dar- stellt, der die Möglickeiten des Sehens beschränkt. Zum Begriff der Situation gehört daher wesenhaft der Begriff des Horizontes", p. 286.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335935

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014414
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Morujão Alexandre Fradique
Abstract: Entretiens Paul-Ricoeur Gabriel Marcel, pp. 63-64.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335968

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014415
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Araújo Alberto Filipe
Abstract: C.R.S.E., Proposta Global de Reforma (Relatório Final), p. 21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335981

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014421
Date: 6 1, 1989
Author(s): Do Carmo Silva Carlos Henrique
Abstract: Occam: T 5.47321 e 3.328:
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336050

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Henriques Fernanda
Abstract: Ricoeur em Temps et Récit I, Paris, Seuil, 1983, 12:
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336078

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): da Silva Estanqueiro Rocha Acílio
Abstract: HN. 614-615.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336079

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Costa Miguel Dias
Abstract: KRISHNAMURTI, La révolution du silence, Ed. Stock, Paris, 1977.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336081

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014463
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Renaud Michel
Abstract: "Pléiade". t. 3. p. 50.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337055

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014464
Date: 9 1, 1994
Author(s): do Carmo Silva Carlos Henrique
Abstract: S. BRETON, "Examen particulier", in: L. GI ARD, ed., Philosopher par passion etpar raison -S. Breton, Grenoble, J. Millon, 1990, pp. 8
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337098

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014467
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): da Luz José Luís Brandão
Abstract: Id., ibid, p. 44.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337135

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014477
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): da Veiga Manuel Alte
Abstract: Na la meditação «em que se pretende não falar de valor», o autor esforça-se por manter um discurso linear sobre o interesse humano de pensar e agir relativamente a um tema tão fundamental, que parece quase impossivel evitar a «petitio principii». Pode-se sintetizar a primeira meditação nestas duas alíneas: (a) O desejo de felicidade é o grande motor da busca de meios para uma vida sempre melhor; (b) O ser humano estrutura a sua ideia de felicidade, vida, meios adequados, objectivos de graus diversos, em função dos conhecimentos de que disōpe. A 2 a meditação reconhece que a neutralidade de discurso da 1a meditação não teve éxito. As palavras são extremamente analógicas e pressupōem um «pensamento e discurso ocultos» , coniventes com o conceito de valor, que se pretendia evitar. O desejo de plenitude da qualidade de vida implica o acto, por vezes inconsciente, de valorização. /// The 1.st meditation aims to maintain a discourse independent of the concept of value. Like in an « Impossible mission», we face a project that easily forces the adventurer to return over his lost pathways in a desert. I. e., falling in a «petitio principii». The result of that l. st meditation could be synthesized as it follows: (a) The desire of hapiness is what forces us to search a better and better quality of life; (b) Human beings structure their idea of hapiness. life, adequate means to various kinds of objectives, according to their available knowledge. The 2. nd meditation recognizes the failure of the searched neutral discourse in the l. st meditation: its words and concepts exemplify a very deep analogy and reveal an occult system of thought and discourse, where the notion of value is unmistakably implicated. The desire of a quality of life in all its richness implies, although some times unconsciously, the act of evaluation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337312

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014479
Date: 12 1, 1999
Author(s): de Brito José Henrique Silveira
Abstract: FERNÁNDEZ FERNÁNDEZ. José Luis -"Responsabilidad moral y liderazgo ético "en" y "de" laempresa". In: Razóny Fé. 231(1995), p. 500.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337341

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): da Silva Estanqueiro Rocha Acílio
Abstract: "L'Europe et la philosophic politique", in Revue Internationale de Philosophie Poli- tique, n° 1, Outubro 1991 [n° especial -"L'Europe"], pp. 7, 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337579

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Renaud François
Abstract: Bolgar (1954, 389),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337582

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Lawrence Frederick G.
Abstract: KSI,67,461.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337583

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Moretto Giovanni
Abstract: WEISCHEDEL, Wilhelm -Der Gott der Philoso- phen: Grundlegung einer philosophischen Theologie im Zeitalter des Nihilismus 2. Aufl. Munchen: Nymphenburger Verlagshandlung, 1972, vol. 1, p. 1-38.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337584

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Carr Thomas K.
Abstract: Gadamer, The Beginning and the Beyond, p. 12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337586

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014491
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Gilbert Paul
Abstract: Dans "Etica e vivere bene", 7.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337636

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014491
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Caffarena José Gómez
Abstract: (o .c. nota 51),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337637

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014491
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: S. Freud, 'Remembering, Repeating, and Working-Through' in The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud, Hogarth Press, London, 1955, Vol 12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337638

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014491
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Queiruga Andrés Torres
Abstract: De hecho, en una ocasión he hablado ya de "finitud histórica" (El Dios de Jesús. Aproxi- mación en cuatro metáforas, ed. Sal Terrae, Santander 1991, 25).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337641

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014492
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Tilliette Xavier
Abstract: Is.53.7
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337652

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014492
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Splett Jörg
Abstract: Joh 16, 23],
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337654

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014497
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Casalla Mario
Abstract: G.I. Roth, FCE, México, 1954,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337740

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014497
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Corona Néstor A.
Abstract: Soi-même comme un autre, Ed. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337747

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014503
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: Jeremias, p. 253.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337865

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014503
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Putt B. Keith
Abstract: ibid., p. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337866

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014503
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Treanor Brian
Abstract: Augustine, Confessions, Book X, Ch. 6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337867

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014503
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Martins Florinda
Abstract: Michel Henry, Encarnacão: Uma filosofia da carne, trad, de Florinda Martins, ed. Círculo deLeitores, 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337870

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014504
Date: 3 1, 2003
Author(s): Fraga Fernando Aranda
Abstract: Revista de Filosofía de la Universidad de Costa Rica, Volumen XXXVII, N° 91 (Enero-Junio 1999), 41-51.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337881

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014512
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Vila-Chã João J.
Abstract: Rolf-Peter Horstmann -Die Grenzen der Vernunft: Fine Untersuchung zu Zielen und Motiven des Deutschen Idealismus. Frankfurt am Main: Anton Hain, 1991.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40338183

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014512
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Welsen Peter
Abstract: MR II 316 / HN II 286.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40338189

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014514
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Doran Robert M.
Abstract: B. Lonergan -"Dimensions of Meaning." In: Collection. Collected Works of Bernard Lonergan, vol. 4. Edited by Frederick E. Crowe and Robert M. Doran. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1988, p. 245.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40338253

Journal Title: Ethics and the Environment
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i40014552
Date: 10 1, 2003
Author(s): Liszka James Jakób
Abstract: Although philosophers often focus on the essays of Leopold's Sand County Almanac, especially "The Land Ethic," there is also a normative argument present in the stories that comprise most of the book. In fact the shack stories may be more persuasive, with a subtlety and complexity not available in his prose piece. This paper develops a narrative ethics methodology gleaned from rhetoric theory, and current interest in narrative ethics among literary theorists, in order to discern the normative underpinnings of the stories in Part 1. The narrative ethics approach sidesteps the need to ground the land ethic in ethical theory—which has been a reconstructive and problematic task for the philosophical interpreters of Leopold—and suggests, instead, that it emerges in Leopold's very effort to narrate his, professional, personal, and practical experience with nature. The involves examining the stories in terms of their emotional, logical and performative aspects. The result is an analysis that shows not only how these stories express normative claims, but also justify them. One conclusion of the analyses is that, in the narratives, there is less emphasis on the problematic notion of an over-arching "community" than in the prose pieces, and more emphasis on the metaphor of other living things as "fellow travelers" in the "odyssey of evolution." Second, the narratives take on an ironic attitude toward the ecological order, less discernable in the prose essays. The order itself may not be ethically admirable, but should be preserved since it makes possible any ethical relations within it. Thus, the narrative reading suggests some temperance to the usual holistic interpretation of his land ethic and its concomitant criticisms especially the charge of ecofacism. We should not take the land ethic imperative at its face value, in the sense that the good of the order itself is an intrinsic good. In the narratives, individuals are shown not merely to be means to the ecological whole, but the focus of sympathy and concern, in a manner that demands their good should also be an object of moral consideration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40339066

Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40014642
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Martínez Marina Sanchis
Abstract: Tucídides, History of the Peloponnesian War, trad. Rex Warner (Harmonds worth, Eng. 1954).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40340335

Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40014675
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Marre Diana
Abstract: Anderson [1991] 1993, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40340765

Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40014688
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Garrayo M. L. Ferrandis
Abstract: Marc Ferro, Comment on raconte l'histoire aux enfants à travers le monde entier, París, 1981; traducido al inglés como The Use and Abuse of History, or How the Past is Taught, Londres, 1984.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40340919

Journal Title: Studies in East European Thought
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40014975
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Conces Rory J.
Abstract: Louden 1992: 152-153
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40345271

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40015323
Date: 11 1, 2006
Author(s): Carrasco M. Iván
Abstract: Este trabajo interpreta el libro Ratada, de la poeta Rosabetty Muñoz, como metáforas (alegoría) de la sociedad chilena durante la dictadura militar. Leída de este modo. Ratada es una escritura terapéutica, pues provoca en la conciencia del lector un efecto de dolor equivalente al de la limpieza de las heridas, necesaria para que el cuerpo sane. /// This paper interprets the book Ratada, written by the poet Rosabetty Muñoz, as metaphors (allegory) for the Chilean society during the military dictatorship. In this reading. Ratada becomes therapeutic writing, as it provokes in the reader's mind an effect of pain equivalent to the cleansing of wounds, necessary for the healing of the body.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40357168

Journal Title: The High School Journal
Publisher: The University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i40015763
Date: 5 1, 1992
Author(s): Stones Christopher R.
Abstract: Zucker, R. Aronoff, J., & Rabin, A. (1984). Metatheoretical issues in personology. In R. Zucker, J. Aronoff & A. Rabin (Eds.), Personality and the prediction of behav- ior. Orlando: Academic Press, (pp. 1-5).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40364532

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016201
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Ogien Albert
Abstract: Erving Goffman, Stigmate, Paris, Ed. de Minuit, 1975.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40369638

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016225
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Busino Giovanni
Abstract: La démarche scientifique de Vilfredo Pareto. Pour une reiecture du « Traité de sociolo- gie générale», Louvain-La-Neuve, Cabay, 1981.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370054

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016236
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Grize Jean-Blaise
Abstract: S. Dehaene, Le cerveau en action. Imagerie cérébrale fonctionnelle en Psycholo- gie cognitive, Paris, PUF, 1997, p. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370250

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016237
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Passeron Jean-Claude
Abstract: F. de Saussure, Cours de linguistique générate (1ère éd. 1915, donnée par C. Bally et A. Séche- haye), T. de Mauro éd., Paris, Payot, 1972, pp. 40-43.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370269

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016242
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Dewitte Jacques
Abstract: "Biologisches zur ästhetischen Erziehung", (1949), in Biologie und Geist, loc. dt.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370367

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016248
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Passeron Jean-Claude
Abstract: M. Weber, Gesammelte Aufsätze zur Wissenschaftslehre, Tübingen, JCB Mohr, 1922, trad. mod. ; trad. fr. J. Freund, Paris, Plon, 1965, p. 202.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370471

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016252
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Berthoud Gérald
Abstract: (Bert- houd et Busino 1999).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370511

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016252
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Busino Giovanni
Abstract: J. Piaget, Problémes généraux de la recherche interdisciplinaire et mécanismes communs, in Tendances principales de la recherche dans les sciences sociales et humaines. Premiére partie: Sciences sociales. Préface de R. Maheu, Paris, Unesco, 1970, pp. 588-589.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370519

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016253
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Busino Giovanni
Abstract: P. Livet, Formaliser I 'argumentation en restant sensible au contexte, pp. 49-66,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370526

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016253
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Flueckiger Alexandre
Abstract: ci-dessus, pp. 5-10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370530

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016282
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Dosse François
Abstract: Ch. Ruby, Les archipels de la différence, Paris, ed. du Félin, 1990, p. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370936

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016285
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Bourg Dominique
Abstract: D. Bourg, Le nouvel âge de l'écologie, á paraître en septembre 2000 dans «Le Débat», Paris, Gallimard.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370975

Journal Title: Diderot Studies
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016375
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Mall Laurence
Abstract: « Diderot apologiste de Sénèque », p. 247-48.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40372830

Journal Title: Diderot Studies
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016377
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Wall Anthony
Abstract: Daniel Arasse, "L' image et son discours: deux descriptions de Diderot", in ed. Dominique Chateau, A propos de "La critique" (Paris: L'Harmattan, 1995), 203-37.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40372901

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40016566
Date: 2 1, 2009
Author(s): Van Damme Stéphane
Abstract: Marcel Gauchet (éd.), Philosophie des sciences histortques. Le moment romantique, Pans, Le Seuil, [1988] 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40376863

Journal Title: Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40016648
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Sperl Stefan
Abstract: Muslim (1978: nr. 2626).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40378935

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40016681
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Salgues Camille
Abstract: (Cavell 2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40379512

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of African Studies / Revue Canadienne des Études Africaines
Publisher: Canadian Association of African Studies
Issue: i40016717
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Jewsiewicki Bogumil
Abstract: The quest for recognition of subjectivity and human dignity is at the heart of current social activism. Africans have struggled for recognition since they were stripped of human dignity, first by the slave trade and later by colonialism. Their struggle has been revealed essentially through writing and monotheism. This article suggests looking at the performative elaboration of the self. On the continent as well as in the diaspora, the construction of the subjectivity and dignity of the modern African / black person is represented in all its autonomy. The empirical example chosen is that of Central Africa. /// La quête pour la reconnaissance de la subjectivité et la dignité est au coeur des mouvements sociaux actuels. Les Africains se battent pour obtenir la reconnaissance depuis l'époque où la traite des esclaves et plus tard la colonisation les ont dépouillés de leurs qualités humaines. Ces combats ont été essentiellement révélés par l'écriture et le monothéisme. L'article actuel suggère aux lecteurs de considérer la construction performative du moi où la subjectivité Africaine / Noire est représentée dans toute son autonomie. L'exemple empirique proposé est celui de l'Afrique centrale.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40380099

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40017405
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Simon Bennett
Abstract: Zimmerli, Ezekiel, 2:420-21 : "But the priestly/prophetic witness of Ezekiel 43 still knows nothing of that terrifying act of God in which he gives himself in his servant, in order to crown his love, to the unclean world as a pure sin offering (Is 53:10)."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40390027

Journal Title: The Journal of American Folklore
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Issue: i40017409
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Klassen Teri
Abstract: African American quiltmaking began to gain recognition as an expressive form distinct from European American quiltmaking in the countercultural climate of the 1970s. Representations of it since then have served to update the Eurocentric, patriotic image of quiltmaking in the United States with components ofmulticulturalism and cultural critique. These representations in turn caused tensions along the lines of class, race, gender, and scholarly discipline. This study shows the power of words and things when used together, as in museum exhibits, to affirm or challenge the existing social order.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40390070

Journal Title: Journal of Management Information Systems
Publisher: M. E. Sharpe
Issue: i40018320
Date: 7 1, 2003
Author(s): Swanson E. Burton
Abstract: Making sense of new information technology (IT) and the many buzzwords associated with it is by no means an easy task for executives. Yet doing so is crucial to making good innovation decisions. This paper examines how information systems (IS) executives respond to what has been termed organizing visions for IT, grand ideas for applying IT, the presence of which is typically announced by much "buzz" and hyperbole. Developed and promulgated in the wider interorganizational community, organizing visions play a central role in driving the innovation adoption and diffusion process. Familiar and recent examples include electronic commerce, data warehousing, and enterprise systems. A key aspect of an organizing vision is that it has a career. That is, even as it helps shape how IS managers think about the future of application and practice in their field, the organizing vision undertakes its own struggle to achieve ascendancy in the community. The present research explores this struggle, specifically probing how IS executives respond to visions that are in different career stages. Employing field interviews and a survey, the study identifies four dimensions of executive response focusing on a vision's interpretability, plausibility, importance, and discontinuity. Taking a comparative approach, the study offers several grounded conjectures con-cerning the career dynamics of organizing visions. For the IS executive, the findings help point the way to a more proactive, systematic, and critical stance toward innovations that can place the executive in a better position to make informed adoption decisions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40398616

Journal Title: Journal of Management Information Systems
Publisher: M. E. Sharpe
Issue: i40018336
Date: 7 1, 2006
Author(s): Sidorova Anna
Abstract: In this paper, we use concepts from actor-network theory (ANT) to interpret the sequence of events that led to business process change (BPC) failure at a telecommunications company in the United States. Through our intensive examination of the BPC initiative, we find that a number of issues suggested by ANT, such as errors in problematization, parallel translation, betrayal, and irreversible inscription of interests, contributed significantly to the failure. We provide nine abstraction statements capturing the essence of our findings in a concrete form. The larger implication of our study is that, for sociotechnical phenomena such as BPC with significant political components, an ANT-informed understanding can enable practitioners to better anticipate and cope with emergent complexities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40398827

Journal Title: Science & Society
Publisher: Guilford Publications
Issue: i40018666
Date: 10 1, 2003
Author(s): Öncü Ahmet
Abstract: Analysis of the Turkish state in the 20th century both draws upon and supports Gramsci's definition of the state as "dictatorship + hegemony." Both the form of the capitalist state and its activities rest upon the hegemony of the dominant class. The importance of society and class conflicts in understanding the capitalist state suggests a critical position vis-à-vis the state autonomy tradition. The history of the Turkish state provides support for the argument that the dominant class must have established hegemony in the state in the first place, since without this there is no guarantee of successful use of the coercive power of the state on behalf of the sectional interests of the dominant class.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40404762

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40019045
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Renaud Michel
Abstract: «de dez entrevistas feitas por Anita Kechikian a alguns dos mais representatives filosofos franceses da actualidade, publicadas em Le Monde de I' Education entre os meses de Fevereiro e Julho/Agosto de 1985», p.7).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419447

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019046
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Vila-Chã João J.
Abstract: Salmann, Elmar; Mounaro, Aniceto (ed.) – Filosofia e mistica: Itinerari di un progetto di ricerca. Roma: Pontificio Ateneo S. Anselmo, 1997.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419467

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019047
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Jorge Maria Manuel Araújo
Abstract: António Coutinho, "Ora então, vamos à vida", Ciclo de Colóquios "Despertar para a Ciência", Reitoria da Universidade do Porto, 10/02/2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419509

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019047
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Maldamé Jean-Michel
Abstract: Gérard-Henry Baudry, op. cit., pp. 387-411.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419529

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019048
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Costa Marcos Roberto Nunes
Abstract: Di Stefano, 1960, p. 51, nota 70:
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419555

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019049
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Colette Jacques
Abstract: Birault, Henri -De litre, du divin et des dieux. Edition 6tablie par Mathias Goy ; bibliographic par Guy Basset ; preface par Philippe Capelle. Paris: Cerf, 2005, p. 153.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419588

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019049
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Mooney Edward F.
Abstract: Furtak, Rick -Wisdom in Love, cit., p. 197.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419591

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019049
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Vidal Dolors Perarnau
Abstract: sks 22 nb12: 134.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419598

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019049
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Westphal Merold
Abstract: (gwcm 89-90).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419606

Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i40019078
Date: 4 1, 1992
Author(s): Devalle Susana B. C.
Abstract: Barrier y Dusenbery, 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40420139

Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i40019109
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Margulis Mario
Abstract: Paul Virilio, La bomba informática, Madrid, Cátedra, 1999, p. 23.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40420719

Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i40019118
Date: 8 1, 2005
Author(s): Murillo Lorena
Abstract: Nicholas Abercrombie, Stephen Hill y Bryan S. Turner, Diccionario de sociología, trad, de Marta Sansigre, Madrid, Cátedra, 1998, la cual se hizo a partir de la primera edición de 1984.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40420885

Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Paulusdruckerei
Issue: i40020066
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Rössler Martin
Abstract: Scheff 1986: 408.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40463564

Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Paulusdruckerei
Issue: i40020091
Date: 1 1, 1997
Abstract: (Kee 1980: 145).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40465357

Journal Title: Research in African Literatures
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i40020159
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Mathuray Mark
Abstract: This paper departs from and problematizes the almost exclusive focus in criticism of Ngugi's early works on Christianity and the effects of the colonial intrusion. Following Ngugi's exhortation to resume the broken dialogue with the gods of his people, Ngugi's early novels are read in relation to precolonial East African discourses and practices of prophecy, Gikuyu religion, and Gikuyu nationalist strategies that drew on different and opposing prophetic traditions, and, in a broader sense, discourses of religion in Africa. By locating his early work within the nexus of these discourses, a far more nuanced view of Ngugi's relation to religious and nationalist discourses emerges. This paper also attempts to uncover a symbolic geometry in Ngugi's novels determined by Gikuyu religious and cultural concepts. A focus on The River Between reveals certain authorial deployments of historical inaccuracies and dislocations in the interests of a schematization of the conflicts in the novel.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40468115

Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i376713
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Agina Mohammaed
Abstract: This article constitutes an exploration of Mahmud Darwish's poem, "The Hoopoe," as part of a study on the relationship of myths to culture, in general, and to literature and poetry, in particular. It starts from the hoopoe as a mythical symbol pulling the text in two directions. First, a direction that relates the poem, through time, to the realms of the universe, dream, and poetry, using the language of insinuations and allusions; second, a fictional direction that makes of the the poem-through evocation of previous quest journeys, including texts by Al-Jahiz, Avicenna, Al-Suhrawardi, Al-Hallaj, Aristophanes, and Farid Al-Din Attar-a quest into the depths of the individual and the collective self. Memory, history, and language, culminate in the discovery of the mother-land. Thus, Darwish's poem may be classified as poetry, prose, drama, and epic. It is, in fact, a mixture of all these genres, as well as a literary myth narrating the story of the search for a sacred time-the time of beginnings, and of childhood. /تمثل المقالة حفراﹰ استبطانياﹰ في قصيدة "الهدهد" لمحمود درويش - ضمن بحث في علاقة الأساطير بالثقافة عامة وبالأدب والشعر خاصة - انطلاقاﹰ من الهدهد كرمز أسطوري يتجاذب النص في اتجاهين اثنين: أ- اتجاه جدولي، يصل القصيدة - عبر الزمن - بعالم الكون وعالم المنام وعالم الشعر في لغة اللمح والإشارة٠ ب- اتجاه أفقي قصصي، يجعل من القصيدة - عبر رحلات نموذجية سابقة ومن خلال نصوص حاضرة غائبة للجاحظ، وابن سينا، والسهروردي، والحلاج، وأرسطوفان، وفريد الدين العطار، وغيرهم - رحلة في أعماق الذات الفردية، وفي أعماق الذات الجماعية ذاكرة وتاريخاﹰ٠ تجمع قصيدة درويش بين "الشعر" و"النثر" والمسرحية والملحمة، كما أنها أسطورة أدبية تقص علينا قصة بحث عن زمن مقدس هو زمن البدايات والطفولة٠‬
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4047433

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40021726
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Mercier Charles
Abstract: René Rémond, La Règle et le consentement, op. cit., p. 106.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40495932

Journal Title: Revue d'Histoire littéraire de la France
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40022983
Date: 4 1, 1980
Author(s): Crouzet Michel
Abstract: Ethique à Nicomaque, VI, 4, 1140 a.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40526519

Journal Title: Revue d'Histoire littéraire de la France
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40023129
Date: 2 1, 2001
Author(s): Labarthe Patrick
Abstract: RTP, I, 205.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40534397

Journal Title: Revue d'Histoire littéraire de la France
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40023147
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): Méra Brigitte
Abstract: Corn Ajouts, Lettres intimes, L'Imaginaire, Préface et notes d'A. Dupont, 1963, p. 85.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40535191

Journal Title: The Journal of Educational Research
Publisher: Heldref Publications
Issue: i40023288
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Hendry Petra Munro
Abstract: The author suggests that all research is narrative. Resituating all research as narrative, as opposed to characterizing narrative as one particular form of inquiry, provides a critical space for rethinking research beyond current dualisms and bifurcations that create boundaries that limit the capacity for dialogue across diverse epistemologies. The contemporary bifurcation of research as either quantitative or qualitative, or as scientific or nonscientific, has resulted in a master narrative of research which assumes incommensurability across paradigms. The author weaves 3 questions through this research: (a) What is lost when narrative and science are constructed as opposing and incommensurable modes of inquiry? (b) How might scholars reconceptualize inquiry outside a binary framework that privileges science? and (c) In what ways can resituating all narrative as inquiry open spaces for dialogue across multiple epistemologies that is the heart of democratic inquiry? The author concludes by suggesting that narrative is not a method, but rather a process of meaning making that encompasses 3 major spheres of inquiry: the scientific (physical), the symbolic (human experience) and the sacred (metaphysical).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/00220670903323354

Journal Title: The German Quarterly
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of German
Issue: i216873
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): Fish Robert C.
Abstract: "A Reply to John Reichert; or, How to Stop Worrying and Learn to Love Interpretation," Critical Inquiry, 6 (1979), pp. 173-78 173 6 Critical Inquiry 1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/405593

Journal Title: Geography
Publisher: Geographical Association
Issue: i40024598
Date: 7 1, 1982
Author(s): Mead W. R.
Abstract: The paper considers the map and the milieu of Europe. Five distinguishing characteristics are discussed. Special attention is given to the "states system" of Europe, the intensity of the boundary network and the increasing tendency from the point of view of human geography to treat the continent as divided rather than as unitary. The first post-war generation of British geographers tended to neglect Europe in favour of North America. Sweden and France have been important in restoring the connection. Those whose research focuses on European topics will encounter bibliographical, linguistic and other problems; but these will be offset by the cordial working relationships among European geographers which, as among colleagues in the English-speaking world, seem to spring from the nature of the subject itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40570560

Journal Title: Revista CIDOB d'Afers Internacionals
Publisher: Centre d'Informació Documentació Internacionals a Barcelona
Issue: i40025222
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Affaya Mohammed Noureddine
Abstract: En este texto, el autor intenta esclarecer determinados aspectos del imaginario en relación con el Estado, la política, pero también en relación con la violencia y el mal, en un contexto en el que la dialéctica de la identidad y de la alteridad sigue siendo una de las estructuras del imaginario. El imaginario, más allá del ámbito exclusivo de las representaciones, actúa sobre el mundo y sobre la evolución de la historia. Pero el mundo también actúa sobre el imaginario y son los períodos de crisis los que amplían sus manifestaciones, destinadas a "a servir de pantalla contra los temores". En este sentido, la violencia, frente a la cual cabe adoptar actitudes diferentes, se convierte en un elemento simbólico para interpretar nuestras fuerzas. ¿Hasta qué punto estamos presenciando un nuevo modo de funcionamiento de los imaginarios políticos y religiosos? Para responder a esta pregunta, el autor habla de esperanza intercultural "en un mundo donde las voluntades de poder de lo trágico interfieren en los impulsos de lo comunicacional". In this text, the author attempts to clarify certain aspects of imaginarles in relation to the State and politics, but also in relation to violence and evil, in a context in which the dialectic of identity and otherness continues to be one of the structures of imaginarles. Imaginarles, beyond the exclusive sphere of representations, act on the world and on the evolution of history. But, the world also acts on imaginarles, and it is the periods of crisis that enlarge their manifestations, destined to "serve as a screen against fears." In this sense, violence, in the face of which different attitudes can be adopted, becomes a symbolic element for interpreting our strengths. To what extent are we witnessing a new way of functioning of political and religious imaginarles? To answer this question, the author discusses intercultural hope "in a world in which the will of the power of the tragic interferes with communicational impulses."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40586092

Journal Title: Revista CIDOB d'Afers Internacionals
Publisher: Centre d'Informació Documentació Internacionals a Barcelona
Issue: i40025222
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Affaya Mohammed Noureddine
Abstract: L'auteur tente dans ce texte d'éclaircir certains aspects de l'imaginaire en relation avec l'Etat, la politique, mais aussi avec la violence et le mal, dans un contexte où la dialectique de l'identité et de l'altérité reste l'une des structures de l'imaginaire. L'imaginaire, débordant le champ exclusif des représentations, agit sur le monde et sur le mouvement de l'histoire. Mais le monde agit aussi sur l'imaginaire et ce sont les périodes de crise qui amplifient ses manifestations, appelées à "faire écran contre les peurs". C'est dans ce sens que la violence, face à laquelle différentes attitudes sont possibles, devient un élément symbolique pour interpréter nos forces. Jusqu'à quel point est-on en train d'assister à un nouveau mode de fonctionnement des imaginaires politiques et religieux ? Pour répondre à cette question l'auteur parle d'espérance interculturelle "dans un monde où les volontés de puissance du tragique brouillent les élans du communicationnel". In this text, the author attempts to clarify certain aspects of imaginarles in relation to the State and politics, but also in relation to violence and evil, in a context in which the dialectic of identity and otherness continues to be one of the structures of imaginarles. Imaginarles, beyond the exclusive sphere of representations, act on the world and on the evolution of history. But, the world also acts on imaginarles, and it is the periods of crisis that enlarge their manifestations, destined to "serve as a screen against fears." In this sense, violence, in the face of which different attitudes can be adopted, becomes a symbolic element for interpreting our strengths. To what extent are we witnessing a new way of functioning of political and religious imaginarles? To answer this question, the author discusses intercultural hope "in a world in which the will of the power of the tragic interferes with communicational impulses."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40586105

Journal Title: Revista CIDOB d'Afers Internacionals
Publisher: Centre d'Informació Documentació Internacionals a Barcelona
Issue: i40025242
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): de Barros Laan Mendes
Abstract: Vivimos en un contexto de disolución de fronteras en múltiples aspectos, de convergencia e hibridación de tecnologías, de medios de comunicación y de culturas. El contexto es de redimensionamiento del tiempo práctico, de los desplazamientos y de las relaciones entre lo local y lo global. En estos tiempos de interculturalidad, la comunicación juega un rol muy importante; no tanto en su dimensión mediática tecnológica, sino en especial en las dinámicas de mediaciones culturales que se desdoblan de las relaciones mediatizadas. Este trabajo pretende reflexionar sobre las transformaciones de los procesos comunicacionales en la contemporaneidad, marcados por fuertes movimientos de hibridación, así como pensar la interculturalidad en el contexto de las mediaciones culturales, a partir de autores latinoamericanos en diálogo con autores franceses. También, a partir de material de los medios, se presentarán ilustraciones del escenario cultural brasileño, que está marcado por una larga historia de hibridación, llena de dinámicas interculturales. We live in a context of borders that are dissolving in many senses, of the convergence and hybridisation of technologies, mass media and cultures. The context is the resizing of practical time, of movements and links between the local and the global. In these times of interculturality, communication plays a very important role; not so much in its technological media dimension, but particularly in the dynamics of cultural mediations that are dividing off from mediatised relations. This article aims to reflect on the transformations in present-day communication processes, marked by strong movements of hybridisation, as well as examining how to consider interculturality in the context of cultural mediations, based on dialogue between Latin American and French authors. Also, using media material, the article presents illustrations of the Brazilian cultural scene, which is marked by a long history of hybridisation that is filled with intercultural dynamics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40586507

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40025493
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): Tornatore Jean-Louis
Abstract: Gerz 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40590213

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40025495
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Heinich Nathalie
Abstract: Heinich & Edelman (2002).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40590302

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40025495
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Colleyn Jean-Paul
Abstract: d'Andréa Paganini, pp. 482-485.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40590306

Journal Title: Musurgia
Publisher: ESKA Editions
Issue: i40025520
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): GRABÓCZ Márta
Abstract: J. Ujfalussy cité en note 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40591026

Journal Title: Musurgia
Publisher: ESKA Editions
Issue: i40025539
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Kululuka Apollinaire Anakesa
Abstract: Messiaen, à travers ses « personnages rythmiques ».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40591262

Journal Title: Cités
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40026193
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Rozenberg Jacques J.
Abstract: R. Baker, « Stem cell rhetoric and the pragmatics of naming », The American Journal of Bio- ethics, vol. 2, n° 1, hiver 2002, p. 52-53.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40599480

Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40026362
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): SCHUBERT WILLIAM H.
Abstract: Schultz (2008)
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-873X.2009.00468.x

Journal Title: La Linguistique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40026513
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Deprez Christine
Abstract: Andrée Tabouret-Keller, 1985, « Langage et société : les corrélations sont muettes», La Linguistique, n° 21, Paris, PUF, p. 125-139.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40605069

Journal Title: The German Quarterly
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of German
Issue: i216903
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): Rieff Ann Clark
Abstract: In his 1987 bestseller The Closing of the American Mind, when Allan Bloom cites German ideas-or the "German connection"-as the utlimate source of a radical deterioration in American higher education, his attention focuses on Nietzsche's relativism, which he sees as nihilism. Tracing the terms "relativism" and "nihilism" in European philosophy and criticism, this article locates Bloom along a spectrum of positions ranging from absolutism to radical relativism. Examining links between Bloom's rejection of relativism, his praise of the Great Books tradition, and his hostility toward feminist scholarship, the writer shows how Bloom's advocacy of the literary canon represents a defense of white male privilege in the name of the "true" and the "natural."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/406160

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für französische Sprache und Literatur
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i40027020
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): O'DONOVAN PATRICK
Abstract: Nicholas Zurbrugg, Beckett and Proust (Gerrard's Cross: Colin Smy- the, 1988), pp. 173-89.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40617404

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für französische Sprache und Literatur
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i40027034
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): ENGLER WINFRIED
Abstract: Simon 1986, 26.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40617868

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für französische Sprache und Literatur
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i40027075
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Eggs Ekkehard
Abstract: Roland Barthes, Le degré zéro de l'écriture (Paris 1953)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40618883

Journal Title: Cités
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40027185
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Meyers Peter Alexander
Abstract: George Herbert Mead ; voir en particulier Works, vol. 1 : Mind, Self and Society, édition de Charles W. Morris, Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1934.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40620865

Journal Title: Cités
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40027198
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Pessin Catherine Dutheil
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, « L'intrigue et le récit historique », dans Temps et récit, Paris, Le Seuil, 1983.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40621104

Journal Title: Cités
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40027204
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Brudny Michelle-Irène
Abstract: « Hannah Arendt : l'intelligence », Le Figaro, lundi 21 avril 1987, p. X.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40621224

Journal Title: Cités
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40027207
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Cottias Myriam
Abstract: P. Ricœur, La mémoire, l'histoire, l'oubli, Paris, Le Seuil, 1990.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40621283

Journal Title: Cités
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40027210
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Zarka Yves Charles
Abstract: Éric Marty, Une querelle..., op. cit., p. 94.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40621349

Journal Title: KulturPoetik
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i40027229
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Westphal Bertrand
Abstract: Ibud., p. 221.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40621672

Journal Title: The International History Review
Publisher: Simon Fraser University
Issue: i40027995
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): IMLAY TALBOT C.
Abstract: M. Newman, Socialism and European Unity: The Dilemma of the Left in Britain and France (London, 1983).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40646918

Journal Title: Journal of African Cultural Studies
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i40028027
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Armstrong Andrew H.
Abstract: The attempt to write extreme violence, or to reco[r]d[e] traumatic cultural memory - the representation of horror - tests both the representational capacity of language and the rationality of subjecthood. Much narrative endeavour is spent trying to narrativise or 'structure' horror into story. However, because traumatic memories resist the narrative framework of the novel, questions are posed not only about the reliability of the narrator's memory and his/her ability to narrate a credible story, but also about the suitability of the fictional form of the novel to represent historical events such as extreme violence. How does language in narrative, with its insistence on order and sequence, 'capture' the destructuring nature of violence? Where is the subject or the idea of rational subjectivity in these de-structuring acts of violence? I will attempt to address these issues through a critical 'reading' of Moses Isegawa's novels Abyssinian Chronicles (2000) and Snakepit (2004). In these novels, Isegawa recasts and reenacts a period of recent Ugandan history marked by violence and chaos, emanating from the dictatorship of Idi Amin. However, both novels stretch the limits of 'factual' or historical credulity, reminding the reader that they are in fact works of historical fabrication. I am of the view that the narrative endeavour in these two novels is not only to record the chaotic events experienced during the years before and after the fall of Idi Amin, but to recode, through the tropes of language (symbol, imagery, and metaphor), the devastating effects of those years on the literary landscape of Uganda.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/13696810903259335

Journal Title: Revista Hispánica Moderna
Publisher: Hispanic Institute, Columbia University
Issue: i40028028
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): DE URIOSTE CARMEN
Abstract: "La transición y los desaparecidos republicanos" en La memoria de los olvidados. Un debate sobre el silencio de la represión franquista (2004).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40647585

Journal Title: International Labor and Working-Class History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40028073
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Pimenta Ricardo Medeiros
Abstract: The aim of this paper is to analyze how Brazilian trade unions are using social memory as a tool to build up workers' collective identities, in an attempt to fight the fragmentation resulting from the impact of the industrial restructuring of the 1990s. We will draw upon two ongoing programs conducted by the ABC Metal Workers Union (SMABC) and the Oil Workers Union of Brazil's state oil company Petrobras (Sindipetro). The SMABC and Sindipetro have recently been addressing the issue of workers memory with social and public projects. These projects are building up memories, which in spite of being institution-based are also collective, framed by the unions through the use of new types of communication and electronic media.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40648514

Journal Title: Revue de Musicologie
Publisher: Société Française de Musicologie
Issue: i40028087
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): DELANNOY Sylvìne
Abstract: Ernst Theodor Amadeus Hoffmann, Les Frères de Saint-Sérapion, vol.1, trad. Albert Béguin et Madeleine Laval (Paris : Phébus, 1981), p. 345-346.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40649016

Journal Title: Oral History
Publisher: Oral History Society
Issue: i40028140
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Gildea Robert
Abstract: This paper is the text of an inaugural lecture given as Professor of Modern History in the University of Oxford on 7 November 2008. It arises from a research project entitled Around 1968: Activism, Networks, Trajectories', which involves a team of historians examining samples of activist networks in fourteen European countries, in order to understand ways of becoming an activist, being an activist and making sense of activism. The key terms of this project are transnationalism – tracing resonances and interactions between activists and activist networks across frontiers – and subjectivity – using oral testimony to understand the phenomenon of activism. The framing and presentation of the project incited a rethink of the methods of oral history, not least because the project originated in Oxford, where scepticism persists about the credibility of oral history as a discipline. To persuade this audience of the power of oral history, the approach was taken to locate it at the confluence of three recent developments which have impacted on the study of history as a whole: the linguistic turn, memory studies, and interest in subjectivity, intersubjectivity and the unconscious. These reflections are then used to illuminate evidence drawn from French activists interviewed in the course of 2007 and 2008.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40650317

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40028448
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Leclerc Gérard
Abstract: L'article examine les conceptions de Foucault concernant l'histoire de la vérité, ainsi que les rapports entre la volonté de savoir, la volonté de vérité et les formes du pouvoir. Il rappelle comment les notions nietzschéennes de volonté de vérité et de volonté de puissance font place dans son oeuvre à la volonté de savoir comme instrument des rapports de domination. On examine ensuite comment la notion d'autorité, entendue à la fois au sens institutionnel et au sens discursif, peut permettre une sociologisation des approches traditionnelles de la vérité, élaborées par les philosophes. Comment la visée de vérité du discours s'est-elle combinée historiquement avec la volonté de savoir des institutions ? Y a-t-il différents régimes de vérité, liés à des modalités de discours différentes, mais aussi à des formes d'autorité institutionnelle ? Est-il possible de construire une généalogie des figures de l'autorité discursive ? The paper examines Foucaultian views about the history of truth, as well as the relationships between the will to truth and the different forms of power. It reminds how Nietzsche's conceptions about the will to truth and the will to power are replaced in Foucault's work by the will to truth as a means of power relationships. The paper looks furthermore at the possibility of using the notion of authority, understood both in the institutional and in the discursive sense, as a tool for a sociologization of traditional approaches to truth, constructed by philosophers. How did the pursuit of truth historically combine with the will to knowledge belonging to the institutions ? Are there different regimes of truth, tied to different discursive modalities, as well as to institutional forms of authority ? Is it possible to construct a genealogy of figures of discursive authority ?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40656810

Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40028534
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Paniagua Javier
Abstract: J. García Oliver, El eco de los pasos..., pág. 190.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40657946

Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40028538
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Casanova Julián
Abstract: "El tiempo presente, la memoria y el mito", p. 25.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40657994

Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40028548
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Pasamar Gonzalo
Abstract: (La historia vivida, pp. 289-332).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40658151

Journal Title: The Modern Law Review
Publisher: Wiley-Blackwell
Issue: i40028761
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Koops Bert-Jaap
Abstract: A. Rip, 'Constructing Expertise: In a Third Wave of Science Studies?' (2003) 33 Social Studies of Science 419.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40660735

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030281
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Gosselin Gabriel
Abstract: Ibid., § 5 du chapitre premier, p. 30-32.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690424

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030297
Date: 6 1, 1998
Author(s): Leclerc-Olive Michèle
Abstract: L'entretien biographique de Khaled Kelkal publié dans Le Monde (5 octobre 1995)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690769

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030301
Date: 6 1, 2000
Author(s): Moulin Pierre
Abstract: (Mallet, 1998).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690843

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030302
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Gingras Yves
Abstract: Stephen S. Cole, Making Science. Between Nature and Society, Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1992.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690856

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030310
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Martuccelli Danilo
Abstract: Walzer M., De l'Exode à la liberté [1985], Paris, Calmann-Lévy, 1986.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690994

Journal Title: The German Quarterly
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of German
Issue: i216909
Date: 4 1, 1979
Author(s): Triefenbach Kenneth S.
Abstract: The rationalist fantasy of the Enlightenment is the myth of the nonviolent origins of virtue, typically represented through the image of rational birth. This myth falters when Odoardo Galotti, invoking the second birth of reason, kills his daughter. This article examines Lessing's Die Erziehung des Menschengeschlechts-essentially a treatise on the phylogeny/ontogeny distinction-in terms of a recuperative rationalist gesture that continues to inform Freud's oedipal theory as well as Claude Lévy-Strauss's understanding of the "cerebral savage." These theories are not treated as methodological frameworks for reading Lessing but rather as evidence of the tanacity of Enlightenment desires, which are already problematized by texts like Emilia Galotti.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/407077

Journal Title: The German Quarterly
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of German
Issue: i216895
Date: 7 1, 1984
Author(s): Giroux Jeffrey M.
Abstract: The history of literary studies is especially important today as Germanistik takes account of its institutionalization in the university and redefines its disciplinary boundaries. By analyzing the two best-known reform universities, Berlin in 1809/10 and Constance in 1966/67, I show their strikingly similar commitments to notions of scholarship/research, learning, and pedagogy. That these common concerns are based on the influence of hermeneutics is not surprising; the philosophy of Bildung and Wissenschaft central to educational theory for Humboldt in Berlin, as well as for Jauß's and Iser's Rezeptionsästhetik in Constance, is metacritical and encourages reflection on understanding and interpretation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/407204

Journal Title: Monumenta Serica
Publisher: Monumenta Serica Institute
Issue: i40032845
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Kohn Livia
Abstract: Daode jing 50 (Chan 1964, 163):
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40727016

Journal Title: Monumenta Serica
Publisher: Monumenta Serica Institute
Issue: i40032858
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Rule Paul
Abstract: Journal of Chinese Religion 27 (1999), pp. 105-111.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40727471

Journal Title: Le Mouvement social
Publisher: Association Le Mouvement Social
Issue: i40033194
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Galvez-Behar Gabriel
Abstract: P. Vidal-Naquet, Les Assassins de la mémoire^ Paris, La Découverte, 1987.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40732028

Journal Title: Journal of Institutional and Theoretical Economics (JITE) / Zeitschrift für die gesamte Staatswissenschaft
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i40034129
Date: 3 1, 1996
Author(s): Rubin Edward L.
Abstract: The lawyer's crucial role in the contractual process has not been adequately addressed. Transaction cost economics provides a promising approach for doing so, but does not fully account for the lawyer's motivations or intentions. To do so, a more comprehensive theory of human behavior is required. Husserl's phenomenology, specifically his analysis of the natural attitude, provides such a theory. This article describes the role of lawyers in drafting complex entertainment contracts and explains that role in terms of both transaction cost economics and phenomenology. It argues that the two explanations are consistent, but that phenomenology offers additional insights and more fully explains the lawyer's actions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40751913

Journal Title: Jewish Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i40034225
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Fagan Dermot
Abstract: Alain Finkielkraut, Une voix vient de l'autre rive, op.cit, p. 100.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40753306

Journal Title: Jewish Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i40034232
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Subtelny Maria E.
Abstract: Tishby, Wisdom of the Zohar, 3: 1090-91.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40753349

Journal Title: Jewish Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i40034250
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Slavet Eliza
Abstract: Freud, Moses and Monotheism, 85.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40753472

Journal Title: Africa: Rivista trimestrale di studi e documentazione dell’Istituto italiano per l’Africa e l’Oriente
Publisher: Istituto italiano per l'Africa e l'Oriente
Issue: i40034726
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Giordano Rosario
Abstract: C. Braeckman, Congo. Après la Commission Lumumba. Un nouveau chantier sur la décolonisation s'est ouvert pour les historiens, "Le Soir", 19 novembre 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40761871

Journal Title: Dalhousie French Studies
Publisher: Department of French, Dalhousie University
Issue: i40037293
Date: 10 1, 2002
Author(s): Kelly Michael G.
Abstract: Dans « Poésie noire, poésie blanche » (1941),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40836793

Journal Title: Dalhousie French Studies
Publisher: Department of French, Dalhousie University
Issue: i40037302
Date: 10 1, 1995
Author(s): Blanchard Jean-Vincent
Abstract: Paul Valéry, «Degas danse dessin,» Œuvres II, Bibliothèque de la Pléiade (Paris : Gallimard, 1960) 1219-20.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40837002

Journal Title: Dalhousie French Studies
Publisher: Department of French, Dalhousie University
Issue: i40037333
Date: 7 1, 2006
Author(s): Mazauric Catherine
Abstract: Mbembé, 19
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40837727

Journal Title: Caravelle (1988-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40038172
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): LANGUE Frédérique
Abstract: Michelle Ascencio, Mundo, demonio y carne, Caracas, Alfadil, 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40854240

Journal Title: Caravelle (1988-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40038188
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): LANGUE Frédérique
Abstract: Maité Rico, «La reinvención de la agonía y muerte de Bolívar. El empeño de Chávez de investigar el 'asesinato' del Libertador desata la polémica entre los historiadores», El País, 21 de diciembre de 2008.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40855059

Journal Title: Crossroads: An Interdisciplinary Journal of Southeast Asian Studies
Publisher: Northern Illinois University, Center for Southeast Asian Studies
Issue: i40038691
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Marston John
Abstract: Marston, 1999
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40860794

Journal Title: Crossroads: An Interdisciplinary Journal of Southeast Asian Studies
Publisher: Northern Illinois University, Center for Southeast Asian Studies
Issue: i40038696
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Baird Ian G.
Abstract: Mayoury and Pheuiphanh (1998)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40860854

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40038933
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Lampert Tom
Abstract: Ibid., 139-140.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40864442

Journal Title: Music & Letters
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i40039166
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Lee Sherry D.
Abstract: Ibid. 313.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40871577

Journal Title: Soziale Welt
Publisher: Otto Schwartz
Issue: i40039408
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Wiedenmann Rainer E.
Abstract: Kritik von Paul Ricoeur (1973, S. 68),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40877852

Journal Title: Soziale Welt
Publisher: Nomos Verlagsgesellschaft
Issue: i40039483
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Lentz Carola
Abstract: Programms (2005)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40878654

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039577
Date: 3 1, 1962
Author(s): VERMEULEN E. E. G.
Abstract: Jan Romein, Carillon der tijden, Amsterdam, 1953, 12 v.v.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40880785

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Philosophie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039581
Date: 12 1, 1954
Author(s): DE VOGELAERE A. V.
Abstract: F. Heiler (Das Gebet, p. 491)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40880906

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039582
Date: 3 1, 1963
Author(s): VANSINA Dirk F.
Abstract: HV, 10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40880933

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Philosophie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039586
Date: 12 1, 1960
Author(s): KWANT R. C.
Abstract: „Nihil homini amicum sine homine amico", Augustinus, Epistola 130, c. II, no. 4 ; PL 33, 495
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40881003

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039598
Date: 9 1, 1965
Author(s): IJSSELING Samuel
Abstract: Über den Humanismus, p. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40881173

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039608
Date: 12 1, 1968
Author(s): IJSSELING Samuel
Abstract: S. Leclaire op het Seminane aan de École Normale Supérieure te Parijs (20 maart 1968).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40881347

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039623
Date: 12 1, 1970
Author(s): VANDENBULCKE J.
Abstract: P. Ricœur, o.c., p. 92-6 ; 78.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40881836

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039640
Date: 9 1, 1973
Author(s): HOLENSTEIN Elmar
Abstract: (Husserl, 1966, p. 339).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40882437

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039649
Date: 3 1, 1976
Author(s): ZWEERMAN Th.
Abstract: Oosterhuis' gedieht „Vier Muren" in: dez., Zien Soms Even. Bilthoven, 1972, p. 139.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40882819

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039658
Date: 6 1, 1978
Author(s): GEERTS Adri
Abstract: PF, p. 333-334.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40883186

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039664
Date: 9 1, 1979
Author(s): BOUDIER C. STRUYKER
Abstract: J. Plat, Ethiek en Godsdienst, van Immanuel Kant tot Emmanuel Levinas, in Alg. Ned. Tijdscbr. v. Wijsb., 6e jrg., afl. 1, jan. 1972, 24.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40883393

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039679
Date: 6 1, 1979
Author(s): BOUDIER C. STRUYKER
Abstract: Elementen van een erotetische logika, in Algemeen Nederlands Tijdschrift voor Wijsbegeerte, 70e jrg. afl. 3 (juli 1978), 167-187.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40884045

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039680
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): ROBERT J.-D.
Abstract: Les fonctions de la phénoménologie à l'égard des sciences de l'homme et des philosophes, 1977, 273-308.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40884094

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039735
Date: 9 1, 1995
Author(s): Boudier C.E.M. Struyker
Abstract: P. Van Tongeren (red. ), Het lot in eigen hand? Reflecties op de betekenis van het (nood)lot in onze cultuur. Baarn, Gooi en Sticht, 1994, 21,5 x 13,5, 380 p., f 72,50, BF 1450,-
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40887312

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039758
Date: 3 1, 1999
Author(s): van Tongeren P.
Abstract: Bijvoorbeeld: H. STIERLIN, Nietzsche, Hölderlin und das Verrückte. Systemische Exkurse. Heidelberg, Carl-Auer-Systeme Verlag, 1992, 21 χ 13,5, 182 p., DM 36,-.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40888657

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039795
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): de Boer Theo
Abstract: Seamus Heaney, De genoegdoening van poëzie, vertaald door Jan EIjKELBOOM, Amsterdam, 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40890370

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039798
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): van Tongeren Paul
Abstract: Aurelius Augustinus, Confessionum Libri XIII. Zwolle, Tjeenk Willink, 1960, X.50 (p. 164).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40890441

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040162
Date: 6 1, 1955
Author(s): Ruyer Raymond
Abstract: S. K. Langer, Feeling and Form, chap. VIII.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40899897

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040298
Date: 6 1, 1987
Author(s): Jacques Francis
Abstract: M. Dummett, Frege : Philosophy of Language, Duckworth, 1973.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40902866

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040338
Date: 3 1, 1998
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: (ibid.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903576

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040354
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Villani A.
Abstract: On essaie dans ces pages d'appliquer à la philosophie de Kant et de Dilthey certains concepts en vue d'une perspective critique de l'histoire. La distinction diltheyenne entre explication et compréhension est mise en rapport avec celle qu'opère Kant entre jugement déterminant et jugement réfléchissant. Puisque la majeure partie de la complexité historique ne peut trouver son explication dans des lois générales, on propose une compréhension réfléchissante du récit historique. Mettre en relation le jugement réfléchissant et la compréhension revient à souligner la dimension normative de l'interprétation historique. La perspective anthropologique de Kant fait également place aux jugements préréflexifs, préliminaires sur l'histoire, tandis que l'approche diltheyenne par les Geisteswissenschaften ramène à une conscience reflexive ou autoréférée qui replace l'individu en son temps et en son lieu. D'autres aspects peuvent encore conduire à notre rapport critique à l'histoire : le modèle kantien d'une orientation réfléchissante de la communauté humaine, les limites qu'ilpose à l'interprétation authentique, la conception heideggerienne de l'authenticité historique, l'analyse diltheyenne des systèmes d'influence réciproque comme cadre de l'idée d'une imputation causale singulière chez Paul Ricœur. This essay is an attempt at applying certain concepts to the philosophy of Kant and Dilthey, so as to develop a critical perspective on history. Dilthey's explanation-understanding distinction is related to Kant's distinction between determinant and reflective judgment. Since much of the complexity of history cannot be determinantly explained by general laws, a reflective understanding of the meaning of historical narrative is suggested. To relate judgment and understanding is to highlight the evaluative dimension of historical interpretation. Kant's anthropological perpective also makes room for pre-reflective, preliminary judgments about history, whereas Dilthey's human science approach points back to a reflexive or self-referring awareness that locates the individual in his time and place. Some other aspects may also lead us to a critical approach to history : Kant's reflective orientational model of the human community, the limits he places on authentic interpretation, Heidegger's views on authentic historicity, and Dilthey's analysis of systems of reciprocal influence seen as a framework for Ricœur's conception of singular causal imputation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903833

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040368
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Cohen-Halimi Michèle
Abstract: Dehors, Paris, Gallimard, 1975, p. 86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40904025

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040371
Date: 3 1, 1994
Author(s): Alunni Charles
Abstract: Archives de Philosophie, Philosophes en Italie, 2 cahiers spéciaux, cahier 4/1993 et cahier 1/1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40904048

Journal Title: Law & Social Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i378430
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): White Stephen M.
Abstract: Devin 2003, 350-62
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4092669

Journal Title: Theory and Society
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40041727
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Franzosi Roberto P.
Abstract: Franzosi 2004a, pp. 266-269).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40928085

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40041831
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Escudier Alexandre
Abstract: R. Koselleck, «Historische Kriterien...», art. cit., p. 67-86, ici p. 86, repris in Le futur passé..., op. cit., p. 77.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40929925

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40041832
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Anheim Étienne
Abstract: J. Gracq, Au Château d'Argol, ibid., t. 1, p. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40929990

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40041832
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Bouju Emmanuel
Abstract: D. Albahari, Globe-Trotter, op. cit., p. 97
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40929991

Journal Title: Cultural Anthropology
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40041850
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): HAYWARD EVA
Abstract: In When Species Meet (2008) Donna Haraway proposes that creatures' identities and affinities emerge through their encounters, their relationships. Following Haraway's lead, I attend to how different species sense and apprehend one another, leaving impressions—concrescences of perceptual data, or texture. This essay reports on fieldwork alongside marine biologists and with a population of cup corals (B. elegans) housed at the Long Marine Laboratory, Santa Cruz, California. While I assisted researchers who were studying metabolic rates and reproductive strategies in coral communities, these cup corals simultaneously taught me that being and sensing are inextricably enfolded. We were variously situated—corals generating generations, me interpretations. We met through a material-semiotic apparatus I call "fingeryeyes." As an act of sensuous manifesting, fingeryeyes offers a queer reading of how making sense and sensual meaning are produced through determinable and permeable species boundaries.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1548-1360.2010.01070.x

Journal Title: Contemporary European History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40041857
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): GORDON DANIEL A.
Abstract: 50 ans plus tard. . . le réalisme c'est toujours l'utopie, 10 April 2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40930576

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40041866
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Bovon François
Abstract: Jean-Daniel Macchi and Christophe Nihan, "Mort, résurrection et au-delà dans la Bible hébraïque et dans le judaïsme ancien," BCPE 62 (2010) 1-53.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40930894

Journal Title: Cahiers du Monde russe
Publisher: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40041890
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): GRIESSE MALTE
Abstract: GARF,f. R-9665,op. 1,d. 205,1. 52-55.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40931325

Journal Title: Cahiers du Monde russe
Publisher: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40041890
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): GARROS-CASTAING VÉRONIQUE
Abstract: Forest, La beauté du contresens, p. 310.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40931326

Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042682
Date: 1 1, 1957
Author(s): Léonard Émile G.
Abstract: K. C. Steek, Der evangelische Christ und die römische Kirche (Munich, Kaiser, 1952, 48 p.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40948827

Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042739
Date: 1 1, 1959
Author(s): Boutruche Robert
Abstract: Mentionnons sans insister, car il est hâtif et souffre d'une information défec- tueuse, le petit livre de Fernand Niel, Albigeois et Cathares. Paris, Presses Universitaires de France, in-16, 127 p.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40950619

Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042777
Date: 6 1, 1975
Author(s): Simon Marcel
Abstract: Pasquale Testini, Le catacombe e gli antichi cimiteri cristiani in Roma, Bologne, Casa Editrice Licinio Cappelli, 1966, 413 p., 8 500 lires.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40952253

Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042883
Date: 3 1, 1997
Author(s): Hourmant François
Abstract: Jacques Paugam, Génération perdue, Paris, Robert Laffont, coll. « Parti pris », 1977.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40956066

Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042929
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Hazareesingh Sudhir
Abstract: Laird Boswell, L'historiographie du communisme français est-elle dans une impasse ?, Revue française de science politique, 55, n° 5-6, octobre-décembre 2005, p. 919-933.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40957935

Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042931
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Colantonio Laurent
Abstract: Mary Daly, Revisionism and Irish history. The Great Famine, dans The Making of Modern Irish History, D. George Boyce et Alan O'Day (eds), op. cit. (n. 44), p. 86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40958053

Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40043093
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): NEL PHILIP
Abstract: Taylor, "The South Will Rise Again?", p. 47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40961962

Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40043093
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): WEBER CYNTHIA
Abstract: Ashley, 'Living on Border Lines', p. 313.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40961963

Journal Title: Cinema Journal
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Issue: i40043125
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Celik Ipek A.
Abstract: Fredric Jameson, The Political Unconscious (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1981), 52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40962837

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043588
Date: 4 1, 1967
Author(s): PASSERON JEAN-CLAUDE
Abstract: Sahlins, loc. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40969868

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043624
Date: 10 1, 1977
Author(s): APEL KARL OTTO
Abstract: Habermas's account of psychoanalysis in his Erkenntnis und Interesse, pp. 10-11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970294

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043634
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): SHALIN DMITRI N.
Abstract: Anthony Giddens, New Rules of Sociological Method: A Positive Critique of Inter- pretative Sociologies (New York: Basic Books, 1976).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970406

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043647
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): COATS A.W.
Abstract: Dopfer, "The Histonomic Approach to Economics."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970547

Journal Title: Rue Descartes
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40043930
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): ARGYROPOULOS ROXANE
Abstract: E. Moutsopoulos, Le Problème du beau chez P. Vraïlas-Arménis, Ophrys, Aix-en-Provence, 1960.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40978933

Journal Title: Rue Descartes
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40043982
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): PRADO BENTO
Abstract: Jean Petitot, Francisco Varela. Bernard Pachoud and Jean-Michel Roy. Stanford. California, 1999, Stanford University Press. 641 pages.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40980066

Journal Title: Journal of Music Theory
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i40044259
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Cox Franklin
Abstract: Adorno 1963, 365-437.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40984940

Journal Title: Luso-Brazilian Review
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i40044266
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Simas-Almeida Leonor
Abstract: Since its first publication, A Costa dos Murmúrios has attracted the critics' attention to the paradox of the explicit denial of its own authority over the historical facts that are part of the narration and its implicit, if qualified, affirmation of the same authority. This article also focuses on the sort of subliminal tension but from the angle of the literary construction of emotions, rather than examining either the poetics of historiographic metafiction or the role of memory in the narration of the past. Analyzing various aspects of A Costa dos Murmúrios (such as the predominant points of view, the structure of the narrative, the disintegration of the characters' identities, the emotional impact of a few vivid scences, the personalization of national events), a case is made for reading this novel as an intimate chronicle of historical facts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40985100

Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i40044280
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Campe Rüdiger
Abstract: "Ak- tualität des Bildes. Die Zeit rhetorischer Figuration," Figur und Figuration. Studien zu Wahrneh- mung und Wissen. Eds. Gottfried Boehm, Gabriele Brandstetter, Achatz von Müller (Munich: Fink, 2007), 163-182.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40985371

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40044534
Date: 3 1, 1998
Author(s): Fellous Michèle
Abstract: Le Quilt possède une double dimension, singulière et militante : chaque panneau, chaque nom énoncé lors du déploiement signifie l'unicité de chaque disparu ; mais l'assemblage des patchworks, leur abandon à l'association qui va les recueillir, les assembler et les utiliser pour porter à l'attention du monde entier l'énormité de la catastrophe renvoie à la dimension sociale inhérente au décès de chaque individu mort du sida. Le développement fulgurant du rite du patchwork aux États-Unis s'explique par ce double enjeu et par la réappropriation de symboles fondateurs de l'imaginaire américain. En se réappropriant un symbole commun, le Quilt légitime et réintègre la communauté gay porteuse du projet dans cette société qui l'a niée. The Quilt has from the outset both a singular and militant dimension : each panel, each name mentioned during the unfolding means the uniqueness of each dead ; but the assembled patchworks, their donation to the association which will conserve, assemble and use them to draw worldwide attention to this dreadful disaster refer to the social dimension inherent to each individual having died of AIDS. The extremely rapid development of the patchwork rite in the United States can be explained by these two functions and within the reappropriation of founding symbols of the Americans'world of imagination. By reappropriating a common symbol the Quilt legitimates and reintegrates the gay community, bearer of the project, into a society from which it was rejected. Von Anfang an hat der Quilt eine eigenartige und zugleich militante Dimension. Jeder Teil des Patchworks, jeder Name, der während der Entfaltung ausgesprochen wird, besagt die Eigenartigkeit jedes Gestorbenen. Doch verweisen das Zusammenfügen der Patchworkwerke und ihre Überlassung dem Verein, der sie bewahren, zusammenfügen und verwenden wird, um die Aufmerksamkeit der ganzen Welt auf diese schreckliche Katastrophe zu lenken, auf die dem Tode jedes AIDSkranken inhärente soziale Dimension. Das äusserst schnelle Fortschreiten des Patchworksritus in den Vereinigten Staaten lässt sich durch diese zwei Aufgaben and durch die Wiederaneignung von Grundsymbolen der amerikanischen Einbildungswelt erklären. Durch die Wiederaneignung eines gemeinen Symbols legitimiert und reintegriert der Quilt die homosexuelle Gemeinschaft, die das Projekt trägt, in eine Gesellschaft, die sie zurückgeworfen hat.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40989961

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40044538
Date: 9 1, 1995
Author(s): Vultur Smaranda
Abstract: En étudiant les récits de vie des paysans roumains du Banat et d'Olténie déportés dans les années cinquante dans la plaine de Bǎrǎgan, nous avons essayé de mettre en évidence de quelle façon le récit de vie peut être un révélateur d'une réalité ethno-historique et anthropologique. Nous avons souligné le problème d'ordre méthodologique qu'une telle étude pose au chercheur. Dans un premier temps, nous avons discuté le statut discursif du récit de vie comme discours de témoignage, et les conséquences qui en dérivent pour son analyse comme texte narratif et argumentatif qui développe une rhétorique spécifique. Une description du contexte historique auquel font référence les textes, ainsi que des circonstances dans lesquelles l'enquête orale a été menée, nous a semblé nécessaire pour dégager l'importance du thème de l'identité et de la différence dans les récits de nos interlocuteurs. En analysant ce thème, nous avons tenu compte des constellations idéologiques et symboliques qui dominent ces développements dans le texte des critères que les paysans utilisent pour se différencier de l'Autre sous ses différents visages. L'analyse de ces facteurs suggère des pistes intéressantes pour déceler certaines mentalités et pratiques culturelles, surtout celles liées au foyer et à la famille et aux pratiques culinaires. Studiind povesteǎ vieţii a 70 de ţǎrani deporţati între anii 1951-1956 în Bǎrǎgan am pus în evidenţǎ problemele de ordin metodologic şi teoretic cu care se confruntǎ cercetǎorul dornic sǎ reconstituie o realitate istoricǎ, etnograficǎ şi antropologicǎ pornind de la mǎrturiile celor ce povestesc evenimentul deportǎrii. Purtînd mǎrcile subiecti viaţii naratorului şi a unei ideologii personale aceste texte sunt în acelaşţi timp naraţiuni şi o formǎ de a depune mǎrturie. Ele dezvoltǎ deci o retoricǎ specialǎ prin care faptul trǎit se transformǎ în fapt povestit şi se comunicǎ unui interlocutor. Analia acestei retorici necesitǎ cunoaşterea discursurilor prin care evenimentul ne parvine, a condiţiilor în care s-a desfǎşurat ancheta, compararea povestirilor între ele pentru a constata apropierile diferenþele şi mai ales diferitele tipuri de focalizǎri. Acestea din urmǎ ne permit sa sesizǎm ce e mai important pentru cel ce povesteşte şi de ce. Pentru a ilustra aceasta problematicǎ ne-am oprit la tema identitǎţii şi alţeritǎţii, încercînd sǎ urmǎrim constelatiile idéologice şi culturale sub semnul cǎrora stau expansiunile ei in texte, criteriile prin care Celǎlalt este identificat şi prezentat. Through the study of the life stories told by the Romanian peasants of Banat and Oltenie, who were deported during the 1950s to the plain of Baragan, this article attempts to show how such biographical accounts can serve to reveal an ethno-historical and anthropological reality.We begin by underlining the methodological problems that such studies pose for the researcher. We discuss the discursive status of these accounts as a discourse intended to bear witness and the implications of this status for an analysis as a narrative and argumentative text, generating its own specific rhetoric. Along with an account of how this oral enquiry was carried out, it also seemed necessary to give a description of the historical context to which these accounts refer, in order to draw attention to the theme of identity and difference in the accounts given. The analysis of this theme required that due attention be paid do the ideological and symbolic constellations that surround it, in the criteria that the peasants use to differentiate the Other, in his or her multifarious guises. The examination of these factors offers several interesting lines of enquiry on cultural practices and mentalities, and on those in particular which relate to the household, the family and culinary habits. Indem wir die Lebensgeschichten der rumänischen Bauern aus Banat und Oltenie studierten, die in den fünfziger Jahren in die Ebene von Baragan vertrieben wurden, versuchten wir, herauszustellen, wie die Lebensgeschichte eine volksgeschichtliche und anthropologische Wirklichkeit ans Licht stellen kann. Wir haben das methodologische Problem betont, die sich für den Forscher aus derartigen Studie ergibt. Zuerst haben wir den erzählerischen Status der Lebenserzählung als Zeugnisrede erörtert, sowohl als auch die Folgen, die sich daraus ergeben, wenn sie als erzählender und argumentierender Text analysiert werden soll, der eine spezifische Rhetorik entwickelt. Eine Schilderung des historischen Zusammenhangs, worauf sich die Texte beziehen, und der Umstände, unter denen die mündliche Befragung sich abspielte, kam uns als notwendig vor, um die Bedeutung des Themas der Identität und des Unterschieds in den Erzählungen unserer Gesprächspartner hervorzuheben. In der Analyse dieses Themas nahmen wir die ideologischen und symbolischen Konstellationen in Kauf, die in den Textstellen vorherrschend sind, wo die Kriterien dargelegt werden, die die Bauern benutzen, um sich von dem Anderen unter seinen verschiedenen Gesichten zu unterscheiden. Die Analyse dieser Faktoren legt uns interessante Forschungswege nahe, die es erlauben, manche Denkweisen und kulturelle Verhaltensweisen herauszuheben, und zwar insbesondere diejenigen, die mit dem Heim -, Familienleben und Kochsitten verbunden sind.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40990061

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044548
Date: 3 1, 2001
Author(s): Puccio Deborah
Abstract: L'expérience professionnelle et humaine de Giovanni Falcone, le juge instructeur du plus spectaculaire procès intenté contre la mafia, nous amène à examiner les relations entre l'enquête judiciaire et l'enquête ethnographique : car c'est grâce à l'instruction du Maxiprocesso (1986) qu'aujourd'hui nous disposons d'une abondante moisson de données sur Cosa Nostra, son fonctionnement, ses règles internes et son code d'honneur. Si la reconstruction d'une vérité au moyen d'indices, dans un monde protégé par l'omertà, apparente les techniques d'investigation du juge au modèle épistémologique qui est au fondement des sciences humaines depuis le XIXe siècle, l'utilisation d'informateurs appartenant à l'univers mafieux — les repentis — est à mettre en parallèle plus directement avec les méthodes de l'ethnographie. The human and professional experience of Giovanni Falcone, the examining magistrate in the most spectacular legal operation launched against the Mafia, makes us examine the relations between the judicial and the ethnographic investigation, for it is due to the inquiries of the Maxiprocesso (1986) that we now possess an abundant source of data on the Cosa Nostra, its operation, its internal rules and its code of honour. While, in a world protected by the omertà, the re-establishment of facts by means of evidence places the investigative techniques of the judge among those of the epistemological model, basis of the human sciences since the 19th century, the use of informers — the pentiti — from the world of the Mafia, on the other hand, reflects more directly the methods of ethnography. Das berufliche und menschliche Erfahrenheit des Untersuchungsrichters Giovanni Falcone im spektakulärsten aller jemals gegen die Mafia durchgeführten Prozesse führt uns zu einer Überprüfung der Beziehungen zwischen gerichtlicher und ethnographischer Untersuchung, denn dank der Voruntersuchung im Maxiprocesso (1986) verfügen wir heute über eine umfangreiche Sammlung von Angaben über die Cosa Nostra, über ihre Arbeitsweise, ihre inneren Regeln und ihren Ehrenkodex. In einer durch die Omertà geschützten Welt gleicht die Vorgehensweise des Richters bei der Aufdeckung der Wahrheit dem epistemologischen Modell, das den Humanwissenschaften seit dem 19. Jahrhundert zugrunde liegt, während die Verwendung von Informanten aus dem Bereiche der Mafia — den Pentiti — sich eher mit den Methoden der Ethnographie vergleichen lässt.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40990302

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044551
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Sirost Olivier
Abstract: Paul Ricœur [1983: 144-147].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40990384

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044553
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): Giordano Christian
Abstract: Le Tessin représente l'unique canton de la Suisse à grande majorité italophone. La construction de l'identité se base essentiellement sur la notion d'« italianité » et sur celle de « helvétidté ». Il s'agit en réalité d'une « double appartenance », et l'article analyse les différents modes de production sociale de l'ambivalence au plan des discours (historiques, linguistiques, folkloriques, politiques, rituels et visuels) et des pratiques sociales correspondantes. The canton Ticino is the unique Swiss canton with Italian-speaking majority. The construction of identity is based essentially on che notions of « italianity » and « swissness » which reveal in fact a « multiple belonging » to Italy and Switzerland. The article analyzes social production of ambivalence in historical, linguistic, folkloric, political, ritual and visual discourses and the corresponding social practices. Der Kanton Tessin ist der einzige Kanton mit italienisch-sprenchender Mehrheit. Die Konstruktion der nationalen Identität beruht hauptsächlich auf den Begriffen von « italianità » und « patria svizzera », was eine multiple italienische und schweizerische Angehörigkeit andeutet. Der Artikel analysiert die verschiedenen Modi von Sozialer Produktion von Ambivalenz in historischen, linguistischen politischen, ritualen und visualen Diskursen und der entsprechenden sozialen Praktiken.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40990449

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044567
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Eidelman Jacqueline
Abstract: En janvier 2003, le Musée national des Arts d'Afrique et d'Océanie ferme ses portes. Ses collections sont transférées au quai Branly, en vue de l'ouverture d'un musée des arts et civilisations d'Afrique, d'Asie, d'Océanie et des Amériques. Différentes campagnes d'enquêtes, réalisées depuis 2000, rendent intelligible ce nouvel épisode de l'histoire mouvementée du palais de la porte Dorée. A partir du triple point de vue de l'institution muséale, du personnel et du public, ces enquêtes éclairent le processus de la fermeture d'un musée « patrimoine national » et de son nouveau destin. La réflexion porte plus précisément sur les liens apparemment contradictoires entre rupture et continuité, clôture et pérennité, pesanteurs du passé et évolution du regard. La création prochaine d'une Cité nationale de l'histoire de l'immigration peut illustrer ces paradoxes. The National Museum of African and Oceanian Arts closed in January 2003. Its collections were transferred to the future Quai Branly Museum of Arts and civilizations from Africa, Asia, Oceania and the Americas. Various survey campaigns carried out since the year 2000 explain this new episode of the eventful history of the Palais at the Porte Dorée. From the threefold point of view of the museum institution, the personnel and the visitors these surveys throw some light on the closure process of a museum belonging to the national patrimony and on its new destiny. The study is focussed on the seemingly contradictory relations between rupture and continuity, closure and durability, heaviness of the past and new look at museums. The future creation of a national city of the history of immigration illustrates these paradoxes. Das nationale Museum der Afrikanischen und Ozeanischen Künste wurde im Januar 2003 geschlossen. Seine Sammlungen wurden in dem zukünftigen Museum der Künste und Zivilizationen aus Afrika, Asia, Okeania und die Amerikas am Quai Branly gebracht.Verschiedene Erhebungen, die seit 2000 durchgeführt wurden, zeigen die Bedeutung dieser neuen Episode der bewegten Geschichte des Palasts Porte Dorée. Aus dem dreifachem Gesichtspunkt der musealen Institution, des Personals und des Publikums ermöglichen diese Erhebungen, die Schliessung eines dem nationalen Erbe gehörenden Museums und sein neues Schicksal zu verstehen. Die Studie konzentriert sich auf die anscheinend widersprüchliche Verbindungen zwischen Bruch und Kontinuität, Schliessung und Fortdauer, Schwerfälligkeit der Vergangenheit und neuem Blick auf die Museen. Die baldige Schöpfung eines internationalen Zentrums der Geschichte der Einwanderung illustriert diese Paradoxe.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40990845

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044567
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Tornatore Jean-Louis
Abstract: Entrepris depuis un quart de siècle, le démantèlement de l'industrie lourde lorraine (mines et sidérurgie) touche à sa fin. À partir de la comparaison entre le dernier événement en date, la fermeture spectaculaire de la dernière mine de charbon, et la mise en scène, une décennie plus tôt, de la dernière coulée d'une usine de la Lorraine sidérurgique, l'auteur s'interroge sur les finalités patrimoniales de telles célébrations. Présentant quelques moments du traitement culturel — patrimonial, mémoriel... — de la crise industrielle lorraine, depuis les symptômes photographiques d'une mémoire empêchée jusqu'au musée très « contrôlé » en passant par la monumentalisation controversée de restes industriels, il met l'accent sur la lutte des représentations qui se noue autour de la construction de la « Lorraine industrielle » en objet-frontière patrimonial. Cet article souhaite ainsi contribuer à une anthropologie politique de l'institution de la mémoire. The dismantling of the heavy industry in Lorraine that is under way since a quarter of century (mines and iron and steel industry) is nearing its end. When comparing the latest event — the spectacular closure of the last coalmine — with the staging of the last casting in an iron and steel factory of Lorraine ten years earlier the author questions about the patrimonial aims of such celebrations. He shows some sequences of the cultural treatment (patrimonial, memorial) of the industrial crisis in Lorraine, from the photographic « symptoms » of a hindered memory to the highly « controlled » museum and to the industrial remains turned into historic buildings, a largely controversial fact. In this context he stresses the conflicting representations of « industrial Lorraine » as a patrimonial Boundary Object (abstract or concrete, that several actors can appropriate as they like). This article is meant to contribute to a political anthropology of memory institution. Die Zerschlagung der lothringischen Schwerindustrie (Bergwerken und Eisen- und Stahlindustrie) geht zu Ende. Der Autor vergleicht das jüngste Ereignis, die spektakuläre Schliessung der letzten Kohlenbergwerks, mit der Inszenierung des letzten Giessens einer lothringischen Eisenhütte zehn Jare früher und fragt sich über die patrimonialen Finalitäten solcher Zelebrationen. Er zeigt einige Zeitpunkte der kulturellen Behandlung der lothringischen industriellen Krise (bezüglich des Erbes und Gedächtnisses), von den photographischen Symptomen eines verhinderten Gedächtnisses über die industriellen Resten, die nun unter dem Denkmalschutz stehen, was sehr umstritten wird, bis hin zu dem höchst « kontrollierten » Museum. In diesem Kontext hebt er die Kämpfe hervor, die um die Repräsentationen der Konstruktion des « industriellen » Lothringens als ein patrimoniales (abstraktes oder konkretes) « Grenzobjekt » entstanden, das sich mehrere Akteure nach Belieben aneignen können. Das Ziel dieser Artikel ist, zu einer politischen Anthropologie der Gedächtnisinstitution einen Beitrag zu leisten.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40990851

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044569
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Raveneau Gilles
Abstract: La plongée sous-marine en milieu naturel est une activité qui modifie l'équilibre et la perception du corps. Les plongeurs – souvent convaincus de pratiquer une activité sans danger – s'exposent pourtant à des risques potentiellement mortels. À partir d'une enquête ethnographique, l'auteur montre qu'en définitive ce sport laisse une place aux transgressions des normes où le risque est progressivement converti en sécurité. Cet arrangement implique d'acquérir la maîtrise des « techniques de neutralisation » du risque, permettant aux plongeurs d'entretenir paradoxalement un système normatif, tout en le « violant ». Il apparaît ainsi que la transgression des normes de sécurité est moins un acte individuel qu'une conduite déterminée par l'organisation sociale de la plongée. Diving in a natural medium modifies the equilibrium and perception of the body. Divers — often convinced to practice a safe activity — expose themselves to potentially mortal risks. On the basis of an ethnographic survey the author shows that this sport leaves room for an infringement of norms where risk is progressively neutralized. This implies that divers master the neutralization techniques that enable them paradoxically to maintain a normative system and to violate it at the same time. Infringement of safety norms thus appears to be an individual act rather than a behaviour determined by the divers' social organization. Der Tauchsport in einem natürlichen Medium verändert das Equilibrium und die Wahrnehmung des Körpers. Die Taucher — die oft davon überzeugt sind, dass sie einen risikolosen Sport treiben — setzen sich potentiell tödlichen Risiken aus. Auf der Basis eiener ethnographischen Studie zeigt der Autor, dass dieser Sport Platz für eine Übertretung der Normen lässt, wo das Risiko allmählich neutralisiert wird. Dies setzt voraus, dass die Taucher die Neutralisationstechniken beherrschen, die sie paradoxerweise ermöglichen, ein normatives System zu erhalten und zur gleicher Zeit zu verletzen. Es zeigt sich, dass die Übertretung der Sicherheitsnormen eher eine individuelle Handlung als ein von der sozialen Organisation der Taucher bedingtes Verhalten ist.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40990897

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044573
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Rémy Catherine
Abstract: L'auteure présente un outil d'exploration des situations sociales : l'arrêt sur image. Elle revient sur ses diverses contraintes techniques et méthodologiques et démontre leur intérêt au sein d'une enquête inspirée par la sociologie de l'action. C'est en tenant compte de la temporalité des actions humaines que l'image semble pouvoir évoluer d'un rôle d'illustration à celui d'outil d'analyse. En passant indifféremment d'image animée à image statique, l'enregistrement vidéo permet un choix de séquences filmées et une lecture multiple des contextes observés. Il aide à suivre finement les activités des acteurs, et à mettre en évidence la différence entre les normes du groupe et celles de l'individu. The author présents a tool for explorating social situations : freezing on the frame. She evokes its various technical and methodological limits and shows its interest for a survey inspired by action sociology. By taking into account the temporality of human actions the image can be more than illustrative and become an analysis tool. By passing indiscriminately from an animated image to a static one video recording permits a sélection of filmed séquences and a multiple reading of the observed contexts. It helps to follow minutely the actors' activities and to show the différence between group norms and individual norms. Die Autorin stellt ein Beobachtungsmittel der sozialen Lagen dar : das Standbild. Sie beschreibt seine verschiedenen technischen und methodologischen Beschränkungen und zeigt sein Interesse für eine von der Handlungssoziologie inspirierten Erhebung. Durch die Berücksichtigung der Zeitlichkeit der Menschenhandlungen ist das Bild mehr als illustrativ und kann zum Analysemittel werden. Beim unterschiedslosen Übergehen von einem belebten zu einem statischen Bild bietet die Videoaufnahme eine Auswahl von gefilmten Bildfolgen und ein vielfaches Lesen der beobachteten Kontexten. Sie hilft dazu, den Unterschied zwischen Gruppennormen und individualen Normen hervorzuheben.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40991029

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044587
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Gensburger Sarah
Abstract: Le titre de « Juste parmi les Nations » est décerné depuis 1963 par l'État d'Israël afin d'honorer la mémoire des non-Juifs « qui ont risqué leur vie pour venir en aide à des Juifs » . Le « Juste » reçoit un diplôme et une médaille par un représentant de l'Etat hébreu lors d'une cérémonie publique où les individus « sauvés » et leurs « sauveteurs » , ou leurs descendants, sont réunis. Cet article étudie comment, à travers cette cérémonie, s'effectue un bricolage entre des « mémoires » véhiculées par des institutions et des individus, Juifs et non-Juifs, résidant en France et en Israël. Comment s'explique le recours à une seule et même pratique de rappel public du passé par des individus dont les récits des souvenirs peuvent diverger ? The title of « Righteous among the Nations » has been attributed since 1963 by the State of Israel to honor « the high-minded gentiles who risked their lives to save Jews » . Each nomination goes with the gift of a medal and a diploma to the nominee during an official ceremony. This public event gathers « rescued people » and « rescuers » and members of each family. In this article, the author studies how, through this ceremony, a « patchwork » between different and plural memories can take place. In a common place and time, the different actors crosses institutions, individuals, Jews and non-Jews, living in France or in Israël. How can we explain the use of a single common practice of remembrance by individuals whose social characteristics are different and whose narrations of the past diverge from each other ? Der Titel « Gerechte(r) unter den Nationen » wird seit 1963 vom Staat Israel verliehen, um an Nicht-Juden zu erinnern, « die ihr Leben riskiert haben um Juden zu helfen » . Der/die Gerecht(e) erhält von einem Vertreter des Staates Israel im Rahmen einer Zeremonie und im Beisein der « Geretteten » ein Diplom und eine Medaille verliehen. Dieser Artikel geht an Hand einer Analyse dieser Zeremonie der Frage nach, inwiefern durch die Übertragung von Erinnerungen der Individuen und Institutionen — jüdische und nicht-jüdische, französische und israelische - ein Patchwork von Erinnerungen entsteht. Im Vordergrund steht dabei die Frage, wie der offizielle Rückgriff auf lediglich eine Vergangenheit zu erklären ist, wo doch von einer Verschiedenheit der Erinnerungen auszugehen ist ?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40991427

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044587
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Lapierre Nicole
Abstract: Le combat juif pour la mémoire du génocide et la reconnaissance finalement obtenue sont devenus un modèle et un cadre référentiel pour d'autres populations persécutées. Mais l'ampleur de cette effervescence mémorielle suscite à son tour des réactions critiques. Quant au modèle, il est parfois contesté de façon virulente par la dérive minoritaire d'une compétition victimaire. Après avoir rappelé le processus à travers lequel ce phénomène mémoriel s'est progressivement imposé, on analysera son rôle référentiel, les critiques qu'il soulève et les controverses dont il fait l'objet. The Jewish fight for the genocide's memory and the recognition it eventually reached have become a model and a referential frame for other persecuted people. Yet in return some react critically to this rising memorial effervescence. As victims compete and minorities conflict, the Shoah model is in itself more and more contested. This article retraces how this memorial phenomenon has progressively settled and analyses its referential, yet controversial, role. Der jüdische Kampf um eine kollektive Erinnerung an die Vernichtung und ihre letztliche Anerkennung sind im Laufe der Zeit zu einer Art Modell und zu einem Bezugsrahmen für andere verfolgte Bevölkerungsgruppen geworden. Jedoch erzeugt die Omnipräsenz der Erinnerungen vielfach auch Kritik. Das Erinnerungsmodell wird von Seiten bestimmter Minderheitenströmungen innerhalb des herrschenden « Opferwettbewerbs » oftmals heftig angegriffen. Zunächst analysiert dieser Artikel den Prozess der Durchsetzung des Phänomens des Sich-Erinnerns, im Anschluss daran wird seine Referenzwirkung diskutiert sowie die Kritik und die Debatte die es hervorruft.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40991432

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044587
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Lemee-Gonçalves Carole
Abstract: Partant du constat que les faits sociaux de mémoire sont portés par des actes de communication, il s'agit ici de dégager les pratiques qui alimentent les formes de « l'agir » socio-mémoriel, aujourd'hui présent en France et ailleurs. Quels processus sont a l'œuvre dans des situations post-génocidaires, souvent aussi post-migratoires, comme dans la Shoah (« Khurbn » en yiddish) par exemple ? Dans le cas d'Ashkénazes, il s'agit d'une reinscription qualitative au sein des cartographies de la parenté, mais aussi d'une reconnexion avec des périodes antérieures au genocide et à l'ethnocide à travers des événements culturels. Since the work of memory cannot exist without inter-subjective exchanges, this paper introduces in the study of memory the concept of « social acting » created by Weber. Attempting to point out the plurality of the practices that feed the various forms of socio-memorial movements present today in France and elsewhere. Which are the processes taking on a very particular aspect in post-genocidal as in post-migratory situations such as after the Shoah (Khurbn in Yiddish) ? In the case of the Ashkenase, these processes are also post-ethnocide and consist in a qualitative re-inscription within genealogical mapping and simultaneously in the long development of a history in which the genocide constitutes a memorial screen as well as actions of re-inscribing and re-connecting with cultural markers associated to periods antedating the genocide and ethnocide. Da Erinnerungsarbeit nicht ohne das Betrachten von zwischenmenschlichem Austausch und sozialer Praxis erfolgen kann, soll im Rahmen dieses Artikels das Webersche Konzept des « Sozialen Handelns » in die Untersuchung von Erinnerungen einbezogen werden. Ausgehend von der Tatsache, dass soziale Erinnerungen durch Kommunikation ausgedrückt werden, möchte dieser Artikel die Vielfalt der Praktiken zeigen, die heute in Frankreich und anderswo die Vielzahl der gesellschaftlichen Erinnerungsbewegungen prägen. Die Erinnerungsprozesse verdeutlichen vor allem die soziale und zeitliche Beziehung zum Anderen. Besonders interessant zu analysieren ist sind Post-Shoah-(Khurbn auf Jiddisch) und Post-Auswanderungs-Erinnerungenen. In diesem Artikel richtet sich das Augenmerk vor allem auf Ashkenasische Juden aus Deutschland, Zentral-und Osteuropa, deren Situation nach dem Ethnozid betrachtet wird. Dabei ist eine qualitative Wiederaufnahme der Lebenspraxis der Elterngeneration zu beobachten ; ebenso wie ein Anknüpfen im Rahmen bestimmter kultureller Riten an die Zeit vor dem Völkermord.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40991434

Journal Title: Revista Geográfica
Publisher: Instituto Panamericano de Geografía e Historia
Issue: i40045037
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Sánchez Darío César
Abstract: Benítez, M. 2003, "La investigación-acción y el rol del investigador en las ciencias sociales", Geo- demos, 6:147-168, Buenos Aires, CONICET-IMHICIHU.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40996763

Journal Title: Social Studies of Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i40045097
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Schnell Izhak
Abstract: Within the last 2000 years the land demarcated by the Mediterranean Sea to the west and the Jordan Valley to the east has been one of the most disputed territories in history. World powers have redrawn its boundaries numerous times. Since the establishment of the state of Israel in 1948 within British Mandate Palestine, Palestinians and Israelis have disagreed over the national identity of the land that they both inhabit.The struggles have extended from the battlefields to the classrooms. In the process, different national and ethnic groups have used various sciences, ranging from archeology to history and geography, to prove territorial claims based on their historical presence in the region. But how have various Israeli social and political groups used maps to solidify claims over the territory? In this paper we bring together science studies and critical cartography in order to investigate cartographic representations as socially embedded practices and address how visual rhetoric intersects with knowledge claims in cartography. Before the 1967 war between Israel and its Arab neighbors, the Israeli government and the Jewish National Fund produced maps of Israel that established a Hebrew topography of the land. After 1967, Israel's expanded territorial control made the demarcation of its borders ever more controversial. Consequently, various Israeli interest groups and political parties increasingly used various cartographic techniques to forge territorial spaces, demarcate disputed boundaries, and inscribe particular national, political, and ethnic identities onto the land.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40997773

Journal Title: Análise Social
Publisher: Gabinete de Investigações Sociais
Issue: i40045662
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Emediato Carlos A.
Abstract: Samuel Bowles, Class Power and Mass Education,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41010296

Journal Title: Análise Social
Publisher: Instituto de Ciências Sociais da Universidade de Lisboa
Issue: i40045761
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Santos Catarina
Abstract: Un dernier verre avant la guerre, éd. Rivages, Paris, cap. 14, 2001).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41012172

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048262
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): Brès Yvon
Abstract: Revue philosophique, 2001-4, p. 469.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41098930

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048293
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Perrin Christophe
Abstract: « Wer ist Nietzsches Zarathoustra ? », GA 7, 106.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rphi.093.0333

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048293
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Vieillard-Baron Jean-Louis
Abstract: Marc Fumaroli, Paris-New York et retour. Voyage dans les arts et les images, Paris, Fayard, 2009.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rphi.093.0355

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048296
Date: 3 1, 1998
Author(s): Soual Philippe
Abstract: Cours d'esthétique, op. cit., I, p. 213,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41100607

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048303
Date: 9 1, 2010
Author(s): Aubry Gwenaëlle
Abstract: infra, p. 385.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41100920

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048317
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Boyer Alain
Abstract: Deuxième partie, chap. II, p. 211-212.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41101451

Journal Title: Portuguese Studies
Publisher: W. S. Maney & Son LTD
Issue: i40048536
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): GARCÍA ANA ISABEL BRIONES
Abstract: Pires, p. 183.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41105755

Journal Title: Die Musikforschung
Publisher: Bärenreiter-Verlag
Issue: i40049313
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): Seibt Oliver
Abstract: Ebd., S. 17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41125511

Journal Title: Die Musikforschung
Publisher: Bärenreiter-Verlag
Issue: i40049319
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Sichardt Martina
Abstract: Webster, S. 275.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41125823

Journal Title: Sociologický Časopis / Czech Sociological Review
Publisher: Sociologický ústav Akademie Věd České Republiky
Issue: i40049614
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Jacobs Amy
Abstract: Jan Tomasz Gross, Les Voisins {The Neighbours) [2001].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41132596

Journal Title: GeoJournal
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40050915
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Rosin Christopher
Abstract: (www.argos.org.nz).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41148278

Journal Title: The French Review
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of French
Issue: i40051073
Date: 5 1, 2011
Author(s): Cooke Dervila
Abstract: This article examines the expression of the immigrant experience in Le Figuier enchanté (1992), focusing on the notions of hybridity and intercultural exchange. The text is shown to constitute a form of intercultural dialogue, while also demonstrating some barriers to such dialogue, such as old-stock Québécois "obsession" with protecting French, or an overattachment to ethnicity on the part of immigrants. Micone's "surconscience linguistique" (Gauvin), is explored both through his use of language and through his consideration of linguistic politics in Quebec. The possibility of an "enchanted" hybridity is mooted, although this is shown to remain somewhat aspirational.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41151702

Journal Title: Amerikastudien / American Studies
Publisher: Universitätsverlag C. Winter
Issue: i40051449
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Sielke Sabine
Abstract: Sabine Sielke and Anne Hofmann, "Serienmörder und andere Killer: Die Endzeitfiktionen von Bret Easton Ellis und Mi- chel Houellebecq," Anglo-Romanische Kulturkontakte: von Humanismus bis Postkolonialismus, ed. Andrew Johnston and Ulrike Schneider (Berlin: Dahlem UP, 2002) 283-318.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41158073

Journal Title: Histoire de l'education
Publisher: Institut national de recherche pédagogique
Issue: i40051541
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): JABLONKA Ivan
Abstract: Ibid.,p.viii.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41159914

Journal Title: Histoire de l'education
Publisher: Institut national de recherche pédagogique
Issue: i40051575
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): LÉTOURNEAU Jocelyn
Abstract: Jacques Beauchemin, « Accueillir sans renoncer à soi-même », Le Devoir, 22 Janvier 2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41160504

Journal Title: Polish American Studies
Publisher: Polish American Historical Association
Issue: i40051657
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Kozaczka Grazyna
Abstract: Sollors, Ethnic Modernism, 43.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41162461

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40051689
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Legrond Louis
Abstract: Enseigner la morale aujourd'hui? PUF. L'éducateur. 1991.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41163138

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053819
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Bruner Jerome
Abstract: Tout au long de l'histoire de la psychologie, la revolution cognitive n'a pas cessé de progresser. Celle qui a cours aujourd'hui cherche à expliquer comment les individus parviennent a donner des significations au monde complexe qui les entoure : il est temps à présent de comprendre différents modes d'élaboration du sens. Quatre modes distincts sont suggérés. Le premier, le mode intersubjectif, concerne l'établissement, le façonnement et le maintien de l'intersubjectivité. Le deuxième, le mode actionnel, concerne l'organisation de l'action. Le troisième, le mode normatif, intègre les éléments particuliers dans des contextes normatifs et s'exprime en imposant des contraintes aux deux premiers modes. Les trois modes ont en commun d'être fortement dépendants du contexte: Les narratifs — ou les récits — sont l'instrument par excellence permettant d'ancrer les trois premiers modes d'élaboration du sens dans un ensemble plus structuré. On peut supposer que le quatrième mode d'élaboration du sens, le mode propositionnel, vise à décontextualiser les trois modes précédents en les soumettant à la vérification et aux justifications logiques. Throughout the entire history of cognitive psychology, a cognitive revolution has always been in progress. The current cognitive revolution began to explain how individuals come to make meaning out of a complex world ; it now needs to turn more vigorously to different forms of meaning making. Four modes are suggested. The first one is directed to the establishment, shaping and maintenance of intersubjectivity. A second form, the actional mode, is concerned with the way action is organized. The third form, the normative mode, construes particulars in normative contexts ; it expresses itself by imposing constraints on the first two modes. These three modes of meaning making have in common to be context dependent. Narratives or stories are the vehicles par excellence for entrenching the first three modes into a more structured whole. It is suggested that the fourth mode of meaning making, the propositional mode, is directed to the decontextualization of the preceeding three modes by imposing verifiability and logical justification. A brief account of how this set of meaning making processes might have grown out of human evolution is discussed. In conclusion : no reductionist theory on mind will do it proper justice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41200526

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053825
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Lorcerie Françoise
Abstract: L'idée de laïcité n'est pas soustraite à l'histoire. C'est pourquoi il est illusoire de postuler son sens dans l'absolu. Aujourd'hui, comme en d'autres époques, sa valeur politique tend à se polariser sur une opposition binaire entre une acception libérale et une acception anti-libérale dite républicaine. Toutefois, trois traits semblent particuliers aux années 1990 : — une disjonction entre l'acception politique dominante de la laïcité et sa force juridique, gagée par la Constitution et cadrée par des instruments juridiques internationaux ; — l'orientation nationalitaire du débat, pointant vers les populations issues de l'immigration musulmane, et questionnant leur appartenance à la nation ; — enfin, l'inscription du débat dans la problématique globale de la modernisation des formes scolaires, laquelle véhicule à la fois une epistemologie constructiviste et interactionniste, et une éthique laïque ef libérale. Les « affaires de foulards » sont un analyseur de cette complexité. Secularity concept must not be taken away from history. So it would be illusory to think about it as an abstract notion. Presently, as in older times, its political value tends to be focusing on a binary opposition between a liberal notion and an anti-liberal, so-called republican one. However three characteristics are specific of the nineties : — the split between main political meaning of secularity and its strength in legal terms, provided by the Constitution and by international legal tools ; — a debate focusing on nationality issues, with questions related to national belonging or muslim immigrants ; — last, the integration of this debate into the global issue of school modernization, which is concerned with a constructivist and interactionist epistemology and a liberal, secular ethic, as well. « Headscarves cases » are an indicator of this complexity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41200674

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053828
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Meirieu Philippe
Abstract: À partir d'une définition de l'éducation comme « relation dissymétrique, nécessaire et provisoire, visant à l'émergence d'un sujet », la pédagogie est proposée comme effort pour penser cette activité dans des situations données. Refusant une posture philosophique qui décrète l'existence du sujet pour le faire advenir, comme une attitude inspirée des sciences humaines qui abolit le sujet en réduisant ses actes à la résultante des forces qui s'exercent sur lui, la pédagogie peut se définir comme « anticipation contextualisée ». Dans cette perspective, elle requiert un discours qui exprime la singularité des sujets en situation et la mette en perspective d'universalité. Le récit peut avoir cette fonction et « faire théorie » sans, pour autant, s'abstraire des situations particulières qu'il décrit. La pédagogie comme « récits d'éducation » a alors pour fonction de favoriser la prise de décision éducative. Education being defined as "a dissymetric, necessary and temporary relation focusing on the emergence of a subject", pedagogy is considered as an endeavour to think this activity in given situations. If we refuse a philosophical position which decides the existence of a subject to make it turn into a reality - as an attitude inspired by human sciences which reduces the subject's acts to the resultant of forces exerced on him - pedagogy may be defined as a "contextualized anticipation". In this perspective, we must display the uniqueness of subjects in a specific situation and set it in a universal perspective. Narratives may have this function without neglecting the specificity of situations. Pedagogy as "narratives on education" is able to facilitate educational decision making.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41200740

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053874
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Denoyel Noël
Abstract: L'alternance entre les trois pôles de la formation (auto-hétéro-oïko) présente dans les pratiques de formation alternée (variété des situations d'apprentissage et des acteurs) renvoie à la différenciation des trois personnes pronominales (je-tu-il) du langage courant et s'inscrit dans l'épistémologie ternaire de la sémiotique initiée par Peirce. L'intelligence pratique et rusée (la métis des Grecs), repérée chez des artisans grâce à l'expression régionale « le biais du gars », met en scène une logique ouverte où transduction et abduction s'articulent à déduction et induction. Une « raison expérientielle » , dialogique, écologique, à visée éthique, est ainsi forgée. C'est une rationalité pratique cherchant à actualiser le potentiel de la situation. Elle est empreinte de sagesse et de « prudence » en action, au sens d'Aristote (phronésis). L'éc(h)oformation qui émerge de cette raison expérientielle, de ce regard interactionnel, est indissociable de la boucle étrange entre deux autres raisons : la raison sensible et la raison formelle, entre spontanéité et habitude. The tripolar concept of training (auto-hetero-oïko), foundation of alternating courses practice (with multiple learning situations and actors), draws us back to the differenciation between the three main persons singular (I, You, He) expressed in common language as the compound epistemology of semiotics put forward by Peirce... Practical intelligence (close to the "metis" of the Greeks) can be noticed among craftsmen when they refer to the "biais du gars" bespeaking an open logic where transduction and abduction are linked to deduction and induction. A constructive reasoning, interactive ans ecological, with ethical objectives, is created. It's a practical rationality aiming at actualizing the potentiality of the situation and marked by sagaciy and prudence in action in the Aristotelian sense (phronesis). The "ec(h)otraining" emerging from the wisdom of experience, this interactive vision of things is necessarily included in the chain linking two other thoughts : the intuitive thought and the formal thought, between spontaneity and habit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41201489

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053878
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): Malet Régis
Abstract: Le discours de la recherche sur les enseignants et leurs savoirs est souvent tenté de détacher la connaissance du sujet connaissant, traduisant des préoccupations de fonctionnalité et de transférabilité des savoirs. À cette perspective rationaliste résiste néanmoins une mouvance de recherche qui défend une approche anthropologique du savoir enseignant, moins soucieuse de légiférer l'acte d'enseignement que de mettre au jour les formes complexes et locales de construction de l'enseignant-sujet et de ses savoirs, que ceux-ci soient inscrits dans une forme de vie, incarnés, ou dessinés réflexivement dans l'espace narratif. Ce courant phénoménologique et herméneutique, pluriel et très vivace dans le monde anglo-saxon, promeut le savoir ordinaire des enseignants, se démarquant ainsi des études attentives aux seuls savoirs ' extraordinaires' de l'expert. Traduisant un retour du sujet qui traverse les sciences sociales depuis la dernière décennie, cette tendance dans la recherche éducative à réhabiliter la subjectivité enseignante, sans pour autant la magnifier, adresse des questions importantes à notre champ de recherche sur les choix épistémologiques qui le guident. Research discourse on teachers and their knowledge has a tendency to separate knowledge from the one who knows as it is focusing on knowledge functionality and transfer. Nevertheless, one research movement is resisting to this rationalist perspective, preferring an anthropological approach of teachers' knowledge focusing on sophisticated and local forms of construction of knowledge and knowing subject rather than on teaching laws (these constructions being embodied or reflexively designed in narrative space). This multifaceted phenomenological and hermeneutic trend, observed in anglosaxon world, is promoting teachers' ordinary knowledge, when the majority of investigations focus only on expert knowledge. As it can be observed in all social sciences in this last decade, the importance of the subject - the teacher in that case - is acknowledged (not overestimated), resulting in major questions aimed at our research field about its epistemologic orientations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41201593

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053883
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Prairat Eirick
Abstract: Dans la première partie de ce texte, nous déclinons les différents sens du concept de responsabilité en suivant notamment son glissement du champ juridique vers celui de la philosophie. Dans la seconde partie, après avoir mis en lumière l'originalité de la contribution de Hans Jonas dans le débat éthique contemporain, nous montrons que l'éthique éducative est fondamentalement une éthique de la responsabilité. In the first part of this text, we decline the various meanings of any responsible concept by following especially from a judicial to philosophical scope of view. In the second part, and after focusing on the originality of the contribution of Hans Jonas to this contemporary ethic debate, we are determined to prouve that educational ethics are basically responsibility ethics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41201741

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053899
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Derouet Jean-Louis
Abstract: Il s'agit d'éclairer plusieurs déplacements qui se sont produits dans les trente dernières années. Tout d'abord la création d'un milieu d'experts intermédiaires entre la politique, l'administration et la recherche. Ensuite un changement du cadre à l'intérieur duquel se situe la réflexion. Il s'agit moins de penser la cohésion d'une société dans un cadre national qu'à la manière dont le pays peut maintenir son rang dans la compétition internationale. Enfin un changement d'orientation politique : le souci de la formation de l'élite redevient primordial même s'il ne s'agit plus de maintenir une tradition culturelle mais de sauvegarder ses parts de marché. Le texte étudie ces évolutions en France en distinguant trois périodes : une période de « politique à l'état gazeux » où la gauche tente de transformer les idéaux libertaires de 1968 en programme de gouvernement ; une tentative de passage à l'état solide avec la loi d'orientation de 1989 et la création de la Direction de l'évaluation et de la prospective ; une déstabilisation de ce système par le ministre Claude Allègre qui jette le système éducatif français dans le grand bain de la concurrence internationale. Il s'ensuit une période à la fois « sous influence » et d'incertitude. The idea is to explain several moves that have happened in the last thirty years. First of all, the creation of a body of experts, middlemen between politics, government and research. Then a change in the setting of the thinking process. It is less to think about social cohesion within a national setting than the way the country can live up to its ranking when competing at the international level. Finally, a change in political orientations: teaching the elite becomes a crucial problem again even if it does not mean keeping cultural traditions alive any more but securing market shares. This article studies those changes and defines three periods: firstly, a period of politics in "gaseous-state" in which the left tried to change 1968's libertarian ideals into a political agenda; secondly, an attempt to change to solid state with the 1989's Orientation Act (act laying down the basic principles for government action in education) and the creation of the "Direction de l'évaluation et de la prospective" (assessment & futurology office); finally, the destabilisation of this system by Claude Allègre, the then French education secretary who put the French educational system into the picture of international competition. A period of doubts "under influence" followed right after. Es handelt sich darum, mehrere in den letzten 30 Jahren vorgefundenen Verwandlungen aufzuklären: zunächst die Gründung eines Expertenmilieus zwischen Politik, Verwaltung und Forschung. Dann einen Wandel des Rahmens, in dem die Überlegung stattfindet: es geht nämlich weniger darum, über den Zusammenhalt einer Gesellschaft in einem internationalen Rahmen nachzudenken als über die Art und Weise zu überlegen, wie das Land seinen Platz im internationalen Wettbewerb behalten kann. Schließlich einen Wandel der politischen Orientierung: die Bemühung um die Bildung einer Elite wird wieder vorrangig, auch wenn es nicht mehr darauf ankommt, eine kulturelle Tradition zu behalten, sondern seinen Marktanteil zu retten. Der Text bearbeitet diese Entwicklungen in Frankreich und unterscheidet dabei drei Perioden: erstens eine Zeit der „gasförmigen” Politik, in der die Linksparteien versuchen, die anarchistischen 1968er Ideale in ein Regierungsprogramm umzusetzen; zweitens ein Versuch der Verfestigung mit dem Orientierungsgesetz 1989 und die Gründung des Bewertungs- und Forschungsamtes (Direction de l'évaluation et de la prospective); drittens eine Destabilisierung dieses Systems durch den Erziehungsminister Claude Allègre, der das französische Schulsystem mit der internationalen Konkurrenz konfrontiert. Darauf folgt eine „unter Einfluß" stehende und zugleich unsichere Periode. Se trata de aclarar varios desplazamientos que se produjeron en los treinta últimos años. Primero, la creación de un medio de expertos intermediarios entre la política, la administración y investigación. Después, un cambio del marco dentro del que se sitúa la reflexión. No se trata tanto de pensar la cohesión de una sociedad en un marco nacional como de la manera en que el país puede mantener su rango en la competencia internacional. Por fin, un cambio de orientación política : la preocupación por la formación de lo más selecto vuelve a ser primordial aunque ya no se trata de mantener una tradición cultural sino de proteger sus cuotas de mercado. El texto estudia estas evoluciones en Francia distinguiendo tres períodos : un período de « política en estado gaseoso » en el que la izquierda intenta transformar los ideales libertarios de 1968 en programa de gobierno ; un intento de pasar al estado sólido con la ley de orientación de 1989 y la creación la Dirección de la evaluación y de la prospectiva ; una destabilización de este sistema por el ministro Claude Allègre que echa el sistema educativo francés en el gran baño de la competencia internacional. De ahí resulta un período a la vez «bajo influencia » y de incertidumbre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41202115

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053904
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Daunay Bertrand
Abstract: Depuis que la didactique du français s'est constituée comme champ de recherche, la question de l'enseignement de la littérature a toujours été centrale, même si l'approche didactique de la littérature apparaît davantage comme un espace de questions que comme un lieu de construction d'une théorie cohérente de la littérature, de son enseignement et de son apprentissage. Concernant l'enseignement de la littérature, la didactique du français est essentiellement un champ de discussions théoriques, qui portent aussi bien sur le statut des objets enseignables et sur les conditions de leur enseignabilité que sur la sélection des outils théoriques permettant l'approche de ces objets. Si, aux fondements de la didactique de la littérature, c'est la contestation de l'enseignement traditionnel qui domine, sur des postulats théoriques à forte teneur idéologique, de nombreuses recherches descriptives ont interrogé aussi bien la notion de littérature que les pratiques de lecture des élèves comme les pratiques effectives d'enseignement de la littérature. Au cœur des recherches didactiques se place la question de la sélection des savoirs et des pratiques (lecture et écriture notamment) susceptibles de devenir objets d'enseignement et d'apprentissage, à tous les niveaux du cursus scolaire. Since the didactics of French formed a research field, the question of teaching literature has constantly been crucial, even if the didactical approach of literature seems more like a forum to ask questions, rather than a place where a coherent theory on literature, its teaching and learning is being developed. As for teaching literature, the didactics of French is mainly an area of theoretical discussion as much about the status of objects to be taught and the conditions on which they can be taught as how to select theoretical tools to approach those objects. If, of all the founding elements of didactics of literature, objecting to traditional teaching is the main element based on theoretical postulates with strong ideological content, numerous descriptive research works have questioned the notion of literature as well as the students' reading practices and the actual literature teaching practices. The question of selecting the knowledge and practices (reading and writing for instance) that could become teaching and learning objects at all schooling levels is central to didactical research. Desde que la didáctica del francés se constituyó como campo de investigación, la cuestión de la enseñanza de la literatura siempre ha sido central, aunque el enfoque didáctico de la literatura se presenta más como un espacio de cuestiones que como un lugar de construcción de una teoría coherente de la literatura, de su enseñanza y de su aprendizaje. En lo que se refiere a la enseñanza de la literatura, la didáctica del francés es esencialmente un campo de discusiones teóricas, que tratan tanto del estatuto de los objetos que se pueden enseñar y las condiciones en que pueden ser enseñados como de la selección de los instrumentos teóricos que permiten el enfoque de esos objetos. Si, en los cimientos de la didáctica de la literatura, es la discusión de la enseñanza tradicional la que domina, sobre los postulados teóricos con fuerte contenido ideológico, numerosas investigaciones descriptivas han interrogado tanto la noción de literatura como las prácticas de lectura de los alumnos como las prácticas efectivas de enseñanza de la literatura. En el medio de las investigaciones didácticas se plantea la cuestión de la selección de los saberes y de las prácticas (lectura y escritura particularmente) susceptibles de ser objetos de enseñanza y aprendizaje, en todos los niveles del recorrido escolar. Seit die Didaktik des Französichen zum Forschungsfeld herangewachsen ist, hat die Frage des Unterrichtens der Literatur immer im Mittelpunkt gestanden, auch wenn die didaktische Vorgenshensweise der Literatur eher als ein Feld der Fragen als ein Feld der Bildung einer zusammenhängenden Literaturtheorie erscheint, die die Art und Weise bestimmt, wie man sie unterrichten und lernen muss. Was das Unterrichten der Literatur angeht, erweist sich die Didaktik des Französichen als ein Feld der theoretischen Diskussionen, die sowohl den Status der zu unterrichtenden Inhalte und die Bedingungen ihres möglichen Unterrichtetwerdens als die Wahl der theoretischen Werkzeuge betreffen, die die Behandlung dieser Inhalte ermöglichen. Wenn in den Ursprüngen der Literaturdidaktik das Bestreiten des traditionnellen Unterrichts im Mittelpunkt steht, so haben auf theoretischen Postulaten mit starkem ideologischen Inhalt viele Forschungsarbeiten sowohl den Begriff der Literatur als auch die Lesepraktiken der Schüler sowie die tatsächlichen Unterrichtspraktiken der Literatur in Frage gestellt. Im Herzen der didaktichen Forschungsarbeiten steht die Frage der Auswahl der Kenntnisse und der Praktiken (insbesondere Lesen und Schreiben), die imstande sind, Lehr- und Lernobjekte in allen Stufen des Schulprogramms zu werden.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41202262

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053911
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Tutiaux-Guillon Nicole
Abstract: Le rapport qu'entretiennent histoire et mémoire à l'école est complexe et ambigu. Jusqu'aux années quatrevingt-dix, il a surtout été posé comme la relation, légitimée ou dénoncée, entre savoirs historiques, histoire scolaire et mémoire nationale. Dès les années soixante, le débat prend en compte le rapport entre le récit national et des histoires régionalistes qui revendiquent une place dans la culture scolaire, au nom des identités et du droit au passé. Cette dernière acception prévaut largement à l'heure actuelle mais cette fois au nom des minorités dépossédées de leur histoire, dès lors qu'elle n'a pas d'expression publique. Dans ces débats, la mémoire serait la forme d'une histoire parallèle, occultée et clandestine ; de leur côté les historiens tendent à distinguer histoire et mémoire. L'histoire scolaire, elle, admet l'histoire mais non les mémoires comme savoir de référence légitime ; pourtant les commémorations et le « devoir de mémoire » s'y invitent de plus en plus fréquemment. De telles évolutions interrogent les composantes de la discipline scolaire : au premier chef les finalités et les contenus mais aussi les pratiques, inégalement connues dans ce domaine et, finalement, les apprentissages souvent plus espérés qu'avérés. The connection that exists at school between history and memory is complicated and ambiguous; it is source of debate and demands which recently intensified with public and political uses. School history accepts history but not memories as good legitimate reference. And yet commemoration ceremonies and the "duty to remember" are more and more in the schools. Such changes question the elements of that school subject: its purpose of building identity and citizenship, its contents and their changes, its teaching practices, not really evenly known in this field, and finally the learning that is more often wished for than actually delivered. La relación que mantienen historia y memoria en la Escuela es compleja y ambigua; alimenta debates y reivindicaciones que recientemente han sido avivados por los usos públicos y políticos de la historia y de la memoria. La historia escolar admite la historia pero no las memorias como saber de referencia legítimo; sin embargo las conmemoraciones y el "deber de memoria" se invitan cada vez más frecuentemente. Tales evoluciones interrogan los componentes de la asignatura escolar: las finalidades identitarias y cívicas, los contenidos y sus renovaciones, las prácticas, desigualmente conocidas en este campo, y finalmente los aprendizajes a menudo más esperados que comprobados. Das Verhältnis zwischen Geschichte und Gedächtnis in der Schule ist komplex und mehrdeutig. Es gibt den Anlass zu Debatten und Forderungen, die die öffentlichen und politischen Anwendungen des Gedächtnisses und der Geschichte neulich haben aufleben Tassen. Die Schulgeschichte duldet die Geschichte aber nicht die Erinnerungen als Maßstab gebendes Wissen, während Gedenkfeier und "Erinnerungsgebot'' (Aufarbeitung der Vergangenheit) immer öfter daran teilhaben. Eine solche Entwicklung stellt die Komponenten des Schulfachs Geschichte in Frage: über seine Zwecke, was die Identitätsfrage und den Bürgersinn betrifft, über den Inhalt und seine Veränderungen, über Praktiken, die in diesem Gebiet oft ungenügend bekannt sind, und schließlich über das tatsächliche Erlernen, das oft eher erhofft als erwiesen ist.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41202424

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053917
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): Théry Irène
Abstract: Cet article (1) présente une réflexion théorique sur la notion de genre, de ses définitions et ses usages en sciences sociales. S'opposant à l'approche dominante qui conçoit le genre comme identité ou attribut socialement construits des personnes, conception qu'elle considère comme essentialisante ou substantialisante, l'auteur argumente en faveur d'une approche relationnelle du genre conçu comme modalité des relations sociales. Elle se fonde pour cela sur des travaux d'anthropologie comparative et historique qui contraignent à reconsidérer le dualisme du moi et du corps constitutif de l'idéologie individualiste de la personne, et critique I'hypostase du Moi comme homoncule constitué à partir d'une absolutisation de la première personne. Analysant le système sexué des trois personnes grammaticales, elle soutient que, n'étant pas référentiel, « le je de l'interlocution n'a ni sexe, ni genre ». Les apports croisés de l'anthropologie et de la philosophie analytique la conduisent à revoir la notion de personne pour mieux penser la capacité proprement humaine de se reconnaître comme d'un sexe sans être jamais assigné à celui-ci. This article presents a theoretical work on the idea of gender, its definitions and uses in social science. The author objects to the mainstream approach that sees gender as an identity or an attribute that some people socially construct. She sees that idea as essentializing or substantializing. She argues in favor of a relational approach of gender conceived as mode of social interactions. Her approach is based on comparative and historical works of anthropologists that lead to consider the dualism of the ego and the body which make the individualistic ideology of a persona, and she criticizes the hypostasis of the ego as homunculus made up from absolutizing the id. Analyzing the gender system of the three grammatical persons, she asserts that, as it is not a reference, the other person's "I" does not have a sex nor a gender. The contributions from both anthropology and analytic philosophy lead her to reconsider the notion of persona so as to better grasp the capacity—specifically human—to see ourselves belonging to a sex group without having ever been assigned to it. Este artículo presenta una reflexión teórica respecto a la noción de género, de sus definiciones y sus usos en ciencias sociales. Oponiéndose al enfoque dominante que concibe el género como identidad o atributo socialmente construidos de las personas, concepción que considera como esencializante y sustancializante, la autora argumenta a favor de un enfoque relacional del género concebido como modalidad de las relaciones sociales. Para ella, se basa en los trabajos de antropología comparativa e histórica que obligan a reconsiderar el dualismo del yo y del cuerpo constitutivo de la ideología individualista de la persona, y critica la hipóstasis del Yo como homúnculo constituido a partir de una absolutización de la primera persona. Al analizar el sistema sexuado de las tres personas gramaticales, sostiene que al no ser referencial, "el yo de la interlocución no tiene ni sexo, ni género". Los aportes convergentes de la antropología y de la filosofía analítica lo llevan a reconsiderar la noción de persona para pensar mejor la capacidad propiamente humana de reconocerse como de un sexo sin nunca ser asignado a él. Dieser Artikel bietet theoretische Uberlegungen über den Begriff Gender, seine Definitionen und seinen Gebrauch in den Sozialwissenschaften. Die Autorin setzt sich gegen die meist verbreitete Auffassung des Genders als sozial aufgebaute Identität oder Attribut des Einzelnen, denn sie betrachtet sie als eine essentialisierende bzw. substantialisierende Definition. Dagegen argumentiert sie für eine beziehungsmäßige Herangehensweise an das Gender, die es als eine Modalität der sozialen Beziehungen erfasst. Sie bezieht sich dabei auf vergleichenden und historischen Anthropologiearbeiten, die uns dazu zwingen, das Dualismus des Ichs und des Körpers zu überdenken, der einen Bestandteil der individualistischen Ideologie des Menschen darstellt, und kritisiert dazu die Hypostase des Ichs als Einzelnen, der auf Grund einer Absolutisierung der ersten Person geschaffen wird. Indem sie das geschlechtliche System der drei grammatikalischen Personen analysiert, behauptet die Autorin, dass auf Grund seiner Unbezüglichkeit „das Ich in der Interlokution weder Geschlecht noch Gender hat". Die Beiträge der Anthropologie und der analytischen Philosophie führen zu einer Überdenkung des Begriffs Mensch, um die rein menschliche Fähigkeit besser zu erfassen, die darin besteht, dass man sich einem Geschlecht anschließt, ohne dass es einem je zugewiesen wird.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41202564

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053918
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Allieu-Mary Nicole
Abstract: Cette note de synthèse souligne la spécificité de la discipline enseignée. L'histoire scolaire occupe une position originale dans le champ des didactiques par la complexité de ses références (production savante, auto-référence scolaire et usages publics de l'histoire). Tendus entre une transmission de connaissances consensuelles et la recherche d'une posture critique, les objets d'histoire enseignés demeurent soumis à des questionnements renouvelés au gré de la demande sociale comme le montrent les récents débats autour des questions mémorielles vives et concurrentes. L'histoire enseignée apparaît ainsi comme un mixte articulant représentations sociales, savoirs privés et connaissances validées. Depuis une quinzaine d'années, des travaux ont permis de mieux cerner le « penser en histoire » et les processus cognitifs spécifiques en jeu dans la classe (temps historique, conceptualisation, problématisation, construction de schemes explicatifs). Des recherches contextualisées ont permis d'explorer les pratiques professionnelles effectives et d'en modéliser le fonctionnement « normal » : une discipline qui privilégie la transmission de savoirs disant la réalité du passé et attachée à la neutralité du texte enseigné ; une discipline qui peine à mettre en cohérence des finalités intellectuelles ambitieuses (outiller le citoyen actif dans la cité de demain) et des activités dans la classe souvent cantonnées à la mémorisation, au repérage et à la catégorisation. Aussi voit-on se dessiner dans les travaux actuels, une problématique centrée sur les écarts entre les intentions et les pratiques. En articulant la notion de soumission aux règles du « contrat didactique » avec les autres modèles théoriques des sciences humaines et sociales mobilisés au sein des équipes de recherche, les travaux menés de manière encore trop dispersée, laissent apparaître des acquis importants qui pourraient être pris en compte dans la formation des enseignants This paper underlines the specificity of the subject taught. School history holds a special position in didactics due to the complexity of its references (scholarly production, self referencing and public use of history). Set in between passing consensual knowledge on and seeking a critical position, school history objects are still under new questioning that changes with social demands as recent debates on actual competing questions related to memory show it. Therefore school history seems to be a blend of social representations, private knowledge and proven knowledge. For fifteen years, works have enabled us to better define "historical thinking" and the specific cognitive processes that are involved in class (historical time, conceptualization, problematization, construction of explanatory schemes). Conceptualized research have allowed to explore real professional practices and model their "normal" functioning: a subject that favours passing on knowledge telling the truth about the past and being attached to using neutral documents; a subject that has difficulty to coherently link ambitious intellectual purposes (preparing active citizens for tomorrow's world) to class activities often limited to memorizing, recognizing and sorting. That is why we can see a problematic develop which is centered on the difference between intentions and practices. Connecting the notion of adherence to the rules of the "didactical contract" to the other theoretical models of human sciences developed within the research team., the work -done in a still too unfocused way -reveals some important acquired knowledge which could be taken into account in teacher training programmes. Esta nota subraya la especificidad de la disciplina enseñada. La historia escolar ocupa una posición original en el campo de las didácticas por la complejidad de sus referencias (producción sabia, autorreferencia escolar y usos públicos de la historia). Divididos entre una transmisión de conocimientos consensúales y la búsqueda de una postura crítica, los objetos de historia enseñados permanecen sometidos a interrogaciones repetidas a merced de la petición social como lo muestran los debates recientes en torno a las cuestiones relativas a las memorias vivas y competidoras. La historia enseñada aparece así como una mezcla que articula representaciones sociales, saberes privados y conocimientos validados. Desde hace unos quince años, ciertos trabajos permitieron delimitar mejor el "pensar en historia" y los procesos cognoscitivos específicos en juego en la clase (tiempo histórico, conceptualización, problematización, construcción de esquemas explicativos). Investigaciones contextualizadas han permitido explorar las prácticas profesionales efectivas y modelizar su funcionamiento "normal": una disciplina que privilegia la transmisión de saberes que dicen la realidad del pasado y apegada a la neutralidad del texto enseñado; una disciplina a la que le cuesta poner en coherencia finalidades intelectuales ambiciosas (preparar al ciudadano activo en la ciudad de mañana) y actividades en la clase a menudo limitadas a la memorización, la localización y la categorización. Por eso se ve dibujarse en los trabajos actuales, una problemática centrada en las diferencias entre las intenciones y las prácticas. Articulando la noción de sumisión a las reglas del "contrato didáctico" con los otros modelos teóricos de las SHS movilizadas en el seno de los equipos de investigación, los trabajos llevados de manera todavía demasiado dispersada dejan aparecer experiencias ¡mportantes que podrían tomarse en consideración en la formación de los docentes. Dieser Bericht unterstreicht die Besonderheit des Schulfachs Geschichte. Geschichte in der Schule hat eine originale Stellung im Feld der Didaktik wegen der Komplexität ihrer Referenzen (wissenschaftliche Schriften, Referenz für sich selbst in der Schule und öffentliche Benutzung der Geschichte). Zwischen der Verbreitung konsesueller Kenntnisse und der Suche nach einer kritischen Haltung hin-und hergerissen, sind die Lehrinhalte in Geschichte nach wie vor je nach sozialer Anfrage einer ständigen Fragestellung ausgesetzt, wie neulich die Debatten um lebhafte und entgegengesetzte Gedächtnisfragen. Die Geschichte als Schulfach erscheint also als eine Mischung zwischen sozialen Vorstellungen, privatem Wissen und bewährten Kenntnissen. Seit etwa 15 Jahren haben einige Arbeiten es ermöglicht, das „Denken in Geschichte” und die kognitiven Prozesse besser einzuschätzen, die in der Schule auf dem Spiel stehen (historische Zeit, Konzeptualisierung, Problematisierung, Bildung erklärender Schemata). Kontextualisierte Forschungsarbeiten haben es erlaubt, die tatsächlichen Berufspraktiken zu erforschen und „normalen” Betrieb zu modellieren: ein Schulfach, das die Übertragung von Kenntnissen, die die Realität der Vergangenheit beschreibt und großen Wert auf die Neutralität des unterrichteten Textes legt; ein Fach, das sich Mühe gibt, ehrgeizige intellektuelle Zwecke (den aktiven Bürger in der Stadt von morgen mit Werkzeugen bewaffnen) mit Aktivitäten in der Klasse in Kohärenz zu bringen, die sich oft auf Memorisierung, Markierung und Kategorisierung begrenzen. Auf diese Weise kann man in den heutigen Arbeiten beobachten, wie eine Problematik auftaucht, im Mittelpunkt derer die Diskrepanz zwischen Absichten und Praktiken steht. In dem man den Begriff der Unterwerfung zu den Regeln des „didaktischen Vertrags” mit den anderen theoretischen Modellen (in den Sozial-und Geschichtswissenschaften) kombiniert, die in den Forschungsteams benutzt werden, lassen die bisher auf noch zu verstreute Weise geführten Arbeiten wichtige Erwerbungen erkennen, die in der Lehrerausbildung berücksichtigt werden könnten.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41202586

Journal Title: The Sociological Quarterly
Publisher: JAI Press Inc.
Issue: i383087
Date: 8 1, 1983
Author(s): Williams E. Doyle
Abstract: Throughoput its history, "ideology" (the concept and theory) served as social science's foil, an opposing standard against which it defined its own knowledge-as-truth. As social science since mid-century has undergone changes in its idea of itself and its methods of inquiry, the theory of ideology has served as register, visably recording these changes. Works by the structuralists and poststructuralists, especially Althusser and Foucault, forced upon social theorists a profound rethinking of power and its operations and moved "ideology" away from the theory of false consciousness towards a view of ideology as cultural practice. For some, ideology theory is obsolete (due to its classical roots as "false consciousness") or redundant (due to its links to "culture"). Despite the merits of these arguments, a provisional argument on behalf of ideology theory is offered.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4121218

Journal Title: Desarrollo Económico
Publisher: Instituto de Desarrollo Económico y Social
Issue: i40054876
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): BARANGER DENIS
Abstract: D. Robbins (2008)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41219137

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40054974
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Vila-Chã João J.
Abstract: Carìtas in Ventate, nr. 45; cit., p. 78
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41220788

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40054974
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Zanotti Gabriel J.
Abstract: Lakatos, Imre -The Methodology of Scientific Research Programmes. Edited by John Worrall; Gregory Currie. Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press, 1978.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41220799

Journal Title: The American Journal of Philology
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i40055853
Date: 7 1, 2011
Author(s): Grillo Luca
Abstract: Pelling's sense (2006, 255): "Caesar was a bounder: a person who operated on, and broke, the boundaries of his world."
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1353/ajp.2011.0013

Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i40055887
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Ruf Oliver
Abstract: Halbwachs, Das Gedächtnis und seine sozialen Bedingungen 158.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1353/mon.2011.0028

Journal Title: Cultural Anthropology
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i383702
Date: 2 1, 1991
Author(s): ZizekAbstract: Arguing that without a differentiated and relational notion of the cultural, the social sciences would he crippled, reducing social action to notions of pure instrumentality, in this article, I trace the growth of cultural analysis from the beginnings of modern anthropology to the present as a layered set of experimental systems whose differential lenses create epistemic objects with increasing precision and differential focus and resolution. Arguing that culture is not a variable-culture is relational, it is elsewhere or in passage, it is where meaning is woven and renewed, often through gaps and silences, and forces beyond the conscious control of individuals, and yet the space where individual and institutional social responsibility and ethical struggle take place-I name culture as a set of central anthropological forms of knowledge grounding human beings' self-understandings. The challenge of cultural analysis is to develop translation and mediation tools for helping make visible the differences of interests, access, power, needs, desires, and philosophical perspective. In particular, as we begin to face new kinds of ethical dilemmas stemming from developments in biotechnologies, expansive information and image databases, and ecological interactions, we are challenged to develop differentiated cultural analyses that can help articulate new social institutions for an evolving civil society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4124728

Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i383814
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Zerilli Charity
Abstract: Ehrhardt and Langner
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4125406

Journal Title: Oxford Review of Education
Publisher: Carfax Publishing
Issue: i384248
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Wiliam Mark
Abstract: The formative Assessment for Learning proposals outlined by Black and Wiliam (e.g. Black et al., 2002) have been well publicised. Since 2002, in its Assessment is for Learning programme, the Scottish Executive Education Department (SEED) has been exploring ways of bringing research, policy and practice in assessment into closer alignment using research on both assessment and transformational change. This paper focuses on one project within Assessment Is for Learning, in which pilot primary and secondary schools across Scotland were encouraged to develop formative assessment approaches in classrooms. They were supported in this by researchers, curriculum developers and local and national policy-makers. The paper examines the rationale and methods behind the enactment of formative assessment in these schools. It draws upon evidence provided by the interim and final reports of participating schools to draw conclusions about areas of success within the project and potential barriers to the project's future in its evolution from pilot to national programme.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4127143

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057454
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): JEDLICKI JERZY
Abstract: Adam Michnik' ['A Touch of Brotherhood': an interview by Adam Michnik with Professor Bronislaw Geremek], Gazeta Wyborcza 16 Sept. 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274532

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057457
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): HAŁAS ELŻBIETA
Abstract: (Strauss 1991 p. 19)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274562

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057460
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): BOKSZAŃSKI ZBIGNIEW
Abstract: The article begins with an analysis of the concept of identity and a description of two theoretical traditions which lie at the source of this concept and which determine the operationalisations of the identity concept within the context of social change (G.H. Mead and E. Erikson). The author then goes on to discuss the problems which evolve from the many applications of the concept of identity to analysis of collectives. The concept of collective identity is outlined and four basic ways of understanding this concept in contemporary sociology are discussed. The author refers in his presentation to the works of F. Barth, R. Turner, A. Touraine, S. N. Eisenstadt, E. Gellner, and A. Kłoskowska. The author concludes his article with several comments focusing on the relationships between social change and collective identity and he refers to those approaches which either stress the relative independence of identity formulae and social structure or even view the evolving patterns of identity as a factor contributing to social change.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274594

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057467
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): KURCZEWSKI JACEK
Abstract: Jedlicki op. cit. p. 107.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274654

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057469
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): KŁOSKOWSKA ANTONINA
Abstract: As the twentieth century comes to an end, and with it a millennium, there has been much heated reflection on the passing age and the period of transition. Among the many characteristic phenomena of modern times, globalization has attracted particularly much attention. The process of European integration may be traced back to ancient times (vide Roman imperialism or Carolingian universalism). Recently, however, globalization has expanded and it has accelerated considerably. The author of this paper focuses on the current, paradoxical coexistence of global tendencies toward integration on the one hand and very clearly manifested, diversifying (or even separatists) national and nationalist tendencies on the other hand. The author analyzes these homogenizing tendencies at the level of media pop culture on the one hand and the increasing, even acute, awareness of diversity, including the diversity of national cultures, on the other hand. She does so within the framework of the symbolic culture concept. Contemporarily, tendencies toward globalization are suspended between the Scylla of uniformizatdon and the Charybdis of diversity. Sociology is particularly qualified to study these phenomena, at both local and universal levels.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274671

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057483
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): HAŁAS ELŻBIETA
Abstract: T. Abel, Systematic Sociology in Germany: A Critical Analysis of Some Attempts to Establish Sociology as an Independent Science. New York: Columbia University Press, 1929, p. 113.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274815

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057509
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): DONATI PIERPAOLO
Abstract: Father and Son" (Gesù di Nazaret , Rizzoli, Milano, 2007, p. 399).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41275097

Journal Title: The Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i384292
Date: 9 1, 1973
Author(s): VarineAbstract: This ethnographic study of the creation of a museum in Le Creusot (France) provides an analysis of the heritage industry that emerged in the wake of the demise of a family company around which the town was built. This museum was a reaction to the passing of an age when industrial and urban environments were intrinsically linked. Through this description of how the past is collected and recollected in a museum, this article attempts to determine if this duty of remembrance is not, to a certain extent, a strategy of forgetfulness. Is cultural regeneration-the staging of history fading into oblivion-our society's sole response to industrial regeneration?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4127614

Journal Title: American Studies International
Publisher: George Washington University
Issue: i40057778
Date: 2 1, 2003
Author(s): Trubina Elena G.
Abstract: Elaine Tyler May, Homeward Bound: American Families in the Cold War Era (New York: Basic Books, 1988).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41279954

Journal Title: La Rassegna Mensile di Israel
Publisher: Unione delle Comunità ebraiche italiane
Issue: i40058124
Date: 8 1, 2004
Author(s): Bidussa David
Abstract: Carlo Ginzburg, Microstoma: due o tre cose che so di lei , «Quaderni storici», 1994, n. 86, pp. 511-539.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41287671

Journal Title: Annual Review of Anthropology
Publisher: Annual Reviews
Issue: i40058128
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Throop C. Jason
Abstract: This review explores the most significant dimensions and findings of phenomenological approaches in anthropology. We spell out the motives and implications inherent in such approaches, chronicle their historical dimensions and precursors, and address the ways in which they have contributed to analytic perspectives employed in anthropology. This article canvasses phenomenologically oriented research in anthropology on a number of topics, including political relations and violence; language and discourse; neurophenomenology; emotion; embodiment and bodiliness; illness and healing; pain and suffering; aging, dying, and death; sensory perception and experience; subjectivity; intersubjectivity and sociality; empathy; morality; religious experience; art, aesthetics, and creativity; narrative and storytelling; time and temporality; and senses of place. We examine, and propose salient responses to, the main critiques of phenomenological approaches in anthropology, and we also take note of some of the most pressing and generative avenues of research and thought in phenomenologically oriented anthropology.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1146/annurev-anthro-092010-153345

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Peeters
Issue: i40058259
Date: 3 1, 2011
Author(s): de Wit Theo W.A.
Abstract: H. Lübbe, 'Politik und Religion nach der Aufklärung', Politik nach der Aufklärung. Philosophi- sche Aufsätze, München, Wilhelm Fink Verlag, 2001, pp. 39-75 (p. 66).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41289471

Journal Title: Historical Reflections / Réflexions Historiques
Publisher: Division of Human Studies, Alfred University
Issue: i40058627
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Hanna Martha
Abstract: L'Oeuvre 4 February 1923.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41298984

Journal Title: Historical Reflections / Réflexions Historiques
Publisher: Division of Human Studies, Alfred University
Issue: i40058643
Date: 7 1, 1999
Author(s): Miller Louis
Abstract: Peter D. femes, A Peculiar Fate. Metaphysics and World-History in Kant (Ithaca, N.Y., 1991).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41299149

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40058715
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): BONNEUIL NOËL
Abstract: Noel Bonneuil, "Morphological Transition of Schooling in Nineteenth Century France," (submitted).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41300048

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40058718
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): VIEIRA RYAN ANTHONY
Abstract: Patrick Joyce, The Rule of Freedom: Liberalism and the Modern City (New York: Verso, 2003), 1.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41300101

Journal Title: Revista CIDOB d'Afers Internacionals
Publisher: CIDOB
Issue: i40058779
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Savransky Martin
Abstract: Thilo Sarrazin (2010)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41300916

Journal Title: Le Mouvement social
Publisher: Association Le Mouvement Social
Issue: i40058804
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Fabbiano Giulia
Abstract: G. Fabbiano, « Les harkis du Bachaga Boualam. Des Béni-Boudouanes à Mas Thibert », in F. Besnaci-Lancou et G. Manceron (dir.), Les Harkis dans la colonisation et ses suites , op. cit., p. 113-124.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41301841

Journal Title: Early Science and Medicine
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i384650
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): Ricoeur Stephen
Abstract: "An- cient Hypotheses of Fiction," 3
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4130480

Journal Title: Reis: Revista Española de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40058971
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Romanos Eduardo
Abstract: «A los companeros del ML exilados en Mexico, desde Espana», 27/06/1944 (IISH, FGP, 804
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41304936

Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40059146
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): GRUIN JULIAN
Abstract: Michael King, 'What's the Use of Luhmann's Theory?' in M. King and C. Thornhill (eds), Luhmann on Law and Politics: Critical Appraisals and Applications (Oxford: Hart, 2006), pp. 37-53.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/S026021051000152X

Journal Title: International Journal of Middle East Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40059165
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Larkin Craig
Abstract: This article seeks to address how Lebanese youth are dealing with the legacy of civil war (1975-90), given the national backdrop of official silence, persisting injustice, and competing memory discourses. Drawing on Marianne Hirsch's concept of postmemory, it explores the memory of a generation of Lebanese who have grown up dominated not by traumatic events but by narrative accounts of events that preceded their birth. This residual form of memory carries and connects with the pain of others, suffusing temporal frames and liminal positions. The article examines how postmemory is mediated and transformed through the mnemonic lenses of visual landscapes and oral narratives. Consideration is given to the dynamic production of "memoryscapes"—memories of violence localized in particular sites—and to narrative constructions of the past implicated in the ongoing search for meaning, historical truth, and identity. This article seeks to challenge pervasive notions of Lebanese postwar amnesia and of a generational detachment from the residual effects and future implications of war recollections.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41308712

Journal Title: AJS Review
Publisher: Association for Jewish Studies
Issue: i387649
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): Cixous Sidra DeKoven
Abstract: "The Bible and You, the Bible and You, and Other Midrashim," #17, in Open Closed Open, trans. Chana Bloch and Chana Kronfeld (NewYork: Harcourt, Inc., 2000) [from Patuah sagur patuah] pp. 26-27. The Bible and You, the Bible and You, and Other Midrashim," 26 Open Closed Open 2000
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4131512

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Internationale Beziehungen
Publisher: Nomos Verlagsgesellschaft
Issue: i40059445
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Spencer Alexander
Abstract: http://archiv.bundesregierung.de/bpaexport/artikel/30/637330/multi.htm; 23.02.2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41315277

Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i40059451
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Baumgartner Frédérique
Abstract: Pane, Lettre, p. 152.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/oxartj/kcr020

Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060550
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Guilhaumou Jacques
Abstract: El autor reflexiona sobre la evolución de la historia del discurso en Francia y su aproximación a la historia semántica, inspirada en la obra de Koselleck, y a la historia del discurso de tradición anglosajona. Tras repasar los antecedentes de la actual historia del discurso francesa desde los años setenta y evaluar la influencia de la obra de Foucault en esta disciplina, el autor aborda, a la luz de los últimos trabajos de Quentin Skinner, la cuestión de la intencionalidad individual y colectiva de los textos históricos, es decir, los mecanismos que constituyen y explican, en palabras de Koselleck, «la conexión empírica entre la realidad y el discurso». The author thinks about the evolution of the history of discourse in France and its approach to semantic history as inspired by the work of Koselleck, and also to the history of discourse in the Anglo-Saxon tradition. After revising the precedents of the current French history of speech from the 70s and evaluating the influence of the work of Foucault in this discipline, the author approaches, in the light of Quentin Skinner's last works, the question of the individual and collective premeditation of historical texts, that is to say, the mechanisms that constitute and explain, in words of Koselleck, «the empirical connection between reality and discourse».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41325250

Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060550
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Jaume Lucien
Abstract: «refiguración del tiempo por el relato» (p. 226).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41325254

Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060550
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Sebastián Javier Fernández
Abstract: Ibid., p. 632.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41325255

Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060550
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Martín Ignacio Peiró
Abstract: Moses, S.: op. cit., p. 147.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41325257

Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060601
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Juste Antonio Moreno
Abstract: Casanova, J.: «Una historia común», El País, 5 de marzo de 2007.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41326053

Journal Title: Hypatia
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40061363
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): HALL KIM Q.
Abstract: This paper critiques the rise of scientific approaches to central questions in the humanities, specifically questions about human nature, ethics, identity, and experience. In particular, I look at how an increasing number of philosophers are turning to evolutionary psychology and neuroscience as sources of answers to philosophical problems. This approach constitutes what I term a biological turn in the humanities. I argue that the biological turn, especially its reliance on evolutionary psychology, is best understood as an epistemology of ignorance that contributes to a climate of hostility and intolerance regarding feminist insights about gender, identity, and the body.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1527-2001.2011.01229.x

Journal Title: Business & Professional Ethics Journal
Publisher: Philosophy Documentation Center
Issue: i40063571
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Casler Kenneth
Abstract: By deliberately placing ethics under the category of communication, Kierkegaard intended to show that it is like no other science. He distinguished between direct communication and indirect communication. Direct communication concerns objectivity and knowledge; indirect communication, on the other hand, has to do with subjectivity ("becoming-subject"). In this paper, the author presents Kierkegaard's philosophy of communication and ethics with special emphasis on his irony and pseudonymous authorship. He also examines the possibility of a discourse in business ethics, focusing on the educational perspective. He discusses Kierkegaard's aspects of communication—the communicator, the receiver, and the object—with particular reference to applied ethics. He argues that the Kierkegaardian notion of indirect communication can contribute to renewing business ethics teaching—which in his view is more art than science—in two important ways: (1) when the ethics teacher changes his position in the teacher/learner relationship; and (2) when the relationship between communicator/receiver is strengthened at the expense of the object.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.5840/bpej2011303/415

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40063719
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): MARION MATHIEU
Abstract: Collingwood et la philosophie du vingtième siècle! Collingwood and Twentieth-Century Philosophy, at the Université du Québec à Montréal in October 2007 .
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342623

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40063720
Date: 2 1, 2012
Author(s): Jameson Fredric
Abstract: This review essay attempts to understand the book under review against the background of Jameson's previous writings. Failing to do so would invite misunderstanding since there are few contemporary theorists whose writing forms so much of a unity. Jameson's book can be divided into three parts. The first and most important part deals with dialectics, the second with politics, and the third with philosophy of history. In the first part Jameson argues that dialectics best captures our relationship to the sociocultural and historical world we are living in. The second part makes clear that Jameson is not prepared to water down his own Marxist politics in order to spare the liberal sensibilities of his political opponents. In the third part Jameson develops his own philosophy of history, mainly in a dialogue with Ricoeur. Dialectics is his main weapon in his discussion with Ricoeur, and it becomes clear that the Spinozism of dialectics allows for a better understanding of history and of historical writing than does Ricoeur's phenomenological approach. The book is an impressive testimony to the powers of dialectical thought and to its indispensability for a proper grasp of historical writing.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1468-2303.2012.00613.x

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40063738
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Jewsiewicki Bogumil
Abstract: (Dibwe dia Mwembu & Jewsiewicki 2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342880

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40063738
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Lallier Christian
Abstract: Gérard Althabe au séminaire de Nicolas Flamant, « Anthropologie et entreprise », à l'École des hautes études en sciences sociales, en 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342881

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40063739
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Iuso Anna
Abstract: P. A. Fabre (1992).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342931

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40063739
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Adell Nicolas
Abstract: (Jourdain 2010)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342934

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40064476
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Kühn Rolf
Abstract: chez Bruaire, С .-La dialectique. Paris : PUF, 1985, l'annexe sur les exercices ignatiens en lien avec cette citation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41354816

Journal Title: Merveilles & contes
Publisher: University of Colorado
Issue: i40067568
Date: 5 1, 1992
Author(s): Schmölders Claudia
Abstract: Das Mārchen als Psychologe— Eine Hommage an Max Lüthi This essay was wtitten in honor of Max Lūthi, the renowned Swiss folklorist, who died in 1991. The starting point is an article by Lüthi in which he coined the term "the fairy tale as psychologist." In contrast to the psychoanalytic approach of Freudians and Jungians, Schmölders demonstrates how Lüthi drew a line between literature and psychology in his works. First, Lüthi studied the hero in the fairy tale from an anthropomorphological viewpoint. Second, Lūthi analyzed the style of fairy tales by examining the moral, aesthetic, and economic aspects of the action. Third, Lūthi also dealt with "the legend as psychologist." Using Lüthi's notions, Schmōlders stresses the dialogic strategies and anthropomorphological concerns of the tales within the domain of psychological object-relations theory, and it is in this regard that Lūthi's term "the fairy tale as psychologist" assumes its importance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41390331

Journal Title: Estudios Internacionales
Publisher: Instituto de Estudios Internacionales de la Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40067662
Date: 9 1, 1990
Author(s): Tomassini Luciano
Abstract: Berroeta, "Los Felices Tiempos Mediocres", en El Nacional. Caracas, 6 de mayo de 1990.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41391337

Journal Title: Estudios Internacionales
Publisher: Instituto de Estudios Internacionales de la Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40067701
Date: 3 1, 2003
Author(s): Pelfini Alejandro
Abstract: Krarup, Signe y Ramesohl, Stefan: op. cit., pág. 61.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41391726

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40068374
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Muchnik Natalia
Abstract: Eckart Blrnstlel, Estelle Aebersold et Patrick G ab anel dans Diasporas. Histoire et sociétés, 8, 2006, p. 22-77.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41405858

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40068376
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Iogna-Prat Dominique
Abstract: John MlLBANK, Théologie et théorie sodale. Au-delà de la raison séculière, Paris, Éd. du Cerf, [1990] 2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41405962

Journal Title: The American Journal of Philology
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i40068944
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Becker Andrew S.
Abstract: Keil 6.178/Morelli 43
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1353/ajp.2012.0004

Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40069058
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Serban Claudia
Abstract: rd, p. 10 et 247, acr, p. 948).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/leph.121.0081

Journal Title: Design Issues
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i40069703
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Jahnke Marcus
Abstract: Gadamer, Truth and Method, 366.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1162/DESI_a_00141

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40069706
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Fernández Germán Darío
Abstract: Descombes (1996: 287),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41427885

Journal Title: Renaissance Quarterly
Publisher: Renaissance Society of America
Issue: i388096
Date: 12 1, 1987
Author(s): Van der Poel Reinier
Abstract: Kushner, 1996
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4143696

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40070482
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): BOSA BASTIEN
Abstract: I. Hacking (2001).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41445036

Journal Title: Pasajes
Publisher: Universitat de València y la Fundación Cañada Blanch
Issue: i40070547
Date: 10 1, 2002
Author(s): Torres Pedro Ruiz
Abstract: Carta a Delio Gramsci, fecha indeterminada, «Lettere dal car- cere», Antonio Gramsci, An- tología, selección, traducción y no- tas de Manuel Sacristán, México, Siglo XXI, 1977, p. 511.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41446187

Journal Title: Church History
Publisher: American Society of Church History
Issue: i387806
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Hauerwas C. John
Abstract: Stanley Hauerwas and L. Gregory Jones, eds., Why Narrative? Readings in Narrative Theology (Grand Rapids, Mich.: William B. Eerdmans, 1989) Hauerwas Why Narrative? Readings in Narrative Theology 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4146195

Journal Title: The Eighteenth Century
Publisher: Texas Tech Press
Issue: i40071436
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Canfield Douglas
Abstract: Kallich, ch. 2,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41467264

Journal Title: Hispanic Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i40071687
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Venegas José Luis
Abstract: David Decker (110-11).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41472664

Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40071887
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Renouard Cecile
Abstract: This article explores the possible convergence between the capabilities approach and utilitarianism to specify CSR. It defends the idea that this key issue is related to the anthropological perspective that underpins both theories and demonstrates that a relational conception of individual freedoms and rights present in both traditions gives adequate criteria for CSR toward the company's stakeholders. I therefore defend "relational capability" as a means of providing a common paradigm, a shared vision of a core component of human development. This could further lead to a set of indicators aimed at assessing corporate social performance as the maximization of the relational capability of people impacted by the activities of companies. In particular, I suggest a way of evaluating the contribution of extractive companies to the communities close to their industrial sites in extremely poor areas, not from the viewpoint of material resources and growth, but from the viewpoint of the quality of the social environment and empowerment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41476130

Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40071895
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Waistell Jeff
Abstract: This study investigates how business leaders dynamically narrate their aspirational ethical leadership identities. In doing so, it furthers understanding of ethical leadership as a process situated in time and place. The analysis focuses on the discursive strategies used to narrate identity and ethics by ethnic Chinese business leaders in Indonesia after their conversion to Pentecostal-charismatic Christianity. By exploring the use of metaphor, our study shows how these business leaders discursively deconstruct their 'old' identities and construct their 'new' aspirational identities as ethical leaders. This leads to the following contributions. First, we show that ethical leadership is constructed in identity talk as the business leaders actively narrate aspirational identities. Second, the identity narratives of the business leaders suggest that ethical leadership is a context-bound and situated claim vis-à-vis unethical practice. Third, we propose a conceptual template, identifying processes of realisation and inspiration followed by significant shifts in understanding, for the study of aspirational ethical leadership.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41476230

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40072033
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Keller Reiner
Abstract: Wetherell and Potter (1988).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41478455

Journal Title: International Review of Education / Internationale Zeitschrift für Erziehungswissenschaft / Revue Internationale de l'Education
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40072112
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Malet Régis
Abstract: (Ricoeur 1990, p. 211).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41480119

Journal Title: International Review of Education / Internationale Zeitschrift für Erziehungswissenschaft / Revue Internationale de l'Education
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40072145
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Torres Carlos Alberto
Abstract: (Teodoro and Torres 2007, p. 1).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41480683

Journal Title: Studia Rosenthaliana
Publisher: Peeters
Issue: i40072258
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Klein Gil P.
Abstract: BT Bava Batra 75a. See his interpretation of Job 40:30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41482514

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i388289
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Wilson Neil
Abstract: Notter (2002)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4148875

Journal Title: Modern Chinese Literature
Publisher: Dept. of Oriental Languages and Literatures, University of Colorado at Boulder
Issue: i40072777
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): Wong Kin-yuen
Abstract: (Being and Time 373).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41490696

Journal Title: The German Quarterly
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services, Inc.
Issue: i40073013
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Boldyrev Ivan A.
Abstract: Hegel ist als Philosoph des Systems bekannt. Sein System aber unterscheidet sich von denen, die Walter Benjamin in seiner "Erkenntniskritischen Vorrede" zum "Ursprung des deutschen Trauerspiels" kritisierte. Was Hegel avisierte, war nicht ein Netz von Begriffen als neutralen Instrumenten der Weltbeziehung und Welterschließung. Das ist eher das Entfalten seines Systems selbst, das die Welt, die Geschichte, und die Weltgeschichte konstituiert. Dadurch sind wir berechtigt, seine Philosophie als ein performatives Projekt zu analysieren, das in dem Sinne auch zur Literatur gehören kann. Hegels Gedicht "Eleusis" vermittelt uns die immanenten Konflikte und Widersprüchlichkeit seines eigenen Diskurses (das Unaussprechliche auszusprechen) und sanktioniert sich performativ; Phänomenologie des Geistes ist nicht nur eine Galerie von Bildern/Gestalten und eine selbstbehauptende Konstruktion, sondern auch eine Verarbeitung von Hegels eigenen literarischen Erfahrungen, sei es in der Dichtung ("Eleusis"), Tragödie (Antigone-Übersetzung), oder Formen des Essays/Fragments ("Wer denkt abstrakt?").
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41494684

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40073035
Date: 5 1, 2012
Author(s): DIETZ MARY G.
Abstract: Thucydides' (I.76.2)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41495079

Journal Title: British Journal of Ethnomusicology
Publisher: British Forum for Ethnomusicology
Issue: i388404
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Lisha Chou
Abstract: Jonathan Stock (1993)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4149903

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40073611
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Vieillard-Baron Jean-Louis
Abstract: Jean-Louis Chrétien montre comment le roman viole le secret de l'intériorité et le révèle, dans son bel ouvrage Conscience et roman, I. La Conscience au grand jour, Paris, Minuit, 2009.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rphi.121.0003

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Kunstgeschichte
Publisher: Deutscher Kunstverlag
Issue: i388628
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): KonersmannAbstract: Siehe dazu auch Ricoeur (wie Anm.28), 203-208, 226-227 u. 274-275
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4150708

Journal Title: Langue Française
Publisher: Larousse
Issue: i40075208
Date: 3 1, 1997
Author(s): Nyckees Vincent
Abstract: Nyckees (1994 et surtout 1997).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41558807

Journal Title: Langue Française
Publisher: Larousse
Issue: i40075227
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Rabatel Alain
Abstract: supra, 2.3. et 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41559015

Journal Title: Revista de Antropologia
Publisher: Departamento de Antropologia da Faculdade de Filosofia, Letras e Ciências Humanas da Universidade de São Paulo
Issue: i40076402
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Eckert Cornelia
Abstract: Este artigo traz uma reflexão sobre o método etnográfico enquanto encapsulando o tema da identidade narrativa do antropólogo, em especial, enfocando o problema ético-moral da busca da coerência interna de sua produção etnográfica através da análise do processo de construção do conhecimento antropológico. Trata-se de pontuar, neste processo, o que está verdadeiramente em jogo, ou seja, o ato de configuração e reconfiguração do tempo que encerra a ação interpretativa em Antropologia. This article brings a reflections about the ethnographic method while encapsulating the identity theme describes by the anthropologist, in special, focusing the moral-ethic problem of the searching of the internal coherence of its ethnographic production through the study of the process of the anthropologic knowledge construction. It is to point, in this process, that is really in the play, or, the act of configuration and reconfiguration of time that stops the interpretative action in anthropology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41601948

Journal Title: Revista de Antropologia
Publisher: Departamento de Antropologia da Faculdade de Filosofia, Letras e Ciências Humanas da Universidade de São Paulo
Issue: i40077028
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Lagrou Elsje Maria
Abstract: O artigo é uma leitura do debate epistemológico sobre as condições de conhecimento na antropologia. Partindo das críticas que o próprío C. Geertz faz a seus seguidores, a autora se propõe a avaliar o potencial crítico da hermenêutica. Recupera seu questionamento acerca da oposiçâo sujeito/objeto e propõe a busca de uma objetividade negociada interpares e situada historicamente. A partir desse debate questiona-se uma ciência pura e sem implicações práticas e morais. O percurso que faz avaliando vários autores lhe permite concluir que o excesso de relativismo ou de subjetivismo transforma toda possibilidade de ciência em ficção. Para dar conta em sua etnografia dos sistemas simbólicos não lingüísticos, a autora busca um diálogo entre a teoría antropológica e as teorias nativas e afirma que é na experiência vivida em campo que está a fertilidade das perguntas e reformulações de conceitos da antropologia. This article is an attempt to interpret the epistemological debate concerning conditions of knoledge in antropology. Discussing the criticism which C. Geertz has made in regard to the work of his followers, the autor proposes to evaluate the critical potential of hermeneutics. A critique of the subject-object split opens the way for proposing a form of objectivity wich is historically located and negotiated among equals. This debate constitutes a point os departure for questioning the notion of a pure science devoid of moral and practical implications. In the course of discussing a number of authors, the conclusion may well be that excessive relativism and subjectivism transform all possibilities of science into fiction. In order to deal with nonlinguistic symbolic systems in etnography, the author sees the importance of dialogue between anthropological theory and native theory. Fertile grounds for raising questions and reformulating anthropological concepts are found in fieldword experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41616139

Journal Title: Revista de Antropologia
Publisher: Departamento de Antropologia da Faculdade de Filosofia, Letras e Ciências Humanas da Universidade de São Paulo
Issue: i40077039
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Lewgoy Bernardo
Abstract: O presente artigo propõe uma interpretação do fenômeno Chico Xavier na cultura e na sociedade brasileira. A partir do reconhecimento da importância cruciai de seu modelo mítico de espírita exemplar, o lugar de absolute destaque ocupado pelo médium mineiro na história do kardecismo brasileiro será interpretado à luz de urn código cultural articulado em sua biografia, que busca sintetizar os personagens paradigmáticos do "santo" e do "caxias". Desdobrado na unidade de sua obra mediúnica e trajetória pública, o tipo de espiritismo construído em Chico Xavier evidencia a proposta kardecista dominante ao longo do século XX, enquanto modelo de cidadania, prática religiosa e projeto nacional. The present article is a reading of the place of the phenomenon Chico Xavier in the Brazilian culture and society. Starting from the recognition of his crucial importance as a mythical model of exemplary spiritualist, the absolute prominence of the medium in the history of the Brazilian spiritualism will be interpreted in the light of a cultural code articulated in his biography, that synthesizes the Brazilian mythical characters of the "saint" and of the "caxias". Unfolded from his life and works the model of spiritualism built by Chico Xavier evidences the kardecismo's dominant religious point of view along the 20th Century, while citizenship model, religious practice and national project.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41616295

Journal Title: La Rassegna Mensile di Israel
Publisher: Unione delle Comunità ebraiche italiane
Issue: i40077153
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Pavoncello Vittorio
Abstract: Can the act of creation itself be considered like an infinite forgiveness that God turns to the earth and to those who live there after having preferred the waters as his place of first existence? The conference "In the beginning it was the forgiveness" held in L'Aquila in the occasion of a pluriconfessional meeting, suggests some hypothesis starting even from some biblical episodes like: the universal deluge, the Amalek's remembering, Giuseppe and his brothers, Isaac's sacrifice, and furthermore with Moses' death, to end with the forgiveness from the original sin through the entrance in the promise land. A suggestive analysis of the forgiveness in the Hebraism, seen too often as a pure religion of the contraposition law to the forgiveness given from the religion of love. The forgiveness in this way is dealt with the inter-religious point of view, and also with the human one that in the relationship between God and man has its top and beginning in the solemnity of Kippur.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41619685

Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i40077813
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): NAHARRO-CALDERÓN JOSÉ MARÍA
Abstract: Durante la retirada de los republicanos españoles en 1939 por el frente catalanofrancés donde fueron encerrados en improvisados campos de concentración por la tercera república francesa, existe un número de egodocumentos de este éxodo y algunos archivos fotográficos. Este artículo confronta lo escrito y lo visual particularmente las memorias de guerra y las fotografías de Robert Capa, Slightly out of Focus (1947), el diario de Agustí Centelles en el campo de concentración de Bram (1939) y su archivo fotográfico, así como los clisés de Manuel Moros que muestran, sin ningún tipo de filtro, el calvario de los republicanos españoles en los campos franceses.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41636632

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung. Supplement
Publisher: GESIS - Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i40077837
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Jarausch Konrad H.
Abstract: Konrad H. Jarausch, "German Civility? Retying Social Bonds after Barbarism," European Review of History 18 (2011), 373-86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41637867

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Kunstgeschichte
Publisher: Deutscher Kunstverlag
Issue: i40078185
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Koering Jérémie
Abstract: Jacques Rancière, Le partage du sensible. Esthétique et politique, Paris 2000, 28-29.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41642667

Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Springer Science + Business Media
Issue: i40078338
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Aist Clark S.
Abstract: This paper reviews a body of data that identifies underlying influences that have contributed to an evolving change in American Psychiatry toward a more positive and receptive stance toward religion and spirituality over the past three decades. This development, surprising in light of the remedicalization of psychiatry and its predominantly neuro-biological orientation, is attributed to five foundational ideas that have helped to leverage this change. These are significance of culture, creative power of ritual, psychic function of belief, neuro-biology of spirituality, and relevance of recovery narratives. The impact of these factors for psychiatric assessment and treatment is described, as well as the contribution of the Oskar Pfister legacy and award to the ongoing dialogue between religion and psychiatry. Adapted from the American Psychiatric Association's 2011 Oskar Pfister Lecture in Religion and Psychiatry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41653855

Journal Title: Iberoamericana (2001-)
Publisher: Iberoamericana Editorial Vervuert
Issue: i40078771
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Costa Ricardo Lionel
Abstract: Madero (2001: 28-32).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41676227

Journal Title: Revue d'Histoire littéraire de la France
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40078818
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Moureau François
Abstract: TC, t. II, p. 990.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41678510

Journal Title: Journal of Social History
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i40078835
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Rubin Avi
Abstract: In 1884 an Ottoman public prosecutor and fellow officials stood trial for abusing their official authorities when attending to an incident in one of Istanbul's neighborhoods. A published verbatim report of the proceedings is used in this article for discussing Ottoman socio-legal change in the late nineteenth century, employing a microhistorical perspective. Following a major reform in the new court system, which was established in the 1860s (the Nizamiye courts), the judicial authorities used the trial in question for transmitting the commitment of the modernizing state to the rule of law, exhibited by the principle of officials' accountability. Features of the reformed judicial system and its distinctive legal culture are demonstrated in this article by unfolding the judicial aspects of this episode and by discussing connections between them and the immediate socio-political and socio-legal contexts of the trial.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jsh/shr118

Journal Title: Oxford Journal of Legal Studies
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i40079076
Date: 7 1, 2012
Author(s): Heller Kevin Jon
Abstract: This review article discusses the emergence of the subsequent proceedings before the US Military Tribunals from the shadows of the trial of 'Major War Criminals' at the International Military Tribunal as explored in Kevin Jon Heller's The Nuremberg Military Tribunals and the Origins of International Criminal Law. The article applauds Heller's efforts in producing a detailed examination of an understudied aspect of the origins of international criminal law. The essay suggests that given the specific focus of the author on the genealogy of international criminal law, important legal historical questions are left unexamined. It suggests a research agenda that would focus more specifically on the centrality of the Shoah to National Socialism and argues that the current trend in historical scholarship focusing on war crimes trials as a distinct subject of inquiry could provide a fruitful basis for future socio-legal research into the Nazi state and its legal apparatus.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/ojls/gqr029

Journal Title: The World of Music
Publisher: Verlag für Wissenschaft und Bildung
Issue: i40079808
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Viljoen Martina
Abstract: This article explores kwaito's early years by focusing on South African music legend Brenda Fassie. While Fassie is not usually known as a kwaito artist, her "bubblegum" music of the 1980s was hugely influential on later kwaito musicians, and in the early 1990s Fassie recorded several tracks that arguably fall under the category of kwaito. An analysis of Fassie's life and music does not represent a clear break with earlier South African music. I attempt a more nuanced historicization of kwaito in this article, and seek to uncover continuities as well as ruptures in the post-apartheid period.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41699827

Journal Title: The World of Music
Publisher: Verlag für Wissenschaft und Bildung
Issue: i40079811
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Ho Meilu
Abstract: Singing songs in service (kirtan seva) constitutes the primary expression of devotion in the Pushti Marg (Path of Grace) tradition of India. This liturgical practice is singular amongst South Asian, Hindu traditions in its extensive use of rag set to classical poetry. I consider the meaning of this sung liturgy using the ideas of hermeneutic philosophy that concern understanding. I suggest that performing song in service is similar to the act of understanding a work, one in which a self is disclosed in the mode of play. Critically, such continual self-unveilings over a lifetime of service to Krishna afford the practitioner the possibility of the lived liberation promised by founder, Vallabhacharya.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41699881

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40079867
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): SALAZAR PHILIPPE-JOSEPH
Abstract: Rapport, I, 4, paragr. 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41700854

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080047
Date: 2 1, 1978
Author(s): Grimaud Michel
Abstract: « Vers une poétique psychanalytique. Lectures de Victor Hugo » (Thése, université du Wis- consin [Madison], 1976)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704432

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080071
Date: 12 1, 1998
Author(s): LOUPPE LAURENCE
Abstract: Rosalind Krauss, « Notes sur l'index », in L'Originalité de l'avant-garde et autres mythes modernistes (pp. 63 à 91), tr. française, Paris, éd. Macula, 1993, p. 79.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704696

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080073
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): CLÉMENT BRUNO
Abstract: Donnant Donnant, in Poèmes II, p. 171.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704723

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080073
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): ELSON CHRISTOPHER
Abstract: Deguy, « L'écrivain et l'intellectuel », in Cahiers de l'Est, POL, 1997, p. 34-35.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704724

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080078
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): CASTIN NICOLAS
Abstract: R. Char, Recherche de la base et du sommet, op. cit., p. 719.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704785

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080080
Date: 6 1, 2001
Author(s): COSTANTINI MICHEL
Abstract: Emilio Greco (in La corda pazza, Milano, Einaudi, «Gli struzzi 265», 1982, p. 219-230),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704809

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080086
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): REGARD FRÉDÉRIC
Abstract: Nicole Jacques-Lefèvre (dir.), Une histoire de la fonction-auteur est-elle possible ?, Saint- Étienne, PUSE, 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704889

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080097
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): JEANNELLE JEAN-LOUIS
Abstract: Tzvetan Todorov, Mémoire du mal, tentation du bien. Enquête sur le siècle. Paris, R. Laffont, 2000, p. 133-140.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705035

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080120
Date: 9 1, 2010
Author(s): Boulay Bérenger
Abstract: Carlo Ginzburg, « Frove e possibilita » (1984), Il filo et le tracce, op. cit., p. 303.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705312

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080120
Date: 9 1, 2010
Author(s): Costantini Michel
Abstract: Costantini (1990).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705318

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Armand Colin et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080124
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Darrault-Harris Ivan
Abstract: Nathalie Sarraute, Enfance, Paris, Gallimard, « Folio », 1983, p. 66-67.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705371

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Armand Colin et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080124
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Coquet Jean-Claude
Abstract: M.R. Anspach, À charge de revanche. Figures élémentaires de la réciprocité (Seuil, 2002)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705372

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Armand Colin et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080127
Date: 6 1, 2012
Author(s): Boulay Bérenger
Abstract: Ariette Farge, La Nuit blanche, Paris, Éditions du Seuil, coll. «La librairie du XXIe siècle », 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705410

Journal Title: Business & Professional Ethics Journal
Publisher: Philosophy Documentation Center
Issue: i40080131
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Deslandes Ghislain
Abstract: "Each answer gives more than ordinary prudence requires. The right cheek? Turn the other cheek! The coat? Take the tunic as well! A thousand? One more!" (2006b, 171).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.5840/bpej20123111

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080460
Date: 2 1, 1990
Author(s): Varga A. Kibédi
Abstract: Nabokov, Feu pâle, Gallimard 1981.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41713145

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080471
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Costantini Michel
Abstract: Description de San Marco et le guide Gallimard de Venise, éd. Nouveaux- Loisirs, 1992.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41713297

Journal Title: Group
Publisher: Mental Health Resources
Issue: i40080844
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Schermer Victor L.
Abstract: A broad conceptual framework is presented for utilizing spirituality in group psychotherapy. The author considers (a) selected concepts and theory relevant to the spiritual aspect of psychotherapy practice; (b) the change in assumptions about the person and the group they imply; (c) the mystical aspects of the listening/observing process; and (d) aspects of the new sciences compatible with spiritual principles. Using a psychospiritual paradigm, the author offers a view of group therapy that emphasizes the therapist as a contemporary mystic, the group as a sacred space, and a return to profound, timeless, nonrelativist spiritual values and goals, nonsensory infinite dimensional experience leading to deep transformation of the self, and the compatibility of contemporary scientific frameworks with spiritual principles that can form the basis of new theorizing and group interpretations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41719065

Journal Title: Studies in Philology
Publisher: University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i392481
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Van Laan Arthur F.
Abstract: "Homiletic Tragicomedy and the Ending of Measure for Measure," an unpublished essay Ide has shared with me, 10
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4174289

Journal Title: Studies in Philology
Publisher: University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i392513
Date: 1 1, 1965
Author(s): Shklovsky Robert
Abstract: Fussner, Historical Revolution, 220-21
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4174538

Journal Title: Traditional Dwellings and Settlements Review
Publisher: International Association for the Study of Traditional Environments (IASTE)
Issue: i40081937
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): ALHASANI NADIA M.
Abstract: In the quest for a more sustainable environment, there appears to be a need to confront issues of tradition vs. modernity and culture vs. technology in a world where boundaries once dividing these issues are collapsing, and differences once separating them are disappearing. This study demonstrates, through examination of a series of built examples, the successful integration of tradition and modernity as they are reflected in Muslim cultures. In practice, the notion of culture and technology is addressed through the built context, ultimately establishing the identity of a society through its architecture. This paper argues for the preservation of a culture through understanding the level of symbolism established in its built environment: the higher the level of symbolism, the further detached an artifact becomes from its place of origin. This research focuses on possible scenarios involving the conscious application of past and present typologies of form and technology in search of a recognizable cultural identity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41757196

Journal Title: Traditional Dwellings and Settlements Review
Publisher: International Association for the Study of Traditional Environments (IASTE)
Issue: i40081961
Date: 4 1, 2002
Author(s): LIU YANG
Abstract: For the last six years, China's historic yaodong cave dwellings, still home to millions of people, have been a focus of work by the Green Architecture Research Center (GARC) of Xi'an University of Architecture and Technology. To date, the GARC, working intimately with the local people of Zao Yuan Village outside of Yan'an in Shaanxi Province, has designed and constructed more than one hundred new yaodong units using the principles of "green architecture." This report suggests that these efforts represent an exemplary application of Kenneth Frampton's notion of "critical regionalism." Specifically, in contrast to the rampant and largely unreflective importation of Western architectural styles common to new construction in many of China's urban centers, the new yaodong units result from a sensitive effort to merge the old with the new and maintain vernacular values.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41757895

Journal Title: African Journal of Reproductive Health / La Revue Africaine de la Santé Reproductive
Publisher: Women's Health and Action Research Centre
Issue: i40082442
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Martin Caroline H
Abstract: At present there is under utilization of maternity service provision in Nigeria, with only a third of childbearing women electing to deliver in healthcare facilities. This is relevant since Nigeria's maternal mortality rate is second highest in the world and is estimated at 1,100 per 100,000 live births. To date, studies have sought cause and effect and have neglected the opinion of the people about what they perceive to be problematic and what they believe constitutes satisfactory maternity service provision. An exploratory qualitative study was carried out to identify pregnant women in a rural Niger Delta community's perceptions of conventional maternity service provision. Participants included 8 pregnant Niger Delta women from differing sub-groups within the homogeneous population. Semi-structured interviews were conducted to explore informants' views of what constitutes satisfactory maternity service provision, what comprises inadequate care, barriers that obstruct delivery of maternity care, and what promotes positive outcomes. Five major themes emerged from the data. These included: (1) Women's requirements for information; (1a) nutritional and dietary advice, (1b) how to recognise developing complications, (1c) appropriate fetal development, (1e) importance of attending clinics; (2) Staff services required: (2a) availability, (2b) well managed, and (2c) good quality; (3) Apparatus: (3a) equipment available, (3b) adequate infrastructure; (4) Affordability; (5) Place of traditional and spiritual methods. The interviewed childbearing Niger Delta women voiced several factors that they considered altered their satisfaction with maternity service provision. Finding out more about what causes satisfaction/dissatisfaction in childbearing women facilitates maternity care professionals to improve standards of care and allocate resources more effectively. Policy changes are driven by initiatives that reinforce strengths of current specification and recognise weaknesses. In addition, the WHO recommends that working towards improving health related culture is important. A l'heure actuelle, il y a une sous utilisation de services de gynécologie-obstétricaux au Nigeria, étant donné qu'un tiers des femmes en âge de procréer optent pour accoucher dans des établissements de santé. Les études antérieure ont recherché la cause et l'effet et ont négligé les opinions des femmes concernant ce qu'elles croient être la bonne prestation de services de gynécologie-obstétricaux. Nous avons mené une étude qualitative exploratrice pour identifier 8 femmes enceintes à partir des perceptions d'une communauté rurale du Niger Delta à l'égard de la prestation de services de gynécologie-obstétricaux conventionnels. Des interviews semi-structures ont exploré les opinions des enquêtées sur ce qui constitue la prestation de services de gynécologieobstétricaux satisfaisant, ce qui constitue les soins insuffisants, les obstacles qui entravent la prestation de soins de gynécologieobstétricaux et ce qui avance les résultats positifs. Cinq thèmes importants ont émergé à partir des données : (i) Les besoins des femmes pour les renseignements ; 1a) le conseil nutritionnel et alimentaire, 1b) comment reconnaître des complications qui se préparent, 1c) le développement approprié des fétus, le) la nécessité de fréquenter les cliniques, 2) bien gérer, 2c) la bonne qualité 3) appareil 3a) l'équipement disponible, 3b) l'infrastructure adéquate ; 4) s'ils sont abordables ; 5) la place des méthodes traditionnelles et spirituelles. Les femmes enquêtées ont mentionné plusieurs facteurs qui ont modifié leur satisfaction avec la prestation de service de gynécologie-obstétricaux. La recherche supplémentaire concernant les causes de la satisfaction ou du mécontentement rend facile la tâche des professionnels de soins de maternité leur permettant d'améliorer la qualité de soin et d'affecter des ressources plus efficacement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41762346

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Latin American and Caribbean Studies / Revue canadienne des études latino-américaines et caraïbes
Publisher: Canadian Association of Latin American and Caribbean Studies / Association Canadienne des études Latino-Américaines et Caraïbes
Issue: i40084753
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): MICÓ JOSÉ ANTONIO GIMÉNEZ
Abstract: La época que nos ha tocado vivir, que, a falta de mejores términos, denominamos tentativamente "globalización," provoca el entretejido de una malla virtual que aglutina privilegiadas zonas de contacto e ignorados ghettos de exclusión, así como irreconciliables identidades monolíticas y múltiples (individuales, locales, étnicas, religiosas, de género, de preferencias sexuales, nacionales, mundiales... et al.); fragmentaciones, opacidades, pro-, proto-, pos-, antinaciones, transnaciones, translenguas, transculturas... La novela Rojo, amarillo y verde, del autor boliviano-quebequés-canadiense-planetario Alejandro Saravia, es representativa del titubeante imaginario planetario que comienza a perfilarse. Lejos de ser una apología celebratoria de la "aldea global," este multifacético imaginario propone un contrapeso dialógico al monólogo del pensamiento único que pretende imponernos el capitalismo globalizante. La période que nous vivons, que nous nommons provisoirement la "mondialisation" à défaut de meilleurs termes, provoque l'entre-tissage d'un réseau virtuel agglutinant des zones de contact privilégiées et des ghettos d'exclusion ignorés; des identités monolithiques et multiples irréconciliables (individuelles, locales, ethniques, religieuses, de genre, d'orientations sexuelles, nationales, mondiales... et al.); des fragmentations, des opacités, des pro-, proto-, post-, anti-nations, des trans-nations, des trans-langues, des trans-cultures... Le roman Rojo, amarillo y verde, de l'auteur bolivien-québécois-canadien-planétaire Alejandro Saravia, est représentatif du chancelant imaginaire planétaire qui commence à se profiler. Loin d'être une apologie célébratoire du "Village global," cet imaginaire aux mille visages propose un contrepoids dialogique au monologue de la pensée unique, celle que le capitalisme mondialisant essaie de nous imposer. The age we find ourselves living in which, for lack of a better term, we tentatively call "globalization" provokes the interweaving of a virtual meshwork that brings together privileged zones of contact and forgotten ghettos of exclusion, as well as irreconcilable monolithic and multiple identities (individual, local, ethnic, religious, national, global, of gender or sexual preference... et al.); fragmentations, opacities, pro-, proto-, post-, antinations, transnations, translinguistics, transcultures... The novel Rojo, amarillo y verde > by Alejandro Saravia, a Bolivian-Quebecker-Canadian-Planetarian author, represents the hesitant global imaginary that is beginning to take shape. Far from being a celebratory apology of the "global village," this multifaceted imaginary proposes a dialogic counterweight to the monologue of the single thought the globalizing capitalism is trying to impose on us.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41800579

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40084990
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): MORAIS CARLOS
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41803944

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40084990
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): SANTOS LAURA
Abstract: Justice Brennan,, ct., p. 9.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41803947

Journal Title: MLN
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i40085290
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Hooper Laurence E.
Abstract: Par. 33.94-96
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1353/mln.2012.0152

Journal Title: Minerva
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40085908
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Pestre Dominique
Abstract: Fressoz (2009)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41821497

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40086215
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Kemp Peter
Abstract: Ibid., p. 43-44.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rmm.062.0173

Journal Title: International Journal of Peace Studies
Publisher: International Peace Research Association
Issue: i40087534
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Ron Amit
Abstract: The article develops an understanding of public deliberations during a peace process, focusing on the interaction between the elite level negotiations and the "public peace process." It does so by examining the dialogical mechanisms that are set to work in the public sphere once the elite consider the possibility of identifying the former enemies as allies or friends. These dialogical mechanisms, the author argues, add up to a shift in the manner the public interprets the discourse that regulates its relationship with the elite toward what the author calls, following Paul Ricoeur, 'hermeneutics of suspicion.' Thus, the peace process generates a need for the public to re-examine the terms of understanding that defined its relationship with the former enemy. However this same process might also lead the public to re-examine the terms by which it understands its relationship with the elite.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41852982

Journal Title: Journal of Advertising
Publisher: Board of Directors, American Academy of Advertising
Issue: i394073
Date: 9 1, 1986
Author(s): Wright Barbara B.
Abstract: This paper analyzes the presenter in advertisements by means of a theoretical framework drawn from literary criticism. The paper adapts literary theory to explore the advertising "who" -- the presenter of a message. It turns to dramaturgy and narratology theory to formulate a trichotomy of advertising "points of view" -- first-person narrator, third-person narrator, and dramatic character. The formal and functional properties of each are discussed with advertising examples. Advertising consequences are illustrated with examples taken from Advertising Age's "Best Advertising of 1989" compilation. These are discussed in terms of media patterns, message strategy, and overall communication objectives. The discussion also suggests the need for additional research to understand hybrid and parody forms.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4188803

Journal Title: Journal of Advertising
Publisher: Board of Directors, American Academy of Advertising
Issue: i394112
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Zaltman Barbara B.
Abstract: In an empirical study using five real-world creative teams from an advertising agency, participants were given a strategic brief for a new beverage product and asked to design the layout for a print ad. Think-aloud concurrent protocols obtained from each team's copywriter, art director, and the two working together were analyzed to examine the creative process and its relationship to the created advertisement. Interpretive analyses of the protocols reveal that the teams access culturally available plot patterns but in different ways. In this study and with the particular materials and situational context explored here, four of the five teams chose to pursue a single mythic structure to the apoarent detriment of their final product. Only one team engaged in fully diversified idea generation involving a wide range of alternative scenarios. Not coincidentally, as a tentative conclusion, this more flexible team produced the ad judged most successful by advertising professionals. This still-to-be-tested exploratory finding deserves further investigation in future research that embodies various methodological refinements.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4189175

Journal Title: Annales historiques de la Révolution française
Publisher: Société des Etudes Robespierristes
Issue: i40088814
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Guilhaumou Jacques
Abstract: Principes régénérateurs du système social de Billaud-Varenne, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41914495

Journal Title: Revista de Crítica Literaria Latinoamericana
Publisher: Latinoamericana Editores
Issue: i40090365
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Varas Patricia
Abstract: Writing History 68
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41940850

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Ethnologie
Publisher: Dietrich Reimer Verlag
Issue: i40090374
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Hahn Hans Peter
Abstract: Holtzman 2003
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41941005

Journal Title: Storytelling, Self, Society
Publisher: Florida Atlantic University
Issue: i40090504
Date: 4 1, 2005
Author(s): Gale Deborah Dysart
Abstract: An increasing number of individuals worldwide are receiving home nursing care from loved ones. Many healthcare professionals are exploring the use of narrative to help family caregivers meet the personal demands of this work. Citing Ricoeur's notion of narrative identity as a social process in which cultural norms and values are negotiated between speaker and audience, this paper argues that health care professionals can assist their clients by viewing narrative as collaboration, not autonomous construction. Collaboration in construction of narrative identity was observed in interactions between family caregivers and public health workers on the Caribbean island of St. Kitts. There, caregivers were supported by a dialogic process in which interlocutors explored the cultural values that define and delimit the possibilities for living as caregivers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41942906

Journal Title: Storytelling, Self, Society
Publisher: Taylor & Francis Group
Issue: i40090956
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): mcclellan erin daina
Abstract: This article suggests that by analyzing vernacular narratives of a community through a qualitative rhetoric approach, we can attempt to understand the social construction of community in unique ways. Vernacular narratives often operate independent of, and even in opposition to, formal definitions put forward in official rhetorics about a particular community. I analyze a collection of vernacular narratives about a Rocky Mountain resort community to explore how a particular group of "locals" make sense of their highly transient community. By discussing how narratives of personal experience can translate into both collective conceptions of community and individual processes of identification, I seek to reveal how both vernacular and formal narratives of community formation can expose and reveal the taken-for-granted ways in which a particular "community" may (in)advertently be open (or closed) to changing as its members change.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41949162

Journal Title: Acta Sociologica
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i388794
Date: 3 1, 1999
Author(s): Wilson Henrik
Abstract: A theory of the embodiment of action is proposed. Reflections on relations between human intentions, the human body and the notion of agency lead us to argue that phenomenological analysis is not sufficient for such a theory. Our consideration, that the most fundamental level of embodied agency is that of life itself, brings us to the philosophy of biology and the theory of the organism: briefly, certain parts of the natural environment are intrinsic to the constitution of organisms and, in their more sophisticated configuration, as agents. Action is embodied in the sense that certain physiological processes are internal in relation to it and play a constitutive role in its performance. The way in which environment, context and consciousness affect and constitute the nature of agency at personal and sub-personal levels is elaborated. We see that human agents perceive and act upon their world through a complex shifting between those levels. A summary of the ways in which the social sciences can be enriched by this more comprehensive view of human agency provides the basis of justification for claiming Actor-Network Theory (ANT), originally developed by sociologists studying science and technology, as a promising framework for the continuation of this reasoning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4194959

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40091451
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): KAHLMEYER-MERTENS ROBERTO S.
Abstract: Gadamer, Hans-Georg. – Wahrheit und Methode, ed. cit., p. 2.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41955630

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40091451
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): CATALÃO HELENA B.
Abstract: Marion, Jean-Luc – "La Dernier Principe (Livre I. La Donation)". In: Étant Donné..., op. cit., pp. 23-29.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41955636

Journal Title: Revista de Musicología
Publisher: Sociedad Española de Musicología
Issue: i40091550
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): García Montalbán Antonio
Abstract: Lo Maravilloso en el Siglo de las Luces: La Encyclopédie y Esteban de Arteaga (1747-1799). Valencia, Mu VIM, 2009.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41959346

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40092224
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): BUCHOLC MARTA
Abstract: Jakoubek, Svoboda, Budilova 2009.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41969498

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40092224
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): KARKOWSKA MARTA
Abstract: Kula 2002
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41969501

Journal Title: Franciscan Studies
Publisher: Franciscan Institute
Issue: i40092597
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): DELIO ILIA
Abstract: Karl Rahner, "The Eternal Signifcance of the Humanity of Jesus for our Relationship with God," trans. Karl-H. and Boniface Kruger, vol. 3, Theological Investigations (Baltimore: Helicon Press, 1967): 44.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41975403

Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40094286
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): Brewster Chris
Abstract: United Nations 1948
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s10551-012-1397-0

Journal Title: Science Fiction Studies
Publisher: SF-TH Inc.
Issue: i394211
Date: 11 1, 1993
Author(s): Zamyatin Peter G.
Abstract: This article examines the interplay of dystopian and utopian themes in Terry Bisson's "Pirates of the Universe," utilizing Tom Moylan's concept of "critical dystopia." In the novel, Bisson maps out a number of discontinuous dystopias in a near-future US marked by rampant capitalist enterprise, out-of-control bio-technology, ecological decay, and a weak central state. These dystopias generally produce citizens with fragmented personal experiences, disinterest in social issues, and limited aspirations. Towards the end of the novel, when free and clean energy becomes available to all, Bisson explores continuing dystopian trends, articulates utopian possibilities, and emphasizes the importance of individual and collective imagination for choosing among alternatives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4241016

Journal Title: Philosophische Rundschau
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i40095939
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Gessmann Martin
Abstract: M. Gessmann: Was der Mensch wirklich braucht. Warum wir mit Technik nicht mehr zu- rechtkommen und wie sich aus unserem Umgang mit Apparaten wieder eine sinnvolle Geschichte er- gibt, München 2010.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1628/003181510791542382

Journal Title: Philosophische Rundschau
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i40095939
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Waldenfels Bernhard
Abstract: Günther Ort- mann: Management in der Hypermoderne, Wiesbaden 2009.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1628/003181510791542418

Journal Title: Cinémas d'Amérique Latine
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40096383
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): CHASSAING BORIS
Abstract: O melodrama histórico O que é isso, companheiro? (Bruno Barreto, 1997) e o documentário Hércules 56 (Silvio Da-Rin, 2006) adotam gêneros cinematográficos distintos na construção de versões antagônicas sobre o sequestro do embaixador dos EUA no Brasil, promovido pela luta armada revolucionária em 1969. Porém, de lado a lado, as opções estéticas identificáveis nos filmes conotam um encerramento do passado que não deixa de indicar certa convergência a respeito do presente brasileiro de "conciliação" democrática, quando permanece a impunidade de torturadores e assassinos. Le mélodrame historique O que é isso, companheiro? (Bruno Barreto, 1997) et le documentaire Hércules 56 (Silvio Da-Rin, 2006) adoptent des genres cinématographiques distincts dans la construction de versions antagoniques de l'enlèvement de l'ambassadeur des États-Unis au Brésil, perpétré par la lutte armée révolutionnaire en 1969. Pourtant, mis côte à côte, les choix esthétiques identifiables dans les films dénotent un verrouillage du passé qui n'est pas sans indiquer une certaine convergence au sujet de l'actuelle "conciliation" démocratique au Brésil, alors que les tortionnaires et assassins restent impunis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42598507

Journal Title: Biblica
Publisher: Pontificio Instituto Biblico
Issue: i40096736
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): Moran William L.
Abstract: A. R. Millard, Tyndale Bulletin 18 (1967) 3-18.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42609705

Journal Title: Biblica
Publisher: Pontificio Instituto Biblico
Issue: i40096786
Date: 1 1, 1976
Author(s): von Allmen Daniel
Abstract: L'Évangile de Jésus-Christ, 317.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42610781

Journal Title: Biblica
Publisher: Pontificio Instituto Biblico
Issue: i40096984
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Navarro Luis Sánchez
Abstract: Beutler, Martyria, 237-306
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42614626

Journal Title: Philippine Studies
Publisher: Ateneo de Manila University
Issue: i40098105
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): GALAM RODERICK G.
Abstract: This article inquires into the social memory of Ferdinand Marcos and of his dictatorship in the literature written in the Language of his home region, the Ilocos, in the period since his downfall in the 1986 People Power Revolution. The novels Saksi ti Kaunggan (1986-1987) by Juan S. P. Hidalgo Jr. and Dagiti Bin-i ti Kimat (1995) by Clesencio B. Rambaud are used as indicators of changing narrative social memories of Marcos in llokano literature. Hidalgo's novel exemplifies the llokano writers' "loyalist" memory of Marcos, whereas Rambaud's novel indexes attempts to reassess Marcos and the legacies of his dictatorship. This article seeks to contribute to the literature on the social memory of Marcos's military regime; looks into the braiding of literature, memory, and the nation; and examines the constitution of memory in gender.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42633953

Journal Title: International Journal of Politics, Culture, and Society
Publisher: Springer Science+Business Media
Issue: i40098288
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Cyr Rachel E.
Abstract: Leuchter (1989).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s10767-013-9140-0

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100605
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Hodrová Daniela
Abstract: This study represents a Chapter from a section devoted to the composition of a literary work and is part of a larger project called ‘The Poetics of a Work of Literature in the Twentieth Century’, which is being undertaken by the Theory Department of the Institute of Czech Literature. The fragment and fragmentariness in a twentieth-century literary work are a manifestation of a marked tendency towards discontinuity or in some cases towards continuity of a certain kind. There exist works of art that for various reasons remain fragments without, however, being preceived as such (the novels of Kafka and Ladislav Klíma’s Velký román, are cases in point); on the other hand, the fragment, that is to say an intentional fragment (such as a sketch or a synopsis), becomes an independent genre whose roots go back to Romanticism (for instance Novalis’s fragment). The fragment and fragmentarieness that manifests itself in the text in the widest possible number of ways (intentional incompleteness and sporadicity, ‘blank spots’ in the Story, the mixing of heterogeneous elements, the alternating of various genres within one work, and so on), we understand as a reaction to the idea about the work as a complete, inlernally unified and accomplished whole with a clear and single Sense, an idea that Classicism molleyeoddled, which was then to a large exient done by Realism and with it all so-called decadent literature (including tendencious, Socialist-Realist literature). The fragment and fragmentariness (with which is linked the idea of a sense that continuously defies being pinned down to any one definition, which follows from its quality of not being fully told, from suggestion, hints, silence, gaps and ‘ holes’) are, in the literature of the twentieth century, perceived as both a genre and also as approaches that can express the open nature of being and of the world better than the whole work can. Because fragmentary works often represent a work in a nascent state or in a state of transformation, they become a picture of a world that is, as Ladislav Klíma pointed out, ‘continuously creating itself’.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686479

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100622
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Jankovič Milan
Abstract: Patočka summarized his conception of style in the essay „Umění a čas" [Art and Time] (1966), in which he observes style over historie periods and its increasing departure from a priori, metaphysically ascertained and universally valid meaning. In modern art, style is established by the freedom of the Creative act; its centre of gravity shifts to the level of „signifier". Patočka's essay „O minulém rázu umìění" [Concerning the Former Nature of Art] (written 1965) helped to clarify „aesthetic attitude". In this essay, he develops an interpretational duet: a critique of Hegel's metaphysical starting point, which distances itself from the experience of modern art, and an appraisal of Hegel's interpretation of time, which remains inspirational. In accordance with it, Patočka the phenomenologist considers art the place of „destructive creation", of vivifying revelation, whose source is in man. The next part of the article calls attention to a lecture by Paul Ricoeur „Vyprávění, metafora a teorie interpretace" [Narrative, Metaphor and the Theory of Interpretation] (1987), in which Ricoeur introduced a modern hermeneutic approach to literary studies. What is most relevant here is the concept of the „double reference". The first aspect of reference relates to empirical reality; the second to the „productive reference", which designs a world created by the literary work. Semantic innovation in the narration of a story has a parallel in the semantic innovation of the metaphor. In both cases there emerges „the new, the as yet unsaid, the inexpressible - in language".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686758

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100677
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Kubíček Tomáš
Abstract: Dumas 1956: 11
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42687783

Journal Title: Asian Perspective
Publisher: The Institue for Far Eastern Studies
Issue: i40101443
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Bleiker Roland
Abstract: Dipesh Chakrabarty, Provincializing Europe: Postcolonial Thought and His- torical Difference (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 2000), p. 98.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42704577

Journal Title: Asian Perspective
Publisher: The Institue for Far Eastern Studies
Issue: i40101449
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Yang Kiwoong
Abstract: Jo, Yang-Hyeon, "Controversy over East Asian History and U.S. House Discussion Regarding the 'Comfort Women' Resolution: Recent Changes and Implications for U.S.-Japan Relations," East Asian Review (Seoul), vol. 19, No. 3 (Fall, 2007) pp. 3-31.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42704641

Journal Title: Sartre Studies International
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40101498
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Levy Lior
Abstract: The article advances an interpretation of the self as an imaginary object. Focusing on the relationship between selfhood and memory in Sartre's The Transcendence of the Ego, I argue that Sartre offers useful resources for thinking about the self in terms of narratives. Against interpretations that hold that the ego misrepresents consciousness or distorts it, I argue that the constitution of the ego marks a radical transformation of the conscious field. To prove this point, I turn to the role of reflection and memory in the creation of the self. Reflection and memory weave past, present and future into a consistent and meaningful life story. This story is no other than the self. I propose to understand the self as a fictional or imaginary entity, albeit one that has real presence in human life.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3167/ssi.2013.190206

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ceskoslovenská Akademie Ved
Issue: i40101655
Date: 1 1, 1968
Author(s): Štěpánková Julie
Abstract: J. P. Richard, Fadeur de Verlaine. (Poésie et profondeur, Seuil, 1955.)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42708218

Journal Title: Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali
Publisher: Università di Roma Sapienza
Issue: i40103171
Date: 9 1, 2005
Author(s): Guisan Catherine
Abstract: Lily Gardner Feldman, Banchoff and Smith, Legitimacy and the European Union cit., 66-90.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42740404

Journal Title: Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali
Publisher: Università di Roma Sapienza
Issue: i40103175
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): KHADER BICHARA
Abstract: Les usages de la mémoire dans les relations interna- tionales, Bruxelles, Bruylant, 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42740528

Journal Title: Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali
Publisher: Università di Roma Sapienza
Issue: i40103201
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): KHADER BICHARA
Abstract: Achar, Op. cit., p. 431.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42741240

Journal Title: The Journal of Education
Publisher: Boston University School of Education
Issue: i40104951
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Greene Maxine
Abstract: Recent events indicate that self-interest and technicism today triumph over social consciousness; yet educators naturally turn to the humanities as an antidote to positivism and technical domination, even as humanities scholars are increasingly defensive, struggling to hold on to their enclaves. For those committed to the practice of freedom in education the humanities are of vital interest, particularly when they are defined as works that are articulations of some human consciousness thrusting into the world. After giving examples of works that may be classified as "humanities" according to this definition, the following essay discusses teaching situations and literary works which might free persons for awareness of human possibility, for authentic talk and widening perspectives. The humanities must be presented not as monuments to be revered but as works to be shared by students and applied to their own life situations. Students grounded in their "everydayness" can be awakened by Freiré's dialogical method, awakened to crítical consciousness and to the possibility of praxis in a world they share.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42772897

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40104981
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Bantigny Ludivine
Abstract: Vincent Duclert, L'Avenir de l'histoire, Paris, Armand Colin, 2010, p. 4-6 et 29.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/vin.117.0013

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40104981
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Bantigny Ludivine
Abstract: Daniel et Gabriel Cohn-Bendit, Le Gauchisme : remède à la maladie sénile du communisme, Paris, Éd. du Seuil, 1968, p. 128.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/vin.117.0215

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40104982
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Bohnekamp Dorothea
Abstract: Congrès juif mondial entre 2005 et 2013.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42773508

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40105000
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): Fouéré Marie-Aude
Abstract: Richard Banégas et Jean-Pierre Warnier, « Figures de la réussite et imaginaires politiques », Politique africaine, 82, 2001, p. 142-160.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/ving.118.0003

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40105000
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): Fouéré Marie-Aude
Abstract: Jean Copans, « Intellectuels visibles, intellectuels invisi- bles », Politique africaine, 51, 1993, p. 7-25.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/ving.118.0061

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i40108570
Date: 9 1, 1978
Author(s): Wright Edmond
Abstract: The central point is that Schutz's idealization of reciprocity, the matching of subjective intentions in the public world of interactive behaviour, necessarily involves agents in an ironic process. This is largely because, since they are taking so much for granted, they cannot be aware of what is latent in the intentional perspectives of their social partners. In bringing out the pattern of the irony of inter subjective dialectic, the argument makes plain the importance of pretence as a vital concept in philosophy, sociology and hermeneutics. The article closes with a criticism of naive optimism among purveyors of dialectic, recommending a proper concern with the irreconcilables of tragedy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42852032

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: British Sociological Association Publications Limited
Issue: i40108628
Date: 8 1, 1988
Author(s): Thompson John B.
Abstract: This paper argues that the analysis of culture and mass communication should be regarded as central concerns of sociology and social theory. It develops a framework for the analysis of culture and shows how this framework can be applied to the study of mass communication. Focusing on the medium of television, the paper highlights some of the distinctive characteristics of mass communication and examines some of the factors involved in the production, construction and reception of media messages. It is argued that this approach enables the analyst to pose questions concerning the ideological character of mass communication in a new and more fruitful way.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42854459

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: British Sociological Association Publications Limited
Issue: i40108657
Date: 5 1, 1996
Author(s): Hay Colin
Abstract: The winter of discontent continues to exert a powerful hold over the British political imaginary. It acts as a discursive key to a collective mythology seemingly appealed to, and conjured, in each wave of industrial unrest, in each hint of political turmoil and, until recently, whenever the election of a Labour Government looked credible. In this paper I consider the rhetorical strategies and linguistic devices deployed by the tabloid media in the narration of the events of the winter of 1978-79. I argue for an interpretation of the winter of discontent as a moment of state crisis. By crisis however I do not refer to the mere accumulation of contradictions but rather to a moment of transition, a moment of decisive intervention. Within such a framework, the winter of discontent emerges as a strategic moment in the transformation of the British state, and perhaps the key moment in the pre-history of Thatcherism. For, as I hope to demonstrate, the initial appeal of the New Right was premised upon its ability to offer a convincing construction of the winter of discontent as symptomatic of a more fundamental crisis of the state. In such a moment of crisis, a particular type of decisive intervention was called for. In this discursive construction of crisis the New Right proved itself capable of changing, if not the hearts and minds of the electorate, then certainly the predominant perceptions of the political context. It recruited subjects to its vision of the necessary response to the crisis of a monolithic state besieged by the trade unions. This was perhaps the only truly hegemonic moment of Thatcherism. It occurred well before Mrs Thatcher entered Number 10. It is thus not surprising that one of the most enduring and distinctive legacies of Thatcherism has been the new political lexicon of crisis, siege and subterfuge born of the winter of discontent.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42855681

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40108703
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Clarke Simon
Abstract: Over the past few years there has been an increasing interest in the use of psychoanalytic ideas within a sociological framework These ideas have been largely developed within sociological theory rather than practice. There does, however, seem to be a new frame of thought and practice emerging which we could term psycho-social studies, perhaps even a new discipline in its own right In this article I will discuss the development of the use of psychoanalytic ideas around sociological issues, explore some of the tensions that have arisen and evaluate the implications for methodological practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42856940

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40108755
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Prior Lindsay
Abstract: This article is concerned with the ways in which people who work in and use a cancer genetics clinic in the UK talk about the 'gene for cancer'. By conceptualizing such a gene as a boundary object, and using empirical data derived from clinic consultations, observations in a genetics laboratory and interviews with patients, the author seeks to illustrate how the various parties involved adopt different discursive strategies to appropriate, describe and understand what is apparently the 'same' thing. The consequent focus on the ways in which the rhetorical and syntactical features of lay and professional talk interlink and diverge illustrates not merely how our contemporary knowledge of genes and genetics is structured, but also how different publics position themselves with respect to the biochemistry of life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42858282

Journal Title: Social History
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: i394451
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Rigney James
Abstract: Anne Rigney, The Rhetoric of Historical Represen- tation: Three Narrative Histories of the French Revolution (Cambridge, 1990) Rigney The Rhetoric of Historical Representation: Three Narrative Histories of the French Revolution 1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4286169

Journal Title: Social History
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: i394465
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): White James
Abstract: L. S. Kramer, 'Literature, criticism, and historical imagi- nation: the literary challenge of Hayden White and Dominick LaCapra', in Hunt (ed.), New Cultural History, op. cit., 97-128
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4286515

Journal Title: Discourse & Society
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40110340
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): WODAK RUTH
Abstract: The concept of the nation as an imagined community has gained importance in the relevant literature during the last decade. How do we construct national identities in discourse? Which topics, which discursive strategies and which linguistic devices are employed to construct national sameness and uniqueness on the one hand, and differences to other national collectives on the other hand? These questions were investigated in our study on the Austrian nation and identity. Taking several current social scientific approaches as our point of departure, we have developed a method of description and analysis of these phenomena which has applications beyond the discursive production of national identity in the specific Austrian example studied. By focusing particularly on the discursive construction of (national) sameness, this study has broken new ground in discourse-historical analysis, which until now has mainly been concerned with the analysis of the discursive construction of difference.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42888247

Journal Title: Journal of Legal Education
Publisher: Association of American Law Schools
Issue: i40110622
Date: 9 1, 1989
Author(s): Elson John S.
Abstract: supra notes 62, 72, 76, 85.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42893082

Journal Title: Journal of Legal Education
Publisher: Association of American Law Schools
Issue: i40110909
Date: 12 1, 1983
Author(s): Gillers Stephen
Abstract: Robert B. McKay, The Lawyer in the Year 2000: Three Views, 25 Ala. L. Rev. (1972).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42897913

Journal Title: Journal of Legal Education
Publisher: Association of American Law Schools
Issue: i40110912
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Murray James E.
Abstract: George P. Fletcher, Fairness and Utility in Tort Theory, 85 Harv. L. Rev. 571-73 (1972).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42897983

Journal Title: Revue d'économie financière
Publisher: Association d'Economie Financière
Issue: i40111222
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): Thiveaud Jean-Marie
Abstract: E. Bloch, Le Principe Espérance, t.II, Paris, Gallimard, 1979.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42903160

Journal Title: Revue d'économie financière
Publisher: Association d'Economie Financière
Issue: i40111230
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Elliet Guillaume
Abstract: Cass. civ. 1 , 5 novembre 1991, bull. civ. I, n° 297, p. 195 et JCP 92, ed. E, II, 255,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42903385

Journal Title: Philip Roth Studies
Publisher: Heldref Publications
Issue: i40112172
Date: 10 1, 2006
Author(s): Wilson Matthew
Abstract: This article historicizes The Human Stain, placing it in the genre of the passing novel. The analysis is filtered through a reading of Chesnutt s passing fictions, particularly The House behind the Cedars and The Quarry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42922061

Journal Title: Shofar
Publisher: Midwest Jewish Studies Association and the Jewish Studies Program of Purdue University
Issue: i40113288
Date: 10 1, 1996
Author(s): Moore James F.
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, Le Conflit des Interpretations (Paris: de Seuil, 1969).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42942577

Journal Title: Shofar
Publisher: University of Nebraska Press
Issue: i40113314
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Astell Ann W.
Abstract: Weil, Waiting for God, p. 57.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42943639

Journal Title: Shofar
Publisher: Purdue University Press
Issue: i40113344
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Katz Claire
Abstract: S. Heschel, ed., Moral Grandeur, p. viii.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42944908

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113378
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Parks Ward
Abstract: Defined as "an act of cognition that schematizes two semantic fields and simultaneously effects and denies their rapprochement," metaphor as it appears in Lycidas is subdivided into three types, quantitatively distinguished. Ornamental metaphor is the minimal unit, consisting of a single metaphoric equation. Structural metaphors operate over larger poetic blocks, typically the extended clause. Governing the entire poem, the Lycidas/King metaphor bridges the real and fictitious universes in a metaphoric act characteristic of the pastoral elegy genre. Cutting across this three-tiered classification scheme is another typology based on metaphoric conjunction among the semantic features Human/Non-Human and Abstract/Physical. Accompanying tables present the results of the analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42945435

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113389
Date: 7 1, 1986
Author(s): Maddox Donald
Abstract: The entire medieval period is dominated by an eschatological textuality which posits for the history of salvation a singulative movement through time, from creation to eschaton. In book 12 of De civitate Dei, Augustine provides theoretical background for this epochal model; the most cogent statement of its content is found in book 6 of Hugh of Saint Victor's Didascalicon. This type of textuality, whose formal properties are identified, is already marked in Augustine by its exclusion of the purely iterative view of time held by pagan philosophers. From the twelfth century, however, singulative eschatological textuality assimilates an iterative model of the progression of time as it finds expression in metaphorically informed statements concerning the liturgical year. From Jean Beleth to Jacobus de Voragine, the figure of assimilatio facilitates the conflation of a discretelinear and an iterative model of temporality in such representations, the logical relations within which are analyzed here.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42945603

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113396
Date: 7 1, 1988
Author(s): Raney Roslyn
Abstract: Can fixed images tell a story; do autonomous visual stories exist? In order to answer this question, two categories of narrative images are considered: series like tapestries, which constitute together one narration, and on the other hand single paintings. Historical paintings representing a collectivity can suggest temporal evolution (like Poussin's Manna in the Desert) while those which represent one central hero must choose the "pregnant moment" of peripeteia (like Rembrandt's The Feast of Balthazar). The conclusion is that autonomous visual stories cannot be developed alongside existing verbal (literary) stories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42945705

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113404
Date: 7 1, 1990
Author(s): Gordon Paul
Abstract: Largely due to Benveniste's dismissal ("Language in Freudian Theory," 1951), Freud's review essay of the philologist Karl Abel's "Über den Gegensinn der Urworte" ("On the Antithetical Sense of Primary Words") has been ignored or slighted by most critics of Freud's thought, even those influenced by Lacan's linguistic emphasis. Nonetheless, the essay on "primary antithetical meaning" (Ur-worte) should be of great importance for psychoanalysis and psychoanalytic approaches to art, for it explicitly addresses Freud's persistent identification of the unconscious with antithetical modes of thought. Benveniste's positivist dismissal is relevant to psychoanalysis in general (Freud's theories of bisexuality, Lutschen, and castration fear) and psychoanalytic studies of art in particular (Freud's essays on the "uncanny" in E. T. A. Hoffmann, Friedrich Hebbel's "Judith und Holofernes," Shakespeare's Merchant of Venice, and so on.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42945849

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113416
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): Burgan Mary
Abstract: Despite recent critical denigrations of the representation of temporality as a defining interest in narrative, it is important to reappraise the epiphany as a feature of the short stories of "founding" modernist women writers like Virginia Woolf and Katherine Mansfield. Nevertheless, the association of the epiphanic story with "feminine" writing drove a writer like Doris Lessing to reject the epiphany as an organizing principle in her stories; she chose, instead, the more fabular, allegorical model of a writer like D. H. Lawrence. Finally, however, Lessing, like other women writers of the short story, kept in touch with the intuition of revelation in moments of being whose power act not only as organizers of narrative but also as significations of a kind of feminine sensory apprehension of temporality. This discursive implementation of the moment as the center of modernist women writers' short fiction may be recuperated so as to preserve their achievements from the preference for a decentered écriture féminine.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42946058

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113430
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): Fludernik Monika
Abstract: The narratological category "person" needs to be replaced by a different conceptual framework. The traditional distinctions between narrative levels and between story and discourse are inadequate to an explanation of much postmodernist writing. Classic narratological categories correlate with a realist understanding of story and with a realist conceptualization of story telling with some postmodernist techniques of writing, such as second-person fiction, refusing to play by such conceptualizations. Gabriel Josipovici's Contre-jour is an instance of a radical deconstruction of realist parameters. Realist recuperations or naturalizations of intractable writing have to be evaluated as readings against the anti-mimetic grain of such texts, and the possibility of such narrative recuperation does not provide evidence for the reinstatement of traditional narratological distinctions. The failing of current narratology to account for second-person narrative is due to the inapplicability of traditional narratological categories, a break-down that is motivated by the ideological commitments of much postmodernist, and especially second-person, fiction since these deliberately question realistic frames of cognition and story understanding.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42946261

Journal Title: Bibliothèque de l’École des chartes
Publisher: Société de l'École des Chartes
Issue: i40114324
Date: 6 1, 2000
Author(s): SARMANT Thierry
Abstract: Ibid., p. 131, 138-139.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42957733

Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115171
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): BARTLETT Steven
Abstract: Log. Unt. II. 2 v § 23.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42968641

Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115198
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Bache Christopher M.
Abstract: Douglas Berggren, pp. 243-44.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42968912

Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115202
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Maloney J. Christopher
Abstract: Fodor [1975]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42968961

Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115211
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Marcus Ruth Barcan
Abstract: Philosophy and the Mirror of Nature, Princeton, 1981 p. 168.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42969056

Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115257
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): BLACK Max
Abstract: 1. A. Richards, 92.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42969757

Journal Title: Francofonia
Publisher: Università di Bologna
Issue: i40116704
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Sadkowski Piotr
Abstract: D. Garand, L'aller-retour du foyer, in F. Marcato-Falzoni (sous la direc- tion de), Mythes et mythologies des origines dans la littérature québécoise, Bologna, Clueb, 1994, pp. 33-72.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43016516

Journal Title: Francofonia
Publisher: Università di Bologna
Issue: i40116705
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Lalagianni Vasiliki
Abstract: E. Awumey, Le Périple du moi: mouvements et situations d'exil , «Palabres», dossier «L'immigration et ses avatars», vol. VII, n. 1-2, 2007, pp. 223-242.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43016532

Journal Title: Francofonia
Publisher: Università di Bologna
Issue: i40116725
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Plamondon Jean-François
Abstract: J.-M. Schaeffer, Le Récit fictif, in J. Bessière, Études romanesques 2, Paris, Lettres modernes, 1994, p. 51.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43016937

Journal Title: Francofonia
Publisher: Università di Bologna
Issue: i40116725
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Cooreman Gaëlle
Abstract: Ibid., p. 267.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43016938

Journal Title: AAA: Arbeiten aus Anglistik und Amerikanistik
Publisher: Institut für Anglistik, Universität Graz
Issue: i40117059
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): West Russell
Abstract: Heiner Keupp, Thomas Ahbe, Wolfgang Gmür, Renate Höfe, Beate Mitzscherlich, Wolfgang Kraus & Florian Straus, Identitäts- konstruktionen: Das Patchwork der Identitäten in der Spätmoderne (Reinbek bei Hamburg: Rowohlt, 1999).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43025718

Journal Title: Médiévales
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes-Paris VIII avec le concours du Centre National du Livre et du Centre de la Recherche Scientifique
Issue: i40117146
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): LUCKEN Christopher
Abstract: « L'Œil dans l'oreille. L'histoire ou le monstre de la fable », dans L'Histoire dans la littérature, L. Adert et E. Eigenmann éd., Genève, 2000, p. 37-57.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43027739

Journal Title: Poetica
Publisher: Wilhelm Fink GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i40117170
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Fulda Daniel
Abstract: Zitate ebd.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43028187

Journal Title: Poetica
Publisher: Wilhelm Fink GmbH & Co. Verlags-KG
Issue: i40117194
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Bleumer Hartmut
Abstract: Joseph Bernhart. Mit einem Vorwort von Ernst Ludwig Grasmück, Frankfurt a. M.: Insel-Verlag, 1998, XI, 25, 32-30, 39, S. 653-667.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43028513

Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117266
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Capogreco Nadia
Abstract: R. Char, Partage formel, in Fureur et mystère, Paris, Gallimard, 1962.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43029449

Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117272
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Senici Emanuele
Abstract: http://www. parterre. com.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43029593

Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117280
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Carone Angela
Abstract: cit. in Edler, Schumann e il suo tempo cit., p. 154.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43029779

Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117303
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Escal Françoise
Abstract: P. Boulez, cité dans La Musique de chambre, éd. Fr.-R. Tranchefort, Paris, Fayard (coll. «Les Indispensables de la musique»), 1989, p. 939.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43030248

Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117308
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Della Seta Fabrizio
Abstract: Aristotele, Poetica, 1450 a.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43030385

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne et Ses Fils
Issue: i40117424
Date: 3 1, 1961
Author(s): Tilliette Xavier
Abstract: Blondel et la Religion. Essai critique sur la « Lettre » de 1896.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43031978

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117496
Date: 9 1, 1971
Author(s): AUBENQUE Pierre
Abstract: Vorträge und Aufsätze, p. 43 et passim ; et p. 126 (tr. fr., Essais et confé- rences, pp. 47 et 147).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43033352

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117499
Date: 6 1, 1972
Author(s): VIDAL Jacques
Abstract: Ainsi parlait Zarathoustra, éd. bilingue, Paris, 1969, I, p. 179.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43033428

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117518
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): BOUILLARD Henri
Abstract: l'Autre, pp. 289-291
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43034031

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117554
Date: 3 1, 1987
Author(s): MOULINES C. Ulises
Abstract: T.S. Kuhn, « Theory-change as structure-change ». Erkenntnis, 10 (1976), p. 179-199.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43035187

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117556
Date: 9 1, 1987
Author(s): SEBESTIK Jan
Abstract: Gesam- tausgabe 2 B 2/1, 2 B 2/2 et 2 B 3/1, Stuttgart-Bad Cannstatt, Frommann-Holzboog, 1977 sq
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43035223

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117594
Date: 3 1, 1974
Author(s): RADNITZKY Gérard
Abstract: (Lübbe, 1972).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43036188

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117638
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): VILLELA-PETIT Maria
Abstract: Idées directrices pour une phénoménologie et une philosophie phénoménologique pure -Livre Troisième, trad. fr. par D. Tiffeneau sous le titre La phénoménologie et les fondements des sciences, qui reprend le sous-titre allemand, PUF, 1993 (100, 120), trad, modifiée. Edition allemande: Ideen III, Husserliana V, Nijhoff, La Haye, 1952.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43037382

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne Éditeur
Issue: i40117657
Date: 3 1, 2000
Author(s): JERVOLINO DOMENICO
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Soi-même comme un autre, Seuil, Paris, 1990, p. 365-367.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43037798

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne Éditeur
Issue: i40117658
Date: 6 1, 2000
Author(s): GREISCH JEAN
Abstract: F. Schleiermacher, « Sendschreiben an Lücke », in: Heinz Bolli (éd.), Schleiermacher- Auswahl, op. cit., p. 146.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43037816

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117682
Date: 4 1, 2005
Author(s): POIREL CHRISTIAN
Abstract: R. Penrose, Shadows of the Mind. A Search in the Missing Science of Consciousness, Oxford University Press, New York, 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038301

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117686
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): MANIGLIER PATRICE
Abstract: L.S., 1971 : 619
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038371

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117693
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): LETH PALLE
Abstract: F. D. E. Schleiermacher, « Des différentes methodes du traduire », 1813, tr. Antoine Berman, in Des différentes méthodes du traduire et autre texte, éd. Christian Berner, Paris, Seuil, « Points », 1999, p. 47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038484

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117709
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): ZUMWALD DAVID
Abstract: H. Maldiney, Aîtres de la langue et demeures de la pensée, Lausanne, L'Âge d'Homme, 1975.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038748

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117711
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): DISPERSYN ÉLÉONORE
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Lecture 3. Aux frontières de la philosophie, Paris, Seuil, 1994, p. 233.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038784

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117738
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): PINSON Jean-Claude
Abstract: P. Szondi, « Sur la connaissance philologique », in Poésies et poétiques de la modernité, édité par Mayotte Bollack, Lille, PUL, 1982.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43039437

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117744
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): FAGNIEZ GUILLAUME
Abstract: R. Aron, La philosophie critique de l'histoire, op. cit., p. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43039553

Journal Title: Teorema: Revista Internacional de Filosofía
Publisher: Universidad de Valencia
Issue: i40118091
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Sansigre Marta
Abstract: Esta discusión crítica se refiere a la cuestión general de la posibilidad y la legitimidad de un enfoque psicológico de la filosofía. A menudo se ha acusado a tal enfoque de reduccionismo psicológico, o de ser un estudio empírico externo sin importancia filosófica real. Se arguye aquí que esas acusaciones son el resultado de (lo que Kierkegaard llamó) "el mito del pensamiento puro"—la tendencia a separar ontológicamente los pensamientos abstractos y el resto de la experiencia humana. Una psicología de la filosofía del futuro que fuese adecuada debería, para librarse de esas acusaciones, proporcionar un argumento en contra de esta herencia platónica.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43046072

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118195
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Combrink H. J. B.
Abstract: The problem being dealt with in this paper is whether a text has only one legitimate meaning, or no meaning at all. The question becomes even more acute when the contexts of sender and receiver are different. Polysemy and ambiguity are well-known obstacles to communication on the level of the word. The necessity of a general semiotic theory is stressed, and explains the difference between denotation and connotation. The functionality of metaphor in biblical language points to the interpretive value of polyvalency. The impression of unlimited indeterminacy created by the recent emphasis on the active role of the reader, is in a sense misleading since author and reader function as a textual strategy. On the other hand, the actualization of the textual expression as the content of the text by applying the various codes and subcodes, implies a continuous interaction between intensional and extensional approaches. In this respect topics, thematics, ideological and world structures are operative. Since interpretation and application are not to be separated in a pragmatic context, as is the case with the text of the Bible, there inevitably remains the possibility of multiple interpretations due to the interpreting and applying of the text of the Bible in a concrete situation. Yet this interpretation and appropriation should always be done as comprehension of the text and in continuity with the tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43047857

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118210
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Robinson A S (Rensia)
Abstract: Boesak 1987:126-138.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048155

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118210
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): LYONS CAMPBELL N D
Abstract: Gaonkar (1990:351)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048156

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118210
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): van Aarde Andries G
Abstract: Smit 1987:6-9
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048164

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118227
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): West Gerald O.
Abstract: Meyers 1988
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048500

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118232
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Thiselton Anthony C.
Abstract: A flood of research literature on 1 Corinthians over the last fifteen years suggests an understanding of this epistle and of the ethos of the church in Corinth that resonates closely with issues in our culture today. The ethos of "secular" Corinth still heavily influenced the church in Corinth. It encouraged attitudes that today we associate with consumerism, postmodernism, and social construction, together with an overpreoccupation with autonomy, success, audience-pleasing rhetoric, and a "local" theology. The church sought to choose its own leaders, its own ethics, its own socio-political value-system, and its own criteria of spirituality. However, Paul sets forth a formative understanding of the cross; an understanding of the Church as one, holy, catholic, and apostolic; a Christomorphic re-definition of "spiritual" and of the Holy Spirit; love and respect for "the other"; and the gift-character of grace and resurrection. How does this relate to hermeneutical distance and appropriation?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048599

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118260
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Long Timothy M S
Abstract: Thatcher (1999, 267-269).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43049106

Journal Title: Internationale Schulbuchforschung
Publisher: Verlag Hahnsche Buchhandlung
Issue: i40118588
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Létourneau Jocelyn
Abstract: P. Cornell, J. Hamelin, F. Ouellet et M. Trudel, Canada, unité et diversité, Toronto: Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1968.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43056295

Journal Title: Internationale Schulbuchforschung
Publisher: Verlag Moritz Diesterweg GmbH & Co.
Issue: i40118640
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Karlegärd Christer
Abstract: Jörn Rüsen, „Historisches Lernen", Böhlau, Köln 1994, S. 70
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43057053

Journal Title: Internationale Schulbuchforschung
Publisher: Verlag Hahnsche Buchhandlung
Issue: i40118660
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Quillévéré Isabelle
Abstract: François Audigier et al., L'enseignement de l'histoire et de la géographie en troisième et en seconde. Etude comparative et descriptive, Paris, 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43057346

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118861
Date: 6 1, 1988
Author(s): Rossi Fabio
Abstract: ibid., pp. 339 ss.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43061789

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118864
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Comolli Fabrizio
Abstract: Les écrits de Sartre ..., cit., p. 635,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43061881

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118871
Date: 6 1, 1991
Author(s): Ghidini Maria Candida
Abstract: Ibid., p. 130.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43062107

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118901
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Possenti Vittorio
Abstract: H. Jonas, Il principio responsabilità, cit., pp. 227-291
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43062898

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118908
Date: 6 1, 1996
Author(s): Costa Vincenzo
Abstract: Ms. A VI 26/73b.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063032

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118930
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): Borella Sonia
Abstract: Ricoeur, La metafora, p. 393.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063573

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118943
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Averoldi Maria
Abstract: Id., Sur Maurice Blanchot, Fata Morgana, Montpellier 1975, p. 72, trad. it. di F. Fistetti e A. Ponzio, Su Maurice Blanchot, Palomar, Bari 1994, p. 97.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063814

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118943
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): NANCY JEAN-LUC
Abstract: Ph. Lacoue-Labarthe - J.-L. Nancy, La panique politique, «Cahiers Confron- tation», 2, dossier L'état cellulaire, Aubier, Paris 1979.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063815

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118944
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Lucena Jorge Martínez
Abstract: Aristóteles, Política, 1253a10-13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063828

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118945
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): Bosco Domenico
Abstract: M. de Certeau, L'énonciation mystique, «Recherches de science religieuse», (1976), pp. 183-215.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063842

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118948
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Azzariti-Fumaroli Luigi
Abstract: L. Tolstoj, Detstvo (1852), in Id., Sobranie socinenij, Hudozestvennaja literatura, I, Moskva 1960; trad. it. di R. Olkienizkaia-Naldi, Infanzia, Passigli, Firenze 1998, p. 39.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063903

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118949
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Marassi Massimo
Abstract: Mangiagalli, Teoria del fondamento, p. 615.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063924

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118949
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Raynaud Savina
Abstract: G. Spinosa, Il metodo storiografico di M.-D. Chenu medievista e lessicografo, RFNS, 94 (2002), pp. 347-354.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063927

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40119260
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Fumaroli Luigi Azzariti
Abstract: P. Celan, Der Tod (1950), in Id., Die Gedichte aus dem Nachlaβ, Suhrkamp, Frankfurt a. M. 1997; trad. it. di M. Ranchetti e J. Leskien, La morte, in Id., Sotto il tiro di presagi. Poesie inedite 1948-1969, Einaudi, Torino 2001, p. 21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070016

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40119280
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Decock Paul B
Abstract: Bastiaens 1993:8-9
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070285

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40119281
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Botha J
Abstract: In this paper some elements of the reading process of Luke 12:35-48 are analysed according to the theory of Wolfgang Iser. Two problems are stated in the introduction, namely the impossibility of accounting for the reading process exhaustively in one all-encompassing theory, and the difficulty of "applying" Iser's theory, which is proposed as a theory of the reading process and not a method for analysing the reading process of an actual text. After a short exposition of the philosophical background and the main elements of the theory, a description of some elements of the reading process of this particular text is given. The paper concludes with a short reflection on the viability of this theory for a practical reception analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070301

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40119281
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Hartin P J
Abstract: Interpretation has to take into consideration three poles: author, text and interpreter. In the field of literary studies deconstruction has provoked much interest and concern. The scope of this paper is to illustrate this activity of deconstruction unfolding by means of a reading of the parable of the Supervising Servant. This illustration from the Scriptures shows what happens to every text which is read again. It is reinterpreted anew according to new contexts. It is an example of the dissemination of the Word, whereby the Word becomes flesh.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070308

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40119282
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): SMIT J A
Abstract: Maartens (1980)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070314

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40119282
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): SMIT J A
Abstract: Hengel 1974:25ff
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070315

Journal Title: Transformation
Publisher: Paternoster Press
Issue: i40119293
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Pluss Jean Daniel
Abstract: The communication of the gospel is sometimes in an 'insider language' of transcendant realities with which the secular world is unfamiliar. How significant an impediment is this? Consider fairy tales are universally understood. They share many of the same elements and functions as testimonies which are at the heart of pentecostalism. We can use stories and testimonies in our ministries? Thus to communicate with secular people we must be willing to put the stories of our lives on trial. The trans-personal dimension must be communicated, for religious experiences can be powerful. The challenge is to find ways to use stories and metaphors to speak to a secularised world of the major doctrines as expressed in The Foursquare Gospel' without losing any of its power.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070457

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i396847
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): Wolcott Brett
Abstract: Inquiry in the social sciences is based on theoretical assumptions that are not always clearly articulated in research reports. This article surveys some of the theoretical positions that underlie various qualitative research methods and discusses some of the methodological issues raised by those positions. The four themes that serve as anchor points for the discussion are contextualization, an approach to social-scientific observation that takes into account the environment in which the observational event takes place; understanding, an approach to the problem of knowledge and explanation that addresses the range of what can be learned from observation; pluralism, the proposition that not only social settings but the methods for explaining them resist reduction to a single model; and expression, the problem of conveying the results of research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4308864

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i396847
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): MellonAbstract: [3, pp. 273-99]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4308865

Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i40120485
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): Heimerl Daniela
Abstract: Graf York an Hans Stempel am 25. Oktober 1950 und Martin Niemöller an Hans Stempel am 20. Dezember 1950, in: PLKS n° 768.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43098095

Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i40120543
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Hempelmann Heinzpeter
Abstract: Karpp, Kirchengeschichte, aaO. (Anm. 23), 162.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43099470

Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i40120596
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Feil Ernst
Abstract: Carl Schmitt, Tyrannei der Werte, in: Tyrannei der Werte, hg. von Sepp Schelz, Hamburg 1979, 11-43.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43100785

Journal Title: Journal of Linguistic Anthropology
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i40120808
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): Shoaps Robin A.
Abstract: This article addresses how a perceived tension between the spontaneous personal and the shared textual elements of religious language is resolved in the context of Pentecostal services recorded at two Assemblies of God (AG) churches in California and Michigan. In an analysis of pray er and the metapragmatic commentary that surrounds it, I argue that the balance between spontaneously created prayer and invocation of fixed text plays on an opposition that goes beyond ritual or religious language; rather, it is best understood as characterizing two opposing text-building or entextualization strategies. Using evidence from AG prayer, sermons, and songs, I show that the preferred entextualization strategy highlights the situatedness of the text in a particular context and as emanating from a particular speaker. My findings have significance not only for research on religious language, but also for further understandings of entextualization and the discursive means of constructing personhood and affect.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43103994

Journal Title: Journal of Linguistic Anthropology
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i40120870
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Shweder Lauren
Abstract: This article highlights the linguistic dimension of sleight-of-hand magic performance through a situated study of the transmission of a trick from expert to novice magician. Focusing on the context of apprenticeship rather than performance, we distinguish an emphasis on linguistic techniques for producing illusion, skills deeply embedded in the magician's artful practice. Ultimately, we conclude that a magician's talk is performative in that its meaning lies in the effect it has on the visual experience of the audience, who co-constructs the trick.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43104676

Journal Title: Cahiers d'économie politique / Papers in Political Economy
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i40121042
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Rieucau Nicolas
Abstract: G. T. Tanselle (2006, p. 5).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43107739

Journal Title: Cahiers d'économie politique / Papers in Political Economy
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i40121043
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Berthoud Arnaud
Abstract: Que veut-on dire lorsqu'on parle aujourd'hui de valeur de travail ? Une libre réflexion de philosophie économique sur la notion de valeur et sur sa famille - valeur absolue, valeur relative, valeur d'usage, valeur d'échange, évaluation, valorisation, etc. tente d'apporter ici une réponse. Avec, pour exemple privilégié, la doctrine de Marx sur le travail dans le capitalisme et dans la société communiste. What do we mean when we speak about the value of work? This article tries to provide an answer to this question by analysing the notions of value and its different forms: absolute and relative value, use value and exchange value, evaluation and the creation of value. It draws especially on Marx's doctrine of work in capitalism and the communist society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43107756

Journal Title: Cahiers d'économie politique / Papers in Political Economy
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i40121221
Date: 4 1, 2003
Author(s): Favereau Olivier
Abstract: Favereau, Biencourt et Eymard-Duvemay [2002]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43111556

Journal Title: Iranian Studies
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: i401635
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): RumiAbstract: Subtelny, Le monde est un jardin, 152.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4311782

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121488
Date: 2 1, 1991
Author(s): LEIBOVICI MARTINE
Abstract: Ibid., p. 77.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43118996

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121497
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): LÉTOURNEAU JOCELYN
Abstract: Luc Bureau, Entre l'eden et l'utopie: les fondements imaginaires de l'espace québécois, Montréal, Québec/Amérique, 1984.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119121

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121504
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): SANTISO JAVIER
Abstract: Daniel Levine, « Pa- radigm lost. Dependence to democracy », World Politics, 40 (3), avril 1988, p. 393.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119238

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121551
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): GAXIE DANIEL
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119882

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121551
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): GENSBURGER SARAH
Abstract: Maurice Halbwachs, op. cit., p. 113.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119888

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121555
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): JOBARD FABIEN
Abstract: Michel Dobry (Sociologie des crises politiques, op. cit.) et de Michel Crozier (Le phénomène bureaucratique, op. cit.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119939

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121556
Date: 8 1, 2003
Author(s): VION ANTOINE
Abstract: Brian Hocking, Localizing Foreign Policy : Non-Central Government and Multi- layered Diplomacy, New York, Saint-Martin's Press, 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119963

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121569
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): BUTON FRANÇOIS
Abstract: Didier Fassin, « La demande medicale à l'anthropologie », cite, p. 251.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43120202

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121596
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Traini Christophe
Abstract: Olivier Fillieule (dir), Le désengagement militant, Paris, Belin, 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43120715

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121655
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): DÉLOYE YVES
Abstract: d'Alfredo Joignant, « Pour une sociologie cognitive... », art. cité, p. 150.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43121988

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121665
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Corcuff Philippe
Abstract: Ibid., p. 199.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43122361

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121674
Date: 2 1, 2012
Author(s): Martin Denis-Constant
Abstract: D.-C. Martin et le groupe IPI, « Écarts d'identité... », cité.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43122571

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121675
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Farhat Nadim
Abstract: A. R. Zolberg, « The Making of Flemings and Walloons. Belgium : 1830-1914, art. cité, p. 233.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43122616

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121681
Date: 8 1, 2013
Author(s): Bevir Mark
Abstract: C. Shore, Building Europe. The Cultural Politics of European Integration, Abingdon, Routledge, 2000.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43122944

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40123136
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): DE SOUZA SALLES SERGIO
Abstract: Ricœur, Paul—"Paul Ricoeur: a Declaração Universal dos Direitos Humanos—um novo sopro", art. cit., p. 212.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43151548

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40123136
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): YÁÑEZ MIGUEL GRANDE
Abstract: Rodríguez Puerto—Op. cit., p. 102.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43151549

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40123136
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): ARY ANTÓNIO
Abstract: Ricœur, P. —"La conscience et la loi", art. cit., p. 214.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43151557

Journal Title: Paragraph
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Issue: i40123170
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Heathcote Owen
Abstract: This article considers the changing relationship between Balzac and theory from the 1970s onwards when Balzac was a favoured, if disparaged, object of theorization, as in Barthes s S/Z. More recent critics, however, see the multi-layered énunciations of/in his texts as evidence of their ability to theorize their own relationship to history, society, sexuality — and literature. In the same way, moreover, as texts such as Sarrasine and Une passion dans le désert critique their own relation to literature, ostensibly theoretical Balzac texts such as Une théorie de la démarche turn theory into a form of fiction. Whether moving from literature to theory or from theory to literature, Balzac — or 'Balzac'/Balzac — is thus shown to be (at) a nexus of literature, theory and literary theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43151919

Journal Title: Philosophical Topics
Publisher: The University of Arkansas Press
Issue: i40123370
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Keedus Liisi
Abstract: In Arendt's interrogations of political modernity, the concepts of history and politics have an ambiguous relation. On the one hand, she insisted that the performative character of politics as action was bound to its narrative aspect as remembrance. She was also a fervent proponent of integrating the historical sense into political understanding. On the other hand, Arendt characterized the modern historical sensibility from the point of view of politics as a "ghastly absurdity," and asserted that the political thought of our times needed to free itself both "from history" and "from thinking in historical terms." This paper explores the different meanings that Arendt granted to "history" as a (anti) political force and to historical sensibility as the basis for political understanding. It argues that not only were Arendt's rejection of the modern concept of history and its politics of history central for her critique, but that it was one of the key concerns that shaped the articulation of her own theory of action. The paper also examines the problem against the background of the intellectual tradition of Arendt's youth and in particular its uncompromising antihistoricism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43154604

Journal Title: Review of Religious Research
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40124598
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Franzen Aaron B.
Abstract: The Bible is an important text in American history, but research analyzing the social consequences of reading the Bible is very limited. Research focusing on religious practices or religiosity with Bible reading as part of a scale shows a tendency towards conservatism and traditionalism, as do more literalist views of the Bible. In the present study, biblical literalism is treated as a powerful context guiding one's reading. The focus here is a quantitative view of Bible reading, deploying two 'conservative' and two 'liberal' moral/political scales and two competing views for how Bible reading may function. Results indicate that Bible reading is positively related to both of the liberal scales as well as the conservative scales for non-literalists, but not for those with literalist Bible views. The findings begin to show the importance of independent Bible reading, how it may function differently for literalists and non-literalists, and highlights the degree to which literalism and Bible reading are different constructs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43185883

Journal Title: American Sociological Review
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40124720
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): Steidl Christina R.
Abstract: Recent research on collective memory suggests that commemorations of difficult pasts take either a multivocal or a fragmented form. I suggest these forms exist as ideal types for the initial commemoration, but the commemorative field, as a whole, remains dynamic over time, effectively shifting between forms. This study traces the creation, maintenance, and transformation of collective memory of the May 4, 1970 shootings at Kent State from 1970 to 2013 using archival sources, media accounts, and participant observation. In examining the commemorative field at Kent, I theorize the existence of a third commemorative form—the integrated commemorative field, which allows for the expression of divergent narratives and the maintenance of separate commemorative spaces while simultaneously enhancing social solidarity through shared meta-narratives that stress overarching values, like human rights or scientific inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43187504

Journal Title: Anthropological Journal of European Cultures
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40127031
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): GIORDANO CHRISTIAN
Abstract: This article analyses the difficult relation between anthropology and history. The point, therefore, is to show how anthropology conceptualises the past differently from history as a discipline. Beginning with the differences between anthropology and history in terms of the concept of time, the article highlights that while for history time is concrete, objective and exogenous to human beings, for anthropology it is characterised by its being condensed, collectively subjective and endogenous. By analyzing actual examples, the article shows that the anthropologist is not interested in the past per se, but rather in the past as a dimension of the present. Accordingly, actualised, revised and manipulated history as well as the role of the past in the present need to be taken into account. Consequently, history and the past have their own specific efficiency because they are also a form of knowledge and social resource mobilised by single individuals or groups to find their bearings and act accordingly in the present and likewise to plan the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43234561

Journal Title: Anthropological Journal of European Cultures
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40127035
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): GANTNER ESZTER B.
Abstract: The persecution, flight and murder of European Jews in the first half of the twentieth century and the profound social and political transformations that decisively affected European cities in the final decade of the 20th century have radically altered urban 'Jewish landscapes'. New stakeholders and institutions emerged with their own networks, goals and interests, and have constructed, staged and marketed 'Jewish culture' anew. The resultant Jewish spaces are being constituted in an urban space located at the intersection of ethnic representation, collective memory, and drawing on an imagined material culture, which includes architectural, physical and digital spaces (e.g. synagogues, Jewish quarters). This Europe-wide process is closely related to the delicate politics of memory and to discourses on the authenticity of cities. This article analyses how the image of 'Jewishness' plays an increasingly important role in the marketing of historical authenticity that cities and their tourism affiliates are undertaking.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43234607

Journal Title: Anthropological Journal on European Cultures
Publisher: European Centre for Traditional and Regional Cultures (ECTARC)
Issue: i40127040
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Cohen Anthony P.
Abstract: In Britain, as in France, 'mainstream' anthropologists were hesitant to acknowledge studies within their own country as proper subjects for anthropological enquiry. British social anthropology defined itself as the study of 'other cultures' and became entrenched in a tradition in which Otherness was confused with manifest difference. This naivete, elevated into a scientific principle, precluded the recognition of 'self as anything other than a scientific instrument; but also led to the invention of a generalisable Other, and thereby ignored the complexity of variation within the cultures it studied. By the same token, it blinded anthropologists to heterogeneity within their 'own' local cultures as well, and was finally changed only by a series of related paradigm leaps. Our understanding of culture changed from a set of prescriptive influences which integrated society, to a ragged and non-systemic array of interpretive tools which aggregated society. Consequent upon this change, symbols were acknowledged as vehicles of expression and of negotiable meaning rather than as having stipulated and invariant referents. The demise of modernist theories liberated anthropology from its scientific illusions and positivistic pretensions, enabling it to acknowledge the personal and speculative nature of the enterprise. This admission of the subjective, of the anthropologist's self, was necessary in order to see Otherness as inhering in 'person' rather than in an abstraction such as 'culture' and, therefore, to be enabled to recognise diversity within cultures rather than merely between them. This enhanced perception of internal heterogeneity clearly places the Self of the anthropologist at the centre of the stage and has led to the contemporary debates about the nature of ethnographic writing and the status of ethnographic 'authority'. It has also had obvious consequences for anthropological research, including the raising anew of the relationship of individual to society; and the extension of anthropological research into the urban and industrial heartlands of the ' developed' world. These substantive consequences have established incontrovertibly the appropriateness and potency of anthropology in the study of such societies; and have also provided a basis from which to inform the core debates and central concepts of the discipline. These developments are evident in recent studies of kinship, social identity and symbolism. The reflexivity which is an essential ingredient of research on these topics (until recently noted with more eloquence and alacrity in France than in Britain) calls attention to the inevitable, and desirable, intrusion of the Self into anthropological research. It also demands the explicit incorporation of the complex Self-Other opposition in the fomulation of anthropological 'problems' — not as a baring of the post-modernist soul, but as an interpretive resource. An important illustration of the power of this resource may be found in the study of ethnic and local identities which are thereby revealed to be a matter of internal discourse (among Selves, so to speak) as well as of relativistic counter-definition. It is in precisely this way that research in anthropologists' 'parochial' or local milieux will contribute to the maturation of anthropology generally.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43234718

Journal Title: Anthropological Journal of European Cultures
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40127101
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): SPASKOVSKA LJUBICA
Abstract: The article examines the phenomenon of communist/post-socialist nostalgia, with a focus on Slovenia and Poland, through the central issue of identity, memory and the concrete manifestations of nostalgia. The emergence of a somewhat distinct 'Eastern European' identity and the East--West divide in historical and cultural terms is explored throught several historical events of the European project between the World Wars. The revival of the communist brands, commercial products, symbols, music and film is the core of the communist 'renaissance', witnessing mainly the need for encountering the past, the selevtiveness of memory and the right and emotional need to value one's own personal history and past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43235377

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: English Dominicans
Issue: i40127876
Date: 11 1, 1989
Author(s): Grey Mary
Abstract: Rollo May, Love and Will, op. cit., p.286.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43248745

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128002
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Daniels John
Abstract: Milbank, Theology and Social Theory, pp. 315-6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43250303

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128062
Date: 9 1, 2006
Author(s): Lewin David
Abstract: Guenther Anders, 'Endzeit und Zeitende: Gedanken ueber die atomare Situation', translated and quoted by Alfred Nordmann, 'Noumenal Technology', Techne 8:3, Spring (2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251071

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128070
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Hill Robert J.
Abstract: Polanyi, M., The Tacit Dimension, (London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1966), pp 29-52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251198

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128073
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Lawson James
Abstract: Brazilian disciple Herbert de Souza (Betinho), A lista de Ailice (Sao Paulo, 1996).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251247

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128085
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Taylor Charles
Abstract: Roger Lundin, Believing Again (Grand Rapids: Michigan: Eerdmans, 2009).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251452

Journal Title: The Hungarian Historical Review
Publisher: Institute of History, Research Centre for the Humanities, Hungarian Academy of Sciences
Issue: i40128809
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Apor Péter
Abstract: Carlo Ginzburg, History, Rhetoric and Proof (Hanover, NH-London: University Press of New England, 1999), 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43265207

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: English Dominicans
Issue: i40128985
Date: 2 1, 1972
Author(s): Mann Peter
Abstract: Papers from the International Lonergan Congress, 1970.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43267473

Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: Institut d'études Slaves
Issue: i40129177
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): LANDRY TRISTAN
Abstract: Jean-Paul Sartre, Qu 'est-ce que la littérature ?, Paris, 1948, p. 52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43271945

Journal Title: Hispanic Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i40129792
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): Francomano Emily C.
Abstract: "the pilgrim had a special association with money, for the very symbols of his condition were the staff he held in one hand and the purse he carried over one shoulder. His mobility depended in part on the convenient transferability of some of his wealth" (31).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43279322

Journal Title: Philosophy East and West
Publisher: University of Hawai'i Press
Issue: i40130069
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Botz-Bornstein Thorsten
Abstract: Since 1990, two eminent French-speaking sinologists, François Jullien and Jean François Billeter, have been engaged in a debate on the principles of comparative philosophy and sinology. The debate has been developed in several books and articles and attracted the attention of a relatively broad public as well as of a wide range of French intellectuals. The arguments with regard to an older discussion on the difference between philology and philosophy are evaluated here, and conclusions are drawn concerning the present status of comparative philosophy in academia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43285887

Journal Title: Middle East Journal
Publisher: Middle East Institute
Issue: i399456
Date: 7 1, 2001
Author(s): Heradstveit G. Matthew
Abstract: Daniel Heradstveit, "Elite Perceptions of Ethical Problems Facing the Western Oil Industry in Iran," Journal of Iranian Research and Analysis, Vol. 17, No. 2 (2001). Heradstveit 2 17 Journal of Iranian Research and Analysis 2001
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4330418

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Československá Akademie Věd
Issue: i40132067
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): PETŘÍČEK MIROSLAV
Abstract: Derrida 1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43320927

Journal Title: Landscape Journal
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i40132217
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Conan Michel
Abstract: The renewal of a dialog between landscape design and garden history demands a renewal of the questions and methods of garden history. This essay studies how garden reception and garden creation interact. It considers three main issues: first, it explores the domain of cultural expectations framing the engagement with a garden shared by users and creators at a given time—the poetical texture of gardens; second, the role of garden creation in exploiting, expanding or subverting this shared frame of expectations; and third, it proposes an approach—garden pragmatic—to study the broader interactions between garden creation and reception on the one hand, and social and cultural change on the other. The question of intersubjectivity—how do we share our sense and experiences of the world with others, and how do we transform them—is at the root of all the little stories—the fragments of a poetic of gardens—that propose new directions for garden history. Many of these stories have been presented during the last 15 years at symposia at Dumbarton Oaks where the author is presently the director of Garden and Landscape Studies. The general philosophy however had never been presented until the Fall 2004 when he published his "Essais de Poétique des Jardins." They were never made explicit at Dumbarton Oaks where each story only played its part in the theme of the symposium. Yet the whole course of ideas presented here results from these many exchanges with other scholars. This is why many footnotes make explicit references to their works. So, following the lead offered by this text or choosing a personal route, each reader may access many different voices that make garden history at present into a lively resource for pondering about the role of landscape creation in a multicultural world. These fragments of history are written to stimulate the designer's imagination, not to outline the course landscape design should follow.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43323728

Journal Title: Roczniki Filozoficzne / Annales de Philosophie / Annals of Philosophy
Publisher: Towarzystwa Naukowego, Katolickiego Uniwersytetu Lubelskiego
Issue: i40135039
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): BRONK ANDRZEJ
Abstract: Ladrière. [Głos w dyskusji]. W: Nauka, świat i wiara s. 71
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43407897

Journal Title: Roczniki Filozoficzne / Annales de Philosophie / Annals of Philosophy
Publisher: Towarzystwa Naukowego, Katolickiego Uniwersytetu Lubelskiego
Issue: i40135181
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): SWIEŻAWSKI STEFAN
Abstract: A. Momigliano, Contributo alla storia degfi studi classici, Roma 1955, s. 102.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43410604

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia / Aletheia - Associção Científica e Cultural
Issue: i40135186
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): TODT OLIVER
Abstract: Soentgen, Jens - "Stuff: A Phenomenological Definition", ed. cit., pp. 77 ss.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43410690

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia / Aletheia - Associção Científica e Cultural
Issue: i40135186
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): LIND ANDREAS GONÇALVES
Abstract: Hölderlin, F. - Friedrich Hölderlins sämtliche Werke, ed. cit., p. 433
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43410698

Journal Title: Journal of Basic Writing
Publisher: City University of New York
Issue: i40136043
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Tassoni John Paul
Abstract: This essay offers a history of a basic writing course that began at a public ivy campus in the 1970s. Relying on principles of universal design and on insights derived from his school's studio program about ways the institution's selective functions can impact curricular matters, the author describes how the basic writing course was merely retrofitted to an English Department's goals, rather than integrated into its mainstream business. In turn, the author suggests that historical studies such as this can help basic writing teachers excavate and reinvigorate demoaatic reform efforts often backgrounded in light of a school's elite reputation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43444078

Journal Title: Studi Novecenteschi
Publisher: Istituti Editoriali e Poligrafici Internazionali
Issue: i40136381
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): CORTELLESSA ANDREA
Abstract: W. Pedullà, C'è un eretico tra i classici, cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43449890

Journal Title: Studi Novecenteschi
Publisher: Giardini Editori e Stampatori in Pisa
Issue: i40136399
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): DELLA COLETTA CRISTINA
Abstract: L. Hutcheon, op. cit., p. 128.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43450177

Journal Title: Amerikastudien / American Studies
Publisher: Universitätsverlag WINTER GmbH
Issue: i40138215
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Fluck Winfried
Abstract: Fraser and Honneth 29
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43485846

Journal Title: Amerikastudien / American Studies
Publisher: Universitätsverlag WINTER GmbH
Issue: i40138275
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): de Marco Alessandra
Abstract: Burr, and Sherry, 310-311.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43486797

Journal Title: Civilisations
Publisher: Institute de Sociologie
Issue: i40138298
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): TABOIS Stéphanie
Abstract: S. Tabois (2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43487276

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Archaeology / Journal Canadien d'Archéologie
Publisher: Canadian Archeological Association
Issue: i40138301
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Schaepe David M.
Abstract: Archaeology assumes itself as a discipline through a practice of boundary-making that merges the past with the present. It is, in this practice, increasingly critiqued for being ethnocentric and separating power from the communities it claims to represent. In response, archaeology is experiencing a turn toward "community". Examining two community archaeology case studies, we assess whether archaeology can be transformed into a discipline that productively participates in the liveliness and messy connectedness of objects, peoples, histories and cultures— in contrast to a conventionally detached practice of objectifying other peoples' lifeways. In both cases, archaeological and descent communities play direct and central decision-making roles in this traditionally "distanced" discipline. They demonstrate means of re-figuring archaeology as a participatory practice. Community-founded archaeology is thus shown to transform methods commonly supporting institutional reproduction into a radically indigenous, emically structured, set of knowledge practices and outcomes. Archeologie suppose elle-même comme une discipline à travers une pratique de fabrication limite qui fusionne le passé au présent. Il est, dans cette pratique, plus en plus critiqué pour avoir été puissance ethnocentrique et séparation des communautés qu'elle prétend représenter. En réponse, archéologie connaît un tournant vers une « communauté ». Examen de deux études de cas communautaires archéologie, nous déterminer si archéologie peut se transformer en une discipline qui productivement participe à la vivacité et la connectivité désordre des objets, des peuples, des histoires et des cultures—contrairement à une pratique conventionnelle détachée d'objectiver les modes de vie des autres peuples. En cas, archéologiques et descente communautés jouent des rôles décisionnels directes et centrales dans ce traditionnellement « distanciés » discipline. Ils montrer les moyens de retrouver l'archéologie comme une pratique participative. Archéologie communauté fondée est ainsi montré à transformer les méthodes communément soutien institutionnelle reproduction en un jeu radicalement indigène, emically structuré, de connaissances pratiques et les résultats.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43487310

Journal Title: Chinese Literature: Essays, Articles, Reviews (CLEAR)
Publisher: CLEAR
Issue: i40138441
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): HANDLER-SPITZ Rivi
Abstract: "On the Childlike Mind," FS, 93.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43490165

Journal Title: The Cambridge Quarterly
Publisher: Oxford Unversity Press
Issue: i40138537
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Knight Christopher J.
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43492412

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Société de l'Historie du Protestantisme Français
Issue: i40138695
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Fabre Rémi
Abstract: S. Hoffmann, A la recherche de la France, Seuil, 1963.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43495995

Journal Title: Discourse & Society
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40138715
Date: 7 1, 2012
Author(s): Kølvraa Christoffer
Abstract: The 1990s and 2000s saw a memory and remembrance boom at both the national and supra-/transnational level. Crucially, many of these emerging memory frames were not simply about a glorious and heroic past, as in, for example, traditional nationalist narratives. Rather, groups started to narrate their symbolic boundaries in a more inclusive way by admitting past wrongdoings. In this article, we look at a corpus of so-called 'speculative speeches' by leading politicians in the European Union and, against the aforementioned historical background, analyse their representations of Europe's past, present and future. By utilising the discourse-historical approach in critical discourse analysis, narrative theory and elements of Reinhart Koselleck's conceptual history (Begriffsgeschichte), we illustrate how, first, a 'new Europe', based on admitting failure, is narrated. However, second, we also show that such a self-critical narration of a 'bitter past' is, paradoxically, transformed into a self-righteous attitude towards Europe's 'others'.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43496388

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40141126
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Dodier Nicolas
Abstract: B. Glaser, A. Strauss, ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43550677

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40141126
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Smaoui Sélim
Abstract: Christophe Traini (dir.), Émotions... Mobilisations J, Paris, Presses de Sciences Po, 2009.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43550678

Journal Title: Pacific Affairs
Publisher: University of British Columbia
Issue: i40143057
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Sejrup Jens
Abstract: China Times, "Jile Taiwan' xing fengbao, chuban 'Jile Dongjing' fan zhi?" ['Paradise Taiwan' Sex Outrage -Should a 'Paradise Tokyo' Be Published in Response?] 16January 2002, morning ed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43590473

Journal Title: Anabases
Publisher: Université de Toulouse-Le Mirail
Issue: i40143278
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Payen Pascal
Abstract: Hypothèses et formulations empruntées à Michel Foucault, L'Archeologie du savoir, p. 11-12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43595931

Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: Centro de Comunicação e Expressão - CCE / Centro de Filosofia e Ciências Humanas - CFH
Issue: i40143285
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Ramāo Silvia Regina
Abstract: BENJAMIN, 1980, p. 74.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43596179

Journal Title: Anabases
Publisher: Université de Toulouse-Le Mirail
Issue: i40143302
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Payen Pascal
Abstract: Thucydide I, 22, 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43596460

Journal Title: Pallas
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40143853
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): PAYEN Pascal
Abstract: Ibid., XXIV, 2.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43605436

Journal Title: Pallas
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40143874
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): CALBOLI MONTEFUSCO Lucia
Abstract: Innocenti 1994: 357 s.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43605789

Journal Title: Pallas
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40143888
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Roullier Paul-Henri
Abstract: Hadot, 1995, p. 358-359.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43606065

Journal Title: Journal of Sport History
Publisher: The North American Society for Sport History
Issue: i40144300
Date: 4 1, 2005
Author(s): Schultz Jaime
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, Time and Narrative, vol. 1, trans. Kathleen McLaughlin and David Pellauer (Chi- cago: University of Chicago Press, 1984).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43610078

Journal Title: Présence Africaine
Publisher: Présence Africaine Editions
Issue: i40144649
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): GNASSOUNOU Victor
Abstract: Alioune Diop, Discours d'ouverture du Deuxième Congrès des écrivains et artistes noirs, Présence Africaine, n° XXIV-XXV, p. 42-43.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43617171

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia / Aletheia - Associção Científica e Cultural
Issue: i40145210
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): GILBERT PAUL
Abstract: Brague, Rémi — Am moyen du Moyen-Âge: philosophies médiévales en chrétienté, en judaïsme et Islam. Chatou : Éditions de la transparence, 2006.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43630978

Journal Title: Der Staat
Publisher: Duncker & Humblot
Issue: i40145734
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Maschke Günter
Abstract: Zur Kritik an den dortigen Thesen: G. Maschke, Die Carl Schmitt-Diskussion in Spanien: Criticón 87 (1985), S. 41.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43642597

Journal Title: Latin American Research Review
Publisher: Latin American Studies Association
Issue: i40147413
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Rotondo Santiago Alfaro
Abstract: Entrevista a Richard Enriquez y Raúl Cconcha, 8 de julio del 2009, Lima.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43670143

Journal Title: Anabases
Publisher: Université de Toulouse-Le Mirail
Issue: i40148226
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Payen Pascal
Abstract: Les Grecs, les historiens, la démocratie, p. 219-245.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43682760

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Société de l'Historie du Protestantisme Français
Issue: i40148676
Date: 9 1, 2003
Author(s): Encrevé André
Abstract: Foi et Vie, 1938 [en fait le numéro semble paru début 1939], p. 386.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43691712

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Société de l'Historie du Protestantisme Français
Issue: i40148678
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Cottret Bernard
Abstract: Musée, nation, patrimoine, 1789-1815, Paris, Gallimard, 1997, p. 307
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43691763

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Société de l'Historie du Protestantisme Français
Issue: i40148678
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Willaime Jean-Paul
Abstract: « Le protestantisme malade de sa jeunesse », Études Théologiques et Religieuses, tome 76, 2001/2, p. 247-264.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43691773

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Société de l'Historie du Protestantisme Français
Issue: i40148697
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Pervillé Guy
Abstract: « Qui se sentira responsable ? », par R. Goullet Rucy et Jean-Michel Hornus, ibid., 1962, n° 11-12, novembre-décembre, p. 781-784.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43692187

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40148884
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): THIREAU ISABELLE
Abstract: Perry and Seiden (2000).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43694303

Journal Title: Theory and Society
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40148931
Date: 7 1, 2013
Author(s): Goldberg Chad Alan
Abstract: Alexander (2006)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43694782

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: The Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40149791
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): CAHILL P. JOSEPH
Abstract: Ibid., 171.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43709757

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40149956
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): WILLIAMS SAM K.
Abstract: Gal 2:16) or ek pisteõs (lēsou) Christou (Gal 2:16, 3:22).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43717474

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40149968
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): BLOMBERG CRAIG L.
Abstract: ("Nurturing Our Nurse: Literary Schol- ars and Biblical Exegesis," Christianity and Literature 32 [1982] 17-18
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43718221

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150119
Date: 4 1, 2003
Author(s): LAUNDERVILLE DALE
Abstract: Block, "Prophet of the Spirit," 39-41.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43724946

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150136
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): QUARLES CHARLES L.
Abstract: John Dominic Crossan, In Fragments: The Apho- risms of Jesus [San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1983] ix-x
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43726042

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150137
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): BERGMANN CLAUDIA
Abstract: Drawing on Susan Brownmiller, Against Our Will: Men, Women, and Rape (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1975) 31.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43726109

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150145
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): O'CONNOR KATHLEEN M.
Abstract: Richard I. Pervo (Acts: A Commentary [Hermeneia; Minneapolis, Fortress, 2008] 61),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43726684

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150147
Date: 7 1, 2010
Author(s): CHAN MICHAEL J.
Abstract: Ulrich Mauser ("Isaiah 65:17-25," Int 36 [1982] 181-86, here 185-86)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43726825

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150149
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): EARL DOUGLAS S.
Abstract: Moshe Greenberg, "On the Political Use of the Bible in Modern Israel," in Pomegran- ates and Golden Bells: Studies in Biblical, Jewish, and Near Eastern Ritual, Law, and Literature in Honor of Jacob Milgrom (ed. David P. Wright et al.; Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns, 1995) 461-71, esp. 467-70,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43726964

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150151
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): HYLEN SUSAN E.
Abstract: Johns, Lamb Christology, 175.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43727119

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150165
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): CLAASSENS L. JULIANA M.
Abstract: De Lange, "Hermeneutics of Dignity," forthcoming.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43728043

Journal Title: Mitteilungen des Kunsthistorischen Institutes in Florenz
Publisher: Kunsthistorisches Institut in Florenz, Max-Planck-Institut
Issue: i40150746
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Gerbron Cyril
Abstract: Humbert of Romans, "Expositio regulae B. Augustini", in: idem, Opera de vita regulan, ed. by Joachim Joseph Berthier, Rome 1888/89, 1, pp. 248-268.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43738210

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: J.C.B.Mohr (Paul Siebeck)
Issue: i40150854
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Schröer Henning
Abstract: Paul Graf Yorck von Wartenburg in: Briefwechsel zwischen W. Dilthey und P. Graf Yorck von Wartenburg, 1923, 42.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43740067

Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i40150967
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): MOORE ALLAN F.
Abstract: Sentimental Journey (Carlton, 1996).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43741609

Journal Title: Economic and Political Weekly
Publisher: Sameeksha Trust
Issue: i402828
Date: 10 31, 1975
Author(s): Ray Sudhir
Abstract: Seeking to understand the manifest in relation to the implicit and the unstated-the unconscious of the conscious-this paper focuses on the elusiveness of social consciousness in a transitional colonial society with a rich heritage of its own. The issue chosen for examination is that of widow marriage and the period is confined to the last three decades of the nineteenth century. Progressively convulsing the upper caste, mainly middle class, Hindu society, the issue was one that epitomised the interplay of conflicting emotions, values and ideas that characterised men's consciousness about women during this seminal phase of Indian history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4377663

Journal Title: Quaderni storici
Publisher: il Mulino
Issue: i40153284
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Gribaudi Maurizio
Abstract: The article analyses the paths formed by the lives of four workers in nineteenth century France as a way of focusing on the problem of the relationship between individual life experience and the surrounding environment. The extremely rich biographical material contained in the main source used makes it possible to bring out the total identification between these two terms, which are usually seen as separate and as polar opposites. Individuals are profoundly shaped by the way they are embedded in a social milieu. And this milieu teems, beats and changes together with the individual.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43779277

Journal Title: Political Psychology
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services, Inc.
Issue: i40153707
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): Condor Susan
Abstract: Heins, 2007
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43783733

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40156390
Date: 1 1, 2016
Author(s): MARTÍN JAVIER PAMPARACUATRO
Abstract: Maire - op. cit., p. 32.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43816276

Journal Title: Rivista Internazionale di Scienze Sociali
Publisher: Vita e Pensiero
Issue: i40157238
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Mullet Etienne
Abstract: If human beings were empirically shown to be irrational, would this finding destroy the foundations of economic science? We think not because we doubt that this postulate is needed as a foundation of economic science. We examine the laboratory experiments conducted by behavioral economists and experimental psychologists on human judgment and decision-making, using Bayes' Theorem and the Expected Value model We examine a number of issues: Can we base ourselves on experimenters' full rationality for doubting of human rationality? Are rational models anything else than handy tools? Do humans' minds function like rational tools or with rational tools? How an "irrational" human being could create anything "rational"? Should rationality be subordinated to reason? Nature being neither rational nor irrational, is there any point in applying the concept of rationality to one its constituents? If human beings were rational forms of life, would this specie have survived?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43830146

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i218329
Date: 5 1, 1957
Author(s): Johnson Paul
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/438359

Journal Title: Problemas del Desarrollo
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Económicas, Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México
Issue: i40157705
Date: 9 1, 2010
Author(s): Mañán Oscar
Abstract: Boisier, 2002
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43838834

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i218358
Date: 5 1, 1976
Author(s): Ott-MeimbergAbstract: Ott-Meimberg, Kreuzzugsepos oder Staatsroman? pp. 18-23. Ott-Meimberg 18 Kreuzzugsepos oder Staatsroman?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/438628

Journal Title: Caravelle (1988-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40158730
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): CAULA Elsa
Abstract: Certau, Michel «Operadores, en Certau, Michel de La toma de la palabra y otros escritos políticos , Universidad Iberoamericana, A.C. México, 1995, p. 162-178.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43863876

Journal Title: Anuario de Estudios Centroamericanos
Publisher: Universidad de Costa Rica. Instituto de Investigaciones Sociales
Issue: i40159108
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): García Carlos Sandoval
Abstract: Este artículo analiza el conflicto fronterizo entre los gobiernos de Nicaragua y Costa Rica, el cual cobró mayor prominencia a partir de octubre de 2010. En el primer apartado se describen algunos antecedentes del conflicto, el cual ha sido recurrente a lo largo del período republicano. En segundo lugar, se analiza cómo este conflicto se articula con procesos políticos tanto en Nicaragua como en Costa Rica. En tercer lugar, se discute la necesidad de una agenda binacional "desde abajo" que permita trascender los llamados al nacionalismo y al patriotismo. Finalmente, se sistematizan algunas de las repercusiones más importantes de este conflicto. This article analyzes the border conflict between the governments of Nicaragua and Costa Rica that gained greater prominence since October 2010. The first section provides some background to the conflict, which has been recurrent throughout the Republican period. Second, it is analyzed how the current conflict is articulated with political processes both in Nicaragua and Costa Rica. In third place, it is discussed the need for a binational agenda "from below" able to overcome nationalists and patriotic calls. Finally, some of the main repercussions of this conflict are summarized.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43871196

Journal Title: Dialectical Anthropology
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40160152
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Uzeta Jorge
Abstract: ARAN, Agrarian File of Mangas Cuatas Ejido, Atarjea, Guanajuato, Document dated March 5, 1940.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43895093

Journal Title: Dialectical Anthropology
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40160154
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): Medina Rafael Alarcón
Abstract: https://www.youtube.com/watch7vs-CGYPCvnlZg.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43895120

Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: CIEC Escola de Comunicação UFRJ
Issue: i40160611
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): DE LIMA COSTA CLAUDIA
Abstract: CERTEAU, Michel de. Heterologies: Discourses on the Other. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1986.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43903640

Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: Centro de Comunicação e Expressão - CCE Centro de Filosofia e Clências Humanas - CFH Universidade Federal de Santa Catarina - UFSC
Issue: i40160623
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Veiga Ana Maria
Abstract: Poeminho do contra de Mário Quintana, criado em 1 978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43903967

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i40161510
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Bousquet François
Abstract: H.-J. Gagey, «La responsabilité clinique de la théologie» dans Fr. Bousquet -H.-J. Gagey -G. Mêdevielle -J.-L. Souletœ (éds.), La responsabilité des Théologiens. Mélanges offerts à Joseph Doré, Paris, 2002, 705-722.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43922456

Journal Title: Meridiana
Publisher: Viella
Issue: i40162518
Date: 1 1, 2016
Author(s): Audenino Patrizia
Abstract: À. Treves, Le nasate e la politica nell'Italia del Novecento, LED, Milano 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43941752

Journal Title: Études rurales
Publisher: Editions de l'Ecole des Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40163031
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Deffontaines Nicolas
Abstract: Pour expliquer le suicide des agriculteurs, les médias se limitent généralement au seul facteur économique. Une approche comprehensive de cette question révèle d'autres conditions objectives de production de ce qu'on peut appeler la « souffrance sociale ». Le déséquilibre structurel entre l'organisation prescrite et l'organisation réelle du travail génère chez les agriculteurs un sentiment de pénibilité mentale. Tenus de répondre à des impératifs d'autonomie et de réalisation de soi, ces derniers ne disposent pas tous des mêmes ressources sociales pour parvenir à une image positive d'eux-mêmes. Pour se développer, la souffrance suicidaire s'appuie en effet sur la distribution inégale du capital économique, culturel et d'autochtonie. When explaining suicide among farmers, the media tend to focus exclusively on economic factors. This paper argues that adopting a more comprehensive approach to the issue highlights other conditions of production of what might be termed "social suffering". It is suggested that the structural imbalance between the prescribed and actual organization of work causes mental pain among farmers. The paper argues that amid increasing pressure to demonstrate greater autonomy and self-realization, farmers may not have the same social resources for developing a positive self-image. Research shows that an unequal distribution of economic and cultural capital and capital of autochtony leads to increased suicidal thoughts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43948334

Journal Title: Revue de l'histoire des religions
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i40165716
Date: 9 1, 1998
Author(s): BALLABRIGA ALAIN
Abstract: Karl Jaspers, Introduction à la philosophie, traduit de l'allemand (1949) par Jeanne Hersch, Pion, 1951, p. 131-150.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43998718

Journal Title: Rivista di Storia della Filosofia (1984-)
Publisher: Franco Angeli
Issue: i40167014
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Piazza Marco
Abstract: M. Piazza, Introduzione , in Maine de Biran, Osservazioni sulle divisioni orga- niche del cervello , cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44023819

Journal Title: Rivista di Storia della Filosofia (1984-)
Publisher: Franco Angeli
Issue: i40167015
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Rossini Marco
Abstract: U. Eco, Semiotica e filosofia del linguaggio, cit., p. 142
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44023851

Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167348
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): van PEER WILLIE
Abstract: Focusing on the difference between traditional hermeneutics and more scientifically oriented approaches to literature, this essay argues that our understanding of currently debated issues—such as whether a canon should and/or can be abolished—is significantly increased if one formulates nomological theories that can be empirically tested. To stimulate further research of this kind, two "laws" of literary history are proposed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44029890

Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167350
Date: 3 1, 2001
Author(s): DYCK E. F.
Abstract: Using a Freudian metaphor reinterpreted by Jacques Lacan, this essay argues that rhetoric is returning to the humanities. That return manifests itself in partial returns through topoi, truncated returns via the figure, fuller returns in feminist criticism, and in varying degrees of success, but always with the playful seriousness that is rhetoric's trademark.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44029911

Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167365
Date: 3 1, 2014
Author(s): BERRY SARAH L.
Abstract: Nathaniel Hawthorne's stories "The Rejected Blessing" and "Rappaccini's Daughter" dramatize ideological competition among doctors and clergymen from Renaissance Italy to colonial Boston over care of the body. In the context of Hawthorne's life, these stories show his foresighted theorizing of medical hegemony and its dangers to public and individual health.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44030130

Journal Title: Economic and Political Weekly
Publisher: Sameeksha Trust
Issue: i397690
Date: 3 21, 1976
Author(s): WittgensteinAbstract: At the beginning of this decade, newspapers the world over reported the UN general assembly's declaration of the last segment of the 20th century as the International Decade of Natural Disaster Reduction (IDNDR), beginning January 1, 1990. There are, broadly speaking, two categories of disaster - the natural (floods, fires, earthquakes) and the manmade (riots, wars, industrial accidents). Both types result in considerable violence against 'the people', especially in an environment that is impoverished, post-colonial, and served by an entrenched bureaucracy. This paper, which partly addresses the subalternist historiographer's problematic of how 'the moment' of people's suffering is to be captured in the writing of history, explores connections between these seemingly independent classes of calamity - the natural and the denatured. It does so by examining three sorts of disaster narrative - the official, the popular and the academic - each of which interprets an underlying nominal/natural kind divide differently. More specifically, the paper uses the philosophical concepts 'nominal and natural kind' to analyse narrative strategies in women's accounts of disaster so that the beginnings of a 'feminist critique of bureaucracy' might emerge, not merely out of academic theorising, but from within the discourse of those who have survived incredible assaults and yet lived to 'tell the tale'.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4405176

Journal Title: Economic and Political Weekly
Publisher: Sameeksha Trust
Issue: i397821
Date: 8 29, 1994
Author(s): Sollosy Margit
Abstract: This article looks at the short stories of Saadat Hasan Manto in Urdu about the Partition and of Orkeny, a Hungarian Jewish writer about the Holocaust and finds that by adopting a critical distance both Manto and Orkeny were able to evolve narrative strategies which invited the readers' response and stimulated agency. By countering moralising and sentimentality in their narrative strategies they enabled the reader to deal with and go beyond the paralysing effects of such traumatic experiences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4405763

Journal Title: Logique et Analyse
Publisher: Centre National Belge de Recherches de Logique
Issue: i40170534
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): DE PRAETERE Thomas
Abstract: Wittgenstein L., On Certainty, § 142, transi, by D. Paul & G.E.M. Anscombe, Oxford, 1979.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44084387

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'école pratique d'études bibliques
Issue: i40170726
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): Dreyfus F.
Abstract: Sacra Scriptura eodem Spiritu interpretatur quo est condita: In Rom., cap. xii, lect. 2; également: Quodl. 12, art. 17 (ou 16 selon les éd.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44088450

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170759
Date: 10 1, 1987
Author(s): Grelot Pierre
Abstract: The Priority ..., pp. 60-62
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44088880

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'école biblique et archéologique française
Issue: i40170787
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): LaCocque André
Abstract: J. M. Sasson, «The Worship of the Golden Calf», Orient and Occident AOAT 22, 1973, pp. 151-159.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44089239

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'école biblique et archéologique française
Issue: i40170811
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Mies Françoise
Abstract: Jean-Noël Aletti, « Séduction et parole en Proverbes i-ix », p. 144.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44089542

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'école biblique et archéologique française
Issue: i40170811
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Rico Christophe
Abstract: G. Genette, Fiction et diction (« Poétique »), Paris, Éditions du Seuil, 1991, étude n° 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44089546

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170907
Date: 7 1, 2003
Author(s): Murphy-O'Connor Jerome
Abstract: The Gospel according to St John (London: SPCK, 1962) 399.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44090752

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40171007
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Sonek Krzysztof
Abstract: CBQ 73 (2011): 141
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44092093

Journal Title: Policy Sciences
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40172080
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Araral Eduardo
Abstract: The first-generation literature on policy design has made considerable contributions over the last 30 years to our understanding of the process, politics and implications of policy design and instrument choice. This literature, however, has generally treated institutions as a black box and has not developed a coherent set of frameworks, theories and models of how institutions matter to policy design. In this paper, I unpack the black box of institutions using transaction cost and mechanism design to show how regulations can be better designed in developing countries when institutions are weak, unaccountable, corrupted or not credible. Under these conditions, I show that efficient regulatory design has to minimize transaction costs, particularly agency problems, by having incentive compatible (self-enforcing) mechanisms. I conclude with a second-generation research agenda on regulatory design with implications for environmental, food and drug safety, healthcare and financial regulation in developing countries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44113970

Journal Title: Twentieth Century Literature
Publisher: Hofstra University Press
Issue: i218597
Date: 4 1, 1969
Author(s): Ricoeur John G.
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, The Symbolism of Evil, trans. Emerson Buchanan (Boston: Beacon Press, 1969), p. 45. Ricoeur 45 The Symbolism of Evil 1969
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/441187

Journal Title: Human Organization
Publisher: Society for Applied Anthropology
Issue: i40172767
Date: 4 1, 1994
Author(s): BAHR HOWARD M.
Abstract: Disciplinary specialties and boundaries may impede as well as facilitate understanding. Standard scholarly orientations to the study of Navajos and other ethnic populations manifest many biases of ethnocentrism and a general tendency to stereotype. Specific observer-related tendencies to distort are noted, among them tendencies to understate social dynamics and the degree to which Navajos are functioning parts of wider social systems. The literature on Navajos is a product of changing tools in the hands of changing observers applied to changing communities in the context of ongoing change in the wider societies of both observer and observed. It is argued that "multiplying glimpses," or increasing the number and types of observers and the variety of disciplines and paradigms represented, may reduce observer and position biases that distort existing views of Navajo society. An overview of the massive literature on the Navajo leads to the identification of 21 distinct genres. These genres and other Navajo texts may profitably be viewed in the perspective of textual analysis, broadly defined. Issues of meaning and interpretation are considered, including the reality-language-text nexus, construction of texts, text-context patterns, and the interaction of text, situation, and analyst in interpretation. Appropriate use of existing texts is socially responsible "green research" and should not be professionally stigmatized. It substitutes resource-efficient recycling of discarded and underanalyzed texts for the old expensive, obtrusive colonial patterns of work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44126560

Journal Title: Economic and Political Weekly
Publisher: Sameeksha Trust
Issue: i401725
Date: 6 09, 2004
Author(s): Foucault Ranabir
Abstract: Can a historical event, such as Partition, be understood as an action that "resulted" from complex, wide forces of history or also as an event continually brought into being by the play of subject memories? A relationship of complementarity exists between the problems internal to history and the demands and desires of memory, so much so that together they form integral parts of a single operation, the historiographical operation. Yet memory sometimes appears the obverse of history making. Human action, as this article remonstrates, sometimes overcomes the bounds of passivity imposed by memory and this is also what determines history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4418297

Journal Title: Economic and Political Weekly
Publisher: Sameeksha Trust
Issue: i404816
Date: 5 18, 2004
Author(s): Harcourt Dipesh
Abstract: To discuss the practice of memory and its relations to politics, social scientists rely on three kinds of practices - memorialising, memorising and the act of remembering/forgetting. The commemoration of "1857" is unique in that official celebrations of the event have been instituted even as 1857 continues to refigure in myths and endures as a symbol of popular resistance. The articles in this special issue address the seeming contradictions and complexities that "remembering" 1857 involves, and the tension that prevails between different kinds of recall.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4419571

Journal Title: Economic and Political Weekly
Publisher: Sameeksha Trust
Issue: i402158
Date: 6 01, 1959
Author(s): Ward Rudolf C.
Abstract: Our political imaginations and the international arena are preoccupied with the inevitability of a clash of civilisations. While it is true that cultural and religious differences have precipitated violence, we have also witnessed a real dialogue of cultures. If conflicting economic interests and political concerns are taken to mean irreconcilable religious world views, ethnic cleansing and genocide will become the norm. We need a dialogue of culture as a prelude to a dialogue of religions, thus freeing us from the distrust of the Other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4419641

Journal Title: International Review of the Aesthetics and Sociology of Music
Publisher: Department for Music and Musicology of the Croatian Academy of Sciences and Arts, Croatian Musicological Society, Music Academy of the University of Zagreb
Issue: i40177262
Date: 12 1, 2016
Author(s): Yoon Sunny
Abstract: Sacred music has always been a source of controversy throughout history since it is an integral part of the liturgy. Contemporary Christian music (CCM) has reached a pinnacle of controversy as its realm of consumption expands globally and inter-denominationally. This study was inspired by the idea of Ricoeur's phenomenology of religion to examine the contemporary practice of liturgy and sacred music. This brings into discussion the historical controversy and cultural milieu of adopting popular culture into youth ministry. Korean case is important because Korea represents one of the strongest Christian populations in the world and at the same time challenges - a drop in the number of young members and a huge generational gap in its church congregations. In order to scrutinize the concrete process of youth culture in the Christian community, an empirical study of youth ministry in seven mega churches in Seoul in South Korean was conducted as a case study. Sakralna glazba oduvijek je tijekom povijesti bila izvor kontroverzi jer predstavlja integrálni dio liturgije, a povijest glazbe je iz nje izrasla. Suvremena kršèanska glazba dostigla je vrhunac kontroverzije kad se njezino potrošaèko podruèje proširilo globalno i medukonfesionalno. Ovaj je članak nastao na temelju Ricoeurove fenomenologije religije i nastoji ispitati suvremenu praksu u liturgiji i sakralnoj glazbi u svjetlu nasljeda povijesne kontroverze i kultúrne sredine u prihvaćanju populárne kultúre u mladenačkoj službi božjoj. Teologija glazbe, o kojoj su raspravljali u 16. stoljeèu Luther, Zwingli i Calvin, osobito je korisna za konzultiranje pri suvremenom prilagodavanju na populárnu kulturu u crkvi. Štoviše, humanizam usaden u liturgijsku reformaciju u razdoblju renesanse otvára filozofijsko pitanje čovjekova identiteta pred licem božanskoga, o èemu se raspravljalo tijekom moderne i postmoderne povijesti sve do danas. Kako bi se pažljivo ispitao konkrétni proces mladenačke kulture u kršćanskoj zajednici, provedeno je kao studija slučaja empirijsko istraživanje mladenačke službe božje u mega crkvama Južne Koreje. Korejsko je sluèaj važan jer Koreja predstavlja jednu od najjaèih kršèanskih populacija u svijetu, dok je s druge strane izložena izazovima kao što je primjerice pad broja mladih vjernika i ogromni generacijski jaz u njezinim crkvenim kongregacijama. Razmatranje mladenačkih kongregacija u sedam mega crkava u Seulu i tekstuaina analiza mladenačke službe božje s težištem na glazbu pruža informacije kóje povezuju filozofske rasprave o teologiji glazbe s pitanjem identiteta uključenog u hermeneutiku glazbene prakse u crkvama. Semiotièki prístup glazbenoj analizi prihvaèen je kao korisno sredstvo za povezivanje ovih empirijskih podataka s njihovim filozofijskim interpretacijama i za ispitivanje glazbene štruktúre i narativne štruktúre tekstova.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44234974

Journal Title: Revue des Études Grecques
Publisher: SOCIÉTÉ D'ÉDITION « LES BELLES LETTRES »
Issue: i40178289
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): PAYEN Pascal
Abstract: N. Wachtel, La vision des vaincus. Les Indiens du Pérou devant la Conquête espagnole (1530-1570), Paris, Gallimard, 1971.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44254001

Journal Title: Études/Inuit/Studies
Publisher: Association Inuksiutiit Katimajiit inc.
Issue: i40178329
Date: 1 1, 2016
Author(s): Møller Helle
Abstract: ibid.: 38-39
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44254675

Journal Title: Revue des Études Grecques
Publisher: L'Association pour l'encouragement des études Grecques
Issue: i40178617
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): CHIRON Pierre
Abstract: I. Rutherford, op. cit., p. 20.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44260526

Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i40180880
Date: 8 1, 2017
Author(s): Madariaga Laura Ortiz
Abstract: Gaceta Oficial del Distrito Federal, Programa Parcial de Desarrollo Urbano de la Zona de Santa Fe, 4 de mayo de 2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44321363

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: Pontificia Universitas Gregoriana
Issue: i40180926
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Pego Puigbó Armando
Abstract: H.U. von Balthasar, Gloria, V, (cf. nt. 76), 361.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44322281

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40181937
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): BOVON FRANÇOIS
Abstract: F. W. Horn, Glaube und Handeln in der Theologie des Lukas (Göt- tinger Theologische Arbeiten, 26), Göttingen, Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1983.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44352517

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40181958
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): Mottu Henry
Abstract: Op. cit., p. 507-508.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44353352

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40181997
Date: 1 1, 1963
Author(s): Widmer Gabriel
Abstract: Journal, 1850, X, 3, A 11, trad. Tisseau, Prières, Bazoges-en-Pareds, 1937. p. 24.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44354813

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182024
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Mottu Henry
Abstract: Pierre Couprie, in: Cahiers de l'Association des Pasteurs de France, N° 15, novembre 1984, p. 7.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44355719

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40182058
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): BERTHOUZOZ ROGER
Abstract: Autrement qu'être ou au-delà de l'essence, La Haye 1974, surtout 10-13; 167-218.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44356102

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182071
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Marguerat Daniel
Abstract: Avec Lübbe (ouvr. cit. note 32, 73-77),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44356584

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182096
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): BONHÔTE FRANÇOISE
Abstract: Op. cit., p. 258.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357469

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182104
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Jacques Robert
Abstract: T. Winograd, F. Flores, L' intelligence artificielle en question, Paris, P. U. F, 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357878

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182105
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Römer Thomas
Abstract: J. Moltmann, Der gekreuzigte Gott, München, C. Kaiser, 1972; traduction française: Le Dieu crucifié : la croix du Christ, fondement et critique de la théologie chrétienne, Paris, Cerf, 1978 (2 éd.), p. 13-14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357942

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182116
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Graesslé Isabelle
Abstract: Debray appelle facétieusement «l'effet jogging du progrès technique» in Transmettre, Paris, Odile Jacob, 1997, p. 93 sq.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358423

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182120
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: The Principles of Morals and Legislation (1781), New York, Prometheus Books, 1988, p. 23.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358600

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182126
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Schmid Muriel
Abstract: T. Moore, Dark Eros. The Imagination of Sadism, Woodstock, Spring Publi- cations, (1994) 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358902

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182129
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Charrière Nicolas
Abstract: J. Quinn, «L'Église dans le monde. L'exercice de la papauté.», Documentation catholique 93 (1996), p. 930-943.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359019

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182142
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Bühler Pierre
Abstract: S. Germain, «Lecture kaléidoscopique de la Bible», Bulletin du Centre protestant d'études, Genève, 1998/1, p. 17-21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359466

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182161
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Clavien Christine
Abstract: H. Spencer, The Data of Ethics, London, Williams and Norgate, 1879, Chap. II, § 7; Accessible en ligne : http://fair-use.org/ herbert-spencer/the-data-of-ethics
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359998

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182163
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: Paris, Centurion, 1983 (Grundkurs des Glaubens, Fribourg-en-Brisgau, Herder, 1976).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360090

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182163
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Pierron Jean-Philippe
Abstract: Paris, Stock, 2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360091

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182171
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Bühler Pierre
Abstract: G. Ebeling, «Theologie. I. Begriffsgeschichtlich», in : Die Religion in Geschichte und Gegenwart, vol. VI, Tübingen, Mohr, 1962³, col. 754-769, surtout 754-758.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360321

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182180
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: Ibid., p. 192.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360579

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182183
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Leuenberger Moritz
Abstract: P. Ricœur, «Avant la loi morale: l'éthique», Encyclopaedia Universalis. Symposium. Les enjeux, Paris, 1985, p. 42-45.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360663

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182185
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Romele Alberto
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360704

Journal Title: Journal of Ritual Studies
Publisher: Department of Religious Studies, University of Pittsburgh
Issue: i40182541
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Laughlin Charles D.
Abstract: Masking is ubiquitous to the culture areas of the world and is a symbolic activity inextricably associated cross-culturally with cosmological drama and shamanic ritual. Our question is, "Masks work how?" In Part 1, we place masks within their physical, cultural and cosmological context so as to view the activity of masking as part of a wider symbolic process. Masks are seen to be transformations of face. In Part 2, the work of masking is realized as a transformation of experience, and is related to a general cycle of meaning in culture whereby cosmological beliefs give rise to direct experience, and experience verifies and vivifies cosmology. And in Part 3 the "how" of masking is explained using a biogenetic structural perspective which traces the possible transformations of brain that may occur within the wearer and audience and that may mediate a variety of mask-related experiences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44368364

Journal Title: L'Espace géographique
Publisher: BELIN-RECLUS
Issue: i40183360
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Scheibling Jacques
Abstract: La France, permanences et mutations. Paris : Hachette.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44381113

Journal Title: Clio
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40183934
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): LANGUE Frédérique
Abstract: Quintero 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44390688

Journal Title: Journal of Ritual Studies
Publisher: Department of Religious Studies, University of Pittsburgh
Issue: i40184391
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Flake Kathleen
Abstract: The manner in which the LDS Church administers its temple rite constitutes a strategic use of the conventions of an oral tradition in a modern, literate society. Three effects of this strategy are considered. First, refusing to make a text of the rite available and insisting that its specific content not be revealed or otherwise subjected to discursive thought sustains the rite's canonical authority as immutable truth, notwithstanding its periodic mutation. Secondly, the conventions of oral tradition structure the relationships created by the ritual and constitute a principal means by which the Church's historic separatism is maintained. Finally, these conventions when applied to the temple rite maximize ritual's capacity to adapt the canon to the needs of successive generations of the faithful while minimizing skepticism and schism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44398638

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184898
Date: 4 1, 1968
Author(s): Salman D. H.
Abstract: W. J. Devlin, Psychodynamics of Personality Development. Staten Island (N.Y.), Alba House, 1965 ; 15×21,5, 324 pp., $ 4.95.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44406521

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184901
Date: 4 1, 1970
Author(s): Geffré Claude
Abstract: Rm 8, 18-25
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44406610

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184903
Date: 10 1, 1970
Author(s): Colette Jacques
Abstract: supra, note 26 et p. 674-675.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44406646

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184904
Date: 4 1, 1971
Author(s): Jacquemont P.
Abstract: J.-P. Jossua, Échange sur la vie religieuse, dans Christus 16 (1969) n° 62, p. 255.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44406674

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184911
Date: 1 1, 1973
Author(s): Coutagne P.
Abstract: Rev. Sc. ph. th. 54 (1970) 701-703.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44406891

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184920
Date: 10 1, 1976
Author(s): Colette Jacques
Abstract: Emmanuel Lévinas, « Humanisme et An-archie », dans Rev. intern. Phil., n 85-86 (1968) 323-337.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407032

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184930
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): Gisel Pierre
Abstract: ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407230

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184934
Date: 10 1, 1980
Author(s): Kühn Rolf
Abstract: Parole et Symbole : Le Symbole, éd. par J. Ménard, Strasbourg 1975, p. 142-161.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407310

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184968
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Lichnerowicz André
Abstract: Les mathématiques, auxquelles on peut joindre la logique, et depuis 1960 une large part de l'informatique théorique, fournissent un témoignage sur une part essentielle du fonctionnement de l'esprit humain. Loin de fournir seulement des outils extérieurs, elles se sont faites mode de pensée nécessaire pour appréhender la réalité physique. Elles nous ont appris que ce que nous nommons raison, démarche rationnelle, est en réalité laborieusement construit. Un bref survol de l'histoire des mathématiques, anciennes, puis surtout depuis le XIXe s., montre en quel sens le concept ancien de « vérité scientifique » s'en trouve désormais modifié. Mathematics, to which one may add logic and, since 1960, a large section of theoretical computer technique, all furnish evidence concerning an essential part of the working of the human mind. Far from providing only external tools, they have evolved as a necessary mode of thought for the understanding of physical reality. They have taught us that what we call reason, or rational deduction, is in fact something we have ourselves laboriously constructed. A brief survey of the history of mathematics, ancient and modern but especially from and after the 19th century, shows ways in which the old concept of a 'scientific truth' must henceforth be modified.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407910

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184974
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: Franz Prammer, Die philosophische Hermeneutik Paul Fticœurs in ihrer Bedeutung für eine theologische Sprachtheorie. Innsbruck-Wien, Tyrolia (coli. Inns- brucker Theologische Studien», 22), 1988; 15 X 22,5, 237 p.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408029

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184981
Date: 4 1, 1992
Author(s): Hebert Geneviève
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Les métamorphoses de la raison herméneutique, sous la direction de Jean Greisch et Richard Kearney. Actes du colloque de Cerisy-la-Salle 1 -11 août 1988. Paris, Éditions du Cerf (coll. «Passages») 1991 ; 14,5 X 23,5, 413 p., 175 F.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408132

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184981
Date: 4 1, 1992
Author(s): Jossua Jean-Pierre
Abstract: Jean Grosjean, La lueur des jours. Paris, Gallimard, 1991 ; 14 x 20, 132 p., 68 F.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408133

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184986
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Jacques Francis
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Lectures 2, Paris, Seuil, 1992.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408223

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184997
Date: 7 1, 1996
Author(s): Gy Pierre-Marie
Abstract: Sœur Paula Picard o.s.b., Dictionnaire des symboles liturgiques. Le Léopard d'Or, 1995; 14 × 22, 288 p.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408394

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184999
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Mies Françoise
Abstract: Paul' Ricœur, Le Conflit des interprétations, p. 34.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408419

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185003
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Rousse-Lacordaire Jérôme
Abstract: op. cit., p. 266.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408493

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185004
Date: 4 1, 1998
Author(s): Jossua Jean-Pierre
Abstract: Poésie-Gallimard de La Vie er- rante, suivie de Remarques sur le dessin, en 1997 ; 11 × 17,5, 232 p., cat. 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408506

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185011
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): Côté Antoine
Abstract: supra note 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408613

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185016
Date: 7 1, 2001
Author(s): Gy Pierre-Marie
Abstract: L. Bianchi, « Vocabulaire et syntaxe dans les oraisons du missel romain », 163-214.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408692

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185019
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): Colette Jacques
Abstract: O.C., XV, p. 275, citation de Genèse 32, 31-32.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408722

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185019
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): Housset Emmanuel
Abstract: Étant donné, Paris, PUF, 1997, p. 302.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408723

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185026
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): Jossua Jean-Pierre
Abstract: Le Chambon sur Lignon, Cheyne, 2003; 20,5 x 13,5, 74 p., 13,50 €.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408828

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185029
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Guibal Francis
Abstract: E. Jüngel, Dieu, mys- tère du monde, Cerf, p. 284
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408862

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185029
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Labbé Yves
Abstract: Jean-Paul II, Fides el Ratio (1998) : § 67, parmi d'autres.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408864

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185029
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Teboul Margaret
Abstract: La Haye, Martinus Nijhoff, 1961.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408865

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185032
Date: 9 1, 2006
Author(s): Jossua Jean-Pierre
Abstract: Philippe Jaccottet, Remar - ques sur Palézieux. Cognac, Fata Morgana, 2005; 22,5 × 14,5, 64 p., 11,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408918

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185038
Date: 10 1, 1971
Author(s): Tardieu Michel
Abstract: Alger en 1968 (2 vol., 516 p.), la thèse de F. Décret a été publiée par les Études august, en 1970 sous le titre: Aspects du manichéisme dans l'Afrique romaine: les controverses de Fortunatus, Faustus et Felix avec saint Augustin (16×25, 367 p.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44409104

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185043
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): Coutagne Paul
Abstract: Rev. Sc. ph. th. 54, 1970, p. 707
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44409216

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185058
Date: 1 1, 1970
Author(s): Jossua Jean-Pierre
Abstract: Foi Vivante n° 30 (1967) « Bonheur ou salut ».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44409590

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185073
Date: 4 1, 1981
Author(s): Laurentin René
Abstract: Ross Mackenzie, « Mariology as an Ecumenical Problem », dans Marian Studies, 26 (1975) 230-231.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44409906

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185087
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Rousse-Lacordaire Jérôme
Abstract: Théophile Bra, L'Évangile rouge. Texte établi, annoté et présenté par Jacques de Caso. Avec la collab. de André Bigotte. Postface de Frank Paul Bowman. Paris, Gallimard (coll. «Art et artistes»), 2000; 16 x 22 cm., 319 p., 155 F., ISBN 2-07- 075908-3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410154

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185091
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Falque Emmanuel
Abstract: SC n° 431, p. 301.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410219

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185091
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Harada Masaki
Abstract: G.-G. Granger, Sciences et réalité, Paris, Éditions Odile Jacob, 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410220

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185094
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): Dubarle A.-M.
Abstract: K. Rahner. Zum theologischen Begriff der Konkupiszenz (1941), repris dans Schriften zur Theologie, I, 1954, pp. 377-414 ;
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410271

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185102
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Cochinaux Philippe
Abstract: P. Ricœur supra.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410440

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185191
Date: 10 1, 1960
Author(s): Pohier J. M.
Abstract: J. Vinchon, La magie du dessin. Du griffonnage automatique au dessin théra- peutique. Paris, Desclée de Brouwer, 1959 ; 15×23, 182 pp., 15 NF.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44411791

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185260
Date: 1 1, 1953
Author(s): Léonard A.
Abstract: Theodicee en Godsdienslphilosophie, Tijdschrifl voor Philosophie, 1952, n. 1, p. 104.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44412826

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185265
Date: 4 1, 1956
Author(s): de Contenson P.-M.
Abstract: J. Zirnheld, Cinquante années de syndicalisme chrétien. Paris, 1937.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44412963

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS - Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i40185962
Date: 1 1, 2017
Author(s): Centemeri Laura
Abstract: Jaspers 2011, 289
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44425364

Journal Title: Educational Technology
Publisher: Educational Technology Publications, Inc.
Issue: i40186211
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Spackman Jonathan S.
Abstract: Clark (2011) recently reviewed literature on cognitive phenomena such as automaticity, non-conscious processing, and the "illusion of conscious will," concluding that most learning theories and instructional design models are informed by faulty assumptions regarding psychological functioning—namely, that most cognitive activity is conscious and volitional. Clark offered a number of recommendations for educational technology research and design based on the view that cognitive activity is mostly automated, unconscious, and determined by psychological variables outside of personal control. This response presents an alternative perspective and accompanying recommendations distinct from those offered by Clark. It primarily argues that evidence pertaining to automaticity and related phenomena may be reinterpreted to fit within a view of agency that emphasizes meaning, purpose, tacit knowledge, and narrative structure; and that this agentic view leads to a number of potentially fruitful avenues for theorizing and research in educational technology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44430071

Journal Title: Comparative Studies in Society and History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i405056
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Woolard Patrick
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur (1988)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4497713

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i405284
Date: 10 1, 2003
Author(s): On-Cho Ng Sheldon
Abstract: On-Cho Ng, "The Epochal Concept of 'Early Modernity' and the Intellectual History of Late Imperial China," Journal of World History 14:1 (2003), 37-61. On-Cho Ng 1 37 14 Journal of World History 2003
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4502264

Journal Title: Transactions of the American Philological Association (1974-)
Publisher: The Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i406101
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): WiedemannAbstract: Davidson
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4543295

Journal Title: Central European History
Publisher: Emory University
Issue: i412352
Date: 6 1, 1970
Author(s): Erhard Anthony J.
Abstract: Lessing, "Über eine jetzige Aufgabe," 299–300.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4546143

Journal Title: Central European History
Publisher: Humanities Press, Inc.
Issue: i412997
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Berlant Geoff
Abstract: Lauren Berlant, The Queen of America Goes to Washington City: Essays on Sex and Citizenship (Durham, 1997), esp. "Introduction: The Intimate Public Sphere," 1-24 Berlant Introduction: The Intimate Public Sphere 1 The Queen of America Goes to Washington City: Essays on Sex and Citizenship 1997
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4546795

Journal Title: Central European History
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i412660
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Suter Andreas
Abstract: Andreas Suter and Manfred Hettling, eds., Struktur und Ereignis, Special Issue of Geschichte und Gesellschaft (Gottingen, 2001) Suter Struktur und Ereignis, Special Issue of Geschichte und Gesellschaft 2001
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4547098

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219655
Date: 9 1, 1959
Author(s): Brown Marcel
Abstract: Mes- nard, VII, 51, n. 1 51
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/460618

Journal Title: Research in African Literatures
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i412005
Date: 7 1, 2000
Author(s): Woeber Stefan
Abstract: This article looks at the beginnings of anti-apartheid/anticolonial literary cultures in Johannesburg and Maputo (then Lourenqo Marques) after the Second World War. It pays specific attention to the ways in which they attempted to harness aesthetics of "newness." By focusing on the influential journals Drum (1951-) and Itinerário (1941-1955), I argue that both journals tapped into transnational intellectual currents such as Harlem Renaissance writing, but that the discrete discursive networks of English and Portuguese contributed to a differentiation of their aesthetic approaches. Itinerdrio acted out an avantgarde-like resistance to bourgeois/colonial culture. Drum was market-driven and achieved in its early phase a compromise between a racially circumscribed mass-cultural appeal and the literate ideals of mission-educated South African blacks. These differences can then be factored into an analysis of persistent differences between the literatures of South Africa and Mozambique.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4618384

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i413107
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): NeutresAbstract: Julien Neutres, «Le cinéma fait-il l'histoire? Le cas de La Dolce Vita», Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire, 83, juillet- septembre 2004, p. 53-63. Neutres juillet 53 83 Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire 2004
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4619191

Journal Title: Annals of the Association of American Geographers
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i413081
Date: 3 1, 1992
Author(s): Zelinsky Jonathan M.
Abstract: Concepts of place, narrative, tradition, and identity are employed in a conservative reading of the Texas A&M Bonfire. Texas A&M embodied regional narratives of a dual Southern commitment to economic and technological development and conservation of traditional cultural. Institutionalized at Texas A&M in the late nineteenth century, these narratives made a paradoxical place. Bonfire expressed and obscured this paradox. In line with the narrative of tradition, Texas A&M was an all-male military school until 1965. The students were uniform, isolated, and regimented. This social structure engendered intense feelings of loyalty and community. These social emotions were further aroused at events like yell practice, and projected onto Bonfire. After the Second World War the commitment of university administrators to economic and technological progress increasingly threatened the narrative of tradition and the cultivation of manliness. Student veneration of Bonfire intensified. After 1965 mandatory military drill was discontinued, women were enrolled, and the student body was enlarged. Social pluralism fragmented the meaning of Bonfire; conflict and disorderly behavior ensued. By the 1990s the university had partly rationalized Bonfire as a corporate symbol; however, this trend was tragically terminated in 1999 when the cumulative errors of the oral tradition caused Bonfire to collapse, killing twelve students.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4620244

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219755
Date: 5 1, 1972
Author(s): Toulmin Paul B.
Abstract: The debate about validity in interpretation has pitted monism against pluralism. Some theorists insist that any literary work has a single, determinate meaning, and others argue that there are no limits to the readings a text allows. Neither view adequately describes the field of conflicting interpretations. Critics can and do have legitimate disagreements about literary works; yet we can also say that some readings are wrong, not simply different. The hermeneutic field is divided among conflicting systems of interpretation, each based on different presuppositions that decide what its procedures will disclose and what they will disguise. But several tests for validity-inclusiveness, efficacy, and intersubjectivity-act as constraints on reading and regulate claims to legitimacy. While these tests have limitations that prevent them from resolving all hermeneutic disagreements, literary criticism is nevertheless a rational, disciplined enterprise-though an inherently pluralistic one.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/462275

Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i413016
Date: 12 1, 1999
Author(s): Cyprus News Agency Olga
Abstract: This article is an ethnographic exploration of the process through which citizens come to conceptualize their identities as political subjects in rapidly changing contexts. The focus of the article is the lifting, in 2003, of a ban on crossing between the northern and southern parts of the island of Cyprus, which had been instituted in 1974. The article examines how this new political change affected state rhetoric, and concentrates on the reactions of Greek-Cypriot citizens to this shift. These data are related to the wider discussion on the political theory of subjectivity and the concept of 'event', where, it is argued, anthropology has a significant contribution to make. / Le présent article est une exploration ethnographique des processus par lequel les citoyens en viennent à conceptualiser leurs identités comme sujets politiques dans des contextes de changements rapides. Il est centré sur l'abolition, en 2003, de l'interdiction de passage imposée en 1974 entre les parties Nord et Sud de L'île de Chypre. L'auteur examine la manière dont ce nouveau changement politique a affecté la rhétorique étatique, et se concentre sur les réactions des Chypriotes Grecs à cette évolution. Ces données sont replacées dans un cadre de discussion plus large sur la théorie politique de la subjectivité et le concept « d'événement », auquel l'anthropologie peut, selon l'auteur, apporter une contribution importante.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4623074

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219784
Date: 3 1, 1957
Author(s): Woollcombe Regina M.
Abstract: The Hebrew Bible depicts interpretation as a continual process of losing and finding, of forgetting and remembering. Texts are lost and found, and in the Joseph story (Gen. 37-50), Joseph himself is abandoned and recovered, with all memory of him repressed until it is dramatically recalled. His story demonstrates that repression is the condition of interpretation, and that interpretation-not resurrection-holds forth the promise of a future life. Nonetheless, the repeated losses that punctuate the Joseph narrative have inspired the opposite conclusion: that Joseph is a type of Jesus, that his descents and ascents prefigure the final one. Typology, a mode of biblical interpretation that prevailed during the early church, has enjoyed a recent revival in the context of literary studies; but I argue that the typological language of "fulfillment," of shadows and truth, is alien to Hebraic-and postmodern-understandings of textuality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/462428

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219783
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): Webber John S.
Abstract: Paradise Lost traces evil through three inceptions-Satanic, Adamic, and historical. Each origin seems to envision a different etiology: Satanic evil springs exclusively from the self in an instant of radical "Pelagian" freedom. Adamic evil emerges from the ambiguous interplay between self and seductive environment. Historical evil contaminates the whole race by means of necessary "Augustinian" inheritance. Ricoeur's analysis of the "Adamic Myth" and original sin clarifies etiological traditions Milton assimilates from Christian symbol, myth, and dogma. Through Ricoeur, we can identify the contrasting modalities of evil (inherited and imitative, physical and moral, ontological and existential, necessary and free, communal and individual) fused in Paradise Lost. Ricoeur's work reveals Milton's text to be a subtly inclusive etiological myth, one whose complex genesis of evil recovers Scripture's fullness of meaning in a new mythopoesis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/462461

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219840
Date: 10 1, 1976
Author(s): Williams Wai Chee
Abstract: Does a literary text remain the same object across time? This essay answers no and bases a defense of literature on that answer. Temporal extension, a phenomenon neglected in contemporary literary studies, makes some meanings unrecoverable and others newly possible. A text endures as a nonintegral survivor, an echo of what it was and of what it might become, its resonance changing with shifts in interpretive contexts. Since this resonance cannot be addressed by synchronic historicism, I propose an alternative, diachronic historicism, inspired especially by scientific theories on background noise, by Einstein's account of the relativity of simultaneity, and by critiques of the visual bias in Western epistemology. I try to theorize the text as a temporal continuum, thick with receding and incipient nuances, exercising the ears of readers in divergent ways and yielding its words to contrary claims. Literature thus encourages a semantic democracy that honors disagreement as a crucial fact of civil society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/463483

Journal Title: New Literary History
Publisher: University of Virginia
Issue: i220193
Date: 10 1, 1969
Author(s): Janson F. E.
Abstract: Reproduced as Fig. 680 in H. W. Janson's History of Art (New York, 1969), p. 452. Janson 452 History of Art 1969
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/468342

Journal Title: Hispanic Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania
Issue: i220412
Date: 7 1, 1961
Author(s): Aranguren Thomas
Abstract: Aranguren, ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/471580

Journal Title: Hispanic Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania
Issue: i220459
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Díaz Thomas
Abstract: Janet W. Díaz y Ricardo Landeira, "'El tajo' de Francisco Ayala: Un caso de conciencia," TAH, Nov.-Dic. (1978) Díaz Nov. TAH 1978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/472309

Journal Title: Hispanic Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania
Issue: i220513
Date: 7 1, 1961
Author(s): Valera Jesús
Abstract: Shaw, Romance 354 Shaw 354 Romance
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/474615

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: New German Critique
Issue: i221182
Date: 7 1, 1975
Author(s): Riegel Trent
Abstract: Klaus Riegel, "Toward a Dialectical Theory of Development" in Human Development, Vol. 18 (1975) Riegel 18 Human Development 1975
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488026

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: New German Critique
Issue: i221189
Date: 10 1, 1980
Author(s): Marks Andreas
Abstract: AliceJardine cited in Footnote 56 and heressay "Gynesis," diacritics, 12:2 (Summer 1982), 54-65 10.2307/464680 54
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488352

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: New German Critique
Issue: i221189
Date: 10 1, 1971
Author(s): Rorty Seyla
Abstract: Chicago School (Stanley Tigerman, Frederick Read, Peter Pran, Stuart Cohen, Thomas Beeby, Anders Nerheim) exhibited at "Die Revision der Moderne," Deutsches Architekturmuseum, Frankfurt, Summer 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488356

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i221214
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): Freud Joel
Abstract: Freud, "Instincts and their Vicissitudes," Complete Works vol. 14, 121-22. Freud Instincts and their Vicissitudes 121 14 Complete Works
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488385

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i221220
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Hall Manuchehr
Abstract: Stuart Hall, "The Question of Cultural Identity." Hall The Question of Cultural Identity
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488462

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i221233
Date: 1 1, 1967
Author(s): Hoffmann Andreas
Abstract: E.T.A. Hoffmann, "Der Sandmann," Werke 2 (Frankfurt/Main: Insel, 1967) 38. Hoffmann Der Sandmann 38 2 Werke 1967
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488598

Journal Title: Geografiska Annaler. Series B, Human Geography
Publisher: Swedish Society for Anthropology and Geography
Issue: i221394
Date: 1 1, 1966
Author(s): Wright Anne
Abstract: On Mount Helicon dwelt the nine Muses, each presiding over a special art: Clio (history), Melpomene (tragedy), Calliope (epic poetry) Erato (lyric poetry), Thalia (comedy and pastoral poetry), Euterpe (music), Polhymnia (rhetoric and mime), Terpsichore (dance and choral singing), and Urania (astronomy). It was told that the beautiful Narcissus, in his sixteeneth year, first saw his reflection on one of the many fountains of Helicon. He did not listen to the Muses; rather he fell in love with his own reflection and was transformed into a flower.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/490662

Journal Title: The History Teacher
Publisher: Society for History Education
Issue: i221540
Date: 5 1, 1984
Author(s): Canary Harry
Abstract: February 1984 issue of AHA Perspectives February AHA Perspectives 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/493382

Journal Title: The History Teacher
Publisher: Society for History Education
Issue: i221566
Date: 11 1, 1991
Author(s): Egan John E.
Abstract: Los Angeles Times, Feb. 20, 1991, p. E6 Feb. 20 6 Los Angeles Times 1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/494084

Journal Title: Chinese Literature: Essays, Articles, Reviews (CLEAR)
Publisher: CLEAR
Issue: i221611
Date: 12 1, 1968
Author(s): Zhu Wei-qun
Abstract: Xu, p. 100
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/495050

Journal Title: Chinese Literature: Essays, Articles, Reviews (CLEAR)
Publisher: CLEAR
Issue: i221608
Date: 7 1, 1972
Author(s): Yingshi Anthony C.
Abstract: Jacques Derrida in Positions (Paris: Les Editions de Minuit, 1972), p. 77 77 Jacques Derrida in Positions 1972
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/495139

Journal Title: Chinese Literature: Essays, Articles, Reviews (CLEAR)
Publisher: CODA Press
Issue: i221601
Date: 7 1, 1955
Author(s): Stevens Pauline
Abstract: "The Course of a Particular" (p. 157)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/495429

Journal Title: The Review of English Studies
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i222390
Date: 8 1, 1993
Author(s): Moore Susan
Abstract: Moore, 'In Defense of Suspense', 99. Moore 99 Defense of Suspense
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/518944

Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i222581
Date: 1 1, 1967
Author(s): Ricoeur Nabila
Abstract: The "Myth of Creation" in its East African formulation is the central chapter in a book entitled, The Sacred Meadows, by an Egyptian anthropologist who did his field work in the early seventies among the Lamu community in Kenya on the shores of the Indian Ocean. The translator, in her own introduction to the translation, presents the outline of the book and provides the geographical and cultural context of the community in question. The author, in this translated chapter, sets out by exposing his theoretical position which combines both Structuralism and Functionalism. Insights from Claude Lévi-Strauss and Bronislaw Malinowski as well as those of Paul Ricoeur and Victor Turner join to develop the author's notion of myth and its symbolic mode. Then the text of the myth, in its Lamuan formulation, is narrated, followed by a close reading and analysis of its binary oppositions, mediating terms, and the underlying existential contradiction at its crux. Angels, jinn, light, fire, earth, wind, water, Adam, Eve, Cain, Abel, Satan, serpent, etc. are the agents of this sacred narrative and cosmic drama. The textual unfolding of the myth is followed by an analysis, which makes use of the structural method and explores the semantic connotations of Swahili words and idioms to explain the logic of the symbolic exchange and the rigor of thought. The themes of unity and multiplicity and their different combinations are delineated in this analysis and the repetitions and their relation to transcendence are explained.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/521626

Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i222578
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Thiongo Sabry
Abstract: This paper challenges the common assumption that the attention which modern literary theory pays to the textual aspects of literature is achieved at the expense of humanistic and moral concerns. It starts by outlining how modern literary theory differs epistemologically from the traditional critical approaches to literature. Traditional critical theory was developed in the defense of poetry against Plato's accusations, real or imagined, and this informed both its critical practice and its concept of man. It established its epistemology on an aesthetic, moral, social, philosophical or scientific basis in a manner that encumbered literature with the concepts of man inherent in them. In contrast, modern literary theory started from a different premise: instead of seeking to justify literature and its moral relevance, it strove to identify its literariness and the dynamics of its structure by using the disciplines of semiotics and linguistics. It posited the text as an autonomous entity and a complete structure aware of its existence in a society of texts with which it conducts a profoundly intertextual dialogue. As an autonomous structure, the literary work is independent of other social or philosophical constructs and thus capable of conducting a meaningful dialogue with them. The paper elaborates the various conceptual frameworks of Russian formalism, intertextuality, structuralism and deconstruction in order to examine their implicit assumptions about man. It shows how the autonomous and dialogical nature of the literary work in its Bakhtinian sense are relevant to the concept of man inherent in modern literary theory. In its elaboration of this concept, the paper shows how it was developed in conflict with the hierarchical nature of traditional, ethical and philosophical values. It illustrates also the relevance of autonomy, self-regulation, free-play and fair representation inherent in many concepts of modern literary theory to the question of human rights. The question of human rights in modern literary theory is closely connected to its concept of the "subject"; the paper outlines Barthes' concept of the centrality of the human subject and Derrida's concept of différance and its impact on his understanding of the concept of the subject. With Derrida's différance, which means both difference and deferral, it became impossible to talk about the concept of the "subject" in isolation from that of the "other," whether one is dealing with the national aspects of the subject or with its gender issues. The deconstruction of the concept of the "subject" brings into the fore the omitted, marginalised and neglected aspects pertinent to its composition and accentuates both the processes of difference and deferral inherent in it. The representation of the subject implies its difference from, and indeed suppression of, the other. It also shows how Derrida's concept of différance dealt a devastating blow to the various philosophical absolutes and social hierarchies which controlled our thinking. The paper then examines the implications of these new critical and philosophical concepts for two different "others": the similar other within the culture (women) and the different other, the stranger/outsider to the dominant Western culture. It demonstrates how modern literary theory helped women to liberate themselves from cultural oppression by deconstructing patriarchal binary thinking and its inherent bias against women and so consolidate their human rights. It limits itself in this domain to a discussion of the contribution of French feminist literary theory, particularly the work of Hélèn Cixous, Luce Irigaray and Julia Kristeva. Their work shows how the literary, philosophical and critical canon perpetuated patriarchy and oppressed women. As for the different other, the paper refers to the work of Edward Said in his deconstruction of Orientalism and its discourse which subjects the other to the demands, needs and visions of the Western "self" and sacrifices in the process his identity and human rights. It also studies the work of the African American critic Henry Louis Gates and shows how his attempt to develop a literary theory based on, and deriving its conceptual framework from, the literature of African and Afro-American writers played a significant role in liberating the African American, undermining their biased representation in the culture, and upholding their human rights.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/521802

Journal Title: The Journal of American Folklore
Publisher: American Folklore Society
Issue: i223708
Date: 9 1, 1977
Author(s): Herzfeld Michael
Abstract: Michael Herzfeld, "Ritual and Textual Structures: The Advent of Spring in Rural Greece," in Text and Context: The Social Anthropology of Tradition, ed. Ravindra K. Jain, A.S.A. Essays, 2 (Philadelphia: I.S.H.I., 1977), p. 34 Herzfeld Ritual and Textual Structures: The Advent of Spring in Rural Greece 34 2 Text and Context: The Social Anthropology of Tradition 1977
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/539416

Journal Title: The Journal of American Folklore
Publisher: American Folklore Society
Issue: i223766
Date: 1 1, 1926
Author(s): Westermarck Deborah A.
Abstract: Shikhat are female performers in Moroccan society whose singing and dancing are central to all festivity, including rites of passage like marriage ceremonies and birth and circumcision celebrations. Despite their centrality, however, shikhat are socially marginal due to the license that they exhibit both in performance and in their "off-stage" lives. This article examines the artistic and bodily competencies of the shikhat as they articulate some of the more powerful metaphors of Moroccan identity, extending ultimately from embodiments of shame to embodiments of the one heterogeneous nation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/541074

Journal Title: The Journal of American Folklore
Publisher: American Folklore Society
Issue: i223766
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Weeks Clover Nolan
Abstract: The construction of gender as patterned and enacted in many northern California bachelor parties is central to a more inclusive clustering and dichotomization of qualities and experiences in which masculine intentionality is defined in contradistinction to female "Otherness" and object-status. As forced Otherness, the bachelor's feminization, accomplished in part by cross-dressing and then stripping him, is thus also an objectification, a humiliation, and an expulsion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/541075

Journal Title: Journal of Near Eastern Studies
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i224007
Date: 4 1, 1976
Author(s): Lamberg-Karlovsky A. J.
Abstract: Hallo, "Royal Hymns and Mesopotamian Unity," Journal of Cuneiform Studies 17 (1963): 112- 18. 10.2307/1359179 112
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/545469

Journal Title: The British Journal of Sociology
Publisher: Routledge Journals for the London School of Economics and Political Science
Issue: i225019
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Travers Andrew
Abstract: Analysis of a sequence of literary frames suggests that a heightened experience of interactional reality is also anomically constructive of the frame. In each of 16 frames, Durkheimian anomie neither destroys the frame's integrity nor renders its routine grounds unintelligible, as Goffman and Garfinkel would claim it must. Paradoxically, anomie ritually intensifies the frame. The selves in the paper's sequence of highly ritualized frames are not routine selves, however. They are 'strangers to themselves'. The analysis shows how Mead's 'I' can re-emerge from Goffman's ritual thinking - where the 'I' is collapsed into an interactionally-bound 'me' - as an original manifestation of great importance to interactants, and therefore to society as well. (Parenthetically it is also argued that selves need an element of rituality in order to be selflike and that it is interactional rituality which guarantees the evolution of social life beyond given frames, corpora, cultural repertoires, and collective representations.) The idea that interactants can be strangers to themselves is an advance on Goffman's and Garfinkel's accounts of interactional selfhood, but one that problematizes the prosecution of the interaction sociology that Goffman and Garfinkel pioneer, since strangers to themselves disappear in normal sociological appearances.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/591341

Journal Title: Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
Publisher: The School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
Issue: i225560
Date: 1 1, 1986
Author(s): Keesing Vassili
Abstract: R. Keesing, 'Rethinking mana', 153. Keesing 153 Rethinking mana
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/620877

Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i201461
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Zharova James V.
Abstract: An approach to sociocultural analysis based on the ideas of Vygotsky, Bakhtin, and others is used to provide the foundation for discussing narratives as "cultural tools." The production of official, state sponsored historical narratives is examined from this perspective, and it is argued that this production process may be shaped as much by dialogic encounters with other narratives as by archival information. These claims are harnessed to examine the production of post-Soviet Russian history textbooks, especially their presentation of the events surrounding the Russian Civil War of 1918-20.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/640614

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226394
Date: 11 1, 1977
Author(s): Witherspoon Robert
Abstract: An ethnographic study of the words and actions common to a shelter for people considered homeless and mentally ill shows how distinct forms of reasoning and personal agency relate to a set of practical concerns and political exigencies. Whereas the shelter's staff rely on and promote a referential language and direct, active forms of agency, its residents depend on tactical, persuasive uses of language and oblique, reactive forms of agency. Yet because the staff have the upper hand politically, their orientations to language, thought, and action take a more central role in encouraging people to act in sincere and reasonable ways. The residents draw on ideas of sincerity, reason, and personal accountability, but in makeshift ways, with the result that the ideas are caught up in the rhetoric of self-presentation. The article's findings underscore the need for anthropologists to attend to the diverse means, and political, linguistic, and cultural grounds, of human reason and agency. [agency, reason, language, power, mental illness, homelessness]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/646188

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226400
Date: 5 1, 1987
Author(s): White Michael
Abstract: Using a broadly Aristotelian framework I propose poetic form as a means for distinguishing historicities. I analyze Sakalava performances of possession by royal ancestors as the creative production of a kind of history, distinguish it from a dominant occidental model of history, and elaborate the chronotope on which it is based and the heteroglossia and historical consciousness it enables. I argue that Sakalava spirit possession has a strongly realist bent and suggest the interest of poiesis for anthropological analysis and comparison more generally. [historical production, historicity, spirit possession, mimesis, poiesis, Aristotle, Madagascar]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/646688

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226406
Date: 11 1, 1993
Author(s): Zola Matthew
Abstract: Using a form of narrative analysis, I explore how marriage in contemporary China influences people's identity formation as "men with disabilities." In particular, I examine how local practices of marriage exclusion shape the definition, marginalization, and experience of men who have trouble walking. This discussion is more phenomenological than most previous accounts of men's experiences of marriage in Chinese Society. [marriage, disability, identity, body, manhood, narrative, China]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/647236

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227512
Date: 6 1, 1966
Author(s): Watts Karin R.
Abstract: This paper focuses upon the prevalent complementary definitions of myth and history and questions their analytic utility with reference to literary documents that bespeak the transition between mythic and historic cognition. In the style of ethnosemantic analysis, these definitions are treated as a semantic domain and subjected to formal analysis. The components elicited constitute a new definition - more precisely, a two-dimensional model of the relationship between myth and history. Subsequently, the model is applied to a series of books from the Bible with the conclusion that men and women are structurally equal since, in their roles as social actors, both represent different components of myth as well as history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/676670

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227521
Date: 9 1, 1959
Author(s): Wright Marshall
Abstract: Schwimmer 1966:107 107
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/678658

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227576
Date: 6 1, 1984
Author(s): Williams Anne M.
Abstract: Colomina 1992
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/682216

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227580
Date: 6 1, 1991
Author(s): Žižek Georgina
Abstract: This essay uses the work of psychoanalyst Melanie Klein to reopen the dialogue between anthropology and psychoanalysis. It argues that Kleinian concepts enhance an anthropology that seeks out both intersubjective and intrasubjective difference and disjuncture, and it demonstrates the uses of major Kleinian concepts for addressing classic anthropological problems, including gender classification and the analysis of persecution in witchcraft and sorcery systems. Applying Kleinian concepts to the analysis of cultural-historical process, it shows how splitting and denial may be central to the reproduction and hegemony of dominant cultural systems through time and addresses the question of how to theorize the relationship among dominant cultural systems, social differentiation, and individual subjectivities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/683117

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227569
Date: 9 1, 1988
Author(s): Woolgar Paul B.
Abstract: 'Positivism,' it seems, is a movement that cultural anthropology can do without. But what is positivism, who are these positivists, and what precisely are their sins? Notwithstanding appearances to the contrary, the image of positivism in cultural anthropology is comparatively coherent and the criticism directed at it relatively well founded. What is dubious is the conclusion to which many critics think it leads: that the methods of the natural sciences are inappropriate to the study of human culture and society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/683269

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227583
Date: 3 1, 1999
Author(s): Wolf Aletta
Abstract: An earlier ecological anthropology defined its project within the compass of the idealism v. materialism debate. Culture was an adaptive tool, instrumental rather than formal; it was intelligible with respect to its material effects, not - as the idealists would maintain - in terms of itself, as an autonomous, self-determining order of reality. This argument was mounted with respect to bounded, stable, self-regulating, local, or at best regional entities and the environment they inhabited. All of the premises of the earlier ecology have since been challenged, and today's ecologies - symbolic, historical, and political - radically depart from the reductions and elisions of the ecological anthropology of the past. In particular, the new ecologies override the dichotomies that informed and enlivened the debates of the past - nature/culture, idealism/materialism - and they are informed by the literature on transnationalist flows and local-global articulations. This introduction positions Rappaport's work within this historical shift from a polarized field of mutually exclusive frameworks to today's synthetic new ecologies and their antireductive materialism. Rappaport's work, produced over three decades, serves, in and through its own transformations, as a bridge between the reductive materialism of the past and a new-materialist ecology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/683337

Journal Title: Sociological Forum
Publisher: Eastern Sociological Society
Issue: i227652
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Zelizer Orville
Abstract: Derrida, 1976:158 158
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/685074

Journal Title: Science, Technology, & Human Values
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i228033
Date: 4 1, 1995
Author(s): Suchman G. Michael
Abstract: To date, little is known about when and to what degree science students begin to participate in authentic scientific graphing practices. This article presents the results of a series of studies on the production, transformation, and interpretation of graphical representation from Grade 8 to professional scientific practice both in formal testing situations (inside) and in the course of field/laboratory work (outside). The results of these studies can be grouped into two major areas. First, there is a discontinuity in the graph-related practices that marks a boundary between people who engage in work that requires them to transform data into graphical representations (converted) and people who do not have such experiences (cannibals). Second, the didactic practices of high school textbooks and university lectures exhibit a marked discontinuity relative to graphing practices in scientific journals. Graphs used in didactic circumstances may be associated with students' difficulties in interpreting "real data." It appears that school teachers and university professors (missionaries) do little to put their students on trajectories of increasing participation in authentic scientific graphing practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/690254

Journal Title: Science, Technology, & Human Values
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i228044
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Yoxen Anne
Abstract: Representations of the active brain have served to establish a particular domain of competence for brain mappers and to distinguish brain mapping's particular contributions to mind/brain research. At the heart of the claims about the emerging contributions of functional brain mapping is a paradox: functional imagers seem to reject representations while also using them at multiple points in their work. This article therefore considers a love-hate relationship between scientists and their object: the case of the iconoclastic imager. This paradoxical stance is the result of the formation of an interdisciplinary approach that brings together a number of scientific traditions and their particular standards of what constitutes scientific evidence. By examining the various ways in which images are deployed and rejected, the origins of these conflicting tendencies can be traced to the technological, methodological, and institutional elements in the work of functional imagers. This approach provides insight into the current demarcation of imaging and reflects on features of visual knowledge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/690275

Journal Title: Cardozo Studies in Law and Literature
Publisher: Jacob Burns Institute for Advanced Legal Studies, Benjamin N. Cardozo School of Law of Yeshiva University
Issue: i229819
Date: 7 1, 1851
Author(s): Adams Milner S.
Abstract: John Adams, Discourses on Davilla, in C.F. Adams, ed., 6 The Works of John Adams 221 (1851). Adams 221 6 The Works of John Adams 1851
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/743468

Journal Title: Music Theory Spectrum
Publisher: Society for Music Theory
Issue: i229978
Date: 4 1, 1987
Author(s): Neumeyer David
Abstract: David Neumeyer, "The Three-Voice Ursatz," In Theory Only 10, nos. 1-2 (1987): 3-29 Neumeyer 1 3 10 Theory Only 1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/746080

Journal Title: 19th-Century Music
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i230051
Date: 4 1, 1956
Author(s): de Hartmann John
Abstract: p. 147
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/746221

Journal Title: The Journal of Musicology
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i230987
Date: 10 1, 1988
Author(s): Heinio Marianne
Abstract: Marjorie Perloff, "Postmodernism," pp. 43-63 43
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/763871

Journal Title: The Journal of Musicology
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i230999
Date: 10 1, 1956
Author(s): Poulet Regula Burckhardt
Abstract: Qureshi, op. cit. (1986)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/763973

Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i231248
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Wardhaugh Michael
Abstract: Ronald Wardhaugh, An Introduction to Sociolinguistics (Oxford, 1994), 258-81 (p. 260). Wardhaugh 258 An Introduction to Sociolinguistics 1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/766394

Journal Title: October
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i231797
Date: 12 1, 1980
Author(s): Dumźil V. Y.
Abstract: Herskovits, Cultural Relativism, p. 241. 241
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/778940

Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232679
Date: 7 1, 1985
Author(s): Garet Ronald R.
Abstract: The Bridge, supra note 1, at 116. 116
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/796397

Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232679
Date: 7 1, 1953
Author(s): Aeschylus Martha
Abstract: Violence and the Word, supra note 7, at 1629 1629
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/796400

Journal Title: Chinese Literature: Essays, Articles, Reviews (CLEAR)
Publisher: CODA Press
Issue: i233899
Date: 7 1, 1958
Author(s): Tsao Hsueh-chin Anthony C.
Abstract: Plaks, p. 78 and p. 207.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/823527

Journal Title: Cambridge Opera Journal
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i233914
Date: 3 1, 1921
Author(s): Thovez Roger
Abstract: here 117-18 117
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/823749

Journal Title: American Bar Foundation Research Journal
Publisher: American Bar Foundation
Issue: i234248
Date: 1 1, 1959
Author(s): Goffman Alan C.
Abstract: Erving Goffman, The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life 11 (Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday & Co., Anchor Books, 1959) Goffman 11 The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life 1959
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/828228

Journal Title: Law & Social Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i234283
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Darderian Janet
Abstract: Hofrichter, Neighborhood Justice (cited in note 11)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/828547

Journal Title: Law & Social Inquiry
Publisher: American Bar Foundation
Issue: i234271
Date: 1 1, 1948
Author(s): Corner Stephen A.
Abstract: George W. Corner, ed., The Autobiography of Benjamin Rush: His "Travels Through Life" together with his Commonplace Book for 1789-1813, at 236-37 (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1948). Corner 236 1948 The Autobiography of Benjamin Rush: His "Travels Through Life" together with his Commonplace Book for 1789-1813
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/828706

Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i234478
Date: 4 1, 1989
Author(s): Charlton Berthold
Abstract: E. T. A. Hofmnann's Musical Writings: "Kreisleriana," "The Poet and the Composer,"Music Criticism, ed. David Charlton, trans. Martyn Clarke (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989), 160-61 Charlton 160 E. T. A. Hoffmann's Musical Writings: "Kreisleriana," "The Poet and the Composer,"Music Criticism 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/832063

Journal Title: International Review of the Aesthetics and Sociology of Music
Publisher: Institute of Musicology, Zagreb Music Academy
Issue: i234654
Date: 6 1, 1971
Author(s): Supičić Jean-Jacques
Abstract: J. J. NATTIEZ, 1973
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/836758

Journal Title: Transformation
Publisher: Sage Publications, Ltd.
Issue: e90008098
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Farr Bernard C.
Abstract: Baker GP & Hacker PMS (2005) Wittgenstein: Understanding and Meaning (2nd ed.). Oxford, UK: Blackwell Publishing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90008100

Journal Title: Meridiana
Publisher: Viella
Issue: e90011282
Date: 1 1, 2017
Author(s): Ventrone Angelo
Abstract: P. Ricoeur, Ricordare, dimenticare, perdonare. L’enigma del passato, il Mulino, Bologna 2004 [1998], pp. 71-118.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90011290

Journal Title: Music Theory Spectrum
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: e90012057
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): DAVIS ANDREW
Abstract: This article proposes that Romantic sonatas exploit in their formal structures multiply directed temporal narratives, comprising a temporal stream and various other streams that can be broadly characterized as atemporal. The temporal stream articulates the principal sonata trajectory and correlates with the concept known in structural narratology as thefirst narrative; the atemporal streams reside on alternate temporal levels and remain external to, or disengaged from, that of the first narrative. The structural and expressive implications of this opposition, together with the view of sonata-formal conventions made available in recent work on Sonata Theory, provide a framework within which the article explicates Chopin’s robust dialogue, in the first movement of his Piano Sonata in B Minor, Op. 58, with Classical German-Austrian sonata conventions and contemporary Romantic aesthetic currents. The reading provides a foundation for reassessing Chopin’s work in the sonata genre, the norms and expressive potential of which he is often thought of as never fully apprehending.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90012063

Journal Title: Revue économique
Publisher: Sciences Po University Press
Issue: e90016168
Date: 11 1, 2017
Author(s): Sobel Richard
Abstract: Introduced in France since a decade, the work of Moishe Postone appears as a global new interpretation of Marx. It hinges on the thesis according to which Marx does not propose a criticism of capitalism from the angle of work, but a criticism of work under capitalism. This article assesses the significance of this heterodox Marxism by trying to situate its epistemological background between a structuralist interpretation and a phenomenological interpretation of Marx. It shows that Postone builds an original structuralism, combining Althusser and Hegel, but struggles to link it up with a theory of subjectivation and action up to a thought which aims for the social transformation of and the emancipation from capitalism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90016175

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Universidad de Chile
Issue: e90016177
Date: 11 1, 2017
Author(s): T. Leonidas Morales
Abstract: This article focuses on the last two novels by Adolfo Couve, La comedia del arte (1996) and Cuando pienso en mi falta de cabeza (La segunda comedia), posthumously published in 2000. The article proposes an allegorical reading of the transformation of the painter Camondo into a wax statue, the protagonist of both novels who later loses his mind. The article argues that the loss of the mind allegorizes a quotidian time, in tune with Couve's world, which spins and repeats itself, closed, without a horizon, a “beheaded” time (lacking future). This allows the possibility to build a coherent sense of a series of narrative forms (which include language, space, time, characters) and that, taken as a whole, show the particular way in which Couve's narrative is built and developed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90016191

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Universidad de Chile
Issue: e90016177
Date: 11 1, 2017
Author(s): Soto Ana María Riveros
Abstract: This study presents an interpretation of the configuration of the poetic subject in the books of poems El Primer Libro (1985) and Albricia (1988) by Soledad Fariña (1943), which understand a self in a continuous process of gestation and birth. This process serves the purpose of recomposing a disarticulated subjectivity lost in the framework of the political and cultural conditions imposed by the military dictatorship that ruled Chile in the 1970s and 1980s. By using a metaphor of a journey and searching for a new language, the subject attempts to access a primitive stage andfind its maternal self in order to confront the dominant power, by codifying and configuring herself through an otherness in a feminine body-text. However, this process of maturation and discovery is intervened and left incomplete by the impulse of modernity, thereby creating a deformed, dissociated and off-centered self, which aims at growing opposed to logos. This conflict turns the upcoming of the new self into a painful event, like giving birth, that stems from the subject's wounded and fractured body, intending to re-establish de selffrom its fragments, traces and memories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90016192

Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L’Harmattan
Issue: e90017741
Date: 9 1, 2017
Author(s): COLLET Victor
Abstract: House J., MacMaster N., Paris 1961…, op. cit., pp. 323-375.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90017748

Journal Title: Acta Musicologica
Publisher: Barenreiter
Issue: i238579
Date: 12 1, 1980
Author(s): Adorno Uwe
Abstract: Vergleichenden Musikwissenschaft für méglich hilt Vergleichenden Musikwissenschaft für méglich hilt
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/932818

Journal Title: Revue de Musicologie
Publisher: Societe Francaise de Musicologie
Issue: i239150
Date: 1 1, 1965
Author(s): Aristote Jacques
Abstract: La Raison dans l'Histoire (Paris, 1965), p. 54. 54 La Raison dans l'Histoire 1965
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/947263

Journal Title: Public Administration Review
Publisher: American Society for Public Administration
Issue: i240080
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Van Erp Carol W.
Abstract: Do divergent values embedded in distinctive cultures satisfactorily explain current directions in public service ethics around the world? The authors draw upon expert observation by government and corporate officials who administer ethics programs, leaders known for their moral courage, survey research, and the scholarly literature to identify these directions and begin addressing the question. The central argument is that observable practice increasingly invalidates an approach that relies exclusively upon cultural particularities. Identified commonalties susceptible to objective research include shared values and norms such as impartiality and effectiveness in public service, structural elements in part fostered by shared goals and multinational anti-corruption initiatives, and the self-conscious injection of normative components into ethics programs. Emerging from a cross-cultural empirical perspective that allows for mutualities as well as differences, the authors' rich research agenda included investigation of the alleged links between public attitudes and ethics programs and between codes and actual administrative behavior, and development of appropriate measures of ethics programs' effectiveness. They concluded that professional public administration must remain intellectually open to global dialogue on shared values, norms, and structures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/977250

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Sociology / Cahiers canadiens de sociologie
Publisher: State University of New York Press
Issue: canajsocicahican.33.issue-1
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Titchkosky Tanya
Abstract: Résumé. Ce texte démontre le genre de questions qui se présentent aux études sur la condition des personnes handicapées informées par la sociologieen interrogent les interactions qui émergent autour des luttes pour «l'accès» dans un milieu de travail scolaire/ académique. Au cours de mes expériences dans un des plus grands édifices dans une des plus grandes universités au Canada, j'ai amassé des paroles quotidiennes qui justifient l'exclusion des personnes handicapées. J'ai rassemblé des narratifs représentants ce-qui-est possible-de-dire aujourd'hui sur la lutte pour l'accessibilité. En utilisant une approche sociologique interprétativiste, ce texte illustre la façon dont les significations de l'incapacité sont générés par un discours qui rends légitime la construction exclusive ainsi que les structures inaccessible de la vie universitaire. Dans ce texte, je démontre que l'accès n'est pas synonyme de justice mais, par contre, est un point de départ pour la réflexion critique où les relations sociaux entre corps et espace peut être considéré à nouveau. Ce texte contribue aux études sur la condition des personnes handicapées informées par la sociologie en analysant la façon dont la narration ordinaire et quotidienne de l'incapacité peut continuer à, en même temps que l'environnement physique change, agir comme pouvoir social qui reproduit le statuquo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/canajsocicahican.33.1.37

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Sociology / Cahiers canadiens de sociologie
Publisher: Springer Verlag
Issue: canajsocicahican.37.issue-3
Date: August 30, 2010
Author(s): Yeo Michael
Abstract: Résumé. L'un des principaux problèmes dans la controverse entourant le recensement détaillé concernait la relation entre la science et la politique. En analysant les arguments et les hypothèses sous-jacentes de quatre interventions influentes et exemplaires faites au nom de la science, cet article rend un constat normatif de cette relation. Il nuance les idéaux protecteurs de la science que les critiques ont invoqués et avance que de telles ressources conceptuelles sont nécessaires pour protéger la science d'un empiètement politique indu. Cependant, dans leur zèle à défendre les droits de la science, les critiques en ont réclamé plus que nécessaire, ce qui a occulté la dimension de la valeur des décisions politiques et n'a pas respecté le rôle de la politique en tant que point légitime de prise de décision sur les questions de valeur. Un constat normatif adéquat de la relation entre la science et la politique dans la politique gouvernementale doit non seulement protéger la science contre la politique, mais aussi la politique contre la science.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/canajsocicahican.37.3.295

Journal Title: Journal of Higher Education in Africa / Revue de l'enseignement supérieur en Afrique
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: jhigheducafri.8.issue-2
Date: October 1, 1958
Author(s): Macdonald Helen M.
Abstract: Cet article est issu d'une étude ethnographique menée à l'Université de Cape Town. Il explore la dynamique d'une intervention permettant au personnel de l'université de s'engager dans une voie alternative à celle de l'apartheid en Afrique du Sud. Il traite de la politique sociale qui apparut entre l'intervention, ses participants et non-participants imaginaires par rapport à la vision « transformatrice » de l'université. L'intention des interventionnistes a été retravaillée par les participants des principaux symboles qui mettent en forme les motifs de leurs comportements et donnent un sens à leurs expériences. Utilisant le modèle d'Ortner (1973) de reconnaissance et de symboles-clés, je soutiens que la « transformation » et « l'espace sûr » représentent une élaboration symboles, en ce sens qu'ils ont le pouvoir d'action et d'élaboration conceptuelle. Ces symboles d'élaboration fonctionnent en relais avec une sorte de logique qui « cristallise l'engagement » des participants vers l'intervention d'une manière émotionnellement puissante et relativement indifférenciée. Ce faisant, ils font de l'intervention un symbole capable d'exprimer ce que leur expérience signifie pour eux en tant que communauté imaginée par rapport aux autres.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/jhigheducafri.8.2.73

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Península
Issue: revchilenalit.issue-87
Date: 11 1, 2002
Author(s): Aguilar Andrés Ferrada
Abstract: The article focuses on a selection of chronicles in which José Donoso provides a denaturalized image of the city of Santiago in the 1980s. By stressing a poetics of transformation, the author narrates a city that confronts the silence pervading its urban practices and neighbourhoods. Under this guise, Donoso’s writing tactically articulates a voice for the city that challenges both the homogeneity imposed by traditional renditions and the order of a contemporary oligarchy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/revchilenalit.87.115

Journal Title: Ulbandus Review
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ulbarevi.17
Date: August 31, 1997
Author(s): Mankovskaya Elizaveta
Abstract: ,Liisa H. Malkki “News and culture: Transitory phenomena and the fieldwork tradition,”inAnthropological locations: Boundaries and grounds of a field science, ed. andAkhil Gupta (:James Ferguson University of California Press,1997),91.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/ulbarevi.17.86

Journal Title: Global South, The
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: globalsouth.5.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Herlinghaus Hermann
Abstract: Offering a “pharmacological” perspective, this essay elaborates on the Chilean Roberto Bolaño's novel 2666. It discusses narrative imaginaries that regraph cultural experiences and spaces of self-consciousness as they emerge from singular global south networks. In2666, the Mexican-U.S. border region operates as a fraught site through which a global aesthetics of sobriety gains shape and texture, a phenomenon upon which Bolaño's text depends for its critique of Western academic knowledge. From there, I consider how a “pharmacological” problematization of Western culture can reshape our perspective of the constitution of a global modernity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/globalsouth.5.1.101

Journal Title: History & Memory
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: his.2007.19.issue-2
Date: June 1, 2006
Author(s): Moses A. Dirk
Abstract: Historians are dumb witnesses to a culture wrangling with itself about its criminal past if they only narrate the sequence of historical controversies such as those that have dotted the German public landscape since the Holocaust. They need to be alive to the subterranean biblical themes flowing beneath the surface froth of events, linking past and present through the continuity of German political emotions that are necessarily collective and therefore sensitive to anxieties about accusations of collective, inherited sin. This article argues that the guilt/shame couplet so common both in public German and academic discourses about postwar Germany cannot account for the intergenerational transmission of moral pollution signified by Holocaust memory. In order to understand the dynamics of German political emotions, it is more useful to employ an alternative couplet: stigma and sacrifice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/his.2007.19.2.139

Journal Title: History & Memory
Publisher: Wereldbibliotheek
Issue: histmemo.26.issue-2
Date: Oct. 12, 2011
Author(s): Lok Matthijs M.
Abstract: This article analyzes the social construction of silence in early-nineteenth-century Europe, focusing on France and the Netherlands. In both countries, the newly installed Restoration monarchies propagated a “politics of forgetting” of the problematic recent past of the revolution and the Napoleonic era as an essential part of attempts to build a stable and legitimate political order. This official forgetting was contested in both countries. On the basis of the “letters of adhesion,” the article examines the close interaction between the individual reconstruction of the personal past and social forgetting. Finally, it relates the rise of a historicizing culture in the early nineteenth century to the culture of silence in Restoration Europe.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/histmemo.26.2.40

Journal Title: Indiana Journal of Global Legal Studies
Publisher: U. Cal. Press
Issue: indjglolegstu.20.issue-2
Date: June 14, 1896
Author(s): Lindahl Hans
Abstract: This paper scrutinizes the fundamental assumption governing Gunther Teubner's theory of societal constitutionalism, namely that societal constitutions are ultimately about the regulation of inclusion and exclusion in global function systems. While endorsing the central role of inclusion/exclusion in constitutions, societal or otherwise, I argue that inclusion and exclusion are primordial categories of collective action, rather than functional categories. As a result, the self-closure which gives rise to a legal collective is spatial as much as it is temporal, and subjective no less than material. Inasmuch as legal orders must establish who ought to do what, where, and when, this entails, or so I argue, that any legal order we could imagine—including a global legal order such as cyberlaw—is necessarily bounded in space, time, content, and membership. This impinges directly on the inclusion/exclusion difference: that there can be no inclusion without exclusion entails, most fundamentally, that there can be no (il)legality without alegality, i.e. comportment that contests, sometimes radically, how a legal order draws the distinction between legality and illegality. In this fundamental sense, all legal orders have an outside—literally. Building on this insight, I suggest that the functional cosmopolitanism advocated by a theory of societal constitutionalism retains a residue of the logic of totalization it seeks to overcome. I conclude by exploring how a first-person plural theory of law both supports and transforms the insight that constitutions regulate the inclusion/exclusion difference by putting into place constitutive and limitative rules.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/indjglolegstu.20.2.697

Journal Title: jml: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: U of Chicago P
Issue: jmodelite.34.2.issue-2
Date: 01 1984
Author(s): Gaedtke Andrew
Abstract: Ruben Borg's The Measureless Time of Joyce, Deleuze and Derridaargues that James Joyce'sFinnegans Wakemust be read as a singular attempt to represent the eccentric structure of post-human temporality. The book relocates theWakewithin a long history of philosophies of time as well as recent post-structuralist and information theory. Drawing upon the work of Gilles Deleuze and Jacques Derrida, Borg shows how Joyce's formal and narratological innovations enabled him to present a structure of time that does not obey the linear, humanistic progression of thebildungsromanbut instead manifests mechanical temporal economies of production and waste.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/jmodelite.34.2.192

Journal Title: jml: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: New Directions
Issue: jmodelite.35.issue-3
Date: Oct. 1, 1991
Author(s): Carlson Celia
Abstract: Recent scholarship has given considerable attention to lyric poetry as a form of sensuous knowledge. This approach emphasizes the corporeal origins of poetry, its genesis in the body or in language viewed as material. The question of sensuous knowledge is central to the larger theoretical issue of modernity itself, in which lyric holds a central yet ambiguous status. The question of sensuous knowledge is ultimately a question of meaning. However, modern thought — thought pertaining to “modernity” — is fundamentally circular. This would seem to establish an epistemological impasse for aesthetics. But I argue that this circularity offers an important, and necessary, way to limit knowledge and thereby ground an ethical subjectivity. My essay places formalism at the heart of sensuous knowledge. In this essay I develop an account of the importance of abstraction in sensuous knowledge by way of Kant's concept of Darstellung, “presentation [of sensory experience].” The “presentation” is the object as it has undergone a structural process of internalization and been made available for psychic use as meaning; that requires a recognition of loss. Where this is important for literature is that twentieth-century American poetry frequently uses very personal images of family life as a way of conveying sincerity about corporeal experience. I use this discussion of circularity in modern aesthetic thought to argue that there is a risk to taking shortcuts to meaning through images of the material bodies of children. In these contemporary poems by Gary Snyder, Sharon Olds and Rita Dove, the poets reject loss in favor of a very modern “affirmation” of the material. But affirmation and the visual image as a sign of affirmation cannot alone bind meaning to us. That meaning must be internalized through theworkof poetic presentation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/jmodelite.35.3.158

Journal Title: jml: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: Stanford UP
Issue: jmodelite.37.issue-4
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Yusin Jennifer
Abstract: Desire, as Martin Hägglund claims in Dying For Time, has been erringly conceived in philosophical, literary, and psychoanalytic traditions as testifying to a fundamental lack of being. In response, Hägglund develops the notion of chronolibido, a theory that posits the constitutive difference of desire as testifying to temporal finitude and mortality as the object of desire. In the rubric of chronolibido, the desire for immortality dissimulates a preceding desire for survival. This review takes up Hägglund's theory of desire and examines the implications of chronolibido for reading modernist literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/jmodelite.37.4.186

Journal Title: Research in African Literatures
Publisher: Duke UP
Issue: reseafrilite.42.2.issue-2
Date: Mar. 1, 1996
Author(s): Hron Madelaine
Abstract: This article examines Jean Hatzfeld's Machete Season: The Killers in Rwanda Speak, a collection of testimonials by perpetrators of the genocide in Rwanda. While surveying popular representations of killers in Rwanda, circulating theories about the 1994 genocide and the veracity of these killers' accounts, this article also investigates the production, edition, and translation of these killers' interviews. In particular, it focuses on Jean Hatzfeld's role as editor of these killers' testimonies and Innocent Rwililiza's position as translatorinterviewer. Contextualizing elements missing from these interviews——namely, concepts from Rwandan language, history, and culture, as well as broader psychosocial dimensions both pre- and post-genocide——this article problematizes Hatzfeld's depiction of these ““ordinary killers.””
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/reseafrilite.42.2.125

Journal Title: Research in African Literatures
Publisher: Lexington Books
Issue: reseafrilite.44.issue-3
Date: 9 1, 2005
Author(s): Small Audrey
Abstract: A book proposing an overview of “African literature” is a very attractive proposition to the new reader seeking orientation in a vast and fastgrowing vibrant field, to the expert in one area looking to explore others, and perhaps also to the publisher with a canny eye to the bottom line. This essay examines the often bewildering array of apparent subcategories that emerge in some key texts published around the turn of the twentieth-first century that purport to offer an overview of African literature in French, but which seem to entirely set aside important international debates over “postcolonial,” diaspora, and hybridity, among others. These texts have an important role in the construction of knowledge of “African literature,” but their strengths and limitations become clear when we look closely at the categories suggested and no more so than when the category happens to be that of “identity.”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/reseafrilite.44.3.1

Journal Title: Victorian Studies
Publisher: Duke UP
Issue: victorianstudies.55.issue-4
Date: 7 1, 1985
Author(s): Heffernan Laura
Abstract: This article reviews recent methodological interventions in the field of literary study, many of which take nineteenth-century critics, readers, or writers as models for their less interpretive reading practices. In seeking out nineteenth-century models for twenty-first-century critical practice, these critics imagine a world in which English literature never became a discipline. Some see these new methods as formalist, yet we argue that they actually emerge from historicist self-critique. Specifically, these contemporary critics view the historicist projects of the 1980s as overly influenced by disciplinary models of textual interpretation—models that first arose, we show through our reading of the Jolly Bargemen scene in Charles Dickens's Great Expectations(1860– 61), in the second half of the nineteenth century. In closing, we look more closely at the work of a few recent critics who sound out the metonymic, adjacent, and referential relations between readers, texts, and historical worlds in order sustain historicism's power to restore eroded meanings rather than reveal latent ones.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/victorianstudies.55.4.615

Journal Title: Comparative Literature Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: complitstudies.51.1.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2014
Abstract: The combinatory and ludic polyculturalism, the parodic transmutation of meanings and values, the open, multilingual hybridization [which] are the devices responsible for the constant feeding and refeeding of this “baroquizing” almagest: the carnivalized transencyclopedia of the new barbarians, where everything can coexist with everything. They are the machinery that crushes the material of tradition, like the teeth of a tropical sugarmill, transforming stalks and husks into bagasse and juicy syrup. 145
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/complitstudies.51.1.0018

Journal Title: Comparative Literature Studies
Publisher: Verso
Issue: complitstudies.51.3.issue-3
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Damrosch David
Abstract: The world is a large and various place. Those wishing to chart new planetary cartographies are finding many languages to study beyond the French–German–English triad that long dominated Western comparative studies, and they are developing new methods appropriate to the expanded scope of our field. The tough linguistic and political analyses that Emily Apter rightly wishes comparatists to pursue will best be carried forward by widening our cultural and linguistic horizons, and by employing the full variety of critical and theoretical approaches that can be included in our cartographic toolboxes today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/complitstudies.51.3.0504

Journal Title: The F. Scott Fitzgerald Review
Publisher: Penguin
Issue: fscotfitzrevi.12.1.issue-1
Date: 10 1, 1989
Author(s): Salmose Niklas
Abstract: Fitzgerald's nostalgic style, though, set an example of how a nostalgic narrative could be structured, and in its aftermath it was used by such different authors as Evelyn Waugh in Brideshead Revisited(1945), Anthony Burgess inA Clockwork Orange(1962) and the works of Kazuo Ishiguro. The author's own later work employs it as well. The technique of using the reader's textual memory in order to evoke a phenomenological nostalgic experience is very evident in both versions ofTender Is the Night(the 1934 original, and Malcolm Cowley's 1951 restructuring). In the 1951 version, the structure of the narrative closely follows the pattern of happiness and reflection. An early description of a Swiss valley communicates an awe of life and nature: “The sun swam out into a blue sea of sky and suddenly it was a Swiss valley at its best—pleasant sounds and murmurs and a good fresh smell of health and cheer” (9). In the transitory third book, “Casualties: 1925,” the tone has changed from appreciative to melancholic, as in this description of the small town of Amiens: “In the day-time one is deflated by such towns, with their little trolley cars of twenty years ago crossing the great grey cobble-stoned squares in front of the cathedral, and the very weather seems to have a quality of the past, faded weather like that of old photographs” (138). At the end of the novel both Dick and Nicole Diver become obsessed with youth and the past as well as with time: “for Nicole the years slipped away by clock and calendar and birthday, with the added poignance of her perishable beauty” (228). Toward the end of the novel, Nicole's last sight of Dick—“her eyes followed his figure until it became a dot and mingled with the other dots in the summer crowd” (386)—forces the reader to reflect in a reversed movement. Instead of vanishing like Dick, this image suggests a backward recollection of what was a Swiss valley “at its best.”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/fscotfitzrevi.12.1.0067

Journal Title: Interdisciplinary Literary Studies
Publisher: Harper and Row
Issue: intelitestud.16.2.issue-2
Date: 9 1, 1971
Author(s): Eze Chielozona
Abstract: Even in her familial tone, and perhaps because of it, Jabbeh Wesley never forgets that the healing and meaning-making function of grief and mourning, as painful as grief and mourning are, is not to be avoided. Rather, as DuBose argues, based on the painful experience of his wife's miscarriage, as “‘child’ and ‘parent’ disappeared, our bodies and our society dys-appeared, and our connections and hopes re-appeared” (374). Jabbeh Wesley attaches the reappearance of the hopes for the healing and reconstruction of her Liberian world to people's ability and willingness to truly experience the painful process of grief and, perhaps informed by that cathartic experience, allow compassion and empathy to guide their relationship to others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/intelitestud.16.2.0282

Journal Title: Journal of Africana Religions
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jafrireli.1.1.issue-1
Date: 1 1, 2013
Abstract: Some time ago, Paul Ricoeur pointed out that “the symbol gives rise to thought.” These diasporic religious communities enable us to find a new beginning for thought that has the possibility of avoiding the exclusivity and elitism that has too often accompanied the objective meaning of thought as a science of the rational. Not only these diasporic religions, but also the very conundrum of the continent of Africa as a whole, to echo Skinner at the beginning of our paper, may serve in the same manner as one of the most important ways that thought might be renewed—and the relationship of thought to action and performance.38
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jafrireli.1.1.0091

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: Is SPEP the city of God? This would be going too far. Not even the theological turn in French Phenomenology would make this claim. Dick Howard already threw in a troubling question: “diversification that perhaps gives more breadth than depth?” he asked. And there are plenty more troubling questions. SPEP is now a big operation. It has committees and subcommittees, multiple simultaneous sessions, blind review. All these developments are signs, perhaps inevitable ones, of its success, but all have familiar downsides: bureaucratization, diversification for its own sake, what Habermas would call Unübersichtlichkeit. This is what happens when outsiders become insiders, the antis become their own sort of establishment. You can't blame some of us for feeling nostalgic for our long-lost innocence, even though we all know—you don't have to be a philosopher of history to know this—that we can't go there. History has rendered a judgment, but Dick Howard said, “Historywilljudge.” That's one problem with history: It's always rendering judgments, but they are never final. You'd have to be at the end of history for that, and despite the claim of some philosophers, we aren't there yet. The slaughter bench of history looks very different today from the early 1960s, but it's still in some ways a slaughter bench. So how will the SPEP of the early twenty-first century look to the philosopher-historians of 2061—or is it 2062?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0102

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: In short, it is exposure to the experientially inspired and theoretically casual atmosphere of those early SPEP meetings—where neglected topics and unorthodox modes of thinking and speaking were encouraged in an undisciplined way—to which I owe the most. Of course, SPEP grew up. It has experienced its share of embarrassing upheavals, as the heavy presence of its own versions of the social and political prejudices in the larger culture became too obvious to ignore. But it is now a major event—the four-day anchor for a week-long convention that takes over hotels, runs multiple concurrent sessions, fosters satellite groups, and often follows established lines of discussion. Some even call it the alternative APA. Yet I am sure that as long as lifeworld experience continues to trump whatever it is currently fashionable to say about it, grown-up SPEP will retain enough of its original vitality and intellectual generosity so that another generation of aging academics will have cause to repeat our present thank-yous in another fifty years.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0108

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: Our plight, then, is not simply that we are all in the same boat, let alone on the same ocean. Yet we are still bound by the responsbility of inhabiting the same planet. What would it mean, then, to share the earth with all its inhabitants, not just in terms of occupying the same planet but also in terms of caring and looking after each other in the anachronistic sense of the word dutyas plight? Can we risk pledging to solemnly avow our own investments in the very things we so self-rightousely protest against, not in order to stop protesting in the name of justice but, rather, in the hopes of turning the killing machine back against itself and taking another step toward “hunting down” and abolishing death penalities wherever they may be hiding, even in our own disowned fears and desires?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0118

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: The point here is that whoever I am in terms of my personal identity and my capacity or incapacity to identify myself through sortal terms as a being in the world with others, I will have no doubt who is in pain or who will have the pain. Here, again, is a sense of “I” in which I can be aware of myself and refer to myself without it being necessary to employ any nonindexical or third-personal referents.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0222

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: No doubt the rise of religion has not only posed a particular dilemma for critical theory but also provided a curious place to end this reflection. Having started my career doing philosophy of religion it is somewhat surprising to meet religion again as I turn to what surely must be at least a later phase of my career. I am reminded of Antonio's line from the Italian film C'eravamo Tanto Amati, translated asWe All Loved Each Other So Much: “We thought we could change the world, but the world changed us.” “Philosophers only interpret the world, the point is to change it,” so said Marx. But in a curious way those who would change the world are changed by it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0291

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: In 1986, however, SPEP's present mission statement could not have been conceived. Many important issues and questions remained unrecognized or simply ignored. But the opening before the organization was now a “postmodern” one, and a hallmark of what is called postmodern thought is its requirement that it transform in the force of its own lack of founded stability. I believe that 1986 began a series of developments that is turning SPEP toward ways of thought and life that cannot be labeled postmodern. I doubt that this turning constitutes a midlife crisis for SPEP in its fiftieth year. But it does highlight for me the fact that I have been giving a historical narrative that has to do with continuities in the dissolution of continuities, that I have not been—if I may put it this way—postmodern in an orthodox manner, although I have refused to give an unambiguous meaning to the term that has played a major role in organizing this essay. I do not know whether this discussion is postmodern, post-postmodern, or modern, and I do not care. I do care, however, about the openings that SPEP has provided for collegiality, conflict, unresolved differences, transformations, and sites for presentations, discussion, and critique. In my experience, in its own organizational development and travail, it has occasioned changes in the lives of many philosophers (mine among them). I expect that its indeterminate opening now—its continuing transformations in the interaction of many differences—will continue to surprise, irritate, and change those of us who participate in its opportunities. I close with a sense of beginning and an acknowledgment of the strangeness of the continuity that a series of beginnings provides: continuity without substance, continuity coming to pass.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0299

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: I want to conclude with one more argument from my own work. I have very often argued that philosophers of technology, regarding the expectations of society and their own traditions and habits, may come “too late” to technologies. They too often undertake their reflections afterthe technologies are in place. Rather, I argue, they should reposition themselves at what I call the “R&D” position where technologies are taking developmental shape, in think tanks, in incubator facilities, in research centers. Only then can truly “new” and emerging technologies be fully philosophically engaged.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0321

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: We at SPEP have never been modern and have made a good living off the critique of modernism and of its binary oppositions. But I think that the business as usual of Continental philosophy will have to be expanded to include a critique of the opposition of the human and the nonhuman, of physisandtechne, and of “Continental philosophy” and “science.” For the truth is that we have been a party to the science wars. That is why I think that the work of Catherine Malabou is exactly the sort of work that SPEP and Continental philosophy generally will have to do in the future. We have yet to admit how deeply inscribed the human is in the nonhuman and the technical. We have yet to appreciate that being-in-the-world is not only historicized, gendered, and incarnate but also both a neural and a galactic event, of both microscopic and macroscopic proportions. Can it be of no interest to “philosophy,” can there be nothing to “wonder” about, that our bodies are literally made of stardust? We have yet to realize how deeply interwoven is the imagination of speculative physics with the wonder of the philosophers. If the best we can do is to protect our turf by saying that science does not think, the sciences will steal our thunder, that is, our wonder, right out from under us. Science does think, and science wonders, because wonder is the piety of thought. That is a matter to which SPEP, and Continental philosophers generally, whether they have taken a theological turn or are running in the opposite direction, should give more thought.36 37
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0333

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.28.3.issue-3
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): Steinbock Anthony
Abstract: The articles collected here represent the richness and diversity of philosophical work presented at SPEP and thus serve to vindicate Steinbock's vision, expressed in his Co-director's Address, of SPEP as an organization that is grounded in a fundamental openness to experience that leads it to continually push against its own limits and thus to reimagine itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.28.3.0213

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.28.3.issue-3
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): Davidson Scott
Abstract: For, if phenomenology renounces its search for the absolute and for foundations, then it must give up seeing itself as a single and self-contained discourse. The minimal phenomenologist renounces monolinguism and is no longer the master of only one discourse. Instead, he or she must practice a mixed discourse. To do this is to practice diglossia, to become a code-switcher. In its ordinary sense, the practice of code-switching refers to the passage from one language or dialect to another one in the course of a single conversation, for instance, when the conversation moves from an informal to a formal setting or when it moves from one topic to another. But in the phenomenological context, this would involve the ability to shift from a phenomenological discourse to its “others,” whether they might be Freudian energetics, Deleuzian aspects, Badiouan events, and so on. This practice of translation or code-switching has perhaps always been the role of the phenomenologist, if it is accepted that phenomenological reflection does not begin from itself but is nourished by a life that precedes it and gives rise to it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.28.3.0315

Journal Title: Philosophy & Rhetoric
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: philrhet.45.4.issue-4
Date: 12 1, 2012
Abstract: Adopting a hyperbolic perspective is also certainly a way to argue as well as a way to examine other “texts” because it is a trope and figure of thought that reveals those moments within discourse when one is attempting to transcend the bounds of reality because the extraordinary nature of a given situation or subject matter requires the use of an excessive prophetic voice or an ardent polemical exaggeration. As Mileur posits, “The work is a hyperbole, the intersection of other hyperboles, and the subject is, insofar as he can be written about at all, another hyperbole” (1990, 86). Rather than circumventing it, understanding hyperbole as the focus of thought and action can create significant moments of inventioas well aselocutiofor the hyperbolist and critic alike. By approaching a particular text, a critical term, and even a piece of criticism itself from a hyperbolic perspective, one might (re)consider and (re)interpret these “texts” as a stretching of discursive limits that leads one toward a re-presentation of the extraordinary—an attempt to communicate the ineffable or transgress the expressible.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/philrhet.45.4.0406

Journal Title: Philosophy & Rhetoric
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: philrhet.46.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 1998
Abstract: Second, how do we account for the fact that the processes of public memory are both created by individual choices and nurtured in collective contexts? Many scholars have productively addressed this question by unpacking specific examples in which individuals or groups vie to control public memories. The critical framework I recommend offers a more systematic approach to this issue. To view representations of the past through the nested lenses of rhetoric, public memory, and the agential spiral is to focus on how human beings—individually and in groups—forge connections with people of other times through the medium of public agency. The agential spiral, derived from my reading of Ricoeur's “threefold mimesis,” aims to pinpoint three moments in the construction of narratives in which human action is represented and reinterpreted within a temporal structure. As a critical framework, the agential spiral helps us to view the creation of public memories at three key moments and to see the process as a coiling whole. Using this tool, we can better understand why certain memories persist in certain societies and how those memories powerfully connect people across time as well as space.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/philrhet.46.2.0182

Journal Title: Shaw
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: shaw.34.1.issue-1
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): Wixson Christopher
Abstract: Chicagoan, 1 June 1934, 28. Courtesy of Quigley Publishing Company, a division of QP Media, Inc.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/shaw.34.1.0001

Journal Title: Shaw
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: shaw.34.1.issue-1
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): Einsohn Howard Ira
Abstract: Moreover, for Shaw and Ricoeur, imaginative works of art have the power to project alternative and potentially redemptive ways of living together harmoniously, which in turn can substantially change hearts, alter beliefs, and reorient behavior in an empathetic direction that promotes vigilant concern for the other. Be they biblical narratives, plays for the stage, fictions for the page, or other forms of literary texts broadly construed, stories can portray freedom and fault reconciled in compassionate beings committed to advancing the common good. In this way, poetic making can and has instilled in us not only faith and hope but magnanimity as well. Thus, the answer to the provocative question Shaw poses at the beginning of his last major treatise, Everybody's Political What's What?—“Is Human Nature Incurably Depraved?” —is a resounding no: not just for him but for Ricoeur, too. Where there is faith, there is hope; and where there is hope, there is life. Life expectant.55
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/shaw.34.1.0133

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: U of California P
Issue: style.34.issue-1
Date: 3 1, 1973
Author(s): Boren Mark Edelman
Abstract: To challenge an unexamined critical alignment with Ishmael's limited epistemology in Herman Melville's Moby-Dickshows how the placing of confidence in Ishmael as witness to Ahab's monomania leads to a misreading ofMoby-Dick. Ahab lies at the center of a highly developed epistemology that competes with and eludes the narrator's comprehension. The various trophies that appear throughout the text are manifest examples of this other-than-interpretive system of knowing, and Melville uses the act of possessing trophies, particularly the act of eating trophies, to show graphically how such a system works. In other words, Melville has developed a complex epistemological system of ingestion around Ahab to model how language can be materially invested with meaning and how that meaning is performed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.34.1.1

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: U of Wisconsin P
Issue: style.34.issue-1
Date: September 1, 1983
Author(s): Peters Joan Douglas
Abstract: It has been over ten years since anything significant has been published on D. H. Lawrence's critical prose, and nothing of note has ever been written on the subject of the short essays—“The Novel,” “Surgery for the novel—Or a Bomb,” “Morality and the Novel,” and “Why the novel Matters”—containing his theory of the novel. The rhetorical style Lawrence adopts is so informal, so comical, and often so bizarre that the impulse of critics, when they do refer to these essays, is to ignore the rhetoric and somehow extract a system of logocentric doctrine, a doctrine that does not bear scrutiny. To appreciate Lawrence's genre theory, one cannot ignore the style in which it is written but must instead focus on the dynamics of discourse comprising the rhetorical text. Grounding my reading in Bakhtin's carnival, I argue that Lawrence celebrates the novel in terms of its “joyful relativity” (Bakhtin's term), a theory that articulates itself performatively in different ways through its own deconstruction. Read deconstructively, Lawrence's genre theory offers an important contribution to modernist concepts of language, an area from which Lawrence has traditionally been entirely excluded.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.34.1.36

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Norton
Issue: style.34.issue-2
Date: January 16, 1972
Author(s): Matz Jesse
Abstract: Mauriceis a novel that waits for the future (for completion, publication, and audience) but also looks nostagically to the past. This strange temporal location reflects a temporality basic to Forster's narrative structures and sexual identity: like philosophers who presently ascribe to the “tenseless theory of time,” Forster dispels identity among a tenseless order of moments, in a narrative structure that seeks likewise to trade “becoming” for a better order. InMaurice, such tactics as iterative seriality, overdetermined prolepsis, nonephiphany, and other modes of “detensing” give form to a version of homosexuality that would escape “identity,” with unusual implications for moderist temporality and narratological criticism. Forster's modernist time is eccentric for its interest in logical order; and the narratological criticism which would attend to his “tenseless” homosexual form must remember that it is often the combination of subversion and order that encourages the best narratological advances.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.34.2.188

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Johns Hopkins UP
Issue: style.34.issue-2
Date: 6 1, 1987
Author(s): Carrard Philippe
Abstract: In the current rhetoric and epistemology of historiography, the issue is no longer to know whether narrative provides a legitimate mode of knowledge. It is to determine whether historians use narrative, and—if they do not—what alternative modes of discourse they may be employing. The examination of a specific corpus: studies published about the period of the German occupation in France, shows that historians now rely on different types of textual organization. While they still use at times a straight, linear type of narrative, they increasingly turn to genres that are low in narrativity or even devoid of it. Eschewing narrative, however, seems reserved for academic historians; story-telling still prevails in “popular” history. Furthermore, the classification offered here depends on a narrow definition of “narrative”; a more inclusive definition would admit more texts under the category “narrative,” thus producing a different taxonomy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.34.2.243

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Shocken
Issue: style.40.issue-4
Date: October 1, 1998
Author(s): Mikkonen Kai
Abstract: The recent pragmatic-contextual theory of fiction entails the possibility of changes between fact and fiction over the course of time. It is also perhaps commonplace to state that this process can be reversed—that fictional texts may cease to be fictional. The question of generic fiction-to-fact transition, however, is rarely confronted in the theory of fiction. This essay investigates the generic expectations attached to texts that make a full-scale transition from fiction to nonfiction difficult, both culturally and psychologically. “Fiction” is understood here in a limited, pragmatic sense of a work of fiction, a text known and categorized as fiction. The discussion is structured around five interrelated reasons that contribute to the difficulty: (1) the commonness of as-if structures in everyday life; (2) the generic combinations among literature, fiction, factual representation, and narrative; (3) the relative stability of the communal values and ways of checking facts that determine the categories of fiction and fact (the fact convention); (4) the popularity, in fiction, of metalepsis and the theme of transworld travel between different ontological spheres; (5) and the fictionalization of literature in the historical perspective.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.40.4.291

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Johns Hopkins UP
Issue: style.42.issue-4
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Mellard James M.
Abstract: The reviewer of the collection of essay called The Cambridge Companion to John Updike, edited by Stacey Olster, confesses that in the middle years of the career of John Updike, he lost interest in the author's novels for the paradoxical reasons that he felt they were either too predictable, seemingly too programmatic or too unpredictable, Updike pumping up a flagging imagination with an assortment ofoutréforms and subjects. But the reviewer rejoices that the predominantly fine essays in theCompanion—by scholars such as D. Quentin Miller, Sanford Pinsker, Edward Vargo, Donald J. Greiner, and John N. Duvall—renewed his interest in the works unread, prompted him to do much catching up, and left him wondering, more ruefully than ever, upon Updike's death in January of 2009 why the novelist had never won a highly deserved Nobel Prize for Literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.42.4.488

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Ohio State UP
Issue: style.45.issue-3
Date: Dec. 21, 2008
Author(s): Green Susan
Abstract: Drawing upon recent ideas from the cognitive sciences, this paper is an interdisciplinary exploration of the representation of consciousness in McEwan's novel Enduring Love, focussing on overlapping manifestations of Theory of Mind ranging from altruism to violent pathology. Through techniques such as intertextuality, the use of paratexts, and the juxtaposition of scientific and literary discourses, McEwan constructs this novel as a Theory of Mind creating a demanding and appealing reading experience that mirrors the doubt and uncertainty of the characters as they strive to understand each others' minds. McEwan's deep interest in science and what it can and cannot tell us about human nature is a potent theme inEnduring Love. This article argues thatEnduring Loveexposes and exploits the unique potential of literary narrative to represent our intense desire to engage with other minds, both highlighting the fact that we are designed by nature to read and to misread minds, as well as the capacity of the novel to communicate the raw feel of human experience in a way that eludes scientific discourse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.45.3.441

Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: utopianstudies.23.1.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: What is left unsaid in this article about the relationship between utopia and rhetoric could certainly fill the pages of many books. The range is especially rich when we turn to contemporary rhetorical theorists who specifically address society as a value to be combined with a remembered or imagined better place, as in Nedra Reynolds's Geographies of Writingor bell hooks'sBelonging: A Culture of Place. Just as constitutive rhetoric (that is, cumulative discourse that contributes to building the structure of human society) has been important in the works of theorists often cited by utopists as crucial to their work, so the utopian impulse continues to be inherent in the way rhetoricians see their subject. To persuade verbally or visually, we must have our own idea of what is socially better, and we must also be able to imagine what our audience believes to be better. The function of utopia, then, may be less philosophical and ideological at its root than it is linguistic in a pragmatic sense. As Kenneth Burke has written of human beings, we are “the symbol-making, symbol-using, symbol-misusing animal … rotten with perfection.”38 39
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/utopianstudies.23.1.0113

Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: utopianstudies.23.2.issue-2
Date: 10 1, 2012
Abstract: Milan Kundera has described this kind of comedy as echoing a joyous, life-affirming laughter—“the serious laughter of angels expressing their joy of being.” But that is not to suggest that there is anything divinely pious in this position: if Joyce is an angel, then he is one, like Stephen Dedalus, who will not blindly or uncritically serve.168 In commenting upon an earlier version of this article, Patrick Parrinder spoke of “the difficult relationship between Utopia and comedy.” This relationship is problematized by the fact that Utopia rarely seems able to laugh at itself or therefore to offer the liberating possibilities of comedy. Joyce's later writing, however, appears to advance the rare chance of a pluralist, ambiguous, and dynamic vision of Utopia: a Utopia that might be sustained into futurity—a Utopia that still has room for dreamers and for democrats. But is it still possible that we can call this realm of radical openness, this flux of possibilities, this resolutely material site, Utopian? And do we really need to? This kind of Utopia is not a category or a frame but a direction, a progress, a confluence of streams of consciousness and of unconsciousness, flowing into the river of life: not just a symbolic river but a real one too, the Liffey, the great Anna Livia Plurabelle herself. Or as Joyce put it, more succinctly (and more joyously), it is simply “Lff!”169 170
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/utopianstudies.23.2.0472

Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: utopianstudies.25.1.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2014
Abstract: It is in this sense that Utopia can be understood as lying before us—in both senses of this confounding double phrase. Utopia resides in the past (beforein this instance means “behind us”) inasmuch as any reconsideration of Utopia in the present must inevitably begin with the past. But if the sources of Utopia in the present reside in the past, realization is in the future (beforein this instance means “ahead of us”). It is this double valence that links the articles that make up this special issue. Some deal with historical figures, literature, or places, while others take up analogous considerations that are closer to us now. However, in each case, the future is what is at issue: What shape will it take? How might the circumstances of its emergence be as propitious as possible? These key questions suffuse all of the articles that follow and are of the greatest urgency to all disciplines but in particular for architecture and urbanism, which are burdened with providing the stage upon which we play out the drama of our lives, individually and collectively.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/utopianstudies.25.1.0001

Journal Title: American Journal of Theology and Philosophy
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Issue: amerjtheophil.35.2.issue-2
Date: 06 14, 2014
Author(s): Neville Robert Cummings
Abstract: Flush with the juices of adolescence, American philosophy declared independence from its European parentage in the work of Ralph Waldo Emerson and his generation. In 1837, Emerson addressed the Harvard Phi Beta Kappa Society on the occasion of its inaugural meeting for the year, which he called a "holiday." Emerson began: I greet you on the recommencement of our literary year. Our anniversary is one of hope, and, perhaps, not enough of labor. We do not meet for games of strength or skill, for the recitation of histories, tragedies, and odes, like the ancient Greeks; for parliaments of love and poesy, like the Troubadours; nor for the advancement of science, like our contemporaries in the British and European capitals. Thus far, our holiday has been simply a friendly sign of the survival of the love of letters amongst a people too busy to give letters any more. Perhaps the time is already come when it ought to be, and will be something else; when the sluggard intellect of this continent will look from under its iron lids and fill the postponed expectations of the world with something better than the expectations of mechanical skill. Our day of dependence, our long apprenticeship to the learning of other lands, draws to a close. The millions that around us are rushing into life, cannot always be fed on the sere remains of foreign harvests. Events, actions arise, that must be sung, that will sing themselves.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/amerjtheophil.35.2.0093

Journal Title: Bulletin of the American Schools of Oriental Research
Publisher: Biblical Archaeology Society
Issue: bullamerschoorie.issue-372
Date: 11 1, 2009
Abstract: In this paper, we present an analysis of an Iron Age I dwelling at the Phoenician site of Dor, on Israel's Carmel coast. We provide a definition for the architectural mental template for this type of house—a Central Courtyard Hash-Plan House. By combining an analysis of the size and layout of the house, and the distribution of artifacts and ecofacts in it, we define rooms devoted to specialized economic activities such as food production and storage and also attempt to identify gendered spaces. We conclude that the house was a self-contained agrarian unit engaged in complex economic activity. The same conceptual plan, housing similar economic activities, can be identified in other dwellings in the southern Levant, from Late Bronze Age I to Late Iron Age IIA. The gradual disappearance of this house type, vis-à-vis the emergence, on the one hand, of smaller and simpler dwellings such as the ubiquitous Four-Room House and, on the other, that of public facilities for specialized economic tasks, signifies to our minds a fundamental ideological and economic transformation, a change in the habitusof Levantine society—namely, the gradual segregation between households and various aspects of economic life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5615/bullamerschoorie.372.0039

Journal Title: Portuguese Studies
Publisher: Harvard University Press
Issue: portstudies.27.1.issue-1
Date: January 27, 1960
Abstract: Este artigo se inicia refletindo sobre as várias maneiras que Gilberto Freyre usou o conceito-chave de mestiçagem e os campos culturais diferentes aos quais ele estendeu o seu uso — arquitetura, culinária, esporte, literatura, urbanismo, sociologia e até mesmo sexo. Chamando a atenção para os conceitos ou metáforas alternativas que se encontram na obra de Freyre — interpenetração, mistura, hibridismo, etc. — o artigo se volta para a discussão de uma metáfora que Freyre não usou, apesar de ter se tornado usual desde sua época: tradução cultural. Após uma breve história da idéia de tradução cultural, que inclui uma discussão de suas vantagens e desvantagens, o artigo termina com um estudo de caso de tradução tanto metafórica como cultural do conceito ocidental de liberdade para o Japão após a restauração imperial de 1868.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5699/portstudies.27.1.0070

Journal Title: Shofar
Publisher: Harper
Issue: shofar.28.issue-3
Date: 4 1, 1962
Author(s): Knight Henry F.
Abstract: This essay places before the reader four historic texts that raise significant questions for Jews and Christians who choose to enter into post-Holocaust examination of their respective identities and their relationships to their grounding traditions. The Kristallnacht exhibit at the U.S. Holocaust Memorial Museum introduces museum visitors to the defaced Talmudic instruction of R. Eliezer— Know before whom you stand-which frames this essay. As with the story the museum recounts, more than texts are at stake in this essay, but the way forward is distinctly framed by their critical presence. In this case, the distinctive texts are faced in reconfiguring ways, asking those who face them to rethink the place of the other in their identities and life-orienting commitments. Early on, Samuel Bak's surrealistic rendering of a crucified, Jewish child provides a refracting image for exploring the questions these texts pose for post-Shoah people of faith who take their place before them, asking in recursive fashion: before whom do you stand?http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5703/shofar.28.3.116

Journal Title: Cultural Critique
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Issue: culturalcritique.86.issue-2014
Date: 1 1, 1996
Abstract: Examining Agamben's reception of Hannah Arendt, and especially The Human Condition, in his theorization of biopolitics, this essay argues thatHomo Sacer I, by identifying Arendt with a quasi-Straussian “political philosophy,” fails to acknowledge the complexity of her conception of history. Far from simply affirming the normative force of classical political categories, Arendt regards these as emerging from a living power of distinction that thinking, by showing the historical process that brings about the effacement of these distinctions, seeks to bring into view. Nevertheless, Arendt's conception of history is not without contradiction: while arguing that metaphysics went astray by subordinating praxis to poiesis, her very account of history suggests that this subordination is inevitable, since only a “poetic,” indeed violent, act of making a distinction can distinguish praxis from poiesis. Precisely this problem lies at the center of Agamben's early engagement with Arendt inThe Man without Content.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/culturalcritique.86.2014.0001

Journal Title: Cultural Critique
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: culturalcritique.86.issue-2014
Date: 1 1, 2006
Abstract: In contemporary Western culture, death is often made separate from life. The dying body is rendered invisible, even though sociocultural performances of death foreshadow and signify death and dying. This article challenges this signifying by arguing that death and dying are constituted performatively through the inscriptive surfaces of living, dying, and dead bodies, rendered visible by breath and breathing. The article begins by reflecting on the experience of witnessing the author's mentor's dying breath. Thinking through the dying breath, it then questions to what extent the separation of death from life is maintained by what is unspoken of the dying and dead body. Finally, the article considers the analytical implications of the argument for those who remain behind to grieve for, and remember, the dying bodies, and those to whom those bodies once belonged
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/culturalcritique.86.2014.0065